Meb Cof1 RFP and Specs

US Army
Corps
of Engineers
Fort Worth District
Request For
Proposal
Maneuver Enhancement Brigade (MEB)

Company Operation Facility (COF)
PN 64415, FY12
Fort Polk, Louisiana
W9126G-12-U-1002
December 2011
DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY
FORT WORTH DISTRICT, CORPS OF ENGINEERS
P. O. BOX 17300
FORT WORTH, TEXAS 76102-0300
REPLY TO
ATTENTION OF
December 16, 2011
Contracting Division
The Ross Group Construction Corp

W9126G-09-D-0101
1140 N 129th E Avenue
Tulsa, OK 74116-1724
Team:
Reference is made to your contract under the Small Business Set-Aside Indefinite Delivery/Indefinite
Quantity (IDIQ) Multiple Award Task Order Contract (MATOC) for Design-Build, Design-Bid-Build, and
Construction Services for SWF and SWD Southwestern Division.
Enclosed are the plans, specifications, appropriate contract sections and applicable wage rates for Task Order RFP:
W9126G-12-U-1002, Project Number: 064415, Company Operations Facility (COF), FY12, Fort Polk, LA
The magnitude of this requirement is estimated between $10,000,000 and $25,000,000. Offerors are under no
obligation to approach this ceiling. NAICS code is 236220
Proposals are due by 2:00 p.m. Central Standard Time on 31 January 2011. Offerors providing less than
90 calendar days for Government acceptance after the date offers are due will not be considered and will be
rejected.
Proposals shall be marked to show the firm’s name and address, the contract number, RFP Number, project
title, and the date and time offers are due. Offers shall be provided to:
U.S. Army Engineer District, Fort Worth,

ATTN: CESWF-CT (Mr. Robert M. Duran)
Post Office Box 17300 or 819 Taylor Street (2A19) (if using express mail)
Fort Worth, Texas 76102-0300
2
Site Visit – Projected Site Visit day and Time: January 11, 2011 at 13:00 pm
Point of Contact at Fort Polk, LA

Meet at: FORT POLK RESIDENT OFFICE
EASTERN AREA OFFICE Contact is Steve Sherrill at Phone: (337) 531.2933
4740 BLDG
2315 SERVICE COMMAND LOOP
FORT POLK LA 71459
Upon arriving at the Main Gate, Offerors must show ID, state where they are going, and who they are visiting.
To obtain a “day pass” you must have a driver’s license, vehicle registration, and valid insurance. You are strongly
encouraged to attend the site visit and take such other steps, as may be reasonably necessary, to ascertain the nature
and location of the work, and the general and local conditions, which may affect the work of cost thereof. Failure to
do so shall not relieve the Offeror from the responsibility for estimating properly the difficulty or cost of successfully
performing the work. The Government shall assume no conditions made by any of its officers or agents prior to the
execution of the task order, unless included in this Task Order Request for Proposal, the task order
specifications/drawings, or related documents. In this regard, Offerors should note FAR Clause 52.236-3 “Site
Investigations and Conditions Affecting the Work”.
Bonding Requirements – A bid guarantee is required in the amount of 20% of the proposed price. The task
order is required to be bonded for Performance and Payment within 5 days of task order award.
Wage Determination - Davis Bacon Act Wage decisions are applicable to this requirement. Wage
Determinations are available in the RFP.
Bidder Inquiry – All bidder questions shall be posted via Bidder Inquiry in ProjNet at
http://www.projnet.org/projnet The Bidder Inquiry Key is S73BCZ-95LJLK. All questions must be entered into the
Bidder Inquiry system no later than 24 January 2012 by close of the business day.
Liquidated Damages - Reference Section 00 73 10, Supplemental Contract Requirements, Clause 52.211-12,
Liquidated Damages.
Division 1 General Requirements – The Division 1 requirements that are not specified in the task order but are
specified in the contract documents are applicable to this work. Those items include, but are not limited to, project
meetings, schedules, design and construction quality control, environmental protection, temporary construction
facilities, utilities, safety requirements, recycling, Government-Furnished Property, survey and layout data,
construction and demolition waste management, warranties, and including sources for reference publications.
Security Requirement – The project site is on property that belongs to Fort Polk, Louisiana, and the contractors
shall comply with the Post’s security requirements and “Identification of Employees” as annotated under Section 00
73 10 of the contract.
Buy American Act – Construction Materials – Contract Clauses 52.225-9 and 52.225-10 are applicable to this
task order.
After award, the following items will be required of the successful offeror, in accordance with the task order schedule:
[X] Bonding Protection (Performance and Payment to support the bid amount, less the amount currently
available on the contract) – Within 5 days of Notice of Award
[X] Safety and Health Plan [X] Weekly Progress Report

[X] Quality Control Program [X] Equipment and Construction Warranties
[X] Site Survey [X] As-Built/In-Progress Drawings
[X] Pre-Construction Conference [X] As-Built Final Drawings
[X] Work Schedule
[X] Task Order Specific Requirements as identified in the task order Specifications/Drawings/Plans
Section: 00 11 00 W9126G-12-R-1002
Page 1 of 4
Fort Polk MEB COF

FY12, PN 64415
CONTRACT LINE ITEM SCHEDULE
Item Unit Line Item

No. Description Quantity Unit Price Amount
0001 Construction of Access Road Complete

exclusive of all other work listed seperately.
See 01 00 00.00 44 Construction Schedule
1 LS $ *** $
0002 Construction of the Company Operation

Facilities building(s), complete,
including site work and utilities to the 5-
foot line(s), and exclusive of all other
work listed separately.
1 LS $ *** $
0003 Construction of all Exterior Work

outside the building(s)'s 5-foot line(s)
(Including earthwork, utilities, paving,
sidewalks, curbs and gutters, screen
walls, turfing, landscaping,and all other
work not listed separately)
1 LS $ *** $
0004 Operation and Maintenance Manuals 1 LS *** $
0005 Final Record As-Built Drawings 1 LS *** $
TOTAL BASE OFFER $

Section: 00 11 00 W9126G-12-R-1002
Page 2 of 4
Fort Polk MEB COF

FY12, PN 64415
Item Unit Line Item

No. Description Quantity Unit Price Amount
OPTIONS
0006 Formally change building from "LEED

Certifiable" to "LEED Certified" at Silver or
higher. Formally certify the building
through Green Building Certification
Institute (GBCI) and install a U.S. Green
Building Council (USGBC) LEED-NC
Silver (or higher) plaque on the building's
entrance at completion of the project.
1 LS $ *** $
TOTAL OPTIONS $
TOTAL OFFER (BASE + OPTIONS) $
Contract Duration in Calendar Days

After the Notice to Proceed is received.*
DAYS
*Note: Contract duration for all work shall

NOT exceed the duration specified in
Section 00 73 10 SUPPLEMENTAL
CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS. See Note
No. 11.
Section: 00 11 00 W9126G-12-R-1002
Page 3 of 4
Fort Polk MEB COF

FY12, PN 64415
NOTES:
NOTE NO. 1. To better facilitate the receipt and proposal process, all modifications to proposals are to be
submitted on copies of the latest Contract Line Item (CLIN) schedules as published in the solicitation or the latest
amendment thereto. In lieu of indicating additions/deductions to line items, all Offerors should state their revised
prices for each item.
NOTE NO. 2. Offerors must insert a price on all numbered items of the CLIN Schedule. Failure to do so may
result in the offer being unacceptable
NOTE NO. 3. Not Used.
NOTE NO. 4. CONDITIONS GOVERNING EVALUATION OF OFFERS AND AWARD OF CONTRACTS:

The Government may require the delivery of the numbered line items, identified in the schedule as option items, in
the quantity and at the price stated in the schedule. Subject to the availability of funds, the Contracting Officer may
exercise the option by written notice to the Contractor within the time indicated below from the [Task Order] Notice
to Proceed
NOTE NO. 5. All the extensions of the unit prices shown will be subject to verification by the Government. In case of
variation between the unit price and the extension, the unit price will be considered to be the offer.
NOTE NO. 7. Not Used
NOTE NO. 11. The Offeror shall propose a total integrated contract duration in number of calendar days after the
Notice to Proceed (NTP) is received by the Contractor, whether via electronic means or hard copy, whichever is the
earliest method of delivery. The total number of proposed calendar days for design and construction through
completion, ready for turnover shall not exceed the number of calendar days specified in Section 00 73 10
Supplemental Contract Requirements. The proposed duration shall become the required contract duration. The
Government may issue the NTP via e-mail or Facsimile (FAX) or by other means. Day number 1 is the day after the
date of receipt of the NTP.
NOTE NO. 12. At the option of the Government, the Government may require the Contractor to perform the
work identified as Optional line item(s) at the price(s) stated in the CLIN Schedule. The Contracting Officer may
exercise one or more of the Option(s) by written notice to the Contractor within 30 calendar days after the date of
the acknowledgment of the [Task Order] Notice to Proceed by the Contractor. There is no separate completion
period for these option(s) and the work included therein shall be completed within the contract duration as
Section: 00 11 00 W9126G-12-R-1002
Page 4 of 4
Fort Polk MEB COF

FY12, PN 64415
proposed above. Exercise of the Option(s) shall be evidenced on Standard Form 30, citing this CLIN Schedule
note as the authority for exercising the Option. The Option shall be deemed exercised at the time the Government
deposits the SF30 in the mail or, if earlier, at the time it is delivered to the Contractor.
NOTE NO. 13. 52.217-5 EVALUATION OF OPTIONS (JUL 1990)
(a) Except when it is determined in accordance with FAR 17.206(b) not to be in the Government's best interests,
the Government will evaluate offers for award purposes by adding the total price for all options to the total price
for the basic requirement. Evaluation of options will not obligate the Government to exercise the option(s).
(b) The Government may reject an offer as nonresponsive if it is materially unbalanced as to prices for the basic
requirement and the option quantities. An offer is unbalanced when it is based on prices significantly less than
cost for some work and prices which are significantly overstated for other work.
NOTE NO. 14. Responders are advised that this requirement may be delayed, cancelled or revised at any time
during the solicitation, selection, evaluation, negotiation and/or final award process based on decisions related to
DOD changes in force structure and disposition of the Armed Forces.
NOTE NO. 15. The Army will procure this facility through a design and cost competition in accordance with the
provisions set forth in this Request for Proposals (RFP). When the task order is awarded, it will be a "Firm Fixed
Price Contract."
NOTE NO. 16. Any proposal that is materially unbalanced as to prices for the Base Schedule may be rjected. An
unbalanced proposal is one that is based on prices significantly less than the cost for some work and prices that
are significantly overstated for other work and can also exist where only overpricing or underpricing exists.
NOTE NO. 17. ABBREVIATIONS
For the purpose of this solicitation, the units of measure are represented as follows:
a. LS (lump sum)
END OF CLIN SCHEDULE

7
SECTION 00 22 11
LOW PRICED TECHNICALLY ACCEPTABLE (LPTA)
PROPOSAL PREPARATION
W9126G-12-U-1002
PN 69745B, Benning Basic Training (BT)
Barracks Complex Ph 3- CIF
PART I – GENERAL INFORMATION
1. INQUIRIES
OFFEROR'S QUESTIONS AND COMMENTS

Questions and/or comments relative to these documents should be submitted via e-mail or mailed to:
Contract Specialist – Primary POC

U.S. Army Corps of Engineers, Fort Worth District
ATTN: CESFW-CT -COS (Robert M. "Mike" Duran)
819 Taylor Street, Room 2A19/P.O. Box 17300
Fort Worth, TX 76102-0300
Phone: 817/886-1070 Fax: 817/886-6407 Email: robert.m.duran@usace.army.mil
Bidder Inquiry
Technical inquiries and questions relating to proposal procedures or bonds are to be submitted via:
Bidder Inquiry in ProjNet at http://www.projnet.org/projnet
To submit and review bid inquiry items, bidders will need to be a current registered user or self-register into
system. To self-register go to web page, click BID tab select Bidder Inquiry, select agency USACE, enter Key for
this solicitation listed below, and your e-mail address, click login. Fill in all required information and click create
user. Verify that information on next screen is correct and click continues.
From this page you may view all bidder inquiries or add inquiry.
Bidders will receive an acknowledgement of their question via email, followed by an answer to
their question after it has been processed by our technical team.
The Solicitation Number is: W9126G-12-U-1002

The Bidder Inquiry Key is: S73BCZ-95LJLK
The Bidder Inquiry System will be unavailable for new inquires 5 days prior to proposal submission in
order to ensure adequate time is allotted to form an appropriate response and amend the solicitation, if
necessary.
Offerors are requested to review the specification in its entirety, review the Bidder Inquiry System for
answers to questions prior to submission of a new inquiry.
The call center operates weekdays from 8AM to 5PM U.S. Central Time Zone (Chicago). The telephone
number for the Call Center is 800-428-HELP.
Identify other method required: None
Offers will NOT be publicly opened. Information concerning the status of the evaluation and/or award will
8
NOT be available after receipt of proposals.
Oral explanations or instructions are not binding. Any information given to an offeror which impacts the
solicitation and/or offer will be given in the form of a written amendment to the solicitation.
As this is a competitive negotiation acquisition, there is no public bid opening and no information will be
given out as to the number of offerors or the results of the competition until all awards are made.
2. DIRECTIONS FOR SUBMITTING PROPOSALS
a. In an effort to reduce paperwork and reduce cost, all proposals shall be submitted electronically. All
submissions should be in Adobe PDF format. The Price Proposal and Technical Proposal shall be
submitted as “separate” single files. Offerors may use compressions utility software such as WinZip or
PKZip to reduce file size and facilitate transmission.
Title the file(s) in the following format:
W9126G-12-U-1003_COMPANY NAME_PRICE
W9126G-12-U-1003_COMPANY NAME_TECHNICAL
Submit the Price and Technical proposals electronically via the AMRDEC SAFE website at:
https://safe.amrdec.army.mil/SAFE2/Welcome.aspx. At the AMRDEC SAFE website select the link: I
do not have a CAC or this machine is not configured to read my CAC and I would like to access SAFE as a
Guest User, to register, access the site and submit your proposal(s). When completing the information for
transmittal at the AMRDEC SAFE website, notification should be submitted to: Robert M. Duran, email:
robert.m.duran@usace.army.mil ; and, email: derek.a.gadberry@usace.army.mil.
Special Instruction Pertaining to Hand Carried Offers: Hand-carried offers must be delivered to the
USACE Office at the address above. Offerors who desire to hand-deliver their offers must notify the
Contract Specialist in advance due to security requirements. No Paper copies of proposals will be
accepted! CD Offers must be in sealed envelopes/packages, marked and addressed as follows:
MARK PACKAGES AND CD DISC:

Solicitation No.: W9126G-12-U-1003
Offer Closing Date: 01/31/2012
Offer Closing Time: 2:00 PM (CENTRAL STANDARD TIME)
ADDRESS PACKAGES TO:

U.S. Army Corps of Engineers (USACE), Fort Worth District
Attention: CESWF-CT - COS (Robert M. "Mike" Duran )
819 Taylor Street, Room 2A19/P.O. Box 17300
Fort Worth, TX 76102-0300
b. OFFERS BY TELEGRAPH. Offers received by telegraph, modifications thereto, or cancellations of

offers will or will not be accepted.
c. FACSIMILE OFFERS. Facsimile offers, modifications thereto, or cancellations of offers will or

will not be accepted.
d. E MAIL OFFERS. Offers received by e mail, modifications thereto, or cancellations of offers

will or will not be accepted.
9
3. PREPROPOSAL CONFERENCE / SITE VISIT
SITE VISIT: See Specification Section – Site Visit
IMPORTANT NOTES: (1) Remarks and explanations addressed during the conference shall not qualify
or alter the terms and conditions of the solicitation. (2) The terms and conditions of the solicitation remain
unchanged unless the solicitation is formally amended in writing.
PART II -- PROPOSAL INSTRUCTIONS
1. PROPOSAL SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS AND INSTRUCTIONS
a. REQUIREMENT FOR SEPARATE PRICE AND TECHNICAL PROPOSALS.
(1) Each Offeror must submit both a Price Proposal and a Technical Proposal electronically. The
Price Proposal and the Technical Proposal must be submitted as separate volumes/files. If submitted via
CD, ensure that the outside of each separate volume is clearly marked to indicate its contents and the
identity of the offeror. Additionally, clearly identify the cost/price proposal and the technical proposal on
the outside cover.
(2) Both the Price Proposal and the Technical Proposal must be received by the closing date and
time set for receipt of proposals.
(3) No dollar amounts from the Price Proposal are to be included in the Technical Proposal.
(4) All information intended to be evaluated as part of the Technical Proposal must be submitted
as part of the Technical Proposal. Do not merely cross-reference similar material in the Price Proposal, or
vice versa. Also, do not include links to websites in lieu of incorporating information into your proposal.
(5) Do not include exceptions to the terms and conditions of the solicitation in either the technical
or price proposal. Should the offer include any standard company terms and conditions that conflict with
the terms and conditions of the solicitation, the offer may be determined "unacceptable" and thus ineligible
for award. Should the offeror have any questions related to specific terms and conditions, these should be
resolved prior to submission of the offer.
b. DISCUSSIONS. The Government does not intend to enter into discussions with offerors prior to
determining those contractors within the competitive range, in accordance with FAR 52.215-1, Instructions
to Offerors—Competitive Acquisitions.
c. COST OR PRICING DATA. Offerors are not required to submit Cost or Pricing Data with their
offers.
d. GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS.
(1) Submit only the electronic-documents. Submit only the electronic files specifically authorized
and/or required elsewhere in this section. Do not submit excess information, to include audio-visual
materials, electronic media, etc. All pages should be numbered.
(2) PDF pages should be formatted to print on 8 ½ by 11 inch paper size, unless another paper size
is specifically authorized elsewhere in this section for a particular submission. Spreadsheets must fit to
(e.g., 11” x 14” or 11” x 17” sheets) unless specifically authorized in this section for a particular
submission. Do not use a font size smaller than 10, an unusual font style such as script, or condensed print
for any submission. All page margins must be at least 1 inch wide, but may include headers and footers of
the solicitation, project title and company.
10
(3) Hard copies will not be submitted.
(4) “Confidential” projects cannot be submitted to demonstrate capability unless all of the
information required for evaluation as specified herein can be provided to the Government as part of the
Offeror’s technical proposal. Offerors that include in their proposals information that they do not want
disclosed to the public for any purpose, or used by the Government except for evaluation purposes, must be
clearly marked in accordance with the instructions at FAR 52.215-1, “Instructions to Offerors—
Competitive Acquisition”, paragraph (e), “Restriction on disclosure and use of data”.
(5) In the case of an Offeror that is part of a large, multi-segmented business concern, provide
information directly pertaining to the specific segment of the business concern (i.e., the division, group,
unit, etc.) that will perform work under the prospective contract.
(6) For submissions with page limitations, the pages will be counted as follows: One side of the
paper is one page; information on both the back and front of one sheet of paper will be counted as two
pages. Where authorized, fold-out pages (11" x 14" or 11" x 17") will count as one page. Pages furnished
for organizational purposes only, such as a “Table of Contents” or divider tabs, are not included in the page
limitation.
(7) Proposal revisions shall be submitted as page replacements with revised text readily
identifiable, e.g., bold face print or underlining. The source of the revision, e.g., Error, Omission, or
Clarification, or amendment shall be included and be annotated for each revision. Proposal replacement
pages shall be numbered, shall be clearly marked “REVISED”, shall show the date of revision, shall be
submitted in appropriate number of copies (e.g., if two (2) copies of the original page was required, then
two (2) copies of the revised page will also be required, and shall be a different color than the original
pages they are to replace).
(8): Within three (3) days of contract award, the awardee shall submit a conformed Technical
Offer on an electronic CD Rom or DVD +/-R.
e. SPECIFIC INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE PRICE PROPOSAL
(1) Submit the price proposal as one separate PDF file titled:
W9126G-12-U-1003_COMPANY NAME_PRICE
(2) Size Restrictions and Page Limits. Use only 8 ½” x 11” pages in PDF format. There are
no page limits set for the price proposal. However, limit your response to information
required by this solicitation. Excess information will not be considered in the
Government’s evaluation. Technical pages are limited to: See (f) (3). Electronic
documents must meet page sizes in case documents require printed.
(3) Document File, CD and Package Labeling.
a. Example: [W9126G-12-U-1003_CompanyName_Price or Technical]

b. Clearly identify file as Price Proposal.
c. Clearly identify file as Technical Proposal
(3) Format and Contents of the Price Proposal and List of Tabs. The Price Proposal shall be
appropriately labeled as such and shall be organized as indicated in the following chart. Note: If the
Offeror is not required to submit any information under a listed Tab in accordance with the instructions
below, that tab can be omitted. However, do not renumber the subsequent tabs.
11
TAB CONTENTS OF THE PRICE PROPOSAL
#1 The Proposal Cover Sheet
#2 The SF1442 and Acknowledgement of Amendments
#3 Section 00 11 00, Pricing Schedule
#4 Section 00 45 00, Representations, Certifications, and Other Statements

of Offerors or Clause 52.204-8 if offeror has electronic certifications in ORCA
#5 JV Agreement or Articles of Organization for LLC, if applicable.
#6 Bid Guarantee (Bid Bond)
(4) Detailed Submission Instructions for the Price Proposal
TAB 1: The proposal cover sheet is required by FAR 52.215-1(2) (c) (i)-(v) and must be
submitted by all offerors. This provision, titled “Instructions to Offerors—Competitive Acquisition,” and
the format for the proposal cover sheet as shown here:
PROPOSAL COVER SHEET

1. Solicitation Number:
2. The name, address, and telephone and facsimile numbers of the Offeror
(and electronic address if available):
3. A statement specifying the extent of agreement with all terms, conditions, and
provisions included in the solicitation and agreement to furnish any or all items upon
which prices are offered at the price set opposite each item:
4. Names, titles, and telephone and facsimile numbers (and electronic addresses if
available) of persons authorized to negotiate on the Offeror’s behalf with the Government
in connection with this solicitation:
5. Name, title, and signature of person authorized to sign the proposal. Proposals signed
by an agent shall be accompanied by evidence of that agent’s authority, unless that
evidence has been previously furnished to the issuing office.
TAB 2: The SF 1442, Solicitation, Offer, and Award is to be completed by all Offerors and
duly executed with an original signature by an official authorized to bind the company in accordance with
FAR 4.102. All amendments must be acknowledged by all Offerors in accordance with the instructions on
the Standard Form 30, Amendment of Solicitation.
TAB 3: Section 00 11 00, Pricing Schedule is to be completed in its entirety by all Offerors.
See Section 00 11 00 with attached notes, for further instructions.
TAB 4: All Offerors must have electronically completed the annual representations and
certifications on the “Online Representations and Certifications Application” (ORCA) website or respond
12
with the completed representations / certifications found in the solicitation.. The offerors are responsible
for ensuring that these on-line Representations and Certifications are updated as necessary to reflect
changes, but at least annually to ensure that they are kept current, accurate and complete. Additionally, the
offeror must also complete and return the “Representations, Certifications, and Other Statements of
Offerors” included in the solicitation. If the offeror is a Joint Venture, all participants must separately
complete both the ORCA Representations and Certifications.
TAB 5: If the Offeror is a Joint Venture (JV), include a copy of the JV Agreement. If a JV
Agreement has not yet been finalized / approved, indicate its status. JV Agreements must clearly indicate
the percentages of the JV participants, in particular the percent of the controlling party, and a clear
delineation of responsibilities and authorities between the JV parties.
If the Offeror is a Limited Liability Company, include a copy of the Articles of

Organization.
TAB 6: Provide a fully executed Bid Bond as required by FAR Clause 52.228-1(c), Bid
Guarantee.
f. SPECIFIC INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE TECHNICAL PROPOSAL
(1) Technical Proposal. Submit an original electronic document of the Technical Proposal.
Submit one Original Technical CD.
(2) Format and Contents of the Technical Proposal and List of Tabs. The original and all copies of
the technical proposal will be appropriately labeled as such. Each set shall be organized using the tabs
specified in the following chart.
TAB CONTENTS OF THE TECHNICAL

PROPOSAL
Tab 1, Factor #1 EXPERIENCE
Tab 2, Factor #2 PERSONNEL
Tab 3, Factor #3
PAST PERFORMANCE
Tab 4, Factor #4
CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
(3) Page Limitations. The following page limitations are established for each factor described
above:
Factor #1, Experience - Limited to 5 pages (a maximum of 5 forms)
Factor #2, Personnel - Limited to 1 page for each resume provided
Factor #3, Past Performance - No page limitation
Factor #4, Construction Schedule - No page limitation
13
Tables of content, proposal cover letters, and tabs between proposal information do not count toward any
page limitations in the proposal.
(4) Detailed Submission Requirements for the Technical Proposal. Refer to attachment numbers 1
through 6 for a detailed description of the information to be submitted under each TAB.
Part III. EVALUATION OF OFFEROR PROPOSALS
1. ELIGIBILITY FOR CONTRACT AWARD. In accordance with the FAR, no contract shall be
entered into unless the contracting officer ensures that all requirements of law, executive orders,
regulations, and all other applicable procedures, including clearances and approvals, have been met. This
includes the FAR requirement that no award shall be made unless the contracting officer makes an
affirmative determination of responsibility. To be determined responsible, a prospective contractor must
meet the general standards in FAR Part 9 and any special standards set forth in the solicitation.
2. SOURCE SELECTION USING THE LOW-PRICED, TECHNICALLY ACCEPTABLE

PROCESS. An evaluation for acceptability will be performance on each proposal in accordance with FAR
15.101-2(b)(3). The proposal that provides the lowest price and is otherwise technically acceptable in all
factors will be selected for award. To be considered technically acceptable, no technical factor in the
proposal may be determined to be unacceptable. The failure of a proposal to meet any of the acceptability
standards for non-cost factors will result in a technically unacceptable rating and preclude award.
3. BASIS OF AWARD. Award will be made on the basis of the lowest evaluated price of technically
acceptable proposals meeting or exceeding the acceptability standards for non-cost factors. Tradeoffs will
not be permitted. Proposals are evaluated for acceptability but not ranked using non-cost/price factors.
4. EVALUATION OF THE PRICE PROPOSALS
a. Price will be evaluated and considered but will not be scored or combined with other aspects of the
proposal evaluation. The proposed prices will be analyzed for reasonableness. They may also be analyzed
to determine whether they are realistic for the work to be performed, reflect a clear understanding of the
requirements, and are consistent with the information provided by the Offeror. Additionally, all offers will
be analyzed for unbalanced pricing.
b. The otherwise technically-acceptable, lowest-priced offeror may be required to confirm its price on
either a, CLIN, element, or total price basis, and/or provide additional information in support of their price,
prior to contract award at the Government’s request and discretion.
5. INTENT TO AWARD WITHOUT DISCUSSIONS
The Government intends to evaluate proposals and award a contract without discussions. Offerors are
reminded to include their best technical and price terms in their initial offer and not to automatically
assume that they will have an opportunity to participate in discussions or be asked to submit a revised offer.
The Government may make award of a conforming proposal without discussions, if deemed to be within
the best interests of the Government.
14
6. PROPOSAL EXPENSE AND PRE-AWARD COSTS
The Request for Proposal does not commit the Government to pay any costs incurred in the preparation
and submission of the initial and/or any subsequent proposals.
7. EVALUATION OF THE TECHNICAL PROPOSAL
The Technical Proposal will be evaluated based on the criteria identified in the individual attachments
for the Factors.
8. GENERAL TECHNICAL CRITERIA
a. Material omission(s) may cause the technical proposal to be rejected as unacceptable.
b. Proposals which are generic, vague, or lacking in detail may be considered unacceptable. The
offeror’s failure to include information that the Government has indicated should be included in the
proposal may result in the offer being found deficient.
c. The Government cannot make award based on a deficient offer. Therefore, receipt of a
“UNACCEPTABLE” determination of acceptability for any factor will make the offer ineligible for award,
unless the Government elects to enter into discussions with that Offeror and all deficiencies are remedied in
a revised proposal.
d. Past Performance. Offerors with no relevant past performance information or for whom information
on past performance is not available or so sparse that no meaningful past performance rating can be
reasonably assigned will receive a “Unknown” rating for this factor. In accordance with FAR 15.305 (iv) In
the case of an offeror without a record of relevant past performance or for whom information on past
performance is not available, the offeror may not be evaluated favorably or unfavorably on past
performance. Therefore, an Offeror receiving a “Unknown” rating may not be evaluated favorably or
unfavorably on past performance. In the context of acceptability/unacceptability, "Unknown" shall be
considered "Acceptable".
8. 52.217-5 EVALUATION OF OPTIONS
Except when it is determined in accordance with FAR 17.206(b) not to be in the Government's best
interests, the Government will evaluate offers for award purposes by adding the total price for all options to
the total price for the basic requirement. Evaluation of options will not obligate the Government to exercise
the option(s).
15
ATTACHMENT A
TAB 1: FACTOR #1, EXPERIENCE: Demonstrate the experience of the offeror and/or proposed team,
including subcontractors, on projects same/similar to that described in the solicitation for same/similar
services. The projects submitted should also demonstrate that the offeror and/or the team have performed a
same/similar type of services at multiple sites simultaneously.
The Contractor shall complete a minimum of three (3), but no more than five (5), “Experience Information”
forms, (See attachment #2), in response to this factor. All blocks must be filled in and all data should be
accurate, current, and complete. All projects submitted must be at least 50% complete and completed
within the last 5 years. At least two (2) of the projects provided must be valued at over $5,000,000.00.
If any of the information required is not included in the form then the contractor will be considered non-
responsive and evaluated as unacceptable.
(SEE EXPERIENCE INFORMATION FORM IN ATTACHMENT 2)
FACTOR 1: EXPERIENCE WILL BE EVALUATED BASED ON THE FOLLOWING

CRITERIA:
The Government will review the project experience of the offeror, including subcontractors, on projects
provided in response to the Experience Factor. Offerors must meet all of the following minimum
acceptability standards to receive an “ACCEPTABLE” on this factor:
(1) Offeror must have at least three (3) projects that are same/similar to that of the work found in this
solicitation; AND
(2) At least two (2) of the projects submitted must be valued at over $8,000,000.00, and they must have
been at least 50% complete within the last 5 years.
Failure to demonstrate the minimally acceptability standards under this factor will result in an
“UNACCEPTABLE” rating and possible elimination from further consideration for contract award.
16
ATTACHMENT B
W9126G-12-U-1002
Project Number: 064415, Company Operations Facility (COF),
FY12, Fort Polk, LA
EXPERIENCE INFORMATION
(To be completed by Contractor)
1. Contractor: 2. Contract /Task Order(TO) /Purchase Order (PO)
Name: Number:
Address:
3. Contract/TO/PO Dollar Value:
4. Contract/TO /PO Status: Active Complete
Completion Date (w/ extensions):__________________

5. Project Title:
Location: ___________________________________________________________________
6. Project Description-- to include the role of the contractor on the project and specific
responsibilities of the contractor in performance of the effort:
7. Project Owner or Project Manager for the Client – provide:
Name:
Address:
Telephone Number and E-mail:

17
ATTACHMENT C
TAB 2: FACTOR 2, PERSONNEL: The offeror must provide resume data for the following key personnel:
Project Manager, Safety Officer, Quality Control Manager, and Site Superintendent. The Offeror may also include
resume data for other personnel that the offeror considers key.
Resume information to be provided shall be limited to no more than one (1) page per person and shall include the
following information as a minimum:
(a) Name and title

(b) Project assignment
(c) Name of firm with which associated
(d) Years experience with this firm and with other firms
(e) Active professional registration, year first registered, if applicable
(f) Other experience and qualifications relevant to same/similar work required under this contract
(g) Education: degree(s), year, specialization, if applicable
FACTOR 2: PERSONNEL WILL BE EVALUATED BASED ON THE FOLLOWING CRITERIA:
The Government will review the resumes provided in response to the Personnel Factor. Offerors must demonstrate all
of the following minimum acceptability standards to receive an “ACCEPTABLE” on this factor.
The offeror must demonstrate in all resumes that the key personnel proposed have:
(1) a minimum of five (5) years of specialized experience in their field; AND
(2) experience on projects same/similar to the work in this solicitation working in the position they are assigned to
under this contract.
(3) a degree in the field of work governed by the position they are assigned to. This applies to the Project Manager,
Safety Officer, and the Quality Control Manager.
Failure to demonstrate the minimally acceptability standards under this factor will result in a “UNACCEPTABLE”
rating and possible elimination from further consideration for contract award.
18
ATTACHMENT D
TAB 3: FACTOR 3, PAST PERFORMANCE: The Past Performance Questionnaire included in the solicitation
(Attachment 5) is provided for the offeror or its team members to submit to the client for each project the offeror
included in its proposal for Factor: #3, Past Performance. Ensure correct phone numbers and email addresses are
provided for the client point of contact. Completed Past Performance Questionnaires (PPQ) should be submitted with
your proposal. If the offeror is unable to obtain a completed PPQ from a client for a project(s) before proposal closing
date, the offeror should complete and submit with the proposal the first page of the PPQ (Attachment #5), which will
provide contract and client information for the respective project(s). Offerors should follow-up with clients/references
to ensure timely submittal of questionnaires. If any negative past performance information is received, the contractor
will be given an opportunity to provide rebuttal. If the client request, questionnaires may be submitted directly to the
Government’s point of contact, Robert M. Duran, via email at: Robert.M.Duran@usace.army.mil prior to proposal
closing date. Offerors shall not incorporate by reference into their proposals PPQ’s previously submitted for other
RFPs. However, this does not preclude the Government from utilizing previously submitted PPQ information in the
past performance evaluation.
Also include performance recognition documents received within the last five (5) years such as awards, award fee
determinations, customer letters of commendation, and any other forms of performance recognition.
In addition to the above, the Government may review any other sources of information for evaluation past
performance. Other sources may include, but are not limited to, past performance information retrieved through the
Past Performance Information Retrieval System (PPIRS), including Contractor Performance Assessment Reporting
System (CPARS), using all CAGE/DUNS number of team members (Partnership, joint venture, teaming arrangement,
or parent company/subsidiary/affiliate) identified in the offeror’s proposal, inquires of owner representative(s),
Federal Awardees Performance and Integrity Information System (FAPIIS), Electronic Subcontract Reporting System
(eSRS), and any other known sources not provided by the offeror.
While the Government may elect to consider data from other sources, the burden of providing detailed, current,
accurate and complete past performance information rest with the Offeror.
New entities that have no past customers shall notify the KO in writing, prior to the date and time established for the
Solicitation or Request for Proposal closing, that they have had no previous clients and that the minimum number of
questionnaires cannot be provided; It is the contractor’s responsibility to ensure that the reference documentation is
provided and accurate, as the Government may not make additional requests for past performance information from
the references.
The Government will review all CPARS, ACASS, CCASS and the Government wide Past Performance Information
Retrieval System (PPIRS) evaluations regardless of project and past performance questionnaires for projects
submitted under the Factor for Experience. The Government may contact points of contacts listed on the “Experience
Information” forms submitted.
19
FACTOR 3: PAST PERFORMANCE WILL BE EVALUATED BASED ON THE FOLLOWING CRITERIA:
Each contractor shall provide at least three (3) and no more than five (5) past performance ratings. Any rating an
offeror has in ACASS, CCASS, CPARS and PPIRS will count toward this requirement. The offeror is responsible
for ensuring that the Contracting Officer has received a minimum of three (3) questionnaires prior to that date/time or
has provided written notification to the Contracting Officer that they have current ratings in ACASS, CCASS, CPARS
and PPIRS.
All past or current references must have overall ratings of satisfactory or above in order to receive an
“ACCEPTABLE” rating.
In accordance with FAR 15.101-2(b)(1), if the Contracting Officer determines that a small business' past performance
is not acceptable, the matter is referred to the Small Business Administration for a Contracting Officer’s Compliance
determination.
In accordance with FAR 15.305 (iv), in the case of an offeror without a record of relevant past performance or for
whom information on past performance is not available, the offeror may not be evaluated favorably or unfavorably on
past performance. Offerors with no past performance information will receive an “Unknown” rating for this factor.
Failure to demonstrate the minimally acceptable criteria under this factor will result in a “UNACCEPTABLE” rating
and elimination from further consideration for contract award.
20
ATTACHMENT E
W9126G-12-U-1002
FY12, Fort Polk, LA
USACE PAST PERFORMANCE QUESTIONNAIRE (Form PPQ-0)

CONTRACT INFORMATION (Contractor to complete Blocks 1-4)
1. Contractor Information:
Firm Name:
Address:
Phone Number:
Point of Contact: Contact Phone Number:
2. Work Performed as: Prime Contractor Sub Contractor Joint Venture Other (Explain)
Percent of project work performed:

If subcontractor, who was prime (Name/Phone #):
3. Contract Information
Contract Number:
Delivery/Task Order Number (if applicable):
Title:
Location:
Award Date (mm/dd/yy):

Completion Date (mm/dd/yy):
Award Amount:
Final Price:
4. Project Description:
CLIENT INFORMATION (Client to complete Blocks 5-8)

5. Client Information
Name:
Title:
Phone Number:
Email Address:
6. Describe the client’s role in the project:
7. Date Questionnaire was completed:
8. Client’s Signature:
NOTE: IAW: Procurement Instruction Letter: (PIL) 2012-01. THE CONTRACTOR MAY COLLECT AND RETAIN
COMPLETED QUESTIONNAIRES FROM CLIENTS FOR SUBMITTAL TO THE GOVERNMENT. AFTER
COMPLETION OF THIS FORM, THIS FORM MAY BE DUPLICATED BY THE CONTRACTOR. THE
GOVERNMENT RESERVES THE RIGHT TO VERIFY ANY AND ALL INFORMATION.
21
W9126G-12-U-1002
FY12, Fort Polk, LA
TO BE COMPLETED BY CLIENT
ADJECTIVE RATINGS AND DEFINITIONS TO BE USED TO BEST REFLECT
YOUR EVALUATION OF THE CONTRACTOR’S PERFORMANCE
E (EXCELLENT) – Performance meets contractual requirements and exceeds the Client’s/Government’s expectations. The
contractual performance of the element being assessed was accomplished with few minor problems for which corrective actions
taken by the contractor were highly effective.
V (VERY GOOD) – Performance meets contractual requirements and exceeds some of the Client’s/Government’s expectations.
The contractual performance of the element being assessed was accomplished with some minor problems for which corrective
actions taken by the contractor were effective.
S (SATISFACTORY) – Performance meets contractual requirements. The contractual performance of the element contains some
minor problems for which corrective action taken by the contractor appear or were satisfactory.
M (MARGINAL) –Performance does not meet some contractual requirements. The contractual performance of the element being
assessed reflects a serious problem for which the contractor has not yet identified corrective actions. The contractor’s proposed
actions appear only marginally effective or were not fully implemented.
U (UNSATISFACTORY) – Performance does not meet most contractual requirements and/or recovery is not likely in a timely
manner. The contractual performance of the element contains serious problem(s) for which the contractor’s corrective actions
appear or were ineffective.
N (NOT APPLICABLE) – No past performance record is identifiable or the element is not applicable to this project.
PLEASE CIRCLE THE ADJECTIVE RATING WHICH BEST REFLECTS

YOUR EVALUATION OF THE CONTRACTOR’S PERFORMANCE.
1. Ability to meet quality standards specified for technical

performance. E V S M U N
2. Compliance with contractual terms and conditions. E V S M U N

3. Compliance with contract delivery/completion schedules including
E V S M U N
any significant intermediate milestones.
4. Quality/integrity of technical data/report preparation efforts. E V S M U N
5. Adequacy/effectiveness of quality control program and adherence
E V S M U N
to contract quality assurance requirements.
6. Effectiveness of overall contract management (including ability to
E V S M U N
effectively lead, manage and control the program).
7. Effectiveness of on-site management, including management of
E V S M U N
subcontractors?
8. Contractor was reasonable and cooperative in dealing with your
staff (including the ability to successfully resolve E V S M U N
disagreements/disputes; responsiveness to administrative reports).
9. Timeliness/effectiveness of contract problem resolution without
E V S M U N
extensive customer guidance.
10. Ability to successfully respond to emergency and/or surge
E V S M U N
situations.
11. Effectiveness of material management. E V S M U N
12. Effectiveness of acquisition management. E V S M U N
22
13. Contractor proposed innovative alternative methods/processes that

reduced cost, improved maintainability or other factors that benefited E V S M U N
the client.
14. Contractor’s management of their safety program. E V S M U N
15. Responsiveness regarding safety issues. E V S M U N
16. If this was a cost type contract, compliance with established
budgets and avoidance of significant and/or unexplained variances E V S M U N
(under-runs or overruns).
17. If this is/was a Government cost type contract, the Contractor’s
timeliness in submitting monthly invoices with appropriate back-up
documentation and monthly status reports/budget variance reports. E V S M U N
18. If this is/was a Government cost type contract, the Contractor’s

accuracy regarding monthly invoices with appropriate back-up E V S M U N
documentation and monthly status reports/budget variance reports.
19. Ability to hire/apply a qualified workforce to this effort. E V S M U N

20. Ability to retain a qualified workforce on this effort E V S M U N
21. If this is/was a Government contract, has/was this contract been
partially or completely terminated for default or convenience or are
Yes No
there any pending terminations? Indicate if show cause or cure
notices were issued, or any default action in comment section below.
22. Have there been any indications that the contractor has had any
Yes No
financial problem? If yes, please explain below.
23. In summary, provide an overall rating for the work performed by
E V S M U N
this contractor.
Any additional comments related to the contractor’s performance:

23
ATTACHMENT F
W9126G-12-U-1002
FY12, Fort Polk, LA
TAB 4: FACTOR 4: CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
Submission Requirements: The Offeror shall provide a narrative and a time scaled [Gantt Chart] summary
network Construction Schedule. The proposed total contract duration in calendar days shall be reflected on
the chart. The Construction Schedule shall fully demonstrate how the Offeror plans to complete all work, no later
than the completion date from the receipt of contract Notice-to Proceed (NTP) as specified in the Construction
Schedule, Section 01 00 00.00 44. The Schedule is to include sequencing of work for construction activities, specified
time for Government review and approval periods of required work plans, submittals, long lead procurement items,
phasing of work, all option work, and closeout submittals. It is the Government’s requirement that all work is to be
completed within the duration specified in the Construction Schedule.
The Offeror may propose a completion period of lesser duration; however, any such proposals must include the same
time periods for Government reviews, option work and phasing as specified in the solicitation.
If the Government accepts a proposal for a completion period of a lesser duration, and such proposal alters the time
periods for reviews, option work and phasing, the contract shall be read to include the original periods for these
activities.
If the Government accepts a proposal for a completion period of a lesser duration, the accepted completion period will
replace the original construction schedule specified under Section 01 00 00.00 44.
In addition, if a completion period of a lesser duration is proposed, the CLIN (Bid) Schedule must reflect pricing
information for the lesser proposed completion period. Offerors who propose completion of work beyond the
completion period specified will be evaluated as unacceptable.
The Narrative should include any construction challenges that the Offeror foresees that may jeopardize the successful
completion of all contract work and plans for overcoming these challenges. Any deviations from the solicitation
requirements will be considered non-responsive and evaluated as unacceptable.
STANDARD FOR ACCEPTABILITY: This standard is met when the Offeror demonstrates a clear understanding
of the solicitation requirements and a construction schedule to complete the project within the specified or proposed
construction duration. Failure to demonstrate the minimally acceptability standards under this factor will result in an
“Unacceptable” rating and possible elimination from further consideration for contract award.
Offerors are warned that the Military Construction Codification Act prohibits the expenditure of
appropriations to expedite the completion date of a military construction contract at additional cost to the
Government. Offerors may not expedite the completion date of the construction contract through the use of
overtime, double shifts, larger crews, and similar efforts unless such measures are either required for normal
construction efficiencies or offset by lower overhead costs, more economical equipment rental costs, and other
similar measures.
24
FACTOR 4: CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE WILL BE EVALUATED BASED ON THE FOLLOWING

CRITERIA:
The Government will review the project experience of the offeror, including subcontractors, on projects provided in
response to the Experience Factor. Offerors must meet all of the following minimum acceptability standards to receive
an “ACCEPTABLE” on this factor:
(1) Offeror must have a construction schedule to include sequencing of work for construction activities, specified
time for Government review and approval periods of required work plans, submittals, long lead procurement items,
phasing of work, all option work, and closeout.
Evaluation: The narrative and time scaled (Gantt Chart) schedule will be evaluated by the Government based on the
Offeror’s demonstrated understanding of the solicitation scope of work, logical sequencing and scheduling of work
activities, to include time periods for Government reviews, all option work and construction phasing as specified.
Failure to demonstrate the minimally acceptable criteria under this factor will result in an “UNACCEPTABLE” rating
and elimination from further consideration for contract award.
25
SECTION 00 73 10 (TASK ORDER

SUPPLEMENTAL CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS
1.0 GENERAL
1.1. COST LIMITATION
1.2. 52.211-10 COMMENCEMENT, PROSECUTION AND COMPLETION OF WORK (APR 1984).
1.3. 52.211-12 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES – CONSTRUCTION (SEP 2000).
1.4. 252.236-7001 CONTRACT DRAWINGS, MAPS, AND SPECIFICATIONS (AUG 2000).
1.5. TIME EXTENSIONS FOR UNUSUALLY SEVERE WEATHER (ER 415-1-15) (OCT 1989).
1.6. PHYSICAL DATA (FAR 52.236-4) (APR 1984).
1.7. IDENTIFICATION OF GOVERNMENT-FURNISHED PROPERTY.
1.8. PAYMENT FOR MATERIALS DELIVERED OFF-SITE (EFARS 52.232-5000) (MAR 1995).
1.9. TASK ORDER SITE SAFETY AND HEALTH OFFICER REQUIREMENTS AND QUALIFICATIONS (APR
10)
1.10 BASE ID/IQ CONTRACT
1.11 IDENTIFICATION OF CONTRACTOR EMPLOYEES IN THE FEDERAL WORKPLACE (Sep 2008)
1.12 CONTRACTOR VERIFICATION OF CONTRACT SURVEY DATA
1.13 DEFINITIONS
1.14 CONTRACTOR TEMPORARY FACILITIES
1.15 TEMPORARY PROJECT SAFETY FENCING
1.16 CONSTRUCTION QUALITY MANAGEMENT FOR CONTRACTORS"COURSE
1.17 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS CERTIFICATE
1.18 CLEANUP
1.19 REAL PROPERTY MAINTENANCE RECORDS
1.20 TERMINOLOGY
1.21 WEB-BASED DESIGN SUBMITTALS
1.22 SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
1.23 REQUIRED INSURANCE
1.24 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS ABATEMENT INSURANCE
1.25 UTILITIES
1.26 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
1.27 CONTRACTOR PERFORMANCE EVALUATIONS

26
1.28 CONTRACTOR PAYROLL RECORD
1.29 CORRESPONDENCE IDENTIFICATION
1.30 EQUIPMENT OWNERSHIP AND OPERATING EXPENSE SCHEDULE
1.31 U.S. ARMY CORPS OF ENGINEERS SAFETY AND HEALTH REQUIREMENTS MANUAL, EM 385-l-l
1.32 ELECTRONIC SUBMITTAL OF OFFEROR‟S PROPOSAL

27
1.0 GENERAL 1.1. COST LIMITATION
The cost limitation for this task order is: DFAR: 236.204 Disclosure of the magnitude of construction projects.
Additional price ranges are—
Between $10,000,000 and $25,000,000;
1.2. 52.211-10 COMMENCEMENT, PROSECUTION AND COMPLETION OF WORK (APR 1984).
The Contractor shall be required to (a) commence work under this contract within ten (10) calendar days after the date
the Contractor receives notice to proceed, (b) prosecute the work diligently, and (c) complete the entire work ready for
use not later than the number of calendar days specified below. The time stated for completion shall include final
cleanup of the premises.
a. Complete the Design and Construction of the W9126G-12-U-1002 Project Number: 064415, Company Operations
Facility (COF), FY12, Fort Polk, LA , including turfing and landscaping, no later than 540 calendar days from receipt
of the notice to proceed.
b. Commencement and Completion of Turfing: Turfing work shall be accomplished during the first planting season
just prior to substantial completion of building construction. Maintenance of turfing work shall commence
immediately after completion of initial watering and shall continue for a period of not less than 45 calendar days.
Refertilizing shall commence not earlier than 5 weeks after commencement of maintenance and shall be completed
not later than 3 days after commencement. No payment will be made for establishment of turf until all requirements
for turfing are adequately performed and accepted as determined by the contracting officer.
c. Commencement and Completion of Landscaping: Planting of trees, shrubs, and vines shall be accomplished during
the first planting season, or portion thereof (but not less than 15 days), following substantial completion of building
construction. Maintenance and replacement of trees, shrubs, and vines shall commence immediately after each plant is
planted, mulched, and staked and shall continue for a period of 120 calendar days after all plants are planted, mulched,
and staked.
Notes:
(1) If the Offeror proposes a shorter duration than what is shown above, the Offerors duration will become the
contractually binding completion period, inclusive of all review periods and Government phasing requirements
specified. If the Government accepts a proposal for a completion period of lesser duration, and such proposal alters
the time periods for review and phasing, the Contract shall be read to include the original periods for review and
phasing.
(2) As-Built Drawings. The Contractor shall complete work on the final as-built drawings upon his receipt of the
approved working as-built drawings. The Contractor shall provide final as-built drawings as specified in Contract
Section 01 78 00 Closeout Submittals. Upon satisfactory completion of this work the Contractor shall have earned the
withholding amount shown for Final As-Built Drawings in Contract Section 01 78 00 Closeout Submittals.
(3) O & M Manuals. O & M Manuals shall be developed and submitted in accordance with Contract Section 01 78
02.00 10 Closeout Submittals, at least 60 calendar days prior to the scheduled contract completion date. Upon
approval of fully developed O & M Manuals, the Contractor shall have earned the withholding amount shown for
"Operations and Maintenance Manuals" in Contract Section 01 78 00 Closeout Submittals.
(4) In the event the Heating and/or Air Conditioning Systems cannot be tested at or near design temperatures during
the above period, beneficial occupancy and use of the facilities may be accepted and final testing and adjustments of
the heating and/or air conditioning deferred as specified in the appropriate testing clauses of the Technical Provisions.
The HVAC Testing that the Contractor schedules after substantial completion has a value to the Government of 10
percent of the value of the equipment to be tested. The Contractor shall reserve that amount to be paid on any
equipment that will require testing after substantial completion pursuant to the above referenced specification
paragraph.
28
1.3. 52.211-12 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES – CONSTRUCTION (SEP 2000).
a. If the Contractor fails to complete the work within the time specified in the contract, the Contractor shall pay
liquidated damages to the Government in the amount of $1,139.00 for each calendar day of delay until the work is
completed or accepted. In the event that the completion date for the work covered by two or more items of work
becomes delinquent concurrently, the liquidated damages will not be the sum of the liquidated damages for each item
of work which becomes delinquent in the amounts stated. b. If the Government terminates the Contractor's right to
proceed, liquidated damages will continue to accrue until the work is completed. These liquidated damages are in
addition to excess costs of repurchase under the Termination clause.
1.4. 252.236-7001 CONTRACT DRAWINGS, MAPS, AND SPECIFICATIONS (AUG 2000).
a. The Government –
(1) The Contract shall consist of the documents enumerated in Section 00 73 00 SPECIAL CONTRACT
REQUIRMENTS' clause. It is the Contractor's responsibility to reproduce a set of contract drawings and
specifications from the solicitation, including amendments. The Government will not provide the Contractor contract
drawings or specifications beyond the documents provided during the solicitation stage. The Government will not
provide the Contractor any hard copy paper drawings or specifications for any contract resulting from this solicitation.
Publications incorporated into the technical provisions by reference will not be provided except as chosen by the
Contracting Officer.
b. The Contractor shall –
(1) Check all drawings furnished immediately upon receipt;
(2) Compare all drawings and verify the figures before laying out the work;
(3) Promptly notify the Contracting Officer of any discrepancies;
(4) Be responsible for any errors that might have been avoided by complying with this paragraph (b); and
(5) Reproduce and print contract drawings and specifications as needed.
c. In general –
(1) Large-scale drawings shall govern small-scale drawings.
(2) The Contractor shall follow figures marked on drawings in preference to scale measurements.
d. Omissions from the drawings or specifications or the misdescription of details of work which are manifestly
necessary to carry out the intent of the drawings and specifications, or that are customarily performed, shall not relieve
the Contractor from performing such omitted or misdescribed details of the work. The Contractor shall perform such
details as if fully and correctly set forth and described in the drawings and specifications.
1.5. TIME EXTENSIONS FOR UNUSUALLY SEVERE WEATHER (ER 415-1-15) (OCT 1989).
a. This provision specifies the procedure for determination of time extensions for unusually severe weather in
accordance with the contract clause FAR 52.249-10 entitled "DEFAULT: (FIXED PRICE CONSTRUCTION)." In
order for the Contracting Officer to award a time extension under this clause, the following conditions must be
satisfied:
(1) The weather experienced at the project site during the contract period must be found to be unusually severe, that
is, more severe than the adverse weather anticipated for the project location during any given month.
(3) The unusually severe weather must actually cause a delay to the completion of the project. The delay must be
beyond the control and without the fault or negligence of the contractor. b. The following schedule of monthly
anticipated adverse weather delays due to precipitation and temperature is based on National Oceanic and
29
Atmospheric Administration (NOAA) or similar data for the project location and will constitute the base line for
monthly weather time evaluations. The contractor's progress schedule must reflect these anticipated adverse
weather delays in all weather dependent activities. Wind is not considered in the Monthly Anticipated Adverse
Weather Calendar Day Schedule.
MONTHLY ANTICIPATED ADVERSE WEATHER DELAY
WORK DAYS BASED ON (5) DAY WORK WEEK
JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC
8 9 6 4 5 6 11 9 5 4 5 6
a. Upon acknowledgment of the Notice to Proceed (NTP) and continuing throughout the contract, the contractor
will record on the daily CQC report, the occurrence of adverse weather and resultant impact to normally
scheduled work. Actual adverse weather delay days must prevent work on critical activities for 50 percent or
more of the contractor's scheduled work day.
b. The number of actual adverse weather delay days shall include days impacted by actual adverse weather (even
if adverse weather occurred in previous month), be calculated chronologically from the first to the last day of
each month, and be recorded as full days. If the number of actual adverse weather delay days exceeds the
number of days anticipated in paragraph "b", above, the Contracting Officer will convert any qualifying
delays to calendar days, giving full consideration for equivalent fair weather work days, and issue a
modification in accordance with the contract clause entitled "Default (Fixed Price Construction)."
1.6. PHYSICAL DATA (FAR 52.236-4) (APR 1984).
Data and information furnished or referred to below is for the Contractor’s information. The Government shall not be
responsible for any interpretation of or conclusion drawn from the data or information by the Contractor.
a. The indications of physical conditions on the drawings and in the specifications are the result of site investigations
by .surveys and borings.
b. Ground water levels: It has been observed that ground water levels in heavily timbered or grassed areas quite often
undergo a significant temporary rise when the area is cleared and/or stripped. This increase in water level can hinder
traffic and construction progress in the affected areas. The duration of the ground water rise varies considerably,
depending on prevailing weather and/or climatic conditions.
1.7. IDENTIFICATION OF GOVERNMENT-FURNISHED PROPERTY.
a. The Government will furnish to the Contractor the property identified in the Schedule to be incorporated or installed
into the work or used in performing the contract. If the property will be furnished from storage at Fort Benning, GA,
the Contractor will be required to load and transport the property to the job site at its own expense. If the listed
property will be furnished f.o.b. railroad cars at the place specified in the contract schedule or f.o.b. truck at the
project site, the Contractor is required to accept delivery, pay any demurrage or detention charges, and unload and
transport the property to the job site at its own expense. When the property is delivered, the Contractor shall verify its
quantity and condition and acknowledge receipt in writing to the Contracting Officer. The Contractor shall also report
in writing to the Contracting Officer within 24 hours of delivery any damage to or shortage of the property as
received. All such property shall be installed or incorporated into the work at the expense of the Contractor, unless
otherwise indicated in this Contract.
b. Each item of property to be furnished under this clause shall be identified in subparagraph (d).
c. The Government will deliver the listed property between the dates shown. The Contractor will be responsible for
the proper storage and maintenance of the property from the time of acceptance until such time as it is returned to the
Government.
30
d. Government-Furnished/Contractor-Installed Property: None
1.8. PAYMENT FOR MATERIALS DELIVERED OFF-SITE (EFARS 52.232-5000) (MAR 1995).
a. Pursuant to FAR clause 52.232-5, "PAYMENTS UNDER FIXED-PRICE CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTS",

materials delivered to the Contractor at locations other than the site of the work may be taken into consideration in
making payments if included in payment estimates and if all the conditions of the General Provisions are fulfilled.
Payment for items delivered to locations other than the work site will be limited to: (1) materials required by the
Technical Provisions; or (2) materials that have been fabricated to the point where they are identifiable to an item of
work required under this contract.
b. Such payments will be made only after receipt of paid or receipted invoices or invoices with canceled check
showing title to the items in the prime contractor and including the value of material and labor incorporated into the
item. In addition to petroleum products, payment for materials delivered off site is limited to the following items:
None.
1.9. TASK ORDER SITE SAFETY AND HEALTH OFFICER REQUIREMENTS AND QUALIFICATIONS (APR
10)
(a) The Contractor shall employ a competent person at each project to function as the Site Safety and Health Officer
(SSHO) in accordance with EM 385-1-1, Section 01.A.17. The SSHO shall report to the senior project official or to a
senior corporate official. Submit the qualifications of the proposed SSHO for Government Approval.
(b) The SSHO may be a collateral duty responsibility.
1.10 STREET CLOSINGS
The Contractor shall coordinate all requests for street closings with the Contracting Officer in writing 14 days prior to
date of requested outage:
a. One lane traffic shall be maintained at all times
b. The final street repair shall be completed within 14 days after the start of any street crossing. Any part of the street
returned to service prior to final repair shall be maintained smooth with hot-mix cold-lay surface course.
1.11 IDENTIFICATION OF CONTRACTOR EMPLOYEES IN THE FEDERAL WORKPLACE (Sep 2008)
a. The contractor shall provide each of its employees who will be involved in the performance of the contract, on a
Government facility, with an identification (ID) badge. The ID badge shall clearly display the contractor’s name and
the employee’s name and color photograph. The Contracting Officer or his/her designee shall approve the ID badge
before the commencement of contract performance. It is the contractor’s responsibility to ensure that all contractor
personnel wear the ID badge at all times when performing work under this contract at a Government facility. Unless
otherwise specified in the contract, each contractor employee shall wear the ID badge in a conspicuous place on the
front of their clothing and above their waist, except when safety or health reasons prohibit such placement. This
requirement is in addition to any Government facility security provisions that require that a Government-issued
security badge also be worn.
b. Contractor personnel shall clearly identify themselves to all attendees as a contractor employee before the
commencement of meetings with Government or other contractor personnel. Contractor personnel shall clearly and
immediately identify themselves as a contractor employee when placing, answering or participating in telephone/VTC
conversations with Government or other contractor personnel.
c. When contractor personnel send e-mail messages from or to a Government-owned computer, they shall include a
signature block that includes their employer’s name and the employee’s full name and e-mail address.
d. Each of the requirements set forth in paragraphs a-c above, must be included in all subcontracts at any tier.
31
1.12 CONTRACTOR VERIFICATION OF CONTRACT SURVEY DATA During initial site layout and before
existing conditions are disturbed the Contractor shall verify, in writing, the basic survey data provided on the contract
drawings. Verification shall be initiated from the point shown on the contract drawings or from the contract drawing
reference point designated by the Contracting Officer's Authorized Representative and shall include, as a minimum,
benchmark elevations, horizontal control points, and sufficient spot checks of critical elevations to ensure that the
survey data adequately reflects existing conditions. The Contractor shall not proceed with construction until survey
verification is provided to the Contracting Officer's Authorized Representative. Before an existing benchmark
referenced on the contract drawings is disturbed the Contractor shall establish a new benchmark which has been
approved by the Contracting Officer's Authorized Representative. Benchmarks which are destroyed without
authorization from the Contracting Officer's Authorized Representative must be replaced at the Contractor's expense
as prescribed in Section 00 72 00 Contract Clause, "Layout of Work." The Contractor shall refer to Contract Clauses,
"Differing Site Conditions" and "Site Investigation and Conditions Affecting the Work," for additional requirements.
Data and information furnished or referred to below is for the Contractor's information. The Government shall not be
responsible for any interpretation of or conclusion drawn from the data or information by the Contractor.
1.13 DEFINITIONS
References to „Offeror”, “Architect”, “Engineer”, or simply the “Contractor” in this Contract or in the commercially
available guide specifications used for the technical specifications for this Contract shall refer to the contractor who is
the signatory to this Contract. References to “Contracting Officer” and “owner” refer to the Government.
1.14 CONTRACTOR TEMPORARY FACILITIES
a. Safety: Protect the integrity of any installed safety systems or personnel safety devices. If entrance into systems
serving safety devices is required, the Contractor must obtain prior approval from the Contracting Officer. If it is
temporarily necessary to remove or disable personnel safety devices in order to accomplish contract requirements,
provide alternative means of protection prior to removing or disabling any permanently installed safety devices or
equipment and obtain approval from the Contracting Officer.
b. Administrative Field Offices: Provide and maintain administrative field office facilities within the construction area
at the designated site. Government office and warehouse facilities will not be available to the Contractor's personnel.
c. Storage Area: Construct a temporary 6 foot high chain link fence around trailers and materials. Include plastic strip
inserts, colored brown, so that visibility through the fence is obstructed. Fence posts may be driven, in lieu of concrete
bases, where soil conditions permit. Do not place or store Trailers, materials, or equipment outside the fenced area
unless such trailers, materials, or equipment are assigned a separate and distinct storage area by the Contracting
Officer away from the vicinity of the construction site but within the installation boundaries. Trailers, equipment, or
materials must not be open to public view with the exception of those items which are in support of ongoing work on
any given day. Do not stockpile materials outside the fence in preparation for the next day's work. Park mobile
equipment: such as tractors, wheeled lifting equipment, cranes, trucks, and like equipment within the fenced area at
the end of each work day.
d. Supplemental Storage Area: Upon Contractor's request, the Contracting Officer will designate another or
supplemental area for the Contractor's use and storage of trailers, equipment, and materials. This area may not be in
close proximity of the construction site but will be within the installation boundaries. Fencing of materials or
equipment will not be required at this site; however, the Contractor is responsible for cleanliness and orderliness of the
area used and for the security of any material or equipment stored in this area. Utilities will not be provided to this
area by the Government.
e. Appearance of Trailers: Trailers utilized by the Contractor for administrative or material storage purposes shall
present a clean and neat exterior appearance and be in a state of good repair. Trailers which, in the opinion of the
Contracting Officer, require exterior painting or maintenance will not be allowed on installation property.
f. Maintenance of Storage Area: Keep fencing in a state of good repair and proper alignment. Grassed or unpaved
areas, which are not established roadways, will be covered with a layer of gravel as necessary to prevent rutting and
the tracking of mud onto paved or established roadways, should the Contractor elect to traverse them with
construction equipment or other vehicles; gravel gradation will be at the Contractor's discretion. Mow and maintain
grass located within the boundaries of the construction site for the duration of the project. Grass and vegetation along
32
fences, buildings, under trailers, and in areas not accessible to mowers will be edged or trimmed neatly.
g. Grass and weedy vegetation within the areas utilized by the Contractor, including work areas, administrative areas,
and storage areas, shall be kept mowed to control vegetative growth. Vegetation shall be mowed before or when it
reaches a height of 6 inches. Mowing shall be to a height of 3 inches. Mowing shall be accomplished with a rotary
mower that leaves the clippings evenly distributed on the soil surface. Mowing shall be accomplished during periods
and in such manner that the soil and grass will not be damaged. Towed or self-propelled riding mowers shall not be
operated within 3 feet of trees or shrubs. Areas adjacent to trees and shrubs shall be mowed with hand-propelled
mowers.
(1) Areas Not Mowed: Government may immediately after notice to the Contractor and at the discretion of the
Contracting Officer mow the Contractor's areas at any time the vegetation height exceeds 6 inches.
(2) Payment: No separate payment will be made for mowing as required under this section and all costs incurred by
the Government for performing such work shall be deducted from the Contract.
h. Security Provisions: Contractor shall provide adequate outside security lighting at the Contractor's temporary
facilities. The Contractor will be responsible for the security of its own equipment. In addition, the Contractor will
notify the appropriate law enforcement agency requesting periodic security checks of the temporary project field
office.
i. Restoration Of Storage Area: Upon completion of the project remove the bulletin board, signs, barricades, haul
roads, and any other temporary products from the site. After removal of trailers, materials, and equipment from within
the fenced area, remove the fence that will become the property of the Contractor. Restore to the original or better
condition, areas used by the Contractor for the storage of equipment or material, or other use. Gravel used to traverse
grassed areas must be removed and the area restored to its original condition, including top soil and seeding as
necessary.
1.15 TEMPORARY PROJECT SAFETY FENCING As soon as practicable, but not later than 15 days after the date
established for commencement of work, furnish and erect temporary project safety fencing around the construction
site . The safety fencing shall be a 9 ga. chain link fencing, a minimum of 72 inches high, supported and tightly
secured to steel posts located on maximum 10 foot centers, constructed at the approved location. Maintain the safety
fencing during the life of the contract and, upon completion and acceptance of the work, will become the property of
the Contractor and be removed from the work site.
1.16 CONSTRUCTION QUALITY MANAGEMENT FOR CONTRACTORS"COURSE In addition to the above

experience and education requirements specified in Section 01 45 04.00 10 CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL,
the CQC System Manager shall have completed the course entitled "Construction Quality Management For
Contractors". This class is mandatory for the Contractor's quality control manager. Certificates issued upon successful
completion are valid for five years. This course is periodically offered at the Corps of Engineers Fort Worth and
Savannah District Offices. Attendees must be fluent in the English language (able to read and write) at the high school
level. Registration is required; call Contracting Officer's Representative for times and reservations.
Certificate of Full Approval from FCCCHR List, University of Southern California, attesting that the design, size and
make of each backflow preventer has satisfactorily passed the complete sequence of performance testing and
evaluation for the respective level of approval. Certificate of Provisional Approval will not be acceptable.
a. Backflow Tester Certificate: Prior to testing, submit to the Contracting Officer certification issued by the State or
local regulatory agency attesting that the backflow tester has successfully completed a certification course sponsored
by the regulatory agency. Tester must not be affiliated with any company participating in any other phase of this
Contract.
b. Backflow Prevention Training Certificate: Submit a certificate recognized by the State or local authority that states
the Contractor has completed at least 10 hours of training in backflow preventer installations. The certificate must be
current.
1.18 CLEANUP Remove construction debris, waste materials, packaging material and the like from the work site
33
daily. Any dirt or mud which is tracked onto paved or surfaced roadways must be cleaned away. Store within the
fenced area described above or at the supplemental storage area any materials resulting from demolition activities
which are salvageable. Neatly stacked stored materials not in trailers, whether new or salvaged.
1.19 REAL PROPERTY MAINTENANCE RECORDS The following are additional requirements for Section 01 33
16, paragraph 3.7.5. Preparation of DD Form 1354 (Transfer of Real Property): DD Form 1354, TRANSFER AND
ACCEPTANCE OF MILITARY REAL PROPERTY, is the formal document that the Corps of Engineers uses to
transfer project ownership to the installation. In accordance with Section 01 33 16 DESIGN AFTER AWARD
requirements for this form, complete the Excel files "Contractor Template for DD1354 .xls" and “Contractor Template
for Appendix D.xls” and submit with the interim final design(s). These Excel forms, completed examples, and a list of
the category codes are included in the solicitation files. The DD Form 1354 and appendix D documents identify
project design information to support additional Real Property records and installation life safety requirements. Break
the data down by applicable Category Codes necessary for the Government to use in updating the DD Form 1354 data
in RMS. Expand list as applicable. The required data includes:
(1) A description of the item
(2) The applicable Category Code
(3) The quantity and unit of measure
(4) The item’s contract cost to the Government
During project construction, the contractor is responsible for keeping the DD1354 data current by updating the
approved Excel spreadsheet submitted during design with any new and/or changed construction data caused by field
changes. This assistance will be necessary whenever a construction modification is issued and/or the Contractor elects
to modify the original design. The updated Excel spreadsheet shall be provided at the Red Zone meeting or no later
than 60 days prior to anticipated BOD or project completion. Data shall be provided to the Contracting Officer
Representative.
1.20 TERMINOLOGY
The identified terms and phrases used in the plans and specifications shall be edited and interpreted as listed in the
following:
ENGINEER – All references to the engineer shall be replaced with the Contracting Officer.
ARCHITECT – All references to the architect shall be replaced with the Contracting Officer.
THE OWNER and OWNER‟S REPRESENTATIVE – All references to the owner shall be coordinated with and
approved by the Contracting Officer.
LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT – All references to the landscape architect shall be replaced with the Contracting
Officer.
SUBMITTALS – All references to Section 01 33 00 shall be replaced with Section 01330 SUBMITTAL
PROCEDURES. All submittals shall be made to the Contracting Officer. No other agent shall receive submittals
defined in the Technical Specifications.
QUALITY ASSURANCE – All paragraphs entitled QUALITY ASSURANCE shall be replaced with the title
QUALITY CONTROL BY THE CONTRACTOR and shall be performed as defined in Section 01 45 04.00 10
Contractor Quality Control. Quality assurance will be performed by the Government.
1.21 WEB-BASED DESIGN SUBMITTALS
Web-based Design Submittals, as permitted in Section 01 33 16 DESIGN AFTER AWARD, paragraph 3.9.2, are not
allowed. Submit paper copies as shown in the Submittal Distribution and Quantities Table for design submittals.
34
The Contractor shall comply with the Contract FAR clause 52.236-13, Accident Prevention, and with all pertinent
provisions of the latest version of U.S. Army Corps of Engineers Safety and Health Requirements Manual, EM 385-
1-1, in effect on the date of the solicitation. the Contractor's Accident Prevention Plan shall follow the format shown
in COE EM 385-1-1, Appendix A - Minimum Basic Outline for Accident Prevention Plan.
a. Language
For each work group that has employees who do not speak English, the Contractor will provide a bilingual foreman
who is fluent in English and in the language of the workers. The Contractor will implement the requirements of COE
EM 385-1-1, paragraphs 01.B.01, 01.B.02, and 01.C.02 through these foremen.
1.23 REQUIRED INSURANCE Pursuant to FAR 28.307-2, the Contractor shall procure and maintain during the
entire period of his performance under this contract the following minimum insurance: a. Workers' compensation and
employers' liability insurance in compliance with applicable state statutes, with a minimum employers' liability
coverage of $100,000.
b. Comprehensive general liability insurance for bodily injury in the minimum limits of $500,000 per occurrence. No
property damage liability insurance is required.
c. Comprehensive automobile liability insurance covering the operation of all automobiles used in connection with the
performance of the contract in the minimum limits of $200,000 per person and $500,000 per occurrence for bodily
injury and $20,000 per occurrence for property damage. (See Contract Clause entitled Insurance--Work on a
Government Installation)
1.24 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS ABATEMENT INSURANCE
a. If hazardous materials (e.g. asbestos, lead-based paint, polychlorinated biphenyl (pcb) compounds)
abatement/removal or any other work with hazardous materials is required under this contract and Comprehensive
General Liability Insurance is required, the policy of insurance which covers the hazardous materials
abatement/removal or other work with asbestos shall be a "per occurrence" policy as that term used in the insurance
industry. A policy issued on a "claims made" basis or any other "short tail" basis will not be accepted.
b. The Comprehensive General Liability per occurrence policy shall be obtained by the prime Contractor if the
hazardous materials abatement work is performed by the prime Contractor's own work force, or by an hazardous
materials abatement subcontractor(s), if the hazardous materials abatement work is subcontracted. The Contractor
shall insert in the subcontract a requirement for the hazardous materials abatement subcontractor(s) to provide and
maintain the insurance required by this paragraph. The Contractor shall maintain a copy of the subcontractor's proof of
required insurance, and shall make such copy available to the Contracting Officer upon request.
1.25 UTILITIES
Electricity, gas, water, and sewer have been privatized and are 3rd party owned. See Appendix C Utility Connections
for the privatized utility provider's utility requirements and specifications. All utilities are administered by the
Government regardless of ownership. Water, gas, and electricity will be charged to the Contractor at rates as provided
in Contract Clause 52.236-14 AVAILABILITY AND USE OF UTILITY SERVICES.
a. Use of Government services:
(1) Contractors must reimburse government for utilities usage (electricity, gas, water, sewer, and refuse) for admin
trailer and construction sites.
(2) A utilities sales agreement must be signed by Contractor prior to connection/use of utilities services.
(3) Contractor must provide all metering devices for trailer and construction project.
b. Meters and Temporary Connections

35
The Contractor, at its expense and in a manner satisfactory to the Contracting Officer, shall provide and maintain
necessary temporary connections, distribution lines, and meter bases required to measure the amount of each utility
used for the purpose of determining charges. The Contractor shall notify the Contracting Officer, in writing, 5
working days before utility (gas, water, electricity) connection is desired so that a utilities contract can be established.
The Contractor will provide a meter and make the final hot connection after inspection and approval of the
Contractor's temporary wiring installation.
c. Advance Deposit An advance deposit for utilities consisting of an estimated month's usage or a minimum of $50.00
will be required. The last monthly bills for the fiscal year will normally be offset by the deposit and adjustments will
be billed or returned as appropriate. Services to be rendered for the next fiscal year, beginning 1 October, will require
a new deposit. Notification of the due date for this deposit will be mailed to the Contractor prior to the end of the
current fiscal year.
d. Final Meter Reading Before completion of the work and final acceptance of the work by the Government, the
Contractor shall notify the Contracting Officer, in writing, 5 working days before termination is desired. The
Government will take a final meter reading, disconnect service, and remove the meters. The Contractor shall then
remove all the temporary distribution lines, meter bases, and associated paraphernalia. The Contractor shall pay all
outstanding utility bills before final acceptance of the work by the Government.
1.26 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS Construction material shall be free of lead, mercury, chromate, and other
hazardous and toxic material. Prior to the final inspection of the project, or with the appropriate submittals, furnish
Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for caulking, sealant, surfacing material (i.e. glazing material and drywall
texture), wallboard, drywall texture, paint, roofing and sealant materials, floor tiles, mastic, and other materials
indicating that the materials are non-asbestos containing materials. Also furnish an Asbestos Free Construction
Material Certification certifying that the project is asbestos-free.
1.27 CONTRACTOR PERFORMANCE EVALUATIONS In accordance with the provisions of Subpart 36.201
(Evaluation of Contractor Performance) of the Federal Acquisition Regulation (FAR), construction contractor’s
performance shall be evaluated throughout the performance of the contract. The United States Army Corps of
Engineers (USACE) follows the procedures outlined in Engineering Regulation 415-1-17 to fulfill this FAR
requirement. For construction contracts awarded at or above $100,000.00, the USACE will evaluate contractor’s
performance and prepare a performance report using the Construction Contractor Appraisal Support System
(CCASS), which is now a web-based system. After an evaluation (interim or final) is written up by the USACE, the
contractor will have the ability to access, review and comment on the evaluation for a period of 30 days. Accessing
and using CCASS requires specific software, called PKI certification, which is installed on the user’s computer. The
certification is a Department of Defense requirement and was implemented to provide security in electronic
transactions. The certification software could cost approximately $110 - $125 per certificate per year and is purchased
from an External Certificate Authorities (ECA) vendor. Current information about the PKI certification process and
for contacting vendors can be found on the web site: http://www.cpars.navy.mil/. If the Contractor wishes to
participate in the performance evaluation process, access to CCASS and PKI certification is the sole responsibility of
the Contractor.
1.28 CONTRACTOR PAYROLL RECORD Contractor shall be required to log payrolls for all their own employees
and subcontractors utilizing ENG Form 3180. Each subcontractor requires a separate ENG 3180 for their payrolls.
The Contractor shall maintain the ENG 3180, along with the payrolls, on site and available for review by the
Contracting Officer's Representative. The ENG 3180's shall be updated weekly as payrolls are submitted. After
making copies for their files, the Contractor is required to submit the originals of each week’s payrolls to the Resident
Office. Before final payment, the Contractor shall provide the completed ENG 3180‟s to the Contracting Officer's
Representatives.
1.29 CORRESPONDENCE IDENTIFICATION a. The Contractor shall use a serial numbering system on all formal
correspondence sent to the Contracting Officer or his representative. The Contractor will provide one original and two
duplicate copies of all correspondence. b. The Contractor may use a Request for Information (RFI) system for
drawing/specification clarifications, subject to the following conditions:
(1) The Contractor shall use a sequential numbering system for all RFI's separate and apart from the correspondence
numbering system.
36
(2) The Contractor shall provide one original and two copies of all RFI's.
(3) The Contractor shall designate ONE individual responsible person, subject to approval by the Contracting Officer,
for reviewing and issuing RFI's.
(4) For projects requiring Network Analysis Systems (NAS), all RFI's shall identify the NAS activities directly or
indirectly affected by the RFI on the progress schedule. The Contractor should anticipate a minimum of 10 calendar
days for Government review and response.
(5) No requests for deviations or variations from the contract by RFI will be allowed. Deviations/variations are to be
submitted on ENG Form 4025 as described in Section 01330 Submittal Procedures.
(6) The use of RFI's does not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for reviewing the contract documents and
coordinating the work to be performed. If the Contracting Officer determines that the RFI system is being used for
other than its intended purpose, the Contracting Officer has the authority to discontinue the use of the RFI's for the
remainder of the contract.
1.30 EQUIPMENT OWNERSHIP AND OPERATING EXPENSE SCHEDULE Whenever a contract or modification
of contract price is negotiated, the Contractor's cost proposals for equipment ownership and operating expenses shall
be determined in accordance with the requirements of EFARS 52.213- 5000, EQUIPMENT OWNERSHIP AND
OPERATING EXPENSE SCHEDULE. Interested parties may purchase copies of EP 1110-1-8 (Volumes 1 through
12) by phoning (202) 783-3238, or by writing "Superintendent of Documents, U.S. Government Printing Office,
Washington, D.C. 20402." Major credit cards are accepted. An electronic copy of this publication may be found the
US Army Corps of Engineers Publication web site at http://www.usace.army.mil/inet/usace-docs/eng-
pamphlets/cecw.htm.
1.31 U.S. ARMY CORPS OF ENGINEERS SAFETY AND HEALTH REQUIREMENTS MANUAL, EM 385-l-l
Reference Federal Acquisition Regulation (FAR) Clause 52.236-13, Accident Prevention. Engineer Manual (EM)
385-l-l and its changes are no longer available as part of this solicitation/contract but rather is available at
http://www.hq.usace.army.mil (select Safety and Occupational Health). Consequently, the Contractor shall be
responsible for complying with the current edition and all changes posted on the web as of the effective date of this
solicitation.
1.32 ELECTRONIC SUBMITTAL OF OFFEROR‟S PROPOSAL In accordance with Section 00 22 30 Task Order
Design-Build Selection Procedures and Basis of Award, the Offeror is required to submit an electronic copy of the
initial proposal and one electronic copy of the final proposal revision, if applicable. In the event any discrepancy is
discovered between the printed version of the Offeror’s submitted proposal and this electronic version, the printed
version shall govern.
End of Section 00 73 10
DATE BOND EXECUTED (Must be same or later than date of
PERFORMANCE BOND contract)
OMB No.: 9000-0045
(See instructions on reverse) Expires: 11/30/2012
Public reporting burden for this collection of information is estimated to average 25 minutes per response, including the time for reviewing instructions, searching existing data
sources, gathering and maintaining the data needed, and completing and reviewing the collection of information. Send comments regarding this burden estimate or any other
aspect of this collection of information, including suggestions for reducing this burden, to the FAR Secretariat (MVR), Federal Acquisition Policy Division, GSA, Washington,
DC 20405
PRINCIPAL (Legal name and business address) TYPE OF ORGANIZATION ("X" one)
INDIVIDUAL PARTNERSHIP
JOINT VENTURE CORPORATION
STATE OF INCORPORATION
SURETY(IES) (Name(s) and business address(es) PENAL SUM OF BOND

MILLION(S) THOUSANDS HUNDRED(S) CENTS
CONTRACT DATE CONTRACT NO.
OBLIGATION
We, the Principal and Surety (ies), are firmly bound to the Unites States of America (hereinafter called the Government) in the above penal sum. For
payment of the penal sum, we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, and successors, jointly and severally. However, where the
Sureties are corporations acting as co-sureties, bind ourselves in such sum "jointly and severally" as well as "severally" only for the
purpose of allowing a joint action against any or all of us. for all other purposes, each Surety binds itself, jointly and severally with the
Principal, for the payment of the sum shown opposite the name of the Surety. If no limit of liability is indicated, the limit of liability is the full amount
of the penal sum.
CONDITIONS
The Principal has entered into the contract identified above.
THEREFORE
The above obligation is void if the Principal-
(a)(1) Performs and fulfills all the undertaking, covenants, terms, conditions, and agreements of the contract during the original term of the
contract and any extensions thereof that are granted by the Government, with or without notice of the Surety(ies) and during the life of any guaranty
required under the contract, and (2) performs and fulfills all the undertakings, covenants, terms conditions, and agreements of any and all duly
authorized modifications of the contract that hereafter are made. Notice of those modifications to the Surety(ies) are waived.
(b) Pays to the Government the full amount of the taxes imposed by the Government, if the said contracts is subject to the Miller Act, (40 U.S.C.
270a-270e), which are collected, deducted, or withheld from wages paid by the Principal in carrying out the construction contract with respect to
which this bond is furnished.
WITNESS
The Principal and Surety(ies) executed this performance bond and affixed their seals on the above date.
PRINCIPAL
1. 2. 3.
SIGNATURE(S)
(Seal) (Seal) (Seal)
Corporate
1. 2. 3.
NAME(S) & Seal
TITLE(S)
(Typed)
INDIVIDUAL SURETY(IES)
1. 2.
SIGNATURE(S)
(Seal) (Seal)
NAME(S) 1. 2.
(Typed)
CORPORATE SURETY(IES)
NAME & STATE OF INC. LIABILITY LIMIT ($)
ADDRESS
SURETY A
1. 2. Corporate
SIGNATURE(S)
Seal
NAME(S) & 1. 2.
TITLE(S
(Typed)
AUTHORIZED FOR LOCAL REPRODUCTION STANDARD FORM 25 (REV. 5-96)

Previous edition not usable
Prescribed by GSA-FAR (48 CFR) 53.228 (b)
CORPORATE SURETY(IES) (Continued)

ADDRESS
SURETY B
1. 2. Corporate
SIGNATURE(S)
Seal
NAME(S) & 1. 2.
TITLE(S)
(Typed)
STATE OF INC. LIABILITY LIMIT ($)
NAME &
ADDRESS
SURETY C
1. 2. Corporate
SIGNATURE(S)
Seal
NAME(S) & 1. 2.
TITLE(S)
(Typed)
NAME &
ADDRESS
SURETY D
1. 2. Corporate
SIGNATURE(S)
Seal
NAME(S) & 1. 2.
TITLE(S)
(Typed)

ADDRESS
SURETY E
SIGNATURE(S)
1. 2. Corporate
Seal
NAME(S) & 1. 2.
TITLE(S)
(Typed)

NAME &
ADDRESS
SURETY F
1. 2. Corporate
SIGNATURE(S)
Seal
NAME(S) & 1. 2.
TITLE(S)
(Typed)

ADDRESS
SURETY G
1. 2. Corporate
SIGNATURE(S)
Seal
NAME(S) & 1. 2.
TITLE(S)
(Typed)
RATE PER THOUSAND ($) TOTAL ($)

BOND
PREMIUM
INSTRUCTIONS
1. This form is authorized for use in connection with Government SURETY(IES)." In the space designated "SURETY(IES)" on the
contracts. Any deviation from this form will require the written face of the form, insert only the letter identification of the sureties.
approval of the Administrator of General Services.
(b) Where individual sureties are involved, a completed Affidavit
2. Insert the full legal name and business address of the Principal in of Individual Surety (standard Form 28) for each individual surety,
the space designated "Principal" on the face of the form. An shall accompany the bond. The Government may require the surety
authorized person shall sign the bond. Any person signing in a to furnish additional substantiating information concerning their
representative capacity (e.g., and attorney-in-fact) must furnish financial capability.
evidence of authority if that representative is not a member of the firm,
partnership, or joint venture, or an officer of the corporation involved. 4. Corporation executing the bond shall affix their corporate seals.
Individual shall execute the bond opposite the word " Corporate
3. (a) Corporations executing the bond as sureties must appear on Seal", and shall affix an adhesive seal if executed in Maine, New
the department of the Treasury's list of approved sureties and must Hampshire, or any other jurisdiction requiring adhesive seals.
act within the limitation listen therein. Where more than one corporate
surety is involved, their names and addresses shall appear in the 5. Type the name and title of each person signing this bond in the
spaces (Surety A, Surety B, etc.) headed "CORPORATE space provided.
STANDARD FORM 25 (REV. 5-96) BACK

39
Approved by OMB
0348-0046
DISCLOSURE OF LOBBYING ACTIVITIES
APPROVED BY OMB
COMPLETE THIS FORM TO DISCLOSE LOBBYING ACTIVITIES PURSUANT TO 31 U.S.C. 1352
1. Type of Federal Action: 2. Status of Federal Action: 3. Report Type:

____ a. Contract ____ a. Bid/Offer/Application ____ a. Initial Finding
____ b. Grant ____ b. Initial Award ____ b. Material Change
____ c. Cooperative Agreement ____ c. Post-award
____ d. Loan For Material Change Only:
____ e. Loan Guarantee Year ______ Quarter ______
____ f. Loan Insurance Date of Last Report _______
4. Name and Address of Reporting Entity: 5. If Reporting Entity in #4 is Sub-Awardee, Enter Name and
Address of Prime:
______ Prime _____ Sub-Awardee
Tier _______, if known
Congressional District, if known: Congressional District, if known:
6. Federal Department/Agency: 7. Federal Program Name/Description:
CFDA Number, if applicable: ___________
8. Federal Action Number: (if known) 9. Award Amount: (if known)
10. a. Name and Address of Lobbying Entity: (if individual, b. Individual Performing Services: (including address if
last name, first name, MI) different from #10 a.) (Last name, first name, MI)
11. Amount of Payment: (check all that apply) 13. Type of Payment: (check all that apply)
_____ a. Retainer
$________________________________ _____ b. One-Time Fee
_____ c. Commission
_____ Actual ______ Planned _____ d. Contingency Fee
_____ e. Deferred
_____ f. Other (specify)
12. Form of Payment: (check all that apply)
______ a. Cash Nature _________

______ b. In-kind Value __________
14. Brief Description of service performed or to be performed and date(s) of service, including officer(s), employee(s) or
member(s) contracted for payment indicated in Item # 11.
(Attach Continuation Sheets if necessary)

15. Continuation Sheets Attached: _______ Yes ________ No
16. Information request through this form is authorized by
Title 31 U.S.C. Section 1352. This disclosure of lobbying Signature: ______________________________
activities is a material representation of fact upon which Print Name: ____________________________
evidence was placed by the above when this transaction was Title: __________________________________
made or entered into. This disclosure is required pursuant to Telephone Number: ______________________
31 U.S.C. 1352. This information will be reported to the Date: __________________________________
Congress semiannually and will be available for public
inspection. Any person who fails to file the required
disclosures shall be subject to a civil penalty of not less than
$10,000 and not more than $100,000 for each such failure.
Authorized for Local Reproduction
Federal Use Only Standard Form - LLL (Rev. 7-97)
40
INSTRUCTIONS FOR COMPLETION OF SF-LLL, DISCLOSURE OF LOBBYING ACTIVITIES
This disclosure form shall be completed by the reporting entity, whether sub-awardee or
prime Federal recipient, at the initiation or receipt of a covered Federal action, or a
material change to a previous filing, pursuant to title 31 U.S.C. section 1352. The filing of
a form is required for each payment or agreement to make payment to any lobbying
entity for influencing or attempting to influence an officer or employee of any agency, a
Member of Congress, an officer or employee of Congress, or an employee of a Member
of Congress in connection with a covered Federal action. Complete all items that apply
for both the initial filing and material change report. Refer to the implementing guidance
published by the Office of Management and Budget for additional information.
1. Identify the type of covered Federal action for which lobbying activity is
and/or has been secured to influence the outcome of a covered Federal action.
2. Identify the status of the covered Federal action.
3. Identify the appropriate classification of this report. If this is a follow up

report caused by a material change to the information previously reported, enter
the year and quarter in which the change occurred. Enter the date of the last
previously submitted report by this reporting entity for this covered Federal action.
4. Enter the full name, address, city, State and zip code of the reporting entity.
Include Congressional District, if known. Check the appropriate classification of
the reporting entity that designates if it is, or expects to be, a prime or sub-award
recipient. Identify the tier of the sub-awardee, e.g., the first sub-awardee of the
prime is the 1st tier. Sub-awards include but are not limited to subcontracts, sub-
grants and contract awards under grants.
5. If the organization filing the report in item 4 checks “Sub-awardee,” then

enter the full name, address, city, State and zip code of the prime Federal
recipient. Include Congressional District, if known.
6. Enter the name of the federal agency making the award or loan
commitment. Include at least one organizational level below agency name, if
known. For example, Department of Transportation, United States Coast Guard.
7. Enter the Federal program name or description for the covered Federal
action (item 1). If known, enter the full Catalog of Federal Domestic Assistance
(CFDA) number for grants, cooperative agreements, loans, and loan
commitments.
8. Enter the most appropriate Federal identifying number available for the
Federal action identified in item 1 (e.g., Request for Proposal (RFP) number;
Invitations for Bid (IFB) number; grant announcement number; the contract, grant,
or loan award number; the application/proposal control number assigned by the
Federal agency). Included prefixes, e.g., “RFP-DE-90-001.”
41
9. For a covered Federal action where there has been an award or loan
commitment by the Federal agency, enter the Federal amount of the award/loan
commitment for the prime entity identified in item 4 or 5.
10. (a) Enter the full name, address, city, State and zip code of the lobbying
registrant under the Lobbying Disclosure Act of 1995 engaged by the reporting
entity identified in item 4 to influence the covered Federal action.
(b) Enter the full names of the individual(s) performing services, and include full
address if different from 10(a). Enter Last Name, First Name, and Middle Initial
(MI).
11. The certifying official shall sign and date the form; print his/her name, title,
and telephone number.
According to the Paperwork Reduction Act, as amended, no persons are required to

respond to a collection of information unless it displays a valid OMB control Number. The
valid OMB control number for this information collection is OMB No. 0348-0046. Public
reporting burden for this collection of information is estimated to average 10 minutes per
response, including time for reviewing instructions, searching existing data sources,
gathering and maintaining the data needed, and completing and reviewing the collection
of information. Send comments regarding the burden estimate or any other aspect of this
collection of information, including suggestions for reducing this burden, to the Office of
Management and Budget, Paperwork Reduction Project (0348-0046), Washington, DC
20503.
42
General Decision Number: LA100004 12/09/2011 LA4
Superseded General Decision Number: LA20080004
State: Louisiana
Construction Type: Building
Counties: Acadia, Ascension, Calcasieu, East Baton Rouge,

Lafayette, Lafourche, Livingston, St Landry, St Martin,
Terrebonne and West Baton Rouge Counties in Louisiana.
BUILDING CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS (does not include residential

construction consisting of single family homes and apartments
up to and including 4 stories)
Modification Number Publication Date

0 03/12/2010
1 03/19/2010
2 06/04/2010
3 06/18/2010
4 07/23/2010
5 07/30/2010
6 09/10/2010
7 11/12/2010
8 12/03/2010
9 01/21/2011
10 02/11/2011
11 05/13/2011
12 05/20/2011
13 06/17/2011
14 07/01/2011
15 07/22/2011
16 09/16/2011
17 10/28/2011
18 11/18/2011
19 12/09/2011
CARP1075-005 01/01/2011
CALCASIEU PARISH
Rates Fringes
CARPENTER (includes
acoustical, drywall and metal
stud installation, and all
other work; excludes formwork)...$ 20.21 5.00
----------------------------------------------------------------
CARP1075-008 01/01/2011
ACADIA, LAFAYETTE, ST. LANDRY, AND ST. MARTIN PARISHES
Rates Fringes
CARPENTER (includes
43

----------------------------------------------------------------
CARP1098-003 01/01/2010
ASCENSION, EAST BATON ROUGE, LIVINGSTON, AND WEST BATON ROUGE

PARISHES
Rates Fringes
CARPENTER (includes
----------------------------------------------------------------
CARP1846-007 07/01/2011
LAFOURCHE and TERREBONNE PARISHES
Rates Fringes
CARPENTER (includes
----------------------------------------------------------------
* ELEC0130-008 12/01/2011
LAFOURCHE, ST. MARTIN (Southern Portion), AND TERREBONNE

PARISHES
Rates Fringes
ELECTRICIAN (includes low

voltage wiring and
installation of fire alarms,
security systems, telephones,
computers, and temperature
controls)........................$ 27.30 9.21
----------------------------------------------------------------
ELEC0861-012 09/01/2011
ACADIA, CALCASIEU, LAFAYETTE, AND ST. MARTIN (Northern Portion)

PARISHES
Rates Fringes

voltage wiring and
controls)........................$ 23.45 4%+9.69
----------------------------------------------------------------
ELEC0995-005 01/01/2011
44
ASCENSION, EAST BATON ROUGE, LIVINGSTON, ST. LANDRY, AND WEST

BATON ROUGE PARISHES
Rates Fringes

voltage wiring and
controls)........................$ 22.68 8.41
----------------------------------------------------------------
IRON0058-010 06/01/2010
Rates Fringes
IRONWORKER, REINFORCING..........$ 19.85 7.67

----------------------------------------------------------------
IRON0623-006 06/10/2010
ASCENSION, EAST BATON ROUGE, LAFAYETTE (Eastern Portion),

LIVINGSTON, ST. MARTIN, ST. LANDRY (Eastern Portion), and WEST
Rates Fringes

----------------------------------------------------------------
IRON0623-012 06/01/2010
ACADIA, CALCASIEU, LAFAYETTE (Western Portion), AND ST. LANDRY

(Western Portion) PARISHES
Rates Fringes

----------------------------------------------------------------
* PLUM0060-006 12/05/2011
LAFOURCHE AND TERREBONNE (City of Houma Only) PARISHES
Rates Fringes
PLUMBER (includes HVAC pipe).....$ 26.30 10.01

----------------------------------------------------------------
PLUM0106-008 06/01/2011
ACADIA, CALCASIEU, LAFAYETTE, ST. LANDRY, and ST. MARTIN

Rates Fringes

45
----------------------------------------------------------------
PLUM0198-006 07/26/2011
ASCENSION, EAST BATON ROUGE, LIVINGSTON, ST. MARTIN (Eastern

Portion), TERREBONNE, AND WEST BATON ROUGE PARISHES
Rates Fringes

----------------------------------------------------------------
SFLA0669-004 04/01/2011
Rates Fringes
SPRINKLER FITTER.................$ 25.27 13.75

----------------------------------------------------------------
SHEE0214-002 07/01/2009
Lafourche and Terrebonne Parishes
Rates Fringes
SHEET METAL WORKER (includes

HVAC Duct).......................$ 24.54 9.65
----------------------------------------------------------------
SHEE0214-006 02/01/2009
Acadia, Ascension, Calcasieu, East Baton Rouge, Lafayette,

Livingston, St. Landry, St. Martin, and West Baton Rouge
Parishes
Rates Fringes
SHEET METAL WORKER (includes

HVAC Duct).......................$ 24.37 9.205
----------------------------------------------------------------
SULA2004-002 03/24/2004
Rates Fringes
CARPENTER (formbuilding &

formsetting).....................$ 13.11 1.53
Cement Mason/Concrete Finisher...$ 12.88 0.00
Laborer, common..................$ 8.95 1.57
Power Equipment Operator

Backhoe.....................$ 12.45 0.00
Bulldozer...................$ 14.32 1.55
Crane.......................$ 15.96 3.16
ROOFER, Including Built Up,

Composition and Single Ply
Roofs............................$ 12.97 0.96
TRUCK DRIVER
46
Flatbed.....................$ 10.00 0.00

Pickup......................$ 8.80 0.00
----------------------------------------------------------------
WELDERS - Receive rate prescribed for craft performing

operation to which welding is incidental.
================================================================
Unlisted classifications needed for work not included within

the scope of the classifications listed may be added after
award only as provided in the labor standards contract clauses
(29CFR 5.5 (a) (1) (ii)).
----------------------------------------------------------------
In the listing above, the "SU" designation means that rates

listed under the identifier do not reflect collectively
bargained wage and fringe benefit rates. Other designations
indicate unions whose rates have been determined to be
prevailing.
----------------------------------------------------------------
WAGE DETERMINATION APPEALS PROCESS
1.) Has there been an initial decision in the matter? This can
be:
* an existing published wage determination

* a survey underlying a wage determination
* a Wage and Hour Division letter setting forth a position on
a wage determination matter
* a conformance (additional classification and rate) ruling
On survey related matters, initial contact, including requests

for summaries of surveys, should be with the Wage and Hour
Regional Office for the area in which the survey was conducted
because those Regional Offices have responsibility for the
Davis-Bacon survey program. If the response from this initial
contact is not satisfactory, then the process described in 2.)
and 3.) should be followed.
With regard to any other matter not yet ripe for the formal
process described here, initial contact should be with the
Branch of Construction Wage Determinations. Write to:
Branch of Construction Wage Determinations

Wage and Hour Division
U.S. Department of Labor
200 Constitution Avenue, N.W.
Washington, DC 20210
2.) If the answer to the question in 1.) is yes, then an

interested party (those affected by the action) can request
review and reconsideration from the Wage and Hour Administrator
(See 29 CFR Part 1.8 and 29 CFR Part 7). Write to:
Wage and Hour Administrator

47

The request should be accompanied by a full statement of the

interested party's position and by any information (wage
payment data, project description, area practice material,
etc.) that the requestor considers relevant to the issue.
3.) If the decision of the Administrator is not favorable, an

interested party may appeal directly to the Administrative
Review Board (formerly the Wage Appeals Board). Write to:
Administrative Review Board

4.) All decisions by the Administrative Review Board are final.
================================================================
END OF GENERAL DECISION

48
State: Louisiana
Construction Type: Heavy Industrial
Counties: Acadia, Ascension, Bossier, Caddo, Calcasieu, East

Baton Rouge, Jefferson, Lafayette, Lafourche, Livingston,
Orleans, Ouachita, Plaquemines, Rapides, St Bernard, St
Charles, St James, St John the Baptist, St Landry, St Martin,
St Tammany, Terrebonne and Webster Counties in Louisiana.
HEAVY CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS (Industrial, Processing Plants, and

Refineries)

0 03/12/2010
1 03/19/2010
2 05/21/2010
3 06/04/2010
4 07/02/2010
5 07/23/2010
6 08/13/2010
7 08/27/2010
8 09/03/2010
9 09/10/2010
10 11/12/2010
11 12/03/2010
12 01/21/2011
13 02/11/2011
14 03/18/2011
15 05/13/2011
16 06/17/2011
17 07/01/2011
18 07/22/2011
19 09/23/2011
20 10/28/2011
21 11/04/2011
22 11/18/2011
23 11/25/2011
24 12/09/2011
BOIL0037-001 01/01/2011
Acadia, Bossier, Caddo, Calcasieu, Jefferson, Lafayette,

Lafourche, Orleans, Plaquemines, Rapides, St Bernard, St
Charles, St James, St John the Baptist, St Landry, St Martin,
St Tammany, Terrebonne, and Webster Parishes
Rates Fringes
BOILERMAKER......................$ 25.73 17.62

----------------------------------------------------------------
BOIL0582-001 01/01/2011
49
ASCENSION, EAST BATON ROUGE, LIVINGSTON, AND OUACHITA PARISHES
Rates Fringes
BOILERMAKER......................$ 25.73 16.12

----------------------------------------------------------------
CARP0720-001 07/01/2006
ASCENSION, EAST BATON ROUGE, LIVINGSTON, AND ST. JAMES (North

of the Mississippi River) PARISHES
Rates Fringes
MILLWRIGHT.......................$ 27.39 3.21

----------------------------------------------------------------
CARP0764-001 07/01/2006
BOSSIER, CADDO, OUACHITA, WEBSTER, AND RAPIDES PARISHES
Rates Fringes
CARPENTER (including drywall

hanging/framing, metal studs,
and formsetting/formbuilding)....$ 17.25 5.02
MILLWRIGHT.......................$ 20.50 5.02
----------------------------------------------------------------
CARP1075-001 01/01/2011
CALCASIEU PARISH
Rates Fringes

----------------------------------------------------------------
CARP1075-006 01/01/2011
Rates Fringes

----------------------------------------------------------------
CARP1098-001 01/01/2010
ASCENSION, EAST BATON ROUGE, LIVINGSTON, AND ST. JAMES (North

of the Mississippi River) PARISHES
Rates Fringes

50
----------------------------------------------------------------
CARP1846-003 07/01/2011
JEFFERSON, LAFOURCHE, ORLEANS, PLAQUEMINES, ST. BERNARD, ST.

CHARLES, ST. JAMES (South of the Mississippi River), ST. JOHN
THE BAPTIST, ST. TAMMANY, and TERREBONNE PARISHES
Rates Fringes

MILLWRIGHT.......................$ 21.56 6.85
----------------------------------------------------------------
* ELEC0130-004 12/01/2011

CHARLES, ST. JAMES, ST. JOHN THE BAPTIST, ST. MARTIN (Southern
Portion), AND TERREBONNE PARISHES
Rates Fringes
ELECTRICIAN (including low

voltage wiring)..................$ 27.30 9.21
----------------------------------------------------------------
ELEC0194-008 03/04/2010
BOSSIER, CADDO, and WEBSTER PARISHES
Rates Fringes

voltage wiring)
Lineman and Heavy
Equipment Operator..........$ 24.50 8.74
----------------------------------------------------------------
ELEC0446-005 09/01/2011
OUACHITA PARISH
Rates Fringes

voltage wiring)..................$ 21.00 1%+9.02
----------------------------------------------------------------
ELEC0576-007 03/01/2011
RAPIDES PARISH
Rates Fringes

voltage wiring)..................$ 23.50 5.70
----------------------------------------------------------------
ELEC0861-007 09/01/2011
ACADIA, CALCASIEU, LAFAYETTE, AND ST. MARTIN (Northern Portion)

51
PARISHES
Rates Fringes

voltage wiring)..................$ 23.90 4%+9.69
----------------------------------------------------------------
ELEC0995-007 01/01/2011
ASCENSION, EAST BATON ROUGE, LIVINGSTON, AND ST. LANDRY PARISHES
Rates Fringes

voltage wiring)..................$ 22.68 8.41
----------------------------------------------------------------
ELEC1077-004 09/01/2011
ST. TAMMANY PARISH
Rates Fringes

voltage wiring)..................$ 21.75 6.74
----------------------------------------------------------------
ENGI0406-016 07/01/2010
Rates Fringes
Power equipment operators:

(Acadia, Bossier, Caddo,
Calcasieu, Lafayette,
Ouachita, Rapides, St.
Landry, St. Martin, and
Webster Parishes)
Crane, 50 to 150 tons.......$ 25.15 7.95
Crane, below 50 tons........$ 24.90 7.95
Crane, over 150 tons........$ 25.40 7.95
(Ascension, Livingston, and
St. James Parishes)
Crane, 50 to 150 tons.......$ 25.15 7.95
Crane, below 50 tons........$ 24.65 7.95
Crane, over 150 tons........$ 26.15 7.95
Power equiment operators:
(Lafourche, St. Bernard, St.
Charles, St. John the
Baptist, St. Tammany, and
Terrebonne Parishes)
Crane, 50 to 150 tons.......$ 25.15 7.95
Crane, below 50 tons........$ 24.65 7.95
Crane, over 150 tons........$ 26.15 7.95
Power Equipment Operators
(East and West Baton Rouge)
Crane, 50 to 150 tons.......$ 25.15 7.95
Crane, below 50 tons........$ 24.65 7.95
Crane, over 150 tons........$ 26.15 7.95
52
(Orleans, Jefferson,
Plaquemines)
Crane, 50 to 150 tons.......$ 25.15 7.95
Crane, below 50 tons........$ 24.65 7.95
Crane, over 150 tons........$ 26.15 7.95
----------------------------------------------------------------
IRON0058-005 06/01/2010

CHARLES, ST. JAMES (Southeastern Portion), ST. JOHN THE
BAPTIST, ST. TAMMANY, and TERREBONNE PARISHES
Rates Fringes
Ironworker, reinforcing and

structural.......................$ 19.85 7.67
----------------------------------------------------------------
IRON0623-004 06/01/2010
ASCENSION, EAST BATON ROUGE, LAFAYETTE (Eastern Portion),

LIVINGSTON, ST. JAMES (Northwestern Portion), ST. LANDRY, and
ST. MARTIN PARISH
Rates Fringes
IRONWORKER, STRUCTURAL AND

REINFORCING......................$ 19.91 7.32
----------------------------------------------------------------
IRON0623-009 06/01/2010
BOSSIER, CADDO, AND WEBSTER PARISHES
Rates Fringes

structural.......................$ 19.91 7.32
----------------------------------------------------------------
IRON0623-013 06/01/2010
ACADIA, CALCASIEU, LAFAYETTE (Western Portion), OUACHITA, AND

RAPIDES PARISHES
Rates Fringes

structural.......................$ 19.91 7.32
----------------------------------------------------------------
LABO0207-004 07/01/2006
CALCASIEU PARISH
Rates Fringes
Laborer, common..................$ 12.79 1.73

----------------------------------------------------------------
LABO0689-002 07/01/2006
53

CHARLES, ST. JAMES, ST. JOHN THE BAPTIST, ST. TAMMANY, AND
TERREBONNE PARISHES
Rates Fringes
Laborer, common
Jefferson, Orleans, St.
Bernard, and Terrebonne
Parishes....................$ 12.79 1.73
Lafourche, Plaquemines,
St. Charles, and St. John
the Baptist Parishes........$ 11.19 1.73
St. James and St. Tammany
Parishes....................$ 10.00 1.73
----------------------------------------------------------------
LABO0692-001 05/01/2005
BOSSIER, CADDO, AND WEBSTER PARISHES
Rates Fringes
Laborer, common..................$ 12.00 2.10

----------------------------------------------------------------
LABO0762-001 01/01/2005
ACADIA, FRANKLIN, LAFAYETTE, OUACHITA, RAPIDES, ST. LANDRY,

AND ST. MARTIN PARISHES
Rates Fringes
Laborer, common..................$ 11.00 3.50

----------------------------------------------------------------
LABO1177-001 09/01/2005
ASCENSION, EAST BATON ROUGE, AND LIVINGSTON PARISHES
Rates Fringes
Laborer, common..................$ 15.00 2.77

----------------------------------------------------------------
PAIN1244-003 04/01/2005
NEW ORLEANS AREA - ASCENSION, EAST BATON ROUGE, JEFFERSON,

LAFAYETTE, LAFOURCHE, LIVINGSTON, ORLEANS, PLAQUEMINES, ST.
BERNARD, ST. CHARLES, ST. JAMES, ST. JOHN THE BAPTIST, ST.
LANDRY, ST. MARTIN, ST. TAMMANY, AND TERREBONNE PARISHES
Rates Fringes
PAINTER (brush, roller,

spray, and sandblaster)..........$ 15.88 4.32
----------------------------------------------------------------
PAIN1244-004 09/01/2003
54
LAKE CHARLES AREA - ACADIA AND CALCASIEU PARISHES
Rates Fringes

----------------------------------------------------------------
PAIN1244-005 02/01/2004
SHREVEPORT AREA - BOSSIER, CADDO, OUACHITA, RAPIDES, AND

WEBSTER PARISHES
Rates Fringes

----------------------------------------------------------------
* PLUM0060-001 12/05/2011

CHARLES, ST. JAMES (Southeastern Portion), ST. JOHN THE
BAPTIST, ST. TAMMANY, AND TERREBONNE PARISHES
Rates Fringes
PIPEFITTER (excluding HVAC

pipe)............................$ 26.30 10.01
PLUMBER (including HVAC pipe
and setting system)..............$ 26.30 10.01
----------------------------------------------------------------
PLUM0106-001 06/01/2011
ACADIA, CALCASIEU, LAFAYETTE, ST. LANDRY, and ST. MARTIN

Rates Fringes
PLUMBER/PIPEFITTER (including
HVAC pipe and setting system)....$ 24.00 11.65
----------------------------------------------------------------
PLUM0141-001 08/01/2011
Rates Fringes
----------------------------------------------------------------
PLUM0198-001 07/26/2011
ASCENSION, EAST BATON ROUGE, LIVINGSTON, ST. JAMES

(Northwestern Portion), AND ST. MARTIN (Eastern Portion)
PARISHES
55
Rates Fringes
----------------------------------------------------------------
PLUM0247-001 05/01/2011
RAPIDES PARISH
Rates Fringes
----------------------------------------------------------------
PLUM0659-003 07/01/2011
OUACHITA PARISH
Rates Fringes
----------------------------------------------------------------
SULA2004-005 05/19/2004
Rates Fringes
Power Equipment Operator

Oiler.......................$ 11.16 3.09
----------------------------------------------------------------

================================================================

(29CFR 5.5 (a) (1) (ii)).
----------------------------------------------------------------

prevailing.
----------------------------------------------------------------
be:

56








================================================================

57
State: Louisiana
Construction Type: Heavy
Counties: Acadia, Ascension, Bossier, Caddo, Calcasieu, East

Baton Rouge, Lafayette, Lafourche, Livingston, Ouachita,
Rapides, St Landry, St Martin, Terrebonne, Webster and West
Baton Rouge Counties in Louisiana.
HEAVY CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS (includes flood control, water &

sewer lines, and water wells; excludes elevated storage tanks,
industrial construction-chemical processing, power plants, and
refineries)

0 03/12/2010
1 03/19/2010
2 09/03/2010
3 09/10/2010
4 01/21/2011
5 02/11/2011
6 03/18/2011
7 05/13/2011
8 06/17/2011
9 07/01/2011
10 07/22/2011
11 09/16/2011
12 11/04/2011
13 11/18/2011
14 12/09/2011
CARP0764-003 07/01/2006
BOSSIER, CADDO, OUACHITA, RAPIDES, AND WEBSTER PARISHES
Rates Fringes
CARPENTER
(formbuilding/formsetting).......$ 17.25 5.02
----------------------------------------------------------------
CARP1075-004 01/01/2011
CALCASIEU PARISH
Rates Fringes
CARPENTER
----------------------------------------------------------------
CARP1075-009 01/01/2011

58
Rates Fringes
CARPENTER
----------------------------------------------------------------
CARP1098-004 01/01/2010
ASCENSION, EAST BATON ROUGE, LIVINGSTON, AND WEST BATON ROUGE

PARISHES
Rates Fringes
CARPENTER
----------------------------------------------------------------
CARP1846-008 07/01/2011
Rates Fringes
CARPENTER
----------------------------------------------------------------
* ELEC0130-009 12/01/2011
LAFOURCHE AND TERREBONNE PARISHES
Rates Fringes
ELECTRICIAN......................$ 27.30 9.21

----------------------------------------------------------------
ELEC0194-007 03/04/2010
Rates Fringes
ELECTRICIAN
Lineman and Heavy
Equipment Operator..........$ 24.50 8.74
----------------------------------------------------------------
ELEC0446-007 09/01/2011
OUACHITA PARISH
Rates Fringes
ELECTRICIAN......................$ 21.00 1%+9.02

----------------------------------------------------------------
ELEC0576-006 03/01/2011
RAPIDES PARISH
Rates Fringes
ELECTRICIAN......................$ 23.50 5.70

----------------------------------------------------------------
59
ELEC0861-006 09/01/2011
ACADIA, CALCASIEU, LAFAYETTE, AND ST. MARTIN PARISHES
Rates Fringes
ELECTRICIAN......................$ 23.90 4%+9.69

----------------------------------------------------------------
ELEC0995-006 01/01/2011
ASCENSION, EAST BATON ROUGE, LIVINGSTON, ST. LANDRY, AND WEST

Rates Fringes
ELECTRICIAN......................$ 22.68 8.41

----------------------------------------------------------------
SULA2004-006 04/29/2004
Rates Fringes
CARPENTER (all other work).......$ 12.81 0.00
Laborers
Common......................$ 8.20 0.00
Pipelayer...................$ 9.45 0.00
Power Equipment Operators

Backhoe/Excavator...........$ 13.01 0.00
Bulldozer...................$ 13.83 0.00
Crane.......................$ 16.62 3.28
Dragline....................$ 15.16 0.00
Front End Loader............$ 11.50 0.00
Motor Grader/Blade..........$ 11.75 0.00
Oiler.......................$ 8.59 2.50
Trackhoe....................$ 12.64 0.00
Water Well Driller..........$ 11.91 2.44
Winch.......................$ 11.38 0.00
Truck Driver, Dump...............$ 10.25 0.00

----------------------------------------------------------------

================================================================

(29CFR 5.5 (a) (1) (ii)).
----------------------------------------------------------------

60

prevailing.
----------------------------------------------------------------
be:









61
================================================================

MEB - COF FY2012 PN64415 FPMEBCOF
PROJECT TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01 00 00.00 44 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE

01 32 01.00 10 PROJECT SCHEDULE
01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
01 33 29 LEED(TM) DOCUMENTATION
01 35 12.00 44 SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES FOR FORT POLK
01 35 26 GOVERNMENTAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
01 38 00 AIR BARRIER SYSTEM QUALITY CONTROL
01 42 00 SOURCES FOR REFERENCE PUBLICATIONS
01 45 00.10 10 QUALITY CONTROL SYSTEM (QCS)
01 45 01 USACE QUALITY CONTROL
01 50 00 TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
01 52 00.00 44 GOVERNMENT FIELD OFFICE
01 56 00.00 44 DUST CONTROL
01 57 20.00 10 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION
01 57 23 TEMPORARY STORM WATER POLLUTION CONTROL
01 57 24.03 44 STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN (Louisiana)
01 57 25.00 44 SWPP PLAN INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE REPORT FORM
01 58 00 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION
01 62 35 RECYCLED / RECOVERED MATERIALS
01 71 23.00 44 SURVEY, LAYOUT, AND OTHER DATA
01 74 19 CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION WASTE MANAGEMENT
01 78 02.00 44 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
01 91 00 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS
DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS
02 41 00 DEMOLITION
02 82 16.00 20 ENGINEERING CONTROL OF ASBESTOS CONTAINING MATERIALS
02 83 13.00 20 LEAD IN CONSTRUCTION
02 84 00.00 44 REMOVAL, RECYCLING AND DISPOSAL OF REGULATED MATERIALS
DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE
03 11 13.00 10 STRUCTURAL CONCRETE FORMWORK

03 15 00.00 10 CONCRETE ACCESSORIES
03 20 00.00 10 CONCRETE REINFORCING
03 31 00.00 10 CAST-IN-PLACE STRUCTURAL CONCRETE
DIVISION 04 - MASONRY
04 20 00 MASONRY
04 21 13.13 NONBEARING MASONRY VENEER/STEEL STUD WALLS
DIVISION 05 - METALS
05 05 23.13 10 ULTRASONIC INSPECTION OF WELDMENTS

05 05 23 WELDING, STRUCTURAL
05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL
05 21 19 OPEN WEB STEEL JOIST FRAMING
05 30 00 STEEL DECKS
05 50 13 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FABRICATIONS
05 51 00 METAL STAIRS
05 52 00 METAL RAILINGS
05 53 00 METAL GRATINGS
PROJECT TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 1

DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES
06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY
06 61 16 SOLID POLYMER (SOLID SURFACING) FABRICATIONS
DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07 11 13 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING
07 13 53 ELASTOMERIC SHEET WATERPROOFING
07 21 13 BOARD AND BLOCK INSULATION
07 21 16 MINERAL FIBER BLANKET INSULATION
07 22 00 ROOF AND DECK INSULATION
07 42 13 METAL WALL PANELS
07 60 00 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL
07 61 14.00 20 STEEL STANDING SEAM ROOFING
07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING
07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS
DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS
08 11 13 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES

08 11 16 ALUMINUM DOORS AND FRAMES
08 14 00 WOOD DOORS
08 33 23 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
08 34 59 VAULT DOORS AND DAY GATES
08 51 13 ALUMINUM WINDOWS
08 62 23 BID OPTION - TUBULAR DAYLIGHTING DEVICES
08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE
08 81 00 GLAZING
08 91 00 METAL WALL LOUVERS
DIVISION 09 - FINISHES
09 06 90 COLOR SCHEDULE
09 22 00 SUPPORTS FOR PLASTER AND GYPSUM BOARD
09 29 00 GYPSUM BOARD
09 30 00 CERAMIC TILE, QUARRY TILE, AND PAVER TILE
09 51 00 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
09 65 00 RESILIENT FLOORING
09 65 33 CONDUCTIVE VINYL FLOORING
09 65 36 STATIC-CONTROL RESILIENT FLOORING
09 68 00 CARPET
09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES
10 10 00 VISUAL COMMUNICATIONS SPECIALTIES

10 14 01 EXTERIOR SIGNAGE
10 14 02 INTERIOR SIGNAGE
10 21 13 TOILET COMPARTMENTS
10 22 13 WIRE MESH PARTITIONS
10 26 13 WALL AND CORNER GUARDS
10 28 13 TOILET ACCESSORIES
10 44 16 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
10 51 13.00 METAL LOCKERS
10 51 13.01 EXPANDED METAL LOCKERS - TA-50 STORAGE
10 56 13 STEEL SHELVING

DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS
12 21 00 WINDOW BLINDS
12 48 13.13 ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS
12 65 00 LOCKER ROOM BENCHES
DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
13 09 00.00 44 ANTI-TERRORISM/FORCE PROTECTION MEASURES

13 34 19 METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
DIVISION 21 - FIRE SUPPRESSION
21 13 13.00 10 WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEM, FIRE PROTECTION
DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING
22 00 00 PLUMBING, GENERAL PURPOSE

22 08 00.00 10 COMMISSIONING OF PLUMBING SYSTEMS
22 08 00 COMMISSIONING OF FLAT PLATE SOLAR COLLECTOR SYSTEMS
22 33 30.00 10 SOLAR WATER HEATING EQUIPMENT
DIVISION 23 - HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING
23 00 00 AIR SUPPLY, DISTRIBUTION, VENTILATION, AND EXHAUST SYSTEMS

23 03 00.00 20 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS
23 08 00.00 10 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC SYSTEMS
23 09 23 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL FOR HVAC AND OTHER LOCAL BUILDING
SYSTEMS
23 11 25 FACILITY GAS PIPING
23 25 00 CHEMICAL TREATMENT OF WATER FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS
23 52 00 HEATING BOILERS
23 64 26 CHILLED, AND CONDENSER WATER PIPING SYSTEMS
23 65 00 COOLING TOWERS
23 82 02.00 10 UNITARY HEATING AND COOLING EQUIPMENT
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 00 00.00 20 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

26 05 48.00 10 SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
26 05 71.00 40 LOW VOLTAGE OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES
26 08 00.00 10 COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 09 23.00 40 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
26 12 19.10 THREE-PHASE PAD-MOUNTED TRANSFORMERS
26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
26 24 16.00 40 PANELBOARDS
26 41 01.00 10 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM
26 42 14.00 10 CATHODIC PROTECTION SYSTEM (SACRIFICIAL ANODE)
26 51 00 INTERIOR LIGHTING
26 56 00 EXTERIOR LIGHTING
DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS
27 05 14.00 10 CABLE TELEVISION PREMISES DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM

27 05 28.36 40 CABLE TRAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
27 10 00 BUILDING TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING SYSTEM
27 51 16.10 44 PUBLIC ADDRESS/TELEPHONE INTERFACE SYSTEM

DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
28 31 76 INTERIOR FIRE ALARM AND MASS NOTIFICATION SYSTEM
DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK
31 00 00 EARTHWORK
31 11 00 CLEARING AND GRUBBING
31 31 16 SOIL TREATMENT FOR SUBTERRANEAN TERMITE CONTROL
DIVISION 32 - EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS
32 01 19 FIELD MOLDED SEALANTS FOR SEALING JOINTS IN RIGID

PAVEMENTS
32 11 16 BASE COURSE FOR RIGID AND FLEXIBLE PAVING
32 12 10 BITUMINOUS TACK AND PRIME COATS
32 12 16 HOT-MIX ASPHALT (HMA) FOR ROADS
32 13 11 CONCRETE PAVEMENT FOR OTHER HEAVY-DUTY PAVEMENTS
32 15 00 AGGREGATE SURFACE COURSE
32 16 13 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND CURBS AND GUTTERS
32 17 23.00 20 PAVEMENT MARKINGS
32 31 13 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES
32 91 19.00 44 TOPSOILING
32 92 31.00 44 ESTABLISHMENT OF TURF
32 93 31.00 44 PLANTING OF TREES, SHRUBS, AND VINES
DIVISION 33 - UTILITIES
33 40 00 STORM DRAINAGE UTILITIES

33 51 15 NATURAL-GAS DISTRIBUTION
33 70 02.00 10 ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM, UNDERGROUND
33 71 01.00 40 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION
33 82 00 TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTSIDE PLANT (OSP)
DIVISION 34 - TRANSPORTATION
34 41 15.00 44 TRAFFIC AND HANDICAP PARKING SIGNS
APPENDICES
APPENDIX A - DESIGN PHASE COMISSIONING PLAN

APPENDIX B - OWNER'S PROJECT REQUIREMENTS
APPENDIX C - AMERICAN WATER SPECIFICATIONS
-- End of Project Table of Contents --

SECTION 01 00 00.00 44
CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SCHEDULE
Commence, prosecute, and complete the work under this contract in

accordance with the following schedule and Section 00 72 00 CONTRACT
CLAUSES COMMENCEMENT, PROSECUTION AND COMPLETION OF WORK and LIQUIDATED
DAMAGES:
Item of Work Commencement Completion of Liquidated

of Work Work Damages per
(Calendar days) (Calendar calendar days
days)
(1) Construction of Notice to 120 $ 1,139
Emergency Access Proceed
Road, exclusive
of all other work
listed separately.
(2) Completion of all See form SF 540 ---

construction 1442.
work including
Establishment of
Turf and
Landscaping
(3 Construction of Notice to 540 ---

all Exterior Work Proceed
outside the
building(s)'s
5-foot line(s)
(Including
earthwork,
utilities,
paving,
sidewalks, curbs
and gutters,
screen walls,
turfing,
landscapingm and
all other work
not listed
separately)
( ) O & M Manuals ** ** See Bidding

Schedule for
SECTION 01 00 00.00 44 Page 1

Item of Work Commencement Completion of Liquidated

of Work Work Damages per
(Calendar days) (Calendar calendar days
days)
( ) Final Record *** *** See Bidding
Drawings Schedule for
Note for CLIN#1: The Contractor shall schedule completion of the Emergency
Access Road at the beginning of his construction activities. The Emergency
Access Road shall be completed as shown on the drawings and in accordance
with specifications including earthwork, curbing, drainage, and concrete
paving. The Contractor shall maintain and repair the emergency access road to
new conditions prior to completion of the project. The Contractor shall
complete the Emergency Access Road within the first 120 days after Contract
Notice to Proceed.
Note: Contractor shall have access to the COF site 200 days after
Notice to Proceed of the separate site contract that includes utilities
and grading within the COF area. This separate site contract is tentatively
scheduled to be awarded 2 March 2011.
NOTE: All work on this project shall be completed within the number of
calender days stated in Item of Work (2) above, inclusive of all review
periods and Government phasing requirements specified. If the
Government accepts a proposal for a completion period of lesser
duration, and such proposal alters the time periods for review and
phasing, the Contract shall be read to include the original periods for
review and phasing. If a completion period of lesser duration is
proposed and accepted by the Government, the accepted completion period
will replace the original construction schedule listed above in the
Schedule. If an alternate completion period is proposed, the Bid
Schedule must reflect pricing information for the alternate proposed
completion period. The liquidated damages stated above will be applied
for each calendar day the Contractor exceeds the Contract scheduled
duration. See Section 00 21 00 PROPOSAL SUBMISSION INSTRUCTIONS,
CONDITIONS, NOTICE TO OFFERORS, BASIS OF AWARD, AND LOCAL INSTRUCTIONS
for additional information.
*Establishment of Turf
Planting for turfing work shall be accomplished during the first

planting season prior to substantial completion of building
construction. ]
** Operation and Maintenance Manuals: 6 copies of approved O&M Manuals

for each building shall be turned in to the Government 60 days before
completion of the respective Item of Work. See Section 01 78 02.00 44
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS, paragraph OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS.
*** Record Drawings: See Section 01 78 02.00 44 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS,

paragraph titled RECORD DRAWINGS.
1.1.1 Testing of Heating and Air-Conditioning Systems
The times stated for completion of this project includes all required
testing specified in appropriate specification sections of heating, air
conditioning and ventilation systems including HVAC Commissioning.
Exception: boiler combustion efficiency test, boiler full load tests,
SECTION 01 00 00.00 44 Page 2

cooling tower performance tests, and refrigeration equipment full load

tests, when specified in the applicable specifications, shall be preformed
in the appropriate heating/cooling season as determined by the Contracting
Officer.
1.2 TIME EXTENSIONS FOR UNUSUALLY SEVERE WEATHER (OCT 1989)

(ER 415-1-15)(52.0001-4038 1/96)
a. This provision specifies the procedure for determination of time

extensions for unusually severe weather in accordance with the contract
clause FAR 52.249-10 entitled "DEFAULT: (FIXED PRICE CONSTRUCTION)." In
order for the Contracting Officer to award a time extension under this
clause, the following conditions must be satisfied:
(1) The weather experienced at the project site during the contract period
must be found to be unusually severe, that is, more severe than the adverse
weather anticipated for the project location during any given month.
(2) The unusually severe weather must actually cause a delay to the
completion of the project. The delay must be beyond the control and
without the fault or negligence of the contractor.
b. The following schedule of monthly anticipated adverse weather delays

due to precipitation and temperature is based on National Oceanic and
Atmospheric Administration (NOAA) or similar data for the project location
and will constitute the base line for monthly weather time evaluations.
The contractor's progress schedule must reflect these anticipated adverse
weather delays in all weather dependent activities. Wind is not considered
in the Monthly Anticipated Adverse Weather Calendar Day Schedule.
MONTHLY ANTICIPATED ADVERSE WEATHER DELAY

WORK DAYS BASED ON (5) DAY WORK WEEK
KILLEEN, TX AREA (FORT HOOD, BELTON AND STILLHOUSE LAKES)
JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC
4 4 4 4 6 4 3 3 4 4 3 4
c. Upon acknowledgment of the Notice to Proceed (NTP) and continuing

throughout the contract, the contractor will record on the daily CQC
report, the occurrence of adverse weather and resultant impact to normally
scheduled work. Actual adverse weather delay days must prevent work on
critical activities for 50 percent or more of the contractor's scheduled
work day.
The number of actual adverse weather delay days shall include days impacted
by actual adverse weather (even if adverse weather occurred in previous
month), be calculated chronologically from the first to the last day of
each month, and be recorded as full days. If the number of actual adverse
weather delay days exceeds the number of days anticipated in paragraph "b",
above, the Contracting Officer will convert any qualifying delays to
calendar days, giving full consideration for equivalent fair weather work
days, and issue a modification in accordance with the contract clause
entitled "Default (Fixed Price Construction)."
SECTION 01 00 00.00 44 Page 3

1.3 CONSTRUCTION PHASING
1.3.1 Superintendence Of Subcontractors
a. The Contractor shall be required to furnish the following, in addition

to the superintendence required by the Contract Clause entitled
"SUPERINTENDENCE BY CONTRACTOR":
(1) If more than 50% and less than 70% of the value of the contract work
is subcontracted, one superintendent shall be provided at the site and on
the Contractor's payroll to be responsible for coordinating, directing,
inspecting and expediting the subcontract work.
(2) If 70% or more of the value of the work is subcontracted, the

Contractor shall be required to furnish two such superintendents to be
responsible for coordinating, directing, inspecting and expediting the
subcontract work.
b. If the Contracting Officer, at any time after 50% of the subcontracted

work has been completed, finds that satisfactory progress is being made, he
may waive all or part of the above requirement for additional
superintendence subject to the right of the Contracting Officer to
reinstate such requirement if at any time during the progress of the
remaining work he finds that satisfactory progress is not being made.
1.4 WORK RESTRICTIONS
1.4.1 Working Hours
Normal working hours are Monday through Friday, 0630 to 1700 hours.
Requests to work at times other than the stated working hours, including
scheduled utility outages discussed below, shall be submitted to the
Contracting Officer for approval. Contractor shall not work outside of the
above stated working hours without prior written approval of the
1.4.2 Security Requirements
1.4.2.1 Installation Entrance Requirements
Entrance requirements to the Installation are specified in Section 01 35

12.00 44 SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES FOR FORT POLK.
1.4.3 Identification of Employees
The Contractor shall be responsible for furnishing to each employee, and

for requiring each employee engaged on the work to display, identification
as approved and directed by the Contracting Officer. Prescribed
identification shall immediately be delivered to the Contracting Officer
for cancellation upon release of any employee. When required, the
Contractor shall obtain and provide fingerprints of persons employed on the
project. Contractor and subcontractor personnel shall wear identifying
markings on hard hats clearly identifying the company for whom the employee
works.
Contractor personnel shall wear visible Contractor-furnished employee

identification badges while physically on the Installation. Each badge
SECTION 01 00 00.00 44 Page 4

shall include, as a minimum, the company name, employee name, photograph,

Contract Title, Contract Number, and the expiration date of the badge.
1.5 UTILITIES
1.5.1 Payment for Utility Services
Water, sewer, natural gas, electricity services are available from

Government-operated systems and will be charged to the Contractor at rates
as provided in Contract Clause 52.236-14 AVAILABILITY AND USE OF UTILITY
SERVICES.
Electricity and gas are Government owned. Water and sewer have been
privatized and are third party owned. All utilities are administered by
the Government regardless of ownership. Water, sewer, natural gas, and
electrical services are available. To request utility connections or rate
information, please e-mail edward.r.ducote@us.army.mil and copy the DPW
Project Manager. (For this project, copy me at
mark.s.gremillion@us.army.mil).
Water or wastewater system modifications require advance approval of plans

and specifications by Louisiana Dept of Health and Hospitals (LDHH).
For information on communications services, please contact the Directorate

of Information Management, 337-531-8727.
a) Use of Government services:
(1) Contractors must reimburse Government for utilities usage

(electricity, gas, water, sewer, and refuse) for admin trailer and
construction sites.
(2) A utilities sales agreement must be signed by Contractor prior
to connection/use of utilities services.
(3) Contractor must provide all metering devices (per Fort Hood
Specification) for trailer and construction project.
(4) Current utilities rates can be obtained from 254-287-7671.
b) Meters and Temporary Connections
The Contractor, at its expense and in a manner satisfactory to the

Contracting Officer, shall provide and maintain necessary temporary
connections, distribution lines, and meter bases required to measure the
amount of each utility used for the purpose of determining charges. The
Contractor shall notify the Contracting Officer, in writing, 5 working days
before utility (gas, water, sewer, electricity) connection is desired so
that a utilities contract can be established. The Contractor will provide a
meter and make the final hot connection after inspection and approval of
the Contractor's temporary wiring installation. Sewage usage is based on
water usage and does not require a meter.
c) Advance Deposit
An advance deposit for utilities consisting of an estimated month's usage

or a minimum of $50.00 will be required. The last monthly bills for the
fiscal year will normally be offset by the deposit and adjustments will be
billed or returned as appropriate. Services to be rendered for the next
fiscal year, beginning 1 October, will require a new deposit. Notification
SECTION 01 00 00.00 44 Page 5

of the due date for this deposit will be mailed to the Contractor prior to
the end of the current fiscal year.
d) Final Meter Reading
Before completion of the work and final acceptance of the work by the
Government, the Contractor shall notify the Contracting Officer, in
writing, 5 working days before termination is desired. The Government will
take a final meter reading; after which, the Contractor shall disconnect
service, and remove the meters. The Contractor shall also remove all the
temporary distribution lines, meter bases, and associated paraphernalia.
The Contractor shall pay all outstanding utility bills before final
acceptance of the work by the Government.
1.5.2 Coordination
For Contractor Telephone And Internet Service, the Contractor shall

coordinate with ITBC and the local phone company for contractor telephone
and internet service during construction.
1.5.3 Outages
1.5.4 Utility Connection Fees
The Contractor shall acquire all utility services as shown on the plans
without additional expense to the Government. The Contractor shall be
responsible for all connection charges, permits, inspection charges, and
relocation charges associated with any and all utility services and shall
include the costs thereof in the contract price.
1.6 STREET CLOSINGS
The Contractor shall coordinate all requests for street closings with the
Contracting Officer in writing 14 days prior to date of requested outage:
a. One lane traffic shall be maintained at all times; at least two

flag persons will be on duty to assist traffic in the open lane, when
other lanes are closed due to the Contractor's operations. Flag
persons will meet the requirements of Item 7.7 of the Texas State
Department of Highways and Public Transportation Standard
Specifications for Construction of Highways, Streets, and Bridges,
Current Ed.
b. The final street repair shall be completed within 14 days
SECTION 01 00 00.00 44 Page 6

after the start of any street crossing. Any part of the street
returned to service prior to final repair shall be maintained smooth
with hot-mix cold-lay surface course.
c. Open cuts across paved roads and streets for utility crossings
will not be allowed. Utility crossings will be accomplished by boring
or jacking procedures only.
PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED)
-- End of Section --
SECTION 01 00 00.00 44 Page 7

SECTION 01 32 01.00 10
PROJECT SCHEDULE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the

extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
basic designation only.
U.S. ARMY CORPS OF ENGINEERS (USACE)
ECB 2005-10 (2005) Scheduling Requirements for Testing

of Mechanical Systems in Construction
Contracts
ER 1-1-11 (1995) Administration -- Progress,

Schedules, and Network Analysis Systems
1.2 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;

submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When
used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office
that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in
accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals
Project Schedule; G
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
Designate an authorized representative to be responsible for the

preparation of the schedule and all required updating (activity status) and
preparation of reports. The authorized representative shall be experienced
in scheduling projects similar in nature to this project and shall be
experienced in the use of the scheduling software that meets the
requirements of this specification.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Prepare for approval a Project Schedule, as specified herein, pursuant to

the Contract Clause, SCHEDULE FOR CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTS. Show in the
schedule the sequence in which the Contractor proposes to perform the work
and dates on which the Contractor contemplates starting and completing all
schedule activities. The scheduling of the entire project, including the
design and construction sequences, is required. The scheduling of
SECTION 01 32 01.00 10 Page 1

construction is the responsibility of the Contractor. Contractor

management personnel shall actively participate in its development.
Subcontractors and suppliers working on the project shall also contribute
in developing and maintaining an accurate Project Schedule. Provide a
schedule that is a forward planning as well as a project monitoring tool.
3.1.1 Approved Project Schedule
Use the approved Project Schedule to measure the progress of the work and
to aid in evaluating time extensions. Make the schedule cost loaded and
activity coded. The schedule will provide the basis for all progress
payments. If the Contractor fails to submit any schedule within the time
prescribed, the Contracting Officer may withhold approval of progress
payments until the Contractor submits the required schedule.
3.1.2 Schedule Status Reports
Provide a Schedule Status Report on at least a monthly basis. If, in the

opinion of the Contracting Officer, the Contractor falls behind the
approved schedule, take steps necessary to improve its progress including
those that may be required by the Contracting Officer, without additional
cost to the Government. In this circumstance, the Contracting Officer may
require the Contractor to increase the number of shifts, overtime
operations, days of work, and/or the amount of construction plant, and to
submit for approval any supplementary schedule or schedules as the
Contracting Officer deems necessary to demonstrate how the approved rate of
progress will be regained.
3.1.3 Default Terms
Failure of the Contractor to comply with the requirements of the

Contracting Officer shall be grounds for a determination, by the
Contracting Officer, that the Contractor is not prosecuting the work with
sufficient diligence to ensure completion within the time specified in the
contract. Upon making this determination, the Contracting Officer may
terminate the Contractor's right to proceed with the work, or any separable
part of it, in accordance with the default terms of the contract.
3.2 BASIS FOR PAYMENT AND COST LOADING
Use the schedule as the basis for determining contract earnings during each
update period and therefore the amount of each progress payment. Lack of
an approved schedule update, or qualified scheduling personnel, will result
in the inability of the Contracting Officer to evaluate contract earned
value for the purposes of payment. Failure of the Contractor to provide
all required information will result in the disapproval of the preliminary,
initial and subsequent schedule updates. In the event schedule revisions
are directed by the Contracting Officer and those revisions have not been
included in subsequent revisions or updates, the Contracting Officer may
hold retainage up to the maximum allowed by contract, each payment period,
until such revisions to the Project Schedule have been made. Activity cost
loading shall be reasonable, as determined by the Contracting Officer. The
aggregate value of all activities coded to a contract CLIN shall equal the
value of the CLIN on the Schedule.
3.3 PROJECT SCHEDULE DETAILED REQUIREMENTS
The computer software system utilized to produce and update the Project
Schedule shall be capable of meeting all requirements of this
SECTION 01 32 01.00 10 Page 2

specification. Failure of the Contractor to meet the requirements of this

specification will result in the disapproval of the schedule.
3.3.1 Critical Path Method
Use the Critical Path Method (CPM) of network calculation to generate the
Project Schedule. Prepare the Project Schedule using the Precedence
Diagram Method (PDM).
3.3.2 Level of Detail Required
Develop the Project Schedule to an appropriate level of detail. Failure to

develop the Project Schedule to an appropriate level of detail, as
determined by the Contracting Officer, will result in its disapproval. The
Contracting Officer will consider, but is not limited to, the following
characteristics and requirements to determine appropriate level of detail:
3.3.2.1 Activity Durations
Reasonable activity durations are those that allow the progress of ongoing
activities to be accurately determined between update periods. Less than 2
percent of all non-procurement activities shall have Original Durations
(OD) greater than 20 work days or 30 calendar days. Procurement activities
are defined herein.
3.3.2.2 Procurement Activities
The schedule must include activities associated with the submittal,

approval, procurement, fabrication and delivery of long lead materials,
equipment, fabricated assemblies and supplies. Long lead procurement
activities are those with an anticipated procurement sequence of over 90
calendar days. A typical procurement sequence includes the string of
activities: submit, approve, procure, fabricate, and deliver.
3.3.2.3 Mandatory Tasks
The following tasks must be included and properly scheduled:
a. Submission, review and acceptance of design packages.
b. Submission of mechanical/electrical/information systems layout

drawings.
c. Submission and approval of O & M manuals.
d. Submission and approval of as-built drawings.
e. Submission and approval of 1354 data and installed equipment lists.
f. Submission and approval of testing and air balance (TAB).
g. Submission of TAB specialist design review report.
h. Submission and approval of fire protection specialist.
i. Submission and approval of testing and balancing of HVAC plus

commissioning plans and data. Develop the schedule logic associated
with testing and commissioning of mechanical systems to a level of
detail consistent with ECB 2005-10.
SECTION 01 32 01.00 10 Page 3

j. Air and water balancing.
k. HVAC commissioning.
l. Controls testing plan submission.
m. Controls testing.
n. Performance Verification testing.
o. Other systems testing, if required.
p. Contractor's pre-final inspection.
q. Correction of punchlist from Contractor's pre-final inspection.
r. Government's pre-final inspection.
s. Correction of punch list from Government's pre-final inspection.
t. Final inspection.
3.3.2.4 Government Activities
Show Government and other agency activities that could impact progress.
These activities include, but are not limited to: approvals, inspections,
utility tie-in, Government Furnished Equipment (GFE) and Notice to Proceed
(NTP) for phasing requirements.
3.3.2.5 Activity Responsibility Coding (RESP)
Assign responsibility Code for all activities to the Prime Contractor,

Subcontractor or Government agency responsible for performing the
activity. Activities coded with a Government Responsibility code include,
but are not limited to: Government approvals, Government design reviews,
environmental permit approvals by State regulators, Government Furnished
Equipment (GFE) and Notice to Proceed (NTP) for phasing requirements. Code
all activities not coded with a Government Responsibility Code to the Prime
Contractor or Subcontractor responsible to perform the work. Activities
shall not have more than one Responsibility Code. Examples of acceptable
activity code values are: DOR (for the designer of record); ELEC (for the
electrical subcontractor); MECH (for the mechanical subcontractor); and
GOVT (for USACE). Unacceptable code values are abbreviations of the names
of subcontractors.
3.3.2.6 Activity Work Area Coding
Assign Work Area code to activities based upon the work area in which the
activity occurs. Define work areas based on resource constraints or space
constraints that would preclude a resource, such as a particular trade or
craft work crew, from working in more than one work area at a time due to
restraints on resources or space. Examples of Work Area Coding include
different areas within a floor of a building, different floors within a
building, and different buildings within a complex of buildings.
Activities shall not have more than one Work Area Code. Not all activities
are required to be Work Area coded. A lack of Work Area coding will
indicate the activity is not resource or space constrained.
SECTION 01 32 01.00 10 Page 4

3.3.2.7 Contract Changes/Requests for Equitable Adjustment (REA) Coding

(MODF)
Assign Activity code to any activity or sequence of activities added to the

schedule as a result of a Contract Modification, when approved by the
Contracting Officer, with a Contract Changes/REA Code. Key all Code values
to the Government's modification numbering system. Any activity or
sequence of activities added to the schedule as a result of alleged
constructive changes made by the Government may be added to a copy of the
current schedule, subject to the approval of the Contracting Officer.
Assign Activity codes for these activities with a Contract Changes/REA
Code. Key the code values to the Contractor's numbering system. Approval
to add these activities does not necessarily mean the Government accepts
responsibility and, therefore, liability for such activities and any
associated impacts to the schedule, but rather the Government recognizes
such activities are appropriately added to the schedule for the purposes of
maintaining a realistic and meaningful schedule. Such activities shall not
be Responsibility Coded to the Government unless approved. An activity
shall not have more than one Contract Changes/REA Code.
3.3.2.8 Contract Line Item (CLIN) Coding (BIDI)
Code all activities to the CLIN on the Contract Line Item Schedule to which
the activity belongs. An activity shall not contain more than one CLIN
Item Code. CLIN Item code all activities, even when an activity is not
cost loaded.
3.3.2.9 Phase of Work Coding (PHAS)
Assign Phase of Work Code to all activities based upon the phase of work in
which the activity occurs. Code activities to a Construction Phase. Code
fast track construction phases proposed by the Contractor to allow
filtering and organizing the schedule by fast track design and construction
packages. If the contract specifies construction phasing with separately
defined performance periods, identify a Construction Phase Code to allow
filtering and organizing the schedule accordingly. Each activity shall be
identified with a single project phase and have only one Phase of Work code.
3.3.2.10 Category of Work Coding (CATW)
Assign Category of Work Code to all Activities based upon the category of
work to which the activity belongs. Category of Work Code must include,
but is not limited to: construction submittal approvals, Acceptance,
Procurement, Fabrication, Delivery, Weather Sensitive Installation,
Non-Weather Sensitive Installation, Start-Up, Test and Turnover. Assign a
Category of Work Code to each activity. Each activity shall have only one
Category of Work Code.
3.3.2.11 Definable Features of Work Coding (FOW1, FOW2, FOW3)
Assign a Definable Feature of Work Code to appropriate activities based on

the definable feature of work to which the activity belongs. Definable
Feature of Work is defined in Specification Section 01 45 00.00 10 QUALITY
CONTROL. An activity shall not have more than one Definable Feature of
Work Code. Not all activities are required to be Definable Feature of Work
Coded.
SECTION 01 32 01.00 10 Page 5

3.3.3 Scheduled Project Completion and Activity Calendars
The schedule interval shall extend from NTP date to the required contract
completion date. The contract completion activity (End Project) shall
finish based on the required contract duration in the accepted contract
proposal, as adjusted for any approved contract time extensions. The first
scheduled work period shall be the day after NTP is received by the
Contractor. Schedule activities on a calendar to which the activity
logically belongs. Activities may be assigned to a 7 day calendar when the
contract assigns calendar day durations for the activity such as a
Government Acceptance activity. If the Contractor intends to perform
physical work less than seven days per week, schedule the associated
activities on a calendar with non-work periods identified including
weekends and holidays. Assign the Category of Work Code - Weather
Sensitive Installation to those activities that are weather sensitive.
Original durations must account for anticipated normal adverse weather.
The Government will interpret all work periods not identified as non-work
periods on each calendar as meaning the Contractor intends to perform work
during those periods.
3.3.3.1 Project Start Date
The schedule shall start no earlier than the date on which the NTP was
acknowledged. Include as the first activity in the project schedule an
activity called "Start Project"( or NTP). The "Start Project" activity
shall have an "ES" constraint date equal to the date that the NTP was
acknowledged, and a zero day duration.
3.3.3.2 Schedule Constraints and Open Ended Logic
Constrain completion of the last activity in the schedule by the contract

completion date. Schedule calculations shall result in a negative float
when the calculated early finish date of the last activity is later than
the contract completion date. Include as the last activity in the project
schedule an activity called "End Project". The "End Project" activity
shall have an "LF" constraint date equal to the contract completion date
for the project, and with a zero day duration or by using the "project must
finish by" date in the scheduling software. The schedule shall have no
constrained dates other than those specified in the contract. The use of
artificial float constraints such as "zero fee float" or "zero total float"
are typically prohibited. There shall only be 2 open ended activities:
Start Project (or NTP) with no predecessor logic and End Project with no
successor logic.
3.3.3.3 Early Project Completion
In the event the Preliminary or Initial project schedule calculates an

early completion date of the last activity prior to the contract completion
date, identify those activities that it intends to accelerate and/or those
activities that are scheduled in parallel to support the Contractor's
"early" completion. The last activity shall have a late finish constraint
equal to the contract completion date and the schedule will calculate
positive float. The Government will not approve an early completion
schedule with zero float on the longest path. The Government is under no
obligation to accelerate activities for which it is responsible to support
a proposed early contract completion.
SECTION 01 32 01.00 10 Page 6

3.3.4 Interim Completion Dates
Constrain contractually specified interim completion dates to show negative

float when the calculated early finish date of the last activity in that
phase is later than the specified interim completion date.
3.3.4.1 Start Phase
Include as the first activity for a project phase an activity called "Start
Phase X" where "X" refers to the phase of work. The "Start Phase X"
activity shall have an "ES" constraint date equal to the date on which the
NTP was acknowledged, and a zero day duration.
3.3.4.2 End Phase
Include as the last activity for a project phase an activity called "End
Phase X" where "X" refers to the phase of work. The "End Phase X" activity
shall have an "LF" constraint date equal to the specified completion date
for that phase and a zero day duration.
3.3.4.3 Phase "X" Hammock
Include a hammock type activity for each project phase called "Phase X"
where "X" refers to the phase of work. The "Phase X" hammock activity
shall be logically tied to the earliest and latest activities in the phase.
3.3.5 Default Progress Data Disallowed
Do not automatically update Actual Start and Finish dates with default
mechanisms that may be included in the scheduling software. Activity
Actual Start (AS) and Actual Finish (AF) dates assigned during the updating
process shall match those dates provided from Contractor Quality Control
Reports. Failure of the Contractor to document the AS and AF dates on the
Daily Quality Control report for every in-progress or completed activity,
and failure to ensure that the data contained on the Daily Quality Control
reports is the sole basis for schedule updating shall result in the
disapproval of the Contractor's updated schedule and the inability of the
Contracting Officer to evaluate Contractor progress for payment purposes.
Updating of the percent complete and the remaining duration of any activity
shall be independent functions. Disable program features which calculate
one of these parameters from the other.
3.3.6 Out-of-Sequence Progress
Activities that have progressed before all preceding logic has been
satisfied (Out-of-Sequence Progress) will be allowed only on a case-by-case
basis subject to approval by the Contracting Officer. Propose logic
corrections to eliminate all out of sequence progress or justify not
changing the sequencing for approval prior to submitting an updated project
schedule. Correct out of sequence progress that continues for more than
two update cycles by logic revision, as approved by the Contracting Officer.
3.3.7 Negative Lags and Start to Finish Relationships
Lag durations contained in the project schedule shall not have a negative
value. Do not use Start to Finish (SF) relationships.
SECTION 01 32 01.00 10 Page 7

3.3.8 Calculation Mode
Schedule calculations shall retain the logic between predecessors and

successors even when the successor activity starts and the predecessor
activity has not finished. Software features that in effect sever the tie
between predecessor and successor activities when the successor has started
and the predecessor logic is not satisfied ("progress override") will not
be allowed.
3.3.9 Milestones
The schedule must include milestone activities for each significant project
event including but not limited to: milestone activities for each fast
track design package released for construction; design complete;
foundation/substructure construction complete; superstructure construction
complete; building dry-in or enclosure complete to allow the initiation of
finish activities; permanent power complete; and building systems
commissioning complete.
3.4 PROJECT SCHEDULE SUBMISSIONS
Provide the submissions as described below. The data CD, reports, and
network diagrams required for each submission are contained in paragraph
SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS.
3.4.1 Preliminary Project Schedule Submission
Submit the Preliminary Project Schedule, defining the Contractor's planned

operations for the first 90 calendar days for approval within 15 calendar
days after the NTP is acknowledged. The approved Preliminary Project
Schedule will be used for payment purposes not to exceed 90 calendar days
after NTP. Completely cost load the Preliminary Project Schedule to
balance the contract award CLINS shown on the Price Schedule. Detail it
for the first 90 calendar days. It may be summary in nature for the
remaining performance period. It must be early start and late finish
constrained and logically tied as previously specified. The Preliminary
Project Schedule forms the basis for the Initial Project Schedule specified
herein and must include all of the required Plan and Program preparations,
submissions and approvals identified in the contract (for example, Quality
Control Plan, Safety Plan, and Environmental Protection Plan) as well as
design activities, the planned submissions of all early design packages,
permitting activities, design review conference activities and other
non-construction activities intended to occur within the first 90 calendar
days. Schedule any construction activities planned for the first 90
calendar days after NTP. Constrain planned construction activities by
Government acceptance of the associated design package(s) and all other
specified Program and Plan approvals. Activity code any activities that
are summary in nature after the first 90 calendar days with Responsibility
Code (RESP) and Feature of Work code (FOW1, FOW2, FOW3).
3.4.2 Initial Project Schedule Submission
Submit the Initial Project Schedule for approval within 42 calendar days
after NTP. The schedule shall demonstrate a reasonable and realistic
sequence of activities which represent all work through the entire contract
performance period. The Initial Schedule shall be at a reasonable level of
detail as determined by the Contracting Officer.
SECTION 01 32 01.00 10 Page 8

3.4.3 Periodic Schedule Updates
Based on the result of the meeting, specified in PERIODIC SCHEDULE UPDATE

MEETINGS, submit periodic schedule updates. These submissions will enable
the Contracting Officer to assess Contractor's progress. If the Contractor
fails or refuses to furnish the information and project schedule data,
which in the judgment of the Contracting Officer or authorized
representative is necessary for verifying the Contractor's progress, the
Contractor shall be deemed not to have provided an estimate upon which
progress payment may be made.
3.4.4 Standard Activity Coding Dictionary
Use the activity coding structure defined in the Standard Data Exchange
Format (SDEF) in ER 1-1-11, Appendix A. This exact structure is mandatory,
even if some fields are not used. A template SDEF compatible schedule
backup file (sdef.prx) is available on the QCS website:
www.rmssupport.com. The SDEF format is as follows:
Field Activity
Code Length Description
1 WRKP 3 Workers per Day

2 RESP 4 Responsible Party (e.g. GC, subcontractor, USACE)
3 AREA 4 Area of Work
4 MODF 6 Modification or REA number
5 BIDI 6 Bid Item (CLIN)
6 PHAS 2 Phase of Work
7 CATW 1 Category of Work
8 FOW1 10 Feature of Work (used up to 10 characters in length)
3.5 SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS
Submit the following items for the Preliminary Schedule, Initial Schedule,
and every Periodic Schedule Update throughout the life of the project:
3.5.1 Data CD's
Provide two sets of data CD's containing the project schedule in the backup
format. Each CD shall also contain all previous update backup files. File
medium shall be CD. Label each CD indicating the type of schedule
(Preliminary, Initial, Update), full contract number, Data Date and file
name. Each schedule shall have a unique file name as determined by the
Contractor.
3.5.2 Narrative Report
Provide a Narrative Report with the Preliminary, Initial, and each Periodic
Update of the project schedule, as the basis of the progress payment
request. The Narrative Report shall include: a description of activities
along the 2 most critical paths where the total float is less than or equal
to 20 work days, a description of current and anticipated problem areas or
delaying factors and their impact, and an explanation of corrective actions
taken or required to be taken. The narrative report is expected to
communicate to the Government, the Contractor's thorough analysis of the
schedule output and its plans to compensate for any problems, either
current or potential, which are revealed through that analysis. Identify
SECTION 01 32 01.00 10 Page 9

and explain why any activities that, based their calculated late dates,
should have either started or finished during the update period but did not.
3.5.3 Approved Changes Verification
Include only those project schedule changes in the schedule submission that
have been previously approved by the Contracting Officer. The Narrative
Report shall specifically reference, on an activity by activity basis, all
changes made since the previous period and relate each change to
documented, approved schedule changes.
3.5.4 Schedule Reports
The format, filtering, organizing and sorting for each schedule report
shall be as directed by the Contracting Officer. Typically reports shall
contain: Activity Numbers, Activity Description, Original Duration,
Remaining Duration, Early Start Date, Early Finish Date, Late Start Date,
Late Finish Date, Total Float, Actual Start Date, Actual Finish Date, and
Percent Complete. The following lists typical reports that will be
requested. One or all of these reports may be requested for each schedule
submission.
3.5.4.1 Activity Report
A list of all activities sorted according to activity number.
3.5.4.2 Logic Report
A list of detailed predecessor and successor activities for every activity

in ascending order by activity number.
3.5.4.3 Total Float Report
A list of all incomplete activities sorted in ascending order of total

float. List activities which have the same amount of total float in
ascending order of Early Start Dates. Do not show completed activities on
this report.
3.5.4.4 Earnings Report by CLIN
A compilation of the Contractor's Total Earnings on the project from the

NTP to the data date. This report shall reflect the earnings of specific
activities based on the agreements made in the schedule update meeting
defined herein. Provided that the Contractor has furnished a complete
schedule update, this report shall serve as the basis of determining
progress payments. Group activities by CLIN item number and sort by
activity number. This report shall: sum all activities coded to a
particular CLIN and provide a CLIN item percent earned value; and complete
and sum CLIN items to provide a total project percent complete. The
printed report shall contain, for each activity: the Activity Number,
Activity Description, Original Budgeted Amount, Total Quantity, Quantity to
Date, Percent Complete (based on cost), and Earnings to Date.
3.5.5 Network Diagram
The network diagram is required for the Preliminary, Initial and Periodic
Updates. The network diagram shall depict and display the order and
interdependence of activities and the sequence in which the work is to be
accomplished. The Contracting Officer will use, but is not limited to, the
SECTION 01 32 01.00 10 Page 10

following conditions to review compliance with this paragraph:
3.5.5.1 Continuous Flow
Diagrams shall show a continuous flow from left to right with no arrows
from right to left. Show the activity number, description, duration, and
estimated earned value on the diagram.
3.5.5.2 Project Milestone Dates
Show dates on the diagram for start of project, any contract required
interim completion dates, and contract completion dates.
3.5.5.3 Critical Path
Clearly show the critical path.
3.5.5.4 Banding
Organize activities as directed to assist in the understanding of the

activity sequence. Typically, this flow will group activities by category
of work, work area and/or responsibility.
3.5.5.5 S-Curves
Earnings curves showing projected early and late earnings and earnings to
date.
3.6 PERIODIC SCHEDULE UPDATE MEETINGS
Conduct periodic schedule update meetings for the purposes of reviewing the
Contractor's proposed out of sequence corrections, determining causes for
delay, correcting logic, maintaining schedule accuracy and determining
earned value. Meetings shall occur at least monthly within five days of
the proposed schedule data date and after the Contractor has updated the
schedule with Government concurrence respecting actual start dates, actual
finish dates, remaining durations and percent complete for each activity it
intend to status. Provide a computer with the scheduling software loaded
and a projector during the meeting which allows all meeting participants to
view the proposed schedule update during the meeting. The meeting and
resultant approvable schedule update shall be a condition precedent to a
formal submission of the update as described in SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS and
to the submission of an invoice for payment. The meeting will be a working
interactive exchange which will allow the Government and the Contractor the
opportunity to review the updated schedule on a real time and interactive
basis. The Contractor's authorized scheduling representative will
organize, sort, filter and schedule the update as requested by the
Government. The meeting will last no longer than 8 hours. A rough draft
of the proposed activity logic corrections and narrative report shall be
provided to the Government 48 hours in advance of the meeting. The
Contractor's Project Manager and Authorized Scheduler shall attend the
meeting with the Authorized Representative of the Contracting Officer.
3.6.1 Update Submission Following Progress Meeting
Submit a complete update of the project schedule containing all approved

progress, revisions, and adjustments, pursuant to paragraph SUBMISSION
REQUIREMENTS not later than 4 working days after the periodic schedule
update meeting, reflecting only those changes made during the previous
SECTION 01 32 01.00 10 Page 11

update meeting.
3.6.2 Status of Activities
Update information, including Actual Start Dates (AS), Actual Finish Dates
(AF), Remaining Durations (RD), and Percent Complete shall be subject to
the approval of the Government prior to the meeting. As a minimum, address
the following items on an activity by activity basis during each progress
meeting.
3.6.2.1 Start and Finish Dates
Accurately show the status of the AS and/or AF dates for each activity
currently in-progress or completed since the last update. The Government
may allow an AF date to be assigned with the percent complete less than
100% to account for the value of work remaining but not restraining
successor activities. Only assign AS dates when actual progress occurs on
an activity.
3.6.2.2 Remaining Duration
Update the estimated RD for all incomplete activities independent of

Percent Complete. Remaining Durations may exceed the activity OD or may
exceed the activity's prior update RD if the Government considers the
current OD or RD to be understated based on current progress, insufficient
work crews actually manning the job, unrealistic OD or deficiencies that
must be corrected that restrain successor activities.
3.6.2.3 Percent Complete
Update the percent complete for each activity started, based on the
realistic assessment of earned value. Activities which are complete but
for remaining minor punch list work and which do not restrain the
initiation of successor activities may be declared 100 percent complete.
To allow for proper schedule management, cost load the correction of punch
list from Government pre-final inspection activity(ies) not less than 1
percent of the total contract value, which activity(ies) may be declared
100 percent complete upon completion and correction of all punch list work
identified during Government pre-final inspection(s).
3.6.2.4 Logic Changes
Specifically identify and discuss all logic changes pertaining to NTP on

change orders, change orders to be incorporated into the schedule,
Contractor proposed changes in work sequence, corrections to schedule logic
for out-of-sequence progress, and other changes that have been made
pursuant to contract provisions. The Government will only approve logic
revisions for the purpose of keeping the schedule valid in terms of its
usefulness in calculating a realistic completion date, correcting erroneous
logic ties, and accurately sequencing the work.
3.6.2.5 Other Changes
Other changes required due to delays in completion of any activity or group

of activities include: 1) delays beyond the Contractor's control, such as
strikes and unusual weather. 2) delays encountered due to submittals,
Government Activities, deliveries or work stoppages which make re-planning
the work necessary. 3) Changes required to correct a schedule that does
not represent the actual or planned prosecution and progress of the work.
SECTION 01 32 01.00 10 Page 12

3.7 REQUESTS FOR TIME EXTENSIONS
In the event the Contractor believes it is entitled to an extension of the

contract performance period, completion date, or any interim milestone
date, furnish the following for a determination by the Contracting
Officer: justification, project schedule data, and supporting evidence as
the Contracting Officer may deem necessary. Submission of proof of
excusable delay, based on revised activity logic, duration, and costs
(updated to the specific date that the delay occurred) is a condition
precedent to any approvals by the Government. In response to each Request
For Proposal issued by the Government, submit a schedule impact analysis
demonstrating whether or not the change contemplated by the Government
impacts the critical path.
3.7.1 Justification of Delay
The project schedule shall clearly display that the Contractor has used, in
full, all the float time available for the work involved with this
request. The Contracting Officer's determination as to the number of
allowable days of contract extension shall be based upon the project
schedule updates in effect for the time period in question, and other
factual information. Actual delays that are found to be caused by the
Contractor's own actions, which result in a calculated schedule delay, will
not be a cause for an extension to the performance period, completion date,
or any interim milestone date.
3.7.2 Submission Requirements
Submit a justification for each request for a change in the contract

completion date of less than 2 weeks based upon the most recent schedule
update at the time of the NTP or constructive direction issued for the
change. Such a request shall be in accordance with the requirements of
other appropriate Contract Clauses and shall include, as a minimum:
a. A list of affected activities, with their associated project

schedule activity number.
b. A brief explanation of the causes of the change.
c. An analysis of the overall impact of the changes proposed.
d. A sub-network of the affected area.
Identify activities impacted in each justification for change by a unique

activity code contained in the required data file.
3.7.3 Additional Submission Requirements
The Contracting Officer may request an interim update with revised

activities for any requested time extension of over 2 weeks. Provide this
disk within 4 days of the Contracting Officer's request.
3.8 DIRECTED CHANGES
If the NTP is issued for changes prior to settlement of price and/or time,
submit proposed schedule revisions to the Contracting Officer within 2
weeks of the NTP being issued. The Contracting Officer will approve
proposed revisions to the schedule prior to inclusion of those changes
SECTION 01 32 01.00 10 Page 13

within the project schedule. If the Contractor fails to submit the

proposed revisions, the Contracting Officer may furnish the Contractor with
suggested revisions to the project schedule. Include these revisions in
the project schedule until revisions are submitted, and final changes and
impacts have been negotiated. If the Contractor has any objections to the
revisions furnished by the Contracting Officer, advise the Contracting
Officer within 2 weeks of receipt of the revisions. Regardless of the
objections, continue to update the schedule with the Contracting Officer's
revisions until a mutual agreement in the revisions is reached. If the
Contractor fails to submit alternative revisions within 2 weeks of receipt
of the Contracting Officer's proposed revisions, the Contractor will be
deemed to have concurred with the Contracting Officer's proposed
revisions. The proposed revisions will then be the basis for an equitable
adjustment for performance of the work.
3.9 WEEKLY PROGRESS MEETINGS
a. Meet weekly with the Government (or as otherwise mutually agreed

to) between the meetings described in paragraph PERIODIC SCHEDULE
UPDATE MEETINGS for the purpose of jointly reviewing the actual
progress of the project as compared to the as planned progress and to
review planned activities for the upcoming two weeks. The then current
and approved schedule update shall be used for the purposes of this
meeting and for the production and review of reports. The Contractor's
Project Manager and the Authorized Representative of the Contracting
Officer shall attend. The weekly progress meeting will address the
status of RFI's, RFP's and Submittals.
b. Provide a bar chart produced by the scheduling software, organized

by Total Float and Sorted by Early Start Date, and a two week
"look-ahead" schedule by filtering all schedule activities to show only
current ongoing activities and activities schedule to start during the
upcoming two weeks, organized by Work Area Code (AREA) and sorted by
Early Start Date.
c. The Government and the Contractor shall jointly review the

reports. If it appears that activities on the longest path(s) which
are currently driving the calculated completion date (driving
activities), are not progressing satisfactorily and therefore could
jeopardize timely project completion, corrective action must be taken
immediately. Corrective action includes but is not limited to:
increasing the number of work crews; increasing the number of work
shifts; increasing the number of hours worked per shift; and
determining if Government responsibility coded activities require
Government corrective action.
3.10 OWNERSHIP OF FLOAT
Float available in the schedule, at any time, shall not be considered for
the exclusive use of either the Government or the Contractor.
3.11 TRANSFER OF SCHEDULE DATA INTO RMS/QCS
Download and upload the schedule data into the Resident Management System
(RMS) prior to RMS databases being transferred to the Government and is
considered to be additional supporting data in a form and detail required
by the Contracting Officer pursuant to FAR 52.232-5 - Payments under
Fixed-Price Construction Contracts. The receipt of a proper payment
request pursuant to FAR 52.232-27 - Prompt Payment for Construction
SECTION 01 32 01.00 10 Page 14

Contracts is contingent upon the Government receiving both acceptable and

approvable hard copies and electronic export from QCS of the application
for progress payment.
SECTION 01 32 01.00 10 Page 15

SECTION 01 33 00
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
PART 1 GENERAL
The Contracting Officer may request submittals in addition to those

specified when deemed necessary to adequately describe the work covered in
the respective sections.
Units of weights and measures used on all submittals are to be the same as
those used in the contract drawings.
Each submittal is to be complete and in sufficient detail to allow ready

determination of compliance with contract requirements.
Contractor's Quality Control (CQC) System Manager to check and approve all
items prior to submittal and stamp, sign, and date indicating action
taken. Proposed deviations from the contract requirements are to be
clearly identified. Include within submittals items such as:
Contractor's, manufacturer's, or fabricator's drawings; descriptive
literature including (but not limited to) catalog cuts, diagrams, operating
charts or curves; test reports; test cylinders; samples; O&M manuals
(including parts list); certifications; warranties; and other such required
submittals.
Submittals requiring Government approval are to be scheduled and made prior

to the acquisition of the material or equipment covered thereby. Picked up
and disposed of in accordance with manufacturer's Material Safety Data
Sheets (MSDS) and in compliance with existing laws and regulations samples
remaining upon completion of the work.
1.1 DEFINITIONS
1.1.1 Submittal Descriptions (SD)
Submittals requirements are specified in the technical sections.

Submittals are identified by Submittal Description (SD) numbers and titles
as follows:
Submittals which are required prior to a notice to proceed. Submittals

required prior to the start of the next major phase of the construction
on a multi-phase contract. Schedules or tabular list of data or
tabular list including location, features, or other pertinent
information regarding products, materials, equipment, or components to
be used in the work, submitted prior to contract notice to proceed or
next major phase of construction.
Certificates of insurance
Surety bonds
List of proposed subcontractors
List of proposed products
Construction Progress Schedule
Network Analysis Schedule (NAS)
Submittal register
SECTION 01 33 00 Page 1
Schedule of prices
Health and safety plan
Work plan
Quality control(QC) plan
Environmental protection plan
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Drawings, diagrams and schedules specifically prepared to illustrate

some portion of the work.
Diagrams and instructions from a manufacturer or fabricator for use in

producing the product and as aids to the Contractor for integrating the
product or system into the project.
Drawings prepared by or for the Contractor to show how multiple systems

and interdisciplinary work will be coordinated.
SD-03 Product Data
Catalog cuts, illustrations, schedules, diagrams, performance charts,

instructions and brochures illustrating size, physical appearance and
other characteristics of materials, systems or equipment for some
portion of the work.
Samples of warranty language when the contract requires extended

product warranties.
SD-04 Samples
Fabricated or unfabricated physical examples of materials, equipment or

workmanship that illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of
a material or product and establish standards by which the work can be
judged.
Color samples from the manufacturer's standard line (or custom color
samples if specified) to be used in selecting or approving colors for
the project.
Field samples and mock-ups constructed on the project site establish

standards by which the ensuring work can be judged. Includes
assemblies or portions of assemblies which are to be incorporated into
the project and those which will be removed at conclusion of the work.
SD-05 Design Data
Design calculations, mix designs, analyses or other data pertaining to

a part of work.
SD-06 Test Reports
Report signed by authorized official of testing laboratory that a

material, product or system identical to the material, product or
system to be provided has been tested in accord with specified
requirements. (Testing must have been within three years of date of
contract award for the project.)
Report which includes findings of a test required to be performed by

the Contractor on an actual portion of the work or prototype prepared
for the project before shipment to job site.
Report which includes finding of a test made at the job site or on

sample taken from the job site, on portion of work during or after
installation.
Investigation reports.
Daily logs and checklists.
Final acceptance test and operational test procedure.
SD-07 Certificates
Statements printed on the manufacturer's letterhead and signed by

responsible officials of manufacturer of product, system or material
attesting that product, system or material meets specification
requirements. Must be dated after award of project contract and
clearly name the project.
Document required of Contractor, or of a manufacturer, supplier,

installer or subcontractor through Contractor, the purpose of which is
to further quality of orderly progression of a portion of the work by
documenting procedures, acceptability of methods or personnel
qualifications.
Confined space entry permits.
Text of posted operating instructions.
SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions
Preprinted material describing installation of a product, system or

material, including special notices and Material Safety Data sheets
concerning impedances, hazards and safety precautions.
SD-09 Manufacturer's Field Reports
Documentation of the testing and verification actions taken by

manufacturer's representative at the job site, in the vicinity of the
job site, or on a sample taken from the job site, on a portion of the
work, during or after installation, to confirm compliance with
manufacturer's standards or instructions. The documentation must be
signed by an authorized official of a testing laboratory or agency and
must state the test results; and indicate whether the material,
product, or system has passed or failed the test.
Factory test reports.
SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data
Data that is furnished by the manufacturer, or the system provider, to

the equipment operating and maintenance personnel, including
manufacturer's help and product line documentation necessary to
maintain and install equipment. This data is needed by operating and
maintenance personnel for the safe and efficient operation, maintenance
and repair of the item.
This data is intended to be incorporated in an operations and

maintenance manual or control system.
SD-11 Closeout Submittals
Documentation to record compliance with technical or administrative

requirements or to establish an administrative mechanism.
Special requirements necessary to properly close out a construction

contract. For example, Record Drawings and as-built drawings. Also,
submittal requirements necessary to properly close out a major phase of
construction on a multi-phase contract.
1.1.2 Approving Authority
Office or designated person authorized to approve submittal.
1.1.3 Work
As used in this section, on- and off-site construction required by contract

documents, including labor necessary to produce submittals, construction,
materials, products, equipment, and systems incorporated or to be
incorporated in such construction.
1.2 SUBMITTALS

accordance with this section.
Submittal register; G
1.3 SUBMITTAL CLASSIFICATION
Submittals are classified as follows:
1.3.1 Government Approved
Government approval is required for extensions of design, critical

materials, deviations, equipment whose compatibility with the entire system
must be checked, and other items as designated by the Contracting Officer.
Within the terms of the Contract Clause entitled "Specifications and
Drawings for Construction," they are considered to be "shop drawings."
1.3.2 Information Only
Submittals not requiring Government approval will be for information only.

They are not considered to be "shop drawings" within the terms of the
Contract Clause referred to above.
1.4 PREPARATION
1.4.1 Transmittal Form
Use the attached sample transmittal form (ENG Form 4025) for submitting
both Government approved and information only submittals in accordance with
the instructions on the reverse side of the form. These forms are included
in the QCS software that the Contractor is required to use for this contract.
Properly complete this form by filling out all the heading blank spaces and
identifying each item submitted. Exercise special care to ensure proper
listing of the specification paragraph and sheet number of the contract
drawings pertinent to the data submitted for each item.
1.4.2 Additional Instructions
In addition to the requirements of this Section, additional instructions

are specified in the attachment "INSTRUCTIONS TO CONTRACTORS FOR
TRANSMITTAL REQUIRMENTS" located at the end of this section.
1.4.3 Contractor Review
The Contractor's quality control representative shall review the listing at

least every 30 days and take appropriate action to maintain an effective
and updated system. A copy of the register or progress schedule shall be
maintained at the job site. Revised and/or updated register or progress
schedule shall be submitted to the Contracting Officer at least every 60
days in quadruplicate (complete register need not be provided, only those
portions containing additions or changes).
1.4.4 Number of Copies
The Contractor shall provide five (5) sets of all submittals unless
otherwise specified.
1.4.5 Address to Receive Submittals
Submittals, regardless of reviewer designation, shall be sent to the Corps

of Engineers' Area Office assigned to the project.
1.4.6 Additional Government Approved Submittals
In addition to those specified in PART 1 paragraph SUBMITTAL

CLASSIFICATION, the following classifications of submittals also require
Governmental approval:
a. Mechanical and Electrical Systems
The Contractor shall furnish one reproducible, unfolded copy of all wiring
and control diagrams and approved system layout drawings with the operating
instructions called for under the various headings of the specifications
for mechanical and electrical systems.
b. Fire Protection and Detection Submittals
The Contractor shall prepare and submit, as one integrated submittal, shop
drawings for the fire protection/detection system. This submittal shall
also include sprinkler plans and sections, fire detection and alarm plans
and risers, and catalog cuts of proposed equipment. The Contractor shall
submit proof that the shop drawings were prepared by an engineer regularly
engaged in fire protection/detection systems for at least 2 years, and that

they are sealed by a registered professional engineer. Shop drawings for
the fire protection/detection system shall be prepared on full-size
reproducible sheets. The shop drawings submitted for review shall be
submitted on full-size prints. After updating all deviations,
modifications, and changes, the final submittal shall be on reproducible
sheets and CADD files (submitted on CD-ROM disk(s)); these will represent
the final as-built drawings.
c. Asbestos and lead-based paint abatement submittals.
d. Color/finish sample boards submittal.
1.4.7 Certificates of Compliance
Any certificates required for demonstrating proof of compliance of

materials with specification requirements shall be executed in the number
of copies required by the above paragraph "Number of Copies." Each
certificate shall be signed by an official authorized to certify in behalf
of the manufacturing company and shall contain the name and address of the
Contractor, the project name and location, and the quantity and date or
dates of shipment or delivery to which the certificates apply. Copies of
laboratory test reports submitted with certificates shall contain the name
and address of the testing laboratory and the date or dates of the tests to
which the report applies. Certification shall not be construed as
relieving the Contractor from furnishing satisfactory material, if, after
tests are performed on selected samples, the material is found not to meet
the specific requirements.
1.4.8 Deviations
For submittals which include proposed deviations requested by the

Contractor, the column "variation" of ENG Form 4025 shall be checked. The
Contractor shall set forth in writing the reason for any deviations and
annotate such deviations on the submittal. The Government reserves the
right to rescind inadvertent approval of submittals containing unnoted
deviations.
a. Contractor-proposed deviations, including variations and other

departures from the contract requirements, shall be noted/marked in red
on each copy of the submittal data and shall be provided with a letter
attachment to the ENG Form 4025 summarizing the proposed variation,
deviation, or departure. Variations, deviations, or departures shall
contain sufficient information to permit complete evaluation.
Additional sheets may be used to fully explain why a variation,
deviation, or departure is requested. At the minimum the information
shall include:
(1) An explanation in detail of the reason for the variation
and how it differs from that specified;
(2) The cost difference; and
(3) How the variation will benefit the Government.
b. Any submittal annotated by a supplier or vendor with "Field

Verify," "Select Color," or the like shall be accompanied by the
Contractor's written response to the supplier's query.
1.5 INFORMATION ONLY SUBMITTALS
Normally submittals for information only will not be returned. Approval of

the Contracting Officer is not required on information only submittals.
The Government reserves the right to require the Contractor to resubmit any
item found not to comply with the contract. This does not relieve the
Contractor from the obligation to furnish material conforming to the plans
and specifications; will not prevent the Contracting Officer from requiring
removal and replacement of nonconforming material incorporated in the work;
and does not relieve the Contractor of the requirement to furnish samples
for testing by the Government laboratory or for check testing by the
Government in those instances where the technical specifications so
prescribe.
1.6 VARIATIONS / SUBSTITUTION REQUESTS
Variations from contract requirements require Government approval pursuant

to contract Clause FAR 52.236-21 and will be considered where advantageous
to Government.
1.6.1 Considering Variations
Discussion with Contracting Officer prior to submission, will help ensure

functional and quality requirements are met and minimize rejections and
re-submittals. When contemplating a variation which results in lower cost,
consider submission of the variation as a Value Engineering Change Proposal
(VECP).
Specifically point out variations from contract requirements in transmittal

letters. Failure to point out deviations may result in the Government
requiring rejection and removal of such work at no additional cost to the
Government.
1.6.2 Proposing Variations
When proposing variation, deliver written request to the Contracting

Officer, with documentation of the nature and features of the variation and
why the variation is desirable and beneficial to Government. If lower cost
is a benefit, also include an estimate of the cost savings. In addition to
documentation required for variation, include the submittals required for
the item. Clearly mark the proposed variation in all documentation.
Check the column "variation" of ENG Form 4025 for submittals which include
proposed deviations requested by the Contractor. Set forth in writing the
reason for any deviations and annotate such deviations on the submittal.
The Government reserves the right to rescind inadvertent approval of
submittals containing unnoted deviations.
1.6.3 Warranting That Variations Are Compatible
When delivering a variation for approval, Contractor warrants that this

contract has been reviewed to establish that the variation, if
incorporated, will be compatible with other elements of work.
1.6.4 Review Schedule Is Modified
In addition to normal submittal review period, a period of 10 working days

will be allowed for consideration by the Government of submittals with
variations.
1.7 SUBMITTAL REGISTER
Prepare and maintain submittal register using ENG Form 4288, as the work
progresses. Do not change data which is output in columns (c), (d), (e),
and (f) as delivered by Government; retain data which is output in columns
(a), (g), (h), and (i) as approved. A submittal register showing items of
equipment and materials for which submittals are required by the
specifications is provided as an attachment. This list may not be all
inclusive and additional submittals may be required. Maintain a submittal
register for the project in accordance with Section 01 45 01.10 USACE
QUALITY CONTROL SYSTEM (QCS). The Government will provide the initial
submittal register in electronic format with the following fields
completed, to the extent that will be required by the Government during
subsequent usage.
Column (c): Lists specification section in which submittal is

required.
Column (d): Lists each submittal description (SD No. and type,
e.g. SD-02 Shop Drawings) required in each specification section.
Column (e): Lists one principal paragraph in specification

section where a material or product is specified. This listing is
only to facilitate locating submitted requirements. Do not
consider entries in column (e) as limiting project requirements.
Thereafter, the Contractor is to track all submittals by maintaining a

complete list, including completion of all data columns, including dates on
which submittals are received and returned by the Government.
The approved submittal register will become the scheduling document and
will be used to control submittals throughout the life of the Contract.
The submittal register and the progress schedules shall be coordinated.
1.7.1 Use of Submittal Register
Submit submittal register. Submit with QC plan and project schedule.

Verify that all submittals required for project are listed and add missing
submittals. Coordinate and complete the following fields on the register
submitted with the QC plan and the project schedule:
Column (a) Activity Number: Activity number from the project

schedule.
Column (g) Contractor Submit Date: Scheduled date for approving

authority to receive submittals.
Column (h) Contractor Approval Date: Date Contractor needs

approval of submittal.
Column (i) Contractor Material: Date that Contractor needs

material delivered to Contractor control.
1.7.2 Contractor Use of Submittal Register
Update the following fields in the Government-furnished submittal register

program or equivalent fields in program utilized by Contractor with each
submittal throughout contract.
Column (b) Transmittal Number: Contractor assigned list of

consecutive numbers.
Column (j) Action Code (k): Date of action used to record

Contractor's review when forwarding submittals to QC.
Column (l) List date of submittal transmission.
Column (q) List date approval received.
1.7.3 Approving Authority Use of Submittal Register
Update the following fields in the Government-furnished submittal register

program or equivalent fields in program utilized by Contractor.
Column (b) Transmittal Number: Contractor assigned list of

consecutive numbers.
Column (l) List date of submittal receipt.
Column (m) through (p)List Date related to review actions.
Column (q) List date returned to Contractor.
1.7.4 Contractor Action Code and Action Code
Entries for columns (j) and (o), are to be used are as follows (others may
be prescribed by Transmittal Form):
NR - Not Received
AN - Approved as noted
A - Approved
RR - Disapproved, Revise, and Resubmit
1.7.5 Copies Delivered to the Government
Deliver one copy of submittal register updated by Contractor to Government

with each invoice request.
1.8 SCHEDULING
Schedule and submit concurrently submittals covering component items

forming a system or items that are interrelated. Include certifications to
be submitted with the pertinent drawings at the same time. No delay
damages or time extensions will be allowed for time lost in late
submittals. Adequate time (a minimum of 21 calendar days exclusive of
mailing time) shall be allowed and shown on the register for review and
approval. No delay damages or time extensions will be allowed for time
lost in late submittals. An additional 60 calendar days will be allowed
and shown on the register for review and approval of submittals for
color/finish sample boards, door hardware, refrigeration and HVAC control

systems.
a. Coordinate scheduling, sequencing, preparing and processing of

submittals with performance of work so that work will not be
delayed by submittal processing. Allow for potential resubmittal
of requirements.
b. Submittals called for by the contract documents will be listed on

the register. If a submittal is called for but does not pertain
to the contract work, the Contractor is to include the submittal
in the register and annotate it "N/A" with a brief explanation.
Approval by the Contracting Officer does not relieve the
Contractor of supplying submittals required by the contract
documents but which have been omitted from the register or marked
"N/A".
c. Re-submit register and annotate monthly by the Contractor with

actual submission and approval dates. When all items on the
register have been fully approved, no further re-submittal is
required.
d. Carefully control procurement operations to ensure that each

individual submittal is made on or before the Contractor scheduled
submittal date shown on the approved "Submittal Register."
1.9 GOVERNMENT APPROVING AUTHORITY
When approving authority is Contracting Officer, the Government will:
a. Note date on which submittal was received.
b. Review submittals for approval within scheduling period specified

and only for conformance with project design concepts and
compliance with contract documents.
c. Identify returned submittals with one of the actions defined in

paragraph entitled "Review Notations" and with markings
appropriate for action indicated.
Upon completion of review of submittals requiring Government approval,

stamp and date approved submittals. One (1) copy of the submittal will be
returned to the Contractor.
1.10 DISAPPROVED SUBMITTALS
Contractor shall make corrections required by the Contracting Officer. If

the Contractor considers any correction or notation on the returned
submittals to constitute a change to the contract drawings or
specifications; notice as required under the clause entitled, "Changes" is
to be given to the Contracting Officer. Contractor is responsible for the
dimensions and design of connection details and construction of work.
Failure to point out deviations may result in the Government requiring
rejection and removal of such work at the Contractor's expense.
If changes are necessary to submittals, the Contractor shall make such

revisions and submission of the submittals in accordance with the
procedures above. No item of work requiring a submittal change is to be
accomplished until the changed submittals are approved.
1.11 APPROVED/ACCEPTED SUBMITTALS
The Contracting Officer's approval or acceptance of submittals is not be

construed as a complete check, and indicates only that the general method
of construction, materials, detailing and other information are satisfactory.
Approval or acceptance will not relieve the Contractor of the
responsibility for any error which may exist, as the Contractor under the
Contractor Quality Control (CQC) requirements of this contract is
responsible for dimensions, the design of adequate connections and details,
and the satisfactory construction of all work. After submittals have been
approved or accepted by the Contracting Officer, no resubmittal for the
purpose of substituting materials or equipment will be considered unless
accompanied by an explanation of why a substitution is necessary.
1.12 APPROVED SAMPLES
Approval of a sample is only for the characteristics or use named in such

approval and is not be construed to change or modify any contract
requirements. Before submitting samples, the Contractor to assure that the
materials or equipment will be available in quantities required in the
project. No change or substitution will be permitted after a sample has
been approved.
Match the approved samples for Materials and equipment incorporated in the
work. If requested, approved samples, including those which may be damaged
in testing, will be returned to the Contractor, at his expense, upon
completion of the contract. Samples not approved will also be returned to
the Contractor at its expense, if so requested.
Failure of any materials to pass the specified tests will be sufficient

cause for refusal to consider, under this contract, any further samples of
the same brand or make of that material. Government reserves the right to
disapproved any material or equipment which previously has proved
unsatisfactory in service.
Samples of various materials or equipment delivered on the site or in place

may be taken by the Contracting Officer for testing. Samples failing to
meet contract requirements will automatically void previous approvals.
Contractor to replace such materials or equipment to meet contract
requirements.
Approval of the Contractor's samples by the Contracting Officer does not

relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities under the contract.
1.13 WITHHOLDING OF PAYMENT
Payment for materials incorporated in the work will not be made if required
approvals have not been obtained.
1.14 STAMPS
Stamps used by the Contractor on the submittal data to certify that the
submittal meets contract requirements is to be similar to the following:
________________________________________________________________________
| CONTRACTOR |
| |
| (Firm Name) |
| |
| |
| |
| _____ Approved |
| |
| |
| _____ Approved with corrections as noted on submittal data and/or |
| attached sheets(s) |
| |
| |
| |
| SIGNATURE: __________________________________________________________ |
| |
| TITLE: ______________________________________________________________ |
| |
| DATE: _______________________________________________________________ |
| |
|________________________________________________________________________|
1.15 INSTRUCTIONS TO CONTRACTORS FOR TRANSMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
FORT WORTH DISTRICT

FOR INFORMATION ONLY (FIO) AND GOVERNMENT APPROVED (G) SUBMITTALS
1. General Requirements
a. General requirements for transmittal of FIO and G submittals is

contained in the preceding specifications. Specific requirements on
how to transmit FIO and G Submittals are outlined herein.
b. FIO and G submittal data shall be transmitted under separate ENG

Form 4025s and assigned different Transmittal Numbers. If G and FIO
submittal data is included in the same submittal, using the same ENG
Form 4025, they will be considered an FIO submittal until the
Contractor corrects the error.
c. The Contractor shall designate on each Eng Form 4025, above the
Transmittal No., either FIO or G to show the transmittal type. This
procedure allows ready identification of FIO or G submittals. The
Government reserves the right to redesignate the category (G or FIO) of
submittals incorrectly identified by the Contractor.
d. The Contractor shall assure all FIO submittals for each technical
section are submitted prior to or concurrent with the G submittals for
that technical section. If appropriate FIO submittals have not been
submitted, the G submittal will be returned disapproved.
e. Data transmitted with ENG Form 4025 shall be identified by marking

it with the same item number(s) appearing in the "Item No." column on
the form. The model number, part number, color, etc., of proposed
materials or equipment shall be highlighted or otherwise identified.
f. The Contractor shall identify and include with each submittal a

copy of any modification and/or Request for Information (RFI) or
Government Correspondence that may have changed the requirments of the
Contract in regards to each individual submittal.
2. Specific Requirements for For Information Only (FIO) Submittals
a. One fully coordinated FIO submittal shall be made for each

technical section. Each FIO submittal listed on the ENG Form 4288,
shall be submitted as a separate item on the ENG Form 4025 in the order
they appear on the progress schedule. Technical data provided with the
ENG Form 4025 shall conform to the "Submittals" paragraph in each
Technical Section. (Example: SD-02 Shop Drawings as outlined herein.)
b. Items such as mill certificates or other test data unavailable

until the equipment/material is manufactured/fabricated shall be
identified on the initial ENG Form 4025. An explanation in the
"Remarks" section shall explain this data will be submitted by
Transmittal Number ( ) (fill in transmittal number) after materials are
manufactured/fabricated (or other explanations as appropriate). A
separate submittal for long lead time equipment or material may be made
if sufficient data is furnished to show contract compliance. An
explanation shall be provided in the "Remarks" section or on a separate
sheet, if necessary, explaining why a partial submittal is being made.
Explanation shall include the estimated delivery date of the above
equipment/material and the Transmittal Number of the submittal that
will contain data required by the particular specification section for
the remaining equipment/materials. For contracts with several
buildings/structures, separate transmittals for each technical section
may be used if each building/structure is noted in the "Remarks"
section of the ENG Form 4025. Samples of materials shall be submitted
along with technical data, not under separate transmittals.
2.1 FIO Submittal Review
a. The Contractor's Quality Control (CQC) Representative has full

responsibility for reviewing and certifying that all FIO submittal data
and all equipment and/or materials comply with the contract. FIO
Submittals are provided to the Government "For Information Purposes
Only." Contracting Officer approval is not required and will not be
given. The Government will not code any FIO submittals. Copies of FIO
Submittals will not be returned to the Contractor.
b. However, the Government may perform QA reviews and re-reviews of

FIO submittals at any time during the contract. If the Government
determines submittal data is incomplete or not in compliance with
contract, comments will be provided. Comments will state, "Disagree
with Contractor's Certified Compliance" and list items not in
compliance or not provided as required by the Contract. The Contractor
shall respond to all comments by return FIO resubmittal on a new ENG
Form 4025. Repeated incomplete or non-complying FIO submittals with
improper certifications may result in disapproval of the Contractor's
Quality Control (CQC) Program and/or possible replacement of the
Contractor Quality Control (CQC) personnel.
c. Performance of, or failure to perform QA submittal reviews or

Government requirement to submit additional data on FIO submittals,
will not prevent the Contracting Officer from requiring removal and
replacement of non-conforming material incorporated into the work. No

adjustment for time or money will be allowed for corrections required
because of non-compliance with contract plans and/or specifications.
3. Specific Requirements for Government (G) Approved Submittals
a. The Contractor's Quality Control Representative is responsible for

assuring all data submitted is complete and in compliance with contract
requirements. The Contractor shall assure all FIO submittals are
submitted prior to or concurrent with the G submittal for each
technical section. If the FIO submittals have not been submitted, the
G submittal will be returned disapproved.
b. A separate submittal shall be made for each technical section with

G submittals. FIO submittal data shall not be mixed with G submittal
data.
c. The Government will provide written comments as appropriate and

assign action codes to each item outlined on the back of the ENG Form
4025. One (1) stamped and dated copy of the submittal, along with any
comments, will be provided to the Contractor. Action Code "A"-
Approved As Submitted, and Code "B"- Approved Except As Noted,
constitutes Government Approval. The Contractor shall resubmit under a
separate Transmittal Number all data necessary to show compliance with
Government comments on all other action codes.
d. Government review time is stated in Paragraph SCHEDULING.

Government review time is exclusive of mailing time. Review time
starts the day of receipt by the Government and continues until the day
comments or notice of approval is provided the Contractor.
e. If the Contractor considers any Government review comment to

constitute a change to the contract, notice shall be given promptly as
required under the Contract Clause entitled "Changes." No request for
"Equitable Adjustment" will be honored unless the Contractor complies
fully with the prompt notice provisions of the contract.
4. Variations/Deviations/Departures from the Contract Drawings or

Specifications
Contractor proposed variations, deviations, or departures from the

contract drawings or specifications shall be noted in the "Variation"
column of ENG Form 4025 with an asterisk, for each FIO submittal. A
brief explanation, and the Transmittal Number of the appropriate "G"
submittal (as explained below), shall be added to the "Remarks" section
of the Form (or a separate sheet, if necessary). Each variation,
deviation, or departure shall be listed as an item on a separate "G"
submittal, which may contain other G submittal items. Variations,
deviations, or departures will be processed and approved the same as G
submittals, provided they are included in a G submittal. Variations,
deviations, or departures will not be approved in the FIO submittal,
and will be disapproved, until they are properly submitted on a "G"
submittal. Variations, deviations, or departures shall contain
sufficient information to permit complete evaluation. Additional
sheets may be used to fully explain why a variation, deviation, or
departure is requested. The Government reserves the right to
disapprove or rescind inadvertent approval of submittals containing
unnoted variations, deviations, or departures.
5. Submittal Numbering
Each submittal shall cover only one specification section. For

purposes of consistency and to provide compatibility with the
Government's computerized submittal register, submittal numbers shall
include a specification section prefix and special suffixes. Note the
following examples (for Technical Section 07 41 60):
a. New submittals - 07 41 60-01, 07 41 60-02, etc.
b. Resubmittals -
(1) First resubmittal - 07 41 60-01.01, 07 41 60-02.01, etc.
(2) Second resubmittal - 07 41 60-01.02, 07 41 60-02.02, etc.
(3) Third resubmittal - 07 41 60-01.03, 07 41 60-02.03, etc.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not Used
INSTRUCTIONS
1. Section I will be initiated by the Contractor in the required number of copies.
2. Each transmittal shall be numbered consecutively in the space provided for “Transmittal No.”. This number, in addition to the contract number, will form a
serial umber for identifying each submittal. For new submittals or resubmittals mark the appropriate ox; on resubmittals insert transmittal number of last
submission as well as the new submittal number.
3. The “Item No.” will be the same “Item No.” as indicated on ENG FORM 4288 for each entry on this form.
4. Submittals requiring expeditious handling will be submitted on a separate form.
5. Separate transmittal form will be used for submittals under separate sections of the specifications.
6. A check shall be placed in the “Variation” column when a submittal is not in accordance with the plans and specifications -- also, a written statement to that
effect shall be included in the space provided for “Remarks.”
7. Form is self-transmittal, letter of transmittal is not required.
8. When a sample of material or Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance is transmitted, indicate “Sample” or “Certificate” in column c, Section I.
9. U.S. Army Corps of Engineers approving authority will assign action codes as indicated below in space provided in Section I, column to each item
submitted. In addition they will ensure enclosures are indicated and attached to the form prior to return to the contractor. The Contractor will assign action
codes as indicated below in Section I, column g, to each item submitted.
THE FOLLOWING ACTION CODES ARE GIVEN TO ITEMS SUBMITTED
A -- Approved as submitted E -- Disapproved (See attached)
B -- Approved, except as noted on drawings F -- Receipt acknowledged
C -- Approved, except as noted on drawings FX -- Receipt acknowledged, does not comply

Refer to attached sheet resubmission required. as noted with contract requirements.
D -- Will be returned by separate correspondence G -- Other (Specify)
10. Approval of items does not relieve the contractor from complying with all the requirements of the contract plans and specifications.
Reverse of ENG Form 4025

CONTRACT NO.
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
TITLE AND LOCATION CONTRACTOR
MEB - COF FY2012 PN64415
CONTRACTOR: CONTRACTOR APPROVING AUTHORITY
SCHEDULE DATES ACTION
G
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
V T E R I E O DATE FWD O MAILED
I T C A C N TO APPR N TO
T A G# A R AUTH/ CONTR/
Y L S R T E C C
E DESCRIPTION A I V APPROVAL MATERIAL O DATE DATE RCD DATE FWD DATE RCD O DATE DATE RCD
N N C P O W NEEDED NEEDED D OF FROM TO OTHER FROM OTH D OF FRM APPR
O O T ITEM SUBMITTED H N R SUBMIT BY BY E ACTION CONTR REVIEWER REVIEWER E ACTION AUTH REMARKS
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) (i) (j) (k) (l) (m) (n) (o) (p) (q) (r)
01 32 01.00 10 SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals

Project Schedule 3.4 G
01 33 00 SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals
Submittal register 1.7 G
LEED Implementation Plan 1.4 G
LEED Documentation Notebook G
Excavation And Trenching 1.3
SD-07 Certificates
Hazardous Material Content 1.6
Solid Waste Disposition 1.8
Termite Control 1.9
Asbestos Certification Letter 1.7
CADD And GIS Deliverables 1.10
Accident Prevention Plan (APP) 1.6 G
Activity Hazard Analysis (AHA) 1.7 G
Crane Critical Lift Plan G
Crane Operators 1.5.1.2 G
SD-06 Test Reports
Reports 1.11
Accident Reports 1.11.1
Monthly Exposure Reports 1.11.3
SUBMITTAL FORM,Jan 96 PREVIOUS EDITION IS OBSOLETE PAGE 1 OF 88 PAGES

CONTRACT NO.
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
G
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
01 35 26 Crane Reports 1.11.4

Regulatory Citations and
Violations
Gas Protection
SD-07 Certificates
Confined Space Entry Permit 1.8
Hot work permit 1.8
License Certificates
Certificate of Compliance
Testing and Inspection Plan G AO
Report of potential deficiencies G AO
List of proposed subcontractors G AO
List of proposed products G AO
Quality control plan G AO
SD-03 Product Data
Product Data G AO
SD-05 Design Data
Design Data G AE
SD-06 Test Reports
Qualitative Testing and G AE
Inspection
Quantitative tests G AE
Final acceptance test and G AE
operational test procedure
SD-07 Certificates

CONTRACT NO.
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
G
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
01 38 00 Qualifications of Testing Entity G AO

SD-08 Manufacturer’s Instructions
Material Safety Data G AO
SD-09 Manufacturer’s Field
Reports
Documentation of the testing and G AO
verification actions taken by
manufacturer's representative to
confirm compliance with
manufacturer's standards or
instructions.
As-built Drawings G AE
Construction site plan 1.4 G
Traffic control plan 3.3.1 G
SD-03 Product Data
Backflow preventers 1.5 G
SD-06 Test Reports
Backflow Preventer Tests 2.2.5 G
SD-07 Certificates
Backflow Tester 1.5.1 G
Backflow Preventers 1.5
01 52 00.00 44 SD-03 Product Data
Government Field Office 2.1 G

CONTRACT NO.
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
G
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
01 56 00.00 44 Dust Control 3.1 G

Products and Procedures 2.1 G
Material Safety Data Sheet G
Sandblasting 3.3.2 G
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Recordkeeping 1.7
Environmental Protection Plan 1.7 G
Storm Water Pollution Prevention 3.2.5 G
Plan
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Hazardous Substance Reporting 3.17 G
Storm Water Pollution Prevention 1.3.2
Plan
Storm Water Notice of Intent 1.3.2
SD-06 Test Reports
Storm Water Inspection Reports
for General Permit
Erosion and Sediment Controls 1.3
SD-07 Certificates
Mill Certificate or Affidavit 2.1.3
Storm Water Pollution Prevention G
Plan
Notice of Termination

CONTRACT NO.
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
G
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
01 57 24.03 44 G; PER-EE
01 58 00 SD-02 Shop Drawings
Preliminary one line 1.3.1.1 G PO
preliminary drawing indicating G PO
layout and text content
Sign Legend Orders 1.4.1 G PO
SD-04 Samples
Final rendering 1.3.1.2 G PO
Final framed rendering 1.3.1.3 G PO
Facility Recognition Plaque G PO
Survey Data 3.1
Waste Management Plan 1.6 G
Records 1.7
01 78 02.00 44 SD-11 Closeout Submittals
LEED Review Meetings
Red Zone Meeting 1.10
Video 1.8.1.1
Operations And Maintenance G
Manuals
Preliminary Record Drawings 1.5.3
Final Record Drawings 1.5.4
Final Record Drawings 1.5.5

CONTRACT NO.
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
G
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
01 78 02.00 44 Sustainable Design

Documentation
Construction Warranty 1.6.1.2
Management Plan
Performance Bond 1.6.2
Original Warranty Documents 1.6.3
Warranty Point of Contact 1.6.3
Warranty Report 1.6.5
Warranty Tags 1.6.4
Inventory Of Contractor 1.5.8
Furnished And Installed
Equipment
Inventory Of Contractor 1.5.9
Furnished And Installed
Equipment
Inventory Of Government
Furnished Contractor Installed
Equipment (GF/CI)
Real Property Record 1.11
Final Cleaning 3.2
Existing Conditions 1.9 G PO
SD-07 Certificates
Demolition Plan 1.2.1 G PO
Notification 1.6 G PO

CONTRACT NO.
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
G
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
02 41 00 Receipts 3.3.3
02 82 16.00 20 SD-03 Product Data
Local exhaust equipment 3.1.4 G
Vacuums 3.1.5 G
Respirators 3.1.1.1 G
Pressure differential automatic 3.1.4 G
recording instrument
Amended water 1.2.2 G
Material Safety Data Sheets 1.3.8 G
(MSDS) for all materials
SD-06 Test Reports
Air sampling results 1.5.5 G
Pressure differential recordings 1.5.6 G
for local exhaust system
Asbestos disposal quantity report 3.3.3.2 G
Clearance sampling 3.2.7.3 G
SD-07 Certificates
Asbestos hazard abatement plan 1.3.9 G
Testing laboratory 1.3.10 G
Private qualified person 1.5.1 G
documentation
Contractor's license 1.5.4 G
Competent person 1.5.2 G
Worker's license 1.5.3 G
Landfill approval 1.3.11 G
Employee training 1.3.3 G

CONTRACT NO.
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
G
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
02 82 16.00 20 Medical certification 1.3.12 G

Waste shipment records 1.3.11 G
Respiratory Protection Program 1.3.6 G
Delivery tickets 1.3.11 G
Vacuums 3.1.5 G
Water filtration equipment 3.1.2.3 G
Ventilation systems 3.1.5 G
equipment used to contain 3.1 G
airborne asbestos fibers
Notifications 1.3.4
Notifications 1.3.4 G
Rental equipment 1.6.1 G
Respirator program records 1.3.6.1 G
Permits and licenses 1.3.4 G
Lead Compliance Plan 1.5.2.2 G
Competent Person 1.5.1.1 G
Training Certification 1.5.1.2 G
lead waste management plan 1.5.2.8 G
Medical Examinations 1.5.2.4 G
SD-06 Test Reports
sampling results 1.5.2.3 G
Occupational and Environmental 1.5.2.3 G
Assessment Data Report
SD-07 Certificates

CONTRACT NO.
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
G
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
02 83 13.00 20 Testing laboratory 1.5.1.3 G

hazardous waste manifest 3.5.2.1 G
turn-in documents or weight 3.5.2.1 G
tickets
Contractor's Qualifications 1.4 G
ODC Recovery and Recycling
Equipment's Certifications
Licenses and Permits 1.11 G
Notification of Recycling Activity
Spill Prevention Plan 1.7
Spill Prevention Plan 1.9
Environmental Pollution Liability 3.4
Insurance
Closure Report 3.5 G
Recycling Activity Delivery
Receipt
03 11 13.00 10 SD-02 Shop Drawings
Formwork 3.1.1
SD-03 Product Data
Design 1.2
Form Materials 2.1
Form Releasing Agents 2.1.8
SD-04 Samples

CONTRACT NO.
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
G
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
03 11 13.00 10 Sample Panels 1.4 G

Fiber Voids 2.1.9 G
SD-06 Test Reports
Inspection 3.5
Formwork Not Supporting Weight 3.4.1
of Concrete
SD-07 Certificates
Fiber Voids 2.1.9
03 15 00.00 10 SD-03 Product Data
Preformed Expansion Joint Filler 2.2
Sealant 2.3
SD-04 Samples
Lubricant for Preformed 2.3.2
Compression Seals
Field-Molded Type 2.3.3
SD-07 Certificates
Preformed Expansion Joint Filler 2.2
Sealant 2.3
Reinforcement 3.1 G
SD-07 Certificates
Reinforcing Steel 2.3
Qualification of Steel Bar 1.3.1
Butt-Splicers
03 31 00.00 10 SD-03 Product Data
Curing Materials 2.4

CONTRACT NO.
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
G
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
03 31 00.00 10 Recycled Content Products Part 2

Portland Cement 1.3
Portland Cement 2.1
Ready-Mixed Concrete 3.2.1
Vapor Barrier 2.11
Latex Bonding Agent 2.7
Floor Finish 1.3.8
Floor Hardener 2.10
Chemical Admixtures 2.3
Epoxy Resin 2.8
SD-05 Design Data
Mixture Proportions 1.3.1 G
SD-06 Test Reports
Testing and Inspection for CQC 3.14 G
SD-07 Certificates
Qualifications 1.5
Detail Drawings 1.4.5 G
SD-03 Product Data
Environmental Data 1.2.2
Clay or Shale Brick 2.2 G
Cement 2.10.4 G
Insulation 2.17 G
Cold Weather Installation 1.6.2 G
Salvaged Brick 2.4 G
Water-Repellant Admixture 2.11 G

CONTRACT NO.
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
G
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
04 20 00 SD-04 Samples
Concrete Masonry Units (CMU) 2.5 G
Concrete Brick 2.3 G
Stone Items 2.8 G
Clay or Shale Brick 2.2 G
Anchors, Ties, and Bar 2.13 G
Positioners
Expansion-Joint Materials 2.18 G
Joint Reinforcement 2.14 G
Insulation 2.17 G
Portable Panel 1.4.3 G
SD-05 Design Data
Pre-mixed Mortar 2.10.5 G
Unit Strength Method 1.2.4.1 G
SD-06 Test Reports
Efflorescence Test 3.25.3 G
Field Testing of Mortar 3.25.1 G
Field Testing of Grout 3.25.2 G
Prism tests 3.25.4 G
Masonry Cement 2.10.4 G
Fire-rated CMU 2.5.3 G
Masonry Inspector Qualifications 1.4.4 G
Single-Wythe Masonry Wall 3.25.5
Water Penetration Test
SD-07 Certificates
Clay or Shale Brick 2.2

CONTRACT NO.
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
G
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
04 20 00 Concrete Brick 2.3

Concrete Masonry Units (CMU) 2.5
Anchors, Ties, and Bar 2.13
Positioners
Expansion-Joint Materials 2.18
Joint Reinforcement 2.14
Masonry Cement 2.10.4
Insulation 2.17
Insulation 2.17
Precast Concrete Items 2.7
Admixtures for Masonry Mortar 2.10.1
Admixtures for Grout 2.12.1
Contamination 1.4.2
Masonry Cement 2.10.4
SD-10 Operation and Maintenance
Data
Plastic Identification 1.2.3
Take-Back Program 3.24.2
04 21 13.13 SD-02 Shop Drawings
Detail Drawings 1.3.3
SD-04 Samples
Expansion Joint Materials 2.12
Clay or Shale Brick 2.1.1
Concrete Masonry Unit 2.1.2
Prefaced Concrete Masonry Unit 2.1.3

CONTRACT NO.
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
G
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
04 21 13.13 Sample Panel 1.3.1

SD-06 Test Reports
Calculations 3.1
SD-07 Certificates
Clay or Shale Brick 2.1.1
Concrete Masonry Unit 2.1.2
Joint Reinforcement 2.3
Expansion Joint Materials 2.12
Insulation 2.5
Exterior Sheathing 2.7
Moisture Barrier 2.8.1
Vapor Retarder 2.8.2
Veneer Anchors 2.9
Welding 2.10.2
05 05 23.13 10 SD-03 Product Data
Ultrasonic Inspection 1.5.1
05 05 23 SD-03 Product Data
Welding Procedure Qualifications 1.5 G
Welder, Welding Operator, and 1.5.5
Tacker Qualification
Inspector Qualification 1.5.6
Previous Qualifications 1.5.2
Pre-qualified Procedures 1.5.3
SD-06 Test Reports
Quality Control 3.2
Nondestructive Examination 3.3.1

CONTRACT NO.
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
G
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
05 05 23 SD-07 Certificates
Certified Welding Procedure 1.5.1
Specifications (WPS)
Certified Brazing Procedure 1.5.1
Specifications (BPS)
Certified Procedure Qualification 1.5.1
Records (PQR)
Certified Welder Performance 1.5.1
Qualifications (WPQ)
Certified Brazer Performance 1.5.1
Qualifications (BPQ)
Erection Plan 1.5.2.1 G
Fabrication drawings 1.5.1 G
SD-03 Product Data
Shop primer 2.4
Welding electrodes and rods 2.3.1
Load indicator washers 2.2.4
Non-Shrink Grout 2.3.2
Load indicator bolts 2.2.5
SD-06 Test Reports
Class B coating 2.4
Bolts, nuts, and washers 2.2
SD-07 Certificates
Steel 2.1
Bolts, nuts, and washers 2.2

CONTRACT NO.
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
G
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
05 12 00 Galvanizing 2.5
AISC Quality Certification 1.4
Welding procedures and 1.5.2.2
qualifications
Welder qualification 1.5.2
Material Safety Data Sheet 1.5.2
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Steel joist framing 1.5.1 G
SD-06 Test Reports
Erection inspection 3.3.1
Welding inspections 3.3.1
SD-07 Certificates
Accessories 2.1
Certification of Compliance 1.5.2
Fabrication Drawings 1.3.5
Metal Floor Deck Units 2.3.2
Cant Strips 2.3.4.1
Ridge and Valley Plates 2.3.4.2
Metal Closure Strips 2.3.4.3
SD-03 Product Data
Accessories 2.2
Deck Units 2.3.1
Galvanizing Repair Paint
Joint Sealant Material 2.1.3

CONTRACT NO.
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
G
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
05 30 00 Mechanical Fasteners 2.2.9

Metal Floor Deck Units 2.3.2
Piston Tool Operator 1.3.2
Repair Paint 2.3.7
Welder Qualifications 1.3.3
Welding Equipment 1.3.3
Welding Rods and Accessories 1.3.3
SD-04 Samples
Metal Roof Deck Units 2.3
Flexible Closure Strips 2.1.4
Flexible Closure Strips 2.3
Accessories 2.2
SD-05 Design Data
Deck Units 2.3.1
SD-07 Certificates
Welding Procedures 1.3.3
Fire Safety 1.3.4.1
Wind Storm Resistance 1.3.4.2
structural steel door frames 2.7 G
Access doors and panels 2.3 G
Cover plates and frames G
Floor gratings and roof walkways G
SD-03 Product Data
Access doors and panels 2.3
Cover plates and frames

CONTRACT NO.
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
G
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
05 50 13 Control-joint covers
Expansion joint covers
Floor gratings and roof walkways
Structural steel door frames 2.7
Iron and Steel Hardware 2.1
Steel Shapes, Plates, Bars and 2.1
Strips
Metal Stair System 2.16
SD-03 Product Data
Structural Steel Plates, Shapes, 2.2
and Bars
Concrete Inserts 2.13
Masonry Anchorage Devices 2.14
Protective Coating 2.17
Steel Pan Stairs 2.18
SD-07 Certificates
Welding Procedures
Welder Qualification
Structural Steel Plates, Shapes, 2.2
and Bars
Iron and Steel Hardware

CONTRACT NO.
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
G
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
05 52 00 Steel Shapes, Plates, Bars and

Strips
Steel Railings and Handrails 2.10
SD-03 Product Data
Structural Steel Tubing 2.2
Hot-Rolled Carbon Steel Bars
Cold-Drawn Steel Tubing 2.3
Concrete Inserts 2.5
SD-07 Certificates
Welding Procedures
Welder Qualification
Structural Steel Tubing 2.2
Cold-Drawn Steel Tubing 2.3
Drawings of safety grating G
products, accessories and
attachments

CONTRACT NO.
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
G
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
05 53 00 Drawings showing fabrication and

installation details, including plans.
SD-03 Product Data
Safety grating products including
mill or factory galvanized steel
materials, finishes, gauge
thickness, surface patterns.
Nailing Strips 2.4.3.1 G AO
SD-03 Product Data
Fire-retardant treatment 1.8
Engineered wood products 2.1.1
Oriented Strand Board
Adhesives 2.4.4
SD-06 Test Reports
Preservative-treated 1.4.3
SD-07 Certificates
Certificates of grade 1.9.3
Preservative treatment 1.7
Data
Take-back program 3.3
Local/Regional Materials 1.10.1
Adhesives 2.4.4
Engineered Wood Products 2.1.1

CONTRACT NO.
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
G
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
06 10 00 Certified Wood 1.10.2

Detail Drawings G RO
Installation 3.1 G RO
SD-03 Product Data
Solid polymer material 2.1
Qualifications 1.4.1
Fabrications 2.3
SD-04 Samples
Material 2.1
Counter and Vanity Tops 2.3.4
SD-06 Test Reports
Solid polymer material 2.1
SD-07 Certificates
Fabrications 2.3
Data
Clean-up 3.2
Materials 1.3
Elastomeric waterproofing sheet 2.1
material
Protection board 2.5
Primers, adhesives, and mastics 2.1

CONTRACT NO.
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
G
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
Materials 2.1
SD-06 Test Reports
Elastomeric waterproofing sheet 2.1
material
Field Quality Control 3.6
Verification Of Conditions 3.1
Protective Covering 3.7
Primers, adhesives, and mastics 2.1
Block or board insulation 2.1 G AE
Vapor retarder 2.2
Pressure sensitive tape 2.3
Protection board or coating 2.4
Accessories 2.5
Block or Board Insulation 2.1
Adhesive 2.5.1
Blanket insulation 2.1
Sill sealer insulation 2.2
Vapor retarder 2.4
Pressure sensitive tape 2.5
Accessories 2.6

CONTRACT NO.
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
G
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
07 21 16 Insulation 3.3.1
Fasteners 2.4 G AO
Insulation 2.1 G
SD-06 Test Reports
Flame spread and smoke 1.4.1
developed ratings
SD-07 Certificates
qualifications 1.3
fasteners 2.4
insulation 2.1
Qualification of Manufacturer 1.5.3 G
Qualification of Installation 1.5.4 G
Contractor
Qualification of Welders 1.5.4.1 G
Warranty 1.8 G
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Installation Drawings 1.5.1.1 G
SD-03 Product Data
Recycled Content; 2.1
Wall Panels 2.2.1 G
Wall Panels 2.2.2 G
Factory Color Finish 2.2.3
Closure Materials 1.5.5

CONTRACT NO.
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
G
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
07 42 13 Pressure Sensitive Tape 2.5.4.4

Sealants and Caulking 2.5.4.1
Galvanizing Repair Paint 1.5.3.1
Enamel Repair Paint 1.5.3.1
Aluminized Steel Repair Paint
Accessories 1.5.5
Accessories 2.5
SD-04 Samples
Wall Panels 2.2.1 G
Wall Panels 2.2.2 G
Fasteners 1.5.3.1 G
Metal Closure Strips 2.5.3 G
Color chart G
SD-05 Design Data
Wind load design analysis 1.5.1.2 G
SD-06 Test Reports
Leakage Tests 3.7.2 G
Wind Load Tests 1.3.2 G
Coating 2.2.3.6 G
Chalking 2.2.3.6 G
Seismic Tests 1.3.2 G
SD-07 Certificates
Coil Stock 1.5.3.1 G
Fasteners 1.5.3.1 G
Galvanizing Repair Paint 1.5.3.1 G
Enamel Repair Paint 1.5.3.1 G

CONTRACT NO.
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
G
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
07 42 13 SD-08 Manufacturer’s Instructions

Installation 3.3 G
Reports
Manufacturer's Field Reports 3.8.1 G
Warranty 1.8 G
Maintenance Instructions 1.5.6 G
20 year 'No Dollar Limit' warranty 1.8.1
for labor and material
Gutters 3.1.13 G AO
Downspouts 3.1.14 G AO
Splash pans 3.1.15 G AO
Base flashing 3.1.10
Counterflashing 3.1.11
Flashing at roof penetrations 3.1.18
Reglets 3.1.12
Open valley flashing 3.1.16
Eave flashing
Quality Control Plan 3.5
Roofing 1.2.5 G AE
SD-03 Product Data
Roofing panels 2.1 G AO

CONTRACT NO.
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
G
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
07 61 14.00 20 Attachment clips 2.3

Closures 2.4.1
Accessories 2.4
Fasteners 2.4.2
Sealants 2.4.3
Insulation 2.5
warranty 1.7 G AO
SD-04 Samples
panel 2.1
Accessories 2.4
Sealants 2.4.3
Intermediate Support 2.2
SD-05 Design Data
Design calculations 1.5
SD-06 Test Reports
Field Inspection 3.6
Structural performance 1.3.3
Finish 1.6.6
SD-07 Certificates
Manufacturer's Technical 1.6.3
Representative
Installer's Qualifications 1.6.4
Coil stock 2.1 G AO
Installation 3.3 G AO

CONTRACT NO.
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
G
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
07 61 14.00 20 Information card 3.8

Firestopping Materials 2.1
SD-07 Certificates
Firestopping Materials 2.1
Installer Qualifications 1.4
Inspection 3.3
Sealants 2.1
Primers 2.2
Bond breakers 2.3
Backstops 2.4
SD-07 Certificates
Sealant 3.3.6
Doors 2.1 G AO
Doors 2.1 G AO
Frames 2.6 G AO
Frames 2.6 G AO
Accessories 2.4
Weatherstripping 2.8
SD-03 Product Data
Doors 2.1 G AO
Frames 2.6 G AO
Accessories 2.4
Weatherstripping 2.8

CONTRACT NO.
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
G
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C

Doors and frames 1.5.1 G AE
Doors and frames 2.1 G AE
Finish sample 1.5.2.1
calculations 1.2.1 G AE
Doors and frames 1.5.1
Doors and frames 2.1
Doors 2.1 G AO
SD-03 Product Data
Doors 2.1 G AO
Accessories 2.2
Water-resistant sealer 2.3.7
warranty 1.4
Sound transmission class rating 2.1.2 G AO
Fire resistance rating G AO
SD-06 Test Reports
Split resistance 2.4
Cycle-slam 2.4
Hinge loading resistance 2.4
Overhead Coiling Doors 2.1
Counterbalancing Mechanism 1.6
Manual Door Operators 1.6

CONTRACT NO.
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
G
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
08 33 23 Manual Door Operators 2.4

Electric Door Operators 1.6
Bottom Bar 2.1.2
Guides 1.5
Mounting Brackets 2.3.1
Overhead Drum 2.1.7
Hood
Painting 1.6
Installation Drawings 1.5
SD-03 Product Data
Hardware 2.2
SD-05 Design Data
Hardware 2.2

CONTRACT NO.
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
G
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
08 33 23 Electric Door Operators 1.6

Data
Operation and Maintenance 1.5
Manuals
Overhead Coiling Door 1.6
Assemblies
Materials 1.6
Devices 1.6
Procedures 1.6
Manufacture's Brochures 1.6
Parts Lists 1.6
Cleaning 3.3.2
Vault door Unit 1.2 G AE
Day gate 2.2 G AE
SD-03 Product Data
Vault Door and Frame 2.1
SD-07 Certificates
Vault Door and Frame 2.1 G AE
Installation 3.1
Windows 2.1 G AO
Fabrication Drawings 1.10

CONTRACT NO.
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
G
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C

Windows 2.1 G AO
Hardware G AO
Fasteners 2.2.3 G AO
Window performance 1.11 G AO
Thermal-Barrier Windows 2.3 G AO
Mullions 2.4 G AO
Window Cleaners' Bolts 2.5 G AO
Weatherstripping 2.2.2 G AO
Accessories 2.2.8 G AO
Adhesives 2.2.4
Thermal performance 1.11.5
SD-04 Samples
Finish Sample 1.4.2.1
Window Sample 1.4.2.2
SD-05 Design Data
Structural calculations for 2.1 G AE
deflection
Design Analysis 1.4.3 G AE
SD-06 Test Reports
Minimum condensation 1.4.4
resistance factor
Resistance to forced entry 1.4.4
Standard Airblast Test 1.11.2.3

CONTRACT NO.
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
G
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
08 51 13 SD-10 Operation and Maintenance

Data
Windows 2.1 G AO
Plastic Identification
Shop Drawings 3.3 G AE
SD-03 Product Data
Tubelights
Warranty 1.6
Hardware schedule 1.3 G CTAO
Keying system 2.3.7
SD-03 Product Data
Hardware items 2.3 G CTAO
Installation 3.1
Data
Hardware Schedule 1.3 G CTAO
Key Bitting 1.4
Installation
SD-03 Product Data
Insulating Glass 1.7.1
Glazing Accessories 1.3

CONTRACT NO.
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
G
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
Glazing Compound 2.3.2
Tape 2.3.5
Sealant 2.3.3.1
SD-07 Certificates
Setting and sealing materials 2.3
Glass setting 3.2
Wall louvers 1.4
Wall louvers 1.5
SD-03 Product Data
Metal Wall Louvers 2.2
SD-04 Samples
Wall louvers 1.4 G AO
Wall louvers 1.5 G AO
Door louvers 1.5 G AO
Color Schedule 2.2 G
Metal support systems 2.1

CONTRACT NO.
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
G
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
09 29 00 Cementitious backer units 2.1.7

Glass Mat Water-Resistant 2.1.4
Gypsum Tile Backing Board
Water-Resistant Gypsum 2.1.3
Backing Board
Glass Mat Covered or Reinforced
Gypsum Sheathing
Glass Mat Covered or Reinforced
Gypsum Sheathing Sealant
Impact Resistant Gypsum Board 2.1.6
Accessories 2.1.12
Gypsum Board 2.1.1
Adhesives 2.1.10
Joint Treatment Materials 2.1.8
SD-07 Certificates
Asbestos Free Materials 2.1 G AO
Material Safety Data Sheets 2.1
Data
Manufacturer maintenance 2.1
instructions
Waste Management 3.9

CONTRACT NO.
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
G
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
09 29 00 Local/Regional Materials 1.5.1

Gypsum Board 2.1.1
Adhesives 2.1.10
Detail Drawings 1.4 G
SD-03 Product Data
Tile 2.1
Setting-Bed 2.2
Mortar, Grout, and Adhesive 2.4
SD-04 Samples
Tile 2.1
Accessories
Grout 2.4
SD-07 Certificates
Tile 2.1
Mortar, Grout, and Adhesive 2.4
Tile 2.1
Reinforcing Wire Fabric 2.2.6
Adhesives 2.4
Approved Detail Drawings 1.2
SD-03 Product Data
Acoustical Ceiling Systems
SD-04 Samples

CONTRACT NO.
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
G
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
09 51 00 Acoustical Units 2.1

Acoustic Ceiling Tiles
SD-07 Certificates
Acoustical Units 2.1
Resilient Flooring and 2.6 G
Accessories
SD-03 Product Data
Accessories
Adhesives 2.2
SD-04 Samples
Accessories
SD-06 Test Reports
Moisture, Alkalinity and Bond 3.3 G
Tests
Surface Preparation 3.2 G
Installation 3.1 G
Data
Accessories

CONTRACT NO.
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
G
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
09 65 00 Local/Regional Materials 1.2.1

Resilient Flooring and 2.6
Accessories
Adhesives 2.2
Conductive Vinyl Tile 2.1
Installation of Conductive Vinyl 3.2
Tile
SD-04 Samples
SD-06 Test Reports
Testing 3.5
SD-07 Certificates
Adhesive 2.2
Qualifications of Applicator 1.3
Conductive Vinyl Tile
Static-Dissipative Vinyl Tile 2.2.1
Environmental Data
Adhesives 2.4
SD-04 Samples
SD-06 Test Reports
Testing 2.1.2

CONTRACT NO.
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
G
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
09 65 36 Testing 3.6
Moisture, Alkalinity And Bond 3.2
Tests
SD-07 Certificates
Adhesives 2.4
Qualifications of Applicator 1.3
Surface Preparation 3.1.2
Installation of Static-Control 3.3
Resilient Flooring
Installation of Wall Base 3.4
Data
Other Sustainable Requirements 2.1.3
Installation 3.4 G
Moldings 2.4 G
SD-03 Product Data
Carpet 2.1 G
Moldings 2.4 G

CONTRACT NO.
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
G
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
09 68 00 Surface Preparation 3.1 G

Installation 3.4 G
Regulatory Requirements 1.4 G
SD-04 Samples
Carpet 2.1 G
Moldings 2.4 G
SD-06 Test Reports
Moisture and Alkalinity Tests 3.2 G
SD-07 Certificates
Carpet 2.1 G
Regulatory Requirements 1.4 G
Data
Carpet 2.1 G
Cleaning and Protection 3.5 G
Maintenance Service
Carpet 2.1
Adhesives and Concrete Primer 2.3
Piping identification 3.10
stencil 3.10
SD-03 Product Data
Coating 2.1 G

CONTRACT NO.
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
G
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
09 90 00 Manufacturer's Technical Data 2.1

Sheets
Sealant
SD-04 Samples
Color 1.10 G
Textured Wall Coating System 1.4.2 G
Sample Textured Wall Coating 1.4.3 G
System Mock-Up
SD-07 Certificates
Applicator's qualifications 1.3
Qualification Testing 1.4.1.2 G
Application instructions
Mixing 3.6.2
Manufacturer's Material Safety 1.7.2
Data Sheets
Data
Coatings: 2.1 G
Visual Display Board 1.2 G
Secure Fold Down Wall Desk 2.6 G
SD-04 Samples
Aluminum 2.1.3 G
Porcelain Enamel 2.1.1 G
Materials 2.1 G

CONTRACT NO.
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
G
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
Visual Display Board 1.2
Approved Detail Drawings 3.1 G
SD-03 Product Data
Modular Exterior Signage System 2.1
Installation 3.1
Exterior Signage 1.3 G
Wind Load Requirements 1.4
SD-04 Samples
Exterior Signage 1.3 G
Data
Protection and Cleaning 3.1.2
Detail Drawings 3.1 G
SD-03 Product Data
Installation 3.1
SD-04 Samples
Interior Signage 1.2
Software 1.5
Data
Approved Manufacturer's 3.1
Instructions
Protection and Cleaning 3.1.2

CONTRACT NO.
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
G
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C

SD-03 Product Data
Toilet Partition System 1.2
Cleaning and Maintenance 1.2
Instructions
Colors And Finishes 2.4
Partition Panels and Doors 2.2
Anchoring Devices and 2.1.1
Fasteners
Hardware and Fittings 2.1.3
Brackets 2.1.2
Door Hardware 2.1.4
Overhead-Braced Partitions
SD-04 Samples
Colors and Finishes 2.4
Partition Panels 2.2
Hardware and Fittings 2.1.3
Anchoring Devices and 2.1.1
Fasteners
SD-07 Certificates
Certification 1.6
Data
Waste Management 3.6

CONTRACT NO.
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
G
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C

Wire mesh partitions 1.4
SD-03 Product Data
Wire mesh partitions 1.4
Corner Guards 2.2
SD-03 Product Data
Corner Guards 2.2
SD-04 Samples
Finish 2.4
SD-06 Test Reports
Corner Guards 2.2
SD-07 Certificates
Corner Guards 2.2
Finishes 2.1.2 G
Accessory Items 2.2 G
SD-04 Samples
Finishes 2.1.2 G
Accessory Items 2.2 G
SD-07 Certificates
Accessory Items 2.2
Manufacturer's Data 2.1
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Accessories 2.3

CONTRACT NO.
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
G
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
10 44 16 Cabinets 2.4
Wall Brackets 2.5
SD-03 Product Data
Accessories 2.3
Cabinets 2.4
Wall Brackets 2.5
Replacement Parts 3.2.1
SD-04 Samples
Cabinet 2.1
Wall Brackets 2.5
Accessories 2.3
Types 2.1 G
Location 1.4 G
Installation 3.1
Numbering system 3.2
SD-03 Product Data
Material 2.2
Locking Devices 2.3.1
Handles 2.3.3
Finish 2.2.3
components 2.3
Assembly 3.1
SD-04 Samples
Color chips 1.5.1 G

CONTRACT NO.
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
G
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
10 51 13.01 Types 2.1 G

Location 1.4 G
Installation 3.1
Numbering system
SD-03 Product Data
Material 2.2
Locking Devices 2.3.1
Handles 2.3.4
Finish 2.2.3
components 2.3
Assembly 3.1
SD-04 Samples
Color chips 1.5.1 G
Shelving Units 2.1
SD-03 Product Data
Shelving Units 2.1
Accessories 2.2
Installation instructions 3.2
SD-04 Samples
Finish 2.3
SD-06 Test Reports
Shelving Units 2.1
Finish 2.3
Installation 3.2

CONTRACT NO.
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
G
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C

Window Blinds 2.1
Installation 3.2
SD-04 Samples
Window Blinds 2.1
SD-06 Test Reports
Window Blinds 2.1
Window Blinds 2.1
Data
Window Blinds 2.1
12 48 13.13 SD-03 Product Data
recycled material content 2.1
Entrance and Floor Mats 2.2.1
protective flooring materials 2.1
protective flooring materials 2.1
SD-04 Samples
manufacturer's standard color
charts
Entrance and Floor Mats 2.2.1
Detailed Drawings 3.1 G
SD-03 Product Data
Benches G
Installation 3.1 G

CONTRACT NO.
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
G
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
Benches
SD-06 Test Reports
Fire Safety G
Tests
Data
Assembly Manuals 2.2
Maintenance Manuals 3.2
Seating System
Adhesives 1.4
Fresh Paint 1.4
Bracing 2.2 G
Bracing 3.1 G
Bracing 3.4 G
Bracing 3.5 G
Equipment Requirements 1.4
02
SD-03 Product Data
Bracing 2.2 G ED
Bracing 3.1 G ED
Bracing 3.4 G ED
Bracing 3.5 G ED

CONTRACT NO.
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
G
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
13 09 00.00 44 03
Manufacturer's Qualifications 1.6.3 G
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Detail Drawings 1.2.1.8 G
Detail Drawings 1.6.1 G
SD-03 Product Data
sustainable acquisition
compliance
Manufacturer's catalog data 1.6.1 G
SD-04 Samples
Coil Stock 1.6.1 G
Coil Stock 2.1.8 G
Fasteners 2.5.1 G
Metal Closure Strips 2.8.1 G
Vapor Barrier 1.6.10 G
Manufacturer's color charts and 2.4.2 G
chips
SD-05 Design Data
descriptive and technical 1.6.1 G
literature
building design analysis including G
design of all items under the
design loads prescribed in UFC
4-010-01
SD-06 Test Reports

CONTRACT NO.
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
G
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
13 34 19 test reports 1.6.1 G

Coatings and base metals 1.6.1 G
Factory Color Finish Performance 1.6.1 G
Requirements
SD-07 Certificates
system components 1.6.1
Coil Stock 1.6.1 G
Coil Stock 2.1.8 G
Aluminized Steel Repair Paint 1.6.1
Galvanizing Repair Paint 1.6.1
Enamel Repair Paint 1.6.1
Qualification of Manufacturer 1.6.1 G
Qualification of Erector 1.6.1 G
Installation of Roof and Wall 1.6.2
panels
shipping, handling, and storage 1.7
Manufacturer's Warranty 3.13.1 G
Contractor's Warranty for 3.13.2 G
Installation
Shop Drawings 1.4.3 G DO
As-Built Drawings 3.11
SD-03 Product Data

CONTRACT NO.
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
G
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
21 13 13.00 10 Fire Protection Related 1.4.1

Submittals
Materials and Equipment 2.3 G DO
Spare Parts 1.6
Preliminary Tests 3.10 G RO
Final Acceptance Test 3.11 G RO
Onsite Training 3.12 G RO
Fire Protection Specialist 1.4.1 G DO
Sprinkler System Installer 1.4.2 G DO
SD-05 Design Data
Hydraulic Calculations 1.2.1.3 G DO
SD-06 Test Reports
Preliminary Test Report 3.11 G DO
Final Acceptance Test Report 3.11 G DO
SD-07 Certificates
Inspection by Fire Protection 3.3 G DO
Specialist
Data
Operating and Maintenance 3.12
Instructions
Plumbing System
SD-03 Product Data

CONTRACT NO.
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
G
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
22 00 00 Materials 2.1
Fixtures 2.3
Flush valve water closets 2.3.2
Wall hung lavatories 2.3.4
Countertop lavatories 2.3.5
Service sinks
Drinking-water coolers 2.3.6
Plastic shower stalls
Water heaters
Pumps
Backflow prevention assemblies
Shower Faucets
Welding 1.5.1
Vibration-Absorbing Features
SD-06 Test Reports
Tests, Flushing and Disinfection 3.4
SD-07 Certificates
Materials and Equipment 1.3
Bolts
Data
Plumbing System
Equipment Start-up Checklists G
Functional Performance Tests G

CONTRACT NO.
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
G
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
22 33 30.00 10 Solar Energy System 1.2

As-Built Drawings 3.3.4.1
SD-03 Product Data
Spare Parts 1.7
Solar Energy System 1.2
Welder Qualifications 1.4
SD-06 Test Reports
Inspection and Testing 3.3
Data
Procedures
SD-03 Product Data
Standard Products 2.1
Metallic Flexible Duct 2.9.1.1
Insulated Nonmetallic Flexible 2.9.1.2
Duct Runouts
Duct Connectors 2.9.1.2
Duct Access Doors 2.9.2.1
Fire Dampers 2.9.2.2
Manual Balancing Dampers 2.9.2.3
Automatic Smoke-Fire Dampers
Sound Attenuation Equipment 2.9.5
Acoustical Duct Liner 2.9.5

CONTRACT NO.
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
G
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
23 00 00 Diffusers 2.9.6.1
Registers and Grilles 2.9.6.2
Louvers 2.9.7
Air Vents,
Centrifugal Fans 2.10.1.1
In-Line Centrifugal Fans 2.10.1.2
Centrifugal Type Power Roof
Ventilators
Ceiling Exhaust Fans
Air Handling Units 2.11
Variable Volume, Single Duct 2.12.1.1
Terminal Units
Unit Ventilators
Energy Recovery Devices 2.13
Diagrams 1.2.1
Training
SD-06 Test Reports
Performance Tests 3.12
Performance Tests 3.14
Damper Acceptance Test 3.10
Manufacturer's Installation 3.2
Instructions
Training

CONTRACT NO.
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
G
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C

Data
Manuals
Fire Dampers 2.9.2.2
Manual Balancing Dampers 2.9.2.3
Automatic Smoke Dampers
Centrifugal Fans 2.10.1.1
Centrifugal Type Power Wall
Ventilators
Centrifugal Type Power Roof
Ventilators
Air Handling Units 2.11
Room Fan-Coil Units
Variable Volume, Single Duct 2.12.1.1
Terminal Units
Unit Ventilators
Energy Recovery Devices 2.13
TAB Firm 1.5.3.1 G DO
SD-02 Shop Drawings
TAB Schematic Drawings and 1.3.3 G DO
Report Forms
SD-03 Product Data

CONTRACT NO.
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
G
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
23 05 93 Equipment and Performance 1.3 G DO

Data
TAB Related HVAC Submittals 1.5.3.4 G DO
TAB Procedures 1.5.2 G DO
Calibration 1.5.2 G DO
TAB Execution 1.5.4 G DO
TAB Verification G DO
SD-06 Test Reports
TAB Work Execution Schedule G
TAB Procedures Summary G
Design review report 1.3.3 G
Design review report 1.6.2.1 G
TAB report 1.5.5.1 G
TAB report 1.5.5.1 G
SD-07 Certificates
TAB Firm 1.5.3.1 G DO
Independent TAB Agency and 1.5.1 G DO
Personnel Qualifications
TAB Submittal and Work 1.6.2 G DO
Schedule
Design review report 1.3.3 G DO
Design review report 1.6.2.1 G DO
Advanced notice for TAB field 1.6.2 G DO
work
Prerequisite HVAC Work Check 1.6.2 G DO
Out List

CONTRACT NO.
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
G
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C

MICA Plates 3.2.2.4
Pipe Insulation Systems 2.3
Duct Insulation Systems 3.3
Equipment Insulation Systems 3.4
SD-03 Product Data
DDC Contractor Design Drawings 1.5.5 G DO
Final As-Built Drawings 1.5.7 G DO
SD-03 Product Data
Manufacturer's Catalog Data 2.1 G DO
Programming Software 2.13.4 G DO
GPPC Application Programs 2.13.4 G DO
XIF files 2.13.1 G DO
LNS Database 1.3.1 G DO
LNS Plug-in 2.13.3 G DO

CONTRACT NO.
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
G
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
23 09 23 SD-05 Design Data

Network Bandwidth Usage 1.3.3 G DO
Calculations
SD-06 Test Reports
Existing Conditions Report G DO
Start-Up and Start-Up Testing 3.5 G DO
Report
PVT Procedures 3.7.1 G DO
PVT Report 3.7.3 G DO
Pre-Construction QC Checklist 1.5.1 G DO
Post-Construction QC Checklist 1.5.1 G DO
Data
Operation and Maintenance 1.10.1 G DO
(O&M) Instructions
Training Documentation 3.6.1 G DO
Closeout QC Checklist 1.5.1 G DO
Gas Piping System 1.4.2
Gas Piping System 2.2
SD-03 Product Data
Pipe and Fittings 1.5
Gas equipment connectors 1.4.2
Gas Piping System 1.4.2

CONTRACT NO.
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
G
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
23 11 25 Gas Piping System 2.2

Pipe Coating Materials and 2.1
application procedures
Pressure regulators 2.6
Risers 2.4
Transition fittings 2.2.8
Valves 2.3
Valve box
Warning and identification tape 2.2.4
SD-06 Test Reports
Pressure Tests 3.17.1 G DO
Data
Gas facility system and 1.2.1
equipment operation
Gas facility equipment 1.2.3
maintenance
Water Treatment System
Water Analysis 2.5
Spare Parts 1.6
Field Instructions 3.4
Tests 3.5
Demonstrations 3.4
SD-06 Test Reports

CONTRACT NO.
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
G
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
23 25 00 Condenser Water Quality

Assurance Tests
Boiler Water Quality Assurance
Tests
Data
Piping Installation 3.3
Installation 3.3.4.4
Installation 3.3.7
SD-03 Product Data
Materials and Equipment 2.1.1
Spare Parts 1.5
Heating System Tests 3.8
Fuel System Tests
Unit Heaters 2.7
Welding
Qualifications 3.8
Field Instructions 3.10
Tests 3.4
SD-06 Test Reports
Heating System Tests 3.8
Fuel System Tests
Water Treatment Testing
SD-07 Certificates

CONTRACT NO.
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
G
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
23 52 00 Bolts 2.10.5.3
Emissions Monitoring
Energy Star 2.1.3
Data
Instructions
Grooved Mechanical 2.2.2.4
Connections For Steel
Grooved Mechanical 2.3.3
Connections For Copper
Calibrated Balancing Valves 2.4.8
Pump Discharge Valve 2.4.9
Water Temperature Mixing Valve 2.4.10
Water Temperature Regulating 2.4.11
Valves
Water Pressure Reducing Valve 2.4.12
Pressure Relief Valve 2.4.13
Combination Pressure and 2.4.14
Temperature Relief Valves
Expansion Joints 2.5.8
Pumps 2.6
Combination Strainer and Pump 2.5.2
Suction Diffuser

CONTRACT NO.
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
G
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
23 64 26 Expansion Tanks 2.7

Air Separator Tanks 2.8
SD-06 Test Reports
Piping welds NDE report 3.1.1.3
Pressure tests reports 3.4.2
Condenser Water Quality Test
Reports
One-Year Inspection Report For
Cooling Water
SD-07 Certificates
Employer's Record Documents 3.1.1.1
(For Welding)
Welding Procedures and 3.1.1.2
Qualifications
Fittings
Unions
Flanges
Gaskets
Bolting
Lesson plan for the Instruction 3.5
Course
Data
Calibrated Balancing Valves 2.4.8
Pump Discharge Valve 2.4.9

CONTRACT NO.
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
G
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
23 64 26 Water Temperature Mixing Valve 2.4.10

Water Temperature Regulating 2.4.11
Valves
Water Pressure Reducing Valve 2.4.12
Pressure Relief Valve 2.4.13
Combination Pressure and 2.4.14
Temperature Relief Valves
Expansion Joints 2.5.8
Pumps 2.6
Combination Strainer and Pump 2.5.2
Suction Diffuser
Expansion Tanks 2.7
Air Separator Tanks 2.8
Cooling Towers 2.5
Posted Instructions 3.1
Demonstrations 3.1
Verification of Dimensions 1.5.1
SD-06 Test Reports
Packaged cooling tower - field 3.3.1
acceptance test plan
Packaged cooling tower - field 3.4
acceptance test report
SD-07 Certificates
Service Organization 2.1
Cooling Tower 2.5.1.11

CONTRACT NO.
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
G
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
23 65 00 SD-08 Manufacturer’s Instructions

Field-erected cooling tower -
installation instructions
Data
Manuals
Drawings 1.4
SD-03 Product Data
Spare Parts 1.6
Posted Instructions 3.4
Verification of Dimensions 3.1
Coil Corrosion Protection
System Performance Tests 3.6
Demonstrations 3.4 G
SD-06 Test Reports
Refrigerant Tests, Charging, and 3.5
Start-Up
System Performance Tests 3.6
SD-07 Certificates
Service Organization 2.1.1
Data

CONTRACT NO.
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
G
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
23 82 02.00 10 Operation and Maintenance 3.4

Manuals
Lighting Fixtures in Buildings 3.2
SD-03 Product Data
Lighting Fixtures in Buildings 3.2
Contractor Designed Bracing 1.2.4
Fuses 2.4
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Connection Diagrams 1.3
Control Devices 3.1
Protective Devices 3.1
SD-03 Product Data
Motor Control 2.1
Enclosures 2.2
Circuit Breakers 2.3
Control Devices 3.1
Indicating Lights 2.7
SD-07 Certificates
Circuit Tests 2.6
dielectric tests 3.2

CONTRACT NO.
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
G
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
26 05 71.00 40 Control Devices 3.1

Protective Devices 3.1
Data
Manual Motor Controllers 2.1.1
Magnetic Motor Controllers 2.1.2
Combination Motor Controllers 2.1.3
Circuit Breakers 2.3
26 09 23.00 40 SD-03 Product Data
Photoconductive Control Devices 2.1
Light-Sensitive Control Devices
Dimming ballast controls 2.2
Light Level Sensor 2.3
Dimmer Switch
Lighting Contactor 2.4
Time Switch
Photocell Switch 2.5
Occupancy/vacancy Sensors 2.6
Motion Sensors 2.1
SD-06 Test Reports
System Operation Tests 3.2
Light-Sensitive Control Devices
Data

CONTRACT NO.
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
G
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
26 09 23.00 40 Lighting Control System, Data 2.1

Package 5
Pad-mounted transformer 1.5.1 G
drawings
SD-03 Product Data
Pad-mounted transformers 2.2 G
SD-06 Test Reports
Acceptance checks and tests 3.7.1 G
SD-07 Certificates
Transformer Efficiencies 2.2.2.1 G
Reports
design tests 2.8.2 G
routine and other tests 2.8.3 G
Data
Transformer(s) 1.6.1 G
Transformer test schedule 2.8.1 G
Panelboards 2.10
Transformers 2.13
Busway
Wireways 2.25
SD-03 Product Data

CONTRACT NO.
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
G
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
26 20 00 Receptacles 2.9
Circuit breakers 2.10.3
Switches 2.8
Transformers 2.13
Enclosed circuit breakers 2.11
Motor controllers 2.15
Manual motor starters 2.16
CATV outlets 2.19.1
Grounding Busbar 2.20.3
Surge protective devices 2.26
SD-06 Test Reports
600-volt wiring test 3.5.2
Grounding system test 3.5.5
Transformer tests 3.5.3
Ground-fault receptacle test 3.5.4
Reports
Transformer factory tests 2.28.1
Data
Electrical Systems 1.5.1
Detail Drawings 1.2
Outline Drawings 1.2
SD-03 Product Data
Panelboards 2.1

CONTRACT NO.
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
G
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
26 24 16.00 40 Directory Card and Holder 2.3

Filtered Panelboard
SD-04 Samples
Keys 2.1
SD-06 Test Reports
Continuity Tests 3.2
Insulation Tests 3.2
SD-07 Certificates
Statements 1.2
Panelboards 2.1
Detail Drawings 1.3
SD-07 Certificates
Materials 2.2
Drawings 1.4.6
Contractor's Modifications 1.2.1
SD-03 Product Data
Equipment 1.2
Spare Parts 1.6
SD-06 Test Reports
Tests and Measurements 3.5
Contractor's Modifications 1.2.1
SD-07 Certificates
Cathodic Protection System 1.2

CONTRACT NO.
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
G
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
26 42 14.00 10 Services of 'Corrosion Expert' 1.4.1

Data
Cathodic Protection System 1.2
Training Course 3.6
Fluorescent lighting fixtures 2.1
03
Fluorescent electronic ballasts 1.6.1
Fluorescent electromagnetic
ballasts
Fluorescent lamps 2.1.5
Metal-halide lamps
Dimmer switch
Lighting contactor
Time switch 2.5
Photocell switch 2.6
Exit signs 2.7
Emergency lighting equipment 2.8
Occupancy/vacancy sensors 2.9
Electronic dimming ballast 2.1.2
Dimming ballast controls 2.1.3
Light Level Sensor 2.1.4
Energy Efficiency 1.6.3.3

CONTRACT NO.
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
G
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
Lighting fixtures
SD-06 Test Reports
Operating test 3.3
Data
Lighting Control System 1.4.1
Operational Service 1.8
Luminaire drawings 1.4.1.1
Poles 1.4.1.2
SD-03 Product Data
Energy Efficiency 1.6.2
Luminaires 2.2
Lamps 2.2.1
Ballasts 2.2.2
Steel poles 2.4.1
Brackets 2.5
Auxiliary instant-on quartz system 2.7
SD-04 Samples
Luminaires 2.2
SD-05 Design Data
Design Data for luminaires 1.4.2
SD-06 Test Reports
Operating test 3.2

CONTRACT NO.
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
G
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C

Data
Operational Service
Cable Television Premises 1.2
Distribution System
Installation 3.1
SD-03 Product Data
Spare Parts 1.7
Test Plan 3.4
Qualifications 1.4
SD-06 Test Reports
Testing 3.4
SD-07 Certificates
Materials and Equipment 2.1
Manufacturer's 3.1.2
Recommendations
Data
Manuals
SD-03 Product Data

CONTRACT NO.
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
G
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
27 05 28.36 40 Cable Trays 3.1

Supports 2.3
Manufacturer's Instructions 3.1
Telecommunications drawings 1.6.1.1
Telecommunications Space 1.6.1.2
Drawings
SD-03 Product Data
Telecommunications cabling 2.3
Patch panels 2.4.5
Telecommunications 2.5
outlet/connector assemblies
Equipment support frame 2.4.2
Connector blocks 2.4.3
Spare Parts 1.10.3
SD-06 Test Reports
Telecommunications cabling 3.5.1
testing
SD-07 Certificates
Telecommunications Contractor 1.6.2.1
Key Personnel 1.6.2.2
Manufacturer Qualifications 1.6.2.3
Test plan 1.6.3
Reports

CONTRACT NO.
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
G
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
27 10 00 Factory reel tests 2.11.1

Data
Telecommunications cabling and 1.10.1
pathway system
Record Documentation 1.10.2
SD-03 Product Data
Spare Parts 1.2.2
SD-06 Test Reports
Approved Test Procedures 3.3
Acceptance Tests 3.3
SD-07 Certificates
Components
Data
Public Address System
Wiring Diagrams 3.2.1 G
System Layout 1.3.1 G
System Operation 2.3 G
Notification Appliances 2.18 G
Amplifiers 2.16 G
As-Built Drawings 3.6.2

CONTRACT NO.
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
G
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C

Technical Data And Computer 1.3.2 G
Software
Fire alarm control panel 1.3.2 G
Fire Alarm And Mass Notification 2.14 G
Control Panel (FACP/FMCP)
Terminal cabinets 3.2.2 G
Manual stations 2.17 G
Transmitters 2.24 G
Batteries 2.13.1 G
Battery chargers 2.13.2 G
Smoke sensors 2.10 G
Thermal sensors 2.11 G
Wiring 2.25 G
Notification appliances 2.18 G
Addressable interface devices 2.7 G
Graphic annunciator G
Amplifiers 2.16 G
Tone generators 2.16 G
Digitalized voice generators 2.16 G
Waterflow detectors 2.21 G
Tamper switches 2.20 G
Electromagnetic door holders 2.22 G
Radio transmitter and interface 2.24.1 G
panels
SD-05 Design Data

CONTRACT NO.
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
G
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
28 31 76 System Operation 2.3 G

Battery power 2.13.1.2 G
Battery power 2.24.1 G
SD-06 Test Reports
Testing Procedures 3.6.1 G
Smoke sensor testing 2.10.3 G
SD-07 Certificates
Installer 1.5.1.4
Reports
Mass Notification System 1.5.2.2
Data
Operation and Maintenance 1.7 G
(O&M) Instructions
Instruction of Government 3.7
Employees
Shoring 3.5 G
Dewatering Work Plan 1.3.1 G
SD-03 Product Data
Utilization of Excavated Materials 3.8 G
Opening of any Excavation or 3.4
Borrow Pit
Shoulder Construction

CONTRACT NO.
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
G
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
31 00 00 SD-06 Test Reports

Testing 3.15
Borrow Site Testing
SD-07 Certificates
Testing 3.15
Nonsaleable Materials 3.6.2
SD-04 Samples
Tree wound paint 2.1
Herbicide
Termiticide Application Plan 3.3.6 G
Termiticides 2.1
Foundation Exterior 3.3.3
Utilities and Vents 3.3.4
Crawl and Plenum Air Spaces 3.3.5
Verification of Measurement 3.1
Application Equipment 3.4.1
Warranty 1.6
SD-04 Samples
Termiticides 2.1
SD-06 Test Reports
Equipment Calibration and Tank 3.4.1
Measurement
Soil Moisture 1.5.1
Quality Assurance 1.3

CONTRACT NO.
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
G
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
Manufacturer's G PO
Recommendations
Equipment 1.3
SD-04 Samples
Materials 1.5.2 G
SD-06 Test Reports
Certified copies of the test reports 1.5.2 G
Equipment 1.3
Waybills and Delivery Tickets
SD-06 Test Reports
Sampling and Testing 1.5
Field Density Tests 1.5.2.4
Local/Regional Materials 1.5
SD-06 Test Reports
Mix Design 2.3 G
Contractor Quality Control 3.10 G
Material Acceptance 3.11 G
SD-04 Samples

CONTRACT NO.
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
G
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
32 12 16 Asphalt Cement Binder 2.2

Aggregates 2.1
SD-06 Test Reports
Aggregates 2.1 G
QC Monitoring 3.10.3.10
SD-07 Certificates
Asphalt Cement Binder 2.2 G
Testing Laboratory 3.6
Equipment 2.10
Proposed Techniques 3.1.2 G
SD-05 Design Data
Proportioning Studies 2.12.2 G ED
SD-06 Test Reports
Sampling and Testing 1.2.4 G ED
SD-07 Certificates
Contractor Quality Control Staff 1.4.1 G ED
Laboratory Accreditation 1.4.3 G ED
Commercial Laboratory 1.4.3 G ED
Equipment 1.3.4
SD-06 Test Reports
Density Tests 3.12
Concrete 2.1

CONTRACT NO.
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
G
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
32 16 13 SD-06 Test Reports

32 17 23.00 20 SD-03 Product Data
Reflective media for airfields
Reflective media for roads and 2.1.2
streets
Paints for airfields
Paints for roads and streets 2.1.1
High Build Acrylic Coating 2.1.5 G
(HBAC)
Thermoplastic compound 2.1.3
Thermoplastic compound 3.2.2.3
Raised Pavement Markers
Equipment 1.5 G PO
Qualifications 1.8
SD-06 Test Reports
streets
High Build Acrylic Coating 2.1.5 G
(HBAC)
Raised Pavement Markers

CONTRACT NO.
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
G
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
32 17 23.00 20 SD-07 Certificates

streets
Volatile Organic Compound 3.5.2
Construction equipment list 1.5
Fence Assembly 1.3 G PO
Location of Gate, Corner, End, 3.16.1 G PO
and Pull Posts
Gate Assembly 1.3 G PO
Gate Hardware and Accessories 2.17 G PO
Erection/Installation Drawings 1.3 G PO
SD-03 Product Data

CONTRACT NO.
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
G
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
32 31 13 Recycled Material Content 2.1 G PO

Zinc Coating 2.2 G PO
PVC Coating G PO
Aluminum Alloy Coating 1.5.1 G PO
Fabric 2.3 G PO
Stretcher Bars 2.12 G PO
Concrete 2.20 G PO
SD-04 Samples
Fabric 2.3 G PO
Posts G PO
Braces G PO
Line Posts 2.5 G PO
Sleeves 2.7 G PO
Top Rail 2.8 G PO
Tension Wire 2.11 G PO
Stretcher Bars 2.12 G PO
Gate Posts 2.15 G PO
Padlocks 2.22 G PO
Wire Ties 2.19 G PO
SD-07 Certificates
Certificates of Compliance 1.5.2 G PO
Hardware Assembly 1.3 G PO

CONTRACT NO.
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
G
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
32 31 13 Accessories 1.3 G PO
Construction Equipment List 3.3
Sources 2.1 GEC-DC
SD-07 Certificates
Topsoil 2.1 GEC-DC
Topsoil 3.3 GEC-DC
Sources 1.2.2 GEC-DC
Sources 2.1.5 GEC-DC
SD-06 Test Reports
Seed 1.2.1
Seed 2.1.1
GEC-DC
SD-07 Certificates
Seed 1.2.1
Seed 2.1.1
GEC-DC
Sprigs 1.2.3
Sprigs 1.4.2.4
Official Seed Analysis or Official 1.4.1.1 GEC-DC
Seed Tags
Official Sprig Nursery Sod Farm GEC-DC
Certification Tags
32 93 31.00 44 SD-06 Test Reports
Hardwood Mulch 2.7 GEC-DC

CONTRACT NO.
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
G
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
32 93 31.00 44 SD-07 Certificates

Fertilizer 1.4.4.3 GEC-DC
Fertilizer 2.4 GEC-DC
Soil Amendments 1.4.4.4 GEC-DC
Soil Amendments 2.5 GEC-DC
Hardwood Mulch 2.7 GEC-DC
Woodbark Mulch 1.4.4.5 GEC-DC
Plant Materials 1.3.1 GEC-DC
Plant Materials 2.2 GEC-DC
Placing Pipe 3.3
SD-04 Samples
Pipe for Culverts and Storm 2.1
Drains
SD-07 Certificates
Resin Certification 2.1.3
Resin Certification 2.1.4
Pipeline Testing 3.8
Determination of Density 3.7.5
Frame and Cover for Gratings 2.3.4
Pipe, Fittings, and Associated 2.1
Materials
SD-03 Product Data
Materials and Equipment 2.1 G PO

CONTRACT NO.
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
G
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
33 51 15 Spare Parts 1.6 G PO

Pipe and Accessory Coatings 2.1 G PO
SD-05 Design Data
Connections to Existing Lines 1.4.2.2 G PO
Connections to Existing Lines 3.9 G PO
Connection and Abandonment G PO
Plan
SD-06 Test Reports
Pressure and Leak Tests 3.10.1 G PO
SD-07 Certificates
Utility Work
Data
Gas distribution system and 1.2.1 G PO
equipment operation
Gas distribution system 1.2.2 G PO
maintenance
Gas distribution equipment 1.2.3 G PO
maintenance
As-Built Drawings 1.4.2
SD-03 Product Data
Fault Current Analysis
Protective Device
Nameplates 2.2

CONTRACT NO.
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
G
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
33 70 02.00 10 Material and Equipment 2.1

Installation Requirements 3.2
SD-06 Test Reports
Factory Tests 2.16
Field Testing 3.12
Operating Tests 3.12.10
Cable Installation 3.3.1.4
SD-07 Certificates
Material and Equipment 2.1
Cable Joints 3.4
Installation Engineer 3.13.2
Data
Operation and Maintenance 3.13.1
Manuals
33 71 01.00 40 SD-03 Product Data
Conductors 2.6
Insulators 2.5
Wood Poles 2.2.1
Nameplates 2.16
Cutouts 2.12
Surge arresters 2.11
Guy strand 2.7
Anchors 2.9
SD-05 Design Data

CONTRACT NO.
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
G
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
33 71 01.00 40 Power-Installed Screw

Foundations
SD-06 Test Reports
Wood Crossarm Inspection 1.5.4
Report
Field Test Plan 1.5.4.1
Ground resistance test reports 1.5.3
SD-07 Certificates
Wood poles 2.2.1
Wood crossarms 2.3.1
Data
Operation and Maintenance 1.6.1
Manuals
Telecommunications Outside 1.6.1.1
Plant
Telecommunications Entrance 1.6.1.2
Facility Drawings
SD-03 Product Data
Wire and cable 2.7
Cable splices, and connectors 2.4
Closures 2.3
Building protector assemblies 2.2.1
Protector modules 2.2.2

CONTRACT NO.
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
G
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
33 82 00 Cross-connect terminal cabinets

Spare Parts
SD-06 Test Reports
Pre-installation tests 3.5.1
Acceptance tests 3.5.2
Outside Plant Test Plan 1.6.3
SD-07 Certificates
Telecommunications Contractor 1.6.2.1
Key Personnel 1.6.2.2
Manufacturer's Qualifications 1.6.2.3
Building protector assembly 2.2.1
installation
Cable tensions 3.1.7.1
Fiber Optic Splices 3.1.8.2
Reports
Factory Reel Test Data 2.13.1
Data
Telecommunications outside 1.6.1.1
plant (OSP)
Record Documentation 1.8.1 G

CONTRACT NO.
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
G
O
V
T C T
R L
A A O
A N S R A A
C S S C C
T M S P I A T T
I I P A F / I I
Y L S R T E C C
34 41 15.00 44 Traffic and Handicap Parking 2.1 G PO

Signs
SD-06 Test Reports
Concrete 2.4 G PO

SECTION 01 33 29
LEED(TM) DOCUMENTATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

FOREST STEWARDSHIP COUNCIL (FSC)
FSC STD 01 001 (2000) Principles and Criteria for Forest

Stewardship
U.S. GREEN BUILDING COUNCIL (USGBC)
LEED (2002; R 2005) Leadership in Energy and

Environmental Design(tm) Green Building
Rating System for New Construction
(LEED-NC)
LEED Reference Guide (2005) LEED-NC Reference Guide for New

Construction
1.2 SUBMITTALS

that will review the submittal for the Government. The following shall be
submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
LEED Implementation Plan; G
LEED Documentation Notebook; G
1.3 DESCRIPTION
This project has been designed for, and shall be developed for a
sustainable rating of silver, or higher, in accordance with LEED Version 3.0.
Table 1 (see paragraph Table) identifies the LEED credit items that are
designed into or otherwise required for this project. No variations or
substitutions to the LEED credits identified for this contract shall be
allowed without written consent from the Contracting Officer. Should there
be a case where there is any problem meeting the full requirements of a LEED
credit identified for this project in Table 1, the Contractor must bring
this to the attention of the Contracting Officer immediately.
1.3.1 Credit Validation
This project has been registered with USGBC for validation of credits
earned. Contractor is not responsible for registering the project with
USGBC or for paying project registration fees to USGBC. Format and content
of all construction documentation must be in accordance with the
LEED Reference Guide requirements for supporting data required in event of
USGBC audit of the particular credit. Contractor is required to coordinate
through the Contracting Officer with Government's LEED consultant and/or
Administrative Assistant on assuring assembled data is acceptable to USGBC
and responding to USGBC requests for additional construction data in the
course of seeking project certification. Design documentation will be
provided by others.
1.3.2 Contractor Responsibilities
Some LEED credits are inherent in the design provided and require no
further submittal or documentation. For these credits, the Contractor is
to notify the Contracting Officer in advance of selection of any specified
material or use of any permissible construction methods that may result in
a deviation from the LEED designer intent. Some LEED credits involve
material selection and are generally identified within the technical
sections with the notation "LEED," though not specifically identified in
all occurrences. Some LEED credits are dependent on construction practices.
All LEED credits identified in Table 1 not inherent in the design provided
shall be documented by the Contractor. Table 1 provides a general summary
of applicable credits. Detailed submittal requirements are contained in
the LEED Reference Guide and in the technical sections.
In all cases where a material, product, or execution requirement is

identified by "LEED" in the contract documents, additional data or
certificates shall be submitted with the individual component or process
validating the material or component to the respective LEED credit item.
These additional data or certificates shall be separable from the other
submitted data and a copy shall be included in the LEED Documentation
Notebook in addition to the distribution indicated in the submittal
register.
1.4 LEED IMPLEMENTATION PLAN
LEED Implementation Plan shall be submitted within 30 days after notice to

proceed. The plan, when completed, shall provide a detailed description of
all activities that relate to accomplishing project LEED requirements,
including construction practices, procurement practices, and proposed
submittals and documentation for each LEED credit. Plan shall also include
the following:
a. Name of individual(s) on the Contractor's staff responsible for

ensuring LEED credits and prerequisites are earned and responsible for
assembling documentation. A responsible LEED Accredited Professional
shall be assigned by the Contractor to fullfil the requirements of
LEED-NC Credit ID2..
b. Copy of proposed contract with Commissioning Agent.
c. Templates to be used for tracking LEED credits. Listing of

documents to be provided for each credit and schedule for their
inclusion in LEED Documentation Notebook.
d. List of all plans required in the technical sections for LEED

credit. Proposed submittal date of each plan. These shall be added to the
LEED Implementation Plan as they are completed. Plans shall include, without
limitation:
*Material Acquisition Plan
*Construction Waste Diversion & Recycling Plan
*Site Lay Down & Impact Minimization Plan
*Commissioning Plan
*Site Interior Air Quality Management Plan
oDuring Construction
oPrior to Occupancy
*Materials VOC Limitation Plan
*Contractor & Sub-Contractors' LEED & Sustainability Education Plan
*LEED OnLine QA/QC Plan
e. Implementation plan for cumulative materials credits, which shall

use applicable template with proposed materials, associated estimated
costs, and details necessary for LEED Calculations added in order to
determine if the listed materials can be expected to achieve the
project goal. Submit cumulative materials implementation plans before
materials purchaing begins.
1.5 LEED DOCUMENTATION
The Contractor shall update LEED OnLine credit categories no less

frequently than monthly. Documentation shall withstand scrutiny of both
Owner and GBCI. Minimally, documentation shall comply with requirements as
outlined by USGBC and GBCI in LEED Reference Guides and elsewhere. Any
reasonable requests for documentation, information, calculations, etc,
shall be supplied by Contractor no later than the following required
monthly update. At project conclusion, Contractor shall supply two (2) CD's
with all documentation as found in LEED Online, and as otherwise appropriate
for support and documentation of project efforts as related to LEED.
1.5.1 Submittals
All "G" designated submittals required for inclusion in the LEED

Documentation Notebook shall be separable from other submitted data and
shall be included in the LEED Documentation Notebook in addition to the
distribution indicated on the submittal register.
1.6 REQUIREMENTS
LEED credits as identified in Table 1 shall be incorporated and documented

as required by the Contract documents and in full compliance with the
LEED Reference Guide. LEED credits not identified elsewhere in the
Contract documents and those requiring further instruction are specified
below. Refer to the LEED Reference Guide for further definitions and
requirements.
1.6.1 Materials and Resources Credit 4, Recycled Content
Not withstanding the requirements of Section 01 62 35 RECYCLED/RECOVERED

MATERIALS, Contractor shall select materials so that the sum of
post-consumer recycled content value plus one-half of post-industrial
recycled content value constitutes at least 20 percent of the total
materials cost for the project. EPA Comprehensive Procurement Guidelines

has a supplier database. California Integrated Waste Management Board
(CIWMB) Recycled Content Directory also contains product and supplier data
at www.ciwmb.ca.gov/rcp.
1.6.1.1 Calculations
LEED Letter Template forms shall be used for tracking and documentation.
Recycled content value of project materials shall be determined by the
method described in the LEED Reference Guide. For this credit,
performance is measured for the entire project .
1.6.1.2 Substitutions
In the case of conflict between this requirement and individual technical

section requirements, Contractor may submit for Government approval
proposed alternative products or systems that provide equivalent
performance and appearance and have greater contribution to project
recycled content requirements. All such proposed substitutions shall be
submitted with the LEED Implementation Plan accompanied by product data
that demonstrates equivalence.
1.6.2 Materials and Resources Credit 5, Regional Materials
Contractor shall select materials so that a minimum of 10 percent (by

dollar value) of materials and products for the project are extracted,
harvested, or recovered, as well as manufactured, regionally within a 500
mile radius of the project site.
LEED Letter Template forms shall be used for tracking and documentation.
Amount of regional project materials shall be determined by the method
described in the LEED Reference Guide. .
1.6.3 Materials and Resources Credit 7, Certified Wood
Contractor shall select materials so that a minimum of 50 percent (by

dollar value) of permanently installed wood-based materials and products
for the project are certified in accordance with FSC STD 01 001.
LEED Letter Template formsshall be used for tracking and documentation.

Amount of FSC-certified project materials shall be determined by the method
described in the LEED Reference Guide. .
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 COORDINATION MEETINGS
There will be at least three onsite coordination meetings. The first will
be a preconstruction meeting to review the LEED Implementation Plan. The

requirements for this meeting may be fulfilled during the coordination and
mutual understanding meeting outlined in Section 01 45 01 USACE QUALITY
CONTROL. There will also be a pre-closeout meeting to review LEED
Documentation Notebook for completeness and identify any outstanding issues
relating to final score and documentation requirements. Another is a
closeout meeting to review the final LEED Documentation Notebook.
Additional review meetings may be held quarterly to review contractor's
progress relative to LEED requirements. All meetings shall be attended by
Contractor's designated individual responsible for LEED documentation,
Government representative and Installation representative. At closeout
meeting a final score for the project will be determined based on review of
project performance and documentation. Contractor shall make a set of
contract drawings and specifications available for review at each meeting
as well as an updated LEED Documentation Notebook.
3.2 TABLE 1
LEED credits as identified in Table 1 below are contract requirements and

shall be incorporated in full compliance with the LEED Reference Guide.
Table 1
Required Design & Construction Credits: 59 Points (31 Maybe)
ALL PREREQUISITES
Sustainable Sites (SS) Credits: 10 Points

SS1: 1 Point
SS4.2: 1 Point
SS4.3: 3 Points
SS4.4: 2 Points
SS5.2: 1 Point
SS7.1: 1 Point
SS7.2: 1 Point
Water Efficiency Credits: 8 Points

WE1: 4 Points
WE3: 4 Points
Energy & Atmosphere Credits: 14 Points

EA1: 10 Points
EA3: 2 Points
EA4: 2 Points
Materials & Resources Credits: 6 Points

MR2: 2 Points - CONTRACTOR
MR4: 2 Points - CONTRACTOR
MR5: 1 Point - CONTRACTOR
MR7: 1 Point - CONTRACTOR
Indoor Environmental Quality Credits: 9 Points

IEQ1: 1 Point
IEQ3.1: 1 Point - CONTRACTOR
IEQ6.1: 1 Point
IEQ7.1: 1 Point
Innovation & Design Credits: 5 Points

ID1.1: 1 Point (Energy Star / FEMP Appliances)
ID1.2: 1 Point (Low VOC FF&E Package)
ID1.3: 1 Point (Low Mercury Lighting))
ID1.4: 1 Point (CONTRACTOR TO ACQUIRE)
ID1.5: 1 Point (ID EP SS5.2 Maximize Open Space)
ID2: 1 Point
Regional Priority Credits: 4 Points

RP1.1: 1 Point (MR2)
RP1.2: 1 Point (SS5.1)
RP1.3: 1 Point (SS6.1)
RP1.4: 1 point (SS6.2)
TOTAL: 56 Points
SECTION 01 35 12.00 44
SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES FOR FORT POLK
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUBMITTALS

submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES.
Excavation And Trenching.
Secure required permits prior to performing any excavation or

trenching on the installation.
SD-07 Certifications.
Hazardous Material Content.
For applicable materials, furnish manufacturer's certifications

that materials installed on this project do not contain asbestos
or the lead content does not exceed 0.06 percent (600 ppm).
Solid Waste Disposition
Termite Control
Asbestos Certification Letter.

CADD And GIS Deliverables.
1.2 DIRECTIONS TO FORT POLK AND LOCAL MOTELS
a. The Eastern Area Office is located at 2315 Service Command Loop, Bldg.
4740, Fort Polk, LA 71459. The office telephone no. is (337) 531-2933.
See local area maps.
Driving directions from Hwy 171: East on Entrance Road (Name changes
to Louisiana Avenue after entering Fort Polk), stay on Louisiana Avenue;
turn right on to Texas Avenue (at 7th Traffic Light). 1st left will be
Service Command Circle. 1st parking lot on left will be Building 4740.
b. For base access, proceed to the Fort Polk Visitors Center located 2
miles from Highway 171 (on Entrance Road). Valid insurance, registration,
and driver's license are required for a one day visitors pass. For more
information, contact the Fort Polk Visitors Center at (337) 531-4978.
Contact the Corps of Engineer's office prior to visit for information
SECTION 01 35 12.00 44 Page 1

concerning an extended pass.
c. Web Sites:
Ft. Worth District Website: http://www.swf.usace.army.mil/

Joint Readiness Training Center and Fort Polk, LA:
http://www.jrtc-polk.army.mil/
Newcomers: www.militaryonesource.com
d. Hotels located in Leesville, LA
Best Western-337-392-1672
Holiday Inn Express-337-239-2122
Country Inn-337-238-3506
Landmark-337-238-2854
Days Inn-337-239-2612
e. Hotels located in DeRidder, LA
Stagecoach Inn- 337-462-0022

Country Inns of DeRidder-337-462-3450
1.3 EXCAVATION AND TRENCHING
Excavation and/or trenching operations to be performed outside the

(designated) limits of construction, for utility tie-ins, correction of
drainage problems, or for other reasons as may be required under the terms
of the contract, shall not be performed without a permit; and such work
shall only be performed during normal duty hours unless otherwise approved
by the Contracting Officer. Permit requests must be submitted to the
Contracting Officer a minimum of 14 calendar days prior to commencement of
excavation or trenching operations beyond construction limits.
1.4 PROTECTION OF THE RED-COCKADED WOODPECKER (RCW)
1.4.1 General
Construction activity shall be conducted in a manner which minimizes

impacts to the RCW. The boundaries of RCW clusters are located as
indicated in the contract drawings. Vehicle parking areas, material
stockpiles, and portable toilets are prohibited within RCW clusters.
1.4.2 RCW Clusters
No construction activity shall occur within an RCW cluster unless indicated

in the contract drawings. When work is indicated within an RCW cluster, no
tree shall be removed from the cluster without first contacting the
Contracting Officer and receiving approval from the Fort Polk Environmental
and Natural Resources Management Division (ENRMD). When working within an
RCW cluster, no earth-disturbing activities shall occur within 15 meters
(50 feet) of a cavity tree. All cavity trees are marked by a white paint
band. During the nesting season of 1 April through 30 June, no
construction activity shall occur within an RCW cluster until ENRMD marks
the nesting trees and the Contracting Officer gives approval, after which
no activity shall occur within 60 meters (200 feet) of the marked nesting
trees. Activity within the 60 meters (200 feet) limit shall not resume
after nesting season until ENRMD determines that the fledglings have left
the nests and the Contracting Officer approves resumption of the work. At
all times, construction activity within RCW clusters shall start no earlier
SECTION 01 35 12.00 44 Page 2

than 30 minutes after sunrise and shall halt at a minimum of 30 minutes

prior to sunset. Any construction equipment which must operate within a
cluster shall be moved outside of the cluster at the end of each day.
1.5 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLITION AND CONSTRUCTION DEBRIS
Unless otherwise indicated, demolition and construction debris shall be

disposed of outside the limits of Government controlled land and the
Contractor shall comply with all local and state regulatory requirements in
his disposal operations.
1.6 HAZARDOUS MATERIAL CONTENT
Materials installed on this project shall conform with the Consumer Product
Safety Commission's safety standards, especially materials used primarily
for roofing, building and roofing insulation, joint sealants, elastomeric
joint sealants and calking, gypsum board, plaster, paint and coatings
(interior and exterior), fireproofing, acoustical ceiling systems,
acoustical wall systems, mechanical and electrical equipment insulation or
pipe wrappings. Submit certifications from material manufacturers
attesting that their materials that are installed on this project, as
applicable, do not contain asbestos and that the lead content does not
exceed 0.06 percent (600 ppm) by (dry) weight of the material's
non-volatile content.
1.7 ASBESTOS CERTIFICATION LETTER
Prior to the final acceptance inspection, furnish a letter certifying that

no asbestos-containing materials were installed in the project. The letter
format is attached at the end of this Section.
1.8 SOLID WASTE DISPOSITION
The Army requires that the installation track all solid waste generated
(disposed and recycled) at Fort Polk (DA PAM 200-1 Section 5-9i), which
includes construction and demolition debris. As a result, contractors are
required to report to DPW-ENRMD the quantities of solid waste taken off the
installation. The requirement to report to DPW-ENRMD is found in JRTC and
Fort Polk Regulation 200-1 Section 9-4d(2) and the Contractor's
Environmental Guide. See the Solid Waste Disposition form attached at the
end of this Section.
If you have any questions or require additional information, please call

the installation environmental office at 531-7542 or 6008.
1.9 TERMITE CONTROL
The Fort Polk Installation Pest Management Plan (IPMP) approves the use of
the following three termicides for use on Fort Polk:
Termidor 80 WG (EPA 432-900) (BASF Corp.)

Phantom (EPA 241-392) (BASF Corp.)
Premise 75 (EPA 3125-455) (Bayer Corp.)
1.10 FORT POLK CADD AND GIS DELIVERABLES
1.10.1 Data Standards
Spatial Data Standard for Facilities, Infrastructure and Environment
SECTION 01 35 12.00 44 Page 3

(SDSFIE) current release shall be followed for Geospatial database

structure and attributes to allow for data integration. CADD data shall be
documented according to the current release of the Architecture,
Engineering and Construction (AEC)/CADD standards. All GIS and CADD data
will be documented in accordance with the Federal Geographic Data Committee
(FGDC) Content Standards for Digital Geospatial Metadata.
1.10.2 Coordinate System Projection and Datum
All GIS data shall use the Universal Transverse Mercator Zone 15 North
projection, World Geodetic System of 1984 (WGS84) datum, and the North
American Vertical Datum of 1988 (NAVD88) using Metric as the working units
to ensure data alignment and accuracy.
CADD data shall be geo-referenced in the State Plane Coordinate System

1983, using the North American 1983 Geodetic Datum with Survey Feet as the
working units. The projection, datum and coordinate system must be defined
and then documented in the metadata for both CADD and GIS and provided
whenever the data is distributed.
1.10.3 CADD & GIS Deliverables
All CADD deliverables of As-built drawings shall be delivered in a

MicroStation V8 .DGN compatible format utilizing survey feet for the
working units. A seed file can be obtained from the Fort Polk DPW CADD/GIS
Center. GIS deliverables shall be delivered in current GeoMedia file
format or an ArcView shape file format.
1.10.4 Point Of Contact
Contact: Fort Polk DPW CADD/GIS Center 337-531-6846
1.11 DOOR HARDWARE
Unless otherwise required by project requirements, hardware shall conform

to the current ANSI/BHMA standards, grade 1. Locks, cylinders, and cores
shall comply with ANSI/BHMA A156.13, Mortise Locks & Latches Series 1000,
ANSI/BHMA A156.2 Bored and Preassembled Locks and Latches, and
ANSI/BHMA A156.3 Exit Devices. Cylinders shall have key removable type
cores. Cores shall have not less than seven pins. Extensions of the
existing keying systems shall be provided. Cylinders and cores for
locksets other than those for mechanical rooms shall be manufactured by
Best Lock Corporation to extend the existing Base Keying System. Locksets
for mechanical rooms only shall be keyed to the existing Post utilities
master keying system, consisting of locksets manufactured by Arrow Lock
Co., Keyway K-7; furnish keys "O" bitted. Disassembly of knob or lockset
shall not be required to remove core from lockset. All locksets, exit
devices, and padlocks shall accept same interchangeable cores.
a. Cores and cylinders shall fit locksets without the use of adaptors
and without play. The key shall easily lock and unlock the lockset without
binding or other difficulties. Control key shall easily remove and install
cores.
b. Locks shall be keyed in sets or subsets in accordance with the

approved schedule. Furnish locks with the manufacturer's standard
construction cores and key system. Send permanent cylinders, cores, keys,
and the lock set-up code to the Contracting Officer by registered mail or
other approved means.
SECTION 01 35 12.00 44 Page 4

c. Furnish a quantity of key blanks equal to 20 percent of the total

number of file keys.
d. All keys shall be marked with "U.S. GOVERNMENT - DO NOT DUPLICATE".

Do not place room number on keys other than control/core keys. Stamp all
control/core keys with building code and building number, and the letter
"C".
e. All keys shall be stamped with 1/16" to 1/8" high characters.
f. Furnish keys to the Contracting Officer arranged in a container

suitable for key control system storage in sets or subsets as scheduled.
g. Closers: BHMA A156.4, Surface type closers shall be Grade 1, Series

C02000 Full Cover with options PT-4H, Size 1 or 2 through Size 6, and PT-4D
with back check position valve. Provide with brackets, arms, mounting
devices, fasteners, full size covers, except at storefront mounting,
pivots, cement cases, and other features necessary for the particular
application. Provide manufacturer's 10 year warranty.
(1) Closers for outswinging exterior doors shall have parallel arms
or shall be top jamb mounted. Provide narrow projection closers for doors
close to a wall so as not to strike the wall at the 90-degree open position.
(2) Closers on doors accessible to the physically handicapped shall

have the closing force set for a push-pull of 2.27 kg (5 pounds) applied at
the knob or handle for interior doors; for exterior doors, set to the
minimum required to relatch the door.
PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT APPLICABLE)
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 FORMS
3.1.1 Asbestos Certification Letter
CERTIFICATION LETTER
Project Name: ___________________________________________
Name of Contractor: _____________________________________
Project Contract/Delivery Order Number: ___________________
Facility Number: ___________________
Date: ___________________
To Whom It May Concern:
This letter is to certify that the project indicated above has been
constructed using no asbestos-containing materials in accordance with the
design requirements.
SECTION 01 35 12.00 44 Page 5

Sincerely,
Typed Name: ___________________________
Written / Typed Name: ___________________________
SECTION 01 35 12.00 44 Page 6

3.1.2 SOLID WASTE DISPOSITION
Contractor: _______________________
DATE WASTE TYPE DISPOSAL/RECYCLING QUANTITY RECYCLED

FACILITY NAME AND (LBS) OR
LOCATION DISPOSED
____________________________________________________________________________
1 Jan 05 C&D Debris Carrie's C&D Landfill, 10,253.7 Disposed

Leesville, LA
1 Jan 05 Aluminum Carrie's Metal Recyclers, 600.45 Recycled

Leesville, LA
_____________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
Submit a copy to the Installation Solid Waste Manager in building 2516, fax
to 337-531-8950, or email to carrie.henderson@polk.army.mil.
SECTION 01 35 12.00 44 Page 7

SECTION 01 35 26
GOVERNMENTAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

AMERICAN SOCIETY OF SAFETY ENGINEERS (ASSE/SAFE)
ASSE/SAFE A10.32 (2004) Fall Protection
ASSE/SAFE A10.34 (2001; R 2005) Protection of the Public on

or Adjacent to Construction Sites
ASSE/SAFE Z359.1 (2007) Safety Requirements for Personal

Fall Arrest Systems, Subsystems and
Components
ASME INTERNATIONAL (ASME)
ASME B30.22 (2005) Articulating Boom Cranes
ASME B30.3 (2004) Construction Tower Cranes
ASME B30.5 (2004) Mobile and Locomotive Cranes
ASME B30.8 (2004) Floating Cranes and Floating

Derricks
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)
NFPA 10 (2006; Errata 2006) Standard for Portable

Fire Extinguishers
NFPA 51B (2003) Fire Prevention During Welding,

Cutting, and Other Hot Work
NFPA 70 (2007) National Electrical Code - 2008

Edition
NFPA 70E (2004; AMD 2004) Electrical Safety in the

Workplace
EM 385-1-1 () Safety and Health Requirements Manual
U.S. NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION (NARA)
29 CFR 1910 Occupational Safety and Health Standards
29 CFR 1910.146 Permit-required Confined Spaces
29 CFR 1926 Safety and Health Regulations for

Construction
29 CFR 1926.500 Fall Protection
1.2 SUBMITTALS

Accident Prevention Plan (APP); G
Activity Hazard Analysis (AHA); G
Crane Critical Lift Plan; G
Proof of qualification for Crane Operators; G
SD-06 Test Reports
Reports
Submit reports as their incidence occurs, in accordance with the

requirements of the paragraph entitled, "Reports."
Accident Reports
Monthly Exposure Reports
Crane Reports
Regulatory Citations and Violations
Gas Protection
SD-07 Certificates
Confined Space Entry Permit
Hot work permit
License Certificates
Certificate of Compliance (Crane)
Submit one copy of each permit/certificate attached to each

Daily Quality Control Report.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
b. High Visibility Accident. Any mishap which may generate publicity

and/or high visibility.
c. Medical Treatment. Treatment administered by a physician or by

registered professional personnel under the standing orders of a
physician. Medical treatment does not include first aid treatment even
through provided by a physician or registered personnel.
f. Recordable Injuries or Illnesses. Any work-related injury or

illness that results in:
(1) Death, regardless of the time between the injury and death,
or the length of the illness;
(2) Days away from work (any time lost after day of
injury/illness onset);
(3) Restricted work;
(4) Transfer to another job;
(5) Medical treatment beyond first aid;
(6) Loss of consciousness; or
(7) A significant injury or illness diagnosed by a physician or

other licensed health care professional, even if it did not result
in (1) through (6) above.
g. "USACE" property and equipment specified in USACE EM 385-1-1

should be interpreted as Government property and equipment.
h. Weight Handling Equipment (WHE) Accident. A WHE accident occurs

when any one or more of the six elements in the operating envelope
fails to perform correctly during operation, including operation during
maintenance or testing resulting in personnel injury or death; material
or equipment damage; dropped load; derailment; two-blocking; overload;
and/or collision, including unplanned contact between the load, crane,
and/or other objects. A dropped load, derailment, two-blocking,
overload and collision are considered accidents even though no material
damage or injury occurs. A component failure (e.g., motor burnout,
gear tooth failure, bearing failure) is not considered an accident
solely due to material or equipment damage unless the component failure
results in damage to other components (e.g., dropped boom, dropped
load, roll over, etc.).
1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
In addition to the detailed requirements included in the provisions of this

contract, comply with USACE EM 385-1-1, and the following federal, state,
and local, laws, ordinances, criteria, rules and regulations . Submit
matters of interpretation of standards to the appropriate administrative
agency for resolution before starting work. Where the requirements of this
specification, applicable laws, criteria, ordinances, regulations, and

referenced documents vary, the most stringent requirements govern.
1.5 SITE QUALIFICATIONS, DUTIES AND MEETINGS
1.5.1 Personnel Qualifications
1.5.1.1 Site Safety and Health Officer (SSHO)
The contractor shall provide a Safety oversight team that includes a

minimum of one (1) Competent Person at each project site to function as the
Safety and Health Officer (SSHO). The SSHO shall be at the work site at
all times, unless specified differently in the contract, to perform safety
and occupational health management, surveillance, inspections, and safety
enforcement for the Contractor, and their training, experience, and
qualifications shall be as required by EM 385-1-1 paragraph 01.A.17 and all
associated sub-paragraphs. A Competent Personal shall be provided for all
of the hazards identified in the Contractor's Safety and Health Program in
accordance with the accepted Accident Prevention Plan, and shall be on-site
at all times when the work that presents the hazards associated with their
professional expertise is being performed. The credentials of the
Competent Persons(s) shall be approved by the Contracting Officer in
consultation with the Safety Office.
The Contractor Quality Control (QC) person cannot be the SSHO on this
project, even though the QC has safety inspection responsibilities as part
of the QC duties.
1.5.1.2 Crane Operators
Meet the crane operators requirements in USACE EM 385-1-1, Section 16 and

Appendix G. In addition, for mobile cranes with Original Equipment
Manufacturer (OEM) rated capacitates of 50,000 pounds or greater, designate
crane operators as qualified by a source that qualifies crane operators
(i.e., union, a government agency, or and organization that tests and
qualifies crane operators). Provide proof of current qualification.
1.5.2 Personnel Duties
1.5.2.1 Site Safety and Health Officer (SSHO)
a. Conduct daily safety and health inspections and maintain a written

log which includes area/operation inspected, date of inspection,
identified hazards, recommended corrective actions, estimated and
actual dates of corrections. Attach safety inspection logs to the
Contractors' daily quality control report.
b. Conduct mishap investigations and complete required reports.

Maintain the OSHA Form 300 and Daily Production reports for prime and
sub-contractors.
c. Maintain applicable safety reference material on the job site.
d. Attend the pre-construction conference, pre-work meetings including

preparatory inspection meeting, and periodic in-progress meetings.
e. Implement and enforce accepted APPS and AHAs.
f. Maintain a safety and health deficiency tracking system that

monitors outstanding deficiencies until resolution. Post a list of
unresolved safety and health deficiencies on the safety bulletin board.
g. Ensure sub-contractor compliance with safety and health

requirements.
Failure to perform the above duties will result in dismissal of the

superintendent and/or SSHO, and a project work stoppage. The project work
stoppage will remain in effect pending approval of a suitable replacement.
1.5.3 Meetings
1.5.3.1 Preconstruction Conference
a. Contractor representatives who have a responsibility or significant

role in accident prevention on the project shall attend the
preconstruction conference. This includes the project superintendent,
site safety and health officer, quality control supervisor, or any
other assigned safety and health professionals who participated in the
development of the APP (including the Activity Hazard Analyses (AHAs)
and special plans, program and procedures associated with it).
b. Discuss the details of the submitted APP to include incorporated

plans, programs, procedures and a listing of anticipated AHAs that will
be developed and implemented during the performance of the contract.
This list of proposed AHAs will be reviewed at the conference and an
agreement will be reached between the Contractor and the Contracting
Officer's representative as to which phases will require an analysis.
In addition, establish a schedule for the preparation, submittal,
review, and acceptance of AHAs to preclude project delays.
c. Deficiencies in the submitted APP will be brought to the attention

of the Contractor at the preconstruction conference, and the Contractor
shall revise the plan to correct deficiencies and re-submit it for
acceptance. Do not begin work until there is an accepted APP.
d. The functions of a Preconstruction conference may take place at

the Post-Award Kickoff meeting for Design Build Contracts.
1.6 ACCIDENT PREVENTION PLAN (APP)
Use a qualified person to prepare the written site-specific APP. Prepare

the APP in accordance with the format and requirements of USACE EM 385-1-1
and as supplemented herein. Cover all paragraph and subparagraph elements
in USACE EM 385-1-1, Appendix A, "Minimum Basic Outline for Accident
Prevention Plan." Specific requirements for some of the APP elements are
described below. The APP shall be job-specific and address any unusual or
unique aspects of the project or activity for which it is written. The APP
shall interface with the Contractor's overall safety and health program.
Include any portions of the Contractor's overall safety and health program
referenced in the APP in the applicable APP element and made site-specific.
The Government considers the Prime Contractor to be the "controlling
authority" for all work site safety and health of the subcontractors.
Contractors are responsible for informing their subcontractors of the
safety provisions under the terms of the contract and the penalties for
noncompliance, coordinating the work to prevent one craft from interfering
with or creating hazardous working conditions for other crafts, and
inspecting subcontractor operations to ensure that accident prevention

responsibilities are being carried out. The APP shall be signed by the
person and firm (senior person) preparing the APP, the Contractor, the
on-site superintendent, the designated site safety and health officer and
any designated CSP and/or CIH.
Submit the APP to the Contracting Officer 15 calendar days prior to the
date of the preconstruction conference for acceptance. Work cannot proceed
without an accepted APP.
Once accepted by the Contracting Officer, the APP and attachments will be
enforced as part of the contract. Disregarding the provisions of this
contract or the accepted APP will be cause for stopping of work, at the
discretion of the Contracting Officer, until the matter has been rectified.
Once work begins, changes to the accepted APP shall be made with the
knowledge and concurrence of the Contracting Officer, project
superintendent, SSHO and quality control manager. Should any hazard become
evident, stop work in the area, secure the area, and develop a plan to
remove the hazard. Notify the Contracting Officer within 24 hours of
discovery. Eliminate/remove the hazard. In the interim, take all necessary
action to restore and maintain safe working conditions in order to
safeguard onsite personnel, visitors, the public (as defined by
ASSE/SAFE A10.34,) and the environment.
Copies of the accepted plan will be maintained at the resident engineer's

office and at the job site.
Continuously reviewed and amended the APP, as necessary, throughout the
life of the contract. Incorporate unusual or high-hazard activities not
identified in the original APP as they are discovered.
1.6.1 EM 385-1-1 Contents
In addition to the requirements outlines in Appendix A of USACE EM 385-1-1,

the following is required:
1.7 ACTIVITY HAZARD ANALYSIS (AHA)
The Activity Hazard Analysis (AHA) format shall be in accordance with USACE
EM 385-1-1. Submit the AHA for review at least 15 calendar days prior to
the start of each phase. Format subsequent AHAs as amendments to the APP.
The analysis should be used during daily inspections to ensure the
implementation and effectiveness of the activity's safety and health
controls.
The AHA list will be reviewed periodically (at least monthly) at the
Contractor supervisory safety meeting and updated as necessary when
procedures, scheduling, or hazards change.
Develop the activity hazard analyses using the project schedule as the
basis for the activities performed. Any activities listed on the project
schedule will require an AHA. The AHAs will be developed by the
contractor, supplier or subcontractor and provided to the prime contractor
for submittal to the Contracting Officer.
1.8 DISPLAY OF SAFETY INFORMATION
Within 1 calendar days after commencement of work, erect a safety bulletin

board at the job site. Include and maintain information on safety bulletin
board as required by EM 385-1-1, section 01.A.06. Additional items
required to be posted include:
a. Confined space entry permit.
b. Hot work permit.
1.9 SITE SAFETY REFERENCE MATERIALS
Maintain safety-related references applicable to the project, including

those listed in the article "References." Maintain applicable equipment
manufacturer's manuals.
1.10 EMERGENCY MEDICAL TREATMENT
Contractors will arrange for their own emergency medical treatment.

Government has no responsibility to provide emergency medical treatment.
1.11 REPORTS
1.11.1 Accident Reports
a. Conduct an accident investigation for recordable injuries and

illnesses, and property damage accidents resulting in at least $2,000
in damages, to establish the root cause(s) of the accident, complete
the USACE Accident Report Form 3394 and provide the report to the
Contracting Officer within 5 calendar day(s) of the accident. The
Contracting Officer will provide copies of any required or special
forms.
1.11.2 Accident Notification
Notify the Contracting Officer as soon as practical, but not later than
four hours, after any accident meeting the definition of Recordable
Injuries or Illnesses or High Visibility Accidents, property damage equal
to or greater than $2,000, or any weight handling equipment accident.
Within notification include contractor name; contract title; type of
contract; name of activity, installation or location where accident
occurred; date and time of accident; names of personnel injured; extent of
property damage, if any; extent of injury, if known, and brief description
of accident (to include type of construction equipment used, PPE used,
etc.). Preserve the conditions and evidence on the accident site until the
Government investigation team arrives on-site and Government investigation
is conducted.
1.11.3 Monthly Exposure Reports
Monthly exposure reporting to the Contracting Officer is required to be

attached to the monthly billing request. This report is a compilation of
employee-hours worked each month for all site workers, both prime and
subcontractor. The Contracting Officer will provide copies of any special
forms.
1.11.4 Crane Reports
Submit crane inspection reports required in accordance with USACE EM 385-1-1,

Appendix H and as specified herein with Daily Reports of Inspections.
1.12 HOT WORK
Submit and obtain a written permit prior to performing "Hot Work" (welding,
cutting, etc.) or operating other flame-producing/spark producing devices,
from the Fire Division. CONTRACTORS ARE REQUIRED TO MEET ALL CRITERIA
BEFORE A PERMIT IS ISSUED. The Contractor will provide at least two (2)
twenty (20) pound 4A:20 BC rated extinguishers for normal "Hot Work". All
extinguishers shall be current inspection tagged, approved safety pin and
tamper resistant seal. It is also mandatory to have a designated FIRE
WATCH for any "Hot Work" done at this activity. The Fire Watch shall be
trained in accordance with NFPA 51B and remain on-site for a minimum of 30
minutes after completion of the task or as specified on the hot work
permit.
When starting work in the facility, require personnel to familiarize

themselves with the location of the nearest fire alarm boxes and place in
memory the emergency Fire Division phone number. ANY FIRE, NO MATTER HOW
SMALL, SHAL BE REPORTED TO THE RESPONSIBLE FIRE DIVISION IMMEDIATELY.
1.13 FACILITY OCCUPANCY CLOSURE
Streets, walks, and other facilities occupied and used by the Government
shall not be closed or obstructed without written permission from the
1.14 SEVERE STORM PLAN
In the event of a severe storm warning, the Contractor must:
a. Secure outside equipment and materials and place materials that

could be damaged in protected areas.
b. Check surrounding area, including roof, for loose material,

equipment, debris, and other objects that could be blown away or
against existing facilities.
c. Ensure that temporary erosion controls are adequate.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 CONSTRUCTION AND/OR OTHER WORK
3.1.1 Hazardous Material Exclusions
Notwithstanding any other hazardous material used in this contract,

radioactive materials or instruments capable of producing
ionizing/non-ionizing radiation (with the exception of radioactive material
and devices used in accordance with USACE EM 385-1-1 such as nuclear
density meters for compaction testing and laboratory equipment with
radioactive sources) as well as materials which contain asbestos, mercury

or polychlorinated biphenyls, di-isocynates, lead-based paint are
prohibited. The Contracting Officer, upon written request by the
Contractor, may consider exceptions to the use of any of the above excluded
materials.
3.1.2 Unforeseen Hazardous Material
The design should have identified materials such as PCB, lead paint, and
friable and non-friable asbestos. If material, not indicated, that may be
hazardous to human health upon disturbance during construction operations
is encountered, stop that portion of work and notify the Contracting
Officer immediately. Within 14 calendar days the Government will determine
if the material is hazardous. If material is not hazardous or poses no
danger, the Government will direct the Contractor to proceed without
change. If material is hazardous and handling of the material is necessary
to accomplish the work, the Government will issue a modification pursuant
to "FAR 52.243-4, Changes" and "FAR 52.236-2, Differing Site Conditions."
3.2 PRE-OUTAGE COORDINATION MEETING
Contractors are required to apply for utility outages at least 15 days in

advance. As a minimum, the request should include the location of the
outage, utilities being affected, duration of outage and any necessary
sketches. Special requirements for electrical outage requests are
contained elsewhere in this specification section. Once approved, and
prior to beginning work on the utility system requiring shut down, attend a
pre-outage coordination meeting with the Installation Representative, and
where applicable, the Public Utilities representative to review the scope
of work and the lock-out/tag-out procedures for worker protection. No work
will be performed on energized electrical circuits unless proof is provided
that no other means exist.
3.3 SAFETY LOCKOUT/TAGOUT PROCEDURES
Contractor shall ensure that each employee is familiar with and complies
with these procedures and 29 CFR 1910.147.
Contracting Officer will, at the Contractor's request, apply

lockout/tagout tags and take other actions that, because of experience and
knowledge, are known to be necessary to make the particular equipment safe
to work on.
No person, regardless of position or authority, shall operate any switch,

valve, or equipment that has an official lockout/tagout tag attached to it,
nor shall such tag be removed except as provided in this section.
No person shall work on any equipment that requires a lockout/tagout tag

unless he, his immediate supervisor, project leader, or a subordinate has
in his possession the stubs of the required lockout/tagout tags.
When work is to be performed on electrical circuits, only qualified

personnel shall perform work on electrical circuits.
A supervisor who is required to enter an area protected by a lockout/tagout

tag will be considered a member of the protected group provided he notifies
the holder of the tag stub each time he enters and departs from the
protected area.
Identification markings on building light and power distribution circuits

shall not be relied on for established safe work conditions.
Before clearance will be given on any equipment other than electrical

(generally referred to as mechanical apparatus), the apparatus, valves, or
systems shall be secured in a passive condition with the appropriate vents,
pins, and locks.
Pressurized or vacuum systems shall be vented to relieve differential

pressure completely.
Vent valves shall be tagged open during the course of the work.
Where dangerous gas or fluid systems are involved, or in areas where the
environment may be oxygen deficient, system or areas shall be purged,
ventilated, or otherwise made safe prior to entry.
3.3.1 Tag Placement
Lockout/tagout tags shall be completed in accordance with the regulations

printed on the back thereof and attached to any device which, if operated,
could cause an unsafe condition to exist.
If more than one group is to work on any circuit or equipment, the employee
in charge of each group shall have a separate set of lockout/tagout tags
completed and properly attached.
When it is required that certain equipment be tagged, the Government will

review the characteristics of the various systems involved that affect the
safety of the operations and the work to be done; take the necessary
actions, including voltage and pressure checks, grounding, and venting, to
make the system and equipment safe to work on; and apply such
lockout/tagout tags to those switches, valves, vents, or other mechanical
devices needed to preserve the safety provided. This operation is referred
to as "Providing Safety Clearance."
3.3.2 Tag Removal
When any individual or group has completed its part of the work and is
clear of the circuits or equipment, the supervisor, project leader, or
individual for whom the equipment was tagged shall turn in his signed
lockout/tagout tag stub to the Contracting Officer. That group's or
individual's lockout/tagout tags on equipment may then be removed on
authorization by the Contracting Officer.
3.4 FALL HAZARD PROTECTION AND PREVENTION PROGRAM
Establish a fall protection and prevention program, for the protection of

all employees exposed to fall hazards. Within the program include company
policy, identify responsibilities, education and training requirements,
fall hazard identification, prevention and control measures, inspection,
storage, care and maintenance of fall protection equipment and rescue and
evacuation procedures.
3.4.1 Training
Institute a fall protection training program. As part of the Fall Hazard

Protection and Prevention Program, provide training for each employee who
might be exposed to fall hazards. Provide training by a competent person
for fall protection in accordance with USACE EM 385-1-1, section 21.A.16.
3.4.2 Fall Protection Equipment and Systems
Enforce use of the fall protection equipment and systems designated for
each specific work activity in the Fall Protection and Prevention Plan
and/or AHA at all times when an employee is exposed to a fall hazard.
Protect employees from fall hazards as specified in EM 385-1-1, section
21. In addition to the required fall protection systems, safety skiff,
personal floatation devices, life rings etc., are required when working
above or next to water in accordance with USACE EM 385-1-1, paragraphs
05.H. and 05.I. Personal fall arrest systems are required when working
from an articulating or extendible boom, swing stages, or suspended
platform. In addition, personal fall arrest systems are required when
operating other equipment such as scissor lifts if the work platform is
capable of being positioned outside the wheelbase. The need for tying-off
in such equipment is to prevent ejection of the employee from the equipment
during raising, lowering, or travel. Fall protection must comply with
29 CFR 1926.500, Subpart M, USACE EM 385-1-1 and ASSE/SAFE A10.32.
3.4.2.1 Personal Fall Arrest Equipment
Personal fall arrest equipment, systems, subsystems, and components shall

meet ASSE/SAFE Z359.1. Only a full-body harness with a shock-absorbing
lanyard or self-retracting lanyard is an acceptable personal fall arrest
body support device. Body belts may only be used as a positioning device
system (for uses such as steel reinforcing assembly and in addition to an
approved fall arrest system). Harnesses shall have a fall arrest attachment
affixed to the body support (usually a Dorsal D-ring) and specifically
designated for attachment to the rest of the system. Only locking snap
hooks and carabiners shall be used. Webbing, straps, and ropes shall be
made of synthetic fiber. The maximum free fall distance when using fall
arrest equipment shall not exceed 1.8 m (6 feet). The total fall distance
and any swinging of the worker (pendulum-like motion) that can occur during
a fall shall always be taken into consideration when attaching a person to
a fall arrest system.
3.4.3 Fall Protection for Roofing Work
Implement fall protection controls based on the type of roof being

constructed and work being performed. Evaluate the roof area to be accessed
for its structural integrity including weight-bearing capabilities for the
projected loading.
a. Low Sloped Roofs:
(1) For work within 1.8 m (6 feet) of an edge, on low-slope

roofs, Protect personnel from falling by use of personal fall
arrest systems, guardrails, or safety nets.
(2) For work greater than 1.8 m (6 feet) from an edge, erect and
install warning lines in accordance with 29 CFR 1926.500 and USACE
EM 385-1-1.
b. Steep-Sloped Roofs: Work on steep-sloped roofs requires a personal

fall arrest system, guardrails with toe-boards, or safety nets. This
requirement also includes residential or housing type construction.
3.4.4 Existing Anchorage
Certified (or re-certified) by a qualified person for fall protection

eexisting anchorages, to be used for attachment of personal fall arrest
equipmentin accordance with ASSE/SAFE Z359.1. Exiting horizontal lifeline
anchorages must be certified (or re-certified) by a registered professional
engineer with experience in designing horizontal lifeline systems.
3.4.5 Horizontal Lifelines
Design, install, certify and use under the supervision of a qualified

person horizontal lifelines for fall protection as part of a complete fall
arrest system which maintains a safety factor of 2 (29 CFR 1926.500).
3.4.6 Guardrails and Safety Nets
Design, install and use guardrails and safety nets in accordance with
EM 385-1-1 and 29 CFR 1926 Subpart M.
3.4.7 Rescue and Evacuation Procedures
When personal fall arrest systems are used, the contractor must ensure that
the mishap victim can self-rescue or can be rescued promptly should a fall
occur. Prepare a Rescue and Evacuation Plan and include a detailed
discussion of the following: methods of rescue; methods of self-rescue;
equipment used; training requirement; specialized training for the
rescuers; procedures for requesting rescue and medical assistance; and
transportation routes to a medical facility. Include the Rescue and
Evacuation Plan within the Activity Hazard Analysis (AHA) for the phase of
work, in the Fall Protection and Prevention (FP&P) Plan, and the Accident
Prevention Plan (APP).
3.5 SCAFFOLDING
3.5.1 Stilts
The use of stilts for gaining additional height in construction,

renovation, repair or maintenance work is prohibited.
3.6 EQUIPMENT
3.6.1 Material Handling Equipment
a. Material handling equipment such as forklifts shall not be modified

with work platform attachments for supporting employees unless
specifically delineated in the manufacturer's printed operating
instructions.
b. The use of hooks on equipment for lifting of material must be in

accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions.
c. Operators of forklifts or power industrial trucks shall be

licensed in accordance with OSHA.
3.6.2 Weight Handling Equipment
a. Equip cranes and derricks as specified in EM 385-1-1, section 16.
c. Comply with the crane manufacturer's specifications and limitations

for erection and operation of cranes and hoists used in support of the
work. Perform erection under the supervision of a designated person
(as defined in ASME B30.5). Perform all testing in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommended procedures.
d. Comply with ASME B30.5 for mobile and locomotive cranes, ASME B30.22
for articulating boom cranes, ASME B30.3 for construction tower
cranes, and ASME B30.8 for floating cranes and floating derricks.
e. Under no circumstance shall a Contractor make a lift at or above

90% of the cranes rated capacity in any configuration.
f. When operating in the vicinity of overhead transmission lines,

operators and riggers shall be alert to this special hazard and follow
the requirements of USACE EM 385-1-1 section 11 and ASME B30.5 or
ASME B30.22 as applicable.
g. Do not crane suspended personnel work platforms (baskets) unless

the Contractor proves that using any other access to the work location
would provide a greater hazard to the workers or is impossible. Do not
lift personnel with a line hoist or friction crane.
h. Inspect, maintain, and recharge portable fire extinguishers as

specified in NFPA 10, Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers.
i. All employees must keep clear of loads about to be lifted and of

suspended loads.
j. Use cribbing when performing lifts on outriggers.
k. The crane hook/block must be positioned directly over the load.

Side loading of the crane is prohibited.
l. A physical barricade must be positioned to prevent personnel from

entering the counterweight swing (tail swing) area of the crane.
m. Certification records which include the date of inspection,

signature of the person performing the inspection, and the serial
number or other identifier of the crane that was inspected shall always
be available for review by Contracting Officer personnel.
n. Written reports listing the load test procedures used along with
any repairs or alterations performed on the crane shall be available
for review by Contracting Officer personnel.
o. Certify that all crane operators have been trained in proper use
of all safety devices (e.g. anti-two block devices).
3.7 EXCAVATIONS
Perform soil classification by a competent person in accordance with

29 CFR 1926.
3.7.1 Utility Locations
Prior to digging, the appropriate digging permit must be obtained. All

underground utilities in the work area must be positively identified by a
private utility locating service in addition to any station locating
service and coordinated with the station utility department. Any markings
made during the utility investigation must be maintained throughout the
contract.
3.7.2 Utility Location Verification
The Contractor must physically verify underground utility locations by hand

digging using wood or fiberglass handled tools when any adjacent
construction work is expected to come within three feet of the underground
system. Digging within 0.061 m (2 feet) of a known utility must not be
performed by means of mechanical equipment; hand digging shall be used. If
construction is parallel to an existing utility expose the utility by hand
digging every 30.5 m (100 feet) if parallel within 1.5 m (5 feet) of the
excavation.
3.7.3 Shoring Systems
Trench and shoring systems must be identified in the accepted safety plan
and AHA. Manufacture tabulated data and specifications or registered
engineer tabulated data for shoring or benching systems shall be readily
available on-site for review. Job-made shoring or shielding must have the
registered professional engineer stamp, specifications, and tabulated
data. Extreme care must be used when excavating near direct burial
electric underground cables.
3.7.4 Trenching Machinery
Operate trenching machines with digging chain drives only when the
spotters/laborers are in plain view of the operator. Provide operator and
spotters/laborers training on the hazards of the digging chain drives with
emphasis on the distance that needs to be maintained when the digging chain
is operating. Keep documentation of the training on file at the project
site.
3.8 UTILITIES WITHIN CONCRETE SLABS
Utilities located within concrete slabs or pier structures, bridges, and

the like, are extremely difficult to identify due to the reinforcing steel
used in the construction of these structures. Whenever contract work
involves concrete chipping, saw cutting, or core drilling, the existing
utility location must be coordinated with station utility departments in
addition to a private locating service. Outages to isolate utility systems
must be used in circumstances where utilities are unable to be positively
identified. The use of historical drawings does not alleviate the
contractor from meeting this requirement.
3.9 ELECTRICAL
3.9.1 Conduct of Electrical Work
Underground electrical spaces must be certified safe for entry before

entering to conduct work. Cables that will be cut must be positively
identified and de-energized prior to performing each cut. Positive cable
identification must be made prior to submitting any outage request for
electrical systems. Arrangements are to be coordinated with the
Contracting Officer and Station Utilities for identification. The
Contracting Officer will not accept an outage request until the Contractor
satisfactorily documents that the circuits have been clearly identified.
Perform all high voltage cable cutting remotely using hydraulic cutting
tool. When racking in or live switching of circuit breakers, no additional

person other than the switch operator will be allowed in the space during
the actual operation. Plan so that work near energized parts is minimized
to the fullest extent possible. Use of electrical outages clear of any
energized electrical sources is the preferred method. When working in
energized substations, only qualified electrical workers will be permitted
to enter. When work requires Contractor to work near energized circuits as
defined by the NFPA 70, high voltage personnel must use personal protective
equipment that includes, as a minimum, electrical hard hat, safety shoes,
insulating gloves with leather protective sleeves, fire retarding shirts,
coveralls, face shields, and safety glasses. In addition, provide
electrical arc flash protection for personnel as required by NFPA 70E.
Insulating blankets, hearing protection, and switching suits may also be
required, depending on the specific job and as delineated in the
Contractor's AHA.
3.9.2 Portable Extension Cords
Size portable extension cords in accordance with manufacturer ratings for

the tool to be powered and protected from damage. Immediately remove from
service all damaged extension cords. Portable extension cords shall meet
the requirements of NFPA 70.
Provide a written assured equipment grounding conductor program

continuously enforced at the site by one or more qualified persons to
ensure that equipment grounding conductors for all cord sets, receptacles
that are not a part of the permanent wiring of the building or structure,
and equipment connected by cord and plug are installed and maintained in
accordance with the following:
a. The following tests shall be performed on all cord sets, receptacles that
are not a part of the permanent wiring of the building or structure, and
cord- and plug connected equipment required to be grounded.
1) All equipment grounding conductors shall be tested for continuity

and shall be electrically continuous.
2) Each receptacle and attachment plug shall be tested for correct

attachment of the equipment grounding conductor. The equipment grounding
conductor shall be connected to its proper terminal.
3) All required tests shall be performed as follows:
a) Before first use on site.
b) When there is evidence of damage.
c) Before equipment is returned to service following any repairs.
d) At intervals not exceeding 3 months.
b. The tests required shall be recorded and made available to COE.
c. The cords shall be tested quarterly and tagged with the following colors:
January - March White

April - June Red
July - September Orange
October - December Green
3.10 WORK IN CONFINED SPACES
Comply with the requirements in Section 06.I of USACE EM 385-1-1, OSHA

29 CFR 1910.146 and OSHA 29 CFR 1926.21(b)(6). Any potential for a hazard
in the confined space requires a permit system to be used.
SECTION 01 38 00
AIR BARRIER SYSTEM QUALITY CONTROL
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
This section includes administrative and procedural requirements for

accomplishing an airtight building enclosure that controls infiltration or
exfiltration of air.
1.1.1 Air Barrier System
The airtight components of the building enclosure and the joints, junctures
and transitions between materials, products, and assemblies forming the
air-tightness of the building enclosure are called "the air barrier
system". Services include coordination between the trades, the proper
scheduling and sequencing of the work, preconstruction meetings,
inspections, tests, and related actions, including reports performed by
Contractor, by independent agencies, and by governing authorities.
1.1.2 Characteristics
Ensure that the intent of constructing the building enclosure with a

continuous air barrier system to control air leakage into, or out of the
conditioned space is achieved. The air barrier system shall have the
following characteristics:
a. It must be continuous, with all joints sealed
b. It must be structurally supported to withstand positive and negative

air pressures applied to the building enclosure.
c. Connection shall be made between:
1) Foundation and walls.
2) Walls and windows or doors.
3) Different wall systems.
4) Wall and roof.
5) Wall and roof over unconditioned spaces.
6) Walls, floor and roof across construction, control and

expansion joints.
7) Walls, floors and roof to utility, pipe and duct penetrations.
d. Air Infiltration Barrier system shall be wrapped/sealed tight to all

items that penetrate the building exterior closure.
e. Air Infiltration Barrier shall be continuous, applied to the face of

exterior gypsum board sheathing, on exterior wall, onto exterior soffit
and fascia and onto roof glass-mat board.
f. All penetrations of the air barrier and paths of air infiltration /

exfiltration shall be made air-tight and shall have the following
properties:
1) Air Penetrations: 0.001cfm/ft2 at 75 Pa, when tested in

accordance with ASTM E2178. Type I per ASTM E1677. Equal to or
less than 0.04cfm/ft2 at 75 Pa, when tested in accordance with
ASTM E2357.
2) Water Vapor Transmission: 28 prems, when tested in accordance

with ASTM E96, Method B.
3) Water Penetration Resistance: Minimum 280 cm when tested in

accordance with AATCC Test Method 127.
4) Basis Weight: Minimum 2.7oz/yd2, when tested in accordance with

TAPPI Test Method T-410.
5) Air Resistance: Air infiltration at >1500 seconds, when tested
in accordance with TAPPI Test Method T-460.
6) Tensile Strength: Minimum 38/35lbs/in., when tested in

vaccordance with ASTM D882, Method A.
7) Tear Resistance: 12/10lbs., when tested in accordance with ASTM

D1117.
8) Surface Burning Characteristics: Class A, when tested in

accordance with ASTM E84. Flame Spread: 10, Smoke Developed: 10.
]]1.2 SUBMITTALS

Testing and Inspection Plan; G, AO
Report of potential deficiencies; G, AOList of proposed

subcontractors; G, AO
List of proposed products; G, AO
Quality control plan; G, AO
SD-03 Product Data
Product Data; G, AO
SD-05 Design Data
Design Data; G, AE
SD-06 Test Reports
Qualitative Testing and Inspection; G, AE
Quantitative tests; G, AE
Final acceptance test and operational test procedure; G, AE
SD-07 Certificates
Qualifications of Testing Entity; G, AO
Material Safety Data; G, AO
Documentation of the testing and verification actions taken by

manufacturer's representative to confirm compliance with
manufacturer's standards or instructions.; G, AO
As-built Drawings; G, AE
1.3.1 Qualifications
Engage an air barrier inspection and testing service agency, including

independent testing laboratory, that specialize in the type of air barrier
system inspections and tests to be performed.
1.3.2 Subcontractor CoordinationRegulatory Requirements
Requirements of this section apply to the coordination between

subcontractors required to provide an airtight building enclosure,
customized fabrication and installation procedures, not production of
standard products including, but not limited to:
a. Continuity of the air barrier materials and products with joints to

provide assemblies. Continuity of all the enclosure assemblies with
joints and transition materials to provide a whole building air barrier
system.
b. Specific quality-control requirements for individual construction

activities are specified in the sections of the specifications.
Requirements in those sections may also cover production of standard
products. Each subcontractor shall adequately and satisfactorily
perform the quality assurance documentation, tests and procedures
required by each section.
1.3.3 Inspection and Testing
Provide inspection and testing to verify compliance with requirements

specified or indicated.
1.3.3.1 Testing and Inspection Agency
The independent agency engaged to prepare a testing and inspection plan,

perform inspections, sampling, and testing of air barrier materials,
components and assemblies specified herein and in individual Sections and
shall cooperate with the Contractor in performance of the agency's duties.
The testing agency shall provide qualified personnel to perform required
inspections and tests.
a. The Agency shall review the contract documents, prepare and submit a
report of potential deficiencies prior beginning envelope enclosure
with air barrier or roofing work.
b. The agency shall notify the Architect and the Contractor promptly of
irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance
of its services.
c. The agency is not authorized to release, revoke, alter, or enlarge

requirements of the Contract Documents or approve or accept any portion
of the Work.
d. The agency shall not perform any duties of the Contractor.
1.3.3.1.1 Coordination
Coordinate the sequence of inspection and testing activities to accommodate

required services with a minimum of delay. Coordinate inspection and
testing activities to avoid the necessity of removing and replacing
construction to accommodate inspections and tests.
1.3.3.2 Performance Requirements
Materials
Materials used for the air barrier system in the opaque envelope shall have
an air permeance not to exceed 0.004 cfm/ft2 under a pressure differential
of 0.3 in. water (1.57psf) when tested in accordance with ASTM E 2178.
Assemblies
Assemblies of materials and components shall have an air permeance not to

exceed 0.03 cfm/ft2p under a pressure differential of 0.3 in. water
(1.57psf) when tested in accordance with ASTM E 1677.
Building
The air leakage of the entire building shall not exceed 0.25 cfm/sf under a
pressure differential of 0.3 in. water (1.57psf) when tested according to
ASTM E 779 or ASTM E 1827.
1.4 EXECUTION
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

The testing and inspection agency shall provide periodic observation and
inspection during installation of the air barrier system. The testing and
inspection agency will provide the following listed services:]
Qualitative Testing and Inspection
Perform testing and inspections as follows and submit daily reports of

observations, with copies to the Contracting Officer and Contractor.
a. All penetrations are sealed.
b. Continuity of the air barrier system throughout the building

enclosure with no gaps or holes.
c. Structural support of the air barrier system to withstand design air

pressures.
d. Masonry and concrete surfaces are smooth, clean and free of

cavities, protrusions and mortar droppings, with mortar joints struck
flush, or as required by the manufacturer of the air barrier material.
e. Site conditions for application temperature and dryness of

substrates.
f. Maximum length of exposure time of materials to ultra-violet

deterioration.
g. Surfaces are properly primed per manufacturer's specificstions.
h. Laps in material are 2 inches minimum, shingled in the correct

direction (or mastic applied on exposed edges), with no fishmouths.
i. Mastic applied on cut edges.
j. Roller has been used to enhance adhesion.
k. Measure application thickness of liquid-applied materials to

manufacturer's specifications for the specific substrate.
l. Materials used for compatibility..
m. Transitions at changes in direction, and structural support at gaps.
n. Connections between assemblies (membrane and sealants) for cleaning,

preparation and priming of surfaces, structural support, integrity and
continuity of seal.
o. Determine and perform testing in accordance with ASTM E 1186.
1) Infrared scanning with pressurization/depressurization.
2) Smoke pencil with pressurization/depressurization.
3) Pressurization/depressurization with use of anemometer.
4) Generated sound with sound detection.
5) Tracer gas measurement of decay rate.
6) Chamber pressurization/depressurization in conjunction with

smoke tracers.
7) Chamber depressurization using detection liquids.
1.5 Quantitative tests
Provide written test reports of all tests performed, with copies to the
Contracting Officer, Contractor and Architect.
1.5.1 Material Compliance
Determine material compliance for maximum air permeance per ASTM E 2178.
1.5.1.1 Opening Assembly Compliance
Determine assembly compliance for maximum rate of air leakage per ASTM E
283.
1.5.1.1.1 Assembly Testing
Verify assemblies meet test pressure and allowable air leakage rates as
specified for interior design conditions and location of project in
accordance with ASTM E 1677.
1.5.2 Whole Building Testing
Upon completion of the air/weather barrier system and verification by the

Testing Agency that the continuous air/weather barrier is in place and
installed without failures, provide test of the completed building to
demonstrate that the air leakage rate of the building envelope does not
exceed the specified performance requirements. Test in accordance with ASTM
E 779 or ASTM E 1827.
a. Accomplish tests using both pressurization or depressurization.
b. Test the completed building and demonstrate that the air leakage
rate of the building envelope does not exceed 0.25CFM/sq ft at a
pressure differential of 0.3 iwg (75 Pa) in accordance with ASTM E 779
or ASTM E 1827. Accomplish tests using BOTH pressurization and
depressurization. The preferred test method is to divide the average
measured air leakage flow rate in both directions in CFM @ 0.3 iwg (L/s
@ 75 Pa) by the surface area of the envelope enclosed by the continuous
air barrier of the building, including roof or ceiling, walls and floor
to produce the air leakage rate in CFM/sq ft @ 0.3 iwg (L/s.m2 @ 75
Pa). If the 75 Pa pressure differential cannot be achieved then perform
a multi-point test in both directions from at least + 25 to + 50 Pa,
then - 25 to - 50 Pa and calculate the leakage in CFM @ 0.3 iwg (L/s @
75 Pa). The testing agency must achieve at least 50 Pa, but there is no
requirement that a maximum pressure of 75 Pa be achieved. The maximum
testing differential pressure should not exceed 75 Pa.
c. In addition to reporting the normalized air leakage, the testing

agency is also required to report the correlation coefficient (r2) and
95 percent Confidence Intervals (95%CI) to determine the accuracy of
the data collected and the quality of the relationship between flow and
pressure that was established during the test. The 95%CI should be
calculated in strict accordance with the methodology contained in ASTM
E 779 and the r2 value can be obtained by data analysis of the plotted
data. For the collected data to be statistically significant, the 95%CI
must not exceed ƒp0.02 for mean values of 0.25 or less, which equates
to approximately 8 percent. The r2 value must be above 0.98 for the
data to be statistically significant.
d. Do not perform the pressure test for the building until verifying
that the continuous air barrier is in place and installed without
failures in accordance with installation instructions so that repairs
to the continuous air barrier, if needed to comply with the required
air leakage rate, can be done in a timely manner.
1.5.3 Infrared Thermography Testing
Test the completed building using Infrared Thermography testing. Use

infrared cameras with a resolution of 0.1 °C or better. Perform testing on
the building envelope in accordance with International Organization for
Standardization (ISO) 6781 and ASTM C 1060. Determine air leakage pathways
using ASTM E 1186, and perform corrective work as necessary to achieve the
whole building air leakage rate specified in (a.) above.
1.5.3.1 Notification
Notify the Government at least 3 working days prior to the tests to provide
the Government the opportunity to witness the tests. Provide the Government
with written test results confirming the results of all tests.
1.6 REPAIR AND PROTECTION
Upon completion of inspection, testing, sample taking and similar services,

repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes. Protect
construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities, and
protect repaired construction. Repair and protection is responsibility of
each subcontractor for the work, regardless of the assignment of
responsibility for inspection, testing, or similar services.
SECTION 01 42 00
SOURCES FOR REFERENCE PUBLICATIONS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
Various publications are referenced in other sections of the specifications

to establish requirements for the work. These references are identified in
each section by document number, date and title. The document number used
in the citation is the number assigned by the standards producing
organization, (e.g. ASTM B 564 Nickel Alloy Forgings). However, when the
standards producing organization has not assigned a number to a document,
an identifying number has been assigned for reference purposes.
1.2 ORDERING INFORMATION
The addresses of the standards publishing organizations whose documents are

referenced in other sections of these specifications are listed below, and
if the source of the publications is different from the address of the
sponsoring organization, that information is also provided. Documents
listed in the specifications with numbers which were not assigned by the
standards producing organization should be ordered from the source by title
rather than by number.
ACOUSTICAL SOCIETY OF AMERICA (ASA)

2 Huntington Quadrangle, Suite 1NO1
Melville, NY 11747-4502
Ph: 516-576-2360
Fax: 516-576-2377
E-mail: asa@aip.org
Internet: http://asa.aip.org
ACI INTERNATIONAL (ACI)

38800 Country Club Drive
Farmington Hills, MI 48331
Ph: 248-848-3700
Fax: 248-848-3701
E-mail: bkstore@concrete.org
Internet: http://www.concrete.org
AIR-CONDITIONING, HEATING AND REFRIGERATION INSTITUTE (AHRI)

2111 Wilson blvd, Suite 500
Arlington, VA 22201
Ph: 703-524-8800
Fax: 703-528-3816
E-mail: ahri@ahrinet.org
Internet: http://www.ahrinet.org
AIR MOVEMENT AND CONTROL ASSOCIATION INTERNATIONAL (AMCA)

30 West University Drive
Arlington Heights, IL 60004-1893
Ph: 847-394-0150
Fax: 847-253-0088
E-mail: amca@amca.org
Internet: http://www.amca.org
ALLIANCE FOR TELECOMMUNICATIONS INDUSTRY SOLUTIONS (ATIS)

1200 G Street, NW, Suite 500
Washington, D.C. 20005
Ph: 202-628-6380
Fax: 202-393-5453
Internet: http://www.atis.org
ALUMINUM ASSOCIATION (AA)

National Headquarters
1525 Wilson Boulevard, Suite 600
Arlington, VA 22209
Ph: 703-358-2960
Fax: 703-358-2961
Internet: http://www.aluminum.org
AMERICAN ARCHITECTURAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (AAMA)

1827 Walden Office Square
Suite 550
Schaumburg, IL 60173-4268
Ph: 847-303-5664
Fax: 847-303-5774
E-mail: webmaster@aamanet.org
Internet: http://www.aamanet.org
AMERICAN ASSOCIATION OF STATE HIGHWAY AND TRANSPORTATION OFFICIALS

(AASHTO)
444 North Capital Street, NW, Suite 249
Ph: 202-624-5800
Fax: 202-624-5806
E-Mail: info@aashto.org
Internet: http://www.aashto.org
AMERICAN ASSOCIATION OF TEXTILE CHEMISTS AND COLORISTS (AATCC)

1 Davis Drive
P.O. Box 12215
Research Triangle Park, NC 27709-2215
Ph: 919-549-8141
Fax: 919-549-8933
E-mail: quantem@aatcc.org
Technical Questions: hammona@aatc.org
Internet: http://www.aatcc.org
AMERICAN BEARING MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (ABMA)

2025 M Street, NW, Suite 800
Ph: 202-367-1155
Fax: 202-367-2155
E-mail: info.abma@smithbucklin.com
Internet: http://www.abma-dc.org
AMERICAN CONFERENCE OF GOVERNMENTAL INDUSTRIAL HYGIENISTS (ACGIH)

1330 Kemper Meadow Drive
Cincinnati, OH 45240
Ph: 513-742-2020
Fax: 513-742-3355
E-mail: mail@acgih.org
Internet: http://www.acgih.org
AMERICAN FOREST & PAPER ASSOCIATION (AF&PA)

American Wood Council
ATTN: Publications Department
1111 Nineteenth Street NW, Suite 800
Ph: 800-890-7732 or 202-463-2766
Fax: 202-463-2791
Internet: http://www.awc.org/
AMERICAN GAS ASSOCIATION (AGA)

400 North Capitol Street N.W.
Suite 450
Ph: 202-824-7000
Fax: 202-824-7115
E-mail: webmaster@aga.org
Internet: http://www.aga.org
AMERICAN HARDBOARD ASSOCIATION (AHA)

c/o Composite Panel Association
18922 Premiere Court
Gaithersburg, MD 20879-1574
Ph: 301-670-0604
Fax: 301-840-1252
Internet: http://www.pbmdf.org
AMERICAN INDUSTRIAL HYGIENE ASSOCIATION (AIHA)

2700 Prosperity Ave., Shite 250
Fairfax, VA 22031
Tel: 703-849-8888
Fax: 703-207-3561
E-mail: infonet@aiha.org
Internet http://www.aiha.org
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION (AISC)

One East Wacker Drive
Chicago, IL 60601-1802
Ph: 312-670-2400
Fax: 312-670-5403
Publications: 800-644-2400
E-mail: pubs@aisc.org
Internet: http://www.aisc.org
AMERICAN IRON AND STEEL INSTITUTE (AISI)

1140 Connecticut Avenue, NW, Suite 705
Ph: 202-452-7100
Fax: 202-463-6573
Internet: http://www.steel.org
AMERICAN LUMBER STANDARDS COMMITTEE (ALSC)

P.O. Box 210
Germantown, MD 20875-0210
Ph: 301-972-1700
Fax: 301-540-8004
E-mail: alsc@alsc.org
Internet: http://www.alsc.org
AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI)

1819 L Street, NW, 6th Floor
Ph: 202-293-8020
Fax: 202-293-9287
E-mail: info@ansi.org
Internet: http://www.ansi.org/
AMERICAN PETROLEUM INSTITUTE (API)

1220 L Street, NW
Washington, DC 20005-4070
Ph: 202-682-8000
Fax: 202-682-8223
Internet: http://www.api.org
AMERICAN RAILWAY ENGINEERING AND MAINTENANCE-OF-WAY ASSOCIATION

(AREMA)
10003 Derekwood Lane, Suite 210
Lanham, MD 20706
Ph: 301-459-3200
Fax: 301-459-8077
Internet: http://www.arema.org
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING (ASNT)

1711 Arlingate Lane
P.O. Box 28518
Columbus, OH 43228-0518
Ph: 800-222-2768; 614-274-6003
Fax: 614-274-6899
E-mail: webmaster@asnt.org
Internet: http://www.asnt.org
AMERICAN SOCIETY OF CIVIL ENGINEERS (ASCE)

1801 Alexander Bell Drive
Reston, VA 20191-4400
Ph: 703-295-6300 - 800-548-2723
Fax: 703-295-6222
E-mail: marketing@asce.org
Internet: http://www.asce.org
AMERICAN SOCIETY OF HEATING, REFRIGERATING AND AIR-CONDITIONING

ENGINEERS (ASHRAE)
1791 Tullie Circle, NE
Atlanta, GA 30329
Ph: 800-527-4723 or 404-636-8400
Fax: 404-321-5478
E-mail: ashrae@ashrae.org
Internet: http://www.ashrae.org

1800 East Oakton Street
Des Plaines, IL 60018-2187
Ph: 847-699-2929
Fax: 847-768-3434
E-mail: customerservice@asse.org
Internet: http://www.asse.org
AMERICAN SOCIETY OF SANITARY ENGINEERING (ASSE)

901 Canterbury, Suite A
Westlake, OH 44145
Ph: 440-835-3040
Fax: 440-835-3488
E-mail: info@asse-plumbing.org
Internet: http://www.asse-plumbing.org
AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION (AWWA)

6666 West Quincy Avenue
Denver, CO 80235
Ph: 800-926-7337
Fax: 303-347-0804
Internet: http://www.awwa.org
AMERICAN WELDING SOCIETY (AWS)

550 N.W. LeJeune Road
Miami, FL 33126
Ph: 800-443-9353 - 305-443-9353
Fax: 305-443-7559
E-mail: info@aws.org
Internet: http://www.aws.org
AMERICAN WOOD PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (AWPA)

P.O. Box 361784
Birmingham, AL 35236-1784
Ph: 205-733-4077
Fax: 205-733-4075
E-mail: email@awpa.com
Internet: http://www.awpa.com
APA - THE ENGINEERED WOOD ASSOCIATION (APA)

7011 South 19th
Tacoma, WA 98466
Ph: 253-565-6600
Fax: 253-565-7265
E-mail: help@apawood.org
Internet: http://www.apawood.org
ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK INSTITUTE (AWI)

146179 Westlake Drive, Suite 120
Potomac Falls, VA 20165
Ph: 571-323-3636
Fax: 571-323-3630
Internet: http://www.awinet.org

Three Park Avenue, M/S 10E
New York, NY 10016
Ph: 212-591-7722 or 800-843-2763
Fax: 212-591-7674
E-mail: infocentral@asme.org
Internet: http://www.asme.org
ASPHALT INSTITUTE (AI)

Research Park Drive
P.O. Box 14052
Lexington, KY 40512-4052
Ph: 859-288-4960
Fax: 859-288-4999
E-mail: info@asphaltinstitute.org
Internet: http://www.asphaltinstitute.org
ASSOCIATED AIR BALANCE COUNCIL (AABC)

1518 K Street, NW
Ph: 202-737-0202
Fax: 202-638-4833
E-mail: info@aabc.com
Internet: http://www.aabchq.com
ASSOCIATION OF EDISON ILLUMINATING COMPANIES (AEIC)

600 North 18th Street
P.O. Box 2641
Birmingham, AL 35291
Ph: 205-257-2530
Fax: 205-257-2540
Internet: http://www.aeic.org
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)

100 Barr Harbor Drive, P.O. Box C700
West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959
Ph: 610-832-9500
Fax: 610-832-9555
E-mail: service@astm.org
Internet: http://www.astm.org
BAY AREA AIR QUALITY MANAGEMENT DISTRICT (Bay Area AQMD)

939 Ellis Street
San Francisco, CA 94109
Ph: 415-771-6000
Fax: 415-928-8560
Internet: http://www.baaqmd.gov/
BUILDERS HARDWARE MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (BHMA)

355 Lexington Avenue
17th Floor
New York, NY 10017
Ph: 212-297-2122
Fax: 212-370-9047
E-mail: assocmgmt@aol.com
Internet: http://www.buildershardware.com
CANADIAN STANDARDS ASSOCIATION (CSA)

178 Rexdale Blvd.
Etobicoke, ON M9W 1R3
CANADA
Ph: 416-747-4104
Fax: 416-747-2475
internet: http://www.csa.ca/Default.asp?language=english
CSA AMERICA INC (CSA/AM)

8501 East Pleasant Valley Road
Cleveland, OH 44131-5575
Ph: 216-524-4990
Fax: 216-520-8979
E-mail: cathy.rake@csa-america.org
Internet: http://www.csa-america.org
CALIFORNIA ENERGY COMMISSION (CEC)

Media and Public Communications Office
1516 Ninth Street, MS-29
Sacramento, CA 95814-5512
Ph: 916-654-4287
Internet: http://www.energy.ca.gov/
CARPET AND RUG INSTITUTE (CRI)

P.O. Box 2048
Dalton, GA 30722-2048
Ph: 800-882-8846 or 706-278-3176
Fax: 706-278-8835
Internet: http://www.carpet-rug.com
CONCRETE REINFORCING STEEL INSTITUTE (CRSI)

933 North Plum Grove Road
Schaumburg, IL 60173-4758
Ph: 847-517-1200
Fax: 847-517-1206
Internet: http://www.crsi.org/
CONSUMER ELECTRONICS ASSOCIATION (CEA)

2500 Wilson Blvd.
Arlington, VA 22201-3834
Ph: 866-858-1555 or 703-907-7600
Fax: 703-907-7675
E-mail: cea@CE.org
Internet: http://www.CE.org
COOLING TECHNOLOGY INSTITUTE (CTI)

2611 FM 1960 West
Suite A-101
Houston, TX 77068-3730
Ph: 281-583-4087
Fax: 281-537-1721
Internet: http://www.cti.org
COPPER DEVELOPMENT ASSOCIATION (CDA)

260 Madison Avenue
New York, NY 10016
Ph: 212-251-7200
Fax: 212-251-7234
E-mail: questions@cda.copper.org
Internet: http://www.copper.org
EXPANSION JOINT MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (EJMA)

25 North Broadway
Tarrytown, NY 10591
Ph: 914-332-0040
Fax: 914-332-1541
E-mail: inquiries@ejma.org
Internet: http://www.ejma.org
FLUID CONTROLS INSTITUTE (FCI)

1300 Sumner Avenue
Cleveland, OH 44115
Ph: 216-241-7333
Fax: 216-241-0105
E-mail: fci@fluidcontrolsinstitute.org
Internet: www.fluidcontrolsinstitute.org
FM GLOBAL (FM)
1301 Atwood Avenue
P.O. Box 7500
Johnston, RI 02919
Ph: 401-275-3000
Fax: 401-275-3029
E-mail: information@fmglobal.com
Internet: http://www.fmglobal.com
FOREST STEWARDSHIP COUNCIL (FSC)

1155 30th Street NW
Suite 300
Ph: 202.342.0413
Fax: 202.342.6589
E-mail: info@fscus.org
Internet: http://www.fscus.org
FOUNDATION FOR CROSS-CONNECTION CONTROL AND HYDRAULIC RESEARCH

(FCCCHR)
University of South California
Kaprielian Hall 200
Los Angeles, CA 90089-2531
Ph: 213-740-2032 or 800-545-6340
Fax: 213-740-8399
E-mail: fccchr@usc.edu
Internet: http://www.usc.edu/dept/fccchr
GLASS ASSOCIATION OF NORTH AMERICA (GANA)

2945 SW Wanamaker Drive, Suite A
Topeka, KS 66614
Ph: 785-271-0208
Fax: 785-271-0166
E-mail: gana@glasswebsite.com
Internet: http://www.glasswebsite.com
GREEN SEAL (GS)

1001 Connecticut Avenue, NW
Suite 827
Ph: 202-872-6400
Fax: 202-872-4324
E-mail: greenseal@greenseal.org
Internet: http://www.greenseal.org
GYPSUM ASSOCIATION (GA)

810 First Street, NE, Suite 510
Ph: 202-289-5440
Fax: 202-289-3707
E-mail: info@gypsum.org
Internet: http://www.gypsum.org
HYDRAULIC INSTITUTE (HI)

9 Sylvan Way
Parsippany, NJ 07054-3802
Ph: 973-267-9700
Fax: 973-267-9055
E-mail: webmaster@pumps.org
Internet: http://www.pumps.org
HYDRONICS INSTITUTE DIVISION OF GAMA (HYI)

35 Russo Place
P.O. Box 218
Berkeley Heights, NJ 07922-0218
Ph: 908-464-8200
Fax: 908-464-7818
E-mail: information@gamanet.org
Internet: http://www.gamanet.org/publist/hydroordr.htm
ILLUMINATING ENGINEERING SOCIETY OF NORTH AMERICA (IESNA)

120 Wall Street, 17th Floor
New York, NY 10005
Ph: 212-248-5000
Fax: 212-248-5018
E-mail: iesna@iesna.org
Internet: http://www.iesna.org
INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERS (IEEE)

445 Hoes Lane
Piscataway, NJ 08855-1331
Ph: 732-981-0060
Fax: 732-981-1712
E-mail: customer-services@ieee.org
Internet: http://www.ieee.org
INSULATED CABLE ENGINEERS ASSOCIATION (ICEA)

P.O. Box 1568
Carrollton, GA 30112
Ph: 770-830-0369
Fax: 770-830-8501
Internet: http://www.icea.net
INSULATING GLASS MANUFACTURERS ALLIANCE (IGMA)

1500 Bank Street, Suite 300
Ottawa, Ontario CANADA K1H 1B8
Ph: 613-233-1510
Fax: 613-482-9436
E-mail: info@igmaonline.org
Internet: http://www.igmaonline.org
INTERNATIONAL ASSOCIATION OF PLUMBING AND MECHANICAL OFFICIALS

(IAPMO)
5001 E. Philadelphia St.
Ontario, CA 91761
Ph: 909-472-4100
Fax: 909-472-4150
E-mail: iampo@iampo.org
Internet: www.iampo.org
INTERNATIONAL CODE COUNCIL (ICC)

5360 Workman Mill Road
Whittier, CA 90601
Ph: 562-699-0541
Fax: 562-699-9721
E-mail: webmaster@iccsafe.org
Internet: www.iccsafe.org
INTERNATIONAL CONCRETE REPAIR INSTITUTE (ICRI)

3166 South River Road, Suite 132
Des Plaines, IL 60018
Ph: 847-827-0830
Fax: 847-827-0832
Internet: http://www.icri.org
INTERNATIONAL ELECTRICAL TESTING ASSOCIATION (NETA)

P.O. Box 687
106 Stone Street
Morrison, CO 80465
Ph: 303-697-8441
Fax: 303-697-8431
E-mail: neta@netaworld.org
Internet: http://www.netaworld.org
INTERNATIONAL ELECTROTECHNICAL COMMISSION (IEC)

3, rue de Varembe, P.O. Box 131
CH-1211 Geneva 20, Switzerland
Ph: 41-22-919-0211
Fax: 41-22-919-0300
E-mail: custserv@iec.ch
Internet: http://www.iec.ch
INTERNATIONAL ORGANIZATION FOR STANDARDIZATION (ISO)

1, rue de Varembe'
Case Postale 56
CH-1211 Geneve 20 Switzerland
Ph: 41-22-749-0111
Fax: 41-22-733-3430
E-mail: central@iso.ch
Internet: http://www.iso.ch
INTERNATIONAL WINDOW CLEANING ASSOCIATION (IWCA)

6277 Franconia Rd.
Alexandria, VA 22310
Ph: 800-875-4922 or 703-971-7771
FAX: 703-971-7772
E-mail: IWCA@aol.com
Internet: http://www.iwca.org
LONMARK INTERNATIONAL (LonMark)

550 Meridan Ave.
San Jose, CA 95126
Ph: 408-938-5266
Fax: 408-790-3838
E-mail: info@lonmark.org
Internet: http://www.lonmark.org
MANUFACTURERS STANDARDIZATION SOCIETY OF THE VALVE AND FITTINGS

INDUSTRY (MSS)
127 Park Street, NE
Vienna, VA 22180-4602
Ph: 703-281-6613
Fax: 703-281-6671
E-mail: info@mss-hq.com
Internet: http://www.mss-hq.com
MASTER PAINTERS INSTITUTE (MPI)

2800 Ingleton Avenue
Burnaby, BC CANADA V5C
Ph: 888-674-8937
Fax: 888-211-8708
E-mail: info@paintinfo.com
Internet: http://www.paintinfo.com/mpi
MATERIAL HANDLING INDUSTRY OF AMERICA INC (MHIA)

8720 Red Oak Blvd., Suite 201
Charlotte, NC 28717-3992
Ph: 704-676-1190
Fax: 704-676-1199
Internet: http://www.mhia.org
METAL BUILDING MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (MBMA)

1300 Sumner Avenue
Ph: 216-241-7333
Fax: 216-241-0105
E-mail: mbma@mbma.com
Internet: http://www.mbma.com
MIDWEST INSULATION CONTRACTORS ASSOCIATION (MICA)

16712 elm Circle
Omaha, NE 68130
Ph: 800-747-6422
Fax: 402-330-9702
E-mail: info@micainsulation.org
Internet: http://www.micainsulation.org
NACE INTERNATIONAL (NACE)

1440 South Creek Drive
Houston, TX 77084-4906
Ph: 281-228-6200
Fax: 281-228-6300
E-mail: firstservice@nace.org
Internet: http://www.nace.org
NATIONAL ASSOCIATION OF ARCHITECTURAL METAL MANUFACTURERS (NAAMM)

8oo Roosevelt Road, Bldg C, Suite 312
Glen Ellyn, IL 60137
Ph: 630-942-6591
Fax: 630-790-3095
E-mail: naamm@gss.net
Internet: http://www.naamm.org
NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA)

1300 North 17th Street, Suite 1752
Rosslyn, VA 22209
Ph: 703-841-3200
Fax: 703-841-5900
E-mail: webmaster@nema.org
Internet: http://www.nema.org/
NATIONAL ENVIRONMENTAL BALANCING BUREAU (NEBB)

8575 Grovemont Circle
Gaithersburg, MD 20877
Ph: 301-977-3698
Fax: 301-977-9589
Internet: http://www.nebb.org
NATIONAL FENESTRATION RATING COUNCIL (NFRC)

8484 Georgia Avenue, Suite 320
Silver Spring, MD 20910
Ph: 301-589-1776
Fax: 301-589-3884
E-Mail: info@nfrc.org
Internet: http://www.nfrc.org

1 Batterymarch Park
Quincy, MA 02169-7471
Ph: 617-770-3000
Fax: 617-770-0700
E-mail: webmaster@nfpa.org
Internet: http://www.nfpa.org
NATIONAL HARDWOOD LUMBER ASSOCIATION (NHLA)

6830 Raleigh LaGrange Road
Memphis, TN 38184-0518
Ph: 901-377-1818
Fax: 901-382-6419
E-mail: info@nhla.com
Internet: http://www.natlhardwood.org
NATIONAL INSTITUTE FOR CERTIFICATION IN ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGIES

(NICET)
1420 King Street
Alexandria, VA 22314-2794
Ph: 888-476-4238
E-mail: tech@nicet.org
Internet: http://www.nicet.org
NATIONAL INSTITUTE OF STANDARDS AND TECHNOLOGY (NIST)

100 Bureau Drive
Stop 2100
Gaithersburg, MD 20899-2100
Ph: 301-975-NIST
Internet: http://www.nist.gov
Order Publications From:
Superintendent of Documents
U.S. Government Printing Office (GPO)
732 North Capitol Street, NW
Ph: 888-293-6498 or 202-512-1530
Fax: 202-512-1262
E-mail: gpoaccess@gpo.gov
Internet: http://www.gpoaccess.gov
or
National Technical Information Service (NTIS)
5285 Port Royal Road
Springfield, VA 22161
Ph: 703-605-6585
Fax: 703-605-6900
E-mail: info@ntis.gov
Internet: http://www.ntis.gov
NATIONAL READY MIXED CONCRETE ASSOCIATION (NRMCA)

900 Spring Street
Silver Spring, MD 20910
Ph: 301-587-1400
Fax: 301-585-4219
Internet: http://www.nrmca.org
NATIONAL ROOFING CONTRACTORS ASSOCIATION (NRCA)

10255 West Higgins Road, Suite 600
Rosemont, IL 60018
Ph: 847-299-9070
Fax: 847-299-1183
Internet: http://www.nrca.net
NORTHEASTERN LUMBER MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NELMA)

272 Tuttle Road
Cumberland, ME 04021
Ph: 207-829-6901
Fax: 207-829-4293
E-mail: info@nelma.org
Internet: http://www.nelma.org
NSF INTERNATIONAL (NSF)

789 North Dixboro Road
P.O. Box 130140
Ann Arbor, MI 48113-0140
Ph: 734-769-8010 or 800-NSF-MARK
Fax: 734-769-0109
E-mail: info@nsf.org
Internet: http://www.nsf.org
PLUMBING AND DRAINAGE INSTITUTE (PDI)

800 Turnpike Street, Suite 300
North Andover, MA 01845
Ph: 978-557-0720 or 800-589-8956
Fax: 978-557-0721
E-Mail: info@pdionline.org
Internet: http://www.pdionline.org
PORCELAIN ENAMEL INSTITUTE (PEI)

PO Box 920220
3700 Mansell Rd., Suite 220
Alpharetta, GA 30022
Ph: 770-281-8980
Fax: 770-281-8981
E-mail: penamel@aol.com
Internet: http://www.porcelainenamel.com
REDWOOD INSPECTION SERVICE (RIS) OF THE CALIFORNIA REDWOOD

ASSOCIATION (CRA)
405 Enfrente Drive, Suite 200
Novato, CA 94949
Ph: 415-382-0662 or 888-225-7339
Fax: 415-382-8531
E-Mail: info@calredwood.org
Internet: http://www.calredwood.org
SHEET METAL AND AIR CONDITIONING CONTRACTORS' NATIONAL ASSOCIATION

(SMACNA)
4201 Lafayette Center Drive
Chantilly, VA 20151-1209
Ph: 703-803-2980
Fax: 703-803-3732
E-mail: info@smacna.org
Internet: http://www.smacna.org
SOCIETY OF AUTOMOTIVE ENGINEERS INTERNATIONAL (SAE)

400 Commonwealth Drive
Warrendale, PA 15096-0001
Ph: 724-776-4841
Fax: 724-776-0790
E-mail: customerservice@sae.org
Internet: http://www.sae.org
SOUTH COAST AIR QUALITY MANAGEMENT DISTRICT (SCAQMD)

21865 Copley Drive
Diamond Bar, CA 91765-4182
Ph: 909-396-2000
E-mail: webinquiry@aqmd.gov
Internet: http://www.aqmd.gov
SOUTHERN CYPRESS MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (SCMA)

400 Penn Center Boulevard, Suite 530
Pittsburgh, PA 15235
Ph: 412-829-0770 or 877-607-SCMA
Fax: 412-829-0844
Internet: http://www.cypressinfo.org
SOUTHERN PINE INSPECTION BUREAU (SPIB)

4709 Scenic Highway
Pensacola, FL 32504-9094
Ph: 850-434-2611
Fax: 850-433-5594
E-mail: spib@spib.org
Internet: http://www.spib.org
STEEL DECK INSTITUTE (SDI)

P.O. Box 25
Fox River Grove, IL 60021
Ph: 847-458-4647
Fax: 847-458-4648
E-mail: Steve@sdi.org
Internet: http://www.sdi.org
STEEL DOOR INSTITUTE (SDI/DOOR)

c/o Wherry Associates
30200 Detroit Road
Ph: 440-899-0010
Fax: 440-892-1404
E-mail: leh@wherryassoc.com
Internet: http://www.steeldoor.org
STEEL JOIST INSTITUTE (SJI)

3127 Mr. Joe White Avenue
Myrtle Beach, SC 29577-6760
Ph: 843-626-1995
Fax: 843-626-5565
E-mail: sji@steeljoist.org
Internet: http://www.steeljoist.org
THE SOCIETY FOR PROTECTIVE COATINGS (SSPC)

40 24th Street, 6th Floor
Pittsburgh, PA 15222-4656
Ph: 412-281-2331
Fax: 412-281-9992
E-mail: info@sspc.org
Internet: http://www.sspc.org
TELECOMMUNICATIONS INDUSTRY ASSOCIATION (TIA)

2500 Wilson Blvd,. Suite 300
Arlington, VA 22201
Ph: 703-907-7700
Fax: 703-907-7727
Internet: http://www.tiaonline.org
TILE COUNCIL OF AMERICA (TCA)

100 Clemson Research Boulevard
Anderson, SC 29625
Ph: 864-646-8453
Fax: 864-646-2821
E-mail: literature@tileusa.com
Internet: http://www.tileusa.com
UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)

333 Pfingsten Road
Northbrook, IL 60062-2096
Ph: 847-272-8800
Fax: 847-272-8129
E-mail: customerexperiencecenter@us.ul.com
Internet: http://www.ul.com/
U.S. ARMY (DA)

U.S. Army Publishing Directorate
Internet: http://www.apd.army.mil

Order CRD-C DOCUMENTS from:
U.S. Army Engineer Waterways Experiment Station
ATTN: Technical Report Distribution Section, Services
Branch, TIC
3909 Halls Ferry Road
Vicksburg, MS 39180-6199
Ph: 601-634-2664
Fax: 601-634-2388
E-mail: mtc-info@erdc.usace.army.mil
Internet: http://www.wes.army.mil/SL/MTC/handbook.htm
Order Other Documents from:

USACE Publications Depot
Attn: CEHEC-IM-PD
2803 52nd Avenue
Hyattsville, MD 20781-1102
Ph: 301-394-0081
Fax: 301-394-0084
E-mail: pubs-army@usace.army.mil
Internet: http://www.usace.army.mil/publications
or http://www.hnd.usace.army.mil/techinfo/engpubs.htm
U.S. DEFENSE LOGISTICS AGENCY (DLA)

Andrew T. McNamara Building
8725 John J. Kingman Road
Fort Belvoir, VA 22060
Ph: 1-877-352-2255
Internet: http://www.dla.mil
U.S. DEPARTMENT OF AGRICULTURE (USDA)

Order AMS Publications from:
AGRICULTURAL MARKETING SERVICE (AMS)
Seed Regulatory and Testing Branch
801 Summit Crossing Place, Suite C
Gastonia, NC 28054-2193
Ph: 704-810-8870
Fax: 704-852-4189
Internet: http://www.ams.usda.gov/lsg/seed.htm
E-mail: seed.ams@usda.gov
Order Other Publications from:

U.S. Department of Agriculture, Rural Utilities Service
14th and Independence Avenue, SW, Room 4028-S
Ph: 202-720-2791
Fax: 202-720-2166
Internet: http://www.usda.gov/rus
U.S. DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE (DOD)

Order DOD Documents from:
Ph: 703-605-6585
FAX: 703-605-6900
Obtain Military Specifications, Standards and Related Publications

from:
Acquisition Streamlining and Standardization Information System
(ASSIST)
Department of Defense Single Stock Point (DODSSP)
Document Automation and Production Service (DAPS)
Building 4/D
700 Robbins Avenue
Philadelphia, PA 19111-5094
Ph: 215-697-6396 - for account/password issues
Internet: http://assist.daps.dla.mil/online/start/; account
registration required
Obtain Unified Facilities Criteria (UFC) from:

Whole Building Design Guide (WBDG)
National Institute of Building Sciences (NIBS)
1090 Vermont Avenue NW, Suite 700
Washington, CD 20005
Ph: 202-289-7800
Fax: 202-289-1092
Internet: http://www.wbdg.org/references/docs_refs.php
U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY (EPA)

Ariel Rios Building
1200 Pennsylvania Avenue, N.W.
Ph: 202-272-0167
Internet: http://www.epa.gov
--- Some EPA documents are available only from:

Ph: 703-605-6585
Fax: 703-605-6900
U.S. FEDERAL AVIATION ADMINISTRATION (FAA)

Order for sale documents from:
Ph: 202-512-1800
Fax: 202-512-2104
E-mail: contactcenter@gpo.gov
Order free documents from:

Federal Aviation Administration
Department of Transportation
800 Independence Avenue, SW
Ph: 1-866-835-5322
Internet: http://www.faa.gov
U.S. FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION (FCC)

445 12th Street SW
Phone: 888-CALL-FCC
Fax: 866-418-0232
Internet: http://www.fcc.gov
E-mail: fccinfo@fcc.gov
Order Publications From:
Ph: 202-512-1800
Fax: 202-512-2104
U.S. FEDERAL HIGHWAY ADMINISTRATION (FHWA)

Office of Highway Safety (HHS-31)
400 Seventh Street, SW
Ph: 202-366-0411
Fax: 202-366-2249
Internet: http://www.fhwa.dot.gov
Order from:
U. S. Government Printing Office (GPO)
Ph: 202-512-1800
Fax: 202-512-2104
U. S. GREEN BUILDING COUNCIL (USGBC)

1015 18th Street, NW, Suite 508
Ph: 202-828-7422
Fax: 202-828-5110
E-mail: info@usbc.org
Internet: http://www.usgbc.org
AOK: 2/04
LOK: 2/04
U.S. GENERAL SERVICES ADMINISTRATION (GSA)

General Services Administration
1800 F Street, NW
Ph: 202-501-1021
Internet: www.GSA.gov
Obtain documents from:

Acquisition Streamlining and Standardization Information System
(ASSIST)
Department of Defense Single Stock Point (DODSSP)
Document Automation and Production Service (DAPS)
Building 4/D
700 Robbins Avenue
Philadelphia, PA 19111-5094
Ph: 215-697-6396 - for account/password issues
Internet: http://assist.daps.dla.mil/online/start/; account
registration required

8601 Adelphi Road
College Park, MD 20740-6001
Ph: 866-272-6272
Fax: 301-837-0483
Internet: http://www.archives.gov
Order documents from:

U.S.Government Printing Office (GPO)
Ph: 202-512-1800
Fax: 202-512-2104
WEST COAST LUMBER INSPECTION BUREAU (WCLIB)

P.O. Box 23145
Tigard, OR 97281
Ph: 503-639-0651
Fax: 503-684-8928
E-mail: info@wclib.org
Internet: http://www.wclib.org
WESTERN WOOD PRODUCTS ASSOCIATION (WWPA)

Yeon Building
522 SW 5th Avenue
Suite 500
Portland, OR 97204-2122
Ph: 503-224-3930
Fax: 503-224-3934
E-mail: info@wwpa.org
Internet: http://www.wwpa.org
WINDOW AND DOOR MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (WDMA)

1400 East Touhy Avenue, Suite 470
Des Plaines, IL 60018
Ph: 847-299-5200 or 800-223-2301
Fax: 847-299-1286
E-mail: admin@wdma.com
Internet: http://www.wdma.com
SECTION 01 45 00.10 10
QUALITY CONTROL SYSTEM (QCS)
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 Contract Administration
The Government will use the Resident Management System for Windows (RMS) to
assist in its monitoring and administration of this contract. The
Contractor must use the Government-furnished Construction Contractor Module
of RMS, referred to as QCS, to record, maintain, and submit various
information throughout the contract period. The Contractor module, user
manuals, updates, and training information can be downloaded from the RMS
web site. This joint Government-Contractor use of RMS and QCS will
facilitate electronic exchange of information and overall management of the
contract. QCS provides the means for the Contractor to input, track, and
electronically share information with the Government in the following areas:
Administration
Finances
Quality Control
Submittal Monitoring
Scheduling
Import/Export of Data
1.1.1 Correspondence and Electronic Communications
For ease and speed of communications, both Government and Contractor will,
to the maximum extent feasible, exchange correspondence and other documents
in electronic format. Correspondence, pay requests and other documents
comprising the official contract record will also be provided in paper
format, with signatures and dates where necessary. Paper documents will
govern, in the event of discrepancy with the electronic version.
1.1.2 Other Factors
Particular attention is directed to Contract Clause, "Schedules for

Construction Contracts", Contract Clause, "Payments", Section 01 32 01.00 10
PROJECT SCHEDULE, Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES, and Section 01 45 0
1 QUALITY CONTROL, which have a direct relationship to the reporting to be
accomplished through QCS. Also, there is no separate payment for
establishing and maintaining the QCS database; all costs associated
therewith will be included in the contract pricing for the work.
1.2 QCS SOFTWARE
QCS is a Windows-based program that can be run on a stand-alone personal

computer or on a network. The Government will make available the QCS
software to the Contractor after award of the construction contract. Prior
to the Pre-Construction Conference, the Contractor will be responsible to
download, install and use the latest version of the QCS software from the
Government's RMS Internet Website. Upon specific justification and request
by the Contractor, the Government can provide QCS on CD-ROM. Any program
updates of QCS will be made available to the Contractor via the Government
RMS Website as they become available.
SECTION 01 45 00.10 10 Page 1

1.3 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
The following is the minimum system configuration that the Contractor must
have to run QCS:
QCS and QAS System
Hardware
IBM-compatible PC with 1000 MHz Pentium or higher processor
256+ MB RAM for workstation / 512+ MB RAM for server
1 GB hard drive disk space for sole use by the QCS system
Compact Disk (CD) Reader 8x speed or higher
SVGA or higher resolution monitor (1024x768, 256 colors)
Mouse or other pointing device
Windows compatible printer. (Laser printer must have 4 MB+ of RAM)
Connection to the Internet, minimum 56k BPS
Software
MS Windows 2000, XP, Vista or Windows 7
QAS-Word Processing software: MS Word 2000 or newer
Latest version of: Netscape Navigator, Microsoft Internet

Explorer, or other browser that supports HTML 4.0 or higher
Electronic mail (E-mail) MAPI compatible
Virus protection software that is regularly upgraded with all

issued manufacturer's updates
1.4 RELATED INFORMATION
1.4.1 QCS User Guide
After contract award, download instructions for the installation and use of
QCS from the Government RMS Internet Website. In case of justifiable
difficulties, the Government will provide the Contractor with a CD-ROM
containing these instructions.
1.4.2 Contractor Quality Control(CQC) Training
The use of QCS will be discussed with the Contractor's QC System Manager
during the mandatory CQC Training class.
1.5 CONTRACT DATABASE
Prior to the pre-construction conference, the Government will provide the

Contractor with basic contract award data to use for QCS. The Government
will provide data updates to the Contractor as needed, generally by using
SECTION 01 45 00.10 10 Page 2

the Government's SFTP repository built into QCS import/export function.

These updates will generally consist of submittal reviews, correspondence
status, QA comments, and other administrative and QA data.
1.6 DATABASE MAINTENANCE
Establish, maintain, and update data in the QCS database throughout the
duration of the contract at the Contractor's site office. Submit data
updates to the Government (e.g., daily reports, submittals, RFI's, schedule
updates, payment requests, etc.) using the Government's SFTP repository
built into QCS export function. If permitted by the Contracting Officer,
e-mail or CD-ROM may be used instead of E-mail (see Paragraph DATA
SUBMISSION VIA CD-ROM). The QCS database typically includes current data
on the following items:
1.6.1 Administration
1.6.1.1 Contractor Information
Contain within the database the Contractor's name, address, telephone

numbers, management staff, and other required items. Within 14 calendar
days of receipt of QCS software from the Government, deliver Contractor
administrative data in electronic format.
1.6.1.2 Subcontractor Information
Contain within the database the name, trade, address, phone numbers, and
other required information for all subcontractors. A subcontractor must be
listed separately for each trade to be performed. Assign each
subcontractor/trade a unique Responsibility Code, provided in QCS. Within
14 calendar days of receipt of QCS software from the Government, deliver
subcontractor administrative data in electronic format.
1.6.1.3 Correspondence
Identify all Contractor correspondence to the Government with a serial

number. Prefix correspondence initiated by the Contractor's site office
with "S". Prefix letters initiated by the Contractor's home (main) office
with "H". Letters must be numbered starting from 0001. (e.g., H-0001 or
S-0001). The Government's letters to the Contractor will be prefixed with
"C".
1.6.1.4 Equipment
Contain within the Contractor's QCS database a current list of equipment

planned for use or being used on the jobsite, including the most recent and
planned equipment inspection dates.
1.6.1.5 Management Reporting
QCS includes a number of reports that Contractor management can use to

track the status of the project. The value of these reports is reflective
of the quality of the data input, and is maintained in the various sections
of QCS. Among these reports are: Progress Payment Request worksheet,
QA/QC comments, Submittal Register Status, Three-Phase Inspection
checklists.
SECTION 01 45 00.10 10 Page 3

1.6.1.6 Request For Information (RFI)
Exchange all Requests For Information (RFI) using the Built-in RFI
generator and tracker in QCS.
1.6.2 Finances
1.6.2.1 Pay Activity Data
Include within the QCS database a list of pay activities that the
Contractor must develop in conjunction with the construction schedule. The
sum of all pay activities must be equal to the total contract amount,
including modifications. Group pay activities Contract Line Item Number
(CLIN); the sum of the activities must equal the amount of each CLIN. The
total of all CLINs equals the Contract Amount.
1.6.2.2 Payment Requests
Prepare all progress payment requests using QCS. Complete the payment
request worksheet, prompt payment certification, and payment invoice in
QCS. Update the work completed under the contract, measured as percent or
as specific quantities, at least monthly. After the update, generate a
payment request report using QCS. Submit the payment request, prompt
payment certification, and payment invoice with supporting data using the
Government's SFTP repository built into QCS export function. If permitted
by the Contracting Officer, e-mail or a CD-ROM may be used. A signed paper
copy of the approved payment request is also required, which will govern in
the event of discrepancy with the electronic version.
1.6.3 Quality Control (QC)
QCS provides a means to track implementation of the 3-phase QC Control

System, prepare daily reports, identify and track deficiencies, document
progress of work, and support other Contractor QC requirements. Maintain
this data on a daily basis. Entered data will automatically output to the
QCS generated daily report. Provide the Government a Contractor Quality
Control (CQC) Plan within the time required in Section 01 45 01] USACE
QUALITY CONTROL. Within seven calendar days of Government acceptance,
submit a QCS update reflecting the information contained in the accepted
CQC Plan: schedule, pay activities, features of work, submittal register,
QC requirements, and equipment list.
1.6.3.1 Daily Contractor Quality Control (CQC) Reports.
QCS includes the means to produce the Daily CQC Report. The Contractor may
use other formats to record basic QC data. However, the Daily CQC Report
generated by QCS must be the Contractor's official report. Summarize data
from any supplemental reports by the Contractor and consolidate onto the
QCS-generated Daily CQC Report. Submit daily CQC Reports as required by
Section 01 45 01 USACE QUALITY CONTROL. Electronically submit reports to
the Government within 24 hours after the date covered by the report. Also
provide the Government a signed, printed copy of the daily CQC report.
1.6.3.2 Deficiency Tracking.
Use QCS to track deficiencies. Deficiencies identified by the Contractor

will be numerically tracked using QC punch list items. Maintain a current
log of its QC punch list items in the QCS database. The Government will
log the deficiencies it has identified using its QA punch list items. The
SECTION 01 45 00.10 10 Page 4

Government's QA punch list items will be included in its export file to the
Contractor. Regularly update the correction status of both QC and QA punch
list items.
1.6.3.3 QC Requirements
Develop and maintain a complete list of QC testing and required structural

and life safety special inspections required by the International Code
Council (ICC), transferred and installed property, and user training
requirements in QCS. Update all data on these QC requirements as work
progresses, and promptly provide this information to the Government via QCS.
1.6.3.4 Three-Phase Control Meetings
Maintain scheduled and actual dates and times of preparatory and initial
control meetings in QCS.
1.6.3.5 Labor and Equipment Hours
Log labor and equipment exposure hours on a daily basis. This data will be
rolled up into a monthly exposure report.
1.6.3.6 Accident/Safety Reporting
The Government will issue safety comments, directions, or guidance whenever

safety deficiencies are observed. The Government's safety comments will be
included in its export file to the Contractor. Regularly update the
correction status of the safety comments. In addition, utilize QCS to
advise the Government of any accidents occurring on the jobsite. This
brief supplemental entry is not to be considered as a substitute for
completion of mandatory reports, e.g., ENG Form 3394 and OSHA Form 300.
1.6.3.7 Features of Work
Include a complete list of the features of work in the QCS database. A

feature of work may be associated with multiple pay activities. However,
each pay activity (see subparagraph "Pay Activity Data" of paragraph
"Finances") will only be linked to a single feature of work.
1.6.3.8 Hazard Analysis
Use QCS to develop a hazard analysis for each feature of work included in
the CQC Plan. Address any hazards, or potential hazards, that may be
associated with the work.
1.6.4 Submittal Management
The Government will provide the initial submittal register in electronic

format. Thereafter, maintain a complete list of all submittals, including
completion of all data columns. Dates on which submittals are received and
returned by the Government will be included in its export file to the
Contractor. Use QCS to track and transmit all submittals. ENG Form 4025,
submittal transmittal form, and the submittal register update must be
produced using QCS. QCS and RMS will be used to update, store and exchange
submittal registers and transmittals, but will not be used for storage of
actual submittals.
SECTION 01 45 00.10 10 Page 5

1.6.5 Schedule
Develop a construction schedule consisting of pay activities, in accordance

with Section 01 32 01.00 10 PROJECT SCHEDULE. Input and maintain in the
QCS database this schedule either manually or by using the Standard Data
Exchange Format (SDEF) (see Section 01 32 01.00 10 PROJECT SCHEDULE).
Include with each pay request the updated schedule.
1.6.6 Import/Export of Data
QCS includes the ability to export Contractor data to the Government and to
import submittal register and other Government-provided data from RMS, and
schedule data using SDEF.
1.7 IMPLEMENTATION
Contractor use of QCS as described in the preceding paragraphs is

mandatory. Ensure that sufficient resources are available to maintain its
QCS database, and to provide the Government with regular database updates.
QCS shall be an integral part of the Contractor's management of quality
control.
1.8 DATA SUBMISSION VIA CD-ROM
The Government-preferred method for Contractor's submission of QCS data is

by using the Government's SFTP repository built into QCS export function.
Other data should be submitted using E-mail with file attachment(s). For
locations where this is not feasible, the Contracting Officer may permit
use of CD-ROM for data transfer. Export data onto CDs using the QCS
built-in export function. If used, submit CD-ROMs in accordance with the
following:
1.8.1 File Medium
Submit in English required data on CD-ROM conforming to industry standards

used in the United States.
1.8.2 CD-ROM Labels
Affix a permanent exterior label to each CD-ROM submitted. Indicate on the

label in English, the QCS file name, full contract number, contract name,
project location, data date, name and telephone number of person
responsible for the data.
1.8.3 File Names
The files will be automatically named by the QCS software. The naming
convention established by the QCS software must not be altered.
1.9 MONTHLY COORDINATION MEETING
Update the QCS database each workday. At least monthly, generate and
submit an export file to the Government with schedule update and progress
payment request. As required in Contract Clause "Payments", at least one
week prior to submittal, meet with the Government representative to review
the planned progress payment data submission for errors and omissions.
Make all required corrections prior to Government acceptance of the export

file and progress payment request. Payment requests accompanied by
SECTION 01 45 00.10 10 Page 6

incomplete or incorrect data submittals will be returned. The Government

will not process progress payments until an acceptable QCS export file is
received.
1.10 NOTIFICATION OF NONCOMPLIANCE
The Contracting Officer will notify the Contractor of any detected

noncompliance with the requirements of this specification. Take immediate
corrective action after receipt of such notice. Such notice, when
delivered to the Contractor at the work site, will be deemed sufficient for
the purpose of notification.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not Used
SECTION 01 45 00.10 10 Page 7

SECTION 01 45 01
USACE QUALITY CONTROL
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

ASTM D 3740 (2008) Minimum Requirements for Agencies

Engaged in the Testing and/or Inspection
of Soil and Rock as Used in Engineering
Design and Construction
ASTM E 329 (2008) Standard Specification for Agencies

of Materials Used in Construction
1.2
PAYMENT
Separate payment will not be made for providing and maintaining an

effective Quality Control program, and all associated costs will be
included in the applicable Bid Schedule unit or lump-sum prices.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 EXECUTION
Establish and maintain an effective quality control (QC) system in

compliance with the Contract Clause titled "Inspection of Construction."
QCconsist of plans, procedures, and organization necessary to produce an
end product which complies with the contract requirements. Cover all
construction operations, both onsite and offsite, and be keyed to the
proposed construction sequence. The project superintendent will be held
responsible for the quality of work and is subject to removal by the
Contracting Officer for non-compliance with the quality requirements
specified in the contract. In this context the highest level manager
responsible for the overall construction activities at the site, including
quality and production is the project superintendent. The project
superintendent must maintain a physical presence at the site at all times
and is responsible for all construction and related activities at the site,
except as otherwise acceptable to the Contracting Officer.
3.2 QUALITY CONTROL PLAN
Submit no later than 10 days after receipt of notice to proceed, the
Contractor Quality Control (CQC) Plan proposed to implement the

requirements of the Contract Clause titled "Inspection of Construction."
The Government will consider an interim plan for the first 60 days of
operation. Construction will be permitted to begin only after acceptance
of the CQC Plan or acceptance of an interim plan applicable to the
particular feature of work to be started. Work outside of the accepted
interim plan will not be permitted to begin until acceptance of a CQC Plan
or another interim plan containing the additional work.
3.2.1 Content of the CQC Plan
Include, as a minimum, the following to cover all operations, both onsite

and offsite, including work by subcontractors, fabricators, suppliers, and
purchasing agents subcontractors, designers of record, consultants,
architect/engineers (AE):
a. A description of the quality control organization, including a

chart showing lines of authority and acknowledgment that the CQC
staff will implement the three phase control system for all
aspects of the work specified. Include a CQC System Manager who
reports to the project superintendent.
b. The name, qualifications (in resume format), duties,

responsibilities, and authorities of each person assigned a CQC
function.
c. A copy of the letter to the CQC System Manager signed by an

authorized official of the firm which describes the
responsibilities and delegates sufficient authorities to
adequately perform the functions of the CQC System Manager,
including authority to stop work which is not in compliance with
the contract. Letters of direction to all other various quality
control representatives outlining duties, authorities, and
responsibilities will be issued by the CQC System Manager. Copies
of these letters must be furnished to the Government.
d. Procedures for scheduling, reviewing, certifying, and managing

submittals, including those of subcontractors, offsite
fabricators, suppliers, and purchasing agents, . These procedures
must be in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES.
e. Control, verification, and acceptance testing of procedures for

each specific test to include the test name, specification
paragraph requiring test, feature of work to be tested, test
frequency, and person responsible for each test. (Laboratory
facilities approved by the Contracting Officer must be used.)
f. Procedures for tracking preparatory, initial, and follow-up

control phases and control, verification, and acceptance tests
including documentation.
g. Procedures for tracking construction deficiencies from

identification through acceptable corrective action. Establish
verification procedures that identified deficiencies have been
corrected.
h. Reporting procedures, including proposed reporting formats.
i. A list of the definable features of work. A definable feature of
work is a task which is separate and distinct from other tasks,

has separate control requirements, and may be identified by
different trades or disciplines, or it may be work by the same
trade in a different environment. Although each section of the
specifications may generally be considered as a definable feature
of work, there are frequently more than one definable features
under a particular section. This list will be agreed upon during
the coordination meeting.
3.2.2 Acceptance of Plan
Acceptance of the Contractor's plan is required prior to the start of

construction. Acceptance is conditional and will be predicated on
satisfactory performance during the construction. The Government reserves
the right to require the Contractor to make changes in his CQC Plan and
operations including removal of personnel, as necessary, to obtain the
quality specified.
3.2.3 Notification of Changes
After acceptance of the CQC Plan, notify the Contracting Officer in writing
of any proposed change. Proposed changes are subject to acceptance by the
3.3 COORDINATION MEETING
After the Preconstruction Conference, before start of construction, and

prior to acceptance by the Government of the CQC Plan, meet with the
Contracting Officer or Authorized Representative and discuss the
Contractor's quality control system. Submit the CQC Plan a minimum of 5
calendar days prior to the Coordination Meeting. During the meeting, a
mutual understanding of the system details must be developed, including the
forms for recording the CQC operations, control activities, testing,
administration of the system for both onsite and offsite work, and the
interrelationship of Contractor's Management and control with the
Government's Quality Assurance. Minutes of the meeting will be prepared by
the Government, signed by both the Contractor and the Contracting Officer
and will become a part of the contract file. There may be occasions when
subsequent conferences will be called by either party to reconfirm mutual
understandings and/or address deficiencies in the CQC system or procedures
which may require corrective action by the Contractor.
3.4 QUALITY CONTROL ORGANIZATION
3.4.1 Personnel Requirements
The requirements for the CQC organization are a and sufficient number of
additional qualified personnel to ensure safety and contract compliance.
The Safety and Health Manager must receive direction and authority from the
CQC System Manager and serve as a member of the CQC staff. Personnel
identified in the technical provisions as requiring specialized skills to
assure the required work is being performed properly will also be included
as part of the CQC organization. The Contractor's CQC staff must maintain
a presence at the site at all times during progress of the work and have
complete authority and responsibility to take any action necessary to
ensure contract compliance. The CQC staff will be subject to acceptance
by the Contracting Officer. Provide adequate office space, filing systems
and other resources as necessary to maintain an effective and fully
functional CQC organization. Promptly complete and furnish all letters,
material submittals, shop drawing submittals, schedules and all other

project documentation to the CQC organization. The CQC organization shall
be responsible to maintain these documents and records at the site at all
times, except as otherwise acceptable to the Contracting Officer.
3.4.2 CQC System Manager
Identify as CQC System Manager an individual within the onsite work

organization who is responsible for overall management of CQC and have the
authority to act in all CQC matters for the Contractor. The CQC System
Manager must be a graduate engineer, graduate architect, or a graduate of
construction management, with a minimum of 2 years construction experience
on construction similar to this contract, or a construction person with a
minimum of 5 years in related work. This CQC System Manager must be on the
site at all times during construction and be employed by the prime
Contractor. The CQC System Manager must be assigned no other duties .
Identify in the plan an alternate to serve in the event of the CQC System
Manager's absence. The requirements for the alternate are the same as the
CQC System Manager.
3.4.3 CQC Personnel
3.4.3.1 Materials Technicians
All concrete, pavement, soils, bituminous materials, rock, or aggregate

testing required to be performed by the Contractor under this contract
shall be accomplished by materials technicians with two years related
experience for the appropriate area, in addition to any other
qualifications which may be specified elsewhere. These individuals may be
employees of the prime or subcontractor.
3.4.3.2 Specialized Personnel
In addition to CQC personnel specified elsewhere in the contract, the

Contractor shall provide as part of the CQC organization specialized
personnel to assist the CQC System Manager for the areas stated in the
Experience Matrix. These individuals shall be directly employed by the
prime Contractor and may not be employed by a supplier or sub-contractor on
this project. These employees shall be responsible to the CQC System
Manager; shall be physically present at the construction site during work
on their areas of responsibility; and shall have the necessary education
and/or experience in accordance with the experience matrix listed herein.
These individuals may perform other duties but must be allowed sufficient
time to perform their assigned quality control duties as described in the
Quality Control Plan. A single person may cover more than one area
provided that they are qualified to perform QC activities in each
designated and that workload allows.
Experience Matrix
Area Qualifications
a. Mechanical
Graduate Mechanical Engineer or Construction Manager with 2 yrs experience or
Experience Matrix
Area Qualifications
person with 5 yrs related experience
b. Electrical
Graduate Electrical Engineer or Construction Manager with 2 yrs related

experience or person with 5 yrs related experience
3.4.4 Additional Requirement
In addition to the above experience and/or educational requirements, the

CQC System Manager, Alternate CQC System Manager, and Superintendent shall
have completed the course entitled "Construction Quality Management for
Contractors" within the past five years and shall be in possession of a
valid certificate of instruction. If the individuals designated as CQC
System Manager and Alternate CQC System Manager do not currently meet this
training requirement, it is mandatory that the training be successfully
completed within ninety calendar days of appointment to the positions of
CQC System Manager and Alternate. The Contractor's CQC System Manager and
Alternate may be appointed and serve fully in their capacities pending
certification, providing all other qualifications are met. If the CQC
System Manager or Alternate fails to successfully complete the training,
the Contractor shall promptly appoint a new CQC System Manager or Alternate
who shall then attend the next available course if he/she does not have a
current course certification. The certification is valid for five years at
which time retraining is required. If the Contractor needs this training,
it will be provided by Government personnel after award of the contract.
The cost for the training course shall be borne by the Contractor and will
not exceed one hundred dollars ($100.00) per course, per person. Payment
shall be by check in advance of the training. The Contractor shall contact
the Contracting Officer upon award of the contract to arrange for course
participation.
3.4.5 Organizational Changes
Maintain the CQC staff at full strength at all times. When it is necessary
to make changes to the CQC staff, revise the CQC Plan to reflect the
changes and submit the changes to the Contracting Officer for acceptance.
3.5 SUBMITTALS AND DELIVERABLES
Submittals, if needed, must comply with the requirements in Section 01 33 00

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES. The CQC organization is responsible for certifying
that all submittals and deliverables are in compliance with the contract
requirements. When Section 23 08 00.00 10 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC SYSTEMS
are included in the contract, the submittals required by those sections
must be coordinated with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES to ensure
adequate time is allowed for each type of submittal required.
3.6 CONTROL
Contractor Quality Control is the means by which the Contractor ensures

that the construction, to include that of subcontractors and suppliers,
complies with the requirements of the contract. At least three phases of
control must be conducted by the CQC System Manager for each definable
feature of the construction work as follows:
3.6.1 Preparatory Phase
This phase is performed prior to beginning work on each definable feature

of work, after all required plans/documents/materials are
approved/accepted, and after copies are at the work site. This phase
includes:
a. A review of each paragraph of applicable specifications, reference

codes, and standards. Make available during the preparatory
inspection a copy of those sections of referenced codes and
standards applicable to that portion of the work to be
accomplished in the field. Maintain and make available in the
field for use by Government personnel until final acceptance of
the work.
b. Review of the contract drawings.
c. Check to assure that all materials and/or equipment have been

tested, submitted, and approved.
d. Review of provisions that have been made to provide required

control inspection and testing.
e. Examination of the work area to assure that all required

preliminary work has been completed and is in compliance with the
contract.
f. Examination of required materials, equipment, and sample work to

assure that they are on hand, conform to approved shop drawings or
submitted data, and are properly stored.
g. Review of the appropriate activity hazard analysis to assure

safety requirements are met.
h. Discussion of procedures for controlling quality of the work

including repetitive deficiencies. Document construction
tolerances and workmanship standards for that feature of work.
i. Check to ensure that the portion of the plan for the work to be
performed has been accepted by the Contracting Officer.
j. Discussion of the initial control phase.
k. The Government must be notified at least 48 hours in advance of

beginning the preparatory control phase. Include a meeting
conducted by the CQC System Manager and attended by the
superintendent, other CQC personnel (as applicable), and the
foreman responsible for the definable feature. Document the
results of the preparatory phase actions by separate minutes
prepared by the CQC System Manager and attach to the daily CQC
report. Instruct applicable workers as to the acceptable level of
workmanship required in order to meet contract specifications.
3.6.2 Initial Phase
This phase is accomplished at the beginning of a definable feature of

work. Accomplish the following:
a. Check work to ensure that it is in full compliance with contract

requirements. Review minutes of the preparatory meeting.
b. Verify adequacy of controls to ensure full contract compliance.

Verify required control inspection and testing.
c. Establish level of workmanship and verify that it meets minimum

acceptable workmanship standards. Compare with required sample
panels as appropriate.
d. Resolve all differences.
e. Check safety to include compliance with and upgrading of the

safety plan and activity hazard analysis. Review the activity
analysis with each worker.
f. The Government must be notified at least 48 hours in advance of

beginning the initial phase. Prepare separate minutes of this
phase by the CQC System Manager and attach to the daily CQC
report. Indicate the exact location of initial phase for future
reference and comparison with follow-up phases.
g. The initial phase should be repeated for each new crew to work
onsite, or any time acceptable specified quality standards are not
being met.
3.6.3 Follow-up Phase
Perform daily checks to assure control activities, including control

testing, are providing continued compliance with contract requirements,
until completion of the particular feature of work. Record the checks in
the CQC documentation. Conduct final follow-up checks and correct all
deficiencies prior to the start of additional features of work which may be
affected by the deficient work. Do not build upon nor conceal
non-conforming work.
3.6.4 Additional Preparatory and Initial Phases
Conduct additional preparatory and initial phases on the same definable

features of work if: the quality of on-going work is unacceptable; if
there are changes in the applicable CQC staff, onsite production
supervision or work crew; if work on a definable feature is resumed after a
substantial period of inactivity; or if other problems develop.
3.7 TESTS
3.7.1 Testing Procedure
Perform specified or required tests to verify that control measures are

adequate to provide a product which conforms to contract requirements.
Upon request, furnish to the Government duplicate samples of test specimens
for possible testing by the Government. Testing includes operation and/or
acceptance tests when specified. Procure the services of a Corps of
Engineers approved testing laboratory or establish an approved testing
laboratory at the project site. Perform the following activities and
record and provide the following data:
a. Verify that testing procedures comply with contract requirements.
b. Verify that facilities and testing equipment are available and

comply with testing standards.
c. Check test instrument calibration data against certified standards.
d. Verify that recording forms and test identification control number

system, including all of the test documentation requirements, have
been prepared.
e. Record results of all tests taken, both passing and failing on the
CQC report for the date taken. Specification paragraph reference,
location where tests were taken, and the sequential control number
identifying the test. If approved by the Contracting Officer,
actual test reports may be submitted later with a reference to the
test number and date taken. Provide an information copy of tests
performed by an offsite or commercial test facility directly to
the Contracting Officer. Failure to submit timely test reports as
stated may result in nonpayment for related work performed and
disapproval of the test facility for this contract.
3.7.2 Testing Laboratories
3.7.2.1 Validation
The testing laboratory for aggregate, concrete, bituminous materials, soil,

and rock shall be validated by the Corps of Engineers Materials Testing
Center (MTC) for all tests required by the contract. The validation of a
laboratory is site specific and cannot be transferred or carried over to a
facility at a different location. Any and all costs associated with this
validation shall be borne by the Contractor. If the selected laboratory
fails the validation, the Contractor shall also be responsible for the
costs of each succeeding recheck of the laboratory or the checking of a
subsequently selected laboratory. The costs shall be the amounts on the
MTC web site at the time the validation procedure is performed. Validation
of a laboratory is not granted for the entire laboratory activity, but only
of the specific procedures requested by the inspected laboratory. The
inspected laboratory has full choice of the procedures to be inspected
except that the Quality Assurance portion of ASTM E 329 and tests required
by the contract are mandatory to be inspected.
a. Validation Procedures
Validation of a laboratory may consist of either an inspection or audit as

defined herein. The MTC determines whether the laboratory will be
inspected or audited. Validation of all material testing laboratories
shall be performed by the MTC. Validation may be accomplished by one of
the following processes:
1. Inspection. Inspection shall be performed by the MTC in

accordance with American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
standards ASTM E 329 and ASTM D 3740.
2. Audit. A laboratory may be validated by auditing if it has

been accredited by the Concrete and Cement Reference Laboratory
(CCRL) or AASHTO Materials Reference Laboratory (AMRL) within the
past two years in accordance with ASTM E 329. Audit shall be
performed by the MTC. Inspection by MTC may be required after
auditing if one or more of the critical testing procedures
required in the project specifications were not included in the

CCRL or AMRL inspection report or if there is any concern that the
laboratory may not be able to provide required services.
b. Validation Schedule
1. For all laboratories testing aggregate, concrete, bituminous

materials, soils, and rock, a validation shall be performed at
least every two (2) years, unless extended by the MTC.
2. All laboratories shall be revalidated at any time at the

discretion of the Corps of Engineers when conditions are judged to
differ substantially from the conditions when last validated.
c. Validation Process
If a validated laboratory is unavailable or the Contractor elects to use a

laboratory which is not validated, the Contractor shall coordinate with the
Corps of Engineers Material Testing Center (MTC) in Vicksburg, MS, to
obtain validation and pay all associated costs. Point of Contact at MTC is
Daniel Leavell, telephone (601) 634-2496, fax (601) 634-4656, e-mail:
daniel.a.leavell@erdc.usace.army.mil, at the following address:
U.S. Army Corps of Engineers

Materials Testing Center
Waterways Experiment Station
3909 Halls Ferry Road
Vicksburg, MS 39180-6199
The procedure for Corps of Engineers validation, including qualifications

and inspection/audit request forms, is available at the MTC web site:
http://www.wes.army.mil/SL/MTC/mtc.htm.
The Contractor shall comply with all requirements on the web site.
The Contractor shall coordinate directly with the MTC to obtain

validation. The Contractor is cautioned the validation process is
complicated and lengthy, may require an onsite inspection by MTC staff,
correction of identified deficiencies, and the submittal and approval of
significant documentation. A minimum of 60 days shall be estimated to
schedule an inspection/submittal and receive a validation. The Contractor
shall be as expeditious and punctual as possible in his coordination and
submittal activities with the MTC. The Contractor shall copy the
Contracting Officer of all correspondence and submittals to the MTC for
purposes of laboratory validation.
3.7.2.2 Laboratory and Testing Facilities
The Contractor shall provide and maintain all measuring and testing
devices, laboratory equipment, instruments, transportation, and supplies
necessary to accomplish the required testing. All measuring and testing
devices shall be calibrated at established intervals against certified
standards. The Contractor's measuring and testing equipment shall be made
available for use by the Government for verification of their accuracy and
condition as well as for any inspection or test desired pursuant to the
CONTRACT CLAUSE titled "Inspection of Construction". The Government
reserves the right to utilize the Contractor's control testing laboratory
and equipment to make assurance tests, and to check the Contractor's
testing procedures, techniques, and test results at no additional cost to
the Government. The location of the laboratory shall be convenient to the

site such that test results are available prior to proceeding with the next
sequential phase of the work.
3.7.3 Furnishing or Transportation of Samples for Testing
Costs incidental to the transportation of samples or materials shall be

borne by the Contractor. Samples of materials for test verification and
acceptance testing by the Government shall be delivered to the
Government-contract laboratory designated by the Area Office.
Coordination for each specific test, exact delivery location, and dates
will be made through the Area Office.
3.8 COMPLETION INSPECTION
3.8.1 Punch-Out Inspection
Near the end of the work, or any increment of the work established by a
time stated in the Clause, "Commencement, Prosecution, and Completion of
Work", or by the specifications. Prepare and include in the CQC
documentation a punch list of items which do not conform to the approved
drawings and specifications, as required by paragraph DOCUMENTATION.
Include within the list of deficiencies the estimated date by which the
deficiencies will be corrected. Make a second inspection the CQC System
Manager or staff to ascertain that all deficiencies have been corrected.
Once this is accomplished, notify the Government that the facility is ready
for the Government Pre-Final inspection.
3.8.2 Pre-Final Inspection
The Government will perform the pre-final inspection to verify that the
facility is complete and ready to be occupied. A Government Pre-Final
Punch List may be developed as a result of this inspection. Ensure that
all items on this list have been corrected before notifying the Government,
so that a Final inspection with the customer can be scheduled. Correct any
items noted on the Pre-Final inspection in a timely manner. These
inspections and any deficiency corrections required by this paragraph must
be accomplished within the time slated for completion of the entire work or
any particular increment of the work if the project is divided into
increments by separate completion dates.
3.8.3 Final Acceptance Inspection
The Contractor's Quality Control Inspection personnel, plus the

superintendent or other primary management person, and the Contracting
Officer's Representative must be in attendance at the final acceptance
inspection. Additional Government personnel including, but not limited to,
those from Base/Post Civil Facility Engineer user groups, and major
commands may also be in attendance. The final acceptance inspection will
be formally scheduled by the Contracting Officer based upon results of the
Pre-Final inspection. Notify the Contracting Officer at least 14 days
prior to the final acceptance inspection and include the Contractor's
assurance that all specific items previously identified to the Contractor
as being unacceptable, along with all remaining work performed under the
contract, will be complete and acceptable by the date scheduled for the
final acceptance inspection. Failure of the Contractor to have all
contract work acceptably complete for this inspection will be cause for the
Contracting Officer to bill the Contractor for the Government's additional
inspection cost in accordance with the contract clause titled "Inspection

of Construction".
3.9 DOCUMENTATION
Maintain current records providing factual evidence that required quality

control activities and/or tests have been performed. Include in these
records the work of subcontractors and suppliers on an acceptable form that
includes, as a minimum, the following information:
a. Contractor/subcontractor and their area of responsibility.
b. Operating plant/equipment with hours worked, idle, or down for

repair.
c. Work performed each day, giving location, description, and by

whom. When Network Analysis (NAS) is used, identify each phase of
work performed each day by NAS activity number.
d. Test and/or control activities performed with results and

references to specifications/drawings requirements. Identify the
control phase (Preparatory, Initial, Follow-up). List of
deficiencies noted, along with corrective action.
e. Quantity of materials received at the site with statement as to

acceptability, storage, and reference to specifications/drawings
requirements.
f. Submittals and deliverables reviewed, with contract reference, by

whom, and action taken.
g. Offsite surveillance activities, including actions taken.
h. Job safety evaluations stating what was checked, results, and

instructions or corrective actions.
i. Instructions given/received and conflicts in plans and/or

specifications.
j. Contractor's verification statement.
Indicate a description of trades working on the project; the number of

personnel working; weather conditions encountered; and any delays
encountered. Cover both conforming and deficient features and include a
statement that equipment and materials incorporated in the work and
workmanship comply with the contract. Furnish the original and one copy of
these records in report form to the Government daily within 12 hours after
the date covered by the report, except that reports need not be submitted
for days on which no work is performed. As a minimum, prepare and submit
one report for every 7 days of no work and on the last day of a no work
period. All calendar days must be accounted for throughout the life of the
contract. The first report following a day of no work will be for that day
only. Reports must be signed and dated by the CQC System Manager. Include
copies of test reports and copies of reports prepared by all subordinate
quality control personnel within the CQC System Manager Report.
3.10 NOTIFICATION OF NONCOMPLIANCE
The Contracting Officer will notify the Contractor of any detected

noncompliance with the foregoing requirements. Take immediate corrective
action after receipt of such notice. Such notice, when delivered to the
Contractor at the work site, will be deemed sufficient for the purpose of
notification. If the Contractor fails or refuses to comply promptly, the
Contracting Officer may issue an order stopping all or part of the work
until satisfactory corrective action has been taken. No part of the time
lost due to such stop orders will be made the subject of claim for
extension of time or for excess costs or damages by the Contractor.
SECTION 01 50 00
TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
Requirements of this Section apply to, and are a component of, each section
of the specifications.
1.2 REFERENCES

AWWA C511 (2007) Standard for Reduced-Pressure

Principle Backflow Prevention Assembly
FOUNDATION FOR CROSS-CONNECTION CONTROL AND HYDRAULIC RESEARCH

(FCCCHR)
FCCCHR List (continuously updated) List of Approved

Backflow Prevention Assemblies
FCCCHR Manual (1988e9) Manual of Cross-Connection Control
NFPA 241 (2009) Standard for Safeguarding

Construction,Alteration, and Demolition
Operations
NFPA 70 (2008; AMD 1 2008) National Electrical

Code - 2008 Edition
U.S. FEDERAL AVIATION ADMINISTRATION (FAA)
FAA AC 70/7460-1 (Rev K) Obstruction Marking and Lighting
U.S. FEDERAL HIGHWAY ADMINISTRATION (FHWA)
MUTCD (2000) Manual of Uniform Traffic Control

Devices
1.3 SUBMITTALS

that will review the submittal for the Government. Submitted the following
in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
Construction site plan; G

Traffic control plan; G
SD-03 Product Data
Backflow preventers; G
SD-06 Test Reports
Backflow Preventer Tests; G
SD-07 Certificates
Backflow Tester Certification; G
Backflow Preventers Certificate of Full Approval
1.4 CONSTRUCTION SITE PLAN
Prior to the start of work, submit a site plan showing the locations and
dimensions of temporary facilities (including layouts and details,
equipment and material storage area (onsite and offsite), and access and
haul routes, avenues of ingress/egress to the fenced area and details of
the fence installation. Identify any areas which may have to be graveled
to prevent the tracking of mud. Indicate if the use of a supplemental or
other staging area is desired. Show locations of safety and construction
fences, site trailers, construction entrances, trash dumpsters, temporary
sanitary facilities, and worker parking areas.
Certificate of Full Approval from FCCCHR List, University of Southern

California, attesting that the design, size and make of each backflow
preventer has satisfactorily passed the complete sequence of performance
testing and evaluation for the respective level of approval. Certificate
of Provisional Approval will not be acceptable.
1.5.1 Backflow Tester Certificate
Prior to testing, submit to the Contracting Officer certification issued by

the State or local regulatory agency attesting that the backflow tester has
successfully completed a certification course sponsored by the regulatory
agency. Tester must not be affiliated with any company participating in
any other phase of this Contract.
1.5.2 Backflow Prevention Training Certificate
Submit a certificate recognized by the State or local authority that states

the Contractor has completed at least 10 hours of training in backflow
preventer installations. The certificate must be current.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 TEMPORARY SIGNAGE
2.1.1 Bulletin Board
Immediately upon beginning of work, provide a weatherproof glass-covered

bulletin board not less than 36 by 48 inches in size for displaying the
Equal Employment Opportunity poster, a copy of the wage decision contained
in the contract, Wage Rate Information poster, and other information
approved by the Contracting Officer. Locate the bulletin board at the
project site in a conspicuous place easily accessible to all employees, as
2.1.2 Project and Safety Signs
The requirements for the signs, their content, and location are as shown on
the drawings. Erect signs within 15 days after receipt of the notice to
proceed. Correct the data required by the safety sign daily, with light
colored metallic or non-metallic numerals.
2.2 TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROL
2.2.1 Haul Roads
At contractors expense construct access and haul roads necessary for proper
prosecution of the work under this contract. Construct with suitable
grades and widths; sharp curves, blind corners, and dangerous cross traffic
are be avoided. Provide necessary lighting, signs, barricades, and
distinctive markings for the safe movement of traffic. The method of dust
control, although optional, must be adequate to ensure safe operation at
all times. Location, grade, width, and alignment of construction and
hauling roads are subject to approval by the Contracting Officer. Lighting
must be adequate to assure full and clear visibility for full width of haul
road and work areas during any night work operations.
2.2.2 Barricades
Erect and maintain temporary barricades to limit public access to hazardous

areas. Whenever safe public access to paved areas such as roads, parking
areas or sidewalks is prevented by construction activities or as otherwise
necessary to ensure the safety of both pedestrian and vehicular traffic
barricades will be required. Securely place barricades clearly visible
with adequate illumination to provide sufficient visual warning of the
hazard during both day and night.
2.2.3 Fencing
a. Provide fencing along the construction site at all open excavations and
tunnels to control access by unauthorized people. Fencing must be
installed to be able to restrain a force of at least 250 pounds against
it.
2.2.4 Temporary Wiring
Provide temporary wiring in accordance with NFPA 241 and NFPA 70, Article
305-6(b), Assured Equipment Grounding Conductor Program. Include frequent
inspection of all equipment and apparatus.
2.2.5 Backflow Preventers
Reduced pressure principle type conforming to the applicable requirements

AWWA C511. Provide backflow preventers complete with 150 pound flanged
cast iron, bronze or brass mounted gate valve and strainer, stainless steel
or bronze, internal parts. The particular make, model/design, and size of
backflow preventers to be installed must be included in the latest edition
of the List of Approved Backflow Prevention Assemblies issued by the
FCCCHR List and be accompanied by a Certificate of Full Approval from
FCCCHR List. After installation conduct Backflow Preventer Tests and
provide test reports verifing that the installation meets the FCCCHR Manual
Standards.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EMPLOYEE PARKING
Contractor employees will park privately owned vehicles in an area

designated by the Contracting Officer. This area will be within reasonable
walking distance of the construction site. Contractor employee parking
must not interfere with existing and established parking requirements of
the government installation.
3.2 AVAILABILITY AND USE OF UTILITY SERVICES
3.2.1 Temporary Utilities
Provide temporary utilities required for construction. Materials may be

new or used, must be adequate for the required usage, not create unsafe
conditions, and not violate applicable codes and standards.
3.2.2 Payment for Utility Services
a. The Government will make all reasonably required utilities available to

the Contractor from existing outlets and supplies, as specified in the
contract. Unless otherwise provided in the contract, the amount of
each utility service consumed will be charged to or paid for by the
Contractor at prevailing rates charged to the Government or, where the
utility is produced by the Government, at reasonable rates determined
by the Contracting Officer. Carefully conserve any utilities furnished
without charge.
b. Reasonable amounts of the following utilities will be made available to

the Contractor at the prevailing rates.
c. The point at which the Government will deliver such utilities or

services and the quantity available is as indicated. Pay all costs
incurred in connecting, converting, and transferring the utilities to
the work. Make connections, including providing backflow-preventing
devices on connections to domestic water lines; and providing
transformers; and make disconnections.
3.2.3 Meters and Temporary Connections
At the Contractors expense and in a manner satisfactory to the Contracting

Officer, provide and maintain necessary temporary connections, distribution
lines, and meter bases (Government will provide meters) required to measure
the amount of each utility used for the purpose of determining charges.
Notify the Contracting Officer, in writing, 5 working days before final
electrical connection is desired so that a utilities contract can be
established. The Government will provide a meter and make the final hot
connection after inspection and approval of the Contractor's temporary
wiring installation. The Contractor will not make the final electrical
connection.
3.2.4 Advance Deposit
An advance deposit for utilities consisting of an estimated month's usage

or a minimum of $50.00 will be required. The last monthly bills for the
fiscal year will normally be offset by the deposit and adjustments will be
billed or returned as appropriate. Services to be rendered for the next
fiscal year, beginning 1 October, will require a new deposit. Notification
of the due date for this deposit will be mailed to the Contractor prior to
the end of the current fiscal year.
3.2.5 Final Meter Reading
Before completion of the work and final acceptance of the work by the
Government, notify the Contracting Officer, in writing, 5 working days
before termination is desired. The Government will take a final meter
reading, disconnect service, and remove the meters. Then remove all the
temporary distribution lines, meter bases, and associated paraphernalia.
Pay all outstanding utility bills before final acceptance of the work by
the Government.
3.2.6 Sanitation
a. Provide and maintain within the construction area minimum

field-type sanitary facilities approved by the Contracting Officer and
periodically empty wastes into a municipal, district, or station
sanitary sewage system, or remove waste to a commercial facility.
Obtain approval from the system owner prior to discharge into any
municipal, district, or commercial sanitary sewer system. Any
penalties and / or fines associated with improper discharge will be the
responsibility of the Contractor. Coordinate with the Contracting
Officer and follow station regulations and procedures when discharging
into the station sanitary sewer system. Maintain these conveniences at
all times without nuisance. Include provisions for pest control and
elimination of odors. Government toilet facilities will not be
available to Contractor's personnel.
3.2.7 Telephone
Make arrangements and pay all costs for telephone facilities desired.
3.2.8 Obstruction Lighting of Cranes
Provide a minimum of 2 aviation red or high intensity white obstruction

lights on temporary structures (including cranes) over 100 feet above
ground level. Light construction and installation must comply with

FAA AC 70/7460-1. Lights must be operational during periods of reduced
visibility, darkness, and as directed by the Contracting Officer.
3.2.9 Fire Protection
Provide temporary fire protection equipment for the protection of personnel

and property during construction. Remove debris and flammable materials
daily to minimize potential hazards.
3.3 TRAFFIC PROVISIONS
3.3.1 Maintenance of Traffic
a. Conduct operations in a manner that will not close any thoroughfare or

interfere in any way with traffic on railways or highways except with
written permission of the Contracting Officer at least 15 calendar days
prior to the proposed modification date, and provide a Traffic Control
Plan detailing the proposed controls to traffic movement for approval.
The plan must be in accordance with State and local regulations and the
MUTCD, Part VI. Make all notifications and obtain any permits required
for modification to traffic movements outside Station's jurisdiction..
Contractor may move oversized and slow-moving vehicles to the worksite
provided requirements of the highway authority have been met.
b. Conduct work so as to minimize obstruction of traffic, and maintain

traffic on at least half of the roadway width at all times. Obtain
approval from the Contracting Officer prior to starting any activity
that will obstruct traffic.
c. Provide, erect, and maintain, at contractors expense, lights, barriers,

signals, passageways, detours, and other items, that may be required by
the Life Safety Signage, overhead protection authority having
jurisdiction.
3.3.2 Protection of Traffic
Maintain and protect traffic on all affected roads during the construction
period except as otherwise specifically directed by the Contracting
Officer. Measures for the protection and diversion of traffic, including
the provision of watchmen and flagmen, erection of barricades, placing of
lights around and in front of equipment the work, and the erection and
maintenance of adequate warning, danger, and direction signs, will be as
required by the State and local authorities having jurisdiction. Protect
the traveling public from damage to person and property. Minimize the
interference with public traffic on roads selected for hauling material to
and from the site. Investigate the adequacy of existing roads and their
allowable load limit. Contractor is responsible for the repair of any
damage to roads caused by construction operations.
3.3.3 Rush Hour Restrictions
Do not interfere with the peak traffic flows preceding and during normal
operations without notification to and approval by the Contracting Officer.
3.3.4 Dust Control
Dust control methods and procedures must be approved by the Contracting

Officer. Treat dust abatement on access roads with applications of calcium
chloride, water sprinklers, or similar methods or treatment.
3.4 CONTRACTOR'S TEMPORARY FACILITIES
3.4.1 Safety
Protect the integrity of any installed safety systems or personnel safety

devices. If entrance into systems serving safety devices is required, the
Contractor must obtain prior approval from the Contracting Officer. If it
is temporarily necessary to remove or disable personnel safety devices in
order to accomplish contract requirements, provide alternative means of
protection prior to removing or disabling any permanently installed safety
devices or equipment and obtain approval from the Contracting Officer.
3.4.2 Administrative Field Offices
Provide and maintain administrative field office facilities within the

construction area at the designated site. Government office and warehouse
facilities will not be available to the Contractor's personnel.
3.4.3 Storage Area
Construct a temporary 6 foot high chain link fence around trailers and
materials. Include plastic strip inserts, colored brown, so that
visibility through the fence is obstructed. Fence posts may be driven, in
lieu of concrete bases, where soil conditions permit. Do not place or
store Trailers, materials, or equipment outside the fenced area unless such
trailers, materials, or equipment are assigned a separate and distinct
storage area by the Contracting Officer away from the vicinity of the
construction site but within the installation boundaries. Trailers,
equipment, or materials must not be open to public view with the exception
of those items which are in support of ongoing work on any given day. Do
not stockpile materials outside the fence in preparation for the next day's
work. Park mobile equipment, such as tractors, wheeled lifting equipment,
cranes, trucks, and like equipment within the fenced area at the end of
each work day.
3.4.4 Supplemental Storage Area
Upon Contractor's request, the Contracting Officer will designate another

or supplemental area for the Contractor's use and storage of trailers,
equipment, and materials. This area may not be in close proximity of the
construction site but will be within the installation boundaries. Fencing
of materials or equipment will not be required at this site; however, the
Contractor is responsible for cleanliness and orderliness of the area used
and for the security of any material or equipment stored in this area.
Utilities will not be provided to this area by the Government.
3.4.5 Appearance of Trailers
a. Trailers utilized by the Contractor for administrative or material

storage purposes must present a clean and neat exterior appearance and
be in a state of good repair. Trailers which, in the opinion of the
Contracting Officer, require exterior painting or maintenance will not
be allowed on installation property.
b. Paint using suitable paint and maintain the temporary facilities.

Failure to do so will be sufficient reason to require their removal.
3.4.6 Maintenance of Storage Area
a. Keep fencing in a state of good repair and proper alignment. Grassed

or unpaved areas, which are not established roadways, will be covered
with a layer of gravel as necessary to prevent rutting and the tracking
of mud onto paved or established roadways, should the Contractor elect
to traverse them with construction equipment or other vehicles; gravel
gradation will be at the Contractor's discretion. Mow and maintain
grass located within the boundaries of the construction site for the
duration of the project. Grass and vegetation along fences, buildings,
under trailers, and in areas not accessible to mowers will be edged or
trimmed neatly.
3.4.7 New Building
In the event a new building is constructed for the temporary project field
office, it will be a minimum 12 feet in width, 16 feet in length and have a
minimum of 7 feet headroom. Equip the building with approved electrical
wiring, at least one double convenience outlet and the required switches
and fuses to provide 110-120 volt power. Provide a work table with stool,
desk with chair, two additional chairs, and one legal size file cabinet
that can be locked. The building must be waterproof, supplied with a
heater, have a minimum of two doors, electric lights, a telephone, a
battery operated smoke detector alarm, a sufficient number of adjustable
windows for adequate light and ventilation, and a supply of approved
drinking water. Approved sanitary facilities must be furnished. Screen
the windows and doors and provide the doors with dead bolt type locking
devices or a padlock and heavy duty hasp bolted to the door. Door hinge
pins will be non-removable. Arrange the windows to open and to be securely
fastened from the inside. Protect glass panels in windows by bars or heavy
mesh screens to prevent easy access. In warm weather, furnish air
conditioning capable of maintaining the office at 50 percent relative
humidity and a room temperature 20 degrees F below the outside temperature
when the outside temperature is 95 degrees F. Any new building erected for
a temporary field office must be maintained by the Contractor during the
life of the contract and upon completion and acceptance of the work become
the property of the Contractor and removed from the site. All charges for
telephone service for the temporary field office will be borne by the
Contractor, including long distance charges up to a maximum of $75.00 per
month.
3.4.8 Security Provisions
Provide adequate outside security lighting at the Contractor's temporary

facilities. The Contractor will be responsible for the security of its own
equipment; in addition, the Contractor will notify the appropriate law
enforcement agency requesting periodic security checks of the temporary
project field office.
3.4.9 Weather Protection of Temporary Facilities and Stored Materials
Take necessary precautions to ensure that roof openings and other critical
openings in the building are monitored carefully. Take immediate actions
required to seal off such openings when rain or other detrimental weather
is imminent, and at the end of each workday. Ensure that the openings are
completely sealed off to protect materials and equipment in the building
from damage.
3.4.9.1 Building and Site Storm Protection
When a warning of gale force winds is issued, take precautions to minimize

danger to persons, and protect the work and nearby Government property.
Precautions must include, but are not limited to, closing openings;
removing loose materials, tools and equipment from exposed locations; and
removing or securing scaffolding and other temporary work. Close openings
in the work when storms of lesser intensity pose a threat to the work or
any nearby Government property.
3.5 PLANT COMMUNICATION
Whenever the Contractor has the individual elements of its plant so located
that operation by normal voice between these elements is not satisfactory,
the Contractor must install a satisfactory means of communication, such as
telephone or other suitable devices and made available for use by
Government personnel.
3.6 TEMPORARY PROJECT SAFETY FENCING
As soon as practicable, but not later than 15 days after the date
established for commencement of work, furnish and erect temporary project
safety fencing at the work site. The safety fencing must be a high
visibility orange colored, high density polyethylene grid or approved
equal, a minimum of 42 inches high, supported and tightly secured to steel
posts located on maximum 10 foot centers, constructed at the approved
location. Maintain the safety fencing during the life of the contract and,
upon completion and acceptance of the work, will become the property of the
Contractor and be removed from the work site.
3.7 CLEANUP
Remove construction debris, waste materials, packaging material and the

like from the work site daily. Any dirt or mud which is tracked onto paved
or surfaced roadways must be cleaned away. Store within the fenced area
described above or at the supplemental storage area any materials resulting
from demolition activities which are salvageable. Neatly stacked stored
materials not in trailers, whether new or salvaged.
3.8 RESTORATION OF STORAGE AREA
Upon completion of the project remove the bulletinboard, signs, barricades,

haulroads, and any other temporary products from the site. After removal
of trailers, materials, and equipment from within the fenced area, remove
the fence that will become the property of the Contractor. Restore to the
original or better condition, areas used by the Contractor for the storage
of equipment or material, or other use. Gravel used to traverse grassed
areas must be removed and the area restored to its original condition,
including top soil and seeding as necessary.
4.5”
NAME OF PROJECT 6”
2”
4.5”
6.25”
4.5”
10.5” 6”
2.25”
Location
2.5” Fort Worth District
9.5”
ARCHITECT ENGINEER GENERAL CONTRACTOR 1.875”

(Firm’s Name & Location) (Firm’s Name & Location)
1.875”
1.875”
1.875”
Architect Contractor’s
Engineer’s Logo
Logo (Opt.) (Optional) 7.75”
CONSTRUCTION SIGN SCHEDULE

Legend Group 1: One- to two-line description of Corps relationship to project. Color: White Typeface: 1.25" Helvetica
Regular Maximum line length: 19”
Legend Group 2: Division or District Name (optional). Placed below 10.5” reverse Signature (6” Castle). Color: White
Typeface: 1.25" Helvetica Regular
Legend Group 2a: One- to three-line identification of Military or Civil Works sponsor (optional). Place below Corps
Signature to cross-align with Group 5a-b. Color: White Typeface: 1.25" Helvetica Regular Maximum line length: 19"
Legend Group 3: One- to three-line project title legend describes the work being done under this contract. Color: Black
Typeface: 3" Helvetica Bold Maximum line length: 42"
Legend Group 4: One- to two-line identification of project or facility (civil works) or name of sponsoring department
(military). Color: Black Typeface: 1.5" Helvetica Regular Maximum line length: 42"
Cross-align the first line of Legend Group 4 with the first line of the Corps Signature (US Army Corps) as shown.
Legend Groups 5a-b: One- to five-line identification of prime contractors including: type (architect, general contractor,
etc.), corporate or firm name, city, state. Use of Legend Group 5 is optional. Color: Black Typeface: 1.25" Helvetica
Regular Maximum line length: 21"
All typography is flush left and rag right, upper and lower case with initial capitals only as shown. Letter- and word-spacing
to follow Corps standards as specified in Appendix D.
Sign Type Legend Size (A) Panel Size Post Size Specification Code Mounting Height Color Bkg/Lgd
CID-01 Various 4’x6’ 4”x4” HDO-3 48” WH-RD/Bk
Safety Performance Sign EP 310-1-6a
01 Jun 06
Each contractor’s safety record is to be title with First Aid logo in the top section mounted to the background to allow for
posted on Corps managed or supervised of the sign, and the performance record daily revisions to posted safety perfor-
construction projects and mounted with captions are standard for all signs of this mance record.
the Construction Project Identification type. Legend groups 2 and 3 below
sign specified on page 16-2. identify the project and the contractor and Special applications or situations not
are to be placed on the sign as shown. covered in these guidelines should be
The graphic format, color, size and type- referred to the district Sign Program
faces used on the sign are to be repro- Safety record numbers are mounted on Manager.
duced exactly as specified below. The individual metal plates and are screw-
Legend Group 1: Standard two-line title “Safety 3” 33.030” eq. 8” eq.

is a Job Requirement” with 8” (outside
diameter) Safety Green first aid logo.
Color: To match Pantone system 347
Typeface: 3" Helvetica Bold 6”
Color: Black
4.5”
Legend Group 2: One- to two-line project title
legend describes the work being done under
this contract and name of host project. 10.5”
Color: Black
Typeface: 1.5" Helvetica Regular
Maximum line length: 42" 2.25”
3”
Legend Group 3: One- to two-line identifica- 2.25”
tion: name of prime contractor and city, state 3”
address. Color: Black 4.875”
Typeface: 1.5" Helvetica Regular 4.875” .75”
Maximum line length: 42" 4.875”
4.875”
Legend Group 4: Standard safety record 4.5”
captions as shown. 6.75”
Color: Black 3”
Typeface: 1.25” Helvetica Regular
Replaceable numbers are to be mounted on 3” 42” 3”

white .060 aluminum plates and screw-
mounted to background.
Color: Black
Typeface: 3" Helvetica Regular
Plate size: 2.5" x 4.5"
All typography is flush left and rag right, upper

and lower case with initial capitals only as
shown. Letter- and word-spacing to follow
Corps standards as specified in Appendix D.
Sign Legend Panel Post Specification Mounting Color

Type Size (A) Size Size Code Height Bkg/Lgd
CID-02 various 4’x4’ 4”x4” HDO-3 48” WH/BK-SG
2.25” 2.25” 2.25” 2.25”
.75”
3”
.75”
16-3
EP 310-1-6a Fabrication and Mounting Guidelines
01 Jun 06
All Construction Project Identification tions for HDO plywood panel preparation For additional information on the proper
signs and Safety Performance signs are are provided in Appendix B. method to prepare sign panel graphics,
to be fabricated and installed as de- contact the district Sign Program
scribed below. The signs are to be Shown below the mounting diagram is a Manager.
erected at a location designated by the panel layout grid with spaces provided for
contracting officer representative and project information. Photocopy this page
shall conform to the size, format, and and use as a worksheet when preparing
typographic standards shown on sign legend orders.
pages16-2 and 16-3. Detailed specifica-
The sign panels are to be fabricated from .75"

High Density Overlay Plywood. Panel
preparation to follow HDO specifications
provided in Appendix B.
Sign graphics to be prepared on a white

nonreflective vinyl film with positionable
adhesive backing.
All graphics except for the Communication

Red background with Corps Signature on the 48”
project sign are to be die-cut or computer-cut
nonreflective vinyl, prespaced legends
prepared in the sizes and typefaces specified
and applied to the background panel following
the graphic formats shown on pages
16-2 and 16-3. 48”
The 2’x 4’ Communication Red panel (to match
Pantone system 032) with full Corps Signa-
ture (reverse version) is to be screen-printed
on the white background. Identification of the
district or division may be applied under the 18”
signature with white cut vinyl letters prepared
to Corps standards. Construction Project Identification Sign
Legend Group 1: Corps Relationship
Drill and insert six (6) .375" T-nuts from the
front face of the HDO sign panel. Position 1.
holes as shown. Flange of T-nut to be flush 2.
with sign face.
Legend Group 2: Division/District Name Legend Group 2a: Military/Civil Works Sponsor
Apply graphic panel to prepared HDO
1. 1.
plywood panel following manufacturers’
instructions. 2. 2.
Sign uprights to be structural grade 4" x 4" Legend Group 3: Project Title
treated Douglas Fir or Southern Yellow Pine, 1.
No.1 or better. Post to be 12' long. Drill six (6) 2.
.375" mounting holes in uprights to align with 3.
T-nuts in sign panel. Countersink (.5") back of
hole to accept socket head cap screw (4" x Legend Group 4: Facility Name
.375").
1.
Assemble sign panel and uprights. Imbed 2.
assembled sign panel and uprights in 4' hole.
Local soil conditions and/or wind loading may Legend Group 5: Contractor/A&E Legend Group 5b: Contractor/A&E
require bolting additional 2" x 4" struts on
1. 1.
inside face of uprights to reinforce installation
as shown. 2. 2.
3. 3.
4. 4.
5. 5.
Safety Performance Sign

Legend Group 2: Project Title
1.
2.
Legend Group 3: Contractor/A&E

1.
16-4
2.
SECTION 01 52 00
GOVERNMENT FIELD OFFICE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUBMITTALS

SD-03 Product Data
Government Field Office; G.
Provide manufacturer catalog data, specifications, and shop

drawings for approval, verifying all dimensions, fixtures and
equipment. Note all deviations on drawings.
1.2 ANCILLARY RESPONSIBILITY
All work in this Section is considered as an ancillary responsibility of

the Contractor and no separate payment will be made for it.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 GOVERNMENT FIELD OFFICE
The Contractor shall provide the Government Resident Engineer with an

office, approximately 200 square feet in floor area, located where directed
and providing space heat, electric light and power, and toilet facilities
consisting of one lavatory and one water closet complete with connections
to water and sewer mains. A mail slot in the door or a lockable mail box
mounted on the surface of the door shall be provided. At completion of the
project, the office shall remain the property of the Contractor and shall
be removed from the site. Utilities shall be connected and disconnected in
accordance with local codes and to the satisfaction of the Contracting
Officer.
The Contractor may, at the Contractor's option, furnish and maintain a

trailer-type mobile office acceptable to the Contracting Officer and
providing as a minimum the facilities specified above. The trailer shall
be securely anchored to the ground at all four corners to guard against
movement during high winds.
2.1.1 Manufacturer
Manufacturer shall be regularly engaged in the construction and on-site

erection of relocatable modular buildings or trailers, if a trailer is
provided..
SECTION 01 52 00.00 44 Page 1

2.1.2 Utilities
Exterior utilities shall be permanently installed to the modular unit and

connected with existing utilities. Exposed utilities shall be insulated to
prevent freezing. Utilities shall be connected and disconnected in
accordance with local codes and to the satisfaction of the Contracting
Officer. Contractor shall be responsible for the cost of all utility usage
except telephone. The Contractor is responsible for payment of all utility
usage, to include electric, water, sewer, and internet service. The
Government will provide the telephone equipment and service to the
Government Field Office.
2.1.3 Vehicular Access and Parking
The Contractor shall provide graveled access road and parking area for 5
vehicles adjacent to the Government Field Office.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 ERECTION
Erect the Government Field Office in accordance with building

manufacturer's written recommendations at a location designated by the
Contracting Officer. Securely anchor trailer(s) to the ground at all four
corners to guard against movement during high winds. Water and weather
proof the unit and make ready for use within 15 days after Contract Notice
to Proceed.
3.2 JANITORIAL SERVICES
Provide daily janitorial services, trash collection, and building

maintenance during the life of the Contract.
3.3 MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR
The Contractor shall be responsible for maintenance and repair of the

office during the life of the Contract.
3.4 RELOCATION
The Contractor shall be responsible for relocating the Government Field

Office should it be required to accommodate the sequence of construction.
The relocation will be at no expense to the Government.
3.5 OWNERSHIP AND DISPOSITION
See paragraph entitled "Government Field Office" above.
SECTION 01 52 00.00 44 Page 2

SECTION 01 56 00.00 44
DUST CONTROL
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
The work covered by this section consists of furnishing all labor,

materials and equipment and performing all work required for the control
and prevention of fugitive dust during and as the result of construction
operations under this contract except for those measures set forth in other
Technical Provisions of these specifications. For the purpose of this
specification, fugitive dust entails the generation of solid particles by
the forces of wind or machinery acting upon exposed materials. Provisions
of this specification shall prevent fugitive dust from adversely affecting
human health or welfare; unfavorably altering ecological balances of
importance to human life; affecting other species of importance to man; or
degrading the utility of the environment for aesthetic and recreational
purposes. Dust Control is a requirement in the EPA and state pollutant
discharge elimination system or permit for discharging storm water during
construction.
1.2 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this section to the extent
referenced. The publications are referenced in the text by basic
designation only.
CORPS OF ENGINEERS (COE)
COE EM 385-1-1 (Latest Version) Safety and Health

Requirements Manual
1.3 SUBMITTALS

Dust Control; G.
Products and Procedures; G
Prior to commencement of the work, submit in writing a proposal to

the Contracting Officer for implementing the provisions of this
section for fugitive dust control. Address the plans, and the
products to be used, to prevent and control fugitive dust through
specific mitigative and preventative measures, . The
effectiveness of the dust control program shall be periodically
checked and reviewed. Revisions to the dust control plan shall be
submitted to the Contracting Officer as changes are necessary
SECTION 01 56 00.00 44 Page 1

during the duration of this contract.
Material Safety Data Sheet; G.
- Material Safety Data Sheets include those for soil

stabilization products.
Sandblasting; G.
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Recordkeeping;.
- Maintain and furnish records in accordance with PART 1

paragraph RECORDKEEPING.
1.4 IMPLEMENTATION MEETING
Prior to commencement of the work the Contractor shall meet with

representatives of the Contracting Officer to develop mutual understandings
relative to compliance with these provisions and administration of the dust
control program in accordance with Section 01 31 00.00 44 PROJECT MEETINGS.
1.5 APPLICABLE REGULATIONS
In order to prevent and to provide control of pollution arising from the

construction activities of the Contractor and his subcontractors in the
performance of this contract, all applicable Federal, State, and local laws
and regulations concerning environmental pollution control and abatement,
and all applicable provisions of the COE EM 385-1-1 as well as the specific
requirements stated in this section and elsewhere in the contract
specifications. Compliance with the provisions of this section by
subcontractors will be the responsibility of the Contractor.
1.6 NOTIFICATION OF NON-COMPLIANCE
The Contracting Officer will notify the Contractor in writing of any

observed non-compliance with the foregoing provisions. The Contractor
shall, after receipt of such notice, immediately take corrective action.
Such notice, when delivered to the Contractor or his authorized
representative at the site of the work, shall be deemed sufficient for the
purpose. If the Contractor fails or refuses to promptly take corrective
action, the Contracting Officer may issue an order stopping all or part of
the work until satisfactory corrective action has been taken. No part of
the time lost due to any such stop orders shall be made the subject of a
claim for extension of time or for excess costs or damages by the
Contractor unless it was later determined that the Contractor was in
compliance.
1.7 RECORDKEEPING
The Contractor shall, at a minimum, maintain records indicating dust

control measures taken. Information provided shall be sufficient to answer
any questions regarding control methods utilized, products used,
application rates, inspections performed. Additional information to be
recorded, but not limited to reporting, includes treated area, operator,
date and time of treatment, meteorological conditions and inspection and
monitoring reports. Records shall be submitted every 30 days to the
SECTION 01 56 00.00 44 Page 2

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCTS AND PROCEDURES
Products and procedures used in controlling particulates and dust shall be

in accordance with the Contractor's Environmental Protection Plan and the
dust control plan required by this Section. Material Safety Data Sheets
for soil binders for use in dust control shall be approved prior to
application. Soil binders containing cancinogenic substances (e.g.
acrylamides) are prohibited.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 DUST CONTROL
Control techniques for fugitive dust sources shall involve watering. For
arid regions and dusty work areas, dust control shall include water
application with soil binders that is environmental sustainable and
non-toxic. The methods utilized shall be cost effective, water
conservation, and appropriate for the size and scope of the fugitive dust
source. Methods and controls shall not have an adverse effects on plant
and animal life, ecosystem, and facility air intakes, or contaminate the
treated material.
Repeat methods at such intervals as to keep all parts of the disturbed

area(s) treated at all times. Have sufficient competent equipment on the
job to accomplish control techniques. Products shall provide a method to
reduce dust-related environmental concerns and aid in complying with
applicable regulations.
Products shall not in any form produce any adverse environmental effects
through their use and shall provide an effective, clean, safe control of
airborne dust and protection against soil erosion.
3.1.1 Preventative Techniques
The reduction of source extent, the incorporation of process modifications,

or adjusted work practices, which reduce the amount of dust-generation, are
preventative techniques for the control of fugitive dust emissions. These
techniques include the elimination of mud and dirt carry-out onto paved
roads at construction sites.
3.1.2 Mitigative Techniques
Mitigative measures entail the periodic removal of dust-producing

material. Examples of mitigative control measures include clean-up of
spillage on paved or unpaved travel surfaces and clean-up of material
spillage at transfer points.
3.2 MATERIALS HANDLING
The Contractor shall take the following minimum precautions to limit

fugitive dust emissions from material handling and transportation to
achieve control of dust emissions to the extent practicable:
a. Stockpiles
Apply water with an approved soil binder. Other alternatives include

laydown top soil with organic matters that are removed from the disturbed
area or placing a compouded fiber erosion control blanket to cover material
SECTION 01 56 00.00 44 Page 3

stockpiles and other surfaces which can create airborne dust. BMP
perimeter controls around the stockpile shall be placed at least 10 feet
away from the toe of stockpiled material.
b. Transportation
At a minimum, complete covering, maintain a minimum 12 inch free-board

space, and moistening of materials hauled from the construction site. Open
truck beds, since they create airborne particulate matter, are prohibited.
Additional application of water with approved soil binder shall be required
if additional controls are considered necessary by the Contracting Officer.
c. Off-Site Tracking
Perform dust control as the work proceeds to minimize vehicle off-site

tracking of sediment and generation of dust. Provide every effort, such as
temporary paved roadways, to keep vehicles from tracking soils from the
construction site. Gravel construction access roadways shall be at least 80
feet long and 30 feet wide for construction sites 5 acres or larger. The
access roadway gravel blanket shall be 6-inch minimum in depth with gravel
size of 3-inch minimum. Overlay gravel blankets on two layers of 0.015 mm
6-mil thick geotextile fabric or a single layer of 10-mil thick geotextile
fabric. Control dust generation by water sprinkling. For water
conservation, water may be applied with an approved soil binder.
3.3 CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION
Control dust resulting from demolition and construction activities. No

person may cause, suffer, allow, or permit a structure, road, street,
alley, or parking area to be constructed, altered, repaired, or demolished,
or land to be cleared without taking minimum precautions to achieve control
of dust emissions.
3.3.1 Demolition
Control the amount of dust resulting from demolition to prevent the spread
of dust to occupied portions of the construction site and to avoid creation
of a nuisance in the surrounding area. The use of water, oil, or chemical
treatment for control of dust in the demolition of structures, in
construction operations, in work performed on a road, parking area, or in
the clearing of land is required.
3.3.2 Sandblasting
Utilize adequate methods, including enclosure of work areas and debris, to

prevent airborne particulate matter during sandblasting of painted and
non-paintedstructures or other similar operations. Blast media and
containment systems shall be approved prior to use.
3.4 ACCESS ROADS AND PARKING LOTS
No person may cause, suffer, allow, or permit any public, industrial,

commercial, or private road, street, or alley to be used without taking
precautions to achieve control of dust emissions.
In addition to mitigation and control techniques, the removal of soil or

other materials shall be periodically performed by mechanical sweepers or
their equivalent. Spot clean dirty roadways and parking lots. These
activities shall be performed as deemed necessary. Remove sand which is
SECTION 01 56 00.00 44 Page 4

applied for the specific purpose of snow or ice control as soon as such
control is no longer necessary.
3.4.1 Access Roads
The use of temporary asphalt pavement is required for major access roadways
at extensive development sites (10 acres or larger) and/or construction
periods longer than 3 months. Alternative method of dust control for
access roads with uniform gravel cover (and geotextile fabric beneath
gravel cover) is acceptable for site less than 10 acres of total disturbed
area, and if construction period is shorter than 3 months.
Site access roads may use uniform gravel cover (with geotextile fabric
beneath gravel cover) and water sprinkling with soil binders for dust
control.
The use of temporary asphalt or uniform gravel cover , as described above

for control of Off-Site Tracking, with wheel wash is an acceptable method
of dust control for roads leading to and from areas of construction
activity.
3.4.2 Parking Lots
Parking surfaces with more than five parking spaces shall be paved.
Temporary parking area(s) to be used 30 calendar days or more for the
Contractor's equipment or personal vehicles shall be paved with temporary
asphalt. Temporary lots used for less than one month may use uniform
gravel, if required by Corps Area Office Contracting Officer (AOCO),
applying water with approved soil binder may be necessary.
3.5 CONTROL STRUCTURES
Activities performed under this Contract shall conform with the

specifications described herein along with other technical specifications,
particularly Sections 01 57 20.00 10 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION and 01 57 24.03 44
STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION.
If the Contractor proposes to construct temporary structures, he shall

submit the proposal for approval at least ten (10) days prior to the
scheduled start of such temporary work. Modification of the Contractor's
plans shall be made only with the written approval of the Contracting
Officer.
3.6 MAINTENANCE
During the life of this contract, the Contractor shall maintain all
facilities constructed for pollution control under this Contract as long as
the operations creating the particular pollutant are being carried out or
until the material concerned has become stabilized to the extent that
pollution is no longer being created. Re-application of water by sprinking
or approved soil binder with water shall be required when the disturbed
areas are not stabilized.
During the construction period the Contractor shall conduct frequent

training courses for his maintenance personnel. The curricula shall
include methods of dust control, familiarity with pollution standards, and
care of controls and measures to prevent and correct fugitive dust
pollution.
SECTION 01 56 00.00 44 Page 5

The Contractor shall furnish daily services for the temporary control
measures at the project site and perform any required maintenance as deemed
necessary by and to the satisfaction of the Corps AOCO during the entire
life of the Contract. Services shall be performed at such a time and in
such a manner to least interfere with the operations.
The Contractor's designated Site Inspector shall inspect all pollution

prevention measures in accordance with Sections 01 57 24 STORM WATER
POLLUTION PREVENTION and 01 57 25.00 44 SWPP PLAN INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE REPORT FORM or at the Contracting Officer's request.
Application of soil binder with water is an acceptable temporary
stabilization protocol when approved by the Contracting Officer.
SECTION 01 56 00.00 44 Page 6

SECTION 01 57 20.00 10
ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

U.S. ARMY (DA)
DA AR 200-1 (2007) Environmental Protection and

Enhancement
EM 385-1-1 (2008; Change 1-2010; Change 3-2010;

Errata 1-2010) Safety and Health
Requirements Manual
WETLANDS DELINEATION MANUAL (1987) Corps of Engineers Wetlands

Delineation Manual
33 CFR 328 Definitions of Waters of the United States
40 CFR 150 - 189 Pesticide Programs
40 CFR 260 Hazardous Waste Management System: General
40 CFR 261 Identification and Listing of Hazardous

Waste
40 CFR 262 Standards Applicable to Generators of

Hazardous Waste
40 CFR 279 Standards for the Management of Used Oil
40 CFR 302 Designation, Reportable Quantities, and

Notification
40 CFR 355 Emergency Planning and Notification
40 CFR 68 Chemical Accident Prevention Provisions
49 CFR 171 - 178 Hazardous Materials Regulations
1.2 DEFINITIONS
1.2.1 Environmental Pollution and Damage
Environmental pollution and damage is the presence of chemical, physical,
SECTION 01 57 20.00 10 Page 1

or biological elements or agents which adversely affect human health or

welfare; unfavorably alter ecological balances of importance to human life;
affect other species of importance to humankind; or degrade the environment
aesthetically, culturally and/or historically.
1.2.2 Environmental Protection
Environmental protection is the prevention/control of pollution and habitat

disruption that may occur to the environment during construction. The
control of environmental pollution and damage requires consideration of
land, water, and air; biological and cultural resources; and includes
management of visual aesthetics; noise; solid, chemical, gaseous, and
liquid waste; radiant energy and radioactive material as well as other
pollutants.
1.2.3 Contractor Generated Hazardous Waste
Contractor generated hazardous waste means materials that, if abandoned or

disposed of, may meet the definition of a hazardous waste. These waste
streams would typically consist of material brought on site by the
Contractor to execute work, but are not fully consumed during the course of
construction. Examples include, but are not limited to, excess paint
thinners (i.e. methyl ethyl ketone, toluene etc.), waste thinners,excess
paints, excess solvents, waste solvents, and excess pesticides, and
contaminated pesticide equipment rinse water. The Contractor is
responsible to contain and dispose all brought on-site materials and
products by recycling or reuse through manufacturer, local vendors or
charitable organizations. Disposal at construction site is prohibited.
Disposal to landfill or other disposal facility shall be pre-approved. The
Contractor is responsible to provide MSDS of all products or construction
material brought on-site for review and approval by the DPW-Environmental
Office, Hazardous Waste Materials Program Management.
1.2.4 Installation Pest Management Coordinator
Installation Pest Management Coordinator (IPMC) is the individual

officially designated by the Installation Commander to oversee the
Installation Pest Management Program and the Installation Pest Management
Plan.
1.2.5 Project Pesticide Coordinator
The Project Pesticide Coordinator (PPC) is an individual that resides at a

Civil Works Project office and that is responsible for oversight of
pesticide application on Project grounds.
1.2.6 Land Application for Discharge Water
The term "Land Application" for discharge water implies that the Contractor
must discharge water at a rate which allows the water to percolate into the
soil. No sheeting action, soil erosion, discharge into storm sewers,
discharge into defined drainage areas, or discharge into the "waters of the
United States" shall occur. Land Application must be in compliance with
all applicable Federal, State, and local laws and regulations. The
construction site storm water discharge shall have an EPA or state permit.
The Contractor shall routinely assess non-storm water discharge to be in
accordance with Section 01 57 24.03 44 STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN
(LOUISIANA).
SECTION 01 57 20.00 10 Page 2

1.2.7 Pesticide
Pesticide is defined as any substance or mixture of substances intended for

preventing, destroying, repelling, or mitigating any pest, or intended for
use as a plant regulator, defoliant or desiccant.
1.2.8 Pests
The term "pests" means arthropods, birds, rodents, nematodes, fungi,

bacteria, viruses, algae, snails, marine borers, snakes, weeds and other
organisms (except for human or animal disease-causing organisms) that
adversely affect readiness, military operations, or the well-being of
personnel and animals; attack or damage real property, supplies, equipment,
or vegetation; or are otherwise undesirable.
1.2.9 Surface Discharge
The term "Surface Discharge" implies that the water is discharged with
possible sheeting action and subsequent soil erosion may occur. Waters
that are surface discharged may terminate in drainage ditches, storm
sewers,creeks, and/or "waters of the United States" and would require a
permit to discharge water from the governing agency.
1.2.10 Waters of the United States
All waters which are under the jurisdiction of the Clean Water Act, as
defined in 33 CFR 328.
1.2.11 Wetlands
Those areas that are inundated or saturated by surface or ground water at a

frequency and duration sufficient to support, and that under normal
circumstances do support, a prevalence of vegetation typically adapted for
life in saturated soil conditions. Wetlands generally include swamps,
marshes, and bogs. Official determination of whether or not an area is
classified as a wetland must be done in accordance with
WETLANDS DELINEATION MANUAL.
Minimize environmental pollution and damage that may occur as the result of
construction operations. The environmental resources within the project
boundaries and those affected outside the limits of permanent work must be
protected during the entire duration of this contract. Comply with all
applicable environmental Federal, State, and local laws and regulations.
Any delays resulting from failure to comply with environmental laws and
regulations will be the Contractor's responsibility.
1.4 SUBCONTRACTORS
Ensure compliance with this section by subcontractors.
1.5 PAYMENT
No separate payment will be made for work covered under this section.
Payment of fees associated with environmental permits, application, and/or
notices obtained by the Contractor (i.e. storm water construction permits,
utilties, digging, occupational safety and health, pre-construction NOI,
post construction NOT, Contractor and Government annual permit fees, paint
SECTION 01 57 20.00 10 Page 3

booths, welding, brake and clutch service, oil water separator, fuel
storage tank, on-site septic system, licenses and permits required for
workers, sub-contractors, and transporters), and payment of all fines/fees
for violation or non-compliance with Federal, State, Regional and local
laws and regulations, are the Contractor's responsibility. All costs
associated with this section must be included in the contract price.
1.6 SUBMITTALS

Environmental Protection Plan G
The environmental protection plan.
Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan; G
Submit a copy of the Contractor's Pollution Prevention Plan

(SWPPP), including both narrative and the EROSION AND SEDIMENT
CONTROL drawings, in accordance with Section 01 57 24.03 44 STORM
WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN.
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Hazardous Substance Reporting; G
The Contractor shall submit a copy of the attached Emergency

Planning and Community Right to Know notification and other
reports to the Contracting Officer and to the Facility Emergency
Coordinator (FEC) as specified in PART 3 paragraph EMERGENCY
PLANNING AND COMMUNITY RIGHT-TO-KNOW REQUIREMENTS.
1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION PLAN
Prior to commencing construction activities or delivery of materials to the

site, submit an Environmental Protection Plan for review and approval by
the Contracting Officer. The purpose of the Environmental Protection Plan
is to present a comprehensive overview of known or potential environmental
issues which the Contractor must address during construction. Issues of
concern must be defined within the Environmental Protection Plan as
outlined in this section. Address each topic at a level of detail
commensurate with the environmental issue and required construction
task(s). Topics or issues which are not identified in this section, but
are considered necessary, must be identified and discussed after those
items formally identified in this section. Prior to submittal of the
Environmental Protection Plan, meet with the Contracting Officer for the
purpose of discussing the implementation of the initial Environmental
Protection Plan; possible subsequent additions and revisions to the plan
including any reporting requirements; and methods for administration of the
Contractor's Environmental Plans. The Environmental Protection Plan must
be current and maintained onsite by the Contractor.
SECTION 01 57 20.00 10 Page 4

1.7.1 Compliance
No requirement in this Section will relieve the Contractor of any

applicable Federal, State, and local environmental protection laws and
regulations. During Construction, the Contractor will be responsible for
identifying, implementing, and submitting for approval any additional
requirements to be included in the Environmental Protection Plan.
1.7.2 Contents
Include in the environmental protection plan, but not limit it to, the
following:
a. Name(s) of person(s) within the Contractor's organization who is(are)

responsible for ensuring adherence to the Environmental Protection Plan.
b. Name(s) and qualifications of person(s) responsible for manifesting

hazardous waste to be removed from the site, if applicable.
c. Name(s) and qualifications of person(s) responsible for training the

Contractor's environmental protection personnel.
d. Description of the Contractor's environmental protection personnel

training program.
e. An erosion and sediment control plan which identifies the type and
location of the erosion and sediment controls to be provided. The plan
must include monitoring and reporting requirements to assure that the
control measures are in compliance with the erosion and sediment
control plan, Federal, State, and local laws and regulations. A Storm
Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) may be substituted for this
plan. Prepare the Storm Water Pollution Plan in accordance with
Section 01 57 24.03 44 STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN. Include
in the plan the name(s) and qualifications of person(s) responsible for
monitoirng compliance of erosion and sediment control for the duration
of the construction until final acceptance by the Contracting Officer
representative (COR).
f. Drawings showing locations of proposed temporary excavations or

embankments for haul roads, stream crossings, material storage areas,
structures, sanitary facilities, and stockpiles of excess or spoil
materials including methods to control runoff and to contain materials
on the site.
g. Traffic control plans including measures to reduce erosion of temporary

roadbeds by construction traffic, especially during wet weather. Plan
shall include measures to minimize the amount of mud transported onto
paved public roads by vehicles or runoff.
h. Work area plan showing the proposed activity in each portion of the
area and identifying the areas of limited use or nonuse. Plan should
include measures for marking the limits of use areas including methods
for protection of features to be preserved within authorized work areas.
i. Drawing showing the location of borrow areas.
j. Include in the Spill Control plan the procedures, instructions, and

reports to be used in the event of an unforeseen spill of a substance
regulated by 40 CFR 68, 40 CFR 302, 40 CFR 355, and/or regulated under
SECTION 01 57 20.00 10 Page 5

State or Local laws and regulations. The Spill Control Plan

supplements the requirements of EM 385-1-1 and the Fort Polk DPW
Environmental Office. Include in this plan, as a minimum:
(1) The name of the individual who will report any spills or
hazardous substance releases and who will follow up with complete
documentation. This individual will immediately notify the
Contracting Officer and Facility Fire DepartmentFacility Response
PersonnelFacility Environmental Office in addition to the legally
required Federal, State, and local reporting channels (including
the National Response Center 1-800-424-8802) if a reportable
quantity is released to the environment. Include in the plan a
list of the required reporting channels and telephone numbers .
(2) Training requirements for Contractor's personnel and methods of

accomplishing the training.
(3) A list of materials and equipment to be immediately available at

the job site, tailored to cleanup work of the potential hazard(s)
identified.
(4) The names and locations of suppliers of containment materials and

locations of additional fuel oil recovery, cleanup, restoration,
and material-placement equipment available in case of an
unforeseen spill emergency.
(5) The methods and procedures to be used for expeditious contaminant

cleanup.
k. A non-hazardous solid waste disposal plan identifying methods and

locations for solid waste disposal including clearing debris and
schedules for disposal.
(1) Identify any subcontractors responsible for the transportation

and disposal of solid waste. Submit licenses or permits for solid
waste disposal sites that are not a commercial operating facility.
(2) Evidence of the disposal facility's acceptance of the solid waste

must be attached to this plan during the construction. Attach a
copy of each of the Non-hazardous Solid Waste Diversion Reports to
the disposal plan. Submit the report for the previous quarter on
the first working day after the first quarter that non-hazardous
solid waste has been disposed and/or diverted (e.g. the first
working day of January, April, July, and October).
(3) Indicate in the report the total amount of waste generated and
total amount of waste diverted in cubic yards or tons along with
the percent that was diverted.
(4) A recycling and solid waste minimization plan with a list of

measures to reduce consumption of energy and natural resources.
Detail in the plan the Contractor's actions to comply with and to
participate in Federal, State, Regional, and local government
sponsored recycling programs to reduce the volume of solid waste
at the source. Discuss in the plan recycling support facilities
(i.e. installation recycling, local vendors, reused through
charitable organizations, or construction material for new
SECTION 01 57 20.00 10 Page 6

project, etc.) applicable to the site and project. Record the

type and weight of recycled or reused material. Segregate
recyclable materials such as cardboard and paperboard, light
metal, heavy metal or steel containers, paper, glass, and plastic
containers. Contact the Installation for special instructions for
recycling. Segregate inert material, such as clean fill, rock and
concrete, asphalt payment, sand, sod, and clean masonry and brick,
as construction and demolition materials. Some materials may be
applicable and reuseable as clean fill or base course material if
they meet the product specifcations and written approvals are
obtained from the Contracting Officer. Reference Section 01 74 19
CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION WASTE MANAGEMENT .
l. An air pollution control plan detailing provisions to assure that dust,

debris, materials, trash, etc., do not become air borne and travel off
the project site. Identify air permits required for a new facility or
modification of an existing facility which may emit air contaminants.
Obtain permits in accordance with applicable Federal and state
regulations for the user.
m. A contaminant prevention plan that: identifies potentially hazardous

substances to be used on the job site; identifies the intended actions
to prevent introduction of such materials into the air, water, or
ground; and details provisions for compliance with Federal, State, and
local laws and regulations for storage and handling of these
materials. In accordance with EM 385-1-1, a copy of the Material
Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) and the maximum quantity of each hazardous
material to be onsite at any given time must be included in the
contaminant prevention plan. Update the plan as new hazardous
materials are brought onsite or removed from the site.
Provide a list of construction materials, products, and sources, and

Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) that will be brought to the job
site. Submit the MSDS for construction materials and products, such as
floor tile, tile mastic, ceiling tile, roofing material, drywall,
recycled/recovered materials, fertilizers, pesticides, storm water
control structure using compost mulch, paint, joint sealant, grout, and
fuel, through the Contracting Officer to the Installation's
Environmental Office.
n. A waste water management plan that identifies the methods and

procedures for management and/or discharge of waste waters which are
directly derived from construction activities, such as concrete curing
water, clean-up water, dewatering of ground water, disinfection water,
hydrostatic test water, and water used in flushing of lines. If a
settling/retention pond is required, the plan must include the design
of the pond including drawings, removal plan, and testing requirements
for possible pollutants. If land application will be the method of
disposal for the waste water, the plan must include a sketch showing
the location for land application along with a description of the
pretreatment methods to be implemented. If surface discharge will be
the method of disposal, include a copy of the permit and associated
documents as an attachment prior to discharging the waste water. If
disposal is to a sanitary sewer, the plan must include documentation
that the Waste Water Treatment Plant Operator has approved the flow
rate, volume, and type of discharge.
o. A historical, archaeological, cultural resources biological resources

and wetlands plan that defines procedures for identifying and
SECTION 01 57 20.00 10 Page 7

protecting historical, archaeological, cultural resources, biological

resources and wetlands known to be on the project site: and/or
identifies procedures to be followed if historical archaeological,
cultural resources, biological resources and wetlands not previously
known to be onsite or in the area are discovered during construction.
Include in the plan methods to assure the protection of known or
discovered resources, identifying lines of communication between
Contractor personnel and the Contracting Officer.
p. Include and update a pesticide treatment plan, as information becomes

available. Include in the plan: sequence of treatment, dates, times,
locations, pesticide trade name, EPA registration numbers, authorized
uses, chemical composition, formulation, original and applied
concentration, application rates of active ingredient (i.e. pounds of
active ingredient applied), equipment used for application and
calibration of equipment. Federal, State, Regional and Local pest
management record keeping and reporting requirements as well as any
additional Installation Project Office specific requirements are the
Contractor's responsibility in conformance with DA AR 200-1 Chapter
5--Pest Management, Section 5-4 "Program requirements" for data
required to be reported to the Installation.
1.7.3 Appendix
Attach to the Environmental Protection Plan, as an appendix, copies of all

environmental permits, permit application packages, approvals to construct,
notifications, certifications, reports, and termination documents.
1.8 PROTECTION FEATURES
This paragraph supplements the Contract Clause PROTECTION OF EXISTING

VEGETATION, STRUCTURES, EQUIPMENT, UTILITIES, AND IMPROVEMENTS. Prior to
start of any onsite construction activities, the Contractor and the
Contracting Officer will make a joint condition survey. Immediately
following the survey, the Contractor will prepare a brief report including
a plan describing the features requiring protection under the provisions of
the Contract Clauses, which are not specifically identified on the drawings
as environmental features requiring protection along with the condition of
trees, shrubs and grassed areas immediately adjacent to the site of work
and adjacent to the Contractor's assigned storage area and access route(s),
as applicable. This survey report will be signed by both the the
Contractor and the Contracting Officer upon mutual agreement as to its
accuracy and completeness. The Contractor must protect those environmental
features included in the survey report and any indicated on the drawings,
regardless of interference which their preservation may cause to the work
under the contract.
1.9 SPECIAL ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
Comply with the special environmental requirements listed here and

attached at the end of this section.
1.10 ENVIRONMENTAL ASSESSMENT OF CONTRACT DEVIATIONS
Any deviations from the drawings,plans and specifications, requested by the

Contractor and which may have an environmental impact, will be subject to
approval by the Contracting Officer and may require an extended review,
processing, and approval time. The Contracting Officer reserves the right
to disapprove alternate methods, even if they are more cost effective, if
SECTION 01 57 20.00 10 Page 8

the Contracting Officer determines that the proposed alternate method will
have an adverse environmental impact.
1.11 NOTIFICATION
The Contracting Officer will notify the Contractor in writing of any

observed noncompliance with Federal, State or local environmental laws or
regulations, permits, and other elements of the Contractor's Environmental
Protection plan. After receipt of such notice, the Contractor will inform
the Contracting Officer of the proposed corrective action and take such
action when approved by the Contracting Officer. The Contracting Officer
may issue an order stopping all or part of the work until satisfactory
corrective action has been taken. No time extensions will be granted or
equitable adjustments allowed for any such suspensions. This is in
addition to any other actions the Contracting Officer may take under the
contract, or in accordance with the Federal Acquisition Regulation or
Federal Law.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 ENVIRONMENTAL PERMITS AND COMMITMENTS
Obtaining and complying with all environmental permits and commitments

required by Federal, State, Regional, and local environmental laws and
regulations is the Contractor's responsibility.
3.2 LAND RESOURCES
Confine all activities to areas defined by the drawings and

specifications. Identify any land resources to be preserved within the
work area prior to the beginning of any construction. Do not remove, cut,
deface, injure, or destroy land resources including trees, shrubs, vines,
grasses, topsoil, and land forms without approval, except in areas
indicated on the drawings or specified to be cleared. Ropes, cables, or
guys will not be fastened to or attached to any trees for anchorage unless
specifically authorized. Provide effective protection for land and
vegetation resources at all times, as defined in the following
subparagraphs. Remove stone, soil, or other materials displaced into
uncleared areas.
3.2.1 Work Area Limits
Mark the areas that need not be disturbed under this contract prior to
commencing construction activities. Mark or fence isolated areas within
the general work area which are not to be disturbed. Protect monuments and
markers before construction operations commence. Where construction
operations are to be conducted during darkness, any markers must be visible
in the dark. The Contractor's personnel must be knowledgeable of the
purpose for marking and/or protecting particular objects.
3.2.2 Landscape
Trees, shrubs, vines, grasses, land forms and other landscape features
indicated and defined on the drawings to be preserved must be clearly
identified by marking, fencing, or wrapping with boards, or any other
SECTION 01 57 20.00 10 Page 9

approved techniques. Restore landscape features damaged or destroyed

during construction operations outside the limits of the approved work area.
3.2.3 Erosion and Sediment Controls
Providing erosion and sediment control measures in accordance with Federal,

State, and local laws and regulations is the Contractor's responsibility.
The erosion and sediment controls selected and maintained by the Contractor
shall be such that water quality standards are not violated as a result of
construction activities. The area of bare soil exposed at any one time by
construction operations should be kept to a minimum. Construct or install
temporary and permanent erosion and sediment control best management
practices (BMPs) as specified in Section 01 57 23 TEMPORARY STORM WATER
POLLUTION CONTROL. BMPs may include, but not be limited to, vegetation
cover, stream bank stabilization, slope stabilization, silt fences,
construction of terraces, interceptor channels, sediment traps, inlet and
outfall protection, diversion channels, and sedimentation basins. The
Contractor's best management practices must also be in accordance with the
lpdes National Pollutant Discharge, Elimination System (NPDES) Storm Water
Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) which may be reviewed at the Fort Polk DPW
Environmental Office and the existing LPDESIndustrial Storm Water Permit.
Remove any temporary measures after the area has been stabilized.
3.2.4 Contractor Facilities and Work Areas
Place field offices, staging areas, stockpile storage, and temporary

buildings in areas designated on the drawings or as directed by the
Contracting Officer. Temporary movement or relocation of Contractor
facilities will be made only when approved. Erosion and sediment controls
must be provided for onsite borrow and spoil areas to prevent sediment from
entering nearby waters. Temporary excavation and embankments for plant
and/or work areas must be controlled to protect adjacent areas.
3.2.5 Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan
The Contractor shall reference Section 01 57 24.03 44 STORM WATER POLLUTION

PREVENTION PLAN (LOUISIANA) for submittal requirements.
3.3 WATER RESOURCES
Monitor all water areas affected by construction activities to prevent

pollution of surface and ground waters. Do not apply toxic or hazardous
chemicals to soil or vegetation unless otherwise indicated. For
construction activities immediately adjacent to impaired surface waters,
the Contractor must be capable of quantifying sediment or pollutant loading
to that surface water when required by State or Federally issued Clean
Water Act permits.
3.4 AIR RESOURCES
Equipment operation, activities, or processes will be in accordance with

all Federal and State air emission and performance laws and standards.
3.4.1 Particulates
Dust particles; aerosols and gaseous by-products from construction

activities; and processing and preparation of materials, such as from
asphaltic batch plants; must be controlled at all times, including
weekends, holidays and hours when work is not in progress. Maintain
SECTION 01 57 20.00 10 Page 10

excavations, stockpiles, haul roads, permanent and temporary access roads,

plant sites, spoil areas, borrow areas, and other work areas within or
outside the project boundaries free from particulates which would cause the
Federal, State, and local air pollution standards to be exceeded or which
would cause a hazard or a nuisance. Sprinkling, chemical treatment of an
approved type, baghouse, scrubbers, electrostatic precipitators or other
methods will be permitted to control particulates in the work area.
Sprinkling, to be efficient, must be repeated to keep the disturbed area
damp at all times. Provide sufficient, competent equipment available to
accomplish these tasks. Perform particulate control as the work proceeds
and whenever a particulate nuisance or hazard occurs. Comply with all
State and local visibility regulations.
3.4.1.1 Dust Control
See Section 01 56 00.00 44 DUST CONTROL for additional requirements.
3.4.2 Odors
Odors from construction activities must be controlled at all times. The

odors must be in compliance with State regulations and/or local ordinances
and may not constitute a health hazard.
3.4.3 Sound Intrusions
Keep construction activities under surveillance and control to minimize

environment damage by noise. Comply with the provisions of the State of
Louisiana rules.
3.4.4 Burning
Burning is prohibited on the Government premises.
3.5 CHEMICAL MATERIALS MANAGEMENT AND WASTE DISPOSAL
Disposal of wastes will be as directed below, unless otherwise specified in

other sections and/or shown on the drawings.
3.5.1 Solid Wastes
Place solid wastes (excluding clearing debris) in containers which are

emptied on a regular schedule. Handling, storage, and disposal must be
conducted to prevent contamination. Employ segregation measures so that no
hazardous or toxic waste will become co-mingled with solid waste.
Transport solid waste off Government property and dispose of it in
compliance with Federal, State, and local requirements for solid waste
disposal. A Subtitle D RCRA permitted landfill will be the minimum
acceptable offsite solid waste disposal option. Verify that the selected
transporters and disposal facilities have the necessary permits and
licenses to operate. Comply with Federal, State, and local laws and
regulations pertaining to the use of landfill areas.
3.5.2 Chemicals and Chemical Wastes
Dispense chemicals ensuring no spillage to the ground or water. Perform

and document periodic inspections of dispensing areas to identify leakage
and initiate corrective action. This documentation will be periodically
reviewed by the Government. Collect chemical waste in corrosion resistant,
compatible containers. Collection drums must be monitored and removed to a
SECTION 01 57 20.00 10 Page 11

staging or storage area when contents are within 6 inches of the top.
Wastes will be classified, managed, stored, and disposed of in accordance
with Federal, State, and local laws and regulations.
3.5.3 Contractor Generated Hazardous Wastes/Excess Hazardous Materials
Hazardous wastes are defined in 40 CFR 261, or are as defined by applicable

State and local regulations. Hazardous materials are defined in
49 CFR 171 - 178. At a minimum, manage and store hazardous waste in
compliance with 40 CFR 262 in accordance with the Installation hazardous
waste management plan. Take sufficient measures to prevent spillage of
hazardous and toxic materials during dispensing. Segregate hazardous waste
from other materials and wastes, protect it from the weather by placing it
in a safe covered location, and take precautionary measures such as berming
or other appropriate measures against accidental spillage. Storage,
describing, packaging, labeling, marking, and placarding of hazardous waste
and hazardous material in accordance with 49 CFR 171 - 178, State, and
local laws and regulations is the Contractor's responsibility. Transport
Contractor generated hazardous waste off Government property within 60days
in accordance with the Environmental Protection Agency and the Department
of Transportation laws and regulations. Dispose of hazardous waste in
compliance with Federal, State and local laws and regulations. Spills of
hazardous or toxic materials must be immediately reported to the
Contracting Officer and the Facility Environmental Office. Cleanup and
cleanup costs due to spills are the Contractor's responsibility. The
disposition of Contractor generated hazardous waste and excess hazardous
materials are the Contractor's responsibility. Coordinate the disposition
of hazardous waste with the Facility'sProject Office's Hazardous Waste
Manager and the Contracting Officer.
3.5.4 Fuel and Lubricants
Storage, fueling and lubrication of equipment and motor vehicles must be

conducted in a manner that affords the maximum protection against spill and
evaporation. Manage and store fuel, lubricants and oil in accordance with
all Federal, State, Regional, and local laws and regulations. Used
lubricants and used oil to be discarded must be stored in marked
corrosion-resistant containers and recycled or disposed in accordance with
40 CFR 279, State, and local laws and regulations. Storage of fuel on the
project site will be in accordance with all Federal, State, and local laws
and regulations. If fuel storage tank is on-site, the Contractor shall
obtain approval of the installation environmental office, applicable
permit from the regulatory agency, and the fuel storage area shall be in
compliance with paragraph Best Managment Practices, SECTION 01 57 24.03 44
STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN. The fueling area shall have storm
water pollution prevention control and provisions for emergency clean-up.
3.5.5 Waste Water
Disposal of waste water will be as specified below.
a. Waste water from construction activities, such as onsite material

processing, concrete curing, foundation and concrete clean-up,
water used in concrete trucks, forms, etc. will not be allowed to
enter water ways or to be discharged prior to being treated to
remove pollutants. Dispose of the construction related waste
water off-Government property in accordance with all Federal,
State, Regional and Local laws and regulations.
SECTION 01 57 20.00 10 Page 12

b. For discharge of ground water, the Contractor will surface

discharge in accordance with all Federal, State, and local laws
and regulations.
c. Water generated from the flushing of lines after disinfection or

disinfection in conjunction with hydrostatic testing will be land
applied in accordance with all Federal, State, and local laws and
regulations for land application.
3.6 RECYCLING AND WASTE MINIMIZATION
Participate in State and local government sponsored recycling programs.

The Contractor is further encouraged to minimize solid waste generation
throughout the duration of the project.
3.7 NON-HAZARDOUS SOLID WASTE DIVERSION REPORT
Maintain an inventory of non-hazardous solid waste diversion and disposal

of construction and demolition debris. Submit a report to the Contracting
Officer on the first working day after each fiscal year quarter, starting
the first quarter that non-hazardous solid waste has been generated.
Include the following in the report:
a. Construction and Demolition (C&D) Debris Disposed = _____ in cubic

yards or tons, as appropriate.
b. Construction and Demolition (C&D) Debris Recycled = _____ in cubic

yards or tons, as appropriate.
c. Total C&D Debris Generated = _____ in cubic yards or tons, as

appropriate.
3.8 HISTORICAL, ARCHAEOLOGICAL, AND CULTURAL RESOURCES
If during excavation or other construction activities any previously

unidentified or unanticipated historical, archaeological, and cultural
resources are discovered or found, all activities that may damage or alter
such resources will be temporarily suspended. Resources covered by this
paragraph include but are not limited to: any human skeletal remains or
burials; artifacts; shell, midden, bone, charcoal, or other deposits; rock
or coral alignments, pavings, wall, or other constructed features; and any
indication of agricultural or other human activities. Upon such discovery
or find, immediately notify the Contracting Officer so that the appropriate
authorities may be notified and a determination made as to their
significance and what, if any, special disposition of the finds should be
made. Cease all activities that may result in impact to or the destruction
of these resources. Secure the area and prevent employees or other persons
from trespassing on, removing, or otherwise disturbing such resources.
3.9 BIOLOGICAL RESOURCES
Minimize interference with, disturbance to, and damage to fish, wildlife,

and plants including their habitat. The protection of threatened and
endangered animal and plant species, including their habitat, is the
Contractor's responsibility in accordance with Federal, State, Regional,
and local laws and regulations.
SECTION 01 57 20.00 10 Page 13

3.10 INTEGRATED PEST MANAGEMENT
In order to minimize impacts to existing fauna and flora, the Contractor

through the Contracting Officer, must coordinate with the Installation Pest
Management Coordinator (IPMC) Project Pesticide Coordinator (PPC)at the
earliest possible time prior to pesticide application. Discuss integrated
pest management strategies with the IPMC or PPC and receive concurrence
from the IPMCorPPC through the COR prior to the application of any
pesticide associated with these specifications. Installation Project
Office Pest Management personnel will be given the opportunity to be
present at all meetings concerning treatment measures for pest or disease
control and during application of the pesticide. For termiticide
requirements see Section 31 31 16 SOIL TREATMENT FOR SUBTERRANEAN TERMITE
CONTROL. The use and management of pesticides are regulated under
40 CFR 150 - 189.
3.10.1 Pesticide Delivery and Storage
Deliver pesticides to the site in the original, unopened containers bearing

legible labels indicating the EPA registration number and the
manufacturer's registered uses. Store pesticides according to
manufacturer's instructions and under lock and key when unattended.
For the application of pesticides, use the services of a subcontractor

whose principal business is pest control. The subcontractor must be
licensed and certified in the state where the work is to be performed.
3.10.3 Pesticide Handling Requirements
Formulate, treat with, and dispose of pesticides and associated containers

in accordance with label directions and use the clothing and personal
protective equipment specified on the labeling for use during all phases of
the application. Furnish Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for all
pesticide products.
3.10.4 Application
Apply pesticides using a State Certified Pesticide Applicator in accordance

with EPA label restrictions and recommendation. The Certified Applicator
must wear clothing and personal protective equipment as specified on the
pesticide label. The Contracting Officer will designate locations for
water used in formulating. Do not allow the equipment to overflow. All
equipment must be inspected for leaks, clogging, wear, or damage and
repaired prior to application of pesticide.
3.11 PREVIOUSLY USED EQUIPMENT
Clean all previously used construction equipment prior to bringing it onto

the project site. Ensure that the equipment is free from soil residuals,
egg deposits from plant pests, noxious weeds, and plant seeds. Consult
with the USDA jurisdictional office for additional cleaning requirements.
3.12 MAINTENANCE OF POLLUTION FACILITIES
Maintain permanent and temporary pollution control facilities and devices

for the duration of the contract or for that length of time construction
activities create the particular pollutant.
SECTION 01 57 20.00 10 Page 14

3.12.1 Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan
For construction sites covered by a General Construction Permit for Storm

Water Discharges, the Contractor's quality control organization shall
inspect pollution control structures and activities in accordance with the
applicable Storm Water Construction General Permit and Section
01 57 24.03 44 STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN until final
stabilization is achieved. A sample Inspection Report form is included in
Section 01 57 25.00 44 SWPP PLAN INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE REPORT FORM.
An inspection report for each inspection shall be retained on site by the
Contractor. In
SECTION 01 57 20.00 10 Page 15

addition, the Contractor shall furnish a copy of each report to the

3.13 MILITARY MUNITIONS
In the event military munitions, as defined in 40 CFR 260, are discovered

or uncovered, the Contractor will immediately stop work in that area and
immediately inform the Contracting Officer.
3.14 TRAINING OF CONTRACTOR PERSONNEL
The Contractor's personnel must be trained in all phases of environmental

protection and pollution control. Conduct environmental
protection/pollution control meetings for all personnel prior to commencing
construction activities. Additional meetings must be conducted for new
personnel and when site conditions change. Include in the training and
meeting agenda: methods of detecting and avoiding pollution;
familiarization with statutory and contractual pollution standards;
installation and care of devices, vegetative covers, and instruments
required for monitoring purposes to ensure adequate and continuous
environmental protection/pollution control; anticipated hazardous or toxic
chemicals or wastes, and other regulated contaminants; recognition and
protection of archaeological sites, artifacts, wetlands, and endangered
species and their habitat that are known to be in the area.
3.15 CONTAMINATED MEDIA MANAGEMENT
If contamination is the result of negligence of the Contractor during

execution of the work in accordance with Section 02 84 14.00 10 ASBESTOS
HAZARD CONTROL ACTIVITIES, Section 02 82 13.00 20 LEAD IN CONSTRUCTION,
and/or Section 02 84 00.00 44 REMOVAL, RECYCLING AND DISPOSAL OF REGULATED
MATERIAL, clean up, notify, keep records, and report in accordance with
applicable Federal and state regulations and to the satisfaction of the
3.16 POST CONSTRUCTION CLEANUP
The Contractor will clean up all areas used for construction in accordance
with Contract Clause: "Cleaning Up". Unless otherwise instructed in
writing by the Contracting Officer, obliterate all signs of temporary
construction facilities such as haul roads, work area, structures,
foundations of temporary structures, stockpiles of excess or waste
materials, and other vestiges of construction prior to final acceptance of
the work. The disturbed area must be graded, filled and the entire area
seeded unless otherwise indicated.
3.17 HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCE REPORTING
Comply with the requirements of Sections 301 through 312 of the Emergency
Planning and Community Right-to-Know Act (EPCRA), also known as Superfund
Amendments and Reauthorization Act (SARA) Title III, as published in 40 CFR
Part 355, and with all state regulations and procedures which result from
EPCRA and the hazard communication program requirements of EM 385-1-1.
The following planning and reporting requirements involve the Contractor's
reporting requirements but are not all inclusive; i.e. transport
regulations are not addressed. It is the Contractor's responsibility to
comply with all Federal, state, and local emergency planning and reporting
SECTION 01 57 20.00 10 Page 16

requirements.
3.17.1 Definitions and Acronyms
3.17.1.1 CERCLA Hazardous Substance (CHS)
A CERCLA Hazardous Substance (CHS) is any substance listed in Section

101(14) of the Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation, and
Liability Act, also referred to as Superfund; the list of substances also
appears in Table 302.4 of 40 CFR 302.
3.17.1.2 Contracting Officer (CO)
For purposes of the Emergency Planning and Community Right-to-Know Act

(EPCRA), the Contracting Officer (CO) will be considered the site owner or
operator's construction representative.
3.17.1.3 Extremely Hazardous Substance (EHS)
An Extremely Hazardous Substance (EHS) is any substance listed in

Appendices A and B of 40 CFR 355.
3.17.1.4 Facility Emergency Coordinator (FEC)
Facility Emergency Coordinator (FEC) is the representative of the facility

Owner or Operator. The Contractor shall identify the FEC and notify the
FEC as described below each time the Contractor brings a hazardous
substance onto the construction site.
3.17.1.5 Hazardous Chemical Substance (HCS)
A Hazardous Chemical Substance (HCS) is any substance defined as hazardous

under 29 CFR 1910.1200, with exceptions as listed in 40 CFR 370.2;
generally any substance with a Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS).
3.17.1.6 Reportable Quantity (RQ)
Reportable Quantity (RQ) is a specified minimum amount of a CHS or an EHS

which, if released, must be reported immediately to the FEC. The RQ for a
CHS is listed in Table 302.4 of 40 CFR 302; the RQ for an EHS is 0.45 kg (1
pound).
3.17.1.7 Threshold Planning Quantity (TPQ)
Threshold Planning Quantity (TPQ) is a specified minimum amount of an EHS

which, if brought onto the construction site, must be reported within a
stated time to the FEC. The TPQ for an EHS is listed in Appendices A and B
of 40 CFR 355 or is the quantity published in state code, whichever is less.
3.17.1.8 Threshold Quantity (TQ)
Threshold Quantity (TQ) is the quantity listed as the Threshold Inventory

Quantity for hazardous substances in Title 33 of the Louisiana
Administrative Code, Part V, Subpart 2, Chapter 101.
3.17.2 Hazardous Substance Reporting
Whenever a HCS or an EHS substance is brought onto the construction site,

the Contractor shall submit the attached reporting form to the FEC, the
SECTION 01 57 20.00 10 Page 17

fire department with jurisdiction over the site, and the Contracting
Officer as described below:
a. within 5 days for an EHS substance which (1) equals or exceeds

its TPQ, or (2) is a solid or liquid weighing 225 kg (500 pounds) or more,
whichever is less, or
b. within 10 days for a HCS substance which equals or less than 500
pounds or the state level, whichever is less.
3.17.3 Emergency Release Notification for Listed Hazardous Substances
The Contractor shall immediately notify the FEC and the Contracting Officer
if there is a release of an EHS or a CHS substance whose quantity equals or
exceeds its RQ.
Notification is also required if the following substances are released into

the environment:
a. 5,000 pounds or more of any dry solid substance which is an HCS

but not an EHS or a CHS,
b. 100 pounds or more of compressed inflammable gas or an

inflammable liquid which is an HCS, or
c. 500 pounds or more of any other liquid which is an HCS but not
an EHS or CHS.
3.17.3.1 Emergency Notification Information
Emergency notifications shall consist of the following information:
a. The Contractor's name, the name and telephone number of the

person making the report, and the name and telephone number of the
Contractor's contact person;
b. The chemical name and identification;
c. An estimate of the quantity released;
d. The location of the release;
e. The time and duration of the release;
f. The medium receiving the release (air, land, water);
g. Known acute or chronic health risks;
h. Medical advice when necessary; and
i. Recommended community precautions.
3.17.3.2 Follow-Up Notice
Within 5 days of the release, a written follow-up notice of the release

shall be provided to the FEC and the Contracting Officer. The written
notice shall update information provided in the initial report, provide
detailed information on the response actions taken, and provide advice
regarding medical attention necessary for exposed individuals.
SECTION 01 57 20.00 10 Page 18

3.17.3.3 State EPCRA Agency
The Contractor may call the following agency for information about EPCRA
requirements:
Louisiana Department of Public Safety

Transportation Emergency Safety Unit
P.O. Box 66614
Baton Rouge, Louisiana 70896-6614
Telephone Number: 504-925-6113
3.18 FORMS
The EMERGENCY PLANNING COMMUNITY RIGHT TO KNOW NOTIFICATION form is

attached to the end of this Section.
SECTION 01 57 20.00 10 Page 19

State of
EMERGENCY PLANNING COMMUNITY RIGHT TO KNOW

NOTIFICATION FORM
Date
This is a notification that the facility named below stores or has stored a Hazardous Chemical
Substance (HCS) or an Extremely Hazardous Substance (EHS) as listed in Section 302(c), Title III of
SARA - Emergency Planning and Community Right-to-Know Act of 1986.
INSTRUCTIONS: Print or type all information, except signature.
Name of Construction Facility Storage Location of HS/EHS
Address Facility Emergency Coordinator
City State Zip Code Telephone Number
Name and Company of Person Signature of Person Completing Form

Completing Form
CHEMICAL DESCRIPTION CHEMICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Description Hazard
Product Name
[ ] Pure [ ] Fire
Chemical Name(s)
[ ] Mixture [ ] Pressure
CAS Number(s)
[ ] Solid [ ] Reactivity
Maximum Quantity On-Site
[ ] Liquid [ ] Acute
Average Daily Quantity On Site
[ ] Gas [ ] Chronic
FOR EHS or CHS TYPE OF HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCE
[ ] EHS [ ] CHS
Threshold Planning Quantity
Reportable Quantity
SECTION 01 57 23
TEMPORARY STORM WATER POLLUTION CONTROL
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

ASTM D 4439 (2004) Geosynthetics
ASTM D 4491 (1999a; R 2004e1) Water Permeability of

Geotextiles by Permittivity
ASTM D 4533 (2004) Trapezoid Tearing Strength of

Geotextiles
ASTM D 4632 (2008) Grab Breaking Load and Elongation

of Geotextiles
ASTM D 4751 (2004) Determining Apparent Opening Size

of a Geotextile
ASTM D 4873 (2002) Identification, Storage, and

Handling of Geosynthetic Rolls and Samples
EPA 832-R-92-005 (1992) Storm Water Management for

Construction Activities Developing
Pollution Preventions and Plans and Best
Management Practices
40 CFR 122.26 Storm Water Discharges (Applicable to

State NPDES Programs, see section 123.25)
The work consists of implementing the storm water pollution prevention

measures to prevent sediment from entering streams or water bodies as
specified in this Section in conformance with the requirements of Section
01 57 20.00 10 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION, Section 01 57 24.01 44 STORM WATER
POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN, and the requirements of the National Pollution
Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) permit or applicable state Pollution
Discharge Elimination System.
1.3 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROLS
1.3.1 Stabilization Practices
The stabilization practices to be implemented include temporary seeding,

mulching, geotextiles, sod stabilization, vegetative buffer strips, erosion
control matts, protection of trees, preservation of mature vegetation, etc.
On the daily CQC Report, record the dates when the major grading activities
occur, (e.g., clearing and grubbing, excavation, embankment, and grading);
when construction activities temporarily or permanently cease on a portion
of the site; and when stabilization practices are initiated.
1.3.1.1 Unsuitable Conditions
Where the initiation of stabilization measures by the fourteenth day after

construction activity permanently ceases or is precluded by unsuitable
conditions caused by the weather, initiate stabilization practices as soon
as practicable after conditions become suitable.
1.3.1.2 Burnoff
Burnoff of the ground cover is not permitted.
1.3.1.3 Protection of Erodible Soils
Immediately finish the earthwork brought to a final grade, as indicated or

specified, and protect the side slopes and back slopes upon completion of
rough grading. Plan and conduct earthwork to minimize the duration of
exposure of unprotected soils.
1.3.2 Erosion, Sediment and Stormwater Control
a. Used
b. Not Used
c. Not Used
d. Storm Water Notice of Intent for Construction Activities
e. Submit a Storm Water Notice of Intent for NPDES coverage under the
general permit for construction activities and a Storm Water Pollution
Prevention Plan (SWPPP) for the project to the Contracting Officer
prior to the commencement of work. The SWPPP shall meet the
requirements of the State of Texas general permit for storm water
discharges from construction sites. Submit the SWPPP along with any
required Notice of Intents, Notice of Termination, and appropriate
permit fees, via the Contracting Officer, to the appropriate Texas
Commission of Environmental Quality (TCEQ) agency for approval, while
meeting the required waiting periods for document submission and land
disturbance commencement. Maintain an approved copy of the SWPPP at
the construction on-site office, and continually update as regulations
require, to reflect current site conditions. Include within the SWPPP:
(1) Identify potential sources of pollution which may be

reasonably expected to affect the quality of storm water discharge
from the site.
(2) Describe and ensure implementation of practices which will be

used to reduce the pollutants in storm water discharge from the
site.
(3) Ensure compliance with terms of the State of Texas general

permit for storm water discharge.
(4) Select applicable best management practices from EPA

832-R-92-005.
(5) Include a completed copy of the Registration Statement, BMP

Inspection Report Template and Notice of Termination except for
the effective date.
(6) Storm Water Pollution Prevention Measures and Notice of

Intent 40 CFR 122.26, EPA 832-R-92-005. Provide a "Storm Water
Pollution Prevention Plan" (SWPPP) for the project. The SWPPP
will meet the requirements of the State of Texas general permit
for storm water discharges from construction sites. Submit the
SWPPP along with any required Notice of Intents, Notice of
Termination, and appropriate permit fees, via the Contracting
Officer, to the TCEQ for approval,prior to the start of
construction while adhering to the ermit required waiting
periods. A copy of the approved SWPPP will be kept at the
construction on-site office, and continually updated as
regulations require to reflect current site conditions.
(8) Following SWPPP approval, submit Registration Statement and

appropriate permit fees to the Virginia Department of Conservation
and Recreation (DCR) before any land disturbing activities begin.
Coverage under the permit begins on the day the Registration
Statement and fee are: (1) post marked by mail, (2) registered
online at the DCR's website, or (3) hand delivered to the DCR
office. The Contractor is responsible for all associated fees;
contact DCR to determine applicable fees.
(9) Install, inspect, and maintain best management practices

(BMPs) as required by the general permit. Prepare and submit to
DCR, BMP Inspection Reports as required by the general permit.
(10) Once construction is complete and the site has been

stabilized with a final, sustainable cover, submit the Notice of
Termination to DCR within 30 days after all land disturbing
activities end.
(11) At the time of submittal to DCR, concurrently forward copies

of the SWPPP, Registration Statement, BMP Inspection Reports, and
Notice of Termination to the Contracting Officer, and to
Mid-Atlantic Environmental at: Commander, Naval Facilities
Engineering Command, MIDLANT, Code: EV2, 9742 Maryland Avenue,
Norfolk, VA 23511-3095.
(12) Information on the permit application, SWPPP requirements,

Registration Statement, BMP Inspection Reports, and Notice of
Termination can be found in the Virginia Permit Regulation 9 VAC
25-180. The Registration Statement, Notice of Termination, and
permit fee forms can be found on the DCR website
http://www.dcr.state.va.us/sw/vsmp.htm. This website also
contains the permit regulations and information on how to obtain

coverage online.
(13) Once construction is complete and the site has been

stabilized with a final, sustainable cover, submit the Notice of
Termination to DCR within 30 days after all land disturbing
activities end.
1.3.3 Stormwater Drainage
There will be no discharge of excavation ground water to the sanitary

sewer, storm drains, or to the river without prior specific authorization
of the Environmental Programs Division in writing. Discharge of hazardous
substances will not be permitted under any circumstances. Construction
site runoff will be prevented from entering any storm drain or the river
directly by the use of straw bales or other method suitable to the
Environmental Programs Division of the Shipyard. Provide erosion
protection of the surrounding soils.
1.3.4 Structural Practices
Implement structural practices to divert flows from exposed soils,

temporarily store flows, or otherwise limit runoff and the discharge of
pollutants from exposed areas of the site. Implement structural practices
in a timely manner, during the construction process, to minimize erosion
and sediment runoff. Include the following devices;
1.3.4.1 Silt Fences
Provide silt fences as a temporary structural practice to minimize erosion

and sediment runoff. Properly install silt fences to effectively retain
sediment immediately after completing each phase of work where erosion
would occur in the form of sheet and rill erosion (e.g. clearing and
grubbing, excavation, embankment, and grading). Install silt fences in the
locations and show on the SWPPP drawings. Final removal of silt fence
barriers shall be after establishment of final stabilization. Obtain
approval from the Contracting Officer prior to final removal of silt fence
barriers.
1.3.5 Sediment Basins
Trap sediment in temporary sediment basins. Select a basin size to

accommodate the runoff of a local 10-year storm. Pump dry and remove the
accumulated sediment, after each storm. Use a paved weir or vertical
overflow pipe for overflow. Remove collected sediment from the site.
Institute effluent quality monitoring programs. Install, inspect, and
maintain best management practices (BMPs) as required by the general
permit. Prepare BMP Inspection Reports as required by the general permit.
If required by the permit, include those inspection reports.
1.3.6 Vegetation and Mulch
a. Provide temporary protection on sides and back slopes as soon as

rough grading is completed or sufficient soil is exposed to require
erosion protection. Protect slopes by accelerated growth of permanent
vegetation, temporary vegetation, mulching, or netting. Stabilize
slopes by hydroseeding, anchoring mulch in place, covering with
anchored netting, sodding, or such combination of these and other
methods necessary for effective erosion control.
b. Seeding: Provide new seeding where ground is disturbed. Include

topsoil or nutriment during the seeding operation necessary to establish
a suitable stand of grass. The seeding operation will be as specified
in Section 32 92 19.00 44 SEEDING.
1.4 SUBMITTALS

Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan

Storm Water Notice of Intent
Pollution prevention plan and Notice of intent for NPDES

coverage under the general permit for construction activities
SD-06 Test Reports
Storm Water Inspection Reports for General Permit

Erosion and Sediment Controls
SD-07 Certificates
Mill Certificate or Affidavit
Certificate attesting that the Contractor has met all specified

requirements.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Identify, store and handle filter fabric in accordance with ASTM D 4873.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 COMPONENTS FOR SILT FENCES
2.1.1 Filter Fabric
Provide geotextile that complies with the requirements of ASTM D 4439, and
consists of polymeric filaments which are formed into a stable network such
that filaments retain their relative positions. The filament shall consist
of a long-chain synthetic polymer composed of at least 85 percent by weight
of ester, propylene, or amide, and contains stabilizers and/or inhibitors
added to the base plastic to make the filaments resistent to deterioration
due to ultraviolet and heat exposure. Provide synthetic filter fabric that
contains ultraviolet ray inhibitors and stabilizers to assure a minimum of
six months of expected usable construction life at a temperature range of 0
to 120 degrees F. The filter fabric shall meet the following requirements:
FILTER FABRIC FOR SILT SCREEN FENCE
PHYSICAL PROPERTY TEST PROCEDURE STRENGTH REQUIREMENT
Grab Tensile ASTM D 4632 100 lbs. min.

Elongation (percent) 30 percent max.
Trapezoid Tear ASTM D 4533 55 lbs. min.
Permittivity ASTM D 4491 0.2 sec-1
AOS (U.S. Std Sieve) ASTM D 4751 20-100
2.1.2 Silt Fence Stakes and Posts
Use either wooden stakes or steel posts for fence construction. Wooden
stakes utilized for silt fence construction, shall have a minimum cross
section of 2 by 2 inches when oak is used and 4 by 4 inches when pine is
used, and have a minimum length of 5 feet. Steel posts (standard "U" or
"T" section) utilized for silt fence construction, shall have a minimum
weight of 1.33 pounds/linear foot and a minimum length of 5 feet.
2.1.3 Mill Certificate or Affidavit
Provide a mill certificate or affidavit attesting that the fabric and

factory seams meet chemical, physical, and manufacturing requirements
specified above. Specify in the mill certificate or affidavit the actual
Minimum Average Roll Values and identify the fabric supplied by roll
identification numbers. Submit a mill certificate or affidavit signed by a
legally authorized official from the company manufacturing the filter
fabric.
2.2 COMPONENTS FOR STRAW BALES
The straw in the bales shall be stalks from oats, wheat, rye, barley, rice,
or from grasses such as byhalia, bermuda, etc., furnished in air dry
condition. Provide bales with a standard cross section of 14 by 18 inches.
Wire-bound or string-tie all bales. Use either wooden stakes or steel
posts to secure the straw bales to the ground. Wooden stakes utilized for
this purpose, shall have a minimum dimensions of 2 by 2 inches in cross
section and have a minimum length of 3 feet. Steel posts (standard "U" or
"T" section) utilized for securing straw bales, shall have a minimum weight
of 1.33 pounds/linear foot and a minimum length of 3 feet.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION OF SILT FENCES
Extend silt fences a minimum of 16 inches above the ground surface without
exceeding 34 inches above the ground surface. Provide filter fabric from a
continuous roll cut to the length of the barrier to avoid the use of
joints. When joints are unavoidable, splice together filter fabric at a
support post, with a minimum 6 inch overlap, and securely sealed. Excavate
trench approximately 4 inches wide and 4 inches deep on the upslope side of
the location of the silt fence. The 4 by 4 inch trench shall be backfilled
and the soil compacted over the filter fabric. Remove silt fences upon
approval by the Contracting Officer.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF STRAW BALES
Place the straw bales in a single row, lengthwise on the contour, with ends
of adjacent bales tightly abutting one another. Install straw bales so
that bindings are oriented around the sides rather than along the tops and
bottoms of the bales in order to prevent deterioration of the bindings.

Entrench and backfill the barrier. Excavate a trench the width of a bale
and the length of the proposed barrier to a minimum depth of 4 inches.
After the bales are staked and chinked (gaps filled by wedging with straw),
backfill the excavated soil against the barrier. Conform the backfill soil
with the ground level on the downhill side and build up to 4 inches against
the uphill side of the barrier. Scatter loose straw over the area
immediately uphill from a straw bale barrier to increase barrier
efficiency. Securely anchor each bale by at least two stakes driven
through the bale. Drive the first stake or steel post in each bale toward
the previously laid bale to force the bales together. Drive stakes or
steel pickets a minimum 18 inches deep into the ground to securely anchor
the bales.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Maintain the temporary and permanent vegetation, erosion and sediment

control measures, and other protective measures in good and effective
operating condition by performing routine inspections to determine
condition and effectiveness, by restoration of destroyed vegetative cover,
and by repair of erosion and sediment control measures and other protective
measures. Use the following procedures to maintain the protective measures.
3.3.1 Silt Fence Maintenance
Inspect the silt fences in accordance with paragraph, titled "Inspections,"

of this section. Any required repairs shall be made promptly. Pay close
attention to the repair of damaged silt fence resulting from end runs and
undercutting. Should the fabric on a silt fence decompose or become
ineffective, and the barrier is still necessary, replace the fabric
promptly. Remove sediment deposits when deposits reach one-third of the
height of the barrier. Remove a silt fence when it is no longer required.
The immediate area occupied by the fence and any sediment deposits shall be
shaped to an acceptable grade. The areas disturbed by this shaping shall
receive erosion control .
3.3.2 Straw Bale Maintenance
Inspect straw bale barriers in accordance with paragraph, titled

"Inspections". Pay close attention to the repair of damaged bales, end
runs and undercutting beneath bales. Accomplish necessary repairs to
barriers or replacement of bales in a promptly manner. Remove sediment
deposits when deposits reach one-half of the height of the barrier. At the
each end of each row turn bales uphill when used to retain sediment.
Remove a straw bale barrier when it is no longer required. The immediate
area occupied by the bales and any sediment deposits shall be shaped to an
acceptable grade. Seed the areas disturbed by this shaping in accordance
with UFGS Guide Specification 32 92 19 SEEDING.
3.3.3 Diversion Dike Maintenance
Inspect diversion dikes in accordance with paragraph, titled "Inspections,"

of this section. Pay close attention to the repair of damaged diversion
dikes and accomplish necessary repairs promptly. When diversion dikes are
no longer required, shape to an acceptable grade. Seed the areas disturbed
by this shaping in accordance with UFGS Guide Specification 32 92 19
SEEDING.
3.4 INSPECTIONS
3.4.1 General
Inspect disturbed areas of the construction site, areas that have not been
finally stabilized used for storage of materials exposed to precipitation,
stabilization practices, structural practices, other controls, and area
where vehicles exit the site.
3.4.2 Inspections Details
Inspect disturbed areas and areas used for material storage that are
exposed to precipitation for evidence of, or the potential for, pollutants
entering the drainage system. Observe erosion and sediment control
measures to ensure that they are operating correctly. Inspect discharge
locations or points to ascertain whether erosion control measures are
effective in preventing significant impacts to receiving waters. Inspect
locations where vehicles exit the site for evidence of offsite sediment
tracking.
3.4.3 Inspection Reports
For each inspection conducted, prepare a report summarizing the scope of

the inspection, name(s) and qualifications of personnel making the
inspection, the date(s) of the inspection, and all other requirements
specified in the applicable Construction Storm Water General Permit.
Furnish the report to the Contracting Officer within 24 hours of the
inspection as a part of the Contractor's daily CQC REPORT. A copy of the
inspection report shall be maintained on the job site.
3.4.4 Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) Revisions
In compliance with TPDES General Permit TXR 150000 and Section

01 57 24.01 44 STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN, the Contractor is
responsible to revise Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan including the
erosion control drawings. The current locations of storm control
structures and types shall be depicted on the drawing portion of the
on-site SWPPP for regulatory inspection and SWPPP revision record.
SECTION 01 57 24.03 44
STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN (Louisiana)
PART 1 GENERAL
NOTES FOR DESIGNER OF DESIGN-BID BUILD CONTRACTOR: Edit this section to

provide guideline for Storm Water Pollution Prevention requirements for
design-bid-build project that has total disturbed area of one (1) or
more acre. The edited section will direct construction contractor to
submit a pre-construction and operation specific SWPPP.
NOTES FOR DESIGNER OF DESIGN-BUILD CONTRACTOR: Prepare pre-construction

operation specific SWPPP to be implemented at the job site by a
designated and qualified representative.
1.1 REFERENCES

extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by basic
designation only.
U.S. ARMY REGULATIONS (AR)
AR 200-1 (13 Dec 2007) Environmental Analysis of

Army Actions
CODE OF FEDERAL REGULATIONS (CFR)
32 CFR 651 National Defense: Environmental Analysis

of Army Actions
40 CFR 110 Protection of Environment: Subchapter

D--WATER PROGRAMS, Discharge of Oil
40 CFR 112 Oil Pollution Prevention
1.2 SUBMITTALS

that will review the submittal for the Government. When providing a
resubmittal to address USACE review comments, the Contractor shall include
annotated comment responses along with the resubmitted SWPPP (in its
SECTION 01 57 24.03 44 Page 1

entirety). The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section

01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP or SWP3);G
The construction Contractor site specific SWPPP shall prevent

erosion, sediment loss from the construction site, and erosion
down gradient of the developed property. To the maximum extent
possible, the SWPPP shall (a) limit the area of disturbance to
minimize soil loss and prevent the discharge of water quality
impaired water from the construction site and (b) incorporate
staged stabilization measures as work progresses throughout the
duration of the project. The Contractor shall use the current
forms (e.g., NOI, NOT, NOC, etc.) required by the LPDES General
Permit for Stormwater Discharges From Construction Activities.
Additionally, the Contractor shall maintain compliance with the
Construction General Permit at all times (even when the
Construction General Permit is revised by the issuing agency).
The following summarizes some of the requirements that need to be

implemented into the SWPPP as required by the LPDES General Permit.
(1) The SWPPP shall comprise of three (3) major parts:

(a) narrative,
(b) drawings depicting structural and non-structural best
management practices (BMPs), and
(c) permit required documentation (attachments and worksheets) for
record-keeping.
(2) The Contractor site specific SWPPP shall consider the phasing
of project tasks with the timing of BMPs and construction
activities. Additionally, the Contractor site specific SWPPP shall
consider the diversion of storm water run-on onto the disturbed
portions of the project site, including limiting the area of
exposed soil, and retention of sediments from escaping the exposed
portion of the site.
(3) The contract drawings depict recommended or suggested BMP

types and locations. Any additional BMPs or modifications to the
BMPs throughout the project need to be depicted on the drawings
included in the SWPPP as well as the text within the SWPPP.
(4) During construction (after USACE approval of construction

operation SWPPP), SWPPP or BMP revision is required when site
conditions change and when situations arise that may cause
potential permit non-compliance. The SWPPP or BMP revision shall
be initiated when requested by the Area Office Contracting Officer
(AOCO)or as deemed necessary following an inspection conducted by
the Contractor designated inspector.
SECTION 01 57 24.03 44 Page 2

(5) The NOI (when required by the applicable LPDES general permit)
shall be separately submitted to all required parties by the
construction Contractor and the USACE as co-operators of the
construction site.
(6) The Contractor shall sign the Certification of SWPPP, the

delegation letter of signatory authorization, the NOI, and the
Notice of Termination (NOT) as required by the LPDES General
Permit.
(7) The SWPPP must contain a list of regulated materials and

construction materials and products, their location, and methods
of containment for each product.
(8) The SWPPP must contain a list of wastes, their location, and
method of containment.
(9) The SWPPP shall implement procedures that prevent post

construction erosion from occurring. Some examples include the use
of Scour Stop or equal as velocity dissipators or the placement of
composite fiber turf reinforcement mats at down gradient channels.
(10) The following shall be depicted in the SWPPP drawings.
(a) Location of batch plant (if applicable) and drainage features
The following summarizes some of what is needed to be implemented

into the SWPPP as required by the USACE.
(1) The SWPPP drawings shall be prepared on site grading plans.

The drawings shall include four phases or stages of Best
Management Practices (BMP) structures layout:
(a) initial BMP layout at site prior to clearing and grubbing,
(b) interim BMP layout during grading activities,
(c) temporary stabilization method and locations, and
(d) final stabilization method and locations of application.
Notes on timing controls and activities shall be described on the

SWPPP drawings.
(2) The SWPPP shall be prepared by a registered professional

engineer, a Certified Professional in Erosion and Sediment Control
(CPESC), or a licensed landscape architect who has experience with
the applicable construction storm water permit as well as the use
of sediment and erosion control best management practices (BMPs).
(3) The Contractor designated inspector and any person responsible

for maintaining SWPPP compliance with the applicable storm water
permit and permit required activities shall attend training on
storm water erosion and sediment control compliance/inspections
SECTION 01 57 24.03 44 Page 3

provided by the EPA, state, or vendors (e.g., www.ieca.org,

www.teex.org, www.stormwatercenter.org, etc.). The inspector shall
provide training certificates from accredited vendors confirming
course completion. Documented experience that deals with
maintaining compliance with the applicable Construction Storm
Water Permit may be substituted for the above mentioned training.
Documented experience must be attached to the SWPPP.
(4) The person responsible for maintaining the SWPPP shall provide
briefing on the approved Construction Operation SWPPP to all
on-site workers.
(5) The SWPPP shall not be submitted to the USACE unless it has
been verified to meet the requirements of the applicable state
Construction Storm Water Permit. Prior to submitting the Notice of
Intent (NOI) (if required per the applicable state Construction
Storm Water permit)to all required parties, the construction
operation SWPPP shall be approved by the USACE.
(6) The SWPPP must contain the Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS)
for each material on-site or provide a reference in the SWPPP on
where the sheets can be found at the project site.
(7) The SWPPP must contain a list and identify the location and
method of containment for each type of waste that is to be
recycled during the project.
(8) The following shall be depicted on the SWPPP drawings.
(a) A statement that verifies an emergency spill clean-up kit and

spill containment device is at fuel transfer points at all times.
(b) A statement that verifies fuel tanks or fueling trucks have

overfill protection devices.
(c) Construction details for all BMPs used on the construction

site (e.g., BMPs for the fuel storage areas, concrete wash-out
pit, borrow area, batch plant, stabilized construction access,
etc.)
(9) Include a copy of this SECTION.
SD-11 Closeout Submittal
Notice of Termination; G; PER-EE
If a NOI has been submitted, a copy of the original Notice of

Termination (NOT) shall be submitted to the regulatory agency and
to all required parties. Prior to submittal of the NOT, Contractor
SECTION 01 57 24.03 44 Page 4

shall inspect the finished site with the Area Office Contracting
Officer (AOCO)and obtain photographs to prove establishment of
final soil stabilization and removal of BMP controls. A copy of
NOT and photographs shall be provided to PER-EE through the AOCO.
The construction Contractor shall retain all documents pertaining
to Construction Storm Water Permit for at least three (3) years
after NOT submittal.
1.3 SUMMARY
The Contractor shall verify that the most current forms (e.g., NOI, NOC,
NOT, etc.) are submitted with the SWPPP.
The Contractor shall not commence soil disturbance until approval of the
site specific SWPPP is obtained from the USACE along with the USACE SWPPP
certification, and USACE NOI (if applicable). Additionally, all required
waiting periods as described in the LPDES General Permit must also be met
before soil disturbing activities may begin.
There is no separate payment for work required in this section.
1.3.1 Site Operators, Responsibilities, and Shared SWPPP
Both the U.S. Army Corps of Engineers (USACE) and the construction
Contractor meet the definitions as operators for the construction
activities and operate under a shared SWPPP that addresses the requirements
of the LPDES General Permit.
1.4 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION
PROJECT TITLE:MANUEVER ENHANCEMENT BRIGADE COMPANY OPERATIONS FACILITY
LOCATION:FORT POLK, Louisiana
1.5 PROJECT DESCRIPTION
NOTES: Provide a brief description of project site and associated

construction activities (i.e. clearing and grubbing; grading; concrete
and asphalt pavement; fencing; landscaping; describe project location;
necessary site work and utility service lines; and demolition,
recycling and disposal of regulated substances, etc.). Reference Civil
Design Analysis and drawings for site info. Identify the total project
area (acres) for the proposed construction and the existing demolition
sites (reference NPDES General Permit for definition on total disturbed
site). The total disturbed area includes
number of acres where construction activities will occur,
construction right-of-way, off-site material storage area, overburden
SECTION 01 57 24.03 44 Page 5

and stockpiles of dirt, borrow area, spoil area, and laydown area.
Construction support facilities are to be determined by the
construction Contractor.
The scope of this project includes construction of new Company Operations

Facilities, storm sewer,water lines sanitary sewer, natural gas lines,
parking lots, access drives, sidewalks, lighting, security fence,
communication system, and antiterrorism measures. In addition,this project
shall include demolition of utilities, structures, gravel driveways and
asphalt parking lots, and the reloctation of an environmental storage yard.
The 2-200 Person Integrated Readiness and Administration Company Operations
Facility (COF) building shall be oriented with the long axis of the
building located west to east. This building orientation minimizes solar
exposure since there is less surface area being exposed along the short
axis of the building. Orienting the long axis parallel to the contours
reduces the amount of earthwork grading. Per the Centers of Standard (COS)
COF Statement of Work Version 3.6 (21 October 2010) there will be 400
persons occupying an office space type of facility. Based on this
information and UFC 4-010-01, DoD Minimum Antiterrorism Standoffs for
Buildings, this building is classified as a primary gathering building:
"Inhabited buildings routinely occupied by 50 or more DoD personnel. This
designation applies to the entire portion of a building that meets the
population density requirements for an inhabited building." Using Table B-1
and Figure B-1 for a primary gathering facility for conventional
construction, the building setback must be at least 82 feet or more from
parking lots and road perimeters with an unobstructed space of 33 feet
around the building.
Per the COS COF statement of work paragraph 3.3.1 Site Design (5) Privately
Owned Vehicles (POV) Parking: "POV parking shall be provided at the ratio
of one space for every two people for the maximum design capacity of all
Company Operations Facilities." The POV parking area has 200 car POV
parking spaces with six motorcycle parking spaces that the Fort Polk DPW
has requested. Out of the 200 car POV parking spaces, six spaces are
assigned as handicap spaces with one being van accessible per the
Architectural Barriers Act Accessibility Guidelines Section F208 and shall
be located closest to the COF main entrance. The next order of proximity to
the COF main entrance out of the 200 POV parking spaces shall be 10 spaces
assigned to LEED low-emitting vehicle in order to get one point for SS4.3
for low-emitting vehicles and 10 spaces for car-pool/van-pool parking. Out
of the 200 parking spaces the DPW has requested designated six parking
spaces for their electrical vehicles with electrical charging stations. The
order of nearest to farthest spaces to the main entrance of the COF shall
be Handicap Parking, LEED parking, electric vehicle with charging station
parking and then motorcycle parking. The POV parking area shall be located
along the north and east perimeter of the site. There shall be two POV
parking access driveways. The north POV parking access driveway is located
at approximately the center of the north POV parking area to 22nd Street
with 25-foot radii. Within the north POV parking area shall be a center
median that is a minimum of 20 feet that also serves as a low impact
development raingarden with sidewalks allowing pedestrians to traverse the
low impact development rain garden at two locations. The east POV parking
access driveway is located at the southeast corner of the POV parking lot
to Alabama Avenue and also provides emergency service vehicle and military
organizational vehicle access to the rear of the COF and therefore has
35-foot radii. Emergency vehicle and military organizational access shall
also be provided along the west perimeter of the site with a 28-foot wide
road connected to the north by 22nd Street with a 35-foot radii driveway
and connected to the south by 23rd Street with a 35-foot radii driveway
SECTION 01 57 24.03 44 Page 6

that leads to a 104.50-foot by 234-foot service yard hardstand with a

covered portion centered along the rear of the COF. The hardstand service
yard shall be a minimum of "80 feet deep in order to accommodate up to a
35-foot long vehicle with a 45-foot turning radius along the entire length
of the Readiness Module/Exterior Covered Hardstand per the COS statement of
work." On the east side of the COF covered hardstand area, a 27-foot
emergency access lane shall be provided up to the building as coordinated
with the Fort Polk Fire Department at the design charrette. Fire lane
striping shall be provided to ensure there is a proper fire lane so other
military organizational vehicles do not infringe on emergency vehicle
access. Per the COS statement of work there shall be "6-inch diameter by
5-foot high, concrete-filled, schedule 80 galvanized steel pipe bollards,
5-foot O.C. spacing, painted safety yellow for each column of the exterior
covered hardstand located adjacent to the service yard where frequent
vehicle movement increases the risk of damage by vehicle impact. Also,
provide bollards 5 feet from the edge of electrical and mechanical
equipment, and to protect the corners of Admin/Readiness buildings. Bollard
footings shall be designed to withstand vehicular impact." Per the COS
statement of work the covered hardstand is based on readiness module
personnel per company for a 200-person company. 2,985 square feet is
required since the COF is comprised of 2-200 person companies. A minimum of
5,970 feet is required with a required depth of 30 feet. Per the COS
statement of work the purpose of the covered hardstand area is "to
accommodate outside equipment maintenance, weapons cleaning,
pre/post-deployment preparation, vehicle loading, close formation, etc."
Other COS statement requirement site measures include: "Provide

accommodation for boot/TA-50 gear washing, drainage, and grit removal.
Provide one boot/TA-50 gear washing station per company. Each wash station
shall include four freeze proof hose bibs and drying racks (handrails)".
The location of the two boot/TA-50 washing locations shall be between the
south side of the building and the covered hardstand. Boot wash stations
shall have grit traps on them and shall drain into the sanitary sewer and
not the storm drain. The 40-foot by 30-foot mechanical yard shall be
located on the east side of the building with a 10-foot service drive from
the POV parking area with a swing gate to restrict vehicle access. The
electric transformer pad shall be located in the mechanical yard. The
mechanical yard shall be screened with walls that match the exterior of the
COF on 3 sides. Through coordination with the DPW at the design charrette,
one recycling dumpster and one trash dumpster shall be provided. A concrete
pad with a 3-sided screen wall to match the exterior of the building shall
be located beyond the 82-foot Anti-Terrorism and Force Protection (ATFP)
setback near the entrance drive at the southeast corner of the POV parking
area to Alabama Avenue.
All sidewalks shall be a minimum of 6 feet with the exception of sidewalks

to the main entrance at the front of the building which shall be 8 feet.
From the 8-foot main entrance sidewalk there shall be sidewalks leading to
the stoop for the front entrance vestibule, to the electrical and
mechanical room, and to the men's and women's restrooms. 6-foot sidewalks
also have been located to the side entrance to the corridors that separate
the Administration Module to the Readiness Module on the east and west side
of the building. In addition to handicap accessibility required on the site
at the charrette per the DPW's request handicap ramps have been provided at
22nd Street, 23rd Street and Alabama Avenue. In areas where handicap
landings are flush with pavement and have widths that a vehicle can easily
enter the 82-foot setback, bollards will be placed 5-foot on center.
The total project area of the new construction site is roughly 7 acres. .
The total disturbed area in this contract is roughly 7.
SECTION 01 57 24.03 44 Page 7

1.6 BID OPTIONS AND PROJECT PHASING
There are no Bid Options for this project.
1.7 STANDARD INDUSTRIAL CLASSIFICATION (SIC)
NOTES: SIC codes are obtained from the Standard Industrial

Classification Manual published by Office of Management and Budget
(OMB). For construction activity permit, the primary and sometimes the
secondary codes will be for the construction activity. The second
through the fourth codes will generally relate to the ultimate use of
the project. Use one (1) to maximum of four (4) codes as needed to
adequately describe the project.
1542 - General Contractors - Non-Residential Building, other than

Industrial Buildings and Warehouses (i.e., administrative buildings)
1.8 LOCATION
NOTES:Provide a narrative of the

project location, including street names or easily recognized
landmarks. As a minimum, include the following: (1) project site street
name and boundary streets, (2) latitude and longitude of the project
center to the nearest 15 seconds, or (3) quarter, section, township,
and range in which the project is located. Describe all disturbed
areas, and off-site support functions and locations for proposed
facilities and remote demolition sites.
The new facility project site is within the city boundary of Fort Polk and
is in Vernon County. The project site is bounded by 22nd Street on the
north, 23rd Street on the south, Alabama Avenue on the east, and the UEPH
site on the west. The new facility project center is located approximately
at 4 degrees 03 minutes 7.24 seconds latitude, 98 degrees 26 minutes
56.41 seconds longitude. The physical address for the new facility is BLDG
# XXXX, 22nd Street, Fort Polk, LA 71459. The demolition site is bounded by
22nd Street to the north, 23rd Street to the south, the UEPH Barracks
project to the west and Alabama Avenue to the east.. The demolition site
project center is approximately at 4 degrees, 03 minutes and 7.24 minutes
latitude and 98 degrees, 26 minutes and 56.41 seconds longitude. The
physical address of the demolition site is 22nd Street, Fort Polk, LA 71459.
There are no on-post borrow areas. The contractor shall obtain suitable
borrow and dispose of unacceptable spoil off-post per the contract
requirements at the contractor's expense. Currently on-post there are no
concrete plants and no trash disposal areas. Sheet G101 shows the location
of the clean excess spoil site and the concrete and asphalt disposal area
that the contractor may use.
SECTION 01 57 24.03 44 Page 8

1.9 RECEIVING WATERS
NOTES: Identify the body of water

that receives site runoff. If it is a tributary
to a major river, identify both the tributary and the river. If runoff
is collected by a storm drainage system, identify the operator of the
system (i.e., the name of the military installation or municipality,
the creek adjacent or on site, MS4, the ultimate receiving water body,
etc.)
The storm runoff from the new facility site flows south to north primarily
into bioretention ponds for the 2-year 24-hour storm event that draws down
within 24 to 48 hours. Any other storm exceeding that event overflows into
new storm drain inlets by sheet flow, then flows south to north into an
existing storm drain system into existing parking lot curb inlets in the
Barracks complex. This underground storm drainage system runs south to
north and discharges into Hogpen Branch and Blackland Branch tributaries of
Bundick Creek.
PART 2 SITE DESCRIPTION
2.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS
NOTES: Describe current site conditions. Include information on

drainage patterns and runoff coefficients. Also discuss the design
storm frequencies used for runoff volume calculations. If the site is
located adjacent to an existing industrial facility or in a community
greater than 100,000 people, records of storm water quality near your
site may be available. Include storm water quality records for the site
(if it is available).
The site generally slopes from south to north with an average slope of 3
percent. There are currently existing underground storm drainage facilities
near the new facility site. Estimated existing runoff coefficients vary
from 0.12 to 0.85. Ten-year storm frequency and 10 minutes duration with 6.8
inches per hour intensity was used for the design of the storm drainage
system. There are currently existing underground storm drainage facilities
at the demolition site. The demolition site generally slopes from south to
north with an average slope of 3 percent.
2.2 FINAL CONDITIONS
NOTES: Describe site conditions and drainage upon completion of

construction activities. Include estimates of future runoff
coefficients. Describe features of the storm water system and storm
water management (i.e., erosion control and velocity dissipation
devices).
Grades at the new facility site will not change significantly and is
roughly about 3 percent to 5 percent from south to north. Completed
facility site drainage will flow bioretention ponds designed for a 2-year
SECTION 01 57 24.03 44 Page 9

24-hour storm event by sheet flow with overflows from the bioretention
ponds into a new underground drainage system designed to accommodate a 10-
year storm event by sheet flow in inlets for approximately 78 percent of
the site. The rest of the site will drain into inlets and into an
underground system. The new main underground system runs south to north
with laterals coming from the east and west. The grades surrounding the
building are approximately 5% grade from the north, east and west sides of
the building onto grass fields, and a 1% grade from the south side of the
building, onto the concrete covered hardstand. The new project site will
have a building, mechanical yard, covered hardstand, dumpster pad, access
roads, parking areas, service drives, landscaping and turfing. Estimated
future runoff coefficients vary from 0.12 to 0.85.
2.3 CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES
The Contractor shall establish storm water BMP control structures prior to
conducting site disturbing activities. The Contractor shall maintain
temporary and permanent site stabilization at each portion of site.
The Contractor shall maintain a record of the START date of major

construction site activities (i.e., clearing and grubbing, grading,
trenching and excavation, dirt moving, etc.), the STOP date when
construction activities cease on a portion of the site, and the START date
of stabilization measures (such as sod, seeding with native seed,
vegetative buffer strips, erosion control compost, turf reinforcement mat,
SCOUR STOP, etc.). See
SECTION 01 57 24.02 44 SWPP PLAN INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE REPORT FORM for
an example of a grading and stabilization log sheet.
2.4 SOILS DATA
The SWPPP narrative shall provide soils information of the proposed

construction site. Possible sources of information are project soil
reports, USDA soil survey data, and other published sources. Information
can be found at http://websoilsurvey.nrcs.usda.gov/.
2.5 STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION DRAWINGS
Each SWPPP drawing shall have a specific sheet number and title.
The following describes the items that need to be identified in the

drawings of the SWPPP as required by the LPDES General Permit.
SECTION 01 57 24.03 44 Page 10

(a) Direction(s) of stormwater flow and approximate slopes anticipated

after grading activities;
(b) Areas of soil disturbance and areas that will not be disturbed (or
a statement that all areas of the site will be disturbed unless
otherwise noted);
(c) Locations of major structural and nonstructural BMPs identified in

the SWPPP;
(d) Locations where stabilization practices are expected to occur;
(e) Locations of off-site material, waste, borrow or equipment storage

areas;
(f) Locations of all waters of the United States (including wetlands);
(g) Locations where stormwater discharges to a surface water; and
(h) Areas where final stabilization has been accomplished and no

further construction-phase permit requirements apply.
(i) A general location map.
The following describes the items that need to be identified in the

drawings of the SWPPP as required by the USACE.
(a) Existing site features and BMPs -- name of receiving waters (e.g.,
lake, stream, creek, river, unnamed tributary of named receiving
stream, etc.), project site storm water discharge locations, existing
storm grates, outfall protection devices, and BMPs.
(b) Interim grading site drainage features and BMPs -- slopes with
rough grading, limit of soil disturbance area, outline of areas not to
be disturbed (e.g., vegetative buffer zones, cultural resources,
wetlands, and areas of environmental concern), new storm grates, new
drainage outfalls, and BMPs.
(c) Areas to receive temporary stabilization. Methods of stabilization

shall be identified along with the applicable specification for the
stabilization (e.g., native seed mix at a certain application rate in
lbs/sq-ft, etc.).
(d) Areas to receive final stabilization. Methods of stabilization

shall be identified along with the applicable specification for the
stabilization (e.g., native seed mix at a certain application rate in
lbs/sq-ft).
(e) On-site and off-site material borrow areas, clean dirt disposal
areas, and BMPs. Stabilized access roads, construction support
activities and laydown areas (equipment, staging, parking, and storage
areas) along with the BMPs.
(f) Concrete or asphalt batch plant and BMP (if applicable).
SECTION 01 57 24.03 44 Page 11

(g) BMP construction details for all erosion control and stabilization
and sediment control BMPs(e.g., BMPs for the fuel storage areas,
concrete wash-out pit, borrow area, batch plant, stabilized
construction access, seeding type, silt fence, etc.)
(h) EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL PLAN I (demolition site)
(i) EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL PLAN II(existing site conditions

depicting run-on flow diversion BMPs and run-off BMPs)
(j) EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL PLAN III(interim site grading

conditions depicting run-off BMP, swales BMP, storm grates BMP, and
temporary stabilization areas & method specification)
(k) EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL PLAN IV(complete site grading

conditions depicting run-off BMPs, swales BMPs, storm grates BMPs, and
final stabilization areas and method specification)
(l) Notes on timing of controls of activities
PART 3 BEST MANAGEMENT PRACTICES (BMPs)-EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROLS
3.1 TEMPORARY STABILIZATION
Stabilization measures shall be in conformance with LPDES General Permit

Part IV.D.2.a(2) and Part III.D.2.a(2) for large and small construction
activities, respectively.
The Contractor shall provide all necessary labor, services, equipment,

materials (e.g., fertilizer) to obtain, transport, apply, and maintain the
temporary stabilized area until final stabilization is performed.
Some examples of acceptable methods for temporary stabilization include

water sprinkling with environmental sustainable soil binders (e.g.,
products produced by Soilworks, LLC, DirtGlue Enterprises, SoilLok, or
similar) or anchored straw mulching (typically applied at 2 tons per acre).
The construction SWPPP may specify other forms of temporary stabilization
methods that are industry accepted and are applicable for the project site
conditions.
SECTION 01 57 24.03 44 Page 12

3.2 PERMANENT STABILIZATION
Stabilization measures shall be in conformance with LPDES General Permit

Part IV.D.2.a(2) and Part III.D.2.a(2) for large and small construction
activities, respectively.
The Contractor designated inspector shall inspect the site with the USACE
AOCO to ensure final stabilization is established. Final stabilization is
defined as described in the LPDES General Permit. If final stabilization is
unsatisfactory, additional measures shall be required by the USACE AOCO. If
applicable, additional seeding shall be performed after temporary removal
of the erosion control blankets and subsequent replacement of blankets
after such activities are completed. If applicable, the Contractor's SWPPP
shall specify the native seed mix species and application rate (lbs/sq-ft).
Some examples of acceptable methods for permanent stabilization includes
sodding, pavement, and rock blankets.
3.3 SEDIMENT BASIN
NOTE: See LPDES General Permit Part IV.D.2.a(3) and Part III.D.2.a(3) for
large and small construction activities, respectively.
The The runoff from the site does not drain to a common collection point;
therefore, a temporary sediment basin is not required. A series of smaller
sediment basins are constructed to provide for temporary sediment control
is depicted on the grading plan. A series of smaller sediment basins are
not attainable, therefore effective sediment controls (i.e. vegetative
strips and silt fences) are established on all the down slope areas of the
disturbed site perimeter to control sediment in runoff. A temporary
sediment basin is not required because construction activities at each
portion of the disturbed site is less than 10 acres..
3.4 STRUCTURAL CONTROLS
See SECTION 01 57 23 TEMPORARY STORM WATER POLLUTION CONTROL.
3.5 NON-STRUCTURAL CONTROLS
The Contractor (and the subcontractors) shall be responsible for

eliminating pollutants in storm runoff from the project site. The
Contractor (and subcontractors) shall be responsible for utilizing
non-structural BMPs to minimize storm water pollution. Some examples of
non-structural BMP include:
- Construction Practices
- Material Management
- Waste Management
- Vehicle and Equipment Management
- Employee and Subcontractor Training
- Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan Maintenance
SECTION 01 57 24.03 44 Page 13

3.5.1 Construction Practices
Dewatering Operations: The Contractor (and subcontractor)shall prevent

discharge of sediment by methods of sediment control, containment, and
disposal. In project areas suspected of potential toxic or petroleum
products contamination, the water shall be tested to determine method of
disposal.
Paving Operations: The Contractor (and subcontractor) shall avoid discharge

of pollutants to storm drains by avoiding asphalt and concrete paving in
wet weather or anticipation of such event, storing material in covered
containers, covering and berming storage areas, establish control
structures, cover on-site storm grates, and worker and subcontractor
training.
Structure Construction and Painting: The Contractor (and subcontractor)

shall prevent pollutants in storm runoff by covering, or berming material
storage areas, keeping job site clean and orderly, using safer alternate
products, stabilizing adjacent disturbed areas, storing material in
secondary containment, protecting on-site storm drains, establish control
structures, and perform worker amd subcontractor training.
USACE Requirements
Stockpiles: Material shall have a storm water perimeter control devices

established at a minimum distance of 10 feet from the toe of the stockpile.
Materials excavated from utility trenching shall be protected from up
gradient storm run-on.
3.5.2 Material Management
Material Delivery and Storage Practice: The Contractor (and subcontractor)

shall prevent or reduce discharge of pollutants to storm water by
minimizing the on-site storage of hazardous and toxic (HT) materials,
storing HT in clearly labeled, corrosion-resistant containers with
secondary containment at designated areas approved by the COR, conducting
frequent inspection, keeping current inventory of construction materials on
site and training of workers and subcontractor.
Material Use and Inventory: Common on-site materials are pesticides and
herbicides, fertilizers, detergents, concrete material, petroleum-based
products, fertilizers, tar, asphalt, steel reinforcing bars, other
hazardous chemicals such as acid, lime, solvents, curing compounds,
sealants, paints, glues, fertilizers, etc. The Contractor (and
subcontractor) shall use less hazardous, alternate or environmental
friendly material, if available. The Contractor shall have
(1) a list of construction materials used on site,
(2) a list of materials and associated potential pollutants, and
(3) method of storage and containment in the Contractor operation
specific SWPPP.
SECTION 01 57 24.03 44 Page 14

Spill Prevention and Control: The Contractor (and subcontractor) shall

store HT material in covered containers and inside a fenced area, have the
temporary fuel storage tank bermed or contained to meet applicable Fire
Code, place readily accessible spill clean-up materials, have protocol for
immediate work stoppage, notification, clean-up, labeling, storage and
packaging, transportation, disposal, record-keeping, closure activities,
and provide training to workers and subcontractor for response to spills.
3.5.3 Waste Management
Non-Construction Wastes: The Contractor must minimize pollutant discharges

from areas other than construction (including stormwater discharges from
dedicated asphalt plants and dedicated concrete plants).
Construction and Waste Materials: The Contractor must: 1. Prevent the

discharge of solid materials, including building materials, to waters of
the United States, except as authorized by a permit issued under section
404 of the CWA; 2. Minimize exposure of construction and waste materials to
stormwater, and the occurrence of spills, through the use of storage
practices, prevention and response practices, and other controls; 3.
Prevent litter, construction debris, and construction chemicals (e.g.,
diesel fuel, hydraulic fluids, and other petroleum products) that could be
exposed to stormwater from becoming a pollutant source in stormwater
discharges.
Solid Waste Materials: Trash and uncontaminated construction debris shall

be placed in appropriate covered waste containers. Waste containers shall
be emptied regularly and shall not be allowed to overflow. The disposal
area of excavated material from project construction shall not be utilized
for waste disposal. Routine janitorial service shall be provided for all
construction buildings and surrounding grounds. No construction waste
materials, including concrete, shall be buried or otherwise disposed of
on-site. The Contractor shall brief all on site personnel on good
house-keeping and waste minimization.
Solid Waste: Solid waste materials (e.g., grout, mortar or uncontaminated

debris) shall be placed in covered containers. Trees and shrubs from site
clearing shall be shredded and used as mulching material after site
stabilization. Packaging materials such as wood, plastic, and paper shall
be recycled to the maximum extent possible and not disposed of in a
landfill. It is a requirement to perform recycling (see SECTION 01 74 19).
The Contractor shall designate waste containers for segregating waste
(municipal, metal, aluminum, plastic, wood pallet, packaging, glass, etc.)
Dry paint cans shall be recycled. The Contractor shall designate waste
disposal area, have a routine janitorial service for all structures and
surrounding grounds, and have a routine schedule to service waste
containers. The disposal area of excavated material from project
construction shall not be utilized for solid or refuse waste disposal.
Personnel on the job site shall be briefed on minimizing disposal to
landfill by waste segregation and recycling.
Hazardous and Toxic Waste: All excess on-site material such as paints,
solvents, petroleum products (e.g., fuel, oil, and grease, etc.),
herbicides, pesticides, acids for cleaning masonry, concrete curing
compounds, sealants, paint strippers, wastes from oil-based paint, and
glues can become HT waste. Containers of excess material shall be labeled
SECTION 01 57 24.03 44 Page 15

and managed according to the labels and as recommended by the product

manufacturers. If there are no instruction provided, the Contractor shall
turn in contained waste to the installation DRMO, the local household
hazardous waste drop-off, or recycling program.
NOTE: DELETE IF REGULATED MATERIAL ABATEMENT IS NOT APPLICABLE TO THE

PROJECT.
Demolition: Buildings to be demolished under this Contract shall require

removal of the following regulated materials: lead-based point and asbestos
roof sealant and floor coating and asbestos-containing building material.
Asbestos-containing materials shall be handled and disposed of in
accordance with Section 02 82 14.00 10 ASBESTOS HAZARD CONTROL ACTIVITIES
prior to building demolition. Lead hazard control activities shall be
performed in accordance with Section 02 82 16.00 20 ENGINEERING CONTROL OF
ASBESTOS CONTAINING MATERIALS 02 83 13.00 20 LEAD IN CONSTRUCTION. Other
regulated materials shall be removed and managed in accordance with Section
02 84 00.00 44 REMOVAL, RECYCLING, AND DISPOSAL OF REGULATED MATERIAL.
Contaminated Soil: If suspicious of soil contamination during soil moving

activities, the Contractor (and subcontractor) shall stop work, notify COR,
and establish containment to prevent soil transport or runoff from that
location. For removal of contaminated soil, a WORK PLAN shall be prepared
for COR approval prior to handling and management of the material. The WORK
PLAN shall at least include the following: containment, sampling &
analyses, notification to regulatory agencies, transportation, worker
safety, training & environmental monitoring, disposal, and documentation
and record-keeping.
Construction and Concrete Waste: Construction waste or surplus materials,

demolition building debris, scrap metal, rubber, plastic, glass, concrete,
and masonry products shall be segregated and recycled to minimize landfill
disposal. No construction waste shall be buried or disposed of on-site.
Concrete waste shall be controlled and minimized by appropriate storage
methods for dry and wet materials, and control the amount of concrete and
cement mixed on site. Sweepings from exposed aggregate concrete shall be
collected and returned to aggregate stockpile and they shall not be washed
into streets or storm drains. Concrete wastewater from wash pit is not
permitted to discharge as storm runoff. See
SECTION 01 57 23 TEMPORARY STORM WATER POLLUTION CONTROL for additional
concrete wash-out requirements. After project completion, the Contractor
shall contain wastewater, clean the basin, test and dispose of wastewater
and sediment in accordance with applicable regulations and to the
satisfaction of the USACE AOCO. The Contractor is responsible for all fees,
levies, and disposal cost and shall provide a treatment facility signed
delivery ticket.
Sanitary/Septic Waste: On-site sanitary facilities shall be established at

a convenient location. Facility location, design, maintenance, and waste
collection practices shall be approved by COR and are in accordance with
local regulations. The Contractor (and subcontractor) shall have a routine
SECTION 01 57 24.03 44 Page 16

schedule for waste pump out by a licensed hauler. Septic waste treatment
system shall have a pre-construction permit from the local health
regulating agency and have contract service with a licensed company.
Temporary sanitary facilities discharging to sanitary sewer system shall be
approved by the operator of the system and properly connected to avoid
illicit discharges. Wastewater from water-based paint shall not be
discharged as sanitary waste.
Building Exterior Cleaning or High-pressure Wash: Storm drains shall be

protected by approved storm water control device. Wash onto dirt area,
spade in, settle solids in pit, collect (mop up) and discharge to sanitary
sewer (with approval from sewer operator). If the exterior paint contains
lead exceeding the levels stated in the Consumer Safety Standard, mercury
or mildewcide, the wash water shall be collected and disposed of as
regulated material that will require sampling data for disposal to
permitted facility.
Street/Pavement Cleaning: Water used for this activity shall be minimized

and sediment basin shall be used to contain wastewater. At completion of
construction, the silt shall be removed and disposed of in accordance with
applicable regulations, and water from the basin shall be pumped to a
sanitary sewer with written approval from the COR.
Care of Storm Water from Excavated Areas: Storm water trapped in excavated
areas shall be lifted or pumped into a temporary bermed sediment basin or
equal measure(s) for sediments removal. The filtered water shall runoff as
sheet flow from the sediment removal area. The sediment removal area shall
have the maximum separation distance possible from the site drainage
outfall.
3.5.4 Dust Control
See SECTION 01 56 00 DUST CONTROL.
3.5.5 Vehicle and Equipment Management
Off-site Vehicle Tracking: The Contractor is required to keep vehicles from

tracking soils from the project, borrow, and disposal sites. Temporary
parking area(s) to be used 30 calendar days or more for the Contractor's
equipment or personal vehicles shall be paved with temporary asphalt. The
temporary parking areas shall be removed by the Contractor upon project
completion and restored to the satisfaction of the COR.
Vehicle and Equipment Cleaning: Washing shall be performed off site at a

commercial washing facility that has an oil/water separator as
pre-treatment before connection to municipal sewer system. No vehicle
washing is allowed on site, unless washing involves the rinsing of a
concrete truck and wastewater is trapped in a washout pit with secondary
SECTION 01 57 24.03 44 Page 17

containment.
Vehicle and Equipment Fueling: Fueling shall be off-site unless a written

approval is obtained. If fueling on-site is approved, it shall be at least
150 feet from drainage courses.
The Contractor shall provide a construction detail to depict best

management practices for fuel storage and fuel transfer/dispensing areas.
Fueling operations shall avoid topping of fuel tank, and avoid mobile
fueling of mobile construction equipment. Fueling locations shall use
impervious secondary containment (i.e., a liquid-tight berm and an
impermeable liner). The containment capacity of the bermed area shall
provide at least 110 percent (%) of the stored fluid.
It is necessary to have a clean-up kit and containment bloom (or absorbent

material) available at all times for immediate clean-up during fueling. No
petroleum fuel, oil or lubricants or products tanks are allowed on-site
unless is pre-approved in writing. Emergency cut-off valve and or overfill
protection device is required on fuel transfer equipment. The temporary
fuel containers placed on-site shall meet the industrial standard, labeled
and stored in accordance with applicable Federal, state, and local Fire
codes.
In case of spill of hazardous, toxic, and radiological waste (HTRW), the

Contractor shall stop work, contain spill, notify the AOCO and Safety
Office, and execute spill control per the SPILL CONTROL PLAN as required in
specification SECTION 01 57 20 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION . Spill control,
response, notification, clean-up, restoration, reporting, record-keeping,
etc. shall be in accordance with 40 CFR 110 and 40 CFR 112, other
applicable Federal, state, and local regulations, and to the satisfaction
of the AOCO.
Vehicle and Equipment Maintenance: Outdoor vehicle or equipment maintenance

is a significant potential source of storm water pollution. Activities
often include engine repair, changing fluids, etc. Such activities shall be
prohibited at the job site. The construction Contractor shall verify proofs
on routine maintenance of construction equipment and vehicles before
bringing them to the job site.
Vehicle and Equipment Parking: Vehicle or equipment shall be regularly

inspected for leaks and schedule routine maintenance to reduce the
potential for leaks. If leaks are observed at the job site, such vehicle or
equipment shall be repaired immediately or removed from the site.
3.5.6 Employee and Subcontractor Training
The Contractor is responsible for providing training for all workers

(including the subcontractor) on the job site. The objectives in training
are to provide a clear concept of activities or problems that generate
pollutants to storm water, identify solutions (BMPs), promote ownership of
the problems and solutions, and integrate feedback into training and BMP
implementation. A certificate to verify completion of training shall be
signed by all trained personnel and retained in the SWPPP.
SECTION 01 57 24.03 44 Page 18

3.5.7 Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan Maintenance
The USACE approved SWPPP shall be readily available to inspector either

from the USACE or regulatory agency. The USACE approved BMPs and SWPPP
shall be revised at no cost by the construction Contractor when there are
changes in site conditions, sequence of construction and operation, when
sediments escape from the job site, or as dictated by the results of
inspections. The BMPs and SWPPP shall be updated by the construction
Contractor upon request of the USACE AOCO.
PART 4 STORM WATER MANAGEMENT AND PERMANENT CONTROLS
NOTE: The number and headings of these subsections will vary

significantly from project to project. Use as many subsections as
necessary to adequately describe erosion and sediment controls for the
completed project site. While designing the site layout and grading
plans, the design engineer should include features that will limit
erosion and control sedimentation once project construction has been
completed. Permanent structures may include curbs and gutters, storm
drains, drainage ditches, culverts, pavement slopes, etc. Indicate
storm frequencies and durations used for design purposes. Subsections
may include, but are not limited to: RUNOFF COMPUTATIONS, STORM
DRAINAGE SYSTEM, VEGETATIVE BUFFER STRIPS, DRAINAGE SWALES AND DITCHES,
DRAINAGE CULVERTS and all measures discussed in
SECTION 01 57 23 STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION MEASURES.
All sites for new construction and demolition shall be separately

addressed. Units of measure used shall match the construction project.
The SWPPP designer shall determine if there are concerns associated

with the discharges from sources other than storm water. The SWPPP
designer shall consult with the construction Contractor to determine
concrete washout pit capacity at the job site to provide total
containment of concrete detention and the designed storm event.
4.1 RUNOFF COMPUTATIONS
The storm drainage design is based on a 10-year storm frequency and 10

-minutes duration with 6.8 inch per hour rainfall intensity based on the
rational method. The bioretention ponds were designed the SCS method for 2
year 24 hour rainstorm event with overflows going into the underground
storm drainage system via surface inlets.
SECTION 01 57 24.03 44 Page 19

4.2 SURFACE DISCHARGE QUALITY
The wastewater from concrete washing activity is prohibited from

discharging as surface runoff. See Part 3.6.5 of
SECTION 01 57 20 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION.
4.3 PERMANENT EROSION CONTROL STRUCTURES AND STORM WATER TREATMENT UNIT
Permanent drainage structures, including concrete curbs and gutters, storm

drainage system, concrete pavement, asphalt pavement, drainage swale,
drainage ditch, turfing, vegetative strip,concrete culvert, pipe culvert,
and bioretention ponds will provide erosion control at the project site.
4.4 OUTLET PROTECTION OR OUTFALL VELOCITY DISSIPATION DEVICES
NOTE: Identify velocity dissipation or outlet protection device to

provide non-erosive flow conditions at the point of surface drainage
discharge. New construction and demolition sites shall be addressed
separately.
The outlet protection or outfall dissipation device shall provide

non-erosive flow conditions at the point of surface water discharge to the
ditch or swale and downstream of the outfall or channel. The proposed storm
drain shall be discharged into bioretention pondsand the main storm drain
system will tie into an existing storm drain curb inlet to the an existing
parking lot north of the site The outfall impact locations are protected by
e.g., SCOUR STOP or equal. The drainage channels are protected by e.g.,
seeding on prepared soil surface.
SECTION 01 57 24.03 44 Page 20

PART 5 TIMING OF CONTROLS AND ACTIVITIES
NOTE: Discuss the sequence of major construction activities and how the
related pollution prevention measures will be implemented. Identify
situations which are critical to successful construction and pollution
prevention, but will not limit the Contractor's ability to determine
construction phasing schedule. NOTES of Timing of Controls and
Activities specific for each project shall be depicted on SWPPP
drawings.
The general Contractor shall discuss timing (sequence) of controls and

construction activities to minimize soil loss from exposed areas in the
construction operation SWPPP.
The following list provides a general example of the Timing of Controls and
Activities.
- Minimize area of disturbance,
- Preserve existing vegetation at the downgradient portion of the site,

do not disturb ground cover until it is necessary to proceed with field
work,
- Install stabilized construction access,
- Install BMPs at contractor staging, stockpiles, storage, parking,

borrow areas, and stockpiles (on-site and off-site locations), concrete
washout pit, fuel storage/transfer area, etc.,
- Install BMP at existing storm grates (e.g., curb inlets surface

inlets, manholes, catch basins, etc.),
- Install flow diversion dike and stabilize. Construct sediment trap at

the downgradient end of the dike,
- Track weather and protect exposed areas with erosion control measures
before anticipated storms arrive.
- Construct outfall, install BMPs at initial impact location, and

stabilize flow channel prior to clearing upper watershed,
- Stage construction to the maximum extent possible by disturbing,

protecting, and then stabilizing one side of river bank before
disturbing the opposite side,
- Stabilize flow channel,
- Clear site for sediment pond (if applicable)and utilize sediment pond
skimmer to control overflow,
- Stabilize pond slopes,
SECTION 01 57 24.03 44 Page 21

- Develop run-on BMP devices and protect loose soil areas,
- Start grading up gradient of site and stabilize disturbed areas,
- Avoid disturbing down slope areas of site until up-gradient disturbed

areas are stabilized,
- Delay construction of infiltration measures until the end of project

when drainage areas are stabilized,
- Install BMP protections at new storm grates (e.g., curb inlets

surface inlets, manholes, catch basins, etc.),
- Protect excavated materials by installing BMP perimeter controls to

protect materials from run-on and run-off
- Stabilize stockpiles and install BMPs at least 10 feet from the toe
of the material,
- Backfill utility trenches in a timely manner to minimize erosion and

soil loss,
- Monitor weather reports to schedule paving (asphalt or concrete),

concrete saw cutting, foundation work, dust control, seeding or any
activities that will impact run-off,
- Inspect and maintain BMP control structures,
- Evaluate BMP and revise BMP when site conditions or activities

change. Maintain Construction General Permit and USACE required field
records and training logs,
- Monitor discharge from concrete batch plant(if applicable),
- Maintain stabilized areas until final project acceptance (i.e.,

watering, fertilize, mow, additional seeding, etc.),
- Verify final stabilization of disturbed areas with AOCO

representative. See definition in PART 2.3,
- Remove sediment and BMP control structures once disturbed areas are
permanently stabilized and accepted by AOCO. Obtain photographs of site
to prove establishment of stabilization and removal of all BMP
controls,
- File the Contractor NOT. Provide a copy of NOT through AOCO to

PER-EE.
SECTION 01 57 24.03 44 Page 22

PART 6 COMPLIANCE WITH FEDERAL, STATE AND LOCAL REGULATIONS
NOTE: Army Regulation 200-1 requires that all Department of Defense

installations and Contractors to comply with Federal environmental
protection statutes, which includes a provision to observe State, and
local environmental regulations.
The SWP3 shall identify the document prepared for compliance with the
National Environmental Policy Act (NEPA) of 1969, as amended. It shall
discuss impact on endangered and threatened species and their
(critical) habitats, archeological, cultural and historical resources
and properties, wetlands, floodplains, environmental contamination and
compliance issue, water resources, ecological resource, land use,
noise, air quality. The installation environmental office is
responsible to prepare the NEPA document at the project pre-design
stage. The Contractor shall request name NEPA compliance document
(Record of Environmental Consideration, Environmental Impact Statement,
Environmental Assessment), date of signature for findings (Record of
Decision or Findings of No Significant Impact), and include information
to PART 7.
In compliance with the Clean Water Act, Section 402, a construction

site of 0.4 hectare (1 acre) in size, or larger, is required to obtain
a National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) from EPA
NPDES General Permit for Storm Water Discharges from Construction
Activities.
Section 404 of the Clean Water Act (CWA) stipulates discharge of dredge
and fill material with jurisdictional Waters of the United States. The
civil engineer and environmental planner shall evaluate the proposed
site compliance with CWA Section 404. The proposed site shall be
reviewed if it crosses drainage water ways or watersheds (dry creeks
and streams could be Waters of U.S.)that are contributing to the Waters
of United States. The review process sometimes involves wetland
delineation to identify existing national permit coverage or issuance
of a Clean Water Act Section 404 Permit. The permit or a permit
coverage verification memorandum could require compensatory mitigation.
The compensatory mitigation shall become the initial part of
construction activity. The construction Contractor shall not start soil
disturbing activities until the required compensatory mitigation is
implemented or the soil disturbing activities are covered under
existing national permit.
The civil engineer and environmental planner shall evaluate the

proposed site compliance with Clean Water Act, Section 10, the Rivers &
Harbor Act of 1899.
Section 401 of the Clean Water Act stipulates the on-site sewerage
discharge. If an on-site sewerage system is required, the Contractor
shall prepare drawings and mark-up specifications, obtain a
pre-construction permit from the state, regional Environmental Quality
Office, or County Health Department. The Contractor shall contact
SECTION 01 57 24.03 44 Page 23

installation Environmental Office for application of on-site sewerage

system pre-construction permit.
The Contractor shall resolve all permit compliance issues prior to

disturbing soil.
In accordance with 32 CFR 651, a Record of Environmental Consideration

dated 25 January 2007 was prepared for the construction of the new Company
Operations, and separate RECs were prepared for the demolition of WWII
buildings 2429(10May02), 2430(29Jun02), 2434(30Jan07) & 2446(4Jun03). The
RECs did investigate all human health and safety factors and environmental
natural resources using the screening process as stated in 32 CFR 651.
These actions do qualify for category exclusion C-1. The screening process
revealed that the proposed actions to demolish WWII buildings
2429(10May02), 2430(29Jun02), 2434(30Jan07) & 2446(4Jun03) and to construct
new company operation facilities would not individually or cumulatively
have significant effects on the human or natural environment. There would
be no environmentally controversial changes to existing environmental
conditions. There are no circumstances that would require an Environmental
Assessment (EA) or an Environmental Impact Statement (EIS). This action
would not produce unresolved effects on (1) Proposed federally listed
threatened, or endangered species or their designated critical habitats,
(2) Properties listed or eligible for listing on the National Register of
Historic Places, (3) Areas having special designation or recognition such
as prime or unique agriculture lands, coastal zones; designated wilderness
study areas, wild and scenic rivers; National Historic Landmarks; 100-year
flood plains; wetlands; sole source aquifers; National Wildlife Refuges;
National Parks; areas of critical environmental concern; or other areas of
high environmental sensitivity; or Cultural Resources as defined in AR 200-1.
Implementing these construction actions would not involve regulatory issues
requiring a permit under Section 404 of the Clean Water Act and Section 10
of the Rivers and Harbors Act of 1899. In compliance with Clean Water Act
Section 402, the contractor and the subcontractor shall conform with all
applicable NPDES General Permit stipulations to discharge storm water
during construction. In addition, the Contractor (including the
subcontractor) shall comply with the Government approved Contractor's
operation specific Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan, BMP, and contract
requirements as stated in this section.
The Contractor (and the subcontractor shall comply with all applicable
Federal, state, and local hazardous, toxic, radiological (HTR) waste,
municipal waste, sanitary and septic waste disposal regulations.
PART 7 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION PROCEDURES AND QUALIFICATION OF

DESIGNATED INSPECTOR
The Contractor shall designate an inspector on site to ensure Storm Water

Permit compliance and perform SWPPP quality control. All BMPs and control
structures shall be inspected according to the requirements of Part IV.D.4
and Part III.D.4 of the LPDES General Permit for large and small
construction activities, respectively. The inspector shall inspect adjacent
SECTION 01 57 24.03 44 Page 24

areas daily for direct clean-up of waste materials, debris, and fugitive
sediment that are blown or washed off-site.
All protective measures used and identified in the SWPPP must have
maintenance performed in conformance with Parts IV.D.3 and III.D.3 of the L
PDES General Permit for large and small construction activities,
respectively.
The designated SWPPP inspector is responsible for maintaining the SWPPP

throughout the term of permit coverage in accordance with the LPDES General
Permit. All deficiencies shall be corrected and recorded. An example of a
form to record this information can be found in
SECTION 01 57 24.02 44 SWPPP PLAN INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE REPORT FORM.
A copy of each inspection report form shall also be provided to the AOCO.
PART 8 PROHIBITION ON NON-STORM WATER DISCHARGES
In accordance with the Part III.A.3 and Part II.A.3 of the LPDES General
Permit for large and small construction activity, respectively, non-storm
water discharges are prohibited during construction of the project, except
for the non-storm water discharges listed below. The following list of
non-storm water discharges from active construction sites are allowed and
is developed based on the above guideline.
1. Discharges from fire-fighting activities;

2. Fire hydrant flushings;
3. Waters used to wash vehicles where detergents are not used;
4. Water used to control dust in accordance with Part IV.D.2.c(2) and
III.D.2.c(2) of the large and small construction general permits,
respectively;
5. Potable water including uncontaminated water line flushings;
6. Routine external building wash down that does not use detergents;
7. Pavement wash waters where spills or leaks of toxic or hazardous
materials have not occurred (unless all spilled material has been
removed) and where detergents are not used;
8. Uncontaminated air conditioning or compressor condensate;
9. Uncontaminated ground water or spring water;
10. Foundation or footing drains where flows are not contaminated with
process materials such as solvents;
11. Uncontaminated excavation dewatering (large construction activity);
12. Landscape irrigation (large construction activity);
13. Landscape irrigation;
14. Uncontaminated ground water infiltration (large activity).
SECTION 01 57 24.03 44 Page 25

PART 9 CONTRACTOR COMPLIANCE AND CERTIFICATION
The construction Contractor shall use this SECTION as guidance on how to

prepare a construction SWPPP that includes narrative, drawings (see PART
2.5 in this section), and required worksheets. Prior to submitting the
NOI(if required to be prepared per the applicable state Construction Storm
Water General Permit)to the regulatory agency and all other required
parties, the Contractor shall submit the operation and field specific SWPPP
with a prepared and signed NOI attached for USACE review and approval.
The construction Contractor and sub-contractor shall each prepare a SWPPP

CERTIFICATION. The SWPPP CERTIFICATION assures responsibility and
compliance with the permitted discharges of storm water during
construction. As such, the SWPPP submitted for USACE review and approval
shall have a SWPPP CERTIFICATION prepared and signed by the appropriate
approval authority. The USACE sharing the approved SWPPP shall prepare a
SWPPP CERTIFICATION. All SWPPP certifications shall be included and
retained in the SWPPP.
9.1 CONSTRUCTION SWPPP GUIDELINES
An adequate construction SWPPP includes a narrative, drawings, and required

worksheets.
The narrative is a written statement to explain and justify the pollution

prevention decisions made for a particular project. The narrative shall
contain concise information about existing site conditions, construction
phasing, BMP practices, construction schedule, and the performance the BMPs
are expected to achieve, and actions to be taken if the performance goals
are not achieved, and other pertinent items that may not be contained on
the drawings.
The narrative shall identify all operators (see PART 1.3 in this section).
The site grading plans provide a baseline to assist in the preparation of

the SWPPP drawings. The drawings shall layout various BMP types, locations,
and methods of stabilization in accordance with Part IV.D.1 and III.D.1 of
the LPDES General Permit for large and small construction activity,
respectively, and Part 2.5 of this section.
The SWPPP shall also address the following.
- Describe the location, size, and characteristics of any wetlands,

streams, or lakes that are adjacent or in close proximity to the site,
and/or will receive discharges from disturbed areas of the project.
Also delineate areas with high erosion potential including steep
slopes.
- List Threatened and Endangered Species and Critical Habitats.

- List Cultural and Historical Resources.
- Clean Water Act Section 404 Memo or Permit Stipulations
- Septic System Permit
- Water well Permit
- Identify if concrete/asphalt plant is at site
(A batch plant may require coverage of an industrial operation permit)
SECTION 01 57 24.03 44 Page 26

- Spill Prevention and Control Measures per state or EPA and local
requirements
- Spill Response
If available, submitting by electronic means is the most efficient process

for filing an NOI, and therefore recommended. However, the physical address
for NOI submission and payment can be found on the NOI form.
9.1.1 On-Site Construction Document, Signage, And Record-Keeping
A copy of each of the following shall be maintained in the USACE approved

SWPPP in accordance with the LPDES General Permit.
- Contractor NOI,
- Contractor Certification of SWPPP,
- Contractor Signatory Delegation Letter,
- Contractor BMP Inspection and Maintenance Report,
- Qualification documents (e.g., training certificates) for

Contractor personnel that maintain any part of the SWPPP,
- Contractor log for recording Major Construction Activities and

Subsequent Stabilization Practices,
- Contractor log for describing construction materials stored

on-site, their potential pollutants, and method of containment,
- Contractor log for describing waste materials stored on-site and

method of storage,
- Contractor NOT (once the project is complete and the NOT is

submitted),
- Contractor Concrete or Asphalt Batch Plant sampling records (if

batch plant operation is being conducted),
- USACE Certification of SWPPP,
- USACE NOI,
- Contractor and the USACE storm water discharge permits after

receipt from the regulatory agency.
A copy of each of the following shall be maintained in accordance with

USACE requirements.
SECTION 01 57 24.03 44 Page 27

- Contractor NOT (append a blank form in the SWPPP to be completed once

project is finished and approved by the USACE AOCO),
- Contractor's anticipated construction timeline schedule (that

includes anticipated dates for soil disturbance),
- Contractor SWPPP Revision Log,
- The SWPPP shall contain label tabs or similar to clearly identify

each item/section of the SWPPP,
- The SWPPP shall be retained at the project site at all times,
- A spill response action guide,
- Contractor SWPPP/BMP training log,
- Certification or Notification for a Drinking Water Well and/or Septic

Sanitary Sewer System (if applicable).
The Contractor shall post the required items per the applicable LPDES
General Permit near the main entrance of each construction access point.
All records pertaining to the Storm Water Permit for discharging water
associated with construction site activities shall be maintained, by the
construction Contractor, for a minimum of three (3) years from the date
specified in Part V.A and Part IV.A of the LPDES General Permit for large
and small construction activity, respectively.
9.1.2 Storm Water Discharge General Permit Fees And Fines For Non-Compliance
The Contractor shall be responsible for the initial Contractor storm water
discharge permit NOI fee and any subsequent annual permit fees during
construction (if required per the applicable state Construction Storm Water
General Permit). In addition, if a batch plant is on-site, the Contractor
is responsible to obtain samples of surface water discharged at the batch
plant. A water sample for water quality analysis shall be analyzed by a
state accredited laboratory and data shall be submitted to the regulatory
agency for the batch plant operation as required by applicable permit
regulations.
Any fines levied by regulatory agency regarding non-compliance with LPDES

General Permit shall be the Contractor's responsibility.
9.1.3 Regulatory Inspector Visits
If the regulatory agency inspector visits the job site, the workers shall
notify the Contractor Designated Storm Water Inspector immediately. The
Contractor's Designated Inspector shall contact the USACE AOCO immediately
and both of them shall accompany the regulatory agency inspector to walk
the construction site. The Contractor's Designated Inspector shall brief
workers daily on the BMP and the SWPPP, logistics of a regulatory agency
inspector site visit, and avoid having an unattended regulatory agency
inspector on the job site. The Designated Inspector shall assign a
responsible person in his/her absence to oversight the logistic of
SECTION 01 57 24.03 44 Page 28

regulatory agency inspector site visit.
9.2 NOTICE OF TERMINATION (NOT)/COMPLETION REPORT
Notice of Termination (NOT) is applicable for construction activities that

submit an NOI. A Small Construction Activity Completion Report (SCACR) is
required for small construction activities. If applicable, the regulatory
agency will automatically send the annual storm water permit payment notice
if a NOT is not received in the data base before a set date each year. The
Contractor is responsible to pay any annual fee on a construction storm
water discharge permit.
At establishment of final stabilization, the Contractor shall have USACE

AOCO approve the project's final stabilization as well as remove sediment
and BMP sediment controls, obtain pictures of the permanently stabilized
site and removal of BMP controls, and written approval from USACE AOCO. The
Contractor shall prepare a NOT and submit his/her own NOT to the
appropriate regulatory agency and any other applicable contacts (i.e.,
MS4s, cities identified in the SWPPP, etc.). The Contractor shall provide
two (2) copies of the filed NOT and site photos to the USACE AOCO. The AOCO
shall retain a copy of the NOT as project closure documentation and forward
the other copy of NOT and photos to CESWF-PER-EE.
For all other construction activities (i.e., ones that do not require a
filing of an NOT), the Contractor shall file the proper documentation to
the regulatory agency and any other applicable contact (i.e., MS4s, cities
identified in the SWPPP, etc.) as described in the LPDES General Permit. A
copy of this document submittal shall be provided to the USACE AOCO. The
AOCO shall retain a copy of the documents sent to the regulatory agency and
other applicable contacts as project closure documentation and forward a
copy of all the documents and photos to CESWF-PER-EE.
The Contractor is responsible for fines due to non-compliance with closure

documentation for the construction activity storm water discharge permit.
9.3 NOTIFICATION TO MUNICIPAL SEPARATE STORM SEWER SYSTEM (MS4)
Not applicable.
SECTION 01 57 24.03 44 Page 29

NPDES Industrial Storm Water Worksheet (Construction)
National Database Information General
Inspection Ty pe Inspector
Name
NPDES ID Number Telephone
Inspection Date Entry Time
Inspector Ty pe EPA
EPA State Exit Time
(circle one) Ov ersight
Facility Ty pe Commercial
Residential Municipal Signature
(circle one) /Industrial
Facility Location Information
Name/Location/
Mailing Address
GPS Coordinates Latitude Longitude
Receiv ing Water(s)
Disturbed Area Start Date Stop Date
Contact Information
Name(s) Telephone
Name(s) and Role(s) of All Parties

Meeting the Def inition of Operator
Facility Contact
Authorized Of f icial(s)
Site Information: (circle all that apply)

Nature of Commercial/ State/
Residential Roadway Priv ate Federal Other
Project Industrial Municipal
Construction Clearing/ Rough Building Final Final

Inf rastructure
Stage Grubbing Grading Const. Grading Stabilization
Basic Permit Information Basic SWPPP Information
Permit Cov erage Y N SWPPP Prepared & Av ailable Y N

ESO Element 3 & 4 ESO Element 5 & 30
Permit Ty pe General Indiv idua SWPPP Contents Satisf actory Y N

l ESO Elements 5 - 31
Permit notice/sign v isibly SWPPP Implementation Y N

posted including: copy of NOI, Satisf actory
contact name & phone Y N ESO Elements 32 - 48
number, location of SWPPP

ESO Element 41
NOI Date SWPPP Date
If applicable, is waiv er certif i-

Y N Intentionally left blank
cation & approv al on f ile?
Page 1 of 10
SWPPP Review (can be completed in office)
General Notes:
Is there a SWPPP?
Y N
ESO Element 5
SWPPP completed prior to NOI submission?

Y N
ESO Element 6
Copy of permit language?

Y N
ESO Element 25
Is SWPPP consistent with state/tribal/local

regulations and permits? Y N
ESO Element 26
SWPPP updated to incorporate changes to

State, Tribal, Local erosion plans? ESO Y N
Element 27
Hav e copies of inspection reports/all other

documentation been retained as part of the
SWPPP f or 3 y ears f rom date permit Y N
cov erage expires?

ESO Element 28
Is a copy of the SWPPP on site or made

av ailable? Y N
ESO Element 30
Did all “operators” sign/certif y the SWPPP?

Y N
ESO Element 31
Site Description Notes:
SWPPP identif ies potential sources

Y N
of pollution? ESO Element 7
SWPPP identif ies all operators and

Y N
their areas of control? ESO Element 8
Is there a site description?

Y N
ESO Element 9
Nature/sequence of construction
activ ity ? Y N
ESO Element 9A - 9B
Total area of site and total area to

be disturbed? Y N
ESO Element 9C
Is there a general location map?

Y N
ESO Element 9D
Is there a site map?

Y N
ESO Element 9E
Page 2 of 10
Site Description (cont’d) Notes:
Drainage patterns/outf alls on site

map? Y N
ESO Element 9F
Area of soil disturbance on site

map? Y N
ESO Element 9F
Location of major structural controls

on site map? Y N
ESO Element 9F
Location of storm water discharges

to a surf ace water on site map? Y N
ESO Element 9F
Location of materials or equipment

storage on site map (on-site or of f -
Y N
site)?
ESO Element 9F
Location/description industrial
activ ities? Y N
ESO Element 9G
Name of Receiv ing water(s) or MS4 Note: Indicate w hether receiving w ater is 303(d) listed.
listed? Y N
Does the SWPPP include dates of

major grading activ ities,
temporary /permanent construction
Y N
cessation, and initiation of
stabilization practices?
ESO Element 14
Endangered Species
Documentation? Y N
ESO Element 23
Controls to Reduce Pollutants Notes:
Does the SWPPP include a description of

all pollution control measures (BMPs) that
will be implemented to control pollutants
Y N
in storm water discharges, including
sequence and which operator responsible
f or implementation? ESO Element 10 A - C

interim and permanent stabilization
practices (e.g., seeding, mulching, riprap Y N
f or the site)?
ESO Element 11; 12
Page 3 of 10
Controls to Reduce Pollutants (cont’d) Notes:
Does the SWPPP identif y the contractor(s)

and timing by which stabilization practices
Y N
will be implemented?
ESO Element 13

structural practices (e.g., v ehicle track-out,
silt f ences, sediment traps, storm drain inlet Y N
protection) f or the site?
ESO Element 15
Does the SWPPP identif y the contractor(s)

and timing by which structural practices
Y N
will be implemented?
ESO Element 10B - 10C
Does the SWPPP identif y storm water

management measures to address storm
water runof f once the construction is
Y N
completed (e.g., retention ponds, v elocity
dissipation controls)?
ESO Element 16
Does SWPPP describe measures to prev ent

discharge of dredge/f ill materials to waters
Y N
of the U.S.? Does site hav e 404 permit?
ESO Element 17
Does SWPPP describe measures to

minimize of f -site v ehicle tracking and Y N
generation of dust? ESO Element 18
Does SWPPP describe controls f or

pollutants f rom storage of construction or Y N
waste materials? ESO Element 19
Does the SWPPP describe controls f or

pollutants f rom non-construction activ ities? Y N
ESO Element 20
Does SWPPP identif y allowable non-storm

water discharges? Y N
ESO Element 21
Does SWPPP ensure implementation of

pollution prev ention measures f or non-
Y N
storm water discharges?
ESO Element 22
Is SWPPP rev ised when BMPs

added/modif ied within 7 day s af ter
Y N
inspection rev eals problems?
ESO Element 29
Page 4 of 10
Inspections Notes:
Inspections perf ormed once ev ery 7 day s,

or ev ery 14 day s within 24 hours of a rain
Y N
ev ent greater 0.5"?
ESO Element 32
Inspections perf ormed by qualif ied

personnel? Y N
ESO Element 33
All disturbed areas and/or used f or storage

and exposed to rain inspected? Y N
ESO Element 34
All pollution control measures inspected

to ensure proper operation? Y N
ESO Element 35
All discharge locations inspected if

accessible, or if not accessible, are nearby
Y N
downstream locations inspected?
ESO Element 36; 37
Entrance/exit inspected f or of f -site

tracking? Y N
ESO Element 38
Inspection report contain all required

items and certif ied? Y N
ESO Element 39; 40
Notes on SWPPP Review
Site Description:
Page 5 of 10
SWPPP Implementation (complete in field)
Stabilization Practices
List and describe (e.g., seeding, mulching, geotextiles, sod stabilization)

stabilization
practices
ESO Element 43, 48
Are stabilization (e.g., indicate “yes” or “no”; if “yes”, how long w ithout stabilization measures?)
measures initiated
no more than 14
days after temporary
or permanent
construction
cessation?
ESO Element 46
Page 6 of 10
Structural Practices
List and describe (e.g., silt fences, hay bales, storm drain inlet protection, sedimentation pond, rip rap, check dam, diversion
structural controls structure, off-site vehicle track-out)
ESO Element 42, 43, 47
Non-Structural Practices
Street Cleaning (e.g., describe measures taken to remove offsite accumulation of sediment)
ESO Element 44
Good Housekeeping (e.g., describe measures taken to prevent litter and debris from becoming a pollutant source)
& Waste Disposal
Practices
ESO Element 45
Page 7 of 10
Non-Structural Practices (cont’d)
Equipment Wash/ (provide brief description)
Maintenance Area
ESO Elements 43
Concrete Washout (provide brief description)
Areas
ESO Elements 43
Miscellaneous
Evidence of (e.g., significant turbidity observed in a receiving w ater body)
Sediment
Deposition to
Surface
Waters
*ESO Eligibility - if “yes,” site
not eligible for ESO
Pollution prevention (provide brief description and determine w hether/if non-storm w ater discharges allow able)
measures for non-

storm water
discharges?
*ESO Eligibility - If evidence
of non-allow able non-storm
w ater discharges, site not
eligible for ESO
Page 8 of 10
Miscellaneous (cont’d)
Has implementation (provide brief description)

of
additional/modified
BMPs been
completed before
next anticipated
storm event?
ESO Element 43.C.1
Notes on SWPPP Implementation
Page 9 of 10
Photograph Log
1.
*Insert additional rows as needed
Page 10 of 10
SECTION 01 57 25.00 44
SWPP PLAN INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE REPORT FORM
PART 1 GENERAL
The form identified below provides a baseline for an inspection report form
that can be used while conducting SWPP Plan site inspections. Inspection
reports must be prepared and documented in accordance with the applicable
Construction Storm Water Permit (i.e., Part III.F.7 of the Texas TXR150000
Construction General Permit, Part IV.D.4 of the Louisiana LAR100000
Construction General Permit, Part III.D of the Louisiana LAR200000
Construction General Permit, and Part 4 of the NPDES General Permit for
Storm Discharges from Construction Activities). The form provided below
may not be applicable to all states and therefore needs to be verified by
the Contractor that it is in compliance with the applicable construction
general permit.
1.1 SWPP PLAN INSPECTION REPORT FORM
The following inspection is being performed in compliance with the applicable

state's General Permit or the EPA NPDES permit, whichever is applicable,
relating to discharges from construction activities (for the State of Texas
it is Section F.8 of the TCEQ General Permit No. TXR150000; for the State of
Louisiana it is LPDES Permit # LAR 100000 (LARGE construction activity) or
LPDES Permit # 200000 (SMALL construction activity)).
STORM WATER PERMIT #:

PROJECT NAME:
PURPOSE OF INSPECTION:
INSPECTOR: DATE:
DAYS SINCE LAST RAINFALL ON:
AMOUNT OF LAST RAINFALL: INCHES
( ) ONSITE RAIN GAGE ( ) METEOROLOGICAL TOWER AT:
IS A CONSTRUCTION SITE NOTICE POSTED:
IF YES, LOCATION:
IS PERMIT ATTACHED TO PLAN:
IS PLAN CERTIFIED IN ACCORDANCE WITH REGULATIONS:
STABILIZATION CONTROL SECTION
For each area of the construction project, use this chart to track the dates
of soil disturbing activity, identify stabilization measures, and monitor
their effectiveness. Discharge locations should be inspected to check the
effectiveness of these erosion control measures.
AREA DATE LAST DATE OF NEXT STABILIZED STABILIZED CONDITION,

DISTURBED DISTURBANCE (Y/N/TEMP) WITH COMMENTS
COMMENTS / STABILIZATION REQUIRED (if appropriate):
SECTION 01 57 25.00 44 Page 1

SECTION 01 57 25.00 44 Page 2

STRUCTURAL CONTROLS SECTION
Use this table to document the effectiveness of each structural control, such
as silt fences, berms, riprap, etc. Copy this sheet as required. Discharge
locations should be inspected to check the effectiveness of these erosion
control measures. See the Installation's Storm Water/Surface Water Pollution
Prevention Best Management Practices Guidance Document for correct
installation/maintenance methods.
TYPE LOCATION INSTALLED EVIDENCE OF MAINTENANCE

CORRECTLY? EROSION? REQUIRED
COMMENTS:
MATERIAL STORAGE AREAS
EVIDENCE OR POTENTIAL FOR POLLUTANTS ENTERING THE DRAINAGE SYSTEM:
OTHER COMMENTS:
NON STORM WATER AND NON STRUCTURAL BMP CONTROLS
The following non-storm water discharges from active construction sites are
allowed.
- discharges from fire fighting activities,

- uncontaminated fire hydrants flushing,
- water from the routine external washing of vehicles, the external portion
of buildings or structures, and pavement, where detergents and soaps are not
used and where spills or leaks of toxic or hazardous materials have not
occured (unless spilled materials have been removed; and if local, state, or
federal regulations are applicable, the materials are removed according to
those regulations), and where the purpose is to remove mud, dirt, or dust,
- uncontaminated water used for dust control,
- potable water sources including waterline flushings (excluding discharges
of hypechlorinated water, unless the water is first dechlorinated and
discharge are not expected to adversely affect aquatic life),
- uncontaminated air conditioning condensate,
- uncontaminated ground water or spring water, including founation or footing
drains where flows are not contaminated with industrial materaials such as
solvents,
- and lawn watering and similar irrigation
PROHIBIT DISCHARGING NEW WATER LINE DISINFECTION WASTEWATER AND CONCRETE

WASHOUT PIT WASTEWATER. NEUTRALIZE CHLORINE RESIDUAL IN DISINFECTION
WASTEWATER TO 4 PPM PER AWWA C651 AND METERED TO SANITARY SEWER OR DISCHARGE
TO SEDIMENT POND. EVAPORATE WASHOUT PIT AND RECYCLE CONCRETE.
LOCATIONS WHERE VEHICLES ENTER OR EXIT SITE
EVIDENCE OF OFFSITE SEDIMENT TRACKING:
SECTION 01 57 25.00 44 Page 3

METHOD TO CORRECT _________________________________

DATE COMPLETE______________________
OFFSITE DISCHARGES
EVIDENCE OF SEDIMENT OR OTHER POLLUTANTS LEAVING SITE: ( ) YES ( ) NO

IF YES, LOCATION:
METHOD TO CORRECT __________________________________
DATE COMPLETE______________________
SECTION 01 57 25.00 44 Page 4

STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN REVISION
If this inspection has revealed any issues that require an update to the SWPP
Plan, include them here.
CHANGES REQUIRED TO THE SWPP PLAN (if appropriate):
REASONS FOR CHANGES (if appropriate):
LIST ANY ADDITIONAL LOCATIONS WHERE BMPs ARE NEEDED:
LIST ANY INCIDENTS OF NONCOMPLIANCE WITH SWPP PLAN AND NECESSARY

MODIFICATIONS TO SWPP PLAN:
IS FACILITY IN COMPLIANCE WITH SWPP PLAN AND PERMIT?
If yes, this inspection must be properly signed and certified that the
facility is in compliance.
"I certify under penalty of law that this document and all attachments were
prepared under my direction or supervision in accordance with a system
designed to assure that qualified personnel properly gathered and evaluated
the information submitted. Based on my inquiry of the person or persons who
manage the system, or those persons directly responsible for gathering the
information, the information submitted is, to the best of my knowledge and
belief, true, accurate, and complete. I am aware that there are significant
penalties for submitting false information, including the possibility of fine
and imprisonment for knowing violations."
Name Signature Title Date
SECTION 01 57 25.00 44 Page 5

SECTION 01 57 25.00 44 Page 6

SECTION 01 58 00
PROJECT IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

EP 310-1-6a (2006) Sign Standards Manual, VOL 1
EP 310-1-6b (2006) Sign Standards Manual, VOL 2,

Appendices
1.2 SUBMITTALS

SD-02 Shop Drawings
Preliminary one line drawings of project rendering; G, PO
preliminary drawing indicating layout and text content; G, PO
Sign Legend Orders; G, PO
SD-04 Samples
Final rendering sample; G, PO
Final framed rendering and copies; G; G, PO
Facility Recognition Plaque; G, PO
1.3.1 Rendering
Provide the project rendering in accordance with the following drawing

stages as required in paragraph entitled "Submittals". The following
submittal data is required to properly identify the appropriate view and
approve the final rendering of the facility. The final painted rendering
will be used to produce the image for the signboard and framed photographic
copies provided to the Contracting Officer.
1.3.1.1 Preliminary One Line Drawings
Provide three different views of the facility in a preliminary single line
drawing (black and white) format. These three views will represent the
best angles at which to view the proposed facility showing the best design
features and the three dimensional character of the facility.
1.3.1.2 Final Rendering Sample
Provide a photographic copy ( 8 by 10 inches minimum size) of final

rendering for approval of color, landscaping, and foreground/background
development prior to final submittal.
1.3.1.3 Final Framed Rendering and Copies
Provide final full color rendering of the proposed facility as specified.
1.4 PROJECT SIGN
1.4.1 Construction Project Signs
Furnish the construction project sign package, maintain the signs during
construction, and remove the signs from the job site upon completion of the
project. The construction project sign package consists of two signs: one
for project identification and the other to show the on-the-job safety
performance of the contractor. The package shall conform to the
requirements of EP 310-1-6a and EP 310-1-6b, specifically Section 16.
Submit the sign legend orders as described in Section 16 of EP 310-1-6a
prior to erecting the signs.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not Used
SECTION 01 62 35
RECYCLED / RECOVERED MATERIALS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

40 CFR 247 Comprehensive Procurement Guideline for

Products Containing Recovered Materials
1.2 OBJECTIVES
Government procurement policy is to acquire, in a cost effective manner,

items containing the highest percentage of recycled and recovered materials
practicable consistent with maintaining a satisfactory level of competition
without adversely affecting performance requirements or exposing suppliers'
employees to undue hazards from the recovered materials. The Environmental
Protection Agency (EPA) has designated certain items which must contain a
specified percent range of recovered or recycled materials. EPA designated
products specified in this contract comply with the stated policy and with
the EPA guidelines. The Contractor shall make all reasonable efforts to
use recycled and recovered materials in providing the EPA designated
products and in otherwise utilizing recycled and recovered materials in the
execution of the work.
1.3 EPA DESIGNATED ITEMS INCORPORATED IN THE WORK
Various sections of the specifications contain requirements for materials

that have been designated by EPA as being products which are or can be made
with recovered or recycled materials. These items, when incorporated into
the work under this contract, shall contain at least the specified
percentage of recycled or recovered materials unless adequate
justification (non-availability) for non-use is provided. When a
designated item is specified as an option to a non-designated item, the
designated item requirements apply only if the designated item is used in
the work.
1.4 EPA PROPOSED ITEMS INCORPORATED IN THE WORK
Products other than those designated by EPA are still being researched and
are being considered for future Comprehensive Procurement Guideline (CPG)
designation. It is recommended that these items, when incorporated in the
work under this contract, contain the highest practicable percentage of
recycled or recovered materials, provided specified requirements are also
met.
1.5 EPA LISTED ITEMS USED IN CONDUCT OF THE WORK BUT NOT INCORPORATED IN
THE WORK
There are many products listed in 40 CFR 247 which have been designated or
proposed by EPA to include recycled or recovered materials that may be used
by the Contractor in performing the work but will not be incorporated into
the work. These products include office products, temporary traffic
control products, and pallets. It is recommended that these
non-construction products, when used in the conduct of the work, contain
the highest practicable percentage of recycled or recovered materials and
that these products be recycled when no longer needed.
SECTION 01 71 23.00 44
SURVEY, LAYOUT, AND OTHER DATA
PART 1 GENERAL (NOT USED)
1.1 SUBMITTALS

submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only or as
otherwise designated. When used, a designation following the "G"
designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the
Government. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section
Survey Data;
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 CONTRACTOR VERIFICATION OF CONTRACT SURVEY DATA
During initial site layout and before existing conditions are disturbed the
Contractor shall verify, in writing, the basic survey data provided on the
contract drawings. Verification shall be initiated from the point shown on
the contract drawings or from the contract drawing reference point
designated by the Contracting Officer's Authorized Representative and shall
include, as a minimum, benchmark elevations, horizontal control points, and
sufficient spot checks of critical elevations to ensure that the survey
data adequately reflects existing conditions. The Contractor shall not
proceed with construction until survey verification is provided to the
Contracting Officer's Authorized Representative. Before an existing
benchmark referenced on the contract drawings is disturbed the Contractor
shall establish a new benchmark which has been approved by the Contracting
Officer's Authorized Representative. Benchmarks which are destroyed
without authorization from the Contracting Officer's Authorized
Representative must be replaced at the Contractor's expense as prescribed
in Section 00 72 00 Contract Clause, "Layout of Work." The Contractor
shall refer to Contract Clauses, "Differing Site Conditions" and "Site
Investigation and Conditions Affecting the Work," for additional
requirements.
3.2 UNDERGROUND STORAGE TANKS
In addition to any other requirements for submittal, the Contractor shall,

within 5 days of installation of any underground storage tanks under this
contract, notify the Contracting Officer's representative the date of
installation. The notification shall also include the following
SECTION 01 71 23.00 44 Page 1

information:
a. A plan view showing the tank's location.
b. Projected date the tank will begin operation.
c. Total capacity of tank in gallons.
d. The material used in the construction of the tank.
e. Internal protection of the tank.
f. External protection of the tank.
g. Type of piping and if piping is cathodically protected.
h. Type of substance to be stored in the tank.
3.3 PLANT LAYOUT DRAWINGS (1965 APR OCE)(EFARS 52.2/9109(f))
Drawings, in triplicate, showing the layout of the plant the Contractor

proposes to use on the work shall be submitted by the Contractor for review
by the Contracting Officer. The drawings shall show the locations of the
principal components of the construction plant; offices; shop and storage
buildings; housing facilities, if any; and storage areas and yards which
the Contractor proposes to construct at the site of the work and
elsewhere. The Contractor shall also furnish for review by the Contracting
Officer drawings in triplicate, showing the general features of his
aggregate processing plant; aggregate transporting, storage and reclaiming
facilities; aggregate rinsing and dewatering plant, if required; coarse
aggregate rescreening plant, if required; concrete batching and mixing
plant; concrete conveying and placing plant; and when precooling of
concrete is required, the cooling plant. The drawings shall appropriately
show the capacity of each major feature of the plant including the rated
capacity of the aggregate production plant in tons per hour of fine and
coarse aggregates; rated capacity of the aggregate transporting, storage
and reclaiming facilities; volume of aggregate storage; capacity of cement
and pozzolan storage; rated capacity of the concrete batching and mixing
plant in cubic yards per hour; rated capacity of the concrete transporting
and placing plant in cubic yards per hour; and when used rated capacity of
plant for precooling of concrete. Drawings in triplicate showing any
changes in plant made during design and erection or after the plant is in
operation shall be submitted to the Contracting Officer for review. Two
sets of the drawings will be retained by the Contracting Officer and one
set will be returned to the Contractor with comments.
3.4 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS
The Contractor shall make a representative series of digital images

consisting of 6 before, 6 during, and 6 after construction of this
project. Images shall be taken as directed by the Contracting Officer and
shall be delivered to the Contracting Officer.
SECTION 01 71 23.00 44 Page 2

SECTION 01 74 19
CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION WASTE MANAGEMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

ASTM E 1609 (2001) Development and Implementation of a

Pollution Prevention Program

(LEED-NC)
1.2 GOVERNMENT POLICY
Government policy is to apply sound environmental principles in the design,

construction and use of facilities. As part of the implementation of that
policy the Contractor shall: (1) practice efficient waste management when
sizing, cutting, and installing products and materials and (2) use all
reasonable means to divert construction and demolition waste from landfills
and incinerators and to facilitate their recycling or reuse. A minimum of
75 percent by weight of total project solid waste shall be diverted from
the landfill.
1.3 MANAGEMENT
Develop and implement a waste management program in accordance with

ASTM E 1609 and as specified. Take a pro-active, responsible role in the
management of construction and demolition waste and require all
subcontractors, vendors, and suppliers to participate in the effort.
Construction and demolition waste includes products of demolition or
removal, excess or unusable construction materials, packaging materials for
construction products, and other materials generated during the
construction process but not incorporated into the work. In the management
of waste consideration shall be given to the availability of viable
markets, the condition of the material, the ability to provide the material
in suitable condition and in a quantity acceptable to available markets,
and time constraints imposed by internal project completion mandates. The
Contractor is responsible for implementation of any special programs
involving rebates or similar incentives related to recycling of waste.
Revenues or other savings obtained for salvage, or recycling accrue to the
Contractor. Appropriately permit firms and facilities used for recycling,
reuse, and disposal for the intended use to the extent required by federal,
state, and local regulations. Also, provide on-site instruction of
appropriate separation, handling, recycling, salvage, reuse, and return
methods to be used by all parties at the appropriate stages of the project.
1.4 SUBMITTALS

Waste Management Plan; G; (LEED)
Records; (LEED)
1.5 MEETINGS
Conduct Construction Waste Management meetings. After award of the

Contract and prior to commencement of work, schedule and conduct a meeting
with the Contracting Officer to discuss the proposed Waste Management Plan
and to develop a mutual understanding relative to the details of waste
management. The requirements for this meeting may be fulfilled during the
coordination and mutual understanding meeting outlined in Section 01 45 01
USACE QUALITY CONTROL. At a minimum, environmental and waste management
goals and issues shall be discussed at the following additional meetings:
a. Pre-bid meeting.
b. Preconstruction meeting.
c. Regular QC meetings.
d. Work safety meetings.
1.6 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN
A waste management plan shall be submitted within 15 days after notice to

proceed and not less than 10 days before the preconstruction meeting. The
plan shall demonstrate how the project waste diversion goal shall be met
and shall include the following:
a. Name of individuals on the Contractor's staff responsible for waste

prevention and management.
b. Actions that will be taken to reduce solid waste generation,

including coordination with subcontractors to ensure awareness and
participation.
c. Description of the regular meetings to be held to address waste

management.
d. Description of the specific approaches to be used in

recycling/reuse of the various materials generated, including the areas
on site and equipment to be used for processing, sorting, and temporary
storage of wastes.
e. Characterization, including estimated types and quantities, of the

waste to be generated.
f. Name of landfill and/or incinerator to be used and the estimated

costs for use, assuming that there would be no salvage or recycling on
the project.
g. Identification of local and regional reuse programs, including

non-profit organizations such as schools, local housing agencies, and
organizations that accept used materials such as materials exchange
networks and Habitat for Humanity. Include the name, location, and
phone number for each reuse facility to be used, and provide a copy of
the permit or license for each facility.
h. List of specific waste materials that will be salvaged for resale,

salvaged and reused on the current project, salvaged and stored for
reuse on a future project, or recycled. Recycling facilities that will
be used shall be identified by name, location, and phone number,
including a copy of the permit or license for each facility.
i. Identification of materials that cannot be recycled/reused with an

explanation or justification, to be approved by the Contracting Officer.
j. Description of the means by which any waste materials identified in

item (h) above will be protected from contamination.
k. Description of the means of transportation of the recyclable

materials (whether materials will be site-separated and self-hauled to
designated centers, or whether mixed materials will be collected by a
waste hauler and removed from the site).
l. Anticipated net cost savings determined by subtracting Contractor

program management costs and the cost of disposal from the revenue
generated by sale of the materials and the incineration and/or landfill
cost avoidance.
Revise and resubmit Plan as required by the Contracting Officer. Approval

of Contractor's Plan will not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for
compliance with applicable environmental regulations or meeting project
cumulative waste diversion requirement. Distribute copies of the Waste
Management Plan to each subcontractor, the Quality Control Manager, and the
1.7 RECORDS
Records shall be maintained to document the quantity of waste generated;

the quantity of waste diverted through sale, reuse, or recycling; and the
quantity of waste disposed by landfill or incineration. Records shall be
kept in accordance with the LEED Reference Guide and using the LEED Letter
Template. The records shall be made available to the Contracting Officer
during construction, and a copy of the records shall be delivered to the
Contracting Officer upon completion of the construction.
Demolition accomplished by other parties on this project site count toward

the project's total waste diversion cumulative score for LEED. Information
on the quantity and disposition of these materials will be provided by the
Contracting Officer. Include this data in records, annotated to indicate
that it was accomplished by another party.
1.8 COLLECTION
Separate, store, protect, and handle at the site identified recyclable and
salvageable waste products in a manner that maximizes recyclability and
salvagability of identified materials. Provide the necessary containers,
bins and storage areas to facilitate effective waste management and clearly
and appropriately identify them. Provide materials for barriers and
enclosures around recyclable material storage areas which are nonhazardous
and recyclable or reusable. Locate out of the way of construction traffic.
Provide adequate space for pick-up and delivery and convenience to
subcontractors. Recycling and waste bin areas are to be kept neat and
clean, and recyclable materials shall be handled to prevent contamination
of materials from incompatible products and materials. Clean contaminated
materials prior to placing in collection containers. Use cleaning materials
that are nonhazardous and biodegradable. Handle hazardous waste and
hazardous materials in accordance with applicable regulations and
coordinate with Section 01 57 20.00 10 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION. Separate
materials by one of the following methods:
1.8.1 Source Separated Method.
Waste products and materials that are recyclable shall be separated from
trash and sorted as described below into appropriately marked separate
containers and then transported to the respective recycling facility for
further processing. Deliver materials in accordance with recycling or
reuse facility requirements (e.g., free of dirt, adhesives, solvents,
petroleum contamination, and other substances deleterious to the recycling
process). Separate materials into the following category types as
appropriate to the project waste and to the available recycling and reuse
programs in the project area:
a. Land clearing debris.
b. Asphalt.
c. Concrete and masonry.
d. Metal (e.g. banding, stud trim, ductwork, piping, rebar, roofing, other
trim, steel, iron, galvanized, stainless steel, aluminum, copper, zinc,
lead brass, bronze).
(1) Ferrous.
(2) Non-ferrous.
e. Wood (nails and staples allowed).
f. Debris.
g. Glass (colored glass allowed).
h. Paper.
(1) Bond.
(2) Newsprint.
(3) Cardboard and paper packaging materials.
i. Plastic.
(1) Type 1: Polyethylene Terephthalate (PET, PETE).
(2) Type 2: High Density Polyethylene (HDPE).
(3) Type 3: Vinyl (Polyvinyl Chloride or PVC).
(4) Type 4: Low Density Polyethylene (LDPE).
(5) Type 5: Polypropylene (PP).
(6) Type 6: Polystyrene (PS).
(7) Type 7: Other. Use of this code indicates that the package in
question is made with a resin other than the six listed above, or
is made of more than one resin listed above, and used in a
multi-layer combination.
j. Gypsum.
k. Non-hazardous paint and paint cans.
l. Carpet.
m. Ceiling tiles.
n. Insulation.
o. Beverage containers.
p. .
1.8.2 Co-Mingled Method.
Waste products and recyclable materials shall be placed into a single

container and then transported to a recycling facility where the recyclable
materials are sorted and processed.
1.8.3 Other Methods.
Other methods proposed by the Contractor may be used when approved by the
1.9 DISPOSAL
Control accumulation of waste materials and trash. Recycle or dispose of

collected materials off-site at intervals approved by the Contracting
Officer and in compliance with waste management procedures. Except as
otherwise specified in other sections of the specifications, disposal shall
be in accordance with the following:
1.9.1 Reuse.
First consideration shall be given to salvage for reuse since little or no

re-processing is necessary for this method, and less pollution is created
when items are reused in their original form. Reuse materials as indicated
on the drawings. Sale or donation of waste suitable for reuse shall be
considered.
1.9.2 Recycle.
Waste materials not suitable for reuse, but having value as being
recyclable, shall be made available for recycling. All fluorescent lamps,
HID lamps, and mercury-containing thermostats removed from the site shall
be recycled. Arrange for timely pickups from the site or deliveries to
recycling facilities in order to prevent contamination of recyclable
materials.
1.9.3 Waste.
Materials with no practical use or economic benefit shall be disposed at a

landfill or incinerator.
1.9.4 Return
Set aside and protect misdelivered and substandard products and materials
and return to supplier for credit.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not used. -- End of Section --
SECTION 01 78 02.00 44
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

designation only.
ASTM C 1153 (1997; R 2003e1) Location of Wet

Insulation in Roofing Systems Using
Infrared Imaging
U.S. ARMY CORPS OF ENGINEERS (COE)
COE-02 ARCHITECTURAL AND ENGINEERING INSTRUCTIONS

MANUAL (SWD-AEIM), Southwestern Division
(Current issue as of Contract Award date)
1.2 SUBMITTALS

LEED Review Meetings;
Red Zone Meeting
Video;
Final Operations And Maintenance Manuals; G
Preliminary Record Drawings;
Final Record Drawings;
Drawings showing final as-built conditions of the project.
Sustainable Design Documentation
SECTION 01 78 02.00 44 Page 1

Construction Warranty Management Plan
Three sets of the construction warranty management plan

containing information relevant to the warranty of materials and
equipment incorporated into the construction project, including
the starting date of warranty of construction. The Contractor
shall furnish with each warranty the name, address, and telephone
number of each of the guarantor's representatives nearest to the
project location.
Performance Bond During Warranty;

Original Warranty Documents
Warranty Point of Contact;
Warranty Report;
Warranty Tags;
Inventory Of Contractor Furnished And Installed Equipment;
Inventory Of Government Furnished Contractor Installed Equipment
(GF/CI)
Real Property Record
Final Cleaning
Two copies of the listing of completed final clean-up items.
1.3 PAYMENT
Contract closeout activities such as, but not limited to, operation and
maintenance manuals, record drawings, warranty requirements, equipment
warranty identification tags, and inventories, real property maintenance
records, payrolls, shop drawing submittals, and final cleanup are
subsidiary activities of the contract work ; separate payment will not be
made for any activity unless otherwise specified. Final contract payment
will not be made until completion and approval of all contract closeout
activities.
1.4 HVAC TESTING
The HVAC Testing that the Contractor schedules after substantial completion
pursuant to paragraph entitled "Testing of Heating and Air-Conditioning
Systems" of Section 01 00 00.00 44 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE has a value to the
Government of 10 percent of the value of the equipment to be tested. The
Contractor shall reserve that amount to be paid on any equipment that will
require testing after substantial completion pursuant to the above
referenced specification paragraph.
1.5 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
Project Record documents shall be a record of the construction as installed

and completed by the Contractor. They are a record of all deviations,
modifications, or changes from contract set of drawings and other
documents, however minor, which were incorporated in the work. They
include all the information shown on the contract set of drawings, any
Contractor-original drawings, all additional work not appearing on the
contract drawings, and all changes which are made after final inspection of
the contract work.
SECTION 01 78 02.00 44 Page 2

1.5.1 Contractor-Original Record Drawings
Contractor-original record drawings are those drawings drawn by the

Contractor to further explain the Contract documents such as subcontractor
submittals for fire protection/detection, communication, and other systems,
and approved Contractor's solutions to problems. Submit these drawings as
full-size reproducible sheets and CADD files. CADD files shall conform to
the Working CADD file requirements specified in paragraph "Final Record
Drawings."
1.5.2 Maintenance of Record Drawings
The Contractor shall make timely updates, carefully maintaining a record

set of working as-built drawings at the job site, marked in red, of all
changes and corrections from the contract drawings. The Contractor shall
enter changes and corrections on drawings promptly to reflect "Current
Construction". This update shall be done no less frequently than on a
weekly basis for the blue line drawings and update no less frequently than
a quarterly basis for the CADD files. The Contractor shall include a
confirmation that the record drawings are up to date with the submission of
the monthly project schedule.
The marked-up set of drawings shall reflect any changes, alterations,

adjustments or modifications. Changes must be reflected on all sheets
affected by the change. Changes shall include marking the drawings to
reflect structural details, foundation layouts, equipment sizes, and other
extensions of design.
Typically, room numbers shown on the contract drawings are selected for
design convenience and do not represent the actual numbers intended for use
by the end user. Final record drawings shall reflect actual room numbers
adopted by the end user.
1.5.3 Preliminary Record Drawings
The Contractor shall mark up both a reproducible set and a set of prints to
show as-built conditions. These two sets, hereafter called preliminary
record drawings, or singly, reproducibles or prints, shall be kept current
and available on the jobsite at all times, except as noted below. A
member of the Contractor's Quality Control Organization shall be assigned
responsibility for the maintenance and currency of the preliminary record
drawings. This assignment and any reassignment of duties concerning the
maintenance of the record drawings shall be promptly reported to the
Contracting Officer's representative for approval. All changes from the
contract drawings which are made in the work or additional information
which might be uncovered in the course of construction, including uncharted
utilities, shall be accurately and neatly recorded as they occur by means
of details and notes. All changes and/or required additions to the
preliminary record drawings shall be clearly identified in a contrasting
color and which is compatible with reproduction of the preliminary record
drawings. Preliminary record drawings shall be updated by Friday of each
week. During periods when the reproducibles are being copied and are
therefore not available at the jobsite, the Contractor shall continue
posting all required data to the prints. The Contractor shall minimize the
time that the reproducibles are away from the jobsite and shall update them
with all as-built data immediately upon their return. The preliminary
record drawings will be jointly inspected for accuracy and completeness by
the Contracting Officer's representative and the assigned representative of
the Contractor's Quality Control Organization prior to submission of each
SECTION 01 78 02.00 44 Page 3

monthly pay estimate. See paragraph, "Withholding for Preliminary Record

Drawings." The record drawings shall show the following information, but
not be limited thereto:
a. The location and description of utility lines or other installation

of any kind or description known to or found to exist within the
construction area. The location of exterior utilities includes actual
measured horizontal distances from utilities to permanent facilities/
features. These measurements shall be within an accuracy range of 6 inches
and shall be shown at sufficient points to permit easy location of
utilities for future maintenance purposes. Measurements shall be shown for
all change of direction points and all surface or underground components
such as valves, manholes, drop inlets, cleanouts, meter, etc. The general
depth range of each underground utility line shall be shown (i.e., 3 to 4
feet in depth). The description of exterior utilities includes the actual
quantity, size, and material of utility lines.
b. The location and size of all uncharted existing utilities

encountered.
c. The location and dimensions of any changes within the building or

structure.
d. Correct grade or alinement of roads, structures or utilities if any

changes were made from contract drawings.
e. Correct elevations if changes were made in site grading.
f. Changes in details of design or additional information obtained

from working drawings specified to be prepared and/or furnished by the
Contractor including but not limited to fabrication, erection, installation
plans and placing details, pipe sizes, insulation material, dimensions of
equipment foundations, etc.
g. The topography and grades of all drainage installed or affected as

a part of the project construction.
h. Options
Where contract drawings or specifications allow options, only the option

selected for construction shall be shown on the record drawings.
1.5.3.1 Blue Line or Black Line Prints
Blue line or black line prints shall be full size. All blue or black line
prints shall exhibit good readable print with clear, sharp, dark lines, and
shall not be smeared, faded, double imaged, or have torn or ragged edges.
1.5.3.2 Prefinal Inspection For Each Item of Work
As part of the prefinal inspection for each item of work, the current
updated preliminary marked-up record drawings and as-built CADD drawing
files will be reviewed. They shall comply with this specification prior to
scheduling the final inspection, and/or prior to substantial completion of
the item of work.
1.5.3.3 Preliminary Record Drawing Final Submittal
Prior to scheduling the red zone meeting and the final acceptance
SECTION 01 78 02.00 44 Page 4

inspection of the last or only bid schedule item of work, the updated
preliminary marked-up record drawings and the updated as-built CADD drawing
files shall be completed and delivered to the Contracting Officer's
Representative for review and approval. If upon review, the drawings and
files are found to contain errors and/or omissions, they will be returned
to the Contractor for corrections. Failure of the Contractor to make
timely delivery of the preliminary record drawings and files on any or all
items of work will be cause for the Government to delay substantial
completion and to assess liquidated damages in accordance with the terms
and conditions of the contract.
1.5.3.4 Withholding for Preliminary Record Drawings
Failure by the Contractor to maintain current and satisfactory preliminary

record drawings in accordance with these requirements will result in
withholding from progress payments 10 percent of the progress payment
amount until such time as the record drawings are brought into compliance.
This withheld amount will be indicated on monthly payment estimates until
the Contractor has fulfilled these contract requirements.
1.5.3.5 Final Inspection
For each interim item of work, furnish a copy of the preliminary record
drawings for that item, which the Contractor has reproduced from the
approved preliminary record drawing reproducibles, to the Contracting
Officer's representative at the time of final inspection for that item. At
the time of final inspection on the last or only item of work, the
Contractor shall deliver a copy of the complete set of the approved
preliminary record drawings to the Contracting Officer's Representative.
1.5.4 Final Record Drawings (No CADD Record Drawings)
For contracts that do not require the drawings' CADD files to be updated,
the preliminary record drawings, including fire protection/detection shop
drawings and other special drawings, upon approval, will be considered the
final record drawings and both sets will be retained by the Contracting
Officer.
1.5.5 Final Record Drawings (CADD Record Drawings)
When a task order requires the drawings' CADD files to be updated, and upon
approval of the preliminary record drawings, the Contracting Officer will
return the approved preliminary record drawing prints back to the
Contractor. The Contractor will then modify the CADD files as may be
necessary to correctly show all the features of the project as it was
constructed by bringing the contract set into agreement with the
preliminary record drawings, including adding additional drawings and CADD
files as may be necessary. The Contractor shall furnish the as-built
drawings in the same file format as the Working CADD files. The CADD files
will be furnished to the Contractor on a separate CD-ROM disk, in Bentley
Systems MicroStation . These CADD files are part of the permanent records
of this project and the Contractor shall be responsible for the protection
and safety thereof until returned to the Contracting Officer. Drawings,
tracings, or CADD files damaged or lost by the Contractor shall be
satisfactorily replaced by the Contractor at the Contractor's expense.
CADD files will be audited by the Contracting Officer and for accuracy and
conformance to the above specified drafting and CADD standards.
SECTION 01 78 02.00 44 Page 5

1.5.5.1 Drafting
Only personnel proficient in the preparation of engineering drawings and

CADD shall be employed to modify the original contract drawings, prepare
additional new drawings, and modify the CADD files. Additions and
corrections to the contract drawings shall be neat, clean, and legible and
shall match the adjacent existing line work and/or lettering being
annotated in type, density, size and style. All modifications, CADD
information, and new drawings shall conform to applicable requirements
specified in the paragraph "CADD Standards." The Contractor shall ensure
that all delivered CADD digital files and data (e.g., sheet files, model
files, cell/block libraries) are compatible with the Government's target
CADD system and operating system, and adhere to the standards and
requirements specified. The term "compatible" means that data is in native
digital format i.e., .dgn (MicroStation) or .dwg (AutoCAD). It is the
responsibility of the Contractor to ensure this level of compatibility.
1.5.5.2 CADD Standards
CADD Standards are specified in Section Section 01 35 10.00 44 SPECIAL

PROJECT PROCEDURES FOR FORT HOOD. and the COE-02 ("SWD Architectural and
Engineering Instruction Manual (AEIM)), Chapter VIII, "Drawings").
The CADD standards, including seed/prototype files containing the

Government's preset standard settings and electronic reference files
containing the Government's standard border/title block sheets, are
located at the following Web site:
http://tsc.wes.army.mil/products/standards/aec/aecstdweb.asp.
Mark modifications to Contract drawings in accordance with the Fort Worth

District's procedures for drawing modifications, which can be found in the
document "Preparing Amendments, Construction Award Sets & Construction
Modifications" located at
http://www.swf.usace.army.mil/pubdata/EC/eca/amendments.asp.
The Contractor shall submit a written request for approval of any

deviations from the Government's established CADD standards. Deviations
will not be permitted unless prior written approval of such deviations has
been received from the Government.
1.5.5.3 Final Revisions
When final revisions have been completed, place the words "REVISED RECORD
DRAWING," in letters at least 3/16 inch high, and the date of completion in
the revision block above the latest existing revision notation on each
drawing CADD file.
1.5.5.4 Border Sheets
The border sheet to be used for any new record drawings shall be the same
as used on the original drawings.
1.5.5.5 Copies of the Final Record Drawings
Blue line or black line prints shall be full size. All blue or black line
prints shall exhibit good readable print with clear, sharp, dark lines, and
shall not be smeared, faded, double imaged, or have torn or ragged edges.
SECTION 01 78 02.00 44 Page 6

1.5.5.6 Submittal Requirements
The Contractor shall submit to the Contracting Officer the final record
drawings, consisting of one set of full size black line prints; two sets
each of corrected electronic (CADD and.cal) files on CD-ROM or DVD disks;
verification that the electronic (CADD and .cal) files have been loaded and
work on the designated computer systems and are error- and virus-free; the
approved preliminary drawings; and all required reproduced items. The
corrected.cal files shall be compiled into sets so that the files can be
viewed and printed by the MaxView reader; sets shall be bookmarked by
sheet number and title. All paper prints and electronic CADD files will
become the property of the Government.
1.5.6 Post-Record Drawing Work
In event the Contractor accomplishes additional work which changes the

as-built conditions of the facility after submission of the record
drawings, the Contractor shall furnish revised and/or additional drawings (
hard copy and electronic (CADD and.cal) files), as required to depict
as-built conditions. Incorporate revised and additional files into the
completed sets of contract record electronic (CADD and .cal) files. The
requirements for these additional drawings and files, will be the same as
for the record drawings included in the original submission.
1.5.7 Payment for Final Record Drawings
The amount listed for Final Record Drawings in the CLIN Schedule, or in
this Section, as applicable, will be paid to the Contractor upon the
Contracting Officer's acceptance of the completed record drawings.
1.5.8 INVENTORY OF CONTRACTOR FURNISHED AND INSTALLED EQUIPMENT
The Contractor shall develop and maintain an up-to-date list of all

equipment installed under this contract. The list shall include but not be
limited to equipment that require electrical power or fuel, or may require
removal or replacement such as AHUs, fans, air conditioners, compressors,
condensers, boiler, thermal exchangers, pumps, cooling towers, tanks, fire
hydrants, sinks, water closets, lavatories, urinals, shower stalls, and any
other large plumbing fixtures, light fixtures, etc. The list shall be
reviewed periodically by the Government to insure completeness and
accuracy. Partial payment will be withheld for equipment not incorporated
in the list. Final list shall be turned over to the Authorized
Representative of the Contracting Officer at the time of contractor's
quality control completion inspection.
1.5.8.1 Equipment Identification Number
There are two separate Equipment ID numbering systems. One is for Real
Property installed equipment. The other is for Equipment in Place. Only
spaces filled with significant digits will be used. Do not add zeros or
blanks to fill extra spaces.
a. Real Property Installed Equipment (RFIE)
The equipment ID Number, for use with RPIE, is made of 4 parts. These
parts represent the building number, the equipment type suffix, the floor
the equipment is located on, and the sequence number of that type of
equipment on that floor in the building.
SECTION 01 78 02.00 44 Page 7

(1) The first part is the building number.
(2) The second part, the equipment type suffix, is a 1 digit

alpha-character based on IFS-M. Acceptable codes are:
(a) A - Air Conditioning Plant: Includes chillers, condensing

units, etc., excludes air conditioning plants that directly support user
end item equipment, such as a separate package unit to chill a computer
room equipment space. Excludes window air conditioning units.
(b) B - Compressed Air/Vacuum: Note, only those that are part

of the building systems such as pneumatic controls for Energy Management
and Control Systems (EMCS). Does not include compressed air and vacuum
systems that directly support user end items.
(c) C - Evaporative cooling and mechanical equipment.
(d) D - Dehumidification Equipment: Applies to equipment

whose sole purpose is dehumidification of facilities. Excludes
dehumidification that directly support user and item equipment.
(e) E - Electrical Generating Plants: Includes permanently

installed generators and switch gear associated with prime power and
emergency generator plants. Excludes uninterruptable power systems (UPS)
equipment.
(f) F - Transformers: Does not include transformers that

directly support user end items or equipment.
(g) G - Other Heating Support: Includes air handlers,

circulating pumps, etc., associated with heating systems. Also includes
dual (heating/cooling) air handlers, etc. Includes specialized central
energy management systems EMCS, exclusive of CPU's and peripherals.
(h) H - Heating Plants: Limited to direct fired, fuel burning

heating plants. Does not apply to electrical fired heaters, heat pumps, or
associated equipment. See Suffixes A, G, or M.
(i) I - Substation and Switching Station: Associates with

stepdown from incoming primary voltage to secondary voltage or lower
voltage primary voltage.
(j) J - Sewage Pumping Plants: Includes grinder pump type

sewage lift systems as well as conventional sewage lift stations,
associated controls and equipment.
(k) M - Miscellaneous Utilities: Includes gas generators,

cooling towers and other facility systems not otherwise identified.
Excludes systems associates with and in support of user end items.
(l) N - Liquid Fuel Dispensing: Includes pumps, controls.
(m) P - Cold Storage and Refrigeration Plants: Excludes

portable and prefabricated refrigeration systems which can be removed from
the facility.
(n) R - Fire Extinguishing Systems: Includes standpipe and

sprinkler systems, as well as fixed gas and/or chemical extinguishing
SECTION 01 78 02.00 44 Page 8

systems intended for protection of the facility. Excludes portable

extinguishing systems and fixed gas and/or chemical extinguishing systems
intended for protection of user and item equipment. Includes specialized
systems such as Engineer Smoke Control systems (ESCS) other than CPU's and
associated peripherals of such systems.
(o) S - Water Pumping Plants: Applies to potable and

nonpotable water pumping systems only. Excludes storm waste pumping
systems which should be includes under Equipment Suffix M.
(p) T - Fire and other Alarm Systems: Excludes security alarm

systems and alarm systems associated with user and item equipment such as
medical refrigerators and commissary display cases. Does not include
'pumpout' and 'overflow' alarms associates with water and sewage lift
stations and other similar facilities.
(q) W - Water Sources: Includes potable and non-potable well

equipment and storage tanks.
(r) X - Water Treatment and Filtration Plants: Includes water

softeners and deionization equipment in support of facility systems, as
well as systems for processing raw water to potability standards. Excludes
systems that directly support user and item equipment.
(s) Y - Industrial Waste and Sewage Treatment Plants:

Includes grease, oil, and other waste separators.
(t) Z - Special Purpose: Assigned by installation a case by

case basis.
(3) The third part, the floor, is a 1 to 2 alphanumeric

character. The system for defining floor number is:
(a) Floors, above and including the ground floor, are numbered
in ascending order with the ground floor being equal to 1.
(b) Interstitial floors and spaces are identified by the

letter 'I' and the number of the occupied floor below the interstitial
space. For example, the interstitial space above the third floor of a
building would be identified as: I3. Attic spaces are numbered as
interstitial space.
(c) Crawl space, below the first floor, is identified as: CS.
(d) Basements and lower level floors are numbered, in

descending order, with a 2 character identified. The first character is
the letter 'L' and the second character is the number of the floor with the
floor immediately under the ground floor being: L1.
(e) Where equipment, associates with a facility is mounted on

the ground outside the physical perimeter of the facility, such as a
condensing unit, the floor is identified a: G.
(4) The fourth part, the sequence number, is a 2 to 4 digit

character. The first digit shall always be a slash (/). The second
through fourth character is the sequential numbering (1 thru 999) of items
of equipment with identical first 3 parts of the equipment ID number. For
existing facilities, this will normally be given to the activity installing
the equipment by the O&M Division. For new facilities, this is assigned by
SECTION 01 78 02.00 44 Page 9

the activity installing the equipment.
b. For "Equipment In Place" Equipment
The equipment ID number, for use with equipment in place (i.e., end item
equipment which is not an integral part of the building but which is
installed in the building under this contract,) is made of 2 parts. These
parts represent the Department of Defense Activity Code (DODAC) of the unit
or equipment in the activity.
(1) The first part, the DODAC, is a 6 digit alpha-numeric

character representing the primary user or responsible organization. It
will be provided to the contractor upon request from the Contracting
Officer.
(2) The second part, the sequence number, is a 1 to 4 digit

character. It is the sequential numbering (1 thru 9999), of equipment in
that building, belonging to the DODAC. Questions, with respect to sequence
numbers, should be addressed to the O&M Division.
1.5.8.2 Equipment Data
List shall include on each item as applicable: Description, Manufacturer,

Model or Catalog No., Serial No., Input (power voltage, BTU, etc.), Output
(power, voltage, BTU, tons, etc.). Size or Capacity (tanks), and net
inventory costs; any other data necessary to describe item and shall list
all warrantors and warranty periods for each item of equipment.
1.5.9 INVENTORY OF CONTRACTOR FURNISHED AND INSTALLED EQUIPMENT
A list of equipment or units of equipment that require electrical power or

fuel, or may require removal or replacement such as AHUs, fans, air
conditioners, compressors, condensers, boiler, thermal exchangers, pumps,
cooling towers, tanks, fire hydrants, sinks, water closets, lavatories,
urinals, shower stalls, and any other large plumbing fixtures, light
fixtures, etc., shall be made and kept up to date as installed. The list
shall be reviewed periodically by the Government to insure completeness and
accuracy. Partial payment will be withheld for equipment not incorporated
in the list. List shall include on each item as applicable: Description,
Manufacturer, Model or Catalog No., Serial No., Input (power, voltage, BTU,
etc.), Output (power, voltage, BTU, tons, etc.), Size or Capacity (tanks),
and net inventory costs; any other data necessary to describe item and
shall list all warrantors and warranty periods for each item of equipment.
Final list shall be turned over to the Authorized Representative of the
Contracting Officer at the time of the Contractor's quality control
completion inspection.
1.6 ADDITIONAL WARRANTY REQUIREMENTS
The warranty requirements specified in this paragraph are in addition to

those specified in the Contract Clause 52.246-21 WARRANTY OF CONSTRUCTION.
1.6.1 CONSTRUCTION WARRANTY MANAGEMENT
1.6.1.1 Roof Warranties
Prior to the end of the one year warranty, the Contracting Officer may
conduct an infrared roof survey on any project involving a membrane roofing
system. This survey will be conducted in accordance with ASTM C 1153. The
SECTION 01 78 02.00 44 Page 10

Contractor shall be required to replace all damaged materials and to locate

and repair sources of moisture penetration.
1.6.1.2 Construction Warranty Management Plan
The Contractor shall develop a warranty management plan which shall contain
information relevant to the clause Warranty of Construction in FAR
52.246-21. At least 30 days before the planned pre-warranty conference,
the Contractor shall submit the warranty management plan for Government
approval. In the event of phased turn-over of the contract or task order,
the Contractor shall update his Warranty Management Plan as necessary to
include latest information required. The warranty management plan shall
include all required actions and documents to assure that the Government
receives all warranties to which it is entitled. The plan shall be in
narrative form and contain sufficient detail to render it suitable for use
by future maintenance and repair personnel, whether tradesmen, or of
engineering background, not necessarily familiar with this contract. The
term "status" as indicated below shall include due date and whether item
has been submitted or was accomplished. Warranty information made
available during the construction phase shall be submitted to the
Contracting Officer for approval prior to each monthly pay estimate.
Approved information shall be assembled in a binder and shall be turned
over to the Government upon acceptance of the work. The construction
warranty period shall begin on the date of project acceptance and shall
continue for the full product warranty period. Joint 4 month and 9 month
warranty inspections shall be conducted, measured from time of acceptance,
by the Contractor, Contracting Officer and the Customer Representative.
Information contained in the warranty management plan shall include, but
shall not be limited to, the following:
(a) Roles and responsibilities of all personnel associated with the

warranty process, including points of contact and telephone numbers
within the organizations of the Contractors, subcontractors,
manufacturers or suppliers involved.
(b) Listing and status of delivery of all Certificates of Warranty

for extended warranty items, to include roofs, HVAC balancing, pumps,
motors, transformers, and for all commissioned systems such as fire
protection and alarm systems, sprinkler systems, lightning protection
systems, etc.
(c) A list for each warranted equipment, item, feature of

construction or system indicating:
(i) Name of item.

(ii) Model and serial numbers.
(iii) Location where installed.
(iv) Name and phone numbers of manufacturers or suppliers.
(v) Names, addresses and telephone numbers of sources of spare
parts.
(vi) Warranties and terms of warranty. This shall include
one-year overall warranty of construction. Items which have
extended warranties shall be indicated with separate warranty
expiration dates.
(vii) Cross-reference to warranty certificates as applicable.
(viii) Starting point and duration of warranty period.
(ix) Summary of maintenance procedures required to continue the
warranty in force.
(x) Cross-reference to specific pertinent Operation and
SECTION 01 78 02.00 44 Page 11

Maintenance manuals.
(xi) Organization, names and phone numbers of persons to call
for warranty service.
(xii) Typical response time and repair time expected for various
warranted equipment.
(d) The Contractor's plans for attendance at the 4 and 9 month

post-construction warranty inspections conducted by the Government.
( e) Procedure and status of tagging of all equipment covered by

extended warranties.
Copies of instructions to be posted near selected pieces of

equipment where operation is critical for warranty and/or safety
reasons.
1.6.2 Performance Bond
It is understood that the Contractor's Performance Bond will remain

effective throughout the life of all warranties and warranty extensions.
This paragraph is applicable to the Contractor's Warranty of Construction
only and does not apply to manufacturers' warranties on equipment, roofing,
and other products.
(a) In the event the Contractor or the Contractor's designated

representative fails to commence and diligently pursue any work required
under the Warranty of Construction Paragraph within a reasonable time after
receipt of written notification pursuant to the requirements thereof, the
Contracting Officer shall have a right to demand that said work be
performed under the Performance Bond by making written notice on the
surety. If the surety fails or refuses to perform the obligation it
assumed under the Performance Bond, the Contracting Officer shall have the
work performed by others, and after completion of the work, shall make
demand for reimbursement of any or all expenses incurred by the Government
while performing the work, including, but not limited to administrative
expenses.
(b) Warranty repair work which arises to threaten the health or safety
of personnel, the physical safety of property or equipment, or which
impairs operations, habitability of living spaces, etc., will be handled by
the Contractor on an immediate basis as directed verbally by the
Contracting Officer or the Contracting Officer's authorized
representative. Written verification will follow verbal instructions.
Failure of the Contractor to respond as verbally directed will be cause for
the Contracting Officer or the Contracting Officer's authorized
representative to have the warranty repair work performed by others and to
proceed against the Contractor as outlined in the paragraph (a) above.
1.6.3 Pre-Warranty Conference
Prior to the Pre-Warranty Conference, the Contractor shall collect and

collate all original warranty documents, as required by paragraph titled
WARRANTY OF CONSTRUCTION and as required in accordance with the individual
technical specifications, into a single binder and submit to the Government
on an ENG 4025. The user will be provided with these original warrantee
documents at the Pre-Warranty Conference.
Prior to project completion, or completion of any phase or portion of

contract to be turned over, and at a time designated by the Contracting
SECTION 01 78 02.00 44 Page 12

Officer or Contracting Officer's authorized representative, the Contractor

shall meet with the Contracting Officer to develop a mutual understanding
with respect to the requirements of Contract Clause WARRANTY OF
CONSTRUCTION. Communication procedures for Contractor notification of
warranty defects, priorities with respect to the type of defect, reasonable
time required for Contractor response, and other details deemed necessary
by the Contracting Officer or Contracting Officer's authorized
representative for the execution of the construction warranty shall be
established/reviewed at this meeting.
In connection with these requirements and at the time of the Contractor's

quality control completion inspection, the Contractor will furnish the
Original Warranty Documents and the name, telephone number and address of a
licensed and bonded company which is authorized to initiate and pursue
warranty work action on behalf of the Contractor. This single warranty
point of contact will be located within the local service area of the
warrantied construction, will be continuously available, and will be
responsive to Government inquiry on warranty work action and status. This
requirement does not relieve the Contractor of any of Contractor's
responsibilities in connection with Contract Clause WARRANTY OF
CONSTRUCTION.
A 4-month, 9-month, and Final (12th month) Warranty Conference will be

conducted with the Contractor and Government to Review the progress and
outstanding Warranty Items. The Contractor provide the status of
outstanding Warranty Items at the meeting.
1.6.4 Equipment Warranty Tags
The Contractor shall provide warranty identification tags on all equipment,

Contractor and Government furnished, installed under this Contract.
1.6.4.1 Tag Description and Installation
The tags shall be similar in format and size to the exhibits provided by
this specification, they shall be suitable for interior and exterior
locations, resistant to solvents, abrasion, and to fading caused by
sunlight, precipitation, etc. These tags shall have a permanent
pressure-sensitive adhesive back, and they shall be installed in a position
that is easily (or most easily) noticeable. Contractor furnished equipment
that has differing warranties on its components will have each component
tagged.
1.6.4.2 Sample Tags
Sample tags shall be submitted to the Contracting Officer's Authorized

Representative for review and approval. These tags shall be filled out
representative of how the Contractor will complete all other tags.
1.6.4.3 Tags for Warranted Equipment
The tag for this equipment shall be similar to the following: Exact format
and size will be as approved by the Contracting Officer. The Contractor
warranty expires (warranty expiration date) and the final manufacturer's
warranty expiration dates will be determined as specified by the Contract
Clause "WARRANTY OF CONSTRUCTION."
SECTION 01 78 02.00 44 Page 13

_________________________________________________
| EQUIPMENT WARRANTY |
| CONTRACTOR FURNISHED EQUIPMENT |
| |
|MFG_______________________ MODEL NO.____________ |
| |
|SERIAL NO.______________________________________ |
| |
|CONTRACT NO.____________________________________ |
| |
|CONTRACTOR NAME_________________________________ |
| |
|CONTRACTOR WARRANTY EXPIRES_____________________ |
| |
|MFG WARRANTY(IES) EXPIRE________________________ |
| |
|WARRANTY [ ]REPAIRS/[ ]REPLACEMENT MADE:________ |
| |
|_________________________________________________|
_________________________________________________
| EQUIPMENT WARRANTY |
| GOVERNMENT FURNISHED EQUIPMENT |
| |
|MFG_______________________ MODEL NO._____________|
| |
|SERIAL NO.______________________________________ |
| |
|CONTRACT NO.____________________________________ |
| |
|DATE EQUIP PLACED IN SERVICE____________________ |
| |
|MFG WARRANTY(IES) EXPIRE________________________ |
| |
| |
|_________________________________________________|
1.6.4.4 Duplicate Information
If the manufacturer's name (MFG), model number, and serial number are on
the manufacturer's equipment data plate and this data plate is easily found
and fully legible, this information need not be duplicated on the equipment
warranty tag.
1.6.4.5 Execution
The Contractor will complete the required information on each tag and
install these tags on the equipment by the time of and as a condition of
final acceptance of the equipment. The Contractor will schedule this
activity in the Contractor progress reporting system. The final acceptance
inspection is scheduled based upon notice from the Contractor, thus if the
Contractor is at fault in this inspection being delayed, the Contractor
will, at the Contractor's own expense, update the in-service and warranty
expiration dates on these tags.
SECTION 01 78 02.00 44 Page 14

1.6.4.6 Updating Equipment Warranty Tags
Repairing or replacing warranted equipment shall include an updated

warranty identification tag on the repaired or replaced equipment. Using a
fine point permanent marker pen, update the tag by checking whether the
equipment was repaired or replaced, and indicate the date the work was
completed. If the equipment was replaced, furnish a new tag, identical to
the original tag, except that the MFG., MODEL NO., SERIAL NO., and DATE
EQUIP PLACED IN SERVICE items shall be updated. Also, check the box
indicating that the equipment has been replaced and indicate the date of
replacement.
1.6.5 Contractor's Response to Construction Warranty Service Requirements
The following warranty service requirements are applicable to contracts for

Fort Hood and will supplement requirements listed in Paragraph: Warranty
of Construction. Following notification by the Contracting Officer or the
Contracting Officer's Representative the Contractor shall respond to a
warranty service requirement identified by the Contracting Officer's
Representative in accordance with the "Warranty Service Priority List" of
this program. This list prioritizes warranty work into the categories.
The Contractor shall submit a warranty report on any warranty item that has
been repaired during the warranty period. The report shall include the
cause of the problem, date reported, corrective action taken, and when the
repair was completed. If the Contractor does not perform the construction
warranty within the timeframes specified, the Government may elect to
acquire warranty repairs through other sources and, if so, shall backcharge
the Contractor for the cost of such repairs. Such backcharges shall be
accomplished under the Changes Clause of the Contract through a credit
modification. Such modifications shall include a Government administration
fee per occurrence.:
First Priority 1A Perform on site inspection to evaluate situation,

determine course of action, initiate work within 24 hours and work
continuously to completion or relief.
Second Priority 1B Perform on site inspection to evaluate situation,

determine course of action, initiate work within 48 hours and work
Third Priority All other work to be initiated within 5 work days and work
The "Warranty Service Priority List" is as follows:
1A Air Traffic Control and Air Navigation Systems and Equipment.
1A Air Conditioning System

a. Hospital.
b. Buildings with computer equipment.
c. Commissary and Main PX.
d. Clubs.
e. Barracks, mess halls, BOQ/BEQ (entire building down).
f. Troop medical and dental.
1B Air Conditioning Systems

a. Recreational support.
b. Air conditioning leak in part of building, if causing
damage.
SECTION 01 78 02.00 44 Page 15

c. Admin buildings with ADP equipment not on priority list.
1A Doors
a. Overhead doors not operational.
1A Electrical
a. Power failure (entire area or any building operational
after 1600 hours).
b. Traffic control devices.
c. Security lights.
1B Electrical
a. Power failure (no power to a room or part of building).
b. Receptacle and lights.
c. Fire alarm systems.
1A Gas
a. Leaks and breaks.
b. No gas to family housing unit or cantonment area.
1A Heat
a. Hospital/Medical facilities.
b. Commissary and Main PX.
c. Clubs.
d. Area power failure affecting heat.
1B Heat
a. Medical storage.
b. Barracks.
1A Intrusion Detection Systems

Finance, PX and Commissary, and high security areas.
1B Intrusion Detection Systems

Systems other than priority 1A.
1A Kitchen Equipment
a. Dishwasher.
b. All other equipment hampering preparation of a meal.
1B Kitchen Equipment
All other equipment not in priority 1A.
1B Plumbing
a. Flush valves.
b. Fixture drain, supply line commode, or water pipe leaking.
c. Commode leaking at base.
1A Refrigeration
a. Commissary.
b. Mess hall.
c. Cold storage.
d. Hospital.
e. Medical storage.
1B Refrigeration
Mess hall - other than walk-in refrigerators and freezers.
1A Roof Leaks
SECTION 01 78 02.00 44 Page 16

Temporary repairs will be made where major damage to

property is occurring.
1B Roof Leaks
Check for location of leak during rain to be repaired on
priority 2 (major damage to property is not occurring).
1A Swimming Pools
Chlorine leaks or broken pumps.
1A Tank Wash Racks (Bird Baths)

All systems which prevent tank wash.
1A Water (Exterior)
Normal operation of water pump station.
1B Water (Exterior)
No water to facility.
1A Water, Hot (and Steam)

a. Hospitals.
b. Mess halls.
c. BOQ, BEQ, barracks (entire building).
d. Medical and dental.
1B Water, Hot
No hot water in portion of building listed in priority 1A
(items a through c).
1A Sprinkler System
All sprinkler systems, valves, manholes, deluge systems,
and air systems to sprinklers.
Code 1-Building Automation and Control Systems

(1) Systems and equipment not working properly
(1) Equipment or software malfunction
Should parts be required to complete the work and the parts are not
immediately available the Contractor shall have a maximum of 12 hours after
arrival at the job site to provide the Contracting Officer's Representative
with firm written proposals for emergency alternatives and temporary
repairs for Government participation with the Contractor to provide
emergency relief until the required parts are available on site for the
Contractor to perform permanent warranty repair. The Contractors proposals
shall include a firm date and time that the required parts shall be
available on site to complete the permanent warranty repair. The
Contracting Officer's Representative will evaluate the proposed
alternatives and negotiate the alternative considered to be in the best
interest of the Government to reduce the impact of the emergency condition.
Alternatives considered by the Contracting Officer's Representative will
include the alternative for the Contractor to "Do Nothing" while waiting
until the required parts are available to perform permanent warranty
repair. Negotiating a proposal which will require Government participation
and the expenditure of Government funds shall constitute a separate
procurement action by the using service.
1.7 MECHANICAL TESTING, ADJUSTING, BALANCING, AND COMMISSIONING
Prior to final inspection and transfer of the completed facility; all
SECTION 01 78 02.00 44 Page 17

reports, statements, certificates, and completed checklists for testing,

adjusting, balancing, and commissioning of mechanical systems shall be
submitted to and approved by the Contracting Officer as specified in
applicable technical specification sections.
1.8 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
The Contractor shall be responsible for the preparation, coordination,

execution and submittal of all Equipment Operating, Maintenance, and Repair
manuals (O & M Manuals), including spare parts lists (with the names and
PHONE NUMBERS of local suppliers), special tools, inventories of equipment
manuals, and maintenance instructions, and shall conduct all training for
operating and service personnel. Operation and maintenance manuals shall
cover all system installations provided in this Contract and shall be in
sufficient detail to facilitate normal maintenance and troubleshooting by
persons with minimum experience with the installed equipment.
1.8.1 Submittal Requirements
All of the above listed items required in the technical specifications

shall be fully developed and submitted to the Contracting Officer not less
than 120 calendar days for contracts whose construction durations are 1
year or greater or 30 calendar days for durations less than 1 year prior to
the scheduled final acceptance inspection date and prior to scheduling
training for operating and service personnel. The Contractor shall
coordinate the content of each instruction period required in the technical
specifications with the Contracting Officer's Representative prior to the
actual start of the training period.
1.8.1.1 Field Training
Field Training is a requirement for substantial completion. The Contractor

shall conduct a training course for the operating staff for each particular
system. The training is to be conducted during hours of normal working
time and shall start after the system is functionally complete. The field
instructions shall cover all of the items contained in the Equipment
Operating, Maintenance and Repair Manuals. The training will include both
classroom and "hands-on" training. The Contractor shall submit a lesson
plan outlining the information to be discussed during training periods.
This lesson plan will be submitted 90 days before contract completion and
approved before the field training occurs. Training shall be recorded on
video tape (VHS FORMAT) or DVD and shall be furnished to the Government
within ten (10) days following training. The taping shall include the
entire session(s). The original video tape(s) or DVD's shall be labeled
and turned over to the Contracting Officer. The video cameras, tapes, and
DVD's utilized by the Contractor shall be of a quality to enable clear and
understandable playbacks of the recorded events. Training shall be
documented by the Contractor and a list of attendees shall be furnished to
the Government.
1.8.1.2 Draft O & M Manuals
On those systems where complete and comprehensive operation and maintenance

manuals cannot be fully developed until the system(s) is (are) checked,
tested, and/or balanced, and the checking, testing, and/or balancing has
not been done when submittals are required, a proposed draft of those
system manual(s) shall be submitted. The covers of draft O & M Manuals
shall be labeled "DRAFT" in large (not less than font size 24), legible,
printed letters. Submit fully developed O & M Manuals for approval after
SECTION 01 78 02.00 44 Page 18

the systems have been checked, tested, and/or balanced but prior to the
scheduled final acceptance inspection date. The amount indicated in the
Bidding Schedule for "Operation and Maintenance Manuals" with be withheld
until submittal and approval of all fully developed O & M Manuals.
1.8.1.3 Commencement of Warranty of Construction
Failure to submit all specified O & M manuals, spare parts listings, spare
parts, special tools, inventories of installed property, and training video
tapes in a timely manner will be considered as delaying substantial
completion of the work. Commencement of warranty under the Contract Clause
WARRANTY OF CONSTRUCTION will not occur until all these items are delivered
and approved by the Contracting Officer, but not earlier than the date of
final acceptance of the work by the Government. When the O & M Manuals
with drafts are approved they will not constitute a reason for delaying the
start of the warranty period.
1.8.2 Government Possession of Work
The Government may take possession of any completed or partially completed

work as provided for under Contract Clause entitled "USE AND POSSESSION
PRIOR TO COMPLETION." If the installed equipment and/or systems thereto,
have not been accepted by the Government due to the Contractor's failure to
submit the above specified items, the Contractor shall operate and maintain
such plant or system at no additional cost to the Government until such
time that the specified items have been received, approved and any
subsequent testing, check-out and/or training has been completed.
1.9 PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION OF OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
This paragraph establishes general requirements for the preparation and

submission of equipment operating, maintenance, and repair manuals as
called for in the various sections of the specifications. Specific
instruction(s) relating to a particular system or piece of equipment shall
be incorporated into the manuals in accordance with the applicable
technical specification. See Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
DATA for additional information concerning the Operation and Maintenance
data packages required by the technical sections.
1.9.1 General Requirements
Furnish one permanent electronic copy of the final Equipment Operating,

Maintenance, and Repair Manuals on CD-ROM disk along with the number of
hard copies specified in the Section 00 73 00 SPECIAL CONTRACT
REQUIREMENTS, clause OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE. Provide 6 hard copies of
the final O&M manuals unless the specified number is higher. Documents on
the CD-ROM disk drive shall be in portable document format (.pdf); all
printed and graphic documents, drawings, and illustrations shall be legible
and bookmarked. Hard copy requirements are specified below.
1.9.1.1 Hard Cover Binders
The manuals shall be 3-ring binders with a hard cover, from which material
may readily be removed and replaced. Binders shall have a separate section
for each system or subsystem. Separate the sections with heavy plastic
dividers having tabs which identify the material in the section. The
following identification shall be inscribed on the cover: the words
"EQUIPMENT OPERATING, MAINTENANCE, AND REPAIR MANUAL:" and the name,
building number, location, and indication of utility or systems covered.
SECTION 01 78 02.00 44 Page 19

Manuals shall be approximately 8-1/2 by 11 inches with large sheets folded

in and capable of being easily pulled out for reference. All manuals for a
single facility must be similar in appearance.
1.9.1.2 Warning Page
A warning page shall be provided to warn of potential dangers (if they

exist), such as high voltage, toxic chemicals, flammable liquids, explosive
materials, carcinogens, or high pressures. The warning page shall be
placed inside the front cover, in front of the title page.
1.9.1.3 Title Page
The title page shall show the name of the preparing firm (designer or
contractor) and the date of publication.
1.9.1.4 Table of Contents
Provide in accordance with standard commercial practice.
1.9.2 Equipment Operating, Maintenance, and Repair Manuals
1.9.2.1 General
Separate manuals shall be provided for each utility system as defined

hereinafter. Manuals shall be provided in the number of copies specified
in the applicable technical section. Manuals shall include, in separate
sections, the following information for each item of equipment. These
requirements may be supplemented by additional requirements specified in
the technical sections:
a. Performance sheets and graphs showing capacity data, efficiencies,

electrical characteristics, pressure drops, and flow rates. Marked-up
catalogs or catalog pages do not satisfy this requirement. Performance
information shall be presented as concisely as possible and contain only
data pertaining to equipment actually installed.
b. Catalog cuts showing application information.
c. Installation information showing minimum acceptable requirements.
d. Operation and maintenance requirements. Include adequate

illustrative material to identify and locate operating controls, indicating
devices and locations of areas or items requiring maintenance.
(1) Describe, in detail, starting and stopping procedures for

components, adjustments required to obtain optimum equipment performance,
and corrective actions for malfunctions.
(2) Maintenance instructions describing the nature and frequency

of routine maintenance and procedures to be followed. Indicate any special
tools, materials, and test equipment that may be required.
e. Repair information including diagrams and schematics, guidance for

diagnosing problems, and detailed instructions for making repairs. Provide
troubleshooting information that includes a statement of the indication or
symptom of trouble and the sequential instructions necessary. Include test
hookups to determine the cause, special tools and test equipment, and
methods for returning the equipment to operating conditions. Information
SECTION 01 78 02.00 44 Page 20

may be in chart form or in tabular format with appropriate headings.
f. Parts lists with names and addresses of closest parts supply

agencies, the current unit prices, and the sources of supply. Include
spare parts data for each different item of materials and equipment
specified.
g. Names and addresses of local manufacturers representatives.
1.9.2.2 Facility Heating Systems
Information shall be provided on the following equipment: Boilers, water

treatment, chemical feed pumps and tanks, converters, heat exchangers,
pumps, unit heaters, fin-tube radiation, air handling units (both heating
only and heating and cooling), and valves (associated with heating systems).
1.9.2.3 Air-Conditioning Systems
Provide information on chillers, packaged air-conditioning equipment,

towers, water treatment, chemical feed pumps and tanks, air-cooled
condensers, pumps, compressors, air handling units, and valves (associated
with air-conditioning systems).
1.9.2.4 Temperature Control and HVAC Distribution Systems
a. Provide the information described for the following equipment:
Valves, fans, air handling units, pumps, boilers, converters, and heat
exchangers, chillers, water cooled condensers, cooling towers, and
fin-tube radiation.
b. Provide all information described for the following equipment:
Control air compressors, control components (sensors, controllers,

adapters, and actuators), and flow measuring equipment.
1.9.2.5 Central Heating Plants
Provide the information described for the following equipment: Boilers,

converters, heat exchangers, pumps, fans, steam traps, pollution control
equipment, chemical feed equipment, control systems, fuel handling
equipment, de-aerators, tanks (flash, expansion, return water, etc.), water
softeners, and valves.
1.9.2.6 District Heating Distribution Systems
Provide the information described for the following equipment: Valves,

fans, pumps, converters and heat exchangers, steam traps, tanks (expansion,
flash, etc.) and piping systems.
1.9.2.7 Exterior Electrical Systems
Information shall be provided on the following equipment: Power

transformers, relays, reclosers, breakers, and capacitor bank controls.
1.9.2.8 Interior Electrical Systems
Information shall be provided on the following equipment: Relays, motor

control centers, switchgear, solid state circuit breakers, motor
SECTION 01 78 02.00 44 Page 21

controller, and EPS lighting systems, control systems (wire diagrams and
troubleshooting flow chart), and special grounding systems.
1.9.2.9 Energy Management and Control System
The maintenance manual shall include descriptions of maintenance for all

equipment, including inspection, periodic preventative maintenance, fault
diagnosis, and repair or replacement of defective components.
1.9.2.10 Domestic Water Systems
The identified information shall be provided on the following equipment:

Tanks, unit process equipment, pumps, motors, control and monitoring
instrumentation, laboratory test equipment, chemical feeders, valves,
switching gear, and automatic controls.
1.9.2.11 Wastewater Treatment Systems
The identified information shall be provided on the following equipment:

Tanks, unit process equipment, pumps, motors, control and monitoring
instrumentation, laboratory test equipment, chemical feeders, valves,
scrapers, skimmers, comminutors, blowers, switching gear, and automatic
controls.
1.9.2.12 Fire Protection Systems
Information shall be provided on the following equipment: Alarm valves,

manual valves, regulators, foam and gas storage tanks, piping materials,
sprinkler heads, nozzles, pumps, and pump drivers.
1.9.2.13 Fire Detection Systems
The maintenance manual shall include description of maintenance for all

equipment, including inspection, periodic preventive maintenance, fault
diagnosis, and repair or replacement of defective components.
1.9.2.14 Plumbing Systems
Information shall be provided on the following equipment: Water heaters,

valves, pressure regulators, backflow preventors, piping materials, and
plumbing fixtures.
1.9.2.15 Liquid Fuels Systems
Information shall be provided on the following equipment: Tanks, automatic

valves, manual valves, filter separators, pumps, mechanical loading arms,
nozzles, meters, electronic controls, electrical switch gear, and fluidic
controls.
1.9.2.16 Cathodic Protection Systems
Information shall be provided on the following material and equipment:

Rectifiers, meters, anodes, anode backfill, anode lead wire, insulation
material and wire size, automatic controls (if any), rheostats, switches,
fuses and circuit breakers, type and size of rectifying elements, type of
oil in oil-immersed rectifiers, and rating of shunts.
SECTION 01 78 02.00 44 Page 22

1.9.2.17 Generator Installations
Information shall be provided on the following equipment: Generator sets,

automatic transfer panels, governors, exciters, regulators, starting
systems, switchgear, and protective devices.
1.9.2.18 Miscellaneous Systems
Information shall be provided on the following: Communication and ADP

systems, security and intrusion alarm, elevators, material handling, active
solar, photovoltaic, and other similar type special systems not otherwise
specified.
1.10 RED ZONE MEETING
Approximately 60 days before the anticipated Beneficial Occupancy Date

(BOD)but prior to the final acceptance inspection of the last or only bid
schedule item of work, the Contractor's Supervisor and Quality Control
Manager and the Government's project delivery team will conduct what is
known as the Red Zone Meeting to discuss the close-out process, to schedule
the events and review responsibilities for actions necessary to produce a
timely physical, as well as fiscal, project close-out. The Red Zone meeting
derives its name from the football term used to describe the team effort to
move the ball the last 20 yards into the end zone. The close-out of a
construction project sometimes can be equally as hard and most definitely
requires the whole team's efforts. The ACO will chair the meeting. Exhibit
One is a generic meeting checklist.
1.11 REAL PROPERTY RECORD
DD Form 1354, TRANSFER AND ACCEPTANCE OF MILITARY REAL PROPERTY, is the

formal document that the Corps of Engineers uses to transfer project
ownership to the installation. The Installation uses the document to
update their real property maintenance records. Upon award of a
construction contract, the Ft. Worth District Cost Engineering &
Specifications Section (CESWF-EC-AC) will enter the project data and
contract costs available at the time of award into the Government's
Resident Managers System (RMS) database. This data is captured on an Excel
spreadsheet and electronically uploaded into RMS, from which the actual DD
Form 1354 can then be printed.
After award of the construction contract, the Contractor shall assist the
Corps of Engineers construction field office by updating the Excel
spreadsheet data that will be provided at the Preconstruction Meeting. The
Government will provide to the Contractor a copy of the Excel file used to
record the construction changes and provide instructions for updating the
data through the life of the project.
The data - when required - consists of:
1. A description of the item

2. The applicable Category Code
3. The item's contract cost to the Government
4. The quantity and unit of measure
This assistance will be required when a construction modification is

issued. When a construction modification occurs that impacts quantities
SECTION 01 78 02.00 44 Page 23

and/or costs, such as installing 150 LF of new 10" water main, the DD Form
1354 data will require changes to existing line items and/or additional
line items of data due to the construction modification. The Contractor
shall assist by providing the new construction data (quantities/costs)
broken down by applicable Category Codes necessary for the Government to
use in updating the DD Form 1354 data in RMS. The updated Excel
spreadsheet shall be provided at the Red Zone meeting or no later than 60
days prior to anticipated BOD or project completion. Data shall be
provided to the Contracting Officer Representative.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EQUIPMENT WARRANTY IDENTIFICATION TAGS
The Contractor shall complete the required information on each tag and
install these tags on the equipment by the time of and as a condition of
final acceptance of the equipment. The Contractor shall schedule this
activity in the Contractor progress reporting system. The final acceptance
inspection is scheduled based upon notice from the Contractor, thus if the
Contractor is at fault in this inspection being delayed, the Contractor
will, at his own expense, update the in-service and warranty expiration
dates of these tags.
3.1.1 Equipment Warranty Tag Replacement
Under the terms of this Contract, the Contractor's warranty with respect to
work repaired or replaced shall run for one year from the date of repair or
replacement. Such activity shall include an updated warranty
identification tag on the repaired or replaced equipment. The tag shall be
furnished and installed by the Contractor, and shall be identical to the
original tag, except that the Contractor's warranty expiration date will be
one year from the date of acceptance of the repair or replacement.
3.2 FINAL CLEANING
The premises shall be left broom clean. Stains, foreign substances, and
temporary labels shall be removed from surfaces. Carpet and soft surfaces
shall be vacuumed. Equipment and fixtures shall be cleaned to a sanitary
condition. Filters of operating equipment shall be cleaned . Debris shall
be removed from roofs, drainage systems, gutters, and downspouts. Paved
areas shall be swept and landscaped areas shall be raked clean. The site
shall have waste, surplus materials, and rubbish removed. The project area
shall have temporary structures, barricades, project signs, and
construction facilities removed. A list of completed clean-up items shall
be submitted on the day of final inspection .
SECTION 01 78 02.00 44 Page 24

3.3 EXHIBIT 1
SAMPLE
Red Zone Meeting Checklist

Date:_____________
Contract No.:________________________________________________________
Description / Location:______________________________________________
Contractor: _______________________________________________________
Contracting Officer: ______________________________________________
Action Completion Milestone
Inspections _________________________________________________________
Fire ________________________________________________________________
Safety ______________________________________________________________
Pre-final ___________________________________________________________
Mechanical Test & Balance ___________________________________________
Commissioning _______________________________________________________
Landscaping Complete ________________________________________________
Beneficial Occupancy Date (BOD) _____________________________________
Furniture Installation ______________________________________________
Comm Installation ___________________________________________________
As-Built Contract Drawings __________________________________________
Provide all O&M manuals, tools,
shop drawings, spare parts, etc.
provided to customer _______________________________________________
Provide Warranty documents to Customer ______________________________
Contract completion ________________________________________________
Final Inspection ___________________________________________________
User move-in ________________________________________________________
DD Form 1354, Transfer of Real
Property completed & signed _______________________________________
Ribbon cutting _____________________________________________________
DD Form 2626 - Construction
Contractor Performance Evaluation ________________________________
DD Form 2631 - A-E Performance Rated
after Construction _______________________________________________
Final Payment Completed ____________________________________________
Release of Claims (see Exhibit 2) ___________________________________
Return of Unobligated Funds ________________________________________
Move Project from CIP to
General Ledger ____________________________________________________
Financial completion _______________________________________________
SECTION 01 78 02.00 44 Page 25

3.4 EXHIIT 2
FINAL PAYMENT RELEASE
The undersigned as the Contractor under Contract No. W9126G-__-_-____ dated

________________ between the United States of America and said Contractor,
for ________________________________________ located at in accordance with
paragraph (____) of Contract Clause _______, PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR, of
said Contract, hereby releases the United States, its officers, agents, and
employees from any and all claims relating to or arising by virtue of said
Contract, or any modification or change thereto, except with respect to
those claims, if any, listed below:
(Identify claim or if none, write in "none.")
Executed this ____ day of _____________ 20__
(Contractor's name in CAPS)
By _______________________________________
Title_____________________________________
SECTION 01 78 02.00 44 Page 26

SECTION 01 78 23
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUBMISSION OF OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
Submit Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Data specifically applicable to this

contract and a complete and concise depiction of the provided equipment,
product, or system, stressing and enhancing the importance of system
interactions, troubleshooting, and long-term preventative maintenance and
operation. The subcontractors shall compile and prepare data and deliver
to the Contractor prior to the training of Government personnel. The
Contractor shall compile and prepare aggregate O&M data including
clarifying and updating the original sequences of operation to as-built
conditions. Organize and present information in sufficient detail to
clearly explain O&M requirements at the system, equipment, component, and
subassembly level. Include an index preceding each submittal. Submit in
accordance with this section and Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES.
1.1.1 Package Quality
Documents must be fully legible. Poor quality copies and material with
hole punches obliterating the text or drawings will not be accepted.
1.1.2 Package Content
Data package content shall be as shown in the paragraph titled "Schedule of

Operation and Maintenance Data Packages." Comply with the data package
requirements specified in the individual technical sections, including the
content of the packages and addressing each product, component, and system
designated for data package submission, except as follows. Commissioned
items without a specified data package requirement in the individual
technical sections shall use Data Package 3 in paragraph SCHEDULE OF
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA PACKAGES. Commissioned items with a Data
Package 1 or 2 requirement shall use instead Data Package 3.
1.1.3 Changes to Submittals
Manufacturer-originated changes or revisions to submitted data shall be

furnished by the Contractor if a component of an item is so affected
subsequent to acceptance of the O&M Data. Changes, additions, or revisions
required by the Contracting Officer for final acceptance of submitted data,
shall be submitted by the Contractor within 30 calendar days of the
notification of this change requirement.
1.1.4 Review and Approval
The Government's Commissioning Authority (CA) shall review the commissioned

systems and equipment submittals for completeness and applicability. The
Government shall verify that the systems and equipment provided meet the
requirements of the Contract documents and design intent, particularly as
they relate to functionality, energy performance, water performance,
maintainability, sustainability, system cost, indoor environmental
quality, and local environmental impacts. This work shall be in addition
to the normal review procedures for O&M data.
1.2 TYPES OF INFORMATION REQUIRED IN O&M DATA PACKAGES
1.2.1 Operating Instructions
Include specific instructions, procedures, and illustrations for the

following phases of operation for the installed model and features of each
system:
1.2.1.1 Safety Precautions
List personnel hazards and equipment or product safety precautions for all
operating conditions.
1.2.1.2 Operator Prestart
Include procedures required to install, set up, and prepare each system for
use.
1.2.1.3 Startup, Shutdown, and Post-Shutdown Procedures
Provide narrative description for Startup, Shutdown and Post-shutdown

operating procedures including the control sequence for each procedure.
1.2.1.4 Normal Operations
Provide narrative description of Normal Operating Procedures. Include

Control Diagrams with data to explain operation and control of systems and
specific equipment.
1.2.1.5 Emergency Operations
Include Emergency Procedures for equipment malfunctions to permit a short

period of continued operation or to shut down the equipment to prevent
further damage to systems and equipment. Include Emergency Shutdown
Instructions for fire, explosion, spills, or other foreseeable
contingencies. Provide guidance and procedures for emergency operation of
all utility systems including required valve positions, valve locations and
zones or portions of systems controlled.
1.2.1.6 Operator Service Requirements
Include instructions for services to be performed by the operator such as

lubrication, adjustment, inspection, and recording gage readings.
1.2.1.7 Environmental Conditions
Include a list of Environmental Conditions (temperature, humidity, and

other relevant data) that are best suited for the operation of each
product, component or system. Describe conditions under which the item
equipment should not be allowed to run.
1.2.2 Preventive Maintenance
Include the following information for preventive and scheduled maintenance

to minimize corrective maintenance and repair for the installed model and
features of each system. Include potential environmental and indoor air
quality impacts of recommended maintenance procedures and materials.
1.2.2.1 Lubrication Data
Include preventative maintenance lubrication data, in addition to

instructions for lubrication provided under paragraph titled "Operator
Service Requirements":
a. A table showing recommended lubricants for specific temperature ranges

and applications.
b. Charts with a schematic diagram of the equipment showing lubrication

points, recommended types and grades of lubricants, and capacities.
c. A Lubrication Schedule showing service interval frequency.
1.2.2.2 Preventive Maintenance Plan and Schedule
Include manufacturer's schedule for routine preventive maintenance,

inspections, tests and adjustments required to ensure proper and economical
operation and to minimize corrective maintenance. Provide manufacturer's
projection of preventive maintenance work-hours on a daily, weekly,
monthly, and annual basis including craft requirements by type of craft.
For periodic calibrations, provide manufacturer's specified frequency and
procedures for each separate operation.
1.2.3 Corrective Maintenance (Repair)
Include manufacturer's recommended procedures and instructions for

correcting problems and making repairs.
1.2.3.1 Troubleshooting Guides and Diagnostic Techniques
Include step-by-step procedures to promptly isolate the cause of typical

malfunctions. Describe clearly why the checkout is performed and what
conditions are to be sought. Identify tests or inspections and test
equipment required to determine whether parts and equipment may be reused
or require replacement.
1.2.3.2 Wiring Diagrams and Control Diagrams
Wiring diagrams and control diagrams shall be point-to-point drawings of

wiring and control circuits including factory-field interfaces. Provide a
complete and accurate depiction of the actual job specific wiring and
control work. On diagrams, number electrical and electronic wiring and
pneumatic control tubing and the terminals for each type, identically to
actual installation configuration and numbering.
1.2.3.3 Maintenance and Repair Procedures
Include instructions and a list of tools required to repair or restore the

product or equipment to proper condition or operating standards.
1.2.3.4 Removal and Replacement Instructions
Include step-by-step procedures and a list required tools and supplies for
removal, replacement, disassembly, and assembly of components, assemblies,
subassemblies, accessories, and attachments. Provide tolerances,
dimensions, settings and adjustments required. Instructions shall include
a combination of text and illustrations.
1.2.3.5 Spare Parts and Supply Lists
Include lists of spare parts and supplies required for maintenance and
repair to ensure continued service or operation without unreasonable
delays. Special consideration is required for facilities at remote
locations. List spare parts and supplies that have a long lead-time to
obtain.
1.2.4 Corrective Maintenance Work-Hours
Include manufacturer's projection of corrective maintenance work-hours

including requirements by type of craft. Corrective maintenance that
requires completion or participation of the equipment manufacturer shall be
identified and tabulated separately.
1.2.5 Appendices
Provide information required below and information not specified in the

preceding paragraphs but pertinent to the maintenance or operation of the
product or equipment. Include the following:
1.2.5.1 Product Submittal Data
Provide a copy of all SD-03 Product Data submittals required in the

applicable technical sections.
1.2.5.2 Manufacturer's Instructions
Provide a copy of all SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions submittals required

in the applicable technical sections.
1.2.5.3 O&M Submittal Data
Provide a copy of all SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data submittals

required in the applicable technical sections.
1.2.5.4 Parts Identification
Provide identification and coverage for all parts of each component,

assembly, subassembly, and accessory of the end items subject to
replacement. Include special hardware requirements, such as requirement to
use high-strength bolts and nuts. Identify parts by make, model, serial
number, and source of supply to allow reordering without further
identification. Provide clear and legible illustrations, drawings, and
exploded views to enable easy identification of the items. When
illustrations omit the part numbers and description, both the illustrations
and separate listing shall show the index, reference, or key number that
will cross-reference the illustrated part to the listed part. Parts shown
in the listings shall be grouped by components, assemblies, and
subassemblies in accordance with the manufacturer's standard practice.
Parts data may cover more than one model or series of equipment,
components, assemblies, subassemblies, attachments, or accessories, such as
typically shown in a master parts catalog
1.2.5.5 Warranty Information
List and explain the various warranties and clearly identify the servicing
and technical precautions prescribed by the manufacturers or contract
documents in order to keep warranties in force. Include warranty
information for primary components such as the compressor of air

conditioning system.
1.2.5.6 Personnel Training Requirements
Provide information available from the manufacturers that is needed for

use in training designated personnel to properly operate and maintain the
equipment and systems.
1.2.5.7 Testing Equipment and Special Tool Information
Include information on test equipment required to perform specified tests

and on special tools needed for the operation, maintenance, and repair of
components.
1.2.5.8 Testing and Performance Data
Include completed prefunctional checklists, functional performance test

forms, and monitoring reports. Include recommended schedule for retesting
and blank test forms.
1.2.5.9 Contractor Information
Provide a list that includes the name, address, and telephone number of the
General Contractor and each Subcontractor who installed the product or
equipment, or system. For each item, also provide the name address and
telephone number of the manufacturer's representative and service
organization that can provide replacements most convenient to the project
site. Provide the name, address, and telephone number of the product,
equipment, and system manufacturers.
1.3 TYPES OF INFORMATION REQUIRED IN CONTROLS O&M DATA PACKAGES
Include Data Package 5 and the following for control systems:
a. Narrative description on how to perform and apply all functions,

features, modes, and other operations, including unoccupied operation,
seasonal changeover, manual operation, and alarms. Include detailed
technical manual for programming and customizing control loops and
algorithms.
b. Full as-built sequence of operations.
c. Copies of all checkout tests and calibrations performed by the

Contractor (not Cx tests).
d. Full points list. A listing of rooms shall be provided with the

following information for each room:
(1) Floor
(2) Room number
(3) Room name
(4) Air handler unit ID
(5) Reference drawing number
(6) Air terminal unit tag ID
(7) Heating and/or cooling valve tag ID
(8) Minimum cfm
(9) Maximum cfm
e. Full print out of all schedules and set points after testing and
acceptance of the system.
f. Full as-built print out of software program.
g. Electronic copy on disk or CD of the entire program for this facility.
h. Marking of all system sensors and thermostats on the as-built floor

plan and mechanical drawings with their control system designations.
1.4 SCHEDULE OF OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA PACKAGES
Furnish the O&M data packages specified in individual technical sections.

The required information for each O&M data package is as follows:
1.4.1 Data Package 1
Package Usage Definition: Use Data Package 1 for architectural items

requiring simple but specific maintenance and replacement; for example,
acoustical ceiling, floor tile or carpeting system.
a. Safety precautions
b. Cleaning recommendations
c. Maintenance and repair procedures
d. Warranty information
e. Contractor information
f. Spare parts and supply list
Package Usage Definition: Use Data Package 2 for an item that is less
simple than required for Data Package 1; for example, an item having a
motor and some sequence of operation such as a refrigerated drinking
fountain.
b. Normal operations
c. Environmental conditions
d. Lubrication data
e. Preventive maintenance plan and schedule
f. Cleaning recommendations
g. Maintenance and repair procedures
h. Removal and replacement instructions
i. Spare parts and supply list
j. Parts identification
k. Warranty information
l. Contractor information
Package Usage Definition: Use Data Package 3 for a complex piece of

equipment, having a specific troubleshooting sequence, but one which
does not require an operator on watch; for example, HVAC temperature
controls.
b. Operator prestart
c. Startup, shutdown, and post-shutdown procedures
d. Normal operations
e. Emergency operations
f. Environmental conditions
g. Lubrication data
h. Preventive maintenance plan and schedule
i. Cleaning recommendations
j. Troubleshooting guides and diagnostic techniques
k. Wiring diagrams and control diagrams
l. Maintenance and repair procedures
m. Removal and replacement instructions
n. Spare parts and supply list
o. Product submittal data
p. O&M submittal data
q. Parts identification
r. Warranty information
s. Testing equipment and special tool information
t. Testing and performance data
u. Contractor information
Package Usage Definition: Use Data Package 4 for an extremely complex

piece of equipment, having an extensive sequence of operation, a
complex troubleshooting sequence and one requiring frequent operator
attention; at least for start-up and shut-down. Examples of this case
would be small boilers and small diesel generator sets.
c. Startup, shutdown, and post-shutdown procedures
e. Emergency operations
f. Operator service requirements
g. Environmental conditions
h. Lubrication data
i. Preventive maintenance plan and schedule
j. Cleaning recommendations
k. Troubleshooting guides and diagnostic techniques
l. Wiring diagrams and control diagrams
m. Maintenance and repair procedures
n. Removal and replacement instructions
o. Spare parts and supply list
p. Corrective maintenance man-hours
q. Product submittal data
r. O&M submittal data
s. Parts identification
t. Warranty information
u. Personnel training requirements
v. Testing equipment and special tool information
w. Testing and performance data
x. Contractor information
Package Usage Definition: Use Data Package 5 for electrical equipment,

components, or systems on which, wiring and control diagrams are needed
for operation, maintenance, or repair. Examples of this case are 400
Hz frequency converters, annunciator panels, and cathodic protection
systems.
c. Start-up, shutdown, and post-shutdown procedures
e. Environmental conditions
f. Preventive maintenance plan and schedule
g. Troubleshooting guides and diagnostic techniques
h. Wiring and control diagrams
i. Maintenance and repair procedures
j. Removal and replacement instructions
k. Spare parts and supply list
l. Product submittal data
m. Manufacturer's instructions
n. O&M submittal data
o. Parts identification
p. Testing equipment and special tool information
q. Warranty information
r. Testing and performance data
s. Contractor information
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not Used
SECTION 01 91 00
GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

ACG Commissioning Guideline (2005) Commissioning Guideline
AMERICAN SOCIETY OF HEATING REFRIGERATING AND AIR-CONDITIONING

ENGINEERS
ASHRAE Commissioning Guideline (2007) HVAC&R Technical Requirements for

the Commissioning Process
NEBB Commissioning Standard (2009) Procedural Standards for Whole

Building Systems Commissioning of New
Construction; 3rd Edition
LEED (2009) Leadership in Energy and

1.2 DEFINITIONS
1.2.1 Basis of Design (BOD)
A document that records concepts, calculations, system selection decisions,

and product selections used to meet the OPR and to satisfy applicable
regulatory requirements, standards, and guidelines. The document includes
both narrative descriptions and lists of individual items that support the
design process.
1.2.2 Commissioning
The process to assure the Government that building equipment, controls and
systems function together properly to meet design intent and performance
requirements shown in a composite manner in the Contract Documents.
1.2.3 Commissioning Plan
The Commissioning Plan is prepared by the Commissioning Authority and

defines the scope and format of the commissioning process and the
responsibilities of all involved parties. The Commissioning Plan is
provided to all commissioning team members to inform them of the intent and
scope of the commissioning work to ensure inclusion in the project scope
and to expedite the commissioning process.
1.2.4 CxA
The Commissioning Authority
1.2.5 Functional Performance Testing
That full range of checks and tests carried out to determine if all
components, sub-systems, systems and interfaces between systems function in
accordance with the Contract Documents. In this context, "function"
includes all modes and sequences of control operation, all interlocks and
conditional control responses and all specified responses to abnormal
emergency conditions. The functional performance tests will be prepared by
the CxA.
1.2.6 Issues Log
The purpose of this log is to provide a method for tracking and resolution
of deficiencies discovered as a result of the commissioning process. This
list also includes the current disposition of issues and the date of final
resolution as confirmed by the Commissioning Authority. Deficiencies are
defined as those issues where products, execution or performance do not
satisfy the Specifications and/or the design intent. The Issues Log will be
created and managed by the Commissioning Authority.
1.2.7 Pre-functional Construction Checklists
Checklist is prepared by the Commissioning Authority. Checklist shall be by

system or equipment to verify installation and start-up of equipment is
complete and ready for functional testing. These documents require
signature by the Contractor prior to continuing with the commissioning
process.
1.2.8 Systems Manual
The systems manual includes the operation manual, maintenance manual, and
additional information of use to the owner during occupancy and
operations. This manual expands the scope of traditional operating and
maintenance manuals to include other project information such as plans and
specifications, approved submittals, operating and optimization procedures,
training / commissioning records, and additional information developed and
gathered during commissioning.
1.3 SUMMARY
1.3.1 [Enter Appropriate Subpart Title Here]1.3.1 The Commissioning

Authority is an independent and knowledgeable third party, contracted through
the DOR, to verify that the systems work as intended. The Commissioning
Authority will inform the Contractor and Contracting Officer of the results
of the commissioning and provide suggestions, as necessary, to correct
deficiencies in observed performance or installation.
1.3.1.1 [Enter Appropriate Subpart Title Here]1.3.2 This project is

implementing the requirements of LEED and pursuing the Enhanced Commissioning
credit as described under Energy and Atmosphere.
1.3.3 Commissioning is the process to verify to the Government that

systems, equipment, mechanical, electrical, controls and special systems
function together properly to meet performance requirements and design
intent, and as described in the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall be
responsible for participation in the commissioning process as outlined below
and in references and attachments throughout the Contract Documents. The
Contractor shall furnish labor and materials sufficient to meet all
requirements of building commissioning under this contract.
1.3.4 Sections in the Division 22, 23 and 26 Specifications outline the

specific commissioning responsibilities of each Contractor for the division
and also obligate the General Contractor to coordinate and manage the
commissioning responsibility of those subcontractors.
1.4 RELATED SECTIONS
Section 22 08 00 - Plumbing Systems Commissioning
Section 23 08 00 - Mechanical Systems Commissioning
Section 26 08 00 - Electrical Systems Commissioning
1.5 [Enter Appropriate Subpart Title Here]1.5 COMMISSIONING TEAM
1.5.1 Members Appointed by Contractor(s): Individuals, each having the

authority to act on behalf of the entity represented, explicitly organized to
implement the commissioning process through coordinated action. The
commissioning team shall consist of, but not be limited to, representatives
of Contractor, including Commissioning Specialist, Project superintendent and
subcontractors, installers, suppliers, Test and Balance specialists and other
specialists deemed appropriate by the CxA.
1.5.2 Members Appointed by Owner

1. CxA: The designated person, company, or entity that plans,
schedules, and coordinates the commissioning team to implment
the commissioning process. The CxA will be engaged under a
seperate contract
2. Representatives of the facility user and operation and
maintenance personnel.
3. Architect and engineering design professionals.
1.6 SUBMITTALS

submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control.
When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the
office that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the
following in accordance with Section 01 33 00
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Commissioning Plan G
Commissioning Plan prepared in accordance with Commissioning

Standard, no later than 28 days after the approval of the
Commissioning Agent
SD-03 Product Data
Pre-Functional Performance Test Checklists G
At least 28 days prior to the start of Pre-Functional

Performance Test Checks. Submit the schedule for the test checks
at least 14 days prior to the start of Pre-Functional Performance
Test Checks.
Test procedures at least 28 days prior to the start of

Functional Performance Tests. The schedule for the tests at least
14 days prior to the start of Functional Performance Tests.
SD-06 Test Reports
Commissioning Report G
No later than 14 days after completion of Functional Performance

Tests.
SD-07 Certificates
Commissioning Firm G
Certification of the proposed Commissioning Firm's

qualifications by one of the following ACG, NEBB, or TABB to
perform the duties specified herein and in other related Sections,
no later than 21 days after the Notice to Proceed. Include in the
documentation the date that the Certification was initially
granted and the date when the current Certification expires. Any
lapses in Certification of the proposed Commissioning Firm or
disciplinary action taken by ACG, NEBB, or TABB against the
proposed Commissioning Firm shall be described in detail.
Commissioning Specialist G
Certification of the proposed Commissioning Agent's

qualifications by one of the following ACG, NEBB, or TABB to
perform the duties specified herein and in other related Sections,
no later than 21 days after the Notice to Proceed. The
documentation shall include the date that the Certification was
initially granted and the date when the current Certification
expires. Any lapses in Certification of the proposed
Commissioning Specialist or disciplinary action taken by ACG,

NEBB, or TABB against the proposed Commissioning Specialist shall
be described in detail.
1.5.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.5.1.1 Commissioning Firm
The Commissioning Firm shall be either a member of ACG or certified by the

NEBB or the TABB and certified in all categories and functions where
measurements or performance are specified on the plans and specifications.
The certification shall be maintained for the entire duration of duties
specified herein. If, for any reason, the firm loses subject certification
during this period, immediately notify the Contracting Officer and submit
another Commissioning Firm for approval. Any firm that has been the subject
of disciplinary action by the ACG, the NEBB, or the TABB within the five
years preceding Contract Award is not eligible to perform any duties
related to the HVAC systems, including commissioning. All work specified in
this Section and in other related Sections to be performed by the
Commissioning Firm shall be considered invalid if the Commissioning Firm
loses its certification prior to Contract completion and must be performed
by an approved successor. These Commissioning services are to assist the
prime Contractor in performing the quality oversight for which it is
responsible. The Commissioning Firm shall be a consultant of the DOR.
1.7.2 Commissioning Agent
The Commissioning Agent shall be an ACG Certified Commissioning Agent, a

NEBB Qualified Commissioning Administrator, or a TABB Certified
Commissioning Supervisor and shall be an employee of the approved
Commissioning Firm. The certification shall be maintained for the entire
duration of duties specified herein. If, for any reason, the Commissioning
Agent loses subject certification during this period, immediately notify
the Contracting Officer and submit another Commissioning Agent for
approval. Any individual that has been the subject of disciplinary action
by the ACG, the NEBB, or the TABB within the five years preceding Contract
Award is not eligible to perform any duties related to the HVAC systems,
including Commissioning. All work specified in this Section and in other
related Sections performed by the Commissioning Agent shall be considered
invalid if the Commissioning Agent loses his certification prior to
Contract completion and must be performed by the approved successor.
1.8 DUTIES OF CONTRACTOR
1.8.1 Provide copies of all shop drawings, manufacturer's literature,

maintenance information or other information as may be needed for systems to
be commissioned to the Commissioning Authority.
1.8.2 Collect the information requested by Commissioning Authority for

development of a complete Commissioning Plan and functional tests and provide
to the Commissioning Authority. The Contractor shall review these documents
and confirm in writing to the Contracting Officer, Architect and
Commissioning Authority any known areas of conflict or areas requiring
clarifications.
1.8.3 Collect all proposed start-up and Pre-functional Construction

Checklists documentation and provide that information to the Commissioning
Authority.
1.8.4 Plan for and incorporate commissioning activities into the

construction schedule.
1.8.5 Provide a fully operational system per Specifications, started,

verified, debugged, calibrated, balanced, tested and under automatic control.
1.8.6 Provide qualified personnel to participate in the commissioning tests,

including seasonal testing.
1.8.7 Cooperate with the Commissioning Authority's personnel.
1.8.8 Provide access to site for the Commissioning Authority for review,
verification and testing activities.
1.8.9 Provide adequate time and resources to assist Commissioning Authority

with functional testing of system to be commissioned in contract.
1.8.10 Coordinate participation of the mechanical, electrical, controls and

TAB subcontractors in the commissioning process.
1.8.11 Provide Commissioning Authority with submittals for all systems to be

commissioned including controls system and wiring diagrams and narrative
sequences of operation, in time for use in preparing the Functional Test
Procedures.
1.8.12 Verify that coordination, installation, quality control and final

testing have been completed such that installed systems and equipment comply
with construction documents.
1.8.13 Review the Commissioning Plan, Communication Reports and test results
and submit comments to the Commissioning Authority.
1.8.14 In a timely manner, address issues identified during construction that

may affect the commissioning process or final system performance.
1.8.15 Perform start-up and testing of mechanical and electrical equipment

and systems and document as required with start-up reports and completion of
Pre-functional Construction Checklists. These checklists include installation
documentation, start-up documentation, controls point-to-point documentation
and calibration documentation, verification that controls sequence of
operations meets design intent and TAB final documentation. Reports will be
stored in the Contractor's field trailer. Contractor will coordinate efforts
to complete the pre-functional documentation.
1.8.16 Lead verification testing of fire/smoke dampers and direct the

resolution of deficiencies. Each damper and all functions of shall be tracked
in a matrix spreadsheet.
1.8.17 Provide preliminary TAB report, indicating all actual field values
recorded to the Commissioning Authority, prior to initiation of functional
testing. These reports shall be incorporated in the commissioning field
notebook.
1.8.18 Issue a written Notice of Readiness for each system to Contracting

Officer and Commissioning Authority upon completion of all systems work,
start-up and Pre-functional Construction Checklists requirements by trade
contractors.
1.8.19 Operate equipment and systems as required for functional performance

testing. This includes, but is not limited to, manipulating the appropriate
controls systems to execute the Functional Test Procedures.
1.8.20 Participate in the fine-tuning or troubleshooting of system

performance, if either of these measures becomes necessary.
1.8.21 Submit complete operation and maintenance information and as-built

drawings to the Commissioning Authority for verification, organization and
distribution.
1.8.22 Provide documentation of training for the systems specified.
1.9 DUTIES OF COMMISSIONING AUTHORITY
1.9.1 Develop the Commissioning Plan.
1.9.2 Develop Functional Test Procedures from Contract Documents and final
equipment submittals including narrative sequences of operation, control
diagrams and software code for execution with the assistance of Contractor
staff as required.
1.9.3 Perform site observations to follow installation progress and to

verify system installation quality and readiness for testing.
1.9.4 Review submittal of all required pre-functional and start-up

documentation provided by Contractor for completeness and reasonableness.
This includes installation documentation, start-up documentation,
point-to-point checklists and preliminary TAB report, prior to initiation of
functional testing.
1.9.5 Schedule, direct and witness complete functional testing as defined

in the Commissioning Plan and Functional Test Procedures. All testing shall
be performed by the Contractors and documented by the Commissioning
Authority.
1.9.6 Conduct commissioning meetings.
1.9.7 Provide site observation, functional tests or other project reports

in a timely manner.
1.9.8 Document inconsistencies or deficiencies in system operations and

system compliance. System deficiencies shall be forwarded to the Contractor
and Contracting Officer and documented in a Communication Log.
1.9.9 Coordinate the participation of Government's personnel with

equipment, component and systems performance verification and participation
in required training.
1.9.10 When commissioning has been successfully completed, recommend

acceptance to the Government.
1.9.11 Once all functional tests have been successfully completed and all
outstanding issues resolved, the Commissioning Authority will provide the
Contracting Officer with a Final Commissioning Report of all commissioning
activities that occurred during the project.
1.9.12 Provide technically qualified personnel when scheduled. Verify that

the specified training schedule of Government's personnel is provided.
1.9.13 The Commissioning Authority will formally communicate with the

Contractor via approved project channels. It is expected, that informal
communication and coordination will be conducted directly with the
subcontractors; records of all contacts will be sent to the Contracting
Officer through the normal channels.
1.10 COMMISSIONING PLAN
Members Appointed by Contractor(s): Individuals, each having the authority

to act on behalf of the entity represented, explicitly organized to implement
the commissioning process through coordinated action. The commissioning team
shall consist of, but not be limited to, representatives of Contractor,
including Commissioning Specialist, Project superintendent and
subcontractors, installers, suppliers, Test and Balance specialists and other
specialists deemed appropriate by the CxA.
1. The purpose of commissioning

2. Detail the commissioning process
3. Commissioning team members' responsibilities
4. Describe Pre-functional Construction Checklist Procedures
5. Provide a guideline for acceptance of each piece equipment
or system
6. Systems to be commissioned
1.11 SYSTEMS TO BE COMMISSIONED
1.11.1 Systems and Equipment to Be Functionally Tested: The functional

performance testing will include the following systems and equipment:
1. Mechanical Systems: All HVAC systems and equipment.

2. Plumbing Systems: Domestic water heater, solar water heating
systems, and pumps.
3. Electrical System: Lighting Controls.
1.12 COORDINATION
Contractor's Commissioning Specialist
The General Contractor shall assign a person with extensive mechanical and
commissioning experience, capable of coordinating the disciplines of
construction. The coordinator's responsibilities include:
Communication with Commissioning Agent

Commissioning coordination meeting attendance (5 meetings)
Planning and Scheduling
Review of final functional performance test procedures
Functional performance test participation
Corrective actions
Review the commissioning requirements as defined in this
Specification section and in the Commissioning Plan.
Request clarification as needed.
Respond to assigned items on the Commissioning Action List
Completion of all Commissioning requirements as defined in this
specification and resolution of all Commissioning Action Items
assigned to the Contractor is a requirement for systems
acceptance.
1.13 SCHEDULING
The Functional Performance Tests described in this Section shall begin only
after all work and testing on systems to be commissioned has been
successfully completed, and after all test and inspection reports and
operation and maintenance manuals required in these Sections have been
submitted to and approved by the Cx Authority.
1.14 COMMISSIONING ACTIVITIES
1.14.1 The Commissioning Schedule: This schedule defines the milestones and
conditions that must be achieved before system testing and other
commissioning activities can commence. The schedule also includes the
expected duration of the various tasks so that the commissioning process can
be incorporated into the overall construction schedule.
1.14.2 Preparation for Testing: To prepare for the system performance

testing, the Commissioning Authority will examine the design and Construction
Documents, develop with appropriate Contractors Pre-functional Construction
Checklists of construction responsibilities that must be completed prior to
testing and develop detailed Functional Test Procedures and data forms.
Using the Pre-functional Construction Checklists, the Contractor must verify

that the systems they install are in compliance with the Construction
Documents and are fully functional. Commissioning is not intended to be a
testing or inspection function that replaces any of the Contractors'
obligations for testing and proof of performance. Functional testing will
only begin when checklists are completed by the appropriate subcontractors,
initialed, signed and returned to the Commissioning Authority.
1.14.3 Functional Testing: Functional testing is performed by experienced

and qualified technicians of the Contractor(s), responsible for installation
as facilitated by the Commissioning Authority and may be observed by other
members of the commissioning team. Functional testing will verify proper
sequencing, operation and performance of installed equipment and systems
under realistic operating conditions. The functional testing will follow with
written Functional Test Procedures with test results documented for permanent
record.
1.14.4 Documentation: In addition to the Pre-functional Construction

Checklists and Functional Test Procedures, written documentation will be
maintained for all other commissioning activities. Observation reports shall
be issued by the Commissioning Authority to the Contractor and key members of
the commissioning team to document apparent deficiencies identified during
examination of design and construction documents, daily activities on-site,
construction deficiencies and successful or unsuccessful functional test
results. At the end of the commissioning process, all documentation will be
assembled and summarized in the Final Commissioning Report.
1.14.5 Deficiency Resolution: When a Communication Report is issued to

address an identified deficiency, the Contractor shall forward the reports to
the appropriate parties to initiate corrective action in an expeditious
manner. The designer is relied on for supplemental instructions or design
modifications and issuance of final design details and the Contractors are
relied on for implementation of that design. Change orders must be issued
through proper contract channels.
1.15 FUNCTIONAL TEST PROCEDURES
The Functional Test Procedures include, but are not limited to, the
following:
1.15.1 Verification of testing, adjusting and balancing performance.
1.15.2 Verification of all equipment's ability to perform to the design

intent.
1.15.3 Verification of the performance of sub-systems consisting of

combinations of equipment (e.g., refrigeration cycle, pumps and
interconnecting piping).
1.15.4 Verification of the performance of the automatic controls in all

seasonal modes.
1.15.5 Verification of the performance of the HVAC system as a whole.
1.15.6 Verification of the performance of all life safety devices and

systems that interface with the HVAC systems.
1.16 LEED SYSTEMS MANUAL
Contractor shall prepare and submit the following documents for inclusion in
the LEED Systems Manual compiled by the Commissioning Agent:
System single line diagrams
As-built sequences of operation, control drawings, and original setpoints.

Recommended schedule for recalibrating sensors and actuators. Recommended
schedule and frequency for each manufacturer's recommended
maintenance activity.
The submission shall be in an electronic format compatible with the rest of

the Systems Manual sections (Adobe PDF). It shall be formatted for printing
no larger than 11"x17" and preferably 8.5" x 11".
1.16 LEED SYSTEMS MANUAL
Contractor shall prepare and submit the following documents for inclusion in
the LEED Systems Manual compiled by the Commissioning Agent:
System single line diagrams
As-built sequences of operation, control drawings, and original setpoints.

Recommended schedule for recalibrating sensors and actuators. Recommended
schedule and frequency for each manufacturer's recommended
maintenance activity.
The submission shall be in an electronic format compatible with the rest

of the Systems Manual sections (Adobe PDF). It shall be formatted for
printing no larger than 11"x17" and preferably 8.5" x 11".
PART 2 PRODUCTS - Not Used
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 COMMISSIONING TEAM AND CHECKLISTS
The Contractor shall designate team members to participate in the

Installation Checks and the Functional Performance Testing specified herein.
The team members for installation checks shall be as follows:

Contractor's Mechanical Representative
Contractor's Electrical Representative
Contractor's Controls Representative
Contractor's Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Representative
The team members for functional performance testing shall be as follows:
Using Agency Representative

Commissioning Agent
The following may be required to participate as team members during

Functional Performance Testing at the request of the Commissioning Agent:

Contractor's Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Representative
Completed Installation Checklists: The commissioning team shall complete the

Installation Checklists and the Functional Performance Tests lists prepared
by the Commissioning Agent. Acceptance by each commissioning team member of
each installation checklist item shall be indicated by initials and date.
Acceptance by each commissioning team member of each functional performance
test checklist shall be indicated by signature and date.
3.2 TESTS
Testing and verification shall demonstrate that all commissioned components

have been installed, that each control device and item of equipment operates,
and that the system operates in accordance with contract documents.
Requirements in related Sections are independent from the requirements of
this Section and shall not be used to satisfy any of the requirements
specified in this Section.
3.2.1 Installation Checks
Customized Installation Checklists shall be prepared by the Commissioning

Agent after reviewing submittals, change orders, supplemental instructions,
and other construction-phase modifications and/or additions to the designed
systems. The Contractors shall review and comment on preliminary checklists
prior to the Commissioning Agent issuing Final checklists.
There will be one Installation Checklist for each System. Example

Installation Checklists are available upon request to the Commissioning Agent
and are included in the Commissioning Plan.
Completion of the Installation Checklists shall be a joint effort between all

Contractors and the subcontractors responsible for each system. The
Contractor's Commissioning Specialist shall be responsible for coordinating
and submitting completed Installation Checklists.
In addition to verifying that all equipment and associated hardware is

installed properly, provide documentation verifying manufacturer's
performance of calibration at least one (1) week prior to functional
performance testing.
Submit Installation Checklists upon completion of the checklist. System

functional performance testing shall not commence until its system is
documented as being ready for testing.
3.2.2 Functional Performance Tests
Customized functional performance test procedures shall be prepared by the

Commissioning Agent after reviewing submittals, change orders, supplemental
instructions, proposal requests, and other construction-phase modifications
and/or additions to the designed systems. The Contractors shall review and
comment on draft test procedures prior to the Commissioning Agent issuing
final procedures. Provide feedback as to the efficiency of the procedures and
possible alternate approaches to achieving the same results.
Provide input into the project scheduling process with regard to timing and
duration of the functional performance test procedures.
Functional performance tests shall be performed for each commissioned system.

Functional performance tests shall verify all control responses, safeties,
interlocks, operating modes, capacities, and all other relevant contract
requirements comply with contract documents. Individual functional
performance tests shall begin only after the respective system's installation
checklist has been successfully completed.
Upon failure of any functional performance test procedure item (refer to

section 3.2.4), the Contractor shall correct all deficiencies in accordance
with the applicable contract requirements. The functional performance test
procedure shall then be repeated until it has been completed with no errors.
3.2.3 Deficiency Tracking/Corrective Actions
During construction or testing anyone finding deficiencies may communicate

the deficiencies in writing to the Commissioning Agent who will input the
information into the Issues Log.
Corrective actions taken to resolve deficiencies will be inspected by the Cx

Authority for completeness. If the issue is resolve, the item will be closed
on the Issues Log. The final commissioning report will include the project
Issue Log, with all items closed or accepted by owner.
3.2.4 Retesting
Retesting will occur as follows:
Aborted Tests
An installation check or functional performance test may be aborted if any
system deficiency prevents the successful completion of the test or if any
participating non-Government commissioning team member of which participation
is specified is not present for the test.
Failed Tests
A system test is deemed to "fail" if one or more of the test steps do not
result in the required reaction, regardless of whether or not the
deficiencies are corrected during the sample tests.
Retesting is conducted on the systems which experienced the initial

failures to the extent deemed necessary by the Commissioning Agent to confirm
that the deficiencies have been corrected without negatively impacting the
performance of the rest of the system. IN ADDITION, another random sample of
the same size as the initial sample of systems is tested for the first time.
If the second random sample set has ANY failures, retesting is conducted
on those failed systems and ALL remaining systems to complete 100% functional
performance testing of that system type.
Upon notification of the completion of a Commissioning Action Item, the

Commissioning Agent will schedule retesting of the affected system with the
Contracting Officer's Representative (COR) and Contractor to verify
satisfactory resolution of the deficiency.
3.3 EQUIPMENT O&M TRAINING
Coordinate operation and maintenance training activities for the equipment

and systems being commissioned through the Commissioning Agent and the Owner.
The contractor shall submit the name, company and phone number for the
proposed trainer(s) on each training session. This information shall be
submitted to the Commissioning Agent no later than two (2) weeks after
receipt of Training Agendas from the Commissioning Agent.
Schedule the training dates with the Owner for the convenience of the
trainees. Training may be deferred for equipment that is inoperable (e.g.,
due to weather conditions, future startup, etc.) during pre-substantial
completion training.
3.3 SEASONAL COMMISSIONING AND OCCUPANCY VARIATIONS
3.3.1 Seasonal commissioning pertains to testing under full-load conditions

during peak heating and peak cooling seasons, as well as part-load conditions
in the spring and fall. Initial commissioning will be done as soon as
contract work is completed, regardless of season. Subsequent commissioning
may be undertaken at any time thereafter to ascertain adequate performance
during the different seasons.
3.3.2 All equipment and systems will be tested and commissioned in a peak
season to observe full-load performance. Heating equipment will be tested
during winter design extremes. Cooling equipment will be tested during summer
design extremes, with a fully occupied building. Each Contractor and supplier
will be responsible to participate in the initial and the alternate peak
season test of the systems required to demonstrate performance.
3.3.3 Subsequent commissioning may be required under conditions of minimum

and/or maximum occupancy or use. All equipment and systems affected by
occupancy variations will be tested and commissioned at the minimum and peak
loads to observe system performance. Each Contactor and supplier will be
responsible to participate in the occupancy sensitive testing of systems to
provide verification of adequate performance.
-- End of Section -
SECTION 02 41 00
DEMOLITION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

AHRI Guideline K (2009) Guideline for Containers for

Recovered Non-Flammable Fluorocarbon
Refrigerants

(AASHTO)
AASHTO M 145 (1991; R 2008) Standard Specification for

Classification of Soils and Soil-Aggregate
Mixtures for Highway Construction Purposes
AASHTO T 180 (2010) Standard Method of Test for

Moisture-Density Relations of Soils Using
a 4.54-kg (10-lb) Rammer and a 457-mm
(18-in.) Drop
ASSE/SAFE A10.6 (2006) Safety Requirements for Demolition

Operations
CRI 104 (2002) Standard for Installation

Specification of Commercial Carpet
EM 385-1-1 (2008; Change 1-2010; Change 3-2010;

Errata 1-2010) Safety and Health
Requirements Manual
U.S. DEFENSE LOGISTICS AGENCY (DLA)
DLA 4145.25 (June 2000) Storage and Handling of

Liquefied and Gaseous Compressed Gases and
Their Full and Empty Cylinders
DOD 4000.25-1-M (2006) MILSTRIP - Military Standard

Requisitioning and Issue Procedures
MIL-STD-129 (2007; Rev P; Change 4 2007) Military

Marking for Shipment and Storage
40 CFR 61 National Emission Standards for Hazardous

Air Pollutants
40 CFR 82 Protection of Stratospheric Ozone
49 CFR 173.301 Shipment of Compressed Gases in Cylinders

and Spherical Pressure Vessels
1.2 PROJECT DESCRIPTION
1.2.1 Demolition Plan
Prepare a Demolition PlanDeconstruction Plan and submit proposed salvage,

demolition, and removal procedures for approval before work is started.
Include in the plan procedures for careful removal and disposition of
materials specified to be salvaged, coordination with other work in progress,
a disconnection schedule of utility services, and a detailed description of
methods and equipment to be used for each operation and of the sequence of
operationsCoordinate with Waste Management Plan. Provide procedures for
safe conduct of the work in accordance with EM 385-1-1. Plan shall be
approved by Contracting Officer prior to work beginning.
Do not begin demolition or deconstruction until authorization is received

from the Contracting Officer. Remove rubbish and debris from the project
site; do not allow accumulations inside or outside the building. The work
includes demolition, salvage of identified items and materials, and removal
of resulting rubbish and debris. Remove rubbish and debris from Government
property daily, unless otherwise directed. Store materials that cannot be
removed daily in areas specified by the Contracting Officer. In the
interest of occupational safety and health, perform the work in accordance
with EM 385-1-1, Section 23, Demolition, and other applicable Sections.
1.3 ITEMS TO REMAIN IN PLACE
Take necessary precautions to avoid damage to existing items to remain in

place, to be reused, or to remain the property of the Government. Repair
or replace damaged items as approved by the Contracting Officer.
Coordinate the work of this section with all other work indicated.
Construct and maintain shoring, bracing, and supports as required. Ensure
that structural elements are not overloaded. Increase structural supports
or add new supports as may be required as a result of any cutting, removal,
deconstruction, or demolition work performed under this contract. Do not
overload pavements to remain. Provide new supports and reinforcement for
existing construction weakened by demolition, deconstruction, or removal
work. Repairs, reinforcement, or structural replacement require approval
by the Contracting Officer prior to performing such work.
1.3.1 Existing Construction Limits and Protection
Do not disturb existing construction beyond the extent indicated or

necessary for installation of new construction. Provide temporary shoring
and bracing for support of building components to prevent settlement or

other movement. Provide protective measures to control accumulation and
migration of dust and dirt in all work areas. Remove snow, dust, dirt, and
debris from work areas daily.
1.3.2 Weather Protection
For portions of the building to remain, protect building interior and

materials and equipment from the weather at all times. Where removal of
existing roofing is necessary to accomplish work, have materials and
workmen ready to provide adequate and temporary covering of exposed areas.
1.3.3 Trees
Protect trees within the project site which might be damaged during
demolition or deconstruction, and which are indicated to be left in place,
by a 6 foot high fence. Erect and secure fence a minimum of 5 feet from
the trunk of individual trees or follow the outer perimeter of branches or
clumps of trees. Replace any tree designated to remain that is damaged
during the work under this contract with like-kind or as approved by the
1.3.4 Utility Service
Maintain existing utilities indicated to stay in service and protect

against damage during demolition and deconstruction operations. Prior to
start of work, utilities serving each area of alteration or removal will be
shut off by the Government and disconnected and sealed by the Contractor.
1.3.5 American Water Sanitary Sewer and Domestic Water Services
In addition to coordinating utility shutdowns with the COR for domestic

water and sanitary sewer the Contractor shall coordinate with American
Water Military Services Group. The contractor shall provide 3 working days
notice to the American Water Military Services Manager through the COR
prior to any water and wastewater facility construction or inspections
needed. The contractor shall verify the locations of all American Water
facilities prior to beginning construction. Contractor shall notify the
design engineer and American Water of any discrepancies found in the field
or on the drawings prior to construction. Any deviations from the
construction plans shall need to be approved in writing by American Water.
The connection of the site utility water system to the existing American
Water distribution system is prohibited until the chlorine residual and
bacteriological tests as well as the required hydrostatic tests have been
repoted. the applicant shall submit the test results to the American Water
utility manager and COR. Connection of the site utility sewer system to
the existing american water sanitary sewer system is prohibited until all
aplicable tests have been performed, the results reported, and the results
found to comply with all requirements. the applicant shall submit reports
to the American Water utility manager and COR. The contractor shall not
operate and valves located on the existing distribution system. requests to
operate valves must be submitted to the American Water utility manager 48
hours in advance. The contractor to coordinate all shut downs and utility
connections with American Water. The contractor is advised that aw has
contract limitations on providing notice to affected customers and
contractor shall coordinate and follow these American Water limitations for
service interruption
1.3.6 Facilities
Protect electrical and mechanical services and utilities. Where removal of

existing utilities and pavement is specified or indicated, provide approved
barricades, temporary covering of exposed areas, and temporary services or
connections for electrical and mechanical utilities. Floors, roofs, walls,
columns, pilasters, and other structural components that are designed and
constructed to stand without lateral support or shoring, and are determined
to be in stable condition, must remain standing without additional bracing,
shoring, or lateral support until demolished or deconstructed, unless
directed otherwise by the Contracting Officer. Ensure that no elements
determined to be unstable are left unsupported and place and secure
bracing, shoring, or lateral supports as may be required as a result of any
cutting, removal, deconstruction, or demolition work performed under this
contract.
1.4 BURNING
The use of burning at the project site for the disposal of refuse and
debris will not be permitted.
1.5 SUBMITTALS

Existing Conditions; G, PO
SD-07 Certificates
Demolition Plan; G, PO
Notification; G, PO
Receipts
Submit timely notification of demolition projects to Federal, State,

regional, and local authorities in accordance with 40 CFR 61, Subpart M.
Notify the State's environmental protection agency, local air pollution
control district/agency, and the Contracting Officer in writing 10 working
days prior to the commencement of work in accordance with 40 CFR 61,
Subpart M. Comply with federal, state, and local hauling and disposal
regulations. In addition to the requirements of the "Contract Clauses,"
conform to the safety requirements contained in ASSE/SAFE A10.6. Comply
with the Environmental Protection Agency requirements specified. Use of
explosives will not be permitted.
1.7 PROTECTION
1.7.1 Traffic Control Signs
a. Where pedestrian and driver safety is endangered in the area of

removal work, use traffic barricades with flashing lights. Anchor
barricades in a manner to prevent displacement by wind. Notify the
Contracting Officer prior to beginning such work.
1.7.2 Protection of Personnel
Before, during and after the demolition work continuously evaluate the
condition of the structure being demolished and take immediate action to
protect all personnel working in and around the project site. No area,
section, or component of floors, roofs, walls, columns, pilasters, or other
structural element will be allowed to be left standing without sufficient
bracing, shoring, or lateral support to prevent collapse or failure while
workmen remove debris or perform other work in the immediate area.
1.8 RELOCATIONS
Perform the removal and reinstallation of relocated items as indicated with

workmen skilled in the trades involved. Repair or replace items to be
relocated which are damaged by the Contractor with new undamaged items as
Before beginning any demolition or deconstruction work, survey the site and
examine the drawings and specifications to determine the extent of the
work. Record existing conditions in the presence of the Contracting
Officer showing the condition of structures and other facilities adjacent
to areas of alteration or removal. Photographs sized 4 inch will be
acceptable as a record of existing conditions. Include in the record the
elevation of the top of foundation walls, finish floor elevations, possible
conflicting electrical conduits, plumbing lines, alarms systems, the
location and extent of existing cracks and other damage and description of
surface conditions that exist prior to before starting work. It is the
Contractor's responsibility to verify and document all required outages
which will be required during the course of work, and to note these outages
on the record document. Submit survey results.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 FILL MATERIAL
a. Comply with excavating, backfilling, and compacting procedures for

soils used as backfill material to fill basements, voids, depressions
or excavations resulting from demolition or deconstruction of
structures.
b. Fill material shall conform to the definition of satisfactory soil

material as defined in AASHTO M 145, Soil Classification Groups A-1,
A-2-4, A-2-5 and A-3. In addition, fill material shall be free from
roots and other organic matter, trash, debris, frozen materials, and
stones larger than 2 inches in any dimension.
c. Proposed fill material must be sampled and tested by an approved

soil testing laboratory, as follows:
Soil classification AASHTO M 145
Moisture-density relations AASHTO T 180, Method B or D
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXISTING FACILITIES TO BE REMOVED
Inspect and evaluate existing structures onsite for reuse. Existing

construction scheduled to be removed for reuse shall be disassembled.
Dismantled and removed materials are to be separated, set aside, and
prepared as specified, and stored or delivered to a collection point for
reuse, remanufacture, recycling, or other disposal, as specified.
Materials shall be designated for reuse onsite whenever possible.
3.1.1 Structures
a. Remove existing structures indicated to be removed to grade.

Interior walls, other than retaining walls and partitions, shall be
removed to 2 feet below grade or to top of concrete slab on ground.
Break up basement slabs to permit drainage. Remove sidewalks, curbs,
gutters and street light bases as indicated.
b. Demolish structures in a systematic manner from the top of the

structure to the ground. Complete demolition work above each tier or
floor before the supporting members on the lower level are disturbed.
Demolish concrete and masonry walls in small sections. Remove
structural framing members and lower to ground by means of derricks,
platforms hoists, or other suitable methods as approved by the
c. Locate demolition and deconstruction equipment throughout the

structure and remove materials so as to not impose excessive loads to
supporting walls, floors, or framing.
d. Building, or the remaining portions thereof, not exceeding 80 feet

in height may be demolished by the mechanical method of demolition.
3.1.2 Utilities and Related Equipment
3.1.2.1 General Requirements
Do not interrupt existing utilities serving occupied or used facilities,

except when authorized in writing by the Contracting Officer. Do not
interrupt existing utilities serving facilities occupied and used by the
Government except when approved in writing and then only after temporary
utility services have been approved and provided. Do not begin demolition
or deconstruction work until all utility disconnections have been made.
Shut off and cap utilities for future use, as indicated.
3.1.2.2 Disconnecting Existing Utilities
Remove existing utilities , as indicated and terminate in a manner

conforming to the nationally recognized code covering the specific utility
and approved by the Contracting Officer. When utility lines are
encountered but are not indicated on the drawings, notify the Contracting
Officer prior to further work in that area. Remove meters and related
equipment and deliver to a location in accordance with instructions of the
3.1.3 Chain Link Fencing
Remove chain link fencing, gates and other related salvaged items scheduled
for removal and transport to designated areas. Remove gates as whole
units. Cut chain link fabric to 25 foot lengths and store in rolls off the
ground.
3.1.4 Paving and Slabs
Remove sawcut concrete and asphaltic concrete paving and slabs including
aggregate base as indicated to a depth of 30 inches below existing adjacent
grade. Provide neat sawcuts at limits of pavement removal as indicated.
Pavement and slabs designated to be recycled and utilized in this project
shall be moved, ground and stored as directed by the Contracting Officer.
Pavement and slabs not to be used in this project shall be removed from the
Installation at Contractor's expense.
3.1.5 Concrete
Saw concrete along straight lines to a depth of a minimum 2 inch. Make

each cut in walls perpendicular to the face and in alignment with the cut
in the opposite face. Break out the remainder of the concrete provided
that the broken area is concealed in the finished work, and the remaining
concrete is sound. At locations where the broken face cannot be concealed,
grind smooth or saw cut entirely through the concrete. Salvage removed
concrete.
3.1.6 Structural Steel
Dismantle structural steel at field connections and in a manner that will

prevent bending or damage. Salvage for recycle structural steel, steel
joists, girders, angles, plates, columns and shapes. Transport steel
joists and girders as whole units and not dismantled. Transport structural
steel shapes to a designated area as directed by the Contracting Officer,
stacked according to size, type of member and length, and stored off the
ground, protected from the weather.
3.1.7 Miscellaneous Metal
Salvage shop-fabricated items such as access doors and frames, steel

gratings, metal ladders, wire mesh partitions, metal railings, metal
windows and similar items as whole units. Salvage light-gage and
cold-formed metal framing, such as steel studs, steel trusses, metal
gutters, roofing and siding, metal toilet partitions, toilet accessories
and similar items. Scrap metal shall become the Contractor's property.
Recycle scrap metal as part of demolition and deconstruction operations.
Provide separate containers to collect scrap metal and transport to a scrap
metal collection or recycling facility, in accordance with the Waste
Management Plan.
3.1.8 Carpentry
Salvage for recycle lumber, millwork items, and finished boards, and sort
by type and size.
3.1.9 Carpet
Remove existing carpet for reclamation in accordance with manufacturer

recommendations and as follows. Remove used carpet in large pieces, roll
tightly, and pack neatly in a container. Remove adhesive according to
recommendations of the Carpet and Rug Institute (CRI). Adhesive removal
solvents shall comply with CRI 104. Recycle removed carpet cushion.
3.1.10 Acoustic Ceiling Tile
Remove, neatly stack, and recycle acoustic ceiling tiles. Recycling may be
available with manufacturer. Otherwise, priority shall be given to a local
recycling organization.
3.1.11 Air Conditioning Equipment
Remove air conditioning, refrigeration, and other equipment containing

refrigerants without releasing chlorofluorocarbon refrigerants to the
atmosphere in accordance with the Clean Air Act Amendment of 1990. Recover
all refrigerants prior to removing air conditioning, refrigeration, and
other equipment containing refrigerants and dispose of in accordance with
the paragraph entitled "Disposal of Ozone Depleting Substance (ODS)."Turn
in salvaged Class I ODS refrigerants as specified in paragraph, "Salvaged
Materials and Equipment."
3.1.12 Cylinders and Canisters
Remove all fire suppression system cylinders and canisters and dispose of
in accordance with the paragraph entitled "Disposal of Ozone Depleting
Substance (ODS)."
3.1.13 Locksets on Swinging Doors
Remove all locksets from all swinging doors indicated to be removed and
disposed of. Deliver the locksets and related items to a designated
location for receipt by the Contracting Officer after removal.
3.1.14 Mechanical Equipment and Fixtures
Disconnect mechanical hardware at the nearest connection to existing

services to remain, unless otherwise noted. Disconnect mechanical
equipment and fixtures at fittings. Remove service valves attached to the
unit. Salvage each item of equipment and fixtures as a whole unit; listed,
indexed, tagged, and stored. Salvage each unit with its normal operating
auxiliary equipment. Transport salvaged equipment and fixtures, including
motors and machines, to a designated storage area as directed by the
Contracting Officer. Do not remove equipment until approved. Do not offer
low-efficiency equipment for reuse.
3.1.14.1 Preparation for Storage
Remove water, dirt, dust, and foreign matter from units; tanks, piping and
fixtures shall be drained; interiors, if previously used to store
flammable, explosive, or other dangerous liquids, shall be steam cleaned.
Seal openings with caps, plates, or plugs. Secure motors attached by
flexible connections to the unit. Change lubricating systems with the
proper oil or grease.
3.1.14.2 Piping
Disconnect piping at unions, flanges and valves, and fittings as required

to reduce the pipe into straight lengths for practical storage. Store
salvaged piping according to size and type. If the piping that remains can
become pressurized due to upstream valve failure, end caps, blind flanges,
or other types of plugs or fittings with a pressure gage and bleed valve
shall be attached to the open end of the pipe to ensure positive leak
control. Carefully dismantle piping that previously contained gas,
gasoline, oil, or other dangerous fluids, with precautions taken to prevent
injury to persons and property. Store piping outdoors until all fumes and
residues are removed. Box prefabricated supports, hangers, plates, valves,
and specialty items according to size and type. Wrap sprinkler heads
individually in plastic bags before boxing. Classify piping not designated
for salvage, or not reusable, as scrap metal.
3.1.14.3 Ducts
Classify removed duct work as scrap metal.
3.1.14.4 Fixtures, Motors and Machines
Remove and salvage fixtures, motors and machines associated with plumbing,
heating, air conditioning, refrigeration, and other mechanical system
installations. Salvage, box and store auxiliary units and accessories with
the main motor and machines. Tag salvaged items for identification,
storage, and protection from damage. Classify non-porcelain broken,
damaged, or otherwise unserviceable units and not caused to be broken,
damaged, or otherwise unserviceable as debris to be disposed of by the
Contractor.
3.1.15 Electrical Equipment and Fixtures
Salvage motors, motor controllers, and operating and control equipment that
are attached to the driven equipment. Salvage wiring systems and
components. Box loose items and tag for identification. Disconnect
primary, secondary, control, communication, and signal circuits at the
point of attachment to their distribution system.
3.1.15.1 Fixtures
Remove and salvage electrical fixtures. Salvage unprotected glassware from

the fixture and salvage separately. Salvage incandescent, mercury-vapor,
and fluorescent lamps and fluorescent ballasts manufactured prior to 1978,
boxed and tagged for identification, and protected from breakage.
3.1.15.2 Electrical Devices
Remove and salvage switches, switchgear, transformers, conductors including

wire and nonmetallic sheathed and flexible armored cable, regulators,
meters, instruments, plates, circuit breakers, panelboards, outlet boxes,
and similar items. Box and tag these items for identification according to
type and size.
3.1.15.3 Wiring Ducts or Troughs
Remove and salvage wiring ducts or troughs. Dismantle plug-in ducts and
wiring troughs into unit lengths. Remove plug-in or disconnecting devices
from the busway and store separately.
3.1.15.4 Conduit and Miscellaneous Items
Salvage conduit except where embedded in concrete or masonry. Consider

corroded, bent, or damaged conduit as scrap metal. Sort straight and
undamaged lengths of conduit according to size and type. Classify
supports, knobs, tubes, cleats, and straps as debris to be removed and
disposed.
3.1.16 Elevators and Hoists
Remove elevators, hoists, and similar conveying equipment and salvage as

whole units, to the most practical extent. Remove and prepare items for
salvage without damage to any of the various parts. Salvage and store
rails for structural steel with the equipment as an integral part of the
unit.
3.2 CONCURRENT EARTH-MOVING OPERATIONS
Do not begin excavation, filling, and other earth-moving operations that

are sequential to demolition or deconstruction work in areas occupied by
structures to be demolished or deconstructed until all demolition and
deconstruction in the area has been completed and debris removed. Fill
holes, open basements and other hazardous openings.
3.3 DISPOSITION OF MATERIAL
3.3.1 Title to Materials
Except for salvaged items specified in related Sections, and for materials
or equipment scheduled for salvage, all materials and equipment removed and
not reused or salvaged, shall become the property of the Contractor and
shall be removed from Government property. Title to materials resulting
from demolition and deconstruction, and materials and equipment to be
removed, is vested in the Contractor upon approval by the Contracting
Officer of the Contractor's demolition, deconstruction, and removal
procedures, and authorization by the Contracting Officer to begin
demolition and deconstruction. The Government will not be responsible for
the condition or loss of, or damage to, such property after contract
award. Showing for sale or selling materials and equipment on site is
prohibited.
3.3.2 Salvaged Materials and Equipment
Remove materials and equipment that are in the DemolitionPlanspecified to

be removed by the Contractor and that are to remain the property of the
Government, and the contractor shalldeliver the concrete rubble disposal
area or the topsoil, asphalt and usable soils area shown on G101 within 4
miles of the work site.
a. Salvage items and material to the maximum extent possible.
b. Store all materials salvaged for the Contractor as approved by the

Contracting Officer and remove from Government property before
completion of the contract. On site sales of salvaged material is
prohibited.
c. Remove salvaged items to remain the property of the Government in a

manner to prevent damage, and packed or crated to protect the items
from damage while in storage or during shipment. Items damaged during

removal or storage must be repaired or replaced to match existing
items. Properly identify the contents of containers. Deliver the
following items reserved as property of the Government to the areas
designated by the COR.
d. Remove historical items in a manner to prevent damage. Deliver the

following historical items to the Government for disposition: Corner
stones, contents of corner stones, and document boxes wherever located
on the site.
3.3.3 Disposal of Ozone Depleting Substance (ODS)
Class I and Class II ODS are defined in Section, 602(a) and (b), of The
Clean Air Act. Prevent discharge of Class I and Class II ODS to the
atmosphere. Place recovered ODS in cylinders meeting AHRI Guideline K
suitable for the type ODS (filled to no more than 80 percent capacity) and
provide appropriate labeling. Recovered ODS shall be removed from
Government property and disposed of in accordance with 40 CFR 82.
Products, equipment and appliances containing ODS in a sealed,
self-contained system (e.g. residential refrigerators and window air
conditioners) shall be disposed of in accordance with 40 CFR 82. Submit
Receipts or bills of lading, as specified. Submit a shipping receipt or
bill of lading for all containers of ozone depleting substance (ODS)
shipped to the Defense Depot, Richmond, Virginia.
3.3.3.1 Special Instructions
No more than one type of ODS is permitted in each container. A

warning/hazardous label shall be applied to the containers in accordance
with Department of Transportation regulations. All cylinders including but
not limited to fire extinguishers, spheres, or canisters containing an ODS
shall have a tag with the following information:
a. Activity name and unit identification code
b. Activity point of contact and phone number
c. Type of ODS and pounds of ODS contained
d. Date of shipment
e. Naval stock number (for information, call (804) 279-4525).
3.3.3.2 Fire Suppression Containers
Deactivate fire suppression system cylinders and canisters with electrical

charges or initiators prior to shipment. Also, safety caps must be used to
cover exposed actuation mechanisms and discharge ports on these special
cylinders.
3.3.4 Transportation Guidance
Ship all ODS containers in accordance with MIL-STD-129, DLA 4145.25 (also
referenced one of the following: Army Regulation 700-68, Naval Supply
Instruction 4440.128C, Marine Corps Order 10330.2C, and Air Force
Regulation 67-12), 49 CFR 173.301, and DOD 4000.25-1-M.
3.3.5 Unsalvageable and Non-Recyclable Material
DDispose of unsalvageable and non-recyclable combustible material off the

site.
3.4 CLEANUP
Remove debris and rubbish from basement and similar excavations. Remove
and transport the debris in a manner that prevents spillage on streets or
adjacent areas. Apply local regulations regarding hauling and disposal.
3.5 DISPOSAL OF REMOVED MATERIALS
3.5.1 Regulation of Removed Materials
Dispose of debris, rubbish, scrap, and other nonsalvageable materials

resulting from removal operations with all applicable federal, state and
local regulations as contractually specified off the in the Waste
Management Plan. Storage of removed materials on the project site is
prohibited.
3.5.2 Burning on Government Property
Burning of materials removed from demolished and deconstructed structures

will not be permitted on Government property.
3.5.3 Removal to Spoil Areas on Government Property
Transport noncombustible materials removed from demolition and

deconstruction structures to designated spoil areas on Government property.
3.5.4 Removal from Government Property
Transport waste materials removed from demolished and deconstructed

structures, except waste soil, from Government property for legal
disposal. Dispose of waste soil as directed.
SECTION 02 82 16.00 20
ENGINEERING CONTROL OF ASBESTOS CONTAINING MATERIALS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

AMERICAN INDUSTRIAL HYGIENE ASSOCIATION (AIHA)
AIHA Z9.2 (2006) Fundamentals Governing the Design

and Operation of Local Exhaust Ventilation
Systems
ANSI Z88.2 (1992) Respiratory Protection
ASTM D 1331 (1989; R 2001) Surface and Interfacial

Tension of Solutions of Surface-Active
Agents
ASTM E 1368 (2005e1) Visual Inspection of Asbestos

Abatement Projects
EPA 560/5-85-024 (1985) Guidance for Controlling

Asbestos-Containing Materials in Buildings
(Purple Book)
29 CFR 1926.103 Respiratory Protection
29 CFR 1926.1101 Asbestos
29 CFR 1926.200 Accident Prevention Signs and Tags
29 CFR 1926.51 Sanitation
29 CFR 1926.59 Hazard Communication
40 CFR 61-SUBPART A General Provisions
40 CFR 61-SUBPART M National Emission Standard for Asbestos
40 CFR 763 Asbestos
SECTION 02 82 16.00 20 Page 1

UL 586 (2009) Standard for High-Efficiency

Particulate, Air Filter Units
1.2 DEFINITIONS
1.2.1 ACM
Asbestos Containing Materials.
1.2.2 Amended Water
Water containing a wetting agent or surfactant with a maximum surface

tension of0.00042 psi when tested in accordance with ASTM D 1331.
1.2.3 Area Sampling
Sampling of asbestos fiber concentrations which approximates the

concentrations of asbestos in the theoretical breathing zone but is not
actually collected in the breathing zone of an employee.
1.2.4 Asbestos
The term asbestos includes chrysotile, amosite, crocidolite, tremolite

asbestos, anthophyllite asbestos, and actinolite asbestos and any of these
minerals that has been chemically treated or altered. Materials are
considered to contain asbestos if the asbestos content of the material is
determined to be at least one percent.
1.2.5 Asbestos Control Area
That area where asbestos removal operations are performed which is isolated
by physical boundaries which assist in the prevention of the uncontrolled
release of asbestos dust, fibers, or debris.
1.2.6 Asbestos Fibers
Those fibers having an aspect ratio of at least 3:1 and longer than 5
micrometers as determined by National Institute for Occupational Safety and
Health (NIOSH) Method 7400.
1.2.7 Asbestos Permissible Exposure Limit
0.1 fibers per cubic centimeter of air as an 8-hour time weighted average
measured in the breathing zone as defined by 29 CFR 1926.1101 or other
Federal legislation having legal jurisdiction for the protection of workers
health.
1.2.8 Background
The ambient airborne asbestos concentration in an uncontaminated area as

measured prior to any asbestos hazard abatement efforts. Background
concentrations for other (contaminated) areas are measured in similar but
asbestos free locations.
1.2.9 Contractor
The Contractor is that individual, or entity under contract to the Army to
SECTION 02 82 16.00 20 Page 2

perform the herein listed work.
1.2.10 Competent Person
A person meeting the requirements for competent person as specified in

29 CFR 1926.1101 including a person capable of identifying existing
asbestos hazards in the workplace and selecting the appropriate control
strategy for asbestos exposure, who has the authority to take prompt
corrective measures to eliminate them, and is specifically trained in a
training course which meet the criteria of EPA's Model Accreditation Plan (
40 CFR 763) for project designer or supervisor, or its equivalent. The
competent person shall have a current State of Louisiana asbestos
contractors or supervisors license.
1.2.11 Encapsulation
The abatement of an asbestos hazard through the appropriate use of chemical

encapsulants.
1.2.12 Encapsulants
Specific materials in various forms used to chemically or physically entrap

asbestos fibers in various configurations to prevent these fibers from
becoming airborne. There are four types of encapsulants as follows which
must comply with performance requirements as specified herein.
a. Removal Encapsulant (can be used as a wetting agent)
b. Bridging Encapsulant (used to provide a tough, durable surface coating

to asbestos containing material)
c. Penetrating Encapsulant (used to penetrate the asbestos containing

material encapsulating all asbestos fibers and preventing fiber release
due to routine mechanical damage)
d. Lock-Down Encapsulant (used to seal off or "lock-down" minute asbestos

fibers left on surfaces from which asbestos containing material has
been removed).
1.2.13 Friable Asbestos Material
One percent asbestos containing material that can be crumbled, pulverized,

or reduced to powder by hand pressure when dry.
1.2.14 Glovebag Technique
Those asbestos removal and control techniques put forth in 29 CFR 1926.1101
Appendix G.
1.2.15 HEPA Filter Equipment
High efficiency particulate air (HEPA) filtered vacuum and/or exhaust

ventilation equipment with a filter system capable of collecting and
retaining asbestos fibers. Filters shall retain 99.97 percent of particles
0.3 microns or larger as indicated in UL 586.
1.2.16 Navy Consultant (NC)
Not used.
SECTION 02 82 16.00 20 Page 3

1.2.17 Negative Pressure Enclosure (NPE)
That engineering control technique described as a negative pressure

enclosure in 29 CFR 1926.1101.
1.2.18 Nonfriable Asbestos Material
Material that contains asbestos in which the fibers have been immobilized
by a bonding agent, coating, binder, or other material so that the asbestos
is well bound and will not normally release asbestos fibers during any
appropriate use, handling, storage or transportation. It is understood
that asbestos fibers may be released under other conditions such as
demolition, removal, or mishap.
1.2.19 Personal Sampling
Air sampling which is performed to determine asbestos fiber concentrations

within the breathing zone of a specific employee, as performed in
accordance with 29 CFR 1926.1101.
1.2.20 Private Qualified Person (PQP)
That qualified person hired by the Contractor to perform the herein listed
tasks.
1.2.21 Qualified Person (QP)
A Registered Architect, Professional Engineer, Certified Industrial

Hygienist, consultant or other qualified person who has successfully
completed training and is therefore accredited under a legitimate State
Model Accreditation Plan as described in 40 CFR 763 as a Building
Inspector, Contractor/Supervisor Abatement Worker, and Asbestos Project
Designer; and has successfully completed the National Institute of
Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH) 582 course "Sampling and Evaluating
Airborne Asbestos Dust" or equivalent. The QP must be qualified to perform
visual inspections as indicated in ASTM E 1368. The QP shall be
appropriately licensed in the State of Louisiana.
1.2.22 TEM
Refers to Transmission Electron Microscopy.
1.2.23 Time Weighted Average (TWA)
The TWA is an 8-hour time weighted average airborne concentration of

asbestos fibers.
1.2.24 Wetting Agent
A chemical added to water to reduce the water's surface tension thereby

increasing the water's ability to soak into the material to which it is
applied. An equivalent wetting agent must have a surface tension of at most
0.00042 psi when tested in accordance with ASTM D 1331.
SECTION 02 82 16.00 20 Page 4

1.3 REQUIREMENTS
1.3.1 Description of Work
The work covered by this section includes the handling and control of
asbestos containing materials and describes some of the resultant
procedures and equipment required to protect workers, the environment and
occupants of the building or area, or both, from contact with airborne
asbestos fibers. The work also includes the disposal of any asbestos
containing materials generated by the work. More specific operational
procedures shall be outlined in the Asbestos Hazard Abatement Plan called
for elsewhere in this specification. The asbestos work includes the
demolition and removal of red floor coating and roof sealant located at
Building 2429 and red ceramic tile with grout, roof sealant, and roof vent
sealant located at Building 2430. Under normal conditions non-friable or
chemically bound materials containing asbestos would not be considered
hazardous; however, this material may release airborne asbestos fibers
during demolition and removal and therefore must be handled in accordance
with the removal and disposal procedures as specified herein. Provide
negative pressure enclosure techniques as outlined in this specification.
The Army will evacuate the building during the asbestos abatement work. All
asbestos removal work shall be supervised by a competent person as
specified herein.
1.3.1.1 Wallboard/Joint Compound
No samples of wallboard and and joint compound were reported to contain

greater than one percent asbestos.
1.3.2 Medical Requirements
Provide medical requirements including but not limited to medical

surveillance and medical record keeping as listed in 29 CFR 1926.1101.
1.3.2.1 Medical Examinations
Before exposure to airborne asbestos fibers, provide workers with a

comprehensive medical examination as required by 29 CFR 1926.1101 or other
pertinent State or local directives. This requirement must have been
satisfied within the 12 months prior to the start of work on this
contract. The same medical examination shall be given on an annual basis
to employees engaged in an occupation involving asbestos and within 30
calendar days before or after the termination of employment in such
occupation. Specifically identify x-ray films of asbestos workers to the
consulting radiologist and mark medical record jackets with the word
"ASBESTOS."
1.3.2.2 Medical Records
Maintain complete and accurate records of employees' medical examinations,

medical records, and exposure data for an indefinite time after termination
of employment and make records of the required medical examinations and
exposure data available for inspection and copying to: The Assistant
Secretary of Labor for Occupational Safety and Health (OSHA), or authorized
representatives of them, and an employee's physician upon the request of
the employee or former employee.
SECTION 02 82 16.00 20 Page 5

1.3.3 Employee Training
Submit certificates, prior to the start of work but after the main
abatement submittal, signed by each employee indicating that the employee
has received training in the proper handling of materials and wastes that
contain asbestos in accordance with 40 CFR 763; understands the health
implications and risks involved, including the illnesses possible from
exposure to airborne asbestos fibers; understands the use and limits of the
respiratory equipment to be used; and understands the results of monitoring
of airborne quantities of asbestos as related to health and respiratory
equipment as indicated in 29 CFR 1926.1101 on an initial and annual basis.
Certificates shall be organized by individual worker, not grouped by type
of certification. Train all personnel involved in the asbestos control
work in accordance with United States Environmental Protection Agency
(USEPA) Asbestos Hazard Emergency Response Act (AHERA) training criteria or
State training criteria whichever is more stringent. The Contractor shall
document the training by providing: dates of training, training entity,
course outline, names of instructors, and qualifications of instructors
upon request by the Contracting Officer. Furnish each employee with
respirator training and fit testing administered by the PQP as required by
29 CFR 1926.1101. Fully cover engineering and other hazard control
techniques and procedures. All asbestos workers shall have a current State
of Louisiana asbestos worker's license.
1.3.4 Permits, Licenses, and Notifications
Obtain necessary permits and licenses in conjunction with asbestos removal,

encapsulation, hauling, and disposition, and furnish notification of such
actions required by Federal, State, regional, and local authorities prior
to the start of work. Notify the Louisiana Department of Environmental
Quality and the Contracting Officer in writing 20 working days prior to
commencement of work in accordance with 40 CFR 61-SUBPART M. Notify the
Contracting Officer and other appropriate Government agencies in writing 20
working days prior to the start of asbestos work as indicated in applicable
laws, ordinances, criteria, rules, and regulations. Submit copies of all
Notifications to the Contracting Officer.
1.3.5 Environment, Safety and Health Compliance
In addition to detailed requirements of this specification, comply with

those applicable laws, ordinances, criteria, rules, and regulations of
Federal, State, regional, and local authorities regarding handling,
storing, transporting, and disposing of asbestos waste materials. Comply
with the applicable requirements of the current issue of 29 CFR 1926.1101,
40 CFR 61-SUBPART A, and 40 CFR 61-SUBPART M. Submit matters of
interpretation of standards to the appropriate administrative agency for
resolution before starting the work. Where the requirements of this
specification, applicable laws, rules, criteria, ordinances, regulations,
and referenced documents vary, the most stringent requirement as defined by
the Government shall apply.
1.3.6 Respiratory Protection Program
Establish and implement a respirator program as required by ANSI Z88.2,

29 CFR 1926.1101, and 29 CFR 1926.103. Submit a written description of the
program to the Contracting Officer. Submit a written program manual or
operating procedure including methods of compliance with regulatory
statutes.
SECTION 02 82 16.00 20 Page 6

1.3.6.1 Respirator Program Records
Submit records of the respirator program as required by ANSI Z88.2,

29 CFR 1926.103, and 29 CFR 1926.1101.
1.3.7 Asbestos Hazard Control Supervisor
The Contractor shall be represented on site by a supervisor, trained using

the model Contractor accreditation plan as indicated in the Federal
statutes for all portions of the herein listed work.
1.3.8 Hazard Communication
Adhere to all parts of 29 CFR 1926.59 and provide the Contracting Officer
with a copy of the Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for all materials
brought to the site.
1.3.9 Asbestos Hazard Abatement Plan
Submit a detailed plan of the safety precautions such as lockout, tagout,

tryout, fall protection, and confined space entry procedures and equipment
and work procedures to be used in the removal and demolition of materials
containing asbestos. The plan, not to be combined with other hazard
abatement plans, shall be prepared, signed, and sealed by the PQP. Provide
a Table of Contents for each abatement submittal, which shall follow the
sequence of requirements in the contract. Such plan shall include but not
be limited to the precise personal protective equipment to be used
including, but not limited to, respiratory protection, type of whole-body
protection and if reusable coveralls are to be employed decontamination
methods (operations and quality control plan), the location of asbestos
control areas including clean and dirty areas, buffer zones, showers,
storage areas, change rooms, removal method, interface of trades involved
in the construction, sequencing of asbestos related work, disposal plan,
type of wetting agent and asbestos sealer to be used, locations of local
exhaust equipment, planned air monitoring strategies, and a detailed
description of the method to be employed in order to control environmental
pollution. The plan shall also include (both fire and medical emergency)
response plans. The Asbestos Hazard Abatement Plan must be approved in
writing prior to starting any asbestos work. The Contractor, Asbestos
Hazard Control Supervisor, and PQP shall meet with the Contracting Officer
prior to beginning work, to discuss in detail the Asbestos Hazard Abatement
Plan, including work procedures and safety precautions. Once approved by
the Contracting Officer, the plan will be enforced as if an addition to the
specification. Any changes required in the specification as a result of
the plan shall be identified specifically in the plan to allow for free
discussion and approval by the Contracting Officer prior to starting work.
1.3.10 Testing Laboratory
Submit the name, address, and telephone number of each testing laboratory
selected for the analysis, and reporting of airborne concentrations of
asbestos fibers along with evidence that each laboratory selected holds the
appropriate State license and/or permits and certification that each
laboratory is American Industrial Hygiene Association (AIHA) accredited and
that persons counting the samples have been judged proficient by current
inclusion on the AIHA Asbestos Analysis Registry (AAR) and successful
participation of the laboratory in the Proficiency Analytical Testing (PAT)
Program. Where analysis to determine asbestos content in bulk materials or
transmission electron microscopy is required, submit evidence that the
SECTION 02 82 16.00 20 Page 7

laboratory is accredited by the National Institute of Science and

Technology (NIST) under National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program
(NVLAP) for asbestos analysis. The testing laboratory firm shall be
independent of the asbestos contractor and shall have no employee or
employer relationship which could constitute a conflict of interest.
1.3.11 Landfill Approval
Submit written evidence that the landfill is for asbestos disposal by the
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Region 6, Air Enforcement Section and
local regulatory agencies. Within 3 working days after delivery, submit
detailed delivery tickets, prepared, signed, and dated by an agent of the
landfill, certifying the amount of asbestos materials delivered to the
landfill. Submit a copy of the waste shipment records within 1 day of the
shipment leaving the project site.
1.3.12 Medical Certification
Provide a written certification for each worker and supervisor, signed by a

licensed physician indicating that the worker and supervisor has met or
exceeded all of the medical prerequisites listed herein and in
29 CFR 1926.1101 and 29 CFR 1926.103 as prescribed by law. Submit
certificates prior to the start of work but after the main abatement
submittal.
1.4 SUBMITTALS

SD-03 Product Data
Local exhaust equipment; G
Vacuums; G
Respirators; G
Pressure differential automatic recording instrument; G
Amended water; G
Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for all materials proposed for
transport to the project site; G
SD-06 Test Reports
Air sampling results; G
Pressure differential recordings for local exhaust system; G
Asbestos disposal quantity report; G
Clearance sampling; G
SD-07 Certificates
SECTION 02 82 16.00 20 Page 8

Asbestos hazard abatement plan; G
Testing laboratory; G
Private qualified person documentation; G
Contractor's license; G
Competent person documentation; G
Worker's license; G
Landfill approval; G
Employee training; G
Medical certification requirements; G
Waste shipment records and if applicable exemption report; G
Respiratory Protection Program; G
Delivery tickets; G
Vacuums; G
Water filtration equipment; G
Ventilation systems; G
Other equipment used to contain airborne asbestos fibers; G
Notifications
Show compliance with AIHA Z9.2 by providing manufacturers'

certifications.
Notifications; G
Rental equipment; G
Respirator program records; G
Permits and licenses; G
1.5.1 Private Qualified Person Documentation
Submit the name, address, and telephone number of the Private Qualified
Person (PQP) selected to prepare the Asbestos Hazard Abatement Plan, direct
monitoring and training, and documented evidence that the PQP has
successfully completed training in and is accredited and where required is
certified as, a Building Inspector, Contractor/Supervisor Abatement Worker,
and Asbestos Project Designer as described by 40 CFR 763 and has
successfully completed the National Institute of Occupational Safety and
SECTION 02 82 16.00 20 Page 9

Health (NIOSH) 582 course "Sampling and Evaluating Airborne Asbestos Dust"
or equivalent. The PQP shall be appropriately licensed in the State of
Louisiana. The PQP and the asbestos contractor shall not have an
employee/employer relationship or financial relationship which could
constitute a conflict of interest. The PQP shall be a first tier
subcontractor.
1.5.2 Competent Person Documentation
Submit training certification and a current State of Louisiana Asbestos

Contractor's and Supervisor's License.
1.5.3 Worker's License
Submit documentation that requires all workers have a current State of

Louisiana Asbestos Workers License.
1.5.4 Contractor's License
Contractor shall have current Louisiana asbestos contractor's license.

Submit a copy of the asbestos contractor's license issued by the State of
Louisiana.
1.5.5 Air Sampling Results
Complete fiber counting and provide results to the PQP for review within 16
hours of the "time off" of the sample pump. Notify the Contracting Officer
immediately of any airborne levels of asbestos fibers in excess of the
acceptable limits. Submit sampling results to the Contracting Officer and
the affected Contractor employees where required by law within 3 working
days, signed by the testing laboratory employee performing air sampling,
the employee that analyzed the sample, and the PQP. Notify the Contractor
and the Contracting Officer immediately of any variance in the pressure
differential which could cause adjacent unsealed areas to have asbestos
fiber concentrations in excess of 0.01 fibers per cubic centimeter or
background whichever is higher. In no circumstance shall levels exceed 0.1
fibers per cubic centimeter.
1.5.6 Pressure Differential Recordings for Local Exhaust System
Provide a local exhaust system that creates a negative pressure of at least

0.02 inches of water relative to the pressure external to the enclosure and
operate it continuously, 24 hours a day, until the temporary enclosure of
the asbestos control area is removed. Submit pressure differential
recordings for each work day to the PQP for review and to the Contracting
Officer within 24 hours from the end of each work day.
1.6 EQUIPMENT
1.6.1 Rental Equipment
Provide a copy of the written notification to the rental company concerning

the intended use of the equipment and the possibility of asbestos
contamination of the equipment.
SECTION 02 82 16.00 20 Page 10

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 ENCAPSULANTS
Not used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EQUIPMENT
At all times, provide the Contracting Officer or the Contracting Officer's

Representative, with at least two complete sets of personal protective
equipment including decontaminating reusable coveralls as required for
entry to and inspection of the asbestos control area. Provide equivalent
training to the Contracting Officer or a designated representative as
provided to Contractor employees in the use of the required personal
protective equipment. Provide manufacturer's certificate of compliance for
all equipment used to contain airborne asbestos fibers.
3.1.1 Respirators
Select respirators from those approved by the National Institute for

Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH), Department of Health and Human
Services.
3.1.1.1 Respirators for Handling Asbestos
Provide personnel engaged in pre-cleaning, cleanup, handling, removal or

demolition of asbestos materials with respiratory protection as indicated
in 29 CFR 1926.1101 and 29 CFR 1926.103.
3.1.2 Exterior Whole Body Protection
3.1.2.1 Outer Protective Clothing
Provide personnel exposed to asbestos with disposable "non-breathable," or

reusable "non-breathable" whole body outer protective clothing, head
coverings, gloves, and foot coverings. Provide disposable plastic or
rubber gloves to protect hands. Cloth gloves may be worn inside the
plastic or rubber gloves for comfort, but shall not be used alone. Make
sleeves secure at the wrists, make foot coverings secure at the ankles, and
make clothing secure at the neck by the use of tape. Reusable whole body
outer protective clothing shall be either disposed of as asbestos
contaminated waste upon exiting from the asbestos regulated work area or be
properly decontaminated.
3.1.2.2 Work Clothing
Provide cloth work clothes for wear under the outer protective clothing and
foot coverings and either dispose of or properly decontaminate them as
recommended by the PQP after each use.
3.1.2.3 Personal Decontamination Unit
Provide a temporary, negative pressure unit with a separate decontamination

locker room and clean locker room with a shower that complies with
29 CFR 1926.51(f)(4)(ii) through (V) in between for personnel required to
wear whole body protective clothing. Provide two separate lockers for each
asbestos worker, one in each locker room. Keep street clothing and street
SECTION 02 82 16.00 20 Page 11

shoes in the clean locker. HEPA vacuum and remove asbestos contaminated
disposable protective clothing while still wearing respirators at the
boundary of the asbestos work area and seal in impermeable bags or
containers for disposal. HEPA vacuum and remove asbestos contaminated
reusable protective clothing while still wearing respirators at the
boundary of the asbestos work area, seal in two impermeable bags, label
outer bag as asbestos contaminated waste, and transport for
decontamination. Do not wear work clothing between home and work. Locate
showers between the decontamination locker room and the clean locker room
and require that all employees shower before changing into street clothes.
Collect used shower water and filter with approved water filtration
equipment to remove asbestos contamination. Dispose of filters and residue
as asbestos waste. Discharge clean water to the sanitary system. Dispose
of asbestos contaminated work clothing as asbestos contaminated waste or
properly decontaminate as specified in the Contractor's Asbestos Hazard
Abatement Plan. Decontamination units shall be physically attached to the
asbestos control area. Build both a personnel decontamination unit and an
equipment decontamination unit onto and integral with each asbestos control
area.
3.1.2.4 Decontamination of Reusable Outer Protective Clothing
When reusable outer protective clothing is used, transport the double

bagged clothing to a previously notified commercial/industrial
decontamination facility for decontamination. Perform non-destructive
testing to determine the effectiveness of asbestos decontamination. If
representative sampling is used, ensure the statistical validity of the
sampling results. If representative sampling is used, reject any entire
batch in which any of the pieces exceed 40 fibers per square millimeter.
Inspect reusable protective clothing prior to use to ensure that it will
provide adequate protection and is not or is not about to become ripped,
torn, deteriorated, or damaged, and that it is not visibly contaminated.
Notify, in writing, all personnel involved in the decontamination of
reusable outer protective clothing as indicated in 29 CFR 1926.1101.
3.1.2.5 Eye Protection
Provide goggles to personnel engaged in asbestos abatement operations when

the use of a full face respirator is not required.
3.1.3 Warning Signs and Labels
Provide warning signs at all approaches to asbestos control areas. Locate

signs at such a distance that personnel may read the sign and take the
necessary protective steps required before entering the area. Provide
labels and affix to all asbestos materials, scrap, waste, debris, and other
products contaminated with asbestos.
3.1.3.1 Warning Sign
Provide vertical format conforming to 29 CFR 1926.200, and 29 CFR 1926.1101

minimum20 by 14 inches displaying the following legend in the lower panel:
Legend Notation
Danger one inch Sans Serif

Gothic or Block
Asbestos one inch Sans Serif
SECTION 02 82 16.00 20 Page 12

Legend Notation
Gothic or Block
Cancer and Lung Disease Hazard 1/4 inch Sans Serif

Gothic or Block
Authorized Personnel Only 1/4 inch Gothic
Respirators and Protective 1/4 inch Gothic

Clothing are Required in
this Area
Spacing between lines shall be at least equal to the height of the upper of
any two lines.
3.1.3.2 Warning Labels
Provide labels conforming to 29 CFR 1926.1101 of sufficient size to be

clearly legible, displaying the following legend:
DANGER
CONTAINS ASBESTOS FIBERS
AVOID CREATING DUST
CANCER AND LUNG DISEASE HAZARD
BREATHING ASBESTOS DUST MAY

CAUSE SERIOUS BODILY HARM
3.1.4 Local Exhaust System
Provide a local exhaust system in the asbestos control area in accordance

with AIHA Z9.2 and 29 CFR 1926.1101 that will provide at least four air
changes per hour inside of the negative pressure enclosure. Local exhaust
equipment shall be operated 24 hours per day, until the asbestos control
area is removed and shall be leak proof to the filter and equipped with
HEPA filters. Maintain a minimum pressure differential in the control area
of minus0.02 inch of water column relative to adjacent, unsealed areas.
Provide continuous 24-hour per day monitoring of the pressure differential
with a pressure differential automatic recording instrument. In no case
shall the building ventilation system be used as the local exhaust system
for the asbestos control area. Filters on exhaust equipment shall conform
to AIHA Z9.2 and UL 586. The local exhaust system shall terminate out of
doors and remote from any public access or ventilation system intakes.
3.1.5 Tools
Vacuums shall be leak proof to the filter and equipped with HEPA filters.
Filters on vacuums shall conform to AIHA Z9.2 and UL 586. Do not use power
tools to remove asbestos containing materials unless the tool is equipped
with effective, integral HEPA filtered exhaust ventilation systems. Remove
all residual asbestos from reusable tools prior to storage or reuse.
SECTION 02 82 16.00 20 Page 13

3.1.6 Rental Equipment
If rental equipment is to be used, furnish written notification to the

rental agency concerning the intended use of the equipment and the
possibility of asbestos contamination of the equipment.
3.1.7 Glovebags
Not used.
3.2 WORK PROCEDURE
Perform asbestos related work in accordance with 29 CFR 1926.1101,

40 CFR 61-SUBPART M, and as specified herein. Use wet removal procedures
and negative pressure enclosure techniques. Personnel shall wear and
utilize protective clothing and equipment as specified herein. Eating,
smoking, drinking, chewing gum, tobacco, or applying cosmetics shall not be
permitted in the asbestos work or control areas. Personnel of other trades
not engaged in the removal and demolition of asbestos containing material
shall not be exposed at any time to airborne concentrations of asbestos
unless all the personnel protection and training provisions of this
specification are complied with by the trade personnel. Seal all roof top
penetrations, except plumbing vents, prior to asbestos roofing work. Shut
down the building heating, ventilating, and air conditioning system and cap
the openings to the system, prior to the commencement of asbestos work.
Disconnect electrical service when wet removal is performed and provide
temporary electrical service with verifiable ground fault circuit
interrupter (GFCI) protection prior to the use of any water. If an
asbestos fiber release or spill occurs outside of the asbestos control
area, stop work immediately and correct the condition to the satisfaction
of the Contracting Officer, including clearance sampling, prior to
resumption of work.
3.2.1 Protection of Existing Work to Remain
Perform work without damage or contamination of adjacent work. Where such

work is damaged or contaminated as verified by the Contracting Officer
using visual inspection or sample analysis, it shall be restored to its
original condition or decontaminated by the Contractor at no expense to the
Government as deemed appropriate by the Contracting Officer. This includes
inadvertent spill of dirt, dust, or debris in which it is reasonable to
conclude that asbestos may exist. When these spills occur, stop work
immediately. Then clean up the spill. When satisfactory visual inspection
and air sampling results are obtained from the PQP work may proceed at the
discretion of the Contracting Officer.
3.2.2 Furnishings
Furniture and equipment will be removed from the area of work by the
Government before asbestos work begins.
3.2.3 Precleaning
Wet wipe and HEPA vacuum all surfaces potentially contaminated with
asbestos prior to establishment of an enclosure.
SECTION 02 82 16.00 20 Page 14

3.2.4 Asbestos Control Area Requirements
3.2.4.1 Negative Pressure Enclosure
Block and seal openings in areas where the release of airborne asbestos
fibers can be expected. Establish an asbestos negative pressure enclosure
with the use of curtains, portable partitions, or other enclosures in order
to prevent the escape of asbestos fibers from the contaminated asbestos
work area. Negative pressure enclosure development shall include
protective covering of uncontaminated walls, and ceilings with a continuous
membrane of two layers of minimum6-mil plastic sheet sealed with tape to
prevent water or other damage. Provide two layers of6-mil plastic sheet
over floors and extend a minimum of12 inches up walls. Seal all joints
with tape. Provide local exhaust system in the asbestos control area.
Openings will be allowed in enclosures of asbestos control areas for
personnel and equipment entry and exit, the supply and exhaust of air for
the local exhaust system and the removal of properly containerized asbestos
containing materials. Replace local exhaust system filters as required to
maintain the efficiency of the system.
3.2.5 Removal Procedures
Wet asbestos material with a fine spray of amended water or a specific

wetting agent such as light oil during removal, cutting, or other handling
so as to reduce the emission of airborne fibers. Remove material and
immediately place in 6 mil plastic disposal bags. Remove asbestos
containing material in a gradual manner, with continuous application of the
amended water or wetting agent in such a manner that no asbestos material
is disturbed prior to being adequately wetted. Where unusual circumstances
prohibit the use of6 mil plastic bags, submit an alternate proposal for
containment of asbestos fibers to the Contracting Officer for approval.
For example, in the case where both piping and insulation are to be
removed, the Contractor may elect to wet the insulation, wrap the pipes and
insulation in plastic and remove the pipe by sections. Asbestos containing
material shall be containerized while wet. At no time shall asbestos
material be allowed to accumulate or become dry. Lower and otherwise
handle asbestos containing material as indicated in 40 CFR 61-SUBPART M.
3.2.5.1 Sealing Contaminated Items Designated for Disposal
Not used.
3.2.5.2 Exposed Pipe Insulation Edges
Not used.
3.2.6 Encapsulation Procedures
Not used.
3.2.7 Air Sampling
Sampling of airborne concentrations of asbestos fibers shall be performed

in accordance with 29 CFR 1926.1101 and as specified herein. Sampling
performed in accordance with 29 CFR 1926.1101 shall be performed by the
PQP. Sampling performed for environmental and quality control reasons
shall be performed by the PQP. Unless otherwise specified, use NIOSH
Method 7400 for sampling and analysis. Monitoring may be duplicated by the
SECTION 02 82 16.00 20 Page 15

Government at the discretion of the Contracting Officer. If the air

sampling results obtained by the Government differ from those results
obtained by the Contractor, the Government will determine which results
predominate.
3.2.7.1 Sampling Prior to Asbestos Work
Provide area air sampling and establish the baseline one day prior to the
masking and sealing operations for each demolition and removal site.
Establish the background by performing area sampling in similar but
uncontaminated sites in the building.
3.2.7.2 Sampling During Asbestos Work
The PQP shall provide personal and area sampling as indicated in

29 CFR 1926.1101 and governing environmental regulations. In addition,
provided the same type of work is being performed, provide area sampling at
least once every work shift close to the work inside the enclosure, outside
the clean room entrance to the enclosure, and at the exhaust opening of the
local exhaust system. If sampling outside the enclosure shows airborne
levels have exceeded background or 0.01 fibers per cubic centimeter,
whichever is greater, stop all work, correct the condition(s) causing the
increase, and notify the Contracting Officer immediately. Where alternate
methods are used, perform personal and area air sampling at locations and
frequencies that will accurately characterize the evolving airborne
asbestos levels.
3.2.7.3 Sampling After Final Clean-Up (Clearance Sampling)
Provide area sampling of asbestos fibers using aggressive air sampling

techniques as defined in the EPA 560/5-85-024 and establish an airborne
asbestos concentration of less than 0.01 fibers per cubic centimeter after
final clean-up but before removal of the enclosure or the asbestos work
control area. After final cleanup and the asbestos control area is dry but
prior to clearance sampling, the PQP shall perform a visual inspection in
accordance with ASTM E 1368 to ensure that the asbestos control and work
area is free of any accumulations of dirt, dust, or debris. Prepare a
written report signed and dated by the PQP documenting that the asbestos
control area is free of dust, dirt, and debris and all waste has been
removed. The asbestos fiber counts from these samples shall be less than
0.01 fibers per cubic centimeter or be not greater than the background,
whichever is greater. Should any of the final samples indicate a higher
value, the Contractor shall take appropriate actions to re-clean the area
and shall repeat the sampling and analysis at the Contractor's expense.
3.2.8 Lock-Down
Prior to removal of plastic barriers and after pre-clearance clean up of

gross contamination, the PQP shall conduct a visual inspection of all areas
affected by the removal in accordance with ASTM E 1368. Inspect for any
visible fibers. The exposed area shall include but not be limited to
plastic barriers, furnishings and articles to be discarded as well as dirty
change room, air locks for bag removal and decontamination chambers.
3.2.9 Site Inspection
While performing asbestos engineering control work, the Contractor shall be

subject to on-site inspection by the Contracting Officer who may be
assisted by or represented by safety or industrial hygiene personnel. If
SECTION 02 82 16.00 20 Page 16

the work is found to be in violation of this specification, the Contracting

Officer or his representative will issue a stop work order to be in effect
immediately and until the violation is resolved. All related costs
including standby time required to resolve the violation shall be at the
Contractor's expense.
3.3 CLEAN-UP AND DISPOSAL
3.3.1 Housekeeping
Essential parts of asbestos dust control are housekeeping and clean-up

procedures. Maintain surfaces of the asbestos control area free of
accumulations of asbestos fibers. Give meticulous attention to restricting
the spread of dust and debris; keep waste from being distributed over the
general area. Use HEPA filtered vacuum cleaners. DO NOT BLOW DOWN THE
SPACE WITH COMPRESSED AIR. When asbestos removal is complete, all asbestos
waste is removed from the work-site, and final clean-up is completed, the
Contracting Officer will attest that the area is safe before the signs can
be removed. After final clean-up and acceptable airborne concentrations
are attained but before the HEPA unit is turned off and the enclosure
removed, remove all pre-filters on the building HVAC system and provide new
pre-filters. Dispose of filters as asbestos contaminated materials.
Reestablish HVAC mechanical, and electrical systems in proper working
order. The Contracting Officer will visually inspect all surfaces within
the enclosure for residual material or accumulated dust or debris. The
Contractor shall re-clean all areas showing dust or residual materials. If
re-cleaning is required, air sample and establish an acceptable asbestos
airborne concentration after re-cleaning. The Contracting Officer must
agree that the area is safe in writing before unrestricted entry will be
permitted. The Government shall have the option to perform monitoring to
determine if the areas are safe before entry is permitted.
3.3.2 Title to Materials
All waste materials, except as specified otherwise, shall become the

property of the Contractor and shall be disposed of as specified in
applicable local, State, and Federal regulations and herein.
3.3.3 Disposal of Asbestos
3.3.3.1 Procedure for Disposal
Collect asbestos waste, asbestos contaminated water, scrap, debris, bags,

containers, equipment, and asbestos contaminated clothing which may produce
airborne concentrations of asbestos fibers and place in sealed fiber-proof,
waterproof, non-returnable containers (e.g. double plastic bags6 mils
thick, cartons, drums or cans). Wastes within the containers must be
adequately wet in accordance with 40 CFR 61-SUBPART M. Affix a warning and
Department of Transportation (DOT) label to each container including the
bags or use at least6 mils thick bags with the approved warnings and DOT
labeling preprinted on the bag. The name of the waste generator and the
location at which the waste was generated shall be clearly indicated on the
outside of each container. Prevent contamination of the transport vehicle
(especially if the transport vehicle is a rented truck likely to be used in
the future for non-asbestos purposes). These precautions include lining
the vehicle cargo area with plastic sheeting (similar to work area
enclosure) and thorough cleaning of the cargo area after transport and
unloading of asbestos debris is complete. Dispose of waste asbestos
material at an Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) or State-approved
SECTION 02 82 16.00 20 Page 17

asbestos landfill off Government property. For temporary storage, store

sealed impermeable bags in asbestos waste drums or skids. An area for
interim storage of asbestos waste-containing drums or skids will be
assigned by the Contracting Officer or his authorized representative.
Procedure for hauling and disposal shall comply with 40 CFR 61-SUBPART M,
State, regional, and local standards. Sealed plastic bags may be dumped
from drums into the burial site unless the bags have been broken or
damaged. Damaged bags shall remain in the drum and the entire contaminated
drum shall be buried. Uncontaminated drums may be recycled. Workers
unloading the sealed drums shall wear appropriate respirators and personal
protective equipment when handling asbestos materials at the disposal site.
3.3.3.2 Asbestos Disposal Quantity Report
Direct the PQP to record and report, to the Contracting Officer, the amount
of asbestos containing material removed and released for disposal. Deliver
the report for the previous day at the beginning of each day shift with
amounts of material removed during the previous day reported in linear feet
or square feet as described initially in this specification and in cubicfeet
for the amount of asbestos containing material released for disposal.
SECTION 02 82 16.00 20 Page 18

SECTION 02 83 13.00 20
LEAD IN CONSTRUCTION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

ANSI Z88.2 (1992) Respiratory Protection
29 CFR 1926.21 Safety Training and Education
29 CFR 1926.33 Access to Employee Exposure and Medical

Records
29 CFR 1926.55 Gases, Vapors, Fumes, Dusts, and Mists
29 CFR 1926.62 Lead
29 CFR 1926.65 Hazardous Waste Operations and Emergency

Response
40 CFR 260 Hazardous Waste Management System: General

Waste

Hazardous Waste
40 CFR 263 Standards Applicable to Transporters of

Hazardous Waste
40 CFR 264 Standards for Owners and Operators of

Hazardous Waste Treatment, Storage, and
Disposal Facilities
40 CFR 265 Interim Status Standards for Owners and

Operators of Hazardous Waste Treatment,
Storage, and Disposal Facilities
40 CFR 268 Land Disposal Restrictions
49 CFR 172 Hazardous Materials Table, Special

Provisions, Hazardous Materials
SECTION 02 83 13.00 20 Page 1

Communications, Emergency Response

Information, and Training Requirements
49 CFR 178 Specifications for Packagings

1.2 DEFINITIONS
1.2.1 Action Level
Employee exposure, without regard to use of respirators, to an airborne

concentration of lead of 30 micrograms per cubic meter of air averaged over
an 8 hour period.
1.2.2 Area Sampling
Sampling of lead concentrations within the lead control area and inside the
physical boundaries which is representative of the airborne lead
concentrations but is not collected in the breathing zone of personnel
(approximately5 to 6 feet above the floor).
1.2.3 Competent Person (CP)
As used in this section, refers to a person employed by the Contractor who

is trained in the recognition and control of lead hazards in accordance
with current federal, State, and local regulations and has the authority to
take prompt corrective actions to control the lead hazard. A Certified
Industrial Hygienist (CIH) certified by the American Board of Industrial
Hygiene or a Certified Safety Professional (CSP) certified by the Board of
Certified Safety Professionals is the best choice.
1.2.4 Contaminated Room
Refers to a room for removal of contaminated personal protective equipment

(PPE).
1.2.5 Decontamination Shower Facility
That facility that encompasses a clean clothing storage room, and a

contaminated clothing storage and disposal rooms, with a shower facility in
between.
1.2.6 High Efficiency Particulate Arrestor (HEPA) Filter Equipment
HEPA filtered vacuuming equipment with a UL 586 filter system capable of

collecting and retaining lead-contaminated particulate. A high efficiency
particulate filter demonstrates at least 99.97 percent efficiency against
0.3 micron or larger size particles.
1.2.7 Lead
Metallic lead, inorganic lead compounds, and organic lead soaps. Excludes
other forms of organic lead compounds.
SECTION 02 83 13.00 20 Page 2

1.2.8 Lead Control Area
A system to prevent the spread of lead dust, paint chips or debris to

adjacent areas that may include temporary containment, floor or ground
cover protection, physical boundaries, and warning signs to prevent
unauthorized entry of personnel. HEPA filtered local exhaust equipment may
be used as engineering controls to further reduce personnel exposures or
building/outdoor environmental contamination.
1.2.9 Lead Permissible Exposure Limit (PEL)
Fifty micrograms per cubic meter of air as an 8 hour time weighted average
as determined by 29 CFR 1926.62. If an employee is exposed for more than
eight hours in a work day, the PEL shall be determined by the following
formula:
PEL (micrograms/cubic meter of air) = 400/No. hrs worked per day
1.2.10 Material Containing Lead/Paint with Lead (MCL/PWL)
Any material, including paint, which contains lead as determined by the

testing laboratory using a valid test method. The requirements of this
section does not apply if no detectable levels of lead are found using a
quantitative method for analyzing paint or MCL using laboratory instruments
with specified limits of detection (usually 0.01 percent). An X-Ray
Fluorescence (XRF) instrument is considered a valid test method for
indicating the presence of MCL/PWL.
1.2.11 Personal Sampling
Sampling of airborne lead concentrations within the breathing zone of an

employee to determine the 8 hour time weighted average concentration in
accordance with 29 CFR 1926.62. Samples shall be representative of the
employees' work tasks. Breathing zone shall be considered an area within a
hemisphere, forward of the shoulders, with a radius of 6 to 9 inches and
centered at the nose or mouth of an employee.
1.2.12 Physical Boundary
Area physically roped or partitioned off around lead control area to limit
unauthorized entry of personnel.
1.3 DESCRIPTION
1.3.1 Description of Work
Construction activities impacting PWL or material containing lead which are

covered by this specification include the demolition and/or removal of
material containing lead on door trim, windowsills, siding, and fascia
located at Building 2429, and on ceilings, walls, floors, doors, windows,
frames, tiles, trim, sinks, skirting, curbs, and parking stops located at
Building 2430.
1.3.2 Coordination with Other Work
The contractor shall coordinate with work being performed in adjacent

areas. Coordination procedures shall be explained in the Plan and shall
describe how the Contractor will prevent lead exposure to other contractors
and/or Government personnel performing work unrelated to lead activities.
SECTION 02 83 13.00 20 Page 3

1.4 SUBMITTALS

Lead Compliance Plan including CP approval

(signature, date, and certification number); G
Competent Person qualifications; G
Training Certification of workers and supervisors; G
lead waste management plan; G
Certification of Medical Examinations; G
SD-06 Test Reports
sampling results; G
Occupational and Environmental Assessment Data Report; G
SD-07 Certificates
Testing laboratory qualifications; G
Completed and signed hazardous waste manifest from treatment or

disposal facility; G
Waste turn-in documents or weight tickets for non-hazardous wastes

that are disposed of at sanitary or construction and demolition
landfills; G
1.5.1.1 Competent Person (CP)
Submit name, address, and telephone number of the CP selected to perform

responsibilities specified in paragraph entitled "Competent Person (CP)
Responsibilities." Provide documented construction project-related
experience with implementation of OSHA's Lead in Construction standard (
29 CFR 1926.62) which shows ability to assess occupational and
environmental exposure to lead, experience with the use of respirators,
personal protective equipment and other exposure reduction methods to
protect employee health. Submit proper documentation that the CP is
trained, licensed, and certified in accordance with federal, State, and
local laws.
SECTION 02 83 13.00 20 Page 4

1.5.1.2 Training Certification
Submit a certificate for each worker and supervisor, signed and dated by
the accredited training provider, stating that the employee has received
the required lead training specified in 29 CFR 1926.62(l)and is certified
to perform or supervise deleading, lead removal or demolition activities in
the State of Louisiana.
1.5.1.3 Testing Laboratory
Submit the name, address, and telephone number of the testing laboratory
selected to perform the air analysis, testing, and reporting of airborne
concentrations of lead. Use a laboratory participating in the EPA National
Lead Laboratory Accreditation Program (NLLAP) by being accredited by either
the American Association for Laboratory Accreditation (A2LA) or the
American Industrial Hygiene Association (AIHA) and that is successfully
participating in the Environmental Lead Proficiency Analytical Testing
(ELPAT) program to perform sample analysis. Laboratories selected to
perform blood lead analysis shall be OSHA approved.
1.5.2 Requirements
1.5.2.1 Competent Person (CP) Responsibilities
a. Verify training meets all federal, State, and local requirements.
b. Review and approve Lead Compliance Plan for conformance to the

applicable referenced standards.
c. Continuously inspect PWL or MCL work for conformance with the approved
plan.
d. Perform (or oversee performance of) air sampling. Recommend upgrades or

downgrades (whichever is appropriate based on exposure) on the use of
PPE (respirators included) and engineering controls.
e. Ensure work is performed in strict accordance with specifications at all

times.
f. Control work to prevent hazardous exposure to human beings and to the

environment at all times.
g. Supervise final cleaning of the lead control area, take clearance

samples if necessary; review clearance sample results and make
recommendations for further cleaning.
h. Certify the conditions of the work as called for elsewhere in this

specification.
1.5.2.2 Lead Compliance Plan
Submit a detailed job-specific plan of the work procedures to be used in

the disturbance of PWL or MCL. The plan shall include a sketch showing the
location, size, and details of lead control areas, critical barriers,
physical boundaries, location and details of decontamination facilities,
viewing ports, and mechanical ventilation system. Include a description of
equipment and materials, work practices, controls and job responsibilities
for each activity from which lead is emitted. Include in the plan, eating,
drinking, smoking, hygiene facilities and sanitary procedures, interface of
SECTION 02 83 13.00 20 Page 5

trades, sequencing of lead related work, collected waste water and dust
containing lead and debris, air sampling, respirators, personal protective
equipment, and a detailed description of the method of containment of the
operation to ensure that lead is not released outside of the lead control
area. Include site preparation, cleanup and clearance procedures. Include
occupational and environmental sampling, training and strategy, sampling
and analysis strategy and methodology, frequency of sampling, duration of
sampling, and qualifications of sampling personnel in the air sampling
portion of the plan. Include a description of arrangements made among
contractors on multicontractor worksites to inform affected employees and
to clarify responsibilities to control exposures.
1.5.2.3 Occupational and Environmental Assessment Data Report
If initial monitoring is necessary, submit occupational and environmental

sampling results to the Contracting Officer within three working days of
collection, signed by the testing laboratory employee performing the
analysis, the employee that performed the sampling, and the CP.
a. The initial monitoring shall represent each job classification, or if

working conditions are similar to previous jobs by the same employer,
provide previously collected exposure data that can be used to estimate
worker exposures per 29 CFR 1926.62. The data shall represent the
worker's regular daily exposure to lead for stated work.
b. Submit worker exposure data gathered during the task based trigger
operations of 29 CFR 1926.62 with a complete process description. This
includes manual demolition, manual scraping, manual sanding, heat gun,
power tool cleaning, rivet busting, cleanup of dry expendable
abrasives, abrasive blast enclosure removal, abrasive blasting,
welding, cutting and torch burning where lead containing coatings are
present.
c. The initial assessment shall determine the requirement for further

monitoring and the need to fully implement the control and protective
requirements including the lead compliance plan per 29 CFR 1926.62.
1.5.2.4 Medical Examinations
Initial medical surveillance as required by 29 CFR 1926.62 shall be made

available to all employees exposed to lead at any time (1 day) above the
action level. Full medical surveillance shall be made available to all
employees on an annual basis who are or may be exposed to lead in excess of
the action level for more than 30 days a year or as required by 29 CFR
1926.62. Adequate records shall show that employees meet the medical
surveillance requirements of 29 CFR 1926.33, 29 CFR 1926.62 and 29 CFR
1926.103. Provide medical surveillance to all personnel exposed to lead as
indicated in 29 CFR 1926.62. Maintain complete and accurate medical
records of employees for the duration of employment plus 30 years.
1.5.2.5 Training
Train each employee performing work that disturbs lead, who performs
MCL/PWL disposal, and air sampling operations prior to the time of initial
job assignment and annually thereafter, in accordance with 29 CFR 1926.21,
29 CFR 1926.62, and State of Louisiana and local regulations where
appropriate.
SECTION 02 83 13.00 20 Page 6

1.5.2.6 Respiratory Protection Program
a. Provide each employee required to wear a respirator a respirator fit

test at the time of initial fitting and at least annually thereafter as
required by 29 CFR 1926.62.
b. Establish and implement a respiratory protection program as required by

ANSI Z88.2, 29 CFR 1926.103, 29 CFR 1926.62, and 29 CFR 1926.55.
1.5.2.7 Hazard Communication Program
Establish and implement a Hazard Communication Program as required by 29

CFR 1926.59.
1.5.2.8 Lead Waste Management
The Lead Waste Management Plan shall comply with applicable requirements of
federal, State, and local hazardous waste regulations. and address:
a. Identification and classification of wastes associated with the work.
b. Estimated quantities of wastes to be generated and disposed of.
c. Names and qualifications of each contractor that will be transporting,

storing, treating, and disposing of the wastes. Include the facility
location and a 24-hour point of contact. Furnish two copies of USEPA,
State, and/or local hazardous waste manifests.
d. Names and qualifications (experience and training) of personnel who will

be working on-site with hazardous wastes.
e. List of waste handling equipment to be used in performing the work, to

include cleaning, volume reduction, and transport equipment.
f. Spill prevention, containment, and cleanup contingency measures

including a health and safety plan to be implemented in accordance with
29 CFR 1926.65.
g. Work plan and schedule for waste containment, removal and disposal.
Proper containment of the waste includes using acceptable waste
containers (e.g., 55-gallon drums) as well as proper marking/labeling
of the containers. Wastes shall be cleaned up and containerized daily.
h. Include any process that may alter or treat waste rendering a hazardous
waste non hazardous.
i. Unit cost for hazardous waste disposal according to this plan.
1.5.2.9 Environmental, Safety and Health Compliance
In addition to the detailed requirements of this specification, comply with

laws, ordinances, rules, and regulations of federal, State, and local
authorities regarding lead. Comply with the applicable requirements of the
current issue of 29 CFR 1926.62. Submit matters regarding interpretation of
standards to the Contracting Officer for resolution before starting work.
Where specification requirements and the referenced documents vary, the
most stringent requirement shall apply.
Licensing and certification in the State of Louisiana is required.
SECTION 02 83 13.00 20 Page 7

1.5.3 Pre-Construction Conference
Along with the CP, meet with the Contracting Officer to discuss in detail
the Lead Waste Management Plan and the Lead Compliance Plan, including
procedures and precautions for the work.
1.6 EQUIPMENT
1.6.1 Respirators
Furnish appropriate respirators approved by the National Institute for

Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH), Department of Health and Human
Services, for use in atmospheres containing lead dust, fume and mist.
Respirators shall comply with the requirements of 29 CFR 1926.62.
1.6.2 Special Protective Clothing
Furnish personnel who will be exposed to lead-contaminated dust with proper

disposable or uncontaminated, reusable protective whole body clothing, head
covering, gloves, eye, and foot coverings as required by 29 CFR 1926.62.
Furnish proper disposable plastic or rubber gloves to protect hands.
Reduce the level of protection only after obtaining approval from the CP.
1.6.3 Rental Equipment Notification
If rental equipment is to be used during PWL or MCL handling and disposal,

notify the rental agency in writing concerning the intended use of the
equipment.
1.6.4 Vacuum Filters
UL 586 labeled HEPA filters.
1.6.5 Equipment for Government Personnel
Furnish the Contracting Officer with two complete sets of personal

protective equipment (PPE) daily, as required herein, for entry into and
inspection of the lead removal work within the lead controlled area.
Personal protective equipment shall include disposable whole body covering,
including appropriate foot, head, eye, and hand protection. PPE shall
remain the property of the Contractor. The Government will provide
respiratory protection for the Contracting Officer.
1.7 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
1.7.1 Protection of Existing Work to Remain
Perform work without damage or contamination of adjacent areas. Where

existing work is damaged or contaminated, restore work to its original
condition or better as determined by the Contracting Officer.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not used.
SECTION 02 83 13.00 20 Page 8

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
3.1.1 Protection
3.1.1.1 Notification
a. Notify the Contracting Officer 20 days prior to the start of any lead
work.
3.1.1.2 Lead Control Area
a. Physical Boundary - Provide physical boundaries around the lead control

area by roping off the area designated in the work plan or providing
curtains, portable partitions or other enclosures to ensure that lead
will not escape outside of the lead control area.
b. Warning Signs - Provide warning signs at approaches to lead control

areas. Locate signs at such a distance that personnel may read the sign
and take the necessary precautions before entering the area. Signs
shall comply with the requirements of 29 CFR 1926.62.
3.1.1.3 Furnishings
The Government will remove furniture and equipment from the building before
lead work begins.
3.1.1.4 Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning (HVAC) Systems
Shut down, lock out, and isolate HVAC systems that supply, exhaust, or pass
through the lead control areas. Seal intake and exhaust vents in the lead
control area with6 mil plastic sheet and tape. Seal seams in HVAC
components that pass through the lead control area.
3.1.1.5 Decontamination Shower Facility
Provide clean and contaminated change rooms and shower facilities in

accordance with this specification and 29 CFR 1926.62.
3.1.1.6 Eye Wash Station
Where eyes may be exposed to injurious corrosive materials, suitable

facilities for quick drenching or flushing of the eyes shall be provided
within the work area.
3.1.1.7 Mechanical Ventilation System
a. To the extent feasible, use local exhaust ventilation or other

collection systems, approved by the CP. Local exhaust ventilation
systems shall be evaluated and maintained in accordance with
29 CFR 1926.62.
b. Vent local exhaust outside the building and away from building
ventilation intakes or ensure system is connected to HEPA filters.
c. Use locally exhausted, power actuated tools or manual hand tools.
SECTION 02 83 13.00 20 Page 9

3.1.1.8 Personnel Protection
Personnel shall wear and use protective clothing and equipment as specified
herein. Eating, smoking, or drinking or application of cosmetics is not
permitted in the lead control area. No one will be permitted in the lead
control area unless they have been appropriately trained and provided with
protective equipment.
3.2 ERECTION
3.2.1 Lead Control Area Requirements
Establish a lead control area by completely establishing barriers and

physical boundaries around the area or structure where PWL or MCL removal
operations will be performed.
3.3 APPLICATION
3.3.1 Lead Work
Perform lead work in accordance with approved Lead Compliance Plan. Use
procedures and equipment required to limit occupational exposure and
environmental contamination with lead when the work is performed in
accordance with 29 CFR 1926.62, and as specified herein. Dispose of all PWL
or MCL and associated waste in compliance with federal, State, and local
requirements.
3.3.2 Paint with Lead or Material Containing Lead Removal
Provide methodology for removing lead in the Lead Compliance Plan. Select
lead removal processes to minimize contamination of work areas outside the
control area with lead-contaminated dust or other lead-contaminated debris
or waste and to ensure that unprotected personnel are not exposed to
hazardous concentrations of lead. Describe this removal process in the Lead
Compliance Plan.
3.3.2.1 Paint with Lead or Material Containing Lead - Indoor Removal
Perform manual or mechanical removal in the lead control areas using

enclosures, barriers or containments. Collect debris for disposal in
accordance with federal, State, and local requirements.
3.3.2.2 Paint with Lead or Material Containing Lead - Outdoor Removal
Perform outdoor removal as indicated in federal, State, and local

regulations and in the Lead Compliance Plan. The worksite preparation
(barriers or containments) shall be job dependent and presented in the Lead
Compliance Plan.
3.3.3 Personnel Exiting Procedures
Whenever personnel exit the lead-controlled area, they shall perform the
following procedures and shall not leave the work place wearing any
clothing or equipment worn in the control area:
a. Vacuum all clothing before entering the contaminated change room.
b. Remove protective clothing in the contaminated change room, and place

them in an approved impermeable disposal bag.
SECTION 02 83 13.00 20 Page 10

c. Change to clean clothes prior to leaving the clean clothes storage area.
3.4.1 Tests
3.4.1.1 Air Sampling
Conduct sampling for lead in accordance with 29 CFR 1926.62 and as

specified herein. Air sampling shall be directed or performed by the CP.
a. The CP shall be on the job site directing the air sampling and
inspecting the PWL or MCL removal work to ensure that the requirements
of the contract have been satisfied during the entire PWL or MCL
operation.
b. Collect personal air samples on employees who are anticipated to have

the greatest risk of exposure as determined by the CP. In addition,
collect air samples on at least twenty-five percent of the work crew or
a minimum of two employees, whichever is greater, during each work
shift.
c. Submit results of air samples, signed by the CP, within 72 hours after
the air samples are taken.
d. Conduct area air sampling daily, on each shift in which lead-based paint
removal operations are performed, in areas immediately adjacent to the
lead control area. Sufficient area monitoring shall be conducted to
ensure unprotected personnel are not exposed at or above 30 micrograms
per cubic meter of air. If 30 micrograms per cubic meter of air is
reached or exceeded, stop work, correct the conditions(s) causing the
increased levels. Notify the Contracting Officer immediately. Determine
if condition(s) require any further change in work methods. Removal
work shall resume only after the CP and the Contracting Officer give
approval.
3.4.1.2 [Enter Appropriate Subpart Title Here]3.5 CLEANING AND DISPOSAL
3.5.1 Cleanup
Maintain surfaces of the lead control area free of accumulations of dust

and debris. Restrict the spread of dust and debris; keep waste from being
distributed over the work area. Do not dry sweep or use pressurized air to
clean up the area. At the end of each shift and when the lead operation has
been completed, clean the controlled area of visible contamination. If
adjacent areas become contaminated at any time during the work, clean and
visually inspect all contaminated areas. The CP shall then certify in
writing that the area has been cleaned of lead contamination before
clearance testing.
3.5.1.1 Clearance Certification
The CP shall certify in writing that air samples collected outside the lead
control area during paint removal operations are less than 30 micrograms
per cubic meter of air; the respiratory protection used for the employees
was adequate; the work procedures were performed in accordance with
29 CFR 1926.62; and that there were no visible accumulations of material
and dust containing lead left in the work site. Do not remove the lead
SECTION 02 83 13.00 20 Page 11

control area or roped off boundary and warning signs prior to the
Contracting Officer's acknowledgement of receipt of the CP certification.
3.5.2 Disposal
a. All material, whether hazardous or non-hazardous shall be disposed in

accordance with all laws and provisions and all federal, State or local
regulations. Ensure all waste is properly characterized. The result of
each waste characterization (TCLP for RCRA materials) will dictate
disposal requirements.
b. Contractor is responsible for segregation of waste. Collect

lead-contaminated waste, scrap, debris, bags, containers, equipment,
and lead-contaminated clothing that may produce airborne concentrations
of lead particles. Label the containers in accordance with
29 CFR 1926.62 and 40 CFR 261.
c. Dispose of lead-contaminated material classified as hazardous waste at

an EPA or State approved hazardous waste treatment, storage, or
disposal facility off Government property.
d. Store waste materials in U.S. Department of Transportation (49 CFR 178)

approved55 gallon drums. Properly label each drum to identify the type
of waste (49 CFR 172) and the date the drum was filled. For hazardous
waste, the collection drum requires marking/labeling in accordance with
40 CFR 262 during the accumulation/collection timeframe. The
Contracting Officer or an authorized representative will assign an area
for interim storage of waste-containing drums. Do not store hazardous
waste drums in interim storage longer than 90 calendar days from the
date affixed to each drum.
e. Handle, store, transport, and dispose lead or lead-contaminated waste in

accordance with 40 CFR 260, 40 CFR 261, 40 CFR 262, 40 CFR 263,
40 CFR 264, and 40 CFR 265. Comply with land disposal restriction
notification requirements as required by 40 CFR 268.
3.5.2.1 Disposal Documentation
Submit written evidence to demonstrate the hazardous waste treatment,

storage, or disposal facility (TSD) is approved for lead disposal by the
EPA, State or local regulatory agencies. Submit one copy of the completed
hazardous waste manifest, signed and dated by the initial transporter in
accordance with 40 CFR 262. Contractor shall provide a certificate that
the waste was accepted by the disposal facility. Provide turn-in documents
or weight tickets for non-hazardous waste disposal.
3.5.2.2 Payment for Hazardous Waste
Payment for disposal of hazardous and non-hazardous waste will not be made
until a signed copy of the manifest from the treatment or disposal facility
certifying the amount of lead-containing materials or non-hazardous waste
delivered is returned and a copy is furnished to the Government.
SECTION 02 83 13.00 20 Page 12

SECTION 02 84 00
REMOVAL, RECYCLING AND DISPOSAL OF REGULATED MATERIALS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

designation only.
CODE OF FEDERAL REGULATIONS (CFR)
29 CFR 1910 Occupational Safety and Health Standards

Construction

Waste

Hazardous Waste
40 CFR 263 Standards Applicable to Transporters of

Hazardous Waste
40 CFR 264 Standards for Owners and Operators of

Hazardous Waste Treatment, Storage, and
Disposal Facilities
40 CFR 268 Land Disposal Restrictions
40 CFR 270 EPA Administered Permit Programs: The

Hazardous Waste Permit Program
40 CFR 273 Standards for Universal Waste Management
40 CFR 761 Polychlorinated Biphenyls (PCBs)

Manufacturing, Processing, Distribution in
Commerce and Use Prohibitions
49 CFR 171 General Information, Regulations and

Definitions
49 CFR 173 Shippers - General Requirements for

Shipments and Packagings
49 CFR 178 Specifications for Packagings
SECTION 02 84 00.00 44 Page 1

TEXAS ADMINISTRATIVE CODE (TAC)
TAC 335.91 - 335.94 Standards Applicable to Transporters of

Hazardous Waste
U.S. ARMY CORPS OF ENGINEERS (COE)
COE EM 385-1-1 (Current Edition) Safety and Health

Requirements Manual
1.2 DEFINITIONS
1.2.1 Regulated Materials
Regulated materials are arsenic (As), Americium (Am), cadmium (Cd), cesium,
chlordane, creosote, ethylene glycol, lead (Pb), mercury (Hg), oil and
grease, ozone depleting chemicals (ODC), polychlorinated biphenyls (PCB),
trichlorobenzene (TCB), diethylhexyl phthalate (DEHP), and tritium.
1.2.2 Arsenic
A solid and poisonous element that is commonly metallic, steel-gray,

crystalline, and brittle. A poisonous trioxide of arsenic is used
especially as an insecticide or weed killer. Typically, wood utility poles
are treated with arsenic trioxide.
1.2.3 Ballast
A ballast is a device used to give starting voltage and/or stabilizing

current to a fluorescent light tube. Ballast is a metal case filled with a
solid or semisolid asphalt/tar substance that contains a capacitor. The
capacitor may contain the following regulated materials: PCB, TCB or DEPH.
PCB was prohibited 1979 per 40 CFR 761. Approximately half of the ballasts
made before 1979 contained PCB. "No PCBs" labels have been used to
identify ballasts without PCB since 1 July 1978. Therefore all ballasts
without "No PCBs" labels, with labels of fabrication on or before 1979 and
no known date of fabrication are assumed as PCB ballasts. PCB ballasts are
regulated and disposal at a landfill is prohibited.
Ballasts from 4-foot lighting fixtures made before 1985 and from all other
sizes of fixtures made before 1991 contained wet capacitors. The
replacement dielectric fluid for PCBs in these wet capacitors is mineral
oil and solvents. The hazardous solvents are typically TCB or DEPH.
Unless the non-PCB ballasts are made after 1992, they are presumed to
contain TCB or DEPH and shall be recycled at a permitted facility.
1.2.4 Cadmium
A bluish, white, malleable, ductile, toxic, bivalent, and metallic

element. It is especially used in protective plating, bearing metals, and
electrodes for batteries.
1.2.5 Americium
Americium (Am) isotope Am241 has been used as a source of ionization for
smoke detector. It is believed to exist in two (2) forms, an alpha form,
which has a double hexagonal close-packed structure, and a loss-packed
cubic beta form. The alpha activity from Am241 is three times that of
SECTION 02 84 00.00 44 Page 2

radium and must be handled with great care to avoid human contamination.
1.2.6 Chlordane
It was typically used for treatment of termites in soil around the building
foundation and perimeter of structure. Sampling and testing are required
for soil disposal.
1.2.7 Creosote
A brownish oily liquid, consisting chiefly of aromatic hydrocarbons. It

is obtained by distillation of coal tar and used especially as a wood
preservative (i.e. wood utility poles).
1.2.8 Emergency Lights
The emergency lights are operated by a back-up power source such as a

battery. Mercury, cadmium, and lead are typically used in batteries.
1.2.9 Fluorescent Light Tube
A light bulb (or tube) of a fluorescent lighting fixture.
1.2.10 Lead
A heavy, soft, malleable, ductile, plastic but inelastic, bluish white,

and metallic element. It is found mostly in combination and used
especially in pipes, cable sheaths, batteries, solder, and shield against
radioactivity.
1.2.11 Lighting Fixture
A unit containing a fluorescent light tube, light reflector, casing and

ballast.
1.2.12 Mercury (Hg)
Mercury is a metal that is liquid at room temperature with a small vapor

pressure. Mercury-containing items addressed in this specification are
thermostats, fluorescent light tubes, and rechargeable battery.
1.2.13 Mercury Bulb Thermostat
A temperature control device containing a mercury ampule attached to a

bimetallic sensing element.
1.2.14 Ozone Depleting Chemicals (ODC)
ODC include chlorofluorocarbons (CFCs), hydrochlorofluorocarbons (HCFCs),

halon, tetra (and tri) chloroethane, carbon tetrachloride and all isomers
of methyl chloroform. A complete list of ODC are in40 CFR 82 Subpart A,
Appendixes A and B. Items potentially containing ODC's are refrigeration
equipment for HVAC systems, freezers, refrigerators, drinking fountains,
ice machines, beverage and refrigerated food dispensers, halon fire
extinguishers, and biomedical equipment.
1.2.15 Polychlorinated Biphenyls (PCBs)
PCB are defined in 40 CFR 761. They are oily in pure form. PCBs can enter
SECTION 02 84 00.00 44 Page 3

the body through lungs, gastrointestinal tract, skin, can circulate through
throughout the body, and can be stored in the fatty tissue. Available
animal studies indicate an oncogenic potential. PCBs can cause adverse
reproductive effects and developmental toxicity in humans. Items
containing PCBs in this specification are ballasts and transformers (see
definition of Ballast below).
1.2.16 Retorting Mercury
The retorting of mercury is a process whereby mercury is distilled from

other materials by using heat. During the fluorescent light tube recycling
process, mercury is retorting from phosphor powder that coats the inside of
the glass tube.
1.2.17 Transformer
A device employing the principle of mutual induction to convert variations

of current in a primary circuit into variations of voltage and current in a
secondary circuit. It contains PCB, TCB and/or DEPH. It is pole-mounted or
pad-mounted.
1.2.18 Tritium
It is a low radioactive gas, radioactive isotope of hydrogen with atoms of

three times the mass of ordinary light hydrogen atoms. It has very low
radiotoxicity and is typically used in luminous instrument dials such as
lighted exit signs.
1.2.19 Utility Pole
It is typically used for mounting power cable, panel, lighting, control

switch, or electrical device such as transformers. An exterior wood pole
is typically preserved by pressure treatment with application of arsenic
trioxide or creosote.
1.2.20 Heating and Chilling Water
This type of system is used in military installations. It typically

contains ethylene glycol (antifreeze), a regulated substance.
1.2.21 Grease Trap
It is commonly installed in dining facility or kitchen. It contains oil

and grease sludge. Removal or and discharging to sanitary sewerage system
is prohibited.
1.3 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
Prior to the start of demolition or renovation of existing building

structures, all items containing regulated materials shall be removed.
They shall be salvaged and recycled to the maximum extent possible or
incinerated. The abatement items and quantities shall be pre-determined by
a regulated material survey from knowledge of manufacturing by a third pary
contract that is independent of the abatement contractor. The list items
to be surveyed is listed in Part 1.2 and Part 3.3. Final disposal of
regulated materials in a landfill shall be in accordance with applicable
Federal, state, and local regulatory agencies, and when all means of
recycling and reuse are exhausted. There is no separate payment for
abatement and associated tasks to be performed in this section.
SECTION 02 84 00.00 44 Page 4

1.4 CONTRACTOR'S QUALIFICATIONS
The Contractor and subcontractors shall have at least 2 years experience

with battery, thermostats, delisted pesticides and be familiar with
Universal Waste Rules in accordance with 40 CFR 273 and Mercury-Containing
and Rechargeable Battery Recycling Act, Public Law 104-142, effective since
May 13, 1996. The Contractor and subcontractors shall have at least 2
years experience with PCB-containing items and familiar with 40 CFR 761.
The Contractor and subcontractors shall have at least at least 2 years
experience in purging and reclaiming ODC and certified in accordance with
40 CFR 82. They shall also be familiar with other applicable Federal,
state and local regulations for work to be performed in this specification.
1.5 SUBMITTALS

Contractor's Qualifications; G.
Documentation of work experience in removal, recycling and/or

disposal of items containing regulated material in accordance with
paragraph, Contractor's Qualification.
ODC Recovery and Recycling Equipment's Certifications; G.
A copy of each ODC recovery and recycling equipment's

certification in accordance with 40 CFR 82.
A copy of certification from each technician reclaiming ODC in

accordance with 40 CFR 82. Certification shall be obtained from
industrial recognized training facility such as the National
Registry of Environmental Professionals
http://www.ess-home.com/training/prof/refrigerant/
Licenses and Permits; G.
A copy of the recycling/destruction facility license for handling,

treatment and/or destruction of ballasts containing PCB, TCB
and/or DEPH.
A copy of the RCRA Part B permit for the facility that is

retorting mercury on site.
Proof of state registration or a copy of permit for pumping,

hauling, and transporting hazardous waste in accordance with
TAC 335.91 - 335.94, and EPA permit per 40 CFR 263 if transporting
to other state.
A written agreement of the fluorescent light tubes recycling

facility to transport the packaged fluorescent light tubes.
Proof of training and certification in knowledge and understanding
SECTION 02 84 00.00 44 Page 5

of 40 CFR 273.
Proof of state registration to pump, transport, or recycle grease

trap sludge.
Notification of Recycling Activity; G.
Contractor is require to notify TNRCC 90 days prior to recycling

activity with the form TNRCC-0525, "Generator Notification Form
for Recycling Hazardous or Industrial Waste". Furnish a copy to
the Contracting Officer.
Spill Prevention Plan; G.
A written Spill Prevention Plan shall be prepared in accordance

with paragraph SPILLS AND SAFETY of this section shall be
submitted at least 30 days before start of work.
Environmental Pollution Liability Insurance; G.
A copy of the current environmental pollution liability insurance

policy from the Contractor (subcontractors) and the recycling
and/or destruction facilities.
Closure Report; G.
A report in accordance with Part 3 paragraph CLOSURE REPORT shall

be prepared and submitted in 10 working days or prior to final
payment after completion of work specified in this section.
Recycling Activity Delivery Receipt; G.
The Contractor shall submit to the Contracting Officer a delivery

receipt verifying recycling of items to the Contracting Officer.
Contractor shall be responsible to manifest in accordance with 40
CFR 261 and 761. Transportation shall be in accordance with 49 CFR
173 and 178.
1.6 LABELING AND RECORD KEEPING
Labeling and record keeping of regulated materials to be salvaged,

recycled, incinerated, or placed in a landfill shall be in accordance with
40 CFR 262, 40 CFR 263, 40 CFR 264, and all other applicable Federal, State
and local regulations. Bill of lading shall be prepared for each item to
be shipped to recycling and/or destruction. Information shall include
initial date of storage, generator's name and address, destination address
and telephone number and the shipping weight.
1.7 SPILLS AND SAFETY
The Contractor shall prepare, maintain and implement a Spill Prevention

Plan. The plan shall establish policies and procedures to prevent spills,
minimize spill impact on its surroundings and methods to cleanup. The plan
shall encompass all activities including at the site, transportation to
recycling and/or destruction facilities. It shall address all the safety
and health concerns in accordance with 29 CFR 1926 in event of a spill. It
shall address clean-up requirements in accordance with 29 CFR 1910, Part
SECTION 02 84 00.00 44 Page 6

120 paragraphs (b) through (o). Clean-up personnel shall meet the training
requirements of 29 CFR 1910, Part 38 (a); 29 CFR 1910, Part 134; and
29 CFR 1910, Part 1200. As a minimum, the following items shall be
addressed in the plan: cleanup of spill by the Contractor; verification
and approval of final clearance by the Contracting Officer; personal
protective equipment (PPE) and decontamination procedures; equipment and
material required for cleanup; reporting required to notify state, local,
and the Contracting Officer verbally and in writing. The plan shall be
kept on-site. Spills of one pound or more of PCBs (typically from 16 or
more ballasts) shall be reported within 24 hours to National Response
Center (1-800-424-8802), the Contracting Officer and cleaned up
immediately. The Contractor shall assume full responsibility for
compliance with all Federal, state, and local regulations for workers
protection, work practices, site safety, transportation and disposal.
1.8 STORAGE
A temporary storage area shall be provided by the Contractor and approved

by the Contracting Officer. Storage time limits are 30 days for ballasts
containing PCBs (40 CFR 761) and 1 year for thermostats containing Hg (
40 CFR 273). All regulated materials must be removed from the site before
final acceptance of this project by the Government.
1.9 TRANSPORTATION
Items containing regulated materials shall be transported by a licensed,

hazardous waste hauler. The Spill Prevention Plan shall be enforced by the
Contractor to prevent spillage in accordance with 49 CFR 171 and 40 CFR 173.
The hauler shall not store regulated materials longer than 10 days in
accordance with 40 CFR 263 and 40 CFR 273. Vehicle loading, vehicle
placarding, waste tracking, notification and record keeping shall be in
accordance with all applicable Federal, State and local regulations.
1.10 POTENTIAL BUYERS OF RECYCLED MATERIALS
Contractor may use www.recycletexasonline.org to find potential buyer to

recycle the PCB or wet-type (TCB and/or DEPH) ballasts or transformers.
The receiver of the PCB or wet-type (TCB or DEPH) ballasts or transformers

shall have a RCRA Part B permit.
1.11 LICENSES AND PERMITS
Contractor shall furnish the licenses and permits listed in Part 1

paragraph SUBMITTALS.
PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 VERIFICATION OF REGULATED MATERIALS
Prior to initiation of work in this section, the Contractor shall field

verify the actual locations, quantities and categories of items containing
regulated materials. The Contractor shall notify the Contracting Officer
of any discrepancies or conflicts before performing work.
SECTION 02 84 00.00 44 Page 7

3.2 WASTE MINIMIZATION, SALVAGE, AND RECLAMATION
The Contractor shall segregate wastes to salvage and reclaim all items to
their maximum extent and practice waste minimization. The Contractor shall
not dispose of any item in its entirety to the landfill or by
incineration. Regulated materials shall be manifested in accordance with
40 CFR 262, unless exemption is justified.
3.3 REMOVAL, HANDLING, AND PACKAGING
Removing, handling, and packaging shall be in accordance with COE EM 385-1-1.
3.3.1 Ballasts
The Contractor shall remove all ballasts from the lighting fixtures and
place them into containers for shipping in accordance with 49 CFR 178.
Leaking ballasts shall be placed in containers with absorbent material such
as environmental sustainable fire-retardant materials. Containers shall
have affixed label such as "Leaking (PCB) or (Non-PCB with TCB or DEPH)
Ballasts". Intact ballasts shall be packed and labeled as "(PCB) or (
Non-PCB with TCB or DEPH) Ballasts". A typical container shall not hold
more than 220 ballasts or the total weight of each container shall not
exceed 400 kilograms (or 882 pounds). PCB ballast shall be managed in
accordance with 40 CFR 761. These containers shall be transported to a
permitted facility for incineration or destruction. The Contractor shall
contact DPW for recycling support.
3.3.2 Lighted Exit Signs, Smoke Detectors, Emergency lights and

Rechargeable Batteries
The Contractor shall field verify locations of these items. They shall be
carefully removed and securely packed in separate labeled containers. The
container voids shall be filled with environmental sustainable
fire-retardant materials. Shipping labels "Used Lighted Exit Signs Contain
Tritium (Potential Hazard: Low Radiotoxicity)" and "Smoke Detectors Contain
Americium (Potential Hazard: Low Radiotoxicity)" shall be affixed on
containers with the intact components. Emergency lights with used
batteries shall be placed in separate container labeled as "Emergency
Lights with Used Batteries (Potential Hazard: lead, cadmium, mercury)".
Other rechargeable batteries shall be placed in a separate container
labeled as "Used Batteries (Potential Hazard: lead, cadmium, mercury)".
The containers shall be vented and voids shall be filled with environmental
sustainable fire-retardant materials. The Contractor shall turn in these
containers to a permittted facility. The Contractor shall contact DPW for
recycling support.
3.3.3 Fluorescent Light Tubes and Lighting Fixtures
The Contractor shall remove the intact fluorescent light tubes from the
lighting fixtures and place in the same boxes that held the replacement
light tubes or other similar size containers that have box spacers to
prevent breakage. Broken tubes shall be placed in containers in accordance
with 49 CFR 178 and labeled as "Broken Fluorescent Light Tubes with
Mercury." The containers with broken light tubes shall be manifested for
transport and disposal in accordance with 40 CFR 262, 40 CFR 263, and
40 CFR 264. Fluorescent light tubes shall be transported by the recycling
facility. The Contractor shall obtain written agreement from the recycling
facility to transport the packaged light tubes. Metallic components of the
lighting fixtures shall be recycled as scrap metal with other metallic
SECTION 02 84 00.00 44 Page 8

components of the building structure. Plastic components of the lighting

fixtures shall be segregated and recycled. The Contractor shall contact
DPW for recycling support.
3.3.4 Mercury Bulb Thermostats
The Contractor shall remove and handle mercury bulb thermostats in

accordance with 40 CFR 273. Leaking or broken ones shall be placed in a
container with environmental sustainable absorbent and labeled as " Broken
Mercury Bulb Thermostats". Intact bulb thermostats shall be packed and
labeled as "Intact Mercury Bulb Thermostats." They shall be manifested for
transportation and disposal in accordance with 40 CFR 262, 40 CFR 263, and
40 CFR 264 The Contractor shall contact DPW for recycling support.
3.3.5 ODC Units
The Contractor shall purge the units and handle ODC in accordance with
40 CFR 82 Subpart F prior to removal from existing locations. The salvaged
refrigerant shall be recycled by the Contractor. The Contractor shall
contact DPW for recycling support.
3.3.6 Chlordane in Soil
The Contractor shall salvage all excavated material and reuse it at the
project site to minimize disposal requirement and worker exposure. The
Contractor shall practice dust control at project site in accordance with
specification Sections 01 57 20 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION and 01 56 00 DUST
CONTROL. If knowledge of previous application was not for routine pest
control, sample of soil to be removed and disposed, shall be analyzed for
Toxicity Characteristic Leaching Procedure for soil chlordane, unless
analytical data are available from similar project site. If TCLP chlordane
is less than 0.03 mg/L, it is characterized as non-hazardous material in
accordance with 40 CFR 261. If chlordane has been applied for its intended
use, soil sample analysis is not required.
3.3.7 Transformers
The Contractor shall verify the locations of transformers for removal. The
Contractor shall coordinate with the DPW for access to the analytical data
base of the transformers and obtain data plates information. The
Contractor shall perform sampling and analyses for PCB when analytical
results are not available. Disconnection of electrical services shall be
approved by DPW and the Contracting Officer. The Contractor shall prepare
government Form 1340 and list transformers identification numbers, types,
sizes, and attach PCB test results from data base or a currently licensed
analytical, third partly laboratory (independent of the Contractor). A
copy of Form 1340 shall be submitted to DPW and the Contracting Officer to
schedule for pre-inspection. The Contractor shall remove and transport the
transformers to a staging area approved by the Contracting Officer. In
accordance with 40 CFR 761.20, The Contractor shall provide containment at
the staging area to prevent storm water pollution. The Contractor shall
prepare manifests (EPA Form 8700-22)for both PCB contaminated transformers
(with PCB levels greater than 50 parts per millions (ppm) but less than 500
ppm) and PCB transformers (with PCB levels equal to or greater than 500
ppm). Once pre-inspection is approved, the Contractor shall haul
transformer with Form 1340 to a licenced facility for disposal. The
Contractor shall provide shipping description (which consists of RQ
designation, shipping name, hazard class, UN identification number, packing
group, and supplemental information) in accordance with 49 CFR 173.
SECTION 02 84 00.00 44 Page 9

3.3.8 Utility Poles
The Contractor desinger shall verify locations and sizes of wood poles to
be exceesed. The removal of wood poles shall be coordinated with the DPW.
Utility poles shall be salvaged the Contractor. However, if they are
disposed as waste material, the disposal facility receiving those wood
poles shall have permit or written authorization by the Texas Natural
Resource Conservation Commission (TNRCC) to receive wood poles which are
typically contaminated with arsenic and/or creosote.
3.3.9 Heating and Chilling Water System
The Contractor shall purge and thoroughly rinse the system prior to
dismantling. The contaminated water shall be contained and labeled for
recycling at a permitted facility.
3.3.10 Grease Trap
The Contractor shall have a state registered oil and grease sludge hauler
purge and thoroughly rinse the system prior to dismantling and removal of
the unit. The oil and grease sludge and the rinsed unit shall be recycled
to the maximum extent, if possible.
3.4 RECYCLING/DESTRUCTION FACILITY
The Contractor shall use EPA permitted recycling/destruction facility in

accordance with 40 CFR 261, 40 CFR 268, and 40 CFR 270 and/or State
permitted or registered facility which holds current environmental
pollution liability insurance coverage.
3.5 CLOSURE REPORT
The report shall contain: (1) A signed cover letter certifying completion
of work described herein, (2) A signed Statement of Compliance, appended
herein, (3) A brief narrative of worker protection and waste removal,
segregation, packaging, transportation, and ultimate method of disposal
(i.e. recycled/reuse, incinerated, landfill, etc.), (4) A description of
accidents, ruptures, leaks, subsequent response procedures and cleanup, and
(5) A copy of final disposition document of each item including at least
the following: notification, signed manifest of waste, signed certificates
or receipts (Bill of Lading) from each recycling or destruction facility.
3.6 STATEMENT OF COMPLIANCE
The Statement of compliance follows this page.
SECTION 02 84 00.00 44 Page 10

STATEMENT OF COMPLIANCE
I hereby certify that:
(1) the appropriate state manifest form has been completely and properly
filled out;
(2) the packing, marking, labeling and placarding of the waste meets all
applicable regulations;
(3) the waste transportation, recycling, destruction and disposal meets

all applicable Federal, State and local regulations.
Name______________________________________________________________
Title_____________________________________________________________
Date______________________________________________________________
SECTION 02 84 00.00 44 Page 11

SECTION 03 11 13.00 10
STRUCTURAL CONCRETE FORMWORK
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

ACI 347 (2004) Guide to Formwork for Concrete
AHA A135.4 (2004) Basic Hardboard
APA PS 1 (1995) Voluntary Product Standard for

Construction and Industrial Plywood
ASTM C 1077 (2010b) Standard Practice for Laboratories

Testing Concrete and Concrete Aggregates
for Use in Construction and Criteria for
Laboratory Evaluation
ASTM C 31/C 31M (2010) Standard Practice for Making and

Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field
ASTM C 39/C 39M (2009) Standard Test Method for

Compressive Strength of Cylindrical
Concrete Specimens
ASTM C 578 (2010) Standard Specification for Rigid,

Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation
The design, engineering, and construction of the formwork is the

responsibility of the Contractor. Design formwork in accordance with
methodology of ACI 347 for anticipated loads, lateral pressures, and
stresses, and capable of withstanding the pressures resulting from
placement and vibration of concrete. Comply with the tolerances specified
in Section 03 31 00.00 10 CAST-IN-PLACE STRUCTURAL CONCRETE, paragraph
CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES. However, for surfaces with an ACI Class A surface
designation, limit the allowable deflection for facing material between
studs, for studs between walers and walers between bracing to 0.0025 times
the span. Design the formwork as a complete system with consideration
given to the effects of cementitious materials and mixture additives such
as fly ash, cement type, plasticizers, accelerators, retarders, air
SECTION 03 11 13.00 10 Page 1

entrainment, and others. Monitor the adequacy of formwork design and

construction prior to and during concrete placement as part of the
Contractor's approved Quality Control Plan.
1.3 SUBMITTALS

SD-02 Shop Drawings
Formwork
Drawings showing details of formwork, including dimensions of

fiber voids, joints, supports, studding and shoring, and sequence
of form and shoring removal. At least 21 days either before
fabrication on site or before delivery of prefabricated forms.
SD-03 Product Data
Design
Design analysis and calculations for form design and methodology

used in the design. At least 21 days either before fabrication on
site or before delivery of prefabricated forms.
Form Materials
Manufacturer's data including literature describing form

materials, accessories, and form releasing agents.
Form Releasing Agents
Manufacturer's recommendation on method and rate of application

of form releasing agents.
SD-04 Samples
Sample Panels; G
After shop drawings have been reviewed, sample panels for Class
A finish with applied architectural treatment shall be built on
the project site where directed.
Fiber Voids; G
SD-06 Test Reports
Inspection
Field inspection reports for concrete forms and embedded items.
Formwork Not Supporting Weight of Concrete.
If forms are to be removed in less than 24 hours on formwork not

supporting the weight of concrete, the evaluation and results of
the control cylinder tests shall be submitted to and approved
SECTION 03 11 13.00 10 Page 2

before the forms are removed.
SD-07 Certificates
Fiber Voids
Certificates attesting that fiber voids conform to the specified

requirements.
Sample Panels shall be of sufficient size to contain joints and shall be

not less than 6 feet long and 4 feet wide. The panels shall be of typical
wall thickness and constructed containing the full allocation of
reinforcing steel that will be used in the structure, with the forming
system that duplicates in every detail the one that will be used in
construction of the structure. Use the same concrete mixture proportion
and materials, the same placement techniques and equipment, and the same
finishing techniques and timing that are planned for the structure.
Construction of Class A finish will not be permitted until sample panels
have been approved. Protect sample panels from construction operations in
a manner to protect approved finish, and are not to be removed until all
Class A finish concrete has been accepted.
Store fiber voids above ground level in a dry location. Fiber voids shall
be kept dry until installed and overlaid with concrete.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 FORM MATERIALS
2.1.1 Forms For Class A Finish
Forms for Class A finished surfaces shall be plywood panels conforming to

APA PS 1, Grade B-B concrete form panels, Class I or II. Other form
materials or liners may be used provided the smoothness and appearance of
concrete produced will be equivalent to that produced by the plywood
concrete form panels. Forms for round columns shall be the prefabricated
seamless type.
2.1.2 Forms For Class B Finish
This class of finish shall apply to all surfaces except those specified to
receive Class A, Class C, Class D. Forms for Class B finished surfaces
shall be plywood panels conforming to APA PS 1, Grade B-B concrete form
panels, Class I or II. Other form materials or liners may be used provided
the smoothness and appearance of concrete produced will be equivalent to
that produced by the plywood concrete form panels. Forms for round columns
shall be the prefabricated seamless type. Steel lining on wood sheathing
will not be permitted.
2.1.3 Forms For Class C Finish
Forms for Class C finished surfaces shall be shiplap lumber; plywood

conforming to APA PS 1, Grade B-B concrete form panels, Class I or II;
tempered concrete form hardboard conforming to AHA A135.4; other approved
concrete form material; or steel, except that steel lining on wood
SECTION 03 11 13.00 10 Page 3

sheathing shall not be used. Forms for round columns may have one vertical
seam.
2.1.4 Forms For Class D Finish
Forms for Class D finished surfaces, except where concrete is placed

against earth, shall be wood or steel or other approved concrete form
material.
2.1.5 Retain-In-Place Metal Forms
Retain-in-place metal forms for concrete slabs and roofs shall be as

specified in Section 05 30 00 STEEL DECKS.
2.1.6 Pan-Form Units
Pan-form units for one-way or two-way concrete joist and slab construction
shall be factory-fabricated units of the approximate section indicated.
Units shall consist of steel or molded fiberglass concrete form pans.
Closure units shall be furnished as required.
2.1.7 Form Ties
Form ties shall be factory-fabricated metal ties, shall be of the removable

or internal disconnecting or snap-off type, and shall be of a design that
will not permit form deflection and will not spall concrete upon removal.
Provide solid backing for each tie. Except where removable tie rods are
used, ties shall not leave holes in the concrete surface less than 1/4 inch
nor more than 1 inch deep and not more than 1 inch in diameter. Terminate
the embedded portion of metal ties not less that 2 inches from any concrete
surface exposed to water. Removable tie rods shall be not more than 1-1/2
inches in diameter. Plastic snap ties may be used in locations where the
surface will not be exposed to view.
2.1.8 Form Releasing Agents
Form releasing agents shall be commercial formulations that will not bond
with, stain or adversely affect concrete surfaces. Agents shall not impair
subsequent treatment of concrete surfaces depending upon bond or adhesion
nor impede the wetting of surfaces to be cured with water or curing
compounds. If special form liners are to be used, the Contractor shall
follow the recommendation of the form coating manufacturer.
2.1.9 Fiber Voids
Fiber voids shall be the product of a reputable manufacturer regularly

engaged in the commercial production of fiber voids. The voids shall be
constructed of double faced, corrugated fiberboard. The corrugated
fiberboard shall be fabricated of wet strength paper liners, impregnated
with paraffin, and laminated with moisture resistant adhesive, and shall
have a board strength of 275 psi. Voids which are impregnated with
paraffin after construction, in lieu of being constructed with paraffin
impregnated fiberboard, are acceptable. Voids shall be designed to support
not less than 1000 psf. To prevent separation during concrete placement
fiber voids shall be assembled with steel or plastic banding at 4 feet on
center maximum, or by adequate stapling or gluing as recommended by the
manufacturer. Fiber voids placed under concrete slabs and that are 8 inches
in depth may be heavy duty "waffle box" type, constructed of paraffin
impregnated corrugated fiberboard.
SECTION 03 11 13.00 10 Page 4

2.2 FIBER VOID RETAINERS
2.2.1 Polystyrene Rigid Insulation
Polystyrene rigid insulation shall conform to ASTM C 578, Type V, VI, or

VII, square edged. Size shall be 1-1/2 inches thick by 16 inches in height
by 3 feet in length, unless otherwise indicated.
2.2.2 Precast Concrete
Precast concrete units shall have a compressive strength of not less than
2500 psi, reinforced with 6 inch by 6 inch by W1.4 WWF wire mesh, and 12
inches (height) by 3 feet (length) by 1-5/8 inches (thickness) in size
unless indicated.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
3.1.1 Formwork
Forms shall be constructed true to the structural design and required

alignment. Forms shall be mortar tight, properly aligned and adequately
supported to produce concrete surfaces meeting the surface requirements
specified in Section 03 31 00.00 10 CAST-IN-PLACE STRUCTURAL CONCRETE and
conforming to construction tolerance given in TABLE 1. Continuously
monitor the alignment and stability of the forms during all phases to
assure the finished product will meet the required surface class or classes
specified. Failure of any supporting surface either due to surface
texture, deflection or form collapse shall be the responsibility of the
Contractor as will the replacement or correction of unsatisfactory
surfaces. Where concrete surfaces are to have a Class A or Class B finish,
joints in form panels shall be arranged as approved. When forms for
continuous surfaces are placed in successive units, care shall be taken to
fit the forms over the completed surface to obtain accurate alignment of
the surface and to prevent leakage of mortar. Forms shall not be re-used
if there is any evidence of defects which would impair the quality of the
resulting concrete surface. All surfaces of used forms shall be cleaned of
mortar and any other foreign material before reuse. Form ties that are to
be completely withdrawn shall be coated with a nonstaining bond breaker.
3.1.2 Fiber Voids
Voids shall be placed on a smooth firm dry bed of suitable material, to

avoid being displaced vertically, and shall be set tight, with no buckled
cartons, in order that horizontal displacement cannot take place. Each
section of void shall have its ends sealed by dipping in paraffin, with any
additional cutting of voids at the jobsite to be field dipped in the same
type of sealer, unless liners and flutes are completely impregnated with
paraffin. Prior to placing reinforcement, the entire formed area for slabs
shall be covered with a 4 x 8 feet minimum flat sheets of fiber void
corrugated fiberboard. Joints shall be sealed with a moisture resistant
tape having a minimum width of 3 inches. If voids are destroyed or damaged
and are not capable of supporting the design load, they shall be replaced
prior to placing of concrete.
SECTION 03 11 13.00 10 Page 5

3.1.3 Fiber Void Retainers
Fiber void retainers shall be installed, continuously, on both sides of

fiber voids placed under grade beams in order to retain the cavity after
the fiber voids biodegrade.
3.2 CHAMFERING
All exposed joints, edges and external corners shall be chamfered by

molding placed in the forms unless the drawings specifically state that
chamfering is to be omitted or as otherwise specified. Chamfered joints
shall not be permitted where earth or rockfill is placed in contact with
concrete surfaces. Chamfered joints shall be terminated twelve inches
outside the limit of the earth or rockfill so that the end of the chamfers
will be clearly visible.
3.3 COATING
Forms for Class A and Class B finished surfaces shall be coated with a form
releasing agent before the form or reinforcement is placed in final
position. The coating shall be used as recommended in the manufacturer's
printed or written instructions. Forms for Class C and D finished surfaces
may be wet with water in lieu of coating immediately before placing
concrete, except that in cold weather with probable freezing temperatures,
coating shall be mandatory. Surplus coating on form surfaces and coating
on reinforcing steel and construction joints shall be removed before
placing concrete.
3.4 FORM REMOVAL
Forms shall not be removed without approval. The minimal time required for
concrete to reach a strength adequate for removal of formwork without
risking the safety of workers or the quality of the concrete depends on a
number of factors including, but not limited to, ambient temperature,
concrete lift heights, type and amount of concrete admixture, and type and
amount of cementitious material in the concrete. It is the responsibility
of the Contractor to consider all applicable factors and leave the forms in
place until it is safe to remove them. In any case forms shall not be
removed unless the minimum time requirements below are met, except as
otherwise directed or specifically authorized. When conditions are such as
to justify the requirement, forms will be required to remain in place for a
longer period. All removal shall be accomplished in a manner which will
prevent damage to the concrete and ensure the complete safety of the
structure. Where forms support more than one element, the forms shall not
be removed until the form removal criteria are met by all supported
elements. Form removal shall be scheduled so that all necessary repairs
can be performedas specified
in Section 03 31 01.00 10 Cast-In-Place Structural Concrete, paragraph

1.4.9. Evidence that concrete has gained sufficient strength to permit
removal of forms shall be determined by tests on control cylinders. All
control cylinders shall be stored in the structure or as near the structure
as possible so they receive the same curing conditions and protection
methods as given those portions of the structure they represent. Control
cylinders shall be removed from the molds at an age of no more than 24
hours. All control cylinders shall be prepared and tested in accordance
with ASTM C 31/C 31M and ASTM C 39/C 39M at the expense of the Contractor
by an independent laboratory that complies with ASTM C 1077 and shall be
tested within 4 hours after removal from the site.
SECTION 03 11 13.00 10 Page 6

3.4.1 Formwork Not Supporting Weight of Concrete
Formwork for walls, columns, sides of beams, gravity structures, and other
vertical type formwork not supporting the weight of concrete shall not be
removed in less than 24 hours after concrete placement is completed. Form
removal before 24 hours will be allowed for simple floor slab, sidewalks,
and driveways provided the ambient temperature during this period has not
fallen below 50 degrees F at any time since placement and evidence from
compressive tests on field-cured concrete control cylinders indicates that
the concrete has attained a compressive strength of at least 500 psi.
Control cylinders shall be prepared for each set of forms to be removed
before 24 hours. The stability of the concrete shall be evaluated by a
structural engineer prior to removal of the forms.
3.4.2 Formwork Supporting Weight of Concrete
Formwork supporting weight of concrete and shoring shall not be removed

until structural members have acquired sufficient strength to safely
support their own weight and any construction or other superimposed loads
to which the supported concrete may be subjected. As a minimum, forms
shall be left in place until control concrete test cylinders indicate
evidence the concrete has attained at least 70 percent of the compressive
strength required for the structure in accordance with the quality and
location requirements.
3.5 INSPECTION
Forms and embedded items shall be inspected in sufficient time prior to

each concrete placement in order to certify to the Contracting Officer that
they are ready to receive concrete. The results of each inspection shall
be reported in writing.
TABLE 1
TOLERANCES FOR FORMED SURFACES
1. Variations from the plumb:
a. In the lines and surfaces of 1/4 inch in any 10 feet of length

columns, piers, walls and in arises Maximum for entire length -- 1 inch
b. For exposed corner columns, 1/4 inch in any 20 feet of length

control-joint grooves, and other Maximum for entire length -- 1/2
conspicuous lines inch
2. Variation for the level or from the grades indicated on the drawings:
a. In slab soffits, ceilings beam 1/4 inch in any 10 feet of length

soffits, and in arises,measured 3/8 inch in any bay or in any 20
before removal of supporting shores feet of length
Maximum for entire length -- 3/4
inch
SECTION 03 11 13.00 10 Page 7

TABLE 1
TOLERANCES FOR FORMED SURFACES
b. In exposed lintels, sills, 1/4 inch in any bay or in any 20

parapets, horizontal grooves, and feet of length
other conspicuous lines Maximum for entire length -- 1/2
inch
3. Variation of the linear 1/2 inch in any 10 feet
building lines from established 1 inch maximum
position in plan
4. Variation of distance between 1/4 inch per 10 feet of distance,

walls, columns, partitions but not more than 1/2 inch in any
one bay, and not more than 1 inch
total variation
5. Variation in the sizes and Minus 1/4 inch, Plus 1/2 inch
locations of sleeves, floor
openings, and wall opening
6. Variation in cross-sectional Minus 1/4 inch, Plus 1/2 inch

dimensions of columns and beams and
in the thickness of slabs and walls
7. Footings:
a. Variation of dimensions in plan Minus 1/2 inch, plus 2 inches when

formed or plus 3 inches when placed
against unformed excavation
b. Misplacement of eccentricity 2 percent of the footing width in

the direction of misplacement but
not more than 2 inches
c. Reduction in thickness Minus 5 percent of the specified

thickness
8. Variation in steps:
a. In a flight of stairs Riser -- 1/8 inch

Tread -- 1/4 inch
b. In consecutive steps Riser -- 1/16 inch

Tread -- 1/8 inch
SECTION 03 11 13.00 10 Page 8

SECTION 03 15 00.00 10
CONCRETE ACCESSORIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

AHA A135.4 (2004) Basic Hardboard
ASTM C 919 (2008) Use of Sealants in Acoustical

Applications
ASTM D 1751 (2004; R 2008) Standard Specification for

Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for
Concrete Paving and Structural
Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient
Bituminous Types)
ASTM D 1752 (2004a; R 2008) Standard Specification for

Preformed Sponge Rubber Cork and Recycled
PVC Expansion

Preformed Polychloroprene Elastomeric
Joint Seals for Concrete Pavements
ASTM D 2835 (1989; R 2007) Lubricant for Installation

of Preformed Compression Seals in Concrete
Pavements
ASTM D 5249 (1995; R 2006) Backer Material for Use

with Cold-and Hot-Applied Joint Sealants
in Portland-Cement Concrete and Asphalt
Joints
ASTM D 7116 (2005) Standard Specification for Joint

Sealants, Hot Applied, Jet Fuel Resistant
Types, for Portland Cement Concrete
Pavement
1.2 SUBMITTALS

SECTION 03 15 00.00 10 Page 1

SD-03 Product Data
Preformed Expansion Joint Filler

Sealant
SD-04 Samples
Lubricant for Preformed Compression Seals

Field-Molded Type
SD-07 Certificates
Preformed Expansion Joint Filler

Sealant
Protect material delivered and placed in storage off the ground from
moisture, dirt, and other contaminants. Deliver sealants in the
manufacturer's original unopened containers. Remove sealants from the site
whose shelf life has expired.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 CONTRACTION JOINT STRIPS
Contraction joint strips shall be 1/8 inch thick tempered hardboard

conforming to AHA A135.4, Class 1. In lieu of hardboard strips, rigid
polyvinylchloride (PVC) or high impact polystyrene (HIPS) insert strips
specifically designed to induce controlled cracking in slabs on grade may
be used. Such insert strips shall have removable top section.
2.2 PREFORMED EXPANSION JOINT FILLER
Expansion joint filler shall be preformed material conforming to ASTM D 1751

or ASTM D 1752. Unless otherwise indicated, filler material shall be 3/8
inch thick and of a width applicable for the joint formed. Backer
material, when required, shall conform to ASTM D 5249.
2.3 SEALANT
Joint sealant shall conform to the following:
2.3.1 Preformed Polychloroprene Elastomeric Type
ASTM D 2628.
2.3.2 Lubricant for Preformed Compression Seals
ASTM D 2835. Submit a piece not less than 9 ft of 1 inch nominal width or
wider seal or a piece not less than 12 ft of compression seal less than 1
inch nominal width. Provide one quart of lubricant.
SECTION 03 15 00.00 10 Page 2

2.3.3 Field-Molded Type
ASTM D 7116. Sealant shall be Type M, Grade P or NS, Class 25, Use T for
horizontal joints. Type M, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT for vertical joints.
Bond breaker material shall be polyethylene tape, coated paper, metal foil
or similar type materials. The back-up material shall be compressible,
non-shrink, nonreactive with sealant, and non-absorptive material type such
as extruded butyl or polychloroprene rubber. Submit One gallon of
field-molded sealant and one quart of primer (when primer is recommended by
the sealant manufacturer) identified to indicate manufacturer, type of
material, quantity, and shipment or lot represented.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
Joint locations and details, including materials and methods of

installation of joint fillers, shall be as specified and indicated. In no
case shall any fixed metal be continuous through an expansion or
contraction joint.
3.1.1 Contraction Joints
Contraction joints may be constructed by inserting tempered hardboard

strips or rigid PVC or HIPS insert strips into the plastic concrete using a
steel parting bar, when necessary, or by cutting the concrete with a saw
after concrete has set. Make jJoints 1/8 inch to 3/16 inch wide and
extend into the slab one-fourth the slab thickness, minimum, but not less
than 1 inch.
3.1.1.1 Joint Strips
Provide strips of the required dimensions and as long as practicable.

After the first floating, groove the concrete with a tool at the joint
locations. Insert the strips in the groove and depress them until the top
edge of the vertical surface is flush with the surface of the slab. Float
and finish the slab as specified. Working of the concrete adjacent to the
joint shall be the minimum necessary to fill voids and consolidate the
concrete. Where indicated, saw out the top portion of the strip after the
curing period to form a recess for sealer. Discard the removable section
of PVC or HIPS strips and leave the insert in place. Maintain true
alignment of the strips during insertion.
3.1.1.2 Sawed Joints
Saw joints early enough to prevent uncontrolled cracking in the slab, but
late enough that this can be accomplished without appreciable spalling.
Cutting shall be started as soon as the concrete has hardened sufficiently
to prevent ravelling of the edges of the saw cut. Cutting shall be
completed before shrinkage stresses become sufficient to produce cracking.
Use concrete sawing machines that are adequate in number and power, and
with sufficient replacement blades to complete the sawing at the required
rate. Cut joints to true alignment and in sequence of concrete placement.
Remove sludge and cutting debris. Form reservoir for joint sealant.
3.1.2 Expansion Joints
Use preformed expansion joint filler in expansion and isolation joints in

slabs around columns and between slabs on grade and vertical surfaces where
SECTION 03 15 00.00 10 Page 3

indicated. Extend the filler to the full slab depth, unless otherwise
indicated. neatly finish the edges of the joint with an edging tool of 1/8
inch radius, except where a resilient floor surface will be applied. Where
the joint is to receive a sealant, the filler strips shall be installed at
the proper level below the finished floor with a slightly tapered, dressed
and oiled wood strip temporarily secured to the top to form a recess to the
size shown on the drawings. Remove the wood strip after the concrete has
set. Contractor may opt to use a removable expansion filler cap designed
and fabricated for this purpose in lieu of the wood strip. Thoroughly
clean the groove of laitance, curing compound, foreign materials,
protrusions of hardened concrete, and any dust. If blowing out the groove
use oil-free compressed air.
3.1.3 Joint Sealant
Fill sawed contraction joints and expansion joints in slabs with joint
sealant, unless otherwise shown. Joint surfaces shall be clean, dry, and
free of oil or other foreign material which would adversely affect the bond
between sealant and concrete. Apply joint sealant as recommended by the
manufacturer of the sealant.
3.1.3.1 Joints With Preformed Compression Seals
Install compression seals with equipment capable of installing joint seals

to the prescribed depth without cutting, nicking, twisting, or otherwise
distorting or damaging the seal or concrete and with no more than 5 percent
stretching of the seal. Cover the sides of the joint and, if necessary,
the sides of the compression seal with a coating of lubricant. Coat butt
joints with liberal applications of lubricant.
3.1.3.2 Joints With Field-Molded Sealant
Do not seal joints when the sealant material, ambient air, or concrete
temperature is less than 40 degrees F. When the sealants are meant to
reduce the sound transmission characteristics of interior walls, ceilings,
and floors the guidance provided in ASTM C 919 shall be followed. Coat
joints requiring a bond breaker with curing compound or with bituminous
paint. Install bond breaker and back-up material where required. Joints
shall be primed and filled flush with joint sealant in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations.
3.2 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
Treat construction joints coinciding with expansion and contraction joints

as expansion or contraction joints as applicable.
SECTION 03 15 00.00 10 Page 4

SECTION 03 20 00.00 10
CONCRETE REINFORCING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

ACI 318 (2008; Errata 2010) Building Code

Requirements for Structural Concrete and
Commentary
ACI SP-66 (2004) ACI Detailing Manual
ASTM A 1035/A 1035M (20009) Standard Specification for

Deformed and Plain, Low-carbon, Chromium,
Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement

Fabricated Deformed Steel Bar Mats for
Concrete Reinforcement
ASTM A 53/A 53M (2007) Standard Specification for Pipe,

Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated,
Welded and Seamless
ASTM A 615/A 615M (2009b) Standard Specification for

Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for
ASTM A 675/A 675M (2003; R 2009) Standard Specification for

Steel Bars, Carbon, Hot-Wrought, Special
Quality, Mechanical Properties

Low-Alloy Steel Deformed and Plain Bars
for Concrete Reinforcement

Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Bars for

Epoxy-Coated Steel Reinforcing Bars
ASTM A 82/A 82M (2007) Standard Specification for Steel

Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement
SECTION 03 20 00.00 10 Page 1


Epoxy-Coated Prefabricated Steel
Reinforcing Bars
CONCRETE REINFORCING STEEL INSTITUTE (CRSI)
CRSI 10MSP (2001; 27Ed) Manual of Standard Practice
1.2 SUBMITTALS

SD-02 Shop Drawings
Reinforcement; G
SD-03 Product Data
SD-07 Certificates
Reinforcing Steel
Qualification of Steel Bar Butt-Splicers

1.3.1 Qualification of Steel Bar Butt-Splicers
Qualification of steel bar butt-splicers shall be certified to have

satisfactorily completed a course of instruction in the proposed method of
butt-splicing or have satisfactorily performed such work within the
preceding year. Submit certificates on the Qualifications of Steel Bar
Butt-Splicers prior to commencing butt-splicing.
1.3.2 Qualification of Butt-Splicing Procedure
As a condition of approval of the butt-splicing procedure, make three test

butt-splices of steel bars of each size to be spliced using the proposed
butt-splicing method, in the presence of the Contracting Officer. These
test butt-splices and unspliced bars of the same size shall be tension
tested to destruction with stress-strain curves plotted for each test.
Test results shall show that the butt-splices meet the specified strength
and deformation requirements in order for the splicing procedure to be
approved.
Reinforcement and accessories shall be stored off the ground on platforms,

skids, or other supports.
SECTION 03 20 00.00 10 Page 2

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 DOWELS
Dowels shall conform to ASTM A 675/A 675M, Grade 80. Steel pipe conforming
to ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 80, may be used as dowels provided the ends
are closed with metal or plastic inserts or with mortar.
2.2 FABRICATED BAR MATS
Fabricated bar mats shall conform to ASTM A 184/A 184M.
2.3 REINFORCING STEEL
Reinforcing steel shall be deformed bars conforming to ASTM A 615/A 615M,

ASTM A 706/A 706M, or ASTM A 1035/A 1035M grades and sizes as indicated.
Cold drawn wire used for spiral reinforcement shall conform to
ASTM A 82/A 82M. In highly corrosive environments or when directed by the
Contracting Officer, reinforcing steel shall conform to ASTM A 767/A 767M,
ASTM A 775/A 775M, ASTM A 1035/A 1035M or ASTM A 934/A 934M as appropriate.
Submit certified copies of mill reports attesting that the reinforcing

steel furnished contains no less than 25 percent recycled scrap steel and
meets the requirements specified herein, prior to the installation of
reinforcing steel.
2.4 WIRE TIES
Wire ties shall be 16 gauge or heavier black annealed steel wire.
2.5 SUPPORTS
Bar supports for formed surfaces shall be designed and fabricated in

accordance with CRSI 10MSP and shall be steel or precast concrete blocks.
Precast concrete blocks shall have wire ties and shall be not less than 4
inches square when supporting reinforcement on ground. Precast concrete
block shall have compressive strength equal to that of the surrounding
concrete. Where concrete formed surfaces will be exposed to weather or
where surfaces are to be painted, steel supports within 1/2 inch of
concrete surface shall be galvanized, plastic protected or of stainless
steel. Concrete supports used in concrete exposed to view shall have the
same color and texture as the finish surface. For slabs on grade, supports
shall be precast concrete blocks, plastic coated steel fabricated with
bearing plates, or specifically designed wire-fabric supports fabricated of
plastic.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 REINFORCEMENT
Reinforcement steel and accessories shall be fabricated and placed as

specified and shown and approved shop drawings. Fabrication and placement
details of steel and accessories not specified or shown shall be in
accordance with ACI SP-66 and ACI 318. Reinforcement shall be cold bent
unless otherwise authorized. Bending may be accomplished in the field or
at the mill. Bars shall not be bent after embedment in concrete. Safety
caps shall be placed on all exposed ends of vertical concrete reinforcement
bars that pose a danger to life safety. Wire tie ends shall face away from
the forms. Submit detail drawings showing reinforcing steel placement,
SECTION 03 20 00.00 10 Page 3

schedules, sizes, grades, and splicing and bending details. Drawings shall
show support details including types, sizes and spacing.
3.1.1 Placement
Reinforcement shall be free from loose rust and scale, dirt, oil, or other
deleterious coating that could reduce bond with the concrete.
Reinforcement shall be placed in accordance with ACI 318 at locations shown
plus or minus one bar diameter. Reinforcement shall not be continuous
through expansion joints and shall be as indicated through construction or
contraction joints. Concrete coverage shall be as indicated or as required
by ACI 318. If bars are moved more than one bar diameter to avoid
interference with other reinforcement, conduits or embedded items, the
resulting arrangement of bars, including additional bars required to meet
structural requirements, shall be approved before concrete is placed.
3.1.2 Splicing
Splices of reinforcement shall conform to ACI 318 and shall be made only as
required or indicated. Splicing shall be by lapping or by mechanical;
except that lap splices shall not be used for bars larger than No. 11
unless otherwise indicated. Lapped bars shall be placed in contact and
securely tied or spaced transversely apart to permit the embedment of the
entire surface of each bar in concrete. Lapped bars shall not be spaced
farther apart than one-fifth the required length of lap or 6 inches.
Mechanical butt splices shall be in accordance with the recommendation of
the manufacturer of the mechanical splicing device. Butt splices shall
develop 125 percent of the specified minimum yield tensile strength of the
spliced bars or of the smaller bar in transition splices. Bars shall be
flame dried before butt splicing. Adequate jigs and clamps or other
devices shall be provided to support, align, and hold the longitudinal
centerline of the bars to be butt spliced in a straight line.
3.2 DOWEL INSTALLATION
Dowels shall be installed in slabs on grade at locations indicated and at

right angles to joint being doweled. Dowels shall be accurately positioned
and aligned parallel to the finished concrete surface before concrete
placement. Dowels shall be rigidly supported during concrete placement.
One end of dowels shall be coated with a bond breaker.
SECTION 03 20 00.00 10 Page 4

SECTION 03 31 00.00 10
CAST-IN-PLACE STRUCTURAL CONCRETE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 LUMP SUM CONTRACT
Under this type of contract, concrete items will be paid for by lump sum
and will not be measured. The work covered by these items consists of
furnishing all concrete materials, reinforcement, miscellaneous embedded
materials, and equipment, and performing all labor for the forming,
manufacture, transporting, placing, finishing, curing, and protection of
concrete in these structures.
1.2 REFERENCES

ACI 117 (2006) Standard Specifications for

Tolerances for Concrete Construction and
Materials
ACI 211.1 (1991; R 2009) Standard Practice for

Selecting Proportions for Normal,
Heavyweight, and Mass Concrete
ACI 214R (2002; Errata 2005) Evaluation of Strength

Test Results of Concrete
ACI 305.1 (2006) Specification for Hot Weather

Concreting

Commentary

(AASHTO)

Burlap Cloth Made from Jute or Kenaf and
Cotton Mats
ASTM C 1017/C 1017M (2007) Standard Specification for Chemical

Admixtures for Use in Producing Flowing
Concrete
ASTM C 1059/C 1059M (1999; R 2008) Standard Specification for

Latex Agents for Bonding Fresh to Hardened
SECTION 03 31 00.00 10 Page 1

Concrete

Temperature of Freshly Mixed
Hydraulic-Cement Concrete

ASTM C 1107/C 1107M (2008) Standard Specification for Packaged

Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Nonshrink)
ASTM C 1260 (2007) Standard Test Method for Potential

Alkali Reactivity of Aggregates
(Mortar-Bar Method)
ASTM C 136 (2006) Standard Test Method for Sieve

Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates
ASTM C 143/C 143M (2010) Standard Test Method for Slump of

ASTM C 150/C 150M (2009) Standard Specification for Portland

Cement

Alkali-Silica Reactivity of Combinations
of Cementitious Materials and Aggregate
(Accelerated Mortar-Bar Method)
ASTM C 171 (2007) Standard Specification for Sheet

Materials for Curing Concrete
ASTM C 172 (2008) Standard Practice for Sampling

Freshly Mixed Concrete

Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the
Laboratory
ASTM C 231 (2009a) Standard Test Method for Air

Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the
Pressure Method
ASTM C 260 (2006) Standard Specification for

Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete
ASTM C 309 (2007) Standard Specification for Liquid

Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing
Concrete

ASTM C 33/C 33M (2008) Standard Specification for Concrete

Aggregates
SECTION 03 31 00.00 10 Page 2


Concrete Specimens
ASTM C 42/C 42M (2004) Standard Test Method for Obtaining

and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams
of Concrete
ASTM C 494/C 494M (2010a) Standard Specification for

Chemical Admixtures for Concrete
ASTM C 618 (2008a) Standard Specification for Coal

Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural
Pozzolan for Use in Concrete
ASTM C 78 (2009) Standard Test Method for Flexural

Strength of Concrete (Using Simple Beam
with Third-Point Loading)
ASTM C 881/C 881M (2002) Standard Specification for

Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding Systems for
Concrete

Ready-Mixed Concrete
ASTM C 989 (2009a) Standard Specification for Slag

Cement for Use in Concrete and Mortars
ASTM D 75/D 75M (2009) Standard Practice for Sampling

Aggregates
ASTM E 96/E 96M (2005) Standard Test Methods for Water

Vapor Transmission of Materials
NATIONAL INSTITUTE OF STANDARDS AND TECHNOLOGY (NIST)
NIST HB 44 (2007) NIST Handbook 44: Specifications,

Tolerances, and other Technical
Requirements for Weighing and Measuring
Devices
NRMCA CPMB 100 (2000) Concrete Plant Standards
NRMCA QC 3 (2002) Quality Control Manual: Section 3,

Plant Certifications Checklist:
Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete
Production Facilities
NRMCA TMMB 100 (2001) Truck Mixer, Agitator and Front

Discharge Concrete Carrier Standards
COE CRD-C 104 (1980) Method of Calculation of the

Fineness Modulus of Aggregate
SECTION 03 31 00.00 10 Page 3

COE CRD-C 400 (1963) Requirements for Water for Use in

Mixing or Curing Concrete
COE CRD-C 521 (1981) Standard Test Method for Frequency

and Amplitude of Vibrators for Concrete
COE CRD-C 540 (2001) Standard Specification for

Nonbituminous Inserts for Contraction
Joints in Portland Cement Concrete
Airfield Pavements, Sawable Type
COE CRD-C 572 (1974) Corps of Engineers Specifications

for Polyvinylchloride Waterstops
Provide concrete composed of portland cement, other cementitious and

pozzolanic materials as specified, aggregates, water and admixtures as
specified.
1.3.1 Proportioning Studies-Normal Weight Conc
Trial design batches, mixture proportions studies, and testing requirements

for various classes and types of concrete specified are the responsibility
of the Contractor. Except as specified for flexural strength concrete,
mixture proportions shall be based on compressive strength as determined by
test specimens fabricated in accordance with ASTM C 192/C 192M and tested
in accordance with ASTM C 39/C 39M.
a. Samples of all materials used in mixture proportioning studies shall be

representative of those proposed for use in the project and be
accompanied by the manufacturer's or producer's test reports indicating
compliance with these specifications.
b. Make trial mixtures having proportions, consistencies, and air content

suitable for the work based on methodology described in ACI 211.1,
using at least three different water-cement ratios for each type of
mixture, which will produce a range of strength encompassing those
required for each class and type of concrete required on the project.
c. The maximum water-cement ratios required in subparagraph Water-Cement

Ratio below will be the equivalent water-cement ratio as determined by
conversion from the weight ratio of water to cement plus pozzolan, and
slag cement by the weight equivalency method as described in ACI 211.1.
In the case where slag cement is used, the weight of the slag cement
shall be included in the equations in ACI 211.1 for the term P, which
is used to denote the weight of pozzolan. If pozzolan is used in the
concrete mixture, the minimum pozzolan content shall be 15 percent by
weight of the total cementitious material, and the maximum shall be 35
percent.
d. Design laboratory trial mixtures for maximum permitted slump and air
content. Make separate sets of trial mixture studies for each
combination of cementitious materials and each combination of
admixtures proposed for use. No combination of either shall be used
until proven by such studies, except that, if approved in writing and
otherwise permitted by these specifications, an accelerator or a
retarder may be used without separate trial mixture study. Separate
trial mixture studies shall also be made for concrete for any conveying
SECTION 03 31 00.00 10 Page 4

or placing method proposed which requires special properties and for

concrete to be placed in unusually difficult placing locations.
e. Report the temperature of concrete in each trial batch. For each

water-cement ratio, at least three test cylinders for each test age
shall be made, cured in accordance with ASTM C 192/C 192M and tested at
7 and 28 days in accordance with ASTM C 39/C 39M. From these test
results, plot a curve showing the relationship between water-cement
ratio and strength for each set of trial mix studies. In addition, a
curve shall be plotted showing the relationship between 7 day and 28
day strengths. Design each mixture to promote easy and suitable
concrete placement, consolidation and finishing, and to prevent
segregation and excessive bleeding.
f. Submit the results of trial mixture design studies along with a

statement giving the maximum nominal coarse aggregate size and the
proportions of ingredients that will be used in the manufacture of each
strength or class of concrete, at least 14 days prior to commencing
concrete placing operations. Aggregate weights shall be based on the
saturated surface dry condition. Accompany the statement with test
results from an approved independent commercial testing laboratory,
showing that mixture design studies have been made with materials
proposed for the project and that the proportions selected will produce
concrete of the qualities indicated. No substitutions shall be made in
the materials used in the mixture design studies without additional
tests to show that the quality of the concrete is satisfactory.
1.3.2 Proportioning Studies-Flexural Strength Conc
Trial design batches, mixture proportioning studies, and testing

requirements shall conform to the requirements specified in paragraph
Proportioning Studies for Normal Weight Concrete above, except that
proportions shall be based on flexural strength as determined by test
specimens (beams) fabricated in accordance with ASTM C 192/C 192M and
tested in accordance with ASTM C 78. Modify procedures given in ACI 211.1
as necessary to accommodate flexural strength.1.3.3 Average Compressive
Strength
The mixture proportions selected during mixture design studies shall

produce a required average compressive strength (f'cr) exceeding the
specified compressive strength (f'c) by the amount indicated below. This
required average compressive strength, f'cr, will not be a required
acceptance criteria during concrete production. However, whenever the
daily average compressive strength at 28 days drops below f'cr during
concrete production, or daily average 7-day strength drops below a strength
correlated with the 28-day f'cr, adjust the mixture, as approved, to bring
the daily average back up to f'cr. During production, the required f'cr
shall be adjusted, as appropriate, based on the standard deviation being
attained on the job.
1.3.4 Computations from Test Records
Where a concrete production facility has test records, establish a standard

deviation in accordance with the applicable provisions of ACI 214R. Test
records from which a standard deviation is calculated shall represent
materials, quality control procedures, and conditions similar to those
expected; shall represent concrete produced to meet a specified strength or
strengths (f'c) within 1,000 psi of that specified for proposed work; and
shall consist of at least 30 consecutive tests. A strength test shall be
SECTION 03 31 00.00 10 Page 5

the average of the strengths of two cylinders made from the same sample of
concrete and tested at 28 days. Required average compressive strength f'cr
used as the basis for selection of concrete proportions shall be the larger
of the equations that follow using the standard deviation as determined
above:
f'cr = f'c + 1.34S where units are in psi
f'cr = f'c + 2.33S - 500 where units are in psi
Where S = standard deviation
Where a concrete production facility does not have test records meeting the
requirements above but does have a record based on 15 to 29 consecutive
tests, a standard deviation shall be established as the product of the
calculated standard deviation and a modification factor from the following
table:
NUMBER OF TESTS MODIFICATION FACTOR FOR STANDARD

DEVIATION
15 1.16
20 1.08
25 1.03
30 or more 1.00
1.3.5 Computations without Previous Test Records
When a concrete production facility does not have sufficient field strength
test records for calculation of the standard deviation, the required
average strength f'cr shall be determined as follows:
a. If the specified compressive strength f'c is less than 3,000 psi,
f'cr = f'c + 1000 psi
b. If the specified compressive strength f'c is 3,000 to 5,000 psi,
f'cr = f'c + 1,200 psi
c. If the specified compressive strength f'c is over 5,000 psi,
f'cr = f'c + 1,400 psi
1.3.6 Average Flexural Strength Required for Mixtures
The mixture proportions selected during mixture design studies for flexural
strength mixtures and the mixture used during concrete production shall be
designed and adjusted during concrete production as approved, except that
the overdesign for average flexural strength shall simply be 15 percent
greater than the specified flexural strength at all times.1.3.7 Tolerances
Except as otherwise specified herein, tolerances for concrete batching,

mixture properties, and construction as well as definition of terms and
application practices shall be in accordance with ACI 117. Take level and
grade tolerance measurements of slabs as soon as possible after finishing;
SECTION 03 31 00.00 10 Page 6

when forms or shoring are used, the measurements shall be made prior to
removal.
1.3.8 Floor Finish
For the purpose of this Section the following terminology correlation

between ACI 117 and this Section shall apply:
Floor Profile Quality This Section

Classification From ACI 117
Conventional Bullfloated Same
Conventional Straightedged Same
Flat Float Finish or Trowel Finish
Very Flat Same. Use only with F-system
Levelness tolerance does not apply where design requires floors to be

sloped to drains or sloped for other reasons.
1.3.8.1 Floors by the Straightedge System
The flatness of the floors shall be carefully controlled and the tolerances
shall be measured by the straightedge system as specified in paragraph
4.5.7 of ACI 117, using a 10 foot straightedge, within 72 hours after floor
slab installation and before shores and/or forms are removed. The listed
tolerances shall be met at any and every location at which the straightedge
can be placed.
Bullfloated 1/2"
Straightedged 3/8"
Float Finish 1/4"
Trowel Finish 1/4"
1.3.9 Strength Requirements
Specified compressive strength (f'c) shall be as follows:
COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH STRUCTURE OR PORTION OF STRUCTURE
5000 psi at 28 days Rendiness Module Slab-on-Grade
4000 psi at 28 days TYP. (V.I.N) including piers
3000 psi at 28 days Elevated Slabs on Metal Deck
SECTION 03 31 00.00 10 Page 7

COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH STRUCTURE OR PORTION OF STRUCTURE
Concrete slabs on-grade shall have a 28-day flexural strength of 600 psi.
Compressive strength shall be determined in accordance with ASTM C 39/C 39M.
Flexural strength shall be determined in accordance with ASTM C 78.
a. Evaluation of Concrete Compressive Strength. Fabricate compressive

strength specimens ( 6 by 12 inch cylinders), laboratory cure them in
accordance with ASTM C 31/C 31M and test them in accordance with
ASTM C 39/C 39M. The strength of the concrete will be considered
satisfactory so long as the average of all sets of three consecutive
test results equals or exceeds the specified compressive strength f'c
and no individual test result falls below the specified strength f'c by
more than 500 psi. A "test" is defined as the average of two companion
cylinders, or if only one cylinder is tested, the results of the single
cylinder test. Additional analysis or testing, including taking cores
and/or load tests may be required at the Contractor's expense when the
strength of the concrete in the structure is considered potentially
deficient.
b. Investigation of Low-Strength Compressive Test Results. When any

strength test of standard-cured test cylinders falls below the
specified strength requirement by more than 500 psi or if tests of
field-cured cylinders indicate deficiencies in protection and curing,
take steps to assure that the load-carrying capacity of the structure
is not jeopardized. When the strength of concrete in place is
considered potentially deficient, cores shall be obtained and tested in
accordance with ASTM C 42/C 42M. At least three representative cores
shall be taken from each member or area of concrete in place that is
considered potentially deficient. The location of cores will be
determined by the Contracting Officer to least impair the strength of
the structure. Concrete in the area represented by the core testing
will be considered adequate if the average strength of the cores is
equal to at least 85 percent of the specified strength requirement and
if no single core is less than 75 percent of the specified strength
requirement. Non-destructive tests (tests other than test cylinders or
cores) shall not be used as a basis for acceptance or rejection.
Perform the coring and repair the holes; cores will be tested by the
Government.
c. Load Tests. If the core tests are inconclusive or impractical to

obtain or if structural analysis does not confirm the safety of the
structure, load tests may be directed by the Contracting Officer in
accordance with the requirements of ACI 318. Concrete work evaluated
by structural analysis or by results of a load test as being
understrength shall be corrected in a manner satisfactory to the
Contracting Officer. All investigations, testing, load tests, and
correction of deficiencies shall be performed by and at the expense of
the Contractor and approved by the Contracting Officer, except that if
all concrete is found to be in compliance with the drawings and
specifications, the cost of investigations, testing, and load tests
will be at the expense of the Government.
d. Evaluation of Concrete Flexural Strength. Fabricate flexural strength

specimens (beams) laboratory cure them in accordance with
ASTM C 31/C 31M and test them in accordance with ASTM C 78. The
SECTION 03 31 00.00 10 Page 8

strength of the concrete will be considered satisfactory so long as the

average of all sets of three consecutive test results equals or exceeds
the specified flexural strength and no individual test result falls
below the specified flexural strength by more than 50 psi. A "test" is
defined as the average of two companion beams. Additional analysis or
testing, including taking cores and/or load tests may be required at
the Contractor's expense when the strength of the concrete in the slab
is considered potentially deficient.
1.3.10 Water-Cement Ratio
Maximum water-cement ratio (w/c) for normal weight concrete shall be as

follows:
WATER-CEMENT RATIO, BY WEIGHT STRUCTURE OR PORTION OF STRUCTURE
0.45 All
This w/c's may cause higher strengths than that required above for
compressive strength. The maximum w/c required will be the equivalent w/c
as determined by conversion from the weight ratio of water to cement plus
pozzolan, slag cement by the weight equivalency method as described in
ACI 211.1. In the case where slag cement is used, the weight of the slag
cement shall be included in the equations of ACI 211.1 for the term P which
is used to denote the weight of pozzolan.
1.3.11 Air Entrainment
All normal weight concrete shall be air entrained to contain between 4 and
7 percent total air, except that when the nominal maximum size coarse
aggregate is 3/4 inch or smaller it shall be between 4.5 and 7.5 percent.
Concrete with specified strength over 5000 psi may have 1.0 percent less
air than specified above. Specified air content shall be attained at point
of placement into the forms. Air content for normal weight concrete shall
be determined in accordance with ASTM C 231.
1.3.12 Slump
Slump of the concrete, as delivered to the point of placement into the

forms, shall be within the following limits. Slump shall be determined in
accordance with ASTM C 143/C 143M.
Structural Element Slump
Minimum Maximum
Walls, columns and beams 2 in. 4 in.
SECTION 03 31 00.00 10 Page 9

Structural Element Slump
Minimum Maximum
Foundation walls, 1 in. 3 in.

substructure walls, footings,
slabs
Any structural concrete approved for placement by pumping:
At pump 2 in. 6 in.
At discharge of line 2 in. 8 in.
When use of a plasticizing admixture conforming to ASTM C 1017/C 1017M or

when a Type F or G high range water reducing admixture conforming to
ASTM C 494/C 494M is permitted to increase the slump of concrete, concrete
shall have a slump of 2 to 4 inches before the admixture is added and a
maximum slump of 8 inches at the point of delivery after the admixture is
added.
1.3.13 Concrete Temperature
The temperature of the concrete as delivered shall not exceed 90 degrees F.

When the ambient temperature during placing is 40 degrees F or less, or is
expected to be at any time within 6 hours after placing, the temperature of
the concrete as delivered shall be between 55 and 75 degrees F.
1.3.14 Size of Coarse Aggregate
Use the largest feasible nominal maximum size aggregate (NMSA), specified
in paragraph AGGREGATES PART 2, in each placement. However, nominal
maximum size of aggregate shall not exceed any of the following:
three-fourths of the minimum cover for reinforcing bars, three-fourths of
the minimum clear spacing between reinforcing bars, one-fifth of the
narrowest dimension between sides of forms, or one-third of the thickness
of slabs or toppings.
1.4 SUBMITTALS

SD-03 Product Data
Curing Materials
Recycled Content Products; (LEED)

Portland Cement
Vapor Barrier
Latex Bonding Agent
Floor Finish
Floor Hardener
Chemical Admixtures
SECTION 03 31 00.00 10 Page 10

Epoxy Resin
SD-05 Design Data
Mixture Proportions; G
SD-06 Test Reports
Testing and Inspection for CQC G
SD-07 Certificates
Qualifications
Submit qualifications for Contractor Quality Control personnel assigned to

concrete construction as American Concrete Institute (ACI) Certified
Workmen in one of the following grades or show written evidence of having
completed similar qualification programs:
Concrete Field Testing Technician Grade I
Concrete Laboratory Testing Grade II

Technician
Concrete Construction Inspector Level II
Concrete Transportation Jointly certified by American

Construction Inspector or Concrete Institute (ACI), Building
Reinforced Concrete Special Official and Code Administrators
Inspector International (BOCA), International
Code Council (ICC), and Southern
Building Code Congress International
(SBCCI)
Foreman or Lead Journeyman of the Similar qualification for ACI

flatwork finishing crew Concrete Flatwork
Technician/Finisher or equal, with
written documentation
1.5.1 Pre-installation Meeting
A pre-installation meeting with the Contracting Officer will be required at

least 10 days prior to start of construction on foundations. The
Contractor is responsible for calling the meeting; the Project
Superintendent and active installation personnel shall be present.
1.5.2 Special Properties and Products
Concrete may contain admixtures other than air entraining agents, such as
water reducers, superplasticizers, or set retarding agents to provide
special properties to the concrete, if specified or approved. Any of these
materials to be used on the project shall be used in the mix design studies.
SECTION 03 31 00.00 10 Page 11

1.5.3 Government Assurance Inspection and Testing
Day-to day inspection and testing shall be the responsibility of the

Contractor Quality Control (CQC) staff. However, representatives of the
Contracting Officer can and will inspect construction as considered
appropriate and will monitor operations of the Contractor's CQC staff.
Government inspection or testing will not relieve the Contractor of any CQC
responsibilities.
1.5.3.1 Materials
The Government will sample and test aggregates, cementitious materials,

other materials, and concrete to determine compliance with the
specifications as considered appropriate. Provide facilities and labor as
may be necessary for procurement of representative test samples. Samples
of aggregates will be obtained at the point of batching in accordance with
ASTM D 75/D 75M. Other materials will be sampled from storage at the
jobsite or from other locations as considered appropriate. Samples may be
placed in storage for later testing when appropriate.
1.5.3.2 Fresh Concrete
Fresh concrete will be sampled as delivered in accordance with ASTM C 172

and tested in accordance with these specifications, as considered necessary.
1.5.3.3 Hardened Concrete
Tests on hardened concrete will be performed by the Government when such

tests are considered necessary.
1.5.3.4 Inspection
Concrete operations may be tested and inspected by the Government as the

project progresses. Failure to detect defective work or material will not
prevent rejection later when a defect is discovered nor will it obligate
the Government for final acceptance.
Store cement and other cementitious materials in weathertight buildings,

bins, or silos which will exclude moisture and contaminants and keep each
material completely separated. Aggregate stockpiles shall be arranged and
used in a manner to avoid excessive segregation and to prevent
contamination with other materials or with other sizes of aggregates.
Aggregate shall not be stored directly on ground unless a sacrificial layer
is left undisturbed. Store reinforcing bars and accessories above the
ground on platforms, skids or other supports. Other materials shall be
stored in such a manner as to avoid contamination and deterioration.
Admixtures which have been in storage at the project site for longer than 6
months or which have been subjected to freezing shall not be used unless
retested and proven to meet the specified requirements. Materials shall be
capable of being accurately identified after bundles or containers are
opened.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
In accordance with Section 01 62 35 RECYCLED / RECOVERED MATERIALS submit

documentation indicating: distance between manufacturing facility and the
project site, distance of raw material origin from the project site,
SECTION 03 31 00.00 10 Page 12

percentage of post-industrial and post-consumer recycled content per unit

of product and relative dollar value of recycled content products to total
dollar value of products included in project. Submittals shall be as
specified in the subject Section.
2.1 CEMENTITIOUS MATERIALS
Cementitious Materials shall be portland cement, portland-pozzolan cement,

or portland cement in combination with pozzolan conforming to appropriate
specifications listed below. Restrict usage of cementitious materials in
concrete that will have surfaces exposed in the completed structure so
there is no change in color, source, or type of cementitious material.
2.1.1 Portland Cement
ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type I with a maximum 15 percent amount of tricalcium

aluminate, or Type II including false set requirements or Type V. The
alkali content of Portland Cement shall not exceed 0.6 percent.
2.1.2 Pozzolan (Fly Ash)
Pozzolan shall conform to ASTM C 618, Class C or F, including low alkali

multiple factor, drying shrinkage, and uniformity requirements in Table 3
of ASTM C 618. If pozzolan is used, it shall never be less than 15 percent
nor more than 35 percent by weight of the total cementitious material.
Comply with EPA requirements in accordance with Section 01 62 35 RECYCLED /
RECOVERED MATERIALS.
2.1.3 Slag Cement
ASTM C 989, Grade 120.
2.2 AGGREGATES
Fine and coarse aggregates shall be tested and evaluated for

alkali-aggregate reactivity in accordance with ASTM C 1260. The fine and
coarse aggregates shall be evaluated separately and in combination, which
matches the Contractor's proposed mix design proportioning. All results of
the separate and combination testing shall have a measured expansion less
than 0.10 percent at 16 days after casting. Should the test data indicate
an expansion of 0.10 percent or greater, the aggregate(s) shall be rejected
or additional testing using ASTM C 1260 and ASTM C 1567 shall be
performed. The additional testing using ASTM C 1260 and ASTM C 1567 shall
be performed using the low alkali portland cement in combination with slag
cement, or Class F fly ash. Slag cement shall be used in the range of 40
to 50 percent of the total cementitious material by mass. Class F fly ash
shall be used in the range of 25 to 40 percent of the total cementitious
material by mass.
2.2.1 Fine Aggregate
Fine aggregate shall conform to the quality and gradation requirements of

ASTM C 33/C 33M.
2.2.2 Coarse Aggregate
Coarse aggregate shall conform to ASTM C 33/C 33M, Class 5S, size
designation 5.
SECTION 03 31 00.00 10 Page 13

2.3 CHEMICAL ADMIXTURES
Chemical admixtures, when required or permitted, shall conform to the

appropriate specification listed. Admixtures shall be furnished in liquid
form and of suitable concentration for easy, accurate control of dispensing.
2.3.1 Air-Entraining Admixture
ASTM C 260 and shall consistently entrain the air content in the specified
ranges under field conditions.
2.3.2 Accelerating Admixture
ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type C or E, except that calcium chloride or admixtures

containing calcium chloride shall not be used.
2.3.3 Water-Reducing or Retarding Admixture
ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A, B, or D, except that the 6-month and 1-year
compressive and flexural strength tests are waived.
2.3.4 High-Range Water Reducer
ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F or G, except that the 6-month and 1-year strength
requirements are waived. The admixture shall be used only when approved in
writing, such approval being contingent upon particular mixture control as
described in the Contractor's Quality Control Plan and upon performance of
separate mixture design studies.
2.3.5 Other Chemical Admixtures
Chemical admixtures for use in producing flowing concrete shall comply with
ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type I or II. These admixtures shall be used only
when approved in writing, such approval being contingent upon particular
mixture control as described in the Contractor's Quality Control Plan and
upon performance of separate mixture design studies.
2.4 CURING MATERIALS
2.4.1 Impervious-Sheet
Impervious-sheet materials shall conform to ASTM C 171, type optional,

except, that polyethylene sheet shall not be used.
2.4.2 Membrane-Forming Compound
Membrane-Forming curing compound shall conform to ASTM C 309, Type 1-D or

2, except that only a styrene acrylate or chlorinated rubber compound
meeting Class B requirements shall be used for surfaces that are to be
painted or are to receive bituminous roofing, or waterproofing, or floors
that are to receive adhesive applications of resilient flooring. The
curing compound selected shall be compatible with any subsequent paint,
roofing, waterproofing, or flooring specified. Nonpigmented compound shall
contain a fugitive dye, and shall have the reflective requirements in
ASTM C 309 waived.
2.4.3 Burlap and Cotton Mat
Burlap and cotton mat used for curing shall conform to AASHTO M 182.
SECTION 03 31 00.00 10 Page 14

2.5 WATER
Water for mixing and curing shall be fresh, clean, potable, and free of
injurious amounts of oil, acid, salt, or alkali, except that non-potable
water may be used if it meets the requirements of COE CRD-C 400.
2.6 NONSHRINK GROUT
Nonshrink grout shall conform to ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, and shall be a

commercial formulation suitable for the proposed application.
2.7 LATEX BONDING AGENT
Latex agents for bonding fresh to hardened concrete shall conform to

ASTM C 1059/C 1059M.
2.8 EPOXY RESIN
Epoxy resins for use in repairs shall conform to ASTM C 881/C 881M, Type V,
Grade 2. Class as appropriate to the existing ambient and surface
temperatures. Submit manufacturer's product data, indicating VOC content.
Manufacturer's catalog data for the items above, including printed
instructions.
2.9 EMBEDDED ITEMS
Embedded items shall be of the size and type indicated or as needed for the
application. Hangers for suspended ceilings shall be as specified in
Section 09 51 00 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS. Inserts for shelf angles and bolt
hangers shall be of malleable iron or cast or wrought steel.
2.10 FLOOR HARDENER
Floor hardener shall be a colorless aqueous solution containing zinc

silicofluoride, magnesium silicofluoride, or sodium silicofluoride. These
silicofluorides can be used individually or in combination. Proprietary
hardeners may be used if approved in writing by the Contracting Officer.
2.11 VAPOR BARRIER
Vapor barrier shall be polyethylene sheeting with a minimum thickness of 10

mils or other equivalent material having a vapor permeance rating not
exceeding 0.5 perms as determined in accordance with ASTM E 96/E 96M.
2.12 JOINT MATERIALS
2.12.1 Joint Fillers, Sealers, and Waterstops
Expansion joint fillers shall be in accordance with Section 03 15 00.00 10

CONCRETE ACCESSORIES. Materials for and sealing of joints shall conform to
the requirements of Section 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS.
2.12.2 Contraction Joints in Slabs
Sawable type contraction joint inserts shall conform to COE CRD-C 540.
Nonsawable joint inserts shall have sufficient stiffness to permit
placement in plastic concrete without undue deviation from a straight line
and shall conform to the physical requirements of COE CRD-C 540, with the
SECTION 03 31 00.00 10 Page 15

exception of Section 3.4 "Resistance to Sawing". Plastic inserts shall be

polyvinyl chloride conforming to the materials requirements of COE CRD-C 572.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION FOR PLACING
Before commencing concrete placement, perform the following: Surfaces to

receive concrete shall be clean and free from frost, ice, mud, and water.
Forms shall be in place, cleaned, coated, and adequately supported, in
accordance with Section 03 11 13.00 10 STRUCTURAL CONCRETE FORMWORK.
Reinforcing steel shall be in place, cleaned, tied, and adequately
supported, in accordance with Section 03 20 00.00 10 CONCRETE
REINFORCEMENT. Transporting and conveying equipment shall be in-place,
ready for use, clean, and free of hardened concrete and foreign material.
Equipment for consolidating concrete shall be at the placing site and in
proper working order. Equipment and material for curing and for protecting
concrete from weather or mechanical damage shall be at the placing site, in
proper working condition and in sufficient amount for the entire
placement. When hot, windy conditions during concreting appear probable,
equipment and material shall be at the placing site to provide windbreaks,
shading, fogging, or other action to prevent plastic shrinkage cracking or
other damaging drying of the concrete.
3.1.1 Foundations
3.1.1.1 Concrete on Earth Foundations
Earth (subgrade, base, or subbase courses) surfaces upon which concrete is

to be placed shall be clean, damp, and free from debris, frost, ice, and
standing or running water. Prior to placement of concrete, the foundation
shall be well drained and shall be satisfactorily graded and uniformly
compacted.
3.1.2 Previously Placed Concrete
Concrete surfaces to which additional concrete is to be bonded shall be

prepared for receiving the next horizontal lift by cleaning the
construction joint surface with either air-water cutting, sandblasting,
high-pressure water jet, or other approved method. Prepare concrete at the
side of vertical construction joints as approved by the Contracting
Officer. Air-water cutting shall not be used on formed surfaces or
surfaces congested with reinforcing steel. Regardless of the method used,
the resulting surfaces shall be free from all laitance and inferior
concrete so that clean surfaces of well bonded coarse aggregate are exposed
and make up at least 10-percent of the surface area, distributed uniformly
throughout the surface. The edges of the coarse aggregate shall not be
undercut. Keep the surface of horizontal construction joints continuously
wet for the first 12 hours during the 24-hour period prior to placing fresh
concrete. The surface shall be washed completely clean as the last
operation prior to placing the next lift. For heavy duty floors and
two-course floors, a thin coat of neat cement grout of about the
consistency of thick cream shall be thoroughly scrubbed into the existing
surface immediately ahead of the topping placing. The grout shall be a 1:1
mixture of portland cement and sand passing the No. 8 sieve. The topping
concrete shall be deposited before the grout coat has had time to stiffen.
3.1.3 Vapor Barrier
Provide vapor barrier beneath the interior on-grade concrete floor slabs.
SECTION 03 31 00.00 10 Page 16

Use the greatest widths and lengths practicable to eliminate joints

wherever possible. Joints shall be lapped a minimum of 12 inches. Torn,
punctured, or damaged vapor barrier material shall be removed and new vapor
barrier shall be provided prior to placing concrete. For minor repairs,
patches may be made using laps of at least 12 inches. Lapped joints shall
be sealed and edges patched with pressure-sensitive adhesive or tape not
less than 2 inches wide and compatible with the membrane. Place vapor
barrier directly on underlying subgrade, base course, or capillary water
barrier, unless it consists of crushed material or large granular material
which could puncture the vapor barrier. In this case, a thin layer of
approximately 1/2 inch of fine graded material should be rolled or
compacted over the fill before installation of the vapor barrier to reduce
the possibility of puncture. Control concrete placement so as to prevent
damage to the vapor barrier.
3.1.4 Embedded Items
Before placement of concrete, determine that all embedded items are firmly
and securely fastened in place as indicated on the drawings, or required.
Conduit and other embedded items shall be clean and free of oil and other
foreign matter such as loose coatings or rust, paint, and scale. The
embedding of wood in concrete will be permitted only when specifically
authorized or directed. Voids in sleeves, inserts, and anchor slots shall
be filled temporarily with readily removable materials to prevent the entry
of concrete into voids. Welding shall not be performed on embedded metals
within 12 inches of the surface of the concrete. Tack welding shall not be
performed on or to embedded items.
3.2 CONCRETE PRODUCTION
Concrete shall either be batched and mixed onsite or shall be furnished

from a ready-mixed concrete plant. Ready-mixed concrete shall be batched,
mixed, and transported in accordance with ASTM C 94/C 94M, except as
otherwise specified. Truck mixers, agitators, and nonagitating
transporting units shall comply with NRMCA TMMB 100. Ready-mix plant
equipment and facilities shall be certified in accordance with NRMCA QC 3.
Approved batch tickets shall be furnished for each load of ready-mixed
concrete. Site-mixed concrete shall conform to the following subparagraphs.
3.2.2 Batching Plant
Locate the batching plant offsite close to the project. The batching plant
shall conform to the requirements of NRMCA CPMB 100 and as specified;
however, rating plates attached to batch plant equipment are not required.
3.2.3 Batching Equipment
The batching controls shall be semiautomatic or automatic, as defined in

NRMCA CPMB 100. Provide a semiautomatic batching system with interlocks
such that the discharge device cannot be actuated until the indicated
material is within the applicable tolerance. Equip the batching system
with accurate recorder or recorders that meet the requirements of
NRMCA CPMB 100. Record the weight of water and admixtures if batched by
weight. Provide separate bins or compartments for each size group of
aggregate and type of cementitious material, to prevent intermingling at
any time. Aggregates shall be weighed either in separate weigh batchers
with individual scales or, provided the smallest size is batched first,
SECTION 03 31 00.00 10 Page 17

cumulatively in one weigh batcher on one scale. Aggregate shall not be

weighed in the same batcher with cementitious material. If both portland
cement and other cementitious material are used, they may be batched
cumulatively, provided that the portland cement is batched first, . Water
may be measured by weight or volume. Water shall not be weighed or
measured cumulatively with another ingredient. Filling and discharging
valves for the water metering or batching system shall be so interlocked
that the discharge valve cannot be opened before the filling valve is fully
closed. Piping for water and for admixtures shall be free from leaks and
shall be properly valved to prevent backflow or siphoning. Furnish
admixtures as a liquid of suitable concentration for easy control of
dispensing. Provide an adjustable, accurate, mechanical device for
measuring and dispensing each admixture. Each admixture dispenser shall be
interlocked with the batching and discharging operation of the water so
that each admixture is separately batched and individually discharged
automatically in a manner to obtain uniform distribution throughout the
water as it is added to the batch in the specified mixing period.
Different admixtures shall not be combined prior to introduction in water
and shall not be allowed to intermingle until in contact with the cement.
Admixture dispensers shall have suitable devices to detect and indicate
flow during dispensing or have a means for visual observation. Arrange the
plant so as to facilitate the inspection of all operations at all times.
Provide suitable facilities for obtaining representative samples of
aggregates from each bin or compartment, and for sampling and calibrating
the dispensing of cementitious material, water, and admixtures. Filling
ports for cementitious materials bins or silos shall be clearly marked with
a permanent sign stating the contents.
3.2.4 Scales
The weighing equipment shall conform to the applicable requirements of CPMB

Concrete Plant Standard, and of NIST HB 44, except that the accuracy shall
be plus or minus 0.2 percent of scale capacity. Provide standard test
weights and any other auxiliary equipment required for checking the
operating performance of each scale or other measuring devices. Perform
the tests at the specified frequency in the presence of a Government
inspector. Arrange the weighing equipment so that the plant operator can
conveniently observe all dials or indicators.
3.2.5 Batching Tolerances
a. Tolerances with Weighing Equipment
MATERIAL PERCENT OF REQUIRED WEIGHT
Cementitious materials 0 to plus 2
Aggregate plus or minus 2
Water plus or minus 1
Chemical admixture 0 to plus 6
b. Tolerances with Volumetric Equipment - For volumetric batching

equipment used for water and admixtures, the following tolerances shall
apply to the required volume of material being batched:
SECTION 03 31 00.00 10 Page 18

MATERIAL PERCENT OF REQUIRED MATERIAL
Chemical admixture 0 to plus 6
3.2.6 Moisture Control
Provide a plant capable of ready adjustment to compensate for the varying

moisture content of the aggregates and to change the weights of the
materials being batched.
3.2.7 Concrete Mixers
Mixers shall be stationary mixers capable of combining the materials into a

uniform mixture and of discharging this mixture without segregation. The
mixers shall not be charged in excess of the capacity recommended by the
manufacturer. Operate the mixers at the drum or mixing blade speed
designated by the manufacturer. The mixers shall be maintained in
satisfactory operating condition, and the mixer drums shall be kept free of
hardened concrete. Should any mixer at any time produce unsatisfactory
results, its use shall be promptly discontinued until it is repaired.
3.2.8 Stationary Mixers
Concrete plant mixers shall be drum-type mixers of tilting, nontilting,

horizontal-shaft, or vertical-shaft type, or pug mill type provided with an
acceptable device to lock the discharge mechanism until the required mixing
time has elapsed. The mixing time and uniformity shall conform to all the
requirements in ASTM C 94/C 94M applicable to central-mixed concrete.
3.3 TRANSPORTING CONCRETE TO PROJECT SITE
Transport concrete to the placing site in agitators, or by approved pumping

equipment.
3.4 CONVEYING CONCRETE ONSITE
Convey concrete from mixer or transporting unit to forms as rapidly as

possible and within the time interval specified by methods which will
prevent segregation or loss of ingredients using following equipment.
Conveying equipment shall be cleaned before each placement.
3.4.1 Buckets
The interior hopper slope shall be not less than 58 degrees from the
horizontal, the minimum dimension of the clear gate opening shall be at
least 5 times the nominal maximum-size aggregate, and the area of the gate
opening shall not be less than 2 square feet. The maximum dimension of the
gate opening shall not be greater than twice the minimum dimension. The
bucket gates shall be essentially grout tight when closed and may be
manually, pneumatically, or hydraulically operated except that buckets
larger than 2 cubic yards shall not be manually operated. The design of
the bucket shall provide means for positive regulation of the amount and
rate of deposit of concrete in each dumping position.
SECTION 03 31 00.00 10 Page 19

3.4.2 Transfer Hoppers
Concrete may be charged into nonagitating hoppers for transfer to other

conveying devices. Transfer hoppers shall be capable of receiving concrete
directly from delivery vehicles and shall have conical-shaped discharge
features. Equip the transfer hopper with a hydraulically operated gate and
with a means of external vibration to effect complete discharge. Concrete
shall not be held in nonagitating transfer hoppers more than 30 minutes.
3.4.3 Trucks
Truck mixers operating at agitating speed or truck agitators used for

transporting plant-mixed concrete shall conform to the requirements of
ASTM C 94/C 94M. Use nonagitating equipment only for transporting
plant-mixed concrete over a smooth road and when the hauling time is less
than 15 minutes. Bodies of nonagitating equipment shall be smooth,
watertight, metal containers specifically designed to transport concrete,
shaped with rounded corners to minimize segregation, and equipped with
gates that will permit positive control of the discharge of the concrete.
3.4.4 Chutes
When concrete can be placed directly from a truck mixer, agitator, or

nonagitating equipment, the chutes normally attached to this equipment by
the manufacturer may be used. Use a discharge deflector when required by
the Contracting Officer. Separate chutes and other similar equipment will
not be permitted for conveying concrete.
3.4.5 Belt Conveyors
Design and operate belt conveyors to assure a uniform flow of concrete from
mixer to final place of deposit without segregation of ingredients or loss
of mortar and provided with positive means, such as discharge baffle or
hopper , for preventing segregation of the concrete at the transfer points
and the point of placing. Construct belt conveyors such that the idler
spacing does not exceed 36 inches. The belt speed shall be a minimum of
300 feet per minute and a maximum of 750 feet per minute. If concrete is
to be placed through installed horizontal or sloping reinforcing bars, the
conveyor shall discharge concrete into a pipe or elephant truck that is
long enough to extend through the reinforcing bars.
3.4.6 Concrete Pumps
Concrete may be conveyed by positive displacement pump when approved. The

pumping equipment shall be piston or squeeze pressure type; pneumatic
placing equipment shall not be used. The pipeline shall be rigid steel
pipe or heavy-duty flexible hose. The inside diameter of the pipe shall be
at least 3 times the nominal maximum-size coarse aggregate in the concrete
mixture to be pumped but not less than 4 inches. Aluminum pipe shall not
be used.
3.5 PLACING CONCRETE
Discharge mixed concrete within 1.5 hours or before the mixer drum has
revolved 300 revolutions, whichever comes first after the introduction of
the mixing water to the cement and aggregates. When the concrete
temperature exceeds 85 degrees F, reduce the time to 45 minutes. Place
concrete within 15 minutes after it has been discharged from the
transporting unit. Concrete shall be handled from mixer or transporting
SECTION 03 31 00.00 10 Page 20

unit to forms in a continuous manner until the approved unit of operation

is completed. Provide adequate scaffolding, ramps and walkways so that
personnel and equipment are not supported by in-place reinforcement.
Placing will not be permitted when the sun, heat, wind, or limitations of
facilities prevent proper consolidation, finishing and curing. Provide
sufficient placing capacity so that concrete can be kept free of cold
joints.
3.5.1 Depositing Concrete
Deposit concrete as close as possible to its final position in the forms,

and with no vertical drop greater than 5 feet except where suitable
equipment is provided to prevent segregation and where specifically
authorized. Depositing of the concrete shall be so regulated that it will
be effectively consolidated in horizontal layers not more than 12 inches
thick, except that all slabs shall be placed in a single lift. Concrete to
receive other construction shall be screeded to the proper level. Concrete
shall be deposited continuously in one layer or in layers so that fresh
concrete is deposited on in-place concrete that is still plastic. Fresh
concrete shall not be deposited on concrete that has hardened sufficiently
to cause formation of seams or planes of weakness within the section.
Concrete that has surface dried, partially hardened, or contains foreign
material shall not be used. When temporary spreaders are used in the
forms, the spreaders shall be removed as their service becomes
unnecessary. Concrete shall not be placed in slabs over columns and walls
until concrete in columns and walls has been in-place at least two hours or
until the concrete begins to lose its plasticity. Place concrete for
beams, girders, brackets, column capitals, haunches, and drop panels at the
same time as concrete for adjoining slabs.
3.5.2 Consolidation
Immediately after placing, consolidate each layer of concrete by internal

vibrators, except for slabs 4 inches thick or less. The vibrators shall at
all times be adequate in effectiveness and number to properly consolidate
the concrete; keep a spare vibrator at the jobsite during all concrete
placing operations. The vibrators shall have a frequency of not less than
10,000 vibrations per minute, an amplitude of at least 0.025 inch, and the
head diameter shall be appropriate for the structural member and the
concrete mixture being placed. Insert vibrators vertically at uniform
spacing over the area of placement. The distance between insertions shall
be approximately 1.5 times the radius of action of the vibrator so that the
area being vibrated will overlap the adjacent just-vibrated area by a
reasonable amount. The vibrator shall penetrate rapidly to the bottom of
the layer and at least 6 inches into the preceding layer if there is such.
Vibrator shall be held stationary until the concrete is consolidated and
then vertically withdrawn slowly while operating. Form vibrators shall not
be used unless specifically approved and unless forms are constructed to
withstand their use. Vibrators shall not be used to move concrete within
the forms. Slabs 4 inches and less in thickness shall be consolidated by
properly designed vibrating screeds or other approved technique. Excessive
vibration of lightweight concrete resulting in segration or flotation of
coarse aggregate shall be prevented. Frequency and amplitude of vibrators
shall be determined in accordance with COE CRD-C 521. Grate tampers
("jitterbugs") shall not be used.
3.5.3 Cold Weather Requirements
Use special protection measures, approved by the Contracting Officer, if
SECTION 03 31 00.00 10 Page 21

freezing temperatures are anticipated before the expiration of the

specified curing period. The ambient temperature of the air where concrete
is to be placed and the temperature of surfaces to receive concrete shall
be not less than 40 degrees F. The temperature of the concrete when placed
shall be not less than 50 degrees F nor more than 75 degrees F. Heating of
the mixing water or aggregates will be required to regulate the concrete
placing temperature. Materials entering the mixer shall be free from ice,
snow, or frozen lumps. Salt, chemicals or other materials shall not be
incorporated in the concrete to prevent freezing. Upon written approval,
an accelerating admixture conforming to ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type C or E may
be used, provided it contains no calcium chloride. Calcium chloride shall
not be used.
3.5.4 Hot Weather Requirements
When job-site conditions are present or anticipated that accelerate the

rate of moisture loss or rate of cement hydration of freshly mixed
concrete, including an ambient temperature of 80 degrees F or higher, and
an evaporation rate that exceeds 0.2 lb/ft2/h, concrete work shall conform
to all requirements of ACI 305.1.
3.5.5 Prevention of Plastic Shrinkage Cracking
During hot weather with low humidity, and particularly with appreciable
wind, as well as interior placements when space heaters produce low
humidity, the Contractor shall be alert to the tendency for plastic
shrinkage cracks to develop and shall institute measures to prevent this.
Take particular care if plastic shrinkage cracking is potentially imminent
and especially if it has developed during a previous placement. Conform
with the requirement of ACI 305.1. In addition the concrete placement
shall be further protected by erecting shades and windbreaks and by
applying fog sprays of water, sprinkling, ponding or wet covering. Plastic
shrinkage cracks that occur shall be filled by injection of epoxy resin as
directed, after the concrete hardens. Plastic shrinkage cracks shall never
be troweled over or filled with slurry.
3.5.6 Placing Concrete in Congested Areas
Use special care to ensure complete filling of the forms, elimination of

all voids, and complete consolidation of the concrete when placing concrete
in areas congested with reinforcing bars, embedded items, waterstops and
other tight spacing. An appropriate concrete mixture shall be used, and
the nominal maximum size of aggregate (NMSA) shall meet the specified
criteria when evaluated for the congested area. Vibrators with heads of a
size appropriate for the clearances available shall be used, and the
consolidation operation shall be closely supervised to ensure complete and
thorough consolidation at all points. Where necessary, splices of
reinforcing bars shall be alternated to reduce congestion. Where two mats
of closely spaced reinforcing are required, the bars in each mat shall be
placed in matching alignment to reduce congestion. Reinforcing bars may be
temporarily crowded to one side during concrete placement provided they are
returned to exact required location before concrete placement and
consolidation are completed.
3.5.7 Placing Flowable Concrete
If a plasticizing admixture conforming to ASTM C 1017/C 1017M is used or if

a Type F or G high range water reducing admixture is permitted to increase
the slump, the concrete shall meet all requirements of paragraph SYSTEM
SECTION 03 31 00.00 10 Page 22

DESCRIPTION in PART 1. Use extreme care in conveying and placing the

concrete to avoid segregation. No relaxation of requirements to
accommodate flowable concrete will be permitted.
3.6 JOINTS
Locate and construct joints as indicated or approved. Joints not indicated

on the drawings shall be located and constructed to minimize the impact on
the strength of the structure. In general, locate such joints near the
middle of the spans of supported slabs, beams, and girders unless a beam
intersects a girder at this point, in which case the joint in the girder
shall be offset a distance equal to twice the width of the beam. Joints in
walls and columns shall be at the underside of floors, slabs, beams, or
girders and at the tops of footings or floor slabs, unless otherwise
approved. Joints shall be perpendicular to the main reinforcement. All
reinforcement shall be continued across joints; except that reinforcement
or other fixed metal items shall not be continuous through expansion
joints, or through construction or contraction joints in slabs on grade.
Reinforcement shall be 2 inches clear from each joint. Except where
otherwise indicated, construction joints between interior slabs on grade
and vertical surfaces shall consist of 30 pound asphalt-saturated felt,
extending for the full depth of the slab. The perimeters of the slabs
shall be free of fins, rough edges, spalling, or other unsightly
appearance. Reservoir for sealant for construction and contraction joints
in slabs shall be formed to the dimensions shown on the drawings by
removing snap-out joint-forming inserts, by sawing sawable inserts, or by
sawing to widen the top portion of sawed joints. Joints to be sealed shall
be cleaned and sealed as indicated and in accordance with Section 07 92 00
JOINT SEALANTS.
3.6.1 Construction Joints
For concrete other than slabs on grade, locate construction joints so that
the unit of operation does not exceed the dimesnion as shown on the drawings.
Concrete shall be placed continuously so that each unit is monolithic in
construction. Fresh concrete shall not be placed against adjacent hardened
concrete until it is at least 24 hours old. Locate construction joints as
indicated or approved. Where concrete work is interrupted by weather, end
of work shift or other similar type of delay, location and type of
construction joint shall be subject to approval of the Contracting
Officer. Unless otherwise indicated and except for slabs on grade, extend
reinforcing steel through construction joints. Construction joints in
slabs on grade shall be keyed or doweled as shown. Concrete columns,
walls, or piers shall be in place at least 2 hours, or until the concrete
begins to lose its plasticity, before placing concrete for beams, girders,
or slabs thereon. In walls having door or window openings, terminate lifts
at the top and bottom of the opening. Other lifts shall terminate at such
levels as to conform to structural requirements or architectural details.
Where horizontal construction joints in walls or columns are required, a
strip of 1 inch square-edge lumber, bevelled and oiled to facilitate
removal, shall be tacked to the inside of the forms at the construction
joint. Place concrete to a point 1 inch above the underside of the strip.
The strip shall be removed 1 hour after the concrete has been placed, and
any irregularities in the joint line shall be leveled off with a wood
float, and all laitance shall be removed. Prior to placing additional
concrete, horizontal construction joints shall be prepared as specified in
paragraph Previously Placed Concrete above.
SECTION 03 31 00.00 10 Page 23

3.6.2 Contraction Joints in Slabs on Grade
Contraction joints shall be located and detailed as shown on the drawings.

Produce contraction joints by forming a weakened plane in the concrete slab
by use of rigid inserts impressed in the concrete during placing operations
or sawing a continuous slot with a concrete saw. Regardless of method used
to produce the weakened plane, it shall be 1/4 the depth of the slab
thickness and between 1/8 and 3/16 inch wide. For saw-cut joints, cutting
shall be timed properly with the set of the concrete. Cutting shall be
started as soon as the concrete has hardened sufficiently to prevent
ravelling of the edges of the saw cut. Cutting shall be completed before
shrinkage stresses become sufficient to produce cracking. Form reservoir
for joint sealant as previously specified.
Installation of expansion joints and sealing of these joints shall conform

to the requirements of Section 03 15 00.00 10 CONCRETE ACCESSORIES and
Section 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS.
3.6.4 Waterstops
Install waterstops in conformance with the locations and details shown on

the drawings using materials and procedures specified in Section
03 15 00.00 10 CONCRETE ACCESSORIES.
3.6.5 Dowels and Tie Bars
Install dowels and tie bars at the locations shown on the drawings and to
the details shown, using materials and procedures specified in Section
03 20 00.00 10 CONCRETE REINFORCING and herein. Conventional smooth
"paving" dowels shall be installed in slabs using approved methods to hold
the dowel in place during concreting within a maximum alignment tolerance of
1/8 inch in 12 inches. "Structural" type deformed bar dowels, or tie
bars, shall be installed to meet the specified tolerances. Care shall be
taken during placing adjacent to and around dowels and tie bars to ensure
there is no displacement of the dowel or tie bar and that the concrete
completely embeds the dowel or tie bar and is thoroughly consolidated.
3.7 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES
Forms, form materials, and form construction are specified in Section

03 11 13.00 10 STRUCTURAL CONCRETE FORMWORK. Finishing of formed surfaces
shall be as specified herein. Unless another type of architectural or
special finish is specified, surfaces shall be left with the texture
imparted by the forms except that defective surfaces shall be repaired.
Unless painting of surfaces is required, maintain uniform color of the
concrete by use of only one mixture without changes in materials or
proportions for any structure or portion of structure that requires a Class
A or B finish. Except for major defects, as defined hereinafter, repair
surface defects as specified herein within 24 hours after forms are
removed. Repairs of the so-called "plaster-type" will not be permitted in
any location. Tolerances of formed surfaces shall conform to the
requirements of ACI 117. These tolerances apply to the finished concrete
surface, not to the forms themselves; forms shall be set true to line and
grade. Form tie holes requiring repair and other defects whose depth is at
least as great as their surface diameter shall be repaired as specified in
paragraph Damp-Pack Mortar Repair below. Defects whose surface diameter is
greater than their depth shall be repaired as specified in paragraph Repair
SECTION 03 31 00.00 10 Page 24

of Major Defects below. Repairs shall be finished flush with adjacent

surfaces and with the same surface texture. The cement used for all
repairs shall be a blend of job cement with white cement proportioned so
that the final color after curing and aging will be the same as the
adjacent concrete. Concrete with excessive honeycomb, or other defects
which affect the strength of the member, will be rejected. Repairs shall
be demonstrated to be acceptable and free from cracks or loose or drummy
areas at the completion of the contract and, for Class A and B Finishes,
shall be inconspicuous. Repairs not meeting these requirements will be
rejected and shall be replaced.
3.7.1 Class A Finish and Class B Finish
Class A finish is required in the following areas, surfaces permanently

exposed to public view that require excellent appearance at close range.
Class B finish is required in the following areas, surfaces exposed to
public view that do not require the excellent appearance of Class A, e.g.
exterior walls of warehouse/industrial buildings where public access is
infrequent. Remove fins, ravelings, and loose material, all surface
defects over 1/2 inch in diameter or more than 1/2 inch deep, shall be
repaired and, except as otherwise indicated or as specified in Section
03 11 13.00 10 STRUCTURAL CONCRETE FORMWORK, holes left by removal of form
ties shall be reamed and filled. Defects more than 1/2 inch in diameter
shall be cut back to sound concrete, but in all cases at least 1 inch
deep. Prepare a sample panel for approval (as specified in PART 1) before
commencing repair, showing that the surface texture and color match will be
attained. Metal tools shall not be used to finish repairs in Class A
surfaces.
3.7.2 Class C and Class D Finish
Class C finish is required in the following areas, concealed surfaces not

exposed to view, e.g. interior surfaces to be covered by dry wall, surfaces
of mechanical rooms and elevator shafts. Class D finish is required in the
following areas, surfaces where roughness and irregularities are not
objectionable, e.g. walls and foundation surfaces against which backfill is
placed. Fins, ravelings, and loose material shall be removed, and, except
as otherwise indicated or as specified in Section 03 11 13.00 10 STRUCTURAL
CONCRETE FORMWORK, holes left by removal of form ties shall be reamed and
filled. Honeycomb and other defects more than 1/2 inch deep or more than 2
inches in diameter shall be repaired. Defects more than 2 inches in
diameter shall be cut back to sound concrete, but in all cases at least 1
inch deep.
3.8 REPAIRS
3.8.1 Damp-Pack Mortar Repair
Form tie holes requiring repair and other defects, whose depth is at least
as great as their surface diameter but not over 4 inches, shall be repaired
by the damp-pack mortar method. Form tie holes shall be reamed and other
similar defects shall be cut out to sound concrete. The void shall then be
thoroughly cleaned, thoroughly wetted, brush-coated with a thin coat of
neat cement grout and filled with mortar. Mortar shall be a stiff mix of 1
part portland cement to 2 parts fine aggregate passing the No. 16 mesh
sieve, and minimum amount of water. Use only sufficient water to produce a
mortar which, when used, will stick together on being molded into a ball by
a slight pressure of the hands and will not exude water but will leave the
hands damp. Mortar shall be mixed and allowed to stand for 30 to 45
SECTION 03 31 00.00 10 Page 25

minutes before use with remixing performed immediately prior to use.

Mortar shall be thoroughly tamped in place in thin layers using a hammer
and hardwood block. Holes passing entirely through walls shall be
completely filled from the inside face by forcing mortar through to the
outside face. All holes shall be packed full. Damp-pack repairs shall be
moist cured for at least 48 hours.
3.8.2 Repair of Major Defects
Major defects will be considered to be those more than 1/2 inch deep or,
for Class A and B finishes, more than 1/2 inch in diameter and, for Class C
and D finishes, more than 2 inches in diameter. Also included are any
defects of any kind whose depth is over 4 inches or whose surface diameter
is greater than their depth. Repair major defects as specified below.
3.8.2.1 Surface Application of Mortar Repair
Defective concrete shall be removed, and removal shall extend into

completely sound concrete. Use approved equipment and procedures which
will not cause cracking or microcracking of the sound concrete. If
reinforcement is encountered, remove concrete so as to expose the
reinforcement for at least 2 inches on all sides. All such defective areas
greater than 12 square inches shall be outlined by saw cuts at least 1 inch
deep. Defective areas less than 12 square inches shall be outlined by a 1
inch deep cut with a core drill in lieu of sawing. All saw cuts shall be
straight lines in a rectangular pattern in line with the formwork panels.
After concrete removal, the surface shall be thoroughly cleaned by high
pressure washing to remove all loose material. Keep surfaces continually
saturated for the first 12 of the 24 hours immediately before placing
mortar and shall be damp but not wet at the time of commencing mortar
placement. The Contractor, as an option, may use either hand-placed mortar
or mortar placed with a mortar gun. If hand-placed mortar is used, the
edges of the cut shall be perpendicular to the surface of the concrete.
The prepared area shall be brush-coated with a thin coat of neat cement
grout. The repair shall then be made using a stiff mortar, preshrunk by
allowing the mixed mortar to stand for 30 to 45 minutes and then remixed,
thoroughly tamped into place in thin layers. If hand-placed mortar is
used, test each repair area for drumminess by firm tapping with a hammer
and inspecting for cracks, both in the presence of the Contracting Officer,
immediately before completion of the contract, and replacing any showing
drumminess or cracking. If mortar placed with a mortar gun is used, the
gun shall be a small compressed air-operated gun to which the mortar is
slowly hand fed and which applies the mortar to the surface as a
high-pressure stream, as approved. Repairs made using shotcrete equipment
will not be accepted. The mortar used shall be the same mortar as
specified for damp-pack mortar repair. If gun-placed mortar is used, the
edges of the cut shall be beveled toward the center at a slope of 1:1. All
surface applied mortar repairs shall be continuously moist cured for at
least 7 days. Moist curing shall consist of several layers of saturated
burlap applied to the surface immediately after placement is complete and
covered with polyethylene sheeting, all held closely in place by a sheet of
plywood or similar material rigidly braced against it. Keep burlap
continually wet.
3.9 FINISHING UNFORMED SURFACES
The finish of all unformed surfaces shall meet the requirements of

paragraph Tolerances in PART 1, when tested as specified herein.
SECTION 03 31 00.00 10 Page 26

3.9.1 General
The ambient temperature of spaces adjacent to unformed surfaces being

finished and of the base on which concrete will be placed shall be not less
than 50 degrees F. In hot weather all requirements of paragraphs Hot
Weather Requirements and Prevention of Plastic Shrinkage Cracking above
shall be met. Unformed surfaces that are not to be covered by additional
concrete or backfill shall have a float finish, with additional finishing
as specified below, and shall be true to the elevation shown on the
drawings. Surfaces to receive additional concrete or backfill shall be
brought to the elevation shown on the drawings, properly consolidated, and
left true and regular. Unless otherwise shown on the drawings, exterior
surfaces shall be sloped for drainage, as directed. Where drains are
provided, interior floors shall be evenly sloped to the drains. Joints
shall be carefully made with a jointing or edging tool. The finished
surfaces shall be protected from stains or abrasions. Grate tampers or
"jitterbugs" shall not be used for any surfaces. The dusting of surfaces
with dry cement or other materials or the addition of any water during
finishing shall not be permitted. If bleedwater is present prior to
finishing, the excess water shall be carefully dragged off or removed by
absorption with porous materials such as burlap. During finishing
operations, extreme care shall be taken to prevent over finishing or
working water into the surface; this can cause "crazing" (surface shrinkage
cracks which appear after hardening) of the surface. Any slabs with
surfaces which exhibit significant crazing shall be removed and replaced.
During finishing operations, surfaces shall be checked with a 10 foot
straightedge, applied in both directions at regular intervals while the
concrete is still plastic, to detect high or low areas.
3.9.2 Rough Slab Finish
As a first finishing operation for unformed surfaces and as final finish

for slabs to receive mortar setting beds, the surface shall receive a rough
slab finish prepared as follows. The concrete shall be uniformly placed
across the slab area, consolidated as previously specified, and then
screeded with straightedge strikeoffs immediately after consolidation to
bring the surface to the required finish level with no coarse aggregate
visible. Side forms and screed rails shall be provided, rigidly supported,
and set to exact line and grade. Allowable tolerances for finished
surfaces apply only to the hardened concrete, not to forms or screed
rails. Forms and screed rails shall be set true to line and grade. "Wet
screeds" shall not be used.
3.9.3 Floated Finish
Slabs to receive more than a rough slab finish shall next be given a wood
float finish. The screeding shall be followed immediately by darbying or
bull floating before bleeding water is present, to bring the surface to a
true, even plane. Then, after the concrete has stiffened so that it will
withstand a man's weight without imprint of more than 1/4 inch and the
water sheen has disappeared, it shall be floated to a true and even plane
free of ridges. Perform floating by use of suitable hand floats or power
driven equipment. Use sufficient pressure on the floats to bring a film of
moisture to the surface. Hand floats shall be made of wood, magnesium, or
aluminum. Lightweight concrete or concrete that exhibits stickiness shall
be floated with a magnesium float. Care shall be taken to prevent
over-finishing or incorporating water into the surface.
SECTION 03 31 00.00 10 Page 27

3.9.4 Troweled Finish
After floating is complete and after the surface moisture has disappeared,
unformed surfaces shall be steel-troweled to a smooth, even, dense finish,
free from blemishes including trowel marks. In lieu of hand finishing, an
approved power finishing machine may be used in accordance with the
directions of the machine manufacturer. Additional trowelings shall be
performed, either by hand or machine until the surface has been troweled 3
times, with waiting period between each. Care shall be taken to prevent
blistering and if such occurs, troweling shall immediately be stopped and
operations and surfaces corrected. A final hard steel troweling shall be
done by hand, with the trowel tipped, and using hard pressure, when the
surface is at a point that the trowel will produce a ringing sound. The
finished surface shall be thoroughly consolidated and shall be essentially
free of trowel marks and be uniform in texture and appearance. The
concrete mixture used for troweled finished areas shall be adjusted, if
necessary, in order to provide sufficient fines (cementitious material and
fine sand) to finish properly.
3.9.5 Non-Slip Finish
Construct non-slip floors in accordance with the following subparagraphs.
3.9.5.1 Broomed
All permanently exposed slab surfaces on teh exterior of the builidngs

shall be given a broomed finish. After floating, the surface shall be
lightly steel troweled, and then carefully scored by pulling a coarse fiber
push-type broom across the surface. Brooming shall be transverse to
traffic or at right angles to the slope of the slab. After the end of the
curing period, the surface shall be vigorously broomed with a coarse fiber
broom to remove all loose or semi-detached particles.
3.10 FLOOR HARDENER
All exposed concrete floors except where finish schedule requirments

conflict due to concrete treatment such as staining shall be treated with
floor hardener applied after the concrete has been cured and then air dried
for 28 days. Apply three coats, each the day after the preceding coat was
applied. For the first application, one pound of the silocofluoride shall
be dissolved in one gallon of water. For subsequent applications, the
solution shall be two pounds of silicofluoride to each gallon of water.
Floor should be mopped with clear water shortly after the preceding
application has dried to remove encrusted salts. Apply proprietary
hardeners in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. During
application, area should be well ventilated. Take precautions when
applying silicofluorides due to the toxicity of the salts. Any compound
that contacts glass or aluminum should be immediately removed with clear
water.
3.11 EXTERIOR SLAB AND RELATED ITEMS
3.11.1 Pavements
Construct pavements where shown on the drawings. After forms are set and
underlying material prepared as specified, place the concrete uniformly
throughout the area and thoroughly vibrated. As soon as placed and
vibrated, the concrete shall be struck off and screeded to the crown and
cross section and to such elevation above grade that when consolidated and
SECTION 03 31 00.00 10 Page 28

finished, the surface of the pavement will be at the required elevation.

The entire surface shall be tamped with the strike off, or consolidated
with a vibrating screed, and this operation continued until the required
compaction and reduction of internal and surface voids are accomplished.
Take care to prevent bringing excess paste to the surface. Immediately
following the final consolidation of the surface, the pavement shall be
floated longitudinally from bridges resting on the side forms and spanning
but not touching the concrete. If necessary, additional concrete shall be
placed and screeded, and the float operated until a satisfactory surface
has been produced. The floating operation shall be advanced not more than
half the length of the float and then continued over the new and previously
floated surfaces. After finishing is completed but while the concrete is
still plastic, eliminate minor irregularities and score marks in the
pavement surface by means of long-handled cutting straightedges.
Straightedges shall be 12 feet in length and shall be operated from the
sides of the pavement and from bridges. A straightedge operated from the
side of the pavement shall be equipped with a handle 3 feet longer than
one-half the width of the pavement. The surface shall then be tested for
trueness with a 12 foot straightedge held in successive positions parallel
and at right angles to the center line of the pavement, and the whole area
covered as necessary to detect variations. The straightedge shall be
advanced along the pavement in successive stages of not more than one-half
the length of the straightedge. Depressions shall be immediately filled
with freshly mixed concrete, struck off, consolidated, and refinished.
Projections above the required elevation shall also be struck off and
refinished. Continue the straightedge testing and finishing until the
entire surface of the concrete is true. Before the surface sheen has
disappeared and well before the concrete becomes nonplastic, the surface of
the pavement shall be given a nonslip sandy surface texture by use of a
burlap drag. A strip of clean, wet burlap from 3 to 5 feet wide and 2 feet
longer than the pavement width shall be carefully pulled across the surface.
Round edges and joints with an edger having a radius of 1/8 inch. Curing
shall be as specified.
3.11.2 Sidewalks
Concrete shall be 4 inches minimum thickness. Provide contraction joints at

5 feet spaces unless otherwise indicated. Contraction joints shall be cut
1 inch deep with a jointing tool after the surface has been finished.
Provide transverse expansion joints 1/2 inch thick at changes in direction
and where sidewalk abuts curbs, steps, rigid pavement, or other similar
structures. Sidewalks shall be given a lightly broomed finish. A
transverse slope of 1/4 inch per foot shall be provided, unless otherwise
indicated. Variations in cross section shall be limited to 1/4 inch in 5
feet.
3.11.3 Curbs and Gutters
Concrete shall be formed, placed, and finished by hand using a properly

shaped "mule" or constructed using a slipform machine specially designed
for this work. Contraction joints shall be cut 3 inches deep with a
jointing tool after the surface has been finished. Expansion joints ( 1/2
inch wide) shall be provided at 100 feet maximum spacing unless otherwise
indicated. Finish exposed surfaces using a stiff bristled brush.
3.11.4 Pits and Trenches
Construct pits and trenches as indicated on the drawings. Bottoms and

walls shall be placed monolithically or waterstops and keys, shall be
SECTION 03 31 00.00 10 Page 29

provided as approved.
3.12 CURING AND PROTECTION
3.12.1 General
Concrete shall be cured by an approved method for the period of time given
below:
Concrete with Type III cement 3 days

All other concrete 7 days
Immediately after placement, protect concrete from premature drying,

extremes in temperatures, rapid temperature change, mechanical injury and
damage from rain and flowing water for the duration of the curing period.
Maintain air and forms in contact with concrete at a temperature above 50
degrees F for the first 3 days and at a temperature above 32 degrees F for
the remainder of the specified curing period. Exhaust fumes from
combustion heating units shall be vented to the outside of the enclosure,
and heaters and ducts shall be placed and directed so as not to cause areas
of overheating and drying of concrete surfaces or to create fire hazards.
Materials and equipment needed for adequate curing and protection shall be
available and at the site prior to placing concrete. No fire or excessive
heat, including welding, shall be permitted near or in direct contact with
the concrete at any time. Except as otherwise permitted by paragraph
Membrane Forming Curing Compounds in PART 2, moist curing shall be provided
for any areas to receive floor hardener, any paint or other applied
coating, or to which other concrete is to be bonded. Concrete containing
silica fume shall be initially cured by fog misting during finishing,
followed immediately by continuous moist curing. Except for plastic coated
burlap, impervious sheeting alone shall not be used for curing.
3.12.2 Moist Curing
Maintain concrete, to be moist-cured, continuously wet for the entire

curing period, commencing immediately after finishing. If water or curing
materials used stain or discolor concrete surfaces which are to be
permanently exposed, the concrete surfaces shall be cleaned as approved.
When wooden forms are left in place during curing, they shall be kept wet
at all times. If steel forms are used in hot weather, nonsupporting
vertical forms shall be broken loose from the concrete soon after the
concrete hardens and curing water continually applied in this void. If the
forms are removed before the end of the curing period, curing shall be
carried out as on unformed surfaces, using suitable materials. Surfaces
shall be cured by ponding, by continuous sprinkling, by continuously
saturated burlap or cotton mats, or by continuously saturated plastic
coated burlap. Burlap and mats shall be clean and free from any
contamination and shall be completely saturated before being placed on the
concrete. Provide an approved work system to ensure that moist curing is
continuous 24 hours per day.
3.12.3 Membrane Forming Curing Compounds
Use membrane forming curing compounds only on surfaces that will not
receive any additional floor covering. Membrane curing shall not be used
on surfaces that are to receive any subsequent treatment depending on
adhesion or bonding to the concrete, including surfaces to which a smooth
finish is to be applied or other concrete to be bonded. However, a styrene
acrylate or chlorinated rubber compound meeting ASTM C 309, Class B
SECTION 03 31 00.00 10 Page 30

requirements, may be used for surfaces which are to be painted or are to

receive bituminous roofing or waterproofing, or floors that are to receive
adhesive applications of resilient flooring. The curing compound selected
shall be compatible with any subsequent paint, roofing, waterproofing or
flooring specified. Membrane curing compound shall not be used on surfaces
that are maintained at curing temperatures with free steam. Apply curing
compound to formed surfaces immediately after the forms are removed and
prior to any patching or other surface treatment except the cleaning of
loose sand, mortar, and debris from the surface. All surfaces shall be
thoroughly moistened with water. Curing compound shall be applied to slab
surfaces as soon as the bleeding water has disappeared, with the tops of
joints being temporarily sealed to prevent entry of the compound and to
prevent moisture loss during the curing period. The curing compound shall
be applied in a two-coat continuous operation by approved motorized
power-spraying equipment operating at a minimum pressure of 75 psi, at a
uniform coverage of not more than 400 square feet/gallon for each coat, and
the second coat shall be applied perpendicular to the first coat. Concrete
surfaces which have been subjected to rainfall within 3 hours after curing
compound has been applied shall be resprayed by the method and at the
coverage specified. Shade surfaces, on which clear compound is used, from
direct rays of the sun for the first 3 days. Keep surfaces coated with
curing compound free of foot and vehicular traffic, and from other sources
of abrasion and contamination during the curing period.
3.12.4 Impervious Sheeting
The following concrete surfaces may be cured using impervious sheets: all.
However, except for plastic coated burlap, impervious sheeting alone shall
not be used for curing. Use impervious-sheet curing only on horizontal or
nearly horizontal surfaces. Surfaces shall be thoroughly wetted and be
completely covered with the sheeting. Sheeting shall be at least 18 inches
wider than the concrete surface to be covered. Covering shall be laid with
light-colored side up. Covering shall be lapped not less than 12 inches
and securely weighted down or shall be lapped not less than 4 inches and
taped to form a continuous cover with completely closed joints. The sheet
shall be weighted to prevent displacement so that it remains in contact
with the concrete during the specified length of curing. Coverings shall
be folded down over exposed edges of slabs and secured by approved means.
Sheets shall be immediately repaired or replaced if tears or holes appear
during the curing period.
3.12.5 Ponding or Immersion
Concrete shall be continually immersed throughout the curing period. Water

shall not be more than 20 degrees F less than the temperature of the
concrete.
3.12.6 Cold Weather Curing and Protection
When the daily ambient low temperature is less than 32 degrees F maintain
the temperature of the concrete above 40 degrees F for the first seven days
after placing. During the period of protection removal, control the air
temperature adjacent to the concrete surfaces so that concrete near the
surface will not be subjected to a temperature differential of more than 25
degrees F as determined by suitable temperature measuring devices furnished
by the Contractor, as required, and installed adjacent to the concrete
surface and 2 inches inside the surface of the concrete. Perform the
installation of the thermometers as directed.
SECTION 03 31 00.00 10 Page 31

3.13 SETTING BASE PLATES AND BEARING PLATES
After being properly positioned, column base plates, bearing plates for
beams and similar structural members, and machinery and equipment base
plates shall be set to the proper line and elevation with damp-pack bedding
mortar, except where nonshrink grout is indicated. The thickness of the
mortar or grout shall be approximately 1/24 the width of the plate, but not
less than 3/4 inch. Concrete and metal surfaces in contact with grout
shall be clean and free of oil and grease, and concrete surfaces in contact
with grout shall be damp and free of laitance when grout is placed. Use
nonshrink grout for baseplates.
3.13.1 Damp-Pack Bedding Mortar
Damp-pack bedding mortar shall consist of 1 part cement and 2-1/2 parts
fine aggregate having water content such that a mass of mortar tightly
squeezed in the hand will retain its shape but will crumble when
disturbed. The space between the top of the concrete and bottom of the
bearing plate or base shall be packed with the bedding mortar by tamping or
ramming with a bar or rod until it is completely filled.
3.13.2 Nonshrink Grout
Nonshrink grout shall be a ready-mixed material requiring only the addition

of water. Water content shall be the minimum that will provide a flowable
mixture and completely fill the space to be grouted without segregation,
bleeding, or reduction of strength.
3.13.2.1 Mixing and Placing of Nonshrink Grout
Mixing and placing shall be in conformance with the material manufacturer's

instructions and as specified therein. Ingredients shall be thoroughly
dry-mixed before adding water. After adding water, mix the batch for 3
minutes. Batches shall be of size to allow continuous placement of freshly
mixed grout. Discard grout not used within 30 minutes after mixing. The
space between the top of the concrete or machinery-bearing surface and the
plate shall be filled solid with the grout. Forms shall be of wood or
other equally suitable material for completely retaining the grout on all
sides and on top and shall be removed after the grout has set. The placed
grout shall be carefully worked by rodding or other means to eliminate
voids; however, overworking and breakdown of the initial set shall be
avoided. Grout shall not be retempered or subjected to vibration from any
source. Where clearances are unusually small, placement shall be under
pressure with a grout pump. Temperature of the grout, and of surfaces
receiving the grout, shall be maintained at 65 to 85 degrees F until after
setting.
3.13.2.2 Treatment of Exposed Surfaces
For metal-oxidizing nonshrink grout, exposed surfaces shall be cut back 1

inch and immediately covered with a parge coat of mortar consisting of 1
part portland cement and 2-1/2 parts fine aggregate by weight, with
sufficient water to make a plastic mixture. The parge coat shall have a
smooth finish. For other mortars or grouts, exposed surfaces shall have a
smooth-dense finish and be left untreated. Curing shall comply with
paragraph CURING AND PROTECTION above.
SECTION 03 31 00.00 10 Page 32

3.14 TESTING AND INSPECTION FOR CQC
Perform the inspection and tests described below and, based upon the
results of these inspections and tests, take the action required. Submit
certified copies of laboratory test reports, including mill tests and all
other test data, for portland cement, blended cement, pozzolan, ground
granulated blast furnace slag, silica fume, aggregate, admixtures, and
curing compound proposed for use on this project.
a. When, in the opinion of the Contracting Officer, the concreting

operation is out of control, cease concrete placement and correct the
operation.
b. The laboratory performing the tests shall be onsite and shall conform
with ASTM C 1077. Materials may be subjected to check testing by the
Government from samples obtained at the manufacturer, at transfer
points, or at the project site.
c. The Government will inspect the laboratory, equipment, and test

procedures prior to start of concreting operations and at least once
per week thereafter for conformance with ASTM C 1077.
3.14.1 Grading and Corrective Action
3.14.1.1 Fine Aggregate
At least once during each shift when the concrete plant is operating, there
shall be one sieve analysis and fineness modulus determination in
accordance with ASTM C 136 and COE CRD-C 104 for the fine aggregate or for
each fine aggregate if it is batched in more than one size or
classification. The location at which samples are taken may be selected by
the Contractor as the most advantageous for control. However, the
Contractor is responsible for delivering fine aggregate to the mixer within
specification limits. When the amount passing on any sieve is outside the
specification limits, the fine aggregate shall be immediately resampled and
retested. If there is another failure on any sieve, the fact shall be
immediately reported to the Contracting Officer, concreting shall be
stopped, and immediate steps taken to correct the grading.
3.14.1.2 Coarse Aggregate
At least once during each shift in which the concrete plant is operating,
there shall be a sieve analysis in accordance with ASTM C 136 for each size
of coarse aggregate. The location at which samples are taken may be
selected by the Contractor as the most advantageous for production
control. However, the Contractor shall be responsible for delivering the
aggregate to the mixer within specification limits. A test record of
samples of aggregate taken at the same locations shall show the results of
the current test as well as the average results of the five most recent
tests including the current test. The Contractor may adopt limits for
control coarser than the specification limits for samples taken other than
as delivered to the mixer to allow for degradation during handling. When
the amount passing any sieve is outside the specification limits, the
coarse aggregate shall be immediately resampled and retested. If the
second sample fails on any sieve, that fact shall be reported to the
Contracting Officer. Where two consecutive averages of 5 tests are outside
specification limits, the operation shall be considered out of control and
reported to the Contracting Officer. Concreting shall be stopped and
immediate steps shall be taken to correct the grading.
SECTION 03 31 00.00 10 Page 33

3.14.2 Quality of Aggregates
Thirty days prior to the start of concrete placement, perform all tests for
aggregate quality required by ASTM C 33/C 33M. In addition, after the
start of concrete placement, perform tests for aggregate quality at least
every three months, and when the source of aggregate or aggregate quality
changes. Samples tested after the start of concrete placement shall be
taken immediately prior to entering the concrete mixer.
3.14.3 Scales, Batching and Recording
Check the accuracy of the scales by test weights prior to start of concrete
operations and at least once every three months. Such tests shall also be
made as directed whenever there are variations in properties of the fresh
concrete that could result from batching errors. Once a week the accuracy
of each batching and recording device shall be checked during a weighing
operation by noting and recording the required weight, recorded weight, and
the actual weight batched. At the same time, test and ensure that the
devices for dispensing admixtures are operating properly and accurately.
When either the weighing accuracy or batching accuracy does not comply with
specification requirements, the plant shall not be operated until necessary
adjustments or repairs have been made. Discrepancies in recording
accuracies shall be corrected immediately.
3.14.4 Batch-Plant Control
Continuously control the measurement of concrete materials, including

cementitious materials, each size of aggregate, water, and admixtures.
Adjust the aggregate weights and amount of added water as necessary to
compensate for free moisture in the aggregates. The amount of
air-entraining agent shall be adjusted to control air content within
specified limits. Prepare a report indicating type and source of cement
used, type and source of pozzolan or slag used, amount and source of
admixtures used, aggregate source, the required aggregate and water weights
per cubic yard amount of water as free moisture in each size of aggregate,
and the batch aggregate and water weights per cubic yard for each class of
concrete batched during each day's plant operation.
3.14.5 Concrete Mixture
a. Air Content Testing. Perform air content tests when test specimens are
fabricated. In addition, at least two tests for air content shall be
made on randomly selected batches of each separate concrete mixture
produced during each 8-hour period of concrete production. Perform
additional tests when excessive variation in workability is reported by
the placing foreman or Government inspector. Tests shall be made in
accordance with ASTM C 231 for normal weight concrete. Plot test
results on control charts which shall at all times be readily available
to the Government and submitted weekly. Keep copies of the current
control charts in the field by testing crews and results plotted as
tests are made. When a single test result reaches either the upper or
lower action limit, perform a second test immediately. The results of
the two tests shall be averaged and this average used as the air
content of the batch to plot on both the air content and the control
chart for range, and for determining need for any remedial action. The
result of each test, or average as noted in the previous sentence,
shall be plotted on a separate control chart for each mixture on which
an "average line" is set at the midpoint of the specified air content
SECTION 03 31 00.00 10 Page 34

range from paragraph Air Entrainment in PART 1. Set an upper warning

limit and a lower warning limit line 1.0 percentage point above and
below the average line, respectively. An upper action limit and a
lower action limit line shall be set 1.5 percentage points above and
below the average line, respectively. The range between each two
consecutive tests shall be plotted on a secondary control chart for
range where an upper warning limit is set at 2.0 percentage points and
an upper action limit is set at 3.0 percentage points. Samples for air
content may be taken at the mixer, however, the Contractor is
responsible for delivering the concrete to the placement site at the
stipulated air content. If the Contractor's materials or
transportation methods cause air content loss between the mixer and the
placement, correlation samples shall be taken at the placement site as
required by the Contracting Officer, and the air content at the mixer
controlled as directed.
b. Air Content Corrective Action. Whenever points on the control chart

for percent air reach either warning limit, an adjustment shall
immediately be made in the amount of air-entraining admixture batched.
As soon as practical after each adjustment, another test shall be made
to verify the result of the adjustment. Whenever a point on the
secondary control chart for range reaches the warning limit, the
admixture dispenser shall be recalibrated to ensure that it is
operating accurately and with good reproducibility. Whenever a point
on either control chart reaches an action limit line, the air content
shall be considered out of control and the concreting operation shall
immediately be halted until the air content is under control.
Additional air content tests shall be made when concreting is restarted.
c. Slump Testing. In addition to slump tests which are made when test
specimens are fabricated, at least four slump tests shall be made on
randomly selected batches in accordance with ASTM C 143/C 143M for each
separate concrete mixture produced during each 8-hour or less period of
concrete production each day. Also, additional tests shall be made
when excessive variation in workability is reported by the placing
foreman or Government inspector. Plot test results on control charts
which shall at all times be readily available to the Government and
submitted weekly. Keep copies of the current control charts in the
field by testing crews and results plotted as tests are made. When a
single slump test reaches or goes beyond either the upper or lower
action limit, immediately perform a second test. The results of the
two tests shall be averaged and this average used as the slump of the
batch to plot on both the control charts for slump and the chart for
range, and for determining need for any remedial action. Set limits on
separate control charts for slump for each type of mixture. The upper
warning limit shall be set at 1/2 inch below the maximum allowable
slump specified in paragraph Slump in PART 1 for each type of concrete
and an upper action limit line and lower action limit line shall be set
at the maximum and minimum allowable slumps, respectively, as specified
in the same paragraph. The range between each consecutive slump test
for each type of mixture shall be plotted on a single control chart for
range on which an upper action limit is set at 2 inches. Take samples
for slump at the mixer. However, the Contractor is responsible for
delivering the concrete to the placement site at the stipulated slump.
If the Contractor's materials or transportation methods cause slump
loss between the mixer and the placement, take correlation samples at
the placement site as required by the Contracting Officer, and the
slump at the mixer controlled as directed.
SECTION 03 31 00.00 10 Page 35

d. Slump Corrective Action. Whenever points on the control charts for

slump reach the upper warning limit, make an adjustment immediately in
the batch weights of water and fine aggregate. The adjustments are to
be made so that the total water content does not exceed that amount
allowed by the maximum w/c ratio specified, based on aggregates which
are in a saturated surface dry condition. When a single slump reaches
the upper or lower action limit, no further concrete shall be delivered
to the placing site until proper adjustments have been made.
Immediately after each adjustment, another test shall be made to verify
the correctness of the adjustment. Whenever two consecutive individual
slump tests, made during a period when there was no adjustment of batch
weights, produce a point on the control chart for range at or above the
upper action limit, halt the concreting operation immediately, and take
appropriate steps to bring the slump under control. Additional slump
tests shall be made as directed.
e. Temperature. Measure the temperature of the concrete when compressive

strength specimens are fabricated in accordance with ASTM C 1064/C 1064M.
Report the temperature along with the compressive strength data.
f. Strength Specimens. Perform at least one set of test specimens, for

compressive or flexural strength as appropriate, on each different
concrete mixture placed during the day for each 500 cubic yards or
portion thereof of that concrete mixture placed each day. Perform
additional sets of test specimens, as directed by the Contracting
Officer, when the mixture proportions are changed or when low strengths
have been detected. Develop a truly random (not haphazard) sampling
plan for approval by the Contracting Officer prior to the start of
construction. The plan shall ensure that sampling is done in a
completely random and unbiased manner. A set of test specimens for
concrete with a 28-day specified strength in accordance with paragraph
Strength Requirements in PART 1 shall consist of four specimens, two to
be tested at 7 days and two at 28 days. Test specimens shall be
molded and cured in accordance with ASTM C 31/C 31M and tested in
accordance with ASTM C 39/C 39M for test cylinders and ASTM C 78 for
test beams. Results of all strength tests shall be reported
immediately to the Contracting Officer. Quality control charts shall
be kept for individual strength "tests", ("test" as defined in
paragraph Strength Requirements in PART 1) moving average of last 3
"tests" for strength, and moving average for range for the last 3
"tests" for each mixture. The charts shall be similar to those found
in ACI 214R.
3.14.6 Inspection Before Placing
Inspect foundations, construction joints, forms, and embedded items in

sufficient time prior to each concrete placement in order to certify to the
Contracting Officer that they are ready to receive concrete. Report the
results of each inspection in writing.
3.14.7 Placing
The placing foreman shall supervise placing operations, shall determine

that the correct quality of concrete or grout is placed in each location as
specified and as directed by the Contracting Officer, and shall be
responsible for measuring and recording concrete temperatures and ambient
temperature hourly during placing operations, weather conditions, time of
placement, volume placed, and method of placement. The placing foreman
shall not permit batching and placing to begin until it has been verified
SECTION 03 31 00.00 10 Page 36

that an adequate number of vibrators in working order and with competent

operators are available. Placing shall not be continued if any pile of
concrete is inadequately consolidated. If any batch of concrete fails to
meet the temperature requirements, immediate steps shall be taken to
improve temperature controls.
3.14.8 Vibrators
Determine the frequency and amplitude of each vibrator in accordance with

COE CRD-C 521 prior to initial use and at least once a month when concrete
is being placed. Perform additional tests as directed when a vibrator does
not appear to be adequately consolidating the concrete. The frequency
shall be determined while the vibrator is operating in concrete with the
tachometer being held against the upper end of the vibrator head while
almost submerged and just before the vibrator is withdrawn from the
concrete. Determine the amplitude with the head vibrating in air. Take
two measurements, one near the tip and another near the upper end of the
vibrator head, and these results averaged. Report the make, model, type,
and size of the vibrator and frequency and amplitude results in writing.
Any vibrator not meeting the requirements of paragraph Consolidation above,
shall be immediately removed from service and repaired or replaced.
3.14.9 Curing Inspection
a. Moist Curing Inspections. At least once each shift, and not less than
twice per day on both work and non-work days, an inspection shall be
made of all areas subject to moist curing. The surface moisture
condition shall be noted and recorded.
b. Moist Curing Corrective Action. When a daily inspection report lists

an area of inadequate curing, immediate corrective action shall be
taken, and the required curing period for those areas shall be extended
by 1 day.
c. Membrane Curing Inspection. No curing compound shall be applied until

the Contractor has verified that the compound is properly mixed and
ready for spraying. At the end of each operation, estimate the
quantity of compound used by measurement of the container and the area
of concrete surface covered, compute the rate of coverage in square
feet/gallon, and note whether or not coverage is uniform.
d. Membrane Curing Corrective Action. When the coverage rate of the

curing compound is less than that specified or when the coverage is not
uniform, the entire surface shall be sprayed again.
e. Sheet Curing Inspection. At least once each shift and once per day on
non-work days, an inspection shall be made of all areas being cured
using impervious sheets. The condition of the covering and the
tightness of the laps and tapes shall be noted and recorded.
f. Sheet Curing Corrective Action. When a daily inspection report lists

any tears, holes, or laps or joints that are not completely closed, the
tears and holes shall promptly be repaired or the sheets replaced, the
joints closed, and the required curing period for those areas shall be
extended by 1 day.
3.14.10 Cold-Weather Protection
At least once each shift and once per day on non-work days, an inspection
SECTION 03 31 00.00 10 Page 37

shall be made of all areas subject to cold-weather protection. Any

deficiencies shall be noted, corrected, and reported.
3.14.11 Mixer Uniformity
a. Stationary Mixers. Prior to the start of concrete placing and once

every 6 months when concrete is being placed, or once for every 75,000
cubic yards of concrete placed, whichever results in the shortest time
interval, uniformity of concrete mixing shall be determined in
b. Truck Mixers. Prior to the start of concrete placing and at least once
every 6 months when concrete is being placed, uniformity of concrete
mixing shall be determined in accordance with ASTM C 94/C 94M. Select
the truck mixers randomly for testing. When satisfactory performance
is found in one truck mixer, the performance of mixers of substantially
the same design and condition of the blades may be regarded as
satisfactory.
c. Mixer Uniformity Corrective Action. When a mixer fails to meet mixer

uniformity requirements, either the mixing time shall be increased,
batching sequence changed, batch size reduced, or adjustments shall be
made to the mixer until compliance is achieved.
3.14.12 Reports
Report all results of tests or inspections conducted, informally as they

are completed and in writing daily. Prepare a weekly report for the
updating of control charts covering the entire period from the start of the
construction season through the current week. During periods of
cold-weather protection, reports of pertinent temperatures shall be made
daily. These requirements do not relieve the Contractor of the obligation
to report certain failures immediately as required in preceding
paragraphs. Such reports of failures and the action taken shall be
confirmed in writing in the routine reports. The Contracting Officer has
the right to examine all contractor quality control records.
SECTION 03 31 00.00 10 Page 38

SECTION 04 20 00
MASONRY
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES


Commentary
ACI 530/530.1 (2008; Errata 2008; Errata 2009) Building

Code Requirements and Specification for
Masonry Structures and Related Commentaries
ACI SP-66 (2004) ACI Detailing Manual
ASTM A 153/A 153M (2009) Standard Specification for Zinc

Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel
Hardware
ASTM A 167 (1999; R 2009) Standard Specification for

Stainless and Heat-Resisting
Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and
Strip

ASTM A 641/A 641M (2009a) Standard Specification for

Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire

ASTM B 370 (2009) Standard Specification for Copper

Sheet and Strip for Building Construction
ASTM C 1019 (2009) Standard Test Method for Sampling

and Testing Grout
ASTM C 1072 (2010) Standard Test Method for

Measurement of Masonry Flexural Bond
Strength
ASTM C 1142 (1995; R 2007) Standard Specification for
Extended Life Mortar for Unit Masonry

Nonloadbearing Concrete Masonry Units
ASTM C 140 (2010) Standard Test Methods for Sampling

and Testing Concrete Masonry Units and
Related Units

Aggregate for Masonry Mortar

Cement
ASTM C 207 (2006) Standard Specification for Hydrated

Lime for Masonry Purposes
ASTM C 216 (2010) Facing Brick (Solid Masonry Units

Made from Clay or Shale)
ASTM C 27 (1998; R 2008) Fireclay and High-Alumina

Refractory Brick
ASTM C 270 (2010) Standard Specification for Mortar

for Unit Masonry
ASTM C 315 (2007) Clay Flue Linings
ASTM C 476 (2010) Standard Specification for Grout

for Masonry

ASTM C 55 (2009) Concrete Brick
ASTM C 593 (2006) Fly Ash and Other Pozzolans for Use
with Lime for Soil Stabilization
ASTM C 62 (2010) Building Brick (Solid Masonry Units

ASTM C 641 (2009) Staining Materials in Lightweight

Concrete Aggregates
ASTM C 652 (2010) Hollow Brick (Hollow Masonry Units


and Testing Brick and Structural Clay Tile
ASTM C 73 (2005) Calcium Silicate Brick (Sand-Lime

Brick)
ASTM C 780 (2009) Preconstruction and Construction

Evaluation of Mortars for Plain and
Reinforced Unit Masonry
ASTM C 90 (2009) Loadbearing Concrete Masonry Units
ASTM C 91 (2005) Masonry Cement

ASTM C 989 (2009a) Standard Specification for Slag

Cement for Use in Concrete and Mortars
ASTM D 1972 (1997; R 2005) Standard Practice for

Generic Marking of Plastic Products
ASTM D 2000 (2008) Standard Classification System for

Rubber Products in Automotive Applications
ASTM D 2240 (2005; R 2010) Standard Test Method for

Rubber Property - Durometer Hardness
ASTM D 2287 (1996; R 2010) Nonrigid Vinyl Chloride

Polymer and Copolymer Molding and
Extrusion Compounds
ASTM E 119 (2010b) Standard Test Methods for Fire

Tests of Building Construction and
Materials
ASTM E 514/E 514M (2009) Standard Test Method for Water

Penetration and Leakage Through Masonry
ICC IBC (2009) International Building Code

(LEED-NC)
1.2.1 Local/Regional Materials
Submit documentation indicating distance between manufacturing facility

and the project site, and distance of raw material origin from the project
site. Indicate relative dollar value of local/regional materials to total
dollar value of products included in the project.
1.2.2 Environmental Data
Submit manufacturer's descriptive data. Documentation indicating

percentage of post-industrial and post-consumer recycled content per unit
of product. Indicate relative dollar value of recycled content products to
total dollar value of products included in project.
1.2.3 Plastic Identification
Verify that plastic products to be incorporated into the project are

labeled in accordance with ASTM D 1972. Where products are not labeled,
submit product data indicating polymeric information in the Operation and
Maintenance Manual.
a. Type 1: Polyethylene Terephthalate (PET, PETE).
b. Type 2: High Density Polyethylene (HDPE).
c. Type 3: Vinyl (Polyvinyl Chloride or PVC).
d. Type 4: Low Density Polyethylene (LDPE).
e. Type 5: Polypropylene (PP).
f. Type 6: Polystyrene (PS).
g. Type 7: Other. Use of this code indicates that the package in question
is made with a resin other than the six listed above, or is made of
more than one resin listed above, and used in a multi-layer combination.
1.2.4 Design Requirements
1.2.4.1 Unit Strength Method
Compute compressive strength of masonry system "Unit Strength Method",

ACI 530/530.1. Submit calculations and certifications of unit and mortar
strength.
1.2.4.2 Seismic Requirement
In addition to design requirements of ICC IBC, provide additional seismic

reinforcement . The total minimum reinforcing percentage for structural
walls shall be 0.20 percent and non-structural walls shall be 0.15
percent. The maximum spacing of reinforcing bars shall be as follows:
Wall Type Vertical Horizontal
Structural 24 inches 48 inches
Non-structural 48 inches 80 inches
Bond beams are required at the top of footings, at the bottom and top of
openings at roof and floor levels, and at the top of parapet walls.
1.2.4.3 Masonry Strength
Determine masonry strength in accordance with ACI 530/530.1; submit test

reports on three prisms as specified in ACI 530/530.1. The cost of testing
shall be paid by the Contractor.
1.2.5 Additional Requirements
a. Maintain at least one spare vibrator on site at all times.
b. Provide bracing and scaffolding necessary for masonry work. Design
bracing to resist wind pressure as required by local code.
1.2.6 Metrication
1.3 SUBMITTALS

submittals not having a "G" designation are for Submit the following in
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Detail Drawings; G,
SD-03 Product Data
Environmental Data
Clay or Shale Brick; G, ; (LEED)
Cement; G, ; (LEED)
Insulation; G,
Cold Weather Installation; G,
Salvaged Brick; G, ; (LEED)
Water-Repellant Admixture; G,
SD-04 Samples
Concrete Masonry Units (CMU); G,

Concrete Brick; G,
Stone Items; G,
Clay or Shale Brick; G,
Anchors, Ties, and Bar Positioners; G,
Expansion-Joint Materials; G,
Joint Reinforcement; G,
Insulation; G,
Portable Panel; G,
SD-05 Design Data
Pre-mixed Mortar; G,
Unit Strength Method; G,
SD-06 Test Reports
Efflorescence Test; G,
Field Testing of Mortar; G,
Field Testing of Grout; G,
Prism tests; G,
Masonry Cement; G,
Fire-rated CMU; G,
Masonry Inspector Qualifications; G,
Single-Wythe Masonry Wall Water Penetration Test
SD-07 Certificates
Clay or Shale Brick

Concrete Brick
Concrete Masonry Units (CMU)
Anchors, Ties, and Bar Positioners

Expansion-Joint Materials
Joint Reinforcement
Masonry Cement
Insulation
Precast Concrete Items
Admixtures for Masonry Mortar
Admixtures for Grout
Insulation
Contamination
Masonry Cement
Take-Back Program
1.4.1 Appearance
Blend all brick to produce a uniform appearance when installed. An

observable "banding" or "layering" of colors or textures caused by
improperly mixed brick is unacceptable.
1.4.2 Contamination
When using bricks containing contaminated soil, supplier shall certify that
the hazardous waste is neutralized by the manufacturing process and that no
additional pollutants will be released, or that the product is free from
hazardous contaminants.
1.4.3 Sample Masonry Panels
After material samples are approved and prior to starting masonry work,
construct a portable panel of clay or shale brick and sample masonry panels
for each type and color of masonry required. At least 48 hours prior to
constructing the sample panel or panels, submit written notification to the
Contracting Officer. Submit one panel of clay or shale brick, 2 by 2 feet,
containing approximately 24 brick facings to establish range of color and
texture. Sample panels shall not be built in, or as part of the structure,
but shall be located where directed.
1.4.3.1 Configuration
Panels shall be L-shaped or otherwise configured to represent all of the

wall elements. Panels shall be of the size necessary to demonstrate the
acceptable level of workmanship for each type of masonry represented on the
project. The minimum size of a straight panel or a leg of an L-shaped
panel shall be 8 feet long by 6 feet high.
1.4.3.2 Composition
Panels shall show full color range, texture, and bond pattern of the
masonry work. The Contractor's method for mortar joint tooling; grouting
of reinforced vertical cores, collar joints, bond beams, and lintels;
positioning, securing, and lapping of reinforcing steel; positioning and

lapping of joint reinforcement (including prefabricated corners); and
cleaning of masonry work shall be demonstrated during the construction of
the panels. Installation or application procedures for anchors, wall
ties, CMU control joints, brick expansion joints, insulation, flashing,
brick soldier, row lock courses and weep holes shall be shown in the sample
panels. The panels shall contain a stacked bond corner that includes a
bond beam corner. Panels shall show parging . Panels that represent
reinforced masonry shall contain a 2 by 2 foot opening placed at least 2
feet above the panel base and 2 feet away from all free edges, corners, and
control joints. Required reinforcing shall be provided around this opening
as well as at wall corners and control joints.
1.4.3.3 Construction Method
Where anchored veneer walls are required, demonstrate and receive approval
for the method of construction; i.e., either bring up the two wythes
together or separately, with the insulation and appropriate ties placed
within the specified tolerances across the cavity. Temporary provisions
shall be demonstrated to preclude mortar or grout droppings in the cavity
and to provide a clear open air space of the dimensions shown on the
drawings. Where masonry is to be grouted, demonstrate and receive approval
on the method that will be used to bring up the masonry wythes; support the
reinforcing bars; and grout cells, bond beams, lintels, and collar joints
using the requirements specified herein. If sealer is specified to be
applied to the masonry units, sealer shall be applied to the sample
panels. Panels shall be built on a properly designed concrete foundation.
1.4.3.4 Usage
The completed panels shall be used as the standard of workmanship for the
type of masonry represented. Masonry work shall not commence until the
sample panel for that type of masonry construction has been completed and
approved. Panels shall be protected from the weather and construction
operations until the masonry work has been completed and approved. After
completion of the work, the sample panels, including all foundation
concrete, shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be removed
from the construction site.
1.4.4 Masonry Inspector Qualifications
A qualified masonry inspector approved by the Contracting Officer shall

perform inspection of the masonry work. Minimum qualifications for the
masonry inspector shall be 5 years of reinforced masonry inspection
experience or acceptance by a State, municipality, or other governmental
body having a program of examining and certifying inspectors for reinforced
masonry construction. The masonry inspector shall be present during
preparation of masonry prisms, sampling and placing of masonry units,
placement of reinforcement (including placement of dowels in footings and
foundation walls), inspection of grout space, immediately prior to closing
of cleanouts, and during grouting operations. The masonry inspector shall
assure compliance with the drawings and specifications. The masonry
inspector shall keep a complete record of all inspections and shall submit
daily written reports to the Quality Control Supervisory Representative
reporting the quality of masonry construction. Submit copies of masonry
inspector reports.
1.4.5 Detail Drawings
Submit detail drawings showing bar splice locations. . Bent bars shall be
identified on a bending diagram and shall be referenced and located on the
drawings. Wall dimensions, bar clearances, and wall openings greater than
one masonry unit in area shall be shown. No approval will be given to the
shop drawings until the Contractor certifies that all openings, including
those for mechanical and electrical service, are shown. If, during
construction, additional masonry openings are required, the approved shop
drawings shall be resubmitted with the additional openings shown along with
the proposed changes. Location of these additional openings shall be
clearly highlighted. The minimum scale for wall elevations shall be 1/4
inch per foot. Reinforcement bending details shall conform to the
requirements of ACI SP-66. Submit drawings including plans, elevations,
and details of wall reinforcement; details of reinforcing bars at corners
and wall intersections; offsets; tops, bottoms, and ends of walls; control
and expansion joints; lintels; and wall openings.
Materials shall be delivered, stored, handled, and protected to avoid

chipping, breakage, and contact with soil or contaminating material. Store
and prepare materials in already disturbed areas to minimize project site
disturbance and size of project site.
1.5.1 Masonry Units
Cover and protect moisture-controlled concrete masonry units and

cementitious materials from precipitation. Conform to all handling and
storage requirements of ASTM C 90. Mark prefabricated lintels on top sides
to show either the lintel schedule number or the number and size of top and
bottom bars.
1.5.2 Reinforcement, Anchors, and Ties
Steel reinforcing bars, coated anchors, ties, and joint reinforcement shall
be stored above the ground. Steel reinforcing bars and uncoated ties shall
be free of loose mill scale and rust.
1.5.3 Cementitious Materials, Sand and Aggregates
Cementitious and other packaged materials shall be delivered in unopened

containers, plainly marked and labeled with manufacturers' names and
brands. Cementitious material shall be stored in dry, weathertight
enclosures or be completely covered. Cement shall be handled in a manner
that will prevent the inclusion of foreign materials and damage by water or
dampness. Store sand and aggregates in a manner to prevent contamination
or segregation.
Conform to ACI 530/530.1 for hot and cold weather masonry erection.
1.6.1 Hot Weather Installation
Take the following precautions if masonry is erected when the ambient air
temperature is more than 99 degrees F in the shade and the relative
humidity is less than 50 percent or the ambient air temperature exceeds 90
degrees F and the wind velocity is more than 8 mph. All masonry materials
shall be shaded from direct sunlight; mortar beds shall be spread no more
than 4 feet ahead of masonry; masonry units shall be set within one minute
of spreading mortar; and after erection, masonry shall be protected from
direct exposure to wind and sun for 48 hours.
1.6.2 Cold Weather Installation
Before erecting masonry when ambient temperature or mean daily air

temperature falls below 40 degrees F or temperature of masonry units is
below 40 degrees F, submit a written statement of proposed cold weather
construction procedures for approval. Take the additional following
precautions if masonry is erected in cold weather:
PART 2 PRODUCTS
The source of materials which will affect the appearance of the finished
work shall not be changed after the work has started except with
Contracting Officer's approval. Submit sample of colored mortar with
applicable masonry unit and color samples of three stretcher units and one
unit for each type of special shape. Units shall show the full range of
color and texture. Submit test reports from an approved independent
laboratory. Test reports on a previously tested material shall be
certified as the same as that proposed for use in this project. Submit
certificates of compliance stating that the materials meet the specified
requirements.
2.2 CLAY OR SHALE BRICK
Submit brick samples as specified. Color range and texture of clay or

shale brick shall be as indicated and shall conform to the approved
sample. Brick shall conform to ASTM C 62; Grade SW shall be used for brick
in contact with earth or grade and for the first six exterior courses above
grade and for all nonvertical surfaces. Grade SW or MW shall be used in
other brickwork. Average dimensions of brick shall be 3-5/8 inches thick,
2-1/4 inches high, and 8 inches long (standard) or 4 inches thick, 2-2/3
inches high, and 8 inches long (nominal), subject to the tolerances
specified in ASTM C 62. Brick shall be tested for efflorescence. Clay or
shale brick units shall be delivered factory-blended to provide a uniform
appearance and color range in the completed wall. Clay units shall contain
a minimum of 10 percent post-consumer recycled content, or a minimum of 40
percent post-industrial recycled content.
2.2.1 Solid Clay or Shale Brick
Solid clay or shale brick shall conform to ASTM C 62 . Brick size shall be
modular and the nominal size of the brick used shall be 3-5/8 inches thick,
2-1/4 inches high, and 8 inches long (nominal) or 4 inches thick, 2-2/3
inches high and 8 inches long (nominal). Minimum compressive strength of
the brick shall be psi.
2.2.2 Hollow Clay or Shale Brick
Hollow clay or shale brick shall conform to ASTM C 652, Type HBX HBA HBB.
Brick size shall be modular and the nominal size of the brick used shall be
4 inches thick, 2 1/4 inches high, and inches long. Where vertical
reinforcement is shown in hollow brick, the minimum cell dimension shall be
2-1/2 inches and the units shall be designed to provide precise vertical
alignment of the cells. Minimum compressive strength of the brick shall be

2500 psi.
2.2.3 Sand-Lime Brick
ASTM C 73, Grade SW, approximately 3 5/8 inches thick, 2 1/4 inches high,
and 8 inches long (nominal) or nominal modular, with smooth surfaces and
natural color.
2.2.4 Refractory Brick
ASTM C 27, low-duty type, inches thick, inches high, and inches long.
2.2.5 Closure or Utility Brick
ASTM C 216, Grade SW, Type FBS, nominally 4 inches thick, 4 inches high,
and 12 inches long (utility). or Utility brick may be used at the option
of the Contractor, provided that changes necessitated by the use of such
brick shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. Color, texture, and
range of brick shall match the brick .
2.2.6 Adobe Brick
inches thick, inches high, and inches long.
2.2.6.1 Traditional Adobe
Protect traditional adobe from water penetration by the application of

adobe mud plaster, lime plaster, cement- or lime-cement stucco and wide
roof overhangs.
2.2.6.2 Semi-Stabilized Adobe
Semi-stabilized adobe shall contain 3 percent asphalt emulsion or portland

cement by weight, or as prescribed by local soil conditions and codes.
Protect from water penetration by the application of adobe mud plaster,
lime plaster, cement- or lime-cement stucco and wide eaves.
2.2.6.3 Fully Stabilized Adobe
Fully stabilized adobe shall contain 5 percent asphalt emulsion or portland

cement by weight, or as prescribed by local soil conditions and codes.
2.3 CONCRETE BRICK
Concrete brick shall conform to ASTM C 55, Grade . Concrete brick may be
used where necessary for filling out in concrete masonry unit
construction. Submit samples as specified.
2.4 SALVAGED BRICK
Use salvaged bricks and other masonry units in place of new bricks or
masonry units as indicated. When using salvaged brick, select exterior
face bricks from salvaged exterior face bricks. Bricks shall meet
standards of new bricks otherwise used in application, and shall be cleaned
of all mortar prior to use. Place exterior face towards the exterior.
Submit documentation certifying products are from salvaged/recovered
sources. Indicate relative dollar value of salvaged content products to
total dollar value of products included in project.
2.5 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS (CMU)
Submit samples and certificates as specified. Cement shall have a low

alkali content and be of one brand. Units shall contain a minimum of 10
percent post-consumer recycled content, or a minimum of 40 percent
post-industrial recycled content. Units shall be of modular dimensions and
air, water, or steam cured. ;.
a. Hollow Load-Bearing Units: ASTM C 90, made with lightweight or normal

weight aggregate. Provide load-bearing units for exterior walls,
foundation walls, load-bearing walls, and shear walls.
b. Hollow Non-Load-Bearing Units: ASTM C 129, made with lightweight or

normal weight aggregate. Load-bearing units may be provided in lieu of
non-load-bearing units.
c. Solid Load-Bearing Units: ASTM C 90, lightweight or normal weight

units. Provide solid units as indicated.
2.5.1 Aggregates
Lightweight aggregates and blends of lightweight and heavier aggregates in

proportions used in producing the units, shall comply with the following
requirements when tested for stain-producing iron compounds in accordance
with ASTM C 641: by visual classification method, the iron stain deposited
on the filter paper shall not exceed the "light stain" classification.
Use industrial waste by-products (air-cooled slag, cinders, or bottom ash),
ground waste glass and concrete, granulated slag, and expanded slag in
aggregates. Slag shall comply with ASTM C 989; Grade 100 120.
2.5.2 Kinds and Shapes
Units shall be modular in size and shall include closer, jamb, header,
lintel, and bond beam units and special shapes and sizes to complete the
work as indicated. In exposed interior masonry surfaces, units having a
bullnose shall be used for vertical external corners except at door,
window, and louver jambs. Radius of the bullnose shall be 1 inch. Units
used in exposed masonry surfaces in any one building shall have a uniform
fine to medium texture and a uniform color.
2.5.2.1 Architectural Units
Units shall have patterned face shell. Face shell pattern shall be fluted
vertical scored . Units shall be integrally colored during manufacture.
Color shall be . Patterned face shell shall be properly aligned in the
completed wall.
2.5.2.2 Patterned, Decorative Screen Units
Patterned, decorative screen units shall conform to the applicable

requirements of ASTM C 129. Units shall have uniform through-the-wall
pattern, color, and texture.
2.5.3 Fire-Rated CMU
Concrete masonry units used in fire-rated construction shown on the

drawings shall be of minimum equivalent thickness for the fire rating
indicated and the corresponding type of aggregates indicated in TABLE I.
Units containing more than one of the aggregates listed in TABLE I will be
rated on the aggregate requiring the greater minimum equivalent thickness
to produce the required fire rating. Construction shall conform to
ASTM E 119.
TABLE I
FIRE-RATED CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
See note (a) below
Minimum equivalent thickness

inches for fire rating of:
Aggregate Type 4 hours 3 hours 2 hours

______________ _______ _______ _______
Pumice 4.7 4.0 3.0
Expanded slag 5.0 4.2 3.3
Expanded clay, shale, 5.7 4.8 3.7

or slate
CMU, scoria, cinders 5.9 5.0 4.0

or unexpanded slag
Calcareous gravel 6.2 5.3 4.2
Siliceous gravel 6.7 5.7 4.5
Minimum equivalent thickness shall equal net volume as determined in

conformance with ASTM C 140 divided by the product of the actual length and
height of the face shell of the unit in inches. Where walls are to receive
plaster or be faced with brick, or otherwise form an assembly; the
thickness of plaster or brick or other material in the assembly will be
included in determining the equivalent thickness. Submit calculation
results.
2.6 COMPRESSED EARTH BLOCK
Earth may be stabilized by adding 2 to 5 percent portland cement by weight

for semi-stabilized block, and 5 to 10 percent for fully stabilized block;
use of other stabilizing admixtures, and their proportions, shall be
prescribed by local soil conditions and codes. inches thick, inches
high, and inches long, 38 to 40 pounds, using an average of 1,100 psi for
unstabilized and 3,000 psi for stabilized.
2.7 PRECAST CONCRETE ITEMS
Trim, lintels, copings, splashblocks and door sills shall be factory-made

units from a plant regularly engaged in producing precast concrete units.
Unless otherwise indicated, concrete shall be 3000 psi minimum conforming
to Section 03 31 00.00 10 CAST-IN-PLACE STRUCTURAL CONCRETE using 1/2 inch
to No. 4 nominal-size coarse aggregate, and minimum reinforcement shall be
the reinforcement required for handling of the units. Clearance of 3/4 inch
shall be maintained between reinforcement and faces of units. Unless
precast-concrete items have been subjected during manufacture to
saturated-steam pressure of at least 120 psi for at least 5 hours, the
items, after casting, shall be either damp-cured for 24 hours or

steam-cured and shall then be aged under cover for 28 days or longer.
Cast-concrete members weighing over 80 pounds shall have built-in loops of
galvanized wire or other approved provisions for lifting and anchoring.
Units shall have beds and joints at right angles to the face, with sharp
true arises and shall be cast with drip grooves on the underside where
units overhang walls. Exposed-to-view surfaces shall be free of surface
voids, spalls, cracks, and chipped or broken edges. Precast units
exposed-to-view shall be of uniform appearance and color. Unless otherwise
specified, units shall have a smooth dense finish. Prior to use, each item
shall be wetted and inspected for crazing. Items showing evidence of
dusting, spalling, crazing, or having surfaces treated with a protective
coating will be rejected. Submit specified factory certificates.
2.7.1 Lintels
Precast lintels, unless otherwise shown, shall be of a thickness equal to

the wall and reinforced with two No. 4 bars for the full length. Top of
lintels shall be labeled "TOP" or otherwise identified and each lintel
shall be clearly marked to show location in the structure. In reinforced
masonry, lintels shall conform to ACI 318 for flexural and shear strength
and shall have at least 8 inches bearing at each end. Concrete shall have
a minimum 28 day compressive strength of psi using 1/2 inch to No. 4
nominal-size coarse aggregate. Reinforcement shall conform to
ASTM A 615/A 615M Grade 60,000 psi. Limit lintel deflection due to dead
plus live load to L/600 or 0.3 inches. Provide top and bottom bars for
lintels over 36 inches in length.
2.7.2 Sills and Copings
Sills and copings shall be cast with washes. Sills for windows having
mullions shall be cast in sections with head joints at mullions and a 1/4
inch allowance for mortar joints. The ends of sills, except a 3/4 inch
wide margin at exposed surfaces, shall be roughened for bond. Treads of
door sills shall have rounded nosings.
2.7.3 Splash Blocks
Splash blocks shall be as detailed. Reinforcement shall be the

manufacturer's standard.
2.7.4 Flue Linings and Thimbles
ASTM C 315, free from fractures. Sizes and shapes shall be as indicated.
2.8 STONE ITEMS
Submit samples as specified. Stone for trim, sills, lintels, and copings
shall be granite, and shall be cut to the design shown. Granite shall
be a good commercial grade building granite of medium or moderately coarse
grain, and a light or medium gray or light pink color, with a smooth
machine finish on washes, 4-cut finish on treads, and 6-cut or equivalent
machine finish on other exposed surfaces. CMU shall be standard buff CMU
with a smooth machine finish free from tool marks. Lintels, except when
supported by a steel member, shall be 4 inches or more thick from face to
back edge and of the depth required to support the masonry over the
opening. Stone shall have beds and joints at right angles to the face,
with sharp, true arises. Copings and sills shall be provided with washes,
and where overhanging the walls, shall have drips cut on the underside.
2.9 MORTAR FOR STRUCTURAL MASONRY
ASTM C 270, Type N S. Strength (f'm) as indicated. Test in accordance

with ASTM C 780. Use Type IP I(PM) blended hydraulic cement. Use Masonry
cement. Do not use admixtures containing chlorides. When structural
reinforcement is incorporated, maximum air-content shall be 12 percent in
cement-lime mortar and 18 percent in masonry cement mortar. Use up to 40
percent Class F fly ash with type IP cement in cement-lime mortar. Fly ash
shall comply with ASTM C 593.
2.10 MASONRY MORTAR
Type M mortar shall conform to ASTM C 270 and shall be used for foundation
walls . Mortar Type shall conform to the proportion specification of
ASTM C 270 except Type S cement-lime mortar proportions shall be 1 part
cement, 1/2 part lime and 4-1/2 parts aggregate; Type N cement-lime mortar
proportions shall be 1 part cement, 1 part lime and 6 parts aggregate.
Type N or S mortar shall be used for non-load-bearing, non-shear-wall
interior masonry; and Type S for remaining masonry work; except where
higher compressive strength is indicated on structural drawings. When
masonry cement ASTM C 91 is used the maximum air content shall be limited
to 12 percent and performance equal to cement-lime mortar shall be
verified. Verification of masonry cement performance shall be based on
ASTM C 780 and ASTM C 1072. Pointing mortar in showers and kitchens shall
contain ammonium stearate, or aluminum tri-stearate, or calcium stearate in
an amount equal to 3 percent by weight of cement used. Cement shall have a
low alkali content and be of one brand. Aggregates shall be from one
source.
2.10.1 Admixtures for Masonry Mortar
In cold weather, a non-chloride based accelerating admixture may be used

subject to approval. Accelerating admixture shall be non-corrosive, shall
contain less than 0.2 percent chlorides, and shall conform to
ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type C. Submit the required certifications.
2.10.2 Colored Mortar
Mortar coloring shall be added to the mortar used for exposed masonry
surfaces to produce a uniform color matching . Quantity of pigment to
cementitious content of the masonry cement shall not exceed by weight;
carbon black shall not exceed percent by weight. Quantity of pigment to
cementitious content of cement-lime mix shall not exceed percent by weight,
carbon black no more than percent by weight. Mortar coloring shall be
chemically inert, of finely ground limeproof pigment, and furnished in
accurately pre-measured and packaged units that can be added to a measured
amount of cement. Compressive strength of colored mortar shall equal .
2.10.3 Hydrated Lime and Alternates
Hydrated lime shall conform to ASTM C 207, Type .
2.10.4 Cement
Portland cement shall conform to ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type I, II, or III.
Masonry cement shall conform to ASTM C 91, Type . Containers shall bear
complete instructions for proportioning and mixing to obtain the required
types of mortar. Incorporate to the maximum extent, without conflicting
with other requirements of this section, up to 40 percent fly ash, up to 70

percent slag, up to 10 percent cenospheres, and up to 10 percent silica
fume. When masonry cement is used, submit the manufacturer's printed
instructions on proportions of water and aggregates and on mixing to obtain
the type of mortar required. Additives shall conform to requirements in
Section 03 31 00.00 10 CAST-IN-PLACE STRUCTURAL CONCRETE.
2.10.5 Pre-Mixed Mortar
Pre-mixed mortar shall conform to ASTM C 1142, Type RS RM. Submit

pre-mixed mortar composition.
2.10.6 Sand and Water
Sand shall conform to ASTM C 144. Water shall be clean, potable, and free
from substances which could adversely affect the mortar.
2.11 WATER-REPELLANT ADMIXTURE
Polymeric type formulated to reduce porosity and water penetration and

water absorption of the mortar and masonry units.
2.12 GROUT AND READY-MIXED GROUT
Grout shall conform to ASTM C 476, coarse. Cement used in grout shall have
a low alkali content. Grout slump shall be between 8 and 11 inches.
Minimum grout strength shall be 2000 psi in 28 days, as tested by
ASTM C 1019. Use grout subject to the limitations of Table III. Do not
change proportions and do not use materials with different physical or
chemical characteristics in grout for the work unless additional evidence
is furnished that the grout meets the specified requirements. Ready-Mixed
grout shall conform to ASTM C 94/C 94M.
2.12.1 Admixtures for Grout

subject to approval; accelerating admixture shall be non-corrosive, shall
contain less than 0.2 percent chlorides, and shall conform to
ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type C. In general, air-entrainment, anti-freeze or
chloride admixtures shall not be used except as approved by the Contracting
Officer. Submit required certifications.
2.12.2 Grout Barriers
Grout barriers for vertical cores shall consist of fine mesh wire,
fiberglass, or expanded metal.
2.13 ANCHORS, TIES, AND BAR POSITIONERS
Anchors and ties shall be fabricated without drips or crimps and shall be
zinc-coated in accordance with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B-2. Steel wire
used for anchors and ties shall be fabricated from steel wire conforming to
ASTM A 82/A 82M. Wire ties or anchors in exterior walls shall conform to
ASTM A 641/A 641M. Joint reinforcement in interior walls, and in exterior
or interior walls exposed to moist environment shall conform to
ASTM A 641/A 641M; coordinate with paragraph JOINT REINFORCEMENT below.
Anchors and ties shall be sized to provide a minimum of 5/8 inch mortar
cover from either face. Submit two anchors, ties and bar positioners of
each type used, as samples.
2.13.1 Wire Mesh Ties
Wire mesh for tying 4 inch thick concrete masonry unit partitions to other
intersecting masonry partitions shall be 1/2 inch mesh of minimum 16 gauge
steel wire. Minimum lengths shall be not less than 12 inches.
2.13.2 Wall Ties
Provide wall ties rectangular-shaped or Z-shaped fabricated of 3/16 inch

diameter zinc-coated steel wire. Rectangular wall ties shall be no less
than 4 inches wide. Wall ties may also be of a continuous type conforming
to paragraph JOINT REINFORCEMENT. Adjustable type wall ties, if approved
for use, shall consist of two essentially U-shaped elements fabricated of
3/16 inch diameter zinc-coated steel wire. Adjustable ties shall be of the
double pintle to eye type and shall allow a maximum of 1/2 inch
eccentricity between each element of the tie. Play between pintle and eye
opening shall be not more than 1/16 inch. The pintle and eye elements
shall be formed so that both can be in the same plane.
2.13.3 Dovetail Anchors
Provide dovetail anchors of the flexible wire type, 3/16 inch diameter
zinc-coated steel wire, triangular shaped, and attached to a 12 gauge or
heavier steel dovetail section. Use these anchors for anchorage of veneer
wythes or composite-wall facings extending over the face of concrete
columns, beams, or walls. Fill cells within vertical planes of these
anchors solid with grout for full height of walls or partitions, or solid
units may be used. Dovetail slots are specified in Section 03 31 00.00 10
CAST-IN-PLACE STRUCTURAL CONCRETE.
2.13.4 Adjustable Anchors
Adjustable anchors shall be 3/16 inch diameter steel wire,

triangular-shaped. Anchors attached to steel shall be 5/16 inch diameter
steel bars placed to provide 1/16 inch play between flexible anchors and
structural steel members. Spacers shall be welded to rods and columns.
Equivalent welded-on steel anchor rods or shapes standard with the
flexible-anchor manufacturer may be furnished when approved. Welds shall
be cleaned and given one coat of zinc-rich touch up paint.
2.13.5 Bar Positioners
Bar positioners, used to prevent displacement of reinforcing bars during

the course of construction, shall be factory fabricated from 9 gauge steel
wire or equivalent, and coated with a hot-dip galvanized finish. Not more
than one wire shall cross the cell.
2.14 JOINT REINFORCEMENT
Joint reinforcement shall be factory fabricated from steel wire conforming

to ASTM A 82/A 82M, welded construction. Tack welding will not be
acceptable in reinforcement used for wall ties. Wire shall have zinc
coating conforming to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B-2. All wires shall be a
minimum of gauge. Reinforcement shall be ladder type design, having one
longitudinal wire in the mortar bed of each face shell for hollow units and
one wire for solid units. Joint reinforcement shall be placed a minimum of
5/8 inch cover from either face. The distance between crosswires shall not
exceed 16 inches. Joint reinforcement for straight runs shall be furnished
in flat sections not less than 10 feet long. Joint reinforcement shall be
provided with factory formed corners and intersections. If approved for
use, joint reinforcement may be furnished with adjustable wall tie
features. Submit one piece of each type used, including corner and wall
intersection pieces, showing at least two cross wires.
2.15 REINFORCING STEEL BARS AND RODS
Reinforcing steel bars and rods shall conform to ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade
60.
2.16 CONTROL JOINT KEYS
Control joint keys shall be a factory fabricated solid section of natural

or synthetic rubber (or combination thereof) conforming to ASTM D 2000or
polyvinyl chloride conforming to ASTM D 2287. The material shall be
resistant to oils and solvents. The control joint key shall be provided
with a solid shear section not less than 5/8 inch thick and 3/8 inch thick
flanges, with a tolerance of plus or minus 1/16 inch. The control joint
key shall fit neatly, but without forcing, in masonry unit jamb sash
grooves. The control joint key shall be flexible at a temperature of minus
30 degrees F after five hours exposure, and shall have a durometer hardness
of not less than 70 when tested in accordance with ASTM D 2240.
2.17 RIGID BOARD-TYPE INSULATION
Provide rigid board-type insulation as specified in Section 07 21 13 BOARD

AND BLOCK INSULATION. Submit one piece of each type used, including corner
and wall intersection pieces, showing at least two cross wires. Submit
certificate attesting that the polyurethane or polyisocyanurate insulation
furnished for the project contains recovered material, and showing an
estimated percent of such recovered material.
2.18 EXPANSION-JOINT MATERIALS
Backer rod and sealant shall be adequate to accommodate joint compression

equal to 50 percent of the width of the joint. The backer rod shall be
compressible rod stock of polyethylene foam, polyurethane foam, butyl
rubber foam, or other flexible, nonabsorptive material as recommended by
the sealant manufacturer. Sealant shall conform to Section 07 92 00 JOINT
SEALANTS, and shall be penetrating with a maximum volatile organic compound
(VOC) content of 600 grams/liter. Submit one piece of each type of
material used.
2.19 THROUGH WALL FLASHING
Provide Through Wall Flashing as specified in Section 07 60 00 FLASHING AND

SHEET METAL. Provide one of the following types except that the material
shall be one which is not adversely affected by dampproofing material.
a. Coated-Copper Flashing: 7 ounce, electrolytic copper sheet, uniformly

coated on both sides with acidproof, alkaliproof, elastic bituminous
compound. Factory apply coating to a weight of not less than 6
ounces/square foot (approximately 3 ounces/square foot on each side).
b. Copper or Stainless Steel Flashing: Copper, ASTM B 370, minimum 16

ounce weight; stainless steel, ASTM A 167, Type 301, 302, 304, or 316,
0.015 inch thick, No. 2D finish. Provide with factory-fabricated
deformations that mechanically bond flashing against horizontal
movement in all directions. Deformations shall consist of dimples,

diagonal corrugations, or a combination of dimples and transverse
corrugations.
c. Reinforced Membrane Flashing: Polyester film core with a reinforcing

fiberglass scrim bonded to one side. The membrane shall be impervious
to moisture, flexible, and not affected by caustic alkalis. The
material, after being exposed for not less than 1/2 hour to a
temperature of 32 degrees F, shall show no cracking when, at that
temperature, it is bent 180 degrees over a 1/16 inch diameter mandrel
and then bent at the same point over the same size mandrel in the
opposite direction 360 degrees.
2.20 WEEP HOLE VENTILATORS
Weep hole ventilators shall be prefabricated aluminum, plastic or wood

blocking sized to form the proper size opening in head joints. Provide
aluminum and plastic inserts with grill or screen-type openings designed to
allow the passage of moisture from cavities and to prevent the entrance or
insects. Ventilators shall be sized to match modular construction with a
standard 3/8 inch mortar joint.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
Prior to start of work, masonry inspector shall verify the applicable

conditions as set forth in ACI 530/530.1, inspection. The Contracting
Officer will serve as inspector or will select a masonry inspector.
3.1.1 Protection
Ice or snow formed on the masonry bed shall be thawed by the application of
heat. Heat shall be applied carefully until the top surface of the masonry
is dry to the touch. Sections of masonry deemed frozen and damaged shall
be removed before continuing construction of those sections.
a. Air Temperature 40 to 32 Degrees F. Sand or mixing water shall be

heated to produce mortar temperatures between 40 and 120 degrees F
b. Air Temperature 32 to 25 Degrees F. Sand and mixing water shall be

heated to produce mortar temperatures between 40 and 120 degrees F.
Temperature of mortar on boards shall be maintained above freezing.
c. Air Temperature 25 to 20 Degrees F. Sand and mixing water shall be

heated to provide mortar temperatures between 40 and 120 degrees F.
Temperature of mortar on boards shall be maintained above freezing.
Sources of heat shall be used on both sides of walls under
construction. Windbreaks shall be employed when wind is in excess of
15 mph.
d. Air Temperature 20 Degrees F and below. Sand and mixing water shall be
heated to provide mortar temperatures between 40 and 120 degrees F.
Enclosure and auxiliary heat shall be provided to maintain air
temperature above 32 degrees F. Temperature of units when laid shall
not be less than 20 degrees F.
3.1.2 Completed Masonry and Masonry Not Being Worked On
a. Mean daily air temperature 40 to 32 degrees F. Masonry shall be

protected from rain or snow for 24 hours by covering with
weather-resistive membrane.
b. Mean daily air temperature 32 to 25 degrees F. Masonry shall be

completely covered with weather-resistant membrane for 24 hours.
c. Mean Daily Air Temperature 25 to 20 degrees F. Masonry shall be

completely covered with insulating blankets or equally protected for 24
hours.
d. Mean Daily Temperature 20 degrees F and Below. Masonry temperature

shall be maintained above 32 degrees F for 24 hours by enclosure and
supplementary heat, by electric heating blankets, infrared heat lamps,
or other approved methods.
3.1.3 Stains
Protect exposed surfaces from mortar and other stains. When mortar joints
are tooled, remove mortar from exposed surfaces with fiber brushes and
wooden paddles. Protect base of walls from splash stains by covering
adjacent ground with sand, sawdust, or polyethylene.
3.1.4 Loads
Do not apply uniform loads for at least 12 hours or concentrated loads for
at least 72 hours after masonry is constructed. Provide temporary bracing
as required.
3.1.5 Surfaces
Clean surfaces on which masonry is to be placed of laitance, dust, dirt,

oil, organic matter, or other foreign materials and slightly roughen to
provide a surface texture with a depth of at least 1/8 inch. Sandblast, if
necessary, to remove laitance from pores and to expose the aggregate.
3.2 LAYING MASONRY UNITS
a. Coordinate masonry work with the work of other trades to accommodate

built-in items and to avoid cutting and patching. Masonry units shall
be laid in running stacked bond pattern. Facing courses shall be level
with back-up courses, unless the use of adjustable ties has been
approved in which case the tolerances shall be plus or minus 1/2 inch.
Each unit shall be adjusted to its final position while mortar is still
soft and plastic.
b. Units that have been disturbed after the mortar has stiffened shall be
removed, cleaned, and relaid with fresh mortar. Air spaces, cavities,
chases, expansion joints, and spaces to be grouted shall be kept free
from mortar and other debris. Units used in exposed masonry surfaces
shall be selected from those having the least amount of chipped edges
or other imperfections detracting from the appearance of the finished
work. Vertical joints shall be kept plumb.
c. Units being laid and surfaces to receive units shall be free of water
film and frost. Solid units shall be laid in a nonfurrowed full bed of
mortar. Mortar for veneer wythes shall be beveled and sloped toward
the center of the wythe from the cavity side. Units shall be shoved
into place so that the vertical joints are tight. Vertical joints of
brick and the vertical face shells of concrete masonry units, except
where indicated at control, expansion, and isolation joints, shall be
completely filled with mortar. Mortar will be permitted to protrude up
to 1/2 inch into the space or cells to be grouted. Means shall be
provided to prevent mortar from dropping into the space below.
d. In double wythe construction, the inner wythe may be brought up not

more than 16 inches ahead of the outer wythe. Collar joints shall be
filled with mortar or grout during the laying of the facing wythe, and
filling shall not lag the laying of the facing wythe by more than 8
inches.
3.2.1 Forms and Shores
Provide bracing and scaffolding as required. Design bracing to resist wind

pressure as required by local codes. Forms and shores shall be
sufficiently rigid to prevent deflections which may result in cracking or
other damage to supported masonry and sufficiently tight to prevent leakage
of mortar and grout. Supporting forms and shores shall not be removed in
less than 10 days.
3.2.2 Reinforced Concrete Masonry Units Walls
Where vertical reinforcement occurs, fill cores solid with grout. Lay
units in such a manner as to preserve the unobstructed vertical continuity
of cores to be filled. Embed the adjacent webs in mortar to prevent
leakage of grout. Remove mortar fins protruding from joints before placing
grout. Minimum clear dimensions of vertical cores shall be 2 by 3 inches.
Position reinforcing accurately as indicated before placing grout. As
masonry work progresses, secure vertical reinforcing in place at vertical
intervals not to exceed 160 bar diameters. Use puddling rod or vibrator to
consolidate the grout. Minimum clear distance between masonry and vertical
reinforcement shall be not less than 1/2 inch. Unless indicated or
specified otherwise, form splices by lapping bars not less than 40 bar
diameters and wire tying them together.
3.2.3 Concrete Masonry Units
Units in piers, pilasters, columns, starting courses on footings, solid

foundation walls, lintels, and beams, and where cells are to be filled with
grout shall be full bedded in mortar under both face shells and webs.
Other units shall be full bedded under both face shells. Head joints shall
be filled solidly with mortar for a distance in from the face of the unit
not less than the thickness of the face shell. Foundation walls below
grade shall be grouted solid. Jamb units shall be of the shapes and sizes
to conform with wall units. Solid units may be incorporated in the masonry
work where necessary to fill out at corners, gable slopes, and elsewhere as
approved. Double walls shall be stiffened at wall-mounted plumbing
fixtures by use of strap anchors, two above each fixture and two below each
fixture, located to avoid pipe runs, and extending from center to center of
the double wall. Walls and partitions shall be adequately reinforced for
support of wall-hung plumbing fixtures when chair carriers are not
specified.
3.2.4 Clay or Shale Brick Units
Lay brick facing with the better face exposed. Lay brick in running bond
with each course bonded at corners, unless otherwise indicated. Lay molded
brick with the frog side down. Brick that is cored, recessed, or has other
deformations may be used in sills, treads, soldier courses, except where
deformations will be exposed to view. Lay fire brick by dipping each brick
in a soft mixture of fire clay and water and then rubbing the brick into
place with joints as thin as practicable or provide refractory mortar with
joints not more than 3/8 inch thick.
3.2.4.1 Wetting of Units
Wetting of clay, shale brick, or hollow brick units having an initial rate
of absorption of more than 1 gram per minute per square inch of bed surface
shall be in conformance with ASTM C 67. The method of wetting shall ensure
that each unit is nearly saturated but surface dry when laid. Test clay or
shale brick daily on the job, prior to laying, as follows: Using a wax
pencil, draw a circle the size of a quarter on five randomly selected
bricks. Apply 20 drops of water with a medicine dropper to the surface
within the circle on each brick. If the average time that the water is
completely absorbed in the five bricks is less than 1-1/2 minutes, wet
bricks represented by the five bricks tested.
3.2.4.2 Solid Units
Completely fill bed, head, and collar joints with mortar.
3.2.4.3 Hollow Units
Lay hollow units as specified for concrete masonry units.
3.2.4.4 Brick-Faced Walls
For brick-faced walls bond brick in the pattern as indicated on the

drawings. Provide additional bonding ties spaced not more than 3 feet
apart around the perimeter of and within 12 inches of all openings.
a. Collar Joints: Fill collar joints solid with mortar as each course of
brick is laid. Do not disturb units in place.
b. Brick Sills: Lay brick on edge, slope, and project not less than 1/2
inch beyond the face of the wall to form a wash and drip. Fill all
joints solidly with mortar and tool.
3.2.4.5 Cavity Walls
Provide a continuous cavity as indicated. Securely tie the two wythes

together with horizontal joint reinforcement. Bevel mortar beds away from
cavity to prevent projection into cavity when bricks are shoved in place.
Keep cavities clear and clean of mortar droppings. At the bottom of cavity
walls, in the course immediately above the through-wall flashing,
temporarily omit one brick every 4 feet. With a hose and clean water, wash
all mortar droppings and debris out of the cavity through the temporary
openings at least twice each day masonry is laid, and more often when
required to keep the cavities clean. Fill in the openings with bricks and
mortar after the wall is complete and the cavity has been inspected and
found clean. Provide weep holes of open head joints spaced 24 inches o.c.
at base of wall and vertical obstructions (e.g. lintels).
3.2.4.6 Reinforced Brick Walls
Provide two wythes of brick separated by a _____ inch wide continuous space
filled with bricks "floated" in grout and reinforced as indicated. Bevel
mortar beds away from grout space to prevent projection into grout space
when bricks are shoved in place. Deeply furrowed bed joints will not be
permitted. Lay exterior wythe of brick to the height of each grout pour in
advance of interior wythe. Clean grout space and set reinforcing before
laying interior wythe. Provide metal ties to prevent spreading of the
wythes and to maintain vertical alignment of walls. Position reinforcing
as indicated. Wire vertical reinforcing securely in position as the
brickwork progresses. Use puddling rod or vibrator to consolidate the
grout. The minimum clear distance between parallel bars shall be the
nominal diameter of the bars; the minimum clear distance between masonry
and reinforcing shall be 1/4 inch. Unless indicated or specified
otherwise, form splices by lapping bars not less than 40 bar diameters and
wire tying them together. Stagger splices in adjacent horizontal bars.
3.2.4.7 Chimneys
Construct chimneys of brick with clay flue linings of the sizes indicated.
Extend flue linings from 12 inches below the smoke inlet to 4 inches above
the chimney cap. Place thimbles as indicated, flush with inside of or up to
one inch into the flue lining. Set linings in fire clay mortar or
refractory mortar and fill and smooth the joints on the inside. Set each
section of flue lining before surrounding brickwork reaches top of flue
lining section below. Build brickwork around lining, and leave a one inch
airspace between lining and brickwork with grout. Do not cut linings
after they are installed in chimney. Unless indicated otherwise, provide a
chimney cap of air-entrained concrete. Slope cap to a minimum edge
thickness of 2 inches and reinforce with two rings of No. 3 gage galvanized
steel wire.
3.2.4.8 Brick Veneer
Provide a continuous cavity as indicated. Install brick veneer after

sheathing, masonry anchors, and flashing have been installed to the
cold-formed steel framing system. Care shall be provided to avoid damaging
the moisture barrier. Damaged moisture barrier and flashing shall be
repaired or replaced before brick veneer is installed. Means shall be
provided to keep cavities clean and clear of mortar droppings.
3.2.5 Tolerances
Lay masonry plumb, true to line, with courses level. Keep bond pattern
plumb throughout. Square corners unless noted otherwise. Except for walls
constructed of prefaced concrete masonry units, lay masonry within the
following tolerances (plus or minus unless otherwise noted):
TABLE II
TOLERANCES
Variation from the plumb in the lines

and surfaces of columns, walls and arises
_______________________________________________________________
In adjacent masonry units 1/8 inch

In 10 feet 1/4 inch
TOLERANCES
In 20 feet 3/8 inch
In 40 feet or more 1/2 inch
Variations from the plumb for external corners,

expansion joints, and other conspicuous lines
_______________________________________________________________
In 20 feet 1/4 inch

Variations from the level for exposed lintels,

sills, parapets, horizontal grooves, and other
conspicuous lines
_______________________________________________________________
In 20 feet 1/4 inch

Variation from level for bed joints and top

surfaces of bearing walls
_______________________________________________________________
In 10 feet 1/4 inch

Variations from horizontal lines

_______________________________________________________________
In 10 feet 1/4 inch

In 20 feet 3/8 inch
Variations in cross sectional dimensions of

columns and in thickness of walls
_______________________________________________________________
Minus 1/4 inch

Plus 1/2 inch
3.2.6 Cutting and Fitting
Full units of the proper size shall be used wherever possible, in lieu of
cut units. Cutting and fitting, including that required to accommodate the
work of others, shall be done by masonry mechanics using power masonry
saws. Concrete masonry units may be wet or dry cut. Wet cut units, before
being placed in the work, shall be dried to the same surface-dry appearance
as uncut units being laid in the wall. Cut edges shall be clean, true and
sharp. Openings in the masonry shall be made carefully so that wall
plates, cover plates or escutcheons required by the installation will
completely conceal the openings and will have bottoms parallel with the
masonry bed joints. Reinforced masonry lintels shall be provided above
openings over 12 inches wide for pipes, ducts, cable trays, and other wall
penetrations, unless steel sleeves are used.
3.2.7 Jointing
Joints shall be tooled when the mortar is thumbprint hard. Horizontal
joints shall be tooled last. Joints shall be brushed to remove all loose
and excess mortar. Mortar joints shall be finished as follows:
3.2.7.1 Flush Joints
Joints in concealed masonry surfaces and joints at electrical outlet boxes

in wet areas shall be flush cut. Flush cut joints shall be made by cutting
off the mortar flush with the face of the wall. Joints in unparged masonry
walls below grade shall be pointed tight. Flush joints for architectural
units, such as fluted units, shall completely fill both the head and bed
joints.
3.2.7.2 Tooled Joints
Joints in exposed exterior and interior masonry surfaces shall be tooled .

Joints shall be tooled with a jointer slightly larger than the joint width
so that complete contact is made along the edges of the unit. Tooling
shall be performed so that the mortar is compressed and the joint surface
is sealed. Jointer of sufficient length shall be used to obtain a straight
and true mortar joint.
3.2.7.3 Door and Window Frame Joints
On the exposed interior side of exterior frames, joints between frames and
abutting masonry walls shall be raked to a depth of 3/8 inch. On the
exterior side of exterior frames, joints between frames and abutting
masonry walls shall be raked to a depth of 3/8 inch.
3.2.8 Joint Widths
Joint widths shall be as follows:
3.2.8.1 Concrete Masonry Units
Concrete masonry units shall have 3/8 inch joints, except for prefaced
concrete masonry units.
3.2.8.2 Prefaced Concrete Masonry Units
Prefaced concrete masonry units shall have a joint width of 3/8 inch wide
on unfaced side and not less than 3/16 inch nor more than 1/4 inch wide on
prefaced side.
3.2.8.3 Brick
Brick joint widths shall be the difference between the actual and nominal
dimensions of the brick in either height or length. Brick expansion joint
widths shall be as shown.
3.2.9 Embedded Items
Fill spaces around built-in items with mortar. Point openings around
flush-mount electrical outlet boxes in wet locations with mortar. Embed
anchors, ties, wall plugs, accessories, flashing, pipe sleeves and other
items required to be built-in as the masonry work progresses. Fully embed
anchors, ties and joint reinforcement in the mortar. Fill cells receiving
anchor bolts and cells of the first course below bearing plates with grout.
3.2.10 Unfinished Work
Step back unfinished work for joining with new work. Toothing may be
resorted to only when specifically approved. Remove loose mortar and
thoroughly clean the exposed joints before laying new work.
3.2.11 Masonry Wall Intersections
Masonry bond each course at corners and elsewhere as shown. Masonry walls
shall be anchored or tied together at corners and intersections with bond
beam reinforcement and prefabricated corner or tee pieces of joint
reinforcement as shown.
3.2.12 Partitions
Partitions shall be continuous from floor to underside of floor or roof

deck where shown. Openings in firewalls around joists or other structural
members shall be filled as indicated or approved. Where suspended ceilings
on both sides of partitions are indicated, the partitions other than those
shown to be continuous may be stopped approximately 4 inches above the
ceiling level. An isolation joint shall be placed in the intersection
between partitions and structural or exterior walls as shown. Interior
partitions having 4 inch nominal thick units shall be tied to intersecting
partitions of 4 inch units, 5 inches into partitions of 6 inch units, and
7 inches into partitions of 8 inch or thicker units. Cells within vertical
plane of ties shall be filled solid with grout for full height of partition
or solid masonry units may be used. Interior partitions having masonry
walls over 4 inches thick shall be tied together with joint reinforcement.
Partitions containing joint reinforcement shall be provided with
prefabricated pieces at corners and intersections or partitions.
3.3 COMPRESSED EARTH BLOCK
Install according to manufacturer instructions and accepted industry

standards.
3.4 ANCHORED VENEER CONSTRUCTION
Completely separate the inner and outer wythes by a continuous airspace as

indicated. Lay up both the inner and the outer wythes together except when
adjustable joint reinforcement assemblies are approved for use. When both
wythes are not brought up together, through-wall flashings shall be
protected from damage until they are fully enclosed in the wall. The
airspace between the wythes shall be kept clear and free of mortar
droppings by temporary wood strips laid on the wall ties and carefully
lifted out before placing the next row of ties. A coarse gravel or
drainage material shall be placed behind the weep holes in the cavity to a
minimum depth of 4 inches of coarse aggregate or 10 inches of drainage
material to keep mortar droppings from plugging the weep holes.
3.5 WEEP HOLES
Wherever through-wall flashing occurs, provide weep holes to drain flashing

to exterior at acceptable locations as indicated on drawings. Weep holes
shall be open head joints.clear round holes not less than 1/4 inch in
diameter at 24 inches o.c. Weep holes shall be provided not more than 24
inches on centers in mortar joints of the exterior wythe above wall
flashing, over foundations, bond beams, and any other horizontal
interruptions of the cavity. Weep holes shall be perfectly horizontal or
slightly canted downward to encourage water drainage outward and not

inward. Weep holes shall be formed by placing short lengths of
well-greased No. 10, 5/16 inch nominal diameter, braided cotton sash cord
in the mortar and withdrawing the cords after the wall has been completed.
Other approved methods may be used for providing weep holes. Weep holes
shall be kept free of mortar and other obstructions.
3.6 COMPOSITE WALLS
Tie masonry wythes together with joint reinforcement or with unit wall
ties. Anchor facing to concrete backing with wire dovetail anchors set in
slots built in the face of the concrete as specified in Section
03 31 00.00 10 CAST-IN-PLACE STRUCTURAL CONCRETE. Anchor or tie the facing
wythe to the backup at a maximum spacing of 16 inches on center vertically
and 24 inches on center horizontally. Unit ties shall be spaced not over
24 inches on centers horizontally, in courses not over 16 inches apart
vertically, staggered in alternate courses. Ties shall be laid not closer
than 5/8 inch to either masonry face. Ties shall not extend through
control joints. Collar joints between masonry facing and masonry backup
shall be filled solidly with grout.
3.7 MORTAR MIX
Mix mortar in a mechanically operated mortar mixer for at least 3 minutes,

but not more than 5 minutes. Measure ingredients for mortar by volume.
Ingredients not in containers, such as sand, shall be accurately measured
by the use of measuring boxes. Mix water with the dry ingredients in
sufficient amount to provide a workable mixture which will adhere to the
vertical surfaces of masonry units. Retemper mortar that has stiffened
because of loss of water through evaporation by adding water to restore the
proper consistency and workability. Discard mortar that has reached its
initial set or that has not been used within hours after mixing.
3.8 REINFORCING STEEL
Clean reinforcement of loose, flaky rust, scale, grease, mortar, grout, or

other coating which might destroy or reduce its bond prior to placing
grout. Bars with kinks or bends not shown on the drawings shall not be
used. Reinforcement shall be placed prior to grouting. Unless otherwise
indicated, vertical wall reinforcement shall extend to within 2 inches of
tops of walls.
3.8.1 Positioning Bars
Vertical bars shall be accurately placed within the cells at the positions
indicated on the drawings. A minimum clearance of 1/2 inch shall be
maintained between the bars and masonry units. Minimum clearance between
parallel bars shall be one diameter of the reinforcement. Vertical
reinforcing may be held in place using bar positioners located near the
ends of each bar and at intermediate intervals of not more than 192
diameters of the reinforcement. Column and pilaster ties shall be wired in
position around the vertical steel. Ties shall be in contact with the
vertical reinforcement and shall not be placed in horizontal bed joints.
3.8.2 Splices
Bars shall be lapped a minimum of 48 diameters of the reinforcement.

Welded or mechanical connections shall develop at least 125 percent of the
specified yield strength of the reinforcement.
3.9 JOINT REINFORCEMENT INSTALLATION
Joint reinforcement shall be installed at 16 inches on center or as

indicated. Reinforcement shall be lapped not less than 6 inches.
Prefabricated sections shall be installed at corners and wall
intersections. The longitudinal wires of joint reinforcement shall be
placed to provide not less than 5/8 inch cover to either face of the unit.
3.10 PLACING GROUT
Fill cells containing reinforcing bars with grout. Hollow masonry units in
walls or partitions supporting plumbing, heating, or other mechanical
fixtures, voids at door and window jambs, and other indicated spaces shall
be filled solid with grout. Cells under lintel bearings on each side of
openings shall be filled solid with grout for full height of openings.
Walls below grade, lintels, and bond beams shall be filled solid with
grout. Units other than open end units may require grouting each course to
preclude voids in the units. Grout not in place within 1-1/2 hours after
water is first added to the batch shall be discarded. Sufficient time shall
be allowed between grout lifts to preclude displacement or cracking of face
shells of masonry units. If blowouts, flowouts, misalignment, or cracking
of face shells should occur during construction, the wall shall be torn
down and rebuilt.
3.10.1 Vertical Grout Barriers for Fully Grouted Walls
Provide grout barriers not more than 30 feet apart, or as required, to

limit the horizontal flow of grout for each pour.
3.10.2 Horizontal Grout Barriers
Embed grout barriers in mortar below cells of hollow units receiving grout.
3.10.3 Grout Holes and Cleanouts
3.10.3.1 Grout Holes
Provide grouting holes in slabs, spandrel beams, and other in-place

overhead construction. Locate holes over vertical reinforcing bars or as
required to facilitate grout fill in bond beams. Provide additional
openings spaced not more than 16 inches on centers where grouting of all
hollow unit masonry is indicated. Openings shall not be less than 4 inches
in diameter or 3 by 4 inches in horizontal dimensions. Upon completion of
grouting operations, plug and finish grouting holes to match surrounding
surfaces.
3.10.3.2 Cleanouts for Hollow Unit Masonry Construction
Provide cleanout holes at the bottom of every pour in cores containing

vertical reinforcement when the height of the grout pour exceeds 5 feet.
Where all cells are to be grouted, construct cleanout courses using bond
beam units in an inverted position to permit cleaning of all cells.
Provide cleanout holes at a maximum spacing of 32 inches where all cells
are to be filled with grout. Establish a new series of cleanouts if
grouting operations are stopped for more than 4 hours. Cleanouts shall not
be less than 3 by 4 inch openings cut from one face shell. Manufacturer's
standard cutout units may be used at the Contractor's option. Cleanout
holes shall not be closed until masonry work, reinforcement, and final
cleaning of the grout spaces have been completed and inspected. For walls
which will be exposed to view, close cleanout holes in an approved manner
to match surrounding masonry.
3.10.3.3 Cleanouts for Solid Unit Masonry Construction
Provide cleanouts for construction of walls consisting of a grout filled

cavity between solid masonry wythes at the bottom of every pour by omitting
every other masonry unit from one wythe. Establish a new series of
cleanouts if grouting operations are stopped for more than 4 hours. Do not
plug cleanout holes until masonry work, reinforcement, and final cleaning
of the grout spaces have been completed and inspected. For walls which
will be exposed to view, close cleanout holes in an approved manner to
match surrounding masonry.
3.10.4 Grouting Equipment
3.10.4.1 Grout Pumps
Pumping through aluminum tubes will not be permitted. Operate pumps to

produce a continuous stream of grout without air pockets, segregation, or
contamination. Upon completion of each day's pumping, remove waste
materials and debris from the equipment, and dispose of outside the masonry.
3.10.4.2 Vibrators
Internal vibrators shall maintain a speed of not less than 5,000 impulses
per minute when submerged in the grout. Maintain at least one spare
vibrator at the site at all times. Apply vibrators at uniformly spaced
points not further apart than the visible effectiveness of the machine.
Limit duration of vibration to time necessary to produce satisfactory
consolidation without causing segregation.
3.10.5 Grout Placement
Lay masonry to the top of a pour before placing grout. Do no place grout
in two-wythe solid unit masonry cavity until mortar joints have set for at
least 3 days during hot weather and 5 days during cold damp weather. Grout
shall not be placed in hollow unit masonry until mortar joints have set for
at least 24 hours. Grout shall be placed using a hand bucket, concrete
hopper, or grout pump to completely fill the grout spaces without
segregation of the aggregates. Vibrators shall not be inserted into lower
pours that are in a semi-solidified state. The height of grout pours and
type of grout used shall be limited by the dimensions of grout spaces as
indicated in Table III. Low-lift grout methods may be used on pours up to
and including 5 feet in height. High-lift grout methods shall be used on
pours exceeding 5 feet in height.
3.10.5.1 Low-Lift Method
Grout shall be placed at a rate that will not cause displacement of the
masonry due to hydrostatic pressure of the grout. Mortar protruding more
than 1/2 inch into the grout space shall be removed before beginning the
grouting operation. Grout pours 12 inches or less in height shall be
consolidated by mechanical vibration or by puddling. Grout pours over 12
inches in height shall be consolidated by mechanical vibration and
reconsolidated by mechanical vibration after initial water loss and
settlement has occurred. Vibrators shall not be inserted into lower pours
that are in a semi-solidified state. Low-lift grout shall be used subject
to the limitations of Table III.
3.10.5.2 High-Lift Method
Mortar droppings shall be cleaned from the bottom of the grout space and
from reinforcing steel. Mortar protruding more than 1/4 inch into the
grout space shall be removed by dislodging the projections with a rod or
stick as the work progresses. Reinforcing, bolts, and embedded connections
shall be rigidly held in position before grouting is started. CMU units
shall not be pre-wetted. Grout, from the mixer to the point of deposit in
the grout space shall be placed as rapidly as practical by pumping and
placing methods which will prevent segregation of the mix and cause a
minimum of grout splatter on reinforcing and masonry surfaces not being
immediately encased in the grout lift. The individual lifts of grout shall
be limited to 4 feet in height. The first lift of grout shall be placed to
a uniform height within the pour section and vibrated thoroughly to fill
all voids. This first vibration shall follow immediately behind the
pouring of the grout using an approved mechanical vibrator. After a
waiting period sufficient to permit the grout to become plastic, but before
it has taken any set, the succeeding lift shall be poured and vibrated 12
to 18 inches into the preceding lift. If the placing of the succeeding
lift is going to be delayed beyond the period of workability of the
preceding, each lift shall be reconsolidated by reworking with a second
vibrator as soon as the grout has taken its settlement shrinkage. The
waiting, pouring, and reconsolidation steps shall be repeated until the top
of the pour is reached. The top lift shall be reconsolidated after the
required waiting period. The high-lift grouting of any section of wall
between vertical grout barriers shall be completed to the top of a pour in
one working day unless a new series of cleanout holes is established and
the resulting horizontal construction joint cleaned. High-lift grout shall
be used subject to the limitations in Table III.
TABLE III
POUR HEIGHT AND TYPE OF GROUT FOR VARIOUS GROUT SPACE DIMENSIONS
Minimum Dimensions of the

Total Clear Areas Within Grout
Maximum Spaces and Cells (in.) (1,2)
Grout Pour
Height Grout Grouting Multiwythe Hollow-unit
(feet) (4) Type Procedure Masonry (3) Masonry
____________ _______ ____________ ___________ ______________
1 Fine Low Lift 3/4 1-1/2 x 2

5 Fine Low Lift 2 2 x 3
8 Fine High Lift 2 2 x 3
12 Fine High Lift 2-1/2 2-1/2 x 3
24 Fine High Lift 3 3 x 3
1 Coarse Low Lift 1-1/2 1-1/2 x 3
5 Coarse Low Lift 2 2-1/2 x 3
8 Coarse High Lift 2 3 x 3
12 Coarse High Lift 2-1/2 3 x 3
24 Coarse High Lift 3 3 x 4
Notes:
(1) The actual grout space or cell dimension shall be larger than the
sum of the following items:
a) The required minimum dimensions of total clear areas given in
the table above;

b) The width of any mortar projections within the space;
c) The horizontal projections of the diameters of the horizontal
reinforcing bars within a cross section of the grout space or cell.
(2) The minimum dimensions of the total clear areas shall be made up of
one or more open areas, with at least one area being 3/4 inch or
greater in width.
(3) For grouting spaces between masonry wythes.
(4) Where only cells of hollow masonry units containing reinforcement

are grouted, the maximum height of the pour shall not exceed the
distance between horizontal bond beams.
3.11 BOND BEAMS
Bond beams shall be filled with grout and reinforced as indicated on the
drawings. Grout barriers shall be installed under bond beam units to
retain the grout as required. Reinforcement shall be continuous, including
around corners, except through control joints or expansion joints, unless
otherwise indicated on the drawings. Where splices are required for
continuity, reinforcement shall be lapped 48 bar diameters. A minimum
clearance of 1/2 inch shall be maintained between reinforcement and
interior faces of units.
3.12 CONTROL JOINTS
Control joints shall be provided as indicated and shall be constructed by

using special control-joint units sash jamb units with control joint key
open end stretcher units in accordance with the details shown on the
drawings. Sash jamb units shall have a 3/4 by 3/4 inch groove near the
center at end of each unit. The vertical mortar joint at control joint
locations shall be continuous, including through all bond beams. This
shall be accomplished by utilizing half blocks in alternating courses on
each side of the joint. The control joint key shall be interrupted in
courses containing continuous bond beam steel. In single wythe exterior
masonry walls, the exterior control joints shall be raked to a depth of 3/4
inch; backer rod and sealant shall be installed in accordance with Section
07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS. Exposed interior control joints shall be raked to
a depth of 1/4 inch. Concealed control joints shall be flush cut.
3.13 JOINTS SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS
a. Brick expansion joints
b. Concrete masonry veneer joints
c. will be located, detailed, and constructed as shown on the drawings.

Keep joints free of mortar and other debris.
3.14 SHELF ANGLES
Adjust shelf angles as required to keep the masonry level and at the proper
elevation. Shelf angles shall be galvanized and provided in sections not
longer than 10 feet and installed with a 1/4 inch gap between sections.
Shelf angles shall be mitered and welded at building corners with each
angle not shorter than 4 feet, unless limited by wall configuration.
3.15 LINTELS
3.15.1 Masonry Lintels
Construct masonry lintels with lintel units filled solid with grout in all
courses and reinforced with a minimum of two No. 4 bars in the bottom
course unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. Lintel reinforcement
shall extend beyond each side of masonry opening 40 bar diameters or 24
inches, whichever is greater. Reinforcing bars shall be supported in place
prior to grouting and shall be located 1/2 inch above the bottom inside
surface of the lintel unit.
3.15.2 Precast Concrete and Steel Lintels
Construct precast concrete and steel lintels as shown on the drawings.

Lintels shall be set in a full bed of mortar with faces plumb and true.
Steel and precast lintels shall have a minimum bearing length of 8 inches
unless otherwise indicated on the drawings.
3.16 SILLS AND COPINGS
Sills and copings shall be set in a full bed of mortar with faces plumb and
true.
3.17 ANCHORAGE TO CONCRETE AND STRUCTURAL STEEL
3.17.1 Anchorage to Concrete
Anchorage of masonry to the face of concrete columns, beams, or walls shall

be with dovetail anchors spaced not over 16 inches on centers vertically and
24 inches on center horizontally.
3.17.2 Anchorage to Structural Steel
Masonry shall be anchored to vertical structural steel framing with

adjustable steel wire anchors spaced not over 16 inches on centers
vertically, and if applicable, not over 24 inches on centers horizontally.
3.18 PARGING
The outside face of below-grade exterior concrete-masonry unit walls

enclosing usable rooms and spaces, except crawl spaces, shall be parged
with type S mortar. Parging shall not be less than 1/2 inch thick troweled
to a smooth dense surface so as to provide a continuous unbroken shield
from top of footings to a line 6 inches below adjacent finish grade, unless
otherwise indicated. Parging shall be coved at junction of wall and
footing. Parging shall be damp-cured for 48 hours or more before
backfilling. Parging shall be protected from freezing temperatures until
hardened.
3.19 INSULATION
Anchored veneer walls shall be insulated, where shown, by installing

board-type insulation on the cavity side of the inner wythe. Board type
insulation shall be applied directly to the masonry or thru-wall flashing
with adhesive. Insulation shall be neatly fitted between obstructions
without impaling of insulation on ties or anchors. The insulation shall
be applied in parallel courses with vertical joints breaking midway over
the course below and shall be applied in moderate contact with adjoining
units without forcing, and shall be cut to fit neatly against adjoining
surfaces.
3.20 SPLASH BLOCKS
Locate splash blocks as indicated.
3.21 POINTING AND CLEANING
After mortar joints have attained their initial set, but prior to
hardening, completely remove mortar and grout daubs or splashings from
masonry-unit surfaces that will be exposed or painted. Before completion
of the work, defects in joints of masonry to be exposed or painted shall be
raked out as necessary, filled with mortar, and tooled to match existing
joints. Immediately after grout work is completed, scum and stains which
have percolated through the masonry work shall be removed using a high
pressure stream of water and a stiff bristled brush. Masonry surfaces
shall not be cleaned, other than removing excess surface mortar, until
mortar in joints has hardened. Masonry surfaces shall be left clean, free
of mortar daubs, dirt, stain, and discoloration, including scum from
cleaning operations, and with tight mortar joints throughout. Metal tools
and metal brushes shall not be used for cleaning.
3.21.1 Dry-Brushing
a. Exposed concrete masonry unit
b. Exposed concrete brick surfaces
c. shall be dry-brushed at the end of each day's work and after any
required pointing, using stiff-fiber bristled brushes.
3.21.2 Clay or Shale Brick Surfaces
Clean exposed clay or shale brick masonry surfaces as necessary to obtain

surfaces free of stain, dirt, mortar and grout daubs, efflorescence, and
discoloration or scum from cleaning operations. After cleaning, examine
the sample panel of similar material for discoloration or stain as a result
of cleaning. If the sample panel is discolored or stained, change the
method of cleaning to ensure that the masonry surfaces in the structure
will not be adversely affected. The exposed masonry surfaces shall be
water-soaked and then cleaned with a solution proportioned 1/2 cup
trisodium phosphate and 1/2 cup laundry detergent to one gallon of water or
cleaned with a proprietary masonry cleaning agent specifically recommended
for the color and texture by the clay products manufacturer. The solution
shall be applied with stiff fiber brushes, followed immediately by thorough
rinsing with clean water. Proprietary cleaning agents shall be used in
conformance with the cleaning product manufacturer's printed
recommendations. Efflorescence shall be removed in conformance with the
brick manufacturer's recommendations.
3.22 BEARING PLATES
Set bearing plates for beams, joists, joist girders and similar structural
members to the proper line and elevation with damp-pack bedding mortar,
except where non-shrink grout is indicated. Bedding mortar and non-shrink
grout shall be as specified in Section 03 31 00.00 10 CAST-IN-PLACE
STRUCTURAL CONCRETE .
3.23 PROTECTION
Protect facing materials against staining. Cover top of walls with

nonstaining waterproof covering or membrane when work is not in progress.
Covering of the top of the unfinished walls shall continue until the wall
is waterproofed with a complete roof or parapet system. Covering shall
extend a minimum of 2 feet down on each side of the wall and shall be held
securely in place. Before starting or resuming, top surface of masonry in
place shall be cleaned of loose mortar and foreign material.
3.24 WASTE MANAGEMENT
Manage waste according to the Waste Management Plan and as follows.

Minimize water used to wash mixing equipment. Use trigger operated spray
nozzles for water hoses.
3.24.1 Separate and Recycle Waste
Place materials defined as hazardous or toxic waste in designated

containers. Fold up metal banding, flatten, and place in designated area
for recycling. Collect wood packing shims and pallets and place in
designated area. Use leftover mixed mortar as retaining wall footing
ballast underground utility pipe kickers where lower strength mortar meets
the requirements for bulk fill. Separate masonry waste and place in
designated area for use as structural fill. Separate selected masonry
waste and excess for landscape uses, either whole or crushed as ground
cover.
3.24.2 Take-Back Program
Collect information from manufacturer for take-back program options. Set

aside scrap packaging to be returned to manufacturer for recycling into new
product. When such a service is not available, local recyclers shall be
sought after to reclaim the materials. Submit documentation that includes
contact information, summary of procedures, and the limitations and
conditions applicable to the project. Indicate manufacturer's commitment
to reclaim materials for recycling and/or reuse.
3.25 TEST REPORTS
3.25.1 Field Testing of Mortar
Take at least three specimens of mortar each day. Spread a layer of mortar
1/2 to 5/8 inch thick on the masonry units and allowed to stand for one
minute. Prepare and test the specimens for compressive strength in
accordance with ASTM C 780. Submit test results.
3.25.2 Field Testing of Grout
Field sampling and testing of grout shall be in accordance with the

applicable provisions of ASTM C 1019. A minimum of three specimens of
grout per day shall be sampled and tested. Each specimen shall have a
minimum ultimate compressive strength of 2000 psi at 28 days. Submit test
results.
3.25.3 Efflorescence Test
Test brick, which will be exposed to weathering, for efflorescence.

Schedule tests far enough in advance of starting masonry work to permit
retesting if necessary. Sampling and testing shall conform to the

applicable provisions of ASTM C 67. Units meeting the definition of
"effloresced" will be subject to rejection. Submit test results.
3.25.4 Prism Tests
Perform at least one prism test sample for each 5,000 square feet of wall
but not less than three such samples shall be made for any building. Three
prisms will be used in each sample. Prisms shall be tested in accordance
with ACI 530/530.1. Seven-day tests may be used provided the relationship
between the 7- and 28-day strengths of the masonry is established by the
tests of the materials used. Compressive strength shall not be less than
2800 psi at 28 days. If the compressive strength of any prism falls below
the specified value by more than 500 psi, steps shall be taken to assure
that the load-carrying capacity of the structure is not jeopardized. If
the likelihood of low-strength masonry is confirmed and computations
indicate that the load-carrying capacity may have been significantly
reduced, tests of cores drilled, or prisms sawed, from the area in question
may be required. In such case, three specimens shall be taken for each
prism test more than 500 psi below the specified value. Masonry in the
area in question shall be considered structurally adequate if the average
compressive strength of three specimens is equal to at least 85 percent of
the specified value, and if the compressive strength of no single specimen
is less than 75 percent of the specified value. Additional testing of
specimens extracted from locations represented by erratic core or prism
strength test results will be permitted. Submit test results.
3.25.5 Single-Wythe Masonry Wall Water Penetration Test
Prior to start of field construction of the single-wythe masonry wall,

perform masonry wall water penetration test on mock-up wall assemblies
consisting of the identical design, materials, mix, and construction
methods as the actual wall construction and in accordance with
ASTM E 514/E 514M. Prepare a minimum of three specimens and cure for
minimum 28 days prior to testing. Construct panels by the same methods,
processes, and applications to be used on the project's construction site.
The spray test duration shall be 6 hours for each specimen. No water shall
be visible on back of test panels during the test and any areas of dampness
on the backside of the test panels shall not exceed 25 percent of the wall
area. Dampness is defined as any area of surface darkening or discoloration
due to moisture penetration or accumulation below the observed surface.
Construct additional test panels for each failed test performed until three
test panels pass the test. Factors that can affect test performance
include materials, mixing, and quality of application and workmanship.
Materials, mixing, and methods adjustments may be necessary in order to
provide construction that passes the water penetration test. Document and
record the test specimen construction materials and application and provide
written test report in accordance with ASTM E 514/E 514M, supplemented by a
detailed discussion of the specifics of test panel construction,
application methods and processes used, quality of construction, and any
variances or deviations that may have occurred between test panels during
test panel construction. For failed test panels, identify in the
supplemental report any variances, deficiencies or flaws that contributed
to test panel failure and itemize the precautions to be taken in field
construction of the masonry wall to prevent similar deficiencies and assure
the wall construction replicates test panel conditions that pass the water
penetration test. Submit the complete, certified test report, including
supplemental report, to the Contracting Officer prior to start of
single-wythe masonry wall construction. Significant changes to materials,
proportions, or construction techniques from those used in the passing

water penetration test are grounds for performing new tests, at the
discretion of the Contracting Officer.
SECTION 04 21 13.13
NONBEARING MASONRY VENEER/STEEL STUD WALLS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

AATCC 127 (2008) Water Resistance: Hydrostatic

Pressure Test
AISC 325 (2005) Steel Construction Manual

ENGINEERS (ASHRAE)
ASHRAE FUN IP (2009; Errata 2010) Fundamentals Handbook,

I-P Edition
AWS D1.3/D1.3M (2008; Errata 2008) Structural Welding

Code - Sheet Steel


(Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and
Steel Products

Hardware
ASTM A 36/A 36M (2008) Standard Specification for Carbon

Structural Steel
ASTM A 653/A 653M (2009a) Standard Specification for Steel

Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or
Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by
the Hot-Dip Process
SECTION 04 21 13.13 Page 1

ASTM C 1002 (2007) Standard Specification for Steel

Self-Piercing Tapping Screws for the
Application of Gypsum Panel Products or
Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel
Studs

Measurement of Masonry Flexural Bond
Strength
ASTM C 1177/C 1177M (2008) Standard Specification for Glass

Mat Gypsum Substrate for Use as Sheathing
ASTM C 1396/C 1396M (2009a) Standard Specification for Gypsum

Board
ASTM C 216 (2010) Facing Brick (Solid Masonry Units

ASTM C 270 (2010) Standard Specification for Mortar

for Unit Masonry

ASTM C 578 (2010) Standard Specification for Rigid,

ASTM C 591 (2009) Standard Specification for Unfaced

Preformed Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate
Thermal Insulation
ASTM C 665 (2006) Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal

Insulation for Light Frame Construction
and Manufactured Housing

and Testing Brick and Structural Clay Tile
ASTM C 744 (2010) Prefaced Concrete and Calcium

Silicate Masonry Units
ASTM C 780 (2009) Preconstruction and Construction

Evaluation of Mortars for Plain and
Reinforced Unit Masonry
ASTM C 90 (2009) Loadbearing Concrete Masonry Units
ASTM C 91 (2005) Masonry Cement
ASTM C 955 (2009a) Load-Bearing (Transverse and

Axial) Steel Studs, Runners (Tracks), and
Bracing or Bridging for Screw Application
of Gypsum Panel Products and Metal Plaster
Bases
ASTM D 1056 (2007) Standard Specification for Flexible

Cellular Materials - Sponge or Expanded

Rubber
ASTM D 1330 (2004) Rubber Sheet Gaskets
ASTM D 1667 (2005) Flexible Cellular Materials - Poly

(Vinyl Chloride) Foam (Closed-Cell)
ASTM D 1777 (1996; R 2007) Thickness of Textile

Materials
ASTM D 2103 (2010) Standard Specification for

Polyethylene Film and Sheeting
ASTM D 5261 (2010) Measuring Mass Per Unit Area of

Geotextiles
ASTM D 774/D 774M (1997; R 2007) Bursting Strength of Paper
ASTM E 84 (2010b) Standard Test Method for Surface

Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials
1.2 SUBMITTALS

submittals not having a "G" designation. When used, a designation following
the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal
for the Government. Submit the following in accordance with Section
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Detail Drawings
SD-04 Samples
Expansion Joint Materials

Clay or Shale Brick
Concrete Masonry Unit
Prefaced Concrete Masonry Unit
Sample Panel
SD-06 Test Reports
Calculations
SD-07 Certificates
Clay or Shale Brick

Concrete Masonry Unit
Joint Reinforcement
Expansion Joint Materials
Insulation
Exterior Sheathing
Moisture Barrier
Vapor Retarder
Veneer Anchors
Welding

1.3.1 Sample Panel
After the material samples are approved and prior to starting masonry work,
build a sample masonry panel on the project site where directed. The
sample panel shall be not less than 6 feet long by 4 feet high of typical
wall thickness for the construction represented. The panel shall show
color range, texture, bond pattern, expansion joints, and cleaning of the
masonry as required in the work. The panel shall also show cold-formed
steel framing, insulation, gypsum wallboard, gypsum sheathing, moisture
barrier, vapor barrier, veneer anchors, joint reinforcement, steel shelf
angles, flashing and weep holes. Use the approved sample panel as a
standard of workmanship required in the actual installation; protect the
sample panel from weather and construction operations. Do not remove the
panel until the masonry veneer/steel stud wall work has been completed and
accepted. Also submit a portable panel, approximately 2 by 2 feet,
containing approximately 24 concrete masonry units to establish the range
of color and texture. One of each type of masonry veneer anchor used.
1.3.2 Efflorescence Tests
Perform efflorescence tests by an approved commercial testing laboratory.

Sampling for the tests shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.
Sample and test brick for efflorescence in accordance with ASTM C 67 and
the rating shall be: "not effloresced".
Submit details of cold-formed steel framing and support around openings,

including framing connections, steel lintels, steel shelf angles,
attachment to other building elements and bridging. Drawings shall
indicate thickness, material, dimensions, protective coatings, and section
properties of all steel lintels and shelf angles used in exterior wall
framing. Drawings shall also indicate size and type of all fasteners
including size and type of all welds.
Deliver cementitious materials in unopened containers plainly marked and

labeled with manufacturer's names and brands. Store cementitious materials
in dry, weather-tight enclosures or covers. The masonry products shall be
stored off the ground and protected from inclement weather. Materials
shall be delivered and handled avoiding chipping, breakage, bending or
other damage, and contact with soil or other contaminating materials.
Store sand and other aggregates preventing contamination or segregation and
under a weather-tight covering permitting good air circulation. Finish of
the framing members shall be maintained at all times, using an approved
high zinc dust content galvanizing repair paint whenever necessary to
prevent the formation of rust. Store insulation, moisture barrier, and
gypsum sheathing in dry, well ventilated, weather-tight areas protected
from sunlight and excessive heat. Air infiltration type vapor barrier
shall be stored in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 VENEER WYTHE
Submit certificates stating that the materials and welders meet the
requirements specified. Each certificate shall be signed by an authorized
certification official and shall include their organization and position
and shall identify the products covered under their certifying signature.
The source of masonry materials which will affect the appearance of the
finished work shall not be changed after the work has started except with
the Contracting Officer's approval.
2.1.1 Clay or Shale Brick
Clay or shale brick veneer shall be masonry units conforming to ASTM C 216,
Type FBS. Color range and texture shall be as indicated and conforming to
the approved sample. Use grade SW for all brickwork. Brick unit sizes
shall be modular.
2.1.2 Concrete Masonry Unit
Concrete masonry unit veneer shall be solid and conform to ASTM C 90.
Architectural type, color range and texture shall be as indicated and
conforming to the approved sample. Masonry unit sizes shall be modular as
shown.
2.1.3 Prefaced Concrete Masonry Unit
Prefaced concrete masonry unit veneer shall conform to ASTM C 744 using
masonry units conforming to ASTM C 90. Prefaced concrete unit facing shall
turn over the edges and ends of the unit at least 3/8 inch in the direction
of the thickness of the unit to form a lip at least 1/16 inch thick.
Variation in color and texture shall not exceed that of the approved
samples. Masonry unit sizes shall be modular.
2.2 MORTAR
Provide mortar conforming to ASTM C 270, Type S. Mortar mix shall be based
on proportion specifications. Laboratory testing of mortar shall be in
accordance with the preconstruction evaluation of mortar section of
ASTM C 780. Cement shall have a low alkali content and be of one brand.
Provide aggregates from one source.
2.2.1 Masonry Cement
Masonry cement, in conformance with ASTM C 91, may be used in the mortar.
When using a masonry cement, perform a comparative test between a portland
cement-lime mortar and the masonry cement mortar proposed for the project
to evaluate the ASTM C 1072 bond and the ASTM C 780 compressive strength of
the two mixes. Conduct the test with the proposed masonry units for the
project. The masonry cement mortar will be acceptable if the bond and
compressive strength values are equal to or higher than the portland
cement-lime mix. Limit the air-content of the masonry cement to 12 percent
maximum.

2.2.2 Admixtures

subject to approval. Accelerating admixtures shall be non-corrosive,
contain less than 0.2 percent chlorides, and conform to ASTM C 494/C 494M,
Type C.
2.3 JOINT REINFORCEMENT
Provide joint reinforcement of steel wire conforming to ASTM A 82/A 82M.

Fabrication shall be by welding. Tack welding will not be permitted.
Reinforcement shall be zinc-coated after fabrication in accordance with
ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B-2. Joint reinforcement shall consist of at
least 1 continuous longitudinal wire in the veneer wythe. Minimum wire
cross section shall be 0.017 square inches.
2.4 COLD-FORMED STEEL FRAMING
Provide cold-formed framing consisting of steel studs, top and bottom

tracks, runners, horizontal bridging, and other cold-formed members and
other accessories. All members and components made of sheet steel shall be
hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 653/A 653M with a minimum
coating thickness of G 60. Framing covered herein shall be used only in
framing the exterior masonry veneer steel stud wall system as indicated on
the detail drawings. Metal framing for interior partitions is specified in
Section 09 22 00 METAL SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES.
2.4.1 Steel Studs
Furnish studs as shown in the contract drawings.
2.4.2 Runners, Tracks, Bridging and Accessories
Cold-formed steel sheet framing members, components, and accessories, other

than the steel studs, shall conform to ASTM C 955 and be of steel
conforming to ASTM A 653/A 653M, Grade 33, having a minimum yield strength
of 33,000 psi.
2.5 INSULATION

RECOVERED MATERIALS.
2.5.1 Blanket Insulation
Insulation placed between the steel studs shall be batt or blanket type
mineral wool conforming to ASTM C 665, Type II.
2.5.2 Rigid Board-Type Insulation
Insulation for wall cavities shall be rigid board-type insulation. Rigid

board-type insulation shall be either polystyrene conforming to ASTM C 578,
Type I or II, Grade 2 or polyurethane conforming to ASTM C 591. Insulation
thickness shall be sufficient to provide an R-value of 40.
2.6 GYPSUM WALLBOARD
Gypsum wallboard that is installed on the interior side of the cold-formed

steel framing system shall be as specified in Section 09 29 00 GYPSUM BOARD.

2.7 EXTERIOR SHEATHING
Gypsum sheathing that is installed on the exterior side of the cold-formed

steel framing system shall have a minimum thickness of 1/2 inch and shall be
4 feet wide. Glass mat gypsum sheathing shall conform to
ASTM C 1396/C 1396M and ASTM C 1177/C 1177M. Glass mat gypsum sheathing
shall have a water-resistant core with a water-resistant glass mat embedded
onto core and shall have a zero flame, zero smoke developed, and shall have
mold and mildew resistant surface. Gypsum sheathing shall conform to
ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. Gypsum sheathing shall have a water-resistant gypsum
core with a water-repellent paper firmly bonded to the core. Plywood
sheathing shall be in accordance with APA PS 1, grade C-D with exterior
glue.
2.8 MOISTURE PROTECTION
2.8.1 Moisture Barrier
The moisture barrier shall be of high-density polyethylene fiber material a

minimum of 8 feet in width. The material shall meet the following minimum
requirements: Base weight 24.0 lbs/1000 ft ASTM D 5261; thickness 0.013 in
ASTM D 1777; bursting strength 116 psiASTM D 774/D 774M; Hydrostatic
Pressure Resistance 42 in AATCC 127; Flammability Flame Spread: 0 ASTM E 84;
smoke developed value: 25 ASTM E 84. Aasphalt-saturated felt can be used
as the moisture barrier, if approved by the Contracting Officer, and
attachment shall be as recommended by the manufacturer.
2.8.2 Vapor Retarder
The vapor retarder shall be polyethylene film conforming to ASTM D 2103, 6

mil minimum thickness.
2.8.3 Staples
Staples for attaching the moisture barrier to the exterior sheathing shall
be the type and size best suited to provide a secure connection. Staples
shall be made from either galvanized steel or stainless steel wire.
2.8.4 Joint Tape
Tape for sealing the joints in the vapor retarder shall be laminated tape
with pressure sensitive adhesive as recommended by the manufacturer of the
polyethylene film.
2.9 VENEER ANCHORS
Anchor assemblies for the attachment of the masonry veneer to the

cold-formed steel framing, structural steel and/or concrete beam and column
members, and concrete floor slabs shall be designed for the design loadings
shown. Anchors shall transfer the design loadings from the masonry veneer
to the cold-formed steel framing system or other support without exceeding
the allowable stresses and deflections in the anchors. Length of anchor
wires shall be such that the outermost wires lie between 1-1/4 inch from
each face of the masonry veneer. Provide anchors wires without drips.
Wires for veneer anchors shall be rectangular or triangular hoops formed
from 3/16 inch diameter steel wire conforming to ASTM A 82/A 82M. Anchor
assemblies, including wires and anchor plates, shall be hot-dip galvanized
conforming to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B-2. The veneer anchor shall have a

minimum capacity of 200 pounds. The load-displacement capacity of each

veneer anchor, both in direct pull-out for tension and compression, shall
be not less than 2000 pounds/inch (or a deflection of 0.05 inches/100 pounds
of load in tension or compression). In the direction perpendicular to the
masonry veneer, the anchor assembly shall have a maximum play of 1/16 inch.
2.9.1 Adjustable Pintle-Eye Type Wire Anchors
Adjustable pintle-eye type wall anchors shall be two pieces rectangular

type double pintle anchors.
2.9.2 Dovetail Anchors
Dovetail slots are specified in Section 03 30 00.00 10 CAST-IN-PLACE

CONCRETE.
2.10 CONNECTIONS
Screws, bolts and anchors shall be hot-dip galvanized in accordance with

ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M as appropriate.
2.10.1 Framing Screws, Bolts and Anchors
Screws, bolts and anchors used in the assembly of the cold-formed steel
framing system shall be as required by design of the framing system for
the specified loading. Screw, bolt and anchor sizes shall be shown on the
detail drawings.
2.10.2 Welding
Design welded connections and perform all welding in accordance with

AWS D1.3/D1.3M. Welders shall be qualified in accordance with
AWS D1.3/D1.3M. All welds shall be cleaned and touched-up with zinc-rich
paint.
2.10.3 Veneer Anchor Screws
Screws for attachment of the veneer anchors to the cold-formed steel

framing members shall be as required by design to provide the needed
pullout load capacity but not less than No. 12. Show screws on the detail
drawings. The length of screws shall be such that the screws penetrate the
holding member by not less than 5/8 inch.
2.10.4 Gypsum Sheathing Screws
Screws for attachment of gypsum sheathing to cold-formed steel framing

shall conform to ASTM C 1002, Type S.
2.11 SYNTHETIC RUBBER WASHERS
Synthetic rubber washers for placement between veneer anchors and the
moisture barrier on the outside face of the exterior sheathing shall
conform to ASTM D 1330, Grade I.
2.12 EXPANSION JOINT MATERIALS
Expansion joint materials shall be bellows or U-shaped type conforming to

Section 07 57 13 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL. Premolded type shall be
closed-cell cellular rubber conforming to ASTM D 1056 or closed-cell vinyl

or polyvinyl chloride conforming to ASTM D 1667.
2.13 FLASHING
Copper or stainless steel flashing shall conform to the requirements in

Section 07 57 13 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL. Flashing shall be supplied in a
continuous sheet extending from the exterior sheathing across the cavity
and through the masonry veneer as shown.
2.14 STEEL LINTELS AND SHELF ANGLES
Steel shapes used for lintels and shelf angles shall conform to
ASTM A 36/A 36M. Provide lintels and shelf angles as shown. These steel
members shall be hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 123/A 123M.
2.15 CAULKING AND SEALANTS
Caulking and sealants shall be as specified in Section 07 92 00 JOINT

SEALANTS.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
Wall sections, types of construction and dimensions shall be as shown.

Metal door and window frames and other special framing shall be built and
anchored into the wall system as indicated. Submit Calculations
demonstrating the structural adequacy of steel lintels and shelf angles for
the calculated gravity loads being supported; this analysis shall be in
accordance with AISC 325. Test results demonstrating that the veneer
anchors are structurally adequate to resist the specified loadings shall be
submitted for approval. Calculations demonstrating the insulation shown on
the drawings provides the specified U-value for heat transmission of the
completed exterior wall construction; this analysis shall be in accordance
with ASHRAE FUN IP. Manufacturer's descriptive data and installation
instructions for the insulation, the vapor barrier and the moisture
barrier..
3.2 STEEL STUD WALL FRAMING
The top track of the stud wall system shall be slip jointed to accommodate
vertical deflections of the supporting members as shown on the drawings.
Securely anchor top and bottom tracks to resist track rotation by
alternating fastener locations to provide two rows, one row near each track
flange as shown on the drawings. Both flanges of all steel studs shall be
securely fastened with screws to the flanges of the top and bottom tracks
as shown on the drawings. All details for affixing steel studs to runners
and all other sheet steel framing members along with all details necessary
for anchorage of the steel stud wall system to the building structural
systems shall be as shown on the drawings. Provide horizontal bridging as
necessary. Space studs as required to resist the specified design wind or
seismic loadings, but not exceeding 24 inches on center. Coordinate stud
spacing with sheathing and anchor requirements. At wall openings for
doors, windows and other similar features, the framing system shall provide
for the installation and anchorage of the required subframes or finish
frames. Steel frames shall be securely attached through built-in anchors
to the nearest stud on each side of the opening with self-drilling screws.
Double studs shall be provided at both jambs of all door openings. Door
frames and other built-in items shall be spot grouted at the jamb anchor

locations.
3.3 STEEL SHELF ANGLES
Unless otherwise shown, steel shelf angles shall be provided in segments

that do not exceed 10 feet in length. At building corners, shelf angle
segments shall be mitered and securely attached together by welding with
legs no less than 4 feet where possible. Shelf angle segments shall not be
connected together but instead shall be installed with 1/4 inch wide gaps
between the segments. Fabrication and erection tolerances shall be in
accordance with the AISC Code of Standard Practice, as indicated in AISC 325.
3.4 INSULATION
The actual installed thickness of insulation shall provide a maximum

thermal R of 40 for the completed exterior wall construction as determined
in accordance with ASHRAE FUN IP. Provide insulation thickness as shown on
the approved drawings. Installation, except as otherwise specified or
shown, shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions which
shall be approved by the Contracting Officer. Install insulation between
wall framing members. Rigid insulation shall be installed in accordance
with the manufacturer's instructions with proper connections through the
insulation to prevent the insulation from carrying loads directly.
Insulation with facings shall be secured to the sides of the framing
members to provide a continuous seal so that the entire weight of the
insulation is carried by the framing members. Where electrical outlets,
ducts, pipes, vents or other utility items occur, place insulation on the
dry side of the item away from excessive humidity.
3.5 GYPSUM WALLBOARD
Install gypsum wallboard on the interior face of the cold-formed steel

framing system. Installation shall be as specified in Section 09 29 00
GYPSUM BOARD except at vertical slip joints, the gypsum wallboard shall be
connected to the vertical studs to prevent movement at the slip joint.
3.6 EXTERIOR SHEATHING
Install sheathing on the exterior face of the cold-formed steel framing

system with self-drilling screws. Locate screws a minimum of 3/8 inch from
the ends and edges of sheathing panels and spaced not more than 8 inches on
each supporting member except at vertical slip joints, the sheathing shall
be connected to the vertical studs to prevent movement of the slip joint.
Edges and ends of gypsum sheathing panels shall be butted snugly with
vertical joints staggered to provide full and even support for the moisture
barrier. Holes and gaps resulting from abandoned screw installations, from
damage to panels, and from cutting and fitting of panels at junctures with
doors, windows, foundation walls, floor slabs and other similar locations
shall be filled with exterior rubber-base caulk.
3.7 MOISTURE PROTECTION
3.7.1 Moisture Barrier
Install the polyethylene fiber moisture barrier on the outer face of the
exterior sheathing. The moisture barrier shall be installed horizontally
with each sheet lapped not less than 6 inches over the sheet below.
Vertical end joints shall be lapped not less than 6 inches. Installation
shall be as recommended in the manufacturer's printed literature.

Install a vapor retarder between the steel studs and the gypsum wall board
in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations to form a complete
retarder to vapor infiltration. The joints shall be lapped and sealed with
tape.
3.8 VENEER ANCHORS
Attach veneer anchors with screws through the sheathing and rigid
insulation to the steel studs or other support members at the locations
shown. When rigid insulation is used, the method of connecting the veneer
anchor through the insulation shall be approved by the Contracting
Officer. Install veneer anchors with the outermost wires lying between 5/8
inch from each face of the masonry veneer. Use synthetic rubber washers
between the anchor connector plates and the moisture barrier. Use a clutch
torque slip screw gun on screws attaching veneer anchors to cold-formed
steel members. Veneer anchors with corrugated sheet metal or wire mesh
members extending across the wall cavity shall not be used. There shall be
one veneer anchor for each two square feet of wall and shall be attached to
steel studs and other supports with a maximum spacing of 24 inches on
center. For pintle-eye anchors the vertical distance between the pintle
section horizontal wires and the eye section horizontal wires shall not
exceed 1/2 inch. Install dovetail slots as specified in the Section
03 30 00.00 10 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE.
3.9 FLASHING
Provide continuous flashing at the bottom of the wall cavity just above
grade. Flashing shall also be provided above and below openings at lintels
and sills, at shelf angles, and as indicated on the drawings. Flashing
shall be as detailed and as specified in Section 07 57 13 FLASHING AND
SHEET METAL. Flashing shall be lapped a minimum of 6 inches at joints and
shall be sealed with a mastic as recommended by the flashing manufacturer.
Ends over doors, windows and openings shall be turned up and secured.
Flashing shall be lapped under the moisture barrier a minimum of 6 inches
and securely attached to the gypsum sheathing. Flashing shall extend
through the exterior face of the masonry veneer and shall be turned down to
form a drip.
3.10 MASONRY VENEER
Construct exterior masonry wythes to the thickness indicated on the

drawings. A cavity consisting of a 3 inch minimum width air space will be
provided between the moisture barrier and the masonry veneer. Masonry
veneer shall not be installed until the exterior sheathing, moisture
barrier, veneer anchors and flashing have been installed on the cold-formed
steel framing system. Take extreme care to avoid damage to the moisture
barrier and flashing during construction of the masonry veneer. Any
portion of the moisture barrier and flashing that is damaged shall be
repaired or replaced prior to completion of the veneer. Masonry shall be
placed in running bond pattern. Longitudinal reinforcement consisting of
at least one continuous galvanized steel wire shall be placed in the veneer
wythe. The minimum wire size shall be 9 gauge. bond pattern shall be as
indicated on the drawings. Vertical joints on alternating courses shall be
aligned and kept vertically plumb. Solid masonry units shall be laid in a
non-furrowed full bed of mortar, beveled and sloped toward the center of
the wythe on which the mortar is placed. Units shall be shoved into place

so that the vertical mortar joints are completely full and tight. Units
that have been disturbed after the mortar has stiffened shall be removed,
cleaned and relaid. Remove mortar which protrudes more than 1/2 inch into
the cavity space. Provide means to ensure that the cavity space is kept
clean of mortar droppings and other loose debris. Chases and raked-out
joints shall be kept free from mortar and debris. Faces of units used in
finished exposed areas shall be free from chipped edges, material texture
or color defects or other imperfections distracting from the appearance of
the finished work.
3.10.1 Surface Preparation
Surfaces on which masonry is to be laid shall be cleaned of laitance or

other foreign material. No units having a film of water shall be laid.
3.10.2 Hot Weather Construction
Temperatures of masonry units and mortar shall not be greater than 120
degrees F when laid. Masonry erected when the ambient air temperature is
more than 99 degrees F in the shade and when the relative humidity is less
than 50 percent shall be given protection from the direct exposure to wind
and sun for 48 hours after the installation.
3.10.3 Cold Weather Construction
Temperatures of masonry units and mortar shall not be less than 40 degrees F
when laid. When the ambient air temperature is 32 degrees F or less,
masonry veneer under construction shall be protected and maintained at a
temperature greater than 32 degrees F for a period of 48 hours after
installation. Submit for approval the proposed method of maintaining the
temperature within the specified range prior to implementation. No units
shall be laid on a surface having a film of frost or water.
3.10.4 Tolerances
Masonry shall be laid plumb, level and true to line within the tolerances
specified in TABLE 1. All masonry corners shall be square unless otherwise
indicated on the drawings.
TABLE 1
Variation From Plumb

______________________
In adjacent units 1/8 inch

In 10 feet 1/4 inch
In 20 feet 3/8 inch
Variation From Level Or Grades

________________________________
In 10 feet 1/8 inch

In 20 feet 1/4 inch
Variation From Linear Building Lines

______________________________________

In 20 feet 1/2 inch

Variation From Cross Sectional Dimensions Of Walls

____________________________________________________
Plus 1/2 inch

Minus 1/4 inch
3.10.5 Mixing of Mortar
Mix mortar in a mechanically operated mortar mixer for at least 3 minutes

but not more than 5 minutes. Measurement of ingredients for mortar shall
be by volume. Measurement of sand shall be accomplished by the use of a
container of known capacity or shovel count based on a container of known
capacity. Mix water with the dry ingredients in sufficient amount to
produce a workable mixture which will adhere to the vertical surfaces of
the masonry units. Mortar that has stiffened because of loss of water
through evaporation shall be retempered by adding water to restore the
proper consistency and workability. Discard mortar that has reached its
initial set or that has not been used within 2-1/2 hours.
3.10.6 Cutting and Fitting
Wherever possible, use full units in lieu of cut units. Where cut units
are required to accommodate the design, cutting shall be done by masonry
mechanics using power masonry saws. Wet-cut units shall be dried to the
same surface-dry appearances of uncut units before being placed in the
work. Cut edges shall be clean, true and sharp. Openings to accommodate
pipes, conduits, and other accessories shall be neatly formed so that
framing or escutcheons required will completely conceal the cut edges.
Insofar as practicable, all cutting and fitting shall be accomplished while
masonry work is being erected.
3.10.7 Masonry Units
When being laid, masonry units shall have suction sufficient to hold the
mortar and to absorb water from the mortar, but shall be damp enough to
allow the mortar to remain in a plastic state to permit the unit to be
leveled and plumbed immediately after being laid without destroying bond.
Masonry units with frogging shall be laid with the frog side down and
better or face side exposed to view. Masonry units that are cored,
recessed or otherwise deformed may be used in sills or in other areas
except where deformations will be exposed to view.
3.10.8 Mortar Joints
Mortar joint widths shall be uniform and such that the specified widths are
maintained throughout. Joints shall be of thickness equal to the
difference between the actual and nominal dimensions of the masonry units
in either height or length but in no case shall the joints be less than 1/4
inch nor more than 1/2 inch wide. Joints shall be tooled slightly
concave. Tooling shall be accomplished when mortar is thumbprint hard and
in a manner that will compress and seal the mortar joint and produce joints
of straight and true lines free of tool marks.

3.10.9 Joint Reinforcement
Unless otherwise shown, space joint reinforcement at 16 inches on center

vertically. Joint reinforcement shall not be placed in the same masonry
course as veneer anchors unless the anchors are designed to accommodate the
wire. Place joint reinforcement so that longitudinal wires are centered in
the veneer wythe for solid units. Longitudinal wires shall be fully
embedded in mortar for their entire length. Splices in joint reinforcement
shall be lapped a minimum of 6 inches. Joint reinforcement shall be
discontinuous at all veneer joints. The minimum cover for joint
reinforcement is 5/8 inches.
3.10.10 Veneer Joints
Provide concrete masonry veneer joints at the locations shown on the

drawings. Details of joints shall be as indicated on the drawings. Joints
shall be clean and free of mortar and shall contain only backer rod and
sealant, installed in accordance with Section 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS.
Horizontal reinforcement shall not extend through the joints.
3.10.11 Weep Holes
Provide weep holes at all flashing locations at intervals of 16 inches.

Place weep holes in head joints just above the flashing. Weep holes shall
be formed by leaving head joints open or head joint vents may be used.
Keep weep holes free of mortar and other obstructions.
3.10.12 Head Joint Vents
Provide head joint vents near the top of the veneer wythe at the same
spacing as the weep holes.
3.10.13 Discontinuous Work
When necessary to temporarily discontinue the work, step back the masonry
for joining when work resumes. Toothing may be used only when specifically
approved. Before resuming work, loose mortar shall be removed and the
exposed joint shall be thoroughly cleaned. Top of walls subjected to rain
or snow shall be covered with nonstaining waterproof covering or membrane
when work is not in process. Covering shall extend a minimum of 2 feet
down on each side of the wall and shall be held securely in place.
3.10.14 Cleaning
Completely remove mortar daubs or splashings from finished exposed masonry

surfaces before they harden or set up. Before completion of the work,
defects in mortar joints shall be raked out as necessary, filled with
mortar, and tooled to match the adjacent existing mortar in the joints.
The proposed cleaning method shall be done on the sample wall panel and the
sample panel shall be examined for discoloration or stain. If the sample
panel is discolored or stained, change the method of cleaning to ensure
that the masonry surfaces in the structure will not be adversely affected.
Masonry surfaces shall not be cleaned, other than removing excess surface
mortar, until mortar in joints has hardened. Cleaning shall be
accomplished with the use of stiff bristle fiber brushes, wooden paddles,
wooden scrapers, or other suitable nonmetallic tools. The exposed brick
surfaces shall be saturated with water and cleaned with a proprietary brick
cleaning agent recommended by the clay products manufacturer. The cleaning
agent shall not adversely affect the brick masonry surfaces. Proprietary

cleaning agents shall be used in conformance with the cleaning product

manufacturer's printed recommendations. Remove efflorescence or other
stains in conformance with the recommendations of the masonry unit
manufacturer. After construction and cleaning, masonry surfaces shall be
left clean, free of mortar daubs, stain, and discolorations, including scum
from cleaning operations, and will have tight mortar joints throughout.
Metallic tools and brushes shall not be used for cleaning.
3.11 BUILDING EXPANSION JOINTS
Locate expansion joints where indicated and made of the size and details
shown.

SECTION 05 05 23.13 10
ULTRASONIC INSPECTION OF WELDMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

ASNT Q&A Bk C (1994) Question and Answer Book C:

Ultrasonic Testing Method; (Supplement to
Recommended Practice SNT-TC-1A)
ASNT RP SNT-TC-1A (2006) Recommended Practice
AWS D1.1/D1.1M (2010) Structural Welding Code - Steel
1.2 DEFINITIONS
1.2.1 A Scan
Method of data presentation on a cathode ray tube using rectangular

coordinates in which a horizontal base line indicates elapsed time when
reading from left to right. A vertical deflection in the base line
indicates reflect signal amplitude.
1.2.2 Acoustically Similar Material
Material the same as that to be inspected; or another material proven to

have acoustical velocity within plus or minus 3 percent and an attenuation
within plus or minus 0.25 dB/inch of the inspected material for the
inspection frequency and wave mode, using the same mode as that to be used
for inspection.
1.2.3 Amplitude
When referring to an indication in A scan presentation, amplitude is the

vertical height of the indication measured from peak-to-peak for radio
frequency indications and trace-to-peak for video indications.
1.2.4 Attenuation
Dissipation or loss of energy as ultrasonic vibrations travel through the

material. Attenuation is caused almost entirely by scattering of the
ultrasonic vibrations generated by the search unit.
1.2.5 Attenuation-Correction Controls
Circuitry to provide a continuous increase in amplification with respect to
SECTION 05 05 23.13 10 Page 1

time. This circuitry compensates for the reduction in sensitivity with

depth as a result of sound beam divergence and its attenuation in material.
1.2.6 Back Reflection or End Reflection
Reflection from the opposite side, end, or boundary of the material into
which the ultrasonic energy was introduced.
1.2.7 Calibrated Gain Control (Attenuator)
Circuitry with which gain can be reduced finite amounts by switching

electrical signal attenuation into the circuit.
1.2.8 Calibration
Process of comparing an instrument or device with a standard to determine

accuracy or produce a scale.
1.2.9 Cathode Ray Tube (CRT)
An electron tube in which a controlled beam of electrons from the cathode

is used to produce an image on a fluorescent screen at the end of the tube.
1.2.10 Couplant
Any material, usually a liquid or semiliquid, used between the search unit
and the inspection surface to exclude air and to convey the ultrasonic
vibrations between the search unit and the material being inspected.
1.2.11 Damping Control
Control that varies the duration of transducer ringing.
1.2.12 Decibel (dB)
Units for the logarithmic expression of the ratio of power levels. Power
levels can be functions of voltage, current, or impedance, for example.
Decibel units having no values of their own are only significant when a
reference is stated, as 10 dB above one reference level or 6 dB below
another reference level.
1.2.13 Delay Control
Means of delaying the pattern obtained on the CRT.
1.2.14 Discontinuity
Anything within a material that will cause a detectable interruption in an

ultrasonic beam.
1.2.15 Distance-Amplitude Correction Curve
Curve showing the relationship between signal amplitude and equal-sized

reflecting surfaces at various distances from the transducer. Reference
standards are used to obtain such curves.
1.2.16 Dynamic Range
Ratio of maximum to minimum size of reflective areas that can be adequately
SECTION 05 05 23.13 10 Page 2

distinguished on the CRT at a constant gain setting.
1.2.17 Effective Depth of Penetration
Maximum depth at which the sensitivity is satisfactory for the quality of

test desired.
1.2.18 Examination
Within the context of this specification, examination is equivalent to the

word "inspection."
1.2.19 Gain Control
Circuitry designed into the ultrasonic system to vary reflection

amplitude. This control is usually calibrated in decibels. It is also
called the sensitivity control.
1.2.20 Gross
Background displacement of the trace on the CRT from the established

baseline due to the gain setting, the characteristics of the test
equipment, or the material under examination.
1.2.21 Hertz
One complete set of recurrent values of a periodic quantity comprises a

cycle. In other words, any one set of periodic variations starting at one
condition and returning once to the same condition is a cycle.
1.2.22 Immersion Techniques
Test methods in which the part to be tested and the search units are
immersed in water or other suitable liquid couplant. A mechanical device
is used to firmly hold and direct the wave angle of the search unit. The
search unit does not contact the item being inspected.
1.2.23 Indication
Visual presentation on the cathode ray screen resulting from a sound beam
reflection from a boundary surface or discontinuity.
1.2.24 Initial Pulse Indication
Usually called the "initial pulse". A signal on the CRT screen marking the
instant at which a voltage impulse is applied to the transmitting crystal.
Its rising edge is frequently invisible due to the time lag in the probe
shoe and the consequent necessity to ensure coincidence between the time
base zero and the instant at which the transmitter pulse actually enters
the material under test.
1.2.25 Linearity
Property of an instrument revealed by a linear change in reflected signal

or displacement. The vertical linearity is determined by plotting the
change in ratios of signal amplitude from two adjacent reflections from an
area of known size. The horizontal linearity is determined by plotting the
distance the signal is displaced along the sweep against the change in
material thickness or by noting the spacing of multiple back reflections.
SECTION 05 05 23.13 10 Page 3

1.2.26 Longitudinal or Compressional Waves
Simple compression-rare-fraction waves in which particle motion within a

material is linear and in the direction of wave propagation. Also called
straight beams, or compressional or normal waves.
1.2.27 Longitudinal Wave Inspection
Ultrasonic technique, normally using straight beam methods, in which

longitudinal waves are the dominant form.
1.2.28 Mid-Screen Reflection
Reflection whose amplitude is equal to one-half the useable screen height

on the CRT.
1.2.29 Megahertz (MHz)
One million hertz per second frequency.
1.2.30 NDT Level I
An NDT Level I individual should be qualified to properly perform specific

calibrations, specific NDT, and specific evaluations for acceptance or
rejection determinations according to written instructions, and to record
results.
1.2.31 NDT Level II
An NDT Level II individual should be qualified to set up and calibrate

equipment and to interpret and evaluate results with respect to applicable
codes, standards, and specifications.
1.2.32 NDT Level III
An NDT Level III individual should be capable of establishing techniques

and procedures; interpreting codes, standards, specifications, and
procedures; and designating the particular NDT methods, techniques, and
procedures to be used.
1.2.33 Node
Distance a shear wave travels in a straight line from the inspection

surface before being reflected by the opposite surface.
1.2.34 Pulse Repetition Rate
Number of spaced pulses of sound per second sent into the material being
inspected.
1.2.35 Range Control
Means of expanding the pattern obtained on the CRT so that any portion of
the total distance being tested can be presented.
1.2.36 Reference Reflector
Standard reflector 0.06 inch diameter reference hole in the IIW reference
SECTION 05 05 23.13 10 Page 4

block. Other approved blocks may have a different diameter reflector.
1.2.37 Reflector
Boundary, consisting of an opposite side, crack, or separation, or a

distinct change in material such as slag or porosity that reflects the
ultrasonic energy the same as a mirror reflects light.
1.2.38 Refracted Waves
Waves that have undergone change of velocity and direction by passing from
one material to another material with different acoustical properties.
Refraction will occur wherever the angle of the incident wave to the
interface is other than perpendicular.
1.2.39 Rejectable Discontinuity (Defect)
Reflector large enough to produce a signal (decibel rating) that exceeds

the reject/repair line.
1.2.40 Resolution
Ability to clearly distinguish signals obtained from two reflective

surfaces with a minimum separation distance. Near-surface resolution is
the ability to clearly distinguish a signal from a reflector at a minimum
distance under the contact or near surface without interference from the
initial pulse signal. Far-surface resolution is the ability to clearly
distinguish signals from reflectors displaced at minimum distances from the
far or back surface when the sound beam is normal to that back surface.
1.2.41 Ringing
Excitation in a transducer due to the application of a short pulse of high

voltage.
1.2.42 Scanning
Procedure of moving the search unit or units along a test surface to obtain
complete inspection of the entire volume of a material being inspected.
Preliminary scanning refers to a somewhat common practice of rapidly
traversing a weld ultrasonically with a higher instrument gain or
sensitivity level than will be used for the evaluation. It gives the
operator an estimate of the welding quality and also makes all defects more
prominent and less likely to be missed.
1.2.43 Search Unit
Device containing a piezoelectric material used for introducing vibrations

into a material to be inspected or for receiving the vibrations reflected
from the material. The active element of the search unit is defined as the
effective transmitting area. Search units are also called transducers or
probes. They may be single or dual and contain one or two piezoelectric
elements, respectively, for transmission and reception. The single search
unit is sometimes enclosed in a transducer wheel or search unit wheel. The
search unit may be manually handled and placed in direct contact with the
material to be inspected or may be held in a fixture for immersion
techniques.
SECTION 05 05 23.13 10 Page 5

1.2.44 Sensitivity
Measure of the ultrasonic equipment's ability to detect discontinuities.

Quantitatively, it is the level of amplification of the receiver circuit in
the ultrasonic instrument necessary to produce the required indication on
the scope from the reference hole in the reference block. Also see
"Standard Reference Level."
1.2.45 Shear Waves
Waves in which the particles within the material vibrate perpendicularly to

the direction in which the wave travels or propagates. Also called
transverse waves.
1.2.46 Shear Wave Inspection
Inspection technique using shear waves in a material. The search unit is

placed at an angle to the contact surface of the material so the resultant
refracted sound is a shear wave at an angle to the normal.
1.2.47 Standard Reference Level
Mid-screen height reflection when beaming at the 0.06 inch hole in the
primary reference block or the reference hole in the secondary standard.
1.2.48 Surface Waves
Waves that propagate along the surface of the material and penetrate it to
only about 1/2-wavelength. Also known as Rayleigh waves.
1.2.49 Test Frequency
Operating frequency in hertz per second of the search unit during period of
activation. Frequency is usually expressed in megacycles per second or
megahertz. The latter term has been adopted for international use and is
preferred.
1.2.50 Video Form
Type of signal presentation on a CRT in which only the upper half of the
signal appears.
Procedures and Methods. Use the pulse echo contact method with an A scan
presentation for the ultrasonic inspection of welded joints, except that
immersion techniques may be used for some applications when approved by the
Contracting Officer. Use the procedures, methods, standards, and
description of equipment specified herein for inspection of weldments. The
procedure description shall include the following:
a. Couplant.
b. Search unit characteristics including angle, size, shape, nominal

frequency, type designation.
c. Method and type of wave.
d. Equipment and accessories including manufacturer, model number,
SECTION 05 05 23.13 10 Page 6

date of manufacture, last date of calibration, and the manufacturer's

electrical, physical, and performance specifications.
e. Decibel (dB) compensation system for distance-amplitude correction.
Perform ultrasonic inspections to detect the following defects:
a. Cracks or crack-like faults.

b. Root defects, including lack of penetration and fusion.
c. Lack of fusion between passes on the sidewall.
d. Porosity or inclusions and excessive undercutting.
1.3.1 Wave Types
The types of waves and the conditions under which they shall be used are
specified below:
a. Shear Waves. Unless conditions prohibit, use shear waves. A

longitudinal wave procedure may be used instead, if approved by the
Contracting Officer. Use refracted waves between 40 degrees and 70
degrees except where different angles are indicated in approved
procedures, such as for materials less than 1/2 inch thick, for
materials with sound velocities greater than in steel, when the
weldments are not readily accessible, or when existing backing rings or
backing strips are not removed. For inspection of weldments containing
backing rings or backing strips, adjust the instrument and select the
refracted angles in a way to separate the weldment and the backing ring
reflections. Establish the search unit angle and the resulting shear
wave angle in the material to be inspected for each application and
include this information in the procedure submitted for approval.
b. Longitudinal Waves. When conditions prohibit the use of shear

waves, longitudinal waves may be used. The procedure shall be
specially developed to suit the application and shall have the prior
approval of the Contracting Officer.
1.3.2 Changes in Procedure
Should application of an approved procedure not provide for good resolution

or adequate ultrasonic penetration in the items to be inspected (see
paragraph EQUIPMENT QUALIFICATIONS), make changes in procedure or equipment
such as frequency, pulse repetition rate, angle of search unit, couplant,
or oscilloscope. Demonstrate adequacy of the new procedure to the
Contracting Officer. The Government reserves the right to require a change
in test equipment during these tests if any of the following test system
characteristics fall below the levels listed in paragraph EQUIPMENT
QUALIFICATIONS: sensitivity, amplitude and distance linearity,
signal-to-noise ratio, entry and back surface resolution and penetration.
1.3.3 Ultrasonic Equipment
Provide ultrasonic equipment conforming to the requirements listed in

AWS D1.1/D1.1M Section Inspection, subsection UT and Part F, with the
following exceptions:
a. The ultrasonic test instruments shall be able to generate, receive,

and to present pulses in the frequency range from 1 to 10 megahertz
(MHz).
SECTION 05 05 23.13 10 Page 7

b. Measure the horizontal linearity of the ultrasonic instrument in

accordance with paragraph EQUIPMENT QUALIFICATIONS.
c. In addition to the resolution test specified in AWS D1.1/D1.1M,

subsection Ultrasonic Equipment, conduct both near- and far-surface
resolution tests in accordance with the tests specified for these
characteristics in the paragraph EQUIPMENT QUALIFICATIONS.
1.4 SUBMITTALS

SD-03 Product Data
Ultrasonic Inspection
A standard reference block and working standards as described in

paragraph REFERENCE STANDARDS. The procedures to be used for
personnel and equipment qualification, equipment calibration, and
inspection, at least 30 days prior to their intended use.
Approval by the Government will in no way affect the obligation of
the Contractor to employ qualified personnel, equipment, and
procedures, and to perform the inspection as specified.
SD-06 Test Reports
Reports containing the following information:
a. Identification and Location of Inspected Item: Name and

place of the inspected item, the person performing the inspection,
and the date of inspection.
b. Detail of Inspections: Details of methods, types of waves

used, search units, frequencies, inspection equipment
identification, and calibration data with enough information to
permit duplication of the inspection at a later date.
c. Response in Calibration: The response from the DSC or SC

block used in calibration and for acceptance/rejection in terms of
the response from the 0.06 inch reference hole in the standard IIW
block (primary standard).
d. Identification of Unacceptable Areas: Locations, dimensions,

types, and area of unacceptable defects and discontinuities giving
reflections over 50 percent of the reject/repair line. These may
be noted on a sketch or marked-up drawing.
e. Record of Repair Areas: A record of repaired areas shall be

furnished as well as test results for the repaired areas.
1.5.1 Personnel Qualification
The three levels of responsibility associated with ultrasonic inspection
SECTION 05 05 23.13 10 Page 8

are defined in ASNT RP SNT-TC-1A. For qualification to perform ultrasonic

inspection, personnel shall be certified under ASNT RP SNT-TC-1A and
ASNT Q&A Bk C within a period of 1 year before the date of contract. Other
qualification or certification may be accepted at the Contracting Officer's
discretion. Personnel with only an operator or inspector trainee
certification will not be considered qualified to pass judgement on the
acceptability of inspected items, but may work under the direct supervision
of a qualified ultrasonic inspector. Qualified ultrasonic inspectors shall
be able to judge the acceptability of the item in accordance with paragraph
ACCEPTANCE/REJECTION LIMITS.
1.5.2 Examinations
If the Contracting Officer doubts an individual's ability as an operator,

inspector, or supervisor, recertify the individual in accordance with
ASNT RP SNT-TC-1A. At the option of the Government, the Contracting
Officer may participate in administering the examination and in evaluating
the results.
1.5.3 Reference Standards
Use reference standards to calibrate the inspection equipment, test its

operating condition, and record the sensitivity or response of the
equipment during the inspection in accordance with paragraph EQUIPMENT
QUALIFICATION. The standards shall comprise a standard reference block and
reference specimens as noted below.
a. Provide the standard reference block or primary standard consisting

of the IIW block in AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Section Inspection, subsection
Reference Standards. Also use the standard reference block in any
reinspection on the same basis as the original inspection, even though
the reinspection is to be performed by other ultrasonic instruments and
accessories.
b. As an option, use other recognized working standards detailed with

the IIW block in AWS D1.1/D1.1M such as the Sensitivity Calibration
(SC) block. However, such blocks shall be referenced to the IIW block
as noted in paragraph SENSITIVITY CALIBRATION. Include details of
their use in the procedure description submitted to the Contracting
Officer. These blocks are the secondary standards. They shall be of
acoustically similar material to the welds to be inspected. The
secondary standards shall be suited for the applicable tests specified
in paragraph EQUIPMENT QUALIFICATIONS and shall be used as follows,
except where the IIW block is specifically required:
a. To assure adequate penetration of the base material.

b. To provide a secondary field standard.
c. To calibrate the equipment and establish the standard
reference level.
1.5.4 Resolution Test Block
Furnish a resolution test block in accordance with the details shown in

AWS D1.1/D1.1M Section Inspection, subsection Ultrasonic Equipment.
1.5.5 Equipment Qualifications
Evaluate the ultrasonic instrument and accessories on their arrival at the

jobsite, immediately prior to the start of inspection. Evaluate them using
SECTION 05 05 23.13 10 Page 9

the Contractor's furnished primary standard and they shall meet or exceed
the requirements listed in paragraphs below. Equipment that does not meet
these requirements shall not be used in the inspection.
a. Requalifications. Requalify the equipment after normal use at

intervals not to exceed 40 hours, except as noted, and immediately
after maintenance or repair or when the Contracting Officer considers
its operation questionable.
b. Longitudinal Wave System:
1). Vertical Amplitude Linearity. Two adjacent reflections of

different amplitudes obtained through the thickness of the primary
or secondary standard shall vary in the same proportion as the
amplitude of the first reflection is increased in discrete 2-dB
increments between 20 percent and 80 percent to full screen
height. For each gain setting, the amplitude of each reflection
shall vary by the same factor, within plus or minus 5 percent.
Requalification is required monthly or as otherwise stated.
2). Horizontal Linearity. The first three multiple reflections

obtained through the thickness of the primary or secondary
standard shall be equally spaced, within plus or minus 5 percent,
when spread over 90 percent of the sweep length. Requalification
is required monthly or as otherwise stated.
3). Near-Surface Resolution. Excessive ringing that appears on

the CRT to the right of the sound entry point shall not exceed a
1/2 inch equivalent distance in steel with the search unit placed
on the 4 inch edge of the IIW (primary) block and positioned for
maximum amplitude reflection from the 0.06 inch reference hole of
the primary standard. The reference reflector shall be set to
mid-screen and the gain shall be increased 20 dB. The reference
hole located at least 1/2 inch from one edge of the AW DSC or SC
secondary standard shall be used similarly. Acceptability will be
on the same basis as in the primary standard.
4). Far-Surface Resolution. Verify this property of the equipment

by the method detailed in AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Section Inspection,
subsection Calibration of the Ultrasonic Unit with the IIW or
other Approved Calibration Blocks. In addition, the trailing edge
of the third reflection shall return to the sweep line and be
clearly discernible.
c. Angle Wave System:
1). Vertical (Amplitude) Linearity. Two adjacent multiple

reflections from the 0.06 inch reference hole in the primary
standard shall vary in the same proportion as the amplitude of the
first reflection in discrete 2-dB increments between 20 percent
and 80 percent of full screen height. For each gain setting, the
amplitude of each adjacent reflection shall vary within plus or
minus 5 percent. For testing with the AWS SC or AWS DSC secondary
standard, the same criteria shall apply. For the SC block, place
the transducer on the longitudinal surface contiguous with the
sound entry point lines, whereas the 4 inch longitudinal surface
of the DSC block shall be used for the same purpose.
Requalification is required monthly, or as otherwise stated.
SECTION 05 05 23.13 10 Page 10

2). Horizontal Linearity (Angle Wave}. The first three multiple

echoes, obtained from the 0.06 inch reference hole of the primary
standard or from the reference hole in a secondary standard with
the transducer positioned at a minimum of 1 inch sound path
distance, shall be equally spaced plus or minus 5 percent when
spread over 90 percent of the sweep length. The gain shall be
adjusted to give a mid-screen height first reflection.
Requalification is required monthly or as otherwise stated.
3). Near-Surface Resolution (Angle Wave). Position he search unit

for maximum amplitude using the primary or secondary standard as
in the horizontal linearity test. The gain shall be adjusted to
give a mid-screen height first reflection and then shall be
increased 20 dB. Excessive ringing that appears on the CRT to the
right of the sound entry point shall not exceed 1/2 inch
equivalent distance in steel.
4). Far-Surface Resolution (Angle Wave). The equipment shall

delineate the three resolution holes in the resolution block
appropriate for the angle of the transducer to be used in the
inspection.
5). Signal-to-Noise Ratio. With the search unit located as in the

horizontal linearity test, the gain shall be set to obtain an 80
percent full screen height first reflection. The reference
reflection-to-noise-amplitude ratio shall not be less than 10 to 1.
6). Exit Point. Place the search unit on the graduated scale on
the 12 inch edge of the primary standard and beam the ultrasound
toward the curved edge of the block. The gain shall be set for a
mid-screen first reflection. The search unit shall be moved back
and forth until the first reflection is maximized. The index line
on the side of the search unit shall be within 1/16 inch of the
mid-point of the graduated scale in either direction.
Requalification is required after 40 hours or as otherwise stated.
7). Transducer Angle. Set the established exit point of the probe
over the applicable angle index line scribed on the 8 inch or 12
inch edge, as appropriate, of the primary standard. The gain
shall be set to obtain a mid-screen first reflection from the 50
mm plexiglass-lined hole for search units up to 70 percent with
the search unit placed on the 8 inch edge. Test search units of
large angles that have been approved specifically by the
Contracting Officer from the 12 inch edge using the 0.06 inch
reference hole. The search unit shall be moved back and forth to
maximize the first reflection. When the material to be inspected
is not acoustically similar to the primary standard, the
inspection angle shall be within plus or minus 2 degrees of the
angle specified in the approved procedure. Requalification is
required after 40 hours or as otherwise stated.
PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION OF MATERIALS FOR INSPECTION
Surfaces shall be free from the following:
SECTION 05 05 23.13 10 Page 11

3.1.1 Weld Spatter
Spattering or any roughness that interferes with free movement of the

search unit or impairs transmission of the ultrasonic vibrations.
3.1.2 Irregularities
Those which could mask or be confused with defect indications.
3.1.3 Weld Backing Strips
Remove strips that are not to remain in place and eliminate all sharp edges
and valleys by grinding or other mechanical means.
3.1.4 Dirt
Remove all loose scale, rust, paint, and dirt from the coupling surface.
3.2 SENSITIVITY CALIBRATION
Perform sensitivity calibration immediately after a change of operators and

at least every 30 minutes thereafter as testing proceeds. Recalibration
will be required after any power interruption, including a change of
source, when the equipment is suspected of being in error, or after
relocation of the jobsite. The 30-minute and relocation calibrations may
coincide. Allow the instrument to warm up before calibration is
attempted. Adjust the instrument range and delay controls to display
signals from the reference hole in the primary (IIW block) or secondary
standard (DSC or SC block or both) on the viewing screen for the range of
distances to be inspected.
3.2.1 Calibration Procedure
Calibrate the test instrument as described below.
3.2.1.1 Longitudinal Wave
In calibrating with the primary standard, position the transducer on the 4

inch edge for maximum reflection from the 0.06 inch reference hole. Adjust
the gain so that the first reflection is at 50 percent full scale. The top
of that indication shall be marked on the CRT with a wax pencil or by other
means. This establishes the standard reference level. A point at 80
percent of the standard reference level shall be calculated and marked.
This locates the reject/repair line. If a secondary standard is to be used
in the inspection, the reject/repair line shall be established similarly.
For the DSC block, the transducer shall be positioned on the 4 inch long
surface and with the SC degrees sound entry point lines. Adjustment for
loss of signal due to distance shall be compensated for as noted above.
3.2.1.2 Angle Wave
In calibrating with either the primary or secondary standard, position the

transducer on the same surfaces as in the case of the longitudinal wave
system but over the sound entry point lines appropriate for the angle of
the transducer to be used in the inspection. Adjust the gain to give a
first reflection that is 50 percent of full-scale response. The top of
that indication shall be marked with a wax pencil or by other means. This
establishes the standard reference level. A point at 80 percent of the
standard reference level shall be calculated and marked. This locates the
SECTION 05 05 23.13 10 Page 12

reject/repair line. Loss of signal shall be compensated as noted.
3.2.2 Calibration of the Secondary Standards
After adjusting the first reflection from the reference hole in the
secondary standard to 50 percent full-scale response for a sheer or
longitudinal wave inspection, a maximized reflection from the 0.06 inch
reference hole in the primary standard shall be obtained without changing
the gain setting. Readjust the gain setting to obtain a 50 percent
full-scale reflection and the readjusted setting shall be recorded as
required by paragraph SUBMITTALS, to provide a basis for recalibration when
the secondary standard is unavailable.
3.2.3 Equipment With a Calibrated Gain Control (Attenuator)
When a calibrated gain control attenuator is used, position the transducer

for a maximum reflection from the reference hole in the secondary standard
representing approximately 1/2 the longest inspection distance. This
reflection shall be adjusted to mid-scale by varying the gain control
accordingly. The difference in decibels between this amplitude and the
signal obtained from the first, second, and longest distance reflection
obtainable on the secondary standard shall be measured. The differences
shall be recorded and plotted on a curve to determine the necessary
correction to the amplitude at the various inspection distances. A level
of 80 percent of the primary level obtained from the corrected signal
heights, is equivalent to the reject/repair line.
3.2.4 Equipment With Electronic Distance Compensation Circuitry
If the difference in amplitude between the first reflection and the

reflection obtained from the maximum inspection distance is 1 dB or less,
the instrument may be used as is. If not, the procedure used for equipment
with a calibrated decibel control shall be used to determine the necessary
correction to the reflections obtained at the various inspection
distances. This characteristic of the equipment shall be re-examined on a
monthly basis or as otherwise stated in paragraph EQUIPMENT QUALIFICATIONS,
and correction factors shall be modified accordingly.
3.2.5 Longitudinal Wave Distance-Amplitude Correction Curve
A distance-amplitude correction curve may be used instead of the calibrated

gain control or the electronic circuitry for either the shear or
longitudinal wave system as described below:
a. A shear wave distance-amplitude correction curve shall be

constructed and drawn on the face of the cathode ray tube (CRT) for
inspection of weldments in excess of 1-1/2 inch thick when the design
of the test equipment permits. The reference hole in the secondary
standard DSC shall be used to construct the distance-amplitude
correction curve for a minimum of three node points, 1, 2, and 3. The
sensitivity of the instrument shall be adjusted to produce 50 percent
full-scale response for the maximized primary reflection and the
reject/repair line shall be constructed at 80 percent of the
established distance-amplitude curve.
b. A longitudinal wave distance-amplitude correction curve shall be

constructed and drawn on the face of the CRT when longitudinal waves
are to be used in the inspection for material thicknesses exceeding 1
inch, if design of the test equipment permits. The reference hole in
SECTION 05 05 23.13 10 Page 13

the secondary standard shall be used. Instrument sensitivity shall be

adjusted to 50 percent full-scale of the maximized response from the
reference hole at 1/2 maximum inspection distance. A reject/repair
line shall be constructed at 80 percent of the established
distance-amplitude curve. The reflection amplitudes to define this
curve shall be taken from the faces of the secondary sensitivity
standards which are 1 inch, 2 inch, and 1/2 maximum inspection
distance, and the longest distance obtainable from the secondary
standard, respectively, from the reference hole. When a correction
curve cannot be drawn on the face of the CRT, one of the
distance-amplitude correction methods noted above and submitted under
the procedure description shall be applied.
3.2.6 Longitudinal Wave Inspections Using Immersion Technique
Use the reference hole in a secondary standard for each different

inspection distance. Repair/reject limits shall be established by
immersing both the search unit and secondary standard in the liquid bath in
which the inspection is to be conducted. Use the procedure noted below:
a. Direct the longitudinal waves from the search unit toward the face
of the secondary standard closest to the reference hole.
b. Position the search unit for maximum response. The amplitude of

reflection shall be adjusted to 50 percent full-scale. The top of that
indication shall be marked on the CRT with a wax pencil or by other
means. This establishes the standard reference level. A point at 80
percent of the standard reference level shall be calculated and
marked. This locates the reject/repair point. The above shall be
repeated for each different surface-to-hole distance to establish the
reject/repair line.
c. With the gain at the same setting and the primary standard and
search unit in air, a maximized reflection shall be obtained from the
0.06 inch reference hole in the primary standard (IIW). Then, this
gain setting shall be readjusted to obtain a 50 percent full-scale
reflection. The readjusted setting shall be recorded as required by
paragraph SUBMITTALS to provide a basis for recalibration when the
secondary standard is unavailable.
3.3 INSPECTION PROCEDURE
When possible, examine all welds from both sides of the weld and from one
surface. If complete inspection cannot be accomplished from one surface,
inspection shall be made from another surface that is part of the same
joint. Preliminary scanning techniques using an increased instrument gain
shall be used to locate possible defects. When possible, gain shall be
increased to a minimum of twice (6 dB) the reference level setting. Final
acceptance or rejection shall be evaluated with the equipment properly
calibrated and the gain control set at the reference level. Use the
reject/repair line to evaluate quality of the weld. If a periodic
calibration check shows that the equipment is not operating properly or
that the system's sensitivity has decreased more than 20 percent (2 dB)
from the established sensitivity level, all welds inspected since the prior
calibration shall be reexamined. If penetration of the shear waves is
questionable, the angle search unit shall be placed in position on one side
of the weldment with the waves directed through the weldment. A
disconnected angle search unit, plastic or metal wedge or disk, or any good
reflector shall be placed in the wave path of the search unit on the far
SECTION 05 05 23.13 10 Page 14

side of the weld to reflect the sound. When good reflections cannot be
obtained by either shear or longitudinal waves, modify the procedures.
3.3.1 Test Frequency
The test frequency for ferrous materials shall be as specified in

AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Section Inspection, subsection Ultrasonic Equipment, except
for thicknesses below 1/2 inch, frequencies between 2.25 and 5 MHz may be
used to obtain increased sensitivity. For materials that are difficult to
penetrate, any frequency within the operating range of the equipment may be
used. The effective depth of penetration and sound beam divergency shall
be demonstrated to the Contracting Officer.
3.3.2 Couplants
The choice of couplant is optional with the Contractor, except as follows:
a. The couplant shall be the same as that used for equipment

qualification and calibration.
b. Couplants that may corrode the reference standards and material

being tested or leave objectionable residues shall not be used.
c. Oils shall not be used in systems intended to handle liquid oxygen.
d. Couplants shall be of the proper viscosity to give good coupling

for the surface roughness.
3.3.3 Shear Wave Inspection
Perform shear wave inspection as follows: Place the search unit on the
contact surface at a distance from the weld equal to that used when
calibrating the equipment.
3.3.4 Longitudinal Flaws
To detect longitudinal flaws, the search unit shall be slowly moved toward
and away from the weld far enough to cover its entire cross section,
approximately 90 degrees to the weld centerline. The search unit shall be
radially oscillated to the left and right, covering an angle of
approximately 30 degrees. During the foregoing movement, the search unit
shall be continually advanced parallel to the weld centerline. The rate of
movement shall depend on the operator's ability to clearly see and identify
all reflections. Calculate the amount of movement to ensure that the
inspection distance will be great enough to traverse the weld.
3.3.5 Transverse Flaws
To detect transverse flaws when the welded surface is ground flush, the
search unit shall be moved along the welded surface in each direction
parallel to the centerline of the weld metal with the wave radiating
parallel to the weld centerline. To detect transverse flaws when the
welded surface is not ground flush, move the search unit parallel to the
weld in each direction, on the adjacent base metal at the top of the weld,
with the wave directed at an angle of 30 degrees to the weld centerline.
3.3.6 Longitudinal Wave Inspection
This inspection shall be made as follows:
SECTION 05 05 23.13 10 Page 15

a. The search unit shall be placed on the contact surface with the
wave directed in a straight line through any intervening base metal and
through the weldment.
b. The search unit shall then be moved slowly in a direction parallel

to the weld centerline and zigzagged across an area equivalent to the
welded thickness to make sure that waves penetrate the entire welded
cross section.
c. The rate of movement shall be dependent on the operator's ability

to clearly see and identify all reflections.
3.4 GENERAL ACCEPTANCE/REJECTION REQUIREMENTS
Evaluate discontinuities only when the ultrasonic equipment is calibrated

properly. If discontinuities are detected, direct the sound beam to
maximize the signal amplitude. To determine the length of a discontinuity,
the search unit shall be moved parallel to the discontinuity axis in both
directions from the position of maximum signal amplitude. One-half the
amplitude or a 6-dB increase in sensitivity from a point at which the
discontinuity signal drops rapidly to the baseline shall be defined as the
extremity of the discontinuity. At this point, the scanning surface shall
be marked at the position indicated by the center of the transducer. This
shall be repeated to determine the other extremity. The length of the
discontinuity shall be defined as the distance between these two marks.
a. For discontinuities with signal amplitudes exceeding full screen

height, 50 percent of full screen shall be considered half-peak
amplitude. At this point, the scanning surface shall be marked at the
position indicated by the center of the transducer. This shall be
repeated to determine the other extremity. The length of the
discontinuity shall be defined as the distance between these two marks.
b. The maximum signal amplitude, length, depth, and position within

the inspection zone shall be determined and reported for
discontinuities yielding a signal amplitude equal to or exceeding the
reject/repair line. The minimum recordable length of a discontinuity
shall be 1/8 inch. When evaluating welds joining two members with
different thicknesses at the weld, the thickness T shall be the lesser
of the two thicknesses.
c. The criteria for acceptance or rejection based on ultrasonic

inspection will supplement a visual inspection. The sizes and surface
conditions of the welds shall conform to the requirements indicated on
the applicable plans and drawings and other sections of the
specification. When ultrasonic inspection is used along with
radiography, the limits specified under paragraph REFERENCE STANDARDS
shall be the primary standard .
3.4.1 Inspection of Repairs
All repairs shall undergo the same inspection procedure that originally
revealed the discontinuities. Before acceptance, the welds shall meet the
standards required for the original weld.
3.5 ACCEPTANCE/REJECTION LIMITS
Accept or reject welds by ultrasonic indication in accordance with the
SECTION 05 05 23.13 10 Page 16

following:
3.5.1 Full Penetration Butt Joints and Corner Joints
3.5.1.1 Class III
Reject welds on the basis of the following:
a. Any discontinuity with a reflection exceeding the established

reject/repair line and with a length exceeding 1/2 inch. Adjacent
discontinuities separated by sound metal with a dimension less than
twice the length of the longest discontinuity shall be considered a
single discontinuity.
b. Any discontinuity with a reflection greater than or equal to 50

percent of the reject/repair line, or with the level 8 dB more than the
reject/repair line, and with a length (L) exceeding 2 inches or LT,
whichever is greater.
c. If the total cumulative length of discontinuities in any 12 inches

of weld length exceeds 3 inches or 2 T, whichever is greater, that weld
length shall be rejected.
3.5.2 Full Penetration Tee Joints
Full Penetration Tee Joints (for Incomplete Root Penetration): Any

discontinuity with the reflection exceeding the established reject/repair
line of the applicable class shall be rejected. Any discontinuity with a
reflection exceeding 25 percent of the established reject/repair line, up
to and including the reject/repair line, shall be rejected if its length
exceeds 1/2 T in a direction transverse to the axis of the weld or LT
parallel to the axis for all classes. If the total cumulative length of
discontinuities in any 12 inches of weld length exceeds the limits of the
applicable class, that weld length shall be rejected.
3.5.3 Partial and Full Penetration Tee Joints
Partial and Full Penetration Tee Joint Boundaries: The depth of weld
penetration and weld cross section width at the through member surface
shall be as indicated by applicable plans or drawings. Limits of
discontinuities shall be as specified in preceding paragraphs.
3.5.4 Tee Joint Discontinuities
Tee joint discontinuities extending into the through member shall be

rejected if reflection exceeds the established reject/repair line. .
SECTION 05 05 23.13 10 Page 17

SECTION 05 05 23
WELDING, STRUCTURAL
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

AISC 360 (2005) Specification for Structural Steel

Buildings, with Commentary
ASNT RP SNT-TC-1A (2006) Recommended Practice
AWS A2.4 (2007) Standard Symbols for Welding,

Brazing and Nondestructive Examination
AWS A3.0 (2001; Errata 2001) Standard Welding Terms

and Definitions Including Terms for
Adhesive Bonding, Brazing, Soldering,
Thermal Cutting and Thermal Spraying

Code - Sheet Steel

Code - Reinforcing Steel
AWS D14.4/D14.4M (2005) Welded Joints for Machinery and

Equipment
AWS Z49.1 (2005) Safety in Welding, Cutting and

Allied Processes
ASTM E 165 (2009) Standard Test Method for Liquid

Penetrant Examination
ASTM E 709 (2008) Standard Guide for Magnetic

Particle Examination
1.2 DEFINITIONS
Definitions of welding terms are in accordance with AWS A3.0. The
following classifications Class 1 (highest class) to Class 6 (lowest class)

indicate the project's class(es) of weld joints.
1.2.1 Class 1 Weld Joints
This covers complete penetration weld joints only. These weld joints apply
where failure would cause a loss of the system and/or be hazardous to
personnel. Class 1 weld joints are highly stressed (dynamic and cyclic
loading) and characterized as a single point of failure with no redundancy
for the redistribution of stress into another member.
This covers both complete and partial penetration groove weld joints and
fillet weld joints. These weld joints apply where failure would reduce the
overall efficiency of a system but loss of the system or a hazard to
personnel would not be experienced.
This covers both complete and partial penetration groove weld joints and
fillet weld joints. These weld joints apply where failure would not affect
the efficiency of a system nor create a hazard to personnel. Class 3 weld
joints are connections of secondary members not subject to dynamic action
and/or low stressed miscellaneous applications.
This covers weld joints applicable to welding reinforcing steel to primary

structural members.
This covers weld joints applicable to welding concrete reinforcing steel

splices (prestressing steel excepted), steel connection devices, and
inserts and anchors required in concrete construction.
This covers plug and slot weld joints as applicable to the requirements of
the project's code(s).
Conform the design of welded connections to AISC 360, unless otherwise

indicated or specified. Material with welds will not be accepted unless
the welding is specified or indicated on the drawings or otherwise
approved. Perform welding as specified in this section, except where
additional requirements are shown on the drawings or are specified in other
sections. Do not commence welding until welding procedures, inspectors,
nondestructive testing personnel, welders, welding operators, and tackers
have been qualified and the submittals approved by the Contracting
Officer. Perform all testing at or near the work site. Each Contractor
performing welding shall maintain records of the test results obtained in
welding procedure, welder, welding operator, and tacker performance
qualifications.
1.3.1 Pre-erection Conference
Hold a pre-erection conference prior to the start of the field welding, to

bring all affected parties together and to gain a naturally clear
understanding of the project and the Welding Procedure Specifications (WPS)
(which the Contractor shall develop and submit for all welding, including
welding done using pre-qualified procedures). Mandatory attendance is
required by all Contractor's welding production and inspection personnel
and appropriate Government personnel. Include as items for discussion:
responsibilities of various parties; welding procedures and processes to be
followed; welding sequence (both within a joint and joint sequence within
the building); inspection requirements and procedures, both visual and
ultrasonic; welding schedule; fabrication of mock-up model; and other items
deemed necessary by the attendees.
1.4 SUBMITTALS

SD-03 Product Data
Welding Procedure Qualifications; G

Welder, Welding Operator, and Tacker Qualification
Inspector Qualification
Previous Qualifications
Pre-qualified Procedures
Copies of the welding procedure specifications; the procedure

qualification test records; and the welder, welding operator, or
tacker qualification test records.
SD-06 Test Reports
Quality Control
Nondestructive Examination
A quality assurance plan and records of tests and inspections.

Submit all records of nondestructive examination in accordance
with paragraph "Acceptance Requirements".
SD-07 Certificates
Certified Welding Procedure Specifications (WPS)

Certified Brazing Procedure Specifications (BPS)
Certified Procedure Qualification Records (PQR)
Certified Welder Performance Qualifications (WPQ)
Certified Brazer Performance Qualifications (BPQ)
Certificates in accordance with paragraph "Other Applications".
Except for pre-qualified (in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M) and previously
qualified procedures, each Contractor performing welding shall record in
detail and qualify the welding procedure specification for any welding
procedure followed in the fabrication of weldments. Conform welding

procedure qualifications to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and to the specifications in
this section. Submit for approval copies of the welding procedure
specification and the results of the procedure qualification test for each
type of welding which requires procedure qualification. Approval of any
procedure, however, does not relieve the Contractor of the sole
responsibility for producing a finished structure meeting all the specified
requirements. Submit this information on the forms in Annex M of
AWS D1.1/D1.1M. Individually identify and clearly reference on the detail
drawings and erection drawings all welding procedure specifications, or
suitably key them to the contract drawings. In case of conflict between
this specification and AWS D1.1/D1.1M, this specification governs.
To perform this work provide an organization certified in the following:

American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) Quality Certification
Program Category Category I Conventional Steel Structures.
a. For Structural Projects, provide documentation of the following:
1) Component Thickness 1/8 inch and greater: Qualification

documents (WPS, PQR, and WPQ) in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
2) Component Thickness Less than 1/8 inch: Qualification

documents (WPS, PQR, and WPQ) in accordance with AWS D1.3/D1.3M.
3) Reinforcing Steel: Qualification documents (WPS, PWR, and WPQ)

in accordance with AWS D1.4/D1.4M.
b. For other applications, provide documentation of the following:
1) Submit for review to the Contracting Officer two copies of

Certified Welding Procedure Specifications (WPS), Certified
Brazing Procedure Specifications (BPS) and Certified Procedure
Qualification Records (PQR) within fifteen calendar days after
receipt of Notice to Proceed.
3) Submit for review to the Contracting Officer two copies of

Certified Welder Performance Qualifications (WPQ)and Certified
Brazer Performance Qualifications (BPQ) within fifteen calendar
days prior to any employee welding on the project material.
4) Machinery: Qualification documents (WPS, PQR, and WPQ) in

accordance with AWS D14.4/D14.4M.
1.5.2 Previous Qualifications
Welding procedures previously qualified by test may be accepted for this

contract without re-qualification if the following conditions are met:
a. Testing was performed by an approved testing laboratory, technical

consultant, or the Contractor's approved quality control organization.
b. The qualified welding procedure conforms to the requirements of

this specification and is applicable to welding conditions encountered
under this contract.
c. The welder, welding operator, and tacker qualification tests

conform to the requirements of this specification and are applicable to
welding conditions encountered under this contract.
1.5.3 Pre-qualified Procedures
Welding procedures which are considered pre-qualified as specified in

AWS D1.1/D1.1M will be accepted without further qualification. Submit for
approval a listing or an annotated drawing to indicate the joints not
pre-qualified. Procedure qualification is mandatory for these joints.
1.5.4 Retests
If welding procedure fails to meet the requirements of AWS D1.1/D1.1M,

revise and re-qualify the procedure specification, or at the Contractor's
option, welding procedure may be retested in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
If the welding procedure is qualified through retesting, submit all test
results, including those of test welds that failed to meet the
requirements, with the welding procedure.
1.5.5 Welder, Welding Operator, and Tacker Qualification
Each welder, welding operator, and tacker assigned to work on this contract
shall be qualified in accordance with the applicable requirements of
AWS D1.1/D1.1M and as specified in this section. Welders, welding
operators, and tackers who make acceptable procedure qualification test
welds will be considered qualified for the welding procedure used.
1.5.5.1 Previous Personnel Qualifications
At the discretion of the Contracting Officer, welders, welding operators,

and tackers qualified by test within the previous 6 months may be accepted
for this contract without re-qualification if all the following conditions
are met:
a. Copies of the welding procedure specifications, the procedure

qualification test records, and the welder, welding operator, and
tacker qualification test records are submitted and approved in
accordance with the specified requirements for detail drawings.
b. Testing was performed by an approved testing laboratory, technical

consultant, or the Contractor's approved quality control organization.
c. The previously qualified welding procedure conforms to the

requirements of this specification and is applicable to welding
conditions encountered under this contract.
d. The welder, welding operator, and tacker qualification tests

conform to the requirements of this specification and are applicable to
welding conditions encountered under this contract.
1.5.5.2 Certificates
Before assigning any welder, welding operator, or tacker to work under this
contract, submit the names of the welders, welding operators, and tackers
to be employed, and certification that each individual is qualified as
specified. State in the certification the type of welding and positions
for which the welder, welding operator, or tacker is qualified, the code
and procedure under which the individual is qualified, the date qualified,
and the name of the firm and person certifying the qualification tests.
Keep the certification current, on file, and furnish 3 copies.
1.5.5.3 Renewal of Qualification
Re-qualification of a welder or welding operator is required under any of

the following conditions:
a. It has been more than 6 months since the welder or welding operator
has used the specific welding process for which he is qualified.
b. There is specific reason to question the welder or welding

operator's ability to make welds that meet the requirements of these
specifications.
c. The welder or welding operator was qualified by an employer other

than those firms performing work under this contract, and a
qualification test has not been taken within the past 12 months.
Submit as evidence of conformance all records showing periods of
employment, name of employer where welder, or welding operator, was
last employed, and the process for which qualified.
d. A tacker who passes the qualification test is considered eligible

to perform tack welding indefinitely in the positions and with the
processes for which he/she is qualified, unless there is some specific
reason to question the tacker's ability. In such a case, the tacker is
required to pass the prescribed tack welding test.
1.5.6 Inspector Qualification
Inspector qualifications shall be in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

Qualify all nondestructive testing personnel in accordance with the
requirements of ASNT RP SNT-TC-1A for Levels I or II in the applicable
nondestructive testing method. The inspector may be supported by assistant
welding inspectors who are not qualified to ASNT RP SNT-TC-1A, and
assistant inspectors may perform specific inspection functions under the
supervision of the qualified inspector.
1.5.7 Symbols and Safety
Symbols shall be in accordance with AWS A2.4, unless otherwise indicated.

Safe weldiing practices and safety precautions during welding shall conform
to AWS Z49.1.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 WELDING EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS
Provide all welding equipment, electrodes, welding wire, and fluxes capable
of producing satisfactory welds when used by a qualified welder or welding
operator performing qualified welding procedures. All welding equipment
and materials shall comply with the applicable requirements of
AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 WELDING OPERATIONS
3.1.1 Requirements
Conform workmanship and techniques for welded construction to the

requirements of AWS D1.1/D1.1M and AISC 360. When AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the
AISC 360 specification conflict, the requirements of AWS D1.1/D1.1M govern.
3.1.2 Identification
Identify all welds in one of the following ways:
a. Submit written records to indicate the location of welds made by

each welder, welding operator, or tacker.
b. Identify all work performed by each welder, welding operator, or

tacker with an assigned number, letter, or symbol to identify welds
made by that individual. The Contracting Officer may require welders,
welding operators, and tackers to apply their symbol next to the weld
by means of rubber stamp, felt-tipped marker with waterproof ink, or
other methods that do not cause an indentation in the metal. Place the
identification mark for seam welds adjacent to the weld at 3 foot
intervals. Identification with die stamps or electric etchers is not
allowed.
3.2 QUALITY CONTROL
Perform testing using an approved inspection or testing laboratory or

technical consultant; or if approved, the Contractor's inspection and
testing personnel may be used instead of the commercial inspection or
testing laboratory or technical consultant. Perform visual and ultrasonic,
magnetic particle, and dye penetrant inspections to determine conformance
with paragraph STANDARDS OF ACCEPTANCE. Conform procedures and techniques
for inspection with applicable requirements of AWS D1.1/D1.1M, ASTM E 165,
ASTM E 709, except that in radiographic inspection only film types
designated as "fine grain," or "extra fine," are acceptable.
3.3 STANDARDS OF ACCEPTANCE
Conform dimensional tolerances for welded construction, details of welds,

and quality of welds with the applicable requirements of AWS D1.1/D1.1M and
the contract drawings. Perform nondestructive testing by visual inspection
ultrasonic, magnetic particle, or dye penetrant methods. The minimum
extent of nondestructive testing shall be random 10 percent of welds or
joints, as indicated on the drawings.
3.3.1 Nondestructive Examination
The welding is subject to inspection and tests in the mill, shop, and
field. Inspection and tests in the mill or shop do not relieve the
Contractor of the responsibility to furnish weldments of satisfactory
quality. When materials or workmanship do not conform to the specification
requirements, the Government reserves the right to reject material or
workmanship or both at any time before final acceptance of the structure
containing the weldment.
3.3.2 Destructive Tests
Make all repairs when metallographic specimens are removed from any part of
a structure. Employ only qualified welders or welding operators, and use
the proper joints and welding procedures, including peening or heat
treatment if required, to develop the full strength of the members and
joints cut and to relieve residual stress.
3.4 GOVERNMENT INSPECTION AND TESTING
In addition to the inspection and tests performed by the Contractor for

quality control, the Government will perform inspection and testing for
acceptance to the extent determined by the Contracting Officer. The costs
of such inspection and testing will be borne by the Contractor if
unsatisfactory welds are discovered, or by the Government if the welds are
satisfactory. The work may be performed by the Government's own forces or
under a separate contract for inspection and testing. The Government
reserves the right to perform supplemental nondestructive and destructive
tests to determine compliance with paragraph STANDARDS OF ACCEPTANCE.
3.5 CORRECTIONS AND REPAIRS
If inspection or testing indicates defects in the weld joints, repair

defective welds using a qualified welder or welding operator as
applicable. Conduct corrections in accordance with the requirements of
AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the specifications. Repair all defects in accordance
with the approved procedures. Repair defects discovered between passes
before additional weld material is deposited. Wherever a defect is removed
and repair by welding is not required, blend the affected area into the
surrounding surface to eliminate sharp notches, crevices, or corners.
After a defect is thought to have been removed, and before re-welding,
examine the area by suitable methods to ensure that the defect has been
eliminated. Repaired welds shall meet the inspection requirements for the
original welds. Any indication of a defect is regarded as a defect, unless
re-evaluation by nondestructive methods or by surface conditioning shows
that no unacceptable defect is present.
SECTION 05 12 00
STRUCTURAL STEEL
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

AISC 201-06 (2006) AISC Certification Program for

Structural Steel Fabricators
AISC 303 (2005) Code of Standard Practice for Steel

Buildings and Bridges
AISC 317 (1992; Reprint 1999) ASD Manual of Steel

Construction, Vol II: Connections
AISC 326 (2009) Detailing for Steel Construction
AISC 348 (2000) Structural Joints Using ASTM A325

or A490 Bolts

AISC 810 (1997) Erection Bracing of Low-Rise

Structural Steel Frames/Fisher and West
AWS A2.4 (2007) Standard Symbols for Welding,

Brazing and Nondestructive Examination
ASME B46.1 (2002) Surface Texture (Surface Roughness,

Waviness and Lay)

Steel Products

Hardware
ASTM A 307 (2007b) Standard Specification for Carbon

Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 PSI Tensile
Strength
ASTM A 325 (2009a) Standard Specification for

Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated,
120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength

Structural Steel
ASTM A 490 (2009) Standard Specification for

Structural Bolts, Alloy Steel, Heat
Treated, 150 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength

Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon
Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and
Shapes

Welded and Seamless
ASTM A 563 (2007a) Standard Specification for Carbon

and Alloy Steel Nuts

High-Strength Low-Alloy Columbium-Vanadium
Structural Steel
ASTM A 6/A 6M (2009) Standard Specification for General

Requirements for Rolled Structural Steel
Bars, Plates, Shapes, and Sheet Piling
ASTM A 780/A 780M (2009) Standard Practice for Repair of

Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip
Galvanized Coatings

Structural Steel Shapes
ASTM B 695 (2004; R 2009) Standard Specification for

Coatings of Zinc Mechanically Deposited on
Iron and Steel
ASTM C 1107/C 1107M (2008) Standard Specification for Packaged

Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Nonshrink)
ASTM C 827 (2001a; R 2005) Change in Height at Early

Ages of Cylindrical Specimens from
Cementitious Mixtures
ASTM F 1554 (2007a) Standard Specification for Anchor

Bolts, Steel, 36, 55, and 105-ksi Yield
Strength
ASTM F 1852 (2008) Standard Specification for "Twist
Off" Type Tension Control Structural

Bolt/Nut/Washer Assemblies, Steel, Heat
Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile
Strength

Treated, 150 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength
ASTM F 436 (2009) Hardened Steel Washers
ASTM F 844 (2007a) Washers, Steel, Plain (Flat),

Unhardened for General Use
ASTM F 959 (2007a) Compressible-Washer-Type Direct

Tension Indicators for Use with Structural
Fasteners
SSPC PA 1 (2000; E 2004) Shop, Field, and

Maintenance Painting
SSPC PS 13.01 (1982; E 2004) Epoxy-Polyamide Painting

System
SSPC Paint 25 (1997; E 2004) Zinc Oxide, Alkyd, Linseed

Oil Primer for Use Over Hand Cleaned Steel,
Type I and Type II
SSPC SP 3 (2004; E 2004) Power Tool Cleaning
SSPC SP 6 (2007) Commercial Blast Cleaning
Provide the structural steel system, including shop primer, complete and
ready for use. Structural steel systems including design, materials,
installation, workmanship, fabrication, assembly, erection, inspection,
quality control, and testing shall be provided in accordance with AISC 325
and AISC 317except as modified in this contract.
1.3 SUBMITTALS

SD-02 Shop Drawings
Erection Plan, Temporary support data: At least 60 days prior to

the start of vertical construction and prior to the commencement
of strucutral steel, concrete or masonry walls, elevated floors,
and roofs, the contractor shall submit detailed drawings, catalog
data and calculations for all temporary supports which will be
used on this contract, as described in paragraph above. These
drawings, catalog data, and calculations shall be prepared and

certified by a Registered Structural Engineer. The minimum for
vertical loads shall be actual dead loads plus a minimum live load
of 25psf, but use higher live loads if needed due to the
Contractor's plan of erection. No load reductions will be allowed.
Bracing shall be designed for a minimum wind load of 20psf. Wind
loadings will not be reduced from the design wind load provided
and all temporary supports will be designed with a minimum safety
factor of 1.5; G
Fabrication drawings including description of connections and

details of all (100%) connections; G
SD-03 Product Data
Shop primer
Welding electrodes and rods

Load indicator washers
Non-Shrink Grout
Load indicator bolts
Include test report for Class B primer.
SD-06 Test Reports
Class B coating
Bolts, nuts, and washers
Supply the certified manufacturer's mill reports which clearly

show the applicable ASTM mechanical and chemical requirements
together with the actual test results for the supplied fasteners.
SD-07 Certificates
Steel
Bolts, nuts, and washers
Galvanizing
AISC Quality Certification
Welding procedures and qualifications
1.4 AISC QUALITY CERTIFICATION
Work shall be fabricated in an AISC certified Category Std fabrication

plant.
1.5.1 Drawing Requirements
Submit fabrication drawings for approval prior to fabrication. Prepare in

accordance with AISC 326, AISC 325 and AISC 317. Fabrication drawings
shall not be reproductions of contract drawings. Sign and seal fabrication
drawings by a professional engineer registered in the State where the
project is located. Include complete information for the fabrication and
erection of the structure's components, including the location, type, and
size of bolts, welds, member sizes and lengths, connection details, blocks,
copes, and cuts. Use AWS A2.4 standard welding symbols. Shoring and
temporary bracing shall be designed and sealed by a registered professional
engineer and submitted for record purposes, with calculations, as part of
the drawings. Member substitutions of details shown on the contract
drawings shall be clearly highlighted on the fabrication drawings. Explain
the reasons for any deviations from the contract drawings.
1.5.2 Certifications
1.5.2.1 Erection Plan
Submit for record purposes. Indicate the sequence of erection, temporary

shoring and bracing, and a detailed sequence of welding, including each
welding procedure required and other requirements noted in the submittals
section above.
1.5.2.2 Welding Procedures and Qualifications
Prior to welding, submit certification for each welder stating the type of
welding and positions qualified for, the code and procedure qualified
under, date qualified, and the firm and individual certifying the
qualification tests. If the qualification date of the welding operator is
more than one-year old, the welding operator's qualification certificate
shall be accompanied by a current certificate by the welder attesting to
the fact that he has been engaged in welding since the date of
certification, with no break in welding service greater than 6 months.
Conform to all requirements specified in AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 STEEL
ASTM A 36/A 36M.
2.1.2 High-Strength Structural Steel
2.1.2.1 Low-Alloy Steel
ASTM A 572/A 572M , Grade 50. .
2.1.3 Structural Shapes for Use in Building Framing
Wide flange shapes, ASTM A 992/A 992M.
2.1.4 Structural Steel Tubing
ASTM A 500/A 500M, Grade B.
2.1.5 Steel Pipe
ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E or S, Grade B, weight class STD (Standard).
2.2 BOLTS, NUTS, AND WASHERS
Provide the following unless indicated otherwise.
2.2.1.1 Bolts
ASTM A 307, Grade A. The bolt heads and the nuts of the supplied fasteners
must be marked with the manufacturer's identification mark, the strength
grade and type specified by ASTM specifications.
2.2.1.2 Nuts
ASTM A 563, Grade and Style for applicable ASTM bolt standard recommended.
2.2.1.3 Washers
ASTM F 844 washers for ASTM A 307 bolts, and ASTM F 436 washers for
ASTM A 325 bolts.
2.2.2 High-Strength Structural Steel and Structural Steel Tubing
2.2.2.1 Bolts
ASTM A 325, Type 1.
2.2.2.2 Nuts
ASTM A 563, Grade and Style as specified in the applicable ASTM bolt
standard.
2.2.2.3 Washers
ASTM F 436, plain carbon steel.
2.2.3 Foundation Anchorage
2.2.3.1 Anchor Bolts
ASTM F 1554, Grade 55.
2.2.3.2 Anchor Nuts
ASTM A 563, Grade A, hex style.
2.2.3.3 Anchor Washers
ASTM F 844.
2.2.4 Load Indicator Washers
ASTM F 959. Provide ASTM B 695, Class 50, Type 1 galvanizing.
2.2.5 Load Indicator Bolts
ASTM F 1852, Type 1; ASTM F 2280, Type 1, with a manufactured notch

between the bolt tip and threads. The bolt shall be designed to react to
the opposing rotational torques applied by the installation wrench, with
the bolt tip automatically shearing off when the proper tension is obtained.
2.3 STRUCTURAL STEEL ACCESSORIES
2.3.1 Welding Electrodes and Rods
AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
2.3.2 Non-Shrink Grout
ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, with no ASTM C 827 shrinkage.
2.3.3 Welded Shear Stud Connectors
AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
2.4 SHOP PRIMER
SSPC Paint 25, (alkyd primer) or SSPC PS 13.01 epoxy-polyamide, green

primer (Form 150) type 1, except provide a Class B coating in accordance
with AISC 325 and AISC 317 for slip critical joints. Primer shall conform
to Federal, State, and local VOC regulations. If flash rusting occurs,
re-clean the surface prior to application of primer.
2.5 GALVANIZING
ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M, as applicable, unless specified

otherwise galvanize after fabrication where practicable.
2.6 FABRICATION
2.6.1 Markings
Prior to erection, members shall be identified by a painted erection mark.

Connecting parts assembled in the shop for reaming holes in field
connections shall be match marked with scratch and notch marks. Do not
locate erection markings on areas to be welded or on surfaces of weathering
steels that will be exposed in the completed structure. Do not locate
match markings in areas that will decrease member strength or cause stress
concentrations.
2.6.2 Shop Primer
Shop prime structural steel, except as modified herein, in accordance with

SSPC PA 1. Do not prime steel surfaces embedded in concrete, galvanized
surfaces, surfaces to receive sprayed-on fireproofing, or surfaces within
0.5 inch of the toe of the welds prior to welding (except surfaces on which
metal decking is to be welded). Prior to assembly, prime surfaces which
will be concealed or inaccessible after assembly. Do not apply primer in
foggy or rainy weather; when the ambient temperature is below 45 degrees F
or over 95 degrees F; or when the primer may be exposed to temperatures
below 40 degrees F within 48 hours after application, unless approved

otherwise by the Contracting Officer.
2.6.2.1 Cleaning
SSPC SP 6, except steel exposed in spaces above ceilings, attic spaces,

furred spaces, and chases that will be hidden to view in finished
construction may be cleaned to SSPC SP 3 when recommended by the shop
primer manufacturer. Maintain steel surfaces free from rust, dirt, oil,
grease, and other contaminants through final assembly.
2.6.2.2 Primer
Apply primer to a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mil except provide the
Class B coating for slip critical joints in accordance with the coating
manufacturer's recommendations. Repair damaged primed surfaces with an
additional coat of primer.
2.6.3 Fireproofing and Epoxy Coated Surfaces
Surfaces to receive sprayed-on fireproofing or epoxy coatings shall be

cleaned and prepared in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations .
2.7 DRAINAGE HOLES
Adequate drainage holes shall be drilled to eliminate water traps. Hole

diameter shall be 1/2 inch and location shall be indicated on the detail
drawings. Hole size and location shall not affect the structural integrity.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 FABRICATION
Fabrication shall be in accordance with the applicable provisions of

AISC 325. Fabrication and assembly shall be done in the shop to the
greatest extent possible. The fabricating plant shall be certified under
the AISC 201-06 for Category Std structural steelwork.
Compression joints depending on contact bearing shall have a surface

roughness not in excess of 500 micro inch as determined by ASME B46.1, and
ends shall be square within the tolerances for milled ends specified in
ASTM A 6/A 6M.
Structural steelwork, except surfaces of steel to be encased in concrete,

surfaces to be field welded, surfaces to be fireproofed, and contact
surfaces of friction-type high-strength bolted connections shall be
prepared for painting in accordance with endorsement "P" of AISC 201-06 and
primed with the specified paint.
Shop splices of members between field splices will be permitted only where
indicated on the Contract Drawings. Splices not indicated require the
3.2 ERECTION
a. Erection of structural steel, except as indicated in item b.

below, shall be in accordance with the applicable provisions of
AISC 316 and 317. Erection plan shall be reviewed, stamped and
sealed by a licensed structural engineer.
b. For low-rise structural steel buildings ( 60 feet tall or less and

a maximum of 2 stories), the erection plan shall conform to
AISC 303 and the structure shall be erected in accordance with
AISC 810.
Provide for drainage in structural steel. After final positioning of steel

members, provide full bearing under base plates and bearing plates using
nonshrink grout. Place nonshrink grout in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions.
3.2.1 STORAGE
Material shall be stored out of contact with the ground in such manner and
location as will minimize deterioration.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
Except as modified in this section, connections not detailed shall be

designed in accordance with AISC 361, 317 and AISC 360. Build connections
into existing work. Do not tighten anchor bolts set in concrete with
impact torque wrenches. Punch, subpunch and ream, or drill bolt and pin
holes perpendicular to the surface of the member. Holes shall not be cut
or enlarged by burning. Bolts, nuts, and washers shall be clean of dirt
and rust, and lubricated immediately prior to installation.
3.3.1 Common Grade Bolts
ASTM A 307 bolts shall be tightened to a "snug tight" fit. "Snug tight" is
the tightness that exists when plies in a joint are in firm contact. If
firm contact of joint plies cannot be obtained with a few impacts of an
impact wrench, or the full effort of a man using a spud wrench, contact the
Contracting Officer for further instructions.
3.3.2 High-Strength Bolts
ASTM A 325 bolts shall be fully tensioned to 70 percent of their minimum

tensile strength. Bolts shall be installed in connection holes and
initially brought to a snug tight fit. After the initial tightening
procedure, bolts shall then be fully tensioned, progressing from the most
rigid part of a connection to the free edges.
3.3.2.1 Installation of Load Indicator Washers (LIW)
ASTM F 959. Where possible, the LIW shall be installed under the bolt
head and the nut shall be tightened. If the LIW is installed adjacent to
the turned element, provide a flat ASTM F 436 washer between the LIW and
nut when the nut is turned for tightening, and between the LIW and bolt
head when the bolt head is turned for tightening. In addition to the LIW,
provide flat ASTM F 436 washers under both the bolt head and nut when
ASTM A 490 bolts are used.
3.4 GAS CUTTING
Use of gas-cutting torch in the field for correcting fabrication errors

will not be permitted on any major member in the structural framing. Use
of a gas cutting torch will be permitted on minor members not under stress
only after approval has been obtained from the Contracting Officers.
3.5 WELDING
AWS D1.1/D1.1M Provide AWS D1.1/D1.1M qualified welders, welding operators,

and tackers.
The Contractor shall develop and submit the Welding Procedure

Specifications (WPS) for all welding, including welding done using
prequalified procedures. Prequalified procedures may be submitted for
information only; however, procedures that are not prequalified shall be
submitted for approval.
3.5.1 Removal of Temporary Welds, Run-Off Plates, and Backing Strips
Remove only from finished areas.
3.6 SHOP PRIMER REPAIR
Repair shop primer in accordance with the paint manufacturer's

recommendation for surfaces damaged by handling, transporting, cutting,
welding, or bolting.
3.6.1 Field Priming
Field priming of steel exposed to the weather, or located in building areas

without HVAC for control of relative humidity. After erection, the field
bolt heads and nuts, field welds, and any abrasions in the shop coat shall
be cleaned and primed with paint of the same quality as that used for the
shop coat.
3.7 GALVANIZING REPAIR
Provide as indicated or specified. Galvanize after fabrication where

practicable. Repair damage to galvanized coatings using ASTM A 780/A 780M
zinc rich paint for galvanizing damaged by handling, transporting, cutting,
welding, or bolting. Do not heat surfaces to which repair paint has been
applied.
Perform field tests, and provide labor, equipment, and incidentals required
for testing. The Contracting Officer shall be notified in writing of
defective welds, bolts, nuts, and washers within 7 working days of the date
of weld inspection.
3.8.1 Welds
3.8.1.1 Visual Inspection
AWS D1.1/D1.1M. Furnish the services of AWS-certified welding inspectors

for fabrication and erection inspection and testing and verification
inspections. Welding inspectors shall visually inspect and mark welds,
including fillet weld end returns.
3.8.1.2 Nondestructive Testing
AWS D1.1/D1.1M. Test locations shall be selected by the Contracting Officer.

If more than 20 percent of welds made by a welder contain defects
identified by testing, then all welds made by that welder shall be tested
by radiographic or ultrasonic testing, as approved by the Contracting
Officer. When all welds made by an individual welder are required to be

tested, magnetic particle testing shall be used only in areas inaccessible
to either radiographic or ultrasonic testing. Retest defective areas after
repair.
a. Testing frequency: Refer to Section 05 05 23 Welding, Strucutral

3.8.2 Load Indicator Washers
3.8.2.1 Load Indicator Washer Compression
Load indicator washers shall be tested in place to verify that they have
been compressed sufficiently to provide the 0.015 inch gap when the load
indicator washer is placed under the bolt head and the nut is tightened,
and to provide the 0.005 inch gap when the load indicator washer is placed
under the turned element, as required by ASTM F 959.
3.8.2.2 Load Indicator Gaps
In addition to the above testing, an independent testing agency as approved

by the Contracting Officer, shall test in place the load indicator gapson
20 percent of the installed load indicator washers to verify that the
ASTM F 959 load indicator gaps have been achieved. If more than 10 percent
of the load indicators tested have not been compressed sufficiently to
provide the average gaps required by ASTM F 959, then all in place load
indicator washers shall be tested to verify that the ASTM F 959 load
indicator gaps have been achieved. Test locations shall be selected by the
3.8.3 High-Strength Bolts
3.8.3.1 Testing Bolt, Nut, and Washer Assemblies
Test a minimum of 3 bolt, nut, and washer assemblies from each mill
certificate batch in a tension measuring device at the job site prior to
the beginning of bolting start-up. Demonstrate that the bolts and nuts,
when used together, can develop tension not less than the provisions
specified in AISC 348, Table 4, depending on bolt size and grade. The bolt
tension shall be developed by tightening the nut. A representative of the
manufacturer or supplier shall be present to ensure that the fasteners are
properly used, and to demonstrate that the fastener assemblies supplied
satisfy the specified requirements.
3.8.3.2 Inspection
Inspection procedures shall be in accordance with AISC 348, Section 9.

Confirm and report to the Contracting Officer that the materials meet the
project specification and that they are properly stored. Confirm that the
faying surfaces have been properly prepared before the connections are
assembled. Observe the specified job site testing and calibration, and
confirm that the procedure to be used provides the required tension.
Monitor the work to ensure the testing procedures are routinely followed on
joints that are specified to be fully tensioned.
The Contractor shall inspect proper preparation, size, gaging location, and
acceptability of welds; identification marking; operation and current
characteristics of welding sets in use; and calibration of torque wrenches
for high-strength bolts.
The Contractor shall inspect high-strength bolted connections in accordance

with AISC 317.
3.8.3.3 Testing
The Government has the option to perform nondestructive tests on 5 percent

of the installed bolts to verify compliance with pre-load bolt tension
requirements. The nondestructive testing will be done in-place using an
ultrasonic measuring device or any other device capable of determining
in-place pre-load bolt tension. The test locations shall be selected by
the Contracting Officer. If more than 10 percent of the bolts tested
contain defects identified by testing, then all bolts used from the batch
from which the tested bolts were taken, shall be tested. Retest new bolts
after installation.
SECTION 05 21 19
OPEN WEB STEEL JOIST FRAMING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

AWS B2.1/B2.1M (2009) Specification for Welding Procedure

and Performance Qualification
STEEL JOIST INSTITUTE (SJI)
SJI LOAD TABLES (2005) Standard Specifications Load Tables

and Weight Tables for Steel Joists and
Joist Girders - 42nd Edition
SJI TD 10 (2003) Technical Digest for the Design of

Fire Resistive Assemblies with Steel Joists
SJI TD 8 (2008) Welding Of Open-Web Steel Joists

And Joist Girders
SJI TD 9 (2008) Technical Digest for the Handling

and Erection of Steel Joists and Joist
Girders
SSPC PS 14.01 (1982; E 2004) Steel Joist Shop Painting

System
SSPC Paint 15 (1999; E 2004) Steel Joist Shop

Primer/Metal Building Primer

Construction
29 CFR 1926.757 Steel Erection; Open Web Steel Joists
1.2 SUBMITTALS

Welder qualification
Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) per OSHA 1910.1200
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Steel joist framing; G
SD-06 Test Reports
Erection inspection
Welding inspections
SD-07 Certificates
Accessories
Certification of Compliance
1.3 REGULATORY REQUIREMENT
All joist girder framing must conform to 29 CFR 1926.757. Secure all joist
bridging and anchoring in place prior to the application of any
construction loads. Distribute temporary loads so that joist capacity is
not exceeded. Do not apply loads to bridging.
1.4 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
Handle, transport, and store joists and joist girders in a manner to

prevent damage affecting their structural integrity. Store all items off
the ground in a well drained location protected from the weather and easily
accessible for inspection and handling.
All work must comply with the requirements set forth in 29 CFR 1926.
Submit steel joist framing drawings. Show joist type and size, layout in
plan, and erection details including methods of anchoring, framing at
openings, type and spacing of bridging, requirements for field welding, and
details of accessories as applicable.
1.5.2 Certification of Compliance
Prior to construction commencement, submit Material Safety Data Sheetper

29 CFR 1910.1200 for steel joists , and certification for welder
qualification, compliance with AWS B2.1/B2.1M, welding operation, and
tacker, stating the type of welding and positions qualified for, the code
and procedure qualified under, date qualified, and the firm and individual
certifying the qualification tests.
Submit certification of compliance for the following:
SJI TD 8
SJI TD 9
SJI TD 10
29 CFR 1926
29 CFR 1926.757
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 JOISTS, JOIST GIRDERS, AND ACCESSORIES
Provide design data from SJI LOAD TABLES for the joist series indicated.
2.2 PAINTING
2.2.1 Shop Painting
Clean and prime joists in accordance with SSPC Paint 15 and SSPC PS 14.01,
Steel Joist Shop Painting System, using only Type I, "Red Oxide Paint."
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
3.1.1 Handling and Erection
Conform to SJI LOAD TABLES for the joist series indicated.
3.1.2 Welding
All welding must conform to AWS B2.1/B2.1M and AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
3.2 PAINTING
3.2.1 Touch-Up Painting
After erection of joists and joist girders, touch-up connections and areas
of abraded shop coat with paint of the same type used for the shop coat.
3.2.2 Field Painting
Paint joists and joist girders requiring a finish coat in conformance with
the requirements of Section 09 90 00 PAINTING AND COATING.
3.3 VISUAL INSPECTIONS
3.3.1 Erection Inspection
AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Section 6. Perform erection inspection and field welding

inspections with AWS certified welding inspectors. Welding inspectors must
visually inspect and mark welds.
SECTION 05 30 00
STEEL DECKS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

AISI SG-913 (1991) LRFD Cold-formed Steel Design Manual
AISI SG03-3 (2002) Cold-Formed Steel Design Manual Set

Code - Sheet Steel
ASTM A 1008/A 1008M (2009a) Standard Specification for Steel,

Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural,
High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength
Low-Alloy with Improved Formability,
Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardened

the Hot-Dip Process

Galvanized Coatings

Sheet, 55% Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated by
the Hot-Dip Process

Rubber
ASTM D 1149 (2007) Standard Test Method for Rubber

Deterioration - Surface Ozone Cracking in
a Chamber
ASTM D 746 (2007) Standard Test Method for

Brittleness Temperature of Plastics and
Elastomers by Impact
ASTM E 84 (2009c) Standard Test Method for Surface

Materials
FM GLOBAL (FM)
FM DS 1-28 (2002) Design Wind Loads
FM P7825 (2005) Approval Guide
STEEL DECK INSTITUTE (SDI)
SDI 30 (2001) Design Manual for Composite Decks,

Form Decks, and Roof Decks
SDI DDMO3 (3rd Edition) Diaphragm Design Manual
SDI DDP (1987; R 2000) Deck Damage and Penetrations
SDI MOC2 (2006) Manual of Construction with Steel

Deck
SSPC Paint 20 (2002; E 2004) Paint Specification No. 20

Zinc-Rich Coating Type I Inorganic and
Type II Organic
UFC 3-310-01 Load Assumptions for Buildings
UL 209 (2005; Rev thru May 2007) Cellular Metal

Floor Raceways and Fittings
UL 580 (2006; Rev thru Jul 2009) Tests for Uplift

Resistance of Roof Assemblies
UL Bld Mat Dir (2011) Building Materials Directory
1.2 SUBMITTALS

SD-02 Shop Drawings
Fabrication Drawings
Metal Floor Deck Units
Cant Strips
Ridge and Valley Plates
Metal Closure Strips
SD-03 Product Data
Accessories
Deck Units
Joint Sealant Material
Mechanical Fasteners
Metal Floor Deck Units
Piston Tool Operator
Repair Paint
Welder Qualifications
Welding Equipment
Welding Rods and Accessories
SD-04 Samples
Metal Roof Deck Units
Flexible Closure Strips
Accessories
SD-05 Design Data
Deck Units
Submit manufacturer's design calculations, or applicable published

literature for the structural properties of the proposed deck
units.
SD-07 Certificates
. Welding Procedures
Fire Safety
Wind Storm Resistance
1.3.1 Deck Units
Furnish deck units and accessory products from a manufacturer regularly

engaged in manufacture of steel decking. Provide a 2 sq ft. sample of
decking material and each accessory to be used. Provide manufacturer's

certificates attesting that the decking material meets the specified
requirements.
1.3.2 Certification of Piston Tool Operator
Manufacturer's certificate attesting that the operators are authorized to

use the low velocity piston tool.
1.3.3 Qualifications for Welding Work
Follows Welding Procedures in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M. Test

specimens shall be made in the presence of Contracting Officer and shall be
tested by an approved testing laboratory at the Contractor's expense.
Submit qualified Welder Qualifications in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M,

or under an equivalent approved qualification test. Perform tests on test
pieces in positions and with clearances equivalent to those actually
encountered. If a test weld fails to meet requirements, perform an
immediate retest of two test welds until each test weld passes. Failure in
the immediate retest will require the welder be retested after further
practice or training, performing a complete set of test welds.
Submit manufacturer's catalog data for Welding Equipment and Welding Rods
and Accessories.
1.3.4 Regulatory Requirements
1.3.4.1 Fire Safety
Test roof deck as a part of a roof deck construction assembly of the type
used for this project, listing as fire classified in the UL Bld Mat Dir, or
listing as Class I construction in the FM P7825, and so labeled.
1.3.4.2 Wind Storm Resistance
Provide roof construction assembly capable of withstanding an uplift

pressure as shown on the drawings, when tested in accordance with the
uplift pressure test described in the FM DS 1-28 or as described in UL 580
and in general compliance with UFC 3-310-01.
1.3.5 Fabrication Drawings
Show type and location of units, location and sequence of connections,

bearing on supports, methods of anchoring, attachment of accessories,
adjusting plate details, size and location of holes to be cut and
reinforcement to be provided, the manufacturer's erection instructions and
other pertinent details.
Deliver deck units to the site in a dry and undamaged condition. Store and
handle steel deck in a manner to protect it from corrosion, deformation,
and other types of damage. Do not use decking for storage or as working
platform until units have been fastened into position. Exercise care not
to damage material or overload decking during construction. Must not
exceed the design live load. The maximum uniform distributed storage load.
Stack decking on platforms or pallets and cover with weathertight
ventilated covering. Elevate one end during storage to provide drainage.
Maintain deck finish at all times to prevent formation of rust. Repair

deck finish using touch-up paint. Replace damaged material.
1.5 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS FOR ROOF DECKS
1.5.1 Properties of Sections
Properties of metal roof deck sections must comply with engineering design
width as limited by the provisions of AISI SG-913.
1.5.2 Allowable Loads
Indicate total uniform dead and live load for detailing purposes.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
2.1.1 Steel Sheet
Flat rolled carbon steel sheets of structural quality, thickness not less
than 0.0358 inch before coating, meeting the requirements of AISI SG03-3,
except as modified herein.
2.1.2 Steel Coating
ASTM A 653/A 653M designation G90 galvanized, or ASTM A 792/A 792M

designation AZ55, aluminum-zinc alloy. Apply coating to both sides of
sheet. Conform to UL 209 for coating on decking provided as wire raceways.
2.1.3 Joint Sealant Material for Roof Decks
Provide a nonskinning, gun-grade, bulk compound material as recommended by

the manufacturer.
2.1.4 Flexible Closure Strips for Roof Decks
Provide strips made of elastomeric material specified and premolded to the

configuration required to provide tight-fitting closures at open ends and
sides of steel roof decking.
Provide a vulcanized, closed-cell, expanded chloroprene elastomer having

approximately 3.5 psi compressive-deflection at 25 percent deflection
(limits), conforming to ASTM D 1056, Grade No. SCE 41, with the following
additional properties:
Brittleness temperature of minus 40 degrees F when tested in accordance

with ASTM D 746.
Flammability resistance with a flame spread rating of less than 25 when

tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.
Resistance to ozone must be "no cracks" after exposure of a sample kept

under a surface tensile strain of 25 percent to an ozone concentration
of 100 parts per million of air by volume in air for 100 hours at 104
degrees F and tested in accordance with ASTM D 1149.
Provide a elastomeric type adhesive with a chloroprene base as

recommended by the manufacturer of the flexible closure strips.
2.2 ACCESSORIES
Provide accessories of same material as deck, unless specified otherwise.

Provide manufacturer's standard type accessories, as specified.
2.2.1 Adjusting Plates
Provide adjusting plates, or segments of deck units, of same thickness and

configuration as deck units in locations too narrow to accommodate full
size units. Provide factory cut plates of predetermined size where
possible.
2.2.2 End Closures
Fabricated of sheet metal by the deck manufacturer. Unless otherwise

indicated, provide end closures minimum 0.028 inch thick to close open ends
at openings through deck.
2.2.3 Partition Closures
Provide closures for closing voids above interior walls and partitions that
are perpendicular to the direction of the configurations. Provide rubber,
plastic, or sheet steel closures above typical partitions.Provide sheet
steel closures above fire-resistant interior walls and partitions located
on both sides of wall or partition. Provide glass fiber blanket insulation
in the space between pairs of closures at acoustical partitions.
2.2.4 Closure Plates for Composite Deck
Support and retain concrete at each floor level. Provide edge closures at
all edges of the slab of sufficient strength and stiffness to support the
wet concrete. Provide metal closures for all openings in composite steel
deck 1/4 inch and over.
2.2.5 Sheet Metal Collar
Where deck is cut for passage of pipes, ducts, columns, etc., and deck is
to remain exposed, provide a neatly cut sheet metal collar to cover edges
of deck. Do not cut deck until after installation of supplemental supports.
2.2.6 Cover Plates
Sheet metal to close panel edge and end conditions, and where panels change
direction or butt. Polyethylene-coated, self-adhesive, 2 inch wide joint
tape may be provided in lieu of cover plates on flat-surfaced decking butt
joints.
Fabricate cover plates for abutting floor deck units from the specified
structural-quality steel sheets not less than nominalthick before
galvanizing. Provide 6 inch wide cover plates and form to match the
contour of the floor deck units.
2.2.7 Roof Sump Pans
Sump pans must be provided for roof drains and must be minimum 0.075 inch
thick steel, flat type. Shape sump pans to meet roof slope by the supplier
or by a sheet metal specialist. Provide bearing flanges of sump pans to
overlap steel deck a minimum of 3 inch. Shape, size, and reinforce the
opening in bottom of the sump pan to receive roof drain.
2.2.8 Column Closures
Sheet metal, minimum 0.0358 inch thick or metal rib lath.
2.2.9 Mechanical Fasteners
Provide mechanical fasteners, such as powder actuated or pneumatically

driven fasteners, for anchoring the deck to structural supports and
adjoining units that are designed to meet the loads indicated. Provide
positive locking-type fasteners standard with the Steel Deck Institute and
the steel deck manufacturer, as approved by the Contracting Officer.
2.2.10 Miscellaneous Accessories

Furnish the manufacturer's standard accessories to complete the deck
installation. Furnish metal accessories of the same material as the deck
and with the minimum design thickness as follows: saddles, 0.0474 inch;
welding washers, 0.0598 inch cant strip, 0.0295 inch other metal
accessories, 0.0358 inch unless otherwise indicated. Accessories must
include but not be limited to saddles, welding washers, fasteners, cant
strips, butt cover plates, underlapping sleeves, and ridge and valley
plates.
2.3 FABRICATION
Furnish one sample of each type of Metal Floor Deck Units used to
illustrate the actual cross section dimensions and configuration.
Furnish sample of Metal Roof Deck Units used to illustrate actual cross
section dimensions and configurations.
Furnish one sample of each type Flexible Closure Strips, 12 inch long.
2.3.1 Deck Units
2.3.2 Open Beam, Metal Floor Deck Units
Fabricate open beam metal floor deck units of the specified

structural-quality steel sheets. Provide nominal thickness of the steel
sheets before galvanizing of minimum 18-gage.
Provide open beam metal floor deck units with a fluted section having
interlocking type sidelaps. Provide depth, width of unit, number of flutes
per unit, and width of flutes as follows:
DEPTH WIDTH OF UNIT NUMBER OF CELLS WIDTH OF CELLS

MINIMUM NOMINAL PER UNIT NOMINAL
(inch) (inch) _______________ (inch)
1-1/2 24 4 3-5/8
1-1/2 24 2 9-5/8
1-1/2 12 1 9-5/8
2.3.3 Length of Floor Deck Units
Provide floor deck units of sufficient length to span three or more

spacings where possible.
2.3.4 Roof Deck
Conform to ASTM A 792/A 792M or ASTM A 1008/A 1008M for deck used in
conjunction with insulation and built-up roofing. Fabricate roof deck
units of the steel design thickness required by the design drawings and
shop painted zinc-coated in conformance with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating
class or aluminum-zinc coated in accordance with ASTM A 792/A 792M Coating
Designation AZ55.
2.3.4.1 Cant Strips for Roof Decks
Fabricate cant strips from the specified commercial-quality steel sheets

not less than nominal 0.0359 inch thick before galvanizing. Bend strips to
form a 45-degree cant not less than 5 inch wide, with top and bottom
flanges a minimum 3 inch wide. Length of strips 10 feet.
2.3.4.2 Ridge and Valley Plates for Roof Decks
Fabricate plates from the specified structural-quality steel sheets, not

less than nominal 0.0359 inch thick before galvanizing. Provide plates of
minimum 4-1/2 inch wide and bent to provide tight fitting closures at
ridges and valleys. Provide a minimum length of ridge and valley plates of
10 feet.
2.3.4.3 Metal Closure Strips for Roof Decks
Fabricate strips from the specified commercial-quality steel sheets not

less than nominal 0.0359 inch thick before galvanizing. Provide strips
from the configuration required to provide tight-fitting closures at open
ends and sides of steel roof decking.
2.3.5 Form Deck
Conform to ASTM A 653/A 653M or ASTM A 1008 for deck used as formwork for
concrete. the steel design thickness required by the design drawings.
2.3.6 Composite Deck
The steel design thickness required by the design drawings. Zinc-coat in

conformance with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating class.
In addition to resisting shear, provide devices to resist vertical

separation between the steel deck and the concrete. Provide one of the
following types of shear devices:
a. Mechanically fixed shear devices such as embossments, holes, or

welded buttons.
b. Mechanically fixed shear devices such as inverted,

triangular-shaped ribs.
2.3.7 Touch-Up Paint
Provide touch-up paint for shop-painted units of the same type used for the
shop painting, and touch-up paint for zinc-coated units of an approved

galvanizing repair paint with a high-zinc dust content. Touch-up welds
with paint conforming to SSPC Paint 20 in accordance with ASTM A 780/A 780M.
Maintain finish of deck units and accessories by using touch-up paint
whenever necessary to prevent the formation of rust.
For floor decking installation, wire brush, clean, and touchup paint the
scarred areas on the top and bottom surfaces of the metal floor decking and
on the surface of supporting steel members. Include welds, weld scars,
bruises, and rust spots for scarred areas. Touched up the galvanized
surfaces with galvanizing repair paint. Touch up the painted surfaces with
paint for the repair of painted surfaces.
After roof decking installation, wire brush, clean, and touchup paint the
scarred areas on top and bottom surfaces of metal roof decking. The
scarred areas include welds, weld scars, bruises, and rust spots. Touchup
galvanized surfaces with galvanizing repair paint. Touchup painted
surfaces with repair paint of painted surfaces.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
Prior to installation of decking units and accessories, examine worksite to

verify that as-built structure will permit installation of decking system
without modification.
3.2 INSTALLATION
Install steel deck units in accordance with SDI DDMO3 and approved shop
drawings. Place units on structural supports, properly adjusted, leveled,
and aligned at right angles to supports before permanently securing in
place. Damaged deck and accessories including material which is
permanently stained or contaminated, deformed, or with burned holes shall
not be installed. Extend deck units over three or more supports unless
absolutely impractical. Report inaccuracies in alignment or leveling to
the Contracting Officer and make necessary corrections before permanently
anchoring deck units. Locate deck ends over supports only. Do not use
unanchored deck units as a work or storage platform. Do not fill unanchored
deck with concrete. Permanently anchor units placed by the end of each
working day. Do not support suspended ceilings, light fixtures, ducts,
utilities, or other loads by steel deck unless indicated. Distribute loads
by appropriate means to prevent damage.
3.2.1 Attachment
Immediately after placement and alignment, and after correcting

inaccuracies, permanently fasten steel deck units to structural supports
and to adjacent deck units by welding with normal 5/8 inch diameter puddle
welds or fastened with screws as indicated on the design drawings and in
accordance with manufacturer's recommended procedure and SDI DDMO3. Clamp
or weight deck units to provide firm contact between deck units and
structural supports while performing welding or fastening. Anchoring the
deck to structural supports with powder-actuated fasteners or pneumatically
driven fasteners is prohibited. Attachment of adjacent deck units by
button-punching is prohibited.
3.2.1.1 Welding
Perform welding in accordance with AWS D1.3/D1.3M using methods and

electrodes recommended by the manufacturers of the base metal alloys being
used. Ensure only operators previously qualified by tests prescribed in
AWS D1.1/D1.1M and AWS D1.3/D1.3M make welds. Immediately recertify, or
replace qualified welders, that are producing unsatisfactory welding. Do
use welding washers at the connections of the deck to supports. Do not use
welding washers at sidelaps. Holes and similar defects will not be
acceptable. Lap 2 inch deck ends. Attach all partial or segments of deck
units to structural supports in accordance with Section 2.5 of SDI DDMO3.
Attach shear connectors as shown and welded as per AWS D1.1/D1.1M through
the steel deck to the steel member . Immediately clean welds by chipping
and wire brushing. Heavily coat welds, cut edges and damaged portions of
coated finish with zinc-dust paint conforming to ASTM A 780/A 780M.
3.2.1.2 Fastening Floor Deck Units
Fasten floor deck units to the steel supporting members at ends and at all
intermediate supports, both parallel and perpendicular to deck span, by
welds. Do not exceed spacing of welds of 12 inch on center, with a minimum
of two welds per floor deck unit at each support. Provide 3/4 inch
minimum diameter fusion welds. Coordinate welding sequence and procedure
with the placing of the floor deck units. Blow holes shall be cause for
rejection.
Lock sidelaps between adjacent floor deck units together at intervals not
exceeding 48 inch on center by welding or button punching for all spans.
3.2.2 Openings
Cut or drill all holes and openings required and be coordinated with the
drawings, specifications, and other trades. Frame and reinforce openings
through the deck in conformance with SDI DDP. Reinforce holes and openings
6 to 12 inch across by 0.0474 inch thick steel sheet at least 12 inch
wider and longer than the opening and be fastened to the steel deck at each
corner of the sheet and at a maximum of 6 inch on center. Reinforce holes
and openings larger than 12 inch by steel channels or angles installed
perpendicular to the steel joists and supported by the adjacent steel
joists. Install steel channels or angles perpendicular to the deck ribs
and fasten to the channels or angles perpendicular to the steel joists.
Deck manufacturer shall approve holes or openings larger than 6 inch in
diameter prior to drilling or cutting.
3.2.3 Deck Damage
SDI MOC2, for repair of deck damage.
3.2.4 Accessory Installation
3.2.4.1 Adjusting Plates
Install as shown on shop drawings.
3.2.4.2 End Closures
Provide end closure to close open ends of cells at columns, walls, and
openings in deck.
3.2.4.3 Closures Above Partitions
Provide for closing voids between cells over partitions that are
perpendicular to direction of cells. Provide a one-piece closure strip for
partitions 4 inch nominal or less in thickness and two-piece closure strips
for wider partitions. Provide sheet metal closures above fire-rated
partitions at both sides of partition with space between filled with
fiberglass insulation.
3.2.4.4 Cover Plates
Where concrete leakage would be a problem, provide metal cover plates, or

joint tape, at joints between decking sheets, cellular or noncellular, to
be covered with concrete fill.
3.2.4.5 Column Closures
Provide for spaces between floor decking and columns which penetrate the
deck. Field cut closure plate to fit column in the field and tack weld to
decking and columns.
3.2.4.6 Access Hole Covers
Provide to seal holes cut in decking to facilitate welding of decking to

structural supports.
3.2.5 Concrete Work
Prior to placement of concrete, inspect installed decking to ensure that

there has been no permanent deflection or other damage to decking. Replace
decking which has been damaged or permanently deflected as approved by the
Contracting Officer. Place concrete on metal deck in accordance with
Construction Practice of SDI 30.
3.2.6 Preparation of Fire-Proofed Surfaces
Provide deck surfaces, both composite and noncomposite, which are to

receive sprayed-on fireproofing, galvanized and free of all grease, mill
oil, paraffin, dirt, salt, and other contaminants which impair adhesion of
the fireproofing. Complete any required cleaning prior to steel deck
installation using a cleaning method that is compatible with the sprayed-on
fireproofing.
3.3 JOINT SEALING FOR ROOF DECKS
Seal sidelaps and endlaps with manufacturer's recommended joint sealing

material. Shop or field apply the material. Before applying the sealing
material, completely remove dust, dirt, moisture, and other foreign
material from the surfaces to which the sealing material is to be applied.
Apply sealing material in strict accordance with the sealing material
manufacturer's printed instructions.
3.4 ROOF SUMP PANS
Place sump pans over openings in roof decking and fusion welded to top
surface of roof decking. Do not exceed spacing of welds of 12 inch with
not less than one weld at each corner. Field cut opening in the bottom of
each roof sump pan to receive the roof drain as part of the work of this
section.
3.5 CANT STRIPS FOR ROOF DECKS
Provide strips to be fusion welded to surface of roof decking, secured to

wood nailers by galvanized screws or to steel framing by galvanized
self-tapping screws or welds. Do not exceed spacing of welds and fasteners
of 12 inch. Lap end joints a minimum 3 inch and secure with galvanized
sheet metal screws spaced a maximum 4 inch on center.
3.6 RIDGE AND VALLEY PLATES FOR ROOF DECKS
Provide plates to be fusion welded to top surface of roof decking. Lap end
joints a minimum 3 inch. For valley plates, provide endlaps to be in the
direction of water flow.
3.7 CLOSURE STRIPS FOR ROOF DECKS
Provide closure strips at open, uncovered ends and edges of the roof
decking and in voids between roof decking and top of walls and partitions
where indicated. Install closure strips in position in a manner to provide
a weathertight installation.
3.8 ROOF INSULATION SUPPORT FOR ROOF DECKS
Provide metal closure strips for support of roof insulation where rib
openings in top surface of metal roof decking occur adjacent to edges and
openings. Weld metal closure strips in position.
3.9 CLEANING AND PROTECTION FOR ROOF DECKS
Upon completion of the deck, sweep surfaces clean and prepare for
installation of the roofing.
3.10.1 Decks Not Receiving Concrete
Inspect the decking top surface for distortion after installation. For
roof decks not receiving concrete, verify distortion by placing a straight
edge across three adjacent top flanges. The maximum allowable gap between
the straight edge and the top flanges is 1/16 inch; when gap is more than
1/16 inch, provide corrective measures or replacement. Reinspect decking
after performing corrective measures or replacement.
SECTION 05 50 13
MISCELLANEOUS METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

AA 46 (1978) Standards for Anodized

Architectural Aluminum
AA DAF-45 (2003) Designation System for Aluminum

Finishes
AISC 303 (2005) Code of Standard Practice for Steel

Buildings and Bridges
ASSE/SAFE A10.3 (2006) Operations - Safety Requirements

for Powder Actuated Fastening Systems

Code - Steel
ASME B18.2.1 (1996; Addenda A 1999; Errata 2003; R

2005) Square and Hex Bolts and Screws
(Inch Series)
ASME B18.2.2 (1987; R 2005) Standard for Square and Hex

Nuts
ASME B18.21.1 (1999; R 2005) Lock Washers (Inch Series)
ASME B18.22.1 (1965; R 2008) Plain Washers
ASME B18.6.2 (1998; R 2005) Slotted Head Cap Screws,

Square Head Set Screws, and Slotted
Headless Set Screws: Inch Series
ASME B18.6.3 (2003; R 2008) Machine Screws and Machine

Screw Nuts

Steel Products

Hardware

Strength

Structural Steel

Steel Sheet, Aluminum-Coated, by the
Hot-Dip Process
ASTM A 475 (2003e1; R 2009) Standard Specification

for Zinc-Coated Steel Wire Strand

Gray Iron Castings

Shapes

Welded and Seamless

the Hot-Dip Process

High-Strength Nonheaded Steel Bolts and
Studs
ASTM A 780/A 780M (2001; R 2006) Standard Practice for

Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of
Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings

Requirements for Steel Sheet,
Metallic-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process
ASTM B 108/B 108M (2008) Standard Specification for

Aluminum-Alloy Permanent Mold Castings
ASTM B 209 (2007) Standard Specification for Aluminum

and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate

and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,
Wire, Profiles, and Tubes

Aluminum-Alloy Sand Castings
ASTM D 1187 (1997; R 2002e1) Asphalt-Base Emulsions

for Use as Protective Coatings for Metal
ASTM F 1679 (2004e1) Standard Test Method for Using a

Variable Incidence Tribometer
MPI 79 (Oct 2009) Alkyd Anti-Corrosive Metal

Primer
NAAMM MBG 531 (2000) Metal Bar Grating Manual
NAAMM MBG 532 (2000) Heavy Duty Metal Bar Grating Manual
1.2 SUBMITTALS

SD-02 Shop Drawings
Fabrication drawings of structural steel door frames; G
Access doors and panels, installation drawings; G
Cover plates and frames, installation drawings; G
Floor gratings and roof walkways, installation drawings; G
Submit fabrication drawings showing layout(s), connections to

structural system, and anchoring details as specified in AISC 303.
Submit templates, erection and installation drawings indicating
thickness, type, grade, class of metal, and dimensions. Show

construction details, reinforcement, anchorage, and installation
with relation to the building construction.
SD-03 Product Data
Access doors and panels
Cover plates and frames
Control-joint covers
Expansion joint covers
Floor gratings and roof walkways
Structural steel door frames
1.3 QUALIFICATION OF WELDERS
Qualify welders in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M. Use procedures,

materials, and equipment of the type required for the work.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION
Protect from corrosion, deformation, and other types of damage. Store

items in an enclosed area free from contact with soil and weather. Remove
and replace damaged items with new items.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
2.1.1 Structural Carbon Steel
ASTM A 36/A 36M.
2.1.2 Structural Tubing
ASTM A 500/A 500M.
2.1.3 Steel Pipe
ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E or S, Grade B.
2.1.4 Fittings for Steel Pipe
Standard malleable iron fittings ASTM A 47/A 47M.
2.1.5 Gratings
a. Gray cast iron ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class 40.
b. Metal plank grating, non-slip requirement, aluminum ASTM B 209,

6061-T6; steel ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90.
c. Metal bar type grating NAAMM MBG 531 and NAAMM MBG 532.
2.1.6 Anchor Bolts
ASTM A 307. Where exposed, shall be of the same material, color, and
finish as the metal to which applied.
2.1.6.1 Expansion Anchors, and Adhesive Anchors
Provide expansion anchorsadhesive anchorsto meet the requirements of as

shown in the contract drawings.
2.1.6.2 Lag Screws and Bolts
ASME B18.2.1, type and grade best suited for the purpose.
2.1.6.3 Toggle Bolts
ASME B18.2.1.
2.1.6.4 Bolts, Nuts, Studs and Rivets
ASME B18.2.2 and ASTM A 687 or ASTM A 307.
2.1.6.5 Powder Driven Fasteners
Follow safety provisions of ASSE/SAFE A10.3.
2.1.6.6 Screws
ASME B18.2.1, ASME B18.6.2, and ASME B18.6.3.
2.1.6.7 Washers
Provide plain washers to conform to ASME B18.22.1. Provide beveled washers

for American Standard beams and channels, square or rectangular, tapered in
thickness, and smooth. Provide lock washers to conform to ASME B18.21.1.
2.1.7 Aluminum Alloy Products
Conform to ASTM B 209 for sheet plate, ASTM B 221 for extrusions and
ASTM B 26/B 26M or ASTM B 108/B 108M for castings, as applicable. Provide
aluminum extrusions at least 1/8 inch thick and aluminum plate or sheet at
least 0.050 inch thick.
2.2 FABRICATION FINISHES
2.2.1 Galvanizing
Hot-dip galvanize items specified to be zinc-coated, after fabrication
where practicable. Galvanizing: ASTM A 123/A 123M, ASTM A 153/A 153M,

ASTM A 653/A 653M or ASTM A 924/A 924M, G90, as applicable.
2.2.2 Galvanize
Anchor bolts, grating fasteners, washers, and parts or devices necessary

for proper installation, unless indicated otherwise.
2.2.3 Repair of Zinc-Coated Surfaces
Repair damaged surfaces with galvanizing repair method and paint conforming
to ASTM A 780/A 780M or by application of stick or thick paste material
specifically designed for repair of galvanizing, as approved by Contracting
Officer. Clean areas to be repaired and remove slag from welds. Heat
surfaces to which stick or paste material is applied, with a torch to a
temperature sufficient to melt the metallics in stick or paste; spread
molten material uniformly over surfaces to be coated and wipe off excess
material.
2.2.4 Shop Cleaning and Painting
2.2.4.1 Surface Preparation
Blast clean surfaces in accordance with SSPC SP 6. Surfaces that will be

exposed in spaces above ceiling or in attic spaces, crawl spaces, furred
spaces, and chases may be cleaned in accordance with SSPC SP 3 in lieu of
being blast cleaned. Wash cleaned surfaces which become contaminated with
rust, dirt, oil, grease, or other contaminants with solvents until
thoroughly clean. Steel to be embedded in concrete shall be free of dirt
and grease. Do not paint or galvanize bearing surfaces, including contact
surfaces within slip critical joints, but coat with rust preventative
applied in the shop.
2.2.4.2 Pretreatment, Priming and Painting
Apply pretreatment, primer, and paint in accordance with manufacturer's

printed instructions. On surfaces concealed in the finished construction
or not accessible for finish painting, apply an additional prime coat to a
minimum dry film thickness of 1.0 mil. Tint additional prime coat with a
small amount of tinting pigment.
2.2.5 Nonferrous Metal Surfaces
Protect by plating, anodic, or organic coatings.
2.2.6 Aluminum Surfaces
2.2.6.1 Surface Condition
Before finishes are applied, remove roll marks, scratches, rolled-in

scratches, kinks, stains, pits, orange peel, die marks, structural streaks,
and other defects which will affect uniform appearance of finished surfaces.
2.2.6.2 Aluminum Finishes
Unexposed sheet, plate and extrusions may have mill finish as fabricated.
Sandblast castings' finish, medium, AA DAF-45, or AA 46. Unless otherwise
specified, provide all other aluminum items with a standard mill finish.
Provide a coating thickness not less than that specified for protective and
decorative type finishes for items used in interior locations or

architectural Class I type finish for items used in exterior locations in
AA DAF-45. Provide a polished satin finish om items to be anodized.
2.3 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS
Provide flush type access doors and panels unless otherwise indicated.
Fabricate frames for access doors of steel not lighter than 14 gage with
welded joints and anchorage for securing into construction. Provide access
doors with a minimum of 14 by 20 inches and of not lighter than 14 gage
steel, with stiffened edges and welded attachments. Provide access doors
hinged to frame and with a flush-face, turn-screw-operated latch. Provide
exposed metal surface with a baked enamel finish with color to match
adjacent surface.
2.4 FLOOR GRATINGS
Design aluminum grating in accordance with NAAMM MBG 531NAAMM MBG 532 for
bar type grating or manufacturer's charts for plank grating.
a. Design floor gratings to support a live load of 100 pounds per

square foot for the spans indicated, with maximum deflection of
L/240.
b. NAAMM MBG 531NAAMM MBG 532, band edges of grating with bars of the
same size as the bearing bars. Weld banding in accordance with
the manufacturer's standard for trim unless otherwise indicated.
Design tops of bearing bars, cross or intermediate bars to be in
the same plane and match grating finish.
--or--
NAAMM MBG 531NAAMM MBG 532, band ends of gratings with bars of the
same or greater thickness than the metal used for grating. Weld
banding bars to the bearing bars or channels at least every fourth
bar or channel and in every corner. Tack weld intervening bars or
channels. Band diagonal or round cuts by welding bars of the same
or greater thickness metal used for grating in accordance with the
manufacturer's standard for trim unless otherwise indicated.
d. Slip resistance requirements must exceed both wet and dry a static
coefficient of friction of 0.5 as tested in accordance with
ASTM F 1679.
2.5 GUARD POSTS (BOLLARDS/PIPE GUARDS)
Provide 8 inch extra strong weight steel pipe as specified in

ASTM A 53/A 53M. Anchor posts in concrete as indicated and fill solidly
with concrete with minimum compressive strength of 2500 psi.
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS PLATES AND SHAPES
Provide for items that do not form a part of the structural steel
framework, such as lintels, sill angles, miscellaneous mountings and
frames. Provide lintels fabricated from structural steel shapes over
openings in masonry walls and partitions as indicated and as required to
support wall loads over openings.
Provide angles and plates, ASTM A 36/A 36M, for embedment as indicated.
Galvanize embedded items exposed to the elements according to
ASTM A 123/A 123M.
2.7 STRUCTURAL STEEL DOOR FRAMES
a. Provide frames as indicated. If not otherwise shown, construct

frames of structural shapes, or shape and plate composite, to form
a full depth channel shape with at least 1 1/2 inchoutstanding
legs.
b. Where track, guides, hoods, hangers, operators, and other such
accessories are required, provide support as indicated.
c. Provide jamb anchors near top, bottom, and at not more than 24 inch
intervals. Provide the bottom of each jamb member with a clip
angle welded in place with two 1/2 inchdiameter floor bolts for
adjustment.
d. Provide spreaders between bottoms of floor jamb members. When

floor construction permits, they may be left in place, concealed
in the floor.
--or--
2.8 DOWNSPOUT BOOTS
Provide cast iron downspout boots with receiving bells sized to fit
downspouts.
2.9 GUY CABLES
Guy cables shall be prestretched, galvanized wire rope of the sizes

indicated. Wire rope shall conform to ASTM A 475, high strength grade with
Class A coating. Guys shall have a factory attached clevis top-end
fitting; a factory attached open-bridge strand socket bottom-end fitting;
and be complete with oval eye, threaded anchor rods. Fittings and
accessories shall be hot-dip galvanized.
2.10 WINDOW SUB-SILL
Provide window sub-sill of extruded aluminum alloy with size and design
indicated. Provide not less than two anchors per window section for
securing into mortar joints of masonry sill course. Provide sills for
banks of windows with standard mill finish with a protective coating, prior
to shipment, of two coats of a clear, colorless, methacrylate lacquer
applied to all surfaces of the sills.
PART 3 EXECUTION
Install items at locations indicated, according to manufacturer's

instructions. Verify all measurements and take all field measurements
necessary before fabrication. Exposed fastenings shall be compatible
materials, shall generally match in color and finish, and harmonize with
the material to which fastenings are applied. Include materials and parts
necessary to complete each item, even though such work is not definitely
shown or specified. Poor matching of holes for fasteners shall be cause
for rejection. Conceal fastenings where practicable. Thickness of metal

and details of assembly and supports shall provide strength and stiffness.
Form joints exposed to the weather shall be formed to exclude water. Items
listed below require additional procedures.
3.2 WORKMANSHIP
Provide miscellaneous metalwork that is well formed to shape and size, with
sharp lines and angles and true curves. Drilling and punching shall
produce clean true lines and surfaces. Provide continuous welding along
the entire area of contact except where tack welding is permitted. Do not
tack weld exposed connections of work in place and ground smooth. Provide
a smooth finish on exposed surfaces of work in place and unless otherwise
approved, flush exposed riveting. Mill joints where tight fits are
required. Corner joints shall be coped or mitered, well formed, and in
true alignment. Accurately set work to established lines and elevations
and securely fastened in place. Install in accordance with manufacturer's
installation instructions and approved drawings, cuts, and details.
3.3 ANCHORAGE, FASTENINGS, AND CONNECTIONS
Provide anchorage where necessary for fastening miscellaneous metal items

securely in place. Include for anchorage not otherwise specified or
indicated slotted inserts, expansion shields, and powder-driven fasteners,
when approved for concrete; toggle bolts and through bolts for masonry;
machine and carriage bolts for steel; through bolts, lag bolts, and screws
for wood. Do not use wood plugs in any material. Provide non-ferrous
attachments for non-ferrous metal. Make exposed fastenings of compatible
materials, generally matching in color and finish, to which fastenings are
applied. Conceal fastenings where practicable.
3.4 BUILT-IN WORK
Form for anchorage metal work built-in with concrete or masonry, or provide
with suitable anchoring devices as indicated or as required. Furnish metal
work in ample time for securing in place as the work progresses.
3.5 WELDING
Perform welding, welding inspection, and corrective welding, in accordance

with AWS D1.1/D1.1M. Use continuous welds on all exposed connections.
Grind visible welds smooth in the finished installation.
3.6 FINISHES
3.6.1 Dissimilar Materials
Where dissimilar metals are in contact, protect surfaces with a coat

conforming to MPI 79 to prevent galvanic or corrosive action. Where
aluminum is in contact with concrete, plaster, mortar, masonry, wood, or
absorptive materials subject to wetting, protect with ASTM D 1187,
asphalt-base emulsion.
3.6.2 Field Preparation
Remove rust preventive coating just prior to field erection, using a

remover approved by the rust preventive manufacturer. Surfaces, when
assembled, shall be free of rust, grease, dirt and other foreign matter.
3.6.3 Environmental Conditions
Do not clean or paint surface when damp or exposed to foggy or rainy

weather, when metallic surface temperature is less than 5 degrees F above
the dew point of the surrounding air, or when surface temperature is below
45 degrees F or over 95 degrees F, unless approved by the Contracting
Officer.
3.7 ACCESS PANELS
Install a removable access panel not less than 12 by 12 inches directly

below each valve, flow indicator, damper, or air splitter that is located
above the ceiling, other than an acoustical ceiling, and that would
otherwise not be accessible.
3.8 INSTALLATION OF GUARD POSTS (BOLLARDS/PIPE GUARDS)
Set pipe guards vertically in concrete piers. Construct piers of, and the
hollow cores of the pipe filled with, concrete having a compressive
strength of 3000 psi. Locate one bollard each on exterior and interior
corner of each equipment access door (4-bollards per door) at the Readiness
Modules
3.9 INSTALLATION OF DOWNSPOUT BOOTS
Secure downspouts to building through integral lips with appropriate

fasteners.
3.10 RECESSED FLOOR FRAMES & MATS
Verify field measurements prior to releasing materials for fabrication by

the manufacturer. Use a mat frame to ensure recess accuracy in size, shape
and depth. Form drain pit by blocking out concrete when frames are
installed, dampproof after concrete has set. Assemble frames onsite and
install so that upper edge will be level with finished floor surface.
Screeded the concrete base inside the mat recess frame area using the edge
provided by the frame as a guide and anchor into the cement with anchor
pins a minimum of 24 inches on centers.
3.11 STRUCTURAL STEEL DOOR FRAMES
Secure door frames to the floor slab by means of angle clips and expansion
bolts. Weld continuous door stops to the frame or tap screwed with
countersunk screws at no more than 18 inchcenters, assuring in either case
full contact with the frame. Make any necessary reinforcements and drill
and tap the frames as required for hardware.
SECTION 05 51 00
METAL STAIRS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES


(AASHTO)

Steel Anchor Bolts
ASME B18.2.1 (1996; R 2005) Square and Hex Bolts and

Screws (Inch Series)
ASME B18.22.1 (1965; Reaffirmed 2008) Plain Washers
ASME B18.6.1 (1981; R 2008) Wood Screws (Inch Series)

Screw Nuts

ASTM A 1011/A 1011M (2009b) Standard Specification for Steel,

Sheet, and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon,
Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy and
High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved
Formability and Ultra-High Strength
ASTM A 108 (2007) Standard Specification for Steel

Bar, Carbon and Alloy, Cold-Finished

Steel Products

Hardware

Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength
Carbon Steel Plates

Bars, Carbon and Alloy, Hot-Wrought
General Requirements for

Strength


Structural Steel
ASTM A 449 (2007b) Standard Specification for Hex Cap

Screws, Bolts, and Studs, Steel, Heat
Treated, 120/105/90 ksi Minimum Tensile
Strength, General Use

Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings

Gray Iron Castings

Shapes

Cold-Drawn Buttweld Carbon Steel
Mechanical Tubing

Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the
Hot-Dip Process, Commercial Quality

Welded and Seamless
ASTM A 568/A 568M (2009a) Standard Specifications for Steel,

Sheet, Carbon, Structural, and
High-Strength, Low-Alloy, Hot-Rolled and
Cold-Rolled, General Requirements for

Steel Bars, Carbon, Merchant Quality,
M-Grades
Requirements for Rolled Structural Steel

Bars, Plates, Shapes, and Sheet Piling

the Hot-Dip Process
ASTM A 924/A 924M (2009a) Standard Specification for General

ASTM C 514 (2004; R 2009e1) Standard Specification

for Nails for the Application of Gypsum
Board
ASTM C 636/C 636M (2008) Standard Practice for Installation

of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for
Acoustical Tile and Lay-In Panels
ASTM E 488 (1996; R 2003) Standard Test Methods for

Strength of Anchors in Concrete and
Masonry Elements
NAAMM MBG 531 (2000) Metal Bar Grating Manual
SSPC Paint 25 (1997; E 2004) Zinc Oxide, Alkyd, Linseed

Oil Primer for Use Over Hand Cleaned
Steel, Type I and Type II
1.2 SUBMITTALS

SD-02 Shop Drawings
Submit fabrication drawings for the following items in accordance

with the paragraph entitled, "General Requirements," of this
section.
Steel Shapes, Plates, Bars and Strips
Metal Stair System
SD-03 Product Data
Submit manufacturer's catalog data including two copies of

manufacturers specifications, load tables, dimension diagrams, and
anchor details for the following items:
Structural Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars
Concrete Inserts
Masonry Anchorage Devices
Protective Coating
Steel Pan Stairs
SD-07 Certificates
Submit Welding Procedures in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
Submit certificates for Welder Qualification in accordance with

the paragraph entitled, "Qualifications for Welding Work," of this
section.
Submit manufacturer's installation instructions for the following

products used in the fabrication of steel stair work.
Structural Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars
1.3 QUALIFICATIONS FOR WELDING WORK
Section 05 05 23 WELDING, STRUCTURAL applies to work specified in this

section.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Submit complete and detailed fabrication drawings for all Iron and Steel
Hardware, and for all Steel Shapes, Plates, Bars and Strips used in
accordance with the design specifications referenced in this section.
Pre-assemble items in the shop to the greatest extent possible.

Disassemble units only to the extent necessary for shipping and handling.
Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.
For the fabrication of work exposed to view, use only materials that are
smooth and free of surface blemishes, including pitting, seam marks, roller
marks, rolled trade names, and roughness. Remove blemishes by grinding, or
by welding and grinding, prior to cleaning, treating, and application of
surface finishes, including zinc coatings. For handrails and guardrails see
Section 05 52 00 Metal Railings.
2.2 STRUCTURAL STEEL PLATES, SHAPES AND BARS
Structural-size shapes and plates, conforming to ASTM A 36/A 36M, unless

otherwise noted, except bent or cold-formed plates.
Steel plates - bent or cold-formed, conforming to ASTM A 283/A 283M, Grade

C.
Steel bars and bar-size shapes, conforming to ASTM A 36/A 36M, unless
otherwise noted for steel bars and bar-size shapes.
2.3 STRUCTURAL STEEL TUBING
Structural steel tubing, hot-formed, welded or seamless, conforming to

ASTM A 500/A 500M, Grade B, unless otherwise noted.
2.4 HOT-ROLLED CARBON STEEL BARS
Hot-rolled carbon steel bars and bar-size shapes, conforming to ASTM A 575,
grade as selected by the fabricator.
2.5 COLD-FINISHED STEEL BARS
Cold-finished steel bars conforming to ASTM A 108, grade as selected by the

fabricator.
2.6 HOT-ROLLED CARBON STEEL SHEETS AND STRIPS
Hot-rolled carbon sheets and strips conforming to ASTM A 568/A 568M and
ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, pickled and oiled.
2.7 COLD-ROLLED CARBON STEEL SHEETS
Cold-rolled carbon steel sheets conforming to ASTM A 1008/A 1008M.
2.8 GALVANIZED CARBON STEEL SHEETS
Galvanized carbon steel sheets conforming to ASTM A 526/A 526M, with

galvanizing conforming to ASTM A 653/A 653M and ASTM A 924/A 924M.
2.9 COLD-DRAWN STEEL TUBING
Cold drawn steel tubing conforming to ASTM A 512, sunk drawn, butt-welded,
cold-finished, and stress-relieved.
2.10 GRAY IRON CASTINGS
Gray iron castings conforming to ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class 30.
2.11 MALLEABLE IRON CASTINGS
Malleable iron castings conforming to ASTM A 47/A 47M, grade as selected.
2.12 STEEL PIPE
Steel pipe conforming to ASTM A 53/A 53M, type as selected, Grade B; primed
finish, unless galvanizing is required; standard weight (Schedule 40).
2.13 CONCRETE INSERTS
Carbon steel bolts having special wedge-shaped heads, nuts, washers, and
shims and galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 153/A 153M. Provide
slotted-type concrete inserts consisting of galvanized 1/8-inchthick
pressed steel plate conforming to ASTM A 283/A 283M; of box-type welded

construction with slot designed to receive 3/4-inch diameter square-head
bolt with knockout cover; and be hot-dip galvanized in accordance with
ASTM A 123/A 123M.
2.14 MASONRY ANCHORAGE DEVICES
Provide masonry anchorage devices consisting of expansion shields complying

with AASHTO M 314, ASTM E 488 and ASTM C 514 as follows:
a. Lead expansion shields for machine screws and bolts 1/4 inch and
smaller; head-out embedded nut type, single unit class, Group I, Type
1, Class 1.
Toggle bolts of the tumble-wing type, conforming to ASTM A 325, ASTM A 449
and ASTM C 636/C 636M, type, class, and style as required.
2.15 FASTENERS
Galvanized zinc-coated fasteners in accordance with ASTM A 153/A 153M and

used for exterior applications or where built into exterior walls or floor
systems. Select fasteners for the type, grade, and class required for the
installation of steel stair items.
Standard/regular hexagon-head bolts and nuts be conforming to ASTM A 307,

Grade A.
Square-head lag bolts conforming to ASME B18.2.1.
Machine screws cadmium-plated steel conforming to ASME B18.6.3.
Wood screws, flat-head carbon steel conforming to ASME B18.6.1.
Plain washers, round, general-assembly-grade, carbon steel conforming to

ASME B18.22.1.
Lockwashers helical spring, carbon steel conforming to.
2.16 GENERAL FABRICATION
Prepare and submit metal stair system shop drawings with detailed plans and
elevations at not less than 1 inch to 1 foot with details of sections and
connections at not less than 3 inches to 1 foot. Also detail placement
drawings, diagrams, templates for installation of anchorage, including but
not limited to, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and miscellaneous metal
items having integral anchorage devices.
Use materials of size and thicknesses indicated or, if not indicated, of

required size and thickness to produce adequate strength and durability in
finished product for intended use. Work materials to dimensions indicated
on approved detail drawings, using proven details of fabrication and
support. Use type of materials indicated or specified for the various
components of work.
Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces
and straight sharp edges. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately
1/32 inch, and bend metal corners to the smallest radius possible without
causing grain separation or otherwise impairing the work.
Continuously weld corners and seams in accordance with the recommendations

of AWS D1.1/D1.1M. Grind smooth exposed welds and flush to match and blend
with adjoining surfaces.
Form exposed connections with hairline joints that are flush and smooth,
using concealed fasteners wherever possible. Use exposed fasteners of the
type indicated or, if not indicated, use Phillips flathead (countersunk)
screws or bolts.
Provide and coordinate anchorage of the type indicated with the supporting
structure. Fabricate anchoring devices, space as indicated and required to
provide adequate support for the intended use of the work.
Use hot-rolled steel bars for work fabricated from bar stock unless work is
indicated or specified as fabricated from cold-finished or cold-rolled
stock.
2.17 PROTECTIVE COATING
Shop prime steelwork with red oxide primer in accordance with SSPC Paint 25
2.18 STEEL PAN STAIRS
2.18.1 General
Use welding for joining pieces together. Fabricate units so that bolts and
other fastenings do not appear on finish surfaces. Make joints true and
tight, and connections between parts lightproof tight. Grid smooth
continuous welds where exposed.
Construct metal stair units to sizes and arrangements indicated to support

a minimum live load of 100 pounds per square foot. Provide framing,
hangers, columns, struts, clips, brackets, bearing plates, and other
components as required for the support of stairs and platforms.
2.18.2 Stair Framing
Fabricate stringers of structural steel channels, or plates, or a

combination thereof as indicated. Provide closures for exposed ends of
strings.
Construct platforms of structural steel channel headers and miscellaneous

framing members as indicated. Bolt headers to stringers and newels and
framing members to stringers and headers.
2.18.3 Riser, Subtread, And Subplatform Metal Pans
Form metal pans of 0.1084-inch (12-gage) thick galvanized structural steel

sheets, conforming to ASTM A 653/A 653M, Grade A, with zinc coating
conforming to ASTM A 653/A 653M and ASTM A 924/A 924M. Shape of pans to
configuration indicated.
Construct riser and subtread metal pans with steel angle supporting
brackets, of size indicated, welded to stringers. Secure metal pans to
brackets with rivets or welds. Secure subplatform metal pans to platform
frames with welds.
2.18.4 Metal Safety Nosings
Cast metal abrasive safety nosings, nonskid type, 4 inches wide by full
length of step between stringers. Fabricate to thickness, profile, and
surface pattern as indicated. Equip each nosing with integral anchors for
embedding in pan fill material, and spaced not more than 4 inches from each
end and not more than 15 incheson center.
2.18.5 Steel Floor Plate Treads And Platforms
Provide raised pattern steel floor plate fabricated from steel complying
with ASTM A 36/A 36M. Provide pattern as indicated or, if not indicated,
as selected from manufacturer's standard patterns.
Form treads of 1/4-inch thick steel floor plate with integral nosing and
back edge stiffener. Weld steel supporting brackets to strings and treads
to brackets.
Fabricate platforms of steel floor plate to thickness indicated. Provide

nosing that match treads at landings. Secure floor plates to platform
framing members with welds.
2.18.6 Floor Grating Treads And Platforms
Provide floor grating treads and platforms conforming to ASTM A 6/A 6M,
ASTM A 29/A 29M and NAAMM MBG 531, "Metal Bar Grating Manual." Provide
pattern, spacing, and bar sizes as indicated:
a. Galvanized finish conforming to ASTM A 123/A 123M.
Fabricate grating treads with steel plate nosing on one edge and with steel
angle or steel plate carrier at each end for string connections. Secure
treads to strings with bolts.
Fabricate grating platforms with nosing that matches on grating treads at

landings. Provide toe-plates at open-sided edges of floor grating to
platform framing members.
2.18.7 Safety Nosings For Concrete Treads
Provide safety nosings of cast aluminum with cross-hatched

abrasive-surfaces, or extruded aluminum with abrasive inserts, at least 4
inches wide and 1/4 inch thick for metal-pan cement-filled treads extending
the full length of the tread for stairs and for platforms and landings.
Provide safety nosings with anchors embedded a minimum of 3/4 inch in the
concrete and with tops flush with the top of the traffic surface.
2.18.8 Safety Treads
ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, steel pan for concrete tread.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 STEEL STAIRS
Provide anchor bolts, grating fasteners, washers, and all parts or devices
necessary for proper installation. Provide lock washers under nuts.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF SAFETY NOSINGS
Completely embed nosing in concrete before the initial set of the concrete
occurs and finish flush with the top of the concrete surface.
3.3 FIELD WELDING
Execute procedures of manual shielded metal arc welding, appearance and

quality of welds made, and methods used in correcting welding work in
compliance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
3.4 TOUCHUP PAINTING
Immediately after installation, clean all field welds, bolted connections,

and abraded areas of the shop painted material, and repaint exposed areas
with the same paint used for shop painting. Apply paint by brush or spray
to provide a minimum dry-film thickness of 2 mils.
SECTION 05 52 00
METAL RAILINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES


(AASHTO)

Steel Anchor Bolts

Code - Steel

(Inch Series)
ASME B18.22.1 (1965; R 2008) Plain Washers

Screw Nuts

Steel Products

Hardware

Castings, Carbon, for General Application

Strength

ASTM A 449 (2007b) Specification for Hex Cap Screws,

Bolts, and Studs, Steel, Heat Treated,
120/105/90 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength,
General Use

Hot-Dip Process

Shapes

Cold-Drawn Buttweld Carbon Steel
Mechanical Tubing

Welded and Seamless
ASTM C 514 (2004e1; R 2009) Standard Specification

for Nails for the Application of Gypsum
Board


Masonry Elements
NAAMM AMP 521 (2001) Pipe Railing Manual
1.2 SUBMITTALS

SD-02 Shop Drawings
Submit fabrication drawings for the following items in accordance

with the paragraph entitled, "General Requirements," of this
section.
Steel Shapes, Plates, Bars and Strips
Steel Railings and Handrails
SD-03 Product Data
Submit manufacturer's catalog data including two copies of

manufacturers specifications, load tables, dimension diagrams, and
anchor details for the following items:
Structural Steel Tubing
Cold-Drawn Steel Tubing
Concrete Inserts
Protective Coating
SD-07 Certificates
Submit Welding Procedures in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
Submit certificates for Welder Qualification in accordance with

the paragraph entitled, "Qualifications for Welding Work," of this
section.
Submit manufacturer's installation instructions for the following

products to be used in the fabrication of steel stair work.
Structural Steel Tubing
Cold-Drawn Steel Tubing
Protective Coating
1.3 QUALIFICATIONS FOR WELDING WORK
Section 05 05 23 WELDING, STRUCTURAL applies to work specified in this

section.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Preassemble items in the shop to the greatest extent possible. Disassemble

units only to the extent necessary for shipping and handling. Clearly mark
units for reassembly and coordinated installation.
For the fabrication of work exposed to view, use only materials that are
smooth and free of surface blemishes, including pitting, seam marks, roller
marks, rolled trade names, and roughness. Remove blemishes by grinding, or
by welding and grinding, prior to cleaning, treating, and application of
surface finishes, including zinc coatings.
2.2 STRUCTURAL STEEL TUBING
Structural steel tubing, hot-formed, welded or seamless, must conform to

ASTM A 500/A 500M, Grade B, unless otherwise noted.
2.3 COLD-DRAWN STEEL TUBING
Tubing must conform to ASTM A 512, sunk drawn, butt-welded, cold-finished,

and stress-relieved.
2.4 STEEL PIPE
Pipe must conform to ASTM A 53/A 53M, type as selected, Grade B; primed
finish, unless galvanizing is required; standard weight (Schedule 40).
2.5 CONCRETE INSERTS
Provide threaded-type concrete inserts consisting of galvanized ferrous

castings, internally threaded to receive 3/4-inch diameter machine bolts;
either malleable iron conforming to ASTM A 47/A 47M or cast steel
conforming to ASTM A 27/A 27M, hot-dip galvanized in accordance with
ASTM A 153/A 153M.
2.6 MASONRY ANCHORAGE DEVICES
Provide masonry anchorage devices consisting of expansion shields complying

with AASHTO M 314, ASTM E 488 and ASTM C 514 as follows:
Provide lead expansion shields for machine screws and bolts 1/4 inch
and smaller; head-out embedded nut type, single unit class, Group I,
Type 1, Class 1.
Provide lead expansion shields for machine screws and bolts larger than
1/4 inch in size; head-out embedded nut type, multiple unit class,
Group I, Type 1, Class 2.
Provide bolt anchor expansion shields for lag bolts; zinc-alloy, long
shield anchors class, Group II, Type 1, Class 1.
Provide bolt anchor expansion shields for bolts; closed-end bottom

bearing class, Group II, Type 2, Class 1.
Provide tumble-wing type toggle bolts conforming to ASTM A 325, ASTM A 449
and ASTM C 636/C 636M, type, class, and style as required.
2.7 FASTENERS
Galvanize zinc-coated fasteners in accordance with ASTM A 153/A 153M and

used for exterior applications or where built into exterior walls or floor
systems. Select fasteners for the type, grade, and class required for the
installation of steel stair items.
Standard bolts and nuts must be regular hexagon-head conforming to

ASTM A 307, Grade A.
Lag bolts must be square-head conforming to ASME B18.2.1.
Machine screws cadmium-plated steel conforming to ASME B18.6.3.
Wood screws must be flat-head carbon steel conforming to ASME B18.6.1.
Plain washers must be round, general-assembly-grade, carbon steel

conforming to ASME B18.22.1.
Lockwashers must be helical spring, carbon steel conforming to ASME B18.2.1.
2.8 GENERAL FABRICATION
Provide Railings and Handrails detail plans and elevations at not less than
1 inch to 1 foot. Provide details of sections and connections at not less
than 3 inches to 1 foot. Also detail setting drawings, diagrams, templates
for installation of anchorages, including concrete inserts, anchor bolts,
and miscellaneous metal items having integral anchors.
Use materials of size and thicknesses indicated or, if not indicated, of

required size and thickness to produce adequate strength and durability in
finished product for intended use. Work materials to dimensions indicated
on approved detail drawings, using proven details of fabrication and
support. Use type of materials indicated or specified for the various
components of work.
Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces
and straight sharp edges. Exposed edges must be eased to a radius of
approximately 1/32 inch. Bend metal corners to the smallest radius
possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing the work.
Weld corners and seams continuously and in accordance with the

recommendations of AWS D1.1/D1.1M. Grid exposed welds smooth and flush to
match and blend with adjoining surfaces.
Form exposed connections with hairline joints that are flush and smooth,
using concealed fasteners wherever possible. Use exposed fasteners of the
type indicated or, if not indicated, use Phillips flathead (countersunk)
screws or bolts.
Provide anchorage of the type indicated and coordinated with the supporting
structure. Fabricate anchoring devices and space as indicated and as
required to provide adequate support for the intended use of the work.
Use hot-rolled steel bars for work fabricated from bar stock unless work is
indicated or specified to be fabricated from cold-finished or cold-rolled
stock.
2.9 PROTECTIVE COATING
Provide hot dipped galvanized steelwork as indicated in accordance with

ASTM A 123/A 123M. Touch up abraded surfaces and cut ends of galvanized
members with zinc-dust, zinc-oxide primer, or an approved galvanizing
repair compound.
2.10 STEEL RAILINGS AND HANDRAILS
Design handrails to resist a concentrated load of 250 lbs in any direction

at any point of the top of the rail or 20 lbs per foot applied horizontally
to top of the rail, whichever is more severe. NAAMM AMP 521, provide the
same size rail and post. Provide pipe collars of the same material and
finish as the handrail and posts. Provide series 300 stainless steel pipe
collars.
2.10.1 Steel Handrails
Provide steel handrails, including inserts in concrete, steel pipe

conforming to ASTM A 53/A 53M or structural tubing conforming to
ASTM A 500/A 500M, Grade A or B of equivalent strength. Provide steel
railings of 2 inches nominal size. Railings to be hot-dip galvanized and
shop painted.
a. Fabrication: Joint posts, rail, and corners by one of the

following methods:
(1) Flush-type rail fittings of commercial standard, welded and

ground smooth with railing splice locks secured with 3/8 inch
hexagonal-recessed-head setscrews.
(2) Mitered and welded joints made by fitting post to top rail
and intermediate rail to post, mitering corners, groove welding
joints, and grinding smooth. Butt railing splices and reinforce
them by a tight fitting interior sleeve not less than 6 inches
long.
(3) Railings may be bent at corners in lieu of jointing, provided

bends are made in suitable jigs and the pipe is not crushed.
Provide kickplates between railing posts where indicated, and consist of

1/8-inch steel flat bars not less than 6 inches high. Secure kickplates as
indicated.
Provide galvanized exterior and interior railings where indicated,

including pipe, fittings, brackets, fasteners, and other ferrous metal
components. Provide black steel pipe for interior railings not indicated
as galvanized.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 STAIR RAILINGS AND HANDRAILS
Adjust railings prior to securing in place to ensure proper matching at

butting joints and correct alignment throughout their length. Space posts
not more than 5 feet on center. Plumb posts in each direction. Secure
posts and rail ends to building construction as follows:
Anchor posts in concrete by means of pipe sleeves set and anchored into
concrete. Provide sleeves of galvanized, standard weight, steel pipe,
not less than 6 inches long, and having an inside diameter not less than
1/2-inch greater than the outside diameter of the inserted pipe post.
Provide steel plate closure secured to the bottom of the sleeved;
closure must be of width and length not less than 1-inch greater than
the outside diameter of the sleeve. After posts have been inserted into
sleeves, the annular space between post and sleeve must be filled with
molten lead, sulfur, or a quick-setting hydraulic cement. Cover
anchorage joint with a round steel flange welded to the post.
Anchor posts to steel with steel oval flanges, angle type or floor type
as required by conditions, welded to posts and bolted to the steel
supporting members.
Anchor rail ends into concrete and masonry with steel round flanges
welded to rail ends and anchored into the wall construction with lead
expansion shields and bolts.
Anchor rail ends to steel with steel oval or round flanges welded to
tail ends and bolted to the structural steel members.
Secure handrails to walls by means of wall brackets and wall return fitting
at handrail ends. Provide brackets of malleable iron castings, with not
less than 3-inch projection from the finish wall surface to the center of
the pipe drilled to receive one 3/8-inch bolt. Locate brackets not more
than 60 inches on center. Provide wall return fittings of cast iron
castings, flush-type, with the same projection as that specified for wall
brackets. Secure wall brackets and wall return fittings to building
construction as follows:
For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use bolt anchor expansion
shields and lag bolts.
For hollow masonry and stud partition anchorage, use toggle bolts
having square heads.
Install toeboards and brackets where indicated. Make splices, where

required, at expansion joints. Install removable sections as indicated.
3.2 STEEL HANDRAIL AND GUARDRAILS
Install in pipe sleeves embedded in concrete and filled with non-shrink

grout or quick setting anchoring cement with anchorage covered with
standard pipe collar pinned to post. Secure rail ends by steel pipe flanges
through-bolted to a back plate or by 1/4 inch lag bolts to studs or solid
backing.
3.3 FIELD WELDING
Procedures of manual shielded metal arc welding, appearance and quality of

welds made, and methods used in correcting welding work must comply with
AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
3.4 TOUCHUP PAINTING
Immediately after installation, clean field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas of the shop paint and exposed areas painted with the paint
used for shop painting. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum
dry-film thickness of 2 mils.
SECTION 05 53 00
METAL GRATINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
This section includes:
a. Safety grating walkways, planks, stair treads with reticulated and

formed metal cross struts.
b. Regular and heavy-duty safety grating products constructed from

single-sheet with integrally-formed channels
c. Slip resistant walkways, plans and stair treads with stamped surface
textures/patterns.
1.1 REFERENCES


the Hot-Dip Process

OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH ADMINISTRATION (OSHA)
Part Number 1910, Subpart D Standard for Walking-Working Surfaces
FEDERAL SPECIFICATIONS
RR-F-1602D (1996) Federal Specification for Safety

Grating (Other Than Bar Type and Excluding
Naval Vessels)
ISO 9001 (2008; R 2008; Cor 1 2009) Quality

Management Systems-Requirements
1.2 RELATED SPECIFICATIONS SECTIONS
Other related sections include:
05 51 00 METAL STAIRS
05 52 00 METAL RAILINGS
1.3 SUBMITTALS

SD-02 Shop Drawings
Drawings of safety grating products, accessories and attachments; G
Drawings showing fabrication and installation details, including

plans.
Drawings shall include floor plans and sections, drawn to scale,

to show layout and relationships between grating and adjacent
structural elements.
SD-03 Product Data
Safety grating products including mill or factory galvanized steel

materials, finishes, gauge thickness, surface patterns.
For each cross-section, submit dimensional information, span, load

capacity and deflection requirements.
Deliver materials to job site and store in adequately ventilated, dry

locations. Storage area shall permit easy access for inspection and
handling. If necessary to store materials outside, stack off the ground,
support on a level platform, and protect from the weather as approved.
Handle materials to prevent damage, denting and scoring or finishes. Store
materials in original packaging. Finish of grating and accessories to be
maintained at all times to prevent rust. Replace damaged items with new,
as directed by the Contracting Officer.
1.5 MAXIMUM DEFLECTION
Floor Decks:
L/360 - Live load only

L/240 - Total Load
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
Manufacturer shall be regularly engaged in the manufacture of safety

grating of the types required, whose products have been in satisfactory use
in similar service for not less than 5 years.
All grating and installations must comply with OSHA Standard for
Walking-Working Surfaces Part Number 1910, Subpart D and Federal
Specification RR-G-1602D.
Manufacturer shall have an ISO registered quality system in place in

accordance with ISO 9001 and manual shall be available upon request
2.2 MILL OR FACTORY GALVANIZED STEEL
Commercial steel per ASTM A 653/A 653M and ASTM A 924/A 924M with G-90
coating designation, minimum yield of 33 ksi.
2.3 GRATINGS AND COMPONENTS
Safety grating (planks, walkways, treads, ladder rungs) shall meet or

exceed RR-F-1602D.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
a. Inspect areas to receive grating for obstacles. Notify the

Contracting Officer of conditions that would adversely affect the
installation or subsequent utilization of the areas. Do no proceed
with installation until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
b. Install grating according to manufacturer's recommendations and as

shown on the drawings.
Position grating sections flat and square with ends bearing minimum 1
1/2-inches on supporting structure.
Keep sections at least 1/4-inch away from vertical steel sections and
1/2-inch from concrete walls.
Allow clearance at joints between sections of maximum 1/2-inch at side

channels and maximum 3/8-inch at ends.
Band random cut ends and diagonal or circular cut exposed edges with a
minimum 1/8-inch thick bar welded at contact points.
Join abutting walkway sections with manufacturer-supplied splice

plates, bolted or welded as shown.
SECTION 06 10 00
ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

AMERICAN FOREST & PAPER ASSOCIATION (AF&PA)
AF&PA T10 (2001) Wood Frame Construction Manual for

One- and Two-Family Dwellings
AF&PA T101 (2001) National Design Specification

(NDS)for Wood Construction
AMERICAN LUMBER STANDARDS COMMITTEE (ALSC)
ALSC PS 20 (1970) American Softwood Lumber Standard
AWPA M2 (2007) Standard for Inspection of Treated

Wood Products
AWPA M6 (2007) Brands Used on Forest Products


(Inch Series)

Nuts
ASME B18.5.2.1M (2006) Metric Round Head Short Square Neck

Bolts
ASME B18.5.2.2M (1982; R 2005) Metric Round Head Square

Neck Bolts

Strength

the Hot-Dip Process

High-Strength Nonheaded Steel Bolts and
Studs
ASTM C 1396/C 1396M (2009) Standard Specification for Gypsum

Board
ASTM D 2898 (2008e1) Accelerated Weathering of

Fire-Retardant-Treated Wood for Fire
Testing
ASTM F 1667 (2005) Driven Fasteners: Nails, Spikes,

and Staples
ASTM F 547 (2006) Nails for Use with Wood and

Wood-Base Materials
FM GLOBAL (FM)
FM DS 1-49 (2000) Perimeter Flashing
ICC IBC (2009) International Building Code
NATIONAL HARDWOOD LUMBER ASSOCIATION (NHLA)
NHLA Rules (2003) Rules for the Measurement &

Inspection of Hardwood & Cypress
NORTHEASTERN LUMBER MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NELMA)
NELMA Grading Rules (2003) Standard Grading Rules for

Northeastern Lumber
REDWOOD INSPECTION SERVICE (RIS) OF THE CALIFORNIA REDWOOD

ASSOCIATION (CRA)
RIS Grade Use (1998) Redwood Lumber Grades and Uses
SOUTHERN CYPRESS MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (SCMA)
SCMA Spec (1986; Supple. No. 1, Aug 1993) Standard

Specifications for Grades of Southern
Cypress
SOUTHERN PINE INSPECTION BUREAU (SPIB)
SPIB 1003 (2002) Standard Grading Rules for Southern

Pine Lumber
CID A-A-1923 (Rev A; Notice 1) Shield, Expansion (Lag,

Machine and Externally Threaded Wedge Bolt
Anchors)
CID A-A-1924 (Rev A; Notice 1) Shield, Expansion (Self

Drilling Tubular Expansion Shell Bolt
Anchors
CID A-A-1925 (Rev A; Notice 1) Shield Expansion (Nail

Anchors)
FS FF-B-588 (Rev E) Bolt, Toggle: and Expansion

Sleeve, Screw
FS FF-T-1813 (Basic) Tack
FS MM-T-371 (Rev E) Ties, Railroad, Wood (Cross and

Switch)
FS UU-B-790 (Rev A) Building Paper, Vegetable Fiber:

(Kraft, Waterproofed, Water Repellent and
Fire Resistant)
WEST COAST LUMBER INSPECTION BUREAU (WCLIB)
WCLIB 17 (2000) Standard Grading Rules
WESTERN WOOD PRODUCTS ASSOCIATION (WWPA)
WWPA G-5 (1998) Western Lumber Grading Rules
1.2 SUBMITTALS

SD-02 Shop Drawings
Nailers and Nailing Strips; G, AO
Drawings of field erection details, including materials and

methods of fastening nailers in conformance with Factory Mutual
wind uplift rated systems specified in other Sections of these
specifications.
SD-03 Product Data
Fire-retardant treatment
Engineered wood products
Oriented Strand Board
Adhesives
SD-06 Test Reports
Preservative-treated lumber and plywood
SD-07 Certificates
Certificates of grade
Manufacturer's certificates (approved by an American Lumber

Standards approved agency) attesting that lumber and material not
normally grade marked meet the specified requirements.
Certificate of Inspection for grade marked material by an American
Lumber Standards Committee (ALSC) recognized inspection agency
prior to shipment.
Preservative treatment
Take-back program
Include contact information, summary of procedures, and the

limitations and conditions applicable to the project. Indicate
manufacturer's commitment to reclaim materials for recycling
and/or reuse.
Local/Regional Materials; (LEED)
LEED documentation relative to local/regional materials credit

in accordance with LEED Reference Guide. Include in LEED
Documentation Notebook.
Adhesives; (LEED)
LEED documentation relative to low emitting materials credit in

accordance with LEED Reference Guide. Include in LEED
Engineered Wood Products; (LEED)

Certified Wood; (LEED)
LEED documentation relative to certified wood credit in

Deliver materials to the site in an undamaged condition. Store, protect,

handle, and install prefabricated structural elements in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions and as specified. Store materials off the
ground to provide proper ventilation, with drainage to avoid standing
water, and protection against ground moisture and dampness. Store
materials with a moisture barrier at both the ground level and as a cover
forming a well ventilated enclosure. Store wood I-beams and glue-laminated
beams and joists on edge. Adhere to requirements for stacking, lifting,
bracing, cutting, notching, and special fastening requirements. Remove
defective and damaged materials and provide new materials. Store separated
reusable wood waste convenient to cutting station and area of work.
1.4 GRADING AND MARKING
1.4.1 Lumber
Mark each piece of framing and board lumber or each bundle of small pieces
of lumber with the grade mark of a recognized association or independent
inspection agency. Such association or agency shall be certified by the
Board of Review, American Lumber Standards Committee, to grade the species
used. Surfaces that are to be exposed to view shall not bear grademarks,
stamps, or any type of identifying mark. Hammer marking will be permitted
on timbers when all surfaces will be exposed to view.
1.4.2 Plywood
Mark each sheet with the mark of a recognized association or independent

inspection agency that maintains continuing control over the quality of the
plywood. The mark shall identify the plywood by species group or span
rating, exposure durability classification, grade, and compliance with
APA PS 1.Surfaces that are to be exposed to view shall not bear grademarks
or other types of identifying marks.
1.4.3 Preservative-Treated Lumber and Plywood
The Contractor shall be responsible for the quality of treated wood

products. Each treated piece shall be inspected in accordance with AWPA M2
and permanently marked or branded, by the producer, in accordance with
AWPA M6. The Contractor shall provide Contracting Officer's Representative
(COR) with the inspection report of an approved independent inspection
agency that offered products comply with applicable AWPA Standards. The
appropriate Quality Mark on each piece will be accepted, in lieu of
inspection reports, as evidence of compliance with applicable AWPA
treatment standards.
1.4.4 Fire-Retardant Treated Lumber
Mark each piece in accordance with AWPA M6, except pieces that are to be
natural or transparent finished. In addition, exterior fire-retardant
lumber shall be distinguished by a permanent penetrating blue stain.
Labels of a nationally recognized independent testing agency will be
accepted as evidence of conformance to the fire-retardant requirements of
AWPA M6.
1.4.5 Hardboard, Gypsum Board, and Fiberboard
Mark each sheet or bundle to identify the standard under which the material
is produced and the producer.
1.5 SIZES AND SURFACING
ALSC PS 20 for dressed sizes of yard and structural lumber. Lumber shall
be surfaced four sides. Size references, unless otherwise specified, are
nominal sizes, and actual sizes shall be within manufacturing tolerances
allowed by the standard under which the product is produced. Other
measurements are IP or SI standard.
1.6 MOISTURE CONTENT
Air-dry or kiln-dry lumber. Kiln-dry treated lumber after treatment.

Maximum moisture content of wood products shall be as follows at the time
of delivery to the job site:
a. Framing lumber and boards - 19 percent maximum
b. Timbers 5 inches and thicker - 25 percent maximum
c. Roof planking - 15 percent maximum
d. Materials other than lumber - Moisture content shall be in accordance

with standard under which the product is produced
1.7 PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT
Treat
a. 0.25 pcf intended for above ground use.
b. 0.40 pcf intended for ground contact and fresh water use. 0.60 pcf
intended for Ammoniacal Copper Quaternary Compound (ACQ)-treated
foundations. 0.80 to 1.00 pcf intended for ACQ-treated pilings. All
wood shall be air or kiln dried after treatment. Specific treatments
shall be verified by the report of an approved independent inspection
agency, or the AWPA Quality Mark on each piece. Do not incise surfaces
of lumber that will be exposed. Brush coat areas that are cut or
drilled after treatment with either the same preservative used in the
treatment or with a 2 percent copper naphthenate solution. Plastic
lumber shall not be preservative treated. The following items shall be
preservative treated:
2. Nailers, edge strips, crickets, curbs, and cants for roof decks.
1.8 FIRE-RETARDANT TREATMENT
Fire-retardant treated wood shall be pressure treated Treatment and

performance inspection shall be by an independent and qualified testing
agency that establishes performance ratings. Each piece or bundle of
treated material shall bear identification of the testing agency to
indicate performance in accordance with such rating. Treated materials to
be exposed to rain wetting shall be subjected to an accelerated weathering
technique in accordance with ASTM D 2898 prior to being tested. Such items
which will not be inside a building, and such items which will be exposed
to heat or high humidity, shall receive exterior fire-retardant treatment.
Fire-retardant-treated wood products shall be free of halogens, sulfates,
ammonium phosphate, and formaldehyde. Items to be treated include the
following:
a. All wood blocking..
For fabricated structural members, trusses, qlu-lam members, indicate

materials, details of construction, methods of fastening, and erection
details. Include reference to design criteria used and manufacturers
design calculations. Submit drawings for all proposed modifications of
structural members. Do not proceed with modifications until the submittal
has been approved.
1.9.2 Data Required
Submit calculations and drawings for all proposed modifications of

structural members. Do not proceed with modifications until the submittal
has been approved.
1.9.3 Certificates of Grade
Submit certificates attesting that products meet the grade requirements

specified in lieu of grade markings where appearance is important and grade
marks will deface material.
1.10 SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
See Section 01 33 29 LEED(tm) DOCUMENTATION for cumulative total local

material requirements. Wood and materials may be locally available.
1.10.2 Certified Wood
See Section 01 33 29 LEED(tm) DOCUMENTATION for cumulative total certified

wood requirements.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
2.1.1 Engineered Wood Products
Products shall contain no added urea-formaldehyde if exposed to interior

spaces.
2.2 LUMBER
2.2.1 Framing Lumber
Framing lumber such as caps, collar beams, cant strips, bucks, sleepers,
nailing strips, and nailers and board lumber such as subflooring and wall
and roof sheathing shall be one of the species listed in the table below.
Minimum grade of species shall be as listed.
Table of Grades for Framing and Board Lumber
Grading Rules Species Framing Board Lumber
WWPA G-5 Aspen All Species: All Species:

standard grading Douglas Fir-Larch Standard Light No. 3 Common
rules Douglas Fir South Framing or No.
Engelmann Spruce 3 Structural
-Lodgepole Pine Light Framing
Engelmann Spruce (Stud Grade for
Hem-Fir 2x4 nominal size,
Idaho White Pine 10 feet and shorter)
Lodgepole Pine
Mountain Hemlock
Mountain Hemlock
-Hem-Fir
Ponderosa Pine
-Sugar Pine
Ponderosa Pine
-Lodgepole Pine
Subalpine Fir
White Woods
Western Woods
Table of Grades for Framing and Board Lumber
Grading Rules Species Framing Board Lumber

Western Cedars
Western Hemlock
WCLIB 17 Douglas Fir-Larch All Species: All Species:

standard grading Hem-Fir Standard Light Standard
rules Mountain Hemlock Framing or No.
Sitka Spruce 3 Structural
Western Cedars Light Framing
Western Hemlock (Stud Grade for
2x4 nominal size,
10 feet and shorter)
SPIB 1003 Southern Pine Standard Light No. 2 Boards

standard grading Framing or No.
rules 3 Structural
Light Framing
(Stud Grade for
2x4 nominal size,
SCMA Spec Cypress No. 2 Common No. 2 Common

standard
specifications
NELMA Grading Rules Balsam Fir All Species: All Species:

standard grading Eastern Hemlock Standard Light No. 3 Common
rules -Tamarack Framing or No. except Stan-
Eastern Spruce 3 Structural dard for
Eastern White Light Framing Eastern White
Pine (Stud Grade for and Northern
Northern Pine 2x4 nominal size, Pine
Northern Pine 10 feet and
Cedar shorter)
RIS Grade Use Redwood All Species: Construction

standard Standard Light Heart
specifications Framing or No.
3 Structural
Light Framing
(Stud Grade for
2x4 nominal size,
NHLA Rules Cypress No. 2 Dimension No. 2 Common

rules for the
measurement
and inspection
of hardwood
and cypress
lumber
2.3 PLYWOOD PANELS

2.3.1 Roof Sheathing
2.3.1.1 Plywood
C-D Grade, Exposure 1, with an Identification Index of not less than 24/0 .
FSC-certified. Provide exterior grade particleboard with phenol resin for
interior and exterior applications.
2.4 OTHER MATERIALS
2.4.1 Gypsum Wall Sheathing
ASTM C 1396/C 1396M,fire retardant (Type X) 5/8 inch thick; 4 feet wide
with square edge for supports 16 inches o.c. with or without corner
bracing of framing; 2 feet wide with V-tongue and groove (T&G) edge for
supports 16 inches o.c. with corner bracing of framing.
2.4.2 Building Paper
FS UU-B-790, Type I, Grade D, Style 1.
2.4.3 Miscellaneous Wood Members
2.4.3.1 Nonstress Graded Members
Members shall include bridging, corner bracing, furring, grounds, and

nailing strips. Members shall be in accordance with TABLE I for the
species used. Sizes shall be as follows unless otherwise shown:
Member Size (inch)

_________ _____________
Bridging 1 x 3 or 1 x 4 for use between members

2 x 12 and smaller; 2 x 4 for use
between members larger than 2 x 12.
Corner bracing 1 x 4.
Furring 1 x 2 .
Nailing strips 1 x 3 or 1 x 4 when used as shingle

base or interior finish, otherwise
2 inch stock.
2.4.3.2 Wood Bumpers
FS MM-T-371, Type I, Form A or B, and shall be oak.
2.4.3.3 Sill Plates
Sill plates shall be standard or number 2 grade.
2.4.3.4 Blocking
Blocking shall be standard or number 2 grade.
2.4.3.5 Rough Bucks and Frames
Rough bucks and frames shall be straight standard or number 2 grade.
2.4.4 Adhesives
Comply with applicable regulations regarding toxic and hazardous materials

and as specified. Interior adhesives, sealants, primers and sealants used
as filler must meet the requirements of LEED low emitting materials credit.
2.5 ROUGH HARDWARE
Unless otherwise indicated or specified, rough hardware shall be of the

type and size necessary for the project requirements. Sizes, types, and
spacing of fastenings of manufactured building materials shall be as
recommended by the product manufacturer unless otherwise indicated or
specified. See Section 01 33 29 LEED(tm) DOCUMENTATION for cumulative
total recycled content requirements. Fasteners may contain post-consumer
or post-industrial recycled content. Rough hardware exposed to the weather
or embedded in or in contact with preservative treated wood, exterior
masonry, or concrete walls or slabs shall be zinc-coated.
2.5.1 Bolts, Nuts, Studs, and Rivets
ASME B18.2.1, ASME B18.5.2.1M, ASME B18.5.2.2M, ASME B18.2.2, and ASTM A 687.
2.5.2 Anchor Bolts
ASTM A 307, size as indicated, complete with nuts and washers.
2.5.3 Expansion Shields
CID A-A-1923, CID A-A-1924, and CID A-A-1925. Except as shown otherwise,
maximum size of devices shall be 3/8 inch.
2.5.4 Lag Screws and Lag Bolts
ASME B18.2.1.
2.5.5 Toggle Bolts
FS FF-B-588.
2.5.6 Wood Screws
ASME B18.6.1.
2.5.7 Nails and Staples
ASTM F 547, size and type best suited for purpose; staples shall be as
recommended by the manufacturer of the materials to be joined. For
sheathing and subflooring, length of nails shall be sufficient to extend 1
inch into supports. In general, 8-penny or larger nails shall be used for
nailing through 1 inch thick lumber and for toe nailing 2 inch thick
lumber; 16-penny or larger nails shall be used for nailing through 2 inch
thick lumber. Nails used with treated lumber and sheathing shall be
galvanized. Nailing shall be in accordance with the recommended nailing
schedule contained in AF&PA T10. Where detailed nailing requirements are
not specified, nail size and spacing shall be sufficient to develop an
adequate strength for the connection. The connection's strength shall be

verified against the nail capacity tables in AF&PA T101. Reasonable
judgment backed by experience shall ensure that the designed connection
will not cause the wood to split. If a load situation exceeds a reasonable
limit for nails, a specialized connector shall be used.
2.5.8 Wire Nails
ASTM F 1667.
2.5.9 Tacks
FS FF-T-1813.
2.5.10 Clip Angles
Steel, 3/16 inch thick, size \best suited for intended use
; or zinc-coated steel or iron commercial clips designed for connecting
wood members.
2.5.11 Joist Hangers
Steel or iron, zinc coated, sized to fit the supported member, of

sufficient strength to develop the full strength of the supported member in
accordance with ICC IBC, and furnished complete with any special nails
required.
2.5.12 Tie Straps
For joists supported by the lower flange of steel beams, provide 1/8 by
1-1/2 inch steel strap, 2 feet long , except as indicated otherwise.
2.5.13 Joist Anchors
For joists supported by masonry walls, provide anchors 3/16 by 1 1/2 inch
steel tee or strap, bent and of length to provide 4 inches embedment into
wall and 12 inches along joist except as indicated otherwise. For joists
parallel to masonry or concrete walls, provide anchors 1/4 by 1-1/4 inch
minimum cross-sectional area, steel strap, length as necessary to extend
over top of first three joists and into wall 8 inches, and with wall end of
bend or pin type , except as indicated otherwise.
2.5.14 Door Buck Anchors
Metal anchors, 1/8 by 1-1/4 inch steel, 12 inches long, with ends bent 2
inches , except as indicated otherwise. Anchors shall be screwed to the
backs of bucks and built into masonry or concrete. Locate 8 inches above
sills and below heads and not more than 24 inches intermediately between.
Anchorage of bucks to steel framing shall be as necessary to suit the
conditions.
2.5.15 Metal Bridging
No. 16 U.S. Standard gage, cadmium-plated or zinc-coated.
2.5.16 Toothed Rings and Shear Plates
AF&PA T101.
2.5.17 Beam Anchors
Steel U-shaped strap anchors 1/4 inch thick by 1-1/2 inches wide , except
as indicated otherwise.
2.5.18 Metal Framing Anchors
Construct anchors to the configuration shown using hot dip zinc-coated

steel conforming to ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90. Steel shall be not lighter
than 18 gage. Special nails supplied by the manufacturer shall be used for
all nailing.
2.5.19 Panel Edge Clips
Extruded aluminum or galvanized steel, H-shaped clips to prevent

differential deflection of roof sheathing.
2.6 AIR INFILTRATION BARRIER
Air infiltration barrier shall have the following properties:

1. Air Penetration: 0.001 cfm/ft2 at 75 Pa, when tested in accordance
with ASTM E2178. Type I per ASTM E1677. Equal to or less than 0.04 cfm/ft2
at 75 Pa, when tested in accordance with ASTM E2357.
2. Water Vapor Transmission: 28 perms, when tested in accordance with
ASTM E96, Method B.
3. Water Penetration Resistance: Minimum 280 cm when tested in accordance
with AATCC Test Method 127.
4. Basis Weight: Minimum 2.7 oz/yd2, when tested in accordance with TAPPI
Test Method T-410.
5. Air Resistance: Air infiltration at >1500 seconds, when tested in
accordance with TAPPI Test Method T-460.
6. Tensile Strength: Minimum 38/35 lbs/in., when tested in accordance
with ASTM D882, Method A.
7. Tear Resistance: 12/10 lbs., when tested in accordance with ASTM D1117.
8. Surface Burning Characteristics: Class A, when tested in accordance
with ASTM E84. Flame Spread: 10, Smoke Developed: 10.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
Conform to AF&PA T10 unless otherwise indicated or specified. Select

lumber sizes to minimize waste. Fit framing lumber and other rough
carpentry, set accurately to the required lines and levels, and secure in
place in a rigid manner. Do not splice framing members between bearing
points. Set joists, rafters, and purlins with their crown edge up. Frame
members for the passage of pipes, conduits, and ducts. Do not cut or bore
structural members for the passage of ducts or pipes without approval.
Reinforce all members damaged by such cutting or boring by means of
specially formed and approved sheet metal or bar steel shapes, or remove
and provide new, as approved. Provide as necessary for the proper
completion of the work all framing members not indicated or specified.
Spiking and nailing not indicated or specified otherwise shall be in
accordance with the Nailing Schedule contained in ICC IBC; perform bolting
in an approved manner. Spikes, nails, and bolts shall be drawn up tight.
Use slate or steel shims when leveling joists, beams, and girders on
masonry or concrete. Do not use shimming on wood or metal bearings. When
joists, beams, and girders are placed on masonry or concrete, a wood base
plate shall be positioned and leveled with grout. The joist, beam, or
girder shall then be placed on the plate. When joists, beams, and girders
are set into masonry or concrete, a pocket shall be formed into the wall.
The joist, beam, or girder shall then be placed into the pocket and leveled
with a steel shim.
3.1.1 Sills
Set sills level and square and wedge with steel or slate shims; point or
grout with non-shrinking cement mortar to provide continuous and solid
bearing. Anchor sills to the foundations as indicated. Where sizes and
spacing of anchor bolts are not indicated, provide not less than 5/8 inch
diameter bolts at all corners and splices and space at a maximum of 6 feet
o.c. between corner bolts. Provide at least two bolts for each sill
member. Lap and splice sills at corners and bolt through the laps or butt
the ends and through-bolt not more than 6 inches from the ends. Provide
bolts with plate washers and nuts. Bolts in exterior walls shall be
zinc-coated.
3.1.1.1 Anchors in Masonry
Embed anchor bolts not less than 15 inches in masonry unit walls and
provide each with a nut and a 2 inch diameter washer at bottom end. Fully
grout bolts with mortar.
3.1.1.2 Anchors in Concrete
Embed anchor bolts not less than 8 inches in poured concrete walls and
provide each with a nut and a 2 inch diameter washer at bottom end. A bent
end may be substituted for the nut and washer; bend shall be not less than
90 degrees. Powder-actuated fasteners spaced 3 feet o.c. may be provided
in lieu of bolts for single thickness plates on concrete.
3.1.2 Wall Sheathing
3.1.2.1 Gypsum Sheathing Board
Apply gypsum sheathing board either horizontally or vertically. Butt

joints and locate over the centerlines of supports. Horizontally applied
sheathing shall be T&G, applied with tongued edge up. Stagger vertical
joints and abut sheet closely to frames of openings. Provide blocking
for horizontal edges of 4 foot wide panels not otherwise supported.3.1.3
Air Infiltration Barrier
A. Install air infiltration barrier over exterior face of exterior wall

substrate and roof insulation underlayment (glass-mat board) in accordance
with manufacturer recommendations.
B. Install air infiltration barrier prior to installation of windows and
doors.
C. Start air infiltration barrier installation at a building corner,
leaving 6-12 inches of air infiltration barrier extended beyond corner to
overlap.
D. Install air infiltration barrier in a horizontal manner starting at
the lower portion of the wall or roof surface with subsequent layers
installed in a shingling manner to overlap lower layers.
E. Sill Plate Interface: Extend lower edge of air infiltration barrier
over sill plate interface 3-6 inches. Secure to foundation with elastomeric
sealant as recommended by air infiltration barrier manufacturer.
F. Window and Door Openings: Extend air infiltration barrier completely

over openings.
G. Overlap air infiltration barrier:
1. At Exterior Corners: minimum 12 inches.
2. At Seams: minimum 6 inches.
H. Attach air infiltration barrier to exterior sheathing (glass-mat
board). Secure using air infiltration barrier with manufacturer recommended
fasteners and adhesives. Space fastners and adhesive strips vertically and
horizontally as recommended by air infiltration manufacturer.
I. Apply flashing to weather barrier membrane prior to installing
cladding anchors.
J. Air Infiltration Barrier system shall be wrapped/sealed tight to all
items that penetrate the the building exterior envelope.
K. Air Infiltration Barrier shall be continuous, applied to the face of
exterior gypsum board sheathing, on exterior wall, onto exterior soffit and
fascia and onto roof glass-mat board.
3.1.4 Plywood and Structural-Use Panel Roof Sheathing
Install with the grain of the outer plies or long dimension at right angles
to supports. Stagger end joints and locate over the centerlines of
supports.
3.2 MISCELLANEOUS
3.2.1 Wood Roof Nailers, Edge Strips, Crickets, Curbs, and Cants
Provide sizes and configurations indicated or specified and anchored

securely to continuous construction.
3.2.1.1 Roof Nailing Strips
Provide roof nailing strips for roof decks as recommended by roof

manufacturer .
a. Surface-Applied Nailers: Shall be 3 inches wide and of thickness to

finish flush with the top of the insulation. Anchor strips securely
to the roof deck with powder actuated fastening devices or expansion
shields and bolts, spaced not more than 24 inches o.c.
b. Embedded Nailers: Shall be nominal 2 by 3 with 2 inch sides beveled.

Set and anchor nailers to finish flush with the roof deck surface.
3.2.1.2 Roof Edge Strips and Nailers
Provide at perimeter of roof, around openings through roof, and where roofs
abut walls, curbs, and other vertical surfaces. Except where indicated
otherwise, nailers shall be 6 inches wide and the same thickness as the
insulation. Anchor nailers securely to underlying construction. Anchor
perimeter nailers in accordance with FM DS 1-49.
3.2.2 Wood Blocking
Provide proper sizes and shapes at proper locations for the installation
and attachment of wood and other finish materials, fixtures, equipment, and
items indicated or specified.
3.2.3 Wood Grounds
Provide for fastening wood trim, finish materials, and other items to
plastered walls and ceilings. Install grounds in proper alignment and true
with an 8 foot straightedge.
3.2.4 Temporary Closures
Provide with hinged doors and padlocks and install during construction at
exterior doorways and other ground level openings that are not otherwise
closed. Cover windows and other unprotected openings with polyethylene or
other approved material, stretched on wood frames. Provide dustproof
barrier partitions to isolate areas as directed.
In accordance with the Waste Management Plan and as specified. Separate and
reuse scrap sheet materials larger than 2 square feet
, framing members larger than 16 inches
, and multiple offcuts of any size larger than 12 inches
. Clearly separate damaged wood and other scrap lumber for acceptable
alternative uses on site, including bracing, blocking, cripples, ties, and
shims.
Separate composite wood from other wood types and recycle or reuse.
Coordinate with manufacturer for take-back program and submit
manufacturer's policy statement on program. Set aside scrap plastic lumber
and return to manufacturer for recycling into new product. When such a
service is not available, local recyclers shall be sought after to reclaim
the materials. Fold up metal banding, flatten, and recycle.
Separate treated, stained, painted, and contaminated wood and place in

designated area for hazardous materials. Dispose of according to local
regulations. Do not leave any wood, shavings, sawdust, or other wood waste
buried in fill or on the ground, unless for planned future use. Prevent
sawdust and wood shavings from entering the storm drainage system.
Compost sawdust. Do not burn scrap lumber that has been pressure treated,
or lumber that is less than one year old.
SECTION 06 61 16
SOLID POLYMER (SOLID SURFACING) FABRICATIONS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

ASTM D 2583 (2007) Indentation Hardness of Rigid

Plastics by Means of a Barcol Impressor

Water Absorption of Plastics
ASTM D 638 (2008) Standard Test Method for Tensile

Properties of Plastics

Coefficient of Linear Thermal Expansion of
Plastics Between -30 degrees C and 30
degrees C With a Vitreous Silica
Dilatometer

Materials
ASTM G 21 (1996; R 2002) Determining Resistance of

Synthetic Polymeric Materials to Fungi
INTERNATIONAL ASSOCIATION OF PLUMBING AND MECHANICAL OFFICIALS

(IAPMO)
IAPMO Z124.3 (2005) Plastic Lavatories
IAPMO Z124.6 (1997) Plastic Sinks
NEMA LD 3 (2005) Standard for High-Pressure

Decorative Laminates
NSF INTERNATIONAL (NSF)
NSF 51 (2009) Food Equipment Materials
TCA Hdbk (2007) Handbook for Ceramic Tile

Installation
a. Work under this section includes countertops and other items

utilizing solid polymer (solid surfacing) fabrication as shown on the
drawings and as described in this specification. Do not change source
of supply for materials after work has started, if the appearance of
finished work would be affected.
b. In most instances, installation of solid polymer fabricated

components and assemblies will require strong, correctly located
structural support provided by other trades. To provide a stable,
sound, secure installation, close coordination is required between the
solid polymer fabricator/installer and other trades to ensure that
necessary structural wall support, cabinet counter top structural
support, proper clearances, and other supporting components are
provided for the installation of wall panels, countertops, shelving,
and all other solid polymer fabrications to the degree and extent
recommended by the solid polymer manufacturer.
c. Appropriate staging areas for solid polymer fabrications. Allow

variation in component size and location of openings of plus or minus
1/8 inch.
1.3 SUBMITTALS

SD-02 Shop Drawings
Detail Drawings; G, RO
Installation; G, RO
Detail Drawings indicating locations, dimensions, component

sizes, fabrication and joint details, attachment provisions,
installation details, and coordination requirements with adjacent
work.
SD-03 Product Data
Solid polymer material

Qualifications
Fabrications
Product data indicating product description, fabrication

information, and compliance with specified performance
requirements for solid polymer, joint adhesive, sealants, and heat
reflective tape. Both the manufacturer of materials and the
fabricator shall submit a detailed description of operations and
processes in place that support efficient use of natural
resources, energy efficiency, emissions of ozone depleting
chemicals, management of water and operational waste, indoor
environmental quality, and other production techniques supporting
sustainable design and products.
SD-04 Samples
Material
A minimum 4 by 4 inch sample of each color and pattern for

approval. Samples shall indicate full range of color and pattern
variation. Approved samples shall be retained as a standard for
this work.
Counter and Vanity Tops
A minimum 1 foot wide by 6 inch deep, full size sample for each
type of counter top shown on the project drawings. The sample
shall include the edge profile and backsplash as detailed on the
project drawings. Solid polymer material shall be of a pattern
and color as indicated on the drawings. Sample shall include at
least one seam. Approved sample shall be retained as standard for
this work.
SD-06 Test Reports
Solid polymer material
Test report results from an independent testing laboratory

attesting that the submitted solid polymer material meets or
exceeds each of the specified performance requirements.
SD-07 Certificates
Fabrications
Qualifications
Solid polymer manufacturer's certification attesting to

fabricator qualification approval.
Clean-up
A minimum of six copies of maintenance data indicating

manufacturer's care, repair and cleaning instructions.
Maintenance video shall be provided,if available. Maintenance kit
for matte finishes shall be submitted.
To ensure warranty coverage, solid polymer fabricators shall be certified

to fabricate by the solid polymer material manufacturer being utilized.
Mark all fabrications with the fabricator's certification label affixed in
an inconspicuous location. Fabricators shall have a minimum of 5 years of
experience working with solid polymer materials.
Do not deliver materials to project site until areas are ready for
installation. Deliver components and materials to the site undamaged, in
containers clearly marked and labeled with manufacturer's name. Materials
shall be stored indoors and adequate precautions taken to prevent damage to

finished surfaces. Provide protective coverings to prevent physical damage
or staining following installation, for duration of project.
1.6 WARRANTY
Provide manufacturer's warranty of ten years against defects in materials,

excluding damages caused by physical or chemical abuse or excessive heat.
Warranty shall provide for material and labor for replacement or repair of
defective material for a period of ten years after component installation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIAL
Provide solid polymer material that is a homogeneous filled solid polymer;

not coated, laminated or of a composite construction; meeting IAPMO Z124.3
and IAPMO Z124.6 requirements. Material shall have minimum physical and
performance properties specified. Superficial damage to a depth of 0.01
inch shall be repairable by sanding or polishing. Material thickness shall
be as indicated on the drawings. In no case shall material be less than
1/4 inch in thickness.
2.1.1 Cast, 100 Percent Acrylic Polymer Solid Surfacing Material
Cast, 100 percent acrylic solid polymer material shall be composed of

acrylic polymer, mineral fillers, and pigments and shall meet the following
minimum performance requirements:
PROPERTY REQUIREMENT TEST PROCEDURE

(min. or max.)
Tensile Strength 5800 psi (min.) ASTM D 638
Hardness 55-Barcol ASTM D 2583

Impressor (min.)
Thermal Expansion .000023 in/in/F (max.) ASTM D 696
Boiling water No Change NEMA LD 3-3.05

Surface Resistance
High Temperature No Change NEMA LD 3-3.06

Resistance
Impact Resistance NEMA LD 3-303

(Ball drop)
1/4" sheet 36", 1/2 lb

ball, no failure
1/2" sheet 140", 1/2 lb

ball, no failure
3/4" sheet 200", 1/2 lb

ball, no failure
Mold & Mildew No growth ASTM G 21

Growth

(min. or max.)
Bacteria Growth No Growth ASTM G 21
Liquid
Absorption
(Weight in 24 hrs.) 0.1% max. ASTM D 570
Flammability ASTM E 84
Flame Spread 25 max.

Smoke Developed 30 max
Sanitation "Food Contact" approval NSF 51
2.1.2 Acrylic-modified Polymer Solid Surfacing Material
Cast, solid polymer material shall be composed of a formulation containing

acrylic and polyester polymers, mineral fillers, and pigments. Acrylic
polymer content shall be not less than 5 percent and not more than 10
percent in order to meet the following minimum performance requirements:

(min. or max.)
Tensile Strength 4100 psi (min.) ASTM D 638
Hardness 50-Barcol ASTM D 2583

Impressor (min.)
Thermal Expansion .000023 in/in/F (max.) ASTM D 696
Boiling water No Change NEMA LD 3-3.05

Surface Resistance
High Temperature No Change NEMA LD 3-3.06

Resistance
Impact Resistance NEMA LD 3-303

(Ball drop)
1/4" sheet 36", 1/2 lb

ball, no failure
1/2" sheet 140", 1/2 lb

ball, no failure
3/4" sheet 200", 1/2 lb

ball, no failure
Mold & Mildew No growth ASTM G 21

Growth
Bacteria Growth No Growth ASTM G 21
Liquid
Absorption

(min. or max.)
(Weight in 24 hrs.) 0.6% max. ASTM D 570
Flammability ASTM E 84
Flame Spread 25 max.

Smoke Developed 100 max
Sanitation "Food Contact" approval NSF 51
2.1.3 Material Patterns and Colors
Patterns and colors for all solid polymer components and fabrications shall
be those indicated on the project color schedule . Pattern and color shall
occur, and shall be consistent in appearance, throughout the entire depth
(thickness) of the solid polymer material.
2.1.4 Surface Finish
Exposed finished surfaces and edges shall receive a uniform appearance.

Exposed surface finish shall be matte; gloss rating of 5-20 .
2.2 ACCESSORY PRODUCTS
Accessory products, as specified below, shall be manufactured by the solid

polymer manufacturer or shall be products approved by the solid polymer
manufacturer for use with the solid polymer materials being specified.
2.2.1 Seam Adhesive
Seam adhesive shall be a two-part adhesive kit to create permanent,

inconspicuous, non-porous, hard seams and joints by chemical bond between
solid polymer materials and components to create a monolithic appearance of
the fabrication. Adhesive shall be approved by the solid polymer
manufacturer. Adhesive shall be color-matched to the surfaces being bonded
where solid-colored, solid polymer materials are being bonded together.
The seam adhesive shall be clear or color matched where particulate
patterned, solid polymer materials are being bonded together.
2.2.2 Panel Adhesive
Panel adhesive shall be neoprene based panel adhesive meeting TCA Hdbk,
Underwriter's Laboratories (UL) listed. Use this adhesive to bond solid
polymer components to adjacent and underlying substrates.
2.2.3 Silicone Sealant
Sealant shall be a mildew-resistant, FDA and OSHA Nationally Recognized

Testing Laboratory (NRTL) listed silicone sealant or caulk in a clear
formulation. The silicone sealant shall be approved for use by the solid
polymer manufacturer. Use sealant to seal all expansion joints between
solid polymer components and all joints between solid polymer components
and other adjacent surfaces such as walls, floors, ceiling, and plumbing
fixtures.
2.2.4 Conductive Tape
Conductive tape shall be manufacturer's standard foil tape, 4 mils thick,
applied around the edges of cut outs containing hot or cold appliances.
2.2.5 Mounting Hardware
Provide mounting hardware, including sink/bowl clips, inserts and fasteners

for attachment of undermount sinks and lavatories.
2.3 FABRICATIONS
Components shall be factory or shop fabricated to sizes and shapes

indicated, to the greatest extent practical, in accordance with approved
Shop Drawings and manufacturer's requirements. Provide factory cutouts for
sinks, lavatories, and plumbing fixtures where indicated on the drawings.
Contours and radii shall be routed to template, with edges smooth.
Defective and inaccurate work will be rejected.
2.3.1 Joints and Seams
Form joints and seams between solid polymer components using manufacturer's
approved seam adhesive. Joints shall be inconspicuous in appearance and
without voids to create a monolithic appearance.
2.3.2 Edge Finishing
Rout and finish component edges to a smooth, uniform appearance and

finish. Edge shapes and treatments, including any inserts, shall be as
detailed on the drawings. Rout all cutouts, then sand all edges smooth.
Repair or reject defective or inaccurate work.
2.3.3 Window Stools
Fabricate window stools from 1/2 inch thick solid surfacing, solid polymer
material. Dimensions, edge shape, and other details shall be as indicated
on the drawings .
2.3.4 Counter and Vanity Tops
Fabricate all solid surfacing, solid polymer counter top and vanity top
components from 1/2 inch thick material. Edge details, dimensions,
locations, and quantities shall be as indicated on the Drawings. Counter
tops shall be complete with 4 inch high permanently attached with coved
transition backsplash and loose endsplashes at all locations . Attach 2
inch wide reinforcing strip of polymer material under each horizontal
counter top seam.
2.3.4.1 Counter Top With Sink
a. Stainless Steel Sink. Countertops with sinks shall include cutouts

to template as furnished by the sink manufacturer. Manufacturer's
standard sink mounting hardware for stainless steel installation shall
be provided. Seam between sink and counter top shall be sealed with
silicone sealant. Sink, faucet, and plumbing requirements shall be in
accordance with Section 22 00 00 PLUMBING,GENERAL PURPOSE.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
3.1.1 Components
Install all components and fabricated units plumb, level, and rigid. Make
field joints between solid polymer components using solid polymer
manufacturer's approved seam adhesives, to provide a monolithic appearance
with joints inconspicuous in the finished work. Attach metal or vitreous
china sinks and lavatory bowls to counter tops using solid polymer
manufacturer's recommended clear silicone sealant and mounting hardware.
Solid polymer sinks and bowls shall be installed using a color-matched seam
adhesive. Plumbing connections to sinks and lavatories shall be made in
accordance with Section 22 00 00 PLUMBING, GENERAL PURPOSE .
3.1.2 Silicone Sealant
Use a clear, silicone sealant or caulk to seal all expansion joints between
solid polymer components and all joints between solid polymer components
and other adjacent surfaces such as walls, floors, ceiling, and plumbing
fixtures. Sealant bead shall be smooth and uniform in appearance and shall
be the minimum size necessary to bridge any gaps between the solid
surfacing material and the adjacent surface. Bead shall be continuous and
run the entire length of the joint being sealed.
3.1.3 Plumbing
Make plumbing connections to sinks and lavatories in accordance with

Section 22 00 00 PLUMBING, GENERAL PURPOSE .
3.2 CLEAN-UP
Components shall be cleaned after installation and covered to protect

against damage during completion of the remaining project items.
Components damaged after installation by other trades will be repaired or
replaced at the General Contractor's cost. Component supplier will provide
a repair/replace cost estimate to the General Contractor who shall approve
estimate before repairs are made. Submit maintenance data as specified in
the Submittals paragraph, under SD-10.
SECTION 07 11 13
BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

ASTM D 1187 (1997; R 2002e1) Asphalt-Base Emulsions

for Use as Protective Coatings for Metal
ASTM D 1227 (1995; R 2007) Emulsified Asphalt Used as

a Protective Coating for Roofing
ASTM D 41 (2005) Asphalt Primer Used in Roofing,

Dampproofing, and Waterproofing
ASTM D 4263 (1983; R 2005) Indicating Moisture in

Concrete by the Plastic Sheet Method
ASTM D 4479 (2007) Asphalt Roof Coatings -

Asbestos-Free
ASTM D 449 (2003; R 2008) Asphalt Used in

Dampproofing and Waterproofing

Construction
1.2 SUBMITTALS

SD-07 Certificates
Materials
Deliver materials in sealed containers bearing manufacturer's original

labels. Labels shall include date of manufacture, contents of each
container, performance standards that apply to the contents and recommended
shelf life.
1.4 SAFETY AND HEALTH REQUIREMENTS
If coal-tar pitch materials are used, the Contractor shall conform to all
OSHA 29 CFR 1926 and General Industry Health Standards as well as state and
local standards.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 ASPHALT
ASTM D 449, Type I or Type II.
2.2 ASPHALT PRIMER
ASTM D 41.
2.3 FIBROUS ASPHALT
ASTM D 4479, Type I for horizontal surfaces, Type II for vertical surfaces.
2.4 EMULSION-BASED ASPHALT DAMPPROOFING
2.4.1 Fibrated Emulsion-Based Asphalt
Fibrated emulsion-based asphalt dampproofing shall be cold-applied type

conforming to ASTM D 1227 Type IV, asbestos-free, manufactured of refined
asphalt, emulsifiers and selected clay, fibrated with mineral fibers. For
spray or brush application, emulsion shall contain a minimum of 59 percent
solids by weight, 56 percent solids by volume. For trowel application,
emulsion shall contain a minimum of 58 percent solids by weight, 55 percent
solids by volume.
2.4.2 Non-Fibrated Emulsion-Based Asphalt
Non-fibrated emulsion-based asphalt dampproofing shall be cold-applied type

conforming to ASTM D 1187 Type II or ASTM D 1227 Type III, manufactured of
refined asphalt, emulsifiers and selected clay. Asphalt shall contain a
minimum 58 percent solids by weight, 55 percent solids by volume.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 SURFACE PREPARATION
Remove or cut form ties and repair all surface defects as required in
Section 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE. Clean concrete and masonry
surfaces to receive dampproofing of foreign matter and loose particles.
Apply dampproofing to clean dry surfaces. Moisture test in accordance with
ASTM D 4263. If test indicates moisture, allow a minimum of 7 additional
days after test completion for curing. If moisture still exists, redo test
until substrate is dry.
3.1.1 Metal Surfaces
Metal surfaces shall be dry and be free of rust, scale, loose paint, oil,
grease, dirt, frost and debris.
3.2 Protection of Surrounding Areas
Before starting the dampproofing work, the surrounding areas and surfaces
shall be protected from spillage and migration of dampproofing material

onto other work. Drains and conductors shall be protected from clogging
with dampproofing material.
3.3 APPLICATION
Prime surfaces to receive fibrous asphaltic dampproofing unless recommended

otherwise by dampproofing materials manufacturer. Apply dampproofing after
priming coat is dry, but prior to any deterioration of primed surface, and
when ambient temperature is above 40 degrees F.
3.3.1 Surface Priming
Prime surfaces to receive fibrous asphalt dampproofing with asphalt primer.

Apply primer when ambient temperature is above 40 degrees F and at rate
of approximately one gallon per 100 square feet, fully covering entire
surface to be dampproofed.
3.3.2 Cold-Application Method
3.3.2.1 Fibrous Asphalt
Apply two coats of fibrous asphalt to surfaces to be dampproofed. Apply

each coat uniformly using not less than one gallon fibrous asphalt per 50
square feet. Apply first coat by brush or spray to provide full bond with
primed surface. Brush or spray second coat over thoroughly dry first coat
unless recommended otherwise by dampproofing materials manufacturer.
Provide finished surface that is of uniform thickness and impervious to
moisture. Recoat porous areas.
SECTION 07 13 53
ELASTOMERIC SHEET WATERPROOFING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

ASTM D 1004 (2009) Initial Tear Resistance of Plastic

Film and Sheeting

a Chamber
ASTM D 1204 (2008) Linear Dimensional Changes of

Nonrigid Thermoplastic Sheeting or Film at
Elevated Temperature

Property - Durometer Hardness
ASTM D 297 (1993; R 2006) Rubber Products - Chemical

Analysis
ASTM D 3045 (1992; R 2003) Practice for Heat Aging of

Plastics Without Load
ASTM D 412 (2006ae2) Standard Test Methods for

Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic
Elastomers - Tension
ASTM D 429 (2008) Rubber Property-Adhesion to Rigid

Substrates
ASTM D 471 (2006; E 2008) Standard Test Method for

Rubber Property - Effect of Liquids
ASTM D 5385 (1993; R 2006) Hydrostatic Pressure

Resistance of Waterproofing Membranes

Water Absorption of Plastics
ASTM D 573 (2004) Standard Test Method for Rubber -

Deterioration in an Air Oven
ASTM D 624 (2000; R 2007) Tear Strength of

Conventional Vulcanized Rubber and
Thermoplastic Elastomers
ASTM D 638 (2008) Standard Test Method for Tensile

Properties of Plastics

Brittleness Temperature of Plastics and
Elastomers by Impact
ASTM D 903 (1998; R 2004) Peel or Stripping Strength

of Adhesive Bonds
ASTM E 154 (2008a) Water Vapor Retarders Used in

Contact with Earth Under Concrete Slabs,
on Walls, or as Ground Cover

1.2 SUBMITTALS

SD-03 Product Data
Elastomeric waterproofing sheet material
Protection board
Primers, adhesives, and mastics
SD-04 Samples
Materials
Submit material samples showing resolution of corner and field

conditions.
SD-06 Test Reports
Elastomeric waterproofing sheet material
Certify compliance with performance requirements specified

herein.
Field Quality Control
Verification Of Conditions
Protective Covering
Primers, adhesives, and mastics
Submit Manufacturer's material safety data sheets for primers,
adhesives and mastics.
1.3.1 Shop Drawing Requirements
Include description and physical properties; termination details;

application details; recommendations regarding shelf life, application
procedures; requirements for protective covering; and precautions for
flammability and toxicity.
Deliver and store materials out of the weather, in manufacturer's original

packaging with brand name and product identification clearly marked. Do
not permit uncertified materials in the work area. Membrane, flashing, and
adhesives shall be stored in clean, dry areas. Storage temperature for
adhesives shall be between 16 and 27 degrees C. Protection board shall be
stored flat and off the ground.
1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
Do not apply waterproofing during inclement weather or when there is ice,

frost, surface moisture, or visible dampness on the surface to receive
waterproofing and when ambient and surface temperatures are 40 degrees F or
below. The restriction on the application of waterproofing materials when
ambient and surface temperatures are below 40 degrees F will be waived if
the Contractor devises a means, approved by the Contracting Officer, of
maintaining the surface and ambient temperatures above 40 degrees F.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
Provide one of the types of elastomeric waterproofing sheet materialand

related primers, adhesives, and mastics as specified herein. Ensure
compatibility of waterproofing materials within a specific type, with each
other, and with the materials on which they will be applied. Materials
shall conform to the applicable performance requirements cited below when
tested in accordance with the referenced ASTM publications.
2.2 BUTYL RUBBER SHEETING
Not less than 60 mils minimum thickness.
2.2.1 Butyl Rubber Sheeting Performance Requirements
a. Thickness Tolerance, ASTM D 412: Plus or minus 10 percent;
b. Specific Gravity, ASTM D 297: 1.20, plus or minus 0.05;
c. Tensile Strength, ASTM D 412: 1200 psi minimum;
d. Tensile Stress at 300 percent elongation, ASTM D 412: 600 psi

minimum;
e. Elongation, ASTM D 412: 300 percent minimum;
f. Tear Resistance, Die C, ASTM D 624: 150 pound force per inch
(lbf/inch)minimum;
g. Shore A Hardness, ASTM D 2240: Five-second interval before

reading; 60 plus or minus 10;
h. Ozone Resistance, ASTM D 1149: No cracks, 7 days - 50 pphm - 100

degrees F, 20 percent elongation;
i. Heating Aging-Accelerated, ASTM D 573: Tensile retention, 60

percent of minimum original elongation retention; 60 percent of
minimum original requirement; 7 days, 240 degrees F;
j. Butyl Identification, ASTM D 471, Tricresyl Phosphate Immersion:

Maximum volume swell 10 percent, 70 hrs, 212 degrees F;
k. Low Temperature Flexibility, ASTM D 746: No failure at -40

degrees F;
l. Water Absorption, ASTM D 471: +1 percent maximum. 7 days, 158

degrees F;
m. Exposure to Fungi and Bacteria in Soil, ASTM E 154, Minimum 16

Weeks: Unaffected; and
n. Water Vapor Transmission, 80 Degrees FPermeance, ASTM E 96/E 96M,

Procedure B or BW: 0.15 perms maximum.
2.2.2 Adhesive, Cement, and Tape for Use with Butyl Rubber
As recommended by the butyl rubber waterproofing membrane manufacturer.
2.3 THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE: POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC)
Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) flexible sheets with non-woven fiberglass

reinforcing not less than 60 mils minimum thickness.
2.3.1 Thermoplastic Membrane Performance Requirements
a. Overall thickness, ASTM D 751:, .059 inches min.;
b. Tensile strength ASTM D 638:, , 1600 psi min.;
c. Elongation at break, ASTM D 638:, 250 percent minimum;
d. Seam strength, ASTM D 638:, 90 percent minimum of tensile strength;
e. Retention of properties after heat aging, ASTM D 3045;
f. Tensile strength, ASTM D 638:, 95 percent of original;
g. Elongation, ASTM D 638:, 95 percent of original;
h. Tear resistance, ASTM D 1004:, ;, 17 Pound Force
i. Low Temperature Bend , ASTM D 2136:, ; -40 F;
j. Liner Dimensional Change, ASTM D 1204: 0.002 percent; and
k. Weight Change After Immersion in Water, ASTM D 570:, 2.0 percent
maximum.
2.3.2 Adhesives
a. Adhesive for thermoplastic flashings as recommended by

manufacturer.
b. Adhesive for Sub-Membrane Grid: 100% solids, two-part urethane,

with minimum tensile strength of , 150 psi, in accordance with
ASTM D 412 and adhesion to concrete of 12 ply in accordance with
ASTM D 429 as recommended by manufacture.
2.3.3 Accessories
a. Securement Strip: 14 gauge stainless steel metal bar, 1 inch

wide, pre-punched 1 inch on center for securement.
2.4 COMPOSITE, SELF-ADHERING MEMBRANE SHEETING
Cold applied composite sheet consisting of rubberized asphalt and cross

laminated, high density polyethylene film. Not less than 60 mils minimum
thickness is required.
2.4.1 Composite, Self-Adhering Sheeting Performance Requirements
a. Tensile Strength, ASTM D 412, Die C: 250 psi minimum;
b. Ultimate Elongation, ASTM D 412, Die C: 200 percent minimum;
c. Water Vapor Transmission,ASTM E 96/E 96M 80 Degrees F Permeance,

Procedure B: 0.1 perm maximum;
d. Pliability Degrees F, ASTM D 146: (180 Degrees Bend Over One Inch
Mandrel): No cracks at minus -25 degrees F;
e. Cycling Over Crack at Minus 15 Degrees F: Membrane is applied and

rolled across two primed concrete blocks with no separation
between blocks. Crack opened and closed from zero to 1/4 inch.
No effect at 100 cycles;
f. Puncture Resistance, ASTM E 154: 40 lb. minimum;
g. Lap Adhesion at Minimum Application Temperature, ASTM D1876

Modified, 880 N/m (5 lbs/in.);
h. Peel Strength, ASTM D 903: Modified, , 9 lbs/n;
i. Resistance to Hydrostatic Head, ASTM D 5385:, , 231 ft of water
j. Water Absorption, ASTM D 570; 0.1% maximum.
2.4.2 Primer
Asphalt composition, ASTM D 41, or synthetic polymer in solvent as

recommended by the membrane manufacturer.
2.4.3 Mastic
Polymer modified asphalt in suitable solvent of trowel-grade consistency

and as recommended by the membrane manufacturer.
2.5 Protection Board
Provide protection board that is compatible with the waterproofing

membrane. Use a minimum 13 mm 1/2 inch thick fir bituminous - impregnated
board, 25 mm 1 inch for polystyrene, 3 mm 1/8 inch thick for vertical and 6
mm 1/4 inch for horizontal premolded bituminious protection board as
recommended by the manufacturer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 VERIFICATION OF CONDITIONS
Before starting the work, verify that surfaces to be waterproofed are in

satisfactory condition. Notify the Contracting Officer of defects or
conditions that will prevent a satisfactory application. Do not start
application until defects and conditions have been corrected.
Ensure surfaces to be treated are clean, dry, smooth, and free from
deleterious materials and projections. Thoroughly wet holes, joints,
cracks, and voids in masonry with water and fill with Portland cement
mortar, strike flush, and permit to dry. Cut off high spots or grind
smooth. Finish top surfaces of projecting masonry or concrete ledges below
grade, except footings, to a steep bevel with Portland cement mortar. Sweep
surfaces to be covered before applying waterproofing to remove dust and
foreign matter. Cure concrete by a method compatible with the
waterproofing system.
3.3 APPLICATION
Follow manufacturer's printed installation instructions. When using

solvent welding liquid, avoid prolonged contact with skin and breathing of
vapor. Provide adequate ventilation. Carry waterproofing of horizontal
surfaces up abutting vertical surfaces as indicated and adhere solid to the
substrate. Avoid wrinkles and buckles in applying membrane and joint
reinforcement.
a. Non-Self-Adhering Membrane: Unroll membrane and allow to remain

flat for at least one-half hour before application. Apply an
asphalt concrete primer prior to application of asphaltic
adhesive. Where solvent adhesive is applied, allow major portion
of solvent to evaporate so that bonding adhesive does not stick to
a dry finger touching it. Apply elastomeric waterproofing
membrane in a full bed of adhesive at a uniform coverage rate in
accordance with the recommendations in the membrane manufacturer's
printed instructions. Pull membrane tight without stretching.
As soon as adhesive is fully set and dry, recheck lap splices.
Where openings or fishmouths appear, reseal and reroll lap splices.
b. Self-Adhering Membrane: Apply composite, self-adhering membrane

on surfaces primed at a uniform coverage rate in accordance with
membrane manufacturer's printed instructions. Remove release

sheet and apply with tacky surface in contact with dried primer.
c. Protection: Protect membrane over horizontal surfaces from

abnormal traffic during installation. Use only equipment with
rubber tires. Provide walkway protection where heavy traffic from
other trades is expected. Do not store material on membrane.
3.3.1 Butyl Rubber
Lap sheets at sides and ends a minimum of 6 inches over the preceding
sheet. Apply lap splicing cement over entire 6 inches splice area prior
to application of sealant. Sealant shall be continious along the entire
length of the splice. Maintain a continuous bead of sealant at all
membrane splices or as required by the manufacturer. When membrane will be
below water table, provide a tongue and groove cemented splice a minimum of
6 inches with factory made heat vulcanized seam not less than 2 inches
or as required by the manufacturer.
3.3.2 Thermoplastic Membrane (PVC)
Deck shall be clean, smooth and dry without surface irregularities.

Consult with membrane manufacturer prior to grid application. Install 12
inches wide sub-membrane containment grid as required by manufacturer.
Provide and install the containment grid at intervals across the width and
length of the substrate, at the base of all transitions, walls, curbs,
penetrations, and at the perimeter of each deck/substrate section. Fully
adhere strips to the deck in a full bedding of two-part urethane adhesive
medium. Adjacent sheets shall be welded in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions. All side and end lap joints shall be hot-air welded. Lap
area shall be a minimum of 3 inch wide when machine welding, and a minimum
of 4 inch wide when hand welding but not less than recommended by the
manufacturer. Overlaps shall be with the flow of water.
3.3.3 Rubberized Underlayment
Rubberized underlayment shall be equal to "Ice and Water Shield" as

manufactured by Grace Construction Products, "Winterguard" as manufactured
by CertainTeed Corporation, or "Weather Watch Ice and Water Barrier" as
manufactured by GAF Building Materials Corporation. Rubberized underlayment
shall be installed over the entire plywood sheathing roof substrate. All
strips of underlayment shall be installed so that successive strips overlap
the next lower strip in shingle fashion. Rubberized underlayment shall be
installed in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions. Lap
sheets at edges and ends a minimum of 2 1/2 inches over the preceding
sheet. All side laps shall be minimum 2 1/2 inches and end laps shall be
5 inches. Flash roof penetrations and projections with a second ply of
membrane for a distance of a minimum 6 inches from the penetration or
projection. Rubberized underlayment shall ensure that any water that
penetrates below the metal roofing panels will drain outside of the
building envelope.
3.4 Composite, Self-Adhering Membrane
Lap sheets at edges and ends a minimum of 2 1/2 inches over the preceding
sheet. All side laps shall be minimum 2 1/2 inchesand end laps shall be
5 inches, . Laps shall be self adhesive, mastic as per manufacturer's
recommendation. Roll or firmly press to adhere membrane to substrate.
Cover corners and joints with two layers of reinforcement by first applying
a 12 inch width of membrane centered along the axis. Flash drains and
projections with a second ply of membrane for a distance of 6 inches from
the drain or projection. Finish exposed, terminated edges of membrane on
horizontal or vertical surfaces with a trowelled bead of mastic. Apply
mastic around edges of membrane, and drains and projections. Apply mastic
at end of each work day.
3.5 FLASHING
Flash penetrations through membrane. Ensure that where reinforcing bars

penetrate a waterproofing membrane, each of those penetrations be sealed
with the appropriate sealant or mastic flashing component. Embed
elastomeric membrane in a heavy coat of adhesive, except for self-adhering
membrane. Continuous metal reglets shall be installed, horizontally on
footing and vertically on intersecting and connecting walls, and as
specified in Section 07 57 13 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL. Metal reglets
shall receive exposed edges of membrane waterproofing. Secure membrane
into reglets by lead wedges and fill with cement as recommended by
manufacturer of waterproofing materials. Counterflash upper edge of
membrane waterproofing and protective covering as specified in Section
07 57 13 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL.
Notify the Contracting Officer one day prior to date of performing tests.
Before concealment, cover elastomeric waterproofing on horizontal surfaces
over finished spaces with 3 inches of ponded water for 24 hours. Do not
add water after start of 24 hour period. Carefully measure water level at
beginning and end of 24 hour period. If water level falls, remove water
and inspect waterproofing membrane. Make repairs or replacement as
directed, and repeat test. Do not proceed with work that conceals membrane
waterproofing before receiving approval and acceptance of Contracting
Officer.
3.7 PROTECTIVE COVERING
After installation has been inspected and approved by the Contracting

Officer, apply a protective covering to the membrane waterproofing prior to
backfilling. Protect vertical membrane waterproofing with a 1/2 inch
minimum thickness of asphalt plank; 1/2 inchminimum thickness of
fiberboard; or 1/8 inch minimum thickness of compatible water-resistant
bitumen type protection board with edges abutting adjacent edges and
exposed surfaces covered by a taping system recommended by manufacturer of
protection board. Cover horizontal membrane waterproofing with similar
protection board and Portland cement mortar not less than 3/4 inch thick;
place uniformly and allow to set before installing subsequent construction.
SECTION 07 21 13
BOARD AND BLOCK INSULATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

ASTM C 203 (2005a) Breaking Load and Flexural

Properties of Block-Type Thermal Insulation
ASTM C 272 (2001; R 2007) Water Absorption of Core

Materials for Structural Sandwich
Constructions
ASTM C 552 (2007) Standard Specification for Cellular

Glass Thermal Insulation
ASTM C 578 (2009e1) Standard Specification for Rigid,

ASTM C 591 (2008a) Standard Specification for Unfaced

Thermal Insulation
ASTM C 930 (2005) Potential Health and Safety

Concerns Associated with Thermal
Insulation Materials and Accessories
ASTM D 1621 (2004a) Compressive Properties of Rigid

Cellular Plastics
ASTM D 3833/D 3833M (1996; R 2006) Water Vapor Transmission of

Pressure-Sensitive Tapes

Polyethylene Sheeting for Construction,
Industrial, and Agricultural Applications
ASTM E 136 (2009) Behavior of Materials in a Vertical

Tube Furnace at 750 Degrees C

Materials

NFPA 211 (2006) Chimneys, Fireplaces, Vents, and

Solid Fuel-Burning Appliances
NFPA 31 (2006; Errata 2006; Errata 2007)

Installation of Oil Burning Equipment
NFPA 54 (2008) National Fuel Gas Code

Code - 2008 Edition
1.2 SUBMITTALS

SD-03 Product Data
Block or board insulation; G, AE
Vapor retarder
Pressure sensitive tape
Protection board or coating
Accessories
Block or Board Insulation
Adhesive
1.3.1 Delivery
Deliver materials to the site in original sealed wrapping bearing

manufacturer's name and brand designation, specification number, type,
grade, R-value, and class. Store and handle to protect from damage. Do
not allow insulation materials to become wet, soiled, crushed, or covered
with ice or snow. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for handling,
storing, and protecting of materials before and during installation.
1.3.2 Storage
Inspect materials delivered to the site for damage; unload and store out of
weather in manufacturer's original packaging. Store only in dry locations,
not subject to open flames or sparks, and easily accessible for inspection
and handling.
1.4 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
1.4.1 Respirators
Provide installers with dust/mist respirators, training in their use, and

protective clothing, all approved by National Institute for Occupational
Safety and Health (NIOSH)/Mine Safety and Health Administration (MSHA) in
1.4.2 Other Safety Considerations
Consider safety concerns and measures as outlined in ASTM C 930.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 BLOCK OR BOARD INSULATION
Provide only thermal insulating materials recommended by manufacturer for

type of application indicated. Provide board or block thermal insulation
conforming to the following standards and the physical properties listed
below:
a. Cellular Glass: ASTM C 552
b. Extruded Preformed Cellular Polystyrene: ASTM C 578
d. Unfaced Preformed Rigid Polyurethane and Polyisocyanurate Board:

ASTM C 591
2.1.1 Thermal Resistance
Rigid insulation shall have the following values: Roof R-30, Exterior Wall,
Soffit and Fascia R-15; based on a 5 - 10 years aged minimum R-value of R-5
per inch..
2.1.2 Fire Protection Requirement
a. Flame spread index of 75 or less when tested in accordance with

ASTM E 84.
2.1.3 Other Material Properties
Provide thermal insulating materials with the following properties:
a. Rigid cellular plastics: Compressive Resistance at Yield: Not

less than 10 pounds per square inch (psi) when measured according
to ASTM D 1621.
b. Flexural strength: Not less than 25 psi when measured according

to ASTM C 203.
c. Water Vapor Permeance: Not more than 1.1 Perms or less when
measured according to ASTM E 96/E 96M, desiccant method, in the
thickness required to provide the specified thermal resistance,
including facings, if any.
d. Water Absorption: Not more than 2 percent by total immersion, by

volume, when measured according to ASTM C 272.
2.1.4 Recycled Materials
Provide thermal insulation containing recycled materials to the extent

practicable, provided that the material meets all other requirements of
this section. The minimum required recycled material contents (by weight,
not volume) are:
Polyisocyanurate/Polyurethane: 9 percent
Phenolic Rigid Foam : 5 percent
Perlite Board: 23 percent
2.1.5 Prohibited Materials
Do not provide materials containing more than one percent of asbestos.
2.2 VAPOR RETARDER AND DAMPPROOFING
2.2.1 Vapor Retarder in Frame Walls and Roofs
a. 6 mil thick polyethylene sheeting conforming to ASTM D 4397 and

having a water vapor permeance of one perm or less when tested in
accordance with ASTM E 96/E 96M.
2.3 PRESSURE SENSITIVE TAPE
As recommended by manufacturer of vapor retarder and having a water vapor

permeance rating of one perm or less when tested in accordance with
ASTM D 3833/D 3833M.
2.4 PROTECTION BOARD OR COATING
As recommended by insulation manufacturer.
2.5 ACCESSORIES
2.5.1 Adhesive
As recommended by insulation manufacturer.
Corrosion resistant fasteners as recommended by the insulation manufacturer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
Before installing insulation, ensure that all areas that will be in contact
with the insulation are dry and free of projections which could cause
voids, compressed insulation, or punctured vapor retarders. If installing
perimeter or under slab insulation, check that the fill is flat, smooth,
dry, and well tamped. If moisture or other conditions are found that do not
allow the proper installation of the insulation, do not proceed but notify
the Contracting Officer of such conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
3.2.1 Blocking Around Heat Producing Devices
Unless using insulation board that passes ASTM E 136 in addition to the
requirements in Part 2, install non-combustible blocking around heat
producing devices to provide the following clearances:
a. Recessed lighting fixtures, including wiring compartments,

ballasts, and other heat producing devices, unless certified for
installation surrounded by insulation: 3 inches from outside face
of fixtures and devices or as required by NFPA 70and, if
insulation is to be placed above fixture or device, 24 inches
above fixture.
b. Masonry chimneys or masonry enclosing a flue: 2 inches from

outside face of masonry. Masonry chimneys for medium and high
heat operating appliances: Minimum clearances required by NFPA 211.
c. Vents and vent connectors used for venting products of combustion,

flues, and chimneys other than masonry chimneys: minimum
clearances as required by NFPA 211.
f. Gas Fired Appliances: Clearances as required in NFPA 54.
g. Oil Fired Appliances: Clearances as required in NFPA 31.
Blocking is not required if chimneys or flues are certified by the

Manufacturer for use in contact with insulating materials.
3.3 INSTALLATION
3.3.1 Insulation Board
Install and handle insulation in accordance with the manufacturer's

installation instructions. Keep material dry and free of extraneous
materials. Observe safe work practices.
3.3.2 Electrical Wiring
Do not install insulation in a manner that would sandwich electrical wiring

between two layers of insulation.
3.3.3 Cold Climate Requirement
Place insulation to the outside of pipes.
3.3.4 Continuity of Insulation
Butt tightly against adjoining boards, studs, rafters, joists, sill plates,
headers and obstructions. Provide continuity and integrity of insulation
at corners, wall to ceiling joint, roof, and floor. Avoid creating any
thermal bridges or voids.
3.4 INSTALLATION ON WALLS
3.4.1 Installation on Gypsum Sheathing Board
Install insulation on sheathing as recommended by insulation manufacturer.

Maintain continuous vertical drainage channels between rigid insulation and
sheathing as recommended by insulation insulation manufacturer.
3.4.2 Protection Board or Coating
Install protection board 1/2 inch exterior plywood sheathing over roof
insulation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions..
3.5 VAPOR RETARDER
Apply a continuous vapor retarder as indicated. Overlap all joints at least

6 inches and seal with pressure sensitive tape. Seal at sill, header,
windows, doors and utility penetrations. Repair punctures or tears with
pressure sensitive tape.
3.6 ACCESS PANELS AND DOORS
Affix insulation to all access panels greater than one square foot and all
access doors in insulated floors and ceilings. Use insulation with same
R-Value as that for floor or ceiling.
SECTION 07 21 16
MINERAL FIBER BLANKET INSULATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES


ASTM C 930 (2005) Potential Health and Safety

Concerns Associated with Thermal
Insulation Materials and Accessories
ASTM D 3833/D 3833M (1996; R 2006) Water Vapor Transmission of

Pressure-Sensitive Tapes

Polyethylene Sheeting for Construction,
Industrial, and Agricultural Applications


Materials

NFPA 211 (2006) Chimneys, Fireplaces, Vents, and

Solid Fuel-Burning Appliances
NFPA 31 (2006; Errata 2006; Errata 2007)

Installation of Oil Burning Equipment

Code - 2008 Edition
1.2 SUBMITTALS

SD-03 Product Data
Blanket insulation
Sill sealer insulation
Vapor retarder
Pressure sensitive tape
Accessories
Insulation
1.3.1 Delivery
Deliver materials to site in original sealed wrapping bearing

manufacturer's name and brand designation, specification number, type,
grade, R-value, and class. Store and handle to protect from damage. Do
not allow insulation materials to become wet, soiled, crushed, or covered
with ice or snow. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for handling,
storing, and protecting of materials before and during installation.
1.3.2 Storage
Inspect materials delivered to the site for damage; unload and store out of
weather in manufacturer's original packaging. Store only in dry locations,
not subject to open flames or sparks, and easily accessible for inspection
and handling.
1.4 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
1.4.1 Respirators
Provide installers with dust/mist respirators, training in their use, and

protective clothing, all approved by National Institute for Occupational
Safety and Health (NIOSH)/Mine Safety and Health Administration (MSHA) in
1.4.2 Smoking
Do not smoke during installation of blanket thermal insulation.
1.4.3 Other Safety Concerns
Consider other safety concerns and measures as outlined in ASTM C 930.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 BLANKET INSULATION
ASTM C 665, Type I, blankets without membrane coverings and II, blankets
with non-reflecting coverings; Class A, membrane-faced surface with a flame
spread of 25 or less, except a flame spread rating of 25 or less and a
smoke developed rating of 150 or less when tested in accordance with
ASTM E 84.
2.1.1 Thermal Resistance Value (R-VALUE)
Batt insulation in exterior walls shall have thermal value of R-19
Provide Thermal Insulation containing recycled materials to the extent

practicable, provided the material meets all other requirements of this
section. The minimum required recycled materials content by weight are:
Rock Wool: 75 percent slag

Fiberglass: 20 to 25 percent glass cullet
2.1.3 Prohibited Materials
Do not provide asbestos-containing materials.
2.2 SILL SEALER INSULATION
ASTM C 665, Type I.
2.3 BLOCKING
Wood, metal, unfaced mineral fiber blankets in accordance with ASTM C 665,
Type I, or other approved materials. Use only non-combustible materials
meeting the requirements of ASTM E 136 for blocking around chimneys and
heat producing devices.
2.4 VAPOR RETARDER
a. 6 mil thick polyethylene sheeting conforming to ASTM D 4397 and

having a water vapor permeance of 1 perm or less when tested in
accordance with ASTM E 96/E 96M.
2.5 PRESSURE SENSITIVE TAPE
As recommended by the vapor retarder manufacturer and having a water vapor

permeance rating of one perm or less when tested in accordance with
ASTM D 3833/D 3833M.
2.6 ACCESSORIES
2.6.1 Adhesive
As recommended by the insulation manufacturer.
Corrosion resistant fasteners as recommended by the insulation manufacturer.
2.6.3 Wire Mesh
Corrosion resistant and as recommended by the insulation manufacturer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
Before installing insulation, ensure that areas that will be in contact

with the insulation are dry and free of projections which could cause
voids, compressed insulation, or punctured vapor retarders. If moisture or
other conditions are found that do not allow the workmanlike installation
of the insulation, do not proceed but notify Contracting Officer of such
conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
3.2.1 Blocking at Attic Vents and Access Doors
Prior to installation of insulation, install permanent blocking to prevent

insulation from slipping over, clogging, or restricting air flow through
soffit vents at eaves.
3.2.2 Blocking Around Heat Producing Devices
Install non-combustible blocking around heat producing devices to provide

the following clearances:
a. Recessed lighting fixtures, including wiring compartments,

ballasts, and other heat producing devices, unless these are
certified by the manufacturer for installation surrounded by
insulation: 3 inches from outside face of fixtures and devices or
as required by NFPA 70 and, if insulation is to be placed above
fixture or device, 24 inches above fixture.
b. Masonry chimneys or masonry enclosing a flue: 2 inches from

outside face of masonry. Masonry chimneys for medium and high
heat operating appliances: Minimum clearances required by NFPA 211.
c. Vents and vent connectors used for venting the products of

combustion, flues, and chimneys other than masonry chimneys:
Minimum clearances as required by NFPA 211.
f. Gas Fired Appliances: Clearances as required in NFPA 54.
g. Oil Fired Appliances: Clearances as required in NFPA 31.
Blocking around flues and chimneys is not required when insulation blanket,
including any attached vapor retarder, passed ASTM E 136, in addition to
meeting all other requirements stipulated in Part 2. Blocking is also not
required if the chimneys are certified by the manufacturer for use in
contact with insulating materials.
3.3 INSTALLATION
3.3.1 Insulation
Install and handle insulation in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions. Keep material dry and free of extraneous materials. Ensure

personal protective clothing and respiratory equipment is used as
required. Observe safe work practices.
3.3.1.1 Electrical wiring
Do not install insulation in a manner that would sandwich electrical wiring

between two layers of insulation.
3.3.1.2 Continuity of Insulation
Install blanket insulation to butt tightly against adjoining blankets and

to studs, rafters, joists, sill plates, headers and any obstructions.
Provide continuity and integrity of insulation at corners, wall to ceiling
joints, roof, and floor. Avoid creating thermal bridges.
3.3.1.3 Installation at Bridging and Cross Bracing
Insulate at bridging and cross bracing by splitting blanket vertically at

center and packing one half into each opening. Butt insulation at bridging
and cross bracing; fill in bridged area with loose or scrap insulation.
3.3.1.4 Insulation without Affixed Vapor Retarder
Provide snug friction fit to hold insulation in place. Stuff pieces of

insulation into cracks between trusses, joists, studs and other framing,
such as at attic access doors, door and window heads, jambs, and sills,
band joists, and headers.
3.3.1.5 Sizing of Blankets
Provide only full width blankets when insulating between trusses, joists,
or studs. Size width of blankets for a snug fit where trusses, joists or
studs are irregularly spaced.
3.3.1.6 Installation of Sill Sealer
Size sill sealer insulation and place insulation over top of masonry or
concrete perimeter walls or concrete perimeter floor slab on grade. Fasten
sill plate over insulation. -- End of Section --
SECTION 07 22 00
ROOF AND DECK INSULATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES


ASTM C 1289 (2008) Standard Specification for Faced

Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal
Insulation Board


ASTM D 4601 (2004) Asphalt-Coated Glass Fiber Base

Sheet Used in Roofing

Materials
FM GLOBAL (FM)
FM 4470 (1986; R 1992) Class I Roof Covers
FM P7825c (2005) Approval Guide Building Materials
FM P9513 (2002) Specialist Data Book Set for

Roofing Contractors; contains 1-22 (2001),
1-28 (2002), 1-29 (2002), 1-28R/1-29R
(1998), 1-30 (2000), 1-31 (2000), 1-32
(2000), 1-33 (2000), 1-34 (2001), 1-49
(2000), 1-52 (2000), 1-54 (2001)
1.2 SUBMITTALS


SD-02 Shop Drawings
Show location and spacing of wood nailers that are required for
securing insulation . Show a complete description of the
procedures for the installation of each phase of the system
indicating the type of materials, thicknesses, identity codes,
sequence of laying insulation, location of ridges and valleys,
special methods for cutting and fitting of insulation, and special
precautions. The drawings shall be based on field measurements.
SD-03 Product Data
Fasteners ; G, AO
Insulation G, AO
Include minimum thickness of insulation for steel and concrete

decks and fastener pattern for insulation on steel decks.
SD-06 Test Reports
Flame spread and smoke developed ratings
Submit in accordance with ASTM E 84.
SD-07 Certificates
Installer qualifications
Nails and fasteners
Roof insulation, including field of roof and perimeter attachment

requirements.
1.3 MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATE
Submit certificate from the insulation manufacturer attesting that the

installer has the proper qualifications for installing tapered roof
insulation systems.
Certificate attesting that the expanded perlite or

polyisocyanurate insulation contains recovered material and
showing estimated percent of recovered material. Certificates of
compliance for felt materials.
1.4.1 Insulation on Steel Decks
Roof insulation shall have a flame spread rating not greater than 75 and a
smoke developed rating not greater than 150, exclusive of covering, when
tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. Insulation bearing the UL label and
listed in the UL Bld Mat Dir as meeting the flame spread and smoke
developed ratings will be accepted in lieu of copies of test reports.
Compliance with flame spread and smoke developed ratings will not be
required when insulation has been tested as part of a roof construction
assembly of the type used for this project and the construction is listed
as fire-classified in the UL Bld Mat Dir or listed as Class I roof deck
construction in the FM P7825. Insulation tested as part of a roof
construction assembly shall bear UL or FM labels attesting to the ratings
specified herein.
1.4.2 Foam Board on Steel Decks
Separate polyurethane or polystyrene insulation from a steel deck with a

thermal barrier of glass mat gypsum roof board in accordance with the
requirements of the UL Bld Mat Dir or the FM P7825.
1.5.1 Delivery
Deliver materials to site in manufacturer's unopened and undamaged standard

commercial containers bearing the following legible information:
a. Name of manufacturer;
b. Brand designation;
c. Specification number, type, and class, as applicable, where

materials are covered by a referenced specification; and
Deliver materials in sufficient quantity to allow continuity of the work.
1.5.2 Storage and Handling
Store and handle materials in a manner to protect from damage, exposure to

open flame or other ignition sources, and from wetting, condensation or
moisture absorption. Store in an enclosed building or trailer that
provides a dry, adequately ventilated environment. Store felt rolls on
ends. For the 24 hours immediately before application of felts, store
felts in an area maintained at a temperature no lower than 50 degrees F
above grade and having ventilation around all sides. Replace damaged
material with new material.
Do not install roof insulation during inclement weather or when air

temperature is below 40 degrees F and interior humidity is 45 percent or
greater, or when there is visible ice, frost, or moisture on the roof deck.
1.7 PROTECTION OF PROPERTY
1.7.1 Special Protection
Provide special protection approved by the insulation manufacturer, or

avoid heavy traffic on completed work when ambient temperature is above 80
degrees F.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 INSULATION
2.1.1 Insulation Types
Roof insulation shall be one or an assembly of a maximum of three of the

following materials and compatible with attachment methods for the
specified insulation and roof membrane:
a. Polyisocyanurate Board: ASTM C 1289 Type II, fibrous felt or

glass mat membrane both sides, except minimum compressive strength
shall be 20 pounds per square inch (psi).
b. Cellular Glass Boards: ASTM C 552, Type IV.
c. Polystyrene Board: Shall be in accordance with ASTM C 578, Type

II, IV, or X.
2.1.2 Insulation Thickness
Minimum total thickness of 6-inches, with a minimum thermal resistance (R

value) of R-30 or more. Thickness shall be based on the "R" value for aged
insulation. .
2.2 PROTECTION BOARD
For use as a overlayment, or protection board for adhesively-applied

roofing membrane over roof insulation shall be 1/2 inch thick, 4 by 8 feet
board size exterior grade plywood sheathing.
2.2.1 Glass Mat Gypsum Roof Board
ASTM C 1177/C 1177M, 0 Flame Spread and 0 Smoke Developed when tested in
accordance with ASTM E 84, 500 psi, Class A, non-combustible, 5/8 inch
thick, 4 by 8 feet board size.
2.3 MOISTURE CONTROL
2.3.1.1 Asphalt-Saturated Felt Base Sheet for Single Layer Application
ASTM D 4601, weighing not less than 35 pounds per 100 square feet.
2.4 FASTENERS
Flush-driven through flat round or hexagonal steel or plastic plates. Steel

plates shall be zinc-coated, flat round not less than 1 3/8 inch diameter
or hexagonal not less than 28 gage. Plastic plates shall be high-density,
molded thermoplastic with smooth top surface, reinforcing ribs and not less
than 3 inches in diameter. Fastener head shall recess fully into the
plastic plate after it is driven. Plates shall be formed to prevent
dishing. Do not use bell-or cup-shaped plates. Fasteners shall conform to
insulation manufacturer's recommendations except that holding power, when
driven, shall be not less than 40 pounds each in steel deck. Fasteners for
steel or concrete decks shall conform to FM P7825c for Class I roof deck
construction, and shall be spaced to withstand an uplift pressure of 90
pounds per square foot.
2.4.1 Fasteners for Steel Decks
Approved hardened penetrating fasteners or screws conforming to FM 4470 and

listed in FM P7825c for Class I roof deck construction. Quantity and
placement to withstand a minimum uplift pressure of 90 psf conforming to
FM P7825.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION
3.1.1 Surface Inspection
Surfaces shall be clean, smooth, and dry. Surfaces receiving vapor

retarder shall be free of projections which might puncture the vapor
retarder. Check roof deck surfaces, including surfaces sloped to roof
drains and outlets, for defects before starting work.
The Contractor shall inspect and approve the surfaces immediately before
starting installation. Prior to installing vapor retarder and insulation,
perform the following:
a. Examine steel decks to ensure that panels are properly secured to

structural members and to each other and that surfaces of top
flanges are flat or slightly convex.
Correct defects and inaccuracies in roof deck surface to eliminate poor

drainage and hollow or low spots.
a. Install wood nailers the same thickness as insulation at eaves,

edges, curbs, walls, and roof openings for securing cant strips,
gutters, and flashing flanges.
b. Cover steel decks with glass mat gypsum roof board, apply air
infiltration barrier over glass mat gypsum roof board add multiple
minimum 2-inch layers of rigid insulation board required to meet
the specified insulation thickness. Cover insulation with
specified protection board. Secure with piercing or
self-drilling, self-tapping fasteners of quantity and placement
conforming to FM P7825. Apply specified ice and water shield in
accordance with manufacturer's recommendation, over secured
plywood sheathing.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDER
Install vapor retarder in direct contact with roof deck surface . Vapor
retarder shall consist of two plies of No. 15 asphalt-saturated felt, two
plies of asphalt-coated glass felt . Lay vapor retarder at right angles to
direction of slope. Install first ply of felt as specified herein for the
specific deck. Apply second ply of 2-ply vapor retarder system using
asphalt at rate of 20 to 35 lbs per 100 square feet, applied within plus or
minus 25 degrees F of EVT. Do not heat asphalt above asphalt's FBT or 525
degrees F, whichever is less. Use thermometers to check temperatures
during heating and application. Side and end laps shall be completely
sealed. Asphalt shall be visible beyond all edges of each ply as it is
being installed. Plies shall be laid free of wrinkles, buckles, creases or
fishmouths. Workers shall not walk on mopped surfaces when the asphalt is
sticky. Press out air bubbles to obtain complete adhesion between
surfaces. At walls, eaves and rakes, and other vertical surfaces, the
vapor retarder organic felts shall be extended 9 inches, or separate
organic felt plies shall be extended 9 inches, with not less than 9 inches
on the substrate, and the extended portion turned back and mopped in over
the top of the insulation. At roof penetrations other than walls, eaves
and rakes, and vertical surfaces, the vapor retarder or separate plies
shall be extended 9 inches to form a lap which shall later be folded back
over the edge of the insulation. Asphalt roof cement shall be used under
the vapor retarder for at least 9 inches from walls, eaves, rakes and other
penetrations.
3.2.1 Vapor Retarder on Steel Decks
Solidly mop the mechanically secured insulation surface with asphalt before
installing vapor retarder. For a 2 ply vapor retarder, install each sheet
lapping 19 inches over the preceding sheet. Lap ends not less than 4 inches.
Stagger the laps a minimum of 12 inches. Cement felts together with solid
mopping of asphalt. Apply asphalt moppings at rate of 20 to 35 lbs per 100
square feet. For a vapor retarder consisting of one layer of asphalt base
sheet, lap each sheet 4 inchesover preceding sheet. Lap ends not less than
4 inches, and stagger laps a minimum of 12 inches. Cement base sheets
together with solid mopping of asphalt.
3.3 INSULATION INSTALLATION
Apply insulation in a minimum of two layers with staggered joints when

total required thickness of insulation exceeds 1/2 inch. Lay insulation so
that continuous longitudinal joints are perpendicular to direction of
roofing, and end joints of each course are staggered with those of
adjoining courses. When using multiple layers of insulation, joints of

each succeeding layer shall be parallel and offset in both directions with
respect to layer below. Keep insulation 1/2 inch clear of vertical
surfaces penetrating and projecting from roof surface.
3.3.1 Installation Using Asphalt on Steel Decks
Secure first layer of insulation to deck with piercing or self-drilling,

self-tapping fasteners. Engage fasteners by driving them through
insulation into top flange of steel deck. Use driving method prescribed by
fastener manufacturer. Insulation joints parallel to ribs of deck shall
occur on solid bearing surfaces only, not over open ribs. Secure
succeeding layers with solid asphalt moppings. Where insulation is applied
over steel deck, long edge joints shall continuously bear on surfaces of
the steel deck. Insulation which can be readily lifted after installation
is not considered to be adequately secured. Insulation shall be applied so
that all roof insulation applied each day is waterproofed the same day.
Phased construction will not be permitted. Application of impermeable
faced insulation shall be performed without damage to the facing.
3.3.2 Installation Using Only Mechanical Fasteners
Secure total thickness of insulation with penetrating type fasteners.
3.3.3 Special Precautions for Installation of Foam Insulation
3.3.3.1 Polyisocyanurate Insulation
Where polyisocyanurate foam board insulation is provided, install 1/2 inch

thick wood fiberboard, glass mat gypsum roof board, or 3/4 inch thick
expanded perlite board insulation over top surface of foam board
insulation. Stagger joints of insulation with respect to foam board
insulation below.
3.3.3.2 Polystyrene Insulation
a. Over top surface of non-composite polystyrene board, install 1/2

inch thick high density wood fiberboard, 3/4 inch thick expanded
perlite board, glass mat gypsum roof board, or other overlayment
approved by roofing sheet manufacturer. Tightly butt and stagger
joints of field applied overlayment board at least 6 inches with
respect to the polystyrene board below. Apply 6 inch wide glass
fiber roofing tape centered over joints and edges of overlayment
board.
b. Where composite boards consisting of polystyrene insulation are

provided, apply 6 inch wide glass-fiber roofing tape centered over
joints and edges of composite board. Apply joint strips as
recommended by roofing sheet manufacturer.
3.3.4 Cant Strips
Where indicated, provide cant strips at intersections of roof with walls,

parapets, and curbs extending above roof. Wood cant strips shall bear on
and be anchored to wood blocking. Fit cant strips flush against vertical
surfaces. Where possible, nail cant strips to adjoining surfaces. Where
cant strips are installed against non-nailable materials, install inan
approved adhesive.
3.3.5 Tapered Edge Strips
Where indicated, provide edge strips in the right angle formed by junction
of roof and wood nailing strips that extend above level of roof. Install
edge strips flush against vertical surfaces of wood nailing strips. Where
possible, nail edge strips to adjoining surfaces. Where installed against
non-nailable materials, install in an approved adhesive.
3.4 PROTECTION
3.4.1 Protection of Applied Insulation
Completely cover each day's installation of insulation with the finished

roofing specified on same day. Do not permit phased construction.
Protect open spaces between insulation and parapets or other walls and
spaces at curbs, scuttles, and expansion joints, until permanent roofing
and flashing are applied. Do not permit storing, walking, wheeling, or
trucking directly on insulation or on roofed surfaces. Provide smooth,
clean board or plank walkways, runways, and platforms near supports, as
necessary, to distribute weight to conform to indicated live load limits of
roof construction. Exposed edges of the insulation shall be protected by
cutoffs at the end of each work day or whenever precipitation is imminent.
Cutoffs shall be 2 layers of bituminous-saturated felt set in plastic
bituminous cement or single ply set in roof cement. Fill all profile voids
in cut-offs to prevent entrapping of moisture into the area below the
membrane. Cutoffs shall be removed when work is resumed.
3.4.2 Damaged Work and Materials
Restore work and materials that become damaged during construction to

original condition or replace with new materials.
3.5 INSPECTION
The Contractor shall establish and maintain an inspection procedure to

assure compliance of the installed roof insulation with the contract
requirements. Any work found not to be in compliance with the contract
shall be promptly removed and replaced or corrected in an approved manner.
Quality control shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
a. Observation of environmental conditions; number and skill level of

insulation workers; start and end time of work.
b. Verification of certification, listing or label compliance with

FM P9513.
c. Verification of proper storage and handling of insulation and

vapor retarder materials before, during, and after installation.
d. Inspection of vapor retarder application, including edge envelopes

and mechanical fastening.
e. Inspection of mechanical fasteners; type, number, length, and

spacing.
f. Coordination with other materials, cants, sleepers, and nailing

strips.
g. Inspection of insulation joint orientation and laps between
layers, joint width and bearing of edges of insulation on deck.
h. Installation of cutoffs and proper joining of work on subsequent

days.
i. Continuation of complete roofing system installation to cover

insulation installed same day.
SECTION 07 42 13
METAL WALL PANELS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

AA ADM-105 (2005; Errata 2005) Aluminum Design Manual
AA ASD1 (2009) Aluminum Standards and Data
AAMA 501.1 (2005) Standard Test Method for Water

Penetration of Windows, Curtain Walls and
Doors Using Dynamic Pressure
AAMA 800 (2010) Voluntary Specifications and Test

Methods for Sealants
ANSI/AISC 341 (2005; Suppl No. 1 2005) Seismic

Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings
AISI S100 (2007; Supplement 1) North American

Specification for the Design of
Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members
AISI SG03-3 (2002; Suppl 2001-2004; R 2008)

Cold-Formed Steel Design Manual Set
ASCE 7-10 (2010) Minimum Design Loads for Buildings

and Other Structures
AWS A5.1/A5.1M (2004) Specification for Carbon Steel

Electrodes for Shielded Metal Arc Welding
AWS D1.2/D1.2M (2008) Structural Welding Code - Aluminum
ASTM A1008/A1008M (2010) Standard Specification for Steel,

ASTM A123/A123M (2009) Standard Specification for Zinc

Steel Products
ASTM A36/A36M (2008) Standard Specification for Carbon

Structural Steel
ASTM A424/A424M (2009a) Standard Specification for Steel

Sheet for Porcelain Enameling
ASTM A463/A463M (2010) Standard Specification for Steel

Sheet, Aluminum-Coated, by the Hot-Dip
Process
ASTM A606/A606M (2009a) Standard Specification for Steel

Sheet and Strip, High-Strength, Low-Alloy,
Hot-Rolled and Cold-Rolled, with Improved
Atmospheric Corrosion Resistance

the Hot-Dip Process
ASTM A755/A755M (2003; R 2008) Standard Specification for

Steel Sheet, Metallic Coated by the
Hot-Dip Process and Prepainted by the
Coil-Coating Process for Exterior Exposed
Building Products
ASTM A780/A780M (2009) Standard Practice for Repair of

Galvanized Coatings

the Hot-Dip Process
ASTM A924/A924M (2010a) Standard Specification for General

ASTM B 117 (2009) Standing Practice for Operating

Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus

ASTM C 286 (1999; R 2009) Standard Terminology

Relating to Porcelain Enamel and
Ceramic-Metal Systems

Elastomeric Joint Sealants

Rubber
ASTM D 1308 (2002; R 2007) Effect of Household

Chemicals on Clear and Pigmented Organic
Finishes
ASTM D 1654 (2008) Evaluation of Painted or Coated

Specimens Subjected to Corrosive
Environments

ASTM D 2244 (2009b) Calculation of Color Tolerances

and Color Differences from Instrumentally
Measured Color Coordinates
ASTM D 2247 (2010) Testing Water Resistance of

Coatings in 100% Relative Humidity
ASTM D 2794 (1993; R 2010) Resistance of Organic

Coatings to the Effects of Rapid
Deformation (Impact)
ASTM D 3359 (2009e2) Measuring Adhesion by Tape Test
ASTM D 3363 (2005) Film Hardness by Pencil Test
ASTM D 4214 (2007) Standard Test Method for Evaluating

the Degree of Chalking of Exterior Paint
Films
ASTM D 4587 (2005) Standard Practice for Fluorescent

UV-Condensation Exposures of Paint and
Related Coatings
ASTM D 522 (1993a; R 2008) Mandrel Bend Test of

Attached Organic Coatings
ASTM D 523 (2008) Standard Test Method for Specular

Gloss
ASTM D 5894 (2010) Cyclic Salt Fog/UV Exposure of

Painted Metal, (Alternating Exposures in a
Fog/Dry Cabinet and a UV/Condensation
Cabinet)
ASTM D 610 (2008) Evaluating Degree of Rusting on

Painted Steel Surfaces
ASTM D 714 (2002; R 2009) Evaluating Degree of

Blistering of Paints
ASTM D 822 (2001; R 2006) Filtered Open-Flame

Carbon-Arc Exposures of Paint and Related
Coatings
ASTM D 968 (2005; R 2010) Abrasion Resistance of

Organic Coatings by Falling Abrasive
ASTM E 1592 (2005) Structural Performance of Sheet

Metal Roof and Siding Systems by Uniform
Static Air Pressure Difference
ASTM E 283 (2004) Determining the Rate of Air Leakage

Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls,
and Doors Under Specified Pressure
Differences Across the Specimen
ASTM E 331 (2000; R 2009) Water Penetration of

Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and
Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air
Pressure Difference
ASTM E 72 (2005) Conducting Strength Tests of Panels

for Building Construction
ASTM E 84 (2010b) Standard Test Method for Surface

Materials
ASTM G 152 (2006) Operating Open Flame Carbon Arc

Light Apparatus for Exposure of
Nonmetallic Materials
ASTM G 153 (2004; R 2010) Operating Enclosed Carbon

Arc Light Apparatus for Exposure of
Nonmetallic Materials
MBMA MBSM (2002) Metal Building Systems Manual
NAAMM AMP 500 (2006) Metal Finishes Manual
PORCELAIN ENAMEL INSTITUTE (PEI)
PEI 1001 (1996) Specification for Architectural

Porcelain Enamel (ALS-100)
PEI CG-3 (2005) Color Guide for Architectural

Porcelain Enamel

(SMACNA)
SMACNA 1793 (2003) Architectural Sheet Metal Manual,

6th Edition

(LEED-NC)
1.2 DEFINITIONS
Metal Wall Panel: Metal wall panels, attachment system components and
accessories necessary for a complete weather-tight wall system.
1.3 DESCRIPTION OF WALL PANEL SYSTEM
Factory color finished, metal wall panel system with exposed fastener
attachment. Panel profile must beflush face smooth faceand with stiffening
ribs in the flat of the panel.
1.3.1 Metal Wall Panel General Performance
Comply with performance requirements, conforming to AISI S100, without

failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other
defects in construction. Wall panels and accessory components must
conform to the following standards:
ASTM A1008/A1008M
ASTM A123/A123M
ASTM A36/A36M
ASTM A424/A424M, ASTM C 286, PEI 1001, PEI CG-3 for Porcelain and Ceramic
Enameling
ASTM A653/A653M
ASTM A463/A463M for aluminum coated steel sheet
ASTM A606/A606M
ASTM A755/A755M for metallic coated steel sheet for exterior coil
pre-painted applications.
ASTM A780/A780M for repair of damage or uncoated areas of hot-dipped
galvanized coating.
ASTM A924/A924M for metallic coated steel sheet
ASTM D 522 for applied coatings
UL Bld Mat Dir
1.3.2 Structural Performance
Maximum calculated fiber stress must not exceed the allowable value in the
AISI or AA manuals; a one third overstress for wind is allowed. Midspan
deflection under maximum design loads is limited to L/180. Contract
drawings show the design wind loads and the extent and general assembly
details of the metal siding. Contractor must provide design for members
and connections not shown on the drawings. Siding panels and accessories
must be the products of the same manufacturer.
Provide metal wall panel assemblies complying with the load and stress
requirements in accordance with ASTM E 1592. Wind Load force due to wind
action governs the design for panels.
Wall systems and attachments are to resist the wind loads as determined by
ASTM E 72 and ASCE 7-10 in the geographic area where the construction will
take place, in pounds per square foot. Submit five copies of wind load
tests and seismic tests to the Contracting Officer.
Provide metal wall panel assembly for seismic conditions complying with the
applicable requirements of ANSI/AISC 341.
1.3.3 Air Infiltration
Air leakage must conform to the limits through the wall assembly area when
tested according to ASTM E 283.
1.3.4 Water Penetration Under Static Pressure
No water penetration when tested according to ASTM E 331.
1.3.5 Water Penetration Under Dynamic Pressure
No evidence of water leakage when tested according to AAMA 501.1.
1.4 SUBMITTALS

submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control
approval.. When used, a designation following the "G" designation
identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government.
Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL
PROCEDURES:
Submit Documentation for the following items:
Qualification of Manufacturer G
Qualification of Installation Contractor G
Qualification of Welders G
Sample Warranty G
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Installation Drawings G
SD-03 Product Data
Recycled Content; (LEED)
Submit Manufacturer's data indicating percentage of recycle

material in wall panels to verify sustainable acquisition
compliance.
Submit Manufacturer's catalog data for the following items:
Wall Panels G
Factory Color Finish

Closure Materials
Pressure Sensitive Tape
Sealants and Caulking

Enamel Repair Paint
Accessories
SD-04 Samples
Submit as required each of the following samples:
Wall Panels, 12 inches long by actual panel width G

Fasteners G
Metal Closure Strips, 10 inches long of each type G
Color chart and chips G
Submit manufacturer's color charts and chips, approximately 4 by 4

inches, showing full range of colors, textures and patterns
available for wall panels with factory applied finishes.
SD-05 Design Data
Wind load design analysis G
As applicable, submit the following wind load design analysis

data, to include, but not limited to:
wind speed
exposure category,co-efficient,importance factor
type of facility
negative pressures for each zone
methods and requirements of attachment
SD-06 Test Reports
Submit test reports for the following in accordance with the

referenced articles in this section.
Leakage Tests G
Wind Load Tests G
Coating Tests G
Chalking Tests G
Seismic TestsG
SD-07 Certificates
Submit certificates for the following items showing conformance

with referenced standards contained in this section:
Coil Stock G
Fasteners G
Galvanizing Repair Paint G
Enamel Repair Paint G
Include detailed application instructions and standard

manufacturer drawings altered as required by these specifications.
Installation of Wall panels G
Submit 5 bound copies of the Manufacturer's Field Reports G
Warranty G
Maintenance Instructions G
20 year "No Dollar Limit" warranty for labor and material
1.5.1 Pre-Installation Conference
Upon notification of submittal receipt and approval by the Contracting

Officer; and prior to the commencement of the work, the Contractor must
attend a pre-installation conference to review the following:
a. Drawings and Specifications.
b. Qualification of Installer.
c. Sustainable acquisition
d. Approved Warranty
e. Sample wall panels, 12 inches long by actual panel width
f. Sample metal closure strips, 10 inches long of each type
g. Color charts and chips
h. Coatings and base metal tests, chalking tests
i. Construction schedule, availability of materials, Installer's

personnel, equipment and facilities required to progress with the work
without delay.
j. Methods and procedures related to installation of wall panels,

including manufacturer's written instructions. Explicitly identify in
writing, differences between manufacturer's instructions and the
specified requirements.
k. Support conditions for compliance with requirements, including

alignment between and attachment to structural members.
l. Flashing, special siding details, wall penetrations, openings, and

condition of other construction that will affect metal wall panels.
m. Governing regulations and requirements for insurance, certificates, and

tests and inspections if applicable.
n. Temporary protection requirements for metal wall panel assembly during

and after installation.
o. Wall panel observation and repair procedures after metal wall panel
installation. Provide detailed written instructions including copies
of Material Safety Data Sheets for maintenance and repair materials,

and manufacturer's maintenance instructions.
1.5.1.1 Installation Drawings
Installation shop drawings for wall panels, flashing, accessories, and

anchorage systems must indicate completely dimensioned structural frame and
erection layouts, openings in the wall, special framing details, and
construction details at corners, building intersections and flashing,
location and type of mastic and metal filler strips.
1.5.1.2 Wind Load Design Analysis
Wind design analysis must include wall plan delineating dimensions and
attachment patterns for each zone. Wind design analysis must be prepared
and sealed by Licensed Project Engineer in the geographic area where the
construction will take place.
1.5.2 Manufacturer's Technical Representative
The representative must have authorization from manufacturer to approve

field changes and be thoroughly familiar with the products and
installations in the geographical area where construction will take place.
1.5.3 Qualification of Manufacturer
Certify that metal wall panel system manufacturer has a minimum of five (5)
years experience in manufacturing metal wall system and accessory products.
Manufacturer must also provide engineering services by an authorized

engineer; currently licensed in the geographical area where construction
will take place, having a minimum of four (4) years experience as an
engineer knowledgeable in wind load design analysis, protocols and
procedures per MBMA MBSM, "Metal Building Systems Manual"; ASCE 7-10, and
ASTM E 1592.
Provide certified engineering calculations, using the products submitted,

for Wind load requirements in accordance with ASCE 7-10.
1.5.3.1 Manufacturer's Certificates
Also provide the following certifications from the manufacturer:
Coil Stock
Fasteners
Enamel Repair Paint
Submit certification from coil stock manufacturer or supplier that the

machinery used will form the provided coil stock without warping, waviness,
or rippling that is not a part of the panel profile, and without damage,
abrasion or marring of the finish coating.
Provide evidence that products used within this specification are

manufactured in the United States.
1.5.4 Certified Qualification of Installation Contractor
The installation contractor must be approved and certified by the metal
wall panel manufacturer prior to beginning the installation of the metal

wall panel system. Subcontracting by Certified Contractor for the metal
wall panel work is not permitted.
1.5.4.1 Qualifications for Welding Work
Qualification of welders and welding must conform to AWS A5.1/A5.1M,

AWS D1.1/D1.1Mfor steel or AWS D1.2/D1.2M for aluminum.
1.5.5 Single Source
Obtain each type of metal wall panels, clips, closure materials and other
accessories from the standard products of the single source from a single
manufacturer to operate as a complete system for the intended use.
1.5.6 Manufacturer's Maintenance Instructions
Provide manufacturer's detailed written instructions including copies of

Material Safety Data Sheets for maintenance and repair materials.
1.6 DELIVERY, HANDLING, AND STORAGE
Deliver and protect package components, sheets, metal wall panels, and
other manufactured items to prevent damage or deformation during
transportation and handling.
Unload, store, and erect metal wall panels in a manner to prevent bending,
warping, twisting, and surface damage.
Stack and store metal wall panels horizontally on platforms or pallets,

covered with suitable weather-tight and ventilated covering to ensure
dryness, with positive slope for drainage of water. Do not store metal
wall panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining,
denting, or other surface damage.
Retain strippable protective covering on metal wall panel until actual

installation.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
1.7.1 Field Measurements
Verify locations of wall framing and opening dimensions by field

measurements before metal wall panel fabrication and indicate measurements
on Shop Drawings.
1.7.2 Weather Limitations
Proceed with installation preparation only when existing and forecasted

weather conditions permit Work to proceed without water entering into wall
system or building.
1.8 WARRANTY
Warranty must conform to the Sample Warranty as reviewed and approved by

1.8.1 20 Year "No Dollar Limit" Warranty for Labor and Material
Furnish manufacturer's no-dollar-limit warranty for the metal wall panel

system. The warranty period is to be no less than twenty (20) years from
the date of Government acceptance of the work. The warranty is to be
issued directly to the Government. The warranty is to provide that if
within the warranty period the metal wall panel system shows evidence of
corrosion, perforation, rupture or excess weathering due to deterioration
of the wall panel system resulting from defective materials and correction
of the defective workmanship is to be the responsibility of the metal wall
panel system manufacturer. Repairs that become necessary because of
defective materials and workmanship while metal wall panel system is under
warranty are to be performed within 24 hours after notification, unless
additional time is approved by the Contracting Officer. Failure to perform
repairs within 24 hours of notification will constitute grounds for having
emergency repairs performed by others and not void the warranty.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 FABRICATION
Unless approved otherwise, fabricate and finish metal wall panels and
accessories at the factory to greatest extent possible, by manufacturer's
standard procedures and processes and as necessary to fulfill indicated and
specified performance requirements. Comply with indicated profiles and
with dimensional and structural requirements. See section 01 33 29
LEED(tm) DOCUMENTATION for cumulative total recycled content requirements.
Provide panel profile, including major ribs and intermediate stiffening

ribs, if any, for full length of panel. Fabricate metal wall panel side
laps with factory-installed captive gaskets or separator strips that
provide a tight seal and prevent metal-to-metal contact, in a manner that
will seal weather-tight and minimize noise from movements within panel
assembly.
2.1.1 Sheet Metal Accessories
Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA 1793

that apply to the design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of
item indicated:
a. Form exposed sheet metal accessories that are without excessive oil
canning, buckling, and tool marks and that are true to line and levels
indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems.
b. End Seams: fabricate nonmoving end seams with flat-lock seams. Form
seams and seal with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints for additional
strength.
c. Sealed Joints: form non-expansion but movable joints in metal to

accommodate elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA 1793.
d. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed

fasteners are not allowed on faces of accessories exposed to view.
e. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices of size and metal thickness

recommended by SMACNA 1793 or by metal wall panel manufacturer for
application, but not less than thickness of metal being secured.
2.2 PANEL MATERIALS
2.2.1 Aluminum Sheet
Roll-form aluminum wall panels to the specified profile, with fy = 50 ksi, .040
inches thickness and depth as indicated. Material must be plumb and true,
and within the tolerances listed:
a. Aluminum Sheet conforming to ASTM B 209, AA ASD1 and AA ADM-105.
b. Individual panels must be have continuous length to cover the entire

length of any wall area with no joints or seams and formed without
warping, waviness, or ripples that are not part of the panel profile
and free of damage to the finish coating system.
c. Provide panels with thermal expansion and contraction consistent with

the type of system specified.
1. Profile and coverage to be a minimum height and width from

manufacturer's standard for the indicated wall area.
2. Profile to be a 1-1/2 inch high rib at 12 inches o.c. with small

stiffening ribs, 38 inch overall width with 36 inch coverage and
exposed fasteners.
3. Profile to be a 1-1/2 inch high rib at 7.2 inches o.c., 38-7/8

inch overall width with 36 inch coverage and exposed fasteners.
4. Profile to be a 1 inch high rib at 4 inches o.c., 49-5/8 inch

overall width with 44 inch coverage and exposed fasteners.

6. Profile to be a 1-3/4 inch high V-beam rib at 5 inches o.c.,

44-7/8 inch overall width with 42 inch coverage and exposed
fasteners.
7. Profile to be a 7/8 inch high corrugated rib at 2 inches o.c.,

fasteners.
8. Profile to be a 3 inch high standing seam, 24 inch coverage,

factory-caulked and mechanical crimping or snap-together seams
with concealed clips and fasteners.
9. Profile to be a 2-1/2 inch high standing seam,16 inch coverage,

with mechanical crimping or snap-together seams with concealed
clips and fasteners.
10. Smooth, flat Embossed surface texture.
2.2.2 Steel Sheet
Roll-form steel wall panels to the specified profile, with fy= 40 ksi, 22
gauge and depth as indicated. Material must be plumb and true, and within
the tolerances listed:
a. Galvanized Steel Sheet conforming to ASTM A653/A653M and AISI SG03-3.
b. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-coated Steel Sheet conforming to ASTM A792/A792M

and AISI SG03-3.
c. Individual panels must be continuous length to cover the entire length

of any unbroken wall area with no joints or seams and formed without
warping, waviness, or ripples that are not part of the panel profile
and free of damage to the finish coating system.
d. Provide panels with thermal expansion and contraction consistent with

the type of system specified.
1. Profile and coverage to be a minimum height and width from

manufacturer's standard for the indicated wall area.
2. Profile to be a 1-1/2 inch high rib at 12 inches o.c. with small

stiffening ribs, 38 inch overall width with 36 inch coverage and
exposed fasteners.
3. Profile to be a 1-1/2 inch high rib at 7.2 inches o.c., 38-7/8

inch overall width with 36 inch coverage and exposed fasteners.


6. Profile to be a 7/8 inch high corrugated rib at 2 inches o.c.,

fasteners.
7. Profile to be a 3 inch high standing seam, 24 inch coverage,

factory-caulked and mechanical crimping or snap-together seams
with concealed clips and fasteners.
8. Profile to be a 2-1/2 inch high standing seam, 16 inch coverage,

9. Smooth Surface Texture.
2.2.3 Factory Color Finish
Comply with NAAMM AMP 500 for recommendations for applying and designating
finishes. Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.
Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are
within the range of approved samples and are assembled or installed to
minimize contrast.
All panels are to receive a factory-applied polyvinylidene fluoride finish

consisting of a baked-on top-coat with a manufacturer's recommended prime
coat conforming to the following:
2.2.3.1 Metal Preparation
Carefully prepare all metal surface for painting on a continuous process

coil coating line by alkali cleaning, hot water rinsing, application of
chemical conversion coating, cold water rinsing, sealing with acid rinse,
and thorough drying.
2.2.3.2 Prime Coating
Apply a base coat of epoxy paint, specifically formulated to interact with

the top-coat, to the prepared surfaces by roll coating to a dry film
thickness of 0.20 plus 0.05 mils. Prime coat must be oven cured prior to
application of finish coat.
2.2.3.3 Exterior Finish Coating
Roll coat the finish coating over the primer by roll coating to dry film
thickness of 0.80 plus 5 mils (3.80 plus 0.50 mils for Vinyl Plastisol) for
a total dry film thickness of 1.00 plus 0.10 mils (4.00 plus 0.10 mils for
Vinyl Plastisol). Oven-cure finish coat.
2.2.3.4 Interior Finish Coating
Apply a wash-coat on the reverse side over the primer by roll coating to a
dry film thickness of 0.30 plus 0.05 mils for a total dry film thickness of
0.50 plus 0.10 mils. Oven-cured the wash coat.
2.2.3.5 Color
Provide exterior finish color as specified.
2.2.3.6 Physical Properties
Coating must conform to the industry and manufacturer's standard

performance criteria as listed by the following certified test reports:
General: ASTM D 5894 and ASTM D 4587.

Abrasion: ASTM D 968
Adhesion: ASTM D 3359
Chalking: ASTM D 4214
Chemical Pollution: ASTM D 1308
Color Change and Conformity: ASTM D 2244
Creepage: ASTM D 1654
Cyclic Corrosion Test: ASTM D 5894
Flame Spread: ASTM E 84
Flexibility: ASTM D 522
Formability: ASTM D 522
Gloss at 60 and 85 degrees: ASTM D 523
Humidity: ASTM D 2247 and ASTM D 714
Oxidation: ASTM D 610
Pencil Hardness: ASTM D 3363
Reverse Impact: ASTM D 2794
Salt Spray: ASTM B 117
Weatherometer: ASTM G 152, ASTM G 153 and ASTM D 822
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FRAMING
Cold-formed metallic-coated steel sheet conforming to ASTM A653/A653M and

specified in Section 05 40 00 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING unless other wise
indicated.
2.3.1 Fasteners for Miscellaneous Metal Framing
Type, material, corrosion resistance, size and sufficient length to
penetrate the supporting member a minimum of 1 inch with other properties

required to fasten miscellaneous metal framing members to supporting
members and substrates in accordance with the wall panel manufacturer's and
ASCE 7-10 requirements.
2.4 FASTENERS
2.4.1 General
2.4.1.1 Exposed Fasteners
Provide corrosion resistant fasteners for wall panels, made of coated

steel, aluminum, 300 - series corrosion resisting stainless steel, or nylon
capped steel compatible with the sheet panel or flashing and of a type and
size recommended by the manufacturer to meet the performance requirements
and design loads.
Fasteners for accessories must be the manufacturer's standard. Provide an

integral metal washer matching the color of attached material with
compressible sealing EPDM gasket approximately 3/32 inch thick.
2.4.1.2 Hidden Fasteners
Provide corrosion resistant fasteners recommended by the manufacturer to

meet the performance requirements and design loads.
2.4.1.3 Screws
Screws to be corrosion resistant coated steel, aluminum and/or 305 - series

stainless steel being the type and size recommended by the manufacturer to
meet the performance requirements.
2.4.1.4 Rivets
Rivets to be closed-end type, corrosion resistant coated steel, aluminum or

stainless steel where watertight connections are required.
2.4.1.5 Attachment Clips
Fabricate clips from steel hot-dipped galvanized in accordance with

ASTM A653/A653M, Z275 G 90 or Series 300 stainless steel. Size, shape,
thickness and capacity as required meeting the insulation thickness and
design load criteria specified.
2.5 ACCESSORIES
2.5.1 General
All accessories must be compatible with the metal wall panels. Sheet metal
flashing, trim, metal closure strips, caps and similar metal accessories
must not be less than the minimum thickness specified for the wall panels.
Exposed metal accessories/finishes to match the panels furnished, except as
otherwise indicated. Molded foam rib, ridge and other closure strips must
be non-absorbent closed-cell or solid-cell synthetic rubber or pre-molded
neoprene to match configuration of the panels.
2.5.2 Rubber Closure Strips
Provide closed-cell, expanded cellular rubber conforming to ASTM D 1056 and
ASTM D 1667; extruded or molded to the configuration of the specified wall

panel and in lengths supplied by the wall panel manufacturer.
2.5.3 Metal Closure Strips
Provide factory fabricated steel closure strips to be the same thickness,

color, finish and profile of the specified wall panel.
2.5.4 Joint Sealants
2.5.4.1 Sealants and Caulking
Provide approved gun type sealants for use in hand- or air-pressure calking
guns at temperatures above 4 degrees C (or frost-free application at
temperatures above 10 degrees F with minimum solid content of 85 percent of
the total volume. Sealants must dry with a tough, durable surface skin
which permit remaining soft and pliable underneath, providing a
weather-tight joint. No migratory staining is permitted on painted or
unpainted metal, stone, glass, vinyl, or wood.
Prime all joints receiving sealants with a compatible one-component or

two-component primer as recommended by the wall panel manufacturer.
2.5.4.2 Shop-Applied
Sealant for shop-applied caulking must be non-curing butyl compliant with

AAMA 800 to ensure the sealant's plasticity at the time of field erection.
2.5.4.3 Field-Applied
Sealant for field-applied caulking must be an approved gun grade, non-sag

one component polysulfide or two-component polyurethane with an initial
maximum Shore A durometer hardness of 25, and conforming to ASTM C 920,
Type II. Color to match panel colors.
2.5.4.4 Pressure Sensitive Tape
Provide pressure sensitive tape sealant, 100 percent solid with a release
paper backing; permanently elastic, non-sagging, non-toxic and non-staining
as approved by the wall panel manufacturer.
2.6 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
2.6.1 Fabrication
Shop fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim where practicable to comply
with recommendations in SMACNA 1793 that apply to design, dimensions,
metal, and other characteristics of item indicated. Obtain field
measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication.
Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning,
buckling, and tool marks and true to line and levels indicated, with
exposed edges folded back to form hems.
2.7 REPAIR OF FINISH PROTECTION
Repair paint for color finish enameled wall panel must be compatible paint
of the same formula and color as the specified finish furnished by the wall
panel manufacturer. Provide quarts of repair paint matching the specified
wall panels.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for

compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, metal wall panel
supports, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
Examine primary and secondary wall framing to verify that rafters, purlins,
angles, channels, and other structural panel support members and anchorages
have been installed within alignment tolerances required by metal wall
panel manufacturer, UL, ASTM, ASCE 7-10 and as required for the
geographical area where construction will take place.
Examine solid wall sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are supported
by framing or blocking and that installation is within flatness tolerances
required by metal wall panel manufacturer.
Examine roughing-in for components and systems penetrating metal wall

panels to verify actual locations of penetrations relative to seam
locations of metal wall panels before metal wall panel installation.
Submit to the Contracting Officer a written report, endorsed by Installer,

listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work. Proceed with
installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulation, including removing

projections capable of interfering with insulation attachment.
Miscellaneous framing installation, including sub-purlins, girts, angles,
furring, and other miscellaneous wall panel support members and anchorage
must be according to metal wall panel manufacturer's written instructions.
3.3 WALL PANEL INSTALLATION
Provide full length metal wall panels, from sill to eave as indicated,
unless otherwise indicated or restricted by shipping limitations. Anchor
metal wall panels and other components of the Work securely in place, with
provisions for thermal and structural movement in accordance with MBMA MBSM.
Erect wall panel system in accordance with the approved erection drawings,
the printed instructions and safety precautions of the manufacturer.
Sheets are not to be subjected to overloading, abuse, or undue impact.

Bent, chipped, or defective sheets shall not be applied.
Sheets must be erected true and plumb and in exact alignment with the
horizontal and vertical edges of the building, securely anchored, and with
the indicated eave, and sill.
Work is to allow for thermal movement of the wall panel, movement of the
building structure, and to provide permanent freedom from noise due to wind
pressure.
Field cutting metal wall panels by torch is not permitted.
3.3.1 Anchor Clips
Anchor metal wall panels and other components of the Work securely in
place, using manufacturer's approved fasteners according to manufacturers'
written instructions.
3.3.2 Metal Protection
Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates,

protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with
bituminous coating, by applying rubberized-asphalt underlayment to each
contact surface, or by other permanent separation as recommended by metal
wall panel manufacturer.
3.3.3 Joint Sealers
Install gaskets, joint fillers, and sealants where indicated and where
required for weatherproof performance of metal wall panel assemblies.
Provide types of gaskets, fillers, and sealants indicated or, if not
indicated, types recommended by metal wall panel manufacturer.
3.4 FASTENER INSTALLATION
Anchor metal wall panels and other components of the Work securely in
place, using manufacturer's approved fasteners according to manufacturers'
written instructions.
3.5 FLASHING, TRIM AND CLOSURE INSTALLATION
Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation

instructions, and SMACNA 1793. Provide concealed fasteners where possible,
and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps,
joints, and seams to form permanently watertight and weather resistant.
Install sheet metal work is to form weather-tight construction without

waves, warps, buckles, fastening stresses or distortion, and allow for
expansion and contraction. Cutting, fitting, drilling, and other
operations in connection with sheet metal required to accommodate the work
of other trades is to be performed by sheet metal mechanics.
3.5.2 Metal Flashing
Install exposed metal flashing at building corners, sills and eaves,

junctions between metal siding and walling. Exposed metal flashing must be
the same material, color, and finish as the specified metal wall panel.
Fasten flashing at a minimum of 8 inches on center, except where flashing

is held in place by the same screws that secure covering sheets.
Flashing is to be furnished in at least 8 foot lengths. Exposed flashing

is to have 1 inch locked and blind-soldered end joints, and expansion
joints at intervals of not more than 16 feet.
Exposed flashing and flashing subject to rain penetration to be bedded in

the specified joint sealant.
Isolate flashing which is in contact with dissimilar metals by means of the
specified asphalt mastic material to prevent electrolytic deterioration.
Form drips to the profile indicated, with the edge folded back 1/2 inch to
form a reinforced drip edge.
3.5.3 Closures
Install metal closure strips at open ends of corrugated or ribbed pattern

walls, and at intersection of wall and wall unless open ends are concealed
with formed eave flashing; and in other required areas.
Install mastic closure strips at intersection of the wall with metal

walling; top and bottom of metal siding; heads of wall openings; and in
other required locations.
3.6 WORKMANSHIP
Make lines, arises, and angles sharp and true. Free exposed surfaces from
visible wave, warp, buckle, and tool marks. Fold back exposed edges neatly
to form a 1/2 inch hem on the concealed side. Make sheet metal exposed to
the weather watertight with provisions for expansion and contraction.
Make surfaces to receive sheet metal plumb and true, clean, even, smooth,
dry, and free of defects and projections which might affect the
application. For installation of items not shown in detail or not covered
by specifications conform to the applicable requirements of SMACNA 1793.
Provide sheet metal flashing in the angles formed where roof decks abut
walls, curbs, ventilators, pipes, or other vertical surfaces and wherever
indicated and necessary to make the work watertight.
3.7 ACCEPTANCE PROVISIONS
3.7.1 Erection Tolerances
Erect metal wall panels straight and true with plumb vertical lines
correctly lapped and secured in accordance with the manufacturer's written
instructions.
3.7.2 Leakage Tests
Finished application of metal wall panels are to be subject to inspection

and test for leakage by request of the Contracting Officer,
Architect/Engineer. Conduct inspection and tests at no cost to the
Government.
Inspection and testing is to be made promptly after erection to permit

correction of defects and the removal and replacement of defective
materials.
3.7.3 Repairs to Finish
Scratches, abrasions, and minor surface defects of finish may be repaired

with the specified repair materials. Finished repaired surfaces must be
uniform and free from variations of color and surface texture.
Repaired metal surfaces that are not acceptable to the project requirements
and/or Contracting Officer are to be immediately removed and replaced with
new material.
3.7.4 Paint-Finish Metal Siding
Paint-finish metal siding will be tested for color stability by the

Contracting Officer during the manufacturer's specified guarantee period.
Panels that indicate color changes, fading, or surface degradation,

determined by visual examination, must be removed and replaced with new
panels at no expense to the Government.
New panels will be subject to the specified tests for an additional year
from the date of their installation.
3.8.1 Construction Monitoring
Make visual inspections as necessary to ensure compliance with specified

requirements. Additionally, verify the following:
a. Materials comply with the specified requirements.
b. All materials are properly stored, handled and protected from damage.
Damaged materials are removed from the site.
c. Framing and substrates are in acceptable condition, in compliance with

specification, prior to application of wall panels.
d. Panels are installed without buckles, ripples, or waves and in uniform

alignment and modulus.
e. Side laps are formed, sealed, fastened or seam locked as required.
f. The proper number, type, and spacing of attachment clips and fasteners
are installed.
g. Installer adheres to specified and detailed application parameters.
h. Associated flashing and sheet metal are installed in a timely manner in

accord with the specified requirements.
Provide five bound copies of Manufacturer's Field Reports to the

Contracting Officer two weeks prior to project close-out.
3.9 CLEAN-UP AND DISPOSAL
Clean all exposed sheet metal work at completion of installation. Remove

metal shavings, filings, nails, bolts, and wires from work area. Remove
grease and oil films, excess sealants, handling marks, contamination from
steel wool, fittings and drilling debris and scrub the work clean. Exposed
metal surfaces must be free of dents, creases, waves, scratch marks, solder
or weld marks, and damage to the finish coating.
Collect and place scrap/waste materials in containers. Promptly dispose of

demolished materials. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate
on-site; transport demolished materials from government property and
legally dispose of them.
SECTION 07 60 00
FLASHING AND SHEET METAL
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES


Strip

Sheet, Terne (Lead-Tin Alloy) Coated by
the Hot Dip Process

ASTM B 32 (2008) Standard Specification for Solder

Metal
ASTM B 69 (2008) Standard Specification for Rolled

Zinc
ASTM D 1784 (2008) Standard Specification for Rigid

Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and
Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC)
Compounds
ASTM D 226/D 226M (2009) Standard Specification for

Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in
Roofing and Waterproofing
ASTM D 41 (2005) Asphalt Primer Used in Roofing,

Dampproofing, and Waterproofing
ASTM D 4586 (2007) Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos-Free

(SMACNA)

Sixth Edition, Second Printing
Finished sheet metalwork will form a weathertight construction without

waves, warps, buckles, fastening stresses or distortion, which allows for
expansion and contraction. Sheet metal mechanic is responsible for
cutting, fitting, drilling, and other operations in connection with sheet
metal required to accommodate the work of other trades. Coordinate
installation of sheet metal items used in conjunction with roofing with
roofing work to permit continuous roofing operations.
1.3 SUBMITTALS

SD-02 Shop Drawings
Gutters; G, AO
Downspouts; G, AO
Splash pans; G, AO
Base flashing
Counterflashing
Flashing at roof penetrations
Reglets
Open valley flashing
Eave flashing
Indicate thicknesses, dimensions, fastenings and anchoring

methods, expansion joints, and other provisions necessary for
thermal expansion and contraction. Scaled manufacturer's catalog
data may be submitted for factory fabricated items.
Quality Control Plan
Submit for sheet metal work in accordance with paragraph entitled

"Field Quality Control."
Package and protect materials during shipment. Uncrate and inspect

materials for damage, dampness, and wet-storage stains upon delivery to the
job site. Remove from the site and replace damaged materials that cannot
be restored to like-new condition. Handle sheet metal items to avoid
damage to surfaces, edges, and ends. Store materials in dry,
weather-tight, ventilated areas until immediately before installation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
Do not use lead, lead-coated metal, or galvanized steel. Use any metal
listed by SMACNA Arch. Manual for a particular item, unless otherwise
specified or indicated. Conform to the requirements specified and to the
thicknesses and configurations established in SMACNA Arch. Manual for the
materials. Different items need not be of the same metal, except that if
copper is selected for any exposed item, all exposed items must be copper.
Furnish sheet metal items in 8 to 10 foot lengths. Single pieces less than
8 feet long may be used to connect to factory-fabricated inside and outside
corners, and at ends of runs. Factory fabricate corner pieces with minimum
12 inch legs. Provide accessories and other items essential to complete
the sheet metal installation. Provide accessories made of the same or
compatible materials as the items to which they are applied. Fabricate
sheet metal items of the materials specified below and to the gage,
thickness, or weight shown in Table I at the end of this section. Provide
sheet metal items with mill finish unless specified otherwise. Where more
than one material is listed for a particular item in Table I, each is
acceptable and may be used except as follows:
2.1.1 Exposed Sheet Metal Items
Must be of the same material. Consider the following as exposed sheet

metal: gutters, including hangers; downspouts; gravel stops and fascias;
cap, valley, steeped, base, and eave flashings and related accessories.
2.1.2 Drainage
Do not use copper for an exposed item if drainage from that item will pass
over exposed masonry, stonework or other metal surfaces. In addition to
the metals listed in Table I, lead-coated copper may be used for such items.
2.1.3 Zinc Sheet and Strip
ASTM B 69, Type I, a minimum of 0.024 inch thick.
2.1.4 Stainless Steel
ASTM A 167, Type 302 or 304, 2D Finish, fully annealed, dead-soft temper.
2.1.5 Terne-Coated Steel
Minimum of 14 by 20 inch with minimum of 40 pound coating per double base

box. ASTM A 308/A 308M.
2.1.6 Aluminum Alloy Sheet and Plate
ASTM B 209, anodized for flashing located next to anodized surfaces and
clear form alloy, and temper appropriate for use on other locations. Color
for anodized surfaces shall match adjacent surface.
2.1.6.1 Finish
Exposed exterior sheet metal items of aluminum must have a baked-on,

factory-applied color coating of polyvinylidene fluoride (PVF2) or other
equivalent fluorocarbon coating applied after metal substrates have been
cleaned and pretreated. Provide finish coating dry-film thickness of 0.8

to 1.3 mils, and color to match adjacent surfaces.
2.1.7 Solder
ASTM B 32, 95-5 tin-antimony.
2.1.8 Polyvinyl Chloride Reglet
ASTM D 1784, Type II, Grade 1, Class 14333-D, 0.075 inch minimum thickness.
2.1.9 Bituminous Plastic Cement
ASTM D 4586, Type I.
2.1.10 Roofing Felt
ASTM D 226/D 226M Type I.
2.1.11 Asphalt Primer
ASTM D 41.
2.1.12 Fasteners
Use the same metal or a metal compatible with the item fastened. Use
stainless steel fasteners to fasten dissimilar materials.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
3.1.1 Workmanship
Make lines and angles sharp and true. Free exposed surfaces from visible
wave, warp, buckle, and tool marks. Fold back exposed edges neatly to form
a 1/2 inch hem on the concealed side. Make sheet metal exposed to the
weather watertight with provisions for expansion and contraction.
Make surfaces to receive sheet metal plumb and true, clean, even, smooth,
dry, and free of defects and projections. For installation of items not
shown in detail or not covered by specifications conform to the applicable
requirements of SMACNA 1793, Architectural Sheet Metal Manual. Provide
sheet metal flashing in the angles formed where roof decks abut walls,
curbs, ventilators, pipes, or other vertical surfaces and wherever
indicated and necessary to make the work watertight. Join sheet metal
items together as shown in Table II.
3.1.2 Nailing
Confine nailing of sheet metal generally to sheet metal having a maximum

width of 18 inch. Confine nailing of flashing to one edge only. Space
nails evenly not over 3 inch on center and approximately 1/2 inch from edge
unless otherwise specified or indicated. Face nailing will not be
permitted. Where sheet metal is applied to other than wood surfaces,
include in shop drawings, the locations for sleepers and nailing strips
required to secure the work.
3.1.3 Cleats
Provide cleats for sheet metal 18 inch and over in width. Space cleats
evenly not over 12 inch on center unless otherwise specified or indicated.
Unless otherwise specified, provide cleats of 2 inch wide by 3 inch long
and of the same material and thickness as the sheet metal being installed.
Secure one end of the cleat with two nails and the cleat folded back over
the nailheads. Lock the other end into the seam. Where the fastening is
to be made to concrete or masonry, use screws and drive in expansion
shields set in concrete or masonry. Pretin cleats for soldered seams.
3.1.4 Bolts, Rivets, and Screws
Install bolts, rivets, and screws where indicated or required. Provide

compatible washers where required to protect surface of sheet metal and to
provide a watertight connection. Provide mechanically formed joints in
aluminum sheets 0.040 inch or less in thickness.
3.1.5 Seams
Straight and uniform in width and height with no solder showing on the face.
3.1.5.1 Flat-lock Seams
Finish not less than 3/4 inch wide.
3.1.5.2 Lap Seams
Finish soldered seams not less than one inch wide. Overlap seams not
soldered, not less than 3 inch.
3.1.5.3 Loose-Lock Expansion Seams
Not less than 3 inch wide; provide minimum one inch movement within the
joint. Completely fill the joints with the specified sealant, applied at
not less than 1/8 inch thick bed.
3.1.5.4 Standing Seams
Not less than one inch high, double locked without solder.
3.1.5.5 Flat Seams
Make seams in the direction of the flow.
3.1.6 Soldering
Where soldering is specified, apply to copper, terne-coated stainless

steel, zinc-coated steel, and stainless steel items. Pretin edges of sheet
metal before soldering is begun. Seal the joints in aluminum sheets of
0.040 inch or less in thickness with specified sealants. Do not solder
aluminum.
3.1.6.1 Edges
Scrape or wire-brush the edges of lead-coated material to be soldered to

produce a bright surface. Flux brush the seams in before soldering. Treat
with soldering acid flux the edges of stainless steel to be pretinned.
Seal the joints in aluminum sheets of 0.040 inch or less in thickness with
specified sealants. Do not solder aluminum.
3.1.7 Welding and Mechanical Fastening
Use welding for aluminum of thickness greater than 0.040 inch. Aluminum
0.040 inch or less in thickness must be butted and the space backed with
formed flashing plate; or lock joined, mechanically fastened, and filled
with sealant as recommended by the aluminum manufacturer.
3.1.7.1 Welding of Aluminum
Use welding of the inert gas, shield-arc type. For procedures, appearance
and quality of welds, and the methods used in correcting welding work,
conform to AWS D1.2/D1.2M.
3.1.7.2 Mechanical Fastening of Aluminum
Use No. 12, aluminum alloy, sheet metal screws or other suitable aluminum
alloy or stainless steel fasteners. Drive fasteners in holes made with a
No. 26 drill in securing side laps, end laps, and flashings. Space
fasteners 12 inch maximum on center. Where end lap fasteners are required
to improve closure, locate the end lap fasteners not more than 2 inch from
the end of the overlapping sheet.
3.1.8 Protection from Contact with Dissimilar Materials
3.1.8.1 Copper or Copper-bearing Alloys
Paint with heavy-bodied bituminous paint surfaces in contact with

dissimilar metal, or separate the surfaces by means of moistureproof
building felts.
3.1.8.2 Aluminum
Do not allow aluminum surfaces in direct contact with other metals except
stainless steel, zinc, or zinc coating. Where aluminum contacts another
metal, paint the dissimilar metal with a primer followed by two coats of
aluminum paint. Where drainage from a dissimilar metal passes over
aluminum, paint the dissimilar metal with a non-lead pigmented paint.
3.1.8.3 Metal Surfaces
Paint surfaces in contact with mortar, concrete, or other masonry materials

with alkali-resistant coatings such as heavy-bodied bituminous paint.
3.1.8.4 Wood or Other Absorptive Materials
Paint surfaces that may become repeatedly wet and in contact with metal
with two coats of aluminum paint or a coat of heavy-bodied bituminous paint.
3.1.9 Expansion and Contraction
Provide expansion and contraction joints at not more than 32 foot intervals
for aluminum and at not more than 40 foot intervals for other metals.
Provide an additional joint where the distance between the last expansion
joint and the end of the continuous run is more than half the required
interval. Space joints evenly. Join extruded aluminum gravel stops and
fascias by expansion and contraction joints spaced not more than 12 feet
apart.
3.1.10 Base Flashing
Extend up vertical surfaces of the flashing not less than 8 inch and not
less than 4 inch under the roof covering. Where finish wall coverings form
a counterflashing, extend the vertical leg of the flashing up behind the
applied wall covering not less than 6 inch. Overlap the flashing strips
with the previously laid flashing not less than 3 inch. Fasten the strips
at their upper edge to the deck. Horizontal flashing at vertical surfaces
must extend vertically above the roof surface and fastened at their upper
edge to the deck a minimum of 6 inch on center with hex headed, galvanized
shielded screws a minimum of 2-inch lap of any surface. Solder end laps
and provide for expansion and contraction. Extend the metal flashing over
crickets at the up-slope side of curbs,and similar vertical surfaces
extending through sloping roofs, the metal flashings. Extend the metal
flashings onto the roof covering not less than 4.5 inch at the lower side
of vertical surfaces extending through the roof decks. Install and fit
the flashings so as to be completely weathertight. Provide
factory-fabricated base flashing for interior and exterior corners. Do not
use metal base flashing on built-up roofing. Turn up continuous roofing
rubberized underlayment same height as flashing behind all roof flashing.
3.1.11 Counterflashing
Except where indicated or specified otherwise, insert counterflashing in

reglets located from 9 to 10 inch above roof decks, extend down vertical
surfaces over upturned vertical leg of base flashings not less than 3 inch.
Fold the exposed edges of counterflashings 1/2 inch. Where stepped
counterflashings are required, they may be installed in short lengths a
minimum 8 inch by 8 inch or may be of the preformed one-piece type.
Provide end laps in counterflashings not less than 3 inch and make it
weathertight with plastic cement. Do not make lengths of metal
counterflashings exceed 10 feet. Form the flashings to the required shapes
before installation. Factory-form the corners not less than 12 inch from
the angle. Secure the flashings in the reglets with lead wedges and space
not more than 18 inch apart; on short runs, place wedges closer together.
Fill caulked-type reglets or raked joints which receive counterflashing
with caulking compound. Turn up the concealed edge of counterflashings
built into masonry or concrete walls not less than 1/4 inch and extend not
less than 2 inch into the walls. Install counterflashing to provide a
spring action against base flashing. Where bituminous base flashings are
provided, extend down the counter flashing as close as practicable to the
top of the cant strip. Factory form counter flashing to provide spring
action against the base flashing.
3.1.12 Metal Reglets
Provide factory fabricated caulked type or friction type reglets with a

minimum opening of 1/4 inch and a depth of 1 1/4 inch, as approved.
3.1.12.1 Caulked Reglets
Provide with rounded edges and metal strap brackets or other anchors for
securing to the concrete forms. Provide reglets with a core to protect
them from injury during the installation. Provide built-up mitered corner
pieces for internal and external angles. Wedge the flashing in the reglets
with lead wedges every 18 inch, caulked full and solid with an approved
compound.
3.1.12.2 Friction Reglets
Provide with flashing receiving slots not less than 5/8 inch deep, one inch
jointing tongues, and upper and lower anchoring flanges installed at 24
inch maximum snaplock receiver. Insert the flashing the full depth of the
slot and lock by indentations made with a dull-pointed tool, wedges, and
filled with a sealant. For friction reglets, install flashing snaplock
receivers at 24 inch on center maximum. When the flashing has been
inserted the full depth, caulk the slot and lock with wedges and fill with
sealant.
3.1.13 Gutters
The hung type of shape indicated and supported on underside by brackets

that permit free thermal movement of the gutter. Provide gutters in sizes
indicated complete with mitered corners, end caps, outlets, brackets, and
other accessories necessary for installation. Bead with hemmed edge or
reinforce the outer edge of gutter with a stiffening bar not less than 3/4
by 3/16 inch of material compatible with gutter. Fabricate gutters in
sections not less than 8 feet. Lap the sections a minimum of one inch in
the direction of flow or provide with concealed splice plate 6 inch
minimum. Join the gutters, other than aluminum, by riveted and soldered
joints. Join aluminum gutters with riveted sealed joints. Provide
expansion-type slip joints midway between outlets. Install gutters below
slope line of the roof so that snow and ice can slide clear. Support
gutters on adjustable hangers spaced not more than 30 inch on centeror by
cleats spaced not less than 36 inch apart. Adjust gutters to slope
uniformly to outlets, with high points occurring midway between outlets.
Fabricate hangers and fastenings from metals.
3.1.14 Downspouts
Space supports for downspouts according to the manufacturer's

recommendation for the masonry or steel substrate. Types, shapes and sizes
are indicated. Provide complete including elbows and offsets. Provide
downspouts in approximately 10 foot lengths. Provide end joints to
telescope not less than 1/2 inch and lock longitudinal joints. Provide
gutter outlets with wire ball strainers for each outlet. Provide strainers
to fit tightly into outlets and be of the same material used for gutters.
Keep downspouts not less than one inch away from walls. Fasten to the
walls at top, bottom, and at an intermediate point not to exceed 5 feet on
center with leader straps or concealed rack-and-pin type fasteners. Form
straps and fasteners of metal compatible with the downspouts.
3.1.14.1 Terminations
Neatly fit into the drainage connection the downspouts terminating in

drainage lines and fill the joints with a portland cement mortar cap sloped
away from the downspout. Provide downspouts terminating in splash blocks
with elbow-type fittings. Provide splash pans as specified.
3.1.15 Splash Pans
Install splash pans where downspouts discharge on roof surfaces and at

other locations as indicated. Unless otherwise shown, provide pans not
less than 24 inch long by 18 inch wide with metal ribs across the bottom of
the pan. Form the sides of the pan with vertical baffles not less than one
inch high in the front, and 4 inch high in the back doubled over and formed
continuous with horizontal roof flanges not less than 4 inch wide. Bend
the rear flange of the pan to contour of cant strip and extend up 6 inch
under the side wall covering or to height of base flashing under
counterflashing. Bed the pans and roof flanges in plastic bituminous
cement and strip-flash as specified.
3.1.16 Open Valley Flashing
Provide valley flashing free of longitudinal seams, of width sufficient to

extend not less than 12 inch under the roof covering on each side.
Provide a 1/2 inch fold on each side of the valley flashing. Lap the
sheets not less than 6 inch in the direction of flow and secure to roofing
construction with cleats attached to the fold on each side. Nail the tops
of sheets to roof sheathing. Space the cleats not more than 12 inch on
center. Provide exposed flashing not less than 4 inch in width at the top
and increase one inch in width for each additional 8 feet in length.
Where the slope of the valley is 4.5 inch or less per foot, or the
intersecting roofs are on different slopes, provide an inverted V-joint,
one inch high, along the centerline of the valley; and extend the edge of
the valley sheets 8 inch under the roof covering on each side.
3.1.17 Sheet Metal Covering on Flat, Sloped Surfaces
Except as specified or indicated otherwise, cover and flash all minor flat,
sloped surfaces such as parapets, bulkheads, dormers and small decks with
metal sheets of the material used for flashing; maximum size of sheets, 16
by 18 inch. Fasten sheets to sheathing with metal cleats. Lock seams and
solder. Lock aluminum seams as recommended by aluminum manufacturer.
Provide same continuous rubberized roofunderlayment as applied on main
roofinfg for all sheet metal covering.
3.1.18 Flashing at Roof Penetrations and Equipment Supports
Provide metal flashing for all pipes, ducts, and conduits projecting
through the roof surface and for equipment supports, guy wire anchors, and
similar items supported by or attached to the roof deck.
3.1.19 Single Pipe Vents
See Table I, footnote (d). Set flange of sleeve in bituminous plastic

cement and nail 3 inch on center. Bend the top of sleeve over and extend
down into the vent pipe a minimum of 2 inch. For long runs or long rises
above the deck, where it is impractical to cover the vent pipe with lead,
use a two-piece formed metal housing. Set metal housing with a metal
sleeve having a 4 inch roof flange in bituminous plastic cement and nailed
3 inch on center. Extend sleeve a minimum of8 inch above the roof deck and
lapped a minimum of 3 inch by a metal hood secured to the vent pipe by a
draw band. Seal the area of hood in contact with vent pipe with an
approved sealant.
3.1.20 Copings
Provide coping using baked enamel copper sheets 8 or 10 feet long joined by
a 3/4 inch locked and soldered seam. . Terminate outer edges in edge
strips. Install with sealed lap joints cover plate joints standing seam
joints as indicated.
3.2 PAINTING
Field-paint sheet metal for separation of dissimilar materials.
3.2.1 Aluminum Surfaces
Shall be solvent cleaned and given one coat of zinc-molybdate primer and
one coat of aluminum paint.
3.3 CLEANING
Clean exposed sheet metal work at completion of installation. Remove

grease and oil films, handling marks, contamination from steel wool,
fittings and drilling debris, and scrub-clean. Free the exposed metal
surfaces of dents, creases, waves, scratch marks, and solder or weld marks.
3.4 REPAIRS TO FINISH
Scratches, abrasions, and minor surface defects of finish may be repaired

in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions and as approved.
Repair damaged surfaces caused by scratches, blemishes, and variations of
color and surface texture. Replace items which cannot be repaired.
Establish and maintain a Quality Control Plan for sheet metal used in
conjunction with roofing to assure compliance of the installed sheet
metalwork with the contract requirements. Remove work that is not in
compliance with the contract and replace or correct. Include quality
control, but not be limited to, the following:
a. Observation of environmental conditions; number and skill level of

sheet metal workers; condition of substrate.
b. Verification that specified material is provided and installed.
c. Inspection of sheet metalwork, for proper size(s) and

thickness(es), fastening and joining, and proper installation.
3.5.1 Procedure
Submit for approval prior to start of roofing work. Include a checklist of

points to be observed. Document the actual quality control observations
and inspections. Furnish a copy of the documentation to the Contracting
Officer at the end of each day.
TABLE I. SHEET METAL WEIGHTS, THICKNESSES, AND GAGES
Copper, Zinc-
Ounces Terne- Coated
Per Stainless Coated Steel,
Sheet Metal Items Square Aluminum, Steel, Steel, U.S.
Foot Inch Inch Inch Std.
Gage
___________________________________________________________________________
Downspouts and
leaders............. 16 .032 .015 .015 24
Downspout clips
and anchors......... - .040 clip - - -
- .125 anchor - - -
Downspout straps,
2-inch.............. 48(a) .060 .050 - -
Conductor heads..... 16 .032 .015 .015 -
Scupper lining...... 20 .032 .015 .015 -
Strainers, wire
diameter or gage.... No. 9 .144 .109 -
gage diameter diameter
Flashings:
Base................ 20 .040 .018 .018 24
Cap (Counter-flashing) 16 .032 .015 .015 26
Eave................ 16 - .015 .015 24
Spandrel beam....... 10 - .010 .010 -
Bond barrier........ 16 - .015 .015 -
Stepped............. 16 .032 .015 .015 -
Valley.............. 16 .032 .015 .015 -
Roof drain.......... 16(b)
Pipe vent sleeve(d)
Coping.............. 16 - - - -
Gravel stops and
fascias:
Extrusions.......... - .075 - - -
Sheets,
corrugated.......... 16 .032 .015 .015 -
Sheets, smooth...... 20 .050 .018 .018 24
Edge strip.......... 24 .050 .025 - -
Gutters:
Gutter section....... 16 .032 .015 .015 24
Continuous cleat..... 16 .032 .015 .015 24
Hangers,
dimensions......... 1 inch x 1 inch x 1 inch x - -
1/8 inch .080 inch .037 inch
(a) (c)
Reglets (c)......... 10 - .010 .010 -

Splash pans......... 16 .040 .018 .018 -
(a) Brass.
(b) May be lead weighing 4 pounds per square foot.
TABLE I. SHEET METAL WEIGHTS, THICKNESSES, AND GAGES
Copper, Zinc-
Ounces Terne- Coated
Per Stainless Coated Steel,
Sheet Metal Items SquareAluminum, Steel, Steel, U.S.
Foot Inch Inch Inch Std.
Gage
___________________________________________________________________________
(c) May be polyvinyl chloride.
(d) 2.5 pound minimum lead sleeve with 4 inch flange. Where lead sleeve
is impractical, refer to paragraph entitled "Single Pipe Vents" for
optional material.
TABLE II. SHEET METAL JOINTS

TYPE OF JOINT
Copper, Terne-
Coated
Item Steel, Zinc-Coated
Designa- Steel and
tion Stainless
Steel Aluminum Remarks
______________________________________________________________________
Joint cap 1.25 inch 1.25 inch - - -

for single lock, single lock,
building standing standing
expansion seam, cleated
seam, cleated
joint at
roof
Flashings
Base One inch One inch Aluminum producer's

3 inch lap flat locked, recommended hard
for expansion soldered; sealed; setting sealant for
joint 3 inch lap for locked aluminum
expansion joint joints. Fill
each metal
expansion joint
with a joint
sealing compound
compound.
Cap-in 3 inch lap 3 inch lap Seal groove with

reglet joint sealing
compound.
Reglets Butt joint - - - Seal reglet groove

with joint sealing
compound.
Eave One inch flat One inch flat Same as base

locked, cleated locked, locked, flashing.
One inch cleated one inch
TABLE II. SHEET METAL JOINTS

TYPE OF JOINT
Copper, Terne-
Coated
Item Steel, Zinc-Coated
Designa- Steel and
tion Stainless
Steel Aluminum Remarks
______________________________________________________________________
loose locked, loose locked, sealed

expansion expansion joints,
joint cleated cleated
Stepped 3 inch lap 3 inch lap - - -
Valley. 6 inch lap cleated 6 inch lap cleated - - -
Edge Butt Butt - - -

strip
Gutters 1.5 inch lap, One inch flat locked, Aluminum producers
riveted and riveted, and sealed recommended hard
soldered setting sealant for
locked aluminum
joints.
(a) Provide a 3 inch lap elastomeric flashing with manufacturer's

recommended sealant.
(b) Seal polyvinyl chloride reglet with manufacturer's

recommended sealant.
SECTION 07 61 14.00 20
STEEL STANDING SEAM ROOFING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

ASTM A 1008/A 1008M (2009) Standard Specification for Steel,


Structural Steel
ASTM A 366/A 366M (1997e1) Standard Specification for

Commercial Steel, Sheet, Carbon,(0.15
Maximum Percent Cold-Rolled

Sheet and Strip, Carbon, Hot-Rolled

the Hot-Dip Process

the Hot-Dip Process


Environments
ASTM D 2244 (2009a) Calculation of Color Tolerances


SECTION 07 61 14.00 20 Page 1


Films


Gloss

ASTM D 968 (2005e1) Abrasion Resistance of Organic

Coatings by Falling Abrasive


Materials
ASTM G 23 (1996) Operating Light-Exposure Apparatus

(Carbon-Arc Type) With and Without Water
for Exposure of Nonmetallic Materials

(SMACNA)

1.2 DEFINITIONS
1.2.1 Field-Formed Seam
Seams of panels so configured that when adjacent sheets are installed the
seam is sealed utilizing mechanical or hand seamers. Crimped (45 degree
bend), roll formed (180 degree bend), double roll formed (2 - 180 degree
bends), and roll and lock systems are types of field-formed seam systems.
1.2.2 Snap Together Seam
Panels so configured that the male and female portions of the seam
interlock through the application of foot pressure or tamping with a
mallet. Snap-on cap configurations are a type of snap together system.
1.2.3 Pre-Formed
Formed to the final, less field-formed seam, profile and configuration in

the factory.
1.2.4 Field-Formed
Formed to the final, less field-formed seam, profile and configuration at

the site of work prior to installation.
SECTION 07 61 14.00 20 Page 2

1.2.5 Roofing System
The roofing system is defined as the assembly of roofing components,

including roofing panels, flashing, fasteners, and accessories which, when
assembled properly result in a watertight installation.
1.3.1 Design Requirements
a. Panels shall be continuous lengths up to manufacturer's standard

longest lengths, with no joints or seams, except where indicated
or specified. Ribs of adjoining sheets shall be in continuous
contact from eave to ridge. Individual panels of snap together
type systems shall be removable for replacement of damaged
material.
b. There shall be no exposed or penetrating fasteners except where

shown on approved shop drawings. Fasteners into steel shall be
stainless steel, zinc cast head, or cadmium plated steel screws
inserted into predrilled holes. There shall be a minimum of two
fasteners per clip. Single fasteners will be allowed when
supporting structural members are prepunched or predrilled.
c. Snap together type systems shall have a capillary break and a

positive side lap locking device. Field-formed seam type systems
shall be mechanically locked closed by the manufacturer's locking
tool. The seam shall include a continuous factory applied sealant
when required by the manufacturer to withstand the wind loads
specified.
d. Roof panel anchor clips shall be concealed and designed to allow

for longitudinal thermal movement of the panels, except where
specific fixed points are indicated. Provide for lateral thermal
movement in panel configuration or with clips designed for lateral
and longitudinal movement.
1.3.2 Design Conditions
The system shall be designed to resist positive and negative loads

specified herein in accordance with the AISI SG03-3. Panels shall support
walking loads without permanent distortion or telegraphing of the
structural supports.
1.3.2.1 Wind Uplift
The design uplift pressures for the roof system shall be computed and
applied using a basic wind speed of 90 miles per hour (mph). Roof system
and attachments shall resist the wind loads shown on
Sheet S-004, in pounds per square foot (psf):
SECTION 07 61 14.00 20 Page 3

The design uplift force for each connection assembly shall be that pressure
given for the area under consideration, multiplied by the tributary load
area of the connection assembly, and multiplied by the appropriate factor
of safety, as follows:
a. Single fastener in a connection: 3.0
b. Two or more fasteners in each connection: 2.25
1.3.2.2 Roof Live Loads
Loads shall be applied on the horizontal projection of the roof structure.

The minimum roof design live load shall be 20 psf.
1.3.2.3 Thermal Movement
System shall be capable of withstanding thermal movement based on a

temperature differential range of 220 degrees F.
1.3.2.4 Deflection
Panels shall be capable of supporting design loads between unsupported

spans with deflection of not greater than L/180 of the span.
The structural performance test methods and requirements of the Standing

Seam Roofing Systems (SSRS) shall be in accordance with ASTM E 1592.
1.4 SUBMITTALS

submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. The
following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL
PROCEDURES:
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Roofing; G, AE
Submit roofing drawings to supplement the instructions and

diagrams. Drawings shall include design and erection drawings
containing an isometric view of the roof showing the design uplift
pressures and dimensions of edge, ridge and corner zones; and show
typical and special conditions including flashings, materials and
thickness, dimensions, fixing lines, anchoring methods, sealant
locations, sealant tape locations, fastener layout, sizes, and
spacing, terminations, penetrations, attachments, and provisions
for thermal movement. Details of installation shall be in
accordance with the manufacturer's Standard Instructions and
details or the SMACNA 1793. Prior to submitting shop drawings,
have drawings reviewed and approved by the manufacturer's
technical engineering department.
SD-03 Product Data
SECTION 07 61 14.00 20 Page 4

Roofing panels; G, AO
Attachment clips
Closures
Accessories
Fasteners
Sealants
Insulation, including joint sealing measures for vapor barrier

facing
Sample warranty certificate; G, AO
Submit for materials to be provided. Submit data sufficient to

indicate conformance to specified requirements.
SD-04 Samples
Roofing panel
Submit a 12 inch long by full width section of typical panel.
For color selection, submit 2 by 4 inch metal samples in color,

finish and texture specified.
Accessories
Submit each type of accessory item used in the project

including, but not limited to each type of anchor clip, closure,
fastener, and leg clamp.
Sealants
Intermediate Support Section
Submit full size samples of each intermediate support section,

12 inches long.
SD-05 Design Data
Design calculations
SD-06 Test Reports
Field Inspection; G
Submit manufacturer's technical representative's field

inspection reports as specified in paragraph entitled
"Manufacturer's Field Inspection."
Structural performance tests
Finish tests
SD-07 Certificates
SECTION 07 61 14.00 20 Page 5

Manufacturer's Technical Representative's Qualifications
Statement of Installer's Qualifications
Submit documentation from roofing manufacturer proving the

manufacturer's technical representative meets below specified
requirements. Include name, address, telephone number, and
experience record.
Submit documentation proving the installer is factory-trained,

has the specified experience, and authorized by the manufacturer
to install the products specified.
Coil stock compatibility; G, AO
Provide certification of coil compatibility with roll forming

machinery to be used for forming panels without warping, waviness,
and rippling not part of panel profile; to be done without damage,
abrasion or marking of finish coating.
Installation manual; G, AO
Submit manufacturers printed installation manual, instructions,

and standard details.
Information card
For each roofing installation, submit a typewritten card or

photoengraved aluminum card containing the information listed on
Form 1 located at the end of this section.
1.5 DESIGN CALCULATIONS
Provide design calculations prepared by a professional engineer

specializing in structural engineering verifying that system supplied and
any additional framing meets design load criteria indicated. Coordinate
calculations with manufacturer's test results. Include calculations for:
Wind load uplift design pressure at roof locations specified in

paragraph entitled "Wind Uplift."
Clip spacing and allowable load per clip.
Fastening of clips to structure or intermediate supports.
Intermediate support spacing and framing and fastening to

structure when required.
Allowable panel span at anchorage spacing indicated.
Safety factor used in design loading.
Governing code requirements or criteria.
SECTION 07 61 14.00 20 Page 6

Edge and termination details.
1.6.1 Preroofing Conference
After submittals are received and approved but before roofing and insulation
work, including associated work, is preformed, the Contracting Officer will
hold a preroofing conference to review the following:
a. The drawings and specifications
b. Procedure for on site inspection and acceptance of the roofing

substrate and pertinent structural details relating to the roofing
system
c. Contractor's plan for coordination of the work of the various

trades involved in providing the roofing system and other
components secured to the roofing
d. Safety requirements
The preroofing conference shall be attended by the Contractor and personnel

directly responsible for the roofing and insulation installation, , and the
roofing manufacturer's technical representative. Conflicts among those
attending the preroofing conference shall be resolved and confirmed in
writing before roofing work, including associated work, is begun. Prepare
written minutes of the preroofing conference and submit to the Contracting
Officer.
1.6.2 Manufacturer
The SSMRS shall be the product of a metal roofing industry - recognized

manufacturer who has been in the practice of manufacturing SSMRS for a
period of not less than 5 years and who has been involved in at least 5
projects similar in size and complexity to this project.
The representative shall have authorization from manufacturer to approve

field changes and be thoroughly familiar with the products and with
installations in the geographical area where construction will take place.
The manufacturer's representative shall be an employee of the manufacturer
with at least 5 years experience in installing the roof system. The
representative shall be available to perform field inspections and attend
meetings as required herein, and as requested by the Contracting Officer.
1.6.4 Installer's Qualifications
The roofing system installer shall be factory-trained, approved by the

metal roofing system manufacturer to install the system, and shall have a
minimum of three years experience as an approved applicator with that
manufacturer. The applicator shall have applied five installations of
similar size and scope as this project within the previous 3 years.
1.6.5 Single Source
Roofing panels, clips, closures, and other accessories shall be standard

products of the same manufacturer; shall be the latest design by the
SECTION 07 61 14.00 20 Page 7

manufacturer; and shall have been designed by the manufacturer to operate

as a complete system for the intended use.
1.6.6 Laboratory Tests For Panel Finish
The term "appearance of base metal" refers to the metal coating on steel.
Panels shall meet the following test requirements:
a. Formability Test: When subjected to a 180 degree bend over a 1/8

inch diameter mandrel in accordance with ASTM D 522, exterior
coating film shall show only slight microchecking and no loss of
adhesion.
b. Accelerated Weathering Test: Withstand a weathering test for a

minimum of 2000 hours in accordance with ASTM G 23, Method 1
without cracking, peeling, blistering, loss of adhesion of the
protective coating, or corrosion of the base metal. Protective
coating that can be readily removed from the base metal with a
penknife blade or similar instrument shall be considered to
indicate loss of adhesion.
c. Chalking Resistance: After the 2000-hour weatherometer test,

exterior coating shall not chalk greater than No. 8 rating when
measured in accordance with ASTM D 4214 test procedures.
d. Color Change Test:
After the 2000-hour weatherometer test, exterior coating color change

shall not exceed 2 NBS units when measured in accordance with
ASTM D 2244 test procedure.
e. Salt Spray Test: Withstand a salt spray test for a minimum of

1000 hours in accordance with ASTM B 117, including the scribe
requirement in the test. Immediately upon removal of the panel
from the test, the coating shall receive a rating of 10, no
blisters in field as determined by ASTM D 714; and an average
rating of 7, 1/16 inch failure at scribe, as determined by
ASTM D 1654. Rating Schedule No. 1.
f. Abrasion Resistance Test for Color Coating: When subjected to the

falling sand test in accordance with ASTM D 968, coating system
shall withstand a minimum of 50 liters of sand per mil thickness
before appearance of base metal.
g. Humidity Test: When subjected to a humidity cabinet test in

accordance with ASTM D 2247 for 1000 hours, a scored panel shall
show no signs of blistering, cracking, creepage, or corrosion.
h. Gloss Test: The gloss of the finish shall be 30 plus or minus 5

at an angle of 60 degrees, when measured in accordance with
ASTM D 523.
i. Glare Resistance Test:
Surfaces of panels that will be exposed to the exterior shall have a

specular reflectance of not more than 10 when measured in
accordance with ASTM D 523 at an angle of 85 degrees. Specular
reflectance may be obtained with striations or embossing.
Requirements specified under "Formability Test" will be waived if
SECTION 07 61 14.00 20 Page 8

necessary to conform to this requirement.
1.7 WARRANTY
Furnish manufacturer's no-dollar-limit materials and workmanship warranty

for the roofing system. The warranty period shall be not less than 20
years from the date of Government acceptance of the work. The warranty
shall be issued directly to the Government. The warranty shall provide
that if within the warranty period the metal roofing system becomes
non-watertight or shows evidence of corrosion, perforation, rupture or
excess weathering due to deterioration of the roofing system resulting from
defective materials or installed workmanship the repair or replacement of
the defective materials and correction of the defective workmanship shall
be the responsibility of the roofing system manufacturer. Repairs that
become necessary because of defective materials and workmanship while
roofing is under warranty shall be performed within 7 days after
notification, unless additional time is approved by the Contracting
Officer. Failure to perform repairs within the specified period of time
will constitute grounds for having the repairs performed by others and the
cost billed to the manufacturer. The Contractor shall also provide a 2
year contractor installation warranty.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
Deliver, store, and handle preformed panels, bulk roofing products and
other manufactured items in a manner to prevent damage or deformation.
1.8.1 Delivery
Provide adequate packaging to protect materials during shipment. Crated

materials shall not be uncrated until ready for use, except for inspection.
Immediately upon arrival of materials at the jobsite, inspect materials for
damage, dampness, and staining. Damaged or permanently stained materials
that cannot be restored to like-new condition shall be replaced with
satisfactory material. If materials are wet, remove the moisture and
re-stack and protect the panels until used.
1.8.2 Storage
Stack materials on platforms or pallets and cover with tarpaulins or other

suitable weathertight covering which prevents water trapping or
condensation. Store materials so that water which might have accumulated
during transit or storage will drain off. Do not store the panels in
contact with materials that might cause staining, such as mud, lime,
cement, fresh concrete or chemicals. Protect stored panels from wind
damage.
1.8.3 Handling
Handle material carefully to avoid damage to surfaces, edges and ends.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 ROOFING PANELS
Panels shall have interlocking ribs for securing adjacent sheets. System
for securing the roof covering to structural framing members shall be
concealed clip fastening system with no fasteners penetrating the panels
except at the ridge or eave, rakes, penetrations, and end laps. Backing
SECTION 07 61 14.00 20 Page 9

plates and ends of panels at end laps shall be predrilled or prepunched;

factory prepare ends of panels to be lapped by trimming part of seam,
die-setting or swaging ends of panels. Length of sheets shall be
sufficient to cover the entire length of any unbroken roof slope when such
slope is 30 feet or less. Width of sheets shall provide not less than 12
inches of coverage in place. Height of corrugations of adjacent roof
sheets shall be not less than 1.75 inches (nominal). Make provisions for
expansion and contraction at either ridge or eave, consistent with the type
of system to be used. Panels from coil stock shall be formed without
warping, waviness or ripples not part of the panel profile and shall be
free of damage to the finish coating system.
2.1.1 Material
Zinc-coated steel conforming to ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90coating designation

or aluminum-zinc alloy coated steel conforming to ASTM A 792/A 792M, AZ 55
coating. Minimum thickness to be 0.023 inch thick (24 gage) minimum except
when mid field of roof is subject to design wind uplift pressures of 60 psf
or greater, entire roof system shall have a minimum thickness of 0.030 inch
(22 gage). Prior to shipment, treat mill finish panels with a passivating
chemical and oil to inhibit the formation of oxide corrosion products.
Dry, retreat, and re-oil panels that have become wet during shipment or
storage but have not started to oxidize.
2.1.2 Texture
Smooth.
2.1.3 Finish
Factory color finish.
2.1.3.1 Factory Color Finish
Provide factory applied, thermally cured coating to exterior and interior

of metal roof and wall panels and metal accessories. Provide exterior
finish top coat of 70 percent resin polyvinyldene fluoride with not less
than 0.8 mil dry film thickness. Provide exterior primer standard with
panel manufacturer with not less than 0.2 mil dry film thickness. Interior
finish shall consist of the same coating and dry film thickness as the
exterior coating. Provide exterior and interior coating meeting test
requirements specified below. Tests shall have been performed ohn same
factory finish and thickness provided. Provide clear factory edge coating
on all factory cut or unfinished edges.
2.2 INTERMEDIATE SUPPORTS
Fabricate panel subgirts, subpurlins, T-bars, Z-bars and tracks from

galvanized steel conforming to ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90, Grade D ( 16 gage
and heavier), Grade A ( 18 gage and lighter); or steel conforming to
ASTM A 36/A 36M, ASTM A 570/A 570M , or ASTM A 1008/A 1008M prime painted
with zinc-rich primer. Size, shape, thickness and capacity as required to
meet the load, insulation thickness and deflection criteria specified.
2.3 ATTACHMENT CLIPS
Fabricate clips from ASTM A 366/A 366M, ASTM A 570/A 570M, or

ASTM A 1008/A 1008M steel hot-dip galvanized in accordance with
ASTM A 653/A 653M, G 90, or Series 300 stainless steel. Size, shape,
thickness and capacity as required to meet the load, insulation thickness
SECTION 07 61 14.00 20 Page 10

and deflection criteria specified.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
Sheet metal flashings, gutters, downspouts, trim, moldings, closure strips,

pre-formed crickets, caps, equipment curbs, and other similar sheet metal
accessories used in conjunction with preformed metal panels shall be of the
same material as used for the panels. Provide metal accessories with a
factory color finish to match the roofing panels, except that such items
which will be concealed after installation may be provided without the
finish if they are stainless steel. Metal shall be of a thickness not less
than that used for the panels. Thermal spacer blocks and other thermal
barriers at concealed clip fasteners shall be as recommended by the
manufacturer except that wood spacer blocks are not allowed.
2.4.1 Closures
2.4.1.1 Rib Closures
Corrosion resisting steel, closed-cell or solid-cell synthetic rubber,

neoprene or polyvinyl chloride pre-molded to match configuration of rib
opening. Material for closures shall not absorb water.
2.4.1.2 Ridge Closures
Metal-clad foam or metal closure with foam secondary closure matching panel
configuration for installation on surface of roof panel between panel ribs
at ridge and headwall roof panel flashing conditions and terminations.
Foam material shall not absorb water.
2.4.2 Fasteners
Zinc-coated steel, corrosion resisting steel, zinc cast head, or nylon

capped steel, type and size specified below or as otherwise approved for
the applicable requirements. Design the fastening system to withstand the
design loads specified. Exposed fasteners shall be gasketed or have
gasketed washers on the exterior side of the covering to waterproof the
penetration. Washer material shall be compatible with the covering; have a
minimum diameter of 3/8 inch for structural connections; and gasketed
portion of fasteners or washers shall be neoprene or other equally durable
elastomeric material approximately 1/8 inch thick.
2.4.2.1 Screws
Not smaller than No. 14 diameter if self-tapping type and not smaller than
No. 12 diameter if self-drilling and self-tapping.
2.4.2.2 Bolts
Not smaller than 1/4 inch diameter, shouldered or plain shank as required,
with proper nuts.
2.4.2.3 Automatic End-Welded Studs
Automatic end-welded studs shall be shouldered type with a shank diameter

of not smaller than 3/16 inch and cap or nut for holding covering against
the shoulder.
SECTION 07 61 14.00 20 Page 11

2.4.2.4 Explosive Driven Fasteners
Fasteners for use with explosive actuated tools shall have a shank diameter
of not smaller than 0.145 inch with a shank length of not smaller than 1/2
inch for fastening to steel and not smaller than one inch for fastening to
concrete.
2.4.2.5 Rivets
Blind rivets shall be stainless steel with 1/8 inch nominal diameter shank.
Rivets shall be threaded stem type if used for other than the fastening of
trim. Rivets with hollow stems shall have closed ends.
2.4.3 Sealants
Elastomeric type containing no oil or asphalt. Exposed sealant shall cure

to a rubberlike consistency. Concealed sealant shall be the non-hardening
type. Seam sealant shall be factory-applied, non-skinning, non-drying, and
shall conform to the roofing manufacturer's recommendations.
Silicone-based sealants shall not be used in contact with finished metal
panels and components unless approved otherwise by the Contracting Officer.
2.4.4 GASKETS AND INSULATING COMPOUNDS
Nonabsorptive and suitable for insulating contact points of incompatible

materials. Insulating compounds shall be nonrunning after drying.
2.5 THERMAL INSULATION
Rigid, faced with a flexible vapor retarder. Insulation and facing shall
have a flame-spread rating of 50 or less in accordance with ASTM E 84.
Vapor retarder facing shall have a permeance rating of 0.05 perm or less.
Provide a thermal resistance "R" value of 30 or more.
2.6 RUBBERIZED UNDERLAYMENT
Rubberized underlayment shall be equal to "Ice and Water Shield" as

manufactured by Grace Construction Products, "Winterguard" as manufactured
by CertainTeed Corporation, or "Weather Watch Ice and Water Barrier" as
manufactured by GAF Building Materials Corporation.
2.7 LINER PANELS
Fabricate liner panels of the same material as roof panels, and formed or
patterned to prevent waviness and distortion. Liner panels shall have a
factory applied, one mil thick minimum painted coating on the inside face
and a prime coat on the liner side.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
Examine surfaces to receive standing seam metal roofing and flashing.

Ensure that surfaces are plumb and true, clean, even, smooth, as dry and
free from defects and projections which might affect the installation.
SECTION 07 61 14.00 20 Page 12

3.2 PROTECTION FROM CONTACT WITH DISSIMILAR MATERIALS
3.2.1 Cementitious Materials
Paint metal surfaces which will be in contact with mortar, concrete, or

other masonry materials with one coat of alkali-resistant coating such as
heavy-bodied bituminous paint.
3.2.2 Contact with Wood
Where metal will be in contact with wood or other absorbent material

subject to wetting, seal joints with sealing compound and apply one coat of
3.3 INSTALLATION
Install in accordance with the approved manufacturer's erection

instructions, shop drawings, and diagrams. Panels shall be in full and
firm contact with attachment clips. Where prefinished panels are cut in
the field, or where any of the factory applied coverings or coatings are
abraded or damaged in handling or installation, they shall, after necessary
repairs have been made with material of the same color as the weather
coating, be approved before being installed. Seal completely openings
through panels. Correct defects or errors in the materials. Replace
materials which cannot be corrected in an approved manner with nondefective
materials. Provide molded closure strips where indicated and where
necessary to provide weathertight construction. Use shims as required to
ensure attachment clip line is true. Use a spacing gage at each row of
panels to ensure that panel width is not stretched or shortened.
3.3.1 Roof Panels
Apply roofing panels with the standing seams parallel to the slope of the
roof. Provide roofing panels in longest practical lengths from ridge to
eaves (top to eaves on shed roofs), with no transverse joints except at the
junction of ventilators, curbs, skylights, chimneys, and similar openings.
Install flashing to assure positive water drainage away from roof
penetrations. Locate panel end laps such that fasteners do not engage
supports or otherwise restrain the longitudinal thermal movement of
panels. Form field-formed seam type system seams in the field with an
automatic mechanical seamer approved by the manufacturer. Attach panels to
the structure with concealed clips incorporated into panel seams. Clip
attachment shall allow roof to move independently of the structure, except
at fixed points as indicated.
3.3.2 Insulation Installation
Insulation shall be installed between covering and supporting members to

present a neat appearance. Tape seams unless approved otherwise by the
3.3.2.1 Rigid Insulation
Fasten securely without loose joints or unsightly sags.
3.3.2.2 Rubberized Underlayment
Underlayment shall be installed over the entire plywood sheathing roof

substrate. All strips of underlayment shall be installed so that successive
SECTION 07 61 14.00 20 Page 13

strips overlap the next lower strip in shingle fashion. Underlayment shall
be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions.
The underlayment shall ensure that any water that penetrates below the
metal roofing panels will drain outside of the building envelope.
3.3.3 Flashings
Provide flashing, related closures and accessories as indicated and as

necessary to provide a weathertight installation. Install flashing to
ensure positive water drainage away from roof penetrations. Flash and seal
the roof at the ridge, eaves and rakes, and projections through the roof.
Place closure strips, flashing, and sealing material in an approved manner
that will assure complete weathertightness. Details of installation which
are not indicated shall be in accordance with the SMACNA 1793, panel
manufacturer's approved printed instructions and details, or the approved
shop drawings. Allow for expansion and contraction of flashing.
3.3.4 Flashing Fasteners
Fastener spacings shall be in accordance with the panel manufacturer's

recommendations and as necessary to withstand the design loads indicated.
Install fasteners in roof valleys as recommended by the manufacturer of the
panels. Install fasteners in straight lines within a tolerance of 1/2 inch
in the length of a bay. Drive exposed penetrating type fasteners normal to
the surface and to a uniform depth to seat gasketed washers properly and
drive so as not to damage factory applied coating. Exercise extreme care
in drilling pilot holes for fastenings to keep drills perpendicular and
centered. Do not drill through sealant tape. After drilling, remove metal
filings and burrs from holes prior to installing fasteners and washers.
Torque used in applying fasteners shall not exceed that recommended by the
manufacturer. Remove panels deformed or otherwise damaged by over-torqued
fastenings, and provide new panels.
3.3.5 Rib and Ridge Closure/Closure Strips
Set closure/closure strips in joint sealant material and apply sealant to

mating surfaces prior to adding panel.
3.4 PROTECTION OF APPLIED ROOFING
Do not permit storing, walking, wheeling, and trucking directly on applied

roofing materials. Provide temporary walkways, runways, and platforms of
smooth clean boards or planks as necessary to avoid damage to applied
roofing materials, and to distribute weight to conform to indicated live
load limits of roof construction.
3.5 CLEANING
Clean exposed sheet metal work at completion of installation. Remove metal

shavings, filings, nails, bolts, and wires from roofs. Remove grease and
oil films, excess sealants, handling marks, contamination from steel wool,
fittings and drilling debris and scrub the work clean. Exposed metal
surfaces shall be free of dents, creases, waves, scratch marks, solder or
weld marks and damage to the finish coating.
3.6 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD INSPECTION
Manufacturer's technical representative shall visit the site as necessary

during the installation process to assure panels, flashings, and other
SECTION 07 61 14.00 20 Page 14

components are being installed in a satisfactory manner. Manufacturer's

technical representative shall perform a field inspection during the first
20 squares of roof panel installation and at substantial completion prior
to issuance of warranty, as a minimum, and as otherwise requested by the
Contracting Officer. Additional inspections shall not exceed one for 100
squares of total roof area with the exception that follow-up inspections of
previously noted deficiencies or application errors shall be performed as
requested by the Contracting Officer. Each inspection visit shall include
a review of the entire installation to date. After each inspection, a
report, signed by the manufacturer's technical representative, shall be
submitted to the Contracting Officer noting the overall quality of work,
deficiencies and any other concerns, and recommended corrective actions in
detail. Notify Contracting Officer a minimum of 2 working days prior to
site visit by manufacturer's technical representative.
3.7 COMPLETED WORK
Completed work shall be plumb and true without oil canning, dents, ripples,
abrasion, rust, staining, or other damage detrimental to the performance or
aesthetics of the completed roof assembly.
3.8 INFORMATION CARD
For each roof, provide a typewritten card, laminated in plastic and framed
for interior display or a photoengraved 0.032 inchthick aluminum card for
exterior display. Card to be 8 1/2 by 11 inches minimum and contain the
information listed on Form 1 at end of this section. Install card near
point of access to roof, or where indicated. .
3.9 FORM ONE
SECTION 07 61 14.00 20 Page 15

FORM 1 - PREFORMED STEEL STANDING SEAM ROOFING SYSTEM COMPONENTS
1. Contract Number:
2. Building Number & Location:
3. NAVFAC Specification Number:
4. Deck/Substrate Type:
5. Slopes of Deck/Roof Structure:
6. Insulation Type & Thickness:
7. Insulation Manufacturer:
8. Vapor Retarder: ( )Yes ( )No
9. Vapor Retarder Type:
10. Preformed Steel Standing Seam Roofing Description:
a. Manufacturer (Name, Address, & Phone No.):

b. Product Name: c. Width: d. Gage:
e. Base Metal: f. Method of Attachment:
11. Repair of Color Coating:
a. Coating Manufacturer (Name, Address & Phone No.):

b. Product Name:
c. Surface Preparation:
d. Recoating Formula:
e. Application Method:
12. Statement of Compliance or Exception:_________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
13. Date Roof Completed:
14. Warranty Period: From_______________ To_______________
15. Roofing Contractor (Name & Address):
16. Prime Contractor (Name & Address):
Contractor's Signature _________________________ Date:
Inspector's Signature _________________________ Date:
SECTION 07 61 14.00 20 Page 16

SECTION 07 84 00
FIRESTOPPING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

ASTM E 119 (2009) Standard Test Methods for Fire

Materials
ASTM E 1399 (1997; R 2005) Cyclic Movement and

Measuring the Minimum and Maximum Joint
Widths of Architectural Joint Systems
ASTM E 1966 (2007) Fire-Resistive Joint Systems
ASTM E 814 (2009) Standard Test Method for Fire Tests

of Through-Penetration Fire Stops

Materials
FM GLOBAL (FM)
FM AS 4991 (2001) Approval of Firestop Contractors
FM P7825a (2005) Approval Guide Fire Protection
UL 1479 (2003; Rev thru Dec 2008) Standard for

Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire
Stops
UL 2079 (2004; Mar 2006) Tests for Fire Resistance

of Building Joint Systems
UL 723 (2008) Standard for Test for Surface

Materials
UL Fire Resistance (2009) Fire Resistance Directory
Furnish and install tested and listed firestopping systems, combination of

materials, or devices to form an effective barrier against the spread of
flame, smoke and gases, and maintain the integrity of fire resistance rated
walls, partitions, floors, and ceiling-floor assemblies, including
through-penetrations and construction joints and gaps.
Through-penetrations include the annular space around pipes, tubes,
conduit, wires, cables and vents. Construction joints include those used
to accommodate expansion, contraction, wind, or seismic movement;
firestopping material shall not interfere with the required movement of the
joint. Gaps requiring firestopping include gaps between the curtain wall
and the floor slab and between the top of the fire-rated walls and the roof
or floor deck above.
1.3 SUBMITTALS

SD-02 Shop Drawings
Firestopping Materials.
Detail drawings including manufacturer's descriptive data,

typical details conforming to UL Fire Resistance or other details
certified by another nationally recognized testing laboratory,
installation instructions or UL listing details for a firestopping
assembly in lieu of fire-test data or report. For those firestop
applications for which no UL tested system is available through a
manufacturer, a manufacturer's engineering judgement, derived from
similar UL system designs or other tests, shall be submitted for
review and approval prior to installation. Submittal shall
indicate the firestopping material to be provided for each type of
application. When more than a total of 5 penetrations and/or
construction joints are to receive firestopping, provide drawings
that indicate location, "F" and "T" ratings, and type of
application.
SD-07 Certificates
Firestopping Materials.
Certificates attesting that firestopping material complies with

the specified requirements. In lieu of certificates, drawings
showing UL classified materials as part of a tested assembly may
be provided. Drawings showing evidence of testing by an alternate
nationally recognized independent laboratory may be substituted.
Installer Qualifications.
Documentation of training and experience.
Inspection.
Manufacturer's representative certification stating that

firestopping work has been inspected and found to be applied
according to the manufacturer's recommendations and the specified
requirements.
Engage an experienced Installer who is:
a. FM Research approved in accordance with FM AS 4991, or
b. Certified, licensed, or otherwise qualified by the firestopping

manufacturer as having the necessary staff, training, and a minimum of
3 years experience in the installation of manufacturer's products in
accordance with specified requirements. A manufacturer's willingness
to sell its firestopping products to the Contractor or to an installer
engaged by the Contractor does not in itself confer installer
qualifications on the buyer. The Installer shall have been trained by
a direct representative of the manufacturer (not distributor or agent)
in the proper selection and installation procedures.
Deliver materials in the original unopened packages or containers showing

name of the manufacturer and the brand name. Store materials off the
ground, protected from damage and exposure to elements. Remove damaged or
deteriorated materials from the site.
1.6 SEQUENCING
Coordinate the specified work with other trades. Apply firestopping

materials, at penetrations of pipes and ducts, prior to insulating, unless
insulation meets requirements specified for firestopping. Apply
firestopping materials at building joints and construction gaps, prior to
completion of enclosing walls or assemblies. Cast-in-place firestop
devices shall be located and installed in place before concrete placement.
Pipe, conduit or cable bundles shall be installed through cast-in-place
device after concrete placement but before area is concealed or made
inaccessible.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 FIRESTOPPING MATERIALS
Provide firestopping materials consisting of commercially manufactured,

asbestos-free, noncombustible products FM P7825a approved, or UL listed,
for use with applicable construction and penetrating items, complying with
the following minimum requirements:
2.1.1 Fire Hazard Classification
Material shall have a flame spread of 25 or less, and a smoke developed

rating of 50 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84 or UL 723.
Material shall be an approved firestopping material as listed in
UL Fire Resistance or by a nationally recognized testing laboratory.
2.1.2 Toxicity
Material shall be nontoxic to humans at all stages of application or during

fire conditions.
2.1.3 Fire Resistance Rating
Firestop systems shall be UL Fire Resistance listed or FM P7825a approved
with "F" rating at least equal to fire-rating of fire wall or floor in

which penetrated openings are to be protected, except that "F" rating may
be 3 hours in through-penetrations of 4 hour fire rated wall or floor.
Firestop systems shall also have "T" rating where required.
2.1.3.1 Through-Penetrations
Firestopping materials for through-penetrations, as described in paragraph

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, shall provide "F" and "T" fire resistance ratings in
accordance with ASTM E 814 or UL 1479. Fire resistance ratings shall be as
follows:
a. Penetrations of Fire Resistance Rated Walls and Partitions: F

Rating = Rating of wall or partition being penetrated.
b. Penetrations of Fire Resistance Rated Floors, Floor-Ceiling

Assemblies and the ceiling membrane of Roof-Ceiling Assemblies: F
Rating = 1 hour, T Rating = 1 hour.
2.1.3.2 Construction Joints and Gaps
Fire resistance ratings of construction joints, as described in paragraph

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, and gaps such as those between floor slabs or roof
decks and curtain walls shall be the same as the construction in which they
occur. Construction joints and gaps shall be provided with firestopping
materials and systems that have been tested in accordance with ASTM E 119,
ASTM E 1966 or UL 2079 to meet the required fire resistance rating.
Systems installed at construction joints shall meet the cycling
requirements of ASTM E 1399 or UL 2079.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
Areas to receive firestopping shall be free of dirt, grease, oil, or loose

materials which may affect the fitting or fire resistance of the
firestopping system. For cast-in-place firestop devices, formwork or metal
deck to receive device prior to concrete placement shall be sound and
capable of supporting device. Prepare surfaces as recommended by the
manufacturer.
3.2 INSTALLATION
Completely fill void spaces with firestopping material regardless of

geometric configuration, subject to tolerance established by the
manufacturer. Firestopping systems for filling floor voids 4 inches or
more in any direction shall be capable of supporting the same load as the
floor is designed to support or shall be protected by a permanent barrier
to prevent loading or traffic in the firestopped area. Install
firestopping in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.
Provide tested and listed firestop systems in the following locations,
except in floor slabs on grade:
a. Penetrations of duct, conduit, tubing, cable and pipe through floors

and through fire-resistance rated walls, partitions, and ceiling-floor
assemblies.
b. Penetrations of vertical shafts such as pipe chases, elevator

shafts, and utility chutes.
c. Gaps at the intersection of floor slabs and curtain walls, including

inside of hollow curtain walls at the floor slab.
d. Gaps at perimeter of fire-resistance rated walls and partitions,

such as between the top of the walls and the bottom of roof decks.
e. Construction joints in floors and fire rated walls and partitions.
f. Other locations where required to maintain fire resistance rating of

the construction.
3.2.1 Insulated Pipes and Ducts
Thermal insulation shall be cut and removed where pipes or ducts pass
through firestopping, unless insulation meets requirements specified for
firestopping. Replace thermal insulation with a material having equal
thermal insulating and firestopping characteristics.
3.2.2 Fire Dampers
Iinstall and firestop fire dampers in accordance with Section 23 00 00 AIR

SUPPLY, DISTRIBUTION, VENTILATION, AND EXHAUST SYSTEM.
3.2.3 Data and Communication Cabling
Cabling for data and communication applications shall be sealed with

re-enterable firestopping products that do not cure over time.
Firestopping shall be modular devices, containing built-in self-sealing
intumescent inserts. Firestopping devices shall allow for cable moves,
adds or changes without the need to remove or replace any firestop
materials.
3.3 INSPECTION
Firestopped areas shall not be covered or enclosed until inspection is

complete and approved by the manufacturer's technical representative. The
manufacturer's representative shall inspect the applications initially to
ensure adequate preparations (clean surfaces suitable for application,
etc.) and periodically during the work to assure that the completed work
has been accomplished according to the manufacturer's written instructions
and the specified requirements. Submit written reports indicating
locations of and types of penetrations and types of firestopping used at
each location; type shall be recorded by UL listed printed numbers.
SECTION 07 92 00
JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

ASTM C 1311
ASTM C 509 (2006) Elastomeric Cellular Preformed

Gasket and Sealing Material
ASTM C 734 (2006) Low-Temperature Flexibility of

Latex Sealants After Artificial Weathering
(2005) Latex Sealants
ASTM C 919 (2008) Use of Sealants in Acoustical

Applications


Rubber

ASTM D 217 (2002; R 2008) Cone Penetration of

Lubricating Grease

Extrudability of Oil- and Resin-Base
Caulking Compounds

Shrinkage and Tenacity of Oil- and
Resin-Base Caulking Compounds

Materials
1.2 SUBMITTALS

SD-03 Product Data
Sealants
Primers
Bond breakers
Backstops
Manufacturer's descriptive data including storage requirements,

shelf life, curing time, instructions for mixing and application,
and primer data (if required). Provide a copy of the Material
Safety Data Sheet for each solvent, primer or sealant material.
SD-07 Certificates
Sealant
Certificates of compliance stating that the materials conform to

the specified requirements.
Apply sealant when the ambient temperature is between 40 and 90 degrees F.
Deliver materials to the job site in unopened manufacturers' external

shipping containers, with brand names, date of manufacture, color, and
material designation clearly marked thereon. Label elastomeric sealant
containers to identify type, class, grade, and use. Carefully handle and
store materials to prevent inclusion of foreign materials or subjection to
sustained temperatures exceeding 90 degrees F or less than 0 degrees F.
1.5.1 Compatibility with Substrate
Verify that each of the sealants are compatible for use with joint
substrates.
1.5.2 Joint Tolerance
Provide joint tolerances in accordance with manufacturer's printed

instructions.
1.5.3 Mock-Up
Project personnel is responsible for installing sealants in mock-up , using

materials and techniques approved for use on the project.
1.6 SPECIAL WARRANTY
Guarantee sealant joint against failure of sealant and against water

penetration through each sealed joint for five years.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 SEALANTS
Provide sealant that has been tested and found suitable for the substrates
to which it will be applied.
2.1.1 Interior Sealant
Provide ASTM C 834. Location(s) and color(s) of sealant for the following:
LOCATION COLOR
a. Small voids between walls or partitions and As selected

adjacent lockers, casework, shelving,
door frames, built-in or surface-mounted
equipment and fixtures, and similar items.
b. Perimeter of frames at doors, windows, As selected

and access panels which adjoin exposed
interior concrete and masonry surfaces.
c. Joints of interior masonry walls and As selected

partitions which adjoin columns, pilasters,
concrete walls, and exterior walls unless
otherwise detailed.
d. Joints between edge members for acoustical As selected

tile and adjoining vertical surfaces.
e. Interior locations, not otherwise indicated As selected

or specified, where small voids exist between
materials specified to be painted.
f. Joints between bathtubs and ceramic tile; White

joints between shower receptors and ceramic
tile; joints formed where nonplaner tile
surfaces meet.
g. Joints formed between tile floors and tile As selected

base cove; joints between tile and dissimilar
materials; joints occurring where substrates change.
h. Behind escutcheon plates at valve pipe Gray

penetrations and showerheads in showers.
2.1.2 Exterior Sealant
For joints in vertical surfaces, provide ASTM C 920, Type S or M, Grade NS,
Class 25, Use NT. For joints in horizontal surfaces, provide ASTM C 920,
Type S or M, Grade P, Class 25, Use T. Provide location(s) and color(s) of
sealant as follows:
LOCATION COLOR
a. Joints and recesses formed where frames Match adjacent
LOCATION COLOR
and subsills of windows, doors, louvers, surface color
and vents adjoin masonry, concrete, or
metal frames. Use sealant at both exterior
and interior surfaces of exterior wall
penetrations.
c. Masonry joints where shelf angles occur. Match adjacent
d. Joints in wash surfaces of stonework. Match adjacent
e. Expansion and control joints. Match adjacent
g. Voids where items pass through exterior Match adjacent

walls.
h. Metal reglets, where flashing is inserted As selected

into masonry joints, and where flashing is
penetrated by coping dowels.
i. Metal-to-metal joints where sealant is As selected

indicated or specified.
j. Joints between ends of gravel stops, fascias, As selected

copings, and adjacent walls.
2.1.3 Floor Joint Sealant
ASTM C 920, Type S or M, Grade P, Class 25, Use T. Provide location(s) and
color(s) of sealant as follows:
LOCATION COLOR
a. Seats of metal thresholds for As selected

exterior doors.
b. Control and expansion joints in floors, Gray

slabs, ceramic tile, and walkways.
2.1.4 Acoustical Sealant
Rubber or polymer-based acoustical sealant conforming to ASTM C 919 must

have a flame spread of 25 or less and a smoke developed rating of 50 or
less when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. Acoustical sealant must
have a consistency of 250 to 310 when tested in accordance with ASTM D 217,
and must remain flexible and adhesive after 500 hours of accelerated
weathering as specified in ASTM C 734, and must be non-staining.
2.1.5 Preformed Sealant
Provide preformed sealant of polybutylene or isoprene-butylene based
pressure sensitive weather resistant tape or bead sealant capable of

sealing out moisture, air and dust when installed as recommended by the
manufacturer. At temperatures from minus 30 to plus 160 degrees F, the
sealant must be non-bleeding and no loss of adhesion.
2.1.5.1 Foam Strip
Provide foam strip of polyurethane foam; with cross-section dimensions of

1/2-inch x 1/2-inch. Provide foam strip capable of sealing out moisture,
air, and dust when installed and compressed as recommended by the
manufacturer. Service temperature must beminus 40 to plus 275 degrees F.
Furnish untreated strips with adhesive to hold them in place. Do not allow
adhesive to stain or bleed into adjacent finishes. Saturate treated strips
with butylene waterproofing or impregnated with asphalt.
2.2 PRIMERS
Provide a nonstaining, quick-drying type and consistency recommended by the

sealant manufacturer for the particular application.
2.3 BOND BREAKERS
Provide the type and consistency recommended by the sealant manufacturer to

prevent adhesion of the sealant to backing or to bottom of the joint.
2.4 BACKSTOPS
Provide glass fiber roving or neoprene, butyl, polyurethane, or

polyethylene foams free from oil or other staining elements as recommended
by sealant manufacturer. Provide 25 to 33 percent oversized backing for
closed cell and 40 to 50 percent oversized backing for open cell material,
unless otherwise indicated. Make backstop material compatible with
sealant. Do not use oakum and other types of absorptive materials as
backstops.
2.4.1 Rubber
Conform to ASTM D 1056, Type 1, open cell, Class A, Grade 1, round cross
section for cellular rubber sponge backing.
2.4.2 PVC
Conform to ASTM D 1667, Grade VO 12, open-cell foam, round cross section
for Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) backing.
2.4.3 Synthetic Rubber
Conform to ASTM C 509, Option I, Type I preformed rods or tubes for

Synthetic rubber backing.
2.4.4 Neoprene
Conform to ASTM D 1056, closed cell expanded neoprene cord Type 2, Class C,
Grade 2C2 Neoprene backing.
2.4.5 Butyl Rubber Based
Provide Butyl Rubber Based Sealants of single component, solvent release,

color as selected, conforming to ASTM C 1311.
2.4.6 Silicon Rubber Base
Provide Silicon Rubber Based Sealants of single component, solvent release,

color as selected, conforming to ASTM C 920, Non-sag, Type S, Grade NS,
Class 25 .
2.5 CAULKING
Conform to ASTM D 2452 and ASTM D 2453, Type 1, for Oil- and resin-based
caulking.
2.6 CLEANING SOLVENTS
Provide type(s) recommended by the sealant manufacturer except for aluminum

and bronze surfaces that will be in contact with sealant.
PART 3 EXECUTION
Clean surfaces from dirt frost, moisture, grease, oil, wax, lacquer, paint,
or other foreign matter that would tend to destroy or impair adhesion.
Remove oil and grease with solvent. Surfaces must be wiped dry with clean
cloths. When resealing an existing joint, remove existing caulk or sealant
prior to applying new sealant. For surface types not listed below, contact
sealant manufacturer for specific recommendations.
3.1.1 Steel Surfaces
Remove loose mill scale by sandblasting or, if sandblasting is impractical

or would damage finish work, scraping and wire brushing. Remove protective
coatings by sandblasting or using a residue-free solvent.
3.1.2 Aluminum or Bronze Surfaces
Remove temporary protective coatings from surfaces that will be in contact

with sealant. When masking tape is used as a protective coating, remove
tape and any residual adhesive just prior to sealant application. For
removing protective coatings and final cleaning, use nonstaining solvents
recommended by the manufacturer of the item(s) containing aluminum or
bronze surfaces.
3.1.3 Concrete and Masonry Surfaces
Where surfaces have been treated with curing compounds, oil, or other such
materials, remove materials by sandblasting or wire brushing. Remove
laitance, efflorescence and loose mortar from the joint cavity.
3.1.4 Wood Surfaces
Keep wood surfaces to be in contact with sealants free of splinters and

sawdust or other loose particles.
3.2 SEALANT PREPARATION
Do not add liquids, solvents, or powders to the sealant. Mix

multicomponent elastomeric sealants in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
3.3 APPLICATION
3.3.1 Joint Width-To-Depth Ratios
a. Acceptable Ratios:
JOINT WIDTH JOINT DEPTH

Minimum Maximum
For metal, glass, or other

nonporous surfaces:
1/4 inch (minimum) 1/4 inch 1/4 inch

over 1/4 inch 1/2 of Equal to
width width
For wood, concrete, masonry,

stone, or cast stone:
1/4 inch (minimum) 1/4 inch 1/4 inch

Over 1/4 inch to 1/2 inch 1/4 inch Equal to
width
Over 1/2 inch to 2 inch 1/2 inch 5/8 inch

Over 2 inch. (As recommended by sealant
manufacturer)
b. Unacceptable Ratios: Where joints of acceptable width-to-depth

ratios have not been provided, clean out joints to acceptable
depths and grind or cut to acceptable widths without damage to the
adjoining work. Grinding is not required on metal surfaces.
3.3.2 Masking Tape
Place masking tape on the finish surface on one or both sides of a joint
cavity to protect adjacent finish surfaces from primer or sealant smears.
Remove masking tape within 10 minutes after joint has been filled and
tooled.
3.3.3 Backstops
Install backstops dry and free of tears or holes. Tightly pack the back or
bottom of joint cavities with backstop material to provide a joint of the
depth specified. Install backstops in the following locations:
a. Where indicated.
b. Where backstop is not indicated but joint cavities exceed the

acceptable maximum depths specified in paragraph entitled, "Joint
Width-to-Depth Ratios".
3.3.4 Primer
Immediately prior to application of the sealant, clean out loose particles

from joints. Where recommended by sealant manufacturer, apply primer to
joints in concrete masonry units, wood, and other porous surfaces in
accordance with sealant manufacturer's instructions. Do not apply primer
to exposed finish surfaces.
3.3.5 Bond Breaker
Provide bond breakers to the back or bottom of joint cavities, as

recommended by the sealant manufacturer for each type of joint and sealant
used, to prevent sealant from adhering to these surfaces. Carefully apply
the bond breaker to avoid contamination of adjoining surfaces or breaking
bond with surfaces other than those covered by the bond breaker.
3.3.6 Sealants
Provide a sealant compatible with the material(s) to which it is applied.

Do not use a sealant that has exceeded shelf life or has jelled and can not
be discharged in a continuous flow from the gun. Apply the sealant in
accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions with a gun having a
nozzle that fits the joint width. Force sealant into joints to fill the
joints solidly without air pockets. Tool sealant after application to
ensure adhesion. Make sealant uniformly smooth and free of wrinkles. Upon
completion of sealant application, roughen partially filled or unfilled
joints, apply sealant, and tool smooth as specified. Apply sealer over the
sealant when and as specified by the sealant manufacturer.
3.4 PROTECTION AND CLEANING
3.4.1 Protection
Protect areas adjacent to joints from sealant smears. Masking tape may be
used for this purpose if removed 5 to 10 minutes after the joint is filled.
3.4.2 Final Cleaning
Upon completion of sealant application, remove remaining smears and stains

and leave the work in a clean and neat condition.
a. Masonry and Other Porous Surfaces: Immediately scrape off fresh

sealant that has been smeared on masonry and rub clean with a
solvent as recommended by the sealant manufacturer. Allow excess
sealant to cure for 24 hour then remove by wire brushing or
sanding.
b. Metal and Other Non-Porous Surfaces: Remove excess sealant with a

solvent-moistened cloth.
SECTION 08 11 13
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the

Code - Steel

the Hot-Dip Process

Sheet, zinc Coated by the Electrolytic
Process for Applications Requiring
Designation of the Coating Mass on Each
Surface



Thermal Insulation
ASTM C 612 (2009) Mineral Fiber Block and Board

Thermal Insulation
ASTM D 2863 (2009) Measuring the Minimum Oxygen

Concentration to Support Candle-Like
Combustion of Plastics (Oxygen Index)
ASTM E 1300 (2009a) Determining Load Resistance of

Glass in Buildings

ASTM F 2248 (2003) Standard Practice for Specifying an

Equivalent 3-Second Duration Design
Loading for Blast Resistant Glazing
Fabricated with Laminated Glass
ANSI/BHMA A156.115 (2006) Hardware Preparation in Steel Doors

and Steel Frames
NFPA 105 (2010) Installation of Smoke Door

Assemblies
NFPA 252 (2007) Standard Methods of Fire Tests of

Door Assemblies
NFPA 80 (2010) Standard for Fire Doors and Other

Opening Protectives
SDI/DOOR 111 (2009) Recommended Selection and Usage

Guide for Standard Steel Doors, Frames and
Accessories
SDI/DOOR 113 (2001; R 2006) Determining the Steady

State Thermal Transmittance of Steel Door
and Frame Assemblies
SDI/DOOR A250.11 (2001) Recommended Erection Instructions

for Steel Frames
SDI/DOOR A250.4 (2001) Test Procedure and Acceptance

Criteria for Physical Endurance for Steel
Doors, Frames, Frame Anchors and Hardware
Reinforcings
SDI/DOOR A250.6 (2003) Hardware on Steel Doors

(Reinforcement - Application)
SDI/DOOR A250.8 (2003) Recommended Specification for

Standard Steel Doors and Frames
UL 10B (2008; Rev thru Apr 2009) Fire Tests of

Door Assemblies
1.2 SUBMITTALS

SD-02 Shop Drawings
Doors; G, AO
Frames; G, AO
Accessories
Weatherstripping
Show elevations, construction details, metal gages, hardware

provisions, method of glazing, and installation details.
Schedule of doors; G, AO
Schedule of frames; G, AO
Submit door and frame locations.
SD-03 Product Data
Doors; G, AO
Frames; G, AO
Accessories
Weatherstripping
Submit manufacturer's descriptive literature for doors, frames,

and accessories. Include data and details on door construction,
panel (internal) reinforcement, insulation, and door edge
construction. When "custom hollow metal doors" are provided in
lieu of "standard steel doors," provide additional details and
data sufficient for comparison to SDI/DOOR A250.8 requirements.
Deliver doors, frames, and accessories undamaged and with protective

wrappings or packaging. Provide temporary steel spreaders securely fastened
to the bottom of each welded frame. Store doors and frames on platforms
under cover in clean, dry, ventilated, and accessible locations, with 1/4
inch airspace between doors. Remove damp or wet packaging immediately and
wipe affected surfaces dry. Replace damaged materials with new.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 STANDARD STEEL DOORS
SDI/DOOR A250.8, except as specified otherwise. Prepare doors to receive

door hardware as specified in Section 08 71 00. Undercut where indicated.
Exterior doors shall have top edge closed flush and sealed to prevent water
intrusion. Doors shall be 1-3/4 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated.
Provide exterior glazing in accordance with ASTM F 2248 and ASTM E 1300.
2.1.1 Classification - Level, Performance, Model

2.1.1.1 Extra Heavy Duty Doors
SDI/DOOR A250.8, Level 3, physical performance Level A, Model 2 with core
construction as required by the manufacturer for interior doors and for

exterior doors, of size(s) and design(s) indicated. Doors shall have
vertical stiffenercores and the space between the stiffeners shall be
filled with mineral board insulation.
2.2 INSULATED STEEL DOOR SYSTEMS
Insulated steel doors shall have a core of polyurethane foam and an R

factor of 10.0 or more (based on a k value of 0.16); face sheets, edges,
and frames of galvanized steel not lighter than 16 gage, 16 gage, and 16
gage respectively, except noted otherwise; magnetic weatherstripping;
nonremovable-pin hinges; thermal-break aluminum threshold; and vinyl door
bottom. Doors and frames shall receive phosphate treatment,
rust-inhibitive primer, and baked acrylic enamel finish. Doors shall have
been tested in accordance with SDI/DOOR A250.4 and shall have met the
requirements for Level C. Prepare doors to receive specified
hardware.Doors shall be 1-3/4 inch thick. Provide insulated steel doors
and frames at all locations where steel doors and frames are shown.
2.3 SOUND RATED STEEL DOORS
Doors shall have a Sound Transmission Class (STC) of 35.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
2.4.1 Astragals
For pairs of exterior steel doors which will not have aluminum astragals or
removable mullions, as specified in Section 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE provide
overlapping steel astragals with the doors. .
2.4.2 Moldings
Provide moldings around glass of interior and exterior doors and louvers of
interior doors. Provide nonremovable moldings on outside of exterior doors
and on corridor side of interior doors. Other moldings may be stationary
or removable. Secure inside moldings to stationary moldings, or provide
snap-on moldings. Muntins shall interlock at intersections and shall be
fitted and welded to stationary moldings.
2.5 INSULATION CORES
Insulated cores shall be of type specified, and provide an apparent

U-factor of .48 in accordance with SDI/DOOR 113 and shall conform to:
a. Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Foam: ASTM C 591, Type I or II,

foamed-in-place or in board form, with oxygen index of not less
than 22 percent when tested in accordance with ASTM D 2863; or
b. Rigid Polystyrene Foam Board: ASTM C 578, Type I or II; or
c. Mineral board: ASTM C 612, Type I.
2.6 STANDARD STEEL FRAMES
SDI/DOOR A250.8, Level 3 , except as otherwise specified. Form frames to

sizes and shapes indicated, with welded corners . Provide steel frames for
doors, unless otherwise indicated.
2.6.1 Welded Frames
Continuously weld frame faces at corner joints. Continuously weld stops

and rabbets. Grind welds smooth.
Weld frames in accordance with the recommended practice of the Structural

Welding Code Sections 1 through 6, AWS D1.1/D1.1M and in accordance with
the practice specified by the producer of the metal being welded.
2.6.2 Mullions and Transom Bars
Mullions and transom bars shall be closed or tubular construction and be a

member with heads and jambs butt-welded thereto . Bottom of door mullions
shall have adjustable floor anchors and spreader connections.
2.6.3 Stops and Beads
Form stops and beads from 20 gage steel. Provide for glazed and other
openings in standard steel frames. Secure beads to frames with oval-head,
countersunk Phillips self-tapping sheet metal screws or concealed clips and
fasteners. Space fasteners approximately 12 to 16 inch on center. Miter
molded shapes at corners. Butt or miter square or rectangular beads at
corners.
2.6.4 Cased Openings
Fabricate frames for cased openings of same material, gage, and assembly as
specified for metal door frames, except omit door stops and preparation for
hardware.
2.6.5 Anchors
Provide anchors to secure the frame to adjoining construction. Provide

steel anchors, zinc-coated or painted with rust-inhibitive paint, not
lighter than 18 gage.
2.6.5.1 Wall Anchors
Provide at least three anchors for each jamb. For frames which are more
than 7.5 feet in height, provide one additional anchor for each jamb for
each additional 2.5 feet or fraction thereof.
a. Masonry: Provide anchors of corrugated or perforated steel straps

or 3/16 inch diameter steel wire, adjustable or T-shaped;
b. Stud partitions: Weld anchors to backs of frames. Design anchors

to be fastened to closed steel studs with sheet metal screws, and
to open steel studs by welding;
c. Completed openings: Secure frames to previously placed concrete

or masonry with expansion bolts in accordance with SDI/DOOR 111;
and
d. Solid plaster partitions: Secure anchors solidly to back of

frames and tie into the lath. Provide adjustable top strut
anchors on each side of frame for fastening to structural members
or ceiling construction above. Size and type of strut anchors
shall be as recommended by the frame manufacturer.
2.6.5.2 Floor Anchors
Provide floor anchors drilled for 3/8 inch anchor bolts at bottom of each
jamb member.
2.7 FIRE DOORS AND FRAMES
NFPA 80 and NFPA 105 and this specification. The requirements of NFPA 80
and NFPA 105 shall take precedence over details indicated or specified.
2.7.1 Labels
Fire doors and frames shall bear the label of Underwriters Laboratories
(UL), Factory Mutual Engineering and Research (FM), or Warnock Hersey
International (WHI) attesting to the rating required. Testing shall be in
accordance with NFPA 252 or UL 10B. Labels shall be metal with raised
letters, and shall bear the name or file number of the door and frame
manufacturer. Labels shall be permanently affixed at the factory to frames
and to the hinge edge of the door. Door labels shall not be painted.
2.7.2 Oversized Doors
For fire doors and frames which exceed the size for which testing and
labeling are available, furnish certificates stating that the doors and
frames are identical in design, materials, and construction to a door which
has been tested and meets the requirements for the class indicated.
2.7.3 Astragal on Fire Doors
On pairs of labeled fire doors, conform to NFPA 80 and UL requirements.
2.8 WEATHERSTRIPPING
As specified in Section 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE.
2.8.1 Integral Gasket
Black synthetic rubber gasket with tabs for factory fitting into factory
slotted frames, or extruded neoprene foam gasket made to fit into a
continuous groove formed in the frame, may be provided in lieu of head and
jamb seals specified in Section 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE. Insert gasket in
groove after frame is finish painted. Air leakage of weatherstripped doors
shall not exceed 0.5 cubic feet per minute of air per square foot of door
area when tested in accordance with ASTM E 283.
2.9 HARDWARE PREPARATION
Provide minimum hardware reinforcing gages as specified in SDI/DOOR A250.6.

Drill and tap doors and frames to receive finish hardware. Prepare doors
and frames for hardware in accordance with the applicable requirements of
SDI/DOOR A250.8 and SDI/DOOR A250.6. For additional requirements refer to
ANSI/BHMA A156.115. Drill and tap for surface-applied hardware at the
project site. Build additional reinforcing for surface-applied hardware
into the door at the factory. Locate hardware in accordance with the
requirements of SDI/DOOR A250.8, as applicable. Punch door frames , with
the exception of frames that will have weatherstripping or lightproof or
soundproof gasketing, to receive a minimum of two rubber or vinyl door
silencers on lock side of single doors and one silencer for each leaf at
heads of double doors. Set lock strikes out to provide clearance for
silencers.
2.10 FINISHES
2.10.1 Factory-Primed Finish
All surfaces of doors and frames shall be thoroughly cleaned, chemically

treated and factory primed with a rust inhibiting coating as specified in
SDI/DOOR A250.8. Where coating is removed by welding, apply touchup of
factory primer.
2.10.2 Hot-Dip Zinc-Coated and Factory-Primed Finish
Fabricate exterior and interior doors and frames from hot dipped zinc
coated steel, alloyed type, that complies with ASTM A 924/A 924Mand
ASTM A 653/A 653M. The coating weight shall meet or exceed the minimum
requirements for coatings having 0.4 ounces per square foot, total both
sides, i.e., A40. Repair damaged zinc-coated surfaces by the application
of zinc dust paint. Thoroughly clean and chemically treat to insure
maximum paint adhesion. Factory prime as specified in SDI/DOOR A250.8.
Provide for exterior doors and interior doors.
2.10.3 Electrolytic Zinc-Coated Anchors and Accessories
Provide electrolytically deposited zinc-coated steel in accordance with

ASTM A 879/A 879M, Commercial Quality, Coating Class A. Phosphate treat
and factory prime zinc-coated surfaces as specified in SDI/DOOR A250.8.
2.11 FABRICATION AND WORKMANSHIP
Finished doors and frames shall be strong and rigid, neat in appearance,
and free from defects, waves, scratches, cuts, dents, ridges, holes, warp,
and buckle. Molded members shall be clean cut, straight, and true, with
joints coped or mitered, well formed, and in true alignment. Dress exposed
welded and soldered joints smooth. Design door frame sections for use with
the wall construction indicated. Corner joints shall be well formed and in
true alignment. Conceal fastenings where practicable. On wraparound
frames for masonry partitions, provide a throat opening 1/8 inch larger
than the actual masonry thickness. Design other frames in exposed masonry
walls or partitions to allow sufficient space between the inside back of
trim and masonry to receive calking compound.
2.11.1 Grouted Frames
For frames to be installed in exterior walls and to be filled with mortar

or grout, fill the stops with strips of rigid insulation to keep the grout
out of the stops and to facilitate installation of stop-applied head and
jamb seals.
2.12 PROVISIONS FOR GLAZING
Materials are specified in Section 08 81 00, GLAZING.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
3.1.1 Frames
Set frames in accordance with SDI/DOOR A250.11. Plumb, align, and brace
securely until permanent anchors are set. Anchor bottoms of frames with
expansion bolts or powder-actuated fasteners. Build in or secure wall
anchors to adjoining construction. Where frames require ceiling struts or
overhead bracing, anchor frames to the struts or bracing. Backfill frames
with mortar. Coat inside of frames with corrosion-inhibiting bituminous
material. For frames in exterior walls, ensure that stops are filled with
rigid insulation before grout is placed.
3.1.2 Doors
Hang doors in accordance with clearances specified in SDI/DOOR A250.8.

After erection and glazing, clean and adjust hardware.
3.1.3 Fire Doors and Frames
Install fire doors and frames, including hardware, in accordance with

NFPA 80.
3.2 PROTECTION
Protect doors and frames from damage. Repair damaged doors and frames
prior to completion and acceptance of the project or replace with new, as
directed. Wire brush rusted frames until rust is removed. Clean
thoroughly. Apply an all-over coat of rust-inhibitive paint of the same
type used for shop coat.
3.3 CLEANING
Upon completion, clean exposed surfaces of doors and frames thoroughly.

Remove mastic smears and other unsightly marks.
SECTION 08 11 16
ALUMINUM DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES


Finishes

Structural Steel



Glass in Buildings

ASTM E 331 (2000; R 2009) Water Penetration of

Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and
Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air
Pressure Difference
ASTM F 1642 (2004) Standard Test Method for Glazing

and Glazing Systems Subject to Airblast
Loadings
ASTM F 2248 (2003) Standard Practice for Specifying an

Equivalent 3-Second Duration Design
Loading for Blast Resistant Glazing
Fabricated with Laminated Glass
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
1.2.1 Structural
Exterior doors, frames and hardware shall be designed to resist equivalent

static design loads in accordance with ASTM F 1642. Frame deflections
shall not exceed L/160 of the unsupported member lengths. Equivalent

static design loads for connections of window or door frame to the
surrounding walls or hardware and associated connections, and glazing stop
connections shall be in accordance with ASTM F 2248 and ASTM E 1300.
Design supporting elements and their connections based on their ultimate
capacities. Provide calculations of a Professional Engineer that
substantiates compliance with these requirements. Use frames that provide
an equivalent level of performance. Shapes and thicknesses of framing
members shall be sufficient to withstand the design wind load indicated
with a deflection of not more than 1/175 times the length of the member and
a safety factor of not less than 1.65. Provide glazing beads, moldings,
and trim of not less than 0.050 inch nominal thickness.
When tested in accordance with ASTM E 283, air infiltration shall not exceed
0.06 cubic feet per minute per square footof fixed area at a test pressure
of 6.24 pounds per square foot ( 50 mile per hour wind).
1.2.3 Water Penetration
When tested in accordance with ASTM E 331, there shall be no water

penetration at a pressure of 8 pounds per square foot of fixed area.
1.3 SUBMITTALS

SD-02 Shop Drawings
Doors and frames; G, AE
Show elevations of each door type, size of doors and frames, metal
gages, details of door and frame construction, methods of
anchorage, glazing details, weatherstripping, provisions for and
location of hardware, and details of installation.
SD-04 Samples
Finish sample
SD-05 Design Data
Structural calculations for deflection; G, AE
Doors and frames
Submit detail specifications and instructions for installation,

adjustments, cleaning, and maintenance.
Inspect materials delivered to the site for damage. Unload and store with
minimum handling. Provide storage space in dry location with adequate

ventilation, free from dust or water, and easily accessible for inspection
and handling. Stack materials on nonabsorptive strips or wood platforms.
Do not cover doors and frames with tarps, polyethylene film, or similar
coverings. Protect finished surfaces during shipping and handling using
manufacturer's standard method, except that no coatings or lacquers shall
be applied to surfaces to which calking and glazing compounds must adhere.
1.5 QUALITY CONTROL
Drawings shall indicate elevations of doors and frames, full-size sections,

thickness and gages of metal, fastenings, proposed method of anchoring,
size and spacing of anchors, details of construction, method of glazing,
details of operating hardware, mullion details, method and materials for
weatherstripping, material and method of attaching subframes, trim,
installation details, and other related items.
1.5.2 Sample Requirements
1.5.2.1 Finish Sample Requirements
Submit color chart of standard factory-finish color coatings.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 DOORS AND FRAMES
Swing-type aluminum doors and frames of size, design, and location

indicated. Provide doors complete with frames, framing members , subframes ,
transoms , adjoining sidelights , adjoining window wall , trim, and
accessories.
2.2 MATERIALS
2.2.1 Anchors
Stainless steel or steel with hot-dipped galvanized finish.
2.2.2 Weatherstripping
Continuous wool pile, silicone treated, or type recommended by door

manufacturer.
2.2.3 Aluminum Alloy for Doors and Frames
ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T5 for extrusions. ASTM B 209, alloy and temper
best suited for aluminum sheets and strips.
2.2.4 Fasteners
Hard aluminum or stainless steel.
ASTM A 36/A 36M.
2.2.6 Aluminum Paint
Aluminum door manufacturer's standard aluminum paint.
2.3 FABRICATION
2.3.1 Aluminum Frames
Extruded aluminum shapes with contours approximately as indicated. Provide

removable glass stops and glazing beads for frames accommodating fixed
glass. Use countersunk stainless steel Phillips screws for exposed
fastenings, and space not more than 12 inches on center. Mill joints in
frame members to a hairline fit, reinforce, and secure mechanically.
2.3.2 Aluminum Doors
2.3.2.1 Full Glazed Stile and Rail Doors
Doors shall have medium stiles and rails as indicated. Fabricate from
extruded aluminum hollow seamless tubes or from a combination of
open-shaped members interlocked or welded together. Fasten top and bottom
rail together by means of welding or by 3/8 or 1/2 inch diameter
cadmium-plated tensioned steel tie rods. Provide an adjustable mechanism
of jack screws or other methods in the top rail to allow for minor
clearance adjustments after installation.
2.3.3 Welding and Fastening
Where possible, locate welds on unexposed surfaces. Dress welds on exposed

surfaces smoothly. Select welding rods, filler wire, and flux to produce a
uniform texture and color in finished work. Remove flux and spatter from
surfaces immediately after welding. Exposed screws or bolts will be
permitted only in inconspicuous locations, and shall have countersunk
heads. Weld concealed reinforcements for hardware in place.
Provide on stiles and rails of exterior doors. Fit into slots which are
integral with doors or frames. Weatherstripping shall be replaceable
without special tools, and adjustable at meeting rails of pairs of doors.
Installation shall allow doors to swing freely and close positively. Air
leakage of a single leaf weatherstripped door shall not exceed 0.5 cubic
feet per minute of air per square foot of door area when tested in
2.3.5 Anchors
On the backs of subframes, provide anchors of the sizes and shapes

indicated for securing subframes to adjacent construction. Anchor transom
bars at ends and mullions at head and sill. Reinforce and anchor
freestanding door frames to floor construction as indicated on approved
shop drawings and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendation. Place
anchors near top and bottom of each jamb and at intermediate points not
more than 25 inch apart.
2.3.6 Provisions for Hardware
Coordinate with Section 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE. Deliver hardware templates

and hardware (except field-applied hardware) to the door manufacturer for
use in fabrication of aluminum doors and frames. Cut, reinforce, drill,
and tap doors and frames at the factory to receive template hardware.
Provide doors to receive surface-applied hardware, except push plates, kick
plates, and mop plates, with reinforcing only; drill and tap in the field.
Provide hardware reinforcements of stainless steel or steel with hot-dipped
galvanized finish, and secure with stainless steel screws.
2.3.7 Provisions for Glazing
Provide extruded aluminum snap-in glazing beads on interior side of doors.

Provide extruded aluminum, theft-proof, snap-in glazing beads or fixed
glazing beads on exterior or security side of doors. Glazing beads shall
have vinyl insert glazing gaskets. Design glazing beads to receive glass
of thickness indicated or specified.
2.3.8 Finishes
Provide exposed aluminum surfaces with factory finish of anodic coating or

organic coating.
2.3.8.1 Anodic Coating
Clean exposed aluminum surfaces and provide an anodized finish conforming

to AA DAF-45. Finish shall be integral color-anodized, designation
AA-M10-C22-A42, Architectural Class I 0.7 mil or thicker . Color shall be
medium bronze.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
Plumb, square, level, and align frames and framing members to receive doors ,
transoms , adjoining sidelights , and , adjoining window walls. Anchor
frames to adjacent construction as indicated and in accordance with
manufacturer's printed instructions. Anchor bottom of each frame to rough
floor construction with 3/32 inch thick stainless steel angle clips secured
to back of each jamb and to floor construction; use stainless steel bolts
and expansion rivets for fastening clip anchors. Hang doors to produce
clearances specified in paragraph entitled "Aluminum Doors," of this
section. After erection and glazing, adjust doors and hardware to operate
properly.
3.2 PROTECTION FROM DISSIMILAR MATERIALS
3.2.1 Dissimilar Metals
Where aluminum surfaces come in contact with metals other than stainless
steel, zinc, or small areas of white bronze, protect from direct contact to
dissimilar metals.
3.2.1.1 Protection
Provide one of the following systems to protect surfaces in contact with

dissimilar metals:
a. Paint the dissimilar metal with one coat of heavy-bodied

bituminous paint.
b. Apply a good quality elastomeric sealant between the aluminum and

the dissimilar metal.
c. Paint the dissimilar metal with one coat of primer and one coat of
aluminum paint.
d. Use a nonabsorptive tape or gasket in permanently dry locations.
3.2.2 Drainage from Dissimilar Metals
In locations where drainage from dissimilar metals has direct contact with
aluminum, provide protective paint to prevent aluminum discoloration.
3.2.3 Masonry and Concrete
Provide aluminum surfaces in contact with mortar, concrete, or other

masonry materials with one coat of heavy-bodied bituminous paint.
3.2.4 Wood or Other Absorptive Materials
Provide aluminum surfaces in contact with absorptive materials subject to

frequent moisture, and aluminum surfaces in contact with treated wood, with
two coats of aluminum paint or one coat of heavy-bodied bituminous paint.
In lieu of painting the aluminum, the Contractor shall have the option of
painting the wood or other absorptive surface with two coats of aluminum
paint and sealing the joints with elastomeric sealant.
3.3 CLEANING
Upon completion of installation, clean door and frame surfaces in

accordance with door manufacturer's written recommended procedure. Do not
use abrasive, caustic, or acid cleaning agents.
3.4 PROTECTION
Protect doors and frames from damage and from contamination by other
materials such as cement mortar. Prior to completion and acceptance of the
work, restore damaged doors and frames to original condition, or replace
with new ones.
SECTION 08 14 00
WOOD DOORS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK INSTITUTE (AWI)
AWI Qual Stds (8th Edition) AWI Quality Standards

ASTM E 90 (2009) Standard Test Method for Laboratory

Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission
Loss of Building Partitions and Elements

Opening Protectives
WINDOW AND DOOR MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (WDMA)
WDMA I.S. 1-A (1997) Architectural Wood Flush Doors
WDMA I.S. 4 (2000) Water-Repellent Preservative

Non-Pressure Treatment for Millwork
WDMA TM-5 (1990) Split Resistance Test Method
WDMA TM-7 (1990) Cycle Slam Test Method
WDMA TM-8 (1990) Hinge Loading Test Method
1.2 SUBMITTALS

PROCEDURES.
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Doors; G, AO
Submit drawings or catalog data showing each type of door unit .

Drawings and data shall indicate door type and construction,
sizes, thickness, methods of assembly, and glazing,.
SD-03 Product Data
Doors; G, AO
Accessories
Water-resistant sealer
Sample warranty
Sound transmission class rating; G, AO
Fire resistance rating; G, AO
SD-06 Test Reports
Split resistance
Cycle-slam
Hinge loading resistance
Submit split resistance test report for doors tested in accordance

with WDMA TM-5, cycle-slam test report for doors tested in
accordance with WDMA TM-7, and hinge loading resistance test
report for doors tested in accordance with WDMA TM-8.
Deliver doors to the site in an undamaged condition and protect against

damage and dampness. Stack doors flat under cover. Support on blocking, a
minimum of 4 inch thick, located at each end and at the midpoint of the
door. Store doors in a well-ventilated building so that they will not be
exposed to excessive moisture, heat, dryness, direct sunlight, or extreme
changes of temperature and humidity. Do not store in a building under
construction until concrete, masonry work, and plaster are dry. Replace
defective or damaged doors with new ones.
1.4 WARRANTY
Warrant doors free of defects as set forth in the door manufacturer's

standard door warranty.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 DOORS
Provide doors of the types, sizes, and designs indicated.
2.1.1 Flush Doors
Conform to WDMA I.S. 1-A for flush doors. Provide solid core doors with
lock blocks and 1 inch minimum thickness hinge stile. Hardwood stile edge
bands of doors receives a natural finish, compatible with face veneer.

Provide mill option for stile edge of doors scheduled to be painted. No
visible finger joints will be accepted in stile edge bands.
2.1.1.1 Interior Flush Doors
Provide staved lumber core, Type II flush doors conforming to WDMA I.S. 1-A
with faces of good grade white oak . Hardwood veneers shall be rotary cut
book matched.
2.1.2 Acoustical Doors
WDMA I.S. 1-A, solid core, constructed to provide Sound Transmission Class
rating of 35 when tested in accordance with ASTM E 90.
2.2 ACCESSORIES
2.2.1 Door Light Openings
Provide glazed openings with the manufacturer's standard wood moldings.

Provide moldings for doors to receive natural finish of the same wood
species and color as the wood face veneers.
Provide weatherstripping that is a standard cataloged product of a

manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of this specialized item.
Provide weatherstripping tempered spring bronze or looped neoprene or vinyl
held in an extruded non-ferrous metal housing. Install bronze
weatherstripping with a minimum thickness of 0.0089 inch for sills, and a
minimum thickness of 0.0063 inch elsewhere. Air leakage of weatherstripped
doors not to exceed 1.25 cubic feet per minute of air per square foot of
door area when tested in accordance with ASTM E 283.
2.2.3 Additional Hardware Reinforcement
Provide the minimum lock blocks to secure the specified hardware. The
measurement of top, bottom, and intermediate rail blocks are a minimum 125
mm 5 inch by full core width. Comply with the manufacturer's labeling
requirements for reinforcement blocking, but not mineral material similar
to the core.
2.3 FABRICATION
2.3.1 Marking
Stamp each door with a brand, stamp, or other identifying mark indicating
quality and construction of the door.
2.3.2 Quality and Construction
Identify the standard on which the construction of the door was based ,
identify the standard under which preservative treatment was made, and
identify doors having a Type I glue bond.
2.3.3 Preservative Treatment
Treat doors scheduled for restrooms, janitor closets and other possible wet
locations including exterior doors with a water-repellent preservative
treatment and so marketed at the manufacturer's plant in accordance with

WDMA I.S. 4.
2.3.4 Adhesives and Bonds
WDMA I.S. 1-A. Use Type I bond for exterior doors and Type II bond for
interior doors. Provide a nonstaining adhesive on doors with a natural
finish.
2.3.5 Prefitting
Provide factory finished and factory prefitted doors for the specified
hardware, door frame and door-swing indicated. Machine and size doors at
the factory by the door manufacturer in accordance with the standards under
which the doors are produced and manufactured. The work includes sizing,
bevelling edges, mortising, and drilling for hardware and providing
necessary beaded openings for glass and louvers. Provide the door
manufacturer with the necessary hardware samples, and frame and hardware
schedules to coordinate the work.
2.3.6 Finishes
2.3.6.1 Field Painting
Factory prime or seal doors, and field paint.
2.3.6.2 Factory Finish
Provide doors finished at the factory by the door manufacturer as follows:

AWI Qual Stds Section 1500, specification for System No. 4 Conversion
varnish alkyd urea or System No. 5 Vinyl catalyzed. The coating is
AWI Qual Stds premium, medium rubbed sheen, closed grain effect. Use stain
when required to produce the finish specified for color. Seal edges,
cutouts, trim, and wood accessories, and apply two coats of finish
compatible with the door face finish. Touch-up finishes that are scratched
or marred, or where exposed fastener holes are filled, in accordance with
the door manufacturer's instructions. Match color and sheen of factory
finish using materials compatible for field application.
2.3.6.3 Color
Provide door finish colors as indicated .
2.3.7 Water-Resistant Sealer
Provide manufacturer's standard water-resistant sealer compatible with the

specified finishes.
2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
Meet or exceed the following minimum performance criteria of stiles of "B"

and "C" label fire doors utilizing standard mortise leaf hinges:
a. Split resistance: Averages of ten test samples not less than 500
pounds load when tested in accordance with WDMA TM-5.
b. Cycle-slam: 200,000 cycles with no loose hinge screws or other

visible signs of failure when tested in accordance with the
requirements of WDMA TM-7.
c. Hinge loading resistance: Averages of ten test samples not less

than 700 pounds load when tested for direct screw withdrawal in
accordance with WDMA TM-8 using a No. 12, 1-1/4 inch long, steel,
fully threaded wood screw. Drill 5/32 inch pilot hole, use 1-1/2
inch opening around screw for bearing surface, and engage screw
full, except for last 1/8 inch. Do not use a steel plate to
reinforce screw area.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
Before installation, seal top and bottom edges of doors with the approved
water-resistant sealer. Seal cuts made on the job immediately after
cutting using approved water-resistant sealer. Fit, trim, and hang doors
with a 1/16 inch minimum, 1/8 inch maximum clearance at sides and top, and a
3/16 inch minimum, 1/4 inch maximum clearance over thresholds. Provide
3/8 inch minimum, 7/16 inch maximum clearance at bottom where no threshold
occurs. Bevel edges of doors at the rate of 1/8 inch in 2 inch. Door warp
shall not exceed1/4 inch when measured in accordance with WDMA I.S. 1-A.
3.1.1 Fire Doors
Install fire doors in accordance with NFPA 80. Do not paint over labels.
SECTION 08 33 23
OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

ASCE 7-05 (2006; Errata 2007) Minimum Design Loads

for Buildings and Other Structures
ASME B29.400 (2001; R 2008) Combination, "H" Type Mill

Chains, and Sprockets

Hardware

Castings, Carbon, for General Application

Strength

Structural Steel

Gray Iron Castings

Welded and Seamless

the Hot-Dip Process
ASTM A 780/A 780M (2001; R 2006) Standard Practice for



ASTM E 330 (2002) Structural Performance of Exterior

Windows, Doors, Skylights and Curtain
Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure
Difference
ASTM F 568M (2007) Standard Specification for Carbon

and Alloy Steel Externally Threaded Metric
Fasteners
NEMA ICS 2 (2000; Errata 2002; R 2005; Errata 2006)

Standard for Industrial Control and
Systems: Controllers, Contactors, and
Overload Relays Rated Not More than 2000
Volts AC or 750 Volts DC: Part 8 -
Disconnect Devices for Use in Industrial
Control Equipment
NEMA ICS 6 (1993; R 2006) Standard for Industrial

Controls and Systems Enclosures
NEMA MG 1 (2007; Errata 2008) Standard for Motors

and Generators
NEMA ST 1 (1988; R 1997) Standard for Specialty

Transformers (Except General Purpose Type)

Code - 2008 Edition
1.2 DESCRIPTION
Overhead coiling doors to be counterbalanced doors by methods of

manufacturer's standard mechanism with an adjustable-tension, steel helical
torsion spring mounted around a steel shaft and contained in a spring
barrel connected to top of curtain with barrel rings. Use grease-sealed or
self-lubricating bearings for rotating members. Doors to be coiling type,
with interlocking slats, complete with anchoring and door hardware, guides,
hood, and operating mechanisms, and designed for use on openings as
indicated.
1.3.1 Wind Loading
Design and fabricate door assembly to withstand the wind loading pressure
of at least 12.6 pounds per square foot with a maximum deflection of 1/120
of the opening width. Provide test data showing compliance with ASTM E 330.
Sound engineering principles may be used to interpolate or extrapolate test
results to door sizes not specifically tested Complete assembly must meet
or exceed the requirements of ASCE 7-05.
1.3.2 Operational Cycle Life
All portions of the door, hardware and operating mechanism that are subject
to movement, wear, or stress fatigue must be designed to operate through a
minimum number of 25 cycles per day . One complete cycle of door operation
is defined as when the door is in the closed position, moves to the fully
open position, and returns to the closed position.
1.4 SUBMITTALS

SD-02 Shop Drawings
Provide fabrication drawings that show complete assembly with

hardware and framing details for the following items:
Overhead Coiling Doors
Counterbalancing Mechanism
Manual Door Operators
Electric Door Operators
Bottom Bar
Guides
Mounting Brackets
Overhead Drum
Hood
Painting
Submit Installation Drawings in accordance with paragraph

entitled, "Overhead Coiling Door Assemblies," of this section.
SD-03 Product Data
Submit manufacturer's catalog data for the following items listing

all accessories including supports, locks and latches, and weather
stripping.
Hardware
SD-05 Design Data
Submit equipment and performance data for the following items in

accordance with the paragraph entitled, "Performance
Requirements," of this section.
Hardware
Submit Operation and Maintenance Manuals for Overhead Coiling Door

Assemblies , including the following items:
Materials
Devices
Procedures
Manufacture's Brochures
Parts Lists
Cleaning
1.5 OVERHEAD COILING DOOR DETAIL SHOP DRAWINGS
Provide installation drawings for overhead coiling door assemblies which

show elevations of each door type, shape and thickness of materials,
finishes, details of joints and connections, and details of guides and
fittings, rough opening dimensions, location and description of hardware,
anchorage locations, and counterbalancing mechanism and door operator
details. Show locations of replaceable fusible links wiring diagrams for
power, signal and controls. Include a schedule showing the location of
each door with the drawings.
Contractor must submit 6 copies of the Operation and Maintenance Manuals 30

calendar days prior to testing the Overhead Coiling Door Assemblies.
Update and resubmit data for final approval no later than 30 calendar days
prior to contract completion.
Provide operation and maintenance manuals which are consistent with

manufacturer's standard brochures, schematics, printed instructions,
general operating procedures, and safety precautions. Provide test data
that is legible and of good quality.
1.6 WARRANTY, OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
Submit Operation and Maintenance Manuals for Overhead Coiling Door

Assemblies, including the following items:
Materials
Devices
Painting
Procedures
Manufacture's Brochures
Parts Lists
Contractor shall furnish a written guarantee that the helical spring and
counterbalance mechanism are free from defects in material and workmanship
and that they will remain so for not less than two years after completion
and acceptance of the project.
Contractor shall warrant that upon notification by the Government, he shall

immediately make good any defects in material, workmanship, and door
operation within the same time period covered by the guarantee, at no cost
to the Government.
Delivered doors to the jobsite wrapped in a protective covering with the

brands and names clearly marked thereon. Store doors in a dry location
that is adequately ventilated and free from dirt and dust, water, and other
contaminants, and in a manner that permits easy access for inspection and
handling.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
2.1.1 Curtain Materials and Construction
Provide curtain slats which are fabricated from steel sheets conforming to
ASTM A 653/A 653M, Grade A, with the additional requirement of a minimum
yield point of 33,000 psi. Provide sheets which are galvanized in
accordance with ASTM A 653/A 653M and ASTM A 924/A 924M.
Fabricate doors from interlocking cold-rolled slats, with section profiles

as specified, designed to withstand the specified wind loading. Provide
slats which are continuous without splices for the width of the door.
2.1.2 Curtain Bottom Bar
Curtain bottom bars must be pairs of angles from the manufacturer's

standard steel, stainless and aluminum extrusions not less than 2.0 by 2.0
inches by 0.188 inch. Steel extrusions must conform to ASTM A 36/A 36M.
Stainless steel extrusions conforming to ASTM A 666, Type 304. Aluminum
extrusions conforming to ASTM B 221 or(ASTM B 221M). Galvanize angles and
fasteners in accordance with ASTM A 653/A 653M and ASTM A 924/A 924M.
Coat welds and abrasions with paint conforming to ASTM A 780/A 780M.
2.1.3 Locks
Provide end and/or wind locks of cast steel conforming to ASTM A 27/A 27M,
Grade B; galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 653/A 653M, ASTM A 153/A 153M
and ASTM A 924/A 924M and secured at every other curtain slat.
2.1.4 Weather Stripping
Weather-stripping at the door-head and jamb must be 1/8-inch thick sheet

of natural or neoprene rubber with air baffles, secured to the insides of
hoods with galvanized-steel fasteners through continuous galvanized-steel
pressure bars at least 5/8-inch wide and 1/8-inch thick.
Threshold weather-stripping must be 1/8-inch thick sheet natural or

neoprene rubber secured to the bottom bars.
Provide weather-stripping of natural or neoprene rubber conforming to

ASTM D 2000.
2.1.5 Locking Devices
Slide Bolt to engage through slots in tracks for locking by padlock,

located on both left and right jamb sides, operable from coil side.
Locking Device Assembly which includes cylinder lock, spring-loaded dead

bolt, operating handle, cam plate, and adjustable locking bars to engage
through slots in tracks.
2.1.6 Safety Interlock
Equip power-operated doors with safety interlock switch to disengage power

supply when door is locked.
2.1.7 Overhead Drum
Fabricate drums from nominal 0.028-inch thick, hot-dip galvanized steel

sheet with G90 (Z275) zinc coating, complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M.
2.2 HARDWARE
All hardware must conform to ASTM A 153/A 153M, ASTM A 307, ASTM F 568M,
and ASTM A 27/A 27M.
2.2.1 Guides
Fabricate curtain jamb guides from the manufacturer's standard angles or
channels of same material and finish as curtain slats unless otherwise

indicated, with sufficient depth and strength to retain curtain, to allow
curtain to operate smoothly, and to withstand loading. Slot bolt holes for
track adjustment.
2.2.2 Equipment Supports
Fabricate door-operating equipment supports from the manufacturer's

standard steel shapes and plates conforming to ASTM A 36/A 36M, galvanized
in accordance with ASTM A 653/A 653M and ASTM A 924/A 924M. Size the
shapes and plates in accordance with the industry standards for the size,
weight, and type of door installation..
2.3 COUNTERBALANCING MECHANISM
Counterbalance doors by means of manufacturer's standard mechanism with an

adjustable-tension, steel helical torsion spring mounted around a steel
shaft and contained in a spring barrel connected to top of curtain with
barrel rings. Use grease-sealed or self-lubricating bearings for rotating
members.
2.3.1 Brackets
Provide the manufacturer's standard mounting brackets of either cast iron

or cold-rolled steel with one located at each end of the counterbalance
barrel conforming to ASTM A 48/A 48M.
2.3.2 Counterbalance Barrels
Fabricate spring barrel of manufacturer's standard hot-formed,

structural-quality, welded or seamless carbon-steel pipe, conforming to
ASTM A 53/A 53M, of sufficient diameter and wall thickness to support
rolled-up curtain without distortion of slats and to limit barrel
deflection to not more than 0.03 inch per foot of span under full load.
2.3.3 Spring Balance
One or more oil-tempered, heat-treated steel helical torsion springs

installed within the barrel capable of producing sufficient torque to
assure easy operation of the door curtain. Provide and size springs to
counterbalance weight of curtain, with uniform adjustment accessible from
outside barrel. Secure ends of springs to barrel and shaft with cast-steel
barrel plugs.
2.3.4 Torsion Rod for Counter Balance
Fabricate rod from the manufacturer's standard cold-rolled steel, sized to

hold fixed spring ends and carry torsional load.
2.4 MANUAL DOOR OPERATORS
2.4.1 Manual Chain-Hoist Door Operators
Provide door operators which consist of an endless steel hand chain,

chain-pocket wheel, guard, and a geared reduction unit with a maximum 25 lbf
required pull for operation must not exceed 35 pounds.
Provide chain hoists to have a self-locking mechanism allowing the curtain
to be stopped at any point in its upward or downward travel and to remain

in that position until moved to the fully open or closed position. Provide
hand chains of cadmium-plated alloy steel conforming to ASME B29.400.
Yield point of the chain must be at least three times the required
hand-chain pull.
Provide chain sprocket wheels of cast iron conforming to ASTM A 48/A 48M.
2.5 ELECTRIC DOOR OPERATORS
Provide electrical wiring and door operating controls conforming to the

applicable requirements of NFPA 70.
Electric door-operator assemblies must be the sizes and capacities

recommended and provided by the door manufacturer for specified doors.
Assemblies must be complete with electric motors and factory-prewired motor
controls, starter, gear reduction units, solenoid-operated brakes, clutch,
remote-control stations, manual or automatic control devices, and
accessories as required for proper operation of the doors.
Design the operators so that motors may be removed without disturbing the
limit-switch adjustment and affecting the emergency auxiliary operators.
Provide a manual operator of crank-gear or chain-gear mechanisms with a

release clutch to permit manual operation of doors in case of power
failure. Arrange the emergency manual operator so that it may be put into
and out of operation from floor level, and its use will not affect the
adjustment of the limit switches. Provide an electrical or mechanical
device which will automatically disconnect the motor from the operating
mechanism when the emergency manual operating mechanism is engaged.
2.5.1 Door-Operator Types
Provide an operator which is mounted to the inside front wall on the left
or right side of door and connected to door drive shaft with drive chain
and sprockets. Side room is required for this type of mounting. Wall
mounted operator can also be mounted above or below shaft; if above shaft,
headroom is required.
2.5.2 Electric Motors
Provide motors which are the high-starting-torque, reversible,

constant-duty electrical type with overload protection of sufficient torque
and horsepower to move the door in either direction from any position and
produce a door-travel speed of not less than 8 nor more than 12 inches per
second without exceeding thehorsepower rating.
Provide motors which conform to NEMA MG 1 designation, temperature rating,

service factor, enclosure type, and efficiency to the requirements
specified.
2.5.3 Motor Bearings
Bearings must be bronze-sleeve or heavy-duty ball or roller antifriction

type with full provisions for the type of thrust imposed by the specific
duty load.
Pre-lubricate and factory seal bearings in motors less than 1/2 horsepower.
Equip motors coupled to worm-gear reduction units with either ball or

roller bearings.
Equip bearings in motors 1/2 horsepower or larger with lubrication service

fittings. Fit lubrication fittings with color-coded plastic or metal dust
caps.
In any motor, bearings that are lubricated at the factory for extended duty
periods do not need to be lubricated for a given number of operating
hours. Display this information on an appropriate tag or label on the
motor with instructions for lubrication cycle maintenance.
2.5.4 Motor Starters, Controls, and Enclosures
Each door motor must have a factory-wired, unfused, disconnect switch; a

reversing, across-the-line magnetic starter with thermal overload
protection; 120-volt operating coils with a control transformer limit
switch; and a safety interlock assembled in a NEMA ICS 6 type enclosure as
specified herein. Control equipment must conform to NEMA ICS 2.
Provide adjustable switches, electrically interlocked with the motor

controls and set to stop the door automatically at the fully open and fully
closed position.
2.5.5 Control Enclosures
Provide control enclosures that conform to NEMA ICS 6 for oil-tight and
dust-tight NEMA Type 13.
2.5.6 Transformer
Provide starters with 230/460 to 115 volt control transformers with one
secondary fuse when it is required to reduce the voltage on control
circuits to 120 volts or less. Provide transformer that conforms to
NEMA ST 1.
2.5.7 Safety-Edge Device
Provide each door with a pneumatic safety device extending the full width
of the door and located within a U-section neoprene or rubber astragal
mounted on the bottom rail of the bottom door section. Device must
immediately stop and reverse the door upon contact with an obstruction in
the door opening during downward travel and cause the door to return to
full-open position. Safety device is not a substitute for a limit switch.
Connect safety device to the control circuit through a retracting safety

cord and reel.
2.5.8 Remote-Control Stations
Provide interior remote control stations which are full-guarded,

momentary-contact three-button, heavy-duty, surface-mounted NEMA ICS 6 type
enclosures as specified. Mark buttons "OPEN," "CLOSE," and "STOP." The
"CLOSE" button must be the type requiring a constant pressure to maintain
the closing motion of the door. When the door is in motion and the "STOP"
button is pressed, the door must stop instantly and remain in the stopped
position; from the stopped position, the door may then be operated in
either direction.
Provide exterior control stations which are full-guarded, momentary-contact

three-button standard-duty, surface-mounted, weatherproof type, NEMA ICS 6,
Type 4 enclosures, key-operated, with the same operating functions as
specified herein for interior remote-control stations.
2.5.9 Speed-Reduction Units
Provide speed-reduction units consisting of hardened-steel worm and bronze

worm gear assemblies running in oil or grease and encased in a sealed
casing, coupled to the motor through a flexible coupling. Drive shafts
must rotate on ball- or roller-bearing assemblies that are integral with
the unit.
Provide minimum ratings of speed reduction units which are in accordance

with AGMA provisions for class of service.
Ground worm gears to provide accurate thread form; machine teeth for all
other types of gearing. Surface harden all gears.
Provide bearings which are the antifriction type equipped with oil seals.
2.5.10 Chain Drives
Provide roller chains that are power-transmission series steel roller type
conforming to ASME B29.400, with a minimum safety factor of 10 times the
design load.
Roller-chain side bars, rollers, pins, and bushings must be heat-treated or

otherwise hardened.
Provide chain sprockets that are high-carbon steel with machine-cut

hardened teeth, finished bore and keyseat, and hollow-head setscrews.
2.5.11 Brakes
Provide brakes which are 360-degree shoe brakes or shoe and drum brakes,
solenoid-operated and electrically interlocked to the control circuit to
set automatically when power is interrupted.
2.5.12 Clutches
Clutches must be the 4-inch diameter, multiple face, externally adjustable

friction type or adjustable centrifugal type.
2.6 SURFACE FINISHING
Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal
Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
Noticeable variations in the same metal component are not acceptable.
Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are
within the range of approved samples and are assembled or installed to
minimize contrast.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
Install overhead coiling door assembly, anchors and inserts for guides,
brackets, motors, switches, hardware, and other accessories in accordance
with approved detail drawings and manufacturer's written instructions.
Upon completion of installation, doors must be free from all distortion.
Install overhead coiling doors, motors, hoods, and operators at the

mounting locations as indicated for each door in the contract documents and
as required by the manufacturer.
Install overhead coiling doors, switches, and controls along accessible

routes in compliance with regulatory requirements for accessibility and as
required by the manufacturer.
3.2 FIELD PAINTED FINISH
Steel doors and frames which are to be field painted must accordance with
Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS and manufacturer's written
instructions. Protect weather stripping from paint. Finishes must be free
of scratches or other blemishes.
After installation, adjust hardware and moving parts. Lubricate bearings

and sliding parts as recommended by manufacturer to provide smooth
operating functions for ease movement, free of warping, twisting, or
distortion of the door assembly.
Adjust seals to provide weather-tight fit around entire perimeter.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup

service and checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.
Test the door opening and closing operation when activated by controls or
alarm-connected fire-release system. Adjust controls and safeties. Replace
damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. Reset door-closing
mechanism after successful test.
Test and make final adjustment of new doors at no additional cost to the
Government.
3.3.1 Maintenance and Adjustment
Not more than 90 calendar days after completion and acceptance of the
project, the Contractor must examine, lubricate, test, and re-adjust doors
as required for proper operation.
3.3.2 CLEANING
Clean steel doors in accordance with manufacturer's approved instructions.
SECTION 08 34 59
VAULT DOORS AND DAY GATES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

FS AA-D-600 (Rev C, Am 1) Door, Vault, Security
The vault door unit shall be a steel security-vault type door with frame,
day gate, and ramp type threshold, which is a standard product of a
manufacturer specializing in this type of fabrication.
1.3 SUBMITTALS

that reviews the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Vault door Unit; G, AE

Day gate; G, AE
Drawings showing head, jamb, and sill sections, and elevations

of the doors and gate.
SD-03 Product Data
Vault Door and Frame
Manufacturer's catalog data including catalog cuts and brochures

showing that the proposed vault door unit conforms with the
requirements in FS AA-D-600, and has been tested and approved by
the General Services Administration (GSA).
SD-07 Certificates
Vault Door and Frame; G, AE
Certification stating that vault-door units that do not bear the

GSA label are constructed to Class 5 standards.
Installation
Printed instructions and drawings provided by the manufacturer.
Deliver door and frame assemblies to the jobsite in a protective covering

with the brand and name clearly marked thereon. Inspect materials
delivered to the jobsite for damage, and unload them with a minimum of
handling. Store in a dry location with adequate ventilation, free from
dust, water, and other contaminants, and allowing easy access for
inspection and handling. Store door assemblies off the floor on
nonabsorptive strips or wood platforms. Prevent damage to doors and frames
during handling. Replace damaged items that cannot be restored to like-new
condition.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 VAULT DOOR AND FRAME
Design and construction of the door and frame assembly shall conform to
FS AA-D-600. Provide a door which is Class 5, Type IIL - left opening
swing without optical device , Style K - key change combination lock,
Design S - single lock .
2.2 DAY GATE
Provide a day gate which is the manufacturer's standard product designed

for use with the vault door furnished, and that provides access control and
visual security and material equipment weapons issue. The gate shall: be
hinged on the same side as the vault door, swing into the vault, and have a
locking device operable from outside by key and from inside by knob or
handle. Gate shall include an issue port hatch and 10 gage thick steel
shelf. The issue port shall be a framed 8 by 12 inch opening with a minimum
12 gage thick steel protective door (hatch cover) which is hinged and
lockable from the interior side. Weld the issue port frame to the day
gate. The shelf shall be 12 inches deep by width of day gate. Provide the
manufacturer's standard finish. The day gate shall not interfere with the
operation of vault door inner escape device.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
Install the vault door assembly in strict compliance with the printed
instructions and drawings provided by the manufacturer. Install the day
gate in a manner that does not interfere with operation of the release
handle on the inside of the vault door. After installation, adjust the
door, the locking mechanism, and the inner escape device for proper
operation.
SECTION 08 51 13
ALUMINUM WINDOWS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

AA DAF-45 (2003; Reaffirmed 2009) Designation System

for Aluminum Finishes
AAMA 1302.5 (1976) Voluntary Specifications for

Forced-Entry Resistant Aluminum Prime
Windows
AAMA 1503 (2009) Voluntary Test Method for Thermal

Transmittance and Condensation Resistance
of Windows, Doors and Glazed Wall Sections
AAMA 611 (1998; R 2004) Voluntary Specification for

Anodized Architectural Aluminum
AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 (2008; Update 1 2008; Update 2 2008;

Update 3 2009) North American Fenestration
Standard/Specification for Windows, Doors,
and Skylights
ASTM F 1642 (2004) Standard Test Method for Glazing

and Glazing Systems Subject to Airblast
Loadings
GREEN SEAL (GS)
GS-36 (2000) Commercial Adhesives
INTERNATIONAL WINDOW CLEANING ASSOCIATION (IWCA)
IWCA I-14.1 (2001) Window Cleaning Safety Standard
NATIONAL FENESTRATION RATING COUNCIL (NFRC)
NFRC 100 (2004) Procedure for Determining

Fenestration Product U-Factors
NFRC 200 (2004) Procedure for Determining

Fenestration Product Solar Heat Gain
Coefficient and Visible Transmittance at

Normal Incidence
SCAQMD Rule 1168 (1989; R 2005) Adhesive and Sealant

Applications
Energy Star (1992; R 2006) Energy Star Energy

Efficiency Labeling System

(LEED-NC)
1.2 CERTIFICATION
Each prime window unit must bear the AAMA Label warranting that the product
complies with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440. Certified test reports
attesting that the prime window units meet the requirements of
AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440, including test size, will be acceptable in
lieu of product labeling.
1.3 SUBMITTALS

SD-02 Shop Drawings
Windows; G, AO
SD-03 Product Data
Windows; G, AO
Hardware; G, AO
Fasteners; G, AO; (LEED)
Window performance; G, AO
Thermal-Barrier Windows; G, AO
Mullions; G, AO
Window Cleaners' Bolts; G, AO
Submit documentation indicating percentage of post-industrial
and post-consumer recycled content per unit of product. Indicate

relative dollar value of recycled content products to total dollar
value of products included in project.
Weatherstripping; G, AO
Accessories; G, AO
Adhesives; (LEED)
Submit manufacturer's product data, indicating VOC content.
Thermal performance
Submit documentation for Energy Star qualifications.
Documentation indicating distance between manufacturing facility

and the project site. Indicate distance of raw material origin
from the project site. Indicate relative dollar value of
local/regional materials to total dollar value of products
included in project.
SD-04 Samples
Finish Sample
Window Sample
SD-05 Design Data
Structural calculations for deflection; G, AE
Design Analysis; G, AE
Submit design analysis with calculations showing that the design

of each different size and type of aluminum window unit and its
anchorage to the structure meets the minimum antiterrorism
standards required by UFC 4-010-01 "DoD Minimum Antiterrorism
Standards for Buildings" and paragraph "Minimum Antiterrorism
Performance" below, unless conformance is demonstrated by Standard
Airblast Test results. Calculations verifying the structural
performance of each window proposed for use, under the given
loads, shall be prepared and signed by a registered Professional
Engineer. The window components and anchorage devices to the
structure, as determined by the design analysis, shall be
reflected in the shop drawings.
SD-06 Test Reports
Minimum condensation resistance factor
Resistance to forced entry
Standard Airblast Test; G, AE
For Minimum Antiterrorism windows, in lieu of a Design Analysis,

results of airblast testing, whether by arena test or shocktube,
shall be included in a test report, providing information in
accordance with ASTM F 1642, as prepared by the independent
testing agency performing the test. The test results shall
demonstrate the ability of each window proposed for use to
withstand the airblast loading parameters and achieve the hazard
level rating specified in paragraph "Standard Airblast Test
Method".
Windows, Data Package 1; G, AO
Submit in accordance with Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND

MAINTENANCE DATA.
When not labeled, identify types in Operation and Maintenance

Manual.
Provide drawings that indicate elevations of windows, full-size sections,

thickness and gages of metal, fastenings, proposed method of anchoring,
size and spacing of anchors, details of construction, method of glazing,
details of operating hardware, mullion details, method and materials for
weatherstripping, material and method of attaching subframes, stools, sills,
trim, installation details, and other related items.
1.4.2 Sample Requirements
1.4.2.1 Finish Sample Requirements
Submit color chart of standard factory color coatings when factory-finish

color coating is to be provided.
1.4.2.2 Window Sample Requirements
Submit one full-size corner of each window type proposed for use. Where
screens or weatherstripping is required, fit sample with such items that
are to be used.
1.4.3 Design Data Requirements
Submit calculations to substantiate compliance with deflection requirements

and Minimum Antiterrorism Performance criteria. A registered Professional
Engineer must provide calculations.
Submit design analysis with calculations showing that the design of each
different size and type of aluminum window unit and its anchorage to the
structure meets the requirements of paragraph "Minimum Antiterrorism
Performance Criteria". Calculations verifying the structural performance

of each window proposed for use, under the given loads, must be prepared
and signed by a registered professional engineer. Reflect the window
components and anchorage devices to the structure, as determined by the
design analysis, in the shop drawings.
1.4.4 Test Report Requirements
Submit test reports for each type of window attesting that identical
windows have been tested and meet the requirements specified herein for
conformance to AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 including test size, and
minimum condensation resistance factor (CRF), and resistance to forced entry,
and, for Minimum Antiterrorism windows, in lieu of a Design Analysis,
results of a Standard Airblast Test.
Deliver windows to project site in an undamaged condition. Use care in

handling and hoisting windows during transportation and at the jobsite.
Store windows and components out of contact with the ground, under a
weathertight covering, so as to prevent bending, warping, or otherwise
damaging the windows. Repair damaged windows to an "as new" condition as
approved. If windows can not be repaired, provide a new unit.
1.6 PROTECTION
Protect finished surfaces during shipping and handling using the

manufacturer's standard method. Do not apply coatings or lacquers to
surfaces to which calking and glazing compounds must adhere.

material requirements. Window materials may be locally available.
1.8 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
Take field measurements prior to preparation of the drawings and

fabrication.
1.9.1 Minimum Antiterrorism Performance Criteria
Windows must meet the minimum antiterrorism performance criteria as

specified in the paragraphs below.
1.9.1.1 Glazing
Glazing must have laminated glass as specified in Section 08 81 00 GLAZING.
1.9.1.2 Aluminum Window Frames
Restrict aluminum framing members deflections of edges of glazing they

support to L/160 under an equivalent 3-second duration loading of 100
pounds per square foot (psf), where L denotes the length of the glazing
supported edge. (L is to be based on edge length of glazing in frame and
not on the distance between anchors that fasten frame to the structure.)
The glazing frame bite for the window frames must be adequate to accept the
width of structural silicone sealant or glazing tape as specified in
paragraph "Provisions for Glazing" below.
1.9.1.3 Window Frame Anchors
Fasten window frames to the supporting structure with anchors designed to

resist forces generated by a 3-second duration load of 200 pounds per
square foot (psf) acting on the entire window unit.
1.9.2 Wind Loading Design Pressure
Design window components, including mullions, hardware, and anchors, to

withstand a wind-loading design pressure of at least 25 pounds per square
foot (psf).
1.9.3 Tests
Test windows proposed for use in accordance with

AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 for the particular type and quality window
specified.
Perform tests by a nationally recognized independent testing laboratory

equipped and capable of performing the required tests. Submit the results
of the tests as certified laboratory reports required herein.
Minimum design load for a uniform-load structural test must be 50 psf.
1.10 DRAWINGS
Submit the Fabrication Drawings for aluminum window units showing complete
window assembly including hardware, weatherstripping, and subframe assembly
details.
1.11 WINDOW PERFORMANCE
Aluminum windows must meet the following performance requirements. Perform

testing requirements by an independent testing laboratory or agency.
Structural test pressures on window units must be for positive load

(inward) and negative load (outward). After testing, there will be no
glass breakage, permanent damage to fasteners, hardware parts, support arms
or actuating mechanisms or any other damage which could cause window to be
inoperable. There must be no permanent deformation of any main frame, sash
or ventilator member in excess of the requirements established by
AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 for the window types and classification
specified in this section.
1.11.2 Minimum Antiterrorism Performance
Windows shall meet the minimum antiterrorism performance criteria of UFC

4-010-01, as specified in the paragraphs below. Conformance to the
performance requirements shall be validated by one of the following methods.
1.11.2.1 Computational Design Analysis Method
Window frames, mullions, and sashes shall be designed to the criteria

listed herein. Computational design analysis shall include calculations
verifying the structural performance of each window proposed for use, under
the given static equivalent loads.
Aluminum window framing members shall restrict deflections of edges of

glazing they support to L/160 under an equivalent 3-second duration loading
of 100 pounds per square foot (psf), where L denotes the length of the
glazing supported edge. (L is to be based on edge length of glazing in
frame and not on the distance between anchors that fasten frame to the
structure.)
The glazing frame bite for the window frames shall be adequate to accept
the width of structural silicone sealant or glazing tape as specified in
paragraph "Provisions for Glazing" below.
Window frames shall be anchored to the supporting structure with anchors

designed to resist forces generated by a 3-second duration load of 200
pounds per square foot (psf) acting on the entire window unit.
1.11.2.2 Alternate Dynamic Design Analysis Method
As an alternative to the static equivalent load design approach described

above, window framing members, anchors, and glazing may be designed using a
dynamic analysis to prove the window system will provide performance
equivalent to or better than the hazard rating associated with the
applicable level of protection for the project.
1.11.2.3 Standard Airblast Test Method
As an alternative to either of the Computational Design Analysis Methods,

each Minimum Antiterrorism window type shall be tested for evaluation of
hazards generated from airblast loading in accordance with ASTM F 1642 by
an independent testing agency regularly engaged in blast testing. For
proposed window systems that are of the same type as the tested system but
of different size, the test results may be accepted provided the proposed
window size is within the range from 25 percent smaller to 10 percent
larger in area, than the tested window. Proposed windows of a size outside
this range shall require testing to evaluate their hazard rating. Testing
my be by shocktube or arena test. The test shall be performed on the
entire proposed window system, which shall include, but not be limited to,
the glazing, its framing system, operating devices, and all anchorage
devices. Anchorage of the window frame or subframe shall replicate the
method of installation to be used for the project. The minimum airblast
loading parameters for the test shall be as follows: Peak positive
pressure of 5.8 psi 40 kPa and positive phase impulse of 41.1 psi-msec 285
kPa-msec. The hazard rating for the proposed window systems, as determined
by the rating criteria of ASTM F 1642, shall not exceed the "Very Low
Hazard" rating (i.e. the "No Break", "No Hazard", "Minimal Hazard" and
"Very Low Hazard" ratings are acceptable. "Low Hazard" and "High Hazard"
ratings are unacceptable). Results of window systems previously tested by
test protocols other than ASTM F 1642 may be accepted provided the required
loading, hazard level rating, and size limitations stated herein are met.
Air infiltration shall not exceed the amount established by

AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 for each window type.
1.11.4 Water Penetration
Water penetration shall not exceed the amount established by

AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 for each window type.
1.11.5 Thermal Performance
Thermal transmittance for thermally broken aluminum windows with insulating

glass shall not exceed a U-factor of 0.45 Btu/hr-ft2-F determined according
to NFRC 100, and a solar heat gain coefficient (SHGC) of 0.25 Btu/hr-ft2-F
determined according to NFRC 200. Provide window units that comply with
the U.S. Department of Energy, Energy Star Window Program for the Southern
Climate Zone.
1.11.6 Sound Attenuation
The window unit shall have a minimum STC of 34 with the window glazed with
1/2 inch air space between two pieces of 1/4 inch thick glass when tested
in accordance with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 acoustical performance
(optional).
1.12 QUALIFICATION
Window manufacturer shall specialize in designing and manufacturing the

type of aluminum windows specified in this section, and have a minimum of 5
years of documented successful experience. Manufacturer must have the
facilities capable of meeting contract requirements, single-source
responsibility and warranty.
1.13 WARRANTY
Provide Manufacturer's standard performance guarantees or warranties that

extend beyond a 1 year period.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 WINDOWS
Provide prime windows that comply with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 and

the requirements specified herein. In addition to compliance with
AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/Ishallmust not deflect to the extent that deflection
perpendicular to the glass light exceeds L/175 of the glass edge length
when subjected to uniform loads at specified design pressures. Provide
Structural calculations for deflection to substantiate compliance with
deflection requirements. Provide windows of types, performance classes,
performance grades, combinations, and sizes indicated or specified. See
Section 01 33 29 LEED(tm) DOCUMENTATION for cumulative total recycled
content requirements. Window materials may contain post-consumer or
post-industrial recycled content. Design windows to accommodate hardware,
glass, weatherstripping, screens, and accessories to be furnished. Each
window must be a complete factory assembled unit with or without glass
installed. Dimensions shown are minimum. Provide windows with insulating
glass and thermal break necessary to achieve a minimum Condensation
Resistance Factor (CRF) of 58 when tested in accordance with AAMA 1503.
Glazed systems (including frames and glass) will be Energy Star labeled
products as appropriate to climate zone and as applicable to window type,
with a whole-window Solar Heat Gain Coefficient (SHGC) maximum of 0.40
determined according to NFRC 200 procedures. Glazed systems must have a
U-factor maximum of 0.35 Btu per square foot times hr times degree F in
accordance with NFRC 100.
2.1.1 Fixed Windows (F)
Type F-R15- (Optional Performance Grade).
2.1.2 Forced Entry Resistant Windows
In addition to meeting the requirements of AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440,

windows designated for resistance to forced entry shall conform to the
requirements of AAMA 1302.5.
2.1.3 Glass and Glazing
Materials are specified in Section 08 81 00 GLAZING.
2.1.4 Calking and Sealing
Are specified in Section 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS.
AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440.
2.2 FABRICATION
Fabrication of window units shallust comply with

2.2.1 Provisions for Glazing
Design windows and rabbets suitable for glass thickness shown or specified.
For minimum antiterrorism windows, attach glazing to its supporting frame
using structural silicone sealant or adhesive glazing tape. The width of
the structural silicone sealant bead must be at least equal to, but not
larger than two times the thickness designation of the glass to which it
adheres. The width of the adhesive glazing tape will be at least equal to
two times, but not more than four times the thickness designation of the
glass to which it adheres.Design sash for inside glazing and for securing
glass with metal beads, glazing clips, glazing channels, or glazing compound
as applicable.
Provide for all windows to ensure a weather-tight seal meeting the

infiltration requirements specified in AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440.
Provide easily replaceable factory-applied weatherstripping. Use molded
vinyl, molded or molded-expanded neoprene or molded or expanded Ethylene
Propylene Diene Terpolymer (EPDM) compression-type weatherstripping for
compression contact surfaces. Use treated woven pile or wool, or
polypropylene or nylon pile bonded to nylon fabric and metal or plastic
backing strip weatherstripping for sliding surfaces. Do no use neoprene or
polyvinylchloride weatherstripping where they will be exposed to direct
sunlight.
2.2.3 Fasteners
Fabricated from 100 percent re-melted steel. Use fasteners as standard

with the window manufacturer for windows, trim, and accessories.
Self-tapping sheet-metal screws are not acceptable for material more than
1/16 inch thick.
2.2.4 Adhesives
Comply with applicable regulations regarding toxic and hazardous materials,

GS-36, SCAQMD Rule 1168, and as specified in Section 07 92 00 JOINT
SEALANTS.
2.2.5 Drips and Weep Holes
Provide continuous drips over heads of top ventilators. Where fixed

windows adjoin ventilators, drips must be continuous across tops of fixed
windows. Provide drips and weep holes as required to return water to the
outside.
2.2.6 Combination Windows
Windows used in combination must be the same class and grade and will be
factory assembled. Where factory assembly of individual windows into
larger units is limited by transportation considerations, prefabricate,
match mark, transport, and field assemble.
2.2.7 Mullions and Transom Bars
Provide mullions between multiple window units which meet the design
pressure of 15 psf. Provide mullions with a thermal break. Secure
mullions and transom bars to adjoining construction and window units in
such a manner as to permit expansion and contraction and to form a
weathertight joint. Provide mullion covers on the interior and exterior to
completely close exposed joints and recesses between window units and to
present a neat appearance.
2.2.8 Accessories
Provide windows complete with necessary hardware, fastenings, clips, fins,

anchors, glazing beads, and other appurtenances necessary for complete
installation and proper operation. Furnish extruded aluminum subframe
receptors and subsill with each window unit.
2.2.8.1 Fasteners
Provide concealed anchors of the type recommended by the window

manufacturer for the specific type of construction. Anchors and fasteners
shall be compatible with the window and the adjoining construction. Provide
a minimum of three anchors for each jamb located approximately 6 inches
from each end and at midpoint.
2.2.8.2 Window Anchors
Anchoring devices for installing windows shall be made of aluminum,

cadmium-plated steel, stainless steel, or zinc-plated steel conforming to
2.2.9 Finishes
Exposed aluminum surfaces shall be factory finished with an anodic coating.

Color shall be medium bronze. All windows for each building shall have the
same finish.

to AA DAF-45 and AAMA 611. Finish must be:
a. Architectural Class II ( 0.4 mil to 0.7 mil), designation AA-M10-C22-

A32, integral color anodized.
2.3 THERMAL-BARRIER WINDOWS
Provide thermal-barrier windows, complete with accessories and fittings,

where indicated.
Specify material and construction except as follows:
a. Aluminum alloy must be 6063-T6.
b. Frame construction, including operable sash, shall be factory-assembled

and factory-sealed inner and outer aluminum completely separated from
metal-to-metal contact. Join assembly by a continuous, concealed, low
conductance divider housed in an interlocking extrusion of the inner
frame. Metal fasteners, straps, or anchors shall not bridge the
connection between the inner and outer frame.
c. Operating hardware for each sash must consist of spring-loaded nylon

cushion blocks and pin locks designed to lock in predetermined
locations.
d. Sash shall be completely separated from metal-to-metal contact by means

of woven-pile weatherstripping, plastic, or elastomeric separation
members.
e. Operating and storm sash shall be factory-glazed with the type of glass
indicated and of the quality specified in Section 08 81 00 GLAZING.
2.4 MULLIONS
Provide mullions between multiple-window units where indicated.
Mullions and mullion covers shall be the profile indicated, reinforced as

required for the specified wind loading, and securely anchored to the
adjoining construction. Mullion extrusion shall include serrations or
pockets to receive weatherstripping, sealant, or tape at the point of
contact with each window flange.
Mullion assembly shall include aluminum window clamps or brackets screwed

or bolted to the mullion and the mullion cover.
Mullion cover shall be screw-fastened to the mullion unless otherwise

indicated.
Mullion reinforcing members shall be fabricated of the materials specified

in AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 and meet the specified design loading.
2.5 WINDOW CLEANERS' BOLTS
Provide window cleaners' bolts for all windows 7 feet or higher above
finished grade, except windows located so they may be removed for cleaning
or cleaned from the ground or from a lower roof level without the use of an
extension ladder. Provide two bolts for each single window unit and each
fixed glass unit and must be located 44 inches above the window sill.
Window cleaners' bolts must be double-head type, AISI Series 300

corrosion-resistant steel, size and design complying with IWCA I-14.1.
Contact side of the bolts will be ground to fit flat against window jambs.
Bolts may be factory- or field-attached before windows are set. Reinforce
backs of frames to receive bolts with 1/4- by 6-inch corrosion-resistant
steel or aluminum plates bolted or welded to the frames at the factory.
Special wall anchors must be provided on frames at the point of bolt
attachment.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 SCHEDULE
Some metric measurements in this section are based on mathematical

conversion of inch-pound measurements, and not on metric measurement
commonly agreed to by the manufacturers or other parties. The inch-pound
and metric measurements are as follows:
PRODUCTS INCH-POUND METRIC
Metal Casing 0.0625 inch 1.59 mm
Aluminum Tube 0.0625 inch 1.59 mm

(Diameter) 1 inch 25 mm
3.2 INSTALLATION
3.2.1 Method of Installation
Install in accordance with the window manufacturer's printed instructions

and details. Build in windows as the work progresses or install without
forcing into prepared window openings. Set windows at proper elevation,
location, and reveal; plumb, square, level, and in alignment; and brace,
strut, and stay properly to prevent distortion and misalignment. Protect
against accumulation of dirt and building materials. Bed screws or bolts
in sill members, joints at mullions, contacts of windows with sills,
built-in fins, and subframes in mastic sealant of a type recommended by the
window manufacturer. Install and caulk windows in a manner that will
prevent entrance of water and wind.
Where aluminum surfaces are in contact with, or fastened to masonry,

concrete, wood, or dissimilar metals, except stainless steel or zinc,
protect the aluminum surface from dissimilar materials as recommended in
the Appendix to AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440. Do not coat surfaces in
contact with sealants after installation with any type of protective
material.
3.2.3 Anchors and Fastenings
Make provision for securing units to each other, to masonry, and to other
adjoining construction. Windows installed in masonry walls must have head
and jamb members designed to recess into masonry wall not less than 7/16
inch.
3.2.4 Adjustments After Installation
After installation of windows and completion of glazing and field painting,

adjust all ventilators and hardware to operate smoothly and to provide
weathertight sealing when ventilators are closed and locked. Lubricate
hardware and operating parts as necessary. Verify that products are
properly installed, connected, and adjusted.
3.3 CLEANING
Clean interior and exterior surfaces of window units of mortar, plaster,

paint spattering spots, and other foreign matter to present a neat
appearance, to prevent fouling of weathering surfaces and
weather-stripping, and to prevent interference with the operation of
hardware. Replace all stained, discolored, or abraded windows that cannot
be restored to their original condition with new windows.
Separate corrugated cardboard and protective materials in accordance with

the Waste Management Plan and place in designated areas for reuse or
recycling. Place materials defined as hazardous or toxic waste in
designated containers. Close and seal tightly all partly used sealant
containers and store protected in well ventilated fire-safe area at
moderate temperature. Place used sealant tubes and containers in areas
designated for hazardous materials.
SECTION 08 62 23
BID OPTION - TUBULAR DAYLIGHTING DEVICES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES


Sheet, Aluminum-Coated, by the Hot-Dip
Process

the Hot-Dip Process
ASTM D 1003 (2007e1) Haze and Luminous Transmittance

of Transparent Plastics
ASTM D 635 (2010) Standard Test Method for Rate of

Burning and/or Extent and Time of Burning
of Self-Supporting Plastics in a
Horizontal Position
ASTM E 108 (2010a) Fire Tests of Roof Coverings

ASTM E 308 (2008) Computing the Colors of Objects by

Using the CIE System
ASTM E 547 (2000; R 2009) Standard Test Method for

Water Penetration of Exterior Windows,
Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by
Cyclic Static Air Pressure Difference
ASTM E 84 (2010) Standard Test Method for Surface

Materials
Furnish and install commercially available tubular daylighting device,

consisting of roof dome, reflective tube, and diffuser assembly which
satisfy all requirements contained in this section and have been verified
by load testing and independent design analyses (if required) to meet
specified design requirements. Provide environmentally preferable products

and work practices, applicable to daylighting devices, considering raw
materials acquisition, production, manufacturing, packaging, distribution,
reuse, operation, maintenance, and/or disposal of the products or services
used in the daylighting devices. The daylighting system shall be
UV-stabilized, shatter proof and energy efficient. The plastics used in
the manufacture of the daylighting devices shall be light transmitting
plastics for daylighting applications.
1.3 SUBMITTALS

SD-02 Shop Drawings
Shop Drawings; G, AE.

Submit shop drawings showing layout, profiles and product
components, including anchorage, flashings and accessories.
SD-03 Product Data. Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be

used, including:
a. Preparation instructions and recommendations.
b. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
c. Installation methods.
d. Tubelights
e. Warranty
SD-04 Samples
Tubelight; G, AE Cut section through roof showing roof/tubelight

attachment and flashing.
SD-06 Test Reports
Test Reports; G, AE
SD-07 Certificates
Tubelights; G, AO: Independent testing agency or evaluation

service reports verifying compliance with specified performance
requirements
Qualifications
a. Provide documentation of Qualifications for the following: The

manufacturer shall be a company specializing in the manufacture of the
specified products with a minimum of 15 years documented experience.
The installer shall have documented experience of 5 years minimum

performing the work specified.
b. Before fabrication, provide a full service mock-up of one tubelight unit

complete with all components and AAMA certification label for
structural purposes and NFRC temporary and Permanent Label for
certification of thermal performance rating for review of tubelight
construction and quality of hardware operation.
System modules shall be factory assembled to the greatest extent possible.

All tubelight shall have conspicuous decals affixed warning individuals
against sitting or stepping on the units. Deliver unit tubelight in
manufacturer's original containers, dry, undamaged, with seals and labels
intact. All products shall be delivered, stored and protected in
accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
1.6 WARRANTY
Provide to the Government the manufacturer's complete warranty for

materials, workmanship, and installation. The warranty shall be for 10
years from the time of project completion and shall no be prorated. The
warranty shall guarantee, but shall not be limited to, the following:
a. Light transmission and color of the panels shall not change after
exposure to heat of 300 degrees F for 25 minutes .
b. There is no system degradation affecting appearance, performance,

weatherability or structural integrity of the parts or the completed
system.
c. Change in light transmission of no more than 6 percent in accordance

with ASTM D 1003, and in color (yellowing index) no more than 10 points
in comparison to the original specified value over a 10 year period.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 TUBELIGHT SYSTEM
Tubelight system componnents shall be products of one manufacturer. Where

a Class A, B or C roof is part of the project, a listing certificate for
roof covering systems category shall be provided certifying that the
product complies with the safety standards of ASTM E 108 and the
International Building Code. Tubelight diamenter shall be 21-inches.
2.2 TUBELIGHT DEVICES
2.2.1 Tubelight Devices General
Transparent roof-mounted skylight dome and self-flashing curb, reflective

tube, and ceiling level diffuser assembly, transferring sunlight to
interior spaces; complying with ICBO/ICC AC-16.
2.2.2 Tubelight
Open Ceiling, 21-inch diameter Daylighting System:
a. Roof Dome Assembly: Transparent, UV and impact resistant dome with

flashing base supporting dome and top of tube.
1. Outer Dome Glazing: Type DA, 0.125-inches minimum thickness

injection molded acrylic classified as CC2 material; UV inhibited,
impact modified acrylic blend.
2. Inner Dome Glazing: Type DPI, 0.115-inches minimum thickness

polycarbonate classified as CC1 material.
b. Refractor: Variable prism optic molded into outer dome to capture

low angle sunlight and limit high angle sunlight.
c. Roof Flashing Base: One piece, seamless, leak-proof flashing

functioning as base support for dome and top of tube.
1. Base Material: Sheet steel, corrosion resistant conforming to

ASTM A 653/A 653M or ASTM A 463/A 463M, 0.028-inches thick.
2. Base Style: Self mounted. Base height per manufacturer's

recommendation for standing seam metal roof system.
d. Tube Ring: Attached to top of base section; 0.090-inches nominal

thickness injection molded high impact PVC; to prevent thermal bridging
between base flashing and tubing and channel condensed moisture out of
tubing.
e. Tube Ring Seal: Attached to the base of the dome ring; butyl glazing
rope 0.25-inches diameter; to minimize air infiltration
f. Dome Seal: Adhesive backed weatherstrip, 0.63-inches tall by

0.28-inches.
g. Reflective Tubes: Aluminum sheet, thickness 0.018-inches.
1. Interior Finish: Spectralight Infinity high reflectance

specular finish on exposed reflective surface. Specular
reflectance for visible spectrum (400 nm to 760 nm) greater than
99 percent. Total solar spectrum reflectance (400 nm to 2500 nm)
less than 93 percent.
2. Color: a* and b* (defined by CIE L*a*b* color model) shall not

exceed plus 2 or be less than minus 2 as determined in accordance
with ASTM E 308.
h. Diffuser Assemblies for Tubes Not Penetrating Ceilings (Open

Ceiling): 21-inches diameter diffuser attached directly to bottom of
tube.
1. Lens: Prismatic lens designed to maximize light output and

diffusion. Visible Light Transmission shall be greater than 90
percent at 0.100-inch thick. Classified as CC2.
2. Diffuser Seal: Open cell foam, acrylic adhesive backed,

0.75-inches wide by 0.125-inches thick.
3. Diffuser Trim Ring: Injection molded acrylic. Nominal wall

thickness 0.172-inches.
2.2.3 ACCESSORIES
a. Fasteners: Same material as metals being fastened, non-magnetic steel,

non-corrosive metal of type recommended by manufacturer, or injection
molded nylon.
b. Suspension Wire: Steel, annealed, galvanized finish, size and type for
application and ceiling system requirement.
c. Sealant: Polyurethane or copolymer based elastomeric sealant as

provided or recommended by manufacturer.
2.3 PERFORMANCE
Tubelight device assemblies shall meet the following performance

requirements:
a. Air Infiltration Test: Air infiltration will not exceed 0.30 cfm/sf
aperture with a pressure delta of 1.57 psf across the tube when tested
in accordance with ASTM E 283.
b. Water Resistance Test: No uncontrolled water leakage at 10.5 psf

pressure differential with water rate of 5 gallons/hour/sf when tested
c. Uniform Load Test:
1. No breakage, permanent damage to fasteners, hardware parts, or

damage to make daylighting system inoperable or cause excessive
permanent deflection of any section when tested at a Positive Load of
150 psf (7.18 kPa) or Negative Load of 70 psf (3.35 kPa).
2. All units shall be tested with a safety factor of (3) for positive
pressure and (2) for negative pressure, acting normal to plane of roof
d. Fire Testing:
1. When used with the Dome Edge Protection Band, all domes meet fire
rating requirements as described in the 2009 International Building
Code.
2. Self-Ignition Temperature - Greater than 650 degrees F Per:

U.B.C. Standard 26-6. See ASTM D 1929.
3. Smoke Density - Rating no greater than 450 Per U.B.C. 8-1 See
ASTM E 84 in way intended for use. Classification C.
4. Rate of Burn and/or Extent - Maximum Burning Rate: 2.5 inches/min

(62 mm/min) Classification CC-2: U.B.C. Standard 26-7. See ASTM D 635.
5. Rate of Burn and/or Extent - Maximum Burn Extent: 1 inch (25 mm)
Classification CC-1: U.B.C. Standard 26-7. See ASTM D 635.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
Field verify all submitted opening sizes, dimensions and tolerances;

preparation of openings shall include isolating dissimilar materials from
aluminum system to avoid damage by electrolysis. The installer shall
examine area of installation to verify readiness of site conditions and to
notify the Contractor about any defects requiring correction. Verify when
structural support is ready to receive all specified work and to convene a
pre-installation conference, if approved by the Contracting Officer,
including the Contractor, tubelight installer and all parties directly
affecting and affected by the specified work. Do not commence work until
conditions are satisfactory.
3.2 PREPARATION
Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. Prepare surfaces using the

methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for
the substrate under the project conditions.
3.3 INSTALLATION
Erect translucent tubelight system in accordance with the approved shop

drawings supplied by the manufacturer. Submit drawings showing fabrication
details, materials, dimensions, installation methods, anchors, and
relationship to adjacent construction. Fastening and sealing shall be in
accordance with the manufacturer's shop drawings. After other trades have
completed work on adjacent materials, tubelight installation shall be
carefully inspected and adjusted, if necessary, to ensure proper
installation and weather-tight conditions. System shall be installed clean
of dirt, debris or staining and thoroughly examined for removal of all
protective material prior to final inspection of the designated work area..
3.4 PROTECTION
Protect installed products until completion of project. Touch-up, repair or

replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.
SECTION 08 71 00
DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES


BHMA A156.1 (2006) Butts and Hinges
BHMA A156.13 (2005) Mortise Locks & Latches, Series 1000
BHMA A156.15 (2006) Closer Holder Release Devices
BHMA A156.16 (2008) Auxiliary Hardware
BHMA A156.17 (2004) Self Closing Hinges & Pivots
BHMA A156.18 (2006) Materials and Finishes
BHMA A156.2 (2003) Bored and Preassembled Locks and

Latches
BHMA A156.21 (2006) Thresholds
BHMA A156.22 (2005) Door Gasketing and Edge Seal Systems
BHMA A156.3 (2008) Exit Devices
BHMA A156.4 (2008) Door Controls - Closers
BHMA A156.6 (2005) Architectural Door Trim
BHMA A156.7 (2003) Template Hinge Dimensions
BHMA A156.8 (2005) Door Controls - Overhead Stops and

Holders
NFPA 101 (2008; Amendment 2009) Life Safety Code
Opening Protectives
SDI/DOOR A250.8 (2003) Recommended Specification for

Standard Steel Doors and Frames
1.2 SUBMITTALS

PROCEDURES.
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Hardware scheduleG, CTAO
Keying system
SD-03 Product Data
Hardware itemsG, CTAO
Installation
Hardware Schedule items, Data Package 1G, CTAO
Submit data package in accordance with Section 01 78 23 OPERATION

AND MAINTENANCE DATA.
Key Bitting
1.3 HARDWARE SCHEDULE
Prepare and submit hardware schedule in the following form:
Reference Mfr. UL Mark

Publi- Name Key (If fire BHMA
Hard- cation and Con- rated Finish
ware Quan- Type Catalog trol and Designa-
Item tity Size No. Finish No. Symbols listed) tion
----- ----- ---- ------ ------ ------- ------- -------- ---------
1.4 KEY BITTING CHART REQUIREMENTS
Submit key bitting charts to the Contracting Officer prior to completion of

the work. Include:
a. Complete listing of all keys (AA1, AA2, etc.).
b. Complete listing of all key cuts (AA1-123456, AA2-123458).
c. Tabulation showing which key fits which door.
d. Copy of floor plan showing doors and door numbers.
e. Listing of 20 percent more key cuts than are presently required in

each master system.
1.5.1 Hardware Manufacturers and Modifications
Provide, as far as feasible, locks, hinges, pivots, and closers of one

lock, hinge, pivot, or closer manufacturer's make. Modify hardware as
necessary to provide features indicated or specified.
1.5.1 Key Shop Drawings Coordination Meeting
Prior to the submission of the key shop drawing, the

Contracting Officer, Contractor, Door Hardware subcontractor, using
Activity and Base Locksmith shall meet to discuss key requirements for the
facility.
Deliver hardware in original individual containers, complete with necessary

appurtenances including fasteners and instructions. Mark each individual
container with item number as shown in hardware schedule. Deliver
permanent keys to the Contracting Officer, either directly or by certified
mail. Deliver construction master keys with the locks.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 TEMPLATE HARDWARE
Provide hardware to be applied to metal manufactured to template.

Promptly furnish template information or templates to door and frame
manufacturers. Conform to BHMA A156.7 for template hinges. Coordinate
hardware items to prevent interference with other hardware.
2.2 HARDWARE FOR FIRE DOORS AND EXIT DOORS
Provide all hardware necessary to meet the requirements of NFPA 80 for fire
doors and NFPA 101 for exit doors, as well as to other requirements
indicated, even if such hardware is not specifically mentioned under
paragraph entitled "Hardware Schedule." Provide the label of
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. for such hardware listed in UL Bld Mat Dir
or labeled and listed by another testing laboratory acceptable to the
2.3 HARDWARE ITEMS
Clearly and permanently mark with the manufacturer's name or trademark,

hinges, pivots, locks, latches, exit devices, bolts and closers where the
identifying mark will be visible after the item is installed. For closers
with covers, the name or trademark may be beneath the cover.
2.3.1 Hinges
BHMA A156.1, 4-1/2 by 4-1/2 inch unless otherwise indicated. Construct

loose pin hinges for exterior doors and reverse-bevel interior doors so
that pins will be nonremovable when door is closed. Other antifriction
bearing hinges may be provided in lieu of ball-bearing hinges.
2.3.2 Pivots
BHMA A156.4.
2.3.3 Spring Hinges
BHMA A156.17.
2.3.4 Locks and Latches
2.3.4.1 Mortise Locks and Latches
BHMA A156.13, Series 1000, Operational Grade 1, Security Grade 2.

Install knobs and roses of mortise locks with screwless shanks and no
exposed screws.
2.3.4.2 Bored Locks and Latches
BHMA A156.2, Series 4000, Grade 1.
2.3.5 Exit Devices
BHMA A156.3, Grade 1. Provide adjustable strikes for rim type and vertical
rod devices. Provide open back strikes for pairs of doors with mortise and
vertical rod devices. Provide touch bars in lieu of conventional
crossbars and arms. Provide escutcheons, not less than 7 by 2-1/4 inch.
2.3.6 Cylinders and Cores
Provide cylinders for new locks, including locks provided under other
sections of this specification. Provide fully compatible cylinders with
products of the Best Lock Corporation with interchangeable cores which are
removable by a special control key. Factory set the cores with seven pin
tumblers using the A4 system and F keyway. Submit a core code sheet with
the cores. Provide master keyed cores in one system for this project.
Provide construction interchangeable cores.
2.3.7 Keying System
Provide a grand master keying system . Provide construction

interchangeable cores.
2.3.8 Lock Trim
Cast, forged, or heavy wrought construction and commercial plain design.
2.3.8.1 Knobs and Roses
Conform to the minimum test requirements of BHMA A156.2 and BHMA A156.13
for knobs, roses, and escutcheons. For unreinforced knobs, roses, and
escutcheons, provide 0.050 inch thickness. For reinforced knobs, roses,
and escutcheons, provide outer shell of 0.035 inch thickness, and combined
thickness of 0.070 inch, except for knob shanks, which are 0.060 inch thick.
2.3.8.2 Lever Handles
Provide lever handles in lieu of knobs . Conform to the minimum

requirements of BHMA A156.13 for mortise locks of lever handles for exit
devices. Provide lever handle locks with a breakaway feature (such as a
weakened spindle or a shear key) to prevent irreparable damage to the lock
when force in excess of that specified in BHMA A156.13 is applied to the
lever handle. Provide lever handles return to within 1/2 inch of the door
face.
2.3.9 Keys
Furnish one file key, one duplicate key, and one working key for each key
change and for each master and grand master keying system. Furnish one
additional working key for each lock of each keyed-alike group. Stamp
each key with appropriate key control symbol and "U.S. property - Do not
duplicate." Do not place room number on keys.
2.3.10 Door Bolts
BHMA A156.16. Provide dustproof strikes for bottom bolts, except for doors
having metal thresholds. Automatic latching flush bolts: BHMA A156.3, Type
25.
2.3.11 Closers
BHMA A156.4, Series C02000, Grade 1, with PT 4C. Provide with brackets,
arms, mounting devices, fasteners, full size covers, except at storefront
mounting, and other features necessary for the particular application.
Size closers in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, or provide
multi-size closers, Sizes 1 through 6, and list sizes in the Hardware
Schedule. Provide manufacturer's 10 year warranty.
2.3.11.1 Identification Marking
Engrave each closer with manufacturer's name or trademark, date of

manufacture, and manufacturer's size designation located to be visible
after installation.
2.3.12 Overhead Holders
BHMA A156.8.
2.3.13 Closer Holder-Release Devices
BHMA A156.15.
2.3.14 Door Protection Plates
BHMA A156.6.
2.3.14.1 Sizes of Kick Plates
2 inch less than door width for single doors; one inch less than door
width for pairs of doors. Provide 10 inch kick plates for flush doors.
Provide 6 inch mop plates.
2.3.15 Door Stops and Silencers
BHMA A156.16. Silencers Type L03011. Provide three silencers for each
single door, two for each pair.
2.3.16 Thresholds
BHMA A156.21. Use J35100, with vinyl or silicone rubber insert in face of
stop, for exterior doors opening out, unless specified otherwise.
2.3.17 Weather Stripping Gasketing
BHMA A156.22. Provide the type and function designation where specified in
paragraph entitled "Hardware Schedule". Provide a set to include head and
jamb seals, sweep strips, and, for pairs of doors, astragals. Air leakage
of weather stripped doors not to exceed 0.5 cubic feet per minute of air
per square foot of door area when tested in accordance with ASTM E 283.
Provide weather stripping with one of the following:
2.3.17.1 Extruded Aluminum Retainers
Extruded aluminum retainers not less than 0.050 inch wall thickness with
vinyl, neoprene, silicone rubber, or polyurethane inserts. Provide clear
(natural) anodized aluminum.
2.3.17.2 Interlocking Type
Zinc or bronze not less than 0.018 inch thick.
2.3.17.3 Spring Tension Type
Spring bronze or stainless steel not less than 0.008 inch thick.
2.3.18 Gasketing
BHMA A156.22. Include adjustable doorstops at head and jambs and an

automatic door bottom per set, both of extruded aluminum, clear (natural)
anodized, surface applied, with vinyl fin seals between plunger and
housing. Provide doorstops with solid neoprene tube, silicone rubber, or
closed-cell sponge gasket. Furnish door bottoms with adjustable operating
rod and silicone rubber or closed-cell sponge neoprene gasket. Doorstops
mitered at corners. Provide the type and function designation where
specified in paragraph entitled "Hardware Sets".
2.3.19 Rain Drips
Extruded aluminum, not less than 0.08 inch thick, clear anodized. Set
drips in sealant and fasten with stainless steel screws.
2.3.19.1 Door Rain Drips
Approximately 1-1/2 inch high by 5/8 inch projection. Align bottom with
bottom edge of door.
2.3.19.2 Overhead Rain Drips
Approximately 1-1/2 inch high by 2-1/2 inch projection, with length equal
to overall width of door frame. Align bottom with door frame rabbet.
2.3.20 Special Tools
Provide special tools, such as spanner and socket wrenches and dogging
keys, required to service and adjust hardware items.
2.4 FASTENERS
Provide fasteners of proper type, quality, size, quantity, and finish with
hardware. Provide stainless steel or nonferrous metal fasteners that are
exposed to weather. Provide fasteners of type necessary to accomplish a
permanent installation.
2.5 FINISHES
BHMA A156.18. Provide hardware in BHMA 630 finish (satin stainless steel),
unless specified otherwise. Provide items not manufactured in stainless
steel in BHMA 626 finish (satin chromium plated) over brass or bronze,
except aluminum paint finish for surface door closers, and except BHMA 652
finish (satin chromium plated) for steel hinges. Provide hinges for
exterior doors in stainless steel with BHMA 630 finish or chromium plated
brass or bronze with BHMA 626 finish. Furnish exit devices in BHMA 626
finish in lieu of BHMA 630 finish . Match exposed parts of concealed
closers to lock and door trim. Match hardware finish for aluminum doors to
the doors.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
Install hardware in accordance with manufacturers' printed installation

instructions. Fasten hardware to wood surfaces with full-threaded wood
screws or sheet metal screws. Provide machine screws set in expansion
shields for fastening hardware to solid concrete and masonry surfaces.
Provide toggle bolts where required for fastening to hollow core
construction. Provide through bolts where necessary for satisfactory
installation.
3.1.1 Weather Stripping Installation
Handle and install weather stripping to prevent damage. Provide full

contact, weather-tight seals. Operate doors without binding.
3.1.1.1 Stop-Applied Weather Stripping
Fasten in place with color-matched sheet metal screws not more than 9 inch
on center after doors and frames have been finish painted.
3.1.1.2 Interlocking Type Weather Stripping
Provide interlocking, self-adjusting type on heads and jambs and flexible

hook type at sills. Nail weather stripping to door one inch on center and
to heads and jambs at 4 inch on center
3.1.1.3 Spring Tension Type Weather Stripping
Provide spring tension type on heads and jambs. Provide bronze nails with
bronze, stainless steel nails with stainless steel. Space nails not more
than 1-1/2 inch on center.
3.1.2 Threshold Installation
Extend thresholds the full width of the opening and notch end for jamb
stops. Set thresholds in a full bed of sealant and anchor to floor with
cadmium-plated, countersunk, steel screws in expansion sleeves.
3.2 FIRE DOORS AND EXIT DOORS
Install hardware in accordance with NFPA 80 for fire doors, NFPA 101 for
exit doors.
3.3 HARDWARE LOCATIONS
SDI/DOOR A250.8, unless indicated or specified otherwise.
a. Kick and Armor Plates: Push side of single-acting doors. Both

sides of double-acting doors.
b. Mop Plates: Bottom flush with bottom of door.
After installation, protect hardware from paint, stains, blemishes, and

other damage until acceptance of work. Submit notice of testing 15 days
before scheduled, so that testing can be witnessed by the Contracting
Officer. Adjust hinges, locks, latches, bolts, holders, closers, and other
items to operate properly. Demonstrate that permanent keys operate
respective locks, and give keys to the Contracting Officer. Correct,
repair, and finish, as directed, errors in cutting and fitting and damage
to adjoining work.
3.5 HARDWARE SETS
Provide the following:
HW-1 MAIN ENTRY DOORS
2 EA. FLOOR CLOSER, C07121 by door mfr. x finish to match door

2 EA. INTERMEDIATE PIVOTS, C07321 by door mfr. x finish to match door
2 EA. EXIT DEVICES, Type 1, Function 08 x finish to match door
1 EA. KEYED REMOVABLE MULLION, Type 22 x finish to match door, with
cylinder as required
1 Set WEATHERSTRIPPING at head, jambs and meeting stiles
2 EA. SWEEP, R3B536 x 628
1 EA. THRESHOLD, J32183 x 628
2 EA. STOPS, L11371 x 626 MS x ES
HW-2 ENTRY DOORS AT VESTIBULE
2 EA. FLOOR CLOSER, C07121 by door mfr. x finish to match door

2 EA. INTERMEDIATE PIVOTS, C07321 by door mfr. x finish to match door.
4 EA. PUSH & PULL BARS, J501 x finish to match door.
2 EA. STOP, L12141 x 626 MS x ES
HW-3 SECONDARY BUILDING EXIT (ALUMINUM DOORS)
1 PR. PIVOT, C17121 x 612

1 EA. INTERMEDIATE PIVOT, C17321
1 EA. EXIT DEVICE, Type 1, Function 08 x finish to match door
1 EA. CLOSER, C82021 x 689
1 EA. RAIN DRIP, at head x 628
1 Set WEATHERSTRIPPING at head and jambs
HW-3A SECONDARY BUILDING EXIT (Hollow Metal Doors At Restroom Exterior

Entry And Readiness Modules)
3 EA. HINGES, A2111 x 630

1 EA. LOCKSET, F08 x 630
1 EA. EXIT DEVICE, Type 1, Function 08 x 626
1 EA. CLOSER, C82021 x 689
1 Set WEATHERSTRIPPING at head and jambs
HW-4 RESTROOMS

1 EA. CLOSER, C82011 x 689
1 EA. KICKPLATE, J102 x 630
1 EA. PUSH PLATE, J301 x 630
1 EA. PULL PLATE, J405 x finish to match door
1 EA. THRESHOLD, Marble as detailed
1 EA. STOP, L12141 x 626 MXS x ES
HW-5 JANITOR CLOSET (FIRE RATED)

HW-6 ALL OFFICES

1 EA. LOCKSET, F82, Grade 2 x 626
HW-7 SECURE NON SENSITIVE STORAGE, SIPRNET (FIRE RATED)

1 EA. CLOSER, C82021 x 689
1 EA. DEADBOLT, E1121 x 626
1 EA. HIGH SECURITY HASP
HW-8 COMMUNICATION ROOM, STORAGE (Conference Room Storage, Recycle

Storage) (FIRE RATED)

1 EA. CLOSER, C82021 x 689
HW-9 MECHANICAL ROOM

1 EA. COORDINATOR, Type 21A x 600
1 EA. DUST PROOF STRIKE, L14011 x 626
1 EA. ASTRAGAL, ROY630 x 600
HW-10 ELECTRICAL ROOM

1 EA. DUST PROOF STRIKE, L14011 x 626
HW-11 CONFERENCE ROOMS

HW-12 PASSAGE WAYS (Interior - Into Readiness Modules) (FIRE RATED)
1 EA. CLOSER, C72021 x 689

2 EA. KICKPLATE, J102 x 630
1 EA. STOP, L12141 x 626 MS xES
HW-13 SECONDARY BUILDING EXIT (At Readiness Modules) (HOLLOW METAL DOORS)

2 EA. EXIT DEVICE, Type 1, Function 08 x 626
2 EA. CLOSER, C82021 x 689
1 EA. ASTRAGAL, ROY630 x 600
1 Set WEATHERSTRIPPING at head and jambs and meeting stiles
Hardware for aluminum doors under this section - Deliver Hardware

templates and hardware, except field-applied hardware to the aluminum door
and frame manufacturer for use in fabricating the doors and frames.
SECTION 08 81 00
GLAZING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

ANSI Z97.1 (2004) Safety Glazing Materials Used in

Buildings
ASTM C 1036 (2006) Standard Specification for Flat

Glass

Heat-Treated Flat Glass - Kind HS, Kind FT
Coated and Uncoated Glass

Laminated Architectural Flat Glass

Structural Silicone Sealants

ASTM C 669 (2000) Glazing Compounds for Back Bedding

and Face Glazing of Metal Sash
ASTM C 864 (2005) Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal

Gaskets, Setting Blocks, and Spacers

ASTM D 2287 (1996; R 2001) Nonrigid Vinyl Chloride

Polymer and Copolymer Molding and
Extrusion Compounds
ASTM D 395 (2003; R 2008) Standard Test Methods for

Rubber Property - Compression Set

Glass in Buildings
GLASS ASSOCIATION OF NORTH AMERICA (GANA)
GANA Glazing Manual (2004) Glazing Manual
GANA Sealant Manual (1990) Sealant Manual
GANA Standards Manual (2001) Tempering Division's Engineering

Standards Manual
INSULATING GLASS MANUFACTURERS ALLIANCE (IGMA)
IGMA TM-3000 (1997) Glazing Guidelines for Sealed

Insulating Glass Units

CID A-A-378 (Basic; Notice 1) Putty Linseed Oil Type,

(for Wood-Sash-Glazing

(LEED-NC)
16 CFR 1201 Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing

Materials
1.2 SUBMITTALS

SD-02 Shop Drawings
Installation
Drawings showing complete details of the proposed setting

methods, mullion details, edge blocking, size of openings, frame
details, materials, and types and thickness of glass.
SD-03 Product Data
Insulating Glass
Documentation for Energy Star qualifications.
Glazing Accessories
Manufacturer's descriptive product data, handling and storage

recommendations, installation instructions, and cleaning
instructions.
SD-04 Samples
Insulating Glass
Glazing Compound
Glazing Tape
Sealant
Two 8 x 10 inch samples of each of the following: tinted glass,

patterned glass, heat-absorbing glass, and insulating glass units.
Three samples of each indicated material. Samples of plastic

sheets shall be minimum 5 by 7 inches.
SD-07 Certificates
Insulating Glass
Setting and sealing materials
Glass setting
Submit glass manufacturer's recommendations for setting and

sealing materials and for installation of each type of glazing
material specified.
Local/Regional Materials; LEED
LEED (tm) documentation relative to local/regional materials

credit in accordance with LEED Reference Guide. Include in LEED
Glazing systems shall be fabricated and installed watertight and airtight

to withstand thermal movement and wind loading without glass breakage,
gasket failure, deterioration of glazing accessories, and defects in the
work. Glazed panels shall comply with the safety standards, as indicated
in accordance with ANSI Z97.1. Glazed panels shall comply with indicated
wind/snow loading in accordance with ASTM E 1300.
Deliver products to the site in unopened containers, labeled plainly with

manufacturers' names and brands. Store glass and setting materials in
safe, enclosed dry locations and do not unpack until needed for
installation. Handle and install materials in a manner that will protect
them from damage.
1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
Do not start glazing work until the outdoor temperature is above40 degrees F
and rising, unless procedures recommended by the glass manufacturer and
approved by the Contracting Officer are made to warm the glass and rabbet
surfaces. Provide ventilation to prevent condensation of moisture on
glazing work during installation. Do not perform glazing work during damp
or rainy weather.
Use materials or products extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as

manufactured, within a 500 mile radius from the project site, if available
from a minimum of three sources.See Section 01 33 29 LEED(tm) DOCUMENTATION
for cumulative total local material requirements. Glazing materials may be
locally available.
1.7 WARRANTY
1.7.1 Warranty for Insulating Glass Units
Warranty insulating glass units against development of material obstruction

to vision (such as dust, fogging, or film formation on the inner glass
surfaces) caused by failure of the hermetic seal, other than through glass
breakage, for a 10-year period following acceptance of the work. Provide
new units for any units failing to comply with terms of this warranty
within 45 working days after receipt of notice from the Government.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 GLASS
ASTM C 1036, unless specified otherwise. In doors and sidelights, provide

safety glazing material conforming to 16 CFR 1201.
2.1.1 Clear Glass
For interior glazing (i.e., pass and observation windows), 1/4 inch thick
glass should be used.
Type I, Class 1 (clear), Quality q4 (A). Provide for glazing openings not
indicated or specified otherwise. Use double-strength sheet glass or 1/8
inch float glass for openings up to and including 15 square feet, 3/16 inch
for glazing openings over 15 square feet but not over 30 square feet, and
1/4 inch for glazing openings over 30 square feet but not over 45 square
feet.
2.1.2 Annealed Glass
Annealed glass shall be Type I transparent flat type, Class 1 - tinted,

Quality q3 - glazing select, 42 percent light transmittance, .25 percent
shading coefficient, conforming to ASTM C 1036. Color shall be bronze.
2.1.3 Laminated Glass
ASTM C 1172, Kind LA fabricated from two nominal 1/8 inch pieces of Type I,
Class 2, Quality q3, flat annealed tinted glass conforming to ASTM C 1036.
Flat glass shall be laminated together with a minimum of 0.030 inch thick,
clear polyvinyl butyral interlayer. The total thickness shall be nominally
1/4 inch. The total thickness shall be nominally one inch.
2.1.4 Mirrors
2.1.4.1 Glass Mirrors
Glass for mirrors shall be Type I transparent flat type, Class 1-clear,
Glazing Quality q1 1/4 inch thick conforming to ASTM C 1036. Glass shall
be coated on one surface with silver coating, copper protective coating,
and mirror backing paint. Silver coating shall be highly adhesive pure
silver coating of a thickness which shall provide reflectivity of 83
percent or more of incident light when viewed through 1/4 inch thick glass,
and shall be free of pinholes or other defects. Copper protective coating
shall be pure bright reflective copper, homogeneous without sludge,
pinholes or other defects, and shall be of proper thickness to prevent
"adhesion pull" by mirror backing paint. Mirror backing paint shall
consist of two coats of special scratch and abrasion-resistant paint , and
shall be baked in uniform thickness to provide a protection for silver and
copper coatings which will permit normal cutting and edge fabrication.
2.1.5 Tempered Glass
ASTM C 1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition A (uncoated), Type I,

Class 2 (tinted heat absorbing), Quality q3, 3/16 inch thick, 42 percent
light transmittance, .25 percent shading coefficient conforming to
ASTM C 1048 and GANA Standards Manual. Color shall be bronze. Provide at
fully glazed entry doors and wherever safety glazing material is indicated
or specified.
2.2 INSULATING GLASS UNITS
2.2.1 Buildings
The inner light shall be ASTM C 1172, laminated glass as specified above .
The outer light shall be ASTM C 1048, Grade B (fully tempered), Style I
(uncoated), Type I, Class 2 (tinted heat absorbing), Quality q4, 3/16 inch
thick.
2.3 SETTING AND SEALING MATERIALS
Provide as specified in the GANA Glazing Manual, IGMA TM-3000, IGMA TB-3001,
and manufacturer's recommendations, unless specified otherwise herein. Do
not use metal sash putty, nonskinning compounds, nonresilient preformed

sealers, or impregnated preformed gaskets. Materials exposed to view and
unpainted shall be gray or neutral color.
2.3.1 Putty and Glazing Compound
Glazing compound shall conform to ASTM C 669 for face-glazing metal sash.
Putty shall be linseed oil type conforming to CID A-A-378for face-glazing
primed wood sash. Putty and glazing compounds shall not be used with
insulating glass or laminated glass.
2.3.2 Glazing Compound
ASTM C 669. Use for face glazing metal sash. Do not use with insulating
glass units or laminated glass.
2.3.3 Sealants
Provide elastomeric and structural sealants.
2.3.3.1 Elastomeric Sealant
ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 12.5, Use G. Use for channel or stop
glazing metal sash. Sealant shall be chemically compatible with setting
blocks, edge blocks, and sealing tapes, with sealants used in manufacture
of insulating glass units. Color of sealant shall be white.
2.3.3.2 Structural Sealant
ASTM C 1184, Type S.
2.3.4 Preformed Channels
Neoprene, vinyl, or rubber, as recommended by the glass manufacturer for

the particular condition.
2.3.5 Sealing Tapes
Preformed, semisolid, PVC-based material of proper size and compressibility

for the particular condition, complying with ASTM D 2287. Use only where
glazing rabbet is designed for tape and tape is recommended by the glass or
sealant manufacturer. Provide spacer shims for use with compressible
tapes. Tapes shall be chemically compatible with the product being set.
2.3.6 Setting Blocks and Edge Blocks
Closed-cell neoprene setting blocks shall be dense extruded type conforming

to ASTM C 509 and ASTM D 395, Method B, Shore A durometer between 70 and
90. Edge blocking shall be Shore A durometer of 50 (+ or - 5). Silicone
setting blocks shall be required when blocks are in contact with silicone
sealant. Profiles, lengths and locations shall be as required and
recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. Block color shall be black.
2.3.7 Glazing Gaskets
Glazing gaskets shall be extruded with continuous integral locking

projection designed to engage into metal glass holding members to provide a
watertight seal during dynamic loading, building movements and thermal
movements. Glazing gaskets for a single glazed opening shall be continuous
one-piece units with factory-fabricated injection-molded corners free of

flashing and burrs. Glazing gaskets shall be in lengths or units
recommended by manufacturer to ensure against pull-back at corners.
Glazing gasket profiles shall be as indicated on drawings.
2.3.7.1 Fixed Glazing Gaskets
Fixed glazing gaskets shall be closed-cell (sponge) smooth extruded

compression gaskets of cured elastomeric virgin neoprene compounds
conforming to ASTM C 509, Type 2, Option 1.
2.3.7.2 Wedge Glazing Gaskets
Wedge glazing gaskets shall be high-quality extrusions of cured elastomeric

virgin neoprene compounds, ozone resistant, conforming to ASTM C 864,
Option 1, Shore A durometer between 65 and 75.
2.3.7.3 Aluminum Framing Glazing Gaskets
Glazing gaskets for aluminum framing shall be permanent, elastic,

non-shrinking, non-migrating, watertight and weathertight.
2.3.8 Accessories
Provide as required for a complete installation, including glazing points,

clips, shims, angles, beads, and spacer strips. Provide noncorroding metal
accessories. Provide primer-sealers and cleaners as recommended by the
glass and sealant manufacturers.
2.4 MIRROR ACCESSORIES
2.4.1 Mastic
Mastic for setting mirrors shall be a polymer type mirror mastic resistant
to water, shock, cracking, vibration and thermal expansion. Mastic shall
be compatible with mirror backing paint, and shall be approved by mirror
manufacturer.
2.4.2 Mirror Frames
Mirrors shall be provided with mirror frames (J-mold channels) fabricated

of one-piece roll-formed Type 304 stainless steel with No. 4 brushed satin
finish and concealed fasteners which will keep mirrors snug to wall.
Frames shall be 1-1/4 x 1/4 x 1/4 inch continuous at top and bottom of
mirrors. Concealed fasteners of type to suit wall construction material
shall be provided with mirror frames.
2.4.3 Mirror Clips
Concealed fasteners of type to suit wall construction material shall be

provided with clips.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
Preparation, unless otherwise specified or approved, shall conform to

applicable recommendations in the GANA Glazing Manual, GANA Sealant Manual,
IGMA TB-3001, IGMA TM-3000, and manufacturer's recommendations. Determine
the sizes to provide the required edge clearances by measuring the actual
opening to receive the glass. Grind smooth in the shop glass edges that
will be exposed in finish work. Leave labels in place until the
installation is approved, except remove applied labels on heat-absorbing
glass and on insulating glass units as soon as glass is installed. Securely
fix movable items or keep in a closed and locked position until glazing
compound has thoroughly set.
3.2 GLASS SETTING
Shop glaze or field glaze items to be glazed using glass of the quality and
thickness specified or indicated. Glazing, unless otherwise specified or
approved, shall conform to applicable recommendations in the
GANA Glazing Manual, GANA Sealant Manual, IGMA TB-3001, IGMA TM-3000, and
manufacturer's recommendations. Aluminum windows, wood doors, and wood
windows may be glazed in conformance with one of the glazing methods
described in the standards under which they are produced, except that face
puttying with no bedding will not be permitted. Handle and install glazing
materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Use beads or
stops which are furnished with items to be glazed to secure the glass in
place. Verify products are properly installed, connected, and adjusted.
3.2.1 Sheet Glass
Cut and set with the visible lines or waves horizontal.
3.2.2 Insulating Glass Units
Do not grind, nip, or cut edges or corners of units after the units have
left the factory. Springing, forcing, or twisting of units during setting
will not be permitted. Handle units so as not to strike frames or other
objects. Installation shall conform to applicable recommendations of
IGMA TB-3001 and IGMA TM-3000.
3.2.3 Installation of Laminated Glass
Sashes which are to receive laminated glass shall be weeped to the outside
to allow water drainage into the channel.
3.3 CLEANING
Clean glass surfaces and remove labels, paint spots, putty, and other
defacement as required to prevent staining. Glass shall be clean at the
time the work is accepted.
3.4 PROTECTION
Glass work shall be protected immediately after installation. Glazed

openings shall be identified with suitable warning tapes, cloth or paper
flags, attached with non-staining adhesives. Reflective glass shall be
protected with a protective material to eliminate any contamination of the
reflective coating. Protective material shall be placed far enough away
from the coated glass to allow air to circulate to reduce heat buildup and
moisture accumulation on the glass. Glass units which are broken, chipped,
cracked, abraded, or otherwise damaged during construction activities shall
be removed and replaced with new units.
Disposal and recycling of waste materials, including corrugated cardboard
recycling, shall be in accordance with the Waste Management Plan. Close

and seal tightly all partly used sealant containers and store protected in
well-ventilated, fire-safe area at moderate temperature.
SECTION 08 91 00
METAL WALL LOUVERS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

AMCA 500-D (1998) Laboratory Methods of Testing

Dampers for Rating
AMCA 511 (1999; R 2004) Certified Ratings Program

for Air Control Devices
AA DAF-45 (2003; Reaffirmed 2009) Designation System

for Aluminum Finishes
AAMA 611 (1998; R 2004) Voluntary Specification for

Anodized Architectural Aluminum

Strip
ASTM A 366/A 366M (1997e1) Standard Specification for

Commercial Steel, Sheet, Carbon,(0.15
Maximum Percent Cold-Rolled

the Hot-Dip Process


1.2 SUBMITTALS


SD-02 Shop Drawings
Wall louvers
SD-03 Product Data
Metal Wall Louvers
SD-04 Samples
Wall louvers; G, AO
Door louvers; G, AO
1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION
Deliver materials to the site in an undamaged condition. Carefully store

materials off the ground to provide proper ventilation, drainage, and
protection against dampness. Louvers shall be free from nicks, scratches,
and blemishes. Replace defective or damaged materials with new.
1.4 DETAIL DRAWINGS
Show all information necessary for fabrication and installation of wall

louvers. Indicate materials, sizes, thicknesses, fastenings, and profiles.
1.5 COLOR SAMPLES
Colors of finishes for wall louvers and door louvers shall closely
approximate colors indicated. Where color is not indicated, submit the
manufacturer's standard colors to the Contracting Officer for selection.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
2.1.1 Galvanized Steel Sheet
ASTM A 653/A 653M, coating designation G90.
2.1.2 Aluminum Sheet
ASTM B 209, alloy 3003 or 5005 with temper as required for forming.
2.1.3 Extruded Aluminum
ASTM B 221, alloy 6063-T5 or -T52.
ASTM A 167, Type 302 or 304, with 2B finish.
2.1.5 Cold Rolled Steel Sheet
ASTM A 366/A 366M, Class 1, with matte finish. Use for interior louvers
only.
2.2 METAL WALL LOUVERS
Weather resistant type, with bird screens and made to withstand a wind load
of not less than 30 pounds per square foot. Wall louvers shall bear the
AMCA certified ratings program seal for air performance and water
penetration in accordance with AMCA 500-D and AMCA 511. The rating shall
show a water penetration of 0.20 or less ounce per square foot of free area
at a free velocity of 800 feet per minute.
2.2.1 Extruded Aluminum Louvers
Fabricated of extruded 6063-T5 or -T52 aluminum with a wall thickness of

not less than 0.081 inch.
2.2.2 Formed Metal Louvers
Formed of zinc-coated steel sheet not thinner than 16 U.S. gage, or

aluminum sheet not less than 0.08 inch thick.
2.2.3 Mullions and Mullion Covers
Same material and finish as louvers. Provide mullions for all louvers more
than 5 feet in width at not more than 4 feet on centers. Provide mullions
covers on both faces of joints between louvers.
2.2.4 Screens and Frames
For aluminum louvers, provide 1/2 inch square mesh, 14 or 16 gage aluminum
or 1/4 inch square mesh, 16 gage aluminum bird screening. For steel
louvers, provide 1/2 inch square mesh, 12 or 16 gage zinc-coated steel; 1/2
inch square mesh, 16 gage copper; or 1/4 inch square mesh, 16 gage
zinc-coated steel or copper bird screening. Mount screens in removable,
rewirable frames of same material and finish as the louvers.
2.3 FASTENERS AND ACCESSORIES
Provide stainless steel screws and fasteners for aluminum louvers and
zinc-coated or stainless steel screws and fasteners for steel louvers.
Provide other accessories as required for complete and proper installation.
2.4 FINISHES
2.4.1 Aluminum
Exposed aluminum surfaces shall be factory finished with an anodic coating .

Color shall be medium bronze.

to AA DAF-45 and AAMA 611. Finish shall be:
a. Architectural Class II (0.4 mil to 0.7 mil), designation AA-M10-C22-

A32, integral color anodized.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
3.1.1 Wall Louvers
Install using stops or moldings, flanges, strap anchors, or jamb fasteners

as appropriate for the wall construction and in accordance with
3.1.2 Screens and Frames
Attach frames to louvers with screws or bolts.
3.2 PROTECTION FROM CONTACT OF DISSIMILAR MATERIALS
3.2.1 Copper or Copper-Bearing Alloys
Paint copper or copper-bearing alloys in contact with dissimilar metal with

heavy-bodied bituminous paint or separate with inert membrane.
3.2.2 Aluminum
Where aluminum contacts metal other than zinc, paint the dissimilar metal
with a primer and two coats of aluminum paint.
3.2.3 Metal
Paint metal in contact with mortar, concrete, or other masonry materials

with alkali-resistant coatings such as heavy-bodied bituminous paint.
3.2.4 Wood
Paint wood or other absorptive materials that may become repeatedly wet and
in contact with metal with two coats of aluminum paint or a coat of
SECTION 09 06 90
COLOR SCHEDULE
PART 1 GENERAL
This section covers only the color of the exterior and interior materials
and products that are exposed to view in the finished construction. The
word "color", as used herein, includes surface color and pattern.
Requirements for quality and method of installation are covered in other
appropriate sections of the specifications. Specific locations where the
various materials are required are shown on the drawings. Items not
designated for color in this section may be specified in other sections.
When color is not designated for items, the Contractor shall propose a
color for approval.
1.2 SUBMITTALS

SD-04 Samples
Color Schedule; G,
5 sets of color boards, 120 days after the Contractor is given

Notice to proceed, complying with the following requirements:
a. Color boards shall reflect all actual finish textures,

patterns, and colors required for this contract.
b. Materials shall be labeled with the finish type,

manufacturer's name, pattern, and color reference.
c. Samples shall be on size 8-1/2 by 11 inch boards with a

maximum spread of size 25-1/2 by 33 inches for foldouts.
d. Samples for this color board are required in addition to

samples requested in other specification sections.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 REFERENCE TO MANUFACTURER'S COLOR
Where color is shown as being specific to one manufacturer, an equivalent

color by another manufacturer may be submitted for approval. Manufacturers
and materials specified are not intended to limit the selection of equal
colors from other manufacturers.
2.2 COLOR SCHEDULE
The color schedule lists the colors, patterns and textures required for
exterior and interior finishes, including both factory applied and field
applied colors.
2.2.1 Exterior Walls
Exterior wall colors shall apply to exterior wall surfaces including

recesses at entrances and projecting vestibules. Conduit shall be painted
to closely match the adjacent surface color. Wall color shall be provided
to match the colors listed below.
2.2.1.1 Brick:
ACME, MOCHA BROWN ANTIQUE
2.2.1.2 Concrete Masonry Units:
Split-FacedAPACHE BROWN 707
2.2.1.3 Precast Stone:
ADVANCED CASTSTONE, SAND DRIFT
2.2.1.4 Glass and Glazing:
TINTED, LIGHT BRONZE
2.2.2 Exterior Trim
Exterior trim shall be provided to match the colors listed below.
2.2.2.1 Aluminum Doors and Door Frames:
MAIN ENTRANCE DOORS: STOREFRONT DOOR WITH MEDIUM BRONZE ALUMINUM FRAME, GLASS
TINTED LIGHT BRONZE.
SECONDARY DOORS: MBCI, ASH GRAY SIG200, GLOSS FINISH.
2.2.2.2 Aluminum Windows (mullion, muntin, sash, trim, and sill):
BRONZE ANODIZED ALUMINUM
2.2.2.3 Fascia:
METAL, FACTORY FINISHED, SAHARA TAN
2.2.2.4 Soffits and Ceilings:
METAL PANELS, SAHARA TAN
2.2.2.5 Overhangs:
STANDING SEAM METAL, GALVALUME COLOR, FACTORY FINISHED
2.2.2.6 Downspouts, Gutters, Louvers, and Flashings:
COLONIAL RED
2.2.2.7 Signage:
BUILDING NUMBER SHALL BE 8" X 30", SINGLE FACED, 1/8" THICK ALUMINUM PLATE,
WHITE REFLECTIVE BACKGROUND WITH 6" HELVETICA MEDIUM BLACK LETTERING. ALL
SIGNAGE TO BE CONSTRUCTED AND INSTALLED
ACCORDING TO DEPARTMENT OF ARMY STANDARDS.
CONTRACTOR TO SUBMIT SIGNAGE TEXT TO USER
GRUOP FOR REVIEW AND APPROVAL PRIOR TO
FABRICATION.
2.2.3 Exterior Roof
Roof color shall apply to exterior roof surfaces including sheet metal
flashings and copings, mechanical units, roof trim, pipes, conduits,
electrical appurtenances, and similar items. Provide roof color to match
the colors listed below.
2.2.3.1 Metal:
STANDING SEAM METAL ROOM, GALVALUME COLOR, FACTORY FINISHED.
2.2.3.2 Penetrations:
Shall match roof in color.
2.2.4 Interior Floor Finishes
Provide flooring materials to match the colors listed below.
2.2.4.1 Walk off mat:
Pedigrid- GI option LB
Color- Graphite 9325-
Black anodized frame B
2.2.4.2 Carpet Tile:
Mannington
CPT-1: Mannington -New possibilities 24" x 24" -Color: Endeavor
(ENDE)
2.2.4.3 Vinyl Composition Tile:
Mannnington-Brushworks
VCT 1 Armstrong- Migrations BBT with BIO Stride-Color: Power Gray T3505
VCT 2 Armstrong- Migrations BBT with BIO Stride- Color: Bark Brown T3508
VCT 3 Armstrong- Imperial Texture Standard Excelon- Color: Charcoal 51915
VCT 4 Armstrong- Imperial Texture Standard Excelon-Color: Classic White 51911
2.2.4.4 Stair Treads, Kick Strips, and Risers:
Stair treads to be VCT-3
Srair risers, Kick Strips shall be painted with Sherwin Williams
Paint- Color: PT-2 Software2.2.4.5 Porcelain Tile:
CT-1 Crossville Ceramic Tile- ECO CYCLE- Marshlands EC102

CT-2 Crossville Ceramic Tile- ECO CYCLE- Plymouth Rock EC116
CT-3 Crossville Ceramic Tile- ECO CYCLE- Grand Canyon EC114
2.2.4.6 Grout:
Prospec -Color: 65 Taupe
2.2.4.7 Concrete Stain_Color: CLEAR____:
2.2.5 Interior Base Finishes
Provide base materials to match the colors listed below.
2.2.5.1 Resilient Base and Moldings:
Johnsonite 4" base

RB-1: Johnsonite, 4" Cove Base, Color: 168 Thunder (Carpet only)
RB-2: Johnsonite, 4" Cove Base, Color: 71 Storm Clouds (VCT 1 & 3)
RB-3: Johnsonite, 4" Cove base, Color: Wetlands (VCT 2 & 4)
2.2.5.2 Porcelain Tile:
Crossville Ceramic Tile- ECO CYCLE

CTB-1 ECO CYCLE- Marshlands EC102- Sizes 6" x 12" Cove base
2.2.5.3 Grout:
2.2.6 Interior Wall Finishes
Interior wall color shall apply to the entire wall surface, including
reveals, vertical furred spaces, grilles, diffusers, electrical and access
panels, and piping and conduit adjacent to wall surfaces unless otherwise
specified. Items not specified in other paragraphs shall be painted to
match adjacent wall surface. Provide wall materials to match the colors
listed below.
2.2.6.1 Paint:
Sherwin Williams
PT-1: SHERWIN WILLIAMS, Semi Gloss Color: Incredible White SW7028
PT-2: SHERWIN WILLIAMS, Semi Gloss Color: Software SW7074
PT-3: SHERWIN WILLIAMS, Semi Gloss Color: Mindful Gray SW7016
PT-4: SHERWIN WILLIAMS, Semi Gloss Color: Anonymous SW7046
2.2.6.2 Ceramic Tile:
Crossville Ceramic Tile- ECO CYCLE

CWT-1: Crossville, ECO CYCLE Color: Marshlands EC102. Size: 8" X 8"
CWT-2: Crossville, ECO CYCLE Color: Plymouth Rock EC116. Size: 8" X 8"
CWT-3: Crossville, ECO CYCLE Color: Grand Canyon EC114. Size: 8" X 8"
2.2.6.3 Ceramic Tile Grout:
2.2.7 Interior Ceiling Finishes
Ceiling colors shall apply to ceiling surfaces including soffits, furred

down areas, grilles, diffusers, registers, and access panels. Ceiling
color shall also apply to joist, underside of roof deck, and conduit and
piping where joists and deck are exposed and required to be painted.
Provide ceiling materials to match the colors listed below.
2.2.7.1 Acoustical Tile and Grid:
ACT: ARMSTRONG, CIRRUS TEGULAR 577, WHITE, 24" X 24" X 3/4"
2.2.7.2 Paint:
PNT-5: SHERWIN WILLIAMS, Semi-Gloss, Color:Ceiling Bright White SW7007
2.2.7.3 Structural Framing:
PNT-4: SHERWIN WILLIAMS, Semi-Gloss, Color:Ceiling Bright White

SW70072.2.8 Interior Trim
Provide interior trim to match the colors listed below.
2.2.8.1 Steel Doors:
SHERWIN WILLIAMS, Color: PT-6 SW7074 Software (Gloss)
2.2.8.2 Steel Door Frames:
SHERWIN WILLIAMS, Color: PT-6 SW7074 Software (Gloss)
2.2.8.3 Aluminum Windows :
(mullion, muntin, sash and trim) BRONZE ANODIZED ALUMINUM

2.2.8.4 Wood Doors:
SHERWIN WILLIAMS, , WOOD CLASSICS-SW3119K
2.2.8.5 Window Sills:
Solid Surfacing Material - SSM-1: AVONITE ACRYSTONE, PALERMOF1-9144

2.2.8.6 Fire Extinguisher Cabinets:
EGG SHELL WHITE2.2.8.7 Handrails:
BRONZE ANODIZED
2.2.8.8
ALUMINUMLocker Room Benches:
CLEAR LACQUER FINISH

2.2.9 Interior Window Treatment
Provide window treatments to match the colors listed below.
2.2.9.1 Horizontal Blinds:
WB-1: Levolor,Rivera, Classic 1" ALUMINUM HORIZONTAL BLINDS/ Color: white cap
113
2.2.10 Interior Miscellaneous
Provide miscellaneous items to match the colors listed below.
2.2.10.1 Toilet Partitions and Urinal Screens:
TP: Scranton Products, Hiny Hiders Color: Grey
2.2.10.2 Corner Guards:
INPRO Color: Pewter Gray 0107
2.2.10.3 Wall Switch Handles and Standard Receptacle Bodies:
2.2.10.4 Electrical Device Cover Plates:
2.2.10.5 Shower Curtain:
Curtain is to be clear.2.2.10.6 Shower Wall Kits, Trim and

Shower Pan:
PART 3 EXECUTION (Not Applicable)
SECTION 09 22 00
SUPPORTS FOR PLASTER AND GYPSUM BOARD
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

AISC 341 (2005; Supp 2005) Seismic Provisions for

Structural Steel Buildings

Sheet, Aluminum-Coated

the Hot-Dip Process
ASTM C 645 (2009) Nonstructural Steel Framing Members
ASTM C 754 (2009) Installation of Steel Framing

Members to Receive Screw-Attached Gypsum
Panel Products
ASTM C 841 (2003e1; R 2008) Installation of Interior

Lathing and Furring
ASTM C 847 (2009) Standard Specification for Metal

Lath
NAAMM ML/SFA 920 (1991) Metal Lathing and Furring
1.2 SUBMITTALS

SD-02 Shop Drawings
Metal support systems
Submit for the erection of metal framing, furring, and ceiling

suspension systems. Indicate materials, sizes, thicknesses, and
fastenings.
Deliver materials to the job site and store in ventilated dry locations.
Storage area shall permit easy access for inspection and handling. If
materials are stored outdoors, stack materials off the ground, supported on
a level platform, and fully protected from the weather. Handle materials
carefully to prevent damage. Remove damaged items and provide new items.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
Provide steel materials for metal support systems with galvanized coating
ASTM A 653/A 653M, G-60; aluminum coating ASTM A 463/A 463M, T1-25; or a
55-percent aluminum-zinc coating. Provide support systems and attachments
per AISC 341 in seismic zones.
2.1.1 Materials for Attachment of Lath
2.1.1.1 Suspended and Furred Ceiling Systems and Wall Furring
ASTM C 841, and ASTM C 847.
2.1.1.2 Non-loadbearing Wall Framing
NAAMM ML/SFA 920.
2.1.2 Materials for Attachment of Gypsum Wallboard
2.1.2.1 Suspended and Furred Ceiling Systems
ASTM C 645.
2.1.2.2 Nonload-Bearing Wall Framing and Furring
ASTM C 645, but not thinner than 0.0329 inch thickness.
2.1.2.3 Furring Structural Steel Columns
ASTM C 645. Steel (furring) clips and support angles listed in

UL Fire Resistance may be provided in lieu of steel studs for erection of
gypsum wallboard around structural steel columns.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
3.1.1 Systems for Attachment of Lath
3.1.1.1 Suspended and Furred Ceiling Systems and Wall Furring
ASTM C 841, except as indicated otherwise.
3.1.1.2 Non-loadbearing Wall Framing
NAAMM ML/SFA 920, except provide framing members 16 inches o.c. unless
indicated otherwise.
3.1.2 Systems for Attachment of Gypsum Wallboard
3.1.2.1 Suspended and Furred Ceiling Systems
ASTM C 754, except provide framing members 16 inches o.c. unless indicated
otherwise.
3.1.2.2 Non-loadbearing Wall Framing and Furring
ASTM C 754, except as indicated otherwise.
3.1.2.3 Furring Structural Steel Columns
Install studs or galvanized steel clips and support angles for erection of
gypsum wallboard around structural steel columns in accordance with the
UL Fire Resistance, design number(s) of the fire resistance rating indicated.
3.2 ERECTION TOLERANCES
Provide framing members which will be covered by finish materials such as

wallboard, plaster, or ceramic tile set in a mortar setting bed, within the
following limits:
a. Layout of walls and partitions: 1/4 inch from intended position;
b. Plates and runners: 1/4 inch in 8 feet from a straight line;
c. Studs: 1/4 inch in 8 feet out of plumb, not cumulative; and
d. Face of framing members: 1/4 inch in 8 feet from a true plane.
Provide framing members which will be covered by ceramic tile set in

dry-set mortar, latex-portland cement mortar, or organic adhesive within
the following limits:
a. Layout of walls and partitions: 1/4 inch from intended position;
b. Plates and runners: 1/8 inch in 8 feet from a straight line;
c. Studs: 1/8 inch in 8 feet out of plumb, not cumulative; and
d. Face of framing members: 1/8 inch in 8 feet from a true plane.
SECTION 09 29 00
GYPSUM BOARD
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

ANSI A108.11 (1992) Interior Installation of

Cementitious Backer Units
ANSI/CTI A108/A118/A136.1 (2005) Specification for the Installation

of Ceramic Tile
ASTM C 1002 (2007) Standard Specification for Steel

Self-Piercing Tapping Screws for the
Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel
Studs

Accessories for Gypsum Wallboard and
Gypsum Veneer Base


Mat Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Panel
ASTM C 1396/C 1396M (2009) Standard Specification for Gypsum

Board
ASTM C 36/C 36M (2003e1) Gypsum Wallboard
ASTM C 442/C 442M (2004e1) Gypsum Backing Board, Gypsum

Coreboard, and Gypsum Shaftliner Board
ASTM C 475/C 475M (2002; R 2007) Joint Compound and Joint

Tape for Finishing Gypsum Board
ASTM C 840 (2008) Application and Finishing of Gypsum

Board
ASTM C 954 (2007) Steel Drill Screws for the

Metal Plaster Bases to Steel Studs from
0.033 in. (0.84 mm) to 0.112 in. (2.84 mm)
in Thickness
ASTM D 1037 (2006a) Evaluating Properties of Wood-Base

Fiber and Particle Panel Materials

a Chamber

ASTM D 2394 (2005e1) Simulated Service Testing of Wood

and Wood-Base Finish Flooring
ASTM D 412 (2006ae1e2) Standard Test Methods for

Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic
Elastomers - Tension
ASTM D 5420 (2004) Impact Resistance of Flat, Rigid

Plastic Specimen by Means of a Strike
Impacted by a Falling Weight (Gardner
Impact)
ASTM D 624 (2000; R 2007) Tear Strength of

Conventional Vulcanized Rubber and
Thermoplastic Elastomers
ASTM E 695 (2003; R 2009) Measuring Relative

Resistance of Wall, Floor, and Roof
Construction to Impact Loading

Materials
GYPSUM ASSOCIATION (GA)
GA 214 (2007) Recommended Levels of Gypsum Board

Finish
GA 216 (2007) Application and Finishing of Gypsum

Board
GA 253 (2007) Application of Gypsum Sheathing
GA 600 (2006) Fire Resistance Design Manual

(LEED-NC)
1.2 SUBMITTALS

SD-03 Product Data
Cementitious backer units
Glass Mat Water-Resistant Gypsum Tile Backing Board
Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board
Glass Mat Covered or Reinforced Gypsum Sheathing
Glass Mat Covered or Reinforced Gypsum Sheathing Sealant
Impact Resistant Gypsum Board
Accessories
Submit for each type of gypsum board and for cementitious backer
units.
Gypsum Board; (LEED)
Submit documentation indicating percentage of post-industrial

and post-consumer recycled content per unit of product. Indicate
Adhesives; (LEED)
Joint Treatment Materials
Submit manufacturer's product data, indicating VOC content.

Environmental Data
SD-07 Certificates
Asbestos Free Materials; G, AO
Certify that gypsum board types, gypsum backing board types,

cementitious backer units, and joint treating materials do not
contain asbestos.
Material Safety Data Sheets
Manufacturer maintenance instructions
Waste Management

Gypsum Board; (LEED)
LEED documentation relative to recycled content credit in

Adhesives; (LEED)

1.3.1 Delivery
Deliver materials in the original packages, containers, or bundles with

each bearing the brand name, applicable standard designation, and name of
manufacturer, or supplier.
1.3.2 Storage
Keep materials dry by storing inside a sheltered building. Where necessary

to store gypsum board and cementitious backer units outside, store off the
ground, properly supported on a level platform, and protected from direct
exposure to rain, snow, sunlight, and other extreme weather conditions.
Provide adequate ventilation to prevent condensation. Store per
manufacturer's recommendations for allowable temperature and humidity
range. Gypsum wallboard shall not be stored with materials which have high
emissions of volatile organic compounds (VOCs) or other contaminants. Do
not store panels near materials that may offgas or emit harmful fumes, such
as kerosene heaters, fresh paint, or adhesives.
1.3.3 Handling
Neatly stack gypsum board and cementitious backer units flat to prevent
sagging or damage to the edges, ends, and surfaces.
1.4.1 Temperature
Maintain a uniform temperature of not less than 50 degrees F in the

structure for at least 48 hours prior to, during, and following the
application of gypsum board, cementitious backer units, and joint treatment
materials, or the bonding of adhesives.
1.4.2 Exposure to Weather
Protect gypsum board and cementitious backer unit products from direct
exposure to rain, snow, sunlight, and other extreme weather conditions.
1.4.3 Temporary Ventilation
Provide temporary ventilation for work of this section.

for cumulative total local material requirements. Gypsum board materials
may be locally available.
1.6 QUALIFICATIONS
Furnish type of gypsum board work specialized by the installer with a

minimum of 3 years of documented successful experience.
1.7 SCHEDULING
The gypsum wall board shall be taped, spackled and primed before the
installation of the highly-emitting materials.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
Conform to specifications, standards and requirements specified. Provide

gypsum board types, gypsum backing board types, cementitious backing units,
and joint treating materials manufactured from asbestos free materials only.
Submit Material Safety Data Sheets and manufacturer maintenance
instructions for gypsum materials including adhesives.
2.1.1 Gypsum Board
ASTM C 36/C 36M and ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. See Section 01 33 29 LEED(tm)
DOCUMENTATION for cumulative total recycled content requirements. Gypsum
board may contain post-consumer or post-industrial recycled content.
2.1.1.1 Regular
48 inch wide, 5/8 inch thick, tapered edges.
2.1.1.2 Type X (Special Fire-Resistant)
48 inch wide, 5/8 inch thick, tapered edges. Applicable to all fire rated
assemblies.
2.1.2 Gypsum Backing Board
ASTM C 442/C 442M, gypsum backing board shall be used as a base in a

multilayer system.
2.1.2.1 Regular
48 inch wide, 5/8 inch thick, square edges.
2.1.3 Regular Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board
ASTM C 1396/C 1396M
2.1.3.1 Regular
2.1.4 Glass Mat Water-Resistant Gypsum Tile Backing Board
ASTM C 1178/C 1178M
2.1.4.1 Regular
2.1.5 Glass Mat Covered Gypsum Sheathing
Exceeds physical properties of ASTM C 1396/C 1396M and ASTM C 1177/C 1177M.
Provide 5/8 inch, gypsum sheathing. Provide gypsum board of with a
noncombustible water-resistant core, with glass mat surfaces embedded to
the gypsum core. Warrant gypsum sheathing board for at least six months
against delamination due to direct weather exposure. Provide continuous,
asphalt impregnated, building felt to cover exterior face of sheathing.
Seal all joints, seams, and penetrations with compatible sealant.
2.1.5.1 Glass Mat Covered Gypsum Sheathing Sealant
Provide sealant compatible with gypsum sheathing, rubber washers for
masonry veneer anchors, and other associated cavity wall components such as
anchors and through wall flashing. Provide sealants for gypsum sheathing
board edge seams and veneer anchor penetrations recommended by the gypsum
sheathing manufacturer and have the following performance requirements:
a. ASTM D 412: Tensile Strength, 80 psi

b. ASTM D 412: Ultimate Tensile Strength (maximum elongation), 170 psi
c. ASTM D 624: Tear Strength, dieB, 27 ppi
d. ASTM D 1149: Joint Movement Capability after 14 Days cure, plus or
minus 50 percent.
2.1.6 Impact Resistant Gypsum Board

Reinforced gypsum panel with imbedded fiber mesh or lexan backing testing
in accordance with the following tests. Provide fasteners that meet
manufacturer requirements and specifications stated within this section.
Impact resistant gypsum board, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84,
have a flame spread rating of 25 or less and a smoke developed rating of 50
or less .
2.1.6.1 Structural Failure Test
ASTM E 695 or ASTM D 2394 for structural failure (drop penetration).

ASTM E 695 using a 60 lb sand filled leather bag, resisting no less than
300 ft. lb. cumulative impact energy before failure or ASTM D 2394 using
5.5 inch hemispherical projectile resisting no less than 264 ft. lb. before
failure. Provide test specimen stud spacing a minimum 16 inch on center.
2.1.6.2 Indentation Test
ASTM D 5420 or ASTM D 1037 for indentation resistance. ASTM D 5420 using a
32 oz weight with a 5/8 inch hemispherical impacting head dropped once 3
feet creating not more than 0.137 inch indentation or ASTM D 1037 using no
less than 470 lb weight applied to the 0.438 inch diameter ball to create
not more than a 0.0197 inch indentation depth.
2.1.7 Cementitious Backer Units
ANSI/CTI A108/A118/A136.1.
2.1.8 Joint Treatment Materials
ASTM C 475/C 475M. Use all purpose joint and texturing compound containing
inert fillers and natural binders, including lime compound. Pre-mixed
compounds shall be free of antifreeze, vinyl adhesives, preservatives,
biocides and other slow releasing compounds.
2.1.8.1 Embedding Compound
Specifically formulated and manufactured for use in embedding tape at

gypsum board joints and compatible with tape, substrate and fasteners.
2.1.8.2 Finishing or Topping Compound
Specifically formulated and manufactured for use as a finishing compound.
2.1.8.3 All-Purpose Compound
Specifically formulated and manufactured to serve as both a taping and a

finishing compound and compatible with tape, substrate and fasteners.
2.1.8.4 Setting or Hardening Type Compound
Specifically formulated and manufactured for use with fiber glass mesh tape.
2.1.8.5 Joint Tape
Use cross-laminated, tapered edge, reinforced paper, or fiber glass mesh

tape recommended by the manufacturer.
2.1.9 Fasteners
2.1.9.1 Screws
ASTM C 1002, Type "G", Type "S" or Type "W" steel drill screws for
fastening gypsum board to gypsum board, wood framing members and steel
framing members less than 0.033 inch thick. ASTM C 954 steel drill screws
for fastening gypsum board to steel framing members 0.033 to 0.112 inch
thick. Provide cementitious backer unit screws with a polymer coating.
2.1.10 Adhesives
Do not use adhesive containing benzene, carbon tetrachloride, or

trichloroethylene. Adhesive must meet the requirements of LEED low emitting
materials credit.
2.1.10.1 Adhesive for Fastening Gypsum Board to Metal Framing
Not permitted.
2.1.11 Shaftwall Liner Panel
ASTM C 442/C 442M. Conform to the UL Fire Resistance for the Design
Numbers(s) indicated for shaftwall liner panels. Manufacture liner panel
for cavity shaftwall system, with water-resistant paper faces, bevel edges,
single lengths to fit required conditions, 1" thick, by 24" wide.
2.1.12 Accessories
ASTM C 1047. Fabricate from corrosion protected steel or plastic designed

for intended use. Accessories manufactured with paper flanges are not
acceptable. Flanges shall be free of dirt, grease, and other materials
that may adversely affect bond of joint treatment. Provide prefinished or
job decorated materials.
2.1.13 Asphalt Impregnated Building Felt
Provide a 15 lb asphalt moisture barrier over gypsum sheathing. Conforming

to ASTM D 226/D 226M Type 1 (No. 15) for asphalt impregnated building felt.
2.1.14 Water
Provide clean, fresh, and potable water.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
3.1.1 Framing and Furring
Verify that framing and furring are securely attached and of sizes and
spacing to provide a suitable substrate to receive gypsum board and
cementitious backer units. Verify that all blocking, headers and supports
are in place to support plumbing fixtures and to receive soap dishes, grab
bars, towel racks, and similar items. Do not proceed with work until
framing and furring are acceptable for application of gypsum board and
cementitious backer units.
3.2 APPLICATION OF GYPSUM BOARD
Apply gypsum board to framing and furring members in accordance with

ASTM C 840 or GA 216 and the requirements specified. Apply gypsum board
with separate panels in moderate contact; do not force in place. Stagger
end joints of adjoining panels. Neatly fit abutting end and edge joints.
Use gypsum board of maximum practical length; select panel sizes to
minimize waste. Cut out gypsum board to make neat, close, and tight joints
around openings. In vertical application of gypsum board, provide panels
in lengths required to reach full height of vertical surfaces in one
continuous piece. Lay out panels to minimize waste; reuse cutoffs whenever
feasible. Surfaces of gypsum board and substrate members may not be bonded
together with an adhesive. Treat edges of cutouts for plumbing pipes,
screwheads, and joints with water-resistant compound as recommended by the
gypsum board manufacturer. Provide type of gypsum board for use in each
system specified herein as indicated.
3.2.1 Semi-Solid Gypsum Board Partitions
Provide in accordance with ASTM C 840, System IV or GA 216 .
3.2.2 Solid Gypsum Board Partitions
Provide in accordance with ASTM C 840, System V or GA 216.
3.2.3 Application of Gypsum Board to Steel Framing and Furring
Apply in accordance with ASTM C 840, System VIII or GA 216.
3.2.4 Arches and Bending Radii
Apply gypsum board in accordance with ASTM C 840, System IX or GA 216.
3.2.5 Gypsum Board for Wall Tile or Tile Base Applied with Adhesive
In dry areas (areas other than tubs, shower enclosures, saunas, steam
rooms, gang shower rooms), apply glass mat water-resistant gypsum tile
backing board in accordance with ASTM C 840, System X or GA 216.
3.2.6 Exterior Application
Apply exterior gypsum board (such as at soffits) in accordance with

ASTM C 840, System XI or GA 216.
3.2.7 Glass Mat Covered Gypsum Sheathing
Apply gypsum sheathing in accordance to gypsum association publications

GA 253. Follow gypsum sheathing manufacturer's requirements of design
details for joints and fasteners and be properly installed to protect the
substrate from moisture intrusion. Do not leave exposed surfaces of the
gypsum sheathing beyond the manufacturer's recommendation without a weather
barrier cladding. Provide continuous asphalt impregnated building felt
over sheathing surface in single fashion with edges and ends lapped a
minimum of 6 inch. Property flash the openings. Seal all joints, seams,
and penetrations with a compatible silicone sealant.
3.2.8 Control Joints
Install expansion and contraction joints in ceilings and walls in

accordance with ASTM C 840, System XIII or GA 216. Fill control joints
between studs in fire-rated construction with firesafing insulation to
match the fire-rating of construction.
3.2.9 Application of Impact Resistant Gypsum Board
Apply in accordance with applicable system of ASTM C 840 as specified or

GA 216. Follow manufacturers written instructions on how to cut, drill and
attach board.
3.3 APPLICATION OF CEMENTITIOUS BACKER UNITS
3.3.1 Application
In wet areas (tubs, shower enclosures, saunas, steam rooms, gang shower
rooms), apply cementitious backer units in accordance with ANSI A108.11.
Place a 15 lb asphalt impregnated, continuous felt paper membrane behind
cementitious backer units, between backer units and studs or base layer of
gypsum board. Place membrane with a minimum 6 inch overlap of sheets laid
shingle style.
3.3.2 Joint Treatment
ANSI A108.11.
3.4 FINISHING OF GYPSUM BOARD
Tape and finish gypsum board in accordance with ASTM C 840, GA 214 and
GA 216. Finish plenum areas above ceilings to Level 1 in accordance with
GA 214. Finish water resistant gypsum backing board, ASTM C 1396/C 1396M,
to receive ceramic tile to Level 2 in accordance with GA 214. Finish walls
and ceilings to receive a heavy-grade wall covering or heave textured
finish before painting to Level 3 in accordance with GA 214. Finish walls
and ceilings without critical lighting to receive flat paints, light
textures, or wall coverings to Level 4 in accordance with GA 214. Finish
all gypsum board walls, partitions and ceilings to Level 5 in accordance
with GA 214. Provide joint, fastener depression, and corner treatment.
Tool joints as smoothly as possible to minimize sanding and dust. Do not
use fiber glass mesh tape with conventional drying type joint compounds;
use setting or hardening type compounds only. Provide treatment for
water-resistant gypsum board as recommended by the gypsum board
manufacturer. Protect workers, building occupants, and HVAC systems from
gypsum dust.
3.4.1 Uniform Surface
Wherever gypsum board is to receive eggshell, semigloss or gloss paint

finish, or where severe, up or down lighting conditions occur, finish
gypsum wall surface in accordance to GA 214 Level 5. In accordance with
GA 214 Level 5, apply a thin skim coat of joint compound to the entire
gypsum board surface, after the two-coat joint and fastener treatment is
complete and dry.
3.5 SEALING
Seal openings around pipes, fixtures, and other items projecting through
gypsum board and cementitious backer units as specified in Section 07 92 00
JOINT SEALANTS Apply material with exposed surface flush with gypsum board
or cementitious backer units.
3.5.1 Sealing for Glass Mat Gypsum Board Sheathing
Apply silicone sealant in a 3/8 inch bead to all joints and trowel flat.
Apply enough of the same sealant to all fasteners penetrating through the
glass mat gypsum board surface to completely cover the penetration when
troweled flat. Do not place construction and materials behind sheathing
until a visual inspection of sealed joints during daylight hours has been
completed by Contracting Officer.
3.6 FIRE-RESISTANT ASSEMBLIES
Wherever fire-rated construction is indicated, provide materials and

application methods, including types and spacing of fasteners, wall and
ceiling framing in accordance with the specifications contained in
UL Fire Resistance for the Design Number(s) indicated, or GA 600 for the
File Number(s) indicated. Joints of fire-rated gypsum board enclosures
shall be closed and sealed in accordance with UL test requirements or GA
requirements. Seal penetrations through rated partitions and ceilings
tight in accordance with tested systems.
3.7 PATCHING
Patch surface defects in gypsum board to a smooth, uniform appearance,

ready to receive finishes.
3.8 SHAFTWALL FRAMING
Install the shaftwall system in accordance with the system manufacturer's

published instructions. Coordinate bucks, anchors, blocking and other
items placed in or behind shaftwall framing with electrical and mechanical
work. Patch or replace fireproofing materials which are damaged or removed
during shaftwall construction.
As specified in Waste Management Plan and as follows. Separate clean waste

gypsum products from contaminants. Do not include wood, plastic, metal,
asphalt-impregnated gypsum board, or any gypsum board coated with glass
fiber, vinyl, decorative paper, or other finish. Place in designated area
and protect from moisture and contamination. Coordinate with Section
32 05 33 LANDSCAPE ESTABLISHMENT to identify requirements for gypsum soil
amendment and to prepare scrap gypsum board for use as soil amendment.
Identify manufacturer's policy for collection or return of remaining

construction scrap, unused material, and packaging material. Institute
demolition and construction recycling to take advantage of manufacturer's
programs. When such a service is not available, seek local recyclers to
reclaim the materials.
SECTION 09 30 00
CERAMIC TILE, QUARRY TILE, AND PAVER TILE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES


Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain, for
Concrete
ASTM C 1026 (1987; R 2002) Standard Test Method for

Measuring the Resistance of Ceramic Tile
to Freeze-Thaw Cycling

Determining Visible Abrasion Resistance of
Glazed Ceramic Tile

Determining the Static Coefficient of
Friction of Ceramic Tile and Other Like
Surfaces by the Horizontal Dynamometer
Pull-Meter Method

Mat Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Panel

Aggregate for Masonry Mortar

Cement

Finishing Hydrated Lime
ASTM C 207 (2006) Standard Specification for Hydrated

Lime for Masonry Purposes

Aggregates
ASTM C 373 (1988; R 2006) Water Absorption, Bulk

Density, Apparent Porosity, and Apparent
Specific Gravity of Fired Whiteware
Products
ASTM C 648 (2004; R 2009) Breaking Strength of
Ceramic Tile
ASTM C 847 (2009) Standard Specification for Metal

Lath

Polyethylene Film and Sheeting

ASTM D 4068 (2009) Chlorinated Polyethylene Sheeting

for Concealed Water-Containment Membrane
BAY AREA AIR QUALITY MANAGEMENT DISTRICT (Bay Area AQMD)
Bay Area AQMD Rule 8-51 (1992; R 2001) Adhesive and Sealant
Products
SCAQMD Rule 1168 (1989; R 2005) Adhesive and Sealant

Applications
TCA Hdbk (2007) Handbook for Ceramic Tile

Installation

material requirements. Tile materials may be locally available.
1.3 SUBMITTALS

SD-02 Shop Drawings
Detail Drawings; G,
Drawings showing ceramic tile pattern elevations,floor plans.
SD-03 Product Data
Tile
Setting-Bed
Mortar, Grout, and Adhesive
Manufacturer's catalog data and preprinted installation and

cleaning instructions.
SD-04 Samples
Tile
Accessories
Grout
Samples of sufficient size to show color range, pattern, type

and joints.
SD-07 Certificates
Tile
Mortar, Grout, and Adhesive
Certificates indicating conformance with specified

requirements. Furnish a master grade certificate for tile.

Tile; (LEED)
Reinforcing Wire Fabric; (LEED)

Adhesives; (LEED)
LEED documentation relative to low-emitting materials credit in

Dimension and draw detail drawings at a minimum scale of 1/4 inch = 1 foot.
Include drawings of pattern at inside corners, outside corners, termination
points and location of all equipment items such as thermostats, switch
plates, mirrors and toilet accessories mounted on surface.
Deliver materials to the project site in manufacturer's original unopened

containers with seals unbroken and labels and hallmarks intact. Protect
materials from weather, and store them under cover in accordance with
manufacturer's printed instructions.
Do not perform ceramic tile work unless the substrate and ambient
temperature is at least 50 degrees F and rising. Maintain temperature above
50 degrees F while the work is being performed and for at least 7 days
after completion of the work. When temporary heaters are used, ventilate
the area to the outside to avoid carbon dioxide damage to new tilework.
1.7 WARRANTY
Provide manufacturer's standard performance guarantees or warranties that

extend beyond a 1-year period.
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
Supply an extra two percent of each type tile used in clean and marked
cartons.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 TILE
Conform to TCA Hdbk for standard grade tile. Provide grade sealed
containers. Mark seals with the marks on the signed master grade
certificate. Provide an impact resistant tile with a minimum floor
breaking strength for wall tile of 90 pound and for floor tile of 250 pound
in accordance with ASTM C 648. The manufacturer will provide a frost
resistant rating for tile used in cold climate projects as determined by
ASTM C 1026. Provide a 0.50 maximum percent water absorption in accordance
with ASTM C 373. Provide a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.60 wet and
dry in accordance with ASTM C 1028. Identify floor tile as Class
III-Medium Heavy Traffic, durability classification as rated by the
manufacturer when tested in accordance with ASTM C 1027 for abrasion
resistance as related to foot traffic. Coordinate the color with Section
09 06 90 COLOR SCHEDULE. See Section 01 33 29 LEED(tm) DOCUMENTATION for
cumulative total recycled content requirements. Tile may contain
post-consumer or post-industrial recycled content.
2.2 SETTING-BED
Compose the setting-bed of the following materials:
2.2.1 Aggregate for Concrete Fill
Conform to ASTM C 33/C 33M for aggregate fill. Do not exceed one-half the
thickness of concrete fill for maximum size of coarse aggregate.
Conform to ASTM C 150/C 150M for cement, Type I, white for wall mortar and
gray for other uses.
2.2.3 Sand
Conform to ASTM C 144 for sand.
2.2.4 Hydrated Lime
Conform to ASTM C 206 for hydrated lime, Type S or ASTM C 207, Type S.
2.2.5 Metal Lath
Conform to ASTM C 847 for flat expanded type metal lath, and weighing a
minimum 2.5 pound/square yard.
2.2.6 Reinforcing Wire Fabric
Conform to ASTM A 185/A 185M for wire fabric. Provide 2 by 2 inch mesh,
16/16 wire or 1-1/2 by 2 inch mesh, 16/13 wire. See Section 01 33 29
LEED(tm) DOCUMENTATION for cumulative total recycled content requirements.
Wire fabric may contain post-consumer or post-industrial recycled content.
2.3 WATER
Provide potable water.
2.4 MORTAR, GROUT, AND ADHESIVE
Interior adhesives, sealants, primers and sealants used as filler must meet
the requirements of LEED low emitting materials credit. Conform to
SCAQMD Rule 1168 and Bay Area AQMD Rule 8-51, and to the following for
mortar, grout, adhesive, and sealant:
2.4.1 Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar
TCA Hdbk. Zero-VOC content.
2.4.2 Conductive Dry-Set Mortar
2.4.3 Latex-Portland Cement Mortar
2.4.4 Ceramic Tile Grout
TCA Hdbk; petroleum-free and plastic-free latex-portland cement grout.

Maximum VOC content of 150 grams/liter.
2.4.5 Epoxy Resin Grout
TCA Hdbk. Prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.
2.4.6 Furan Resin Grout
TCA Hdbk and consist of an intimate mixture of furfuryl-alcohol resin with

carbon filler and catalyst. Prohibited unless specifically indicated
otherwise.
2.4.7 Sealants
Comply with applicable regulations regarding toxic and hazardous materials

and as specified. Single-component polyurethane sealant shall have a
zero-VOC content.
2.4.8 Cementitious Backer Board
Provide cementitious backer units, for use as tile substrate over wood
sub-floors, in accordance with TCA Hdbk. Furnish 1/2inch thick
cementitious backer units.
2.4.9 Glass Mat Gypsum Backer Panel
Provide glass mat water-resistant gypsum backer board, for use as tile
substrate over wood subfloors, in accordance with ASTM C 1178/C 1178M.
Provide 1/2 inch thick glass mat gypsum backer board.
2.5 MEMBRANE MATERIALS
Conform to ASTM D 226/D 226M, Type 1 for 15 pound waterproofing membrane,

asphalt-saturated building felt. Conform to ASTM D 2103 ASTM D 4068 4 mil
for polyethylene film.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATORY WORK AND WORKMANSHIP
Inspect surface to receive tile in conformance to the requirements of

TCA Hdbk for surface conditions for the type setting bed specified and for
workmanship. Provide variations of tiled surfaces that fall within maximum
values shown below:
TYPE WALLS FLOORS
Dry-Set Mortar 1/8 inch in 8 ft. 1/8 inch in 10 ft.

Organic Adhesives 1/8 inch in 8 ft. 1/16 inch in 3 ft.
Latex Portland Cement Mortar 1/8 inch in 8 ft. 1/8 inch in 10 ft.
Epoxy 1/8 inch in 8 ft. 1/8 inch in 10 ft.
Do not start tile work until roughing in for mechanical and electrical work
has been completed and tested, and built-in items requiring membrane
waterproofing have been installed and tested. Do not start floor tile
installation in spaces requiring wall tile until after wall tile has been
installed. Apply tile in colors and patterns indicated in the area shown
on the drawings. Install tile with the respective surfaces in true even
planes to the elevations and grades shown. Provide special shapes as
required for sills, jambs, recesses, offsets, external corners, and other
conditions to provide a complete and neatly finished installation. Solidly
back tile bases and coves with mortar.
3.3 EXPANSION JOINTS
Form and seal joints as specified in Section 07 92 00JOINT SEALANTS.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTING
Upon completion, thoroughly clean tile surfaces in accordance with

manufacturer's approved cleaning instructions. Do not use acid for
cleaning glazed tile. Clean floor tile with resinous grout or with factory
mixed grout in accordance with printed instructions of the grout
manufacturer. After the grout has set, provide a protective coat of a
noncorrosive soap or other approved method of protection for tile wall
surfaces. Cover tiled floor areas with building paper before foot traffic
is permitted over the finished tile floors. Provide board walkways on
tiled floors that are to be continuously used as passageways by workmen.
Replace damaged or defective tiles.
Separate waste, including metal and cardboard, in accordance with the Waste
Management Plan and recycle or reuse. Place materials defined as hazardous
or toxic waste, including used sealant and adhesive tubes and containers,
in designated containers and areas. Close and seal tightly partly used
sealant and adhesive containers and store in protected, well-ventilated,
fire-safe area at moderate temperature. Place materials defined as
hazardous or toxic waste, including used sealant and adhesive tubes and
containers, in designated containers and areas and dispose of properly.
SECTION 09 51 00
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES




the Hot-Dip Process
ASTM B 633 (2007) Standard Specification for

Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron
and Steel
ASTM C 423 (2008a) Sound Absorption and Sound

Absorption Coefficients by the
Reverberation Room Method
ASTM C 635/C 635M (2007) Manufacture, Performance, and

Testing of Metal Suspension Systems for
Acoustical Tile and Lay-In Panel Ceilings

ASTM C 834 (2005) Latex Sealants
ASTM E 1264 (2008) Acoustical Ceiling Products
ASTM E 1477 (1998a; R 2008) Luminous Reflectance

Factor of Acoustical Materials by Use of
Integrating-Sphere Reflectometers
ASTM E 580/E 580M (2009a) Application of Ceiling Suspension

Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-In
Panels in Areas Requiring Moderate Seismic
Restraint
ASTM E 795 (2005) Mounting Test Specimens During

Sound Absorption Tests
UFC 3-310-04 (2007) Seismic Design for Buildings
Provide sound controlling units mechanically mounted on a ceiling

suspension system for acoustical treatment. The unit size, texture,
finish, and color must be as specified. The location and extent of
acoustical treatment shall be as shown on the approved detail drawings.
Coordinate with paragraph RECLAMATION PROCEDURES for reclamation of mineral
fiber acoustical ceiling panels to be removed from the job site.
1.2.1 Ceiling Sound Absorption
Determine the Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC) in accordance with

ASTM C 423 Test Method.
1.2.2 Light Reflectance
Determine light reflectance factor in accordance with ASTM E 1477 Test

Method.
1.3 SUBMITTALS

SD-02 Shop Drawings
Approved Detail Drawings
Drawings showing suspension system, method of anchoring and

fastening, details, and reflected ceiling plan.
SD-03 Product Data
Acoustical Ceiling Systems
a. Manufacturer's data indicating percentage of recycle material

in acoustic ceiling tiles to verify affirmative procurement
compliance.
b. Total weight and volume quantities of acoustic ceiling tiles

with recycle material.
c. Manufacturer's catalog showing UL classification of

fire-rated ceilings giving materials, construction details, types
of floor and roof constructions to be protected, and UL design
number and fire protection time rating for each required floor or
roof construction and acoustic ceiling assembly.
SD-04 Samples
Acoustical Units
Two samples of each type of acoustical unit and each type of

suspension grid tee section showing texture, finish, and color.
SD-07 Certificates
Acoustical Units
Certificate attesting that the mineral based acoustical units

furnished for the project contain recycled material and showing an
estimated percent of such material.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE. AND HANDLING
Deliver materials to the site in the manufacturer's original unopened

containers with brand name and type clearly marked. Carefully handle and
store materials in dry, watertight enclosures. Immediately before
installation, store acoustical units for not less than 24 hours at the same
temperature and relative humidity as the space where they will be installed
in order to assure proper temperature and moisture acclimation.
Maintain a uniform temperature of not less than 60 degrees F nor more than
85 degrees F and a relative humidity of not more than 70 percent for 24
hours before, during, and 24 hours after installation of acoustical units.
1.6 SCHEDULING
Complete and dry interior finish work such as plastering, concrete and
terrazzo work before ceiling installation. Complete mechanical,
electrical, and other work above the ceiling line; install and start
operating heating, ventilating, and air conditioning systems in order to
maintain temperature and humidity requirements.
1.7 WARRANTY

extend beyond a one year period. Include an agreement to repair or replace
acoustical panels that fail within the warranty period in the standard
performance guarantee or warranty. Failures include, but are not limited
to, sagging and warping of panels; rusting and manufacturers defects of
grid system.
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
Furnish spare tiles, from the same lot as those installed, of each color at
the rate of 5 tiles for each 1000 tiles installed.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 ACOUSTICAL UNITS

RECOVERED MATERIALS. Conform acoustical units to ASTM E 1264, Class A, and
the following requirements:
2.1.1 Humidity Resistant Composition Units
a. Type: Non-asbestos mineral or glass fibers bonded with ceramic,

moisture resistant thermo-setting resin, or other moisture resistant
material and having a factory applied white paint finish. Provide
panels that do not sag or warp under conditions of heat, high humidity
or chemical fumes.
b. Flame Spread: Class: A, 25 or less.
c. Pattern: DuraBrite.
d. Minimum NRC: Minimum 0.70 when tested on Mounting Type E-400 of

ASTM E 795.
e. Minimum Light Reflectance Coefficient: LR-1, 0.75 or greater.
f. Nominal Size: 24 x 24 inch.
g. Edge Detail: Beveled Tegular.
2.2 SUSPENSION SYSTEM
Provide suspension system conforming to ASTM C 635/C 635M for

intermediate-duty systems . Provide surfaces exposed to view of aluminum
or steel with a factory-applied white baked-enamel finish . Provide wall
molding having a flange of not less than 15/16 inch . Provide inside and
outside corner caps standard mitered corners. Suspended ceiling framing
system must have the capability to support the finished ceiling, light
fixtures, air diffusers, and accessories, as shown. Provide a suspension
system with a maximum deflection of 1/360 of the span length. Conform
seismic details to the guidance in UFC 3-310-04 and ASTM E 580/E 580M
contract drawings.
2.3 HANGERS
Provide hangers and attachment capable of supporting a minimum 300 pound

ultimate vertical load without failure of supporting material or attachment.
2.3.1 Wires
Conform wires to ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1, 0.14 inch in diameter.
2.3.2 Straps
Provide straps of 1 by 3/16 inch galvanized steel conforming to

ASTM A 653/A 653M, with a light commercial zinc coating or
ASTM A 1008/A 1008Mwith an electrodeposited zinc coating conforming to
ASTM B 633, Type RS.
2.3.3 Rods
Provide 3/16 inch diameter threaded steel rods, zinc or cadmium coated.
2.4 ACCESS PANELS
Provide access panels that match adjacent acoustical units, designed and
equipped with suitable framing and fastenings for removal and replacement
without damage. Size panel to be not less than 12 by 12 inch or more than
12 by 24 inch.
a. Attach an identification plate of 0.032 inch thick aluminum, 3/4

inch in diameter, stamped with the letters "AP" and finished the same
as the unit, near one corner on the face of each access panel.
b. Identify ceiling access panel by a number utilizing white

identification plates or plastic buttons with contrasting numerals.
Provide plates or buttons of minimum 1 inch diameter and securely
attached to one corner of each access unit. Provide a typewritten card
framed under glass listing the code identification numbers and
corresponding system descriptions listed above. Mount the framed card
where directed and furnish a duplicate card to the Contracting
Officer. Code identification system is as follows:
1 Fire detection/alarm system
2 Air conditioning controls
3 Plumbing system
4 Heating and steam systems
5 Air conditioning duct system
6 Sprinkler system
7 Intercommunication system
12 Telephone junction boxes
2.5 FINISHES
Use manufacturer's standard textures, patterns and finishes as specified

for acoustical units and suspension system members. Treat ceiling
suspension system components to inhibit corrosion.
2.6 COLORS AND PATTERNS
Use colors and patterns for acoustical units and suspension system
components as specified in Section 09 06 90 COLOR SCHEDULE .
2.7 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT
Conform acoustical sealant to ASTM C 834, nonstaining. All field-applied

interior sealant shall meet the requirements of LEED low emitting materials
credit.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
Examine surfaces to receive directly attached acoustical units for

uneveness, irregularities, and dampness that would affect quality and
execution of the work. Rid areas, where acoustical units will be cemented,
of oils, form residue, or other materials that reduce bonding capabilities
of the adhesive. Complete and dry interior finish work such as plastering,
concrete, and terrazzo work before installation. Complete and approve
mechanical, electrical, and other work above the ceiling line prior to the
start of acoustical ceiling installation. Provide acoustical work complete
with necessary fastenings, clips, and other accessories required for a
complete installation. Do not expose mechanical fastenings in the finished
work. Lay out hangers for each individual room or space. Provide hangers
to support framing around beams, ducts, columns, grilles, and other
penetrations through ceilings. Keep main runners and carrying channels
clear of abutting walls and partitions. Provide at least two main runners
for each ceiling span. Wherever required to bypass an object with the
hanger wires, install a subsuspension system so that all hanger wires will
be plumb.
3.1.1 Suspension System
Install suspension system in accordance with ASTM C 636/C 636M and as

specified herein. Do not suspend hanger wires or other loads from
underside of steel decking.
3.1.1.1 Plumb Hangers
Install hangers plumb and not pressing against insulation covering ducts
and pipes. Where lighting fixtures are supported from the suspended
ceiling system, provide hangers at a minimum of four hangers per fixture
and located not more than 6 inch from each corner of each fixture.
3.1.1.2 Splayed Hangers
Where hangers must be splayed (sloped or slanted) around obstructions,

offset the resulting horizontal force by bracing, countersplaying, or other
acceptable means.
3.1.2 Wall Molding
Provide wall molding where ceilings abut vertical surfaces. Miter corners
where wall moldings intersect or install corner caps. Secure wall molding
not more than 3 inch from ends of each length and not more than 16 inch on
centers between end fastenings. Provide wall molding springs at each
acoustical unit in semi-exposed or concealed systems.
3.1.3 Acoustical Units
Install acoustical units in accordance with the approved installation

instructions of the manufacturer. Ensure that edges of acoustical units
are in close contact with metal supports, with each other, and in true
alignment. Arrange acoustical units so that units less than one-half width
are minimized. Hold units in exposed-grid system in place with
manufacturer's standard hold-down clips, if units weigh less than 1 psf or
if required for fire resistance rating.
3.1.4 Caulking
Seal all joints around pipes, ducts or electrical outlets penetrating the
ceiling. Apply a continuous ribbon of acoustical sealant on vertical web
of wall or edge moldings.
3.1.5 Adhesive Application
Wipe back of tile to remove accumulated dust. Daub acoustical units on

back side with four equal daubs of adhesive. Apply daubs near corners of
tiles. Ensure that contact area of each daub is at least 2 inch diameter
in final position. Press units into place, aligning joints and abutting
units tight and uniform without differences in joint widths.
3.2 CEILING ACCESS PANELS
Locate ceiling access panels directly under the items which require access.
3.3 CLEANING
Following installation, clean dirty or discolored surfaces of acoustical

units and leave them free from defects. Remove units that are damaged or
improperly installed and provide new units as directed.
3.4 RECLAMATION PROCEDURES
Neatly stack ceiling tile, designated for recycling by the Contracting

Officer, on 4 by 4 foot pallets not higher than 4 foot. Panels must be
completely dry. Shrink wrap and symmetrically stack pallets on top of each
other without falling over.
SECTION 09 65 00
RESILIENT FLOORING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

ASTM D 4078 (2002; R 2008) Water Emulsion Floor Polish
ASTM E 648 (2009a) Standard Test Method for Critical

Radiant Flux of Floor-Covering Systems
Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source
ASTM F 1482 (2004e1; R 2009) Installation and

Preparation of Panel Type Underlayments to
Receive Resilient Flooring
ASTM F 1869 (2004) Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission

Rate of Concrete Subfloor Using Anhydrous
Calcium Chloride
ASTM F 2170 (2009) Determining Relative Humidity in

Concrete Floor Slabs in situ Probes
ASTM F 710 (2008) Standard Practice for Preparing

Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient
Flooring

(LEED-NC)
See Section 01 33 29 LEED(tm) DOCUMENTATION for cumulative total

local/recycled material requirements. Flooring materials may be locally
available. Flooring and accessories may contain post-consumer or
post-industrial recycled content.
1.2.2 Fire Resistance Requirements
Provide a minimum average critical radiant flux of 0.45 watts per square
centimeter for flooring in corridors and exits when tested in accordance
with ASTM E 648.
1.3 SUBMITTALS

SD-02 Shop Drawings
Resilient Flooring and Accessories; G,
Scaled drawings indicating patterns (including location of

patterns and colors) and dimensions.
SD-03 Product Data
Manufacturer's descriptive data.
Adhesives
Manufacturer's descriptive data, documentation stating physical

characteristics, and mildew and germicidal characteristics.
Provide Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for all primers and
adhesives to the Contracting Officer. Highlight VOC emissions.
SD-04 Samples
Three samples of each indicated color and type of flooring,

base, mouldings, and accessories. Provide a minimum 2-1/2 by 4
inch sample.
SD-06 Test Reports
Moisture, Alkalinity and Bond Tests; G
Copy of test reports for moisture and alkalinity content of

concrete slab, and bond test stating date of test, person
conducting the test, and the area tested.
Surface Preparation; G
Installation; G
Manufacturer's printed installation instructions for all

flooring materials and accessories, including preparation of
substrate, seaming techniques, and recommended adhesives.
Resilient Flooring and Accessories; G
Data Package 1 in accordance with Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND

MAINTENANCE DATA.
Local/Regional Materials

Resilient Flooring and Accessories

Adhesives

LEED documentation relative to rapidly renewable materials

credit in accordance with LEED Reference Guide. Include in LEED
Deliver materials to the building site in original unopened containers

bearing the manufacturer's name, style name, pattern color name and number,
production run, project identification, and handling instructions. Store
materials in a clean, dry, secure, and well-ventilated area with ambient
air temperature maintained above 68 degrees F and below 85 degrees F,
stacked according to manufacturer's recommendations. Protect materials
from the direct flow of heat from hot-air registers, radiators and other
heating fixtures and appliances. Observe ventilation and safety procedures
specified in the MSDS. Do not store near materials that may offgas or
emit harmful fumes, such as kerosene heaters, fresh paint, or adhesives.
Maintain areas to receive resilient flooring at a temperature above 68

degrees F and below 85 degrees F for 3 days before application, during
application and 2 days after application, unless otherwise directed by the
flooring manufacturer for the flooring being installed. Maintain a minimum
temperature of 55 degrees F thereafter. Provide adequate ventilation to
remove moisture from area and to comply with regulations limiting
concentrations of hazardous vapors.
1.6 SCHEDULING
Schedule resilient flooring application after the completion of other work

which would damage the finished surface of the flooring.
1.7 WARRANTY

extend beyond a one year period.
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
Provide extra flooring material of each color and pattern at the rate of 10
tiles for each 1000 tiles and 10 square feet for each 1000 square feet of
sheet flooring installed. Provide extra wall base material composed of 20
linear feet of each type, color and pattern. Package all extra materials
in original properly marked containers bearing the manufacturer's name,
brand name, pattern color name and number, production run, and handling
instructions. Provide extra materials from the same lot as those
installed. Leave extra stock at the site in location assigned by
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MOULDING
Provide tapered mouldings of vinyl and types as recommended by flooring

manufacturer for both edges and transitions of flooring materials
specified. Provide vertical lip on moulding of maximum 1/4 inch. Provide
bevel change in level between 1/4 and 1/2 inch with a slope no greater than
1:2.
2.2 ADHESIVES
Provide adhesives for flooring, base and accessories as recommended by the

manufacturer and comply with local indoor air quality standards. Interior
adhesives shall meet the requirements of LEED low emitting materials credit.
.
2.3 SURFACE PREPARATION MATERIALS
Provide surface preparation materials, such as panel type underlayment,

lining felt, and floor crack fillers as recommended by the flooring
manufacturer for the subfloor conditions. Comply with ASTM F 1482 for
panel type underlayment products.
2.4 POLISH/FINISH
Provide polish finish as recommended by the manufacturer and conform to

ASTM D 4078 for polish.
2.5 CAULKING AND SEALANTS
Provide caulking and sealants in accordance with Section 07 92 00 JOINT

SEALANTS.
2.6 MANUFACTURER'S COLOR, PATTERN AND TEXTURE
Provide color, pattern and texture for resilient flooring and accessories
as indicated on the drawings . Provide floor patterns as specified on the
drawings. Provide flooring in any one continuous area or replacement of
damaged flooring in continuous area from same production run with same
shade and pattern.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
Examine and verify that site conditions are in agreement with the design
package. Report all conditions that will prevent a proper installation.
Do not take any corrective action without written permission from the
Government. Work will proceed only when conditions have been corrected and
accepted by the installer.
Provide a smooth, true, level plane for surface preparation of the

flooring, except where indicated as sloped. Floor to be flat to within
3/16 inch in 10 feet. Prepare subfloor in accordance with flooring
manufacturer's recommended instructions. Prepare the surfaces of
lightweight concrete slabs (as defined by the flooring manufacturer) as
recommended by the flooring manufacturer. Comply with ASTM F 710 for
concrete subfloor preparation. Floor fills or toppings may be required as
recommended by the flooring manufacturer. Install underlayments, when
required by the flooring manufacturer, in accordance with manufacturer's
recommended printed installation instructions. Comply with ASTM F 1482 for
panel type underlayments. Before any work under this section is begun,
correct all defects such as rough or scaling concrete, chalk and dust,
cracks, low spots, high spots, and uneven surfaces. Repair all damaged
portions of concrete slabs as recommended by the flooring manufacturer.
Remove concrete curing and sealer compounds from the slabs, other than the
type that does not adversely affect adhesion. Remove paint, varnish, oils,
release agents, sealers, waxes, and adhesives, as required by the flooring
product in accordance with manufacturer's printed installation instructions.
3.3 MOISTURE, ALKALINITY AND BOND TESTS
Determine the suitability of the concrete subfloor for receiving the

resilient flooring with regard to moisture content and pH level by moisture
and alkalinity tests. Conduct moisture testing in accordance with
ASTM F 1869 or ASTM F 2170, unless otherwise recommended by the flooring
manufacturer. Conduct alkalinity testing as recommended by the flooring
manufacturer. Determine the compatibility of the resilient flooring
adhesives to the concrete floors by a bond test in accordance with the
flooring manufacturer's recommendations.
3.4 PLACING MOULDING
Provide moulding where flooring termination is higher than the adjacent

finished flooring and at transitions between different flooring materials.
When required, locate moulding under door centerline. Moulding is not
required at doorways where thresholds are provided. Secure moulding with
adhesive as recommended by the manufacturer. Prepare and apply adhesives
in accordance with manufacturer's printed directions. Anchor aluminum
moulding to floor surfaces as recommended by the manufacturer.
3.5 CLEANING
Immediately upon completion of installation of flooring in a room or an

area, dry/clean the flooring and adjacent surfaces to remove all surplus
adhesive. Clean flooring as recommended in accordance with manufacturer's
printed maintenance instructions. No sooner than 5 days after
installation, wash flooring with a nonalkaline cleaning solution, rinse

thoroughly with clear cold water, and, except for rubber flooring and stair
treads, risers and stringers, vinyl and other flooring not requiring polish
finish by manufacturer, apply the number of coats of polish in accordance
with manufacturer's written instructions. Clean and maintain all other
flooring as recommended by the manufacturer.
Separate offcuts and waste materials and reuse or recycle in accordance

with the Waste Management Plan, keeping sheet materials larger than 2
square feet and tiles larger than 1/2 tiles separate for reuse. Identify
manufacturer's policy for collection or return of construction scrap,
unused material, demolition scrap, and/or packaging material. Place
materials defined as hazardous or toxic waste in designated containers and
dispose of properly. Close and seal tightly partly used sealant and
adhesive containers and store protected in a well ventilated fire-safe area
at moderate temperature.
3.7 PROTECTION
From the time of installation until acceptance, protect flooring from

damage as recommended by the flooring manufacturer. Remove and replace
flooring which becomes damaged, loose, broken, or curled and wall base
which is not tight to wall or securely adhered.
SECTION 09 65 33
CONDUCTIVE VINYL FLOORING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES


ASTM F 1066 (2004) Standard Specification for Vinyl

Composition Floor Tile
NFPA 99 (2005; Errata 2005) Health Care Facilities
UL 779 (1995; Rev thru Nov 2005) Electrically

Conductive Floorings
1.2 SUBMITTALS

SD-03 Product Data
Manufacturer's data composed of catalog cuts, brochures and

product information.
Installation of Conductive Vinyl Tile
Manufacturer's preprinted material describing product

installation. Cleaning and maintenance instructions shall be
included.
SD-04 Samples
Three samples of each color and type of flooring and base.

Sample size shall be minimum 3 x 3 inch.
SD-06 Test Reports
Testing
Reports of tests, including analysis and interpretation of test

results. Each report shall be properly identified. The test
methods used shall be identified and the test results shall be
recorded.
SD-07 Certificates

Adhesive
Qualifications of Applicator
Certificate attesting that the tile and adhesive meet the

requirements specified. Certificate indicating approval of the
flooring applicator by the flooring manufacturer.
The flooring manufacturer will approve the Qualifications of Applicator who

shall have a minimum of 3 years experience in the application of the
materials to be used.
Deliver materials to the building site in original unopened containers.

Store materials in a clean dry area with temperature maintained above 70
degrees F for two days prior to installation.
Areas to receive conductive vinyl flooring shall be maintained at a

temperature above 70 degrees F for two days before, during, and after
application. A minimum temperature of 55 degrees F shall be maintained
thereafter.
1.6 SCHEDULING
Schedule conductive vinyl flooring work after any other work which would
damage the finished surface of the flooring.
1.7 WARRANTY

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 CONDUCTIVE VINYL TILE
Conductive vinyl tile shall conform to ASTM F 1066. Tile shall meet the
test requirements of UL 779. Tile shall be 12 x 12 inch, 1/8 inch thick.
Insert tiles shall be conductive tiles with lettering in contrasting color
reading "Conductive Floor, Do not Wax."
2.2 ADHESIVE
Adhesive shall be a conductive adhesive specifically recommended by the

manufacturer of the flooring.
2.3 WALL BASE
2.3.1 Resilient Base
Base shall be Type II (vinyl) Style B, (coved). Base shall be 4 inch high
and a minimum 1/8 inch thick. Job formed corners shall be furnished.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
Accessories shall be as recommended by the manufacturer of the flooring.
2.5 ELECTRICAL GROUND CONNECTION
Connection between the conductive floor system and the external grounding
system shall be provided. Contact with the conductive floor system shall
be with conductive grounding strip and shall have the greater of the
following: a minimum contact area of 9 square inch or the dimensions
recommended by the manufacturer. The grounding conductor shall be as
recommended by the manufacturer of the flooring.
2.6 COLOR
Color shall be in accordance with Section 09 06 90 COLOR SCHEDULE .
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS
Before any work under this section is begun, defects such as rough or
scaling concrete, low spots, high spots, and uneven surfaces shall have
been corrected, and damaged portions of concrete slabs shall have been
repaired. Floor shall be in a level plane with a maximum variation of 1/8
inch every 10 feet, except where indicated as sloped. Cracks and
irregularities shall be patched with a portland cement underlayment with a
liquid latex binder.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTIVE VINYL TILE
Conductive vinyl tile flooring shall be installed with conductive adhesive

in accordance with the approved manufacturer's installation instructions.
Tile lines and joints shall be kept square, symmetrical, tight, and even.
Tile at the perimeter of the area to be finished shall vary as necessary to
maintain full-size tiles in the field, but no perimeter tile shall be less
than one-half the field tile size, except where irregular shaped rooms make
it impossible. Tile shall be cut, fitted, and scribed to walls,
partitions, and projections after field flooring has been applied. A
grounding strap shall be installed.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF WALL BASE
3.3.1 Topset Cove Base
Topset cove base shall be installed in a manner recommended by the

manufacturer of the base.
The flooring shall be cleaned in accordance with the manufacturer's

recommendations. Flooring shall be protected by a covering of heavy-duty
building paper before foot traffic is permitted. Boardwalks shall be
placed over flooring in areas where subsequent building operations might
damage the floor. Tiles that become loose, broken, or curled prior to
acceptance, or tiles that do not conform to resistance requirements of
UL 779 shall be removed and replaced.
3.5 TESTING
Between 4 and 30 days after flooring installation is completed, and prior

to its use, the flooring shall be tested in accordance with the test
methods and electrode construction of NFPA 99. The resistance average
shall be less than 1,000,000 ohms and more than 25,000 ohms. The
measurements shall be made between five or more points of contact on the
floor in each room. In addition at least one surface to ground measurement
shall be made for each point pair measured. In rooms where more than 1000
square feet of conductive tile has been installed a minimum of one surface
and one surface to ground measurement shall be made for each 200 square feet
of conductive tile and the results averaged. No individual floor to
ground measurement shall be less than 10,000 ohms. Tests shall be made by
a technician experienced in such work.
3.6 TESTING FOR EXPLOSIVE AND AMMUNITION FACILITIES
Electrical resistance test shall be performed on the installed floor.

Instruments used in making tests shall be used only when the room is free
from exposed explosives and flammable gas mixtures. Maximum floor
resistance shall be measured with a suitably calibrated ohmmeter, which may
operate on a normal open-circuit output voltage of 500 volts dc and a short
circuit current of 2.5 milliamperes with an effective internal resistance
of approximately two million ohms. Minimum floor resistance will be
measured with a suitably calibrated ohmmeter appropriate for the task.
Each electrode shall weigh 5 pounds and shall have a dry, flat, circular
contact area 2-1/2 inches in diameter, which shall comprise a surface of
aluminum or tin foil 0.0005 to 0.001 inch thick, backed by a layer of rubber
1/4 inch thick and measuring between 40 and 60 durometer hardness as
determined with a Shore Type A durometer ASTM D 2240. The floor shall be
clean and dry, "electrode jelly" such as brushless shaving soap or saline
solution shall not be used. The resistance of the floor at any one
location shall be more than 5,000 ohms in areas with 110-volts service and
10,000 ohms in areas with 220-volt service, and an average of less than
1,000,000 ohms in all areas as measured between a permanent ground
connection and an electrode placed at any point on the floor and also as
measured between two electrodes placed 3 feet apart at any point on the
floor. Measurements shall be made at five or more locations in each room.
If the resistance changes appreciably with time during a measurement, the
value observed after the voltage has been applied for above 5 seconds shall
be considered to be the measured value.
SECTION 09 65 36
STATIC-CONTROL RESILIENT FLOORING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

ASTM E 648 (2010) Standard Test Method for Critical

ASTM F 150 (2006) Electrical Resistance of

Conductive and Static Dissipative
Resilient Flooring
ASTM F 1700 (2004) Solid Vinyl Floor Tile
ASTM F 1861 (2008) Resilient Wall Base

Calcium Chloride
ASTM F 2170 (2009) Determining Relative Humidity in

Concrete Floor Slabs in situ Probes
ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE ASSOCIATION (ESD)
ESD S6.1 (2009) Grounding
ESD S7.1 (2005) Floor Materials Characterization of

Materials

(LEED-NC)
1.2 SUBMITTALS

SD-03 Product Data
Conductive Vinyl Tile and Accessories

Static-Dissipative Vinyl Tile and Accessories
Environmental Data
Adhesives
Manufacturer's descriptive data, documentation stating physical

characteristics, and mildew and germicidal characteristics.
Provide Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for all primers and
adhesives to the Contracting Officer. Highlight VOC emissions.
SD-04 Samples
Conductive Vinyl Tile and Accessories

Static-Dissipative Vinyl Tile and Accessories
Three samples of each color and type of flooring and base.

Sample size shall be minimum 3 x 3 inch.
SD-06 Test Reports
Testing
Moisture, Alkalinity And Bond Tests
SD-07 Certificates

Static-Dissipative Vinyl Tile
Adhesives
Qualifications of Applicator
Surface Preparation
Installation of Static-Control Resilient Flooring
Installation of Wall Base
Manufacturer's preprinted material describing floor surface

preparation and product installation. Cleaning and maintenance
instructions shall be included.

Static-Dissipative Vinyl Tile
Submit Data Package 1 in accordance with Section 01 78 23

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA.
Other Sustainable Requirements
The flooring manufacturer will approve the Qualifications of Applicator and

certify that he/she has a minimum of 3 years experience in the application
of the materials to be used.
Deliver materials to the building site in original unopened containers.

Store materials in a clean dry area with temperature maintained above 70
degrees F for two days prior to installation.
1.5 SCHEDULING
Schedule static-control vinyl flooring work after any other work which
would damage the finished surface of the flooring.
1.6 WARRANTY

PART 2 PRODUCTS

manufactured, within a500 mile radius from the project site, if available
from a minimum of three sources. See Section 01 33 29 LEED(tm)
DOCUMENTATION for cumulative total local/recycled material requirements.
Flooring materials may be locally available. Flooring and accessories may
contain post-consumer or post-industrial recycled content.
2.1.2 Fire Resistance Testing Requirements
Provide a minimum average critical radiant flux of 0.22 watts per square
centimeter for flooring in corridors and exits when tested in accordance
with ASTM E 648.
2.1.3 Other Sustainable Requirements
The following shall be submitted in accordance with LEED:
c. Documentation relative to local/regional materials credit in accordance

with LEED Reference Guide. Include in LEED Documentation Notebook.
d. Documentation relative to recycled content credit in accordance with

LEED Reference Guide. Include in LEED Documentation Notebook.
e. Documentation relative to low-emitting materials credit in accordance

with LEED Reference Guide. Include in LEED Documentation Notebook.
2.2 STATIC-CONTROL RESILIENT FLOORING
2.2.1 Static-Dissipative Vinyl Tile
Static-dissipative vinyl tile shall be a homogeneous vinyl product and

conform to ASTM F 1700. Electrical resistance from floor to ground shall
be 1,000,000 ohms (1.0 x 10 to the 6th) to 100,000,000 ohms (1.0 x 10 to
the 8th) when tested in accordance with ASTM F 150. Tile shall be 12inches
square and 1/8 inch thick. Tile shall be pregrooved for heat welding of
seams. As required, provide welding rods as recommended by the
manufacturer.
2.3 WALL BASE
Wall base shall conform to ASTM F 1861, Style B (coved - installed with
resilient flooring) 1/8 inch thick flooring. Provide 4 inch high and a
minimum 1/8 inch thick wall base. Provide job formed corners in matching
height, shape, and color.
2.4 ADHESIVES
Provide conductive adhesive as recommended by the manufacturer of the

static-control flooring. Adhesive for vinyl or rubber wall base shall be
as recommended by the wall base manufacturer. Provide adhesives that comply
with local indoor air quality standards. Adhesives shall meet the
requirements of LEED low emitting materials credit.
2.5 ACCESSORIES
Use accessories recommended by the manufacturer of the flooring.
2.6 ELECTRICAL GROUND CONNECTION
Provide an electrical ground connection that meets the requirements of

ESD S6.1. Connection between the static-control floor system and the
external grounding system shall be provided. Contact with the
static-control floor system shall be with conductive grounding strip and
shall have the greater of the following: a minimum contact area of 9
square inch or the dimensions recommended by the manufacturer. The
grounding conductor shall be as recommended by the manufacturer of the
flooring.
2.7 MANUFACTURER'S COLOR, PATTERN AND TEXTURE
Provide color, pattern and texture in accordance with Section 09 06 90

COLOR SCHEDULE andthe drawings. Provide flooring in any one continuous
area or replacement of damaged flooring in continuous area from same
production run with same shade and pattern.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 CONDITIONS REQUIREMENTS
3.1.1 Temperature
Areas to receive static-control resilient flooring shall be maintained at a

temperature above 70 degrees F for two days before, during, and after
application. A minimum temperature of 55 degrees F shall be maintained
thereafter.
Before any work under this section is begun, defects such as rough or
scaling concrete, low spots, high spots, and uneven surfaces shall have
been corrected, and damaged portions of concrete slabs shall have been
repaired in accordance with flooring manufacturer's recommended

instructions. Floor shall be in a level plane with a maximum variation of
1/8 inch every 10 feet, except where indicated as sloped. Repair cracks
and irregularities and prepare the subfloor in accordance with flooring
manufacturer's recommended instructions. Curing and sealing compounds
should not be used on concrete surfaces to receive static-control resilient
flooring. In addition, remove paint, varnish, oils, release agents,
sealers, waxes, and adhesives, as required by the flooring product in
accordance with manufacturer's printed installation instructions. If a
curing compound is required, it must be coordinated for compatibility with
the flooring adhesive.
3.2 MOISTURE, ALKALINITY AND BOND TESTS
Determine the suitability of the concrete subfloor for receiving the

flooring with regard to moisture content and pH level by moisture and
alkalinity tests. Conduct moisture testing in accordance with ASTM F 1869
or ASTM F 2170, unless otherwise recommended by the flooring manufacturer.
Conduct alkalinity testing as recommended by the flooring manufacturer.
Determine the compatibility of the flooring adhesives to the concrete
floors by a bond test in accordance with the flooring manufacturer's
recommendations.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF STATIC-CONTROL RESILIENT FLOORING
Static-control resilient flooring and ground connections and heat welded

joints shall be installed in accordance with the approved manufacturer's
installation instructions. Tile lines and joints shall be kept square,
symmetrical, tight, and even. Tile at the perimeter of the area to be
finished shall vary as necessary to maintain full-size tiles in the field,
but no perimeter tile shall be less than one-half the field tile size,
except where irregular shaped rooms make it impossible. Tile shall be cut,
fitted, and scribed to walls, partitions, and projections after field
flooring has been applied. A grounding strip shall be installed in
accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. Submit
manufacturer's preprinted material describing product installation.
Cleaning and maintenance instructions shall be included.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF WALL BASE
Install wall base in accordance with manufacturer's printed installation

instructions. Prepare and apply adhesives in accordance with
manufacturer's printed directions. Tighten base joints and make even with
adjacent resilient flooring. Fill voids along the top edge of base at
masonry walls with caulk. Roll entire vertical surface of base with hand
roller, and press toe of base with a straight piece of wood to ensure
proper alignment. Avoid excess adhesive in corners.
The flooring shall be cleaned in accordance with the manufacturer's

recommendations. Flooring shall be protected by a covering of heavy-duty
building paper before foot traffic is permitted. Boardwalks shall be
placed over flooring in areas where subsequent building operations might
damage the floor. Tiles that become loose, broken, or curled prior to
acceptance, or tiles that do not conform to resistance requirements of
ASTM F 150 or ESD S7.1 shall be removed and replaced.
3.6 TESTING
Test the flooring in accordance with and conform to the requirements of

ESD S6.1 and ESD S7.1.
SECTION 09 68 00
CARPET
AM#0002
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

AATCC TM 134 (2006; E 2008) Electrostatic Propensity of

Carpets
AATCC TM 16 (2004; E 2008) Colorfastness to Light
AATCC TM 165 (2008; E 2009) Colorfastness to Crocking:

Textile Floor Coverings - Crockmeter Method
ASTM D 5793 (2005) Binding Sites Per Unit Length or

Width of Pile Yarn Floor Coverings
ASTM D 5848 (2010e1) Mass Per Unit Area of Pile Yarn

Floor Coverings
ASTM D 6859 (2005) Standard Test Method for Pile

Thickness of Finished Level Pile Yarn
Floor Coverings
ASTM E 648 (2010) Standard Test Method for Critical



(LEED-NC)
16 CFR 1630 Standard for the Surface Flammability of

Carpets and Rugs (FF 1-70)

material requirements. Carpet materials may be locally available. Under
closeout submittals, furnish documentation relative to local/regional
materials credit in accordance with LEED Reference Guide. Include in LEED
1.3 SUBMITTALS

SD-02 Shop Drawings
Installation; G
Moldings; G
SD-03 Product Data
Carpet; G
Moldings; G
Surface Preparation; G
Installation; G
Regulatory Requirements; G
SD-04 Samples
Carpet; G
Moldings; G
SD-06 Test Reports
Moisture and Alkalinity Tests; G
SD-07 Certificates
Carpet; G
Regulatory Requirements; G
Carpet; G
Cleaning and Protection; G
Maintenance Service

Carpet; (LEED)
Adhesives and Concrete Primer; (LEED)
Provide the Carpet and Rug Institute (CRI) Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) label
for carpet, carpet cushion, and adhesives or demonstrate compliance with
testing criteria and frequencies through independent laboratory test
results. Carpet, carpet cushion, and adhesives bearing the label will
indicate that the carpet has been tested and meets the Regulatory
Requirements and criteria of the CRI IAQ Carpet Testing Program, and
minimizes the impact on indoor air quality. Submit certificates, showing
conformance with the referenced standards contained in this section, for
the following: Carpet Cushion and Molding. Submit threecopies of report
stating that carpet and carpet components contain recycled materials and/or
involvement in a recycling or reuse program. Include in the report
percentage of post-industrial and post-consumer recycled material .
Include independent, third party certification of compliance with Carpet
and Rug Institute's Green Label Indoor Air Quality program
Deliver materials to the site in the manufacturer's original wrappings and

packages clearly labeled with the manufacturer's name, brand name, size,
dye lot number, and related information. Remove materials from packaging
and store them in a clean, dry, well ventilated area and maintain at a
temperature above 60 degrees F for 2 days prior to installation. Do not
store carpet near materials that may offgas or emit harmful fumes, such as
kerosene heaters, fresh paint, or adhesives.
1.6 AMBIENT CONDITIONS
Maintain areas in which carpeting is to be installed at a temperature above

60 degrees F and below 90 degrees F for 2 days before installation, during
installation, and for 2 days after installation. Provide temporary
ventilation during work of this section. Maintain a minimum temperature of
55 degrees F thereafter for the duration of the contract. Do not permit
traffic or movement of furniture or equipment in carpeted area for 24 hours
after installation. Complete other work which would damage the carpet
prior to installation of carpet.
1.7 WARRANTY
Provide manufacturer's standard performance guarantees or warranties

including minimum ten (10) year wear warranty, two (2) year material and
workmanship and ten (10) year tuft bind and delamination.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 CARPET
Furnish first quality carpet; free of visual blemishes, streaks, poorly

dyed areas, fuzzing of pile yarn, spots or stains, and other physical and
manufacturing defects. Provide carpet materials and treatments as
reasonably nonallergenic and free of other recognized health hazards.
Provide a static control construction on all grade carpets which gives
adequate durability and performance. Provide the Carpet and Rug Institute
(CRI) Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) Label. Carpet type bearing the label will
indicate that carpet has been tested and meets the criteria of the CRI
Green Label Requirements for Indoor Air Quality Test Criteria. Provide
carpet tiles with Carpet Component Identification Codes as established by
the CRI for future recycling. The labels shall be permanently printed or
attached to the carpet backing. The codes shall identify, at minimum, the
carpet's face fiber, primary backing, and secondary backing. Submit
certificates of compliance from a laboratory accredited by the National
Laboratory Accreditation Program of the National Institute of Standards and
Technology attesting that each type of carpet and carpet with cushion
material conforms to the standards specified. Under closeout submittals,
furnish: 1) Documentation relative to recycled content credit in accordance
with LEED Reference Guide; 2) Documentation relative to low-emitting
materials credit in accordance with LEED Reference Guide; 3) Documentation
relative to rapidly renewable credit in accordance with LEED Reference
Guide; and include all three in LEED Documentation Notebook. Submit
Manufacturer's catalog data and printed documentation stating physical
characteristics, durability, resistance to fading, and flame resistance
characteristics for each type of carpet material and installation
accessory. Submit manufacturer's catalog data for the following items: 1)
Carpet Cushion and 2) Carpet Moldings. Submit samples of the following:
a. Carpet: Two "Production Quality" samples 24 by 24 inches of each

carpet proposed for use, showing quality, pattern, and color specified.
b. Vinyl or Aluminum Moldings: Two pieces of each type at least 12

inches long.
c. Special Treatment Materials: Two samples showing system and

installation method.
2.1.1 Physical Characteristics
2.1.2 Modular Tile
Carpet shall comply with the following:
a. Carpet Construction: PATTERN LOOP.
b. Type: NEW POSSIBILITIES TILE from Mannington or equal
c. Pile Type: Multilevel loop or Cut pile.
d. Pile Fiber: Commercial 100 percent branded (federally registered

trademark) nylon continuous filamentInvista Antron Lumena Type 6,6 Four
Hole, Hollow Filament Nylon, with Permanent
Stain and Bleach Protection, Static Control, and Duratech Soil
Resistant TreatmentSee Section 01 33 29 LEED(tm) DOCUMENTATION for
cumulative total recycled content requirements. Carpet pile fiber may
contain post-consumer or post-industrial recycled content.
e. Yarn Ply: Minimum 2.
f. Gauge or Pitch: Minimum 1/12 inch in accordance with ASTM D 5793.
g. Stitches or Rows/Wires: Minimum 8.16 per inch.
h. Surface Pile Weight: Minimum 18 Ounces Per Square Yard ounces per
square yard. This does not include weight of backings. Determine
weight in accordance with ASTM D 5848.
i. Pile Thickness: .100 Inchesin accordance with ASTM D 6859.
j. Pile Density: Minimum Average Density = 6,480; Weight Density =

116,640.
k. Dye Method: Solution dyed.
l. Backing Materials: See Section 01 33 29 LEED(tm) DOCUMENTATION for

cumulative total recycled content requirements. Carpet backing may
contain post-consumer or post-industrial recycled content and be
PVC-Free..PRIMARY BACKING: 100% Woven Synthetic
PRIMARY PRECOAT: 100% Non-Aqueous Closed Cell Polymer, Providing
Lifetime Warranty
Against Stain Wick-Back
SECONDARY BACKING: Infinity RE Modular Reinforced Composite Closed Cell
Polymer with Recycled Content
a. Static Control: Provide static control to permanently regulate

static buildup to less than 3.5 kV when tested at 20 percent relative
humidity and 70 degrees F in accordance with AATCC TM 134.
b. Flammability and Critical Radiant Flux Requirements: Comply carpet

with 16 CFR 1630. Provide carpet in corridors and exits with a minimum
average critical radiant flux of 0.45 watts per square centimeter when
tested in accordance with ASTM E 648.
c. Tuft Bind: Provide tuft bind force required to pull a tuft or loop
free from carpet backing with a minimum 10 pound average force for
loop pile.
d. Colorfastness to Crocking: Comply dry and wet crocking with

AATCC TM 165 and with a Class 4 minimum rating on the AATCC Color
Transference Chart for all colors.
e. Colorfastness to Light: Comply colorfastness to light with

AATCC TM 16, Test Option E "Water-Cooled Xenon-Arc Lamp, Continuous
Light" and with a minimum 4 grey scale rating after 40 hours.
2.3 ADHESIVES AND CONCRETE PRIMER
Adhesives and concrete primers shall comply with applicable regulations

regarding toxic and hazardous materials. Under closeout submittals,
furnish documentation relative to low-emitting materials credit in
accordance with LEED Reference Guide. Include in LEED Documentation
Notebook.
2.4 MOLDINGS
Install carpet moldings, either vinyl or aluminum, where floor covering

material changes or carpet edge does not abut a vertical surface. Provide
a heavy-duty vinyl molding designed for the type of carpet being

installed. Provide color to match resilient base.
PART 3 EXECUTION
Do not install carpet on surfaces that are unsuitable and will prevent a
proper installation. Prepare subfloor in accordance with flooring
manufacturer's recommended instructions. Repair holes, cracks,
depressions, or rough areas using material recommended by the carpet or
adhesive manufacturer. Free floor of any foreign materials and sweep
clean. Before beginning work, test subfloor with glue and carpet to
determine "open time" and bond. Submit threecopies of the manufacturer's
printed installation instructions for the carpet, including preparation of
substrate, seaming techniques, and recommended adhesives and tapes.
3.2 MOISTURE AND ALKALINITY TESTS
Test concrete slab for moisture content and excessive alkalinity in

accordance with CRI 104. Submit threecopies of test reports of moisture
and alkalinity content of concrete slab stating date of test, person
conducting the test, and the area tested.
3.3 PREPARATION OF CONCRETE SUBFLOOR
Do not commence installation of the carpeting until concrete substrate is

at least 90 days old. Prepare the concrete surfaces in accordance with
instructions of the carpet manufacturer. Match carpet, when required, and
adhesives to prevent off-gassing to a type of curing compounds, leveling
agents, and concrete sealer.
3.4 INSTALLATION
Perform all work by installers who are CFI certified (International

Certified Floorcovering Installer Association), or manufacturer's approved
installers. Conduct installation in accordance with the manufacturer's
printed instructions and CRI 104. Protect edges of carpet meeting hard
surface flooring with molding and install in accordance with the molding
manufacturer's printed instructions. Follow ventilation, personal
protection, and other safety precautions recommended by the adhesive
manufacturer. Continue ventilation during installation and for at least 72
hours following installation. Submit threecopies of drawings indicating
areas receiving carpet, carpet types, textures and patterns, direction of
pile, location of seams, and locations of edge molding. Submit
installation drawings for: 1) Carpet Cushion and 2) Carpet Moldings
diagramming the location of seams, edge moldings, and carpet direction for
approval prior to installation.
3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
Submit three copies of carpet manufacturer's maintenance instructions

describing recommended type of cleaning equipment and material, spotting
and cleaning methods, and cleaning cycles.
3.5.1 Cleaning
As specified in Section 01 78 00 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS. After installation

of the carpet, remove debris, scraps, and other foreign matter. Remove
soiled spots and adhesive from the face of the carpet with appropriate spot
remover. Cut off and remove protruding face yarn. Vacuum carpet clean.
3.5.2 Protection
Protect the installed carpet from soiling and damage with heavy,
reinforced, nonstaining kraft paper, plywood, or hardboard sheets. Lap and
secure edges of kraft paper protection to provide a continuous cover.
Restrict traffic for at least 48 hours. Remove protective covering when
directed by the Contracting Officer.
3.6 REMNANTS
Non-retained scraps shall be set aside and returned to manufacturer for

recycling into new product.
3.7 MAINTENANCE
3.7.1 Extra Materials
Provide extra material from same dye lot consisting of for future
maintenance. Provide a minimum of 10 percent of total square yards of each
carpet type, pattern, and color.
SECTION 09 90 00
PAINTS AND COATINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

AMERICAN CONFERENCE OF GOVERNMENTAL INDUSTRIAL HYGIENISTS (ACGIH)
ACGIH 0100Doc (2005) Documentation of the Threshold

Limit Values and Biological Exposure
Indices
ASME A13.1 (2007) Scheme for the Identification of

Piping Systems
ASTM D 2092 (1995; R 2001e1) Standard Guide for

Preparation of Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)
Steel Surfaces for Painting
ASTM D 235 (2002; R 2008) Mineral Spirits (Petroleum

Spirits) (Hydrocarbon Dry Cleaning Solvent)
ASTM D 4263 (1983; R 2005) Indicating Moisture in

Concrete by the Plastic Sheet Method
ASTM D 4444 (2008) Use and Calibration of Hand-Held

Moisture Meters

Gloss

Calcium Chloride
MPI 101 (Oct 2009) Epoxy Anti-Corrosive Metal

Primer
MPI 107 (Oct 2009) Rust Inhibitive Primer

(Water-Based)
MPI 138 (Oct 2009) Interior High Performance

Latex, MPI Gloss Level 2

MPI 141 (Oct 2009) Interior High Performance Latex

MPI Gloss Level 5
MPI 144 (Oct 2009) Institutional Low Odor / VOC

Interior Latex, MPI Gloss Level 2

MPI 146 (Oct 2009) Institutional Low Odor/VOC


Interior Latex, Semi-Gloss, MPI Gloss
Level 5
MPI 19 (Oct 2009) Inorganic Zinc Rich Primer
MPI 2 (Oct 2009) Aluminum Heat Resistant Enamel

(up to 427 C and 800 F
MPI 21 (Oct 2009) Heat Resistant Enamel, Gloss

(up to 205 degrees C and 400 degrees F),
MPI Gloss Level 6
MPI 23 (Oct 2009) Surface Tolerant Metal Primer
MPI 27 (Oct 2009) Exterior / Interior Alkyd Floor

Enamel, Gloss
MPI 4 (Oct 2009) Interior/Exterior Latex Block

Filler
MPI 44 (Oct 2009) Interior Latex, MPI Gloss Level

2
MPI 47 (Oct 2009) Interior Alkyd, Semi-Gloss, MPI

Gloss Level 5
MPI 48 (Oct 2009) Interior Alkyd, Gloss, MPI

Gloss Level 6
MPI 49 (Oct 2009) Interior Alkyd, Flat, MPI Gloss

Level 1
MPI 50 (Oct 2009) Interior Latex Primer Sealer
MPI 51 (Oct 2009) Interior Alkyd, Eggshell, MPI

Gloss Level 2
MPI 52 (Oct 2009) Interior Latex, MPI Gloss Level

3
MPI 54 (Oct 2009) Interior Latex, Semi-Gloss, MPI
Gloss Level 5
MPI 56 (Oct 2009) Interior Oil Modified Urethane

Clear Gloss
MPI 57 (Oct 2009) Interior Oil Modified Urethane

Clear Satin
MPI 71 (Oct 2009) Polyurethane, Moisture Cured,

Clear, Flat
MPI 77 (Oct 2009) Epoxy Gloss
MPI 79 (Oct 2009) Alkyd Anti-Corrosive Metal

Primer
MPI 9 (Oct 2009) Exterior Alkyd, Gloss, MPI

Gloss Level 6
MPI 90 (Oct 2009) Interior Wood Stain,

Semi-Transparent
MPI 94 (Oct 2009) Exterior Alkyd, Semi-Gloss, MPI

Gloss Level 5
SSPC Guide 6 (2004) Guide for Containing Debris

Generated During Paint Removal Operations
SSPC Guide 7 (2004; E 2004) Guide for the Disposal of

Lead-Contaminated Surface Preparation
Debris
SSPC PA 1 (2000; E 2004) Shop, Field, and

Maintenance Painting
SSPC PA Guide 3 (1982; E 1995) A Guide to Safety in Paint

Application
SSPC SP 1 (1982; E 2004) Solvent Cleaning
SSPC SP 2 (1982; E 2004) Hand Tool Cleaning
SSPC SP 7 (2007) Brush-Off Blast Cleaning
SSPC VIS 1 (2002; E 2004) Guide and Reference

Photographs for Steel Surfaces Prepared by
Dry Abrasive Blast Cleaning
SSPC VIS 3 (2004) Visual Standard for Power-and

Hand-Tool Cleaned Steel
EM 385-1-1 (2008) Safety and Health Requirements

Manual
FED-STD-313 (Rev D; Am 1) Material Safety Data,

Transportation Data and Disposal Data for
Hazardous Materials Furnished to
Government Activities
29 CFR 1910.1000 Air Contaminants
29 CFR 1910.1025 Lead
29 CFR 1926.62 Lead
1.2 SUBMITTALS

The current MPI, "Approved Product List" which lists paint by brand, label,
product name and product code as of the date of contract award, will be
used to determine compliance with the submittal requirements of this
specification. The Contractor may choose to use a subsequent MPI "Approved
Product List", however, only one list may be used for the entire contract
and each coating system is to be from a single manufacturer. All coats on
a particular substrate must be from a single manufacturer. No variation
from the MPI Approved Products List is acceptable.
Samples of specified materials may be taken and tested for compliance with
specification requirements.
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Piping identification
Submit color stencil codes
SD-03 Product Data
Coating; G,
Manufacturer's Technical Data Sheets
Sealant
SD-04 Samples
Color; G,
Submit manufacturer's samples of paint colors. Cross reference

color samples to color scheme as indicated.
Textured Wall Coating System; G,
Sample Textured Wall Coating System Mock-Up; G,
SD-07 Certificates
Applicator's qualifications
Qualification Testing laboratory for coatings; G
Application instructions
Mixing
Detailed mixing instructions, minimum and maximum application

temperature and humidity, potlife, and curing and drying times
between coats.
Manufacturer's Material Safety Data Sheets
Submit manufacturer's Material Safety Data Sheets for coatings,

solvents, and other potentially hazardous materials, as defined in
FED-STD-313.
Coatings:; G,
Preprinted cleaning and maintenance instructions for all coating

systems shall be provided.
LEED documentation relative to local/regional materials credit in

Materials; (LEED)


1.3 APPLICATOR'S QUALIFICATIONS
1.3.1 Contractor Qualification
Submit the name, address, telephone number, FAX number, and e-mail address
of the contractor that will be performing all surface preparation and
coating application. Submit evidence that key personnel have successfully
performed surface preparation and application of coatings on similar work
on a minimum of three similar projects within the past three years. List
information by individual and include the following:
a. Name of individual and proposed position for this work.
b. Information about each previous assignment including:
Position or responsibility
Employer (if other than the Contractor)
Name of facility owner
Mailing address, telephone number, and telex number (if non-US) of

facility owner
Name of individual in facility owner's organization who can be

contacted as a reference
Location, size and description of structure
Dates work was carried out
Description of work carried out on structure
1.4.1 Field Samples and Tests
The Contracting Officer may choose up to two coatings that have been
delivered to the site to be tested at no cost to the Government. Take
samples of each chosen product as specified in the paragraph "Sampling
Procedures." Test each chosen product as specified in the paragraph
"Testing Procedure." Products which do not conform, shall be removed from
the job site and replaced with new products that conform to the referenced
specification. Testing of replacement products that failed initial testing
shall be at no cost to the Government.
Another required testing is Batch Quality Conformance Testing to prove

conformance of the manufacturer's paint to the specified MPI standard.
This testing is accomplished before the materials are delivered to the job
site. Provide testing for paint products. Test paint products as
specified in the paragraph "Testing Procedure".
1.4.1.1 Sampling Procedure
The Contracting Officer will select paint at random from the products that
have been delivered to the job site for sample testing. The Contractor
shall provide one quart samples of the selected paint materials. The
samples shall be taken in the presence of the Contracting Officer, and
labeled, identifying each sample. Provide labels in accordance with the
paragraph "Packaging, Labeling, and Storage" of this specification.
1.4.1.2 Testing Procedure
Provide Batch Quality Conformance Testing for specified products, as

defined by and performed by MPI. As an alternative to Batch Quality
Conformance Testing, the Contractor may provide Qualification Testing for
specified products above to the appropriate MPI product specification,
using the third-party laboratory approved under the paragraph
"Qualification Testing" laboratory for coatings. The qualification testing
lab report shall include the backup data and summary of the test results.
The summary shall list all of the reference specification requirements and
the result of each test. The summary shall clearly indicate whether the
tested paint meets each test requirement. Note that Qualification Testing
may take 4 to 6 weeks to perform, due to the extent of testing required.
Submit name, address, telephone number, FAX number, and e-mail address of
the independent third party laboratory selected to perform testing of
coating samples for compliance with specification requirements. Submit
documentation that laboratory is regularly engaged in testing of paint
samples for conformance with specifications, and that employees performing
testing are qualified. If the Contractor chooses MPI to perform the Batch
Quality Conformance testing, the above submittal information is not
required, only a letter is required from the Contractor stating that MPI
will perform the testing.
1.4.2 Textured Wall Coating System
Three complete samples of each indicated type, pattern, and color of

textured wall coating system applied to a panel of the same material as
that on which the coating system will be applied in the work. Samples of
wall coating systems shall be minimum 125 x 175 mm (5 x 7 inches) and of
sufficient size to show pattern repeat and texture.
1.4.3 Sample Textured Wall Coating System Mock-Up
After coating samples are approved, and prior to starting installation, a

minimum 2430 mm x 2430 mm (8 foot x 8 foot) mock-up shall be provided for
each substrate and for each color and type of textured wall coating, using
the actual substrate materials. Once approved the mock-up samples shall be
used as a standard of workmanship for installation within the facility. At
least 48 hours prior to mock-up installation, the Contractor shall submit
written notification to the Contracting Officer's Representative.
1.5.1 Environmental Protection
In addition to requirements specified elsewhere for environmental

protection, provide coating materials that conform to the restrictions of
the local Air Pollution Control District and regional jurisdiction.
Notify Contracting Officer of any paint specified herein which fails to
conform.
1.5.2 Lead Content
Do not use coatings having a lead content over 0.06 percent by weight of
nonvolatile content.
1.5.3 Chromate Content
Do not use coatings containing zinc-chromate or strontium-chromate.
1.5.4 Asbestos Content
Materials shall not contain asbestos.
1.5.5 Mercury Content
Materials shall not contain mercury or mercury compounds.
1.5.6 Silica
Abrasive blast media shall not contain free crystalline silica.
1.5.7 Human Carcinogens
Materials shall not contain ACGIH 0100Doc and ACGIH 0100Doc confirmed human
carcinogens (A1) or suspected human carcinogens (A2).
1.6 PACKAGING, LABELING, AND STORAGE
Paints shall be in sealed containers that legibly show the contract

specification number, designation name, formula or specification number,
batch number, color, quantity, date of manufacture, manufacturer's
formulation number, manufacturer's directions including any warnings and
special precautions, and name and address of manufacturer. Pigmented
paints shall be furnished in containers not larger than 5 gallons. Paints
and thinners shall be stored in accordance with the manufacturer's written
directions, and as a minimum, stored off the ground, under cover, with
sufficient ventilation to prevent the buildup of flammable vapors, and at
temperatures between 40 to 95 degrees F.
1.7 SAFETY AND HEALTH
Apply coating materials using safety methods and equipment in accordance

with the following:
Work shall comply with applicable Federal, State, and local laws and
regulations, and with the ACCIDENT PREVENTION PLAN, including the Activity
Hazard Analysis as specified in Section 01 35 26 GOVERNMENT SAFETY
REQUIREMENTS and in Appendix A of EM 385-1-1. The Activity Hazard Analysis
shall include analyses of the potential impact of painting operations on
painting personnel and on others involved in and adjacent to the work zone.
1.7.1 Safety Methods Used During Coating Application
Comply with the requirements of SSPC PA Guide 3.
1.7.2 Toxic Materials
To protect personnel from overexposure to toxic materials, conform to the

most stringent guidance of:
a. The applicable manufacturer's Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS)

or local regulation.
b. 29 CFR 1910.1000.
c. ACGIH 0100Doc, threshold limit values.
d. The appropriate OSHA standard in 29 CFR 1910.1025 and

29 CFR 1926.62 for surface preparation on painted surfaces
containing lead. Removal and disposal of coatings which contain
lead is specified in Section 02 83 13.00 20 LEAD IN CONSTRUCTION."
Additional guidance is given in SSPC Guide 6 and SSPC Guide 7.
Refer to drawings for list of hazardous materials located on this
project. Contractor to coordinate paint preparation activities
with this specification section.
Comply, at minimum, with manufacturer recommendations for space ventilation

during and after installation.
1.8.1 Coatings
Do not apply coating when air or substrate conditions are:
a. Less than 5 degrees F above dew point;
b. Below 50 degrees F or over 95 degrees F, unless specifically

pre-approved by the Contracting Officer and the product
manufacturer. Under no circumstances shall application conditions
exceed manufacturer recommendations.

material requirements. Paint and coating materials may be locally
available.
1.10 COLOR SELECTION
Colors of finish coats shall be as indicated or specified. Where not

indicated or specified, colors shall be selected by the Contracting
Officer. Manufacturers' names and color identification are used for the
purpose of color identification only. Named products are acceptable for
use only if they conform to specified requirements. Products of other
manufacturers are acceptable if the colors approximate colors indicated and
the product conforms to specified requirements.
Tint each coat progressively darker to enable confirmation of the number of

coats.
Color, texture, and pattern of wall coating systems shall be in accordance

with Section 09 06 90 COLOR SCHEDULE.
1.11 LOCATION AND SURFACE TYPE TO BE PAINTED
1.11.1 Painting Included
Where a space or surface is indicated to be painted, include the following

unless indicated otherwise.
a. Surfaces behind portable objects and surface mounted articles

readily detachable by removal of fasteners, such as screws and
bolts.
b. New factory finished surfaces that require identification or color

coding and factory finished surfaces that are damaged during
performance of the work.
c. Existing coated surfaces that are damaged during performance of

the work.
1.11.1.1 Exterior Painting
Includes new surfaces, existing coated surfaces, and existing uncoated

surfaces, of the building and appurtenances. Also included are existing
coated surfaces made bare by cleaning operations.
1.11.1.2 Interior Painting
Includes new surfaces of the building and appurtenances as indicated and

existing coated surfaces made bare by cleaning operations. Where a space
or surface is indicated to be painted, include the following items, unless
indicated otherwise.
a. Exposed columns, girders, beams, joists, and metal deck; and
b. Other contiguous surfaces.
1.11.2 Painting Excluded
Do not paint the following unless indicated otherwise.
a. Surfaces concealed and made inaccessible by panelboards, fixed

ductwork, machinery, and equipment fixed in place.
b. Surfaces in concealed spaces. Concealed spaces are defined as

enclosed spaces above suspended ceilings, furred spaces, attic
spaces, crawl spaces, elevator shafts and chases.
c. Steel to be embedded in concrete.
d. Copper, stainless steel, aluminum, brass, and lead except existing

coated surfaces.
e. Hardware, fittings, and other factory finished items.
1.11.3 Mechanical and Electrical Painting
Includes field coating of interior and exterior new surfaces.
a. Where a space or surface is indicated to be painted, include the

following items unless indicated otherwise.
(1) Exposed piping, conduit, and ductwork;
(2) Supports, hangers, air grilles, and registers;
(3) Miscellaneous metalwork and insulation coverings.
b. Do not paint the following, unless indicated otherwise:
(1) New zinc-coated, aluminum, and copper surfaces under

insulation
(2) New aluminum jacket on piping
(3) New interior ferrous piping under insulation.
1.11.3.1 Fire Extinguishing Sprinkler Systems
Clean, pretreat, prime, and paint new fire extinguishing sprinkler systems
including valves, piping, conduit, hangers, supports, miscellaneous
metalwork, and accessories. Apply coatings to clean, dry surfaces, using
clean brushes. Clean the surfaces to remove dust, dirt, rust, and loose
mill scale. Immediately after cleaning, provide the metal surfaces with
one coat primer per schedules. Shield sprinkler heads with protective
covering while painting is in progress. Upon completion of painting,
remove protective covering from sprinkler heads. Remove sprinkler heads
which have been painted and replace with new sprinkler heads. Provide
primed surfaces with the following:
a. Piping in Unfinished Areas: Provide primed surfaces with one coat

of red alkyd gloss enamel applied to a minimum dry film thickness
of 1.0 mil in attic spaces, spaces above suspended ceilings, crawl
spaces, pipe chases, mechanical equipment room, and spaces where
walls or ceiling are not painted or not constructed of a
prefinished material. In lieu of red enamel finish coat, provide
piping with 2 inch wide red enamel bands or self-adhering red
plastic bands spaced at maximum of 20 foot intervals.
b. Piping in Finished Areas: Provide primed surfaces with two coats

of paint to match adjacent surfaces, except provide valves and
operating accessories with one coat of red alkyd gloss enamel
applied to a minimum dry film thickness of 1.0 mil. Provide
piping with 2 inch wide red enamel bands or self-adhering red
plastic bands spaced at maximum of 20 foot intervals throughout
the piping systems.
1.11.4 MISCELLANEOUS PAINTING
Lettering Building Room Number(s)
Lettering shall be provided as scheduled on the drawings, shall be block

type, and shall be water-type decalcomania, finished with a protective
coating of spar varnish. Samples shall be approved before application.
1.11.5 Definitions and Abbreviations
1.11.5.1 Qualification Testing
Qualification testing is the performance of all test requirements listed in

the product specification. This testing is accomplished by MPI to qualify
each product for the MPI Approved Product List, and may also be
accomplished by Contractor's third party testing lab if an alternative to
Batch Quality Conformance Testing by MPI is desired.
1.11.5.2 Batch Quality Conformance Testing
Batch quality conformance testing determines that the product provided is

the same as the product qualified to the appropriate product
specification. This testing shall only be accomplished by MPI testing lab.
1.11.5.3 Coating
A film or thin layer applied to a base material called a substrate. A

coating may be a metal, alloy, paint, or solid/liquid suspensions on
various substrates (metals, plastics, wood, paper, leather, cloth, etc.).
They may be applied by electrolysis, vapor deposition, vacuum, or
mechanical means such as brushing, spraying, calendaring, and roller
coating. A coating may be applied for aesthetic or protective purposes or
both. The term "coating" as used herein includes emulsions, enamels,
stains, varnishes, sealers, epoxies, and other coatings, whether used as
primer, intermediate, or finish coat. The terms paint and coating are used
interchangeably.
1.11.5.4 DFT or dft
Dry film thickness, the film thickness of the fully cured, dry paint or
coating.
1.11.5.5 DSD
Degree of Surface Degradation, the MPI system of defining degree of surface

degradation. Five (5) levels are generically defined under the Assessment
sections in the MPI Maintenance Repainting Manual.
1.11.5.6 EPP
Environmentally Preferred Products, a standard for determining

environmental preferability in support of Executive Order 13101.
1.11.5.7 EXT
MPI short term designation for an exterior coating system.
1.11.5.8 INT
MPI short term designation for an interior coating system.
1.11.5.9 micron / microns
The metric measurement for 0.001 mm or one/one-thousandth of a millimeter.
1.11.5.10 mil / mils
The English measurement for 0.001 in or one/one-thousandth of an inch,

equal to 25.4 microns or 0.0254 mm.
1.11.5.11 mm
The metric measurement for millimeter, 0.001 meter or one/one-thousandth of

a meter.
1.11.5.12 MPI Gloss Levels
MPI system of defining gloss. Seven (7) gloss levels (G1 to G7) are
generically defined under the Evaluation sections of the MPI Manuals.
Traditionally, Flat refers to G1/G2, Eggshell refers to G3, Semigloss
refers to G5, and Gloss refers to G6.
Gloss levels are defined by MPI as follows:
Gloss Description Units Units

Level @ 60 degrees @ 85 degrees
G1 Matte or Flat 0 to 5 10 max

G2 Velvet 0 to 10 10 to 35
G3 Eggshell 10 to 25 10 to 35
G4 Satin 20 to 35 35 min
G5 Semi-Gloss 35 to 70
G6 Gloss 70 to 85
G7 High Gloss
Gloss is tested in accordance with ASTM D 523. Historically, the

Government has used Flat (G1 / G2), Eggshell (G3), Semi-Gloss (G5), and
Gloss (G6).
1.11.5.13 MPI System Number
The MPI coating system number in each Division found in either the MPI
Architectural Painting Specification Manual or the Maintenance Repainting
Manual and defined as an exterior (EXT/REX) or interior system (INT/RIN).
The Division number follows the CSI Master Format.
1.11.5.14 Paint
See Coating definition.
1.11.5.15 REX
MPI short term designation for an exterior coating system used in

repainting projects or over existing coating systems.
1.11.5.16 RIN
MPI short term designation for an interior coating system used in

repainting projects or over existing coating systems.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
Conform to the coating specifications and standards referenced in PART 3.

Submit manufacturer's technical data sheets for specified coatings and
solvents.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PROTECTION OF AREAS AND SPACES NOT TO BE PAINTED
Prior to surface preparation and coating applications, remove, mask, or

otherwise protect, hardware, hardware accessories, machined surfaces,
radiator covers, plates, lighting fixtures, public and private property,
and other such items not to be coated that are in contact with surfaces to
be coated. Following completion of painting, workmen skilled in the trades
involved shall reinstall removed items. Restore surfaces contaminated by
coating materials, to original condition and repair damaged items.
Remove dirt, splinters, loose particles, grease, oil, and other foreign
matter and substances deleterious to coating performance as specified for
each substrate before application of paint or surface treatments. Oil and
grease shall be removed prior to mechanical cleaning. Cleaning shall be
programmed so that dust and other contaminants will not fall on wet, newly
painted surfaces. Exposed ferrous metals such as nail heads on or in
contact with surfaces to be painted with water-thinned paints, shall be
spot-primed with a suitable corrosion-inhibitive primer capable of
preventing flash rusting and compatible with the coating specified for the
adjacent areas.
3.2.1 Substrate Repair
a. Repair substrate surface damaged during coating removal;
b. Sand edges of adjacent soundly-adhered existing coatings so they

are tapered as smooth as practical to areas involved with coating
removal; and
c. Clean and prime the substrate as specified.
3.3 PREPARATION OF METAL SURFACES
3.3.1 Existing and New Ferrous Surfaces
a. Ferrous Surfaces including Shop-coated Surfaces and Small Areas

That Contain Rust, Mill Scale and Other Foreign Substances:
Solvent clean in accordance with SSPC SP 1 to remove oil and
grease. Where shop coat is missing or damaged, clean according to
SSPC SP 2, SSPC SP 3, SSPC SP 6, or SSPC SP 10. Brush-off blast
remaining surface in accordance with SSPC SP 7; Shop-coated
ferrous surfaces shall be protected from corrosion by treating and
touching up corroded areas immediately upon detection.
b. Surfaces With More Than 20 Percent Rust, Mill Scale, and Other
Foreign Substances: Clean entire surface in accordance with
SSPC SP 10/SSPC SP 12 WJ-2.
3.3.2 Final Ferrous Surface Condition:
For tool cleaned surfaces, the requirements are stated in SSPC SP 2 and
SSPC SP 3. As a visual reference, cleaned surfaces shall be similar to
photographs in SSPC VIS 3.
For abrasive blast cleaned surfaces, the requirements are stated in

SSPC SP 7, SSPC SP 6, and SSPC SP 10. As a visual reference, cleaned
surfaces shall be similar to photographs in SSPC VIS 1.
For waterjet cleaned surfaces, the requirements are stated in SSPC SP 12.
As a visual reference, cleaned surfaces shall be similar to photographs in
SSPC VIS 4.
3.3.3 Galvanized Surfaces
a. New or Existing Galvanized Surfaces With Only Dirt and Zinc

Oxidation Products: Clean with solvent, in accordance with
SSPC SP 1. If the galvanized metal has been passivated or
stabilized, the coating shall be completely removed by brush-off
abrasive blast. New galvanized steel to be coated shall not be
"passivated" or "stabilized" If the absence of hexavalent stain
inhibitors is not documented, test as described in ASTM D 2092,
Appendix X2, and remove by one of the methods described therein.
3.3.4 Non-Ferrous Metallic Surfaces
Aluminum and aluminum-alloy, lead, copper, and other nonferrous metal

surfaces.
a. Surface Cleaning: Solvent clean in accordance with SSPC SP 1 and

wash with mild non-alkaline detergent to remove dirt and water
soluble contaminants.
3.3.5 Terne-Coated Metal Surfaces
Solvent clean surfaces with mineral spirits, ASTM D 235. Wipe dry with
clean, dry cloths.
3.3.6 Existing Surfaces with a Bituminous or Mastic-Type Coating
Remove chalk, mildew, and other loose material by washing with a solution
of 1/2 cup trisodium phosphate, 1/4 cup household detergent, one quart 5
percent sodium hypochlorite solution and 3 quarts of warm water.
3.4 PREPARATION OF CONCRETE AND CEMENTITIOUS SURFACE
3.4.1 Concrete and Masonry
a. Curing: Concrete, stucco and masonry surfaces shall be allowed to

cure at least 30 days before painting, except concrete slab on
grade, which shall be allowed to cure 90 days before painting.
b. Surface Cleaning: Remove the following deleterious substances.
(1) Dirt, Chalking, Grease, and Oil: Wash new surfaces with a
solution composed of 1/2 cup trisodium phosphate, 1/4 cuphousehold
detergent, and 4 quarts of warm water. Then rinse thoroughly
with fresh water. For large areas, water blasting may be used.
(2) Fungus and Mold: Wash new surfaces with a solution composed
of 1/2 cup trisodium phosphate, 1/4 cup household detergent, 1
quart 5 percent sodium hypochlorite solution and 3 quarts of warm
water. Rinse thoroughly with fresh water.
(3) Paint and Loose Particles: Remove by wire brushing.
(4) Efflorescence: Remove by scraping or wire brushing followed

by washing with a 5 to 10 percent by weight aqueous solution of
hydrochloric (muriatic) acid. Do not allow acid to remain on the
surface for more than five minutes before rinsing with fresh
water. Do not acid clean more than 4 square feet of surface, per
workman, at one time.
c. Cosmetic Repair of Minor Defects: Repair or fill mortar joints

and minor defects, including but not limited to spalls, in
accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and prior to
coating application.
d. Allowable Moisture Content: Latex coatings may be applied to damp

surfaces, but not to surfaces with droplets of water. Do not
apply epoxies to damp vertical surfaces as determined by
ASTM D 4263 or horizontal surfaces that exceed 3 lbs of moisture
per 1000 square feet in 24 hours as determined by ASTM F 1869. In
all cases follow manufacturers recommendations. Allow surfaces to
cure a minimum of 30 days before painting.
3.4.2 Gypsum Board, Plaster, and Stucco
a. Surface Cleaning: Plaster and stucco shall be clean and free from
loose matter; gypsum board shall be dry. Remove loose dirt and
dust by brushing with a soft brush, rubbing with a dry cloth, or
vacuum-cleaning prior to application of the first coat material.
A damp cloth or sponge may be used if paint will be water-based.
b. Repair of Minor Defects: Prior to painting, repair joints,

cracks, holes, surface irregularities, and other minor defects
with patching plaster or spackling compound and sand smooth.
c. Allowable Moisture Content: Latex coatings may be applied to damp

surfaces, but not surfaces with droplets of water. Do not apply
epoxies to damp surfaces as determined by ASTM D 4263. New
plaster to be coated shall have a maximum moisture content of 8
percent, when measured in accordance with ASTM D 4444, Method A,
unless otherwise authorized. In addition to moisture content
requirements, allow new plaster to age a minimum of 30 days before
preparation for painting.
3.5 PREPARATION OF WOOD AND PLYWOOD SURFACES
3.5.1 New Plywood and Wood Surfaces, Except Floors:
a. Wood surfaces shall be cleaned of foreign matter.
Surface Cleaning: Surfaces shall be free from dust and other

deleterious substances and in a condition approved by the
Contracting Officer prior to receiving paint or other finish. Do
not use water to clean uncoated wood.
c. Moisture content of the wood shall not exceed 12 percent as

measured by a moisture meter in accordance with ASTM D 4444,
Method A, unless otherwise authorized.
d. Wood surfaces adjacent to surfaces to receive water-thinned paints

shall be primed and/or touched up before applying water-thinned
paints.
e. Cracks and Nailheads: Set and putty stop nailheads and putty
cracks after the prime coat has dried.
f. Cosmetic Repair of Minor Defects:
(1) Knots and Resinous Wood : Prior to application of coating,

cover knots and stains with two or more coats of 3-pound-cut
shellac varnish, plasticized with 5 ounces of castor oil per gallon.
Scrape away existing coatings from knotty areas, and sand before
treating. Prime before applying any putty over shellacked area.
(2) Open Joints and Other Openings: Fill with whiting putty,
linseed oil putty. Sand smooth after putty has dried.
(3) Checking: Where checking of the wood is present, sand the

surface, wipe and apply a coat of pigmented orange shellac. Allow
to dry before paint is applied.
g. Prime Coat For New Exterior Surfaces: Prime coat frames, and trim
before wood becomes dirty, warped, or weathered.
3.5.2 Wood Floor Surfaces, Natural Finish
a. Initial Surface Cleaning: As specified in paragraph entitled

"Surface Preparation."
3.5.3 Interior Wood Surfaces, Stain Finish
Interior wood surfaces to receive stain shall be sanded. Oak and other
open-grain wood to receive stain shall be given a coat of wood filler not
less than 8 hours before the application of stain; excess filler shall be
removed and the surface sanded smooth.
3.6 APPLICATION
3.6.1 Coating Application
Painting practices shall comply with applicable federal, state and local
laws enacted to insure compliance with Federal Clean Air Standards. Apply
coating materials in accordance with SSPC PA 1. SSPC PA 1 methods are
applicable to all substrates, except as modified herein.
At the time of application, paint shall show no signs of deterioration.

Uniform suspension of pigments shall be maintained during application.
Unless otherwise specified or recommended by the paint manufacturer, paint

may be applied by brush, roller, or spray. Use trigger operated spray
nozzles for water hoses. Rollers for applying paints and enamels shall be
of a type designed for the coating to be applied and the surface to be
coated. Wear protective clothing and respirators when applying oil-based
paints or using spray equipment with any paints.
Paints, except water-thinned types, shall be applied only to surfaces that

are completely free of moisture as determined by sight or touch.
Thoroughly work coating materials into joints, crevices, and open spaces.
Special attention shall be given to insure that all edges, corners,
crevices, welds, and rivets receive a film thickness equal to that of
adjacent painted surfaces.
Each coat of paint shall be applied so dry film shall be of uniform

thickness and free from runs, drops, ridges, waves, pinholes or other
voids, laps, brush marks, and variations in color, texture, and finish.
Hiding shall be complete.
Touch up damaged coatings before applying subsequent coats.
Apply paint to new fire extinguishing sprinkler systems including valves,

piping, conduit, hangers, supports, miscellaneous metal work, and
accessories. Shield sprinkler heads with protective coverings while
painting is in progress. Remove sprinkler heads which have been painted
and replace with new sprinkler heads. For piping in unfinished spaces,
provide primed surfaces with one coat of red alkyd gloss enamel to a
minimum dry film thickness of 1.0 mil. Unfinished spaces include attic
spaces, spaces above suspended ceilings, crawl spaces, pipe chases,
mechanical equipment room, and space where walls or ceiling are not painted
or not constructed of a prefinished material. For piping in finished
areas, provide prime surfaces with two coats of paint to match adjacent
surfaces, except provide valves and operating accessories with one coat of
red alkyd gloss enamel. Upon completion of painting, remove protective
covering from sprinkler heads.
a. Drying Time: Allow time between coats, as recommended by the

coating manufacturer, to permit thorough drying, but not to
present topcoat adhesion problems. Provide each coat in specified
condition to receive next coat.
b. Primers, and Intermediate Coats: Do not allow primers or

intermediate coats to dry more than 30 days, or longer than
recommended by manufacturer, before applying subsequent coats.
Follow manufacturer's recommendations for surface preparation if
primers or intermediate coats are allowed to dry longer than
recommended by manufacturers of subsequent coatings. Each coat
shall cover surface of preceding coat or surface completely, and
there shall be a visually perceptible difference in shades of
successive coats.
c. Finished Surfaces: Provide finished surfaces free from runs,

drops, ridges, waves, laps, brush marks, and variations in colors.
d. Thermosetting Paints: Topcoats over thermosetting paints (epoxies
and urethanes) should be applied within the overcoating window

recommended by the manufacturer.
e. Floors:
3.6.2 Mixing and Thinning of Paints
Reduce paints to proper consistency by adding fresh paint, except when

thinning is mandatory to suit surface, temperature, weather conditions,
application methods, or for the type of paint being used. Obtain written
permission from the Contracting Officer to use thinners. The written
permission shall include quantities and types of thinners to use.
When thinning is allowed, paints shall be thinned immediately prior to

application with not more than 1 pint of suitable thinner per gallon. The
use of thinner shall not relieve the Contractor from obtaining complete
hiding, full film thickness, or required gloss. Thinning shall not cause
the paint to exceed limits on volatile organic compounds. Paints of
different manufacturers shall not be mixed.
3.6.3 Two-Component Systems
Two-component systems shall be mixed in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions. Any thinning of the first coat to ensure proper penetration
and sealing shall be as recommended by the manufacturer for each type of
substrate.
3.6.4 Coating Systems
a. Systems by Substrates: Apply coatings that conform to the

respective specifications listed in the following Tables:
Table
Division 3.Exterior Concrete Paint Table

Division 4.Exterior Concrete Masonry Units Paint Table
Division 5.Exterior Metal, Ferrous and Non-Ferrous Paint Table
Division 6.Exterior Wood; Dressed Lumber, Paneling, Decking,
Shingles Paint Table
Division 9: Exterior Stucco Paint Table
Division 10. Exterior Cloth Coverings and Bituminous Coated
Surfaces Paint Table
Division 3. Interior Concrete Paint Table

Division 4. Interior Concrete Masonry Units Paint Table
Division 5. Interior Metal, Ferrous and Non-Ferrous Paint Table
Division 6. Interior Wood Paint Table
Division 9: Interior Plaster, Gypsum Board, Textured Surfaces
Paint Table
b. Minimum Dry Film Thickness (DFT): Apply paints, primers,

varnishes, enamels, undercoats, and other coatings to a minimum
dry film thickness of 1.5 mil each coat unless specified otherwise
in the Tables. Coating thickness where specified, refers to the
minimum dry film thickness.
c. Coatings for Surfaces Not Specified Otherwise: Coat surfaces

which have not been specified, the same as surfaces having similar
conditions of exposure.
d. Existing Surfaces Damaged During Performance of the Work,

Including New Patches In Existing Surfaces: Coat surfaces with
the following:
(1) One coat of primer.
(2) One coat of undercoat or intermediate coat.
(3) One topcoat to match adjacent surfaces.
3.7 COATING SYSTEMS FOR METAL
Apply coatings of Tables in Division 5 for Exterior and Interior.
a. Apply specified ferrous metal primer on the same day that surface
is cleaned, to surfaces that meet all specified surface
preparation requirements at time of application.
b. Inaccessible Surfaces: Prior to erection, use one coat of

specified primer on metal surfaces that will be inaccessible after
erection.
c. Shop-primed Surfaces: Touch up exposed substrates and damaged

coatings to protect from rusting prior to applying field primer.
d. Surface Previously Coated with Epoxy or Urethane: Apply MPI 101,

1.5 mils DFT immediately prior to application of epoxy or urethane
coatings.
e. Pipes and Tubing: The semitransparent film applied to some pipes

and tubing at the mill is not to be considered a shop coat, but
shall be overcoated with the specified ferrous-metal primer prior
to application of finish coats.
f. Exposed Nails, Screws, Fasteners, and Miscellaneous Ferrous

Surfaces. On surfaces to be coated with water thinned coatings,
spot prime exposed nails and other ferrous metal with latex primer
MPI 107.
3.8 COATING SYSTEMS FOR CONCRETE AND CEMENTITIOUS SUBSTRATES
Apply coatings of Tables in Division 3, 4 and 9 for Exterior and Interior.
3.9 COATING SYSTEMS FOR WOOD AND PLYWOOD
a. Apply coatings of Tables in Division 6 for Exterior and Interior.
b. Prior to erection, apply two coats of specified primer to treat

and prime wood and plywood surfaces which will be inaccessible
after erection.
c. Apply stains in accordance with manufacturer's printed

instructions.
3.10 PIPING IDENTIFICATION
Piping Identification, Including Surfaces In Concealed Spaces: Provide in
accordance with ASME A13.1. Place stenciling in clearly visible

locations. On piping not covered by ASME A13.1, stencil approved names or
code letters, in letters a minimum of 1/2 inch high for piping and a
minimum of 2 inches high elsewhere. Stencil arrow-shaped markings on
piping to indicate direction of flow using black stencil paint.
3.11 INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE
In addition to meeting previously specified requirements, demonstrate

mobility of moving components, including swinging and sliding doors,
cabinets, and windows with operable sash, for inspection by the Contracting
Officer. Perform this demonstration after appropriate curing and drying
times of coatings have elapsed and prior to invoicing for final payment.
As specified in the Waste Management Plan and as follows. Do not use

kerosene or any such organic solvents to clean up water based paints.
Properly dispose of paints or solvents in designated containers. Close and
seal partially used containers of paint to maintain quality as necessary
for reuse. Store in protected, well-ventilated, fire-safe area at moderate
temperature. Place materials defined as hazardous or toxic waste in
designated containers. Set aside extra paint for future color matches or
reuse by the Government.
3.13 PAINT TABLES
All DFT's are minimum values. Use only interior paints and coatings that
meet VOC requirements of LEED low emitting materials credit. Acceptable
products are listed in the MPI Green Approved Products List, available at
http://www.specifygreen.com/APL/ProductIdxByMPInum.asp.
3.13.1 EXTERIOR PAINT TABLES
DIVISION 5: EXTERIOR METAL, FERROUS AND NON-FERROUS PAINT TABLE
STEEL / FERROUS SURFACES
A. New Steel that has been hand or power tool cleaned to SSPC SP 2 or
SSPC SP 3
1. Alkyd
New; MPI EXT 5.1Q-G5 (Semigloss) Existing; MPI REX 5.1D-G5
Primer: Intermediate: Topcoat:
MPI 23 MPI 94 MPI 94
System DFT: 5.25 mils
New; MPI EXT 5.1Q-G6 (Gloss) / Existing; MPI REX 5.1D-G6

MPI 23 MPI 9 MPI 9
B. New Steel that has been blast-cleaned to SSPC SP 6:
2. Alkyd
STEEL / FERROUS SURFACES

New; MPI EXT 5.1D-G5 (Semigloss) / Existing; MPI REX 5.1D-G5
New; MPI EXT 5.1D-G6 (Gloss) / Existing; MPI REX 5.1D-G6

MPI 79 MPI 9 MPI 9
K. Hot metal surfaces subject to temperatures up to

205 degrees C (400 degrees F):
1. Heat Resistant Enamel

MPI EXT 5.2A
MPI 21 Surface preparation and number of coats per
System DFT: Per Manufacturer
L. Ferrous metal subject to high temperature, up to 400 degrees C (750

degrees F):
1. Inorganic Zinc Rich Coating

MPI EXT 5.2C
2. Heat Resistant Aluminum Enamel

MPI EXT 5.2B (Aluminum Finish)
3.13.2 INTERIOR PAINT TABLES
DIVISION 3: INTERIOR CONCRETE PAINT TABLE
A. New Concrete, vertical surfaces, not specified otherwise:
1. Latex
New; MPI INT 3.1A-G2 (Flat) / Existing; MPI RIN 3.1A-G2 (Flat)
System DFT: 4 mils
New; MPI INT 3.1A-G3 (Eggshell) / Existing; MPI RIN 3.1A-G3 (Eggshell)
System DFT: 4 mils
New; MPI INT 3.1A-G5 (Semigloss) / Existing; MPI RIN 3.1A-G5 (Semigloss)
DIVISION 3: INTERIOR CONCRETE PAINT TABLE

System DFT: 4 mils
2. High Performance Architectural Latex

New; MPI INT 3.1C-G2 (Flat) / Existing; MPI RIN 3.1J-G2 (Flat)
System DFT: 4 mils
New; MPI INT 3.1C-G3 (Eggshell) / Existing; MPI RIN 3.1J-G3 (Eggshell)
System DFT: 4 mils
New; MPI INT 3.1C-G4 (satin)/ Existing; MPI RIN 3.1J-G4

System DFT: 4 mils
New; MPI INT 3.1C-G5 (Semigloss) / Existing; MPI RIN 3.1J-G5 (Semigloss)
System DFT: 4 mils
3. Institutional Low Odor / Low VOC Latex

New; MPI INT 3.1M-G2 (Flat) / Existing; MPI RIN 3.1L-G2 (Flat)
System DFT: 4 mils
New; MPI INT 3.1M-G3 (Eggshell) / Existing; MPI RIN 3.1L-G3 (Eggshell)
System DFT: 4 mils
New; MPI INT 3.1M-G4 (satin)/ Existing; MPI RIN 3.1L-G4

System DFT: 4 mils
New; MPI INT 3.1M-G5 (Semigloss) / Existing; MPI RIN 3.1L-G5 (Semigloss)
System DFT: 4 mils
DIVISION 4: INTERIOR CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS PAINT TABLE
A. New Concrete masonry:
1.
MPI INT 4.2D-G3 (Eggshell)
DIVISION 4: INTERIOR CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS PAINT TABLE

Filler Primer: Intermediate: Topcoat:
MPI 4 N/A MPI 139 MPI 139
System DFT: 11 mils
MPI INT 4.2D-G4 (Satin)

System DFT: 11 mils
MPI INT 4.2D-G5 (Semigloss)

System DFT: 11 mils
Fill all holes in masonry surface

New; MPI INT 4.2E-G3 (Eggshell)

System DFT: 4 mils
New; MPI INT 4.2E-G4 (Satin)

System DFT: 4 mils
New; MPI INT 4.2E-G5 (Semigloss)

System DFT: 4 mils
DIVISION 5: INTERIOR METAL, FERROUS AND NON-FERROUS PAINT TABLE
INTERIOR STEEL / FERROUS SURFACES
A. Metal, Mechanical, Electrical, Fire extinguishing sprinkler systems

including valves, conduit, hangers, supports,Surfaces adjacent to
painted surfaces (Match surrounding finish),and
miscellaneous metal items not otherwise specified except floors, hot metal
surfaces, and new prefinished equipment:
1. High Performance Architectural Latex

MPI INT 5.1R-G2 (Flat)
System DFT: 5 mils
MPI INT 5.1R-G3 (Eggshell)

System DFT: 5 mils
MPI INT 5.1R-G5 (Semigloss)

System DFT: 5 mils
2. Alkyd
MPI INT 5.1E-G2 (Flat)
MPI INT 5.1E-G3 (Eggshell)

MPI INT 5.1E-G5 (Semigloss)

MPI INT 5.1E-G6 (Gloss)

B. Metal floors (non-shop-primed surfaces or non-slip deck surfaces) with

non-skid additive (NSA), load at manufacturer's recommendations.:
1. Alkyd Floor Paint

MPI INT 5.1U-G6 (Gloss)
MPI 79 MPI 27 MPI 27 (+NSA)
2. Epoxy
MPI INT 5.1L-G6 (Gloss)
MPI 101 MPI 77 MPI 77 (+NSA)
C. Metal in toilets, restrooms,

laundry areas, shower areas, areas requiring a high degree of
sanitation, and other high-humidity areas not otherwise
specified except floors, hot metal surfaces, and new prefinished equipment:
1. Alkyd
MPI INT 5.1E-G3 (Eggshell)
MPI INT 5.1E-G5 (Semigloss)

MPI INT 5.1E-G6 (Gloss)

2. Alkyd
MPI INT 5.1T-G3 (Eggshell) For hand tool cleaning
MPI INT 5.1T-G5 (Semigloss)

MPI INT 5.1T-G6 (Gloss)

DIVISION 6: INTERIOR WOOD PAINT TABLE
H. New Wood Doors; Natural

Finish or Stained:
1. Natural finish, oil-modified polyurethane

New; MPI INT 6.3K-G4 / Existing; MPI RIN 6.3K-G4
System DFT: 4 mils
New; MPI INT 6.3K-G6 (Gloss) / Existing; MPI RIN 6.3K-G6 (Gloss)
System DFT: 4 mils
Note: Sand between all coats per manufacturers recommendations.
2. Stained, oil-modified polyurethane

New; MPI INT 6.3E-G4 / Existing; MPI RIN 6.3E-G4
Stain: Primer: Intermediate: Topcoat:
MPI 90 MPI 57 MPI 57 MPI 57
System DFT: 4 mils
New; MPI INT 6.3E-G6 (Gloss) / Existing; MPI RIN 6.3E-G6 (Gloss)
System DFT: 4 mils
3. Stained, Moisture Cured Urethane

New; MPI INT 6.4V-G2 (Flat) / Existing; MPI RIN 6.4V-G2 (Flat)
System DFT: 4 mils
DIVISION 6: INTERIOR WOOD PAINT TABLE
DIVISION 9: INTERIOR PLASTER, GYPSUM BOARD, TEXTURED SURFACES PAINT TABLE
A. New Wallboard not

otherwise specified:
1. Latex
New; MPI INT 9.2A-G2 (Flat) / Existing; RIN 9.2A-G2 (Flat)
System DFT: 4 mils
New; MPI INT 9.2A-G3 (Eggshell) / Existing; RIN 9.2A-G3 (Eggshell)

System DFT: 4 mils
New; MPI INT 9.2A-G5 (Semigloss) / Existing; RIN 9.2A-G5 (Semigloss)

System DFT: 4 mils
2. High Performance Architectural Latex - High Traffic Areas

New; MPI INT 9.2B-G2 (Flat) / Existing; MPI RIN 9.2B-G2 (Flat)
System DFT: 4 mils
New; MPI INT 9.2B-G3 (Eggshell) / Existing; MPI RIN 9.2B-G3 (Eggshell)
System DFT: 4 mils
New; MPI INT 9.2B-G5 (Semigloss) / Existing; MPI RIN 9.2B-G5 (Semigloss)
System DFT: 4 mils

New; MPI INT 9.2M-G2 (Flat) / Existing; MPI RIN 9.2M-G2 (Flat)
System DFT: 4 mils
New; MPI INT 9.2M-G3 (Eggshell) / Existing; MPI RIN 9.2M-G3 (Eggshell)
System DFT: 4 mils
New; MPI INT 9.2M-G5 (Semigloss) / Existing; MPI RIN 9.2M-G5 (Semigloss)
DIVISION 9: INTERIOR PLASTER, GYPSUM BOARD, TEXTURED SURFACES PAINT TABLE

System DFT: 4 mils
SECTION 10 10 00
VISUAL COMMUNICATIONS SPECIALTIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES


ASTM F 152 (1995; R 2009) Tension Testing of

Nonmetallic Gasket Materials
The term visual display board when used herein includes presentation
boards, marker boards, tackboards, board cases, display track system and
horizontal sliding units. Visual display boards shall be from
manufacturer's standard product line.
1.3 SUBMITTALS

SD-03 Product Data
Visual Display Board; G,
Manufacturer's descriptive data and catalog cuts.

Manufacturer's installation instructions, and cleaning and
maintenance instructions.
Secure Fold Down Wall Desk; G,
SD-04 Samples
Aluminum; G,
Sections of frame, map rail, and chalktray, and two map hooks.
Porcelain Enamel; G,
Section showing porcelain enamel coating, steel, core material

and backing.
Materials; G,
Section of core material showing the lamination of colored cork,

natural cork, woven fabric and non-woven fabric. Sample of
hardwood and plastic laminate finish, and glass type. Samples
shall be minimum 4 by 4 inches and show range of color.
SD-07 Certificates
Visual Display Board
Certificate of compliance signed by Contractor attesting that

visual display board conform to the requirements specified.
Deliver Materials to the building site in the manufacturer's original

unopened containers and store them in a clean dry area with temperature
maintained above 50 degrees F. Stach materials according to manufacturer's
recommendations. Visual display boards shall be allowed to acclimate to
the building temperature for 24 hours prior to installation.
1.5 WARRANTY

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
2.1.1 Porcelain Enamel
Provide marker board writing surface composed of porcelain enamel fused to

a nominal 28 gauge thick steel, laminated to a minimum 1/4 inch thick core
material with a steel or foil backing sheet. Writing surface shall be
capable of supporting paper by means of magnets. Marker board surface for
display track system may be a powder paint dry erase surface adhered to a
nominal 18 gauge thick steel.
2.1.2 Natural Cork
Material shall be a single layer of pure grain natural cork without backing
or facing. The color shall be light tan. The cork sheet shall have a
tensile strength of not less than 40 psi when tested in accordance with
ASTM F 152.
2.1.3 Aluminum
Aluminum frame extrusions shall be alloy 6063-T5 or 6063-T6, conform to

ASTM B 221, and be a minimum 0.06 inches thick. Exposed aluminum shall
have an anodized, satin finish. Straight, single lengths shall be used
wherever possible. Joints shall be kept to a minimum. Corners shall be
mitered and shall have a hairline closure.
2.2 MARKERBOARD
Markerboard shall have a porcelain enamel writing surface and a chalktray.
Markerboard shall be a factory assembled unit complete in one piece,

without joints whenever possible. When markerboard dimensions require
delivery in separate sections, components shall be prefit at the factory,
disassembled for delivery and jointed at the site. Frame shall be aluminum.
Chalktray shall be the same material as the frame and extend the full
length of the liquid markerboard. The markerboard shall have a map rail.
The map rail with a tackable insert shall extend the full length of the
liquid chalkboard, and shall have map hooks with clips for holding sheets
of paper. Two map hooks shall be provided for each 4 foot of map rail.
Dry erase markings shall be removable with a felt eraser or dry cloth
without ghosting. Each unit shall come complete with an eraser and four
different color compatible dry erase markers. The size shall be 48-inches
by 96-inches each.
2.3 TACKBOARDS
2.3.1 Cork
Tackboard shall consist of a minimum 1/4 inch thick natural cork laminated
to a minimum 1/4 inch thick hardboard, and shall have an aluminum frame.
The size shall be 48-inches by 48-inches and 48-inches by 96-inches.
2.4 PROJECTION SCREEN, PROJECTOR MOUNT
Ceiling Recessed mount motorized projection screen shall have 120V motor
that is lubricated for life, quick reversal type, has overload protector,
integral gears, and preset accessible limit switches. Recessed mount
projection screens shall have an operable closure door and access panel.
Screen shall be flame retardant, mildew resistant, and with black masking
borders . Bottom of screen fabric shall be weighted with metal rod.
Roller shall be a rigid metal at least 3 inches in diameter mounted on
sound absorbing supports. Motor will be end mounted or motor-in-roller
design. Screen shall have a 3 position control switch to stop or reverse
screen at any point. The switch shall be installed in a flush electrical
box with cover plate, location(s) as shown on the electrical drawings.
Projection screen viewable area shall be minimum 96-inches high by
96-inches wide. Ceiling recessed case shall be extruded aluminum.
Contractor shall furnish and install a Universal Projector Mount system
aligned with the projection screen. Universal Projector Mount shall be
ceiling mounted, shall have 20 degrees of roll adjustment, 15 degrees of
pitch adjustment and 360 degrees of swivel. Universal Projector Mount shall
be capable of supporting a load of up to 50 pounds and shall extend to a
maximum of 6-inches below ceiling surface. Recessed ceiling mounted
projection screen and Universal Projector Mount shall be products of one
manufacturer. All conduit and wiring from the control switch to the
projection screen, and all wiring for the projector mount shall be
furnished and installed by the Contractor. Screen and projector mount
shall be UL listed.
2.5 COLOR
Finish colors for required items shall be as specified in Section 09 06 90

COLOR SCHEDULE and the drawings.
2.6 Secure Fold Down Wall Desk
Specifications
Size: 30" w x 20-3/4" h x 3-3/4" d

Interior Size: 30"w x 20-3/4"h x 3-3/4"d
Work Surface Size: 30"w x 18"d
Pen Shelf Size: 29"w x 2-3/4"d
Acrylic Retainer Size: 8-1/2"w x 8"h
Frame: 1/2" thick. Soft White Finish.
Work Surface Finish: Soft White Laminate
Door: Furnished with magnetic catch, smooth-gliding adjustable stays and
integral handle.
Mounting: Back panel pre-drilled for screw atachment.

Custom Applications: Recessed models, custom sizes and laminates are
available.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PLACEMENT SCHEDULE
Mounting height of visual display boards shall be 84-inches AFF.
Mounting height is defined as distance from finished floor to top of the

display board frame.
1. MARKERBOARD
a. Conference Rooms: Mount one markerboard centered on the long

wall on the storage room side of each conference room.
b. Training Rooms: Mount one markerboard centered on the long

wall opposite the entry door of each training room.
c. Platoon Offices (Admin): Mount one markerboard centered on

the long wall opposite the entry door of each platoon office.
d. Platoon Offices (Readiness Module): Mount one markerboard

centered on the short wall on the left side of the entry door of
each platoon office.
2. TACKBOARD
a. Conference Rooms: Mount one 48-inches by 48-inches tackboard

on each side of the markerboard. Tackboards shall be butted to the
markerboard.
b. Training Rooms: Mount one 48-inches by 48-inches tackboard

centered on each of the walls perpendicular to the wall on which
the markerboard is mounted in each training room.
c. Platoon Offices (Admin): Mount one 48-inches by 48-inches

tackboard centered on each of the walls perpendicular to the wall
on which the markerboard is mounted in each platoon office.
d. Platoon Offices (Readiness Module): Mount one 48-inches by

96-inches tackboard centered on the wall opposite the wall on
which the markerboard is mounted in each platoon office.
3. PROJECTION SCREEN, PROJECTOR MOUNT
a. Conference Rooms: Install ceiling recessed mounted projection

screen centered on the markerboard and 6-inches in front of the
markerboard in each conference room. Install projector mount
system aligned with the projection screen in each conference room.
3.2 INSTALLATION
Perform installation and assembly in accordance with manufacturer's printed

instructions. Use concealed fasteners. Visual display boards shall be
attached to the walls with suitable devices to anchor each unit. furnish
and install trim items, accessories and miscellaneous items in total,
including but not limited to hardware, grounds, clips, backing materials,
adhesives, brackets, and anchorages incidental to or necessary for a sound,
secure, complete and finished installation. Installation shall not be
initiated until completion of room painting and finishing operations.
Visual display boards shall be installed in locations and at mounting
heights indicated. Visual display boards shall be installed level and
plumb, and if applicable doors shall be aligned and hardware shall be
adjusted. Damaged units shall be repaired or replaced as directed by the
3.3 CLEANING
Writing surfaces shall be cleaned in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions.
SECTION 10 14 01
EXTERIOR SIGNAGE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES


Finishes

Buildings
AWS C1.1M/C1.1 (2000; R 2006)Resistance Welding

Code - Steel

Formability

Steel Products

Structural Steel

the Hot-Dip Process

Aluminum-Alloy Permanent Mold Castings




Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings

Glass
ASTM D 3841 (1997e1; R 2008) Standard Specification

for Glass Fiber-Reinforced Polyester
Plastic Panels

Materials
SAE AMS3611 (1994; Rev D; R 2003) Plastic Sheet,

Polycarbonate General Purpose
1.2 SUBMITTALS

SD-02 Shop Drawings
Approved Detail Drawings; G
Drawings showing elevations of each type of sign; dimensions,

details, and methods of mounting or anchoring; shape and thickness
of materials; and details of construction. A schedule showing the
location, each sign type, and message shall be included.
SD-03 Product Data
Modular Exterior Signage System
Manufacturer's descriptive data and catalog cuts.
Installation
Manufacturer's installation instructions and cleaning

instructions.
Exterior Signage; G
Exterior signage schedule in electronic media with spread sheet

format. Spread sheet shall include sign location, sign type, and
message.
Wind Load Requirements
Design analysis and supporting calculations performed in support

of specified signage.
SD-04 Samples
Exterior Signage; G
One 12 inch length of framing for exterior signs. One sample of

each type of sign. Each sample shall consist of a complete sign
panel with letters and symbols. Samples may be installed in the
work, provided each sample is identified and location recorded.
Three color samples for each material requiring color and 12 inch
square sample of sign face color sample.
Protection and Cleaning
Six copies of maintenance instructions listing routine

maintenance procedures, possible breakdowns and repairs, and
troubleshooting guides. The instructions shall include simplified
diagrams for the equipment as installed.
1.3 GENERAL
All exterior signage shall be provided by a single manufacturer. Exterior

signage shall be of the design, detail, sizes, types, and message content
shown on the drawings, shall conform to the requirements specified, and
shall be provided at the locations indicated. Signs shall be complete with
lettering, framing as detailed, and related components for a complete
installation. Recyclable materials shall conform to EPA requirements in
accordance with Section 01 62 35 RECYCLED / RECOVERED MATERIALS.
1.4 WIND LOAD REQUIREMENTS
Exterior signage shall be designed to withstand 100 mph windload.
1.5 CHARACTER PROPORTIONS AND HEIGHTS
Letters and numbers on indicated signs for handicapped-accessible buildings

shall have a width-to-height ratio between 3:5 and 1:1 and a
stroke-width-to-height ratio between 1:5 and 1:10. Characters and numbers
on indicated signs shall be sized according to the viewing distance from
which they are to be read. The minimum height is measured using an upper
case letter "X". Lower case characters are permitted.
1.6 QUALIFICATIONS
Signs, plaques, and dimensional letters shall be the standard product of a

manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of the products. Items
of equipment shall essentially duplicate equipment that has been in
satisfactory use at least 2 years prior to bid opening.
Materials shall be wrapped for shipment and storage, delivered to the

jobsite in manufacturer's original packaging, and stored in a clean, dry
area in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
1.8 WARRANTY
Manufacturer's standard performance guarantees or warranties that extend

beyond a one year period shall be provided.
1.9 EXTRA STOCK
The Contractor shall provide 6 extra interchangeable message panels and

extra stock of the following: 50 changeable message strips for sign type .
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MODULAR EXTERIOR SIGNAGE SYSTEM
Exterior signage shall consist of a system of coordinated directional,

identification, and regulatory type signs located where shown. Dimensions,
details, materials, message content, and design of signage shall be as
shown.
2.1.1 Free-Standing Base Mount Pylon/Monolith Type Signs
2.1.1.1 Framing
Interior framing shall consist of aluminum orgalvanized steel tube columns

welded to companion plates. Perimeter framing shall consist of aluminumor
steel angle framing welded to the post and plate system as designed.
Framing members shall be designed to permit access to electrical equipment
andpanel removal. Mounting shall be provided as shown. Framing members of
steel shall be finished with semi-gloss baked enamel or two-component
acrylic polyurethane. Openings shall be sealed from moisture and made
tamper-proof.
2.1.1.2 Exterior Sheeting Panels
Modular panels shall be provided in sizes shown on drawings. Panels shall

be fabricated a minimum of 0.090 inch thick aluminumorsteel.
2.1.1.3 Mounting
Mounting shall be provided by securing to concrete foundation as shown.
2.1.1.4 Finishes
Base finish shall be semi-gloss baked enamelortwo-component acrylic

polyurethane. Metal panel system finish shall be baked enamel or
two-component acrylic polyurethane .
2.1.2 Panel And Post/Panel Type Signs
2.1.2.1 Posts
One-piece aluminumorgalvanized steel posts shall be provided with minimum

0.125 inch wall thickness. Posts shall be designed to accept panel framing
system described. The post shall be designed to permit attachment of panel
framing system without exposed fasteners. Caps shall be provided for each
post.
2.1.2.2 Panel Framing System
Panel framing consisting of aluminum sections and interlocking track

components shall be designed to interlock with posts with concealed
fasteners.
2.1.2.3 Panels
Modular message panels shall be provided in sizes shown on drawings.

Panels shall be fabricated a minimum of 0.090 inch aluminumor 0.125 inch
acrylic. Panels shall be designed to be interchangeable.Panels with metal
return sheeting shall have welded corners, ground smooth.
2.1.2.4 Finishes
Post finish shall be semi-gloss baked enameloranodized conforming to

AA DAF-45. Metal panel system finish shall be baked enamel or
two-component acrylic polyurethane.
2.1.2.5 Mounting
Permanent mounting shall be provided by embedding posts in concrete

foundation as shown.Removable mounting shall be provided by a steelor an
aluminumflange embedded in concrete as shown.
2.1.3 Changeable Letter Directories
2.1.3.1 Frame and Trim
Aluminum alloy finish shall be bronze anodized.
2.1.3.2 Header Plates
Header plate shall consist of background metal matching frame and having
raised letters attached through the back.Header plate shall consist of
acrylic with raised acrylic letters.
2.1.3.3 Door Glazing
Door glazing shall be clear safety or tempered glass minimum 1/4 inch thick.
2.1.3.4 Door Construction
Door frame shall be of same material and finish as surrounding frame.

Corners shall be mitered , welded, and assembled with concealed fasteners.
Hinges shall be standard with manufacturer, in finish to match frames and
trim. Glazing shall be set in frame with resilient glazing channels.
2.1.3.5 Door Locks
Door locks shall be manufacturer's standard and shall be keyed alike.
2.1.3.6 Fabrication
Frames and trim shall be assembled with corners welded and mitered to
hairline fit, with no exposed fasteners. Removable changeable directory
panel shall consist of 1/4 inch thick white acrylic with clear acrylic
letter tracksrubber back with corkboard covering backgrooved 1/4 inch on
centers to receive letters.
2.1.3.7 Finishes
Post finish shall be semi-gloss baked enameloranodized conforming to

AA DAF-45. Metal panel system finish shall be baked enamel or
two-component acrylic polyurethane.
2.1.3.8 Mounting
Directories shall be mounted to supporting structures with concealed

fasteners in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
2.1.3.9 Changeable Letters
Changeable letters shall be upper-case or upper and lower-case helvetica

medium. .
2.2 GRAPHICS FOR EXTERIOR SIGNAGE SYSTEMS
2.2.1 Graphics
Signage graphics shall conform to the following:
a. Custom fabricator Plate aluminum letters, 1/2 inch thick shall be

provided and fastened to the message panel with concealed fasteners.
b. Pressure sensitive precision cut vinyl letters with reflecting

surfaceshall be provided.
d. Message letters shall be cut out from panel. Panel cutouts shall
be backed with 0.080 inch FRPor 0.125 inch acrylic where cutouts occur.
2.2.2 Messages
See Garrison for message content. Typeface: Helvetica medium. Type size
to match existing building.
2.3 METAL PLAQUES
Design and location of plaques shall be as shown.
2.3.1 Cast Metal Plaques
2.3.1.1 Fabrication
Cast metal plaques shall have the logo, emblem and artwork cast in the flat
relief technique. Plaques shall be fabricated from bronze.
2.3.1.2 Size
Plaque size shall be per base Army and Base standards.
2.3.1.3 Border
Border shall be bevel.
2.3.1.4 Background
Background texture shall be leather.
2.3.1.5 Mounting
Mounting shall be concealed.
2.3.1.6 Finish
Finishes shall consist of bronze with dark finish oxidized background.

Letters shall be satin polished and entire plaque sprayed with two coats of
clear lacquer.bronze with sprayed background.
2.4 DIMENSIONAL BUILDING LETTERS
2.4.1 Fabrication
Letters shall be fabricated from extruded aluminum. Letters shall be

cleaned by chemical etching or cleaned ultrasonically in a special
degreasing bath. Letters shall be packaged for protection until
installation.
2.4.2 Typeface
Typeface shall be helvetica medium.
2.4.3 Size
Letter size shall match surrounding buildings.
2.4.4 Finish
Finish to match existing buidings .
2.4.5 Mounting
Steel U-bracket, cap screws, and expansion bolts of number and size as
recommended by manufacturer, shall be used for concealed anchorage.
Letters which project from the building line shall have stud spacer
sleeves. Letters, studs, and sleeves shall be of the same material.
Templates for mounting shall be supplied.
2.5 ALUMINUM ALLOY PRODUCTS
Aluminum alloy products shall conform to ASTM B 209 for sheet or plate,
ASTM B 221 for extrusions and ASTM B 26/B 26M or ASTM B 108/B 108M for
castings. Aluminum extrusions shall be provided at least 1/8 inch thick
and aluminum plate or sheet at least 16 gauge thick. Welding for aluminum
products shall conform to AWS C1.1M/C1.1.
2.6 ANODIC COATING
Anodized finish shall conform to AA DAF-45 as follows:
Clear (natural) designation AA-M10-C22-A31, Architectural Class II 0.4

mil or thicker.
2.7 ORGANIC COATING
Surfaces shall be cleaned, primed, and given a semi-gloss baked enamel or

two-component acrylic polyurethane finish in accordance with NAAMM AMP 500,
AMP 505, with total dry film thickness not less than 1.2 mils.
2.8 STEEL PRODUCTS
Structural steel products shall conform to ASTM A 36/A 36M. Sheet and
strip steel products shall conform to ASTM A 1011/A 1011M. Welding for
steel products shall conform to AWS D1.2/D1.2M.
2.9 CAST BRONZE
Components shall be fabricated with sharp corners, flat faces, and accurate
profiles. Burrs and rough spots shall be removed and polished. Faces
shall be finished to a uniform high luster. Cast bronze shall be in
accordance with ASTM B 62.
2.10 VINYL SHEETING FOR GRAPHICS
Vinyl sheeting shall be 5 to 7 year premium type and shall be in accordance

with the flammability requirements of ASTM E 84 and shall be a minimum
0.003 inch film thickness. Film shall include a precoated pressure
sensitive adhesive backing, Class 1, or positionable pressure sensitive
adhesive backing, Class 3.
2.11 GLASS
Glass shall be in accordance with ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1, Quality q3

and ANSI Z97.1.
2.12 FIBER-REINFORCED POLYESTER (FRP) PANELS
Fiber-reinforced polyester (FRP) shall be in accordance with ASTM D 3841,

Type II, Grade 1, Class 124, .
2.13 ACRYLIC SHEET
Acrylic sheet shall be in accordance with the flammability requirements of

ASTM E 84 and shall conform to ANSI Z97.1.
2.14 POLYCARBONATE SHEET
Polycarbonate sheet shall conform to SAE AMS3611.
2.15 ANCHORS AND FASTENERS
Exposed anchor and fastener materials shall be compatible with metal to

which applied and shall match in color and finish and shall be non-rusting,
non-corroding, and non-staining. Exposed fasteners shall be tamper-proof.
2.16 SHOP FABRICATION AND MANUFACTURE
2.16.1 Factory Workmanship
Work shall be assembled in the shop, as far as practical, ready for

installation at the site. Work that cannot be shop assembled shall be
given a trial fit in the shop to ensure proper field assembly. Holes for
bolts and screws shall be drilled or punched. Drilling and punching shall
produce clean, true lines and surfaces. Welding to or on structural steel
shall be in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M. Welding shall be continuous
along the entire area of contact. Exposed welds shall be ground smooth.
Exposed surfaces of work shall have a smooth finish and exposed riveting
shall be flush. Fastenings shall be concealed where practical. Items
specified to be galvanized shall be by hot-dip process after fabrication if
practical. Galvanization shall be in accordance with ASTM A 123/A 123M and
ASTM A 653/A 653M, as applicable. Other metallic coatings of steel sheet
shall be in accordance with ASTM A 924/A 924M. Joints exposed to the
weather shall be formed to exclude water. Drainage and weep holes shall be
included as required to prevent condensation buildup.
Where dissimilar metals are in contact, or where aluminum is in contact

with concrete, mortar, masonry, wet or pressure-treated wood, or absorptive
materials subject to wetting, the surfaces shall be protected with a coat
of asphalt varnish or a coat of zinc-molybdate primer to prevent galvanic
or corrosive action.
2.16.3 Shop Painting
Surfaces of miscellaneous metal work, except nonferrous metal, corrosion

resisting steel, and zinc-coated work, shall be given one coat of
zinc-molybdate primer or an approved rust-resisting treatment and metallic
primer in accordance with manufacturer's standard practice. Surfaces of
items to be embedded in concrete shall not be painted. Upon completion of
work, damaged surfaces shall be recoated.
2.17 COLOR, FINISH, AND CONTRAST
Color shall be selected from manufacturers standard colors.Colors must

match surrounding buildings and Garrison standards Color listed is not
intended to limit the selection of equal colors from other manufacturers.
For buildings required to be handicapped-accessible, the characters and
background of signs shall be eggshell, matte, or other non-glare finish.
Characters and symbols shall contrast with their background - either light
characters on a dark background or dark characters on a light background.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
Signs, plaques, or dimensional letters shall be installed in accordance

with approved manufacturer's instructions at locations shown on the
approved detail drawings. Circuits installed underground shall conform to
the requirements of Section 33 70 02.00 10 ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM,
UNDERGROUND. Steel conduits installed underground and illuminated signage
mounted directly on buildings shall be in conformance with the requirements
of Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Signs shall be installed
plumb and true at mounting heights indicated, and by method shown or
specified. Signs mounted on other surfaces shall not be installed until
finishes on such surfaces have been completed.
3.1.1 Anchorage
Anchorage and fastener materials shall be in accordance with approved

manufacturer's instructions for the indicated substrate. Anchorage not
otherwise specified or indicated shall include slotted inserts, expansion
shields, and powder-driven fasteners when approved for concrete; toggle
bolts and through bolts for masonry; machine carriage bolts for steel; lag
bolts and screws for wood.
3.1.2 Protection and Cleaning
The work shall be protected against damage during construction. Hardware

and electrical equipment shall be adjusted for proper operation. Glass,
frames, and other sign surfaces shall be cleaned in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions. After signs are completed and inspected, the
Contractor shall cover all project identification, directional, and other
signs which may mislead the public. Covering shall be maintained until
instructed to be removed by the Contracting Officer or until the facility
is to be opened for business. Signs shall be cleaned, as required, at time
of cover removal.
3.2 FIELD PAINTED FINISH
Miscellaneous metals and frames shall be field painted in accordance with

Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS. Anodized metals, masonry, and glass
shall be protected from paint. Finish shall be free of scratches or other
blemishes.
SECTION 10 14 02
INTERIOR SIGNAGE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

designation only.

Finishes
AA PK-1 (2008) Pink Sheets: Designations and

Chemical Composition Limits for Aluminum
Alloys in the Form of Castings and Ingot
AAMA 2604 (2005) Voluntary Specification,

Performance Requirements and Test
Procedures for High Performance Organic
Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels

Buildings


36 CFR 1191 Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA)

Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and
Facilities
Provide interior signage of the design, detail, sizes, types, and message
content shown on the drawings/attachments/signage placement schedule (as
applicable), conforming to the requirements specified, and placed at the

locations indicated. Signs shall be complete with lettering, framing as
detailed, and related components for a complete installation. Signage
shall be obtained from a single manufacturer with edges and corners of
finished letterforms and graphics true and clean. Recyclable materials
shall conform to EPA requirements in accordance with Section 01 62 35
RECYCLED / RECOVERED MATERIALS.
1.3 SUBMITTALS

SD-02 Shop Drawings
Detail Drawings; G,
Drawings showing elevations of each type of sign, dimensions,

details and methods of mounting or anchoring, mounting height,
shape and thickness of materials, and details of construction. A
schedule showing the location, each sign type, and message shall
be included.
SD-03 Product Data
Installation
Manufacturer's descriptive data, catalogs cuts, installation and

cleaning instructions.
SD-04 Samples
Interior Signage
One sample of each of the following sign types showing typical

quality, workmanship and color. The samples may be installed in
the work, provided each sample is identified and location recorded.
a. Directional sign.
b. Standard Room sign.
c. Changeable message strip sign.
Software
One copy of the software for user produced signs
Approved Manufacturer's Instructions

Protection and Cleaning
Six copies of operating instructions outlining the step-by-step
procedures required for system operation. The instructions shall

include simplified diagrams for the system as installed. Six
copies of maintenance instructions listing routine procedures,
repairs, and guides. The instructions shall include the
manufacturer's name, model number, service manual, parts list, and
brief description of all equipment and their basic operating
features. Each set shall be permanently bound and shall have a
hard cover. The following identification shall be inscribed on
the covers: the words "OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS",
name and location of the facility, name of the Contractor, and
contract number.
Materials shall be packaged to prevent damage and deterioration during

shipment, handling, storage and installation. Product shall be delivered
to the jobsite in manufacturer's original packaging and stored in a clean,
dry area in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS
Provide paper inserts and software for creating text and symbols for IBM
compatible computers for Owner production of paper inserts after project
completion and equipment necessary for removal of signage parts and pieces.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 STANDARD PRODUCTS
Signs, plaques, and dimensional letters shall be the standard product of a

manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of such products that
essentially duplicate signs that have been in satisfactory use at least 2
years prior to bid opening.
2.2 ROOM IDENTIFICATION/DIRECTIONAL SIGNAGE SYSTEM
2.2.1 Standard Room Signs
Signs shall consist of acrylic plastic 0.080 inch thickness minimum

conforming to ANSI Z97.1
a. Frames shall be aluminum 3/4" wide.
b. End caps shall be aluminum with round style corners.
c. Units shall be frameless. Corners of signs shall be rounded.
2.2.2 Changeable Message Strip Signs
Changeable message strip signs shall be of same construction as standard

room signs to include a clear sleeve that will accept a paper or plastic
insert identifying changeable text. Provide paper and software for
creating text and symbols for IBM compatible computers for Owner production
of paper inserts after project completion.
2.2.3 Type of Mounting For Signs
Provide extruded aluminum brackets for hanging, projecting, and

double-sided signs. Mounting for framed, hanging, and projecting signs
shall be by mechanical fasteners.
2.2.4 Graphics
Signage graphics for modular signs shall conform to the following:
Surface Applied Photopolymer: Integral graphics and braille achieved

by photomechanical stratification processes. Photopolymer used for ADA
compliant graphics shall be of the type that has a minimum durometer
reading of 90. Tactile graphics shall be raised 1/32 inch from the
first surface of plaque by photomechanical stratification process.
2.2.5 Character Proportions and Heights
Letters and numbers on signs conform to 36 CFR 1191.
2.2.6 Raised and Braille Characters and Pictorial Symbol Signs (Pictograms)
Raised letters and numbers on signs shall conform to 36 CFR 1191.
2.3 BUILDING DIRECTORIES
Building directories shall be lobby directories or floor directories, and

shall be provided with a changeable directory listing consisting of the
areas, offices and personnel located within the facility. Dimensions,
details, and materials of sign and message content shall be as shown on the
drawings.
2.3.1 Header Panel
Header panel shall be acrylic with raised acrylic letters.
2.4 DIMENSIONAL BUILDING LETTERS
2.4.1 Fabrication
Letters shall be cleaned by chemical etching or cleaned ultrasonically in a

special degreasing bath. Letters shall be packaged for protection until
installation.
2.4.2 Typeface
Typeface shall be as indicated on drawings and to match that of the nearby

adjacent buildings.. ALL SIGNAGE TO BE CONSTRUCTED AND INSTALLED
ACCORDING TO DEPARTMENT OF ARMY STANDARDS.
2.4.3 Size
Letter size shall be as indicated on drawings and to match that of the

nearby adjacent buildings.CONTRACTOR TO SUBMIT SIGNAGE TEXT TO USER
GROUP FOR REVIEW AND APPROVAL PRIOR TO
FABRICATION.
2.4.4 Finish
Finsh shall be as indicated on drawings and to match that of the nearby

adjacent buildings.
2.4.5 Mounting
Steel U-bracket, cap screws, and expansion bolts of number and size
recommended by manufacturer, shall be supplied for concealed anchorage.
Letters which project from the mounting surface shall have stud spacer
sleeves. Letters, studs, and sleeves shall be of the same material.
Templates for mounting shall be supplied.
2.5 PRESSURE SENSITIVE LETTERS
Ensure that edges and corners of finished letterforms and graphics are true
and clean. Do not use letterforms and graphics with rounded positive or
negative corners, nicked, cut, or ragged edges.
2.5.1 Typeface
To match that of existing nearby adjacent buildings.
2.5.2 Size
To match that of existing nearby adjacent buildings.
2.6 ALUMINUM ALLOY PRODUCTS
Aluminum extrusions shall be at least 1/8 inch thick, and aluminum plate or
sheet shall be at least 0.0508 inch thick. Extrusions shall conform to
ASTM B 221; plate and sheet shall conform to ASTM B 209. Where anodic
coatings are specified, alloy shall conform to AA PK-1 alloy designation
514.0. Exposed anodized aluminum finishes shall be as shown. Welding for
aluminum products shall conform to AWS D1.2/D1.2M.
2.7 ANODIC COATING
Anodized finish shall conform to AA DAF-45 as follows:
a. Clear (natural) designation AA-M10-C22-A31, Architectural Class II

0.4 mil or thicker.
b. Integral color anodized designation AA-M10-C22-A32, Architectural

Class 0.4 to 0.7 mil.
c. Electrolytically deposited color-anodized designation

AA-M10-C22-A34, Architectural Class II 0.4 to 0.7 mil.
2.8 ORGANIC COATING
Organic coating shall conform to AAMA 2604, with total dry film thickness
not less than 1.2 mils.
2.9 FABRICATION AND MANUFACTURE
2.9.1 Factory Workmanship
Holes for bolts and screws shall be drilled or punched. Drilling and
punching shall produce clean, true lines and surfaces. Exposed surfaces of
work shall have a smooth finish and exposed riveting shall be flush.
Fastenings shall be concealed where practicable.
Where dissimilar metals are in contact, the surfaces will be protected to

prevent galvanic or corrosive action.
2.10 COLOR, FINISH, AND CONTRAST
Color shall be in accordance with Section 09 06 90 COLOR SCHEDULE. Finish

of all signs shall be eggshell, matte, or other non-glare finish as
required in handicapped-accessible buildings.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
Signs shall be installed plumb and true and in accordance with approved
manufacturer's instructions at locations shown on the detail drawings and
to match that of the nearby adjacent buildings. Mounting height and
mounting location shall conform to 36 CFR 1191. Required blocking shall be
installed. Signs on doors or other surfaces shall not be installed until
finishes on such surfaces have been installed. Signs installed on glass
surfaces shall be installed with matching blank back-up plates in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.1.1 Anchorage
Anchorage shall be in accordance with approved manufacturer's

instructions. Anchorage not otherwise specified or shown shall include
slotted inserts, expansion shields, and powder-driven fasteners when
approved for concrete; toggle bolts and through bolts for masonry; machine
carriage bolts for steel; lag bolts and screws for wood. Exposed anchor
and fastener materials shall be compatible with metal to which applied and
shall have matching color and finish. Where recommended by signage
manufacturer, foam tape pads may be used for anchorage. Foam tape pads
shall be minimum 1/16 inch thick closed cell vinyl foam with adhesive
backing. Adhesive shall be transparent, long aging, high tech formulation
on two sides of the vinyl foam. Adhesive surfaces shall be protected with a
5 mil green flatstock treated with silicone. Foam pads shall be sized for
the signage in accordance with signage manufacturer's recommendations.
Signs mounted to painted gypsum board surfaces shall be removable for
painting maintenance. Signs mounted to lay-in ceiling grids shall be
mounted with clip connections to ceiling tees.
3.1.2 Protection and Cleaning
Protect the work against damage during construction. Hardware and

electrical equipment shall be adjusted for proper operation. Glass,
frames, and other sign surfaces shall be cleaned at completion of sign
installation in accordance with the manufacturer's approved instructions.
SECTION 10 21 13
TOILET COMPARTMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES


Finishes

Steel Products

Strip
ASTM A 385/A 385M (2009) Standard Practice for Providing

High-Quality Zinc Coatings (Hot-Dip)

ICC A117.1 (2003; R 2004) Standard for Accessible and

Usable Buildings and Facilities
CID A-A-60003 (Basic) Partitions, Toilet, Complete
36 CFR 1191 Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA)

Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and
Facilities
Provide a complete and usable toilet partition system, including toilet

enclosures, room entrance screens, urinal screens, system of panels,
hardware, and support components. and Affirmative Procurement
guidelines. Furnish the partition system from a single manufacturer, with
a standard product as shown in the most recent catalog data. Submit

Fabrication Drawings for metal toilet partitions and urinal screens
consisting of fabrication and assembly details to be performed in the
factory. Submit manufacturer's Cleaning and Maintenance Instructions with
Fabrication Drawings for review.
1.2.1 Sustainable Design Requirements
1.2.1.1 Local/Regional Materials

for cumulative total local material requirements. Toilet partition
materials may be locally available.
1.3 SUBMITTALS

submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. Submit
the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Installation Drawings
Drawings showing plans, elevations, details of construction,

hardware, reinforcing, fittings, mountings, and anchorings for
metal partitions and urinal screens. Installation drawings as
specified.
SD-03 Product Data
Toilet Partition System

Cleaning and Maintenance Instructions
Colors And Finishes
Partition Panels and Doors

Anchoring Devices and Fasteners
Hardware and Fittings
Brackets
Door Hardware
Overhead-Braced Partitions
Manufacturer's technical data and catalog cuts including

installation and cleaning instructions.
SD-04 Samples
Colors and Finishes

Manufacturer's standard color charts and color samples.
Partition Panels
Three samples showing a finished edge on two adjacent sides and

core construction, each not less than 12-inch square
Hardware and Fittings

Anchoring Devices and Fasteners
Three samples of each item. Approved hardware samples may be

installed in the work if properly identified.
SD-07 Certificates
Certification
Documentation of product quality, as specified.
Waste Management
Conform to ICC A117.1 code for access for the handicapped operation of
toilet compartment door and hardware.
Deliver materials in the manufacturer's original unopened packages with the

brand, item identification, and project reference clearly marked. Store
components in a dry location that is adequately ventilated; free from dust,
water, other contaminants, and damage during delivery, storage, and
construction.
1.6 WARRANTY
Provide Certification or warranties that metal toilet partitions will be

free of defects in materials, fabrication, finish, and installation and
will remain so for a period of not less than 15 years after completion.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
2.1.1 Anchoring Devices and Fasteners
Provide steel anchoring devices and fasteners hot-dipped galvanized after

fabrication, in conformance with ASTM A 385/A 385M and ASTM A 123/A 123M.
Conceal all galvanized anchoring devices.
2.1.2 Brackets
Wall brackets shall be two-ear panel brackets, T-style, 1-inch stock.

Provide stirrup style panel-to-pilaster brackets.
2.1.3 Hardware and Fittings
Conform hardware for the toilet partition system to CID A-A-60003 for the
specified type and style of partitions. Provide hardware finish highly
resistant to alkalies, urine, and other common toilet room acids. Comply
latching devices and hinges for handicap compartments with 36 CFR 1191;
provide stainless steel devices and hinges with door latches that operate
without either tight grasping or twisting of the wrist of the operator.
d. Aluminum shall conform to ASTM B 221.
e. Corrosion-resistant steel shall conform to ASTM A 167, Type 302 or

304.
2.1.3.2 Finishes
c. Aluminum shall have a clear anodic coating conforming to AA DAF-45.
d. Corrosion-resistant steel shall have a No. 4 finish.
e. Exposed fasteners shall match the hardware and fittings.
2.1.4 Door Hardware
2.1.4.1 Hinges
Hinges shall be adjustable to hold in-swinging doors open at any angle up

to 90 degrees and outswinging doors to 10 degrees. Provide
self-lubricating hinges with the indicated swing. Hinges shall be the
surface-mounted type.
2.1.4.2 Latch and Pull
Latch and pull shall be a combination rubber-faced door strike and keeper
equipped with emergency access.
2.1.4.3 Coat Hooks
Coat hooks shall be combination units with hooks and rubber tipped pins.
2.2 PARTITION PANELS AND DOORS
Provide partition panels and doors not less than 1 inch thick with face
sheets not less than 0.0396 inch thick.
2.2.1 Toilet Enclosures
Conform toilet enclosures to CID A-A-60003, Type I, Style C, overhead braced.

Furnish width, length, and height of toilet enclosures as shown. Finish
surface of panels shall be solid phenolic, Finish 4; water resistant;
graffiti resistant; non-absorbent; . . Reinforce panels indicated to
receive toilet paper holders or grab bars for mounting of the items
required. Provide grab bars to withstand a bending stress, shear stress,

shear force, and a tensile force induced by 250 lbf. Grab bars shall not
rotate within their fittings.
2.2.2 Urinal Screens
Conform urinal screens to CID A-A-60003, Type III, Style A, floor supported.
Provide finish for surface of screens as solid phenolic, Finish 4; water
resistant; graffiti resistant; non-absorbent; . . Furnish width and
height of urinal screens as shown. Secure wall hung urinal screens with
42 inch long, continuous flanges. Fabricat screens from the same types of
panels and pilasters as the toilet partitions. Use corrosion-resistant
steel fittings and fasteners.
2.3 HARDWARE
Hardware for the toilet partition system shall conform to CID A-A-60003 for
the specified type and style of partitions. Hardware finish shall be
highly resistant to alkalies, urine, and other common toilet room acids.
Hardware shall include: chrome plated non ferrous cast pivot hinges,
gravity type, adjustable for door close positioning; nylon bearings; black
anodized aluminum door latch; door strike and keeper with rubber bumper;
and cast alloy chrome plated coat hook and bumper. Latching devices and
hinges for handicap compartments shall comply with 36 CFR 1191 and shall be
chrome-plated steel or stainless steel door latches that operate without
either tight grasping or twisting of the wrist of the operator. Screws and
bolts shall be stainless steel, tamper proof type. Wall mounting brackets
shall be continuous, full height, aluminum or stainless steel , in
accordance with toilet compartment manufacturer's instructions.
Floor-mounted anchorage shall consist of corrosion-resistant anchoring
assemblies with threaded rods, lock washers, and leveling adjustment nuts
at pilasters for structural connection to floor.
2.4 COLORS AND FINISHES
2.4.1 Colors
Provide manufacturer's standard color charts for color of finishes for

toilet partition system components.
2.4.2 Finishes No.4 and No. 5
Provide solid plastic fabricated of polymer resins (polyethylene) formed

under high pressure rendering a single component section not less than one
inch thick. Colors shall extend throughout the panel thickness. Provide
exposed finish surfaces: smooth, waterproof, non-absorbant, and resistant
to staining and marking with pens, pencils, or other writing devices.
Solid plastic partitions shall not show any sign of deterioration when
immersed in the following chemicals and maintained at a temperature of 80
degrees F for a minimum of 30 days:
a. Acetic Acid (80 percent) Hydrochloric Acid (40 percent)

b. Acetone Hydrogen Peroxide (30 percent)
c. Ammonia (liquid) Isopropyl Alcohol
d. Ammonia Phosphate Lactic Acid (25 percent)
e. Bleach (12 percent) Lime Sulfur
f. Borax Nicotine
g. Brine Potassium Bromide
h. Caustic Soda Soaps
i. Chlorine Water Sodium Bicarbonate

j. Citric Acid Trisodium Phosphate
k. Copper Chloride Urea; Urine
l. Core Oils Vinegar
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
Take field measurements prior to the preparation of drawing and fabrication

to ensure proper fits. Verify that field measurements, surfaces,
substrates and conditions are as required, and ready to receive work.
Verify correct spacing of plumbing fixtures. Verify correct location of
built in framing, anchorage, and bracing. Report in writing to Contracting
Officer prevailing conditions that will adversely affect satisfactory
execution of the work of this section. Do not proceed with work until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
Install partitions rigid, straight, plumb, and level, with the panels
centered between the fixtures. Provide a panel clearance of not more than
1/2 inch and secure the panels to walls and pilasters with not less than
two wall brackets attached near the top and bottom of the panel. Locate
wall brackets so that holes for wall bolts occur in masonry or tile
joints. Secure Panels to pilasters with brackets matching the wall
brackets. Provide for adjustment due to minor floor variations. Locate
head rail joints at pilaster center lines. Install adjacent components for
consistency of line and plane. Equip each door with hinges, one door
latch, and one coat hook and bumper. Align hardware to uniform clearance
at vertical edges of doors.
a. Secure panels to hollow plastered walls with toggle bolts using not
less than 1/4-20 screws of the length required for the wall thickness.
Toggle bolts shall have a load-carrying strength of not less than 600
pounds per anchor.
b. Secure panels to ceramic tile on hollow plastered walls or hollow

concrete-masonry walls with toggle bolts using not less than 1/4-20
screws of the length required for the wall thickness. Toggle bolts
shall have a load-carrying strength of not less than 600 pounds per
anchor.
c. Secure panels to solid masonry or concrete with lead or brass

expansion shields designed for use with not less than 1/4-20 screws,
with a shield length of not less than 1-1/2 inch. Expansion shields
shall have a load-carrying strength of not less than 600 pounds per
anchor.
d. Submit Installation Drawings for metal toilet partitions and urinal

screens showing plans, elevations, details of construction, hardware,
reinforcing and blocking, fittings, mountings and escutcheons.
Indicate on drawingsthe type of partition, location, mounting height,
cutouts, and reinforcement required for toilet-room accessories.
3.3 OVERHEAD-BRACED PARTITIONS
Secure pilasters to the floor with the anchorage device specified. Make
all leveling devices readily accessible for leveling, plumbing, and
tightening the installation. Secure overhead brace to the pilaster face

with not less than two fasteners per face. Expansion shields shall have a
minimum 2-inch penetration into the concrete slab. Make tops of doors
parallel with the overhead brace when doors are in a closed position.
3.4 FINAL ADJUSTMENT
After completion of the installation, make final adjustments to the

pilaster-leveling devices, door hardware, and other working parts of the
partition assembly. Doors shall have a uniform vertical edge clearance of
approximately 3/16 inch and shall rest open at approximately 30 degrees
when unlatched.
3.5 CLEANING
Baked enamel finish shall be touched up with the same color of paint that
was used for the finish. Clean all surfaces of the work, and adjacent
surfaces soiled as a result of the work, in an approved manner compliant
with the manufacturer's recommended cleaning and protection from damage
procedures until accepted. Remove all equipment, tools, surplus materials,
and work debris from the site.
Identify manufacturer's policy for collection or return of construction

scrap, unused material and packaging material. Institute demolition and
construction waste separation and recycling to take advantage of
manufacturer's programs. When such a service is not available, seek local
recyclers to reclaim the materials.
SECTION 10 22 13
WIRE MESH PARTITIONS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES


Structural Steel
1.2 SUBMITTALS

SD-02 Shop Drawings
Wire mesh partitions
Show layout, details, materials, dimensions, finishes, and all

information necessary for fabrication and installation.
SD-03 Product Data
Wire mesh partitions
Submit for each type of partition, door, and window.
Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened containers or

packaging with labels intact and legible. Deliver, store, and handle
materials so as to prevent damage. Replace damaged or defective materials
with new.
1.4 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
Wire mesh partitions shall be all wire type , heavy duty for extra heavy
industrial use, and shall be provided complete with fasteners, capping
bars, adjustable floor sockets, bracing, doors, ceiling hardware, and other
items necessary for a complete, useable, and rigid installation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
2.1.1 Steel Shapes, Plates, and Bars
ASTM A 36/A 36M.
2.1.2 Cold-Formed Steel
AISI SG03-3.
2.1.3 Wire Mesh
Carbon steel wire, woven diamond mesh, intermediate crimped.
2.1.4 Floor Sockets
Cast or forged steel or ductile iron, adjustable, approximately 2 1/2 inches

high.
2.2 HEAVY DUTY PARTITIONS AND CEILINGS
2.2.1 Wire Mesh
6 gage wire, 2 inch mesh.
2.2.2 Panel Frames (Walls and Ceiling)
1 1/2 by 3/4 by 1/8 inch steel channels.
2.2.3 Center Reinforcing Bar
One 1 1/2 by 3/4 by 1/8 inch channel with all wires woven through, or two 1
1/4 by 3/8 by 1/8 inch channels bolted together with mesh in between.
2.2.4 Capping Bar
Structural steel channel, 3 inch by 4.1 pounds.
2.2.5 Corner Posts
Structural steel angles, 1 3/4 by 1 3/4 by 1/8 inch.
2.2.6 Line Posts
Unless otherwise indicated, provide partitions with flat bar line posts
bolted between vertical frame channels. Sizes of posts shall be as follows:
Partition Height Size of Posts
7 feet to 12 feet 2 1/2 by 5/16 inch
12 feet to 16 feet 3 by 5/16 inch or 2 1/2 by 3/8 inch
16 feet to 20 feet 3 1/2 by 5/16 inch
2.2.7 Hinged Doors
Frames shall be 1 1/2 by 3/4 by 1/8 inch channels with 1 1/2 by 1/8 inch
flat bar cover on top and bottom rails and on hinge stile and a 1 5/8 by
7/8 by 1/8 inch angle riveted to the lock stile. Provide 1 1/2 pairs of
heavyweight, wrought steel, non-removable pin, butt hinges riveted or
welded to the door and the door opening frame for each door.
2.3 DOOR OPENING FRAMES
Provide frames the same size and shape as the vertical frames for the mesh
panels.
2.4 LOCKS
Provide each door with a mortise type lock with a six-pin tumbler lock
cylinder on the outside and a recessed knob on the inside.
2.5 SERVICE WINDOWS
Slide up type, mounted in standard mesh panel reinforced with channel

tracks. Opening shall be 24 inches wide by 15 inches high unless otherwise
indicated. Provide two spring loaded latches, operable only from the
inside, to lock window in open and closed positions. Form shelf of 12 gage
sheet steel, 12 inches deep by 36 inches wide, unless otherwise indicated.
2.6 FABRICATION
2.6.1 Standard Panels
Wire shall be woven into diamond mesh, intermediate crimped, and securely
clinched to frames. Joints shall be mortised and tenoned. Wire shall be
continuous at center reinforcing bars, either woven through a single
channel or bolted between two channels. Panel vertical frames shall have
3/8 inch bolt holes 18 inches o.c. for heavy duty partitions.
2.6.2 Doors and Service Windows
Construction shall be similar to that specified for panels. Wire mesh

shall be the same as that used in the adjacent partition panels.
2.6.3 Finish
Thoroughly clean ferrous metal, treat with phosphate, and paint with gray
enamel in the shop.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
3.1.1 Wire Mesh Partitions
Install plumb, level, and true to line, within a tolerance of 1/8 inch in
10 feet or the height or run of the partition, if less than 10 feet.
Anchor floor sockets to the floor with expansion bolts. Vertical frames
and posts shall be bolted together with 3/8 inch bolts 18 inches o.c. for
heavy duty partitions. Secure top frames to a continuous capping bar with
1/4 inch diameter U bolts not more than 28 inches o.c.
3.1.2 Doors and Service Windows
Install in accordance with the manufacturers' recommendations. Adjust as

required so that doors , windows, and hardware operate freely and properly.
3.1.3 Bracing
Brace free standing partitions more than 20 feet in length, at intervals

not greater than 20 feet with a steel channel brace connected to the
capping bar and anchored to the building wall or framing member .
3.1.4 Touch-Up
Clean and paint scratches, abrasions, and other damage to shop painted
surfaces to match the shop-applied finish.
SECTION 10 26 13
WALL AND CORNER GUARDS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES


Finishes

Strip

ASTM D 256 (2006e1) Determining the Izod Pendulum

Impact Resistance of Plastics
ASTM D 543 (2006) Standard Practices for Evaluating

the Resistance of Plastics to Chemical
Reagents

Horizontal Position

Materials
ASTM G 21 (1996; R 2002) Determining Resistance of

Synthetic Polymeric Materials to Fungi
SAE J1545 (2005) Instrumental Color Difference

Measurement for Exterior Finishes,
Textiles and Colored Trim
1.2 SUBMITTALS

SD-02 Shop Drawings
Corner Guards
Drawings indicating locations and typical elevations of each

type of item. Show on the drawings vertical and horizontal
dimensions, full size sections, thickness of materials, and
fastening details.
SD-03 Product Data
Corner Guards
Manufacturer's descriptive data, catalog cuts, installation

instructions, and recommended cleaning instructions.
SD-04 Samples
Finish
Three samples indicating color and texture of materials

requiring color and finish.
SD-06 Test Reports
Corner Guards
Fire rating and extinguishing test results for resilient

material.
SD-07 Certificates
Corner Guards
Statements attesting that the items comply with specified fire

and safety code requirements.
Deliver materials to the project site in manufacturer's original unopened

containers with seals unbroken and labels and trademarks intact. Keep
materials dry, protected from weather and damage, and stored under cover.
Materials shall be stored at approximately 70 degrees F for at least 48

hours prior to installation.
1.4 WARRANTY

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 STANDARD PRODCUCTS
To the maximum extent possible, corner guards, door and door frame
protectors, wall guards (bumper guards)and wall panels shall be the
standard products of a single manufacturer and shall be furnished as
detailed. Drawings show general configuration of products required, and
items differing in minor details from those shown will be acceptable.
2.1.1 Resilient Material
Provide resilient material consisting of high impact resistant extruded

acrylic vinyl, polyvinyl chloride, or injection molded thermal plastic
conforming to the following:
2.1.1.1 Minimum Impact Resistance
Minimum impact resistance shall be 18 ft-lbs/sq. inch when tested in

accordance with ASTM D 256, (Izod impact, ft-lbs per sq inch notched).
2.1.1.2 Fire Rating
Fire rating shall be Class 1 when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84,
having a maximum flame spread of 25 and a smoke developed rating of 450 or
less. Material shall be rated self extinguishing when tested in accordance
with ASTM D 635. Material shall be labeled and tested by an approved
nationally known testing laboratory. Resilient material used for
protection on fire rated doors and frames shall be listed by the testing
laboratory performing the tests. Resilient material installed on fire
rated wood/steel door and frame assemblies shall have been tested on
similar type assemblies. Test results of material tested on any other
combination of door/frame assembly will not be acceptable.
2.1.1.3 Integral Color
Colored components shall have integral color and shall be matched in

accordance with SAE J1545 to within plus or minus 1.0 on the CIE-LCH scales.
2.1.1.4 Chemical and Stain Resistance
Materials shall be resistant to chemicals and stains reagents in accordance

with ASTM D 543.
2.1.1.5 Fungal and Bacterial Resistance
Materials shall be resistant to fungi and bacteria in accordance with

ASTM G 21, as applicable.
2.2 CORNER GUARDS
2.2.1 Resilient Corner Guards
Corner guard units shall be surface mounted type, radius formed to profile
shown. Corner guards shall extend from floor to ceiling. Mounting
hardware, cushions, and base plates shall be furnished. Assembly shall
consist of a snap-on corner guard formed from high impact resistant
resilient material, minimum 0.078 inch thick, mounted on a continuous
aluminum retainer. Extruded aluminum retainer shall conform to ASTM B 221,
alloy 6063, temper T5 or T6. Flush mounted type guards shall act as a stop
for adjacent wall finish material. Factory fabricated end closure caps
shall be furnished for top and bottom of surface mounted corner guards.
Flush mounted corner guards installed in fire rated wall shall maintain the
rating of the wall. Insulating materials that are an integral part of the
corner guard system shall be provided by the manufacturer of the corner
guard system. Exposed metal portions of fire rated assemblies shall have a
paintable surface.
2.2.2 Stainless Steel Corner Guards
Stainless steel corner guards shall be fabricated of 0.0625 inch thick

material conforming to ASTM A 167, type 302 or 304. Corner guards shall
extend from floor to 6' above finish floor. Corner guard shall be formed
to dimensions shown.
2.3 TRIM, FASTENERS AND ANCHORS
Provide vinyl trim, fasteners and anchors for each specific installation as
shown.
2.4 FINISH
2.4.1 Aluminum Finish
Finish for aluminum shall be in accordance with AA DAF-45. Exposed

aluminum shall be designation AA-C22A31 chemically etched medium matte,
with clear anodic coating AA-C22A32 chemically etched medium matte with
integrally colored anodic coating class II architectural coating 0.4 mil
thick. Concealed aluminum shall be mill finish as fabricated, uniform in
natural color and free from surface blemishes.
2.4.2 Stainless Steel Finish
Finish for stainless steel shall be in accordance with ASTM A 167, Type 302
or 304 NAAMM AMP 500, finish number 4.
2.4.3 Resilient Material Finish
Finish for resilient material shall be stipple vinyl texture with colors in
accordance with SAE J1545.
2.5 ADHESIVES
Adhesive for resilient material shall be in accordance with manufacturers

recommendations.
2.6 COLOR
Color shall be in accordance with Section 09 06 90 COLOR SCHEDULE. Color

listed is not intended to limit the selection of equal colors from other
manufacturers.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
3.1.1 Corner Guards
Material shall be mounted at location indicated in accordance with

SECTION 10 28 13
TOILET ACCESSORIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES


Glass
1.2 SUBMITTALS

SD-03 Product Data
Finishes; G,
Accessory Items; G,
Manufacturer's descriptive data and catalog cuts indicating

materials of construction, fasteners proposed for use for each
type of wall construction, mounting instructions, operation
instructions, and cleaning instructions.
SD-04 Samples
Finishes; G,
Accessory Items; G,
One sample of each accessory proposed for use. Incorporate

approved samples into the finished work, provided they are
identified and their locations noted.
SD-07 Certificates
Accessory Items
Certificate for each type of accessory specified, attesting that

the items meet the specified requirements.
Wrap toilet accessories for shipment and storage, then deliver to the
jobsite in manufacturer's original packaging, and store in a clean, dry

area protected from construction damage and vandalism.
1.4 WARRANTY

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS
Provide toilet accessories where indicated in accordance with paragraph

SCHEDULE. Porcelain type, tile-wall accessories are specified in Section
09 30 00 CERAMIC TILE QUARRY TILE, AND PAVER TILE. Provide each accessory
item complete with the necessary mounting plates of sturdy construction
with corrosion resistant surface.
2.1.1 Anchors and Fasteners
Provide anchors and fasteners capable of developing a restraining force

commensurate with the strength of the accessory to be mounted and suited
for use with the supporting construction. Provide tamperproof design
exposed fasteners with finish to match the accessory.
2.1.2 Finishes
Except where noted otherwise, provide the following finishes on metal:
Metal Finish
_____ ______
Stainless steel No. 4 satin finish
Carbon steel, copper alloy, Chromium plated, bright

and brass
2.2 ACCESSORY ITEMS
Conform to the requirements for accessory items specified below.
2.2.1 Mirrors, Glass (MG)
Provide Type I transparent flat type, Class 1-clear glass for mirrors.
Glazing Quality q1 1/4 inch thick conforming to ASTM C 1036. Coat glass on
one surface with silver coating, copper protective coating, and mirror
backing paint. Provide highly adhesive pure silver coating of a thickness
which provides reflectivity of 83 percent or more of incident light when
viewed through 1/4 inch thick glass, free of pinholes or other defects.
Provide copper protective coating with pure bright reflective copper,
homogeneous without sludge, pinholes or other defects, of proper thickness
to prevent "adhesion pull" by mirror backing paint. Provide mirror backing
paint with two coats of special scratch and abrasion-resistant paint and
baked in uniform thickness to provide a protection for silver and copper
coatings which will permit normal cutting and edge fabrication. Each mirror
shall be 18 inches wide and 24 inches high. Mirror frame shall be one-piece
channel frame 1/2 inch x 1/2 inch x 1/2 inch, type 304 stainless steel with
satin finish and mitered corners; and mirror corners and back shall be
protected by shock-absorbing material. Mirror back shall be galvanized
steel secured to concealed wall hanger with theft-resistant locking screw

device. Furnisn and install one mirror at each lavatory.
2.2.2 Sanitary Napkin Disposer (SND)
Construct a Type 304 stainless steel sanitary napkin disposal with

removable leak-proof receptacle for disposable liners. Provide fifty
disposable liners of the type standard with the manufacturer. Retain
receptacle in cabinet by tumbler lock. Provide disposer with a door for
inserting disposed napkins, surface mounted. Furnish and install one SND at
each female toilet.
2.2.3 Shower Curtain (SC)
Provide shower curtains, size to suit conditions. Provide anti-bacterial

nylon/vinyl fabric curtain. Furnish color :clear color . Furnish and
install at each shower.
2.2.4 Shower Curtain Rods (SCR)
Provide Type 304 stainless steel shower curtain rods 1-1/4 inch OD by 0.049
inch minimum straight to meet installation conditions. Furnish and install
at each shower.
2.2.5 Soap Dispenser (SD)
Provide soap dispenser surface mounted, liquid type consisting of a

vertical Type 304 stainless steel tank with holding capacity of 40 fluid
ounces with a corrosion-resistant all-purpose valve that dispenses liquid
soaps, lotions, detergents and antiseptic soaps. Furnish and install at
each lavatory.
2.2.6 Soap Holder (SH)
Provide recessed Type 304 stainless steel soap holder. Provide stainless
steel separate supports. Furnish and install at each shower
2.2.7 Shelf, Metal, Heavy Duty (SMHD)
Furnish a minimum 18 gauge stainless steel heavy duty metal shelf with
hemmed edges. Provide shelves over 30 inch with intermediate supports.
Provide minimum of 16 gauge supports, welded to the shelf, and spaced no
more than 30 inch apart. Furnish and install one 18 inch long shelf at
each lavatory. Install shelf at 2-inches below bottom of mirror.
2.2.8 Towel Pin (TP)
Provide towel pin with concealed wall fastenings, and a pin integral with
or permanently fastened to wall flange with maximum projection of 4 inch.
Provide satin finish. Furnish and install at each shower.
2.2.9 Toilet Tissue Dispenser, Jumbo (TTDJ)
Provide surface mounted toilet tissue dispenser with minimum 2 rolls of

jumbo tissue. Fabricate cabinet of Type 304, 18 gauge stainless steel with
Type 304, 20 gauge stainless steel door . Provide cover with key lock.
Furnish and install one TTDJ at each toilet.
2.2.10 Waste Receptacle (WR)
Provide Type 304 stainless steel waste receptacle, designed for recessed
mounting. Provide reuseable liner, of the type standard with the
receptacle manufacturer. Furnish tumbler key locklocking mechanism.
2.2.11 Toilet Seat Cover Dispenser (TSCD)
Provide Type 304 stainless steel with surface mountedtoilet seat cover
dispensers. Provide dispenser with a minimum capacity of 500 seat covers.
Furnish and install one TSCD in each toilet, mounted in wall opposite
toilet stall door, with top of dispenser at 59-inches AFF.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
Provide the same finish for the surfaces of fastening devices exposed after
installation as the attached accessory. Provide oval exposed screw heads.
Install accessories at the location and height indicated. Protect exposed
surfaces of accessories with strippable plastic or by other means until the
installation is accepted. After acceptance of accessories, remove and
dispose of strippable plastic protection. Coordinate accessory
manufacturer's mounting details with other trades as their work
progresses. Use sealants for brackets, plates, anchoring devices and
similar items in showers (a silicone or polysulphide sealant) as they are
set to provide a watertight installation. After installation, thoroughly
clean exposed surfaces and restore damaged work to its original condition
or replace with new work.
3.1.1 Recessed Accessories
Fasten accessories with wood screws to studs, blocking or rough frame in

wood construction. Set anchors in mortar in masonry construction. Fasten
to metal studs or framing with sheet metal screws in metal construction.
3.1.2 Surface Mounted Accessories
Mount on concealed backplates, unless specified otherwise. Conceal

fasteners on accessories without backplates. Install accessories with
sheet metal screws or wood screws in lead-lined braided jute, teflon or
neoprene sleeves, or lead expansion shields, or with toggle bolts or other
approved fasteners as required by the construction. Install backplates in
the same manner, or provide with lugs or anchors set in mortar, as required
by the construction. Fasten accessories mounted on gypsum board and
plaster walls without solid backing into the metal or wood studs or to
solid wood blocking secured between wood studs, or to metal backplates
secured to metal studs.
3.2 CLEANING
Clean material in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Do mot

use alkaline or abrasive agents. Take precautions to avoid scratching or
marring exposed surfaces.
3.3 SCHEDULE
Accessories Required
See each accessory listed above.
SECTION 10 44 16
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUBMITTALS

Manufacturer's Data for each type of required Fire Extinguisher

with all related details, cabinets, accessories, and recommended
operation manuals.
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Submit fabrication drawings for the following items consisting of

fabrication and assembly details performed in the factory. Submit
installation drawings for the following items in accordance with
the paragraph entitled, "Installation," of this section.
Accessories
Cabinets
Wall Brackets
SD-03 Product Data
Submit Manufacturer's catalog and warranty data for the following

items:
Accessories
Cabinets
Wall Brackets
Replacement Parts
SD-04 Samples
One full-sized sample of each type of Cabinet being installed
Three samples of Wall Brackets and Accessories of each type being

used
Approved samples may be used for installation, with proper

identification and storage.
Protect materials from weather, soil, and damage during delivery, storage,
and construction.
Deliver materials in their original packages, containers, or bundles

bearing the brand name and the name and type of the material.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 TYPES
Submit Manufacturer's Data for each type of Fire Extinguisher required,

detailing all related Cabinet, Wall Mounting and Accessories information,
complete with Manufacturer's Warranty with Inspection Tag.
2.2 SIZE
Size fire extinguisher cabinets for minimum 20 pounds extinguishers.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
2.4 CABINETS
2.4.1 Material
Provide enameled steel cabinets.
2.4.2 Type
Provide semi-recessed cabinet for a 6-inch and 4-inch wall.
2.4.3 Size
Dimension cabinets to accommodate minimum 20 pound fire extinguishers.
2.5 WALL BRACKETS
Provide wall-hook fire extinguisher wall brackets.
Provide wall bracket and accessories as approved.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
Install Fire Extinguisher Cabinets and wall-hook fire extinguisher wall

brackets where indicated on the drawings. Verify exact locations prior to
installation.
Comply with the manufacturer's recommendations for all installations.
3.2.1 Repairing
Remove and replace damaged and unacceptable portions of completed work with
new work at no additional cost to the Government.
Provide Replacement Parts list indicating specified items replacement part,

replacement cost, and name, address and contact for replacement parts
distributor.
3.2.2 Cleaning
Clean all surfaces of the work, and adjacent surfaces which are soiled as a
result of the work. Remove from the site all construction equipment,
tools, surplus materials and rubbish resulting from the work.
SECTION 10 51 13.00
METAL LOCKERS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES


the Hot-Dip Process


Electrodeposited Coatings of Copper Plus
Nickel Plus Chromium and Nickel Plus
Chromium

FS AA-L-00486 (Rev J) Lockers, Clothing, Steel
1.2 SUBMITTALS

SD-02 Shop Drawings
Types; G,
Location; G,
Installation
Numbering system
SD-03 Product Data
Material

Locking Devices
Handles
Finish
Locker components
Assembly instructions
SD-04 Samples
Color chips; G,
Deliver lockers and associated materials in their original packages,

containers, or bundles bearing the manufacturer's name and the name of the
material. Protect from weather, soil, and damage during delivery, storage,
and construction.
To ensure proper fits, make field measurements prior to the preparation of

drawings and fabrication. Verify correct location
1.5.1 Color Chips
Provide a minimum of three color chips, not less than 3 inches square, of
each color scheduled .
Government may request performance-characteristic tests on assembled

lockers. Tests and results must conform to FS AA-L-00486. Lockers not
conforming will be rejected.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 TYPES
Locker must have the following type and size in the location and quantities
indicated. Locker finish colors will be as scheduled.
2.1.1 Double-Tier
Double-tier lockers must be as follows:
Type DTC-2: Double-tier locker 12 inches wide, 18 inches deep, and 72

inches high, with a closed base

2.2 MATERIAL
2.2.1 Galvanized Steel Sheet
ASTM A 653/A 653M and ASTM A 924/A 924M, commercial quality, minimized
spangle, galvanized steel sheet with not less than G60 zinc coating.
Prepare surface of sheet for painting in accordance with ASTM D 2092,
Method A. Minimum uncoated sheet thickness as specified.
2.2.2 Chromium Coating
Nickel and chromium electrodeposited on the specified base metal. Conform

to ASTM B 456, SC-3, as applicable to the base metal.
2.2.3 Finish
FS AA-L-00486.
2.2.3.1 Color
As selected.
2.3 COMPONENTS
2.3.1 Built-In Locks
FS AA-L-00486. Provide locking devices as a padlock eye in the door

latching mechanism.
2.3.2 Coat Hooks
FS AA-L-00486, chromium plated.
2.3.3 Door Handles
FS AA-L-00486. Provide zinc alloy or steel handles with a chromium coating.
2.3.4 Doors
FS AA-L-00486, not less than 0.0598 inch thick steel sheet.
2.3.4.1 Hinges
In addition to the requirements of FS AA-L-00486, provide 5-knuckle hinges,

minimum 2 inches high. Fabricate knuckle hinges from not less than 0.0787
inch thick steel sheet. Weld or bolt hinges to the door frame. Weld,
bolt, or rivet hinges to the door.
2.3.4.2 Latching Mechanisms
FS AA-L-00486.

2.3.5 Latch Strikes
FS AA-L-00486. Fabricate from not less than 0.0787 inch thick steel sheet,
except latch strike may be continuous from top to bottom and fabricated as
part of the door framing.
2.3.6 Silencers
FS AA-L-00486.
2.3.7 Back and Side Panels, Tops, and Bottoms
FS AA-L-00486, not less than 0.0474 inch thick steel sheet.
2.3.8 Sloping Locker Tops
Provide sloping locker tops in addition to the locker-section flat tops.

Sloping tops must be continuous in length. Provide fillers or closures at
the exposed end of sloping tops. Fabricate sloping tops from not less than
0.0478-inch thick steel sheet. Provie 18-degree slope.
2.3.9 Shelves
FS AA-L-00486. Fabricate from not less than 0.0598 inch thick steel sheet.
2.3.10 Base Panels
FS AA-L-00486.
2.3.11 Legs
Provide lockers without legs, as indicated.
2.3.12 Number Plates
FS AA-L-00486. Aluminum . Provide consecutive numbers for all lockers in

each shower area. Start numbering from "1" in each shower area.
2.3.13 Fastening Devices
Provide bolts, nuts, and rivets as specified in FS AA-L-00486.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 ASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
Assemble lockers according to the locker manufacturer's instructions.

Align lockers horizontally and vertically. Secure lockers to wall and base
with screws as indicated. Bolt adjacent lockers together. Adjust doors to
operate freely without sticking or binding and to ensure they close tightly.
3.2 NUMBERING SYSTEM
Install number plates on lockers consecutively with odd numbers on top and
even numbers on bottom .

3.3.1 Testing

lockers in accordance with FS AA-L-00486. Lockers not conforming will be
rejected.
3.3.2 Repairing
new.
3.3.3 Cleaning
Clean surfaces of the work, and adjacent surfaces soiled as a result of the
work, in an approved manner. Remove equipment, surplus materials, and
rubbish from the site.

SECTION 10 51 13.01
EXPANDED METAL LOCKERS - TA-50 STORAGE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES


the Hot-Dip Process


Electrodeposited Coatings of Copper Plus
Nickel Plus Chromium and Nickel Plus
Chromium

FS AA-L-00486 (Rev J) Lockers, Clothing, Steel
1.2 SUBMITTALS

SD-02 Shop Drawings
Types; G,
Location; G,
Installation
Numbering system
SD-03 Product Data
Material

Locking Devices
Handles
Finish
Locker components
Assembly instructions
SD-04 Samples
Color chips; G,
Deliver lockers and associated materials in their original packages,

containers, or bundles bearing the manufacturer's name and the name of the
material. Protect from weather, soil, and damage during delivery, storage,
and construction.
To ensure proper fits, make field measurements prior to the preparation of

drawings and fabrication. Verify correct location
1.5.1 Color Chips
Provide a minimum of three color chips, not less than 3 inches square, of
each color indicated.

lockers. Tests and results must conform to FS AA-L-00486. Lockers not
conforming will be rejected.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 TYPES
Locker must have the following type and size in the location and quantities
indicated. Locker finish colors will be as scheduled.
2.1.1 TA-50 Lockers
TA-50 lockers shall be as follows:
TA-50 lockers shall be single tier, heavy duty, all welded ventilated type,
42 inches wide, 24 inches deep, and 78 inches high at front of locker and
84 inches high at rear of locker, to provide a minimum 14.04-degree

continuous forward sloped top. Locker shall be attached to 2-inch high

closed base. Locker clear opening area shall be 40 inches wide by 74 inches
high.
2.2 MATERIAL
2.2.1 Galvanized Steel
ASTM A 653/A 653M and ASTM A 924/A 924M, commercial quality, minimized
galvanized steel with not less than G60 zinc coating. Prepare surface of
steel for painting in accordance with ASTM D 2092, Method A. Minimum
uncoated sheet thickness as specified .
2.2.2 Chromium Coating
Nickel and chromium electrodeposited on the specified base metal. Conform

to ASTM B 456, SC-3, as applicable to the base metal.
2.2.3 Finish
FS AA-L-00486.
2.2.3.1 Color
Gray.
2.3 COMPONENTS
2.3.1 Built-In Locks
FS AA-L-00486. Provide locking devices as a padlock eye in the door

latching mechanism.
2.3.2 Coat Hooks
FS AA-L-00486, chromium plated.
2.3.3 Hanger Rods
FS AA-L-00486.
2.3.4 Door Handles
FS AA-L-00486. Provide zinc alloy or steel handles with a chromium coating.
2.3.5 Doors
FS AA-L-00486, Double doors, not less than 14 gauge flattened expanded

metal or perforated metal with a minimum free area of 50%, welded to angle
iron frames. Frames shall be constructed of minimum 1” X 1” X 1/8” angle
steel or 1” X 1” X 1/8” tube steel. Doors shall have a three-point
three-sided cremone latch and shall be furnished with padlock eyes for User
provided padlocks.

2.3.5.1 Hinges
In addition to the requirements of FS AA-L-00486, provide 5-knuckle hinges,

minimum 2 inches high. Fabricate knuckle hinges from not less than 0.0787
inch thick steel sheet. Weld hinges to the door frame. Weld hinges to the
door. Provide three hinges per door leaf.
2.3.5.2 Latching Mechanisms
FS AA-L-00486.
2.3.6 Latch Strikes
FS AA-L-00486. Fabricate from not less than 14 guage thick steel sheet,
except latch strike may be continuous from top to bottom and fabricated as
part of the door framing.
2.3.7 Silencers
FS AA-L-00486.
2.3.8 Back and Side Panels, Tops, and Bottoms
All tops and bottoms shall be constructed of minimum 16 gauge thick cold
rolled sheet steel. All sides, intermediate partitions and backs shall be
constructed of minimum 14 gauge flattened expanded metal or perforated
metal with a minimum free area of 50%, welded to angle iron frames. Frames
shall be constructed of minimum 1” X 1” X 1/8” angle steel or 1” X 1” X
1/8” tube steel. Thickness of metal and details of assembly and supports
shall provide strength and stiffness.
2.3.9 Sloping Locker Tops
Provide sloping locker tops in addition to the locker-section flat tops.

Sloping tops must be continuous in length. Provide fillers or closures at
the exposed end of sloping tops. Fabricate sloping tops from not less than
0.0478-inch thick steel sheet.
2.3.10 Shelves
FS AA-L-00486. Fabricate from not less than 16 gauge thick steel sheet.
Each locker shall have one full width shelf located 12” from the top of the
locker, with a clothes hangar rod and three locker hooks mounted below.
2.3.11 Base Panels
Fabricate from not less than 16 gauge thick steel sheet..
2.3.12 Number Plates
FS AA-L-00486. Aluminum . Provide consecutive numbers from 001 to 100 in

each 100-Person Readiness Module, and 001 to 200 in each 200-Person
Readiness Module..
2.3.13 Fastening Devices
TA-50 lockers shall be all welded.

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 ASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
Assemble lockers according to the locker manufacturer's instructions.

Align lockers horizontally and vertically. Anchor lockers to concrete
floor in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Bolt adjacent
lockers together. Adjust doors to operate freely without sticking or
binding and to ensure they close tightly.
3.2.1 Testing

lockers in accordance with FS AA-L-00486. Lockers not conforming will be
rejected.
3.2.2 Repairing
new.
3.2.3 Cleaning
Clean surfaces of the work, and adjacent surfaces soiled as a result of the
work, in an approved manner. Remove equipment, surplus materials, and
rubbish from the site.

SECTION 10 56 13
STEEL SHELVING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

ASTM D 3359 (2009e2) Measuring Adhesion by Tape Test

MATERIAL HANDLING INDUSTRY OF AMERICA INC (MHIA)
MHI MH28.1 (1997) Specification: Industrial Steel

Grade Shelving
1.2 DEFINITIONS
For the purposes of this specification the shelf category, "medium weight,"
"heavy weight," will be as follows. Load is given per shelf in pounds for
evenly distributed load. This does not limit the shelf size, only the
shelving category.
Minimum Evenly Distributed Load Per Shelf in Pounds
Type Type
Shelf Size Medium Duty Heavy Duty
18 by 36 in. 700 1300
18 by 48 in. 500 900
1.3 SUBMITTALS

Shelving Units
SD-03 Product Data
Shelving Units
Accessories
Installation instructions
SD-04 Samples
Finish
SD-06 Test Reports
Shelving Units
Finish
Deliver materials in original packages, containers or bundles bearing the

brand name and identification of the manufacturer. Store inside under
cover. Protect surfaces from damage.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS
MHI MH28.1. Provide shelving units indicated and scheduled. Provide

shelving units designed for full dead and live load, designated heavy duty.
Provide units with base plates for floor anchorage indicated. Provide wall
connections for units over 8 feet 3 inches to top shelf.
2.2 ACCESSORIES
a. Drawers, 400 pound capacity, and mounting brackets
b. Partitions and dividers
c. Label holder 2 1/4 by 3/4 inches.
2.3 FINISH
Provide the shelving units in the manufacturer's standard colors as

indicated. Clean metal by multiple stage phosphatizing and sealing
process, for rust resistance and paint adhesion. Provide electrostatically
applied enamel finish coats, baked hard for a minimum of 30 minutes at 300
degrees F.
a. MHI MH28.1, for tests of shelf capacity, lateral stability and shelf
connections.
b. Finish flexibility, ASTM D 522, Method A, 1/8 inch diameter, 180 degree
bend, no evidence of fracturing to the naked eye.
c. Finish adhesion, ASTM D 3359, Method B. There shall be no film removed

by tape applied to 11 parallel cuts space 1/8 inch apart plus 11
similar cuts at right angles.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
Before installation, examine shelving units for dents and scratches.

Replace damaged shelving.
3.2 INSTALLATION
Install shelving according to manufacturer's installation instructions.
3.3 PROTECTION
Cover and protect shelving from damage during the completion of

construction. Remove prior to acceptance of project.
SECTION 12 21 00
WINDOW BLINDS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

designation only.
NFPA 701 (2004) Fire Tests for Flame Propagation of

Textiles and Films
1.2 SUBMITTALS

accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Installation
Drawings showing fabrication and installation details. Show

layout and locations of track, direction of draw, mounting
heights, and details.
SD-03 Product Data
Window Blinds
Installation
Manufacturer's data composed of catalog cuts, brochures, product

information, and maintenance instructions.
SD-04 Samples
Window Blinds
Samples of each type and color of window treatment. Provide

horizontal louver blind slats 6 inch in length for each color.
SD-06 Test Reports
Window Blinds
Fire resistance, Flame Spread, and smoke contribution data.
Window Blinds
Window Blinds
Provide window treatment, conforming to NFPA 701, complete with necessary

brackets, fittings, and hardware. E Mount and operate equipment in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Windows to receive a
treatment shall be completely covered.
Deliver components to the jobsite in the manufacturer's original packaging

with the brand or company name, item identification, and project reference
clearly marked. Store components in a dry location that is adequately
ventilated and free from dust, water, or other contaminants and has easy
access for inspection and handling. Store materials flat in a clean dry
area with temperature maintained above 50 degrees F. Do not open
containers until needed for installation unless verification inspection is
required.
1.5 WARRANTY

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 WINDOW BLINDS
Provide each blind, including hardware, accessory items, mounting brackets

and fastenings, as a complete unit produced by one manufacturer. All parts
shall be one color, unless otherwise indicated, to match the color of the
blind slat. Treat steel features for corrosion resistance.
2.2 COLOR
Provide color, pattern and texture in accordance with Section 09 06 90

COLOR SCHEDULE. Color listed is not intended to limit the selection of
equal colors from other manufacturers.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
After becoming familiar with details of the work, verify all dimensions in
the field, and advise the Contracting Officer of any discrepancy before
performing the work.
3.2 INSTALLATION
3.3 CLEAN-UP
Upon completion of the installation, free window treatments from soiling,

damage or blemishes; and adjust them for form and appearance and proper
operating condition. Repair or replace damaged units as directed by the

Contracting Officer. Isolate metal parts from direct contact with
concrete, mortar, or dissimilar metals. Ensure blinds installed in
recessed pockets can be removable without disturbing the pocket. The
entire blind, when retracted, shall be contained behind the pocket. For
blinds installed outside the jambs and mullions, overlap each jamb and
mullion 0.75 inch or more when the jamb and mullion sizes permit. Include
all hardware, brackets, anchors, fasteners, and accessories necessary for a
complete, finished installation.
SECTION 12 48 13.13
ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

ASTM C 501 (1984; R 2002) Relative Resistance to Wear

of Unglazed Ceramic Tile by the Taber
Abraser
ASTM D 2047 (2004) Static Coefficient of Friction of

Polish-Coated Floor Surfaces as Measured
by the James Machine

ASTM E 648 (2009a) Standard Test Method for Critical

ASTM F 150 (2006) Electrical Resistance of

Conductive and Static Dissipative
Resilient Flooring

Calcium Chloride

40 CFR 247 Comprehensive Procurement Guideline for

Products Containing Recovered Materials
1.2 SUBMITTALS

SD-03 Product Data

Submit Manufacturer's Data and indicate percentage of recycled

material content in protective flooring materials Entrance and
Floor Mats to verify affirmative procurement compliance.
Submit total weight and volume quantities of protective flooring

materialswith recycle materials content.
SD-04 Samples
Submit manufacturer's standard color charts for Entrance and Floor

Mats showing the manufacturer's recommended color and finish
selections.
Submit one sample 12 inch square, assembled sections of floor mat

to show corners, intersections, and other details of
construction. Provide any graphics in drawing for approval.
Comply with Section 4.5 in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers
Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility
Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG) for installed entrance and
floor mats.
Submit documentation of testing and compliance with the following standards:
a. Rubber based products: ASTM C 501, ASTM D 2047, ASTM D 2240.
b. Carpet based products: ASTM E 648, ASTM F 150, CRI 104.
c. Other materials: ASTM C 501, ASTM D 2047, ASTM D 2240, ASTM E 648,
ASTM F 150, ASTM F 1869.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 AFFIRMATIVE PROCUREMENT
The Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) has designated certain items

which must contain a specified percent range of recovered or recycled
materials. EPA designated products specified in this contract comply with
the stated policy and with the EPA guidelines. Make all reasonable efforts
to use recycled and recovered materials in providing the EPA designated
products and in otherwise utilizing recycled and recovered materials in the
execution of the work. These items, when incorporated into the work under
this contract, are to contain at least the specified percentage of recycled
or recovered materials unless adequate justification (non-availability)
for non-use is provided, per 40 CFR 247.
Mats are listed in the EPA's Comprehensive Procurement Guidelines (CPG ) at

http://www.epa.gov/epaoswer/non-hw/procure/products/mats.htm.
EPA's recommended Recovered Materials Content Levels for Mats.
Product Material Percent Of Post Percent Of Total

Consumer Materials Recovered Materials
Mats Rubber 75 - 100 85 - 100
Plastic 10 - 100 100

Product Material Percent Of Post Percent Of Total

Consumer Materials Recovered Materials
Rubber/ 100 100

Plastic composite
The recommended recovered materials content levels are based on the dry
weight of the raw materials, exclusive of any additives such as adhesives,
binders, or coloring agents. EPA's recommendation does not preclude
procuring agencies from purchasing mats manufactured from another material.
It simply recommends that procuring agencies, when purchasing mats made
from rubber or plastic, purchase these items made from recovered materials.
For informational purposes, a list of known sources for mats using recycled
material is provided in the EPA/CPG Supplier database at
http://www.ergweb2.com/cpg4review/user/cpg_search.cfm.
Note that the Contractor is not limited to these sources. A product

meeting CPG recycle requirements from other sources may be submitted for
the Government's approval.
Submit recycled material content data for protective flooring materials

indicating compliance with affirmative procurement.
Submit total weight and volume quantities of protective flooring materials

with recycle material.
2.2 TYPE OF MATS
2.2.1 Entrance and Floor Mats
Furnish the following type of entrance mat :
2.2.1.1 Vinyl Mats
a. 7/8 inch thick mats
b. Square edges for recessed installations and with perforated style, 1/4
inch diameter on standard spacing , standard pyramid design with knob
back top profile, and standard knob-base bottom surface.
c. Nonslip, of a prime quality rubber compound free of calendaring and

curing defects, and resistant to weather aging and ozone in normal
concentrations.
d. Color of Vinyl Mats - Graphite.
e. Size of Vinyl Mats - As specified.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 DELIVERY OF MATERIALS
Deliver materials to the project site in their original packages or

containers bearing labels clearly identifying the manufacturer, brand name,
and quality or grade.
Store materials in their original unbroken packages or containers in the

area in which they will be installed. Unwrap, inspect, and place mats at

indicated location.
Remove and dispose all excess packing materials.
3.2 EXAMINATION
Comply with manufacture's requirements of substrates and floor conditions

for location, sizes, and other conditions affecting installation of floor
mats and frames.
3.3 INSTALLATION
Install only in satisfactory conditions. Comply with manufacturer's

written printed instructions for recessed mat frames. Set mat tops at
height recommended by manufacturer for most effective cleaning action.
Coordinate top of mat surfaces with bottom of doors that swing across mats
to provide clearance between doors and mat.
Install grout and fill around frames and, if required to set mat tops at
proper elevations, in recesses under mats. Finish grout and fill smooth
and level. Install surface-type units to comply with manufacturer's
written printed instructions at locations indicated. Coordinate with other
trades, entrance locations and traffic patterns.

SECTION 12 65 00
LOCKER ROOM BENCHES
PART 1 GENERAL
<org>1.1 REFERENCES<org>


Formability

Gray Iron Castings

Electric-Resistance-Welded Carbon and
Alloy Steel Mechanical Tubing

(LEED-NC)
1.2 SUBMITTALS

SD-02 Shop Drawings
Detailed Drawings; G,
Dimensioned drawings showing bench lengths, widths, pedestal

spacing. Drawings indicating metal thickness, fastenings details,
dimensions, and proposed finish.
SD-03 Product Data
Benches; G,
Installation; G,
Manufacturer's descriptive data, catalog cuts, and installation

instructions.
SD-04 Samples
Benches
Minimum 6 by 6 inches samples of wood and finish.
SD-06 Test Reports
Fire Safety; G,
Tests
Complete set of test reports for the fire safety and other
testing.
Assembly Manuals
Three sets of assembly manuals describing assembly procedures.
Maintenance Manuals
Three sets of maintenance manuals describing routine maintenance

and inspection, proper cleaning and minor repair procedures.
Seating System

Adhesives
Fresh Paint

When recommended by the manufacturer, benches shall be delivered and

installed by an authorized dealer with a certified installation crew. All
hardwiring shall be completed by a licensed electrician; the certified
installers shall be onsite when questions arise.
Deliver components to the site in unopened containers clearly labeled with

the manufacturer's name and container contents. Store materials in a safe,
dry, and clean, well ventilated area protected from damage, soiling, and
moisture. Do not store seating near materials that may offgas or emit
harmful fumes, such as kerosene heaters, fresh paint, or adhesives. Handle
the items in a manner that will protect the materials from damage.
1.5 WARRANTY
Warrant the benches for a minimum period of 5 years. Provide

manufacturer's standard performance guarantees or warranties that extend
beyond the periods listed.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
Recyclable materials (metals, etc.) shall conform to EPA requirements in

accordance with Section 01 62 35 RECYCLED / RECOVERED MATERIALS. Favor the
use of local/regional materials to comply with LEED requirements.
2.1.1 Solid Hardwood
Solid hardwood shall be first grade maple or oak or cherry. Finish exposed
wood with manufacturers standard finish.
2.1.2 Cast Iron Pedestal
Cast iron shall comply with ASTM A 48/A 48M. Finish shall be powder coat,
black .
2.1.3 Steel Pedestal
Steel shall comply with ASTM A 513 or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M. Finish shall be
powder coat, as specified .
2.2 LOCKER ROOM BENCHES
Construct components and assembly free from objectionable projections or

irregularities. Make corners and edges smooth and rounded. Unless
otherwise noted, bolts, nuts, and other fastenings shall be concealed.
Steel shall be well-formed to shape and size required. Jointing of members
shall be welded. Casting shall be fine textured, sound, and free of pits,
blow holes, and fins. Lines shall be true, accurate, and true-to-pattern
with excess metal or imperfections removed. Submit Assembly Manuals as
specified in the Submittals paragraph.
2.2.1 Pedestals
Provide pedestals which are minimum 14 gauge tubular or sheet steel or one
integral piece of cast iron. Steel pedestals shall be welded. Pedestals
shall be permanently attached to the floor with expansion bolts.
2.3 COLOR
Color shall be natural wood finish, with minimum two coats of clear
lacquer finish on the top and edges, and one coat on the bottom.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
Installation of the locker room benches shall be in accordance with the

approved detailed drawings and manufacturer's recommended installation
instructions.
3.2 CLEANING
Upon completion of installation, all products shall be cleaned and polished

and the area shall be left in a clean and neat condition. Any defects in
material and installation shall be repaired, and damaged products that
cannot be satisfactorily repaired shall be replaced. Submit Maintenance
Manuals as specified in the Submittals paragraph.
SECTION 13 09 00
ANTI-TERRORISM/FORCE PROTECTION MEASURES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

designation only.

Structural Steel
ASTM A 53 (1999) Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped,

Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless

Hardware

Strength
ASTM A 500 (1999) Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless

Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds
and Shapes


Structural Steel
ASTM A 603 (1998) Zinc-Coated Steel Structural Wire

Rope

the Hot-Dip Process

Masonry Elements
ASME B18.2.1 (1996) Square and Hex Bolts and Screws

(Inch Series)
SECTION 13 09 00.00 44 Page 1

ASME B18.2.2 (1987; R 1999) Square and Hex Nuts (Inch

Series)
The requirements for anti-terrorism/force protection measures described in

this section shall be applied to the equipment, components, and systems
indicated or specified. Resistance to lateral forces induced by blasts
shall be accomplished without consideration of friction resulting from
gravity loads. The basic force formula for lateral restraint shall be 0.5
times the weight of the supported equipment, component, or system
(including the weight of fluid or material within) applied in any
horizontal direction at the center of gravity of the equipment, component,
or system. The basic force formula for vertical restraint shall be 1.5
times the weight of the supported equipment, component, or system
(including the weight of fluid or material within) in the downward
direction. The design of steel members for bracing and anchorage systems
shall be in accordance with the AISC Manual of Steel Construction, Load and
Resistance Factor Design.
1.2.2 Equipment, Components, and Systems
The bracing for the following equipment, components, and systems shall be
designed by the Contractor in accordance with the requirements of this
specification:
Suspended Acoustical Ceilings

Overhead Piping Systems and Components
Overhead Duct Systems
Overhead Mechanical Equipment
Overhead Electrical Conduit, Cable Trays, and Equipment
1.3 SUBMITTALS

SD-02 Shop Drawings
Bracing; G,
Equipment Requirements; ,
Detail drawings along with catalog cuts, templates, and erection

and installation details, as appropriate, for the items listed.
Submittals shall be complete in detail; shall indicate thickness,
type, grade, class of metal, and dimensions; and shall show
with relation to the building construction. For equipment and
systems in buildings that have a performance objective higher than
life-safety, the drawings shall be stamped by the registered
engineer who stamps the calculations required above.
SD-03 Product Data
SECTION 13 09 00.00 44 Page 2

Bracing; G, , ED
Equipment Requirements; ,
Copies of the design calculations with the detail drawings.

Calculations shall be stamped by a registered engineer and shall
verify the capability of structural members to which bracing is
attached for carrying the load from the brace.
1.4 EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS
1.4.1 Equipment
Sspecific items of equipment to be furnished under this contract shall be

supported in a manner to resist the lateral and vertical forces specified
in paragraph 1.2.1 General Requirements. Do not rigidly mount equipment on
both sides of a building expansion joint.
1.5 PIPING, DUCT, AND CONDUIT REQUIREMENTS
1.5.1 Fire Protection Piping
All fire protection piping systems shall be sway braced in accordance with
NFPA 13. No additional provisions are required
1.5.2 All Other Piping, Conduit, Cable Trays, and Ducts
Transverse and longitudinal sway bracing shall be provided for all other
piping, conduit, cable trays, and ducts except for the following:
Gas piping of less than 1-inch nominal diameter.

Piping, conduit, cable trays, and ducts in boiler, mechanical, and
electrical rooms.
All other piping and conduit of less than 2 1/2 inches nominal
diameter.
All cable trays weighting less than 7.7 lbs/ft.
All rectangular air-handling ducts of less than 6 square feet in
cross-sectional area.
All round air-handling ducts less than 28 inches in diameter.
All piping and conduits suspended by individual hangers 12 inches
or less in length from the top of pipe to the bottom of the
support structure.
All ducts and cable trays suspended by hangers 12 inches or less
in length from the top of the duct or cable tray to the bottom of
the support structure.
1.6 SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL AND SUSPENDED GYPSUM CEILINGS
Suspended ceiling systems shall be restrained in a manner indicated and as

specified in Section 09 51 00 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS and Section 09 29 00
GYPSUM BOARD
1.7 LIGHTING FIXTURES IN BUILDINGS
Lighting fixtures and supports will conform to the following:

Fixture supports will employ materials that are suitable for the
purpose of restrained support. Cast metal parts, other than those
of malleable iron, and cast iron or rolled threads, will be
submect to special investigation to ensure structural adequacy.
SECTION 13 09 00.00 44 Page 3

Loop and hook or swivel hanger assemblies for pendant fixtures

will be fitted with a restraining device to hold the stem in the
support position diring lateral motions. Pendant supported
fluorescent fixtures will also be provided with a flexible hanger
device at the attachment to the fixture channel to preclude
breaking of the support. The motion of swivels or hinged joints
will not cause sharp binds in conductors or damage to insulation.
Each recessed individual or continuous row of fluorescent

fixstures will be supported by a restrained suspended ceiling
support system, and will be fastened thereto at each corner of the
fixture; or will be provided with fixture support wires attached
to the building structural members using two wires for individual
fixtures, and one wire per unit of continuous row fixtures. These
support wires (minimum 12-gauge wire) will be capable of
supporting four times the support load.
A supporting assembly that is intended to be mounted on an outlet

box will be designed to accomodate mounting features on 4-inch
boxes, 3-inch plaster rings, and fixture studs.
Each surface-mounted individual or continuous row of fluorescent

fixtures will be attached to a restrained ceiling support system.
Support devices for attaching fixtures to suspended ceilings will
be a locking-type scissor clamp or a full loop band that will
securely attach to the ceiling support. Fixtures attached to the
underside of a structural slab will be properly anchored to the
slab at each corner of the fixture.
Each wall-mounted emergency light unit will be secured in a manner

that will hold the unit in place in the event of a lateral force
of 0.5 times the weight of the unit applied to the center of
gravity of the unit.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 BOLTS AND NUTS
Squarehead and hexhead bolts, and heavy hexagon nuts, ASME B18.2.1,
ASME B18.2.2, or ASTM A 307 for bolts and ASTM A 563 for nuts . Bolts and
nuts used underground and/or exposed to weather shall be galvanized in
accordance with ASTM A 153/A 153M.
2.2 SWAY BRACING
Material used for members listed in this section and on the drawings, shall
be structural steel conforming with the following:
a. Plates, rods, and rolled shapes, ASTM A 36/A 36M . If the

Contractor does the design, both ASTM A 36/A 36Mand
ASTM A 572/A 572M, grade 503 will be allowed.
b. Wire rope, ASTM A 603.
c. Tubes, ASTM A 500, Grade B .
d. Pipes, ASTM A 53, Type or S, Grade B.
SECTION 13 09 00.00 44 Page 4

e. Light gauge angles, less than 1/4 inch thickness, ASTM A 653/A 653M.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 BRACING
Bracing shall conform to the arrangements shown. Trapeze-type hanger shall

be secured with not less than two 1/2 inch bolts.
3.2 BUILDING DRIFT
Sway braces for a piping run shall not be attached to two dissimilar
structural elements of a building that may respond differentially during an
earthquake unless a flexible joint is provided.
3.3 ANCHOR BOLTS
3.3.1 Cast-In-Place
Floor or pad mounted equipment shall use cast-in-place anchor bolts, except
as specified below. One nut shall be provided on each bolt. Anchor bolts
shall conform to ASTM A 307. Anchor bolts shall have an embedded straight
length equal to at least 12 times nominal diameter of the bolt. Anchor
bolts that exceed the normal depth of equipment foundation piers or pads
shall either extend into concrete floor or the foundation shall be
increased in depth to accommodate bolt lengths.
3.3.2 Expansion or Chemically Bonded Anchors
Expansion or chemically bonded anchors shall not be used unless test data
in accordance with ASTM E 488 has been provided to verify the adequacy of
the specific anchor and application. Expansion or chemically bonded
anchors shall not be used to resist pull-out in overhead and wall
installations if the adhesive is manufactured with temperature sensitive
epoxies and the location is accessible to a building fire. Expansion and
chemically bonded anchors shall be installed in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations. The allowable forces shall be adjusted for
the spacing between anchor bolts and the distance between the anchor bolt
and the nearest edge, as specified by the manufacturer.
3.3.2.1 General Testing
Expansion and chemically bonded anchors shall be tested in place after

installation. The tests shall occur not more than 24 hours after
installation of the anchor and shall be conducted by an independent testing
agency; testing shall be performed on random anchor bolts as described
below.
3.3.2.2 Torque Wrench Testing
Torque wrench testing shall be done on not less than 50 percent of the
total installed expansion anchors and at least one anchor for every piece
of equipment containing more than twoanchors. The test torque shall equal
the minimum required installation torque as required by the bolt
manufacturer. Torque wrenches shall be calibrated at the beginning of each
day the torque tests are performed. Torque wrenches shall be recalibrated
for each bolt diameter whenever tests are run on bolts of various
diameters. The applied torque shall be between 20 and 100 percent of
SECTION 13 09 00.00 44 Page 5

wrench capacity. The test torque shall be reached within one half turn of
the nut, except for 3/8 inch sleeve anchors which shall reach their torque
by one quarter turn of the nut. If any anchor fails the test, similar
anchors not previously tested shall be tested until 20 consecutive anchors
pass. Failed anchors shall be retightened and retested to the specified
torque; if the anchor still fails the test it shall be replaced.
3.3.2.3 Pullout Testing
Expansion and chemically bonded anchors shall be tested by applying a

pullout load using a hydraulic ram attached to the anchor bolt. At least
5 percent of the anchors, but not less than 3 per day shall be tested.
The load shall be applied to the anchor without removing the nut; when that
is not possible, the nut shall be removed and a threaded coupler shall be
installed of the same tightness as the original nut. The test setup shall
be checked to verify that the anchor is not restrained from withdrawing by
the baseplate, the test fixture, or any other fixtures. The support for
the testing apparatus shall be at least 1.5 times the embedment length away
from the bolt being tested. Each tested anchor shall be loaded to 1 times
the design tension value for the anchor. The anchor shall have no
observable movement at the test load. If any anchor fails the test,
similar anchors not previously tested shall be tested until 20 consecutive
anchors pass. Failed anchors shall be retightened and retested to the
specified load; if the anchor still fails the test it shall be replaced.
3.4 SWAY BRACES FOR PIPING, CONDUIT, CABLE TRAYS, AND DUCT
Transverse sway bracing for steel and copper pipe, conduit, cable trays,
and duct shall be provided at intervals not to exceed 20 feet. Bracing
shall consist of at least one vertical angle 2 x 2 x 16 gauge and one
diagonal angle of the same size.
Longitudinal sway bracing shall be provided at intervals not to exceed40

feet.
3.4.1 Anchor Rods, Angles, and Bars
Anchor rods, angles, and bars shall be bolted to either pipe clamps or pipe
flanges at one end and cast-in-place concrete or masonry insert or clip
angles bolted to the steel structure on the other end. Rods shall be solid
metal or pipe as specified below. Anchor rods, angles, and bars shall not
exceed lengths given in the tabulation below.
3.4.2 Maximum Length for Anchor Braces
Anchor brace members that are designed for compression or both tension and
compression shall not exceed a slenderness ration (L/r) of 200 where L is
the length of the brace member and r is the radius of gyration in the least
dimension.
3.4.3 Bolts
Bolts used for attachment of anchors to pipe and structure shall be not
less than 1/2 inch diameter.
SECTION 13 09 00.00 44 Page 6

3.5 EQUIPMENT SWAY BRACING
3.5.1 Suspended Equipment and Light Fixtures
Equipment sway bracing shall be provided for items supported from overhead
floor or roof structural systems, including light fixtures. Braces shall
consist of angles, rods, wire rope, bars, or pipes arranged as shown and
secured at both ends with not less than 1/2 inch bolts. Sufficient braces
shall be provided for equipment to resist a horizontal force equal to 0.5
times the weight of equipment without exceeding safe working stress of
bracing components. Details of equipment bracing shall be submitted for
acceptance. In lieu of bracing with vertical supports, these items may be
supported with hangers inclined at 45 degrees directed up and radially away
from equipment and oriented symmetrically in 90-degree intervals on the
horizontal plane, bisecting the angles of each corner of the equipment,
provided that supporting members are properly sized to support 1.5 times
the operating weight of equipment when hangers are inclined at a 45-degree
angle.
SECTION 13 09 00.00 44 Page 7

SECTION 13 34 19
METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

AAMA 101 (2005) Standard Specification for Windows,

Doors, and Unit Skylights
AISC 341 (2005; Supp 2005) Seismic Provisions for

Structural Steel Buildings
AISC 350 (2005) Load and Resistance Factor Design

(LRFD)Specification for Structural Steel
Buildings

AISC/AISI 121 (2004) Standard Definitions for Use in the

Design of Steel Structures
ASCE 7-05 (2006; Errata 2007) Minimum Design Loads

for Buildings and Other Structures
AWS A5.1/A5.1M (2004; Errata 2004) Carbon Steel

Electrodes for Shielded Metal Arc Welding

Code - Sheet Steel



Formability and Ultra-High Strength

Steel Products

Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting
Materials for High-Temperature Service and
Other Special Purpose Applications

Strength


Structural Steel

Sheet, Aluminum-Coated
ASTM A 475 (2003; R 2009e1) Standard Specification


Shapes

Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon
Steel Structural Tubing

High-Strength Carbon-Manganese Steel of
Structural Quality

Welded and Seamless


Structural Steel

Sheet and Strip, High-Strength, Low-Alloy,
Hot-Rolled and Cold-Rolled, with Improved
Atmospheric Corrosion Resistance

the Hot-Dip Process

Steel Sheet, Metallic Coated by the
Hot-Dip Process and Prepainted by the
Coil-Coating Process for Exterior Exposed
Building Products
ASTM A 780 (2001; R 2006) Standard Practice for


the Hot-Dip Process

Structural Steel Shapes



ASTM B 221M (2007) Standard Specification for Aluminum

Wire, Profiles, and Tubes (Metric)



Rubber
ASTM D 1308 (2002; R 2007) Effect of Household

Chemicals on Clear and Pigmented Organic
Finishes

ASTM D 2244 (2009b) Calculation of Color Tolerances


ASTM D 2794 (1993; R 2010) Resistance of Organic

Coatings to the Effects of Rapid
Deformation (Impact)
ASTM D 3363 (2005) Film Hardness by Pencil Test

Films


Gloss

ASTM D 822 (2001; R 2006) Filtered Open-Flame

Carbon-Arc Exposures of Paint and Related
Coatings
ASTM D 968 (2005; R 2010) Abrasion Resistance of

Organic Coatings by Falling Abrasive
ASTM DEF (2005) ASTM Dictionary of Engineering

Science and Technology, 10th Edition
ASTM E 119 (2010b) Standard Test Methods for Fire

Materials


ASTM E 1646 (1995; R 2003) Standard Test Method for

Water Penetration of Exterior Metal Roof
Panel Systems by Uniform Air Pressure
Difference
ASTM E 168 (2006) General Techniques of Infrared

Quantitative Analysis

Materials
ASTM F 1554 (2007a) Standard Specification for Anchor

Bolts, Steel, 36, 55, and 105-ksi Yield
Strength

Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile
Strength
ASTM F 844 (2007a) Washers, Steel, Plain (Flat),

Unhardened for General Use
ASTM G 23 (1996) Operating Light-Exposure Apparatus

(Carbon-Arc Type) With and Without Water
for Exposure of Nonmetallic Materials
MBMA MBSM (2002) Metal Building Systems Manual
NFPA 252 (2007) Standard Methods of Fire Tests of

Door Assemblies

Opening Protectives
NATIONAL ROOFING CONTRACTORS ASSOCIATION (NRCA)
NRCA RWM (2003) Roofing and Waterproofing Manual

(SMACNA)

SSPC A (2000) Good Painting Practice Steel

Structures Painting Manual, Volume 1
SSPC Paint 15 (1999; E 2004) Steel Joist Shop

Primer/Metal Building Primer
SSPC SP 2 (1982; E 2004) Hand Tool Cleaning
UL 580 (2006; Rev thru Jul 2009) Tests for Uplift
Resistance of Roof Assemblies
Provide metal building systems capable of withstanding the effects of

gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within the limits and
conditions indicated.
1.2.1.1 Engineering
Design metal building systems conforming to procedures described in

MBMA MBSM.
1.2.1.2 Design Loads
Conform to the requirements of MBMA MBSM, ASCE 7-05, UFC 4-010-01, and the
building code applicable to the project geographical location. Refer to
applicable Design Criteria on sheet S-001. In the event of conflict between
references and/or applicable criteria, the most stringent requirement shall
be applied. Refer to contract drawings S-001 for other applicable Design
Criteria, not specifically noted in this specification.
1.2.1.3 Live Loads
Include all vertical loads induced by the building occupancy indicated on

the drawings, as well as loads induced by maintenance workers, materials
and equipment for roof live loads.
1.2.1.4 Roof Snow Loads
Include vertical loads induced by the weight of snow, as determined by 50

year Mean-Recurrence-Interval (MRI) ground snow load at the project site of
as determined by the stricter of the current ASCE 7 or UFC 3-310-01
Structural Engineering. Allow for unbalanced and drift loads.
1.2.1.5 Wind Loads
Include horizontal loads induced by a basic wind speed corresponding to a 50

-year, mean-recurrence interval at Project site of as determined by the
stricter of the current ASCE 7 or UFC 3-310-01 Structural Engineering.
1.2.1.6 Collateral Loads
Include additional dead loads other than the weight of metal building
system for permanent items such as sprinklers, mechanical systems,
electrical systems, and ceilings. Per UFC 4-010-01 all equipment, fixtures
and overhead utilities weighing 31 pounds or more (excluding distributed
systems) shall have designed mountings which resist forces of 0.5 times the
equipment weight in any horizontal direction and 1.5 times the equipment
weight in the downward direction.
1.2.1.7 Antiterrorism/Force Protection (ATFP) Loads
Comply with UFC 4-010-01-DoD Minimum Antiterrorism Standards and the

details shown on the contract drawings for Buildings. In addition to
gravity, seismic, and lateral loads, design

ancillary building items, e.g. doors, window jambs and connections,
window sills, overhead architectural features, equipment bracing, for the
requirements of UFC 4-010-01.
All light gage framing shown on the structural drawings for around openings
has been designed per UFC4-010-01 and shall be required for other openings in
the framing design not specifically noted on drawings.
For design of structural components subjected to dynamic loads, the

U.S. Army Corps of Engineers Protective Design Center (PDC) developed
SBEDS, Single-Degree-of-Freedom Blast Effects Design Spreadsheets (SBEDS).
SBEDS is available at the software tab of the PDC website,
https://pdc.usace.army.mil/.
1.2.1.8 Auxiliary Loads
Include dynamic live loads, such as those generated by cranes and

materials-handling equipment indicated on detail drawings.
1.2.1.9 Load Combinations
Design metal building systems to withstand the most critical effects of

load factors and load combinations as required by MBMA MBSM, ASCE 7-05, UFC
4-010-01, and the building code applicable to the project location.
1.2.1.10 Deflection Limits
Engineer assemblies to withstand design loads with deflections no greater

than the following:
a. Purlins and Rafters; vertical deflection of 1/180 of the span.
b. Girts; horizontal deflection of 1/600 of the span.
c. Metal Roof Panels; vertical deflection of 1/180 of the span.
Design secondary framing system to accommodate deflection of primary

building structure and construction tolerances, and to maintain clearances
at openings. Provide metal panel assemblies capable of withstanding the
effects of loads and stresses indicated, based on testing according to
ASTM E 1592.
1.2.2 Seismic Performance
Design and engineer metal building system capable of withstanding the

effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE 7-05, AISC 341,
and the applicable portions of the building code in the geographic area
where the construction will take place.
1.2.3 Thermal Movements
Provide metal panel systems that allow for thermal movements resulting from
the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by
preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components,
failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental
effects. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials
due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss as follows:
a. Temperature Change (Range); 120 F, ambient; 180 F, material surfaces.
1.2.4 Air Infiltration for Metal Roof Panels
Air leakage through assembly must not exceed 0.06 cfm/sq.ft. of roof area
when tested according to ASTM E 168 at negative test-pressure difference of
1.57 lb/sq.ft. .
1.2.5 Water Penetration for Metal Roof Panels
No water penetration when tested according to ASTM E 1646 at test-pressure

difference of 2.86 lbf/sq.ft. .
1.2.6 Wind-Uplift Resistance
Provide metal roof panel assemblies that comply with UL 580 for Class 60 .
1.3 DEFINITIONS
ASTM DEF applies to this definition paragraph.
a. Bay: Dimension between main frames measured normal to frame (at

centerline of frame) for interior bays, and dimension from
centerline of first interior main frame measured normal to end
wall (outside face of end-wall girt) for end bays.
b. Building Length: Dimension of the building measured perpendicular

to main framing from end wall to end wall (outside face of girt to
outside face of girt).
c. Building Width: Dimension of the building measured parallel to

main framing from sidewall to sidewall (outside face of girt to
outside face of girt).
d. Clear Span: Distance between supports of beams, girders, or

trusses (measured from lowest level of connecting area of a column
and a rafter frame or knee).
e. Eave Height: Vertical dimension from finished floor to eave (the

line along the sidewall formed by intersection of the planes of
the roof and wall).
f. Clear Height under Structure: Vertical dimension from finished

floor to lowest point of any part of primary or secondary
structure, not including crane supports, located within clear span.
g. Terminology Standard: Refer to MBMA "Metal Building Systems

Manual" for definitions of terms for metal building system
construction not otherwise defined in this Section or in
referenced standards.
General: Provide a complete, integrated set of mutually dependent

components and assemblies that form a metal building system capable of
withstanding structural and other loads, thermally induced movement, and
exposure to weather without failure or infiltration of water into building
interior. Include primary and secondary framing, metal roof panels, and
accessories complying with requirements indicated.
a.Provide metal building system of size and with spacing, slopes, and
spans as indicated on the Contract Drawings.
1.4.1 Primary Frame Type
a. Rigid Clear Span: Solid-member, structural-framing system without

interior columns.
b. Rigid Modular: Solid-member, structural-framing system with

interior columns.
f. Lean To: Solid- or truss-member, structural-framing system

without interior columns, designed to be partially supported by
another structure.
1.4.2 Fixed End-Wall Framing
Provide fixed end wall, for buildings not required to be expandable,

consisting of primary frame, capable of supporting one-half of a bay design
load, and end-wall columns.
1.4.3 Secondary Frame Type
Provide purlins and joists and girts framed as shown on the Contract
Drawings.
1.4.4 Eave Height
Eave height must be as indicated by nominal height on Drawings.
1.4.5 Bay Spacing
Bay Spacing must be as indicated on the Contract Drawings.
1.4.6 Roof Slope
Roof slope must be as indicated on the Contract Drawings.
1.4.7 Roof System
Provide a standing-seam roof per 07 61 14.00 20 Steel Standing Seam Roofing

and 07 22 00 Roof and Deck Insulation.
1.5 SUBMITTALS

Manufacturer's Qualifications; G
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Detail Drawings; G
SD-03 Product Data
Manufacturer's data indicating percentage of recycle material of

the following to verify sustainable acquisition compliance
Manufacturer's catalog data ; G
SD-04 Samples
Coil Stock, 12 inches long by the actual panel width; G
Fasteners; G
Metal Closure Strips10 inches long of each type; G
Vapor Barrier; G
Manufacturer's color charts and chips,4 by 4 inches; G
SD-05 Design Data
Manufacturer's descriptive and technical literature; G
Manufacturer's building design analysis including design of all

items under the design loads prescribed in UFC 4-010-01; OR
Members and connections with ATFP Static Equivalent Loads; G
SD-06 Test Reports
test reports; G
Coatings and base metals ; G
Factory Color Finish Performance Requirements; G
SD-07 Certificates
system components
Coil Stock certification; G
Enamel Repair Paint
Qualification of Manufacturer; G
Qualification of Erector; G
Installation of Roof and Wall panels
shipping, handling, and storage
Manufacturer's Warranty; G
Contractor's Warranty for Installation; G
1.6.1 Pre-Erection Conference
After submittals are received and approved but before metal building system
work, including associated work, is performed, the Contracting Officer will
hold a pre-erection conference to review the following:
a. The detail drawings, specifications, and manufacturer's

descriptive and technical literature.
b. Finalize construction schedule and verify availability of

materials, erector's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed
to make progress and avoid delays
c. Methods and procedures related to metal building system erection,

including, but not limited to: qualification of manufacturer,
qualification of erector, manufacturer's catalog data, building
design analysis, written instructions and test reports.
d. Support conditions for compliance with requirements, including

alignment between and erection of structural members
e. Flashing, special roofing and siding details, roof and wall

penetrations, openings, and condition of other construction that
will affect metal building system, including coatings and base
metals, factory color finish performance requirements, system
components, and certificates for coil stock.
f. Governing regulations and requirements for, certificates,

insurance, tests and inspections if applicable
g. Temporary protection requirements for metal panel assembly during

and after installation
h. Samples of aluminized steel repair paint, galvanizing repair paint,

and enamel repair paint.
1.6.1.1 Pre-Roofing and Siding Installation Conference
After structural framing system erection and approval but before roofing,
insulation and vapor barrier work, including associated work, is performed;
the Contracting Officer will hold a pre-roofing and siding conference to
review the following:
a. Examine purlins, sub-girts and formed shapes conditions for
compliance with requirements, including flatness and attachment to

structural members.
b. Review structural limitations of purlins, sub-girts and formed

shapes during and after roofing and siding.
c. Review flashings, special roof and wall details, roof drainage,

roof and wall penetrations, roof equipment curbs, and condition of
other construction that will affect the metal building system.
d. Review temporary protection requirements for metal roof and wall

panels' assembly during and after installation.
e. Review roof and wall observation and repair procedures after metal
building system erection.
The representative must have authorization from manufacturer to approve

field changes and be thoroughly familiar with the products, erection of
structural framing and installation of roof and wall panels in the
geographical area where construction will take place.
1.6.3 Manufacturer's Qualifications
Metal building system manufacturer must have a minimum of five (5) years
experience as a quailed manufacturer and a member of MBMA of metal building
systems and accessory products.
Provide engineering services by an authorized currently licensed engineer

in the geographical area where construction will take place, having a
minimum of four (4) years experience as an engineer knowledgeable in
building design analysis, protocols and procedures for the "Metal Building
Systems Manual" (MBMA MBSM); ASCE 7-05, the building code in the geographic
area where the construction will take place and ASTM E 1592.
Provide certified engineering calculations using the products submitted for:
a. Roof and Wall Wind Loads with basic wind speed, exposure category,
co-efficient, importance factor, designate type of facility,
negative pressures for each zone, methods and requirements of
attachment.
b. Roof Dead and Live Loads
c. Collateral Loads
d. Foundation Loads
e. Roof Snow Load
f. Seismic Loads
g. Antiterrorism/Force Protection Loads
1.6.4 Qualification of Erection Contractor
An experienced erector who has specialized in erecting and installing work
similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project
and must be approved and certified by the metal building system
manufacturer.
1.6.5 Single Source
Obtain primary and secondary components and structural framing members,

each type of metal roof, wall and liner panel assemblies, clips, closures
and other accessories from the standard products of the single source from
a single manufacturer to operate as a complete system for the intended use.
1.6.6 Welding
Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS A5.1/A5.1M, AWS D1.1/D1.1M,

and AWS D1.3/D1.3M."
Comply with AISC 325, AISC 350, and AISC 360, for design requirements and
allowable stresses.
1.6.8 Cold-Formed Steel
Comply with AISC/AISI 121 and AISI SG03-3 for design requirements and
allowable stresses.
1.6.9 Fire-Resistance Ratings
Where indicated, provide metal panels identical to those of assemblies

tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a qualified testing agency.
Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
Indicate design designations from UL Bld Mat Dir or from the listings of
another qualified testing agency. Combustion Characteristics must conform
to ASTM E 136.
1.6.10 Surface-Burning Characteristics
Provide metal panels having insulation and vapor barrier material with the
following surface-burning characteristics as determined by testing
identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency.
Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency
showing:
a. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.

b. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.
1.6.11 Fabrication
Fabricate and finish metal panels and accessories at the factory to

greatest extent possible, by manufacturer's standard procedures and
processes and as necessary to fulfill indicated performance requirements.
Comply with indicated profiles with dimensional and structural requirements
Provide metal panel profile, including major ribs and intermediate

stiffening ribs, if any, for full length of panel. Aluminum and
aluminum-alloy sheet and plate must conform to ASTM B 209.
Fabricate metal panel side laps with factory-installed captive gaskets or
separator strips that provide a tight seal and prevent metal-to-metal

contact, in a manner that will seal weather-tight and minimize noise from
movements within panel assembly.
Sheet Metal Accessories: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with

recommendations in SMACNA 1793 that apply to the design, dimensions, metal,
and other characteristics of item indicated:
a. Form exposed sheet metal accessories that are without excessive

oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and that are true to line
and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems.
b. End Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form

seams and seal with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints for
additional strength.
c. Sealed Joints: Form non-expansion but movable joints in metal to

accommodate elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA standards.
d. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible.

Exposed fasteners are not allowed on faces of accessories exposed
to view.
e. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices of size and metal

thickness recommended by SMACNA or by metal building system
manufacturer for application, but not less than thickness of metal
being secured.
1.6.12 Finishes
finishes.
Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not

acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are
acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are
assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
1.7 SHIPPING, HANDLING AND STORAGE
1.7.1 Delivery
Package and deliver components, sheets, metal panels, and other

manufactured items so as not to be damaged or deformed and protected during
transportation and handling.
Stack and store metal panels horizontally on platforms or pallets, covered

with suitable weather-tight and ventilated covering to ensure dryness, with
positive slope for drainage of water. Store in a manner to prevent
bending, warping, twisting, and surface damage. Do not store metal wall
panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting,
or other surface damage. Retain strippable protective covering on metal
panel for entire period up to metal panel installation.
Protect foam-plastic insulation as follows:
a. Do not expose to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of

installation and concealment.
d. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver foam-plastic

insulation materials to project site before installation time.
Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as

possible in each area of construction to minimize ultraviolet exposure.
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
1.8.1 Weather Limitations
Proceed with installation preparation only when existing and forecasted

weather conditions permit Work to proceed without water entering into
existing panel system or building.
1.8.2 Field Measurements
1.8.2.1 Established Dimensions for Foundations
Comply with established dimensions on approved anchor-bolt plans,

established foundation dimensions, and proceed with fabricating structural
framing. Do not proceed without verifying field measurements. Coordinate
anchor-bolt installation to ensure that actual anchorage dimensions
correspond to established dimensions.
1.8.2.2 Established Dimensions for Metal Panels
Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, either
establish framing and opening dimensions and proceed with fabricating metal
panels without field measurements, or allow for field trimming metal
panels. Coordinate construction to ensure that actual building dimensions,
locations of structural members, and openings correspond to established
dimensions.
1.8.2.3 Verification Record
Verify locations of all framing and opening dimensions by field

measurements before metal panel fabrication and indicate measurements on
Shop Drawings.
1.9 COORDINATION
Coordinate size and location of concrete foundations and casting of

anchor-bolt inserts into foundation walls and footings. Concrete,
reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03
Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete".
Coordinate installation of fire suppression system equipment supports

piping and supports and accessories, which are specified in Division 21 -
FIRE SUPPRESSION.
Coordinate installation of plumbing system equipment supports piping and

supports and accessories, which are specified in Division 22 - PLUMBING.
Coordinate installation of HVAC system equipment supports ductwork and

supports piping and supports and accessories, which are specified in
Division 23 - HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR-CONDITIONING (HVAC).
Coordinate installation of roof curbs equipment supports and roof

penetrations, which are specified in Division 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE
PROTECTION.
Coordinate metal panel assemblies with rain drainage work, flashing, trim,
and construction of supports and other adjoining work to provide a
leak-proof, secure, and non-corrosive installation.
1.10 WARRANTY
1.10.1 Building System Warranty
Furnish manufacturer's no-dollar-limit warranty for the metal building

system. The warranty period is to be no less than 20 years from the date
of acceptance of the work and be issued directly to the Government. The
warranty must provide that if within the warranty period, the metal
building system shows evidence of deterioration resulting from defective
materials and/or workmanship, correcting of any defects is the
responsibility of the metal building system manufacturer. Repairs that
become necessary because of defective materials and workmanship while metal
building system is under warranty are to be performed within 24 hours after
Officer. Failure to perform repairs within 24 hours of notification will
constitute grounds for having emergency repairs performed by others and
will not void the warranty.
1.10.2 Roof System Weather-Tightness Warranty
Furnish manufacturer's no-dollar-limit warranty for the metal panel

of acceptance of the work and be issued directly to the Government.
The warranty is to provide that if within the warranty period the roof
panel system shows evidence of corrosion, perforation, rupture, lost of
weather-tightness or excess weathering due to deterioration of the panel
system resulting from defective materials and correction of the defective
workmanship is to be the responsibility of the metal building system
manufacturer.
Repairs that become necessary because of defective materials and

workmanship while roof panel system is under warranty are to be performed
within 24 hours after notification, unless additional time is approved by
the Contracting Officer. Failure to perform temporary repairs within 24
hours of notification will constitute grounds for having emergency repairs
performed by others and not void the warranty. Immediate follow-up and
completion of permanent repairs must be performed within 3 days from date
of notification.
1.10.3 Roof and Wall Panel Finish Warranty
Furnish manufacturer's no-dollar-limit warranty for the metal panel

of acceptance of the work and be issued directly to the Government.
The warranty is to provide that if within the warranty period the metal
panel system shows evidence of checking, delaminating cracking, peeling,
chalk in excess of a numerical rating of eight, as determined by ASTM D 4214
test procedures; or change colors in excess of five CIE or Hunter units in
accordance with ASTM D 2244 or excess weathering due to deterioration of
the panel system resulting from defective materials and finish or
correction of the defective workmanship is to be the responsibility of the
metal building system manufacturer.
Liability under this warranty is exclusively limited to replacing the

defective coated materials.
Repairs that become necessary because of defective materials and

workmanship while roof and wall panel system is under warranty are to be
performed within 24 hours after notification, unless additional time is
approved by the Contracting Officer. Failure to perform repairs within 24
hours of notification will constitute grounds for having emergency repairs
performed by others and not void the warranty.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 STRUCTURAL FRAMING MATERIALS
2.1.1 W-Shapes
ASTM A 992/A 992M; ASTM A 572/A 572M or ASTM A 529/A 529M.
2.1.2 Channel, Angles, M-Shapes and S-Shapes
ASTM A 36/A 36M; ASTM A 572/A 572M or ASTM A 529/A 529M.
2.1.3 Plate and Bar
ASTM A 36/A 36M, ASTM A 572/A 572M or ASTM A 529/A 529M.
2.1.4 Steel Pipe
ASTM A 36/A 36M, ASTM A 53/A 53M, ASTM A 572/A 572M or ASTM A 529/A 529M.
2.1.5 Cold-Formed and Hot Formed Hollow Structural Sections
Cold formed:ASTM A 500/A 500M or ASTM B 221, ASTM B 221M. Hot-formed:

ASTM A 501.
2.1.6 Structural-Steel Sheet
Hot-rolled, ASTM A 1011/A 1011M or cold-rolled, ASTM A 1008/A 1008M.
2.1.7 Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet
ASTM A 653/A 653M, ASTM A 606/A 606M.
2.1.8 Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet Pre-painted with Coil Stock Coating
Steel sheet metallic coated by the hot-dip process and pre-painted by the
coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M.
a. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, and

ASTM A 123/A 123M.
b. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 792/A 792M, and

ASTM A 463/A 463M.
2.1.9 Steel Joists
Refer to the following sections subject to project design requirements:
Section 05 21 19 - OPEN WEB STEEL JOIST FRAMING
2.1.10 High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers
ASTM A 325, heavy hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563 heavy hex
carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436 hardened carbon-steel washers.
Finish: Plain .
Tension-Control, High-Strength Bolt-Nut-Washer Assemblies: ASTM F 1852,

heavy-hex-head steel structural bolts with spline.
Finish: Plain .
2.1.11 Non-High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers
ASTM A 307, ASTM A 563, and ASTM F 844.
Finish: Plain.
2.1.12 Anchor Rods
ASTM F 1554 .
a. Configuration: Straight.
b. Nuts: ASTM A 563 heavy hex carbon steel.
c. Plate Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel.
d. Washers: ASTM F 436 hardened carbon steel.
e. Finish: Hot-dip zinc coating, ASTM A 153/A 153M.
2.1.13 Threaded Rods
ASTM A 193/A 193M ASTM A 307.
a. Nuts: ASTM A 563 heavy hex carbon steel.

b. Washers: ASTM F 436 hardened carbon steel.
c. Finish: Hot-dip zinc coating, ASTM A 153/A 153M .
2.1.14 Primer
SSPC-Paint 15, Type I, red oxide.
2.2 FABRICATION
2.2.1 General
Comply with MBMA MBSM - "Metal Building Systems Manual": Chapter IV,
Section 9, "Fabrication and Erection Tolerances."
2.3 STRUCTURAL FRAMING
2.3.1 General
Clean all framing members to remove loose rust and mill scale. Provide 1
shop coat of primer to an average dry film thickness of 1 mil according to
SSPC SP 2. Balance of painting and coating procedures must conform to
SSPC Paint 15 and SSPC A.
2.3.2 Primary Framing
Manufacturer's standard structural primary framing system includes

transverse and lean-to frames; rafter, rakes, and canopy beams; sidewall,
intermediate, end-wall, and corner columns; and wind bracing designed to
withstand required loads and specified requirements. Provide frames with
attachment plates, bearing plates, and splice members. Provide frame span
and spacing indicated.
Shop fabricate framing components by welding or by using high-strength

bolts to the indicated size and section with base-plates, bearing plates,
stiffeners, and other items required. Cut, form, punch, drill, and weld
framing for bolted field erection.
a. Rigid Clear-Span Frames: I-shaped frame sections fabricated from

shop-welded, built-up steel plates or structural-steel shapes.
Interior columns are not permitted.
b. Rigid Modular Frames: I-shaped frame sections fabricated from

shop-welded, built-up steel plates or structural-steel shapes. Provide
interior columns fabricated from shop-welded, built-up steel plates.
c. Frame Configuration: Lean to, with high side connected to, and
supported by, another structure .
d. Exterior Column Type: Tapered.
e. Rafter Type: Uniform depth Tapered.
2.3.3 Secondary Framing
Manufacturer's standard secondary framing members, including purlins,

girts, eave struts, flange bracing, base members, gable angles, clips,
headers, jambs, and other miscellaneous structural members. Fabricate
framing from cold-formed, structural-steel sheet or roll-formed,
metallic-coated steel sheet pre-painted with coil coating, unless otherwise
indicated.
Shop fabricate framing components by roll-forming or break-forming to the

indicated size and section with base-plates, bearing plates, stiffeners,
and other plates required for erection. Cut, form, punch, drill, and weld
secondary framing for bolted field connections to primary framing.
a. Purlins: C or Z-shaped sections; fabricated from steel sheet,

built-up steel plates, or structural-steel shapes; minimum depth As
required to comply with system performance requirements and with the
framing plan dimensions .
b. Girts: C or Z-shaped sections; fabricated from steel sheet,

built-up steel plates, or structural-steel shapes. Form ends of
Z-sections with stiffening lips angled 40 to 50 degrees to flange
minimum depth as required to comply with system performance requirements
and with the framing plan dimensions.
c. Eave Struts: Unequal-flange, C-shaped sections; fabricated from

steel sheet, built-up steel plates, or structural-steel shapes; to
provide adequate backup for metal panels.
d. Flange Bracing: Structural-steel angles or cold-formed structural

tubing to stiffen primary frame flanges.
e. Sag Bracing: Structural-steel angles.
f. Base or Sill Angles: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet.
g. Purlin and Girt Clips: Steel sheet. Provide galvanized clips

where clips are connected to galvanized framing members.
h. Secondary End-Wall Framing: To match as indicated on Contract

Drawings.
i. Framing for Openings: Channel shapes; fabricated cold-formed,

structural-steel sheet or structural-steel shapes. Frame head and jamb
of door openings, and head, jamb, and sill of other openings.
j. Miscellaneous Structural Members: Manufacturer's standard sections

fabricated from cold-formed, structural-steel sheet; built-up steel
plates; or zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet; designed to withstand
required loads.
2.3.4 Bracing
Provide adjustable wind bracing as follows:
a. Rods: ASTM A 36/A 36M; ASTM A 572/A 572M; or ASTM A 529/A 529M
threaded full length at each end.
b. Cable: ASTM A 475, 5/8" min. diameter, extra-high-strength grade,

zinc-coated, 7x19-strand steel; with threaded end anchors.
c. Angles: Fabricated from structural-steel shapes to match primary

framing, of size required to withstand design loads.
d. Rigid Portal Frames: Fabricate from shop-welded, built-up steel

plates or structural-steel shapes to match primary framing; of
size required to withstand design loads.
e. Fixed-Base Columns: Fabricate from shop-welded, built-up steel

plates or structural-steel shapes to match primary framing; of
size required to withstand design loads.
f. Diaphragm Action of Metal Panels: Design metal building to resist

wind forces through diaphragm action of metal panels.
g. Bracing: Provide wind bracing using any method specified above,

at manufacturer's option.
2.4 PANEL MATERIALS
2.4.1 Steel Sheet
Roll-form steel roof panels to the specified profile, with fy = 50 ksi, 22

gauge and depth as indicated. Material must be plumb and true, and within
the tolerances listed:
a. Galvanized Steel Sheet conforming to ASTM A 653/A 653M and
AISI SG03-3.
b. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-coated Steel Sheet conforming to

ASTM A 792/A 792M and AISI SG03-3.
c. Individual panels to have continuous length to cover the entire

length of any unbroken roof slope with no joints or seams and formed
without warping, waviness, or ripples that are not part of the panel
profile and free of damage to the finish coating system.
d. Provide panels with thermal expansion and contraction consistent

with the type of system specified;
profile to be a 1-3/4 inch high standing seam, 16 inch coverage,

2.4.2 Finish
All panels are to receive a factory-applied polyvinylidene fluoride finish

consisting of a baked-on top-coat with a manufacturer's recommended prime
coat conforming to the following:
a. Metal Preparation: All metal is to have the surfaces carefully

prepared for painting on a continuous process coil coating line by
alkali cleaning, hot water rinsing, application of chemical conversion
coating, cold water rinsing, sealing with acid rinse, and thorough
drying.
b. Prime Coating: A base coat of epoxy paint, specifically formulated

to interact with the top-coat, is to be applied to the prepared
surfaces by roll coating to a dry film thickness of 0.20 + 0.05 mils.
This prime coat must be oven cured prior to application of finish coat.
c. Exterior Finish Coating: Apply the finish coating over the primer
by roll coating to dry film thickness of 0.80 + 5 mils (3.80 + 0.50
mils for Vinyl Plastisol) for a total dry film thickness of 1.00 + 0.10
mils (4.00 + 0.10 mils for Vinyl Plastisol). This finish coat must be
oven-cured.
d. Interior Finish Coating: Apply a wash-coat on the reverse side

over the primer by roll coating to a dry film thickness of 0.30 + 0.05
mils for a total dry film thickness of 0.50 + 0.10 mils. The wash-coat
must be oven-cured.
e. Color: The exterior finish chosen from the manufacturer's color

charts and chips.
f. Physical Properties: Coating must conform to the industry and

manufacturer's standard performance criteria as listed by the following
certified test reports:
Chalking: ASTM DEF

Color Change and Conformity: ASTM D 2244
Weatherometer: ASTM G 23 and ASTM D 822
Humidity: ASTM D 2247 and ASTM D 714

Salt Spray: ASTM B 117
Chemical Pollution: ASTM D 1308
Gloss at 60°: ASTM D 523
Pencil Hardness: ASTM D 3363
Reverse Impact: ASTM D 2794
Flexibility: ASTM D 522
Abrasion: ASTM D 968
Flame Spread: ASTM E 84
2.4.3 Repair Of Finish Protection
Repair paint for color finish enameled metal panel must be compatible paint
of the same formula and color as the specified finish furnished by the
metal panel manufacturer, conforming to ASTM A 780.
2.5 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FRAMING
2.5.1 Fasteners for Miscellaneous Metal Framing
Refer to the following paragraph "FASTENERS".
2.6 FASTENERS
2.6.1 General
Type, material, corrosion resistance, size and sufficient length to

penetrate the supporting member a minimum of 1 inch with other properties
required to fasten miscellaneous metal framing members to substrates in
accordance with the metal panel manufacturer's and ASCE 7-05 requirements.
2.6.2 Exposed Fasteners
Fasteners for metal panels to be corrosion resistant coated steel,

aluminum, stainless steel, or nylon capped steel compatible with the sheet
panel or flashing and of a type and size recommended by the manufacturer to
meet the performance requirements and design loads. Fasteners for
accessories to be the manufacturer's standard. Provide an integral metal
washer matching the color of attached material with compressible sealing
EPDM gasket approximately 3/32 inch thick.
2.6.3 Screws
Screws to be corrosion resistant coated steel, aluminum and/or stainless

steel being the type and size recommended by the manufacturer to meet the
performance requirements.
2.6.4 Rivets
Rivets to be closed-end type, corrosion resistant coated steel, aluminum or

stainless steel where watertight connections are required.
2.6.5 Attachment Clips
Fabricate clips from steel hot-dipped galvanized in accordance with

ASTM A 653/A 653M or Series 300 stainless steel. Size, shape, thickness
and capacity as required meeting the insulation thickness and design load
criteria specified.
2.7 FRAMES AND MATERIALS FOR OPENINGS
2.7.1 Doors
Fire-Rated and Non-Fire-Rated Door Assemblies conforming with NFPA 80 and

based on testing according to NFPA 252 as specified in Division 08 -
OPENINGS unless other wise indicated.
2.7.2 Windows
Aluminum Window Assemblies conforming to AAMA 101 as specified in Division

08 - OPENINGS unless other wise indicated.
2.8 ACCESSORIES
2.8.1 General
All accessories to be compatible with the metal panels; sheet metal

flashing, trim, metal closure strips, caps and similar metal accessories
must not be less than the minimum thickness specified for the metal panels.
Exposed metal accessories/finishes to match the panels furnished, except as
otherwise indicated. Molded foam rib, ridge and other closure strips to be
non-absorbent closed-cell or solid-cell synthetic rubber or pre-molded
neoprene to match configuration of the panels.
2.8.2 Roof and Wall Accessories and Specialties
Aluminum roof curbs, equipment supports, roof hatches, dropout-type heat

and smoke vents, hatch-type heat and smoke vents, gravity and roof ridge
ventilators, wall louvers and other miscellaneous roof and wall equipment
or penetrations conforming to AAMA, ASTM, and UL as specified in Division
07 unless other wise indicated.
2.8.3 Insulation
Faced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I, blankets

without membrane coverings and II, blankets with non-reflecting coverings ;
Class A, membrane-faced surface with a flame spread of 25 or less , except
a flame spread rating of 25 or less and a smoke developed rating of 150 or
less when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.
2.8.3.1 Polyethylene Vapor Retarder
Install polyethylene vapor retarder membrane over entire wall and roof
surface. Use fully compatible polyethylene tape to seal the edges of the
sheets to provide a vapor tight membrane. Lap sheets not less than 6 inch.
Provide sufficient material to avoid inducing stresses in sheets due to
strecthing or binding. All tears or punctures visible in the finished
surface, at anytime during the construction process, must be sealed with
polyethylene tape.
2.8.3.2 Wall Liner
Securely fasten wall liner into place in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendation and in a neatly presented appearance.
2.8.4 Rubber Closure Strips
Closed-cell, expanded cellular rubber conforming to ASTM D 1056 and
ASTM D 1667; extruded or molded to the configuration of the specified metal

panel and in lengths supplied by the metal panel manufacturer.
2.8.5 Metal Closure Strips
Factory fabricated steel closure strips to be the same gauge thickness,

color, finish and profile of the specified roof panel.
2.8.6 2.6.6 Joint Sealants
2.8.6.1 Sealants
Sealants are to be an approved gun type for use in hand or air-pressure

caulking guns at temperatures above 40 degrees F 4 degrees C (or frost-free
application at temperatures above 10 degrees F minus 12 degrees C) with
minimum solid content of 85 percent of the total volume. Sealant is to dry
with a tough, durable surface skin which permits it to remain soft and
pliable underneath, providing a weather-tight joint. No migratory staining
is permitted on painted or unpainted metal, stone, glass, vinyl, or wood.
Prime all joints to receive sealants with a compatible one-component or

two-component primer as recommended by the metal panel manufacturer.
2.8.6.2 Shop-Applied
Sealant for shop-applied caulking must be an approved gun grade, non-sag

one component polysulfide or silicone conforming to ASTM C 920, Type II,
and with a curing time to ensure the sealant's plasticity at the time of
field erection.
2.8.6.3 Field-Applied
Sealant for field-applied caulking must be an approved gun grade, non-sag

one component polysulfide or two-component polyurethane with an initial
maximum Shore A durometer hardness of 25, and conforming to ASTM C 920,
Type II. Color to match panel colors.
2.8.6.4 Tape Sealant
Pressure sensitive, 100% solid with a release paper backing; permanently

elastic, non-sagging, non-toxic and non-staining as approved by the metal
panel manufacturer.
2.9 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
2.9.1 Fabrication
Shop fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim where practicable to comply
with recommendations in SMACNA 1793 that apply to design, dimensions,
metal, and other characteristics of item indicated. Obtain field
measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication.
Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning,
buckling, and tool marks and true to line and levels indicated, with
exposed edges folded back to form hems.
2.10 FINISHES
2.10.1 General
finishes.
2.10.2 Appearance of Finished Work
Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if

they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable
variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance
of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved
Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
Before erection proceeds examine with the erector present the concrete
foundation dimensions, concrete and/or masonry bearing surfaces, anchor
bolt size and placement, survey slab elevation, locations of bearing
plates, and other embedment's to receive structural framing with the metal
building manufacturer's templates and drawings before erecting any steel
components for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and
other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
Examine primary and secondary framing to verify that rafters, purlins,

angles, channels, and other structural and metal panel support members and
anchorages have been installed within alignment tolerances required by
metal building manufacturer, UL, ASTM, ASCE 7-05 and as required by the
building code for the geographical area where construction will take place.
Examine roughing-in for components and systems penetrating metal roof or

wall panels to verify actual locations of penetrations relative to seam
locations of metal panels before metal roof or wall panel installation.
Submit to the Contracting Officer a written report, endorsed by Erector,

listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work.
Proceed with erection only after unsatisfactory conditions have been

corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
Provide temporary shoring, guys, braces, and other supports during erection
to keep the structural framing secure, plumb, and in alignment against
temporary construction loading or loads equal in intensity of the building
design loads. Remove temporary support systems when permanent structural
framing, connections, and bracing are in place, unless otherwise indicated.
Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulation, including removing

projections capable of interfering with insulation attachment and
performance.
Miscellaneous Framing: Install sub-purlins, girts, angles, furring, and

other miscellaneous support members or anchorage for the metal roof or wall
panels, doors, windows, roof curbs, ventilators and louvers according to
metal building manufacturer's written instructions.
3.3 ERECTION OF STRUCTURAL FRAMING
Erect metal building system according to manufacturer's written erection

instructions, approved shop drawings and other erection documents in
accordance with MBMA MBSM - "Metal Building Systems Manual".
Do not field cut, drill, or alter structural members without written

approval from metal building system manufacturer's professional engineer
and the Contracting Officer.
Set structural framing accurately in locations and to elevations indicated

and according to AISC 325 specifications. Maintain structural stability of
frame during erection.
Clean and roughen concrete and masonry bearing surfaces prior to setting
plates. Clean bottom surface of plates.
Align and adjust structural framing before permanent bolt-up and

connections. Perform necessary adjustments and alignment to compensate for
changes or discrepancies in elevations.
Maintain erection tolerances of structural framing in accordance with

AISC 360.
3.4 METAL WALL PANEL INSTALLATION
Provide metal wall panels of full length from sill to eave as indicated,
unless otherwise indicated or restricted by shipping limitations. Anchor
metal wall panels and other components of the Work securely in place, in
accordance with MBMA MBSM.
Erect wall panel system in accordance with the approved erection drawings,
the printed instructions and safety precautions of the metal building
manufacturer.
Sheets are not to be subjected to overloading, abuse, or undue impact. Do

not install bent, chipped, or defective sheets.
the indicated eave, and sill.
Work is to allow for thermal movement of the wall panel, movement of the
building structure, and to provide permanent freedom from noise due to wind
pressure.
Field cutting metal wall panels by torch is not permitted.
3.5 ROOF PANEL INSTALLATION
Provide metal roof panels of full length from eave to ridge or eave to wall
as indicated, unless otherwise indicated or restricted by shipping
limitations. Anchor metal roof panels and other components of the Work
securely in place in accordance with NRCA RWM and MBMA MBSM.
Erect roofing system in accordance with the approved erection drawings, the
printed instructions and safety precautions of the metal building
manufacturer.
Sheets are not to be subjected to overloading, abuse, or undue impact. Do

not install bent, chipped, or defective sheets.
the indicated rake and eave overhang.
Work must allow for thermal movement of the roofing, movement of the
building structure, and provide permanent freedom from noise due to wind
pressure.
Field cutting metal roof panels by torch is not permitted.
Roofing sheets must be laid with corrugations in the direction of the roof
slope. End laps of exterior roofing must not be less than 8 inches; the
side laps of standard exterior corrugated sheets must not be not less than
2-1/2 corrugations.
Do not permit storage, walking, wheeling, and trucking directly on applied

roofing materials. Provide temporary walkways, runways, and platforms of
smooth clean boards or planks as necessary to avoid damage to the installed
roofing materials, and to distribute weight to conform to the indicated
live load limits of roof construction.
3.6 METAL PANEL FASTENER INSTALLATION
Anchor metal panels and other components of the Work securely in place,
using manufacturer's approved fasteners according to manufacturers' written
instructions.
3.7 FLASHING, TRIM AND CLOSURE INSTALLATION
A. Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written

installation instructions, and SMACNA 1793. Provide concealed fasteners
where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install
work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and
weather resistant.
B. Sheet metalwork is to be accomplished to form weather-tight

construction without waves, warps, buckles, fastening stresses or
distortion, and allow for expansion and contraction. Cutting, fitting,
drilling, and other operations in connection with sheet metal required to
accommodate the work of other trades is to be performed by sheet metal
mechanics.
3.8 DOOR AND FRAME INSTALLATION
Install doors and frames plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely
fastened in place according to manufacturer's written instructions.
Coordinate installation with metal panel flashings and other components.
Caulk and seal perimeter of each door frame with elastomeric sealant
compatible with metal panels. Comply with installation requirements in
Division 08 11 13 Steel Doors and Frames.
3.9 WINDOW INSTALLATION
Install windows plumb, rigid, properly aligned, without warp or rack of

frames or sash, and securely fastened in place according to manufacturer's
written instructions. Coordinate installation with window manufacturer and

requirements of UFC 4-010-01. Coordinate installation with metal panel
flashings and other components. Caulk and seal perimeter of each window
frame with elastomeric sealant compatible with for metal panels. Comply
with installation requirements in Division 08 51 13 Aluminum Windows.
3.10 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION
3.10.1 General
Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weather-tight

mounting, and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with
flashings and other components.
3.10.2 Dissimilar Metals
Where dissimilar metals contact one another or corrosive substrates are

present, protect against galvanic action by painting dissimilar metal
surfaces with bituminous coating, by applying rubberized-asphalt
underlayment to each surface, or by other permanent separation techniques
as recommended by the metal building manufacturer.
3.10.3 Gutters and Downspouts
Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation

instructions, and install sheet metal roof drainage items to produce
complete roof drainage system according to SMACNA 1793 recommendations and
as indicated. Coordinate installation of roof perimeter flashing with
installation of roof drainage system.
3.10.4 Insulation
Comply with performance requirements and manufacturer's written

installation instructions. Install insulation concurrently with metal panel
installation, in thickness indicated to cover entire roof and wall area, as
specified in Division 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION.
3.10.5 Roof and Wall Accessories and Specialties
Install roof and wall accessories and specialties complete with necessary
hardware, anchors, dampers, weather guards, rain caps, and equipment
supports as specified in Division 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION,
unless other wise indicated.
3.11 CLEAN-UP AND PROTECTION
3.11.1 Structural Framing
Clean all exposed structural framing at completion of installation. Remove

metal shavings, filings, bolts, and wires from work area. Remove grease
and oil films, excess sealants, handling marks, contamination from steel
wool, fittings and drilling debris and scrub the work clean. Exposed metal
surfaces to be free of dents, creases, waves, scratch marks, solder or weld
marks, and damage to the finish coating.
3.11.2 Metal Panels
Clean all exposed sheet metal work at completion of installation. Remove

metal shavings, filings, nails, bolts, and wires from work area. Remove
protective coverings/films, grease and oil films, excess sealants, handling

marks, contamination from steel wool, fittings and drilling debris and
scrub the work clean. Exposed metal surfaces to be free of dents, creases,
waves, scratch marks, solder or weld marks, and damage to the finish
coating.
3.11.3 Touch-Up Painting
After erection, promptly clean, prepare, and prime or re-prime field

connections, rust spots, and abraded surfaces of prime-painted structural
framing and accessories. Clean and touch-up paint with manufacturer's
touch-up paint.
Separate waste in accordance with the Waste Management Plan, placing copper
materials, ferrous materials, and galvanized sheet metal in designated
areas for reuse. Close and seal tightly all partly used adhesives and
solvents; store protected in a well-ventilated, fire-safe area at moderate
temperature.
Collect and place scrap/waste debris in containers. Promptly dispose of

scrap/waste debris. Do not allow scrap/waste debris to accumulate on-site;
transport scrap/waste debris from government property and legally dispose
of them.
3.13 WARRANTY
3.13.1 MANUFACTURER'S WARRANTY
Submit all manufacturers' signed warranties to Contracting Officer prior to

final commissioning and acceptance.
3.13.2 CONTRACTOR'S WARRANTY for INSTALLATION
Submit contractor's warranty for installation to the Contracting Officer

prior to final commissioning and acceptance.
3.13.3 CONTRACTOR'S NO PENAL SUM WARRANTY
CONTRACTOR'S NO PENAL SUM WARRANTY

FOR
METAL BUILDING SYSTEM
FACILITY DESCRIPTION:________________________________________________________
BUILDING NUMBER:_____________________________________________________________
CORPS OF ENGINEERS CONTRACT NUMBER:__________________________________________
CONTRACTOR
CONTRACTOR:__________________________________________________________________
ADDRESS:_____________________________________________________________________
POINT OF CONTACT:____________________________________________________________
TELEPHONE NUMBER:____________________________________________________________
OWNER
OWNER:_______________________________________________________________________
ADDRESS:_____________________________________________________________________
POINT OF CONTACT:____________________________________________________________
CONSTRUCTION AGENT
CONSTRUCTION AGENT:__________________________________________________________
ADDRESS:_____________________________________________________________________
POINT OF CONTACT:____________________________________________________________
_

FOR
(continued)
THE METAL BUILDING SYSTEM INSTALLED ON THE ABOVE NAMED BUILDING IS WARRANTED
BY (_____) FOR A PERIOD OF 20 YEARS AGAINST WORKMANSHIP AND MATERIAL
DEFICIENCIES, WIND DAMAGE AND STRUCTURAL FAILURE WITHIN PROJECT SPECIFIED
DESIGN LOADS, AND LEAKAGE. THE METAL BUILDING SYSTEM COVERED UNDER THIS
WARRANTY INCLUDES, BUT IS NOT LIMITED TO, THE FOLLOWING:
FRAMING AND STRUCTURAL MEMBERS, ROOFING AND SIDING PANELS AND SEAMS, INTERIOR
OR EXTERIOR GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS, ACCESSORIES, TRIM, FLASHINGS AND
MISCELLANEOUS BUILDING CLOSURE ITEMS SUCH AS DOORS AND WINDOWS (WHEN
FURNISHED BY THE MANUFACTURER), CONNECTORS, COMPONENTS, AND FASTENERS, AND
OTHER SYSTEM COMPONENTS AND ASSEMBLIES INSTALLED TO PROVIDE A WEATHERTIGHT
SYSTEM; AND ITEMS SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS OF THESE SPECIFICATIONS THAT
BECOME PART OF THE METAL BUILDING SYSTEM.
ALL MATERIAL AND WORKMANSHIP DEFICIENCIES, SYSTEM DETERIORATION CAUSED BY

EXPOSURE TO THE ELEMENTS AND/OR INADEQUATE RESISTANCE TO SPECIFIED SERVICE
DESIGN LOADS, WATER LEAKS AND WIND UPLIFT DAMAGE MUST BE REPAIRED AS APPROVED
BY THE CONTRACTING OFFICER.
ALL MATERIAL DEFICIENCIES, WIND DAMAGE, STRUCTURAL FAILURE AND LEAKAGE

ASSOCIATED WITH THE METAL BUILDING SYSTEM COVERED UNDER THIS WARRANTY MUST BE
REPAIRED AS APPROVED BY THE CONTRACTING OFFICER.
THIS WARRANTY COVERS THE ENTIRE COST OF REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT, INCLUDING ALL
MATERIAL, LABOR, AND RELATED MARKUPS. THE ABOVE REFERENCED WARRANTY
COMMENCED ON THE DATE OF FINAL ACCEPTANCE ON (_____) AND WILL REMAIN IN
EFFECT FOR STATED DURATION FROM THIS DATE.
SIGNED, DATED, AND NOTARIZED (BY COMPANY PRESIDENT)
______________________________________________________________
(Company President) (Date)

FOR
(continued)
THE CONTRACTOR HEREBY SUPPLEMENTS THIS WARRANTY WITH WRITTEN WARRANTIES FROM
THE MANUFACTURER AND/OR INSTALLER OF THE METAL BUILDING SYSTEM, WHICH IS
SUBMITTED ALONG WITH THE CONTRACTOR'S WARRANTY. HOWEVER, THE CONTRACTOR IS
ULTIMATELY RESPONSIBLE FOR THIS WARRANTY AS OUTLINED IN THE SPECIFICATIONS
AND AS INDICATED IN THIS WARRANTY.
EXCLUSIONS FROM COVERAGE
1. NATURAL DISASTERS, ACTS OF GOD (LIGHTNING, FIRE, EXPLOSIONS, SUSTAINED

WIND FORCES IN EXCESS OF THE DESIGN CRITERIA, EARTHQUAKES, AND HAIL).
2. ACTS OF NEGLIGENCE OR ABUSE OR MISUSE BY GOVERNMENT OR OTHER

PERSONNEL,INCLUDING ACCIDENTS, VANDALISM, CIVIL DISOBEDIENCE, WAR, OR DAMAGE
CAUSED BY FALLING OBJECTS.
3. DAMAGE BY STRUCTURAL FAILURE, SETTLEMENT, MOVEMENT, DISTORTION, WARPAGE,

OR DISPLACEMENT OF THE BUILDING STRUCTURE OR ALTERATIONS MADE TO THE BUILDING.
4. CORROSION CAUSED BY EXPOSURE TO CORROSIVE CHEMICALS, ASH OR FUMES

GENERATED OR RELEASED INSIDE OR OUTSIDE THE BUILDING FROM CHEMICAL PLANTS,
FOUNDRIES, PLATING WORKS, KILNS, FERTILIZER FACTORIES, PAPER PLANTS, AND THE
LIKE.
5. FAILURE OF ANY PART OF THE BUILDING SYSTEM DUE TO ACTIONS BY THE OWNER
WHICH INHIBIT FREE DRAINAGE FROM THE ROOF, GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS; OR
CONDITIONS WHICH CREATE PONDING WATER ON THE ROOF OR AGAINST THE BUILDING
SIDING.
6. THIS WARRANTY APPLIES TO THE METAL BUILDING SYSTEM. IT DOES NOT INCLUDE
ANY CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGE TO THE BUILDING INTERIOR OR CONTENTS WHICH IS
COVERED BY THE WARRANTY OF CONSTRUCTION CLAUSE INCLUDED IN THIS CONTRACT.
7. THIS WARRANTY CANNOT BE TRANSFERRED TO ANOTHER OWNER WITHOUT WRITTEN

CONSENT OF THE CONTRACTOR AND THIS WARRANTY AND THE CONTRACT PROVISIONS TAKE
PRECEDENCE OVER ANY CONFLICTS WITH STATE STATUTES. REPORTS OF LEAKS AND
BUILDING SYSTEM DEFICIENCIES MUST BE RESPONDED TO WITHIN 48 HOURS OF RECEIPT
OF NOTICE BY TELEPHONE OR IN WRITING FROM EITHER THE OWNER, OR CONTRACTING
OFFICER. EMERGENCY REPAIRS, TO PREVENT FURTHER ROOF LEAKS, MUST BE INITIATED
IMMEDIATELY; A WRITTEN PLAN MUST BE SUBMITTED FOR APPROVAL TO REPAIR OR
REPLACE THIS SSSMR SYSTEM WITHIN SEVEN CALENDAR DAYS. ACTUAL WORK FOR
PERMANENT REPAIRS OR REPLACEMENT MUST BE STARTED WITHIN 30 DAYS AFTER RECEIPT
OF NOTICE, AND COMPLETED WITHIN A REASONABLE TIME FRAME. IF THE CONTRACTOR
FAILS TO ADEQUATELY RESPOND TO THE WARRANTY PROVISIONS, AS STATED

FOR
(Exclusions from Coverage Continued)
IN THE CONTRACT AND AS CONTAINED HEREIN, THE CONTRACTING OFFICER MAY HAVE THE
METAL BUILDING SYSTEM REPLACED OR REPAIRED BY OTHERS AND CHARGE THE COST TO
THE CONTRACTOR. IN THE EVENT THE CONTRACTOR DISPUTES THE EXISTENCE OF A
WARRANTABLE DEFECT, THE CONTRACTOR MAY CHALLENGE THE OWNER'S DEMAND FOR
REPAIRS AND/OR REPLACEMENT DIRECTED BY THE OWNER OR CONTRACTING OFFICER
EITHER BY REQUESTING A CONTRACTING OFFICER'S DECISION, UNDER THE CONTRACT
DISPUTES ACT, OR BY REQUESTING THAT AN ARBITRATOR RESOLVE THE ISSUE. THE
REQUEST FOR AN ARBITRATOR MUST BE MADE WITHIN 48 HOURS OF BEING NOTIFIED OF
THE DISPUTED DEFECTS. UPON BEING INVOKED THE PARTIES MUST, WITHIN 10 DAYS
JOINTLY REQUEST A LIST OF FIVE (5) ARBITRATORS FROM THE FEDERAL MEDIATION AND
CONCILIATION SERVICE. THE PARTIES MUST CONFER WITHIN 10 DAYS AFTER RECEIPT
OF THE LIST TO SEEK AGREEMENT ON AN ARBITRATOR. IF THE PARTIES CANNOT AGREE
ON AN ARBITRATOR, THE CONTRACTING OFFICER AND THE PRESIDENT OF THE
CONTRACTOR'S COMPANY WILL STRIKE ONE (1) NAME FROM THE LIST ALTERNATIVELY
UNTIL ONE NAME REMAINS. THE REMAINING PERSON WILL BE THE DULY SELECTED
ARBITRATOR. THE COSTS OF THE ARBITRATION, INCLUDING THE ARBITRATOR'S FEE AND
EXPENSES, COURT REPORTER, COURTROOM OR SITE SELECTED ETC., MUST BE BORNE
EQUALLY BETWEEN THE PARTIES. EITHER PARTY DESIRING A COPY OF THE TRANSCRIPT
MUST PAY FOR THE TRANSCRIPT. A HEARING WILL BE HELD AS SOON AS THE PARTIES
CAN MUTUALLY AGREE. A WRITTEN ARBITRATOR'S DECISION WILL BE REQUESTED NOT
LATER THAN 30 DAYS FOLLOWING THE HEARING. THE DECISION OF THE ARBITRATOR
WILL NOT BE BINDING; HOWEVER, IT WILL BE ADMISSIBLE IN ANY SUBSEQUENT APPEAL
UNDER THE CONTRACT DISPUTES ACT.
POST A FRAMED COPY OF THIS WARRANTY IN THE MECHANICAL ROOM OR OTHER APPROVED
LOCATION DURING THE ENTIRE WARRANTY PERIOD.
SECTION 21 13 13.00 10
WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEM, FIRE PROTECTION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

ASSE 1015 (2009) Performance Requirements for Double

Check Backflow Prevention Assemblies and
Double Check Fire Protection Backflow
Prevention Assemblies - (ANSI approved
2010)
AWWA B300 (1999; R 2004) Hypochlorites
AWWA B301 (1999; R 2004) Liquid Chlorine
AWWA C104/A21.4 (2008; Errata 2010) Cement-Mortar Lining

for Ductile-Iron Pipe and Fittings for
Water
AWWA C110/A21.10 (2008) Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings

for Water
AWWA C111/A21.11 (2007) Rubber-Gasket Joints for

Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings
AWWA C151/A21.51 (2009) Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally

Cast, for Water
AWWA C203 (2008) Coal-Tar Protective Coatings and

Linings for Steel Water Pipelines - Enamel
and Tape - Hot-Applied
AWWA C606 (2006) Grooved and Shouldered Joints
AWWA C651 (2005; Errata 2005) Standard for

Disinfecting Water Mains
AWWA C652 (2002) Disinfection of Water-Storage

Facilities
ASME B16.1 (2005) Gray Iron Threaded Fittings;

Classes 25, 125 and 250
SECTION 21 13 13.00 10 Page 1

ASME B16.11 (2009) Forged Fittings, Socket-Welding and

Threaded
ASME B16.18 (2001; R 2005) Cast Copper Alloy Solder

Joint Pressure Fittings
ASME B16.21 (2005) Nonmetallic Flat Gaskets for Pipe

Flanges
ASME B16.22 (2001; R 2005) Standard for Wrought Copper

and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure
Fittings
ASME B16.26 (2006) Standard for Cast Copper Alloy

Fittings for Flared Copper Tubes
ASME B16.3 (2006) Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings,

Classes 150 and 300
ASME B16.4 (2006) Standard for Gray Iron Threaded

Fittings; Classes 125 and 250
ASME B16.9 (2007) Standard for Factory-Made Wrought

Steel Buttwelding Fittings

Nuts

Electric-Resistance-Welded Steel Pipe

Carbon Steel Track Bolts and Nuts
ASTM A 449 (2007b) Standard Specification for Hex Cap

Screws, Bolts, and Studs, Steel, Heat
Treated, 120/105/90 ksi Minimum Tensile
Strength, General Use

Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings

Welded and Seamless

Ductile Iron Castings
ASTM A 795/A 795M (2008) Standard Specification for Black

and Hot-Dipped Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)
Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe for Fire
Protection Use

SECTION 21 13 13.00 10 Page 2

ASTM B 75 (2002) Standard Specification for Seamless

Copper Tube

Copper Water Tube

ASTM F 442/F 442M (2009) Standard Specification for

Plastic Pipe (SDR-PR)
FM GLOBAL (FM)
FM APP GUIDE (updated on-line) Approval Guide

http://www.approvalguide.com/CC_host/pages/public/custom

INDUSTRY (MSS)
MSS SP-71 (2005) Gray Iron Swing Check Valves,

Flanged and Threaded Ends
NFPA 13 (2010; Errata 10-1) Standard for the

Installation of Sprinkler Systems
NFPA 1963 (2009; Errata 09-1) Standard for Fire Hose

Connections
NFPA 24 (2010) Standard for the Installation of

Private Fire Service Mains and Their
Appurtenances
NATIONAL INSTITUTE FOR CERTIFICATION IN ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGIES

(NICET)
NICET 1014-7 (2003) Program Detail Manual for

Certification in the Field of Fire
Protection Engineering Technology (Field
Code 003) Subfield of Automatic Sprinkler
System Layout
UL Fire Prot Dir (2010) Fire Protection Equipment Directory
Furnish piping offsets, fittings, and any other accessories as required to

provide a complete installation and to eliminate interference with other
construction. Install sprinkler system over and under ducts, piping and
platforms when such equipment can negatively effect or disrupt the
SECTION 21 13 13.00 10 Page 3

sprinkler discharge pattern and coverage. Provide wet pipe sprinkler

system in all areas of the building. Except as modified herein, the system
shall be designed and installed in accordance with NFPA 13. Rack
sprinklers shall be in accordance with NFPA 13. Pipe sizes which are not
indicated on drawings shall be determined by hydraulic calculation. Design
any portions of the sprinkler system that are not indicated on the drawings
including locating sprinklers, piping and equipment, and size piping and
equipment when this information is not indicated on the drawings or is not
specified herein. The design of the sprinkler system shall be based on
hydraulic calculations, and the other provisions specified herein.
1.2.1 Hydraulic Design
Hydraulically design the system to discharge a minimum density as shown on

drawings in gpm/square foot over the hydraulically most demanding 3,000
square feet of floor area. The minimum pipe size for branch lines in
gridded systems shall be 1-1/4 inch. Hydraulic calculations shall be in
accordance with the Area/Density Method of NFPA 13. Water velocity in the
piping shall not exceed 20 ft/s.
1.2.1.1 Hose Demand
Add an allowance for exterior hose streams of 500 gpm to the sprinkler
system demand at the fire hydrant shown on the drawings closest to the
point where the water service enters the building.
1.2.1.2 Basis for Calculations
The design of the system shall be based upon a water supply with a static
pressure of 66 PSI, and a flow of 2426 GPM at a residual pressure of 56 PSI.
Water supply shall be presumed available at the base of the riser.
Hydraulic calculations shall be based upon the Hazen-Williams formula with
a "C" value of 120 for steel piping, 150 for copper tubing, 140 for new
cement-lined ductile-iron piping, and 100 for existing underground piping.
1.2.1.3 Hydraulic Calculations
Prepare hydraulic calculations as outlined in NFPA 13, except that

calculations shall be performed by computer using software intended
specifically for fire protection system design using the design data shown
on the drawings. Software that uses k-factors for typical branch lines is
not acceptable. Calculations shall be based on the water supply data shown
on the drawings to substantiate that the design area used in the
calculations is the most demanding hydraulically. Water supply curves and
system requirements shall be plotted on semi-logarithmic graph paper so as
to present a summary of the complete hydraulic calculation. Provide a
summary sheet listing sprinklers in the design area and their respective
hydraulic reference points, elevations, actual discharge pressures and
actual flows. Elevations of hydraulic reference points (nodes) shall be
indicated. Documentation shall identify each pipe individually and the
nodes connected thereto. Indicate the diameter, length, flow, velocity,
friction loss, number and type fittings, total friction loss in the pipe,
equivalent pipe length and Hazen-Williams coefficient for each pipe. For
gridded systems, calculations shall show peaking of demand area friction
loss to verify that the hydraulically most demanding area is being used.
Also for gridded systems, a flow diagram indicating the quantity and
direction of flows shall be included. A drawing showing hydraulic
reference points (nodes) and pipe designations used in the calculations
shall be included and shall be independent of shop drawings.
SECTION 21 13 13.00 10 Page 4

1.2.2 Sprinkler Coverage
Sprinklers shall be uniformly spaced on branch lines. In buildings

protected by automatic sprinklers, sprinklers shall provide coverage
throughout 100 percent of the building. This includes, but is not limited
to, telephone rooms, electrical equipment rooms, boiler rooms, switchgear
rooms, transformer rooms, and other electrical and mechanical spaces.
Coverage per sprinkler shall be in accordance with NFPA 13, but shall not
exceed 100 square feet for extra hazard occupancies, 130 square feet for
ordinary hazard occupancies, and 225 square feet for light hazard
occupancies.
1.3 SUBMITTALS

SD-02 Shop Drawings
Shop Drawings; G,DO
Three copies of the Sprinkler System Shop Drawings, no later

than 21 days prior to the start of sprinkler system installation.
As-Built Drawings
As-built shop drawings, at least 14 days after completion of the

Final Tests, updated to reflect as-built conditions after all
related work is completed. Drawings shall be on reproducible
full-size mylar film.
SD-03 Product Data
Fire Protection Related Submittals
Materials and Equipment G,DO
Manufacturer's catalog data included with the Sprinkler System

Drawings for all items specified herein. The data shall be
highlighted to show model, size, options, etc., that are intended
for consideration. Data shall be adequate to demonstrate
compliance with all contract requirements. In addition, provide a
complete equipment list that includes equipment description, model
number and quantity.
Spare Parts
Spare parts data for each different item of material and

equipment specified.
Preliminary Tests G,RO
Proposed procedures for Preliminary Tests, no later than 14 days
SECTION 21 13 13.00 10 Page 5

prior to the proposed start of the tests. Proposed date and time
to begin the preliminary tests.
Final Acceptance Test G,RO
Proposed procedures for Final Acceptance Test, no later than 14

days prior to the proposed start of the tests. Proposed date and
time to begin Final Acceptance Test, submitted with the Final
Acceptance Test Procedures. Notification shall be provided at
least 14 days prior to the proposed start of the test.
Notification shall include a copy of the Contractor's Material &
Test Certificates.
Onsite Training G,RO
Proposed Onsite Training schedule, at least 14 days prior to

the start of related training.
Fire Protection Specialist G,DO
The name and documentation of certification of the proposed Fire

Protection Specialists, no later than 14 days after the Notice to
Proceed and prior to the submittal of the sprinkler system
drawings and hydraulic calculations.
Sprinkler System Installer G,DO
The name and documentation of certification of the proposed

Sprinkler System Installer, concurrent with submittal of the Fire
Protection Specialist Qualifications.
SD-05 Design Data
Hydraulic Calculations G,DO
Hydraulic calculations, including a drawing showing hydraulic

reference points and pipe segments.
SD-06 Test Reports
Preliminary Test Report G,DO
Three copies of the completed Preliminary Test Report, no later

than 7 days after the completion of the Preliminary Tests. The
Preliminary Tests Report shall include both the Contractor's
Material and Test Certificate for Underground Piping and the
Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for Aboveground
Piping. All items in the Preliminary Tests Report shall be signed
by the Fire Protection Specialist.
Final Acceptance Test Report G,DO
Three copies of the completed Final Acceptance Tests Reports, no

later than 7 days after the completion of the Final Acceptance
Tests. All items in the Final Acceptance Report shall be signed
by the Fire Protection Specialist.
SECTION 21 13 13.00 10 Page 6

SD-07 Certificates
Inspection by Fire Protection Specialist G,DO
Operating and Maintenance Instructions
Six manuals listing step-by-step procedures required for system

startup, operation, shutdown, and routine maintenance, at least 14
days prior to field training. The manuals shall include the
manufacturer's name, model number, parts list, list of parts and
tools that should be kept in stock by the owner for routine
maintenance including the name of a local supplier, simplified
wiring and controls diagrams, troubleshooting guide, and
recommended service organization (including address and telephone
number) for each item of equipment.
Compliance with referenced NFPA standards is mandatory. This includes

advisory provisions listed in the appendices of such standards, as though
the word "shall" had been substituted for the word "should" wherever it
appears. In the event of a conflict between specific provisions of this
specification and applicable NFPA standards, this specification shall
govern. Reference to "authority having jurisdiction" shall be interpreted
to mean the Contracting Officer.
1.4.1 Fire Protection Specialist
Perform work specified in this section under the supervision of and

certified by the Fire Protection Specialist who is an individual registered
professional engineer who has passed the fire protection engineering
written examination administered by the National Council of Examiners for
Engineering and Surveys (NCEES)or in a related engineering discipline with
a minimum of 5 years experience, dedicated to fire protection engineering
that can be verified with documentation or who is certified as a Level III
Technician by National Institute for Certification in Engineering
Technologies (NICET) in the Automatic Sprinkler System Layout subfield of
Fire Protection Engineering Technology in accordance with NICET 1014-7.
The Fire Protection Specialist shall prepare a list of the fire protection
related submittals from the Contract Submittal Register that relate to the
successful installation of the sprinkler systems(s). The submittals
identified on this list shall be accompanied by a letter of approval signed
and dated by the Fire Protection Specialist when submitted to the
Government. The Fire Protection Specialist shall be regularly engaged in
the design and installation of the type and complexity of system specified
in the contract documents, and shall have served in a similar capacity for
at least three systems that have performed in the manner intended for a
period of not less than 6 months.
1.4.2 Sprinkler System Installer
Work specified in this section shall be performed by the Sprinkler System

Installer who is regularly engaged in the installation of the type and
complexity of system specified in the contract documents, and shall have
served in a similar capacity for at least three systems that have performed
in the manner intended for a period of not less than 6 months.
SECTION 21 13 13.00 10 Page 7

1.4.3 Shop Drawings
Shop Drawings shall conform to the requirements established for working

plans as prescribed in NFPA 13. Drawings shall include plan and elevation
views demonstrating that the equipment will fit the allotted spaces with
clearance for installation and maintenance. Each set of drawings shall
include the following:
a. Descriptive index of drawings in the submittal with drawings listed in

sequence by drawing number. A legend identifying device symbols,
nomenclature, and conventions used.
b. Floor plans drawn to a scale not less than 1/8" = 1'-0" which clearly
show locations of sprinklers, risers, pipe hangers, seismic separation
assemblies, sway bracing, inspector's test connections, drains, and
other applicable details necessary to clearly describe the proposed
arrangement. Each type of fitting used and the locations of bushings,
reducing couplings, and welded joints shall be indicated.
c. Actual center-to-center dimensions between sprinklers on branch lines

and between branch lines; from end sprinklers to adjacent walls; from
walls to branch lines; from sprinkler feed mains, cross-mains and
branch lines to finished floor and roof or ceiling. A detail shall
show the dimension from the sprinkler and sprinkler deflector to the
ceiling in finished areas.
d. Longitudinal and transverse building sections showing typical branch

line and cross-main pipe routing as well as elevation of each typical
sprinkler above finished floor.
e. Details of each type of riser assembly; pipe hanger; , and restraint of

underground water main at point-of-entry into the building, and
electrical devices and interconnecting wiring.
All equipment delivered and placed in storage shall be housed in a manner

to preclude any damage from the weather, humidity and temperature
variations, dirt and dust, or other contaminants. Additionally, all pipes
shall either be capped or plugged until installed.
1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS
Submit spare parts data for each different item of material and equipment
specified. The data shall include a complete list of parts and supplies,
with current unit prices and source of supply, and a list of parts
recommended by the manufacturer to be replaced after 1 year and 3 years of
service. A list of special tools and test equipment required for
maintenance and testing of the products supplied by the Contractor shall be
included.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Provide materials and equipment which are standard products of a

manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of such products and that
essentially duplicate items that have been in satisfactory use for at least
2 years prior to bid opening.
SECTION 21 13 13.00 10 Page 8

2.2 NAMEPLATES
All equipment shall have a nameplate that identifies the manufacturer's

name, address, type or style, model or serial number, and catalog number.
2.3 REQUIREMENTS FOR FIRE PROTECTION SERVICE
Provide Materials and Equipment that have been tested by Underwriters

Laboratories, Inc. and are listed in UL Fire Prot Dir or approved by
Factory Mutual and listed in FM APP GUIDE. Where the terms "listed" or
"approved" appear in this specification, such shall mean listed in
UL Fire Prot Dir or FM APP GUIDE.
2.4 UNDERGROUND PIPING COMPONENTS
2.4.1 Pipe
Piping from a point 6 inches above the floor to a point 5 feet outside the
building wall shall be ductile iron with a rated working pressure of 150 psi
conforming to AWWA C151/A21.51, with cement mortar lining conforming to
AWWA C104/A21.4. Piping more than 5 feet outside the building walls shall
comply with Section 33 11 00 WATER DISTRIBUTION.
2.4.2 Fittings and Gaskets
Fittings shall be ductile iron conforming to AWWA C110/A21.10. Gaskets

shall be suitable in design and size for the pipe with which such gaskets
are to be used. Gaskets for ductile iron pipe joints shall conform to
AWWA C111/A21.11.
2.4.3 Gate Valve and Indicator Posts
Gate valves for underground installation shall be of the inside screw type
with counter-clockwise rotation to open. Where indicating type valves are
shown or required, indicating valves shall be gate valves with an approved
indicator post of a length to permit the top of the post to be located 3
feet above finished grade. Gate valves and indicator posts shall be listed
in UL Fire Prot Dir or FM APP GUIDE.
2.5 ABOVEGROUND PIPING COMPONENTS
Aboveground piping shall be steel , copper, or plastic.
2.5.1 Steel Piping Components
2.5.1.1 Steel Pipe
Except as modified herein, steel pipe shall be black as permitted by NFPA 13

and shall conform to applicable provisions of ASTM A 795/A 795M,
ASTM A 53/A 53M, or ASTM A 135/A 135M. Pipe in which threads or grooves
are cut or rolled formed shall be Schedule 40 or shall be listed by
Underwriters' Laboratories to have a corrosion resistance ratio (CRR) of
1.0 or greater after threads or grooves are cut or rolled formed. Pipe
shall be marked with the name of the manufacturer, kind of pipe, and ASTM
designation.
SECTION 21 13 13.00 10 Page 9

2.5.1.2 Fittings for Non-Grooved Steel Pipe
Fittings shall be cast iron conforming to ASME B16.4, steel conforming to

ASME B16.9 or ASME B16.11, or malleable iron conforming to ASME B16.3.
Galvanized fittings shall be used for piping systems or portions of piping
systems utilizing galvanized piping. Fittings into which sprinklers, drop
nipples or riser nipples (sprigs) are screwed shall be threaded type.
Plain-end fittings with mechanical couplings, fittings that use steel
gripping devices to bite into the pipe and segmented welded fittings shall
not be used.
2.5.1.3 Grooved Mechanical Joints and Fittings
Joints and fittings shall be designed for not less than 175 psi service and
shall be the product of the same manufacturer;segmented welded fittings
shall not be used. Fitting and coupling houses shall be malleable iron
conforming to ASTM A 47/A 47M, Grade 32510; ductile iron conforming to
ASTM A 536, Grade 65-45-12. Gasket shall be the flush type that fills the
entire cavity between the fitting and the pipe. Nuts and bolts shall be
heat-treated steel conforming to ASTM A 183 and shall be cadmium plated or
zinc electroplated.
2.5.1.4 Flanges
Flanges shall conform to NFPA 13 and ASME B16.1. Gaskets shall be

non-asbestos compressed material in accordance with ASME B16.21, 1/16 inch
thick, and full face or self-centering flat ring type.
2.5.1.5 Bolts, Nut, and Washers
Bolts shall be conform to ASTM A 449, Type 1 and shall extend no less than
three full threads beyond the nut with bolts tightened to the required
torque. Nuts shall be hexagon type conforming to ASME B18.2.2. Washers
shall meet the requirements of ASTM F 436. Flat circular washers shall be
provided under all bolt heads and nuts.
2.5.2 Copper Tube Components
2.5.2.1 Copper Tube
Copper tube shall conform to ASTM B 88, Types L and M.
2.5.2.2 Copper Fittings and Joints
Cast copper alloy solder-joint pressure fittings shall conform to

ASME B16.18 and wrought copper and bronze solder-joint pressure fittings
shall conform to ASME B16.22 and ASTM B 75. Cast copper alloy fittings for
flared copper tube shall conform to ASME B16.26and ASTM B 62. Brass or
bronze adapters for brazed tubing may be used for connecting tubing to
flanges and to threaded ends of valves and equipment. Extracted brazed tee
joints produced with an acceptable tool and installed as recommended by the
manufacturer may be used. Grooved mechanical joints and fittings shall be
designed for not less than 125 psig service and shall be the product of the
same manufacturer. Grooved fitting and mechanical coupling housing shall
be ductile iron conforming to ASTM A 536. Gaskets for use in grooved
joints shall be molded synthetic polymer of pressure responsive design and
shall conform to ASTM D 2000 for circulating medium up to 230 degrees F.
Grooved joints shall conform to AWWA C606. Coupling nuts and bolts for use
in grooved joints shall be steel and shall conform to ASTM A 183.
SECTION 21 13 13.00 10 Page 10

2.5.3 Plastic Piping Components
2.5.3.1 Plastic Pipe
Plastic pipe shall be chlorinated polyvinyl chloride (CPVC) conforming to

ASTM F 442/F 442M, 175 psi rating and listed in UL Fire Prot Dir for use
in wet pipe sprinkler systems.
2.5.3.2 Plastic Fittings
Plastic fitting shall be chlorinated polyvinyl chloride (CPVC) as listed in

UL Fire Prot Dir for use in wet pipe sprinkler systems.
2.5.4 Pipe Hangers
Hangers shall be listed in UL Fire Prot Dir or FM APP GUIDE and of the type
suitable for the application, construction, and pipe type and sized to be
supported.
2.5.5 Valves
2.5.5.1 Control Valve and Gate Valve
Manually operated sprinkler control valve and gate valve shall be outside
stem and yoke (OS&Y) type and shall be listed in UL Bld Mat Dir or
FM APP GUIDE.
2.5.5.2 Check Valve
Check valve 2 inches and larger shall be listed in UL Bld Mat Dir or
FM APP GUIDE. Check valves 4 inches and larger shall be of the swing type
with flanged cast iron body and flanged inspection plate, shall have a
clear waterway and shall meet the requirements of MSS SP-71, for Type 3 or
4.
2.6 WATERFLOW ALARM
Electrically operated, exterior-mounted, waterflow alarm bell shall be

provided and installed in accordance with NFPA 13. Waterflow alarm bell
shall be rated 24 VDC and shall be connected to the Fire Alarm Control
Panel(FACP) in accordance with Section 28 31 76 Interior Fire Alarm and
Mass Notification System
2.7 ALARM INITIATING AND SUPERVISORY DEVICES
2.7.1 Sprinkler Waterflow Indicator Switch, Vane Type
Switch shall be vane type with a pipe saddle and cast aluminum housing.
The electro-mechanical device shall include a flexible, low-density
polyethylene paddle conforming to the inside diameter of the fire
protection pipe. The device shall sense water movements and be capable of
detecting a sustained flow of 10 gpm or greater. The device shall contain
a retard device adjustable from 0 to 90 seconds to reduce the possibility
of false alarms caused by transient flow surges. The switch shall be
tamper resistant and contain two SPDT (Form C) contacts arranged to
transfer upon removal of the housing cover, and shall be equipped with a
silicone rubber gasket to assure positive water seal and a dustproof cover
and gasket to seal the mechanism from dirt and moisture.
SECTION 21 13 13.00 10 Page 11

2.7.2 Valve Supervisory (Tamper) Switch
Switch shall be suitable for mounting to the type of control valve to be

supervised open. The switch shall be tamper resistant and contain one set
of SPDT (Form C) contacts arranged to transfer upon removal of the housing
cover or closure of the valve of more than two rotations of the valve stem.
2.8 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION
Fire department connection shall be projecting type with cast brass body,
matching wall escutcheon lettered "Auto Spkr" with a polished brass
finish. The connection shall have two inlets with individual self-closing
clappers, caps with drip drains and chains. Female inlets shall have 2-1/2
inch diameter American National Fire Hose Connection Screw Threads (NH) per
NFPA 1963.
2.9 SPRINKLERS
Sprinklers with internal O-rings shall not be used. Sprinklers shall be

used in accordance with their listed coverage limitations. Temperature
classification shall be as indicated. Sprinklers in high heat areas
including attic spaces or in close proximity to unit heaters shall have
temperature classification in accordance with NFPA 13. Extended coverage
sprinklers shall not be used.
2.9.1 Pendent Sprinkler
Pendent sprinkler shall be of the fusible strut or glass bulb type,

quick-response type with nominal 1/2 inchor 17/32 inch orifice. Pendent
sprinklers shall have a polished chrome finish.
2.9.2 Upright Sprinkler
Upright sprinkler shall be brass and shall have a nominal 1/2 inch or 17/32
inch orifice.
2.9.3 Sidewall Sprinkler
Sidewall sprinkler shall have a nominal 1/2 inch orifice. Sidewall

sprinkler shall have a polished chrome finish. Sidewall sprinkler shall be
the quick-response type.
2.9.4 Dry Sprinkler Assembly
Dry sprinkler assembly shall be of the upright,orsidewall, type as

indicated. Assembly shall include an integral escutcheon. Maximum length
shall not exceed maximum indicated in UL Fire Prot Dir. Sprinklers shall
have a polished chrome finish.
2.10 DISINFECTING MATERIALS
2.10.1 Liquid Chlorine
Liquid chlorine shall conform to AWWA B301.
2.10.2 Hypochlorites
Calcium hypochlorite and sodium hypochlorite shall conform to AWWA B300.
SECTION 21 13 13.00 10 Page 12

2.11 ACCESSORIES
2.11.1 Sprinkler Cabinet
Spare sprinklers shall be provided in accordance with NFPA 13 and shall be

packed in a suitable metal or plastic cabinet. Spare sprinklers shall be
representative of, and in proportion to, the number of each type and
temperature rating of the sprinklers installed. At least one wrench of
each type required shall be provided.
2.11.2 Pendent Sprinkler Escutcheon
Escutcheon shall be one-piece metallic type with a depth of less than 3/4
inch and suitable for installation on pendent sprinklers. The escutcheon
shall have a factory finish that matches the pendent sprinkler heads.
2.11.3 Pipe Escutcheon
Escutcheon shall be polished chromium-plated zinc alloy, or polished

chromium-plated copper alloy. Escutcheons shall be either one-piece or
split-pattern, held in place by internal spring tension or set screw.
2.11.4 Sprinkler Guard
Guard shall be a steel wire cage designed to encase the sprinkler and
protect it from mechanical damage. Guards shall be provided on sprinklers
located in mechanical rooms.
2.11.5 Identification Sign
Valve identification sign shall be minimum 6 inches wide by 2 inches high

with enamel baked finish on minimum 18 gauge steel or 0.024 inch aluminum
with red letters on a white background or white letters on red background.
Wording of sign shall include, but not be limited to "main drain,"
"auxiliary drain," "inspector's test," "alarm test," "alarm line," and
similar wording as required to identify operational components.
2.12 DOUBLE-CHECK VALVE BACKFLOW PREVENTION ASSEMBLY
Double-check backflow prevention assembly shall comply with ASSE 1015. The
assembly shall have a bronze, cast-iron or stainless steel body with
flanged ends. The assembly shall include pressure gauge test ports and
OS&Y shutoff valves on the inlet and outlet, 2-positive-seating check valve
for continuous pressure application, and four test cocks. Assemblies shall
be rated for working pressure of 150 psi The maximum pressure loss shall be
6 psi at a flow rate equal to the sprinkler water demand, at the location
of the assembly. A test port for a pressure gauge shall be provided both
upstream and downstream of the double check backflow prevention assembly
valves.
PART 3 EXECUTION
After becoming familiar with all details of the work, verify all dimensions
in the field, and advise the Contracting Officer of any discrepancy before
SECTION 21 13 13.00 10 Page 13

3.2 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
The installation shall be in accordance with the applicable provisions of

NFPA 13, NFPA 24 and publications referenced therein. Installation of
in-rack sprinklers shall comply with applicable provisions of NFPA 13.
3.3 INSPECTION BY FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALIST
Prior to ceiling installation and concurrent with the Final Acceptance Test
Report, certification by the Fire Protection Specialist that the sprinkler
system is installed in accordance with the contract requirements, including
signed approval of the Preliminary and Final Acceptance Test Reports. The
Fire Protection Specialist shall: 1) inspect the sprinkler system
periodically during the installation to assure that the sprinkler system is
being provided and installed in accordance with the contract requirements,
2) witness the preliminary and final tests, and sign the test results, 3)
after completion of the system inspections and a successful final test,
certify in writing that the system has been installed in accordance with
the contract requirements. Any discrepancy shall be brought to the
attention of the Contracting Officer in writing, no later than three
working days after the discrepancy is discovered.
3.4 ABOVEGROUND PIPING INSTALLATION
3.4.1 Protection of Piping Against Earthquake Damage
Seismically protect the system piping against damage from earthquakes.

This requirement is not subject to determination under NFPA 13. Install
the seismic protection of the system piping in accordance with UFC
3-310-04, NFPA 13 and Annex A. Include the required features identified
therein that are applicable to the specific piping system.
3.4.2 Piping in Exposed Areas
Install exposed piping without diminishing exit access widths, corridors or

equipment access. Exposed horizontal piping, including drain piping, shall
be installed to provide maximum headroom.
3.4.3 Piping in Finished Areas
In areas with suspended or dropped ceilings and in areas with concealed

spaces above the ceiling, piping shall be concealed above ceilings. Piping
shall be inspected, tested and approved before being concealed. Risers and
similar vertical runs of piping in finished areas shall be concealed.
3.4.4 Pendent Sprinklers
Drop nipples to pendent sprinklers shall consist of minimum 1 inch pipe

with a reducing coupling into which the sprinkler shall be threaded.
Hangers shall be provided on arm-overs to drop nipples supplying pendent
sprinklers when the arm-over exceeds 12 inches for steel pipe or 6 inches
for copper tubing. Where sprinklers are installed below suspended or
dropped ceilings, drop nipples shall be cut such that sprinkler ceiling
plates or escutcheons are of a uniform depth throughout the finished
space. The outlet of the reducing coupling shall not extend more than 1
inch below the underside of the ceiling. On pendent sprinklers installed
below suspended or dropped ceilings, the distance from the sprinkler
deflector to the underside of the ceiling shall not exceed 4 inches.
Recessed pendent sprinklers shall be installed such that the distance from
SECTION 21 13 13.00 10 Page 14

the sprinkler deflector to the underside of the ceiling shall not exceed
the manufacturer's listed range and shall be of uniform depth throughout
the finished area. Pendent sprinklers in suspended ceilings shall be a
minimum of 6 inches from ceiling grid.
3.4.5 Upright Sprinklers
Riser nipples or "sprigs" to upright sprinklers shall contain no fittings

between the branch line tee and the reducing coupling at the sprinkler.
Riser nipples exceeding 30 inches in length shall be individually supported.
3.4.6 Pipe Joints
Pipe joints shall conform to NFPA 13, except as modified herein. Not more
than four threads shall show after joint is made up. Welded joints will be
permitted, only if welding operations are performed as required by NFPA 13
at the Contractor's fabrication shop, not at the project construction
site. Flanged joints shall be provided where indicated or required by
NFPA 13. Grooved pipe and fittings shall be prepared in accordance with
the manufacturer's latest published specification according to pipe
material, wall thickness and size. Grooved couplings, fittings and
grooving tools shall be products of the same manufacturer. For copper
tubing, pipe and groove dimensions shall comply with the tolerances
specified by the coupling manufacturer. The diameter of grooves made in
the field shall be measured using a "go/no-go" gauge, vernier or dial
caliper, narrow-land micrometer, or other method specifically approved by
the coupling manufacturer for the intended application. Groove width and
dimension of groove from end of pipe shall be measured and recorded for
each change in grooving tool setup to verify compliance with coupling
manufacturer's tolerances. Grooved joints shall not be used in concealed
locations, such as behind solid walls or ceilings, unless an access panel
is shown on the drawings for servicing or adjusting the joint.
3.4.7 Reducers
Reductions in pipe sizes shall be made with one-piece tapered reducing

fittings. The use of grooved-end or rubber-gasketed reducing couplings
will not be permitted. When standard fittings of the required size are not
manufactured, single bushings of the face type will be permitted. Where
used, face bushings shall be installed with the outer face flush with the
face of the fitting opening being reduced. Bushings shall not be used in
elbow fittings, in more than one outlet of a tee, in more than two outlets
of a cross, or where the reduction in size is less than 1/2 inch.
3.4.8 Pipe Penetrations
Cutting structural members for passage of pipes or for pipe-hanger

fastenings will not be permitted. Pipes that must penetrate concrete or
masonry walls or concrete floors shall be core-drilled and provided with
pipe sleeves. Each sleeve shall be Schedule 40 galvanized steel, ductile
iron or cast iron pipe and shall extend through its respective wall or
floor and be cut flush with each wall surface. Sleeves shall provide
required clearance between the pipe and the sleeve per NFPA 13. The space
between the sleeve and the pipe shall be firmly packed with mineral wool
insulation. Where pipes penetrate fire walls, fire partitions, or floors,
pipes shall be fire stopped in accordance with Section 07 84 00
FIRESTOPPING. In penetrations that are not fire-rated or not a floor
penetration, the space between the sleeve and the pipe shall be sealed at
both ends with plastic waterproof cement that will dry to a firm but
SECTION 21 13 13.00 10 Page 15

pliable mass or with a mechanically adjustable segmented elastomer seal.
3.4.9 Escutcheons
Escutcheons shall be provided for pipe penetration of ceilings and walls.

Escutcheons shall be securely fastened to the pipe at surfaces through
which piping passes.
3.4.10 Inspector's Test Connection
Unless otherwise indicated, test connection shall consist of 1 inch pipe

connected to the remote branch line; a test valve located approximately 7
feet above the floor; a smooth bore brass outlet equivalent to the smallest
orifice sprinkler used in the system; and a painted metal identification
sign affixed to the valve with the words "Inspector's Test." The discharge
orifice shall be located outside the building wall directed so as not to
cause damage to adjacent construction or landscaping during full flow
discharge.
3.4.11 Drains
Main drain piping shall be provided to discharge at a safe point outside

the building. Auxiliary drains shall be provided as required by NFPA 13.
3.4.12 Installation of Fire Department Connection
Connection shall be mounted on the exterior wall approximately 3 feet above

finished grade. The piping between the connection and the check valve
shall be provided with an automatic drip in accordance with NFPA 13 and
arranged to drain to the outside.
3.4.13 Identification Signs
Signs shall be affixed to each control valve, inspector test valve, main
drain, auxiliary drain, test valve, and similar valves as appropriate or as
required by NFPA 13. Hydraulic design data nameplates shall be permanently
affixed to each sprinkler riser as specified in NFPA 13.
3.5 UNDERGROUND PIPING INSTALLATION
The fire protection water main shall be laid, and joints anchored, in
accordance with NFPA 24. Minimum depth of cover shall be 3feet. The
supply line shall terminate inside the building with a flanged piece, the
bottom of which shall be set not less than 6 inches above the finished
floor. A blind flange shall be installed temporarily on top of the flanged
piece to prevent the entrance of foreign matter into the supply line. A
concrete thrust block shall be provided at the elbow where the pipe turns
up toward the floor. In addition, joints shall be anchored in accordance
with NFPA 24 using pipe clamps and steel rods from the elbow to the flange
above the floor and from the elbow to a pipe clamp in the horizontal run of
pipe. Buried steel components shall be provided with a corrosion
protective coating in accordance with AWWA C203. Piping more than 5 feet
outside the building walls shall meet the requirements of Section 33 11 00
WATER DISTRIBUTION.
3.6 EARTHWORK
Earthwork shall be performed in accordance with applicable provisions of

Section 31 00 00 EARTHWORK.
SECTION 21 13 13.00 10 Page 16

3.7 ELECTRICAL WORK
Except as modified herein, electric equipment and wiring shall be in

accordance with Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Alarm
signal wiring connected to the building fire alarm control system shall be
in accordance with Section 28 31 76 Interior Fire Alarm and Mass
Notification System. Wiring color code shall remain uniform throughout
the system.
3.8 DISINFECTION
After all system components are installed and hydrostatic test(s) are
completed, the entire sprinkler system shall be disinfected. Flush all
sprinkler system piping with potable water until any entrained dirt and
other foreign materials have been removed before introducing chlorinating
material. Remove the flushing fitting of each cross main and of each grid
branch line and then back-flush through the sprinkler main drain.
a. The water chlorination procedure shall be in accordance with AWWA C651

and AWWA C652. Feed either a hypochlorite solution (using a
hypochlorinator) or liquid chlorine (using a solution-fed chlorinator
and booster pump) into the system at a constant rate of 50 parts per
million (ppm) until the entire system is filled.
b. Monitor the chlorine residual level in the water at six hour intervals
for a period of 24 hours. If the residual chlorine is below 25 ppm in
any interval sampled, flush all piping and repeat the chlorination
procedure. Open and close each valve in the system several times
during this 24 hour period to ensure its proper disinfection.
Following the 24-hour period, verify that no less than 25 ppm chlorine
residual remains in the system. After the chlorine residual level is
successfully maintained at or above 25 ppm for a 24 hour period, flush
the system with water from the distribution system until the residual
chlorine is reduced to less than one ppm.
c. Take additional samples of water at locations specified by the

Contracting Officer in disinfected containers for bacterial
examination. Test these samples in an approved laboratory for total
coliform organisms (coliform bacteria, fecal coliform, streptococcal,
and other bacteria) in accordance with EPA Standard Method SM9223,
Total Coliforms-PA Test.
d. Disinfection shall be repeated until tests indicate the absence of

coliform organisms (zero mean coliform density per 100 milliliters) in
two separate test samples taken 24 hours apart. The system will not be
accepted until satisfactory bacteriological results have been obtained.
3.9 PIPE COLOR CODE MARKING
Color code marking of piping shall be as specified in Section 09 90 00

PAINTS AND COATINGS.
3.10 PRELIMINARY TESTS
The system, including the underground water mains, and the aboveground
piping and system components, shall be tested to assure that equipment and
components function as intended. The underground and aboveground interior
piping systems and attached appurtenances subjected to system working
SECTION 21 13 13.00 10 Page 17

pressure shall be tested in accordance with NFPA 13 and NFPA 24. Upon
completion of specified tests, complete certificates as specified in
paragraph SUBMITTALS.
3.10.1 Underground Piping
3.10.1.1 Flushing
Underground piping shall be flushed in accordance with NFPA 24. This

includes the requirement to flush the lead-in connection to the fire
protection system at a flow rate not less that the calculated maximum water
demand rate of the system.
3.10.1.2 Hydrostatic Testing
New underground piping shall be hydrostatically tested in accordance with

NFPA 24. The allowable leakage shall be measured at the specified test
pressure by pumping from a calibrated container. The amount of leakage at
the joints shall not exceed 2 quarts per hour per 100 gaskets or joints,
regardless of pipe diameter.
3.10.2 Aboveground Piping
3.10.2.1 Hydrostatic Testing
Aboveground piping shall be hydrostatically tested in accordance with

NFPA 13 at not less than 200 psi or 50 psi in excess of maximum system
operating pressure and shall maintain that pressure without loss for 2
hours. There shall be no drop in gauge pressure or visible leakage when
the system is subjected to the hydrostatic test. The test pressure shall
be read from a gauge located at the low elevation point of the system or
portion being tested.
3.10.2.2 Backflow Prevention Assembly Forward Flow Test
Each backflow prevention assembly shall be tested at system flow demand,

including all applicable hose streams, as specified in NFPA 13. Provide
all equipment and instruments necessary to conduct a complete forward flow
test, including 2.5 inch diameter hoses, playpipe nozzles, calibrated
pressure gauges, pitot tube gauge, plus all necessary supports to safely
secure hoses and nozzles during the test. At the system demand flow, the
pressure readings and pressure drop (friction) across the assembly shall be
recorded. Provide a metal placard on the backflow prevention assembly that
lists the pressure readings both upstream and downstream of the assembly,
total pressure drop, and the system test flow rate. The pressure drop
shall be compared to the manufacturer's data.
3.10.3 Testing of Alarm Devices
Each alarm switch shall be tested by flowing water through the inspector's
test connection. Each water-operated alarm devices shall be tested to
verify proper operation.
3.10.4 Main Drain Flow Test
Following flushing of the underground piping, a main drain test shall be

made to verify the adequacy of the water supply. Static and residual
pressures shall be recorded on the certificate specified in paragraph
SUBMITTALS. In addition, a main drain test shall be conducted each time
SECTION 21 13 13.00 10 Page 18

after a main control valve is shut and opened.
3.11 FINAL ACCEPTANCE TEST
Begin the Final Acceptance Test only when the Preliminary Test Report has
been approved. The Fire Protection Specialist shall conduct the Final
Acceptance Test and shall provide a complete demonstration of the operation
of the system. This shall include operation of control valves and flowing
of inspector's test connections to verify operation of associated waterflow
alarm switches. After operation of control valves has been completed, the
main drain test shall be repeated to assure that control valves are in the
open position. In addition, the representative shall have available copies
of as-built drawings and certificates of tests previously conducted. The
installation shall not be considered accepted until identified
discrepancies have been corrected and test documentation is properly
completed and received. Submit the Final Acceptance Test Report as
specified in the Submittals paragraph.
3.12 ONSITE TRAINING
The Fire Protection Specialist shall conduct a training course for

operating and maintenance personnel as designated by the Contracting
Officer. Training shall be provided for a period of 4 hours or 2
consecutive business days of normal working time and shall start after the
system is functionally complete and after the Final Acceptance Test. The
Onsite Training shall cover all of the items contained in the approved
Operating and Maintenance Instructions.
SECTION 21 13 13.00 10 Page 19

SECTION 22 00 00
PLUMBING, GENERAL PURPOSE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

AHRI 1010 (2002) Self-Contained, Mechanically

Refrigerated Drinking-Water Coolers

ENGINEERS (ASHRAE)
ASHRAE 90.1 - IP (2007; Supplement 2008; Errata 2009;

Errata 2009) Energy Standard for Buildings
Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings, I-P
Edition
ASSE 1010 (2004) Water Hammer Arresters
ASSE 1019 (2004; Errata 2005) Vacuum Breaker Wall

Hydrants, Freeze Resistant, Automatic
Draining Type
AWWA 10084 (2005) Standard Methods for the

Examination of Water and Wastewater
AWWA C203 (2008) Coal-Tar Protective Coatings and

Linings for Steel Water Pipelines - Enamel
and Tape - Hot-Applied
AWWA C700 (2002; Errata 2008) Standard for Cold

Water Meters - Displacement Type, Bronze
Main Case
AWWA C701 (2007) Standard for Cold-Water Meters -

Turbine Type for Customer Service
ASME A112.19.2 (2008) Standard for Vitreous China

Plumbing Fixtures and Hydraulic
Requirements for Water Closets and Urinals
ASME A112.36.2M (1991; R 2008) Cleanouts
ASME A112.6.1M (1997; R 2008) Floor Affixed Supports for

Off-the-Floor Plumbing Fixtures for Public
Use
ASME B16.34 (2004) Valves - Flanged, Threaded and

Welding End
ASME B31.1 (2007; Addenda 2008) Power Piping
ASME B40.100 (2005) Pressure Gauges and Gauge

Attachments
ASME BPVC SEC IX (2007; Addenda 2008) Boiler and Pressure

Vessel Code; Section IX, Welding and
Brazing Qualifications
ASTM B 117 (2007a) Standing Practice for Operating

ASTM B 370 (2003) Standard Specification for Copper

Sheet and Strip for Building Construction

ASTM D 2822 (2005) Asphalt Roof Cement
ASTM E 1 (2007) Standard Specification for ASTM

Liquid-in-Glass Thermometers
ICC A117.1 (2003; R 2004) Standard for Accessible and

Usable Buildings and Facilities
ICC IPC (2006; Supplement 2007) International

Plumbing Code

INDUSTRY (MSS)
MSS SP-110 (1996) Ball Valves Threaded,

Socket-Welding, Solder Joint, Grooved and
Flared Ends
MSS SP-58 (2002) Standard for Pipe Hangers and

Supports - Materials, Design and
Manufacture
MSS SP-67 (2002a; R 2004) Standard for Butterfly

Valves
MSS SP-69 (2003; R 2004) Standard for Pipe Hangers

and Supports - Selection and Application
MSS SP-70 (2006) Standard for Cast Iron Gate Valves,
MSS SP-71 (2005) Standard for Gray Iron Swing Check

Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends
MSS SP-72 (1999) Standard for Ball Valves with

Flanged or Butt-Welding Ends for General
Service
MSS SP-78 (2005a) Cast Iron Plug Valves, Flanged and

Threaded Ends
MSS SP-80 (2008) Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check

Valves
MSS SP-85 (2002) Standard for Cast Iron Globe &

Angle Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends
NACE SP0169 (2007) Control of External Corrosion on

Underground or Submerged Metallic Piping
Systems
PLUMBING AND DRAINAGE INSTITUTE (PDI)
PDI WH 201 (2006) Water Hammer Arresters Standard
SAE J1508 (2009) Hose Clamp Specifications

(LEED-NC)
PL 109-58 Energy Policy Act of 2005 (EPAct05)
1.2 SUBMITTALS

SD-02 Shop Drawings
Plumbing System;
Detail drawings consisting of schedules, performance charts,

instructions, diagrams, and other information to illustrate the
requirements and operations of systems that are not covered by the
Plumbing Code.. Detail drawings for the complete plumbing system ;

dimensions for roughing-in, foundation, and support points;
schematic diagrams and wiring diagrams or connection and
interconnection diagrams. Detail drawings shall indicate
clearances required for maintenance and operation. Where piping
and equipment are to be supported other than as indicated, details
shall include loadings and proposed support methods. Mechanical
drawing plans, elevations, views, and details, shall be drawn to
scale.
SD-03 Product Data

Environmental Data
Materials
Documentation indicating percentage of post-industrial and

post-consumer recycled content per unit of product. Indicate
Fixtures; (LEED)
List of installed fixtures with manufacturer, model, and flow

rate.
Flush valve water closets
Wall hung lavatories
Countertop lavatories
Service sinks
Drinking-water coolers;
Plastic shower stalls
Water heaters;
Pumps;
Backflow prevention assemblies;
Shower Faucets;
Welding
A copy of qualified procedures and a list of names and

identification symbols of qualified welders and welding operators.
Vibration-Absorbing Features;
Details of vibration-absorbing features, including arrangement,

foundation plan, dimensions and specifications.
SD-06 Test Reports
Tests, Flushing and Disinfection
Test reports in booklet form showing all field tests performed

to adjust each component and all field tests performed to prove
compliance with the specified performance criteria, completion and
testing of the installed system. Each test report shall indicate
the final position of controls.
SD-07 Certificates
Materials and Equipment
Where equipment is specified to conform to requirements of the ASME

Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, the design, fabrication, and
installation shall conform to the code.
Bolts
Written certification by the bolt manufacturer that the bolts

furnished comply with the specified requirements.
Plumbing System; .
Submit in accordance with Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND

MAINTENANCE DATA.
Specified materials and equipment shall be standard products of a

manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of such products.
Specified equipment shall essentially duplicate equipment that has
performed satisfactorily at least two years prior to bid opening. Standard
products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2
years prior to bid opening. The 2-year use shall include applications of
equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size.
The product shall have been for sale on the commercial market through
advertisements, manufacturers' catalogs, or brochures during the 2 year
period.
1.3.1 Alternative Qualifications
Products having less than a two-year field service record will be

acceptable if a certified record of satisfactory field operation for not
less than 6000 hours, exclusive of the manufacturer's factory or laboratory
tests, can be shown.
1.3.2 Service Support
The equipment items shall be supported by service organizations. Submit a

certified list of qualified permanent service organizations for support of
the equipment which includes their addresses and qualifications. These
service organizations shall be reasonably convenient to the equipment
installation and able to render satisfactory service to the equipment on a
regular and emergency basis during the warranty period of the contract.
1.3.3 Manufacturer's Nameplate
Each item of equipment shall have a nameplate bearing the manufacturer's

name, address, model number, and serial number securely affixed in a
conspicuous place; the nameplate of the distributing agent will not be
acceptable.
1.3.4 Modification of References
In each of the publications referred to herein, consider the advisory

provisions to be mandatory, as though the word, "shall" had been
substituted for "should" wherever it appears. Interpret references in
these publications to the "authority having jurisdiction", or words of
similar meaning, to mean the Contracting Officer.
1.3.4.1 Definitions
For the International Code Council (ICC) Codes referenced in the contract
documents, advisory provisions shall be considered mandatory, the word
"should" shall be interpreted as "shall." Reference to the "code official"
shall be interpreted to mean the "Contracting Officer." For Navy owned
property, references to the "owner" shall be interpreted to mean the
"Contracting Officer." For leased facilities, references to the "owner"
shall be interpreted to mean the "lessor." References to the "permit
holder" shall be interpreted to mean the "Contractor."
1.3.4.2 Administrative Interpretations
For ICC Codes referenced in the contract documents, the provisions of

Chapter 1, "Administrator," do not apply. These administrative
requirements are covered by the applicable Federal Acquisition Regulations
(FAR) included in this contract and by the authority granted to the Officer
in Charge of Construction to administer the construction of this project.
References in the ICC Codes to sections of Chapter 1, shall be applied
appropriately by the Contracting Officer as authorized by his
administrative cognizance and the FAR.
Handle, store, and protect equipment and materials to prevent damage before
and during installation in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations, and as approved by the Contracting Officer. Replace
damaged or defective items.
1.5.1 Welding
. Procedures and welders shall be qualified in accordance with

ASME BPVC SEC IX. Welding procedures qualified by others, and welders and
welding operators qualified by another employer, may be accepted as

permitted by ASME B31.1. The Contracting Officer shall be notified 24
hours in advance of tests, and the tests shall be performed at the work
site if practicable. Welders or welding operators shall apply their
assigned symbols near each weld they make as a permanent record.
1.5.2 Cathodic Protection and Pipe Joint Bonding
Cathodic protection and pipe joint bonding systems shall be in accordance

with
Unless otherwise required herein, plumbing work shall be in accordance with

ICC IPC. Energy consuming products and systems shall be in accordance with
PL 109-58 and ASHRAE 90.1 - IP
The Contractor shall become familiar with details of the work, verify
dimensions in the field, and advise the Contracting Officer of any
discrepancy before performing any work.
1.8 INSTRUCTION TO GOVERNMENT PERSONNEL
When specified in other sections, furnish the services of competent

instructors to give full instruction to the designated Government personnel
in the adjustment, operation, and maintenance, including pertinent safety
requirements, of the specified equipment or system. Instructors shall be
thoroughly familiar with all parts of the installation and shall be trained
in operating theory as well as practical operation and maintenance work.
Instruction shall be given during the first regular work week after the
equipment or system has been accepted and turned over to the Government for
regular operation. The number of man-days (8 hours per day) of instruction
furnished shall be as specified in the individual section. When more than
4 man-days of instruction are specified, use approximately half of the time
for classroom instruction. Use other time for instruction with the
equipment or system.
When significant changes or modifications in the equipment or system are

made under the terms of the contract, provide additional instruction to
acquaint the operating personnel with the changes or modifications.
1.9 ACCESSIBILITY OF EQUIPMENT
Install all work so that parts requiring periodic inspection, operation,

maintenance, and repair are readily accessible. Install concealed valves,
expansion joints, controls, dampers, and equipment requiring access, in
locations freely accessible through access doors.

from a minimum of three sources.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
Materials for various services shall be in accordance with TABLES I and

II.
2.1.1 [Enter Appropriate Subpart Title Here]
2.1.2 [Enter Appropriate Subpart Title Here]
b. Copper, Sheet and Strip for Building Construction: ASTM B 370.
c. Asphalt Roof Cement: ASTM D 2822.
d. Hose Clamps: SAE J1508.
e. Supports for Off-The-Floor Plumbing Fixtures: ASME A112.6.1M.
f. Metallic Cleanouts: ASME A112.36.2M.
g. Plumbing Fixture Setting Compound: A preformed flexible ring seal

molded from hydrocarbon wax material. The seal material shall be
nonvolatile nonasphaltic and contain germicide and provide
watertight, gastight, odorproof and verminproof properties.
k. Gauges - Pressure and Vacuum Indicating Dial Type - Elastic

Element: ASME B40.100.
l. Thermometers: ASTM E 1. Mercury shall not be used in

thermometers.
2.2 VALVES
Valves shall be provided on supplies to equipment and fixtures. . Valves

3 inches and larger shall have flanged iron bodies and bronze trim.
Pressure ratings shall be based upon the application. Grooved end valves
may be provided if the manufacturer certifies that the valves meet the
performance requirements of applicable MSS standard. Valves shall conform
to the following standards:
Description Standard
Butterfly Valves MSS SP-67
Cast-Iron Gate Valves, Flanged and

Threaded Ends MSS SP-70
Cast-Iron Swing Check Valves, Flanged and

Threaded Ends MSS SP-71
Ball Valves with Flanged Butt-Welding Ends

for General Service MSS SP-72
Ball Valves Threaded, Socket-Welding,
Description Standard
Solder Joint, Grooved and Flared Ends MSS SP-110
Cast-Iron Plug Valves, Flanged and MSS SP-78

Threaded Ends
Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle, and Check Valves MSS SP-80
Steel Valves, Socket Welding and Threaded Ends ASME B16.34
Cast-Iron Globe and Angle Valves, Flanged and MSS SP-85

Threaded Ends
2.2.1 Wall Hydrants (Frostproof)
ASSE 1019 with vacuum-breaker backflow preventer shall have a nickel-brass

or nickel-bronze wall plate or flange with nozzle and detachable key
handle. A brass or bronze operating rod shall be provided within a
galvanized iron casing of sufficient length to extend through the wall so
that the valve is inside the building, and the portion of the hydrant
between the outlet and valve is self-draining. A brass or bronze valve
with coupling and union elbow having metal-to-metal seat shall be
provided. Valve rod and seat washer shall be removable through the face of
the hydrant. The hydrant shall have 3/4 inch exposed hose thread on spout
and 3/4 inch male pipe thread on inlet.
2.2.2 Yard Hydrants
Yard box or post hydrants shall have valve housings located below frost
lines. Water from the casing shall be drained after valve is shut off.
Hydrant shall be bronze with cast-iron box or casing guard. "T" handle key
shall be provided.
2.3 FIXTURES
Fixtures shall be water conservation type, in accordance with ICC IPC.

Fixtures for use by the physically handicapped shall be in accordance with
ICC A117.1. Vitreous china, nonabsorbent, hard-burned, and vitrified
throughout the body shall be provided. Porcelain enameled ware shall have
specially selected, clear white, acid-resisting enamel coating evenly
applied on surfaces. No fixture will be accepted that shows cracks,
crazes, blisters, thin spots, or other flaws. Fixtures shall be equipped
with appurtenances such as traps, faucets, stop valves, and drain
fittings. Each fixture and piece of equipment requiring connections to the
drainage system, except grease interceptors, shall be equipped with a
trap. Brass expansion or toggle bolts capped with acorn nuts shall be
provided for supports, and polished chromium-plated pipe, valves, and
fittings shall be provided where exposed to view. Fixtures with the supply
discharge below the rim shall be equipped with backflow preventers.

Internal parts of flush and/or flushometer valves, shower mixing valves,
shower head face plates, pop-up stoppers of lavatory waste drains, and
pop-up stoppers and overflow tees and shoes of bathtub waste drains shall
be copper alloy with all visible surfaces chrome plated.
2.3.1 Automatic Controls
Flushing and faucet systems shall consist of solenoid-activated valves with

light beam sensors. Flush valve for water closet shall include an override
pushbutton. Flushing devices shall be provided as described in paragraph
FIXTURES AND FIXTURE TRIMMINGS.
2.3.2 Flush Valve Water Closets
ASME A112.19.2, white vitreous china, siphon jet, elongated bowl,

floor-mounted, floor outletor wall mounted, wall outlet. Top of toilet
seat height above floor shall be 14 to 15 inches, except 17 to 19 inches
for wheelchair water closets. Provide wax bowl ring including plastic
sleeve. Water flushing volume of the water closet and flush valve
combination shall not exceed 1.28 gallons per flush. Provide white solid
plastic elongated open-front seator closed-front seat with cover. Provide
large diameter flush valve including angle control-stop valve, vacuum
breaker, tail pieces, slip nuts, and wall plates; exposed to view
components shall be chromium-plated or polished stainless steel. Flush
valves shall be nonhold-open type. Mount flush valves not less than 11
inches above the fixture. Mounted height of flush valve shall not
interfere with the hand rail in ADA stalls. Provide solenoid-activated
flush valves including electrical-operated light-beam-sensor to energize
the solenoid.
2.3.3 Flush Valve Urinals
ASME A112.19.2, White vitreous china, wall-mounted, wall outlet, siphon

jet, integral trap, and extended side shields. Water flushing volume
of the urinal and flush valve combination shall not exceed 0.125 gallons
per flush. Provide ASME A112.6.1M concealed chair carriers with vertical
steel pipe supports. Provide large diameter flush valve including angle
control-stop valve, vacuum breaker, tail pieces, slip nuts, and wall
plates; exposed to view components shall be chromium-plated or polished
stainless steel. Flush valves shall be nonhold-open type. Mount flush
valves not less than 11 inches above the fixture. Provide
solenoid-activated flush valves including electrical-operated
light-beam-sensor to energize the solenoid.2.3.4 Wall Hung Lavatories
ASME A112.19.2, white vitreous china, straight back type, minimum

dimensions of 19 inches, wide by 17 inches front to rear, with supply
openings for use with top mounted centerset faucets, and openings for
concealed arm carrier installation. Provide aerator with faucet. Water
flow rate shall not exceed 0.5 gpm when measured at a flowing water
pressure of 60 psi. Provide ASME A112.6.1M concealed chair carriers with
vertical steel pipe supports and concealed arms for the lavatory. Mount
lavatory with the front rim 34 inches above floor and with 29 inches
minimum clearance from bottom of the front rim to floor. Provide
top-mounted solenoid-activated lavatory faucets including
electrical-operated light-beam-sensor to energize the solenoid.
2.3.5 Countertop Lavatories
ASME A112.19.2, white vitreous china, self-rimming, minimum dimensions of

19 inches wide by 17 inches front to rear, with supply openings for use
with top mounted centerset faucets. Furnish template and mounting kit by
lavatory manufacturer. Provide aerator with faucet. Water flow rate shall
not exceed 0.5 gpm when measured at a flowing water pressure of 60 psi.
Mount counter with the top surface 34 inches above floor and with 29 inches
minimum clearance from bottom of the counter face to floor. Provide
top-mounted solenoid-activated lavatory faucets including
electrical-operated light-beam-sensor to energize the solenoid.
2.3.6 Drinking-Water Coolers
AHRI 1010 with more than a single thickness of metal between the potable
water and the refrigerant in the heat exchanger, wall-hung, bubbler style,
air-cooled condensing unit, 4.75 gph minimum capacity, stainless steel
splash receptor and basin, and stainless steel cabinet. Bubblers shall be
controlled by push levers or push bars, front mounted or side mounted near
the front edge of the cabinet. Bubbler spouts shall be mounted at maximum
of 36 inches above floor and at front of unit basin. Spouts shall direct
water flow at least 4 inches above unit basin and trajectory parallel or
nearly parallel to the front of unit. Provide ASME A112.6.1M concealed
steel pipe chair carriers.
2.3.7 Precast Terrazzo Shower Floors
Terrazzo shall be made of marble chips cast in white portland cement to

produce 3000 psi minimum compressive strength 7 days after casting. Water
pressure of 60 psi. Provide floor or wall outlet copper alloy body drain
cast integral with terrazzo, with polished stainless steel strainers.
2.3.8 Precast Terrazzo Mop Sinks
Terrazzo shall be made of marble chips cast in white portland cement to

produce 3000 psi minimum compressive strength 7 days after casting. Water
pressure of 60 psi. Provide floor or wall outlet copper alloy body drain
cast integral with terrazzo, with polished stainless steel strainers.
2.4 DOMESTIC WATER SERVICE METER
Cold water meters 2 inches and smaller shall be positive displacement type
conforming to AWWA C700. Cold water meters 2-1/2 inches and larger shall
be turbine type conforming to AWWA C701. Meter register may be round or
straight reading type, as provided by the local utility. Meter shall be
provided with a pulse generator, remote readout register and all necessary
wiring and accessories.
2.5 ELECTRICAL WORK
Provide electrical motor driven equipment specified complete with motors,

motor starters, and controls as specified herein and in Section 26 20 00
INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Provide internal wiring for components of
packaged equipment as an integral part of the equipment. Provide high
efficiency type, single-phase, fractional-horsepower alternating-current
motors, including motors that are part of a system, corresponding to the
applications in accordance with NEMA MG 11. In addition to the
requirements of Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM, provide

polyphase, squirrel-cage medium induction motors with continuous ratings,
including motors that are part of a system, that meet the efficiency
ratings for premium efficiency motors in accordance with NEMA MG 1.
Provide motors in accordance with NEMA MG 1 and of sufficient size to drive
the load at the specified capacity without exceeding the nameplate rating
of the motor.
Motors shall be rated for continuous duty with the enclosure specified.
Motor duty requirements shall allow for maximum frequency start-stop
operation and minimum encountered interval between start and stop. Motor
torque shall be capable of accelerating the connected load within 20
seconds with 80 percent of the rated voltage maintained at motor terminals
during one starting period. Motor bearings shall be fitted with grease
supply fittings and grease relief to outside of the enclosure.
Controllers and contactors shall have auxiliary contacts for use with the
controls provided. Manual or automatic control and protective or signal
devices required for the operation specified and any control wiring
required for controls and devices specified, but not shown, shall be
provided. For packaged equipment, the manufacturer shall provide
controllers, including the required monitors and timed restart.
Power wiring and conduit for field installed equipment shall be provided
under and conform to the requirements of Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR
DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS PIPING ITEMS
2.6.1 Escutcheon Plates
Provide one piece or split hinge metal plates for piping entering floors,
walls, and ceilings in exposed spaces. Provide chromium-plated on copper
alloy plates or polished stainless steel finish in finished spaces.
Provide paint finish on plates in unfinished spaces.
2.6.2 Pipe Sleeves
Provide where piping passes entirely through walls, ceilings, roofs, and
floors. Sleeves are not required where supply, drain, waste, and vent
(DWV) piping passes through concrete floor slabs located on grade, except
where penetrating a membrane waterproof floor.
2.6.2.1 Sleeves in Masonry and Concrete
Provide steel pipe sleeves or schedule 40 PVC plastic pipe sleeves.

Sleeves are not required where drain, waste, and vent (DWV) piping passes
through concrete floor slabs located on grade. Core drilling of masonry
and concrete may be provided in lieu of pipe sleeves when cavities in the
core-drilled hole are completely grouted smooth.
2.6.2.2 Sleeves Not in Masonry and Concrete
Provide 26 gage galvanized steel sheet or PVC plastic pipe sleeves.
2.6.3 Pipe Hangers (Supports)
Provide MSS SP-58 and MSS SP-69, Type 1 with adjustable type steel support
rods, except as specified or indicated otherwise. Attach to steel joists
with Type 19 or 23 clamps and retaining straps. Attach to Steel W or S

beams with Type 21, 28, 29, or 30 clamps. Attach to steel angles and
vertical web steel channels with Type 20 clamp with beam clamp channel
adapter. Attach to horizontal web steel channel and wood with drilled hole
on centerline and double nut and washer. Attach to concrete with Type 18
insert or drilled expansion anchor. Provide Type 40 insulation protection
shield for insulated piping.
2.6.4 Nameplates
Provide 0.125 inch thick melamine laminated plastic nameplates, black matte
finish with white center core, for equipment, gages, thermometers, and
valves; valves in supplies to faucets will not require nameplates.
Accurately align lettering and engrave minimum of 0.25 inch high normal
block lettering into the white core. Minimum size of nameplates shall be
1.0 by 2.5 inches. Key nameplates to a chart and schedule for each system.
Frame charts and schedules under glass and place where directed near each
system. Furnish two copies of each chart and schedule.
2.6.5 Labels
Provide labels for sensor operators at flush valves and faucets. Include
the following information on each label:
a. Identification of the sensor and its operation with graphic

description.
b. Range of the sensor.
c. Battery replacement schedule.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 [Enter Appropriate Subpart Title Here]
3.1.1 [Enter Appropriate Subpart Title Here]3.1.1.1 Thrust Restraint
Plugs, caps, tees, valves and bends deflecting 11.25 degrees or more,
either vertically or horizontally, in waterlines 4 inches in diameter or
larger shall be provided with thrust blocks, where indicated, to prevent
movement. Thrust blocking shall be concrete of a mix not leaner than: 1
cement, 2-1/2 sand, 5 gravel; and having a compressive strength of not less
than 2000 psi after 28 days. Blocking shall be placed between solid ground
and the fitting to be anchored. Unless otherwise indicated or directed,
the base and thrust bearing sides of the thrust block shall be poured
against undisturbed earth. The side of the thrust block not subject to
thrust shall be poured against forms. The area of bearing will be as
shown. Blocking shall be placed so that the joints of the fitting are
accessible for repair. Steel rods and clamps, protected by galvanizing or
by coating with bituminous paint, shall be used to anchor vertical down
bends into gravity thrust blocks.
3.1.1.2 Commercial-Type Water Hammer Arresters
Commercial-type water hammer arresters shall be provided on hot- and

cold-water supplies and shall be located as generally indicated, with
precise location and sizing to be in accordance with PDI WH 201. Water
hammer arresters, where concealed, shall be accessible by means of access
doors or removable panels. Commercial-type water hammer arresters shall
conform to ASSE 1010. Vertical capped pipe columns will not be permitted.
3.1.2 Dissimilar Pipe Materials
Connections between ferrous and non-ferrous copper water pipe shall be made
with dielectric unions or flange waterways. Dielectric waterways shall
have temperature and pressure rating equal to or greater than that
specified for the connecting piping. Waterways shall have metal
connections on both ends suited to match connecting piping. Dielectric
waterways shall be internally lined with an insulator specifically designed
to prevent current flow between dissimilar metals. Dielectric flanges
shall meet the performance requirements described herein for dielectric
waterways. Connecting joints between plastic and metallic pipe shall be
made with transition fitting for the specific purpose.
3.1.3 Corrosion Protection for Buried Pipe and Fittings
Ductile iron, cast iron, and steel pipe, fittings, and joints shall have a
protective coating. Additionally, ductile iron, cast iron, and steel
pressure pipe shall have a cathodic protection system and joint bonding.
The cathodic protection system, protective coating system, and joint
bonding for cathodically protected pipe shall be in accordance with .
Coatings shall be selected, applied, and inspected in accordance with
NACE SP0169 and as otherwise specified. The pipe shall be cleaned and the
coating system applied prior to pipe tightness testing. Joints and
fittings shall be cleaned and the coating system applied after pipe
tightness testing. For tape coating systems, the tape shall conform to
AWWA C203 and shall be applied with a 50 percent overlap. Primer utilized
with tape type coating systems shall be as recommended by the tape
manufacturer.
3.1.4 Pipe Sleeves and Flashing
Pipe sleeves shall be furnished and set in their proper and permanent
location.
3.1.4.1 Sleeve Requirements
Unless indicated otherwise, provide pipe sleeves meeting the following

requirements:
Secure sleeves in position and location during construction. Provide

sleeves of sufficient length to pass through entire thickness of walls,
ceilings, roofs, and floors.
A modular mechanical type sealing assembly may be installed in lieu of a

waterproofing clamping flange and caulking and sealing of annular space
between pipe and sleeve. The seals shall consist of interlocking synthetic
rubber links shaped to continuously fill the annular space between the pipe
and sleeve using galvanized steel bolts, nuts, and pressure plates. The
links shall be loosely assembled with bolts to form a continuous rubber
belt around the pipe with a pressure plate under each bolt head and each
nut. After the seal assembly is properly positioned in the sleeve,
tightening of the bolt shall cause the rubber sealing elements to expand
and provide a watertight seal between the pipe and the sleeve. Each seal
assembly shall be sized as recommended by the manufacturer to fit the pipe
and sleeve involved.
Sleeves shall not be installed in structural members, except where
indicated or approved. Rectangular and square openings shall be as

detailed. Each sleeve shall extend through its respective floor, or roof,
and shall be cut flush with each surface, except for special circumstances.
Pipe sleeves passing through floors in wet areas such as mechanical
equipment rooms, lavatories, kitchens, and other plumbing fixture areas
shall extend a minimum of 4 inches above the finished floor.
Unless otherwise indicated, sleeves shall be of a size to provide a

minimum of one inch clearance between bare pipe or insulation and inside of
sleeve or between insulation and inside of sleeve. Sleeves in bearing
walls and concrete slab on grade floors shall be steel pipe or cast-iron
pipe. Sleeves in nonbearing walls or ceilings may be steel pipe, cast-iron
pipe, galvanized sheet metal with lock-type longitudinal seam, or plastic.
Except as otherwise specified, the annular space between pipe and sleeve,
or between jacket over insulation and sleeve, shall be sealed as indicated
with sealants conforming to ASTM C 920 and with a primer, backstop material
and surface preparation as specified in Section 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS.
The annular space between pipe and sleeve, between bare insulation and
sleeve or between jacket over insulation and sleeve shall not be sealed for
interior walls which are not designated as fire rated.
Sleeves through below-grade walls in contact with earth shall be recessed

1/2 inch from wall surfaces on both sides. Annular space between pipe and
sleeve shall be filled with backing material and sealants in the joint
between the pipe and concrete or masonry wall as specified above. Sealant
selected for the earth side of the wall shall be compatible with
dampproofing/waterproofing materials that are to be applied over the joint
sealant. Pipe sleeves in fire-rated walls shall conform to the
requirements in Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING.
3.1.4.2 Flashing Requirements
Pipes passing through roof shall be installed through a 16 ounce copper

flashing, each within an integral skirt or flange. Flashing shall be
suitably formed, and the skirt or flange shall extend not less than 8
inches from the pipe and shall be set over the roof or floor membrane in a
solid coating of bituminous cement. The flashing shall extend up the pipe
a minimum of 10 inches. For cleanouts, the flashing shall be turned down
into the hub and caulked after placing the ferrule. Pipes passing through
pitched roofs shall be flashed, using lead or copper flashing, with an
adjustable integral flange of adequate size to extend not less than 8
inches from the pipe in all directions and lapped into the roofing to
provide a watertight seal. The annular space between the flashing and the
bare pipe or between the flashing and the metal-jacket-covered insulation
shall be sealed as indicated. Flashing for dry vents shall be turned down
into the pipe to form a waterproof joint. Pipes, up to and including 10
inches in diameter, passing through roof or floor waterproofing membrane
may be installed through a cast-iron sleeve with caulking recess, anchor
lugs, flashing-clamp device, and pressure ring with brass bolts. Flashing
shield shall be fitted into the sleeve clamping device. Pipes passing
through wall waterproofing membrane shall be sleeved as described above. A
waterproofing clamping flange shall be installed.
3.1.4.3 Waterproofing
Waterproofing at floor-mounted water closets shall be accomplished by

forming a flashing guard from soft-tempered sheet copper. The center of
the sheet shall be perforated and turned down approximately 1-1/2 inches
to fit between the outside diameter of the drainpipe and the inside
diameter of the cast-iron or steel pipe sleeve. The turned-down portion of
the flashing guard shall be embedded in sealant to a depth of approximately
1-1/2 inches; then the sealant shall be finished off flush to floor level
between the flashing guard and drainpipe. The flashing guard of sheet
copper shall extend not less than 8 inches from the drainpipe and shall be
lapped between the floor membrane in a solid coating of bituminous cement.
If cast-iron water closet floor flanges are used, the space between the
pipe sleeve and drainpipe shall be sealed with sealant and the flashing
guard shall be upturned approximately 1-1/2 inches to fit the outside
diameter of the drainpipe and the inside diameter of the water closet floor
flange. The upturned portion of the sheet fitted into the floor flange
shall be sealed.
3.1.4.4 Optional Counterflashing
Instead of turning the flashing down into a dry vent pipe, or caulking and
sealing the annular space between the pipe and flashing or
metal-jacket-covered insulation and flashing, counterflashing may be
accomplished by utilizing the following:
a. A standard roof coupling for threaded pipe up to 6 inches in

diameter.
b. A tack-welded or banded-metal rain shield around the pipe.
3.1.4.5 Pipe Penetrations of Slab on Grade Floors
Where pipes, fixture drains, floor drains, cleanouts or similar items

penetrate slab on grade floors, except at penetrations of floors with
waterproofing membrane as specified in paragraphs Flashing Requirements and
Waterproofing, a groove 1/4 to 1/2 inch wide by 1/4 to 3/8 inch deep
shall be formed around the pipe, fitting or drain. The groove shall be
filled with a sealant as specified in Section 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS.
3.1.4.6 Pipe Penetrations
Provide sealants for all pipe penetrations. All pipe penetrations shall be
sealed to prevent infiltration of air, insects, and vermin.
3.1.5 Fire Seal
Where pipes pass through fire walls, fire-partitions, fire-rated pipe chase
walls or floors above grade, a fire seal shall be provided as specified in
Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING.
3.1.6 Supports
3.1.6.1 General
Hangers used to support piping 2 inches and larger shall be fabricated to

permit adequate adjustment after erection while still supporting the load.
Pipe guides and anchors shall be installed to keep pipes in accurate
alignment, to direct the expansion movement, and to prevent buckling,
swaying, and undue strain. Piping subjected to vertical movement when
operating temperatures exceed ambient temperatures shall be supported by
variable spring hangers and supports or by constant support hangers. In
the support of multiple pipe runs on a common base member, a clip or clamp
shall be used where each pipe crosses the base support member. Spacing of
the base support members shall not exceed the hanger and support spacing
required for an individual pipe in the multiple pipe run. Threaded
sections of rods shall not be formed or bent.
3.1.6.2 Pipe Supports and Structural Bracing, Seismic Requirements
Piping and attached valves shall be supported and braced to resist seismic
loads as specified in Section 13 48 00 SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR MISCELLANEOUS
EQUIPMENT and as shown. Structural steel required for reinforcement to
properly support piping, headers, and equipment, but not shown, shall be
provided. Material used for supports shall be as specified in Section
05 50 13 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FABRICATIONS.
3.1.6.3 Pipe Hangers, Inserts, and Supports
Installation of pipe hangers, inserts and supports shall conform to

MSS SP-58 and MSS SP-69, except as modified herein.
a. Types 5, 12, and 26 shall not be used.
b. Type 3 shall not be used on insulated pipe.
c. Type 18 inserts shall be secured to concrete forms before concrete

is placed. Continuous inserts which allow more adjustment may be
used if they otherwise meet the requirements for type 18 inserts.
d. Type 19 and 23 C-clamps shall be torqued per MSS SP-69 and shall
have both locknuts and retaining devices furnished by the
manufacturer. Field-fabricated C-clamp bodies or retaining
devices are not acceptable.
e. Type 20 attachments used on angles and channels shall be furnished

with an added malleable-iron heel plate or adapter.
f. Type 24 may be used only on trapeze hanger systems or on

fabricated frames.
g. Type 39 saddles shall be used on insulated pipe 4 inches and

larger when the temperature of the medium is 60 degrees F or
higher. Type 39 saddles shall be welded to the pipe.
h. Type 40 shields shall:
(1) Be used on insulated pipe less than 4 inches.
(2) Be used on insulated pipe 4 inches and larger when the

temperature of the medium is 60 degrees F or less.
(3) Have a high density insert for all pipe sizes. High density
inserts shall have a density of 8 pcf or greater.
i. Horizontal pipe supports shall be spaced as specified in MSS SP-69

and a support shall be installed not over 1 foot from the pipe
fitting joint at each change in direction of the piping. Pipe
supports shall be spaced not over 5 feet apart at valves.
Operating temperatures in determining hanger spacing for PVC or
CPVC pipe shall be 120 degrees F for PVC and 180 degrees F for
CPVC. Horizontal pipe runs shall include allowances for expansion
and contraction.
j. Vertical pipe shall be supported at each floor, except at

slab-on-grade, at intervals of not more than 15 feet nor more
than 8 feet from end of risers, and at vent terminations.
Vertical pipe risers shall include allowances for expansion and
contraction.
k. Type 35 guides using steel, reinforced polytetrafluoroethylene

(PTFE) or graphite slides shall be provided to allow longitudinal
pipe movement. Slide materials shall be suitable for the system
operating temperatures, atmospheric conditions, and bearing loads
encountered. Lateral restraints shall be provided as needed.
Where steel slides do not require provisions for lateral restraint
the following may be used:
(1) On pipe 4 inches and larger when the temperature of the

medium is 60 degrees F or higher, a Type 39 saddle, welded to the
pipe, may freely rest on a steel plate.
(2) On pipe less than 4 inches a Type 40 shield, attached to the

pipe or insulation, may freely rest on a steel plate.
(3) On pipe 4 inches and larger carrying medium less that 60

degrees F a Type 40 shield, attached to the pipe or insulation,
may freely rest on a steel plate.
l. Pipe hangers on horizontal insulated pipe shall be the size of the

outside diameter of the insulation. The insulation shall be
continuous through the hanger on all pipe sizes and applications.
m. Where there are high system temperatures and welding to piping is

not desirable, the type 35 guide shall include a pipe cradle,
welded to the guide structure and strapped securely to the pipe.
The pipe shall be separated from the slide material by at least 4
inches or by an amount adequate for the insulation, whichever is
greater.
n. Hangers and supports for plastic pipe shall not compress, distort,
cut or abrade the piping, and shall allow free movement of pipe
except where otherwise required in the control of
expansion/contraction.
3.1.6.4 Structural Attachments
Attachment to building structure concrete and masonry shall be by cast-in

concrete inserts, built-in anchors, or masonry anchor devices. Inserts and
anchors shall be applied with a safety factor not less than 5. Supports
shall not be attached to metal decking. Supports shall not be attached to
the underside of concrete filled floor or concrete roof decks unless
approved by the Contracting Officer. Masonry anchors for overhead
applications shall be constructed of ferrous materials only.
3.1.7 Welded Installation
Plumbing pipe weldments shall be as indicated. Changes in direction of

piping shall be made with welding fittings only; mitering or notching pipe
to form elbows and tees or other similar type construction will not be
permitted. Branch connection may be made with either welding tees or
forged branch outlet fittings. Branch outlet fittings shall be forged,
flared for improvement of flow where attached to the run, and reinforced
against external strains. Beveling, alignment, heat treatment, and
inspection of weld shall conform to ASME B31.1. Weld defects shall be
removed and repairs made to the weld, or the weld joints shall be entirely
removed and rewelded. After filler metal has been removed from its
original package, it shall be protected or stored so that its
characteristics or welding properties are not affected. Electrodes that
have been wetted or that have lost any of their coating shall not be used.
3.1.8 Pipe Cleanouts
Pipe cleanouts shall be the same size as the pipe except that cleanout
plugs larger than 4 inches will not be required. A cleanout installed in
connection with cast-iron soil pipe shall consist of a long-sweep 1/4 bend
or one or two 1/8 bends extended to the place shown. An extra-heavy
cast-brass or cast-iron ferrule with countersunk cast-brass head screw plug
shall be caulked into the hub of the fitting and shall be flush with the
floor. Cleanouts in connection with other pipe, where indicated, shall be
T-pattern, 90-degree branch drainage fittings with cast-brass screw plugs,
except plastic plugs shall be installed in plastic pipe. Plugs shall be
the same size as the pipe up to and including 4 inches. Cleanout tee
branches with screw plug shall be installed at the foot of soil and waste
stacks, at the foot of interior downspouts, on each connection to building
storm drain where interior downspouts are indicated, and on each building
drain outside the building. Cleanout tee branches may be omitted on stacks
in single story buildings with slab-on-grade construction or where less
than 18 inches of crawl space is provided under the floor. Cleanouts on
pipe concealed in partitions shall be provided with chromium plated bronze,
nickel bronze, nickel brass or stainless steel flush type access cover
plates. Round access covers shall be provided and secured to plugs with
securing screw. Square access covers may be provided with matching frames,
anchoring lugs and cover screws. Cleanouts in finished walls shall have
access covers and frames installed flush with the finished wall. Cleanouts
installed in finished floors subject to foot traffic shall be provided with
a chrome-plated cast brass, nickel brass, or nickel bronze cover secured to
the plug or cover frame and set flush with the finished floor. Heads of
fastening screws shall not project above the cover surface. Where
cleanouts are provided with adjustable heads, the heads shall be cast iron.
3.2 IDENTIFICATION SYSTEMS
3.2.1 Identification Tags
Identification tags made of brass, engraved laminated plastic, or engraved

anodized aluminum, indicating service and valve number shall be installed
on valves, except those valves installed on supplies at plumbing fixtures.
Tags shall be 1-3/8 inch minimum diameter, and marking shall be stamped or
engraved. Indentations shall be black, for reading clarity. Tags shall be
attached to valves with No. 12 AWG, copper wire, chrome-plated beaded
chain, or plastic straps designed for that purpose.
3.2.2 Pipe Color Code Marking

3.2.3 Color Coding Scheme for Locating Hidden Utility Components
Scheme shall be provided in buildings having suspended grid ceilings. The
color coding scheme shall identify points of access for maintenance and
operation of operable components which are not visible from the finished
space and installed in the space directly above the suspended grid ceiling.
The operable components shall include valves, dampers, switches, linkages
and thermostats. The color coding scheme shall consist of a color code
board and colored metal disks. Each colored metal disk shall be
approximately 3/8 inch in diameter and secured to removable ceiling panels
with fasteners. The fasteners shall be inserted into the ceiling panels so
that the fasteners will be concealed from view. The fasteners shall be
manually removable without tools and shall not separate from the ceiling
panels when panels are dropped from ceiling height. Installation of
colored metal disks shall follow completion of the finished surface on
which the disks are to be fastened. The color code board shall have the
approximate dimensions of 3 foot width, 30 inches height, and 1/2 inch
thickness. The board shall be made of wood fiberboard and framed under
glass or 1/16 inch transparent plastic cover. Unless otherwise directed,
the color code symbols shall be approximately 3/4 inch in diameter and the
related lettering in 1/2 inch high capital letters.
3.3 PAINTING
Painting of pipes, hangers, supports, and other iron work, either in

concealed spaces or exposed spaces, is specified in Section 09 90 00 PAINTS
AND COATINGS.
3.3.1 PAINTING OF NEW EQUIPMENT
New equipment painting shall be factory applied or shop applied, and shall
be as specified herein, and provided under each individual section.
3.3.1.1 Factory Painting Systems
Manufacturer's standard factory painting systems may be provided subject to

certification that the factory painting system applied will withstand 125
hours in a salt-spray fog test, except that equipment located outdoors
shall withstand 500 hours in a salt-spray fog test. Salt-spray fog test
shall be in accordance with ASTM B 117, and for that test the acceptance
criteria shall be as follows: immediately after completion of the test,
the paint shall show no signs of blistering, wrinkling, or cracking, and no
loss of adhesion; and the specimen shall show no signs of rust creepage
beyond 0.125 inch on either side of the scratch mark.
The film thickness of the factory painting system applied on the equipment
shall not be less than the film thickness used on the test specimen. If
manufacturer's standard factory painting system is being proposed for use
on surfaces subject to temperatures above 120 degrees F, the factory
painting system shall be designed for the temperature service.
3.3.1.2 Shop Painting Systems for Metal Surfaces
Clean, pretreat, prime and paint metal surfaces; except aluminum surfaces
need not be painted. Apply coatings to clean dry surfaces. Clean the
surfaces to remove dust, dirt, rust, oil and grease by wire brushing and
solvent degreasing prior to application of paint, except metal surfaces
subject to temperatures in excess of 120 degrees F shall be cleaned to bare
metal.
Where more than one coat of paint is specified, apply the second coat after
the preceding coat is thoroughly dry. Lightly sand damaged painting and
retouch before applying the succeeding coat. Color of finish coat shall be
aluminum or light gray.
a. Temperatures Less Than 120 Degrees F: Immediately after cleaning,

the metal surfaces subject to temperatures less than 120 degrees F
shall receive one coat of pretreatment primer applied to a minimum
dry film thickness of 0.3 mil, one coat of primer applied to a
minimum dry film thickness of one mil; and two coats of enamel
applied to a minimum dry film thickness of one mil per coat.
b. Temperatures Between 120 and 400 Degrees F: Metal surfaces

subject to temperatures between 120 and 400 degrees F shall
receive two coats of 400 degrees F heat-resisting enamel applied
to a total minimum thickness of 2 mils.
c. Temperatures Greater Than 400 Degrees F: Metal surfaces subject to

temperatures greater than 400 degrees F shall receive two coats of
600 degrees F heat-resisting paint applied to a total minimum dry
film thickness of 2 mils.
3.4 TESTS, FLUSHING AND DISINFECTION
3.4.1 [Enter Appropriate Subpart Title Here] 3.4.2 Defective Work
If inspection or test shows defects, such defective work or material shall

be replaced or repaired as necessary and inspection and tests shall be
repeated. .
3.4.3 Operational Test
Upon completion of flushing and prior to disinfection procedures, the

Contractor shall subject the plumbing system to operating tests to
demonstrate satisfactory installation, connections, adjustments, and
functional and operational efficiency. Such operating tests shall cover a
period of not less than 8 hours for each system and shall include the
following information in a report with conclusion as to the adequacy of the
system:
a. Time, date, and duration of test.
b. Water pressures at the most remote and the highest fixtures.
c. Operation of each fixture and fixture trim.
d. Operation of each valve, hydrant, and faucet.
3.4.4 Disinfection
After operational tests are complete, the entire domestic hot- and
cold-water distribution system shall be disinfected. System shall be
flushed as specified, before introducing chlorinating material. . A

properly adjusted hypochlorite solution injected into the main with a
hypochlorinator, or liquid chlorine injected into the main through a
solution-feed chlorinator , shall be used. If after the 24 hour and 6 hour
holding periods, the residual solution contains less than 25 ppm and 50 ppm
chlorine respectively, flush the piping and tank with potable water, and
repeat the above procedures until the required residual chlorine levels are
satisfied. The system including the tanks shall then be flushed with clean
water until the residual chlorine level is reduced to less than one part
per million. During the flushing period each valve and faucet shall be
opened and closed several times. Samples of water in disinfected
containers shall be obtained from several locations selected by the
The samples of water shall be tested for total coliform organisms (coliform
bacteria, fecal coliform, streptococcal, and other bacteria) in accordance
with AWWA 10084. The testing method used shall be EPA approved for
drinking water systems and shall comply with applicable local and state
requirements.
Disinfection shall be repeated until tests indicate the absence of coliform

organisms (zero mean coliform density per 100 milliliters) in the samples
for at least 2 full days. The system will not be accepted until
satisfactory bacteriological results have been obtained.
Place materials defined as hazardous or toxic waste in designated

containers. Return solvent and oil soaked rags for contaminant recovery
and laundering or for proper disposal. Close and seal tightly partly used
sealant and adhesive containers and store in protected, well-ventilated,
fire-safe area at moderate temperature. Place used sealant and adhesive
tubes and containers in areas designated for hazardous waste. Separate
copper and ferrous pipe waste in accordance with the Waste Management Plan
and place in designated areas for reuse.
3.6 POSTED INSTRUCTIONS
Framed instructions under glass or in laminated plastic, including wiring

and control diagrams showing the complete layout of the entire system,
shall be posted where directed. Condensed operating instructions
explaining preventive maintenance procedures, methods of checking the
system for normal safe operation, and procedures for safely starting and
stopping the system shall be prepared in typed form, framed as specified
above for the wiring and control diagrams and posted beside the diagrams.
The framed instructions shall be posted before acceptance testing of the
systems.

SECTION 22 08 00.00 10
COMMISSIONING OF PLUMBING SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES


1.2 DEFINITIONS
In some instances, terminology differs between the Contract and the

Commissioning Standard primarily because the intent of this Section is to
use the industry standards specified, along with additional requirements
listed herein to produce optimal results. The following table of similar
terms is provided for clarification only. Contract requirements take
precedent over the corresponding ACG, NEBB, or TABB requirements where
differences exist.
SIMILAR TERMS
Contract Term ACG NEBB
Commissioning ACG Procedural

Standard Commissioning Standards for
Guideline Building Systems
Commissioning
Commissioning ACG Certified NEBB Qualified

Agent Commissioning Commissioning
Agent Administrator
1.3.1 General
Perform Commissioning in accordance with the requirements of the standard

under which the Commissioning Firm's qualifications are approved, i.e.,
ACG Commissioning Guideline or NEBB Commissioning Standard unless otherwise
stated herein. Consider mandatory all recommendations and suggested
practices contained in the Commissioning Standard. Use the Commissioning
Standard for all aspects of Commissioning, including qualifications for the
SECTION 22 08 00.00 10 Page 1

Commissioning Firm and Agent and calibration of Commissioning instruments.

Where the instrument manufacturer calibration recommendations are more
stringent than those listed in the Commissioning Standard, the
manufacturer's recommendations shall be adhered to. All quality assurance
provisions of the Commissioning Standard such as performance guarantees
shall be part of this contract. For systems or system components not
covered in the Commissioning Standard, Commissioning procedures shall be
developed by the Commissioning Agent Where new procedures, requirements,
etc., applicable to the Contract requirements have been published or
adopted by the body responsible for the Commissioning Standard used (ACG,
NEBB), the requirements and recommendations contained in these procedures
and requirements shall be considered mandatory.
1.3.2 Energy
Formal LEED certification is required. Contractor participation in

commissioning activities with the CxA is required to support LEED
Energy & Atmosphere (EA) Prerequisite 1, Fundamental Commissioning
and EA Credit 3: Enhanced Commissioning. Provide documentation for as
many LEED credits as possible to support LEED Silver certification of
the project.
1.3.2.1 Section 01 91 00 - GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS
1.4 SUBMITTALS

following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-03 Product Data
Equipment Start-Up Checklist G
At least 28 days prior to equipment start-up. Submit the schedule

for the test checks at least 14 days prior to the start of
Pre-Functional Performance Test Checks.
Review test procedures in commissioning plan provided by

Commissioning Authority prior to the start of Functional
Performance Testing.
1.5.1 Commissioning Team
1.5.2 Contractor's Commissioning Specialist 1.5.2.1 [Enter Appropriate

Subpart Title Here]
Defined as a qualified individual, assigned by the Prime Contractor, to

serve as the commissioning lead for the contractor. Contractor's
Commissioning Specialist will be the main point of contact in the field for
the Commissioning Authority, as well as the Contractor's Mechanical,
Electrical, TAB, and Controls Representatives.approved successor.
SECTION 22 08 00.00 10 Page 2

1.5.2.2 Contractor's Commissioning Team Members
Individuals, each having the authority to act on behalf of the entity

represented, explicitly organized to implement the commissioning
process through coordinated action. The commissioning team
including Project superintendent and subcontractors, installers,
suppliers, and specialists deemed appropriate by the CxA.
1.6 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
Begin the work described in this Section only after all work required in
related Sections has been successfully completed, and all test and
inspection reports and operation and maintenance manuals required in these
Sections have been submitted and approved. Pre-Functional Performance Test
Checklists shall be performed at appropriate times during the construction
phase of the Contract.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 COMMISSIONING TEAM AND TEST FORMS AND CHECKLISTS
Designate Contractor team members to participate in the Pre- Functional

Performance Test Checklists and the Functional Performance Tests specified
herein. In addition, the Government team members will include a
representative of the Contracting Officer, the Design Agent's
Representative, and the Using Agency's Representative. The team members
shall be as follows:
Designation Function
A Commissioning Agent
S Contractor's Commissioning Specialist
M Contractor's Mechanical Representative
E Contractor's Electrical Representative
T Contractor's Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing
(TAB) Specialist
C Contractor's Controls Representative
D Design Agency Representative
O Contracting Officer's Representative
U Using Agency's Representative
Appendices A and B shall be completed by the commissioning team.

Acceptance by each commissioning team member of each Pre- Functional
Performance Test Checklist item shall be indicated by initials and date
unless an "X" is shown indicating that participation by that individual is
not required. Acceptance by each commissioning team member of each
functional performance test item shall be indicated by signature and date.
3.2 TESTS
Perform the pre-functional performance test checklists and functional

performance tests in a manner that essentially duplicates the checking,
testing, and inspection methods established in the related Sections. Where
checking, testing, and inspection methods are not specified in other
Sections, establish methods which will provide the information required.
SECTION 22 08 00.00 10 Page 3

Testing and verification required by this section shall be performed during

the Commissioning phase. Requirements in related Sections are independent
from the requirements of this Section and shall not be used to satisfy any
of the requirements specified in this Section. Provide all materials,
services, and labor required to perform the prefunctional performance
tests checks and functional performance tests. A functional performance
test shall be aborted if any system deficiency prevents the successful
completion of the test or if any participating non-Government commissioning
team member of which participation is specified is not present for the test.
3.2.1 Pre-Functional Performance Test Checklists
Perform Pre-Functional Performance Test Checklists for the items indicated

in Appendix A. Correct and re-inspect deficiencies discovered during these
checks in accordance with the applicable contract requirements.
Perform Functional Performance Tests for the items indicated in Appendix

B. Begin Functional Performance Tests only after all Pre-Functional
Performance Test Checklists have been successfully completed. Tests shall
prove all modes of the sequences of operation, and shall verify all other
relevant contract requirements. Begin Tests with equipment or components
and progress through subsystems to complete systems. Upon failure of any
Functional Performance Test item, correct all deficiencies in accordance
with the applicable contract requirements. The item shall then be retested
until it has been completed with no errors.
3.3 COMMISSIONING REPORT
The Commissioning Report shall consist of completed Pre- Functional

Performance Test Checklists and completed Functional Performance Tests
organized by system and by subsystem and submitted as one package.
The Commissioning Report shall also include all HVAC systems test reports,
inspection reports (Preparatory, Initial and Follow-up inspections),
start-up reports, TAB report, TAB verification report, Controls start-up
test reports and Controls Performance Verification Test (PVT) report. The
results of failed tests shall be included along with a description of the
corrective action taken.
SECTION 22 08 00.00 10 Page 4

APPENDIX A
PRE-FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST CHECKLISTS
SECTION 22 08 00.00 10 Page 5

Pre-Functional Performance Test Checklist - Solar Water Heater
For Solar Water Heater: [_____]
Checklist Item
Installation A M E T C O
a. Array has been properly installed and

secured to building. ___ ___ X X X ___
b. Array is properly labeled. ___ ___ X X X ___
c. Array is finished according to contract

specifications. ___ ___ X X X ___
d. Glass is not cracked or broken. ___ ___ X X X ___
e. The array has no signs of delamination or

or water infiltration. ___ ___ X X X ___
f. No cells appear to be damaged or

discolored. ___ ___ X X X ___
g. T&P relief valve operates correctly. ___ ___ X X X ___
h. T&P relief valve is piped to floor drain. ___ ___ X X X ___
i. Piping, joints, valves, and components are

installed in accordance with on-site job
requirements and specifications. ___ ___ X X X ___
j. Fuse rating is appropriate. Rating ______ ___ ___ X X X ___
Electrical A M E T C O
a. Wiring is separated and secured. ___ X ___ X ___ ___
b. Enclosure is grounded. ___ ___ ___ X X ___
Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing (TAB) A M E T C O
a. TAB report approved. ___ ___ X ___ X ___
SECTION 22 08 00.00 10 Page 6

- End of Appendix A -
SECTION 22 08 00.00 10 Page 7

APPENDIX B
FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE TESTS CHECKLISTS
SECTION 22 08 00.00 10 Page 8

SECTION 22 08 00.00 10 Page 9

Functional Performance Test Checklist - Solar Water Heater
For Solar Water Heater: [_____]
1. Functional Performance Test: Contractor shall demonstrate operation

of solar water heaters as per specifications including the following:
a. Run domestic hot water at all connected plumbing fixtures.

Determine flow rate of hot water at fixtures. _________________________ GPM
b. Check water heater inlet water temperature. _______ degrees F
c. Check water heater outlet water temperature. ________ degrees F
d. Array rated power _____ kWh Actual power _____ kWh
e. Unit responds to thermostat set point. _______ degrees F
f. Controls are interlocked with domestic hot water system.
2. Verify capacity of water heater from data in items 1a-1c. _______ MBH
3. Certification: We the undersigned have witnessed the above

functional performance tests and certify that the item tested has met the
performance requirements in this section of the specifications.
Signature and Date
Commissioning Agent _____________________________
Contractor's Commissioning Specialist _____________________________
Contractor's Mechanical Representative _____________________________
Contractor's Electrical Representative _____________________________
Contractor's TAB Representative _____________________________
Contractor's Controls Representative _____________________________
Design Agency Representative _____________________________
Contracting Officer's Representative _____________________________
Using Agency's Representative _____________________________
SECTION 22 08 00.00 10 Page 10

SECTION 22 08 00.00 10 Page 11

SECTION 22 08 00.00 10 Page 12

- End of Appendix B -
SECTION 22 08 00.00 10 Page 13

-End of document
SECTION 22 08 00.00 10 Page 14

SECTION 22 08 00
COMMISSIONING OF FLAT PLATE SOLAR COLLECTOR SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 DEFINITIONS

differences exist.
SIMILAR TERMS
Commissioning Standard ACG Commissioning Procedural Standards for

Commissioning
Commissioning Agent ACG Certified NEBB Qualified

Commissioning Agent Commissioning
Administrator
1.2.1 General

under which the Commissioning Firm's qualifications are approved, i.e., ACG
Commissioning Guideline or NEBB Commissioning Standard, unless otherwise
stated herein. Consider mandatory all recommendations and suggested
practices contained in the Commissioning Standard. Use the Commissioning
Standard for all aspects of Commissioning, including qualifications for the
Commissioning Firm and Specialist and calibration of Commissioning
instruments. Where the instrument manufacturer calibration recommendations
are more stringent than those listed in the Commissioning Standard, the
manufacturer's recommendations shall be adhered to. All quality assurance
provisions of the Commissioning Standard such as performance guarantees
shall be part of this contract. For systems or system components not
covered in the Commissioning Standard, Commissioning procedures shall be
developed by the Commissioning Agent. Where new procedures, requirements,
etc., applicable to the Contract requirements have been published or
adopted by the body responsible for the Commissioning Standard used (ACG,
NEBB, or TABB), the requirements and recommendations contained in these
procedures and requirements shall be considered mandatory.
1.2.2 Energy

commissioning activities with the CxA is required to support LEED Energy
& Atmosphere (EA) Prerequisite 1, Fundamental Commissioning and EA Credit
3: Enhanced Commissioning. Provide documentation for as many LEED credits
as possible to support LEED Silver certification of the project.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
1.4.1 Section 01 91 00 - GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS
1.4 SUBMITTALS

submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality
Control. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies
the office that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the
SD-03 Product Data
Equipment Start-up Checklists; G

Functional Performance Tests; G
Review test procedures in commissioning plan provided by Commissioning

Authority prior to the start of Functional Performance Testing.
1.5 COMMISSIONING TEAM
1.5.1 Contractor's Commissioning Specialist

Electrical, TAB, and Controls Representatives.
1.6.2 Contractor's Commissioning Team Members

represented, explicitly organized to implement the commissioning process
through coordinated action. The commissioning team shall consist of, but
not be limited to, representatives of Contractor, including Project
superintendent and subcontractors, installers, suppliers, and specialists
deemed appropriate by the CxA.

PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used
PART 3 EXECUTION

Performance Test Checklists and the Functional Performance Tests
specified herein. In addition, the Government team members will include a
(TAB) Specialist
Appendices A and B shall be completed by the commissioning team. Acceptance

by each commissioning team member of each Pre- Functional Performance Test
Checklist item shall be indicated by initials and date unless an "X" is
shown indicating that participation by that individual
is not required. Acceptance by each commissioning team member of each
functional performance test item shall be indicated by signature and
date.
3.2 TESTS

Testing and verification required by this section shall be performed
during the Commissioning phase. Requirements in related Sections are
independent from the requirements of this Section and shall not be used to
satisfy any of the requirements specified in this Section. Provide all
materials, services, and labor required to perform the prefunctional
performance tests checks and functional performance tests. A functional
performance test shall be aborted if any system deficiency prevents the
successful completion of the test or if any participating non-Government
commissioning team member of which participation is specified is not
present for the test.
in Appendix A. Correct and re-inspect deficiencies discovered during

these checks in accordance with the applicable contract requirements.
3.3 Functional Performance Tests
Perform Functional Performance Tests for the items indicated in Appendix B.

Begin Functional Performance Tests only after all Pre-Functional

APPENDIX A
Pre-Functional Performance Test Checklist - Solar Water Heater
For Solar Water Heater: Checklist Item


secured to building.
b. Array is properly labeled.
c. Array is finished according to

contract specifications.
d. Glass is not cracked or broken.
e. The array has no signs of delamination

or water infiltration. .
f. No cells appear to be damaged or discolored.
g. T&P relief valve operates correctly.
h. T&P relief valve is piped to floor drain.
i. Piping, joints, valves and components are

installed in accordance with on-site job
requirements and specifications.
j. Fuse rating is appropriate. Rating
a. Wiring is separated and secured.

b. Enclosure is grounded.
Test and Balance A M E T C O
a. Test and Balance Report has been approved.
Pre-Functional Performance Test Checklist - Pumps
For Pump:
Checklist Item A M E T C O
Installation
a. Piping system installed.
Electrical
a.
Power available to pump disconnect.
X
X
b. Pump rotation verified. X X X

c. Control system interlocks functional. X
X
a. Pressure/temperature gauges installed. X

X
b. TAB Report approved.
X X
APPENDIX B
FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST CHECKLISTS
Functional Performance Test Checklist - Solar Water Heater

of
solar water heaters as per specifications including the following:
a. Run domestic hot water at all connected plumbing fixtures,

Determine flow rate of hot water at fixtures. GPM
b. Check water heater inlet water temperature.

c. Check water heater outlet water temperature.
degrees F
degrees F
d. Array rated power kWh Actual power kWh

c. Unit responds to thermostat set point. degrees F
e. Array rated power kWh Actual power kWh
e. Controls are interlocked with domestic how water system.
2. Verify capacity of water heater from data in item 1a-1c. MBH

functional performance tests and certify that the item tested has
met the performance requirements in this section of the specifications.
Commissioning Agent
Signature and Date
Contractor's Quality Control Representative

__________________________
Contractor's Mechanical Representative __________________________
Contractor's TAB Representative
Government Representative Using Agency's Representative Design Agency's
Representative Commissioning Agent
Functional Performance Test - Pump
NOTE: Prior to performing this test, for closed loop systems ensure that
the system is pressurized and the make-up water system is operational, or
for open loop systems ensure that the sumps are filled to the proper level.
1. Activate pump start using control system commands. a. Verify

correct operation in:
HAND OFF AUTO
b. Verify pressure drop across strainer: Strainer inlet pressure

psig Strainer outlet pressure psig
c. Verify pump inlet/outlet pressure reading, compare to Testing,

Adjusting, and Balancing (TAB) Report and pump design conditions.
DESIGN TAB ACTUAL Pump inlet pressure psig
Pump outlet pressure psig
d. Operate pump at shutoff and at 100 percent of designed flow when all
components are in full flow. Plot test readings on pump curve and compare
results against readings taken from flow measuring devices.
SHUTOFF 100 percent
Pump inlet pressure psig
Pump flow rate gpm
SETPOINT Differential Pressure Transmitter
e. For variable speed pumps, operate pump at shutoff (shutoff to be done in

manual on var1able speed drive at the minimum rpm that the system is being
controlled at) and at minimum flow or when all components are in full
by-pass. Plot test readings on pump curve and compare results against
readings taken from flow measuring devices.
SHUTOFF 100 percent

Pump inlet pressure psig
Pump flow rate gpm
SETPOINT Differential Pressure Transmitter
2. Measure motor amperage each phase and voltage phase to phase and phase
to ground for both the full flow and the minimum flow conditions. Compare
amperage to nameplate FLA
a. Full flow:
Nameplate FLA
Amperage Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 3
Voltage Ph1-Ph2 Ph1-Ph3 Ph2-Ph3
Voltage
Ph1-gnd
Ph2-gnd
Ph3-gnd
b. Minimum flow:
Amperage Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 3

Voltage Ph1-Ph2 Ph1-Ph3 Ph2-Ph3
Voltage Ph1-gnd Ph2-gnd Ph3-gnd
3. Note unusual vibration, noise, etc.
4. Certification:
We the undersigned have witnessed the above functional performance tests
and certify that the item tested has met the performance requirements in
this section of the specifications.
Signature and Date
Commissioning Agent
Contractor's TAB Representative
Design Agency Representative
Contracting Officer's Representative
Using Agency's Representative
SECTION 22 33 30.00 10
SOLAR WATER HEATING EQUIPMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

ANSI Z21.22/CSA 4.4 (1999; Addenda A 2000, Addenda B 2001; R

2004) Relief Valves for Hot Water Supply
Systems

ENGINEERS (ASHRAE)
ASHRAE 93 (2003; Errata 2003) Methods of Testing to

Determine the Thermal Performance of Solar
Collectors
AWS B2.1/B2.1M (2009) Specification for Welding Procedure

and Performance Qualification
ASME B1.20.1 (1983; R 2006) Pipe Threads, General

Purpose (Inch)
ASME B16.15 (2006) Cast Bronze Alloy Threaded Fittings

Classes 125 and 250


Fittings
ASME B16.24 (2006) Cast Copper Alloy Pipe Flanges and

Flanged Fittings: Classes 150, 300, 600,
900, 1500, and 2500
SECTION 22 33 30.00 10 Page 1

ASME B16.39 (2009) Standard for Malleable Iron

Threaded Pipe Unions; Classes 150, 250,
and 300
ASME B31.1 (2007; Addenda a 2008; Addenda b 2009)

Power Piping

Attachments
ASME BPVC SEC VIII D1 (2010) BPVC Section VIII-Rules for

Construction of Pressure Vessels Division 1
ASME PTC 19.3 (1974; R 2004) Temperature Measurement


ASTM B 152/B 152M (2009) Standard Specification for Copper

Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Rolled Bar


Metal


Copper Tube
ASTM B 828 (2002) Standard Practice for Making

Capillary Joints by Soldering of Copper
and Copper Alloy Tube and Fittings

Copper Water Tube

Heat-Treated Flat Glass - Kind HS, Kind FT
Coated and Uncoated Glass

ASTM F 1199 (1988; R 2010) Cast (All Temperatures and

Pressures) and Welded Pipe Line Strainers
(150 psig and 150 degrees F Maximum)
SECTION 22 33 30.00 10 Page 2


INDUSTRY (MSS)

Flared Ends
MSS SP-58 (2009) Pipe Hangers and Supports -

Materials, Design and Manufacture,
Selection, Application, and Installation
MSS SP-69 (2003) Pipe Hangers and Supports -

Selection and Application (ANSI Approved
American National Standard)

Service

Valves
NEMA MG 1 (2009) Motors and Generators
Provide a solar energy system arranged for preheating of service (domestic

) water using flat plate liquid solar collectors. Include in the system
components a solar collector array, storage tank, pumps, automatic
controls, instrumentation, interconnecting piping and fittings, potable
water heat transfer fluid in an open loop, heat exchanger, expansion tank,
and accessories required for the operation of the system.
1.3 SUBMITTALS

SD-02 Shop Drawings
Solar Energy System

As-Built Drawings
Drawings containing a system schematic; a collector layout and

roof plan noting reverse-return piping for the collector array; a
system elevation; an equipment room layout; a schedule of
operation and installation instructions; and a schedule of design
information including collector height and width, recommended flow
rate and pressure drop at that flow rate, and number of collectors
to be grouped per bank. Include on the drawings complete wiring
and schematic diagrams and any other details required to
demonstrate that the system has been coordinated and will properly
function as a unit. Drawings shall show proposed layout and
anchorage of equipment and appurtenances, and equipment
SECTION 22 33 30.00 10 Page 3

relationship to other parts of the work, including clearances for

maintenance and operation. As-built drawings, as specified.
SD-03 Product Data
Spare Parts
A complete list of equipment and materials, as specified.
Solar Energy System
Manufacturer's descriptive and technical literature; performance

chart and curves; catalog cuts; and installation instructions.
Proposed diagrams, instructions, and other sheets, prior to
posting. A copy of the posted instructions proposed to be used,
including a system schematic, wiring and control diagrams, and a
complete layout of the entire system. Include with the
instructions, in typed form, condensed operating instructions
explaining preventive maintenance procedures, methods of checking
the system for normal safe operation and procedures for safely
starting and stopping the system, methods of balancing and testing
flow in the system, and methods of testing for control failure and
proper system operation.
Welder Qualifications
Prior to welding operations, __4__ copies of qualified

procedures and lists of names and identification symbols of
qualified welders and welding operators.
SD-06 Test Reports
Inspection and Testing
An independent testing agency's certified reports of inspections

and laboratory tests, including analysis, position of
flow-balancing equipment, and interpretation of test results.
Each report shall be properly identified. Describe test methods
used and compliance with recognized test standards.
Operation and Maintenance Procedures
___4__ copies of operation and ___4__ copies of maintenance

manuals for the equipment furnished. One complete set prior to
performance testing and the remainder upon acceptance. Manuals
shall be approved prior to the field training course. Operating
manuals shall detail the step-by-step procedures required for
system filling, startup, operation, and shutdown. Operating
manuals shall include the manufacturer's name, model number,
service manual, parts list, and brief descriptions of all
equipment and their basic operating features. Maintenance manuals
shall list routine maintenance procedures, possible breakdowns and
repairs, troubleshooting guides, piping and equipment layout,
balanced fluid flow rates, and simplified wiring and control
diagrams of the system as installed.
SECTION 22 33 30.00 10 Page 4

1.4 WELDER QUALIFICATIONS
Qualify procedures and welders in accordance with the code under which the
welding is specified to be accomplished.
Protect all equipment delivered and placed in storage from the weather,
excessive humidity and excessive temperature variation, and dirt and dust
or other contaminants.
1.6 WARRANTY
Provide a minimum 10-year warranty against the following: failure of

manifold or riser tubing, joints or fittings; degradation of absorber plate
selective surface; rusting or discoloration of collector hardware; and
embrittlement of header manifold seals. Include in the warranty full
repair or replacement of defective materials or equipment.
1.7 SPARE PARTS
Submit data for each different item of material and equipment listed,
including a complete list of parts and supplies, with current unit prices
and source of supply; a list of parts and supplies that are either normally
furnished at no extra cost with the purchase of equipment, or specified to
be furnished as part of the contract; and a list of additional items
recommended by the manufacturer to ensure efficient operation for a period
of 120 days.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS
2.1.1 Standard Products
Provide materials and equipment which are the standard products of a

manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of such products and that
2 years prior to bid opening. Equipment shall be supported by a service
organization that is, in the opinion of the Contracting Officer, reasonably
convenient to the site.
2.1.2 Nameplates
Each major item of equipment shall have the manufacturer's name, address,
type or style, model or serial number, and catalog number on a plate
secured to the item of equipment.
2.1.3 Identical Items
Items of the same classification shall be identical, including equipment,

assemblies, parts, and components.
2.1.4 Equipment Guards and Access
Fully enclose guard belts, pulleys, couplings, projecting set-screws,

keys, and other rotating parts so located that any person may come in close
proximity. High-temperature equipment and piping so located as to endanger
personnel or where it creates a potential fire hazard shall be properly
SECTION 22 33 30.00 10 Page 5

guarded or covered with insulation of a type specified. Provide catwalk,

ladder, and guard rails where shown and in accordance with Section 05 50 13
MISCELLANEOUS METAL FABRICATIONS.
2.1.5 Special Tools
Provide one set of special tools, calibration devices, and instruments

required for operation, calibration, and maintenance of the equipment.
2.2 PIPING SYSTEM
Piping system shall be complete with pipe, pipe fittings, valves,

strainers, expansion loops, hangers, inserts, supports, anchors, guides,
sleeves, and accessories. System materials shall conform to the following:
2.2.1 Copper Tubing
ASTM B 88, Type K where buried, Type L otherwise. Collector risers Type L
or M.
2.2.2 Solder
ASTM B 32, Type Sb5, Sn94, Sn95, or Sn96.
2.2.3 Joints and Fittings for Copper Tubing
Wrought copper and bronze solder-joint pressure fittings shall conform to

ASME B16.22 and ASTM B 75. Cast copper alloy solder-joint pressure
fittings shall conform to ASME B16.18 and ASTM B 828. Cast copper alloy
fittings for flared copper tube shall conform to ASME B16.26 and ASTM B 62.
Brass or bronze adapters for brazed tubing may be used for connecting
tubing to flanges and to threaded ends of valves and equipment. Cast
bronze threaded fittings shall conform to ASME B16.15. Extracted brazed
tee joints produced with an acceptable tool and installed as recommended by
the manufacturer may be used. Grooved mechanical joints and fittings shall
be designed for not less than 125 psig service and shall be the product of
the same manufacturer. Grooved fitting and mechanical coupling housing
shall be ductile iron conforming to ASTM A 536. Gaskets for use in grooved
joints shall be molded synthetic polymer of pressure responsive design and
Grooved joints shall conform to AWWA C606. Coupling nuts and bolts for use
in grooved joints shall be steel and shall conform to ASTM A 183.
2.2.4 Flanges
Bronze, Class 125 or 150 as applicable, ASME B16.24.
2.2.5 Dielectric Waterways and Flanges
Waterways and flanges shall conform to the requirements of ASME B16.39.

Dielectric waterways shall have metal connections at both ends suited to
match connecting piping. Ends shall be threaded or soldered to match
adjacent piping. Dielectric waterways shall be internally lined with an
insulator specifically designed to prevent current flow between dissimilar
metals. Dielectric waterways and flanges shall be suitable for the
temperatures, and pressures, encountered. Dielectric flanges shall meet
the performance requirements described herein for dielectric waterways.
SECTION 22 33 30.00 10 Page 6

2.2.6 Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle, and Check Valves
MSS SP-80, Type 1 (or nonslam, spring type), Class 125 or 150.
2.2.7 Ball Valves
MSS SP-72 or MSS SP-110, Class 125 or 150.
2.2.8 Relief Valves, Pressure and Temperature
ANSI Z21.22/CSA 4.4. Pressure relief valves located on the solar collector
array upper manifold and on the expansion tank shall open and discharge the
collector fluid into drain indicated when fluid pressure rises above 125
psig. Pressure and temperature relief valves located on the solar storage
tank shall open and discharge water into drain indicated when fluid
pressure rises above 125 psig.
2.2.9 Calibrating Balancing Valves
Calibrated balancing valves shall be suitable for 125 psig and 250 degrees F
service. Calibrated balancing valves shall be of bronze body/brass ball
construction with seat rings compatible with system fluid and shall have
differential readout ports across valve seat area. Readout ports shall be
fitted with internal insert of compatible material and check valve.
Calibrated balancing valves shall have memory stop feature to allow valve
to be closed for service and reopened to set point without disturbing
balance position, and shall have calibrated nameplate to assure specific
valve settings.
2.2.10 Air Vents
Brass or bronze valves or cocks suitable for 125 psig service. Air vents
shall be provided with threaded plugs or caps.
2.2.11 Strainers
ASTM F 1199, removable basket and screen, Y pattern, cast iron strainer
with pressures to 125 psig, simplex type; or a combination elbow-strainer
with straightening vanes and strainer arranged for horizontal flow.
2.2.12 Pressure Gauges
ASME B40.100. Pressure gauges shall be provided with throttling type

needle valve or a pulsation dampener and shutoff valve. Minimum dial size
shall be 3-1/2 inch.
2.2.13 Thermometers
ASME PTC 19.3, Type I, Class 3. Thermometers shall be supplied with wells
and separable bronze sockets.
2.2.14 Pipe Threads
ASME B1.20.1.
2.2.15 Pipe Supports
MSS SP-58 and MSS SP-69. Metal insulation shield shall be stainless steel.
SECTION 22 33 30.00 10 Page 7

2.2.16 Aluminum Sheets
ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003.
2.2.17 Copper Sheets Copper Alloy 110
ASTM B 152/B 152M.
2.3 ELECTRICAL WORK
Electric motor-driven equipment specified shall be provided complete with

motor, motor starters, and controls. Electrical equipment and wiring shall
be in accordance with Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.
Electrical characteristics shall be as specified or indicated. Motor
starters shall be provided complete with thermal overload protection and
other appurtenances necessary for the motor control specified. Each motor
shall be of sufficient size to drive the equipment at the specified
capacity without exceeding the nameplate rating of the motor. Manual or
automatic control and protective or signal devices required for the
operation specified, and any control wiring required for controls and
devices, but not shown, shall be provided. Integral size motors shall be
the premium efficiency type in accordance with NEMA MG 1.
2.4 COLLECTOR SUBSYSTEM
2.4.1 Solar Collector Construction
Collectors shall be of the flat plate, liquid, internally manifolded type.

Each collector shall be provided with cover glazing, an absorber plate,
heat transfer liquid flow tubes, internal headers, weep holes, insulation,
and a casing. Collectors shall be of weather-tight construction. Solar
collectors shall withstand a stagnation temperature of 350 degrees F and a
working pressure of 125 psig without degrading, out-gassing, or warping.
Collector net aperture area shall be as shown and shall be a minimum of 28
square feet. Collector length, width, and volume shall be as shown.
2.4.2 Absorber Plate and Flow Tubes
Absorber sheet or plate shall be copper. Top of absorber plate shall be

coated with selective surface of black chrome and shall have an emissivity
less than 0.2 and absorptivity greater than 0.9. Flow tubes shall be Type
L or Type M copper, and shall be soldered, brazed, or mechanically bonded
to the absorber plate. Tubes shall be installed on the absorber plate so
that they drain by gravity.
2.4.3 Cover Glazing
Each collector shall have a single layer of cover glazing made of clear
float, water white or low iron type tempered glass. Glass shall meet
ASTM C 1048. Cover glazing shall be completely replaceable from the front
of the collector without disturbing the piping or adjacent collectors.
Cover glazing shall be separated from the collector by a continuous gasket
made of EPDM rubber.
2.4.4 Insulation
Back and sides of the absorber plate shall be insulated. Insulation shall
fill space between absorber plate and casing and shall have an R value of 4
minimum. Insulation shall conform to EPA requirements in accordance with
SECTION 22 33 30.00 10 Page 8

Section 01 62 35 RECYCLED / RECOVERED MATERIALS and shall be fibrous glass,

polyisocyanurate, urethane foam, or other material suitable for the
intended purpose, and shall withstand the moisture, sun exposure, and
stagnation temperature limitations of the solar collector.
Polyisocyanurate insulation shall not come in contact with the absorber
plate.
2.4.5 Casing
Casing shall be aluminum. Finish shall be mill finish or factory applied

baked enamel, embossed or bronze anodized aluminum. Cover glazing shall be
separated from the casing by an EPDM rubber gasket or equivalent material.
Allowance shall be made for thermal expansion between the cover and
absorber plates and the casing, and for drainage of moisture through weep
holes.
2.4.6 Mounting and Assembly Hardware
Mounting brackets and hinges shall be aluminum or stainless steel.

Assembly hardware including all bolts, washers, and nuts shall be stainless
steel.
2.4.7 Solar Collector Performance
Thermal performance shall be plotted on the thermal efficiency curve in

accordance with ASHRAE 93. The y-intercept shall be equal to or greater
than 0.68, and the numerical value of the slope of the curve (FRUL) shall
be between 0 and minus 1.0 Btu per hour per square foot per degree F.
Manufacturer's recommended volumetric flow rate and the design pressure
drop at the recommended flow rate shall be as shown. Manufacturer's
recommendations shall allow at least seven collectors to be joined per bank
while providing for balanced flow and for thermal expansion considerations.
2.5 Solar Collector Array
2.5.1 Net Absorber Area and Array Layout
Array shall consist of an assembly of solar collectors as shown with a

minimum total array aperture area of __28___ square feet. Solar collectors
shall be assembled as shown in banks of equal number of collectors. Banks
shall consist of no less than 4 and no more than 7 collectors each.
Collector array shall be oriented so that all collectors face the same
direction and are oriented within 15 degrees of true south and with
respect to true south as indicated. Collectors arranged in multiple rows
shall be spaced so that no shading from other collectors is evident between
1000 hours and 1400 hours solar time on December 21. Minimum spacing
between rows shall be as shown.
2.5.2 Piping
The array piping shall include interconnecting piping between solar

collectors, and shall be connected in a reverse-return configuration as
indicated with approximately equal pipe length for any possible flow path.
Flow rate through the collector array shall be as indicated. Automatic
pressure relief valves shall be provided in the array piping system as
indicated, and shall be adjusted to open when the pressure within the solar
array rises above 125 psig. Each collector bank shall be capable of being
isolated by valves, and each bank capable of being separated shall have a
pressure relief valve installed and shall be capable of being drained.
SECTION 22 33 30.00 10 Page 9

Manually operated air vents shall be located at system high points, and all
array piping shall be pitched a minimum of 0.25 inch/foot as shown so that
piping can be drained by gravity. Calibrated balancing valves shall be
supplied at the outlet of each collector bank as indicated.
2.5.3 Supports for Solar Collector Array
Support structure for collector array shall be aluminum and shall be in

accordance with Section 05 50 00 METAL: MISCELLANEOUS AND FABRICATIONS .
Support structure shall secure collector array at the tilt angle with
respect to horizontal and orientation with respect to true south as shown.
Support structure shall withstand static weight of filled collectors and
piping, wind, snow, seismic, and other loads as indicated. Seismic details
shall conform toSections 13 48 00 SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR MISCELLANEOUS
EQUIPMENT and 13 48 00.00 10 SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT .
Support structure shall allow access to all equipment for maintenance,
repair, and replacement.
2.6 STORAGE TANK
Solar system hot water storage tank shall have a storage volume as shown.
Solar system storage tank shall conform to specifications for hot water
storage tanks in Section 22 00 00 PLUMBING, GENERAL PURPOSE. Insulation
shall be in accordance with Section 23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION FOR
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS, except that insulation shall have an R value of not
less than 30. Tank penetrations shall be designed to allow for connections
to copper piping without risk of corrosion due to dissimilar metals, and
shall be factory installed as indicated.
2.7 TRANSPORT SUBSYSTEM
2.7.1 Heat Exchanger
The heat exchanger construction and testing shall be in accordance with

ASME BPVC SEC VIII D1. Minimum design pressure rating shall be 125 psig.
Heat exchanger shall be capable of returning a hot-side exit temperature of
120 degrees F or less given a hot-side approach temperature of 140 degrees
F and a cold-side approach temperature of 100 degrees F. Heat exchanger
shall be capable of withstanding temperatures of at least 240 degrees F.
Heat exchanger shall be capable of operation at the flow rates as shown.
2.7.1.1 Tube-Bundle Tank Type Heat Exchanger
Heat exchanger shall be removable bundle, tube type. Tube sheets, and end
plates shall be constructed of nonferrous, brass, copper-nickel, or 316
stainless steel. Tubes shall be seamless copper or copper alloy and
shall be mechanically bonded, welded, or brazed to the end tube plates.
Tubes shall be straight and supported by tube sheets which maintain the
tubes in alignment. All tube-in-shell heat exchanger characteristics
shall be as indicated.
2.7.2 Pumps
Circulating pumps shall be electrically-driven, single-stage, centrifugal

type. The pumps shall be supported on a concrete foundation or by the
piping on which installed. The pumps shall have a capacity not less than
that indicated and shall be either integrally-mounted with the motor or
direct-connected by a flexible-shaft coupling on a cast-iron or steel
subbase. The pump shaft shall be constructed of corrosion resistant alloy
SECTION 22 33 30.00 10 Page 10

steel, sleeve bearings and glands of bronze designed to accommodate a

mechanical seal. Pumps shall have stainless steel impellers and casings of
bronze. The motors shall have sufficient power for the service required,
shall be of a type approved by the manufacturer of the pump, shall be
suitable for the available electric service and for the heat transfer fluid
used, and shall conform to the requirements specified in Section 26 20 00
INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. The motors shall be controlled by suitable
switches that can be activated by either the differential temperature
controller or by manual override (Hand-Off-Automatic). Each pump suction
and discharge connection shall be provided with a pressure gauge as
specified.
2.7.3 Pipe Insulation
Pipe insulation and coverings shall be applied in accordance with Section

23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS as called out for steam
piping to 15 psig. Array piping insulation shall be capable of withstanding
250 degrees F, except that piping within 1.5 feet of collector connections
shall be capable of withstanding 400 degrees F.
2.7.4 Expansion Tank
Expansion tank shall be constructed and tested in accordance with

ASME BPVC SEC VIII D1 and as applicable for a working pressure of 125 psig.
Tank shall be provided with an elastomeric EPDM bladder which separates the
system fluid from the tank walls and is suitable for a maximum operating
temperature of 240 degrees F. Expansion tank acceptance volume shall as
shown on drawings. Total tank size and arrangement shall be as shown on
drawings. Tank shall be provided with 125 psi pressure relief valve. Tank
shall be provided with precharge pressure as shown on drawings.
2.7.5 Heat Transfer Fluid
Solar collector loop fluid shall be potable water.
2.8 CONTROL AND INSTRUMENTATION SUBSYSTEM
2.8.1 Differential Temperature Control Equipment
Differential temperature control equipment shall be supplied as a system by

a single manufacturer. Controller shall be solid-state electronic type
complete with an integral transformer to supply low voltage, shall allow a
minimum adjustable temperature differential (on) of 8 to 20 degrees F, a
minimum adjustable temperature differential (off) of 3 to 5 degrees F, and
shall include a switching relay or solid state output device for pump
control. Thermostat shall operate in the on-off mode. Controller accuracy
shall be plus or minus 1 degree F. Controller shall be compatible with
10-kOhm thermistor temperature sensors. Differential control shall provide
direct digital temperature readings of all temperatures sensed. Control
shall indicate visually when pumps are energized. Control ambient
operating range shall be a minimum of 32 to 120 degrees F.
2.8.2 Thermistor Temperature Sensors
Temperature sensors shall be 10-kOhm thermistors supplied by the

differential temperature controller manufacturer, with an accuracy of plus
or minus 1 percent at 77 degrees F. Model supplied must have passed an
accelerated life test conducted by subjecting thermistor assemblies to a
constant temperature of 400 degrees F or greater for a period of 1000 hours
SECTION 22 33 30.00 10 Page 11

minimum. Accuracy shall have remained within plus or minus 1 percent as

stated above. Thermistors shall be hermetically sealed glass type.
Operating range shall be minus 40 to plus 400 degrees F. Immersion wells
or watertight threaded fittings shall be provided for temperature sensors.
2.8.3 Sensor and Control Wiring
18 AWG minimum twisted and shielded 2, 3, or 4 conductor to match analog

function hardware. Control wiring shall have 600 volt insulation.
Multiconductor wire shall have an outer jacket of PVC.
2.8.4 Flowmeters
Flowmeters shall consist of a venturi, 6 inch dial differential pressure

meter, valved pressure taps, and bar stock needle valves. Venturi flow
nozzle shall have threaded bronze ends for pipe sizes up to 2 inches and
flanged ends for pipe sizes 2-1/2 inches and above. Venturi length shall
not be less than 1.6 times the pipe size. Venturi shall be selected to
read differential pressure corresponding to 0.5 to 1.5 times the system
flow rate. Venturi shall have an accuracy of plus or minus 1 percent of
the range. Meter shall have an accuracy of plus or minus 2 percent of the
full scale range.
2.8.5 Sight Flow Indicators
Sight flow indicators shall consist of a clear glass window or cylinder and
a nonferrous or 316 stainless steel body and impeller. Indicator shall
have threaded ends for pipe sizes up to 2 inches and flanged ends for pipe
sizes 2-1/2 inches and above. Maximum operating pressure shall be no less
than 125 psi. Maximum operating temperature shall be no less than 250
degrees F.
2.9 PAINTING AND FINISHING
Equipment and component items, when fabricated from ferrous metal and
located inside the building, shall be factory finished with the
manufacturer's standard finish.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
After becoming thoroughly familiar with all details of the work, verify all
dimensions in the field, and advise the Contracting Officer of any
3.2 INSTALLATION
3.2.1 Collector Subsystem
3.2.1.1 Collector Array
Solar collector array shall be installed on roof at orientation, and

elevation as indicated. For mounting on pitched roofs, back of
collectors shall be installed a minimum of 2 inches above roof surface.
Each solar collector shall be removable for maintenance, repair, or
replacement. Solar collector array shall not impose additional loads on
the structure beyond the loads scheduled on the structural drawings.
SECTION 22 33 30.00 10 Page 12

3.2.1.2 Array Piping
Collector array piping shall be installed in a reverse-return configuration

so that path lengths of collector supply and return are of approximately
equal length. All piping must be coded with fluid type and flow direction
labels in accordance with Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS.
3.2.1.3 Array Support
Array support shall be installed in accordance with the recommendations of

the collector manufacturer. Structural members requiring welding shall be
welded in accordance with AWS D1.2/D1.2M for aluminum and welders should be
qualified according to AWS B2.1/B2.1M.
3.2.2 Storage Subsystem
Solar storage tank penetrations shall be installed as shown so that cold

water inlet to storage tank and outlet from storage tank to collector array
are located near the bottom of the tank, and inlet from collector array and
outlet to load are located near the top of the tank.
3.2.3 Transport Subsystem
3.2.3.1 Flow Rates
Flow rate in the collector loop shall be based on recommended collector

flow rate, and shall be as shown. Storage loop flow rate shall be 1.25
times the collector loop flow rate. All flow rates shall be below 5
feet/second.
3.2.3.2 Pumps
Pumps shall be installed on foundations, leveled, grouted, and realigned

before operation in accordance with manufacturers instructions. Additional
pipe supports shall be provided for close-coupled in-line pumps. All
installed pumps shall have a straight pipe between the suction side of the
pump and the first elbow. The length of this pipe shall be a minimum of
five times the diameter of the pipe on the suction side of the pump, or a
suction diffuser of the proper size shall be attached to the suction side
of the pump. Drain line sizes from the pumps shall not be less than the
drain trap or the pump dirt pocket, but in no case shall the drain line be
less than 1/2 inch iron pipe size. Drain lines shall terminate to spill
over the nearest floor or open sight drain.
3.2.3.3 Expansion Tank
Expansion tank shall be installed on suction side of pump as shown.
3.2.3.4 Piping, Valves, and Accessories
Piping shall be installed in accordance with Section 22 00 00 PLUMBING,

GENERAL PURPOSE, except where noted otherwise. Solders used on piping
shall be as shown. Piping shall be coded with fluid type and flow
direction labels in accordance with Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS.
Air vents shall be installed at the high points of the collector array
and in the equipment room.
SECTION 22 33 30.00 10 Page 13

3.2.3.5 Pipe Expansion
Expansion of supply and return pipes shall be provided for by changes in

the direction of the run of pipe or by expansion loops as indicated.
Expansion loops shall provide adequate expansion of the main straight runs
of the system within the stress limits specified in ASME B31.1. Loops
shall be cold-sprung and installed where indicated. Pipe guides shall be
provided as indicated. Expansion joints shall not be used in system piping.
3.2.3.6 Valves
Valves shall be installed at the locations indicated and where required for
the proper functioning of the system. Valves shall be installed with their
stems horizontal or above. Gate or ball valves shall be installed at the
inlet and outlet of each bank of internally manifolded collectors.
Calibrated balancing valves with integral pressure taps shall be installed
at the outlet of each bank and at the pump discharge. Final setting for
each valve shall be marked on each valve. Ball valves shall be installed
with a union immediately adjacent. Gate valves shall be installed at the
inlet and outlet of each pump and also at the inlet and outlet of each heat
exchanger. A check valve shall be installed at pump discharges.
Discharges of relief valves shall be piped to the nearest floor drain or as
indicated on system drawings.
3.2.3.7 Foundations
Concrete foundations or pads for storage tanks, heat exchangers, pumps, and
other equipment covered by this specification shall be constructed in
accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and be a minimum of 6 inches
high with chamfered edges.
3.2.3.8 Grooved Mechanical Joints
Grooves shall be prepared according to the coupling manufacturer's

instructions. Grooved fittings, couplings, and grooving tools shall be the
products of the same manufacturer. Pipe and groove dimensions shall comply
with the tolerances specified by the coupling manufacturer. The diameter
of grooves made in the field shall be measured using a "go/no-go" gauge,
vernier or dial caliper, narrow-land micrometer, or other method
specifically approved by the coupling manufacturer for the intended
application. Grooved width and dimension of groove from end of pipe shall
be measured and recorded for each change in grooving tool setup to verify
compliance with the coupling manufacturer's tolerances. Grooved joints
shall not be used in concealed locations.
3.2.4 Control Subsystem
3.2.4.1 Differential Temperature Controller
Automatic control equipment shall be installed at the location shown in

accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Control wiring and sensor
wiring shall be installed in conduit. Collector temperature sensor shall
be provided by differential temperature controller manufacturer and mounted
directly on the absorber plate by the manufacturer. Unless otherwise
indicated, operators, controllers, sensors, indicators, and like devices
when installed on equipment casings and pipe lines shall be provided with
stand-off mounting brackets, bases, nipples, adapters, or extended tubes to
provide clearance, not less than the thickness of the insulation, between
the surface and the device. These stand-off mounting items shall be
SECTION 22 33 30.00 10 Page 14

integral with the devices or standard accessories of the controls

manufacturer unless otherwise approved. Clamp-on devices or instruments
where direct contact with pipe surface is required shall be exempted from
the use of the above mounting items. All control wiring shall be color
coded and identified with permanent numeric or alphabetic codes.
3.2.4.2 Sequence of Operation
The differential temperature controller sensing temperature difference

between the fluid in a solar collector and water in the storage tank shall
start solar collector loop pumps when the temperature differential (Delta
T - ON) rises above 15 degrees F, and shall stop the pump when the
differential (Delta T - OFF) falls below 5 degrees F.
3.3 INSPECTION AND TESTING
3.3.1 Inspection
Make system available for inspection at all times.
3.3.2 Testing Prior to Concealment
3.3.2.1 Hydrostatic Test
Demonstrate to Contracting Officer that all piping has been hydrostatically

tested, at a pressure of 125 psi for a period of time sufficient for
inspection of every joint in the system and in no case less than 2 hours,
prior to installation of insulation. Expansion tank and relief valves
shall be isolated from test pressure. No loss of pressure shall be
allowed. Leaks found during tests shall be repaired by replacing pipe or
fittings and the system retested. Caulking of joints shall not be
permitted.
3.3.2.2 Cleaning of Piping
System piping shall be flushed with clean, fresh water prior to concealment
of any individual section and prior to final operating tests. Prior to
flushing piping, relief valves shall be isolated or removed. Solar
collectors shall be covered to prevent heating of cleaning fluid, unless
cleaning is performed during hours of darkness. The solution shall be
circulated through the section to be cleaned at the design flow rate for a
minimum of 2 hours.
3.3.3 Posting Framed Instructions
Framed instructions under glass or in laminated plastic shall be posted

where directed. These instructions shall include a system schematic, and
wiring and control diagrams showing the complete layout of the entire
system. Condensed operating instructions explaining preventative
maintenance procedures, balanced flow rates, methods of checking the system
for normal safe operation, and procedures for safely starting and stopping
the system shall be prepared in typed form, framed as specified above, and
posted beside the diagrams. Proposed diagrams, instructions, and other
sheets shall be submitted for approval prior to posting. The framed
instructions shall be posted before acceptance testing of the system.
3.3.4 Acceptance Testing and Final Inspection
Notify the Contracting Officer 7 calendar days before the performance and
SECTION 22 33 30.00 10 Page 15

acceptance tests are to be conducted. Tests shall be performed in the

presence of the Contracting Officer. Furnish all instruments and personnel
required for the tests. Electricity and water will be furnished by the
Government. A written record of the results of all acceptance tests shall
be maintained, to be submitted in booklet form. The tests shall be as
follows:
3.3.4.1 As-Built Drawings
Provide as a condition of final acceptance a complete set of as-built

system drawings. Drawings shall clearly indicate the actual condition of
the installed solar energy system at the time of the final test.
3.3.4.2 Final Hydrostatic Test
Demonstrate to Contracting Officer that all piping has been hydrostatically

tested at a pressure of 125 pounds per square inch for a period of time
sufficient for inspection of every joint in the system and in no case less
than 2 hours. Expansion tank and relief valves shall be isolated from test
pressure. Gauges used in the test shall have been calibrated within the
6-month period preceding the test. Test shall be witnessed by Contracting
Officer. No loss of pressure shall be allowed. Leaks found during tests
shall be repaired by replacing pipe or fittings and the system retested.
Caulking of joints shall not be permitted.
3.3.4.3 System Flushing
For the final inspection, the system shall be thoroughly flushed, in no

case for less than 2 hours,of all foreign matter until a white linen bag
installed in a strainer basket shows no evidence of contamination. The
white linen bag shall be in the strainer basket during the entire flushing
operation prior to its being presented to the Contracting Officer for
approval. The Contracting Officer will inspect the linen bag prior to
completion of flushing and approve the flushing operation. System shall be
drained prior to final filling.
3.3.4.4 System Filling
System shall be filled through indicated connections with distilled water.

Air shall be vented from the system after filling. System pressure at the
high point on the roof shall be 10 psig minimum.
3.3.4.5 Operational Test
Operational test shall occur over a period of 48 consecutive hours with

sufficient solar insolation to cause activation of the solar energy system
during daylight hours. With system fully charged so that pressure at the
high point on the roof or the lowest system pressure is a minimum of 10 psig
and with fluid and pump energized, flowmeter must indicate flow as
indicated. Calibrated balancing valves with pressure taps shall indicate
bank flow rate as shown.
3.3.4.6 Control Logic
By substituting variable resistors for collector and storage tank

temperature sensors, demonstrate the differential temperature controller
correctly energizes the system pump when the collector sensor indicates a
temperature of 15 degrees F greater than the storage tank temperature, as
indicated on the controller display panel. The differential temperature
SECTION 22 33 30.00 10 Page 16

controller shall de-energize the system pump when the displayed temperature
of the solar collectors is 5 degrees F greater than the displayed
temperature of the storage tank.
3.3.4.7 Temperature Sensor Diagnostics
Demonstrate that the controller will correctly identify open and short
circuits on both the solar collector temperature sensor circuit and the
storage tank sensor circuit.
3.3.4.8 Overall System Operations
Demonstrate that the solar energy system will operate properly while
unattended for a period of at least 72 hours and that the controller will
start pump after being warmed by the sun, and that it will properly shut
down during cloudy weather or in the evening over a minimum of three
complete cycles. Contractor is permitted to manipulate the temperature of
the storage tank by the introduction of cold water at local groundwater
temperature.
3.4 FIELD TRAINING
Provide a field training course for designated operating and maintenance

staff members. Training shall be provided for a minimum period of __8___
hours of normal working time and shall start after the system is
functionally complete but prior to final acceptance tests. The training
shall include discussion of the system design and layout and demonstrations
of routine operation and maintenance procedures. This training shall
include: normal system operation and control; flow balancing; detection of
a nonfunctioning system due to sensor, controller, and/or mechanical
failure; filling, draining, and venting of the collector array; replacement
of sensors, collectors, and collector components; collector cleaning and
inspection for leaks; and heat exchanger cleaning and expansion tank
charging if applicable.
SECTION 22 33 30.00 10 Page 17

SECTION 23 00 00
AIR SUPPLY, DISTRIBUTION, VENTILATION, AND EXHAUST SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

AMCA 201 (2002) Fans and Systems
AMCA 210 (2007) Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans

for Aerodynamic Performance Rating
AMCA 300 (2005) Reverberant Room Method for Sound

Testing of Fans
AMCA 301 (2006; INT 2007; Errata 2008) Methods for

Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from
Laboratory Test Data

Dampers for Rating
AHRI 260 (2001; Addendum 2002) Sound Rating of

Ducted Air Moving and Conditioning
Equipment
AHRI 410 (2001; Addendum 2002) Standard for

Forced-Circulation Air-Cooling and
Air-Heating Coils
AHRI 430 (1999) Standard for Central-Station

Air-Handling Units
AHRI 880 (2008) Standard for Air Terminals
AHRI 885 (2008) Procedure for Estimating Occupied

Space Sound Levels in the Application of
Air Terminals and Air Outlets
AHRI Guideline D (1996) Application and Installation of

Central Station Air-Handling Units
AMERICAN BEARING MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (ABMA)
ABMA 11 (1990; R 1999) Load Ratings and Fatigue

Life for Roller Bearings
ABMA 9 (1990; R 2000) Load Ratings and Fatigue

Life for Ball Bearings

ENGINEERS (ASHRAE)
ASHRAE 52.2 (2007; Addenda B 2008; Errata 2009) Method

of Testing General Ventilation
Air-Cleaning Devices for Removal
Efficiency by Particle Size
ASHRAE 62.1 (2007; INT 2007; INT 2-15 2008; Errata

2008; Addenda a, b, e, f and h 2008)
Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air
Quality
ASHRAE 68 (1997) Laboratory Method of Testing to

Determine the Sound Power In a Duct
ASHRAE 70 (2006) Method of Testing for Rating the

Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets
ASHRAE 84 (2008) Method of Testing Air-to-Air Heat

Exchangers

Edition

Piping Systems

Steel Products

Strip

Welded and Seamless



Copper Tube for Air Conditioning and
Refrigeration Field Service

Electrodeposited Coatings of Cadmium
ASTM C 1071 (2005e1) Standard Specification for

Fibrous Glass Duct Lining Insulation
(Thermal and Sound Absorbing Material)
ASTM C 553 (2008) Standard Specification for Mineral

Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for
Commercial and Industrial Applications

Environments
ASTM D 3359 (2008) Measuring Adhesion by Tape Test
ASTM D 520 (2000; R 2005) Zinc Dust Pigment
ASTM E 2016 (2006) Standard Specification for

Industrial Woven Wire Cloth

and Generators
NEMA MG 10 (2001; R 2007) Energy Management Guide for

Selection and Use of Fixed Frequency
Medium AC Squirrel-Cage Polyphase
Induction Motors

Selection and Use of Single Phase Motors
NFPA 90A (2008) Standard for the Installation of

Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems

(SMACNA)
SMACNA 1143 (1985) HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual
SMACNA 1650 (20080) Seismic Restraint Manual

Guidelines for Mechanical Systems - Second
Edition
SMACNA 1819 (2002, 5th Ed) Fire, Smoke and Radiation

Damper Installation Guide for HVAC Systems
SMACNA 1966 (2005) HVAC Duct Construction Standards

Metal and Flexible
UL 181 (2005; Rev thru Oct 2008) Standard for

Factory-Made Air Ducts and Air Connectors
UL 214 (1997; Rev thru Aug 2001) Tests for

Flame-Propagation of Fabrics and Films
UL 555 (2006; Rev thru Feb 2009) Standard for

Fire Dampers
UL 586 (1996; Rev thru Aug 2008) Standard for

High-Efficiency Particulate, Air Filter
Units
UL 6 (2007) Standard for Electrical Rigid Metal

Conduit-Steel
UL 705 (2004; Rev thru Mar 2009) Standard for

Power Ventilators
UL 900 (2004; Rev thru Nov 2007) Standard for Air

Filter Units
UL Electrical Constructn (2008) Electrical Construction Equipment

Directory
Furnish ductwork, piping offsets, fittings, and accessories as required to

provide a complete installation. Coordinate the work of the different
trades to avoid interference between piping, equipment, structural, and
electrical work. Provide complete, in place, all necessary offsets in
piping and ductwork, and all fittings, and other components, required to
install the work as indicated and specified.
1.2.1 Mechanical Equipment Identification
Provide chart listing of equipment by designation numbers and capacities

such as flow rates, pressure and temperature differences, heating and
cooling capacities, horsepower, pipe sizes, and voltage and current
characteristics. Diagrams shall be neat mechanical drawings provided with
extruded aluminum frames and 1/8-inch acrylic plastic protection. Location
is as directed by the Contracting Officer. The number of charts and
diagrams shall be equal to or greater than the number of mechanical
equipment rooms. Where more than one chart per space is required, mount
these in edge pivoted, swinging leaf, extruded aluminum frame holders which
open to 170 degrees.
1.2.2 Service Labeling
Label equipment, including fans, air handlers, terminal units, etc. with
labels made of self-sticking, plastic film designed for permanent
installation. Labels shall be in accordance with the typical examples
below:
SERVICE LABEL AND TAG DESIGNATION
Air handling unit Number AHU - __1___
Control and instrument air CONTROL AND INSTR.
Exhaust Fan Number EF - 1
VAV Box Number VAV - 1
Identify similar services with different temperatures or pressures. Where

pressures could exceed 125 pounds per square inch, gage, include the
maximum system pressure in the label. Label and arrow piping in accordance
with the following:
a. Each point of entry and exit of pipe passing through walls.
b. Each change in direction, i.e., elbows, tees.
c. In congested or hidden areas and at all access panels at each point

required to clarify service or indicated hazard.
d. In long straight runs, locate labels at distances within eyesight

of each other not to exceed 75 feet. All labels shall be visible and
legible from the primary service and operating area.
For Bare or Insulated Pipes

for Outside Diameters of Lettering
1/2 thru 1-3/8 inch 1/2 inch

1-1/2 thru 2-3/8 inch 3/4 inch
2-1/2 inch and larger 1-1/4 inch
1.2.3 Color Coding
Color coding of all piping systems shall be in accordance with ASME A13.1 .
1.3 SUBMITTALS

SD-02 Shop Drawings
Detail Drawings
Drawings as specified in Paragraph Detail Drawings and
throughout this Section.
SD-03 Product Data
Standard Products
Manufacturer's catalog data included with the detail drawings

for the following items. Highlight the data to show model, size,
options, etc., that are intended for consideration. Provide
adequate data to demonstrate compliance with contract requirements
for the following:
Metallic Flexible Duct

Insulated Nonmetallic Flexible Duct Runouts
Duct Connectors
Duct Access Doors
Fire Dampers
Manual Balancing Dampers
Sound Attenuation Equipment

Acoustical Duct Liner
Diffusers
Registers and Grilles
Louvers
Air Vents,
Centrifugal Fans
In-Line Centrifugal Fans
Centrifugal Type Power Roof Ventilators
Air Handling Units
Variable Volume, Single Duct Terminal Units
Unit Ventilators
Energy Recovery Devices
Diagrams
Proposed diagrams, at least 2 weeks prior to start of related

testing. Frame under glass or laminated plastic, system diagrams
that show the layout of equipment, piping, and ductwork, and typed
condensed operation manuals explaining preventative maintenance
procedures, methods of checking the system for normal, safe
operation, and procedures for safely starting and stopping the
system. After approval, post these items where directed.
Operation and Maintenance Training
Proposed On-site Training schedule, submitted concurrently with

the Operation and Maintenance Manuals.
SD-06 Test Reports
Performance Tests
Test reports for the ductwork leak test, and performance tests
in booklet form, upon completion of testing. Document phases of
tests performed including initial test summary,
repairs/adjustments made, and final test results in the reports.
Damper Acceptance Test
Proposed schedule, at least 2 weeks prior to the start of test.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions

Operation and Maintenance Training
Operation and Maintenance Manuals
Six manuals at least 2 weeks prior to field training. Submit

data complying with the requirements specified in Section 01 78 23
0PERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA. Submit Data Package 3 for the
following:
Fire Dampers
Manual Balancing Dampers
Automatic Smoke Dampers
Centrifugal Fans
Centrifugal Type Power Wall Ventilators
Centrifugal Type Power Roof Ventilators
Air Handling Units
Room Fan-Coil Units
Variable Volume, Single Duct Terminal Units
Unit Ventilators
Energy Recovery Devices
Except as otherwise specified, approval of materials and equipment is based

on manufacturer's published data.
a. Where materials and equipment are specified to conform to the

standards of the Underwriters Laboratories, the label of or listing
with reexamination in UL Bld Mat Dir, and UL 6 is acceptable as
sufficient evidence that the items conform to Underwriters Laboratories
requirements. In lieu of such label or listing, submit a written
certificate from any nationally recognized testing agency, adequately
equipped and competent to perform such services, stating that the items
have been tested and that the units conform to the specified
requirements. Outline methods of testing used by the specified
agencies.
b. Where materials or equipment are specified to be constructed or

tested, or both, in accordance with the standards of the ASTM
International (ASTM), the ASME International (ASME), or other
standards, a manufacturer's certificate of compliance of each item is
acceptable as proof of compliance.
c. Conformance to such agency requirements does not relieve the item

from compliance with other requirements of these specifications.
1.4.1 Prevention of Corrosion
Protect metallic materials against corrosion. Manufacturer shall provide
rust-inhibiting treatment and standard finish for the equipment

enclosures. Do not use aluminum in contact with earth, and where connected
to dissimilar metal. Protect aluminum by approved fittings, barrier
material, or treatment. Ferrous parts such as anchors, bolts, braces,
boxes, bodies, clamps, fittings, guards, nuts, pins, rods, shims, thimbles,
washers, and miscellaneous parts not of corrosion-resistant steel or
nonferrous materials shall be hot-dip galvanized in accordance with
ASTM A 123/A 123M for exterior locations and cadmium-plated in conformance
with ASTM B 766 for interior locations.
1.4.2 Asbestos Prohibition
Do not use asbestos and asbestos-containing products.
1.4.3 Ozone Depleting Substances Used as Refrigerants
Minimize releases of Ozone Depleting Substances (ODS) during repair,

maintenance, servicing or disposal of appliances containing ODS's by
complying with all applicable sections of 40 CFR 82 Part 82 Subpart F. Any
person conducting repair, maintenance, servicing or disposal of appliances
owned by NASA shall comply with the following:
a. Do not knowingly vent or otherwise release into the environment,

Class I or Class II substances used as a refrigerant.
b. Do not open appliances without meeting the requirements of 40 CFR 82

Part 82.156 Subpart F, regarding required practices for evacuation and
collection of refrigerant, and 40 CFR 82 Part 82.158 Subpart F,
regarding standards of recycling and recovery equipment.
c. Only persons who comply with 40 CFR 82 Part 82.161 Subpart F,

regarding technician certification, can conduct work on appliances
containing refrigerant.
In addition, provide copies of all applicable certifications to the

Contracting Officer at least 14 calendar days prior to initiating
maintenance, repair, servicing, dismantling or disposal of appliances,
including:
a. Proof of Technician Certification
b. Proof of Equipment Certification for recovery or recycling

equipment.
c. Proof of availability of certified recovery or recycling equipment.
1.4.4 Use of Ozone Depleting Substances, Other than Refigerants
The use of Class I or Class II ODS's listed as nonessential in 40 CFR 82

Part 82.66 Subpart C is prohibited. These prohibited materials and uses
include:
a. Any plastic party spray streamer or noise horn which is propelled

by a chlorofluorocarbon
b. Any cleaning fluid for electronic and photographic equipment which

contains a chlorofluorocarbon; including liquid packaging, solvent
wipes, solvent sprays, and gas sprays
c. Any plastic flexible or packaging foam product which is

manufactured with or contains a chlorofluorocarbon, including, open
cell foam, open cell rigid polyurethane poured foam, closed cell
extruded polystyrene sheet foam, closed cell polyethylene foam and
closed cell polypropylene foam except for flexible or packaging foam
used in coaxial
d. Any aerosol product or other pressurized dispenser which contains a

chlorofluorocarbon, except for those listed in 40 CFR 82 Part 82.66
Subpart C.
Request a waiver if a facility requirement dictates that a prohibited

material is necessary to achieve project goals. Submit the waiver request
in writing to the Contracting Officer. The waiver will be evaluated and
dispositioned.
Submit detail drawings showing equipment layout, including assembly and

installation details and electrical connection diagrams; ductwork layout
showing the location of all supports and hangers, typical hanger details,
gauge reinforcement, reinforcement spacing rigidity classification, and
static pressure and seal classifications. Include any information required
to demonstrate that the system has been coordinated and functions properly
as a unit on the drawings and show equipment relationship to other parts of
the work, including clearances required for operation and maintenance.
Submit drawings showing bolt-setting information, and foundation bolts
prior to concrete foundation construction for all equipment indicated or
required to have concrete foundations. Submit function designation of the
equipment and any other requirements specifed throughout this Section with
the shop drawings
Protect stored equipment at the jobsite from the weather, humidity and
temperature variations, dirt and dust, or other contaminants.
Additionally, cap or plug all pipes until installed.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Provide components and equipment that are "standard products" of a

manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacturing of products that are of
a similar material, design and workmanship. "Standard products" is defined
as being in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2 years before
bid opening, including applications of components and equipment under
similar circumstances and of similar size, satisfactorily completed by a
product that is sold on the commercial market through advertisements,
manufacturers' catalogs, or brochures. Products having less than a 2-year
field service record are acceptable if a certified record of satisfactory
field operation, for not less than 6000 hours exclusive of the
manufacturer's factory tests, can be shown. Provide equipment items that
are supported by a service organization. Where applicable, provide
equipment that is an ENERGY STAR Qualified product or a Federal Energy
Management Program (FEMP) designated product.
2.2 IDENTIFICATION PLATES
In addition to standard manufacturer's identification plates, provide

engraved laminated phenolic identification plates for each piece of
mechanical equipment. Identification plates are to designate the function
of the equipment. Submit designation with the shop drawings.
Identification plates shall be three layers, black-white-black, engraved to
show white letters on black background. Letters shall be upper case.
Identification plates 1-1/2-inches high and smaller shall be 1/16-inch
thick, with engraved lettering 1/8-inch high; identification plates larger
than 1-1/2-inches high shall be 1/8-inch thick, with engraved lettering of
suitable height. Identification plates 1-1/2-inches high and larger shall
have beveled edges. Install identification plates using a compatible
adhesive.
2.3 EQUIPMENT GUARDS AND ACCESS
Fully enclose or guard belts, pulleys, chains, gears, couplings, projecting

setscrews, keys, and other rotating parts exposed to personnel contact
according to OSHA requirements. Properly guard or cover with insulation of
a type specified, high temperature equipment and piping exposed to contact
by personnel or where it creates a potential fire hazard. The requirements
for catwalks, operating platforms, ladders, and guardrails are specified in
Section 05 50 13 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FABRICATIONS.
2.4 ELECTRICAL WORK
a. Provide motors, controllers, integral disconnects, contactors, and

controls with their respective pieces of equipment, except controllers
indicated as part of motor control centers. Provide electrical
equipment, including motors and wiring, as specified in Section 26 20 00
INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Provide manual or automatic control and
protective or signal devices required for the operation specified and
control wiring required for controls and devices specified, but not
shown. For packaged equipment, include manufacturer provided
controllers with the required monitors and timed restart.
b. For single-phase motors, provide high-efficiency type,

fractional-horsepower alternating-current motors, including motors that
are part of a system, in accordance with NEMA MG 11. Integral size
motors shall be the premium efficiency type in accordance with NEMA MG 1.
c. For polyphase motors, provide squirrel-cage medium induction

motors, including motors that are part of a system , and that meet the
efficiency ratings for premium efficiency motors in accordance with
NEMA MG 1. Select premium efficiency polyphase motors in accordance
with NEMA MG 10.
d. Provide motors in accordance with NEMA MG 1 and of sufficient size

to drive the load at the specified capacity without exceeding the
nameplate rating of the motor. Provide motors rated for continuous
duty with the enclosure specified. Provide motor duty that allows for
maximum frequency start-stop operation and minimum encountered interval
between start and stop. Provide motor torque capable of accelerating
the connected load within 20 seconds with 80 percent of the rated
voltage maintained at motor terminals during one starting period.
Provide motor starters complete with thermal overload protection and
other necessary appurtenances. Fit motor bearings with grease supply
fittings and grease relief to outside of the enclosure.
e. Where two-speed or variable-speed motors are indicated, solid-state

variable-speed controllers are allowed to accomplish the same
function. Use solid-state variable-speed controllers for motors rated
10 hp or less and adjustable frequency drives for larger motors.
Provide variable frequency drives for motors as specified in Section
26 29 23 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE SYSTEMS UNDER 600 VOLTS.
2.5 ANCHOR BOLTS
Provide anchor bolts for equipment placed on concrete equipment pads or on

concrete slabs. Bolts to be of the size and number recommended by the
equipment manufacturer and located by means of suitable templates.
Installation of anchor bolts shall not degrade the surrounding concrete.
2.6 SEISMIC ANCHORAGE
Anchor equipment in accordance with applicable seismic criteria for the

area and as defined in SMACNA 1650
2.7 PAINTING
Paint equipment units in accordance with approved equipment manufacturer's

standards unless specified otherwise. Field retouch only if approved.
Otherwise, return equipment to the factory for refinishing.
2.8 INDOOR AIR QUALITY
Provide equipment and components that comply with the requirements of

ASHRAE 62.1 unless more stringent requirements are specified herein.
2.9 DUCT SYSTEMS
2.9.1 Metal Ductwork
Provide metal ductwork construction, including all fittings and components,

that complies with SMACNA 1966 unless otherwise specified. Provide radius
type elbows with a centerline radius of 1.5 times the width or diameter of
the duct where space permits. Otherwise, elbows having a minimum radius
equal to the width or diameter of the duct or square elbows with factory
fabricated turning vanes are allowed. Provide ductwork that meets the
requirements of Seal Class A. Provide ductwork in VAV systems upstream of
the VAV boxes that meets the requirements of Seal Class A. Provide
sealants that conform to fire hazard classification specified in Section
23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS and are suitable for the
range of air distribution and ambient temperatures to which it is exposed.
Do not use pressure sensitive tape as a sealant. Make spiral lock seam
duct, and flat oval with duct sealant and lock with not less than 3 equally
spaced drive screws or other approved methods indicated in SMACNA 1966.
Apply the sealant to the exposed male part of the fitting collar so that
the sealer is on the inside of the joint and fully protected by the metal
of the duct fitting. Apply one brush coat of the sealant over the outside
of the joint to at least 2 inch band width covering all screw heads and
joint gap. Dents in the male portion of the slip fitting collar are not
acceptable. Fabricate outdoor air intake ducts and plenums with watertight
soldered or brazed joints and seams.
2.9.1.1 Metallic Flexible Duct
a. Provide duct that conforms to UL 181 and NFPA 90A with

factory-applied insulation, vapor barrier, and end connections.
Provide duct assembly that does not exceed 25 for flame spread and 50
for smoke developed. Proved ducts designed for working pressures of
two inches water gauge positive and 1.5 inches water gauge nagative.
Provide flexible round duct length that does not exceed five feet.
Secure connections by applying adhesive for two inches over rigid duct,
apply flexible duct two inches over rigid duct, apply metal clamp, and
provide minimum of three No. 8 sheet metal screws through clamp and
rigid duct.
b. Inner duct core: Provide interlocking spiral or helically

corrugated flexible core constructed of zinc-coated steel, aluminum, or
stainless steel; or constructed of inner liner of continuous galvanized
spring steel wire helix fused to continuous, fire-retardant, flexible
vapor barrier film, inner duct core.
c. Insulation: Provide inner duct core that is insulated with mineral

fiber blanket type flexible insulation, minimum of one inch thick.
Provide insulation covered on exterior with manufacturer's standard
fire retardant vapor barrier jacket for flexible round duct.
2.9.1.2 Insulated Nonmetallic Flexible Duct Runouts
Use flexible duct runouts only where indicated. Runout length is indicated
on the drawings, and is not to exceed 5 feet. Provide runouts that are
preinsulated, factory fabricated, and that comply with NFPA 90A and UL 181.
Provide either field or factory applied vapor barrier. Provide not less
than 20 ounce glass fabric duct connectors coated on both sides with
neoprene. Where coil induction or high velocity units are supplied with
vertical air inlets, use a streamlined, vaned and mitered elbow transition
piece for connection to the flexible duct or hose. Provide a die-stamped
elbow and not a flexible connector as the last elbow to these units other
than the vertical air inlet type.. Insulated flexible connectors are
allowed as runouts. Provide insulated material and vapor barrier that
conform to the requirements of Section 23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION FOR
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS. Do not expose the insulation material surface to the
air stream.
2.9.1.3 General Service Duct Connectors
Provide a flexible duct connector approximately 6 inches in width where

sheet metal connections are made to fans or where ducts of dissimilar
metals are connected. For round/oval ducts, secure the flexible material
by stainless steel or zinc-coated, iron clinch-type draw bands. For
rectangular ducts, install the flexible material locked to metal collars
using normal duct construction methods. Provide a composite connector
system that complies with UL 214 and is classified as "flame-retarded
fabrics" in UL Bld Mat Dir.
2.9.2 Ductwork Accessories
2.9.2.1 Duct Access Doors
Provide hinged access doors conforming to SMACNA 1966 in ductwork and

plenums where indicated and at all air flow measuring primaries, automatic
dampers, fire dampers, coils, thermostats, and other apparatus requiring
service and inspection in the duct system. Provide access doors upstream
and downstream of air flow measuring primaries and heating and cooling
coils. Provide doors that are a minimum 15 x 18 inches, unless otherwise
shown. Where duct size does not accommodate this size door, make the doors
as large as practicable. Equip doors 24 x 24 inches or larger with
fasteners operable from inside and outside the duct. Use insulated type
doors in insulated ducts.
2.9.2.2 Fire Dampers
Use 1.5 hour rated fire dampers unless otherwise indicated. Provide fire
dampers that conform to the requirements of NFPA 90A and UL 555. Perform
the fire damper test as outlined in NFPA 90A. Provide a pressure relief
door upstream of the fire damper. If the ductwork connected to the fire
damper is to be insulated then provide a factory installed pressure relief
damper. Provide automatic operating fire dampers with a dynamic rating
suitable for the maximum air velocity and pressure differential to which it
is subjected. Provide fire dampers approved for the specific application,
and install according to their listing. Equip fire dampers with a steel
sleeve or adequately sized frame installed in such a manner that disruption
of the attached ductwork, if any, does not impair the operation of the
damper. Equip sleeves or frames with perimeter mounting angles attached on
both sides of the wall or floor opening. Construct ductwork in fire-rated
floor-ceiling or roof-ceiling assembly systems with air ducts that pierce
the ceiling of the assemblies in conformance with UL Fire Resistance.
Provide curtain type with damper blades out of the air stream. Install
dampers that do not reduce the duct or the air transfer opening
cross-sectional area. Install dampers so that the centerline of the damper
depth or thickness is located in the centerline of the wall, partition or
floor slab depth or thickness. Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the
installation details given in SMACNA 1819 and in manufacturer's
instructions for fire dampers. Perform acceptance testing of fire dampers
according to paragraph Fire Damper Acceptance Test and NFPA 90A.
2.9.2.3 Manual Balancing Dampers
Furnish manual balancing dampers with accessible operating mechanisms. Use

chromium plated operators (with all exposed edges rounded) in finished
portions of the building. Provide manual volume control dampers that are
operated by locking-type quadrant operators. Install dampers that are 2
gauges heavier than the duct in which installed. Unless otherwise
indicated, provide opposed blade type multileaf dampers with maximum blade
width of 12 inches. Provide access doors or panels for all concealed
damper operators and locking setscrews. Provide stand-off mounting
brackets, bases, or adapters not less than the thickness of the insulation
when the locking-type quadrant operators for dampers are installed on ducts
to be thermally insulated, to provide clearance between the duct surface
and the operator. Stand-off mounting items shall be integral with the
operator or standard accessory of the damper manufacturer.
2.9.2.4 Air Deflectors and Branch Connections
Provide air deflectors at all duct mounted supply outlets, at takeoff or

extension collars to supply outlets, at duct branch takeoff connections,
and at 90 degree elbows, as well as at locations as indicated on the
drawings or otherwise specified. Conical branch connections or 45 degree
entry connections are allowed in lieu of deflectors for branch
connections. Furnish all air deflectors, except those installed in 90
degree elbows, with an approved means of adjustment. Provide easily
accessible means for adjustment inside the duct or from an adjustment with
sturdy lock on the face of the duct. When installed on ducts to be
thermally insulated, provide external adjustments with stand-off mounting
brackets, integral with the adjustment device, to provide clearance between
the duct surface and the adjustment device not less than the thickness of
the thermal insulation. Provide factory-fabricated air deflectors
consisting of curved turning vanes or louver blades designed to provide
uniform air distribution and change of direction with minimum turbulence or
pressure loss. Provide factory or field assembled air deflectors. Make
adjustment from the face of the diffuser or by position adjustment and lock
external to the duct. Provide stand-off brackets on insulated ducts as
described herein. Provide fixed air deflectors, also called turning vanes,
in 90 degree elbows.
2.9.3 Dampers
Where outdoor air supply and exhaust air dampers are required they shall
have a maximum leakage rate when tested in accordance with AMCA 500-D as
required by ASHRAE 90.1 - IP, including: Maximum Damper Leakage for: 1)
Climate Zones 1,2,6,7,8 the maximum damper leakage at 1.0 inch w.g. for
motorized dampers is 4 cfm per sq ft of damper area and non-motorized
dampers are not allowed. 2) All other Climate Zones the maximum damper
leakage at 1.0 inch w.g. is 10 cfm per sq ft and for non-motorized dampers
is 20 cfm per sq ft of damper area.
Dampers smaller than 24 inches in either direction may have leakage of 40
cfm per sq ft.
2.9.4 Plenums and Casings for Field-Fabricated Units
2.9.4.1 Plenum and Casings
Fabricate and erect plenums and casings as shown in SMACNA 1966, as

applicable. Construct system casing of not less than 16 gauge galvanized
sheet steel. Furnish cooling coil drain pans with 1 inch threaded outlet
to collect condensation from the cooling coils. Fabricate drain pans from
not lighter than 16 gauge steel, galvanized after fabrication or of 18 gauge
corrosion-resisting sheet steel conforming to ASTM A 167, Type 304, welded
and stiffened. Thermally insulate drain pans exposed to the atmosphere to
prevent condensation. Coat insulation with a flame resistant waterproofing
material. Provide separate drain pans for each vertical coil section, and
a separate drain line for each pan. Size pans to ensure capture of
entrained moisture on the downstream-air side of the coil. Seal openings
in the casing, such as for piping connections, to prevent air leakage.
Size the water seal for the drain to maintain a pressure of at least 2 inch
water gauge greater than the maximum negative pressure in the coil space.
2.9.4.2 Casing
Terminate casings at the curb line and bolt each to the curb using
galvanized angle, as indicated in SMACNA 1966.
2.9.4.3 Access Doors
Provide access doors in each section of the casing. Weld doorframes in

place, gasket each door with neoprene, hinge with minimum of two brass
hinges, and fasten with a minimum of two brass tension fasteners operable
from inside and outside of the casing. Where possible, make doors 36 x 18
inches and locate them 18 inches above the floor. Where the space
available does not accommodate doors of this size, use doors as large as
the space accommodates. Swing doors so that fan suction or pressure holds
doors in closed position, airtight. Provide a push-button station, located
inside the casing, to stop the supply.
2.9.4.4 Factory-Fabricated Insulated Sheet Metal Panels
Factory-fabricated components are allowed for field-assembled units,

provided all requirements specified for field-fabricated plenums and
casings are met. Provide panels of modular design, pretested for
structural strength, thermal control, condensation control, and acoustical
control. Seal and insulate panel joints. Provide and gasket access doors
to prevent air leakage. Provide panel construction that is not less than
20 gauge galvanized sheet steel, assembled with fasteners treated against
corrosion. Provide standard length panels that deflect not more than 1/2
inch under operation. Construct details, including joint sealing, not
specifically covered, as indicated in SMACNA 1966. Construct the plenums
and casings to withstand the specified internal pressure of the air systems.
2.9.4.5 Duct Liner
Unless otherwise specified, duct liner is not permitted.
2.9.5 Sound Attenuation Equipment
a. For systems with total pressure above 4 Inches Water Gauge:

Provide sound attenuators on the discharge duct of each fan operating
at a total pressure above 4 inch water gauge, and, when indicated, at
the intake of each fan system. Provide sound attenuators elsewhere as
indicated. Provide factory fabricated sound attenuators, tested by an
independent laboratory for sound and performance characteristics.
Provide a net sound reduction as indicated. Maximum permissible
pressure drop is not to exceed 0.63 inch water gauge. Construct traps
to be airtight when operating under an internal static pressure of 10
inch water gauge. Provide air-side surface capable of withstanding air
velocity of 10,000 fpm. Certify that the equipment can obtain the
sound reduction values specified after the equipment is installed in
the system and coordinated with the sound information of the system fan
to be provided. Provide sound absorbing material conforming to
ASTM C 1071, Type I or II. Provide sound absorbing material that meets
the fire hazard rating requirements for insulation specified in Section
23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS. For connection to
ductwork, provide a duct transition section. Factory fabricated
double-walled internally insulated spiral lock seam and round duct and
fittings designed for high pressure air system can be provided if
complying with requirements specified for factory fabricated sound
attenuators, in lieu of factory fabricated sound attenuators.
Construct the double-walled duct and fittings from an outer metal
pressure shell of zinc-coated steel sheet, 1 inch thick acoustical
blanket insulation, and an internal perforated zinc-coated metal
liner. Provide a sufficient length of run to obtain the noise
reduction coefficient specified. Certify that the sound reduction
value specified can be obtained within the length of duct run
provided. Provide welded or spiral lock seams on the outer sheet metal
of the double-walled duct to prevent water vapor penetration. Provide
duct and fittings with an outer sheet that conforms to the metal
thickness of high-pressure spiral and round ducts and fittings shown in
SMACNA 1966. Provide acoustical insulation with a thermal conductivity
"k" of not more than 0.27 Btu/inch/square foot/hour/degree F at 75
degrees F mean temperature. Provide an internal perforated zinc-coated
metal liner that is not less than 24 gauge with perforations not larger
than 1/4 inch in diameter providing a net open area not less than 10
percent of the surface.
b. For system with total pressure of 4 Inch Water Gauge and Lower:
Use sound attenuators only where indicated. Provide factory fabricated
sound attenuators that are constructed of galvanized steel sheets.
Provide attenuator with outer casing that is not less than 22 gauge.
Provide fibrous glass acoustical fill. Provide net sound reduction
indicated. Obtain values on a test unit not less than 24 by 24 inches
outside dimensions made by a certified nationally recognized
independent acoustical laboratory. Provide air flow capacity as
indicated or required. Provide pressure drop through the attenuator
that does not exceed the value indicated, or that is not in excess of
15 percent of the total external static pressure of the air handling
system, whichever is less. Acoustically test attenuators with metal
duct inlet and outlet sections while under the rated air flow
conditions. Include with the noise reduction data the effects of
flanking paths and vibration transmission. Construct sound attenuators
to be airtight when operating at the internal static pressure indicated
or specified for the duct system, but in no case less than 2 inch water
gauge.
c. For acoustical duct liner: Use fibrous glass designed exclusively

for lining ductwork and conforming to the requirements of ASTM C 1071,
Type I and II. Provide uniform density, graduated density, or dual
density liner composition, as standard with the manufacturer. Provide
not less than 1 inch thick coated lining. Where acoustical duct liner
is used, provide the thermal equivalent of the insulation specified in
Section 23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS for liner or
combination of liner and insulation applied to the exterior of the
ductwork. Increase duct sizes shown to compensate for the thickness of
the lining used.
2.9.6 Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles
Provide factory-fabricated units of steelor aluminum that distribute the

specified quantity of air evenly over space intended without causing
noticeable drafts, air movement faster than 50 fpm in occupied zone, or
dead spots anywhere in the conditioned area. Provide outlets for
diffusion, spread, throw, and noise level as required for specified
performance. Certify performance according to ASHRAE 70. Provide sound
rated and certified inlets and outlets according to ASHRAE 70. Provide
sound power level as indicated. Provide diffusers and registers with
volume damper with accessible operator, unless otherwise indicated; or if
standard with the manufacturer, an automatically controlled device is
acceptable. Provide opposed blade type volume dampers for all diffusers
and registers, except linear slot diffusers. Provide linear slot diffusers
with round or elliptical balancing dampers. Where the inlet and outlet
openings are located less than 7 feet above the floor, protect them by a
grille or screen according to NFPA 90A.
2.9.6.1 Diffusers
Provide diffuser types indicated. Furnish ceiling mounted units with

anti-smudge devices, unless the diffuser unit minimizes ceiling smudging
through design features. Provide diffusers with air deflectors of the type
indicated. Provide air handling troffers or combination light and ceiling
diffusers conforming to the requirements of UL Electrical Constructn for
the interchangeable use as cooled or heated air supply diffusers or return

air units. Install ceiling mounted units with rims tight against ceiling.
Provide sponge rubber gaskets between ceiling and surface mounted diffusers
for air leakage control. Provide suitable trim for flush mounted
diffusers. For connecting the duct to diffuser, provide duct collar that
is airtight and does not interfere with volume controller. Provide return
or exhaust units that are similar to supply diffusers.
2.9.6.2 Registers and Grilles
Provide units that are four-way directional-control type, except provide

return and exhaust registers that are fixed horizontal or vertical louver
type similar in appearance to the supply register face. Furnish registers
with sponge-rubber gasket between flanges and wall or ceiling. Install
wall supply registers at least 6 inches below the ceiling unless otherwise
indicated. Locate return and exhaust registers 6 inches above the floor
unless otherwise indicated. Achieve four-way directional control by a
grille face which can be rotated in 4 positions or by adjustment of
horizontal and vertical vanes. Provide grilles as specified for registers,
without volume control damper.
2.9.7 Louvers
Provide louvers for installation in exterior walls that are associated with
the air supply and distribution system as specified in Section 08 91 00
METAL LOUVERS.
2.9.8 Air Vents, Penthouses, and Goosenecks
Fabricate air vents, penthouses, and goosenecks from galvanized steel or

aluminum sheets with galvanized or aluminum structural shapes. Provide
sheet metal thickness, reinforcement, and fabrication that conform to
SMACNA 1966. Accurately fit and secure louver blades to frames. Fold or
bead edges of louver blades for rigidity and baffle these edges to exclude
driving rain. Provide air vents, penthouses, and goosenecks with bird
screen.
2.9.9 Bird Screens and Frames
Provide bird screens that conform to ASTM E 2016, No. 2 mesh, aluminum or
stainless steel. Provide "medium-light" rated aluminum screens. Provide
"light" rated stainless steel screens. Provide removable type frames
fabricated from either stainless steel or extruded aluminum.
2.10 AIR SYSTEMS EQUIPMENT
2.10.1 Fans
Test and rate fans according to AMCA 210. Calculate system effect on air
moving devices in accordance with AMCA 201 where installed ductwork differs
from that indicated on drawings. Install air moving devices to minimize
fan system effect. Where system effect is unavoidable, determine the most
effective way to accommodate the inefficiencies caused by system effect on
the installed air moving device. The sound power level of the fans shall
not exceed 85 dBA when tested according to AMCA 300 and rated in accordance
with AMCA 301. Provide all fans with an AMCA seal. Connect fans to the
motors either directly or indirectly with V-belt drive. Use V-belt drives
designed for not less than 150 percent of the connected driving capacity.
Provide variable pitch motor sheaves for 15 hp and below, and fixed pitch
as defined by AHRI Guideline D. Select variable pitch sheaves to drive the

fan at a speed which can produce the specified capacity when set at the
approximate midpoint of the sheave adjustment. When fixed pitch sheaves
are furnished, provide a replaceable sheave when needed to achieve system
air balance. Provide motors for V-belt drives with adjustable rails or
bases. Provide removable metal guards for all exposed V-belt drives, and
provide speed-test openings at the center of all rotating shafts. Provide
fans with personnel screens or guards on both suction and supply ends,
except that the screens need not be provided, unless otherwise indicated,
where ducts are connected to the fan. Provide fan and motor assemblies
with vibration-isolation supports or mountings as indicated. Use
vibration-isolation units that are standard products with published loading
ratings. Select each fan to produce the capacity required at the fan
static pressure indicated. Provide sound power level as indicated. Obtain
the sound power level values according to AMCA 300. Provide standard AMCA
arrangement, rotation, and discharge as indicated. Provide power
ventilators that conform to UL 705 and have a UL label.
2.10.1.1 Centrifugal Fans
Provide fully enclosed, single-width single-inlet, or double-width

double-inlet centrifugal fans, with AMCA Pressure Class I, II, or III as
required or indicated for the design system pressure. Provide impeller
wheels that are rigidly constructed and accurately balanced both statically
and dynamically. Provide forward curved or backward-inclined airfoil
design fan blades in wheel sizes up to 30 inches. Provide
backward-inclined airfoil design fan blades for wheels over 30 inches in
diameter. Provide open-wheel radial type booster fans for exhaust dryer
systems, and fans suitable for conveying lint and the temperatures
encountered. Equip the fan shaft with a heat slinger to dissipate heat
buildup along the shaft. Install an access (service) door to facilitate
maintenance to these fans. Provide fan wheels over 36 inches in diameter
with overhung pulleys and a bearing on each side of the wheel. Provide fan
wheels 36 inches or less in diameter that have one or more extra long
bearings between the fan wheel and the drive. Provide sleeve type,
self-aligning and self-oiling bearings with oil reservoirs, or precision
self-aligning roller or ball-type with accessible grease fittings or
permanently lubricated type. Connect grease fittings to tubing for
serviceability from a single accessible point. Provide L50 rated bearing
life at not less than 200,000 hours as defined by ABMA 9 and ABMA 11.
Provide steel, accurately finished fan shafts, with key seats and keys for
impeller hubs and fan pulleys. Provide fan outlets of ample proportions,
designed for the attachment of angles and bolts for attaching flexible
connections. Provideautomatically operated inlet vanes on suction inlets.
Provide automatically operated outlet dampers. Unless otherwise indicated,
provide motors that do not exceed 1800 rpm and have dripproof enclosures.
Provide magnetic across-the-line type motor starters with general-purpose
enclosure.
2.10.1.2 In-Line Centrifugal Fans
Provide in-line fans with centrifugal backward inclined blades, stationary

discharge conversion vanes, internal and external belt guards, and
adjustable motor mounts. Mount fans in a welded tubular casing. Provide a
fan that axially flows the air in and out. Streamline inlets with
conversion vanes to eliminate turbulence and provide smooth discharge air
flow. Enclose and isolate fan bearings and drive shafts from the air
stream. Provide precision, self aligning ball or roller type fan bearings
that are sealed against dust and dirt and are permanently lubricated.
Provide L50 rated bearing life at not less than 200,000 hours as defined by
ABMA 9 and ABMA 11. Provide motors with dripproof enclosure. Provide
magnetic motor starters across-the-line with general-purpose enclosures.
2.10.2 Coils
Provide fin-and-tube type coils constructed of seamless copper tubes and

aluminum or copper fins mechanically bonded or soldered to the tubes.
Provide casing and tube support sheets that are not lighter than 16 gauge
galvanized steel, formed to provide structural strength. When required,
provide multiple tube supports to prevent tube sag. Test each coil at the
factory under water at not less than 400 psi air pressure and make suitable
for 200 psi working pressure and 300 degrees F operating temperature unless
otherwise stated. Mount coils for counterflow service. Rate and certify
coils to meet the requirements of AHRI 410.
2.10.2.1 Direct-Expansion Coils
Provide suitable direct-expansion coils for the refrigerant involved.

Provide refrigerant piping that conforms to ASTM B 280 and clean, dehydrate
and seal. Provide seamless copper tubing suction headers or seamless or
resistance welded steel tube suction headers with copper connections.
Provide supply headers that consist of a distributor which distributes the
refrigerant through seamless copper tubing equally to all circuits in the
coil. Provide circuited tubes to ensure minimum pressure drop and maximum
heat transfer. Provide circuiting that permits refrigerant flow from inlet
to suction outlet without causing oil slugging or restricting refrigerant
flow in coil. Provide field installed coils which are completely
dehydrated and sealed at the factory upon completion of pressure tests.
2.10.2.2 Water Coils
Install water coils with a pitch of not less than 1/8 inch/foot of the tube
length toward the drain end. Use headers constructed of cast iron, welded
steel or copper. Furnish each coil with a plugged vent and drain
connection extending through the unit casing. Provide removable water
coils with drain pans.
2.10.3 Air Filters
List air filters according to requirements of UL 900, except list high

efficiency particulate air filters of 99.97 percent efficiency by the DOP
Test method under the Label Service to meet the requirements of UL 586.
2.10.3.1 Extended Surface Pleated Panel Filters
Provide 2 inch depth, sectional, disposable type filters of the size

indicated with a MERV of 8 when tested according to ASHRAE 52.2. Provide
initial resistance at 500 fpm that does not exceed 0.36 inches water gauge.
Provide UL Class 2 filters, and nonwoven cotton and synthetic fiber mat
media. Attach a wire support grid bonded to the media to a moisture
resistant fiberboard frame. Bond all four edges of the filter media to the
inside of the frame to prevent air bypass and increase rigidity.
2.10.3.2 Replaceable Media Filters
Provide the dry-media type replaceable media filters, of the size required
to suit the application. Provide MERV that is not less than 8 when
tested according to ASHRAE 52.2.
2.10.3.3 Holding Frames
Fabricate frames from not lighter than 16 gauge sheet steel with
rust-inhibitor coating. Equip each holding frame with suitable filter
holding devices. Provide gasketed holding frame seats. Make all joints
airtight.
2.10.3.4 Filter Gauges
Provide dial type filter gauges, diaphragm actuated draft for all filter
stations, including those filters which are furnished as integral parts of
factory fabricated air handling units, except for small heat pump units
serving BCOF sleeping units, drill instructor offices, and laundry areas.
Gauges shall be at least 3-7/8 inches in diameter, with white dials with
black figures, and graduations with a minimum range of 1 inch of water
beyond the specified final resistance for the filter bank on which each
gauge is applied. Provide each gauge with a screw operated zero adjustment
and two static pressure tips with integral compression fittings, two molded
plastic vent valves, two 5 foot minimum lengths of 1/4 inch diameter
aluminumtubing, and all hardware and accessories for gauge mounting.
2.11 AIR HANDLING UNITS
2.11.1 Factory-Fabricated Air Handling Units
Provide units as indicated on HVAC schedules. Units shall include fans,

coils, airtight insulated casing, filter sections, diffuser sections where
indicated, adjustable V-belt drives, access sections where indicated,
combination sectional filter-mixing box, vibration-isolators, and
appurtenances required for specified operation. Provide vibration
isolators as indicated. Physical dimensions of each air handling unit
shall be suitable to fit space allotted to the unit with the capacity
indicated. Provide air handling unit that is rated in accordance with
AHRI 430 and AHRI certified for cooling.
2.11.1.1 Casings
a. Casing sections 2 inch double wall type, constructed of a minimum

18 gauge galvanized steel, . Inner casing of double-wall units that
are a minimum 20 gauge solid galvanized steel. Design and construct
casing with an integral insulated structural galvanized steel frame
such that exterior panels are non-load bearing.
b. Individually removable exterior panels with standard tools.

Removal shall not affect the structural integrity of the unit. Furnish
casings with access sections, according to paragraph AIR HANDLING
UNITS, inspection doors, and access doors, all capable of opening a
minimum of 90 degrees, as indicated.
c. Insulated, fully gasketed, double-wall type inspection and access

doors, of a minimum 18 gauge outer and 20 gauge inner panels made of
either galvanized steel. Doors shall be rigid and provided with heavy
duty hinges and latches. Inspection doors shall be a minimum 12 inches
wide by 12 inches high. Access doors shall be a minimum 24 inches
wide, the full height of the unit casing or a minimum of 6 foot,
whichever is less.
d. Double-wall insulated type drain pan (thickness equal to exterior

casing) constructed of 16 gauge corrosion resisting sheet steel
conforming to ASTM A 167, Type 304, conforming to ASHRAE 62.1.
Construct drain pans water tight, treated to prevent corrosion, and
designed for positive condensate drainage. When 2 or more cooling
coils are used, with one stacked above the other, condensate from the
upper coils shall not flow across the face of lower coils. Provide
intermediate drain pans or condensate collection channels and
downspouts, as required to carry condensate to the unit drain pan out
of the air stream and without moisture carryover. Construct drain pan
to allow for easy visual inspection, including underneath the coil
without removal of the coil and to allow complete and easy physical
cleaning of the pan underneath the coil without removal of the coil.
Coils shall be individually removable from the casing.
e. Casing insulation that conforms to NFPA 90A. Single-wall casing

sections handling conditioned air shall be insulated with not less than
1 inch thick, 1-1/2 pound density coated fibrous glass material having
a thermal conductivity not greater than 0.23 Btu/hr-sf-F. Double-wall
casing sections handling conditioned air shall be insulated with not
less than 2 inches of the same insulation specified for single-wall
casings. Foil-faced insulation is not an acceptable substitute for use
with double wall casing. Double wall insulation shall be completely
sealed by inner and outer panels.
f. Factory applied fibrous glass insulation that conforms to

ASTM C 1071, except that the minimum thickness and density requirements
do not apply, and that meets the requirements of NFPA 90A. Make air
handling unit casing insulation uniform over the entire casing.
Foil-faced insulation is not an acceptable substitute for use on
double-wall access doors and inspections doors .
g. Duct liner material, coating, and adhesive that conforms to

fire-hazard requirements specified in Section 23 07 00 THERMAL
INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS. Protect exposed insulation edges
and joints where insulation panels are butted with a metal nosing strip
or coat to meet erosion resistance requirements of ASTM C 1071.
h. A latched and hinged inspection door, in the fan and coil

sections. Plus additional inspection doors, access doors and access
sections where indicated.
2.11.1.2 Heating and Cooling Coils
Provide coils as specified in paragraph AIR SYSTEMS EQUIPMENT.
2.11.1.3 Air Filters
Provide air filters as specified in paragraph AIR SYSTEMS EQUIPMENT for

types and thickness indicated.
2.11.1.4 Fans
a. Fans that are double-inlet, centrifugal type with each fan in a

separate scroll. Dynamically balance fans and shafts prior to
installation into air handling unit, then after it has been installed
in the air handling unit, statically and dynamically balance the entire
fan assembly. Mount fans on steel shafts, accurately ground and
finished.
b. Fan bearings that are sealed against dust and dirt and are
precision self-aligning ball or roller type, with L50 rated bearing
life at not less than 200,000 hours as defined by ABMA 9 and ABMA 11.
Bearings shall be permanently lubricated or lubricated type with
lubrication fittings readily accessible at the drive side of the unit.
Support bearings by structural shapes, or die formed sheet structural
members, or support plates securely attached to the unit casing. Do
not fasten bearings directly to the unit sheet metal casing. Furnish
fans and scrolls with coating indicated.
c. Fans that are driven by a unit-mounted, or a floor-mounted motor

connected to fans by V-belt drive complete with belt guard for
externally mounted motors. Furnish belt guards that are the
three-sided enclosed type with solid or expanded metal face. Belt
drives shall be designed for not less than a 1.3 service factor based
on motor nameplate rating.
d. Motor sheaves that are variable pitch for 25 hp and below and fixed
pitch above 25 hp as defined by AHRI Guideline D. Where fixed sheaves
are required, the use of variable pitch sheaves is allowed during air
balance, but replace them with an appropriate fixed sheave after air
balance is completed. Select variable pitch sheaves to drive the fan
at a speed that produces the specified capacity when set at the
approximate midpoint of the sheave adjustment. Furnish motors for
V-belt drives with adjustable bases, and with splashproof enclosures.
e. Motor starters of across-the-line type with general-purpose

enclosure. Select unit fan or fans to produce the required capacity at
the fan static pressure with sound power level as indicated. Obtain
the sound power level values according to AMCA 300, ASHRAE 68, or
AHRI 260.
2.11.1.5 Access Sections and Filter/Mixing Boxes
Provide access sections where indicated and furnish with access doors as
shown. Construct access sections and filter/mixing boxes in a manner
identical to the remainder of the unit casing and equip with access doors.
Design mixing boxes to minimize air stratification and to promote thorough
mixing of the air streams.
2.11.1.6 Diffuser Sections
Provide diffuser sections that are fabricated by the unit manufacturer in

a manner identical to the remainder of the unit casing, designed to be
airtight under positive static pressure.
2.11.1.7 Dampers
Provide dampers as specified in paragraph CONTROLS.
2.12 TERMINAL UNITS
2.12.1 Variable Air Volume (VAV) and Dual Duct Terminal Units
Provide VAV terminal units that are the type, size, and capacity shown,
mounted in the ceiling or wall cavity. Provide actuators and controls as

specified in paragraph CONTROLS. Provide unit enclosures that are
constructed of galvanized steel not lighter than 22 gauge or aluminum sheet
not lighter than 18 gauge. Provide single or multiple discharge outlets as
required. Units with flow limiters are not acceptable. Provide unit air
volume that is factory preset and readily field adjustable without special
tools. Provide reheat coils as indicated. Attach a flow chart to each
unit. Base acoustic performance of the terminal units upon units tested
according to AHRI 880 with the calculations prepared in accordance with
AHRI 885. Provide sound power level as indicated. Show discharge sound
power for minimum and 1-1/2 inches water gauge inlet static pressure.
Provide acoustical lining according to NFPA 90A.
2.12.1.1 Variable Volume, Single Duct Terminal Units
Provide variable volume, single duct, terminal units with a calibrated air
volume sensing device, air valve or damper, actuator, and accessory
relays. Provide units that control air volume to within plus or minus 5
percent of each air set point volume as determined by the thermostat with
variations in inlet pressures from 3/4 to 6 inch water gauge. Provide
units with an internal resistance not exceeding 0.4 inch water gauge at
maximum flow range. Provide external differential pressure taps separate
from the control pressure taps for air flow measurement with a 0 to 1 inch
water gauge range.
2.12.1.2 Reheat Units
Hot Water Coils: Provide fin-and-tube type hot-water coils

constructed of seamless copper tubes and copper or aluminum fins
mechanically bonded or soldered to the tubes. Reheat coils shall
be provided as part of VAV terminal unit assembly by same
manufacturer of VAV terminal units.Provide headers that are
constructed of cast iron, welded steel or copper. Provide casing
and tube support sheets that are 16 gauge, galvanized steel,
formed to provide structural strength. Provide tubes that are
correctly circuited for proper water velocity without excessive
pressure drop and are drainable where required or indicated. At
the factory, test each coil at not less than 250 psi air pressure
and provide coils suitable for 200 psi working pressure. Install
drainable coils in the air handling units with a pitch of not less
than 1/8 inch per foot of tube length toward the drain end. Coils
shall conform to the provisions of AHRI 410.
2.13 ENERGY RECOVERY DEVICES
2.13.1 Rotary Wheel
Provide unit that is a factory fabricated and tested assembly for

air-to-air energy recovery by transfer of sensible heat from exhaust air to
supply air stream, with device performance according to ASHRAE 84 and that
delivers an energy transfer effectiveness of not less than 70 percent with
cross-contamination not in excess of 1.0 percent of exhaust airflow rate at
system design differential pressure, including purging sector if provided
with wheel. Provide exchange media that is chemically inert,
moisture-resistant, fire-retardant, laminated, nonmetallic material which
complies with NFPA 90A. Isolate exhaust and supply streams by seals which
are static, field adjustable, and replaceable. Equip chain drive
mechanisms with ratcheting torque limiter or slip-clutch protective

device. Fabricate enclosure from galvanized steel and include provisions
for maintenance access. Provide recovery control and rotation failure
provisions as indicated.
2.13.2 Desiccant Wheel
Provide counterflow supply, regeneration airstreams, a rotary type

dehumidifier designed for continuous operation, and extended surface type
wheel structure in the axial flow direction with a geometry that allows for
laminar flow over the operating range for minimum air pressure
differentials. Provide the dehumidifier complete with a drive system
utilizing a fractional-horsepower electric motor and speed reducer assembly
driving the rotor. Include a slack-side tensioner for automatic take-up
for belt-driven wheels. Provide an adsorbing type desiccant material.
Apply the desiccant material to the wheel such that the entire surface is
active as a desiccant and the desiccant material does not degrade or detach
from the surface of the wheel which is fitted with full-face, low-friction
contact seals on both sides to prevent cross leakage. Provide rotary
structure that has underheat, overheat and rotation fault circuitry. The
wheel assembly shall come with a warranty for a minimum of five years.
2.14 FACTORY PAINTING
Factory paint units, which are not of galvanized construction, with a

corrosion resisting paint finish according to ASTM A 123/A 123M or
ASTM A 924/A 924M. Clean, phosphatize and coat internal and external
ferrous metal surfaces with a paint finish which has been tested according
to ASTM B 117, ASTM D 1654, and ASTM D 3359. Submit evidence of
satisfactory paint performance for a minimum of 125 hours for units to be
installed indoors and 500 hours for units to be installed outdoors.
Provide rating of failure at the scribe mark that is not less than 6,
average creepage not greater than 1/8 inch. Provide rating of the
inscribed area that is not less than 10, no failure. On units constructed
of galvanized steel that have been welded, provide a final shop docket of
zinc-rich protective paint on exterior surfaces of welds or welds that have
burned through from the interior according to ASTM D 520 Type I.
2.15 SUPPLEMENTAL COMPONENTS/SERVICES
2.15.1 Chilled, Condenser, or Dual Service Water Piping
The requirements for chilled, condenser, or dual service water piping and
accessories are specified in Section 23 64 26 CHILLED, CHILLED-HOT, AND
CONDENSER WATER PIPING SYSTEMS
2.15.2 Water Heating System Accessories
The requirements for water heating accessories such as expansion tanks

are specified in Section 23 52 00 HEATING BOILERS.
2.15.3 Condensate Drain Lines
Provide and install condensate drainage for each item of equipment that
generates condensate in accordance with Section 22 00 00 PLUMBING, GENERAL
PURPOSE23 64 26 CHILLED, CHILLED-HOT, AND CONDENSER WATER PIPING SYSTEMS
2.15.4 Backflow Preventers
The requirements for backflow preventers are specified in Section 22 00 00

PLUMBING, GENERAL PURPOSE.
2.15.5 Insulation
The requirements for shop and field applied insulation are specified in
Section 23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS.
2.15.6 Controls
The requirements for controls are specified in Section 23 05 93 TESTING,

ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING OF HVAC SYSTEMS and Section 23 09 23 DIRECT
DIGITAL CONTROL FOR HVAC AND OTHER LOCAL BUILDING SYSTEMS.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.2 INSTALLATION
a. Install materials and equipment in accordance with the requirements

of the contract drawings and approved manufacturer's installation
instructions. Accomplish installation by workers skilled in this type
of work. Perform installation so that there is no degradation of the
designed fire ratings of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors.
b. No installation is permitted to block or otherwise impede access to

any existing machine or system. Install all hinged doors to swing open
a minimum of 120 degrees. Provide an area in front of all access doors
that clears a minimum of 2 feet. In front of all access doors to
electrical circuits, clear the area the minimum distance to energized
circuits as specified in OSHA Standards, part 1910.333
(Electrical-Safety Related work practices)and an additional 2 feet.
c. Except as otherwise indicated, install emergency switches and

alarms in conspicuous locations. Mount all indicators, to include
gauges, meters, and alarms in order to be easily visible by people in
the area.
3.2.1 Condensate Drain Lines
Provide water seals in the condensate drain from all cooling units.
Provide a depth of each seal of 2 inches plus the number of inches,
measured in water gauge, of the total static pressure rating of the unit to
which the drain is connected. Provide water seals that are constructed of
2 tees and an appropriate U-bend with the open end of each tee plugged.
Provide pipe cap or plug cleanouts where indicated. Connect drains
indicated to connect to the sanitary waste system using an indirect waste
fitting. Insulate air conditioner drain lines as specified in Section
23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS.
3.2.2 Equipment and Installation
Provide frames and supports for tanks, compressors, pumps, valves, air
handling units, fans, coils, dampers, and other similar items requiring
supports. Floor mount or ceiling hang air handling units as indicated.
Anchor and fasten as detailed. Set floor-mounted equipment on not less than
4 inch concrete pads or curbs doweled in place unless otherwise
indicated. Make concrete foundations for circulating pumps heavy enough to
minimize the intensity of the vibrations transmitted to the piping and the
surrounding structure, as recommended in writing by the pump manufacturer.
In lieu of a concrete pad foundation, build a concrete pedestal block with
isolators placed between the pedestal block and the floor. Make the
concrete foundation or concrete pedestal block a mass not less than three
times the weight of the components to be supported. Provide the lines
connected to the pump mounted on pedestal blocks with flexible connectors.
Submit foundation drawings as specified in paragraph DETAIL DRAWINGS.
Provide concrete for foundations as specified in Section 03 31 00.00 10
CAST-IN-PLACE STRUCTURAL CONCRETE
3.2.3 Access Panels
Install access panels for concealed valves, vents, controls, dampers, and
items requiring inspection or maintenance of sufficient size, and locate
them so that the concealed items are easily serviced and maintained or
completely removed and replaced. Provide access panels as specified in
3.2.4 Flexible Duct
Install pre-insulated flexible duct in accordance with the latest printed

instructions of the manufacturer to ensure a vapor tight joint. Provide
hangers, when required to suspend the duct, of the type recommended by the
duct manufacturer and set at the intervals recommended.
3.2.5 Metal Ductwork
Install according to SMACNA 1966 unless otherwise indicated. Install duct

supports for sheet metal ductwork according to SMACNA 1966, unless
otherwise specified. Do not use friction beam clamps indicated in
SMACNA 1966. Anchor risers on high velocity ducts in the center of the
vertical run to allow ends of riser to move due to thermal expansion.
Erect supports on the risers that allow free vertical movement of the
duct. Attach supports only to structural framing members and concrete
slabs. Do not anchor supports to metal decking unless a means is provided
and approved for preventing the anchor from puncturing the metal decking.
Where supports are required between structural framing members, provide
suitable intermediate metal framing. Where C-clamps are used, provide
retainer clips.
3.2.6 Dust Control
To prevent the accumulation of dust, debris and foreign material during

construction, perform temporary dust control protection. Protect the
distribution system (supply and return) with temporary seal-offs at all
inlets and outlets at the end of each day's work. Keep temporary
protection in place until system is ready for startup.
3.2.7 Insulation
Provide thickness and application of insulation materials for ductwork,

piping, and equipment according to Section 23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION FOR
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS. Externally insulate outdoor air intake ducts and
plenums up to the point where the outdoor air reaches the conditioning unit.
3.2.8 Duct Test Holes
Provide holes with closures or threaded holes with plugs in ducts and
plenums as indicated or where necessary for the use of pitot tube in
balancing the air system. Provide extensions, complete with cap or plug,
where the ducts are insulated.
3.2.9 Power Roof Ventilator Mounting
Provide foamed 1/2 inch thick, closed-cell, flexible elastomer insulation

to cover width of roof curb mounting flange. Where wood nailers are used,
predrill holes for fasteners.
3.2.10 Power Transmission Components Adjustment
Test V-belts and sheaves for proper alignment and tension prior to
operation and after 72 hours of operation at final speed. Uniformly load
belts on drive side to prevent bouncing. Make alignment of direct driven
couplings to within 50 percent of manufacturer's maximum allowable range of
misalignment.
3.3 EQUIPMENT PADS
Provide equipment pads to the dimensions shown or, if not shown, to conform
to the shape of each piece of equipment served with a minimum 3-inch margin
around the equipment and supports.
3.4 CUTTING AND PATCHING
Install work in such a manner and at such time that a minimum of cutting
and patching of the building structure is required. Make holes in exposed
locations, in or through existing floors, by drilling and smooth by
sanding. Use of a jackhammer is permitted only where specifically
approved. Make holes through masonry walls to accommodate sleeves with an
iron pipe masonry core saw.
3.5 CLEANING
Thoroughly clean surfaces of piping and equipment that have become covered
with dirt, plaster, or other material during handling and construction
before such surfaces are prepared for final finish painting or are enclosed
within the building structure. Before final acceptance, clean mechanical
equipment, including piping, ducting, and fixtures, and free from dirt,
grease, and finger marks. When the work area is in an occupied space such
as office, laboratory or warehouse protect all furniture and equipment
from dirt and debris. Incorporate housekeeping for field construction work
which leaves all furniture and equipment in the affected area free of
construction generated dust and debris; and, all floor surfaces
vacuum-swept clean.
3.6 PENETRATIONS
Provide sleeves and prepared openings for duct mains, branches, and other
penetrating items, and install during the construction of the surface to be
penetrated. Cut sleeves flush with each surface. Place sleeves for round
duct 15 inches and smaller. Build framed, prepared openings for round duct
larger than 15 inches and square, rectangular or oval ducts. Sleeves and
framed openings are also required where grilles, registers, and diffusers
are installed at the openings. Provide one inch clearance between
penetrating and penetrated surfaces except at grilles, registers, and
diffusers. Pack spaces between sleeve or opening and duct or duct
insulation with mineral fiber conforming with ASTM C 553, Type 1, Class B-2.
a. Sleeves: Fabricate sleeves, except as otherwise specified or

indicated, from 20 gauge thick mill galvanized sheet metal. Where
sleeves are installed in bearing walls or partitions, provide black
steel pipe conforming with ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 20.
b. Framed Prepared Openings: Fabricate framed prepared openings from

20 gauge galvanized steel, unless otherwise indicated.
c. Insulation: Provide duct insulation in accordance with Section

23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS continuous through
sleeves and prepared openings except firewall penetrations. Terminate
duct insulation at fire dampers and flexible connections. For duct
handling air at or below 60 degrees F, provide insulation continuous
over the damper collar and retaining angle of fire dampers, which are
exposed to unconditioned air.
d. Closure Collars: Provide closure collars of a minimum 4 inches

wide, unless otherwise indicated, for exposed ducts and items on each
side of penetrated surface, except where equipment is installed.
Install collar tight against the surface and fit snugly around the duct
or insulation. Grind sharp edges smooth to prevent damage to
penetrating surface. Fabricate collars for round ducts 15 inches in
diameter or less from 20 gauge galvanized steel. Fabricate collars for
square and rectangular ducts, or round ducts with minimum dimension over
15 inches from 18 gauge galvanized steel. Fabricate collars for
square and rectangular ducts with a maximum side of 15 inches or less
from 20 gauge galvanized steel. Install collars with fasteners a
maximum of 6 inches on center. Attach to collars a minimum of 4
fasteners where the opening is 12 inches in diameter or less, and a
minimum of 8 fasteners where the opening is 20 inches in diameter or
less.
e. Firestopping: Where ducts pass through fire-rated walls, fire

partitions, and fire rated chase walls, seal the penetration with fire
stopping materials as specified in Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING.
3.7 FIELD PAINTING
solvent degreasing prior to application of paint, except clean to bare
metal on metal surfaces subject to temperatures in excess of 120 degrees F.
retouch before applying the succeeding coat. Provide aluminum or light
gray finish coat.
a. Temperatures less than 120 degrees F: Immediately after cleaning,

apply one coat of pretreatment primer applied to a minimum dry film
thickness of 0.3 mil, one coat of primer applied to a minimum dry film
thickness of one mil; and two coats of enamel applied to a minimum dry
film thickness of one mil per coat to metal surfaces subject to
temperatures less than 120 degrees F.
b. Temperatures between 120 and 400 degrees F: Apply two coats of 400
degrees F heat-resisting enamel applied to a total minimum thickness of
two mils to metal surfaces subject to temperatures between 120 and 400
degrees F.
c. Temperatures greater than 400 degrees F: Apply two coats of 315

degrees C 600 degrees F heat-resisting paint applied to a total minimum
dry film thickness of two mils to metal surfaces subject to
temperatures greater than 400 degrees F.
3.7.1 Finish Painting
The requirements for finish painting of items only primed at the factory,
and surfaces not specifically noted otherwise, are specified in Section
09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS.
3.7.2 Color Coding Scheme for Locating Hidden Utility Components
Use scheme in buildings having suspended grid ceilings. Provide color

coding scheme that identifies points of access for maintenance and
operation of components and equipment that are not visible from the
finished space and are accessible from the ceiling grid, consisting of a
color code board and colored metal disks. Make each colored metal disk
approximately 3/8 inch diameter and secure to removable ceiling panels with
fasteners. Insert each fastener into the ceiling panel so as to be
concealed from view. Provide fasteners that are manually removable without
the use of tools and that do not separate from the ceiling panels when the
panels are dropped from ceiling height. Make installation of colored metal
disks follow completion of the finished surface on which the disks are to
be fastened. Provide color code board that is approximately 3 foot wide,
30 inches high, and 1/2 inches thick. Make the board of wood fiberboard
and frame under glass or 1/16 inch transparent plastic cover. Make the
color code symbols approximately 3/4 inch in diameter and the related
lettering in 1/2 inch high capital letters. Mount the color code board in
the mechanical or equipment room.
3.8 IDENTIFICATION SYSTEMS
Provide identification tags made of brass, engraved laminated plastic, or

engraved anodized aluminum, indicating service and item number on all
valves and dampers. Provide tags that are 1-3/8 inch minimum diameter with
stamped or engraved markings. Make indentations black for reading
clarity. Attach tags to valves with No. 12 AWG 0.0808-inch diameter
corrosion-resistant steel wire, copper wire, chrome-plated beaded chain or
plastic straps designed for that purpose.
3.9 DUCTWORK LEAK TEST
Perform ductwork leak test for the entire air distribution and exhaust
system.Provide test procedure, apparatus, and report that conform to
SMACNA 1143.
3.10 DAMPER ACCEPTANCE TEST
Operate all fire dampers and smoke dampers under normal operating
conditions, prior to the occupancy of a building to determine that they
function properly. Test each fire damper equipped with fusible link by
having the fusible link cut in place. Test dynamic fire dampers with the
air handling and distribution system running. Reset all fire dampers with
the fusible links replaced after acceptance testing. To ensure optimum
operation and performance, install the damper so it is square and free from
racking.
3.11 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
The requirements for testing, adjusting, and balancing are specified in

Section 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING. Begin testing,
adjusting, and balancing only when the air supply and distribution,
including controls, has been completed, with the exception of performance
tests.
3.12 PERFORMANCE TESTS
After testing, adjusting, and balancing is complete as specified, test each

system as a whole to see that all items perform as integral parts of the
system and temperatures and conditions are evenly controlled throughout the
building. Make corrections and adjustments as necessary to produce the
conditions indicated or specified. Conduct capacity tests and general
operating tests by an experienced engineer. Provide tests that cover a
period of not less than 7 days for each system and demonstrate that the
entire system is functioning according to the specifications. Make
coincidental chart recordings at points indicated on the drawings for the
duration of the time period and record the temperature at space thermostats
or space sensors, the humidity at space humidistats or space sensors and
the ambient temperature and humidity in a shaded and weather protected area.
3.13 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING
Provide a temporary bypass for water coils to prevent flushing water from
passing through coils. Inside of air terminal unitsthoroughly clean ducts,
plenums, and casing of debris and blow free of small particles of rubbish
and dust and then vacuum clean before installing outlet faces. Wipe
equipment clean, with no traces of oil, dust, dirt, or paint spots.
Provide temporary filters prior to startup of all fans that are operated
during construction, and install new filters after all construction dirt
has been removed from the building, and the ducts, plenums, casings, and
other items specified have been vacuum cleaned. Maintain system in this
clean condition until final acceptance. Properly lubricate bearings with
oil or grease as recommended by the manufacturer. Tighten belts to proper
tension. Adjust control valves and other miscellaneous equipment requiring
adjustment to setting indicated or directed. Adjust fans to the speed
indicated by the manufacturer to meet specified conditions.
3.14 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE TRAINING
Conduct a training course for the members of the operating staff as

designated by the Contracting Officer. Make the training period consist of
a total of 8 hours of normal working time and start it after all work
specified herein is functionally completed and the Performance Tests have
been approved. Conduct field instruction that covers all of the items
contained in the Operation and Maintenance Manuals as well as
demonstrations of routine maintenance operations. Notify the Contracting
Officer at least 14 days prior to the date of proposed conduct of the
training course.
SECTION 23 03 00.00 20
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES


IEEE C2 (2007; Errata 2006 & 2007; INT 44-56 2007;

INT 47, 49, 50, 52-56 2008; INT 57, 58,
51, 48, 59 2009) National Electrical
Safety Code

and Generators

Induction Motors


Code - 2008 Edition
1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
This section applies to all sections of Divisions: 21, FIRE SUPPRESSION;

22, PLUMBING; and 23, HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING of this
project specification, unless specified otherwise in the individual section.
1.3.1 Material and Equipment Qualifications
Provide materials and equipment that are standard products of manufacturers

regularly engaged in the manufacture of such products, which are of a
similar material, design and workmanship. Standard products shall have
been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to bid
opening. The 2-year use shall include applications of equipment and
SECTION 23 03 00.00 20 Page 1

materials under similar circumstances and of similar size. The product

shall have been for sale on the commercial market through advertisements,
manufacturers' catalogs, or brochures during the 2 year period.
1.3.2 Alternative Qualifications

acceptable if a certified record of satisfactory field operation for not
less than 6000 hours, exclusive of the manufacturer's factory or laboratory
tests, can be shown.
1.3.3 Service Support
The equipment items shall be supported by service organizations. Submit a

certified list of qualified permanent service organizations for support of
the equipment which includes their addresses and qualifications. These

acceptable.
1.3.5 Modification of References

1.3.5.1 Definitions
1.3.5.2 Administrative Interpretations

SECTION 23 03 00.00 20 Page 2

Handle, store, and protect equipment and materials to prevent damage before
and during installation in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations, and as approved by the Contracting Officer. Replace
damaged or defective items.
1.5 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
Furnish motors, controllers, disconnects and contactors with their

respective pieces of equipment. Motors, controllers, disconnects and
contactors shall conform to and have electrical connections provided under
Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Furnish internal wiring for
components of packaged equipment as an integral part of the equipment.
Extended voltage range motors will not be permitted. Controllers and
contactors shall have a maximum of 120 volt control circuits, and shall
have auxiliary contacts for use with the controls furnished. When motors
and equipment furnished are larger than sizes indicated, the cost of
additional electrical service and related work shall be included under the
section that specified that motor or equipment. Power wiring and conduit
for field installed equipment shall be provided under and conform to the
requirements of Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.
1.6 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
Electrical installations shall conform to IEEE C2, NFPA 70, and

requirements specified herein.
1.6.1 New Work
Provide electrical components of mechanical equipment, such as motors,

motor starters (except starters/controllers which are indicated as part of
a motor control center), control or push-button stations, float or pressure
switches, solenoid valves, integral disconnects, and other devices
functioning to control mechanical equipment, as well as control wiring and
conduit for circuits rated 100 volts or less, to conform with the
requirements of the section covering the mechanical equipment. Extended
voltage range motors shall not be permitted. The interconnecting power
wiring and conduit, control wiring rated 120 volts (nominal) and conduit,
the motor control equipment forming a part of motor control centers, and
the electrical power circuits shall be provided under Division 26, except
internal wiring for components of package equipment shall be provided as an
integral part of the equipment. When motors and equipment furnished are
larger than sizes indicated, provide any required changes to the electrical
service as may be necessary and related work as a part of the work for the
section specifying that motor or equipment.
1.6.2 Modifications to Existing Systems
Where existing mechanical systems and motor-operated equipment require

modifications, provide electrical components under Division 26.
1.6.3 High Efficiency Motors
1.6.3.1 High Efficiency Single-Phase Motors
Unless otherwise specified, single-phase fractional-horsepower

alternating-current motors shall be high efficiency types corresponding to
the applications listed in NEMA MG 11.
SECTION 23 03 00.00 20 Page 3

1.6.3.2 High Efficiency Polyphase Motors
Unless otherwise specified, polyphase motors shall be selected based on

high efficiency characteristics relative to the applications as listed in
NEMA MG 10. Additionally, polyphase squirrel-cage medium induction motors
with continuous ratings shall meet or exceed energy efficient ratings in
accordance with Table 12-6C of NEMA MG 1.
1.6.4 Three-Phase Motor Protection
Provide controllers for motors rated one one horsepower and larger with
electronic phase-voltage monitors designed to protect motors from
phase-loss, undervoltage, and overvoltage. Provide protection for motors
from immediate restart by a time adjustable restart relay.
When specified in other sections, furnish the services of competent

instructors to give full instruction to the designated Government personnel
in the adjustment, operation, and maintenance, including pertinent safety
requirements, of the specified equipment or system. Instructors shall be
thoroughly familiar with all parts of the installation and shall be trained
in operating theory as well as practical operation and maintenance work.
Instruction shall be given during the first regular work week after the
equipment or system has been accepted and turned over to the Government for
regular operation. The number of man-days (8 hours per day) of instruction
furnished shall be as specified in the individual section. When more than
4 man-days of instruction are specified, use approximately half of the time
for classroom instruction. Use other time for instruction with the
equipment or system.

1.8 ACCESSIBILITY

PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PAINTING OF NEW EQUIPMENT
3.1.1 Factory Painting Systems
Manufacturer's standard factory painting systems may be provided subject to

certification that the factory painting system applied will withstand 125
SECTION 23 03 00.00 20 Page 4

hours in a salt-spray fog test, except that equipment located outdoors

shall withstand 500 hours in a salt-spray fog test. Salt-spray fog test
shall be in accordance with ASTM B 117, and for that test the acceptance
criteria shall be as follows: immediately after completion of the test,
the paint shall show no signs of blistering, wrinkling, or cracking, and no
loss of adhesion; and the specimen shall show no signs of rust creepage
beyond 0.125 inch on either side of the scratch mark.
3.1.2 Shop Painting Systems for Metal Surfaces
metal.
a. Temperatures Less Than 120 Degrees F: Immediately after cleaning,

the metal surfaces subject to temperatures less than 120 degrees F
shall receive one coat of pretreatment primer applied to a minimum
dry film thickness of 0.3 mil, one coat of primer applied to a
minimum dry film thickness of one mil; and two coats of enamel
applied to a minimum dry film thickness of one mil per coat.
b. Temperatures Between 120 and 400 Degrees F: Metal surfaces

subject to temperatures between 120 and 400 degrees F shall
receive two coats of 400 degrees F heat-resisting enamel applied
to a total minimum thickness of 2 mils.
c. Temperatures Greater Than 400 Degrees F: Metal surfaces subject to

temperatures greater than 400 degrees F shall receive two coats of
600 degrees F heat-resisting paint applied to a total minimum dry
film thickness of 2 mils.
SECTION 23 03 00.00 20 Page 5

SECTION 23 05 93
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES


ENGINEERS (ASHRAE)
ASHRAE 62.1 (2007; INT 2007; INT 2-15 2008; Errata

2008; Addenda a, b, e, f and h 2008)
Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air
Quality
AABC MN-1 (2002) National Standards for Total System

Balance
AABC MN-4 (1996) Test and Balance Procedures
NEBB MASV (2006) Procedural Standards for

Measurements and Assessment of Sound and
Vibration
NEBB PROCEDURAL STANDARDS (2005) Procedural Standards for TAB

(Testing, Adjusting and Balancing)
Environmental Systems

(SMACNA)
SMACNA 1143 (1985) HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual
SMACNA 1780 (2002; 3rd Ed) HVAC Systems - Testing,

Adjusting and Balancing
SMACNA 1858 (2004) HVAC Sound And Vibration Manual -

First Edition
1.2 DEFINITIONS
a. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council.
b. COTR: Contracting Officer's Technical Representative.
c. DALT: Duct air leakage test
d. DALT'd: Duct air leakage tested
e. HVAC: Heating, ventilating, and air conditioning; or heating,

ventilating, and cooling.
f. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau
g. Out-of-tolerance data: Pertains only to field acceptance testing

of Final DALT or TAB report. When applied to DALT work, this
phase means "a leakage rate measured during DALT field acceptance
testing which exceeds the leakage rate allowed by SMACNA Leak Test
Manual for an indicated duct construction and sealant class."
When applied to TAB work this phase means "a measurement taken
during TAB field acceptance testing which does not fall within the
range of plus 5 to minus 5 percent of the original measurement
reported on the TAB Report for a specific parameter."
h. Season of maximum heating load: The time of year when the outdoor
temperature at the project site remains within plus or minus 30
degrees Fahrenheit of the project site's winter outdoor design
temperature, throughout the period of TAB data recording.
i. Season of maximum cooling load: The time of year when the outdoor
temperature at the project site remains within plus or minus 5
degrees Fahrenheit of the project site's summer outdoor design
temperature, throughout the period of TAB data recording.
j. Season 1, Season 2: Depending upon when the project HVAC is

completed and ready for TAB, Season 1 is defined, thereby defining
Season 2. Season 1 could be the season of maximum heating load,
or the season of maximum cooling load.
k. Sound measurements terminology: Defined in AABC MN-1, NEBB MASV,

or SMACNA 1858 (TABB).
l. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing (of HVAC systems).
m. TAB'd: HVAC Testing/Adjusting/Balancing procedures performed.
n. TAB Agency: TAB Firm
o. TAB team field leader: TAB team field leader
p. TAB team supervisor: TAB team engineer.
q. TAB team technicians: TAB team assistants.
r. TABB: Testing Adjusting and Balancing Bureau.
1.2.1 Similar Terms
In some instances, terminology differs between the Contract and the TAB
Standard primarily because the intent of this Section is to use the
industry standards specified, along with additional requirements listed
herein to produce optimal results.
The following table of similar terms is provided for clarification only.

Contract requirements take precedent over the corresponding AABC, NEBB, or
TABB requirements where differences exist.
SIMILAR TERMS
Contract Term AABC NEBB TABB

Term Term Term
TAB Standard National Standards Procedural Standards International

for for Standards for
Testing and Balancing Testing, Adjusting Environmental
Heating, Ventilating, and Balancing of Systems Balance
and Air Conditioning Environmental Systems
Systems
TAB Specialist TAB Engineer TAB Supervisor TAB Supervisor
Systems Construction Phase Field Readiness Field

Readiness Inspection Check & Preliminary Readiness
Check Field Procedures. Check &
Prelim.
Field
Procedures
1.3 WORK DESCRIPTION
The work includes duct air leakage testing (DALT) and testing, adjusting,
and balancing (TAB) of new heating, ventilating, and cooling (HVAC) air and
water distribution systems including equipment and performance data, ducts,
and piping which are located within, on, under, between, and adjacent to
buildings, including records of existing conditions.
Perform TAB in accordance with the requirements of the TAB procedural

standard recommended by the TAB trade association that approved the TAB
Firm's qualifications. Comply with requirements of AABC MN-1,
NEBB PROCEDURAL STANDARDS, or SMACNA 1780 (TABB) as supplemented and
modified by this specification section. All recommendations and suggested
practices contained in the TAB procedural standards are considered
mandatory.
Conduct DALT and TAB of the indicated existing systems and equipment and
submit the specified DALT and TAB reports for approval. Conduct DALT
testing in compliance with the requirements specified in SMACNA 1143,
except as supplemented and modified by this section. Conduct DALT and TAB
work in accordance with the requirements of this section.
1.3.1 Air Distribution Systems
Test, adjust, and balance systems (TAB) in compliance with this section.
Obtain Contracting Officer's written approval before applying insulation to
exterior of air distribution systems as specified under Section 23 07 00
THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS.
1.3.2 Water Distribution Systems
TAB systems in compliance with this section. Obtain Contracting Officer's

written approval before applying insulation to water distribution systems
as specified under Section 23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL
SYSTEM. At Contractor's option and with Contracting Officer's written
approval, the piping systems may be insulated before systems are TAB'd.
Terminate piping insulation immediately adjacent to each flow control
valve, automatic control valve, or device. Seal the ends of pipe

insulation and the space between ends of pipe insulation and piping, with
waterproof vapor barrier coating.
After completion of work under this section, insulate the flow control
valves and devices as specified under Section 23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION
FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS.
1.3.3 TAB SCHEMATIC DRAWINGS
Show the following information on TAB Schematic Drawings:
1. A unique number or mark for each piece of equipment or terminal.
2. Air quantities at air terminals.
3. Air quantities and temperatures in air handling unit schedules.
4. Water quantities and temperatures in thermal energy transfer

equipment schedules.
5. Water quantities and heads in pump schedules.
6. Water flow measurement fittings and balancing fittings.
7. Ductwork Construction and Leakage Testing Table that defines the

DALT test requirements, including each applicable HVAC duct system ID
or mark, duct pressure class, duct seal class, and duct leakage test
pressure. This table is included in the file for Graphics for Unified
Facilities Guide Specifications:
http://www.wbdg.org/ccb/browse_org.php?o=70
The Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing (TAB) Specialist must review the
Contract Plans and Specifications and advise the Contracting Officer of any
deficiencies that would prevent the effective and accurate TAB of the
system, including records of existing conditions, and systems readiness
check. The TAB Specialist must provide a Design Review Report individually
listing each deficiency and the corresponding proposed corrective action
necessary for proper system operation.
Submit three copies of the TAB Schematic Drawings and Report Forms to the
Contracting Officer, no later than 21 days prior to the start of TAB field
measurements.
1.3.4 Related Requirements
1.4 SUBMITTALS

TAB Firm; G, DO
SD-02 Shop Drawings
TAB Schematic Drawings and Report FormsG, DO
SD-03 Product Data
Equipment and Performance DataG, DO
TAB Related HVAC SubmittalsG, DO
A list of the TAB Related HVAC Submittals, no later than 7 days

after the approval of the TAB team engineer .
TAB Procedures; G, DO
Proposed procedures for TAB, submitted with the TAB Schematic

Drawings and Report Forms.
Calibration; G, DO
TAB Execution G, DO
TAB Verification; G, DO
SD-06 Test Reports
TAB Work Execution Schedule; G
TAB Procedures Summary; G
Design review report; G
TAB report ; G
TAB report ; G
SD-07 Certificates
TAB FirmG, DO
Independent TAB Agency and Personnel Qualifications; G, DO
TAB Submittal and Work Schedule; G, DO
Design review report; G, DO
Advanced notice for TAB field work; G, DO
Prerequisite HVAC Work Check Out List ; G,DO
1.5.1 Independent Tab Agency and Personnel Qualifications
To secure approval for the proposed agency, submit information certifying

that the TAB agency is a first tier subcontractor who is not affiliated
with any other company participating in work on this contract, including
design, furnishing equipment, or construction. Further, submit the
following, for the agency, to Contracting Officer for approval:
a. Independent AABC or NEBB or TABB TAB agency:
TAB agency: AABC registration number and expiration date of

current certification; or NEBB certification number and expiration
date of current certification; or TABB certification number and
expiration date of current certification.
TAB team supervisor: Name and copy of AABC or NEBB or TABB TAB
supervisor certificate and expiration date of current
certification.
TAB team field leader: Name and documented evidence that the team
field leader has satisfactorily performed full-time supervision of
TAB work in the field for not less than 3 years immediately
preceding this contract's bid opening date.
TAB team field technicians: Names and documented evidence that

each field technician has satisfactorily assisted a TAB team field
leader in performance of TAB work in the field for not less than
one year immediately preceding this contract's bid opening date.
Current certificates: Registrations and certifications are

current, and valid for the duration of this contract. Renew
Certifications which expire prior to completion of the TAB work,
in a timely manner so that there is no lapse in registration or
certification. TAB agency or TAB team personnel without a current
registration or current certification are not to perform TAB work
on this contract.
b. TAB Team Members: TAB team approved to accomplish work on this

contract are full-time employees of the TAB agency. No other
personnel is allowed to do TAB work on this contract.
c. Replacement of TAB team members: Replacement of members may occur

if each new member complies with the applicable personnel
qualifications and each is approved by the Contracting Officer.
1.5.2 Tab Standard
Perform TAB in accordance with the requirements of the standard under which
the TAB Firm's qualifications are approved, i.e., AABC MN-1,
NEBB PROCEDURAL STANDARDS, or SMACNA 1780 unless otherwise specified
herein. All recommendations and suggested practices contained in the TAB
Standard are considered mandatory. Use the provisions of the TAB Standard,
including checklists, report forms, etc., as nearly as practical, to
satisfy the Contract requirements. Use the TAB Standard for all aspects of
TAB, including qualifications for the TAB Firm and Specialist and
calibration of TAB instruments. Where the instrument manufacturer
calibration recommendations are more stringent than those listed in the TAB
Standard, adhere to the manufacturer's recommendations.
All quality assurance provisions of the TAB Standard such as performance

guarantees are part of this contract. For systems or system components not
covered in the TAB Standard, TAB procedures must be developed by the TAB
Specialist. Where new procedures, requirements, etc., applicable to the
Contract requirements have been published or adopted by the body
responsible for the TAB Standard used (AABC, NEBB, or TABB), the
requirements and recommendations contained in these procedures and
requirements are considered mandatory, including the latest requirements of
ASHRAE 62.1.
1.5.3.1 TAB Firm
The TAB Firm must be either a member of AABC or certified by the NEBB or
the TABB and certified in all categories and functions where measurements
or performance are specified on the plans and specifications, including TAB
of environmental systems, building systems commissioning, and the
measuring of sound and vibration in environmental systems.
Certification must be maintained for the entire duration of duties

specified herein. If, for any reason, the firm loses subject certification
during this period, the Contractor must immediately notify the Contracting
Officer and submit another TAB Firm for approval. Any firm that has been
the subject of disciplinary action by either the AABC, the NEBB, or the
TABB within the five years preceding Contract Award is not be eligible to
perform any duties related to the HVAC systems, including TAB. All work
specified in this Section and in other related Sections to be performed by
the TAB Firm will be considered invalid if the TAB Firm loses its
certification prior to Contract completion and must be performed by an
approved successor.
These TAB services are to assist the prime Contractor in performing the
quality oversight for which it is responsible. The TAB Firm must be a
prime subcontractor of the Contractor and be financially and corporately
independent of the mechanical subcontractor, reporting directly to and paid
by the Contractor.
1.5.3.2 TAB Specialist
The TAB Specialist must be either a member of AABC,an experienced

technician of the Firm certified by the NEBB, or a Supervisor certified by
the TABB. The certification must be maintained for the entire duration of
duties specified herein. If, for any reason, the Specialist loses subject
certification during this period, immediately notify the Contracting
Officer and submit another TAB Specialist for approval. Any individual
that has been the subject of disciplinary action by either the AABC, the
NEBB, or the TABB within the five years preceding Contract Award is not
eligible to perform any duties related to the HVAC systems, including TAB.
All work specified in this Section and in other related Sections performed
by the TAB Specialist will be considered invalid if the TAB Specialist
loses its certification prior to Contract completion and must be performed
by the approved successor.
1.5.3.3 TAB Specialist Responsibilities
TAB Specialist responsibilities include all TAB work specified herein and
in related sections under his direct guidance. The TAB specialist is
required to be onsite on a daily basis to direct TAB efforts. The TAB
Specialist must participate in the commissioning process specified in
Section 23 08 00.00 10 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC SYSTEMS.
1.5.3.4 Tab Related HVAC Submittals
The TAB Specialist must prepare a list of the submittals from the Contract
Submittal Register that relate to the successful accomplishment of all HVAC
TAB. Accompany the submittals identified on this list with a letter of
approval signed and dated by the TAB Specialist when submitted to the
Government. Ensure that the location and details of ports, terminals,
connections, etc., necessary to perform TAB are identified on the
submittals.
1.5.4 Responsibilities
The Contractor is responsible for ensuring compliance with the requirements

of this section. The following delineation of specific work
responsibilities is specified to facilitate TAB execution of the various
work efforts by personnel from separate organizations. This breakdown of
specific duties is specified to facilitate adherence to the schedule listed
in paragraph entitled "TAB Submittal and Work Schedule."
1.5.4.1 Contractor
a. TAB personnel: Ensure that the TAB work is accomplished by a

group meeting the requirements specified in paragraph entitled
"TAB Personnel Qualification Requirements."
b. Pre-TAB meeting: Attend the meeting with the TAB Supervisor, and
ensure that a representative is present for the sheetmetal
contractor, mechanical contractor, electrical contractor, and
automatic temperature controls contractor.
c. HVAC documentation: Furnish one complete set of the following

HVAC-related documentation to the TAB agency:
(1) Contract drawings and specifications
(2) Approved submittal data for equipment
(3) Construction work schedule
(4) Up-to-date revisions and change orders for the previously

listed items
d. Submittal and work schedules: Ensure that the schedule for

submittals and work required by this section and specified in
paragraph entitled "TAB Submittal and Work Schedule," is met.
e. Coordination of supporting personnel:
Provide the technical personnel, such as factory representatives

or HVAC controls installer required by the TAB field team to
support the TAB field measurement work.
Provide equipment mechanics to operate HVAC equipment and ductwork

mechanics to provide the field designated test ports to enable TAB
field team to accomplish the TAB field measurement work. Ensure
these support personnel are present at the times required by the
TAB team, and cause no delay in the TAB field work.
Conversely, ensure that the HVAC controls installer has required

support from the TAB team field leader to complete the controls
check out.
f. Deficiencies: Ensure that the TAB Agency supervisor submits all

Design/Construction deficiency notifications directly to the
Contracting officer within 3 days after the deficiency is

encountered. Further, ensure that all such notification
submittals are complete with explanation, including documentation,
detailing deficiencies.
g. Prerequisite HVAC work: Complete check out and debugging of HVAC

equipment, ducts, and controls prior to the TAB engineer arriving
at the project site to begin the TAB work. Debugging includes
searching for and eliminating malfunctioning elements in the HVAC
system installations, and verifying all adjustable devices are
functioning as designed. Include as prerequisite work items, the
deficiencies pointed out by the TAB team supervisor in the design
review report.
h. Prior to the TAB field team's arrival, ensure completion of the

applicable inspections and work items listed in the TAB team
supervisor's pre-field engineering report. Do not allow the TAB
team to commence TAB field work until all of the following are
completed.
(1) HVAC system installations are fully complete.
(2) HVAC prerequisite checkout work lists specified in the

paragraph "Pre-Field TAB Engineering Report" are completed,
submitted, and approved. Ensure that the TAB Agency gets a copy
of the approved prerequisite HVAC work checklist.
(4) HVAC system filters are clean for both Season 1 and Season 2
TAB field work.
i. Advance notice: Furnish to the Contracting Officer with advance

written notice for the commencement of the TAB field work.
1.5.4.2 TAB Agency
Provide the services of a TAB team which complies with the requirements of
paragraph entitled "Independent TAB Agency Personnel Qualifications". The
work to be performed by the TAB agency is limited to testing, adjusting,
and balancing of HVAC air and water systems to satisfy the requirements of
this specification section.
1.5.4.3 TAB Team Supervisor
a. Overall management: Supervise and manage the overall TAB team

work effort, including preliminary and technical DALT and TAB
procedures and TAB team field work.
b. Pre-DALT/TAB meeting: Attend meeting with Contractor.
c. Design review report: Review project specifications and

accompanying drawings to verify that the air systems and water
systems are designed in such a way that the TAB engineer can
accomplish the work in compliance with the requirements of this
section. Verify the presence and location of permanently
installed test ports and other devices needed, including gauge
cocks, thermometer wells, flow control devices, circuit setters,

balancing valves, and manual volume dampers.
d. Support required: Specify the technical support personnel

required from the Contractor other than the TAB agency; such as
factory representatives for temperature controls or for complex
equipment. Inform the Contractor in writing of the support
personnel needed and when they are needed. Furnish the notice as
soon as the need is anticipated, either with the design review
report, or the pre-field engineering report, the during the DALT
or TAB field work.
e. Pre-field engineering report: Utilizing the following

HVAC-related documentation; contract drawings and specifications,
approved submittal data for equipment, up-to-date revisions and
change orders; prepare this report.
f. Prerequisite HVAC work checklist: Ensure the Contractor gets a

copy of this checklist at the same time as the pre-field
engineering report is submitted.
g. Technical Assistance for TAB Work: Provide immediate technical

assistance to the TAB field team for the TAB work.
(1) TAB field visit: Near the end of the TAB field work effort,
visit the contract site to inspect the HVAC installation and the
progress of the TAB field work. Conduct site visit full-time for
a minimum of 8 hour workdays duration. Review the TAB final
report data and certify the TAB final report.
h. Certified TAB report: Certify the TAB report. This certification

includes the following work:
(1) Review: Review the TAB field data report. From this field
report, prepare the certified TAB report.
(2) Verification: Verify adherence, by the TAB field team, to

the TAB plan prescribed by the pre-field engineering report and
verify adherence to the procedures specified in this section.
i. Design/Construction deficiencies: Within 3 working days after the

TAB Agency has encountered any design or construction
deficiencies, the TAB Supervisor must submit written notification
directly to the Contracting Officer, with a separate copy to the
Contractor, of all such deficiencies. Provide in this submittal a
complete explanation, including supporting documentation,
detailing deficiencies. Where deficiencies are encountered that
are believed to adversely impact successful completion of TAB, the
TAB Agency must issue notice and request direction in the
notification submittal.
j. TAB Field Check: The TAB team supervisor must attend and
supervise TAB field check.
1.5.4.4 TAB Team Field Leader
a. Field manager: Manage, in the field, the accomplishment of the

work specified in Part 3, "Execution."
b. Full time: Be present at the contract site when DALT field work
or TAB field work is being performed by the TAB team; ensure
day-to-day TAB team work accomplishments are in compliance with
this section.
c. Prerequisite HVAC work: Do not bring the TAB team to the contract
site until a copy of the prerequisite HVAC Checklist, with all
work items certified by the Contractor to be working as designed,
reaches the office of the TAB Agency.
1.5.5 Test Reports
1.5.5.1 Certified TAB Reports
Submit: TAB Report in the following manner:
a. Report format: Submit the completed pre-field data forms approved

in the pre-field TAB Engineering Report completed by TAB field
team, reviewed and certified by the TAB supervisor. Bind the
report with a waterproof front and back cover. Include a table of
contents identifying by page number the location of each report.
Report forms and report data must be typewritten. Handwritten
report forms or report data are not acceptable.
b. Temperatures: On each TAB report form reporting TAB work

accomplished on HVAC thermal energy transfer equipment, include
the indoor and outdoor dry bulb temperature range and indoor and
outdoor wet bulb temperature range within which the TAB data was
recorded. Include in the TAB report continuous time versus
temperature recording data of wet and dry bulb temperatures for
the rooms, or zones, as designated in the following list:
(1) Measure and compile data on a continuous basis for the

period in which TAB work affecting those rooms is being done.
(2) Measure and record data only after the HVAC systems
installations are complete, the systems fully balanced and the
HVAC systems controls operating in fully automatic mode.
(3) Data may be compiled using direct digital controls trend

logging where available. Otherwise, temporarily install
calibrated time versus temperature/humidity recorders for this
purpose. The HVAC systems and controls must be fully operational
a minimum of 24 hours in advance of commencing data compilation.
Include the specified data in the TAB Report.
c. System Diagrams: Provide updated diagrams with final installed

locations of all terminals and devices, any numbering changes, and
actual test locations. Use a key numbering system on the diagram
which identifies each outlet contained in the outlet airflow
report sheets.
d. Static Pressure Profiles: Report static pressure profiles for air

duct systems. Report static pressure data for all supply, return,
relief, exhaust and outside air ducts for the systems listed.
Include the following in the static pressure report data, in
addition to AABC/NEBB/TABB required data:
(1) Report supply fan, return fan, relief fan, and exhaust fan
inlet and discharge static pressures.
(2) Report static pressure drop across chilled water coils, DX

coils, hot water coils, steam coils, electric resistance heating
coils and heat reclaim devices installed in unit cabinetry or the
system ductwork.
(3) Report static pressure drop across outside air, return air,
and supply air automatic control dampers, both proportional and
two-position, installed in unit cabinetry.
(4) Report static pressure drop across air filters, acoustic

silencers, moisture eliminators, air flow straighteners, air flow
measuring stations or other pressure drop producing specialty
items installed in unit cabinetry, or in the system ductwork.
Examples of these specialty items are smoke detectors, white sound
generators, RF shielding, wave guides, security bars, blast
valves, small pipes passing through ductwork, and duct mounted
humidifiers.
Do not report static pressure drop across duct fittings provided

for the sole purpose of conveying air, such as elbows,
transitions, offsets, plenums, manual dampers, and branch
takes-offs.
(5) Report static pressure drop across outside air and

relief/exhaust air louvers.
e. Instruments: List the types of instruments actually used to

measure the tab data. Include in the listing each instrument's
unique identification number, calibration date, and calibration
expiration date.
Instrumentation, used for taking wet bulb temperature readings

must provide accuracy of plus or minus 5 percent at the measured
face velocities. Submit instrument manufacturer's literature to
document instrument accuracy performance is in compliance with
that specified.
f. Certification: Include the typed name of the TAB supervisor and

the dated signature of the TAB supervisor.
g. Performance Curves: The TAB Supervisor must include, in the TAB

Reports, factory pump curves and fan curves for pumps and fans
TAB'd on the job.
h. Calibration Curves: The TAB Supervisor must include, in the TAB

Reports, a factory calibration curve for installed flow control
balancing valves, flow venturi's and flow orifices TAB'd on the
job.
1.6.1 Projects with Phased Construction
This specification section is structured as though the HVAC construction,

and thereby the TAB work, will be completed in a single phase. When the
construction is completed in phases, the TAB work must be planned,
completed, and accepted for each construction phase.
1.6.1.1 Phasing of Work
This specification section is structured as though the HVAC construction,

and thereby the TAB work, is going to be completed in a single phase. All
elements of the TAB work are addressed on this premise. When a contract is
to be completed in construction phases, including the TAB work, and the
DALT work, the TAB work must be planned for, completed and approved by the
Contracting Officer with each phase. An example of this case would be one
contract that requires the rehabilitation of the HVAC in each of several
separated buildings. At the completion of the final phase, compile all
approved reports and submit as one document.
1.6.2 TAB Submittal and Work Schedule
Submit this schedule,and TAB Schematic Drawings, adapted for this

particular contract, to the Contracting Officer (CO) for review and
approval. Include with the submittal the planned calendar dates for each
submittal or work item. Resubmit an updated version for CO approval every
90 calendar days days. Compliance with the following schedule is the
Contractor's responsibility.
Qualify TAB Personnel: Within 45 calendar days after date of

contract award, submit TAB agency and personnel qualifications.
Pre-DALT/TAB Meeting: Within 30 calendar days after the date of

approval of the TAB agency and personnel, meet with the
Contracting Officer's TAB representative.
Design Review Report: Within 60 calendar days after the date of

the TAB agency personnel qualifications approval, submit design
review report.
Pre-Field TAB Engineering Report: Within 15 calendar days after

approval of the TAB agency Personnel Qualifications, submit the
Pre-Field TAB Engineering Report.
Prerequisite HVAC Work Check Out List and Advanced Notice For
TAB Field Work: At a minimum of 115 calendar days prior to CCD,
submit prerequisite HVAC work check out list certified as
complete, and submit advance notice of commencement of TAB field
work.
TAB Field Work: At a minimum of 90 calendar days prior to CCD,

and when the ambient temperature is within cooling season limits,
accomplish TAB field work; submit TAB report; and conduct field
check.
Complete TAB Work: Prior to CCD, complete all TAB work .
1.6.2.1 Design Review Report
Submit typed report describing omissions and deficiencies in the HVAC

system's design that would preclude the TAB team from accomplishing the
duct leakage testing work and the TAB work requirements of this section.
Provide a complete explanation including supporting documentation detailing
the design deficiency. State that no deficiencies are evident if that is
the case.
1.6.2.2 Pre-Field TAB Engineering Report
Submit report containing the following information:
a. Step-by-step TAB procedure:
(1) Strategy: Describe the method of approach to the TAB field

work from start to finish. Include in this description a complete
methodology for accomplishing each seasonal TAB field work session.
(2) Air System Diagrams: Use the contract drawings and duct
fabrication drawings if available to provide air system diagrams
in the report showing the location of all terminal outlet supply,
return, exhaust and transfer registers, grilles and diffusers. Use
a key numbering system on the diagrams which identifies each
outlet contained in the outlet airflow report sheets. Show
intended locations of all traverses and static pressure readings.
(3) Procedural steps: Delineate fully the intended procedural

steps to be taken by the TAB field team to accomplish the required
TAB work of each air distribution system and each water
distribution system. Include intended procedural steps for TAB
work for subsystems and system components.
b. Pre-field data: Submit AABC or NEBB or SMACNA 1780 data report

forms with the following pre-field information filled in:
(1) Design data obtained from system drawings, specifications,

and approved submittals.
(2) Notations detailing additional data to be obtained from the

contract site by the TAB field team.
(3) Designate the actual data to be measured in the TAB field

work.
(4) Provide a list of the types of instruments, and the measuring

range of each, which are anticipated to be used for measuring in
the TAB field work. By means of a keying scheme, specify on each
TAB data report form submitted, which instruments will be used for
measuring each item of TAB data. If the selection of which
instrument to use, is to be made in the field, specify from which
instruments the choice will be made. Place the instrument key
number in the blank space where the measured data would be entered.
c. Prerequisite HVAC work checkout list: Provide a list of

inspections and work items which are to be completed by the
Contractor. This list must be acted upon and completed by the
Contractor and then submitted and approved by the Contracting
Officer prior to the TAB team coming to the contract site.
At a minimum, a list of the applicable inspections and work items

listed in the NEBB PROCEDURAL STANDARDS, Section III, "Preliminary
TAB Procedures" under paragraphs titled, "Air Distribution System
Inspection" and "Hydronic Distribution System Inspection" must be
provided for each separate system to be TAB'd.
1.7 WARRANTY
Furnish workmanship and performance warranty for the TAB system work
performed for a period not less than 1 year from the date of Government
acceptance of the work; issued directly to the Government. Include
provisions that if within the warranty period the system shows evidence of
major performance deterioration, or is significantly out of tolerance,
resulting from defective TAB or DALT workmanship, the corrective repair or
replacement of the defective materials and correction of the defective
workmanship is the responsibility of the TAB firm. Perform corrective
action that becomes necessary because of defective materials and
workmanship while system TAB and DALT is under warranty 7 days after
Officer. Failure to perform repairs within the specified period of time
constitutes grounds for having the corrective action and repairs performed
by others and the cost billed to the TAB firm. The Contractor must also
provide a 1 year contractor installation warranty.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 WORK DESCRIPTIONS OF PARTICIPANTS
Comply with requirements of this section.
3.2 TAB PROCEDURES
3.2.1 TAB Field Work
Test, adjust, and balance the listed HVAC systems to the state of operation
indicated on and specified in the contract design documents. That is,
comply with the the requirements of AABC MN-1 , or SMACNA 1780 (TABB) and
SMACNA 1858 (TABB),except as supplemented and modified by this section.
Provide instruments and consumables required to accomplish the TAB work.
Calibrate and maintain instruments in accordance with manufacturer's
written procedures.
Test, adjust, and balance the listed HVAC systems to the state of operation
indicated on and specified in the contract design documents. Conduct TAB
work, including measurement accuracy, and sound measurement work in
conformance with the AABC MN-1 and AABC MN-4, or NEBB TABES and NEBB MASV,
or SMACNA 1780 (used by TABB) and SMACNA 1858 sound measurement
procedures, except as supplemented and modified by this section.
3.2.2 Preliminary Procedures
Use the approved pre-field engineering report as instructions and

procedures for accomplishing TAB field work. TAB engineer is to locate, in
the field, test ports required for testing. It is the responsibility of
the sheet metal contractor to provide and install test ports as required by
the TAB engineer.
3.2.3 TAB Air Distribution Systems
3.2.3.1 Units With Coils
Report heating and cooling performance capacity tests for hot water,
chilled water, DX and steam coils for the purpose of verifying that the
coils meet the indicated design capacity. Submit the following data and
calculations with the coil test reports:
a. For air handlers with capacities greater than 7.5 tons (90,000 Btu)
cooling, such as factory manufactured units, central built-up
units and rooftop units, conduct capacity tests in accordance with
AABC MN-4, procedure 3.5, "Coil Capacity Testing."
Do not determine entering and leaving wet and dry bulb

temperatures by single point measurement, but by the average of
multiple readings in compliance with paragraph 3.5-5,
"Procedures", (in subparagraph d.) of AABC MN-4, Procedure 3.5,
"Coil Capacity Testing."
Submit part-load coil performance data from the coil manufacturer

converting test conditions to design conditions; use the data for
the purpose of verifying that the coils meet the indicated design
capacity in compliance with AABC MN-4, Procedure 3.5, "Coil
Capacity Testing," paragraph 3.5.7, "Actual Capacity Vs. Design
Capacity" (in subparagraph c.).
b. For units with capacities of 7.5 tons (90,000 Btu) or less, such
as fan coil units, duct mounted reheat coils associated with VAV
terminal units, and unitary units, such as through-the-wall heat
pumps:
Determine the apparent coil capacity by calculations using single

point measurement of entering and leaving wet and dry bulb
temperatures; submit the calculations with the coil reports.
3.2.3.2 Air Handling Units
Air handling unit systems including fans (air handling unit fans, exhaust
fans and winter ventilation fans), coils, ducts, plenums, mixing boxes,
terminal units, variable air volume boxes, and air distribution devices for
supply air, return air, outside air, mixed air relief air, and makeup air.
3.2.3.3 Fan Coils
Fan coil unit systems including fans, coils, ducts, plenums, and air
distribution devices for supply air, return air, and outside air.
3.2.3.4 Exhaust Fans
Exhaust fan systems including fans, ducts, plenums, grilles, and hoods for
exhaust air.
3.2.3.5 Unit Heaters
3.2.4 TAB Water Distribution Systems
3.2.4.1 Condenser Water
Water Source Heat Pump Condenser water loop systems including water source
heat pump condensers, cooling towers, pumps, coils, system balance valves
and flow measuring devices.
3.2.4.2 Heating Hot Water
Heating hot water systems including boilers, hot water converters (e.g.,
heat exchangers), pumps, coils, system balancing valves and flow measuring
devices.
3.2.5 TAB Work on Performance Tests With Seasonal Limitations
3.2.5.1 Performance Tests
Accomplish proportionate balancing TAB work on the air distribution systems

and water distribution systems, in other words, accomplish adjusting and
balancing of the air flows and water flows, any time during the duration of
this contract, subject to the limitations specified elsewhere in this
section. However, accomplish, within the following seasonal limitations,
TAB work on HVAC systems which directly transfer thermal energy.
3.2.5.2 Season Of Maximum Load
Visit the contract site for at least two TAB work sessions for TAB field
measurements. Visit the contract site during the season of maximum cooling
load, the goal being to TAB the operational performance of the cooling
systems under their respective maximum outdoor environment-caused loading.
During the seasonal limitations, TAB the operational performance of the
heating systemsand cooling systems.
3.2.5.3 Ambient Temperatures
On each tab report form used for recording data, record the outdoor and
indoor ambient dry bulb temperature range and the outdoor and indoor
ambient wet bulb temperature range within which the report form's data was
recorded. Record these temperatures at beginning and at the end of data
taking.
3.2.5.4 Refrigeration Units
For refrigeration compressors/condensers/condensing units,report data as

required by NEBB Form TAB 15-83, NEBB PROCEDURAL STANDARDS, including
refrigeration operational data.
3.2.5.5 Coils
Report heating and cooling performance capacity tests for hot water,
condenser water, DX for the purpose of verifying that the coils meet the
indicated design capacity. Submit the following data and calculations with
the coil test reports:
a. For Central station air handlers with capacities greater than 7.5
tons (90,000 Btu) cooling, such as factory manufactured units,
central built-up units and rooftop units, conduct capacity tests

in accordance with AABC MN-4, procedure 3.5, "Coil Capacity
Testing."
Entering and leaving wet and dry bulb temperatures are not
determined by single point measurement, but by the average of
multiple readings in compliance with paragraph 3.5-5,
"Procedures", (in subparagraph d.) of AABC MN-4, Procedure 3.5,
"Coil Capacity Testing."
Submit part-load coil performance data from the coil manufacturer

converting test conditions to design conditions; use the data for
the purpose of verifying that the coils meet the indicated design
capacity in compliance with AABC MN-4, Procedure 3.5, "Coil
Capacity Testing," paragraph 3.5.7, "Actual Capacity Vs. Design
Capacity" (in subparagraph c.).
b. For units with capacities of 7.5 tons (90,000 Btu) or less, such
as fan coil units, duct mounted reheat coils associated with VAV
terminal units, and unitary units, such as through-the-wall heat
pumps:
Determine the apparent coil capacity by calculations using single

point measurement of entering and leaving wet and dry bulb
temperatures; submit the calculations with the coil reports.
3.2.6 Workmanship
Conduct TAB work on specified HVAC systems, as installed, until measured

flow rates are equal to the design flow rates as specified or indicated on
the contract documents. This TAB work includes adjustment of balancing
valves, balancing dampers, and sheaves. Further, this TAB work includes
changing out fan sheaves and pump impellers if required to obtain air and
water flow rates specified or indicated. If, with these adjustments and
equipment changes, the specified or indicated design flow rates cannot be
attained, contact the Contracting Officer for direction.
3.2.7 Deficiencies
Strive to meet the intent of this section to maximize the performance of

the equipment as designed and installed. However, if deficiencies in
equipment design or installation prevent TAB work from being accomplished
within the range of design values specified in the paragraph entitled
"Workmanship," provide written notice as soon as possible to the Contractor
and the Contracting Officer describing the deficiency and recommended
correction.
Responsibility for correction of installation deficiencies is the

Contractor's. If a deficiency is in equipment design, call the TAB team
supervisor for technical assistance. Responsibility for reporting design
deficiencies to Contractor is the TAB team supervisor's.
3.2.8 TAB Reports
After completion of the TAB work, prepare a pre-final TAB report using the
reporting forms approved in the pre-field engineering report. Data
required by those approved data report forms is to be furnished by the TAB
team. Except as approved otherwise in writing by the Contracting Officer,
the TAB work and the TAB report is considered incomplete until the TAB work
is accomplished to within the accuracy range specified in the paragraph

entitled "Workmanship" of this section.
Prepare the report neatly and legibly; the pre-final TAB report is the
final TAB report minus the TAB supervisor's review and certification.
Obtain, at the contract site, the TAB supervisor's review and certification
of the TAB report.
Verbally notify the Contracting Officer's TAB representative that the field
check of the TAB report data can commence; give this verbal notice 48 hours
in advance of field check commencement. Do not schedule field check of the
TAB report until the specified workmanship requirements have been met or
written approval of the deviations from the requirements have been received
from the Contracting Officer.
3.2.9 Quality Assurance - COTR TAB Field Acceptance Testing
3.2.9.1 TAB Field Acceptance Testing
During the field acceptance testing, verify, in the presence of the

Contracting Officer's TAB representative, random selections of data (water,
air quantities, air motion, ) recorded in the TAB Report. Points and
areas for field acceptance testing are to be selected by the Contracting
Officer's TAB representative. Measurement and test procedures are the same
as approved for TAB work for the TAB Report.
Field acceptance testing includes verification of TAB Report data recorded

for the following equipment groups:
Group 1: All chillers, boilers, return fans, computer room units, and
air handling units (rooftop and central stations).
Group 2: 25% of the VAV terminal boxes and associated diffusers and
registers.
Group 3: 25% of the supply diffusers, registers, grilles associated

with constant volume air handling units.
Group 4: 25% of the return grilles, return registers, exhaust grilles

and exhaust registers.
Group 5: 25% of the supply fans, exhaust fans, and pumps.
Further, if any data on the TAB Report for Groups 2 through 5 is found not
to fall within the range of plus 5 to minus 5 percent of the TAB Report
data, additional group data verification is required in the presence of the
COTR. Verify TAB Report data for one additional piece of equipment in
that group. Continue this additional group data verification until
out-of-tolerance data ceases to be found.
3.2.9.2 Additional COTR TAB Field Acceptance Testing
If any of the acceptance testing measurements for a given equipment group

is found not to fall within the range of plus 5 to minus 5 percent of the
TAB Report data, terminate data verification for all affected data for that
group. The affected data for the given group will be disapproved. Make
the necessary corrections and prepare a revised TAB Report. Reschedule
acceptance testing of the revised report data with the Contracting
Officer's TAB representative.
Further, if any data on the TAB Report for a given field acceptance test
group is out-of-tolerance, then field test data for one additional field
test group as specified herein. Continue this increase field test work
until out-of-tolerance data ceases to to be found. This additional field
testing is up and above the original 25 percent of the of reported data
entries to be field tested.
If there are no more similar field test groups from which to choose,
additional field testing from another, but different, type of field testing
group must be tested.
3.2.9.3 Prerequisite for Approval
Compliance with the field acceptance testing requirements of this section

is a prerequisite for the final Contracting Officer approval of the TAB
Report submitted.
3.3 MARKING OF SETTINGS
Upon the final TAB work approval, permanently mark the settings of HVAC
adjustment devices including valves, gauges, splitters, and dampers so that
adjustment can be restored if disturbed at any time. Provide permanent
markings clearly indicating the settings on the adjustment devices which
result in the data reported on the submitted TAB report.
3.4 MARKING OF TEST PORTS
The TAB team is to permanently and legibly mark and identify the location
points of the duct test ports. If the ducts have exterior insulation, make
these markings on the exterior side of the duct insulation. Show the
location of test ports on the as-built mechanical drawings with dimensions
given where the test port is covered by exterior insulation.
SECTION 23 07 00
THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

basic designation only. At the discretion of the Government, the
manufacturer of any material supplied will be required to furnish test
reports pertaining to any of the tests necessary to assure compliance with
the standard or standards referenced in this specification.

ENGINEERS (ASHRAE)

Edition

Strip
ASTM A 240/A 240M (2009) Standard Specification for Chromium

and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate,
Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and
for General Applications

Stainless Steel Wire

ASTM C 1126 (2004) Standard Specification for Faced or

Unfaced Rigid Cellular Phenolic Thermal
Insulation

Flexible, Low Permeance Vapor Retarders
for Thermal Insulation

Flexible Fibrous Glass Blanket Insulation
Used to Externally Insulate HVAC Ducts
ASTM C 1427 (2007) Specification for Preformed

Flexible Cellular Polyolefin Thermal
Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form

Fiber Thermal Insulating Cement

Fiber Hydraulic-Setting Thermal Insulating
and Finishing Cement
ASTM C 533 (2007) Standard Specification for Calcium

Silicate Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation

Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular
Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular
Form

Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation


Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for
Commercial and Industrial Applications

Thermal Insulation
ASTM C 610 (2007) Standard Specification for Molded

Expanded Perlite Block and Pipe Thermal
Insulation
ASTM C 612 (2004e1) Mineral Fiber Block and Board

Thermal Insulation
ASTM C 647 (2008) Properties and Tests of Mastics and

Coating Finishes for Thermal Insulation

ASTM C 795 (2008) Standard Specification for Thermal

Insulation for Use in Contact with
Austenitic Stainless Steel
ASTM C 916 (1985; R 2007) Standard Specification for

Adhesives for Duct Thermal Insulation

ASTM C 921 (2003a) Standard Practice for Determining

the Properties of Jacketing Materials for
Thermal Insulation
ASTM D 774/D 774M (1997; R 2007) Bursting Strength of Paper
ASTM D 882 (2009) Tensile Properties of Thin Plastic

Sheeting
ASTM E 2231 (2007a) Specimen Preparation and Mounting

of Pipe and Duct Insulation Materials to
Assess Surface Burning Characteristics
ASTM E 84 (2009) Standard Test Method for Surface

Materials


INDUSTRY (MSS)

MIDWEST INSULATION CONTRACTORS ASSOCIATION (MICA)
MICA Insulation Stds (1999) National Commercial & Industrial

Insulation Standards
NFPA 255 (2005; Errata 2006) Standard Method of

Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of
Building Materials
MIL-A-3316 (Rev C; Am 2) Adhesives, Fire-Resistant,

Thermal Insulation
UL 723 (2008) Standard for Test for Surface

Materials
1.2.1 General
Provide field-applied insulation and accessories on mechanical systems as

specified herein; factory-applied insulation is specified under the piping,
duct or equipment to be insulated. Field applied insulation materials
required for use on Government-furnished items as listed in the SPECIAL
CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor.
1.2.2 Surface Burning Characteristics
Unless otherwise specified, insulation shall have a maximum flame spread

index of 25 and a maximum smoke developed index of 50 when tested in
accordance with ASTM E 84. Flame spread, and smoke developed indexes,
shall be determined by ASTM E 84, NFPA 255 or UL 723. Insulation shall be
tested in the same density and installed thickness as the material to be

used in the actual construction. Test specimens shall be prepared and
mounted according to ASTM E 2231. Insulation materials located exterior to
the building perimeter are not required to be fire rated.
Provide thermal insulation containing recycled materials to the extent

practicable, provided that the materials meets all other requirements of
this section. The minimum recycled material content of the following
insulation are:
Rock Wool - 75 percent slag of weight

Fiberglass - 20-25 percent glass cullet by weight
Rigid Foam - 9 percent recovered material
1.3 SUBMITTALS

Submit the three SD types, SD-02 Shop Drawings, SD-03 Product Data, and
SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions at the same time for each system.
SD-02 Shop Drawings
MICA Plates
Pipe Insulation Systems and Associated Accessories
Duct Insulation Systems and Associated Accessories
Equipment Insulation Systems and Associated Accessories
A booklet containing completed MICA Insulation Stds plates

detailing each insulating system for each pipe, duct, or equipment
insulating system, after approval of materials and prior to
applying insulation.
a. The MICA plates shall detail the materials to be installed and

the specific insulation application. Submit all MICA plates
required showing the entire insulating system, including plates
required to show insulation penetrations, vessel bottom and top
heads, legs, and skirt insulation as applicable. The MICA plates
shall present all variations of insulation systems including
locations, materials, vaporproofing, jackets and insulation
accessories.
b. If the Contractor elects to submit detailed drawings instead

of edited MICA Plates, the detail drawings shall be technically
equivalent to the edited MICA Plate submittal.
SD-03 Product Data
Pipe Insulation Systems

Duct Insulation Systems
Equipment Insulation Systems
A complete list of materials, including manufacturer's
descriptive technical literature, performance data, catalog cuts,

and installation instructions. The product number, k-value,
thickness and furnished accessories including adhesives, sealants
and jackets for each mechanical system requiring insulation shall
be included. The product data must be copywrited, have an
identifying or publication number, and shall have been published
prior to the issuance date of this solicitation. Materials
furnished under this section of the specification shall be
submitted together in a booklet and in conjunction with the MICA
plates booklet (SD-02). Annotate the product data to indicate
which MICA plate is applicable.
Pipe Insulation Systems

Duct Insulation Systems
Equipment Insulation Systems
Submit a booklet containing manufacturer's published installation

instructions for the insulation systems in coordination with the
submitted MICA Insulation Stds plates booklet. Annotate their
installation instructions to indicate which product data and which
MICA plate are applicable. The instructions must be copywrited,
have an identifying or publication number, and shall have been
published prior to the issuance date of this solicitation.
Qualified installers shall have successfully completed three or more

similar type jobs within the last 5 years.
Materials shall be delivered in the manufacturer's unopened containers.

Materials delivered and placed in storage shall be provided with protection
from weather, humidity, dirt, dust and other contaminants. The Contracting
Officer may reject insulation material and supplies that become dirty,
dusty, wet, or contaminated by some other means. Packages or standard
containers of insulation, jacket material, cements, adhesives, and coatings
delivered for use, and samples required for approval shall have
manufacturer's stamp or label attached giving the name of the manufacturer
and brand, and a description of the material. Insulation packages and
containers shall be asbestos free.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Provide materials which are the standard products of manufacturers

regularly engaged in the manufacture of such products and that essentially
duplicate items that have been in satisfactory use for at least 2 years
prior to bid opening. Provide insulation systems in accordance with the
approved MICA National Insulation Standards plates as supplemented by this
specification. Provide field-applied insulation for heating, ventilating,
and cooling (HVAC) air distribution systems and piping systems which are
located within, on, under, and adjacent to buildings; and for plumbing
systems.
2.2 MATERIALS
Provide insulation that meets or exceed the requirements of ASHRAE 90.1 - IP.
Insulation exterior shall be cleanable, grease resistant, non-flaking and
non-peeling. Materials shall be compatible and shall not contribute to
corrosion, soften, or otherwise attack surfaces to which applied in either
wet or dry state. Materials to be used on stainless steel surfaces shall
meet ASTM C 795 requirements. Materials shall be asbestos free and conform
to the following:
2.2.1 Adhesives
2.2.1.1 Acoustical Lining Insulation Adhesive
Adhesive shall be a nonflammable, fire-resistant adhesive conforming to

ASTM C 916, Type I.
2.2.1.2 Mineral Fiber Insulation Cement
Cement shall be in accordance with ASTM C 195.
2.2.1.3 Lagging Adhesive
Lagging is the material used for thermal insulation, especially around a

cylindrical object. This may include the insulation as well as the
cloth/material covering the insulation. Lagging adhesives shall be
nonflammable and fire-resistant and shall have a maximum flame spread index
of 25 and a maximum smoke developed index of 50 when tested in accordance
with ASTM E 84. Adhesive shall be MIL-A-3316, Class 1, pigmented white and
be suitable for bonding fibrous glass cloth to faced and unfaced fibrous
glass insulation board; for bonding cotton brattice cloth to faced and
unfaced fibrous glass insulation board; for sealing edges of and bonding
glass tape to joints of fibrous glass board; for bonding lagging cloth to
thermal insulation; or Class 2 for attaching fibrous glass insulation to
metal surfaces. Lagging adhesives shall be applied in strict accordance
with the manufacturer's recommendations for pipe and duct insulation.
2.2.2 Contact Adhesive
Adhesives may be any of, but not limited to, the neoprene based, rubber
based, or elastomeric type that have a maximum flame spread index of 25 and
a maximum smoke developed index of 50 when tested in accordance with
ASTM E 84. The adhesive shall not adversely affect, initially or in
service, the insulation to which it is applied, nor shall it cause any
corrosive effect on metal to which it is applied. Any solvent dispersing
medium or volatile component of the adhesive shall have no objectionable
odor and shall not contain any benzene or carbon tetrachloride. The dried
adhesive shall not emit nauseous, irritating, or toxic volatile matters or
aerosols when the adhesive is heated to any temperature up to 212 degrees F.
The dried adhesive shall be nonflammable and fire resistant. Natural
cross-ventilation, local (mechanical) pickup, and/or general area
(mechanical) ventilation shall be used to prevent an accumulation of
solvent vapors, keeping in mind the ventilation pattern must remove any
heavier-than-air solvent vapors from lower levels of the workspaces.
Gloves and spectacle-type safety glasses are recommended in accordance with
safe installation practices.
2.2.3 Caulking
ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use A.
2.2.4 Corner Angles
Nominal 0.016 inch aluminum 1 by 1 inch with factory applied kraft

backing. Aluminum shall be ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3105, or 5005.
2.2.5 Finishing Cement
ASTM C 449: Mineral fiber hydraulic-setting thermal insulating and

finishing cement. All cements that may come in contact with Austenitic
stainless steel must comply with ASTM C 795.
2.2.6 Fibrous Glass Cloth and Glass Tape
Fibrous glass cloth, with 20X20 maximum mesh size, and glass tape shall
have maximum flame spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke developed index
of 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. Tape shall be 4 inch wide
rolls. Class 3 tape shall be 4.5 ounces/square yard.
2.2.7 Staples
Outward clinching type monel.
2.2.8 Jackets
2.2.8.1 Aluminum Jackets
Aluminum jackets shall be corrugated, embossed or smooth sheet, 0.016 inch

nominal thickness; ASTM B 209, Temper H14, Temper H16, Alloy 3003, 5005,
or 3105. Corrugated aluminum jacket shall not be used outdoors. Aluminum
jacket securing bands shall be Type 304 stainless steel, 0.015 inch thick,
1/2 inch wide for pipe under 12 inch diameter and 3/4 inch wide for pipe
over 12 inch and larger diameter. Aluminum jacket circumferential seam
bands shall be 2 by 0.016 inch aluminum matching jacket material. Bands
for insulation below ground shall be 3/4 by 0.020 inch thick stainless
steel, or fiberglass reinforced tape. The jacket may, at the option of the
Contractor, be provided with a factory fabricated Pittsburgh or "Z" type
longitudinal joint. When the "Z" joint is used, the bands at the
circumferential joints shall be designed by the manufacturer to seal the
joints and hold the jacket in place.
2.2.8.2 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Jackets
Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) jacket and fitting covers shall have high impact
strength, UV resistant rating or treatment and moderate chemical resistance
with minimum thickness 0.030 inch.
2.2.8.3 Vapor Barrier/Weatherproofing Jacket
Vapor barrier/weatherproofing jacket shall be laminated self-adhesive,

greater than 3 plys standard grade, silver, white, black and embossed or
greater than 8 ply (minimum 2.9 mils adhesive); with 0.0000 permeability
when tested in accordance with ASTM E 96/E 96M; heavy duty, white or
natural; and UV resistant.
2.2.9 Vapor Retarder Required
ASTM C 921, Type I, minimum puncture resistance 50 Beach units on all

surfaces except concealed ductwork, where a minimum puncture resistance of
25 Beach units is acceptable. Minimum tensile strength, 35 pounds/inch
width. ASTM C 921, Type II, minimum puncture resistance 25 Beach units,
tensile strength minimum 20 pounds/inch width. Jackets used on insulation
exposed in finished areas shall have white finish suitable for painting
without sizing. Based on the application, insulation materials that
require factory applied jackets are mineral fiber, cellular glass,
polyisocyanurate, and phenolic foam. Insulation materials that do not
require jacketing are flexible elastomerics. All non-metallic jackets
shall have a maximum flame spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke developed
index of 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.
2.2.9.1 White Vapor Retarder All Service Jacket (ASJ)
Standard reinforced fire retardant jacket for use on hot/cold pipes, ducts,
or equipment. Vapor retarder jackets used on insulation exposed in
finished areas shall have white finish suitable for painting without sizing.
2.2.9.2 Vapor Retarder/Vapor Barrier Mastic Coatings
a. The vapor barrier shall be self adhesive (minimum 2 mils adhesive,

3 mils embossed) greater than 3 plys standard grade, silver, white,
black and embossed white jacket for use on hot/cold pipes. Less than
0.02 permeability when tested in accordance with ASTM E 96/E 96M.
Meeting UL 723 or ASTM E 84 flame and smoke requirements; UV resistant.
b. The vapor retarder coating shall be fire and water resistant and
appropriately selected for either outdoor or indoor service. Color
shall be white. The water vapor permeance of the compound shall be
determined according to procedure B of ASTM E 96/E 96M utilizing
apparatus described in ASTM E 96/E 96M. The coating shall be a
nonflammable, fire resistant type. All other application and service
properties shall be in accordance with ASTM C 647.
2.2.9.3 Laminated Film Vapor Retarder
ASTM C 1136, Type I, maximum moisture vapor transmission 0.02 perms,

minimum puncture resistance 50 Beach units on all surfaces except concealed
ductwork, where Type II, maximum moisture vapor transmission 0.02 perms, a
minimum puncture resistance of 25 Beach units is acceptable. Vapor
retarder shall have a maximum flame spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke
developed index of 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.
2.2.9.4 Polyvinylidene Chloride (PVDC) Film Vapor Retarder
The PVDC film vapor retarder shall have a maximum moisture vapor
transmission of 0.02 perms, minimum puncture resistance of 150 Beach units,
a minimum tensile strength in any direction of 30 lb/inch when tested in
accordance with ASTM D 882, and a maximum flame spread index of 25 and a
maximum smoke developed index of 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.
2.2.9.5 Polyvinylidene Chloride Vapor Retarder Adhesive Tape
Requirements must meet the same as specified for Laminated Film Vapor
Retarder above.
2.2.9.6 Vapor Barrier
The vapor barrier shall be greater than 3 ply self adhesive laminate -white
vapor barrier jacket- superior performance (less than 0.0000 permeability
when tested in accordance with ASTM E 96/E 96M). Vapor barrier shall meet
UL 723 or ASTM E 84 25 flame and 50 smoke requirements; and UV resistant.
Minimum burst strength 185 psi in accordance with ASTM D 774/D 774M.
Tensile strength 68 lb/inch width (PSTC-1000). Tape shall be as specified
for laminated film vapor barrier above.
2.2.10 Vapor Retarder Not Required
ASTM C 921, Type II, Class D, minimum puncture resistance 50 Beach units on
all surfaces except ductwork, where Type IV, maximum moisture vapor
transmission 0.10, a minimum puncture resistance of 25 Beach units is
acceptable. Jacket shall have a maximum flame spread index of 25 and a
maximum smoke developed index of 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.
2.2.11 Wire
Soft annealed ASTM A 580/A 580M Type 302, 304 or 316 stainless steel, 16 or
18 gauge.
2.2.12 Insulation Bands
Insulation bands shall be 1/2 inch wide; 26 gauge stainless steel.
2.2.13 Sealants
Sealants shall be chosen from the butyl polymer type, the styrene-butadiene
rubber type, or the butyl type of sealants. Sealants shall have a maximum
moisture vapor transmission of 0.02 perms, and a maximum flame spread index
of 25 and a maximum smoke developed index of 50 when tested in accordance
with ASTM E 84.
2.3 PIPE INSULATION SYSTEMS
Insulation materials shall conform to Table 1. Insulation thickness shall

be as listed in Table 2 and meet or exceed the requirements of
ASHRAE 90.1 - IP. . Comply with EPA requirements in accordance with
Section 01 62 35 RECYCLED / RECOVERED MATERIALS. Pipe insulation materials
shall be limited to those listed herein and shall meet the following
requirements:
2.3.1 Aboveground Cold Pipeline ( -30 to 60 deg. F)
Insulation for outdoor, indoor, exposed or concealed applications, shall be

as follows:
a. Cellular Glass: ASTM C 552, Type II, and Type III. Supply the
insulation with manufacturer's recommended factory-applied jacket/vapor
barrier.
b. Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Insulation: ASTM C 534/C 534M, Grade

1, Type I or II. Type II shall have vapor retarder/vapor barrier skin
on one or both sides of the insulation. Insulation with pre-applied
adhesive shall not be used.
c. Phenolic Insulation: ASTM C 1126, Type III. Phenolic insulations
shall comply with ASTM C 795 and with the ASTM C 665 paragraph
Corrosiveness. Supply the insulation with manufacturer's recommended
factory-applied jacket/vapor barrier.
d. Polyisocyanurate Insulation: ASTM C 591, type I. Supply the

insulation with manufacturer's recommended factory-applied vapor
retarder/vapor barrier. Insulation with pre-applied adhesive shall not
be used.
e. Flexible Polyolefin Cellular Insulation: ASTM C 1427, Grade 1 Type

I or II.
f. Mineral Fiber Insulation with Integral Wicking Material (MFIWM):

ASTM C 547. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
2.3.2 Aboveground Hot Pipeline (Above 60 deg. F)
Insulation for outdoor, indoor, exposed or concealed applications shall

meet the following requirements. Supply the insulation with manufacturer's
recommended factory-applied jacket/vapor barrier.
a. Mineral Fiber: ASTM C 547, Types I, II or III, supply the

insulation with manufacturer's recommended factory-applied jacket.
b. Calcium Silicate: ASTM C 533, Type I indoor only, or outdoors above

250 degrees F pipe temperature. Supply insulation with the
manufacturer's recommended factory-applied jacket/vapor barrier.
c. Cellular Glass: ASTM C 552, Type II and Type III. Supply the
insulation with manufacturer's recommended factory-applied jacket.
d. Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Insulation: ASTM C 534/C 534M, Grade

1, Type I or II to 200 degrees F service.
e. Phenolic Insulation: ASTM C 1126 Type III to 250 degrees F service

shall comply with ASTM C 795. Supply the insulation with
manufacturer's recommended factory-applied jacket/vapor barrier.
f. Perlite Insulation: ASTM C 610
g. Polyisocyanurate Insulation: ASTM C 591, Type 1, to 300 degrees F

service. Supply the insulation with manufacturer's recommended factory
applied jacket/vapor barrier.
h. Flexible Polyolefin Cellular Insulation: ASTM C 1427, Grade 1 Type

I or II to 200 degrees F.
2.3.3 Below-ground Pipeline Insulation
For below-ground pipeline insulation the following requirements shall be

met.
2.3.3.1 Cellular Glass
ASTM C 552, type II.
2.3.3.2 Polyisocyanurate
ASTM C 591, Type 1, to 300 degrees F.
2.4 DUCT INSULATION SYSTEMS
2.4.1 Duct Insulation
Provide factory-applied cellular glass polyisocyanurate or phenolic foam.

Provide factory applied elastomeric closed cell or phenolic foam insulation
according to manufacturer's recommendations for insulation with insulation
manufacturer's standard reinforced fire-retardant vapor barrier , with
identification of installed thermal resistance (R) value and out-of-package
R value.
2.4.1.1 Rigid Insulation
Rigid mineral fiber in accordance with ASTM C 612, Class 2 (maximum surface
temperature 400 degrees F), 3 pcf average, 1-1/2 inch thick, Type IA, IB,
II, III, and IV. Alternately, minimum thickness may be calculated in
accordance with ASHRAE 90.1 - IP.
2.4.1.2 Blanket Insulation
Blanket flexible mineral fiber insulation conforming to ASTM C 553, Type 1,

Class B-3, 3/4 pcf nominal, 2.0 inches thick or Type II up to 250 degrees
F. Also ASTM C 1290 Type III may be used. Alternately, minimum thickness
may be calculated in accordance with ASHRAE 90.1 - IP.
2.4.2 Acoustical Duct Lining
For ductwork indicated or specified in Section 23 00 00 AIR SUPPLY,

DISTRIBUTION, VENTILATION, AND EXHAUST SYSTEM to be acoustically lined,
provide external insulation in accordance with this specification section
and in addition to the acoustical duct lining.
2.4.3 Duct Insulation Jackets
2.4.3.1 All-Purpose Jacket
Provide insulation with insulation manufacturer's standard reinforced

fire-retardant jacket with or without integral vapor barrier as required by
the service. In exposed locations, provide jacket with a white surface
suitable for field painting.
2.4.3.2 Metal Jackets
a. Aluminum Jackets: ASTM B 209, Temper H14, minimum thickness of 27

gauge ( 0.016 inch), with factory-applied polyethylene and kraft paper
moisture barrier on inside surface. Provide smooth surface jackets for
jacket outside dimension 8 inches and larger. Provide corrugated
surface jackets for jacket outside dimension 8 inches and larger.
Provide stainless steel bands, minimum width of 1/2 inch.
b. Stainless Steel Jackets: ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M; Type

304, minimum thickness of 33 gauge ( 0.010 inch), smooth surface with
factory-applied polyethylene and kraft paper moisture barrier on inside
surface. Provide stainless steel bands, minimum width of 1/2 inch.
2.4.3.3 Vapor Barrier/Weatherproofing Jacket
Vapor barrier/weatherproofing jacket shall be laminated self-adhesive
(minimum 2 mils adhesive, 3 mils embossed) less than 0.0000 permeability,

(greater than 3 ply, standard grade, silver, white, black and embossed or
greater than 8 ply (minimum 2.9 mils adhesive), heavy duty white or
natural).
2.4.4 Weatherproof Duct Insulation
Provide ASTM C 591 Type I, polyurethane or polyisocyanate board insulation,

minimum density of 1.7 pcf ASTM C 552, cellular glass thermal insulation
ASTM C 534/C 534M Grade 1, Type II, flexible cellular insulation, and
weatherproofing as specified in manufacturer's instruction.
2.5 EQUIPMENT INSULATION SYSTEMS
Insulate equipment and accessories as specified in Tables 4 and 5. In

outside locations, provide insulation 1/2 inch thicker than specified.
Increase the specified insulation thickness for equipment where necessary
to equal the thickness of angles or other structural members to make a
smooth, exterior surface.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION - GENERAL
Insulation shall only be applied to unheated and uncooled piping and

equipment. Flexible elastomeric cellular insulation shall not be
compressed at joists, studs, columns, ducts, hangers, etc. The insulation
shall not pull apart after a one hour period; any insulation found to pull
apart after one hour, shall be replaced.
3.1.1 Installation
Except as otherwise specified, material shall be installed in accordance

with the manufacturer's written instructions. Insulation materials shall
not be applied until tests specified in other sections of this
specification are completed. Material such as rust, scale, dirt and
moisture shall be removed from surfaces to receive insulation. Insulation
shall be kept clean and dry. Insulation shall not be removed from its
shipping containers until the day it is ready to use and shall be returned
to like containers or equally protected from dirt and moisture at the end
of each workday. Insulation that becomes dirty shall be thoroughly cleaned
prior to use. If insulation becomes wet or if cleaning does not restore
the surfaces to like new condition, the insulation will be rejected, and
shall be immediately removed from the jobsite. Joints shall be staggered
on multi layer insulation. Mineral fiber thermal insulating cement shall
be mixed with demineralized water when used on stainless steel surfaces.
Insulation, jacketing and accessories shall be installed in accordance with
MICA Insulation Stds plates except where modified herein or on the drawings.
3.1.2 Firestopping
Where pipes and ducts pass through fire walls, fire partitions, above grade
floors, and fire rated chase walls, the penetration shall be sealed with
fire stopping materials as specified in Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING.
3.1.3 Painting and Finishing
Painting shall be as specified in Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS.
3.1.4 Installation of Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Insulation
Flexible elastomeric cellular insulation shall be installed with seams and

joints sealed with rubberized contact adhesive. Flexible elastomeric
cellular insulation shall not be used on surfaces greater than 200 degrees F.
Seams shall be staggered when applying multiple layers of insulation.
Insulation exposed to weather and not shown to have jacketing shall be
protected with two coats of UV resistant finish or PVC or metal jacketing
as recommended by the manufacturer after the adhesive is dry and cured. A
brush coating of adhesive shall be applied to both butt ends to be joined
and to both slit surfaces to be sealed. The adhesive shall be allowed to
set until dry to touch but tacky under slight pressure before joining the
surfaces. Insulation seals at seams and joints shall not be capable of
being pulled apart one hour after application. Insulation that can be
pulled apart one hour after installation shall be replaced.
3.1.5 Welding
No welding shall be done on piping, duct or equipment without written

approval of the Contracting Officer. The capacitor discharge welding
process may be used for securing metal fasteners to duct.
3.1.6 Pipes/Ducts/Equipment which Require Insulation
Insulation is required on all pipes, ducts, or equipment, except for

omitted items, as specified.
3.2 PIPE INSULATION SYSTEMS INSTALLATION
Install pipe insulation systems in accordance with the approved

MICA Insulation Stds plates as supplemented by the manufacturer's published
installation instructions.
3.2.1 Pipe Insulation
3.2.1.1 General
Pipe insulation shall be installed on aboveground hot and cold pipeline

systems as specified below to form a continuous thermal retarder/barrier,
including straight runs, fittings and appurtenances unless specified
otherwise. Installation shall be with full length units of insulation and
using a single cut piece to complete a run. Cut pieces or scraps abutting
each other shall not be used. Pipe insulation shall be omitted on the
following:
a. Pipe used solely for fire protection.
b. Chromium plated pipe to plumbing fixtures. However, fixtures for

use by the physically handicapped shall have the hot water supply and
drain, including the trap, insulated where exposed.
c. Sanitary drain lines.
d. Air chambers.
e. Adjacent insulation.
f. ASME stamps.
g. Access plates of fan housings.
h. Cleanouts or handholes.
3.2.1.2 Pipes Passing Through Walls, Roofs, and Floors
a. Pipe insulation shall be continuous through the sleeve.
b. An aluminum jacket or vapor barrier/weatherproofing - self adhesive

jacket (minimum 2 mils adhesive, 3 mils embossed) less than 0.0000
permeability, greater than 3 ply standard grade, silver, white, black
and embossed with factory applied moisture retarder shall be provided
over the insulation wherever penetrations require sealing.
c. Where pipes penetrate interior walls, the aluminum jacket or vapor

barrier/weatherproofing - self adhesive jacket (minimum 2 mils
adhesive, 3 mils embossed) less than 0.0000 permeability, greater than
3 plys standard grade, silver, white, black and embossed shall extend 2
inches beyond either side of the wall and shall be secured on each end
with a band.
d. Where penetrating floors, the aluminum jacket shall extend from a

point below the backup material to a point 10 inches above the floor
with one band at the floor and one not more than 1 inch from the end of
the aluminum jacket.
e. Where penetrating waterproofed floors, the aluminum jacket shall

extend from below the backup material to a point 2 inches above the
flashing with a band 1 inch from the end of the aluminum jacket.
f. Where penetrating exterior walls, the aluminum jacket required for

pipe exposed to weather shall continue through the sleeve to a point 2
inches beyond the interior surface of the wall.
g. Where penetrating roofs, pipe shall be insulated as required for

interior service to a point flush with the top of the flashing and
sealed with vapor retarder coating. The insulation for exterior
application shall butt tightly to the top of flashing and interior
insulation. The exterior aluminum jacket shall extend 2 inches down
beyond the end of the insulation to form a counter flashing. The
flashing and counter flashing shall be sealed underneath with caulking.
h. For hot water pipes supplying lavatories or other similar heated

service that requires insulation, the insulation shall be terminated on
the backside of the finished wall. The insulation termination shall be
protected with two coats of vapor barrier coating with a minimum total
thickness of 1/16 inch applied with glass tape embedded between coats
(if applicable). The coating shall extend out onto the insulation 2
inches and shall seal the end of the insulation. Glass tape seams
shall overlap 1 inch. The annular space between the pipe and wall
penetration shall be caulked with approved fire stop material. The
pipe and wall penetration shall be covered with a properly sized (well
fitting) escutcheon plate. The escutcheon plate shall overlap the wall
penetration at least 3/8 inches.
i. For domestic cold water pipes supplying lavatories or other similar

cooling service that requires insulation, the insulation shall be
terminated on the finished side of the wall (i.e., insulation must
cover the pipe throughout the wall penetration). The insulation shall
be protected with two coats of vapor barrier coating with a minimum

total thickness of 1/16 inch. The coating shall extend out onto the
insulation 2 inches and shall seal the end of the insulation. The
annular space between the outer surface of the pipe insulation and the
wall penetration shall be caulked with an approved fire stop material
having vapor retarder properties. The pipe and wall penetration shall
be covered with a properly sized (well fitting) escutcheon plate. The
escutcheon plate shall overlap the wall penetration by at least 3/8
inches.
3.2.1.3 Pipes Passing Through Hangers
a. Insulation, whether hot or cold application, shall be continuous

through hangers. All horizontal pipes 2 inches and smaller shall be
supported on hangers with the addition of a Type 40 protection shield
to protect the insulation in accordance with MSS SP-69. Whenever
insulation shows signs of being compressed, or when the insulation or
jacket shows visible signs of distortion at or near the support shield,
insulation inserts as specified below for piping larger than 2 inches
shall be installed, or factory insulated hangers (designed with a load
bearing core) can be used.
b. Horizontal pipes larger than 2 inches at 60 degrees F and above

shall be supported on hangers in accordance with MSS SP-69, and Section
22 00 00 PLUMBING, GENERAL PURPOSE.
c. Horizontal pipes larger than 2 inches and below 60 degrees F shall

be supported on hangers with the addition of a Type 40 protection
shield in accordance with MSS SP-69. An insulation insert of cellular
glass, calcium silicate (or perlite above 80 degrees F), or the
necessary strength polyisocyanurate shall be installed above each
shield. The insert shall cover not less than the bottom 180-degree arc
of the pipe. Inserts shall be the same thickness as the insulation,
and shall extend 2 inches on each end beyond the protection shield.
When insulation inserts are required in accordance with the above, and
the insulation thickness is less than 1 inch, wooden or cork dowels or
blocks may be installed between the pipe and the shield to prevent the
weight of the pipe from crushing the insulation, as an option to
installing insulation inserts. The insulation jacket shall be
continuous over the wooden dowel, wooden block, or insulation insert.
d. Vertical pipes shall be supported with either Type 8 or Type 42

riser clamps with the addition of two Type 40 protection shields in
accordance with MSS SP-69 covering the 360-degree arc of the
insulation. An insulation insert of cellular glass or calcium silicate
shall be installed between each shield and the pipe. The insert shall
cover the 360-degree arc of the pipe. Inserts shall be the same
thickness as the insulation, and shall extend 2 inches on each end
beyond the protection shield. When insulation inserts are required in
accordance with the above, and the insulation thickness is less than 1
inch, wooden or cork dowels or blocks may be installed between the pipe
and the shield to prevent the hanger from crushing the insulation, as
an option instead of installing insulation inserts. The insulation
jacket shall be continuous over the wooden dowel, wooden block, or
insulation insert. The vertical weight of the pipe shall be supported
with hangers located in a horizontal section of the pipe. When the
pipe riser is longer than 30 feet, the weight of the pipe shall be
additionally supported with hangers in the vertical run of the pipe
that are directly clamped to the pipe, penetrating the pipe
insulation. These hangers shall be insulated and the insulation jacket

sealed as indicated herein for anchors in a similar service.
e. Inserts shall be covered with a jacket material of the same

appearance and quality as the adjoining pipe insulation jacket, shall
overlap the adjoining pipe jacket 1-1/2 inches, and shall be sealed as
required for the pipe jacket. The jacket material used to cover
inserts in flexible elastomeric cellular insulation shall conform to
ASTM C 1136, Type 1, and is allowed to be of a different material than
the adjoining insulation material.
3.2.1.4 Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Pipe Insulation
Flexible elastomeric cellular pipe insulation shall be tubular form for

pipe sizes 6 inches and less. Grade 1, Type II sheet insulation used on
pipes larger than 6 inches shall not be stretched around the pipe. On
pipes larger than 12 inches, the insulation shall be adhered directly to
the pipe on the lower 1/3 of the pipe. Seams shall be staggered when
applying multiple layers of insulation. Sweat fittings shall be insulated
with miter-cut pieces the same size as on adjacent piping. Screwed
fittings shall be insulated with sleeved fitting covers fabricated from
miter-cut pieces and shall be overlapped and sealed to the adjacent pipe
insulation.
3.2.1.5 Pipes in high abuse areas.
In high abuse areas such as janitor closets and traffic areas in equipment
rooms, kitchens, and mechanical rooms, welded PVC, aluminum or flexible
laminate cladding (comprised of elastomeric, plastic or metal foil
laminate) laminated self-adhesive (minimum 2 mils adhesive, 3 mils
embossed) vapor barrier/weatherproofing jacket, - less than 0.0000
permeability; (greater than 3 ply, standard grade, silver, white, black and
embossed) jackets shall be utilized. Pipe insulation to the 6 foot level
shall be protected.
3.2.1.6 Pipe Insulation Material and Thickness
TABLE 1
Insulation Material For Piping (°F)
__________________________________________________________________________
Service Material Spec. Type Class Vapor Retarder/
Vapor Barrier
Required
___________________________________________________________________________
CondenserWater Cellular Glass ASTM C 552 II 2 No

(Supply & Flex Elast Cell'r ASTM C 534/C 534M I No
Return, Faced Phenol Foam ASTM C 1126 III Yes
Polyisocianurate ASTM C 591 I Yes
, 75°F Mineral Fiber with ASTM C 547 I Yes
nominal)
___________________________________________________________________________
Heating Hot Mineral Fiber ASTM C 547 I 1 No
Water Supply & Calcium Silicate ASTM C 533 I No
Return, Heated Cellular Glass ASTM C 552 II 2 No
Oil Faced Phenol Foam ASTM C 1126 III Yes
(Max 250°F) Perlite ASTM C 610 No
TABLE 1
Insulation Material For Piping (°F)
__________________________________________________________________________
Service Material Spec. Type Class Vapor Retarder/
Vapor Barrier
Required
___________________________________________________________________________
Polyisocianurate ASTM C 591 I No
___________________________________________________________________________
Cold Domestic Polyisocianurate ASTM C 591 I Yes
Water Piping, Cellular Glass ASTM C 552 II 2 No
Makeup Water & Flex Elast Cell'r ASTM C 534/C 534M I No
Drinking Fount Faced Phenol Foam ASTM C 1126 III Yes
Drain Piping Polyofin Clos'cell ASTM C 1427 I No
___________________________________________________________________________
Hot Domestic Mineral Fiber ASTM C 547 I 1 No
Water Supply & Cellular Glass ASTM C 552 II 2 No
Recirculating Flex Elast Cell'r ASTM C 534/C 534M I No
Piping (Max. Faced Phenol Foam ASTM C 1126 III Yes
200°F) Polyisocianurate ASTM C 591 I No
___________________________________________________________________________
Refrigerant Flex Elast Cell'r ASTM C 534/C 534M I No
Suction Piping Cellular Glass ASTM C 552 II 1 Yes
(35°F nominal) Faced Phenol Foam ASTM C 1126 III Yes
Polyisocianurate ASTM C 591 I Yes
___________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________
Exposed Lav'ry Flex Elast Cell'r ASTM C 534/C 534M I No
Drains, Expo'd Polyofin Clos'cell ASTM C 1427 I No
Domestic Water
Piping & Drains
to Areas for
Handicap Personnel
___________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________
A/C condensate Polyisocianurate ASTM C 591 I Yes
Drain Located Cellular Glass ASTM C 552 II 2 No
Inside Bldg. Flex Elast Cell'r ASTM C 534/C 534M I No
Faced Phenol Foam ASTM C 1126 II Yes
___________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________
TABLE 2
Piping Insulation Thickness (inch and °F)
_______________________________________________________________________________
Tube And Pipe Size (Inches)
Service Material <1 1- <1.5 1.5- <4 4- <8

>or =
to 8
_______________________________________________________________________________
Condenser Water Cellular Glass 1.5 2 2 2.5 3

(Supply & Faced Phenol Foam 1 1 1 1.5 1.5
Return, Polyisocianurate 1 1 1 1 1
TABLE 2
Piping Insulation Thickness (inch and °F)
_______________________________________________________________________________
Tube And Pipe Size (Inches)
Service Material <1 1- <1.5 1.5- <4 4- <8 >or =

to 8
_______________________________________________________________________________
Mineral Fiber with 1 1.5 1.5 2 2
Piping) (75°F Wicking Material
Nominal)
.Chilled Water Cellular Glass 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 2
(Supply & Flex Elas Cell'r 1 1 1 N/A N/A
Return, & Dual Faced Phenol Foam 1 1 1 1 1.5
Temperature Mineral Fiber with 1 1.5 1.5 2 2
Piping) (40°F Wicking Material
Nominal).
___________________________________________________________________________
Heating Hot Water Mineral Fiber 1.5 1.5 2 2 2
Supply & Return, Calcium Silicate 2.5 2.5 3 3 3
Heated Oil (Max. Cellular Glass 2 2 5 3 3 3
250°F) Perlite 2.5 2.5 3 3 3
Polyisocianurate 1 1 1.5 1.5 1.5
___________________________________________________________________________
Cold Domestic Cellular Glass 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5
Water Piping, Flex Elas Cell'r 1 1 1 N/A N/A
Makeup Water, & Faced Phenol Foam 1 1 1 1 1
Drinking Fountain Polyisocianurate 1 1 1 1 1
Drain Piping
___________________________________________________________________________
Hot Domestic Mineral Fiber 1 1 1 1.5 1.5
Water Supply and Cellular Glass 1.5 1.5 1.5 2 2
Recirculating Flex Elas Cell'r 1 1 1 N/A N/A
Piping (Max 200°F) Polyisocianurate 1 1 1 1 1.5
_____________________________________________________________________________
Refrigerant Flex Elas Cell'r 0.5 0.5 1 N/A N/A
Suction Piping Cellular Glass 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5
(35°F nominal) Faced Phenol Foam 1 1 1 1 1
Polyisocianurate 1 1 1 1 1
_________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
Exposed Lavatory Flex Elas Cell'r 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
Drains, Exposed
Domestic Water
Piping & Drains
to Areas for
Handicap Personnel
___________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
A/C condensate Cellular Glass 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5
Drain Located Flex Elas Cell'r 1 1 1 N/A N/A
Inside Bldg. Faced Phenol Foam 1 1 1 1 1
___________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
3.2.2 Aboveground Cold Pipelines
The following cold pipelines for minus 30 to plus 60 degrees F, shall be

insulated in accordance with Table 2 except those piping listed in
subparagraph Pipe Insulation in PART 3 as to be omitted. This includes but
is not limited to the following:
a. Domestic cold and chilled drinking water.
b. Make-up water.
c. Refrigerant suction lines.
d. Air conditioner condensate drains.
e. Heat pump condenser water loop
f. Exposed lavatory drains and domestic water lines serving plumbing

fixtures for handicap persons.
3.2.2.1 Insulation Material and Thickness
Insulation thickness for cold pipelines shall be determined using Table 2.
3.2.2.2 Factory or Field applied Jacket
Insulation shall be covered with a factory applied vapor retarder

jacket/vapor barrier or field applied seal welded PVC jacket or greater
than 3 ply laminated self-adhesive (minimum 2 mils adhesive, 3 mils
embossed) vapor barrier/weatherproofing jacket - less than 0.0000
permeability, standard grade, sliver, white, black and embossed for use
with Mineral Fiber, Cellular Glass, Phenolic Foam, and Polyisocyanurate
Foam Insulated Pipe. Insulation inside the building, to be protected with
an aluminum jacket or greater than 3ply vapor barrier/weatherproofing
self-adhesive (minimum 2 mils adhesive, 3 mils embossed) product, less
than 0.0000 permeability, standard grade, Embossed Silver, White & Black,
shall have the insulation and vapor retarder jacket installed as specified
herein. The aluminum jacket or greater than 3ply vapor
barrier/weatherproofing self-adhesive (minimum 2 mils adhesive, 3 mils
embossed) product, less than 0.0000 permeability, standard grade, embossed
silver, White & Black, shall be installed as specified for piping exposed
to weather, except sealing of the laps of the aluminum jacket is not
required. In high abuse areas such as janitor closets and traffic areas in
equipment rooms, kitchens, and mechanical rooms, aluminum jackets or
greater than 3ply vapor barrier/weatherproofing self-adhesive (minimum 2
mils adhesive, 3 mils embossed) product, less than 0.0000 permeability,
standard grade, embossed silver, white & black, shall be provided for pipe
insulation to the 6 ft level.
3.2.2.3 Installing Insulation for Straight Runs Hot and Cold Pipe
a. Insulation shall be applied to the pipe with joints tightly

butted. All butted joints and ends shall be sealed with joint sealant
and sealed with a vapor retarder coating, greater than 3 ply laminate
jacket - less than 0.0000 perm adhesive tape or PVDC adhesive tape.
b. Longitudinal laps of the jacket material shall overlap not less than
1-1/2 inches. Butt strips 3 inches wide shall be provided for
circumferential joints.
c. Laps and butt strips shall be secured with adhesive and stapled on
4 inch centers if not factory self-sealing. If staples are used, they
shall be sealed in accordance with item "e." below. Note that staples
are not required with cellular glass systems.
d. Factory self-sealing lap systems may be used when the ambient

temperature is between 40 and 120 degrees F during installation. The
lap system shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations. Stapler shall be used only if specifically
recommended by the manufacturer. Where gaps occur, the section shall
be replaced or the gap repaired by applying adhesive under the lap and
then stapling.
e. All Staples, including those used to repair factory self-seal lap

systems, shall be coated with a vapor retarder coating or PVDC adhesive
tape or greater than 3 ply laminate jacket - less than 0.0000 perm
adhesive tape. All seams, except those on factory self-seal systems
shall be coated with vapor retarder coating or PVDC adhesive tape or
greater than 3 ply laminate jacket - less than 0.0000 perm adhesive
tape.
f. Breaks and punctures in the jacket material shall be patched by

wrapping a strip of jacket material around the pipe and securing it
with adhesive, stapling, and coating with vapor retarder coating or
PVDC adhesive tape or greater than 3 ply laminate jacket - less than
0.0000 perm adhesive tape. The patch shall extend not less than 1-1/2
inches past the break.
g. At penetrations such as thermometers, the voids in the insulation

shall be filled and sealed with vapor retarder coating or PVDC adhesive
tape or greater than 3 ply laminate jacket - less than 0.0000 perm
adhesive tape or greater than 3 ply laminate jacket - less than 0.0000
perm adhesive tape.
h. Installation of flexible elastomeric cellular pipe insulation shall

be by slitting the tubular sections and applying them onto the piping
or tubing. Alternately, whenever possible slide un-slit sections over
the open ends of piping or tubing. All seams and butt joints shall be
secured and sealed with adhesive. When using self seal products only
the butt joints shall be secured with adhesive. Insulation shall be
pushed on the pipe, never pulled. Stretching of insulation may result
in open seams and joints. All edges shall be clean cut. Rough or
jagged edges of the insulation shall not be permitted. Proper tools
such as sharp knives shall be used. Grade 1, Type II sheet insulation
when used on pipe larger than 6 inches shall not be stretched around
the pipe. On pipes larger than 12 inches, adhere sheet insulation
directly to the pipe on the lower 1/3 of the pipe.
3.2.2.4 Insulation for Fittings and Accessories
a. Pipe insulation shall be tightly butted to the insulation of the

fittings and accessories. The butted joints and ends shall be sealed
with joint sealant and sealed with a vapor retarder coating or PVDC
adhesive tape or greater than 3 ply laminate jacket - less than 0.0000
perm adhesive tape.
b. Precut or preformed insulation shall be placed around all fittings

and accessories and shall conform to MICA plates except as modified
herein: 5 for anchors; 10, 11, and 13 for fittings; 14 for valves; and
17 for flanges and unions. Insulation shall be the same insulation as
the pipe insulation, including same density, thickness, and thermal
conductivity. Where precut/preformed is unavailable, rigid preformed
pipe insulation sections may be segmented into the shape required.
Insulation of the same thickness and conductivity as the adjoining pipe
insulation shall be used. If nesting size insulation is used, the
insulation shall be overlapped 2 inches or one pipe diameter. Elbows
insulated using segments shall conform to MICA Tables 12.20 "Mitered
Insulation Elbow'.
c. Upon completion of insulation installation on flanges, unions,

valves, anchors, fittings and accessories, terminations, seams, joints
and insulation not protected by factory vapor retarder jackets or PVC
fitting covers shall be protected with PVDC or greater than 3 ply
laminate jacket - less than 0.0000 perm adhesive tape or two coats of
vapor retarder coating with a minimum total thickness of 1/16 inch,
applied with glass tape embedded between coats. Tape seams shall
overlap 1 inch. The coating shall extend out onto the adjoining pipe
insulation 2 inches. Fabricated insulation with a factory vapor
retarder jacket shall be protected with either greater than 3 ply
laminate jacket - less than 0.0000 perm adhesive tape, standard grade,
silver, white, black and embossed or PVDC adhesive tape or two coats of
vapor retarder coating with a minimum thickness of 1/16 inch and with a
2 inch wide glass tape embedded between coats. Where fitting
insulation butts to pipe insulation, the joints shall be sealed with a
vapor retarder coating and a 4 inch wide ASJ tape which matches the
jacket of the pipe insulation.
d. Anchors attached directly to the pipe shall be insulated for a

sufficient distance to prevent condensation but not less than 6 inches
from the insulation surface.
e. Insulation shall be marked showing the location of unions,

strainers, and check valves.
3.2.2.5 Optional PVC Fitting Covers
At the option of the Contractor, premolded, one or two piece PVC fitting
covers may be used in lieu of the vapor retarder and embedded glass tape.
Factory precut or premolded insulation segments shall be used under the
fitting covers for elbows. Insulation segments shall be the same
insulation as the pipe insulation including same density, thickness, and
thermal conductivity. The covers shall be secured by PVC vapor retarder
tape, adhesive, seal welding or with tacks made for securing PVC covers.
Seams in the cover, and tacks and laps to adjoining pipe insulation jacket,
shall be sealed with vapor retarder tape to ensure that the assembly has a
continuous vapor seal.
3.2.3 Aboveground Hot Pipelines
All hot pipe lines above 60 degrees F, except those piping listed in
subparagraph Pipe Insulation in PART 3 as to be omitted, shall be insulated
in accordance with Table 2. This includes but is not limited to the
following:
a. Domestic hot water supply & re-circulating system.
b. Hot water heating.
Insulation shall be covered, in accordance with manufacturer's

recommendations, with a factory applied Type I jacket or field applied
aluminum where required or seal welded PVC.
3.2.3.2 Insulation for Fittings and Accessories
a. General. Pipe insulation shall be tightly butted to the insulation

of the fittings and accessories. The butted joints and ends shall be
sealed with joint sealant. Insulation shall be marked showing the
location of unions, strainers, check valves and other components that
would otherwise be hidden from view by the insulation.
b. Precut or Preformed. Precut or preformed insulation shall be placed

around all fittings and accessories. Insulation shall be the same
insulation as the pipe insulation, including same density, thickness,
and thermal conductivity.
c. Rigid Preformed. Where precut/preformed is unavailable, rigid

preformed pipe insulation sections may be segmented into the shape
required. Insulation of the same thickness and conductivity as the
adjoining pipe insulation shall be used. If nesting size insulation is
used, the insulation shall be overlapped 2 inches or one pipe
diameter. Elbows insulated using segments shall conform to MICA Tables
12.20 "Mitered Insulation Elbow".
3.2.4 Piping Exposed to Weather
Piping exposed to weather shall be insulated and jacketed as specified for

the applicable service inside the building. After this procedure, a
laminated self-adhesive (minimum 2 mils adhesive, 3 mils embossed) vapor
barrier/weatherproofing jacket - less than 0.0000 permeability (greater
than 3 ply, standard grade, silver, white, black and embossed aluminum
jacket or PVC jacket shall be applied. PVC jacketing requires no
factory-applied jacket beneath it, however an all service jacket shall be
applied if factory applied jacketing is not furnished. Flexible
elastomeric cellular insulation exposed to weather shall be treated in
accordance with paragraph INSTALLATION OF FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC CELLULAR
INSULATION in PART 3.
3.2.4.1 Aluminum Jacket
The jacket for hot piping may be factory applied. The jacket shall overlap
not less than 2 inches at longitudinal and circumferential joints and shall
be secured with bands at not more than 12 inch centers. Longitudinal
joints shall be overlapped down to shed water and located at 4 or 8 o'clock
positions. Joints on piping 60 degrees F and below shall be sealed with
caulking while overlapping to prevent moisture penetration. Where
jacketing on piping 60 degrees F and below abuts an un-insulated surface,
joints shall be caulked to prevent moisture penetration. Joints on piping
above 60 degrees F shall be sealed with a moisture retarder.
3.2.4.2 Insulation for Fittings
Flanges, unions, valves, fittings, and accessories shall be insulated and

finished as specified for the applicable service. Two coats of breather
emulsion type weatherproof mastic (impermeable to water, permeable to air)
recommended by the insulation manufacturer shall be applied with glass tape

embedded between coats. Tape overlaps shall be not less than 1 inch and
the adjoining aluminum jacket not less than 2 inches. Factory preformed
aluminum jackets may be used in lieu of the above. Molded PVC fitting
covers shall be provided when PVC jackets are used for straight runs of
pipe. PVC fitting covers shall have adhesive welded joints and shall be
weatherproof laminated self-adhesive (minimum 2 mils adhesive, 3 mils
embossed) vapor barrier/weatherproofing jacket - less than 0.0000
permeability, (greater than 3 ply, standard grade, silver, white, black and
embossed, and UV resistant.
3.2.4.3 PVC Jacket
PVC jacket shall be ultraviolet resistant and adhesive welded weather tight
with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. Installation shall include
provision for thermal expansion.
3.2.5 Below Ground Pipe Insulation
Below ground pipes shall be insulated in accordance with Table 2, except as

precluded in subparagraph Pipe Insulation in PART 3. This includes, but is
not limited to the following:
a. Refrigerant suction piping.
b. Heat pump condenser water loop
3.2.5.1 Type of Insulation
Below ground pipe shall be insulated with Cellular Glass insulation, or

with Polyisocyanurate insulation, in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions for application with thickness as determined from Table 2
(whichever is the most restrictive).
3.2.5.2 Installation of Below ground Pipe Insulation
a. Bore surfaces of the insulation shall be coated with a thin coat of

gypsum cement of a type recommended by the insulation manufacturer.
Coating thickness shall be sufficient to fill surface cells of
insulation. Mastic type materials shall not be used for this coating.
Note that unless this is for a cyclic application (i.e., one that
fluctuates between high and low temperature on a daily process basis)
there is no need to bore coat the material.
b. Stainless steel bands, 3/4 inch wide by 0.020 inch thick shall be
used to secure insulation in place. A minimum of two bands per section
of insulation shall be applied. As an alternate, fiberglass reinforced
tape may be used to secure insulation on piping up to 12 inches in
diameter. A minimum of two bands per section of insulation shall be
applied.
c. Insulation shall terminate at anchor blocks but shall be continuous

through sleeves and manholes.
d. At point of entry to buildings, underground insulation shall be

terminated 2 inches inside the wall or floor, shall butt tightly
against the aboveground insulation and the butt joint shall be sealed
with high temperature silicone sealant and covered with fibrous glass
tape.
e. Provision for expansion and contraction of the insulation system

shall be made in accordance with the insulation manufacturer's
recommendations.
f. Flanges, couplings, valves, and fittings shall be insulated with

factory pre-molded, prefabricated, or field-fabricated sections of
insulation of the same material and thickness as the adjoining pipe
insulation. Insulation sections shall be secured as recommended by the
manufacturer.
g. Insulation, including fittings, shall be finished with three coats

of asphaltic mastic, with 6 by 5.5 mesh synthetic reinforcing fabric
embedded between coats. Fabric shall be overlapped a minimum of 2
inches at joints. Total film thickness shall be a minimum of 3/16 inch.
As an alternate, a prefabricated bituminous laminated jacket,
reinforced with internal reinforcement mesh, shall be applied to the
insulation. Jacketing material and application procedures shall match
manufacturer's written instructions. Vapor barrier - less than 0.0000
permeability self adhesive (minimum 2 mils adhesive, 3 mils embossed)
jacket greater than 3 ply, standard grade, silver, white, black and
embossed or greater than 8 ply (minimum 2.9 mils adhesive), heavy duty,
white or natural). Application procedures shall match the
manufacturer's written instructions.
h. At termination points, other than building entrances, the mastic

and cloth or tape shall cover the ends of insulation and extend 2 inches
along the bare pipe.
3.3 DUCT INSULATION SYSTEMS INSTALLATION
Install duct insulation systems in accordance with the approved

Corner angles shall be installed on external corners of insulation on

ductwork in exposed finished spaces before covering with jacket. Air
conditioned spaces shall be defined as those spaces directly supplied with
cooled conditioned air (or provided with a cooling device such as a
fan-coil unit) and heated conditioned air (or provided with a heating
device such as a unit heater, radiator or convector).
3.3.1 Duct Insulation Thickness
Duct insulation thickness shall be in accordance with Table 4.
Table 4 - Minimum Duct Insulation (inches)
Cold Air Ducts 2.0

Relief Ducts 1.5
Fresh Air Intake Ducts 1.5
Warm Air Ducts 2.0

Relief Ducts 1.5
Fresh Air Intake Ducts 1.5
3.3.2 Insulation and Vapor Retarder/Vapor Barrier for Cold Air Duct
Insulation and vapor retarder/vapor barrier shall be provided for the

following cold air ducts and associated equipment.
a. Supply ducts.
b. Return air ducts.
c. Relief ducts.
d. Flexible run-outs (field-insulated).
e. Plenums.
f. Duct-mounted coil casings.
g. Coil headers and return bends.
h. Coil casings.
i. Fresh air intake ducts.
j. Filter boxes.
k. Mixing boxes (field-insulated).
l. Supply fans (field-insulated).
m. Site-erected air conditioner casings.
n. Ducts exposed to weather.
o. Combustion air intake ducts.
Insulation for rectangular ducts shall be flexible type where concealed,

minimum density 3/4 pcf, and rigid type where exposed, minimum density 3 pcf.
Insulation for both concealed or exposed round/oval ducts shall be flexible
type, minimum density 3/4 pcf or a semi rigid board, minimum density 3 pcf,
formed or fabricated to a tight fit, edges beveled and joints tightly
butted and staggered. Insulation for all exposed ducts shall be provided
with either a white, paint-able, factory-applied Type I jacket or a field
applied vapor retarder/vapor barrier jacket coating finish as specified,
the total field applied dry film thickness shall be approximately 1/16 inch.
Insulation on all concealed duct shall be provided with a factory-applied
Type I or II vapor retarder/vapor barrier jacket. Duct insulation shall be
continuous through sleeves and prepared openings except firewall
penetrations. Duct insulation terminating at fire dampers, shall be
continuous over the damper collar and retaining angle of fire dampers,
which are exposed to unconditioned air and which may be prone to condensate
formation. Duct insulation and vapor retarder/vapor barrier shall cover
the collar, neck, and any un-insulated surfaces of diffusers, registers and
grills. Vapor retarder/vapor barrier materials shall be applied to form a
complete unbroken vapor seal over the insulation. Sheet Metal Duct shall
be sealed in accordance with Section 23 00 00 AIR SUPPLY, DISTRIBUTION,
VENTILATION, AND EXHAUST SYSTEM.
3.3.2.1 Installation on Concealed Duct
a. For rectangular, oval or round ducts, flexible insulation shall be

attached by applying adhesive around the entire perimeter of the duct in
6 inch wide strips on 12 inch centers.
b. For rectangular and oval ducts, 24 inches and larger insulation

shall be additionally secured to bottom of ducts by the use of
mechanical fasteners. Fasteners shall be spaced on 16 inch centers and
not more than 16 inches from duct corners.
c. For rectangular, oval and round ducts, mechanical fasteners shall

be provided on sides of duct risers for all duct sizes. Fasteners
shall be spaced on 16 inch centers and not more than 16 inches from
duct corners.
d. Insulation shall be impaled on the mechanical fasteners (self stick

pins) where used and shall be pressed thoroughly into the adhesive.
Care shall be taken to ensure vapor retarder/vapor barrier jacket
joints overlap 2 inches. The insulation shall not be compressed to a
thickness less than that specified. Insulation shall be carried over
standing seams and trapeze-type duct hangers.
e. Where mechanical fasteners are used, self-locking washers shall be

installed and the pin trimmed and bent over.
f. Jacket overlaps shall be secured with staples and tape as necessary

to ensure a secure seal. Staples, tape and seams shall be coated with
a brush coat of vapor retarder coating or PVDC adhesive tape or greater
than 3 ply laminate (minimum 2 mils adhesive, 3 mils embossed) - less
than 0.0000 perm adhesive tape.
g. Breaks in the jacket material shall be covered with patches of the

same material as the vapor retarder jacket. The patches shall extend
not less than 2 inches beyond the break or penetration in all
directions and shall be secured with tape and staples. Staples and
tape joints shall be sealed with a brush coat of vapor retarder coating
or PVDC adhesive tape or greater than 3 ply laminate (minimum 2 mils
adhesive, 3 mils embossed) - less than 0.0000 perm adhesive tape.
h. At jacket penetrations such as hangers, thermometers, and damper

operating rods, voids in the insulation shall be filled and the
penetration sealed with a brush coat of vapor retarder coating or PVDC
adhesive tape greater than 3 ply laminate (minimum 2 mils adhesive, 3
mils embossed) - less than 0.0000 perm adhesive tape.
i. Insulation terminations and pin punctures shall be sealed and

flashed with a reinforced vapor retarder coating finish or tape with a
brush coat of vapor retarder coating.. The coating shall overlap the
adjoining insulation and un-insulated surface 2 inches. Pin puncture
coatings shall extend 2 inches from the puncture in all directions.
j. Where insulation standoff brackets occur, insulation shall be

extended under the bracket and the jacket terminated at the bracket.
3.3.2.2 Installation on Exposed Duct Work
a. For rectangular ducts, rigid insulation shall be secured to the

duct by mechanical fasteners on all four sides of the duct, spaced not
more than 12 inches apart and not more than 3 inches from the edges of
the insulation joints. A minimum of two rows of fasteners shall be
provided for each side of duct 12 inches and larger. One row shall be
provided for each side of duct less than 12 inches. Mechanical
fasteners shall be as corrosion resistant as G60 coated galvanized
steel, and shall indefinitely sustain a 50 lb tensile dead load test
perpendicular to the duct wall.
b. Duct insulation shall be formed with minimum jacket seams. Each

piece of rigid insulation shall be fastened to the duct using
mechanical fasteners. When the height of projections is less than the
insulation thickness, insulation shall be brought up to standing seams,
reinforcing, and other vertical projections and shall not be carried
over. Vapor retarder/barrier jacket shall be continuous across seams,
reinforcing, and projections. When height of projections is greater
than the insulation thickness, insulation and jacket shall be carried
over. Apply insulation with joints tightly butted. Neatly bevel
insulation around name plates and access plates and doors.
c. Insulation shall be impaled on the fasteners; self-locking washers

shall be installed and the pin trimmed and bent over.
d. Joints in the insulation jacket shall be sealed with a 4 inch wide

strip of tape. Tape seams shall be sealed with a brush coat of vapor
retarder coating.
e. Breaks and ribs or standing seam penetrations in the jacket

material shall be covered with a patch of the same material as the
jacket. Patches shall extend not less than 2 inches beyond the break
or penetration and shall be secured with tape and stapled. Staples and
joints shall be sealed with a brush coat of vapor retarder coating.
f. At jacket penetrations such as hangers, thermometers, and damper

operating rods, the voids in the insulation shall be filled and the
penetrations sealed with a brush coat of vapor retarder coating.
g. Insulation terminations and pin punctures shall be sealed and

flashed with a reinforced vapor retarder coating finish. The coating
shall overlap the adjoining insulation and un-insulated surface 2 inches.
Pin puncture coatings shall extend 2 inches from the puncture in all
directions.
h. Oval and round ducts, flexible type, shall be insulated with

factory Type I jacket insulation with minimum density of 3/4 pcf,
attached as in accordance with MICA standards.
3.3.3 Not Used
3.3.3.1 Not Used
3.3.3.2 Not Used
3.3.4 Ducts Handling Air for Dual Purpose
For air handling ducts for dual purpose below and above 60 degrees F, ducts
shall be insulated as specified for cold air duct.
3.3.5 Duct Test Holes
After duct systems have been tested, adjusted, and balanced, breaks in the
insulation and jacket shall be repaired in accordance with the applicable
section of this specification for the type of duct insulation to be
repaired.
3.3.6 Duct Exposed to Weather
3.3.6.1 Installation
Ducts exposed to weather shall be insulated and finished as specified for

the applicable service for exposed duct inside the building. After the
above is accomplished, the insulation shall then be further finished as
detailed in the following subparagraphs.
3.3.6.2 Round Duct
Laminated self-adhesive (minimum 2 mils adhesive, 3 mils embossed) vapor

barrier/weatherproofing jacket - Less than 0.0000 permeability, (greater
than 3 ply, standard grade, silver, white, black and embossed or greater
than 8 ply, heavy duty, white and natural) membrane shall be applied
overlapping material by 3 inches no bands or caulking needed - see
manufacturer's recommended installation instructions. Aluminum jacket with
factory applied moisture retarder shall be applied with the joints lapped
not less than 3 inches and secured with bands located at circumferential
laps and at not more than 12 inch intervals throughout. Horizontal joints
shall lap down to shed water and located at 4 or 8 o'clock position.
Joints shall be sealed with caulking to prevent moisture penetration.
Where jacketing abuts an un-insulated surface, joints shall be sealed with
caulking.
3.3.6.3 Fittings
Fittings and other irregular shapes shall be finished as specified for

rectangular ducts.
3.3.6.4 Rectangular Ducts
Two coats of weather barrier mastic reinforced with fabric or mesh for
outdoor application shall be applied to the entire surface. Each coat of
weatherproof mastic shall be 1/16 inch minimum thickness. The exterior
shall be a metal jacketing applied for mechanical abuse and weather
protection, and secured with screws.
3.4 EQUIPMENT INSULATION SYSTEMS INSTALLATION
Install equipment insulation systems in accordance with the approved

3.4.1 General
Removable insulation sections shall be provided to cover parts of equipment

that must be opened periodically for maintenance including vessel covers,
fasteners, flanges and accessories. Equipment insulation shall be omitted
on the following:
a. Hand-holes.
b. Boiler manholes.
c. Cleanouts.
d. ASME stamps.
e. Manufacturer's nameplates.
f. Duct Test/Balance Test Holes.
3.4.2 Insulation for Cold Equipment
Cold equipment below 60 degrees F: Insulation shall be furnished on

equipment handling media below 60 degrees F including the following:
a. Pumps.
b. Refrigeration equipment parts that are not factory insulated.
c. Drip pans under chilled equipment.
d. Duct mounted coils.
e. Air handling equipment parts that are not factory insulated.
f. Expansion and air separation tanks.
3.4.2.1 Insulation Type
Insulation shall be suitable for the temperature encountered. Material and

thicknesses shall be as shown in Table 5:
Legend
RMF: Rigid Mineral Fiber

FMF: Flexible Mineral Fiber
CS: Calcium Silicate
PL: Perlite
CG: Cellular Glass
FC: Flexible Elastomeric Cellular
PF: Phenolic Foam
PC: Polyisocyanurate Foam
PE: Polyolefin closed cell
TABLE 5
Insulation Thickness for Cold Equipment (Inches and °F)
Equipment handling media Material Thickness

at indicated temperature:
_________________________________________________________________________
35 to 60 CG 1.5 inches
degrees F PF 1.5 inches
FC 1.0 inches
PC 1.0 inches
PE 1.0 inches
__
1 to 34 PC 1.5 inches
TABLE 5
Insulation Thickness for Cold Equipment (Inches and °F)
Equipment handling media Material Thickness

at indicated temperature:
_________________________________________________________________________
degrees F FC 1.5 inches
CG 3.0 inches
PF 1.5 inches
PE 1.5 inches
_________________________________________________________________________
Minus 30 to 0 PC 1.5 inches
degrees F FC 1.75 inches
CG 3.5 inches
PF 1.5 inches
PE 1.5 inches
_________________________________________________________________________
3.4.2.2 Pump Insulation
a. Insulate pumps by forming a box around the pump housing. The box
shall be constructed by forming the bottom and sides using joints that
do not leave raw ends of insulation exposed. Joints between sides and
between sides and bottom shall be joined by adhesive with lap strips
for rigid mineral fiber and contact adhesive for flexible elastomeric
cellular insulation. The box shall conform to the requirements of
MICA Insulation Stds plate No. 49 when using flexible elastomeric
cellular insulation. Joints between top cover and sides shall fit
tightly forming a female shiplap joint on the side pieces and a male
joint on the top cover, thus making the top cover removable.
b. Exposed insulation corners shall be protected with corner angles.
c. Upon completion of installation of the insulation, including

removable sections, two coats of vapor retarder coating shall be
applied with a layer of glass cloth embedded between the coats. The
total dry thickness of the finish shall be 1/16 inch. A parting line
shall be provided between the box and the removable sections allowing
the removable sections to be removed without disturbing the insulation
coating. Caulking shall be applied to parting line, between equipment
and removable section insulation, and at all penetrations.
3.4.2.3 Other Equipment
a. Insulation shall be formed or fabricated to fit the equipment. To

ensure a tight fit on round equipment, edges shall be beveled and
joints shall be tightly butted and staggered.
b. Insulation shall be secured in place with bands or wires at

intervals as recommended by the manufacturer but not more than 12 inch
centers except flexible elastomeric cellular which shall be adhered
with contact adhesive. Insulation corners shall be protected under
wires and bands with suitable corner angles.
c. Phenolic foam insulation shall be set in a coating of bedding

compound and joints shall be sealed with bedding compound as
recommended by the manufacturer. Cellular glass shall be installed in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Joints and ends shall be
sealed with joint sealant, and sealed with a vapor retarder coating.
d. Insulation on heads of heat exchangers shall be removable.

Removable section joints shall be fabricated using a male-female
shiplap type joint. The entire surface of the removable section shall
be finished by applying two coats of vapor retarder coating with a
layer of glass cloth embedded between the coats. The total dry
thickness of the finish shall be 1/16 inch.
e. Exposed insulation corners shall be protected with corner angles.
f. Insulation on equipment with ribs shall be applied over 6 by 6

inches by 12 gauge welded wire fabric which has been cinched in place,
or if approved by the Contracting Officer, spot welded to the equipment
over the ribs. Insulation shall be secured to the fabric with J-hooks
and 2 by 2 inches washers or shall be securely banded or wired in place
on 12 inch centers.
3.4.2.4 Vapor Retarder/Vapor Barrier
Upon completion of installation of insulation, penetrations shall be

caulked. Two coats of vapor retarder coating or vapor barrier jacket shall
be applied over insulation, including removable sections, with a layer of
open mesh synthetic fabric embedded between the coats. The total dry
thickness of the finish shall be 1/16 inch. Caulking or vapor barrier tape
shall be applied to parting line between equipment and removable section
insulation.
3.4.3 Insulation for Hot Equipment
Insulation shall be furnished on equipment handling media above 60 degrees F

including the following:
a. Water heaters.
b. Pumps handling media above 130 degrees F.
c. Hot water storage tanks.
d. Air separation tanks.
e. Surge tanks.
f. Unjacketed boilers or parts of boilers.
g. Boiler flue gas connection from boiler to stack (if inside).
3.4.3.1 Insulation
Insulation shall be suitable for the temperature encountered. Shell and

tube-type heat exchangers shall be insulated for the temperature of the
shell medium.
Insulation thickness for hot equipment shall be determined using Table 6:
Legend
RMF: Rigid Mineral Fiber

FMF: Flexible Mineral Fiber
CS: Calcium Silicate
PL: Perlite
CG: Cellular Glass
FC: Flexible Elastomeric Cellular
PF: Phenolic Foam
PC: Polyisocyanurate Foam
TABLE 6
Insulation Thickness for Hot Equipment (Inches and °F)
Equipment handling steam Material Thickness

or media to indicated pressure
or temperature limit:
_________________________________________________________________________
15 psig RMF 2.0 inches

or FMF 2.0 inches
250 F CS/PL 4.0 inches
CG 3.0 inches
PF 1.5 inches
FC (<200F) 1.0 inches
__ PC 1.0 inches
200 psig RMF 3.0 inches

or FMF 3.0 inches
400 F CS/PL 4.0 inches
CG 4.0 inches
_________________________________________________________________________
600 F RMF 5.0 inches
FMF 6.0 inches
CS/PL 6.0 inches
CG 6.0 inches
_________________________________________________________________________
>600 F: Thickness necessary to limit the external temperature of the
insulation to 120F. Heat transfer calculations shall be submitted to
substantiate insulation and thickness selection.
3.4.3.2 Insulation of Pumps
Insulate pumps by forming a box around the pump housing. The box shall be
constructed by forming the bottom and sides using joints that do not leave
raw ends of insulation exposed. Bottom and sides shall be banded to form a
rigid housing that does not rest on the pump. Joints between top cover and
sides shall fit tightly. The top cover shall have a joint forming a female
shiplap joint on the side pieces and a male joint on the top cover, making
the top cover removable. Two coats of Class I adhesive shall be applied
over insulation, including removable sections, with a layer of glass cloth
embedded between the coats. A parting line shall be provided between the
box and the removable sections allowing the removable sections to be
removed without disturbing the insulation coating. The total dry thickness
of the finish shall be 1/16 inch. Caulking shall be applied to parting
line of the removable sections and penetrations.
3.4.3.3 Other Equipment
a. Insulation shall be formed or fabricated to fit the equipment. To
ensure a tight fit on round equipment, edges shall be beveled and

joints shall be tightly butted and staggered.
b. Insulation shall be secured in place with bands or wires at

intervals as recommended by the manufacturer but not greater than 12
inch centers except flexible elastomeric cellular which shall be
adhered. Insulation corners shall be protected under wires and bands
with suitable corner angles.
c. On high vibration equipment, cellular glass insulation shall be set

in a coating of bedding compound as recommended by the manufacturer,
and joints shall be sealed with bedding compound. Mineral fiber joints
shall be filled with finishing cement.
d. Insulation on heads of heat exchangers shall be removable. The

removable section joint shall be fabricated using a male-female shiplap
type joint. Entire surface of the removable section shall be finished
as specified.
e. Exposed insulation corners shall be protected with corner angles.
f. On equipment with ribs, such as boiler flue gas connection, draft

fans, and fly ash or soot collectors, insulation shall be applied over
6 by 6 inch by 12 gauge welded wire fabric which has been cinched in
place, or if approved by the Contracting Officer, spot welded to the
equipment over the ribs. Insulation shall be secured to the fabric
with J-hooks and 2 by 2 inch washers or shall be securely banded or
wired in place on 12 inch (maximum) centers.
g. On equipment handling media above 600 degrees F, insulation shall

be applied in two or more layers with joints staggered.
h. Upon completion of installation of insulation, penetrations shall

be caulked. Two coats of adhesive shall be applied over insulation,
including removable sections, with a layer of glass cloth embedded
between the coats. The total dry thickness of the finish shall be 1/16
inch. Caulking shall be applied to parting line between equipment and
removable section insulation.
3.4.4 Equipment Handling Dual Temperature Media
Below and above 60 degrees F: equipment handling dual temperature media

shall be insulated as specified for cold equipment.
3.4.5 Equipment Exposed to Weather
Equipment exposed to weather shall be insulated and finished in accordance

with the requirements for ducts exposed to weather in paragraph DUCT
INSULATION INSTALLATION.
3.4.5.2 Optional Panels
At the option of the Contractor, prefabricated metal insulation panels may

be used in lieu of the insulation and finish previously specified. Thermal
performance shall be equal to or better than that specified for field
applied insulation. Panels shall be the standard catalog product of a
manufacturer of metal insulation panels. Fastenings, flashing, and support
system shall conform to published recommendations of the manufacturer for

weatherproof installation and shall prevent moisture from entering the
insulation. Panels shall be designed to accommodate thermal expansion and
to support a 250 pound walking load without permanent deformation or
permanent damage to the insulation. Exterior metal cover sheet shall be
aluminum and exposed fastenings shall be stainless steel or aluminum.
SECTION 23 08 00.00 10
COMMISSIONING OF HVAC SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES



(SMACNA)
SMACNA 1429 (2005) HVAC Systems Commissioning Manual,

1st Edition
1.2 DEFINITIONS

differences exist.
SIMILAR TERMS
Contract Term ACG NEBB TABB
Commissioning ACG Procedural SMACNA HVAC

Standard Commissioning Standards for Commissioning
Guideline Building Systems Guideline
Commissioning
Commissioning ACG Certified NEBB Qualified TABB Certified

Agent Commissioning Commissioning Commissioning
Agent Administrator Supervisor
1.3.1 General

SECTION 23 08 00.00 10 Page 1

ACG Commissioning Guideline, NEBB Commissioning Standard, or SMACNA 1429

unless otherwise stated herein. Consider mandatory all recommendations and
suggested practices contained in the Commissioning Standard. Use the
Commissioning Standard for all aspects of Commissioning, including
qualifications for the Commissioning Firm and Agent and calibration of
Commissioning instruments. Where the instrument manufacturer calibration
recommendations are more stringent than those listed in the Commissioning
Standard, the manufacturer's recommendations shall be adhered to. All
quality assurance provisions of the Commissioning Standard such as
performance guarantees shall be part of this contract. For systems or
system components not covered in the Commissioning Standard, Commissioning
procedures shall be developed by the Commissioning Agent Where new
procedures, requirements, etc., applicable to the Contract requirements
have been published or adopted by the body responsible for the
Commissioning Standard used (ACG, NEBB, or TABB), the requirements and
recommendations contained in these procedures and requirements shall be
considered mandatory.
1.3.2 Energy

the project.
1.3.2.1 Section 01 91 00 - GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS
1.4 SUBMITTALS

SD-03 Product Data


SECTION 23 08 00.00 10 Page 2

Performance1.5
Testing.
[Enter Appropriate Subpart Title Here]
1.5.1 Commissioning Team
1.5.2 Contractor's Commissioning Specialist1.5.2.1 [Enter Appropriate

Subpart Title Here]

1.5.2.2 Contractor's Commissioning Team Members

PART 3 EXECUTION

(TAB) Specialist

SECTION 23 08 00.00 10 Page 3


3.2 TESTS




SECTION 23 08 00.00 10 Page 4

APPENDIX A
SECTION 23 08 00.00 10 Page 5

Pre-Functional Performance Test Checklist - Pumps
For Pump: [_____]
Checklist Item A M E T C O
Installation
a. Piping system installed. ___ ___ X X X ___
a. Power available to pump disconnect. ___ X ___ X X ___
b. Pump rotation verified. ___ X ___ X X ___
c. Control system interlocks functional. ___ X ___ X ___ ___
a. Pressure/temperature gauges installed. ___ ___ X ___ X ___
b. TAB Report approved. ___ ___ X ___ X ___
SECTION 23 08 00.00 10 Page 6

Pre-Functional Performance Test Checklist - Cooling Tower
For Cooling Tower: [_____]
Checklist Item
a. Cooling tower properly piped. ___ ___ X X ___ ___
b. Cooling tower fan drive adjusted. ___ ___ ___ ___ X ___
c. Cooling tower makeup water supply piped. ___ ___ X X ___ ___
d. Verify makeup control valve shutoff. ___ ___ X ___ X ___
e. Fan lubricated and blade pitch adjusted. ___ ___ X ___ X ___
a. Power available to tower disconnect. ___ X ___ X ___ ___
b. Power available to electric sump heater. ___ X ___ X ___ ___
c. Control system interlocks functional. ___ ___ ___ X ___ ___
d. Motor and fan rotation checked. ___ X ___ X ___ ___
e. Verify that power disconnect is located

within sight of the unit is controls. ___ X ___ X ___ ___
Piping A M E T C O
a. Condenser water treatment functional. ___ ___ X X X ___
b. All required temperature sensing wells,

pressure ports and flow sensors have
been installed for performance tests. ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
a. TAB report approved. ___ ___ X ___ X _____
SECTION 23 08 00.00 10 Page 7

Pre-Functional Performance Test Checklist - Hot Water Boiler
For Boiler: [_____]
Checklist Item
a. Boiler hot water piping installed. ___ ___ X ___ ___ ___
b. Boiler makeup water piping installed. ___ ___ X ___ ___ ___
c. Boiler fuel oil piping installed. ___ ___ X X X ___
d. Boiler gas piping installed. ___ ___ X X X ___
Startup A M E T C O
a. Boiler safety/protection devices,

including high temperature burner shut-off,
low water cutoff, flame failure, pre- and
post-purge, have been tested. ___ ___ ___ X ___ ___
b. Verify that PRV rating conforms to boiler

rating. ___ ___ ___ X ___ ___
c. Boiler water treatment system functional. ___ ___ X X ___ ___
d. Boiler startup and checkout complete. ___ ___ X X ___ ___
e. Combustion efficiency demonstrated. ___ ___ X ___ X ___
a. Verify that power disconnect is located

within sight of the unit served. ___ X ___ X ___ ___
Controls A M E T C O
a. Hot water pump interlock installed

and tested. ___ ___ ___ X ___ ___
b. Hot water proof-of-flow switch

installed and tested ___ ___ X X ___ ___
c. Hot water heating controls operational. ___ ___ X X ___ ___
a. TAB report approved. ___ ___ X ___ X ___
SECTION 23 08 00.00 10 Page 8

Pre-Functional Performance Test Checklist - Exhaust Fan
For Exhaust Fan: [_____]
Checklist Item
a. Fan belt adjusted. ___ ___ X ___ X ___
a. Power available to fan disconnect. ___ ___ ___ X ___ ___
b. Proper motor rotation verified. ___ ___ ___ ___ X ___
c. Verify that power disconnect is located

within sight of the unit it controls. ___ ___ ___ X ___ ___
a. Control interlocks properly installed. ___ ___ ___ X ___ ___
b. Control interlocks operable. ___ ___ ___ X ___ ___
c. Dampers/actuators properly installed. ___ ___ X ___ ___ ___
d. Dampers/actuators operable. ___ ___ X ___ ___ ___
e. Verify proper location and installation of

thermostat. ___ ___ X ___ ___ ___
a. TAB Report approved. ___ ___ X ___ X ___
SECTION 23 08 00.00 10 Page 9

Pre-Functional Performance Test Checklist - Computer Room Unit
For Computer Room Unit: [_____]
Checklist Item
a. Access doors are operable and sealed. ___ ___ X ___ X ___
b. Condensate drainage is unobstructed and

routed to floor drain. ___ ___ X X X ___
c. Fan belt adjusted. ___ ___ X ___ X ___
a. Power available to unit disconnect. ___ X ___ X X ___
b. Proper motor rotation verified. ___ X ___ ___ X ___
c. Proper motor rotation verified. ___ X ___ ___ X ___
d. Verify that power disconnect is located

within sight of the unit it controls. ___ X ___ X ___ ___
[e. Power available to reheat coils. ___ X ___ ___ X ___]
Coils/Humidifier A M E T C O
a. Refrigerant piping properly connected. ___ ___ X X X ___
a. Control valves operable. ___ ___ X X ___ ___
b. Unit control system operable and

verified. ___ ___ ___ X ___ ___
c. Verify proper location and installation of

thermostat. ___ ___ X X ___ ___
a. TAB Report submitted. ___ ___ X ___ X ___
SECTION 23 08 00.00 10 Page 10

Pre-Functional Performance Test Checklist - HVAC System Controls
For HVAC System: [_____]
Checklist Item
a. Layout of control panel matches drawings. ___ ___ X X ___ ___
b. Framed instructions mounted in or near

control panel. ___ ___ X X ___ ___
c. Components properly labeled (on inside and

outside of panel). ___ ___ X X ___ ___
d. Control components piped and/or wired to

each labeled terminal strip. ___ ___ X X ___ ___
e. EMCS connection made to each labeled

terminal strip as shown. ___ ___ X X ___ ___
f. Control wiring and tubing labeled at all

terminations, splices, and junctions. ___ ___ X X ___ ___
Main Power and Control Air
a. 120 volt AC power available to panel. ___ ___ ___ X ___ ___
b. 20 psig
compressed air available to panel. ___ ___ X X ___ ___
a. TAB Report submitted. ___ ___ X ___ X ___
SECTION 23 08 00.00 10 Page 11

Pre-Functional Performance Test Checklist - Single Zone Air Handling Unit
For Air Handling Unit: [_____]
Checklist Item
a. Inspection and access doors are operable

and sealed. ___ ___ X ___ X ___
b. Condensate drainage is unobstructed. ___ ___ X X X ___
c. Fan belt adjusted. ___ ___ X ___ X ___
a. Power available to unit disconnect. ___ ___ ___ X X ___
b. Power available to unit control panel. ___ ___ ___ X ___ ___
c. Proper motor rotation verified. ___ ___ ___ ___ X ___

e. Power available to electric heating coil. ___ ___ ___ X ___ ___
Coils A M E T C O
[a. Chilled water piping properly connected. ___ ___ X ___ ___ ___]
[a. Refrigerant piping properly connected. ___ ___ X X X ___]
[c. Hot water piping properly connected. ___ ___ X ___ ___ ___]
[c. Steam and condensate piping properly

connected. ___ ___ X X X ___]
a. Control valves/actuators properly

installed. ___ ___ X ___ ___ ___
b. Control valves/actuators operable. ___ ___ X ___ ___ ___
c. Dampers/actuators properly installed. ___ ___ X ___ ___ ___
d. Dampers/actuators operable. ___ ___ X ___ ___ ___
e. Verify proper location and installation

of thermostat. ___ ___ X ___ ___ ___
SECTION 23 08 00.00 10 Page 12

SECTION 23 08 00.00 10 Page 13

Pre-Functional Performance Test Checklist - Energy Recovery System
For Energy Recovery System: [_____]
Checklist Item
a. Recovery system piping installed. ___ ___ X ___ X ___
Startup A M E T C O
a. Startup and checkout complete. ___ ___ X X X ___

installed. ___ ___ X ___ ___ ___
SECTION 23 08 00.00 10 Page 14

Pre-Functional Performance Test Checklist - Heat Exchanger
For Heat Exhanger: [_____]
Checklist Iten
a. Unit is properly labeled/tagged. ___ ___ X X X ___
b. Unit paint and finish in factory condition. ___ ___ X X X ___
c. Unit is secured to housekeeping pad. ___ ___ X X X ___
d. Unit isolation and balancing valves per

contract documents. ___ ___ X X X ___
e. Unit instrumentation installed per contract

documents. ___ ___ X X X ___
f. Drain piping installed and runs to floor

drain. ___ ___ X X X ___
g. Assembly has adequate access for

maintenance. ___ ___ X X X ___
Testing, Adjusting and Balancing (TAB) A M E T C O
SECTION 23 08 00.00 10 Page 15

Pre-Functional Performance Test Checklist - Water Source Heat Pump Units
For Heat Pump:
Checklist Item
a. Access doors/removable panels are operable

and sealed. ___ ___ X X X ___
b. Condensate drainage is unobstructed. ___ ___ X X X ___
c. Fan belt adjusted. ___ ___ X X X ___
a. Power available to unit disconnect. ___ ___ ___ X ___ ___
b. Power available to unit control panel. ___ ___ ___ X ___ ___
c. Proper motor rotation verified. ___ ___ ___ ___ X ___

Coils A M E T C O
a. Dual temperature piping properly connected. ___ ___ X X X ___
b. Chilled water piping properly connected. ___ ___ X X X ___
c. Hot water piping properly connected. ___ ___ X X X ___

installed. ___ ___ X ___ ___ ___
c. Verify proper location and installation

of thermostat. ___ ___ X X ___ ___
SECTION 23 08 00.00 10 Page 16

SECTION 23 08 00.00 10 Page 17

APPENDIX B
SECTION 23 08 00.00 10 Page 18

Functional Performance Test - Pump [_____]
NOTE: Prior to performing this test, for closed loop systems ensure that
the system is pressurized and the make-up water system is operational, or
for open loop systems ensure that the sumps are filled to the proper level.
1. Activate pump start using control system commands.
a. Verify correct operation in:
HAND__________ OFF__________ AUTO__________
b. Verify pressure drop across strainer:
Strainer inlet pressure __________ psig
Strainer outlet pressure _________ psig
c. Verify pump inlet/outlet pressure reading, compare to Testing,

Adjusting, and Balancing (TAB) Report and pump design conditions.
DESIGN TAB ACTUAL
Pump inlet pressure psig _________ __________ __________
Pump outlet pressure psig _________ __________ __________
d. Operate pump at shutoff and at 100 percent of designed flow when all
components are in full flow. Plot test readings on pump curve and
compare results against readings taken from flow measuring devices.
SHUTOFF 100 percent
Pump inlet pressure psig __________ __________
Pump outlet pressure psig __________ __________
Pump flow rate gpm __________ __________
SETPOINT
Differential Pressure Transmitter ________
SECTION 23 08 00.00 10 Page 19

Functional Performance Test (cont) - Pump [_____]
e. For variable speed pumps, operate pump at shutoff (shutoff to be done in

manual on variable speed drive at the minimum rpm that the system is being
controlled at) and at minimum flow or when all components are in full
by-pass. Plot test readings on pump curve and compare results against
readings taken from flow measuring devices.
SHUTOFF 100 percent

Pump inlet pressure psig __________ __________
Pump outlet pressure psig __________ __________
Pump flow rate gpm __________ __________
SETPOINT
Differential Pressure Transmitter ________
2. Measure motor amperage each phase and voltage phase to phase and phase
to ground for both the full flow and the minimum flow conditions. Compare
amperage to nameplate FLA
a. Full flow:
Nameplate FLA __________
Amperage Phase 1 __________ Phase 2__________ Phase 3__________
Voltage Ph1-Ph2 __________ Ph1-Ph3__________ Ph2-Ph3__________
Voltage Ph1-gnd __________ Ph2-gnd__________ Ph3-gnd__________
b. Minimum flow:
Amperage Phase 1 __________ Phase 2__________ Phase 3__________
Voltage Ph1-Ph2 __________ Ph1-Ph3__________ Ph2-Ph3__________
Voltage Ph1-gnd __________ Ph2-gnd__________ Ph3-gnd__________
3. Note unusual vibration, noise, etc.
___________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 23 08 00.00 10 Page 20

Functional Performance Test (cont) - Pump [_____]
4. Certification: We the undersigned have witnessed the above functional

performance tests and certify that the item tested has met the performance
requirements in this section of the specifications.
Signature and Date
SECTION 23 08 00.00 10 Page 21

Functional Performance Test - Cooling Tower [_____]
1. Demonstrate operation of the cooling tower in accordance with

specification and the following:
a. Activate cooling tower fan start using control system command.

This should first start condenser water pump, establish flow, delay fan
start, as specified, to equalize flow in distribution basin and sump.
Verify fan start after timed delay._____________________________________
b. After chiller startup, control system should modulate bypass

valve and two-speed fan motor to maintain condenser water set point.
Verify function of bypass valve under varying loads. __________________
c. Verify cooling tower interlock with chiller._____________________
d. Verify makeup water float valve is functioning. ___________________
e. Activate chemical treatment feed valve, verify makeup of chemical

treatment system, pump, and controls.______________________________
f. Record the following:
Entering water temperature _____ deg F

Leaving water temperature: _____ deg F
Measured water flow: _____ gpm
Entering air wet bulb temperature: _____ deg F
2. Compare results with test results from cooling tower specification

test.
3.
a. Stop all building cooling equipment so that cooling tower pumps
stop. Observe tower for at least 15 minutes and verify no overflow
occurs___________.
b. Start cooling tower pumps in hand and observe pumps for air
binding/cavitation , none allowed __________.
4.Certification: We the undersigned have witnessed the above functional

Signature and Date
SECTION 23 08 00.00 10 Page 22

SECTION 23 08 00.00 10 Page 23

Functional Performance Test Checklist - Hot Water Boiler
For Boiler: [_____]

of hot water system in accordance with specifications including the
following: Start building heating equipment to provide load for boiler.
Activate controls system boiler start sequence as follows.
a. Start hot water pump and establish hot water flow. Verify boiler
hot water proof-of-flow switch operation. ____________________________
Record outdoor air temperature. ____________________________
b. Verify control system energizes boiler start sequence. _________
c. Verify boiler senses hot water temperature below set point and
control system activates boiler start. Setpoint_________deg F
2. Verify boiler inlet/outlet pressure reading, compare to Test and

Balance (TAB) Report, boiler design conditions, and boiler manufacturer's
performance data.
DESIGN SYSTEM TEST ACTUAL

Boiler inlet water temperature deg F __________ _________ _________
Boiler outlet water temperature deg F __________ _________ _________
Boiler outlet pressure psig __________ _________ _________
Boiler flow rate gpm __________ _________ _________
Flue-gas temperature at boiler outlet deg F _________ _________
Percent carbon dioxide in flue-gas _________ _________
Draft at boiler flue-gas exit inches-wg _________ _________
Stack emission pollutants concentration __________ _________ _________
Fuel type __________ _________ _________
Combustion efficiency __________ _________ _________
3. Record the following information:
Ambient dry bulb temperature to determine reset schedule_____degrees F

Building Entering hot water temperature _____degrees F
Building Leaving hot water temperature ____ degrees F
4. Verify temperatures in item 3 are in accordance with the reset

schedule. ______________________________________________________________
5. Verify proper operation of boiler safeties. ________________________

a. Low water_____
b. Water flow____
c. Flame failure____
d. Pilot failure____
e. Pre and Post Purge failure____
f. Pressure relief___
g. High temperature____
SECTION 23 08 00.00 10 Page 24

Functional Performance Test Checklist (cont) - Hot Water Boiler
6. Shut off building heating equipment to remove load on hot water

system. Verify boiler shutdown sequence is initiated and accomplished after
load is removed. _______________________________________________________
7. Unusual vibration, noise, etc.
__________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________

Signature and Date
SECTION 23 08 00.00 10 Page 25

Functional Performance Test Checklist - Exhaust Fan
For Exhaust Fan: [_____]
1. Functional Performance Test: Contractor shall verify operation of

exhaust and supply fans in accordance with specification including
the following:
a. All dampers in normal position prior to fan start.
b. System safeties allow start if safety conditions are met.
c. Confirm proper operation of fans form fire fighter's control
panel, for auto, hand, and off and alarm modes.

functional performance tests and certify that the item tested has met
the performance requirements in this section of the specifications.
Signature and Date
SECTION 23 08 00.00 10 Page 26

Functional Performance Test Checklist - Computer Room Unit
For Computer Room Unit: [_____]

computer room unit in accordance with specification including the following:
a. System safeties allow start if safety conditions are met. ______
b. Verify cooling and heating operation by varying thermostat set

point from space set point to space set point plus 10 degrees, space set
point minus 10 degrees, and returning to space set point. ________________
c. Verify humidifier operation by varying humidistat set point from

space set point to space set point plus 20 percent RH, and returning to
space set point.
_________________________________________________________________
d. Verify that airflow is within tolerance specified in Section

23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING OF HVAC SYSTEMS.
_____________________________________________________________________________

Signature and Date
SECTION 23 08 00.00 10 Page 27

Functional Performance Test Checklist - HVAC Controls
For HVAC System: [_____]
The Contracting Officer will select HVAC control systems to undergo

functional performance testing. The number of systems shall not exceed 10
percent. Perform this test simultaneously with FPT for AHU or other
controlled equipment.

HVAC controls by performing the Performance Verification Test {PVT} test
for that system. Contractor to provide blank PVT test procedures previously
done by the controls Contractor.
2. Verify interlock with UMCS system______.
3. Verify all required I/O points function from the UMCS system_____.
4. Certification: We the undersigned have witnessed the Performance

Verification Test and certify that the item tested has met the performance
Signature and Date
Commissioning Agent ___________________________
Contractor's Commissioning Specialist ___________________________
Contractor's Mechanical Representative ___________________________
Contractor's Electrical Representative ___________________________
Contractor's TAB Representative ___________________________
Contractor's Controls Representative ___________________________
Design Agency Representative ___________________________
Contractor's Officer's Representative ___________________________
Using Agency's Representative ___________________________
SECTION 23 08 00.00 10 Page 28

SECTION 23 08 00.00 10 Page 29

SECTION 23 08 00.00 10 Page 30

Functional Performance Test Checklist - Single Zone Air Handling Unit
For Air Handling Unit: [_____]
1. Functional Performance Test: Contractor shall verify operation of air

handling unit in accordance with specification including the following:
a. Ensure that a slight negative pressure exists on inboard side of the

outside air dampers throughout the operation of the dampers. Modulate OA,
RA, and EA dampers from fully open to fully closed positions.
a. The following shall be verified when the [supply fan operating]

[supply and return fans operating] mode is initiated:
(1) All dampers in normal position prior to fan start___________.
(2) All valves in normal position prior to fan start____________.
(3) System safeties allow start if safety conditions are met. ___
b. Occupied mode of operation - economizer de-energized.
(1) Outside air damper at minimum position.______________________
(2) Return air damper open.______________________________________
(3) Relief air damper [at minimum position][closed].____________
(4) Chilled water control valve modulating to maintain space

cooling temperature set point. Setpoint _______deg F Actual _____deg F
(5) Hot water control valve modulating to maintain space heating

temperature set point input from outside air temperature controller. ______
c. Occupied mode of operation - economizer energized.
(1) Outside air damper modulated to maintain mixed air

temperature set point. Setpoint _______deg F Actual _____deg F O/A damper
position ___________% Return Air Temperature_____deg F Outside Air
Temperature _______ deg F
(2) Relief air damper modulates with outside air damper according
to sequence of operation. Relief air damper position ________%
(3) Chilled water control valve modulating to maintain space

cooling temperature set point. Setpoint _______deg F Actual _____deg F
Return sensor overrides to normal operation.
d. Unoccupied mode of operation.

(1) Observe fan starts when space temperature calls for
heating/cooling ____.
(2) All dampers in normal position. _________________________
(3) Verify low limit space temperature is maintained as
specified in sequence of operation. ______________________________________
SECTION 23 08 00.00 10 Page 31

Functional Performance Test Checklist (cont) - Single Zone Air Handling Unit
e. The following shall be verified when the [supply fan off][supply

and return fans off] mode is initiated:
(1) All dampers in normal position.______________________________
(2) All valves in normal position._______________________________
(3) Fan de-energizes. ___________________________________________
f. Verify cooling coil and heating coil operation by varying

thermostat set point from cooling set point to heating set point and
returning to cooling set point________.
g. Verify safety shut down initiated by low temperature protection

thermostat________.
h. Verify occupancy schedule is programmed into time

clock/UMCS________.

Signature and Date
Contractor's Commissioning Specialist ____________________________
SECTION 23 08 00.00 10 Page 32

Functional Performance Test Checklist - Energy Recovery System
For Energy Recovery System: [_____]

of energy recovery system in accordance with specifications including the
following: Start equipment to provide energy source for recovery system.
a. Verify energy source is providing recoverable energy.____________
b. Verify recovery system senses available energy and activates.____
2. Verify recovery system inlet/outlet readings, compare to design

conditions and manufacturer's performance data.
Design Actual
Primary loop inlet temp (degrees F) __________ __________
Primary loop outlet temp (degrees F) __________ __________
Primary loop flow rate [gpm][cfm] __________ __________
Secondary loop inlet temp (degrees F) __________ __________
Secondary loop outlet temp (degrees F) __________ __________
Secondary loop flow rate [gpm][cfm] __________ __________
Primary loop energy BTU/hr __________ __________
Secondary loop energy BTU/hr __________ __________
3. Verify that recovery system deactivates when recoverable energy is no

longer available. __________________________________________________
4. Check and report unusual vibration, noise, etc.

___________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________
5. Certification: We the undersigned have witnessed the above functional

Signature and Date
SECTION 23 08 00.00 10 Page 33

Functional Performance Test Checklist - Heat Exchanger
For Heat Exchanger (HEX):
1. Funtional Performance Test: Contractor shall demonstrate operation of

hot water system in accordance with specifications including the
following: Start building heating equipment to provide load for HEX.
2. Verify HEX inlet/outlet pressure reading, compare to Test and Balance

(TAB) Report, HEX design conditions, and HEX manufacturer's performance
data.
DESIGN ACTUAL
Building Loop water temperature in: _________ _________ degrees F

Building Loop water temperature out: _________ _________ degrees F
Tower Loop water temperature in: _________ _________ degrees F
Tower Loop water temperature out: _________ _________ degrees F
Building Loop water pressure drop: _________ _________ psi
Tower Loop water pressure drop: _________ _________ psi
Building Loop water flow rate: _________ _________ GPM
Tower Loop water flow rate: _________ _________ GPM
Ambient dry bulb temperature to determing reset schedule ________ degrees F

Building Entering hot water temperature ________ degrees F
Building Leaving hot water temperature ________ degrees F
Ambient dry bulb temperature to determing reset schedule ________ degrees F

Tower Entering hot water temperature ________ degrees F
Tower Leaving hot water temperature ________ degrees F
5. Unusual vibration, noise, etc.

_______________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________

Signature and Date
SECTION 23 08 00.00 10 Page 34

SECTION 23 08 00.00 10 Page 35

Functional Performance Test Checklist - Water Source Heat Pump
For Water Source Heat Pumps (WSHP):
The Contracting Officer will select WSHP units to be spot-checked during

the functional performance test. The number of terminals shall not exceed
10 percent. Condenser water systems must be in operation providing design
water temperatures.

of selected WSHP in accordance with specifications including the
following:
a. Verify WSHP uni responds to room temp set point adjustment.

b. Check blower fan airflow. _______ CFM
c. Check coil water flow. _______ GPM
d. Verify proper operation of cooling water control valve.
e. Check cooling mode inlet air temperature. _______ degrees F
f. Check cooling mode outlet air temperature. _______ degrees F
g. Calculate cooling coil sensible capaciry and compare to design:
Calculated Capacity _______ BTU/hr Design Capacity _______ BTU/hr
h. Check heating mode inlet air temperature. _______ degrees F
i. Check heating mode outlet air temperature. _______ degrees F
j. Calculate heating coil capaciry and compare to design:
Calculated Capacity _______ BTU/hr Design Capacity _______ BTU/hr

Signature and Date
SECTION 23 08 00.00 10 Page 36

SECTION 23 08 00.00 10 Page 37

-End of document
SECTION 23 08 00.00 10 Page 38

SECTION 23 09 23
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL FOR HVAC AND OTHER LOCAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES


Dampers for Rating

ENGINEERS (ASHRAE)
ASHRAE FUN IP (2005) Fundamentals Handbook, I-P Edition
ASME B16.15 (2006) Cast Bronze Threaded Fittings

Classes 125 and 250

Welding End

Attachments
ASTM A 269 (2008) Standard Specification for Seamless

and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel
Tubing for General Service

Copper Water Tube
ASTM B 88M (2005) Standard Specification for Seamless

Copper Water Tube (Metric)

Environmental Stress-Cracking of Ethylene
Plastics

Horizontal Position
CEA-709.1B (2002) Control Network Protocol

Specification
CEA-709.3 (1999) Free-Topology Twisted-Pair Channel

Specification
CEA-852-A (2004) Tunneling Component Network

Protocols Over Internet Protocol Channels
FLUID CONTROLS INSTITUTE (FCI)
FCI 70-2 (2006) Control Valve Seat Leakage
IEEE C62.41.1 (2002) IEEE Guide on the Surges

Environment in Low-Voltage (1000 V and
Less) AC Power Circuits
IEEE C62.41.2 (2002) IEEE Recommended Practice on

Characterization of Surges in Low-Voltage
(1000 V and Less) AC Power Circuits
IEEE Std 142 (2007) Recommended Practice for Grounding

of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems
- IEEE Green Book (Color Book Series)
LONMARK INTERNATIONAL (LonMark)
LonMark Interoperability Guide (2002) LonMark Application-Layer

Interoperability Guide; Version 3.3
LonMark SNVT List (2002) LonMark SNVT Master List; Version

11 Revision 2
LonMark XIF Guide (2001) LonMark External Interface File

Reference Guide; Revision 4.0B
NEMA 250 (2008) Enclosures for Electrical Equipment

(1000 Volts Maximum)
NEMA C12.1 (2008) Electric Meters; Code for

Electricity Metering
NEMA C12.10 (2004) Physical Aspects of Watthour Meters
NEMA C12.20 (2002) Electricity Meter - 0.2 and 0.5

Accuracy Classes

Code - 2008 Edition
47 CFR 15 Radio Frequency Devices
UL 5085-3 (2006e1; Rev thru Jun 2007) UL Standard

for Safety Standard Low Voltage
Transformers - Part 3: Class 2 and Class 3
Transformers

Fire Dampers
UL 555S (1999; Rev thru Mar 2009) Smoke Dampers
UL 916 (2007) Energy Management Equipment
UL 94 (1996; Rev thru Jun 2006) Tests for

Flammability of Plastic Materials for
Parts in Devices and Appliances
1.2 DEFINITIONS
The following list of definitions may contain terms not found elsewhere in
the Section but are included here for completeness.
a. Application Specific Controller: A device that is furnished with a

pre-established built in application that is configurable but not
re-programmable. An ASC has a fixed factory-installed application
program (i.e Program ID) with configurable settings.
b. Binary: A two-state system where an "ON" condition is represented

by a high signal level and an "OFF" condition is represented by a low
signal level. 'Digital' is sometimes used interchangeably with
'binary'.
c. Binding: The act of establishing communications between CEA-709.1B

devices by associating the output of a device to the input of another.
d. Building Control Network: The CEA-709.1B control network installed

under this Section, consisting of a backbone and one or more local
control busses.
e. Building Point of Connection (BPOC): The BPOC is the point of

connection between the UMCS network backbone (an IP network) and the
building control network backbone. The hardware at this location, that
provides the connection is referred to as the BPOC Hardware. In
general, the term "BPOC Location" means the place where this connection
occurs, and "BPOC Hardware" means the device that provides the
connection. Sometimes the term "BPOC" is used to mean either and its
actual meaning (i.e. location or hardware) is determined by the context
in which it is used.
f. Channel: A portion of the control network consisting of one or more

segments connected by repeaters. Channels are separated by routers.
The device quantity limitation is dependent on the topology/media and
device type. For example, a TP/FT-10 network with locally powered

devices is limited to 128 devices per channel.
g. Configuration Parameter: Controller setting usually written to

EEPROM. Also see 'Standard Configuration Parameter Type (SCPT)'
h. Control Logic Diagram: A graphical representation of control logic

for multiple processes that make up a system.
i. Domain: A grouping of up to 32,385 nodes that can communicate

directly with each other. (Devices in different domains cannot
communicate directly with each other.) Part of the Node Addressing
scheme.
j. Explicit Messaging: A method of communication between devices where

each message contains a message code that identifies the type of
message and the devices use these codes to determine the action to take
when the message is received. These messages are non-standard and
often vendor (application) dependent.
k. External Interface File (XIF): A file which documents a device's

external interface, specifically the number and types of LonMark
objects; the number, types, directions, and connection attributes of
network variables; and the number of message tags.
l. Functional Profile: The description of one or more LonMark Objects

used to classify and certify devices.
m. Gateway: A device that translates from one protocol to another.

Gateways are also called Communications Bridges or Protocol Translators.
n. General Purpose Programmable Controller (GPPC): Unlike an ASC, a

GPPC is not furnished with a fixed application program. A GPPC can be
(re-)programmed, usually using vendor-supplied software.
o. LonMark Object: A collection of network variables, configuration

parameters, and associated behavior defined by LonMark International
and described by a Functional Profile. Defines how information is
exchanged between devices on a network (inputs from and outputs to the
network).
p. LNS Plug-in: Software which runs in an LNS compatible software

tool. Device configuration plug-ins provide a 'user friendly'
interface to configuration parameters.
q. LonMark: See LonMark International. Also, a certification issued

by LonMark International to CEA-709.1B devices.
r. LonMark International: Standards committee consisting of numerous

independent product developers and systems integrators dedicated to
determining and maintaining the interoperability guidelines for the
LonWorks industry. Maintains guidelines for the interoperability of
CEA-709.1B devices and issues the LonMark Certification for CEA-709.1B
devices.
s. LonMark Interoperability Association: See 'LonMark International'.
t. LonWorks: The overall communications technology, developed by

Echelon Corporation, for control systems. The term is often used to
refer to the technology in general, and may include reference to

any/all of the: protocol, network management, and interoperability
guidelines where the technology is based on the CEA-709.1B protocol and
employs interoperable devices along with the capability to openly
manage these devices (via multiple vendors) using a network
configuration (or service) tool.
u. LonWorks Network Services (LNS): A network management and database

standard for CEA-709.1B devices.
v. Monitoring and Control (M&C) Software: The UMCS 'front end'

software which performs supervisory functions such as alarm handling,
scheduling and data logging and provides a user interface for
monitoring the system and configuring these functions.
w. Network Variable: See 'Standard Network Variable Type (SNVT)'.
x. Network Configuration Tool: The software used to configure the

control network and set device configuration properties. This software
creates and modifies the control network database (LNS Database).
y. Node: A device that communicates using the CEA-709.1B protocol and

is connected to an CEA-709.1B network.
z. Node Address: The logical address of a node on the network.

Variations in node addressing are possible, but the 'Domain, Subnet,
Node' format is the established standard for this specification.
aa. Node ID: A unique 48-bit identifier assigned (at the factory) to
each CEA-709.1B device, sometimes called the Neuron ID.
bb. Program ID: An identifier (number) stored in the device (usually

EEPROM) that identifies the node manufacturer, functionality of device
(application & sequence), transceiver used, and the intended device
usage.
cc. Repeater: A device that connects two control network segments and
retransmits all information received on one side onto the other.
dd. Router: A device that connects two channels and controls traffic
between the channels by retransmitting signals received from one subnet
onto the other based on the signal destination. Routers are used to
subdivide a control network and to control bandwidth usage.
ee. Segment: A 'single' section of a control network that contains no

repeaters or routers. The device quantity limitation is dependent on
the topology/media and device type. For example, a TP/FT-10 network
with locally powered devices is limited to 64 devices per segment.
ff. Service Pin: A hardware push-button on a device which causes the

device to broadcast a message (over the control network) containing its
Node ID and Program ID. This broadcast can also be initiated via
software.
gg. Standard Configuration Parameter Type (SCPT): Pronounced

'skip-it'. A standard format type (maintained by LonMark
International) for Configuration Parameters.
hh. Standard Network Variable Type (SNVT): Pronounced 'snivet'. A
standard format type (maintained by LonMark International) used to

define data information transmitted and received by the individual
nodes. The term SNVT is used in two ways. Technically it is the
acronym for Standard Network Variable Type, and is sometimes used in
this manner. However, it is often used to indicate the network
variable itself (i.e. it can mean "a network variable of a standard
network variable type"). In general, the intended meaning should be
clear from the context.
ii. Subnet: Consists of a logical (not physical) grouping of up to 127

nodes, where the logical grouping is defined by node addressing. Part
of the Node Addressing scheme.
jj. TP/FT-10: A Free Topology Twisted Pair network defined by CEA-709.3.

This is the most common media type for an ANSI-709.1 control network.
kk. UMCS Network: An IP network connecting multiple building level

control networks using the CEA-852-A standard.
ll. User-defined Configuration Parameter Type (UCPT): Pronounced

'u-keep-it'. A Configuration Parameter format type that is defined by
the device manufacturer.
mm. User-defined Network Variable Type (UNVT): A network variable

format defined by the device manufacturer. Note that UNVTs create
non-standard communications (other vendor's devices may not correctly
interpret it) and may close the system and therefore are not permitted
by this specification.
Provide a Direct Digital Control (DDC) system as a complete system suitable

for the control of the heating, ventilating and air conditioning (HVAC) and
other building-level systems as specified and shown. HVAC controls shall
be provided and installed for full integration into the Postwide HVAC
control system which is a Honeywell EBI system located in Building 4338.
1.3.1 System Requirements
Systems installed under this guide specification shall have the following
characteristics:.
a. Open implementation of LonWorks technology using CEA-709.1B as the

communications protocol and using LonMark Standard Network Variable
Types as defined in LonMark SNVT List for communication over the
network.
b. LonWorks Network Services (LNS) shall be used for all network

management including addressing and binding of network variables.
Submit a copy of the LNS database to the project site as specified.
c. The hardware shall perform the control sequences as specified and

shown to provide control of the equipment as specified and shown.
d. Control sequence logic shall reside in DDC hardware in the

building. The building control network shall not be dependent upon
connection to a Utility Monitoring and Control System (UMCS) for
performance of control sequences in this specification. The hardware
shall, to the greatest extent practical, perform the sequences without
reliance on the building network.
e. Install the hardware such that individual control equipment can be

replaced by similar control equipment from other equipment
manufacturers with no loss of system functionality.
f. All necessary documentation, configuration information,

configuration tools, programs, drivers, and other software shall be
licensed to and otherwise remain with the Government such that the
Government or their agents are able to perform repair, replacement,
upgrades, and expansions of the system without subsequent or future
dependence on the Contractor.
g. Provide sufficient documentation and data, including rights to

documentation and data, such that the Government or their agents can
execute work to perform repair, replacement, upgrades, and expansions
of the system without subsequent or future dependence on the Contractor.
h. Install and configure hardware such that the Government or their

agents are able to perform repair, replacement, and upgrades of
individual hardware without further interaction with the Contractor.
i. Install and configure control hardware to provide all input and

output Standard Network Variables (SNVTs) as shown and as needed to
meet the requirements of this specification.
j. All DDC devices installed under this specification shall

communicate via CEA-709.1B. The control system shall be installed such
that a SNVT output from any node on the network can be bound to any
other node in the domain.
1.3.2 Building Control Network
Provide a building control network consisting of a backbone and one or more

local control busses as specified.
1.3.2.1 Backbone Media
The backbone shall be a TP/FT-10 network in accordance with CEA-709.3.
1.3.2.2 Control Network Requirements
The control network shall meet the following requirements:
a. The backbone shall have no control devices connected to it. Only

CEA-709.1B Routers and CEA-709.1B TP/FT-10 to IP Routers may be
connected to the backbone.
b. The backbone shall be installed such that a router at the Building

Point of Connection (BPOC) location as shown may be connected to the
backbone.
c. The local control bus shall use CEA-709.1B over a TP/FT-10 network
in doubly-terminated bus topology in accordance with CEA-709.3
d. The local control busses shall be installed such that no node

(device connected to the control network) has more than two CEA-709.1B
Routers and CEA-709.3 Repeaters (in any combination) between it and the
backbone, including the router connected to the backbone.
e. All DDC Hardware shall connect to a local control bus.
f. All DDC Hardware shall be locally powered; link power is not

acceptable.
1.3.3 Network Bandwidth Usage Calculations
Perform Building Control Network Bandwidth Usage Calculations for a heavily

loaded and a normally loaded control network. Calculations shall be
performed for network traffic on the backbone.
a. A heavily loaded control network is characterized as one performing

the following activities simultaneously:
1. Transmitting every point in the building indicated on Points

Schedules as being available to the UMCS in response to polling
requests at 15-minute intervals (for trending at UMCS).
2. Transmitting five points to the UMCS in response to polling

requests at 2-second intervals.
3. Transmitting 100 points to the UMCS in response to polling

4. Transmitting occupancy commands from the UMCS to every system

schedule sequence in a one-minute interval.
5. Transmitting occupancy override commands from the UMCS to

every system schedule sequence in a one-minute interval.
b. A normally loaded control network is characterized as one

performing the following activities simultaneously:
1. Transmitting every point in the building indicated on Points

Schedules as requiring a trend to the UMCS in response to polling
requests at 15-minute intervals (for trending at UMCS).
2. Transmitting 50 points to the UMCS in response to polling

3. Transmitting occupancy commands from the UMCS to every system

scheduler sequence in a one-minute interval.
1.4 SUBMITTALS

that will review the submittal for the Government.
a. Technical data packages consisting of technical data and computer

software (meaning technical data which relates to computer software)
which are specifically identified in this project and which may be
defined/required in other specifications shall be delivered strictly in
accordance with the CONTRACT CLAUSES and in accordance with the
Contract Data Requirements List, DD Form 1423. Data delivered shall be
identified by reference to the particular specification paragraph

against which it is furnished. All submittals not specified as
technical data packages are considered 'shop drawings' under the
Federal Acquisition Regulation Supplement (FARS) and shall contain no
proprietary information and be delivered with unrestricted rights.
b. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL

PROCEDURES, the CONTRACT CLAUSES and DD Form 1423 and according to the
sequencing specified in paragraph PROJECT SEQUENCING:
SD-02 Shop Drawings
DDC Contractor Design Drawings; G, DO
DDC Contractor Design Drawings in hard copy and on CDROM in

Microstation format.
Final As-Built Drawings; G, DO
Final As-Built Drawings in hard copy and on CDROM in Microstation

format.
SD-03 Product Data
Manufacturer's Catalog Data; G, DO
Product specific catalog cuts for each product provided under

this specification.
Programming Software; G, DO
The most recent version of the Programming software for each

type (manufacturer and model) of General Purpose Programmable
Controller (GPPC) as a Technical Data Package licensed to the
project site. Software on CD-ROM and 2 hard copies of the
software user manual for each piece of software provided.
GPPC Application Programs; G, DO
All installed GPPC Application Programs on CD-ROM as a Technical

Data Package. Include in the CD-ROM a list or table of contents
clearly indicating which application program is associated with
each device. Submit 2 copies of the GPPC Application Program's
CD-ROM.
XIF files; G, DO
External interface files (XIF files) as a technical data package

for each model of DDC Hardware provided under this specification.
XIF files shall be submitted on CD-ROM.
LNS Database; G, DO
Two copies of the LNS Database for the complete control network
provided under this specification as a Technical Data Package.
Each copy shall be on CD-ROM and shall be clearly marked
identifying it as the LNS Database for the work covered under this
specification and with the date of the most recent database
modification.
LNS Plug-in; G, DO
LNS Plug-ins for each Application Specific Controller as a

Technical Data Package. LNS Plug-ins distributed under a license
shall be licensed to the project site. Submit Plug-ins on
CD-ROM. Submit hard copy manuals, if available, for each plug-in
provided.
SD-05 Design Data
Network Bandwidth Usage Calculations; G, DO
Four copies of the Network Bandwidth Usage Calculations.
SD-06 Test Reports
Existing Conditions Report; G, DO
Four copies of the Existing Conditions Report.
Start-Up and Start-Up Testing Report; G, DO
Four copies of the Start-Up and Start-Up Testing Report. The

Start-Up and Testing report may be submitted as a Technical Data
Package.
PVT Procedures; G, DO
Four copies of the PVT Procedures. The PVT Procedures may be

submitted as a Technical Data Package.
PVT Report; G, DO
Four copies of the PVT Phase Report. The PVT Phase Report may
be submitted as a Technical Data Package.
Pre-Construction QC Checklist; G, DO
Four copies of the Pre-Construction QC Checklist.
Post-Construction QC Checklist; G, DO
Four copies of the Post-Construction QC Checklist.
Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Instructions; G, DO
2 copies of the Operation and Maintenance Instructions, indexed

and in booklet form. The Operation and Maintenance Instructions
shall be a single volume or in separate volumes, and may be
submitted as a Technical Data Package.
Training Documentation; G, DO
Deliver training manuals for each trainee on the Course Attendee

List with 2 additional copies delivered for archival at the
project site. Deliver 2 copies of the Course Attendee List with
the archival copies. The Training Documentation may be submitted

as a Technical Data Package.
Closeout QC Checklist; G, DO
Four copies of the Closeout QC Checklist.
1.5.1 QUALITY CONTROL (QC) CHECKLISTS
The Contractor's Chief Quality Control (QC) Representative shall complete

the QC Checklist in APPENDIX A and submit a Pre-Construction QC Checklist,
Post-Construction QC Checklist and a Closeout QC Checklist as specified.
The QC Representative shall verify each item in the Checklist and initial
in the provided area to indicate that the requirement has been met. The QC
Representative shall sign and date the Checklist prior to submission to the
Government.
1.5.2 Surge Protection
1.5.2.1 Power-Line Surge Protection
Protect equipment connected to ac circuits against or withstand power-line

surges. Equipment protection shall meet the requirements of IEEE C62.41.1,
IEEE C62.41.2. Fuses shall not be used for surge protection.
1.5.2.2 Surge Protection for Transmitter and Control Wiring
Protect DDC hardware against or withstand surges induced on control and

transmitter wiring installed outdoors and as shown. The equipment
protection shall be protected against the following two waveforms:
a. A waveform with a 10-microsecond rise time, a 1,000-microsecond

decay time and a peak current of 60 amps.
b. A waveform with an 8-microsecond rise time, a 20-microsecond decay

time and a peak current of 500 amperes.
1.5.3 Input Measurement Accuracy
Select, install and configure sensors, transmitters and DDC Hardware such
that the maximum error of the measured value at the SNVT output of the DDC
hardware is less than 150 percent of the maximum allowable error specified
for the sensor or instrumentation.
1.5.4 System Modifications
Submit recommendations for system modification in writing. No system

modifications, including operating parameters and control settings, shall
be made without prior approval of the Contracting Officer. Incorporate any
modifications made to the system into the Operations and Maintenance
Instructions, and other documentation affected.
1.5.5 Drawings
The Government will not indicate all offsets, fittings, and accessories
that may be required on the drawings. Carefully investigate the

mechanical, electrical, and finish conditions that could affect the work to
be performed, arrange such work accordingly, and provide all work necessary
to meet such conditions. Drawings shall be on ISO A1 34 by 22 inchesorA3
17 by 11 inches sheets in the form and arrangement shown. Use in the
drawings the same abbreviations, symbols, nomenclature and identifiers
shown. Each control system element on a drawing shall be assigned a unique
identifier as shown. Deliver the DDC Contractor Design Drawings together
as a complete submittal. Deviations shall be approved by the Contracting
Officer. DDC Contractor Design Drawings shall include the following:
a. Drawing Index and HVAC Design Drawing Legend: The HVAC Control
System Drawing Index shall show the name and number of the building,
military site, State or other similar designation, and Country. The
Drawing Index shall list all Contractor Design Drawings, including the
drawing number, sheet number, drawing title, and computer filename when
used. The Design Drawing Legend shall show and describe all symbols,
abbreviations and acronyms used on the Design Drawings.
b. Valve Schedule: The valve schedule shall contain each valve's

unique identifier, size, flow coefficient Kv (Cv), pressure drop at
specified flow rate, spring range, positive positioner range, actuator
size, close-off pressure to torque data, dimensions, and access and
clearance requirements data. The valve schedule shall contain actuator
selection data supported by calculations of the force required to move
and seal the valve, access and clearance requirements. A valve
schedule shall be submitted for each HVAC system.
c. Damper Schedule: The damper schedule shall contain each damper's

unique identifier, type (opposed or parallel blade), nominal and actual
sizes, orientation of axis and frame, direction of blade rotation,
actuator size and spring ranges, operation rate, positive positioner
range, location of actuators and damper end switches, arrangement of
sections in multi-section dampers, and methods of connecting dampers,
actuators, and linkages. The Damper Schedule shall include the
AMCA 500-D maximum leakage rate at the operating static-pressure
differential. A damper schedule shall be submitted for each HVAC
system.
d. Thermostat and Occupancy Sensor Schedule: The thermostat and

occupancy sensor schedule shall contain each thermostat's unique
identifier, room identifier and control features and functions as
shown. A thermostat and occupancy sensor schedule shall be submitted
for each HVAC system.
e. Critical Alarm Handling Schedule: The critical alarm handling

schedule shall contain the same fields as the critical alarm handling
schedule Contract Drawing with Contractor updated information and any
other project-specific information required to implement the alarm
handling function. A critical alarm handling schedule shall be
submitted for each HVAC system.
f. Equipment Schedule: The equipment schedule shall contain the

unique identifier, manufacturer, model number, part number and
descriptive name for each control device, hardware and component
provided under this specification. An equipment schedule shall be
g. Occupancy Schedule: The occupancy schedule drawing shall contain
the same fields as the occupancy schedule Contract Drawing with

Contractor updated information. An occupancy schedule shall be
h. Points Schedule: The Points Schedule drawing shall contain the

same fields as the Points Schedule Contract Drawing with Contractor
updated information. A Points Schedule shall be submitted for each
HVAC system.
i. Riser diagram of building control network: The Riser Diagram of

the Building Control Network shall show all network cabling, DDC
Hardware, and Network Hardware including:
(1) All DDC Hardware with room number and location within room.
(2) DDC Hardware unique identifiers and common descriptive names.
(3) All Network hardware with room number and location within
room.
(4) Network hardware unique identifiers.
(5) All cabling.
(6) Room number and location within room of all cabling

termination points.
(7) Room number and location within room of all network interface
jacks.
j. A single riser diagram shall be submitted for each building.
k. Control System Schematics: The control system schematics shall be

in the same form as the control system schematic Contract Drawing with
Contractor updated information. A control system schematic shall be
l. Sequences of Operation: The HVAC control system sequence of

operation shall be in the same format as the Contract Drawings and
shall refer to the devices by their unique identifiers. No operational
deviations from specified sequences will be permitted without prior
written approval of the Government. Sequences of operation shall be
submitted for each HVAC control system.
m. Controller, Motor Starter and Relay Wiring Diagram: The controller

wiring diagrams shall be functional wiring diagrams which show the
interconnection of conductors and cables to each controller and to the
identified terminals of input and output devices, starters and package
equipment. The wiring diagrams shall show necessary jumpers and ground
connections. The wiring diagrams shall show the labels of all
conductors. Sources of power required for control systems and for
packaged equipment control systems shall be identified back to the
panel board circuit breaker number, controller enclosures, magnetic
starter, or packaged equipment control circuit. Each power supply and
transformer not integral to a controller, starter, or packaged
equipment shall be shown. The connected volt-ampere load and the power
supply volt-ampere rating shall be shown. Wiring diagrams shall be
submitted for each HVAC control system.
1.5.6 Draft As-Built Drawings
Update the Contractor Design Drawings with all as-built data and submit as
specified.
1.5.7 Final As-Built Drawings
Update the Draft As-Built Drawings with all final as-built data and submit
as specified.
Store products with protection from the weather, humidity, and temperature
variations, dirt and dust, and other contaminants, within the storage
condition limits published by the equipment manufacturer.
All products shall be rated for continuous operation under the following
conditions:
a. Pressure: Pressure conditions normally encountered in the installed

location.
b. Vibration: Vibration conditions normally encountered in the

installed location.
c. Temperature:
(1) Products installed indoors: Ambient temperatures in the range

of 32 to 112 degrees F and temperature conditions outside this
range normally encountered at the installed location.
(2) Products installed outdoors or in unconditioned indoor

spaces: Ambient temperatures in the range of -35 to plus 151
degrees F and temperature conditions outside this range normally
encountered at the installed location.
d. Humidity: 10 to 95 percent relative humidity, noncondensing and

humidity conditions outside this range normally encountered at the
installed location.
1.8 PROJECT SEQUENCING
TABLE I. PROJECT SEQUENCING lists the submittals as specified in paragraph

SUBMITTALS (denoted by an 'S' in the 'TYPE' column) and activities as
specified in PART 3: EXECUTION (denoted by an 'E' in the 'TYPE' column).
a. Sequencing for submittals: The sequencing specified for submittals

is the deadline by which the submittal shall be initially submitted to
the Government. Following submission there will be a Government review
period as specified in Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES. If the
submittal is not accepted by the Government, revise the submittal and
resubmit it to the Government within 14 days of notification that the
submittal has been rejected. Upon resubmittal there shall be an
additional Government review period. If the submittal is not accepted
the process repeats until the submittal is accepted by the Government.
b. Sequencing for Activities: The sequencing specified for activities
indicates the earliest the activity may begin.
c. Abbreviations: In TABLE I the abbreviation AAO is used for 'after

approval of' and 'ACO' is used for 'after completion of'.
TABLE I. PROJECT SEQUENCING
SEQUENCING
(START OF ACTIVITY or
ITEM # TYPE DESCRIPTION DEADLINE FOR SUBMITTAL)
------ ---- ------------------------------ --------------------------
1 S Existing Conditions Report
2 S DDC Contractor Design Drawings
3 S Manufacturer's Catalog Data
4 S Network Bandwidth Usage Calculations
5 S Pre-construction QC Checklist
6 E Install Building Control System AAO #1 thru #5
7 E Start-Up and Start-Up Testing ACO #6
8 S Post-Construction QC Checklist 7 days ACO #7
9 S Programming Software 7 days ACO #7
10 S XIF Files 7 days ACO #7
11 S LNS Plug-ins 7 days ACO #7
12 S Start-Up and Start-Up Testing Report 7 days ACO #7
13 S Draft As-Built Drawings 7 days ACO #7
14 S PVT Procedures (before schedule) 7 days
start of #15 and AAO #12
15 E PVT AAO #13 and #14
16 S PVT Report 7 days ACO #15
17 S GPPC Application Programs 7 days AAO #16
18 S LNS Database 7 days AAO #16
19 S Final As-Built Drawings 7 days AAO #16
20 S O&M Instructions AAO #19
21 S Training Documentation AAO #12 and 7 days
before scheduled start
of #22
22 E Training AAO #20 and #21
23 S Closeout QC Checklist ACO #22
1.9 SCHEDULING
1.9.1 System Mode
AHUs shall operate in Occupied, Warm-Up-Cool-Down, or Unoccupied modes as

specified. VAV boxes, Fan Coils, and other terminal equipment shall operate
in Occupied or Unoccupied modes as specified. Chillers, boilers, and other
sources of heating/cooling for hydronic loads do not require scheduling;
these systems receive requests for heating/cooling from their loads.
1.9.2 System Scheduler Requirements
The System Scheduler functionality shall reside in either a piece of DDC

Hardware dedicated to this functionality or in the DDC Hardware controlling
the system AHU. A single piece of DDC Hardware may contain multiple System
Schedulers. A unique System Scheduler shall be provided for: each AHU
including it's associated Terminal Units, and each stand-alone Terminal
Unit (those not dependent upon AHU service) or group of stand-alone
Terminal Units acting according to a common schedule. Each System
Scheduler shall provide the following functionality:
a. Scheduled Occupancy Input: Accept network variable of type

SNVT_occupancy (as defined in the LonMark SNVT List). Input shall
support the following possible values: OC_STANDBY, OC_OCCUPIED and
OC_UNOCCUPIED.
b. Occupancy Override Input: Accept network variable of type

SNVT_occupancy (as defined in the LonMark SNVT List). Input shall
support the following possible values: OC_STANDBY, OC_OCCUPIED,
OC_UNOCCUPIED, and OC_NUL.
c. Space Occupancy Inputs: For systems with multiple occupancy

sensors, accept multiple inputs of network variable type SNVT_Occupancy
(as defined in the LonMark SNVT List). Input shall support the
following possible values: OC_OCCUPIED, OC_UNOCCUPIED, and OC_NUL.
For systems with a single occupancy sensor, accept a network variable
input of type SNVT_Occupancy or a hardware binary input (BI) indicating
the space occupancy status as Occupied or Unoccupied.
d. Air Handler Occupancy Output: For a System Scheduler for a system

containing an air handler, output one or more SNVTs indicating the
desired occupancy status as one of the following possible values:
Warm-Up-Cool-Down (when required by the AHU Sequence of Operation),
Occupied and Unoccupied.
e. Terminal Unit Occupancy Output: For a System Scheduler for a

stand-alone terminal unit, a group of stand-alone terminal units acting
according to a common schedule, or a group of terminal units served by
a single air handler, output one or more SNVTs indicating the desired
occupancy status as one of the following possible values: Occupied and
Unoccupied.
f. Default Schedule: Incorporate a 24-hour 7-day default schedule as

shown on the drawings which may be activated and deactivated by the
System Scheduler Logic.
g. Communication Determination: Determine the time elapsed between

receipts of the scheduled occupancy input SNVT, and use this elapsed
time to activate and deactivate the Default Schedule as specified.
(This provides the capability for the system scheduler to use its
Default Schedule if it loses communication with the UMCS).
1.9.3 System Scheduler Output Determination
a. Air Handler Occupancy Output: If more than 95 minutes have passed

since the last receipt of the Scheduled Occupancy input, the Air
Handler Occupancy Output shall be determined by the default schedule
and the Space Occupancy Inputs. Otherwise, the output shall be
determined as follows:
(1) If the Override Occupancy Input is not OC_NUL, the Air

Handler Occupancy Output shall determined as follows:
(a) The output shall be Occupied when the Override Occupancy

Input is OC_OCCUPIED.
(b) The output shall be Unoccupied when the Override Occupancy

Input is OC_UNOCCUPIED.
(c) If the system Sequence Of Operation specifies
Warm-Up-Cool-Down mode, the output shall be

Warm-Up-Cool-Down when the Override Occupancy Input is
OC_STANDBY.
(2) If the Override Occupancy Input is OC_NUL and the Schedule

Occupancy input is OC_OCCUPIED, the Air Handler and Stand-Alone
Terminal Unit Occupancy Output shall be OC_OCCUPIED.
(3) If the Override Occupancy Input is OC_NUL, the Schedule

Occupancy input is not OC_OCCUPIED, and less than required number
of Space Occupancy Inputs (as shown on the Occupancy Schedule
Drawing) are OC_OCCUPIED (or the hardware BI is Unoccupied), the
Air Handler Occupancy Output shall be determined by the Scheduled
Occupancy Input
(a) The output shall be Occupied when the Scheduled Occupancy

Input is OC_OCCUPIED.
(b) The output shall be Unoccupied when the Scheduled Occupancy

(c) If the system Sequence Of Operation specifies

Warm-Up-Cool-Down mode the output shall be Warm-Up-Cool-Down
when the Scheduled Occupancy Input is OC_STANDBY.
(4) If the Override Occupancy Input is OC_NUL and at least the

required number (as shown on the Occupancy Schedule Drawing) of
Space Occupancy Inputs are OC_OCCUPIED (or the hardware BI is
Occupied), the Air Handler Occupancy Output shall be Occupied.
b. Terminal Unit Occupancy Output: If more than 95 minutes have

passed since the last receipt of the Scheduled Occupancy input, the
Terminal Unit Occupancy Output shall be determined by the default
schedule. Otherwise, the output shall be determined as follows:
(1) If the Override Occupancy Input is not OC_NUL, the Terminal

Unit Occupancy Output shall be determined as follows:
(a) The output shall be Occupied when the Override Occupancy

Input is OC_OCCUPIED or OC_STANDBY (to allow AHU-dependent
Terminal Units to operate in Occupied mode when their associated
AHU is in Warm-Up-Cool-Down.
(b) The output shall be Unoccupied when the Override Occupancy

(2) If the Override Occupancy Input is OC_NUL, the AHU-Dependent

Terminal Unit Occupancy Output shall determined as follows:
(a) The output shall be Occupied when the Scheduled Occupancy

Input is OC_OCCUPIED or OC_STANDBY (to allow AHU-dependent
Terminal Units to operate in Occupied mode when their associated
AHU is in Warm-Up-Cool-Down.
(b) The output shall be Unoccupied when the Scheduled Occupancy

1.9.4 Air Handler System Scheduling
a. The AHU Occupancy Output SNVT shall be bound from the System
Scheduler to the DDC Hardware that executes the Occupancy Mode
Determination part of the Air Handler Sequence of Operation
b. For Air Handlers using occupancy sensors, the occupancy sensor

output SNVT (of type SNVT_Occupancy) shall be bound to a Space
Occupancy Input of the System Scheduler.
c. The Terminal Unit Occupancy Output SNVT shall be bound from the
System Scheduler to each AHU-Dependent Terminal Unit.
d. AHU-Dependent Terminal Units with occupancy sensors shall have

their Effective Occupancy SNVT (of type SNVT_Occupancy) bound to a
Space Occupancy Input of the System Scheduler.
1.9.5 Stand-Alone Terminal Unit Scheduling
The Terminal Unit Occupancy Output shall be bound from the System Scheduler
to the DDC Hardware that executes the Occupancy Mode Determination part of
the Terminal Unit Sequence of Operation.
1.10 MAINTENANCE
1.10.1 General
The HVAC control System Operation and Maintenance (O&m) Instructions shall
include:
a. "Manufacturer Data Package 3" as specified in Section 01 78 23

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA for each piece of control equipment.
b. "Manufacturer Data Package 4" as described in Section 01 78 23 for

all air compressors.
c. HVAC control system sequences of operation formatted as specified.
d. Procedures for the HVAC system start-up, operation and shut-down

including the manufacturer's supplied procedures for each piece of
equipment, and procedures for the overall HVAC system.
e. As-built HVAC control system detail drawings formatted as specified.
f. Printouts of configuration settings for all devices.
g. Routine maintenance checklist. The routine maintenance checklist

shall be arranged in a columnar format. The first column shall list
all installed devices, the second column shall state the maintenance
activity or state no maintenance required, the third column shall state
the frequency of the maintenance activity, and the fourth column for
additional comments or reference.
h. Qualified service organization list.
i. Start-Up and Start-Up Testing Report.
j. Performance Verification Test (PVT) Procedures and Report.
1.10.2 Maintenance Service
Provide services, materials and equipment as necessary to maintain the

entire system in an operational state as specified for a period of one year
after successful completion and acceptance of the Performance Verification
Test. Minimize impacts on facility operations.
1.10.2.1 Description of Work
The adjustment and repair of the system shall include the manufacturer's
required sensor and actuator (including transducer) calibration, span and
range adjustment.
1.10.2.2 Personnel
Use qualified service personnel to accomplish work promptly and

satisfactorily. Advise the Government in writing of the name of the
designated service representative, and of any changes in personnel.
1.10.2.3 Scheduled Inspections
Perform two inspections at six-month intervals, and all work required shall
be performed. Inspections shall be scheduled in June and December. These
inspections shall include:
a. Visual checks and operational tests of equipment.
b. Fan checks and filter changes for control system equipment.
c. Clean control system equipment including interior and exterior

surfaces.
d. Check and calibrate each field device. Check and calibrate 50

percent of the total analog inputs and outputs during the first
inspection. Check and calibrate the remaining 50 percent of the analog
inputs and outputs during the second major inspection. Certify analog
test instrumentation accuracy to be twice the specified accuracy of the
device being calibrated. Randomly check at least 25 percent of all
digital inputs and outputs for proper operation during the first
inspection. Randomly check at least 25 percent of the remaining
digital inputs and outputs during the second inspection.
e. Run system software diagnostics and correct diagnosed problems.
f. Resolve any previous outstanding problems.
1.10.2.4 Scheduled Work
This work shall be performed during regular working hours, Monday through
Friday, excluding Federal holidays.
1.10.2.5 Emergency Service
The Government will initiate service calls when the system is not
functioning properly. Qualified personnel shall be available to provide
service to the system. A telephone number where the service supervisor can
be reached at all times shall be provided. Service personnel shall be at
the site within 24 hours after receiving a request for service. The
control system shall be restored to proper operating condition as required
in accordance with Section 01 78 00 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS.
1.10.2.6 Operation
Scheduled adjustments and repairs shall include verification of the control

system operation as demonstrated by the applicable tests of the performance
verification test.
1.10.2.7 Records and Logs
Keep dated records and logs of each task, with cumulative records for each
major component, and for the complete system chronologically. A continuous
log shall be maintained for all devices. The log shall contain initial
analog span and zero calibration values and digital points. Complete logs
shall be kept and shall be available for inspection onsite, demonstrating
that planned and systematic adjustments and repairs have been accomplished
for the control system.
1.10.2.8 Work Requests
Record each service call request as received and include its location, date
and time the call was received, nature of trouble, names of the service
personnel assigned to the task, instructions describing what has to be
done, the amount and nature of the materials to be used, the time and date
work started, and the time and date of completion. Submit a record of the
work performed within 5 days after work is accomplished.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
Provide materials and equipment which are standard products of a

manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacturing of these and similar
products and that have been in a satisfactory commercial or industrial use
for two years prior to use on this project. The two year use shall include
applications of equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of
similar size. Units of the same type of equipment shall be products of a
single manufacturer. Each major component of equipment shall have the
manufacturer's name and address, and the model and serial number in a
conspicuous place. DDC Hardware not meeting the two-year field service
requirement will be acceptable provided it has been successfully used in a
minimum of two previous projects. The equipment items shall be supported
by a service organization. Items of the same type and purpose shall be
identical, including equipment, assemblies, parts and components. Submit
manufacturer's catalog data sheets documenting compliance with product
specifications as specified for each product installed under this
specification.
2.2 ENCLOSURES AND WEATHERSHIELDS
2.2.1 Enclosures
Enclosures shall meet the following minimum requirements:
a. Outdoors: Enclosures located outdoors shall meet NEMA 250 Type 4

requirements.
b. Mechanical and Electrical Rooms: Enclosures located in mechanical

or electrical rooms shall meet NEMA 250 Type 2 requirements.
c. Other Locations: Enclosures in other locations including but not

limited to occupied spaces, above ceilings, and plenum returns shall
meet NEMA 250 Type 1 requirements.
d. Enclosures supplied as an integral (pre-packaged) part of another

product are acceptable.
2.2.2 Weathershields
Weathershields for sensors located outdoors shall prevent the sun from
directly striking the sensor. Provide the weathershield with adequate
ventilation so that the sensing element responds to the ambient conditions
of the surroundings. The weathershield shall prevent rain from directly
striking or dripping onto the sensor. Install weathershields near outside
air intake ducts such that normal outside air flow does not cause rainwater
to strike the sensor. Provide weathershields constructed of galvanized
steel painted white, unpainted aluminum, aluminum painted white, or white
PVC.
2.3 TUBING
2.3.1 Copper
Copper tubing shall conform to ASTM B 88 and ASTM B 88M
Stainless steel tubing shall conform to ASTM A 269
2.3.3 Plastic
Plastic tubing shall have the burning characteristics of linear low-density

polyethylene tubing, shall be self-extinguishing when tested in accordance
with ASTM D 635, shall have UL 94 V-2 flammability classification or
better, and shall withstand stress cracking when tested in accordance with
ASTM D 1693. Plastic-tubing bundles shall be provided with Mylar barrier
and flame-retardant polyethylene jacket.
2.4 NETWORK HARDWARE
2.4.1 CEA-709.1B Network Hardware
2.4.1.1 CEA-709.1B Routers
CEA-709.1B Routers (including routers configured as repeaters) shall meet

the requirements of CEA-709.1B and shall provide connection between two or
more CEA-709.3 TP/FT-10 channels.
2.4.1.2 CEA-709.3 Repeaters
CEA-709.3 Repeaters shall be physical layer repeaters in accordance with

CEA-709.3.
2.4.2 Gateways
Gateways shall perform bi-directional protocol translation from one non-

CEA-709.1B protocol to CEA-709.1B. Gateways shall incorporate exactly two
network connections: one shall be for connection to a TP/FT-10 network in
accordance with CEA-709.3 and the second shall be as required to

communicate with the non-CEA-709.1B network.
2.4.3 Workstation Hardware (Laptop)
Computer Workstation Hardware (workstation) shall be a laptop as shown.

The the laptop, shall be product of a single manufacturer which advertises
service in all 48 contiguous states. Workstations shall meet the following
minimum requirements.
a. Processor speed: 150 percent the stated requirements of the software

to be installed on the workstation.
b. Random Access Memory (RAM): 150 percent the stated requirements of the
software to be installed on the workstation.
c. Communications ports:
(1) Laptop: One serial port, one USB port, one PCMCIA card slot, and
one additional USB or PS/2 port for a mouse.
d. Hard Drive and controller:
(1) Laptop: 80GB formatted disk space with an average seek time of 10
milliseconds or less.
e. CD-RW Drive: 24x read; 12x re-write; 24x write. For laptops the CD-RW
drive shall be a fixed drive.
f. Video output:
(1) Laptop: Support at least 16 bit color at a minimum resolution of

1024 by 768 at a minimum refresh rate of 60 Hz.
g. Network Interface (NIC):
(1) Laptop: Integrated 100Base-TX Ethernet NIC with an RJ45 connector.
h. Monitor:
(1) Laptop: Integrated Screen sized as shown but no less than 12 inches
with a maximum supported resolution of no less than 1024 by 768
pixels
i. Keyboard:
(1) Laptop: Integrated Standard laptop keyboard.
j. Mouse:
(1) Laptop: Integrated touch-pad.
2.4.4 Workstation Software
2.4.4.1 Operating System (OS)
The operating system (OS) shall be the latest version of the Army Gold
Master Operating System
2.4.4.2 Office Automation Software
Office Automation Software shall consist of the spreadsheet and word

processing portions of the project site's standard office automation
software.
2.4.4.3 Virus Protection Software
Virus Protection Software shall consist of the project site's standard

virus protection software complete with a virus definition update
subscription
2.4.4.4 CEA-709.1-C Network Configuration Tool
The network configuration tool shall meet the following minimum

requirements:
a. It shall solely use LonWorks Network Services (LNS) for all network
configuration and management of CEA-709.1-C devices.
b. It shall be capable of executing LNS plug-ins.
c. It shall be capable of performing network database reconstruction of an

CEA-709.1-C control network, such that if connected to an existing
CEA-709.1-C network it has the ability to query the network and create
an LNS database for that network.
d. It shall allow configuration of the network while off-line such that an

operator may set up changes to the network while disconnected from the
network, and then execute all of them once connected.
e. It shall include the Echelon LNS Report Generator and shall be capable
of generating and printing the following reports:
(1) Table containing domain/subnet/node address and node identifier

for the entire network or any subset thereof, selected by the user.
(2) Table containing Standard Network Variable (SNVT) input and

output details for any CEA-709.1-C device on the network.
(3) Table containing Standard and User-Defined Configuration

Properties (SCPTs and UCPTs) for any CEA-709.1-C device on the
network.
f. It shall be capable of merging two existing standard LNS databases into

a single standard LNS database.
2.4.4.5 Monitoring and Control (M&C) Software
The monitoring and control (M&C) software shall be an LNS-compatible

client-server software package. The software shall accommodate points and
shall be expandable via licensing upgrade to accommodate up to 50,000
points without requiring additional software installation. For the
purposes of this requirement a point is a value (SNVT) that the M&C server
reads from or writes to the network. The server software shall support
clients as specified and shown and shall be expandable via licensing
upgrade to support no less than 50 total clients and no less than 20
clients simultaneously without requiring additional server software
installation.
2.4.4.6 Passwords
The M&C software shall provide user-based access to M&C functionality. The
M&C Software shall manage M&C user information and shall recognize at least
100 separate users and have at least 4 levels of user permissions. User
permission levels (from most restrictive to most permissive) shall include:
a. Permission Level 1: View System Graphic Displays.
b. Permission Level 2: Permission Level 1 plus acknowledge alarms and set

up (configure) trends and reports.
c. Permission Level 3: Permission Level 2 plus override SNVTs and set up

(configure) alarms, schedules and demand limiting.
d. Permission Level 4: Permission Level 3 plus create and modify System

Graphic Displays and create custom programs.
Passwords shall not be displayed. The system shall maintain a disk file
logging all activity of the system. If the file format is not plain ASCII
text, provide a means to export or convert the file to plain ASCII text.
This file shall maintain, as a minimum, a record of all operators logged
onto the system, alarm acknowledgments, commands issued and all database
modifications. Passwords shall not be logged. The activity log shall be
maintained at the server hardware. The system shall automatically provide
a mechanism for archiving the log files for long term record storage.
2.4.4.7 Protocol Drivers
The M&C Software shall include a driver to LNS or a driver to the CEA-852-B
and shall be capable of reading and writing any SNVT on the CEA-852-B
network. The M&C Software may include drivers to other (non-CEA-709.1-C)
protocols. The protocol driver shall allow all M&C Software functions to
write values to and read values from points on the legacy system. The M&C
software shall support reading points from the legacy system and writing
these values to SNVTs on the CEA-709.1-C network, and reading SNVTs from
the CEA-709.1-C network and writing these values to points on the legacy
network. Use of the driver to integrate additional legacy systems shall
not require programming but may require configuration.
2.4.4.8 System Graphic Displays
The monitoring and control (M&C) software shall include graphical displays
through which an operator can perform real-time access and manipulation of
the M&C functions as specified and shown. The graphical displays shall
consist of building-level system (air handler units, VAV boxes, chillers,
boilers etc) graphic displays, alarm displays, scheduling displays,
trending displays, and demand limiting displays. Data associated with an
active display shall be updated at least once every 5 seconds.
a. Navigation Scheme: System graphic displays of building-level systems

and points shall be hierarchical displays using a building-to-equipment
point-and-click navigation scheme. Each display shall show the
building name and number. Each display shall show system wide data
such as outside air temperature and humidity in the case of an HVAC
system application.
(1) Each Building or Building Sub-Area display shall show the

building foot print and basic floor plan, and shall clearly show
and distinguish between the individual zones and the equipment
serving each zone and space. The building display shall also show
all space sensor and status readings, as applicable, for the
individual zones such as space temperature, humidity, occupancy
status, etc. The building display shall show the locations of
individual pieces of monitored and controlled equipment.
(2) Each equipment display shall show a one-line diagram control

schematic representation of the individual pieces of equipment
using the symbols and M&C point data types as specified.
Different colors and textures shall be used to indicate various
components and real time data. Color and texture meanings shall
be consistent across all displays.
(3) Each display shall clearly distinguish between the following

point data types and information:
(a) Real-time data.
(b) User-entered data.
(c) Overridden or operator-disabled points.
(d) Devices in alarm (unacknowledged).
(e) Out-of-range, bad, or missing data.
b. Navigation Commands: The system graphic displays shall support English

language operator commands via point-and-click mouse or keyboard entry
for defining and selecting points, parameters, graphics, report
generation, and all other functions associated with operation. The
operator commands shall be usable from any operator workstation with
individual operator passwords as specified.
(1) Command Input: Operator's commands shall be full words and

acronyms selected to allow operators to use the system without
extensive training or any data processing backgrounds. The system
shall prompt the operator in full words and acronyms for all
required information, identifying acceptable command formats. The
operator's response shall be a point-and-click selection, word,
phrase, or acronym including parameters where required.
(2) Command Input Errors: The system shall supervise operator inputs
to ensure they are correct for proper execution. Operator input
assistance shall be provided whenever a command cannot be executed
because of operator input errors. The system shall explain to the
operator why the command cannot be executed. Conditions for which
operator error assist messages shall be generated include:
(a) The command used is incorrect or incomplete.
(b) The operator is restricted from using that command.
(c) The command addresses an out-of-range or bad data point.
(d) The command addresses a point that does not exist.
(e) The command would violate constraints.
(3) Special Functions: The system shall provide the following

point-and-click mouse functions, in addition to all other commands
specified:
(a) HELP: shall produce an indexed or menu-driven display of all

commands available to the operator. The HELP command, followed by
a specific command shall produce a context sensitive listing with
a short explanation of the purpose, use, and system reaction to
that command.
(b) DISPLAY DIAGRAM: shall display diagrams of specific utility

systems or other systems as specified.
(c) DIAGRAM DEVELOPMENT: shall allow the user to develop diagrams

of specific utility systems or other systems as specified.
(d) PRINT REPORT: Shall allow the operator to initiate printing

of reports.
(4) Operator's Commands: The operator's commands shall provide the

means for entry of control and monitoring commands, and for
retrieval of information. Processing of operator commands shall
commence within 1 second of entry, with some form of
acknowledgment provided at that time. The operator's commands
shall perform tasks, including:
(a) Request a display of any SNVT or calculated point or any

group of related SNVTs and calculated points
(b) Startup and shutdown selected systems or devices.
(c) Override any SNVT point to an operator selected value.
(d) Release the override of a SNVT.
(e) Modify time and event scheduling.
(f) Initiate reports.
(g) Generate and format reports.
(5) System Graphic Display Hierarchy: The system graphic display shall
have a hierarchical structure with at least five levels:
(a) Unit: The unit that a point is associated with, such as an

AHU.
(b) Building Sub-Area: A part of a building.
(c) Building: The building that a point is located in or near.
(d) Building Group: A group of buildings.
(e) Facility: Installation included in the UMCS.
c. Display Editor: The display editor shall enable the user to create,
modify, and delete displays and graphic symbols. The primary use shall
be for adding and modifying one-line diagrams, status displays, system

summaries, and system directories, as new controllers, points, data,
and other necessary changes are made. The basic functions shall
include:
(1) Create and save displays and graphic symbols.
(2) Group and ungroup graphic symbols. The grouped symbol shall be
manipulated as a single symbol.
(3) Modify a portion of a graphic symbol.
(4) Save graphic symbols as a library object.
(5) Rotate and mirror a graphic symbol.
(6) Delete a graphic symbol.
(7) Place a graphic symbol on a display.
(8) Cancel the display of a graphic symbol.
(9) Assign conditions which automatically initiate the display.
(10) Overlay alphanumerics and graphics.
(11) Save new, modified, or existing graphics as new graphics.
(12) Integrate real-time data with the display.
(13) Define the background color.
(14) Define the foreground color.
(15) Locate the symbols.
(16) Position and edit alphanumeric descriptors.
(17) Establish connecting lines.
(18) Establish sources of latest data and location of readouts.
(19) Display analog values as specified.
(20) Cursor control (up, down, right, left).
(21) Create and display alphanumeric displays.
(22) Assign graphics a depth such that when there are coincident
graphics the one with the lower depth is displayed.
(23) Modify graphic properties based on SNVT values, calculated

values or values obtained from a legacy system.
(24) Creating conditional displays such that different graphic

symbols or text are displayed based on SNVT values, calculated
values or values obtained from a legacy system.
(25) Symbols Library: The library of callable display symbols shall
include: Pump, Motor, Two- and Three-way Valves, Flow Sensing

Element, Point and Averaging Temperature Sensors, Pressure Sensor,
Humidity Sensor, Single and Double Deck Air Handling Unit, Fan,
Chiller, Boiler, Air Compressor, Chilled Water Piping, Steam
Piping, Hot Water Piping, Ductwork, Unit Heater, Pressure Reducing
Valve, Damper, Electric Meter, Limit Switch, Flow Switch, High-
and Low- Point and Averaging Temperature Switches, High- and Low-
Pressure Switches, Coil, Solenoid Valve, Filter, Condensing Unit,
Cooling Tower, Variable Frequency Drive (VFD), Heat Exchanger,
Current Sensing Relays. Symbols shall at a minimum conform to
ASHRAE FUN IP where applicable.
2.4.4.9 Scheduling
The M&C software shall be capable of changing the value of any SNVT in the
LNS Database and any point available from a connected legacy system via the
protocol driver to any legal value according to a schedule. A minimum of
200 user-definable schedules shall be supported and the specified
scheduling functions shall be operator accessible and adjustable via
graphics display. The M&C software shall reinforce all schedules by
transmitting the scheduled value no less than once every 30 minutes. The
graphics display shall include the following fields and functions:
a. Current date and time. The OS and M&C software shall automatically
make Daylight Savings Time adjustments. Daylight savings time
adjustment shall be capable of being disabled by the operator.
b. Building name and number.
c. System identifier and name.
d. System group. Systems shall be capable of being grouped by the user to

perform according to a common schedule.
e. Weekly schedules. Each system shall have a weekly schedule based on a

seven day per week schedule with independent schedules for each day of
the week including no less than 6 value changes per day.
f. Holiday and special event schedules. System scheduling shall support

holiday and special event calendar schedules independent of the daily
schedule. Special event schedules shall include one-time events and
recurring events. Scheduling of one-time events shall include the
beginning and ending dates and times of the event. Holiday and special
event schedules shall have precedence over device weekly schedules.
2.4.4.10 Alarms
The M&C software shall be capable of generating alarms by comparing SNVT

values to user-configurable limits and of handling network variable inputs
of type SNVT_Alarm from the control network. The creation of new alarm
conditions, the editing of existing alarms conditions, the deletion of
existing alarm conditions and all specified alarm functions shall be
operator accessible and adjustable via graphics display. M&C Software
shall be capable of handling and managing no less than 10,000 alarm points.
a. Alarm Data. Alarm data to be displayed and stored, as applicable and as

specified, shall include:
(1) Identification of alarm including building, system (or
sub-system), and device name.
(2) Date and time to the nearest second of occurrence.
(3) Alarm type:
(a) Unreliable: Indicates that the source device has failed due
to the sensing device or alarm parameter being out-of-range or bad
data.
(b) High Alarm.
(c) Low Alarm.
(4) Alarm set point and deadband(if analog).
(5) Engineering units.
(6) Current value or status of the alarm point.
(7) Alarm priority: There shall be two alarm priority levels;

critical and informational. Critical alarms shall remain in alarm
until acknowledged by an operator and the alarm condition no
longer exists; informational alarms shall remain in alarm until
the alarm condition no longer exists or until the alarm is
acknowledged.
(8) Alarm Message: A unique message with a field of 60 characters

shall be provided for each alarm. Assignment of messages to an
alarm shall be an operator editable function.
(9) Alarm Secondary Message: Secondary messages shall be assignable

by the operator for printing to provide further information, such
as telephone lists or maintenance functions, and shall be editable
by the operator. The system shall provide for 100 secondary
messages, each with 25 lines of 60 characters each.
(10) Acknowledgement status of the alarm and, where acknowledged, the

time and date of acknowledgement.
(11) User who acknowledged the alarm.
b. Alarm Notification and Routing: The M&C software shall be capable of

performing alarm notification and routing functions. Upon receipt of a
network variable of type SNVT_alarm or SNVT_alarm_2 or upon generation
of an alarm the M&C software shall immediately perform alarm
notification and routing according to an assigned routing for that
alarm. The M&C software shall support at least 500 alarm routes; an
alarm route shall be a unique combination of any of the following
activities:
(1) Generate a pop-up up display on designated workstation monitors.

The pop-up display shall include identification of the alarm, date
and time of the alarm, alarm message, and current value/status of
the alarm point. Alarms shall be capable of being acknowledged
from the pop-up display by operators with sufficient permissions.
Pop-up displays shall be displayed until acknowledged.
(2) Dial a numeric paging system and leaving a numeric message. The
paging system number and numeric message shall be user

configurable for each alarm route.
(3) Send an e-mail message via simple mail transfer protocol (SMTP;
RFC 821). The e-mail shall contain a scripted message and all
alarm data. The e-mail recipient and scripted message shall be
user configurable for each alarm route.
(4) Print alarms to designated alarm printers. The printed message

shall be the same as the pop-up message.
c. Alarm Display and Acknowledgement. The M&C software shall include an

alarm display. A minimum of the most recent 100 system alarms shall be
available for display at each workstation as shown, along with all
associated alarm data. Alarms shall be capable of being acknowledged
from this display. Multiple alarms shall be capable of being
acknowledged using a single command. Operator acknowledgment of one
alarm shall not automatically be considered as acknowledgment of any
other alarm nor shall it inhibit reporting of subsequent alarms.
d. Alarm Storage and Reports: The M&C software shall store each alarm and
its associated alarm data to hard disk. The stored data shall be
user-sortable and formatted for printing.
2.4.4.11 Trending
The M&C software shall be capable of performing real-time trending on a

minimum of 5,000 points simultaneously with a minimum trending capacity of
100 points per second. The M&C software shall be capable of displaying and
printing a graphical representation of each trend, and of multiple trended
points on the same graph. The software shall be capable of saving trend
logs to a file. If the file format is not plain ASCII text in a
Comma-Separated-Value (CSV) format, provide a means to export or convert
the file to plain ASCII text in a CSV format. Each trend shall be
user-configurable for:
a. Point to trend.
b. Sampling interval with a minimum sampling interval no greater than 1

second and a maximum sampling interval no less than 1 hour.
c. Start and Stop Time of Trend: Start and stop times shall be determined
by one or more of the following methods:
(1) Start Time and Stop Time
(2) Start Time and Duration
(3) Start Time and number of samples
2.4.4.12 Electrical Power Demand Limiting
The M&C software shall include demand limiting functionality. The demand
limiting functionality shall be capable of performing electrical demand
limiting such that it can change the occupancy mode or setpoint of DDC
Hardware based on a projected demand to maintain demand below a configured
target. The demand limiting algorithm shall incorporate priority levels
such that low priority equipment is turned off before high-priority
equipment. The demand limiting algorithm shall generate a critical alarm
when it begins to impact the system and if the demand target is exceeded.
2.4.4.13 Report Generation
Provide software with commands to generate and format reports for

displaying on current Workstation, printing, and storing on disk. Reports
shall be stored by type, date, and time. The destination of each report
shall be selectable by the operator. Dynamic operation of the system shall
not be interrupted to generate a report. The report generation mode,
either automatic or requested, shall be operator assignable. The report
shall contain the time and date when the samples were taken, and the time
and date when the report was generated. The software shall be capable of
saving reports to a file. If the file format is not in a format compatible
with the provided Office Automation Software, provide a means to export or
convert the file to a compatible format. Software shall be provided to
format and store all data, trends, profiles, reports and logs specified
herein in a comma-delimited text format to any media supported by the
operating system. The software shall allow for automatic or manual
generation of reports. For automatic reports the operator shall be able to
specify the time the initial report is to be generated, the time interval
between reports, end of period, and the output format for the report. The
operator shall be able to modify, or inhibit a periodic report. Manual
report generation shall allow for the operator to request at any time the
output of any report. The software shall have a report generation utility
capable of generating the following standard reports:
a. Electrical Power Usage Report: An electrical power Usage summary,

operator selectable for substations, meters, or transducers, individual
meters and transducers, any group of meters and transducers, and all
meters for an operator selected time period. The report shall include
the voltage, current, power factor, electrical demand, electrical power
consumption, reactive power (Kvar) for each substation, facility,
system or equipment as selected by the operator. The report shall be
automatically printed at the end of each summary period and shall
include:
(1) Total period consumption.
(2) Demand interval peak for the period, with time of occurrence.
(3) Energy consumption (kWh) over each demand interval.
(4) Time-of-use peak, semi-peak, off-peak, or baseline total kWh

consumption.
(5) Reactive power during each demand interval.
(6) Power factor during each demand interval.
(7) Outside air (OA) temperature and relative humidity (RH) taken at
the maximum and minimum of OA temperature of the report period
with the time and dates of occurrence. At the installation's peak
demand interval, the OA temperature and RH shall also be recorded.
(8) Calculated heating and cooling degree days based on a 65 degrees F

balance point.
b. Electrical Peak Demand Prediction Report: A report based on the demand

limiting program. The report shall include:
(1) Electrical Demand Target (EDT).
(2) Actual peak and predicted peak for each demand interval for that
day.
(3) Predicted demand for the next demand interval.
c. Energy usage Report: An energy usage summary, operator selectable, for

a unit, building, area, installation, and the entire UMCS. The report
shall be divided by utility, and shall be capable of reporting on at
least four separate utilities. The report shall include the following
information:
(1) Beginning and ending dates and times.
(2) Total energy usage for each utility for the current and previous
day.
(3) Total energy usage for each utility for the current and previous
month.
(4) Maximum 15-minute interval average rate of consumption for each

utility for the current and previous day and current and previous
month.
(5) Outside air (OA) temperature and OA relative humidity (RH) or dew
point for current and previous month and current and previous day:
(a) Average temperature and RH or dewpoint.
(b) Temperature and RH or dewpoint at maximum and minimum OA

temperature with time and date of occurrence.
(b) Temperature and RH or dewpoint at maximum and minimum RH or

dewpoint with time and date of occurrence.
(c) Temperature and RH or dew point at the installation's peak

demand interval with the time and date of occurrence
(6) Calculated degree days.
d. Alarm Report: Outstanding alarms by building or unit, including time

of occurrence.
e. Override Report: Points overridden, including time overridden, and

identification of operator overriding the point.
f. Run Time Reports: A report totalizing the accumulated run time of

individual pieces of equipment. The operator shall be able define
equipment groupings and shall be able to generate reports based on
these groupings.
g. Cooling Tower Profiles: A cooling tower profile for each cooling tower
as shown, including:
(1) Total daily and monthly on-time (each fan).
(2) Number of on and off transitions (each fan).
(3) Maximum and minimum daily condenser water temperature and the
time of occurrence for the current and previous months.
h. Chiller usage Report: A report of the operation of each chiller as

shown on a daily and monthly basis, including:
(1) Daily run-time in each one of at least 10 discrete loading levels.
(2) Total on-time for each level for the current month.
(3) Monthly average energy use in kWh or Mbtu for total on-time at
each level.
2.5 WIRE AND CABLE
All wire and cable shall meet the requirements of NFPA 70 and NFPA 90A in
addition to the requirements of this specification.
2.5.1 Terminal Blocks
Terminal blocks which are not integral to other equipment shall be

insulated, modular, feed-through, clamp style with recessed captive
screw-type clamping mechanism, shall be suitable for rail mounting, and
shall have end plates and partition plates for separation or shall have
enclosed sides.
2.5.2 Control Wiring for Binary Signals
Control wiring for binary signals shall be 18 AWG copper and shall be rated
for 300-volt service.
2.5.3 Wiring for 120-Volt Circuits
Wiring for 120-volt circuits shall be 18 AWG or thicker stranded copper and
shall be rated for 600-volt service.
2.5.4 Control Wiring for Analog Signals
Control Wiring for Analog Signals shall be 18 AWG, copper, single- or

multiple-twisted, minimum 2 inch lay of twist, 100 percent shielded pairs,
and shall have a 300-volt insulation. Each pair shall have a 20 AWG
tinned-copper drain wire and individual overall pair insulation. Cables
shall have an overall aluminum-polyester or tinned-copper cable-shield
tape, overall 20 AWG tinned-copper cable drain wire, and overall cable
insulation.
2.5.5 Transformers
Transformers shall be UL 5085-3 approved. Transformers shall be sized so

that the connected load is no greater than 80 percent of the transformer
rated capacity.
2.6 AUTOMATIC CONTROL VALVES
Valves shall have stainless-steel stems and stuffing boxes with extended
necks to clear the piping insulation. Valve bodies shall meet ASME B16.34
or ASME B16.15 pressure and temperature class ratings based on the design
operating temperature and 150 percent of the system design operating
pressure. Unless otherwise specified or shown, valve leakage shall meet
FCI 70-2 Class IV leakage rating (0.01 percent of valve Kv). Unless
otherwise specified or shown, valves shall have globe-style bodies. Unless
otherwise specified:
a. bodies for valves 1.5 inches and smaller shall be brass or bronze,
with threaded or union ends
b. bodies for 2 inch valves shall have threaded ends
c. bodies for valves 2 to 3 inches shall be of brass, bronze or iron.
d. bodies for valves 2.5 inches and larger shall be provided with
flanged-end connections.
e. for modulating applications, valve Kv (Cv) shall be within 100 to

125 percent of the Kv (Cv) shown.
f. for two position applications (where the two positions are full
open and full closed) the Kv (Cv) shall be the largest available for
the valve size.
g. valve and actuator combination shall be normally open or normally

closed as shown.
2.6.1 Ball Valves
Balls shall be stainless steel or nickel plated brass. Valves shall have
blow-out proof stems.
2.6.2 Butterfly
Butterfly valves shall be threaded lug type suitable for dead-end service
and modulation to the fully-closed position, with carbon-steel bodies and
non-corrosive discs, stainless steel shafts supported by bearings, and EPDM
seats suitable for temperatures from -20 to plus 250 degrees F. The rated
Kv (Cv) for butterfly valves shall be the value Kv (Cv) at 70 percent (60
degrees) open position. Valve leakage shall meet FCI 70-2 Class VI leakage
rating.
2.6.3 Two-Way
Two-way modulating valves used for liquids shall have an equal-percentage

characteristic.
2.6.4 Three-Way
Three-way modulating valves shall provide equal percentage flow control

with constant total flow throughout full plug travel.
2.6.5 Duct-Coil and Terminal-Unit-Coil
Control valves with either flare-type or solder-type ends shall be provided

for duct or terminal-unit coils. Flare nuts shall be provided for each
flare-type end valve.
2.6.6 Condenser Water
Valve internal trim shall be Type 316 stainless steel. Valves 4 inches and
larger shall be butterfly valves.
2.6.7 Hot Water
a. Valves for hot water service shall have internal trim (including
seats, seat rings, modulating plugs, and springs) of Type 316 stainless
steel. Internal trim for valves controlling water below 210 degrees F
shall be brass, bronze or Type 316 stainless steel. Nonmetallic valve
parts shall be suitable for a minimum continuous operating temperature
of 250 or 50 degrees F above the system design temperature, whichever
is higher. Valves 4 inches and larger shall be butterfly valves.
2.7 DAMPERS
2.7.1 Damper Assembly
A single damper section shall have blades no longer than 48 inch and shall
be no higher than 72 inch. Maximum damper blade width shall be 8 inch.
Larger sizes shall be made from a combination of sections. Dampers shall
be steel, or other materials where shown. Flat blades shall be made rigid
by folding the edges. Blade-operating linkages shall be within the frame
so that blade-connecting devices within the same damper section shall not
be located directly in the air stream. Damper axles shall be 1/2 inch
minimum, plated steel rods supported in the damper frame by stainless steel
or bronze bearings. Blades mounted vertically shall be supported by thrust
bearings. Pressure drop through dampers shall not exceed 0.04 inches water
gauge at 1,000 ft/min in the wide-open position. Frames shall not be less
than 2 inch in width. Dampers shall be tested in accordance with AMCA 500-D.
2.7.2 Operating Linkages
Operating links external to dampers, such as crank arms, connecting rods,

and line shafting for transmitting motion from damper actuators to dampers,
shall withstand a load equal to at least 300 percent of the maximum
required damper-operating force. Rod lengths shall be adjustable. Links
shall be brass, bronze, zinc-coated steel, or stainless steel. Working
parts of joints and clevises shall be brass, bronze, or stainless steel.
Adjustments of crank arms shall control the open and closed positions of
dampers.
2.7.3 Damper Types
2.7.3.1 Flow Control Dampers
Outside air, return air, relief air, exhaust, face and bypass dampers shall
be provided where shown and shall be parallel-blade or opposed blade type
as shown on the Damper Schedule. Blades shall have interlocking edges and
shall be provided with compressible seals at points of contact. The
channel frames of the dampers shall be provided with jamb seals to minimize
air leakage. Unless otherwise shown, dampers shall be AMCA 500-D Class 2
and shall not leak in excess of 20 cfm per square foot at 4 inches water
gauge static pressure when closed. Outside air damper seals shall be
suitable for an operating temperature range of -40 to plus 167 degrees F.
Dampers shall be rated at not less than 2000 ft/min air velocity.
2.7.3.2 Mechanical Rooms and Other Utility Space Ventilation Dampers
Utility space ventilation dampers shall be as shown. Unless otherwise

shown, dampers shall be AMCA 500-D class 4 and shall not leak in excess of
80 cfm per square foot at 4 inches water gauge static pressure when
closed. Dampers shall be rated at not less than 1500 ft/min air velocity.
2.7.3.3 Smoke Dampers
Smoke-damper and actuator assembly shall meet the current requirements of

NFPA 90A, UL 555, and UL 555S. Combination fire and smoke dampers shall be
rated for 250 degrees F Class II leakage in accordance with UL 555S.
2.8 SENSORS AND INSTRUMENTATION
Unless otherwise specified, sensors and instrumentation shall incorporate

an integral transmitter or be provided with a transmitter co-located with
the sensor. Sensors and instrumentation, including their transmitters,
shall meet the specified accuracy and drift requirements at the input of
the connected DDC Hardware's analog-to-digital conversion. Sensors and
instrumentation, including their transmitters, shall meet or exceed the
specified range.
2.8.1 Transmitters
The transmitter shall match the characteristics of the sensor.

Transmitters providing analog values shall produce a linear 4-20 mAdc, 0-10
Vdc or SNVT output corresponding to the required operating range and shall
have zero and span adjustment. Transmitters providing binary values shall
have dry contacts or SNVT output. Transmitters with SNVT output are
Application Specific Controllers (ASCs) and shall meet all ASC
requirements. (note: ASCs are specified in paragraph DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL
(DDC) HARDWARE)
2.8.2 Temperature Sensors
2.8.2.1 Sensor Ranges and Accuracy
Temperature sensors may be provided without transmitters. Temperature

sensors, including transmitter if used, shall have minimum operating
ranges, minimum accuracy and maximum drift as specified below for the
application:
a. Conditioned Space Temperature
(1) Operating Range: 50 to 86 degrees F.
(2) Accuracy: +/- 1 degree F over the operating range.
(3) Drift: Maximum 1 degree F per year.
b. Unconditioned Space Temperature
(2) Accuracy: +/- 1 degree F over the range of 30 to 131 degrees F

and +/- 4 degrees F over the rest of the operating range.
c. Duct Temperature
(2) Accuracy: +/- 2 degrees F.
(3) Drift: Maximum 2 degrees F per year.
d. Outside Air Temperature
(2) Accuracy:
(a) +/- 2 degrees F over the range of -30 to plus 130 degrees F.
(b) +/- 1 degreeF over the range of 30 to 100 degrees F.
e. Heating Hot Water
(2) Accuracy: +/- 2 degrees F.
(3) Drift: Maximum 2 degrees F per year.
f. Condenser Water
(2) Accuracy: +/- 1 degree F.
2.8.2.2 Point Temperature Sensors
Point Sensors shall be encapsulated in epoxy, series 300 stainless steel,

anodized aluminum, or copper.
2.8.2.3 Averaging Temperature Sensors
Averaging sensors shall be a continuous element with a minimum length equal

to 1 foot/square foot of duct cross-sectional area at the installed
location. The sensing element shall have a bendable copper sheath.
2.8.2.4 Thermowells
Thermowells shall be Series 300 stainless steel with threaded brass plug
and chain, 2 inch lagging neck and extension type well. Inside diameter
and insertion length shall be as required for the application.
2.8.3 Relative Humidity Sensor
Relative humidity sensors shall use bulk polymer resistive or thin film
capacitive type non-saturating sensing elements capable of withstanding a
saturated condition without permanently affecting calibration or sustaining
damage. The sensors shall include removable protective membrane filters.

Where required for exterior installation, sensors shall be capable of
surviving below freezing temperatures and direct contact with moisture
without affecting sensor calibration. When used indoors, the sensor shall
be capable of being exposed to a condensing air stream (100 percent RH)
with no adverse effect to the sensor's calibration or other harm to the
instrument. The sensor shall be of the wall-mounted or duct-mounted type,
as required by the application, and shall be provided with any required
accessories. Sensors used in duct high-limit applications shall have a
bulk polymer resistive sensing element. Duct-mounted sensors shall be
provided with a duct probe designed to protect the sensing element from
dust accumulation and mechanical damage. Relative humidity (RH) sensors
shall measure relative humidity over a range of 0 to 100 percent with an
accuracy of +/- 3 percent. RH sensors shall function over a temperature
range of 25 to 130 degrees F and shall not drift more than 2 percent per
year.
2.8.4 Carbon Dioxide (CO2) Sensors
Carbon dioxide (CO2) sensors shall measure CO2 concentrations between 0 to

2000 parts per million (ppm) using non-dispersive infrared (NDIR)
technology with an accuracy of +/- 75 ppm and a maximum response time of 1
minute. The sensor shall be rated for operation at ambient air
temperatures within the range of 32 to 122 degrees F and relative humidity
within the range of 0 to 95 percent (non-condensing). The sensor shall
have a maximum drift of 2 percent. The sensor chamber shall be
manufactured with a non-corrosive material (such as gold-plating) that does
not affect carbon dioxide sample concentration. Duct mounted sensors shall
be provided with a duct probe designed to protect the sensing element from
dust accumulation and mechanical damage.
2.8.5 Differential Pressure Instrumentation
2.8.5.1 Differential Pressure Sensors
Differential Pressure Sensor range shall be as shown or as required for the

application. Pressure sensor ranges shall not exceed the high end range
shown on the Points Schedule by more than 50 percent. The over pressure
rating shall be a minimum of 150 percent of the highest design pressure of
either input to the sensor. The accuracy shall be +/- 2 percent of full
scale.
2.8.5.2 Differential Pressure Switch
The switch shall have a user-adjustable setpoint. The setpoint shall not
be in the upper or lower quarters of the range. The over pressure rating
shall be a minimum of 150 percent of the highest design pressure of either
input to the sensor. The switch shall have two sets of contacts and each
contact shall have a rating greater than it's connected load. Contacts
shall open or close upon rise of pressure above the setpoint or drop of
pressure below the setpoint as shown.
2.8.6 Flow Sensors
2.8.6.1 Airflow Measurement Array (AFMA)
a. Airflow Straightener.-AFMAs shall contain an airflow straightener

if required by the AFMA manufacturer's published installation
instructions. The straightener shall be contained inside a flanged
sheet metal casing, with the AMFA located as specified according to the
published recommendation of the AFMA manufacturer. In the absence of
published documentation airflow straighteners shall be provided if
there is any duct obstruction within 5 duct diameters upstream of the
AFMA. Air-flow straighteners, where required, shall be constructed of
0.125 inch aluminum honeycomb and the depth of the straightener shall
not be less than 1.5 inches.
b. Resistance to airflow.-The resistance to air flow through the AFMA,

including the airflow straightener shall not exceed 0.08 inch water
gauge at an airflow of 2,000 fpm. AFMA construction shall be suitable
for operation at airflows of up to 5,000 fpm over a temperature range of
40 to 120 degrees F.
c. Outside air temperature.-In outside air measurement or in

low-temperature air delivery applications, the AFMA shall be certified
by the manufacturer to be accurate as specified over a temperature
range of -20 to plus 120 degrees F.
d. Pitot Tube AFMA.-Each Pitot Tube AFMA shall contain an array of

velocity sensing elements. The velocity sensing elements shall be of
the multiple pitot tube type with averaging manifolds. The sensing
elements shall be distributed across the duct cross section in the
quantity and pattern specified by the published installation
instructions of the AFMA manufacturer. Pitot Tube AFMAs shall have an
accuracy of +/- 3 percent over a range of 500 to 2,500 fpm.
e. Electronic AFMA.-Each electronic AFMA shall consist of an array of

velocity sensing elements of the resistance temperature detector (RTD)
or thermistor type. The sensing elements shall be distributed across
the duct cross section in the quantity and pattern specified by the
published application data of the AFMA manufacturer. Electronic AFMAs
shall have an accuracy of +/- 3 percent percent over a range of 125 to
2,500 fpm and the output shall be temperature compensated over a range
of 32 to 212 degrees F.
2.8.6.2 Orifice Plate
Orifice plate shall be made of an austenitic stainless steel sheet of 0.125

inch nominal thickness with an accuracy of +/- 1 percent of full flow. The
orifice plate shall be flat within 0.002 inches. The orifice surface
roughness shall not exceed 20 micro-inches. The thickness of the
cylindrical face of the orifice shall not exceed 2 percent of the pipe
inside diameter or 12.5 percent of the orifice diameter, whichever is
smaller. The upstream edge of the orifice shall be square and sharp.
Where orifice plates are used, concentric orifice plates shall be used in
all applications except steam flow measurement in horizontal pipelines.
2.8.6.3 Flow Nozzle
Flow nozzle shall be made of austenitic stainless steel with an accuracy of

+/- 1 percent of full flow. The inlet nozzle form shall be elliptical and
the nozzle throat shall be the quadrant of an ellipse. The thickness of
the nozzle wall and flange shall be such that distortion of the nozzle
throat from strains caused by the pipeline temperature and pressure, flange
bolting, or other methods of installing the nozzle in the pipeline shall
not cause the accuracy to degrade beyond the specified limit. The outside
diameter of the nozzle flange or the design of the flange facing shall be
such that the nozzle throat shall be centered accurately in the pipe.
2.8.6.4 Venturi Tube
Venturi tube shall be made of cast iron or cast steel and shall have an
accuracy of +/- 1 percent of full flow. The throat section shall be lined
with austenitic stainless steel. Thermal expansion characteristics of the
lining shall be the same as that of the throat casting material. The
surface of the throat lining shall be machined to a +/- 50 micro inch
finish, including the short curvature leading from the converging entrance
section into the throat.
2.8.6.5 Annular Pitot Tube
Annular pitot tube shall be made of austenitic stainless steel with an

accuracy of +/- 2 percent of full flow and a repeatability of +/- 0.5
percent of measured value. The unit shall have at least one static port
and no less than four total head pressure ports with an averaging manifold.
2.8.6.6 Insertion Turbine Flowmeter
Insertion Turbine Flowmeter accuracy shall be +/- 1 percent of reading for

a minimum turndown ratio of 1:1 through a maximum turndown ratio of 50:1.
Repeatability shall be +/- 0.25 percent of reading. The meter flow sensing
element shall operate over a range suitable for the installed location with
a pressure loss limited to 1 percent of operating pressure at maximum flow
rate. Design of the flowmeter probe assembly shall incorporate integral
flow, temperature, and pressure sensors. The turbine rotor assembly shall
be constructed of Series 300 stainless steel and use Teflon seals.
2.8.6.7 Vortex Shedding Flowmeter
Vortex Shedding Flowmeter accuracy shall be within +/- 0.8 percent of the
actual flow. The flow meter body shall be made of austenitic stainless
steel. The vortex shedding flowmeter body shall not require removal from
the piping in order to replace the shedding sensor.
2.8.6.8 Positive Displacement Flow Meter
The flow meter shall be a direct reading, gerotor, nutating disk or vane
type displacement device rated for liquid service as shown. A counter
shall be mounted on top of the meter, and shall consist of a non-resettable
mechanical totalizer for local reading, and a pulse transmitter for remote
reading. The totalizer shall have a six digit register to indicate the
volume passed through the meter in gallons, and a sweep-hand dial to
indicate down to 0.25 gallons. The pulse transmitter shall have a
hermetically sealed reed switch which is activated by magnets fixed on
gears of the counter. The meter shall have a bronze body with threaded or
flanged connections as required for the application. Output accuracy shall
be +/- 2 percent of the flow range. The maximum pressure drop at full flow
shall be 5 psig.
2.8.6.9 Flow Meters, Paddle Type
Sensor shall be non-magnetic, with forward curved impeller blades designed

for water containing debris. Sensor accuracy shall be +/- 2 percent of
rate of flow, minimum operating flow velocity shall be 1 foot per second.
Sensor repeatability and linearity shall be +/- 1 percent. Materials which
will be wetted shall be made from non-corrosive materials and shall not
contaminate water. The sensor shall be rated for installation in pipes of
3 to 40 inch diameters. The transmitter housing shall be a NEMA 250 Type 4

enclosure.
2.8.6.10 Flow Switch
Flow switch shall have a repetitive accuracy of +/- 10 percent of actual

flow setting. Switch actuation shall be adjustable over the operating flow
range. The switch shall have Form C snap-action contacts, rated for the
application. The flow switch shall have non flexible paddle with
magnetically actuated contacts and be rated for service at a pressure
greater than the installed conditions. Flow switch for use in sewage
system shall be rated for use in corrosive environments encountered.
2.8.6.11 Gas Utility Flow Meter
Gas utility flow meter shall be diaphragm or bellows type (gas positive
displacement meters) for flows up to 2500 SCFH and axial flow turbine type
for flows above 2500 SCFH, designed specifically for natural gas supply
metering, and rated for the pressure, temperature, and flow rates of the
installation. Meter shall have a minimum turndown ratio of 10 to 1 with an
accuracy of +/- 1 percent of actual flow rate. The meter index shall
include a direct reading mechanical totalizing register and electrical
impulse dry contact output for remote monitoring. For gas flows of less
than 1500 cubic-feet/second, the electrical impulse dry contact output
shall provide not less than 1 pulse per 100 cubic feet of gas and shall not
exceed 15 pulses per second for the installed application. For gas flows
1500 cubic-feet/second or greater, the pulse rate shall not be the greatest
pulse-rate available but not to exceed 15 pulses per second for the
installed application. The electrical impulse dry contact output shall not
require field adjustment or calibration.
2.8.7 Electrical Instruments
Electrical Instruments shall have an input range as shown or sized for the
application. Unless otherwise specified, AC instrumentation shall be
suitable for 60 Hz operation.
2.8.7.1 Watt or Watthour Transducers
Watt transducers shall measure voltage and current and shall output kW,
kWh, or kW and kWh as shown. kW outputs shall have an accuracy of +/- 0.25
percent over a power factor range of 0.1 to 1. kWh outputs shall be a
pulse output and shall have an accuracy of +/- 0.5 percent over a power
factor range of 0.1 to 1.
2.8.7.2 Watthour Revenue Meter (with and without Demand Register)
All Watthour revenue meters shall measure voltage and current and shall be
in accordance with NEMA C12.1 with an NEMA C12.20 Accuracy class of 0.5 and
shall have pulse initiators for remote monitoring of Watthour consumption.
Pulse initiators shall consist of form C contacts with a current rating not
to exceed two amperes and voltage not to exceed 500 V, with combinations of
VA not to exceed 100 VA, and a life rating of one billion operations.
Meter sockets shall be in accordance with NEMA C12.10. Watthour revenue
meters with demand registers shall have an analog output for instantaneous
demand in addition to the pulse initiators.
2.8.7.3 Current Transducers
Current transducers shall accept an AC current input and shall have an

accuracy of +/- 0.5 percent of full scale. An integral power supply shall
be provided if required for the analog output signal. The device shall
have a means for calibration.
2.8.7.4 Current Sensing Relays (CSRs)
Current sensing relays (CSRs) shall provide a normally-open contact with a

voltage and amperage rating greater than its connected load. Current
sensing relays shall be of split-core design. The CSR shall be rated for
operation at 200 percent of the connected load. Voltage isolation shall be
a minimum of 600 volts. The CSR shall auto-calibrate to the connected load.
2.8.7.5 Voltage Transducers
Voltage transducers shall accept an AC voltage input and have an accuracy

of +/- 0.25 percent of full scale. An integral power supply shall be
provided if required for the analog output signal. The device shall have a
means for calibration. Line side fuses for transducer protection shall be
provided.
2.8.8 Occupancy Sensors
Occupancy sensors shall have occupancy-sensing sensitivity adjustment and

an adjustable off-delay timer with a range encompassing 30 seconds to 15
minutes. Occupancy sensors shall be rated for operation in ambient air
temperatures ranging from 50 to 104 degrees F or temperatures normally
encountered in the installed location. Sensors integral to wall mount
on-off light switches shall have an auto-off switch. Wall switch sensors
shall be decorator style and shall fit behind a standard decorator type
wall plate. All occupancy sensors, power packs, and slave packs shall be
UL listed. In addition to any outputs required for lighting control, the
occupancy sensor shall provide a contact output rated at 1A at 24 Vac or a
SNVT output.
2.8.8.1 Passive Infrared (PIR) Occupancy Sensors
PIR occupancy sensors shall have a multi-level, multi-segmented viewing

lens and a conical field of view with a viewing angle of 180 degrees and a
detection of at least 20 feet unless otherwise shown or specified. PIR
Sensors shall provide field-adjustable background light-level adjustment
with an adjustment range suitable to the light level in the sensed area,
room or space. PIR sensors shall be immune to false triggering from RFI and
EMI.
2.8.8.2 Ultrasonic Occupancy Sensors
Ultrasonic sensors shall operate at a minimum frequency 32 kHz and shall be

designed to not interfere with hearing aids.
2.8.8.3 Dual-Technology Occupancy Sensor (PIR and Ultrasonic)
Dual-Technology Occupancy Sensors shall meet the requirements of both PIR

and Ultrasonic Occupancy Sensors.
2.8.9 Vibration Switch
Vibration switch shall be solid state, enclosed in a NEMA 250 Type 4 or

Type 4X housing with sealed wire entry. Unit shall have two independent
sets of Form C switch contacts with one set to shutdown equipment upon
excessive vibration and a second set for monitoring alarm level vibration.
The vibration sensing range shall be a true rms reading, suitable for the
application. The unit shall include either displacement response for low
speed or velocity response for high speed application. The frequency range
shall be at least 2 Hz to 200 Hz. Contact time delay shall be 3 seconds.
The unit shall have independent start-up and running delay on each switch
contact. Alarm limits shall be adjustable and setpoint accuracy shall be
+/- 10 percent of setting with repeatability of plus or minus 2 percent.
2.8.10 Floor Mounted Leak Detector
Leak detectors shall use electrodes mounted at slab level with a minimum
built-in-vertical adjustment of 0.125 inches. Detector shall have a binary
output. The indicator shall be manual reset type.
2.8.11 Temperature Switch
2.8.11.1 Duct Mount Temperature Low Limit Safety Switch (Freezestat)
Duct mount temperature low limit switches (Freezestats) shall be manual

reset, low temperature safety switches with a minimum element length of 1
foot/square-foot of coverage which shall respond to the coldest 18 inch
segment with an accuracy of +/- 3.6 degrees F. The switch shall have a
field-adjustable setpoint with a range of at least 30 to 50 degrees F. The
switch shall have two sets of contacts, and each contact shall have a
rating greater than its connected load. Contacts shall open or close upon
drop of temperature below setpoint as shown and shall remain in this state
until reset.
2.8.11.2 Pipe Mount Temperature Limit Switch (Aquastat)
Pipe mount temperature limit switches (aquastats) shall have a field

adjustable setpoint between 60 and 90 degrees F, an accuracy of +/- 3.6
degrees F and a 10 degrees F fixed deadband. The switch shall have two
sets of contacts, and each contact shall have a rating greater than its
connected load. Contacts shall open or close upon change of temperature
above or below setpoint as shown.
2.8.12 Damper End Switches
Each end switch shall be a hermetically sealed switch with a trip lever and
over-travel mechanism. The switch enclosure shall be suitable for mounting
on the duct exterior and shall permit setting the position of the trip
lever that actuates the switch. The trip lever shall be aligned with the
damper blade.
2.9 INDICATING DEVICES
All indicating devices shall display readings in English (inch-pound) units.
2.9.1 Thermometers
Thermometers shall not contain mercury. Unless otherwise specified,

thermometers shall have an accuracy of +/- 3 percent of scale range.
Thermometers shall have a range suitable for the application with an upper
end of the range not to exceed 150 percent of the design upper limit.
2.9.1.1 Piping System Thermometers
Piping system thermometers shall have brass, malleable iron or aluminum

alloy case and frame, clear protective face, permanently stabilized glass
tube with indicating-fluid column, white face, black numbers, and a 9 inch
scale. Piping system thermometers shall have an accuracy of +/- 1 percent
of scale range. Thermometers for piping systems shall have rigid stems
with straight, angular, or inclined pattern. Thermometer stems shall have
expansion heads as required to prevent breakage at extreme temperatures.
On rigid-stem thermometers, the space between bulb and stem shall be filled
with a heat-transfer medium.
2.9.1.2 Air-Duct Thermometers
Air-duct thermometers shall have perforated stem guards and 45-degree

adjustable duct flanges with locking mechanism.
Gauges shall be suitable for field or panel mounting as required, shall

have black legend on white background, and shall have a pointer traveling
through a 270-degree arc. Gauge range shall be suitable for the
application with an upper end of the range not to exceed 150 percent of the
design upper limit. Accuracy shall be +/- 3 percent of scale range.
Gauges shall meet requirements of ASME B40.100.
2.9.3 Low Differential Pressure Gauges
Gauges for low differential pressure measurements shall be a minimum of 3.5

inch (nominal) size with two sets of pressure taps, and shall have a
diaphragm-actuated pointer, white dial with black figures, and pointer zero
adjustment. Gauge range shall be suitable for the application with an
upper end of the range not to exceed 150 percent of the design upper
limit. Accuracy shall be plus or minus two percent of scale range.
2.10 OUTPUT DEVICES
Output Devices with SNVT input are ASCs and shall meet all ASC requirements
in addition to the output device requirements. (Note: ASCs are specified
in paragraph DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) HARDWARE.)
2.10.1 Actuators
Actuators shall be electric (electronic) . All actuators shall be normally

open (NO), normally closed (NC) or fail-in-last-position (FILP) as shown.
Normally open and normally closed actuators shall be of mechanical spring
return type. Electric actuators shall have an electronic cut off or other
means to provide burnout protection if stalled. Actuators shall have a
visible position indicator. Electric actuators shall provide position
feedback to the controller as shown. Actuators shall smoothly open or close
the devices to which they are applied. Electric actuators shall have a
full stroke response time in both directions of 90 seconds or less at rated
load. Electric actuators shall be of the foot-mounted type with an
oil-immersed gear train or the direct-coupled type. Where multiple
electric actuators operate from a common signal, the actuators shall
provide an output signal identical to its input signal to the additional
devices.
2.10.1.1 Valve Actuators
Valve actuators shall provide shutoff pressures and torques for necessary
controllability.
2.10.1.2 Damper Actuators
Damper actuators shall provide the torque necessary in accordance with

damper manufacturer's instructions to modulate the dampers smoothly over
its full range of operation and torque shall be at least 6 inch-pounds/1
square foot of damper area for opposed blade dampers and 9 inch-pounds/1
square foot of damper area for parallel blade dampers.
2.10.2 Electric to Pneumatic Transducers (EP)
Electric to Pneumatic Transducers (EPs) shall convert either a 4-20 mAdc

input signal, a 0-10 Vdc input signal, or SNVT input to a 3-15 psig
pneumatic output with a conversion accuracy of +/- 2 percent of full scale,
including linearity and hysteresis. The EP shall withstand pressures at
least 150 percent of the system supply air pressure (main air). EPs shall
include independent offset and span adjustment. Air consumption shall not
be greater than 0.05 scfm. EPs shall have a manual adjustable override for
the EP pneumatic output. EPs shall have sufficient output capacity to
provide full range stroke of the actuated device in both directions within
90 seconds.
2.10.3 Relays
Control relay contacts shall have utilization category and ratings selected
for the application, with a minimum of two sets of contacts enclosed in a
dust proof enclosure. Each set of contacts shall incorporate a normally
open (NO), normally closed (NC) and common contact. Relays shall be rated
for a minimum life of one million operations. Operating time shall be 20
milliseconds or less. Relays shall be equipped with coil transient
suppression devices to limit transients to 150 percent of rated coil
voltage.
2.11 USER INPUT DEVICES
User Input Devices, including potentiometers, switches and momentary

contact push-buttons with SNVT output are Application Specific Controllers
(ASCs) and shall meet all ASC requirements. (Note: ASCs are specified in
paragraph DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) HARDWARE). Potentiometers shall be
of the thumb wheel or sliding bar type. Momentary Contact Push-Buttons may
include an adjustable timer for their output. User input devices shall be
labeled for their function.
2.12 MULTIFUNCTION DEVICES
Multifunction devices are products which combine the functions of multiple

sensor, user input or output devices into a single product. Unless
otherwise specified, the multifunction device shall meet all requirements
of each component device. Where the requirements for the component devices
conflict, the multifunction device shall meet the most stringent of the
requirements.
2.12.1 Current Sensing Relay Command Switch
The Current Sensing Relay portion shall meet all requirements of the
Current Sensing Relay input device. The Command Switch portion shall meet
all requirements of the Relay output device except that it shall have at
least one normally-open (NO) contact.
2.12.2 Thermostats
Thermostats shall be multifunction devices incorporating a temperature

sensor and a temperature indicating device. Thermostats shall not contain
mercury (Hg). In addition, the thermostat shall have the following as
specified and shown:
a. An Input Device which shall adjust a temperature setpoint output.

Setpoint adjustment shall be accomplished only by authorized personnel
through building point of connection interface or basewide central
UMCS.
b. A User Input Momentary Contact Button and an output indicating zone

occupancy.
c. A three position User Input Switch labeled to indicate heating,

cooling and off positions ('HEAT-COOL-OFF' switch) and providing
corresponding outputs.
d. A two position User Input Switch labeled with 'AUTO' and 'ON'
positions and providing corresponding outputs.
e. A multi-position User Input Switch with 'OFF' and at least two fan
speed positions and providing corresponding outputs.
2.13 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) HARDWARE
All DDC Hardware shall meet the following requirements:
a. It shall incorporate a "service pin" which, when pressed will cause

the DDC Hardware to broadcast its 48-bit NodeID and its ProgramID over
the network. The service pin shall be distinguishable and accessible.
b. It shall incorporate a light to indicate the device is receiving

power.
c. It shall incorporate a TP/FT-10 transceiver in accordance with

CEA-709.3 and connections for TP/FT-10 control network wiring. It
shall not have connections to any other network media type.
d. It shall communicate on the network using only the CEA-709.1B

protocol.
e. It shall be locally powered; link powered devices are not

acceptable.
f. LonMark external interface files (XIF files), as defined in the

LonMark XIF Guide, shall be submitted for each type of DDC Hardware.
g. Application programs and configuration settings shall be stored in
a manner such that a loss of power does not result in a loss of the
application program or configuration settings.
h. It shall have all functionality specified and required to support

the application (Sequence of Operation or portion thereof) in which it
is used, including but not limited to:
(1) It shall provide input and output SNVTs as specified and

required to support the sequence and application in which it is
used.
(2) It shall be configurable via standard or user-defined

configuration parameters (SCPT or UCPT), SNVT network
configuration inputs (nci), or hardware settings on the controller
itself as specified and as required to support the sequence and
application in which it is used.
i. It shall meet 47 CFR 15 requirements and have UL 916 or equivalent

safety listing.
2.13.2 Hardware Input-Output (I/O) Functions
DDC Hardware incorporating hardware input-output (I/O) functions shall meet

a. Analog Inputs: DDC Hardware analog inputs (AIs) shall perform

analog to digital (A-to-D) conversion with a minimum resolution of 8
bits plus sign or better as needed to meet the accuracy requirements
specified in paragraph INPUT MEASUREMENT ACCURACY. Signal conditioning
including transient rejection shall be provided for each analog input.
Analog inputs shall be capable of being individually calibrated for
zero and span. The AI shall incorporate common mode noise rejection of
at least 50 dB from 0 to 100 Hz for differential inputs, and normal
mode noise rejection of at least 20 dB at 60 Hz from a source impedance
of 10,000 ohms.
b. Analog Outputs: DDC Hardware analog outputs (AOs) shall perform

digital to analog (D-to-A) conversion with a minimum resolution of 8
bits plus sign, and output a signal with a range of 4-20 mAdc or 0-10
Vdc. Analog outputs shall be capable of being individually calibrated
for zero and span.
c. Binary Inputs: DDC Hardware binary inputs (BIs) shall accept

contact closures and shall ignore transients of less than 5
milli-second duration. Isolation and protection against an applied
steady-state voltage up to 180 Vac peak shall be provided.
d. Binary Outputs: DDC Hardware binary outputs (BOs) shall provide

relay contact closures or triac outputs for momentary and maintained
operation of output devices.
(1) Relay Contact Closures: Closures shall have a minimum

duration of 0.1 second. Relays shall provide at least 180V of
isolation. Electromagnetic interference suppression shall be
provided on all output lines to limit transients to non-damaging
levels. Minimum contact rating shall be one ampere at 24 Vac.
(2) Triac outputs: Triac outputs shall provide at least 180 V of

isolation.
e. Pulse Accumulator: DDC Hardware pulse accumulators shall have the

same characteristics as the BI. In addition, a buffer shall be
provided to totalize pulses. The pulse accumulator shall accept rates
of at least 20 pulses per second. The totalized value shall be reset
to zero upon operator's command.
2.13.3 Application Specific Controller (ASC)
Application Specific Controllers (ASCs) have a fixed factory-installed

application program (i.e. ProgramID) with configurable settings. ASCs
shall meet the following requirements in addition to the General DDC
Hardware and DDC Hardware Input-Output (I/O) Function requirements:
a. ASCs shall be LonMark Certified.
b. Unless otherwise approved, all necessary Configuration Parameters

and network configuration inputs (ncis) for the sequence and
application in which the ASC is used shall be fully configurable
through an LNS plug-in. This plug-in shall be submitted as specified
for each type of ASC (manufacturer and model). (Note: configuration
accomplished via hardware settings does not require configuration via
plug-in)
c. Local Display Panel (LDP): The Local Display Panel shall be an

Application Specific Controller (ASC) with a display and navigation
buttons. It shall provide display and adjustment of SNVT inputs and
SNVT outputs as shown.
2.13.4 General Purpose Programmable Controller (GPPC)
A General Purpose Programmable Controller (GPPC) is not installed with a

fixed factory-installed application program. GPPCs shall meet the
following requirements in addition to the general DDC Hardware requirements
and Hardware Input-Output (I/O) Function:
a. The programmed GPPC shall conform to the

LonMark Interoperability Guide.
b. All programming software required to program the GPPC shall be

delivered to and licensed to the project site as specified.
c. Copies of the installed GPPC application programs as source code

compatible with the supplied programming software shall be submitted as
specified. The submitted GPPC application program shall be the
complete application necessary for the GPPC to function as installed
and be sufficient to allow replacement of the installed controller with
a GPPC of the same type.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
performing any work.
3.2 CONTROL SYSTEM INSTALLATION
3.2.1 General Installation Requirements
3.2.1.1 HVAC Control System
The HVAC control system shall be completely installed, tested and ready for
operation. Provide dielectric isolation where dissimilar metals are used
for connection and support. Penetrations through and mounting holes in the
building exterior shall be made watertight. The HVAC control system
installation shall provide clearance for control system maintenance by
maintaining access space required to calibrate, remove, repair, or replace
control system devices. The control system installation shall not
interfere with the clearance requirements for mechanical and electrical
system maintenance.
3.2.1.2 Device Mounting Criteria
Install all devices in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and

as specified and shown. Provide control devices, to be installed in piping
and ductwork, with required gaskets, flanges, thermal compounds,
insulation, piping, fittings, and manual valves for shutoff, equalization,
purging, and calibration. Strap-on temperature sensing elements shall not
be used except as specified. Install spare thermowells adjacent to each
thermowell containing a sensor and as shown. Devices located outdoors
shall have a weathershield.
3.2.1.3 Labels and Tags
Key labels and tags to the unique identifiers shown on the As-Built
drawings. Label all enclosures and DDC hardware. All sensors and
actuators in mechanical rooms shall be tagged. Tag airflow measurement
arrays to show flow rate range for signal output range, duct size, and
pitot tube AFMA flow coefficient. Duct static pressure taps shall be
tagged at the location of the pressure tap. Tags shall be plastic or metal
and shall be mechanically attached directly to each device or attached by a
metal chain or wire. Labels, outside of protective enclosures, shall be
engraved plastic and mechanically attached to the enclosure or DDC
Hardware. Labels inside protective enclosures may attached using adhesive,
but shall not be hand written.
3.2.2 DDC Hardware
Install DDC hardware in an enclosure. Except for DDC hardware used to

control Terminal Units, where multiple pieces of DDC hardware are used to
execute one sequence, all DDC hardware executing that sequence shall be on
a common local control bus and isolated from all other DDC hardware via an
CEA-709.1B router or CEA-709.3 repeater. All DDC hardware installed shall
have an CEA-709.1B domain and a subnet as required by installion
3.2.3 Local Display Panel (LDP) and Laptop
Local Display Panels and Laptop shall be installed in main mechanical room
on first floor and shall provide SNVT inputs for display and outputs for
adjusting SNVT values as shown on the Points Schedule. Locate LDPs in the
mechanical room above a lockable folding work station shelf as directed by
DPW. Laptop shall be secured inside the work station shelf.
3.2.4 Gateways
Gateways may be used for communication with non-CEA-709.1B control hardware

subject to all of the following limitations:
a. Each gateway shall communicate with and perform protocol

translation for non-CEA-709.1B control hardware controlling one and
only one package unit.
b. Non-CEA-709.1B control hardware shall not be used for controlling

built-up units.
c. Non-CEA-709.1B control hardware shall not perform system scheduling

functions.
3.2.5 Network Interface Jack
A standard network interface jack shall be provided for each node on the
control network. For terminal unit controllers with hardwired thermostats
this network interface jack shall be located at the thermostat or within 10
ft of the controller. Locating the interface jack near the controller is
preferred. For all other nodes the network interface jack shall be located
within 10 ft of the node. If the network interface jack is other than a
1/8 inch phone jack, provide an interface cable with a standard 1/8 inch
phone jack on one end and a connector suitable for mating with installed
network interface jack on the other. No more than one type of interface
cable shall be required to access all network interface jacks. Furnish one
interface cable(s).
3.2.6 Room Instrument Mounting
Room instruments, including but not limited to wall mounted thermostats and
sensors located in occupied spaces shall be mounted 60 inches above the
floor unless otherwise shown. Unless otherwise shown on the Thermostat
Schedule:
a. Thermostats for Fan Coil Units shall be unit mounted.
b. All other Thermostats shall be wall mounted.
3.2.7 Indication Devices Installed in Piping and Liquid Systems
Gauges in piping systems subject to pulsation shall have snubbers.

Thermometers and temperature sensing elements installed in liquid systems
shall be installed in thermowells.
3.2.8 Duct Smoke Detectors
Duct smoke detectors will be provided in supply and return air ducts in
accordance with Section 28 31 76 INTERIOR FIRE ALARM AND MASS NOTIFICATION
SYSTEM. Connect the DDC System to the auxiliary contacts provided on the
Smoke Detector as required for system safeties and to provide alarms to the
DDC system.
3.2.9 Occupancy Sensors
A sufficient quantity of occupancy sensors shall be provided to provide

complete coverage of the area (room or space). Occupancy sensors shall be
installed in accordance with NFPA 70 requirements and the manufacturer's
instructions. Occupancy sensors shall not be located within 6 feet of HVAC

outlets or heating ducts. PIR and dual-technology PIR/ultrasonic sensors
shall not be installed where they can "see" beyond any doorway. Ultrasonic
sensors shall not be installed in spaces containing ceiling fans. Sensors
shall detect motion to within 2 feet of all room entrances and shall not
trigger due to motion outside the room. The off-delay timer shall be set
to 15 minutes unless otherwise shown. All sensor adjustments shall be made
prior to beneficial occupancy, but after installation of furniture systems,
shelving, partitions, etc. Each controlled area shall have one hundred
percent coverage capable of detecting small hand-motion movements,
accommodating all occupancy habits of single or multiple occupants at any
location within the controlled room.
3.2.10 Temperature Limit Switch
A temperature limit switch (freezestat) shall be provided to sense the

temperature at the location shown. A sufficient number of temperature
limit switches (freezestats) shall be installed to provide complete
coverage of the duct section. Manual reset limit switches shall be
installed in approved, accessible locations where they can be reset
easily. The temperature limit switch (freezestat) sensing element shall be
installed in a serpentine pattern and in accordance with the manufacturer's
3.2.11 Averaging Temperature Sensing Elements
Sensing elements shall be installed in a serpentine pattern located as

shown.
3.2.12 Air Flow Measurement Arrays (AFMA))
Outside Air AFMAs shall be located downstream from the Outside Air
filters. Pitot Tube AFMA shall not be used if the expected velocity
measurement is below 700 fpm .
3.2.13 Duct Static Pressure Sensors
The duct static pressure sensing tap shall be located at 75 percent to 100
percent of the distance between the first and last air terminal units. If
the transmitter is wired in a homerun configuration to an AHU controller,
the transmitter shall be located in the same enclosure as the air handling
unit (AHU) controller(s) for the AHU serving the terminal units.
3.2.14 Relative Humidity Sensors
Relative humidity sensors in supply air ducts shall be installed at least

10 feet downstream of humidity injection elements.
3.2.15 Flowmeters
The minimum straight unobstructed piping for the flowmeter installation

shall be at least 10 pipe diameters upstream and at least 5 pipe diameters
downstream and in accordance with the manufacturer's installation
instructions.
3.2.16 Dampers
3.2.16.1 Damper Actuators
Actuators shall not be mounted in the air stream. Multiple actuators shall
not be connected to a common drive shaft. Actuators shall be installed so
that their action shall seal the damper to the extent required to maintain
leakage at or below the specified rate and shall move the blades smoothly.
3.2.16.2 Damper Installation
Dampers shall be installed straight and true, level in all planes, and
square in all dimensions. Dampers shall move freely without undue stress
due to twisting, racking (parallelogramming), bowing, or other installation
error. Blades shall close completely and leakage shall not exceed that
specified at the rated static pressure. Structural support shall be used
for multi-section dampers. Acceptable methods include but are not limited
to U-channel, angle iron, corner angles and bolts, bent galvanized steel
stiffeners, sleeve attachments, braces, and building structure. Where
multi-section dampers are installed in ducts or sleeves, they shall not sag
due to lack of support. Jackshafts shall not be used to link more than
three damper sections. Blade to blade linkages shall not be used. Outside
and return air dampers shall be installed such that their blades direct
their respective air streams towards each other to provide for maximum
mixing of air streams.
3.2.17 Valves
3.2.17.1 Ball Valves
Two-position (open/closed) ball valves may only be used on chilled water,

condenser water, hot water, or steam applications. Modulating ball valves
may only be used for chilled water and condenser water applications
(modulating ball valves shall not be used on steam or hot water
applications). In modulating applications a characterizing
equal-percentage disc shall be used.
3.2.17.2 Butterfly Valves
In two-way control applications, valve travel shall be limited to 70

percent (60 degrees) open position.
3.2.18 Local Gauges for Actuators
Pneumatic actuators shall have an accessible and visible pressure gauge

installed in the tubing lines at the actuator as shown.
3.2.19 Wire and Cable
Wire and Cable shall be installed without splices between control devices
and in accordance with NFPA 70 and NFPA 90A. Instrumentation grounding
shall be installed in accordance with the device manufacturer's
instructions and as necessary to prevent ground loops, noise, and surges
from adversely affecting operation of the system. Ground rods installed by
the Contractor shall be tested as specified in IEEE Std 142. Cables and
conductor wires shall be tagged at both ends, with the identifier shown on
the shop drawings. Electrical work shall be as specified in Section
26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM and as shown. Wiring external to
enclosures shall be run as follows:
a. Wiring other than low-voltage control and low-voltage network

wiring shall be installed in raceways.
b. Low-voltage control and low-voltage network wiring not in suspended

ceilings over occupied spaces shall be installed in raceways, except
that nonmetallic-sheathed cables or metallic-armored cables may be
installed as permitted by NFPA 70.
c. Low-voltage control and low-voltage network wiring in suspended

ceilings over occupied spaces shall be installed in raceways, except:
(1) nonmetallic-sheathed cables or metallic-armored cables may be

installed as permitted by NFPA 70.
(2) plenum rated cable in suspended ceilings over occupied spaces

may be run without raceways.
3.2.20 Copper Tubing
Copper tubing shall be hard-drawn in exposed areas and either hard-drawn or

annealed in concealed areas. Only tool-made bends shall be used. Fittings
for copper tubing shall be brass or copper solder joint type except at
connections to apparatus, where fittings shall be brass compression type.
3.2.21 Plastic Tubing
Plastic tubing shall be run within covered raceways or conduit except when
otherwise specified. Plastic tubing shall not be used for applications
where the tubing could be subjected to a temperature exceeding 130 degrees F.
Fittings for plastic tubing shall be for instrument service and shall be
brass or acetal resin of the compression or barbed push-on type. Except in
walls and exposed locations, plastic multitube instrument tubing bundle
without conduit or raceway protection may be used where a number of air
lines run to the same points, provided the multitube bundle is enclosed in
a protective sheath, is run parallel to the building lines and is
adequately supported as specified.
3.3 HVAC SYSTEMS OPERATION

See drawings for Sequences of Control (SoC)
3.3.1 Alarm Handling
Install and configure DDC Hardware to provide alarm handling functionality

for critical alarms as specified and shown, either in a piece of DDC
Hardware dedicated to this function or in DDC Hardware performing other
functions. The DDC Hardware providing alarm handling functionality shall
provide the following capabilities as required:
a. Dial to a pager: The node shall be able to dial a paging service

and leave a numeric message.
b. Dial to an e-mail server: The node shall be able to dial and

connect to a remote server and send an e-mail via Simple Mail Transfer
Protocol (SMTP).
c. Send e-mail over IP Network: The alarm handling node shall be

capable of connecting to an IP network and sending e-mail via Simple
Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP).
d. Provide network access: The node shall be capable of receiving a

connection via the modem to allow a remote computer access to the
control network.
3.4 CONTROLLER TUNING
Tune each controller in a manner consistent with that described in the

ASHRAE FUN IP. Tuning shall consist of adjustment of the proportional,
integral, and where applicable, the derivative (PID) settings to provide
stable closed-loop control. Each loop shall be tuned while the system or
plant is operating at a high gain (worst case) condition, where high gain
can generally be defined as a low-flow or low-load condition. Upon final
adjustment of the PID settings, in response to a change in controller
setpoint, the controlled variable shall settle out at the new setpoint with
no more than two (2) oscillations above and below setpoint. Upon settling
out at the new setpoint the controller output shall be steady. With the
exception of naturally slow processes such as zone temperature control, the
controller shall settle out at the new setpoint within five (5) minutes.
Return the controller to its original setpoint and shall record and submit
the final PID configuration settings with the O&M Instructions and on the
associated Points Schedule.
3.5 START-UP AND START-UP TEST
Perform the following startup tests for each control system to ensure that
the described control system components are installed and functioning in
accordance with this specification.
a. General: Adjust, calibrate, measure, program, configure, set the

time schedules, set alarms, and otherwise perform all necessary actions
to ensure that the systems function as specified and shown in the
sequence of operation and other contract documents. All schedule
start/stops and system setpoints shall be entered, operating, and
approved.
b. Systems Check: An item-by-item check shall be performed for each

HVAC system;
(1) Step 1 - System Inspection: With the system shut down, it

shall be verified that power and main air are available where
required and that all output devices are in their failsafe and
normal positions. Each local display panel shall be inspected to
verify that all displays indicate shutdown conditions. All
point-to-point testing of end field devices through proper
input/output to graphic and operator interface shall be completed
and approved. Inspect and test alarms and interlocks. All alarm
limits and testing shall be completed.
(2) Step 2 - Calibration Accuracy Check: A two-point accuracy

check of the calibration of each HVAC control system sensing
element and transmitter shall be performed by comparing the SNVT
output from the DDC Hardware the sensor is connected to the actual
value of the variable measured at the sensing element. Digital
indicating test instruments shall be used, such as digital
thermometers, motor-driven psychrometers, and tachometers. The
test instruments shall be at least twice as accurate as the
specified sensor accuracy. The calibration of the test
instruments shall be traceable to National Institute Of Standards
And Technology standards. The first check point shall be with the
HVAC system in the shutdown condition, and the second check point
shall be with the HVAC system in an operational condition.
Calibration checks shall verify that the sensing element-to-DDC
system readout accuracies at two points are within the specified
product accuracy tolerances. If not, the device shall be
recalibrated or replaced and the calibration check repeated.
(3) Step 3 - Actuator Range Check: With the system running, a

signal shall be applied to each actuator through the DDC Hardware
controller. Proper operation of the actuators and positioners for
all actuated devices shall be verified and the signal levels shall
be recorded for the extreme positions of each device. The signal
shall be varied from live zero to full range, and it shall be
verified that the actuators travel from zero stroke to full stroke
within the signal range. Where applicable, it shall be verified
that all sequenced actuators move from zero stroke to full stroke
in the proper direction, and move the connected device in the
proper direction from one extreme position to the other.
c. Weather Dependent Test: Weather dependent test procedures that

cannot be performed by simulation shall be performed in the appropriate
climatic season. When simulation is used, the actual results shall be
verified in the appropriate season.
d. Test Report: Upon completion of the Start-Up Test, prepare and

submit a Start-Up and Start-Up Testing Report documenting the results
of the tests performed and certifying that the system is installed and
functioning in accordance with this specification, and is ready for the
Performance Verification Test (PVT).
3.6 TRAINING
Conduct a training course for 6 operating staff members designated by the

Government in the maintenance and operation of the system, including
specified hardware and software. The training period, for a total of 32
hours of normal working time, shall be conducted within 30 days after
successful completion of the performance verification test. The training
course shall be conducted at the project site and the Government reserves
the right to videotape the training sessions for later use. Provide
audiovisual equipment and 6 sets of all other training materials and
supplies. A training day is defined as 8 hours of classroom instruction,
including two 15 minute breaks and excluding lunchtime, Monday through
Friday, during the daytime shift in effect at the training facility.
3.6.1 Training Documentation
Prepare training documentation consisting of:
a. Course Attendee List: A List of course attendees which shall be

developed in coordination with and signed by the Controls shop
supervisor.
b. Training Manuals: Training manuals shall include an agenda, defined

objectives for each lesson, and a detailed description of the subject
matter for each lesson. Where the Contractor presents portions of the
course material by audiovisuals, copies of those audiovisuals shall be
delivered to the Government as a part of the printed training manuals.
Training manuals shall be delivered for each trainee with two
additional copies delivered for archival at the project site.
3.6.2 Training Course Content
For guidance in planning the required instruction, assume that attendees

will have a high school education or equivalent, and are familiar with HVAC
systems. The training course shall cover all of the material contained in
the Operating and Maintenance Instructions, the layout and location of each
controller enclosure, the layout of one of each type of unitary equipment
and the locations of each, the location of each control device external to
the panels, the location of the compressed air station, preventive
maintenance, troubleshooting, diagnostics, calibration, adjustment,
commissioning, tuning, repair procedures, use of LNS Plug-ins, and use of
the GPPC Programming software. Typical systems and similar systems may be
treated as a group, with instruction on the physical layout of one such
system. The results of the performance verification test and the Start-Up
and Start-Up Testing Report shall be presented as benchmarks of HVAC
control system performance by which to measure operation and maintenance
effectiveness.
3.7 PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION TEST (PVT)
3.7.1 PVT Procedures
The performance verification test procedures shall explain, step-by-step,

the actions and expected results that will demonstrate that the control
system performs in accordance with the sequences of operation, and other
contract documents. The PVT shall include a one-point accuracy check of
each sensor. The PVT shall include inlet and outlet air temperature
measurements for all AHU-dependent terminal units. The PVT Procedure shall
describe a methodology to measure and trend the network bandwidth usage on
the network backbone and compare it to the Bandwidth Usage Calculation
submittal. A control system performance verification test equipment list
shall be included that lists the equipment to be used during performance
verification testing. The list shall include manufacturer name, model
number, equipment function, the date of the latest calibration, and the
results of the latest calibration.
3.7.2 PVT Execution
Demonstrate compliance of the control system with the contract documents.

Using test plans and procedures approved by the Government, demonstrate all
physical and functional requirements of the project. The performance
verification test shall show, step-by-step, the actions and results
demonstrating that the control systems perform in accordance with the
sequences of operation. The performance verification test shall measure
and trend the Network Bandwidth Usage and compare it to the Bandwidth Usage
Calculation submittal. The performance verification test shall not be
started until after receipt of written permission by the Government, based
on Government approval of the Start-Up and Start-Up Testing Report and
completion of balancing. The tests shall not be conducted during scheduled
seasonal off periods of base heating and cooling systems.
3.7.3 PVT Report
Prepare a PVT report documenting all tests performed during the PVT and
their results. The PVT report shall include all tests in the PVT
Procedures and any other testing performed during the PVT. Failures and
repairs shall be documented with test results.
3.8 APPENDIX A
APPENDIX A
QC CHECKLIST
This checklist is not all-inclusive of the requirements of this specification

and should not be interpreted as such.
This checklist is for (check one:)

Pre-Construction QC Checklist Submittal (Items 1-5) |____|
Post-Construction QC Checklist Submittal (Items 1-12) |____|
Close-out QC Checklist Submittal (Items 1-19) |____|
Initial each item in the space provided (|____|) verifying that requirement
has been met.
Items verified for Pre-Construction, Post-Construction and Closeout QC

Checklists Submittal:
1 Network bandwidth calculations have been performed, |____|

and the backbone type (Ethernet or TP/FT-10) has been
determined based on these calculations.
2 All DDC Hardware (nodes) are numbered on Control System |____|

Schematic Drawings.
3 Signal lines on Control System Schematic are labeled with |____|

the signal type.
4 Local Display Panel (LDP) Locations are shown on Control |____|

System Schematic drawings.
5 Points Schedule drawings have been sub-divided by device (DDC |____|

Hardware), including DDC Hardware node numbers.
Items verified for Post-Construction and Closeout QC Checklist Submittal:
6 All DDC Hardware is installed on a TP/FT-10 local control |____|

bus.
7 All Application Specific Controllers (ASCs) are LonMark |____|

certified.
8 Communication between DDC Hardware is only via CEA-709.1B |____|

using SNVTs. Other protocols and network variables other
than SNVTs have not been used.
9 Explicit messaging has not been used. |____|
10 System Scheduler functionality has been installed for all |____|

HVAC systems and default schedules have been configured at
each System Scheduler.
11 All sequences are performed as specified using DDC Hardware. |____|
12 Training schedule and course attendee list has been |____|

developed and coordinated with shops and submitted.
QC CHECKLIST
Items verified for Closeout QC Checklists Submittal:
13 Final As-built Drawings, including the Points Schedule |____|

drawings accurately represent the final installed system.
14 LonWorks Network Services (LNS) Database is up-to-date and |____|

accurately represents the final installed system.
15 LNS Plug-ins have been submitted for all ASCs. |____|
16 Programming software has been submitted for all General |____|

Purpose Programmable Controllers (GPPCs).
17 All software has been licensed to the Government |____|
18 O&M Instructions have been completed and submitted. |____|
19 Training course has been completed. |____|
________________________________________________________
(QC Representative Signature) (Date)
SECTION 23 11 25
FACILITY GAS PIPING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

AGA B109.1 (2000)Diaphragm-Type Gas Displacement

Meters (Under 500 cubic ft./hour Capacity)
AGA XR0603 (2006) AGA Plastic Pipe Manual for Gas

Service
ANSI Z21.45 (1995) Flexible Connectors of Other Than

All-Metal Construction for Gas Appliances
AMERICAN PETROLEUM INSTITUTE (API)
API Spec 6D (2008; Errata 2008; Errata 2008; Errata

2009) Specification for Pipeline Valves
API Std 598 (2004) Valve Inspecting and Testing
API Std 607 (2005; Errata 2008) Fire Test for

Soft-Seated Quarter-Turn Valves
ASCE 25 (2008) Standard for Earthquake-Activated

Automatic Gas Shutoff Devices

Piping Systems

Purpose (Inch)


Threaded

Flanges

Classes 150 and 300
ASME B16.33 (2002; R 2007) Manually Operated Metallic

Gas Valves for Use in Gas Piping Systems
Up to 125 psi, Sizes NPS 1/2 - NPS 2
ASME B16.5 (2003) Standard for Pipe Flanges and

Flanged Fittings: NPS 1/2 Through NPS 24

ASME B36.10M (2004) Standard for Welded and Seamless

Wrought Steel Pipe

Attachments
ASTM 01.01 (2009) Steel - Piping, Tubing, Fittings

Steel Forgings for Piping Applications

Electric-Resistance-Welded Carbon and
Alloy Steel Mechanical Tubing
CSA AMERICA, INC. (CSA/AM)
CSA/AM Z21.15 (1997; R 2003; A 2006) Manually Operated

Gas Valves for Appliances, Appliance
Connector Valves and Hose End Valves
CSA/AM Z21.21 (2005) Automatic Valves for Gas Appliances
CSA/AM Z21.24 (2006) Connectors for Gas Appliances
CSA/AM Z21.41 (2003; A 2005; Errata 2007)

Quick-Disconnect Devices for Use with Gas
Fuel Appliances
CSA/AM Z21.69 (2009) Connectors for Movable Gas

Appliances
CSA/AM Z21.78 (2005; Addenda A 2007; Addenda B 2008)

Standard Specification for Combination Gas
Controls for Gas Appliances
CSA/AM Z21.80 (2005; Addenda 2005; R 2008) Line Pressure

Regulators

INDUSTRY (MSS)
MSS SP-25 (2008) Standard Marking System for Valves,
Fittings, Flanges and Unions

Manufacture


Code - 2008 Edition
UL Gas&Oil Dir (2008) Flammable and Combustible Liquids

and Gases Equipment Directory
The gas piping system includes natural gas piping and appurtenances from
point of connection with supply system, as indicated, to gas operated
equipment within the facility. Submit operation and maintenance data in
accordance with Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA, in three
separate packages.
1.2.1 Gas Facility System and Equipment Operation
Include shop drawings showing piping layout, locations of system valves,

gas line markers; step-by-step procedures for system start up, operation
and shutdown (index system components and equipment to the system
drawings); isolation procedures including valve operation to shutdown or
isolate each section of the system (index valves to the system maps and
provide separate procedures for normal operation and emergency shutdown if
required to be different). Submit Data package No. 4.
1.2.2 Gas Facility System Maintenance
Include maintenance procedures and frequency for system and equipment;

identification of pipe materials and manufacturer by locations, pipe repair
procedures, and jointing procedures at transitions to other piping material
or material from a different manufacturer. Submit Data Package No.4.
1.2.3 Gas Facility Equipment Maintenance
Include identification of valves, shut-offs, disconnects, and other

equipment by materials, manufacturer, vendor identification and location;
maintenance procedures and recommended tool kits for valves and equipment;
recommended repair methods (i.e., field repair, factory repair, or
replacement) for each valve and piece of equipment; and preventive
maintenance procedures, possible failure modes and troubleshooting guide.
Submit Data Package No. 3.
1.3 SUBMITTALS

SD-02 Shop Drawings
Gas Piping System
SD-03 Product Data
Pipe and Fittings

Gas equipment connectors
Gas Piping System

Pipe Coating Materials and application procedures
Pressure regulators
Risers
Transition fittings
Valves
Valve box
Warning and identification tape
SD-06 Test Reports
Pressure Tests; G, DO
Gas facility system and equipment operation

Gas facility equipment maintenance
Data packages, as specified.
Submit manufacturer's descriptive data and installation instructions for

approval for compression-type mechanical joints used in joining dissimilar
materials and for insulating joints. Mark all valves, flanges and fittings
in accordance with MSS SP-25.
1.4.1 Jointing Thermoplastic and Fiberglass Piping
Perform all jointing of piping using qualified joiners and qualified

procedures in accordance with AGA XR0603. Furnish the Contracting Officer
with a copy of qualified procedures and list of and identification symbols
of qualified joiners. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions and
manufacturer's visual joint appearance chart, including all PE pipe and
fittings.
1.4.2 Shop Drawings
Submit drawings for complete Gas Piping System, showing location, size and
all branches of pipeline; location of all required shutoff valves; and
instructions necessary for the installation of gas equipment connectors and
supports.
Handle, transport, and store plastic pipe and fittings carefully. Plug or
cap pipe and fittings ends during transportation or storage to minimize
dirt and moisture entry. Do not subject piping to abrasion or concentrated
external loads. Discard PE pipe sections and fittings that have been
damaged.
PART 2 PRODUCTS

manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of the products and that
2 years prior to bid opening. Asbestos or products containing asbestos are
not allowed. Submit catalog data and installation instructions for pipe,
valves, all related system components, pipe coating materials and
application procedures. Conform to NFPA 54 and with requirements
specified herein. Provide supply piping to appliances or equipment at
least as large as the inlets thereof.
2.2 GAS PIPING SYSTEM AND FITTINGS
2.2.1 Steel Pipe, Joints, and Fittings
Provide steel pipe conforming to ASME B36.10M; and malleable-iron threaded

fittings conforming to ASME B16.1 and ASME B16.3. Provide steel pipe
flanges and flanged fittings, including bolts, nuts, and bolt pattern in
accordance with ASME B16.5 and ASTM A 105/A 105M. Provide wrought steel
buttwelding fittings conforming to ASME B16.9. Provide socket welding and
threaded forged steel fittings conforming to ASME B16.11.
2.2.2 Steel Tubing, Joints and Fittings
Provide steel tubing conforming to ASTM 01.01, and ASTM A 513, with tubing
joints made up with gas tubing fittings recommended by the tubing
manufacturer.
2.2.3 Sealants for Steel Pipe Threaded Joints
Provide joint sealing compound as listed in UL Gas&Oil Dir, Class 20 or

less. For taping, use tetrafluoroethlene tape conforming to UL Gas&Oil Dir.
2.2.4 Warning and Identification
Provide pipe flow markings, warning and identification tape, and metal tags
as required.
2.2.5 Flange Gaskets
Provide gaskets of nonasbestos compressed material in accordance with

ASME B16.21, 1/16 inch thickness, full face or self-centering flat ring
type, containing aramid fibers bonded with styrene butadiene rubber (SBR)
or nitrile butadiene rubber (NBR) suitable for a maximum 600 degree F
service, to be used for hydrocarbon service.
2.2.6 Pipe Threads
Provide pipe threads conforming to ASME B1.20.1.
2.2.7 Escutcheons
Provide chromium-plated steel or chromium-plated brass escutcheons, either

one piece or split pattern, held in place by internal spring tension or set
screw.
2.2.8 Gas Transition Fittings
a. Provide steel to plastic (PE) designed for steel-to-plastic with

tapping tee or sleeve conforming to AGA XR0603 requirements for
transitions fittings. Coat or wrap exposed steel pipe with heavy
plastic coating.
2.2.9 Insulating Pipe Joints
2.2.9.1 Insulating Joint Material
Provide insulating joint material between flanged or threaded metallic pipe

systems where shown to control galvanic or electrical action.
2.2.9.2 Threaded Pipe Joints
Provide threaded pipe joints of steel body nut type dielectric unions with
insulating gaskets.
2.2.9.3 Flanged Pipe Joints
Provide joints for flanged pipe consisting of full face sandwich-type

flange insulating gasket of the dielectric type, insulating sleeves for
flange bolts, and insulating washers for flange nuts.
2.2.10 Flexible Connectors
a. Provide flexible connectors for connecting gas utilization

equipment to building gas piping conforming to CSA/AM Z21.24,
ANSI Z21.45, or CSA/AM Z21.41 for quick disconnect devices, and
flexible connectors for movable food service equipment conforming to
CSA/AM Z21.69.
b. Do not install the flexible connector through the appliance cabinet

face. Provide rigid metallic pipe and fittings to extend the final
connection beyond the cabinet, except when appliance is provided with
an external connection point.
2.3 VALVES
Provide shutoff or service isolation valves conforming to the following:
2.3.1 Valves 2 Inches and Smaller
Provide valves 2 inches and smaller conforming to ASME B16.33 of materials

and manufacture compatible with system materials used.
2.3.2 Valves 2-1/2 Inches and Larger
Provide valves 2-1/2 inches and larger of carbon steel conforming to

API Spec 6D, Class 150.
2.4 RISERS
Provide manufacturer's standard riser, transition from plastic to steel

pipe with 7 to 12 mil thick epoxy coating. Use swaged gas-tight
construction with O-ring seals, metal insert, and protective sleeve.
Provide remote bolt-on or bracket or wall-mounted riser supports as
indicated on the drawings.
2.5 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
Provide pipe hangers and supports conforming to MSS SP-58 and MSS SP-69.
2.6 METERING, REGULATORS AND SHUTOFF VALVES
Provide diaphragm-type meter conforming to AGA B109.1 as required by local

gas utility supplier, Provide pressure gauges and attachments conforming
to ASME B40.100. Provide regulators conforming to CSA/AM Z21.78 for
combination gas controls for gas appliances , and CSA/AM Z21.80 for line
pressure regulators. Provide shutoff valves conforming to CSA/AM Z21.15
for manually controlled gas shutoff valves and CSA/AM Z21.21 for automatic
shutoff valves for gas appliances.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
in the field, and advise the Contracting Officer of any discrepancy or
areas of conflict before performing the work.
3.2 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING
Provide required excavation, backfilling, and compaction as specified in

Section 31 00 00 EARTHWORK.
3.3 GAS PIPING SYSTEM
Provide a gas piping system from the point of delivery, defined as the
outlet of the meter set assembly, as specified in Section 33 51 15
NATURAL-GAS / LIQUID PETROLEUM GAS DISTRIBUTION, to the connections to each
gas utilization device.
3.3.1 Protection and Cleaning of Materials and Components
Protect equipment, pipe, and tube openings by closing with caps or plugs
during installation. At the completion of all work, thoroughly clean the
entire system.
3.3.2 Workmanship and Defects
Piping, tubing and fittings shall be clear and free of cutting burrs and
defects in structure or threading and shall be thoroughly brushed and
chip-and scale-blown. Repair of defects in piping, tubing or fittings is
not allowed; replace defective items when found.
3.4 PROTECTIVE COVERING
3.4.1 Underground Metallic Pipe
Protect buried metallic piping from corrosion with protective coatings as

specified in Section 33 51 15 NATURAL-GAS / LIQUID PETROLEUM GAS
DISTRIBUTION. When dissimilar metals are joined underground, use gastight
insulating fittings.
3.4.2 Aboveground Metallic Piping Systems
3.4.2.1 Ferrous Surfaces
Touch up shop primed surfaces with ferrous metal primer. Solvent clean
surfaces that have not been shop primed . Mechanically clean surfaces that
contain loose rust, loose mill scale and other foreign substances by power
wire brushing or commercial sand blasted conforming to SSPC SP 6 and prime
with ferrous metal primer or vinyl type wash coat. Finish primed surfaces
with two coats of exterior oil paint or vinyl paint.
3.4.2.2 Nonferrous Surfaces
Except for aluminum alloy pipe, do not paint nonferrous surfaces. Paint
surfaces of aluminum alloy pipe and fittings to protect against external
corrosion where they contact masonry, plaster, insulation, or are subject
to repeated wettings by such liquids as water, detergents or sewage.
Solvent-clean the surfaces and treat with vinyl type wash coat. Apply a
first coat of aluminum paint and a second coat of alkyd gloss enamel or
silicone alkyd copolymer enamel.
3.5 INSTALLATION
Install the gas system in conformance with the manufacturer's

recommendations and applicable provisions of NFPA 54, AGA XR0603, and as
indicated. Perform all pipe cutting without damage to the pipe, with an
approved type of mechanical cutter, unless otherwise authorized. Use wheel
cutters where practicable. On steel pipe 6 inches and larger, an approved
gas cutting and beveling machine may be used. Cut thermoplastic and
fiberglass pipe in accordance with AGA XR0603.
3.5.1 Metallic Piping Installation
Bury underground piping a minimum of 18 inches below grade. Make changes

in direction of piping with fittings only; mitering or notching pipe to
form elbows and tees or other similar type construction is not permitted.
Branch connection may be made with either tees or forged branch outlet
fittings. Provide branch outlet fittings which are forged, flared for
improvement of flow where attached to the run, and reinforced against
external strains. Do not use aluminum alloy pipe in exterior locations or
underground.
3.5.2 Metallic Tubing Installation
Install metallic tubing using gas tubing fittings approved by the tubing
manufacturer. Make branch connections with tees. Prepare all tubing ends
with tools designed for that purpose. Do not use aluminum alloy tubing in
exterior locations or underground.
3.5.3 Connections Between Metallic and Plastic Piping
Connections between metallic and plastic piping are only allowed outside,
underground, and with approved transition fittings.
3.5.4 Piping Buried Under Buildings
Run underground piping installed beneath buildings in a steel pipe casing

protected from corrosion with protective coatings as specified in Section
23 11 25 FACILITY GAS PIPING. Extend casing at least 4 inches outside the
building, and provide the pipe with spacers and end bushings to seal at
both ends to prevent the entrance of water and/or the escape of gas.
Extend a vent line from the annular space above grade outside to a point
where gas will not be a hazard, and terminate in a rain/insect-resistant
fitting.
3.5.5 Concealed Piping in Buildings
Do not use combinations of fittings ( unions, tubing fittings, running

threads, right- and left-hand couplings, bushings, and swing joints) to
conceal piping within buildings.
3.5.5.1 Piping in Partitions
Locate concealed piping in hollow, rather than solid, partitions. Protect

tubing passing through walls or partitions against physical damage both
during and after construction, and provide appropriate safety markings and
labels..
3.5.6 Aboveground Piping
Run aboveground piping as straight as practicable along the alignment and

elevation indicated, with a minimum of joints, and separately supported
from other piping system and equipment. Install exposed horizontal piping
no farther than 6 inches from nearest parallel wall and at an elevation
which prevents standing, sitting, or placement of objects on the piping.
3.5.7 Final Gas Connections
Unless otherwise specified, make final connections with rigid metallic pipe
and fittings. Flexible connectors may be used for final connections to
gas utilization equipment. In addition to cautions listed in instructions
required by ANSI standards for flexible connectors, insure that flexible
connectors do not pass through equipment cabinet. Provide accessible gas
shutoff valve and coupling for each gas equipment item.
3.5.8 Seismic Requirements
Support and brace piping and attached valves to resist seismic loads in
conformance with ASCE 25 and as specified in Section 13 09 00 00 44 Anti
Terrosim Protection Measures..
3.6 PIPE JOINTS
Design and install pipe joints to effectively sustain the longitudinal

pull-out forces caused by contraction of the piping or superimposed loads.
3.6.1 Threaded Metallic Joints
Provide threaded joints in metallic pipe with tapered threads evenly cut
and made with UL approved graphite joint sealing compound for gas service
or tetrafluoroethylene tape applied to the male threads only. Threaded
joints up to 1-1/2 inches in diameter may be made with approved
tetrafluoroethylene tape. Threaded joints up to 2 inches in diameter may
be made with approved joint sealing compound. After cutting and before
threading, ream pipe and remove all burrs. Caulking of threaded joints to
stop or prevent leaks is not permitted.
3.6.2 Flared Metallic Tubing Joints
Make flared joints in metallic tubing with special tools recommended by the
tubing manufacturer. Use flared joints only in systems constructed from
nonferrous pipe and tubing, when experience or tests have demonstrated that
the joint is suitable for the conditions, and when adequate provisions are
made in the design to prevent separation of the joints. Do not use
metallic ball sleeve compression-type tubing fittings for tubing joints.
3.6.3 Solder or Brazed Joints
Make all joints in metallic tubing and fittings with materials and
procedures recommended by the tubing supplier. Braze joints with material
having a melting point above 1000 degrees F, containing no phosphorous.
3.6.4 Press Connections
Make press connections in accordance with manufacturer's installation

instructions using tools approved by the manufacturer. Fully insert the
tubing into the fitting and then mark at the shoulder of the fitting.
Check the fitting alignment against the mark on the tubing to assure the
tubing is fully inserted before the joint is pressed.
3.7 PIPE SLEEVES
Provide pipes passing through concrete or masonry walls or concrete floors

or roofs with pipe sleeves fitted into place at the time of construction.
Do not install sleeves in structural members except where indicated or
approved. Make all rectangular and square openings as detailed. Extend
each sleeve through its respective wall, floor or roof, and cut flush with
each surface, except in mechanical room floors not located on grade where
clamping flanges or riser pipe clamps are used. Extend sleeves in
mechanical room floors above grade at least 4 inches above finish floor.
Unless otherwise indicated, use sleeves large enough to provide a minimum
clearance of 1/4 inch all around the pipe. Provide steel pipe for sleeves
in bearing walls, waterproofing membrane floors, and wet areas . Provide
sleeves in nonbearing walls, floors, or ceilings of steel pipe, galvanized
sheet metal with lock-type longitudinal seam, or moisture-resistant fiber
or plastic. For penetrations of fire walls, fire partitions and floors
which are not on grade, seal the annular space between the pipe and sleeve
with fire-stopping material and sealant that meet the requirement of
Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING.
3.8 PIPES PENETRATING WATERPROOFING MEMBRANES
Install pipes penetrating waterproofing membranes as specified in Section

3.9 FIRE SEAL
Fire seal all penetrations of fire rated partitions, walls and floors in
accordance with Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING.
3.10 ESCUTCHEONS
Provide escutcheons for all finished surfaces where gas piping passes
through floors, walls, or ceilings except in boiler, utility, or equipment
rooms.
3.11 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS
Provide drips, grading of the lines, freeze protection, and branch outlet
locations as shown and conforming to the requirements of NFPA 54.
3.12 BUILDING STRUCTURE
Do not weaken any building structure by the installation of any gas

piping. Do not cut or notch beams, joists or columns. Attach piping
supports to metal decking. Do not attach supports to the underside of
concrete filled floors or concrete roof decks unless approved by the
3.13 PIPING SYSTEM SUPPORTS
Support gas piping systems in buildings with pipe hooks, metal pipe straps,
bands or hangers suitable for the size of piping or tubing. Do not support
any gas piping system by other piping. Conform spacing of supports in gas
piping and tubing installations to the requirements of NFPA 54. Conform
the selection and application of supports in gas piping and tubing
installations to the requirements of MSS SP-69. In the support of multiple
pipe runs on a common base member, use a clip or clamp where each pipe
crosses the base support member. Spacing of the base support members is
not to exceed the hanger and support spacing required for any of the
individual pipes in the multiple pipe run. Rigidly connect the clips or
clamps to the common base member. Provide a clearance of 1/8 inch between
the pipe and clip or clamp for all piping which may be subjected to thermal
expansion.
3.14 ELECTRICAL BONDING AND GROUNDING
Provide a gas piping system within the building which is electrically

continuous and bonded to a grounding electrode as required by NFPA 70.
3.15 SHUTOFF VALVE
Install the main gas shutoff valve controlling the gas piping system to be
easily accessible for operation, as indicated, protected from physical
damage, and marked with a metal tag to clearly identify the piping system
controlled.
3.16 CATHODIC PROTECTION
Provide cathodic protection for underground ferrous gas piping as specified

in Section 26 42 14.00 10 CATHODIC PROTECTION SYSTEM (SACRIFICIAL ANODE) .
3.17 TESTING
Submit test reports in booklet form tabulating test and measurements

performed; dated after award of this contract, and stating the Contractor's
name and address, the project name and location, and a list of the specific
requirements which are being certified. Test entire gas piping system to
ensure that it is gastight prior to putting into service. Prior to
testing, blow out the system, clean, and clear all foreign material. Test
each joint with an approved gas detector, soap and water, or an equivalent
nonflammable solution. Inspect and test each valve in conformance with
API Std 598 and API Std 607. Complete testing before any work is covered,
enclosed, or concealed, and perform with due regard for the safety of
employees and the public during the test. Install bulkheads, anchorage and
bracing suitably designed to resist test pressures if necessary, and as
directed and or approved by the Contracting Officer. Do not use oxygen as
a testing medium.
3.17.1 Pressure Tests
Submit test reports in booklet form tabulating test and measurements

performed; dated after award of this contract, and stating the Contractor's
name and address, the project name and location, and a list of the specific
requirements which are being certified. Before appliances are connected,
test by filling the piping systems with air or an inert gas to withstand a
minimum pressure of 3 pounds gauge for a period of not less than 10 minutes
as specified in NFPA 54 without showing any drop in pressure. Do not use
Oxygen for test. Measure pressure with a mercury manometer, slope gauge,
or an equivalent device calibrated to be read in increments of not greater
than 0.1 pound. Isolate the source of pressure before the pressure tests
are made.
3.17.2 Purging
After testing is completed, and before connecting any appliances, fully

purge all gas piping. Do not purge piping into the combustion chamber of
an appliance. Do not purge the open end of piping systems into confined
spaces or areas where there are ignition sources unless the safety
precautions recommended in NFPA 54 are followed.
3.17.3 Labor, Materials and Equipment
Furnish all labor, materials and equipment necessary for conducting the
testing and purging.
3.18 PIPE COLOR CODE MARKING
Provide color code marking of piping as specified in Section 09 90 00

PAINTS AND COATINGS, conforming to ASME A13.1.
SECTION 23 25 00
CHEMICAL TREATMENT OF WATER FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES


Attachments
ASTM D 2688 (2005) Corrosivity of Water in the Absence

of Heat Transfer (Weight Loss Methods)
ASTM D 596 (2001; R 2006) Reporting Results of

Analysis of Water
NEMA MG 1 (2009) Motors and Generators
This section covers the provisions and installation procedures necessary

for a complete and totally functional water system(s) chemical treatment.
Provide and install the system with all necessary System Components,
Accessories, Piping Components, and Supplemental Components/Services.
1.3 SUBMITTALS

approval. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00
SD-03 Product Data

Water Analysis
Six complete copies, at least 5 weeks prior to the purchase of

the water treatment system, of the proposed water treatment plan
including a layout; control scheme; a list of existing make-up
water chemistry, including the items listed in paragraph Water
Analysis; a list of treatment chemicals to be added; the
proportion of chemicals to be added; the final treated water
control levels; and a description of health, safety and
environmental concerns for handling the chemicals plus any special
ventilation requirements.
Spare Parts

Field Instructions
Instructions, at least 2 weeks prior to construction completion,

including equipment layout, wiring and control diagrams, piping,
valves and control sequences, and typed condensed operation
instructions. The condensed operation instructions shall include
preventative maintenance procedures, methods of checking the
system for normal and safe operation, and procedures for safely
starting and stopping the system. The posted instructions shall
be framed under glass or laminated plastic and posted where
indicated by the Contracting Officer.
Tests
Test schedules, at least 2 weeks prior to the start of related

testing, for the condenser/chilled/boiler/condensate/feedwater
water quality tests. The schedules shall identify the date, time,
frequency and collection location for each test.
Demonstrations
A schedule, at least 2 weeks prior to the date of the proposed

training course, which identifies the date, time, and location for
the training.
SD-06 Test Reports
Condenser Water Quality Assurance Tests
Test reports in bound 8-1/2 by 11 inch booklets. The reports

shall identify the chemical composition of the condenser water.
The reports shall also include a comparison of the manufacturer's
or chemical vendor's recommended operating conditions for the
cooling tower and condenser in relation to the actual condition of
the condenser water. Any required corrective action shall be
documented within the report.
Boiler Water Quality Assurance Tests
The water quality test report identifying the chemical

composition of the boiler water. The report shall include a
comparison of the condition of the boiler water with the
manufacturer's or chemical vendor's recommended conditions. Any
required corrective action shall be documented within the report.
Six complete copies of operating and maintenance manuals for the

step-by-step water treatment procedures. The manuals shall
include testing procedures used in determining water quality.
1.4.1 Safety
Exposed moving parts, parts that produce high operating temperature, parts
which may be electrically energized, and parts that may be a hazard to
operating personnel shall be insulated, fully enclosed, guarded, or fitted
with other types of safety devices. Install safety devices so that proper
operation of equipment is not impaired. Provide catwalk, ladder, and
guardrail where indicated and in accordance with Section 05 50 13
MISCELLANEOUS METAL FABRICATIONS and Section 05 51 33 METAL LADDERS.
1.4.2 Drawings
Because of the small scale of the drawings, it is not possible to indicate

all offsets, fittings, and accessories that may be required. Carefully
investigate the plumbing, fire protection, electrical, structural and
finish conditions that would affect the work to be performed and arrange
such work accordingly, furnishing required offsets, fittings, and
accessories to meet such conditions.
Protect all equipment delivered and placed in storage from the weather,
humidity and temperature variations, dirt and dust, or other contaminants.
1.6 MAINTENANCE
specified, after approval of the detail drawings, not later than 2 months
prior to the date of beneficial occupancy. The data shall include a
complete list of parts and supplies, with source of supply
PART 2 PRODUCTS
a. Provide materials and equipment which are standard products of a

manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacturing of such products,
that are of a similar material, design and workmanship and that have
been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for two years prior
to bid opening.
b. The two-year use shall include applications of equipment and

materials under similar circumstances and of similar size. The two
years experience shall have been satisfactorily completed by a product
which has been sold or is offered for sale on the commercial market
through advertisements, manufacturer's catalogs, or brochures.
acceptable if a certified record of satisfactory field operation, for
not less than 6000 hours exclusive of the manufacturer's factory tests,
can be shown.
c. All products shall be supported by a service organization. Submit

a certified list of qualified permanent service organizations for
support of the equipment, including their addresses and
qualifications. These service organizations shall be reasonably
convenient to the equipment installation and shall be able to render
satisfactory service to the equipment on a regular and emergency basis

during the warranty period of the contract.
d. The selected service organization shall provide the chemicals

required, the concentrations required, and the water treatment
equipment sizes and flow rates required. The company shall provide all
chemicals required for the condenser and chilled water systems and fill
the systems with chemicals to the levels specified. The chemical shall
meet the requirements of this specification as well as the
recommendations from the manufacturers of the condenser and cooling
tower. Acid treatment chemicals shall not be used.
2.2 NAMEPLATES
Each major component of equipment shall have the manufacturer's name,

address, type or style, and catalog or serial number on a plate securely
attached to the item of equipment. Nameplates shall be provided for:
a. Pump(s)
b. Pump Motor(s)
2.3 ELECTRICAL WORK
Electrical equipment, motors, motor efficiencies, and wiring shall be in

accordance with Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Provide
electrical motor driven equipment specified complete with motors, motor
starters, and controls. Electrical characteristics and enclosure type
shall be as shown, and unless otherwise indicated, all motors of 1
horsepower and above with open, dripproof, or totally enclosed fan cooled
enclosures, shall be high efficiency type. Field wiring shall be in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Each motor shall conform to
NEMA MG 1 and be of sufficient size to drive the equipment at the specified
capacity without exceeding the nameplate rating of the motor. All motors
shall be continuous duty with the enclosure specified. Provide motor
starters complete with thermal overload protection and other appurtenances
necessary for the motor control indicated. Furnish motors with a magnetic
across-the-line or reduced voltage type starter as required by the
manufacturer. Motor starter shall be provided with NEMA 1 enclosures.
Manual or automatic control and protective or signal devices required for
the operation specified and any control wiring required for controls and
devices specified, but not shown, shall be provided.
2.4 GAUGES
Gauges shall conform to ASME B40.100, Class 1, 2, or 3, Style X, Type I or

III as required, 4-1/2 inches in diameter with phenolic or metal case.
2.5 WATER ANALYSIS
Conditions of make-up water to be supplied to the boilers, cooling towers

and chilled water systems reported in accordance with ASTM D 596, shall be
determined by contractor for the following appicable values:
Date of Sample _____

Temperature _____ degrees C.
Silica (SiO 2) _____ ppm (mg/L)
Insoluble _____ ppm (mg/L)
Iron, total (Fe) _____ ppm (mg/L)
Aluminum (Al) _____ ppm (mg/L)

Calcium (Ca) _____ ppm (mg/L)
Magnesium (Mg) _____ ppm (mg/L)
Carbonate (HCO 3) _____ ppm (mg/L)
Sulfate (SO 4) _____ ppm (mg/L)
Chloride (Cl) _____ ppm (mg/L)
Nitrate (NO 3) _____ ppm (mg/L)
Turbidity _____ ntu
pH _____
Residual Chlorine _____ ppm (mg/L)
Total Alkalinity _____ ppm (mg/L)
Non-Carbonate Hardness _____ ppm (mg/L)
Total Hardness _____ ppm (mg/L)
Dissolved Solids _____ ppm (mg/L)
Conductivity _____ micromho/cm
2.6 CONDENSER WATER TREATMENT SYSTEMS
The condenser water treatment system to be provided under the COF contract.
2.7 CHILLED WATER SYSTEM
A 2 gallon shot feeder shall be provided on the chilled water piping as

indicated on drawings. The feeder shall be furnished with an air vent,
gauge glass, funnel, valves, fittings, and piping.
2.7.1 Chilled Water Treatment
Treat chilled water with either a borax/nitrite type treatment or a

molybdate type treatment. Both types of treatment can be used with
glycol. Borax/nitrite treatment shall be maintained at the limits of 600
to 1000 ppm nitrite, 40 - 50 ppm copper corrosion inhibitor (TT or MBT),
and pH of 8.5 to 9.5. Molybdate treatment shall be maintained at the
limits of 100 to 125 ppm molybdate, 40 - 50 ppm copper corrosion inhibitor
(TT or MBT), and pH of 8.0 to 9.0.
2.7.2 Chilled Water Test Kits
One test kit of each type required to determine the water quality as
outlined within the operation and maintenance manuals shall be provided
(e.g. pH and nitrite or molybdate).
2.8 Test Kit
One test kit of each type required to determine the water quality as
outlined within the operation and maintenance manuals shall be provided
(e.g. pH, hardness and sulfite).
Drain and makeup water piping shall comply with the requirements of Section
22 00 00 PLUMBING, GENERAL PURPOSE. Drains which connect to sanitary sewer
systems shall be connected by means of an indirect waste.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
in the field, and advise the Contracting Officer of any discrepancy, before
3.2 INSTALLATION
Provide all chemicals, equipment and labor necessary to bring all system
waters in conformance with the specified requirements. Perform all work in
accordance with the manufacturer's published diagrams, recommendations, and
equipment warranty requirements.
3.3 PIPING
Connections between dissimilar metals shall be made with a dielectric union.
3.4 TRAINING COURSE
Conduct a training course for the operating staff as designated by the

Contracting Officer. The training period shall consist of a total 4 hours
of normal working time and start after the system is functionally completed
but prior to final acceptance tests. The field instructions shall cover
all of the items contained in the Operation and Maintenance Manuals as well
as demonstrations of routine maintenance operations.
3.5 TESTS
If the waters of the mechanical systems are not in conformance with the
specified requirements or in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations, the water treatment company shall take corrective action
to enable compliance. Daily operational tests shall be performed in the
directed frequencies to maintain required control to prevent corrosion,
scaling and damage to equipment during operation
3.5.1 Chilled Water Testing (monthly)
Once a month, the following tests will be performed on chilled water.
PH _____
Nitrite or Molybdate _____ ppm (mg/L)
3.5.2 Quality Assurance Testing
Conduct quality assurance testing periodically by an independent water

treatment lab/consultant to verify to managers that the mechanical and
water treatment systems are being maintained properly. Provide the Quality
Assurance evaluation reports to the government COR.
3.5.2.1 Chilled Water Quality Assurance Testing (quarterly)
Quarterly, the following tests shall be performed on chilled water.
PH _____
Nitrite or Molybdate _____ ppm (mg/L)
Iron (total, as Fe(2)O(3)) _____ ppm (mg/L)
Written evaluation summary
3.5.3 Corrosion Testers
Install corrosion coupon and rack systems to verify corrosion control in

the systems. Testers or coupons are installed in flowing system water
through a sidestream or rack system. Both mild steel and copper metal
samples are to be tested in the corrosion testers in accordance with
ASTM D 2688. Samples are to be replaced and analyzed every 3 months.
Rates of corrosion less than 3 mpy for steel and 0.2 mpy for copper are
acceptable. Corrosion testers shall be installed on the piping systems of
the following systems.
Chilled water system
SECTION 23 52 00
HEATING BOILERS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

AWS A5.8/A5.8M (2004; Errata 2004) Specification for

Filler Metals for Brazing and Braze Welding
AWS B2.2 (1991) Brazing Procedure and Performance

Qualification

Purpose (Inch)

Threaded
ASME B16.15 (2006) Cast Bronze Threaded Fittings

Classes 125 and 250

ASME B16.20 (2007) Metallic Gaskets for Pipe Flanges -

Ring-Joint, Spiral Wound, and Jacketed

Fittings


Classes 150 and 300

Welding End
ASME B16.39 (1998; R 2006) Standard for Malleable Iron

and 300

ASME B16.5 (2003) Standard for Pipe Flanges and

Flanged Fittings: NPS 1/2 Through NPS 24

ASME B31.1 (2007; Addenda 2008) Power Piping
ASME B31.5 (2006) Refrigeration Piping and Heat

Transfer Components

Attachments
ASME BPVC SEC IV (2007; Addenda 2008) Boiler and Pressure

Vessel Code; Section IV, Recommended Rules
for the Care and Operation of Heating
Boilers
ASME BPVC SEC VIII D1 (2007; Addenda 2008) Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code; Section VIII, Pressure
Vessels Division 1 - Basic Coverage
ASME CSD-1 (2006) Control and Safety Devices for

Automatically Fired Boilers

Steel Forgings for Piping Applications

Strip
ASTM A 183 (2003) Standard Specification for Carbon

Steel Track Bolts and Nuts

Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting
Materials for High-Temperature Service
ASTM A 234/A 234M (2007) Standard Specification for Piping

Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy
Steel for Moderate and High Temperature
Service

Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, for
Intermediate- and Higher-Temperature
Service
ASTM A 516/A 516M (2006) Standard Specification for Pressure
Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, for Moderate-

and Lower-Temperature Service

Welded and Seamless

for Ductile Iron Castings

Metal


Copper Tube

Liquid and Paste Fluxes for Soldering of
Copper and Copper Alloy Tube
ASTM B 828 (2002) Standard Practice for Making

Capillary Joints by Soldering of Copper
and Copper Alloy Tube and Fittings

Copper Water Tube
ASTM B 88M (2005) Standard Specification for Seamless

Copper Water Tube (Metric)

Compounds

CANADIAN STANDARDS ASSOCIATION (CSA)
CSA 4.9 (2004; Addenda A 2005; Addenda B 2007)

Gas-Fired Low Pressure Steam and Hot Water
Boilers
COPPER DEVELOPMENT ASSOCIATION (CDA)
CDA A4015 (1994; R 1995) Copper Tube Handbook
EJMA Stds (2003) EJMA Standards
HYDRONICS INSTITUTE DIVISION OF GAMA (HYI)
HYI-005 (2004) I=B=R Ratings for Boilers,

Baseboard Radiation and Finned Tube
(Commercial)

INDUSTRY (MSS)

Flared Ends


Manufacture




Service

Threaded Ends

Valves



and Generators
NFPA 85 (2007) Boiler and Combustion Systems

Hazards Code
UL 1738 (1993; Rev thru Oct 2006) Venting Systems

for Gas-Burning Appliances, Categories II,
III and IV
UL 795 (2006) Commercial-Industrial Gas Heating

Equipment
UL Gas&Oil Dir (2008) Flammable and Combustible Liquids

and Gases Equipment Directory
1.2 SUBMITTALS

SD-02 Shop Drawings
Piping Installation
Installation
Detail drawings consisting of equipment layout including

installation details and electrical connection diagrams;
combustion and safety control diagrams; ductwork layout showing
the location of supports and hangers, typical hanger details,
gauge reinforcement, reinforcement spacing rigidity
classification, and static pressure and seal classifications; and
piping layout showing the location of guides and anchors, the load
imposed on each support or anchor (not required for radiant floor
tubing), and typical support details. Include on the drawings any
information required to demonstrate that the system has been
coordinated and will properly function as a unit and to show
equipment relationship to other parts of the work, including
clearances required for operation and maintenance.
SD-03 Product Data
Manufacturer's catalog data included with the detail drawings

for the following items:
1) Boilers
2) Unit Heaters
3) Fuel Burning Equipment
4) Combustion Control Equipment
5) Pumps
6) Fittings and Accessories
Data showing model, size, options, etc., that are intended for
consideration. Data submitted shall be adequate to demonstrate
compliance with contract requirements. Data shall include
manufacturer's written installation instructions and
manufacturer's recommendations for operation and maintenance
clearances for each item.
Spare Parts

Six complete copies of the proposed water treatment plan. The

plan shall include a layout, control scheme, a list of the
existing water conditions including the items listed in paragraph
BOILER WATER TREATMENT, a list of all chemicals, the proportion of
chemicals to be added, the final treated water conditions, and a
description of environmental concerns for handling the chemicals.
Heating System Tests

Fuel System Tests
Unit Heaters
Proposed test procedures for the heating system tests and fuel
system tests, at least 2 weeks prior to the start of related
testing.
Welding
A copy of qualified welding procedures, at least 2 weeks prior

to the start of welding operations.
A list of names and identification symbols of qualified welders

and welding operators, at least 2 weeks prior to the start of
welding operations.
Qualifications
A statement from the firms proposed to prepare submittals and

perform installation and testing, demonstrating successful
completion of similar services of at least five projects of
similar size or scope, at least 2 weeks prior to the submittal of
any other item required by this section.
Field Instructions
System layout diagrams that show the layout of equipment,

piping, and ductwork and typed condensed operation manuals
explaining preventative maintenance procedures, methods of
checking the system for normal, safe operation, and procedures for
safely starting and stopping the system, framed under glass or
laminated plastic, at least 2 weeks prior to the start of related
testing. After approval, these items shall be posted where
directed.
Tests
Proposed test schedules for the heating system and fuel system
tests, at least 2 weeks prior to the start of related testing.
SD-06 Test Reports
Heating System Tests

Fuel System Tests
Test reports for the heating system tests and the fuel system
test, upon completion of testing complete with results.
Water Treatment Testing
a. The water quality test report shall identify the chemical
composition of the boiler water. The report shall include a

comparison of the condition of the boiler water with the
manufacturer's recommended conditions. Any required corrective
action shall be documented within the report.
b. A test report shall identify the condition of the boiler at

the completion of 1 year of service. The report shall include a
comparison of the condition of the boiler with the manufacturer's
recommended operating conditions.
SD-07 Certificates
Bolts
Written certification by the bolt manufacturer that the bolts

furnished comply with the requirements of this specification. The
certification shall include illustrations of product markings, the
date of manufacture, and the number of each type of bolt to be
furnished based on this certification.
Emissions Monitoring
Written certification by the boiler manufacturer that each

boiler furnished complies with Federal, state, and local
regulations for emissions. The certification shall also include a
description of applicable emission regulations. If any boiler is
exempt from the emission regulations, the certification shall
indicate the reason for the exemption.
Energy Star
Operation and Maintenance Instructions
Six complete manuals listing step-by-step procedures required

for system startup, operation, shutdown, and routine maintenance,
at least 2 weeks prior to field training. The manuals shall
include the manufacturer's name, model number, parts list,
simplified wiring and control diagrams, troubleshooting guide, and
recommended service organization (including address and telephone
number) for each item of equipment. Each service organization
shall be capable of providing 4 hour onsite response to a service
call on an emergency basis.
Six complete copies of operating and maintenance manuals for the

step-by-step water treatment procedures, including procedures for
testing the water quality.
Protect equipment delivered and placed in storage from the weather,

humidity and temperature variations, dirt and dust, and other contaminants.
1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS
specifed, after approval of the detail drawings and no later than 2 months
prior to the date of beneficial occupancy. Include in the data a complete
list of parts and supplies, with current unit prices and source of supply,
and a list of the parts recommended by the manufacturer to be replaced
after 1 and 3 years of service.
PART 2 PRODUCTS

2 years prior to bid opening. Equipment shall be supported by a service
organization that is, in the opinion of the Contracting Officer, reasonably
convenient to the site.
2.1.2 Asbestos Prohibition
Asbestos and asbestos-containing products will not be allowed.
2.1.3 Nameplates
Secure a plate to each major component of equipment containing the

manufacturer's name, address, type or style, model or serial number, and
catalog number. Also, display an ENERGY STAR label as applicable. Each
pressure vessel shall have an approved ASME stamp.
2.1.4 Equipment Guards
Belts, pulleys, chains, gears, couplings, projecting setscrews, keys, and

other rotating parts exposed to personnel contact shall be fully enclosed
or guarded in accordance with OSHA requirements. High temperature
equipment and piping exposed to contact by personnel or where it creates a
potential fire hazard shall be properly guarded or covered with insulation
of a type specified. .
2.2 BOILERS
Each boiler shall have the output capacity in British thermal units per
hour (Btuh) as indicated when fired with the specified fuels. The boiler
shall be furnished complete with the gas burning equipment, boiler fittings
and trim, automatic controls, forced draft fan, burner, electrical wiring,
insulation, piping connections, and protective jacket. The boiler shall be
completely assembled and tested at the manufacturer's plant. Boiler
auxiliaries including fans, motors, drives, and similar equipment shall be
provided with at least 10 percent excess capacity to allow for field
variations in settings and to compensate for any unforeseen increases in
pressure losses in appurtenant piping and ductwork. However, the boiler
safety devices shall not be sized for a 10 percent excess capacity. The
boiler and its accessories shall be designed and installed to permit ready
accessibility for operation, maintenance, and service. Boilers shall be
designed, constructed, and equipped in accordance with ASME BPVC SEC IV.
Each boiler shall be of the condensing type and designed for water service
as specified herein. The boiler capacity shall be based on the ratings

shown in HYI-005 or as certified by the American Boiler Manufacturers
Association, or American Gas Association.
2.2.1 Condensing Boiler
Each boiler shall be a self-contained packaged type, complete with

accessories, mounted on a structural steel base or a steel base which is
integral to the boiler shell. Each boiler shall conform to the commercial
design used by the manufacturer and shall permit free thermal expansion
without placing undue stress on any part of the boiler. Each boiler which
experiences the formation of condensate within the flue gas shall be
specifically designed for condensing application. Each boiler shall
withstand the corrosive effects of condensate for each part which may be in
contact with the condensate at all possible operating conditions. Each
boiler shall be provided with a separate air intake, exhaust, and
condensate drain. Each boiler shall be designed to withstand the water
temperature differentials anticipated at the required operating conditions
without experiencing any damage due to thermal shock.
2.2.2 Modular Configuration
Modular boilers shall be of the condensing type. Modular boilers shall have
the capability of independent operation. Upon failure of any module, the
remaining modules shall be capable of operating at their designed
capacity. The size of the individual modules shall be as indicated.
2.2.3 Hot Water Heating Boilers
The hot water heating boiler shall be capable of operating at the specified
maximum continuous capacity without damage or deterioration to the boiler,
its setting, firing equipment, or auxiliaries. The rated capacity shall be
the capacity at which the boiler will operate continuously while
maintaining at least the specified minimum efficiency. The boiler design
conditions shall be as per boiler equipment schedule on drawings
2.3 FUEL BURNING EQUIPMENT
Boiler shall be designed to burn gas. Each boiler shall comply with
Federal, state, and local emission regulations.
2.3.1 Burners
2.3.1.1 Gas Fired Burners and Controls
Burners shall be UL approved mechanical draft burners with all air

necessary for combustion supplied by a blower where the operation is
coordinated with the burner. Burner shall be provided complete with fuel
supply system in conformance with the following safety codes or standards:
a. Gas-fired units with inputs greater than 400,000 Btuh per

combustion chamber shall conform to UL 795. Gas fired units less than
12,500,000 Btuh input shall conform to CSA 4.9.
2.4 COMBUSTION CONTROL EQUIPMENT
Combustion control equipment shall be provided as a system by a single
manufacturer. Field installed automatic combustion control system shall be

installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and under
the direct supervision of a representative of the control manufacturer. The
boiler water temperature shall be controlled by a water temperature
controller. The equipment shall operate electrically . On multiple
boiler installations, each boiler unit shall have a completely independent
system of controls responding to the load and to a plant master
controller. If recording instruments are provided, a 1 year supply of ink
and 400 blank charts for each recorder shall be furnished.
2.4.1 Electrical controls
Electrical control devices shall be rated at 24 volts and shall be

connected as specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.
2.4.2 Water Temperature Controller
The controller shall be of sturdy construction and shall be protected

against dust and dampness. The thermostatic element shall be inserted in a
separable socket installed in the boiler return piping. Modulating
controllers shall control the fuel burning equipment to maintain set boiler
water temperature within 2 percent. Controller shall be furnished with
necessary equipment to automatically adjust the setting to suit the outside
weather conditions. The outside air reset controller shall be operated in
such a manner that the operating temperatures required by the boiler
manufacturer are not compromised.
2.4.3 Boiler Combustion Controls and Positioners
a. Gas boiler units shall be provided with modulating combustion

controls with gas pilot or spark ignition. Modulating controls shall
be provided with a means for manually controlling the firing rate.
c. Modulating control function shall be accomplished using positioning

type controls. Air flow ratio and fuel control valve shall be
controlled by relative positions of operative levers on a jackshaft
responding to a water temperature controller. Positioning type
combustion control equipment shall include draft controls with
synchronized fuel feed and combustion air supply controls, while and
shall maintain the proper air/fuel ratio. The desired furnace draft
shall be maintained within 0.01 inch of water column.
2.4.4 Combustion Safety Controls and Equipment
Combustion safety controls and equipment shall be UL listed,

microprocessor-based distributed process controller. The system shall
include mounting hardware, wiring and cables, and associated equipment.
The controller shall be mounted completely wired, programmed, debugged, and
tested to perform all of its functions. The controller shall process the
signals for complete control and monitoring of the boiler. This shall
include maintaining boiler status, starting and stopping all control
functions, sequencing control functions and signaling alarm conditions.
The program shall be documented and include cross references in description
of coils and contacts. Microprocessor shall be able to perform self
diagnostics and contain a message center to provide operator with status
and failure mode information. Controllers for each boiler shall be mounted
on a separate, free standing panel adjacent to the boiler or for packaged
boilers on the boiler supporting structure. Control systems and safety
devices for automatically fired boilers shall conform to ASME CSD-1.
Electrical combustion and safety controls shall be rated at 120 volts,

single phase, 60 Hz and shall be connected as specified in Section 26 20 00
INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. A 4 inch diameter alarm bell shall be
provided and shall be located where indicated or directed. The alarm bell
shall ring when the boiler is shut down by any safety control or
interlock. Indicating lights shall be provided on the control panel. A
red light shall indicate flame failure, and a green light shall indicate
that the main fuel valve is open. The following shutdown conditions shall
require a manual reset before the boiler can automatically recycle:
a. Flame failure.
b. Failure to establish pilot flame.
c. Failure to establish main flame.
d. Low-water cutoff.
e. High temperature cutoff.
2.4.4.1 Low-water Cutoff
Low water cutoff shall be float actuated switch or electrically actuated

probe type low-water cutoff. Float chamber shall be provided with a
blow-down connection. Cutoff shall cause a safety shutdown and sound an
alarm when the boiler water level drops below a safe minimum level. A
safety shutdown due to low water shall require manual reset before
operation can be resumed and shall prevent recycling of the burner. The
cutoff shall be in strict accordance to the latest version of code,
ASME CSD-1 Controls and Safety Devices for Automatically Fired Boilers.
a. Pump Controller with Low-Water Cutoff: Controller shall be a

design approved by the boiler manufacturer. A pump controller shall be
provided for each boiler which is used for space heating and process
steam loads or long distribution lines. Pump controller shall control
the operation of the burner, forced-draft fan, and pump. Pump
controller and low-water cutoff shall have a float-operated mercury
switch arranged to start and stop the pump at preset boiler water
levels. If the water level in the boiler reaches the low danger point,
a second mercury switch shall shut down the burner and actuate the
alarm bell.
2.4.4.2 Water Flow Interlock
Hot water boiler limit controls shall be provided to include protection for
low boiler water flow and high boiler water temperature. The limit
controls shall be interlocked with the combustion control system to effect
boiler alarm and shutdown. The controls shall not allow boiler startup
unless hot water flow is proven.
2.5 HOT WATER AND BOILER CIRCULATING PUMPS
Circulating pumps for hot water shall be electrically driven single-stage

centrifugal type and have a capacity not less than indicated. Boiler
circulating pumps shall be supported by the piping on which installed and
shall be closed-coupled shaft. The boiler circulating pumps shall be
horizontal split case or vertical split case type. Hot water circulating
pumps shall be supported on a concrete foundation with a cast iron or
structural steel base and shall have a flexible-coupled shaft. The hot
water circulating pumps shall be a horizontal end suction type. The pump
shaft shall be constructed of corrosion-resistant alloy steel, sleeve
bearings and glands of bronze designed to accommodate a mechanical seal,
and the housing of close-grained cast iron. Pump seals shall be capable of
withstanding 240 degrees F temperature without external cooling. The motor
shall have sufficient power for the service required, shall be of a type
approved by the manufacturer of the pump, shall be suitable for the
available electric service, and shall conform to the requirements of
paragraph ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT. Each pump suction and discharge connection
shall be provided with a pressure gauge as specified. The boiler
circulating pump discharge heater shall be provided with a flow switch.
Flow switch unit shall be a self-contained swinging vane type to indicate
fluid flow. Switch shall be a SPDT with 120-volt, 15-ampere rating.
2.6 COLD WATER CONNECTIONS
Connections shall be provided which includes consecutively in line a

strainer, reduced pressure principle backflow preventers, and water
pressure regulator in that order in the direction of the flow. The reduced
pressure principle backflow preventers shall be provided as indicated and
in compliance with Section 22 00 00 PLUMBING, GENERAL PURPOSE. Cold water
fill connections shall be made to the water supply system as indicated.
Necessary pipe, fittings, and valves required for water connections between
the boiler and cold water main shall be provided as shown. The pressure
regulating valve shall be of a type that will not stick or allow pressure
to build up on the low side. The valve shall be set to maintain a terminal
pressure of approximately,lately 5 psi in excess of the static head on the
system and shall operate within a 2 psi tolerance regardless of cold water
supply piping pressure and without objectionable noise under any condition
of operation.
2.7 UNIT HEATERS
2.7.1 Propeller Fan Heaters
Heaters shall be designed for suspension and arranged for horizontal

discharge of air as indicated. Casings shall be not less than 20 gauge
black steel and finished with lacquer or enamel. Suitable stationary
deflectors shall be provided to assure proper air and heat penetration
capacity at floor level based on established design temperature.
Suspension from heating pipes will not be permitted. Horizontal discharge
type unit heaters shall have discharge or face velocities not in excess of
the following:
Unit Capacity, cfm Face Velocity, fpm
Up to 1,000 800
1,001 to 3,000 900
3,001 and over 1,000
2.7.2 Heating Elements
Heating coils and radiating fins shall be of suitable nonferrous alloy with
fittings at each end for connecting to external piping. The heating
elements shall be free to expand or contract without developing leaks and
shall be properly pitched for drainage. Coils shall be suitable for
use with water up to 250 degrees F.
2.7.3 Motors
Motors shall be provided with NEMA 250 general purpose enclosure. Motors
and motor controls shall otherwise be as specified in Section 26 20 00
INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.
2.7.4 Motor Switches
Motors shall be provided with manual selection switches with "Off," and
"Automatic" positions and shall be equipped with thermal overload
protection.
2.7.5 Controls
Controls shall be provided as specified in Section 23 09 23 DIRECT DIGITAL

CONTROL FOR HVAC AND OTHER LOCAL BUILDING SYSTEMS.
2.8 HEATING AND VENTILATING UNITS
Heating and ventilating units and associated equipment shall be in

accordance with Section 23 00 00 AIR SUPPLY, DISTRIBUTION, VENTILATION, AND
EXHAUST SYSTEM.
2.9 AIR HANDLING UNITS
Air handling units and associated equipment shall be in accordance with

Section 23 00 00 AIR SUPPLY, DISTRIBUTION, VENTILATION, AND EXHAUST SYSTEM.
2.10 FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES
Boiler fittings and accessories shall be installed with each boiler in

accordance with ASME BPVC SEC IV, unless otherwise specified.
2.10.1 Direct Vents
Direct venting shall be used for condensing type boilers. Both the air
intake and exhaust vents shall be sized and located as indicated on the
drawings and as recommended by the boiler manufacturer. A separate
combustion air intake vent and exhaust vent shall be provided for each
boiler.
2.10.1.1 Combustion Air Intake Vent
The combustion air intake piping shall be constructed of Schedule 40 PVC in

accordance with ASTM D 1784. The vent shall be suitable for the
temperature at the boiler combustion air intake connection point. Each
intake shall be provided complete with bird screen.
2.10.1.2 Exhaust Vent
The exhaust vent piping shall be constructed of Schedule 40 CPVC or

stainless steel conforming to UL 1738 and the boiler manufacturer's
recommendations. Plastic materials polyetherimide (PEI) and
polyethersulfone (PES) are forbidden to be used for vent piping of
combustion gases. The exhaust vent shall be suitable for the maximum
anticipated boiler exhaust temperature and shall withstand the corrosive
effects of the condensate. A 0.3125 inch diameter hole shall be provided
in the stack not greater than 6 inches from the boiler flue outlet for
sampling of the exit gases. A method shall be provided to seal the hole to
prevent exhaust gases from entering the boiler room when samples are not
being taken. Each exhaust stack shall be provided complete with bird
screen.
2.10.2 Expansion Tank
The hot water pressurization system shall include a diaphragm-type

expansion tank which will accommodate the expanded water of the system
generated within the normal operating temperature range, limiting the
pressure increase at all components in the system to the maximum allowable
pressure at those components. The only air in the system shall be the
permanent sealed-in air cushion contained in the diaphragm-type tank. The
sizes shall be as indicated. The expansion tank shall be welded steel,
constructed, tested, and stamped in accordance with ASME BPVC SEC VIII D1
for a working pressure of 125 psi and precharged to the minimum operating
pressure. The tank's air chamber shall be fitted with an air charging
valve and pressure gauge. The tank shall be supported by steel legs or
bases for vertical installation or steel saddles for horizontal
installations. The tank shall have lifting rings and a drain connection.
All components shall be suitable for a maximum operating temperature of 250
degrees F.
2.10.3 Air Separator
External air separation tank shall be steel, constructed, tested and

stamped in accordance with ASME BPVC SEC VIII D1 for a working pressure of
125 psi. The capacity of the air separation tank indicated is minimum.
2.10.4 Gaskets
Gaskets shall be nonasbestos material in accordance with ASME B16.20, full

face or self-centering type. The gaskets shall be of the spiral wound type
with graphite filler material.
2.10.5 Steel Pipe and Fittings
2.10.5.1 Steel Pipe
Steel pipe shall be ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E or S, Grade A or B, black

steel, standard weight.
2.10.5.2 Steel Pipe Fittings
Fittings shall have the manufacturer's trademark affixed in accordance with

MSS SP-25 so as to permanently identify the manufacturer.
2.10.5.3 Steel Flanges
Flanged fittings including flanges, bolts, nuts, bolt patterns, etc. shall
be in accordance with ASME B16.5 class 150 and shall have the manufacturers
trademark affixed in accordance with MSS SP-25. Flange material shall
conform to ASTM A 105/A 105M. Flanges for high temperature water systems
shall be serrated or raised-face type. Blind flange material shall conform
to ASTM A 516/A 516M cold service and ASTM A 515/A 515M for hot service.
Bolts shall be high strength or intermediate strength with material
conforming to ASTM A 193/A 193M.
2.10.5.4 Welded Fittings
Welded fittings shall conform to ASTM A 234/A 234M with WPA marking.
Buttwelded fittings shall conform to ASME B16.9, and socket-welded fittings
shall conform to ASME B16.11.
2.10.5.5 Cast-Iron Fittings
Fittings shall be ASME B16.4, Class 125, type required to match connecting
piping.
2.10.5.6 Malleable-Iron Fittings
Fittings shall be ASME B16.3, type as required to match connecting piping.
2.10.5.7 Unions
Unions shall be ASME B16.39, Class 150.
2.10.5.8 Threads
Pipe threads shall conform to ASME B1.20.1.
2.10.5.9 Grooved Mechanical fittings
Joints and fittings shall be designed for not less than 125 psig service
and shall be the product of the same manufacturer. Fitting and coupling
houses shall be ductile iron conforming to ASTM A 536. Gaskets shall be
molded synthetic rubber with central cavity, pressure responsive
configuration and shall conform to ASTM D 2000 for circulating medium up to
230 degrees F. Grooved joints shall conform to AWWA C606. Coupling nuts
and bolts shall be steel and shall conform to ASTM A 183.
2.10.6 Copper Tubing and Fittings
2.10.6.1 Copper Tubing
Tubing shall be ASTM B 88, ASTM B 88M, Type K or L. Adapters for copper
tubing shall be brass or bronze for brazed fittings.
2.10.6.2 Solder-Joint Pressure Fittings
Wrought copper and bronze solder-joint pressure fittings shall conform to

ASME B16.22 and ASTM B 75. Cast copper alloy solder-joint pressure
fittings shall conform to ASME B16.18 and ASTM B 828.
2.10.6.3 Flared Fittings
Cast copper alloy fittings for flared copper tube shall conform to
ASME B16.26 and ASTM B 62.
2.10.6.4 Adapters
Adapters may be used for connecting tubing to flanges and to threaded ends
of valves and equipment. Extracted brazed tee joints produced with an
acceptable tool and installed as recommended by the manufacturer may be
used.
2.10.6.5 Threaded Fittings
Cast bronze threaded fittings shall conform to ASME B16.15.
2.10.6.6 Brazing Material
Brazing material shall conform to AWS A5.8/A5.8M.
2.10.6.7 Brazing Flux
Flux shall be in paste or liquid form appropriate for use with brazing
material. Flux shall be as follows: lead-free; have a 100 percent
flushable residue; contain slightly acidic reagents; contain potassium
borides, and contain fluorides. Silver brazing materials shall be in
accordance with AWS A5.8/A5.8M.
2.10.6.8 Solder Material
Solder metal shall conform to ASTM B 32 95-5 tin-antimony.
2.10.6.9 Solder Flux
Flux shall be either liquid or paste form, non-corrosive and conform to

ASTM B 813.
2.10.6.10 Grooved Mechanical Fittings
Joints and fittings shall be designed for not less than 125 psig service
and shall be the product of the same manufacturer. Fitting and coupling
houses shall be ductile iron conforming to ASTM A 536. Gaskets shall be
molded synthetic rubber with central cavity, pressure responsible
configuration and shall conform to ASTM D 2000, for circulating medium up to
230 degrees F. Grooved joints shall conform to AWWA C606. Coupling nuts
and bolts shall be steel and shall conform to ASTM A 183.
2.10.7 Dielectric Waterways and Flanges
Dielectric waterways shall have temperature and pressure rating equal to or

greater than that specified for the connecting piping. Waterways shall
have metal connections on both ends suited to match connecting piping.
Dielectric waterways shall be internally lined with an insulator
specifically designed to prevent current flow between dissimilar metals.
Dielectric flanges shall meet the performance requirements described herein
for dielectric waterways.
2.10.8 Flexible Pipe Connectors
Flexible pipe connectors shall be designed for 125 psi or 150 psi service.
Connectors shall be installed where indicated. The flexible section shall
be constructed of rubber, tetrafluoroethylene resin, or corrosion-resisting
steel, bronze, monel, or galvanized steel. Materials used and the
configuration shall be suitable for the pressure, vacuum, and temperature
medium. The flexible section shall be suitable for service intended and
may have threaded, welded, soldered, flanged, or socket ends. Flanged
assemblies shall be equipped with limit bolts to restrict maximum travel to
the manufacturer's standard limits. Unless otherwise indicated, the length
of the flexible connectors shall be as recommended by the manufacturer for
the service intended. Internal sleeves or liners, compatible with
circulating medium, shall be provided when recommended by the
manufacturer. Covers to protect the bellows shall be provided where

indicated.
2.10.9 Pipe Supports
Pipe supports shall conform to MSS SP-58 and MSS SP-69.
2.10.10 Pipe Expansion
2.10.10.1 Expansion Loops
Expansion loops and offsets shall provide adequate expansion of the main
straight runs of the system within the stress limits specified in ASME B31.1.
The loops and offsets shall be cold-sprung and installed where indicated.
Pipe guides and anchors shall be provided as indicated.
2.10.10.2 Expansion Joints
Expansion joints shall provide for either single or double slip of the
connected pipes, as required or indicated, and for not less than the
transverse indicated. The joints shall be designed for a hot water working
pressure not less than 125 psig and shall be in accordance with applicable
requirements of EJMA Stds and ASME B31.1. End connection shall be flanged.
Anchor bases or support bases shall be provided as indicated or required.
Sliding surfaces and water wetted surfaces shall be chromium plated or
fabricated of corrosion resistant steel. Initial setting shall be made in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations to compensate for an
ambient temperature at time of installation. Pipe alignment guides shall
be installed as recommended by the joint manufacturer, but in any case
shall not be more than 5 feet from expansion joint, except in lines 4 inches
or smaller guides shall be installed not more than 2 feet from the joint.
Service outlets shall be provided where indicated.
a. Bellows-type joints shall be flexible, guided expansion joints. The

expansion element shall be stabilized corrosion resistant steel.
Bellows-type expansion joints shall conform to the applicable
requirements of EJMA Stds and ASME B31.1 with internal lines. Guiding
of piping on both sides of expansion joint shall be in accordance with
the published recommendations of the manufacturer of the expansion
joint. The joints shall be designed for the working temperature and
pressure suitable for the application but shall not be less than 150
psig.
b. Flexible ball joints shall be constructed of alloys as appropriate

for the service intended. The joints shall be threaded, grooved,
flanged, or welded end as required and shall be capable of absorbing
the normal operating axial, lateral, or angular movements or
combination thereof. Balls and sockets shall be polished,
chromium-plated when materials are not of corrosion-resistant steel.
The ball type joint shall be designed and constructed in accordance
with ASME B31.1 and EJMA Stds. Flanges shall conform to the diameter
and drilling of ASME B16.5. Molded gaskets shall be suitable for the
service intended.
c. Slip type expansion joints shall be EJMA Stds and ASME B31.1, Class
1 or 2. Type II joints shall be suitable for repacking under full line
pressure.
2.10.11 Valves
Valves shall be Class 125 and shall be suitable for the application.
Grooved ends in accordace with AWWA C606 may be used for water service
only. Valves in nonboiler external piping shall meet the material,
fabrication and operating requirements of ASME B31.1. The connection type
of all valves shall match the same type of connection required for the
piping on which installed.
2.10.11.1 Gate Valves
Gate valves 2-1/2 inches and smaller shall conform to MSS SP-80 bronze
rising stem, threaded, solder, or flanged ends. Gate valves 3 inches and
larger shall conform to MSS SP-70 cast iron bronze trim, outside screw and
yoke, flanged, or threaded ends.
2.10.11.2 Globe Valves
Globe valves 2-1/2 inches and smaller shall conform to MSS SP-80, bronze,
threaded, soldered, or flanged ends. Globe valves 3 inches and larger
shall conform to MSS SP-85, cast iron, bronze trim, flanged, or threaded
ends.
2.10.11.3 Check Valves
Check valves 2-1/2 inches and smaller shall conform to MSS SP-80, bronze,
threaded, soldered, or flanged ends. Check valves 3 inches and larger
ends.
2.10.11.4 Angle Valves
Angle valves 2-1/2 inches and smaller shall conform to MSS SP-80 bronze,
threaded, soldered, or flanged ends. Angle valves 3 inches and larger
ends.
2.10.11.5 Ball Valves
Ball valves 1/2 inch and larger shall conform to MSS SP-72 or MSS SP-110,
ductile iron or bronze, threaded, soldered, or flanged ends.
2.10.11.6 Plug Valves
Plug valves 2 inch and larger shall conform to MSS SP-78. Plug valves
smaller than 2 inch shall conform to ASME B16.34.
2.10.11.7 Grooved End Valves
Valves with grooved ends in accordace with AWWA C606 may be used if the
valve manufacturer certifies that their performance meets the requirements
of the standards indicated for each type of valve.
2.10.11.8 Balancing Valves
Balancing valves shall have meter connections with positive shutoff

valves. An integral pointer shall register the degree of valve opening.
Valves shall be calibrated so that flow rate can be determined when valve
opening in degrees and pressure differential across valve is known. Each
balancing valve shall be constructed with internal seals to prevent leakage

and shall be supplied with preformed insulation. Valves shall be suitable
for 250 degrees F temperature and working pressure of the pipe in which
installed. Valve bodies shall be provided with tapped openings and pipe
extensions with shutoff valves outside of pipe insulation. The pipe
extensions shall be provided with quick connecting hose fittings for a
portable meter to measure the pressure differential. One portable
differential meter shall be furnished. The meter suitable for the
operating pressure specified shall be complete with hoses, vent, and
shutoff valves, and carrying case. In lieu of the balancing valve with
integral metering connections, a ball valve or plug valve with a separately
installed orifice plate or venturi tube may be used for balancing.
2.10.11.9 Butterfly Valves
Butterfly valves shall be 2-flange type or lug wafer type, and shall be
bubbletight at 150 psig. Valve bodies shall be cast iron, malleable iron,
or steel. ASTM A 167, Type 404 or Type 316, corrosion resisting steel
stems, bronze, or corrosion resisting steel discs, and synthetic rubber
seats shall be provided. Valves smaller than 8 inches shall have
throttling handles with a minimum of seven locking positions. Valves 8
inches and larger shall have totally enclosed manual gear operators with
adjustable balance return stops and position indicators. Valves in
insulated lines shall have extended neck to accommodate insulation
thickness.
2.10.11.10 Drain valves
Drain valves shall be provided at each drain point of blowdown as

recommended by the boiler manufacturer. Piping shall conform to
ASME BPVC SEC IVand ASTM A 53/A 53M.
2.10.11.11 Safety Valves
Safety valves shall have steel bodies and shall be equipped with
corrosion-resistant trim and valve seats. The valves shall be properly
guided and shall be positive closing so that no leakage can occur.
Adjustment of the desired back-pressure shall cover the range between 2 and
10 psig. The adjustment shall be made externally, and any shafts extending
through the valve body shall be provided with adjustable stuffing boxes
having renewable packing. Boiler safety valves of proper size and of the
required number, in accordance with ASME BPVC SEC IV, shall be installed so
that the discharge will be through piping extended to a location as
indicated. Each discharge pipe for hot water service shall be pitched
away from the valve seat.
2.10.12 Strainers
Basket and "Y" type strainers shall be the same size as the pipelines in
which they are installed. The strainer bodies shall be heavy and durable,
fabricated of cast iron, and shall have bottoms drilled and tapped with a
gate valve attached for blowdown purposes. Strainers shall be designed for
125 psig service and 250 degrees F. The bodies shall have arrows clearly
cast on the sides indicating the direction of flow. Each strainer shall be
equipped with an easily removable cover and sediment screen. The screen
shall be made of 22 gauge thick brass sheet with small perforations
numbering not less than 400/square inch to provide a net free area through
the basket of at least 3.30 times that of the entering pipe. The flow
shall be into the screen and out through the perforations.
Gauges shall conform to ASME B40.100 and shall be provided with throttling
type needle valve or a pulsation dampener and shutoff valve. Minimum dial
size shall be 3-1/2 inches. A pressure gauge shall be provided for each
boiler in a visible location on the boiler. Pressure gauges shall be
provided with readings in psi. Pressure gauges shall have an indicating
pressure range that is related to the operating pressure of the fluid in
accordance with the following table:
Operating Pressure (kPA) Pressure Range (kPA)
519-1030 0-1400
105-518 0-690
14-104 0-210 (retard)
Operating Pressure (psi) Pressure Range (psi)
76-150 0-200
16-75 0-100
2-15 0-30 (retard)
2.10.14 Thermometers
Thermometers shall be provided with wells and separable corrosion-resistant

steel sockets. Mercury shall not be used in thermometers. Thermometers
for inlet water and outlet water for each hot water boiler shall be
provided in a visible location on the boiler. Thermometers shall have
brass, malleable iron, or aluminum alloy case and frame, clear protective
face, permanently stabilized glass tube with indicating-fluid column, white
face, black numbers, and a minimum 9 inch scale. The operating range of
the thermometers shall be 32-212 degrees F. The thermometers shall be
provided with readings in degrees F.
2.10.15 Air Vents
2.10.15.1 Manual Air Vents
Manual air vents shall be brass or bronze valves or cocks suitable for the
pressure rating of the piping system and furnished with threaded plugs or
caps.
2.10.15.2 Automatic Air Vents
Automatic air vents shall be 3/4 inch quick-venting float and vacuum air
valves. Each air vent valve shall have a large port permitting the
expulsion of the air without developing excessive back pressure, a
noncollapsible metal float which will close the valve and prevent the loss
of water from the system, an air seal that will effectively close and
prevent the re-entry of air into the system when subatmospheric pressures
prevail therein, and a thermostatic member that will close the port against
the passage of steam from the system. The name of the manufacturer shall
be clearly stamped on the outside of each valve. The air vent valve shall
be suitable for the pressure rating of the piping system.
2.11 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
Electric motor-driven equipment shall be provided complete with motors,
motor starters, and necessary control devices. Electrical equipment, motor

control devices, motor efficiencies and wiring shall be as specified in
Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Motors which are not an
integral part of a packaged boiler and which are integral in size shall be
the premium efficiency type in accordance with NEMA MG 1. Motors which are
an integral part of the packaged boiler shall be the highest efficiency
available by the manufacturer of the packaged boiler. Motor starters shall
be provided complete with properly sized thermal overload protections and
other appurtenances necessary for the motor control specified. Starters
shall be furnished in general purpose enclosures. Manual or automatic
control and protective or signal devices required for the operation
specified and any control wiring required for controls and devices but not
shown shall be provided.
2.11.1 Motor Ratings
Motors shall be suitable for the voltage and frequency provided. Motors
1/2 hp and larger shall be three-phase, unless otherwise indicated. Motors
shall be of sufficient capacity to drive the equipment at the specified
capacity without exceeding the nameplate rating on the motor.
2.11.2 Motor Controls
Motor controllers shall be provided complete with properly sized thermal

overload protection. Manual or automatic control and protective or signal
devices required for the operation specified and any wiring required to
such devices shall be provided. Where two-speed or variable-speed motors
are indicated, solid-state variable-speed controllers may be provided to
accomplish the same function. Solid state variable speed controllers shall
be utilized for fractional through 10 hp ratings. Adjustable frequency
drives shall be used for larger motors.
2.12 INSULATION
Shop and field-applied insulation shall be as specified in Section 23 07 00

2.13 TOOLS
Special tools shall be furnished as provided by boiler manufacturer.

Special tools shall include uncommon tools necessary for the operation and
maintenance of boilers, burners, pumps, fans, controls, meters, special
piping systems, and other equipment. Small hand tools shall be furnished
within a suitable cabinet, mounted where directed.
2.14 BOILER WATER TREATMENT-Also Refer to Section 23 25 00

2.14.1 Chemical Shot Feeder
A shot feeder shall be provided as indicated. Size and capacity of feeder

shall be based upon local requirements and water analysis. The feeder
shall be furnished with an air vent, gauge glass, funnel, valves, fittings,
and piping.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
After becoming familiar with details of the work, verify dimensions in the
field, and advise the Contracting Officer of any discrepancy before
performing any work or ordering any materials.
3.2 ERECTION OF BOILER AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT
Boiler and auxiliary equipment shall be installed in accordance with

manufacturer's written instructions. Proper provision shall be made for
expansion and contraction between boiler foundation and floor. This joint
shall be packed with suitable nonasbestos rope and filled with suitable
compound that will not become soft at a temperature of 100 degrees F.
Boilers and firing equipment shall be supported from the foundations by
structural steel completely independent of all brickwork. Boiler supports
shall permit free expansion and contraction of each portion of the boiler
without placing undue stress on any part of the boiler or setting. Boiler
breeching shall be as indicated with full provision for expansion and
contraction between all interconnected components.
3.3 PIPING INSTALLATION
Unless otherwise specified, nonboiler external pipe and fittings shall

conform to the requirements of ASME B31.1. Pipe installed shall be cut
accurately to suit field conditions, shall be installed without springing
or forcing, and shall properly clear windows, doors, and other openings.
Cutting or other weakening of the building structure to facilitate piping
installation will not be permitted. Pipes shall be free of burrs, oil,
grease and other foreign material and shall be installed to permit free
expansion and contraction without damaging the building structure, pipe,
pipe joints, or pipe supports. Changes in direction shall be made with
fittings, except that bending of pipe 4 inches and smaller will be
permitted provided a pipe bender is used and wide sweep bends are formed.
The centerline radius of bends shall not be less than 6 diameters of the
pipe. Bent pipe showing kinks, wrinkles, flattening, or other
malformations will not be accepted. Vent pipes shall be carried through
the roof as directed and shall be properly flashed. Unless otherwise
indicated, horizontal supply mains shall pitch down in the direction of
flow with a grade of not less than 1 inch in 40 feet. Open ends of
pipelines and equipment shall be properly capped or plugged during
installation to keep dirt or other foreign materials out of the systems.
Pipe not otherwise specified shall be uncoated. Unless otherwise specified
or shown, final connections to equipment shall be made with malleable-iron
unions for steel pipe 2-1/2 inches or less in diameter and with flanges for
pipe 3 inches or more in diameter. Unions for copper pipe or tubing shall
be brass or bronze. Reducing fittings shall be used for changes in pipe
sizes. In horizontal hot water lines, reducing fittings shall be eccentric
type to maintain the top of the lines at the same level to prevent air
binding.
3.3.1 Hot Water Piping and Fittings
Pipe shall be black steel or copper tubing. Fittings for steel piping
shall be black malleable iron or cast iron to suit piping. Fittings
adjacent to valves shall suit valve material. Grooved mechanical fittings
will not be allowed for water temperatures above 230 degrees F.
3.3.2 Vent Piping and Fittings
Vent piping shall be black steel. Fittings shall be black malleable iron
or cast iron to suit piping.
3.3.3 Gauge Piping
Piping shall be copper tubing.
3.3.4 Joints
Joints between sections of steel pipe and between steel pipe and fittings
shall be threaded, grooved, flanged or welded as indicated or specified.
Except as otherwise specified, fittings 1 inch and smaller shall be
threaded; fittings 1-1/4 inches and up to but not including 3 inches shall
be either threaded, grooved, or welded; and fittings 3 inches and larger
shall be either flanged, grooved, or welded. Pipe and fittings 1-1/4 inches
and larger installed in inaccessible conduit or trenches beneath concrete
floor slabs shall be welded. Connections to equipment shall be made with
black malleable-iron unions for pipe 2-1/2 inches or smaller in diameter
and with flanges for pipe 3 inchesinches or larger in diameter. Joints
between sections of copper tubing or pipe shall be flared, soldered, or
brazed.
3.3.4.1 Threaded Joints
Threaded joints shall be made with tapered threads properly cut and shall
be made perfectly tight with a stiff mixture of graphite and oil or with
polytetrafluoroethylene tape applied to the male threads only and in no
case to the fittings.
3.3.4.2 Welded Joints
Welded joints shall be in accordance with paragraph GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

unless otherwise specified. Changes in direction of piping shall be made
with welding fittings only; mitering or notching pipe to form elbows and
tees or other similar type construction will not be permitted. Branch
connections may be made with either welding tees or forged branch outlet
fittings, either being acceptable without size limitation. Branch outlet
fittings, where used, shall be forged, flared for improved flow
characteristics where attached to the run, reinforced against external
strains, and designed to withstand full pipe bursting strength. Socket
weld joints shall be assembled so that the space between the end of the
pipe and the bottom of the socket is no less than 1/16 inch and no more than
1/8 inch.
3.3.4.3 Grooved Mechanical Joints
Grooved mechanical joints may be provided for hot water systems in lieu of
unions, welded, flanged, or screwed piping connections in low temperature
hot water systems where the temperature of the circulating medium does not
exceed 230 degrees F. Grooves shall be prepared according to the coupling
manufacturer's instructions. Pipe and groove dimensions shall comply with
the tolerances specified by the coupling manufacturer. The diameter of
grooves made in the field shall be measured using a "go/no-go" gauge,
vernier or dial caliper, narrow-land micrometer or other method
specifically approved by the coupling manufacturer for the intended
application. Groove width and dimension of groove from end of pipe shall
be measured and recorded for each change in grooving tool setup to verify
compliance with coupling manufacturer's tolerances. Grooved joints shall
not be used in concealed locations. Mechanical joints shall use rigid
mechanical pipe couplings, except at equipment connections. At equipment
connections, flexible couplings may be used. Coupling shall be of the
bolted type for use with grooved end pipes, fittings, valves, and
strainers. Couplings shall be self-centering and shall engage in a

watertight couple.
3.3.4.4 Flared and Brazed Copper Pipe and Tubing
Tubing shall be cut square, and burrs shall be removed. Both inside of
fittings and outside of tubing shall be cleaned thoroughly with sand cloth
or steel wire brush before brazing. Annealing of fittings and hard-drawn
tubing shall not occur when making connections. Installation shall be made
in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Mitering of joints
for elbows and notching of straight runs of pipe for tees will not be
permitted. Brazed joints shall be made in conformance with AWS B2.2 and
CDA A4015 with flux. Copper-to-copper joints shall include the use of
copper-phosphorous or copper-phosphorous-silver brazing metal without
flux. Brazing of dissimilar metals (copper to bronze or brass) shall
include the use of flux with either a copper-phosphorous,
copper-phosphorous-silver or a silver brazing filler metal. Joints for
flared fittings shall be of the compression pattern. Swing joints or
offsets shall be provided in all branch connections, mains, and risers to
provide for expansion and contraction forces without undue stress to the
fittings or to short lengths of pipe or tubing. Flared or brazed copper
tubing to pipe adapters shall be provided where necessary for joining
threaded pipe to copper tubing.
3.3.4.5 Soldered Joints
Soldered joints shall be made with flux and are only acceptable for lines 2
inches and smaller. Soldered joints shall conform to ASME B31.5 and
CDA A4015.
3.3.4.6 Copper Tube Extracted Joint
An extruded mechanical tee joint may be made in copper tube. Joint shall
be produced with an appropriate tool by drilling a pilot hole and drawing
out the tube surface to form a collar having a minimum height of three
times the thickness of the tube wall. To prevent the branch tube from
being inserted beyond the depth of the extracted joint, dimpled depth stops
shall be provided. The branch tube shall be notched for proper penetration
into fitting to assure a free flow joint. Extracted joints shall be brazed
using a copper phosphorous classification brazing filler metal. Soldered
joints will not be permitted.
3.3.5 Flanges and Unions
Flanges shall be faced true, provided with 1/16 inch thick gaskets, and
made square and tight. Where steel flanges mate with cast-iron flanged
fittings, valves, or equipment, they shall be provided with flat faces and
full face gaskets. Union or flange joints shall be provided in each line
immediately preceding the connection to each piece of equipment or material
requiring maintenance such as coils, pumps, control valves, and other
similar items. Dielectric pipe unions shall be provided between ferrous
and nonferrous piping to prevent galvanic corrosion. The dielectric unions
shall have metal connections on both ends. The ends shall be threaded,
flanged, or brazed to match adjacent piping. The metal parts of the union
shall be separated so that the electrical current is below 1 percent of the
galvanic current which would exist upon metal-to-metal contact. Gaskets,
flanges, and unions shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations.
3.3.6 Branch Connections
3.3.6.1 Branch Connections for Hot Water Systems
Branches from the main shall pitch up or down as shown to prevent air
entrapment. Connections shall ensure unrestricted circulation, eliminate
air pockets, and permit complete drainage of the system. Branches shall
pitch with a grade of not less than 1 inch in 10 feet. When indicated,
special flow fittings shall be installed on the mains to bypass portions of
the water through each radiator. Special flow fittings shall be standard
catalog products and shall be installed as recommended by the manufacturer.
3.3.7 Flared, Brazed, and Soldered Copper Pipe and Tubing
Copper tubing shall be flared, brazed, or soldered. Tubing shall be cut

square, and burrs shall be removed. Both inside of fittings and outside of
tubing shall be cleaned thoroughly with sand cloth or steel wire brush
before brazing. Annealing of fittings and hard-drawn tubing shall not
occur when making connections. Installation shall be made in accordance
with the manufacturer's recommendations. Mitering of joints for elbows and
notching of straight runs of pipe for tees will not be permitted. Joints
for flared fittings shall be of the compression pattern. Swing joints or
offsets shall be provided on branch connections, mains, and risers to
provide for expansion and contraction forces without undue stress to the
fittings or to short lengths of pipe or tubing. Pipe adapters shall be
provided where necessary for joining threaded pipe to copper tubing.
Brazed joints shall be made in conformance with CDA A4015.
Copper-to-copper joints shall include the use of copper-phosphorous or
copper-phosphorous-silver brazing metal without flux. Brazing of
dissimilar metals (copper to bronze or brass) shall include the use of flux
with either a copper-phosphorous, copper-phosphorous-silver, or a silver
brazing filler metal. Soldered joints shall be made with flux and are only
acceptable for lines 2 inches or smaller. Soldered joints shall conform to
ASME B31.5 and shall be in accordance with CDA A4015.
3.3.8 Copper Tube Extracted Joint
An extracted mechanical tee joint may be made in copper tube. Joint shall
be produced with an appropriate tool by drilling a pilot hole and drawing
out the tube surface to form a collar having a minimum height of three
times the thickness of the tube wall. To prevent the branch tube from
being inserted beyond the depth of the extracted joint, dimpled depth stops
shall be provided. The branch tube shall be notched for proper penetration
into fitting to assure a free flow joint. Extracted joints shall be brazed
using a copper phosphorous classification brazing filler metal. Soldered
joints will not be permitted.
3.3.9 Supports
Hangers used to support piping 2 inches and larger shall be fabricated to

permit adequate adjustment after erection while still supporting the load.
Pipe guides and anchors shall be installed to keep pipes in accurate
alignment, to direct the expansion movement, and to prevent buckling,
swaying, and undue strain. Piping subjected to vertical movement when
operating temperatures exceed ambient temperatures shall be supported by
variable spring hangers and supports or by constant support hangers.
Threaded rods which are used for support shall not be formed or bent.
Supports shall not be attached to the underside of concrete filled floors
or concrete roof decks unless approved by the Contracting Officer.
3.3.9.1 Seismic Requirements for Supports and Structural Bracing
loads as specified in Sections 13 48 00 SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR
MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT and 13 48 00.00 10 SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR
MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT as shown on the drawings. Structural steel required
for reinforcement to properly support piping, headers, and equipment, but
not shown, shall be provided in this section. Material used for supports
shall be as specified in Section 05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL.
3.3.9.2 Pipe Hangers, Inserts, and Supports
Pipe hangers, inserts, and supports shall conform to MSS SP-58 and MSS SP-69,
a. Types 5, 12, and 26 shall not be used.
b. Type 3 shall not be used on insulated pipe which has a vapor

barrier. Type 3 may be used on insulated pipe that does not have a
vapor barrier if clamped directly to the pipe, if the clamp bottom does
not extend through the insulation, and if the top clamp attachment does
not contact the insulation during pipe movement.
c. Type 18 inserts shall be secured to concrete forms before concrete

is placed. Continuous inserts which allow more adjustment may be used
if they otherwise meet the requirements for Type 18 inserts.
d. Type 19 and 23 C-clamps shall be torqued in accordance with

MSS SP-69 and have both locknuts and retaining devices furnished by the
manufacturer. Field fabricated C-clamp bodies or retaining devices are
not acceptable.
e. Type 20 attachments used on angles and channels shall be furnished

with an added malleable-iron heel plate or adapter.
f. Type 24 may be used only on trapeze hanger systems or on fabricated

frames.
g. Horizontal pipe supports shall be spaced as specified in MSS SP-69

and a support shall be installed not over 1 foot from the pipe fitting
joint at each change in direction of the piping. Pipe supports shall
be spaced not over 5 feet apart at valves.
h. Vertical pipe shall be supported at each floor, except at

slab-on-grade, and at intervals of not more than 15 feet, not more than
8 feet from end of risers, and at vent terminations.
i. Type 35 guides using steel, reinforced polytetrafluoroethylene

(PTFE) or graphite slides shall be provided where required to allow
longitudinal pipe movement. Lateral restraints shall be provided as
required. Slide materials shall be suitable for the system operating
temperatures, atmospheric conditions, and bearing loads encountered.
(1) Where steel slides do not require provisions for restraint of

lateral movement, an alternate guide method may be used. On piping
4 inches and larger, a Type 39 saddle may be welded to the pipe
and freely rested on a steel plate. On piping under 4 inches, a
Type 40 protection shield may be attached to the pipe or
insulation and freely rested on a steel slide plate.
(2) Where there are high system temperatures and welding to

piping is not desirable, the Type 35 guide shall include a pipe
cradle welded to the guide structure and strapped securely to the
pipe. The pipe shall be separated from the slide material by at
least 4 inches or by an amount adequate for the insulation,
whichever is greater.
j. Except for Type 3, pipe hangers on horizontal insulated pipe shall

be the size of the outside diameter of the insulation.
k. Piping in trenches shall be supported as indicated.
l. Structural steel attachments and brackets required to support

piping, headers, and equipment, but not shown, shall be provided under
this section. Material and installation shall be as specified under
Section 05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL. Pipe hanger loads suspended from
steel joist between panel points shall not exceed 50 pounds. Loads
exceeding 50 pounds shall be suspended from panel points.
3.3.9.3 Multiple Pipe Runs
In the support of multiple pipe runs on a common base member, a clip or

clamp shall be used where each pipe crosses the base support member.
Spacing of the base support member shall not exceed the hanger and support
spacing required for any individual pipe in the multiple pipe run. The
clips or clamps shall be rigidly attached to the common base member. A
clearance of 1/8 inch shall be provided between the pipe insulation and the
clip or clamp for piping which may be subjected to thermal expansion.
3.3.10 Anchors
Anchors shall be provided where necessary to localize expansion or to

prevent undue strain on piping. Anchors shall consist of heavy steel
collars with lugs and bolts for clamping and attaching anchor braces,
unless otherwise indicated. Anchor braces shall be installed in the most
effective manner to secure the desired results, using turnbuckles where
required. Supports, anchors, or stays shall not be attached where they
will injure the structure or adjacent construction during installation or
by the weight of expansion of the pipeline.
3.3.11 Valves
Valves shall be installed where indicated, specified, and required for

functioning and servicing of the systems. Valves shall be safely
accessible. Swing check valves shall be installed upright in horizontal
lines and in vertical lines only when flow is in the upward direction.
Gate and globe valves shall be installed with stems horizontal or above.
Valves to be brazed shall be disassembled prior to brazing and all packing
removed. After brazing, the valves shall be allowed to cool before
reassembling.
3.3.12 Pipe Sleeves
Pipe passing through concrete or masonry walls or concrete floors or roofs

shall be provided with pipe sleeves fitted into place at the time of
construction. A waterproofing clamping flange shall be installed as
indicated where membranes are involved. Sleeves shall not be installed in
structural members except where indicated or approved. Rectangular and

square openings shall be as detailed. Each sleeve shall extend through its
respective wall, floor, or roof. Sleeves through walls shall be cut flush
with wall surface. Sleeves through floors shall be cut flush with floor
surface . Sleeves through roofs shall extend above the top surface of roof
at least 6 inches for proper flashing or finishing. Unless otherwise
indicated, sleeves shall be sized to provide a minimum clearance of 1/4 inch
between bare pipe and sleeves or between jacket over insulation and
sleeves. Sleeves in waterproofing membrane floors, bearing walls, and wet
areas shall be galvanized steel pipe or cast-iron pipe. Sleeves in
nonbearing walls, floors, or ceilings may be galvanized steel pipe,
cast-iron pipe, or galvanized sheet metal with lock-type longitudinal
seam. Except in pipe chases or interior walls, the annular space between
pipe and sleeve or between jacket over insulation and sleeve in nonfire
rated walls shall be sealed as indicated and specified in Section 07 92 00
JOINT SEALANTS. Metal jackets shall be provided over insulation passing
through exterior walls, firewalls, fire partitions, floors, or roofs.
a. Metal jackets shall not be thinner than 0.006 inch thick aluminum,
if corrugated, and 0.016 inch thick aluminum, if smooth.
b. Metal jackets shall be secured with aluminum or stainless steel

bands not less than 3/8 inch wide and not more than 8 inches apart.
When penetrating roofs and before fitting the metal jacket into place, a
1/2 inch wide strip of sealant shall be run vertically along the
inside of the longitudinal joint of the metal jacket from a point below
the backup material to a minimum height of 36 inches above the roof.
If the pipe turns from vertical to horizontal, the sealant strip shall
be run to a point just beyond the first elbow. When penetrating
waterproofing membrane for floors, the metal jacket shall extend from a
point below the back-up material to a minimum distance of 2 inches
above the flashing. For other areas, the metal jacket shall extend
from a point below the backup material to a point 12 inches above
material to a minimum distance of 2 inches above the flashing. For
other areas, the metal jacket shall extend from a point below the
backup material to a point 12 inches above the floor; when passing
through walls above grade, the jacket shall extend at least 4 inches
beyond each side of the wall.
3.3.12.1 Pipes Passing Through Waterproofing Membranes
In addition to the pipe sleeves referred to above, pipes passing through

waterproofing membranes shall be provided with a 4 pound lead flashing or a
16 ounce copper flashing, each within an integral skirt or flange.
Flashing shall be suitably formed, and the skirt or flange shall extend not
less than 8 inches from the pipe and shall set over the membrane in a
troweled coating of bituminous cement. The flashing shall extend above the
roof or floor a minimum of 10 inches. The annular space between the
flashing and the bare pipe or between the flashing and the
metal-jacket-covered insulation shall be sealed as indicated. Pipes up to
and including 10 inches in diameter which pass through waterproofing
membrane may be installed through a cast-iron sleeve with caulking recess,
anchor lugs, flashing clamp device, and pressure ring with brass bolts.
Waterproofing membrane shall be clamped into place and sealant shall be
placed in the caulking recess.
3.3.12.2 Optional Modular Mechanical Sealing Assembly
At the option of the Contractor, a modular mechanical type sealing assembly
may be installed in the annular space between the sleeve and conduit or
pipe in lieu of a waterproofing clamping flange and caulking and sealing
specified above. The seals shall include interlocking synthetic rubber
links shaped to continuously fill the annular space between the
pipe/conduit and sleeve with corrosion-protected carbon steel bolts, nuts,
and pressure plates. The links shall be loosely assembled with bolts to
form a continuous rubber belt around the pipe with a pressure plate under
each bolt head and each nut. After the seal assembly is properly
positioned in the sleeve, tightening of the bolt shall cause the rubber
sealing elements to expand and provide a watertight seal between the
pipe/conduit and the sleeve. Each seal assembly shall be sized as
recommended by the manufacturer to fit the pipe/conduit and sleeve involved.
3.3.12.3 Optional Counterflashing
As alternates to caulking and sealing the annular space between the pipe
and flashing or metal-jacket-covered insulation and flashing,
counterflashing may consist of standard roof coupling for threaded pipe up
to 6 inches in diameter, lead flashing sleeve for dry vents with the sleeve
turned down into the pipe to form a waterproof joint, or a tack-welded or
banded-metal rain shield around the pipe, sealed as indicated.
3.3.12.4 Fire Seal
Where pipes pass through firewalls, fire partitions, or floors, a fire seal
shall be provided as specified in Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING.
3.3.13 Balancing Valves
Balancing valves shall be installed as indicated.
3.3.14 Thermometer Wells
A thermometer well shall be provided in each return line for each circuit
in multicircuit systems.
3.3.15 Air Vents
Air vents shall be installed where shown or directed. Air vents shall be
installed in piping at all system high points. The vent shall remain open
until water rises in the tank or pipe to a predetermined level at which
time it shall close tight. An overflow pipe from the vent shall be run to
a point designated by the Contracting Officer's representative. The inlet
to the air vent shall have a gate valve or ball valve.
3.3.16 Escutcheons
Escutcheons shall be provided at all finished surfaces where exposed

piping, bare or insulated, passes through floors, walls, or ceilings except
in boiler, utility, or equipment rooms. Escutcheons shall be fastened
securely to pipe or pipe covering and shall be chromium-plated iron or
chromium-plated brass, either one-piece or split pattern, held in place by
internal spring tension or setscrews.
3.3.17 Drains
A drain connection with a 1 inch gate valve or 3/4 inch hose bib shall be
installed at the lowest point in the return main near the boiler. In
addition, threaded drain connections with threaded cap or plug shall be
installed on the heat exchanger coil on each unit heater or unit ventilator
and wherever required for thorough draining of the system.
3.3.18 Strainer Blow-Down Piping
Strainer blow-down connections shall be fitted with a black steel blow-down

pipeline routed to an accessible location and provided with a blow-down
valve.
3.3.19 Direct Venting for Combustion Intake Air and Exhaust Air
The intake air and exhaust vents shall be installed in accordance with
NFPA 54 and boiler manufacturer's recommendations. The exhaust vent shall
be sloped 1/4 inch/ft toward the boiler's flue gas condensate collection
point.
3.4 GAS FUEL SYSTEM
Gas piping, fittings, valves, regulators, tests, cleaning, and adjustments

shall be in accordance with the Section 23 11 25 FACILITY GAS PIPING.
NFPA 54 shall be complied with unless otherwise specified. Burners,
pilots, and all accessories shall be listed in UL Gas&Oil Dir. The fuel
system shall be provided with a gas tight, manually operated, UL listed
stop valve at the gas-supply connections, a gas strainer, a pressure
regulator, pressure gauges, a burner-control valve, a safety shutoff valve
suitable for size of burner and sequence of operation, and other components
required for safe, efficient, and reliable operation as specified.
Approved permanent and ready facilities to permit periodic valve leakage
tests on the safety shutoff valve or valves shall be provided.
3.5 COLOR CODE MARKING AND FIELD PAINTING

PAINTS AND COATINGS. Ferrous metal not specified to be coated at the
factory shall be cleaned, prepared, and painted as specified in Section
09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS. Exposed pipe covering shall be painted as
specified in Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS. Aluminum sheath over
insulation shall not be painted.
3.6 MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES
Provide the services of a manufacturer's representative who is experienced

in the installation, adjustment, and operation of the equipment specified
to supervise the installing, adjusting, and testing of the equipment.
3.7 TEST OF BACKFLOW PREVENTION ASSEMBLIES
Backflow prevention assemblies shall be tested in accordance with Section

3.8 HEATING SYSTEM TESTS
Submit the Qualifications of the firms in charge of installation and

testing as specified in the Submittals paragraph. Before any covering is
installed on pipe or heating equipment, the entire heating system's piping,
fittings, and terminal heating units shall be hydrostatically tested and
proved tight at a pressure of 1-1/2 times the design working pressure, but
not less than 100 psi. Before pressurizing system for test, items or
equipment (e.g., vessels, pumps, instruments, controls, relief valves)
rated for pressures below the test pressure shall be blanked off or
replaced with spool pieces. Before balancing and final operating test,
test blanks and spool pieces shall be removed; and protected instruments
and equipment shall be reconnected. With equipment items protected, the
system shall be pressurized to test pressure. Pressure shall be held for a
period of time sufficient to inspect all welds, joints, and connections for
leaks, but not less than 2 hours. No loss of pressure will be allowed.
Leaks shall be repaired and repaired joints shall be retested. Repair
joints shall not be allowed under the floor for floor radiant heating
systems. If a leak occurs in tubing located under the floor in radiant
heating systems, the entire zone that is leaking shall be replaced. If any
repair is made above the floor for floor radiant heating systems, access
shall be provided for the installed joint. Caulking of joints shall not be
permitted. System shall be drained and after instruments and equipment are
reconnected, the system shall be refilled with service medium and maximum
operating pressure applied. The pressure shall be held while inspecting
these joints and connections for leaks. The leaks shall be repaired and
the repaired joints retested. Upon completion of hydrostatic tests and
before acceptance of the installation, balance the heating system in
accordance with Section 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING OF HVAC
SYSTEMS; and operating tests required to demonstrate satisfactory
functional and operational efficiency shall be performed. The operating
test shall cover a period of at least 24 hours for each system, and shall
include, as a minimum, the following specific information in a report,
together with conclusions as to the adequacy of the system:
a. Certification of balancing.
b. Time, date, and duration of test.
c. Outside and inside dry bulb temperatures.
d. Temperature of hot water supply leaving boiler.
e. Temperature of heating return water from system at boiler inlet.
f. Quantity of water feed to boiler.
g. Boiler make, type, serial number, design pressure, and rated

capacity.
h. Fuel burner make, model, and rated capacity; ammeter and voltmeter
readings for burner motor.
i. Circulating pump make, model, and rated capacity, and ammeter and
voltmeter readings for pump motor during operation.
j. Flue-gas temperature at boiler outlet.
k. Percent carbon dioxide in flue-gas.
l. Grade or type and calorific value of fuel.
m. Draft at boiler flue-gas exit.
n. Draft or pressure in furnace.
o. Quantity of water circulated.
p. Quantity of fuel consumed.
q. Stack emission pollutants concentration.
Indicating instruments shall be read at half-hour intervals unless

otherwise directed. Furnish all instruments, equipment, and personnel
required for the tests and balancing. Obtain necessary natural gas, water
and electricity as specified in the SPECIAL CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS
Operating tests shall demonstrate that fuel burners and combustion and
safety controls meet the requirements of NFPA 85
3.8.1 Boiler/Piping Test
At the conclusion of the 1 year period, the boiler and condensate piping
shall be inspected for problems due to corrosion and scale. If the boiler
is found not to conform to the manufacturer's recommendations, and the
water treatment company recommendations have been followed, the water
treatment company shall provide all chemicals and labor for cleaning or
repairing the equipment as required by the manufacturer's recommendations.
If corrosion is found within the condensate piping, proper repairs shall be
made by the water treatment company.
3.9 CLEANING
3.9.1 Boilers and Piping
After the hydrostatic tests have been made and before the system is
balanced and operating tests are performed, the boilers and feed water
piping shall be thoroughly cleaned by filling the system with a solution
consisting of either 1 pound of caustic soda or 1 pound of trisodium
phosphate per 50 gallons of water. The proper safety precautions shall be
observed in the handling and use of these chemicals. The water shall be
heated to approximately 150 degrees F and the solution circulated in the
system for a period of 48 hours. The system shall then be drained and
thoroughly flushed out with fresh water. Strainers and valves shall be
thoroughly cleaned. Prior to operating tests, air shall be removed from
all water systems by operating the air vents.
3.9.2 Heating Units
Inside space heating equipment, ducts, plenums, and casing shall be

thoroughly cleaned of debris and blown free of small particles of rubbish
and dust and then vacuum cleaned before installing outlet faces. Equipment
shall be wiped clean, with all traces of oil, dust, dirt, or paint spots
removed. Temporary filters shall be provided for fans that are operated
during construction, and new filters shall be installed after construction
dirt has been removed from the building, and the ducts, plenum, casings,
and other items specified have been vacuum cleaned. System shall be
maintained in this clean condition until final acceptance. Bearings shall
be properly lubricated with oil or grease as recommended by the
manufacturer. Belts shall be tightened to proper tension. Control valves
and other miscellaneous equipment requiring adjustment shall be adjusted to
setting indicated or directed. Fans shall be adjusted to the speed
indicated by the manufacturer to meet specified conditions.
3.10 FIELD TRAINING

Contracting Officer. The training period shall consist of a total of 4
functionally completed but prior to final acceptance tests. The field
instructions shall cover all of the items contained in the approved
operation and maintenance instructions, as well as demonstrations of
routine maintenance operations and boiler safety devices. Notify the
Contracting Officer at least 14 days prior to date of proposed conduction
of the training course.
SECTION 23 64 26
CHILLED, AND CONDENSER WATER PIPING SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

ASSE 1003 (2001; Errata, 2003) Performance

Requirements for Water Pressure Reducing
Valves
ASSE 1017 (2003; Errata 2004) Temperature Actuated

Mixing Valves for Hot Water Distribution
Systems
AWS A5.8/A5.8M (2004; Errata 2004) Specification for

Filler Metals for Brazing and Braze Welding
AWS BRH (2007) Brazing Handbook

Code - Steel

Allied Processes

Purpose (Inch)


Threaded


Flanges

Fittings


Classes 150 and 300
ASME B16.39 (1998; R 2006) Standard for Malleable Iron

and 300

ASME B31.9 (2008) Building Services Piping

Attachments
ASTM A 106/A 106M (2008) Standard Specification for Seamless

Carbon Steel Pipe for High-Temperature
Service


Hot-Dip Process

Welded and Seamless

for Ductile Iron Castings

the Hot-Dip Process
ASTM A 733 (2003) Standard Specification for Welded

and Seamless Carbon Steel and Austenitic
Stainless Steel Pipe Nipples


Metal
ASTM B 42 (2002e1) Standard Specification for

Seamless Copper Pipe, Standard Sizes


Copper Tube

Liquid and Paste Fluxes for Soldering of
Copper and Copper Alloy Tube

Copper Water Tube

ASTM D 3308 (2006) PTFE Resin Skived Tape
ASTM E 84 (2009a) Standard Test Method for Surface

Materials
ASTM F 1007 (1986; R 2007) Pipeline Expansion Joints

of the Packed Slip Type for Marine
Application
ASTM F 1120 (1987; R 2004) Standard Specification for

Circular Metallic Bellows Type Expansion
Joints for Piping Applications
ASTM F 1199 (1988; R 2004) Cast (All Temperatures and

Pressures) and Welded Pipe Line Strainers
(150 psig and 150 degrees F Maximum)
CSA AMERICA, INC. (CSA/AM)
CSA/AM Z21.22 (1999; Addenda A 2000, Addenda B 2001; R

Systems
CSA/ANSI Z21.22 (1999; Addenda A 2000; Addenda B 2001; R

Systems
EJMA Stds (2003) EJMA Standards
HYDRAULIC INSTITUTE (HI)
HI 1.1-1.2 (2000) Centrifugal Pump Nomenclature

INDUSTRY (MSS)

Flared Ends


Manufacture
MSS SP-67 (2002a; R 2004) Standard for Butterfly

Valves




Service

Threaded Ends

Valves



and Generators

NFPA 90A (2008; Errata 2009) Standard for the

Installation of Air Conditioning and
Ventilating Systems
Provide the water systems having the minimum service (design)

temperature-pressure rating indicated. Provision of the piping systems,
including materials, installation, workmanship, fabrication, assembly,
erection, examination, inspection, and testing shall be in accordance with
the required and advisory provisions of ASME B31.9 except as modified or
supplemented by this specification section or design drawings. This

specification section covers the water systems piping which is located
within, on, and adjacent to building(s) within the building(s) 5 foot line.
1.3 SUBMITTALS

that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following
SD-03 Product Data
Grooved Mechanical Connections For Steel
Grooved Mechanical Connections For Copper
Calibrated Balancing Valves
Pump Discharge Valve
Water Temperature Mixing Valve
Water Temperature Regulating Valves
Water Pressure Reducing Valve
Pressure Relief Valve
Combination Pressure and Temperature Relief Valves
Expansion Joints
Pumps
Combination Strainer and Pump Suction Diffuser
Expansion Tanks
Air Separator Tanks
SD-06 Test Reports
Piping welds NDE report
Pressure tests reports
Report shall be provided in bound 8-1/2 by 11 inch booklets. In

the reports, document all phases of the tests performed. Include
initial test summaries, all repairs/adjustments made, and the
final test results.
Condenser Water Quality Test Reports
Test reports, each month for a period of one year after project
completion, in bound 8-1/2 by 11 inch booklets. In the reports,
identify the chemical composition of the condenser water. Also

include the comparison of the manufacturer's recommended operating
conditions for the cooling tower and condenser in relation to the
condition of the condenser water. Document in the report any
required corrective action taken.
One-Year Inspection Report For Cooling Water
At the completion of one year of service, in bound 8-1/2 by 11

inch booklets. In the report, identify the condition of each
cooling tower and condenser. Include a comparison of the
condition of the cooling tower and condenser with the
manufacturer's recommended operating conditions. Identify all
actions taken by the Contractor and manufacturer to correct
deficiencies during the first year of service.
SD-07 Certificates
Employer's Record Documents (For Welding)
Welding Procedures and Qualifications
Certificates shall be submitted for the following items showing

conformance with the referenced standards contained in this
section.
Fittings
Unions
Flanges
Gaskets
Bolting
Lesson plan for the Instruction Course
Requirements for data packages are specified Section 01 78 23

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA,except as supplemented and modified
by this specification section.
Submit spare parts data for each different item of equipment

specified, with operation and maintenance data packages. Include
a complete list of parts and supplies, with current unit prices
and source of supply, a recommended spare parts list for 1 year of
operation, and a list of the parts recommended by the manufacturer
to be replaced on a routine basis.
Submit a list of qualified permanent service organizations with

operation and maintenance data packages. Include service
organization addresses and service area or expertise. The service
organizations shall be reasonably convenient to the equipment
installation and be able to render satisfactory service to the
equipment on a regular and emergency basis during the warranty
period of the contract.
A maintenance manual in bound 8-1/2 by 11 inch booklets listing

routine maintenance procedures, possible breakdowns and repairs,
and a trouble shooting guide.
Calibrated Balancing Valves, Data Package 3
Pump Discharge Valve, Data Package 2
Water Temperature Mixing Valve, Data Package 3
Water Temperature Regulating Valves, Data Package 3
Water Pressure Reducing Valve, Data Package 3
Pressure Relief Valve, Data Package 2
Combination Pressure and Temperature Relief Valves, Data Package 2
Expansion Joints, Data Package 2
Pumps, Data Package 3
Combination Strainer and Pump Suction Diffuser, Data Package 2
Expansion Tanks, Data Package 2
Air Separator Tanks, Data Package 2
1.4 MODIFICATIONS TO REFERENCES

1.4.1 Definitions
1.4.2 Administrative Interpretations


with other types of safety devices. Safety devices shall be installed so
that proper operation of equipment is not impaired.
Protect stored items from the weather, humidity and temperature variations,
dirt and dust, or other contaminants. Proper protection and care of all
material both before and during installation shall be the Contractor's
responsibility. Any materials found to be damaged shall be replaced at the
Contractor's expense. During installation, cap piping and similar openings
to keep out dirt and other foreign matter. Any porous materials found to
be contaminated with mold or mildew will be replaced at the Contractor's
expense. Non-porous materials found to be contaminated with mold or mildew
will be disinfected and cleaned prior to installation.
1.7.1 Verification of Dimensions
The Contractor shall become familiar with all details of the work, verify
all dimensions in the field, and advise the Contracting Officer of any
1.7.2 Drawings

all offsets, fittings, and accessories that may be required. The
Contractor shall carefully investigate the plumbing, fire protection,
electrical, structural and finish conditions that would affect the work to
be performed and shall arrange such work accordingly, furnishing required
offsets, fittings, and accessories to meet such conditions.
1.7.3 Accessibility

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 STANDARD COMMERCIAL PRODUCTS
Materials and equipment shall be standard products of a manufacturer

regularly engaged in the manufacturing of such products, which are of a
similar material, design and workmanship. The standard products shall have
been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to bid
opening.
The two year use shall include applications of equipment and materials
under similar circumstances and of similar size. The 2 years experience
shall be satisfactorily completed by a product which has been sold or is
offered for sale on the commercial market through advertisements,
manufacturer's catalogs, or brochures.
Products having less than a 2 year field service record shall be acceptable
if a certified record of satisfactory field operation, for not less than
6000 hours exclusive of the manufacturer's factory tests, can be shown.

System components shall be environmentally suitable for the indicated
locations.
The equipment items shall be supported by service organizations. These

2.2 STEEL PIPING
Water piping shall be steel pipe or copper tubing. Provide steel piping
with a ANSI/ASME Class 125 service rating, which for 150 degrees F, the
pressure rating is 175 psig.
2.2.1 Pipe
Steel pipe, conform to ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, Type E or S, Grades A
or B. Do not use Type F pipe.
2.2.2 Fittings and End Connections (Joints)
Piping and fittings 1 inch and smaller shall have threaded connections.
Piping and fittings larger than 1 inch and smaller than 3 inches shall have
either threaded, grooved, or welded connections. Piping and fittings 3
inches and larger shall have grooved, welded, or flanged connections. The
manufacturer of each fitting shall be permanently identified on the body of
the fitting in accordance with MSS SP-25.
2.2.2.1 Threaded Connections
Use threaded valves and pipe connections conforming to ASME B1.20.1. Used
threaded fitting conforming to ASME B16.3. Use threaded unions conforming
to ASME B16.39. Use threaded pipe nipples conforming to ASTM A 733.
2.2.2.2 Flanged Connections
Flanges shall conform to ASME B16.1, Class 150. Gaskets shall be

nonasbestos compressed material in accordance with ASME B16.21, 1/16 inch
thickness, full face or self-centering flat ring type. These gaskets shall
contain aramid fibers bonded with styrene butadeine rubber (SBR) or nitrile
butadeine rubber (NBR). Bolts, nuts, and bolt patterns shall conform to
ASME B16.1.
2.2.2.3 Welded Connections
Welded valves and pipe connections (both butt-welds and socket-welds types)
shall conform to ASME B31.9. Butt-welded fittings shall conform to
ASME B16.9. Socket-welded fittings shall conform to ASME B16.11. Welded
fittings shall be identified with the appropriate grade and marking symbol.
2.2.2.4 Grooved Mechanical Connections For Steel
Rigid grooved mechanical connections may only be used in serviceable

aboveground locations where the temperature of the circulating medium does
not exceed 230 degrees F. Flexible grooved connections shall be used only
as a flexible connector with grooved pipe system. Unless otherwise
specified, grooved piping components shall meet the corresponding criteria
specified for the similar welded, flanged, or threaded component specified
herein.
Each grooved mechanical joint shall be a system, including coupling

housing, gasket, fasteners, all furnished by the same manufacturer. Joint
installation shall be in compliance with joint manufacturer's written
instructions.
Use fitting and coupling houses of malleable iron conforming to

ASTM A 47/A 47M, Grade 32510; ductile iron conforming to ASTM A 536, Grade
65-45-12; or steel conforming ASTM A 106/A 106M, Grade B or ASTM A 53/A 53M.
Use gaskets of molded synthetic rubber with central cavity, pressure
responsive configuration and conforming to ASTM D 2000 Grade No.
2CA615A15B44F17Z for circulating medium up to 230 degrees F or Grade No.
M3BA610A15B44Z for circulating medium up to 200 degrees F. Grooved
mechanical connections shall conform to AWWA C606. Coupling nuts and bolts
shall be steel and shall conform to ASTM A 183. Pipe connections and
fittings shall be the product of the same manufacturer. Provide joint
installation be in compliance with joint manufacturer's written
instructions.
2.2.2.5 Dielectric Waterways and Flanges
Provide dielectric waterways with a water impervious insulation barrier

capable of limiting galvanic current to 1 percent of short circuit current
in a corresponding bimetallic joint. When dry, insulation barrier shall be
able to withstand a 600-volt breakdown test. Provide dielectric waterways
constructed of galvanized steel and have threaded end connections to match
connecting piping. Dielectric waterways shall be suitable for the required
operating pressures and temperatures. Provide dielectric flanges with the
same pressure ratings as standard flanges and provide complete electrical
isolation between connecting pipe and/or equipment as described herein for
dielectric waterways.
2.3 COPPER TUBING
Provide copper tubing and fittings with a ANSI/ASME Class 125 service
rating, which for 150 degrees F., the pressure rating is 175 psig.
2.3.1 Tube
Use copper tube conforming to ASTM B 88, Type L or M for aboveground

tubing, and Type K for buried tubing.
2.3.2 Fittings and End Connections (Solder and Flared Joints)
Wrought copper and bronze solder joint pressure fittings, including unions
ands flanges, shall conform to ASME B16.22 and ASTM B 75. Provide adapters
as required. Cast copper alloy solder-joint pressure fittings , including
unions and flanges, shall conform to ASME B16.18. Cast copper alloy
fittings for flared copper tube shall conform to ASME B16.26 and ASTM B 62.
ASTM B 42 copper pipe nipples with threaded end connections shall conform
to ASTM B 42.
Copper tubing of sizes larger than 4 inches shall have brazed joints.Brass
or bronze adapters for brazed tubing may be used for connecting tubing to
flanges and to threaded ends of valves and equipment.
Extracted brazed tee joints may be used if produced with an acceptable tool
and installed in accordance with tool manufacturer's written procedures.
2.3.3 Grooved Mechanical Connections For Copper
Rigid grooved mechanical connections may only be used in serviceable

aboveground locations where the temperature of the circulating medium does
not exceed 230 degrees F. Flexible grooved connections shall be used only
as a flexible connector with grooved pipe system. Unless otherwise
specified, grooved piping components shall meet the corresponding criteria
specified for the similar welded, flanged, or threaded component specified
herein.
Each grooved mechanical joint shall be a system, including coupling

housing, gasket, fasteners, all furnished by the same manufacturer. Joint
installation shall be in compliance with joint manufacturer's written
instructions.
Grooved fitting and mechanical coupling housing shall be ductile iron

conforming to ASTM A 536. Provide gaskets for use in grooved joints shall
constructed of molded synthetic polymer of pressure responsive design and
Provide grooved joints in conformance with AWWA C606.
2.3.4 Solder
Provide solder in conformance with ASTM B 32, grade Sb5, tin-antimony

alloy. Solder flux shall be liquid or paste form, non-corrosive and
conform to ASTM B 813.
2.3.5 Brazing Filler Metal
Filler metal shall conform to AWS A5.8/A5.8M, Type BAg-5 with AWS Type 3
flux, except Type BCuP-5 or BCuP-6 may be used for brazing copper-to-copper
joints.
2.4 VALVES
Provide valves with a ANSI/ASME Class 125 service rating, which for 150
degrees F, the pressure rating is 175 psig.
Valves in sizes larger than 1 inch and used on steel pipe systems, may be
provided with rigid grooved mechanical joint ends. Such grooved end valves
shall be subject to the same requirements as rigid grooved mechanical
joints and fittings and, shall be furnished by the same manufacturer as the
grooved pipe joint and fitting system.
2.4.1 Gate Valve
Gate valves 2-1/2 inches and smaller shall conform to MSS SP-80 Class 125
and shall be bronze with wedge disc, rising stem and threaded, soldered, or
flanged ends. Gate valves 3 inches and larger shall conform to MSS SP-70,
Class 125, cast iron with bronze trim, outside screw and yoke, and flanged
or threaded ends.
2.4.2 Globe and Angle Valve
Globe and angle valves 2-1/2 inches and smaller shall conform to MSS SP-80,
Class 125. Globe and angle valves 3 inches and larger shall conform to
MSS SP-85, Class 125.
2.4.3 Check Valve
Check valves 2-1/2 inches and smaller shall conform to MSS SP-80. Check
valves 3 inches and larger shall conform to MSS SP-71, Class 125.
2.4.4 Butterfly Valve
Butterfly valves shall conform to MSS SP-67, Type 1 and shall be either the
wafer or lug type. Valves smaller than 8 inches shall have throttling
handles with a minimum of seven locking positions. Valves 8 inches and
larger shall have totally enclosed manual gear operators with adjustable
balance return stops and position indicators.
2.4.5 Plug Valve
Plug valves 2 inches and larger shall conform to MSS SP-78, have flanged or
threaded ends, and have cast iron bodies with bronze trim. Valves 2 inches
and smaller shall be bronze with NPT connections for black steel pipe and
brazed connections for copper tubing. Valve shall be lubricated,
non-lubricated, or tetrafluoroethylene resin-coated type. Valve shall be
resilient, double seated, trunnion mounted with tapered lift plug capable
of 2-way shutoff. Valve shall operate from fully open to fully closed by
rotation of the handwheel to lift and turn the plug. Valves 8 inches or
larger shall be provided with manual gear operators with position
indicators.
2.4.6 Ball Valve
Full port design. Ball valves 1/2 inch and larger shall conform to
MSS SP-72 or MSS SP-110 and shall be cast iron or bronze with threaded,
soldered, or flanged ends. Valves 8 inches or larger shall be provided
with manual gear operators with position indicators. Ball valves may be
provided in lieu of gate valves.
2.4.7 Square Head Cocks
Provide copper alloy or cast-iron body with copper alloy plugs, suitable
for 125 psig water working pressure.
2.4.8 Calibrated Balancing Valves
Copper alloy or cast iron body, copper alloy or stainless internal working
parts. Provide valve calibrated so that flow can be determined when the
temperature and pressure differential across valve is known. Valve shall
have an integral pointer which registers the degree of valve opening.
Valve shall function as a service valve when in fully closed position.
Valve shall be constructed with internal seals to prevent leakage and shall
be supplied with preformed insulation.
Provide valve bodies with tapped openings and pipe extensions with positive
shutoff valves outside of pipe insulation. The pipe extensions shall be
provided with quick connecting hose fittings for a portable differential
pressure meter connections to verify the pressure differential. Provide
metal tag on each valve showing the gallons per minute flow for each
differential pressure reading.
2.4.9 Pump Discharge Valve
Valve shall shall perform the functions of a nonslam check valve, a manual
balancing valve, and a shutoff. Valve shall be of cast iron or ductile

iron construction with bronze and/or stainless steel accessories. Provide
an integral pointer on the valve which registers the degree of valve
opening. Flow through the valve shall be manually adjustable from bubble
tight shutoff to full flow. Valves smaller than 2 inches shall have NPT
connections. Valves 2 inches and larger shall have flanged or grooved end
connections. Valve design shall allow the back seat for the stem to be
replaced in the field under full line pressure.
2.4.10 Water Temperature Mixing Valve
Valve, ASSE 1017 for water service.
2.4.11 Water Temperature Regulating Valves
Provide copper alloy body, direct acting, pilot operated, for the intended
service.
2.4.12 Water Pressure Reducing Valve
Valve, ASSE 1003 for water service, copper alloy body, automatic
re-seating, with test lever.
2.4.13 Pressure Relief Valve
Valve shall prevent excessive pressure in the piping system when the piping
system reaches its maximum heat buildup. Valve, CSA/AM Z21.22 and shall
have cast iron bodies with corrosion resistant internal working parts. The
discharge pipe from the relief valve shall be the size of the valve outlet
unless otherwise indicated.
2.4.14 Combination Pressure and Temperature Relief Valves
CSA/AM Z21.22, copper alloy body, automatic re-seating, test lever, and
discharge capacity based on AGA temperature steam rating.
2.4.15 Drain Valves
Valves, MSS SP-80 gate valves. Valve shall be manually-operated, 3/4 inch
pipe size and above with a threaded end connection. Provide valve with a
water hose nipple adapter. Freeze-proof type valves shall be provided in
installations exposed to freezing temperatures.
2.4.16 Air Venting Valves
Manually-operated general service type air venting valves, brass or bronze

valves that are furnished with threaded plugs or caps. Automatic type air
venting shall be the ball-float type with brass/bronze or brass bodies,
300 series corrosion-resistant steel float, linkage and removable seat.
Air venting valves on water coils shall have not less than 1/8 inch
threaded end connections. Air venting valves on water mains shall have not
less than 3/4 inch threaded end connections. Air venting valves on all
other applications shall have not less than 1/2 inch threaded end
connections.
2.4.17 Vacuum Relief Valves
CSA/ANSI Z21.22
2.5 PIPING ACCESSORIES
2.5.1 Strainer
Strainer, ASTM F 1199, except as modified and supplemented in this

specification. Strainer shall be the cleanable, basket or "Y" type, the
same size as the pipeline. Strainer bodies shall be fabricated of cast
iron with bottoms drilled, and tapped. Provide blowoff outlet with pipe
nipple, gate valve, and discharge pipe nipple. The bodies shall have
arrows clearly cast on the sides indicating the direction of flow.
Provide strainer with removable cover and sediment screen. The screen
shall be made of minimum 22 gauge brass sheet, monel, corrosion-resistant
steel, with small perforations numbering not less than 400 per square inch
to provide a net free area through the basket of at least 3.30 times that
of the entering pipe. The flow shall be into the screen and out through
the perforations.
2.5.2 Combination Strainer and Pump Suction Diffuser
Angle type body with removable strainer basket and internal straightening
vanes, a suction pipe support, and a blowdown outlet and plug. Strainer
shall be in accordance with ASTM F 1199, except as modified and
supplemented by this specification. Unit body shall have arrows clearly
cast on the sides indicating the direction of flow.
Strainer screen shall be made of minimum 22 gauge brass sheet, monel,

corrosion-resistant steel, with small perforations numbering not less than
400 per square inch to provide a net free area through the basket of at
least 3.30 times that of the entering pipe. Flow shall be into the screen
and out through the perforations. Provide an auxiliary disposable fine mesh
strainer which shall be removed 30 days after start-up. Provide warning
tag for operator indicating scheduled date for removal.
Casing shall have connection sizes to match pump suction and pipe sizes,
and be provided with adjustable support foot or support foot boss to
relieve piping strains at pump suction. Provide unit casing with blowdown
port and plug. Provide a magnetic insert to remove debris from system.
Provide flexible bronze or stainless steel piping connectors with single

braid. Equip flanged assemblies with limit bolts to restrict maximum
travel to the manufacturer's standard limits. Unless otherwise indicated,
the length of the flexible connectors shall be as recommended by the
manufacturer for the service intended. Internal sleeves or liners,
compatible with circulating medium, shall be provided when recommended by
the manufacturer. Provide covers to protect the bellows where indicated.
2.5.4 Pressure and Vacuum Gauges
Gauges, ASME B40.100 with throttling type needle valve or a pulsation

dampener and shut-off valve. Provide gauges with 4.5 inch dial, brass or
aluminum case, bronze tube, and siphon. Gauge shall have a minimum of with
a range from 0 psig to approximately 1.5 times the maximum system working
pressure. Each gauge range shall be selected so that at normal operating
pressure, the needle is within the middle-third of the range.
2.5.5 Temperature Gauges
Temperature gauges, shall be the industrial duty type and be provided for
the required temperature range. Provide gauges with fixed thread
connection, dial face gasketed within the case; and an accuracy within 2
percent of scale range. Gauges shall have Fahrenheit scale in 2 degree
graduations scale (black numbers) on a white face. The pointer shall be
adjustable. Rigid stem type temperature gauges shall be provided in
thermal wells located within 5 feet of the finished floor. Universal
adjustable angle type or remote element type temperature gauges shall be
provided in thermal wells located 5 to 7 feet above the finished floor or
in locations indicated. Remote element type temperature gauges shall be
provided in thermal wells located 7 feet above the finished floor or in
locations indicated.
2.5.5.1 Stem Cased-Glass
Stem cased-glass case shall be polished stainless steel or cast aluminum, 9

inches long, with clear acrylic lens, and non-mercury filled glass tube
with indicating-fluid column.
2.5.5.2 Bimetallic Dial
Bimetallic dial type case shall be not less than 3-1/2 inches, stainless
steel, and shall be hermetically sealed with clear acrylic lens.
Bimetallic element shall be silicone dampened and unit fitted with external
calibrator adjustment.
2.5.5.3 Liquid-, Solid-, and Vapor-Filled Dial
Liquid-, solid-, and vapor-filled dial type cases shall be not less than
3-1/2 inches, stainless steel or cast aluminum with clear acrylic lens.
Fill shall be nonmercury, suitable for encountered cross-ambients, and
connecting capillary tubing shall be double-braided bronze.
2.5.5.4 Thermal Well
Thermal well shall be identical size, 1/2 or 3/4 inch NPT connection, brass
or stainless steel. Where test wells are indicated, provide captive
plug-fitted type 1/2 inch NPT connection suitable for use with either
engraved stem or standard separable socket thermometer or thermostat.
Mercury shall not be used in thermometers. Extended neck thermal wells
shall be of sufficient length to clear insulation thickness by 1 inch.
2.5.6 Pipe Hangers, Inserts, and Supports
Pipe hangers, inserts, guides, and supports: to MSS SP-58 and MSS SP-69.
2.5.7 Escutcheons
Provide one piece or split hinge metal plates for piping entering floors,
walls, and ceilings in exposed spaces. Secure plates in place by internal
spring tension or set screws. Provide polished stainless steel plates or
chromium-plated finish on copper alloy plates in finished spaces. Provide
paint finish on metal plates in unfinished spaces.
2.5.8.1 Slip-Tube Type
Slip-tube expansion joints, ASTM F 1007, Class I or II. Joints shall be

provided with internally-externally alignment guides, injected semi-plastic
packing, and service outlets. End connections shall be flanged or beveled
for welding as indicated. Initial settings shall be made in accordance
with the manufacturer's recommendations to compensate for ambient
temperature at time of installation. Pipe alignment guides shall be
installed as recommended by the joint manufacturer.
2.5.8.2 Flexible Ball Type
Flexible ball expansion joints shall be capable of 360 degrees rotation

plus 15 degrees angular flex movement. Joints shall be constructed of
carbon steel with the exterior spherical surface of carbon steel balls
plated with a minimum 5 mils of hard chrome in accordance with EJMA Stds.
Joint end connections shall be threaded for piping 2 inches or smaller.
Joint end connections larger than 2 inches shall be grooved, flanged, or
beveled for welding. Provide joint with pressure-molded composition
gaskets suitable for continuous operation at twice design temperature.
2.5.8.3 Bellows Type
Bellows expansion type joints, ASTM F 1120 with Type 304 stainless steel
corrugated bellows, reinforced with equalizing rings, internal sleeves, and
external protective covers. Joint end connections shall be grooved,
flanged, or beveled for welding. Guiding of piping on both sides of
expansion joint shall be in accordance with the published recommendations
of the manufacturer of the expansion joint.
2.6 PUMPS
Pumps shall be the electrically driven, non-overloading, centrifugal type

which conform to HI 1.1-1.2. Pumps shall be selected at or within 5
percent of peak efficiency. Pump curve shall rise continuously from
maximum capacity to shutoff. Pump motor shall conform to NEMA MG 1, be
totally enclosed, and have sufficient horsepower for the service required.
Pump motor shall have the required capacity to prevent overloading with
pump operating at any point on its characteristic curve. Pump speed shall
not exceed 3,600 rpm, except where the pump head is less than 60 feet of
water, the pump speed shall not exceed 1,750 rpm. Pump motor shall be
equipped with an across-the-line magnetic controller in a NEMA 250, Type 1
enclosure with "START-STOP" switch in the cover.
2.6.1 Construction
Each pump casing shall be designed to withstand the discharge head

specified plus the static head on system plus 50 percent of the total, but
not less than 125 psig. Pump casing and bearing housing shall be close
grained cast iron. High points in the casing shall be provided with manual
air vents; low points shall be provided with drain plugs. Provide threaded
suction and discharge pressure gage tapping with square-head plugs.
Impeller shall be statically and dynamically balanced. Impeller, impeller

wearing rings, glands, casing wear rings, and shaft sleeve shall be
bronze. Shaft shall be carbon or alloy steel, turned and ground. Bearings
shall be ball-bearings, roller-bearings, or oil-lubricated bronze-sleeve
type bearings, and be efficiently sealed or isolated to prevent loss of oil

or entrance of dirt or water.
Pump and motor shall be mounted on a common cast iron base having lipped
edges and tapped drainage openings or structural steel base with lipped
edges or drain pan and tapped drainage openings.Pump shall be provided with
steel shaft coupling guard. Base-mounted pump, coupling guard, and motor
shall each be bolted to a fabricated steel base which shall have bolt holes
for securing base to supporting surface. Close-coupled pump shall be
provided with integrally cast or fabricated steel feet with bolt holes for
securing feet to supporting surface. Close- coupled pumps shall be provided
with drip pockets and tapped openings. Pump shall be accessible for
servicing without disturbing piping connections. Shaft seals shall be
mechanical-seals or stuffing-box type.
2.6.2 Mechanical Shaft Seals
Seals shall be single, inside mounted, end-face-elastomer bellows type with

stainless steel spring, brass or stainless steel seal head, carbon rotating
face, and tungsten carbide or ceramic sealing face. Glands shall be bronze
and of the water-flush design to provide lubrication flush across the face
of the seal. Bypass line from pump discharge to flush connection in gland
shall be provided, with filter or cyclone particle separator in line.
2.6.3 Stuffing-Box Type Seals
Stuffing box shall include minimum 4 rows of square, impregnated TFE

(Teflon) or graphite cord packing and a bronze split-lantern ring. Packing
gland shall be bronze interlocking split type.
2.7 EXPANSION TANKS
Tank shall be welded steel, constructed for, and tested to

pressure-temperature rating of 125 psi at 150 degrees F. Provide tanks
precharged to the minimum operating pressure. Tank shall have a
replaceable polypropylene or butyl lined diaphragm which keeps the air
charge separated from the water; shall be the captive air type.
Tanks shall accommodate expanded water of the system generated within the
normal operating temperature range, limiting this pressure increase at all
components in the system to the maximum allowable pressure at those
components. Each tank air chamber shall be fitted with a drain, fill, an
air charging valve, and system connections. Tank shall be supported by
steel legs or bases for vertical installation or steel saddles for
horizontal installations. The only air in the system shall be the
permanent sealed-in air cushion contained within the expansion tank.
2.8 AIR SEPARATOR TANKS
External air separation tank shall have an internal design constructed of

stainless steel and suitable for creating the required vortex and
subsequent air separation. Tank shall be steel, constructed for, and
tested to pressure-temperature rating of 125 psi at 150 degrees F. Tank
shall have tangential inlets and outlets connections, threaded for 2 inches
and smaller and flanged for sizes 2-1/2 inches and larger. Air released
from a tank shall be vented as indicated. Tank shall be provided with a
blow-down connection.
2.9 WATER TREATMENT SYSTEMS
When water treatment is specified, the use of chemical-treatment products

containing equivalent chromium (CPR) is prohibited. Reference
Specification 23 25 00 CHEMICAL TREATMENT OF WATER FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS.
2.10 ELECTRICAL WORK
Provide motors, controllers, integral disconnects, contactors, and controls

with their respective pieces of equipment, except controllers indicated as
part of motor control centers. Provide electrical equipment, including
motors and wiring, as specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION
SYSTEM. Manual or automatic control and protective or signal devices
required for the operation specified and control wiring required for
controls and devices specified, but not shown, shall be provided. For
packaged equipment, the manufacturer shall provide controllers including
the required monitors and timed restart.
Provide high efficiency type, single-phase, fractional-horsepower

alternating-current motors, including motors that are part of a system, in
accordance with NEMA MG 11.
Provide polyphase, squirrel-cage medium induction motors, including motors

that are part of a system, that meet the efficiency ratings for premium
efficiency motors in accordance with NEMA MG 1. Provide motors in
accordance with NEMA MG 1 and of sufficient size to drive the load at the
specified capacity without exceeding the nameplate rating of the motor.
Motors shall be rated for continuous duty with the enclosure specified.
Motor duty requirements shall allow for maximum frequency start-stop
operation and minimum encountered interval between start and stop. Motor
torque shall be capable of accelerating the connected load within 20
seconds with 80 percent of the rated voltage maintained at motor terminals
during one starting period. Provide motor starters complete with thermal
overload protection and other necessary appurtenances. Motor bearings
shall be fitted with grease supply fittings and grease relief to outside of
the enclosure.
Where two-speed or variable-speed motors are indicated, solid-state

variable-speed controllers may be provided to accomplish the same function.
Use solid-state variable-speed controllers for motors rated 10 hp or less
and adjustable frequency drives for larger motors. Provide variable
frequency drives for motors as specified in Section 26 29 23 VARIABLE
FREQUENCY DRIVE SYSTEMS UNDER 600 VOLTS.
2.11 PAINTING OF NEW EQUIPMENT
2.11.1 Factory Painting Systems
Manufacturer's standard factory painting systems may be provided. The

factory painting system applied will withstand 125 hours in a salt-spray
fog test, except that equipment located outdoors shall withstand 500 hours
in a salt-spray fog test.
Salt-spray fog test shall be in accordance with ASTM B 117, and for that
test, the acceptance criteria shall be as follows: immediately after

completion of the test, the paint shall show no signs of blistering,
wrinkling, or cracking, and no loss of 0.125 inch on either side of the
scratch mark. The film thickness of the factory painting system applied on
the equipment shall not be less than the film thickness used on the test
specimen.
If manufacturer's standard factory painting system is being proposed for

use on surfaces subject to temperatures above 120 degrees F, the factory
2.11.2 Shop Painting Systems for Metal Surfaces
Clean, retreat, prime and paint metal surfaces; except aluminum surfaces
metal.
Where hot-dip galvanized steel has been cut, resulting surfaces with no
galvanizing shall be coated with a zinc-rich coating conforming to
ASTM D 520, Type I.
a. Temperatures Less Than 120 Degrees F: Immediately after cleaning, the

metal surfaces subject to temperatures less than 120 degrees F shall
receive one coat of pretreatment primer applied to a minimum dry film
thickness of 0.3 mil, one coat of primer applied to a minimum dry film
thickness of one mil; and two coats of enamel applied to a minimum dry
film thickness of one mil per coat.
b. Temperatures Between 120 and 400 degrees F: Metal surfaces subject to

temperatures between 120 and 400 degrees F shall receive two coats of
400 degrees F heat-resisting enamel applied to a total minimum
thickness of 2 mils.
c. Temperatures Greater Than 400 degrees F: Metal surfaces subject to

temperatures greater than 400 degrees F shall receive two coats of 600
degrees F heat-resisting paint applied to a total minimum dry film
thickness of 2 mils.
2.12 FACTORY APPLIED INSULATION
Factory insulated items installed outdoors are not required to be

fire-rated. As a minimum, factory insulated items installed indoors shall
have a flame spread index no higher than 75 and a smoke developed index no
higher than 150. Factory insulated items (no jacket) installed indoors and
which are located in air plenums, in ceiling spaces, and in attic spaces
shall have a flame spread index no higher than 25 and a smoke developed
index no higher than 50. Flame spread and smoke developed indexes shall be
determined by ASTM E 84.
Insulation shall be tested in the same density and installed thickness as

the material to be used in the actual construction. Material supplied by a
manufacturer with a jacket shall be tested as a composite material.

Jackets, facings, and adhesives shall have a flame spread index no higher
than 25 and a smoke developed index no higher than 50 when tested in
2.13 NAMEPLATES
Major equipment including pumps, pump motors, expansion tanks, and air
separator tanks shall have the manufacturer's name, type or style, model or
serial number on a plate secured to the item of equipment. The nameplate
of the distributing agent will not be acceptable. Plates shall be durable
and legible throughout equipment life. . Plates shall be fixed in
prominent locations with nonferrous screws or bolts.
2.14 RELATED COMPONENTS/SERVICES
2.14.1 Drain and Make-Up Water Piping
Requirements for drain and make-up water piping and backflow preventer is
specified in Section 22 00 00 PLUMBING SYSTEMS.
2.14.2 Cathodic Protection
Requirements for cathodic protection systems is specified in Section

26 42 14.00 10 CATHODIC PROTECTION SYSTEM (SACRIFICIAL ANODE) .
2.14.3 Field Applied Insulation
Requirements for field applied insulation is specified in Section 23 07 00

Requirements for field installed insulation is specified in Section 23 07 00

THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS, except as supplemented and
modified by this specification section.
Requirements for painting of surfaces not otherwise specified, and finish

painting of items only primed at the factory, are specified in Section
09 90 00PAINTING, GENERAL.
2.14.5.1 Color Coding
Requirements for color coding for piping identification are specified in

Section 09 90 00 PAINTING AND COATINGS.
2.14.5.2 Color Coding For Hidden Piping
A color coding scheme for locating hidden piping shall be in accordance

with Section 22 00 00 PLUMBING, GENERAL PURPOSE.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
Cut pipe accurately to measurements established at the jobsite, and work

into place without springing or forcing, completely clearing all windows,
doors, and other openings. Cutting or other weakening of the building

structure to facilitate piping installation is not permitted without
written approval. Cut pipe or tubing square, remove burrs by reaming, and
fashion to permit free expansion and contraction without causing damage to
the building structure, pipe, joints, or hangers.
Notify the Contracting Officer in writing at least 15 calendar days prior

to the date the connections are required. Obtain approval before
interrupting service. Furnish materials required to make connections into
existing systems and perform excavating, backfilling, compacting, and other
incidental labor as required. Furnish labor and tools for making actual
connections to existing systems.
3.1.1 Welding
Provide welding work specified this section for piping systems in

conformance with ASME B31.9, as modified and supplemented by this
specification section and the accompanying drawings. The welding work
includes: qualification of welding procedures, welders, welding operators,
brazers, brazing operators, and nondestructive examination personnel;
maintenance of welding records, and examination methods for welds.
3.1.1.1 Employer's Record Documents (For Welding)
Submit for review and approval the following documentation. This

documentation and the subject qualifications shall be in compliance with
ASME B31.9.
a. List of qualified welding procedures that is proposed to be used to

provide the work specified in this specification section.
b. List of qualified welders, brazers, welding operators, and brazing

operators that are proposed to be used to provide the work specified in
this specification section.
c. List of qualified weld examination personnel that are proposed to be

used to provide the work specified in this specification section.
3.1.1.2 Welding Procedures and Qualifications
a. Specifications and Test Results: Submit copies of the welding

procedures specifications and procedure qualification test results for
each type of welding required. Approval of any procedure does not
relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for producing acceptable
welds. Submit this information on the forms printed in ASME BPVC SEC
IX or their equivalent.
b. Certification: Before assigning welders or welding operators to the

work, submit a list of qualified welders, together with data and
certification that each individual is performance qualified as
specified. Do not start welding work prior to submitting welder, and
welding operator qualifications. The certification shall state the
type of welding and positions for which each is qualified, the code and
procedure under which each is qualified, date qualified, and the firm
and individual certifying the qualification tests.
3.1.1.3 Examination of Piping Welds
Conduct non-destructive examinations (NDE) on piping welds and brazing and
verify the work meets the acceptance criteria specified in ASME B31.9. NDE
on piping welds covered by ASME B31.9 is visual inspection only. Submit a
piping welds NDE report meeting the requirements specified in ASME B31.9.
3.1.1.4 Welding Safety
Welding and cutting safety requirements shall be in accordance with

AWS Z49.1.
3.1.2 Directional Changes
Make changes in direction with fittings, except that bending of pipe 4

inches and smaller is permitted, provided a pipe bender is used and wide
weep bends are formed. Mitering or notching pipe or other similar
construction to form elbows or tees is not permitted. The centerline
radius of bends shall not be less than 6 diameters of the pipe. Bent pipe
showing kinks, wrinkles, flattening, or other malformations is not
acceptable.
3.1.3 Functional Requirements
Pitch horizontal supply mains down in the direction of flow as indicated.

The grade shall not be less than 1 inch in 40 feet. Reducing fittings
shall be used for changes in pipe sizes. Cap or plug open ends of
pipelines and equipment during installation to keep dirt or other foreign
materials out of the system.
Pipe not otherwise specified shall be uncoated. Connections to appliances

shall be made with malleable iron unions for steel pipe 2-1/2 inches or
less in diameter, and with flanges for pipe 3 inches and above in
diameter. Connections between ferrous and copper piping shall be
electrically isolated from each other with dielectric waterways or
flanges.
Piping located in air plenums shall conform to NFPA 90A requirements. Pipe
and fittings installed in inaccessible conduits or trenches under concrete
floor slabs shall be welded. Equipment and piping arrangements shall fit
into space allotted and allow adequate acceptable clearances for
installation, replacement, entry, servicing, and maintenance. Electric
isolation fittings shall be provided between dissimilar metals.
3.1.4 Fittings and End Connections
3.1.4.1 Threaded Connections
Threaded connections shall be made with tapered threads and made tight with
PTFE tape complying with ASTM D 3308 or equivalent thread-joint compound
applied to the male threads only. Not more than three threads shall show
after the joint is made.
3.1.4.2 Brazed Connections
Brazing, AWS BRH, except as modified herein. During brazing, the pipe and
fittings shall be filled with a pressure regulated inert gas, such as
nitrogen, to prevent the formation of scale. Before brazing copper joints,
both the outside of the tube and the inside of the fitting shall be cleaned
with a wire fitting brush until the entire joint surface is bright and
clean. Do not use brazing flux. Surplus brazing material shall be removed
at all joints. Steel tubing joints shall be made in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations. Piping shall be supported prior to brazing

and not be sprung or forced.
3.1.4.3 Welded Connections
Branch connections shall be made with welding tees or forged welding branch
outlets. Pipe shall be thoroughly cleaned of all scale and foreign matter
before the piping is assembled. During welding, the pipe and fittings
shall be filled with an inert gas, such as nitrogen, to prevent the
formation of scale. Beveling, alignment, heat treatment, and inspection of
weld shall conform to ASME B31.9. Weld defects shall be removed and
rewelded at no additional cost to the Government. Electrodes shall be
stored and dried in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M or as recommended by the
manufacturer. Electrodes that have been wetted or that have lost any of
their coating shall not be used.
3.1.4.4 Grooved Mechanical Connections
Prepare grooves in accordance with the coupling manufacturer's

instructions. Pipe and groove dimensions shall comply with the tolerances
specified by the coupling manufacturer. The diameter of grooves made in
the field shall be measured using a "go/no-go" gauge, vernier or dial
caliper, or narrow-land micrometer, or other method specifically approved
by the coupling manufacturer for the intended application. Groove width
and dimension of groove from end of pipe shall be measured and recorded for
each change in grooving tool setup to verify compliance with coupling
manufacturer's tolerances. Grooved joints shall not be used in concealed
locations, such as behind solid walls or ceilings, unless an access panel
is shown on the drawings for servicing or adjusting the joint.
3.1.4.5 Flared Connections
When flared connections are used, a suitable lubricant shall be used

between the back of the flare and the nut in order to avoid tearing the
flare while tightening the nut.
3.1.4.6 Flanges and Unions
Except where copper tubing is used, union or flanged joints shall be

provided in each line immediately preceding the connection to each piece of
equipment or material requiring maintenance such as coils, pumps, control
valves, and other similar items. Flanged joints shall be assembled square
end tight with matched flanges, gaskets, and bolts. Gaskets shall be
suitable for the intended application.
3.1.5 Valves
Isolation gate or ball valves shall be installed on each side of each piece
of equipment, at the midpoint of all looped mains, and at any other points
indicated or required for draining, isolating, or sectionalizing purpose.
Isolation valves may be omitted where balancing cocks are installed to
provide both balancing and isolation functions. Each valve except check
valves shall be identified. Valves in horizontal lines shall be installed
with stems horizontal or above.
3.1.6 Air Vents
Air vents shall be provided at all high points, on all water coils, and
where indicated to ensure adequate venting of the piping system.
3.1.7 Drains
Drains shall be provided at all low points and where indicated to ensure
complete drainage of the piping. Drains shall be accessible, and shall
consist of nipples and caps or plugged tees unless otherwise indicated.
Connectors shall be attached to components in strict accordance with the

latest printed instructions of the manufacturer to ensure a vapor tight
joint. Hangers, when required to suspend the connectors, shall be of the
type recommended by the flexible pipe connector manufacturer and shall be
provided at the intervals recommended.
3.1.9 Temperature Gauges
Temperature gauges shall be located on coolant supply and return piping at

each heat exchanger, on condenser water piping entering and leaving a
condenser, at each automatic temperature control device without an integral
thermometer, and where indicated or required for proper operation of
equipment. Thermal wells for insertion thermometers and thermostats shall
extend beyond thermal insulation surface not less than 1 inch.
3.1.10 Pipe Hangers, Inserts, and Supports
Pipe hangers, inserts, and supports shall conform to MSS SP-58 and MSS SP-69,
except as supplemented and modified in this specification section. Pipe
hanger types 5, 12, and 26 shall not be used. Hangers used to support
piping 2 inches and larger shall be fabricated to permit adequate
adjustment after erection while still supporting the load. Piping
subjected to vertical movement, when operating temperatures exceed ambient
temperatures, shall be supported by variable spring hangers and supports or
by constant support hangers.
3.1.10.1 Hangers
Type 3 shall not be used on insulated piping. Type 24 may be used only on
trapeze hanger systems or on fabricated frames.
3.1.10.2 Inserts
Type 18 inserts shall be secured to concrete forms before concrete is

placed. Continuous inserts which allow more adjustments may be used if
they otherwise meet the requirements for Type 18 inserts.
3.1.10.3 C-Clamps
Type 19 and 23 C-clamps shall be torqued per MSS SP-69 and have both
locknuts and retaining devices, furnished by the manufacturer.
Field-fabricated C-clamp bodies or retaining devices are not acceptable.
3.1.10.4 Angle Attachments
Type 20 attachments used on angles and channels shall be furnished with an

added malleable-iron heel plate or adapter.
3.1.10.5 Saddles and Shields
Where Type 39 saddle or Type 40 shield are permitted for a particular pipe
attachment application, the Type 39 saddle, connected to the pipe, shall be
used on all pipe 4 inches and larger when the temperature of the medium is
60 degrees F or higher. Type 40 shields shall be used on all piping less
than 4 inches and all piping 4 inches and larger carrying medium less than
60 degrees F. A high density insulation insert of cellular glass shall be
used under the Type 40 shield for piping 2 inches and larger.
3.1.10.6 Horizontal Pipe Supports
Horizontal pipe supports shall be spaced as specified in MSS SP-69 and a

support shall be installed not over 1 foot from the pipe fitting joint at
each change in direction of the piping. Pipe supports shall be spaced not
over 5 feet apart at valves. Pipe hanger loads suspended from steel joist
with hanger loads between panel points in excess of 50 pounds shall have
the excess hanger loads suspended from panel points.
3.1.10.7 Vertical Pipe Supports
Vertical pipe shall be supported at each floor, except at slab-on-grade,

and at intervals of not more than 15 feet, not more than 8 feet from end of
risers, and at vent terminations.
3.1.10.8 Pipe Guides
Type 35 guides using, steel, reinforced polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) or

graphite slides shall be provided where required to allow longitudinal pipe
movement. Lateral restraints shall be provided as required. Slide
materials shall be suitable for the system operating temperatures,
atmospheric conditions, and bearing loads encountered.
3.1.10.9 Steel Slides
Where steel slides do not require provisions for restraint of lateral

movement, an alternate guide method may be used. On piping 4 inches and
larger, a Type 39 saddle shall be used. On piping under 4 inches, a Type
40 protection shield may be attached to the pipe or insulation and freely
rest on a steel slide plate.
3.1.10.10 Multiple Pipe Runs
In the support of multiple pipe runs on a common base member, a clip or

clamp shall be used where each pipe crosses the base support member.
Spacing of the base support members shall not exceed the hanger and support
spacing required for an individual pipe in the multiple pipe run.
3.1.10.11 Seismic Requirements
loads as specified under Sections 13 48 00 SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR
MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT and 13 48 00.00 10 SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR
MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT as shown on the drawings. Structural steel required
for reinforcement to properly support piping, headers, and equipment but
not shown shall be provided under this section. Material used for support
shall be as specified under Section 05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL.
3.1.10.12 Structural Attachments
Attachment to building structure concrete and masonry shall be by cast-in

concrete inserts, built-in anchors, or masonry anchor devices. Inserts and
anchors shall be applied with a safety factor not less than 5. Supports
shall not be attached to metal decking. Supports shall not be attached to
the underside of concrete filled floors or concrete roof decks unless
approved by the Contracting Officer. Masonry anchors for overhead
applications shall be constructed of ferrous materials only. Structural
steel brackets required to support piping, headers, and equipment, but not
shown, shall be provided under this section.
3.1.11 Pipe Alignment Guides
Pipe alignment guides shall be provided where indicated for expansion

loops, offsets, and bends and as recommended by the manufacturer for
expansion joints, not to exceed 5 feet on each side of each expansion
joint, and in lines 4 inches or smaller not more than 2 feet on each side
of the joint.
3.1.12 Pipe Anchors
Anchors shall be provided where indicated. Unless indicated otherwise,

anchors shall comply with the requirements specified.Anchors shall consist
of heavy steel collars with lugs and bolts for clamping and attaching
anchor braces, unless otherwise indicated. Anchor braces shall be
installed in the most effective manner to secure the desired results using
turnbuckles where required.
Supports, anchors, or stays shall not be attached where they will injure
the structure or adjacent construction during installation or by the weight
of expansion of the pipeline. Where pipe and conduit penetrations of vapor
barrier sealed surfaces occur, these items shall be anchored immediately
adjacent to each penetrated surface, to provide essentially zero movement
within penetration seal.
3.1.13 Building Surface Penetrations
Sleeves shall not be installed in structural members except where indicated

or approved. Except as indicated otherwise piping sleeves shall comply
with requirements specified. Sleeves in nonload bearing surfaces shall be
galvanized sheet metal, conforming to ASTM A 653/A 653M, Coating Class G-90,
20 gauge. Sleeves in load bearing surfaces shall be uncoated carbon steel
pipe, conforming to ASTM A 53/A 53M, Standard weight. Sealants shall be
applied to moisture and oil-free surfaces and elastomers to not less than
1/2 inch depth. Sleeves shall not be installed in structural members.
3.1.13.1 Refrigerated Space
Refrigerated space building surface penetrations shall be fitted with

sleeves fabricated from hand-lay-up or helically wound, fibrous glass
reinforced polyester or epoxy resin with a minimum thickness equal to
equivalent size Schedule 40 steel pipe. Sleeves shall be constructed with
integral collar or cold side shall be fitted with a bonded slip-on flange
or extended collar.
In the case of masonry penetrations where sleeve is not cast-in, voids

shall be filled with latex mixed mortar cast to shape of sleeve and
flange/external collar type sleeve shall be assembled with butyl elastomer
vapor barrier sealant through penetration to cold side surface vapor

barrier overlap and fastened to surface with masonry anchors.
Integral cast-in collar type sleeve shall be flashed with not less than 4
inches of cold side vapor barrier overlap of sleeve surface. Normally
noninsulated penetrating round surfaces shall be sealed to sleeve bore with
mechanically expandable seals in vapor tight manner and remaining warm and
cold side sleeve depth shall be insulated with not less than 4 inches of
foamed-in-place rigid polyurethane or foamed-in-place silicone elastomer.
Vapor barrier sealant shall be applied to finish warm side insulation

surface. Warm side of penetrating surface shall be insulated beyond vapor
barrier sealed sleeve insulation for a distance which prevents
condensation. Wires in refrigerated space surface penetrating conduit
shall be sealed with vapor barrier plugs or compound to prevent moisture
migration through conduit and condensation therein.
3.1.13.2 General Service Areas
Each sleeve shall extend through its respective wall, floor, or roof, and
shall be cut flush with each surface. Pipes passing through concrete or
masonry wall or concrete floors or roofs shall be provided with pipe
sleeves fitted into place at the time of construction. Sleeves shall be of
such size as to provide a minimum of 1/4 inch all-around clearance between
bare pipe and sleeves or between jacketed-insulation and sleeves. Except
in pipe chases or interior walls, the annular space between pipe and sleeve
or between jacket over-insulation and sleeve shall be sealed in accordance
with Section 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS.
3.1.13.3 Waterproof Penetrations
Pipes passing through roof or floor waterproofing membrane shall be

installed through a .17 ounce copper sleeve, or a 0.032 inch thick aluminum
sleeve, each within an integral skirt or flange.
Flashing sleeve shall be suitably formed, and skirt or flange shall extend
not less than 8 inches from the pipe and be set over the roof or floor
membrane in a troweled coating of bituminous cement. The flashing sleeve
shall extend up the pipe a minimum of 2 inches above the roof or floor
penetration. The annular space between the flashing sleeve and the bare
pipe or between the flashing sleeve and the metal-jacket-covered insulation
shall be sealed as indicated. Penetrations shall be sealed by either one
of the following methods.
a. Waterproofing Clamping Flange: Pipes up to and including 10 inches in

diameter passing through roof or floor waterproofing membrane may be
installed through a cast iron sleeve with caulking recess, anchor lugs,
flashing clamp device, and pressure ring with brass bolts.
Waterproofing membrane shall be clamped into place and sealant shall be
placed in the caulking recess.
b. Modular Mechanical Type Sealing Assembly: In lieu of a waterproofing

clamping flange, a modular mechanical type sealing assembly may be
installed. Seals shall consist of interlocking synthetic rubber links
shaped to continuously fill the annular space between the pipe/conduit
and sleeve with corrosion protected carbon steel bolts, nuts, and
pressure plates. Links shall be loosely assembled with bolts to form a
continuous rubber belt around the pipe with a pressure plate under each
bolt head and each nut.
After the seal assembly is properly positioned in the sleeve,

tightening of the bolt shall cause the rubber sealing elements to
expand and provide a watertight seal rubber sealing elements to expand
and provide a watertight seal between the pipe/conduit seal between the
pipe/conduit and the sleeve. Each seal assembly shall be sized as
recommended by the manufacturer to fit the pipe/conduit and sleeve
involved. The Contractor electing to use the modular mechanical type
seals shall provide sleeves of the proper diameters.
3.1.13.4 Fire-Rated Penetrations
Penetration of fire-rated walls, partitions, and floors shall be sealed as

specified in Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING.
3.1.13.5 Escutcheons
Finished surfaces where exposed piping, bare or insulated, pass through

floors, walls, or ceilings, except in boiler, utility, or equipment rooms,
shall be provided with escutcheons. Where sleeves project slightly from
floors, special deep-type escutcheons shall be used. Escutcheon shall be
secured to pipe or pipe covering.
3.1.14 Access Panels
Access panels shall be provided where indicated for all concealed valves,
vents, controls, and additionally for items requiring inspection or
maintenance. Access panels shall be of sufficient size and located so that
the concealed items may be serviced and maintained or completely removed
and replaced. Access panels shall be as specified in Section 05 50 13
MISCELLANEOUS METAL FABRICATIONS.
3.2 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
Install electrical equipment in accordance with NFPA 70 and manufacturers

instructions.
Pipes shall be cleaned free of scale and thoroughly flushed of all foreign
matter. A temporary bypass shall be provided for all water coils to
prevent flushing water from passing through coils. Strainers and valves
shall be thoroughly cleaned. Prior to testing and balancing, air shall be
removed from all water systems by operating the air vents. Temporary
measures, such as piping the overflow from vents to a collecting vessel
shall be taken to avoid water damage during the venting process. Air vents
shall be plugged or capped after the system has been vented. Control
valves and other miscellaneous equipment requiring adjustment shall be
adjusted to setting indicated or directed.
3.4 FIELD TESTS
Field tests shall be conducted in the presence of the QC Manager or his

designated representative to verify systems compliance with
specifications. Any material, equipment, instruments, and personnel
required for the test shall be provided by the Contractor.
3.4.1 Equipment and Component Isolation
Prior to testing, equipment and components that cannot withstand the tests
shall be properly isolated.
3.4.2 Pressure Tests
Each piping system shall be hydrostatically tested at a pressure not less

than 188 psig for period of time sufficient to inspect every joint in the
system and in no case less than 2 hours. Test pressure shall be monitored
by a currently calibrated test pressure gauge. Leaks shall be repaired and
piping retested until test requirements are met. No leakage or reduction
in gage pressure shall be allowed.
Leaks shall be repaired by rewelding or replacing pipe or fittings.

Caulking of joints will not be permitted. Concealed and insulated piping
shall be tested in place before concealing.
Submit for approval pressure tests reports covering the above specified
piping pressure tests; describe the systems tested, test results, defects
found and repaired, and signature of the pressure tests' director. Obtain
approval from the QC Manager before concealing piping or applying
insulation to tested and accepted piping.
3.4.3 Related Field Inspections and Testing
3.4.3.1 Piping Welds
Examination of Piping Welds is specified in the paragraph above entitled

"Examination of Piping Welds".
3.4.3.2 HVAC TAB
Requirements for testing, adjusting, and balancing (TAB) of HVAC water

piping, and associated equipment is specified in Section 23 05 93
TESTING,ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC. Coordinate with the TAB team,
and provide support personnel and equipment as specified in Section 23 05 93
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC to assist TAB team to meet the
TAB work requirements.
Furnish the services of competent instructors to give full instruction to

the designated Government personnel in the adjustment, operation, and
maintenance, including pertinent safety requirements, of the condenser
water piping systems. Instructors shall be thoroughly familiar with all
parts of the installation and shall be instructed in operating theory as
well as practical operation and maintenance work. Submit a lesson plan for
the instruction course for approval. The lesson plan and instruction
course shall be based on the approved operation and maintenance data and
maintenance manuals.
Conduct a training course for the operating staff and maintenance staff
selected by the Contracting Officer. Give the instruction during the first
regular work week after the equipment or system has been accepted and
turned over to the Government for regular operation. The number of
man-days (8 hours per day) of instruction furnished shall be one man-day.
Use approximately half of the time for classroom instruction and the other
time for instruction at the location of equipment or system.

SECTION 23 65 00
COOLING TOWERS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

ASA S1.13 (2005) Methods for the Measurement of

Sound Pressure Levels in Air (ASA 118)

Allied Processes

Steel Products

Hardware


Compounds
ASTM D 2996 (2001; R 2007e1) Filament-Wound

"Fiberglass" (Glass-Fiber-Reinforced
Thermosetting-Resin) Pipe

Materials
COOLING TECHNOLOGY INSTITUTE (CTI)
CTI ATC-105 (2000) Acceptance Test Code
CTI Std-137 (2007) Fiberglass Pultruded Structural

Products for Use in Cooling Towers
CTI Std-201 (2009) Standard for Thermal Performance

Certification of Evaporative Heat
Rejection Equipment

and Generators

NFPA 214 (2005) Water-Cooling Towers
NFPA 255 (2005; Errata 2006) Standard Method of

Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of
Building Materials

Code - 2008 Edition
SAE J534 (2008) Lubrication Fittings
1.2 SUBMITTALS

SD-03 Product Data
Cooling Towers
Manufacturer's standard catalog data, at least prior to the

purchase or installation of a particular component, highlighted to
show material, size, options, performance charts and curves, etc.
in adequate detail to demonstrate compliance with contract
requirements. Data shall include manufacturer's recommended
installation instructions and procedures. If vibration isolation
is specified for a unit, vibration isolator literature shall be
included containing catalog cuts and certification that the
isolation characteristics of the isolators provided meet the
Posted Instructions
Posted instructions, including equipment layout, wiring and

control diagrams, piping, valves and control sequences, and typed
condensed operation instructions. The condensed operation
instructions shall include preventative maintenance procedures,
methods of checking the system for normal and safe operation, and
procedures for safely starting and stopping the system. The
posted instructions shall be framed under glass or laminated

plastic and be posted where indicated by the Contracting Officer.
Demonstrations
A schedule, at least weeks prior to the date of the proposed

the training.
Verification of Dimensions
A letter, at least weeks prior to beginning construction,
including the date the site was visited, conformation of existing
conditions, and any discrepancies found.
SD-06 Test Reports
Packaged cooling tower - field acceptance test plan;
Packaged cooling tower - field acceptance test report;
SD-07 Certificates
Service Organization
Cooling Tower
Field-erected cooling tower - installation instructions
that proper operation of equipment is not impaired. Welding and cutting
safety requirements shall be in accordance with AWS Z49.1. Catwalk, ladder,
and guardrail shall be provided where indicated and in accordance with
Stored items shall be protected from the weather, humidity and temperature
variations, dirt and dust, or other contaminants. Proper protection and
care of all material both before and during installation shall be the
Contractor's responsibility. Any materials found to be damaged shall be
replaced at the Contractor's expense. During installation, piping and
similar openings shall be capped to keep out dirt and other foreign matter.
1.5.1 Verification of Dimensions
The Contractor shall become familiar with all details of the work, verify
all dimensions in the field, and advise the Contracting Officer of any
1.5.2 Drawings

all offsets, fittings, and accessories that may be required. The
Contractor shall carefully investigate the plumbing, fire protection,
electrical, structural and finish conditions that would affect the work to
be performed and shall arrange such work accordingly, furnishing required
offsets, fittings, and accessories to meet such conditions.
1.6 Warranty
In addition to the warranty requirements specification in Division 00,

Contract Requirements, the following major components of the cooling tower
shall be covered by a warranty of a duration period of five years: fans,
fan drives, electric motors, cold water basin, basin heater.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 STANDARD COMMERCIAL PRODUCTS
Materials and equipment shall be standard commercial catalogued products of

a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacturing of such products,
which are of a similar material, design and workmanship.
The standard products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or

industrial use in field service for 2 years prior to bid opening. The 2
year use shall include applications of equipment and materials under
similar circumstances and of similar size.
Products having less than a 2 year field service record shall be acceptable
if a certified record of satisfactory field operation, for not less than
6000 hours exclusive of the manufacturer's factory tests, can be shown.
This 6000 hour record shall not include any manufacturer's prototype or
factory testing.
Records of satisfactory field use shall be completed by a product that had

been, and presently is, sold, or offered for sale on a commercial market
through the following copyrighted means: advertisements, manufacturer's
catalogs, or brochures. Products shall be supported by a service
organization. System components shall be environmentally suitable for the
indicated locations.
2.2 MANUFACTURER'S STANDARD NAMEPLATES
Major equipment including cooling towers, cooling tower gear drive

assemblies, fans, and motors shall have the manufacturer's name, address,
secured to the item of equipment. Plates shall be durable and legible
throughout equipment life. Plates shall be fixed in prominent locations.
2.3 ELECTRICAL WORK
a. Provide motors, controllers, integral disconnects, contactors, and

controls with their respective pieces of equipment, except
controllers equipment, including motors and wiring, as specified
in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Manual or
automatic control and protective or signal devices required for
the operation specified and control wiring required for controls
and devices specified, but not shown, shall be provided. For
packaged equipment, the manufacturer shall provide controllers
including the required monitors and timed restart.
b. For single-phase motors, provide high-efficiency type,

fractional-horsepower alternating-current motors, including motors
that are part of a system, in accordance with NEMA MG 11.
c. For polyphase motors, provide squirrel-cage medium induction

motors, including motors that are part of a system, and that meet
the efficiency ratings for premium efficiency motors in accordance
with NEMA MG 1.
d. Provide motors in accordance with NEMA MG 1 and of sufficient size

to drive the load at the specified capacity without exceeding the
nameplate rating of the motor. Motors shall be rated for
continuous duty with the enclosure specified. Motor duty
requirements shall allow for maximum frequency start-stop
operation and minimum encountered interval between start and
stop. Motor torque shall be capable of accelerating the connected
load within 20 seconds with 80 percent of the rated voltage
maintained at motor terminals during one starting period. Provide
motor starters complete with thermal overload protection and other
necessary appurtenances. Motor bearings shall be fitted with
grease supply fittings and grease relief to outside of the
enclosure.
e. Where two-speed or variable speed motors are indicated,

solid-state variable-speed controllers may be provided to
accomplish the same function. Use solid-state variable-speed
controllers for motors rated 7.45 kW 10 hp or less and adjustable
frequency drives for larger motors. Inverter duty premium
efficiency motors shall be provided for variable frequency drive
applications. Motors shall have efficiency labeling in accordance
with NEMA MG 1.
2.4 COOLING TOWER MATERIALS
2.4.1 Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP)
FRP components shall be inert, corrosion resistant, and fire-retardant with

a thickness of 12 ounces per square foot. FRP components shall contain an
ultraviolet (UV) ray inhibitor as per CTI Std-137, Grade 1 or 3.
Components manufactured of polystyrene will not be permitted.
2.4.2 Zinc-Coated Steel
Components fabricated of zinc-coated steel shall be not lighter than 16

gauge steel, protected against corrosion by a zinc coating. The zinc
coating shall conform to ASTM A 153/A 153M and ASTM A 123/A 123M, as
applicable and have an extra heavy coating of not less than 2.5 ounces per
square foot of surface. Galvanized surfaces damaged due to welding shall

be coated with zinc rich coating conforming to ASTM D 520, Type 1.
2.4.3 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Formed Sheets
ASTM D 1784, Type I, Grade 1 with a flame spread rating of 25 or less per
ASTM E 84.
2.4.4 Stainless Steel Sheets
Type 304.
2.4.5 Concrete
Concrete shall conform to Section 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE STRUCTURAL

CONCRETE. Exposed concrete shall be rub-finished for smooth and uniform
surfaces free of form marks and defects. Honeycomb concrete shall not be
permitted.
2.4.6 Hardware
Bolts shall be cadmium-plated, zinc-coated steel, or Type 304 stainless

steel. Each bolt shall be provided with neoprene and cadmium-plated steel
washers under the heads. Nails shall be silicon bronze, commercial bronze,
or stainless steel. Hardware shall meet the salt-spray fog test as defined
by ASTM B 117. Angle brackets and similar parts shall be cast iron or
zinc-coated steel. Zinc coatings shall conform to ASTM A 153/A 153M and
ASTM A 123/A 123M , as applicable, and shall have an extra heavy coating of
not less than 2.5 ounces per square foot of surface. Nails shall be
silicon bronze, commercial bronze, or stainless steel. Subject hardware to
a salt-spray fog test in accordance with ASTM B 117. No signs of corrosion
shall be evident after 1,000 hours continuous exposure to a 5 percent salt
spray.
2.5 COOLING TOWERS
2.5.1 Factory Assembled Towers
2.5.1.1 Description
The cooling tower shall be of the induced mechanical draft type. The
cooling tower shall include frames and casings, louvers, drift eliminators,
partitions, windbreak baffles, drift-check walls, cold water basin
equipment, fans and fan walls, blowers, drives, electric motors, access
doors, working platforms, inspection plates, and panels.
2.5.1.2 Construction
Tower shall be constructed to withstand a wind pressure of not less than 30

psf on any external surface. Fan deck shall be constructed to withstand a
live load of not less than 60 psf in addition to the concentrated or
distributed loads of equipment mounted on the fan deck.
The hot water distribution system shall be of the open basin gravity feed
type or the pressurized spray header type design.
2.5.1.3 Tower Frame and Louvers
Provide frame constructed from galvanized steel. Intermediate structural
members shall be provided for rigidity and support of casings, louvers,

fill, distribution systems, fan decks, and other equipment. Inlet air
louvers shall permit free air passage but no splashout, and shall be
designed to prevent debris and sunlight from entering the cold water basin.
2.5.1.4 Fill
The fill shall support expected loads without sag or failure and arranged
to effectively break up the water. The fill shall be manufactured and
performance tested by the cooling tower manufacturer. The fill shall be of
the materials as specified. Polyvinyl chloride fill is suitable for inlet
temperatures to 125 degrees Fahrenheit (F) on cross flow type units and
temperatures to 130 degrees F on counterflow type units. Chlorinated
polyvinyl chloride(CPVC) fill shall be used for applications where inlet
temperatures are greater than 130 degrees F.
2.5.1.5 Drift Eliminators
Provide drift eliminator sections designed and arranged to effectively trap

water droplets entrained in the discharge airstream. Sections shall be
assembled in easily removable sections for counterflow induced mechanical
draft tower.
2.5.1.6 Cold Water Basin Equipment.
Include sump with removable screen and vortex breaker, float valves, and
necessary pipe connections and fittings within the tower. Provide float
valves with adjustable arms. Valve sizes larger than 1/2 inch pipe size
shall be the balanced piston type. Valve seats and disks shall be
replaceable. Electric water level control shall be provided.
Provide cold water basins and casings suitably sealed and flashed at joints
and connections to ensure watertight construction.
2.5.1.7 Fans, Blowers, and Drives.
The towers shall have propeller-type fans having not less than four metal
blades or squirrel-cage, centrifugal-type blowers, as applicable.
Fans and blowers shall be designed and constructed to withstand 50 percent
overspeed above normal maximum operating speeds.
If belt drives are utilized, multi-grooved solid back single belt design
shall be used to avoid uneven belt stretch. Adjustment shall be provided
for belt tension and drive centers. Belt drives shall be designed and
constructed for 150 percent overload.
Sheaves located in the airstream shall be corrosion-resistant material.

Shafting for gear drives shall have flexible-type couplings requiring no
lubrication.
The gear assemblies shall be enclosed in an oil filled housing provided

with fill and drain plugs.
2.5.1.8 Tower Piping
Plastic piping shall be not less than schedule 40 and conform to ASTM D 2996.
Fittings for other piping materials shall be of the same material or equal
and of the same class and grade as the pipe.
2.5.1.9 Electric Motors
Requirements are specified in paragraph ELECTRICAL WORK.
2.5.1.10 Vibration Cutout Switch.
Provide electronic vibration cutout switch with auxiliary contacts in a

protected position and most effective location, interlocked with the fan
wiring to electrically open the motor circuit under excessive fan vibration.
2.5.1.11 Performance
The factory assembled tower shall have Cooling Tower Institute

certification that, in accordance with CTI Std-201, the cooling tower will
perform thermally at the rating published by the tower manufacturer in his
copyrighted literature.
2.5.1.12 Sound Power Level
Sound power levels, in decibels (dB)with a reference pressure of 0.0002

microbars, of the cooling tower shall be not greater than the maximum
permitted dB levels for the designated octave band as set forth in Table I
or Table II. The sound power level data for the cooling tower shall have
been verified in tests conducted in accordance with ASA S1.13.
Table I. Sound Power Level For Induced Mechanical Draft Type

______________________________________________________________________
Octave Band (Hz)| 63 | 125 | 250 | 500 | 1000 | 2000 | 4000 | 8000 |
Sound Power
Level (dB) | 112 | 112 | 110 | 108 | 102 | 98 | 93 | 90 |
Table II. Sound Power Level For Forced Mechanical Draft Type
______________________________________________________________________
Octave Band (Hz)| 63 | 125 | 250 | 500 | 1000 | 2000 | 4000 | 8000 |
Sound Power
Level (dB) | 112 | 112 | 110 | 108 | 102 | 98 | 93 | 90 |
2.5.1.13 Drift Loss
Drift loss shall be not greater than 0.005 percent of the water circulated.
2.5.2 Lubrication
The lubricating points shall be extended to the outside of the unit for
easy accessibility. Hydraulic lubrication fittings shall be in accordance
with SAE J534. Where use of high pressure lubricating equipment,
1000 psi or higher, will damage grease seals or other parts, a suitable
warning shall be affixed to the equipment in a conspicuous location.
2.5.3 Factory Finish System
Manufacturer's standard factory finish system shall be provided.
Galvanized metal shall have been proven to withstand 125 hours in a

salt-spray fog test, except that equipment located outdoors shall withstand
500 hours in a salt-spray fog test. Salt-spray fog test shall be in
accordance with ASTM B 117.
For that salt-spray fog test, the acceptance criteria shall be as follows:
immediately after completion of the test, the paint shall show no signs of
blistering, wrinkling, or cracking, and no loss of adhesion; and the
specimen shall show no signs of rust creepage beyond 0.125 inch on either
side of the scratch mark.
painting system be designed for the temperature service and shall have been
proven to pass the specified salt-spray test.
2.5.4 Fire Safety
Towers shall conform to NFPA 214. Fire hazard rating for plastic
impregnated materials shall not exceed 25. Plastics shall not drip or run
during combustion. Fire hazard ratings shall be in accordance with
ASTM E 84 or NFPA 255.
2.6 FABRICATION
Unless otherwise specified, equipment and component items, when fabricated

from ferrous metal, shall be factory finished with the manufacturer's
standard finish, except that items located outside of buildings shall have
weather resistant finishes that will withstand 500 hours exposure to the
salt spray test specified in ASTM B 117 using a 5 percent sodium chloride
solution. Immediately after completion of the test, the specimen shall
show no signs of blistering, wrinkling, cracking, or loss of adhesion and
no sign of rust creepage beyond 1/8 inch on either side of the scratch
mark. Cut edges of galvanized surfaces where hot-dip galvanized sheet
steel is used shall be coated with a zinc-rich coating conforming to
ASTM D 520, Type I.
2.7.1 Condenser Water Piping and Accessories
Condenser water piping and accessories shall be provided and installed in

accordance with Section 23 64 26 CHILLED, CHILLED-HOT, AND CONDENSER WATER
PIPING SYSTEMS.
2.7.2 Cooling Tower Water Treatment Systems
Cooling tower water treatment systems shall be provided and installed in

accordance with Section 23 64 26 CHILLED, CHILLED-HOT AND CONDENSER WATER
PIPING SYSTEMS.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 DEMONSTRATIONS
Contractor shall conduct a training course for the operating staff as
designated by the Contracting Officer. The training period shall consist

of a total 8 hours of normal working time and start after the system is
posted instructions shall cover all of the items contained in the approved
Operation and Maintenance Manuals as well as demonstrations of routine
maintenance operations.
3.2 INSTALLATION
Installation of cooling tower systems including materials, installation,

workmanship, fabrication, assembly, erection, examination, inspection, and
testing shall be in accordance with NFPA 70, and in compliance with the
manufacturer's written installation instructions, including the following:
(1) Packaged cooling tower - installation instructions
3.2.1 Connections to Existing Systems
Notify the Contracting Officer in writing at least 15 calendar days prior

to the date the connections are required. Obtain approval before
interrupting service. Furnish materials required to make connections into
existing systems and perform excavating, backfilling, compacting, and other
incidental labor as required. Furnish labor and tools for making actual
connections to existing systems.
3.3 RELATED FIELD TESTING
3.3.1 Test Plans
a. Manufacturer's Test Plans: Within 120 calendar days after

contract award, submit the following plans:
(1) Packaged cooling tower - field acceptance test plan
Field acceptance test plans shall developed by the cooling tower

manufacturer detailing recommended field test procedures for that
particular type and size of equipment. Field acceptance test
plans developed by the installing Contractor, or the equipment
sales agency furnishing the equipment, will not be acceptable.
The Contracting Officer will review and approve the field

acceptance test plan for each of the listed equipment prior to
commencement of field testing of the equipment. The approved
field acceptance test plans shall be the plan and procedures
followed for the field acceptance tests of the cooling towers and
subsequent test reporting.
b. Coordinated testing: Indicate in each field acceptance test plan

when work required by this section requires coordination with test
work required by other specification sections. Furnish test
procedures for the simultaneous or integrated testing of tower
system controls which interlock and interface with controls
factory prewired or external controls for the equipment provided
under SECTION 23 09 23 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL FOR HVAC AND OTHER
LOCAL BUILDING SYSTEMS .
c. Prerequisite testing: Cooling towers for which performance

testing is dependent upon the completion of the work covered by
Section 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING must have that
work completed as a prerequisite to testing work under this

section. Indicate in each field acceptance test plan when such
prerequisite work is required.
d. Test procedure: Indicate in each field acceptance test plan each

equipment manufacturers published installation, start-up, and
field acceptance test procedures. Include in each test plan a
detailed step-by-step procedure for testing automatic controls
provided by the manufacturer.
Each test plan shall include the required test reporting forms to
be completed by the Contractor's testing representatives.
Procedures shall be structured to test the controls through all
modes of control to confirm that the controls are performing with
the intended sequence of control.
Controllers shall be verified to be properly calibrated and have

the proper set point to provide stable control of their respective
equipment.
e. Performance variables: Each test plan shall list performance

variables that are required to be measured or tested as part of
the field test.
Include in the listed variables performance requirements indicated

on the equipment schedules on the design drawings. Tower
manufacturer shall furnish with each test procedure a description
of acceptable results that have been verified.
Tower manufacturer shall identify the acceptable limits or

tolerances within which each tested performance variable shall
acceptably operate.
f. Job specific: Each test plan shall be job specific and shall
address the particular cooling towers and particular conditions
which exist with this contract. Generic or general preprinted
test procedures are not acceptable.
g. Specialized components: Each test plan shall include procedures

for field testing and field adjusting specialized components, such
as hot gas bypass control valves, or pressure valves.
3.4 Testing
a. Each cooling tower system shall be field acceptance tested in

compliance with its approved field acceptance test plan and the
resulting following field acceptance test report submitted for
approval:
1. Packaged cooling tower - field acceptance test report
b. Manufacturer's recommended testing: Conduct the manufacturer's

recommend field testing in compliance with the approved test
plan. Furnish a factory trained field representative authorized
by and to represent the equipment manufacturer at the complete
execution of the field acceptance testing.
c. Operational test: Conduct a continuous 24 hour operational test

for each item of equipment. Equipment shutdown before the test
period is completed shall result in the test period being started

again and run for the required duration. For the duration of the
test period, compile an operational log of each item of
equipment. Log required entries every two hours. Use the test
report forms for logging the operational variables.
d. Notice of tests: Conduct the manufacturer's recommended tests and

the operational tests; record the required data using the approved
reporting forms. Notify the Contracting Officer in writing at
least 15 calendar days prior to the testing. Within 30 calendar
days after acceptable completion of testing, submit each test
report for review and approval.
e. Report forms: Type data entries and writing on the test report
forms. Completed test report forms for each item of equipment
shall be reviewed, approved, and signed by the Contractor's test
director. The manufacturer's field test representative shall
review, approve, and sign the report of the manufacturer's
recommended test. Signatures shall be accompanied by the person's
name typed.
f. Deficiency resolution: The test requirements acceptably met;

deficiencies identified during the tests shall be corrected in
compliance with the manufacturer's recommendations and corrections
retested in order to verify compliance.
g. Towers with thermal performance not CTI certified to CTI Std-201

shall have their thermal performance verified by field testing
that meets the requirements of CTI ATC-105
SECTION 23 82 02.00 10
UNITARY HEATING AND COOLING EQUIPMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

AHRI 210/240 (2008) Performance Rating of Unitary

Air-Conditioning and Air-Source Heat Pump
Equipment
AHRI 270 (2008) Standard for Sound Rating of

Outdoor Unitary Equipment
AHRI 495 (2005) Performance Rating of Refrigerant

Liquid Receivers
AHRI 700 (2006; Appendix C 2008) Specifications for

Fluorocarbon Refrigerants

ENGINEERS (ASHRAE)
ASHRAE 127 (2007) Method of Testing for Rating

Computer and Data Processing Room Unitary
Air-Conditioners
ASHRAE 15 & 34 (2007; Std 15 Errata 2007, 2009, & Addenda

a-e; Std 34 Errata 2007, 2008, Addenda
a-y, aa-ae) ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 15-Safety
Standard for Refrigeration Systems and
ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 34-Designation and
Safety Classification of Refrigerants
ASHRAE 52.1 (1992; Interpretation 1 2007) Gravimetric

and Dust-Spot Procedures for Testing
Air-Cleaning Devices Used in General
Ventilation for Removing Particulate Matter

Allied Processes
ASME BPVC SEC IX (2007; Addenda 2008) Boiler and Pressure

Vessel Code; Section IX, Welding and
Brazing Qualifications
SECTION 23 82 02.00 10 Page 1

ASME BPVC SEC VIII D1 (2007; Addenda 2008) Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code; Section VIII, Pressure
Vessels Division 1 - Basic Coverage

Strength


Fibrous Glass Duct Lining Insulation
(Thermal and Sound Absorbing Material)

Materials
ASTM F 104 (2003) Standard Classification System for

Nonmetallic Gasket Materials

and Generators
NEMA MG 2 (2001; Rev 1 2007) Safety Standard for

Construction and Guide for Selection,
Installation, and Use of Electric Motors
and Generators
UL 1995 (2005; Rev thru Jul 2009) Standard for

Heating and Cooling Equipment
UL 207 (2009) Standard for Refrigerant-Containing

Components and Accessories, Nonelectrical

UL 900 (2004; Rev thru Nov 2009) Standard for Air

Filter Units
Provide electrical equipment, motors, motor efficiencies, and wiring which

are in accordance with Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.
Electrical motor driven equipment specified shall be provided complete with
motors, motor starters, and controls. Electrical characteristics shall be
as shown, and unless otherwise indicated, all motors of 1 horsepower and
above with open, dripproof, totally enclosed, or explosion proof fan cooled
SECTION 23 82 02.00 10 Page 2

enclosures, shall be the premium efficiency type in accordance with

NEMA MG 1. Field wiring shall be in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions. Each motor shall conform to NEMA MG 1 and NEMA MG 2 and be
of sufficient size to drive the equipment at the specified capacity without
exceeding the nameplate rating of the motor. Motors shall be continuous
duty with the enclosure specified. Motor starters shall be provided
complete with thermal overload protection and other appurtenances necessary
for the motor control indicated. Motors shall be furnished with a magnetic
across-the-line or reduced voltage type starter as required by the
manufacturer. Motor duty requirements shall allow for maximum frequency
start-stop operation and minimum encountered interval between start and
stop. Motors shall be sized for the applicable loads. Motor torque shall
be capable of accelerating the connected load within 20 seconds with 80
percent of the rated voltage maintained at motor terminals during one
starting period. Motor bearings shall be fitted with grease supply
fittings and grease relief to outside of enclosure. Manual or automatic
control and protective or signal devices required for the operation
specified and any control wiring required for controls and devices
specified, but not shown, shall be provided.
1.3 SUBMITTALS

SD-02 Shop Drawings
Drawings
Drawings provided in adequate detail to demonstrate compliance

with contract requirements, as specified.
SD-03 Product Data
Manufacturer's standard catalog data, at least 5 weeks prior to

the purchase or installation of a particular component,
highlighted to show material, size, options, performance charts
and curves, etc. in adequate detail to demonstrate compliance with
contract requirements. Data shall include manufacturer's
recommended installation instructions and procedures. If
vibration isolation is specified for a unit, vibration isolator
literature shall be included containing catalog cuts and
certification that the isolation characteristics of the isolators
provided meet the manufacturer's recommendations. Data shall be
submitted for each specified component.
Spare Parts
Spare parts data for each different item of equipment specified.
Posted Instructions
Posted instructions, at least 2 weeks prior to construction

completion, including equipment layout, wiring and control
diagrams, piping, valves and control sequences, and typed
SECTION 23 82 02.00 10 Page 3

condensed operation instructions. The condensed operation

instructions shall include preventative maintenance procedures,
methods of checking the system for normal and safe operation, and
procedures for safely starting and stopping the system. The
posted instructions shall be framed under glass or laminated
plastic and be posted where indicated by the Contracting Officer.
Verification of Dimensions
A letter, at least 2 weeks prior to beginning construction,

including the date the site was visited, confirmation of existing
conditions, and any discrepancies found.
Coil Corrosion Protection
Product data on the type coating selected, the coating

thickness, the application process used, the estimated heat
transfer loss of the coil, and verification of conformance with
the salt spray test requirement.
System Performance Tests
A schedule, at least 2 weeks prior to the start of related

testing, for the system performance tests. The schedules shall
identify the proposed date, time, and location for each test.
Demonstrations; G
A schedule, at least 2 weeks prior to the date of the proposed

the training.
SD-06 Test Reports
Refrigerant Tests, Charging, and Start-Up
Six copies of each test containing the information described

below in bound 8-1/2 by 11 inch booklets. Individual reports
shall be submitted for the refrigerant system tests.
a. The date the tests were performed.

b. A list of equipment used, with calibration certifications.
c. Initial test summaries.
d. Repairs/adjustments performed.
e. Final test results.
System Performance Tests
Six copies of the report provided in bound 8-1/2 by 11 inch

booklets. The report shall document compliance with the specified
performance criteria upon completion and testing of the system.
The report shall indicate the number of days covered by the tests
and any conclusions as to the adequacy of the system.
SD-07 Certificates
Where the system, components, or equipment are specified to
SECTION 23 82 02.00 10 Page 4

comply with requirements of AHRI, ASHRAE, ASME, or UL, proof of

such compliance shall be provided. The label or listing of the
specified agency shall be acceptable evidence. In lieu of the
label or listing, a written certificate from an approved,
nationally recognized testing organization equipped to perform
such services, stating that the items have been tested and conform
to the requirements and testing methods of the specified agency
may be submitted. When performance requirements of this project's
drawings and specifications vary from standard AHRI rating
conditions, computer printouts, catalog, or other application data
certified by AHRI or a nationally recognized laboratory as
described above shall be included. If AHRI does not have a
current certification program that encompasses such application
data, the manufacturer may self certify that his application data
complies with project performance requirements in accordance with
the specified test standards.
Service Organization
A certified list of qualified permanent service organizations,

which includes their addresses and qualifications, for support of
the equipment. The service organizations shall be reasonably
convenient to the equipment installation and be able to render
satisfactory service to the equipment on a regular and emergency
basis during the warranty period of the contract.
Six complete copies of an operation manual in bound 8-1/2 by 11

inch booklets listing step-by-step procedures required for system
startup, operation, abnormal shutdown, emergency shutdown, and
normal shutdown at least 4 weeks prior to the first training
course. The booklets shall include the manufacturer's name, model
number, and parts list. The manuals shall include the
manufacturer's name, model number, service manual, and a brief
description of all equipment and their basic operating features.
Six complete copies of maintenance manual in bound 8-1/2 by 11 inch
booklets listing routine maintenance procedures, possible
breakdowns and repairs, and a trouble shooting guide. The manuals
shall include piping and equipment layouts and simplified wiring
and control diagrams of the system as installed.

all offsets, fittings, and accessories that may be required. Carefully
investigate the plumbing, fire protection, electrical, structural and
finish conditions that would affect the work to be performed and arrange
such work accordingly, furnishing required offsets, fittings, and
accessories to meet such conditions. Submit drawings consisting of:
a. Equipment layouts which identify assembly and installation details.
b. Plans and elevations which identify clearances required for

maintenance and operation.
c. Wiring diagrams which identify each component individually and
SECTION 23 82 02.00 10 Page 5

interconnected or interlocked relationships between components.
d. Foundation drawings, bolt-setting information, and foundation bolts

prior to concrete foundation construction for equipment indicated or
required to have concrete foundations.
e. Details, if piping and equipment are to be supported other than as

indicated, which include loadings and type of frames, brackets,
stanchions, or other supports.
f. Automatic temperature control diagrams and control sequences.
g. Installation details which includes the amount of factory set

superheat and corresponding refrigerant pressure/temperature.
Stored items shall be protected from the weather, humidity and temperature
variations, dirt and dust, or other contaminants. Proper protection and
care of all material both before and during installation shall be the
Contractor's responsibility. Replace any materials found to be damaged at
the Contractor's expense. During installation, piping and similar openings
shall be capped to keep out dirt and other foreign matter.
1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS
Submit spare parts data for each different item of equipment specified,
after approval of detail drawings and not later than 2 months prior to the
date of beneficial occupancy. Include in the data a complete list of parts
and supplies, with current unit prices and source of supply, a recommended
spare parts list for 1 year of operation, and a list of the parts
recommended by the manufacturer to be replaced on a routine basis.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Provide Materials and equipment that are standard products of a

manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacturing of such products, which
are of a similar material, design and workmanship. The standard products
shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2 years
prior to bid opening. The 2 year use shall include applications of
equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size.
The 2 years experience shall be satisfactorily completed by a product which
has been sold or is offered for sale on the commercial market through
advertisements, manufacturer's catalogs, or brochures. Products having
less than a 2 year field service record will be acceptable if a certified
record of satisfactory field operation, for not less than 6000 hours
exclusive of the manufacturer's factory tests, can be shown. Products
shall be supported by a service organization. System components shall be
environmentally suitable for the indicated locations.
2.1.2 Nameplates
Major equipment including compressors, condensers, receivers, heat

exchanges, fans, and motors shall have the manufacturer's name, address,
SECTION 23 82 02.00 10 Page 6

secured to the item of equipment. Plates shall be durable and legible

throughout equipment life and made of stainless steel . Plates shall be
fixed in prominent locations with nonferrous screws or bolts.
2.1.3 Safety Devices
that proper operation of equipment is not impaired. Welding and cutting
safety requirements shall be in accordance with AWS Z49.1.
2.2 UNITARY EQUIPMENT, PACKAGE SYSTEM
Unit shall be an water-cooled factory assembled, indoor packaged unit as

indicated. Unit shall be the heat pump type conforming to applicable
Underwriters Laboratories (UL) standards including UL 1995. Unit shall be
rated in accordance with AHRI 210/240. Unit shall be provided with
equipment as specified in paragraph "Unitary Equipment Components".
Evaporator or supply fans shall be double-width, double inlet, forward
curved, backward inclined, or airfoil blade, centrifugal scroll type.
Motors shall have totally enclosed enclosures. Condenser fans shall be
manufacturer's standard for the unit specified and may be either propeller
or centrifugal scroll type. Unit shall be provided with a factory
operating charge of refrigerant and oil or a holding charge. Unit shipped
with a holding charge shall be field charged with refrigerant and oil in
accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Outdoor unit shall produce
a maximum AHRI sound rating of 8.8 bels in accordance with AHRI 270.
Interior water source piping shall be insulated as a "cold pipe" described
in Section 23 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS.
2.2.1 Air-to-Refrigerant Coils
Air-to-refrigerant coils shall have copper or aluminum tubes of 3/8 inch

minimum diameter with copper or aluminum fins that are mechanically bonded
or soldered to the tubes. Casing shall be galvanized steel or aluminum.
Contact of dissimilar metals shall be avoided. Coils shall be tested in
accordance with ASHRAE 15 & 34 at the factory and be suitable for the
working pressure of the installed system. Each coil shall be dehydrated
and sealed after testing and prior to evaluation and charging. Each unit
shall be provided with a factory operating charge of refrigerant and oil or
a holding charge. Unit shipped with a holding charge shall be field
charged. Separate expansion devices shall be provided for each compressor
circuit.
2.2.2 Water-to-Refrigerant Coils
Coils shall be of the tube-in-tube, shell-and-coil, shell-and-tube, or

concentric tube type and be provided as an integral part of the packaged
unit. Water-wetted metals shall be copper or copper-nickel, except that
heads may be ferrous metal in systems with chemically treated recirculating
water. Coils shall be rated for not less than 400 psi refrigerant side and
125 psi water side pressure service at operating temperatures. Coils shall
be supplied with water as indicated. Water supply, return and control
system wetted parts shall be copper, bronze or stainless steel. Water
supply, return connections and piping internal to unit shall be copper with
brazed or threaded copper or bronze fittings, terminating in a threaded
connection. Piping arrangement shall include valved access for
SECTION 23 82 02.00 10 Page 7

recirculation of acidic scale removal chemicals and isolation pressure taps

to determine pressure drop and water flow. Performance shall be based on
an allowable water velocity not less than 3 fps nor more than 10 fps with a
fouling factor of 0.0005.
2.2.3 Compressor
Compressor shall be direct drive, semi-hermetic or hermetic reciprocating,

or scroll type capable of operating at partial load conditions. Compressor
shall be capable of continuous operation down to the lowest step of
unloading as specified. Compressors of 10 tons and larger shall be
provided with capacity reduction devices to produce automatic capacity
reduction of at least 50 percent. If standard with the manufacturer, two
or more compressors may be used in lieu of a single compressor with
unloading capabilities, in which case the compressors shall operate in
sequence, and each compressor shall have an independent refrigeration
circuit through the condenser and evaporator. Compressors shall start in
the unloaded position. Each compressor shall be provided with vibration
isolators, crankcase heater, thermal overloads, high and low pressure
safety cutoffs and protection against short cycling.
2.2.4 Refrigeration Circuit
Refrigerant containing components shall comply with ASHRAE 15 & 34 and be

factory tested, cleaned, dehydrated, charged, and sealed. Refrigerant
charging valves and connections, and pumpdown valves shall be provided for
each circuit. Filter-drier shall be provided in each liquid line and be
reversible-flow type. Refrigerant flow control devices shall be an
adjustable superheat thermostatic expansion valve with external equalizer
matched to coil, capillary or thermostatic control, and a pilot solenoid
controlled, leak-tight, four-way refrigerant flow reversing valve.
2.2.5 Unit Controls
Unit shall be internally prewired with a 24 volt control circuit powered by

an internal transformer. Terminal blocks shall be provided for power
wiring and external control wiring. Unit shall have cutoffs for high and
low pressure,low oil pressure for compressors with positive displacement
oil pumps, supply fan failure and safety interlocks on all service panels.
Head pressure controls shall sustain unit operation with ambient
temperature of 40 degrees F. Adjustable-cycle timers shall prevent
short-cycling. Multiple compressors shall be staged by means of a time
delay. Unit shall be internally protected by fuses or a circuit breaker in
accordance with UL 1995. Low cost cooling shall be made possible by means
of a control circuit which will modulate dampers to provide 100 percent
outside air while locking out compressors.
2.3 AIR-CONDITIONERS FOR ELECTRONIC DATA SPACES
Unit shall be an air-cooled, split type air-conditioning unit. Unit

shall be a split unit with an air-cooled condenser. Unit shall be
designed and constructed for automatic control of space conditions. Unit
shall be in accordance with ASHRAE 127 and UL 1995. Unit shall be rated in
accordance with AHRI 210/240. AHRI certification is not required. The
system shall be designed and constructed for maximum reliability and ease
of maintenance. Necessary redundancy, access to refrigeration circuits,
means of troubleshooting, and malfunction alarms shall be provided. Unit
shall be provided with necessary fans, air filters, internal dampers,
mixing boxes, supplemental heat, and cabinet construction as specified in
SECTION 23 82 02.00 10 Page 8

paragraph "Unitary Equipment Components". Evaporator or supply fans shall

be double-width, double inlet, forward curved centrifugal scroll type.
Condenser or outdoor fans shall be manufacturer's standard for unit
specified and may be either propeller or centrifugal scroll type. Fan and
condenser motors shall have totally enclosed enclosures.
2.3.1 Air-to-Refrigerant Coils
Evaporator coils shall have copper or aluminum tubes of 3/8 inch minimum
diameter with copper or aluminum fins that are mechanically bonded or
soldered to the tubes. Casing shall be galvanized steel or aluminum.
Contact of dissimilar metals shall be avoided. Coils shall be tested in
accordance with ASHRAE 15 & 34 at the factory and be suitable for the
working pressure of the installed system. Each coil shall be dehydrated
and sealed after testing and prior to evaluation and charging. Each unit
shall be provided with a factory operating charge of refrigerant and oil or
a holding charge. Units shipped with a holding charge shall be field
charged. Separate expansion devices shall be provided for each compressor
circuit.
2.3.2 Compressor
Compressor shall be direct drive, semi-hermetic or hermetic reciprocating,

or scroll type capable of operating at partial load conditions. Compressor
shall be capable of continuous operation down to the lowest step of
unloading as specified. Compressors of 7.5 tons and larger shall be
provided with capacity reduction devices to produce automatic capacity
reduction of at least 50 percent. If standard with the manufacturer, two
or more compressors may be used in lieu of a single compressor with
unloading capabilities, in which case the compressors will operate in
sequence, and each compressor shall have an independent refrigeration
circuit through the condenser and evaporator. Each compressor shall start
in the unloaded position. Each compressor shall be provided with vibration
isolators, crankcase heater, thermal overloads, and high and low pressure
safety cutoffs and protection against short cycling.
2.3.3 Refrigeration Circuit
Refrigerant-containing components shall comply with ASHRAE 15 & 34 and be

factory tested, cleaned, dehydrated, charged, and sealed. Refrigerant
charging valves and connections, and pumpdown valves shall be provided for
each circuit. Filter-drier shall be provided in each liquid line and be
reversible-flow type. Refrigerant flow control devices shall be an
adjustable superheat thermostatic expansion valve with external equalizer
matched to coil, capillary or thermostatic control, and a pilot solenoid
controlled, leak-tight, four-way refrigerant flow reversing valve. A
refrigerant suction line thermostatic and water flow switch control shall
be provided to prevent freeze-up in event of loss of water flow during
heating cycle.
2.3.4 Unit Controls
A unit's basic functions and space ambient conditions shall be controllable

at one station. A temperature and humidity strip-chart recorder, integral
or external to the unit, readable to specified control accuracy, shall be
provided, complete with cartridge ink and chart supply for 1 year of
operation.
SECTION 23 82 02.00 10 Page 9

2.3.4.1 Externally Accessible Controls
The following controls shall be externally accessible:
a. Start and stop total system functions.
b. Audible alarm silence.
c. Main power disconnect.
2.3.4.2 Status Indicators
The following status indicators shall be externally visible:
a. Power On.
b. System On.
c. Malfunction.
d. Provision for remote alarm status indication.
2.3.4.3 Alarmed Conditions
The following system status conditions shall be both audibly and visually
alarmed:
a. Loss of air flow.
b. Dirty filters.
c. Compressor overload or lock-out (compressor high head pressure and

low suction pressure).
d. High and low room temperature.
e. High humidity alarm at 90 percent relative humidity.
2.3.4.4 Space Temperature
Space temperature shall be controlled within plus or minus 1.5 degrees F of

the set point over a range of 60 to 90 degrees F with a set point of 72
degrees F.
2.3.4.5 Safety Controls
Safety controls shall include the following:
a. Fused, unfused or line-break circuit breaker disconnects, as

indicated or required.
b. Automatic pump-out or pump-down liquid flooding controls.
c. High refrigerant pressure cutout.
d. Low refrigerant pressure cutout where automatic pump-down is not

provided.
e. Accessible hermetic and open compressor low oil pressure cutout.
SECTION 23 82 02.00 10 Page 10

f. Elapsed time meter for each compressor where load equalization is

not incorporated.
g. Lead and lag compressor selector switch, when compatible with

system.
2.3.5 Cabinet Construction
Cabinet shall be totally enclosed. Enclosure surfaces shall be pulsation

free, with hinged and removable doors and panels for vertical side or front
access to unit components. Routine maintenance access to compressor and
system control components shall be possible without unit shut-down.
Enclosure surfaces shall be thermally and acoustically insulated. Interior
baffle and compartment surfaces shall be galvanized steel. Drain pans
shall collect all condensate and be steel with external insulation as
required. Surface mounting steel pads and vibration isolating pads shall
be provided. Enclosure surfaces shall be prepared, primed and finished.
Paint and finishes shall comply with the requirements specified in
paragraph FACTORY COATING. Cabinets shall be fitted with integral or
separable, adjustable and lockable jacks to support the units from the
structural slab at the raised-floor elevation.
2.4 EQUIPMENT EFFICIENCY
Unit shall have an efficiency in compliance with ASHRAE 90.1 2004.
2.5 UNITARY EQUIPMENT COMPONENTS
2.5.1 Refrigerant and Oil
Refrigerant shall be one of the fluorocarbon gases. Refrigerants shall

have number designations and safety classifications in accordance with
ASHRAE 15 & 34. Refrigerants shall meet the requirements of AHRI 700 as a
minimum. Refrigerants shall have an Ozone Depletion Potential (ODP) of
less than or equal to 0.05. Provide and install a complete charge of
refrigerant for the installed system as recommended by the manufacturer.
Lubricating oil shall be of a type and grade recommended by the
manufacturer for each compressor. Where color leak indicator dye is
incorporated, charge shall be in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendation.
2.5.2 Fans
Fan wheel shafts shall be supported by either maintenance-accessible

lubricated antifriction block-type bearings, or permanently lubricated ball
bearings. Unit fans shall be selected to produce the cfm required at the
fan total pressure. Motor starters, if applicable, shall be magnetic
across-the-line type with a totally enclosed enclosure. Thermal overload
protection shall be of the manual or automatic-reset type. Fan wheels or
propellers shall be constructed of aluminum or galvanized steel.
Centrifugal fan wheel housings shall be of galvanized steel, and both
centrifugal and propeller fan casings shall be constructed of aluminum or
galvanized steel. Steel elements of fans, except fan shafts, shall be
hot-dipped galvanized after fabrication or fabricated of mill galvanized
steel. Mill-galvanized steel surfaces and edges damaged or cut during
fabrication by forming, punching, drilling, welding, or cutting shall be
recoated with an approved zinc-rich compound. Fan wheels or propellers
shall be statically and dynamically balanced. Direct-drive fan motors
SECTION 23 82 02.00 10 Page 11

shall be of the multiple-speed variety. Belt-driven fans shall have

adjustable sheaves to provide not less than 20 percent fan-speed
adjustment. The sheave size shall be selected so that the fan speed at the
approximate midpoint of the sheave adjustment will produce the specified
air quantity. Centrifugal scroll-type fans shall be provided with
streamlined orifice inlet and V-belt drive. Each drive will be independent
of any other drive. Propeller fans shall be V-belt drive type with
adjustable pitch blades. V-belt driven fans shall be mounted on a
corrosion protected drive shaft supported by either maintenance-accessible
lubricated antifriction block-type bearings, or permanently lubricated ball
bearings. Each drive will be independent of any other drive. Drive
bearings shall be protected with water slingers or shields. V-belt drives
shall be fitted with guards where exposed to contact by personnel and
adjustable pitch sheaves.
2.5.3 Air Filters
Air filters shall be listed in accordance with requirements of UL 900,

except high efficiency particulate air filters of 99.97 percent efficiency
by the DOP Test Method shall be as listed under the label service and shall
meet the requirements of UL 586.
2.5.3.1 Extended Surface Pleated Panel Filters
Filters shall be 2 inch depth sectional type of the size indicated and
shall have an average efficiency of 25 to 30 percent when tested in
accordance with ASHRAE 52.1. Initial resistance at 500 feet/minute will
not exceed 0.36 inches water gauge. Filters shall be UL Class 2. Media
shall be nonwoven cotton and synthetic fiber mat. A wire support grid
bonded to the media shall be attached to a moisture resistant fiberboard
frame. Four edges of the filter media shall be bonded to the inside of the
frame to prevent air bypass and increase rigidity.
2.5.3.2 Replaceable Media Filters
Replaceable media filters shall be the dry-media type, of the size required
to suit the application. Filtering media shall be not less than 2 inches
thick fibrous glass media pad supported by a structural wire grid or woven
wire mesh. Pad shall be enclosed in a holding frame of not less than 16
gauge galvanized steel, and equipped with quick-opening mechanism for
changing filter media. The air flow capacity of the filter shall be based
on net filter face velocity not exceeding 300 feet/minute, with initial
resistance of 0.13 inches water gauge. Average efficiency shall be not
less than 30 percent when tested in accordance with ASHRAE 52.1.
.2.5.4 Pressure Vessels
Pressure vessels shall conform to ASME BPVC SEC VIII D1 or UL 207, as

applicable for maximum and minimum pressure or temperature encountered.
Where referenced publications do not apply, pressure components shall be
tested at 1-1/2 times design working pressure. Refrigerant wetted carbon
steel surfaces shall be pickled or abrasive blasted free of mill scale,
cleaned, dried, charged, and sealed.
2.5.4.1 Hot Gas Muffler
Unit shall be selected by the manufacturer for maximum noise attenuation.

Units rated for 30 tons capacity and under may be field tunable type.
SECTION 23 82 02.00 10 Page 12

2.5.4.2 Liquid Receiver
A liquid receiver shall be provided when a system's condenser or compressor

does not contain a refrigerant storage capacity of at least 20 percent in
excess of a fully charged system. Receiver shall be designed, filled, and
rated in accordance with the recommendations of AHRI 495, except as
modified herein. Receiver shall be fitted to include an inlet connection;
an outlet drop pipe with oil seal and oil drain where necessary; two
bull's-eye liquid level sight glass in same vertical plane, 90 degrees
apart and perpendicular to axis of receiver or external gauge glass with
metal guard and automatic stop valves; and purge, charge, equalizing,
pressurizing, plugged drain and service valves on the inlet and outlet
connections. Receiver shall be provided with a relief valve of capacity
and setting in accordance with ASHRAE 15 & 34.
2.5.4.3 Oil Separator
Separator shall be the high efficiency type and be provided with removable
flanged head for ease in removing float assembly and removable screen
cartridge assembly. Pressure drop through a separator shall not exceed 10
psi during the removal of hot gas entrained oil. Connections to compressor
shall be as recommended by the compressor manufacturer. Separator shall be
provided with an oil float valve assembly or needle valve and orifice
assembly, drain line shutoff valve, sight glass, and strainer.
2.5.4.4 Oil Reservoir
Reservoir capacity shall equal one charge of all connected compressors.

Reservoir shall be provided with an external liquid gauge glass, plugged
drain, and isolation valves. Vent piping between the reservoir and the
suction header shall be provided with a 5 psi pressure differential relief
valve. Reservoir shall be provided with the manufacturer's standard filter
on the oil return line to the oil level regulators.
2.5.5 Cabinet Construction
Casings for the specified unitary equipment shall be constructed of

galvanized steel or aluminum sheet metal and galvanized or aluminum
structural members. Minimum thickness of single wall exterior surfaces
shall be 18 gauge galvanized steel or 0.071 inch thick aluminum on units
with a capacity above 20 tons and 20 gauge galvanized steel or 0.064 inch
thick aluminum on units with a capacity less than 20 tons. Casing shall be
fitted with lifting provisions, access panels or doors, fan vibration
isolators, electrical control panel, corrosion-resistant components,
structural support members, insulated condensate drip pan and drain, and
internal insulation in the cold section of the casing. Where double-wall
insulated construction is proposed, minimum exterior galvanized sheet metal
thickness shall be 20 gauge. Provisions to permit replacement of major
unit components shall be incorporated. Penetrations of cabinet surfaces,
including the floor, shall be sealed. Unit shall be fitted with a drain
pan which extends under all areas where water may accumulate. Drain pan
shall be fabricated from Type 300 stainless steel, galvanized steel with
protective coating as required, or an approved plastic material. Pan
insulation shall be water impervious. Extent and effectiveness of the
insulation of unit air containment surfaces shall prevent, within limits of
the specified insulation, heat transfer between the unit exterior and
ambient air, heat transfer between the two conditioned air streams, and
condensation on surfaces. Insulation shall conform to ASTM C 1071. Paint
and finishes shall comply with the requirements specified in paragraph
SECTION 23 82 02.00 10 Page 13

FACTORY COATING.
2.5.5.1 Indoor Cabinet
Indoor cabinets shall be suitable for the specified indoor service and
enclose all unit components.
.2.6 ACCESSORIES
2.6.1 Gaskets
Gaskets shall conform to ASTM F 104 - classification for compressed sheet

with nitrile binder and acrylic fibers for maximum 700 degrees F service.
2.6.2 Bolts and Nuts
Bolts and nuts shall be in accordance with ASTM A 307. The bolt head shall
be marked to identify the manufacturer and the standard with which the bolt
complies in accordance with ASTM A 307.
2.7 FINISHES
2.7.1 Factory Coating
2.7.1.1 Equipment and Components
Unless otherwise specified, equipment and component items, when fabricated

from ferrous metal, shall be factory finished with the manufacturer's
standard finish, except that items located outside of buildings shall have
weather resistant finishes that will withstand 125 hours exposure to the
salt spray test specified in ASTM B 117 using a 5 percent sodium chloride
solution. Immediately after completion of the test, the specimen shall
show no signs of blistering, wrinkling, cracking, or loss of adhesion and
no sign of rust creepage beyond 1/8 inch on either side of the scratch
mark. Cut edges of galvanized surfaces where hot-dip galvanized sheet
steel is used shall be coated with a zinc-rich coating conforming to
ASTM D 520, Type I.
2.7.2 Factory Applied Insulation
Refrigeration equipment shall be provided with factory installed insulation

on surfaces subject to sweating including the suction line piping. Where
motors are the gas-cooled type, factory installed insulation shall be
provided on the cold-gas inlet connection to the motor in accordance with
manufacturer's standard practice. Factory insulated items installed
outdoors are not required to be fire-rated. As a minimum, factory
insulated items installed indoors shall have a flame spread index no higher
than 75 and a smoke developed index no higher than 150. Factory insulated
items (no jacket) installed indoors and which are located in air plenums,
in ceiling spaces, and in attic spaces shall have a flame spread index no
higher than 25 and a smoke developed index no higher than 50. Flame spread
and smoke developed indexes shall be determined by ASTM E 84. Insulation
shall be tested in the same density and installed thickness as the material
to be used in the actual construction. Material supplied by a manufacturer
with a jacket shall be tested as a composite material. Jackets, facings,
and adhesives shall have a flame spread index no higher than 25 and a smoke
developed index no higher than 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.
SECTION 23 82 02.00 10 Page 14

2.8.1 Condenser Water Piping and Accessories
Condenser water piping and accessories shall be provided and installed in

accordance with Section 23 64 26 CHILLED, CHILLED-HOT, AND CONDENSER WATER
PIPING SYSTEMS.
2.8.2 Cooling Tower
Cooling towers shall be provided and installed in accordance with Section

23 65 00 COOLING TOWERS.
2.8.3 Ductwork
Ductwork shall be provided and installed in accordance with Section 23 00 00

AIR SUPPLY, DISTRIBUTION, VENTILATION, AND EXHAUST SYSTEM.
2.8.4 Temperature Controls
Temperature controls shall be in accordance with Section 23 09 23 DIRECT

DIGITAL CONTROL FOR HVAC AND OTHER LOCAL BUILDING SYSTEMS.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
After becoming familiar with all details of the work, perform Verification
of Dimensions in the field, and advise the Contracting Officer of any
3.2 INSTALLATION
Work shall be performed in accordance with the manufacturer's published

diagrams, recommendations, and equipment warranty requirements. Where
equipment is specified to conform to the requirements of
ASME BPVC SEC VIII D1and ASME BPVC SEC IX, the design, fabrication, and
installation of the system shall conform to ASME BPVC SEC VIII D1 and
ASME BPVC SEC IX.
3.2.1 Equipment
Refrigeration equipment and the installation thereof shall conform to

ASHRAE 15 & 34. Necessary supports shall be provided for all equipment,
appurtenances, and pipe as required, including frames or supports for
compressors, pumps, cooling towers, condensers, and similar items.
Compressors shall be isolated from the building structure. If mechanical
vibration isolators are not provided, vibration absorbing foundations shall
be provided. Each foundation shall include isolation units consisting of
machine and floor or foundation fastenings, together with intermediate
isolation material. Other floor-mounted equipment shall be set on not less
than a 6 inch concrete pad doweled in place. Concrete foundations for
floor mounted pumps shall have a mass equivalent to three times the weight
of the components, pump, base plate, and motor to be supported. In lieu of
concrete pad foundation, concrete pedestal block with isolators placed
between the pedestal block and the floor may be provided. Concrete
pedestal block shall be of mass not less than three times the combined
pump, motor, and base weights. Isolators shall be selected and sized based
on load-bearing requirements and the lowest frequency of vibration to be
SECTION 23 82 02.00 10 Page 15

isolated. Isolators shall limit vibration to 20 percent at lowest

equipment rpm. Lines connected to pumps mounted on pedestal blocks shall
be provided with flexible connectors. Foundation drawings, bolt-setting
information, and foundation bolts shall be furnished prior to concrete
foundation construction for all equipment indicated or required to have
concrete foundations. Concrete for foundations shall be as specified in
Section 03 31 00.00 10 CAST-IN-PLACE STRUCTURAL CONCRETE. Equipment shall
be properly leveled, aligned, and secured in place in accordance with
3.2.2 Mechanical Room Ventilation
Mechanical ventilation systems shall be in accordance with Section 23 00 00

AIR SUPPLY, DISTRIBUTION, VENTILATION, AND EXHAUST SYSTEM.
Field applied insulation shall be as specified in Section 23 07 00 THERMAL

INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS, except as defined differently herein.
Painting required for surfaces not otherwise specified, and finish painting
of items only primed at the factory are specified in Section 09 90 00
Equipment shall be wiped clean, with all traces of oil, dust, dirt, or
paint spots removed. Temporary filters shall be provided for all fans that
are operated during construction, and new filters shall be installed after
all construction dirt has been removed from the building. System shall be
maintained in this clean condition until final acceptance. Bearings shall
be properly lubricated with oil or grease as recommended by the
manufacturer. Belts shall be tightened to proper tension. Control valves
and other miscellaneous equipment requiring adjustment shall be adjusted to
setting indicated or directed. Fans shall be adjusted to the speed
indicated by the manufacturer to meet specified conditions. Testing,
adjusting, and balancing shall be as specified in Section 23 05 93 TESTING,
ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING OF HVAC SYSTEMS.
3.4 DEMONSTRATIONS

Contracting Officer. The training period shall consist of a total 8 hours
of normal working time and start after the system is functionally completed
but prior to final acceptance tests. The field posted instructions shall
cover all of the items contained in the approved operation and maintenance
manuals as well as demonstrations of routine maintenance operations.
3.5 REFRIGERANT TESTS, CHARGING, AND START-UP
Split-system refrigerant piping systems shall be tested and charged as

specified in Section 23 23 00 REFRIGERANT PIPING. Packaged refrigerant
systems which are factory charged shall be checked for refrigerant and oil
capacity to verify proper refrigerant levels in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations. Following charging, packaged systems
shall be tested for leaks with a halide torch or an electronic leak
detector.
SECTION 23 82 02.00 10 Page 16

3.5.1 Refrigerant Leakage
If a refrigerant leak is discovered after the system has been charged, the
leaking portion of the system shall immediately be isolated from the
remainder of the system and the refrigerant pumped into the system receiver
or other suitable container. Under no circumstances shall the refrigerant
be discharged into the atmosphere.
3.5.2 Contractor's Responsibility
Take steps, at all times during the installation and testing of the
refrigeration system, to prevent the release of refrigerants into the
atmosphere. The steps shall include, but not be limited to, procedures
which will minimize the release of refrigerants to the atmosphere and the
use of refrigerant recovery devices to remove refrigerant from the system
and store the refrigerant for reuse or reclaim. At no time shall more than
3 ounces of refrigerant be released to the atmosphere in any one
occurrence. Any system leaks within the first year shall be repaired in
accordance with the requirements herein at no cost to the Government
including material, labor, and refrigerant if the leak is the result of
defective equipment, material, or installation.
3.6 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE TESTS
Before each refrigeration system is accepted, conduct tests to demonstrate

the general operating characteristics of all equipment by a registered
professional engineer or an approved manufacturer's start-up representative
experienced in system start-up and testing, at such times as directed.
Tests shall cover a period of not less than 48 hours for each system and
shall demonstrate that the entire system is functioning in accordance with
the drawings and specifications. Make corrections and adjustments, as
necessary, tests shall be re-conducted to demonstrate that the entire
system is functioning as specified. Prior to acceptance, service valve
seal caps and blanks over gauge points shall be installed and tightened.
Any refrigerant lost during the system startup shall be replaced. If tests
do not demonstrate satisfactory system performance, deficiencies shall be
corrected and the system shall be retested. Tests shall be conducted in
the presence of the Contracting Officer. Water and electricity required
for the tests will be furnished by the Government. Provide all material,
equipment, instruments, and personnel required for the test. Field tests
shall be coordinated with Section 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND
BALANCING OF HVAC SYSTEMS. Submit a report including the following
information (where values are taken at least three different times at
outside dry-bulb temperatures that are at least 5 degrees F apart):
a. Date and outside weather conditions.
b. The load on the system based on the following:
(1) The refrigerant used in the system.

(2) Condensing temperature and pressure.
(3) Suction temperature and pressure.
(4) Ambient, condensing and coolant temperatures.
(5) Running current, voltage and proper phase sequence for each
phase of all motors.
c. The actual on-site setting of operating and safety controls.
SECTION 23 82 02.00 10 Page 17

d. Thermostatic expansion valve superheat - value as determined by

field test.
e. Subcooling.
f. High and low refrigerant temperature switch set-points
g. Low oil pressure switch set-point.
h. Defrost system timer and thermostat set-points.
i. Moisture content.
j. Capacity control set-points.
k. Field data and adjustments which affect unit performance and energy
consumption.
l. Field adjustments and settings which were not permanently marked as

an integral part of a device.
SECTION 23 82 02.00 10 Page 18

SECTION 26 00 00.00 20
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

ASTM D 709 (2001; R 2007) Laminated Thermosetting

Materials
IEEE C2 (2007; Errata 2006 & 2007; INT 44-56 2007;

INT 47, 49, 50, 52-56 2008; INT 57, 58,
Safety Code
IEEE C57.12.28 (2005) Standard for Pad-Mounted Equipment

- Enclosure Integrity
IEEE C57.12.29 (2005) Pad-Mounted Equipment - Enclosure

Integrity for Coastal Environments
IEEE Std 100 (2000) The Authoritative Dictionary of

IEEE Standards Terms


Code - 2008 Edition
This section applies to certain sections of Division 11, EQUIPMENT,

Division 13, SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION, and Divisions 22 and 23, PLUMBING and
HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING. This section applies to all
sections of Division 26 and 33, ELECTRICAL and UTILITIES, of this project
specification unless specified otherwise in the individual sections. This
section has been incorporated into, and thus, does not apply to, and is not
referenced in the following sections.
Section 26 12 19.10 THREE-PHASE PAD MOUNTED TRANSFORMERS

Section 26 20 00 UNDERGROUND TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
Section 26 51 00 INTERIOR LIGHTING
SECTION 26 00 00.00 20 Page 1

Section 26 56 00 EXTERIOR LIGHTING

Section 27 10 00 BUILDING TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING SYSTEM
Section 33 70 02.00 10 ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM, UNDERGROUND

Section 33 82 00 TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTSIDE PLANT
1.3 DEFINITIONS
a. Unless otherwise specified or indicated, electrical and

electronics terms used in these specifications, and on the
drawings, shall be as defined in IEEE Std 100.
b. The technical sections referred to herein are those specification

sections that describe products, installation procedures, and
equipment operations and that refer to this section for detailed
description of submittal types.
c. The technical paragraphs referred to herein are those paragraphs

in PART 2 - PRODUCTS and PART 3 - EXECUTION of the technical
sections that describe products, systems, installation procedures,
equipment, and test methods.
1.4 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Electrical characteristics for this project shall be 13.80 kV primary, three

phase, four wire, 60 Hz, and 480/277 volts secondary, three phase, four
wire. Final connections to the power distribution system shall be made by
the Contractor as directed by the Contracting Officer.
1.5 ADDITIONAL SUBMITTALS INFORMATION
Submittals required in other sections that refer to this section must

conform to the following additional requirements as applicable.
1.5.1 Shop Drawings (SD-02)
Include wiring diagrams and installation details of equipment indicating

proposed location, layout and arrangement, control panels, accessories,
piping, ductwork, and other items that must be shown to ensure a
coordinated installation. Wiring diagrams shall identify circuit terminals
and indicate the internal wiring for each item of equipment and the
interconnection between each item of equipment. Drawings shall indicate
adequate clearance for operation, maintenance, and replacement of operating
equipment devices.
1.5.2 Product Data (SD-03)
Submittal shall include performance and characteristic curves.

these publications to the "authority having jurisdiction," or words of
similar meaning, to mean the Contracting Officer. Equipment, materials,
installation, and workmanship shall be in accordance with the mandatory and
SECTION 26 00 00.00 20 Page 2

advisory provisions of NFPA 70 unless more stringent requirements are

Provide materials and equipment that are products of manufacturers

regularly engaged in the production of such products which are of equal
material, design and workmanship. Products shall have been in satisfactory
commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to bid opening. The 2-year
period shall include applications of equipment and materials under similar
circumstances and of similar size. The product shall have been on sale on
the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturers' catalogs, or
brochures during the 2-year period. Where two or more items of the same
class of equipment are required, these items shall be products of a single
manufacturer; however, the component parts of the item need not be the
products of the same manufacturer unless stated in the technical section.
1.6.2.1 Alternative Qualifications
Products having less than a 2-year field service record will be acceptable
if a certified record of satisfactory field operation for not less than
6000 hours, exclusive of the manufacturers' factory or laboratory tests, is
furnished.
1.6.2.2 Material and Equipment Manufacturing Date
Products manufactured more than 3 years prior to date of delivery to site

shall not be used, unless specified otherwise.
1.7 WARRANTY
The equipment items shall be supported by service organizations which are

reasonably convenient to the equipment installation in order to render
1.8 POSTED OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
Provide for each system and principal item of equipment as specified in the
technical sections for use by operation and maintenance personnel. The
operating instructions shall include the following:
a. Wiring diagrams, control diagrams, and control sequence for each

principal system and item of equipment.
b. Start up, proper adjustment, operating, lubrication, and shutdown

procedures.
c. Safety precautions.
d. The procedure in the event of equipment failure.
e. Other items of instruction as recommended by the manufacturer of

each system or item of equipment.
Print or engrave operating instructions and frame under glass or in

approved laminated plastic. Post instructions where directed. For
operating instructions exposed to the weather, provide weather-resistant
materials or weatherproof enclosures. Operating instructions shall not
SECTION 26 00 00.00 20 Page 3

fade when exposed to sunlight and shall be secured to prevent easy removal
or peeling.
1.9 MANUFACTURER'S NAMEPLATE

acceptable.
1.10 FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATES
ASTM D 709. Provide laminated plastic nameplates for each equipment

enclosure, relay, switch, and device; as specified in the technical
sections or as indicated on the drawings. Each nameplate inscription shall
identify the function and, when applicable, the position. Nameplates shall
be melamine plastic, 0.125 inch thick, white with black center core.
Surface shall be matte finish. Corners shall be square. Accurately align
lettering and engrave into the core. Minimum size of nameplates shall be
one by 2.5 inches. Lettering shall be a minimum of 0.25 inch high normal
block style.
1.11 WARNING SIGNS
Provide warning signs for the enclosures of electrical equipment including

substations, pad-mounted transformers, pad-mounted switches, generators,
and switchgear having a nominal rating exceeding 600 volts.
When the enclosure integrity of such equipment is specified to be in

accordance with IEEE C57.12.28 or IEEE C57.12.29, such as for
pad-mounted transformers, provide self-adhesive warning signs on
the outside of the high voltage compartment door(s). Sign shall
be a decal and shall have nominal dimensions of 7 by 10 inches
with the legend "DANGER HIGH VOLTAGE" printed in two lines of
nominal 2 inch high letters. The word "DANGER" shall be in white
letters on a red background and the words "HIGH VOLTAGE" shall be
in black letters on a white background. Decal shall be Panduit
No. PPSO710D72 or approved equal.
1.12 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
Electrical installations shall conform to IEEE C2, NFPA 70, and

Where specified in the technical sections, furnish the services of

competent instructors to give full instruction to designated Government
personnel in the adjustment, operation, and maintenance of the specified
systems and equipment, including pertinent safety requirements as required.
Instructors shall be thoroughly familiar with all parts of the installation
and shall be trained in operating theory as well as practical operation and
maintenance work. Instruction shall be given during the first regular work
week after the equipment or system has been accepted and turned over to the
Government for regular operation. The number of man-days (8 hours per day)
of instruction furnished shall be as specified in the individual section.
When more than 4 man-days of instruction are specified, use approximately
half of the time for classroom instruction. Use other time for instruction
with equipment or system. When significant changes or modifications in the
SECTION 26 00 00.00 20 Page 4

equipment or system are made under the terms of the contract, provide
additional instructions to acquaint the operating personnel with the
changes or modifications.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 FACTORY APPLIED FINISH
Electrical equipment shall have factory-applied painting systems which

shall, as a minimum, meet the requirements of NEMA 250 corrosion-resistance
test and the additional requirements specified in the technical sections.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 FIELD APPLIED PAINTING
Paint electrical equipment as required to match finish of adjacent surfaces

or to meet the indicated or specified safety criteria. Painting shall be
as specified in the section specifying the associated electrical equipment.
3.2 FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATE MOUNTING
Provide number, location, and letter designation of nameplates as

indicated. Fasten nameplates to the device with a minimum of two
sheet-metal screws or two rivets.
3.3 WARNING SIGN MOUNTING
Provide the number of signs required to be readable from each accessible

side, but space the signs a maximum of 30 feet apart.
SECTION 26 00 00.00 20 Page 5

SECTION 26 05 48.00 10
SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

ASTM E 580/E 580M (2009a) Application of Ceiling Suspension

Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-In
Panels in Areas Requiring Moderate Seismic
Restraint
UFC 3-310-04 (2007; Change 1) Seismic Design for

Buildings
UL 1598 (2008; R 2006 thru 2010) Luminaires
The requirements for seismic protection measures described in this section

shall be applied to the electrical equipment and systems listed below.
Structural requirements shall be in accordance with Section 13 09 00
ANTI-TERRORISM/FORCE PROTECTION MEASURES.
1.2.2 Electrical Equipment
Electrical equipment shall include the following items to the extent

required on the drawings or in other sections of these specifications:
Control Panels Air Handling Units

Pumps with Motors Switchgear
Light Fixtures
Transformers
Switchboards (Floor Mounted)
1.2.3 Electrical Systems
The following electrical systems shall be installed as required on the

drawings and other sections of these specifications and shall be
seismically protected in accordance with this specification:
SECTION 26 05 48.00 10 Page 1

Section 26 20 00 Interior Distribution System

Section 26 09 23.00 40 Lighting Control Devices
Section 28 31 76 Interior Fire Alrm and Mass Notification System
1.2.4 Contractor Designed Bracing
The Contractor shall design the bracing in accordance with UFC 3-310-04 and
additional data furnished by the Contracting Officer. Resistance to
lateral forces induced by earthquakes shall be accomplished without
consideration of friction resulting from gravity loads. UFC 3-310-04 uses
parameters for the building, not for the equipment in the building;
therefore, corresponding adjustments to the formulas shall be required.
Loadings determined using UFC 3-310-04 are based on strength design;
therefore, AISC 325 shall be used for the design. The bracing for the
following electrical equipment and systems shall be developed by the
Contractor:
a. Control Panels
b. Pumps with Motors
c. Light Fixtures
d. Air Handling Units
e. Switchgear
1.2.5 Conduits Requiring No Special Seismic Restraints
Seismic restraints may be omitted from electrical conduit less than 2-1/2
inches trade size. All other interior conduit, shall be seismically
protected as specified.
1.3 EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS
1.3.1 Rigidly Mounted Equipment
The following specific items of equipment: to be furnished under this

contract shall be constructed and assembled to withstand the seismic forces
specified in UFC 3-310-04. Each item of rigid electrical equipment shall
be entirely located and rigidly attached on one side only of a building
expansion joint. Piping, electrical conduit, etc., which cross the
expansion joint shall be provided with flexible joints that are capable of
accommodating displacements equal to the full width of the joint in both
orthogonal directions.
Engine-Generators
Transformers
Free Standing Electric Motors
1.3.2 Nonrigid or Flexibly-Mounted Equipment
The following specific items of equipment to be furnished: Motors and

light fixtures shall be constructed and assembled to resist a horizontal
lateral force of 0.352 times the operating weight of the equipment at the
vertical center of gravity of the equipment.
SECTION 26 05 48.00 10 Page 2

1.4 SUBMITTALS

SD-02 Shop Drawings
Lighting Fixtures in Buildings

Equipment Requirements
Detail drawings along with catalog cuts, templates, and erection

and installation details, as appropriate, for the items listed.
Submittals shall be complete in detail; shall indicate thickness,
type, grade, class of metal, and dimensions; and shall show
with relation to the building construction.
SD-03 Product Data
Lighting Fixtures in Buildings

Equipment Requirements
Copies of the design calculations with the detail drawings.

Calculations shall be stamped by a registered engineer and shall
verify the capability of structural members to which bracing is
attached for carrying the load from the brace.
Contractor Designed Bracing
Copies of the Design Calculations with the Drawings.

Calculations shall be approved, certified, stamped and signed by a
Registered Professional Engineer. Calculations shall verify the
capability of structural members to which bracing is attached for
carrying the load from the brace.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 LIGHTING FIXTURE SUPPORTS
Lighting fixtures and supports shall conform to UL 1598.
2.2 SWAY BRACING MATERIALS
Sway bracing materials (e.g. rods, plates, rope, angles, etc.) shall be as
specified in Section 13 09 00 ANTI-TERRORISM/FORCE PROTECTION MEASURES.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 SWAY BRACES FOR CONDUIT
Conduit shall be braced as for an equivalent weight pipe in accordance with

Section 13 09 00 ANTI-TERRORISM/FORCE PROTECTION MEASURES.
3.2 LIGHTING FIXTURES IN BUILDINGS
Lighting fixtures and supports shall conform to the following:
SECTION 26 05 48.00 10 Page 3

3.2.1 Pendant Fixtures
Pendant fixtures shall conform to the requirements of UFC 3-310-04.
3.2.2 Ceiling Attached Fixtures
3.2.2.1 Recessed Fluorescent Fixtures
Recessed fluorescent individual or continuous-row mounted fixtures shall be

supported by a seismic-resistant suspended ceiling support system built in
accordance with ASTM E 580/E 580M. Seismic protection for the fixtures
shall conform to the requirements of UFC 3-310-04. Recessed lighting
fixtures not over 56 poundsin weight may be supported by and attached
directly to the ceiling system runners using screws or bolts, number and
size as required by the seismic design. Fixture accessories, including
louvers, diffusers, and lenses shall have lock or screw attachments.
3.2.2.2 Surface-Mounted Fluorescent Fixtures
Surface-mounted fluorescent individual or continuous-row fixtures shall be

attached to a seismic-resistant ceiling support system built in accordance
with ASTM E 580/E 580M. Seismic protection for the fixtures shall conform
to the requirements of UFC 3-310-04.
3.2.3 Assembly Mounted on Outlet Box
A supporting assembly, that is intended to be mounted on an outlet box,

shall be designed to accommodate mounting features on 4 inch boxes, plaster
rings, and fixture studs.
3.2.4 Wall-Mounted Emergency Light Unit
Attachments for wall-mounted emergency light units shall be designed and

secured for the worst expected seismic disturbance at the site.
3.2.5 Lateral Force
Structural requirements for light fixture bracing shall be in accordance

with Section 13 09 00 ANTI-TERRORISM/FORCE PROTECTION MEASURES.
SECTION 26 05 48.00 10 Page 4

SECTION 26 05 71.00 40
LOW VOLTAGE OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES


Dielectric Breakdown Voltage of Insulating
Liquids Using Disk Electrodes
IEEE C57.13 (2008) Standard Requirements for

Instrument Transformers
ANSI C12.1 (2008) Electric Meters Code for

ANSI C78.23 (1995; R 2003) American National Standard

for Incandescent Lamps - Miscellaneous
Types

NEMA AB 3 (2006) Molded Case Circuit Breakers and

Their Application
NEMA FU 1 (2002; R 2007) Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses
NEMA ICS 1 (2000; R 2005; R 2008) Standard for

Industrial Control and Systems: General
Requirements
NEMA ICS 2 (2000; R 2005; Errata 2008) Standard for

Controllers, Contactors, and Overload
Relays Rated 600 V

NFPA 70 (2011) National Electrical Code
SECTION 26 05 71.00 40 Page 1

UL 489 (2009) Molded-Case Circuit Breakers,

Molded-Case Switches, and Circuit-Breaker
Enclosures
UL 508 (1999; Reprint Apr 2010) Industrial

Control Equipment
1.2 SUBMITTALS

that reviews the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in
Prior to the beginning of construction, submit manufactures

equipment and performance data for the following items including
use life, system functional flows, safety features, and mechanical
automated details..
Fuses
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Submit Connection Diagrams and Fabrication Drawings for the

following items in accordance with paragraph entitled, "General
Submit Installation drawings for the following items in accordance

with the paragraph entitled, "Installation," of this section.
Control Devices
Protective Devices
SD-03 Product Data
Submit manufacturer's equipment and performance data for the

following items including use life, system functional flows,
safety features, and mechanical automated details.
Motor Control
Enclosures
Circuit Breakers
Control Devices
Indicating Lights
SD-07 Certificates
Submit certificates for Circuit Tests on similar motor-control or

submit motor-circuit protector (MCP) units under actual conditions
in lieu of factory tests on the actual units provided. Also
SECTION 26 05 71.00 40 Page 2

include dielectric tests.
Submit manufacturer's instructions for the following items,

including special provisions required to install equipment
components and system packages. Provide detail on resistance
impedances, hazards and safety precautions within the special
notices.
Control Devices
Protective Devices
Submit Operation and Maintenance Manuals for the following

equipment:
Manual Motor Controllers

Magnetic Motor Controllers
Combination Motor Controllers
Circuit Breakers
Section 26 00 00.00 20 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS applies to

work specified in this section.
Submit Connection Diagrams showing the relations and connections of control

devices and protective devices by showing the general physical layout of
all controls, the interconnection of one system (or portion of system) with
another, and internal tubing, wiring, and other devices.
Submit Fabrication Drawings for control devices and protective devices

consisting of fabrication and assembly details to be performed in the
factory.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MOTOR CONTROL
Conform to NEMA ICS 1, NEMA ICS 2, and UL 508 for motor controllers.
Provide controllers that have thermal overload protection in each phase.
2.1.1 Manual Motor Controllers
Provide full-voltage, manually operated manual motor controllers for the

control and protection of single-phase 60-hertz ac fractional-horsepower
squirrel-cage induction motors.
Provide single-throw, single- or double-pole, three-position controllers

rated at not more than 1 horsepower at 115- and 230-volts single phase.
Include a supporting base or body of electrical insulating material with
enclosed switching mechanism, yoke, thermal overload relay, and terminal
connectors. Provide controllers that clearly indicate operating
condition: on, off, or tripped.
Provide toggle- or key-operated type manual motor controllers as indicated
SECTION 26 05 71.00 40 Page 3

and arrange so that they are lockable with a padlock in the "OFF" position.
Provide recessed manual motor controllers for single-speed,

fractional-horsepower squirrel-cage induction motors, that include a single
controller and indicating light in a 4-inch square wall outlet box, for
flush-wiring devices with matching corrosion-resistant steel flush cover
plate. Provide surface-mounted manual motor controllers for single-speed,
fractional-horsepower squirrel cage induction motors that include a single
controller and indicating light in a NEMA 250, Type 1 general-purpose
enclosure.
Provide recessed and surface-mounted manual motor controllers for two-speed,

fractional-horsepower squirrel-cage induction motors, that include two
controllers, two indicating lights, and a selector switch in a
multiple-gang wall outlet box for flush-wiring devices, with matching
corrosion-resistant steel flush-cover plate. Provide surface-mounted
manual motor controllers for two-speed fractional-horsepower squirrel-cage
induction motors, that include two controllers, two indicating lights, and
a selector switch in a NEMA 250, Type 1 general-purpose enclosure.
2.1.2 Magnetic Motor Controllers
2.1.2.1 Full-Voltage Controllers
Provide full-voltage, full magnetic devices in accordance with NEMA ICS 1,

NEMA ICS 2, and UL 508for magnetic motor controllers for the control and
protection of single- and three-phase, 60-hertz, squirrel-cage induction
motors.
Provide operating coil assembly that operates satisfactorily between 85 and

110 percent of rated coil voltage. Provide 120 volts, 60 hertz motor
control circuits.
Provide controller with two normally open and two normally closed auxiliary
contacts rated per NEMA ICS 1 and NEMA ICS 2 in addition to the sealing-in
contact for control circuits.
Provide solderless pressure wire terminal connectors for line-and

load-connections to controllers.
Include three manual reset thermal overload devices for overcurrent

protection, one in each pole of the controller. Provide thermal overload
relays of bimetallic nonadjustable type with continuous current ratings and
service-limit current ratings, and with a plus or minus 15 percent
adjustment to compensate for ambient operating conditions.
Provide an externally operable manual-reset button to re-establish control

power to the holding coil of the electromagnet. After the controller has
tripped from overload, ensure that resetting the motor-overload device does
not restart the motor.
Provide enclosure in accordance with NEMA 250, Type 1.
2.1.2.2 Reduced-Voltage Starters
Conform to the requirements for full-voltage controllers for

reduced-voltage starters, except for voltage, and to the following
additional requirements.
SECTION 26 05 71.00 40 Page 4

Fully protect the motor during all phases of motor starting with an
overload device in each motor leg. Rate starter contacts to withstand the
switching surges during selector to full voltage. Provide starter that
contains the necessary sensing and timing devices to monitor motor
operation and select the correct time for selector to full voltage.
Adequately ventilate resistors and autotransformers used for starting.

Ventilate solid-state starters for starting cycles as well as any follow-on
restart-run cycles. Operate external control circuits or solid-state
starters at a maximum of 120 volts ac.
For solid-state starters, provide adjustable starting torque from 0 to 50

percent of applied voltage, minimum. Provide autotransformer starters with
a minimum of three taps above 50 percent reduced voltage.
2.1.3 Combination Motor Controllers
Following requirements are in addition to the requirements specified for

magnetic motor controller:
Provide combination motor controllers for the control and protection of

single-and three-phase 60-hertz alternating-current squirrel-cage
induction motors with branch-circuit disconnecting and protective
devices in accordance with NEMA ICS 1, NEMA ICS 2, and NEMA ICS 6.
For combination motor controllers include magnetic motor controllers

and molded-case circuit breakers or MCP in metal enclosures in
accordance with NEMA 250 or motor-control center draw-out assemblies
with control-power transformers, selector switches, pushbuttons, and
indicating lights as follows:
Provide full-voltage, full-magnetic devices as specified in this

section under paragraph entitled, "Remote-Control Station
Enclosures." for magnetic motor controllers and enclosures.
Provide thermal-magnetic breakers as specified in paragraph

entitled, "Manual Motor Controllers."for molded-case circuit
breakers. Manufacturer's standard MCP may be used in lieu of
molded-case circuit breakers.
Provide control-power transformers 120-volt ac maximum, selector

switches, pushbuttons, and pilot lights as required.
Identify combination motor controllers with identification plates

affixed to front cover of the controller.
2.1.3.1 Nonreversing Combination Motor Controllers
Following requirements are in addition to the requirements for magnetic

motor controllers:
For nonreversing combination motor controllers for the control and

protection of single-speed squirrel-cage induction motors, include a
magnetic controller with molded-case circuit breaker or MCP with
selector switch or start/stop pushbutton and indicating light in the
cover of the enclosure.
Provide rating of single and three-phase single-speed full-voltage

magnetic controllers for nonplugging and nonjogging duty in accordance
SECTION 26 05 71.00 40 Page 5

with NEMA ICS 1 and NEMA ICS 2.
Provide wiring and connections for full-voltage single-speed magnetic

controllers in accordance with NEMA ICS 1 and NEMA ICS 2.
2.1.3.2 Reversing Combination Motor Controllers

motor controllers:
For reversing combination motor controllers for the control and protection
of single-speed squirrel-cage induction motors, include two interlocked
magnetic controllers with molded-case circuit breaker or MCP, with selector
switch or forward/reverse/stop pushbutton and two indicating lights in the
cover of the enclosure. Indicate with indicating lights the forward and
reverse running connection of the motor controller.
Provide rating of single and three-phase single-speed full-voltage magnetic

controllers for plug-stop, plug-reverse, or jogging duty in accordance with
NEMA ICS 1 and NEMA ICS 2.
Provide wiring and connections for full-voltage single-speed magnetic

controllers in accordance with NEMA ICS 1 and NEMA ICS 2.
2.1.3.3 Two-Speed Combination Motor Controllers

motor controllers:
For two-speed combination motor controllers for the control and

protection of single- and two-winding, two-speed, three-phase,
squirrel-cage induction motors, include two magnetic controllers with
molded-case circuit breaker or MCP, with selector switch or
fast/slow/stop pushbutton and two indicating lights in the cover of the
enclosure. Indicate with indicating lights the high- and low-speed
running connection of the motor controller.
Provide rating of three-phase, two-speed, full-voltage, magnetic

controllers for nonplugging and nonjogging duty for constant- and
variable-torque motors in accordance with NEMA ICS 1 and NEMA ICS 2.

controllers for nonplugging and nonjogging duty for constant-horsepower
motors in accordance with NEMA ICS 1 and NEMA ICS 2.

controllers for plug-stop, plug-reverse, or jogging duty for
constant-torque, variable-torque, and constant horsepower motors in
accordance with NEMA ICS 1 and NEMA ICS 2.
2.2 ENCLOSURES
2.2.1 Equipment Enclosures
Provide enclosures for equipment in accordance with NEMA 250.
Contain equipment installed inside, clean, dry locations in a NEMA Type 1,

general-purpose sheet-steel enclosure.
SECTION 26 05 71.00 40 Page 6

2.3 CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Provide circuit breakers that conform to UL 489, and NEMA AB 3.
2.3.1 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Provide molded case, manually operated, trip-free, circuit breakers, with

inverse-time thermal-overload protection and instantaneous magnetic
short-circuit protection as required. Completely enclose circuit breakers
in a molded case, with the calibrated sensing element factory-sealed to
prevent tampering.
Locate thermal-magnetic tripping elements in each pole of the circuit

breaker, and provide inverse-time-delay thermal overload protection and
instantaneous magnetic short-circuit protection. Provide instantaneous
magnetic tripping element, that is adjustable and accessible from the front
of the breaker on frame sizes larger than 100 amperes.
Size breaker as required for the continuous current rating of the

circuit. Provide breaker class as required.
Provide sufficient interrupting capacity of the panel and lighting branch

circuit breakers, to successfully interrupt the maximum short-circuit
current imposed on the circuit at the breaker terminals. Provide circuit
breaker interrupting capacities with a minimum of 10,000 amperes and that
conform to NEMA AB 3.
Provide the common-trip type multipole circuit breakers having a single

operating handle and a two-position on/off indication. Provide circuit
breakers with temperature compensation for operation in an ambient
temperature of 104 degrees F. Provide circuit breakers that have root mean
square (rms) symmetrical interrupting ratings sufficient to protect the
circuit being supplied. Interrupting ratings may have selective type
tripping (time delay, magnetic, thermal, or ground fault).
Provide phenolic composition breaker body capable of having such

accessories as handle-extension, handle-locking, and padlocking devices
attached where required.
Provide circuit breakers used for meter circuit disconnects that meet the
applicable requirements of NFPA 70 and that are of the motor-circuit
protector type.
For circuit breakers used for service disconnection, provide an enclosed

circuit-breaker type with external handle for manual operation. Provide
sheet metal enclosures with a hinged cover suitable for surface mounting.
2.3.2 Enclosed Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
For enclosed circuit breakers, provide thermal-magnetic molded-case circuit

breakers in surface-mounted, nonventilated enclosures conforming to the
appropriate articles of NEMA 250 and UL 489.
SECTION 26 05 71.00 40 Page 7

Provide enclosed circuit breakers in nonhazardous locations as follows:
Contain circuit breakers installed inside clean, dry locations in NEMA

Type 1, general purpose sheet steel enclosures.
Contain circuit breakers installed in unprotected outdoor locations, in

NEMA Type 3R, weather-resistant sheet steel enclosures that are
splashproof, weatherproof, sleetproof, and moisture resistant.
2.4 FUSES
Provide a complete set of fuses for all switches and switchgear. Rate fuses
that have a voltage rating of not less than the circuit voltage.
Make no change in continuous-current rating, interrupting rating, and

clearing or melting time of fuses unless written permission has first been
secured.
Provide nonrenewable cartridge type fuses for ratings 30 amperes, 125 volts
or less. Provide renewable cartridge type fuses for ratings above 30
amperes 600 volts or less with time-delay dual elements, except where
otherwise indicated. Conform to NEMA FU 1 for fuses.
Install special fuses such as extra-high interrupting-capacity fuses, fuses

for welding machines, and capacitor fuses where required. Plug fuses are
not permitted.
Label fuses showing UL class, interrupting rating, and time-delay

characteristics, when applicable. Additionally, clearly list fuse
information on equipment drawings.
Provide porcelain fuse holders when field-mounted in a cabinet or box. Do

not use fuse holders made of such materials as ebony asbestos, Bakelite, or
pressed fiber for field installation.
2.5 CONTROL DEVICES
2.5.1 Magnetic Contactors
Provide magnetic contactors in accordance with NEMA ICS 1 and NEMA ICS 2 as
required for the control of low-voltage, 60-hertz, tungsten-lamp loads,
fluorescent-lamp loads, resistance-heating loads, and the primary windings
of low-voltage transformers.
Provide core-and-coil assembly that operates satisfactorily with coil

voltage between 85 and 110 percent of its voltage rating.
Provide contactor that is designed with a normally open holding circuit

auxiliary contact for control circuits, with a rating in accordance with
NEMA ICS 1 and NEMA ICS 2.
Furnish solderless pressure wire terminal connectors, or make available for

line-and-load connections to contactors in accordance with NEMA ICS 1 and
SECTION 26 05 71.00 40 Page 8

NEMA ICS 2.
Provide magnetic contactors with a rating in accordance with NEMA ICS 1and
NEMA ICS 2.
2.5.2 Control-Circuit Transformers
Provide control-circuit transformers within the enclosure of magnetic

contactors and motor controllers when the line voltage is in excess of 120
volts. Provide encapsulated dry type, single-phase, 60-hertz transformer,
with a 120-volt (or 24-volt) isolated secondary winding.
Do not provide a transformer with a rated primary voltage less than the
rated voltage of the controller, or a rated secondary current less than the
continuous-duty current of the control circuit.
Provide voltage regulation of the transformer such that, with rated primary
voltage and frequency, the secondary voltage is not less than 95 percent
nor more than 105 percent of rated secondary voltage.
Provide source of supply for control-circuit transformers at the load side

of the main disconnecting device. Protect secondary winding of the
transformer and control-circuit wiring against overloads and short
circuits, with fuses selected in accordance with NEMA ICS 6. Ground
secondary winding of the control-circuit transformer in accordance with
NEMA ICS 6.
2.5.3 Magnetic Control Relays
Provide magnetic control relays for energizing and de-energizing the coils
of magnetic contactors or other magnetically operated devices, in response
to variations in the conditions of electric control devices in accordance
with NEMA ICS 1, and NEMA ICS 2.
Provide core-and-coil assembly that operates satisfactorily with coil

voltages between 85 and 110 percent of their voltage rating.
Provide relays that are designed to accommodate normally open and normally
closed contacts.
Provide magnetic control relays with a continuous contact rating of 10

amperes, and with current-making and -breaking ability in accordance with
NEMA ICS 1 and NEMA ICS 2, two normally open and two normally closed.
2.6 FACTORY TESTING
Perform factory tests on control and low voltage protective devices in

accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
Conduct short-circuit tests in accordance with Section 2 of NEMA ICS 1.
2.7 INDICATING LIGHTS
2.7.1 General-Purpose Type
For indicating lights, provide oiltight instrument devices with threaded

base and collar for flush-mounting, translucent convex lens, candelabra
screw-base lampholder, and 120-volt, 6-watt, Type S-6 incandescent lamp in
accordance with ANSI C78.23. Provide indicating lights color coded in
SECTION 26 05 71.00 40 Page 9

accordance with NEMA ICS 6.
Provide indicating lights in remote-control stations when pushbuttons and

selector switches are out of sight of the controller.
2.7.2 Switchboard Indicating Lights
For switchboard indicating lights, provide the manufacturer's standard

transformer type units utilizing low-voltage lamps and convex lenses of the
colors indicated. Provide indicating lights that are capable of being
relamped from the switchboard front. Indicating lights utilizing resistors
in series with the lamps are not permitted except in direct-current control
circuits. Provide lights that have a press-to-test feature.
2.8 FINISH
Protect metallic materials against corrosion. Provide equipment with the

standard finish by the manufacturer when used for most indoor
installations.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
Install Control devices and protective devices that are not factory
installed in equipment, in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations and field adjusted and operation tested. Conform to NFPA 70,
NEMA ICS 1 and NEMA ICS 2 requirements for installation of control and
protective devices.
3.2 FIELD TESTING
Demonstrate to operate as indicated control and protective devices not

factory installed in equipment.
Ratio and verify tap settings of instrumentation, potential, and current

transformers.
Perform dielectric tests on insulating oil in oil circuit breakers before

the breakers are energized. Test oil in accordance with ASTM D 877, and
provide breakdown voltage that is not less than 25,000 volts. Provide
manufacturer certification that the oil contains no PCB's, and affix a
label to that effect on each breaker tank and on each oil drum containing
the insulating oil.
Field adjust reduced-voltage starting devices to obtain optimum operating

conditions. Provide test meters and instrument transformers that conform
to ANSI C12.1 and IEEE C57.13.
Do not energize control and protective devices until recorded test data has
been approved. Provide final test reports with a cover letter/sheet
clearly marked with the System name, Date, and the words "Final Test
Reports - Forward to the Systems Engineer/Condition Monitoring
Office/Predictive Testing Group for inclusion in the Maintenance Database."
SECTION 26 05 71.00 40 Page 10

SECTION 26 08 00.00 10
COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES


1.2 DEFINITIONS

differences exist.
SIMILAR TERMS
Commissioning ACG Procedural

Standard Commissioning Standards for
Commissioning
Commissioning ACG Certified NEBB Qualified

Agent Commissioning Commissioning
Agent Administrator
1.3.1 General

ACG Commissioning Guideline or NEBB Commissioning Standard unless
otherwise stated herein. Consider mandatory all recommendations and
suggested practices contained in the Commissioning Standard. Use the
Commissioning Standard for all aspects of Commissioning, including
qualifications for the Commissioning Firm and Agent and calibration of
Commissioning instruments. Where the instrument manufacturer calibration
recommendations are more stringent than those listed in the Commissioning
SECTION 26 08 00.00 10 Page 1

Standard, the manufacturer's recommendations shall be adhered to. All

quality assurance provisions of the Commissioning Standard such as
performance guarantees shall be part of this contract. For systems or
system components not covered in the Commissioning Standard, Commissioning
procedures shall be developed by the Commissioning Agent. Where new
procedures, requirements, etc., applicable to the Contract requirements
have been published or adopted by the body responsible for the
Commissioning Standard used (ACG, NEBB), the requirements and
recommendations contained in these procedures and requirements shall be
considered mandatory.
1.3.2 Energy

the project.
1.4 SUBMITTALS

SD-03 Product Data


Performance Testing.
1.5 Commissioning Team
1.5.1 Contractor's Commissioning Specialist

1.5.2 Contractor's Commissioning Team Members

SECTION 26 08 00.00 10 Page 2

PART 3 EXECUTION

(TAB) Specialist

3.2 TESTS

SECTION 26 08 00.00 10 Page 3




SECTION 26 08 00.00 10 Page 4

APPENDIX A
SECTION 26 08 00.00 10 Page 5

Pre-Functional Performance Test Checklist - Lighting Controls
For Lighting Controls:
Checklist Item
a. Panel label has been installed per ___ ___ ___ X X ___
specifications.
b. Cover is installed and secured ___ ___ ___ X X ___
c. Panel is finished according to contract

specifications. ___ ___ ___ X X ___
d. Enclosure is free of construction debris. ___ ___ ___ X X ___
e. Room occupancy sensors are located

per plans. ___ ___ ___ X X ___
Electrical
a. Line and low voltage is serperated. ___ ___ ___ X X ___
b. Enclosure is grounded. ___ ___ ___ X X ___
SECTION 26 08 00.00 10 Page 6

Pre-Functional Performance Test Checklist - Photovoltaic Array
For PV Array:
Checklist Item

secured to building. ___ ___ X ___ X ___
b. Array is properly labeled. ___ ___ X ___ X ___
c. Array is finished according to contract

specifications. ___ ___ X ___ X ___
d. Glass is not cracked or broken. ___ ___ X ___ X ___
e. The array has no signs of delamination or

water infiltration. ___ ___ X ___ X ___
f. No cells appear to be damages or

discolored. ___ ___ X ___ X ___
a. Wiring is separated and secured. ___ ___ X ___ X ___
b. Enclosure is grounded. ___ ___ X ___ X ___
SECTION 26 08 00.00 10 Page 7

SECTION 26 08 00.00 10 Page 8

APPENDIX B
SECTION 26 08 00.00 10 Page 9

SECTION 26 08 00.00 10 Page 10

Functional Performance Test Checklist - Lighting Controls
For Lighting Controls:
1. Functional Performance Test: Contractor shall demonstrate

operation of Lighting Controls in accordance with specifications including
the following:
a. Verify occupancy sensors activate lighting system. ______
b. Verify photo cell controls outdoor lighting._____

Signature and Date
SECTION 26 08 00.00 10 Page 11

Functional Performance Test Checklist - Photovoltaic Array
For PV Array:
1. Functional Performance Test: Contractor shall demonstrate

operation of the PV array in accordance with specifications including
the following:
a. Verify PV array is providing energy.
b. Verify system senses available anergy and activates.
2. Verify array inlet/outlet readings, compare to design conditions and

manufacturer's performance data.
Design Actual
Output during peak sunlight exposure (kWh) ________ ________

Array power (kWh) ________ ________
Specified Current for system: _______ Amps
Specified Current per string: _______ Amps
Measured Values: Voltage Current
String 1: ________ ________

String 2: ________ ________
String 3: ________ ________
3. Check and report unusual vibration, noise, etc.
____________________________________________________________________________

Signature and Date
SECTION 26 08 00.00 10 Page 12

SECTION 26 08 00.00 10 Page 13

-End of document
SECTION 26 08 00.00 10 Page 14

SECTION 26 09 23.00 40
LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

GREEN SEAL (GS)
GC-12 (1997) Occupancy Sensors
IESNA LM-48 (2001) Guide for Testing the Calibration

of Locking-Type Photoelectric Control
Devices Used in Outdoor Applications

Industrial Control and Systems: General
Requirements
NEMA ICS 2 (2000; R 2005; Errata 2008) Standard for

Controllers, Contactors, and Overload
Relays Rated 600 V
NEMA ICS 6 (1993; R 2006) Enclosures
UL 773 (1995; Reprint Mar 2002) Standard for

Plug-In, Locking Type Photocontrols for
Use with Area Lighting
UL 773A (2006; Reprint Mar 2011) Standard for

Nonindustrial Photoelectric Switches for
Lighting Control

Submit Installation Drawings for light-sensitive, occupancy sensitive,

motion sensitive control devices in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommended instructions for installation.
1.3 SUBMITTALS

SECTION 26 09 23.00 40 Page 1

SD-03 Product Data
Submit manufacturer's catalog data for Photoconductive Control

Devices.
Submit Installation Drawings for Light-Sensitive Control Devices

in accordance with paragraph entitled, "General Requirements," of
this section.
Dimming ballast controls
Light Level Sensor
Dimmer Switch
Lighting Contactor
Time Switch
Photocell Switch
Occupancy/vacancy Sensors
Motion Sensors
SD-06 Test Reports
Submit test reports for System Operation Tests in the presence of

Submit operational instructions for Light-Sensitive Control Devices

consisting of the manufacturer's recommended procedures for
operation.
Lighting Control System, Data Package 5
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PHOTOCONDUCTIVE CONTROL DEVICES
Provide photoconductive control devices in accordance with UL 773. Control

lighting luminaires individually by photo-control elements mounted on or
adjacent to the heads of the luminaires. Provide physically and
electrically interchangeable light sensitive control devices with
three-pole, 3-wire locking plug and receptacle connections to the line,
load, and neutral conductors of the lighting circuit.
Provide photoconductive control devices for natural daylight and darkness

control of incandescent, fluorescent, and outdoor lighting luminaires
including a photoconductive cell, thermal actuator, and snap-action switch
in a weatherproof housing. Provide a control device which is, when
attached to its mounting, weatherproof and constructed to exclude beating
rain, snow, dust, and insects and capable of withstanding 96 percent
SECTION 26 09 23.00 40 Page 2

relative humidity at 122 degrees F for 48 hours under operating conditions.
Submit operation and maintenance data, Lighting Control System, Data

Package 5, in accordance with Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
DATA and as specified herein, showing all light fixtures, control modules,
control zones, occupancy/vacancy sensors, motion sensors, light level
sensors, power packs, dimming ballasts, schematic diagrams and all
interconnecting control wire, conduit, and associated hardware.
2.1.1 Photoconductive Limit Settings
Provide device which turns on within the limits of plus 100 to minus 50
percent of its setting, over a range of input voltage from 105 to 130 volts
at rated frequency and ambient temperature, and at rated voltage and
frequency over a range of temperature from minus 85 to 122 degrees F, with
relative humidities up to 96-percent throughout the temperature range.
Adjust the device to operate within the limits of 0.8 to 1.2 foot-candles,
but also capable of calibration of the turn-on light level over a minimum
range from 0.5 to 3.0 foot-candles, and adaptable for calibration up to 10
foot-candles. Ratio of turn-off light level to turn-on light level is not
to exceed 5.
2.1.2 Device Rating and Accuracy
Rate the devices at 120 or 277 volts, 60 hertz, with rated ambient
temperature of 77 plus or minus41 degrees F
Maintain instrument accuracy by proper calibration in accordance with

IESNA LM-48.
2.2 DIMMING BALLAST CONTROLS
The single slide dimming ballast control dimmer with on/off control,
compatible with the ballast and control the ballast light output over the
full dimming range, which are approved by the ballast manufacturer.
2.3 LIGHT LEVEL SENSOR
Provide UL listed light level sensor capable of detecting changes in

ambient lighting levels, with a dimming range of 20 percent to 100 percent,
minimum, and designed for use with dimming ballast and voltage system to
which they are connected. Provide with sensor capable of controlling 40
electronic dimming ballast, minimum, with a sensor light level adjustable
with a set level range from 10 to 100 footcandles, minimum. Provide a
sensor with a bypass function to electrically override sensor control.
2.4 LIGHTING CONTACTOR
Provide NEMA ICS 2, mechanically held contactor. Rate contactor as

indicated. Provide in NEMA1 enclosure conforming to NEMA ICS 6. Provide
contactor with silver alloy double-break contacts and coil clearing
contacts for mechanically held contactor requiring no arcing contacts.
Provide contactor with hand-off-automatic selector switch.
2.5 PHOTOCELL SWITCH
Provide photocell switch conforming to UL 773 or UL 773A, hermetically

sealed cadmium-sulfide or silicon diode type cell contacts for
SECTION 26 09 23.00 40 Page 3

mechanically held contactors rated 1000 watts designed to fail to the ON

position. Provide switch which turns on at or below 3 footcandles and off
at 4 to 10 footcandles. Provide time delay to prevent accidental switching
from transient light sources. Provide switch:
In a U.V. stabilized polycarbonate housing with swivel arm and adjustable

a.
window slide, rated 1800 VA, minimum.
2.6 OCCUPANCY/VACANCY SENSORS
Provide UL listed occupancy/vacancy sensor complying with GC-12. Design

occupancy/vacancy sensors and power packs to operate on the voltage
indicated. Provide sensors and power packs with circuitry that only allows
load switching at or near zero current crossing of supply voltage, with
mounting as indicated. Provide sensor with an LED occupant detection
indicator, adjustable sensitivity, and adjustable delayed-off time range of
5 minutes to 15 minutes. Provide color matching the adjacent wall plates
as specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM wall mounted
sensors, and white ceiling mounted sensors. Provide ceiling mounted
sensors with 360 degree coverage unless otherwise indicated.
a. Provide crystal controlled ultrasonic sensor which does not cause

detection interference between adjacent sensors.
b. Provide infrared sensors with a daylight filter, and a fresnel lens

that is applicable to space to be controlled.
c. Ultrasonic/Infrared Combination Sensor
(1) Occupancy detection to turn lights on requires both ultrasonic

and infrared sensor detection, such that the lights remain on if
either the ultrasonic or infrared sensor detects movement.
Provide infrared sensor with a lens selected for indicated usage
and daylight filter to prevent short wavelength infrared
interference. Provide crystal controlled ultrasonic sensor
frequency.
(2) Vacancy sensor is an occupancy sensor which has a manual On

switch. With vacancy sensor, the lights must be manually turned on
and the sensor automatically turns the light off soon after an
area is vacated that meets the occupancy requirements.
2.7 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
Provide each item of equipment with a nameplate bearing the manufacturer's

name, address, model number, and serial number securely affixed in an
inconspicuous place; the nameplate of the distributing agent is not
acceptable.
2.7.2 Labels
Provide labeled control devices, clearly marked for operation of specific

lighting functions according to type. Note the following devices
characteristics in the format "Use Only _____":
Make markings related to control device type clear and locate to be readily
visible to service personnel, but unseen from normal viewing angles when
SECTION 26 09 23.00 40 Page 4

devices are in place.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
3.1.1 Photoconductive Control Devices
Install control devices in accordance with the manufacturer's installation

instructions.
3.1.2 Time Control Switches
Install switches with not less than four 1/4 inch bolts. The use of sheet
metal screws is not allowed.
3.1.3 Manual and Safety Switches
Coordinate terminal lugs with the wire size. Securely fasten switches to
the supporting structure or wall using not less than four 1/4 inch bolts.
The use of sheet metal screws is not allowed.
3.1.4 Magnetic Contactors
Provide magnetic contactors mechanically held, electrically operated,

conforming to NEMA ICS 1 and NEMA ICS 2. Provide with maximum continuous
ampere rating and number of poles as indicated on drawings. Provide
enclosures for contactors mounted indoors conforming to NEMA ICS 6, Type
1. Provide each contactor with a spare, normally open auxiliary contact.
Coordinate terminal lugs with the wire size. Securely fasten switches to
the supporting structure or wall using not less than four 1/4 inch bolts.
The use of sheet metal screws is not allowed.
3.2 FIELD TESTING
Demonstrate that photoconductive control devices operate satisfactorily in

the presence of the Contracting Officer.
Perform System Operation Tests in accordance with referenced standards in

this section.
SECTION 26 09 23.00 40 Page 5

SECTION 26 12 19.10
THREE-PHASE PAD-MOUNTED TRANSFORMERS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES


Strip
ASTM D 1535 (2008) Specifying Color by the Munsell

System

Dielectric Breakdown Voltage of Insulating
Liquids Using Disk Electrodes
ASTM D 92 (2005a) Standard Test Method for Flash and

Fire Points by Cleveland Open Cup Tester
ASTM D 97 (2009) Pour Point of Petroleum Products
FM GLOBAL (FM)
IEEE C2 (2007; Errata 2006; Errata 2007; INT 44-56

2007; INT 47, 49, 50, 52-56 2008; INT 57,
Safety Code
IEEE C37.47 (2000) High Voltage Current-Limiting Type

Distribution Class Fuses and Fuse
Disconnecting Switches
IEEE C57.12.00 (2006) Standard General Requirements for

Liquid-Immersed Distribution, Power, and
Regulating Transformers
IEEE C57.12.28 (2005) Standard for Pad-Mounted Equipment

- Enclosure Integrity
IEEE C57.12.34 (2004; Errata 2005) Pad-Mounted,

Compartmental-Type, Self-Cooled,
Three-Phase Distribution Transformers,

2500 kVA and Smaller—High-Voltage: 34 500

GrdY/19 920 Volts and Below; Low Voltage:
480 Volts and Below
IEEE C57.12.90 (2006; INT 2009) Standard Test Code for

IEEE C57.98 (1993; R 1999) Guide for Transformer

Impulse Tests
IEEE C62.11 (2005; Amendment A 2008) Standard for

Metal-Oxide Surge Arresters for
Alternating Current Power Circuits (>1kV)

IEEE Std 386 (2006) Standard for Separable Insulated

Connector Systems for Power Distribution
Systems Above 600V
NETA ATS (2009) Standard for Acceptance Testing

Specifications for Electrical Power
Equipment and Systems
NEMA C12.1 (2008) Electric Meters; Code for


Code - 2008 Edition
ORGANIZATION FOR ECONOMIC CO-OPERATION AND DEVELOPMENT (OECD)
OECD Test 203 (1992) Fish Acute Toxicity Test
EPA 712-C-98-075 (1996) Fate, Transport and Transformation

Test Guidelines - OPPTS 835.3100- "Aerobic
Aquatic Biodegradation"
EPA 821-R-02-012 (2002) Methods for Measuring the Acute

Toxicity of Effluents and Receiving Waters
to Freshwater and Marine Organisms
10 CFR 431 Energy Efficiency Program for Certain

Commercial and Industrial Equipment

UL 467 (2007) Standard for Grounding and Bonding

Equipment
Section 26 08 00 APPARATUS INSPECTION AND TESTING applies to this section,

with the additions and modifications specified herein.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
Unless otherwise specified or indicated, electrical and electronics terms

used in these specifications, and on the drawings, shall be as defined in
IEEE Std 100.
1.4 SUBMITTALS

SD-02 Shop Drawings
Pad-mounted transformer drawings; G
SD-03 Product Data
Pad-mounted transformers; G
Submittal shall include manufacturer's information for each

component, device, insulating fluid, and accessory provided with
the transformer.
SD-06 Test Reports
Acceptance checks and tests; G
Submittal shall include acceptance criteria and limits for each

test in accordance with NETA ATS "Test Values".
SD-07 Certificates
Transformer Efficiencies; G
Submit certification, including supporting calculations, from the

manufacturer indicating conformance with the paragraph entitled
"Specified Transformer Efficiencies."
Pad-mounted transformer design tests; G
Pad-mounted transformerroutine and other tests; G

Transformer(s), Data Package 5; G
Submit operation and maintenance data in accordance with Section

01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA and as specified herein.
Transformer test schedule; G
Submit report of test results as specified by paragraph entitled

1.4.1 Reduced Submittal Requirements
Transformers designed and manufactured by ABB in Jefferson City, MO; by

Cooper Power Systems in Waukesha, WI; by ERMCO in Dyersburg, TN; or by
Howard Industries in Laurel, MS need not submit the entire submittal
package requirements of this contract. Instead, the following items shall
be submitted:
a. A certification, signed by the manufacturer, stating that the technical

requirements of this specification shall be met.
b. An outline drawing of the transformer with devices identified

(paragraph entitled "Pad-Mounted Transformer Drawings", item a).
c. ANSI nameplate data of the transformer (paragraph entitled "Pad-Mounted

Transformer Drawings", item b).
d. Manufacturer's published time-current curves (properly overlaid on one

full size logarithmic paper) of the transformer high side fuses
(paragraph entitled "Pad-Mounted Transformer Drawings", item e) with
transformer damage curve, inrush curve, and thru fault current
indicated.
e. Routine and other tests (in PART 2, see paragraph entitled "Source
Quality Control", subparagraph entitled "Routine and Other Tests"),
shall be conducted by the manufacturer and may be witnessed by the
government. Provide transformer test schedule required by submittal
item "SD-11 Closeout Submittals". Provide certified copies of the
tests.
f. Provide acceptance test reports required by submittal item "SD-06 Test

Reports".
g. Provide operation and maintenance manuals required by submittal item

"SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data".
1.5.1 Pad-Mounted Transformer Drawings
Drawings shall indicate, but not be limited to the following:
a. An outline drawing, with front, top, and side views.
b. ANSI nameplate data.
c. Elementary diagrams and wiring diagrams with terminals identified of

watthour meter and current transformers.
d. One-line diagram, including switch(es), current transformers, meters,

and fuses.
e. Manufacturer's published time-current curves (on full size logarithmic

paper) of the transformer high side fuses.


products of the same manufacturer unless stated in this section.
furnished.

1.6 MAINTENANCE
1.6.1 Additions to Operation and Maintenance Data
In addition to requirements of Data Package 5, include the following on the

actual transformer(s) provided:
a. An instruction manual with pertinent items and information highlighted
b. An outline drawing, front, top, and side views
c. Prices for spare parts and supply list
d. Routine and field acceptance test reports

e. Fuse curves for primary fuses
f. Information on watthour demand meter, CT's, and fuse block
g. Actual nameplate diagram
h. Date of purchase
1.7 WARRANTY

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCT COORDINATION
Products and materials not considered to be pad-mounted transformers and

related accessories are specified in Section 33 71 01.00 40 OVERHEAD
TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION, Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION
SYSTEM, and Section 33 70 02.00 10 ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM,
UNDERGROUND.
2.2 THREE-PHASE PAD-MOUNTED TRANSFORMERS
IEEE C57.12.34, IEEE C57.12.28 and as specified herein.
2.2.1 Compartments
The high- and low-voltage compartments shall be separated by steel

isolating barriers extending the full height and depth of the compartments.
Compartment doors: hinged lift-off type with stop in open position and
three-point latching.
2.2.1.1 High Voltage, Dead-Front
High-voltage compartment shall contain the incoming line, insulated

high-voltage load-break connectors, bushing well inserts, six high-voltage
bushing wells configured for loop feed application, load-break switch
handle(s), access to oil-immersed fuses, tap changer handle, connector
parking stands, and ground pad.
a. Insulated high-voltage load-break connectors: IEEE Std 386, rated 15

kV, 95 kV BIL. Current rating: 200 amperes rms continuous. Short
time rating: 10,000 amperes rms symmetrical for a time duration of
0.17 seconds. Connector shall have a steel reinforced hook-stick eye,
grounding eye, test point, and arc-quenching contact material.
b. Bushing well inserts: IEEE Std 386, 200 amperes, 15 kV Class. Provide
a bushing well insert for each bushing well unless indicated otherwise.
c. Load-break switch
Radial-feed oil-immersed type rated at 15 kV, 95 kV BIL, with a

continuous current rating and load-break rating of 200 amperes, and a
make-and-latch rating of 12,000 rms amperes symmetrical. Locate the

switch handle in the high-voltage compartment
d. Provide bayonet type, oil-immersed, expulsion fuses in series with

oil-immersed, partial-range, current-limiting fuses. Bayonet fuse
links shall sense both high currents and high oil temperature in order
to provide thermal protection to the transformer. Coordinate
transformer protection with expulsion fuse clearing low-current faults
and current-limiting fuse clearing high-current faults beyond the
interrupting rating of the expulsion fuse. In order to eliminate or
minimize oil spills, the bayonet fuse assembly shall include an oil
retention valve inside the housing which closes when the fuse holder is
removed and an external drip shield. Warning shall be conspicuously
displayed within the high-voltage compartment cautioning against
removing or inserting fuses unless the load-break switch is in the open
position and the tank pressure has been released.
Bayonet fuse assembly: 150 kV BIL.
Oil-immersed current-limiting fuses: IEEE C37.47; 50,000 rms amperes

symmetrical interrupting rating at the system voltage specified.
e. Surge arresters: IEEE C62.11, rated 15 kV, fully shielded, dead-front,

metal-oxide-varistor, elbow type with resistance-graded gap, suitable
for plugging into inserts. Provide three arresters for radial feed
circuits. Provide three arresters for loop feed circuits.
f. Parking stands: Provide a parking stand near each bushing well.
2.2.1.2 Low Voltage
Low-voltage compartment shall contain low-voltage bushings with NEMA spade

terminals, accessories, metering, stainless steel or laser-etched anodized
aluminum diagrammatic transformer nameplate, and ground pad.
a. Accessories shall include drain valve with sampler device, fill plug,
pressure relief device, liquid level gage, pressure-vacuum gage, and
dial type thermometer with maximum temperature indicator.
b. Metering: Provide meter model "SHARK-200"
2.2.2 Transformer
a. Less-flammable liquid-insulated, two winding, 60 hertz, 65 degrees C

rise above a 30 degrees C average ambient, self-cooled type.
b. Transformer shall be rated as indicated with aluminum windings, 95 kV

BIL.
c. Transformer voltage ratings: as indicated.
d. Tap changer shall be externally operated, manual type for changing tap
setting when the transformer is de-energized. Provide four 2.5 percent
full capacity taps, two above and two below rated primary voltage. Tap
changers shall clearly indicate which tap setting is in use.
e. Minimum tested impedance shall not be less than a percentage at 85

degrees C as indicated.
f. Audible sound levels shall comply with the following:

kVA DECIBELS (MAX)
500 56
g. Transformer shall include lifting lugs and provisions for jacking under
base. The transformer base construction shall be suitable for using
rollers or skidding in any direction. Provide transformer top with an
access handhole. Transformer shall have its kVA rating conspicuously
displayed using 3-inch high yellow letters on its enclosure. The
transformer shall have an insulated low-voltage neutral bushing with
NEMA spade terminal, and with removable ground strap.
2.2.2.1 Specified Transformer Efficiencies
Provide transformer efficiency calculations utilizing the no-load and load

losses. No-load losses (NLL) shall be referenced at 20 degrees C. Load
losses (LL) shall be referenced at 85 degrees C and at 50 percent of the
nameplate load. If the tested transformer efficiency is less than the
efficiency indicated in 10 CFR 431, Subpart K, paragraph 431.196(b), the
transformer is not acceptable.
2.2.3 Insulating Liquid
a. Less-flammable transformer liquids: NFPA 70 and FM P7825 for

less-flammable liquids having a fire point not less than 300 degrees C
tested per ASTM D 92 and a dielectric strength not less than 33 kV
tested per ASTM D 877. Provide identification of transformer as
"non-PCB" and "manufacturer's name and type of fluid" on the nameplate.
The fluid shall be a biodegradable electrical insulating and cooling

liquid classified by UL and approved by FM as "less flammable" fluids.
The fluid shall meet the following fluid properties:
1. Pour point: ASTM D 97, less than -15 degree C
2. Aquatic biodegradation: EPA 712-C-98-075, 100%
3. Trout toxicity: OECD Test 203, zero mortality of EPA 821-R-02-012,

pass
2.2.3.1 Liquid-Filled Transformer Nameplates
Distribution transformers shall be provided with nameplate information in

accordance with IEEE C57.12.00 and as modified or supplemented by this
section.
2.2.4 Corrosion Protection
Bases and cabinets of transformers shall be corrosion resistant and shall

be fabricated of stainless steel conforming to ASTM A 167, Type 304 or
304L. Base shall include any part of pad-mounted transformer that is within
3 inches of concrete pad.
Paint entire transformer assembly Munsell 7GY3.29/1.5 green. Paint coating

system shall comply with IEEE C57.12.28 regardless of base, cabinet, and
tank material. The Munsell color notation is specified in ASTM D 1535.

2.3 WARNING SIGNS
Provide warning signs for the enclosures of pad-mounted transformers having

a nominal rating exceeding 600 volts.
a. When the enclosure integrity of such equipment is specified to be in

accordance with IEEE C57.12.28, such as for pad-mounted transformers,
provide self-adhesive warning signs on the outside of the high voltage
compartment door(s). Sign shall be a decal and shall have nominal
dimensions of 7 by 10 inches with the legend "DANGER HIGH VOLTAGE"
printed in two lines of nominal 2 inch high letters. The word "DANGER"
shall be in white letters on a red background and the words "HIGH
VOLTAGE" shall be in black letters on a white background. Decal shall
be Panduit No. PPSO710D72 or approved equal.
2.4 Arc Flash Warning Label
Provide warning label for the enclosure of pad-mounted transformers.

Locate this self-adhesive warning label on the outside of the high voltage
compartment door warning of potential electrical arc flash hazards and
appropriate PPE required. The label format shall be as indicated.
2.5 GROUNDING AND BONDING
UL 467. Provide grounding and bonding as specified in Section

33 70 02.00 10 ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM, UNDERGROUND.
2.6 PADLOCKS
Padlocks shall be provided for pad-mounted equipment . Padlocks shall be

keyed as directed by the Contracting Officer.
2.7 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Concrete associated with electrical work for other than encasement of

underground ducts shall be 4000 psi minimum 28-day compressive strength
unless specified otherwise. All concrete shall conform to the requirements
of Section 03 31 00.00 10 CAST-IN-PLACE STRUCTURAL CONCRETE.
2.8.1 Transformer Test Schedule
The Government reserves the right to witness tests. Provide transformer

test schedule for tests to be performed at the manufacturer's test
facility. Submit required test schedule and location, and notify the
Contracting Officer 30 calendar days before scheduled test date. Notify
Contracting Officer 15 calendar days in advance of changes to scheduled
date.
a. Test Instrument Calibration
1. The manufacturer shall have a calibration program which assures

that all applicable test instruments are maintained within rated
accuracy.
2. The accuracy shall be directly traceable to the National Institute

of Standards and Technology.

3. Instrument calibration frequency schedule shall not exceed 12

months for both test floor instruments and leased specialty
equipment.
4. Dated calibration labels shall be visible on all test equipment.
5. Calibrating standard shall be of higher accuracy than that of the

instrument tested.
6. Keep up-to-date records that indicate dates and test results of

instruments calibrated or tested. For instruments calibrated by
the manufacturer on a routine basis, in lieu of third party
calibration, include the following:
(a) Maintain up-to-date instrument calibration instructions and

procedures for each test instrument.
(b) Identify the third party/laboratory calibrated instrument to

verify that calibrating standard is met.
2.8.2 Design Tests
IEEE C57.12.00 states that "design tests are made only on representative
apparatus to substantiate the ratings assigned to all other apparatus of
basically the same design." Submit design test reports (complete with test
data, explanations, formulas, and results), in the same submittal package
as the catalog data and drawings for each of the specified transformer(s).
Design tests shall have been performed in accordance with IEEE C57.12.90
prior to the award of this contract.
a. Tests shall be certified and signed by a registered professional

engineer.
b. Temperature rise: "Basically the same design" for the temperature rise
test means a pad-mounted transformer with the same coil construction
(such as wire wound primary and sheet wound secondary), the same kVA,
the same cooling type (ONAN), the same temperature rise rating, and the
same insulating liquid as the transformer specified.
c. Lightning impulse: "Basically the same design" for the lightning

impulse dielectric test means a pad-mounted transformer with the same
BIL, the same coil construction (such as wire wound primary and sheet
wound secondary), and a tap changer, if specified. Design lightning
impulse tests shall include the primary windings only of that
transformer.
1. IEEE C57.12.90, paragraph 10.3 entitled "Lightning Impulse Test

Procedures," and IEEE C57.98.
2. State test voltage levels.
3. Provide photographs of oscilloscope display waveforms or plots of

digitized waveforms with test report.
d. Lifting and moving devices: "Basically the same design" requirement

for the lifting and moving devices test means a test report confirming
that the lifting device being used is capable of handling the weight of
the specified transformer in accordance with IEEE C57.12.34.

e. Pressure: "Basically the same design" for the pressure test means a
pad-mounted transformer with a tank volume within 30 percent of the
tank volume of the transformer specified.
f. Short circuit: "Basically the same design" for the short circuit test
means a pad-mounted transformer with the same kVA as the transformer
specified.
2.8.3 Routine and Other Tests
IEEE C57.12.00. Routine and other tests shall be performed in accordance

with IEEE C57.12.90 by the manufacturer on each of the actual
transformer(s) prepared for this project to ensure that the design
performance is maintained in production. Submit test reports, by serial
number and receive approval before delivery of equipment to the project
site. Required tests and testing sequence shall be as follows:
a. Phase relation
b. Ratio
c. No-load losses (NLL) and excitation current
d. Load losses (LL) and impedance voltage
e. Dielectric
1. Impulse
2. Applied voltage
3. Induced voltage
f. Leak
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
Electrical installations shall conform to IEEE C2, NFPA 70, and to the
requirements specified herein. Provide new equipment and materials unless
indicated or specified otherwise.
3.2 GROUNDING
NFPA 70 and IEEE C2, except that grounding systems shall have a resistance
to solid earth ground not exceeding 5 ohms.
3.2.1 Grounding Electrodes
Provide driven ground rods as specified in Section 33 70 02.00 10

ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM, UNDERGROUND. Connect ground conductors to
the upper end of ground rods by exothermic weld or compression connector.
Provide compression connectors at equipment end of ground conductors.
3.2.2 Pad-Mounted Transformer Grounding
Provide separate copper grounding conductors and connect them to the ground
loop as indicated. When work in addition to that indicated or specified is

required to obtain the specified ground resistance, the provision of the

contract covering "Changes" shall apply.
3.2.3 Connections
Make joints in grounding conductors and loops by exothermic weld or

compression connector. Exothermic welds and compression connectors shall
be installed as specified in Section 33 70 02.00 10 ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION
SYSTEM, UNDERGROUND.
3.2.4 Grounding and Bonding Equipment
UL 467, except as indicated or specified otherwise.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT AND ASSEMBLIES
Install and connect pad-mounted transformers furnished under this section

as indicated on project drawings, the approved shop drawings, and as
specified herein.
3.3.1 Meters and Current Transformers
NEMA C12.1.
Where field painting of enclosures is required to correct damage to the

manufacturer's factory applied coatings, provide manufacturer's recommended
coatings and apply in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

side, but space the signs a maximum of 30 feet apart.
3.6 FOUNDATION FOR EQUIPMENT AND ASSEMBLIES
Mount transformer on concrete slab. Unless otherwise indicated, the slab

shall be at least 8 inches thick, reinforced with a 6 by 6 - W2.9 by W2.9
mesh, placed uniformly 4 inches from the top of the slab. Slab shall be
placed on a 6 inch thick, well-compacted gravel base. Top of concrete slab
shall be approximately 4 inches above finished grade with gradual slope for
drainage. Edges above grade shall have 1/2 inch chamfer. Slab shall be of
adequate size to project at least 8 inches beyond the equipment.
Stub up conduits, with bushings, 2 inches into cable wells in the concrete
pad. Coordinate dimensions of cable wells with transformer cable training
areas.
3.6.1 Cast-In-Place Concrete
Cast-in-place concrete work shall conform to the requirements of Section

03 31 00.00 10 CAST-IN-PLACE STRUCTURAL CONCRETE.
3.7.1 Performance of Acceptance Checks and Tests
Perform in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and include

the following visual and mechanical inspections and electrical tests,

performed in accordance with NETA ATS.
3.7.1.1 Pad-Mounted Transformers
a. Visual and mechanical inspection
1. Compare equipment nameplate data with specifications and approved

shop drawings.
2. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Check for damaged or

cracked insulators and leaks.
3. Inspect anchorage, alignment, and grounding.
4. Verify the presence of PCB content labeling.
5. Verify the bushings and transformer interiors are clean.
6. Inspect all bolted electrical connections for high resistance

using low-resistance ohmmeter, verifying tightness of accessible
bolted electrical connections by calibrated torque-wrench method,
or performing thermographic survey.
7. Verify correct liquid level in tanks and bushings.
8. Verify that positive pressure is maintained on gas-blanketed

transformers.
9. Perform specific inspections and mechanical tests as recommended

by manufacturer.
10. Verify de-energized tap changer position is left as specified.
11. Verify the presence of transformer surge arresters.
b. Electrical tests
1. Perform resistance measurements through all bolted connections

with low-resistance ohmmeter.
2. Verify proper secondary voltage phase-to-phase and

phase-to-neutral after energization and prior to loading.
3.7.1.2 Current Transformers

shop drawings.
2. Inspect physical and mechanical condition.
3. Verify correct connection.
4. Verify that adequate clearances exist between primary and

secondary circuit wiring.
5. Verify the unit is clean.


7. Verify that all required grounding and shorting connections

provide good contact.
8. Verify correct operation of transformer withdrawal mechanism and

grounding operation.
9. Verify appropriate lubrication on moving current-carrying parts

and on moving and sliding surfaces.
b. Electrical tests

with low-resistance ohmmeter, if applicable.
2. Perform insulation-resistance test of each current transformer and

its secondary wiring.
3. Perform a polarity test of each current transformer.
4. Perform a ratio-verification test.
3.7.1.3 Watthour Meter

shop drawings.
3. Verify tightness of electrical connections.
b. Electrical tests
1. Calibrate watthour meters according to manufacturer's published

data.
2. Verify that correct multiplier has been placed on face of meter,

where applicable.
3. Verify that current transformer secondary circuits are intact.
3.7.1.4 Grounding System
1. Inspect ground system for compliance with contract plans and

specifications.
b. Electrical tests
1. Perform ground-impedance measurements utilizing the

fall-of-potential method. On systems consisting of interconnected

ground rods, perform tests after interconnections are complete.

On systems consisting of a single ground rod perform tests before
any wire is connected. Take measurements in normally dry weather,
not less than 48 hours after rainfall. Use a portable ground
testing megger in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to
test each ground or group of grounds. The instrument shall be
equipped with a meter reading directly in ohms or fractions
thereof to indicate the ground value of the ground rod or
grounding systems under test.
2. Submit the measured ground resistance of each ground rod and

grounding system, indicating the location of the rod and grounding
system. Include the test method and test setup (i.e., pin
location) used to determine ground resistance and soil conditions
at the time the measurements were made.
3.7.1.5 Surge Arresters, Medium- and High-Voltage

shop drawings.
3. Inspect anchorage, alignment, grounding, and clearances.
4. Verify the arresters are clean.

6. Verify that the ground lead on each device is individually

attached to a ground bus or ground electrode.
b. Electrical tests

with low-resistance ohmmeter, if applicable.
2. Perform an insulation-resistance test on each arrester, phase

terminal-to-ground.
3. Test grounding connection.
3.7.2 Follow-Up Verification
Upon completion of acceptance checks and tests, the Contractor shall show
by demonstration in service that circuits and devices are in good operating
condition and properly performing the intended function. As an exception
to requirements stated elsewhere in the contract, the Contracting Officer
shall be given 5 working days advance notice of the dates and times of
checking and testing.

SECTION 26 20 00
INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES


Hard-Drawn Copper Wire

Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors,
Hard, Medium-Hard, or Soft

Materials
IEEE C2 (2007; Errata 2007; INT 2008) National

Electrical Safety Code

IEEE Std 81 (1983) Guide for Measuring Earth

Resistivity, Ground Impedance, and Earth
Surface Potentials of a Ground System
(Part 1)Normal Measurements
NETA ATS (2003) Acceptance Testing Specifications

NEMA C80.1 (2005) Standard for Electrical Rigid Steel

Conduit (ERSC)
NEMA C80.3 (2005) Standard for Electrical Metallic

Tubing (EMT)
NEMA C80.5 (2005) Standard for Electrical Rigid

Aluminum Conduit (ERAC)

Industrial Control and Systems General
Requirements
NEMA ICS 2 (2000; Errata 2002; R 2005; Errata 2006)

Standard for Industrial Control and
Systems: Controllers, Contractors, and
Overload Relays Rated Not More than 2000
Volts AC or 750 Volts DC: Part 8 -
Disconnect Devices for Use in Industrial
Control Equipment
NEMA ICS 4 (2005) Industrial Control and Systems:

Terminal Blocks

NEMA KS 1 (2001; R 2006) Enclosed and Miscellaneous

Distribution Equipment Switches (600 Volts
Maximum)

and Generators

Induction Motors

NEMA RN 1 (2005) Standard for Polyvinyl Chloride

(PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid
Steel Conduit and Intermediate Metal
Conduit
NEMA ST 20 (1992; R 1997) Standard for Dry-Type

Transformers for General Applications
NEMA TC 2 (2003) Standard for Electrical Polyvinyl

Chloride (PVC) Tubing and Conduit
NEMA TC 3 (2004) Standard for Polyvinyl Chloride PVC

Fittings for Use With Rigid PVC Conduit
and Tubing
NEMA TP 1 (2002) Guide for Determining Energy

Efficiency for Distribution Transformers
NEMA WD 1 (1999; R 2005) Standard for General

Requirements for Wiring Devices
NEMA WD 6 (2002; R 2008) Standard for Wiring Devices

- Dimensional Requirements
NEMA Z535.4 (2007; Errata 2007) Product Safety Signs

and Labels

Code - 2008 Edition
NFPA 70E (2008) Electrical Safety in the Workplace

Lightning Protection Systems
TIA J-STD-607-A (2002) Commercial Building Grounding

(Earthing) and Bonding Requirements for
Telecommunications
TIA-568-C.1 (2009) Commercial Building

Telecommunications Cabling Standard
TIA/EIA-569-A (1998; Addenda 2000, 2001) Commercial

Building Standards for Telecommunications
Pathways and Spaces
29 CFR 1910.147 Control of Hazardous Energy (Lock Out/Tag

Out)

Flexible Metal Conduit
UL 1063 (2006) Standard for Safety Machine-Tools

Wires and Cables

Electrical Intermediate Metal Conduit --
Steel
UL 1449 (2006) Surge Protective Devices
UL 1569 (1999; Rev thru Nov 2006) Metal-Clad Cables
UL 1660 (2004; Rev thru Jan 2005) Liquid-Tight

Flexible Nonmetallic Conduit
UL 1699 (1999; Rev thru May 2003) Arc-Fault

Circuit-Interrupters
UL 20 (2000 ; Rev thru Dec 2008) Standard for

General-Use Snap Switches
UL 360 (2009) Liquid-Tight Flexible Steel Conduit
UL 4 (2004; Rev thru Oct 2008) Armored Cable
UL 44 (2005; Rev thru Nov 2005)

Thermoset-Insulated Wires and Cables

Equipment
UL 486A-486B (2003; Rev thru Apr 2009) Standard for

Wire Connectors
UL 486C (2004; Rev thru Apr 2009) Standard for

Splicing Wire Connectors

Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case
Switches and Circuit-Breaker Enclosures
UL 498 (2001; Rev thru Oct 2008) Attachment Plugs

and Receptacles
UL 50 (2007) Standard for Enclosures for

Electrical Equipment
UL 506 (2000; Rev thru May 2006) Standard for

Specialty Transformers
UL 508 (1999; Rev thru Sep 2008) Standard for

Industrial Control Equipment
UL 510 (2005; Rev thru Aug 2005) Polyvinyl

Chloride, Polyethylene, and Rubber
Insulating Tape
UL 514A (2004; Rev thru Aug 2007) Standard for

Metallic Outlet Boxes
UL 514B (2004; Rev thru Aug 2007) Standard for

Conduit, Tubing and Cable Fittings
UL 514C (1996; Rev thru Dec 2008) Nonmetallic

Outlet Boxes, Flush-Device Boxes, and
Covers

Conduit-Steel

Schedule 40 and 80 Rigid PVC Conduit and
Fittings
UL 67 (2009) Standard for Panelboards
UL 6A (2008) Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit -

Aluminum, Red Brass, and Stainless Steel
UL 719 (2006; Rev thru Oct 2007)

Nonmetallic-Sheathed Cables
UL 797 (2007) Standard for Electrical Metallic

Tubing -- Steel
UL 817 (2001; Rev thru May 2007) Cord Sets and
Power-Supply Cords
UL 83 (20086) Standard for

Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables
UL 854 (2004; Rev thru Oct 2007) Service-Entrance

Cables
UL 869A (2006) Reference Standard for Service

Equipment

Wireways, Auxiliary Gutters, and
Associated Fittings
UL 943 (2006; Rev thru Feb 2008) Ground-Fault

Circuit-Interrupters
UL 984 (1996; Rev thru Sept 2005) Hermetic

Refrigerant Motor-Compressors
1.2 DEFINITIONS

used in these specifications, and on the drawings, shall be as defined in
IEEE Std 100.
1.3 SUBMITTALS

SD-02 Shop Drawings
Panelboards;
Transformers;
Busway;
Include wiring diagrams and installation details of equipment

indicating proposed location, layout and arrangement, control
panels, accessories, piping, ductwork, and other items that must
be shown to ensure a coordinated installation. Wiring diagrams
shall identify circuit terminals and indicate the internal wiring
for each item of equipment and the interconnection between each
item of equipment. Drawings shall indicate adequate clearance for
operation, maintenance, and replacement of operating equipment
devices.
Wireways;
SD-03 Product Data
Receptacles;
Circuit breakers;
Switches;
Transformers;
Enclosed circuit breakers;
Motor controllers;
Manual motor starters;
CATV outlets;
Telecommunications Grounding Busbar;
Surge protective devices;
Submittals shall include performance and characteristic curves.
SD-06 Test Reports
600-volt wiring test;
Grounding system test;
Transformer tests;
Ground-fault receptacle test;
Transformer factory tests
Electrical Systems, Data Package 5;

01 78 23, OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA and as specified herein.
1.4.1 Fuses
Submit coordination data as specified in paragraph, FUSES of this section.


furnished.

1.5 MAINTENANCE
1.5.1 Electrical Systems
Submit operation and maintenance manuals for electrical systems that

provide basic data relating to the design, operation, and maintenance of
the electrical distribution system for the building. This shall include:
a. Single line diagram of the "as-built" building electrical system.
b. Schematic diagram of electrical control system (other than HVAC,

covered elsewhere).
c. Manufacturers' operating and maintenance manuals on active

electrical equipment.
1.6 WARRANTY

PART 2 PRODUCTS
Materials, equipment, and devices shall, as a minimum, meet requirements of

UL, where UL standards are established for those items, and requirements of
NFPA 70.
2.2 CONDUIT AND FITTINGS
Shall conform to the following:
2.2.1 Rigid Metallic Conduit
2.2.1.1 Rigid, Threaded Zinc-Coated Steel Conduit
NEMA C80.1, UL 6.
2.2.1.2 Rigid Aluminum Conduit
NEMA C80.5, UL 6A.
2.2.2 Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit
PVC Type EPC-40 in accordance with NEMA TC 2,UL 651.
2.2.3 Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC)
UL 1242, zinc-coated steel only.
2.2.4 Electrical, Zinc-Coated Steel Metallic Tubing (EMT)
UL 797, NEMA C80.3.
2.2.5 Plastic-Coated Rigid Steel and IMC Conduit
NEMA RN 1, Type 40( 40 mils thick).
2.2.6 Flexible Metal Conduit
UL 1.
2.2.6.1 Liquid-Tight Flexible Metal Conduit, Steel
UL 360.
2.2.7 Fittings for Metal Conduit, EMT, and Flexible Metal Conduit
UL 514B. Ferrous fittings shall be cadmium- or zinc-coated in accordance

with UL 514B.
2.2.7.1 Fittings for Rigid Metal Conduit and IMC
Threaded-type. Split couplings unacceptable.
2.2.7.2 Fittings for EMT
Steel compression type.
2.2.8 Fittings for Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit
NEMA TC 3 for PVC, and UL 514B.
2.2.9 Liquid-Tight Flexible Nonmetallic Conduit
UL 1660.
2.3 OUTLET BOXES AND COVERS
UL 514A, cadmium- or zinc-coated, if ferrous metal. UL 514C, if

nonmetallic.
2.3.1 Floor Outlet Boxes
Boxes shall be adjustable and concrete tight. Each outlet shall consist of
sheet-steel body with knockouts for conduits, adjustable flange ring, and
cover plate with hinged cover . Receptacle outlets shall consist of flush
aluminum or stainless steel housing with duplex-type receptacle as
specified herein. Provide gaskets where necessary to ensure watertight
installation.
2.3.2 Outlet Boxes for Telecommunications System
Provide standard type 4 inches square by 2 1/8 inches deep. Depth of boxes
shall be large enough to allow manufacturers' recommended conductor bend
radii. Outlet boxes for handicapped or pay phone telecommunications
station shall be 4 by 2 1/8 by 2 1/8 inches deep.
2.3.3 Service Module
Module shall be a raised floor box suitable for flush mounting in raised
floor panels. Box shall conform to UL 514A and shall be equipped with a
hinged cover and trim flange. Boxes shall be equipped with number and type
of outlets and connectors as indicated on the drawings. Port
identification labels shall be as shown on the drawings. Modules shall be
identified by station identification labels coordinated with patch panel
labels in underfloor patch panels and patch panels located in equipment
racks in the commo room (TR) to identify data cabling connections.
2.3.3.1 Wiring Chamber
The wiring chamber shall provide two separate compartments to accommodate

power wiring on one side and communication wiring on the other side. The
chamber shall also provide complete access to the communication wiring
plate, which will allow for removal of the communication plate without the
need to disconnect the wiring of any communication device.
2.3.3.2 Cover
The hinged cover and trim flange shall be constructed of die cast zinc
material, and shall be removable and 180 degree reversible. Hinged cover
and trim flange shall be suitable for carpet application. Carpet and
installation shall be as specified for raised floor. The cover shall
provide a removable guard for egress of power and communication workstation
cables. The cable guard, when in use, shall extend above the surface of
the cover for the purpose of added protection of the workstation cables.
Installation shall conform to manufacturer's instructions and shall be

coordinated with raised floor manufacturer's recommendations for floor
opennings in raised floor panels. The box shall be secured to the raised
floor by use of two locking toggles. The locking toggles shall be
intergral with the box and adjusted by use of their locking screws.
2.4 CABINETS, JUNCTION BOXES, AND PULL BOXES
Volume greater than 100 cubic inches, UL 50, hot-dip, zinc-coated, if sheet
steel.
2.5 WIRES AND CABLES
Wires and cables shall meet applicable requirements of NFPA 70 and UL for
type of insulation, jacket, and conductor specified or indicated. Wires
and cables manufactured more than 12 months prior to date of delivery to
site shall not be used.
2.5.1 Conductors
Conductors No. 8 AWG and larger diameter shall be stranded. Conductors No.
10 AWG and smaller diameter shall be solid, except that conductors for
remote control, alarm, and signal circuits, classes 1, 2, and 3, shall be
stranded unless specifically indicated otherwise. Conductor sizes and
capacities shown are based on copper, unless indicated otherwise.
Conductors indicated to be No. 6 AWG or smaller diameter shall be copper.
Conductors indicated to be No. 4 AWG and larger diameter shall be either
copper or aluminum, unless type of conductor material is specifically
indicated, or specified, or required by equipment manufacturer.
2.5.1.1 Minimum Conductor Sizes
Minimum size for branch circuits shall be No. 12 AWG; for Class 1
remote-control and signal circuits, No. 14 AWG; for Class 2 low-energy,
remote-control and signal circuits, No. 16 AWG; and for Class 3 low-energy,
remote-control, alarm and signal circuits, No. 22 AWG.
2.5.2 Color Coding
Provide for service, feeder, branch, control, and signaling circuit

conductors. Color shall be green for grounding conductors and white for
neutrals; except where neutrals of more than one system are installed in
same raceway or box, other neutrals shall be white with a different colored
(not green) stripe for each. Color of ungrounded conductors in different
voltage systems shall be as follows:
a. 208/120 volt, three-phase
(1) Phase A - black
(2) Phase B - red
(3) Phase C - blue
b. 480/277 volt, three-phase
(1) Phase A - brown
(2) Phase B - orange
(3) Phase C - yellow
c. 120/240 volt, single phase: Black and red
2.5.3 Insulation
Unless specified or indicated otherwise or required by NFPA 70, power and

lighting wires shall be 600-volt, Type THWN/THHN conforming to UL 83,
except that grounding wire may be type TW conforming to UL 83;
remote-control and signal circuits shall be Type TW or TF, conforming to
UL 83. Where lighting fixtures require 90-degree Centigrade (C)
conductors, provide only conductors with 90-degree C insulation or better.
2.5.4 Bonding Conductors
ASTM B 1, solid bare copper wire for sizes No. 8 AWG and smaller diameter;
ASTM B 8, Class B, stranded bare copper wire for sizes No. 6 AWG and larger
diameter.
2.5.4.1 Telecommunications Bonding Backbone (TBB)
Provide a copper conductor TBB in accordance with TIA J-STD-607-A. The TBB
shall be a minimum No. 6 AWG and be sized at 2 kcmil per linear foot of
conductor length up to a maximum size of 3/0 AWG.
2.5.4.2 Bonding Conductor for Telecommunications
Provide a copper conductor Bonding Conductor for Telecommunications between

the telecommunications main grounding busbar (TMGB) and the electrical
service ground in accordance with TIA J-STD-607-A. The bonding conductor
for telecommunications shall be sized the same as the TBB.
2.5.5 Service Entrance Cables
Service Entrance (SE) and Underground Service Entrance (USE) Cables, UL 854.
2.5.6 Nonmetallic Sheathed Cable
UL 719, Type NM or NMC.
2.5.7 Metal-Clad Cable
UL 1569; NFPA 70, Type MC cable.
2.5.8 Armored Cable
UL 4; NFPA 70, Type AC cable.
2.5.9 Mineral-Insulated, Metal-Sheathed Cable
UL listed; NFPA 70, Type MI cable. Sheathing containing asbestos fibers

shall not be used.
2.5.10 Cord Sets and Power-Supply Cords
UL 817.
2.6 SPLICES AND TERMINATION COMPONENTS
UL 486A-486B for wire connectors and UL 510 for insulating tapes.

Connectors for No. 10 AWG and smaller diameter wires shall be insulated,
pressure-type in accordance with UL 486A-486B or UL 486C (twist-on splicing
connector). Provide solderless terminal lugs on stranded conductors.
2.7 DEVICE PLATES
Provide UL listed, one-piece device plates for outlets to suit the devices
installed. For metal outlet boxes, plates on unfinished walls shall be of
zinc-coated sheet steel or cast metal having round or beveled edges.
Plates on finished walls shall be satin finish stainless steel or
brushed-finish aluminum, minimum 0.03 inch thick. Screws shall be
machine-type with countersunk heads in color to match finish of plate.
Sectional type device plates will not be permitted. Plates installed in
wet locations shall be gasketed and UL listed for "wet locations."
2.8 SWITCHES
2.8.1 Toggle Switches
NEMA WD 1, UL 20, single pole, double pole, three-way, and four-way,

totally enclosed with bodies of thermoplastic or thermoset plastic and
mounting strap with grounding screw. Handles shall be ivory
thermoplastic. Wiring terminals shall be screw-type, side-wired. Contacts
shall be silver-cadmium and contact arm shall be one-piece copper alloy.
Switches shall be rated quiet-type ac only, 120/277 volts, with current
rating and number of poles indicated.
2.8.2 Switch with Red Pilot Handle
NEMA WD 1. Provide pilot lights that are integrally constructed as a part

of the switch's handle. The pilot light shall be red and shall illuminate
whenever the switch is closed or "on". The pilot lighted switch shall be
rated 20 amps and 120 volts or 277 volts as indicated. Provide the
circuit's neutral conductor to each switch with a pilot light.
2.8.3 Breakers Used as Switches
For 120- and 277-Volt fluorescent fixtures, mark breakers "SWD" in

accordance with UL 489.
2.8.4 Disconnect Switches
NEMA KS 1. Provide heavy duty-type switches where indicated, where

switches are rated higher than 240 volts, and for double-throw switches.
Switches serving as motor-disconnect means shall be horsepower rated.
Provide switches in NEMA 1 or NEMA 3R, enclosure as indicated per NEMA ICS 6.
2.9 RECEPTACLES
UL 498, hard use, heavy-duty, grounding-type. Ratings and configurations

shall be as indicated. Bodies shall be of ivory as per NEMA WD 1. Face
and body shall be thermoplastic supported on a metal mounting strap.
Dimensional requirements shall be per NEMA WD 6. Provide screw-type,
side-wired wiring terminals. Connect grounding pole to mounting strap.
The receptacle shall contain triple-wipe power contacts and double or
triple-wipe ground contacts.
2.9.1 Switched Duplex Receptacles
Provide separate terminals for each ungrounded pole. Top receptacle shall
be switched when installed.
2.9.2 Weatherproof Receptacles
Provide in cast metal box with gasketed, weatherproof, cast-metal cover

plate and gasketed cap over each receptacle opening. Provide caps with a
spring-hinged flap. Receptacle shall be UL listed for use in "wet
locations with plug in use."
2.9.3 Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupter Receptacles
UL 943, duplex type for mounting in standard outlet box. Device shall be
capable of detecting current leak of 6 milliamperes or greater and tripping
per requirements of UL 943 for Class A GFCI devices. Provide screw-type,
side-wired wiring terminals or pre-wired (pigtail) leads.
2.10 PANELBOARDS
UL 67 and UL 50 having a short-circuit current rating as indicated.

Panelboards for use as service disconnecting means shall additionally
conform to UL 869A. Panelboards shall be circuit breaker-equipped. Design
shall be such that individual breakers can be removed without disturbing
adjacent units or without loosening or removing supplemental insulation
supplied as means of obtaining clearances as required by UL. "Specific
breaker placement" is required in panelboards to match the breaker
placement indicated in the panelboard schedule on the drawings. Use of
"Subfeed Breakers" is not acceptable unless specifically indicated
otherwise. Main breaker shall be "separately" mounted "above" or "below"
branch breakers. Where "space only" is indicated, make provisions for
future installation of breakers. Directories shall indicate load served by
each circuit in panelboard. Directories shall also indicate source of
service to panelboard (e.g., Panel PA served from Panel MDP). Type
directories and mount in holder behind transparent protective covering.
Panelboards shall be listed and labeled for their intended use. Panelboard
shall have nameplates in accordance with paragraph FIELD FABRICATED
NAMEPLATES.
UL 67 and UL 50. Panelboards for use as service disconnecting means shall

additionally conform to UL 869A. Panelboards shall be circuit
breaker-equipped. Design shall be such that individual breakers can be
removed without disturbing adjacent units or without loosening or removing
supplemental insulation supplied as means of obtaining clearances as
required by UL. Where "space only" is indicated, make provisions for
future installation of breaker sized as indicated. Directories shall
indicate load served by each circuit of panelboard. Directories shall also
indicate source of service (upstream panel, switchboard, motor control
center, etc.) to panelboard. Type directories and mount in holder behind

transparent protective covering. Panelboard shall have nameplates in
accordance with paragraph FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATES.
2.10.1 Enclosure
Enclosures shall meet the requirements of UL 50. All cabinets shall be

fabricated from sheet steel of not less than No. 10 gauge if flush-mounted
or mounted outdoors, and not less than No. 12 gauge if surface-mounted
indoors, with full seam-welded box ends. Cabinets mounted outdoors or
flush-mounted shall be hot-dipped galvanized after fabrication. Cabinets
shall be painted in accordance with paragraph PAINTING. Outdoor cabinets
shall be of NEMA 3R raintight with conduit hubs welded to the cabinet.
Front edges of cabinets shall be form-flanged or fitted with structural
shapes welded or riveted to the sheet steel, for supporting the panelboard
front. All cabinets shall be so fabricated that no part of any surface on
the finished cabinet shall deviate from a true plane by more than 1/8 inch.
Holes shall be provided in the back of indoor surface-mounted cabinets,
with outside spacers and inside stiffeners, for mounting the cabinets with a
1/2 inch clear space between the back of the cabinet and the wall
surface. Flush doors shall be mounted on hinges that expose only the hinge
roll to view when the door is closed. Each door shall be fitted with a
combined catch and lock, except that doors over 24 inches long shall be
provided with a three-point latch having a knob with a T-handle, and a
cylinder lock. Two keys shall be provided with each lock, and all locks
shall be keyed alike. Finished-head cap screws shall be provided for
mounting the panelboard fronts on the cabinets.
2.10.2 Panelboard Buses
Support bus bars on bases independent of circuit breakers. Main buses and
back pans shall be designed so that breakers may be changed without
machining, drilling, or tapping. Provide isolated neutral bus in each
panel for connection of circuit neutral conductors. Provide separate
ground bus identified as equipment grounding bus per UL 67 for connecting
grounding conductors; bond to steel cabinet.
2.10.3 Circuit Breakers
UL 489, thermal magnetic-type having a minimum short-circuit current rating

equal to the short-circuit current rating of the panelboard in which the
circuit breaker shall be mounted. Breaker terminals shall be UL listed as
suitable for type of conductor provided. Where indicated on the drawings,
provide circuit breakers with shunt trip devices. Series rated circuit
breakers and plug-in circuit breakers without a self-contained bracket and
not secured by a positive locking device requiring mechanical release for
removal are unacceptable.
2.10.3.1 Multipole Breakers
Provide common trip-type with single operating handle. Breaker design

shall be such that overload in one pole automatically causes all poles to
open. Maintain phase sequence throughout each panel so that any three
adjacent breaker poles are connected to Phases A, B, and C, respectively.
2.10.3.2 Circuit Breaker With GFCIUL 943 and NFPA 70. Provide with
"push-to-test" button, visible indication of tripped condition, and ability
to detect and trip on current imbalance of 6 milliamperes or greater per
requirements of UL 943 for Class A GFCI devices, for personnel protection.
2.10.3.3 Circuit Breakers for HVAC Equipment
Circuit breakers for HVAC equipment having motors (group or individual)

shall be marked for use with HACR type and UL listed as HACR type.
2.10.3.4 Arc-Fault Circuit-Interrupters
UL 489, UL 1699 and NFPA 70. Molded case circuit breaker shall be rated as
indicated. Provide with "push-to-test" button.
2.11 ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS
UL 489. Individual molded case circuit breakers with voltage and

continuous current ratings, number of poles, overload trip setting, and
short circuit current interrupting rating as indicated. Enclosure type as
indicated. Provide solid neutral.
2.12 MOTOR SHORT-CIRCUIT PROTECTOR (MSCP)
Motor short-circuit protectors, also called motor circuit protectors

(MCPs); shall conform to UL 508 and UL 489 and shall be provided as shown.
MSCPs shall consist of an adjustable instantaneous trip circuit breaker
used only in conjunction with a combination motor controller which provides
coordinated motor branch-circuit overload and short-circuit protection.
MSCPs shall be rated in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 70.
2.13 TRANSFORMERS
NEMA ST 20, general purpose, dry-type, self-cooled, ventilated. Provide

transformers in NEMA 1 enclosure. Transformer shall have 220 degrees C
insulation system for transformers 15 kVA and greater, and shall have 180
degrees C insulation for transformers rated 10 kVA and less, with
temperature rise not exceeding 80 degrees C under full-rated load in
maximum ambient of 40 degrees C. Transformer of 80 degrees C temperature
rise shall be capable of carrying continuously 130 percent of nameplate kVA
without exceeding insulation rating. Transformers shall be quiet type with
maximum sound level at least 3 decibels less than NEMA standard level for
transformer ratings indicated.
2.13.1 Specified Transformer Efficiency
Transformers, indicated and specified with: 480V primary, 80 degrees C or

115 degrees C temperature rise, kVA ratings of 37.5 to 100 for single phase
or 30 to 500 for three phase, shall be energy efficient type. Minimum
efficiency, based on factory test results, shall not be less than NEMA
Class 1 efficiency as defined by NEMA TP 1.
2.14 MOTORS
NEMA MG 1 motors and hermetic-type sealed motor compressors shall also

comply with UL 984. Provide the size in terms of HP, or kVA, or full-load
current, or a combination of these characteristics, and other
characteristics, of each motor as indicated or specified. Determine
specific motor characteristics to ensure provision of correctly sized
starters and overload heaters. Motors for operation on 208-volt, 3-phase
circuits shall have terminal voltage rating of 200 volts, and those for
operation on 480-volt, 3-phase circuits shall have terminal voltage rating
of 460 volts. Motors shall be designed to operate at full capacity with
voltage variation of plus or minus 10 percent of motor voltage rating.

Unless otherwise indicated, motors rated 1 HP and above shall be continuous
duty type.
Where fuse protection is specifically recommended by the equipment

manufacturer, provide fused switches in lieu of non-fused switches
indicated.
2.14.1 High Efficiency Single-Phase Motors
Single-phase fractional-horsepower alternating-current motors shall be high

efficiency types corresponding to the applications listed in NEMA MG 11.
In exception, for motor-driven equipment with a minimum seasonal or overall
efficiency rating, such as a SEER rating, provide equipment with motor to
meet the overall system rating indicated.
2.14.2 Premium Efficiency Polyphase Motors
Polyphase motors shall be selected based on high efficiency characteristics

relative to typical characteristics and applications as listed in NEMA MG 10.
In addition, continuous rated, polyphase squirrel-cage medium induction
motors shall meet the requirements for premium efficiency electric motors
in accordance with NEMA MG 1, including the NEMA full load efficiency
ratings. In exception, for motor-driven equipment with a minimum seasonal
or overall efficiency rating, such as a SEER rating, provide equipment with
motor to meet the overall system rating indicated.
2.14.3 Motor Sizes
Provide size for duty to be performed, not exceeding the full-load

nameplate current rating when driven equipment is operated at specified
capacity under most severe conditions likely to be encountered. When motor
size provided differs from size indicated or specified, make adjustments to
wiring, disconnect devices, and branch circuit protection to accommodate
equipment actually provided. Provide controllers for motors rated 1-hp and
above with electronic phase-voltage monitors designed to protect motors
from phase-loss, undervoltage, and overvoltage. Provide protection for
motors from immediate restart by a time adjustable restart relay.
2.14.4 Wiring and Conduit
Provide internal wiring for components of packaged equipment as an integral

part of the equipment. Provide power wiring and conduit for
field-installed equipment as specified herein. Power wiring and conduit
shall conform to the requirements specified herein. Control wiring shall
be provided under, and conform to the requirements of the section
specifying the associated equipment.
2.15 MOTOR CONTROLLERS
UL 508, NEMA ICS 1, and NEMA ICS 2. Controllers shall have thermal
overload protection in each phase and shall have one spare normally open
and one spare normally closed auxiliary contact. Provide controllers for
motors rated 1-hp and above with electronic phase-voltage monitors designed
to protect motors from phase-loss, undervoltage, and overvoltage. Provide
protection for motors from immediate restart by a time adjustable restart
relay. Magnetic-type motor controllers shall have undervoltage protection
when used with momentary-contact pushbutton stations or switches and shall
have undervoltage release when used with maintained-contact pushbutton
stations or switches. When used with pressure, float, or similar

automatic-type or maintained-contact switch, controller shall have
hand/off/automatic selector switch. Connections to selector switch shall
be such that only normal automatic regulatory control devices are bypassed
when switch is in "hand" position. Safety control devices, such as low and
high pressure cutouts, high temperature cutouts, and motor overload
protective devices, shall be connected in motor control circuit in "hand"
and "automatic" positions. Control circuit connections to
hand/off/automatic selector switch or to more than one automatic regulatory
control device shall be made in accordance with indicated or manufacturer's
approved wiring diagram. For each motor not in sight of controller or
where controller disconnecting means is not in sight of motor location and
driven machinery location, controller disconnecting means shall be capable
of being locked in open position. As an alternative, provide a manually
operated, lockable, nonfused switch which disconnects motor from supply
source within sight of motor. Overload protective devices shall provide
adequate protection to motor windings; be thermal inverse-time-limit type;
and include manual reset-type pushbutton on outside of motor controller
case. Cover of combination motor controller and manual switch or circuit
breaker shall be interlocked with operating handle of switch or circuit
breaker so that cover cannot be opened unless handle of switch or circuit
breaker is in "off" position. Minimum short circuit withstand rating of
combination motor controller shall be as indicated on the drawings.
2.15.1 Control Wiring
All control wire shall be stranded tinned copper switchboard wire with
600-volt flame-retardant insulation Type SIS meeting UL 44, or Type MTW
meeting UL 1063, and shall pass the VW-1 flame tests included in those
standards. Hinge wire shall have Class K stranding. Current transformer
secondary leads shall be not smaller than No. 10 AWG. The minimum size of
control wire shall be No. 14 AWG. Power wiring for 480-volt circuits and
below shall be of the same type as control wiring and the minimum size
shall be No. 12 AWG. Special attention shall be given to wiring and
terminal arrangement on the terminal blocks to permit the individual
conductors of each external cable to be terminated on adjacent terminal
points.
2.15.2 Control Circuit Terminal Blocks
NEMA ICS 4. Control circuit terminal blocks for control wiring shall be
molded or fabricated type with barriers, rated not less than 600 volts.
The terminals shall be removable binding, fillister or washer head screw
type, or of the stud type with contact and locking nuts. The terminals
shall be not less than No. 10 in size and shall have sufficient length and
space for connecting at least two indented terminals for 10 AWG conductors
to each terminal. The terminal arrangement shall be subject to the
approval of the Contracting Officer and not less than four (4) spare
terminals or 10 percent, whichever is greater, shall be provided on each
block or group of blocks. Modular, pull apart, terminal blocks will be
acceptable provided they are of the channel or rail-mounted type. The
Contractor shall submit data showing that the proposed alternate will
accommodate the specified number of wires, are of adequate current-carrying
capacity, and are constructed to assure positive contact between
current-carrying parts.
2.15.2.1 Types of Terminal Blocks
a. Short-Circuiting Type: Short-circuiting type terminal blocks
shall be furnished for all current transformer secondary leads and

shall have provision for shorting together all leads from each
current transformer without first opening any circuit. Terminal
blocks shall meet the requirements of paragraph CONTROL CIRCUIT
TERMINAL BLOCKS above.
b. Load Type: Load terminal blocks rated not less than 600 volts and
of adequate capacity shall be provided for the conductors for NEMA
Size 3 and smaller motor controllers and for other power circuits,
except those for feeder tap units. The terminals shall be of
either the stud type with contact nuts and locking nuts or of the
removable screw type, having length and space for at least two
indented terminals of the size required on the conductors to be
terminated. For conductors rated more than 50 amperes, screws
shall have hexagonal heads. Conducting parts between connected
terminals shall have adequate contact surface and cross-section to
operate without overheating. Each connected terminal shall have
the circuit designation or wire number placed on or near the
terminal in permanent contrasting color.
2.15.3 Control Circuits
Control circuits shall have maximum voltage of 120 volts derived from
control transformer in same enclosure. Transformers shall conform to UL 506,
as applicable. Transformers, other than transformers in bridge circuits,
shall have primaries wound for voltage available and secondaries wound for
correct control circuit voltage. Size transformers so that 80 percent of
rated capacity equals connected load. Provide disconnect switch on primary
side.
One secondary lead shall be fused; other shall be grounded.
2.15.4 Enclosures for Motor Controllers
NEMA ICS 6.
2.15.5 Multiple-Speed Motor Controllers and Reversible Motor Controllers
Across-the-line-type, electrically and mechanically interlocked.

Multiple-speed controllers shall have compelling relays and shall be
multiple-button, station-type with pilot lights for each speed.
2.15.6 Pushbutton Stations
Provide with "start/stop" momentary contacts having one normally open and
one normally closed set of contacts, and red lights to indicate when motor
is running. Stations shall be heavy duty, oil-tight design.
2.15.7 Pilot and Indicating Lights
Provide LED cluster lamps.
2.16 MANUAL MOTOR STARTERS (MOTOR RATED SWITCHES)
Single pole designed for surface mounting with overload protection and
pilot lights.
2.16.1 Pilot Lights
Provide yoke-mounted, seven element LED cluster light module. Color shall
be green.
2.17 LOCKOUT REQUIREMENTS
Provide disconnecting means capable of being locked out for machines and
other equipment to prevent unexpected startup or release of stored energy
in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.147. Mechanical isolation of machines and
other equipment shall be in accordance with requirements of Division 23,
"Mechanical."
2.18 TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
Provide system of telecommunications wire-supporting structures (pathway),

including: outlet boxes, conduits with pull wires wireways, cable trays,
and other accessories for telecommunications outlets and pathway in
accordance with TIA/EIA-569-A and as specified herein. Additional
telecommunications requirements are specified in Section 27 10 00, BUILDING
TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING SYSTEM and in Section 27 05 28.36 40 CABLE TRAYS
FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS.
2.19 COMMUNITY ANTENNA TELEVISION (CATV) SYSTEM
2.19.1 CATV Outlets
Provide flush mounted, 75-ohm, F-type connector outlet rated from 5 to 1000
MHz in standard electrical outlet boxes with mounting frame.
2.19.2 CATV Faceplates
Provide modular faceplates for mounting of CATV Outlets. Faceplate shall

include designation labels and label covers for circuit identification.
Faceplate color shall match outlet and switch coverplates.
2.19.3 Backboards
Provide void-free, fire rated interior grade plywood, 3/4 inch thick, 4 by
8 feet. Do not cover the fire stamp on the backboard. Coordinate CATV
backboard requirements with telecommunications backboard requirements as
specified in Section 27 10 00, BUILDING TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING.
2.20 GROUNDING AND BONDING EQUIPMENT
2.20.1 Ground Rods
UL 467. Ground rods shall be copper-clad steel, with minimum diameter of

3/4 inch and minimum length of 10 feet.
2.20.2 Ground Bus
A copper ground bus shall be provided in the electrical equipment rooms as

indicated.
2.20.3 Telecommunications and CATVGrounding Busbar
Provide corrosion-resistant grounding busbar suitable for indoor

installation in accordance with TIA J-STD-607-A. Busbars shall be
electrotin-plated for reduced contact resistance. If not plated, the
busbar shall be cleaned prior to fastening the conductors to the busbar,
and an anti-oxidant shall be applied to the contact area to control
corrosion and reduce contact resistance. Provide a telecommunications main
grounding busbar (TMGB) in the telecommunications entrance facility and a
(TGB) in all other telecommunications rooms and equipment rooms. The
telecommunications main grounding busbar (TMGB) and the telecommunications
grounding busbar (TGB) shall be sized in accordance with the immediate
application requirements and with consideration of future growth. Provide
telecommunications grounding busbars with the following:
a. Predrilled copper busbar provided with holes for use with standard
sized lugs,
b. Minimum dimensions of 0.25 in thick x 4 in wide for the TMGB and 2

in wide for TGBs with length as indicated;
c. Listed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory.

acceptable.

enclosure, relay, switch, and device; as specified or as indicated on the
drawings. Each nameplate inscription shall identify the function and, when
applicable, the position. Nameplates shall be melamine plastic, 0.125 inch
thick, white with black center core. Surface shall be matte finish.
Corners shall be square. Accurately align lettering and engrave into the
core. Minimum size of nameplates shall be one by 2.5 inches. Lettering
shall be a minimum of 0.25 inch high normal block style.
2.23 WARNING SIGNS
Provide warning signs for flash protection in accordance with NFPA 70E and
NEMA Z535.4 for switchboards, panelboards, industrial control panels, and
motor control centers that are in other than dwelling occupancies and are
likely to require examination, adjustment, servicing, or maintenance while
energized. Provide field installed signs to warn qualified persons of
potential electric arc flash hazards when warning signs are not provided by
the manufacturer. The marking shall be clearly visible to qualified
persons before examination, adjustment, servicing, or maintenance of the
equipment.
2.24 FIRESTOPPING MATERIALS
Provide firestopping around electrical penetrations in accordance with

Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING .
2.25 WIREWAYS
UL 870. Material shall be steel epoxy painted 16 gauge for heights and
depths up to 6 by 6 inches, and 14 gauge for heights and depths up to 12 by
12 inches. Provide in length required for the application with hinged-
cover NEMA 1 enclosure per NEMA ICS 6.
2.26 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES
Provide parallel type surge protective devices which comply with UL 1449 at
the service entrance, panelboards. Provide surge protectors in a NEMA 1
enclosure per NEMA ICS 6. Provide the following modes of protection:
FOR SINGLE PHASE AND THREE PHASE WYE CONNECTED SYSTEMS-

Each phase to neutral ( L-N )
Neutral to ground ( N-G )
Phase to ground ( L-G )
FOR DELTA CONNECTIONS-

Phase to phase ( L-L )
Phase to ground ( L-G )
Surge protective devices at the service entrance shall have a minimum surge
current rating of 80,000 amperes per mode minimum and downstream protectors
shall be rated 40,000 amperes per mode minimum. The maximum line to
neutral (L-N) Suppressed Voltage Rating (SVR) shall be:
500V for 208Y/120V, three phase system

900V for 480Y/277V, three phase system
The minimum MCOV (Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage) rating shall be:
300/150V for 208Y/120V, three phase system

600/320V for 480Y/277V, three phase system
EMI/RFI filtering shall be provided for each mode with the capability to
attenuate high frequency noise. Minimum attenuation shall be 20db.

test and the additional requirements as specified herein. Interior and
exterior steel surfaces of equipment enclosures shall be thoroughly cleaned
and then receive a rust-inhibitive phosphatizing or equivalent treatment
prior to painting. Exterior surfaces shall be free from holes, seams,
dents, weld marks, loose scale or other imperfections. Interior surfaces
shall receive not less than one coat of corrosion-resisting paint in
accordance with the manufacturer's standard practice. Exterior surfaces
shall be primed, filled where necessary, and given not less than two coats
baked enamel with semigloss finish. Equipment located indoors shall be
ANSI Light Gray. Provide manufacturer's coatings for touch-up work and as
specified in paragraph FIELD APPLIED PAINTING.
2.28.1 Transformer Factory Tests
Submittal shall include routine NEMA ST 20 transformer test results on each
transformer and also contain the results of NEMA "design" and "prototype"
tests that were made on transformers electrically and mechanically equal to
those specified.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
Electrical installations, including weatherproof and hazardous locations

and ducts, plenums and other air-handling spaces, shall conform to
requirements of NFPA 70 and IEEE C2 and to requirements specified herein.
3.1.1 Underground Service
Underground service conductors and associated conduit shall be continuous

from service entrance equipment to outdoor power system connection.
3.1.2 Service Entrance Identification
Service entrance disconnect devices, switches, and enclosures shall be

labeled and identified as such.
3.1.2.1 Labels
Wherever work results in service entrance disconnect devices in more than

one enclosure, as permitted by NFPA 70, each enclosure, new and existing,
shall be labeled as one of several enclosures containing service entrance
disconnect devices. Label, at minimum, shall indicate number of service
disconnect devices housed by enclosure and shall indicate total number of
enclosures that contain service disconnect devices. Provide laminated
plastic labels conforming to paragraph FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATES. Use
lettering of at least 0.25 inch in height, and engrave on black-on-white
matte finish. Service entrance disconnect devices in more than one
enclosure, shall be provided only as permitted by NFPA 70.
3.1.3 Wiring Methods
Provide insulated conductors installed in rigid steel conduit, IMC, rigid

nonmetallic conduit, or EMT, except where specifically indicated or
specified otherwise or required by NFPA 70 to be installed otherwise.
Grounding conductor shall be separate from electrical system neutral
conductor. Provide insulated green equipment grounding conductor for
circuit(s) installed in conduit and raceways. Shared neutral, or
multi-wire branch circuits, are not permitted with arc-fault circuit
interrupters. Minimum conduit size shall be 1/2 inch in diameter for low
voltage lighting and power circuits. Vertical distribution in multiple
story buildings shall be made with metal conduit in fire-rated shafts.
Metal conduit shall extend through shafts for minimum distance of 6 inches.
Conduit which penetrates fire-rated walls, fire-rated partitions, or
fire-rated floors shall be firestopped in accordance with Section 07 84 00,
FIRESTOPPING.
3.1.3.1 Pull Wire
Install pull wires in empty conduits. Pull wire shall be plastic having
minimum 200-pound force tensile strength. Leave minimum 36 inches of slack
at each end of pull wire.
3.1.3.2 Metal Clad Cable
Install in accordance with NFPA 70, Type MC cable.
3.1.4 Conduit Installation
Unless indicated otherwise, conceal conduit under floor slabs and within
finished walls, ceilings, and floors. Keep conduit minimum 6 inches away
from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot water pipes. Install conduit
parallel with or at right angles to ceilings, walls, and structural members
where located above accessible ceilings and where conduit will be visible
after completion of project.
3.1.4.1 Restrictions Applicable to Aluminum Conduit
a. Do not install underground or encase in concrete or masonry.
b. Do not use brass or bronze fittings.
3.1.4.2 Restrictions Applicable to EMT
a. Do not install underground.
b. Do not encase in concrete, mortar, grout, or other cementitious

materials.
c. Do not use in areas subject to severe physical damage including

but not limited to equipment rooms where moving or replacing
equipment could physically damage the EMT.
d. Do not use outdoors.
3.1.4.3 Restrictions Applicable to Nonmetallic Conduit
a. PVC Schedule 40 and PVC Schedule 80
(1) Do not use in areas where subject to severe physical damage,

including but not limited to, mechanical equipment rooms,
electrical equipment rooms, hospitals, power plants, missile
magazines, and other such areas.
(2) Do not use in penetrating fire-rated walls or partitions, or

fire-rated floors.
(3) Do not use above grade, except where allowed in this section
for rising through floor slab or indicated otherwise.
3.1.4.4 Restrictions Applicable to Flexible Conduit
Use only as specified in paragraph FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS.
3.1.4.5 Service Entrance Conduit, Underground
PVC, Type-EPC 40, galvanized rigid steel or steel IMC. Underground portion
shall be encased in minimum of 3 inches of concrete and shall be installed
minimum 18 inches below slab or grade.
3.1.4.6 Underground Conduit Other Than Service Entrance
Plastic-coated rigid steel; plastic-coated steel IMC; PVC, Type EPC-40

Convert nonmetallic conduit, other than PVC Schedule 40 or 80, to
plastic-coated rigid, or IMC, steel conduit before rising through floor
slab. Plastic coating shall extend minimum 6 inches above floor.
3.1.4.7 Conduit Installed Under Floor Slabs
Conduit run under floor slab shall be located a minimum of 12 inches below
the vapor barrier. Seal around conduits at penetrations thru vapor barrier.
3.1.4.8 Conduit Through Floor Slabs
Where conduits rise through floor slabs, curved portion of bends shall not
be visible above finished slab.
3.1.4.9 Conduit Installed in Concrete Floor Slabs
Rigid steel; steel IMC; fiberglass, or PVC, Type EPC-40, unless indicated
otherwise. Locate so as not to adversely affect structural strength of
slabs. Install conduit within middle one-third of concrete slab. Do not
stack conduits. Space conduits horizontally not closer than three
diameters, except at cabinet locations. Curved portions of bends shall not
be visible above finish slab. Increase slab thickness as necessary to
provide minimum one inch cover over conduit. Where embedded conduits cross
building and/or expansion joints, provide suitable watertight
expansion/deflection fittings and bonding jumpers. Expansion/deflection
fittings shall allow horizontal and vertical movement of raceway. Conduit
larger than one inch trade size shall be parallel with or at right angles
to main reinforcement; when at right angles to reinforcement, conduit shall
be close to one of supports of slab. Where nonmetallic conduit is used,
raceway shall be converted to plastic coated rigid steel or plastic coated
steel IMC before rising above floor, unless specifically indicated.
3.1.4.10 Stub-Ups
Provide conduits stubbed up through concrete floor for connection to

free-standing equipment with adjustable top or coupling threaded inside for
plugs, set flush with finished floor. Extend conductors to equipment in
rigid steel conduit, except that flexible metal conduit may be used 6 inches
above floor. Where no equipment connections are made, install
screwdriver-operated threaded flush plugs in conduit end.
3.1.4.11 Conduit Support
Support conduit by pipe straps, wall brackets, hangers, or ceiling trapeze.

Fasten by wood screws to wood; by toggle bolts on hollow masonry units; by
concrete inserts or expansion bolts on concrete or brick; and by machine
screws, welded threaded studs, or spring-tension clamps on steel work.
Threaded C-clamps may be used on rigid steel conduit only. Do not weld
conduits or pipe straps to steel structures. Load applied to fasteners
shall not exceed one-fourth proof test load. Fasteners attached to
concrete ceiling shall be vibration resistant and shock-resistant. Holes
cut to depth of more than 1 1/2 inches in reinforced concrete beams or to
depth of more than 3/4 inch in concrete joints shall not cut main
reinforcing bars. Fill unused holes. In partitions of light steel
construction, use sheet metal screws. In suspended-ceiling construction,
run conduit above ceiling. Do not support conduit by ceiling support
system. Conduit and box systems shall be supported independently of both

(a) tie wires supporting ceiling grid system, and (b) ceiling grid system
into which ceiling panels are placed. Supporting means shall not be shared
between electrical raceways and mechanical piping or ducts. Installation
shall be coordinated with above-ceiling mechanical systems to assure
maximum accessibility to all systems. Spring-steel fasteners may be used
for lighting branch circuit conduit supports in suspended ceilings in dry
locations. Support exposed risers in wire shafts of multistory buildings
by U-clamp hangers at each floor level and at 10 foot maximum intervals.
Where conduit crosses building expansion joints, provide suitable watertight
expansion fitting that maintains conduit electrical continuity by bonding
jumpers or other means. For conduits greater than 2 1/2 inches inside
diameter, provide supports to resist forces of 0.5 times the equipment
weight in any direction and 1.5 times the equipment weight in the downward
direction.
3.1.4.12 Directional Changes in Conduit Runs
Make changes in direction of runs with symmetrical bends or cast-metal

fittings. Make field-made bends and offsets with hickey or conduit-bending
machine. Do not install crushed or deformed conduits. Avoid trapped
conduits. Prevent plaster, dirt, or trash from lodging in conduits, boxes,
fittings, and equipment during construction. Free clogged conduits of
obstructions.
3.1.4.13 Locknuts and Bushings
Fasten conduits to sheet metal boxes and cabinets with two locknuts where
required by NFPA 70, where insulated bushings are used, and where bushings
cannot be brought into firm contact with the box; otherwise, use at least
minimum single locknut and bushing. Locknuts shall have sharp edges for
digging into wall of metal enclosures. Install bushings on ends of
conduits, and provide insulating type where required by NFPA 70.
3.1.4.14 Flexible Connections
Provide flexible steel conduit between 3 and 6 feet in length for recessed
and semirecessed lighting fixtures; for equipment subject to vibration,
noise transmission, or movement; and for motors. Install flexible conduit
to allow 20 percent slack. Minimum flexible steel conduit size shall be
1/2 inch diameter. Provide liquidtight flexible conduit in wet and damp
locations for equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, movement
or motors. Provide separate ground conductor across flexible connections.
3.1.4.15 Telecommunications and Signal System Pathway
Install telecommunications pathway in accordance with TIA/EIA-569-A.
a. Horizontal Pathway: Telecommunications pathways from the work

area to the telecommunications room shall be installed and cabling
length requirements in accordance with TIA-568-C.1. Size conduits,
wireways, and cable trays in accordance with TIA/EIA-569-A and as
indicated.
b. Backbone Pathway: Telecommunication pathways from the

telecommunications entrance facility to telecommunications rooms,
and, telecommunications equipment rooms (backbone cabling) shall
be installed in accordance with TIA/EIA-569-A. Size conduits,
wireways, and cable trays for telecommunications risers in
accordance with TIA/EIA-569-A and as indicated.
3.1.4.16 Community Antenna Television (CATV) System Conduits
Install a system of CATV wire-supporting structures (pathway), including:

outlet boxes, wireways, and other accessories for CATV outlets and pathway
in accordance with TIA/EIA-569-A. .
3.1.5 Busway Installation
Installation shall comply at minimum with NFPA 70. Install busways

parallel with or at right angles to ceilings, walls, and structural
members. Support busways at 5 foot maximum intervals, and brace to prevent
lateral movement. Hinges provided on risers shall be fixed type;
spring-type are unacceptable. Provide flanges where busway makes
penetrations through walls and floors, and seal to maintain smoke and fire
ratings. Provide waterproof curb where busway riser passes through floor.
Seal gaps with fire-rated foam and calk. Provide expansion joints, but
only where bus duct crosses building expansion joints. Provide supports to
resist forces of 0.5 times the equipment weight in any direction and 1.5
times the equipment weight in the downward direction.
3.1.6 Cable Tray Installation
Install and ground in accordance with NFPA 70. In addition, install and
ground telecommunications cable tray in accordance with TIA/EIA-569-A, and
TIA J-STD-607-A. Install cable trays parallel with or at right angles to
ceilings, walls, and structural members. Support in accordance with
manufacturer recommendations but at not more than 6 foot intervals.
Contact surfaces of aluminum connections shall be coated with an
antioxidant compound prior to assembly. Adjacent cable tray sections shall
be bonded together by connector plates of an identical type as the cable
tray sections. For grounding of cable tray system provide No. 2 AWG bare
copper wire throughout cable tray system, and bond to each section, except
use No. 1/0 aluminum wire if cable tray is aluminum. Terminate cable trays
10 inches from both sides of smoke and fire partitions. Conductors run
through smoke and fire partitions shall be installed in 4 inch rigid steel
conduits with grounding bushings, extending 12 inches beyond each side of
partitions. Seal conduit on both ends to maintain smoke and fire ratings
of partitions. Penetrations shall be firestopped in accordance with
Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING. Provide supports to resist forces of 0.5
times the equipment weight in any direction and 1.5 times the equipment
weight in the downward direction.
3.1.7 Boxes, Outlets, and Supports
Provide boxes in wiring and raceway systems wherever required for pulling
of wires, making connections, and mounting of devices or fixtures. Boxes
for metallic raceways shall be cast-metal, hub-type when located in wet
locations, when surface mounted on outside of exterior surfaces, when
surface mounted on interior walls exposed up to 7 feet above floors and
walkways, and when specifically indicated. Boxes in other locations shall
be sheet steel, except that aluminum boxes may be used with aluminum
conduit, and nonmetallic boxes may be used with nonmetallic conduit
system. Each box shall have volume required by NFPA 70 for number of
conductors enclosed in box. Boxes for mounting lighting fixtures shall be
minimum 4 inches square, or octagonal, except that smaller boxes may be
installed as required by fixture configurations, as approved. Boxes for

use in masonry-block or tile walls shall be square-cornered, tile-type, or
standard boxes having square-cornered, tile-type covers. Provide gaskets
for cast-metal boxes installed in wet locations and boxes installed flush
with outside of exterior surfaces. Provide separate boxes for flush or
recessed fixtures when required by fixture terminal operating temperature;
fixtures shall be readily removable for access to boxes unless ceiling
access panels are provided. Support boxes and pendants for surface-mounted
fixtures on suspended ceilings independently of ceiling supports. Fasten
boxes and supports with wood screws on wood, with bolts and expansion
shields on concrete or brick, with toggle bolts on hollow masonry units,
and with machine screws or welded studs on steel. Threaded studs driven in
by powder charge and provided with lockwashers and nuts or nail-type nylon
anchors may be used in lieu of wood screws, expansion shields, or machine
screws. In open overhead spaces, cast boxes threaded to raceways need not
be separately supported except where used for fixture support; support
sheet metal boxes directly from building structure or by bar hangers.
Where bar hangers are used, attach bar to raceways on opposite sides of
box, and support raceway with approved-type fastener maximum 24 inches from
box. When penetrating reinforced concrete members, avoid cutting
reinforcing steel.
3.1.7.1 Boxes
Boxes for use with raceway systems shall be minimum 1 1/2 inches deep,
except where shallower boxes required by structural conditions are
approved. Boxes for other than lighting fixture outlets shall be minimum
4 inches square, except that 4 by 2 inch boxes may be used where only one
raceway enters outlet. Telecommunications outlets shall be a minimum of 4
11/16 inches square by 2 1/8 inches deep. Mount outlet boxes flush in
finished walls.
3.1.7.2 Pull Boxes
Construct of at least minimum size required by NFPA 70 of code-gauge

aluminum or galvanized sheet steel, except where cast-metal boxes are
required in locations specified herein. Provide boxes with screw-fastened
covers. Where several feeders pass through common pull box, tag feeders to
indicate clearly electrical characteristics, circuit number, and panel
designation.
3.1.7.3 Extension Rings
Extension rings are not permitted for new construction.
3.1.8 Mounting Heights
Mount panelboards, enclosed circuit breakers, motor controller and

disconnecting switches so height of operating handle at its highest
position is maximum 78 inches above floor. Mount lighting switches and
handicapped telecommunications stations 48 inches above finished floor.
Mount receptacles and telecommunications outlets 18 inches above finished
floor, unless otherwise indicated. Wall-mounted telecommunications outlets
shall be mounted at height 48 inches above finished floor . Mount other
devices as indicated. Measure mounting heights of wiring devices and
outlets to center of device or outlet.
3.1.9 Conductor Identification
Provide conductor identification within each enclosure where tap, splice,

or termination is made. For conductors No. 6 AWG and smaller diameter,
color coding shall be by factory-applied, color-impregnated insulation.
For conductors No. 4 AWG and larger diameter, color coding shall be by
plastic-coated, self-sticking markers; colored nylon cable ties and plates;
or heat shrink-type sleeves. Identify control circuit terminations in
accordance with Section 23 09 23, DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL FOR HVAC AND OTHER
LOCAL BUILDING SYSTEMS. Provide telecommunications system conductor
identification as specified in Section 27 10 00, BUILDING
TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING SYSTEMS.
3.1.9.1 Marking Strips
White or other light-colored plastic marking strips, fastened by screws to

each terminal block, shall be provided for wire designations. The wire
numbers shall be made with permanent ink. The marking strips shall be
reversible to permit marking both sides, or two marking strips shall be
furnished with each block. Marking strips shall accommodate the two sets
of wire numbers. Each device to which a connection is made shall be
assigned a device designation in accordance with NEMA ICS 1 and each device
terminal to which a connection is made shall be marked with a distinct
terminal marking corresponding to the wire designation used on the
Contractor's schematic and connection diagrams. The wire (terminal point)
designations used on the Contractor's wiring diagrams and printed on
terminal block marking strips may be according to the Contractor's standard
practice; however, additional wire and cable designations for
identification of remote (external) circuits shall be provided for the
Government's wire designations. Prints of the marking strips drawings
submitted for approval will be so marked and returned to the Contractor for
addition of the designations to the terminal strips and tracings, along
with any rearrangement of points required.
3.1.10 Splices
Make splices in accessible locations. Make splices in conductors No. 10

AWG and smaller diameter with insulated, pressure-type connector. Make
splices in conductors No. 8 AWG and larger diameter with solderless
connector, and cover with insulation material equivalent to conductor
insulation.
3.1.10.1 Splices of Aluminum Conductors
Make with solderless circumferential compression-type, aluminum-bodied

connectors UL listed for AL/CU. Remove surface oxides from aluminum
conductors by wire brushing and immediately apply oxide-inhibiting joint
compound and insert in connector. After joint is made, wipe away excess
joint compound, and insulate splice.
3.1.11 Terminating Aluminum Conductors
3.1.11.1 Termination to Copper Bus
Terminate aluminum conductors to copper bus either by: (a) inline splicing
a copper pigtail, of ampacity at least that of aluminum conductor, or (b)
utilizing circumferential, compression-type, aluminum-bodied terminal lug
UL listed for AL/CU, and steel Belleville cadmium-plated hardened steel
spring washers, flat washers, bolts, and nuts. Carefully install
Belleville spring washers with crown up toward nut or bolt head, with
concave side of Belleville bearing on heavy-duty, wide series flat washer
of larger diameter than Belleville. Tighten nuts sufficiently to flatten
Belleville, and leave in position. Lubricate hardware with joint compound
prior to making connection. Wire brush and apply joint compound to
conductor prior to inserting in lug.
3.1.11.2 Termination to Aluminum Bus
Terminate aluminum conductors to aluminum bus by using aluminum nuts,

bolts, washers, and compression lugs. Wire brush and apply joint compound
to conductor prior to inserting in lug. Lubricate hardware with joint
compound prior to making connection. When bus contact surface is unplated,
scratch-brush and coat with joint compound, without grit.
3.1.12 Covers and Device Plates
Install with edges in continuous contact with finished wall surfaces

without use of mats or similar devices. Plaster fillings are not
permitted. Install plates with alignment tolerance of 1/16 inch. Use of
sectional-type device plates are not permitted. Provide gasket for plates
installed in wet locations.
3.1.13 Electrical Penetrations
Seal openings around electrical penetrations through fire resistance-rated

walls, partitions, floors, or ceilings in accordance with Section 07 84 00,
FIRESTOPPING.
3.1.14 Grounding and Bonding
Provide In accordance with NFPA 70 and NFPA 780. Ground exposed,

non-current-carrying metallic parts of electrical equipment, metallic
raceway systems, grounding conductor in metallic and nonmetallic raceways,
telecommunications system grounds, and neutral conductor of wiring systems.
Make ground connection at main service equipment, and extend grounding
conductor to point of entrance of metallic water service. Make connection
to water pipe by suitable ground clamp or lug connection to plugged tee. If
flanged pipes are encountered, make connection with lug bolted to street
side of flanged connection. Supplement metallic water service grounding
system with additional made electrode in compliance with NFPA 70. Make
ground connection to driven ground rods on exterior of building.
Interconnect all grounding media in or on the structure to provide a common
ground potential. This shall include lightning protection, electrical
service, telecommunications system grounds, as well as underground metallic
piping systems. Interconnection to the gas line shall be made on the
customer's side of the meter. Use main size lightning conductors for
interconnecting these grounding systems to the lightning protection system.
In addition to the requirements specified herein, provide
telecommunications grounding in accordance with TIA J-STD-607-A. Where
ground fault protection is employed, ensure that connection of ground and
neutral does not interfere with correct operation of fault protection.
3.1.14.1 Ground Rods
Provide cone pointed ground rods. The resistance to ground shall be

measured using the fall-of-potential method described in IEEE Std 81. The
maximum resistance of a driven ground shall not exceed 25 ohms under
normally dry conditions. If this resistance cannot be obtained with a
single rod,3 additional rods not less than 6 feet on centers,. If the
resultant resistance exceeds 25 ohms measured not less than 48 hours after
rainfall, notify the Contracting Officer who will decide on the number of
ground rods to add.
3.1.14.2 Grounding Connections
Make grounding connections which are buried or otherwise normally

inaccessible, excepting specifically those connections for which access for
periodic testing is required, by exothermic weld or compression connector.
a. Make exothermic welds strictly in accordance with the weld

manufacturer's written recommendations. Welds which are "puffed
up" or which show convex surfaces indicating improper cleaning are
not acceptable. Mechanical connectors are not required at
exothermic welds.
b. Make compression connections using a hydraulic compression tool to

provide the correct circumferential pressure. Tools and dies
shall be as recommended by the manufacturer. An embossing die
code or other standard method shall provide visible indication
that a connector has been adequately compressed on the ground wire.
3.1.14.3 Ground Bus
A copper ground bus shall be provided in the electrical equipment rooms as

indicated. Noncurrent-carrying metal parts of transformer neutrals and
other electrical equipment shall be effectively grounded by bonding to the
ground bus. The ground bus shall be bonded to both the entrance ground,
and to a ground rod or rods as specified above having the upper ends
terminating approximately 4 inches above the floor. Connections and
splices shall be of the brazed, welded, bolted, or pressure-connector type,
except that pressure connectors or bolted connections shall be used for
connections to removable equipment.
3.1.14.4 Resistance
Maximum resistance-to-ground of grounding system shall not exceed 5 ohms

under dry conditions. Where resistance obtained exceeds 5 ohms, contact
Contracting Officer for further instructions.
3.1.14.5 Telecommunications System
Provide telecommunications grounding in accordance with the following:
a. Telecommunications Grounding Busbars: Provide a

telecommunications main grounding busbar (TMGB) in the
telecommunications entrance facility. The TMGB shall be as close
to the electrical service entrance grounding connection as
practicable. Provide a telecommunications grounding busbar (TGB)
in all other telecommunications rooms and telecommunications
equipment rooms. The TGB shall be as close to the
telecommunications room panelboard as practicable, when equipped.
Where a panelboard for telecommunications equipment is not
installed in the telecommunications room, the TGB shall be located
near the backbone cabling and associated terminations. In
addition, the TGB shall be placed to provide for the shortest and
straightest routing of the grounding conductors. Where a
panelboard for telecommunications equipment is located within the
same room or space as a TGB, that panelboard’s alternating current

equipment ground (ACEG) bus (when equipped) or the panelboard
enclosure shall be bonded to the TGB. Telecommunications
grounding busbars shall be installed to maintain clearances as
required by NFPA 70 and shall be insulated from its support. A
minimum of 2 inches separation from the wall is recommended to
allow access to the rear of the busbar and the mounting height
shall be adjusted to accommodate overhead or underfloor cable
routing.
b. Telecommunications Bonding Conductors: Provide main

telecommunications service equipment ground consisting of separate
bonding conductor for telecommunications, between the TMGB and
readily accessible grounding connection of the electrical
service. Grounding and bonding conductors should not be placed in
ferrous metallic conduit. If it is necessary to place grounding
and bonding conductors in ferrous metallic conduit that exceeds 3
feet in length, the conductors shall be bonded to each end of the
conduit using a grounding bushing or a No. 6 AWG conductor,
minimum. Provide a telecommunications bonding backbone (TBB) that
originates at the TMGB extends throughout the building using the
telecommunications backbone pathways, and connects to the TGBs in
all telecommunications rooms and equipment rooms. The TBB
conductors shall be installed and protected from physical and
mechanical damage. The TBB conductors should be installed without
splices and routed in the shortest possible straight-line path.
The bonding conductor between a TBB and a TGB shall be
continuous. Where splices are necessary, the number of splices
should be a minimum and they shall be accessible and located in
telecommunications spaces. Joined segments of a TBB shall be
connected using exothermic welding, irreversible compression-type
connectors, or equivalent. All joints shall be adequately
supported and protected from damage. Whenever two or more TBBs
are used within a multistory building, the TBBs shall be bonded
together with a grounding equalizer (GE) at the top floor and at a
minimum of every third floor in between. The TBB and GE shall not
be connected to the pathway ground, except at the TMGB or the TGB.
c. Telecommunications Grounding Connections: Telecommunications

grounding connections to the TMGB or TGB shall utilize listed
compression two-hole lugs, exothermic welding, suitable and
equivalent one hole non-twisting lugs, or other irreversible
compression type connections. All metallic pathways, cabinets,
and racks for telecommunications cabling and interconnecting
hardware located within the same room or space as the TMGB or TGB
shall be bonded to the TMGB or TGB respectively. In a metal frame
(structural steel) building, where the steel framework is readily
accessible within the room; each TMGB and TGB shall be bonded to
the vertical steel metal frame using a minimum No. 6 AWG
conductor. Where the metal frame is external to the room and
readily accessible, the metal frame shall be bonded to the TGB or
TMGB with a minimum No. 6 AWG conductor. When practicable because
of shorter distances and, where horizontal steel members are
permanently electrically bonded to vertical column members, the
TGB may be bonded to these horizontal members in lieu of the
vertical column members. All connectors used for bonding to the
metal frame of a building shall be listed for the intended purpose.
3.1.15 Equipment Connections
Provide power wiring for the connection of motors and control equipment
under this section of the specification. Except as otherwise specifically
noted or specified, automatic control wiring, control devices, and
protective devices within the control circuitry are not included in this
section of the specifications but shall be provided under the section
specifying the associated equipment.
3.1.16 Government-Furnished Equipment
Contractor shall rough-in for Government-furnished equipment to make

equipment operate as intended, including providing miscellaneous items such
as plugs, receptacles, wire, cable, conduit, flexible conduit, and outlet
boxes or fittings.
3.1.17 Surge Protective Devices
Connect the surge protective devices in parallel to the power source,

keeping the conductors as short and straight as practically possible.


side. Space the signs in accordance with NFPA 70E.

as specified in Section 09 90 00, PAINTS AND COATINGS.Where field painting
of enclosures for panelboards, load centers or the like is specified to
match adjacent surfaces, to correct damage to the manufacturer's factory
applied coatings, or to meet the indicated or specified safety criteria,
provide manufacturer's recommended coatings and apply in accordance to
Furnish test equipment and personnel and submit written copies of test
results. Give Contracting Officer 5 working days notice prior to each test.
3.5.1 Devices Subject to Manual Operation
Each device subject to manual operation shall be operated at least five

times, demonstrating satisfactory operation each time.
3.5.2 600-Volt Wiring Test
Test wiring rated 600 volt and less to verify that no short circuits or
accidental grounds exist. Perform insulation resistance tests on wiring
No. 6 AWG and larger diameter using instrument which applies voltage of
approximately 500 volts to provide direct reading of resistance. Minimum
resistance shall be 250,000 ohms.
3.5.3 Transformer Tests
Perform the standard, not optional, tests in accordance with the Inspection
and Test Procedures for transformers, dry type, air-cooled, 600 volt and
below; as specified in NETA ATS. Measure primary and secondary voltages
for proper tap settings. Tests need not be performed by a recognized
independent testing firm or independent electrical consulting firm.
3.5.4 Ground-Fault Receptacle Test
Test ground-fault receptacles with a "load" (such as a plug in light) to

verify that the "line" and "load" leads are not reversed.
3.5.5 Grounding System Test
Test grounding system to ensure continuity, and that resistance to ground

is not excessive. Test each ground rod for resistance to ground before
making connections to rod; tie grounding system together and test for
resistance to ground. Make resistance measurements in dry weather, not
earlier than 48 hours after rainfall. Submit written results of each test
to Contracting Officer, and indicate location of rods as well as resistance
and soil conditions at time measurements were made.
SECTION 26 24 16.00 40
PANELBOARDS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES


NEMA PB 1 (2006; Errata 2008) Panelboards
FED-STD-595 (Rev C) Colors Used in Government

Procurement
UL 489 (2009) Molded-Case Circuit Breakers,

Molded-Case Switches, and Circuit-Breaker
Enclosures
UL 67 (2009; Reprint Sep 2010) Standard for

Panelboards

Submit Detail Drawings for the panelboards consisting of fabrication and

assembly drawings for all parts of the work in sufficient detail to enable
the Government to check conformity with the requirements of the contract
documents. Include within drawings details of bus layout.
Ensure Outline Drawings for panelboards indicate overall physical features,

dimensions, ratings, service requirements, and weights of equipment.
Statements signed by responsible officials of a manufacturer of a product,

system, or material attesting that the product, system or material meet
specified requirements. Statements must be dated after the award of this
contract, name the project, and list the specific requirements which it is
intended to address.
1.3 SUBMITTALS

SECTION 26 24 16.00 40 Page 1

SD-02 Shop Drawings
Submit Detail Drawings and Outline Drawings for panelboards in

accordance with paragraph entitled, "General Requirements," of
this section.
SD-03 Product Data
Submit manufacturer's catalog data for the following items:
Panelboards
Directory Card and Holder
Filtered Panelboard
SD-04 Samples
Ensure that Keys are properly tagged and delivered to the

SD-06 Test Reports
Submit test reports for the following tests in accordance with the
paragraph entitled, "Site Testing," of this section. Do not
energize panelboards until the recorded test data has been
submitted to and approved by the Contracting Officer.
Continuity Tests
Insulation Tests
SD-07 Certificates
Submit Statements in accordance with paragraph entitled, "General

Submit manufacturer's instructions for Panelboards including

special provisions required to install equipment components and
system packages. Special notices shall detail impedances, hazards
and safety precautions.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PANELBOARDS
Totally enclose power-distribution panelboards and lighting and appliance

branch-circuit panelboards in a steel cabinet, dead-front circuit breaker
type with copper buses, surface- or flush-mounted as indicated. Ensure
panelboards conform to NEMA PB 1 and UL 489. Branch circuit panels shall
have buses fabricated for bolt-on type circuit breakers.
An outer door or cover, hinged on one side, shall be provided on

surface-mounted panelboards to provide gutter space access. Provide a
center door for circuit breaker/switch access only.
SECTION 26 24 16.00 40 Page 2

Voltage and current rating, number of phases, and number of wires shall be
as indicated. Provide four-wire distribution panelboards and lighting and
appliance branch-circuit panelboards with an isolated full-capacity neutral
bus. Ensure panelboards are rated for 120/208-volt, three-phase or
277/480-volt, three-phase, 60-hertz current as indicated on drawings.
Provide three-phase, 4-wire and single-phase, 3-wire distribution lighting

and branch circuit panelboards with an isolated full-capacity bus providing
spaces for single-pole circuit breakers/switches and spaces indicated as
spare.
Provide panelboards with a separate grounding bus bonded to the enclosure.

Grounding bus shall be a solid bus bar of rectangular cross section
equipped with binding screws for the connection of equipment grounding
conductors.
Each panelboard, as a complete unit, shall have a short-circuit current

rating equal to or greater than the integrated equipment rating shown on
the panelboard schedule or as indicated.
Ensure panelboards and main lugs or main breaker have current ratings as
shown on the panelboard schedule.
Bus bar connections to the branch circuit breakers shall be the

"distributed phase" or "phase sequence" type. Single-phase, three-wire
panelboard busing shall be such that when any two adjacent single-pole
breakers are connected to opposite phases, two-pole breakers can be
installed in any location. Three-phase, four-wire busing shall be such
that when any three adjacent single-pole breakers are individually
connected to each of the three different phases, two- or three-pole
breakers can be installed at any location. Current-carrying parts of the
bus assembly shall be plated. Mains ratings shall be as shown.
Mechanical lugs furnished with panelboards shall be cast copper or copper

alloys of sizes suitable for the conductors indicated to be connected
thereto.
Panelboard enclosures shall be NEMA 250, Type 1 for indoor, and 3R for
exterior. Provide enclosures with hinged fronts and corrosion-resistant
steel pin-tumbler cylinder locks. Key locks alike and provide two keys for
each enclosure.
Finish panelboards with baked enamel. Finish color is to be No. 61 gray

conforming to FED-STD-595.
2.2 CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Circuit breakers shall be the molded-case type as specified in Section

26 05 71.00 40 LOW VOLTAGE OVERCORRECT PROTECTIVE DEVICES. Frame and trip
ratings shall be as indicated.
Interrupting rating of circuit breakers shall be as indicated. If not

shown, the interrupting rating for circuit breakers in 120/208-volt
panelboards shall be not less than 10,000 amperes rms symmetrical, and that
for breakers in 277/480-volt panelboards shall be not less than 25,000
amperes rms symmetrical.
Circuit breakers shall be bolt-on type. Plug-in type is not acceptable.
SECTION 26 24 16.00 40 Page 3

Provide shunt trips where indicated.
In branch circuit panelboards, branch circuit breakers feeding convenience

outlets shall have sensitive instantaneous trip settings of not more than 10
times the trip rating of the breaker to prevent repeated arcing shorts
resulting from frayed appliance cords. Single-pole 15- and 20-ampere
circuit breakers shall be UL listed as "Switching Breakers". Provide UL
Class A (5-milliampere sensitivity) ground fault circuit protection on
120-volt ac branch circuit as indicated. This protection is an integral
part of the branch circuit breaker that also provides overload and
short-circuit protection for branch circuit wiring. Tripping of a branch
circuit breaker containing ground fault circuit interruption is not to
disturb the feeder circuit to the panelboard. A single-pole circuit
breaker with integral ground fault circuit interruption requires no more
panelboard branch circuit space than a conventional slide pole circuit
breaker.
Ensure connections to the bus are bolt-on type.
When multiple wires per phase are specified, furnish the circuit breakers
with connectors made to accommodate multiple wires.
Ensure circuit breaker spaces called out on the drawings are complete with
mounting hardware to permit ready installation of the circuit breakers.
2.3 DIRECTORY CARD AND HOLDER
Mount a directory card on the inside of hinged fronts and doors 0.030-inch
thick minimum plastic in a metal frame, with spaces for circuit numbers,
outlets controlled, and room numbers. Where hinged fronts or doors are not
required, provide the directory card 0.030-inch thick minimum plastic in a
metal frame mounted on the left-hand side of the front trim. Directory
card shall identify each branch circuit with its respective and numbered
circuit breaker.
2.4 FACTORY TESTING
Test complete panelboards in accordance with UL 67.
2.5 PRECAUTIONARY LABEL
To ensure persons are aware of immediate or potential hazard in the

application, installation, use, or maintenance of panelboards, each
panelboard shall be conspicuously marked on the trim or dead front shield
with the text (or equivalent) DANGER symbol. If the panel is supplied with
a door, ensure the label is visible when the door is in the open position.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
Install panelboards as indicated and in accordance with the manufacturer's

instructions. Fully align and mount panels so that the height of the top
operating handle does not exceed 72-inches above the finished grade.
Directory-card information shall be typewritten in capital letters to

indicate outlets controlled and final room numbers served by each circuit
and shall be mounted in holders behind protective covering.
SECTION 26 24 16.00 40 Page 4

3.2 SITE TESTING
Each panelboard enclosure key shall be shown to operate the enclosure locks
in the presence of the Contracting Officer.
Panelboards shall be given continuity and insulation tests after the

installation has been completed and before the panelboard is energized.
Provide test equipment, labor, and personnel as required to perform the

tests as specified. Conduct Continuity tests using a dc device with bell.
Conduct insulation tests on 480-volt panelboards using a 1,000-volt

insulation-resistance test set. Record readings every minute until three
equal and consecutive readings have been obtained. Resistance between
phase conductors and between phase conductors and ground shall be not less
than 50 megohms.
Conduct insulation tests on panelboards rated 300 volts or less using a

500-volt minimum insulation-resistance test set. Record readings after 1
minute and until the reading is constant for 15 seconds. Resistance
between phase conductors and between phase conductors and ground shall be
not less than 25 megohms.
Record test data and include the location and identification of panelboards
and megohm readings versus time.
SECTION 26 24 16.00 40 Page 5

SECTION 26 41 01.00 10
LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

IEEE C135.30 (1988) Zinc-Coated Ferrous Ground Rods for

Overhead or Underground Line Construction

Code - 2008 Edition

Lightning Protection Systems

Equipment
UL 96 (2005) Standard for Lightning Protection

Components
UL 96A (2007) Standard for Installation

Requirements for Lightning Protection
Systems

Directory
1.2 SUBMITTALS

SD-02 Shop Drawings
Detail Drawings
Detail drawings, as specified.
SD-07 Certificates
SECTION 26 41 01.00 10 Page 1

Materials
Proof of compliance with requirements of UL, where material or

equipment is specified to comply. The label of or listing in
UL Electrical Constructn will be acceptable evidence. In lieu of
the label or listing, a written certificate from an approved
nationally recognized testing organization equipped to perform
such services, stating that the items have been tested and conform
to the requirements and testing methods of Underwriters
Laboratories may be submitted. Submit a letter of findings
certifying UL inspection of lightning protection systems provided
on the following facilities: .
Submit detail drawings consisting of a complete list of material, including

manufacturer's descriptive and technical literature, catalog cuts,
drawings, and installation instructions. Detail drawings shall demonstrate
that the system has been coordinated and will function as a unit. Drawings
shall show proposed layout and mounting and relationship to other parts of
the work.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Proide a system consisting of the standard products of a manufacturer

regularly engaged in the production of lightning protection systems and
which is the manufacturer's latest UL approved design. The lightning
protection system shall conform to NFPA 70 and NFPA 780, UL 96 and UL 96A,
except where requirements in excess thereof are specified herein.
2.2 MATERIALS
Do not use any combination of materials that form an electrolytic couple of

such nature that corrosion is accelerated in the presence of moisture,
unless moisture is permanently excluded from the junction of such metals.
Where unusual conditions exist, which would cause corrosion of conductors,
use conductors with protective coatings or oversize conductors. Where a
mechanical hazard is involved, increase the conductor size to compensate
for the hazard or protect the conductors by covering them with molding or
tubing made of wood or nonmagnetic material. When metallic conduit or
tubing is used, the conductor shall be electrically connected at the upper
and lower ends.
2.2.2 Main and Secondary Conductors
Conductors shall be in accordance with NFPA 780 and UL 96 for Class I,

Class II, or Class II modified materials as applicable.
2.2.2.1 Copper
Copper conductors used on nonmetallic stacks shall weigh not less than 375
pounds/thousand feet, and the size of any wire in the cable shall be not
less than No. 15 AWG. The thickness of any web or ribbon used on stacks
shall be not less than No. 12 AWG. Counterpoise shall be copper conductors
not smaller than No. 1/0 AWG.
SECTION 26 41 01.00 10 Page 2

2.2.2.2 Aluminum
Aluminum shall not contact the earth nor shall it be used in any other
manner that will contribute to rapid deterioration of the metal.
Appropriate precautions shall be observed at connections with dissimilar
metals. Aluminum conductors for bonding and interconnecting metallic
bodies to the main cable shall be at least equivalent to strength and
cross-sectional area of a No. 4 AWG aluminum wire. When perforated strips
are provided, strips that are much wider than solid strips shall be. A
strip width that is at least twice that of the diameter of the perforations
shall be used. Aluminum strip for connecting exposed water pipes shall be
not less than No. 12 AWG in thickness and at least 1-1/2 inch wide.
2.2.3 Air Terminals
Terminals shall be in accordance with UL 96 and NFPA 780. Air terminals

more than 24 inch in length shall be supported by a suitable brace, with
guides not less than one-half the height of the terminal.
2.2.4 Ground Rods
Rods made of copper-clad steel shall conform to UL 467 and galvanized

ferrous rods shall conform to IEEE C135.30. Ground rods shall be not less
than 3/4 inch in diameter and 10 feet in length. Ground rods of
copper-clad steel, stainless steel, galvanized ferrous, and solid copper
shall not be mixed on the job.
2.2.5 Connectors
Clamp-type connectors for splicing conductors shall conform to UL 96, class

as applicable, and, Class 2, style and size as required for the
installation.
2.2.6 Lightning Protection Components
Lightning protection components, such as bonding plates, air terminal

supports, chimney bands, clips, and fasteners shall conform to UL 96,
classes as applicable.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
performing the work. No departures shall be made without the prior
3.2 INTEGRAL SYSTEM
Provide a lightning protection system consisting of air terminals, roof

conductors, down conductors, ground connections, and grounds, electrically
interconnected to form the shortest distance to ground. All conductors on
the structures shall be exposed except where conductors are in protective
sleeves exposed on the outside walls. Secondary conductors shall
interconnect with grounded metallic parts within the building.
SECTION 26 41 01.00 10 Page 3

Interconnections made within side-flash distances shall be at or above the

level of the grounded metallic parts.
3.2.1.1 Air Terminals
Air terminal design and support shall be in accordance with NFPA 780.
Terminals shall be rigidly connected to, and made electrically continuous
with, roof conductors by means of pressure connectors or crimped joints of
T-shaped malleable metal and connected to the air terminal by a dowel or
threaded fitting. Air terminals at the ends of the structure shall be set
not more than 2 feet from the ends of the ridge or edges and corners of
roofs. Spacing of air terminals 2 feet in height on ridges, parapets, and
around the perimeter of buildings with flat roofs shall not exceed 25 feet.
In specific instances where it is necessary to exceed this spacing, the
specified height of air terminals shall be increased not less than 2 inch
for each foot of increase over 25 feet. On large, flat or gently sloping
roofs, as defined in NFPA 780, air terminals shall be placed at points of
the intersection of imaginary lines dividing the surface into rectangles
having sides not exceeding 50 feet in length. Air terminals shall be
secured against overturning either by attachment to the object to be
protected or by means of a substantial tripod or other braces permanently
and rigidly attached to the building or structure. Metal projections and
metal parts of buildings, smokestacks, and other metal objects that do not
contain hazardous materials and that may be struck but not appreciably
damaged by lightning, need not be provided with air terminals. However,
these metal objects shall be bonded to the lightning conductor through a
metal conductor of the same unit weight per length as the main conductor.
Where metal ventilators are installed, air terminals shall be mounted
thereon, where practicable. Any air terminal erected by necessity adjacent
to a metal ventilator shall be bonded to the ventilator near the top and
bottom. Where metal ventilators are installed with air terminals mounted
thereon, the air terminal shall not be more than 24 inch away from the
farther edge or corner. If the air terminal is farther than this distance,
an additional air terminal shall be added in order to meet this
requirement. Where metal ventilators are installed with air terminals
mounted adjacent, the air terminal shall not be more than 24 inches away
from the farther edge or corner. If the air terminal is farther than this
distance, an additional air terminal shall be added in order to meet this
requirement.
3.2.1.2 Roof Conductors
Roof conductors shall be connected directly to the roof or ridge roll.

Sharp bends or turns in conductors shall be avoided. Necessary turns shall
have a radius of not less than 8 inch. Conductors shall preserve a
downward or horizontal course and shall be rigidly fastened every 3 feet
along the roof and down the building to ground. Metal ventilators shall be
rigidly connected to the roof conductor at three places. All connections
shall be electrically continuous. Roof conductors shall be coursed along
the contours of flat roofs, ridges, parapets, and edges; and where
necessary, over flat surfaces, in such a way as to join each air terminal
to all the rest. Roof conductors surrounding tank tops, decks, flat
surfaces, and flat roofs shall be connected to form a closed loop.
3.2.1.3 Down Conductors
Down conductors shall be electrically continuous from air terminals and

roof conductors to grounding electrodes. Down conductors shall be coursed
over extreme outer portions of the building, such as corners, with
SECTION 26 41 01.00 10 Page 4

consideration given to the location of ground connections and air

terminals. Each building or structure shall have not less than two down
conductors located as widely separated as practicable, at diagonally
opposite corners. On rectangular structures having gable, hip, or gambrel
roofs more than 110 feet long, there shall be at least one additional down
conductor for each additional 50 feet of length or fraction thereof. On
rectangular structures having French, flat, or sawtooth roofs exceeding 250
feet in perimeter, there shall be at least one additional down conductor
for each 100 feet of perimeter or fraction thereof. On an L- or T-shaped
structure, there shall be at least one additional down conductor; on an
H-shaped structure, at least two additional down conductors; and on a
wing-built structure, at least one additional down conductor for each
wing. On irregularly shaped structures, the total number of down
conductors shall be sufficient to make the average distance between them
along the perimeter not greater than 100 feet. On structures exceeding 50
feet in height, there shall be at least one additional down conductor for
each additional 60 feet of height or fraction thereof, except that this
application shall not cause down conductors to be placed about the
perimeter of the structure at intervals of less than 50 feet. Additional
down conductors shall be installed when necessary to avoid "dead ends" or
branch conductors ending at air terminals, except where the air terminal is
on a roof below the main protected level and the "dead end" or branch
conductor is less than 16 feet in length and maintains a horizontal or
downward coursing. Down conductors shall be equally and symmetrically
spaced about the perimeter of the structure. Down conductors shall be
protected by placing in pvc conduit for a minimum distance of 72 inch above
finished grade level. If the conduit is metal, the down conductor shall be
bonded at the top and bottom of the conduit..
3.2.1.4 Interconnection of Metallic Parts
Metal doors, windows, and gutters shall be connected directly to the

grounds or down conductors using not smaller than No. 6 copper conductor,
or equivalent. Conductors placed where there is probability of unusual
wear, mechanical injury, or corrosion shall be of greater electrical
capacity than would normally be used, or shall be protected. The ground
connection to metal doors and windows shall be by means of mechanical ties
under pressure, or equivalent.
3.2.1.5 Ground Connections
Ground connections comprising continuations of down conductors from the

structure to the grounding electrode shall securely connect the down
conductor and ground in a manner to ensure electrical continuity between
the two. All connections shall be of the clamp type. There shall be a
ground connection for each down conductor. Metal water pipes and other
large underground metallic objects shall be bonded together with all
grounding mediums. Ground connections shall be protected from mechanical
injury. In making ground connections, advantage shall be taken of all
permanently moist places where practicable, although such places shall be
avoided if the area is wet with waste water that contains chemical
substances, especially those corrosive to metal.
3.2.1.6 Grounding Electrodes
A grounding electrode shall be provided for each down conductor located as

shown. A driven ground shall extend into the earth for a distance of not
less than 10 feet. Ground rods shall be set not less than 3 feet, nor more
than 8 feet, from the structures foundation. The complete installation
SECTION 26 41 01.00 10 Page 5

shall have a total resistance to ground of not more than 25 ohms if a

counterpoise is not used. Ground rods shall be tested individually prior
to connection to the system and the system as a whole shall be tested not
less than 24 hours after rainfall. When the resistance of the complete
installation exceeds the specified value or two ground rods individually
exceed 25 ohms, the Contracting Officer shall be notified immediately. A
counterpoise, where required, shall be of No. 1/0 copper cable or
equivalent material having suitable resistance to corrosion and shall be
laid around the perimeter of the structure in a trench not less than 2 feet
deep at a distance not less than 3 feet nor more than 8 feet from the
nearest point of the structure. All connections between ground connectors
and grounds or counterpoise, and between counterpoise and grounds shall be
electrically continuous.
3.2.2 Metal Roofs
Wood-Frame, Wall-Bearing Masonry or Tile Structure with Metallic Roof and

Nonmetallic Exterior Walls, or Reinforced Concrete Building with Metallic
Roof: Metal roofs which are in the form of sections insulated from each
other shall be made electrically continuous by bonding. Air terminals
shall be connected to, and made electrically continuous with, the metal
roof as well as the roof conductors and down conductors. Ridge cables and
roof conductors shall be bonded to the roof at the upper and lower edges of
the roof and at intervals not to exceed 100 feet. The down conductors
shall be bonded to roof conductors and to the lower edge of the metal
roof. Where the metal of the roof is in small sections, the air terminals
and down conductors shall have connections made to at least four of the
sections. All connections shall have electrical continuity and have a
surface contact of at least 3 square inch.
3.2.3 Metal Roofs With Metal Walls
Wood-Frame Building With Metal Roof and Metal Exterior Walls: The metal
roof and the metal walls shall be bonded and made electrically continuous
and considered as one unit. The air terminals shall be connected to and
made electrically continuous with the metal roof as well as the roof and
down conductors. All connections shall have electrical continuity and have
a surface contact of at least 3 square inch.
3.2.4 Steel Frame Building
The steel framework shall be made electrically continuous. Electrical

continuity may be provided by bolting, riveting, or welding steel frame,
unless a specific method is noted on the drawings. The air terminals shall
be connected to the structural steel framework at the ridge. Short runs of
conductors shall be used as necessary to join air terminals to the metal
framework so that proper placing of air terminals is maintained. Separate
down conductors from air terminals to ground connections are not required.
Where a grounded metal pipe water system enters the building, the
structural steel framework and the water system shall be connected at the
point of entrance by a ground connector. Connections to pipes shall be by
means of ground clamps with lugs. Connections to structural framework
shall be by means of nut and bolt or welding. All connections between
columns and ground connections shall be made at the bottom of the steel
columns. Ground connections to grounding electrons or counterpoise shall
be run from not less than one-half of all the columns distributed equally
around the perimeter of the structure at intervals averaging not more than
60 feet.
SECTION 26 41 01.00 10 Page 6

3.2.5 Ramps
Lightning protection for covered ramps (connecting passageways) shall

conform to the requirements for lightning protection systems for buildings
of similar construction. A down conductor and a driven ground shall be
placed at one of the corners where the ramp connects to each building or
structure. This down conductor and driven ground shall be connected to the
counterpoise or nearest ground connection of the building or structure.
Where buildings or structures and connecting ramps are clad with metal, the
metal of the buildings or structures and metal of the ramp shall be
connected to ensure electrical continuity, in order to avoid the
possibility of a flash-over or spark due to a difference in potential.
3.2.6 Post Tensioning Systems
On construction utilizing post tensioning systems to secure precast

concrete sections, the post tension rods shall not be used as a path for
lightning to ground. Down conductors shall be provided on structures using
post tensioning systems; down conductors shall have sufficient separation
from post tension rods to prevent side-flashing. Post tension rods shall
be bonded to the lightning protection and grounding systems only at the
base of the structure; this bonding shall be performed in strict accordance
with the recommendations of the post tension rod manufacturer, and shall be
done by, or in the presence of, a representative of the manufacturer.
3.3 INTERCONNECTION OF METAL BODIES
Metal bodies of conductance shall be protected if not within the zone of

protection of an air terminal. Metal bodies of conductance having an area
of 400 square inch or greater or a volume of 1000 cubic inch or greater
shall be bonded to the lightning protection system using main size
conductors and a bonding plate having a surface contact area of not less
than 3 square inch. Provisions shall be made to guard against the
corrosive effect of bonding dissimilar metals. Metal bodies of inductance
shall be bonded at their closest point to the lightning protection system
using secondary bonding conductors and fittings. A metal body that exceeds
5 feet in any dimension, that is situated wholly within a building, and
that does not at any point come within 6 feet of a lightning conductor or
metal connected thereto shall be independently grounded.
3.4 INSPECTION
The lightning protection system will be inspected by the Contracting

Officer to determine conformance with the requirements of this
specification. No part of the system shall be concealed until so
authorized by the Contracting Officer.
SECTION 26 41 01.00 10 Page 7

SECTION 26 42 14.00 10
CATHODIC PROTECTION SYSTEM (SACRIFICIAL ANODE)
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

ASTM B 418 (2009) Standard Specification for Cast and

Wrought Galvanic Zinc Anodes

Magnesium Alloy Anodes for Cathodic
Protection

Polyethylene Plastics Extrusion Materials
for Wire and Cable
NACE SP0169 (2007) Control of External Corrosion on

Underground or Submerged Metallic Piping
Systems
NACE SP0177 (2007) Mitigation of Alternating Current

and Lightning Effects on Metallic
Structures and Corrosion Control Systems
NACE SP0188 (2006) Discontinuity (Holiday) Testing of

New Protective Coatings on Conductive
Substrates
NEMA TC 2 (2003) Standard for Electrical Polyvinyl

Chloride (PVC) Tubing and Conduit

Code - 2008 Edition
49 CFR 192 Transportation of Natural and Other Gas by

Pipeline: Minimum Federal Safety Standards
SECTION 26 42 14.00 10 Page 1


Insulating Tape
UL 514A (2004; Rev thru Oct 2009) Standard for


Conduit-Steel
Provide a complete, operating, sacrificial anode cathodic protection system

in complete compliance with NFPA 70, with all applicable Federal, State,
and local regulations and with the minimum requirements of this contract.
In addition to the minimum requirements of these specifications,
construction of gas pipelines and associated cathodic protection systems
shall be in compliance with 49 CFR 192. The services required include
planning, design, installation, adjusting and testing of a cathodic
protection system, using sacrificial anodes for cathodic protection of the
Water, Fire Protection, Force Main, Gas, lines, their connectors and lines
under the slab or floor foundation. The cathodic protection system shall
include anodes, cables, connectors, corrosion protection test stations, and
any other equipment required for a complete operating system providing the
NACE criteria of protection as specified. Insulators are required whenever
needed to insulate the pipes from any other structure. The cathodic
protection shall be provided on Water, Fire Protection, Force Main, and Gas
pipes.
1.2.1 Contractor's Modifications
The specified system is based on a complete system with magnesium

sacrificial anodes. The Contractor may modify the cathodic protection
system after review of the project, site verification, and analysis, if the
proposed modifications include the anodes specified and will provide better
overall system performance. The modifications shall be fully described,
shall be approved by the Contracting Officer's representative, and shall
meet the following criteria. The proposed system shall achieve a minimum
pipe-to-soil "instant off" potential of minus 850 millivolts with reference
to a saturated copper-copper sulfate reference cell on the underground
components of the piping or other metallic surface. Take resistivity
measurements of the soil in the vicinity of the pipes and ground bed
sites. Based upon the measurements taken, the current and voltage shall be
required to produce a minimum of minus 850 millivolts "instant off"
potential between the structure being tested and the reference cell. This
potential shall be obtained over 95 percent of the metallic area. The
anode system shall be designed for a life of twenty-five (25) years of
continuous operation.
1.2.2 Summary of Services Required
The scope of services shall include, but shall not be limited to, the
following:
a. Close-interval potential surveys.
b. Cathodic Protection Systems.
SECTION 26 42 14.00 10 Page 2

c. System testing.
d. Casing corrosion control.
e. Interference testing.
f. Training.
g. Operating and maintenance manual.
h. Insulator testing and bonding testing.
i. Coating and holiday testing to be submitted within 45 days of notice to

proceed.
1.2.3 Tests of Components
Perform a minimum of four (4) tests at each metallic component in the

piping system. Two (2) measurements shall be made directly over the anodes
and the other two (2) tests shall be over the outer edge of the component,
but at the farthest point from the anodes. Structure and pipes shall be
shown with the cathodic protection equipment. All components of the
cathodic protection system shall be shown on drawings, showing their
relationship to the protected structure or component. A narrative shall
describe how the cathodic protection system will work and provide testing
at each component. Components requiring cathodic protection shall include
but not be limited to the following:
a. Pipes under the floor slab or foundations.
b. PIV.
c. Shutoff valves.
d. Metallic pipe extended from aboveground locations.
e. Each connector or change-of-direction device.
f. Any metallic pipe component or section.
g. Backflow preventor.
h. Culvert.
1.2.4 Electrical Potential Measurements
All potential tests shall be made at a minimum of 10 foot intervals

witnessed by the Contracting Officer. Submittals shall identify test
locations on separate drawing, showing all metal to be protected and all
cathodic protection equipment. Test points equipment and protected metal
shall be easily distinguished and identified.
1.2.5 Achievement of Criteria for Protection
All conductors, unless otherwise shown, shall be routed to or through the

test stations. Each system provided shall achieve a minimum pipe-to-soil
"instant off" potential of minus 850 millivolt potentials with reference to
a saturated copper-copper-sulfate reference cell on all underground
SECTION 26 42 14.00 10 Page 3

components of the piping. Based upon the measurements taken, the current
and voltage of the anodes should be adjusted as required to produce a
minimum of minus 850 millivolts "instant off" potential between the
structure being tested and the reference cell. This potential should be
obtained over 95 percent of the metallic area. This must be achieved
without the "instant off" potential exceeding 1150 millivolts. Testing
will be witnessed by the Contracting Officer. Provide additional anodes if
required to achieve the minus 850 millivolts "instant off". Although
acceptance criteria of the cathodic protection systems are defined in
NACE SP0169, for this project the "instant off" potential of minus 850
millivolts is the only acceptable criteria.
1.2.6 Metallic Components on Nonmetallic Systems and Typicals
a. Metallic components: As a minimum, protect each metallic component

with two (2) magnesium anodes. This number of anodes is required to
achieve minus 850 millivolts "instant off" potential on the metallic
area and at the same time not provide overvoltage above 1150 millivolts
"instant off." As a minimum, the magnesium anode unpackaged weight
shall be 17 pounds. The magnesium anodes shall be located on each side
of the metallic component and routed through a test station.
b. Fire Hydrants: Fire hydrant pipe components shall have a minimum of

two (2) anodes. These magnesium anodes shall have an unpackaged weight
of 17 pounds.
c. Pipe Under Concrete Slab: Pipe under concrete slab shall have a
minimum of 2 magnesium anodes. These magnesium anodes shall have an
unpackaged weight of 17 pounds. Pipe under concrete slab shall have 1
permanent reference electrodes located under the slab. One (1)
permanent reference electrode shall be located where the pipe enters
the concrete slab. All conductors shall be routed to a test station.
d. Valves: Each valve shall be protected with 1 magnesium anodes. The

magnesium anode shall have an unpackaged weight of 17 pounds.
e. Metallic Pipe Component or Section: Each section of metallic pipe

shall be protected with 2 magnesium anodes. The magnesium anodes shall
have an unpackaged weight of 17 pounds.
f. Connectors or Change-of-Direction Devices: Each change-of-direction

device shall be protected with 2 magnesium anodes. The magnesium anode
shall have an unpackaged weight of 17 pounds.
1.2.7 Metallic Component Coating
Coatings for metallic components shall be as required for metallic fittings

as indicated. This will include fire hydrants, T's, elbows, valves, etc.
Coatings shall be selected, applied, and inspected as specified in these
specifications. All aboveground pipeline shall be coated as indicated or
as approved. The coating shall have a minimum thickness of 7 mil. The
pipeline coating shall be in accordance with all applicable Federal, State,
and local regulations.
1.3 SUBMITTALS

SECTION 26 42 14.00 10 Page 4

SD-02 Shop Drawings
Drawings
Six copies of detail drawings consisting of a complete list of

equipment and material including manufacturer's descriptive and
technical literature, catalog cuts, results of system design
calculations including soil-resistivity, installation instructions
and certified test data stating the maximum recommended anode
current output density. Include in the detail drawings complete
wiring and schematic diagrams and any other details required to
demonstrate that the system has been coordinated and will function
properly as a unit.
Contractor's Modifications
Six copies of detail drawings showing proposed changes in

location, scope of performance indicating any variations from,
additions to, or clarifications of contract drawings. Show
proposed changes in anode arrangement, anode size and number,
anode materials and layout details, conduit size, wire size,
mounting details, wiring diagram, method for
electrically-isolating each pipe, and any other pertinent
information to proper installation and performance of the system.
SD-03 Product Data
Equipment
An itemized list of equipment and materials including item

number, quantity, and manufacturer of each item, within 30 days
after receipt of notice to proceed. The list shall be accompanied
by a description of procedures for each type of testing and
adjustments, including testing of coating for thickness and
holidays. Installation of materials and equipment shall not
commence until this submittal is approved.
Spare Parts

equipment specified, after approval of detail drawings and not
later than six (6) months prior to the date of beneficial
occupancy. The data shall include a complete list of parts,
special tools, and supplies, with current unit prices and source
of supply. One (1) spare anode of each type shall be furnished.
SD-06 Test Reports
Tests and Measurements
Test reports in booklet form tabulating all field tests and

measurements performed, upon completion and testing of the
installed system and including close interval potential survey,
casing and interference tests, final system test verifying
protection, insulated joint and bond tests, and holiday coating
test. A certified test report showing that the connecting method
SECTION 26 42 14.00 10 Page 5

has passed a 120-day laboratory test without failure at the place

of connection, wherein the anode is subjected to maximum
recommended current output while immersed in a three percent
sodium chloride solution.
Contractor's Modifications
Final report regarding Contractor's modifications. The report

shall include pipe-to-soil measurements throughout the affected
area, indicating that the modifications improved the overall
conditions, and current measurements for anodes. The following
special materials and information are required: taping materials
and conductors; zinc grounding cell, installation and testing
procedures, and equipment; coating material; system design
calculations for anode number, life, and parameters to achieve
protective potential; backfill shield material and installation
details showing waterproofing; bonding and waterproofing details;
insulated resistance wire; exothermic weld equipment and material.
SD-07 Certificates
Cathodic Protection System
Proof that the materials and equipment furnished under this

section conform to the specified requirements contained in the
referenced standards or publications. The label or listing by the
specified agency will be acceptable evidence of such compliance.
Services of "Corrosion Expert"
Evidence of qualifications of the "corrosion expert."
a. The "corrosion expert's" name and qualifications shall

be certified in writing to the Contracting Officer prior to the
start of construction.
b. Certification shall be submitted giving the name of the

firm, the number of years of experience, and a list of not less
than five (5) of the firm's installations three (3) or more years
old that have been tested and found satisfactory.
Cathodic Protection System
Before final acceptance of the cathodic protection system, six

copies of operating manuals outlining the step-by-step procedures
required for system startup, operation, adjustment of current
flow, and shutdown. The manuals shall include the manufacturer's
name, model number, service manual, parts list, and brief
description of all equipment and their basic operating features.
Six copies of maintenance manual, listing routine maintenance
procedures, recommendation for maintenance testing, possible
breakdowns and repairs, and troubleshooting guides. The manuals
shall include single-line diagrams for the system as installed;
instructions in making pipe-to-reference cell and
tank-to-reference cell potential measurements and frequency of
monitoring; instructions for dielectric connections, interference
and sacrificial anode bonds; instructions shall include
SECTION 26 42 14.00 10 Page 6

precautions to ensure safe conditions during repair of pipe or

other metallic systems. The instructions shall be neatly bound
between permanent covers and titled "Operating and Maintenance
Instructions." These instructions shall be submitted for the
Contracting Officer's approval. The instructions shall include
the following:
a. As-built drawings, to scale, of the entire system,

showing the locations of the piping, location of all anodes and
test stations, locations of all insulating joints, and
structure-to-soil potential test points as measured during the
tests required by paragraph TESTS AND MEASUREMENTS. Each test
point shall be given a unique alphanumeric identification that is
cross referenced to the data sheets.
b. Recommendations for maintenance testing, including

instructions in making pipe-to-reference cell potential
measurements and frequency of testing.
c. All maintenance and operating instructions and nameplate

data shall be in English.
d. Instructions shall include precautions to insure safe

conditions during repair of pipe system.
Training Course
The proposed Training Course Curriculum (including topics and

dates of discussion) indicating that all of the items contained in
the operating and maintenance instructions, as well as
demonstrations of routine maintenance operations, including
testing procedures included in the maintenance instructions, are
to be covered.
1.4.1 Services of "Corrosion Expert"
Obtain the services of a "corrosion expert" to supervise, inspect, and test

the installation and performance of the cathodic protection system.
"Corrosion expert" refers to a person, who by thorough knowledge of the
physical sciences and the principles of engineering and mathematics,
acquired by professional education and related practical experience, is
qualified to engage in the practice of corrosion control of buried or
submerged metallic surfaces. Such a person must be accredited or certified
by the National Association of Corrosion Engineers (NACE) as a NACE
Accredited Corrosion Specialist or a NACE certified Cathodic Protection
(CP) Specialist or be a registered professional engineer who has
certification or licensing that includes education and experience in
corrosion control of buried or submerged metallic piping and tank systems,
if such certification or licensing includes 5 years experience in corrosion
control on underground metallic surfaces of the type under this contract.
The "corrosion expert" shall make at least 3 visits to the project site.
The first of these visits shall include obtaining soil resistivity data,
acknowledging the type of pipeline coatings to be used and reporting to the
Contractor the type of cathodic protection required. Once the submittals
are approved and the materials delivered, the "corrosion expert" shall
revisit the site the ensure the Contractor understands installation
practices and laying out the components. The third visit shall involve
SECTION 26 42 14.00 10 Page 7

testing the installed cathodic protection systems and training applicable

personnel on proper maintenance techniques. The "corrosion expert" shall
supervise installation and testing of all cathodic protection.
1.4.2 Isolators
Isolators are required to insulate the indicated pipes from any other
structure. Isolators shall be provided with lightning protection and a
test station as shown.
1.4.3 Anode and Bond Wires
A minimum of 5 magnesium anodes with an unpackaged weight of 32 pounds

shall be provided uniform distances along the metallic pipe lines. A
minimum of 3 test stations shall be used for these anodes. These anodes
shall be in addition to anodes for the pipe under concrete slab and casing
requirements. For each cathodic system, the metallic components and
structures to be protected shall be made electrically continuous. This
shall be accomplished by installing bond wires between the various
structures. Bonding of existing buried structures may also be required to
preclude detrimental stray current effects and safety hazards. Provisions
shall be included to return stray current to its source without damaging
structures intercepting the stray current. The electrical isolation of
underground facilities in accordance with acceptable industry practice
shall be included under this section. All tests shall be witnessed by the
Approved zinc grounding cells or sealed weatherproof lightning arrestor

devices shall be installed across insulated flanges or fittings installed
in underground piping as indicated on the drawings. The arrestor shall be
gapless, self-healing, solid state type. Zinc anode composition shall
conform to ASTM B 418, Type II. Lead wires shall be number 6 AWG copper
with high molecular weight polyethylene (HMWPE) insulation. The zinc
grounding cells shall not be prepackaged in backfill but shall be installed
as detailed on the drawings. Lightning arrestors or zinc grounding cells
are not required for insulated flanges on metallic components used on
nonmetallic piping systems.
1.4.5 Nonmetallic Pipe System
In the event pipe other than metallic pipe is approved and used in lieu of
metallic pipe, all metallic components of this pipe system shall be
protected with cathodic protection. Detailed drawings of cathodic
protection for each component shall be submitted to the Contracting Officer
for approval within 45 days after date of receipt of notice to proceed, and
before commencement of any work.
1.4.5.1 Coatings
Coatings for metallic components shall be as required for metallic

fittings. Protective covering (coating and taping) shall be completed and
tested on each metallic component (such as valves, hydrants and fillings).
This covering shall be as required for underground metallic pipe. Each
test shall be witnessed by the Contracting Officer. Coatings shall be
selected, applied, and inspected as specified in these specifications. The
use of nonmetallic pipe does not change other requirements of the
specifications. Any deviations due to the use of nonmetallic pipe shall be
SECTION 26 42 14.00 10 Page 8

submitted for approval.
1.4.5.2 Tracer Wire
When a nonmetallic pipe line is used to extend or add to an existing

metallic line, an insulated No. 8 AWG copper wire shall be thermit-welded
to the existing metallic line and run the length of the new nonmetallic
line. This wire shall be used as a locator tracer wire and to maintain
continuity to any future extensions of the pipe line.
1.4.6 Drawings
Detailed drawings shall be provided showing location of anodes, insulated

fittings, test stations, permanent reference cells, and bonding. Locations
shall be referenced to two (2) permanent facilities or mark points.
Storage area for magnesium anodes will be designated by the Contracting

Officer. If anodes are not stored in a building, tarps or similar
protection should be used to protect anodes from inclement weather.
Packaged anodes, damaged as a result of improper handling or being exposed
to rain, shall be resacked and the required backfill added.
1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS
After approval of shop drawings, and not later than three (3) months prior
to the date of beneficial occupancy, furnish spare parts data for each
different item of material and equipment specified. The data shall include
a complete list of parts, special tools, and supplies, with current unit
prices and source of supply. In addition, supply information for material
and equipment replacement for all other components of the complete system,
including anodes, cables, splice kits and connectors, corrosion test
stations, and any other components not listed above. Furnish a reference
cell on a reel with 350 feet of conductor, along with other accessories,
and a digital voltmeter that can be used in the maintenance of this
cathodic protection system. Use of this equipment shall be demonstrated in
actual tests during the training course, which shall include a description
of the the equipment and measurement of the pipe-to-soil potential,
rainfall, and gas company voltages.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MAGNESIUM ANODES
Install anodes on the Pipe system. See Paragraph METALLIC COMPONENTS ON

NONMETALLIC SYSTEMS AND TYPICALS for additional anodes under slab.
2.1.1 Anode Composition
Anodes shall be of high-potential magnesium alloy, made of primary

magnesium obtained from sea water or brine, and not made from scrap metal.
Magnesium anodes shall conform to ASTM B 843 and to the following analysis
(in percents) otherwise indicated:
Aluminum, max. 0.010

Manganese, max. 0.50 to 1.30
Zinc 0.05
Silicon, max. 0.05
SECTION 26 42 14.00 10 Page 9

Copper, max. 0.02

Nickel, max. 0.001
Iron, Max. 0.03
Other impurities, max. 0.05 each or 0.3 max. total
Magnesium Remainder
Furnish spectrographic analysis on samples from each heat or batch of

anodes used on this project.
2.1.2 Dimensions and Weights
Dimensions and weights of anodes shall be approximately as follows:
TYPICAL MAGNESIUM ANODE SIZE
(Cross sections may be round, square, or D shaped)
NOMINAL GROSS
NOMINAL APPROX. WT lb PACKAGED NOMINAL PACKAGE
WT. LBS. SIZE (IN) IN BACKFILL DIMENSIONS (IN)
_________________________________________________________________________
3 3 X 3 X 5 8 5-1/4 X 5-1/4 X 8
5 3 X 3 X 8 13 5-1/4 X 5-1/4 X 11-1/4
9 3 X 3 X 14 27 5-1/4 X 20
12 4 X 4 X 12 32 7-1/2 X 18
17 4 X 4 X 17 45 7-1/2 X 24
32 5 X 5 X 20-1/2 68 8-1/2 X 28
50 7 X 7 X 16 100 10 X 24
2.1.3 Packaged Anodes
Provide anodes in packaged form with the anode surrounded by

specially-prepared quick-wetting backfill and contained in a water
permeable cloth or paper sack. Anodes shall be centered by means of
spacers in the backfill material. The backfill material shall have the
following composition, unless otherwise indicated:
Material Approximate Percent by Weight
Gypsum 75
Bentonite 20
Sodium Sulphate 5
Total 100
2.1.4 Zinc Anodes
Zinc anodes shall conform to ASTM B 418, Type II.
2.1.5 Connecting Wire
2.1.5.1 Wire Requirements
Wire shall be No. 12 AWG solid copper wire, not less than 10 feet long,
unspliced, complying with NFPA 70, Type TW insulation. Connecting wires
for magnesium anodes shall be factory installed with the place or emergence
from the anode in a cavity sealed flush with a dielectric sealing compound.
Connecting wires for zinc anodes shall be factory installed with the place
SECTION 26 42 14.00 10 Page 10

of connection to the protruding steel core completely sealed with a

dielectric material.
2.1.5.2 Anode Header Cable
Cable for anode header and distribution shall be No. 12 AWG stranded copper
wire with type CP high molecular weight polyethylene, 7/64 inch thick
insulation, 600-volt rating.
2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
2.2.1 Electrical Wire
Wire shall be No. 12 AWG stranded copper wire with NFPA 70, Type TW
insulation. Polyethylene insulation shall comply with the requirements of
ASTM D 1248 and shall be of the following types, classes, and grades:
High-molecular weight polyethylene shall be Type I, Class C, Grade E5.
High-density polyethylene shall be Type III, Class C, Grade E3.
2.2.1.1 Wire Splicing
Connecting wire splicing shall be made with copper compression connectors

or exothermic welds, following instructions of the manufacturer. Single
split-bolt connections shall not be used. Sheaths for encapsulating
electrical wire splices to be buried underground shall fit the insulated
wires entering the spliced joints and epoxy potting compound shall be as
specified below.
2.2.1.2 Test Wires
Test wires shall be AWG No. 12 stranded copper wire with NFPA 70, Type TW
or RHW-USE with outer covering or polyethylene insulation.
2.2.1.3 Resistance Wire
Resistance wire shall be AWG No. 16 or No. 22 nickel-chromium wire.
2.2.2 Conduit
Rigid galvanized steel conduit and accessories shall conform to UL 6. Non

metallic conduit shall conform to NEMA TC 2.
2.2.3 Test Boxes and Junctions Boxes
Boxes shall be outdoor type conforming to UL 514A.
2.2.4 Joint, Patch, Seal, and Repair Coating
Sealing and dielectric compound shall be a black, rubber based compound

that is soft, permanently pliable, tacky, moldable, and unbacked. Compound
shall be applied as recommended by the manufacturer, but not less than
1/2-inch thick. Coating compound shall be cold-applied coal-tar base
mastic. Pressure-sensitive vinyl plastic electrical tape shall conform to
UL 510.
SECTION 26 42 14.00 10 Page 11

2.2.5 Backfill Shields
Shields shall consist of approved pipeline wrapping or

fiberglass-reinforced, coal-tar impregnated tape, or plastic weld caps,
specifically made for the purpose and installed in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations. When joint bonds are required, due to the
use of mechanical joints, the entire joint shall be protected by the use of
a kraft paper joint cover. The joint cover shall be filled with poured-in,
hot coat-tar enamel.
2.2.6 Epoxy Potting Compound
Compound for encapsulating electrical wire splices to be buried underground

shall be a two package system made for the purpose.
2.2.7 Test Stations
Stations shall be of the flush-curb-box type and shall be the standard

product of a recognized manufacturer. Test stations shall be complete with
an insulated terminal block having the required number of terminals. The
test station shall be provided with a lockable over and shall have an
embossed legend, "C.P. Test." A minimum of one (1) test station shall be
provided each component of the pipe. A minimum of six (6) terminals shall
be provided in each test station. A minimum of two (2) leads are required
to the metallic pipe from each test station. Other conductors shall be
provided for each anode, other foreign pipe, and reference cells as
required. Test stations may be constructed of nonmetallic materials.
However, if nonmetallic materials are utilized, as a minimum, the materials
shall be resistant to damage from ultraviolet radiation, contain good color
retention qualities, contain high strength qualities, and be resistant to
accidental or vandalistic impacts that might be normally encountered in the
environment for which they are to be installed. The test stations shall be
listed for the particular application for which they are to be utilized.
2.2.8 Joint and Continuity Bonds
Bonds shall be provided across all joints in the metallic water and/or gas
lines, across any electrically discontinuous connections and all other
pipes and structures with other than welded or threaded joints that are
included in this cathodic protection system. Unless otherwise specified in
the specifications, bonds between structures and across joints in pipe with
other than welded or threaded joints shall be No. 8 AWG stranded copper
cable with polyethylene insulation. Bonds between structures shall contain
sufficient slack for any anticipated movement between structures. Bonds
across pipe joints shall contain a minimum of 4 inch of slack to allow for
pipe movement and soil stress. Bonds shall be attached by exothermic
welding. Exothermic weld areas shall be insulated with coating compound
and approved, and witnessed by the Contracting Officer. Continuity bonds
shall be installed as necessary to reduce stray current interference.
Additional joint bondings shall be accomplished where the necessity is
discovered during construction or testing or where the Contracting
Officer's representative directs that such bonding be done. Joint bonding
shall include all associated excavation and backfilling. There shall be a
minimum of two (2) continuity bonds between each structure and other than
welded or threaded joints. Test for electrical continuity across all
joints with other than welded or threaded joints and across all metallic
portions or components. The Contractor shall provide bonding as required
and as specified above until electrical continuity is achieved. Bonding
test data shall be submitted for approval.
SECTION 26 42 14.00 10 Page 12

2.2.9 Resistance Bonds
Resistance bonds should be adjusted as outlined in this specification.

Alternate methods may be used if they are approved by the Contracting
Officer.
2.2.10 Stray Current Measurements
Stray current measurements should be performed at each test station. Stray

currents resulting from lightning or overhead alternating current (AC)
power transmission systems shall be mitigated in accordance with NACE SP0177.
2.2.11 Electrical Isolation of Structures
As a minimum, isolating flanges or unions shall be provided at the

following locations:
a. Connection of new metallic piping or components to existing piping.
b. Pressure piping under floor slab to a building.
Isolation shall be provided at metallic connection of all lines to existing

system and where connecting to a building. Additionally, isolation shall
be provided between water, forced main, and/or gas line; and foreign pipes
that cross the new lines within 10 feet. Isolation fittings, including
isolating flanges and couplings, shall be installed aboveground or in a
concrete pit.
2.2.11.1 Electrically Isolating Pipe Joints
Electrically isolating pipe joints shall be of a type that is in regular

factory production.
2.2.11.2 Electrically Conductive Couplings
Electrically conductive couplings shall be of a type that has a published

maximum electrical resistance rating given in the manufacturer's
literature. Cradles and seals shall be of a type that is in regular
factory production made for the purpose of electrically insulating the
carrier pipe from the casing and preventing the incursion of water into the
annular space.
2.2.11.3 Insulating Joint Testing
A Model 601 Insulation Checker, as manufactured by "Gas Electronics", , or

an approved equal, shall be used for insulating joint (flange) electrical
testing.
2.2.12 Underground Structure Coating
This coating specification shall take precedence over any other project
specification and drawing notes, whether stated or implied, and shall also
apply to the pipeline or tank supplier. No variance in coating quality
shall be allowed by the Contractor or Base Construction Representative
without the written consent of the designer. All underground metallic
pipelines and tanks to be cathodically protected shall be afforded a good
quality factory-applied coating. This includes all carbon steel, cast-iron
and ductile-iron pipelines or vessels. Coatings shall be selected,
SECTION 26 42 14.00 10 Page 13

applied, and inspected as specified. If non-metallic pipelines are

installed, all metallic fittings on pipe sections shall be coated in
accordance with this specification section.
a. The nominal thickness of the metallic pipe joint or other component

coating shall be 40 mils, plus or minus 5 percent.
b. Pipe and joint coating for factory applied or field repair material
shall be applied as recommended by the manufacturer and shall be one of
the following:
(1) Continuously extruded polyethylene and adhesive coating system.

(2) Polyvinyl chloride pressure-sensitive adhesive tape.
(3) High density polyethylene/bituminous rubber compound tape.
(4) Butyl rubber tape.
(5) Coal tar epoxy.
2.2.12.1 Field Joints
All field joints shall be coated with materials compatible with the
pipeline coating compound. The joint coating material shall be applied to
an equal thickness as the pipeline coating. Unbonded coatings shall not be
used on these buried metallic components. This includes the elimination of
all unbonded polymer wraps or tubes. Once the pipeline or vessel is set in
the trench, an inspection of the coating shall be conducted. This
inspection shall include electrical holiday detection. Any damaged areas
of the coating shall be properly repaired. The Contracting Officer shall
be asked to witness inspection of the coating and testing using a holiday
detector.
2.2.12.2 Inspection of Pipe Coatings
Any damage to the protective covering during transit and handling shall be
repaired before installation. After field coating and wrapping has been
applied, the entire pipe shall be inspected by an electric holiday detector
with impressed current in accordance with NACE SP0188 using a full-ring,
spring-type coil electrode. The holiday detector shall be equipped with a
bell, buzzer, or other type of audible signal which sounds when a holiday
is detected. All holidays in the protective covering shall be repaired
immediately upon detection. Occasional checks of holiday detector
potential will be made by the Contracting Officer's representative to
determine suitability of the detector. All labor, materials, and equipment
necessary for conducting the inspection shall be furnished by the
Contractor.
a. Protective covering for aboveground piping system: Finish painting

shall conform to the applicable paragraph of SECTION: 09 90 00 PAINTS
AND COATINGS and as follows:
b. Ferrous surfaces: Shop-primed surfaces shall be touched-up with

ferrous metal primer. Surfaces that have not been shop-primed shall be
solvent-cleaned. Surfaces that contain loose rust, loose mil scale,
and other foreign substances shall be mechanically-cleaned by power
wire-brushing and primed with ferrous metal primer. Primed surface
shall be finished with two (2) coats of exterior oil paint and vinyl
paint. Coating for each entire piping service shall be an approved
pipe line wrapping having a minimum coating resistance of 50,000 Ohms
per square foot.
SECTION 26 42 14.00 10 Page 14

2.2.13 Resistance Wire
Wire shall be No. 16 or No. 22 nickel-chromium wire with TW insulation.
2.2.14 Electrical Connections
Electrical connections shall be done as follows:
a. Exothermic welds shall be "Cadweld". Use of this material shall be in

strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
b. Electrical-shielded arc welds shall be approved for use on steel pipe

by shop drawing submittal action.
c. Brazing shall be as specified in Paragraph: Lead Wire Connections.
2.2.15 Electrical Tape
Pressure-sensitive vinyl plastic electrical tape shall conform to UL 510.
2.2.16 Permanent Reference Electrodes
Permanent reference electrodes shall be Cu-CuS04 electrodes suitable for

direct burial. Electrodes shall be guaranteed by the supplier for 15
years' service in the environment in which they shall be placed.
Electrodes shall be installed directly beneath pipe, or metallic component.
2.2.17 Casing
Where a pipeline is installed in a casing under a roadway or railway, the

pipeline shall be electrically insulated from the casing, and the annular
space sealed and filled with an approved corrosion inhibiting product
against incursion of water.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 CRITERIA OF PROTECTION
Acceptance criteria for determining the adequacy of protection on a buried

underground pipe metallic component shall be in accordance with NACE RP0285
and as specified below.
3.1.1 Iron and Steel
The following method a. shall be used for testing cathodic protection

voltages. If more than one method is required, method b. shall be used.
a. A negative voltage of at least minus 850 millivolts as measured between

the underground component and a saturated copper-copper sulphate
reference electrode connecting the earth (electrolyte) directly over
the underground component. Determination of this voltage shall be made
with the cathodic protection system in operation. Voltage drops shall
be considered for valid interpretation of this voltage measurement. A
minimum of minus 850 millivolts "instant off" potential between the
underground component being tested and the reference cell shall be
achieved over 95 percent of the area of the structure. Adequate number
of measurements shall be obtained over the entire structure, pipe,
tank, or other metallic component to verify and record achievement of
minus 850 millivolts "instant off." This potential shall be obtained
SECTION 26 42 14.00 10 Page 15

over 95 percent of the total metallic area without the "instant off"
potential exceeding 1200 millivolts.
b. A minimum polarization voltage shift of 100 millivolts as measured

between the underground component and a saturated copper-copper
sulphate reference electrode contacting the earth directly over the
underground component. This polarization voltage shift shall be
determined by interrupting the protective current and measuring the
polarization decay. When the protective current is interrupted, an
immediate voltage shift will occur. The voltage reading, after the
immediate shift, shall be used as the base reading from which to
measure polarization decay. Measurements achieving 100 millivolts
decay shall be made over 95 percent of the metallic surface being
protected.
c. For any metallic component, a minimum of four (4) measurements shall be

made using subparagraph a., above, and achieving the "instant off"
potential of minus 850 millivolts. Two (2) measurements shall be made
over the anodes and two (2) measurements shall be made at different
locations near the component and farthest away from the anode.
3.1.2 Aluminum
Aluminum underground component shall not be protected to a potential more

negative than minus 1200 millivolts, measured between the underground
component and a saturated copper-copper sulphate reference electrode
contacting the earth, directly over the metallic component. Resistance, if
required, shall be inserted in the anode circuit within the test station to
reduce the potential of the aluminum to a value which will not exceed a
potential more negative than minus 1200 millivolts. Voltage shift
criterion shall be a minimum negative polarization shift of 100 millivolts
measured between the metallic component and a saturated copper-copper
sulphate reference electrode contacting the earth, directly over the
metallic component. The polarization voltage shift shall be determined as
outlined for iron and steel.
3.1.3 Copper Piping
For copper piping, the following criteria shall apply: A minimum of 100
millivolts of cathodic polarization between the structure surface and a
stable reference electrode contacting the electrolyte. The polarization
voltage shift shall be determined as outlined for iron and steel.
3.2 TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING
Perform trenching and backfilling in accordance with Section 31 00 00

EARTHWORK. In the areas of the anode beds, all trees and underbrush shall
be cleared and grubbed to the limits shown or indicated. In the event rock
is encountered in providing the required depth for anodes, determine an
alternate approved location and, if the depth is still not provided, submit
an alternate plan to the Contracting Officer. Alternate techniques and
depths must be approved prior to implementation.
3.3 INSTALLATION
3.3.1 Anode Installation
Unless otherwise authorized, installation shall not proceed without the

presence of the Contracting Officer. Anodes of the size specified shall be
SECTION 26 42 14.00 10 Page 16

installed to the depth indicated and at the locations shown. Locations may
be changed to clear obstructions with the approval of the Contracting
Officer. Anodes shall be installed in sufficient number and of the
required type, size, and spacing to obtain a uniform current distribution
over the surface of the structure. The anode system shall e designed for a
life of 25 years of continuous operation. Anodes shall be installed as
indicated in a dry condition after any plastic or waterproof protective
covering has been completely removed from the water permeable, permanent
container housing the anode metal. The anode connecting wire shall not be
used for lowering the anode into the hole. The annular space around the
anode shall be backfilled with fine earth in 6 inch layers and each layer
shall be hand tamped. Care must be exercised not to strike the anode or
connecting wire with the tamper. Approximately 5 gallons of water shall be
applied to each filled hole after anode backfilling and tamping has been
completed to a point about 6 inch above the anode. After the water has
been absorbed by the earth, backfilling shall be completed to the ground
surface level.
3.3.1.1 Single Anodes
Single anodes, spaced as shown, shall be connected through a test station

to the pipeline, allowing adequate slack in the connecting wire to
compensate for movement during backfill operation.
3.3.1.2 Groups of Anodes
Groups of anodes, in quantity and location shown, shall be connected to an

anode header cable. The anode header cable shall make contact with the
structure to be protected only through a test station. Anode lead
connection to the anode header cable shall be made by an approved crimp
connector or exothermic weld and splice mold kit with appropriate potting
compound.
3.3.1.3 Welding Methods
Connections to ferrous pipe shall be made by exothermic weld methods

manufactured for the type of pipe supplied. Electric arc welded
connections and other types of welded connections to ferrous pipe and
structures shall be approved before use.
3.3.2 Anode Placement - General
Packaged anodes shall be installed completely dry, and shall be lowered

into holes by rope sling or by grasping the cloth gather. The anode lead
wire shall not be used in lowering the anodes. The hole shall be
backfilled with fine soil in 6 inch layers and each layer shall be
hand-tamped around the anode. Care must be exercised not to strike the
anode or lead wire with the tamper. If immediate testing is to be
performed, water shall be added only after backfilling and tamping has been
completed to a point 6 inch above the anode. Approximately 2 gallons of
water may be poured into the hole. After the water has been absorbed by
the soil, backfilling and tamping may be completed to the top of the hole.
Anodes shall be installed as specified or shown. In the event a rock
strata is encountered prior to achieving specified augered-hole depth,
anodes may be installed horizontally to a depth at least as deep as the
bottom of the pipe, with the approval of the Contracting Officer.
SECTION 26 42 14.00 10 Page 17

3.3.3 Underground Pipeline
Anodes shall be installed at a minimum of 8 feet and a maximum of 10 feet

from the line to be protected.
3.3.4 Installation Details
Details shall conform to the requirements of this specification. Details

shown on the drawings are indicative of the general type of material
required, and are not intended to restrict selection to material of any
particular manufacturer.
3.3.5 Lead Wire Connections
3.3.5.1 Underground Pipeline (Metallic)
To facilitate periodic electrical measurements during the life of the

sacrificial anode system and to reduce the output current of the anodes, if
required, all anode lead wires shall be connected to a test station and
buried a minimum of 24 inch in depth. The cable shall be No. 10 AWG,
stranded copper, polyethylene or RHW-USE insulated cable. The cable shall
make contact with the structure only through a test station. Resistance
wire shall be installed between the cable and the pipe cable, in the test
station, to reduce the current output, if required. Anode connections,
except in the test station, shall be made with exothermic welding process,
and shall be insulated by means of at least three (3) layers of electrical
tape; and all lead wire connections shall be installed in a moistureproof
splice mold kit and filled with epoxy resin. Lead wire-to-structure
connections shall be accomplished by an exothermic welding process. All
welds shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. A
backfill shield filled with a pipeline mastic sealant or material
compatible with the coating shall be placed over the weld connection and
shall be of such diameter as to cover the exposed metal adequately.
3.3.5.2 Resistance Wire Splices
Resistance wire connections shall be accomplished with silver solder and

the solder joints wrapped with a minimum of three (3) layers of
pressure-sensitive tape. Lead wire connections shall be installed in a
moistureproof splice mold kit and filled with epoxy resin.
3.3.6 Location of Test Stations
Test stations shall be of the type and location shown and shall be curb box
mounted. Provide buried insulating joints with test wire connections
brought to a test station. Reference all test stations with GPS
coordinates. Unless otherwise shown, locate other test stations as follows:
a. At 1,000-foot intervals or less.
b. Where the pipe or conduit crosses any other metal pipe.
c. At both ends of casings under roadways and railways.
d. Where both sides of an insulating joint are not accessible above ground
for testing purposes.
SECTION 26 42 14.00 10 Page 18

3.3.7 Underground Pipe Joint Bonds
Underground pipe having other than welded or threaded coupling joints shall
be made electrically continuous by means of a bonding connection installed
across the joint.
3.4 ELECTRICAL ISOLATION OF STRUCTURES
3.4.1 Isolation Joints and Fittings
Isolating fittings, including main line isolating flanges and couplings,

shall be installed aboveground, or within manholes, wherever possible.
Where isolating joints must be covered with soil, they shall be fitted with
a paper joint cover specifically manufactured for covering the particular
joint, and the space within the cover filled with hot coal-tar enamel.
Isolating fittings in lines entering buildings shall be located at least 12
inch above grade of floor level, when possible. Isolating joints shall be
provided with grounding cells to protect against over-voltage surges or
approved surge protection devices. The cells shall provide a low
resistance across isolating joint without excessive loss of cathodic
current.
3.4.2 Gas Distribution Piping
Electrical isolation shall be provided at each building riser pipe to the

pressure regulator, at all points where a short to another structure or to
a foreign structure may occur, and at other locations as indicated on the
drawings.
3.5 TESTS AND MEASUREMENTS
3.5.1 Baseline Potentials
Each test and measurement will be witnessed by the Contracting Officer.

Notify the Contracting Officer a minimum of five (5) working days prior to
each test. After backfill of the pipe, the static potential-to-soil of the
pipe shall be measured. The locations of these measurements shall be
identical to the locations specified for pipe- to-reference electrode
potential measurements. The initial measurements shall be recorded.
3.5.2 Isolation Testing
Before the anode system is connected to the pipe, an isolation test shall
be made at each isolating joint or fitting. This test shall demonstrate
that no metallic contact, or short circuit exists between the two isolated
sections of the pipe. Any isolating fittings installed and found to be
defective shall be reported to the Contracting Officer.
3.5.2.1 Insulation Checker
A Model 601 insulation checker, as manufactured by "Gas Electronics", or an

approved equal, using the continuity check circuit, shall be used for
isolating joint (flange) electrical testing. Testing shall conform to the
manufacturer's operating instructions. Test shall be witnessed by the
Contracting Officer. An isolating joint that is good will read full scale
on the meter. If an isolating joint is shorted, the meter pointer will be
deflected or near zero on the meter scale. Location of the fault shall be
determined from the instructions, and the joint shall be repaired. If an
isolating joint is located inside a vault, the pipe shall be sleeved with
SECTION 26 42 14.00 10 Page 19

insulator when entering and leaving the vault.
3.5.2.2 Cathodic Protection Meter
A Model B3A2 cathodic protection meter, as manufactured by "M.C. Miller", or

an approved equal, using the continuity check circuit, shall be used for
isolating joint (flange) electrical testing. This test shall be performed
in addition to the Model 601 insulation checker. Continuity is checked
across the isolation joint after the test lead wire is shorted together and
the meter adjusted to scale. A full-scale deflection indicates the system
is shorted at some location. The Model 601 verifies that the particular
insulation under test is good and the Model B3A2 verifies that the system
is isolated. If the system is shorted, further testing shall be performed
to isolate the location of the short.
3.5.3 Anode Output
As the anodes or groups of anodes are connected to the pipe, current output
shall be measured with an approved clamp-on milliammeter, calibrated shunt
with a suitable millivoltmeter or multimeter, or a low resistance ammeter.
(Of the three methods, the low-resistance ammeter is the least desirable
and most inaccurate. The clamp-on milliammeter is the most accurate.) The
values obtained and the date, time, and location shall be recorded.
3.5.4 Reference Electrode Potential Measurements
Upon completion of the installation and with the entire cathodic protection
system in operation, electrode potential measurements shall be made using a
copper-copper sulphate reference electrode and a potentiometer-voltmeter,
or a direct-current voltmeter having an internal resistance (sensitivity)
of not less than 10 megohms per volt and a full scale of 10 volts. The
locations of these measurements shall be identical to the locations used
for baseline potentials. The values obtained and the date, time, and
locations of measurements shall be recorded. No less than eight (8)
measurements shall be made over any length of line or component.
Additional measurements shall be made at each distribution service riser,
with the reference electrode placed directly over the service line.
3.5.5 Location of Measurements
3.5.5.1 Piping or Conduit
For coated piping or conduit, measurements shall be taken from the

reference electrode located in contact with the earth, directly over the
pipe. Connection to the pipe shall be made at service risers, valves, test
leads, or by other means suitable for test purposes. Pipe-to-soil
potential measurements shall be made at intervals not exceeding 5 feet.
The Contractor may use a continuous pipe-to-soil potential profile in lieu
of 5 foot interval pipe-to-soil potential measurements. Additional
measurements shall be made at each distribution service riser, with the
reference electrode placed directly over the service line adjacent to the
riser. Potentials shall be plotted versus distance to an approved scale.
Locations where potentials do not meet or exceed the criteria shall be
identified and reported to the Contracting Officer's representative.
3.5.5.2 Tanks
For underground tanks, at least 6 measurements shall be taken from the

reference electrode located:
SECTION 26 42 14.00 10 Page 20

a. Directly over the center of the tank.
b. At a point directly over the tank and midway between each pair of
anodes.
3.5.5.3 Casing Tests
Before final acceptance of the installation, the electrical separation of

carrier pipe from casings shall be tested and any short circuits corrected.
3.5.5.4 Interference Testing
Before final acceptance of the installation, interference tests shall be

made with respect to any foreign pipes in cooperation with the owner of the
foreign pipes. A full report of the tests giving all details shall be
made. Stray current measurements shall be performed at all isolating
locations and at locations where the new pipeline crosses foreign metallic
pipes; results of stray current measurements shall also be submitted for
approval. The method of measurements and locations of measurements shall
be submitted for approval. As a minimum, stray current measurements shall
be performed at the following locations:
a. Connection point of new pipeline to existing pipeline.
b. Crossing points of new pipeline with existing lines.
3.5.5.5 Holiday Test
Any damage to the protective covering during transit and handling shall be
repaired before installation. After field-coating and wrapping has been
applied, the entire pipe shall be inspected by an electric holiday detector
with impressed current in accordance with NACE SP0188 using a full-ring,
spring-type coil electrode. The holiday detector shall be equipped with a
bell, buzzer, or other type of audible signal which sounds when a holiday
is detected. Holidays in the protective covering shall be repaired upon
detection. Occasional checks of holiday detector potential will be made by
the Contracting Officer to determine suitability of the detector. Labor,
materials, and equipment necessary for conducting the inspection shall be
furnished by the Contractor. The coating system shall be inspected for
holes, voids, cracks, and other damage during installation.
3.5.5.6 Recording Measurements
All pipe- hydrants-, and valves- to-soil potential measurements, including

initial potentials where required, shall be recorded. Locate, correct and
report to the Contracting Officer any short circuits to foreign pipes
hydrants-, and valves- encountered during checkout of the installed
cathodic protection system. Pipe- hydrants-, and valves- to-soil potential
measurements shall be taken on as many pipes hydrants-, and valves- as
necessary to determine the extent of protection or to locate short-circuits.
3.6 TRAINING COURSE

instructions shall cover all of the items contained in the operating and
SECTION 26 42 14.00 10 Page 21

maintenance instructions, as well as demonstrations of routine maintenance

operations, including testing procedures included in the maintenance
instructions. At least 14 days prior to date of proposed conduction of the
training course, the training course curriculum shall be submitted for
approval, along with the proposed training date. Training shall consist of
demonstration of test equipment, providing forms for test data and the
tolerances which indicate that the system works.
3.7 SYSTEM TESTING
Submit a report including potential measurements taken at adequately-close

intervals to establish that minus 850 millivolts potential, "instant-off"
potential, is provided, and that the cathodic protection is not providing
interference to other foreign pipes causing damage to paint or pipes. The
report shall provide a narrative describing how the criteria of protection
is achieved without damaging other pipe or structures in the area.
3.8 SEEDING
Seeding shall be done as directed, in all unsurfaced locations disturbed by

this construction. In areas where grass cover exists, it is possible that
sod can be carefully removed, watered, and stored during construction
operations, and replaced after the operations are completed since it is
estimated that no section of pipeline should remain uncovered for more than
two (2) days. The use of sod in lieu of seeding shall require approval by
3.9 CLEANUP
The Contractor is responsible for cleanup of the construction site. All

paper bags, wire clippings, etc., shall be disposed of as directed. Paper
bags, wire clippings and other waste shall not be put in bell holes or
anodes excavation.
SECTION 26 42 14.00 10 Page 22

SECTION 26 51 00
INTERIOR LIGHTING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES


CALIFORNIA ENERGY COMMISSION (CEC)
CEC Title 24 (1978; R 2005) California's Energy

Efficiency Standards for Residential and
Nonresidential Buildings
GREEN SEAL (GS)
GC-12 (1997) Occupancy Sensors
IESNA HB-9 (2000; Errata 2004; Errata 2005) IES

Lighting Handbook
IEEE C2 (2007; Errata 2006; Errata 2007; INT 44-56

2007; INT 47, 49, 50, 52-56 2008; INT 57,
Safety Code




NEMA C82.11 (2002) High-Frequency Fluorescent Lamp

Ballasts

NEMA LL 1 (1997; R 2002) Procedures for Linear

Fluorescent Lamp Sample Preparation and
the TCLP Extraction
NFPA 101 (2008; Amendment 2009) Life Safety Code

Code - 2008 Edition

UL 1598 (2008; Rev thru Feb 2009) Luminaires

Plug-In Locking Type Photocontrols for Use
with Area Lighting
UL 773A (2006) Nonindustrial Photoelectric

Switches for Lighting Control
UL 924 (2006; Rev thru Jan 2009) Standard for

Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment
UL 935 (2001; Rev thru Dec 2007) Standard for

Fluorescent-Lamp Ballasts
Materials not considered to be lighting equipment or lighting fixture

accessories are specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION
SYSTEM. Lighting fixtures and accessories mounted on exterior surfaces of
buildings are specified in this section.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
a. Unless otherwise specified or indicated, electrical and electronics

terms used in these specifications, and on the drawings, shall be as
defined in IEEE Std 100.
b. Average life is the time after which 50 percent will have failed and 50
percent will have survived under normal conditions.
c. Total harmonic distortion (THD) is the root mean square (RMS) of all
the harmonic components divided by the total fundamental current.
1.4.1 Lighting Control System
Provide lighting control system as indicated. Lighting control equipment

shall include, if indicated: control modules, power packs, dimming
ballasts, occupancy/vacancy sensors, and light level sensors.
1.5 SUBMITTALS

Data, drawings, and reports shall employ the terminology, classifications,

and methods prescribed by the IESNA HB-9, as applicable, for the lighting
system specified.
SD-03 Product Data
Fluorescent lighting fixtures; ,
Fluorescent electronic ballasts;
Fluorescent electromagnetic ballasts;
Fluorescent lamps;
Metal-halide lamps;
Dimmer switch;
Lighting contactor;
Time switch;
Photocell switch;
Exit signs;
Emergency lighting equipment;
Occupancy/vacancy sensors;
Electronic dimming ballast;
Dimming ballast controls;
Light Level Sensor;

Environmental Data
Energy Efficiency
SD-04 Samples
Lighting fixtures, complete with lamps and ballasts;
SD-06 Test Reports
Operating test
Submit test results as stated in paragraph entitled "Field Quality

Control."
Lighting Control System, Data Package 5;

01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA and as specified herein,
showing all light fixtures, control modules, control zones,
occupancy/vacancy sensors, light level sensors, power packs,
dimming ballasts, schematic diagrams and all interconnecting
control wire, conduit, and associated hardware.
Operational Service
Submit documentation that includes contact information, summary

of procedures, and the limitations and conditions applicable to
the project. Indicate manufacturer's commitment to reclaim
materials for recycling and/or reuse.
1.6.1 Fluorescent Electronic Ballasts
Submit ballast catalog data as required in the paragraph entitled

"Fluorescent Lamp Electronic Ballasts" contained herein. As an option,
submit the fluorescent fixture manufacturer's electronic ballast
specification information in lieu of the actual ballast manufacturer's
catalog data. This information shall include published specifications and
sketches, which covers the information required by the paragraph entitled
"Fluorescent Lamp Electronic Ballasts" herein. This information may be

supplemented by catalog data if required, and shall contain a list of
vendors with vendor part numbers.


furnished.

1.6.3.3 Energy Efficiency
Comply with National Energy Policy Act and Energy Star requirements for
lighting products. Submit documentation for Energy Star qualifications for
equipment provided under this section. Submit data indicating lumens per
watt efficiency and color rendition index of light source.
1.7 WARRANTY

1.7.1 Electronic Ballast Warranty
Furnish the electronic ballast manufacturer's warranty. The warranty

period shall not be less than 5 years from the date of manufacture of the
electronic ballast. Ballast assembly in the lighting fixture,

transportation, and on-site storage shall not exceed 12 months, thereby
permitting 4 years of the ballast 5 year warranty to be in service and
energized. The warranty shall state that the malfunctioning ballast shall
be exchanged by the manufacturer and promptly shipped to the using
Government facility. The replacement ballast shall be identical to, or an
improvement upon, the original design of the malfunctioning ballast.
1.8 OPERATIONAL SERVICE
Coordinate with manufacturer for maintenance agreement take-back program.

Collect information from the manufacturer about maintenance agreement green
lease options, and submit to Contracting Officer. Services shall reclaim
materials for recycling and/or reuse. Services shall not landfill or burn
reclaimed materials. Indicate procedures for compliance with regulations
governing disposal of mercury. When such a service is not available, local
recyclers shall be sought after to reclaim the materials.

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 FLUORESCENT LIGHTING FIXTURES
UL 1598. Fluorescent fixtures shall have electronic ballasts .
2.1.1 Fluorescent Lamp Electronic Ballasts
The electronic ballast shall as a minimum meet the following

characteristics:
a. Ballast shall comply with UL 935, NEMA C82.11, NFPA 70, and CEC Title 24
unless specified otherwise. Ballast shall be 100% electronic high
frequency type with no magnetic core and coil components. Ballast
shall provide transient immunity as recommended by IEEE C62.41.1 and
IEEE C62.41.2. Ballast shall be designed for the wattage of the lamps
used in the indicated application. Ballasts shall be designed to
operate on the voltage system to which they are connected.
b. Power factor shall be 0.95 (minimum).
c. Ballast shall operate at a frequency of 20,000 Hertz (minimum).

Ballast shall be compatible with and not cause interference with the
operation of occupancy/vacancy sensors or other infrared control
systems. Provide ballasts operating at or above 40,000 Hertz where
available.
d. Ballast shall have light regulation of plus or minus 10 percent lumen

output with a plus or minus 10 percent input voltage regulation.
Ballast shall have 10 percent flicker (maximum) using any compatible
lamp.
e. Ballast factor shall be between 0.85 (minimum) and 1.00 (maximum).

Current crest factor shall be 1.7 (maximum).
f. Ballast shall be UL listed Class P with a sound rating of "A."
g. Ballast shall have circuit diagrams and lamp connections displayed on

the ballast.
h. Ballasts shall be programmed start unless otherwise indicated.

Programmed start ballasts may operate lamps in a series circuit
configuration. Provide series/parallel wiring for programmed start
ballasts where available.
i. Ballasts for compact fluorescent fixtures shall be programmed start.
k. Ballast shall be capable of starting and maintaining operation at a

minimum of 0 degrees F unless otherwise indicated.
l. Electronic ballast shall have a full replacement warranty of 5 years

from date of manufacture as specified in paragraph entitled "Electronic
Ballast Warranty" herein.
2.1.1.1 T-8 Lamp Ballast
a. Total harmonic distortion (THD): Shall be 20 percent (maximum).
b. Input wattage.
1. 32 watts (maximum) when operating one F32T8 lamp
2. 62 watts (maximum) when operating two F32T8 lamps
3. 92 watts (maximum) when operating three F32T8 lamps
4. 114 watts (maximum) when operating four F32T8 lamps
c. Ballast efficacy factor.
1. 2.54 (minimum) when operating one F32T8 lamp
2. 1.44 (minimum) when operating two F32T8 lamps
3. 0.93 (minimum) when operating three F32T8 lamps
4. 0.73 (minimum) when operating four F32T8 lamps
d. Provide three and four lamp fixtures with two ballasts per fixture
where multilevel switching is indicated.
2.1.1.2 F17T8 Lamp Ballast
a. Total harmonic distortion (THD): Shall be 25 percent (maximum).
b. Input wattage:
1. 34 watts (maximum) when operating two F17T8 lamps.
2.1.2 Fluorescent Lamp Electronic Dimming Ballast
The electronic ballast shall as a minimum meet the following

characteristics:
a. Ballast shall comply with NEMA C82.11, UL 935, and NFPA 70, unless
specified otherwise. Ballast shall provide transient immunity as
recommended by IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2. Ballast dimming
capability range shall be from 100 to 5 percent (minimum range) of
light output, flicker free. Ballast shall start lamp at any preset
light output setting without first having to go to full light output.
Ballast shall be designed for the wattage of the lamps used in the
indicated application. Ballasts shall be designed to operate on the
voltage system to which they are connected.
b. Power factor shall be 0.95 (minimum) at full light output, and 0.90
(minimum) over the entire dimming range.
c. Ballast shall operate at a frequency of 20,000 Hertz (minimum).

Ballast shall be compatible with and not cause interference with the
operation of occupancy/vacancy sensors or other infrared control
systems. Provide ballasts operating at or above 40,000 Hertz where
available.
d. Ballast factor at full light output shall be between 0.85 (minimum) and
1.00 (maximum). Current crest factor shall be 1.7 (maximum).
e. Ballast shall be UL listed Class P with a sound rating of "A".
f. Ballast shall have circuit diagrams and lamp connections displayed on

the ballast.
g. Ballast shall be programmed start. Ballast may operate lamps in a

series circuit configuration. Provide series/parallel wiring for
programmed start ballasts where available.
h. Ballasts for compact fluorescent fixtures shall be programmed start.
i. Ballast shall be capable of starting and maintaining operation at a

minimum of 0 degrees F unless otherwise indicated.
j. Total harmonic distortion (THD): Shall be 20 percent (maximum) over

the entire dimming range.
2.1.2.1 T-8 Lamp Ballast
Input wattage, for indicated lamp quantity shall be:
a. 35 watts (maximum) when operating one F32T8 lamp.
b. 70 watts (maximum) when operating two F32T8 lamps.
c. 104 watts (maximum) when operating three F32T8 lamps.
2.1.3 Dimming Ballast Controls
The dimming ballast controls shall be a slide dimmer with on/off control.
The slide dimmer shall be compatible with the ballast and control the
ballast light output over the full dimming range. Dimming ballast controls
shall be approved by the ballast manufacturer.
2.1.4 Light Level Sensor
UL listed. Light level sensor shall be capable of detecting changes in

ambient lighting levels, shall provide a dimming range of 20 percent to 100
percent, minimum, and shall be designed for use with dimming ballast and
voltage system to which they are connected. Sensor shall be capable of
controlling 40 electronic dimming ballast, minimum. Sensor light level
shall be adjustable and have a set level range from 10 to 100 footcandles,
minimum. Sensor shall have a bypass function to electrically override
sensor control.
2.1.5 Fluorescent Lamps
a. T-8 rapid start low mercury lamps shall be rated 32 watts (maximum),
3100 initial lumens (minimum), CRI of 75 (minimum), color temperature
of 3500 K, and an average rated life of 20,000 hours. Low mercury
lamps shall have passed the EPA Toxicity Characteristic Leachate
Procedure (TCLP) for mercury by using the lamp sample preparation
procedure described in NEMA LL 1.
Average mercury content (across at least 90% of both interior and

exterior lighting & lamps) shall not exceed 50 pico*grams/lumen*hr of
expected life.
b. T-8 rapid start lamp, 17 watt (maximum), nominal length of 24 inches,

1300 initial lumens, CRI of 75 (minimum), color temperature of 3500 K,
and an average rated life of 20,000 hours.
cg. Compact fluorescent lamps shall be: CRI 80, minimum, 3500 K, 10,000
hours average rated life, and as follows:
(1) T-4, twin tube, rated as indicated.
(2) T-4, double twin tube, rated as indicated.
Average rated life is based on 3 hours operating per start.
2.1.6 Compact Fluorescent Fixtures
Compact fluorescent fixtures shall be manufactured specifically for compact

fluorescent lamps with ballasts integral to the fixture. Providing
assemblies designed to retrofit incandescent fixtures is prohibited except
when specifically indicated for renovation of existing fixtures. Fixtures
shall use lamps as indicated, with a minimum CRI of 80.
2.1.7 Open-Tube Fluorescent Fixtures
Provide with self-locking sockets, or lamp retainers (two per lamp).
2.2 RECESS- AND FLUSH-MOUNTED FIXTURES
Provide type that can be relamped from the bottom. Access to ballast shall
be from the bottom. Trim for the exposed surface of flush-mounted fixtures
shall be as indicated.
2.3 SUSPENDED FIXTURES
Provide hangers capable of supporting twice the combined weight of fixtures

supported by hangers. Provide with swivel hangers to ensure a plumb
installation. Hangers shall be cadmium-plated steel with a swivel-ball
tapped for the conduit size indicated. Hangers shall allow fixtures to
swing within an angle of 45 degrees. Brace pendants 4 feet or longer to
limit swinging. Single-unit suspended fluorescent fixtures shall have
twin-stem hangers. Multiple-unit or continuous row fluorescent fixtures
shall have a tubing or stem for wiring at one point and a tubing or rod
suspension provided for each unit length of chassis, including one at each
end. Rods shall be a minimum 0.18 inch diameter.
2.4 SWITCHES
2.4.1 Toggle Switches
Provide toggle switches as specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR

DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.
2.5 TIME SWITCH
Astronomic dial type or electronic type, arranged to turn "ON" at sunset

and turn "OFF" at predetermined time between 8:30 p.m. and 2:30 a.m. or
sunrise, automatically changing the settings each day in accordance with
seasonal changes of sunset and sunrise. Provide switch rated 120 volts,
having automatically wound spring mechanism or capacitor, to maintain
accurate time for a minimum of 15 hours following power failure. Provide
time switch with a manual on-off bypass switch. Housing for the time
switch shall be surface-mounted, NEMA 1 enclosure conforming to NEMA ICS 6.
UL 773 or UL 773A, hermetically sealed cadmium-sulfide or silicon diode

type cell rated 120 volts ac, 60 Hz with single-throw contacts. Switch
shall turn on at or below 3 footcandles and off at 2 to 10 footcandles. A
time delay shall prevent accidental switching from transient light
sources. Provide switch:
d. In a cast weatherproof aluminum housing with adjustable window slide,

rated 1800 VA, minimum.
2.7 EXIT SIGNS
UL 924, NFPA 70, and NFPA 101. Exit signs shall be self-powered type.
Exit signs shall use no more than 5 watts.
2.7.1 Self-Powered LED Type Exit Signs (Battery Backup)
Provide with automatic power failure device, test switch, pilot light, and
fully automatic high/low trickle charger in a self-contained power pack.
Battery shall be sealed electrolyte type, shall operate unattended, and
require no maintenance, including no additional water, for a period of not
less than 5 years. LED exit sign shall have emergency run time of 1 1/2
hours (minimum). The light emitting diodes shall have rated lamp life of
70,000 hours (minimum).
2.7.2 Remote-Powered Exit Signs
Provide remote ac/dc exit signs with provisions for wiring to external ac
and dc power sources. Provide signs with a minimum of two ac lamps for
normal illumination and a minimum of two dc lamps for emergency lighting.
2.8 EMERGENCY LIGHTING EQUIPMENT
UL 924, NFPA 70, and NFPA 101. Provide lamps in wattage indicated.
2.8.1 Emergency Lighting Unit
Provide as indicated.
2.8.2 Fluorescent Emergency System
Each system shall consist of an automatic power failure device, test switch
operable from outside of the fixture, pilot light visible from outside the
fixture, and fully automatic solid-state charger in a self-contained power
pack. Charger shall be either trickle, float, constant current or constant
potential type, or a combination of these. Battery shall be sealed
electrolyte type with capacity as required to supply power to the number of
lamps shown for each system for 90 minutes at a minimum of 600 lumens per
lamp output. Battery shall operate unattended and require no maintenance,
including no additional water, for a period of not less than 5 years.
Emergency ballasts provided with fixtures containing solid-state ballasts
shall be fully compatible with the solid-state ballasts.
2.9 OCCUPANCY/VACANCY SENSORS
UL listed. Comply with GC-12. Occupancy/vacancy sensors and power packs

shall be designed to operate on the voltage indicated. Sensors and power
packs shall have circuitry that only allows load switching at or near zero
current crossing of supply voltage. Occupancy/vacancy sensor mounting as
indicated. Sensor shall have an LED occupant detection indicator. Sensor
shall have adjustable sensitivity and adjustable delayed-off time range of
5 minutes to 15 minutes. Wall mounted sensors shall be ivory, ceiling
mounted sensors shall be white. Ceiling mounted sensors shall have 360
degree coverage unless otherwise indicated.
a. Ultrasonic sensor shall be crystal controlled and shall not cause

detection interference between adjacent sensors.
b. Infrared sensors shall have a daylight filter. Sensor shall have a

fresnel lens that is applicable to space to be controlled.
c. Ultrasonic/Infrared Combination Sensor
Occupancy detection to turn lights on requires both ultrasonic and

infrared sensor detection. Lights shall remain on if either the
ultrasonic or infrared sensor detects movement. Infrared sensor shall
have lens selected for indicated usage and daylight filter to prevent
short wavelength infrared interference. Ultrasonic sensor frequency
shall be crystal controlled.
Vacancy sensor is an occupancy sensor which has a manual On switch.
With vacancy sensor, the lights must be manually turned on and the
sensor automatically turns the light off soon after an area is vacated
that meets the occupancy requirement.
2.10 SUPPORT HANGERS FOR LIGHTING FIXTURES IN SUSPENDED CEILINGS
2.10.1 Wires
ASTM A 641/A 641M, galvanized regular coating, soft temper, 0.1055 inches
in diameter (12 gage).

acceptable.
2.11.2 Labels
Provide labeled luminaires in accordance with UL 1598 requirements. All

luminaires shall be clearly marked for operation of specific lamps and
ballasts according to proper lamp type. The following lamp characteristics
shall be noted in the format "Use Only _____":
a. Lamp diameter code (T-4, T-5, T-8, T-12), tube configuration (twin,
quad, triple), base type, and nominal wattage for fluorescent and
compact fluorescent luminaires.
b. Lamp type, wattage, bulb type (ED17, BD56, etc.) and coating (clear or
coated) for HID luminaires.
c. Start type (preheat, rapid start, instant start) for fluorescent and
d. ANSI ballast type (M98, M57, etc.) for HID luminaires.
e. Correlated color temperature (CCT) and color rendering index (CRI) for
all luminaires.
All markings related to lamp type shall be clear and located to be readily
lamps are in place. Ballasts shall have clear markings indicating
multi-level outputs and indicate proper terminals for the various outputs.

test.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
3.1.1 Lamps
Lamps of the type, wattage, and voltage rating indicated shall be delivered
to the project in the original cartons and installed just prior to project
completion. Lamps installed and used for working light during construction
shall be replaced prior to turnover to the Government if more than 15
percent of their rated life has been used. Lamps shall be tested for
proper operation prior to turn-over and shall be replaced if necessary with
new lamps from the original manufacturer. Provide 10 percent spare lamps
of each type from the original manufacturer.
3.1.2 Lighting Fixtures
Set lighting fixtures plumb, square, and level with ceiling and walls, in
alignment with adjacent lighting fixtures, and secure in accordance with
manufacturers' directions and approved drawings. Installation shall meet
requirements of NFPA 70. Mounting heights specified or indicated shall be
to the bottom of fixture for ceiling-mounted fixtures and to center of
fixture for wall-mounted fixtures. Obtain approval of the exact mounting
for lighting fixtures on the job before commencing installation and, where
applicable, after coordinating with the type, style, and pattern of the
ceiling being installed. Recessed and semi-recessed fixtures shall be
independently supported from the building structure by a minimum of four
wires per fixture and located near each corner of each fixture. Ceiling
grid clips are not allowed as an alternative to independently supported
light fixtures. Round fixtures or fixtures smaller in size than the
ceiling grid shall be independently supported from the building structure
by a minimum of four wires per fixture spaced approximately equidistant
around the fixture. Do not support fixtures by ceiling acoustical panels.
Where fixtures of sizes less than the ceiling grid are indicated to be
centered in the acoustical panel, support such fixtures independently and
provide at least two 3/4 inch metal channels spanning, and secured to, the
ceiling tees for centering and aligning the fixture. Provide wires for
lighting fixture support in this section. Lighting fixtures installed in
suspended ceilings shall also comply with the requirements of Section
09 51 00 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS.
3.1.3 Suspended Fixtures
Suspended fixtures shall be provided with 45 degree swivel hangers so that

they hang plumb and shall be located with no obstructions within the 45
degree range in all directions. The stem, canopy and fixture shall be
capable of 45 degree swing. Pendants, rods, or chains 4 feet or longer
excluding fixture shall be braced to prevent swaying using three cables at
120 degree separation. Suspended fixtures in continuous rows shall have
internal wireway systems for end to end wiring and shall be properly
aligned to provide a straight and continuous row without bends, gaps, light
leaks or filler pieces. Aligning splines shall be used on extruded
aluminum fixtures to assure hairline joints. Steel fixtures shall be
supported to prevent "oil-canning" effects. Fixture finishes shall be free
of scratches, nicks, dents, and warps, and shall match the color and gloss
specified. Pendants shall be finished to match fixtures. Aircraft cable
shall be stainless steel. Canopies shall be finished to match the ceiling
and shall be low profile unless otherwise shown. Maximum distance between
suspension points shall be 10 feet or as recommended by the manufacturer,
whichever is less.
3.1.4 Ballasts
3.1.4.1 Electronic Dimming Ballasts
All electronic dimming ballasts controlled by the same controller shall be

of the same manufacturer. All fluorescent lamps on electronic dimming
ballast control shall be seasoned or burned in at full light output for 100
hours before dimming.
3.1.5 Exit Signs and Emergency Lighting Units
Wire exit signs and emergency lighting units ahead of the switch to the
normal lighting circuit located in the same room or area.
3.1.6 Photocell Switch Aiming
Aim switch according to manufacturer's recommendations.
3.1.7 Occupancy/vacancy Sensor
Provide quantity of sensor units indicated as a minimum. Provide

additional units to give full coverage over controlled area. Full coverage
shall provide hand and arm motion detection for office and administration
type areas and walking motion for industrial areas, warehouses, storage
rooms and hallways. Locate the sensor(s) as indicated and in accordance
with the manufacturer's recommendations to maximize energy savings and to
avoid nuisance activation and deactivation due to sudden temperature or
airflow changes and usage. Set sensor "on" duration to 15 minutes.
3.1.8 Light Level Sensor
Locate light level sensor as indicated and in accordance with the

manufacturer's recommendations. Adjust sensor for 50 footcandles or for
the indicated light level at the typical work plane for that area.

as specified in Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS.
Upon completion of installation, verify that equipment is properly

installed, connected, and adjusted. Conduct an operating test to show that
equipment operates in accordance with requirements of this section.
3.3.1 Electronic Dimming Ballast
Test for full range of dimming capability. Observe for visually detectable
flicker over full dimming range.
3.3.2 Occupancy/vacancy Sensor
Test sensors for proper operation. Observe for light control over entire
area being covered.
SECTION 26 56 00
EXTERIOR LIGHTING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES


(AASHTO)
AASHTO LTS (2009; Errata 2009) Standard

Specifications for Structural Supports for
Highway Signs, Luminaires and Traffic
Signals
ANSI C136.21 (2004) Roadway Lighting Equipment -

Vertical Tenons Used with Post-Top-Mounted
Luminaires

Steel Products

Hardware
IESNA HB-9 (2000; Errata 2004; Errata 2005) IES

Lighting Handbook
IEEE C2 (2007; Errata 2006 & 2007; INT 44-56 2007;

INT 47, 49, 50, 52-56 2008; INT 57, 58,
Safety Code


NEMA ANSLG C78.43 (2007) Standard for Electric Lamps -
Single-Ended Metal-Halide Lamps
NEMA C136.13 (2004; R 2009) Roadway Lighting Equipment,

Metal Brackets for Wood Poles
NEMA C136.3 (2005) Roadway and Area Lighting

Equipment Luminaire Attachments
NEMA C82.4 (2002) Ballasts for

High-Intensity-Discharge and Low-Pressure
Sodium Lamps (Multiple-Supply Type)

Code - 2008 Edition

UL 1029 (1994; Rev thru Nov 2009) Standard for

Safety High-Intensity-Discharge Lamp
Ballasts
UL 1598 (2008; Rev thru Jan 2010) Luminaires

Plug-In Locking Type Photocontrols for Use
with Area Lighting
UL 773A (2006) Nonindustrial Photoelectric

Switches for Lighting Control
1.2 DEFINITIONS
a. Unless otherwise specified or indicated, electrical and electronics

terms used in these specifications, and on the drawings, shall be as
defined in IEEE Std 100.
b. Average life is the time after which 50 percent will have failed and 50
percent will have survived under normal conditions.
c. Groundline section is that portion between one foot above and 2 feet
below the groundline.
1.3 SUBMITTALS

SD-02 Shop Drawings
Luminaire drawings;
Poles;
SD-03 Product Data
Submit documentation indicating distance between manufacturing

facility and the project site. Indicate distance of raw material
origin from the project site. Indicate relative dollar value of
Energy Efficiency
Luminaires;
Lamps;
Ballasts;
Steel poles;
Brackets
Auxiliary instant-on quartz system;
SD-04 Samples
Luminaires;
Submit one sample of each luminaire type, complete with lamp and
ballast. Sample will be returned to the Contractor for
installation in the project work.
SD-05 Design Data
Design Data for luminaires;
SD-06 Test Reports
Operating test
Submit operating test results as stated in paragraph entitled

Operational Service
Submit documentation that includes contact information, summary

of procedures, and the limitations and conditions applicable to
the project. Indicate manufacturer's commitment to reclaim
materials for recycling and/or reuse.
1.4.1.1 Luminaire Drawings
Include dimensions, effective projected area (EPA), accessories, and

installation and construction details. Photometric data, including zonal
lumen data, average and minimum ratio, aiming diagram, and computerized
candlepower distribution data shall accompany shop drawings.
1.4.1.2 Poles
Include dimensions, wind load determined in accordance with AASHTO LTS,

pole deflection, pole class, and other applicable information.
1.4.2 Design Data for Luminaires
a. Distribution data according to IESNA classification type as defined in

IESNA HB-9.
b. Computerized horizontal illumination levels in footcandles at ground

level, taken every 20 feet. Include average maintained footcandle
level and maximum and minimum ratio.


furnished.

1.5.1 Steel Poles
Do not store poles on ground. Support poles so they are at least one foot
above ground level and growing vegetation. Do not remove factory-applied
pole wrappings until just before installing pole.

1.6.2 Energy Efficiency
Comply with National Energy Policy Act and Energy Star requirements for
lighting products. Submit documentation for Energy Star qualifications for
equipment provided under this section. Submit data indicating lumens per
watt efficiency and color rendition index of light source.
1.7 WARRANTY

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCT COORDINATION
Products and materials not considered to be lighting equipment or lighting

fixture accessories are specified in Section 33 70 02.00 10 UNDERGROUND
TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM, UNDERGROUND.
2.2 LUMINAIRES
UL 1598. Provide luminaires as indicated. Provide luminaires complete

with lamps of number, type, and wattage indicated. Details, shapes, and
dimensions are indicative of the general type desired, but are not intended
to restrict selection to luminaires of a particular manufacturer.
Luminaires of similar designs, light distribution and brightness
characteristics, and of equal finish and quality will be acceptable as
approved.
Average mercury content (across at least 90% of both interior and exterior
lighting & lamps) shall not exceed 50 pico*grams/lumen*hr of expected life.
2.2.1 Lamps
2.2.1.1 Metal-Halide Lamps
Provide luminaires with tempered glass lens.
b. Single-ended, wattage as indicated, conforming to NEMA ANSLG C78.43
Lamps shall have Luminaire Efficiency Ratings (LER) as follows:
a. Upward efficiency of 0%
1. 150-399 watts: minimum 41 LER for closed fixture
2. 400-999 watts: minimum 53 LER for closed fixture; minimum 59 for

open fixture
3. 1000+ watts: minimum 77 LER for closed fixture
2.2.2 Ballasts for High-Intensity-Discharge (HID) Luminaires
UL 1029 and NEMA C82.4, and shall be constant wattage autotransformer (CWA)
or regulator, high power-factor type (minimum 90%). Provide single-lamp
ballasts which shall have a minimum starting temperature of minus 30
degrees C. Ballasts shall be:
a. Designed to operate on voltage system to which they are connected.
b. Constructed so that open circuit operation will not reduce the average
life.
HID ballasts shall have a solid-state igniter/starter with an average life

in the pulsing mode of 10,000 hours at the intended ambient temperature.
Igniter case temperature shall not exceed 90 degrees C.
UL 773 or UL 773A, hermetically sealed cadmium-sulfide or silicon diode

type cell rated 277 volts ac, 60 Hz with single-throw contacts designed to
fail to the ON position. Switch shall turn on at or below 3 footcandles
and off at 4 to 10 footcandles. A time delay shall prevent accidental
switching from transient light sources. Provide a directional lens in
front of the cell to prevent fixed light sources from creating a turnoff
condition. Provide switch:
b. In a cast weatherproof aluminum housing with adjustable window slide,

rated 1800 VA, minimum.
2.4 POLES
Provide poles designed for wind loading of 100 miles per hour determined in
accordance with AASHTO LTS while supporting luminaires and all other
appurtenances indicated. The effective projected areas of luminaires and
appurtenances used in calculations shall be specific for the actual
products provided on each pole. Poles shall be anchor-base type designed
for use with underground supply conductors. Poles shall have oval-shaped
handhole having a minimum clear opening of 2.5 by 5 inches. Handhole cover
shall be secured by stainless steel captive screws. Metal poles shall have
an internal grounding connection accessible from the handhole near the
bottom of each pole. Scratched, stained, chipped, or dented poles shall
not be installed.
2.4.1 Steel Poles
AASHTO LTS. Provide steel poles having minimum 11-gage steel with minimum
yield/strength of 48,000 psi and hot-dipped galvanized in accordance with
ASTM A 123/A 123M factory finish. Provide a pole grounding connection
designed to prevent electrolysis when used with copper ground wire. Pole
shall be anchor bolt mounted type. Poles shall have tapered tubular
members, either round in cross section or polygonal. Pole shafts shall be
one piece. Poles shall be welded construction with no bolts, rivets, or
other means of fastening except as specifically approved. Pole markings
shall be approximately 3 to 4 feet above grade and shall include
manufacturer, year of manufacture, top and bottom diameters, and length.
Base covers for steel poles shall be structural quality hot-rolled carbon
steel plate having a minimum yield of 36,000 psi.
2.5 BRACKETS AND SUPPORTS
NEMA C136.3, NEMA C136.13, and ANSI C136.21, as applicable. Pole brackets
shall be not less than 1 1/4 inch galvanized steel pipe secured to pole.
Slip-fitter or pipe-threaded brackets may be used, but brackets shall be
coordinated to luminaires provided, and brackets for use with one type of
luminaire shall be identical. Brackets for pole-mounted street lights
shall correctly position luminaire no lower than mounting height
indicated. Mount brackets not less than 24 feet above street. Special
mountings or brackets shall be as indicated and shall be of metal which
will not promote galvanic reaction with luminaire head.
2.6 POLE FOUNDATIONS
Anchor bolts shall be steel rod having a minimum yield strength of 50,000
psi; the top 12 inches of the rod shall be galvanized in accordance with
ASTM A 153/A 153M. Concrete shall be as specified in Section 03 31 00.00 10
CAST-IN-PLACE STRUTURAL CONCRETE.
2.7 AUXILIARY INSTANT-ON QUARTZ SYSTEM
UL listed, automatically switched instant-on 250-watt quartz lamp. Quartz

lamp shall come on when the luminaire is initially energized and
immediately after a momentary power outage, and remain on until HID lamp
reaches approximately 60 percent light output. Wiring for quartz lamp
shall be internal to ballast and independent of incoming line voltage to
the ballast. Provide instant-on quartz system as indicated.

acceptable.
2.8.2 Labels
Provide labeled luminaires in accordance with UL 1598 requirements.

Luminaires shall be clearly marked for operation of specific lamps and
ballasts according to proper lamp type. The following lamp characteristics
shall be noted in the format "Use Only _____":
a. Lamp diameter code (T-4, T-5, T-8, T-12), tube configuration (twin,
quad, triple), base type, and nominal wattage for fluorescent and
b. Lamp type, wattage, bulb type (ED17, BD56, etc.) and coating (clear or
coated) for HID luminaires.
c. Start type (preheat, rapid start, instant start) for fluorescent and
d. ANSI ballast type (M98, M57, etc.) for HID luminaires.
e. Correlated color temperature (CCT) and color rendering index (CRI) for
all luminaires.
Markings related to lamp type shall be clear and located to be readily

lamps are in place. Ballasts shall have clear markings indicating
multi-level outputs and indicate proper terminals for the various outputs.

test.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
3.1.1 Steel Poles
Provide pole foundations with galvanized steel anchor bolts, threaded at

the top end and bent 90 degrees at the bottom end. Provide ornamental
covers to match pole and galvanized nuts and washers for anchor bolts.
Concrete for anchor bases, polyvinyl chloride (PVC) conduit ells, and
ground rods shall be as specified in Section 33 70 02.00 10 UNDERGROUND
TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM, UNDERGROUND. Thoroughly compact
backfill with compacting arranged to prevent pressure between conductor,
jacket, or sheath and the end of conduit ell. Adjust poles as necessary to
provide a permanent vertical position with the bracket arm in proper
position for luminaire location. After installation, paint exposed
surfaces of steel poles with two finish coats of exterior oil paint of a
color as indicated.
3.1.2 Pole Setting
Depth shall be as indicated. Poles in straight runs shall be in a straight

line. Dig holes large enough to permit the proper use of tampers to the
full depth of the hole. Place backfill in the hole in 6 inch maximum
layers and thoroughly tamp.
3.1.3 GROUNDING
Ground noncurrent-carrying parts of equipment including metal poles,

luminaires, mounting arms, brackets, and metallic enclosures as specified
in Section 33 70 02.00 10 UNDERGROUND TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM,
UNDERGROUND. Where copper grounding conductor is connected to a metal
other than copper, provide specially treated or lined connectors suitable
for this purpose.
3.1.4 FIELD APPLIED PAINTING

Upon completion of installation, verify that equipment is properly

installed, connected, and adjusted. Conduct an operating test to show that
the equipment operates in accordance with the requirements of this section.
SECTION 27 05 14.00 10
CABLE TELEVISION PREMISES DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES


Code - 2008 Edition
Provide a cable television premises distribution system consisting of

coaxial cables and connecting hardware to transport television signals
throughout the building to user locations as indicated.
1.3 SUBMITTALS

SD-02 Shop Drawings
Cable Television Premises Distribution System;
Detail drawings including a complete list of equipment and

material and containing complete wiring and schematic diagrams and
other details required to demonstrate that the system has been
coordinated and will function properly as a system. Drawings
shall include vertical riser diagrams, equipment rack and panel
details, elevation drawings of telecommunications closet walls,
outlet face plate details for each outlet configuration, and
descriptions and types of cables, conduits, and cable trays, if
used. Drawings shall show proposed layout and anchorage of
equipment and appurtenances, and equipment relationship to other
parts of the work including clearance for maintenance and
operation.
Installation;
Record drawings for the installed cable system showing the

locations of cable terminations, including outlets, and location
and routing of cables. The identifier for each termination and
cable shall appear on the drawings.
SD-03 Product Data
SECTION 27 05 14.00 10 Page 1

Spare Parts.
Lists of spare parts, tools, and test equipment, as specified.
Test Plan;
Test plan defining the tests required to ensure that the system
meets technical, operational and performance specifications, 60
days prior to the proposed test date. The test plan must be
approved before testing begins. The test plan shall identify the
capabilities and functions to be tested, and include detailed
instructions for the setup and execution of each test and
procedures for evaluation and documentation of the results.
Qualifications;
Proof of the qualifications of the Contractor, Installers, and

Manufacturers that will perform the work, and provide the
specified products.
SD-06 Test Reports
Testing
Test reports in booklet form with witness signatures verifying

execution of tests shall be provided. The cable system testing
documentation shall include the physical routing and a test report
for each cable (end-to-end) from the installed outlet to the main
termination point. Test reports shall be submitted within 14 days
after completion of testing.
SD-07 Certificates
Where materials or equipment are specified to conform, be

constructed or tested to meet specific requirements, certification
that the items provided conform to such requirements.
Certification by a nationally recognized testing laboratory that a
representative sample has been tested to meet the requirements, or
a published catalog specification statement to the effect that the
item meets the referenced standard, is acceptable as evidence that
the item conforms. Compliance with these requirements does not
relieve the Contractor from compliance with other requirements of
the specifications.
Manufacturer's Recommendations;
Where installation procedures, or any part thereof, are required

to be in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer
of the material being installed, printed copies of these
recommendations shall be provided prior to installation.
Installation of the item will not be allowed to proceed until the
recommendations are received and approved.
SECTION 27 05 14.00 10 Page 2

Commercial, off-the-shelf manuals for operation, installation,

configuration, and maintenance of products provided as a part of
the cable television premises distribution system. Specification
sheets for cable, connectors, and other equipment shall be
provided.
1.4 QUALIFICATIONS
1.4.1 Minimum Contractor Qualifications
Work under this section shall be performed, and equipment shall be

furnished and installed, by a qualified Contractor as defined herein. The
Contractor shall have a minimum of two years of experience in the
installation and testing of coaxial cable-based TV distribution systems and
equipment. Installers assigned to the installation of this system or its
components shall have a minimum of two years of experience in the
installation of the specified coaxial cable and components.
1.4.2 Minimum Manufacturer Qualifications
The equipment and hardware provided under this contract shall be products
of manufacturers that have a minimum of two years of experience in
producing the types of systems and equipment specified.

humidity and temperature variation, dirt and dust or other contaminants.
Connecting hardware shall be rated for operation under ambient conditions of

32 to 140 degrees F and in the range of 0 to 95 percent relative humidity,
non-condensing.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
specified, after approval of detail drawings, not later than 2 months prior
to the date of beneficial occupancy. The data shall include a complete
list of parts and supplies, with current unit prices and source of supply,
and a list of spare parts recommended for stocking. Provide the following
additional materials required for facility startup:
a. 10 of each type of connector used.

b. 10 of each type of cover plate, with connector.
PART 2 PRODUCTS

are the manufacturer's latest standard design that has been in satisfactory
use for at least one year prior to installation. Materials and equipment
shall conform to the respective publications and other requirements
SECTION 27 05 14.00 10 Page 3

specified below and to the applicable requirements of NFPA 70. Cables

shall be labeled on both ends with circuit number, room number, or other
appropriate marking allowing for correct identification of the cable and
its destination. Each faceplate shall be labeled with its function and a
unique number to identify the cable run.
2.1.1 Coaxial Cable
Coaxial cable shall be RG-6/U, quad shield. Cable shall be

label-verified. Cable jacket shall be factory marked at regular intervals
identifying cable type. Cable shall be rated CMP in accordance with NFPA 70.
Interconnecting cables shall be cable assemblies consisting of RG-6/U
coaxial cable with male connectors at each end, provided in lengths
determined by equipment locations as shown.
2.1.2 Outlets
Cable television outlets, including wall outlet plates, shall be equipped

with a female connector to accept the connecting coaxial cable from the
user's television set. Faceplates provided shall be ivory impact resistant
plastic.
2.1.3 Oulet Boxes
Electrical boxes for cable television outlets shall be 4-11/16 inch square
by 2-1/8 inches deep with minimum 3/8 inch deep single or two gang plaster
ring as shown. Conduits shall be minimum 1 inch.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
Install system components and appurtenances in accordance with NFPA 70,

manufacturer's instructions and as shown. Provide necessary
interconnections, services, and adjustments required for a complete cable
television distribution system, ready to connect to external television
signal sources. Penetrations in fire-rated construction shall be
firestopped in accordance with Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING. Install
conduits, outlets, raceways, and wiring in accordance with Section 26 20 00
INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Cables and outlets shall be individually
labeled and marked. Cables shall not be installed in the same cable tray,
utility pole compartment, or floor trench compartment with ac power
cables. Cables not installed in conduit or wireways shall be properly
secured and neat in appearance and, if installed in plenums or other spaces
used for environmental air, shall comply with NFPA 70 requirements for this
type of installation.
3.1.1 Horizontal Cable Installation
The rated cable pulling tension shall not be exceeded. Cable shall not be
stressed such that twisting, stretching or kinking occurs. Cable shall not
be spliced. Cable not in a wireway shall be suspended a minimum of 8 inches
above ceilings by cable supports no greater than 60 inches apart. Cable
shall not be run through structural members or in contact with pipes,
ducts, or other potentially damaging items. Placement of cable parallel to
power conductors shall be avoided, if possible; a minimum separation of 12
inches shall be maintained when such placement cannot be avoided. Cables
shall be terminated unless shown otherwise. Minimum bending radius shall
not be exceeded during installation or once installed. Cable ties shall
SECTION 27 05 14.00 10 Page 4

not be excessively tightened such that the transmission characteristics of

the cable are altered. In raised floor areas, cable shall be installed
after the flooring system has been installed. Cable 6 feet long shall be
neatly coiled not less than 12 inches in diameter below each feed point in
raised floor areas.
3.1.2 Riser Cable Installation
The rated cable pulling tension shall not be exceeded. Riser cable support
intervals shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
Cable bend radius shall not be less than ten times the outside diameter of
the cable during installation and once installed. Maximum tensile strength
rating of the cable shall not be exceeded. Cable shall not be spliced.
3.1.3 Cables
Cables shall have a minimum of 6 inches of slack cable loosely coiled into
the cable television outlet boxes. Minimum manufacturer's bend radius
shall not be exceeded.
3.1.4 Pull Cords
Pull cords shall be installed in conduits serving the cable television

premises distribution system which do not initially have cable installed.
3.2 TERMINATIONS
Cables and conductors shall sweep into termination areas; cables and
conductors shall not bend at right angles. Manufacturer's minimum bending
radius shall not be exceeded. Coaxial cables shall be terminated with
appropriate connectors as required. Cable shield conductor shall be
grounded to communications ground at only one point and shall not make
electrical contact with ground anywhere else.
3.3 GROUNDING
The cable television distribution system ground shall be installed in the

cable television entrance facility and in any auxiliary closet identified
in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM or otherwise indicated.
Equipment racks shall be connected to the electrical safety ground.
3.4 TESTING
Materials and documentation to be furnished under this specification are

subject to inspections and tests.
a. Submit a Test Plan as specified in the Submittals paragraph.
b. Components shall be terminated prior to testing.
c. Equipment and systems will not be accepted until the required

inspections and tests have been made, demonstrating that the cable
television premises distribution system conforms to the specified
requirements, and that the required equipment, systems, and
documentation have been provided.
d. After installation of the cable and before connecting system

components, each cable section shall be end-to-end tested using a time
domain reflectometer (TDR) to determine shorts, opens, kinks, and other
SECTION 27 05 14.00 10 Page 5

impedance discontinuities and their locations. Cable sections showing

adverse impedance discontinuities (greater than 6 dB loss) shall be
replaced at the Contractor's expense.
e. There shall be no cable splices between system components unless

approved by the Government.
3.5 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
Submit Operation and Maintenance manuals as specified in the Submittals

paragraph.
SECTION 27 05 14.00 10 Page 6

SECTION 27 05 28.36 40
CABLE TRAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES



Steel Products
NEMA VE 2 (2006) Cable Tray Installation Guidelines

Code - 2008 Edition

1.3 SUBMITTALS

SD-02 Shop Drawings
Installation Drawings
SD-03 Product Data
Submit manufacturer's product data for the following items:
Cable Trays
Supports
SECTION 27 05 28.36 40 Page 1

Submit Manufacturer's Instructions for cable trays in accordance

with paragraph entitled, "Manufacturer's Instructions," of this
section.
Comply with NEMA Standards Publication Number VE1, "Cable Tray Systems"
Comply with NEC, as applicable to construction and installation of cable

tray and cable channel systems (Article 392 NEC)
Provide products that are UL-classified and labeled.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 CABLE TRAYS
In communication rooms provide ladder cable trays consisting of two

longitudinal side members connected by individual transverse members.
Every where else provide basket-type of fabricated structure with wire mesh
bottom and side rails with maximum wire mesh spacing of 2 by 4 inch.
Provide size as indicated on the drawings.
2.2 MATERIAL AND FABRICATION
Provide cable trays constructed of steel in accordance with

ASTM A 1008/A 1008M with a zinc coating applied after fabrication.
Provide hot-dipped galvanized steel trays with finish in accordance with

ASTM A 123/A 123M.
Submit Fabrication drawings for cable trays consisting of fabrication and

assembly details to be performed in the factory.
Prior to assembly, coat contact surfaces of trays with an antioxidant

compound. Finish edges, fittings, and hardware free from burrs and sharp
edges. Include splice and end plates, dropouts, and miscellaneous hardware.
2.3 SUPPORTS
Permit both vertical and horizontal adjustment, where possible on supports

and hangers. Provide an adequate bearing surface for the tray on the
horizontal and vertical tray supports and have provisions for holddown
clamps or fasteners. Provide a secure means other than friction for
fastening cable trays to supports.
Support cable trays at not more than 6 -foot intervals. Place supports for
horizontal-elbow tray fittings within 2 feet of each fitting extremity and
as recommended by the cable-tray manufacturer.
When supported at 6 -foot intervals, the cable trays shall be capable of

carrying not less than 45 pounds per linear foot. Tray fittings shall have
not less than the load-carrying ability of straight tray sections and have
the manufacturer's minimum standard radius.
SECTION 27 05 28.36 40 Page 2

PART 3 EXECUTION
Comply with NEMA VE 2 for cable tray installation.
3.1 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS
Submit manufacturer's instructions for Cable Trays including special

provisions required to install equipment components and system packages.
Detail impedances, hazards and safety precautions.
3.2 INSTALLATION DRAWINGS
Thirty calendar days prior to shipment, submit installation drawings to the

Contracting officer for approval. Coordinate drawings with all other work
in the immediate area that could come in conflict with the installation.
Include layout of cable tray work and details of both horizontal and
vertical supports as specified in paragraph entitled, "Supports," of this
section.
3.3 GROUNDING
Properly grounded cable trays by means of a low-resistance conductor of

sufficient capacity, but in no case smaller than No. 1/0 AWG copper. Bond
grounding conductor to cable-tray sections and fittings by compatible
bolted connections. Consider cable tray sections in tandem assembly as
having electrical continuity when these sections are bonded with
appropriate high-strength bolts. Provide permanent and continuous
effective grounding with an impedance sufficiently low to limit the
potential above ground and to facilitate operation of overcurrent devices
in the circuit. Provide grounding and bonding of cable trays in accordance
with NFPA 70.
SECTION 27 05 28.36 40 Page 3

SECTION 27 10 00
BUILDING TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES


Materials
CEA-310-E (2005) Racks, Panels, and Associated

Equipment

ICEA S-83-596 (2001) Fiber Optic Premises Distribution

Cable
ICEA S-90-661 (2002) Category 3, 5, & 5e Individually

Unshielded Twisted Pair Indoor Cable for
Use in General Purpose and LAN
Communications Wiring Systems
NEMA WC 63.1 (2005) Twisted Pair Premise Voice and Data

Communications Cables
NEMA WC 66 (2001; Errata 2003) Category 6 and

Category 7 100 Ohm Shielded and Unshielded
Twisted Pairs

Code - 2008 Edition

Telecommunications
TIA-492CAAA (1998; R 2002) Class IVA

Dispersion-Unshifted Single-Mode Optical
Fibers
TIA-526-14-A (1998) OFSTP-14A Optical Power Loss

Measurements of Installed Multimode Fiber
Cable Plant
TIA-526-7 (2002) Measurement of Optical Power Loss

of Installed Single-Mode Fiber Cable Plant
OFSTP-7

TIA-568-C.3 (2008e1) Optical Fiber Cabling Components

Standard
TIA/EIA-568-B.2 (2001) Commercial Building

Telecommunications Cabling Standard - Part
2: Balanced Twisted Pair Cabling Components

Pathways and Spaces
TIA/EIA-598-B (2001) Optical Fiber Cable Color Coding
TIA/EIA-604-3A (2000) FOCUS 3 Fiber Optic Connector

Intermateability Standard
TIA/EIA-606-A (2002) Administration Standard for the

Telecommunications Infrastructure
U.S. FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION (FCC)
FCC Part 68 Connection of Terminal Equipment to the

Telephone Network (47 CFR 68)
UL 1286 (2008) Office Furnishings
UL 1666 (2007) Test for Flame Propagation Height

of Electrical and Optical-Fiber Cables
Installed Vertically in Shafts
UL 1863 (2004; Rev thru Aug 2008) Communication

Circuit Accessories
UL 444 (2008; Rev thru Jul 2008) Communications

Cables

Equipment
UL 50 (2007) Standard for Enclosures for

Electrical Equipment
UL 514C (1996; Rev thru Dec 2008) Nonmetallic

Outlet Boxes, Flush-Device Boxes, and
Covers
UL 910 (1998) Test for Flame-Propagation and

Smoke-Density Values for Electrical and
Optical-Fiber Cables Used in Spaces
Transporting Environmental Air
UL 969 (1995; Rev thru Nov 2008) Marking and

Labeling Systems
Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM and Section 33 82 00

TELECOMMUNICATIONS, OUTSIDE PLANT, apply to this section with additions and
modifications specified herein.
1.3 DEFINITIONS

used in this specification shall be as defined in TIA-568-C.1,
TIA/EIA-568-B.2, TIA-568-C.3, TIA/EIA-569-A, TIA/EIA-606-A and IEEE Std 100
and herein.
1.3.1 Campus Distributor (CD)
A distributor from which the campus backbone cabling emanates.

(International expression for main cross-connect (MC).)
1.3.2 Building Distributor (BD)
A distributor in which the building backbone cables terminate and at which

connections to the campus backbone cables may be made. (International
expression for intermediate cross-connect (IC).)
1.3.3 Floor Distributor (FD)
A distributor used to connect horizontal cable and cabling subsystems or

equipment. (International expression for horizontal cross-connect (HC).)
1.3.4 Telecommunications Room (TR)
An enclosed space for housing telecommunications equipment, cable,

terminations, and cross-connects. The room is the recognized cross-connect
between the backbone cable and the horizontal cabling.
1.3.5 Entrance Facility (EF) (Telecommunications)
An entrance to the building for both private and public network service
cables (including antennae) including the entrance point at the building
wall and continuing to the entrance room or space.
1.3.6 Entrance Room (ER) (Telecommunications)
A centralized space for telecommunications equipment that serves the

occupants of a building. Equipment housed therein is considered distinct
from a telecommunications room because of the nature of its complexity.
1.3.7 Open Cable
Cabling that is not run in a raceway as defined by NFPA 70. This refers to
cabling that is "open" to the space in which the cable has been installed
and is therefore exposed to the environmental conditions associated with
that space.
1.3.8 Open Office
A floor space division provided by furniture, moveable partitions, or other

means instead of by building walls.
1.3.9 Pathway
A physical infrastructure utilized for the placement and routing of

telecommunications cable.
The building telecommunications cabling and pathway system shall include

permanently installed backbone and horizontal cabling, horizontal and
backbone pathways, service entrance facilities, work area pathways,
telecommunications outlet assemblies, conduit, raceway, and hardware for
splicing, terminating, and interconnecting cabling necessary to transport
telephone and data (including LAN) between equipment items in a building.
The horizontal system shall be wired in a star topology from the
telecommunications work area to the floor distributor or campus distributor
at the center or hub of the star. The backbone cabling and pathway system
includes intrabuilding and interbuilding interconnecting cabling, pathway,
and terminal hardware. The intrabuilding backbone provides connectivity
from the floor distributors to the building distributors or to the campus
distributor and from the building distributors to the campus distributor as
required.. The backbone system shall be wired in a star topology with the
campus distributor at the center or hub of the star. The interbuilding
backbone system provides connectivity between the campus distributors and
is specified in Section 33 82 00, TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTSIDE PLANT.
Provide telecommunications pathway systems referenced herein as specified
in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.
1.5 SUBMITTALS

SD-02 Shop Drawings
Telecommunications drawings
Telecommunications Space Drawings
In addition to Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES, provide shop

drawings in accordance with paragraph SHOP DRAWINGS.
SD-03 Product Data
Telecommunications cabling (backbone and horizontal)
Patch panels
Telecommunications outlet/connector assemblies
Equipment support frame
Connector blocks
Spare Parts
Submittals shall include the manufacturer's name, trade name,

place of manufacture, and catalog model or number. Include
performance and characteristic curves. Submittals shall also
include applicable federal, military, industry, and technical
society publication references. Should manufacturer's data
require supplemental information for clarification, the
supplemental information shall be submitted as specified in
paragraph REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS and as required in Section
01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES.
SD-06 Test Reports
Telecommunications cabling testing
SD-07 Certificates
Telecommunications Contractor Qualifications
Key Personnel Qualifications
Manufacturer Qualifications
Test plan
Factory reel tests
Telecommunications cabling and pathway system Data Package 5
Record Documentation
1.6.1 Shop Drawings
In exception to Section 01 33 00, SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES, submit shop

drawings a minimum of 14 by 20 inches in size using a minimum scale of 1/8
inch per foot. Include wiring diagrams and installation details of
equipment indicating proposed location, layout and arrangement, control
panels, accessories, piping, ductwork, and other items that must be shown
to ensure a coordinated installation. Wiring diagrams shall identify
circuit terminals and indicate the internal wiring for each item of
equipment and the interconnection between each item of equipment. Drawings
shall indicate adequate clearance for operation, maintenance, and

replacement of operating equipment devices. Submittals shall include the
nameplate data, size, and capacity. Submittals shall also include
applicable federal, military, industry, and technical society publication
references.
1.6.1.1 Telecommunications Drawings
Provide registered communications distribution designer (RCDD) approved,

drawings in accordance with TIA/EIA-606-A. The identifier for each
termination and cable shall appear on the drawings. Drawings shall depict
final telecommunications installed wiring system infrastructure in
accordance with TIA/EIA-606-A. The drawings should provide details
required to prove that the distribution system shall properly support
connectivity from the EF telecommunications and ER telecommunications, CD's,
BD's, and FD's to the telecommunications work area outlets. Provide a
plastic laminated schematic of the as-installed telecommunications cable
system showing cabling, CD's, BD's, FD's, and the EF and ER for
telecommunications keyed to floor plans by room number. Mount the
laminated schematic in the EF telecommunications space as directed by the
Contracting Officer. The following drawings shall be provided as a minimum:
a. T1 - Layout of complete building per floor - Building Area/Serving

Zone Boundaries, Backbone Systems, and Horizontal Pathways.
Layout of complete building per floor. The drawing indicates
location of building areas, serving zones, vertical backbone
diagrams, telecommunications rooms, access points, pathways,
grounding system, and other systems that need to be viewed from
the complete building perspective.
b. T2 - Serving Zones/Building Area Drawings - Drop Locations and

Cable Identification (ID’S). Shows a building area or serving
zone. These drawings show drop locations, telecommunications
rooms, access points and detail call outs for common equipment
rooms and other congested areas.
c. T4 - Typical Detail Drawings - Faceplate Labeling, Firestopping,

Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Safety, Department of
Transportation (DOT). Detailed drawings of symbols and typicals
such as faceplate labeling, faceplate types, faceplate population
installation procedures, detail racking, and raceways.
1.6.1.2 Telecommunications Space Drawings
Provide T3 drawings in accordance with TIA/EIA-606-A that include

telecommunications rooms plan views, pathway layout (cable tray, racks,
ladder-racks, etc.), mechanical/electrical layout, and cabinet, rack,
backboard and wall elevations. Drawings shall show layout of applicable
equipment including incoming cable stub or connector blocks, building
protector assembly, outgoing cable connector blocks, patch panels and
equipment spaces and cabinet/racks. Drawings shall include a complete list
of equipment and material, equipment rack details, proposed layout and
anchorage of equipment and appurtenances, and equipment relationship to
other parts of the work including clearance for maintenance and operation.
Drawings may also be an enlargement of a congested area of T1 or T2
drawings.
1.6.2 Telecommunications Qualifications
Work under this section shall be performed by and the equipment shall be
provided by the approved telecommunications contractor and key personnel.
Qualifications shall be provided for: the telecommunications system
contractor, the telecommunications system installer, and the supervisor (if
different from the installer). A minimum of 30 days prior to installation,
submit documentation of the experience of the telecommunications contractor
and of the key personnel.
1.6.2.1 Telecommunications Contractor
The telecommunications contractor shall be a firm which is regularly and

professionally engaged in the business of the applications, installation,
and testing of the specified telecommunications systems and equipment. The
telecommunications contractor shall demonstrate experience in providing
successful telecommunications systems within the past 3 years. Submit
documentation for a minimum of three and a maximum of five successful
telecommunication system installations for the telecommunications
contractor.
1.6.2.2 Key Personnel
Provide key personnel who are regularly and professionally engaged in the
business of the application, installation and testing of the specified
telecommunications systems and equipment. There may be one key person or
more key persons proposed for this solicitation depending upon how many of
the key roles each has successfully provided. Each of the key personnel
shall demonstrate experience in providing successful telecommunications
systems within the past 3 years.
Supervisors and installers assigned to the installation of this system or

any of its components shall be Building Industry Consulting Services
International (BICSI) Registered Cabling Installers, Technician Level.
Submit documentation of current BICSI certification for each of the key
personnel.
In lieu of BICSI certification, supervisors and installers assigned to the

installation of this system or any of its components shall have a minimum
of 3 years experience in the installation of the specified copper and fiber
optic cable and components. They shall have factory or factory approved
certification from each equipment manufacturer indicating that they are
qualified to install and test the provided products. Submit documentation
for a minimum of three and a maximum of five successful telecommunication
system installations for each of the key personnel. Documentation for each
key person shall include at least two successful system installations
provided that are equivalent in system size and in construction complexity
to the telecommunications system proposed for this solicitation. Include
specific experience in installing and testing telecommunications systems
and provide the names and locations of at least two project installations
successfully completed using optical fiber and copper telecommunications
cabling systems. All of the existing telecommunications system
installations offered by the key persons as successful experience shall
have been in successful full-time service for at least 18 months prior to
the issuance date for this solicitation. Provide the name and role of the
key person, the title, location, and completed installation date of the
referenced project, the referenced project owner point of contact
information including name, organization, title, and telephone number, and
generally, the referenced project description including system size and
construction complexity.
Indicate that all key persons are currently employed by the

telecommunications contractor, or have a commitment to the
telecommunications contractor to work on this project. All key persons
shall be employed by the telecommunications contractor at the date of
issuance of this solicitation, or if not, have a commitment to the
telecommunications contractor to work on this project by the date that the
bid was due to the Contracting Officer.
Note that only the key personnel approved by the Contracting Officer in the
successful proposal shall do work on this solicitation's telecommunications
system. Key personnel shall function in the same roles in this contract,
as they functioned in the offered successful experience. Any substitutions
for the telecommunications contractor's key personnel requires approval
from The Contracting Officer.
1.6.2.3 Minimum Manufacturer Qualifications
Cabling, equipment and hardware manufacturers shall have a minimum of 3

years experience in the manufacturing, assembly, and factory testing of
components which comply with TIA-568-C.1, TIA/EIA-568-B.2 and TIA-568-C.3.
1.6.3 Test Plan
Provide a complete and detailed test plan for the telecommunications

cabling system including a complete list of test equipment for the UTP and
optical fiber components and accessories 60 days prior to the proposed test
date. Include procedures for certification, validation, and testing.



furnished.

Provide protection from weather, moisture, extreme heat and cold, dirt,
dust, and other contaminants for telecommunications cabling and equipment
placed in storage.
Connecting hardware shall be rated for operation under ambient conditions of

32 to 140 degrees F and in the range of 0 to 95 percent relative humidity,
noncondensing.
1.9 WARRANTY

1.10 MAINTENANCE
1.10.1 Operation and Maintenance Manuals
Commercial off the shelf manuals shall be furnished for operation,

installation, configuration, and maintenance of products provided as a part
of the telecommunications cabling and pathway system. Submit operations
and maintenance data in accordance with Section 01 78 23, OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE DATA and as specified herein not later than 2 months prior to
the date of beneficial occupancy. In addition to requirements of Data
package 5, include the requirements of paragraphs TELECOMMUNICATIONS
DRAWINGS, TELECOMMUNICATIONS SPACE DRAWINGS, and RECORD DOCUMENTATION.
1.10.2 Record Documentation
Provide T5 drawings including documentation on cables and termination

hardware in accordance with TIA/EIA-606-A. T5 drawings shall include
schedules to show information for cut-overs and cable plant management,
patch panel layouts and cover plate assignments, cross-connect information
and connecting terminal layout as a minimum. T5 drawings shall be provided
on electronic media using Windows based computer cable management software.
A licensed copy of the cable management software including documentation,
shall be provided. Provide the following T5 drawing documentation as a
minimum:
a. Cables - A record of installed cable shall be provided in

accordance with TIA/EIA-606-A. The cable records shall include
the required data fields for each cable and complete end-to-end
circuit report for each complete circuit from the assigned outlet
to the entry facility in accordance with TIA/EIA-606-A. Include
manufacture date of cable with submittal.
b. Termination Hardware - A record of installed patch panels,

cross-connect points, distribution frames, terminating block
arrangements and type, and outlets shall be provided in accordance
with TIA/EIA-606-A. Documentation shall include the required data
fields as a minimum in accordance with TIA/EIA-606-A.
1.10.3 Spare Parts
In addition to the requirements of Section 01 78 23, OPERATION AND

MAINTENANCE DATA, provide a complete list of parts and supplies, with
current unit prices and source of supply, and a list of spare parts
recommended for stocking.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 COMPONENTS
UL or third party certified. Where equipment or materials are specified to

conform to industry and technical society reference standards of the
organizations, submit proof of such compliance. The label or listing by
the specified organization will be acceptable evidence of compliance. In
lieu of the label or listing, submit a certificate from an independent
testing organization, competent to perform testing, and approved by the
Contracting Officer. The certificate shall state that the item has been
tested in accordance with the specified organization's test methods and
that the item complies with the specified organization's reference
standard. Provide a complete system of telecommunications cabling and
pathway components using star topology. Provide support structures and
pathways, complete with outlets, cables, connecting hardware and
telecommunications cabinets/racks. Cabling and interconnecting hardware
and components for telecommunications systems shall be UL listed or third
party independent testing laboratory certified, and shall comply with
NFPA 70 and conform to the requirements specified herein.
2.2 TELECOMMUNICATIONS PATHWAY
Provide telecommunications pathways in accordance with TIA/EIA-569-A and as

specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Provide system
furniture pathways in accordance with UL 1286.
2.3 TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING
Cabling shall be UL listed for the application and shall comply with
TIA-568-C.1 , TIA/EIA-568-B.2, TIA-568-C.3 and NFPA 70. Provide a labeling
system for cabling as required by TIA/EIA-606-A and UL 969. Ship cable in
boxes bearing manufacture date for UTP in accordance with ICEA S-90-661 and
optical fiber cables in accordance with ICEA S-83-596 for all cable used on
this project. Cabling manufactured more than 12 months prior to date of
installation shall not be used.
2.3.1 Backbone Cabling
2.3.1.1 Backbone Copper
ICEA S-90-661, TIA-568-C.1, TIA/EIA-568-B.2, NEMA WC 63.1 NEMA WC 66 and

UL 444, copper backbone cable shall be solid conductor, 24 AWG, 100 ohm, 100
-pair UTP (Unshielded twisted pair), formed into 25 pair binder groups
covered with a gray thermoplastic jacket. Cable shall be imprinted with
manufacturers name or identifier, flammability rating, gauge of conductor,
transmission performance rating (category designation) at regular intervals

not to exceed 2 feet. The word "FEET" or the abbreviation "FT" shall
appear after each length marking. Provide communications general purpose
(CM or CMG), communications plenum (CMP) or communications riser (CMR)
rated cabling in accordance with NFPA 70. Type CMP and CMR may be
substituted for type CM or CMG and type CMP may be substituted for type CMR
in accordance with NFPA 70. Color coding shall comply with industry
standards for 25 pair cables.
2.3.1.2 Backbone Optical Fiber
Provide in accordance with ICEA S-83-596, TIA-568-C.3, UL 1666 and NFPA 70.
Cable shall be imprinted with fiber count, fiber type and aggregate length
at regular intervals not to exceed 40 inches. Hybrid fiber optic cable
marking shall comply with TIA/EIA-598-B.
TIA-492CAAA, single-mode, 8/125-um diameter, 0.10 numerical aperture, tight

buffered fiber optic cable. Provide a 12-fiber single-mode fiber optic
cable. Provide nonconductive optical fiber plenum cable (OFNP), and
nonconductive optical fiber riser cable (OFNR) rated cable in accordance
with NFPA 70 and UL 910. The cable cordage jacket, fiber, unit, and group
color shall be in accordance with TIA/EIA-598-B.
2.3.2 Horizontal Cabling
Provide horizontal cable in compliance with NFPA 70 and performance

characteristics in accordance with TIA-568-C.1.
2.3.2.1 Horizontal Copper
Provide horizontal copper cable in accordance with TIA/EIA-568-B.2, UL 444,

NEMA WC 63.1 NEMA WC 66, ICEA S-90-661 UTP (unshielded twisted pair), 100
ohm. Provide four each individually twisted pair, 24 AWG conductors,
Category 6, with a blue thermoplastic jacket. Cable shall be imprinted
with manufacturers name or identifier, flammability rating, gauge of
conductor, transmission performance rating (category designation) at
regular intervals not to exceed 2 feet. The word "FEET" or the abbreviation
"FT" shall appear after each length marking. Provide communications
general purpose (CM or CMG), communications plenum (CMP) or communications
riser (CMR) rated cabling in accordance with NFPA 70. Type CMP and CMR may
be substituted for type CM or CMG and type CMP may be substituted for type
CMR in accordance with NFPA 70.
2.3.3 Work Area Cabling
2.3.3.1 Work Area Copper
Provide work area copper cable in accordance with TIA/EIA-568-B.2, with a

blue thermoplastic jacket.
2.4 TELECOMMUNICATIONS SPACES
Provide connecting hardware and termination equipment in the

telecommunications entrance facility and telecommunication equipment rooms
to facilitate installation as shown on design drawings for terminating and
cross-connecting permanent cabling. Provide telecommunications
interconnecting hardware color coding in accordance with TIA/EIA-606-A.
2.4.1 Backboards
Provide void-free, interior grade plywood 3/4 inch thick 4 by 8 feet.

Backboards shall be fire rated. Backboards shall be provided on a minimum
of two walls in the telecommunication spaces. Do not cover the fire stamp
on the backboard.
2.4.2 Equipment Support Frame
Provide in accordance with CEA-310-E and UL 50.
Racks, floor mounted modular type, 16 gauge steel or 11 gauge aluminum

construction , minimum, treated to resist corrosion. Provide rack
with vertical and horizontal cable management channels, top and
bottom cable troughs, grounding lug and a surge protected power
strip with 6 duplex 20 amp receptacles. Rack shall be compatible
with 19 inch panel mounting.
2.4.3 Connector Blocks
Provide insulation displacement connector (IDC) Type 110 for Category 6 and
higher systems. Provide blocks for the number of horizontal and backbone
cables terminated on the block plus 25 percent spare.
2.4.4 Cable Guides
Provide cable guides specifically manufactured for the purpose of routing

cables, wires and patch cords horizontally and vertically on 19 inch
equipment racks and telecommunications backboards. Cable guides of ring
or bracket type devices mounted on rack panels for horizontal cable
management and individually mounted for vertical cable management. Mount
cable guides with screws, and or nuts and lockwashers.
2.4.5 Patch Panels
Provide ports for the number of horizontal and backbone cables terminated
on the panel plus 25 percent spare. Provide pre-connectorized optical fiber
and copper patch cords for patch panels. Provide patch cords, as complete
assemblies, with matching connectors as specified. Provide fiber optic
patch cables with crossover orientation in accordance with TIA-568-C.3.
Patch cords shall meet minimum performance requirements specified in
TIA-568-C.1, TIA/EIA-568-B.2 for cables, cable length and hardware
specified.
2.4.5.1 Modular to 110 Block Patch Panel
Provide in accordance with TIA-568-C.1 and TIA/EIA-568-B.2. Panels shall

be third party verified and shall comply with EIA/TIA Category 6
requirements. Panel shall be constructed of 0.09 inch minimum aluminum and
shall be rack mounted and compatible with an CEA-310-E 19 inch equipment
rack. Panel shall provide 48 non-keyed, 8-pin modular ports, wired to
T568A. Patch panels shall terminate the building cabling on Type 110 IDCs
and shall utilize a printed circuit board interface. The rear of each
panel shall have incoming cable strain-relief and routing guides. Panels
shall have each port factory numbered and be equipped with laminated
plastic nameplates above each port.
2.4.5.2 Fiber Optic Patch Panel
Provide panel for maintenance and cross-connecting of optical fiber

cables. Panel shall be constructed of 16 gauge steel or 11 gauge aluminum
and shall be rack mounted and compatible with a CEA-310-E 19 inch equipment
rack. Each panel shall provide 12 single-mode adapters as duplex SC in
accordance with TIA/EIA-604-3A with zirconia ceramic alignment sleeves.
Provide dust cover for unused adapters. The rear of each panel shall have
a cable management tray a minimum of 8 inches deep with removable cover,
incoming cable strain-relief and routing guides. Panels shall have each
adapter factory numbered and be equipped with laminated plastic nameplates
above each adapter.
2.5 TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTLET/CONNECTOR ASSEMBLIES
2.5.1 Outlet/Connector Copper
Outlet/connectors shall comply with FCC Part 68TIA-568-C.1, and

TIA/EIA-568-B.2. UTP outlet/connectors shall be UL 1863 listed, non-keyed,
8-pin modular, constructed of high impact rated thermoplastic housing and
shall be third party verified and shall comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.2
Category 6 requirements. Outlet/connectors provided for UTP cabling shall
meet or exceed the requirements for the cable provided. Outlet/connectors
shall be terminated using a Type 110 IDC PC board connector, color-coded
for both T568A and T568B wiring. Each outlet/connector shall be wired T568A.
UTP outlet/connectors shall comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.2 for 200 mating
cycles.
2.5.2 Cover Plates
Telecommunications cover plates shall comply with UL 514C, and TIA-568-C.1,

TIA/EIA-568-B.2, TIA-568-C.3; flush design constructed of high impact
thermoplastic material ivory in color. Provide labeling in accordance with
the paragraph LABELING in this section.
2.6 MULTI-USER TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTLET ASSEMBLY (MUTOA)
Provide MUTOA(s) in accordance with TIA-568-C.1.
2.7 GROUNDING AND BONDING PRODUCTS
Provide in accordance with UL 467, TIA J-STD-607-A, and NFPA 70.

Components shall be identified as required by TIA/EIA-606-A. Provide
ground rods, bonding conductors, and grounding busbars as specified in
Section 26 20 00, INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.
2.8 FIRESTOPPING MATERIAL
Provide as specified in Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING.

acceptable.

drawings. Each nameplate inscription shall identify the function and, when
applicable, the position. Nameplates shall be melamine plastic, 0.125 inch
thick, white with black center core. Surface shall be matte finish.
Corners shall be square. Accurately align lettering and engrave into the
core. Minimum size of nameplates shall be one by 2.5 inches. Lettering
shall be a minimum of 0.25 inch high normal block style.
2.11 TESTS, INSPECTIONS, AND VERIFICATIONS
2.11.1 Factory Reel Tests
Provide documentation of the testing and verification actions taken by

manufacturer to confirm compliance with TIA-568-C.1, TIA-568-C.3, TIA-526-7
for single mode optical fiber, and TIA-526-14-A for multimode optical fiber
cables.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
Install telecommunications cabling and pathway systems, including the

horizontal and backbone cable, pathway systems, telecommunications
outlet/connector assemblies, and associated hardware in accordance with
TIA-568-C.1, TIA/EIA-568-B.2, TIA-568-C.3, TIA/EIA-569-A, NFPA 70, and UL
standards as applicable. Provide cabling in a star topology network.
Pathways and outlet boxes shall be installed as specified in Section
26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Install telecommunications cabling
with copper media in accordance with the following criteria to avoid
potential electromagnetic interference between power and telecommunications
equipment. The interference ceiling shall not exceed 3.0 volts per meter
measured over the usable bandwidth of the telecommunications cabling.
Cabling shall be run with horizontal and vertical cable guides in
telecommunications spaces with terminating hardware and interconnection
equipment.
3.1.1 Cabling
Install Category 6 UTP, and optical fiber telecommunications cabling system

as detailed in TIA-568-C.1, TIA/EIA-568-B.2, TIA-568-C.3. Screw terminals
shall not be used except where specifically indicated on plans. Use an
approved insulation displacement connection (IDC) tool kit for copper cable
terminations. Do not untwist Category 6 UTP cables more than one half inch
from the point of termination to maintain cable geometry. Provide service
loop on each end of the cable, 10 ft. in the telecommunications room, and
12 inches in the work area outlet. Do not exceed manufacturers' cable pull
tensions for copper and optical fiber cables. Provide a device to monitor
cable pull tensions. Do not exceed 25 pounds pull tension for four pair
copper cables. Do not chafe or damage outer jacket materials. Use only
lubricants approved by cable manufacturer. Do not over cinch cables, or
crush cables with staples. For UTP cable, bend radii shall not be less
than four times the cable diameter. Cables shall be terminated; no cable
shall contain unterminated elements. Cables shall not be spliced. Label
cabling in accordance with paragraph LABELING in this section.
3.1.1.1 Backbone Cable
a. Copper Backbone Cable. Install intrabuilding backbone copper

cable, in indicated pathways, between the campus distributor,
located in the telecommunications entrance facility or room, the
building distributors and the floor distributors located in
telecommunications rooms and telecommunications equipment rooms as
indicated on drawings.
b. Optical fiber Backbone Cable. Install intrabuilding backbone

optical fiber in indicated pathways. Do not exceed manufacturer's
recommended bending radii and pull tension. Prepare cable for
pulling by cutting outer jacket 10 inches leaving strength members
exposed for approximately 10 inches. Twist strength members
together and attach to pulling eye. Vertical cable support
intervals shall be in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations.
3.1.1.2 Horizontal Cabling
Install horizontal cabling as indicated on drawings between the campus

distributor, building distributors, floor distributors MUTOAs and the
telecommunications outlet assemblies at workstations.
3.1.2 Pathway Installations
Provide in accordance with TIA/EIA-569-A and NFPA 70. Provide building

pathway as specified in Section 26 20 00, INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS.
3.1.3 Service Entrance Conduit, Underground
Provide service entrance underground as specified in Section 26 20 00

INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS.
3.1.4 Cable Tray Installation
Install cable tray as specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION

SYSTEMS. Only OFNP type cable shall be installed in a plenum.
3.1.5 Work Area Outlets
3.1.5.1 Terminations
Terminate UTP cable in accordance with TIA-568-C.1, TIA/EIA-568-B.2 and

wiring configuration as specified.
3.1.5.2 Cover Plates
As a minimum, each outlet/connector shall be labeled as to its function and

a unique number to identify cable link in accordance with the paragraph
LABELING in this section.
3.1.5.3 Cables
Unshielded twisted pair and fiber optic cables shall have a minimum of 12
inches of slack cable loosely coiled into the telecommunications outlet
boxes. Minimum manufacturer's bend radius for each type of cable shall not
be exceeded.
3.1.5.4 Pull Cords
Pull cords shall be installed in conduit serving telecommunications outlets

that do not have cable installed.
3.1.6 Telecommunications Space Termination
Install termination hardware required for Category 6 and optical fiber

system. An insulation displacement tool shall be used for terminating
copper cable to insulation displacement connectors.
3.1.6.1 Connector Blocks
Connector blocks shall be rack mounted in orderly rows and columns.

Adequate vertical and horizontal wire routing areas shall be provided
between groups of blocks. Install in accordance with industry standard
wire routing guides in accordance with TIA/EIA-569-A.
3.1.6.2 Patch Panels
Patch panels shall be mounted in equipment racks with sufficient ports to

accommodate the installed cable plant plus 25 percent spares.
a. Copper Patch Panel. Copper cable entering a patch panel shall be

secured to the panel with cable ties to prevent movement of the
cable.
b. Fiber Optic Patch Panel. Fiber optic cable loop shall be 3 feet
in length. The outer jacket of each cable entering a patch panel
shall be secured to the panel to prevent movement of the fibers
within the panel, using clamps or brackets specifically
manufactured for that purpose.
3.1.6.3 Equipment Support Frames
Install in accordance with TIA/EIA-569-A:
Racks, floor mounted modular type. Permanently anchor rack to the

floor in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
3.1.7 Electrical Penetrations
Seal openings around electrical penetrations through fire resistance-rated

wall, partitions, floors, or ceilings as specified in Section 07 84 00,
FIRESTOPPING.
3.1.8 Grounding and Bonding
Provide in accordance with TIA J-STD-607-A, NFPA 70 and as specified in

Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS.
3.2 LABELING
3.2.1 Labels
Provide labeling in accordance with TIA/EIA-606-A. Handwritten labeling is

unacceptable. Stenciled lettering for voice and data circuits shall be
provided using thermal ink transfer process.
3.2.2 Cable
Cables shall be labeled using color labels on both ends with identifiers in
accordance with TIA/EIA-606-A.
3.2.3 Termination Hardware
Workstation outlets and patch panel connections shall be labeled using

color coded labels with identifiers in accordance with TIA/EIA-606-A.


3.5 TESTING
3.5.1 Telecommunications Cabling Testing
Perform telecommunications cabling inspection, verification, and

performance tests in accordance with TIA-568-C.1, TIA/EIA-568-B.2,
TIA-568-C.3. Perform optical fiber field inspection tests via attenuation
measurements on factory reels and provide results along with manufacturer
certification for factory reel tests. Remove failed cable reels from
project site upon attenuation test failure.
3.5.1.1 Inspection
Visually inspect UTP and optical fiber jacket materials for UL or third
party certification markings. Inspect cabling terminations in
telecommunications rooms and at workstations to confirm color code for T568A
pin assignments, and inspect cabling connections to confirm compliance
with TIA-568-C.1, TIA/EIA-568-B.2, TIA-568-C.3. Visually confirm
Category 6, marking of outlets, cover plates, outlet/connectors, and patch
panels.
3.5.1.2 Verification Tests
UTP backbone copper cabling shall be tested for DC loop resistance, shorts,
opens, intermittent faults, and polarity between conductors, and between
conductors and shield, if cable has overall shield. Test operation of
shorting bars in connection blocks. Test cables after termination but not
cross-connected.
For multimode optical fiber, perform optical fiber end-to-end attenuation

tests in accordance with TIA-568-C.3 and TIA-526-14-A using Method B, OTDR
for multimode optical fiber. For single-mode optical fiber, perform
optical fiber end-to-end attenuation tests in accordance with TIA-568-C.3
and TIA-526-7 using Method B, OTDR for single-mode optical fiber. Perform
verification acceptance tests.
3.5.1.3 Performance Tests
Perform testing for each outlet and MUTOA as follows:
a. Perform Category 6 link tests in accordance with TIA-568-C.1 and

TIA/EIA-568-B.2. Tests shall include wire map, length, insertion
loss, NEXT, PSNEXT, ELFEXT, PSELFEXT, return loss, propagation
delay, and delay skew.
b. Optical fiber Links. Perform optical fiber end-to-end link tests

in accordance with TIA-568-C.3.
3.5.1.4 Final Verification Tests
Perform verification tests for UTP and optical fiber systems after the
complete telecommunications cabling and workstation outlet/connectors are
installed.
a. Voice Tests. These tests assume that dial tone service has been
installed. Connect to the network interface device at the demarcation
point. Go off-hook and listen and receive a dial tone. If a test
number is available, make and receive a local, long distance, and DSN
telephone call.
b. Data Tests. These tests assume the Information Technology Staff

has a network installed and are available to assist with testing.
Connect to the network interface device at the demarcation point. Log
onto the network to ensure proper connection to the network.
SECTION 27 51 16.10 44
PUBLIC ADDRESS/TELEPHONE INTERFACE SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

IEEE C62.41 (1991) Recommended Practice for Surge

Voltages in Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits
UL 1449 (1996; Rev thru Jul 2002) Transient

Voltage Surge Suppressors
The public address system shall be integral with the mass notification
system and compatible with and integrated into the telephone system. The
system shall utilize the mass notification audio distribution network
including speakers and amplifiers and shall include page
control/interfaces, power supply, cabling, and ancillary components
required to meet the required system configuration and operation. System
shall have the following operational features:
a. Paging control through the phone system from rooms as directed by

the contracting officer's representative.
b. A designated code for each zone as designated by the contracting

officer's representative to be activated via telephone push buttons
including a code to activate all zones simultaneously except for
exterior speakers.
c. The capability to be overridden by the mass notification system

should the mass notification system be activated while the PA system is
being utilized.
The Contractor shall submit detail drawings consisting of a complete list

of equipment and material, including manufacturer's descriptive and
technical literature, performance charts and curves, catalog cuts, and
installation instructions. Note that the contract drawings show layouts
based on mass notification speakers. The Contractor shall check the layout
based on the actual speakers to be installed and make necessary revisions
SECTION 27 51 16.10 44 Page 1

in the detail drawings. Detail drawings shall also contain complete point
to point wiring, schematic diagrams and other details that are not part of
the mass notification system that are required to demonstrate that the
system has been coordinated and will properly function as a unit. Drawings
shall show proposed layout of equipment and appurtenances, and equipment
relationship to other parts of the work including clearances for
maintenance and operation.
1.2.2 Spare Parts
The Contractor shall submit spare parts data for each different item of
material and equipment specified, after approval of the detail drawings and
not later than 2 months prior to the date of beneficial occupancy. The
data shall include a complete list of parts and supplies, with current unit
prices and source of supply.
1.3 SUBMITTALS

SD-02 Shop Drawings
Detail Drawings
Detail drawings consisting of a complete list of equipment and

material, including manufacturer's descriptive and technical
literature, performance charts and curves, catalog cuts, and
installation instructions. Detail drawings shall also contain
complete wiring and schematic diagrams and any other details
required to demonstrate that the system has been coordinated and
will properly function as a unit. Drawings shall show proposed
layout of equipment and appurtenances, and equipment relationship
to other parts of the work including clearances for maintenance
and operation.
SD-03 Product Data
Spare Parts;

SD-06 Test Reports
Approved Test Procedures;
Test plan and test procedures for the acceptance tests. The
test plan and test procedures shall explain in detail,
step-by-step actions and expected results to demonstrate
compliance with the requirements specified. The procedure shall
also explain methods for simulating the necessary conditions of
operation to demonstrate system performance.
Acceptance Tests;
Test reports in booklet form showing all field tests performed

to adjust each component and to prove compliance with the
SECTION 27 51 16.10 44 Page 2

specified performance criteria, upon completion and testing of the

installed system. The reports shall include the manufacturer,
model number, and serial number of test equipment used in each
test. Each report shall indicate the final position of controls
and operating mode of the system.
SD-07 Certificates
Components
Copies of current approvals or listings issued by UL, or other

nationally recognized testing laboratory for all components.
Public Address System;
Submit Data Package 3 in accordance with Section 01 78 23

Equipment placed in storage until installation shall be stored with

protection from the weather, humidity and temperature variations, dirt and
dust, and other contaminants.
1.5 VERIFICATION OF DIMENSIONS
The Contractor shall become familiar with the details of the work and
working conditions, verify dimensions in the field, and advise the
Contracting Officer of any discrepancies before performing the work.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Material and equipment to be provided shall be the standard products of a

manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of such products, and
shall essentially duplicate material and equipment that have been in
satisfactory use at least 2 years. All components used in the system shall
be commercial designs that comply with the requirements specified.
Equipment shall be supported by a service organization that is within 60
miles of the site.
2.1.1 Identical Items
Items of the same classification shall be identical. This requirement

includes equipment, modules, assemblies, parts, and components.
2.1.2 Nameplates
Each major component of equipment shall have the manufacturer's name,

address, model and catalog number, and serial number on a plate secured to
the equipment.
SECTION 27 51 16.10 44 Page 3

2.2 MATERIALS
2.2.1 PAGE CONTROL/INTERFACE
The page control/interface shall provide a minimum number of 8 page zones.

It shall also contain a built-in all call feature. Page control/interface
shall as a minimum conform to the following specifications:
Power requirement: 24 Vdc
Input impedance Tip and Ring: 600 ohms
Tone signal: Industry Standards
Frequency Bandwidth: 3%
Detect: 40 ms
Interdigital Time: 40 ms
2.3 LOUDSPEAKERS
2.3.1 Speakers
One way amplified speakers shall be capable of one way page controls.
It shall include a self-contained dual input amplifier and volume control,
8 inch cone type ceiling mounted speaker, operate on -24 VDC & 50 mA and
have screw terminals for all connections. The amplifier input impedance
shall be 1000 ohms nominal, the amplifier input level shall be -10dbM
nominal and the amplifier output shall be one watt into 45 ohm speaker load.
2.4 EQUIPMENT MOUNTING
Equipment shall be wall mounted.
2.5 TERMINALS
Terminals shall be solderless, tool-crimped pressure type.
2.6 SURGE PROTECTION
2.6.1 Signal Surge Protection
Major components of the system shall have internal protection circuits

which protects the component from mismatched loads, direct current, and
shorted output lines per IEEE C62.41 B3 combination waveform and NFPA 70.
Surge protection device shall be UL listed and labeled as having been
tested in accordance with UL 1449.
2.7 TELEPHONE INTERFACE MODULE
Telephone Interface module shall provide one way all call paging access
from telephone to PA/mass notification system. Paging shall be
accomplished by the building telephone system instruments interconnected to
the PA system via an interface module to allow telephone dial up access to
SECTION 27 51 16.10 44 Page 4

the paging amplifier. Interface module shall produce an alert tone in the
associated speakers on activation. Telephone interface module shall as a
minimum conform to the following specifications:
Impedance: 600 ohms
Frequency response: 100Hz to 10Khz
70V Input Impedance: 200K ohms
Output level: 400mV rms
Input Power Requirement: 12-24Vdc (from power supply)
Access requirement: Electronic (analog) or IA2 line key

(line card required) PABX loop or
ground-start trunk port, or
dedicated single-line phone.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
Equipment shall be installed as indicated and specified, and in accordance

with the manufacturer's recommendations except where otherwise indicated.
Equipment mounted out-of-doors or subject to inclement conditions shall be
weatherproofed. The antenna shall be supported at least 60 inch clear
above the roof by means of self-supported or guyed mast.
3.2 GROUNDING
All grounding practices shall comply with NFPA 70. Equipment shall be
grounded to the serving panelboard ground bus through a green grounding
conductor. Metallic conduits serving the equipment shall be isolated on
the equipment end with an insulating bushing to prevent noise from being
transferred to the circuit.
3.3 ACCEPTANCE TESTS
After installation has been completed, the Contractor shall conduct

acceptance tests, utilizing the approved test procedures, to demonstrate
that equipment operates in accordance with specification requirements.
Notify the Contracting Officer 14 days prior to the performance of tests.
In no case shall notice be given until after the Contractor has received
written Contracting Officer approval of the test plans as specified. The
acceptance tests shall include originating and receiving messages at
specified stations, at proper volume levels, without cross talk or noise
from other links or nondesignated units.
3.4 TRAINING
The Contractor shall conduct a training course for 8 members of the

operating and maintenance staff as designated by the Contracting Officer.
The training course will be given at the installation during normal working
hours for a total of 4 hours and shall start after the system is
functionally complete but prior to final acceptance tests. The field
instructions shall cover all of the items contained in the approved
SECTION 27 51 16.10 44 Page 5

operating and maintenance manuals, as well as demonstrations of routine

maintenance operations. The Contracting Officer shall be notified at least
14 days prior to the start of the training course.
SECTION 27 51 16.10 44 Page 6

SECTION 28 31 76
INTERIOR FIRE ALARM AND MASS NOTIFICATION SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

ASA S3.2 (1989; R 1999) Method for Measuring the

Intelligibility of Speech Over
Communication Systems (ASA 85)
ASME A17.1 (2007; Addenda 2008) Safety Code for

Elevators and Escalators
FM GLOBAL (FM)


IEC 60268-16 (2003) Sound System Equipment - Part 16:

Objective Rating Of Speech Intelligibility
By Speech Transmission Index
ISO 7240-16 (2007) Fire Detection And Alarm Systems —

Part 16: Sound System Control And
Indicating Equipment
NFPA 101 (2008) Life Safety Code, 2006 Edition
NFPA 170 (2009) Fire Safety Symbols
NFPA 241 (2009) Safeguarding
Construction,Alteration, and Demolition

Operations

Code - 2008 Edition
NFPA 72 (2006) National Fire Alarm Code

47 CFR 15 Radio Frequency Devices
47 CFR 90 Private Land Mobile Radio Services
UL 1480 (2003; Rev thru Dec 2006); Standard for

Safety Speakers for Fire Alarm, Emergency,
and Commercial and Professional Use
UL 1638 (2001; Rev thru Oct 2008) Visual Signaling

Appliances - Private Mode Emergency and
General Utility Signaling
UL 1971 (2002; Rev thru Oct 2008) Signaling

Devices for the Hearing Impaired
UL 2017 (2008) Standard for Safety for

General-Purpose Signaling Devices and
Systems
UL 228 (2006; Rev thru Nov 2008) Door

Closers-Holders, With or Without Integral
Smoke Detectors
UL 268 (2006) Standard for Smoke Detectors for

Fire Alarm Signaling Systems
UL 268A (2008) Smoke Detectors for Duct Application

Audible Signal Appliances
UL 521 (1999; Rev thru Jul 2005) Heat Detectors

for Fire Protective Signaling Systems
UL 864 (2003; Rev thru May 2007) Control Units

and Accessories for Fire Alarm Systems

Directory
UL Fire Prot Dir (2009) Fire Protection Equipment Directory
UFC 4-021-01 Design and O&M: Mass Notification System
1.2 DEFINITIONS
Wherever mentioned in this specification or on the drawings, the equipment,

devices, and functions shall be defined as follows:
a. Analog/Addressable System: A system where multiple signals are

transmitted via the same conduction path to a remote fire alarm control
unit and fire alarm control panel, decoded and separated so that each
signal will initiate the specified response.
b. Hard Wired System: A system where alarm and supervisory initiating

devices are directly connected, through individual dedicated
conductors, to a central control panel without the use of
analog/addressable circuits or devices.
c. Interface Device: An addressable device that interconnects hard

wired systems or devices to an analog/addressable system.
e. Fire Alarm and Mass Notification Control Panel (FACP/FMCP): A

master control panel having the features of a fire alarm and mass
notification control unit and fire alarm and mass notification control
units are interconnected. The panel has central processing, memory,
input and output terminals.
f. Terminal Cabinet: A steel cabinet with locking, hinge-mounted door

that terminal strips are securely mounted.
1.3.1 Scope
a. This work includes completion of design and providing a new,

complete, addressable fire alarm and mass notification system as
described herein and on the contract drawings. Include in the system
wiring, raceways, pull boxes, terminal cabinets, outlet and mounting
boxes, control equipment, alarm, and supervisory signal initiating
devices, alarm notification appliances, supervising station fire alarm
system transmitter, and other accessories and miscellaneous items
required for a complete operating system even though each item is not
specifically mentioned or described. Provide system complete and ready
for operation.
b. Provide equipment, materials, installation, workmanship,

inspection, and testing in strict accordance with the required and
advisory provisions of NFPA 72, ISO 7240-16, IEC 60268-16, except as
modified herein. The system layouts on the drawings show the intent of
coverage and are shown in suggested locations. Final quantity, system
layout, and coordination are the responsibility of the Contractor.
1.3.2 Technical Data and Computer Software
Technical data and computer software (meaning technical data that relates
to computer software) that are specifically identified in this project, and
may be defined/required in other specifications, shall be delivered,
strictly in accordance with the CONTRACT CLAUSES. Identify data delivered
by reference to the particular specification paragraph against which it is

furnished. Data to be submitted shall include complete system, equipment,
and software descriptions. Descriptions shall show how the equipment will
operate as a system to meet the performance requirements of this contract.
The data package shall also include the following:
a. Identification of programmable portions of system equipment and

capabilities.
b. Description of system revision and expansion capabilities and

methods of implementation detailing both equipment and software
requirements.
c. Provision of operational software data on all modes of programmable

portions of the fire alarm and detection system.
d. Description of Fire Alarm Control Panel equipment operation.
e. Description of auxiliary and remote equipment operations.
f. Library of application software.
g. Operation and maintenance manuals.
1.3.3 Keys
Keys and locks for equipment shall be identical. Provide not less than six
keys of each type required. Keys shall be CAT 60.
1.4 SUBMITTALS

SD-02 Shop Drawings
Annotated catalog data, in table format on the drawings, showing

manufacturer's name, model, voltage, and catalog numbers for
equipment and components. Submitted shop drawings shall not be
smaller than ISO A1.
Wiring Diagrams; G
Point-to-point wiring diagrams showing the points of connection

and terminals used for electrical field connections in the system,
including interconnections between the equipment or systems that
are supervised or controlled by the system. Diagrams shall show
connections from field devices to the FACP and remote fire alarm
control units, initiating circuits, switches, relays and terminals.
Complete riser diagrams indicating the wiring sequence of

devices and their connections to the control equipment. Include a
color code schedule for the wiring. Include floor plans showing
the locations of devices and equipment.
System Layout; G
Plan view drawing showing device locations, terminal cabinet

locations, junction boxes, other related equipment, conduit
routing, wire counts, circuit identification in each conduit, and
circuit layouts for all floors. Drawings shall comply with the
requirements of NFPA 170, Fire Safety Symbols.
System Operation; G
A complete list of device addresses and corresponding messages.
Notification Appliances; G
Data on each circuit to indicate that there is at least 25

percent spare capacity for notification appliances, 25 percent
spare capacity for initiating devices. Annotate data for each
circuit on the drawings.
Amplifiers; G
Data to indicate that the amplifiers have sufficient capacity to

simultaneously drive all notification speakers at the maximum
rating plus 50 percent spare capacity. Annotate data for each
circuit on the drawings.
As-Built Drawings
Six sets of detailed as-built drawings. Furnish one set of full

size paper as-built drawings and schematics. The drawings shall
be prepared on uniform sized mylar sheets not less than 30 by 42
inches with 8 by 4 inch title block similar to contract drawings.
Furnish one set of CD or DVD discs containing software back-up and
CAD based drawings in latest version of MicroStation and DXF
format of as-built drawings and schematics. The drawings shall
include complete wiring diagrams showing connections between
devices and equipment, both factory and field wired. Include a
riser diagram and drawings showing the as-built location of
devices and equipment. The drawings shall show the system as
installed, including deviations from both the project drawings and
the approved shop drawings. These drawings shall be submitted
within two weeks after the final acceptance test of the system.
At least one set of as-built (marked-up) drawings shall be
provided at the time of, or prior to the final acceptance test.
SD-03 Product Data
UL or FM listing cards for equipment provided.
Technical Data And Computer Software; G

Fire alarm control panel (FACP); G
Fire Alarm And Mass Notification Control Panel (FACP/FMCP); G
Terminal cabinets/assemblies; G
Manual stations; G
Transmitters (including housing); G
Batteries; G
Battery chargers; G
Smoke sensors; G
Thermal sensors; G
Wiring and cable; G
Notification appliances; G
Addressable interface devices; G
Graphic annunciator; G
Amplifiers; G
Tone generators; G
Digitalized voice generators; G
Waterflow detectors; G
Tamper switches; G
Electromagnetic door holders; G
Radio transmitter and interface panels; G
SD-05 Design Data
System Operation; G
A complete description of the system operation in matrix format

on the drawings.
Battery power; G
Battery calculations as required in paragraph Battery Power

Calculations.
SD-06 Test Reports

Testing Procedures; G
Smoke sensor testing procedures; G
SD-07 Certificates
Installer
Mass Notification System
A unique identifier for each device, including the control panel

and initiating and indicating devices, with an indication of test
results, and signature of the factory-trained technician of the
control panel manufacturer and equipment installer. With reports
on preliminary tests, include printer information. Include the
NFPA 72 Record of Completion and NFPA 72 Inspection and Testing
Form, with the appropriate test reports.
Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Instructions; G
Six copies of the Operation and Maintenance Instructions,

indexed and in booklet form. The Operation and Maintenance
Instructions shall be a single volume or in separate volumes, and
may be submitted as a Technical Data Package. Manuals shall be
approved prior to training.
Original and backup copies of all software delivered for this

project, on each type of CD/DVD media utilized.
Instruction of Government Employees
The installers training history for the employees involved with

this contract.
Equipment and devices shall be compatible and operable with existing

station fire alarm system and shall not impair reliability or operational
functions of existing supervising station fire alarm system. The
supervising equipment is existing and consists of the following brands and
models: supervising station control panel Monaco.
a. In NFPA publications referred to herein, consider advisory

provisions to be mandatory, as though the word "shall" had been
substituted for "should" wherever it appears; interpret reference to
"authority having jurisdiction" to mean the Contracting Offices
Designated Representative (COR).
b. The recommended practices stated in the manufacturer's literature

or documentation shall be considered as mandatory requirements.
c. Devices and equipment for fire alarm service shall be listed by

UL Fire Prot Dir or approved by FM P7825a.
1.5.1.1 Design Services
Installations requiring completion of installation drawings and

specification or modifications of fire detection, fire alarm, mass
notification system, fire suppression systems or mass notification systems
shall require the services and review of a qualified engineer. For the
purposes of meeting this requirement, a qualified engineer is defined as an
individual meeting one of the following conditions:
a. A registered professional engineer having a Bachelor of Science or

Masters of Science Degree in Fire Protection Engineering from an
accredited university engineering program, plus a minimum of four years
work experience in fire protection engineering.
b. A registered professional engineer (P.E.) in fire protection

engineering.
c. Registered Professional Engineer with verification of experience

and at least four years of current experience in the design of the fire
protection and detection systems.
d. A NICET Level 4 Fire Alarm Technicians.
1.5.1.2 Supervisor
The installing Contractor shall provide the following: NICET Fire Alarm
Technicians to perform the installation of the system. A NICET Level 3
Fire Alarm Technician shall supervise the installation of the fire alarm
system/mass notification system. The Fire Alarm technicians supervising

the installation of equipment shall be factory trained in the installation,
adjustment, testing, and operation of the equipment specified herein and on
the drawings.
1.5.1.3 Technician
The installing Contractor shall provide the following: Fire Alarm

Technicians with a minimum of four years of experience utilized to assist
in the installation and terminate fire alarm/mass notification devices,
cabinets and panels. The Fire Alarm technicians installing the equipment
shall be factory trained in the installation, adjustment, testing, and
operation of the equipment specified herein and on the drawings.
1.5.1.4 Installer

installer with a minimum of two years of experience utilized to assist in
the installation of fire alarm/mass notification devices, cabinets and
panels. An electrician shall be allowed to install wire or cable and to
install conduit for the fire alarm system/mass notification system. The
Fire Alarm installer shall be factory trained in the installation,
adjustment, testing, and operation of the equipment specified herein and on
the drawings.
1.5.1.5 Test Personnel

Technicians with a minimum of eight years of experience utilized to test
and certify the installation of the fire alarm/mass notification devices,
cabinets and panels. The Fire Alarm technicians testing the equipment
shall be factory trained in the installation, adjustment, testing, and
operation of the equipment specified herein and on the drawings.
1.5.1.6 Manufacturer's Representative
The fire alarm and mass notification equipment manufacturer's

representative shall be present for the connection of wiring to the control
panel. The Manufacturer's Representative shall be an employee of the
manufacturer with necessary technical training on the system being
installed.
1.5.1.7 Manufacturer
Components shall be of current design and shall be in regular and recurrent

production at the time of installation. Provide design, materials, and
devices for a protected premises fire alarm system, complete, conforming to
NFPA 72, except as otherwise or additionally specified herein.
1.5.2.1 Requirements for Fire Protection Service
Equipment and material shall have been tested by UL and listed in

UL Fire Prot Dir or approved by FM and listed in FM P7825a. Where the
terms "listed" or "approved" appear in this specification, they shall mean
listed in UL Fire Prot Dir or FM P7825a. The omission of these terms under
the description of any item of equipment described shall not be construed
as waiving this requirement. All listings or approval by testing
laboratories shall be from an existing ANSI or UL published standard.
1.5.2.2 Mass Notification System
The equipment furnished shall be compatible and be UL listed, FM approved,

or approved or listed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory for the
intended use. All listings or approval by testing laboratories shall be
from an existing ANSI or UL published standard.
1.5.2.3 Testing Services or Laboratories
Fire alarm and fire detection equipment shall be constructed in accordance

with UL Fire Prot Dir, UL Electrical Constructn, or FM P7825a.

humidity, and temperature variation, dirt and dust, and other contaminants.
1.7 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE (O&M) INSTRUCTIONS
The Interior Fire Alarm And Mass Notification System Operation and
Maintenance Instructions shall include:
a. "Manufacturer Data Package 5" as specified in Section 01 78 23

b. Operating manual outlining step-by-step procedures required for

system startup, operation, and shutdown. The manual shall include the
manufacturer's name, model number, service manual, parts list, and
complete description of equipment and their basic operating features.
c. Maintenance manual listing routine maintenance procedures, possible

breakdowns and repairs, and troubleshooting guide. The manuals shall
include conduit layout, equipment layout and simplified wiring, and
control diagrams of the system as installed.
d. The manuals shall include complete procedures for system revision

and expansion, detailing both equipment and software requirements.
e. Software delivered for this project shall be provided, on each type

of CD/DVD media utilized.
f. Printouts of configuration settings for all devices.
g. Routine maintenance checklist. The routine maintenance checklist

shall be arranged in a columnar format. The first column shall list
all installed devices, the second column shall state the maintenance
activity or state no maintenance required, the third column shall state
the frequency of the maintenance activity, and the fourth column for
additional comments or reference.
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
1.8.1 Repair Service/Replacement Parts
Repair services and replacement parts for the system shall be available for
a period of 10 years after the date of final acceptance of this work by the
Contracting Officer. During guarantee period, the service technician shall
be on-site within 24 hours after notification. All repairs shall be

completed within 24 hours of arrival on-site.
1.8.2 Interchangeable Parts
Spare parts furnished shall be directly interchangeable with the

corresponding components of the installed system. Spare parts shall be
suitably packaged and identified by nameplate, tagging, or stamping. Spare
parts shall be delivered to the Contracting Officer at the time of the
final acceptance testing.
1.8.3 Spare Parts
Furnish the following spare parts and accessories:
a. Four fuses for each fused circuit
b. Nine spare reams of paper for the system printer, plus sufficient
paper for fire alarm acceptance tests
c. Three spare printer ribbons
d. Three1 `1 break rods for manual stations
1.8.4 Special Tools
Software, connecting cables and proprietary equipment, necessary for the

maintenance, testing, and reprogramming of the equipment shall be furnished
to the Contracting Officer.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Provide materials, equipment, and devices that have been tested by a

nationally recognized testing laboratory, such as UL or FM, and listed or
approved for fire protection service when so required by NFPA 72 or this
specification. Select material from one manufacturer, where possible, and
not a combination of manufacturers, for any particular classification of
materials. Material and equipment shall be the standard products of a
manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of the products for at
least two years prior to bid opening.
2.1.2 Nameplates
Major components of equipment shall have the manufacturer's name, address,

type or style, model or serial number, catalog number, date of
installation, installing Contractor's name and address, and the contract
number provided on a new plate permanently affixed to the item or
equipment. Major components include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. FACPs
b. Automatic transmitter
Furnish nameplates to obtain approval by the Contracting Officer before

installation. Obtain approval by the Contracting Officer for installation
locations. Nameplates shall be etched metal or plastic, permanently
attached by screws to panels or adjacent walls.
2.2 GENERAL PRODUCT REQUIREMENT
All fire alarm and mass notification equipment shall be listed for use
under the applicable reference standards. Interfacing of Listed UL 864 or
similar approved industry listing with Mass Notification Panels listed to
UL 2017 or equal shall be done in a laboratory listed configuration, if the
software programming features can not provide a listed interface control.
If a field modification is needed, such as adding equipment like relays,
the manufacturer of the panels being same or different brand from
manufacturer shall provide the installing contractor for review and
confirmation by the installing contractor. The installing contractor
shall, as part of the submittal documents, provide this information.
2.3 SYSTEM OPERATION
The Addressable Interior Fire Alarm and Mass Notification System shall be a
complete, supervised, noncoded, analog/addressable fire alarm and mass
notification system conforming to NFPA 72, UL 864 Ninth Edition, and UL 2017.
The system shall be activated into the alarm mode by actuation of any alarm
initiating device. The system shall remain in the alarm mode until the
initiating device is reset and the fire alarm control panel is reset and
restored to normal. The system may be placed in the alert mode by local
microphones or remotely from authorized locations/users. The system
operation shall also conform to UFC 4-021-01, Mass Notification Systems.
2.3.1 Alarm Initiating Devices
Connect alarm initiating devices to initiating device circuits (IDC), Style

B, Style 6 and installed in accordance with NFPA 72. The system shall have
an interconnected riser loop or network having Style 6 supervision for
interconnection of other FA/MNS control panels.
a. Alarm notification appliances shall be connected to Voice

Notification System, Style Z in accordance with NFPA 72. A looped
conduit system shall be provided so that if the conduit and all
conductors within are severed or exposed to fire at any point, all IDC,
NAC and SLC will remain functional. Should the design or building
layout preclude separation then a fire rated separation shall be
provided in accordance with NFPA 72. The return portion of the loop
shall be remote from the supply portion of the loop.
b. Where the building has two stairs for egress from floors above
grade, a single impairment cannot adversely affect more than one
floor. Where three or more stairs are provided for egress from floors
above grade, a single impairment cannot adversely affect more than 1/2
of any floor. Any single impairment of the system shall not affect the
system on more than one-half of any floor.
c. The system shall operate in the alarm mode upon actuation of any
alarm initiating device. The system shall remain in the alarm mode
until initiating device(s) are reset and the fire alarm control panel
is manually reset and restored to normal. The conduit loop requirement
is not applicable to the signal transmission link from the local panels
(at the protected premises) to the Supervising Station (fire station,
fire alarm central communication center). Audible, and visual

appliances and systems shall comply with NFPA 72. Fire alarm
system/mass notification system components requiring power, except for
the control panel power supply, shall operate on 24 Volts dc.
2.3.2 Functions and Operating Features
The system shall provide the following functions and operating features:
a. The FACP/FMCP and fire alarm and mass notification control units,
if used, shall provide power, annunciation, supervision, and control
for the system. Addressable systems shall be microcomputer
(microprocessor or microcontroller) based with a minimum word size of
eight bits with sufficient memory to perform as specified.
b. Provide Style B initiating device circuits for conductor lengths of

10 feet or less.
c. Provide Style 6 signaling line circuits for each floor.
d. Provide Style 6 signaling line circuits for the network.
e. Provide Style Z notification appliance circuits. The visual alarm

notification appliances shall have the flash rates synchronized.
f. Provide electrical supervision of the primary power (AC) supply,

presence of the battery, battery voltage, and placement of system
modules within the control panel.
g. Provide an audible and visual trouble signal to activate upon a

single break or open condition, or ground fault. The trouble signal
shall also operate upon loss of primary power (AC) supply, absence of a
battery supply, low battery voltage, or removal of alarm or supervisory
panel modules. Provide a trouble alarm silence feature that shall
silence the audible trouble signal, without affecting the visual
indicator. After the system returns to normal operating conditions,
the trouble signal shall again sound until the trouble is
acknowledged. A smoke sensor in the process of being verified for the
actual presence of smoke shall not initiate a trouble condition.
h. Provide a notification appliance silencing switch, that when

activated, will silence the audible signal appliance, but will not
affect the visual alarm indicator, the liquid crystal display, or the
automatic notification of the fire department. This switch shall be
overridden upon activation of a subsequent alarm.
i. Provide alarm verification capability for smoke sensors. Alarm

verification shall initially be set for 30 seconds.
j. Provide program capability via switches in a locked portion of the

FACP to bypass the automatic notification appliance circuits, fire
reporting system, air handler shutdown, elevator recall, door release
features. Operation of this programming shall indicate this action on
the FACP display and printer output.
k. Alarm, supervisory, and/or trouble signals shall be automatically

transmitted to the fire department.
l. Alarm functions shall override trouble or supervisory functions.
Supervisory functions shall override trouble functions.
m. The system shall be capable of being programmed from the panels

keyboard. Programmed information shall be stored in non-volatile
memory.
n. The system shall be capable of operating, supervising, and/or

monitoring both addressable and non-addressable alarm and supervisory
devices.
o. There shall be no limit, other than maximum system capacity, as to

the number of addressable devices, that may be in alarm simultaneously.
p. Where the fire alarm system is responsible for initiating an action

in another emergency control device or system, such as an HVAC system
and an elevator system, the addressable fire alarm relay shall be within
3 feet of the emergency control device.
q. An alarm signal shall automatically initiate the following

functions:
(1) Transmission of an alarm signal to the fire department.
(2) Visual indication of the device operated on the fire alarm

control panel (FACP), and on the graphic annunciator. Indication
on the graphic annunciator shall be by floor, zone or circuit, and
type of device.
(5) Release of doors held open by electromagnetic devices.
(6) Release of power to electric locks on doors that are part of

the means of egress.
(8) Operation of a duct smoke sensor shall shut down the

appropriate air handler in accordance with NFPA 90A in addition to
other requirements of this paragraph.
(9) Operation of a sprinkler waterflow switch serving an elevator

machinery room or elevator shaft shall operate shunt trip circuit
breaker(s) to shut down power to the elevators in accordance with
ASME A17.1.
r. A supervisory signal shall automatically initiate the following

functions:
(1) Visual indication of the device operated on the FACP, VDU,

and on the graphic annunciator, and sound the audible alarm at the
respective panel.
(2) Transmission of a supervisory signal to the fire department.
(3) Recording of the event via the system printer and

electronicly in the history log of the fire control system unit.
s. A trouble condition shall automatically initiate the following

functions:
(1) Visual indication of the system trouble on the FACP, VDU, and
on the graphic annunciator, and sound the audible alarm at the
respective panel.
(2) Transmission of a trouble signal to the fire department.
t. The maximum permissible elapsed time between the actuation of an

initiating device and its indication at the FACP shall be 10 seconds.
u. The maximum elapsed time between the occurrence of the trouble

condition and its indication at the FACP shall not exceed 200 seconds.
2.4 SYSTEM MONITORING
2.4.1 Valves
Each valve affecting the proper operation of a fire protection system,

including automatic sprinkler control valves, standpipe control valves,
sprinkler service entrance valve, valves at fire pumps, isolating valves
for pressure type waterflow or supervision switches, and valves at backflow
preventers, whether supplied under this contract or existing, shall be
electrically monitored to ensure its proper position. Each tamper switch
shall be provided with a separate address.
2.4.2 Independent Fire Detection System
Each existing independent smoke detection subsystem, and kitchen fire

extinguishing system shall be monitored both for the presence of an alarm
condition and for a trouble condition. Each monitored condition shall be
provided with a separate address.
2.5 MASS NOTIFICATION SYSTEM FUNCTIONS
2.5.1 Notification Appliance Network
The notification appliance network consists of audio speakers located to

provide intelligible instructions at all locations in the building. The
Mass Notification System announcements shall take priority over all other
function of the system including the audible and visual output of the fire
alarm system in a normal or alarm state. All fire alarm system functions
shall continue in an alarm state except for the output signals of the
audible and visual notification appliances.
2.5.2 Strobes
Strobes are also provided to alert hearing-impaired occupants.
2.5.3 Text Displays
LED text displays for hearing impaired occupants.
2.5.4 Door Operation
Closure of doors held open by electromagnetic devices.
2.5.5 Voice Notification
An autonomous voice notification control unit is used to monitor and

control the notification appliance network and provide consoles for local
operation. Using a console, personnel in the building can initiate
delivery of pre-recorded voice messages, provide live voice messages and
instructions, and initiate visual strobe and (optional) textual message
notification appliances. The autonomous voice notification control unit
will temporarily override audible fire alarm notification while delivering
Mass Notification messages to ensure they are intelligible.
2.5.6 Base-Wide Control
If a base-wide control system for mass notification exists on the base, the
autonomous control unit shall communicates with the central control unit of
the base-wide system. The autonomous control unit shall receive
commands/messages from the central control unit and provide status
information.
2.6 OVERVOLTAGE AND SURGE PROTECTION
2.6.1 Signaling Line Circuit Surge Protection
For systems having circuits located outdoors, communications equipment

shall be protected against surges induced on any signaling line circuit and
shall comply with the applicable requirements of IEEE C62.41.1 and
IEEE C62.41.2. Cables and conductors, that serve as communications links,
shall have surge protection circuits installed at each end that meet the
following waveform(s):
a. A 10 microsecond by 1000 microsecond waveform with a peak voltage

of 1500 volts and a peak current of 60 amperes.
b. An 8 microsecond by 20 microsecond waveform with a peak voltage of

1000 volts and a peak current of 500 amperes. Protection shall be
provided at the equipment. Additional triple electrode gas surge
protectors, rated for the application, shall be installed on each
wireline circuit within 3 feet of the building cable entrance. Fuses
shall not be used for surge protection.
2.6.2 Sensor Wiring Surge Protection
Digital and analog inputs and outputs shall be protected against surges
induced by sensor wiring installed outdoors and as shown. The inputs and
outputs shall be tested with the following waveforms:
a. A 10 by 1000 microsecond waveform with a peak voltage of 1500 volts

and a peak current of 60 amperes.
b. An 8 by 20 microsecond waveform with a peak voltage of 1000 volts

and a peak current of 500 amperes. Fuses shall not be used for surge
protection.
2.7 ADDRESSABLE INTERFACE DEVICES
The initiating device being monitored shall be configured as a Style A

initiating device circuits. The system shall be capable of defining any
module as an alarm module and report alarm trouble, loss of polling, or as
a supervisory module, and reporting supervisory short, supervisory open or

loss of polling such as waterflow switches, valve supervisory switches,
fire pump monitoring, independent smoke detection systems, relays for
output function actuation, etc. The module shall be UL or FM listed as
compatible with the control panel. The monitor module shall provide
address setting means compatible with the control panel's SLC supervision
and store an internal identifying code. Monitor module shall contain an
integral LED that flashes each time the monitor module is polled. Pull
stations with a monitor module in a common backbox are not required to have
an LED.
2.8 ADDRESSABLE CONTROL MODULE
The control module shall be capable of operating as a relay (dry contact

form C) for interfacing the control panel with other systems, and to
control door holders or initiate elevator fire service. The module shall
be UL or FM listed as compatible with the control panel. The indicating
device or the external load being controlled shall be configured as a Style
Y notification appliance circuits. The system shall be capable of
supervising, audible, visual and dry contact circuits. The control module
shall have both an input and output address. The supervision shall detect
a short on the supervised circuit and shall prevent power from being
applied to the circuit. The control model shall provide address setting
means compatible with the control panel's SLC supervision and store an
internal identifying code. The control module shall contain an integral
LED that flashes each time the control module is polled. Control Modules
shall be located in environmental areas that reflect the conditions to
which they were listed.
2.9 ISOLATION MODULES
Provide isolation modules to subdivide each signaling line circuit into

groups of not more than 20 addressable devices between adjacent isolation
modules.
2.10 SMOKE SENSORS
2.10.1 Photoelectric Smoke Sensors
Provide addressable photoelectric smoke sensors as follows:
a. Provide analog/addressable photoelectric smoke sensors utilizing

the photoelectric light scattering principle for operation in
accordance with UL 268. Smoke sensors shall be listed for use with the
fire alarm control panel.
b. Provide self-restoring type sensors that do not require any

readjustment after actuation at the FACP to restore them to normal
operation. Sensors shall be UL listed as smoke-automatic fire sensors.
c. Components shall be rust and corrosion resistant. Vibration shall

have no effect on the sensor's operation. Protect the detection
chamber with a fine mesh metallic screen that prevents the entrance of
insects or airborne materials. The screen shall not inhibit the
movement of smoke particles into the chamber.
d. Provide twist lock bases with sounder that produces a minimum of 90

dBA at 10 feet for the sensors. The sensors shall maintain contact
with their bases without the use of springs. Provide companion
mounting base with screw terminals for each conductor. Terminate field
wiring on the screw terminals. The sensor shall have a visual
indicator to show actuation.
e. The sensor address shall identify the particular unit, its location
within the system, and its sensitivity setting. Sensors shall be of
the low voltage type rated for use on a 24 VDC system.
f. An operator at the control panel, having a proper access level,

shall have the capability to manually access the following information
for each initiating device.
(1) Primary status
(2) Device type
(3) Present average value
(4) Present sensitivity selected
(5) Sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.)
2.10.2 Duct Smoke Sensors
Duct-mounted photoelectric smoke detectors shall be furnished and installed

where indicated and in accordance with NFPA 90A. Units shall consist of a
smoke detector as specified in paragraph Photoelectric Detectors, mounted
in a special housing fitted with duct sampling tubes. Detector circuitry
shall be mounted in a metallic enclosure exterior to the duct. Detectors
shall have a manual reset. Detectors shall be rated for air velocities
that include air flows between 500 and 4000 fpm. Detectors shall be
powered from the fire alarm panel.
a. Sampling tubes shall run the full width of the duct. The duct
detector package shall conform to the requirements of NFPA 90A, UL 268A,
and shall be UL listed for use in air-handling systems. The control
functions, operation, reset, and bypass shall be controlled from the
fire alarm control panel.
b. Lights to indicate the operation and alarm condition; and the test
and reset buttons shall be visible and accessible with the unit
installed and the cover in place. Detectors mounted above 6 feet and
those mounted below 6 feet that cannot be easily accessed while
standing on the floor, shall be provided with a remote detector
indicator panel containing test and reset switches.
c. Remote lamps and switches as well as the affected fan units shall
be properly identified in etched plastic placards. Detectors shall
provide for control of auxiliary contacts that provide control,
interlock, and shutdown functions specified in Section 23 09 23 DIRECT
DIGITAL CONTROL FOR HVAC AND OTHER LOCAL BUILDING SYSTEMS. Auxiliary
contacts provide for this function shall be located within 3 feet of
the controlled circuit or appliance. The detectors shall be supplied
by the fire alarm system manufacturer to ensure complete system
compatibility.
2.10.3 Smoke Sensor Testing
Smoke sensors shall be tested in accordance with NFPA 72 and manufacturer's
recommended calibrated test method. Submit smoke sensor testing procedures

for approval.
2.11 THERMAL SENSORS
2.11.1 Heat Detectors
Heat detectors shall be designed for detection of fire by combination fixed

temperature and rate-of-rise principle. The alarm condition shall be
determined by comparing sensor valve with the stored values. Heat detector
spacing shall be rated in accordance with UL 521. Detectors located in
areas subject to moisture, exterior atmospheric conditions as defined by
NFPA 70 and as shown on drawings, shall be types approved for such
locations.
2.11.1.1 Combination Fixed-Temperature and Rate-of-Rise Detectors
Detectors shall be designed for semi-flush outlet box mounting and

supported independently of wiring connections. Contacts shall be
self-resetting after response to rate-of-rise principle. Under fixed
temperature actuation, the detector shall have a permanent external
indication that is readily visible. Detector units located in boiler
rooms, showers, or other areas subject to abnormal temperature changes
shall operate on fixed temperature principle only. The UL 521 test rating
for the fixed temperature portion shall be 135 degrees F. The UL 521 test
rating for the Rate-of-Rise detectors shall be rated for 50 by 50 feet.
2.11.2 Heat Sensing
A moving average of the sensors heat sensing value to automatically

compensate for conditions that could affect detection operations. System
shall automatically maintain a constant heat sensing sensitivity from each
sensor by compensating for environmental factors.
2.11.3 Self-Test Routines
Automatic self-test routines shall be performed on each sensor that will

functionally check sensor sensitivity electronics and ensure the accuracy
of the value being transmitted. Any sensor that fails this test shall
indicate a trouble condition with the sensor location at the control panel.
2.11.4 Operator Access
An operator at the control panel, having the proper access level, shall
have the capability to manually access the following information for each
heat sensor:
a. Primary status
b. Device type
c. Present average value
2.11.5 Operator Control
An operator at the control panel, having the proper access level, shall
have the capability to manually control the following information for each
heat sensor:
a. Alarm detection sensitivity values
b. Enable or disable the point/device
c. Control sensors relay driver output
2.12 ELECTRIC POWER
2.12.1 Primary Power
Power shall be 120 VAC service for the FACP from the normal AC service to
the building.
2.13 EMERGENCY POWER SUPPLY
Provide for system operation in the event of primary power source failure.
Transfer from normal to auxiliary (secondary) power or restoration from
auxiliary to normal power shall be automatic and shall not cause
transmission of a false alarm.
2.13.1 Batteries
Provide sealed, maintenance-free, lead-calcium batteries as the source for

emergency power to the FACP. Batteries shall contain suspended
electrolyte. The battery system shall be maintained in a fully charged
condition by means of a solid state battery charger. Provide an automatic
transfer switch to transfer the load to the batteries in the event of the
failure of primary power.
2.13.1.1 Capacity
Provide the batteries with sufficient capacity to operate the system under
supervisory and trouble conditions, including audible trouble signal
devices for 72 hours and audible and visual signal devices under alarm
conditions for an additional 15 minutes.
2.13.1.2 Battery Power Calculations
a. Verify that battery capacity exceeds supervisory and alarm power

requirements.
1). Substantiate the battery calculations for alarm, alert, and

supervisory power requirements. Ampere-hour requirements for each
system component and each panel component, and the
battery-recharging period shall be included.
2). Provide complete battery calculations for both the alarm,

alert, and supervisory power requirements. Ampere-hour
requirements for each system component shall be submitted with the
calculations.
3). A voltage drop calculation to indicate that sufficient

voltage is available for proper operation of the system and all
components, at the minimum rated voltage of the system operating
on batteries.
b. For battery calculations use the following assumptions: Assume a

starting voltage of 24 VDC for starting the calculations to size the
batteries. Calculate the required Amp-Hours for the specified standby
time, and then calculate the required Amp-Hours for the specified alarm
time. Calculate the nominal battery voltage after operation on
batteries for the specified time period. Using this voltage perform a
voltage drop calculation for circuit containing device and/or
appliances remote from the power sources.
2.13.2 Battery Chargers
Provide a solid state, fully automatic, variable charging rate battery

charger. The charger shall be capable of providing 150 percent of the
connected system load and shall maintain the batteries at full charge. In
the event the batteries are fully discharged (18 Volts dc), the charger
shall recharge the batteries back to 95 percent of full charge within 48
hours. Provide pilot light to indicate when batteries are manually placed
on a high rate of charge as part of the unit assembly if a high rate switch
is provided.
2.14 FIRE ALARM AND MASS NOTIFICATION CONTROL PANEL (FACP/FMCP)
Provide a complete control panel fully enclosed in a lockable steel

enclosure as specified herein. Operations required for testing or for
normal care and maintenance of the systems shall be performed from the
front of the enclosure. If more than a single unit is required at a
location to form a complete control panel, the unit enclosures shall match
exactly.
a. Each control unit shall provide power, supervision, control, and

logic for the entire system, utilizing solid state, modular components,
internally mounted and arranged for easy access. Each control unit
shall be suitable for operation on a 120 volt, 60 hertz, normal
building power supply. Provide each panel with supervisory functions
for power failure, internal component placement, and operation.
b. Visual indication of alarm, supervisory, or trouble initiation on

the fire alarm control panel shall be by liquid crystal display or
similar means with a minimum of 80 characters, that at least 32 are
field changeable. The MNS Control panel shall have the capability of
temporarily deactivate the fire alarm audible notification appliances
while delivering voice messages. Provide conductor integrity
monitoring for strobe, display, temporary deactivation of fire alarm
audible notification appliances and speaker wiring.
c. Provide secure operator console for initiating recorded messages,

strobes and displays; and for delivering live voice messages. Provide
capacity for at least eight pre-recorded messages. Provide the ability
to automatically repeat pre-recorded messages. Provide a secure
microphone for delivering live messages. Provide adequate discrete
outputs to temporarily deactivate fire alarm audible notification, and
initiate/synchronize strobes. Provide a complete set of
self-diagnostics for controller and appliance network. Provide local
diagnostic information display and local diagnostic information and
system event log file.
2.14.1 Cabinet
Install control panel components in cabinets large enough to accommodate

all components and also to allow ample gutter space for interconnection of
panels as well as field wiring. The enclosure shall be identified by an
engraved laminated phenolic resin nameplate. Lettering on the nameplate
shall say "Fire Alarm and Mass Notification Control Panel" and shall not be
less than one inch high. Provide prominent rigid plastic or metal
identification plates for lamps, circuits, meters, fuses, and switches.
The cabinet shall be provided in a sturdy steel housing, complete with back
box, hinged steel door with cylinder lock, and surface mounting provisions.
2.14.2 Control Modules
Provide power and control modules to perform all functions of the FACP.
Provide audible signals to indicate any alarm, supervisory, or trouble
condition. The alarm signals shall be different from the trouble signal.
Connect circuit conductors entering or leaving the panel to screw-type
terminals with each terminal marked for identification. Locate diodes and
relays, if any, on screw terminals in the FACP. Circuits operating at 24
VDC shall not operate at less than 21.6 volts. Circuits operating at any
other voltage shall not have a voltage drop exceeding 10 percent of nominal
voltage.
2.14.3 Silencing Switches
a. Alarm Silencing Switch: Provide an alarm silencing switch at the

FACP that shall silence the audible signal but not affect the visual
alarm indicator. This switch shall be overridden upon activation of a
subsequent alarm.
b. Supervisory/Trouble Silencing Switch: Provide supervisory and

trouble silencing switch that shall silence the audible trouble and
supervisory signal, but not extinguish the visual indicator. This
switch shall be overridden upon activation of a subsequent alarm,
supervision, or trouble condition. Audible trouble indication must
resound automatically every 24 hours after the silencing feature has
been operated.
2.14.4 Non-Interfering
Power and supervise each circuit such that a signal from one device does
not prevent the receipt of signals from any other device. Circuits shall
be manually reset by switch from the FACP after the initiating device or
devices have been restored to normal.
2.14.5 Voice Notification System
The Voice Notification System shall comply with the requirements of NFPA 72
for Emergency Voice/Alarm Communications System requirements ISO 7240-16,
IEC 60268-16, except as specified herein. The system shall be a two-way
multi-channel voice notification system incorporating user selectability of
a minimum 8 distinct sounds for tone signaling, and the incorporation of a
voice module for delivery of prerecorded messages. Textual audible
appliances shall produce a slow whoop tone for three cycles followed by a
voice message that is repeated until the control panel is reset or
silenced. Automatic messages shall be broadcast through speakers on
appropriate floors, but not in stairs or elevator cabs. The visual strobes
and audible message shall automatically be broadcast on the floor of fire
alarm origin, two floors immediately above the floor of fire alarm origin,
and the floor immediately below the floor of fire alarm origin. A live
voice message shall override the automatic audible output through use of a
microphone input at the control panel.
a. When using the microphone, live messages shall be broadcast through
speakers in stairs, in elevator cabs, and throughout a selected floor

or floors. The system shall be capable of operating all speakers at
the same time. The Voice Notification System shall support Public
Address (PA) paging for the facility. The digitalized voice message
shall consist of a non-volatile (EPROM) microprocessor based input to
the amplifiers. The microprocessor shall actively interrogate
circuitry, field wiring, and digital coding necessary for the immediate
and accurate rebroadcasting of the stored voice data into the
appropriate amplifier input. Loss of operating power, supervisory
power, or any other malfunction that could render the digitalized voice
module inoperative shall automatically cause the slow whoop tone to
take over all functions assigned to the failed unit.
b. The Mass Notification functions shall override the manual or

automatic fire alarm notification or Public Address (PA) functions.
The system shall have the capability of utilizing a remote microphone
station with redundant controls of the notification system control
panel. Class "A" Notification Appliance Circuits (NAC) shall be
provided for the activation of strobe appliances. The activation of
the NAC Circuits shall follow the operation of the speaker NAC
circuits. Audio output shall be selectable for line level (600 ohms),
25, 70.7 or 100 volt output. The audio amplifier outputs shall be not
greater than 100 watts RMS output. The strobe NAC Circuits shall
provide at least 2 amps of 24 VDC power to operate strobes and have the
ability to synchronize all strobes. A hand held microphone shall be
provided and, upon activation, shall take priority over any tone
signal, recorded message or PA microphone operation in progress, while
maintaining the strobe NAC Circuits activation.
All outputs and operational modules shall be fully supervised with on-board
diagnostics and trouble reporting circuits. Form "C" contacts shall be
provided for system alarm and trouble conditions. Circuits shall be
provided for operation of auxiliary appliance during trouble conditions.
During a Mass Notification event the panel shall not generate nor cause any
trouble alarms to be generated with the Fire Alarm system. The Control
Panel for the Voice Notification System shall be independent of the Fire
alarm system and shall be capable of autonomous operation. The system
shall be housed in a separate panel that contains an independent power
supply and batteries, as specified above. Mass Notification functions
shall take precedence over all other function performed by the Voice
Notification System. Messages shall utilize a female voice and shall be
similar to the following:
1) 1000 Hz tones (1 sec on, 1/2 second off, 1 second on, 1/2 second
off, 1 second on)
"Attention, Your attention please. The fire alarm in the building

has been activated. Cease operations immediately. Proceed to the
nearest exit and leave the building. Do not use the elevator".
(Provide a 2 second pause.) "May I have your attention, please,
(repeat the message three times)."
off, 1 second on)
"Attention, Your attention please. This is a tornado warning.

Please seek shelter in an interior room and stay out of hallways
and away from exterior windows". (Provide a 2 second pause.)
"May I have your attention please, (repeat the message three

times)."
off, 1 second on)
"Attention, Your attention please. The National Weather Service

has issued a severe thunderstorm warning for our area." (repeat
message three times)
off, 1 second on)
"Attention, attention. A bomb threat alert has been issued for

this building. All personnel are to evacuate immediately using the
nearest exit. Further instructions will be issued outside the
building by emergency response teams". (repeat message three times)
off, 1 second on)
"Attention, Your attention please. A hazardous material danger

exists in the area. Remain in the building. Please keep all doors
and windows closed. Please wait for further instructions from
Emergency services". (repeat message three times).
off, 1 second on)
"May I have your attention, please. All clear. The emergency has
ended". (repeat message three times).
off, 1 second on)
"Attention, your attention please. This is a test of the emergency

audio system". (repeat message three times)
off, 1 second on)
"Attention, Your attention please. An active shooter danger exists

in the area. Remain in the building and proceed to a room that all
doors and windows can be locked. Lie flat on the floor so no one
is visible from outside the room. Call 9-1-1 to report your
location. Do not respond to any voice commands until you can
verify they are from Emergency services." (repeat message three
times).
c. The Remote Microphone station shall incorporate a Push-To-Talk

(PTT) microphone, redundant controls and system status indicators
of/for the system. The unit shall incorporate microphone override of
any tone generation or prerecorded messages. The unit shall be fully
supervised from the control panel. .
d. Auxiliary Input Module shall be designed to be an outboard

expansion module to either expand the number of optional remote
microphone stations, or allow a telephone interface.
e. Remote Microphone station (PA) shall incorporate a Push-To-Talk

(PTT) microphone, and controls to allow Public Address paging in the
facility. The Public Address paging function shall not override any
alarm or notification functions. The microphone shall be handheld
style.
2.14.6 Memory
Provide each control unit with non-volatile memory and logic for all
functions. The use of long life batteries, capacitors, or other
age-dependent devices shall not be considered as equal to non-volatile
processors, PROMS, or EPROMS.
2.14.7 Field Programmability
Provide control units and control panels that are fully field programmable
for control, initiation, notification, supervisory, and trouble functions
of both input and output. The system program configuration shall be menu
driven. System changes shall be password protected and shall be
accomplished using personal computer based equipment.
2.14.8 Input/Output Modifications
The FACP shall contain features that allow the bypassing of input devices
from the system or the modification of system outputs. These control
features shall consist of a panel mounted keypad. Any bypass or
modification to the system shall indicate a trouble condition on the FACP,
VDU and a printed output of the trouble condition.
2.14.9 Resetting
Provide the necessary controls to prevent the resetting of any alarm,

supervisory, or trouble signal while the alarm, supervisory or trouble
condition on the system still exists.
2.14.10 Instructions
Provide a typeset printed or typewritten instruction card mounted behind a

Lexan plastic or glass cover in a stainless steel or aluminum frame.
Install the instructions on the interior of the FACP. The card shall show
those steps to be taken by an operator when a signal is received as well as
the functional operation of the system under all conditions, normal, alarm,
supervisory, and trouble. The instructions shall be approved by the
Contracting Officer before being posted.
2.14.11 Walk Test
The FACP shall have a walk test feature. When using this feature,
operation of initiating devices shall result in limited system outputs, so
that the notification appliances operate for only a few seconds and the
event is indicated on the system printer, but no other outputs occur.
2.14.12 History Logging
In addition to the required printer output, the control panel shall have
the ability to store a minimum of 400 events in a log. These events shall
be stored in a battery-protected memory and shall remain in the memory
until the memory is downloaded or cleared manually. Resetting of the
control panel shall not clear the memory.
2.14.13 RS-232-C Output
Each local control panel shall be capable of operating remote service type
cathode ray tubes (CRTs), printers, and/or modems. The output shall be
paralleled ASCII from an EIA RS-232-C connection with a baud rate of 1200
or 2400 to allow use of any commonly available CRT, printer, or modem.
2.15 REMOTE FIRE ALARM CONTROL UNITS
Provide complete remote control units fully enclosed in a lockable steel

enclosure as specified herein. Operations required for testing or for
normal care and maintenance of the control units shall be performed from
the front of the enclosure. If more than a single unit is required at a
location to form a complete control panel, the unit enclosures shall match
exactly. Each control unit shall provide power, supervision, control, and
logic for its portion of the entire system, utilizing solid state, modular
components, internally mounted and arranged for easy access. Each control
unit shall be suitable for operation on a 120 volt, 60 hertz, normal
building power supply. Provide each unit with supervisory functions for
power failure, internal component placement, and operation.
2.15.1 Cabinet
Install remote control unit components in cabinets large enough to

accommodate components and also to allow ample gutter space for
interconnection of units as well as field wiring. The enclosure shall be
identified by an engraved laminated phenolic resin nameplate. Lettering on
the nameplate shall be labeled "Remote Fire Alarm Control Unit" and shall
not be less than one inch high. Provide prominent rigid plastic or metal
identification plates for lamps, circuits, meters, fuses, and switches.
The cabinet shall be provided in a sturdy steel housing, complete with back
box, hinged steel door with cylinder lock, and surface mounting provisions.
2.15.2 Control Modules
Provide power and control modules to perform all functions of the remote
control unit. Provide audible signals to indicate any alarm or trouble
condition. The alarm signals shall be different from the trouble signal.
Connect circuit conductors entering or leaving the panel to screw-type
terminals with each terminal marked for identification. Locate diodes and
relays, if any, on screw terminals in the remote control unit. Circuits
operating at 24 VDC shall not operate at less than 21.6 volts. Circuits
operating at any other voltage shall not have a voltage drop exceeding 10
percent of nominal voltage. Circuits shall be arranged so that there is 25
percent spare capacity for any circuit.
2.15.3 Silencing Switches
Provide an alarm silencing switch at the remote control unit that shall
silence the audible signal but not affect the visual alarm indicator. This
switch shall be overridden upon activation of a subsequent alarm. Provide
trouble and supervisory silencing switch that shall silence the audible
trouble and supervisory signal, but not extinguish the visual indicator.
This switch shall be overridden upon activation of a subsequent trouble or
supervisory signal. Audible trouble indication must resound automatically
every 24 hours after the silencing feature has been operated.
2.15.4 Non-Interfering
Power and supervise each circuit such that a signal from one device does
not prevent the receipt of signals from any other device. Circuits shall
be manually resettable by switch from the remote control unit after the
initiating device or devices have been restored to normal.
2.15.5 Memory
Provide each control unit with non-volatile memory and logic for all
functions. The use of long life batteries, capacitors, or other
age-dependent devices shall not be considered as equal to non-volatile
processors, PROMS, or EPROMS.
2.15.6 Field Programmability
Provide control units that are fully field programmable for control,
initiating, supervisory, and trouble functions of both input and output.
The system program configuration shall be menu driven. System changes
shall be password protected and shall be accomplished using personal
computer based equipment.
2.15.7 Input/Output Modifications
Each remote control unit shall contain features that allow the elimination
of input devices from the system or the modification of system outputs.
Any such modifications shall indicate a trouble condition on the remote
control unit, the FACP, and a printed output of the trouble condition.
2.15.8 Resetting
Provide the necessary controls to prevent the resetting of any alarm,

supervisory, or trouble signal while the alarm, supervisory, or trouble
condition on the system still exists.
2.15.9 Instructions
Provide a typeset printed or typewritten instruction card mounted behind a

Lexan plastic or glass cover in a stainless steel or aluminum frame.
Install the frame in a conspicuous location observable from the remote fire
alarm control unit. Install the frame in a conspicuous location observable
from the remote fire alarm control unit. The card shall show those steps
to be taken by an operator when a signal is received as well as the
functional operation of the system under all conditions, normal, alarm,
supervisory, and trouble. The instructions shall be approved by the
Contracting Officer before being posted.
2.15.10 Walk Test
Each remote control unit shall have a walk test feature. When using this
feature, operation of initiating devices shall result in limited system
outputs, so that the notification appliances operate for only a few seconds
and the event is indicated on the system printer, but no other outputs
occur.
2.15.11 History Logging
In addition to the required printer output, the control panel shall have
the ability to store a minimum of 400 events in a log. These events shall
be stored in a battery-protected memory and shall remain in the memory

until the memory is downloaded or cleared manually. Resetting of the
control panel shall not clear the memory.
2.16 AMPLIFIERS, PREAMPLIFIERS, TONE GENERATORS
Any amplifiers, preamplifiers, tone generators, digitalized voice generators,

and other hardware necessary for a complete, operational, textual audible
circuit conforming to NFPA 72 shall be housed in a fire alarm control unit,
terminal cabinet, or in the fire alarm control panel. The system shall
automatically operate and control all building fire alarm speakers except
those installed in the stairs and within elevator cabs. The speakers in
the stairs and elevator cabs shall operate only when the microphone is used
to deliver live messages. Each amplifier shall be single output channel.
2.16.1 Construction
Amplifiers shall utilize computer grade solid state components and shall be
provided with output protection devices sufficient to protect the amplifier
against any transient up to 10 times the highest rated voltage in the
system.
2.16.2 Inputs
Each system shall be equipped with separate inputs from the tone generator,
digitalized voice driver and panel mounted microphone. Microphone inputs
shall be of the low impedance, balanced line type. Both microphone and
tone generator input shall be operational on any amplifier.
2.16.3 Tone Generator
The tone generator shall be of the modular, plug-in type with securely
attached labels to identify the component as a tone generator and to
identify the specific tone it produces. The tone generator shall produce a
slow whoop tone, that shall slowly ascend from low (500 hertz) to high
(1200 hertz), and shall be constantly repeated until interrupted by either
the digitalized voice message, the microphone input, or the alarm silence
mode as specified. Each slow whoop cycle shall last approximately 4
seconds. The tone generator shall be single channel with an automatic
backup generator per channel such that failure of the primary tone
generator causes the backup generator to automatically take over the
functions of the failed unit and also causes transfer of the common trouble
relay.
2.16.4 Protection Circuits
Each amplifier shall be constantly supervised for any condition that could
render the amplifier inoperable at its maximum output. Failure of any
component shall cause automatic transfer to a designated backup amplifier,
illumination of a visual "amplifier trouble" indicator on the control
panel, appropriate logging of the condition on the system printer, and
other actions for trouble conditions as specified.
2.17 MANUAL STATIONS
Provide metal or plastic, semi-flush mounted, double action, addressable

manual stations, that are not subject to operation by jarring or
vibration. Provide pull station covers on all pull stations. Stations
shall be equipped with screw terminals for each conductor. Stations that
require the replacement of any portion of the device after activation are
not permitted. Stations shall be finished in fire-engine red with molded
raised lettering operating instructions of contrasting color. The use of a
key or wrench shall be required to reset the station. Manual stations
shall be mounted at 48 inches. Stations shall have a separate screw
terminal for each conductor.
2.18 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES
2.18.1 Fire Alarm/Mass Notification Speakers
Audible appliances shall conform to the applicable requirements of UL 464.

Appliances shall be connected into notification appliance circuits.
Audible appliances shall generate a unique audible sound from other devices
provided in the building and surrounding area. Surface mounted audible
appliances shall be painted white. Recessed audible appliances shall be
installed with a grill that is painted white.
a. Speakers shall conform to the applicable requirements of UL 1480.

Speakers shall have six different sound output levels and operate with
audio line input levels of 100 Vac, 70 Vac, 7 Vac, and 25 Vac, by means
of selectable tap settings. Tap settings shall include taps of 1/4,
1/2, 1, 2, and 8 watt. Speakers shall incorporate a high efficiency
speaker for maximum output at minimum power across a frequency range of
400Hz to 4000Hz, and shall have a sealed back construction. Speakers
shall be capable of installation on standard 4 inch square electrical
boxes. Where speakers and strobes are provided in the same location,
they may be combined into a single wall mounted unit. All inputs shall
be polarized for compatibility with standard reverse polarity
supervision of circuit wiring via the Fire Alarm Control Panel.
b. Provide speaker mounting plates constructed of cold rolled steel

having a minimum thickness of 16 gauge and equipped with mounting holes
and other openings as needed for a complete installation. Fabrication
marks and holes shall be ground and finished to provide a smooth and
neat appearance for each plate. Each plate shall be primed and painted.
2.18.2 Visual Notification Appliances
Visual notification appliances shall conform to the applicable requirements

of UL 1971 and conform to the Americans With Disabilities Act (ADA).
Colored lens such as amber, the notifications appliances shall comply with
UL 1638. The manufacturer shall have the color lens tests to the full
UL 1971 polar plotting criteria, voltage drop, and temperature rise as
stated in 1971. Fire Alarm Notification Appliances shall have clear high
intensity optic lens, xenon flash tubes, and output white light and be
marked "Fire" in red letters. Mass Notification Appliances shall have amber
high intensity optic lens, xenon flash tubes, and output white light and
be marked "ALERT" in red letters. The light pattern shall be disbursed so
that it is visible above and below the strobe and from a 90 degree angle on
both sides of the strobe. Strobe flash rate shall be 1 flash per second
and a minimum candela as indicated on the drawings (actual output after
derating for tinted lens) based on the UL 1971 test. Strobe shall be
semi-flush mounted. Where more than two appliances are located in the same
room or corridor, provide synchronized operation.
2.18.3 Fire Alarm Horns
Provide semi-flush mounted electronic multi-tone horns that produce a
minimum of four distinct sounds, suitable for use in an electrically

supervised circuit. Horns shall have a rating of 90 dBA at 10 feet when
tested in accordance with UL 464 while emitting a slow whoop tone. Output
from the horn shall be three-pulse temporal pattern. Where horns and
strobes are provided in the same location, they may be combined into a
single unit. Horns used in exterior locations shall be specifically listed
or approved for outdoor use and be provided with metal housing and
protective grilles.
2.18.4 Connections
Provide screw terminals for each notification appliance. Terminals shall

be designed to accept the size conductors used in this project without
modification.
2.19 ENVIRONMENTAL ENCLOSURES OR GUARDS
Environmental enclosures shall be provided to permit Fire Alarm or Mass

Notification components to be used in areas that exceed the environmental
limits of the listing. The enclosure shall be listed for the device or
appliance as either a manufactured part number or as a listed compatible
accessory for the UL category that the component is currently listed.
Guards required to deter mechanical damage shall be either a listed
manufactured part or a listed accessory for the category of the initiating
device or notification appliance.
2.20 VALVE MONITOR SWITCHES (TAMPER SWITCHES)
Provide a tamper switch for each fire protection system control valve.
Tamper switches shall be UL listed as "Extinguishing System Attachment" for
the location and type of valve supervised. The device shall contain double
pole, double throw contacts. Operation of the switch shall cause a
supervisory signal to be transmitted to the FACP upon not more than two
complete turns of the valve wheel or a closure of 10 percent, whichever is
less. Tamper switches shall be equipped with screw terminals for each
conductor.
2.21 WATERFLOW DETECTORS
a. Provide vane type waterflow detectors for wet pipe sprinkler

systems. The device shall contain double pole, double throw contacts.
Equip the detector with a pneumatic time delay, field adjustable from 0
to 90 seconds. The time delay shall be set initially to 30seconds.
The device shall be a UL listed extinguishing system attachment rated
for the particular pressure and location that it is installed. Flow
switches shall be equipped with screw terminals for each conductor.
b. Provide pressure type waterflow detectors for dry pipe sprinkler

systems, pre-action, and deluge systems. Switch shall be equipped with
equiped to provide a time delay from 0 to 90 second. The device shall
contain double pole, double throw contacts. The device shall be a UL
listed extinguishing system attachment rated for the particular
pressure and location that it is installed. Switch shall be equipped
with screw terminals for each conductor.
2.22 ELECTROMAGNETIC DOOR HOLDERS
Where indicated on the drawings, provide magnetic fire door hold open
devices. The electromagnetic holding devices shall be designed to operate
on 24 VDC, and require not more than 3 watts of power to develop 25 psi of
holding force. Under normal conditions, the magnets shall attract and hold
the doors open. The initiation of any fire alarm shall cause the release
of the electromagnetic door holding device permitting the door to be closed
by the door closer. Operation shall be fail safe with no moving parts.
Electromagnetic door hold-open devices shall not be required to be held
open during building power failure. The device shall be UL listed based on
UL 228 tests.
2.23 INTERFACE TO THE BASE WIDE MASS NOTIFICATION NETWORK
2.23.1 Radio
The radio transceiver shall be bi-direction and meet all the requirements
of paragraph, RADIO TRANSMITTER AND INTERFACE PANELS as specified in this
Specification Section. The transceiver utilized in the Mass Notification
System shall be capable of the following:
a. Communication with the Central Control/Monitoring System to provide

supervision of communication link and status changes are reported by
automatic and manual poll/reply/acknowledge routines.
b. All monitored points/status changes are transmitted immediately and

at programmed intervals until acknowledged by the Central
Control/Monitoring System.
c. Each transceiver shall transmits a unique identity code as part of

all messages; the code is set by the user at the transceiver.
2.23.1.1 Radio Frequency Communications
Use of radio frequency-type communications systems shall comply with

National Telecommunications and Information Administration (NTIA)
requirements.
2.23.1.2 Licensed Radio Frequency Systems
An approved DD Form 1494 for the system is required prior to operation.
2.24 AUTOMATIC FIRE TRANSMITTERS
2.24.1 Radio Transmitter and Interface Panels
Transmitters shall be compatible with proprietary supervising station

receiving equipment. Each radio alarm transmitter shall be the
manufacturer's recognized commercial product, completely assembled, wired,
factory tested, and delivered ready for installation and operation.
Transmitters shall be provided in accordance with applicable portions of
NFPA 72, Federal Communications Commission (FCC) 47 CFR 90 and Federal
Communications Commission (FCC) 47 CFR 15. Transmitter electronics module
shall be contained within the physical housing as an integral, removable
assembly. The proprietary supervising station receiving equipment is Monaco
and the transceiver shall be fully compatible with this equipment. At the
contractors option, and if UL or FM listed, the transmitter may be housed
in the same panel as the fire alarm control panel. The transmitter shall
be Narrowband radio, with FCC certification for narrowband operation and
meets the requirements of the NTIA (National Telecommunications and
Information Administration) Manual of Regulations and Procedures for
Federal Frequency Management.
a. Operation: Each transmitter shall operate from 120-volt ac power.

In the event of 120-volt ac power loss, the transmitter shall
automatically switch to battery operation. Switchover shall be
accomplished with no interruption of protective service, and shall
automatically transmit a trouble message. Upon restoration of ac
power, transfer back to normal ac power supply shall also be automatic.
b. Battery Power: Transmitter standby battery capacity shall provide

sufficient power to operate the transmitter in a normal standby status
for a minimum of 72 hours and be capable of transmitting alarms during
that period.
c. Transmitter housing shall be NEMA Type 1. The housing shall

contain a lock that is keyed identical to the fire alarm system for the
building. Radio alarm transmitter housing shall be factory painted
with a suitable priming coat and not less than two coats of a hard,
durable weatherproof enamel.
d. Antenna shall be omnidirectional, coaxial, halfwave dipole antennas

for radio alarm transmitters with a driving point impedance to match
transmitter output. The antenna and antenna mounts shall be corrosion
resistant and designed to withstand wind velocities of 161 km/h. 100
mph. Antennas shall not be mounted to any portion of the building
roofing system. Protect the antenna from physical damage.
2.24.2 Signals to Be Transmitted to the Base Receiving Station
The following signals shall be sent to the base receiving station:
a. Sprinkler water flow
b. Manual pull stations
c. Smoke detectors
d. Duct smoke detectors
e. Sleeping room smoke detectors
f. Heat detectors
g. Fire Extinguishing System
h. Sprinkler valve supervision
i. Fire pump running
j. Fire pump supervision
k. Water supply level and temperature
l. Combustion Engine Drive Fire Pump Running
(1) Selector Switch in position than automatic
(2) Engine Over-speed
(3) Low Fuel
(4) Low Battery
(5) Engine Trouble (Low Oil, Over temp, etc)
2.25 WIRING
Provide wiring materials under this section as specified in Section 26 20 00

INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM with the additions and modifications
specified herein.
2.25.1 Alarm Wiring
The SLC wiring shall be fiber optic or copper cable in accordance with the
manufacturers requirements. Copper signaling line circuits and initiating
device circuit field wiring shall be No. 14 AWG size conductors at a
minimum. Notification appliance circuit conductors, that contain audible
alarm devices, other than speakers, shall be solid copper No. 14 AWG size
conductors at a minimum. Speaker circuits shall be copper No. 16 AWG size
conductors at a minimum. Wire size shall be sufficient to prevent voltage
drop problems. Circuits operating at 24 VDC shall not operate at less than
21.6 volts. Circuits operating at any other voltage shall not have a
voltage drop exceeding 10 percent of nominal voltage. Power wiring,
operating at 120 VAC minimum, shall be a minimum No. 12 AWG solid copper
having similar insulation.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION OF FIRE ALARM INITIATING AND INDICATING DEVICES
a. FACP/FMCP: Locate the FACP/FMCP where indicated on the drawings.

Surface mount the enclosure with the top of the cabinet 6 feet above
the finished floor or center the cabinet at 5 feet, whichever is
lower. Conductor terminations shall be labeled and a drawing
containing conductors, their labels, their circuits, and their
interconnection shall be permanently mounted in the FACP.
b. Manual Stations: Locate manual stations as required by NFPA 101

IEC 60268, Part 16, and ASA S3.2 and NFPA 72where shown on the drawings.
Mount stations so that their operating handles are 4 feet above the
finished floor. Mount stations so they are located no farther than 5
feet from the exit door they serve, measured horizontally.
c. Notification Appliance Devices: Locate notification appliance

devices as required by NFPA 72 and where shown on the drawings. Mount
assemblies on walls 90 inches above the finished floor or 6 inches
below the ceiling whichever is lower. Ceiling mounted speakers shall
conform to NFPA 72.
d. Smoke and Heat Sensors: Locate sensors as required by NFPA 72 and

their listings and as shown on the drawings on a 4 inch mounting box.
Sensors located on the ceiling shall be installed not less than 4 inches
from a side wall to the near edge. Those located on the wall shall
have the top of the sensor at least 4 inches below the ceiling, but not
more than 12 inches below the ceiling. In raised floor spaces, the
smoke sensors shall be installed to protect 225 square feet per
sensor. Install smoke sensors no closer than 5 feet from air handling
supply outlets.
e. Water Flow Detectors and Tamper Switches: Locate water flow

detectors and tamper switches where shown on the drawings and at each
supervised.
f. The modification of any fire alarm system and the procedures shall
comply with the requirements of NFPA 241.
3.2 SYSTEM FIELD WIRING
3.2.1 Wiring within Cabinets, Enclosures, and Boxes
Provide wiring installed in a neat and workmanlike manner and installed

parallel with or at right angles to the sides and back of any box,
enclosure, or cabinet. Conductors that are terminated, spliced, or
otherwise interrupted in any enclosure, cabinet, mounting, or junction box
shall be connected to terminal blocks. Mark each terminal in accordance
with the wiring diagrams of the system. Make connections with approved
pressure type terminal blocks, that are securely mounted. The use of wire
nuts or similar devices shall be prohibited. Wiring shall conform to
NFPA 70.
3.2.2 Terminal Cabinets
Provide a terminal cabinet at the base of any circuit riser, on each floor
at each riser, and where indicated on the drawings. Terminal size shall be
appropriate for the size of the wiring to be connected. Conductor
terminations shall be labeled and a drawing containing conductors, their
labels, their circuits, and their interconnection shall be permanently
mounted in the terminal cabinet. Minimum size is 8 inches by 8 inches.
3.2.3 Alarm Wiring
Provide all wiring in rigid metal conduit or intermediate metal conduit.

Voltages shall not be mixed in any junction box, housing, or device, except
those containing power supplies and control relays. Electrical metallic
tubing conduit is acceptable in dry locations not enclosed in concrete or
where not subject to mechanical damage. Conceal conduit in finished areas
of new construction and wherever practicable in existing construction. The
use of flexible conduit not exceeding a 6 foot length shall be permitted in
initiating device circuits. Run conduit or tubing concealed unless
specifically shown otherwise on the drawings. Shielded wiring shall be
utilized where recommended by the manufacturer. For shielded wiring, the
shield shall be grounded at only one point, that shall be in or adjacent to
the FACP. Pigtail or T-tap connections to signal line circuits, initiating
device circuits, supervisory alarm circuits, and notification appliance
circuits are prohibited. Color coding is required for circuits and shall
be maintained throughout the circuit. Conductors used for the same
functions shall be similarly color coded. Wiring shall conform to NFPA 70.
3.2.4 Conductor Terminations
Labeling of conductors at terminal blocks in terminal cabinets, FACP, and

remote fire alarm control units shall be provided at each conductor
connection. Each conductor or cable shall have a shrink-wrap label to
provide a unique and specific designation. Each terminal cabinet, FACP,
and fire alarm control unit shall contain a laminated drawing that
indicates each conductor, its label, circuit, and terminal. The laminated
drawing shall be neat, using 12 point lettering minimum size, and mounted
within each cabinet, panel, or unit so that it does not interfere with the
wiring or terminals. Maintain existing color code scheme where connecting

to existing equipment.
3.3 CONNECTION OF NEW SYSTEM
The following new system connections shall be made during the last phase of
construction, at the beginning of the preliminary tests. New system
connections shall include:
a. Connection of new control modules to existing magnetically held

smoke door (hold-open) devices.
b. Connection of new elevator recall smoke sensors to existing wiring

and conduit.
c. Connection of new system transmitter to existing base fire

reporting system.
Once these connections are made, system shall be left energized and new
audio/visual devices deactivated. Report immediately to the Contracting
Officer, coordination and field problems resulting from the connection of
the above components.
3.4 FIRESTOPPING
Provide firestopping for holes at conduit penetrations through floor slabs,

fire rated walls, partitions with fire rated doors, corridor walls, and
vertical service shafts in accordance with Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING.
3.5 PAINTING
Paint junction boxes red and paint conduit with a red stripe at a minimum
of every 10 feet. Painting shall comply with Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND
COATINGS.
3.6.1 Testing Procedures
Detailed test procedures, prepared and signed by a Registered Professional

Engineer or a NICET Level 4 Fire Alarm Technician, and signed by
representative of the installing company, for the fire detection and alarm
system 60 days prior to performing system tests. Detailed test procedures
shall list all components of the installed system such as initiating
devices and circuits, notification appliances and circuits, signaling line
devices and circuits, control devices/equipment, batteries, transmitting
and receiving equipment, power sources/supply, annunciators, special hazard
equipment, emergency communication equipment, interface equipment, Guard's
Tour equipment, and transient (surge) suppressors. Test procedures shall
include sequence of testing, time estimate for each test, and sample test
data forms. The test data forms shall be in a check-off format (pass/fail
with space to add applicable test data) and shall be used for the
preliminary testing and the acceptance testing. The test data forms shall
record the test results and shall:
a. Identify the NFPA Class and Style of all Initiating Device Circuits
(IDC), Notification Appliance Circuits (NAC), Voice Notification
System, and Signaling Line Circuits (SLC).
b. Identify each test required by NFPA 72 Test Methods and required

test herein to be performed on each component, and describe how this
test shall be performed.
c. Identify each component and circuit as to type, location within the

facility, and unique identity within the installed system. Provide
necessary floor plan sheets showing each component location, test
location, and alphanumeric identity.
d. Identify all test equipment and personnel required to perform each

test (including equipment necessary for testing smoke detectors using
real smoke).
e. Provide space to identify the date and time of each test. Provide
space to identify the names and signatures of the individuals
conducting and witnessing each test.
3.6.2 Tests Stages
a. Preliminary Testing: Conduct preliminary tests to ensure that

devices and circuits are functioning properly. Tests shall meet the
requirements of paragraph entitled "Minimum System Tests." After
preliminary testing is complete, provide a letter certifying that the
installation is complete and fully operable. The letter shall state
that each initiating and indicating device was tested in place and
functioned properly. The letter shall also state that panel functions
were tested and operated properly. The letter shall include the names
and titles of the witnesses to the preliminary tests. The Contractor
and an authorized representative from each supplier of equipment shall
be in attendance at the preliminary testing to make necessary
adjustments.
b. Request for Formal Inspection and Tests: When tests have been
completed and corrections made, submit a signed, dated certificate with
a request for formal inspection and tests to the Contracting Offices
Designated Representative (COR).
c. Final Testing: Notify the Contracting Officer in writing when the

system is ready for final acceptance testing. Submit request for test
at least 15 calendar days prior to the test date. The tests shall be
performed in accordance with the approved test procedures in the
presence of the Contracting Officer. Furnish instruments and personnel
required for the tests. A final acceptance test will not be scheduled
until the operation and maintenance (O&M) manuals are furnished to the
Contracting Officer and the following are provided at the job site:
(1) The systems manufacturer's technical representative
(2) Marked-up red line drawings of the system as actually

installed
(3) Megger test results
(4) Loop resistance test results
(5) Complete program printout including input/output addresses
The final tests shall be witnessed by the Contracting Offices Designated

Representative (COR). At this time, any and all required tests shall be
repeated at their discretion. Following acceptance of the system, as-built

drawings and O&M manuals shall be delivered to the Contracting Officer for
review and acceptance.
3.6.3 Minimum System Tests
Test the system in accordance with the procedures outlined in NFPA 72,
ISO 7240-16, IEC 60268-16. The required tests are as follows:
a. Megger Tests: After wiring has been installed, and prior to making
any connections to panels or devices, wiring shall be megger tested for
insulation resistance, grounds, and/or shorts. Conductors with 300
volt rated insulation shall be tested at a minimum of 250 VDC.
Conductors with 600 volt rated insulation shall be tested at a minimum
of 500 VDC. The tests shall be witnessed by the Contracting Officer
and test results recorded for use at the final acceptance test.
b. Loop Resistance Tests: Measure and record the resistance of each

circuit with each pair of conductors in the circuit short-circuited at
the farthest point from the circuit origin. The tests shall be
witnessed by the Contracting Officer and test results recorded for use
at the final acceptance test.
c. Verify the absence of unwanted voltages between circuit conductors

and ground. The tests shall be accomplished at the preliminary test
with results available at the final system test.
d. Verify that the control unit is in the normal condition as detailed

in the manufacturer's O&M manual.
e. Test each initiating and indicating device and circuit for proper
operation and response at the control unit. Smoke sensors shall be
tested in accordance with manufacturer's recommended calibrated test
method. Use of magnets is prohibited. Testing of duct smoke detectors
shall comply with the requirements of NFPA 72.
f. Test the system for specified functions in accordance with the

contract drawings and specifications and the manufacturer's O&M manual.
g. Test both primary power and secondary power. Verify, by test, the
secondary power system is capable of operating the system for the time
period and in the manner specified.
h. Determine that the system is operable under trouble conditions as

specified.
i. Visually inspect wiring.
j. Test the battery charger and batteries.
k. Verify that software control and data files have been entered or
programmed into the FACP. Hard copy records of the software shall be
provided to the Contracting Officer.
l. Verify that red-line drawings are accurate.
m. Measure the current in circuits to ensure there is the calculated

spare capacity for the circuits.
n. Measure voltage readings for circuits to ensure that voltage drop

is not excessive.
o. Disconnect the verification feature for smoke sensors during tests

to minimize the amount of smoke needed to activate the sensor. Testing
of smoke sensors shall be conducted using real smoke. The use of
canned smoke is prohibited.
p. Measure the voltage drop at the most remote appliance (based on

wire length) on each notification appliance circuit.
q. Audibility Intelligibility testing of the Voice Evacuation

Notification System shall be accomplished iaw NFPA 72 for Voice
Evacuation Systems, IEC 60268-16, and ASA S3.2.
r. Opening the circuit at not less than all of alarm initiating

devices and notification appliances to test the wiring supervisory
feature.
s. Demonstrate modem communications with remote sites as specified by

the COR. Dial in capability shall also, be demonstrated, using
specified security.
t. Demonstrate fiber optic communications with remote sites as

specified by the COR. Dial in capability shall also, be demonstrated,
using specified security.
3.7 INSTRUCTION OF GOVERNMENT EMPLOYEES
Equipment manufacturer shall provide 1 days on site. Training shall allow

for classroom instruction as well as individual hands on programming,
troubleshooting and diagnostics exercises.
3.7.1 Instructor
Include in the project the services of an instructor, who has received

specific training from the manufacturer for the training of other persons
regarding the inspection, testing, and maintenance of the system provided.
The instructor shall train the Government employees designated by the
Contracting Officer, in the care, adjustment, maintenance, and operation of
the fire alarm and fire detection system. Each instructor shall be
thoroughly familiar with all parts of this installation. The instructor
shall be trained in operating theory as well as in practical O&M work.
3.7.2 Required Instruction Time
Provide 8 hours of instruction after final acceptance of the system. The

instruction shall be given during regular working hours on such dates and
times as are selected by the Contracting Officer. The instruction may be
divided into two or more periods at the discretion of the Contracting
Officer. The training shall allow for rescheduling for unforeseen
maintenance and/or fire department responses.
3.7.3 Technical Data and Computer Software
Provide, in manual format, lesson plans, operating instructions,

maintenance procedures, and training data for the training courses. The
operations training shall familiarize designated government personnel with
proper operation of the installed system. The maintenance training course
shall provide the designated government personnel adequate knowledge

required to diagnose, repair, maintain, and expand functions inherent to
the system.
SECTION 31 00 00
EARTHWORK
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

AWWA C600 (2010) Installation of Ductile-Iron Water

Mains and Their Appurtenances


Aggregates
ASTM D 1140 (2000; R 2006) Amount of Material in Soils

Finer than the No. 200 (75-micrometer)
Sieve
ASTM D 1556 (2007) Density and Unit Weight of Soil in

Place by the Sand-Cone Method
ASTM D 1557 (2009) Standard Test Methods for

Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of
Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000
ft-lbf/ft3) (2700 kN-m/m3)
ASTM D 2487 (2010) Soils for Engineering Purposes

(Unified Soil Classification System)
ASTM D 422 (1963; R 2007) Particle-Size Analysis of

Soils
ASTM D 4318 (2010) Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and

Plasticity Index of Soils
ASTM D 6938 (2010) Standard Test Method for In-Place

Density and Water Content of Soil and
Soil-Aggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow
Depth)
ASTM D 698 (2007e1) Laboratory Compaction

Characteristics of Soil Using Standard
Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/cu. ft. (600
kN-m/cu. m.))
1.2 DEFINITIONS
1.2.1 Satisfactory Materials
Satisfactory materials comprise any materials classified by ASTM D 2487 as

GW, GP, GM, GC, SW, SP, CL, and CH. and shall be free of trash debris,
roots or organic matter, or stones larger than 3 inches in any dimension.
1.2.2 Unsatisfactory Materials
Unsatisfactory materials include mMaterials classified in ASTM D 2487 as

Pt, OH, OL, ML, MH and any other materials not defined as satisfactory.
1.2.3 Cohesionless and Cohesive Materials
Cohesionless materials include materials classified in ASTM D 2487 as GW,

GP, SW, and SP. Cohesive materials include materials classified as GC, SC,
ML, CL, MH, and CH. Materials classified as GM and SM will be identified
as cohesionless only when the fines are nonplastic. Perform testing,
required for classifying materials, in accordance with ASTM D 4318,
ASTM C 136, ASTM D 422, and ASTM D 1140.
1.2.4 Degree of Compaction
Degree of compaction is a percentage of the maximum density obtained by the

test procedure presented in ASTM D 1557.
1.2.5 Topsoil
Material suitable for topsoils obtained from excavations is defined as:

Natural, friable soil representative of productive, well-drained soils in
the area, free of subsoil, stumps, rocks larger than one inch diameter,
brush, weeds, toxic substances, and other material detrimental to plant
growth. Amend topsoil pH range to obtain a pH of 5.5 to 7.
1.2.6 Hard/Unyielding Materials
Hard/Unyielding materials comprise weathered rock, dense consolidated

deposits, or conglomerate materials which are not included in the
definition of "rock" with stones greater than 1.5 inch in any dimension or
as defined by the pipe manufacturer, whichever is smaller. These materials
usually require the use of heavy excavation equipment, ripper teeth, or
jack hammers for removal.
1.2.7 Rock
Solid homogeneous interlocking crystalline material with firmly cemented,

laminated, or foliated masses or conglomerate deposits, neither of which
can be removed without systematic drilling and blasting, drilling and the
use of expansion jacks or feather wedges, or the use of backhoe-mounted
pneumatic hole punchers or rock breakers; also large boulders, buried
masonry, or concrete other than pavement exceeding 1/2 cubic yard in
volume. Removal of hard material will not be considered rock excavation
because of intermittent drilling and blasting that is performed merely to
increase production.
1.2.8 Unstable Material
Unstable materials are too wet to properly support the utility pipe,
conduit, or appurtenant structure.
1.2.9 Select Soils
Select soils shall include all Satisfactory soils except CH materials.

Select soils shall have a maximum liquid limit of 35 percent and a
plasticity index not less than 12 nor greater than 20 percent.
1.2.10 Select Clay Backfill
Select clay backfill shall be a satisfactory material having a liquid limit

of 35 percent or less, and a plasticity index of not less than 8 nor
greater that 20 when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4318, and classifying
as a CL in accordance with ASTM D 2487
1.2.11 Initial Backfill Material
Initial backfill consists of select soils, non-expansive, or satisfactory

materials free from rocks 1 inches or larger in any dimension or free from
rocks of such size as recommended by the pipe manufacturer, whichever is
smaller. When the pipe is coated or wrapped for corrosion protection, free
the initial backfill material of stones larger than 1 inches in any
dimension or as recommended by the pipe manufacturer, whichever is smaller.
1.2.12 Nonexpansive Soils
Nonexpansive soils for nonexpansive fill shall meet the requirements of

Louisiana Department of Transportation and Development Standard
Specifications for Roads and Bridges for "Sand Clay Gravel", Part X,
Section 1003.03(a). Satisfactory soils with a plasticity index not less
than 4 nor greater than 12 percent may be used as Nonexpansive soils.
1.2.13 Capillary Water Barrier
Capillary Water Barrier shall consist of clean, crushed, nonporous rock,

crushed rock, crushed gravel, or uncrushed gravel. The maximum particle
size shall be 1.5 inches and no more than 2 percent by weight shall pass
the No. 4 sieve.
Subsurface conditions encounted during the government geotechnical field

investgations are shown on the logs of borings presented in the drawings.
These data represent the best subsurface information available; however,
variations may exist in the subsurface between boring locations.
1.3.1 Dewatering Work Plan
Submit procedures for accomplishing dewatering work.
1.4 SUBMITTALS

Shoring; G
Dewatering Work Plan; G
Submit 15 days prior to starting work.
SD-03 Product Data
Utilization of Excavated Materials; G
Opening of any Excavation or Borrow Pit
Shoulder Construction
Procedure and location for disposal of unused satisfactory

material. Proposed source of borrow material. Notification of
encountering rock in the project. Advance notice on the opening
of excavation or borrow areas. Advance notice on shoulder
construction for rigid pavements.
SD-06 Test Reports
Testing
Borrow Site Testing
Within 24 hours of conclusion of physical tests, 2 copies of

test results, including calibration curves and results of
calibration tests. Results of testing at the borrow site.
SD-07 Certificates
Testing
Qualifications of the Corps validated commercial testing

laboratory or the Contractor's validated testing facilities.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 BURIED WARNING AND IDENTIFICATION TAPE
Provide polyethylene plastic and metallic core or metallic-faced, acid- and

alkali-resistant, polyethylene plastic warning tape manufactured
specifically for warning and identification of buried utility lines.
Provide tape on rolls, 3 inches minimum width, color coded as specified
below for the intended utility with warning and identification imprinted in
bold black letters continuously over the entire tape length. Warning and
identification to read, "CAUTION, BURIED (intended service) LINE BELOW" or
similar wording. Provide permanent color and printing, unaffected by
moisture or soil.
Warning Tape Color Codes
Red: Electric
Yellow: Gas, Oil; Dangerous Materials
Orange: Telephone and Other
Warning Tape Color Codes

Communications
Blue: Water Systems
Green: Sewer Systems
White: Steam Systems
Gray: Compressed Air
2.1.1 Warning Tape for Metallic Piping
Provide acid and alkali-resistant polyethylene plastic tape conforming to

the width, color, and printing requirements specified above, with a minimum
thickness of 0.003 inch and a minimum strength of 1500 psi lengthwise, and
1250 psi crosswise, with a maximum 350 percent elongation.
2.1.2 Detectable Warning Tape for Non-Metallic Piping
Provide polyethylene plastic tape conforming to the width, color, and

printing requirements specified above, with a minimum thickness of 0.004
inch, and a minimum strength of 1500 psi lengthwise and 1250 psi
crosswise. Manufacture tape with integral wires, foil backing, or other
means of enabling detection by a metal detector when tape is buried up to 3
feet deep. Encase metallic element of the tape in a protective jacket or
provide with other means of corrosion protection.
2.2 DETECTION WIRE FOR NON-METALLIC PIPING
Insulate a single strand, solid copper detection wire with a minimum of 12

AWG.
2.3 CAPILLARY WATER BARRIER
Provide capillary water barrier of clean, poorly graded crushed rock,

crushed gravel, or uncrushed gravel placed beneath a building slab with or
without a vapor barrier to cut off the capillary flow of pore water to the
area immediately below. Conform to ASTM C 33/C 33M for fine aggregate
grading with a maximum of 3 percent by weight passing ASTM D 1140, No. 200
sieve, 1-1/2 inch and no more than 2 percent by weight passing the No. 4
size sieve .
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 STRIPPING OF TOPSOIL
Where indicated or directed, strip topsoil to a depth of 4 inches. Spread

topsoil on areas already graded and prepared for topsoil, or transported
and deposited in stockpiles convenient to areas that are to receive
application of the topsoil later, or at locations indicated or specified.
Keep topsoil separate from other excavated materials, brush, litter,
objectionable weeds, roots, stones larger than 2 inches in diameter, and
other materials that would interfere with planting and maintenance
operations. Remove from the site any surplus of topsoil from excavations
and gradings.
3.2 GENERAL EXCAVATION
Perform excavation of every type of material encountered within the limits

of the project to the lines, grades, and elevations indicated and as
specified. Perform the grading in accordance with the typical sections
shown and the tolerances specified in paragraph FINISHING. Transport

satisfactory excavated materials and place in fill or embankment within the
limits of the work. Excavate unsatisfactory materials encountered within
the limits of the work below grade and replace with satisfactory materials
as directed. Include such excavated material and the satisfactory material
ordered as replacement in excavation. Dispose surplus satisfactory
excavated material not required for fill or embankment in areas approved
for surplus material storage or designated waste areas. Dispose
unsatisfactory excavated material in designated waste or spoil areas.
During construction, perform excavation and fill in a manner and sequence
that will provide proper drainage at all times. Excavate material required
for fill or embankment in excess of that produced by excavation within the
grading limits from the borrow areas indicated or from other approved areas
selected by the Contractor as specified.
3.2.1 Ditches, Gutters, and Channel Changes
Finish excavation of ditches, gutters, and channel changes by cutting

accurately to the cross sections, grades, and elevations shown on the
drawings. Do not excavate ditches and gutters below grades shown.
Backfill the excessive open ditch or gutter excavation with satisfactory,
thoroughly compacted, material or with suitable stone or cobble to grades
shown. Dispose excavated material as shown or as directed, except in no
case allow material be deposited a maximum 4 feet from edge of a ditch.
Maintain excavations free from detrimental quantities of leaves, brush,
sticks, trash, and other debris until final acceptance of the work.
3.2.2 Drainage Structures
Make excavations to the lines, grades, and elevations shown, or as

directed. Provide trenches and foundation pits of sufficient size to
permit the placement and removal of forms for the full length and width of
structure footings and foundations as shown. Clean rock or other hard
foundation material of loose debris and cut to a firm, level, stepped, or
serrated surface. Remove loose disintegrated rock and thin strata. Do not
disturb the bottom of the excavation when concrete or masonry is to be
placed in an excavated area. Do not excavate to the final grade level
until just before the concrete or masonry is to be placed. Where pile
foundations are to be used, stop the excavation of each pit at an elevation
1 foot above the base of the footing, as specified, before piles are
driven. After the pile driving has been completed, remove loose and
displaced material and complete excavation, leaving a smooth, solid,
undisturbed surface to receive the concrete or masonry.
3.2.3 Drainage
Provide for the collection and disposal of surface and subsurface water
encountered during construction. Completely drain construction site during
periods of construction to keep soil materials sufficiently dry. Construct
storm drainage features (ponds/basins) at the earliest stages of site
development, and throughout construction grade the construction area to
provide positive surface water runoff away from the construction activity
and provide temporary ditches, swales, and other drainage features and
equipment as required to maintain dry soils. When unsuitable working
platforms for equipment operation and unsuitable soil support for
subsequent construction features develop, remove unsuitable material and
provide new soil material as specified herein. It is the responsibility of
the Contractor to assess the soil and ground water conditions presented by
the plans and specifications and to employ necessary measures to permit
construction to proceed.
3.2.4 Dewatering
Control groundwater flowing toward or into excavations to prevent sloughing

of excavation slopes and walls, boils, uplift and heave in the excavation
and to eliminate interference with orderly progress of construction. Do
not permit French drains, sumps, ditches or trenches within 3 feet of the
foundation of any structure, except with specific written approval, and
after specific contractual provisions for restoration of the foundation
area have been made. Take control measures by the time the excavation
reaches the water level in order to maintain the integrity of the in situ
material. While the excavation is open, maintain the water level
continuously below the working level.
3.2.5 Trench Excavation Requirements
Excavate the trench as recommended by the manufacturer of the pipe to be

installed. Slope trench walls below the top of the pipe, or make vertical,
and of such width as recommended in the manufacturer's printed installation
manual. Provide vertical trench walls where no manufacturer's printed
installation manual is available. Shore trench walls more than 5 feet
high, cut back to a stable slope, or provide with equivalent means of
protection for employees who may be exposed to moving ground or cave in.
Shore vertical trench walls more than 5 feet high. Excavate trench walls
which are cut back to at least the angle of repose of the soil. Give
special attention to slopes which may be adversely affected by weather or
moisture content. Do not exceed the trench width below the pipe top of 24
inches plus pipe outside diameter (O.D.) for pipes of less than 24 inches
inside diameter, and do not exceed 36 inches plus pipe outside diameter for
sizes larger than 24 inches inside diameter. Where recommended trench
widths are exceeded, provide redesign, stronger pipe, or special
installation procedures by the Contractor. The Contractor is responsible
for the cost of redesign, stronger pipe, or special installation procedures
without any additional cost to the Government.
3.2.5.1 Bottom Preparation
Grade the bottoms of trenches accurately to provide uniform bearing and

support for the bottom quadrant of each section of the pipe. Excavate bell
holes to the necessary size at each joint or coupling to eliminate point
bearing. Remove stones of 1.5 inch or greater in any dimension, or as
recommended by the pipe manufacturer, whichever is smaller, to avoid point
bearing.
3.2.5.2 Removal of Unyielding Material
Where unyielding material is encountered in the bottom of the trench,

remove such material 6 inch below the required grade and replaced with
suitable materials as provided in paragraph BACKFILLING AND COMPACTION.
3.2.5.3 Removal of Unstable Material
Where unstable material is encountered in the bottom of the trench, remove

such material to the depth directed and replace it to the proper grade with
select granular material as provided in paragraph BACKFILLING AND
COMPACTION. When removal of unstable material is required due to the
Contractor's fault or neglect in performing the work, the Contractor is
responsible for excavating the resulting material and replacing it without
additional cost to the Government.
3.2.5.4 Excavation for Appurtenances
Provide excavation for manholes, catch-basins, inlets, or similar

structures sufficient to leave at least 12 inches clear between the outer
structure surfaces and the face of the excavation or support members Clean
rock or loose debris and cut to a firm surface either level, stepped, or
serrated, as shown or as directed. Remove loose disintegrated rock and
thin strata. Specify removal of unstable material. When concrete or
masonry is to be placed in an excavated area, take special care not to
disturb the bottom of the excavation. Do not excavate to the final grade
level until just before the concrete or masonry is to be placed.
3.2.5.5 Jacking, Boring, and Tunneling
Unless otherwise indicated, provide excavation by open cut except that

sections of a trench may be jacked, bored, or tunneled if, in the opinion
of the Contracting Officer, the pipe, cable, or duct can be safely and
properly installed and backfill can be properly compacted in such sections.
3.2.6 Underground Utilities
The Contractor is responsible for movement of construction machinery and

equipment over pipes and utilities during construction. Perform work
adjacent to non-Government utilities as indicated in accordance with
procedures outlined by utility company. Excavation made with power-driven
equipment is not permitted within two feet of known Government-owned
utility or subsurface construction. For work immediately adjacent to or
for excavations exposing a utility or other buried obstruction, excavate by
hand. Start hand excavation on each side of the indicated obstruction and
continue until the obstruction is uncovered or until clearance for the new
grade is assured. Support uncovered lines or other existing work affected
by the contract excavation until approval for backfill is granted by the
Contracting Officer. Report damage to utility lines or subsurface
construction immediately to the Contracting Officer.
3.2.7 Structural Excavation
Ensure that footing subgrades have been inspected and approved by the
Contracting Officer prior to concrete placement. Excavate to bottom of
pile cap prior to placing or driving piles, unless authorized otherwise by
the Contracting Officer. Backfill and compact over excavations and changes
in grade due to pile driving operations to 95 percent of ASTM D 698 maximum
density.
3.3 SELECTION OF BORROW MATERIAL
Select borrow material to meet the requirements and conditions of the

particular fill or embankment for which it is to be used.
3.4 OPENING AND DRAINAGE OF EXCAVATION AND BORROW PITS
Notify the Contracting Officer sufficiently in advance of the opening of

any excavation or borrow pit to permit elevations and measurements of the
undisturbed ground surface to be taken. Except as otherwise permitted,
excavate borrow pits and other excavation areas providing adequate
drainage. Transport overburden and other spoil material to designated
spoil areas or otherwise dispose of as directed. Provide neatly trimmed
and drained borrow pits after the excavation is completed. Ensure that
excavation of any area, operation of borrow pits, or dumping of spoil
material results in minimum detrimental effects on natural environmental
conditions.
3.5 SHORING
Submit a Shoring and Sheeting plan for approval 15 days prior to starting
work. Submit drawings and calculations, certified by a registered
professional engineer, describing the methods for shoring and sheeting of
excavations. Finish shoring, including sheet piling, and install as
necessary to protect workmen, banks, adjacent paving, structures, and
utilities. Remove shoring, bracing, and sheeting as excavations are
backfilled, in a manner to prevent caving.
3.6 GRADING AREAS
Where indicated, divide work into grading areas within which satisfactory
excavated material will be placed in embankments, fills, and required
backfills. Do not haul satisfactory material excavated in one grading area
to another grading area except when so directed in writing. Place and
grade stockpiles of satisfactory and unsatisfactory as specified. Keep
stockpiles in a neat and well drained condition, giving due consideration
to drainage at all times. Clear, grub, and seal by rubber-tired equipment,
the ground surface at stockpile locations; separately stockpile excavated
satisfactory and unsatisfactory materials. Protect stockpiles of
satisfactory materials from contamination which may destroy the quality and
fitness of the stockpiled material. If the Contractor fails to protect the
stockpiles, and any material becomes unsatisfactory, remove and replace
such material with satisfactory material from approved sources.
3.7 GROUND SURFACE PREPARATION
Remove and replace unsatisfactory material with satisfactory materials, as

directed by the Contracting Officer, in surfaces to receive fill or in
excavated areas. Scarify the surface to a depth of 6 inches before the
fill is started. Plow, step, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper
than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so that the fill material will bond with
the existing material. When subgrades are less than the specified density,
break up the ground surface to a minimum depth of 6 inches, pulverizing,
and compacting to the specified density. When the subgrade is part fill
and part excavation or natural ground, scarify the excavated or natural
ground portion to a depth of 12 inches and compact it as specified for the
adjacent fill.
3.8 UTILIZATION OF EXCAVATED MATERIALS
Dispose unsatisfactory materials removing from excavations into designated

waste disposal or spoil areas. Use satisfactory material removed from
excavations, insofar as practicable, in the construction of fills,
embankments, subgrades, shoulders, bedding (as backfill), and for similar
purposes. Do not waste any satisfactory excavated material without
specific written authorization. Dispose of satisfactory material,
authorized to be wasted, in designated areas approved for surplus material
storage or designated waste areas as directed. Clear and grub newly
designated waste areas on Government-controlled land before disposal of

waste material thereon. Stockpile and use coarse rock from excavations for
constructing slopes or embankments adjacent to streams, or sides and
bottoms of channels and for protecting against erosion. Do not dispose
excavated material to obstruct the flow of any stream, endanger a partly
finished structure, impair the efficiency or appearance of any structure,
or be detrimental to the completed work in any way.
3.9 BURIED TAPE AND DETECTION WIRE
3.9.1 Buried Warning and Identification Tape
Provide buried utility lines with utility identification tape. Bury tape
12 inches below finished grade; under pavements and slabs, bury tape 6
inches below top of subgrade.
3.9.2 Buried Detection Wire
Bury detection wire directly above non-metallic piping at a distance not to

exceed 12 inches above the top of pipe. Extend the wire continuously and
unbroken, from manhole to manhole. Terminate the ends of the wire inside
the manholes at each end of the pipe, with a minimum of 3 feet of wire,
coiled, remaining accessible in each manhole. Furnish insulated wire over
it's entire length. Install wires at manholes between the top of the
corbel and the frame, and extend up through the chimney seal between the
frame and the chimney seal. For force mains, terminate the wire in the
valve pit at the pump station end of the pipe.
3.10 BACKFILLING AND COMPACTION
Place backfill adjacent to any and all types of structures, and compact to
at least 90 percent laboratory maximum density for cohesive materials or 95
percent laboratory maximum density for cohesionless materials, to prevent
wedging action or eccentric loading upon or against the structure. Prepare
ground surface on which backfill is to be placed and provide compaction
requirements for backfill materials in conformance with the applicable
portions of paragraphs GROUND SURFACE PREPARATION. Finish compaction by
sheepsfoot rollers, pneumatic-tired rollers, steel-wheeled rollers,
vibratory compactors, or other approved equipment.
3.10.1 Trench Backfill
Backfill trenches to the grade shown. Backfill the trench to 2 feet above
the top of pipe prior to performing the required pressure tests. Leave the
joints and couplings uncovered during the pressure test.
3.10.1.1 Replacement of Unyielding Material
Replace unyielding material removed from the bottom of the trench with
select granular material or initial backfill material.
3.10.1.2 Replacement of Unstable Material
Replace unstable material removed from the bottom of the trench or

excavation with select granular material placed in layers not exceeding 6
inches loose thickness.
3.10.1.3 Bedding and Initial Backfill
Provide bedding of the type and thickness shown. Place initial backfill
material and compact it with approved tampers to a height of at least one
foot above the utility pipe or conduit. Bring up the backfill evenly on
both sides of the pipe for the full length of the pipe. Take care to
ensure thorough compaction of the fill under the haunches of the pipe.
Except as specified otherwise in the individual piping section, provide
bedding for buried piping in accordance with AWWA C600, Type 4, except as
specified herein. Compact backfill to top of pipe to 95 percent of
ASTM D 698 maximum density. Provide plastic piping with bedding to spring
line of pipe. Provide materials as follows:
a. Class I: Angular, 0.25 to 1.5 inch, graded stone, including a

number of fill materials that have regional significance such as coral,
slag, cinders, crushed stone, and crushed shells.
b. Class II: Coarse sands and gravels with maximum particle size of
1.5 inch, including various graded sands and gravels containing small
percentages of fines, generally granular and noncohesive, either wet or
dry. Soil Types GW, GP, SW, and SP are included in this class as
specified in ASTM D 2487.
3.10.1.4 Final Backfill
Fill the remainder of the trench, except for special materials for
roadways, railroads and airfields, with satisfactory material. Place
backfill material and compact as follows:
a. Roadways, Railroads, and Airfields: Place backfill up to the

required elevation as specified. Do not permit water flooding or
jetting methods of compaction.
b. Sidewalks, Turfed or Seeded Areas and Miscellaneous Areas: Deposit

backfill in layers of a maximum of 12 inches loose thickness, and
compact it to 85 percent maximum density for cohesive soils and 90
percent maximum density for cohesionless soils. Do not permit
compaction by water flooding or jetting. Apply this requirement to all
other areas not specifically designated above.
3.10.2 Backfill for Appurtenances
After the manhole, catchbasin, inlet, or similar structure has been

constructed and the concrete has been allowed to cure for 3 days, place
backfill in such a manner that the structure is not be damaged by the shock
of falling earth. Deposit the backfill material, compact it as specified
for final backfill, and bring up the backfill evenly on all sides of the
structure to prevent eccentric loading and excessive stress.
3.11 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS
Special requirements for both excavation and backfill relating to the

specific utilities are as follows:
3.11.1 Gas Distribution
Excavate trenches to a depth that will provide a minimum 18 inches of cover

in rock excavation and a minimum 24 inch of cover in other excavation.
3.11.2 Water Lines
Excavate trenches to a depth that provides a minimum cover of 3 feet from

the existing ground surface, or from the indicated finished grade,
whichever is lower, to the top of the pipe.
3.11.3 Electrical Distribution System
Provide a minimum cover of 24 inches from the finished grade to direct

burial cable and conduit or duct line, unless otherwise indicated.
3.12 EMBANKMENTS
3.12.1 Earth Embankments
Construct earth embankments from satisfactory materials free of organic or

frozen material and rocks with any dimension greater than 3 inches. Place
the material in successive horizontal layers of loose material not more than
12 inches in depth. Spread each layer uniformly on a soil surface that
has been moistened or aerated as necessary, and scarified or otherwise
broken up so that the fill will bond with the surface on which it is
placed. After spreading, plow, disk, or otherwise brake up each layer;
moisten or aerate as necessary; thoroughly mix; and compact to at least 90
percent laboratory maximum density for cohesive materials or 95 percent
laboratory maximum density for cohesionless materials. Compaction
requirements for the upper portion of earth embankments forming subgrade
for pavements are identical with those requirements specified in paragraph
SUBGRADE PREPARATION. Finish compaction by sheepsfoot rollers,
pneumatic-tired rollers, steel-wheeled rollers, vibratory compactors, or
other approved equipment.
3.13 SUBGRADE PREPARATION
3.13.1 Construction
Shape subgrade to line, grade, and cross section, and compact as

specified. Include plowing, disking, and any moistening or aerating
required to obtain specified compaction for this operation. Remove soft or
otherwise unsatisfactory material and replace with satisfactory excavated
material or other approved material as directed. Excavate rock encountered
in the cut section to a depth of 6 inches below finished grade for the
subgrade. Bring up low areas resulting from removal of unsatisfactory
material or excavation of rock to required grade with satisfactory
materials, and shape the entire subgrade to line, grade, and cross section
and compact as specified. After rolling, the surface of the subgrade for
roadways shall not show deviations greater than 1/2 inch when tested with a
12-foot straightedge applied both parallel and at right angles to the
centerline of the area. Do not vary the elevation of the finish subgrade
more than 0.05 foot from the established grade and cross section.
3.13.2 Compaction
Finish compaction by sheepsfoot rollers, pneumatic-tired rollers,

steel-wheeled rollers, vibratory compactors, or other approved equipment.
Except for paved areas and railroads, compact each layer of the embankment
to at least 90 percent of laboratory maximum density.
3.13.2.1 Subgrade for Pavements
Compact subgrade for pavements to at least 90 percentage laboratory maximum

density for the depth below the surface of the pavement shown. When more
than one soil classification is present in the subgrade, thoroughly blend,
reshape, and compact the top 6 inch of subgrade.
3.13.2.2 Subgrade for Shoulders
Compact subgrade for shoulders to at least 90 percentage laboratory maximum

density for the full depth of the shoulder.
3.14 FINISHING
Finish the surface of excavations, embankments, and subgrades to a smooth

and compact surface in accordance with the lines, grades, and cross
sections or elevations shown. Provide the degree of finish for graded
areas within 0.1 foot of the grades and elevations indicated except that
the degree of finish for subgrades specified in paragraph SUBGRADE
PREPARATION. Finish gutters and ditches in a manner that will result in
effective drainage. Finish the surface of areas to be turfed from
settlement or washing to a smoothness suitable for the application of
turfing materials. Repair graded, topsoiled, or backfilled areas prior to
acceptance of the work, and re-established grades to the required
elevations and slopes.
3.14.1 Subgrade and Embankments
During construction, keep embankments and excavations shaped and drained.

Maintain ditches and drains along subgrade to drain effectively at all
times. Do not disturb the finished subgrade by traffic or other
operation. Protect and maintain the finished subgrade in a satisfactory
condition until ballast, subbase, base, or pavement is placed. Do not
permit the storage or stockpiling of materials on the finished subgrade.
Do not lay subbase, base course, ballast, or pavement until the subgrade
has been checked and approved, and in no case place subbase, base,
surfacing, pavement, or ballast on a muddy, spongy, or frozen subgrade.
3.14.2 Capillary Water Barrier
Place a capillary water barrier under concrete floor and area-way slabs
grade directly on the subgrade and compact with a minimum of two passes of
a hand-operated plate-type vibratory compactor.
3.14.3 Grading Around Structures
Construct areas within 5 feet outside of each building and structure line
true-to-grade, shape to drain, and maintain free of trash and debris until
final inspection has been completed and the work has been accepted.
3.15 TESTING
Perform testing by a Corps validated commercial testing laboratory or the

Contractor's validated testing facility. If the Contractor elects to
establish testing facilities, do not permit work requiring testing until
the Contractor's facilities have been inspected, Corps validated and
approved by the Contracting Officer. Determine field in-place density in
accordance with ASTM D 1556 ASTM D 6938. When ASTM D 6938 is used, check
the calibration curves and adjust using only the sand cone method as
described in ASTM D 1556. ASTM D 6938 results in a wet unit weight of soil
in determining the moisture content of the soil when using this method.
Check the calibration curves furnished with the moisture gauges along with
density calibration checks as described in ASTM D 6938; check the
calibration of both the density and moisture gauges at the beginning of a
job on each different type of material encountered and at intervals as
directed by the Contracting Officer. When test results indicate, as
determined by the Contracting Officer, that compaction is not as specified,
remove the material, replace and recompact to meet specification
requirements. Perform tests on recompacted areas to determine conformance
with specification requirements. Appoint a registered professional civil
engineer to certify inspections and test results. These certifications
shall state that the tests and observations were performed by or under the
direct supervision of the engineer and that the results are representative
of the materials or conditions being certified by the tests. The following
number of tests, if performed at the appropriate time, will be the minimum
acceptable for each type operation.
3.15.1 Fill and Backfill Material Gradation
One test per 500 cubic yards stockpiled or in-place source material.
Determine gradation of fill and backfill material in accordance with
ASTM C 136, ASTM D 422 , ASTM D 1140.
3.15.2 In-Place Densities
a. One test per 2500 square feet, or fraction thereof, of each lift of
fill or backfill areas compacted by other than hand-operated machines.
b. One test per 500 square feet, or fraction thereof, of each lift of
fill or backfill areas compacted by hand-operated machines.
c. One test per 100 linear feet, or fraction thereof, of each lift of
embankment or backfill for roads.
3.15.3 Check Tests on In-Place Densities
If ASTM D 6938 is used, check in-place densities by ASTM D 1556 as follows:
a. One check test per lift for each 2500 square feet, or fraction
thereof, of each lift of fill or backfill compacted by other than
hand-operated machines.
b. One check test per lift for each 500 square feet, of fill or
backfill areas compacted by hand-operated machines.
c. One check test per lift for each 100 linear feet, or fraction
thereof, of embankment or backfill for roads.
3.15.4 Moisture Contents
In the stockpile, excavation, or borrow areas, perform a minimum of two

tests per day per type of material or source of material being placed
during stable weather conditions. During unstable weather, perform tests
as dictated by local conditions and approved by the Contracting Officer.
3.15.5 Optimum Moisture and Laboratory Maximum Density
Perform tests for each type material or source of material including borrow
material to determine the optimum moisture and laboratory maximum density
values. One representative test per 500 cubic yards of fill and backfill,
or when any change in material occurs which may affect the optimum moisture
content or laboratory maximum density.
3.15.6 Tolerance Tests for Subgrades
Perform continuous checks on the degree of finish specified in paragraph

SUBGRADE PREPARATION during construction of the subgrades.
3.15.7 Displacement of Sewers
After other required tests have been performed and the trench backfill
compacted to 2, feet above the top of the pipe, inspect the pipe to
determine whether significant displacement has occurred. Conduct this
inspection in the presence of the Contracting Officer. Inspect pipe sizes
larger than 36 inches, while inspecting smaller diameter pipe by shining a
light or laser between manholes or manhole locations, or by the use of
television cameras passed through the pipe. If, in the judgment of the
Contracting Officer, the interior of the pipe shows poor alignment or any
other defects that would cause improper functioning of the system, replace
or repair the defects as directed at no additional cost to the Government.
3.16 DISPOSITION OF SURPLUS MATERIAL
Provide surplus material or other soil material not required or suitable

for filling or backfilling, and brush, refuse, stumps, roots, and timber as
removed from Government property as directed by the Contracting Officer.
SECTION 31 11 00
CLEARING AND GRUBBING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUBMITTALS

SD-03 Product Data
Nonsaleable Materials
Written permission to dispose of such products on private

property shall be filed with the Contracting Officer.
SD-04 Samples
Tree wound paint

Herbicide
Samples in cans with manufacturer's label.
Deliver materials to store at the site, and handle in a manner which will
maintain the materials in their original manufactured or fabricated
condition until ready for use.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 TREE WOUND PAINT
Bituminous based paint of standard manufacture specially formulated for

tree wounds.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PROTECTION
3.1.1 Roads and Walks
Keep roads and walks free of dirt and debris at all times.
3.1.2 Trees, Shrubs, and Existing Facilities
Trees and vegetation to be left standing shall be protected from damage

incident to clearing, grubbing, and construction operations by the erection
of barriers or by such other means as the circumstances require.
3.1.3 Utility Lines
Protect existing utility lines that are indicated to remain from damage.
Notify the Contracting Officer immediately of damage to or an encounter
with an unknown existing utility line. The Contractor is responsible for
the repairs of damage to existing utility lines that are indicated or made
known to the Contractor prior to start of clearing and grubbing
operations. When utility lines which are to be removed are encountered
within the area of operations, notify the Contracting Officer in ample time
to minimize interruption of the service. In addition to to notifying the
Contracting Officer the contractor shall coordinate all water and sanitary
sewer shut downs and utility connections. The Contractor shall coordinate
and follow American Water and Sanitary Sewer limitations for service
interruptions.
3.2 CLEARING
Clearing shall consist of the felling, trimming, and cutting of trees into
sections and the satisfactory disposal of the trees and other vegetation
designated for removal, including downed timber, snags, brush, and rubbish
occurring within the areas to be cleared. Trees, stumps, roots, brush,
and other vegetation in areas to be cleared shall be cut off flush with or
below the original ground surface, except such trees and vegetation as may
be indicated or directed to be left standing. Trees designated to be left
standing within the cleared areas shall be trimmed of dead branches 1-1/2
inches or more in diameter and shall be trimmed of all branches the heights
indicated or directed. Limbs and branches to be trimmed shall be neatly
cut close to the bole of the tree or main branches. Cuts more than 1-1/2
inches in diameter shall be painted with an approved tree-wound paint.
3.3 TREE REMOVAL
Where indicated or directed, trees and stumps that are designated as trees
shall be removed from areas outside those areas designated for clearing and
grubbing. This work shall include the felling of such trees and the
removal of their stumps and roots as specified in paragraph GRUBBING.
Trees shall be disposed of as specified in paragraph DISPOSAL OF MATERIALS.
3.4 PRUNING
Prune trees designated to be left standing within the cleared areas of dead
branches 1 1/2 inches or more in diameter; and trim branches to heights and
in a manner as indicated. Neatly cut limbs and branches to be trimmed
close to the bole of the tree or main branches. Paint cuts more than 1 1/4
inches in diameter with an approved tree wound paint.
3.5 GRUBBING
Grubbing shall consist of the removal and disposal of stumps, roots larger
than 3 inches in diameter, and matted roots from the designated grubbing
areas. Material to be grubbed, together with logs and other organic or
metallic debris not suitable for foundation purposes, shall be removed to a
depth of not less than 18 inches below the original surface level of the
ground in areas indicated to be grubbed and in areas indicated as
construction areas under this contract, such as areas for buildings, and
areas to be paved. Depressions made by grubbing shall be filled with
suitable material and compacted to make the surface conform with the
original adjacent surface of the ground.
3.6 DISPOSAL OF MATERIALS
3.6.1 Saleable Timber4. All timber on the project site noted for clearing
and grubbing shall become the property of the Contractor, and shall be
removed from the project site and disposed of off stations.
3.6.2 Nonsaleable Materials
Logs, stumps, roots, brush, rotten wood, and other refuse from the clearing
and grubbing operations, except for salable timber, shall be disposed of
outside the limits of Government-controlled land at the Contractor's
responsibility
SECTION 31 31 16
SOIL TREATMENT FOR SUBTERRANEAN TERMITE CONTROL
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

7 USC Section 136 Federal Insecticide, Fungicide, and

Rodenticide Act
1.2 SUBMITTALS

SD-03 Product Data
Termiticide Application Plan; G
Termiticide application plan with proposed sequence of treatment

work with dates and times. Include the termiticide trade name,
EPA registration number, chemical composition, formulation,
concentration of original and diluted material, application rate
of active ingredients, method of application, area/volume treated,
amount applied; and the name and state license number of the state
certified applicator.
Termiticides
Manufacturer's label and Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for

termiticides proposed for use.
Foundation Exterior
Written verification that other site work will not disturb the
treatment.
Utilities and Vents
Written verification that utilities and vents have been located.
Crawl and Plenum Air Spaces
Written verification that crawl spaces and plenum air spaces

have been located.
Verification of Measurement
Written verification that the volume of termiticide used meets

the application rate.
Application Equipment
A listing of equipment to be used.
Warranty
Copy of Contractor's warranty.
SD-04 Samples
Termiticides
Samples of the pesticides used in this work. The Contracting

Officer may draw, at any time and without prior notice, from
stocks at the job site; should analysis, performed by the
Government, indicate such samples to contain less than the amount
of active ingredient specified on the label, work performed with
such products shall be repeated, with pesticides conforming to
this specification, at no additional cost to the Government.
SD-06 Test Reports
Equipment Calibration and Tank Measurement
Certification of calibration tests conducted on the equipment

used in the termiticide application.
Soil Moisture
Quality Assurance
Pest Management Report and copies of daily records signed by an

officer of the Contractor.
SD-07 Certificates
Qualifications
Comply with 7 USC Section 136 for requirements on Contractor's licensing,

certification, and record keeping. Maintain daily records using Pest
Management Maintenance Record, DD Form 1532-1 and submit copies of records
when requested by the Contracting Officer. These forms may be obtained
from the main web site:
http://www.dtic.mil/whs/directives/infomgt/forms/ddforms1500-1999.htm
Upon completion of this work, submit Pest Management Report DD Form 1532
identifying target pest, type of operation, brand name and manufacturer of
pesticide, formulation, concentration or rate of application used.
For the application of pesticides, use the services of a subcontractor
whose principal business is pest control. The subcontractor shall be

licensed and certified in the state where the work is to be performed.
Termiticide applicators shall also be certified in the U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency (EPA) pesticide applicator category which includes
structural pest control. Submit the qualifications and state license
number of the termiticide applicator.
1.3.2 Safety Requirements
Formulate, treat, and dispose of termiticides and their containers in

accordance with label directions. Draw water for formulating only from
sites designated by the Contracting Officer, and fit the filling hose with
a backflow preventer meeting local plumbing codes or standards. The
filling operation shall be under the direct and continuous observation of a
contractor's representative to prevent overflow. Secure pesticides and
related materials under lock and key when unattended. Ensure that proper
protective clothing and equipment are worn and used during all phases of
termiticide application. Dispose of used pesticide containers off
Government property.
1.4.1 Delivery
Deliver termiticide material to the site in the original unopened

containers bearing legible labels indicating the EPA registration number
and manufacturer's registered uses. All other materials, to be used on
site for the purpose of termite control, shall be delivered in new or
otherwise good condition as supplied by the manufacturer or formulator.
1.4.2 Inspection
Inspect termiticides upon arrival at the job site for conformity to type
and quality in accordance with paragraph TERMITICIDES. Each label shall
bear evidence of registration under the Federal Insecticide, Fungicide, and
Rodenticide Act (FIFRA), as amended or under appropriate regulations of the
host county. Other materials shall be inspected for conformance with
specified requirements. Remove unacceptable materials from the job site.
1.4.3 Storage
Store materials in designated areas and in accordance with manufacturer's

labels. Termiticides and related materials shall be kept under lock and
key when unattended.
1.4.4 Handling
Observe manufacturer's warnings and precautions. Termiticides shall be

handled in accordance with manufacturer's labels, preventing contamination
by dirt, water, and organic material. Protect termiticides from sunlight
as recommended by the manufacturer.
1.5 SITE CONDITIONS
The following conditions will determine the time of application.
1.5.1 Soil Moisture
Soils to be treated shall be tested immediately before application. Test
soil moisture content to a minimum depth of 3 inches. The soil moisture

shall be as recommended by the termiticide manufacturer. The termiticide
will not be applied when soil moisture exceeds manufacturer's
recommendations because termiticides do not adhere to the soil particles in
saturated soils.
1.5.2 Runoff and Wind Drift
Do not apply termiticide during or immediately following heavy rains.

Applications shall not be performed when conditions may cause runoff or
create an environmental hazard. Applications shall not be performed when
average wind speed exceeds 10 miles per hour. The termiticide shall not be
allowed to enter water systems, aquifers, or endanger humans or animals.
1.5.2.1 Vapor Barriers and Waterproof Membranes
Termiticide shall be applied prior to placement of a vapor barrier or

waterproof membrane.
1.5.2.2 Utilities and Vents
Prior to application, HVAC ducts and vents located in treatment area shall
be turned off and blocked to protect people and animals from termiticide.
1.5.3 Placement of Concrete
Place concrete covering treated soils as soon as the termiticide has

reached maximum penetration into the soil. Time for maximum penetration
shall be as recommended by the manufacturer.
1.6 WARRANTY
The Contractor shall provide a 5 -year written warranty against

infestations or reinfestations by subterranean termites of the buildings or
building additions constructed under this contract. Warranty shall include
annual inspections of the buildings or building additions. If live
subterranean termite infestation or subterranean termite damage is
discovered during the warranty period, and the soil and building conditions
have not been altered in the interim, the Contractor shall:
a. Retreat the soil and perform other treatment as may be necessary

for elimination of subterranean termite infestation;
b. Repair damage caused by termite infestation; and
c. Reinspect the building approximately 180 days after the retreatment.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 TERMITICIDES
Provide termiticides currently registered by the EPA or approved for such

use by the appropriate agency of the host county. Select non-repellant
termiticide for maximum effectiveness and duration after application. The
selected termiticide shall be suitable for the soil and climatic conditions
at the project site.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 VERIFICATION OF MEASUREMENT
Once termiticide application has been completed, measure tank contents to

determine the remaining volume. The total volume measurement of used
contents for the application shall equal the established application rate
for the project site conditions. Provide written verification of the
measurements.
3.2 TECHNICAL REPRESENTATIVE
The certified installation pest management coordinator shall be the

technical representative, shall be present at all meetings concerning
treatment measures for subterranean termites, and may be present during
treatment application. The command Pest Control Coordinator shall be
contacted prior to starting work.
3.3 SITE PREPARATION
Site preparation shall be in accordance with Sections 31 00 00 EARTHWORK

and 32 92 31.00 44 ESTABLISHMENT OF TURF.. Work related to final grades,
landscape plantings, foundations, or any other alterations to finished
construction which might alter the condition of treated soils, shall be
coordinated with this specification.
3.3.1 Ground Preparation
Food sources shall be eliminated by removing debris from clearing and

grubbing and post construction wood scraps such as ground stakes, form
boards, and scrap lumber from the site, before termiticide application
begins.
3.3.2 Verification
Before work starts, verify that final grades are as indicated and smooth
grading has been completed in accordance with Section 31 00 00 EARTHWORK.
Soil particles shall be finely graded with particles no larger than 1 inch
and compacted to eliminate soil movement to the greatest degree.
3.3.3 Foundation Exterior
Provide written verification that final grading and landscape planting

operations will not disturb treatment of the soil on the exterior sides of
foundation walls, grade beams, and similar structures.
3.3.4 Utilities and Vents
Provide written verification that the location and identity of HVAC ducts
and vents, water and sewer lines, and plumbing have been accomplished prior
to the termiticide application.
3.3.5 Crawl and Plenum Air Spaces
Provide written verification that the location and identity of crawl and
plenum air spaces have been accomplished prior to the termiticide
application.
3.3.6 Application Plan
Submit a Termiticide Application Plan for approval before starting the

specified treatment.
3.4 TERMITICIDE TREATMENT
3.4.1 Equipment Calibration and Tank Measurement
Immediately prior to commencement of termiticide application, calibration

tests shall be conducted on the application equipment to be used and the
application tank shall be measured to determine the volume and contents.
These tests shall confirm that the application equipment is operating
within the manufacturer's specifications and will meet the specified
requirements. Provide written certification of the equipment calibration
test results within 1 week of testing.
3.4.2 Mixing and Application
Formulating, mixing, and application shall be performed in the presence of

the Contracting Officer or the technical representative. A closed system
is recommended as it prevents the termiticide from coming into contact with
the applicator or other persons. Water for formulating shall only come
from designated locations. Filling hoses shall be fitted with a backflow
preventer meeting local plumbing codes or standards. Overflow shall be
prevented during the filling operation. Prior to each day of use, the
equipment used for applying termiticides shall be inspected for leaks,
clogging, wear, or damage. Any repairs are to be performed immediately.
3.4.3 Treatment Method
For areas to be treated, establish complete and unbroken vertical and/or

horizontal soil poison barriers between the soil and all portions of the
intended structure which may allow termite access to wood and wood related
products. Application shall not be made to areas which serve as crawl
spaces or for use as a plenum air space.
3.4.3.1 Surface Application
Use surface application for establishing horizontal barriers. Surface

applicants shall be applied as a coarse spray and provide uniform
distribution over the soil surface. Termiticide shall penetrate a minimum
of 1 inch into the soil, or as recommended by the manufacturer.
3.4.3.2 Rodding and Trenching
Use rodding and trenching for establishing vertical soil barriers.

Trenching shall be to the depth of the foundation footing. Width of trench
shall be as recommended by the manufacturer, or as indicated. Rodding or
other approved method may be implemented for saturating the base of the
trench with termiticide. Immediately after termiticide has reached maximum
penetration as recommended by the manufacturer, backfilling of the trench
shall commence. Backfilling shall be in 6 inch rises or layers. Each rise
shall be treated with termiticide.
3.4.4 Sampling
The Contracting Officer may draw from stocks at the job site, at any time
and without prior notice, take samples of the termiticides used to
determine if the amount of active ingredient specified on the label is

being applied.
3.5 CLEAN UP, DISPOSAL, AND PROTECTION
Once application has been completed, proceed with clean up and protection
of the site without delay.
3.5.1 Clean Up
The site shall be cleaned of all material associated with the treatment
measures, according to label instructions, and as indicated. Excess and
waste material shall be removed and disposed off site.
3.5.2 Disposal of Termiticide
Dispose of residual termiticides and containers off Government property,

and in accordance with label instructions and EPA criteria.
3.5.3 Protection of Treated Area
Immediately after the application, the area shall be protected from other
use by erecting barricades and providing signage as required or directed.
Signage shall be in accordance with Section 10 14 01 EXTERIOR SIGNAGE.
Signage shall be placed inside the entrances to crawl spaces and shall
identify the space as treated with termiticide and not safe for children
and animals.
3.6 CONDITIONS FOR SATISFACTORY TREATMENT
3.6.1 Equipment Calibrations and Measurements
Where results from the equipment calibration and tank measurements tests
are unsatisfactory, re-treatment will be required.
3.6.2 Testing
Should an analysis, performed by a third party, indicate that the samples

of the applied termiticide contain less than the amount of active
ingredient specified on the label, and/or if soils are treated to a depth
less than specified or approved, re-treatment will be required.
3.6.3 Disturbance of Treated Soils
Soil and fill material disturbed after treatment shall be re-treated before
placement of slabs or other covering structures.
3.6.4 Termites Found Within the Warranty Period
If live subterranean termite infestation or termite damage is discovered

during the warranty period, re-treat the site.
3.7 RE-TREATMENT
Where re-treatment is required, comply with the requirements specified in

paragraph WARRANTY.
SECTION 32 01 19
FIELD MOLDED SEALANTS FOR SEALING JOINTS IN RIGID PAVEMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 UNIT PRICES
1.1.1 Measurement
Determine the quantity of each sealing item to be paid for by actual

measurement of the number of linear feet of in-place material that has been
1.1.2 Payment
Payment will be made at the contract unit bid prices per linear foot for
the sealing items scheduled. The unit bid prices will include the cost of
all labor, materials, and the use of all equipment and tools required to
complete the work.
1.2 REFERENCES


ASTM D 789 (2007e1) Determination of Relative

Viscosity and Moisture Content of
Polyamide (PA)
ASTM D5893/D5893M (2010) Cold Applied, Single Component,

Chemically Curing Silicone Joint Sealant
for Portland Cement Concrete Pavements
Machines, tools, and equipment used in the performance of the work required
by this section shall be approved before the work is started maintained in
satisfactory condition at all times.
1.3.1 Joint Cleaning Equipment
1.3.1.1 Tractor-Mounted Routing Tool
Provide a routing tool, used for removing old sealant from the joints, of
such shape and dimensions and so mounted on the tractor that it will not
damage the sides of the joints. The tool shall be designed so that it can
be adjusted to remove the old material to varying depths as required. The
use of V-shaped tools or rotary impact routing devices will not be
permitted. Hand-operated spindle routing devices may be used to clean and
enlarge random cracks.
1.3.1.2 Concrete Saw
Provide a self-propelled power saw, with water-cooled diamond or abrasive

saw blades, for cutting joints to the depths and widths specified or for
refacing joints or cleaning sawed joints where sandblasting does not
provide a clean joint.
1.3.1.3 Sandblasting Equipment
Include with the sandblasting equipment an air compressor, hose, and

long-wearing venturi-type nozzle of proper size, shape and opening. The
maximum nozzle opening should not exceed 1/4 inch. The air compressor
shall be portable and capable of furnishing not less than 150 cfm and
maintaining a line pressure of not less than 90 psi at the nozzle while in
use. Demonstrate compressor capability, under job conditions, before
approval. The compressor shall be equipped with traps that will maintain
the compressed air free of oil and water. The nozzle shall have an
adjustable guide that will hold the nozzle aligned with the joint
approximately 1 inch above the pavement surface. Adjust the height, angle
of inclination and the size of the nozzle as necessary to secure
satisfactory results.
1.3.1.4 Waterblasting Equipment
Waterblasting equipment shall not be used.
1.3.1.5 Hand Tools
Hand tools may be used, when approved, for removing defective sealant from
a crack and repairing or cleaning the crack faces.
1.3.2 Sealing Equipment
1.3.2.1 Cold-Applied, Single-Component Sealing Equipment
The equipment for installing ASTM D5893/D5893M single component joint

sealants shall consist of an extrusion pump, air compressor, following
plate, hoses, and nozzle for transferring the sealant from the storage
container into the joint opening. The dimension of the nozzle shall be
such that the tip of the nozzle will extend into the joint to allow sealing
from the bottom of the joint to the top. Maintain the initially approved
equipment in good working condition, serviced in accordance with the
supplier's instructions, and unaltered in any way without obtaining prior
approval. Small hand-held air-powered equipment (i.e., caulking guns) may
be used for small applications.1.4 SUBMITTALS

SD-03 Product Data
Manufacturer's Recommendations; G, PO.
Printed copies of manufacturer's recommendations, 30 days prior
to use on the project, where installation procedures, or any part

thereof, are required to be in accordance with those
recommendations. Installation of the material will not be allowed
until the recommendations are received. Failure to furnish these
recommendations can be cause for rejection of the material.
Equipment.
List of proposed equipment to be used in performance of

construction work including descriptive data, 30 days prior to use
on the project.
SD-04 Samples
Materials G, PO.
Samples of the materials (sealant, primer if required, and

backup material), in sufficient quantity for testing and approval
30 days prior to the beginning of work. No material will be
allowed to be used until it has been approved.
SD-06 Test Reports
Certified copies of the test reports; G,PO.
1.5.1 Safety
Do not place joint sealant within 25 feet of any liquid oxygen (LOX)
equipment, LOX storage, or LOX piping. Thoroughly clean joints in this
area and leave them unsealed.
1.5.2 Test Requirements
Test the joint sealant and backup or separating material for conformance
with the referenced applicable material specification. Perform testing of
the materials in an approved independent laboratory and submit certified
copies of the test reports for approval 30 days prior to the use of the
materials at the job site. Samples will be retained by the Government for
possible future testing should the materials appear defective during or
after application. Conformance with the requirements of the laboratory
tests specified will not constitute final acceptance of the materials.
Final acceptance will be based on the performance of the in-place materials.
1.5.3 Trial Joint Sealant Installation
Prior to the cleaning and sealing of the joints for the entire project,
prepare a test section at least 200 feet long using the specified materials
and approved equipment, so as to demonstrate the proposed joint preparation
and sealing of all types of joints in the project. Following the
completion of the test section and before any other joint is sealed,
inspect the test section to determine that the materials and installation
meet the requirements specified. If it is determined that the materials or
installation do not meet the requirements, remove the materials, and
reclean and reseal the joints at no cost to the Government. When the test
section meets the requirements, it may be incorporated into the permanent
work and paid for at the contract unit price per linear foot for sealing
items scheduled. Prepare and seal all other joints in the manner approved
for sealing the test section.
Inspect materials delivered to the job site for defects, unload, and store
them with a minimum of handling to avoid damage. Provide storage
facilities at the job site for maintaining materials at the temperatures
and conditions recommended by the manufacturer.
The ambient air temperature and the pavement temperature within the joint
wall shall be a minimum of 50 degrees F and rising at the time of
application of the materials. Do not apply sealant if moisture is observed
in the joint.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 SEALANTS
Materials for sealing cracks in the various paved areas indicated on the
drawings shall be as follows:
Area Sealing Material
Covered Hardstand ASTM D5893/D5893M
2.2 PRIMERS
When primers are recommended by the manufacturer of the sealant, use them
in accordance with the recommendation of the manufacturer.
2.3 BACKUP MATERIALS
Provide backup material that is a compressible, nonshrinking, nonstaining,

nonabsorbing material, nonreactive with the joint sealant. The material
shall have a melting point at least 5 degrees F greater than the pouring
temperature of the sealant being used when tested in accordance with
ASTM D 789. The material shall have a water absorption of not more than 5
percent of the sample weight when tested in accordance with ASTM C 509.
The backup material shall be 25 plus or minus 5 percent larger in diameter
than the nominal width of the crack.
2.4 BOND BREAKING TAPES
Provide a bond breaking tape or separating material that is a flexible,

nonshrinkable, nonabsorbing, nonstaining, and nonreacting adhesive-backed
tape. The material shall have a melting point at least 5 degrees F greater
than the pouring temperature of the sealant being used when tested in
accordance with ASTM D 789. The bond breaker tape shall be approximately
1/8 inch wider than the nominal width of the joint and shall not bond to
the joint sealant.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION OF JOINTS
Immediately before the installation of the sealant, thoroughly clean the
joints to remove all laitance, curing compound, filler, protrusions of

hardened concrete, and old sealant from the sides and upper edges of the
joint space to be sealed.
3.1.1 Sandblasting
The newly exposed concrete joint faces and the pavement surfaces extending
a minimum of 1/2 inch from the joint edges shall be sandblasted clean.
use a multiple-pass technique until the surfaces are free of dust, dirt,
curing compound, filler, old sealant residue, or any foreign debris that
might prevent the bonding of the sealant to the concrete. After final
cleaning and immediately prior to sealing, blow out the joints with
compressed air and leave them completely free of debris and water.
3.1.2 Back-Up Material
When the joint opening is of a greater depth than indicated for the sealant
depth, plug or seal off the lower portion of the joint opening using a
back-up material to prevent the entrance of the sealant below the specified
depth. Take care to ensure that the backup material is placed at the
specified depth and is not stretched or twisted during installation.
3.1.3 Bond Breaking Tape
Where inserts or filler materials contain bitumen, or the depth of the

joint opening does not allow for the use of a backup material, insert a
bond breaker separating tape to prevent incompatibility with the filler
materials and three-sided adhesion of the sealant. Securely bond the tape
to the bottom of the joint opening so it will not float up into the new
sealant.
3.1.4 Rate of Progress of Joint Preparation
Limit the stages of joint preparation, which include sandblasting, air

pressure cleaning and placing of the back-up material to only that lineal
footage that can be sealed during the same day.
3.2 PREPARATION OF SEALANT
3.2.1 Single-Component, Cold-Applied Sealants
Inspect the ASTM D5893/D5893M sealant and containers prior to use. Reject
any materials that contain water, hard caking of any separated
constituents, nonreversible jell, or materials that are otherwise
unsatisfactory. Settlement of constituents in a soft mass that can be
readily and uniformly remixed in the field with simple tools will not be
cause for rejection.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF SEALANT
3.3.1 Time of Application
Seal joints immediately following final cleaning of the joint walls and
following the placement of the separating or backup material. Open joints,
that cannot be sealed under the conditions specified, or when rain
interrupts sealing operations shall be recleaned and allowed to dry prior
to installing the sealant.
3.3.2 Sealing Joints
Immediately preceding, but not more than 50 feet ahead of the joint sealing
operations, perform a final cleaning with compressed air. Traffic shall
not be permitted over newly sealed pavement until authorized by the
Contracting Officer. When a primer is recommended by the manufacturer,
apply it evenly to the joint faces in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions. Check the joints frequently to ensure that the newly
installed sealant is cured to a tack-free condition within the time
specified.
3.4 INSPECTION
3.4.1 Joint Cleaning
Inspect joints during the cleaning process to correct improper equipment

and cleaning techniques that damage the concrete pavement in any manner.
Cleaned joints will be approved prior to installation of the separating or
back-up material and joint sealant.
3.4.2 Joint Sealant
Inspect the joint sealant for proper rate of cure and set, bonding to the
joint walls, cohesive separation within the sealant, reversion to liquid,
entrapped air and voids. Sealants exhibiting any of these deficiencies at
any time prior to the final acceptance of the project shall be removed from
the joint, wasted, and replaced as specified herein at no additional cost
to the Government.
3.5 CLEAN-UP
Upon completion of the project, remove all unused materials from the site
and leave the pavement in a clean condition.
SECTION 32 11 16
BASE COURSE FOR RIGID AND FLEXIBLE PAVING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES


(AASHTO)
AASHTO T 180 (2009) Standard Method of Test for

Moisture-Density Relations of Soils Using
a 4.54-kg (10-lb) Rammer and an 457-mm
(18-in) Drop
AASHTO T 224 (2001; R 2004) Correction for Coarse

Particles in the Soil Compaction Test
ASTM C 117 (2004) Standard Test Method for Materials

Finer than 75-um (No. 200) Sieve in
Mineral Aggregates by Washing
ASTM C 131 (2006)Standard Test Method for Resistance

to Degradation of Small-Size Coarse
Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the
Los Angeles Machine



ASTM D 2487 (2006e1) Soils for Engineering Purposes

(Unified Soil Classification System)

Soils

ASTM D 6938 (2008a) Standard Test Method for In-Place


Depth)

Aggregates
ASTM E 11 (2009) Wire Cloth and Sieves for Testing

Purposes
1.2 DEFINITION
Degree of compaction required is expressed as a percentage of the maximum

laboratory dry density obtained by the test procedure presented in
ASTM D 1557 abbreviated as a percent of laboratory maximum dry density.
One exception is as follows: Since ASTM D 1557 applies only to soils that
have 30 percent or less by weight of their particles retained on the 3/4
inch sieve, the degree of compaction for material having more than 30
percent by weight of their particles retained on the 3/4 inch sieve will be
expressed as a percentage of the laboratory maximum dry density in
accordance with AASHTO T 180 Method D and corrected with AASHTO T 224.
All plant, equipment, and tools used in the performance of the work will be
subject to approval before the work is started and shall be maintained in
satisfactory working condition at all times. Submit a list of proposed
equipment, including descriptive data. Provide equipment which is adequate
and has the capability of producing the required compaction, meeting grade
controls, thickness control, and smoothness requirements as set forth
herein.
1.4 SUBMITTALS

SD-03 Product Data
Equipment
SD-06 Test Reports
Sampling and Testing

Field Density Tests
Sampling and testing are the responsibility of the Contractor, to be

performed by an approved testing laboratory in accordance with Section
01 45 00.00 10 QUALITY CONTROL. Perform tests at the specified frequency.
No work requiring testing will be permitted until the testing laboratory
has been inspected and approved. Test the materials to establish
compliance with the specified requirements.
1.5.1 Sampling
Take samples for laboratory testing in conformance with ASTM D 75/D 75M.
When deemed necessary, the sampling will be observed by the Contracting
Officer.
1.5.2 Tests
1.5.2.1 Sieve Analysis
Make sieve analysis in conformance with ASTM C 117 and ASTM C 136.
Complete particle-size analysis of the soils in conformance with ASTM D 422.
Sieves shall conform to ASTM E 11.
1.5.2.2 Liquid Limit and Plasticity Index
Determine liquid limit and plasticity index in accordance with ASTM D 4318.
1.5.2.3 Moisture-Density Determinations
Determine the laboratory maximum dry density and optimum moisture in

accordance with ASTM D 1557.
1.5.2.4 Field Density Tests
Measure field density in accordance with ASTM D 1556 or ASTM D 6938. For
the method presented in ASTM D 1556, use the base plate, as shown in the
drawing. For the method presented in ASTM D 6938, check and adjust the
calibration curves, if necessary, using only the sand cone method as
described in paragraph Calibration, of the ASTM publication. Tests
performed in accordance with ASTM D 6938 result in a wet unit weight of
soil and ASTM D 6938 will be used to determine the moisture content of the
soil. The calibration curves furnished with the moisture gauges shall also
be checked along with density calibration checks as described in ASTM D 6938.
The calibration checks of both the density and moisture gauges shall be
made by the prepared containers of material method, as described in
paragraph Calibration, in ASTM D 6938, on each different type of material
to be tested at the beginning of a job and at intervals as directed.
a. Submit certified copies of test results for approval not less than 30
days before material is required for the work.
b. Submit calibration curves and related test results prior to using the
device or equipment being calibrated.
c. Submit copies of field test results within 24 hours after the tests are
performed.
1.5.2.5 Wear Test
Perform wear tests in conformance with ASTM C 131.
1.5.3 Testing Frequency
1.5.3.1 Initial Tests
Perform one of each of the following tests on the proposed material prior
to commencing construction to demonstrate that the proposed material meets
all specified requirements prior to installation.
a. Sieve Analysis
b. Liquid limit and plasticity index
c. Moisture-density relationship
d. Wear
1.5.3.2 In-Place Tests
Perform one of each of the following tests on samples taken from the placed
and compacted subbase and select-material subbase or rigid pavement base
course. Samples shall be taken and tested at the rates indicated.
a. Perform density tests on every lift of material placed and at a

frequency of one set of tests for every 500 square yards, or portion
thereof, of completed area.
b. Perform sieve analysis on every lift of material placed and at a

frequency of one sieve analysis for every 1000 tons, or portion
thereof, of material placed.
c. Perform liquid limit and plasticity index tests at the same frequency
as the sieve analysis.
d. Measure the thickness of each course at intervals providing at least

one measurement for each 600 square yards or part thereof. The
thickness measurement shall be made by test holes, at least 3 inches in
diameter through the course.
1.5.4 Approval of Material
Select the source of materials 30 days prior to the time the material will
be required in the work. Tentative approval will be based on initial test
results. Final approval of the materials will be based on tests for
gradation, liquid limit, and plasticity index performed on samples taken
from the completed and compacted course.
Perform construction when the atmospheric temperature is above 35 degrees F.

When the temperature falls below 35 degrees F, protect all completed areas
by approved methods against detrimental effects of freezing. Correct
completed areas damaged by freezing, rainfall, or other weather conditions
to meet specified requirements.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
2.1.1 Base Course
Provide aggregates consisting of crushed stone, gravel, shell, sand, or

other sound, durable, approved materials processed and blended or naturally
combined. Provide aggregates which are durable and sound, free from lumps
and balls of clay, organic matter, objectionable coatings, and other
foreign material. Material retained on the No. 4 sieve shall have a
percentage of wear not to exceed 50 percent after 500 revolutions when
tested as specified in ASTM C 131. Aggregate shall be reasonably uniform
in density and quality. Slag shall be an air-cooled, blast-furnace product
having a dry weight of not less than 65 pcf. Aggregates shall have a
maximum size of 3 inch and shall be within the limits specified as follows:
Maximum Allowable Percentage by Weight

Passing Square-Mesh Sieve
_______________________________________
Sieve Designation No. 1 No.2 No. 3

________________________________________________________________________
No. 10 50 80 100
No. 200 8 8 8
The portion of any blended component and of the completed course passing the
No. 40 sieve shall be either nonplastic or shall have a liquid limit not
greater than 25 and a plasticity index not greater than 5.
2.1.2 Select-Material Subbase Course
Provide materials consisting of selected soil or other materials from field

excavation, stockpiles, or other sources and free from lumps and balls of
clay and from organic and other objectionable matter. Not more than 25
percent by weight shall pass the No. 200 sieve. The portion of material
passing the No. 40 sieve shall have a liquid limit less than 35 and a
plasticity index less than 12. The maximum particle size shall not exceed
3 inches.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 STOCKPILING MATERIAL
Prior to stockpiling of material, clear and level storage sites. Stockpile

all materials, including approved material available from excavation and
grading, in the manner and at the locations designated. Aggregates shall
be stockpiled on the cleared and leveled areas designated by the
Contracting Officer to prevent segregation. Materials obtained from
different sources shall be stockpiled separately.
3.2 PREPARATION OF UNDERLYING MATERIAL
Prior to constructing the subbase, select-material subbase, or rigid

pavement subbase course, clean the underlying course or subgrade of all
foreign substances. The surface of the underlying course or subgrade shall
meet specified compaction and surface tolerances. Correct ruts, or soft
yielding spots, in the underlying courses, subgrade areas having inadequate
compaction, and deviations of the surface from the specified requirements,
by loosening and removing soft or unsatisfactory material and by adding
approved material, reshaping to line and grade, and recompacting to
specified density requirements. For cohesionless underlying courses or
subgrades containing sands or gravels, as defined in ASTM D 2487, the
surface shall be stabilized prior to placement of the overlying course.
Accomplish stabilization by mixing the overlying course material into the
underlying course, and compacting by approved methods. The stabilized
material shall be considered as part of the underlying course and shall
meet all requirements for the underlying course. The finished underlying
course shall not be disturbed by traffic or other operations and shall be
maintained in a satisfactory condition until the overlying course is placed.
3.3 GRADE CONTROL
The finished and completed course shall conform to the lines, grades, and
cross sections shown. The lines, grades, and cross sections shown shall be
maintained by means of line and grade stakes placed by the Contractor at
the work site.
3.4 MIXING AND PLACING MATERIALS
Mix and place the materials to obtain uniformity of the material at the
water content specified. Make such adjustments in mixing or placing
procedures or in equipment as may be directed to obtain the true grades, to
minimize segregation and degradation, to reduce or accelerate loss or
increase of water, and to insure a satisfactory subbase course.
3.5 LAYER THICKNESS
The compacted thickness of the completed course shall be as indicated.

When a compacted layer of 6 inches is specified, the material may be placed
in a single layer; when a compacted thickness of more than 6 inches is
required, no layer shall be thicker than 6 inches nor be thinner than 3
inches when compacted.
3.6 COMPACTION
Compact each layer of the material, as specified, with approved compaction

equipment. Maintain water content during the compaction procedure to
within plus or minus 2 percent of optimum water content, as determined from
laboratory tests, as specified in paragraph SAMPLING AND TESTING. In all
places not accessible to the rollers, compact the mixture with
hand-operated power tampers. Compaction of the subbase or select-material
subbase shall continue until each layer is compacted through the full depth
to at least 95 percent of laboratory maximum density. Compaction of the
rigid pavement subbase course shall continue until each layer is compacted
through the full depth to at least 95 percent of laboratory maximum
density. Make such adjustments in compacting or finishing procedures as
may be directed to obtain true grades, to minimize segregation and
degradation, to reduce or increase water content, and to ensure a
satisfactory subbase course. Any materials that are found to be
unsatisfactory shall be removed and replaced with satisfactory material or
reworked, as directed, to meet the requirements of this specification.
3.7 EDGES
Place approved material along the edges of the subbase and select-material
subbase course in such quantity as will compact to the thickness of the
course being constructed. When the course is being constructed in two or
more layers, at least a 1 foot width of the shoulder shall be rolled and
compacted simultaneously with the rolling and compacting of each layer of
the subbase course, as directed.
3.8 SMOOTHNESS TEST
The surface of the top layer shall show no deviations in excess of 3/8 inch
when tested with a 12 foot straightedge. Take measurements in successive
positions parallel to the centerline of the area to be paved. Measurements
shall also be taken perpendicular to the centerline at 50 foot intervals.
Correct deviations exceeding this amount by removing material and replacing
with new material, or by reworking existing material and compacting it to
meet these specifications.
3.9 THICKNESS CONTROL
The completed thickness of the course(s) shall be in accordance with the

thickness and grade indicated on the drawings. The completed course shall
not be more than 1/2 inch deficient in thickness nor more than 1/2 inch
above or below the established grade. Where any of these tolerances are
exceeded, correct such areas by scarifying, adding new material of proper
gradation or removing material, and compacting, as directed. Where the
measured thickness is 1/2 inch or more thicker than shown, the course will
be considered as conforming with the specified thickness requirements plus
1/2 inch. The average job thickness shall be the average of the job
measurements as specified above but within 1/4 inch of the thickness shown.
3.10 MAINTENANCE
Maintain the completed course in a satisfactory condition until accepted.
SECTION 32 12 10
BITUMINOUS TACK AND PRIME COATS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 UNIT PRICES
1.2 REFERENCES


(AASHTO)
AASHTO T 102 (2009) Standard Method of Test for Spot

Test of Asphaltic Materials
AASHTO T 40 (2002; R 2006) Sampling Bituminous

Materials

Bituminous Materials
ASTM D 2027 (2010) Cutback Asphalt (Medium-Curing Type)
ASTM D 2028 (2010) Cutback Asphalt (Rapid-Curing Type)
ASTM D 2995 (1999; R 2009) Determining Application

Rate of Bituminous Distributors
ASTM D 977 (2005) Emulsified Asphalt

(LEED-NC)
Plant, equipment, machines and tools used in the work are subject to
approval and shall be maintained in a satisfactory working condition at all
times. Calibrated equipment such as asphalt distributors, scales, batching
equipment, spreaders and similar equipment, should have been recalibrated
by a calibration laboratory within 12 months prior to commencing work and
every 12 months thereafter, by such laboratory from the date of
recalibration, during the term of the contract.
1.3.2 Bituminous Distributor
Provide a distributor with pneumatic tires of such size and number that the
load produced on the base surface does not exceed 650 psi of tire width to
prevent rutting, shoving or otherwise damaging the base surface or other
layers in the pavement structure. Design and equip the distributor to
spray the bituminous material in a uniform coverage at the specified
temperature, at readily determined and controlled rates from 0.05 to 2.0
gallons per square yard, with a pressure range of 25 to 75 psi and with an
allowable variation from the specified rate of not more than plus or minus
5 percent, and at variable widths. Include with the distributor equipment
a separate power unit for the bitumen pump, full-circulation spray bars,
tachometer, pressure gauges, volume-measuring devices, adequate heaters for
heating of materials to the proper application temperature, a thermometer
for reading the temperature of tank contents, and a hand hose attachment
suitable for applying bituminous material manually to areas inaccessible to
the distributor. Equip the distributor to circulate and agitate the
bituminous material during the heating process.
1.3.3 Heating Equipment for Storage Tanks
The equipment for heating the bituminous material shall be steam, electric,
or hot oil heaters. Provide steam heaters consisting of steam coils and
equipment for producing steam, so designed that the steam cannot get into
the material. Fix an armored thermometer to the tank with a temperature
range from 40 to 400 degrees F so that the temperature of the bituminous
material may be determined at all times.
1.3.4 Power Brooms and Power Blowers
Use power brooms and power blowers suitable for cleaning the surfaces to
which the bituminous coat is to be applied.
1.4 SUBMITTALS

SD-03 Product Data
Waybills and delivery tickets, during progress of the work.

included in project in accordance with LEED.
SD-06 Test Reports
Copies of all test results for emulsified asphalt, and

bituminous materials, within 24 hours of completion of tests.
Certified copies of the manufacturer's test reports indicating
temperature viscosity relationship for cutback asphalt, compliance
with applicable specified requirements, not less than 30 days
before the material is required in the work.
Use Local/Regional Materials or products extracted, harvested, or

recovered, as well as manufactured, within a 500 mile radius from the
project site, if available from a minimum of three sources.
Inspect the materials delivered to the site for contamination and damage.
Unload and store the materials with a minimum of handling.
Apply bituminous coat only when the surface to receive the bituminous coat
is dry. Apply bituminous coat only when the atmospheric temperature in the
shade is 50 degrees F or above and when the temperature has not been below
35 degrees F for the 12 hours prior to application, unless otherwise
directed.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PRIME COAT
Asphaltic material for the prime coat shall be cut-back asphalt, Grade
MC-30, conforming to the requirements of Louisiana Department of
Transportation and Development Standard Specifications for Roads and
Bridges for "Asphaltic Materials", Part X, Section 1002.
2.1.1 Cutback Asphalt
Provide cutback asphalt conforming to ASTM D 2027, Grade MC-30.
2.2 TACK COAT
2.2.1 Cutback Asphalt
Provide cutback asphalt conforming to ASTM D 2028, Grade RC-250.
2.2.2 Emulsified Asphalt
Provide emulsified asphalt conforming to ASTM D 977, Type SS-1. Dilute the
emulsified asphalt with equal parts of water. The base asphalt used to
manufacture the emulsion shall show a negative spot when tested in
accordance with AASHTO T 102 using standard naphtha.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION OF SURFACE
Immediately before applying the bituminous coat, remove all loose material,
dirt, clay, or other objectionable material from the surface to be treated
by means of a power broom or blower supplemented with hand brooms. The
surface shall be dry and clean at the time of treatment.
3.2 APPLICATION RATE
The exact quantities within the range specified, which may be varied to
suit field conditions, will be determined by the Contracting Officer.
3.2.1 Tack Coat
Apply bituminous material for the tack coat in quantities of not less than
0.05 gallon nor more than 0.15 gallon per square yard of pavement surface.
3.2.2 Prime Coat
Apply bituminous material for the prime coat in quantities of not less than
0.18 gallon nor more than 0.35 gallon per square yard of pavement surface.
3.3 APPLICATION TEMPERATURE
3.3.1 Viscosity Relationship
Asphalt application temperature shall provide an application viscosity

between 10 and 60 seconds, Saybolt Furol, or between 20 and 120 centistokes,
kinematic. Furnish the temperature viscosity relation to the Contracting
Officer.
3.3.2 Temperature Ranges
The viscosity requirements determine the application temperature to be

used. The following is a normal range of application temperatures:
Liquid Asphalts
-------------------
MC-30 85-190 degrees F

RC-250 165-250 degrees F*
Emulsions
-------------
SS-1 70-160 degrees F
These temperature ranges exceed the flash point of the material and care
should be taken in their heating.
3.4 APPLICATION
3.4.1 General
Following preparation and subsequent inspection of the surface, apply the

bituminous prime or tack coat with the Bituminous Distributor at the
specified rate with uniform distribution over the surface to be treated.
Properly treat all areas and spots missed by the distributor with the hand
spray. Until the succeeding layer of pavement is placed, maintain the
surface by protecting the surface against damage and by repairing deficient
areas at no additional cost to the Government. If required, spread clean
dry sand to effectively blot up any excess bituminous material. No

smoking, fires, or flames other than those from the heaters that are a part
of the equipment are permitted within 25 feet of heating, distributing, and
transferring operations of bituminous material other than bituminous
emulsions. Prevent all traffic, except for paving equipment used in
constructing the surfacing, from using the underlying material, whether
primed or not, until the surfacing is completed. The bituminous coat shall
conform to all requirements as described herein.
3.4.2 Prime Coat
Apply a prime coat at locations shown on the Drawings. The prime coat is
required if it will be at least 7 days before the surfacing (Asphalt cement
hot mix concrete) layer is constructed on the underlying (base course,
etc.) compacted material. The type of liquid asphalt and application rate
will be as specified herein. Protect the underlying from any damage
(water, traffic, etc.) until the surfacing is placed. If the Contractor
places the surfacing within seven days, the choice of protection measures
or actions to be taken is at the Contractor's option. Repair (recompact or
replace) damage to the underlying material caused by lack of, or
inadequate, protection by approved methods at no additional cost to the
Government. If the Contractor opts to use the prime coat, apply as soon as
possible after consolidation of the underlying material. Apply the
bituminous material uniformly over the surface to be treated at a pressure
range of 25 to 75 psi; the rate shall be as specified above in paragraph
APPLICATION RATE. To obtain uniform application of the prime coat on the
surface treated at the junction of previous and subsequent applications,
spread building paper on the surface for a sufficient distance back from
the ends of each application to start and stop the prime coat on the paper
and to ensure that all sprayers will operate at full force on the surface
to be treated. Immediately after application remove and destroy the
building paper.
3.4.3 Tack Coat
Apply tack coat at the locations shown on the drawings. Apply the tack
coat when the surface to be treated is dry. Immediately following the
preparation of the surface for treatment, apply the bituminous material by
means of the bituminous distributor, within the limits of temperature
specified herein and at a rate as specified above in paragraph APPLICATION
RATE. Apply the bituminous material so that uniform distribution is
obtained over the entire surface to be treated. Treat lightly coated areas
and spots missed by the distributor with the bituminous material.
Following the application of bituminous material, allow the surface to cure
without being disturbed for period of time necessary to permit setting of
the tack coat. Apply the bituminous tack coat only as far in advance of
the placing of the overlying layer as required for that day's operation.
Maintain and protect the treated surface from damage until the succeeding
course of pavement is placed.
3.5 CURING PERIOD
Following application of the bituminous material and prior to application

of the succeeding layer of pavement, allow the bituminous coat to cure and
to obtain evaporation of any volatiles or moisture. Maintain the coated
surface until the succeeding layer of pavement is placed, by protecting the
surface against damage and by repairing and recoating deficient areas.
Allow the prime coat to cure without being disturbed for a period of at
least 48 hours or longer, as may be necessary to attain penetration into
the treated course. Furnish and spread enough sand to effectively blot up
and cure excess bituminous material.
Samples of the bituminous material used shall be obtained by the Contractor

as directed, under the supervision of the Contracting Officer. The sample
may be retained and tested by the Government at no cost to the Contractor.
3.7 SAMPLING AND TESTING
Perform sampling and testing by an approved commercial testing laboratory

or by facilities furnished by the Contractor. No work requiring testing
will be permitted until the facilities have been inspected and approved.
3.7.1 Sampling
The samples of bituminous material, unless otherwise specified, shall be in

accordance with ASTM D 140/D 140M or AASHTO T 40. Sources from which
bituminous materials are to be obtained shall be selected and notification
furnished the Contracting Officer within 15 days after the award of the
contract.
3.7.2 Calibration Test
Furnish all equipment, materials, and labor necessary to calibrate the

bituminous distributor. Calibration shall be made with the approved job
material and prior to applying the bituminous coat material to the prepared
surface. Calibrate the bituminous distributor in accordance with
ASTM D 2995.
3.7.3 Trial Applications
Before providing the complete bituminous coat, apply three lengths of at

least 100 feet for the full width of the distributor bar to evaluate the
amount of bituminous material that can be satisfactorily applied.
3.7.3.1 Tack Coat Trial Application Rate
Unless otherwise authorized, apply the trial application rate of bituminous

tack coat materials in the amount of 0.05 gallons per square yard. Other
trial applications shall be made using various amounts of material as may
be deemed necessary.
3.7.3.2 Prime Coat Trial Application Rate
Unless otherwise authorized, apply the trial application rate of bituminous

materials in the amount of 0.25 gallon per square yard. Other trial
applications shall be made using various amounts of material as may be
deemed necessary.
3.7.4 Sampling and Testing During Construction
Perform quality control sampling and testing as required in paragraph FIELD

QUALITY CONTROL.
3.8 TRAFFIC CONTROLS
Keep traffic off surfaces freshly treated with bituminous material.
Provide sufficient warning signs and barricades so that traffic will not
travel over freshly treated surfaces.
SECTION 32 12 16
HOT-MIX ASPHALT (HMA) FOR ROADS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES


(AASHTO)
AASHTO M 320 (2010) Standard Specification for

Performance-Graded Asphalt Binder
ASPHALT INSTITUTE (AI)
AI MS-02 (1997 6th Ed) Mix Design Methods

ASTM C 1252 (2010) Standard Test Methods for

Uncompacted Void Content of Fine Aggregate
(as Influenced by Particle Shape, Surface
Texture, and Grading)
ASTM C 127 (2007) Standard Test Method for Density,

Relative Density (Specific Gravity), and
Absorption of Coarse Aggregate
ASTM C 128 (2007a) Standard Test Method for Density,

Relative Density (Specific Gravity), and
Absorption of Fine Aggregate
ASTM C 131 (2006) Standard Test Method for Resistance

Los Angeles Machine


Clay Lumps and Friable Particles in
Aggregates
ASTM C 29/C 29M (2009) Standard Test Method for Bulk

Density ("Unit Weight") and Voids in
Aggregate

Total Evaporable Moisture Content of
Aggregate by Drying
ASTM C 88 (2005) Standard Test Method for Soundness

of Aggregates by Use of Sodium Sulfate or
Magnesium Sulfate

Bituminous Materials
ASTM D 1461 (1985; R 2006) Moisture or Volatile

Distillates in Bituminous Paving Mixtures
ASTM D 2172 (2005) Quantitative Extraction of Bitumen

from Bituminous Paving Mixtures
ASTM D 2419 (2009) Sand Equivalent Value of Soils and

Fine Aggregate
ASTM D 242/D 242M (2009) Mineral Filler for Bituminous

Paving Mixtures
ASTM D 2489/D 2489M (2008) Estimating Degree of Particle

Coating of Bituminous-Aggregate Mixtures
ASTM D 2950 (2009) Density of Bituminous Concrete in

Place by Nuclear Methods
ASTM D 3665 (2007) Random Sampling of Construction

Materials
ASTM D 3666 (2009a) Minimum Requirements for Agencies

Testing and Inspecting Road and Paving
Materials
ASTM D 4125 (2005) Asphalt Content of Bituminous

Mixtures by the Nuclear Method
ASTM D 4791 (2010) Flat Particles, Elongated

Particles, or Flat and Elongated Particles
in Coarse Aggregate
ASTM D 4867/D 4867M (2009) Effect of Moisture on Asphalt

Concrete Paving Mixtures
ASTM D 5444 (2008) Mechanical Size Analysis of

Extracted Aggregate
ASTM D 6307 (2005; R 2010) Asphalt Content of Hot Mix

Asphalt by Ignition Method
ASTM D 6926 (2010) Standard Practice for Preparation

of Bituminous Specimens Using Marshall
Apparatus
ASTM D 6927 (2006) Standard Test Method for Marshall

Stability and Flow of Bituminous Mixtures
ASTM D 995 (1995b; R 2002) Mixing Plants for

Hot-Mixed, Hot-Laid Bituminous Paving
Mixtures
ASTM D3381/D3381M (2009a) Viscosity-Graded Asphalt Cement

for Use in Pavement Construction
COE CRD-C 171 (1995) Standard Test Method for

Determining Percentage of Crushed
Particles in Aggregate
Perform the work consisting of pavement courses composed of mineral

aggregate and asphalt material heated and mixed in a central mixing plant
and placed on a prepared course. HMA designed and constructed in
accordance with this section shall conform to the lines, grades,
thicknesses, and typical cross sections shown on the drawings. Construct
each course to the depth, section, or elevation required by the drawings
and roll, finish, and approve it before the placement of the next course.
1.2.1 Asphalt Mixing Plant
Plants used for the preparation of hot-mix asphalt shall conform to the
requirements of ASTM D 995 with the following changes:
a. Truck Scales. Weigh the asphalt mixture on approved, certified scales

at the Contractor's expense. Inspect and seal scales at least annually
by an approved calibration laboratory.
b. Testing Facilities. Provide laboratory facilities at the plant for the

use of the Government's acceptance testing and the Contractor's quality
control testing.
c. Inspection of Plant. Provide the Contracting Officer with access at

all times, to all areas of the plant for checking adequacy of
equipment; inspecting operation of the plant; verifying weights,
proportions, and material properties; checking the temperatures
maintained in the preparation of the mixtures and for taking samples.
Provide assistance as requested, for the Government to procure any
desired samples.
d. Storage Bins. Use of storage bins for temporary storage of hot-mix

asphalt will be permitted as follows:
(1) The asphalt mixture may be stored in non-insulated storage bins

for a period of time not exceeding 3 hours.
(2) The asphalt mixture may be stored in insulated storage bins for a
period of time not exceeding 8 hours. The mix drawn from bins
shall meet the same requirements as mix loaded directly into
trucks.
1.2.2 Hauling Equipment
Provide trucks for hauling hot-mix asphalt having tight, clean, and smooth
metal beds. To prevent the mixture from adhering to them, the truck beds
shall be lightly coated with a minimum amount of paraffin oil, lime
solution, or other approved material. Petroleum based products shall not
be used as a release agent. Each truck shall have a suitable cover to
protect the mixture from adverse weather. When necessary to ensure that
the mixture will be delivered to the site at the specified temperature,
truck beds shall be insulated or heated and covers (tarps) shall be
securely fastened.
1.2.3 Asphalt Pavers
Provide asphalt pavers which are self-propelled, with an activated screed,

heated as necessary, and capable of spreading and finishing courses of
hot-mix asphalt which will meet the specified thickness, smoothness, and
grade. The paver shall have sufficient power to propel itself and the
hauling equipment without adversely affecting the finished surface.
1.2.3.1 Receiving Hopper
Provide paver with a receiving hopper of sufficient capacity to permit a

uniform spreading operation and equipped with a distribution system to
place the mixture uniformly in front of the screed without segregation.
The screed shall effectively produce a finished surface of the required
evenness and texture without tearing, shoving, or gouging the mixture.
1.2.3.2 Automatic Grade Controls
If an automatic grade control device is used, equip the paver with a

control system capable of automatically maintaining the specified screed
elevation. The control system shall be automatically actuated from either
a reference line and/or through a system of mechanical sensors or
sensor-directed mechanisms or devices which will maintain the paver screed
at a predetermined transverse slope and at the proper elevation to obtain
the required surface. The transverse slope controller shall be capable of
maintaining the screed at the desired slope within plus or minus 0.1
percent. A transverse slope controller shall not be used to control
grade. Provide controls capable of working in conjunction with any of the
following attachments:
a. Ski-type device of not less than 30 feet in length.
b. Taut stringline set to grade.
c. Short ski or shoe for joint matching.
d. Laser control.
1.2.4 Rollers
Rollers shall be in good condition and shall be operated at slow speeds to

avoid displacement of the asphalt mixture. The number, type, and weight of
rollers shall be sufficient to compact the mixture to the required density
while it is still in a workable condition. Do not use equipment which
causes excessive crushing of the aggregate.
1.3 SUBMITTALS


SD-03 Product Data
Mix Design; G
Proposed JMF.
Contractor Quality Control; G
Quality control plan.
Material Acceptance; G
Acceptance test results.
SD-04 Samples
Asphalt Cement Binder
A 5 gallon sample for mix design verification.
Aggregates
Sufficient materials to produce 200 lb of blended mixture for

mix design verification.
SD-06 Test Reports
Aggregates; G
QC Monitoring
Aggregate and QC test results.
SD-07 Certificates
Asphalt Cement Binder; G
Copies of certified test data.
Amount, type and description of any modifiers blended into the

asphalt cement binder
Testing Laboratory
Certification of compliance.
Plant Scale Calibration Certification
Do not place the hot-mix asphalt upon a wet surface or when the surface
temperature of the underlying course is less than specified in Table 3.
The temperature requirements may be waived by the Contracting Officer, if
requested; however, all other requirements, including compaction, shall be
met.
Table 3. Surface Temperature Limitations of Underlying Course
Mat Thickness, inches Degrees F
3 or greater 40
Less than 3 45
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 AGGREGATES
Provide aggregates consisting of crushed stone, crushed gravel, crushed

slag, screenings, natural sand and mineral filler, as required. The
portion of material retained on the No. 4 sieve is coarse aggregate. The
portion of material passing the No. 4 sieve and retained on the No. 200
sieve is fine aggregate. The portion passing the No. 200 sieve is defined
as mineral filler. Submit all aggregate test results and samples to the
Contracting Officer at least 14 days prior to start of construction.
Provide coarse aggregate consisting of sound, tough, durable particles,

free from films of material that would prevent thorough coating and bonding
with the asphalt material and free from organic matter and other
deleterious substances. All individual coarse aggregate sources shall meet
a. The percentage of loss shall not be greater than 40 percent after 500
revolutions when tested in accordance with ASTM C 131.
b. The percentage of loss shall not be greater than 18 percent after five
cycles when tested in accordance with ASTM C 88 using magnesium sulfate
or 12 percent when using sodium sulfate.
c. At least 75 percent by weight of coarse aggregate shall have at least

two or more fractured faces when tested in accordance with COE CRD-C 171.
Fractured faces shall be produced by crushing.
d. The particle shape shall be essentially cubical and the aggregate shall
not contain more than 20% percent, by weight, of flat and elongated
particles (3:1 ratio of maximum to minimum) when tested in accordance
with ASTM D 4791.
e. Slag shall be air-cooled, blast furnace slag, with a compacted weight

of not less than 75 lb/cu ft when tested in accordance with
ASTM C 29/C 29M.
f. Clay lumps and friable particles shall not exceed 0.3 percent, by
weight, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 142.
Fine aggregate shall consist of clean, sound, tough, durable particles free
from coatings of clay, silt, or any objectionable material and containing
no clay balls.
a. All individual fine aggregate sources shall have a sand equivalent
value not less than 45 when tested in accordance with ASTM D 2419.
b. The fine aggregate portion of the blended aggregate shall have an

uncompacted void content not less than 45.0 percent when tested in
accordance with ASTM C 1252 Method A.
c. The quantity of natural sand (noncrushed material) added to the

aggregate blend shall not exceed 25 percent by weight of total
aggregate.
d. Clay lumps and friable particles shall not exceed 0.3 percent, by
weight, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 142
2.1.3 Mineral Filler
Mineral filler shall be nonplastic material meeting the requirements of

ASTM D 242/D 242M.
2.1.4 Aggregate Gradation
The combined aggregate gradation shall conform to gradations specified in

Table 4, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 136 and ASTM C 117, and
shall not vary from the low limit on one sieve to the high limit on the
adjacent sieve or vice versa, but grade uniformly from coarse to fine.
Table 4. Aggregate Gradations
Gradation
Percent Passing
Sieve Size, inch by Mass
1 ---
3/4 ---
1/2 100
3/8 76-96
No. 4 58-78
No. 8 40-60
No. 16 28-48
No. 30 18-38
No. 50 11-27
No. 100 6-18
No. 200 3-6
2.2 ASPHALT CEMENT BINDER
Asphalt cement binder shall conform to AASHTO M 320 Performance Grade (PG)
PG-64-22. As an alternate, ASTM D3381/D3381M Table 4 or Viscosity Grade
AC-30 may be used. Test data indicating grade certification shall be
provided by the supplier at the time of delivery of each load to the mix
plant. Submit copies of these certifications to the Contracting Officer.
The supplier is defined as the last source of any modification to the
binder. The Contracting Officer may sample and test the binder at the mix
plant at any time before or during mix production. Obtain samples for this
verification testing in accordance with ASTM D 140/D 140M and in the
presence of the Contracting Officer. Furnish these samples to the
Contracting Officer for the verification testing, which shall be at no cost
to the Contractor. Submit samples of the asphalt cement specified for
approval not less than 14 days before start of the test section.
2.3 MIX DESIGN
a. Develop the mix design. The asphalt mix shall be composed of a mixture
of well-graded aggregate, mineral filler if required, and asphalt
material. The aggregate fractions shall be sized, handled in separate
size groups, and combined in such proportions that the resulting
mixture meets the grading requirements of the job mix formula (JMF).
Do not produce hot-mix asphalt for payment until a JMF has been
approved. The hot-mix asphalt shall be designed in accordance with
Marshall (MS-02)procedures and the criteria shown in Table 5. Use the
hand-held hammer to compact the specimens for Marshall mix design. If
the Tensile Strength Ratio (TSR) of the composite mixture, as
determined by ASTM D 4867/D 4867M is less than 75, the aggregates shall
be rejected or the asphalt mixture treated with an approved
anti-stripping agent. The amount of anti-stripping agent added shall
be sufficient to produce a TSR of not less than 75. Provide an
antistrip agent, if required, at no additional cost. Sufficient
materials to produce 200 pound of blended mixture shall be provided to
the Contracting Officer for verification of mix design at least 14 days
prior to construction of test section.
2.3.1 JMF Requirements
Submit in writing the job mix formula for approval at least 14 days prior
to the start of the test section including as a minimum:
a. Percent passing each sieve size.
b. Percent of asphalt cement.
c. Percent of each aggregate and mineral filler to be used.
d. Asphalt viscosity grade, penetration grade, or performance grade.
e. Number of blows of hand-held hammer per side of molded specimen. (NA

for Superpave)
f. Number of gyrations of Superpave gyratory compactor, (NA for Marshall

mix design)
g. Laboratory mixing temperature.
h. Lab compaction temperature.
i. Temperature-viscosity relationship of the asphalt cement.
j. Plot of the combined gradation on the 0.45 power gradation chart,

stating the nominal maximum size.
k. Graphical plots of stability (NA for Superpave), flow (NA for

Superpave), air voids, voids in the mineral aggregate, and unit weight
versus asphalt content as shown in AI MS-02.
l. Specific gravity and absorption of each aggregate.
m. Percent natural sand.
n. Percent particles with 2 or more fractured faces (in coarse aggregate).
o. Fine aggregate angularity.
p. Percent flat or elongated particles (in coarse aggregate).
q. Tensile Strength Ratio(TSR).
r. Antistrip agent (if required) and amount.
s. List of all modifiers and amount.
t. Correlation of hand-held hammer with mechanical hammer (NA for

Superpave).
u. Percentage and properties (asphalt content, binder properties, and

aggregate properties) of reclaimed asphalt pavement (RAP) in accordance
with paragraph RECYCLED HOT-MIX ASPHALT, if RAP is used.
Table 5. Mix Design Criteria
Test Property 50 Blows or
Stability, pounds, minimum

*1000
Flow, 0.01 inch 8-18
Air voids, percent 3-5
Percent Voids in 14
mineral aggregate VMA,
(minimum)
TSR, minimum percent 75
* This is a minimum requirement. The average during construction shall be

significantly higher than this number to ensure compliance with the
specifications.
** Calculate VMA in accordance with AI MS-02, based on ASTM C 127 and
ASTM C 128 bulk specific gravity for the aggregate.
2.3.2 Adjustments to Field JMF
Keep the Laboratory JMF for each mixture in effect until a new formula is
approved in writing by the Contracting Officer. Should a change in sources
of any materials be made, perform a new laboratory jmf design and a new JMF
approved before the new material is used. The Contractor will be allowed
to adjust the Laboratory JMF within the limits specified below to optimize
mix volumetric properties with the approval of the Contracting Officer.
Adjustments to the Laboratory JMF shall be applied to the field (plant)
established JMF and limited to those values as shown. Adjustments shall be
targeted to produce or nearly produce 4 percent voids total mix (VTM).
TABLE 6. Field (Plant) Established JMF Tolerances

Sieves Adjustments (plus or minus), percent
1/2 inch 3
No. 4 3
No. 8 3
No. 200 1
Binder Content 0.40
If adjustments are needed that exceed these limits, develop a new mix
design. Tolerances given above may permit the aggregate grading to be
outside the limits shown in Table 4; while not desirable, this is
acceptable, except for the No. 200 sieve, which shall remain within the
aggregate grading of Table 4.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION OF ASPHALT BINDER MATERIAL
Heat the asphalt cement material avoiding local overheating and providing a
continuous supply of the asphalt material to the mixer at a uniform
temperature. The temperature of unmodified asphalts shall be no more than
325 degrees F when added to the aggregates. Performance-Graded (PG)
asphalts shall be within the temperature range of 265-320 degrees F when
added to the aggregate.
3.2 PREPARATION OF MINERAL AGGREGATE
Heat and dry the aggregate for the mixture prior to mixing. No damage
shall occur to the aggregates due to the maximum temperature and rate of
heating used. The temperature of the aggregate and mineral filler shall
not exceed 350 degrees F when the asphalt cement is added. The temperature
shall not be lower than is required to obtain complete coating and uniform
distribution on the aggregate particles and to provide a mixture of
satisfactory workability.
3.3 PREPARATION OF HOT-MIX ASPHALT MIXTURE
The aggregates and the asphalt cement shall be weighed or metered and
introduced into the mixer in the amount specified by the JMF. Mix the
combined materials until the aggregate obtains a uniform coating of asphalt
binder and is thoroughly distributed throughout the mixture. Wet mixing
time shall be the shortest time that will produce a satisfactory mixture,
but no less than 25 seconds for batch plants. Establish the wet mixing
time for all plants based on the procedure for determining the percentage
of coated particles described in ASTM D 2489/D 2489M, for each individual
plant and for each type of aggregate used. The wet mixing time will be set
to at least achieve 95 percent of coated particles. The moisture content
of all hot-mix asphalt upon discharge from the plant shall not exceed 0.5
percent by total weight of mixture as measured by ASTM D 1461.
3.4 PREPARATION OF THE UNDERLYING SURFACE
Immediately before placing the hot mix asphalt, clean the underlying course
of dust and debris. Apply a prime coat and/or tack coat in accordance with
the contract specifications.
3.5 TEST SECTION
Prior to full production, place a test section for each JMF used.
Construct a test section 250 - 500 feet long and two paver passes wide
placed for two lanes, with a longitudinal cold joint. The test section
shall be of the same thickness as the course which it represents. The
underlying grade or pavement structure upon which the test section is to be
constructed shall be the same as the remainder of the course represented by
the test section. The equipment and personnel used in construction of the
test section shall be the same equipment to be used on the remainder of the
course represented by the test section. Place the test section as part of
the project pavement, as approved by the Contracting Officer.
3.5.1 Additional Test Sections
If the initial test section should prove to be unacceptable, make the

necessary adjustments to the JMF, plant operation, placing procedures,
and/or rolling procedures and place a second test section. Additional test
sections, as required, shall be constructed and evaluated for conformance
to the specifications. Full production shall not begin until an acceptable
section has been constructed and accepted.
3.6 TESTING LABORATORY
Use a laboratory to develop the JMF that meets the requirements of

ASTM D 3666. The Government will inspect the laboratory equipment and test
procedures prior to the start of hot mix operations for conformance to
ASTM D 3666. The laboratory shall maintain the Corps certification for the
duration of the project. A statement signed by the manager of the
laboratory stating that it meets these requirements or clearly listing all
deficiencies shall be submitted to the Contracting Officer prior to the
start of construction. The statement shall contain as a minimum:
a. Qualifications of personnel; laboratory manager, supervising

technician, and testing technicians.
b. A listing of equipment to be used in developing the job mix.
c. A copy of the laboratory's quality control system.
d. Evidence of participation in the AASHTO Materials Reference Laboratory

(AMRL) program.
3.7 TRANSPORTING AND PLACING
3.7.1 Transporting
Transport the hot-mix asphalt from the mixing plant to the site in clean,
tight vehicles. Schedule deliveries so that placing and compacting of
mixture is uniform with minimum stopping and starting of the paver.
Provide adequate artificial lighting for night placements. Hauling over
freshly placed material will not be permitted until the material has been
compacted as specified, and allowed to cool to 140 degrees F. To deliver
mix to the paver, use a material transfer vehicle operated to produce
continuous forward motion of the paver.
3.7.2 Placing
Place and compact the mix at a temperature suitable for obtaining density,
surface smoothness, and other specified requirements. Upon arrival, place

the mixture to the full width by an asphalt paver; it shall be struck off
in a uniform layer of such depth that, when the work is completed, it will
have the required thickness and conform to the grade and contour
indicated. Regulate the speed of the paver to eliminate pulling and
tearing of the asphalt mat. Unless otherwise permitted, placement of the
mixture shall begin along the centerline of a crowned section or on the
high side of areas with a one-way slope. Place the mixture in consecutive
adjacent strips having a minimum width of 10 feet. The longitudinal joint
in one course shall offset the longitudinal joint in the course immediately
below by at least 1 foot; however, the joint in the surface course shall be
at the centerline of the pavement. Transverse joints in one course shall
be offset by at least 10 feet from transverse joints in the previous
course. Transverse joints in adjacent lanes shall be offset a minimum of
10 feet. On isolated areas where irregularities or unavoidable obstacles
make the use of mechanical spreading and finishing equipment impractical,
the mixture may be spread and luted by hand tools.
3.8 COMPACTION OF MIXTURE
After placing, the mixture shall be thoroughly and uniformly compacted by

rolling. Compact the surface as soon as possible without causing
displacement, cracking or shoving. The sequence of rolling operations and
the type of rollers used shall be at the discretion of the Contractor. The
speed of the roller shall, at all times, be sufficiently slow to avoid
displacement of the hot mixture and be effective in compaction. Any
displacement occurring as a result of reversing the direction of the
roller, or from any other cause, shall be corrected at once. Furnish
sufficient rollers to handle the output of the plant. Continue rolling
until the surface is of uniform texture, true to grade and cross section,
and the required field density is obtained. To prevent adhesion of the
mixture to the roller, keep the wheels properly moistened but excessive
water will not be permitted. In areas not accessible to the roller, the
mixture shall be thoroughly compacted with hand tampers. Any mixture that
becomes loose and broken, mixed with dirt, contains check-cracking, or is
in any way defective shall be removed full depth, replaced with fresh hot
mixture and immediately compacted to conform to the surrounding area. This
work shall be done at the Contractor's expense. Skin patching will not be
allowed.
3.9 JOINTS
The formation of joints shall be performed ensuring a continuous bond

between the courses and to obtain the required density. All joints shall
have the same texture as other sections of the course and meet the
requirements for smoothness and grade.
3.9.1 Transverse Joints
Do not pass the roller over the unprotected end of the freshly laid
mixture, except when necessary to form a transverse joint. When necessary
to form a transverse joint, it shall be made by means of placing a bulkhead
or by tapering the course. The tapered edge shall be cut back to its full
depth and width on a straight line to expose a vertical face prior to
placing material at the joint. Remove the cutback material from the
project. In both methods, all contact surfaces shall be given a light tack
coat of asphalt material before placing any fresh mixture against the joint.
3.9.2 Longitudinal Joints
Longitudinal joints which are irregular, damaged, uncompacted, cold (less

than 175 degrees F at the time of placing adjacent lanes), or otherwise
defective, shall be cut back a maximum of 3 inches from the top of the
course with a cutting wheel to expose a clean, sound vertical surface for
the full depth of the course. All cutback material shall be removed from
the project. All contact surfaces shall be given a light tack coat of
asphalt material prior to placing any fresh mixture against the joint. The
Contractor will be allowed to use an alternate method if it can be
demonstrated that density, smoothness, and texture can be met.
3.10 CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL
3.10.1 General Quality Control Requirements
Develop an approved Quality Control Plan. Do not produce hot-mix asphalt

for payment until the quality control plan has been approved addressing all
elements which affect the quality of the pavement including, but not
limited to:
a. Mix Design
b. Aggregate Grading
c. Quality of Materials
d. Stockpile Management
e. Proportioning
f. Mixing and Transportation
g. Mixture Volumetrics
h. Moisture Content of Mixtures
i. Placing and Finishing
j. Joints
k. Compaction
l. Surface Smoothness
3.10.2 Testing Laboratory
Provide a fully equipped asphalt laboratory located at the plant or job

site and meeting the pertinent requirements in ASTM D 3666. Laboratory
facilities shall be kept clean and all equipment maintained in proper
working condition. The Contracting Officer shall be permitted unrestricted
access to inspect the Contractor's laboratory facility, to witness quality
control activities, and to perform any check testing desired. The
Contracting Officer will advise the Contractor in writing of any noted
deficiencies concerning the laboratory facility, equipment, supplies, or
testing personnel and procedures. When the deficiencies are serious enough
to adversely affect test results, the incorporation of the materials into
the work shall be suspended immediately and will not be permitted to resume
until the deficiencies are corrected.
3.10.3 Quality Control Testing
Perform all quality control tests applicable to these specifications and as

set forth in the Quality Control Program. The testing program shall
include, but shall not be limited to, tests for the control of asphalt
content, aggregate gradation, temperatures, aggregate moisture, moisture in
the asphalt mixture, laboratory air voids, stability (NA for Superpave),
flow (NA for Superpave), in-place density, grade and smoothness. Develop a
Quality Control Testing Plan as part of the Quality Control Program.
3.10.3.1 Asphalt Content
A minimum of two tests to determine asphalt content will be performed per

lot (a lot is defined in paragraph MATERIAL ACCEPTANCE and PERCENT PAYMENT)
by one of the following methods: the extraction method in accordance with
ASTM D 2172, Method A or B, the ignition method in accordance with
ASTM D 6307, or the nuclear method in accordance with ASTM D 4125.
Calibrate the ignition oven or the nuclear gauge for the specific mix being
used. For the extraction method, determine the weight of ash, as described
in ASTM D 2172, as part of the first extraction test performed at the
beginning of plant production; and as part of every tenth extraction test
performed thereafter, for the duration of plant production. The last
weight of ash value obtained shall be used in the calculation of the
asphalt content for the mixture.
3.10.3.2 Gradation
Determine aggregate gradations a minimum of twice per lot from mechanical

analysis of recovered aggregate in accordance with ASTM D 5444. When
asphalt content is determined by the ignition oven or nuclear method,
aggregate gradation shall be determined from hot bin samples on batch
plants, or from the cold feed on drum mix plants. For batch plants, test
aggregates in accordance with ASTM C 136 using actual batch weights to
determine the combined aggregate gradation of the mixture.
3.10.3.3 Temperatures
Check temperatures at least four times per lot, at necessary locations, to

determine the temperature at the dryer, the asphalt cement in the storage
tank, the asphalt mixture at the plant, and the asphalt mixture at the job
site.
3.10.3.4 Aggregate Moisture
Determine the moisture content of aggregate used for production a minimum

of once per lot in accordance with ASTM C 566.
3.10.3.5 Moisture Content of Mixture
Determine the moisture content of the mixture at least once per lot in
accordance with ASTM D 1461 or an approved alternate procedure.
3.10.3.6 Laboratory Air Voids, Marshall Stability and Flow
Take mixture samples at least four times per lot compacted into specimens,
using 50 blows per side with the hand-held Marshall hammer as described in
ASTM D 6926. After compaction, determine the laboratory air voids of each
specimen. Stability and flow shall be determined for the
Marshall-compacted specimens, in accordance with ASTM D 6927.
3.10.3.7 In-Place Density
Conduct any necessary testing to ensure the specified density is achieved.

A nuclear gauge may be used to monitor pavement density in accordance with
ASTM D 2950.
3.10.3.8 Grade and Smoothness
Conduct the necessary checks to ensure the grade and smoothness

requirements are met in accordance with paragraphs MATERIAL ACCEPTANCE and
PERCENT PAYMENT.
3.10.3.9 Additional Testing
Any additional testing, which the Contractor deems necessary to control the
process, may be performed at the Contractor's option.
3.10.3.10 QC Monitoring
Submit all QC test results to the Contracting Officer on a daily basis as

the tests are performed. The Contracting Officer reserves the right to
monitor any of the Contractor's quality control testing and to perform
duplicate testing as a check to the Contractor's quality control testing.
3.10.4 Sampling
When directed by the Contracting Officer, sample and test any material
which appears inconsistent with similar material being produced, unless
such material is voluntarily removed and replaced or deficiencies corrected
by the Contractor. All sampling shall be in accordance with standard
procedures specified.
3.10.5 Control Charts
For process control, establish and maintain linear control charts on both
individual samples and the running average of last four samples for the
parameters listed in Table 8, as a minimum. These control charts shall be
posted as directed by the Contracting Officer and kept current at all
times. The control charts shall identify the project number, the test
parameter being plotted, the individual sample numbers, the Action and
Suspension Limits listed in Table 8 applicable to the test parameter being
plotted, and the Contractor's test results. Target values from the JMF
shall also be shown on the control charts as indicators of central tendency
for the cumulative percent passing, asphalt content, and laboratory air
voids parameters. When the test results exceed either applicable Action
Limit, take immediate steps to bring the process back in control. When the
test results exceed either applicable Suspension Limit, halt production
until the problem is solved. Use the control charts as part of the process
control system for identifying trends so that potential problems can be
corrected before they occur. Make decisions concerning mix modifications
based on analysis of the results provided in the control charts. The
Quality Control Plan shall indicate the appropriate action to be taken to
bring the process into control when certain parameters exceed their Action
Limits.
Table 8. Action and Suspension Limits for the Parameters to be Plotted on

Individual and Running Average Control Charts
Running Average of
Individual Samples Last Four Samples
Action Suspension Action Suspension

Parameter to be Plotted Limit Limit Limit Limit
----------------------------------------------------------------------
No. 4 sieve, Cumulative % 6 8 4 5

Passing, deviation from JMF
target; plus or minus values
No. 30 sieve, Cumulative % 4 6 3 4

No. 200 sieve, Cumulative % 1.4 2.0 1.1 1.5

Stability, pounds (minimum) (NA for Superpave)

75 Blow JMF 1800 1700 1900 1800
50 Blow JMF 1000 900 1100 1000
Flow, 0.01 inches (NA for Superpave)
75 Blow 8 min. 7 min. 9 min. 8 min.
16 max. 17 max. 15 max. 16 max.
50 Blow 8 min. 7 min. 9 min. 8 min.
18 max. 19 max. 17 max. 18 max.
Asphalt content, % deviation 0.4 0.5 0.2 0.3

from JMF target; plus or minus
value
Laboratory Air Voids, % No specific action and suspension

deviation from JMF target limits set since this parameter is
value used to determine percent payment
In-place Mat Density, No specific action and suspension

% of TMD limits set since this parameter is
used to determine percent payment
In-place Joint Density, No specific action and suspension

% of TMD limits set since this parameter is
used to determine percent payment
3.11 MATERIAL ACCEPTANCE
Testing for acceptability of work will be performed by an independent

laboratory hired by the Contractor. Forward test results and payment
calculations daily to the Contracting Officer. Acceptance of the plant
produced mix and in-place requirements will be on a lot to lot basis. A
standard lot for all requirements will be equal to 8 hours of asphalt
placed in one day. In order to evaluate material acceptance, each lot
will be divided into four equal sublots.
Hot Bin gradations for the asphalt wearing course shall be tested in
accordance with ASTM C 136 and ASTM C 117. A minimum of one test shall be
conducted. Marshall specimens shall be taken in accordance with methods
described in AI MS-2. At least two sets of specimens shall be taken.
Asphalt extractions shall be performed in accordance with ASTM D 2172,
Method A or B. At least one asphalt extraction shall be conducted. Field
density tests shall be conducted in accordance with ASTM D 2950. One test
shall be conducted for each 300 square yards of pavement placed. The mat
density shall be 97.5 to 100.5 percent and the joint density shall be 95.5
to 100.5 percent of the density obtained from laboratory-compacted
specimens. Thickness measurements shall be taken at a minimum of one
measurement for each 1,000 square yards of pavement placed.
3.11.1 Sublot Sampling
One random mixture sample for determining laboratory air voids, theoretical
maximum density, and for any additional testing the Contracting Officer
desires, will be taken from a loaded truck delivering mixture to each
sublot, or other appropriate location for each sublot. All samples will be
selected randomly, using commonly recognized methods of assuring randomness
conforming to ASTM D 3665 and employing tables of random numbers or
computer programs. Laboratory air voids will be determined from three
laboratory compacted specimens of each sublot sample in accordance with
ASTM D 6926. The specimens will be compacted within 2 hours of the time
the mixture was loaded into trucks at the asphalt plant. Samples will not
be reheated prior to compaction and insulated containers will be used as
necessary to maintain the temperature.
3.11.2 Additional Sampling and Testing
The Contracting Officer reserves the right to direct additional samples and
tests for any area which appears to deviate from the specification
requirements. The cost of any additional testing will be paid for by the
Government. Testing in these areas will be in addition to the lot testing,
and the requirements for these areas will be the same as those for a lot.
3.11.3 Grade
The final wearing surface of pavement shall conform to the elevations and
cross sections shown and shall vary not more than 0.05 foot from the plan
grade established and approved at site of work. Finished surfaces at
juncture with other pavements shall coincide with finished surfaces of
abutting pavements. Deviation from the plan elevation will not be
permitted in areas of pavements where closer conformance with planned
elevation is required for the proper functioning of drainage and other
appurtenant structures involved. The grade will be determined by running
lines of levels at intervals of 25 feet, or less, longitudinally and
transversely, to determine the elevation of the completed pavement
surface. Within 5 working days, after the completion of a particular lot
incorporating the final wearing surface, test the final wearing surface of
the pavement for conformance with the specified plan grade. Diamond
grinding may be used to remove high spots to meet grade requirements. Skin
patching for correcting low areas or planing or milling for correcting high
areas will not be permitted.
3.11.4 Surface Smoothness
Use one of the following methods to test and evaluate surface smoothness of
the pavement. Perform all testing in the presence of the Contracting
Officer. Keep detailed notes of the results of the testing and furnish a
copy to the Government immediately after each day's testing. Where

drawings show required deviations from a plane surface (crowns, drainage
inlets, etc.), the surface shall be finished to meet the approval of the
3.11.4.1 Smoothness Requirements
a. Straightedge Testing: The finished surfaces of the pavements shall

have no abrupt change of 3/8 inch or more, and all pavements shall be
within the tolerances of 3/8 inch in both the longitudinal and
transverse directions, when tested with an approved 12 feet
straightedge. Smoothness measurements shall be taken in successive
positions parallel to the pavement centerline. Measurements shall be
taken perpendicular to the pavement centerline at 15-foot intervals.
3.11.4.2 Testing Method
After the final rolling, but not later than 24 hours after placement, test
the surface of the pavement in each entire lot in such a manner as to
reveal all surface irregularities exceeding the tolerances specified
above. Separate testing of individual sublots is not required. If any
pavement areas are ground, these areas shall be retested immediately after
grinding. Test each lot of the pavement in both a longitudinal and a
transverse direction on parallel lines. Set the transverse lines 15 feet
or less apart, as directed. The longitudinal lines shall be at the
centerline of each paving lane for lanes less than 20 feet wide and at the
third points for lanes 20 feet or wider. Also test other areas having
obvious deviations. Longitudinal testing lines shall be continuous across
all joints.
a. Straightedge Testing. Hold the straightedge in contact with the

surface and move it ahead one-half the length of the straightedge for
each successive measurement. Determine the amount of surface
irregularity by placing the freestanding (unleveled) straightedge on
the pavement surface and allowing it to rest upon the two highest spots
covered by its length, and measuring the maximum gap between the
straightedge and the pavement surface in the area between these two
high points.
SECTION 32 13 11
CONCRETE PAVEMENT FOR OTHER HEAVY-DUTY PAVEMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

ACI 211.1 (1991; R 2009) Standard Practice for

Selecting Proportions for Normal,
Heavyweight, and Mass Concrete
ACI 214R (2002; Errata 2005) Evaluation of Strength

Test Results of Concrete
ACI 305R (1999; Errata 2006) Hot Weather Concreting
ACI 306R (1988; R 2002) Cold Weather Concreting

(AASHTO)
AASHTO M 182 (2005) Standard Specification for Burlap

Cloth Made from Jute or Kenaf and Cotton
Mats

Fabricated Deformed Steel Bar Mats for

Concrete

Welded Wire Reinforcement, Deformed, for
Concrete


Epoxy-Coated Steel Reinforcing Bars

Rail-Steel and Axle-Steel Deformed Bars
for Concrete Reinforcement
ASTM C 1017/C 1017M (2007) Standard Specification for Chemical

Admixtures for Use in Producing Flowing
Concrete

Temperature of Freshly Mixed



Lightweight Particles in Aggregate

Alkali Reactivity of Aggregates
(Mortar-Bar Method)
ASTM C 131 (2006)Standard Test Method for Resistance

Los Angeles Machine

ASTM C 138/C 138M (2009) Standard Test Method for Density

("Unit Weight"), Yield, and Air Content
(Gravimetric) of Concrete

Clay Lumps and Friable Particles in
Aggregates


Cement
ASTM C 1602/C 1602M (2006) Standard Specification for Mixing

Water Used in Production of Hydraulic
Cement Concrete
ASTM C 1646/C 1646M (2008a) Making and Curing Test Specimens

for Evaluating Frost Resistance of Coarse
Aggregate in Air-Entrained Concrete by
Rapid Freezing and Thawing
ASTM C 172 (2008) Standard Practice for Sampling

ASTM C 174/C 174M (2006) Standard Test Method for Measuring

Thickness of Concrete Elements Using
Drilled Concrete Cores

Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the
Laboratory

Pressure Method

Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete
ASTM C 294 (2005) Standard Descriptive Nomenclature

for Constituents of Concrete Aggregates
ASTM C 295 (2008) Petrographic Examination of

Aggregates for Concrete


Aggregates

Concrete Specimens

ASTM C 595/C 595M (2009) Standard Specification for Blended

Hydraulic Cements
ASTM C 618 (2008a) Standard Specification for Coal

Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural
Pozzolan for Use in Concrete
ASTM C 666/C 666M (2003; R 2008) Resistance of Concrete to

Rapid Freezing and Thawing
ASTM C 78 (2009) Standard Test Method for Flexural

Strength of Concrete (Using Simple Beam
with Third-Point Loading)
ASTM C 88 (2005) Standard Test Method for Soundness

of Aggregates by Use of Sodium Sulfate or
Magnesium Sulfate

Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding Systems for
Concrete


Bituminous Types)

PVC Expansion
ASTM D 2995 (1999; R 2009) Determining Application

Rate of Bituminous Distributors
ASTM D 3665 (2007) Random Sampling of Construction

Materials
ASTM D 4791 (2005e1) Flat Particles, Elongated

Particles, or Flat and Elongated Particles
in Coarse Aggregate

Aggregates
NRMCA QC 3 (2002) Quality Control Manual: Section 3,

Plant Certifications Checklist:
Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete
Production Facilities
COE CRD-C 130 (2001) Standard Recommended Practice for

Estimating Scratch Hardness of Coarse
Aggregate Particles
COE CRD-C 143 (1962) Specifications for Meters for

Automatic Indication of Moisture in Fine
Aggregates
COE CRD-C 300 (1990) Specifications for Membrane-Forming

Compounds for Curing Concrete
COE CRD-C 521 (1981) Standard Test Method for Frequency

and Amplitude of Vibrators for Concrete
COE CRD-C 55 (1992) Test Method for Within-Batch

Uniformity of Freshly Mixed Concrete
This section is intended to stand alone for construction of concrete

pavement. However, where the construction covered herein interfaces with
other sections, the construction at each interface shall conform to the
requirements of both this section and the other section, including
tolerances for both.
1.2.1 Surface Smoothness
Where drawings show required deviations from a plane surface (crowns,

drainage inlets, etc.), finish the surface to meet the approval of the
Contracting Officer. Detailed notes shall be kept of the results of the
testing and a copy furnished to the Government after each day's testing.
a. Straightedge Testing: The finished surfaces of the pavements shall

have no abrupt change of 1/4 inch or more, and all pavements shall be
within the limits specified herinafter when checked with an approved 12
foot straightedge.
d. Testing Method: After the concrete has hardened sufficiently to

permit walking thereon, but not later than 48 hours after placement,
test the entire surface of the pavement in each lot in such a manner as
to reveal all surface irregularities exceeding the tolerances specified
above. If any pavement areas are ground, these areas shall be retested
immediately after diamond grinding. The entire area of the pavement
shall be tested in both a longitudinal and a transverse direction on
parallel lines. The transverse lines shall be 15 feet or less apart,
as directed. The longitudinal lines shall be at the centerline of each
paving lane shown on the drawings, regardless of whether the Contractor
is allowed to pave two lanes at a time, and at the 1/8th point in from
each side of the lane. Other areas having obvious deviations shall
also be tested. Longitudinal testing lines shall be continuous across
all joints. Transverse testing lines for pilot lanes shall be carried
to construction joint lines and for fill-in lanes shall be carried 24
inches across construction joints, and the readings in this area
applied to the fill-in lane. Straightedge testing of the longitudinal
edges of slipformed pilot lanes shall also be performed before paving
fill-in lanes as specified below.
1). Straightedge Testing: The straightedge shall be held in

contact with the surface and moved ahead one-half the length of
the straightedge for each successive measurement. Determine the
amount of surface irregularity by placing the freestanding
(unleveled) straightedge on the pavement surface and measuring the
maximum gap between the straightedge and the pavement surface.
Measurements shall be determined along the entire length of the
straight edge.
1.2.2 Edge Slump and Joint Face Deformation
a. Edge Slump: When slip-form paving is used, not more than 15.0
percent of the total free edge of each pavement panel shall have an
edge slump exceeding 1/4 inch and none of the free edge of the pavement
lot shall have an edge slump exceeding 3/8 inch. (A pavement panel is
defined as a lane width by the length between two adjacent transverse
contraction joints. The total free edge of the pavement will be
considered to be the cumulative total linear measurement of pavement
panel edge originally constructed as non-adjacent to any existing
pavement; i.e., 100 feet of pilot lane originally constructed as a
separate lane, will have 200 feet of free edge; 100 feet of fill-in
lane will have no free edge, etc.,). The area affected by the downward
movement of the concrete along the pavement edge shall not exceed 18
inches back from the edge.
b. Joint Face Deformation: In addition to the edge slump limits
specified above, the vertical joint face shall have a surface within
the maximum limits shown below:
Offset from Offset from Offset From Abrupt Offset of

Straightedge Straightedge Straightedge Offset Joint Face
Applied Applied Applied in Any From True
Longitudinally Longitudinally Top to Bottom Direction Vertical
To Pavement Surface To Vertical Against the
Face Joint Face
_________________________________________________________________________________
Pavements
6 mm 6 mm 9 mm 3 mm 8 mm/100 mm
(1/4 in) (1/4 in) (3/8 in) (1/8 in) (1 in/12 in)
c. Slump Determination: Immediately after the concrete has hardened

sufficiently to permit walking thereon, the pavement surface of each
lot shall be tested by the Contractor. Testing shall be performed with
a minimum 12 foot straightedge to reveal irregularities exceeding the
edge slump tolerance specified above. The vertical edge slump shall be
determined at each free edge of each slipformed paving lane
constructed. The straightedge shall be placed transverse to the
direction of paving and the end of the straightedge located at the edge
of the paving lane. Measurements shall be made at 5 to 15 foot
spacings, as directed, commencing at the header where paving was
started. Initially measurements shall be made at 5 foot intervals in
each lane. When no deficiencies are present, the Contracting Officer
may approve an increase in the interval. When any deficiencies exist,
the interval will be returned to 5 feet. In no case shall the interval
exceed 15 feet. In addition to the transverse edge slump determination
above, the Contractor, at the same time, shall check the longitudinal
surface smoothness of the joint on a continuous line 1 inch back from
the joint line using the 12 foot straightedge advanced one-half its
length for each reading. Other tests of the exposed joint face shall
be made to ensure that a uniform, true vertical joint face is
attained. The measurements shall be made by the Contractor, shall be
properly referenced in accordance with paving lane identification and
stationing, and a report given to the Contracting Officer within 24
hours after measurement is made. The report shall also identify areas
requiring replacement.
d. Excessive Edge Slump: When edge slump exceeding the limits

specified above is encountered on either side of the paving lane,
additional straightedge measurements shall be made, if required, to
define the linear limits of the excessive slump. The concrete slabs
having excessive edge slump or joint deformation shall be removed and
replaced to the next transverse joint in conformance with paragraph:
REPAIR, REMOVAL, REPLACEMENT OF NEWLY CONSTRUCTED SLABS. Use of
slip-form paving equipment and procedures that fail to consistently
provide edges within the specified tolerances on edge slump and joint
face deformation shall be discontinued and the pavements shall be
constructed by means of standard paving procedures using fixed forms.
1.2.3 Plan Grade
Within 5 days after paving of each lot, the finished surface of the
pavement area shall be tested, by running lines of levels at intervals
corresponding with every longitudinal and transverse joint to determine the

elevation at each joint intersection. The results of this survey shall be
recorded and a copy given to the Government at the completion of the survey
of each lot. The surfaces pavements shall vary not more than 3/4 inch.
The above deviations from the approved grade line and elevation will not be
permitted in areas where closer conformance with the planned grade and
elevation is required for the proper functioning of appurtenant
structures. The finished surfaces of new abutting pavements shall coincide
at their juncture.
1.2.4 Flexural Strength
Each lot of pavement will be evaluated for acceptance in accordance with

the following procedures.
a. Sampling and Testing: For acceptance, one composite sample of

concrete from each sublot shall be obtained in accordance with
ASTM C 172 from one batch or truckload. Test cylinders 6 x 12 inches
shall be fabricated and cured in accordance with ASTM C 31/C 31M, and
tested in accordance with ASTM C 39/C 39M. Test beams 6 x 6 inches
shall be fabricated and cured in accordance with ASTM C 31/C 31M; and
tested in accordance with ASTM C 78. Two test cylinders per sublot (8
per lot) shall be tested at 14 days.
b. Computations: Average the eight 14-day strength tests for the lot.
The average strength shall be used in accordance with paragraph
"Concrete Strength for Final Acceptance" in PART 2.
1.2.5 Thickness
Each lot of pavement will be evaluated for acceptance and payment

adjustment in accordance with the following procedure. Two cores, between
4 and 6 inches in diameter, shall be drilled from the pavement, per sublot
(8 per lot). The Contractor is responsible for drilling the cores within 3
days after lot placement, filling the core holes with an approved
non-shrink concrete, respraying the cored areas with curing compound, and
for measuring the cores. Each core shall be inspected for voids, thickness
of paste on the surface, and depth of reinforcement (if required). Provide
the results with the thickness measurement data. Eight measurements of
thickness shall be made around the circumference of each core and one in
the center, in accordance with ASTM C 174/C 174M, using calibrated calipers
for specimens longer than 10 inches. The pavement thickness from the 8
cores for the lot shall be averaged and shall be evaluated as described in
paragraph: PAYMENT ADJUSTMENT FOR THICKNESS above.
1.2.6 Diamond Grinding of PCC Surfaces
In areas not meeting the specified limits for surface smoothness and plan
grade, high areas shall be reduced to attain the required smoothness and
grade, except as depth is limited below. High areas shall be reduced by
grinding the hardened concrete with an approved diamond grinding machine
after the concrete is 14 days or more old. Grinding shall be accomplished
by sawing with an industrial diamond abrasive which is impregnated in the
saw blades. The saw blades shall be assembled in a cutting head mounted on
a machine designed specifically for diamond grinding that will produce the
required texture and smoothness level without damage to the concrete
pavement or joint faces. The saw blades shall be 1/8-inch wide and there
shall be a minimum of 55 to 60 blades per 12 inches of cutting head width
depending on the hardness of the aggregate. Each machine shall be capable
of cutting a path 3 to 4 ft wide. Grinding equipment that causes ravels,

aggregate fractures, spalls or disturbance to the joints will not be
permitted. The area corrected by grinding the surface of the hardened
concrete shall not exceed 10 percent of the total area of any sublot. The
depth of diamond grinding shall not exceed 1/4 inch. All pavement areas
requiring plan grade or surface smoothness corrections in excess of the
limits specified above, shall be removed and replaced in conformance with
paragraph REPAIR, REMOVAL, REPLACEMENT OF NEWLY CONSTRUCTED SLABS. All
areas in which diamond grinding has been performed will be subject to the
thickness tolerances specified in paragraph: Thickness, above.
1.3 SUBMITTALS

SD-03 Product Data
Equipment
a. Details and data on the batching and mixing plant prior to

plant assembly including manufacturer's literature showing that
the equipment meets all requirements specified herein.
b. A certified copy of the NRMCA QC Manual Section 3 Concrete

Plant Certification Checklist and Calibration documentation on all
measuring and weighing devices, submitted prior to uniformity
testing.
c. A description of the equipment proposed for transporting

concrete mixture from the central mixing plant to the paving
equipment.
d. A description of the equipment proposed for the machine and

hand placing, consolidating and curing of the concrete mixture.
Manufacturer's literature on the paver and finisher, together with
the manufacturer's written instructions on adjustments and
operating procedures necessary to assure a tight, smooth surface
on the concrete pavement. The literature shall show that the
equipment meets all details of these specifications. Detailed
information on automatic laser controlled systems shall be
submitted if proposed for use.
Proposed Techniques; G
Placing and protection methods; paving sequence; jointing

pattern; data on curing equipment and profilographs; demolition of
existing pavements; as specified. Pavement diamond grinding
equipment and procedures.
SD-05 Design Data
Proportioning Studies; G, ED
The results of the mixture proportioning studies signed and

stamped by the registered professional engineer having technical
responsibility for the mix design study, and submitted at least 30

days prior to commencing concrete placing operations. The results
shall include a statement giving the maximum nominal coarse
aggregate size and the weights and volumes of each ingredient
proportioned on a one cubic yard basis. Aggregate quantities
shall be based on the mass in a saturated surface dry condition.
The recommended mixture proportions shall be accompanied by test
results demonstrating that the proportions selected will produce
concrete of the qualities indicated.
SD-06 Test Reports
Sampling and Testing; G, ED
Certified copies of laboratory test reports and sources for

cement, supplementary cementitious materials (SCM), aggregates,
admixtures, curing compound, epoxy, and proprietary patching
materials proposed for use on this project. All aggregate tests
shall have been performed no earlier than 6 months prior to
contract award.
SD-07 Certificates
Contractor Quality Control Staff; G, ED
American Concrete Institute certification for Contractor Quality

Control staff. Qualifications and resumes for petrographer,
surveyor, concrete batch plant operator, and profilograph operator.
Laboratory Accreditation; G, ED
Accreditation of the commercial laboratory by an independent

evaluation authority, indicating conformance to ASTM C 1077,
including all applicable test procedures.
Commercial Laboratory; G, ED
USACE validation letter for commercial laboratory.
1.4.1 Contractor Quality Control Staff
All Contractor Quality Control personnel assigned to concrete construction

shall be American Concrete Institute (ACI) certified in the following grade
(or shall have written evidence acceptable to the Contracting Officer's
representative of having completed similar qualification programs):
a. CQC personnel responsible for inspection of concrete paving

operations: ACI Concrete Transportation Inspector.
b. Lead Foreman or Journeyman of the Concrete Placing, Finishing, and

Curing Crews: ACI Concrete Flatwork Technician/Finisher.
c. Field Testing Technicians: ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician,

Grade I.
d. Laboratory Testing Technicians: ACI Concrete Strength Testing

Technician and Laboratory Testing Technician, Grade I or II.
1.4.2 Other Staff
Submit for approval, the qualifications and resumes for the following staff:
a. Petrographer: Bachelor of Science degree in geology or petrography,

trained in petrographic examination of concrete aggregate according to
ASTM C 294 and ASTM C 295 and trained in identification of the specific
deleterious materials and tests identified in this specification.
Resume shall detail the education, training and experience related to
the project-specific test methods and deleterious materials and shall
be submitted at least 20 days before petrographic and deleterious
materials examination is to commence.
b. Licensed Surveyor: All survey work shall be performed under the

supervision of a Licensed Surveyor.
c. Concrete Batch Plant Operator: National Ready Mix Concrete

Association (NRMCA) Plant Manager certification at the Plant Manager
level.
d. Profilograph Operator: Certification by equipment manufacturer or a

state Department of Transportation.
1.4.3 Laboratory Accreditation
Laboratory and testing facilities shall be provided by and at the expense

of the Contractor. The laboratories performing the tests shall be
accredited in accordance with ASTM C 1077, including ASTM C 78 and
ASTM C 1260. The accreditation shall be current and shall include the
required and optional test methods, as specified throughout this Section.
Onsite temperature-controlled concrete curing facilities shall be provided.
a. Aggregate Testing and Mix Proportioning: Aggregate testing and

mixture proportioning studies shall be performed by a commercial
laboratory.
b. Acceptance Testing: Furnish all materials, labor, and facilities

required for molding, curing, testing, and protecting test specimens at
the site and in the laboratory. Steel molds shall be used for molding
the beam specimens. Furnish and maintain boxes or other facilities
suitable for storing and curing the specimens at the site while in the
mold within the temperature range stipulated by ASTM C 31/C 31M.
Flexural loading equipment shall be in accordance with ASTM C 78.
c. Contractor Quality Control: All sampling and testing shall be

performed by an approved, onsite, independent, commercial laboratory,
or for cementitious materials and admixtures, the manufacturer's
laboratory.
d. Laboratory Inspection: The Government will inspect the laboratory

equipment and test procedures prior to the start of concreting
operations for conformance to ASTM C 1077. The laboratory shall
maintain this certification for the duration of the project.
1.4.4 Preconstruction Testing of Materials
All sampling and testing shall be performed by, and at the expense of, the
Contractor. Use an approved commercial laboratory or, for cementitious
materials and chemical admixtures, a laboratory maintained by the

manufacturer of the material. No material shall be used until notice of
acceptance has been given. The Contractor will not be entitled to any
additional payment or extension of time due to failure of any material to
meet project requirements, or for any additional sampling or testing
required. Additional tests may be performed by the Government at the
discretion of the Contracting Officer; such Government testing will not
relieve the Contractor of any testing responsibilities.
1.4.4.1 Aggregates
Aggregates shall be sampled in the presence of a Government

Representative. Samples shall be obtained in accordance with
ASTM D 75/D 75M and shall be representative of the materials to be used for
the project. Test results shall be submitted 7 days before commencing
mixture proportioning studies.
1.4.4.2 Chemical Admixtures, Curing Compounds and Epoxies
At least 30 days before the material is used, submit certified copies of

test results for the specific lots or batches to be used on the project.
Test results shall be not more than 6 months old prior to use in the work.
Chemical admixtures that have been in storage at the project site for
longer than 6 months or that have been subjected to freezing will be
retested at the expense of the Contractor and will be rejected if test
results are not satisfactory.
1.4.4.3 Cementitious Materials
Cement, ground granulated blast furnace (GGBF) slag, and pozzolan will be
accepted on the basis of manufacturer's certification of compliance,
accompanied by mill test reports showing that the material in each shipment
meets the requirements of the specification under which it is furnished.
Mill test reports shall be no more than 1 month old, prior to use in the
work. No cementitious material shall be used until notice of acceptance
has been given by the Contracting Officer. Cementitious material may be
subjected to check testing by the Government from samples obtained at the
mill, at transfer points, or at the project site. If tests prove that a
cementitious material that has been delivered is unsatisfactory, it shall
be promptly removed from the site of the work. Cementitious material that
has not been used within 6 months after testing shall be retested at the
Contractor's expense and shall be rejected if test results are not
satisfactory.
1.4.5 Testing During Construction
During construction, the Contractor is responsible for sampling and testing

aggregates, cementitious materials, and concrete as specified herein. The
Government will sample and test concrete and ingredient materials as
considered appropriate. Provide facilities and labor as may be necessary
for procurement of representative test samples. Testing by the Government
will in no way relieve the Contractor of the specified testing requirements.
1.4.6 Test Section
At least 10 days, but not more than 60 days, prior to construction of the
concrete pavement, construct a test section as part of the production
paving area at an outer edge as indicated on the drawings. Use the test
section to develop and demonstrate to the satisfaction of the Contracting
Officer the proposed techniques of mixing, hauling, placing, consolidating,

finishing, curing, initial saw cutting, start-up procedures, testing
methods, plant operations, and the preparation of the construction joints.
Variations in mixture proportions, other than water, shall be made if
directed. Vary the water content, as necessary, to arrive at the
appropriate content. The mixing plant shall be operated and calibrated
prior to start of placing the test section. Use the same equipment,
materials, and construction techniques on the test section as will be used
in all subsequent work. Base course preparation, concrete production,
placing, consolidating, curing, construction of joints, and all testing
shall be in accordance with applicable provisions of this specification.
Three days after completion of the test section, provide eight cores at
least 6 inch diameter by full depth cut from points selected in the test
section by the Government. The cores will be evaluated for homogeneity,
consolidation and segregation. Construct the test section meeting all
specification requirements and being acceptable to the Contracting Officer
in all aspects, including surface texture. Failure to construct an
acceptable test section will necessitate construction of additional test
sections at no additional cost to the Government. Test sections allowed to
be constructed as part of the production paving which do not meet
specification requirements shall be removed at the Contractor's expense.
If the Contractor proposes to use slipform paving and is unable to
construct an acceptable test section, the slipform paving equipment shall
be removed from the job and the construction completed using stationary
side forms and equipment compatible with them. Production paving shall not
commence until the results on aggregates and concrete, including evaluation
of the cores, and all pavement measurements for edge slump, joint face
deformation, actual plan grade, surface smoothness and thickness have been
submitted and approved by the Contracting Officer. Pavement accepted as a
production lot will be evaluated and paid in accordance with Paragraph:
ACCEPTABILITY OF WORK below.
1.4.6.1 Pilot Lane
The test section shall consist of one paving lane at least 400 feet long
and shall be constructed to the same thickness as the thickest portion of
pavement shown on the Drawings. The lane width shall be the same as that
required for use in the project. The test section shall contain at least
one transverse construction joint. If keyed or doweled longitudinal
construction joints are required in any of the production pavements, they
shall be installed full length along one side of the test strip throughout
the test section. If both keys and dowels are required, each shall be
installed in half of the test section. Two separate days shall be used for
construction of the test section.
1.4.6.2 Fill-In Lane
The first 400 feet of the initial production fill-in lane shall be
considered a fill-in lane test section for purposes of testing and
evaluation. All requirements for the test section are applicable, as
appropriate. Obtain cores from the fill-lane lane side of the longitudinal
construction joint with the pilot lane. The cores will be evaluated for
homogeneity, consolidation, and segregation.
1.4.7 Acceptability of Work
The materials and the pavement itself will be accepted on the basis of
tests made by the Contractor. The Government may make check tests to
validate the results of the Contractor's testing. If the results of the
Contractor tests vary by less than 2.0 percent of the Government's test
results, the results of the Contractor's tests will be used. If the
results of the Government and Contractor tests vary by 2.0 percent, but
less than 4.0 percent, the average of the two will be considered the value
to be used. If these vary by 4.0 percent or more, each sampling and
testing procedure shall be carefully evaluated and both the Government and
the Contractor shall take another series of tests on duplicate samples of
material. If these vary by 4.0 percent or more, the results of the tests
made by the Government shall be used and the Government will continue check
testing of this item on a continuous basis until the two sets of tests
agree within less than 4.0 percent on a regular basis. Testing performed
by the Government will in no way at any time relieve the Contractor from
the specified testing requirements.
1.4.8 Acceptance Requirements
1.4.8.1 Pavement Lots
A lot will be that quantity of construction that will be evaluated for

acceptance with specification requirements. A lot will be equal to one
shift of production not to exceed 1000 cubic yards. In order to evaluate
thickness, each lot will be divided into four equal sublots. Grade
determinations will be made on the lot as a whole. Surface smoothness
determinations will be made on every 0.1 mile segment in each lot.
Location of all samples shall be selected on a random basis in accordance
with ASTM D 3665. When operational conditions cause a lot to be terminated
before the specified four sublots have been completed, the following
procedure shall be used to adjust the lot size and number of tests for the
lot. Where three sublots have been completed, they shall constitute a
lot. Where one or two sublots have been completed, they shall be
incorporated into the next lot (except for the last lot), and the total
number of sublots shall be used and acceptance criteria adjusted
accordingly.
1.4.8.2 Evaluation
Provide all sampling and testing required for acceptance and payment
adjustment at the Contractor's expense. Individuals performing sampling,
testing and inspection duties shall meet the required Qualifications. The
Contracting Officer reserves the right to direct additional samples and
tests for any area which appears to deviate from the specification
requirements. Testing in these areas will be in addition to the sublot or
lot testing, and the requirements for these areas will be the same as those
for a sublot or lot. Provide facilities for and, where directed, personnel
to assist in obtaining samples for any Government testing.
1.5.1 Bulk Cementitious Materials
Furnish all cementitious material in bulk. The temperature of the

cementitious material, as delivered to storage at the site, shall not exceed
150 degrees F. Sufficient cementitious materials shall be in storage to
sustain continuous operation of the concrete mixing plant while the
pavement is being placed. Provide separate facilities to prevent any
intermixing during unloading, transporting, storing, and handling of each
type of cementitious material.
1.5.2 Aggregate Materials
Store aggregate at the site of the batching and mixing plant avoiding
breakage, segregation, intermixing or contamination by foreign materials.
Each size of aggregate from each source shall be stored separately in
free-draining stockpiles. Aggregate stored on ground shall have a minimum
24 inch thick sacrificial layer left undisturbed. Fine aggregate and the
smallest size coarse aggregate shall remain in free-draining storage for at
least 24 hours immediately prior to use. Sufficient aggregate shall be
maintained at the site at all times to permit continuous uninterrupted
operation of the mixing plant at the time concrete pavement is being
placed. Tracked equipment shall not be allowed on coarse aggregate
stockpiles.
1.5.3 Other Materials
Store reinforcing bars and accessories above the ground on supports. All
materials shall be stored avoiding contamination and deterioration.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 CEMENTITIOUS MATERIALS
Cementitious materials shall be portland cement, blended cement or only

portland cement in combination with supplementary cementitious materials
(SCM), and shall conform to appropriate specifications listed below. New
submittals are requried when the cementitious materials sources or types
change.
Provide portland cement conforming to ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type I or II, low
alkali . Low alkali cement is required if the proposed aggregates are
found to have greater than 0.04 percent expansion when tested in accordance
with paragraph: Alkali-Silica Reactivity below.
2.1.2 Blended Cements
Blended cement shall conform to ASTM C 595/C 595M, Type IP or IS, including
the optional requirement for mortar expansion and sulfate soundness. The
manufacturer shall state in writing that the amount of pozzolan in the
finished cement will not vary more than plus or minus 5 mass percent of the
finished cement from lot to lot or within a lot. The percentage and type
of mineral admixture used in the blend shall not change from that submitted
for the aggregate evaluation and mixture proportioning.
2.1.3 Pozzolan
2.1.3.1 Fly Ash
Fly ash shall conform to ASTM C 618, Class F, including the optional
requirements for uniformity and effectiveness in controlling Alkali-Silica
reaction and shall have a loss on ignition not exceeding 3 percent. Class
F fly ash for use in mitigating Alkali-Silica Reactivity shall have a
Calcium Oxide (CaO) content of less than 13 percent and a total equivalent
alkali content less than 3 percent.
2.1.3.2 Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan
Natural pozzolan shall be raw or calcined and conform to ASTM C 618, Class
N, including the optional requirements for uniformity and effectiveness in
controlling Alkali-Silica reaction and shall have a loss on ignition not
exceeding 3 percent. Class N pozzolan for use in mitigating Alkali-Silica
Reactivity shall have a Calcium Oxide (CaO) content of less than 13 percent
and a total equivalent alkali content less than 3 percent.
2.1.3.3 Ultra Fine Fly Ash and Ultra Fine Pozzolan
Ultra Fine Fly Ash (UFFA) and Ultra Fine Pozzolan (UFP) shall conform to
ASTM C 618, Class F or N, and the following additional requirements:
a. The strength activity index at 28 days of age shall be at least 95

percent of the control specimens.
b. The average particle size shall not exceed 6 microns.
c. The sum of SiO2 + Al2O3 + Fe2O3 shall be greater than 77 percent.
2.1.4 Supplementary Cementitious Materials (SCM) Content
The concrete mix shall always contain one of the SCMs listed in Table 2
within the range specified therein, whether or not the aggregates are found
to be reactive in accordance with paragraph Alkali Silica Reactivity.The
Contractor may elect to use one of the SCMs listed below, unless the SCM is
required to mitigate ASR. The use of SCMs is encouraged in accordance with
Section 01 62 35, Recycled/Recovered Materials.
TABLE 2
SUPPLEMENTARY CEMENTITIOUS MATERIALS CONTENT
Minimum Maximum
Supplementary Cementitious Material Content Content
Class N Pozzolan and Class F Fly Ash

SiO2 + Al2O3 + Fe2O3 > 70% 25% 35%
Si02 + A1203 + Fe203 > 80% 20% 35%
Si02 + A1203 + Fe203 > 90% 15% 35%
UFFA and UFP 7% 16%
GGBF Slag 40% 50%
Silica Fume 7% 10%
2.2 AGGREGATES
2.2.1 Aggregate Sources
2.2.1.1 Durability
Aggregate shall have a satisfactory service record in freezing and thawing

of at least 5 years successful service in three concrete paving projects.
The service record shall include a condition survey of the existing
concrete and a review of the concrete-making materials, including coarse
and fine aggregates, cement, and mineral admixtures. This review should
consider the previous aggregate source and test results, cement mill
certificate data, mineral admixture chemical and physical composition, and
the mix design (cement factor and water-cementitious material ratio).
Aggregate not having a satisfactory demonstrable service record shall have
a durability factor of 50 or more when subjected to freezing and thawing of

specimens prepared in accordance with ASTM C 1646/C 1646M and tested in
accordance with ASTM C 666/C 666M, Procedure A. Fine and coarse aggregates
to be used in all concrete shall be evaluated and tested for durability in
accordance with ASTM C 88. Results shall not show more than 18 percent
loss when subjected to 5 cycles using Magnesium Sulfate. If Sodium Sulfate
is used, results shall not show more than 12 percent loss when subjected to
5 cycles.
2.2.1.2 Combined Aggregate Gradation
In addition to the grading requirements specified for coarse aggregate and

for fine aggregate, the combined aggregate grading shall meet the following
requirements:
a. The materials selected and the proportions used shall be such that
when the Coarseness Factor (CF) and the Workability Factor (WF) are
plotted on a diagram as described in d. below, the point thus
determined shall fall within the parallelogram described therein.
b. The Coarseness Factor (CF) shall be determined from the following

equation:
CF = (cumulative percent retained on the 3/8 in.

sieve)(100)/(cumulative percent retained on the No. 8 sieve)
c. The Workability Factor WF is defined as the percent passing the No.

8 sieve based on the combined gradation. However, WF shall be
adjusted, upwards only, by 2.5 percentage points for each 94 pounds of
cementitious material per cubic yard greater than 564 pounds per cubic
yard.
d. A diagram shall be plotted using a rectangular scale with WF on the

Y-axis with units from 20 (bottom) to 45 (top), and with CF on the
X-axis with units from 80 (left side) to 30 (right side). On this
diagram a parallelogram shall be plotted with corners at the following
coordinates (CF-75, WF-28), (CF-75, WF-40), (CF-45, WF-32.5), and
(CF-45, WF-44.5). If the point determined by the intersection of the
computed CF and WF does not fall within the above parallelogram, the
grading of each size of aggregate used and the proportions selected
shall be changed as necessary.)
2.2.2.1 Material Composition
Coarse aggregate shall consist of crushed or uncrushed gravel, crushed stone,

or a combination thereof. Aggregates, as delivered to the mixers, shall
consist of clean, hard, uncoated particles meeting the requirements of
ASTM C 33/C 33M except as specified herein. Coarse aggregate shall be
washed. Washing shall be sufficient to remove dust and other coatings. .
Coarse aggregate shall not show more than 40 percent loss when subjected to
the Los Angeles abrasion test in accordance with ASTM C 131. The sodium
sulfate soundness loss shall not exceed 12 percent, or the magnesium
sulfate soundness loss shall not exceed 18 percent after five cycles when
tested in accordance with ASTM C 88.
2.2.2.2 Particle Shape Characteristics
Particles of the coarse aggregate shall be generally spherical or cubical

in shape. The quantity of flat and elongated particles in any size group
coarser than the3/8 inch sieve shall not exceed 20 percent by weight as
determined by the Flat Particle Test and the Elongated Particle Test of
ASTM D 4791. A flat particle is defined as one having a ratio of width to
thickness greater than 3; an elongated particle is one having a ratio of
length to width greater than 3.
2.2.2.3 Size and Grading
The nominal maximum size of the coarse aggregate shall be 1.5 inch.
Coarse aggregates greater than 1 inch in nominal maximum coarse size shall
be graded and furnished in two size groups meeting the individual grading
requirements of ASTM C 33/C 33M, Size No. 4 (1.5 to 0.75 inches) and Size
No. 67 (0.75 inches to No. 4). The individual aggregates shall be graded
and furnished in size groups to meet the coarseness and workability factor
criteria for the contractor-proposed combined gradation.
2.2.2.4 Deleterious Material - Road Pavements
The amount of deleterious material in each size group of coarse aggregate

shall not exceed the limits in the following table when tested as indicated.
LIMITS OF DELETERIOUS MATERIALS IN COARSE

AGGREGATE FOR ROAD PAVEMENTS
Percentage by Mass
Clay lumps and friable particles 2.0

(ASTM C 142)
Material finer than 0.075 mm 1.0

(No. 200 sieve) (ASTM C 117)
Lightweight particles 1.0

(ASTM C 123)
Other soft particles 2.0

(COE CRD-C 130)
Total of all deleterious substances, 5.0

exclusive of material finer than
No. 200 sieve
The limit for material finer than the No. 200 sieve will be increased to
1.5 percent for crushed aggregates consisting of crusher dust that is
essentially free from clay or shale. The separation medium for lightweight
particles shall have a density of Sp. Gr. 2.0. This limit does not apply
to coarse aggregate manufactured from blast-furnace slag unless
contamination is evident.
2.2.3.1 Composition
Fine aggregate shall consist of natural sand, manufactured sand, or a

combination of the two, and shall be composed of clean, hard, durable
particles meeting the requirements of ASTM C 33/C 33M. Aggregate used for
paving compass calibration hardstands shall be free of materials having

undesirable magnetic properties, including magnetite in granite, high-iron
minerals in traprcok, and pyrite in limestone. Each type of fine aggregate
shall be stockpiled and batched separately. Particles of the fine
aggregate shall be generally spherical or cubical in shape.
2.2.3.2 Grading
Grading of the fine aggregate, as delivered to the mixer, shall conform to

the requirements of ASTM C 33/C 33M and shall have a fineness modulus of
not less than 2.50 nor more than 3.00.
2.2.3.3 Deleterious Material
The amount of deleterious material in the fine aggregate shall not exceed
the following limits by mass:
Material Percentage by Mass

__________ ___________________
Clay lumps and friable particles ASTM C 142 1.0
Material finer than 0.075 mm (No. 200 sieve) ASTM C 117 3.0
Lightweight particles ASTM C 123 using a medium 0.5

with a density of 2.0 Mg/cubic meter (Sp. Gr. of 2.0))
Total of all above 3.0
2.3 CHEMICAL ADMIXTURES
Chemical admixtures may only be used when the specific admixture type and
manufacturer is the same material used in the mixture proportioning
studies. The air-entraining admixture shall conform to ASTM C 260. An
accelerator conforming to ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type C, may be used only when
specified in paragraph: SPECIFIED CONCRETE STRENGTH AND OTHER PROPERTIES
below and shall not be used to reduce the amount of cementitious material
used. Calcium chloride and admixtures containing calcium chloride shall
not be used. Retarding or water-reducing admixture shall meet the
requirements of ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A, B, or D, except that the
6-month and 1-year compressive strength tests are waived. ASTM C 494/C 494M,
Type F and G high range water reducing admixtures and ASTM C 1017/C 1017M
flowable admixtures shall not be used.
2.3.2 Lithium Nitrate
The lithium admixture shall be a nominal 30 percent aqueous solution of

Lithium Nitrate, with a density of 10 pounds/gallon, and shall have the
approximate chemical form as shown below:
Constituent Limit (Percent by Mass)

LiNo3 (Lithium Nitrate) 30 +/- 0.5
SO4-2 (Sulfate Ion) 0.1 (max)
Cl- (Chloride Ion) 0.2 (max)
Na+ (Sodium Ion) 0.1 (max)
K+ (Potassium Ion) 0.1 (max)
The Lithium Nitrate manufacturer shall provide a trained representative to

supervise the lithium nitrate admixture dispensing and mixing operations.
2.3.3 High Range Water Reducing Admixture (HRWRA)
A high-range water-reducing admixture shall meet the requirements of

ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F or G. The HRWRA shall be free from chlorides,
alkalies, and shall be of the synthesized, sulfonated complex polymer
type. The HRWRA shall be added to the concrete as a single component at
the batch plant. The admixture shall be added to the concrete mixture only
when its use is approved or directed, and only when it has been used in
mixture proportioning studies to arrive at approved mixture proportions.
Submit certified copies of the independent laboratory test results required
for compliance with ASTM C 494/C 494M.
2.4 MEMBRANE FORMING CURING COMPOUND
Membrane forming curing compound shall be a white pigmented compound

conforming to COE CRD-C 300. .
2.5 WATER
Water for mixing and curing shall be fresh, clean, potable, and free of
injurious amounts of oil, acid, salt, or alkali, except that non-potable
water, or water from concrete production operations, may be used if it
meets the requirements of ASTM C 1602/C 1602M.
2.6 JOINT MATERIALS
2.6.1 Expansion Joint Material
Expansion joint filler shall be a preformed material conforming to

ASTM D 1751 or ASTM D 1752 Type . Expansion joint filler shall be 3/4 inch
thick, unless otherwise indicated, and shall be furnished in a single full
depth piece.
2.6.2 Slip Joint Material
Slip joint material shall be 1/4 inch thick expansion joint filler, unless
otherwise indicated, conforming to para: Expansion Joint Material.
2.7 REINFORCING
All reinforcement shall be free from loose, flaky rust, loose scale, oil,
grease, mud, or other coatings that might reduce the bond with concrete.
Removal of thin powdery rust and tight rust is not required. However,
reinforcing steel which is rusted to the extent that it does not conform to
the required dimensions or mechanical properties shall not be used.
2.7.1 Reinforcing Bars and Bar Mats
Reinforcing bars shall conform to ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 . Bar mats
shall conform to ASTM A 184/A 184M. The bar members may be billet rail or
axle steel.
2.7.2 Welded Wire Reinforcement
Welded Wire Reinforcement shall be deformed or smooth, conforming to
ASTM A 497/A 497Mor ASTM A 185/A 185M, and shall be furnished in flat
sheets.
2.8 DOWELS AND TIE BARS
2.8.1 Dowels
Dowels shall be single piece bars fabricated or cut to length at the shop
or mill before delivery to the site. Dowels shall be free of loose, flaky
rust and loose scale and shall be clean and straight. Dowels may be
sheared to length provided that the deformation from true shape caused by
shearing does not exceed 0.04 inch on the diameter of the dowel and does
not extend more than 0.04 inch from the end of the dowel. Dowels shall be
plain (non-deformed) steel bars conforming to ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60;
ASTM A 996/A 996M, Grade 50 or 60. Dowel bars shall be epoxy coated in
conformance with ASTM A 775/A 775M. Grout retention rings shall be fully
circular metal or plastic devices capable of supporting the dowel until the
epoxy hardens. Dowel sleeves or inserts are not permitted.
2.8.2 Dowel Bar Assemblies
Dowel bar assemblies shall consist of a framework of metal bars or wires

arranged to provide rigid support for the dowels throughout the paving
operation, with a minimum of four continuous bars or wires extending along
the joint line. The dowels shall be welded to the assembly or held firmly
by mechanical locking arrangements that will prevent them from rising,
sliding out, or becoming distorted during paving operations.
2.8.3 Tie Bars
Tie bars shall be deformed steel bars conforming to ASTM A 615/A 615M, or
ASTM A 996/A 996M, Grade 60, and of the sizes and dimensions indicated.
Deformed rail steel bars and high-strength billet or axle steel bars, Grade
50 or higher, shall not be used for bars that are bent and straightened
during construction.
2.9 EPOXY RESIN
All epoxy-resin materials shall be two-component materials conforming to

the requirements of ASTM C 881/C 881M, Class as appropriate for each
application temperature to be encountered, except that in addition, the
materials shall meet the following requirements:
a. Material for use for embedding dowels and anchor bolts shall be
Type IV, Grade 3.
b. Material for use as patching materials for complete filling of

spalls and other voids and for use in preparing epoxy resin mortar
shall be Type III, Grade as approved.
c. Material for use for injecting cracks shall be Type IV, Grade 1.
d. Material for bonding freshly mixed portland cement concrete or

mortar or freshly mixed epoxy resin concrete or mortar to hardened
concrete shall be Type V, Grade as approved.
2.10 EQUIPMENT
All plant, equipment, tools, and machines used in the work shall be
maintained in satisfactory working conditions at all times.
2.10.1 Batching and Mixing Plant
a. Location: The batching and mixing plant shall be located off

Government premises no more than 15 minutes haul time from the placing
site. Water and electrical power are available on the project site.
There shall be operable telephonic or radio communication between the
plant and the placing site at all times concreting is taking place.
b. Type and Capacity: The batching and mixing plant shall be a

stationary-type central mix plant, including permanent installations or
portable/relocatable plants installed on stable foundations. The plant
shall be designed and operated to produce concrete within the specified
tolerances, and shall have a capacity of at least 250 cubic yards per
hour. The batching and mixing plant shall conform to the requirements
of NRMCA QC 3 including provisions addressing:
1. Material Storage and Handling

2. Batching Equipment
3. Central Mixer
4. Ticketing System
5. Delivery System
c. Tolerances: The following tolerances shall apply.
Percentage of Required
Materials Mass
____________ _________
Cementitious Materials plus or minus 1
Aggregate plus or minus 2
Admixture plus or minus 3
For volumetric batching equipment for water and admixtures, the above
numeric tolerances shall apply to the required volume of material being
batched. Concentrated admixtures shall be uniformly diluted, if
necessary, to provide sufficient volume per batch to ensure that the
batchers will consistently operate within the above tolerance.
d. Moisture Control: The plant shall be capable of ready adjustment

to compensate for the varying moisture contents of the aggregates and
to change the quantities of the materials being batched. An electric
moisture meter complying with the provisions of COE CRD-C 143 shall be
provided for measuring of moisture in the fine aggregate. The sensing
element shall be arranged so that measurement is made near the batcher
charging gate of the fine aggregate bin or in the fine aggregate
batcher.
2.10.2 Concrete Mixers
a. General: Mixers shall be stationary or truck mixers. Mixers shall

be capable of combining the materials into a uniform mixture and of
discharging this mixture without segregation. The mixers shall not be
charged in excess of the capacity recommended by the manufacturer. The
mixers shall be operated at the drum or mixing blade speed designated
by the manufacturer. The mixers shall be maintained in satisfactory
operating condition, and the mixer drums shall be kept free of hardened
concrete. Mixer blades or paddles shall be replaced when worn down
more than 10 percent of their depth when compared with the

manufacturer's dimension for new blades or paddles.
b. Stationary: Stationary mixers shall be drum or pan mixers. Mixers

shall be provided with an acceptable device to lock the discharge
mechanism until the required mixing time has elapsed.
c. Mixing Time and Uniformity for Stationary Mixers: For stationary

mixers, before uniformity data are available, the mixing time for each
batch after all solid materials are in the mixer, provided that all of
the mixing water is introduced before one-fourth of the mixing time has
elapsed, shall be 1 minute for mixers having a capacity of 1 cubic yard.
For mixers of greater capacity, this minimum time shall be increased 20
seconds for each additional 1.33 cubic yard or fraction thereof. After
results of uniformity tests are available, the mixing time may be
reduced to the minimum time required to meet uniformity requirements;
but if uniformity requirements are not being met, the mixing time shall
be increased as directed. The mixing time for full batch production
shall be a minimum of 75 seconds. Mixer performance tests at new
mixing times shall be performed immediately after any change in mixing
time. The Regular Test sequence shall be conducted for initial
determination of the mixing time or as directed. When regular testing
is performed, the concrete shall meet the limits of any five of the six
uniformity requirements listed in Table 1 below.
d. The Abbreviated Test sequence shall be conducted for production

concrete verification at the frequency specified in Table 6. When
abbreviated testing is performed, the concrete shall meet only those
requirements listed for abbreviated testing. The concrete proportions
used for uniformity tests shall be as used on the project. Regular
testing shall consist of performing all six tests on three batches of
concrete. The range for regular testing shall be the average of the
ranges of the three batches. Abbreviated testing shall consist of
performing the three required tests on a single batch of concrete. The
range for abbreviated testing shall be the range for one batch. If
more than one mixer is used and all are identical in terms of make,
type, capacity, condition, speed of rotation, etc., the results of
tests on one of the mixers shall apply to the others, subject to the
approval of the Contracting Officer. All mixer performance
(uniformity) testing shall be performed in accordance with COE CRD-C 55
and with paragraph titled TESTING AND INSPECTION FOR CONTRACTOR QUALITY
CONTROL in PART 3.
TABLE 1
UNIFORMITY REQUIREMENTS--STATIONARY MIXERS
Regular Tests Abbreviated Tests

Allowable Allowable
Maximum Range for Maximum Range
Parameter Average of 3 Batches for 1 Batch
___________ ______________________ ____________________
Unit weight of air-free mortar 32 kg/cubic m 32 kg/cubic m

(Unit weight of air-free mortar 2.0 lbs/cubic ft 2.0 lbs/cubic ft)
Air content 1.0 percent --
Slump 25 mm 25 mm
(Slump 1.0 inch 1.0 inch)
TABLE 1
UNIFORMITY REQUIREMENTS--STATIONARY MIXERS
Regular Tests Abbreviated Tests

Allowable Allowable
Maximum Range for Maximum Range
Parameter Average of 3 Batches for 1 Batch
___________ ______________________ ____________________
Coarse aggregate 6.0 percent 6.0 percent
Compressive strength at 7 days, 10.0 percent 10.0 percent
Water content 1.5 percent
e. Truck: Truck mixers shall not be used for mixing or transporting

slipformed paving concrete. The only truck mixers used for mixing or
transporting paving concrete shall be those designed with extra large
blading and rear opening specifically for low-slump paving concrete.
Truck mixers, the mixing of concrete therein, and concrete uniformity
and testing thereof shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C 94/C 94M.
The number of revolutions between 70 to 100 for truck-mixed concrete
and the number of revolutions for shrink-mixed concrete shall be
determined by uniformity tests as specified in ASTM C 94/C 94M and in
requirements for mixer performance stated in paragraph TESTING AND
INSPECTION FOR CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL in PART 3. If requirements
for the uniformity of concrete are not met with 100 revolutions of
mixing after all ingredients including water are in the truck mixer
drum, the mixer shall not be used until the condition is corrected.
Water shall not be added after the initial introduction of mixing water
except, when on arrival at the job site, the slump is less than
specified and the water-cement ratio is less than that given as a
maximum in the approved mixture. Additional water may be added to
bring the slump within the specified range provided the approved
water-cement ratio is not exceeded. Water shall be injected into the
head of the mixer (end opposite the discharge opening) drum under
pressure, and the drum or blades shall be turned a minimum of 30
additional revolutions at mixing speed. Water shall not be added to
the batch at any later time. Mixer performance (uniformity) tests for
truck mixers shall be made in accordance with ASTM C 94/C 94M.
2.10.3 Transporting Equipment
Slipform concrete shall be transported to the paving site in nonagitating

equipment conforming to ASTM C 94/C 94M or in approved agitators. Fixed
form concrete shall be transported in approved truck mixers designed with
extra large blading and rear opening specifically for low slump concrete.
All transporting equipment shall be designed and operated to deliver and
discharge the required concrete mixture completely without segregation.
2.10.4 Transfer and Spreading Equipment
Equipment for transferring concrete from the transporting equipment to the

paving lane in front of the paver shall be specially manufactured,
self-propelled transfer equipment which will accept the concrete outside
the paving lane and will transfer and spread it evenly across the paving
lane in front of the paver and strike off the surface evenly to a depth
which permits the paver to operate efficiently.
2.10.5 Paver-Finisher
a. General: The paver-finisher shall be a heavy-duty, self-propelled

machine designed specifically for paving and finishing high quality
pavement. The paver-finisher shall weigh at least 2200 lb/foot of lane
width, and shall be powered by an engine having at least 6.0
horsepower/foot of lane width. The paver-finisher shall spread,
consolidate, and shape the plastic concrete to the desired cross
section in one pass. The mechanisms for forming the pavement shall be
easily adjustable in width and thickness and for required crown. In
addition to other spreaders required by paragraph above, the
paver-finisher shall be equipped with a full width knock-down auger or
paddle mechanism, capable of operating in both directions, which will
evenly spread the fresh concrete in front of the screed or extrusion
plate.
b. Vibrators: Immersion vibrators shall be gang mounted at the front

of the paver on a frame equipped with suitable controls so that all
vibrators can be operated at any desired depth within the slab or
completely withdrawn from the concrete, as required. The vibrators
shall be automatically controlled so that they will be immediately
stopped as forward motion of the paver ceases. The paver-finisher
shall be equipped with an electronic vibrator monitoring device
displaying the operating frequency of each individual internal
vibrator. The monitoring device shall have a readout display visible
to the paver operator. It shall operate continuously while paving, and
shall display all vibrator frequencies with manual or automatic
sequencing among all individual vibrators. The spacing of the immersion
vibrators across the paving lane shall be as necessary to properly
consolidate the concrete, but the clear distance between vibrators
shall not exceed 30 inches. The outside vibrators shall not be more
than 12 inches from the lane edge. Spud vibrators shall operate at a
frequency of not less than 8000 impulses/minute and an amplitude of not
less than 0.03 inch and tube vibrators at a frequency of not less than
5000 impulses/minute and an amplitude of not less than 0.03 inch, as
determined by COE CRD-C 521.
c. Screed or Extrusion Plate: The paver-finisher shall be equipped

with a transversely oscillating screed or an extrusion plate to shape,
compact, and smooth the surface and shall so finish the surface that no
significant amount of hand finishing, except use of cutting
straightedges, is required. The screed or extrusion plate shall be
constructed to provide adjustment for crown in the pavement. The
entire machine shall provide adjustment for variation in lane width or
thickness and to prevent more than 8 inches of the screed or extrusion
plate extending over previously placed concrete on either end when
paving fill-in lanes. Machines that cause displacement of properly
installed forms or cause ruts or indentations in the prepared
underlying materials and machines that cause frequent delays due to
mechanical failures shall be replaced as directed.
d. Fixed Forms: The paver-finisher shall be equipped with wheels

designed to ride the forms, keep it aligned with the forms, and spread
the load so as to prevent deformation of the forms. Paver-finishers
travelling on guide rails located outside the paving lane shall be
equiped with wheels when travelling on new or existing concrete to
remain.
e. Slipform: The slipform paver-finisher shall be automatically

controlled and crawler mounted with padded tracks so as to be
completely stable under all operating conditions. The paver-finisher
shall finish the surface and edges so that no edge slump beyond
allowable tolerance occurs. Suitable moving side forms shall be
provided that are adjustable and will produce smooth, even edges,
perpendicular to the top surface and meeting specification requirements
for alignment and freedom from edge slump.
f. Longitudinal Mechanical Float: A longitudinal mechanical float

shall be specially designed and manufactured to smooth and finish the
pavement surface without working excess paste to the surface. It shall
be rigidly attached to the rear of the paver-finisher or to a separate
self-propelled frame spanning the paving lane. The float plate shall
be at least 5 feet long by 8 inches wide and shall automatically be
oscillated in the longitudinal direction while slowly moving from edge
to edge of the paving lane, with the float plate in contact with the
surface at all times.
g. Nonrotating Pipe Float: A pipe float if used, shall be a

nonrotating pipe 6 to 10 inches in diameter and sufficiently long to
span the full paving width when oriented at an angle of approximately
60 degrees with the centerline. The pipe float shall be mounted on a
self-propelled frame that spans the paving lane. No means of applying
water to the surface shall be incorporated in the pipe float.
h. Other Types of Finishing Equipment: Clary screeds, other rotating

tube floats, or bridge deck finishers shall not be allowed on mainline
paving, but may be allowed on irregular or odd-shaped slabs, and near
buildings or trench drains, subject to the Contracting Officer's
approval. Bridge deck finishers shall have a minimum operating weight
of 7500 pounds and shall have a transversely operating carriage
containing a knock-down auger and a minimum of two immersion vibrators.
Vibrating screeds or pans shall be used only for isolated slabs where
hand finishing is permitted as specified, and only where specifically
approved.
2.10.6 Curing Equipment
Equipment for applying membrane-forming curing compound shall be mounted on

a self-propelled frame that spans the paving lane. The reservoir for
curing compound shall be constantly mechanically (not air) agitated during
operation and shall contain means for completely draining the reservoir.
The spraying system shall consist of a mechanically powered pump which will
maintain constant pressure during operation, an operable pressure gauge,
and either a series of spray nozzles evenly spaced across the lane to give
uniformly overlapping coverage or a single spray nozzle which is mounted on
a carriage which automatically traverses the lane width at a speed
correlated with the forward movement of the overall frame. All spray
nozzles shall be protected with wind screens. Calibrate the spraying
system in accordance with ASTM D 2995, Method A, for the rate of
application required in paragraph: Membrane Curing. Any hand-operated
sprayers allowed by that paragraph shall be compressed air supplied by a
mechanical air compressor. If the curing equipment fails to apply an even
coating of compound at the specified rate, it shall immediately be replaced.
2.10.7 Texturing Equipment
a. General: Texturing equipment shall be as specified below. Before
use, the texturing equipment shall be demonstrated on a test section,

and the equipment shall be modified as necessary to produce the texture
directed.
b. Burlap Drag: A burlap drag shall be securely attached to a separate

wheel mounted frame spanning the paving lane or to one of the other
similar pieces of equipment. Length of the material shall provide 24
to 36 inches dragging flat on the pavement surface. Width shall be at
least equal to the width of the slab. The material shall be clean,
reasonably new burlap, completely saturated with water before
attachment to the frame, always resaturated before start of use, and
kept clean and saturated during use. Burlap shall conform to
AASHTO M 182, Class 3 or 4.
c. Broom: Surface texture shall be applied using an approved

mechanical stiff bristle broom drag of a type that will uniformly score
the surface transverse to the pavement center line. The broom shall be
capable of traversing the full width of the pavement in a single pass
at a uniform speed and with a uniform pressure. The scores shall be
uniform in appearance and approximately 1/16 inch in depth but not more
than 1/8 inch in depth.
d. Artificial Turf: The artificial turf drag shall be full-width and

the leading transverse edge shall be securely fastened to a lightweight
pole on a traveling bridge. A variety of different types of artificial
turf are available and approval of any one type will be done only after
it has been demonstrated by the Contractor to provide a satisfactory
texture. One type that has provided satisfactory texture consists of
7,200 approximately 0.85-inches-long polyethylene turf blades per
square foot.
e. Deep Texturing Equipment: Texturing equipment shall consist of a

stiff bristled broom forming a drag at least 4 feet long. This drag
shall be mounted in a wheeled frame spanning the paving lane and so
constructed that the drag is mechanically pulled in a straight line
across the paving lane perpendicular to the centerline.
2.10.8 Sawing Equipment
Equipment for sawing joints and for other similar sawing of concrete shall
be standard diamond-type concrete saws mounted on a wheeled chassis which
can be easily guided to follow the required alignment. Blades shall be
diamond tipped. If demonstrated to operate properly, abrasive blades may
be used. Provide spares as required to maintain the required sawing rate.
Wheel saws used in the removal of concrete shall be saws with large
diameter tungsten carbide tipped blades mounted on a heavy-duty chassis
which will produce a saw kerf at least 1-1/2 inch wide. All saws shall be
capable of sawing to the full depth required. Early-entry saws may be
used, subject to demonstration and approval of the Contracting Officer. No
change to the initial sawcut depth shall be permitted.
2.10.9 Straightedge
Furnish and maintain at the job site, in good condition, one 12 foot
straightedge for each paving train for testing the hardened portland cement
concrete surfaces. These straightedges shall be constructed of aluminum or
magnesium alloy and shall have blades of box or box-girder cross section
with flat bottom, adequately reinforced to insure rigidity and accuracy.
Straightedges shall have handles for operation on the pavement.
2.11 SPECIFIED CONCRETE STRENGTH AND OTHER PROPERTIES
2.11.1 Specified Flexural Strength
The contractor shall be responsible for the development of the mixture

proportion study for cementitious materials and chemical admixtures. The
concrete mix design shall include a statement giving the maximum nominal
coarse aggregate size and the proportions of all ingredients that will be
used in the manufacture of concrete at least 60 days prior to commencing
concrete operations. Trial design batches, mixture proportioning studies,
and testing requirements shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.
Strength requirements shall be based on flexural strength. Trial mixtures
having proportions, slumps, and air content suitable for the work shall be
based on methodology described in ACI 211.1, modified as necessary to
accommodate flexural strength. The maximum water-cementitious material
ratio is 0.45. Coarse and fine aggregates shall have a satisfactory
service record of at least 5 years successful service in three paving
projects, or if a new source is used, shall meet the requirements when
tested for resistance to freezing and thawing. Coarse and fine aggregates
not having a satisfactory demonstrable service record shall have a
durability factor of 50 when subjected to freezing and thawing in concrete
in accordance with COE CRD-C 114 (Test Method for Soundness of Aggregates
by Freezing and Thawing of Concrete Specimens).
Specified flexural strength, R, for concrete is 600 psi at 28 days,as

determined by tests made in accordance with ASTM C 78 of beams fabricated
and cured in accordance with ASTM C 192/C 192M, as determined by equivalent
flexural strength, as specified in paragraph: Mixture Proportioning for
Flexural Strength below. The water-cementitious material ratio will be the
equivalent water-cement ratio as determined by conversion from the weight
ratio of water to cement plus SCM by the mass equivalency method described
in ACI 211.1. The concrete shall be air-entrained with a total air content
of 6 plus or minus 1.5 percentage points, at the point of placement. Air
content shall be determined in accordance with ASTM C 231. The maximum
allowable slump of the concrete at the point of placement shall be 2 inches
for pavement constructed with fixed forms. For slipformed pavement, at the
start of the project, select a maximum allowable slump which will produce
in-place pavement meeting the specified tolerances for control of edge
slump. The selected slump shall be applicable to both pilot and fill-in
lanes.
2.11.2 Concrete Temperature
The temperature of the concrete as delivered shall conform to the

requirements of paragraphs, Paving in Hot Weather and Paving in Cold
Weather, in PART 3. Temperature of concrete shall be determined in
2.11.3 Concrete Strength for Final Acceptance
The strength of the concrete will be considered acceptable when the average
equivalent 28-day flexural strengths for each lot are above the 'Specified
Flexural Strength' as determined by correlation with 14-day compressive
strength tests specified in paragraph: "Mixture Proportioning for Flexural
Strength" below, and no individual set (2 specimens per sublot) in the lot
are 25 psi or more below the equivalent 'Specified Flexural Strength'. If
any lot or sublot, respectively, fails to meet the above criteria, the lot
or sublot shall be removed and replaced at no additional cost to the

Government. This is in addition to and does not replace the average
strength required for day-to-day CQC operations as specified in paragraph:
Average CQC Flexural Strength Required for Mixtures, below.
2.12 MIXTURE PROPORTIONS
2.12.1 Composition
Concrete shall be composed of cementitious material, water, fine and coarse

aggregates, and admixtures. Supplementary Cementitious Materials (SCM)
choice and usage shall be in accordance with paragraph: Supplementary
Cementitious Materials (SCM) Content. The total cementitious material
content shall be at least 517 lb./cu. yd.. Admixtures shall consist of
air entraining admixture and may also include, as approved, retarder
water-reducing admixture.
2.12.2 Proportioning Studies
Trial design batches, mixture proportioning studies, and testing

requirements are the responsibility of the Contractor. Trial mixtures
having proportions, slumps, and air content suitable for the work shall be
based on methodology described in ACI 211.1, modified as necessary to
accommodate flexural strength. Submit test results including:
a. Coarse and fine aggregate gradations and plots.

b. Combined aggregate gradation and coarseness/workability plots.
c. Coarse aggregate quality test results, include deleterious materials.
d. Fine aggregate quality test results.
e. Mill certificates for cement and supplemental cementitious materials.
f. Certified test results for air entraining, water reducing,
retarding, non-chloride accelerating, and Lithium Nitrate admixtures.
g. Specifed flexural strength, slump, and air content.
h. Documentation of required average CQC flexural strength, Ra.
i. Recommended proportions/volumes for proposed mixture and each of
three trial water-cementitious materials ratios.
j. Individual beam and cylinder breaks.
k. Flexural and compressive strength summaries and plots.
l. Correlation ratios for acceptance testing and CQC testing.
m. Historical record of test results, documenting production standard
deviation (if available).
2.12.2.1 Water-Cement Ratio
At least three different water-cement ratios, which will produce a range of

strength encompassing that required on the project, shall be used. The
maximum allowable water-cement ratio required in paragraph: Specified
Flexural Strength, above will be the equivalent water-cement ratio.
Laboratory trial mixtures shall be proportioned for maximum permitted slump
and air content.
2.12.2.2 Trial Mixture Studies
Separate sets of trial mixture studies shall be made for each combination
of cementitious materials and each combination of admixtures proposed for
use. No combination of either shall be used until proven by such studies,
except that, if approved in writing and otherwise permitted by these
specifications, an accelerator or a retarder may be used without separate
trial mixture study. Separate trial mixture studies shall also be made for
concrete for each placing method (slip form, fixed form, or hand placement)
proposed. The temperature of concrete in each trial batch shall be
reported. Each mixture shall be designed to promote easy and suitable
concrete placement, consolidation and finishing, and to prevent segregation
and excessive bleeding.
2.12.2.3 Mixture Proportioning for Flexural Strength
The following step by step procedure shall be followed:
a. Fabricate all beams for each mixture from the same batch or blend
of batches. Fabricate and cure all beams in accordance with
ASTM C 192/C 192M, using 6 x 6 inch steel beam forms.
b. Cure test beams from each mixture for 3, 7, 14, and 28-day flexural
tests; 6 beams to be tested per age.
c. Test beams in accordance with ASTM C 78.
d. Using the average strength for each w/c at each age, plot all
results from each of the three mixtures on separate graphs for w/c
versus:
3-day flexural strength
e. From these graphs select a w/c that will produce a mixture giving a
28-day flexural strength equal to the required strength determined in
accordance with the next paragraph.
f. Using the above selected w/c, select from the graphs the expected
3, 7 and 14-day flexural strengths.
g. From the above expected strengths for the selected mixture,

determine the Ratio of the 7-day flexural strength of the selected
mixture to the 28-day flexural strength of the mixture (for CQC
control).
h. From the above expected strengths for the selected mixture,

determine the Ratio of the 14-day flexural strength of the selected
mixture to the 28-day flexural strength of the mixture (for acceptance).
i. If there is a change in materials, additional mixture design

studies shall be made using the new materials and new Correlation
Ratios shall be determined.
j. No concrete pavement shall be placed until the Contracting Officer

has approved the Contractor's mixture proportions. The approved
water-cementitious materials ratio shall not exceed the maximum value
specified in paragraph: Specified Flexural Strength, above and shall
not be increased without the Contracting Officer's written approval.
k. Fabricate all beams and cylinders for each mixture from the same
batch or blend of batches. Fabricate and cure all beams and cylinders
in accordance with ASTM C 192/C 192M, using 6 x 6 inch steel beam forms
and 6 x 12 inch single-use cylinder forms.
l. Cure test beams from each mixture for 3, 7, 14, and 28-day flexural
tests; 6 beams to be tested per age.
m. Cure test cylinders from each mixture for 3, 7, 14, and 28-day
compressive strength tests; 6 cylinders to be tested per age.
n. Test beams in accordance with ASTM C 78, cylinders in accordance

with ASTM C 39/C 39M.
o. Using the average strength for each w/c at each age, plot all
results from each of the three mixtures on separate graphs for w/c
versus:
3-day compressive strength

p. From these graphs select a w/c that will produce a mixture giving a
28-day flexural strength equal to the required strength determined in
accordance with the next paragraph.
q. Using the above selected w/c, select from the graphs the expected
3, 7, 14, 28-day flexural strengths and the expected 3, 7, 14, 28 -day
compressive strengths for the mixture.
r. From the above expected strengths for the selected mixture

determine the following Correlation Ratios:
(1) Ratio of the 14-day compressive strength of the selected

mixture to the 28-day flexural strength of the mixture (for
acceptance).
(2) Ratio of the 7-day compressive strength of the selected

mixture to the 28-day flexural strength of the mixture (for CQC
control).
s. If there is a change in materials, additional mixture design

studies shall be made using the new materials and new Correlation
Ratios shall be determined.
t. No concrete pavement shall be placed until the Contracting Officer

has approved the Contractor's mixture proportions. The approved
water-cementitious materials ratio shall not exceed the maximum value
specified in the next paragraph and shall not be increased without the
Contracting Officer's written approval.
2.12.3 Average CQC Flexural Strength Required for Mixtures
In order to ensure meeting the strength requirements specified in

paragraph: SPECIFIED CONCRETE STRENGTH AND OTHER PROPERTIES above, during
production, the mixture proportions selected during mixture proportioning
studies and used during construction shall produce a required average CQC
flexural strength exceeding the specified strength, R, by the amount
indicated below. This required average CQC flexural strength, Ra, will be
used only for CQC operations as specified in paragraph: TESTING AND

INSPECTION FOR CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL in PART 3 and as specified in the
previous paragraph. During production, the required Ra shall be adjusted ,
as appropriate and as approved, based on the standard deviation of
equivalent 28 average 28-day strengths being attained during paving.
a. From Previous Test Records: Where a concrete production facility

has previous test records current to within 18 months, a standard
deviation shall be established in accordance with the applicable
provisions of ACI 214R. Test records from which a standard deviation
is calculated shall represent materials, quality control procedures,
and conditions similar to those expected, shall represent concrete
produced to meet a specified flexural strength or strengths within 150
psi of the 28 -day flexural strength specified for the proposed work,
and shall consist of at least 30 consecutive tests. Perform
verification testing, as directed by the Contracting Officer, to
document the current strength. A strength test shall be the average of
the strengths of two specimens made from the same sample of concrete
and tested at 28 days. Required average CQC flexural strength, Ra,
used as the basis for selection of concrete proportions shall be the
value from the equation that follows, using the standard deviation as
determined above:
Ra = R + 1.34S
Where: S = standard deviation

R = specified flexural strength
Ra = required average flexural strength
Where a concrete production facility does not have test records

meeting the requirements above but does have a record based on 15
to 29 consecutive tests, a standard deviation shall be established
as the product of the calculated standard deviation and a
modification factor from the following table:
MODIFICATION FACTOR
NUMBER OF TESTS FOR STANDARD DEVIATION
15 1.16
20 1.08
25 1.03
30 or more 1.00
b. Without Previous Test Records: When a concrete production facility

does not have sufficient field strength test records for calculation of
the standard deviation, the required average strength, Ra, shall be
determined by adding 15 percent to the specified flexural strength, R.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION FOR PAVING
Before commencing paving, perform the following. If used, forms shall be

in place, cleaned, coated, and adequately supported. Any reinforcing steel
needed shall be at the paving site. All transporting and transfer
equipment shall be ready for use, clean, and free of hardened concrete and
foreign material. Equipment for spreading, consolidating, screeding,
finishing, and texturing concrete shall be at the paving site, clean and in
proper working order. All equipment and material for curing and for
protecting concrete from weather or mechanical damage shall be at the

paving site, in proper working condition, and in sufficient amount for the
entire placement.
3.1.1 Weather Prevention
When windy conditions during paving appear probable, equipment and material
shall be at the paving site to provide windbreaks, shading, fogging, or
other action to prevent plastic shrinkage cracking or other damaging drying
of the concrete.
3.1.2 Proposed Techniques
Submit for approval the following items:
a. A description of the placing and protection methods proposed

when concrete is to be placed in or exposed to hot, cold, or rainy
weather conditions.
b. A detailed paving sequence plan and proposed paving pattern

showing all planned construction joints; transverse and
longitudinal dowel bar spacing; and identifying pilot lanes and
hand placement areas. No deviation from the jointing pattern
shown on the drawings shall be made without written approval of
the design engineer.
c. Plan and equipment proposed to control alignment of sawn

joints within the specified tolerances.
d. Data on the curing equipment, media and methods to be used.
e. Data on profilograph and methods to measure pavement

smoothness.
f. Pavement demolition work plan, presenting the proposed methods

and equipment to remove existing pavement and protect pavement to
remain in place.
3.2 CONDITIONING OF UNDERLYING MATERIAL
3.2.1 General Procedures
Underlying material, upon which concrete is to be placed shall be clean,

damp, and free from debris, waste concrete or cement, frost, ice, and
standing or running water. Prior to setting forms or placement of
concrete, the underlying material shall be well drained and shall have been
satisfactorily graded by string-line controlled, automated, trimmer/fine
grader and uniformly compacted in accordance with the applicable Section of
these specifications. The surface of the underlying material shall be
tested as to crown, elevation, and density in advance of setting forms or
of concrete placement using slip-form techniques. High areas shall be
trimmed to proper elevation. Low areas shall be filled and compacted to a
condition similar to that of surrounding grade, or filled with concrete
monolithically with the pavement. Low areas filled with concrete shall not
be cored for thickness to avoid biasing the average thickness used for
evaluation and payment adjustment. Any underlying material disturbed by
construction operations shall be reworked and recompacted to specified
density immediately in front of the paver. If a slipform paver is used,
the same underlying material under the paving lane shall be continued
beyond the edge of the lane a sufficient distance and shall be thoroughly
compacted and true to grade to provide a suitable trackline for the
slipform paver and firm support for the edge of the paving lane.
3.2.2 Traffic on Underlying Material
After the underlying material has been prepared for concrete placement, no
equipment shall be permitted thereon. Subject to specific approval,
crossing of the prepared underlying material at specified intervals for
construction purposes may be permitted, provided rutting or indentations do
not occur. The surface shall be reworked and reprepared to the
satisfaction of the Contracting Officer before concrete is placed. No
transporting equipment shall be allowed to operate on the prepared and
compacted underlying material in front of the paver-finisher.
3.3 WEATHER LIMITATIONS
3.3.1 Placement and Protection During Inclement Weather
Do not commence placing operations when heavy rain or other damaging

weather conditions appear imminent. At all times when placing concrete,
maintain on-site sufficient waterproof cover and means to rapidly place it
over all unhardened concrete or concrete that might be damaged by rain.
Suspend placement of concrete whenever rain, high winds, or other damaging
weather commences to damage the surface or texture of the placed unhardened
concrete, washes cement out of the concrete, or changes the water content
of the surface concrete. All unhardened concrete shall be immediately
covered and protected from the rain or other damaging weather. Any slab
damaged by rain or other weather shall be completely removed full depth, by
full slab width, to the nearest original joint, and replaced at the
Contractor's expense as specified in paragraph: REPAIR, REMOVAL AND
REPLACEMENT OF NEWLY CONSTRUCTED SLABS below.
3.3.2 Paving in Hot Weather
When the ambient temperature during paving is expected to exceed 90 degrees

F, the concrete shall be properly placed and finished in accordance with
procedures previously submitted, approved, and as specified herein. The
concrete temperature at time of delivery to the forms shall not exceed the
temperature shown in the table below when measured in accordance with
ASTM C 1064/C 1064M. Cooling of the mixing water or aggregates or placing
in the cooler part of the day may be required to obtain an adequate placing
temperature. Steel forms and reinforcing shall be cooled as needed to
maintain steel temperatures below 120 degrees F. Transporting and placing
equipment shall be cooled or protected if necessary to maintain proper
concrete placing temperature. The finished surfaces of the newly laid
pavement shall be kept damp by applying a fog spray (mist) with approved
spraying equipment until the pavement is covered by the curing medium.
Maximum Allowable Concrete Placing Temperature
Relative Humidity, Percent, Maximum Allowable Concrete

During Time of Concrete Placement Temperature in Degrees F
___________________________________ _____________________________
Greater than 60 90
40-60 85
Less than 40 80
3.3.3 Prevention of Plastic Shrinkage Cracking
During weather with low humidity, and particularly with high temperature
and appreciable wind, develop and institute measures to prevent plastic
shrinkage cracks from developing. If plastic shrinkage cracking occurs,
halt further placement of concrete until protective measures are in place
to prevent further cracking. Periods of high potential for plastic
shrinkage cracking can be anticipated by use of Fig. 2.1.5 of ACI 305R. In
addition to the protective measures specified in the previous paragraph,
the concrete placement shall be further protected by erecting shades and
windbreaks and by applying fog sprays of water, the addition of
monomolecular films, or wet covering. When such water treatment is
stopped, curing procedures shall be immediately commenced. Plastic
shrinkage cracks that occur shall be repaired in accordance with paragraph:
REPAIR, REMOVAL, REPLACEMENT OF NEWLY CONSTRUCTED SLABS. Plastic shrinkage
cracks shall never be troweled over or filled with slurry.
3.3.4 Paving in Cold Weather
Cold weather paving shall conform to ACI 306R. Special protection

measures, as specified herein, shall be used if freezing temperatures are
anticipated before the expiration of the specified curing period.
Placement of concrete shall not begin unless the ambient temperature is at
least 35 degrees F and rising. Thereafter, placement of concrete shall be
halted whenever the ambient temperature drops below 40 degrees F. When the
ambient temperature is less than 50 degrees F, the temperature of the
concrete when placed shall be not less than 50 degrees F nor more than 75
degrees F. Heating of the mixing water or aggregates will be required to
regulate the concrete placing temperature. Materials entering the mixer
shall be free from ice, snow, or frozen lumps. Salt, chemicals or other
materials shall not be incorporated in the concrete to prevent freezing.
If allowed under paragraph: MIXTURE PROPORTIONS in PART 2, an accelerating
admixture may be used when the ambient temperature is below 50 degrees F.
Covering and other means shall be provided for maintaining the concrete at
a temperature of at least 50 degrees F for not less than 72 hours after
placing, and at a temperature above freezing for the remainder of the
curing period. Pavement slabs damaged by freezing shall be removed full
depth, by full slab width, to the nearest original joint, and replaced at
the Contractor's expense as specified in paragraph: REPAIR, REMOVAL,
REPLACEMENT OF NEWLY CONSTRUCTED SLABS.
3.4 CONCRETE PRODUCTION
Batching, mixing, and transporting equipment shall have a capacity

sufficient to maintain a continuous, uniform forward movement of the paver
of not less than 2.5 feet per minute. Concrete transported in
non-agitating equipment shall be deposited in front of the paver within 45
minutes from the time cement has been charged into the mixing drum, except
that if the ambient temperature is above 90 degrees F, the time shall be
reduced to 30 minutes. Concrete transported in truck mixers shall be
deposited in front of the paver within 90 minutes from the time cement has
been charged into the mixer drum of the plant or truck mixer. If the
ambient temperature is above 90 degrees F, the time shall be reduced to 60
minutes. Every load of concrete delivered to the paving site shall be
accompanied by a batch ticket from the operator of the batching plant.
Tickets shall be on approved forms and shall show at least the mass, or
volume, of all ingredients in each batch delivered, the water meter and
revolution meter reading on truck mixers and the time of day. Tickets
shall be delivered to the placing foreman who shall keep them on file and
deliver them to the Government weekly, or as directed by the Contracting

Officer.
3.4.1 Batching and Mixing Concrete
Scale pivots and bearings shall be kept clean and free of rust. Any
equipment which fails to perform as specified shall immediately be removed
from use until properly repaired and adjusted, or replaced.
3.4.2 Transporting and Transfer - Spreading Operations
Non-agitating equipment shall be used only on smooth roads and for haul
time less than 15 minutes. Concrete shall be deposited as close as
possible to its final position in the paving lane. All equipment shall be
operated to discharge and transfer concrete without segregation. In no
case shall dumping of concrete in discrete piles be permitted. No transfer
or spreading operation which requires the use of front-end loaders, dozers,
or similar equipment to distribute the concrete will be permitted.
3.5 PAVING
Pavement shall be constructed with paving and finishing equipment utilizing

rigid fixed forms or by use of slipform paving equipment. Paving and
finishing equipment and procedures shall be capable of constructing paving
lanes of the required width at a rate of at least 100 feet of paving lane
per hour on a routine basis. Paving equipment and its operation shall be
controlled, and coordinated with all other operations, such that the
paver-finisher has a continuous forward movement, at a reasonably uniform
speed, from beginning to end of each paving lane, except for inadvertent
equipment breakdown. Failure to achieve this shall require the Contractor
to halt operations, regroup, and modify operations to achieve this
requirement. Workmen with foreign material on their footwear or
construction equipment that might deposit foreign material shall not be
permitted to walk or operate in the plastic concrete. Where an open-graded
granular base is required under the concrete, select paving equipment and
procedures which will operate properly on the base course without causing
displacement or other damage.
3.5.2 Consolidation
Concrete shall be consolidated with the specified type of lane-spanning,

gang-mounted, mechanical, immersion type vibrating equipment mounted in
front of the paver, supplemented, in rare instances as specified, by
hand-operated vibrators. The vibrators shall be inserted into the concrete
to a depth that will provide the best full-depth consolidation but not
closer to the underlying material than 2 inches. Excessive vibration shall
not be permitted. If the vibrators cause visible tracking in the paving
lane, the paving operation shall be stopped and equipment and operations
modified to prevent it. Concrete in small, odd-shaped slabs or in isolated
locations inaccessible to the gang-mounted vibration equipment shall be
vibrated with an approved hand-operated immersion vibrator operated from a
bridge spanning the area. Vibrators shall not be used to transport or
spread the concrete. Hand-operated vibrators shall not be operated in the
concrete at one location for more than 20 seconds. Insertion locations for
hand-operated vibrators shall be between 6 to 15 inches on centers. For
each paving train, at least one additional vibrator spud, or sufficient
parts for rapid replacement and repair of vibrators shall be maintained at
the paving site at all times. Any evidence of inadequate consolidation

(honeycomb along the edges, large air pockets, or any other evidence) shall
require the immediate stopping of the paving operation and approved
adjustment of the equipment or procedures.
3.5.3 Operation
When the paver approaches a header at the end of a paving lane, a

sufficient amount of concrete shall be maintained ahead of the paver to
provide a roll of concrete which will spill over the header. The amount of
extra concrete shall be sufficient to prevent any slurry that is formed and
carried along ahead of the paver from being deposited adjacent to the
header. The spud vibrators in front of the paver shall be brought as close
to the header as possible before they are lifted. Additional consolidation
shall be provided adjacent to the headers by hand-manipulated vibrators.
When the paver is operated between or adjacent to previously constructed
pavement (fill-in lanes), provisions shall be made to prevent damage to the
previously constructed pavement. Screeds or extrusion plates shall be
electronically controlled from the previously placed pavement so as to
prevent them from applying pressure to the existing pavement and to prevent
abrasion of the pavement surface. The overlapping area of existing
pavement surface shall at all times be kept completely free of any loose or
bonded foreign material as the paver-finisher operates across it. When the
paver travels on existing pavement, approved provisions shall be made to
prevent damage to the existing pavement. Pavers using transversely
oscillating screeds shall not be used to form fill-in lanes that have
widths less than a full width for which the paver was designed or adjusted.
3.5.4 Required Results
The paver-finisher, and its gang-mounted vibrators, together with its

operating procedures shall be adjusted and operated and coordinated with
the concrete mixture being used to produce a thoroughly consolidated slab
throughout, true to line and grade within specified tolerances. The
paver-finishing operation shall produce a surface finish free of
irregularities, tears, voids of any kind, and any other discontinuities.
The paver-finisher shall make only one pass across the pavement; multiple
passes will not be permitted. The equipment and its operation shall
produce a finished surface requiring no hand finishing other than the use
of cutting straightedges, except in very infrequent instances. If any
equipment or operation fails to produce the above results, the paving shall
be stopped, the equipment shall be replaced or properly adjusted, the
operation shall be appropriately modified, or the mixture proportions
modified, in order to produce the required results before recommencing
paving. No water, other than fog sprays (mist) as specified in paragraph:
Prevention of Plastic Shrinkage Cracking above, shall be applied to the
concrete or the concrete surface during paving and finishing.
3.5.5 Fixed Form Paving
Paving equipment for fixed-form paving and the operation thereof shall
conform to the requirements of paragraph EQUIPMENT, and all requirements
specified herein.
3.5.5.1 Forms for Fixed-Form Paving
a. Straight forms shall be made of steel and shall be furnished in

sections not less than 10 feet in length. Flexible or curved forms of
proper radius shall be used for curves of 100-foot radius or less.
Wood forms for curves and fillets shall be made of well-seasoned,

surfaced plank or plywood, straight, and free from warp or bend. Wood
forms shall be adequate in strength and rigidly braced. Forms shall
have a depth equal to the pavement thickness at the edge. Where the
project requires several different slab thicknesses, forms may be built
up by bolting or welding a tubular metal section or by bolting wood
planks to the bottom of the form to completely cover the underside of
the base of the form and provide an increase in depth of not more than
25 percent. The base width of the one-piece or built-up form shall be
not less than eight-tenths of the vertical height of the form, except
than forms 8 inches or less in vertical height shall have a base width
not less than the vertical height of the form. Maximum vertical
deviation of top of any side form, including joints, shall not vary
from a true plane more than 1/8 inch in 0 feet, and the upstanding leg
shall not vary more than 1/4 inch.
b. Form sections shall be tightly locked and shall be free from play
or movement in any direction. Forms shall be provided with adequate
devices for secure settings so that when in place they will withstand,
without visible spring or settlement, the impact and vibration of the
consolidating and finishing equipment.
c. Set forms for full bearing on foundation for entire length and
width and in alignment with edge of finished pavement. Support forms
during entire operation of placing, compaction, and finishing so that
forms will not deviate vertically more than 0.01 foot from required
grade and elevations indicated. Conformity to the alignment and grade
elevations shown on the drawings shall be checked and necessary
corrections shall be made immediately prior to placing the concrete.
The forms shall be cleaned and oiled each time before concrete is
placed. No concrete shall be placed until setting of forms has been
checked and approved by the CQC team.
d. Do not anchor guide rails for fixed form pavers into new concrete
or existing concrete to remain.
e. Forms for overlay pavements and for other locations where forms
must be set on existing pavements shall be held securely in place with
stakes or by other approved methods. Holes in existing pavements for
form stakes shall be carefully drilled by methods which will not crack
or spall the existing pavement. After use, the holes shall be filled
flush with the surrounding surface using approved material, prior to
overlying materials being placed. Any method which does not hold the
form securely or which damages the existing pavement shall be
immediately discontinued. Prior to setting forms for paving
operations, demonstrate the proposed form setting procedures at an
approved location without proceeding further until the proposed method
is approved by the Contracting Officer.
3.5.5.2 Form Removal
Keep forms in place at least 12 hours after the concrete has been placed.
When conditions are such that the early strength gain of the concrete is
delayed, leave the forms in place for a longer time, as directed. Remove
forms by procedures that do not injure the concrete. Bars or heavy metal
tools shall not be used directly against the concrete in removing the
forms. Any concrete found to be defective after form removal shall be
repaired promptly, using procedures specified hereinafter or as directed.
3.5.6 Slipform Paving
3.5.6.1 General
Paving equipment for slipform paving and the operation thereof shall
conform to the requirement of paragraph EQUIPMENT, and all requirements
specified herein. The slipform paver shall shape the concrete to the
specified and indicated cross section, meeting all tolerances, in one
pass. The slipform paver shall finish the surface and edges so that only a
very minimum isolated amount of hand finishing is required. If the paving
operation does not meet the above requirements and the specified
tolerances, the operation shall be immediately stopped, and the Contractor
shall regroup and replace or modify any equipment as necessary, modify
paving procedures or modify the concrete mix, in order to resolve the
problem. The slipform paver shall be automatically electronically
controlled from a taut wire guideline for horizontal alignment and on both
sides from a taut wire guideline for vertical alignment, except that
electronic control from a ski operating on a previously constructed
adjoining lane shall be used where applicable for either or both sides.
Automatic, electronic controls for vertical alignment shall always be used
on both sides of the lane. Control from a slope-adjustment control or
control operating from the underlying material shall never be used. Side
forms on slipform pavers shall be properly adjusted so that the finished
edge of the paving lane meets all specified tolerances. Dowels in
longitudinal construction joints shall be installed as specified below.
The installation of these dowels by dowel inserters attached to the paver
or by any other means of inserting the dowels into the plastic concrete
shall not be permitted.
3.5.6.2 Guideline for Slipform Paving
Accurately and securely install guidelines well in advance of concrete

placement. Provide supports at necessary intervals to eliminate all sag in
the guideline when properly tightened. The guideline shall be high
strength wire set with sufficient tension to remove all sag between
supports. Supports shall be securely staked to the underlying material or
other provisions made to ensure that the supports will not be displaced
when the guideline is tightened or when the guideline or supports are
accidentally touched by workmen or equipment during construction. The
appliances for attaching the guideline to the supports shall be capable of
easy adjustment in both the horizontal and vertical directions. When it is
necessary to leave gaps in the guideline to permit equipment to use or
cross underlying material, provisions shall be made for quickly and
accurately replacing the guideline without any delay to the forward
progress of the paver. Supports on either side of the gap shall be secured
in such a manner as to avoid disturbing the remainder of the guideline when
the portion across the gap is positioned and tightened. The guideline
across the gap and adjacent to the gap for a distance of 200 feet shall be
checked for horizontal and vertical alignment after the guideline across
the gap is tightened. Vertical and horizontal positioning of the guideline
shall be such that the finished pavement shall conform to the alignment and
grade elevations shown on the drawings within the specified tolerances for
grade and smoothness. The specified tolerances are intended to cover only
the normal deviations in the finished pavement that may occur under good
supervision and do not apply to setting of the guideline. The guideline
shall be set true to line and grade.
3.5.6.3 Laser Controls
If the Contractor proposes to use any type of automatic laser controls,

submit a detailed description of the system and perform a trial field
demonstration in the presence of the Contracting Officer at least one week
prior to start of paving. Approval of the control system will be based on
the results of the demonstration and on continuing satisfactory operation
during paving.
3.5.7 Placing Reinforcing Steel
The type and amount of steel reinforcement shall be as shown on the

drawings.
3.5.7.1 Pavement Thickness Less Than 12 Inches
For pavements less than 12 inches thick, the reinforcement shall be

positioned on suitable chairs or continuous mesh support devices securely
fastened to the subgrade prior to concrete placement. Concrete shall be
vibrated after the steel has been placed. Regardless of placement
procedure, the reinforcing steel shall be free from coatings which could
impair bond between the steel and concrete, and laps in the reinforcement
shall be as indicated. Regardless of the equipment or procedures used for
installing reinforcement, ensure that the entire depth of concrete is
adequately consolidated.
3.5.8 Placing Dowels and Tie Bars
The method used in installing and holding dowels in position shall ensure
that the error in alignment of any dowel from its required horizontal and
vertical alignment after the pavement has been completed will not be
greater than 1/8 in. per ft. Except as otherwise specified below,
horizontal spacing of dowels shall be within a tolerance of plus or minus
5/8 inch. The vertical alignment of the dowels shall be measured parallel
to the designated top surface of the pavement, except for those across the
crown or other grade change joints. Dowels across crowns and other joints
at grade changes shall be measured to a level surface. Horizontal
alignment shall be checked perpendicular to the joint edge. The horizontal
alignment shall be checked with a framing square. Dowels and tie bars
shall not be placed closer than 0.6 times the dowel bar tie bar length to
the planned joint line. If the last regularly spaced dowel tie bar is
closer than that dimension, it shall be moved away from the joint to a
location 0.6 times the dowel bar tie bar length, but not closer than 6
inches to its nearest neighbor. Dowel (tie bar) interference at a
transverse joint-longitudinal joint intersection shall be resolved by
deleting the closest transverse dowel (tie bar). Dowels shall be installed
as specified in the following subparagraphs.
3.5.8.1 Contraction Joints
Dowels and tie bars in longitudinal and transverse contraction joints

within the paving lane shall be held securely in place, as indicated, by
means of rigid metal frames or basket assemblies of an approved type. The
basket assemblies shall be held securely in the proper location by means of
suitable pins or anchors. Do not cut or crimp the dowel basket tie wires.
At the Contractor's option, in lieu of the above, dowels and tie bars in
contraction joints shall be installed near the front of the paver by
insertion into the plastic concrete using approved equipment and
procedures. Approval will be based on the results of a preconstruction
demonstration which the Contractor shall conduct, showing that the dowels
and tie bars are installed within specified tolerances.
3.5.8.2 Construction Joints-Fixed Form Paving
Installation of dowels and tie bars shall be by the bonded-in-place

method. Installation by removing and replacing in preformed holes will not
be permitted. Dowels and tie bars shall be prepared and placed across
joints where indicated, correctly aligned, and securely held in the proper
horizontal and vertical position during placing and finishing operations,
by means of devices fastened to the forms. The spacing of dowels and tie
bars in construction joints shall be as indicated, except that, where the
planned spacing cannot be maintained because of form length or interference
with form braces, closer spacing with additional dowels or tie bars shall
be used.
3.5.8.3 Dowels Installed in Hardened Concrete
Install dowels in hardened concrete by bonding the dowels into holes

drilled into the hardened concrete. The concrete shall have cured for 7
days or reached a minimum compressive strength of 2500 psi flexural
strength of 450 psi before drilling commences. Holes 1/8 inch greater in
diameter than the dowels shall be drilled into the hardened concrete using
rotary-core drills. Rotary-percussion drills may be used, provided that
excessive spalling does not occur to the concrete joint face. Continuing
damage shall require modification of the equipment and operation. Depth of
dowel hole shall be within a tolerance of plus/minus 1/2 inch of the
dimension shown on the drawings. Upon completion of the drilling
operation, the dowel hole shall be blown out with oil-free, compressed
air. Dowels shall be bonded in the drilled holes using epoxy resin. Epoxy
resin shall be injected at the back of the hole before installing the dowel
and extruded to the collar during insertion of the dowel so as to
completely fill the void around the dowel. Application by buttering the
dowel will not be permitted. The dowels shall be held in alignment at the
collar of the hole, after insertion and before the grout hardens, by means
of a suitable metal or plastic grout retention ring fitted around the
dowel. Dowels required to be installed in any joints between new and
existing concrete shall be grouted in holes drilled in the existing
concrete, all as specified above. Where tie bars are required in
longitudinal construction joints of slipform pavement, bent tie bars shall
be installed at the paver, in front of the transverse screed or extrusion
plate. Tie bars shall not be installed in preformed holes. A standard
keyway shall be constructed, and the bent tie bars shall be inserted into
the plastic concrete through a 26 gauge thick metal keyway liner. The
keyway liner shall be protected and shall remain in place and become part
of the joint. When bending tie bars, the radius of bend shall not be less
than the minimum recommended for the particular grade of steel in the
appropriate material standard. Before placement of the adjoining paving
lane, the tie bars shall be straightened, using procedures which will not
spall the concrete around the bar.
3.5.8.4 Lubricating Dowel Bars
The portion of each dowel intended to move within the concrete or expansion
cap shall be wiped clean and coated with a thin, even film of lubricating
oil or light grease before the concrete is placed.
3.6 FINISHING
Finishing operations shall be a continuing part of placing operations

starting immediately behind the strike-off of the paver. Initial finishing
shall be provided by the transverse screed or extrusion plate. The
sequence of operations shall be transverse finishing, longitudinal machine
floating if used, straightedge finishing, texturing, and then edging of
joints. Finishing shall be by the machine method. The hand method shall
be used only on isolated areas of odd slab widths or shapes and in the
event of a breakdown of the mechanical finishing equipment. Supplemental
hand finishing for machine finished pavement shall be kept to an absolute
minimum. Any machine finishing operation which requires appreciable hand
finishing, other than a moderate amount of straightedge finishing, shall be
immediately stopped and proper adjustments made or the equipment replaced.
Any operations which produce more than 1/8 inch of mortar-rich surface
(defined as deficient in plusU.S. No. 4 sieve size aggregate) shall be
halted immediately and the equipment, mixture, or procedures modified as
necessary. Compensation shall be made for surging behind the screeds or
extrusion plate and settlement during hardening and care shall be taken to
ensure that paving and finishing machines are properly adjusted so that the
finished surface of the concrete (not just the cutting edges of the
screeds) will be at the required line and grade. Finishing equipment and
tools shall be maintained clean and in an approved condition. At no time
shall water be added to the surface of the slab with the finishing
equipment or tools, or in any other way, except for fog (mist) sprays
specified to prevent plastic shrinkage cracking.
3.6.1 Machine Finishing With Fixed Forms
The machine shall be designed to ride the forms and shall be operated to
screed and consolidate the concrete. Machines that cause displacement of
the forms shall be replaced. The machine shall make only one pass over
each area of pavement. If the equipment and procedures do not produce a
surface of uniform texture, true to grade, in one pass, the operation shall
be immediately stopped and the equipment, mixture, and procedures adjusted
as necessary.
3.6.2 Machine Finishing with Slipform Pavers
The slipform paver shall be operated so that only a very minimum of

additional finishing work is required to produce pavement surfaces and
edges meeting the specified tolerances. Any equipment or procedure that
fails to meet these specified requirements shall immediately be replaced or
modified as necessary. A self-propelled nonrotating pipe float may be
used while the concrete is still plastic, to remove minor irregularities
and score marks. Only one pass of the pipe float shall be allowed. If
there is concrete slurry or fluid paste on the surface that runs over the
edge of the pavement, the paving operation shall be immediately stopped and
the equipment, mixture, or operation modified to prevent formation of such
slurry. Any slurry which does run down the vertical edges shall be
immediately removed by hand, using stiff brushes or scrapers. No slurry,
concrete or concrete mortar shall be used to build up along the edges of
the pavement to compensate for excessive edge slump, either while the
concrete is plastic or after it hardens.
3.6.3 Surface Correction and Testing
After all other finishing is completed but while the concrete is still
plastic, minor irregularities and score marks in the pavement surface shall
be eliminated by means of cutting straightedges. Such straightedges shall

be 12 feet in length and shall be operated from the sides of the pavement
and from bridges. A straightedge operated from the side of the pavement
shall be equipped with a handle 3 feet longer than one-half the width of
the pavement. The surface shall then be tested for trueness with a
straightedge held in successive positions parallel and at right angles to
the center line of the pavement, and the whole area covered as necessary to
detect variations. The straightedge shall be advanced along the pavement
in successive stages of not more than one-half the length of the
straightedge. Depressions shall be immediately filled with freshly mixed
concrete, struck off, consolidated with an internal vibrator, and
refinished. Projections above the required elevation shall also be struck
off and refinished. The straightedge testing and finishing shall continue
until the entire surface of the concrete is free from observable departure
from the straightedge and conforms to the surface requirements specified in
paragraph: ACCEPTABILITY OF WORK in PART 1. This straightedging shall not
be used as a replacement for the straightedge testing of paragraph: Surface
Smoothness in PART 1. Long-handled, flat bull floats shall be used very
sparingly and only as necessary to correct minor, scattered surface
defects. If frequent use of bull floats is necessary, the paving operation
shall be stopped and the equipment, mixture or procedures adjusted to
eliminate the surface defects. Finishing with hand floats and trowels
shall be held to the absolute minimum necessary. Extreme care shall be
taken to prevent overfinishing joints and edges. The surface finish of the
pavement shall be produced essentially by the finishing machine and not by
subsequent hand finishing operations. All hand finishing operations shall
be subject to approval and shall be modified when directed.
3.6.4 Hand Finishing
Use hand finishing operations only as specified below.
3.6.4.1 Equipment and Template
In addition to approved mechanical internal vibrators for consolidating the

concrete, provide a strike-off and tamping template and a longitudinal
float for hand finishing. The template shall be at least 1 foot longer
than the width of pavement being finished, of an approved design, and
sufficiently rigid to retain its shape, and shall be constructed of metal
or other suitable material shod with metal. The longitudinal float shall
be at least 10 feet long, of approved design, and rigid and substantially
braced, and shall maintain a plane surface on the bottom. Grate tampers
(jitterbugs) shall not be used.
3.6.4.2 Finishing and Floating
As soon as placed and vibrated, the concrete shall be struck off and
screeded to the crown and cross section and to such elevation above grade
that when consolidated and finished, the surface of the pavement will be at
the required elevation. In addition to previously specified complete
coverage with handheld immersion vibrators, the entire surface shall be
tamped with the strike-off and tamping template, and the tamping operation
continued until the required compaction and reduction of internal and
surface voids are accomplished. Immediately following the final tamping of
the surface, the pavement shall be floated longitudinally from bridges
resting on the side forms and spanning but not touching the concrete. If
necessary, additional concrete shall be placed, consolidated and screeded,
and the float operated until a satisfactory surface has been produced. The
floating operation shall be advanced not more than half the length of the
float and then continued over the new and previously floated surfaces.
3.6.5 Texturing
Before the surface sheen has disappeared and before the concrete hardens or
curing compound is applied, the surface of the pavement shall be given a
texture as described herein. After curing is complete, all textured
surfaces shall be thoroughly power broomed to remove all debris.
3.6.5.1 Burlap Drag Surface
Surface texture shall be applied by dragging the surface of the pavement,

in the direction of the concrete placement, with an approved burlap drag.
The drag shall be operated with the fabric moist, and the fabric shall be
cleaned or changed as required to keep clean. The dragging shall be done
so as to produce a uniform finished surface having a fine sandy texture
without disfiguring marks.
3.6.5.2 Artificial Turf Drag Surface
Artificial turf texture shall be applied by dragging the surface of the

pavement in the direction of concrete placement with an approved full-width
drag made with artificial turf. At least 2 feet of the artificial turf
shall be in contact with the concrete surface during texturing operations.
The corrugations shall be uniform in appearance and approximately 1/16 inch
in depth.
3.6.5.3 Broom Texturing
Brooming should be completed before the concrete has hardened to the point
where the surface will be unduly torn or roughened, but after hardening has
progressed enough so that the mortar will not flow and reduce the sharpness
of the scores. Successive passes of the broom shall be overlapped the
minimum necessary to obtain a uniformly textured surface. Brooms shall be
washed thoroughly at frequent intervals during use. Worn or damaged brooms
shall be removed from the job site. Hand brooming will be permitted only
on isolated odd shaped slabs or slabs where hand finishing is permitted.
For hand brooming, the brooms shall have handles longer than half the width
of slab to be finished. The hand brooms shall be drawn transversely across
the surface from the center line to each edge with slight overlapping
strokes.
3.6.5.4 Wire-Comb Texturing
Surface texture shall be applied using an approved mechanical wire comb

drag operated to comb the surface transverse to the pavement center line.
The comb shall be capable of traversing the full width of the pavement in a
single pass at a uniform speed and with a uniform pressure. Successive
passes of the comb shall be overlapped the minimum necessary to obtain a
continuous and uniformly textured surface. Texturing shall be completed
before the concrete has hardened to the point where the surface and edges
will be unduly torn, but after hardening has progressed to the point where
the serrations will not close up. The serrations shall be 1/16 to 3/16 inch
deep, 1/16 to 1/8 inch wide, and spaced 3/8 inch apart. Transverse
texturing shall produce grooves in straight lines across each lane within a
tolerance of plus or minus 1/2 inch of a true line.
3.6.6 Edging
After texturing has been completed, the edge of the slabs along the forms,
along the edges of slipformed lanes, and at the joints shall be carefully
finished with an edging tool to form a smooth rounded surface of 1/8 inch
radius. Tool marks shall be eliminated, and the edges shall be smooth and
true to line. No water shall be added to the surface during edging.
Extreme care shall be taken to prevent overworking the concrete.
3.6.7 Outlets in Pavement
Recesses for the tie-down anchors, lighting fixtures, and other outlets in
the pavement shall be constructed to conform to the details and dimensions
shown. The concrete in these areas shall be carefully finished to provide
a surface of the same texture as the surrounding area that will be within
the requirements for plan grade and surface smoothness.
3.7 CURING
3.7.1 Protection of Concrete
Concrete shall be continuously protected against loss of moisture and rapid

temperature changes for at least 7 days from the completion of finishing
operations. All equipment needed for adequate curing and protection of the
concrete shall be on hand and ready for use before actual concrete
placement begins. If any selected method of curing does not afford the
proper curing and protection against concrete cracking, the damaged
pavement shall be removed and replaced, and another method of curing shall
be employed as directed. Curing shall be accomplished by one of the
following methods .
3.7.2 Membrane Curing
A uniform coating of white-pigmented, membrane-forming, curing compound

shall be applied to the entire exposed surface of the concrete as soon as
the free water has disappeared from the surface after finishing. Along the
formed edge faces, it shall be applied immediately after the forms are
removed. Concrete shall not be allowed to dry before the application of
the membrane. If any drying has occurred, the surface of the concrete
shall be moistened with a fine spray of water, and the curing compound
applied as soon as the free water disappears. The curing compound shall be
applied to the finished surfaces by means of an approved automatic spraying
machine. The curing compound shall be applied with an overlapping coverage
that will give a two-coat application at a coverage of 400 square feet per
gallon, plus or minus 5.0 percent for each coat. A one-coat application
may be applied provided a uniform application and coverage of 200 square
feet per gallon, plus or minus 5.0 percent is obtained. The curing
compound shall be applied with a single overlapping application that will
give a uniform coverage of 150 square feet per gallon. The application of
curing compound by hand-operated, mechanical powered pressure sprayers will
be permitted only on odd widths or shapes of slabs and on concrete surfaces
exposed by the removal of forms. When the application is made by
hand-operated sprayers, a second coat shall be applied in a direction
approximately at right angles to the direction of the first coat. If
pinholes, abrasions, or other discontinuities exist, an additional coat
shall be applied to the affected areas within 30 minutes. Concrete
surfaces that are subjected to heavy rainfall within 3 hours after the
curing compound has been applied shall be resprayed by the method and at
the coverage specified above. Areas where the curing compound is damaged
by subsequent construction operations within the curing period shall be

immediately resprayed. Concrete surfaces to which membrane-curing
compounds have been applied shall be adequately protected during the entire
curing period from pedestrian and vehicular traffic, except as required for
joint-sawing operations and surface tests, and from any other possible
damage to the continuity of the membrane.
3.7.3 Moist Curing
Concrete to be moist-cured shall be maintained continuously wet for the

entire curing period, or until curing compound is applied, commencing
immediately after finishing. If forms are removed before the end of the
curing period, curing shall be carried out as on unformed surfaces, using
suitable materials. Surfaces shall be cured by ponding, by continuous
sprinkling, by continuously saturated burlap or cotton mats, or by
continuously saturated plastic coated burlap. Burlap and mats shall be
clean and free from any contamination and shall be completely saturated
before being placed on the concrete. Lap sheets to provide full coverage.
Provide an approved work system to ensure that moist curing is continuous
24 hours per day and that the entire surface is wet.
3.8 JOINTS
3.8.1 General Requirements for Joints
Joints shall conform to the locations and details indicated and shall be
perpendicular to the finished grade of the pavement. All joints shall be
straight and continuous from edge to edge or end to end of the pavement
with no abrupt offset and no gradual deviation greater than 1/2 inch.
Where any joint fails to meet these tolerances, the slabs adjacent to the
joint shall be removed and replaced at no additional cost to the
Government. No change from the jointing pattern shown on the drawings
shall be made without written approval of the Contracting Officer. Joints
shall be sealed immediately following curing of the concrete or as soon
thereafter as weather conditions permit. Joints shall be sealed as
specified in Section 32 01 19 FIELD MOLDED SEALANTS FOR SEALING JOINTS IN
RIGID PAVEMENTS.
3.8.2 Longitudinal Construction Joints
Dowels shall be installed in the longitudinal construction joints, or the

edges shall be thickened as indicated. Dowels shall be installed as
specified above. After the end of the curing period, longitudinal
construction joints shall be sawed to provide a groove at the top for
sealant conforming to the details and dimensions indicated.
3.8.3 Transverse Construction Joints
Transverse construction joints shall be installed at the end of each day's

placing operations and at any other points within a paving lane when
concrete placement is interrupted for 30 minutes or longer. The transverse
construction joint shall be installed at a planned transverse joint.
Transverse construction joints shall be constructed by utilizing headers or
by paving through the joint, then full-depth sawcutting the excess
concrete. Pavement shall be constructed with the paver as close to the
header as possible, and the paver shall be run out completely past the
header. Transverse construction joints installed at a planned transverse
joint shall be constructed as shown or, if not shown otherwise, shall be
dowelled in accordance with paragraph: Dowels Installed in Hardened
Concrete, or paragraph: Fixed Form Paving above.
Expansion joints shall be formed where indicated, and about any structures
and features that project through or into the pavement, using joint filler
of the type, thickness, and width indicated, and shall be installed to form
a complete, uniform separation between the structure and the pavement. The
filler shall be attached to the original concrete placement with adhesive
or other fasteners and shall extend the full slab depth. Adjacent sections
of filler shall be fitted tightly together, and the filler shall extend
across the full width of the paving lane or other complete distance in
order to prevent entrance of concrete into the expansion space. Edges of
the concrete at the joint face shall be finished with an edger with a
radius of 1/8 inch. The joint filler strips shall be installed 3/4 inch
below the pavement surface with a slightly tapered, dressed-and-oiled wood
strip or other approved material temporarily secured to the top of the
filler to form a recess to be filled with joint sealant.
3.8.5 Slip Joints
Slip joints shall be installed where indicated using the specified

materials. Preformed joint filler material shall be attached to the face
of the original concrete placement with adhesive or other fasteners. A 3/4
inch deep reservoir for joint sealant shall be constructed at the top of
the joint. Edges of the joint face shall be finished with an edger with a
radius of 1/8 inch.
Construct transverse and longitudinal contraction joints by sawing an

initial groove in the concrete with a 1/8 inch blade to the indicated
depth. During sawing of joints, and again 24 hours later, the CQC team
shall inspect all exposed lane edges for development of cracks below the
saw cut, and shall immediately report results to the Contracting Officer.
If the Contracting Officer determines that there are more uncracked joints
than desired, the Contractor will be directed to saw succeeding joints 25
percent deeper than originally indicated at no additional cost to the
Government. The time of initial sawing shall vary depending on existing
and anticipated weather conditions and shall be such as to prevent
uncontrolled cracking of the pavement. Sawing of the joints shall commence
as soon as the concrete has hardened sufficiently to permit cutting the
concrete without chipping, spalling, or tearing. The sawed faces of joints
will be inspected for undercutting or washing of the concrete due to the
early sawing, and sawing shall be delayed if undercutting is sufficiently
deep to cause structural weakness or excessive roughness in the joint. The
sawing operation shall be carried on as required during both day and night
regardless of weather conditions. The joints shall be sawed at the
required spacing consecutively in the sequence of the concrete placement.
Adequate lighting shall be provided for night work. Illumination using
vehicle headlights will not be permitted. A chalk line or other suitable
guide shall be used to mark the alinement of the joint. Before sawing a
joint, the concrete shall be examined closely for cracks, and the joint
shall not be sawed if a crack has occurred near the planned joint
location. Sawing shall be discontinued when a crack develops ahead of the
saw cut. Immediately after the joint is sawed, the saw cut and adjacent
concrete surface shall be thoroughly flushed with water and vacuumed until
all waste from sawing is removed from the joint and adjacent concrete
surface. The surface shall be resprayed with curing compound as soon as
free water disappears. Necessary precautions shall be taken to insure that

the concrete is properly protected from damage and cured at sawed joints.
The top of the joint opening and the joint groove at exposed edges shall be
tightly sealed with cord backer rod before the concrete in the region of
the joint is resprayed with curing compound, and shall be maintained until
removed immediately before sawing the joint sealant reservoir. The exposed
saw cuts on the faces of pilot lanes shall be sealed with bituminous mastic
or masking tape. After expiration of the curing period, the upper portion
of the groove shall be widened by sawing with ganged diamond saw blades to
the width and depth indicated for the joint sealer. The reservoir shall be
centered over the initial sawcut.
3.8.7 Thickened Edge Joints
Construct thickened edge joints as indicated on the drawings. Underlying

material in the transition area shall be graded as shown and shall meet the
requirements for smoothness and compaction specified for all other areas of
the underlying material.
3.9 REPAIR, REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT OF NEWLY CONSTRUCTED SLABS
3.9.1 General Criteria
New pavement slabs that are broken, have spalled edges, or contain cracks
shall be removed and replaced or repaired, as specified hereinafter at no
cost to the Government. Removal of partial slabs is not permitted. Not
more than 15.0 percent of each slab's longitudinal joint edge shall be
spalled. Prior to fill-in lane placement, pilot lane slabs with spalls
exceeding this quantity, regardless of spall size, shall be sawn full depth
to remove the spalled face. All other slabs shall be removed, as
directed. The Contracting Officer will determine whether cracks extend
full depth of the pavement and may require cores to be drilled on the crack
to determine depth of cracking. Such cores shall be at least 6 inch
diameter, and shall be drilled and backfilled with an approved non-shrink
concrete. Perform drilling of cores and refilling holes at no expense to
the Government.
3.9.2 Slabs with Cracks
Cracks that do not exceed 25 percent of the design thickness in depth shall
be cleaned and then pressure injected full depth with epoxy resin, Type IV,
Grade 1. Slabs containing cracks deeper than 25 percent of the design
thickness shall be removed.
3.9.3 Removal and Replacement of Full Slabs
Where it is necessary to remove full slabs, removal shall be in accordance

with paragraph: Removal of Existing Pavement Slab below. Removal and
replacement shall be full depth, by full width of the slab, and the limit
of removal shall be normal to the paving lane and extend to each original
joint. Dowels of the size and spacing as specified for other joints in
similar pavement shall be installed by epoxy grouting them into holes
drilled into the existing concrete using procedures as specified in
paragraph: Placing Dowels and Tie Bars, above. Original damaged dowels or
tie bars shall be cut off flush with the joint face. Protruding portions
of dowels shall be painted and lightly oiled. All four edges of the new
slab shall thus contain dowels. Placement of concrete shall be as
specified for original construction. Prior to placement of new concrete,
the underlying material shall be recompacted and shaped as specified in the
appropriate section of these specifications, and the surfaces of all four

joint faces shall be cleaned of all loose material and contaminants and
coated with a double application of membrane forming curing compound as
bond breaker. Care shall be taken to prevent any curing compound from
contacting dowels or tie bars. The resulting joints around the new slab
shall be prepared and sealed as specified for original construction.
3.9.4 Repairing Spalls Along Joints
Where directed, spalls along joints of new slabs, along edges of adjacent
existing concrete, and along parallel cracks shall be repaired by first
making a vertical saw cut at least 1 inch outside the spalled area and to a
depth of at least 2 inches. Saw cuts shall be straight lines forming
rectangular areas. The concrete between the saw cut and the joint, or
crack, shall be chipped out to remove all unsound concrete and into at least
1/2 inch of visually sound concrete. Spalls along joints to be sealed
with compression seals shall be sawn, chipped out, and repaired to a depth
to restore the full joint-face support. The cavity thus formed shall be
thoroughly cleaned with high pressure water jets supplemented with oil-free
compressed air to remove all loose material. Immediately before filling
the cavity, a prime coat shall be applied to the dry cleaned surface of all
sides and bottom of the cavity, except any joint face. The prime coat
shall be applied in a thin coating and scrubbed into the surface with a
stiff-bristle brush. Prime coat for portland cement repairs shall be a
neat cement grout and for epoxy resin repairs shall be epoxy resin, Type
III, Grade 1. The prepared cavity shall be filled with: Portland cement
concrete or latex modified mortar for larger cavities, those more than 1/3
cu. ft. in size after removal operations; Portland cement mortar for
cavities between 0.03 cu. ft. and 1/3 cu. ft.; and epoxy resin mortar or
epoxy resin or latex modified mortar for those cavities less than 0.03 cu.
ft. in size. Portland cement concretes and mortars shall be very low slump
mixtures, 1/2 inch slump or less, proportioned, mixed, placed,
consolidated by tamping, and cured, all as directed. Epoxy resin mortars
shall be made with Type III, Grade 1, epoxy resin, using proportions and
mixing and placing procedures as recommended by the manufacturer and
approved by the Contracting Officer. Proprietary patching materials may be
used, subject to approval by the Contracting Officer. The epoxy resin
materials shall be placed in the cavity in layers not over 2 inches thick.
The time interval between placement of additional layers shall be such that
the temperature of the epoxy resin material does not exceed 140 degrees F
at any time during hardening. Mechanical vibrators and hand tampers shall
be used to consolidate the concrete or mortar. Any repair material on the
surrounding surfaces of the existing concrete shall be removed before it
hardens. Where the spalled area abuts a joint, an insert or other
bond-breaking medium shall be used to prevent bond at the joint face. A
reservoir for the joint sealant shall be sawed to the dimensions required
for other joints. The reservoir shall be thoroughly cleaned and then
sealed with the sealer specified for the joints. In lieu of sawing, spalls
not adjacent to joints and popouts, both less than 6 inches in maximum
dimension, may be prepared by drilling a core 2 inches in diameter greater
than the size of the defect, centered over the defect, and 2 inches deep or
1/2 inch into sound concrete, whichever is greater. The core hole shall be
repaired as specified above for other spalls.
3.9.5 Repair of Weak Surfaces
Weak surfaces are defined as mortar-rich, rain-damaged, uncured, or

containing exposed voids or deleterious materials. Slabs containing weak
surfaces less than 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick shall be diamond ground to remove
the weak surface. Diamond grinding shall be in accordance with paragraph:

Diamond Grinding of PCC Surfaces in PART 1. All ground ares shall meet the
thickness, smoothness and grade criteri of paragraph: Acceptance
Requirements in PART 1. Slabs containing weak surfaces greater than 1/4
inch thick shall be removed and replaced.
3.9.6 Repair of Pilot Lane Vertical Faces
Excessive edge slump and joint face deformation shall be repaired in

accordance with paragraph: Edge Slump and Joint Face Deformation in PART
1. Inadequate consolidation (honeycombing or air voids) shall be repaired
by saw cutting the face full depth along the entire lane length with a
diamond blade. Obtain cores, as directed, to determine the depth of
removal.
3.10 EXISTING CONCRETE PAVEMENT REMOVAL AND REPAIR
Existing concrete pavement shall be removed at locations indicated on the

drawings. Prior to commencing pavement removal operations, inventory the
pavement distresses (cracks, spalls, and corner breaks) along the pavement
edge to remain. After pavement removal, the remaining edge shall again be
surveyed to quantify any damage caused by Contractor's removal operations.
Perform both surveys in the presence of the Contracting Officer. Repairs
shall be made as indicated and as specified herein. All operations shall
be carefully controlled to prevent damage to the concrete pavement and to
the underlying material to remain in place. All saw cuts shall be made
perpendicular to the slab surface, forming rectangular areas.
3.10.1 Removal of Existing Pavement Slab
When existing concrete pavement is to be removed and adjacent concrete is

to be left in place, the joint between the removal area and adjoining
pavement to stay in place shall first be cut full depth with a standard
diamond-type concrete saw. Next, a full depth saw cut shall be made
parallel to the joint at least 24 inches from the joint and at least 6
inches from the end of any dowels. This saw cut shall be made with a wheel
saw diamond saw as specified in paragraph: Sawing Equipment. All pavement
to be removed beyond this last saw cut shall be removed in accordance with
the approved demolition work plan. All pavement between this last saw cut
and the joint line shall be removed by carefully pulling pieces and blocks
away from the joint face with suitable equipment and then picking them up
for removal. In lieu of this method, this strip of concrete may be
carefully broken up and removed using hand-held jackhammers, 30 lb or
less, or other approved light-duty equipment which will not cause stress to
propagate across the joint saw cut and cause distress in the pavement which
is to remain in place. In lieu of the above specified removal method, the
slab may be sawcut full depth to divide it into several pieces and each
piece lifted out and removed. Suitable equipment shall be used to provide
a truly vertical lift, and safe lifting devices used for attachment to the
slab.
3.10.2 Edge Repair
The edge of existing concrete pavement against which new pavement abuts
shall be protected from damage at all times. Slabs which are damaged
during construction shall be removed and replaced as directed by the
Contracting Officer at no cost to the Government. Repair of previously
existing damage areas will be considered a subsidiary part of concrete
pavement construction. All exposed keyways shall be sawn off full depth.
3.10.2.1 Spall Repair
Not more than 15.0 percent of each slab's edge shall be spalled as a result
of the Contractor's actions. Slabs with spalls exceeding this quantity,
regardless of spall size, shall be sawn full depth on the exposed face to
remove the spalled face. Repair materials and procedures shall be as
previously specified in paragraph: Repairing Spalls Along Joints. All
slabs with spalls shall be repaired as directed by the Contracting Officer.
3.10.2.2 Underbreak and Underlying Material
All underbreak shall be repaired by removal and replacement of the damaged

slabs in accordance with paragraph: Removal and Replacement of Full Slabs
above. The underlying material adjacent to the edge of and under the
existing pavement which is to remain in place shall be protected from
damage or disturbance during removal operations and until placement of new
concrete, and shall be shaped as shown on the drawings or as directed.
Sufficient underlying material shall be kept in place outside the joint
line to completely prevent disturbance of material under the pavement which
is to remain in place. Any material under the portion of the concrete
pavement to remain in place which is disturbed or loses its compaction
shall be carefully removed and replaced with concrete.
3.11 PAVEMENT PROTECTION
Protect the pavement against all damage prior to final acceptance of the
work by the Government. Traffic shall be excluded from the new pavement by
erecting and maintaining barricades and signs until the concrete is at
least 14 days old, or for a longer period if so directed. As a
construction expedient in paving intermediate lanes between newly paved
pilot lanes, operation of the hauling and paving equipment will be
permitted on the new pavement after the pavement has been cured for 7 days
and the joints have been sealed or otherwise protected, the concrete has
attained a minimum field cured flexural strength of 550 psi. and approved
means are furnished to prevent damage to the slab edge. All new and
existing pavement carrying construction traffic or equipment shall be
continuously kept completely clean, and spillage of concrete or other
materials shall be cleaned up immediately upon occurrence. Existing
pavements used by the Contractor shall be power broomed at least daily when
traffic operates. For fill-in lanes, equipment shall be used that will not
damage or spall the edges or joints of the previously constructed pavement.
3.12 TESTING AND INSPECTION FOR CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL
3.12.1 Testing and Inspection by Contractor
During construction, the Contractor is responsible for sampling and testing

aggregates, cementitious materials (cement, GGBF and pozzolan), and
concrete to determine compliance with the specifications. Provide
facilities and labor as may be necessary for procurement of representative
test samples. Furnish sampling platforms and belt templates to obtain
representative samples of aggregates from charging belts at the concrete
plant. Samples of concrete shall be obtained at the point of delivery to
the paver. Testing by the Government will in no way relieve the Contractor
of the specified testing requirements. Perform the inspection and tests
described below, and based upon the results of these inspections and tests,
take the action required and submit reports as required. This testing
shall be performed regardless of any other testing performed by the
Government, either for pay adjustment purposes or for any other reason.
3.12.2 Testing and Inspection Requirements
Contractor CQC sampling, testing, inspection and reporting shall be in

accordance with the following Table.
TABLE 6
CONTRACTOR TESTING AND INSPECTION REQUIREMENTS
Frequency Test Method Control Limit/Corrective Action
Fine Aggregate Gradation and Fineness Modulus

2 per lot ASTM C 136 9 of 10 tests vary <0.15 from average
sample at belt Outside limits on any sieve-retest
2nd failure-stop, repair, retest
Coarse Aggregate Gradation

2 per lot ASTM C 136 Outside limits on any sieve-retest
sample at belt 2nd failure-report to COR, correct
2 consecutive avgs of 5 tests out-
report to COR, stop ops, repair, retest
Worability Factor and Coarseness Factor Computation

Same as see paragraph: Use individual C.A. and F.A. gradations
C.A. & F.A. Aggregates Combine using batch ticket percentages
Tolerances: +/- 3 points on WF
+/- 5 points on CF
from approved mix design values
Check batching tolerances, recalibrate scales
Aggregate Deleterious and Quality Tests

Every 30 see paragraph: Stop production, retest, replace aggregate
days AGGREGATES Increase testing interval to 90 days
if previous 2 tests pass
Plant - Scales, Weighing Accuracy

Monthly NRMCA QC 3 Stop plant ops, repair, recalibrate
Plant - Batching and Recording Accuracy

Weekly Record/Report Record required/recorded/actual batch mass
Stop plant ops, repair, recalibrate
Plant - Batch Plant Control

Every lot Record/Report Record type/amt of each material per lot
Plant - Mixer Uniformity - Stationary Mixers

Every 4 COE CRD-C 55 After initial approval, use abbreviated
months method. Increase mixing time, change
during batching sequence, reduce batch size to
paving bring into compliance. Retest
Plant - Mixer Uniformity - Truck Mixers

Every 4 ASTM C 94/C 94M Random selection of truck. Increase mixing
months time, change batching sequence, reduce
during batch size to bring into compliance. Retest.
paving

Concrete Mixture - Air Content
When test ASTM C 231 Individual test control chart:
specimens sample at Warning +/-1.0 - adjust AEA, retest
prepared paving site Action +/-1.5 - halt ops, repair, retest
+ 2 random Range between 2 consecutive tests:
Warning +2.0 - recalibrate AEA dispenser
Action +3.0 - halt ops, repair, retest
Concrete Mixture - Unit Weight and Yield

Same as ASTM C 138/C 138M Individual test basis:
Air content sample at Warning Yield -0/+1% - check batching tol.
paving site Action Yield -0/+5% - halt ops, recalibrate
Concrete Mixture - Slump

When test ASTM C 143/C 143M Individual test control chart:
specimens sample at Upper Warning - 1/2 inch below max-
prepared paving site adjust batch masses within max W/C ratio
+ 4 random Upper Action - maximum allowable slump
stop operations, adjust, retest
Range between each consecutive test:
1-1/2 inches
stop operations, repair, retest
Concrete Mixture - Temperature

When test ASTM C 1064/C 1064M See paragraph: WEATHER LIMITATIONS
specimens sample at
prepared paving site
Concrete Mixture - Strength

8 per lot ASTM C 31/C 31M See Paragraph: Concrete Strength Testing
sample at for CQC
paving site
Paving - Inspection Before Paving

Prior to Report Inspect underlying materials, construction
each paving joint faces, forms, reinforcing, dowels,
operation and embedded items
Paving - Inspection During Paving

During each Monitor and control paving operation,
paving including placement, consolidation,
operation finishing, texturing, curing, and
joint sawing.
Paving - Vibrators
Weekly, COE CRD-C 521 Test frequency (in concrete), and amplitude
during (in air), measure at tip/head and average.
paving Repair or replace defective vibrators.
Moist Curing
2 per lot, Visual Repair defects, extend curing by 1 day
min 4 per
day
Membrane Compound Curing

Daily Visual Calculate coverage based on quantity/area
Respray areas where coverage defective
Recalibrate equipment
Cold Weather Protection

Once per Visual Repair defects, report conditions to COR
3.12.3 Concrete Strength Testing for Contractor CQC
Contractor Quality Control operations for concrete strength shall consist

of the following steps:
a. Take samples for strength tests at the paving site. Fabricate and
cure test cylinders in accordance with ASTM C 31/C 31M; test them in
b. Fabricate and cure 2 test cylinders per sublot from the same batch
or truckload and at the same time acceptance cylinders are fabricated
and test them for compressive strength at 7-day age.
c. Average all 8 compressive tests per lot. Convert this average

7-day compressive strength per lot to equivalent 28 -day flexural
strength using the Correlation Ratio determined during mixture
proportioning studies.
d. Compare the equivalent 28 -day flexural strength from the

conversion to the Average Flexural Strength Required for Mixtures from
paragraph of same title.
e. If the equivalent average 28-day strength for the lot is below the
Average Flexural Strength Required for Mixtures by 20 psiflexural
strength or more, at any time, adjust the mixture to increase the
strength, as approved.
f. Fabricate and cure two beams for every 2000 cubic yards of concrete
placed. Fabricate and cure in accordance with ASTM C 31/C 31M; test at
14-days of age in accordance with ASTM C 78. Use the flexural strength
results to verify the cylinder-beam acceptance correlation ratio.
g. The Contractor's CQC testing agency shall maintain up-to-date

control charts for strength, showing the 7-day CQC compressive
strength, the 14-day compressive strength (from acceptance tests) and
the 28 -day equivalent flexural strength of each of these for each lot.
a. Take samples for strength tests at the paving site. Fabricate and
cure test beams in accordance with ASTM C 31/C 31M; test them in
accordance with ASTM C 78.
b. Fabricate and cure 2 test beams per sublot from the same batch or
truckload and at the same time acceptance beams are fabricated and test
them for flexural strength at 7-day age.
c. Average all 8 flexural tests per lot. Convert this average 7-day
flexural strength per lot to equivalent 28 -day flexural strength using
the Correlation Ratio determined during mixture proportioning studies.
d. Compare the equivalent 28 -day flexural strength from the

conversion to the Average Flexural Strength Required for Mixtures from
paragraph of same title.
e. If the equivalent average 28 -day strength for the lot is below the
Average Flexural Strength Required for Mixtures by 69 psi flexural

strength or more, at any time, adjust the mixture to increase the
strength, as approved.
f. The Contractor's CQC testing agency shall maintain up-to-date

control charts for strength, showing the 7-day CQC flexural strength
and the 28-day flexural strength (from acceptance tests) of each of
these for each lot.
3.12.4 Reports
All results of tests or inspections conducted shall be reported informally

as they are completed and in writing daily. Prepare a weekly report for
the updating of control charts covering the entire period from the start of
the construction season through the current week. During periods of
cold-weather protection, make daily reports of pertinent temperatures.
These requirements do not relieve the Contractor of the obligation to
report certain failures immediately as required in preceding paragraphs.
Such reports of failures and the action taken shall be confirmed in writing
in the routine reports. The Contracting Officer has the right to examine
all Contractor quality control records.
SECTION 32 15 00
AGGREGATE SURFACE COURSE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES


ASTM C 131 (2006) Standard Test Method for Resistance

Los Angeles Machine



ASTM D 3740 (2010) Minimum Requirements for Agencies

of Soil and Rock as Used in Engineering
Design and Construction

Soils

ASTM D 6938 (2010) Standard Test Method for In-Place

Depth)

Aggregates
ASTM E 11 (2010a) Wire Cloth and Sieves for Testing

Purposes
1.2 SUBMITTALS

SD-03 Product Data
Equipment
List of proposed equipment to be used in performance of

construction work including descriptive data.
SD-06 Test Reports

Density Tests
Calibration curves and related test results prior to using the

device or equipment being calibrated. Copies of field test
results within 24 hours after the tests are performed. Test
results from samples, not less than 30 days before material is
required for the work. Results of laboratory tests for quality
control purposes, for approval, prior to using the material.
Sampling and testing is the responsibility of the Contractor. Sampling and

testing shall be performed by an approved commercial testing laboratory or
by the Contractor, subject to approval. If the Contractor elects to
establish its own testing facilities, approval of such facilities will be
based on compliance with ASTM D 3740. No work requiring testing will be
permitted until the Contractor's facilities have been inspected and
approved.
1.3.1 Sampling
Take samples for material gradation, liquid limit, and plastic limit tests
in conformance with ASTM D 75/D 75M. When deemed necessary, the sampling
will be observed by the Contracting Officer.
1.3.2 Testing
1.3.2.1 Gradation
Make aggregate gradation in conformance with ASTM C 117, ASTM C 136, and
ASTM D 422. Sieves shall conform to ASTM E 11.
1.3.2.2 Liquid Limit and Plasticity Index
Determine liquid limit and plasticity index in accordance with ASTM D 4318.
1.3.3 Approval of Materials
Select the source of the material to be used for producing aggregates 30

days prior to the time the material will be required in the work. Approval
of sources not already approved by the Corps of Engineers will be based on
an inspection by the Contracting Officer. Tentative approval of materials

will be based on appropriate test results on the aggregate source. Final
approval of the materials will be based on tests for gradation, liquid
limit, and plasticity index performed on samples taken from the completed
and compacted surface course.
1.3.4 Equipment
All plant, equipment, and tools used in the performance of the work covered
by this section will be subject to approval by the Contracting Officer
before the work is started and shall be maintained in satisfactory working
condition at all times. The equipment shall be adequate and shall have the
capability of producing the required compaction, and meeting the grade
controls, thickness controls, and smoothness requirements set forth herein.
Aggregate surface courses shall not be constructed when the ambient

temperatures is below 35 degrees F and on subgrades that are frozen or
contain frost. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to protect, by
approved method or methods, all areas of surfacing that have not been
accepted by the Contracting Officer. Surfaces damaged by freeze, rainfall,
or other weather conditions shall be brought to a satisfactory condition by
the Contractor.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 AGGREGATES
Provide aggregates consisting of clean, sound, durable particles of natural

gravel, crushed gravel, crushed stone, sand, slag, soil, or other approved
materials processed and blended or naturally combined. Provide aggregates
free from lumps and balls of clay, organic matter, objectionable coatings,
and other foreign materials. The Contractor is responsible for obtaining
materials that meet the specification and can be used to meet the grade and
smoothness requirements specified herein after all compaction and proof
rolling operations have been completed.
2.1.1 Coarse Aggregates
The material retained on the No. 4 sieve shall be known as coarse

aggregate. Coarse aggregates shall be reasonably uniform in density and
quality. The coarse aggregate shall have a percentage of wear not to
exceed 50 percent after 500 revolutions as determined by ASTM C 131. The
amount of flat and/or elongated particles shall not exceed 20 percent. A
flat particle is one having a ratio of width to thickness greater than
three; an elongated particle is one having a ratio of length to width
greater than three. When the coarse aggregate is supplied from more than
one source, aggregate from each source shall meet the requirements set
forth herein.
2.1.2 Fine Aggregates
The material passing the No. 4 sieve shall be known as fine aggregate.
Fine aggregate shall consist of screenings, sand, soil, or other finely
divided mineral matter that is processed or naturally combined with the
coarse aggregate.
2.1.3 Gradation Requirements
Gradation requirements specified in TABLE I shall apply to the completed

aggregate surface. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to obtain
materials that will meet the gradation requirements after mixing, placing,
compacting, and other operations. TABLE I shows permissible gradings for
granular material used in aggregate surface roads and airfields. Sieves
shall conform to ASTM E 11.
TABLE I. GRADATION FOR AGGREGATE SURFACE COURSES

Percentage by Weight Passing Square-Mesh Sieve
Sieve Designation No. 1 No. 2 No. 3 No. 4

_________________ _____ _____ _____ _____
1 in. 100 100 100 100

3/8 in. 50-85 60-100 -- --
No. 4 35-65 50-85 55-100 70-100
No. 10 25-50 40-70 40-100 55-100
No. 40 15-30 24-45 20-50 30-70
No. 200 8-15 8-15 8-15 8-15
2.2 LIQUID LIMIT AND PLASTICITY INDEX REQUIREMENTS
The portion of the completed aggregate surface course passing the No. 40
sieve shall have a maximum liquid limit of 35 and a plasticity index of 4
to 9.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 OPERATION OF AGGREGATE SOURCES
Perform clearing, stripping, and excavating. Operate the aggregate sources

to produce the quantity and quality of materials meeting these
specification requirements in the specified time limit. Upon completion of
the work, the aggregate sources on Government property shall be finalized
to drain readily and be left in a satisfactory condition. Finalize
aggregate sources on private lands in agreement with local laws or
authorities.
3.2 STOCKPILING MATERIALS
Prior to stockpiling the material, clear and level the storage sites. All
materials, including approved material available from excavation and
grading, shall be stockpiled in the manner and at the locations
designated. Stockpile aggregates in such a manner that will prevent
segregation. Aggregates and binders obtained from different sources shall
be stockpiled separately.
3.3 COMPACTION
Degree of compaction is a percentage of the maximum density obtained by the

test procedure presented in ASTM D 1557 abbreviated herein as present
laboratory maximum density. Compact each layer of the aggregate surface
course with approved compaction equipment, as required in the following
paragraphs. The water content during the compaction procedure shall be
maintained at optimum or at the percentage specified by the Contracting
Officer. In locations not accessible to the rollers, the mixture shall be
compacted with mechanical tampers. Compaction shall continue until each
layer through the full depth is compacted to at least 100 percent of

laboratory maximum density. Remove any materials that are found to be
unsatisfactory and replace them with satisfactory material or rework them
to produce a satisfactory material.
3.4 PREPARATION OF UNDERLYING COURSE SUBGRADE
Clean of all foreign substances the underlying course and subgrade,

including shoulders. At the time of surface course construction, the
underlying course and subgrade shall contain no frozen material. Ruts or
soft yielding spots in the underlying course and subgrade areas having
inadequate compaction and deviations of the surface from the requirements
set forth herein shall be corrected by loosening and removing soft or
unsatisfactory material and by adding approved material, reshaping to line
and grade and recompacting to density requirements specified in Section
32 11 16 BASE COURSE FOR RIGID AND FLEXIBLE PAVING. The completed
underlying course and subgrade shall not be disturbed by traffic or other
operations and shall be maintained by the Contractor in a satisfactory
condition until the surface course is placed.
3.5 GRADE CONTROL
During construction, the lines and grades including crown and cross slope
indicated for the aggregate surface course shall be maintained by means of
line and grade stakes placed by the Contractor in accordance with the
SPECIAL CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS.
3.6 MIXING AND PLACING MATERIALS
The materials shall be mixed and placed to obtain uniformity of the

material and a uniform optimum water content for compaction. Make
adjustments in mixing, placing procedures, or in equipment to obtain the
true grades, to minimize segregation and degradation, to obtain the desired
water content, and to ensure a satisfactory surface course.
3.7 LAYER THICKNESS
Place the aggregate material on the underlying course and subgrade in

layers of uniform thickness. When a compacted layer of 6 inches or less is
specified, the material may be placed in a single layer; when a compacted
thickness of more than 6 inches is required, no layer shall exceed 6 inches
nor be less than 3 inches when compacted.
3.8 PROOF ROLLING
Proof rolling of the areas designated shall be in addition to compaction

specified above and shall consist of application of 30 coverages with a
heavy rubber-tired roller having four tires abreast with each tire loaded to
30,000 pounds and tires inflated to150 psi. In the areas designated,
proof rolling shall be applied to the top lift of layer on which surface
course is laid and to each layer of the base course. Water content of the
lift of the layer on which the surface course is placed and each layer of
the aggregate surface course shall be maintained at optimum or at the
percentage directed from the start of compaction to the completion of a
proof rolling. Materials in the aggregate surface course or underlying
materials indicated unacceptable by the proof rolling shall be removed and
replaced, as directed, with acceptable materials.
3.9 EDGES OF AGGREGATE-SURFACED ROAD
Approved material shall be placed along the edges of the aggregate surface
course in such quantity as to compact to the thickness of the course being
constructed. When the course is being constructed in two or more layers,
at least 1 foot of shoulder width shall be rolled and compacted
simultaneously with the rolling and compacting of each layer of the surface
course.
3.10 SMOOTHNESS TEST
The surface of each layer shall not show any deviations in excess of 3/8
inch when tested with a 10 foot straightedge applied both parallel with and
at right angles to the centerline of the area to be paved. Deviations
exceeding this amount shall be corrected by removing material, replacing
with new material, or reworking existing material and compacting, as
directed.
3.11 THICKNESS CONTROL
The completed thickness of the aggregate surface course shall be within 1/2
inch, plus or minus, of the thickness indicated on plans. The thickness of
the aggregate surface course shall be measured at intervals in such manner
that there will be a thickness measurement for at least each 500 square
yards of the aggregate surface course. The thickness measurement shall be
made by test holes at least 3 inches in diameter through the aggregate
surface course. When the measured thickness of the aggregate surface
course is more than 1/2 inch deficient in thickness, correct such areas by
scarifying, adding mixture of proper gradation, reblading, and
recompacting, as directed,at no additional expense to the Government.
Where the measured thickness of the aggregate surface course is more than
1/2 inch thicker than that indicated, it shall be considered as conforming
with the specified thickness requirements plus 1/2 inch. The average job
thickness shall be the average of the job measurements determined as
specified above, but shall be within 1/4 inch of the thickness indicated.
When the average job thickness fails to meet this criterion, make
corrections by scarifying, adding or removing mixture of proper gradation,
and reblading and recompacting, as directed, at no additional expense to
the Government.
3.12 DENSITY TESTS
Measure density in the field in accordance with ASTM D 1556. For the
method presented in ASTM D 1556 use the base plate as shown in the
drawing. Tests performed in accordance with ASTM D 6938 result in a wet
unit weight of soil and ASTM D 6938 shall be used to determine the moisture
content of the soil. The calibration curves furnished with the moisture
gauges shall also be checked along with density calibration checks as
described in ASTM D 6938. The calibration checks of both the density and
moisture gauges shall be made by the prepared containers of material
method, as described in paragraph Calibration of ASTM D 6938, on each
different type of material being tested at the beginning of a job and at
intervals, as directed.
3.13 WEAR TEST
Perform wear tests in conformance with ASTM C 131.
3.14 MAINTENANCE
Maintain the aggregate surface course in a condition that will meet all
specification requirements until accepted.
SECTION 32 16 13
CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND CURBS AND GUTTERS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES


(AASHTO)

Burlap Cloth Made from Jute or Kenaf and
Cotton Mats

Concrete


ASTM C 171 (2007) Standard Specification for Sheet

Materials for Curing Concrete
ASTM C 173/C 173M (2010b) Standard Test Method for Air

Volumetric Method
ASTM C 309 (2007) Standard Specification for Liquid

Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing
Concrete


ASTM C172/C172M (2010) Standard Practice for Sampling

ASTM C231/C231M (2010) Standard Test Method for Air

Pressure Method

Bituminous Types)

PVC Expansion
ASTM D5893/D5893M (2010) Cold Applied, Single Component,

Chemically Curing Silicone Joint Sealant
for Portland Cement Concrete Pavements
Provide plant, equipment, machines, and tools used in the work subject to
approval and maintained in a satisfactory working condition at all times.
The equipment shall have the capability of producing the required product,
meeting grade controls, thickness control and smoothness requirements as
specified. Use of the equipment shall be discontinued if it produces
unsatisfactory results. The Contracting Officer shall have access at all
times to the plant and equipment to ensure proper operation and compliance
with specifications.
1.2.2 Slip Form Equipment
Slip form paver or curb forming machine, will be approved based on trial
use on the job and shall be self-propelled, automatically controlled,
crawler mounted, and capable of spreading, consolidating, and shaping the
plastic concrete to the desired cross section in 1 pass.
1.3 SUBMITTALS

SD-03 Product Data
Concrete
Copies of certified delivery tickets for all concrete used in

the construction.
SD-06 Test Reports
Copies of all test reports within 24 hours of completion of the

test.
1.4.1 Placing During Cold Weather
Do not place concrete when the air temperature reaches 40 degrees F and is
falling, or is already below that point. Placement may begin when the air
temperature reaches 35 degrees F and is rising, or is already above 40
degrees F. Make provisions to protect the concrete from freezing during
the specified curing period. If necessary to place concrete when the
temperature of the air, aggregates, or water is below 35 degrees F,
placement and protection shall be approved in writing. Approval will be
contingent upon full conformance with the following provisions. The
underlying material shall be prepared and protected so that it is entirely
free of frost when the concrete is deposited. Mixing water and aggregates
shall be heated as necessary to result in the temperature of the in-place
concrete being between 50 and 85 degrees F. Methods and equipment for
heating shall be approved. The aggregates shall be free of ice, snow, and
frozen lumps before entering the mixer. Covering and other means shall be
provided for maintaining the concrete at a temperature of at least 50
degrees F for not less than 72 hours after placing, and at a temperature
above freezing for the remainder of the curing period.
1.4.2 Placing During Warm Weather
The temperature of the concrete as placed shall not exceed85 degrees F

except where an approved retarder is used. The mixing water and/or
aggregates shall be cooled, if necessary, to maintain a satisfactory
placing temperature. The placing temperature shall not exceed95 degrees F
at any time.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 CONCRETE
Concrete shall have a minimum compressive strength of 3500 psi at 28 days.

Maximum size of aggregate shall be 1-1/2 inches.
2.1.1 Air Content
Mixtures shall have air content by volume of concrete of 5 to 7 percent,

based on measurements made immediately after discharge from the mixer.
2.1.2 Slump
The concrete slump shall be 2 inches plus or minus 1 inch where determined
in accordance with ASTM C 143/C 143M.
2.1.3 Reinforcement Steel
Reinforcement bars shall conform to ASTM A 615/A 615M. Wire mesh

reinforcement shall conform to ASTM A 185/A 185M.
2.2 CONCRETE CURING MATERIALS
2.2.1 Impervious Sheet Materials
Impervious sheet materials shall conform to ASTM C 171, type optional,

except that polyethylene film, if used, shall be white opaque.
2.2.2 Burlap
Burlap shall conform to AASHTO M 182.
2.2.3 White Pigmented Membrane-Forming Curing Compound
White pigmented membrane-forming curing compound shall conform to ASTM C 309,

Type 2.
2.3 CONCRETE PROTECTION MATERIALS
Concrete protection materials shall be a linseed oil mixture of equal

parts, by volume, of linseed oil and either mineral spirits, naphtha, or
turpentine. At the option of the Contractor, commercially prepared linseed
oil mixtures, formulated specifically for application to concrete to
provide protection against the action of deicing chemicals may be used,
except that emulsified mixtures are not acceptable.
2.4 JOINT FILLER STRIPS
2.4.1 Contraction Joint Filler for Curb and Gutter
Contraction joint filler for curb and gutter shall consist of hard-pressed
fiberboard.
2.4.2 Expansion Joint Filler, Premolded
Expansion joint filler, premolded, shall conform to ASTM D 1751 or

ASTM D 1752, 1/2 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated.
2.5 JOINT SEALANTS
Joint sealant, cold-applied shall conform to ASTM C 920 or ASTM D5893/D5893M.
2.6 FORM WORK
Design and construct form work to ensure that the finished concrete will
conform accurately to the indicated dimensions, lines, and elevations, and
within the tolerances specified. Forms shall be of wood or steel,
straight, of sufficient strength to resist springing during depositing and
consolidating concrete. Wood forms shall be surfaced plank, 2 inches
nominal thickness, straight and free from warp, twist, loose knots, splits
or other defects. Wood forms shall have a nominal length of 10 feet.
Radius bends may be formed with 3/4 inch boards, laminated to the required
thickness. Steel forms shall be channel-formed sections with a flat top
surface and with welded braces at each end and at not less than two
intermediate points. Ends of steel forms shall be interlocking and
self-aligning. Steel forms shall include flexible forms for radius
forming, corner forms, form spreaders, and fillers. Steel forms shall have
a nominal length of 10 feet with a minimum of 3 welded stake pockets per
form. Stake pins shall be solid steel rods with chamfered heads and
pointed tips designed for use with steel forms.
2.6.1 Sidewalk Forms
Sidewalk forms shall be of a height equal to the full depth of the finished
sidewalk.
2.6.2 Curb and Gutter Forms
Curb and gutter outside forms shall have a height equal to the full depth
of the curb or gutter. The inside form of curb shall have batter as
indicated and shall be securely fastened to and supported by the outside
form. Rigid forms shall be provided for curb returns, except that benders
or thin plank forms may be used for curb or curb returns with a radius of
10 feet or more, where grade changes occur in the return, or where the
central angle is such that a rigid form with a central angle of 90 degrees
cannot be used. Back forms for curb returns may be made of 1-1/2 inch
benders, for the full height of the curb, cleated together. In lieu of
inside forms for curbs, a curb "mule" may be used for forming and finishing
this surface, provided the results are approved.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 SUBGRADE PREPARATION
The subgrade shall be constructed to the specified grade and cross section
prior to concrete placement. Subgrade shall be placed and compacted in
conformance with Plan Sheet C-501 and C-502.
3.1.1 Sidewalk Subgrade
The subgrade shall be tested for grade and cross section with a template
extending the full width of the sidewalk and supported between side forms.
3.1.2 Curb and Gutter Subgrade
The subgrade shall be tested for grade and cross section by means of a
template extending the full width of the curb and gutter. The subgrade
shall be of materials equal in bearing quality to the subgrade under the
adjacent pavement.
3.1.3 Maintenance of Subgrade
The subgrade shall be maintained in a smooth, compacted condition in

conformity with the required section and established grade until the
concrete is placed. The subgrade shall be in a moist condition when
concrete is placed. The subgrade shall be prepared and protected to
produce a subgrade free from frost when the concrete is deposited.
3.2 FORM SETTING
Set forms to the indicated alignment, grade and dimensions. Hold forms
rigidly in place by a minimum of 3 stakes per form placed at intervals not
to exceed 4 feet. Corners, deep sections, and radius bends shall have
additional stakes and braces, as required. Clamps, spreaders, and braces
shall be used where required to ensure rigidity in the forms. Forms shall
be removed without injuring the concrete. Bars or heavy tools shall not be
used against the concrete in removing the forms. Any concrete found
defective after form removal shall be promptly and satisfactorily
repaired. Forms shall be cleaned and coated with form oil each time before
concrete is placed. Wood forms may, instead, be thoroughly wetted with
water before concrete is placed, except that with probable freezing
temperatures, oiling is mandatory.
3.2.1 Sidewalks
Set forms for sidewalks with the upper edge true to line and grade with an
allowable tolerance of 1/8 inch in any 10 foot long section. After forms
are set, grade and alignment shall be checked with a 10 foot straightedge.
Forms shall have a transverse slope as indicatedon the plans of 1/4 inch
per foot with the low side adjacent to the roadway. Side forms shall not
be removed for 12 hours after finishing has been completed.
3.2.2 Curbs and Gutters
The forms of the front of the curb shall be removed not less than 2 hours
nor more than 6 hours after the concrete has been placed. Forms back of
curb shall remain in place until the face and top of the curb have been
finished, as specified for concrete finishing. Gutter forms shall not be
removed while the concrete is sufficiently plastic to slump in any
direction.
3.3 SIDEWALK CONCRETE PLACEMENT AND FINISHING
3.3.1 Formed Sidewalks
Place concrete in the forms in one layer. When consolidated and finished,
the sidewalks shall be of the thickness indicated. After concrete has been
placed in the forms, a strike-off guided by side forms shall be used to
bring the surface to proper section to be compacted. The concrete shall be
consolidated by tamping and spading or with an approved vibrator, and the
surface shall be finished to grade with a strike off.
3.3.2 Concrete Finishing
After straightedging, when most of the water sheen has disappeared, and
just before the concrete hardens, finish the surface with a wood or
magnesium float or darby to a smooth and uniformly fine granular or sandy
texture free of waves, irregularities, or tool marks. A scored surface
shall be produced by brooming with a fiber-bristle brush in a direction
transverse to that of the traffic, followed by edging.
3.3.3 Edge and Joint Finishing
All slab edges, including those at formed joints, shall be finished with an
edger having a radius of 1/8 inch. Transverse joint shall be edged before
brooming, and the brooming shall eliminate the flat surface left by the
surface face of the edger. Corners and edges which have crumbled and areas
which lack sufficient mortar for proper finishing shall be cleaned and
filled solidly with a properly proportioned mortar mixture and then
finished.
3.3.4 Surface and Thickness Tolerances
Finished surfaces shall not vary more than 5/16 inch from the testing edge
of a 10-foot straightedge. Permissible deficiency in section thickness
will be up to 1/4 inch.
3.4 CURB AND GUTTER CONCRETE PLACEMENT AND FINISHING
3.4.1 Formed Curb and Gutter
Concrete shall be placed to the section required in a single lift.
Consolidation shall be achieved by using approved mechanical vibrators.

Curve shaped gutters shall be finished with a standard curb "mule".
3.4.2 Curb and Gutter Finishing
Approved slipformed curb and gutter machines may be used in lieu of hand
placement.
3.4.3 Concrete Finishing
Exposed surfaces shall be floated and finished with a smooth wood float
until true to grade and section and uniform in texture. Floated surfaces
shall then be brushed with a fine-hair brush with longitudinal strokes.
The edges of the gutter and top of the curb shall be rounded with an edging
tool to a radius of 1/2 inch. Immediately after removing the front curb
form, the face of the curb shall be rubbed with a wood or concrete rubbing
block and water until blemishes, form marks, and tool marks have been
removed. The front curb surface, while still wet, shall be brushed in the
same manner as the gutter and curb top. The top surface of gutter and
entrance shall be finished to grade with a wood float.
3.4.4 Joint Finishing
Curb edges at formed joints shall be finished as indicated.
3.4.5 Surface and Thickness Tolerances
Finished surfaces shall not vary more than 1/4 inch from the testing edge
of a 10-foot straightedge. Permissible deficiency in section thickness
will be up to 1/4 inch.
3.5 SIDEWALK JOINTS
Sidewalk joints shall be constructed to divide the surface into rectangular

areas. Transverse contraction joints shall be spaced at a distance equal
to the sidewalk width or 5 feet on centers, whichever is less, and shall be
continuous across the slab. Longitudinal contraction joints shall be
constructed along the centerline of all sidewalks 10 feet or more in
width. Transverse expansion joints shall be installed at sidewalk returns
and opposite expansion joints in adjoining curbs. Where the sidewalk is
not in contact with the curb, transverse expansion joints shall be
installed as indicated. Expansion joints shall be formed about structures
and features which project through or into the sidewalk pavement, using
joint filler of the type, thickness, and width indicated. Expansion joints
are not required between sidewalks and curb that abut the sidewalk
longitudinally.
3.5.1 Sidewalk Contraction Joints
The contraction joints shall be formed in the fresh concrete by cutting a

groove in the top portion of the slab to a depth of at least one-fourth of
the sidewalk slab thickness, using a jointer to cut the groove, or by
sawing a groove in the hardened concrete with a power-driven saw, unless
otherwise approved. Sawed joints shall be constructed by sawing a groove
in the concrete with a 1/8 inch blade to the depth indicated. An ample
supply of saw blades shall be available on the job before concrete
placement is started, and at least one standby sawing unit in good working
order shall be available at the jobsite at all times during the sawing
operations.
3.5.2 Sidewalk Expansion Joints
Expansion joints shall be formed with 1/2 inch joint filler strips. Joint
filler in expansion joints surrounding structures and features within the
sidewalk may consist of preformed filler material conforming to ASTM D 1752
or building paper. Joint filler shall be held in place with steel pins or
other devices to prevent warping of the filler during floating and
finishing. Immediately after finishing operations are completed, joint
edges shall be rounded with an edging tool having a radius of 1/8 inch, and
concrete over the joint filler shall be removed. At the end of the curing
period, expansion joints shall be cleaned and filled with cold-applied
joint sealant. Joint sealant shall be gray or stone in color. The joint
opening shall be thoroughly cleaned before the sealing material is placed.
Sealing material shall not be spilled on exposed surfaces of the concrete.
Concrete at the joint shall be surface dry and atmospheric and concrete
temperatures shall be above 50 degrees F at the time of application of
joint sealing material. Excess material on exposed surfaces of the
concrete shall be removed immediately and concrete surfaces cleaned.
3.5.3 Reinforcement Steel Placement
Reinforcement steel shall be accurately and securely fastened in place with

suitable supports and ties before the concrete is placed.
3.6 CURB AND GUTTER JOINTS
Curb and gutter joints shall be constructed at right angles to the line of
curb and gutter.
Contraction joints shall be constructed directly opposite contraction

joints in abutting portland cement concrete pavements and spaced so that
monolithic sections between curb returns will not be less than 5 feet nor
greater than 15 feet in length.
a. Contraction joints (except for slip forming) shall be constructed

by means of 1/8 inch thick separators and of a section conforming to
the cross section of the curb and gutter. Separators shall be removed
as soon as practicable after concrete has set sufficiently to preserve
the width and shape of the joint and prior to finishing.
b. When slip forming is used, the contraction joints shall be cut in

the top portion of the gutter/curb hardened concrete in a continuous
cut across the curb and gutter, using a power-driven saw. The depth of
cut shall be at least one-fourth of the gutter/curb depth and 1/8 inch
in width.
Expansion joints shall be formed by means of preformed expansion joint

filler material cut and shaped to the cross section of curb and gutter.
Expansion joints shall be provided in curb and gutter directly opposite
expansion joints of abutting portland cement concrete pavement, and shall
be of the same type and thickness as joints in the pavement. Where curb
and gutter do not abut portland cement concrete pavement, expansion joints
at least 1/2 inch in width shall be provided at intervals not less than 30
feet nor greater than 120 feet. Expansion joints shall be provided in
nonreinforced concrete gutter at locations indicated. Expansion joints

shall be sealed immediately following curing of the concrete or as soon
thereafter as weather conditions permit. Expansion joints and the top 1
inch depth of curb and gutter contraction-joints shall be sealed with joint
sealant. The joint opening shall be thoroughly cleaned before the sealing
material is placed. Sealing material shall not be spilled on exposed
surfaces of the concrete. Concrete at the joint shall be surface dry and
atmospheric and concrete temperatures shall be above 50 degrees F at the
time of application of joint sealing material. Excess material on exposed
surfaces of the concrete shall be removed immediately and concrete surfaces
cleaned.
3.7 CURING AND PROTECTION
Protect concrete against loss of moisture and rapid temperature changes for
at least 7 days from the beginning of the curing operation. Protect
unhardened concrete from rain and flowing water. All equipment needed for
adequate curing and protection of the concrete shall be on hand and ready
for use before actual concrete placement begins. Protection shall be
provided as necessary to prevent cracking of the pavement due to
temperature changes during the curing period.
3.7.1.1 Mat Method
The entire exposed surface shall be covered with 2 or more layers of

burlap. Mats shall overlap each other at least 6 inches. The mat shall be
thoroughly wetted with water prior to placing on concrete surface and shall
be kept continuously in a saturated condition and in intimate contact with
concrete for not less than 7 days.
3.7.1.2 Impervious Sheeting Method
The entire exposed surface shall be wetted with a fine spray of water and
then covered with impervious sheeting material. Sheets shall be laid
directly on the concrete surface with the light-colored side up and
overlapped 12 inches when a continuous sheet is not used. The curing
medium shall not be less than 18-inches wider than the concrete surface to
be cured, and shall be securely weighted down by heavy wood planks, or a
bank of moist earth placed along edges and laps in the sheets. Sheets
shall be satisfactorily repaired or replaced if torn or otherwise damaged
during curing. The curing medium shall remain on the concrete surface to
be cured for not less than 7 days.
3.7.1.3 Membrane Curing Method
A uniform coating of white-pigmented membrane-curing compound shall be

applied to the entire exposed surface of the concrete as soon after
finishing as the free water has disappeared from the finished surface.
Formed surfaces shall be coated immediately after the forms are removed and
in no case longer than 1 hour after the removal of forms. Concrete shall
not be allowed to dry before the application of the membrane. If any
drying has occurred, the surface of the concrete shall be moistened with a
fine spray of water and the curing compound applied as soon as the free
water disappears. Curing compound shall be applied in two coats by
hand-operated pressure sprayers at a coverage of approximately 200 square
feet/gallon for the total of both coats. The second coat shall be applied
in a direction approximately at right angles to the direction of
application of the first coat. The compound shall form a uniform,

continuous, coherent film that will not check, crack, or peel and shall be
free from pinholes or other imperfections. If pinholes, abrasion, or other
discontinuities exist, an additional coat shall be applied to the affected
areas within 30 minutes. Concrete surfaces that are subjected to heavy
rainfall within 3 hours after the curing compound has been applied shall be
resprayed by the method and at the coverage specified above. Areas where
the curing compound is damaged by subsequent construction operations within
the curing period shall be resprayed. Necessary precautions shall be taken
to insure that the concrete is properly cured at sawed joints, and that no
curing compound enters the joints. The top of the joint opening and the
joint groove at exposed edges shall be tightly sealed before the concrete
in the region of the joint is resprayed with curing compound. The method
used for sealing the joint groove shall prevent loss of moisture from the
joint during the entire specified curing period. Approved standby
facilities for curing concrete pavement shall be provided at a location
accessible to the jobsite for use in the event of mechanical failure of the
spraying equipment or other conditions that might prevent correct
application of the membrane-curing compound at the proper time. Concrete
surfaces to which membrane-curing compounds have been applied shall be
adequately protected during the entire curing period from pedestrian and
vehicular traffic, except as required for joint-sawing operations and
surface tests, and from any other possible damage to the continuity of the
membrane.
3.7.2 Backfilling
After curing, debris shall be removed and the area adjoining the concrete
shall be backfilled, graded, and compacted to conform to the surrounding
area in accordance with lines and grades indicated.
3.7.3 Protection
Completed concrete shall be protected from damage until accepted. Repair

damaged concrete and clean concrete discolored during construction.
Concrete that is damaged shall be removed and reconstructed for the entire
length between regularly scheduled joints. Refinishing the damaged portion
will not be acceptable. Removed damaged portions shall be disposed of as
directed.
3.7.4 Protective Coating
Protective coating, of linseed oil mixture, shall be applied to the

exposed-to-view concrete surface after the curing period, if concrete will
be exposed to de-icing chemicals within 6 weeks after placement. Concrete
to receive a protective coating shall be moist cured.
3.7.4.1 Application
Curing and backfilling operation shall be completed prior to applying two

coats of protective coating. Concrete shall be surface dry and clean
before each application. Coverage shall be by spray application at not
more than 50 square yards/gallon for first application and not more than 70
square yards/gallon for second application, except that the number of
applications and coverage for each application for commercially prepared
mixture shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
Coated surfaces shall be protected from vehicular and pedestrian traffic
until dry.
3.7.4.2 Precautions
Protective coating shall not be heated by direct application of flame or

electrical heaters and shall be protected from exposure to open flame,
sparks, and fire adjacent to open containers or applicators. Material
shall not be applied at ambient or material temperatures lower than 50
degrees F.
Perform the inspection and tests described and meet the specified
requirements for inspection details and frequency of testing. Based upon
the results of these inspections and tests, take the action and submit
reports as required below, and any additional tests to insure that the
requirements of these specifications are met.
3.8.2 Concrete Testing
3.8.2.1 Strength Testing
Provide molded concrete specimens for strength tests. Samples of concrete

placed each day shall be taken not less than once a day nor less than once
for every 250 cubic yards of concrete. The samples for strength tests
shall be taken in accordance with ASTM C172/C172M. Cylinders for
acceptance shall be molded in conformance with ASTM C 31/C 31M by an
approved testing laboratory. Each strength test result shall be the
average of 2 test cylinders from the same concrete sample tested at 28
days, unless otherwise specified or approved. Concrete specified on the
basis of compressive strength will be considered satisfactory if the
averages of all sets of three consecutive strength test results equal or
exceed the specified strength, and no individual strength test result falls
below the specified strength by more than 500 psi.
3.8.2.2 Air Content
Determine air content in accordance with ASTM C 173/C 173M or

ASTM C231/C231M. ASTM C231/C231M shall be used with concretes and mortars
made with relatively dense natural aggregates. Two tests for air content
shall be made on randomly selected batches of each class of concrete placed
during each shift. Additional tests shall be made when excessive variation
in concrete workability is reported by the placing foreman or the
Government inspector. If results are out of tolerance, the placing foreman
shall be notified and he shall take appropriate action to have the air
content corrected at the plant. Additional tests for air content will be
performed on each truckload of material until such time as the air content
is within the tolerance specified.
3.8.2.3 Slump Test
Two slump tests shall be made on randomly selected batches of each class of
concrete for every 250 cubic yards, or fraction thereof, of concrete placed
during each shift. Additional tests shall be performed when excessive
variation in the workability of the concrete is noted or when excessive
crumbling or slumping is noted along the edges of slip-formed concrete.
3.8.3 Thickness Evaluation
The anticipated thickness of the concrete shall be determined prior to

placement by passing a template through the formed section or by measuring
the depth of opening of the extrusion template of the curb forming
machine. If a slip form paver is used for sidewalk placement, the subgrade
shall be true to grade prior to concrete placement and the thickness will
be determined by measuring each edge of the completed slab.
3.8.4 Surface Evaluation
The finished surface of each category of the completed work shall be

uniform in color and free of blemishes and form or tool marks.
3.9 SURFACE DEFICIENCIES AND CORRECTIONS
3.9.1 Thickness Deficiency
When measurements indicate that the completed concrete section is deficient

in thickness by more than 1/4 inch the deficient section will be removed,
between regularly scheduled joints, and replaced.
3.9.2 High Areas
In areas not meeting surface smoothness and plan grade requirements, high
areas shall be reduced either by rubbing the freshly finished concrete with
carborundum brick and water when the concrete is less than 36 hours old or
by grinding the hardened concrete with an approved surface grinding machine
after the concrete is 36 hours old or more. The area corrected by grinding
the surface of the hardened concrete shall not exceed 5 percent of the area
of any integral slab, and the depth of grinding shall not exceed 1/4 inch.
Pavement areas requiring grade or surface smoothness corrections in excess
of the limits specified above shall be removed and replaced.
3.9.3 Appearance
Exposed surfaces of the finished work will be inspected by the Government

and any deficiencies in appearance will be identified. Areas which exhibit
excessive cracking, discoloration, form marks, or tool marks or which are
otherwise inconsistent with the overall appearances of the work shall be
removed and replaced.
SECTION 32 17 23.00 20
PAVEMENT MARKINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES


Rubber Property - Durometer Hardness
ASTM D 2621 (1987; R 2005) Infrared Identification of

Vehicle Solids from Solvent-Reducible
Paints
ASTM D 2697 (2003; R 2008) Volume Nonvolatile Matter

in Clear or Pigmented Coatings
ASTM D 3335 (1985a; R 2009) Low Concentrations of

Lead, Cadmium, and Cobalt in Paint by
Atomic Absorption Spectroscopy
ASTM D 3718 (1985a; R 2010) Low Concentrations of

Chromium in Paint by Atomic Absorption
Spectroscopy
ASTM D 3924 (1980; R 2005) Standard Environment for

Conditioning and Testing Paint, Varnish,
Lacquer, and Related Materials
ASTM D 3960 (2005) Determining Volatile Organic

Compound (VOC) Content of Paints and
Related Coatings
ASTM D 4505 (2005) Preformed Retroflective Pavement

Marking Tape for Extended Service Life
ASTM D 4541 (2009e1) Pull-Off Strength of Coatings

Using Portable Adhesion Testers

Property - Effect of Liquids

ASTM D 711 (1989; R 2004) No-Pick-Up Time of Traffic

Paint
ASTM D 792 (2008) Density and Specific Gravity

(Relative Density) of Plastics by
SECTION 32 17 23.00 20 Page 1

Displacement
ASTM D 823 (1995; R 2007) Producing Films of Uniform

Thickness of Paint, Varnish, and Related
Products on Test Panels.
ASTM E 28 (1999; R 2009) Softening Point of Resins

Derived from Naval Stores by Ring and Ball
Apparatus
ASTM G 154 (2006) Standard Practice for Operating

Fluorescent Light Apparatus for UV
Exposure of Nonmetallic Materials
INTERNATIONAL CONCRETE REPAIR INSTITUTE (ICRI)
ICRI 03732 (1997) Selecting and Specifying Concrete

Surface Preparation for Sealers, Coatings,
and Polymer Overlays
FED-STD-595 (Rev C) Colors Used in Government

Procurement
FS TT-B-1325 (Rev D) Beads (Glass Spheres)

Retro-Reflective (Metric)
1.2 SUBMITTALS

SD-03 Product Data
Reflective media for roads and streets
Paints for roads and streets
High Build Acrylic Coating (HBAC); G
Thermoplastic compound
Raised Pavement Markers and Adhesive
Equipment; G, PO
Lists of proposed equipment, including descriptive data, and

notifications of proposed Contractor actions as specified in this
section. List of removal equipment shall include descriptive data
indicating area of coverage per pass, pressure adjustment range,
SECTION 32 17 23.00 20 Page 2

tank and flow capacities, and safety precautions required for the
equipment operation.
Qualifications
Documentation on personnel qualifications, as specified.
SD-06 Test Reports
High Build Acrylic Coating (HBAC); G
Raised Pavement Markers and Adhesive
Certified reports from sampling and testing made in accordance

with paragraph entitled "Sampling and Testing" prior to the use of
the materials at the jobsite. Testing shall be performed in an
approved independent laboratory.
SD-07 Certificates
Volatile Organic Compound, (VOC)
Certificate stating that the proposed pavement marking paint

meets the VOC regulations of the local Air Pollution Control
District having jurisdiction over the geographical area in which
the project is located.
Construction equipment list
Submit manufacturer's Material Safety Data Sheets.
SECTION 32 17 23.00 20 Page 3

Deliver paints, paint materials and thermoplastic compound materials in

original sealed containers that plainly show the designated name,
specification number, batch number, color, date of manufacture,
manufacturer's directions, and name of manufacturer. Provide storage
facilities at the job site, only in areas approved by the Contracting
Officer or authorized representative, for maintaining materials at
temperatures recommended by the manufacturer. Make available paint stored
at the project site or segregated at the source for sampling not less than
30 days prior to date of required approval for use to allow sufficient time
for testing. Notify the Contracting Officer when paint is available for
sampling.
1.4 WEATHER LIMITATIONS
Apply paint to clean, dry surfaces, and unless otherwise approved, only
when the air and pavement surface temperature is at least 5 degrees above
the dew point and the air and pavement temperatures are above 40 degrees F
and less than 95 degrees F for oil-based materials; above 50 degrees F and
less than 110 degrees F for water-based materials. Maintain paint
temperature within these same limits.
1.5 EQUIPMENT
Machines, tools, and equipment used in the performance of the work shall be
approved by the Contracting Officer and maintained in satisfactory
operating condition. Submit construction equipment list for approval by
1.5.1 Mobile and Maneuverable
Application equipment shall be mobile and maneuverable to the extent that

straight lines can be followed and normal curves can be made in a true
arc.
1.5.2 Paint Application Equipment
1.5.2.1 Hand-Operated, Push-Type Machines
Provide hand-operated push-type applicator machine of a type commonly used

for application of paint to pavement surfaces. Paint applicator machine
shall be acceptable for marking small street and parking areas. Applicator
machine shall be equipped with the necessary paint tanks and spraying
nozzles, and shall be capable of applying paint uniformly at coverage
specified. Applicator for water-based markings shall be equipped with
non-stick coated hoses; metal parts in contact with the paint material
shall be constructed of grade 302, 304, 316, or equal stainless steel.
1.5.3 Thermoplastic Application Equipment
1.5.3.1 Thermoplastic Material
Thermoplastic material shall be applied to the primed pavement surface by

spray techniques or by the extrusion method, wherein one side of the
shaping die is the pavement and the other three sides are contained by, or
are part of, suitable equipment for heating and controlling the flow of
material. By either method, the markings shall be applied with equipment
SECTION 32 17 23.00 20 Page 4

that is capable of providing continuous uniformity in the dimensions of the

stripe.
1.5.3.2 Application Equipment
a. Application equipment shall provide continuous mixing and agitation

of the material. Conveying parts of the equipment between the main
material reservoir and the extrusion shoe or spray gun shall prevent
accumulation and clogging. All parts of the equipment which come into
contact with the material shall be easily accessible and exposable for
cleaning and maintenance. All mixing and conveying parts up to and
including the extrusion shoes and spray guns shall maintain the
material at the required temperature with heat-transfer oil or
electrical-element-controlled heat.
b. The application equipment shall be constructed to ensure continuous

uniformity in the dimensions of the stripe. The applicator shall
provide a means for cleanly cutting off stripe ends squarely and shall
provide a method of applying "skiplines". The equipment shall be
capable of applying varying widths of traffic markings.
c. The applicator shall be equipped with a drop-on type bead dispenser

capable of uniformly dispensing reflective glass spheres at controlled
rates of flow. The bead dispenser shall be automatically operated and
shall begin flow prior to the flow of composition to assure that the
strip is fully reflectorized.
1.5.3.3 Mobile and Maneuverable
Application equipment shall be mobile and maneuverable to the extent that

straight lines can be followed and normal curves can be made in a true
arc. The equipment used for the placement of thermoplastic pavement
markings shall be of two general types: mobile applicator and portable
applicator.
1.5.3.4 Mobile Application Equipment
The mobile applicator shall be defined as a truck-mounted, self-contained

pavement marking machine that is capable of hot applying thermoplastic by
either the extrusion or spray method. The unit shall be equipped to apply
the thermoplastic marking material at temperatures exceeding 375 degrees F,
at widths varying from 3 to 12 inches and in thicknesses varying from 0.040
to 0.200 inch and shall have an automatic drop-on bead system.
The kettle shall be capable of heating the thermoplastic composition to

temperatures of 375 to 425 degrees F. A thermostatically controlled heat
transfer liquid shall be used. Heating of the composition by direct flame
shall not be allowed. Oil and material temperature gauges shall be visible
at both ends of the kettle.
The mobile unit shall be equipped with an electronic programmable line

pattern control system. The control system shall be capable of applying
skip or solid lines in any sequence, through any and all of the extrusion
shoes, or the spray guns, and in programmable cycle lengths. In addition,
the mobile unit shall be equipped with an automatic counting mechanism
capable of recording the number of lineal feet of thermoplastic markings
applied to the pavement surface with an accuracy of 0.5 percent.
SECTION 32 17 23.00 20 Page 5

1.5.3.5 Portable Application Equipment
The portable applicator shall be defined as hand-operated equipment,

specifically designed for placing special markings such as crosswalks,
stopbars, legends, arrows, and short lengths of lane, edge and
centerlines. The portable applicator shall be capable of applying
thermoplastic pavement markings by the extrusion method. The portable
applicator shall be loaded with hot thermoplastic composition from the
melting kettles on the mobile applicator. The portable applicator shall be
equipped with all the necessary components, including a materials storage
reservoir, bead dispenser, extrusion shoe, and heating accessories, so as
to be capable of holding the molten thermoplastic at a temperature of 375
to 425 degrees F, of extruding a line of 3 to 12 inches in width, and in
thickness of not less than 0.120 inch nor more than 0.190 inch and of
generally uniform cross section.
1.5.4 Reflective Media Dispenser
The dispenser for applying the reflective media shall be attached to the
paint dispenser and shall operate automatically and simultaneously with the
applicator through the same control mechanism. The dispenser shall be
capable of adjustment and designed to provide uniform flow of reflective
media over the full length and width of the stripe at the rate of coverage
specified in paragraph APPLICATION, at all operating speeds of the
applicator to which it is attached.
1.5.5 Preformed Tape Application Equipment
Mechanical application equipment shall be used for the placement of

preformed marking tape. Mechanical application equipment shall be defined
as a mobile pavement marking machine specifically designed for use in
applying precoated, pressure-sensitive pavement marking tape of varying
widths, up to 12 inches. The applicator shall be equipped with rollers, or
other suitable compactive device, to provide initial adhesion of the
preformed, pressure-sensitive marking tape with the pavement surface.
Additional hand-operated rollers shall be used as required to properly seat
the thermoplastic tape.
1.5.6 Surface Preparation Equipment
1.5.6.1 Sandblasting Equipment
Sandblasting equipment shall include an air compressor, hoses, and nozzles

of proper size and capacity as required for cleaning surfaces to be
painted. The compressor shall be capable of furnishing not less than 150
cfm of air at a pressure of not less than 90 psi at each nozzle used, and
shall be equipped with traps that will maintain the compressed air free of
oil and water.
1.5.6.2 Waterblast Equipment
The water pressure shall be specified at 2600 psi at 140 degrees F in order
to adequately clean the surfaces to be marked.
1.5.7 Marking Removal Equipment
Equipment shall be mounted on rubber tires and shall be capable of removing

markings from the pavement without damaging the pavement surface or joint
SECTION 32 17 23.00 20 Page 6

sealant. Waterblasting equipment shall be capable of producing an

adjustable, pressurized stream of water. Sandblasting equipment shall
include an air compressor, hoses, and nozzles. The compressor shall be
equipped with traps to maintain the air free of oil and water.
1.5.7.1 Shotblasting Equipment
Shotblasting equipment shall be capable of producing an adjustable depth of

removal of marking and pavement. Each unit shall be self-cleaning and
self-contained, shall be able to confine dust and debris from the
operation, and shall be capable of recycling the abrasive for reuse.
1.5.7.2 Chemical Equipment
Chemical equipment shall be capable of application and removal of chemicals

from the pavement surface, and shall leave only non-toxic biodegradeable
residue.
1.5.8 Traffic Controls
Suitable warning signs shall be placed near the beginning of the worksite
and well ahead of the worksite for alerting approaching traffic from both
directions. Small markers shall be placed along newly painted lines or
freshly placed raised markers to control traffic and prevent damage to
newly painted surfaces or displacement of raised pavement markers.
Painting equipment shall be marked with large warning signs indicating
slow-moving painting equipment in operation.
1.6 MAINTENANCE OF TRAFFIC
1.6.1 Roads, Streets, and Parking Areas
When traffic must be rerouted or controlled to accomplish the work, the

necessary warning signs, flagpersons, and related equipment for the safe
passage of vehicles shall be provided.
1.7 WEATHER LIMITATIONS FOR REMOVAL
Pavement surface shall be free of snow, ice, or slush. Surface temperature

shall be at least 40 degrees F and rising at the beginning of operations,
except those involving shot or sand blasting. Operation shall cease during
thunderstorms. Operation shall cease during rainfall, except for
waterblasting and removal of previously applied chemicals. Waterblasting
shall cease where surface water accumulation alters the effectiveness of
material removal.
1.8 QUALIFICATIONS
The Contractor shall submit documentation certifying that pertinent

personnel are qualified for equipment operation and handling of chemicals.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
Provide materials conforming to the requirements specified herein.
SECTION 32 17 23.00 20 Page 7

2.1.1 Paints for Roads and Streets
High Build Acrylic Coating (HBAC) , color as indicated.
2.1.2 Reflective Media for Roads and Streets
FS TT-B-1325, Type I, Gradation A.
2.1.3 Thermoplastic Compound
The thermoplastic reflectorized pavement marking compound shall be extruded

or sprayed in a molten state onto a primed pavement surface. Following a
surface application of glass beads and upon cooling to normal pavement
temperatures, the marking shall be an adherent reflectorized strip of the
specified thickness and width that is capable of resisting deformation by
traffic.
2.1.3.1 Composition Requirements
The binder component shall be formulated as a hydrocarbon resin. The

pigment, beads and filler shall be uniformly dispersed in the binder
resin. The thermoplastic composition shall be free from all skins, dirt,
and foreign objects and shall comply with the following requirements:
Percent by Weight
Component White Yellow
Binder 17 min 17 min

Titanium dioxide 10 min -
Glass beads 20 min 20 min
Calcium carbonate and inert fillers 49 min *
Yellow pigments - *
*Amount and type of yellow pigment, calcium carbonate and inert fillers
shall be at the option of the manufacturer, providing the other composition
requirements of this specification are met.
2.1.3.2 Physical Properties
a. Drying time: When installed at 70 degrees F and in thicknesses

between 0.120 and 0.190 inch, the composition shall be completely
solid and shall show no damaging effect from traffic after curing
15 minutes.
b. Softening point: The composition shall have a softening point of

not less than 194 degrees F when tested in accordance with
ASTM E 28.
c. Specific gravity: The specific gravity of the composition shall

be between 1.9 and 2.2 as determined in accordance with ASTM D 792.
2.1.3.3 Primer
a. Asphalt concrete primer: The primer for asphalt concrete

pavements shall be a thermosetting adhesive with a solids content
of pigment reinforced synthetic rubber and synthetic plastic resin
dissolved or dispersed in a volatile organic solvent. The solids
content shall not be less than 10 percent by weight at 70 degrees F
and 60 percent relative humidity. A wet film thickness of 0.005
SECTION 32 17 23.00 20 Page 8

inch, plus or minus 0.001 inch, shall dry to a tack-free condition

in less than 5 minutes.
b. Portland cement concrete primer: The primer for portland cement

concrete pavements shall be an epoxy resin primer. The primer
shall be of the type recommended by the manufacturer of the
thermoplastic composition.
2.1.4 PREFORMED TAPE
The preformed tape shall be an adherent reflectorized strip in accordance

with ASTM D 4505 Type I or IV, Class optional.
2.1.5 High Build Acrylic Coating (HBAC)
Formulate High Build Acrylic Coating (HBAC) to meet the requirements of

Table I.
2.1.5.1 Preapproved HBAC Vendors and Materials
Table II presents a partial list of HBAC vendors and materials. Up to

specifications's date of issue, preapproved materials met specification
requirements. It is the user's responsibility to confirm preapproved
material formulations have not changed and specification requirements will
be met. Other products may meet HBAC requirements.
PART 3 EXECUTION
Allow new pavement surfaces to cure for a period of not less than 30 days
before application of marking materials. Thoroughly clean surfaces to be
marked before application of the paint. Remove dust, dirt, and other
granular surface deposits by sweeping, blowing with compressed air, rinsing
with water, or a combination of these methods as required. Remove rubber
deposits, existing paint markings, residual curing compounds, and other
coatings adhering to the pavement by water blasting. For Portland Cement
Concrete pavement, grinding, light shot blasting, and light scarification,
to a resulting profile equal to ICRI 03732 CSP 2, CSP 3, and CSP 4,
respectively, can be used in addition to water blasting, to either remove
existing coatings or for surface preparation on most pavements: shot
blasting shall not be used on airfield pavements due to the potential of
Foreign Object Damage (FOD) to aircraft. Scrub affected areas, where oil or
grease is present on old pavements to be marked, with several applications
of trisodium phosphate solution or other approved detergent or degreaser
and rinse thoroughly after each application. After cleaning oil-soaked
areas, seal with shellac or primer recommended by the manufacturer to
prevent bleeding through the new paint. Do not commence painting in any
area until pavement surfaces are dry and clean.
3.2 APPLICATION
3.2.1 Testing for Moisture
Apply pavement markings to dry pavement only. The Contractor shall test
the pavement surface for moisture before beginning work after each period
of rainfall, fog, high humidity, or cleaning, or when the ambient
temperature has fallen below the dew point. Do not commence marking until
the pavement is sufficiently dry and the pavement condition has been
SECTION 32 17 23.00 20 Page 9

approved by the CO or authorized representative. Employ the "plastic wrap

method" to test the pavement for moisture as follows: Cover the pavement
with a 300 mm by 300 mm (12 inch by 12 inch) section of clear plastic wrap
and seal the edges with tape. After 15 minutes, examine the plastic wrap
for any visible moisture accumulation inside the plastic. Do not begin
marking operations until the test can be performed with no visible moisture
accumulation inside the plastic wrap.
3.2.2 Rate of Application
3.2.2.1 Reflective Markings
Apply paint evenly to the pavement area to be coated at a rate of 105 plus
or minus 5 square feet per gallon. Apply High Build Acrylic Coating (HBAC)
at a rate of 50 square feet per gallon. Apply glass spheres uniformly to
the wet paint on road and street pavement at a rate of (6) plus or minus
(0.5) pounds of glass spheres per gallon. Collect and record readings for
white and yellow retroreflective markings at the rate of one reading per
1000 linear feet. The minimum acceptable average for white markings is 200
millicandelas per square meter per lux (mcd/m2/lx) (measured with Mirolux
12 Retroreflectometer or similar instrument as agreed). The minimum
acceptable average for yellow markings is 175 millicandelas per square
meter per lux (mcd/m2/lx). Readings shall be computed by averaging a
minimum of 10 readings taken within the area at random locations. Areas
not meeting the retroreflective requirements stated above shall be
re-marked.
3.2.2.2 Nonreflective Markings
Apply paint evenly to the pavement surface to be coated at a rate of 105

plus or minus 5 square feet per gallon. Apply High Build Acrylic Coating
(HBAC) at a rate of 50 square feet per gallon.
3.2.2.3 Thermoplastic Compound
After surface preparation has been completed, prime the asphalt or concrete
pavement surface with spray equipment. Allow primer materials to "set-up"
prior to applying the thermoplastic composition. Allow the asphalt concrete
primer to dry to a tack-free condition, usually occurring in less than 10
minutes. Allow the Portland Cement concrete primer to dry in accordance
with the thermoplastic manufacturer recommendations. To shorten the curing
time of the epoxy resins, an infrared heating device may be used on the
concrete primer. Apply asphalt concrete primer to all asphalt concrete
pavements at a wet film thickness of 0.005 inch, plus or minus 0.001 inch
265 to 400 square feet per gallon. Apply portland cement concrete primer
to all concrete pavements (including concrete bridge decks) at a wet film
thickness of between 0.04 to 0.05 inch 320 to 400 square feet per gallon.
After the primer has "set-up", apply the thermoplastic at temperatures no
lower than 375 degrees F nor higher than 425 degrees F at the point of
deposition. Immediately after installation of the marking, apply drop-on
reflective glass spheres mechanically at the rate of one pound per 20
square feet such that the spheres are held by and imbedded in the surface
of the molten material. Apply all extruded thermoplastic markings at the
specified width and at a thickness of not less than 0.125 inch nor more than
0.190 inch. Apply all sprayed thermoplastic markings at the specified
width and the thickness designated in the contract plans. If the plans do
not specify a thickness, apply centerline markings at a wet thickness of
0.090 inch, plus or minus 0.005 inch, and edgeline markings at a wet
thickness of 0.060 inch, plus or minus 0.005 inch.
SECTION 32 17 23.00 20 Page 10

3.2.3 Painting
Apply paint pneumatically with approved equipment at rate of coverage

specified herein. Provide guidelines and templates as necessary to control
paint application. Take special precautions in marking numbers, letters,
and symbols. Manually paint numbers, letters, and symbols. Sharply
outline all edges of markings. The maximum drying time requirements of the
paint specifications will be strictly enforced, to prevent undue softening
of bitumen, and pickup, displacement, or discoloration by tires of traffic.
Discontinue painting operations if there is a deficiency in drying of the
markings until cause of the slow drying is determined and corrected.
3.2.4 Reflective Media
Application of reflective media shall immediately follow the application of

paint. Accomplish drop-on application of the glass spheres to ensure even
distribution at the specified rate of coverage. Should there be
malfunction of either paint applicator or reflective media dispenser,
discontinue operations until deficiency is corrected.
3.2.5 Thermoplastic Compound
Place thermoplastic pavement markings upon dry pavement. At the time of

installation the pavement surface temperature shall be a minimum of 40
degrees F and rising. Thermoplastics, as placed, shall be free from dirt
or tint. Apply all centerline, skipline, edgeline, and other longitudinal
type markings with a mobile applicator. Place all special markings,
crosswalks, stop bars, legends, arrows, and similar patterns with a
portable applicator, using the extrusion method.
3.2.6 Raised Pavement Markers
Prefabricated markers shall be aligned carefully at the required spacing or

as directed and permanently fixed in place by means of epoxy adhesives. To
ensure good bond, areas where markers will be set shall be thoroughly
cleaned by water blasting and use of compressed air prior to applying
adhesive.
3.3 FIELD TESTING, INSPECTION, AND DEMONSTRATIONS
3.3.1 Sampling and Testing
As soon as the paint and reflective and thermoplastic materials are

available for sampling, obtain by random selection from the sealed
containers, two quart samples of each batch in the presence of the
Contracting Officer. Accomplish adequate mixing prior to sampling to
ensure a uniform, representative sample. A batch is defined as that
quantity of material processed by the manufacturer at one time and
identified by number on the label. Clearly identify samples by designated
name, specification number, batch number, project contract number, intended
use, and quantity involved. At the discretion of the Contracting Officer,
samples provided may be tested by the Government for verification.
3.3.2 Inspection
Examine material at the job site to determine that it is the material

referenced in the report of test results or certificate of compliance. A
certificate of compliance shall be accompanied by test results
SECTION 32 17 23.00 20 Page 11

substantiating conformance to the specified requirements.
3.3.3 Surface Preparations and Application Procedures
Surface preparations and application procedures will be examined by the

Contracting Officer to determine conformance with the requirements
specified. Approve each separate operation prior to initiation of
subsequent operations.
3.3.3.1 Surface Preparation Demonstration
Prior to surface preparation, demonstrate surface preparation using the

proposed materials, methods and equipment . Prepare areas large enough to
determine cleanliness, adhesion of remaining coating and rate of cleaning.
3.3.3.2 Test Stripe Demonstration
Prior to paint application, demonstrate test stripe application within the

work area using the proposed materials and equipment. Apply separate test
stripes in each of the line widths and configurations required herein using
the proposed equipment. The test stripes shall be long enough to determine
the proper speed and operating pressures for the vehicle(s) and machinery,
but not less than 50 feet long.
3.3.3.3 Application Rate Demonstration
During the Test Stripe Demonstration, demonstrate compliance with the

application rates specified herein. Document the equipment speed and
operating pressures required to meet the specified rates in each
configuration of the equipment and provide a copy of the documentation to
the Contracting Officer or authorized representative 14 days prior to
proceeding with the work.
3.3.3.4 Retroreflective Value Demonstration
After the test stripes have cured to a "no-track" condition, demonstrate

compliance with the average retroreflective values specified herein. Take
a minimum of ten readings on each test stripe with a Mirolux 12
Retroreflectometer, or similar instrument with the same measuring geometry
and direct readout in millicandelas per square meter per lux (mcd/m2/lx).
3.3.3.5 Level of Performance Demonstration
The Contracting Officer or authorized representative will be present the

application demonstrations to observe the results obtained and to validate
the operating parameters of the vehicle(s) and equipment. If accepted by
the Contracting Officer or authorized representative, the test stripe shall
be the measure of performance required for this project. Work shall not
proceed until the demonstration results are satisfactory to the Contracting
Officer or authorized representative.
3.4 TRAFFIC CONTROL AND PROTECTION
Place warning signs near the beginning of the work site and well ahead of
the work site for alerting approaching traffic from both directions. Place
small markers along newly painted lines to control traffic and prevent
damage to newly painted surfaces. Mark painting equipment with large
warning signs indicating slow-moving painting equipment in operation. Do
not use foil-backed material for temporary pavement marking because of its
SECTION 32 17 23.00 20 Page 12

potential to conduct electricity during accidents involving downed power

lines.
Demonstrate success of bond of reflective media, new paint marking and the
pavement surface, vacuum cured surface of new marking after a seven (7) day
dry time. Inspect newly applied markings for signs of bond failure based
on visual inspection and comparison to results from Test Stripe
Demonstration paragraph.
3.5.1 Reflective Media and Coating Bond Verification
Within seven (7) days after pavement marking application, use industrial
vacuum to sweep new markings. Visually inspect the pavement markings and
the material captured by the vacuum. Verify that no significant loss of
reflective media has occured to the pavement marking due to the vacuum
cleaning.
3.5.2 Reflective Media and Coating Application Verification
Use a wet film thickness guage to masure the application of wet paint.
Use a microscope or magnifying glass to evaluate the embedment of glass

beads in the paint. Verify the glass bead embedment with approximately 50%
of the beads embedded and 50% of the beads exposed.
SECTION 32 17 23.00 20 Page 13

TABLE I
REQUIREMENTS FOR HIGH BUILD ACRYLIC COATINGS (HBAC)
Test Minimum Requirement

(and Maximum where indicated)
Resin System (ASTM D 2621) Waterborne 100% Acrylic
Percent Volume Solids (ASTM D 2697) 58%
Volatile Organic Compound, max. 1.25 lbs/gal

(ASTM D 3960)
White (FED-STD-595) 37925
Yellow (FED-STD-595) 33538
Shore D Hardness (ASTM D 2240) 45
1/8 inch Mandrel Bend @ 5 mils No visual defects at bend

Dry Film Thickness (DFT, one-week (Conditions @ ASTM D 3924)
cure (ASTM D 522, Method B)
Adhesion to Concrete and Asphaltic 140 psi or 100%

Pavements (ASTM D 4541) cohesive failure in pavement
Accelerated Weathering, Yellow, Max. color loss to 33655

2500 Hours UV Exposure (FED-STD-595)
(ASTM G 154: see note 1)
Water Absorption @ 168 Hours 9.0% max. weight increase

Immersion Tap Water (ASTM D 471) (conditions @ ASTM D 3924)
Application @ 65 mils No visual cracking or curling

Wet,One Coat, One-week Cure, (conditions @ ASTM D 3924)
(see note 2)
No Pick-Up @ 25 mils Wet 10 minutes max.

(ASTM D 711)
Lead (ASTM D 3335) 0.06% max.
Cadmium (ASTM D 3335) 0.06% max.
Chromium (ASTM D 3718) 0.00%
Notes:
(1) Properly mix and apply yellow paint at 10 mils +/- 2 mils DFT over
a suitably sized, clean aluminum substrate (ASTM D 823), and cure for a
minimum of 48 hours: four individual yellow samples shall be prepared.
Expose three samples to continuous Ultraviolet (UV) light for 2500 hours,
without cycles condensation, in accordance to ASTM G 154: UVA-340 lamps shall
be used in the testing apparatus. Following exposure, compare the three
exposed samples to the "one" non-exposed sample using FED-STD-595 colors
33538 and 33655 as visual references: evaluate exposed samples for degree of
visual color loss. Yellow paint shall receive a passing rating if each
exposed sample appears equivalent to the non-exposed sample, and in addition,
SECTION 32 17 23.00 20 Page 14

TABLE I
REQUIREMENTS FOR HIGH BUILD ACRYLIC COATINGS (HBAC)
displays color loss no greater than FED-STD-595 color 33655.
(2) Using double-stick, foam mounting tape (or equal) with a nominal
thickness of 65 mils, apply a rectangular mold with inner dimensions of 3
in by 10 in to a clean aluminum sample approximately sized at 6 in by 12 in
by 1/8 in. Do not remove the tape's plastic backing. Mix and apply excess
paint into mold. Remove excess paint, by squeegee or other appropriate draw
down technique, to a uniform thickness equal to the tape's height. Paint
application and draw down shall be performed within a period of no more than
60 seconds. Approximately one to two minutes following the draw down, remove
tape from sample and allow coating to cure for a minimum period of one week
ASTM D 3924. Using a micrometer or other appropriate device, measure cured
coating thickness (less sample thickness) to confirm resulting coating
application was at or above 38 mils DFT. Inspect coating for visual signs
of cracking and curling. Following a one week cure, coating shall receive a
passing rating if applied greater than 38 mils DFT and visually free of both
cracking and curling.
SECTION 32 17 23.00 20 Page 15

TABLE II
PREAPPROVED HBACs
Manufacturer Products
TMT-Pathway Legend Build, #2712A9, White

1021 N. Mission Road Legend Build, #2713A9, Yellow
Los Angeles, CA 90033
(800) 338-7680
Pervo Paints Pervo 6050, White

6624 Stanford Ave. Pervo 6053, Yellow
Los Angeles, CA 90001
(323) 758-1147
Vogel Traffic Services UC-1516, White

1920 Albany Place South UC-3588, Yellow
PO Box 140
Orange City, IA 51041
(712) 737-4016
SECTION 32 17 23.00 20 Page 16

SECTION 32 31 13
CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES


Metallic-Coated, Steel Woven Wire Fence
Fabric

Hardware

Steel Fence Posts and Assemblies, Hot
Wrought

Galvanized Coatings
ASTM A 90/A 90M (2009) Standard Test Method for Weight

(Mass)of Coating on Iron and Steel
Articles with Zinc or Zinc-Alloy Coatings

ASTM F 1043 (2008) Strength and Protective Coatings on

Metal Industrial Chain-Link Fence Framework
ASTM F 1083 (2010) Standard Specification for Pipe,

Steel, Hot-Dipped Zinc Coated (Galvanized)
Welded, for Fence Structures
ASTM F 567 (2007) Standard Practice for Installation

of Chain Link Fence
ASTM F 626 (2008) Standard Specification for Fence

Fittings
ASTM F 883 (2009) Padlocks
FS RR-F-191 (Rev K) Fencing, Wire and Post Metal (and

Gates, Chain-Link Fence Fabric, and
Accessories)
FS RR-F-191/1 (Rev F) Fencing, Wire and Post, Metal

(Chain-Link Fence Fabric)
FS RR-F-191/3 (Rev E; Am 1) Fencing, Wire and Post,

Metal (Chain-Link Fence Posts, Top Rails
and Braces)
1.2 SUBMITTALS

SD-02 Shop Drawings
Fence Assembly; G, PO
Location of Gate, Corner, End, and Pull Posts; G, PO
Gate Assembly; G, PO
Gate Hardware and Accessories; G, PO
Erection/Installation Drawings; G, PO
SD-03 Product Data
Recycled Material Content; G, PO
Zinc Coating; G, PO
PVC Coating; G, PO
Aluminum Alloy Coating; G, PO
Fabric; G, PO
Stretcher Bars; G, PO
Concrete; G, PO
SD-04 Samples
Fabric; G, PO
Posts; G, PO
Braces; G, PO
Line Posts; G, PO
Sleeves; G, PO
Top Rail; G, PO
Tension Wire; G, PO
Stretcher Bars; G, PO
Gate Posts; G, PO
Padlocks; G, PO
Wire Ties; G, PO
SD-07 Certificates
Certificates of Compliance; G, PO
Hardware Assembly; G, PO
Accessories; G, PO
1.3 ASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
Submit manufacturer's erection/installation drawings and instructions that

detail proper assembly and materials in the design for fence, gate,
hardware and accessories.
Submit erection/installation drawings along with manufacturer's catalog

data for complete fence assembly, gate assembly, hardware assembly and
accessories.
Deliver materials to site in an undamaged condition. Store materials off

the ground to provide protection against oxidation caused by ground contact.
1.5.1 Required Report Data
Submit reports of listing of chain-link fencing and accessories regarding

weight in ounces for zinc coating, and chemical composition and thickness
of aluminum alloy coating.
1.5.2 Certificates of Compliance
Submit certificates of compliance in accordance with the applicable
reference standards and descriptions of this section for the following:
a. Zinc coating
b. PVC coating
c. Aluminum alloy coating
d. Fabric
e. Stretcher bars
f. Gate hardware and accessories
g. Concrete
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
Provide fencing materials conforming to the requirements of ASTM A 116,

ASTM A 702, ASTM F 626, and as specified.
Submit manufacturer's data indicating percentage of recycled material

content in protective fence materials, including chain link fence, fabric,
and gates to verify affirmative procurement compliance.
2.2 ZINC COATING
Provide hot-dip galvanized (after fabrication) ferrous-metal components and

accessories, except as otherwise specified.
Provide zinc coating of weight not less than 1.94 ounces per square foot,
as determined from the average result of two specimens, when tested in
accordance with ASTM A 90/A 90M.
Provide zinc coating conforming to the requirements of the following:
a. Pipe: FS RR-F-191/3 Class 1 Grade A in accordance with ASTM F 1083 .
b. Hardware and accessories: ASTM A 153/A 153M, Table 1
c. Surface: ASTM F 1043
d. External: Type B-B surface zinc with organic coating, 0.97 ounce per
square foot minimum thickness of acrylated polymer.
e. Internal: Surface zinc coating of 0.97 ounce per square foot minimum.
Provide galvanizing repair material that is cold-applied zinc-rich coating

conforming to ASTM A 780/A 780M.
2.3 FABRIC
FS RR-F-191 and detailed specifications as referenced and other

requirements as specified.
FS RR-F-191/1; Type . Mesh size, 2 inches. Provide selvage . Height of

fabric, as indicated.
Provide fabric consisting of No. 9-gage wires woven into a 2-inch diamond
mesh, with dimensions of fabric and wire conforming to ASTM A 116,
ASTM A 702 and ASTM F 626, with 2.0 ounces per square foot zinc galvanizing.
Provide one-piece fabric widths for fence heights up to 12 feet.
2.4 TOP AND BOTTOM SELVAGES
Provide knuckled selvages at top and bottom for fabric with 2 inch mesh and
up to 60 inches high, and if over 60 inches high, provide twisted and
barbed top selvage and knuckled bottom selvage.
Knuckle top and bottom selvages for 1-3/4-inch and 1-inch mesh fabric.
2.5 LINE POSTS
Minimum acceptable line posts are as follows:
Up to 6-feet high:
Grade A: 1.900 inch O.D. pipe weighing 2.72 pounds per linear foot.
Grade B: 2.375 inch O.D. pipe weighing 3.12 pounds per linear foot.
Over 6-feet high:
2.0 inch O.D. pipe weighing 3.65 pounds per linear foot.
2.6 END, CORNER, AND PULL POSTS
Provide minimally acceptable end, corner, and pull posts as follows:
Up to 6 feet high:
Over 6 feet high:
2.7 SLEEVES
Provide sleeves for setting into concrete construction of the same material
as post sections, sized 1-inch greater than the diameter or dimension of
the post. Weld flat plates to each sleeve base to provide anchorage and
prevent intrusion of concrete.
2.8 TOP RAIL
Provide a minimum of 1.660 inches O.D. pipe rails.Grade A weighing 2.27

pounds per linear foot. Provide expansion couplings 6-inches long at each
joint in top rails.
2.9 CENTER RAILS BETWEEN LINE POSTS
For fencing over 6-feet high, provide 1.660 inches O.D. pipe center rails,
Grade A weighing 2.27 pounds per linear foot
2.10 POST-BRACE ASSEMBLY
Provide bracing consisting of 1.660 inches O.D. pipe Grade A weighing 2.27
pounds per linear foot and 3/8 inch adjustable truss rods and turnbuckles.
2.11 TENSION WIRE
Provide galvanized wire, No. 7-gage, coiled spring wire, provided at the
bottom of the fabric only. Provide zinc coating that weighs not less than
2.0 ounces per square foot.
2.12 STRETCHER BARS
Provide bars that have one-piece lengths equal to the full height of the
fabric with a minimum cross section of 3/16 by 3/4 inch, in accordance with
ASTM A 116, ASTM A 702 and ASTM F 626.
2.13 POST TOPS
Provide tops that are steel, wrought iron, or malleable iron designed as a
weathertight closure cap. Provide one cap for each post, unless equal
protection is provided by a combination post-cap and barbed-wire supporting
arm. Provide caps with an opening to permit through passage of the top
rail.
2.14 STRETCHER BAR BANDS
Provide bar bands for securing stretcher bars to posts that are steel,
wrought iron, or malleable iron spaced not over 15 inches on center. Bands
may also be used in conjunction with special fittings for securing rails to
posts. Provide bands with projecting edges chamfered or eased.
2.15 GATE POSTS
Provide a gate post for supporting each gate leaf as follows:
Over 6 feet wide and up to 13 feet wide:
2.875 inch O.D. pipe Grade A weighing 5.79 pounds per linear foot.
2.16 GATES
For gate leaves over 6 feet high or 6 feet wide, provide perimeter gate
frames of 1.90 inch O.D. pipe Grade A weighing 2.72 pounds per linear foot.
Provide gate frame assembly that is welded or assembled with special

malleable or pressed-steel fittings and rivets to provide rigid
connections. Install fabric with stretcher bars at vertical edges;
stretcher bars may also be used at top and bottom edges. Attach stretcher
bars and fabric to gate frames on all sides at intervals not exceeding 15
inches. Attach hardware with rivets or by other means which provides equal
security against breakage or removal.
Provide diagonal cross-bracing, consisting of 3/8-inch diameter

adjustable-length truss rods on welded gate frames, where necessary to
obtain frame rigidity without sag or twist. Provide nonwelded gate frames
with diagonal bracing.
2.17 GATE HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES
Provide gate hardware and accessories that conforms to ASTM A 116,

ASTM A 702, ASTM F 626, and be as specified:
Provide forged steelor pressed steel hinges to suit gate size, non-lift-off
type, offset to permit 180-degree opening.
Provide latch that permits operation from either side of the gate, with
a padlock eye provided as an integral part of the latch.
Provide stops and holders of malleable iron for vehicular gates.

Provide stops that automatically engage the gate and hold it in the
open position until manually released.
Provide double gates with a cane bolt and ground-set keeper, with latch or
locking device and padlock eye designed as an integral part.
2.18 MISCELLANEOUS HARDWARE
Provide miscellaneous hot-dip galvanized hardware as required.
2.19 WIRE TIES
Provide 16-gage galvanized steel wire for tying fabric to line posts,spaced
12 inches on center. For tying fabric to rails and braces, space wire ties
24 inches on center. For tying fabric to tension wire, space 0.105-inch
hog rings 24 inches on center.
Manufacturer's standard procedure will be accepted if of equal strength and

durability.
2.20 CONCRETE
Provide concrete conforming to ASTM C 94/C 94M, and obtaining a minimum

28-day compressive strength of 3,000 psi.
2.21 GROUT
Provide grout of proportions one part portland cement to three parts clean,
well-graded sand and a minimum amount of water to produce a workable mix.
2.22 PADLOCKS
Provide padlocks conforming to ASTM F 883, with chain.
PART 3 EXECUTION
Provide complete installation conforming to ASTM F 567.
3.1 GENERAL
Ensure final grading and established elevations are complete prior to
commencing fence installation.
3.2 EXCAVATION
Provide excavations for post footings which are drilled holes in virgin or
compacted soil, of minimum sizes as indicated.
Space footings for line posts 10 feet on center maximum and at closer
intervals when indicated, with bottoms of the holes approximately 3-inches
below the bottoms of the posts. Set bottom of each post not less than 40
-inches below finished grade when in firm, undisturbed soil. Set posts
deeper, as required, in soft and problem soils and for heavy, lateral loads.
Uniformly spread soil from excavations adjacent to the fence line or on

areas of Government property, as directed.
When solid rock is encountered near the surface, drill into the rock at
least 12 inches for line posts and at least 18 inches for end, pull,
corner, and gate posts. Drill holes at least 1 inch greater in diameter
than the largest dimension of the placed post.
If solid rock is below the soil overburden, drill to the full depth
required except that penetration into rock need not exceed the minimum
depths specified above.
3.3 SETTING POSTS
Remove loose and foreign materials from holes and the soil moistened prior
to placing concrete.
Provide tops of footings that are trowel finished and sloped or domed to
shed water away from posts. Set hold-open devices, sleeves, and other
accessories in concrete.
Keep exposed concrete moist for at least 7 calendar days after placement or
cured with a membrane curing material, as approved.
Grout all posts set into sleeved holes in concrete with an approved
grouting material.
Maintain vertical alignment of posts set in concrete construction until

concrete has set.
3.3.1 Earth and Bedrock
Provide concrete bases of dimensions indicated except in bedrock. Compact

concrete to eliminate voids, and finish to a dome shape. In bedrock, set
posts with a minimum of 1 inch of grout around each post. Work grout into
hole to eliminate voids, and finish to a dome shape.
3.3.2 Concrete Slabs and Walls
Set posts into zinc-coated sleeves, set in concrete slab or wall, to a

minimum depth of 12 inches. Fill sleeve joint with lead, nonshrink grout,
or other approved material. Set posts for support of removable fence
sections into sleeves that provide a tight sliding joint and hold posts
aligned and plumb without use of lead or setting material.
3.3.3 Bracing
Brace gate, corner, end, and pull posts to nearest post with a horizontal
brace used as a compression member, placed at least 12 inches below top of
fence, and a diagonal tension rod.
3.4 CONCRETE STRENGTH
Provide concrete that has attained at least 75 percent of its minimum

28-day compressive strength, but in no case sooner than 7 calendar days
after placement, before rails, tension wire, or fabric are installed. Do
not stretch fabric and wires or hang gates until the concrete has attained
its full design strength.
Take samples and test concrete to determine strength as specified.
3.5 TOP RAILS
Provide top rails that run continuously through post caps or extension
arms, bending to radius for curved runs. Provide expansion couplings as
recommended by the fencing manufacturer.
3.6 BRACE ASSEMBLY
Provide bracing assemblies at end and gate posts and at both sides of
corner and pull posts, with the horizontal brace located at midheight of
the fabric.
Install brace assemblies so posts are plumb when the diagonal rod is under
proper tension.
Provide two complete brace assemblies at corner and pull posts where
required for stiffness and as indicated.
3.7 TENSION WIRE INSTALLATION
Install tension wire by weaving them through the fabric and tying them to
each post with not less than 7-gage galvanized wire or by securing the wire
to the fabric with 10-gage ties or clips spaced 24 inches on center.
3.8 FABRIC INSTALLATION
Provide fabric in single lengths between stretch bars with bottom barbs
placed approximately 1-1/2-inches above the ground line. Pull fabric taut
and tied to posts, rails, and tension wire with wire ties and bands.
Install fabric on the security side of fence, unless otherwise directed.
Ensure fabric remains under tension after the pulling force is released.
3.9 STRETCHER BAR INSTALLATION
Thread stretcher bars through or clamped to fabric 4 inches on center and

secured to posts with metal bands spaced 15 inches on center.
3.10 GATE INSTALLATION
Install gates plumb, level, and secure, with full opening without
interference. Install ground set items in concrete for anchorage as
recommended by the fence manufacturer. Adjust hardware for smooth

operation and lubricated where necessary.
3.11 TIE WIRES
Provide tie wires that are U-shaped to the pipe diameters to which
attached. Twist ends of tie wires not less than two full turns and bent so
as not to present a hazard.
3.12 FASTENERS
Install nuts for tension bands and hardware on the side of the fence
opposite the fabric side. Peen ends of bolts to prevent removal of nuts.
3.13 ZINC-COATING REPAIR
Clean and repair galvanized surfaces damaged by welding or abrasion, and

cut ends of fabric, or other cut sections with specified galvanizing repair
material applied in strict conformance with the manufacturer's printed
instructions.
3.14 TOLERANCES
Provide posts that are straight and plumb within a vertical tolerance of
1/4 inch after the fabric has been stretched. Provide fencing and gates
that are true to line with no more than 1/2 inch deviation from the
established centerline between line posts. Repair defects as directed.
3.15 SITE PREPARATION
3.15.1 Clearing and Grading
Clear fence line of trees, brush, and other obstacles to install fencing.
Establish a graded, compacted fence line prior to fencing installation.
3.16 FENCE INSTALLATION
Install fence on prepared surfaces to line and grade indicated. Install

fence in accordance with fence manufacturer's written installation
instructions except as modified herein.
3.16.1 Post Spacing
Provide line posts spaced equidistantly apart, not exceeding 10 feeton

center. Provide gate posts spaced as necessary for size of gate openings.
Do not exceed 500 feet on straight runs between braced posts. Provide
corner or pull posts, with bracing in both directions, for changes in
direction of 15 degrees or more, or for abrupt changes in grade. Provide
drawings showing location of gate, corner, end, and pull posts.
3.16.2 Top and Bottom Tension Wire
Install top and bottom tension wires before installing chain-link fabric,
and pull wires taut. Place top and bottom tension wires within 8 inches of
respective fabric line.
3.17 ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION
3.17.1 Post Caps
Install post caps as recommended by the manufacturer.
3.17.2 Padlocks
Provide padlocks for gate openings and provide chains that are securely
attached to gate or gate posts. Provide padlocks keyed alike, and provide
two keys for each padlock.
3.18 GROUNDING
Ground fencing as indicated on drawings.
Ground all fences crossed by overhead powerlines in excess of 600 volts,

and all electrical equipment attached to the fence. Ground fences on each
side of all gates, at each corner, at the closest approach to each building
located within 50 feet of the fence, and where the fence alignment changes
more than 15 degrees. Grounding locations can not exceed 650 feet. Bond
each gate panel with a flexible bond strap to its gate post. Ground fences
crossed by powerlines of 600 volts or more at or near the point of crossing
and at distances not exceeding 150 feet on each side of crossing. Provide
ground conductor consisting of No. 8 AWG solid copper wire. Provide
copper-clad steel rod grounding electrodes 3/4 inch by 10 foot long.
Drive electrodes into the earth so that the top of the electrode is at least
6 inches below the grade. Where driving is impracticable, bury electrodes
a minimum of 12 inches deep and radially from the fence, with top of the
electrode not less than 2 feet or more than 8 feet from the fence. Clamp
ground conductor to the fence and electrodes with bronze grounding clamps
to create electrical continuity between fence posts, fence fabric, and
ground rods. Total resistance of the fence to ground cannot exceed 25 ohms
3.19 CLEANUP
Remove waste fencing materials and other debris from the work site.
SECTION 32 91 19.00 44
TOPSOILING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES (NOT APPLICABLE)
1.2 SUBMITTALS

Construction Equipment List.
The Contractor shall furnish a list and description of the

equipment that is proposed for handling and placing all topsoil.
Sources; G,EC-DC.
The Contractor shall notify the Contracting Officer for approval,

in writing, the source(s) of the topsoil.
SD-07 Certificates
Topsoil; G,EC-DC.
The Contractor shall furnish a certificate of compliance and

analysis certifying that the topsoil proposed for use at the
project site conforms to the specified requirements.
1.3 INSPECTION
Not less than 5 days prior to the commencement of topsoiling operations,

the Contracting Officer shall be notified of the offsite sources from which
topsoil is to be furnished. The material will be inspected to determine
whether the selected topsoil meets the requirements. The topsoil shall be
approved prior to use.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 TOPSOIL
All topsoil necessary to complete the work shall be obtained from topsoil
stockpiles from grading and excavating operations or from approved topsoil
sources off of Government controlled property. Topsoil from approved
sources and stockpiled topsoil shall be natural, friable, topsoil
characteristic of representative soils in the vicinity that produce heavy
growths of crops, grass, or other vegetation. Topsoil shall be free from
SECTION 32 91 19.00 44 Page 1

tree roots, stones, shale, parent and other materials that hinder grading,
planting, plant growth and maintenance operations, and free from noxious
and other objectionable weed seeds and toxic substances.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
Graded areas shall be topsoiled where it is determined by the Contracting

Officer that at least 4 inches of suitable soil for the growth of grass is
not present. Equipment necessary for handling and placing all materials
required shall be on hand, in good condition and shall be approved before
the work is started. Grades on the areas to be topsoiled are shown on the
drawings and shall be maintained in a true and even condition.
3.2 TILLAGE
Immediately prior to dumping and spreading the topsoil, the subgrade shall
be double tilled to a depth of 2 inches using a chisel plow with the 1
chisels set not more than 10 inches apart. Tillage shall be accomplished
across the slope.
3.3 OBTAINING TOPSOIL
After inspection and approval of the source of topsoil and Construction

Equipment List, and prior to stripping, rank growths of vegetation, stones,
or debris on the surface that might interfere with grading or later tillage
operations shall be removed. Sod or other cover that cannot be disked or
otherwise incorporated into the topsoil so that the topsoil can be spread
properly shall be removed. Topsoil shall be removed to the depth specified
by the Contracting Officer. Borrow areas shall be neatly trimmed and
drained after borrow excavations are completed.
3.4 PLACING TOPSOIL
Topsoil shall be uniformly distributed and evenly spread to an average

thickness of 4 inches, with a minimum thickness of 3 inches. Topsoil
shall be spread so that planting can proceed with little additional soil
preparation or tillage. Surface irregularities resulting from topsoiling
or other operations shall be leveled to prevent depressions. The grades
shall be adjusted to assure that the planted grade shall be 1 inch below
the adjoining grade of any surfaced area. Topsoil shall not be placed when
the subgrade is frozen, excessively wet or compacted, extremely dry, or in
a condition detrimental to the proposed planting or grading.
3.5 CLEANUP
Prior to topsoiling, vegetation that may interfere with operations shall be

mowed, grubbed, and raked. The collected material shall be removed from
the site. The surface shall be cleaned of stumps, and stones larger than 1
inch in diameter, and roots, cable, wire and other materials that might
hinder the work or subsequent maintenance shall also be removed.
3.6 REPAIR
Where any portion of the surfaces becomes gullied or otherwise damaged, the
affected area shall be repaired to establish the condition and grade prior
to topsoiling, and then shall be re-topsoiled as specified in paragraph
"PLACING TOPSOIL."
SECTION 32 91 19.00 44 Page 2

SECTION 32 91 19.00 44 Page 3

SECTION 32 92 31.00 44
ESTABLISHMENT OF TURF
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUBMITTALS

Sources; G,EC-DC.
The Contractor shall notify the Contracting Officer for approval,

in writing, the sources from which the following materials will be
furnished:
Sod
Seed
Spiggs
Mulch
Soil
Compost
SD-06 Test Reports
Seed ;GEC-DC.
Test reports of samples of seed shall be signed and certified by

the testing laboratory. Testing laboratories used by the
Contractor shall be approved by the Contracting Officer.
SD-07 Certificates
Signed, certified copies of the following reports shall be

submitted:
Seed; GEC-DC.
The Contracting Officer shall be furnished signed copies of

certificates from the seed vendor, certifying that each container
of seed delivered is labeled in accordance with Federal Seed Act
and is at least equal to requirements specified. This
certification shall be obtained from the vendor and shall be
furnished on or with all copies of seed invoices. Invoices shall
be obtained from the vendor.
Sprigs; GEC-DC.
SECTION 32 92 31.00 44 Page 1

The Contracting Officer shall be furnished signed copies of

certificates from the sprig vendor, certifying that each plant is
in accordance with Turfgrass Producers International Guideline
Specification to Turfgrass Sodding. This certification shall be
obtained from the vendor and shall be furnished on or with all
copies of sprig invoices. Invoices shall be obtained from the
vendor.
Official Seed Analysis or Official Seed Tags;G,EC-DC.
Obtained from the vendor. The official seed analysis or the

official seed tags shall be furnished with all copies of the seed
invoices.
Official Sprig Nursery Sod Farm Certification Tags;G,EC-DC.
Obtained from the vendor. The official official sprig tags shall
be furnished with all copies of the sprig invoices.
1.2 INSPECTION AND TESTS
1.2.1 Seed
Each lot of seed may be sampled and tested in accordance with latest USDA
Rules and Regulations under the Federal Seed Act at the discretion of the
Contracting Officer. Such sampling and testing shall be made by or under
the supervision of the Government. If these tests reveal the seed to be
below the specified pure live seed content, the Contractor shall be
required to plant additional seed to compensate for the deficiency at no
additional cost to the Government. The seed test will be conducted by the
State Seed Laboratory.
1.2.2 Sod
Not less than five days prior to commencement of sodding operations, the
Contracting Officer shall be notified of the off-site sources from which
sod is to be furnished. Sod shall be inspected prior to and during laying
operations; sod that fails to meet requirements shall be rejected.
Rejected material, if suitable, may be pulverized and used for filling.
The average thickness of the sod will be determined at the sodding site as
follows: 11 random sods will be stacked on a flat surface; the thickness
from the base of the bottom sod to the base of the top sod will be
measured, and that thickness divided by 10.
1.2.3 Sprigs
Not less than five days prior to commencement of sprigging operations, the
Contracting Officer shall be notified of the off-site sources from which
sprigs are to be furnished. Sprigs shall be inspected prior to and during
laying operations; sprigs that fails to meet requirements shall be
rejected. Rejected material, if suitable, may be pulverized and used for
filling. Health living stems, stolons,or rhizomes and attached roots of
locally adapted grass without adhering soil, including two to three nodes
that are 4 to 6 inches long.
SECTION 32 92 31.00 44 Page 2

1.3 PAYMENT
No payment or partial payment will be made for work covered by this section
of the specifications until all portions of this section, including
maintenance of turfing work, are adequately performed and accepted, as
determined by the Contracting Officer.
1.4.1 Delivery
1.4.1.1 Seed
Seed shall be furnished in sealed, standard containers with the Official

Seed Analysis or Official Seed Tags unless written exception is granted.
1.4.2 Storage
1.4.2.1 Storage Area
Materials shall be stored in areas designated by the Contracting Officer.
1.4.2.2 Seed
Seed shall be stored in dry locations away from contaminants.
1.4.2.3 Sod
Sod shall be lightly sprinkled with water, covered with moist burlap, straw
or other covering; and protected from exposure to wind and direct sunlight
until planted. Covering shall be provided that will allow air to circulate
and prevent internal heat from building up. Do not store sod longer than 24
hours. Do not store directly on concrete or bituminous surfaces.
1.4.2.4 Sprigs
Sprigs shall be lightly sprinkled with water, covered with moist burlap,
straw or other approved covering; and protected from exposure to wind and
direct sunlight until planted. Provide covering that will allow air to
circulate and prevent internal heat from building up. Do not store sprigs
longer than 24 hours. Do not store directly on concrete or bituminous
surfaces.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
2.1.1 Seed
Seed labeled in accordance with USDA Rules and Regulations under the
Federal Seed Act shall be furnished. Seed that is wet or moldy or that has
been otherwise damaged in transit or storage will not be acceptable. The
seed shall be free of field bindweed, hedgeweed, and nutgrass seed. Seed
shall not contain other noxious weed seed in excess of the limits allowable
under the Federal Seed Act and applicable State seed laws. Seed labeled
as mixture or pasture mixture will not be acceptable. Common Bermudagrass
seed shall not contain in excess of 3 percent of giant strains of
Bermudagrass. Each seed container shall bear the date of the last
germination which date shall be within a period of six months prior to
commencement of planting operations.
SECTION 32 92 31.00 44 Page 3

2.1.2 Erosion Control Matting
Erosion control matting shall be made of biodegradeable straw fiber
2.1.3 Sod
Sod containing a dense cover of growing or living grass shall be provided.

Living grass is defined as grass that is seasonably dormant during a cold
or dry season and capable of renewing growth after the dormant period. At
least 90 percent of the plants in the sod shall be Buffalo grass(Buchloe
dactyloides. Sod shall be procured from areas having growing conditions
similar to those areas on which the sod is to be used. Sod shall be
furnished that is free of noxious weeds and undesirable plants, stones,
roots of trees, and other materials that hinder the development and
maintenance of sod. Vegetation more than three inches in height shall be
cut to two inches or less, and hay and other loose materials on the surface
shall be removed at least 5 days before the sod is lifted. Sod shall be
procured from areas containing clay or clay loam topsoil. Sod shall have
such density that when it is cut in strips one foot wide, it can be lifted
and handled without breaking. When the sod is cut, the height of the grass
shall not exceed two inches. Sod shall be cut with an approved sod cutter
to provide an average thickness of 1-1/2 inches. All sod shall be
furnished by the Contractor from approved sources off the site.
2.1.6 Sprigs
Sprigs grown under climatic conditions simular to those in the locality of

the project shall be provided. Coordinate harvesting and planting
operations to prevent exposure of sprigs to the sun for more than before
covering and moistening. Sprigs containing weeds, or other detrimental
material, or damaged by the sun will be rejected. All sprigs shall be
furnished by the Contractor and come from approved off site sources.
2.1.4 Mulch
Acceptable mulch shall be hardwood wood bark mulch. Wood bark mulch shall
be a natural product. The bark shall be manufactured for the use of plant
mulch and shall be free from weed, seed, plant diseases and insects.
Discolored weathered, brittle mulch will not be acceptable.
2.1.5 Water
Water shall be free from oil, acid, alkali, salt, and other substances
harmful to growth of grass, and shall be from sources approved prior to use.
2.1.6 Compost
Contractor shall provide compost that has been produced by aerobic

(biological) decomposition of organic matter through static pile composting .
70% of the compost should pass through a 3/8" sieve. (Sieving for
aggregate size classification) Compost must have high water and nutrient
holding capacity with no nutrient draw down. Compost may include leaves,
yard trimmings, biosolids, food scraps, food -processing residuals, manure,
forest residues, and bark. Compost shall be agricultural grade free of
trash and any visual refuse. Compost shall not contain materials that have
been treated with chemical preservatives. Municipal solid waste compost is
not acceptable. Acceptable compost shall meet all applicable 40 CFR 503
Requirements standards for Class A biosolids, Louisiana Department of
Environmental Quality and the United States Composting Council (USCC) Seal
SECTION 32 92 31.00 44 Page 4

of Testing Assurance (STA) program.
Prior to delivery, contractor shall submit documentation the following

documentation:
a. the amount of feed stock by percentage in the final product
b. a statement that the compost meets federal and state health

and safety regulations
c. a statement that the composting process has met the required

time and temperature
d. a copy of the producer's STA certification
e. a copy of the lab analysis, performed by as STA-certified lab

stating the compost meets all applicable 40 CFR 503 Requirements
for biosolids.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
The turfing work shall be accomplished only when satisfactory results can
be expected. When conditions such as drought, excessive moisture, high
winds, or other factors prevail to such an extent that satisfactory results
are not likely to be obtained the Contracting Officer may, at his own
discretion, stop any phase of the work. Planting operations are most
favorable when the soil is pliable, usually 24-48 hours after an average
rainfall. The work shall be resumed only when, in the opinion of the
Contracting Officer, the desired results are likely to be obtained. All
turfing operations shall be conducted across the slope. Establishment of
turf shall be accomplished on all unpaved graded and disturbed areas that
are the result of the Contractor's operations. Hydromulching will not be
accepted.
3.1.1 Extent of Work
Provide soil preparation (including soil conditioners), fertilizing, and

surface topdressing of all newly graded finished earth surfaces, unless
indicated otherwise, and at all areas inside or outside the limits of
construction that are disturbed by the Contractor's operations.
3.1.2 Soil Preparation
All areas to get Turf or Ground cover shall receive 4 inches of topsoil
and 2 inches of compost. The contractor shall provide a clean site prior to
placing any topsoil or compost. All construction debris and trash shall be
removed prior to beginning work. Excess construction soils and stone or
rock shall also be removed prior to starting topsoiling and composting
operations. Provide 3 inches of off-site topsoil and 3 inches of off-site
certified compost to meet indicated finish grade. After placing topsoil
contractor will place the compost. The compost shall be blended with the
topsoil after these areas have been brought to grade. The contractor shall
make allowences for settling when preparing the beds and turf areas. Remove
debris and stones larger than 1 inch in any dimension remaining on the
surface after tillage. Correct irregularities in finish surfaces to
SECTION 32 92 31.00 44 Page 5

eliminate depressions. All finish grades are to remain consistent with

grading plan. The contractor shall maintain positive drainage away from all
buildings, structures and walls. Protect finished topsoil areas from damage
by vehicular or pedestrian traffic.
3.2 PLANTING SEASON
The planting season for Bermuda grass sod turf work shall be from 1 April to
15 August; after soil temperatures are 70 to 80 degrees fahrenheith and 90
days before the first frost. Planting shall be accomplished during the
first planting season, or portion thereof (but not less than 15 days),
following substantial completion of building construction. Turfing work for
all phases of this contract shall be accomplished within that period.
The planting season for Bio-Retention Basin Sprigging shall be from 15

Febuary through 30 April for spring Planting and 1 October to November 30
for fall planting. Planting shall be accomplished during the first planting
season, or portion thereof (but not less than 15 days), following
substantial completion of building construction.
3.3 SEQUENCE OF TURFING
Turfing operations for sod shall be performed in the following sequence;

prepare ground surface, install solid-sod Common Bermudagrass, water.
3.4 PREPARATION OF GROUND SURFACE
3.4.1 General
Equipment, in good condition, shall be provided for the proper preparation

of the ground. Equipment shall be subject to approval before work is
started.
3.4.2 Clearing
Prior to grading and tilling, vegetation that may interfere with operations
shall be mowed, grubbed, and raked. The collected material shall be
removed from the site. The surface shall be cleared of stumps, and stones
larger than 1 inch in diameter, and roots, cable, wire, and other
materials that might hinder the work or subsequent maintenance shall also
be removed.
3.4.3 Grading
Previously established grades shall be maintained on the areas to be

treated in a true and even condition, and necessary repairs shall be made
to previously graded areas. All surfaces shall be left in a smooth
condition to prevent formation of depressions. Areas having inadequate
drainage as indicated by the ponding of water near foundations, walks,
driveways, or on other areas shall be filled or graded to drain as directed
by the Contracting Officer. Ruts, deep tracks, dead furrows, and ridges
shall be eliminated and the necessary replanting accomplished prior to
acceptance of the completed work. The finished grade shall be such that
after the various turfing operations, the planted grade will be 1 inch
below the adjacent surfaced grade of walks, drives, and curbs.
3.4.4 Tillage
After the areas have been brought to the grades shown, tillage shall be
SECTION 32 92 31.00 44 Page 6

accomplished in such manner as to destroy existing vegetation. The

Contractor shall utilize tractors with adequate horsepower and heavy duty
tillage equipment in accomplishing the specified tillage operations. All
areas shall be tilled with a heavy duty disk or chisel type breaking plow
followed by disking with a disk harrow, and smoothing with a weighted spike
tooth harrow, railroad irons, or bridge timber float drag. When a chisel
plow is used the chisels shall be set not to exceed 10 inches apart, and
the areas shall be cross or double tilled. Lawn areas shall be left smooth
for lawn purposes and other areas shall be left smooth for ease of mowing.
Depth of tillage shall be 4 inches.
3.5 SODDING
3.5.1 Obtaining and Handling Sod
After inspection and approval of the source of sod, the sod shall be cut
into squares or rectangular sections, exercising care to retain the native
soil on the roots of the sod during stripping, transporting, and planting.
Sod shall be transplanted within 24 hours after the sod is stripped, unless
stored in a satisfactory manner. If sod is stacked it shall be placed
roots to roots or grass to grass. Sod shall be kept moist during delivery
and while in stacks. Sod shall be protected from exposure to wind and sun
and from freezing. Sod shall be cut and moved only when the soil moisture
conditions are such that favorable results can be expected.
Rectangular sections of sod may vary in length but shall be of equal width
and of a size that permits the sod to be lifted and rolled without
breaking. Sod shall not be dumped from vehicles. When soil is too dry,
permission to cut sod will be granted only after the ground has been
watered sufficiently to moisten the ground to the depth to which sod is to
be cut. Damaged sod will be rejected. The sod shall be cut with an
approved sod cutter.
3.5.2 Placing Sod
Place sod a maximum of 36 hours after initial harvesting, in accordance

with TPI GSS as modified herein. Thoroughly moisten areas to be sodded
immediately prior to placing sod.
Sod shall be cut into blocks at least 4 inches square. The individual
pieces of sod shall be placed in a staggered formation providing solid
coverage over specified areas with the turf side up. The sod shall be
placed in holes or furrows which have been opened to a depth comparable to
the thickness of the sod. The sod shall be pressed firmly into the soil
with foot pressure or by tamping. The soil shall be filled in around the
sides of the sod by hand raking, leaving a smooth surface free of
undulations. In no case shall the top of the planted sod be covered with
soil except on the extreme outer edges. Within 8 hours after commencement
of the planting of the sod, the planted area shall be compacted with one or
more passes of a smooth surface steel roller weighing 160 pounds to 190
pounds per linear foot.
When authorized in writing, sodding may be performed during dry weather or

periods of drought, provided the area to be sodded is thoroughly watered to
a depth of at least 4 inches prior to placing sod.
3.6 PLANTING SEED
The Contractor shall conduct seeding equipment calibration tests in the
SECTION 32 92 31.00 44 Page 7

presence of the Contracting Officer as a means of determining the equipment

setting to plant the seed at the specified rates. If unplanted skips and
areas are noted after germination and growth of the grass, the Contractor
shall be required to seed the unplanted areas with the grass or grasses
that were to have been planted at no additional cost to the Government.
Seed boxes shall be kept at least half full during seeding operations to
insure even distribution of seed over all the areas seeded. Seeding
equipment operating on slopes shall be anchored, as required, to prevent
downward movement of the equipment and formation of ridges and ruts.
3.6.1 Seeding
The equipment to be used and the methods of planting shall be subject to

the inspection and approval of the Contracting Officer prior to
commencement of planting operations.
3.6.1.1 Seeding Rates
Distrubed Areasshall be planted at the rate of 25 poundsseed mix per acre.

The seed shall be planted using a Brillion seeder or approved equal. Depth
of planting the seed shall be 1/2 inch to 3/4 inch
Sodded areas shall be overseeded at the rate of 1 pound of turfing mix per
1000 square feet. The turfing mix for overseeding the buffalo sod should be
applied using a broadcast spreader capable of spreading the seeds at the
specified rate
3.6.2 Protection
3.7 PLANTING SPRIGS
The sprigging shall be by hand opperated equipment (manual operation).

Loosen root system before planting. Crown of sprig should sit 1" above
finished grade. Excavate 12" of soil with hand operated tool. Plant sprig.
Cover planted sprigs with excavated soil and hand set in soil to an upright
vertical position. Sprigging procedure shall ensure even coverage. Sprigs
shall be covered by distributing a top dressing of one quart container or
organic compost per plant uniformly and evenly around each plant to a
minimum 1 inch depth. Sprigs shall be planted in rows spaced a maxiumum of
12 inches apart.
3.7.1 Finishing
A minimum of 25 percent of the installed sprigs shall extend above the

ground surface upon completion to the sprigging operation.
3.7.2 Finishing
Immediately after sprigging is completed in the bio retention areas, the

spriged areas shall be protected against traffic or other use by erecting
barricades and by placing warning signs of a type approved by the
Contracting Officer. Such protective devices shall be maintained until
completion of all work under this contract.
SECTION 32 92 31.00 44 Page 8

3.8 INITIAL WATERING
If the soil is extremely dry prior to planting, watering of the areas 48 to

72 hours in advance of planting may be required, if deemed necessary by the
Contracting Officer. Water shall be applied using portable pipelines with
rotating sprinklers. The sprinklers shall not be spaced in excess of 40
feet apart. Small areas which are inaccessible with portable pipelines
will be watered with hoses and rotating sprinklers. Water shall be applied
to the planted areas at a rate sufficient to insure thorough wetting of the
soil to a depth of 4 inches over the entire planted area which will
usually require a minimum of 27,000 gallons per acre. The actual rate
will be determined by the Contracting Officer at the time of watering.
Watering operations shall be discontinued during and following effective
rains and resumed as directed by the Contracting Officer. Watering
operations shall be properly supervised to prevent run-off of water. The
Contractor shall supply all pumps, hoses, pipelines and sprinkling
equipment. The Contractor shall have adequate equipment available for
watering operations prior to commencement of planting operations. The
Contractor shall repair areas damaged by watering operations at no cost to
the Government. All water shall be kept free from oil, acids, alkali,
salts, and other substances harmful to the growth of grass.
3.9 MAINTENANCE OF TURFING WORK AND SPRIGGING OF BIO-RETENTION AREAS
The Contractor shall maintain all areas during the planting period and for
an additional period of not less than 12 months following completion of
planting operations. Maintenance shall consist of identification and
management of non-native invasive species, watering, replanting, mowing,
maintaining existing grades, and repair of erosion damage.
3.9.1 Stand
A stand shall be defined as the planted area achieving a uniform live grass
coverage having a density where the total bare spots do not exceed 2
percent of the total turfed area, bare spots are not larger than 12 inches
squarefor bio-retention basins, and the grass is of a height sufficient to
be capable of being mowed as specified in the mowing requirements contained
in this contract with the exception of the bioretention areas.
3.9.2 Watering
During the establishment period of the first 90 days after planting the
contractor shall provide temporary irrigation to water bio-retention areas
planted with native grass seeds as well as all turf areas. These areas
shall be watered daily for the first 30 days after planting, they shall
then be watered twice a week for the following 60 days. Water shall be
applied over the entire planted area until the soil is thoroughly wet to a
depth of four inches as determined by the Contracting Officer. During and
following effective rainfall, watering shall be discontinued but shall be
promptly resumed when directed by the Contracting Officer. Water shall be
applied using portable lines with rotating sprinklers on the larger areas
beyond the building and facilities. Spacing of the sprinklers shall not
exceed 40 feet along the lines. Hoses with rotating sprinklers may be
used for watering the smaller areas adjacent to the building.
SECTION 32 92 31.00 44 Page 9

3.9.3 Replanting
The bio-retention basin should germinate within at least 14 days from

planting. If, after that 14-day period a successful germination of a
potential stand of grass is not present, the sprigshall be replanted prior
to the end of the planting season, or within the next 7 days after the
14-day germination period if after the planting season specified in PART 3
paragraph PLANTING SEASON.
The sodded turf areas are expected to slightly change color after
installation but should turn green again within 30 days of planting. sodded
areas that appear dead after thirty days of planting shall be replanted and
overseeded repeating the process outlined in section
3.9.4 Maintenance of Grades and Repair of Erosion Damage
It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to maintain the original

grades of the planted areas after commencement of planting operations and
during the specified maintenance period. Damage to the finished surface
from Contractor's operations shall be promptly repaired. In the event
erosion occurs from either watering operations or from rainfall, such
damage shall be repaired within 10 days from the date of the noted damage.
Ruts, ridges, tracks, and other surface irregularities shall be corrected
and replanted where required prior to acceptance.
3.9.5 Mowing
Short term vegetation in bio-retention areas (growth within first 12

months) shall be cut by no more than 1/3 anytime to promote root growth and
discourage taller weed species. Long term vegetation (after area is well
established) should be mowed or burned once a year in January or February
while grasses are dormant. This will promote seasonal growth.
Bermuda grass turf areas shall be kept under control by mowing. Any time
that the weed or grass growth reaches a height of 4 inches, the areas
shall be mowed. Mowing shall be done with approved mowing machines in such
manner that will leave a vegetation height of between 2 inches and 2-1/2
inches.
3.9.6 Identification and management of non-native invasive species
he contractor shall identify and keep spriged bio-retention areas free of

species such as(Bermuda grass, King Ranch bluestem, Pigweed, tumbleweed,
cactus, mesquite trees, etc.)for the first 12 months of establishment
SECTION 32 92 31.00 44 Page 10

SECTION 32 93 31.00 44
PLANTING OF TREES, SHRUBS, AND VINES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

designation only.
ANSI Z60.1 (1990) Nursery Stock
AMERICAN JOINT COMMITTEE ON HORTICULTURAL NOMENCLATURE (AJCHN)
AJCHN-01 (1942, 2nd Ed.) Standard Plant Names
ASSOCIATION OF OFFICIAL ANALYTICAL CHEMISTS (AOAC)
AOAC-01 Official Methods of Analysis
COMMERCIAL ITEM DESCRIPTIONS (CID)
CID A-A-1909 (Basic; Notice 1; Canc. Notice 2)

Fertilizer
1.2 SUBMITTALS

SD-06 Test Reports
Hardwood Mulch; G,EC-DC.
Certified copies of the analysis of each type of hardwood mulch

used in the project, made by an approved, independent, recognized
laboratory in accordance with the current method of the AOAC-01.
Testing shall be at the Contractor's expense. Testing shall be
submitted for approval of the Contracting Officer before delivery
of the mulch.
SD-07 Certificates
The certificates listed below shall be submitted for approval

prior to commencement of work:
Fertilizer; G,EC-DC.
SECTION 32 93 31.00 44 Page 1

One certificate for each type to be used in the project.
Soil Amendments; G,EC-DC.
Certificates for each type of soil amendment.
Hardwood Mulch;G,EC-DC.
Certificates for hardwood mulch shall be submitted to the

Contracting Officer showing type, percent of organic matter,
origin, and the amount to be utilized on the project.
Woodbark Mulch; G,EC-DC.
Certificates shall list all information on the container label and

the amounts of each type to be used on the project.
Plant Materials; G,EC-DC.
All necessary inspection certificates shall accompany the invoice

for each shipment or order of stock, as may be required by law for
the necessary transportation, and such certificates shall be filed
with the Contracting Officer prior to acceptance of the materials.
1.3 INSPECTION
1.3.1 Plant Materials
All shipments or orders of plant material shall be properly inspected at

the nursery or at the site by the Authorized Federal and State authorities.
1.3.2 Topsoil
Off base sources of topsoil shall be inspected to determine the

acceptability of the topsoil, including the maximum depth to which it is to
be stripped.
1.4 DIGGING UP, WRAPPING, HANDLING AND DELIVERY
Plants shall be dug and prepared for shipment in a manner that will not
cause any damage to the branches, shape, root system, and future
development of the plants after replanting. Plants shall not be handled by
the trunk or stems. Damaged plants will be rejected and shall be removed
from the site.
1.4.1 Balled and Burlapped Plants
Balled and burlapped plants, designated BB in the list of required plants,

shall be adequately balled with firm natural balls of soil in sizes as
shown on the drawings. Balls shall be firmly wrapped with burlap or
substitute approved cloth. No balled plant shall be planted if the ball is
cracked, mushy, or broken, or if the stem is loose in the ball, either
before or during the process of planting. Balled plants shall be lifted
and handled from the bottom of the ball.
SECTION 32 93 31.00 44 Page 2

1.4.2 Bare-Root Plants
Plants designated "BR" in the plant list shall be dug with substantially
all of the root system intact, but with the earth carefully removed from
the roots. Minimum spread of roots and lengths of roots shall be in
conformance with the sizes shown on the drawings. The roots of these
plants shall be covered with a thick coating of mud by puddling immediately
after they are dug.
1.4.3 Container-Grown Plants
Container-grown plants, designated "C" in the list of required plants,

shall have been grown in cans. Plants shall have sufficient roots to hold
earth together intact after removal from containers without being rootbound.
1.4.4 Options as to Methods
If all other requirements are met, any plant other than trees (unless
otherwise indicated on the drawings) may be furnished container-grown
instead of balled and burlapped. Any substitutions shall be made only with
approval of the Contracting Officer at no change in the contract price.
1.4.4 Shipment and Delivery
The Contractor shall promptly notify the Contracting Officer, in advance,

when the plant material will be delivered and the manner of shipment. The
Contractor shall furnish an itemized list, in duplicate, of the actual
quantity of plant material in each delivery, in order to insure
satisfactory coordination of delivery and to expedite the required
inspection at the point of delivery. The itemized list of the plant
material for each delivery shall include the pertinent data as specified in
the list of required plants. This list and the necessary inspection
certificates to accompany each plant or shipment shall be delivered to the
Contracting Officer, prior to acceptance and planting of the plant material.
1.4.4.1 Protection During Delivery
Plants shall be protected during delivery to prevent damage to the root

balls or desiccation of leaves. Trees shall be protected during
transportation by tying in the branches and covering all exposed branches.
When shipment is made by truck, all plant material shall be packed to
provide adequate protection against climatic, seasonal, and breakage
injuries during transit. The tops shall be securely covered with tarpaulin
or canvas to minimize wind-whipping and drying. When shipment is made by
rail, box cars shall be carefully packed and adequately ventilated to
prevent sweating of the plants during transit. Shipments made by rail to
local or nearby freight yards shall be given special attention to insure
prompt delivery and careful handling therefrom to the point of final
delivery at the planting jobsite. Under no circumstances shall balled
plants be dropped from box cars or trucks to the ground. A suitable method
of handling shall be employed to preclude cracked or mushroomed plant balls
at the point of delivery.
1.4.4.2 Inspection Upon Arrival
Plant material shall be inspected upon arrival at the jobsite. Unacceptable

plant material shall be removed from the jobsite.
SECTION 32 93 31.00 44 Page 3

1.4.4.3 Commercial Fertilizer
Commercial fertilizer shall be delivered to the site in unopened original

containers, each fully labeled, conforming to the applicable State
fertilizer laws and bearing the trade name or trademark and warranty of the
producer. Each sack shall bear the manufacturer's statement of analysis,
indicating the percentages of available nitrogen, available phosphoric
acid, and potash.
1.4.4.4 Soil Amendments
Soil amendments shall be delivered to the site in the original, unopened

containers bearing the manufacturer's guaranteed chemical analysis and
name. In lieu of containers, soil amendments may be furnished in bulk and
a certificate from the manufacturer indicating the above information shall
accompany each delivery.
1.4.4.5 Mulch
Mulch shall be delivered to the jobsite in unopened bags or in unbroken

bales. Woodbark Mulch shall be delivered to the site in unopened
containers and shall be fully labeled.
1.4.5 Protection Against Freezing and Drying Out
1.4.5.1 Plant Storage
Care shall be taken to avoid drying or damaging plants being moved from the
nursery or storage area to the planting site. All plants shall be handled
so that roots are adequately protected at all times from drying out and
from other injury. Balled and burlapped plants shall be handled carefully
to avoid cracking or breaking the earth ball. The balls of balled plants
that cannot be planted immediately on delivery shall be well protected with
soil or other acceptable material. The Contractor shall safeguard the
unplanted plants during freezing weather by inside storage and other
precautionary measures. Bare root plants shall be heeled out with roots
completely covered with wet soil or other approved material immediately
upon delivery.
1.4.5.2 Storage of Other Materials
Soil amendments shall be kept in dry storage away from contaminants.

Storage of materials shall be in areas designated or as approved by the
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PLANTS REQUIRED
The species (scientific and common names), size, and manner in which to be
furnished, are given in the plant list shown on the drawings.
2.1.1 Substitutions
Plants of kinds other than those named in plant list will not be accepted
unless specifically approved in writing by the Contracting Officer.
Proposed substitutes, in each case, must possess the same essential
characteristics as the kind of plant actually specified in regard to
appearance, ultimate height, shape, habit of growth, general soil and other
SECTION 32 93 31.00 44 Page 4

requirements. In no case shall the average cost and value of substituted

plants be less than the cost and value of plants actually specified.
Plants of greater value may be accepted without additional cost to the
Government.
2.2 PLANT MATERIALS
All plant material furnished shall be nursery-grown, well branched,

full-foliaged, and well proportioned, particularly with respect to the
width-height relationship, and shall have a fibrous root system. The
Government may inspect plants at place of growth, but such inspection shall
not preclude the right of rejection at the site.
2.2.1 Nomenclature
The scientific and common names of plants herein specified or shown on the
drawings conform with the approved names given in AJCHN-01, Standard Plant
Names, except that where local usage does not follow this standard, the
accepted local names are given in parentheses.
2.2.2 Plant Material Labels
For the purpose of inspection and plant identification, durable, legible

labels stating in weather-resistant ink the correct plant name and size, as
specified in the list of required plants, shall be securely attached to all
plants, bundles, and containers of plant material delivered at the planting
site.
2.2.3 Quality and Size
Quality and size of plants shall be in accordance with rules and grading
adopted by the American Association of Nurserymen, Inc., and included in
ANSI Z60.1. All plants shall be of excellent quality and have a normal
habit of growth and shall be sound, healthy, vigorous, and free from
disease and insect infestations, and damage. Trees shall have single
straight trunks unless otherwise specified. Any tree with weak thin trunk
not capable of supporting itself when planted in the open will not be
accepted. The minimum acceptable sizes of all plants, measured before
pruning, with branches in normal position, shall conform to the
measurements specified hereinafter in the list of required plants. Plants
larger in size than specified may be used with the approval of the
Contracting Officer, but the use of larger plants will make no change in
contract price. If the use of larger plants is approved, the ball of earth
or spread of roots shall be increased proportionately.
2.3 BURLAP
Burlap shall be made of jute and shall weigh not less than (7.2 ounces per
square yard) 7.2 ounces per square yard. Substitute cloth shall possess an
equal strength and resistance to tearing.
2.4 COMMERCIAL FERTILIZER
Fertilizer shall be commercial grade, free flowing, uniform in composition

and conforming to CID A-A-1909.
2.4.1 Dry Fertilizer
a. Granular fertilizer
SECTION 32 93 31.00 44 Page 5

Consists of nitrogen-phosphorous-potassium ratio: 6% percent nitrogen, 4%

percent phosphorous, and 2% percent potassium.
b. Controlled-Release Fertilizer
Consists of nitrogen-phosphorous-potassium ratio: 1% percent nitrogen 0%

percent phosphorous, and 1% percent potassium.
2.5 SOIL AMENDMENTS
2.5.1 Sulphur
Sulphur shall be finely ground, raw, agricultural grade, with a purity

of at least 98 percent.
2.5.2 Iron Sulphate
Iron sulphate shall be the fine salt form of the chemical FeSO4, free of
lumps, suitable for uniform mixing with soil.
2.6 MATERIAL FOR STAKING
2.6.1 Stakes and Braces
Stakes for supporting trees shall be square, straight, sound, rough sawn,
free from knots, and not less than nominal 2 inches by 2 inches square.
Stakes and braces shall be painted green using approved wood stain or paint.
2.6.2 Wire
Wires for tying trees to stakes shall be annealed galvanized steel or steel
of gages hereinafter specified.
2.7 MULCH
Mulch shall consist of materials as specified below:
a. Hardwood Mulch
Woodbark shall be natural product of finely shredded cedar mulch with

pieces that range in size from one inch to five inches. Mulch should
consist of 40% bark, 10% wood, and 50% wood shavings. Hardwood mulch shall
not consist of lumps, roots, and stones or other foreign matter.The bark
shall be manufactured for the use of plant mulch and shall be free from
weed, seed, soil, plant diseases and insects.
2.8 TOPSOIL
Topsoil shall be obtained from approved off-post sources. The topsoil

source shall be inspected by the Contracting Officer to determine if the
selected soils meet the following requirements. The topsoil shall be
stripped from the top 4- to 6-inch surface layer of soil. Topsoil shall
be fertile, friable, natural surface soil, free of subsoil, clods, shale,
trash, toxic substances, stones 2 inches in maximum dimension or larger,
Bermudagrass, Johnsongrass, nutgrass (Cyperus rotundus), or other
objectionable and hard to eradicate weeds or grasses.
SECTION 32 93 31.00 44 Page 6

2.9 COMPOST
Contractor shall provide compost that has been produced by aerobic

(biological) decomposition of organic matter through static pile
composting. 70% of the compost should pass through a 3/8" sieve. (Sieving
for aggregate size classification) Compost must have high water and
nutrient holding capacity with no nutrient draw down. Compost may include
leaves, yard trimmings, biosolids, food scraps, food -processing residuals,
manure, forest residues, and bark. Compost shall be agricultural grade free
of trash and any visual refuse. Compost shall not contain materials that
have been treated with chemical preservatives. Municipal solid waste
compost is not acceptable. Acceptable compost shall meet all applicable 40
CFR 503 Requirements standards for Class A biosolids, Louisiana Department
of Environmental Quality and the United States Composting Council (USCC)
Seal of Testing Assurance (STA) program.
Prior to delivery, contractor shall submit documentation the following

documentation:
a. the amount of feed stock by percentage in the final product
b. a statement that the compost meets federal and state health

and safety regulations
c. a statement that the composting process has met the required

time and temperature
d. a copy of the producer's STA certification
e. a copy of the lab analysis, performed by as STA-certified lab

stating the compost meets all applicable 40 CFR 503 Requirements
for biosolids.
2.10 WATER
Water shall be kept free from oil, acids, alkali, salt, and other
substances harmful to the growth of plants. The source of water and
service outlets used shall be subject to approval of the Contracting
Officer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PLANTING SEASON
The planting season for trees, shrubs, and vines shall be from 15 November
to 31 May; planting shall be accomplished during the first planting season,
or portion thereof (but not less than 15 days), following substantial
completion of building construction. Planting of trees, shrubs, and vines
for all phases of this contract shall be accomplished within that period.
Actual planting shall be performed during the specified periods only when
weather and soil conditions are suitable and in accordance with locally
accepted practice, as approved by the Contracting Officer. Planting shall
not be performed when temperatures remain or are forecasted to remain below
32 or above 100 degrees Farenheit for a period of 48 hours or longer.
Deviation from the planting dates will be permitted only when approved in
writing by the Contracting Officer.
SECTION 32 93 31.00 44 Page 7

3.2 OBSTRUCTIONS BELOW GROUND
Any rock or other underground obstruction shall be removed to the depth

necessary to permit proper planting, according to plans and
specifications. If underground construction, obstructions, or rock are
encountered in excavation of planting areas, other locations for the
planting may be selected by the Contracting Officer. Explosives may be
used for removal of rock or oil foundation structures only where and as
expressly approved by the Contracting Officer. The Contractor shall
familiarize himself with all existing underground utility locations and
shall avoid damaging them during planting operations. The Contractor shall
repair at his own expense any damage to existing utilities and such repairs
shall be in a manner directed by the Contracting Officer.
3.3 PLANTING OPERATIONS
3.3.1 Layout of Major Planting
Locations for plants and outlines of areas to be planted shall be marked on

the ground by the Contractor and approved by the Contracting Officer before
any excavation is made. No shrubs, trees or bunch grass shall be planted
less than 33 feet from a building unless specifically indicated on the
drawings or designated by the Contracting Officer. In the event
obstructions are encountered which prevent planting as indicated, the plant
or plants will be planted in a new location, as directed by the Contracting
Officer.
3.3.2 Protection of Planting Areas
Before excavations are made, precautionary measures shall be taken to

protect all turfed areas that are to be trucked over and upon which soil is
to be temporarily stacked pending removal or reuse of the soil for the
filling of holes, pits, and beds. Existing trees, shrubbery, and beds that
are to be preserved shall be barricaded in a manner to afford effective
protection during planting operations.
3.3.3 Excavation for Planting
Excavation for planting shall include the stripping and stacking of all
acceptable topsoil encountered within the areas to be excavated for
trenches, plant pits, and planting beds. Most of the excavated material
will not be acceptable for backfill. Except as otherwise indicated,
excavations of trenches, tree holes and plant pits shall extend to the
required subgrades as indicated on the drawings but in no case shall be
less than as specified. Plant pits shall be circular in outline and shall
have vertical sides and flat bottoms, or may be machine dug in a square
shape with vertical sides and flat bottoms provided the minimum width of
square pits is as great as the diameter for the circular pits. The minimum
depths of plant pits shown on the drawings shall be measured from finished
grade. Planting beds in which ground cover or similar planting are
indicated shall be excavated to the depth shown on the drawings and as
required to eliminate Bermudagrass, Johnsongrass, nutgrass (Cyperus
rotundus) or similar objectionable vegetation which would seriously compete
with the plantings. In the event such vegetation is present, the surface
soil shall be stripped to a depth of 6 to 12 inches, as required to
eliminate underground rootstalks or rhizomes.
SECTION 32 93 31.00 44 Page 8

3.3.4 Preparation of Planting Beds (PB)
3.3.4.1 Preparation (For Use Without Planters)
The planting beds for ground cover, outlines of which are shown on the
drawings, shall be excavated to a depth of 15 inches. The acceptable
topsoil which is free of noxious plants shall be stockpiled and used as
backfilled material. Unacceptable excavated soil shall be disposed of as
directed by the Contracting Officer. During excavation operations all
roots, stones, grade stakes or other objects 2 inches in maximum dimension
or larger shall be removed from beds and disposed of as directed by the
Contracting Officer. Plants to be planted in plant beds are indicated by
PB in the legend on the drawings.
3.3.4.2 Backfilling
The plant beds shall be backfilled with topsoil specified herein. Compost
shall then be spread uniformly over the bed to a depth of 6", and shall be
mixed and incorporated into the soil to a depth of 9 inches using a
roto-tiller or similar type of equipment to obtain a uniform and well
pulverized soil mix. During tillage operations, all roots, stones, stakes,
or other objectionable objects shall be removed from the beds and disposed
of as directed. Beds shall be brought to a smooth even surface conforming
to established grades and the details shown on the drawings after full
settlement has occurred. The mixed soil in the beds shall be moist at the
time the plants are set.
3.3.5 Planting Pit Sizes
Minimum depth and diameter or width of planting pits for trees, shrubs, and
vines shall be as shown in the plant list on the drawings. Plants to be
placed outside of planting beds shall be planted in pits with depths and
diameters as shown on drawings for each plant.
3.3.6 Disposal of Excess Soil
Acceptable excess excavated topsoil shall be wasted uniformly over nearby

low or rough lawn areas, or otherwise disposed of as approved by the
Contracting Officer. Excess soils not required or not suitable for above
usage shall be disposed of on or off the reservation as directed by the
Contracting Officer, within 24 hours following excavation.
3.3.7 Setting Plants
Except as otherwise specified, plants shall be planted in pits and shall be

set at the level shown in the details on the drawings. Trees shall be set
plumb and rigidly braced in position until the soil has been solidly stable
around the ball or roots. Plants shall be planted in approved topsoil, as
specified herein, which shall be thoroughly settled withwater, notamping.
To compensate for shrinkage, the finished grade of topsoil prior to
watering shall be fixed at an elevation 10 percent of the fill depth higher
than the desired finished grade, unless otherwise directed by the
Contracting Officer. To facilitate watering, each plant shall be set
approximately 2 inches below the grade of the existing ground surface to
form a saucer as shown on the drawings.
SECTION 32 93 31.00 44 Page 9

3.3.7.1 Balled Trees
Balled-and-burlapped (BB)trees shall be placed as shown on the drawings.

Excavation may be done by shovel, backhoe or stump grinder, but a soil
auger may not be used. The soil pad on which the soil ball or root ball
will be placed shall be of undistubed soil. The depth of the pad shall
correspond to the distance from the bottom of the soil ball to the root
collar, or slightly less. Glazed planting hole surfaces shall be
sufficiently roughened prior to backfilling. Trees shall then be placed in
the plant pit, and backfilled with excavated soil. Soil shall be settled
with water. No tamping. Cloth, ropes, wires, and other wrapping material
shall be cut away from the top of the balls, and backfilling shall be
completed. In no case shall cloth be pulled out from under balls.
3.3.7.2 Bare-Root Plants
Roots of bare-root (BR) plants shall be properly spread out, and the
topsoil shall be carefully worked in among the roots. Broken or frayed
roots shall be cut off clean.
3.3.7.3 Container-Grown Plants
Containers shall be opened, and the plants carefully removed so that the
earth around the roots of the plants remains unbroken. Plants shall then
be planted in the same manner as balled plants.
3.3.8 Staking of Trees
3.3.8.1 Balled and Burlapped; Container Grown Trees
Only trees so designated by Contracting Officer shall have approved trunk

protection installed. The trunck protection shall be secured at the top and
bottom of the trunk in a manner so as not to restrick or damage the trunk.
Balled and burlapped trees shall be staked as they are planted with two (2)
stakes, as specified under materials, and as shown on the drawings.Support
ties shall be 2 inch or wider bands of polypropylene, elasticized or webbed
strapping. For drooping stems, ties shall be placed at the point on the
stem at the top can stand on its own. Stacks shall be driven outside the
root ball. Trees 3 inch caliper and larger, use ties attached to guy wires
and groun anchors. Ground anchors shall be arrowhead shaped earth anchors
or malleable iron castings, aluminal castings or stamped steel per
contracting officer approval. Ties should be attahed loosely enough to
allow a small amount of play in the trunk. Contractor will be responsible
for removing all stakes and straps after 6 to 12 months or one growing
season. These stakes will become the property of the contractor and should
be figured into the bid.
3.3.9 Pruning
Pruning shall be limited to the minimum necessary to remove injured twigs

and branches, and to compensate for the loss of roots during transplanting,
but never to exceed one-half of the branching structure. With the approval
of the Contracting Officer, pruning may be done before delivery of plants,
but not before plants have been inspected and approved. All cuts shall be
made flush leaving no stubs. Cuts over 3/4-inch in diameter shall be
painted with an approved tree-wound paint. To further aid in the recovery
of transplanted trees, the leaves may be stripped prior to shipment where
this is a locally accepted practice and approved by the Contracting
Officer. Evergreens shall not be pruned except to remove injured branches.
SECTION 32 93 31.00 44 Page 10

3.3.10 Mulching
After planting and application of fertilizer, plants shall be mulched with

a layer of mulch material covering the entire saucer area around each plant
to a depth of 3 inches.
3.4 MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
Maintenance operations shall begin immediately after each plant is planted

and shall continue for a period of not less than 120 calendar days after
the last plant of the original planting is planted, mulched, and staked,
where applicable and until all landscaping and turfing work under this
contract is completed and accepted. Plants shall be kept in a healthy
growing condition by watering, pruning, spraying, weeding, cultivating, and
by any other necessary operations of maintenance. Plant saucers and
planting beds shall be kept free of weeds, grass, and other undesired
vegetative growth. Plants shall be inspected at least weekly by the
Contractor during the maintenance period and necessary work shall be
promptly performed. Watering will be required when, in the opinion of the
Contracting Officer, the soil moisture is below optimum level for best
plant growth. Weekly watering will be required when, in the opinion of the
Contractor Officer, the soil moisture is below optimum level for best plant
growth. Weekly watering will normally be required during dry weather.
In the course of mixing operations, any lumps larger than 1/2-inch in

diameter shall be broken up and when uniformly mixed the material shall be
uniformly distributed over the surface of planting pits and beds in the
manner described below at the following areas:
Trees 1-3/4-inch to 2-inch caliber 1-pound

Trees less than 1-3/4-inch in caliber 3/4-pound
Shrubs 1/2-pound
Plant beds per 100 sq. ft. 2-pounds
Fertilizer application shall be accomplished as follows: Fertilizer and

soil amendments shall be applied at the specified rates over the planting
beds and pits. Fertilizer shall not be applied closer than 6 inches to
trunks of trees and stems of shrubs. Any fertilizer on the foliage of
plants shall be washed off immediately following application. Following
the application of fertilizer , the peat shall be applied as specified over
the saucers, and beds and incorporated by forking with the top 2 inches of
soil. The pits and beds, shall then be watered with sufficient water to
wet the entire root structure of the plants.
3.5 REPLACEMENT
During the planting period, plants that die or are, in the opinion of the
Contracting Officer, in an unhealthy, unsightly, or impaired condition,
shall be replaced by the Contractor prior to the commencement of the
maintenance period. Three days prior to the conclusion of the maintenance
period, the Contracting Officer and the Contractor will make an inspection
of the work to determine condition of all plants. All plants that are dead
or not in a healthy growing condition, as determined by the Contracting
Officer, will be noted. All plants noted to be unhealthy, unsightly, or
damaged, shall be removed from the site and replaced with healthy plants of
the same kinds and sizes as originally specified during the period of 1
year from the original planting. Dead or unhealthy plants shall also be
replaced within 15 days of written notification by the contracting officer.
SECTION 32 93 31.00 44 Page 11

Such replacements shall be made in the same manner as specified for the
original planting, except all trees shall be balled-and-burlapped, and at
no extra cost to the Government. Maintenance of the replacements will be
by the Government after the original maintenance period.
SECTION 32 93 31.00 44 Page 12

SECTION 33 40 00
STORM DRAINAGE UTILITIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES


(AASHTO)
AASHTO M 294 (2009) Standard Specification for

Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe, 300- to
1500-mm Diameter
AMERICAN RAILWAY ENGINEERING AND MAINTENANCE-OF-WAY ASSOCIATION

(AREMA)
AREMA Eng Man (2009) Manual for Railway Engineering

Steel Products

Gray Iron Castings


Steel Sheet, Metallic-Coated by the
Hot-Dip Process for Corrugated Steel Pipe

ASTM C 14 (2007) Standard Specification for Concrete

Sewer, Storm Drain, and Culvert Pipe
ASTM C 1433 (2008) Standard Specification for Precast

Reinforced Concrete Box Sections for
Culverts, Storm Drains, and Sewers

Pressure Method
ASTM C 270 (2008a) Standard Specification for Mortar

for Unit Masonry
ASTM C 444 (2003; R 2009) Perforated Concrete Pipe

Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections

Vitrified Clay Pipe, Extra Strength,
Standard Strength, and Perforated
ASTM C 76 (2008a) Standard Specification for

Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain,
and Sewer Pipe


Bituminous Types)

PVC Expansion

Compounds

Place by the Rubber Balloon Method
ASTM D 2321 (2008) Standard Practice for Underground

Installation of Thermoplastic Pipe for
Sewers and Other Gravity-Flow Applications
ASTM D 2729 (2003) Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer

Pipe and Fittings
ASTM D 3350 (2008) Polyethylene Plastics Pipe and

Fittings Materials
ASTM D 6938 (2008a) Standard Test Method for In-Place

Depth)
ASTM F 794 (2003) Standard Specification for

Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Profile Gravity
Sewer Pipe and Fittings Based on
Controlled Inside Diameter
ASTM F 894 (2007) Polyethylene (PE) Large Diameter

Profile Wall Sewer and Drain Pipe
ASTM F 949 (2009) Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)

Corrugated Sewer Pipe with a Smooth
Interior and Fittings
1.2 SUBMITTALS

SD-03 Product Data
Placing Pipe
SD-04 Samples
Pipe for Culverts and Storm Drains
SD-07 Certificates
Resin Certification
Pipeline Testing
Determination of Density
Frame and Cover for Gratings
1.3.1 Delivery and Storage
Materials delivered to site shall be inspected for damage, unloaded, and

stored with a minimum of handling. Materials shall not be stored directly
on the ground. The inside of pipes and fittings shall be kept free of dirt
and debris. Before, during, and after installation, plastic pipe and
fittings shall be protected from any environment that would result in
damage or deterioration to the material. Keep a copy of the manufacturer's
instructions available at the construction site at all times and follow
these instructions unless directed otherwise by the Contracting Officer.
Solvents, solvent compounds, lubricants, elastomeric gaskets, and any
similar materials required to install plastic pipe shall be stored in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and shall be discarded
if the storage period exceeds the recommended shelf life. Solvents in use
shall be discarded when the recommended pot life is exceeded.
1.3.2 Handling
Materials shall be handled in a manner that ensures delivery to the trench

in sound, undamaged condition. Pipe shall be carried to the trench, not
dragged.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPE FOR CULVERTS AND STORM DRAINS
Pipe for culverts and storm drains shall be of the sizes indicated and
shall conform to the requirements specified.
2.1.1 Concrete Pipe
Manufactured in accordance with and conforming to ASTM C 76, Class III
2.1.1.1 Nonreinforced Pipe
Manufactured in accordance with and conforming to ASTM C 14, Class 3.
2.1.2 Perforated Piping
2.1.2.1 Clay Pipe
ASTM C 700, standard strength.
2.1.2.2 Concrete Pipe
Manufactured in accordance with and conforming to ASTM C 444, and

applicable requirements of ASTM C 14, Class III.
2.1.2.3 PVC Pipe
ASTM D 2729.
2.1.3 PVC Pipe
Submit the pipe manufacturer's resin certification, indicating the cell

classification of PVC used to manufacture the pipe, prior to installation
of the pipe.
2.1.3.1 Profile PVC Pipe
ASTM F 794, Series 46, produced from PVC certified by the compounder as
meeting the requirements of ASTM D 1784, minimum cell class 12454-B.
2.1.3.2 Corrugated PVC Pipe
ASTM F 949 produced from PVC certified by the compounder as meeting the
requirements of ASTM D 1784, minimum cell class 12454-B.
2.1.4 PE Pipe
Submit the pipe manufacturer's resin certification, indicating the cell

classification of PE used to manufacture the pipe, prior to installation of
the pipe. The minimum cell classification for polyethylene plastic shall
apply to each of the seven primary properties of the cell classification
limits in accordance with ASTM D 3350. All PE pipe shall have smooth
interior with a Mannings roughness coefficient of 0.012 or smoother.
2.1.4.1 Corrugated PE Pipe
AASHTO M 294, Type S or C. For slow crack growth resistance, acceptance of

resins shall be determined by using the notched constant ligament-stress
(NCLS) test meeting the requirements of AASHTO M 294. Pipe walls shall
have the following properties:
Minimum Moment
Nominal Minimum of Inertia of
Size Wall Area Wall Section
(in.) (square in/ft) (in to the 4th/in)
_________________________________________________________
12 1.50 0.024
15 1.91 0.053
18 2.34 0.062
24 3.14 0.116
30 3.92 0.163
36 4.50 0.222
42 4.69 0.543
48 5.15 0.543
54 5.67 0.800
60 6.45 0.800
2.1.4.2 Profile Wall PE Pipe
ASTM F 894, RSC 160, produced from PE certified by the resin producer as
meeting the requirements of ASTM D 3350, minimum cell class 334433C. Pipe
walls shall have the following properties:
Minimum Moment
Of Inertia of
Wall Section
(in to the 4th/in)
___________________
Nominal Minimum Cell Cell

Size Wall Area Class Class
(in.) (square in/ft) 334433C 335434C
_______________________________________________________
18 2.96 0.052 0.038

21 4.15 0.070 0.051
24 4.66 0.081 0.059
27 5.91 0.125 0.091
30 5.91 0.125 0.091
33 6.99 0.161 0.132
36 8.08 0.202 0.165
42 7.81 0.277 0.227
48 8.82 0.338 0.277
2.2 DRAINAGE STRUCTURES
2.2.1 Flared End Sections
Sections shall be of a standard design fabricated from zinc coated steel

sheets meeting requirements of ASTM A 929/A 929M.
2.2.2 Precast Reinforced Concrete Box
Manufactured in accordance with and conforming to ASTM C 1433.
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
2.3.1 Concrete
Unless otherwise specified, concrete and reinforced concrete shall conform

to the requirements for 4000 psi concrete. The concrete mixture shall have
air content by volume of concrete, based on measurements made immediately
after discharge from the mixer, of 5 to 7 percent when maximum size of
coarse aggregate exceeds 1-1/2 inches. Air content shall be determined in
accordance with ASTM C 231. The concrete covering over steel reinforcing
shall not be less than 1 inch thick for covers and not less than 1-1/2
inches thick for walls and flooring. Concrete covering deposited directly
against the ground shall have a thickness of at least 3 inches between
steel and ground. Expansion-joint filler material shall conform to
ASTM D 1751, or ASTM D 1752, or shall be resin-impregnated fiberboard
conforming to the physical requirements of ASTM D 1752.
2.3.2 Mortar
Mortar for pipe joints, connections to other drainage structures, and brick
or block construction shall conform to ASTM C 270, Type M, except that the
maximum placement time shall be 1 hour. The quantity of water in the
mixture shall be sufficient to produce a stiff workable mortar but in no
case shall exceed 6 gallons of water per sack of cement. Water shall be
clean and free of harmful acids, alkalies, and organic impurities. The
mortar shall be used within 30 minutes after the ingredients are mixed with
water. The inside of the joint shall be wiped clean and finished smooth.
The mortar head on the outside shall be protected from air and sun with a
proper covering until satisfactorily cured.
2.3.3 Precast Reinforced Concrete Manholes
Conform to ASTM C 478. Joints between precast concrete risers and tops
shall be full-bedded in cement mortar and shall be smoothed to a uniform
surface on both interior and exterior of the structure.
2.3.4 Frame and Cover for Gratings
Submit certification on the ability of frame and cover or gratings to carry

the imposed live load. Frame and cover for gratings shall be cast gray
iron, ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class 35B; cast ductile iron, ASTM A 536, Grade
65-45-12; or cast aluminum, ASTM B 26/B 26M, Alloy 356.OT6. Weight, shape,
size, and waterway openings for grates and curb inlets shall be as
indicated on the plans. The word "Storm Sewer" shall be stamped or cast
into covers so that it is plainly visible.
2.4 STEEL LADDER
Steel ladder shall be provided where the depth of the storm drainage
structure exceeds 12 feet. These ladders shall be not less than 16 inches
in width, with 3/4 inch diameter rungs spaced 12 inches apart. The two
stringers shall be a minimum 3/8 inch thick and 2-1/2 inches wide. Ladders
and inserts shall be galvanized after fabrication in conformance with
ASTM A 123/A 123M.
2.5 DOWNSPOUT BOOTS
Boots used to connect exterior downspouts to the storm-drainage system

shall be of gray cast iron conforming to ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class 30B or
35B. Shape and size shall be as indicated.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXCAVATION FOR PIPE CULVERTS, STORM DRAINS, AND DRAINAGE STRUCTURES
Excavation of trenches, and for appurtenances and backfilling for culverts

and storm drains, shall be in accordance with the applicable portions of
Section 31 00 00 EARTHWORK and the requirements specified below.
3.1.1 Trenching
The width of trenches at any point below the top of the pipe shall be not
greater than the outside diameter of the pipe plus 12 inches to permit
satisfactory jointing and thorough tamping of the bedding material under
and around the pipe. Sheeting and bracing, where required, shall be placed
within the trench width as specified, without any overexcavation. Where
trench widths are exceeded, redesign with a resultant increase in cost of
stronger pipe or special installation procedures will be necessary. Cost
of this redesign and increased cost of pipe or installation shall be borne
by the Contractor without additional cost to the Government.
3.1.2 Removal of Rock
Rock in either ledge or boulder formation shall be replaced with suitable

materials to provide a compacted earth cushion having a thickness between
unremoved rock and the pipe of at least 8 inches or 1/2 inch for each foot
of fill over the top of the pipe, whichever is greater, but not more than
three-fourths the nominal diameter of the pipe. Where bell-and-spigot pipe
is used, the cushion shall be maintained under the bell as well as under
the straight portion of the pipe. Rock excavation shall be as specified
and defined in Section 31 00 00 EARTHWORK.
3.1.3 Removal of Unstable Material
Where wet or otherwise unstable soil incapable of properly supporting the

pipe, as determined by the Contracting Officer, is unexpectedly encountered
in the bottom of a trench, such material shall be removed to the depth
required and replaced to the proper grade with select granular material,
compacted as provided in paragraph BACKFILLING. When removal of unstable
material is due to the fault or neglect of the Contractor while performing
shoring and sheeting, water removal, or other specified requirements, such
removal and replacement shall be performed at no additional cost to the
Government.
3.2 BEDDING
The bedding surface for the pipe shall provide a firm foundation of uniform
density throughout the entire length of the pipe.
3.2.1 Concrete Pipe Requirements
When no bedding class is specified or detailed on the drawings, concrete

pipe shall be bedded in granular material minimum 4 inch in depth in
trenches with soil foundation. Depth of granular bedding in trenches with
rock foundation shall be 1/2 inch in depth per foot of depth of fill,
minimum depth of bedding shall be 8 inch up to maximum depth of 24 inches.
The middle third of the granular bedding shall be loosely placed. Bell
holes and depressions for joints shall be removed and formed so entire
barrel of pipe is uniformly supported. The bell hole and depressions for
the joints shall be not more than the length, depth, and width required for
properly making the particular type of joint.
3.2.2 Plastic Pipe
Bedding for PVC and PE pipe shall meet the requirements of ASTM D 2321.
Bedding, haunching, and initial backfill shall be either Class IB or II
material.
3.3 PLACING PIPE
Submit printed copies of the manufacturer's recommendations for

installation procedures of the material being placed, prior to installation.
Each pipe shall be thoroughly examined before being laid; defective or

damaged pipe shall not be used. Plastic pipe shall be protected from
exposure to direct sunlight prior to laying, if necessary to maintain
adequate pipe stiffness and meet installation deflection requirements.
Pipelines shall be laid to the grades and alignment indicated. Proper
facilities shall be provided for lowering sections of pipe into trenches.
Lifting lugs in vertically elongated metal pipe shall be placed in the same
vertical plane as the major axis of the pipe. Pipe shall not be laid in
water, and pipe shall not be laid when trench conditions or weather are
unsuitable for such work. Diversion of drainage or dewatering of trenches
during construction shall be provided as necessary. Deflection of
installed flexible pipe shall not exceed the following limits:
MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE
TYPE OF PIPE DEFLECTION (%)
Note post installation requirements of paragraph 'Deflection Testing' in

PART 3 of this specification for all pipe products including deflection
testing requirements for flexible pipe.
3.3.1 Concrete, PVC, Ribbed PVC
Laying shall proceed upgrade with spigot ends of bell-and-spigot pipe and
tongue ends of tongue-and-groove pipe pointing in the direction of the flow.
3.3.2 Corrugated PE Pipe
Laying shall be with the separate sections joined firmly on a bed shaped to
line and grade and shall follow manufacturer's recommendations.
3.3.3 Multiple Culverts
Where multiple lines of pipe are installed, adjacent sides of pipe shall be
at least half the nominal pipe diameter or 3 feet apart, whichever is less.
3.3.4 Jacking Pipe Through Fills
Methods of operation and installation for jacking pipe through fills shall
conform to requirements specified in Volume 1, Chapter 1, Part 4 of

AREMA Eng Man.
3.4 JOINTING
3.5 DRAINAGE STRUCTURES
3.5.1 Manholes and Inlets
Construction shall be of reinforced concrete, plain concrete, brick,

precast reinforced concrete, precast concrete segmental blocks,
prefabricated corrugated metal, or bituminous coated corrugated metal;
complete with frames and covers or gratings; and with fixed galvanized
steel ladders where indicated. Pipe studs and junction chambers of
prefabricated corrugated metal manholes shall be fully bituminous-coated
and paved when the connecting branch lines are so treated.
3.5.2 Walls and Headwalls
Construction shall be as indicated.
3.6 STEEL LADDER INSTALLATION
Ladder shall be adequately anchored to the wall by means of steel inserts

spaced not more than 6 feet vertically, and shall be installed to provide
at least 6 inches of space between the wall and the rungs. The wall along
the line of the ladder shall be vertical for its entire length.
3.7 BACKFILLING
3.7.1 Backfilling Pipe in Trenches
After the pipe has been properly bedded, selected material from excavation
or borrow, at a moisture content that will facilitate compaction, shall be
placed along both sides of pipe in layers not exceeding 6 inches in
compacted depth. The backfill shall be brought up evenly on both sides of
pipe for the full length of pipe. The fill shall be thoroughly compacted
under the haunches of the pipe. Each layer shall be thoroughly compacted
with mechanical tampers or rammers. This method of filling and compacting
shall continue until the fill has reached an elevation equal to the
midpoint (spring line) of RCP or has reached an elevation of at least 12
inches above the top of the pipe for flexible pipe. The remainder of the
trench shall be backfilled and compacted by spreading and rolling or
compacted by mechanical rammers or tampers in layers not exceeding 6 inches.
Tests for density shall be made as necessary to ensure conformance to the
compaction requirements specified below. Where it is necessary, in the
opinion of the Contracting Officer, that sheeting or portions of bracing
used be left in place, the contract will be adjusted accordingly.
Untreated sheeting shall not be left in place beneath structures or
pavements.
3.7.2 Backfilling Pipe in Fill Sections
For pipe placed in fill sections, backfill material and the placement and
compaction procedures shall be as specified below. The fill material shall
be uniformly spread in layers longitudinally on both sides of the pipe, not
exceeding 6 inches in compacted depth, and shall be compacted by rolling
parallel with pipe or by mechanical tamping or ramming. Prior to
commencing normal filling operations, the crown width of the fill at a
height of 12 inches above the top of the pipe shall extend a distance of
not less than twice the outside pipe diameter on each side of the pipe or
12 feet, whichever is less. After the backfill has reached at least 12
inches above the top of the pipe, the remainder of the fill shall be placed
and thoroughly compacted in layers not exceeding 6 inches. Use select
granular material for this entire region of backfill for flexible pipe
installations.
3.7.3 Movement of Construction Machinery
When compacting by rolling or operating heavy equipment parallel with the

pipe, displacement of or injury to the pipe shall be avoided. Movement of
construction machinery over a culvert or storm drain at any stage of
construction shall be at the Contractor's risk. Any damaged pipe shall be
repaired or replaced.
3.7.4 Compaction
Cohesionless materials include gravels, gravel-sand mixtures, sands, and

gravelly sands. Cohesive materials include clayey and silty gravels,
gravel-silt mixtures, clayey and silty sands, sand-clay mixtures, clays,
silts, and very fine sands. When results of compaction tests for
moisture-density relations are recorded on graphs, cohesionless soils will
show straight lines or reverse-shaped moisture-density curves, and cohesive
soils will show normal moisture-density curves.
3.7.4.2 Minimum Density
Backfill over and around the pipe and backfill around and adjacent to
drainage structures shall be compacted at the approved moisture content to
the following applicable minimum density, which will be determined as
specified below.
a. Under airfield and heliport pavements, paved roads, streets, parking

areas, and similar-use pavements including adjacent shoulder areas, the
density shall be not less than 90 percent of maximum density for
cohesive material and 95 percent of maximum density for cohesionless
material, up to the elevation where requirements for pavement subgrade
materials and compaction shall control.
b. Under unpaved or turfed traffic areas, density shall not be less than
90 percent of maximum density for cohesive material and 95 percent of
maximum density for cohesionless material.
c. Under nontraffic areas, density shall be not less than that of the
surrounding material.
3.7.5 Determination of Density
Testing is the responsibility of the Contractor and performed at no

additional cost to the Government. Testing shall be performed by an
approved commercial testing laboratory or by the Contractor subject to
approval. Tests shall be performed every 100 linear feet to ensure that
specified density is being obtained. Laboratory tests for moisture-density
relations shall be made in accordance with ASTM D 1557 except that
mechanical tampers may be used provided the results are correlated with
those obtained with the specified hand tamper. Field density tests shall
be determined in accordance with ASTM D 2167 or ASTM D 6938. When

ASTM D 6938 is used, the calibration curves shall be checked and adjusted,
if necessary, using the sand cone method as described in paragraph
Calibration of the referenced publications. ASTM D 6938 results in a wet
unit weight of soil and ASTM D 6938 shall be used to determine the moisture
content of the soil. The calibration curves furnished with the moisture
gauges shall be checked along with density calibration checks as described
in ASTM D 6938. Test results shall be furnished the Contracting Officer.
The calibration checks of both the density and moisture gauges shall be
made at the beginning of a job on each different type of material
encountered and at intervals as directed.
3.8 PIPELINE TESTING
3.8.1 Deflection Testing
No sooner than 30 days after completion of installation and final backfill,

an initial post installation inspection shall be accomplished. Clean or
flush all lines prior to inspection. Perform a deflection test on entire
length of installed flexible pipeline on completion of work adjacent to and
over the pipeline, including leakage tests, backfilling, placement of fill,
grading, paving, concreting, and any other superimposed loads. Deflection
of pipe in the installed pipeline under external loads shall not exceed
limits in paragraph PLACING PIPE above as percent of the average inside
diameter of pipe. Determine whether the allowable deflection has been
exceeded by use of a laser profiler or mandrel.
a. Laser Profiler Inspection: If deflection readings in excess of the

allowable deflection of average inside diameter of pipe are obtained,
remove pipe which has excessive deflection, and replace with new pipe.
Initial post installation inspections of the pipe interior with laser
profiling equipment shall utilize low barrel distortion video equipment
for pipe sizes 48 inches or less. Use a camera with lighting suitable
to allow a clear picture of the entire periphery of the pipe interior.
Center the camera in the pipe both vertically and horizontally and be
able to pan and tilt to a 90 degree angle with the axis of the pipe
rotating 360 degrees. Use equipment to move the camera through the
pipe that will not obstruct the camera's view or interfere with proper
documentation of the pipe's condition. The video image shall be clear,
focused, and relatively free from roll static or other image distortion
qualities that would prevent the reviewer from evaluating the condition
of the pipe. For initial post installation inspections for pipe sizes
larger than 48 inches, visual inspection shall be completed of the pipe
interior.
b. Pull-Through Device Inspection: Pass the pull-through device through

each run of pipe by pulling it by hand. If deflection readings in
excess of the allowable deflection of average inside diameter of pipe
are obtained, retest pipe by a run from the opposite direction. If
retest continues to show excess allowable deflections of the average
inside diameter of pipe, remove pipe which has excessive deflection,
replace with new pipe, and completely retest in same manner and under
same conditions. Pull-through device: The mandrel shall be rigid,
nonadjustable having a minimum of 9 fins, including pulling rings at
each end, engraved with the nominal pipe size and mandrel outside
diameter. The mandrel shall be 5 percent less than the
certified-actual pipe diameter for Plastic Pipe, 5 percent less than
the certified-actual pipe diameter for Corrugated Steel and Aluminum
Alloy, 3 percent less than the certified-actual pipe diameter for
Concrete-Lined Corrugated Steel and Ductile Iron Culvert provided by

manufacturer. When mandrels are utilized to verify deflection of
flexible pipe products, the Government will verify the mandrel OD
through the use of proving rings that are manufactured with an opening
that is certified to be as shown above.
c. Deflection measuring device: Shall be approved by the Contracting

Officer prior to use.
d. Warranty period test: Pipe found to have a deflection of greater than

allowable deflection in paragraph PLACING PIPE above, just prior to end
of one-year warranty period shall be replaced with new pipe and tested
as specified for leakage and deflection. Inspect 100 percent of all
pipe systems under the travel lanes, including curb and gutter. Random
inspections of the remaining pipe system outside of the travel lanes
shall represent at least 10 percent of the total pipe footage of each
pipe size. Inspections shall be made, depending on the pipe size, with
video camera or visual observations. In addition, for flexible pipe
installations, perform deflection testing on 100 percent of all pipes
under the travel lanes, including curb and gutter, with either a laser
profiler or 9-fin mandrel. For flexible pipe, random deflection
inspections of the pipe system outside of the travel lanes shall
represent at least 10 percent of the total pipe footage of each pipe
size. When mandrels are utilized to verify deflection of flexible pipe
products during the final post installation inspection, the Government
will verify the mandrel OD through the use of proving rings.
3.8.2 Post-Installation Inspection
One hundred percent of all reinforced concrete pipe installations shall be

checked for joint separations, soil migration through the joint, cracks
greater than 0.01 inches, settlement and alignment. One hundred percent of
all flexible pipes (HDPE, PVC, CMP) shall be checked for rips, tears, joint
separations, soil migration through the joint, cracks, localized bucking,
bulges, settlement and alignment.
a. Replace pipes having cracks greater than 0.1 inches in width or

deflection greater than 5 percent deflection. An engineer shall
evaluate all pipes with cracks greater than 0.01 inches but less than
0.10 inches to determine if any remediation or repair is required. RCP
with crack width less than 0.10 inches and located in a non-corrosive
environment (pH 5.5) are generally acceptable. Repair or replace any
pipe with crack exhibiting displacement across the crack, exhibiting
bulges, creases, tears, spalls, or delamination.
b. Reports: The deflection results and finial post installation

inspection report shall include: a copy of all video taken, pipe
location identification, equipment used for inspection, inspector name,
deviation from design, grade, deviation from line, deflection and
deformation of flexible pipe systems, inspector notes, condition of
joints, condition of pipe wall (e.g. distress, cracking, wall damage
dents, bulges, creases, tears, holes, etc.).
3.9 FIELD PAINTING
After installation, clean cast-iron frames, covers, gratings, and steps not
buried in masonry or concrete to bare metal of mortar, rust, grease, dirt,
and other deleterious materials and apply a coat of bituminous paint. Do
not paint surfaces subject to abrasion.
SECTION 33 51 15
NATURAL-GAS DISTRIBUTION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

AGA XR0603 (2006; 8th Ed) AGA Plastic Pipe Manual for
Gas Service
ASME B16.40 (2008) Manually Operated Thermoplastic Gas

Shutoffs and Valves in Gas Distribution
Systems
ASME B31.8 (2007) Gas Transmission and Distribution

Piping Systems
ASTM D 1598 (2002; R 2009) Time-to-Failure of Plastic

Pipe Under Constant Internal Pressure
ASTM D 1599 (1999; R 2005) Resistance to Short-Time

Hydraulic Failure Pressure of Plastic
Pipe, Tubing, and Fittings
ASTM D 2513 (2009a) Thermoplastic Gas Pressure Pipe,

Tubing, and Fittings

Socket-Type Polyethylene Fittings for
Outside Diameter-Controlled Polyethylene
Pipe and Tubing
ASTM D 3261 (2003) Standard Specification for Butt

Heat Fusion Polyethylene (PE) Plastic
Fittings for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic
Pipe and Tubing

INDUSTRY (MSS)


Threaded Ends
NACE SP0185 (2007) Extruded Polyolefin Resin Coating

Systems with Soft Adhesives for
Underground or Submerged Pipe
49 CFR 192 Transportation of Natural and Other Gas by

Pipeline: Minimum Federal Safety Standards
The gas distribution system includes natural gas piping and appurtenances
from point of connection with existing system, as indicated, to a point
approximately 5 feet from the facilities. Section 31 10 00 CLEARING FOR
CIVIL WORKS, applies to this section unless otherwise specified. Submit
operation and maintenance data in accordance with Section 01 78 23
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA, in three separate packages.
1.2.1 Gas Distribution System and Equipment Operation
Include maps showing piping layout, locations of system valves, gas line
markers and cathodic protection system test stations; step-by-step
procedures for system start up, operation and shutdown (index system
components and equipment to the system maps); isolation procedures
including valve operation to shutdown or isolate each section of the system
(index valves to the system maps and provide separate procedures for normal
operation and emergency shutdown if required to be different). Submit Data
Package No. 4.
1.2.2 Gas Distribution System Maintenance
Include maintenance procedures and frequency for system and equipment;

identification of pipe materials and manufacturer by locations, pipe repair
procedures, and jointing procedures at transitions to other piping material
or material from a different manufacturer. Submit Data Package No. 4.
1.2.3 Gas Distribution Equipment Maintenance
Include identification of valves and other equipment by materials,

manufacturer, vendor identification and location; maintenance procedures
and recommended tool kits for valves and equipment; recommended repair
methods (i.e., field repair, factory repair, or replacement) for each valve
and piece of equipment; and preventive maintenance procedures, possible
failure modes and troubleshooting guide. Submit Data Package No. 3.
1.3 SUBMITTALS

SD-02 Shop Drawings
Pipe, Fittings, and Associated Materials
SD-03 Product Data
Materials and Equipment; G, PO

Spare Parts; G, PO
Pipe and Accessory Coatings; G, PO
SD-05 Design Data
Connections to Existing Lines; G, PO

Connection and Abandonment Plan; G, PO
SD-06 Test Reports
Pressure and Leak Tests; G, PO
Data in booklet form from all pressure tests of the distribution

system.
SD-07 Certificates
Utility Work
Certification from the Operating Agency/Utility Company that

work for which the Utility is responsible has been completed.
Gas distribution system and equipment operation; G, PO

Gas distribution system maintenance; G, PO
Gas distribution equipment maintenance; G, PO
Data packages, as specified.
1.4.1.1 Jointing of Polyethylene and Fiberglass Piping
a. Join piping by performance qualified PE joiners, qualified by a

person who has been trained and certified by the manufacturer of the
pipe, using manufacturer's pre-qualified joining procedures in
accordance with AGA XR0603. Inspect joints by an inspector qualified
in the joining procedures being used and in accordance with AGA XR0603.
Welders training, qualifications and procedures,(metal and PE) includes
use of equipment, explanation of the procedure, and successfully making
joints which pass tests specified in AGA XR0603.
b. Submit a certificate of qualified jointing procedures, training

procedures, qualifications of trainer, and training test results for
joiners and inspectors. Notify the Contracting Officer at least 24
hours in advance of the date to qualify joiners and inspectors.
1.4.2 Pre-Installation Conference
1.4.2.1 Shop Drawings
Submit shop drawings, within 30days of contract award, containing complete

schematic and piping diagrams and any other details required to demonstrate
that the system has been coordinated and will properly function as a unit.
Show on the drawings proposed layout and anchorage of the system and
appurtenances, and equipment relationship to other parts of the work
including clearances for maintenance and operation.
1.4.2.2 Connecting and Abandonment Plan
Submit written notification of the method and schedule for making

connections to existing gas lines, to the Contracting Officer at least 10
days in advance. Include gas line tie in, hot taps, abandonment/removal or
demolition, purging, and plugging as applicable in conformance with
ASME B31.8 Include in submittal connections to existing lines.
1.5.1 Delivery and Storage
Inspect materials delivered to the site for damage, and store with a
minimum of handling. Store materials on site in enclosures or under
protective coverings. Store plastic piping under cover out of direct
sunlight. Do not store materials directly on the ground. Keep inside of
pipes and fittings free of dirt and debris.
1.5.2 Handling
Handle pipe and components carefully to ensure a sound, undamaged

condition. Take particular care not to damage pipe coating. Repair
damaged coatings to original finish. Do not place pipe or material of any
kind inside another pipe or fitting after the coating has been applied,
except as specified in paragraph INSTALLATION.
1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS
Submit spare parts data for each different item of equipment and material
specified, after approval of the detail shop drawings and not later than 2
months prior to the date of beneficial occupancy. Include in the data a
complete list of parts and supplies, with current unit prices and source of
supply.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPE, FITTINGS, AND ASSOCIATED MATERIALS

2 years prior to bid opening. Asbestos or products containing asbestos are
not allowed. Provide written verification and point of contact for a
supporting service organization that is, in the opinion of the Contracting
Officer, reasonably convenient to the site. Mark all valves, flanges, and
fittings in accordance with MSS SP-25. Submit a complete list of materials
and equipment, including manufacturer's descriptive and technical
literature, performance charts and curves, catalog cuts, and installation
instructions, including, but not limited to the following:
a. Dielectric Waterways and Flange Kits.
b. Fittings
c. Piping
d. Pipe and Accessory coatings
2.1.1 Polyethylene Pipe, Tubing, Fittings and Joints
Provide polyethylene pipe, tubing, fittings and joints conforming to and

ASTM D 2513, pipe designationsPE 3408, rated SDR 17 or less, as specified
in ASME B31.8. Mark pipe sections as required by ASTM D 2513. Provide
butt fittings conforming to ASTM D 3261 and socket fittings conforming to
ASTM D 2683. Match fittings to the service rating of the pipe, with a
minimum wall thickness of ASME B31.8.
2.2 VALVES
Provide valves suitable for shutoff or isolation service and conforming to

MSS SP-78and the following:
2.2.1 Polyethylene Valves
Provide polyethylene valves conforming to ASME B16.40. Polyethylene

valves, in sizes 1/2 inch to 6 inches, may be used with polyethylene
distribution and service lines, in lieu of steel valves, for underground
installation only.
2.3 PRESSURE REGULATORS
Provide ferrous bodied regulators with backflow protection, designed to

meet the pressure, load and other service conditions.
2.4 PROTECTIVE COVERING MATERIALS
Provide a continuously extruded polyethylene and adhesive coating system

material conforming to NACE SP0185, Type A.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
3.2 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING
Earthwork is as specified in Section 31 00 00 EARTHWORK.
3.3 GAS MAINS
Provide polyethylenepipe for gas mains. Do not install polyethylene or
fiberglass mains aboveground.
3.4 WORKMANSHIP AND DEFECTS
Make pipe, tubing, and fittings clear and free of cutting burrs and defects
in structure or threading, and thoroughly brushed and blown free of chips
and scale. Do not repair, but replace defective pipe, tubing, or fittings.
3.5 INSTALLATION
Install gas distribution system and equipment in conformance with the

manufacturer's recommendations and applicable sections of ASME B31.8,
AGA XR0603 and 49 CFR 192. Perform abandonment of existing gas piping in
accordance with ASME B31.8. Cut the pipe without damaging the pipe; unless
otherwise authorized, use an approved type of mechanical cutter. Use wheel
cutters where practicable. Cut plastic pipe in accordance with AGA XR0603.
Design valve installation in plastic pipe to protect the plastic pipe
against excessive torsional or shearing loads when the valve is operated
and from other stresses which may be exerted through the valve or valve box.
3.5.1 Installing Pipe Underground
Grade gas mains and service lines as indicated. Provide mains with 24 inch
minimum cover; service lines with 18 inch minimum cover; and place both
mains and service lines on firmly compacted select material for the full
length. Where indicated, encase, bridge, or design the main to withstand
any anticipated external loads as specified in ASME B31.8. Provide
standard weight black steel pipe encasement material with a protective
coating as specified. Separate the pipe from the casing by insulating
spacers and seal the ends with casing bushings. Excavate the trench below
pipe grade, bed with bank sand, and compact to provide full-length
bearing. Laying pipe on blocks to produce uniform grade is not permitted.
Ensure that the pipe is clean inside before it is lowered into the trench
and keep free of water, soil, and all other foreign matter that might
damage or obstruct the operation of the valves, regulators, meters, or
other equipment. When work is not in progress, securely close open ends of
pipe or fittings with expandable plugs or other suitable means. Minor
changes in line or gradient of pipe that can be accomplished through the
natural flexibility of the pipe material without producing permanent
deformation and without overstressing joints may be made when approved.
Make changes in line or gradient that exceed the limitations specified with
fittings. When cathodic protection is furnished, provide electrically
insulated joints or flanges. When polyethylene or fiberglass piping is
installed underground, place foil backed magnetic tape above the pipe to
permit locating with a magnetic detector. After laying of pipe and
testing, backfill the trench in accordance with Section 31 00 00 EARTHWORK.
3.5.2 Installing Pipe Aboveground
Protect aboveground piping against dirt and other foreign matter, as

specified for underground piping.
3.6 PIPE JOINTS
Design and install pipe joints to effectively sustain the longitudinal

pullout forces caused by the contraction of piping or superimposed loads.
3.6.1 Polyethylene and Fiberglass Pipe Jointing Procedures
Use jointing procedures conforming to AGA XR0603. Avoid making

indiscriminate heat fusion joining of plastic pipe or fittings made from
different polyethylene resins by classification or by manufacturer if
other alternative joining procedures are available. If heat fusion joining
of dissimilar polyethylene is required, special procedures are required.
Test the method of heat fusion joining dissimilar polyethylene resins in
accordance with paragraph TESTS, subparagraph Destructive Tests of Plastic
Pipe Joints.
3.7 VALVE BOXES
Provide valve boxes of cast iron not less than 3/16 inch thick at each
underground valve except where concrete or other type of housing is
indicated. Provide valve boxes with locking covers that require a special
wrench for removal, and furnish the correctly marked wrench for each box.
Cast the word "gas" in the box cover. When the valve is located in a
roadway, protect the valve box by a suitable concrete slab at least 3
square feet. When in a sidewalk, provide the top of the box as a removable
concrete slab 2 feet square and set flush with the sidewalk. Make the
boxes adjustable extension type with screw or slide-type adjustments.
Separately support valve boxes to not rest on the pipe, so that no traffic
loads can be transmitted to the pipe. Only locate valves valve boxes or
inside of buildings.
3.8 DRIPS
Install drips at locations where indicated, conforming to the details

shown, or provide commercial units of approved type and capacity. Connect
a blow off pipe 1-1/4 inches or larger to each drip at its lowest point and
extend to or near the ground surface at a convenient location away from
traffic. Provide a reducing fitting for each discharge at each drip
terminal (outlet), a plug valve, and a 1/2 inch nipple turned down. Locate
the discharge terminal (outlet) inside a length of 12 inches or larger
vitrified clay pipe, concrete sewer pipe or concrete terminal box set
vertically on a bed of coarse gravel 1 foot thick and3 feet square, and
closed at the ground surface with a suitable replacement cover.
3.9 CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING LINES
Make connections between new work and existing gas lines, where required,
in accordance with ASME B31.8, using proper fittings to suit the actual
conditions. When connections are made by tapping into a gas main, provide
the same size connecting fittings as the pipe being connected.
3.9.1 Connection to Government Owned/Operated Gas Lines
The Contractor shall provide connections to the existing gas lines in

accordance with approved procedures. Deactivation of any portion of the
existing system shall only be done at the valve location shown on the
drawings. Reactivation of any existing gas lines will only be done by the
Government. The Contractor's Connection and Abandonment Plan shall be
submitted and approved prior to making any connections to existing gas
lines. This plan shall include the Operating Agency's required procedures
which may be obtained from Fort Hood Directorate of Public Works. The
Contractor shall notify the Contracting Officer, in writing, 10 days before
connections to existing lines are to be made.
a. PIf facilities are directed by the government to be abandoned in

place, they shall be physically disconnected from the piping system.
The open ends of all abandoned facilities shall be purged,
water-filled, and capped, plugged or otherwise effectively sealed by
the contractor as required by 49 CFR 192 and ASME B31.8. Valves shall
not remain in lines to be abandoned. Abandonment shall not be
completed until it has been determined that the volume of gas or liquid
hydrocarbons contained within the abandoned section poses no potential
hazard, and the system is filled with water. If air is used for
purging, the Contractor shall ensure that a combustible mixture is not
present after purging.
b. Mains or services to be taken out of service shall be removed

unless directed otherwise by the government.
c. Service lines abandoned from the active mains shall be disconnected

as close to the main as practicable.
d. No valves shall be left in the abandoned segment.
e. All above grade valves, risers, and vault and valve box covers
shall be removed. Vault and valve box voids shall be filled with
suitable compacted backfill material, base, HMAC, and concrete to match
the existing finishes.
3.10 TESTS
3.10.1 Pressure and Leak Tests
Test the system of gas mains and service lines after construction and
before being placed in service, using air as the test medium. Conform
testing to ASTM D 1598 and ASTM D 1599 for plastic piping. The normal
operating pressure for the system is 35 psig. The test pressure is 55 psig.
a. Prior to testing the system, blow-out, clean, and clear the

interior of all foreign materials. Remove all meters, regulators, and
controls before blowing out and cleaning,and reinstall after clearing
of all foreign materials.
b. Perform testing of gas mains and service lines with due regard for
the safety of employees and the public during the test. Keep persons
not working on the test operations out of the testing area while
testing is proceeding. Perform the test on the system as a whole or on
sections that can be isolated.
c. Test joints in sections prior to backfilling when trenches will be

backfilled before the completion of other pipeline sections. Continue
the test for at least 24 hours from the time of the initial readings to
the final readings of pressure and temperature. Do not take the
initial test readings of the instrument for at least 1 hour after the
pipe has been subjected to the full test pressure. Do not take initial
or final readings at times of rapid changes in atmospheric conditions,
and temperatures are representative of the actual trench conditions.
No indication of reduction of pressure is allowed during the test after
corrections have been made for changes in atmospheric conditions in
conformity with the relationship T(1)P(2)=T(2)P(1), in which T and P
denote absolute temperature and pressure, respectively, and the numbers
denote initial and final readings.
d. During the test, completely isolate the entire system from all
compressors and other sources of air pressure. Test each joint by
means of soap and water or an equivalent nonflammable solution prior to
backfilling or concealing any work. Secure approval of testing
instruments from the Contracting Officer. Furnish all labor, materials
and equipment for conducting the tests subject to inspection at all
times during the tests. Maintain safety precautions for air pressure
testing at all times during the tests.
SECTION 33 70 02.00 10
ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM, UNDERGROUND
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

ATIS O5.1 (2008) Specifications and Dimensions (for

Wood Poles)
ASSOCIATION OF EDISON ILLUMINATING COMPANIES (AEIC)
AEIC C8 (2000) Extruded Dielectric Shielded Power

Cables Rated 5 Through 46 kV
AEIC CS8 (2000) Extruded Dielectric Shielded Power

Cables Rated 5 Through 46 kV

Steel Products

Hardware

Gray Iron Castings


Soft or Annealed Copper Wire
ASTM B 496 (2004) Standard Specification for Compact

Round Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper
Conductors


ASTM C 478M (2009) Standard Specification for Precast
SECTION 33 70 02.00 10 Page 1


(Metric)

Environments
ASTM D 4059 (2000; R 2005e1) Analysis of

Polychlorinated Biphenyls in Insulating
Liquids by Gas Chromatography
ASTM D 923 (2007) Standard Practice for Sampling

Electrical Insulating Liquids
FM GLOBAL (FM)
IEEE C2 (2007; Errata 2006 & 2007; INT 44-56 2007;

INT 47, 49, 50, 52-56 2008; INT 57, 58,
Safety Code
IEEE C37.2 (2008) Electrical Power System Device

Function Numbers and Contact Designations
IEEE C37.20.1 (2002; Addenda A 2005; Addenda B 2006; R

2007) Standard for Metal-Enclosed
Low-Voltage Power Circuit-Breaker
Switchgear
IEEE C37.20.2 (1999) Metal-Clad Switchgear
IEEE C37.20.3 (2001; R 2006) Metal-Enclosed Interrupter

Switchgear
IEEE C37.23 (2003) Guide for Metal-Enclosed Bus and

Calculating Losses in Isolated-Phase Bus
IEEE C37.34 (1994) Test Code for High-Voltage Air

Switches
IEEE C37.41 (2008; Errata 2009) Design Tests for

High-Voltage Fuses, Distribution Enclosed
Single-Pole Air Switches, Fuse
Disconnecting Switches, and Accessories
IEEE C37.46 (2000) For High Voltage Expulsion and

Current-Limiting Type Power Class Fuses
and Fuse Disconnecting Switches
IEEE C37.90 (2005) Standard for Relays and Relay

Systems Associated With Electric Power
Apparatus
IEEE C37.90.1 (2002; Errata 2003; Errata 2004) Surge

Withstand Capability (SWC) Tests for
SECTION 33 70 02.00 10 Page 2

Relays and Relay Systems Associated with

Electric Power Apparatus
IEEE C57.12.00 (2006) Standard General Requirements for

IEEE C57.12.21 (1992) Requirements for Pad-Mounted,

Compartmental-Type, Self-Cooled,
Single-Phase Distribution Transformers
with High-Voltage Bushings; High Voltage,
34 500 Grd Y/199200 Volts and Below; Low
Voltage, 2400/120 Volts; 167 kVAand Smaller
IEEE C57.12.26 (1992; Addenda 1993) Transformers -

Pad-Mounted Compartmental-Type,
Self-Cooled, Three-Phase Distribution
Transformers for Use with Separable
Insulated High-Voltage Connectors, High
Voltage, (34 500 Grd Y/19 920 and Below;
2500 kVA and Smaller)
IEEE C57.13 (2008) Standard Requirements for

Instrument Transformers
IEEE C57.98 (1993; R 1999) Guide for Transformer

Impulse Tests
IEEE C62.11 (2005; Amendment A 2008) Standard for

IEEE Std 386 (2006) Standard for Separable Insulated

Connector Systems for Power Distribution
Systems Above 600V
IEEE Std 404 (2006) Extruded and Laminated Dielectric

Shielded Cable Joints Rated 2500 V Through
500 000 V
IEEE Std 48 (2009) Test Procedures and Requirements

for Alternating-Current Cable Terminations
2.5 kV through 765 kV
IEEE Std 81 (1983) Guide for Measuring Earth

Resistivity, Ground Impedance, and Earth
Surface Potentials of a Ground System
(Part 1)Normal Measurements
IEC 60255-21-3 (1993) Electrical Relays - Part 21:

Vibration, Shock, Bump And Seismic Tests
On Measuring Relays And Protection
Equipment - Section 3: Seismic Tests
NEMA AB 1 (2002) Molded-Case Circuit Breakers,
SECTION 33 70 02.00 10 Page 3

Molded Case Switches, and Circuit-Breaker

Enclosures
NEMA BU 1.1 (2005) General Instructions for Proper

Handling, Installation, Operation, and
Maintenance of Busway Rated 600 Volts or
Less
NEMA C119.1 (2006) Sealed Insulated Underground

Connector Systems Rated 600 Volts
NEMA C12.11 (2007) Instrument Transformers for Revenue

Metering, 10 kV BIL through 350 kV BIL
(0.6 kV NSV through 69 kV NSV)
NEMA C29.1 (1988; R 2002) Test Methods for Electrical

Power Insulators
NEMA C80.1 (2005) Standard for Electrical Rigid Steel

Conduit (ERSC)
NEMA FB 1 (2007) Standard for Fittings, Cast Metal

Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit,
Electrical Metallic Tubing, and Cable
NEMA FU 1 (2002; R 2007) Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses
NEMA LA 1 (1992; R 1999) Standard for Surge Arresters
NEMA TC 6 & 8 (2003) Standard for Polyvinyl Chloride PVC

Plastic Utilities Duct for Underground
Installations

Code - 2008 Edition
UL 1072 (2006; Rev thru Sep 2007) Medium-Voltage

Power Cables

Electrical Intermediate Metal Conduit --
Steel

Equipment
UL 486A-486B (2003; Rev thru Apr 2009) Standard for

Wire Connectors
UL 489 (2009) Standard for Molded-Case Circuit

Breakers, Molded-Case Switches and
Circuit-Breaker Enclosures

SECTION 33 70 02.00 10 Page 4

Insulating Tape
UL 514A (2004; Rev thru Oct 2009) Standard for


Conduit-Steel

Schedule 40 and 80 Rigid PVC Conduit and
Fittings
UL 857 (2009) Busways
Items provided under this section shall be specifically suitable for the
following service conditions. Seismic details shall conform to UFC
3-310-04 SEISMIC DESIGN FOR BUILDINGS and Sections 13 09 00.00 44
ANTI-TERRORISM/FORCE PROTECTION MEASURESand 26 05 48.00 10 SEISMIC
PROTECTION FOR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT.
a. Altitude 300 feet.
b. Ambient Temperature -4 to 112 degrees F.
c. Seismic Parameters 1
1.3 SUBMITTALS

SD-02 Shop Drawings
Detail Drawings
As-Built Drawings
Drawings, as specified.
SD-03 Product Data
Fault Current Analysis

Protective Device
The study with protective device equipment submittals. No time

extension or similar contract modifications will be granted for
work arising out of the requirements for this study. Approval of
protective devices proposed shall be based on recommendations of
this study. The Government will not be responsible for any
changes to equipment, device ratings, settings, or additional
SECTION 33 70 02.00 10 Page 5

labor for installation of equipment or devices ordered and/or

procured prior to approval of the study.
Nameplates
Catalog cuts, brochures, circulars, specifications, product

data, and printed information in sufficient detail and scope to
verify compliance with the requirements of the contract documents.
Material and Equipment
A complete itemized listing of equipment and materials proposed

for incorporation into the work. Each entry shall include an item
number, the quantity of items proposed, and the name of the
manufacturer of each such item.
Installation Requirements
As a minimum, installation procedures for transformers,

substations, switchgear, and splices. Procedures shall include
cable pulling plans, diagrams, instructions, and precautions
required to install, adjust, calibrate, and test the devices and
equipment.
SD-06 Test Reports
Factory Tests
Certified factory test reports shall be submitted when the

manufacturer performs routine factory tests, including tests
required by standards listed in paragraph REFERENCES. Results of
factory tests performed shall be certified by the manufacturer, or
an approved testing laboratory, and submitted within 7 days
following successful completion of the tests. The manufacturer's
pass-fail criteria for tests specified in paragraph FIELD TESTING
shall be included.
Field Testing
A proposed field test plan, 30 days prior to testing the

installed system. No field test shall be performed until the test
plan is approved. The test plan shall consist of complete field
test procedures including tests to be performed, test equipment
required, and tolerance limits.
Operating Tests
Six copies of the tests report in 8-1/2 by 11 inch binders

having a minimum of three rings, including a separate section for
each test. Sections shall be separated by heavy plastic dividers
with tabs.
Cable Installation
Six copies of the information described below in 8-1/2 by 11 inch

binders having a minimum of three rings from which material may
readily be removed and replaced, including a separate section for
each cable pull. Sections shall be separated by heavy plastic
dividers with tabs, with all data sheets signed and dated by the
SECTION 33 70 02.00 10 Page 6

person supervising the pull.
a. Site layout drawing with cable pulls numerically identified.
b. A list of equipment used, with calibration certifications.

The manufacturer and quantity of lubricant used on pull.
c. The cable manufacturer and type of cable.
d. The dates of cable pulls, time of day, and ambient

temperature.
e. The length of cable pull and calculated cable pulling

tensions.
f. The actual cable pulling tensions encountered during pull.
SD-07 Certificates
Material and Equipment
Where materials or equipment are specified to conform to the

standards of the Underwriters Laboratories (UL) or to be
constructed or tested, or both, in accordance with the standards
of the American National Standards Institute (ANSI), the Institute
of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE), or the National
Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA), submit proof that the
items provided conform to such requirements. The label of, or
listing by, UL will be acceptable as evidence that the items
conform. Either a certification or a published catalog
specification data statement, to the effect that the item is in
accordance with the referenced ANSI or IEEE standard, will be
acceptable as evidence that the item conforms. A similar
certification or published catalog specification data statement to
the effect that the item is in accordance with the referenced NEMA
standard, by a company listed as a member company of NEMA, will be
acceptable as evidence that the item conforms. In lieu of such
certification or published data, the Contractor may submit a
certificate from a recognized testing agency equipped and
competent to perform such services, stating that the items have
been tested and that they conform to the requirements listed,
including methods of testing of the specified agencies.
Compliance with above-named requirements does not relieve the
Contractor from compliance with any other requirements of the
specifications.
Cable Joints
A certification that contains the names and the qualifications

of people recommended to perform the splicing and termination of
medium-voltage cables approved for installation under this
contract. The certification shall indicate that any person
recommended to perform actual splicing and terminations has been
adequately trained in the proper techniques and have had at least
three recent years of experience in splicing and terminating the
same or similar types of cables approved for installation. In
addition, any person recommended by the Contractor may be required
to perform a practice splice and termination, in the presence of
the Contracting Officer, before being approved as a qualified
SECTION 33 70 02.00 10 Page 7

installer of medium-voltage cables. If that additional

requirement is imposed, provide short sections of the approved
types of cables along with the approved type of splice and
termination kits, and detailed manufacturer's instruction for the
proper splicing and termination of the approved cable types.
Installation Engineer
Provide at least one onsite person in a supervisory position

with a documentable level of competency and experience to
supervise all cable pulling operations. A resume shall be
provided showing the cable installers' experience in the last
three years, including a list of references complete with points
of contact, addresses and telephone numbers.
Six copies of operation and maintenance manuals, within 7

calendar days following the completion of tests and including
assembly, installation, operation and maintenance instructions,
spare parts data which provides supplier name, current cost,
catalog order number, and a recommended list of spare parts to be
stocked. Manuals shall also include data outlining detailed
procedures for system startup and operation, and a troubleshooting
guide which lists possible operational problems and corrective
action to be taken. A brief description of all equipment, basic
operating features, and routine maintenance requirements shall
also be included. Documents shall be bound in a binder marked or
identified on the spine and front cover. A table of contents page
shall be included and marked with pertinent contract information
and contents of the manual. Tabs shall be provided to separate
different types of documents, such as catalog ordering
information, drawings, instructions, and spare parts data. Index
sheets shall be provided for each section of the manual when
warranted by the quantity of documents included under separate
tabs or dividers. Three additional copies of the instructions
manual shall be provided within 30 calendar days following the
manuals.
Submit detail drawings consisting of equipment drawings, illustrations,

schedules, instructions, diagrams manufacturers standard installation
drawings and other information necessary to define the installation and
enable the Government to check conformity with the requirements of the
contract drawings.
a. If departures from the contract drawings are deemed necessary by the

Contractor, complete details of such departures shall be included with
the detail drawings. Approved departures shall be made at no
additional cost to the Government.
b. Detail drawings shall show how components are assembled, function

together and how they will be installed on the project. Data and
drawings for component parts of an item or system shall be coordinated
SECTION 33 70 02.00 10 Page 8

and submitted as a unit. Data and drawings shall be coordinated and

included in a single submission. Multiple submissions for the same
equipment or system are not acceptable except where prior approval has
been obtained from the Contracting Officer. In such cases, a list of
data to be submitted later shall be included with the first
submission. Detail drawings shall consist of the following:
(1) Detail drawings showing physical arrangement, construction

details, connections, finishes, materials used in fabrication,
provisions for conduit or busway entrance, access requirements for
installation and maintenance, physical size, electrical
characteristics, foundation and support details, and equipment
weight. Drawings shall be drawn to scale and/or dimensioned. All
optional items shall be clearly identified as included or excluded.
(2) Internal wiring diagrams of equipment showing wiring as actually

provided for this project. External wiring connections shall be
clearly identified.
(3) Detail drawings shall as a minimum depict the installation of the

following items:
(a) Medium-voltage cables and accessories including cable

installation plan.
(b) Transformers.
(c) Substations.
(d) Switchgear.
(e) Pad-mounted loadbreak switches.
(f) Busways.
(g) Surge arresters.
1.4.2 As-Built Drawings
The as-built drawings shall be a record of the construction as installed.

The drawings shall include the information shown on the contract drawings
as well as deviations, modifications, and changes from the contract
drawings, however minor. The as-built drawings shall be a full sized set
of prints marked to reflect deviations, modifications, and changes. The
as-built drawings shall be complete and show the location, size,
dimensions, part identification, and other information. Additional sheets
may be added. The as-built drawings shall be jointly inspected for
accuracy and completeness by the Contractor's quality control
representative and by the Contracting Officer prior to the submission of
each monthly pay estimate. Upon completion of the work, provide three full
sized sets of the marked prints to the Contracting Officer for approval.
If upon review, the as-built drawings are found to contain errors and/or
omissions, they will be returned to the Contractor for correction. Correct
and return the as-built drawings to the Contracting Officer for approval
within 10 calendar days from the time the drawings are returned to the
Contractor.
SECTION 33 70 02.00 10 Page 9

Visually inspect devices and equipment when received and prior to

acceptance from conveyance. Protect stored items from the environment in
accordance with the manufacturer's published instructions. Damaged items
shall be replaced. Store oil filled transformers and switches in
accordance with the manufacturer's requirements. Wood poles held in
storage for more than 2 weeks shall be stored in accordance with ATIS O5.1.
Handle wood poles in accordance with ATIS O5.1, except that pointed tools
capable of producing indentations more than 1 inch in depth shall not be
used. Metal poles shall be handled and stored in accordance with the
1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS
One additional spare fuse or fuse element for each furnished fuse or fuse
element shall be delivered to the contracting officer when the electrical
system is accepted. Two complete sets of all special tools required for
maintenance shall be provided, complete with a suitable tool box. Special
tools are those that only the manufacturer provides, for special purposes
(to access compartments, or operate, adjust, or maintain special parts).
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 STANDARD PRODUCT
Provide material and equipment which are the standard product of a

manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of the product and that
2 years prior to bid opening. Items of the same classification shall be
identical including equipment, assemblies, parts, and components.
2.2 NAMEPLATES
2.2.1 General
Each major component of this specification shall have the manufacturer's

name, address, type or style, model or serial number, and catalog number on
a nameplate securely attached to the equipment. Nameplates shall be made
of noncorrosive metal. Equipment containing liquid dielectrics shall have
the type of dielectric on the nameplate. Sectionalizer switch nameplates
shall have a schematic with all switch positions shown and labeled. As a
minimum, nameplates shall be provided for transformers, circuit breakers,
meters, switches, and switchgear.
2.2.2 Liquid-Filled Transformer Nameplates
Power transformers shall be provided with nameplate information in

accordance with IEEE C57.12.00. Nameplates shall indicate the number of
gallons and composition of liquid-dielectric, and shall be permanently
marked with a statement that the transformer dielectric to be supplied is
non-polychlorinated biphenyl. If transformer nameplate is not so marked,
furnish manufacturer's certification for each transformer that the
dielectric is non-PCB classified, with less than 50 ppm PCB content in
accordance with paragraph LIQUID DIELECTRICS. Certifications shall be
related to serial numbers on transformer nameplates. Transformer
dielectric exceeding the 50 ppm PCB content or transformers without
certification will be considered as PCB insulated and will not be accepted.
SECTION 33 70 02.00 10 Page 10

2.3 CORROSION PROTECTION
2.3.1 Aluminum Materials
Aluminum shall not be used.
2.3.2 Ferrous Metal Materials
2.3.2.1 Hardware
Ferrous metal hardware shall be hot-dip galvanized in accordance with

ASTM A 153/A 153M and ASTM A 123/A 123M.
2.3.2.2 Equipment
Equipment and component items, including but not limited to transformer

stations and ferrous metal luminaries not hot-dip galvanized or porcelain
enamel finished, shall be provided with corrosion-resistant finishes which
shall withstand 120 hours of exposure to the salt spray test specified in
ASTM B 117 without loss of paint or release of adhesion of the paint primer
coat to the metal surface in excess of 1/16 inch from the test mark. The
scribed test mark and test evaluation shall be in accordance with
ASTM D 1654 with a rating of not less than 7 in accordance with TABLE 1,
(procedure A). Cut edges or otherwise damaged surfaces of hot-dip
galvanized sheet steel or mill galvanized sheet steel shall be coated with
a zinc rich paint conforming to the manufacturer's standard.
2.3.3 Finishing
Painting required for surfaces not otherwise specified and finish painting
of items only primed at the factory shall be as specified in Section
09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS.
2.4 CABLES
Cables shall be single conductor type unless otherwise indicated.
2.4.1 Medium-Voltage Cables
2.4.1.1 General
Cable construction shall be Type MV, conforming to NFPA 70 and UL 1072.

Cables shall be manufactured for use in duct applications.
2.4.1.2 Ratings
Cables shall be rated for a circuit voltage of 15 kV.
2.4.1.3 Conductor Material
Underground cables shall be soft drawn copper complying with ASTM B 3 and
ASTM B 8 for regular concentric and compressed stranding or ASTM B 496 for
compact stranding.
2.4.1.4 Insulation
Cable insulation shall be ethylene-propylene-rubber (EPR) insulation

conforming to the requirements of AEIC CS8. A 133 percent insulation level
shall be used on 5 kV, 15 kV and 25 kV rated cables. Comply with EPA
SECTION 33 70 02.00 10 Page 11

requirements in accordance with Section 01 62 35 RECYCLED / RECOVERED

MATERIALS.
2.4.1.5 Shielding
Cables rated for 2 kV and above shall have a semiconducting conductor

shield, a semiconducting insulation shield, and an overall copper wire
shield for each phase. The shield wire shall be sized to meet IEEE C2
requirements for a ground fault availability of the feeder; coordinate with
COR and DPW for the amperage rating..
2.4.1.6 Neutrals
Neutral conductors of shall be copper employing the same insulation and

jacket materials as phase conductors, except that a 600-volt insulation
rating is acceptable.
2.4.1.7 Jackets
Cables shall be provided with a polyethylene jacket. Direct buried cables

shall be rated for direct burial.
2.4.2 Low-Voltage Cables
Cables shall be rated 600 volts and shall conform to the requirements of
NFPA 70, and must be UL listed for the application or meet the applicable
section of either ICEA or NEMA standards.
2.4.2.1 Conductor Material
Underground cables shall be annealed copper complying with ASTM B 3 and

ASTM B 8. Intermixing of copper and aluminum conductors is not permitted.
2.4.2.2 Insulation
Insulation must be in accordance with NFPA 70, and must be UL listed for
the application or meet the applicable sections of either ICEA, or NEMA
standards.
2.4.2.3 Jackets
Multiconductor cables shall have an overall PVC outer jacket.
2.4.2.4 In Duct
Cables shall be single-conductor cable, in accordance with NFPA 70.
2.5 CABLE JOINTS, TERMINATIONS, AND CONNECTORS
2.5.1 Medium-Voltage Cable Joints
Medium-voltage cable joints shall comply with IEEE Std 404. Medium-voltage
cable terminations shall comply with IEEE Std 48. Joints shall be the
standard products of a manufacturer and shall be either of the factory
preformed type or of the kit type containing tapes and other required
parts. Joints shall have ratings not less than the ratings of the cables
on which they are installed. Splice kits may be of the heat-shrinkable
type for voltages up to 15 kV, of the premolded splice and connector type,
the conventional taped type, or the resin pressure-filled overcast taped
SECTION 33 70 02.00 10 Page 12

type for voltages up to 35 kV; except that for voltages of 7.5 kV or less a
resin pressure-filled type utilizing a plastic-tape mold is acceptable.
Joints used in manholes, handholes, vaults and pull boxes shall be
certified by the manufacturer for waterproof, submersible applications.
2.5.2 Medium-Voltage Separable Insulated Connectors
Separable insulated connectors shall comply with IEEE Std 386 and shall be
of suitable construction or standard splice kits shall be used. Separable
insulated connectors are acceptable for voltages up to 35 kV. Connectors
shall be of the loadbreak type as indicated, of suitable construction for
the application and the type of cable connected, and shall include cable
shield adaptors. Separable insulated connectors shall not be used as
substitutes for conventional permanent splices. External clamping points
and test points shall be provided.
2.5.3 Low-Voltage Cable Splices
Low-voltage cable splices and terminations shall be rated at not less than
600 Volts. Splices in conductors No. 10 AWG and smaller shall be made with
an insulated, solderless, pressure type connector, conforming to the
applicable requirements of UL 486A-486B. Splices in conductors No. 8 AWG
and larger shall be made with noninsulated, solderless, pressure type
connector, conforming to the applicable requirements of UL 486A-486B.
Splices shall then be covered with an insulation and jacket material
equivalent to the conductor insulation and jacket. Splices below grade or
in wet locations shall be sealed type conforming to NEMA C119.1 or shall be
waterproofed by a sealant-filled, thick wall, heat shrinkable,
thermosetting tubing or by pouring a thermosetting resin into a mold that
surrounds the joined conductors.
2.5.4 Terminations
Terminations shall be in accordance with IEEE Std 48, Class 1 or Class 2;

of the molded elastomer, wet-process porcelain, prestretched elastomer,
heat-shrinkable elastomer, or taped type. Acceptable elastomers are
track-resistant silicone rubber or track-resistant ethylene propylene
compounds, such as ethylene propylene rubber or ethylene propylene diene
monomer. Separable insulated connectors may be used for apparatus
terminations, when such apparatus is provided with suitable bushings.
Terminations shall be of the outdoor type, except that where installed
inside outdoor equipment housings which are sealed against normal
infiltration of moisture and outside air, indoor, Class 2 terminations are
acceptable. Class 3 terminations are not acceptable. Terminations, where
required, shall be provided with mounting brackets suitable for the
intended installation and with grounding provisions for the cable
shielding, metallic sheath, and armor.
2.5.4.1 Factory Preformed Type
Molded elastomer, wet-process porcelain, prestretched, and heat-shrinkable

terminations shall utilize factory preformed components to the maximum
extent practicable rather than tape build-up. Terminations shall have
basic impulse levels as required for the system voltage level.
2.5.4.2 Taped Terminations
Taped terminations shall use standard termination kits providing terminal

connectors, field-fabricated stress cones, and rain hoods. Terminations
SECTION 33 70 02.00 10 Page 13

shall be at least 25 inches long from the end of the tapered cable jacket
to the start of the terminal connector, or not less than the kit
manufacturer's recommendations, whichever is greater.
2.6 CONDUIT AND DUCTS
Ducts shall be single, round-bore type, with wall thickness and fittings
suitable for the application. Refer to the drawings to whether a duct or
duct bank is to be direct-burial or concrete-encased. Where shown on the
plans, concrete encased duct lines shall be thin wall type. Where shown on
the plans, non-encased direct burial duct lines shall be thick wall type.
Duct lines shall be concrete-encased, thin-wall type for duct lines between
manholes and for other medium-voltage lines.
2.6.1 Metallic Conduit
Intermediate metal conduit shall comply with UL 1242. Rigid galvanized

steel conduit shall comply with UL 6 and NEMA C80.1. Metallic conduit
fittings and outlets shall comply with UL 514A and NEMA FB 1.
2.6.2 Concrete Encased Ducts
UL 651 Schedule 40 or NEMA TC 6 & 8 Type EB.

2.6.3 Direct Burial
UL 651 Schedule 80, or NEMA TC 6 & 8 Type DB.
2.6.4 Conduit Sealing Compound
Compounds for sealing ducts and conduit shall have a putty-like consistency
workable with the hands at temperatures as low as 35 degrees F, shall
neither slump at a temperature of 300 degrees F, nor harden materially when
exposed to the air. Compounds shall adhere to clean surfaces of fiber or
plastic ducts; metallic conduits or conduit coatings; concrete, masonry, or
lead; any cable sheaths, jackets, covers, or insulation materials; and the
common metals. Compounds shall form a seal without dissolving, noticeably
changing characteristics, or removing any of the ingredients. Compounds
shall have no injurious effect upon the hands of workmen or upon materials.
2.7 MANHOLES, HANDHOLES, AND PULLBOXES
Manholes, handholes, and pullboxes shall be as indicated. Strength of

manholes, handholes, and pullboxes and their frames and covers shall
conform to the requirements of IEEE C2. Precast-concrete manholes shall
have the required strength established by ASTM C 478, ASTM C 478M. Frames
and covers shall be made of gray cast iron and a machine-finished seat
shall be provided to ensure a matching joint between frame and cover. Cast
iron shall comply with ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class 30B, minimum. Handholes for
low voltage cables installed in parking lots, sidewalks, and turfed areas
shall be fabricated from an aggregate consisting of sand and with
continuous woven glass strands having an overall compressive strength of at
least 10,000 psi and a flexural strength of at least 5,000 psi. Pullbox
and handhole covers in sidewalks, and turfed areas shall be of the same
material as the box. Concrete pullboxes shall consist of precast
reinforced concrete boxes, extensions, bases, and covers.
2.8 TRANSFORMERS, SUBSTATIONS, AND SWITCHGEAR
Transformers, substations, and switchgear shall be of the outdoor type
SECTION 33 70 02.00 10 Page 14

having the ratings and arrangements indicated. Medium-voltage ratings of

cable terminations shall be 15 kV between phases for 133 percent insulation
level.
2.8.1 Pad-Mounted Transformers
Pad-mounted transformers shall comply with IEEE C57.12.26 and shall be of

the radial type. Pad-mounted transformer stations shall be assembled and
coordinated by one manufacturer and each transformer station shall be
shipped as a complete unit so that field installation requirements are
limited to mounting each unit on a concrete pad and connecting it to
primary and secondary lines. Stainless steel pins and hinges shall be
provided. Barriers shall be provided between high- and low-voltage
compartments. High-voltage compartment doors shall be interlocked with
low-voltage compartment doors to prevent access to any high-voltage section
unless its associated low-voltage section door has first been opened.
Compartments shall be sized to meet the specific dimensional requirements
of IEEE C57.12.26. Pentahead locking bolts shall be provided with
provisions for a padlock.
2.8.1.1 High-Voltage Compartments
The high-voltage compartment shall be dead-front construction. Primary

switching and protective devices shall include loadbreak switching,
oil-immersed, current-limiting, bayonet-type fuses, medium-voltage
separable loadbreak connectors, universal bushing wells and inserts or
integral one piece bushings and surge arresters. Fuses shall comply with
the requirements of paragraph METERING AND PROTECTIVE DEVICES. The switch
shall be mounted inside transformer tank with switch operating handle
located in high-voltage compartment and equipped with metal loop for hook
stick operation. Fuses shall be interlocked with switches so that fuses
can be removed only when the associated switch is in the "OPEN" position.
Adjacent to medium-voltage cable connections, a nameplate or equivalent
stencilled inscription shall be provided inscribed "DO NOT OPEN CABLE
CONNECTORS UNLESS SWITCH IS OPEN." Surge arresters shall be fully
insulated and configured to terminate on the same bushing as the primary
cable by means of a loadbreak, feed-through bushing insert.
2.8.1.2 Load-Break Switch
a. Radial-feed oil-immersed type rated at 15 kV, 95 kV BIL, with a

continuous current rating and load-break rating of 200 ampere, and a
make-and-latch rating of 10,000 rms amperes symmetrical. Locate the
switch handle in the high-voltage compartment.
2.8.1.3 Transformer Tank Sections
Transformers shall comply with IEEE C57.12.00 and IEEE C57.12.21 and shall
be of the mineral oil-insulated type. Transformers shall be suitable for
outdoor use and shall have 2 separate windings per phase. Standard NEMA
primary taps shall be provided. Where primary taps are not specified, 4,
2-1/2 percent rated kVA high-voltage taps shall be provided 2 above and 2
below rated, primary voltage. Operating handles for primary tap changers
for de-energized operation shall be located within high-voltage
compartments, externally to transformer tanks. Adjacent to the tap changer
operating handle, a nameplate or equivalent stenciled inscription shall be
provided and inscribed "DO NOT OPERATE UNDER LOAD." Transformer ratings at
60 Hz shall be as follows:
SECTION 33 70 02.00 10 Page 15

Three-phase capacity Refer to drawings kVA
Impedance Varies; Use manufacturer's

standard for 50-500 kVA, use 5.75
for 750-2500 KVA
Temperature Rise 149 degrees F
High-voltage winding 7960/13800 volts
High-voltage winding connections Delta
Low-voltage winding 277/480 volts
Low-voltage winding connections Wye
2.8.1.4 Low-Voltage Cable Compartments
Neutrals shall be provided with fully-insulated bushings. Clamp type cable

terminations, suitable for copper conductors entering from below, shall be
provided as necessary.
2.8.1.5 Accessories
High-voltage warning signs shall be permanently attached to each side of

transformer stations. Voltage warning signs shall comply with IEEE C2.
Copper-faced steel or stainless steel ground connection pads shall be
provided in both the high- and low-voltage compartments. Dial-type
thermometer, liquid-level gauge, and drain valve with built-in sampling
device shall be provided for each transformer station.
Insulated-bushing-type parking stands shall be provided adjacent to each
separable load-break elbow to provide for cable isolation during
sectionalizing operations.
2.8.2 Busways
Busways shall comply with NEMA BU 1.1 and UL 857 and shall be of the
voltage, phase, and continuous current ratings indicated. Neutrals shall
be full size. Busways shall have short-circuit ratings not less than the
maximum short-circuit currents of associated transformers, assuming primary
sources of infinite capacity. Busways shall be feeder-low-impedance type
and of outdoor or indoor service construction as suitable to the location.
Busways shall be complete with elbows, fittings, flanges, end-closures,
tees, crosses, cable-tap boxes, accessories, and other devices required for
the indicated installation, and shall be coordinated for connection to the
indicated equipment. For wet/damp locations, bus duct shall be heated,
nonventilated enclosure, nonsegregated phase type in accordance with
IEEE C37.23. Detail drawings for busway supports and bracing shall be
submitted in accordance with the detail drawings portion of paragraph
SUBMITTALS and shall indicate that busways are adequately supported for the
seismic forces specified in paragraph GENERAL REQUIREMENTS (sub-paragraph
Service Conditions).
SECTION 33 70 02.00 10 Page 16

2.9 METERING AND PROTECTIVE DEVICES
2.9.1 Circuit Breakers, Low-Voltage
2.9.1.1 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
NEMA AB 1 and UL 489.
2.9.2 Fuses, Medium-Voltage, Including Current-Limiting
Units shall be suitable for outdoor use. Fuses shall have integral
blown-fuse indicators. All ratings shall be clearly visible.
2.9.2.2 Ratings
Current-limiting power fuses shall have ratings in accordance with

IEEE C37.46.
2.9.2.3 E-Rated, Current-Limiting Power Fuses
E-rated, current-limiting, power fuses shall conform to IEEE C37.46.
2.9.2.4 C-Rated, Current-Limiting Power Fuses
C-rated, current-limiting power fuses shall open in 1000 seconds at

currents between 170 and 240 percent of the C rating.
2.9.3 Fuses, Low-Voltage, Including Current-Limiting
Low-voltage fuses shall conform to NEMA FU 1. Time delay and nontime delay
options shall be as specified. Equipment provided under this contract
shall be provided with a complete set of properly rated fuses when the
equipment manufacturer utilizes fuses in the manufacture of the equipment,
or if current-limiting fuses are required to be installed to limit the
ampere-interrupting capacity of circuit breakers or equipment to less than
the maximum available fault current at the location of the equipment to be
installed. Fuses shall have a voltage rating of not less than the
phase-to-phase circuit voltage, and shall have the time-current
characteristics required for effective power system coordination.
2.9.3.1 Transformer Circuit Fuses
Transformer circuit fuses shall be Class RK1 or RK5, current-limiting,

time-delay with 200,000 amperes interrupting capacity.
2.9.4 Instrument Transformers
2.9.4.1 General
Instrument transformers shall comply with NEMA C12.11 and IEEE C57.13.
Instrument transformers shall be configured for mounting in/on the device
to which they are applied. Polarity marks on instrument transformers shall
be visually evident and shown on drawings.
2.9.4.2 Current Transformers
Unless otherwise indicated, bar, wound, or window-type transformers are
SECTION 33 70 02.00 10 Page 17

acceptable; and except for window-type units installed over insulated

buses, transformers shall have a BIL rating consistent with the rated BIL
of the associated switchgear or electric power apparatus bushings, buses or
conductors. Other thermal and mechanical ratings of current transformers
and their primary leads shall be coordinated with the design of the circuit
breaker and shall be not less than the momentary rating of the associated
circuit breaker. Circuit protectors shall be provided across secondary
leads of the current transformers to prevent the accident open-circuiting
of the transformers while energized. Each terminal of each current
transformer shall be connected to a short-circuiting terminal block in the
circuit interrupting mechanism cabinet, power transformer terminal cabinet,
and in the associated instrument and relay cabinets.
2.9.4.3 Current Transformers for Power Transformers
Single-ratio bushing type current transformers shall be provided internally

around power transformer bushings as shown. Single-ratio units shall have
a minimum relaying accuracy class of 0.3B-0.5.
2.9.4.4 Current Transformers for Kwh and Demand Metering (Low-Voltage)
Current transformers shall conform to IEEE C57.13. Provide current

transformers with a metering accuracy Class of 0.3 through B-0.1, with a
minimum RF of 4.0 at 30 degrees C, with 600-volt insulations, and 10 kV
BIL. Provide butyl-molded, window-type current transformers mounted on the
transformer low-voltage bushings. Route current transformer leads in a
location as remote as possible from the power transformer secondary cables
to permit current measurements to be taken with hook-on-ammeters.
2.9.5 Watthour Meters Socket
See Entergy Specification DO0203, Rev.03 at the end of this Specification

Section 33 70 02.00..
2.9.6 Protective Relaying
2.9.6.1 General
Solid-state protective relays shall be provided as shown and shall be of a

type specifically designed for use on power switchgear or associated
electric power apparatus. Protective relays shall conform to IEEE C37.90.
Relays and auxiliaries shall be suitable for operation with the instrument
transformer ratios and connections provided.
Relays shall be dustproof and moisture resistant. Necessary test devices

shall be incorporated within each relay and shall provide a means for
testing either from an external source of electric power or from associated
instrument transformers. Each relay shall be provided with an operation
indicator and an external target reset device. Relays shall have necessary
auxiliaries for proper operation. Relays and auxiliaries shall be suitable
for operation with the instrument transformer ratios and connections
provided.
2.9.6.3 Ratings
Relays shall be the manufacturer's standard items of equipment with

appropriate ranges for time dial, tap, and other settings. Relay device
SECTION 33 70 02.00 10 Page 18

numbers shall correspond to the function names and descriptions of

IEEE C37.2.
2.10 SURGE ARRESTERS
Surge arresters shall comply with NEMA LA 1, and IEEE C62.11 and shall be
provided where indicated. Arresters shall be intermediate class, rated as
shown. Arresters for use at elevations in excess of 6000 feet above mean
sea level shall be specifically rated for that purpose. Arresters shall be
equipped with mounting brackets suitable for the indicated installations.
Arresters shall be of the metal-oxide varistor type.
2.11.1 Driven Ground Rods
Ground rods shall be copper-clad steel conforming to UL 467 not less than
3/4 inch in diameter by 10 feet in length. Sectional type rods may be
used.
2.11.2 Grounding Conductors
Grounding conductors shall be bare, except where installed in conduit with

associated phase conductors. Insulated conductors shall be of the same
material as phase conductors and green color-coded, except that conductors
shall be rated no more than 600 volts. Bare conductors shall be ASTM B 8
soft-drawn unless otherwise indicated. Aluminum is not acceptable.
2.12 CONCRETE AND REINFORCEMENT
Concrete work shall have minimum 3000 psi compressive strength and conform
to the requirements of Section 03 31 00.00 10 CAST-IN-PLACE STRUCTURAL
CONCRETE. Concrete reinforcing shall be as specified in Section
03 20 00.00 10 CONCRETE REINFORCING.
2.13 PADLOCKS
Padlocks shall comply with Section 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE.
2.14 CABLE FIREPROOFING SYSTEMS
Cable fireproofing systems shall be listed in FM P7825a as a

fire-protective coating or tape approved for grouped electrical conductors
and shall be suitable for application on the type of medium-voltage cables
provided. After being fully cured, materials shall be suitable for use
where exposed to oil, water, gases, salt water, sewage, and fungus and
shall not damage cable jackets or insulation. Asbestos materials are not
acceptable.
2.14.1 Fireproof Coating
Cable fireproofing coatings shall be compounded of water-based

thermoplastic resins, flame-retardant chemicals, and inorganic
noncombustible fibers and shall be suitable for the application methods
used. Coatings applied on bundled cables shall have a derating factor of
less than 5 percent, and a dielectric strength of 95 volts per mil minimum
after curing.
SECTION 33 70 02.00 10 Page 19

2.14.2 Fireproofing Tape
Fireproofing tape shall be at least 2 inches wide and shall be a flexible,

conformable, polymeric, elastomer tape designed specifically for
fireproofing cables.
2.14.3 Plastic Tape
Preapplication plastic tape shall be pressure sensitive, 10 mil thick,

conforming to UL 510.
2.15 LIQUID DIELECTRICS
Liquid dielectrics for transformers, capacitors, reclosers, and other

liquid-filled electrical equipment shall be non-polychlorinated biphenyl
(PCB) mineral-oil or less-flammable liquid as specified. Nonflammable
fluids shall not be used. Tetrachloroethylene (perchloroethylene) and 1,
2, 4 trichlorobenzene fluids shall not be used. Liquid dielectrics in
retrofitted equipment shall be certified by the manufacturer as having less
than 50 parts per million (ppm) PCB content. In lieu of the manufacturer's
certification, the Contractor may submit a test sample of the dielectric in
accordance with ASTM D 923 and have tests performed in accordance with
ASTM D 4059 at a testing facility approved by the Contracting Officer.
Equipment with test results indicating PCB level exceeding 50 ppm shall be
replaced.
2.16 FACTORY TESTS
Factory tests shall be performed, as follows, in accordance with the

applicable publications and with other requirements of these
specifications. The Contracting Officer shall be notified at least 10 days
before the equipment is ready for testing. The Contracting Officer
reserves the right to witness the tests.
a. Transformers: Manufacturer's standard routine tests in accordance with

IEEE C57.12.00.
b. Transformers rated 200 kVA and above: Reduced full-wave, chopped-wave,

and full-wave impulse test on each line and neutral terminal, in
accordance with IEEE C57.98.
c. High-Voltage Air Switches: Manufacturer's standard tests in accordance

with IEEE C37.34 and IEEE C37.41.
d. Protective Relays: Seismic tests in accordance with IEC 60255-21-3.

Surge withstand tests in accordance with IEEE C37.90.1.
e. Relaying Current Transformers: Manufacturer's standard tests in

f. Instrument Current Transformers: Manufacturer's standard tests in

g. Factory Preformed Terminations: Wet withstand voltage tests in

accordance with IEEE Std 48 for the next higher BIL level.
h. Outdoor Switchgear: Manufacturer's standard tests in accordance with

IEEE C37.20.1, IEEE C37.20.2, and IEEE C37.20.3.
SECTION 33 70 02.00 10 Page 20

i. Electrical Power Insulators: Manufacturer's standard tests in

accordance with NEMA C29.1.
2.17 FENCING
Fencing shall conform to the requirements of Section 32 31 13 CHAIN LINK

FENCES AND GATES.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
After becoming familiar with details of the work, verify dimensions in the
field, and advise the Contracting Officer of any discrepancy before
3.2 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
Equipment and devices shall be installed and energized in accordance with

the manufacturer's published instructions. Except as covered herein,
excavation, trenching, and backfilling shall conform to the requirements of
Section 31 00 00 EARTHWORK. Concrete work shall have minimum 3000 psi
compressive strength and conform to the requirements of Section
03 31 00.00 10 CAST-IN-PLACE STRUCTURAL CONCRETE.
3.2.1 Conformance to Codes
The installation shall comply with the requirements and recommendations of

NFPA 70 and IEEE C2 as applicable.
3.2.2 Disposal of Liquid Dielectrics
PCB-contaminated dielectrics must be marked as PCB and transported to and

incinerated by an approved EPA waste disposal facility. Furnish
certification of proper disposal. Contaminated dielectrics shall not be
diluted to lower the contamination level.
3.3 CABLE AND BUSWAY INSTALLATION
Obtain from the manufacturer an installation manual or set of instructions

which addresses such aspects as cable construction, insulation type, cable
diameter, bending radius, cable temperature, lubricants, coefficient of
friction, conduit cleaning, storage procedures, moisture seals, testing for
and purging moisture, etc. And then perform pulling calculations and
prepare a pulling plan which shall be submitted along with the
manufacturers instructions in accordance with SUBMITTALS.
3.3.1 Cable Installation Plan and Procedure
Cable shall be installed strictly in accordance with the cable

manufacturer's recommendations. Each circuit shall be identified by means
of a fiber, laminated plastic, or non-ferrous metal tags, or approved
equal, in each manhole, handhole, junction box, and each terminal. Each
tag shall contain the following information; cable type, conductor size,
circuit number, circuit voltage, cable destination and phase identification.
3.3.1.1 Cable Inspection
The cable reel shall be inspected for correct storage positions, signs of
physical damage, and broken end seals. If end seal is broken, moisture
SECTION 33 70 02.00 10 Page 21

shall be removed from cable in accordance with the cable manufacturer's

recommendations.
3.3.1.2 Duct Cleaning
Duct shall be cleaned with an assembly that consists of a flexible mandrel

(manufacturers standard product in lengths recommended for the specific
size and type of duct) that is 1/4 inch less than inside diameter of duct,
2 wire brushes, and a rag. The cleaning assembly shall be pulled through
conduit a minimum of 2 times or until less than a volume of 8 cubic inches
of debris is expelled from the duct.
3.3.1.3 Duct Lubrication
The cable lubricant shall be compatible with the cable jacket for cable
that is being installed. Application of lubricant shall be in accordance
with lubricant manufacturer's recommendations.
3.3.1.4 Cable Installation
Provide a cable feeding truck and a cable pulling winch as required.

Provide a pulling grip or pulling eye in accordance with cable
manufacturer's recommendations. The pulling grip or pulling eye apparatus
shall be attached to polypropylene or manilla rope followed by lubricant
front end packs and then by power cables. A dynamometer shall be used to
monitor pulling tension. Pulling tension shall not exceed cable
manufacturer's recommendations. Do not allow cables to cross over while
cables are being fed into duct. For cable installation in cold weather,
cables shall be kept at 50 degrees F temperature for at least 24 hours
before installation.
3.3.1.5 Cable Installation Plan
Submit a cable installation plan for all cable pulls in accordance with the
detail drawings portion of paragraph SUBMITTALS. Cable installation plan
shall include:
a. Site layout drawing with cable pulls identified in numeric order of

expected pulling sequence and direction of cable pull.
b. List of cable installation equipment.
c. Lubricant manufacturer's application instructions.
d. Procedure for resealing cable ends to prevent moisture from entering

cable.
e. Cable pulling tension calculations of all cable pulls.
f. Cable percentage conduit fill.
g. Cable sidewall thrust pressure.
h. Cable minimum bend radius and minimum diameter of pulling wheels used.
i. Cable jam ratio.
j. Maximum allowable pulling tension on each different type and size of

conductor.
SECTION 33 70 02.00 10 Page 22

k. Maximum allowable pulling tension on pulling device.
3.3.2 Duct Line
Cables shall be installed in duct lines where indicated. Cable splices in

low-voltage cables shall be made in manholes and handholes only, except as
otherwise noted. Cable joints in medium-voltage cables shall be made in
manholes or approved pullboxes only. Neutral and grounding conductors
shall be installed in the same duct with their associated phase conductors.
3.3.3 Electric Manholes
Cables shall be routed around the interior walls and securely supported
from walls on cables racks. Cable routing shall minimize cable crossover,
provide access space for maintenance and installation of additional cables,
and maintain cable separation in accordance with IEEE C2.
3.3.4 Busway Installation
Busways penetrating walls shall have wall flanges installed on both

surfaces of walls. Wall openings shall be approximately 1/4 inch larger
than the busway on each of the 4 busway sides, and openings shall be sealed
with a suitable compound. Fire barriers shall be provided when penetrating
fire rated walls. Fire barriers shall have a rating equal to the fire wall
rating. A weather barrier shall be used when a busway penetrates an
exterior wall. Busways shall be supported at intervals not exceeding 10
feet and shall be braced to prevent lateral movement.
3.4 CABLE JOINTS
Medium-voltage cable joints shall be made by qualified cable splicers only.

Qualifications of cable splicers shall be submitted in accordance with
paragraph SUBMITTALS. Shields shall be applied as required to continue the
shielding system through each entire cable joint. Shields may be
integrally molded parts of preformed joints. Shields shall be grounded at
each joint or in accordance with manufacturer's recommended practice.
Cable joints shall provide insulation and jacket equivalent to that of the
associated cable. Armored cable joints shall be enclosed in
compound-filled, cast-iron or alloy, splice boxes equipped with stuffing
boxes and armor clamps of a suitable type and size for the cable being
installed.
3.5 FIREPROOFING
Each medium-voltage cable and conductor in manholes shall be fire-proofed

for their entire length within the manhole. Where cables and conductors
have been lubricated to enhance pulling into ducts, the lubricant shall be
removed from cables and conductors exposed in the manhole before
fireproofing.
3.5.1 Tape Method
Before application of fireproofing tape, plastic tape wrapping shall be

applied over exposed metallic items such as the cable ground wire, metallic
outer covering, or armor to minimize the possibility of corrosion from the
fireproofing materials and moisture. Before applying fireproofing tape,
irregularities of cables, such as at cable joints, shall be evened out with
insulation putty. A flexible conformable polymeric elastomer fireproof
SECTION 33 70 02.00 10 Page 23

tape shall be wrapped tightly around each cable spirally in 1/2 lapped
wrapping or in 2 butt-jointed wrappings with the second wrapping covering
the joints of the first.
3.5.2 Sprayable Method
Manholes shall be power ventilated until coatings are dry and dewatered and
the coatings are cured. Ventilation requirements shall be in accordance
with the manufacturer's instruction, but not less than 10 air changes per
hour shall be provided. Cable coatings shall be applied by spray, brush,
or glove to a wet film thickness that reduces to the dry film thickness
approved for fireproofing by FM P7825a. Application methods and necessary
safety precautions shall be in accordance with the manufacturers
instructions. After application, cable coatings shall be dry to the touch
in 1 to 2 hours and fully cured in 48 hours, except where the manufacturer
has stated that because of unusual humidity or temperature, longer periods
may be necessary.
3.6 DUCT LINES
3.6.1 Requirements
Numbers and sizes of ducts shall be as indicated. Duct lines shall be laid
with a minimum slope of 4 inches per 100 feet. Depending on the contour of
the finished grade, the high-point may be at a terminal, a manhole, a
handhole, or between manholes or handholes. Short-radius manufactured
90-degree duct bends may be used only for pole or equipment risers, unless
specifically indicated as acceptable. The minimum manufactured bend radius
shall be 18 inches for ducts of less than 3 inch diameter, and 36 inches
for ducts 3 inches or greater in diameter. Otherwise, long sweep bends
having a minimum radius of 25 feet shall be used for a change of direction
of more than 5 degrees, either horizontally or vertically. Both curved and
straight sections may be used to form long sweep bends, but the maximum
curve used shall be 30 degrees and manufactured bends shall be used. Ducts
shall be provided with end bells whenever duct lines terminate in manholes
or handholes.
3.6.2 Treatment
Ducts shall be kept clean of concrete, dirt, or foreign substances during

construction. Field cuts requiring tapers shall be made with proper tools
and match factory tapers. A coupling recommended by the duct manufacturer
shall be used whenever an existing duct is connected to a duct of different
material or shape. Ducts shall be stored to avoid warping and
deterioration with ends sufficiently plugged to prevent entry of any water
or solid substances. Ducts shall be thoroughly cleaned before being laid.
Plastic ducts shall be stored on a flat surface and protected from the
direct rays of the sun.
3.6.3 Concrete Encasement
Ducts requiring concrete encasements shall comply with NFPA 70, except that
electrical duct bank configurations for ducts 6 inches in diameter shall be
determined by calculation and as shown on the drawings. The separation
between adjacent electric power and communication ducts shall conform to
IEEE C2. Duct line encasements shall be monolithic construction. Where a
connection is made to a previously poured encasement, the new encasement
shall be well bonded or doweled to the existing encasement. Submit
proposed bonding method for approval in accordance with the detail drawing
SECTION 33 70 02.00 10 Page 24

portion of paragraph SUBMITTALS. At any point, except railroad and

airfield crossings, tops of concrete encasements shall be not less than the
cover requirements listed in NFPA 70. At railroad and airfield crossings,
duct lines shall be encased with concrete and reinforced as indicated to
withstand specified surface loadings. Tops of concrete encasements shall
be not less than 5 feet below tops of rails or airfield paving unless
otherwise indicated. Where ducts are jacked under existing pavement, rigid
steel conduit will be installed because of its strength. To protect the
corrosion-resistant conduit coating, predrilling or installing conduit
inside a larger iron pipe sleeve (jack-and-sleeve) is required. For
crossings of existing railroads and airfield pavements greater than 50 feet
in length, the predrilling method or the jack-and-sleeve method will be
used. Separators or spacing blocks shall be made of steel, concrete,
plastic, or a combination of these materials placed not farther apart than
4 feet on centers. Ducts shall be securely anchored to prevent movement
during the placement of concrete and joints shall be staggered at least 6
inches vertically.
3.6.4 Nonencased Direct-Burial
Top of duct lines shall not be less than 24 inches below finished grade and
shall be installed with a minimum of 3 inches of earth around each duct,
except that between adjacent electric power and communication ducts, 12
inches of earth is required. Bottoms of trenches shall be graded toward
manholes or handholes and shall be smooth and free of stones, soft spots,
and sharp objects. Where bottoms of trenches comprise materials other than
sand, a 3 inch layer of sand shall be laid first and compacted to
approximate densities of surrounding firm soil before installing ducts.
Joints in adjacent tiers of duct shall be vertically staggered at least 6
inches. The first 6 inch layer of backfill cover shall be sand compacted
as previously specified. The rest of the excavation shall be backfilled
and compacted in 3 to 6 inch layers. Duct banks may be held in alignment
with earth. However, high-tiered banks shall use a wooden frame or
equivalent form to hold ducts in alignment prior to backfilling.
3.6.5 Installation of Couplings
Joints in each type of duct shall be made up in accordance with the

manufacturer's recommendations for the particular type of duct and coupling
selected and as approved.
3.6.5.1 Plastic Duct
Duct joints shall be made by brushing a plastic solvent cement on insides

of plastic coupling fittings and on outsides of duct ends. Each duct and
fitting shall then be slipped together with a quick 1/4-turn twist to set
the joint tightly.
3.6.6 Duct Line Markers
Duct line markers shall be provided at the ends of long duct line stubouts
or for other ducts whose locations are indeterminate because of duct
curvature or terminations at completely below-grade structures. In
addition to markers, a 5 mil brightly colored plastic tape, not less than 3
inches in width and suitably inscribed at not more than 10 feet on centers
with a continuous metallic backing and a corrosion-resistant 1 mil metallic
foil core to permit easy location of the duct line, shall be placed
approximately 12 inches below finished grade levels of such lines.
SECTION 33 70 02.00 10 Page 25

3.7 MANHOLES, HANDHOLES, AND PULLBOXES
3.7.1 General
Manholes shall be constructed approximately where shown. The exact

location of each manhole shall be determined after careful consideration
has been given to the location of other utilities, grading, and paving.
The location of each manhole shall be approved by the Contracting Officer
before construction of the manhole is started. Manholes shall be the type
noted on the drawings and shall be constructed in accordance with the
applicable details as indicated. Top, walls, and bottom shall consist of
reinforced concrete. Walls and bottom shall be of monolithic concrete
construction. The Contractor may, as an option, utilize monolithically
constructed precast-concrete manholes having the required strength and
inside dimensions as required by the drawings or specifications. In paved
areas, frames and covers for manhole and handhole entrances in vehicular
traffic areas shall be flush with the finished surface of the paving. In
unpaved areas, the top of manhole covers shall be approximately 1/2 inch
above the finished grade. Where existing grades that are higher than
finished grades are encountered, concrete assemblies designed for the
purpose shall be installed to elevate temporarily the manhole cover to
existing grade level. All duct lines entering manholes must be installed
on compact soil or otherwise supported when entering a manhole to prevent
shear stress on the duct at the point of entrance to the manhole. Duct
lines entering cast-in-place concrete manholes shall be cast in-place with
the manhole. Duct lines entering precast concrete manholes through a
precast knockout penetration shall be grouted tight with a portland cement
mortar. PVC duct lines entering precast manholes through a PVC endbell
shall be solvent welded to the endbell. A cast metal grille-type sump
frame and cover shall be installed over the manhole sump. A cable-pulling
iron shall be installed in the wall opposite each duct line entrance.
3.7.2 Electric Manholes
Cables shall be securely supported from walls by hot-dip galvanized cable

racks with a plastic coating over the galvanizing and equipped with
adjustable hooks and insulators. The number of cable racks indicated shall
be installed in each manhole and not less than 2 spare hooks shall be
installed on each cable rack. Insulators shall be made of high-glazed
porcelain. Insulators will not be required on spare hooks.
3.7.3 Communications Manholes
The number of hot-dip galvanized cable racks with a plastic coating over
the galvanizing indicated shall be installed in each telephone manhole.
Each cable rack shall be provided with 2 cable hooks. Cables for the
telephone and communication systems will be installed by others.
3.7.4 Handholes
Handholes shall be located approximately as shown. Handholes shall be of

the type noted on the drawings and shall be constructed in accordance with
the details shown.
3.7.5 Pullboxes
Pullbox tops shall be flush with sidewalks or curbs or placed 1/2 inch
above surrounding grades when remote from curbed roadways or sidewalks.
Covers shall be marked "Low-Voltage" and provided with 2 lifting eyes and 2
SECTION 33 70 02.00 10 Page 26

hold-down bolts. Each box shall have a suitable opening for a ground rod.
Conduit, cable, ground rod entrances, and unused openings shall be sealed
with mortar.
3.7.6 Ground Rods
A ground rod shall be installed at the manholes, handholes and pullboxes.

Ground rods shall be driven into the earth before the manhole floor is
poured so that approximately 4 inches of the ground rod will extend above
the manhole floor. When precast concrete manholes are used, the top of the
ground rod may be below the manhole floor and a No. 1/0 AWG ground
conductor brought into the manhole through a watertight sleeve in the
manhole wall.
3.8 PAD-MOUNTED EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
Pad-mounted equipment, shall be installed on concrete pads in accordance

with the manufacturer's published, standard installation drawings and
procedures, except that they shall be modified to meet the requirements of
this document. Units shall be installed so that they do not damage
equipment or scratch painted or coated surfaces. After installation,
surfaces shall be inspected and scratches touched up with a paint or
coating provided by the manufacturer especially for this purpose.
3.8.1 Concrete Pads
Concrete pads for pad-mounted electrical equipment shall be

poured-in-place. Pads shall be constructed as indicated, except that exact
pad dimensions and mounting details are equipment specific and are the
responsibility of the Contractor. Tops of concrete pads shall be level and
shall project 4 inches above finished paving or grade and sloped to drain.
Edges of concrete pads shall have 3/4 inch chamfer. Conduits for primary,
secondary, and grounding conductors shall be set in place prior to
placement of concrete pads. Where grounding electrode conductors are
installed through concrete pads, PVC conduit sleeves shall be installed
through the concrete to provide physical protection. To facilitate cable
installation and termination, the concrete pad shall be provided with a
rectangular hole below the primary and secondary compartments, sized in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommended dimensions. Upon completion
of equipment installation the rectangular hole shall be filled with masonry
grout.
3.8.1.2 Concrete and Reinforcement
Concrete work shall have minimum 3000 psi compressive strength and comform
to the requirements of Section 03 31 00.00 10 CAST-IN-PLACE STRUCTURAL
CONCRETE. Concrete pad reinforcement shall be in accordance with Section
03 20 00.00 10 CONCRETE REINFORCING.
3.8.1.3 Sealing
When the installation is complete, seal all conduit and other entries into
the equipment enclosure with an approved sealing compound. Seals shall be
of sufficient strength and durability to protect all energized live parts
of the equipment from rodents, insects, or other foreign matter.
SECTION 33 70 02.00 10 Page 27

3.8.2 Padlocks
Padlocks shall be provided for pad-mounted equipment and for each fence
gate. Padlocks shall be keyed as directed by the Contracting Officer.
3.9 CONNECTIONS BETWEEN AERIAL AND UNDERGROUND SYSTEMS
Connections between aerial and underground systems shall be made as shown.

Underground cables shall be extended up poles in guards to cable
terminations. Conduits shall be secured to the poles by 2-hole galvanized
steel pipe straps spaced not more than 10 feet apart and with 1 strap not
more than 12 inches from any bend or termination. Cable guards shall be
secured to poles in accordance with the manufacturer's published
procedures. Conduits shall be equipped with bushings to protect cables and
minimize water entry. Capnut potheads shall be used to terminate
medium-voltage multiple-conductor cable. Cables shall be supported by
devices separate from the conduit or guard, near their point of exit from
the conduit or guard. Pole installation shall be in accordance with
Section 33 71 01.00 40 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION.
3.10 CONNECTIONS TO BUILDINGS
Cables shall be extended into the building as indicated, and shall be

connected to the first applicable termination point in each building.
Interfacing with building interior conduit systems shall be at conduit
stubouts terminating 5 feet outside of a building and 2 feet below finished
grade, unless noted otherwise on the drawings. After installation of
cables, conduits shall be sealed with caulking compound to prevent entrance
of moisture or gases into buildings.
3.11 GROUNDING
A ground ring consisting of the indicated configuration of bare copper

conductors and driven ground rods shall be installed around pad-mounted
equipment as shown. Equipment frames of metal-enclosed equipment, and
other noncurrent-carrying metal parts, such as cable shields, cable sheaths
and armor, and metallic conduit shall be grounded. At least 2 connections
shall be provided from a transformer to the ground ring. Metallic frames
and covers of handholes and pull boxes shall be grounded by use of a
braided, copper ground strap with equivalent ampacity of No. 6 AWG.
3.11.1 Grounding Electrodes
Grounding electrodes shall be installed as shown on the drawings and as

follows:
a. Driven rod electrodes - Unless otherwise indicated, ground rods shall

be driven into the earth until the tops of the rods are approximately 1
foot below finished grade.
c. Ground ring - A ground ring shall be installed as shown consisting of

bare copper conductors installed not less than 30 inches below finished
top of soil grade. Ground ring conductors shall be sized as shown.
d. Additional electrodes - When the required ground resistance is not met,

additional electrodes shall be provided interconnected with grounding
conductors to achieve the specified ground resistance. The additional
SECTION 33 70 02.00 10 Page 28

electrodes will be up to three, 10 feet rods spaced a minimum of 12

feet apart coupled and driven with the first rod. In high ground
resistance, UL listed chemically charged ground rods may be used. If
the resultant resistance exceeds 25 ohms measured not less than 48
hours after rainfall, the Contracting Officer shall be notified
immediately.
3.11.2 Grounding and Bonding Connections
Connections above grade shall be made by the fusion-welding process or with

bolted solderless connectors, in compliance with UL 467, and those below
grade shall be made by a fusion-welding process. Where grounding
conductors are connected to aluminum-composition conductors, specially
treated or lined copper-to-aluminum connectors suitable for this purpose
shall be used.
3.11.3 Grounding and Bonding Conductors
Grounding and bonding conductors include conductors used to bond

transformer enclosures and equipment frames to the grounding electrode
system. Grounding and bonding conductors shall be sized as shown, and
located to provide maximum physical protection. Bends greater than 45
degrees in ground conductors are not permitted. Routing of ground
conductors through concrete shall be avoided. When concrete penetration is
necessary, nonmetallic conduit shall be cast flush with the points of
concrete entrance and exit so as to provide an opening for the ground
conductor, and the opening shall be sealed with a suitable compound after
installation.
3.11.4 Surge Arrester Grounding
Surge arresters and neutrals shall be bonded directly to the transformer

enclosure and then to the grounding electrode system with a bare copper
conductor, sized as shown. Lead lengths shall be kept as short as
practicable with no kinks or sharp bends.
3.11.5 Manhole, Handhole, or Concrete Pullbox Grounding
Ground rods installed in manholes, handholes, or concrete pullboxes shall

be connected to cable racks, cable-pulling irons, the cable shielding,
metallic sheath, and armor at each cable joint or splice by means of a No.
4 AWG braided tinned copper wire. Connections to metallic cable sheaths
shall be by means of tinned terminals soldered to ground wires and to cable
sheaths. Care shall be taken in soldering not to damage metallic cable
sheaths or shields. Ground rods shall be protected with a double wrapping
of pressure-sensitive plastic tape for a distance of 2 inches above and 6
inches below concrete penetrations. Grounding electrode conductors shall
be neatly and firmly attached to manhole or handhole walls and the amount
of exposed bare wire shall be held to a minimum.
3.11.6 Metal Splice Case Grounding
Metal splice cases for medium-voltage direct-burial cable shall be grounded

by connection to a driven ground rod located within 2 feet of each splice
box using a grounding electrode conductor having a current-carrying
capacity of at least 20 percent of the individual phase conductors in the
associated splice box, but not less than No. 6 AWG.
SECTION 33 70 02.00 10 Page 29

3.11.7 Riser Pole Grounding
A single continuous vertical grounding electrode conductor shall be

installed on each riser pole and connected directly to the grounding
electrodes indicated on the drawings or required by these specifications.
All equipment, neutrals, surge arresters, and items required to be grounded
shall be connected directly to this vertical conductor. The grounding
electrode conductor shall be sized as shown. Grounding electrode
conductors shall be stapled to wood poles at intervals not exceeding 2 feet.
3.12 FIELD TESTING
3.12.1 General
Field testing shall be performed in the presence of the Contracting

Officer. Notify the Contracting Officer 30 days prior to conducting
tests. Furnish all materials, labor, and equipment necessary to conduct
field tests. Perform all tests and inspections recommended by the
manufacturer unless specifically waived by the Contracting Officer.
Maintain a written record of all tests which includes date, test performed,
personnel involved, devices tested, serial number and name of test
equipment, and test results. Field test reports shall be signed and dated
by the Contractor.
3.12.2 Safety
Provide and use safety devices such as rubber gloves, protective barriers,
and danger signs to protect and warn personnel in the test vicinity.
Replace any devices or equipment which are damaged due to improper test
procedures or handling.
3.12.3 Ground-Resistance Tests
The resistance of each grounding electrode shall be measured using the

fall-of-potential method defined in IEEE Std 81. Ground resistance
measurements shall be made before the electrical distribution system is
energized and shall be made in normally dry conditions not less than 48
hours after the last rainfall. Resistance measurements of separate
grounding electrode systems shall be made before the systems are bonded
together below grade. The combined resistance of separate systems may be
used to meet the required resistance, but the specified number of
electrodes must still be provided.
a. Single rod electrode - 25 ohms.
b. Multiple rod electrodes - 25 ohms.
d. Ground ring - 25 ohms.
3.12.4 Ground-Ring Connection Inspection
All below-grade ground-ring connections will be visually inspected by the

Contracting Officer before backfilling. Notify the Contracting Officer 2
days before the site is ready for inspection.
3.12.5 Medium-Voltage Cable Test
After installation and before the operating test or connection to an

existing system, the medium-voltage cable system shall be given a high
SECTION 33 70 02.00 10 Page 30

potential test. Direct-current voltage shall be applied on each phase

conductor of the system by connecting conductors as one terminal and
connecting grounds or metallic shieldings or sheaths of the cable as the
other terminal for each test. Prior to making the test, the cables shall
be isolated by opening applicable protective devices and disconnecting
equipment. The test shall be conducted with all splices, connectors, and
terminations in place. The method, voltage, length of time, and other
characteristics of the test for initial installation shall be for the
particular type of cable installed, except that 28 kV and 35 kV insulation
test voltages shall be in accordance with either AEIC C8 or AEIC CS8 as
applicable, and shall not exceed the recommendations of IEEE Std 404 for
cable joints and IEEE Std 48 for cable terminations unless the cable and
accessory manufacturers indicate higher voltages are acceptable for
testing. Should any cable fail due to a weakness of conductor insulation
or due to defects or injuries incidental to the installation or because of
improper installation of cable, cable joints, terminations, or other
connections, make necessary repairs or replace cables as directed.
Repaired or replaced cables shall be retested.
3.12.6 Low-Voltage Cable Test
Low-voltage cable, complete with splices, shall be tested for insulation

resistance after the cables are installed, in their final configuration,
ready for connection to the equipment, and prior to energization. The test
voltage shall be 500 volts dc, applied for one minute between each
conductor and ground and between all possible combinations conductors in
the same trench, duct, or cable, with all other conductors in the same
trench, duct, or conduit. The minimum value of insulation shall be:
R in megohms = (rated voltage in kV + 1) x 1000/(length of cable in feet
Each cable failing this test shall be repaired or replaced. The repaired
cable shall be retested until failures have been eliminated.
3.12.7 Liquid-Filled Transformer Tests
The following field tests shall be performed on all liquid-filled

transformers. Pass-fail criteria shall be in accordance with transformer
manufacturer's specifications.
a. Insulation resistance test phase-to-ground.
b. Turns ratio test.
c. Correct phase sequence.
d. Correct operation of tap changer.
3.12.8 Circuit Breaker Tests
The following field tests shall be performed on circuit breakers.

Pass-fail criteria shall be in accordance with the circuit breaker
manufacturer's specifications.
a. Insulation resistance test phase-to-phase.
b. Insulation resistance test phase-to-ground.
c. Closed breaker contact resistance test.
SECTION 33 70 02.00 10 Page 31

d. Power factor test.
e. High-potential test.
f. Manual and electrical operation of the breaker.
3.12.9 Pre-Energization Services
Calibration, testing, adjustment, and placing into service of the

installation shall be accomplished by a manufacturer's product field
service engineer or independent testing company with a minimum of 2 years
of current product experience. The following services shall be performed
on the equipment listed below. These services shall be performed
subsequent to testing but prior to the initial energization. The equipment
shall be inspected to ensure that installation is in compliance with the
recommendations of the manufacturer and as shown on the detail drawings.
Terminations of conductors at major equipment shall be inspected to ensure
the adequacy of connections. Bare and insulated conductors between such
terminations shall be inspected to detect possible damage during
installation. If factory tests were not performed on completed assemblies,
tests shall be performed after the installation of completed assemblies.
Components shall be inspected for damage caused during installation or
shipment to ensure packaging materials have been removed. Components
capable of being both manually and electrically operated shall be operated
manually prior to the first electrical operation. Components capable of
being calibrated, adjusted, and tested shall be calibrated, adjusted, and
tested in accordance with the instructions of the equipment manufacturer.
Items for which such services shall be provided, but are not limited to,
are the following:
a. Secondary unit substation
b. Pad-mounted transformers
c. Panelboards
d. Switchboards
e. Metal-enclosed switchgear
f. Busways
g. Switches
3.12.10 Operating Tests
After the installation is completed, and at such times as the Contracting

Officer may direct, conduct operating tests for approval. The equipment
shall be demonstrated to operate in accordance with the requirements
herein. An operating test report shall be submitted including the
following:
a. A list of equipment used, with calibration certifications.
b. A copy of measurements taken.
c. The dates of testing.
SECTION 33 70 02.00 10 Page 32

d. The equipment and values to be verified.
e. The condition specified for the test.
f. The test results, signed and dated.
g. A description of adjustments made.
3.13 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICE
3.13.1 Onsite Training

functionally completed but prior to final acceptance tests. The course
instruction shall cover pertinent points involved in operating, starting,
stopping, and servicing the equipment, as well as all major elements of the
operation and maintenance manuals. Additionally, the course instructions
shall demonstrate all routine maintenance operations. A DVD recordingof
the entire training session shall be submitted.
3.13.2 Installation Engineer
After delivery of the equipment, furnish one or more field engineers,

regularly employed by the equipment manufacturer to supervise the
installation of the equipment, assist in the performance of the onsite
tests, initial operation, and instruct personnel as to the operational and
maintenance features of the equipment.
3.14 ACCEPTANCE
Final acceptance of the facility will not be given until the Contractor has
successfully completed all tests and after all defects in installation,
material or operation have been corrected.
SECTION 33 70 02.00 10 Page 33

SECTION 33 71 01.00 40
OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

ATIS ANSI O5.1 (2008) Wood Poles -- Specifications &

Dimensions
AWPA A3 (2005) Standard Method for Determining

Penetration of Preservatives and Fire
Retardants
AWPA C1 (2003) All Timber Products - Preservative

Treatment by Pressure Processes
AWPA C25 (2003) Sawn Crossarms - Preservative

Treatment by Pressure Processes
AWPA C4 (2003) Poles - Preservative Treatment by

Pressure Processes
AWPA T1 (2009) Use Category System: Processing and

Treatment Standard

Steel Products

Hardware
ASTM A 475 (2003; R 2009e1) Standard Specification




Medium-Hard-Drawn Copper Wire
SECTION 33 71 01.00 40 Page 1


Soft or Annealed Copper Wire

ASTM D 1625 (1971; R 2000) Standard Specifications for

Chromated Copper Arsenate

Environments

Materials
IEEE 100 (2000; Archived) The Authoritative

Dictionary of IEEE Standards Terms
IEEE 404 (2006) Standard for Extruded and Laminated

Dielectric Shielded Cable Joints Rated
2500 V to 500,000 V
IEEE C2 (2007; TIA 2007-1; TIA 2007-2; TIA 2007-3;

TIA 2007-4; TIA 2007-5; Errata 2006-1;
Errata 2007-2; Errata 2009-3) National
Electrical Safety Code
IEEE C37.42 (2009) Standard Specifications for

High-Voltage (> 1000 V) Expulsion-Type
Distribution-Class Fuses, Fuse and
Disconnecting Cutouts, Fuse Disconnecting
Switches, and Fuse Links, and Accessories
Used with These Devices
IEEE C62.11 (2005; Amd 1 2008) Standard for

NETA ATS (2009) Standard for Acceptance Testing

Specifications for Electrical Power
Equipment and Systems
ANSI C29.4 (1989; R 2002) Standard for Wet-Process

Porcelain Insulators - Strain Type
ANSI C29.5 (1984; R 2002) Wet-Process Porcelain

Insulators (Low and Medium Voltage Pin
Type)
ANSI C29.7 (1996; 2007) American National Standard

for Wet Process Porcelain Insulators -
SECTION 33 71 01.00 40 Page 2

High-Voltage Line Post Type
NEMA WC 74/ICEA S-93-639 (2006) 5-46 kV Shielded Power Cable for

Use in the Transmission and Distribution
of Electric Energy
RUS 202-1 (2004) List of Materials Acceptable for

Use on Systems of RUS Electrification
Borrowers
RUS Bull 1728H-701 (1993) Wood Crossarms (Solid and

Laminated), Transmission Timbers and Pole
Keys
RUS Bull 345-67 (1998) REA Specification for Filled

Telephone Cables, PE-39
UL 467 (2007) Grounding and Bonding Equipment
UL 486A-486B (2003; R 2004 - R 2010) Wire Connectors
UL 510 (2005; R 2008) Polyvinyl Chloride,

Polyethylene and Rubber Insulating Tape
UL 6 (2007) Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit-Steel
Section 26 08 00 APPARATUS INSPECTION AND TESTING applies to this section

with additions and modifications specified herein.
1.3 DEFINITIONS

used in these specifications, and on the drawings, are as defined in
IEEE 100.
1.4 SUBMITTALS

SD-03 Product Data
Conductors
Insulators
SECTION 33 71 01.00 40 Page 3

Wood Poles
Nameplates
Cutouts
Surge arresters
Guy strand
Anchors
SD-05 Design Data
Power-Installed Screw Foundations
SD-06 Test Reports
Wood Crossarm Inspection Report
Field Test Plan

Ground resistance test reports
Submit report of the acceptance test results as specified by

paragraph entitled "Field Quality Control"
SD-07 Certificates
Wood poles
Wood crossarms
Operation and Maintenance Manuals, Data Package 5

01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA and as specified herein.

provisions to be mandatory. Interpret references in these publications to
the "authority having jurisdiction," or words of similar meaning, to mean
the Contracting Officer. Provide equipment, materials, installation, and
workmanship in accordance with the mandatory and advisory provisions of
NFPA 70 and IEEE C2 unless more stringent requirements are specified or
indicated.
SECTION 33 71 01.00 40 Page 4


material, design and workmanship. Provide products that have been in
satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to bid
opening. The 2-year period includes applications of equipment and
materials under similar circumstances and of similar size. Provide a
product that has been on sale on the commercial market through
advertisements, manufacturers' catalogs, or brochures during the 2-year
period. Where two or more items of the same class of equipment are
required, provide items that are products of a single manufacturer;
however, the component parts of the item need not be the products of the
same manufacturer unless stated in this section.
Products having less than a 2-year field service record are acceptable if a
certified record of satisfactory field operation for not less than 6000
hours, exclusive of the manufacturers' factory or laboratory tests, is
furnished.
Do not use products manufactured more than 3 years prior to date of

delivery to site, unless specified otherwise.
1.5.3 Ground Resistance Test Reports
Submit the measured ground resistance of grounding system. When testing

grounding electrodes and grounding systems, identify each grounding
electrode and each grounding system for testing. Include the test method
and test setup (i.e. pin location) used to determine ground resistance and
soil conditions at the time the measurements were made.
1.5.4 Wood Crossarm Inspection Report
Furnish an inspection report from an independent inspection agency,

approved by the Contracting Officer, stating that offered products comply
with applicable AWPA and RUS standards. The RUS approved Quality Mark
"WQC" on each crossarm is acceptable, in lieu of inspection reports, as
evidence of compliance with applicable AWPA treatment standards.
1.5.4.1 Field Test Plan
Provide a proposed field test plan 30 days prior to testing the installed
system. Do not perform field test until the test plan is approved.
Provide a test plan that consists of complete field test procedures
including tests to be performed, test equipment required, and tolerance
limits.
1.6 MAINTENANCE
1.6.1 Additions to Operations and Maintenance Data
In addition to requirements of Data Package 5, include the following in the

operation and maintenance manuals provided:
SECTION 33 71 01.00 40 Page 5

a. Assembly and installation drawings
b. Prices for spare parts and supply list
c. Date of purchase
Visually inspect devices and equipment when received and prior to

acceptance from conveyance. Protect stored items from the environment in
accordance with the manufacturer's published instructions. Replace damaged
items. Store oil filled transformers and switches in accordance with the
manufacturer's requirements. Store wood poles held in storage for more
than 2 weeks in accordance with ATIS ANSI O5.1. Handle wood poles in
accordance with ATIS ANSI O5.1, except do not use pointed tools capable of
producing indentations more than an inch in depth. Nails and holes are not
permitted in top of poles. Handle and store metal poles in accordance with
the manufacturer's instructions.
1.8 WARRANTY
Support the equipment items by service organizations which are reasonably

convenient to the equipment installation in order to render satisfactory
service to the equipment on a regular and emergency basis during the
warranty period of the contract.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Consider materials specified herein or shown on contract drawings which are

identical to materials listed in RUS 202-1 as conforming to requirements.
Provide equipment and component items, not hot-dip galvanized or porcelain
enamel finished, with corrosion-resistant finishes which withstand 120
hours of exposure to the salt spray test specified in ASTM B 117 without
loss of paint or release of adhesion of the paint primer coat to the metal
surface in excess of 1/16 inch from the test mark. Provide the described
test mark and test evaluation in accordance with ASTM D 1654 with a rating
of not less than 7 in accordance with TABLE 1, (procedure A). Coat cut
edges or otherwise damaged surfaces of hot-dip galvanized sheet steel or
mill galvanized sheet steel with a zinc rich paint conforming to the
manufacturer's standard.
2.2 POLES
Provide poles of lengths and classes indicated.
2.2.1 Wood Poles
Wood poles machine trimmed by turning, Southern Yellow Pine conforming to

ATIS ANSI O5.1 and RUS Bull 345-67. Gain, bore and roof poles before
treatment. If additional gains are required subsequent to treatment,
provide metal gain plates. Pressure treat poles with pentachlorophenol,
except do not treat Douglas Fir and Western Larch poles with CCA in
accordance with AWPA C1 and AWPA C4 as referenced in RUS Bull 345-67.
Ensure the quality of each pole with "WQC" (wood quality control) brand on
each piece, or by an approved inspection agency report.
SECTION 33 71 01.00 40 Page 6

2.2.2 Preservative
For preservative used for humid, harsh environment, provide Chromated

Copper Arsenate type (A)(B)(C) conforming to AWPA T1 and ASTM D 1625.
Treat wood poles with waterborne preservatives conforming to AWPA T1.
2.2.3 Preservative Application
Apply preservative treatment using a pressure process conforming to and

AWPA T1 for Southern Pine. Determine penetration of preservatives as
specified in AWPA A3 and obtain complete sapwood penetration.
Before treatment, roof, gain and bore poles that are to be given a
full-length preservative treatment. Plug unused holes in poles with
treated wood-dowel pins. Treat field-cut gains or field-bored holes in
poles with an approved preservative compound.
2.2.4 Storage
For poles stored for any reason more than 2 weeks, stack them on pressure
treated or decay-resistant skids of such dimensions and so arranged as to
support the poles without producing noticeable distortion. Stack poles in
a manner that permits free circulation of air; with the bottom poles of the
stacks at least 1-foot above ground level or any vegetation growing
thereon. No decayed or decaying wood is permitted to remain underneath
stored poles.
2.2.5 Handling
Do not drag treated poles along the ground. Do not use pole tongs, cant
hooks, and other pointed tools capable of producing indentations more than
1 inch in depth, in handling the poles. Do not apply tools to the
groundline section of any pole. Groundline section is that portion between
1 foot above and 2 feet below the ground line.
2.3 CROSSARMS AND BRACKETS
2.3.1 Wood Crossarms
Conform to RUS Bull 1728H-701. Pressure treat crossarms with

pentachlorophenol, chromated copper arsenate (CCA), or ammoniacal copper
arsenate (ACA). Provide treatment that conforms to AWPA C25. Provide
solid wood, distribution type crossarms, with a 1/4 inch 45 degree chamfer
on all top edges. Provide cross-sectional area minimum dimensions of 4-1/4
inches in height by 3-1/4 inches in depth in accordance with IEEE C2 for
Grade B construction. Provide crossarms that are 8 feet in length, except
use 10 foot crossarms for crossarm-mounted banked single-phase transformers
or elsewhere as indicated. Provide crossarms that are machined, chamfered,
trimmed, and bored for stud and bolt holes before pressure treatment.
Provide factory drilling for pole and brace mounting, for four pin or four
vertical line-post insulators, and for four suspension insulators, except
where otherwise indicated or required. Provide required climbing space and
wire clearances by drilling. Provide crossarms that are straight and free
of twists to within 1/10 inch per foot of length. Provide bend or twist
that is in one direction only.
SECTION 33 71 01.00 40 Page 7

2.3.2 Crossarm Braces
Provide steel angle as indicated. Provide braces with 60 inch span for 10
foot crossarms.
2.4 HARDWARE
Provide hot-dip galvanized hardware in accordance with ASTM A 153/A 153M

and ASTM A 123/A 123M.
2.4.1 Pins
Provide pins that are zinc-coated forged steel with lead-thread height to
suit the insulator to be installed, but not less than 4-1/2-inches high by
5/8-inch diameter. Provide shoulder that is not less than 2-inch diameter
and that is designed to distribute the load uniformly to the crossarm.
Provide shank that is not less than 5/8-inch diameter by 5-3/4-inch length,
equipped with a 2-inch square washer, nut, and locknut, and that projects
not less than 1/8 inch nor more than 2 inches beyond the locknut. Use
broad-based corner pins of drop-forged welded steel or malleable iron for
turning small angles, as indicated.
2.4.2 Hot-Line Clamps
Make connections to overhead primary conductors with hot-line clamps of the

screw type with concealed threads. Fill thread chamber with
corrosion-resistant compound. Provide hot-line clamp tap conductor of bare
soft-drawn seven-strand No. 4 copper, except that for the hot-line clamp
tap conductor for lateral lines No. 2 and larger, provide bare soft-drawn
copper of the same size and stranding as the lateral line.
Provide stirrups for hot-line clamp connections that are 4 by 4 inches, and
are constructed of bare hard-drawn copper the same size as the tap line but
not less than No. 4.
2.4.3 Secondary Racks
Provide secondary racks that are the 2-, 3-, or 4-wire type as required and
are furnished complete with spool insulators.
Provide racks that meet industry requirements for the strength and
deflection of heavy-duty steel racks and that are either galvanized steel
or aluminum alloy.
Provide top of insulator points that are rounded and smooth. Hold
insulators in place with a 5/8-inch buttonhead bolt equipped with a
nonferrous cotter pin, or equivalent, at the bottom.
2.5 INSULATORS
Provide wet-process porcelain insulators which are radio interference free.
a. Line post type insulators: ANSI C29.7, Class 57-1.
SECTION 33 71 01.00 40 Page 8

b. Guy strain insulators: ANSI C29.4, Class 54-4
c. Pin insulators: ANSI C29.5, Class 55.3.
2.6 OVERHEAD CONDUCTORS, CONNECTORS AND SPLICES
Conductors of bare copper of sizes and types indicated. Where aluminum

conductors are connected to dissimilar metal, use fittings conforming to
UL 486A-486B.
2.6.1 Solid Copper
ASTM B 1, ASTM B 2, and ASTM B 3, hard-drawn, medium-hard-drawn, and

soft-drawn, respectively. ASTM B 8, stranded.
2.6.2 Connectors and Splices
Provide connectors and splices of copper alloys for copper conductors,

aluminum alloys for aluminum-composition conductors, and a type designed to
minimize galvanic corrosion for copper to aluminum-composition conductors.
Provide aluminum-composition, aluminum-composition to copper, and
copper-to-copper that complies with UL 486A-486B.
2.7 GUY STRAND
ASTM A 475, high-strength, Class A or B, galvanized strand steel cable.

Provide guy strand that is 1/2 inch in diameter with a minimum breaking
strength of 10,000 pounds. Provide guy terminations designed for use with
the particular strand and developing at least the ultimate breaking
strength of the strand.
2.8 ROUND GUY MARKERS
Vinyl or PVC material, yellow colored, 8 feet long and shatter resistant at
sub-zero temperatures.
2.8.1 Guy Attachment
Thimble eye guy attachment.
2.9 ANCHORS AND ANCHOR RODS
Provide anchors that present holding area indicated on drawings as a

minimum. Provide anchor rods that are triple thimble-eye, one inch
diameter by 8 feet long. Provide anchors and anchor rods that are hot dip
galvanized.
2.9.1 Plate Anchors
Minimum area of 15 square inches and rated by manufacturer for 15,000 pounds
or more in soils classified as medium dense coarse sand and sandy gravels;
firm to stiff clays and silts.
2.10.1 Driven Ground Rods
Provide copper-clad steel ground rods conforming to UL 467 not less than
SECTION 33 71 01.00 40 Page 9

3/4 inch in diameter by 10 feet in length. Sectional type rods are

acceptable for rods 20 feet or longer.
2.10.2 Grounding Conductors
ASTM B 8. Provide soft drawn copper wire ground conductors a minimum No. 4
AWG. Provide PVC ground wire protectors.
2.10.3 Grounding Connections
UL 467. Exothermic weld or compression connector.
2.11 SURGE ARRESTERS
IEEE C62.11, metal oxide, polymeric-housed, surge arresters arranged for

crossarm mounting. Provide 15 kV RMS voltage rating. Provide Distribution
class arresters.
2.12 FUSED CUTOUTS
Open type fused cutouts rated 100 amperes and 10,000 amperes symmetrical
interrupting current at 15 kV ungrounded, conforming to IEEE C37.42. Type K
fuses conforming to IEEE C37.42 with ampere ratings as indicated. Open
link type fuse cutouts are not acceptable.
2.13 CONDUIT RISERS AND CONDUCTORS
Provide PVC riser shield containing a PVC back plate and PVC extension
shield or a rigid galvanized steel conduit, as indicated, and conforming to
UL 6. Provide conductors and terminations as specified in Section
33 70 02.00 10 ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM, UNDERGROUND.
2.14 ELECTRICAL TAPES
Provide UL listed tapes for electrical insulation and other purposes in

wire and cable splices. Provide terminations, repairs and miscellaneous
purposes, electrical tapes that comply with UL 510.
2.15 CALKING COMPOUND
Provide compound for sealing of conduit risers that is of a puttylike

consistency workable with hands at temperatures as low as 35 degrees F,
that does not slump at a temperature of 300 degrees F, and that does not
harden materially when exposed to air. Provide compound that readily
caulks or adheres to clean surfaces of the materials with which it is
designed to be used. Provide compound that has no injurious effects upon
the workmen or upon the materials.
2.16 NAMEPLATES
Provide each item of equipment with a nameplate bearing the manufacturer's

conspicuous place; the nameplate of the distributing agent is not
acceptable. Provide equipment containing liquid-dielectrics with the type
of dielectric on the nameplate.
SECTION 33 71 01.00 40 Page 10

2.16.2 Field Fabricated Nameplates

drawings. Identify the function and, when applicable, the position with
each nameplate inscription. Provide melamine plastic, 0.125 inch thick
nameplates, white with black center core. Provide matte finish surface.
Provide square corners. Accurately align lettering and engrave into the
core. Minimum size of nameplates is one by 2.5 inches. Minimum size of
lettering is 0.25 inch high normal block style.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
Provide overhead pole line installation conforming to requirements of

IEEE C2 for Grade B construction of overhead lines in light loading
districts and NFPA 70 for overhead services. Provide material required to
make connections into existing system and perform excavating, backfilling,
and other incidental labor. Consider street, alleys, roads and drives
"public." Provide pole configuration as indicated.
3.1.1 Tree Trimming
Where lines pass through trees, trim trees at least 15 feet clear on both
sides horizontally and below for medium-voltage lines, and 5 feet clear on
both sides horizontally and below for other lines. Do not allow a branch
to overhang horizontal clearances. Where trees are indicated to be removed
to provide a clear right-of-way, clearing is specified in Section 31 11 00
CLEARING AND GRUBBING.
3.1.2 Wood Pole Installation
Provide pole holes at least as large at the top as at the bottom and large
enough to provide 4 inch clearance between the pole and side of the hole.
3.1.2.1 Setting Depth of Pole
Provide pole setting depths as follows:
Length of Pole Setting in Soil Setting in Solid Rock

(feet) (feet) (feet)
20 5.0 3.0
25 5.5 3.5
30 5.5 3.5
35 6.0 4.0
40 6.0 4.0
45 6.5 4.5
50 7.0 4.5
55 7.5 5.0
60 8.0 5.0
65 8.5 5.5
70 9.0 5.5
75 9.5 6.0
80 10.0 6.0
85 10.5 6.5
90 11.0 6.5
95 11.5 7.0
SECTION 33 71 01.00 40 Page 11

Length of Pole Setting in Soil Setting in Solid Rock

(feet) (feet) (feet)
100 12.5 7.5
3.1.2.2 Setting in Soil, Sand, and Gravel
"Setting in Soil" depths, as specified in paragraph entitled "Setting Depth

of Pole," apply where the following occurs:
a. Where pole holes are in soil, sand, or gravel or any combination

of these;
b. Where soil layer over solid rock is more than 2 feet deep;
c. Where hole in solid rock is not substantially vertical; or
d. Where diameter of hole at surface of rock exceeds twice the

diameter of pole at same level. At corners, dead ends and other
points of extra strain, set poles that are 40 feet or more long 6
inches deeper.
3.1.2.3 Setting in Solid Rock
"Setting in Solid Rock," as specified in paragraph entitled "Setting Depth

of Pole," applies where poles are to be set in solid rock and where hole is
substantially vertical, approximately uniform in diameter and large enough
to permit use of tamping bars the full depth of hole.
3.1.2.4 Setting With Soil Over Solid Rock
Where a layer of soil 2 feet or less in depth over solid rock exists, make
depth of hole the depth of soil in addition to depth specified under
"Setting in Solid Rock" in paragraph entitled "Setting Depth of Pole,"
provided, however, that such depth does not exceed depth specified under
"Setting in Soil."
3.1.2.5 Setting on Sloping Ground
On sloping ground, always measure hole depth from low side of hole.
3.1.2.6 Backfill
Thoroughly tamp pole backfill for full depth of the hole and mound excess
fill around the pole.
3.1.2.7 Setting Poles
Set poles so that alternate crossarm gains face in opposite directions,

except at terminals and dead ends where gains of last two poles are on side
facing terminal or dead end. On unusually long spans, set poles so that
crossarm comes on side of pole away from long span. Where pole top pins
are used, place on opposite side of pole from gain, with flat side against
pole.
3.1.2.8 Alignment of Poles
Set poles in alignment and plumb except at corners, terminals, angles,
SECTION 33 71 01.00 40 Page 12

junctions, or other points of strain, set and rake them against the
strain. Set not less than 2 inches for each 10 feet of pole length above
grade, nor more than 4 inches for each 10 feet of pole length after
conductors are installed at required tension. When average ground run is
level, vary consecutive poles by not more than 5 feet in height. When
ground is uneven, keep poles differing in length to a minimum by locating
poles to avoid the highest and lowest ground points. If it becomes
necessary to shorten a pole, saw a piece off the top. Dig holes large
enough to permit the proper use of tampers to full depth of hole.
3.1.2.9 Pole Caps
Provide plastic pole caps with 1/4 inch sealing rings and four nailing
tabs. Fill sealing area with either a bituminous, elastigum roof cement or
an acceptable preservative paste to level of sealing ring to eliminate
possibility of condensation. Place on pole top and nail each tab down with
a 1 1/4 inch nail.
3.1.2.10 Marking
Mark each pole in accordance with the requirements of ATIS ANSI O5.1.
Locate marking on the face of the pole approximately 10 feet from the butt
on the pole. Mark on the face of the pole at other locations standard with
the pole manufacturer, where approved by the Contracting Officer.
Number poles as indicated. Number poles not having numbers indicated as

directed by the Contracting Officer. Provide pole numbers that consist of
aluminum numerals and characters not less than 2-1/2-inches high fastened
to the pole with aluminum nails. Locate numerals to provide maximum
visibility from the road or patrol route.
3.1.3 Anchors and Guys
Place anchors in line with strain. Provide indicated length of the guy
lead (distance from base of pole to the top of the anchor rod).
3.1.3.1 Setting Anchors
Set anchors in place with anchor rod aligned with, and pointing directly
at, guy attachment on the pole with the anchor rod projecting 6 to 9 inches
out of ground to prevent burial of rod eye.
3.1.3.2 Backfilling Near Plate Anchors
Backfill plate anchors with tightly tamped earth for full depth of hole.
3.1.3.3 Guy Installation
Provide guys where indicated, with loads and strengths as indicated, and
wherever conductor tensions are not balanced, such as at angles, corners
and dead-ends. Where single guy do not provide the required strength,
provide two or more guys. Where guys are wrapped around poles, provide at
least two guy hooks. Provide pole shims where guy tension exceeds 6000
pounds. Provide guy clamps 6 inches in length with three 5/8 inch bolts,
or offset-type guy clamps, or approved guy grips at each guy terminal.
Securely clamp plastic guy marker to the guy or anchor at the bottom and
top of marker.Complete anchor and guy installation, dead end to dead end,
and tighten guy before wire stringing and sagging is begun on that line
section. Provide strain insulators at a point on guy strand 8 feet minimum
SECTION 33 71 01.00 40 Page 13

from the ground and 6 feet minimum from the surface of pole.
3.1.4 Hardware
Provide hardware with washer against wood and with nuts and lock nuts
applied wrench tight. Provide locknuts on threaded hardware connections.
Provide M-F style locknuts and not palnut style.
3.1.5 Grounding
Unless otherwise indicated, provide grounding that conforms to IEEE C2 and

NFPA 70. Provide pole grounding electrodes with a resistance to ground not
exceeding 25 ohms. When work in addition to that indicated or specified is
directed in order to obtain specified ground resistance, apply provisions
of the contract covering changes.
3.1.5.1 Grounding Electrode Installation
Install grounding electrodes as follows:
a. Driven rod electrodes - Unless otherwise indicated, locate ground

rods approximately 3 feetout from base of the pole and drive into
the earth until the tops of the rods are approximately 1 foot
below finished grade. Evenly space multiple rods at least 10 feet
apart and connect together 2 feet below grade with a minimum No. 6
bare copper conductor.
b. Plate electrodes - Install plate electrodes in accordance with the

manufacturer's instructions and IEEE C2 and NFPA 70.
c. Ground resistance - Provide a driven ground rod with a maximum

resistance that does not exceed 25 ohms under normally dry
conditions. Whenever the required ground resistance is not met,
provide additional electrodes interconnected with grounding
conductors, to achieve the specified ground resistance. The
additional electrodes are up to three, 10 feet rods spaced a
minimum of 10 feet apartdriven perpendicular to grade. In high
ground resistance, use of UL listed chemically charged ground rods
is allowed. If the resultant resistance exceeds 25 ohms measured
not less than 48 hours after rainfall, notify the Contracting
Officer immediately.
3.1.5.2 Grounding Electrode Connections
Make above grade grounding connections on pole lines by exothermic weld or

by using a compression connector. Make below grade grounding connections
by exothermic weld. Make exothermic welds strictly in accordance with
manufacturer's written recommendations. Welds which have puffed up or
which show convex surfaces indicating improper cleaning, are not
acceptable. No mechanical connectors are required at exothermic
weldments. Provide compression connectors that are the type that uses a
hydraulic compression tool to provide correct pressure. Provide tools and
dies recommended by compression connector manufacturer. Provide an
embossing die code or similar method as visible indication that a connector
has been fully compressed on ground wire.
3.1.5.3 Grounding and Grounded Connections
a. Where no primary or common neutral exists, bond together surge
SECTION 33 71 01.00 40 Page 14

arresters and frames of equipment operating at over 750 volts and

connect to a dedicated primary grounding electrode.
b. Where no primary or common neutral exists, transformer secondary

neutral bushing, secondary neutral conductor, and bond together
frames of equipment operating at under 750 volts and connect to a
dedicated secondary grounding electrode.
c. When a primary or common neutral exists, connect all grounding and

grounded conductors to a common grounding electrode.
3.1.5.4 Protective Molding
Protect grounding conductors which are run on surface of wood poles by PVC
molding extending from ground line throughout communication and transformer
spaces.
3.1.6 CONDUCTOR INSTALLATION
3.1.6.1 Line Conductors
Unless otherwise indicated, install conductors in accordance with

manufacturer's approved tables of sags and tensions. Handle conductors
with care necessary to prevent nicking, kinking, gouging, abrasions, sharp
bends, cuts, flattening, or otherwise deforming or weakening conductor or
any damage to insulation or impairing its conductivity. Remove damaged
sections of conductor and splice conductor. Provide conductors that are
paid out with the free end of conductors fixed and cable reels portable,
except where terrain or obstructions make this method unfeasible. Make the
bend radius for any insulated conductor not less than the applicable NEMA
specification recommendation. Do not draw conductors over rough or rocky
ground, nor around sharp bends. When installed by machine power, provide
conductors that are drawn from a mounted reel through stringing sheaves in
straight lines clear of obstructions. Check the initial sag and tension,
in accordance with the manufacturer's approved sag and tension charts,
within an elapsed time after installation as recommended by the
manufacturer.
3.1.6.2 Connectors and Splices
Provide conductor splices, as installed, that exceed ultimate rated

strength of conductor and are of the type recommended by conductor
manufacturer. No splices are permitted within 10 feet of a support.
Provide connectors and splices that are mechanically and electrically
secure under tension and are of the nonbolted compression type. Make
splices have a tensile strength of not less than the rated breaking
strength of the conductor. Provide splice materials, sleeves, fittings,
and connectors that are noncorrosive and that do not adversely affect
conductors. Wire brush and apply an oxide inhibitor to
aluminum-composition conductors before making a compression connection.
Connectors which are factory-filled with an inhibitor are acceptable.
Provide types of inhibitors and compression tools recommended by the
connector manufacturer. Provide primary line apparatus taps by means of
hot line clamps attached to compression type bail clamps (stirrups).
Provide solderless pressure type low-voltage connectors for copper
conductors. Smoothly tape noninsulated connectors to provide a waterproof
insulation equivalent to the original insulation, when installed on
insulated conductors. On overhead connections of aluminum and copper,
install the aluminum above the copper.
SECTION 33 71 01.00 40 Page 15

3.1.6.3 Conductor-To-Insulator Attachments
Attach conductors to insulators by means of clamps, shoes or tie wires, in

accordance with the type of insulator. For insulators requiring conductor
tie-wire attachments, provide tie-wire sizes as specified in TABLE I.
TABLE I
TIE-WIRE REQUIREMENTS
CONDUCTOR TIE WIRE

Copper (AWG) Soft-Drawn Copper (AWG)
6 8
4 and 2 6
1 through 3/0 4
4/0 and larger 2
AAC, AAAC, or ACSR (AWG) AAAC OR AAC (AWG)
Any size 6 or 4
3.1.6.4 Armor Rods
Provide armor rods for AAC, AAAC, and ACSR conductors. Install armor rods
at supports, except armor rods are not required at primary dead-end
assemblies if aluminum or aluminum-lined zinc-coated steel clamps are
used. Provide lengths and methods of fastening armor rods in accordance
with the manufacturer's recommendations. For span lengths of less than 200
feet, use of flat aluminum armor rods is allowed. Use flat armor rods, not
less than 0.03 by 0.25 inch on No. 1 AWG AAC and AAAC and smaller
conductors and on No. 5 AWG ACSR and smaller conductors. On larger sizes,
provide flat armor rods that are not less than 0.05 by 0.30 inches. For
span lengths of 200 feet or more, use preformed round armor rods.
3.1.6.5 Ties
Provide ties on pin insulators tight against conductor and insulator and
ends turned down flat against conductor so that no wire ends project.
3.1.6.6 New Conductor Installation
String new conductors to "initial" sag table values recommended by the

manufacturer for conductor type and size of conductor and ruling span
indicated.
3.1.6.7 Fittings
Provide dead end fittings that conform to written recommendations of

conductor manufacturer and that develop full ultimate strength of conductor.
3.1.6.8 Aluminum Connections
Make aluminum connections to copper or other material using only splices,

connectors, lugs, or fittings designed for that specific purpose. Keep a
copy of manufacturer's instructions for applying these fittings at job site
for use of the inspector.
SECTION 33 71 01.00 40 Page 16

3.1.7 Pole Top Switch Installation
Install pole top switch strictly according to manufacturer's installation

drawings and information.
3.1.7.1 Operating Handle
Locate approximately 5 feet above ground on field side of pole.
3.1.8 Risers
Secure galvanized steel conduits on poles by two hole galvanized steel pipe
straps spaced as indicated and within 3 feet of any outlet or termination.
Ground metallic conduits.
3.2 CROSSARM MOUNTING
Bolt crossarms to poles with 5/8 inchthrough-bolts with square washers at

each end. Extend bolts not less than 1/8 inch nor more than 2 inches
beyond nuts. On single crossarm construction, install the bolt head on the
crossarm side of the pole. Provide wood crossarm braces on crossarms.
Provide flat braces for 8 foot crossarms 1/4 by 1-1/4 inches, not less than
28 inches in length. Bolt flat braces to arms with 3/8 inch carriage
bolts with round or square washers between boltheads and crossarms, and
secure to poles with 1/2 by 4 inch lag screws after crossarms are leveled
and aligned. Angle braces are required for 10 foot crossarms. Provide
angle braces that are 60 inch span by 18 inch drop formed in one piece from
1-1/2 by 1-1/2 by 3/16 inch angle. Bolt angle braces to crossarms with 1/2
inch bolts with round or square washers between boltheads and crossarms,
and secure to poles with 5/8 inch through-bolts. Securely hold double
crossarms in position by means of 5/8 inch double-arming bolts. Equip each
double-arming bolt with four nuts and four square washers.
3.2.1 Line Arms and Buck Arms
Provide line arms and buck arms that are set at right angles to lines for
straight runs and for angles 45 degrees and greater; and line arms that
bisect angles of turns of less than 45 degrees. Use dead-end assemblies
for turns where shown. Install buck arms, as shown, at corners and
junction poles. Provide double crossarms at ends of joint use or conflict
sections, at dead-ends, and at angles and corners to provide adequate
vertical and longitudinal strength. Provide double crossarms at each
line-crossing structure and where lines not attached to the same pole cross
each other.
3.2.2 Equipment Arms
Set equipment arms parallel or at right angles to lines as required to

provide climbing space. Locate equipment arms below line construction to
provide necessary wire and equipment clearances.

or to meet the indicated or specified safety criteria. Provide painting as
specified in Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS.
SECTION 33 71 01.00 40 Page 17


3.5.1 General
Perform field testing in the presence of the Contracting Officer. Notify

the Contracting Officer 30 days prior to conducting tests. Furnish
materials, labor, and equipment necessary to conduct field tests. Perform
tests and inspections recommended by the manufacturer unless specifically
waived by the Contracting Officer. Maintain a written record of tests
which includes date, test performed, personnel involved, devices tested,
serial number and name of test equipment, and test results. Sign and date
field reports.
3.5.2 Safety
Provide and use safety devices such as rubber gloves, protective barriers,
and danger signs to protect and warn personnel in the test vicinity.
Replace any devices or equipment which are damaged due to improper test
procedures or handling.
3.5.3 Medium-Voltage Preassembled Cable Test
After installation, prior to connection to an existing system, and before

the operating test, give the medium-voltage preassembled cable system a
high potential test. Apply direct-current voltage on each phase conductor
of the system by connecting conductors at one terminal and connecting
grounds or metallic shieldings or sheaths of the cable at the other
terminal for each test. Prior to the test, isolate the cables by opening
applicable protective devices and disconnecting equipment. Provide the
method, voltage, length of time, and other characteristics of the test for
initial installation in accordance with NEMA WC 74/ICEA S-93-639 for the
particular type of cable installed, and do not exceed the recommendations
of IEEE 404 for cable joints unless the cable and accessory manufacturers
indicate higher voltages are acceptable for testing. For any cable that
fails due to a weakness of conductor insulation or due to defects or
injuries incidental to the installation or because of improper installation
of cable, cable joints, terminations, or other connections, make necessary
repairs or replace cables as directed. Retest repaired or replaced cables.
3.5.4 Sag and Tension Test
Give the Contracting Officer prior notice of the time schedule for
stringing conductors or cables serving overhead medium-voltage circuits.
The Contracting Officer reserves the right to witness the procedures used
for ascertaining that initial stringing sags and tensions are in compliance
with requirements for the applicable loading district and cable weight.
3.5.5 Pre-Energization Services
Perform the following services on the equipment listed below. Perform

these services subsequent to testing but prior to the initial
energization. Inspect the equipment to insure that installation is in
compliance with the recommendations of the manufacturer and as shown on the
SECTION 33 71 01.00 40 Page 18

detail drawings. Inspect terminations of conductors at major equipment to

ensure the adequacy of connections. Inspect bare and insulated conductors
between such terminations to detect possible damage during installation.
If factory tests were not performed on completed assemblies, perform tests
after the installation of completed assemblies. Inspect components for
damage caused during installation or shipment and to ensure that packaging
materials have been removed. Provide components capable of being both
manually and electrically operated that are operated manually prior to the
first electrical operation. Provide components capable of being
calibrated, adjusted, and tested and calibrate, adjust and test in
accordance with the instructions of the equipment manufacturer. Items for
which such services are provided, but are not limited to, are the following:
Capacitors.
Switches.
3.5.6 Performance of Acceptance Checks and Tests
Perform in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and include

the following visual and mechanical inspections and electrical tests,
performed in accordance with NETA ATS.
3.5.6.1 Grounding System
(1) Inspect ground system for compliance with contract plans and
specifications.
b. Electrical tests
(1) Perform ground-impedance measurements utilizing the

fall-of-potential method. On systems consisting of interconnected
ground rods, perform tests after interconnections are complete.
On systems consisting of a single ground rod perform tests before
any wire is connected. Take measurements in normally dry weather,
not less than 48 hours after rainfall. Use a portable ground
testing megger in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to
test each ground or group of grounds. Provide an instrument that
is equipped with a meter reading directly in ohms or fractions
thereof to indicate the ground value of the ground rod or
grounding systems under test.
3.5.7 Devices Subject to Manual Operation
Operate each device subject to manual operation at least three times,

demonstrating satisfactory operation each time.
3.5.8 Follow-Up Verification
Upon completion of acceptance checks and tests, show by demonstration in

service that circuits and devices are in good operating condition and
properly performing the intended function. As an exception to requirements
stated elsewhere in the contract, give the Contracting Officer 5 working
days advance notice of the dates and times of checking and testing.
SECTION 33 71 01.00 40 Page 19

SECTION 33 82 00
TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTSIDE PLANT (OSP)
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES




Materials
IEEE C2 (2007; Errata 2006 & 2007; INT 44-56 2007;

INT 47, 49, 50, 52-56 2008; INT 57, 58,
Safety Code

ICEA S-87-640 (2006) Fiber Optic Outside Plant

Communications Cable
ICEA S-98-688 (2006) Broadband Twisted Pair,

Telecommunications Cable Aircore,
Polyolefin Insulated Copper Conductors
ICEA S-99-689 (2006) Broadband Twisted Pair

Telecommunications Cable Filled,
Polyolefin Insulated Copper Conductors
NEMA C62.61 (1993) Gas Tube Surge Arresters on Wire

Line Telephone Circuits

Code - 2008 Edition

Telecommunications
TIA-455-107A (1999) Component Reflectance or

Link/System Return Loss using a Loss Test
Set
TIA-455-78 (2002B) FOTP-78 Optical Fibres - Part

1-40: Measurement Methods and Test
Procedures - Attenuation
TIA-472D000-A (1993) Fiber Optic Communications Cable

for Outside Plant Use
TIA-492CAAA (1998; R 2002) Class IVA

Dispersion-Unshifted Single-Mode Optical
Fibers
TIA-526-14-A (1998) OFSTP-14A Optical Power Loss

Measurements of Installed Multimode Fiber
Cable Plant
TIA-526-7 (2002; R 2008) Measurement of Optical

Power Loss of Installed Single-Mode Fiber
Cable Plant OFSTP-7

TIA-568-C.3 (2008e1) Optical Fiber Cabling Components

Standard
TIA-590-A (1997) Standard for Physical Location and

Protection of Below Ground Fiber Optic
Cable Plant
TIA-758-A (2004) Customer-Owned Outside Plant

TIA/EIA-455-B (1998) Standard Test Procedure for Fiber

Optic Fibers, Cables, Transducers,
Sensors, Connecting and Terminating
Devices, and other Fiber Optic Components
TIA/EIA-568-B.2 (2001) Commercial Building

Telecommunications Cabling Standard - Part
2: Balanced Twisted Pair Cabling Components

Pathways and Spaces
TIA/EIA-598-B (2001) Optical Fiber Cable Color Coding
TIA/EIA-606-A (2002) Administration Standard for the

Telecommunications Infrastructure
RUS 1755 Telecommunications Standards and

Specifications for Materials, Equipment
and Construction
RUS Bull 1751F-630 (1996) Design of Aerial Plant
RUS Bull 1751F-643 (2002) Underground Plant Design
RUS Bull 1751F-815 (1979) Electrical Protection of Outside

Plant
RUS Bull 1753F-201 (1997) Acceptance Tests of

Telecommunications Plant (PC-4)
RUS Bull 1753F-401 (1995) Splicing Copper and Fiber Optic

Cables (PC-2)
RUS Bull 345-65 (1985) Shield Bonding Connectors (PE-65)
RUS Bull 345-72 (1985) Filled Splice Closures (PE-74)
RUS Bull 345-83 (1979; Rev Oct 1982) Gas Tube Surge
Arrestors (PE-80)
UL 497 (2001; Rev thru Apr 2009) Protectors for

Paired Conductor Communication Circuits

Insulating Tape
UL 83 (20086) Standard for

Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables
Section 33 70 02.00 10, ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM, UNDERGROUND apply

to this section with additions and modifications specified herein.
1.3 DEFINITIONS

used in this specification shall be as defined in TIA-568-C.1,
TIA/EIA-568-B.2, TIA-568-C.3, TIA/EIA-569-A, TIA/EIA-606-A, and IEEE Std 100
and herein.
1.3.1 Campus Distributor (CD)
A distributor from which the campus backbone cabling emanates.

(International expression for main cross-connect - (MC).)
1.3.2 Entrance Facility (EF) (Telecommunications)
An entrance to the building for both private and public network service
cables (including antennae) including the entrance point at the building
wall and continuing to the entrance room or space.
1.3.3 Entrance Room (ER) (Telecommunications)
A centralized space for telecommunications equipment that serves the

occupants of a building. Equipment housed therein is considered distinct
from a telecommunications room because of the nature of its complexity.
1.3.4 Building Distributor (BD)
A distributor in which the building backbone cables terminate and at which

connections to the campus backbone cables may be made. (International
expression for intermediate cross-connect - (IC).)
1.3.5 Pathway
A physical infrastructure utilized for the placement and routing of

telecommunications cable.
The telecommunications outside plant consists of cable, conduit, manholes,

poles, etc. required to provide signal paths from the closest point of
presence to the new facility, including free standing frames or backboards,
interconnecting hardware, terminating cables, lightning and surge
protection modules at the entrance facility. The work consists of
providing, testing and making operational cabling, interconnecting hardware
and lightning and surge protection necessary to form a complete outside
plant telecommunications system for continuous use.
1.5 SUBMITTALS

approval. When used, a designation following the "G" designation
identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government.
The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Telecommunications Outside Plant
Telecommunications Entrance Facility Drawings
In addition to Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES, provide shop

drawings in accordance with paragraph SHOP DRAWINGS.
SD-03 Product Data
Wire and cable
Cable splices, and connectors
Closures
Building protector assemblies
Protector modules
Cross-connect terminal cabinets
Spare Parts
Submittals shall include the manufacturer's name, trade name,

place of manufacture, and catalog model or number. Submittals
shall also include applicable federal, military, industry, and
technical society publication references. Should manufacturer's
data require supplemental information for clarification, the
supplemental information shall be submitted as specified in
paragraph REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS and as required for certificates
in Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES.
SD-06 Test Reports
Pre-installation tests
Acceptance tests
Outside Plant Test Plan
SD-07 Certificates
Telecommunications Contractor Qualifications
Key Personnel Qualifications
Minimum Manufacturer's Qualifications
Building protector assembly installation
Cable tensions
Fiber Optic Splices
Submit instructions prior to installation.
Factory Reel Test Data
Telecommunications outside plant (OSP), Data Package 5
Commercial off-the-shelf manuals shall be provided for operation,

installation, configuration, and maintenance of products provided
as a part of the telecommunications outside plant (OSP). Submit
operations and maintenance data in accordance with Section 01 78 23,
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA and as specified herein not later
than months prior to the date of beneficial occupancy. In
addition to requirements of Data package 5, include the

requirements of paragraphs TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTSIDE PLANT SHOP
DRAWINGS and TELECOMMUNICATIONS ENTRANCE FACILITY DRAWINGS.
Record Documentation; G
In addition to other requirements, provide in accordance with

paragraph RECORD DOCUMENTATION.
1.6.1 Shop Drawings
Include wiring diagrams and installation details of equipment indicating

proposed location, layout and arrangement, control panels, accessories,
piping, ductwork, and other items that must be shown to ensure a
coordinated installation. Wiring diagrams shall identify circuit terminals
and indicate the internal wiring for each item of equipment and the
interconnection between each item of equipment. Drawings shall indicate
adequate clearance for operation, maintenance, and replacement of operating
equipment devices. Submittals shall include the nameplate data, size, and
capacity. Submittals shall also include applicable federal, military,
industry, and technical society publication references.
1.6.1.1 Telecommunications Outside Plant Shop Drawings
Provide Outside Plant Design in accordance with TIA-758-A,

RUS Bull 1751F-630 for aerial system design, and RUS Bull 1751F-643 for
underground system design. Provide T0 shop drawings that show the physical
and logical connections from the perspective of an entire campus, such as
actual building locations, exterior pathways and campus backbone cabling on
plan view drawings, major system nodes, and related connections on the
logical system drawings in accordance with TIA/EIA-606-A. Drawings shall
include wiring and schematic diagrams for fiber optic and copper cabling
and splices, copper conductor gauge and pair count, fiber pair count and
type, pathway duct and innerduct arrangement, associated construction
materials, and any details required to demonstrate that cable system has
been coordinated and will properly support the switching and transmission
system identified in specification and drawings. Update existing
telecommunication Outside Plant T0 drawings to include information
modified, deleted or added as a result of this installation in accordance
with TIA/EIA-606-A. The telecommunications outside plant (OSP) shop
drawings shall be included in the operation and maintenance manuals.
1.6.1.2 Telecommunications Entrance Facility Drawings
Provide T3 drawings for EF Telecommunications in accordance with

TIA/EIA-606-A that include telecommunications entrance facility plan views,
pathway layout (cable tray, racks, ladder-racks, etc.),
mechanical/electrical layout, and cabinet, rack, backboard and wall
elevations. Drawings shall show layout of applicable equipment including
incoming cable stub or connector blocks, building protector assembly,
outgoing cable connector blocks, patch panels and equipment spaces and
cabinet/racks. Drawings shall include a complete list of equipment and
material, equipment rack details, proposed layout and anchorage of
equipment and appurtenances, and equipment relationship to other parts of
the work including clearance for maintenance and operation. Drawings may
also be an enlargement of a congested area of T1 or T2 drawings. The

telecommunications entrance facility shop drawings shall be included in the
operation and maintenance manuals.
1.6.2 Telecommunications Qualifications
Work under this section shall be performed by and the equipment shall be
provided by the approved telecommunications contractor and key personnel.
Qualifications shall be provided for: the telecommunications system
contractor, the telecommunications system installer, the supervisor (if
different from the installer), and the cable splicing and terminating
personnel. A minimum of 30 days prior to installation, submit
documentation of the experience of the telecommunications contractor and of
the key personnel.
1.6.2.1 Telecommunications Contractor Qualifications
The telecommunications contractor shall be a firm which is regularly and

professionally engaged in the business of the applications, installation,
and testing of the specified telecommunications systems and equipment. The
telecommunications contractor shall demonstrate experience in providing
successful telecommunications systems that include outside plant and
broadband cabling within the past 3 years. Submit documentation for a
minimum of three and a maximum of five successful telecommunication system
installations for the telecommunications contractor. Each of the key
personnel shall demonstrate experience in providing successful
telecommunications systems in accordance with TIA-758-A within the past 3
years.
1.6.2.2 Key Personnel Qualifications
Provide key personnel who are regularly and professionally engaged in the
business of the application, installation and testing of the specified
telecommunications systems and equipment. There may be one key person or
more key persons proposed for this solicitation depending upon how many of
the key roles each has successfully provided. Each of the key personnel
shall demonstrate experience in providing successful telecommunications
systems within the past 3 years.
Cable splicing and terminating personnel assigned to the installation of

this system or any of its components shall have training in the proper
techniques and have a minimum of 3 years experience in splicing and
terminating the specified cables. Modular splices shall be performed by
factory certified personnel or under direct supervision of factory trained
personnel for products used.
Supervisors and installers assigned to the installation of this system or

any of its components shall have factory or factory approved certification
from each equipment manufacturer indicating that they are qualified to
install and test the provided products.
Submit documentation for a minimum of three and a maximum of five

successful telecommunication system installations for each of the key
personnel. Documentation for each key person shall include at least two
successful system installations provided that are equivalent in system size
and in construction complexity to the telecommunications system proposed
for this solicitation. Include specific experience in installing and
testing telecommunications outside plant systems, including broadband
cabling, and provide the names and locations of at least two project
installations successfully completed using optical fiber and copper

telecommunications cabling systems. All of the existing telecommunications
system installations offered by the key persons as successful experience
shall have been in successful full-time service for at least 18 months
prior to the issuance date for this solicitation. Provide the name and
role of the key person, the title, location, and completed installation
date of the referenced project, the referenced project owner point of
contact information including name, organization, title, and telephone
number, and generally, the referenced project description including system
size and construction complexity.
Indicate that all key persons are currently employed by the

telecommunications contractor, or have a commitment to the
telecommunications contractor to work on this project. All key persons
shall be employed by the telecommunications contractor at the date of
issuance of this solicitation, or if not, have a commitment to the
telecommunications contractor to work on this project by the date that the
bid was due to the Contracting Officer.
Note that only the key personnel approved by the Contracting Officer in the
successful proposal shall do work on this solicitation's telecommunications
system. Key personnel shall function in the same roles in this contract,
as they functioned in the offered successful experience. Any substitutions
for the telecommunications contractor's key personnel requires approval
from The Contracting Officer.
1.6.2.3 Minimum Manufacturer's Qualifications
Cabling, equipment and hardware manufacturers shall have a minimum of 3

years experience in the manufacturing, assembly, and factory testing of
components which comply with, TIA-568-C.1, TIA/EIA-568-B.2 and TIA-568-C.3.
In addition, cabling manufacturers shall have a minimum of 3 years
experience in the manufacturing and factory testing of cabling which comply
with ICEA S-87-640, ICEA S-98-688, and ICEA S-99-689.
1.6.3 Outside Plant Test Plan
Prepare and provide a complete and detailed test plan for field tests of
the outside plant including a complete list of test equipment for the
copper conductor and optical fiber cables, components, and accessories for
approval by the Contracting Officer. Include a cut-over plan with
procedures and schedules for relocation of facility station numbers without
interrupting service to any active location. Submit the plan at least 30
days prior to tests for Contracting Officer approval. Provide outside
plant testing and performance measurement criteria in accordance with
TIA-568-C.1 and RUS Bull 1753F-201. Include procedures for certification,
validation, and testing that includes fiber optic link performance criteria.
Provide materials and equipment that are standard products of manufacturers

material, design and workmanship and shall be the manufacturer's latest
standard design that has been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use
for at least 2 years prior to bid opening. The 2-year period shall include
applications of equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of
similar size. The product shall have been on sale on the commercial market
through advertisements, manufacturers' catalogs, or brochures during the 2
-year period. Products supplied shall be specifically designed and
manufactured for use with outside plant telecommunications systems. Where

two or more items of the same class of equipment are required, these items
shall be products of a single manufacturer; however, the component parts of
the item need not be the products of the same manufacturer unless stated in
this section.
if a certified record of satisfactory field operation for not less than 6000
hours, exclusive of the manufacturers' factory or laboratory tests, is
provided.


1.6.5.1 Independent Testing Organization Certificate
In lieu of the label or listing, submit a certificate from an independent

testing organization, competent to perform testing, and approved by the
Contracting Officer. The certificate shall state that the item has been
tested in accordance with the specified organization's test methods and
that the item complies with the specified organization's reference standard.
Ship cable on reels in in lengths such that no splicing is required except

as indicated on the drawingswith a minimum overage of 10 percent. Radius
of the reel drum shall not be smaller than the minimum bend radius of the
cable. Wind cable on the reel so that unwinding can be done without
kinking the cable. Two meters of cable at both ends of the cable shall be
accessible for testing. Attach permanent label on each reel showing
length, cable identification number, cable size, cable type, and date of
manufacture. Provide water resistant label and the indelible writing on
the labels. Apply end seals to each end of the cables to prevent moisture
from entering the cable. Reels with cable shall be suitable for outside
storage conditions when temperature ranges from minus 40 degrees C to plus
65 degrees C, with relative humidity from 0 to 100 percent. Equipment,
other than cable, delivered and placed in storage shall be stored with
protection from weather, humidity and temperature variation, dirt and dust,
or other contaminants in accordance with manufacturer's requirements.
1.8 MAINTENANCE
1.8.1 Record Documentation
Provide the activity responsible for telecommunications system maintenance

and administration a single complete and accurate set of record
documentation for the entire telecommunications system with respect to this
project.
Provide T5 drawings including documentation on cables and termination

hardware in accordance with TIA/EIA-606-A. T5 drawings shall include
schedules to show information for cut-overs and cable plant management,
patch panel layouts, cross-connect information and connecting terminal
layout as a minimum. T5 drawings shall be provided both in hard copy
formatand on electronic media using Windows based computer cable management
software. A licensed copy of the cable management software including
documentation, shall be provided. Update existing record documentation to
reflect campus distribution T0 drawings and T3 drawing schedule information
modified, deleted or added as a result of this installation. Provide the
following T5 drawing documentation as a minimum:
a. Cables - A record of installed cable shall be provided in

accordance with TIA/EIA-606-A. The cable records shall include
only the required data fieldsin accordance with TIA/EIA-606-A.
Include manufacture date of cable with submittal.
b. Termination Hardware - Provide a record of installed patch panels,

cross-connect points, campus distributor and terminating block
arrangements and type in accordance with TIA/EIA-606-A.
Documentation shall include the required data fields in accordance
with TIA/EIA-606-A.
1.9 WARRANTY

PART 2 PRODUCTS
Products supplied shall be specifically designed and manufactured for use

with outside plant telecommunications systems.
2.2 TELECOMMUNICATIONS ENTRANCE FACILITY
2.2.1 Building Protector Assemblies
Provide self-contained 5 pin unit supplied with a field cable stub factory
connected to protector socket blocks to terminate and accept protector
modules for number of pairs of outside cable as shown on the drawings.
Building protector assembly shall have interconnecting hardware for
connection to interior cabling at full capacity. Provide manufacturers
instructions for building protector assembly installation. Provide copper
cable interconnecting hardware as specified in Section 27 10 00, BUILDING
TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING SYSTEM.
2.2.2 Protector Modules
Provide in accordance with UL 497 three-electrode gas tube or solid state

type 5 pin rated for the application. Provide gas tube protection modules
in accordance with RUS Bull 345-83 and shall be heavy duty, A>10kA, B>400,
C>65A where A is the maximum single impulse discharge current, B is the
impulse life and C is the AC discharge current in accordance with
NEMA C62.61. The gas modules shall shunt high voltage to ground, fail
short, and be equipped with an external spark gap and heat coils in
accordance with UL 497. Provide the number of surge protection modules
equal to the number of pairs of exterior cable of the building protector
assembly.
2.2.3 Fiber Optic Terminations
Provide fiber optic cable terminations as specified in Section 16710,

BUILDING TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING SYSTEM.
2.3 CLOSURES
2.3.1 Copper Conductor Closures
2.3.1.1 Underground Cable Closures
c. In vault or manhole: Provide underground closure suitable to

house a straight, butt, and branch splice in a protective housing
into which can be poured an encapsulating compound. Closure shall
be of suitable thermoplastic, thermoset, or stainless steel
material supplying structural strength necessary to pass the
mechanical and electrical requirements in a vault or manhole
environment. Encapsulating compound shall be reenterable and
shall not alter the chemical stability of the closure. Provide
filled splice cases in accordance with RUS Bull 345-72.
2.3.2 Fiber Optic Closures
2.3.2.1 In Vault or Manhole
Provide underground closure suitable to house splice organizer in a

protective housing into which can be poured an encapsulating compound.
Closure shall be of thermoplastic, thermoset, or stainless steel material
supplying structural strength necessary to pass the mechanical and
electrical requirements in a vault or manhole environment. Encapsulating
compound shall be reenterable and shall not alter the chemical stability of
the closure.
2.4 CABLE SPLICES, AND CONNECTORS
2.4.1 Copper Cable Splices
Provide splices of a moisture resistant, two-wire connector held rigidly

in place to assure maximum continuity in accordance with RUS Bull 1753F-401.
Cables greater than 25 pairs shall be spliced using multipair splicing
connectors, which accommodate 25 pairs of conductors at a time. Provide
correct connector size to accommodate the cable gauge of the supplied cable.
2.4.2 Copper Cable Splice Connector
Provide splice connectors with a polycarbonate body and cap and a

tin-plated brass contact element. Connector shall accommodate 22 to 26 AWG
solid wire with a maximum insulation diameter of 0.065 inch. Fill
connector with sealant grease to make a moisture resistant connection, in
accordance with RUS Bull 1753F-401.
2.4.3 Fiber Optic Cable Splices
Provide fiber optic cable splices and splicing materials for fusion methods
at locations shown on the construction drawings. The splice insertion loss
shall be 0.3 dB maximum when measured in accordance with TIA-455-78 using
an Optical Time Domain Reflectometer (OTDR). Splices shall be designed for
a return loss of 40.0 db max for single mode fiber when tested in
accordance with TIA-455-107A. Physically protect each fiber optic splice
by a splice kit specially designed for the splice.
2.4.4 Fiber Optic Splice Organizer
Provide splice organizer suitable for housing fiber optic splices in a neat
and orderly fashion. Splice organizer shall allow for a minimum of 3 feet
of fiber for each fiber within the cable to be neatly stored without kinks
or twists. Splice organizer shall accommodate individual strain relief for
each splice and allow for future maintenance or modification, without
damage to the cable or splices. Provide splice organizer hardware, such as
splice trays, protective glass shelves, and shield bond connectors in a
splice organizer kit.
2.4.5 Shield Connectors
Provide connectors with a stable, low-impedance electrical connection

between the cable shield and the bonding conductor in accordance with
RUS Bull 345-65.
2.5 CONDUIT
Provide conduit as specified in Section 33 70 02.00 10, ELECTRICAL

DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM, UNDERGROUND.
2.6 PLASTIC INSULATING TAPE
UL 510.
2.7 WIRE AND CABLE
2.7.1 Copper Conductor Cable
Solid copper conductors, covered with an extruded solid insulating

compound. Insulated conductors shall be twisted into pairs which are then
stranded or oscillated to form a cylindrical core. For special high
frequency applications, the cable core shall be separated into
compartments. Cable shall be completed by the application of a suitable
core wrapping material, a corrugated copper or plastic coated aluminum
shield, and an overall extruded jacket. Telecommunications contractor
shall verify distances between splice points prior to ordering cable in
specific cut lengths. Gauge of conductor shall determine the range of
numbers of pairs specified; 19 gauge (6 to 400 pairs), 22 gauge (6 to 1200
pairs), 24 gauge (6 to 2100 pairs), and 26 gauge (6 to 3000 pairs). Copper
conductor shall conform to the following:
2.7.1.1 Underground
Provide filled cable meeting the requirements of ICEA S-99-689 and RUS 1755.390.
2.7.1.2 Screen
Provide screen-compartmental core cable filled cable meeting the

requirements of ICEA S-99-689 and RUS 1755.390.
2.7.2 Fiber Optic Cable
Provide single-mode, 8/125-um, 0.10 aperture 1310 nm fiber optic cable in

accordance with TIA-492CAAA, TIA-472D000-A, and ICEA S-87-640 including any
special requirements made necessary by a specialized design. Provide
optical fibers as indicated. Fiber optic cable shall be specifically
designed for outside use with loose buffer construction. Provide fiber
optic color code in accordance with TIA/EIA-598-B
2.7.2.1 Strength Members
Provide central, non-metallic strength members with sufficient tensile

strength for installation and residual rated loads to meet the applicable
performance requirements in accordance with ICEA S-87-640. The strength
member is included to serve as a cable core foundation to reduce strain on
the fibers, and shall not serve as a pulling strength member.
2.7.2.2 Performance Requirements
Provide fiber optic cable with optical and mechanical performance

requirements in accordance with ICEA S-87-640.
2.7.3 Grounding and Bonding Conductors
Provide grounding and bonding conductors in accordance with RUS 1755.200,

TIA J-STD-607-A, IEEE C2, and NFPA 70. Solid bare copper wire meeting the
requirements of ASTM B 1 for sizes No. 8 AWG and smaller and stranded bare
copper wire meeting the requirements of ASTM B 8, for sizes No. 6 AWG and
larger. Insulated conductors shall have 600-volt, Type TW insulation
meeting the requirements of UL 83.
2.8 CABLE TAGS IN MANHOLES, HANDHOLES, AND VAULTS
Provide tags for each telecommunications cable or wire located in manholes,

handholes, and vaults. Cable tags shall be polyethylene and labeled in
accordance with TIA/EIA-606-A. Handwritten labeling is unacceptable.
2.8.1 Polyethylene Cable Tags
Provide tags of polyethylene that have an average tensile strength of 3250

pounds per square inch; and that are 0.08 inch thick (minimum),
non-corrosive non-conductive; resistive to acids, alkalis, organic
solvents, and salt water; and distortion resistant to 170 degrees F.
Provide 0.05 inch (minimum) thick black polyethylene tag holder. Provide a
one-piece nylon, self-locking tie at each end of the cable tag. Ties shall
have a minimum loop tensile strength of 175 pounds. The cable tags shall
have black block letters, numbers, and symbols one inch high on a yellow
background. Letters, numbers, and symbols shall not fall off or change
positions regardless of the cable tags' orientation.
2.9 BURIED WARNING AND IDENTIFICATION TAPE
Provide fiber optic media marking and protection in accordance with

TIA-590-A. Provide color, type and depth of tape as specified in paragraph
BURIED WARNING AND IDENTIFICATION TAPE in Section 31 00 00, EARTHWORK.
2.10 GROUNDING BRAID
Provide grounding braid that provides low electrical impedance connections

for dependable shield bonding in accordance with RUS 1755.200. Braid
shall be made from flat tin-plated copper.

acceptable.
Provide laminated plastic nameplates in accordance with ASTM D 709 for each
patch panel, protector assembly, rack, cabinet and other equipment or as
indicated on the drawings. Each nameplate inscription shall identify the
function and, when applicable, the position. Nameplates shall be melamine
plastic, 0.125 inch thick, white with black center core. Surface shall be
matte finish. Corners shall be square. Accurately align lettering and
engrave into the core. Minimum size of nameplates shall be one by 2.5
inches. Lettering shall be a minimum of 0.25 inch high normal block style.
2.13 TESTS, INSPECTIONS, AND VERIFICATIONS
2.13.1 Factory Reel Test Data
Test 100 percent OTDR test of FO media at the factory in accordance with
TIA-568-C.1 and TIA-568-C.3. Use TIA-526-7 for single mode fiber and
TIA-526-14-A Method B for multi mode fiber measurements. Calibrate OTDR to
show anomalies of 0.2 dB minimum. Enhanced performance filled OSP copper
cables, referred to as Broadband Outside Plant (BBOSP), shall meet the
requirements of ICEA S-99-689. Enhanced performance air core OSP copper
cables shall meet the requirements of ICEA S-98-688. Submit test reports,
including manufacture date for each cable reel and receive approval before
delivery of cable to the project site.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
Install all system components and appurtenances in accordance with

manufacturer's instructions IEEE C2, NFPA 70, and as indicated. Provide
all necessary interconnections, services, and adjustments required for a
complete and operable telecommunications system.
3.1.1 Contractor Damage
Promptly repair indicated utility lines or systems damaged during site

preparation and construction. Damages to lines or systems not indicated,
which are caused by Contractor operations, shall be treated as "Changes"

under the terms of the Contract Clauses. When Contractor is advised in
writing of the location of a nonindicated line or system, such notice shall
provide that portion of the line or system with "indicated" status in
determining liability for damages. In every event, immediately notify the
Contracting Officer of damage.
3.1.2 Cable Inspection and Repair
Handle cable and wire provided in the construction of this project with
care. Inspect cable reels for cuts, nicks or other damage. Damaged cable
shall be replaced or repaired to the satisfaction of the Contracting
Officer. Reel wraps shall remain intact on the reel until the cable is
ready for placement.
3.1.3 Cable Protection
Provide direct burial cable protection in accordance with NFPA 70 and as

specified in Section 33 70 02.00 10, ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM,
UNDERGROUND. Galvanized conduits which penetrate concrete (slabs,
pavement, and walls) shall be PVC coated and shall extend from the first
coupling or fitting outside either side of the concrete minimum of 6 inches
per 12 inches burial depth beyond the edge of the surface where cable
protection is required; all conduits shall be sealed on each end. Where
additional protection is required, cable may be placed in galvanized iron
pipe (GIP) sized on a maximum fill of 40% of cross-sectional area, or in
concrete encased 4 inches PVC pipe. Conduit may be installed by jacking or
trenching. Trenches shall be backfilled with earth and mechanically tamped
at 6 inches lift so that the earth is restored to the same density, grade
and vegetation as adjacent undisturbed material.
3.1.3.1 Cable End Caps
Cable ends shall be sealed at all times with coated heat shrinkable end
caps. Cables ends shall be sealed when the cable is delivered to the job
site, while the cable is stored and during installation of the cable. The
caps shall remain in place until the cable is spliced or terminated.
Sealing compounds and tape are not acceptable substitutes for heat
shrinkable end caps. Cable which is not sealed in the specified manner at
all times will be rejected.
3.1.4 Underground Duct
Provide underground duct and connections to existing manholes, as

specified in Section 33 70 02.00 10, ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM,
UNDERGROUND with any additional requirements as specified herein.
3.1.5 Reconditioning of Surfaces
Provide reconditioning of surfaces as specified in Section 33 70 02.00 10,

ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM, UNDERGROUND.
3.1.6 Penetrations
Caulk and seal cable access penetrations in walls, ceilings and other parts
of the building. Seal openings around electrical penetrations through fire
resistance-rated wall, partitions, floors, or ceilings in accordance with
Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING.
3.1.7 Cable Pulling
Test duct lines with a mandrel and swab out to remove foreign material
before the pulling of cables. Avoid damage to cables in setting up pulling
apparatus or in placing tools or hardware. Do not step on cables when
entering or leaving the manhole. Do not place cables in ducts other than
those shown without prior written approval of the Contracting Officer.
Roll cable reels in the direction indicated by the arrows painted on the
reel flanges. Set up cable reels on the same side of the manhole as the
conduit section in which the cable is to be placed. Level the reel and
bring into proper alignment with the conduit section so that the cable pays
off from the top of the reel in a long smooth bend into the duct without
twisting. Under no circumstances shall the cable be paid off from the
bottom of a reel. Check the equipment set up prior to beginning the cable
pulling to avoid an interruption once pulling has started. Use a cable
feeder guide of suitable dimensions between cable reel and face of duct to
protect cable and guide cable into the duct as it is paid off the reel. As
cable is paid off the reel, lubricate and inspect cable for sheath
defects. When defects are noticed, stop pulling operations and notify the
Contracting Officer to determine required corrective action. Cable pulling
shall also be stopped when reel binds or does not pay off freely. Rectify
cause of binding before resuming pulling operations. Provide cable
lubricants recommended by the cable manufacturer. Avoid bends in cables of
small radii and twists that might cause damage. Do not bend cable and wire
in a radius less than 10 times the outside diameter of the cable or wire.
3.1.7.1 Cable Tensions
Obtain from the cable manufacturer and provide to the Contracting Officer,
the maximum allowable pulling tension. This tension shall not be exceeded.
3.1.7.2 Pulling Eyes
Equip cables 1.25 inches in diameter and larger with cable manufacturer's
factory installed pulling-in eyes. Provide cables with diameter smaller
than 1.25 inches with heat shrinkable type end caps or seals on cable ends
when using cable pulling grips. Rings to prevent grip from slipping shall
not be beaten into the cable sheath. Use a swivel of 3/4 inch links
between pulling-in eyes or grips and pulling strand.
3.1.7.3 Installation of Cables in Manholes, Handholes, and Vaults
Do not install cables utilizing the shortest route, but route along those
walls providing the longest route and the maximum spare cable lengths. Form
cables to closely parallel walls, not to interfere with duct entrances, and
support cables on brackets and cable insulators at a maximum of 4 feet. In
existing manholes, handholes, and vaults where new ducts are to be
terminated, or where new cables are to be installed, modify the existing
installation of cables, cable supports, and grounding as required with
cables arranged and supported as specified for new cables. Identify each
cable with corrosion-resistant embossed metal tags.
3.1.8 Cable Splicing
3.1.8.1 Copper Conductor Splices
Perform splicing in accordance with requirements of RUS Bull 1753F-401

except that direct buried splices and twisted and soldered splices are not
allowed. Exception does not apply for pairs assigned for carrier
application.
3.1.8.2 Fiber Optic Splices
Fiber optic splicing shall be in accordance with manufacturer's

recommendation and shall exhibit an insertion loss not greater than 0.2 dB
for fusion splices.
All cables and conductors, except fiber optic cable, which serve as
communication lines through off-premise lines, shall have surge protection
installed at each end which meet the requirements of RUS Bull 1751F-815.
3.1.10 Grounding
Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with RUS 1755.200,

TIA J-STD-607-A, IEEE C2, and NFPA 70. Ground exposed noncurrent carrying
metallic parts of telephone equipment, cable sheaths, cable splices, and
terminals.
3.1.10.1 Telecommunications Master Ground Bar (TMGB)
The TMGB is the hub of the basic telecommunications grounding system

providing a common point of connection for ground from outside cable, CD,
and equipment. Establish a TMGB for connection point for cable stub
shields to connector blocks and CD protector assemblies as specified in
Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS.
3.1.10.2 Incoming Cable Shields
Shields shall not be bonded across the splice to the cable stubs. Ground
shields of incoming cables in the EF Telecommunications to the TMGB.
3.1.10.3 Campus Distributor Grounding
a. Protection assemblies: Mount CD protector assemblies directly on

the telecommunications backboard. Connect assemblies mounted on
each vertical frame with No. 6 AWG copper conductor to provide a
low resistance path to TMGB.
b. TMGB connection: Connect TMGB to TGB with copper conductor with a

total resistance of less than 0.01 ohms.
3.1.11 Cut-Over
All necessary transfers and cut-overs, shall be accomplished by the

telecommunications contractor.
3.2 LABELING
3.2.1 Labels
Provide labeling for new cabling and termination hardware located within
the facility in accordance with TIA/EIA-606-A. Handwritten labeling is
unacceptable. Stenciled lettering for cable and termination hardware shall
be provided using either thermal ink transfer process or laser printer.
3.2.2 Cable Tag Installation
Install cable tags for each telecommunications cable or wire located in

manholes, handholes, and vaults including each splice. Tag new wire and
cable provided under this contract and existing wire and cable which are
indicated to have splices and terminations provided by this contract. The
labeling of telecommunications cable tag identifiers shall be in accordance
with TIA/EIA-606-A. Tag legend shall be as indicated. Do not provide
handwritten letters. Install cable tags so that they are clearly visible
without disturbing any cabling or wiring in the manholes, handholes, and
vaults.
3.2.3 Termination Hardware
Label patch panels, distribution panels, connector blocks and protection

modules using color coded labels with identifiers in accordance with
TIA/EIA-606-A.
Provide ferrous metallic enclosure finishes in accordance with the

following procedures. Ensure that surfaces are dry and clean when the
coating is applied. Coat joints and crevices. Prior to assembly, paint
surfaces which will be concealed or inaccessible after assembly. Apply
primer and finish coat in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
3.3.1 Cleaning
Clean surfaces in accordance with SSPC SP 6.
3.3.2 Priming
Prime with a two component polyamide epoxy primer which has a bisphenol-A
base, a minimum of 60 percent solids by volume, and an ability to build up
a minimum dry film thickness on a vertical surface of 5.0 mils. Apply in
two coats to a total dry film thickness of 5 to 8 mils.
3.3.3 Finish Coat
Finish with a two component urethane consisting of saturated polyester

polyol resin mixed with aliphatic isocyanate which has a minimum of 50
percent solids by volume. Apply to a minimum dry film thickness of 2 to 3
mils. Color shall be the manufacturer's standard.

Provide the Contracting Officer20 working days notice prior to each test.
Provide labor, equipment, and incidentals required for testing. Correct
defective material and workmanship disclosed as the results of the tests.
Furnish a signed copy of the test results to the Contracting Officer within
3 working days after the tests for each segment of construction are
completed. Perform testing as construction progresses and do not wait
until all construction is complete before starting field tests.
3.5.1 Pre-Installation Tests
Perform the following tests on cable at the job site before it is removed
from the cable reel. For cables with factory installed pulling eyes, these
tests shall be performed at the factory and certified test results shall
accompany the cable.
3.5.1.1 Cable Capacitance
Perform capacitance tests on at least 10 percent of the pairs within a

cable to determine if cable capacitance is within the limits specified.
3.5.1.2 Loop Resistance
Perform DC-loop resistance on at least 10 percent of the pairs within a

cable to determine if DC-loop resistance is within the manufacturer's
calculated resistance.
3.5.1.3 Pre-Installation Test Results
Provide results of pre-installation tests to the Contracting Officer at

least 5 working days before installation is to start. Results shall
indicate reel number of the cable, manufacturer, size of cable, pairs
tested, and recorded readings. When pre-installation tests indicate that
cable does not meet specifications, remove cable from the job site.
3.5.2 Acceptance Tests
Perform acceptance testing in accordance with RUS Bull 1753F-201 and as

further specified in this section. Provide personnel, equipment,
instrumentation, and supplies necessary to perform required testing.
Notification of any planned testing shall be given to the Contracting
Officer at least21 days prior to any test unless specified otherwise.
Testing shall not proceed until after the Contractor has received written
Contracting Officer's approval of the test plans as specified. Test plans
shall define the tests required to ensure that the system meets technical,
operational, and performance specifications. The test plans shall define
milestones for the tests, equipment, personnel, facilities, and supplies
required. The test plans shall identify the capabilities and functions to
be tested. Provide test reports in booklet form showing all field tests
performed, upon completion and testing of the installed system.
Measurements shall be tabulated on a pair by pair or strand by strand basis.
3.5.2.1 Copper Conductor Cable
Perform the following acceptance tests in accordance with TIA-758-A:
a. Wire map (pin to pin continuity)
b. Continuity to remote end
c. Crossed pairs
d. Reversed pairs
e. Split pairs
f. Shorts between two or more conductors
3.5.2.2 Fiber Optic Cable
Test fiber optic cable in accordance with TIA/EIA-455-B and as further

specified in this section. Two optical tests shall be performed on all
optical fibers: Optical Time Domain Reflectometry (OTDR) Test, and
Attenuation Test. In addition, a Bandwidth Test shall be performed on all
multimode optical fibers. These tests shall be performed on the completed
end-to-end spans which include the near-end pre-connectorized single fiber
cable assembly, outside plant as specified, and the far-end
pre-connectorized single fiber cable assembly.
a. OTDR Test: The OTDR test shall be used to determine the adequacy
of the cable installations by showing any irregularities, such as
discontinuities, micro-bendings or improper splices for the cable
span under test. Hard copy fiber signature records shall be
obtained from the OTDR for each fiber in each span and shall be
included in the test results. The OTDR test shall be measured in
both directions. A reference length of fiber, 66 feet minimum,
used as the delay line shall be placed before the new end
connector and after the far end patch panel connectors for
inspection of connector signature. Conduct OTDR test and provide
calculation or interpretation of results in accordance with
TIA-526-7 for single-mode fiber and TIA-526-14-A for multimode
fiber. Splice losses shall not exceed 0.3 db.
b. Attenuation Test: End-to-end attenuation measurements shall be

made on all fibers, in both directions, using a 1310 nanometer
light source at one end and the optical power meter on the other
end to verify that the cable system attenuation requirements are
met in accordance with TIA-526-7 for single-mode fiber optic
cables. The measurement method shall be in accordance with
TIA-455-78. Attenuation losses shall not exceed 0.5 db/km at 1310
nm and 1550 nm for single-mode fiber. Attenuation losses shall
not exceed 5.0 db/km at 850 nm and 1.5 db/km at 1300 nm for
multimode fiber.
SECTION 34 41 15.00 44
TRAFFIC AND HANDICAP PARKING SIGNS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

U.S. DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION (FEDERAL HIGHWAY ADMINISTRATION)

(USDOT)
USDOT-MUTCD (2000, incorporating Revision No. 1 dated

December 28, 2001 and Errata No. 1 dated
June 14, 2001) Manual on Uniform Traffic
Control Devices for Streets and Highways
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)

Welded and Seamless

Steel Products

Shapes
ASTM A501 (2007) Standard Specification for

Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon
Steel Structural Tubing

the Hot-Dip Process

Chromates on Aluminum
LOUISIANA DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION AND DEVELOPMENT (LaDOTD)
LaDOTD-SS (Current Issue) Louisiana Standard

Specifications For Roads and Bridges
SECTION 34 41 15.00 44 Page 1

NEW MEXICO STATE HIGHWAY AND TRANSPORTATION DEPARTMENT (NMSHTD)
TEXAS DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION (TxDOT)
1.2 SUBMITTALS

SD-02 Shop Drawings
Traffic and Handicap Parking Signs; G,PO.
Drawings shall include a schedule showing sign types, dimensions,

thicknesses, materials, mounting heights, post sizes, and
location; and installation details.
SD-06 Test Reports
Concrete; G,PO
Test report certifying the concrete strength when tested in

accordance with the testing procedures specified in Section
03 33 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE.
Deliver signs to the site in manufacturer's original wrappings and packages

clearly labeled with the manufacturer's name, brand name, size, type,
message, and related information. Store in a safe, dry, clean, and wall
ventilated area, protected from damage, soiling, and moisture. Store
packages flat. Do not open containers until needed for installation unless
verification inspection is required.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 TRAFFIC AND HANDICAP PARKING SIGNS
Except where otherwise indicated or specified, all materials shall conform

to USDOT-MUTCD. Unless otherwise shown, all signs shall be "standard"
sizes as specified in USDOT-MUTCD.
2.1.1 Signs
Signs shall be constructed of 0.08-inch aluminum sheet conforming to

LaDOTD-SS Section 1015 Signs and Pavement MarkersASTM B 209, alloy 6061-T6
or 5052-H38, degreased and etched, and shall be essentially a plane surface
free of buckles, weeps, dents, cockles, burrs, and other defects. Signs
shall be treated with a chromate chemical process resulting in a coating
meeting ASTM B 449, Class 2, light colored, tight, and free of powdery
residue. Sign faces shall be fully reflectorized with material conforming
to LaDOTD-SS Section 1015 Signs and Pavement Markers.
2.1.1.1 Handicap Symbol Sign and Parking Sign
Handicap symbol sign faces shall have a white symbol on a blue background,
SECTION 34 41 15.00 44 Page 2

with white border and shall be similar to Sign No. D9-5 in USDOT-MUTCD.
Parking sign faces shall have a green legend and border with white
background.
2.1.1.2 Handicap Parking Signs
Signs shall be similar to Sign No. R7-8 in USDOT-MUTCD.
2.2 POSTS
Posts shall be standard be standard Schedule 10 steel pipe conforming to

ASTM A 53/A 53M grade B, ASTM A 500/A 500M Grade B, or ASTM A501 and
galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A653/A653MG210,
with standard breakaway base system, and shall conform to the indicated
details. Breakaway base system shall be the type conforming to the state
specification and as shown on the drawings.
2.3 BOLTS, NUTS, WASHERS, AND CLAMPS
Bolts, nuts, washers, and clamps shall be either cadmium plated or

galvanized steel LaDOTD-SS Section 1015 Signs and Pavement Markers. Bolts
shall be a minimum of 5/16-inch in diameter. Clamps shall be two-piece
assemblies of at least 0.78-inch steel, or shall be an adjustable
steel-strap bracket as approved.
2.4 CONCRETE
Concrete shall be 3,000 psi conforming to Section 03300 CAST-IN-PLACE

STRUCTURAL CONCRETE.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
Except where otherwise indicated or specified, all work shall conform to

USDOT-MUTCD. Signs of the type and size indicated shall be installed in
locations shown on the drawings. Install breakaway signs so the breakaway
systems are not covered by slope material or other materials that would
interfere with the breakaway systems.
SECTION 34 41 15.00 44 Page 3

APPENDIX A - DESIGN PHASE COMMISSIONING PLAN
Dobbins ARB, GA
Design Phase Commissioning Plan

Company Operations Facility
Ft. Polk, Louisiana
Project FY12 MCA PN 064415
Contract Number: W9126G-08-D-0006
Task Order: 0040
Submitted to:
US Army Corps of Engineers, Fort Worth District
Submitted by:
Merrick & Company

229 Peachtree Street NE, Suite 600 • Atlanta, GA 30303
Tel: 404-739-5100 • Fax: 404-739-5101
www.merrick.com
62016994 31 August 2011

Design Phase Commissioning Plan
Maneuver Enhancement Brigade

Company Operations Facility
Table of Contents
1. Commissioning Program Overview
1.1 Goals and Objectives
1.2 Abbreviations and Definitions
1.3 Building Information
1.4 Systems to be Commissioned
2. Commissioning Team Members, Roles and Responsibilities
2.1.1 Owner
2.1.2 Commissioning Authority (CxA)
2.1.3 Commissioning Team Members
2.2 Roles and Responsibilities
2.2.1 General
2.2.2 Roles and Responsibilities
2.3 Communication Protocol, Coordination, Meetings and Management
2.3.1 Coordination of Commissioning During Design
2.3.1.1 Meetings
2.3.2 Coordination of Commissioning During Construction
2.3.3 Communication Protocols
3. Commissioning Tasks
3.1 Overview of Commissioning Tasks
3.2 Description of Commissioning Tasks
3.2.1 Owner’s Project Requirements
3.2.2 Basis of Design
3.2.3 Commissioning Specification Development
3.2.4 Review of Drawings and Specifications
3.2.4.1 Commissioning Facilitation
3.2.5 Pre-functional Checklists, Tests and Startup
3.2.5.1 Startup Plan
3.2.5.2 Execution of Checklists and Startup
3.2.5.3 Deficiencies and Non-conformance
3.2.5.4 Phased Commissioning
3.2.5.5 TAB
3.2.5.6 Controls Checkout Plan
3.2.6 Development of Functional Test and Verification Procedures
3.2.6.1 Overview
3.2.6.2 Scope of Testing
3.2.6.3 Development Process
3.2.6.4 Testing Plan Overview
3.2.7 Functional Testing
3.2.7.1 Overview and Process
3.2.7.2 Deficiencies and Retesting
3.2.7.3 Facility Staff and DOR Participation
3.2.7.4 Sampling
3.2.8 O&M Manuals and Warranties
3.2.8.1 Standard O&M Manuals
3.2.9 Training and Orientation of Owner Personnel
3.2.10 Commissioning Record
3.2.11 Summary Report
3.3 Warranty Period Activities
4. Schedule
4.1 Design Phase Schedule
4.2 Construction Phase Schedule
APPENDIX
Appendix 1 Pre-Functional Checklists
Appendix 2 Functional Performance Checklists
Appendix 3 Fire and Emergency Power Response Matrix
Appendix 4 Commissioning Report Format
Appendix 5 Systems Manual Outline
1. Commissioning Program Overview
1.1 Goals and Objectives
Commissioning (Cx) is a systematic process of ensuring that all the building’s energy related
systems are installed and calibrated and perform interactively according to the design intent and
the owner’s project requirements and operational needs. This is achieved by beginning at the
design phase with documented design and operating intent and continuing through construction
and acceptance with actual verification of performance.
Commissioning during design is intended to achieve the following specific objectives:
 Ensure that the owners program requirements are reflected in the design and are clearly
documented.
 Ensure that commissioning for the construction phase is adequately reflected in the
construction documents.
 Ensure the quality and completeness of submittals related to any commissioned system.
Commissioning during the construction of this project is intended to achieve the following specific
objectives:
 Verify that applicable equipment and systems are installed properly and receive adequate
operational checkout by installing contractors.
 Verify and document proper performance of equipment and systems through normal and other
likely operational modes necessary to meet design intent.
 Verify that O&M documentation provided to Owner is complete.
 Verify that the Owner’s operating personnel are adequately trained.
 Provide a Systems Manual for all commissioned systems for normal operation and recommissioing
activities.
1.2 Abbreviations and Definitions

The following are common abbreviations used in this document.
BOD Basis of Design FT Functional Performance Test
CxA Commissioning Authority GC General Contractor
CC Controls Contractor IPM Installation Project Manager
Cx Commissioning MC Mechanical Contractor
Cx Plan Commissioning Plan Document PC Pre-functional Checklist
DA Design Agent (Govt) PE Project Engineer (Govt)
DOR Designer of Record (USACE) PM Project Manager (Govt)
EC Electrical Contractor Subs Subcontractors to General
FM Facility Manager TAB Test and Balance Contractor
HVAC Heating, Ventilating and Air USACE U.S. Army Corps of Engineers
Conditioning
HVAC&R Heating, Ventilating, Air USER Facility User/Occupant
Conditioning and Refrigeration
1.3 Building Information
Project Name: Company Operations Facility
Location: Fort Polk, Louisiana
Building Type (office, court, etc.): Office, organization, and storage
Square Footage:__38,862 SF Expected number of stories: Two
Agency: Corp of Engineers Tenants: U.S. Army
Design Period: x/x/20xx-x/x/20xx Const. Period: ____x/x/20xx-x/x/20xx___
1.4 Systems to be Commissioned

The following systems will be commissioned in this project (see Appendix 1 for equipment list):
HVAC&R system (virtually all equipment)
 Chiller – WWHP-1
 Cooling Tower – CT-1
 Boiler – B-1
 Pumps – CP-1, CP-2, CP-3, CP-4, CHP-1, CHP-2
 Heat Exchanger – HEX-1
 Energy Recovery Ventilator – ERV-1, ERV-R1, ERV-R2
 Air Handling Unit – AHU-1
 Computer Room Air Conditioners – CRAC-1, CRAC-2, CRAC-R1
 Split-System Heat Pump – AGV
 Exhaust Fans – EF-1, EF-R1, EF-R2
 Water Source Heat Pumps – WHSP-R1, WSHP-R1M, WSHP-R2, WSHP-R2M
 Terminal Units – VAV-1 through VAV-11 (11)
HVAC controls
EMCS interface
Lighting controls
Domestic hot water system
 Gas – 2WH-1
 Electric – 2WHR-1, 2WHR-2, 2WHR-3
Renewable energy system (i.e. wind, solar, geothermal, low-impact hydropower)

 Solar Panel – SP-1
2. Commissioning Team Members, Roles and Responsibilities

The members of the commissioning team consist of the CxA, PM, IPM, assigned members of the
PE, GC, , the mechanical contractor, electrical contractor, TAB representative, controls contractor,
any other installing subcontractors or suppliers of equipment. The Owner’s building or plant
operator/ engineer is also a member of the commissioning team if possible.
2.1.1 Owner
This project is an Army Standard Design and the Owner is the Army Facility Design Team for this
standard with support from the Installation.
2.1.2 Commissioning Authority (CxA)

This project has design responsibility and construction responsibility in separate USACE districts.
During the design phase, the CxA for this project is a consultant of the DOR firm who is not on the
DOR team. During construction phase, the CxA for this project will be the same as the CxA for the
design phase.
2.1.3 Commissioning Team Members
Voice, office, cell, fax,
Team Member Co. & Contact Names email, address
Owner
USACE Project Manager
Installation Project Manager
Property Manager
__________________
USACE Project Engineer

General Site Contact
Mechanical
General Contractor
Site Supervisor
Site Coordinator
Commissioning Authority
Design
Construction
Architect
Mechanical Designer/Eng.
Electrical Designer/Eng.
Tenant Representative
Mechanical Contractor
HVAC Site Superv.
Piping Contractor
Sheet Metal Contractor

Voice, office, cell, fax,
Team Member Co. & Contact Names email, address
Electrical Contractor
Site Supervisor
TAB Contractor
Controls Contractor
Project Manager
Project Engineer
2.2 Roles and Responsibilities
2.2.1 General
General descriptions of the commissioning roles are as follows:
CxA: Coordinates the Cx process, develops and updates Cx Plan, assist, reviews
and approves incorporation of commissioning requirements in construction
documents. Writes or approves tests, oversees and documents performance
tests. Develops Commissioning Report.
PE: Facilitates the Cx process. Coordinates between GC and CxA. Approves test
plans and signs-off on performance. Performs construction observation,
approves O&M manuals (design-bid-build contracts).
GC: Facilitates the Cx process, ensures that Subs perform their responsibilities and
integrates Cx into the construction process and schedule
Subs: Demonstrate proper system performance
DOR: Develops and updates Basis of Design, incorporates commissioning
requirements in construction documents. Performs construction observation,
approves O&M manuals (design-build contracts) and assists in resolving
problems
PM: Facilitates and supports the Cx process
Mfr.: The equipment manufacturers and vendors provide documentation to facilitate
the commissioning work and perform contracted startup
2.2.2 Roles and Responsibilities

Detailed roles and responsibilities for this project’s commissioning tasks are indicated
in the following table:
Commissioning Tasks and Responsibilities
Responsibility of Task
Commissioning Plan
DA DOR CA PM IPM USER FM PE GC TAB CC MC EC Subs
Prepare and update
Coordinate input from
involved parties
Review and approve (incl
updates)
Provide to AE at start of
design
Provide to PE at start of
construction
Owners Project Requirements
Prepare and update
involved parties
Participate in
development/updates
updates)
Provide to AE at start of
design
Basis of Design Document
Prepare and update
involved parties
updates)
Commissioning Specifications
Prepare and update
updates)
Design Reviews for Commissioning
updates)
Prefunctional Checklists, Testing & Startup
DA DOR CA/CS PM IPM USER FM PE GC TAB CC MC EC Subs
Coordinate schedule
Prepare prefunctional
checklists
Review and approve
checklists (incl updates)
Execute prefunctional tests
Witness prefunctional tests
Verify prefunctional tests
and startup are complete
TAB
Coordinate schedule
Prepare and submit plan
Review plan
Ensure TAB/CC plan
coordination
Controls Checkout
Coordinate schedule
Prepare and submit plan
Review plan
Ensure TAB/CC plan
coordination
Functional Testing
Coordinate schedule
Develop functional test
procedures
Develop Testing Plan
Overview
Execute tests
Witness tests
Document test results
O&M Manuals & Warranties
Include requirements in
specifications
Review specifications
Prepare submittals
Review submittals
Assemble approved
submittals
Coordinate transfer to
Facility Manager
Owner Training
Include requirements in
specifications
Review specifications
Prepare training plan
submittals
Review submittals
Provide Training
Coordinate Training
Attendance
Verify training completion
Assemble training
documents
Facility Manager
Commissioning Report
Prepare report
Facility Manager
2.3 Communication Protocol, Coordination, Meetings and Management
2.3.1 Coordination of Commissioning During Design
The PM will be the coordinator of the commissioning activities during design. The CxA for the
design phase makes any necessary clarifications and changes to the original Commissioning Plan.
This final plan guides the commissioning work during design. Necessary adjustments to the DOR
fees relative to Commissioning Plan changes are negotiated.
2.3.1.1 Meetings
The PM will be the coordinator of the commissioning meetings during design. A kick-off meeting
will be held with the design team once the Cx Plan has been finalized. The meeting includes
reviewing the process and outlining each party’s responsibilities. This meeting may be combined
with a larger meeting agenda.
The CxA will attend all design review meetings that include an agenda item for commissioning.
2.3.2 Coordination of Commissioning During Construction

In general, the CxA coordinates the commissioning activities and reports to the DOR. The CxA’s
responsibilities, along with all other contractors’ commissioning responsibilities are detailed in the
specifications. The Specifications will take precedence over this Cx Plan. All members work together
to fulfill their contracted responsibilities and meet the objectives of the Contract Documents.
2.3.3 Communication Protocols
The following protocols will be used on this project.
Issue Protocol
For requests for information (RFI) or formal Design: The CxA goes through the PM.
documentation requests:
Construction: The CxA goes through the PE.
For minor or verbal information and clarifications: The CxA goes direct to the informed party.
For notifying contractors of deficiencies: Design: The CxA documents deficiencies through the PM.
Construction: The CxA documents deficiencies through the PE, but may
discuss deficiency issues with contractors prior to notifying the PE.
For scheduling functional tests or training: The CxA may provide input for and do some coordination of training and
testing, but does not do any scheduling.
For scheduling commissioning meetings: Design: The PM selects the date and schedules meetings.
Construction: The CxA selects the date and schedules through the GC.
For making a request for significant changes: The CxA has no authority to issue change orders.
For making small changes in specified The CxA may make small sequences of operations changes to improve
sequences of operations: efficiency or control or to correct deficiencies, through the responsible
contractor, but shall document the change and provide all changes of specified
sequences to the PE and A/E.
Subcontractors disagreeing with requests or Try and resolve with the CxA first. Then work through GC who will work with
interpretations by the CxA shall: CxA directly or through the PE to resolve the situation.
3. Commissioning Tasks
3.1 Overview of Commissioning Tasks

The following tasks comprise the commissioning work:
1. Develop Owner’s project requirements documentation.
2. Develop Basis of Design documentation
3. Perform a review of Design Development
5. Develop commissioning specifications for the construction bid documents
6. Perform a final review of the drawings and specifications
7. Prep

Meb Cof1 RFP and Specs

Încărcat de

Informații document

Titlu original

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Meb Cof1 RFP and Specs

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

US Army

Maneuver Enhancement Brigade (MEB)

The Ross Group Construction Corp

U.S. Army Engineer District, Fort Worth,

Point of Contact at Fort Polk, LA

[X] Safety and Health Plan [X] Weekly Progress Report

Fort Polk MEB COF

CONTRACT LINE ITEM SCHEDULE

Item Unit Line Item

0001 Construction of Access Road Complete

0002 Construction of the Company Operation

0003 Construction of all Exterior Work

0004 Operation and Maintenance Manuals 1 LS *** $

0005 Final Record As-Built Drawings 1 LS *** $

TOTAL BASE OFFER $

Fort Polk MEB COF

CONTRACT LINE ITEM SCHEDULE

Item Unit Line Item

0006 Formally change building from "LEED

TOTAL OFFER (BASE + OPTIONS) $

Contract Duration in Calendar Days

*Note: Contract duration for all work shall

Fort Polk MEB COF

CONTRACT LINE ITEM SCHEDULE

NOTE NO. 3. Not Used.

NOTE NO. 4. CONDITIONS GOVERNING EVALUATION OF OFFERS AND AWARD OF CONTRACTS:

NOTE NO. 6. Not Used.

NOTE NO. 7. Not Used

NOTE NO. 8. Not Used

NOTE NO. 9. Not Used

NOTE NO. 10. Not Used.

Fort Polk MEB COF

CONTRACT LINE ITEM SCHEDULE

NOTE NO. 13. 52.217-5 EVALUATION OF OPTIONS (JUL 1990)

NOTE NO. 17. ABBREVIATIONS

NOTE NO. 18. Not Used

END OF CLIN SCHEDULE

PART I – GENERAL INFORMATION

OFFEROR'S QUESTIONS AND COMMENTS

Contract Specialist – Primary POC

Phone: 817/886-1070 Fax: 817/886-6407 Email: robert.m.duran@usace.army.mil

Bidder Inquiry in ProjNet at http://www.projnet.org/projnet

The Solicitation Number is: W9126G-12-U-1002

Identify other method required: None

NOT be available after receipt of proposals.

2. DIRECTIONS FOR SUBMITTING PROPOSALS

Title the file(s) in the following format:

MARK PACKAGES AND CD DISC:

ADDRESS PACKAGES TO:

b. OFFERS BY TELEGRAPH. Offers received by telegraph, modifications thereto, or cancellations of

c. FACSIMILE OFFERS. Facsimile offers, modifications thereto, or cancellations of offers will or

d. E MAIL OFFERS. Offers received by e mail, modifications thereto, or cancellations of offers

3. PREPROPOSAL CONFERENCE / SITE VISIT

SITE VISIT: See Specification Section – Site Visit

PART II -- PROPOSAL INSTRUCTIONS

1. PROPOSAL SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS AND INSTRUCTIONS

a. REQUIREMENT FOR SEPARATE PRICE AND TECHNICAL PROPOSALS.

(3) Hard copies will not be submitted.

e. SPECIFIC INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE PRICE PROPOSAL

(3) Document File, CD and Package Labeling.

a. Example: [W9126G-12-U-1003_CompanyName_Price or Technical]

TAB CONTENTS OF THE PRICE PROPOSAL

#1 The Proposal Cover Sheet